1349 files changed, 58360 insertions, 22983 deletions

diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-class-dax b/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-class-dax
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2cb9fc5e8bd1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-class-dax
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+What:           /sys/class/dax/
+Date:           May, 2016
+KernelVersion:  v4.7
+Contact:        linux-nvdimm@lists.01.org
+Description:	Device DAX is the device-centric analogue of Filesystem
+		DAX (CONFIG_FS_DAX).  It allows memory ranges to be
+		allocated and mapped without need of an intervening file
+		system.  Device DAX is strict, precise and predictable.
+		Specifically this interface:
+
+		1/ Guarantees fault granularity with respect to a given
+		page size (pte, pmd, or pud) set at configuration time.
+
+		2/ Enforces deterministic behavior by being strict about
+		what fault scenarios are supported.
+
+		The /sys/class/dax/ interface enumerates all the
+		device-dax instances in the system. The ABI is
+		deprecated and will be removed after 2020. It is
+		replaced with the DAX bus interface /sys/bus/dax/ where
+		device-dax instances can be found under
+		/sys/bus/dax/devices/
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-batman-adv b/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-class-net-batman-adv
index 898106849e27..5bdbc8d40256 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-batman-adv
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-class-net-batman-adv
@@ -1,3 +1,5 @@
+This ABI is deprecated and will be removed after 2021. It is
+replaced with the batadv generic netlink family.
 
 What:           /sys/class/net/<iface>/batman-adv/elp_interval
 Date:           Feb 2014
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-mesh b/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-class-net-mesh
index c2b956d44a95..04c1a2932507 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-mesh
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-class-net-mesh
@@ -1,3 +1,5 @@
+This ABI is deprecated and will be removed after 2021. It is
+replaced with the batadv generic netlink family.
 
 What:           /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/aggregated_ogms
 Date:           May 2010
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-bus-nvmem b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-bus-nvmem
index 5923ab4620c5..9ffba8576f7b 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-bus-nvmem
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-bus-nvmem
@@ -6,6 +6,8 @@ Description:
 		This file allows user to read/write the raw NVMEM contents.
 		Permissions for write to this file depends on the nvmem
 		provider configuration.
+		Note: This file is only present if CONFIG_NVMEM_SYSFS
+		is enabled
 
 		ex:
 		hexdump /sys/bus/nvmem/devices/qfprom0/nvmem
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-bus-vmbus b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-bus-vmbus
index 3fed8fdb873d..8e8d167eca31 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-bus-vmbus
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-bus-vmbus
@@ -81,7 +81,9 @@ What:		/sys/bus/vmbus/devices/<UUID>/channels/<N>/latency
 Date:		September. 2017
 KernelVersion:	4.14
 Contact:	Stephen Hemminger <sthemmin@microsoft.com>
-Description:	Channel signaling latency
+Description:	Channel signaling latency. This file is available only for
+		performance critical channels (storage, network, etc.) that use
+		the monitor page mechanism.
 Users:		Debugging tools
 
 What:		/sys/bus/vmbus/devices/<UUID>/channels/<N>/out_mask
@@ -95,7 +97,9 @@ What:		/sys/bus/vmbus/devices/<UUID>/channels/<N>/pending
 Date:		September. 2017
 KernelVersion:	4.14
 Contact:	Stephen Hemminger <sthemmin@microsoft.com>
-Description:	Channel interrupt pending state
+Description:	Channel interrupt pending state. This file is available only for
+		performance critical channels (storage, network, etc.) that use
+		the monitor page mechanism.
 Users:		Debugging tools
 
 What:		/sys/bus/vmbus/devices/<UUID>/channels/<N>/read_avail
@@ -137,7 +141,9 @@ What:		/sys/bus/vmbus/devices/<UUID>/channels/<N>/monitor_id
 Date:		January. 2018
 KernelVersion:	4.16
 Contact:	Stephen Hemminger <sthemmin@microsoft.com>
-Description:	Monitor bit associated with channel
+Description:	Monitor bit associated with channel. This file is available only
+		for performance critical channels (storage, network, etc.) that
+		use the monitor page mechanism.
 Users:		Debugging tools and userspace drivers
 
 What:		/sys/bus/vmbus/devices/<UUID>/channels/<N>/ring
@@ -146,3 +152,36 @@ KernelVersion:	4.16
 Contact:	Stephen Hemminger <sthemmin@microsoft.com>
 Description:	Binary file created by uio_hv_generic for ring buffer
 Users:		Userspace drivers
+
+What:           /sys/bus/vmbus/devices/<UUID>/channels/<N>/intr_in_full
+Date:           February 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.0
+Contact:        Michael Kelley <mikelley@microsoft.com>
+Description:    Number of guest to host interrupts caused by the inbound ring
+		buffer transitioning from full to not full while a packet is
+		waiting for buffer space to become available
+Users:          Debugging tools
+
+What:           /sys/bus/vmbus/devices/<UUID>/channels/<N>/intr_out_empty
+Date:           February 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.0
+Contact:        Michael Kelley <mikelley@microsoft.com>
+Description:    Number of guest to host interrupts caused by the outbound ring
+		buffer transitioning from empty to not empty
+Users:          Debugging tools
+
+What:           /sys/bus/vmbus/devices/<UUID>/channels/<N>/out_full_first
+Date:           February 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.0
+Contact:        Michael Kelley <mikelley@microsoft.com>
+Description:    Number of write operations that were the first to encounter an
+		outbound ring buffer full condition
+Users:          Debugging tools
+
+What:           /sys/bus/vmbus/devices/<UUID>/channels/<N>/out_full_total
+Date:           February 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.0
+Contact:        Michael Kelley <mikelley@microsoft.com>
+Description:    Total number of write operations that encountered an outbound
+		ring buffer full condition
+Users:          Debugging tools
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-devices-node b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-devices-node
index 3e90e1f3bf0a..f7ce68fbd4b9 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-devices-node
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-devices-node
@@ -90,4 +90,89 @@ Date:		December 2009
 Contact:	Lee Schermerhorn <lee.schermerhorn@hp.com>
 Description:
 		The node's huge page size control/query attributes.
-		See Documentation/admin-guide/mm/hugetlbpage.rst
\ No newline at end of file
+		See Documentation/admin-guide/mm/hugetlbpage.rst
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/node/nodeX/accessY/
+Date:		December 2018
+Contact:	Keith Busch <keith.busch@intel.com>
+Description:
+		The node's relationship to other nodes for access class "Y".
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/node/nodeX/accessY/initiators/
+Date:		December 2018
+Contact:	Keith Busch <keith.busch@intel.com>
+Description:
+		The directory containing symlinks to memory initiator
+		nodes that have class "Y" access to this target node's
+		memory. CPUs and other memory initiators in nodes not in
+		the list accessing this node's memory may have different
+		performance.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/node/nodeX/accessY/targets/
+Date:		December 2018
+Contact:	Keith Busch <keith.busch@intel.com>
+Description:
+		The directory containing symlinks to memory targets that
+		this initiator node has class "Y" access.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/node/nodeX/accessY/initiators/read_bandwidth
+Date:		December 2018
+Contact:	Keith Busch <keith.busch@intel.com>
+Description:
+		This node's read bandwidth in MB/s when accessed from
+		nodes found in this access class's linked initiators.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/node/nodeX/accessY/initiators/read_latency
+Date:		December 2018
+Contact:	Keith Busch <keith.busch@intel.com>
+Description:
+		This node's read latency in nanoseconds when accessed
+		from nodes found in this access class's linked initiators.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/node/nodeX/accessY/initiators/write_bandwidth
+Date:		December 2018
+Contact:	Keith Busch <keith.busch@intel.com>
+Description:
+		This node's write bandwidth in MB/s when accessed from
+		found in this access class's linked initiators.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/node/nodeX/accessY/initiators/write_latency
+Date:		December 2018
+Contact:	Keith Busch <keith.busch@intel.com>
+Description:
+		This node's write latency in nanoseconds when access
+		from nodes found in this class's linked initiators.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/node/nodeX/memory_side_cache/indexY/
+Date:		December 2018
+Contact:	Keith Busch <keith.busch@intel.com>
+Description:
+		The directory containing attributes for the memory-side cache
+		level 'Y'.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/node/nodeX/memory_side_cache/indexY/indexing
+Date:		December 2018
+Contact:	Keith Busch <keith.busch@intel.com>
+Description:
+		The caches associativity indexing: 0 for direct mapped,
+		non-zero if indexed.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/node/nodeX/memory_side_cache/indexY/line_size
+Date:		December 2018
+Contact:	Keith Busch <keith.busch@intel.com>
+Description:
+		The number of bytes accessed from the next cache level on a
+		cache miss.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/node/nodeX/memory_side_cache/indexY/size
+Date:		December 2018
+Contact:	Keith Busch <keith.busch@intel.com>
+Description:
+		The size of this memory side cache in bytes.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/node/nodeX/memory_side_cache/indexY/write_policy
+Date:		December 2018
+Contact:	Keith Busch <keith.busch@intel.com>
+Description:
+		The cache write policy: 0 for write-back, 1 for write-through,
+		other or unknown.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-mlxreg-io b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-mlxreg-io
index 169fe08a649b..156319fc5b80 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-mlxreg-io
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-mlxreg-io
@@ -21,7 +21,19 @@ Description:	These files show with which CPLD versions have been burned
 		The files are read only.
 
 What:		/sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/
-							cpld3_version
+							fan_dir
+
+Date:		December 2018
+KernelVersion:	5.0
+Contact:	Vadim Pasternak <vadimpmellanox.com>
+Description:	This file shows the system fans direction:
+		forward direction - relevant bit is set 0;
+		reversed direction - relevant bit is set 1.
+
+		The files are read only.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/
+							jtag_enable
 
 Date:		November 2018
 KernelVersion:	5.0
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/debugfs-driver-habanalabs b/Documentation/ABI/testing/debugfs-driver-habanalabs
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2f5b80be07a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/debugfs-driver-habanalabs
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+What:           /sys/kernel/debug/habanalabs/hl<n>/addr
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Sets the device address to be used for read or write through
+                PCI bar. The acceptable value is a string that starts with "0x"
+
+What:           /sys/kernel/debug/habanalabs/hl<n>/command_buffers
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Displays a list with information about the currently allocated
+                command buffers
+
+What:           /sys/kernel/debug/habanalabs/hl<n>/command_submission
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Displays a list with information about the currently active
+                command submissions
+
+What:           /sys/kernel/debug/habanalabs/hl<n>/command_submission_jobs
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Displays a list with detailed information about each JOB (CB) of
+                each active command submission
+
+What:           /sys/kernel/debug/habanalabs/hl<n>/data32
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Allows the root user to read or write directly through the
+                device's PCI bar. Writing to this file generates a write
+                transaction while reading from the file generates a read
+                transcation. This custom interface is needed (instead of using
+                the generic Linux user-space PCI mapping) because the DDR bar
+                is very small compared to the DDR memory and only the driver can
+                move the bar before and after the transaction
+
+What:           /sys/kernel/debug/habanalabs/hl<n>/device
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Enables the root user to set the device to specific state.
+                Valid values are "disable", "enable", "suspend", "resume".
+                User can read this property to see the valid values
+
+What:           /sys/kernel/debug/habanalabs/hl<n>/i2c_addr
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Sets I2C device address for I2C transaction that is generated
+                by the device's CPU
+
+What:           /sys/kernel/debug/habanalabs/hl<n>/i2c_bus
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Sets I2C bus address for I2C transaction that is generated by
+                the device's CPU
+
+What:           /sys/kernel/debug/habanalabs/hl<n>/i2c_data
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Triggers an I2C transaction that is generated by the device's
+                CPU. Writing to this file generates a write transaction while
+                reading from the file generates a read transcation
+
+What:           /sys/kernel/debug/habanalabs/hl<n>/i2c_reg
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Sets I2C register id for I2C transaction that is generated by
+                the device's CPU
+
+What:           /sys/kernel/debug/habanalabs/hl<n>/led0
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Sets the state of the first S/W led on the device
+
+What:           /sys/kernel/debug/habanalabs/hl<n>/led1
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Sets the state of the second S/W led on the device
+
+What:           /sys/kernel/debug/habanalabs/hl<n>/led2
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Sets the state of the third S/W led on the device
+
+What:           /sys/kernel/debug/habanalabs/hl<n>/mmu
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Displays the hop values and physical address for a given ASID
+                and virtual address. The user should write the ASID and VA into
+                the file and then read the file to get the result.
+                e.g. to display info about VA 0x1000 for ASID 1 you need to do:
+                echo "1 0x1000" > /sys/kernel/debug/habanalabs/hl0/mmu
+
+What:           /sys/kernel/debug/habanalabs/hl<n>/set_power_state
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Sets the PCI power state. Valid values are "1" for D0 and "2"
+                for D3Hot
+
+What:           /sys/kernel/debug/habanalabs/hl<n>/userptr
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Displays a list with information about the currently user
+                pointers (user virtual addresses) that are pinned and mapped
+                to DMA addresses
+
+What:           /sys/kernel/debug/habanalabs/hl<n>/vm
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Displays a list with information about all the active virtual
+                address mappings per ASID
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/debugfs-wilco-ec b/Documentation/ABI/testing/debugfs-wilco-ec
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..73a5a66ddca6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/debugfs-wilco-ec
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+What:		/sys/kernel/debug/wilco_ec/h1_gpio
+Date:		April 2019
+KernelVersion:	5.2
+Description:
+		As part of Chrome OS's FAFT (Fully Automated Firmware Testing)
+		tests, we need to ensure that the H1 chip is properly setting
+		some GPIO lines. The h1_gpio attribute exposes the state
+		of the lines:
+		- ENTRY_TO_FACT_MODE in BIT(0)
+		- SPI_CHROME_SEL in BIT(1)
+
+		Output will formatted with "0x%02x\n".
+
+What:		/sys/kernel/debug/wilco_ec/raw
+Date:		January 2019
+KernelVersion:	5.1
+Description:
+		Write and read raw mailbox commands to the EC.
+
+		You can write a hexadecimal sentence to raw, and that series of
+		bytes will be sent to the EC. Then, you can read the bytes of
+		response by reading from raw.
+
+		For writing, bytes 0-1 indicate the message type, one of enum
+		wilco_ec_msg_type. Byte 2+ consist of the data passed in the
+		request, starting at MBOX[0]
+
+		At least three bytes are required for writing, two for the type
+		and at least a single byte of data. Only the first
+		EC_MAILBOX_DATA_SIZE bytes of MBOX will be used.
+
+		Example:
+		// Request EC info type 3 (EC firmware build date)
+		// Corresponds with sending type 0x00f0 with
+		// MBOX = [38, 00, 03, 00]
+		$ echo 00 f0 38 00 03 00 > /sys/kernel/debug/wilco_ec/raw
+		// View the result. The decoded ASCII result "12/21/18" is
+		// included after the raw hex.
+		// Corresponds with MBOX = [00, 00, 31, 32, 2f, 32, 31, 38, ...]
+		$ cat /sys/kernel/debug/wilco_ec/raw
+		00 00 31 32 2f 32 31 2f 31 38 00 38 00 01 00 2f 00  ..12/21/18.8...
+
+		Note that the first 32 bytes of the received MBOX[] will be
+		printed, even if some of the data is junk. It is up to you to
+		know how many of the first bytes of data are the actual
+		response.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-counter b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-counter
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..566bd99fe0a5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-counter
@@ -0,0 +1,230 @@
+What:		/sys/bus/counter/devices/counterX/countY/count
+KernelVersion:	5.2
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Count data of Count Y represented as a string.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/counter/devices/counterX/countY/ceiling
+KernelVersion:	5.2
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Count value ceiling for Count Y. This is the upper limit for the
+		respective counter.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/counter/devices/counterX/countY/floor
+KernelVersion:	5.2
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Count value floor for Count Y. This is the lower limit for the
+		respective counter.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/counter/devices/counterX/countY/count_mode
+KernelVersion:	5.2
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Count mode for channel Y. The ceiling and floor values for
+		Count Y are used by the count mode where required. The following
+		count modes are available:
+
+		normal:
+			Counting is continuous in either direction.
+
+		range limit:
+			An upper or lower limit is set, mimicking limit switches
+			in the mechanical counterpart. The upper limit is set to
+			the Count Y ceiling value, while the lower limit is set
+			to the Count Y floor value. The counter freezes at
+			count = ceiling when counting up, and at count = floor
+			when counting down. At either of these limits, the
+			counting is resumed only when the count direction is
+			reversed.
+
+		non-recycle:
+			The counter is disabled whenever a counter overflow or
+			underflow takes place. The counter is re-enabled when a
+			new count value is loaded to the counter via a preset
+			operation or direct write.
+
+		modulo-n:
+			A count value boundary is set between the Count Y floor
+			value and the Count Y ceiling value. The counter is
+			reset to the Count Y floor value at count = ceiling when
+			counting up, while the counter is set to the Count Y
+			ceiling value at count = floor when counting down; the
+			counter does not freeze at the boundary points, but
+			counts continuously throughout.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/counter/devices/counterX/countY/count_mode_available
+What:		/sys/bus/counter/devices/counterX/countY/error_noise_available
+What:		/sys/bus/counter/devices/counterX/countY/function_available
+What:		/sys/bus/counter/devices/counterX/countY/signalZ_action_available
+KernelVersion:	5.2
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Discrete set of available values for the respective Count Y
+		configuration are listed in this file. Values are delimited by
+		newline characters.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/counter/devices/counterX/countY/direction
+KernelVersion:	5.2
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Read-only attribute that indicates the count direction of Count
+		Y. Two count directions are available: forward and backward.
+
+		Some counter devices are able to determine the direction of
+		their counting. For example, quadrature encoding counters can
+		determine the direction of movement by evaluating the leading
+		phase of the respective A and B quadrature encoding signals.
+		This attribute exposes such count directions.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/counter/devices/counterX/countY/enable
+KernelVersion:	5.2
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Whether channel Y counter is enabled. Valid attribute values are
+		boolean.
+
+		This attribute is intended to serve as a pause/unpause mechanism
+		for Count Y. Suppose a counter device is used to count the total
+		movement of a conveyor belt: this attribute allows an operator
+		to temporarily pause the counter, service the conveyor belt,
+		and then finally unpause the counter to continue where it had
+		left off.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/counter/devices/counterX/countY/error_noise
+KernelVersion:	5.2
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Read-only attribute that indicates whether excessive noise is
+		present at the channel Y counter inputs.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/counter/devices/counterX/countY/function
+KernelVersion:	5.2
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Count function mode of Count Y; count function evaluation is
+		triggered by conditions specified by the Count Y signalZ_action
+		attributes. The following count functions are available:
+
+		increase:
+			Accumulated count is incremented.
+
+		decrease:
+			Accumulated count is decremented.
+
+		pulse-direction:
+			Rising edges on signal A updates the respective count.
+			The input level of signal B determines direction.
+
+		quadrature x1 a:
+			If direction is forward, rising edges on quadrature pair
+			signal A updates the respective count; if the direction
+			is backward, falling edges on quadrature pair signal A
+			updates the respective count. Quadrature encoding
+			determines the direction.
+
+		quadrature x1 b:
+			If direction is forward, rising edges on quadrature pair
+			signal B updates the respective count; if the direction
+			is backward, falling edges on quadrature pair signal B
+			updates the respective count. Quadrature encoding
+			determines the direction.
+
+		quadrature x2 a:
+			Any state transition on quadrature pair signal A updates
+			the respective count. Quadrature encoding determines the
+			direction.
+
+		quadrature x2 b:
+			Any state transition on quadrature pair signal B updates
+			the respective count. Quadrature encoding determines the
+			direction.
+
+		quadrature x4:
+			Any state transition on either quadrature pair signals
+			updates	the respective count. Quadrature encoding
+			determines the direction.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/counter/devices/counterX/countY/name
+KernelVersion:	5.2
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Read-only attribute that indicates the device-specific name of
+		Count Y. If possible, this should match the name of the
+		respective channel as it appears in the device datasheet.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/counter/devices/counterX/countY/preset
+KernelVersion:	5.2
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		If the counter device supports preset registers -- registers
+		used to load counter channels to a set count upon device-defined
+		preset operation trigger events -- the preset count for channel
+		Y is provided by this attribute.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/counter/devices/counterX/countY/preset_enable
+KernelVersion:	5.2
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Whether channel Y counter preset operation is enabled. Valid
+		attribute values are boolean.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/counter/devices/counterX/countY/signalZ_action
+KernelVersion:	5.2
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Action mode of Count Y for Signal Z. This attribute indicates
+		the condition of Signal Z that triggers the count function
+		evaluation for Count Y. The following action modes are
+		available:
+
+		none:
+			Signal does not trigger the count function. In
+			Pulse-Direction count function mode, this Signal is
+			evaluated as Direction.
+
+		rising edge:
+			Low state transitions to high state.
+
+		falling edge:
+			High state transitions to low state.
+
+		both edges:
+			Any state transition.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/counter/devices/counterX/name
+KernelVersion:	5.2
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Read-only attribute that indicates the device-specific name of
+		the Counter. This should match the name of the device as it
+		appears in its respective datasheet.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/counter/devices/counterX/num_counts
+KernelVersion:	5.2
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Read-only attribute that indicates the total number of Counts
+		belonging to the Counter.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/counter/devices/counterX/num_signals
+KernelVersion:	5.2
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Read-only attribute that indicates the total number of Signals
+		belonging to the Counter.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/counter/devices/counterX/signalY/signal
+KernelVersion:	5.2
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Signal data of Signal Y represented as a string.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/counter/devices/counterX/signalY/name
+KernelVersion:	5.2
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Read-only attribute that indicates the device-specific name of
+		Signal Y. If possible, this should match the name of the
+		respective signal as it appears in the device datasheet.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-counter-104-quad-8 b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-counter-104-quad-8
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..46b1f33b2fce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-counter-104-quad-8
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+What:		/sys/bus/counter/devices/counterX/signalY/index_polarity
+KernelVersion:	5.2
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Active level of index input Signal Y; irrelevant in
+		non-synchronous load mode.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/counter/devices/counterX/signalY/index_polarity_available
+What:		/sys/bus/counter/devices/counterX/signalY/synchronous_mode_available
+KernelVersion:	5.2
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Discrete set of available values for the respective Signal Y
+		configuration are listed in this file.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/counter/devices/counterX/signalY/synchronous_mode
+KernelVersion:	5.2
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Configure the counter associated with Signal Y for
+		non-synchronous or synchronous load mode. Synchronous load mode
+		cannot be selected in non-quadrature (Pulse-Direction) clock
+		mode.
+
+		non-synchronous:
+			A logic low level is the active level at this index
+			input. The index function (as enabled via preset_enable)
+			is performed directly on the active level of the index
+			input.
+
+		synchronous:
+			Intended for interfacing with encoder Index output in
+			quadrature clock mode. The active level is configured
+			via index_polarity. The index function (as enabled via
+			preset_enable) is performed synchronously with the
+			quadrature clock on the active level of the index input.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-counter-ftm-quaddec b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-counter-ftm-quaddec
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7d2e7b363467
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-counter-ftm-quaddec
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+What:		/sys/bus/counter/devices/counterX/countY/prescaler_available
+KernelVersion:	5.2
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Discrete set of available values for the respective Count Y
+		configuration are listed in this file. Values are delimited by
+		newline characters.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/counter/devices/counterX/countY/prescaler
+KernelVersion:	5.2
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Configure the prescaler value associated with Count Y.
+		On the FlexTimer, the counter clock source passes through a
+		prescaler (i.e. a counter). This acts like a clock
+		divider.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-i2c-devices-pca954x b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-i2c-devices-pca954x
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0b0de8cd0d13
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-i2c-devices-pca954x
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+What:		/sys/bus/i2c/.../idle_state
+Date:		January 2019
+KernelVersion:	5.2
+Contact:	Robert Shearman <robert.shearman@att.com>
+Description:
+		Value that exists only for mux devices that can be
+		written to control the behaviour of the multiplexer on
+		idle. Possible values:
+		-2 - disconnect on idle, i.e. deselect the last used
+		     channel, which is useful when there is a device
+		     with an address that conflicts with another
+		     device on another mux on the same parent bus.
+		-1 - leave the mux as-is, which is the most optimal
+		     setting in terms of I2C operations and is the
+		     default mode.
+		0..<nchans> - set the mux to a predetermined channel,
+		     which is useful if there is one channel that is
+		     used almost always, and you want to reduce the
+		     latency for normal operations after rare
+		     transactions on other channels
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio
index 8127a08e366d..6aef7dbbde44 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio
@@ -1554,6 +1554,10 @@ What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_concentration_raw
 What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_concentrationX_raw
 What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_concentration_co2_raw
 What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_concentrationX_co2_raw
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_concentration_ethanol_raw
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_concentrationX_ethanol_raw
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_concentration_h2_raw
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_concentrationX_h2_raw
 What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_concentration_voc_raw
 What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_concentrationX_voc_raw
 KernelVersion:	4.3
@@ -1652,6 +1656,8 @@ What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_countY_raw
 KernelVersion:	4.10
 Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
+		This interface is deprecated; please use the Counter subsystem.
+
 		Raw counter device counts from channel Y. For quadrature
 		counters, multiplication by an available [Y]_scale results in
 		the counts of a single quadrature signal phase from channel Y.
@@ -1660,6 +1666,8 @@ What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_indexY_raw
 KernelVersion:	4.10
 Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
+		This interface is deprecated; please use the Counter subsystem.
+
 		Raw counter device index value from channel Y. This attribute
 		provides an absolute positional reference (e.g. a pulse once per
 		revolution) which may be used to home positional systems as
@@ -1669,6 +1677,8 @@ What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_count_count_direction_available
 KernelVersion:	4.12
 Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
+		This interface is deprecated; please use the Counter subsystem.
+
 		A list of possible counting directions which are:
 		- "up"	: counter device is increasing.
 		- "down": counter device is decreasing.
@@ -1677,6 +1687,8 @@ What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_countY_count_direction
 KernelVersion:	4.12
 Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
+		This interface is deprecated; please use the Counter subsystem.
+
 		Raw counter device counters direction for channel Y.
 
 What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_phaseY_raw
@@ -1684,4 +1696,19 @@ KernelVersion:	4.18
 Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
 		Raw (unscaled) phase difference reading from channel Y
-		that can be processed to radians.
\ No newline at end of file
+		that can be processed to radians.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_massconcentration_pm1_input
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_massconcentrationY_pm1_input
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_massconcentration_pm2p5_input
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_massconcentrationY_pm2p5_input
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_massconcentration_pm4_input
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_massconcentrationY_pm4_input
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_massconcentration_pm10_input
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_massconcentrationY_pm10_input
+KernelVersion:	4.22
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Mass concentration reading of particulate matter in ug / m3.
+		pmX consists of particles with aerodynamic diameter less or
+		equal to X micrometers.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-counter-104-quad-8 b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-counter-104-quad-8
index 7fac2c268d9a..bac3d0d48b7b 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-counter-104-quad-8
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-counter-104-quad-8
@@ -6,6 +6,8 @@ What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_index_synchronous_mode_available
 KernelVersion:	4.10
 Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
+		This interface is deprecated; please use the Counter subsystem.
+
 		Discrete set of available values for the respective counter
 		configuration are listed in this file.
 
@@ -13,6 +15,8 @@ What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_countY_count_mode
 KernelVersion:	4.10
 Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
+		This interface is deprecated; please use the Counter subsystem.
+
 		Count mode for channel Y. Four count modes are available:
 		normal, range limit, non-recycle, and modulo-n. The preset value
 		for channel Y is used by the count mode where required.
@@ -47,6 +51,8 @@ What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_countY_noise_error
 KernelVersion:	4.10
 Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
+		This interface is deprecated; please use the Counter subsystem.
+
 		Read-only attribute that indicates whether excessive noise is
 		present at the channel Y count inputs in quadrature clock mode;
 		irrelevant in non-quadrature clock mode.
@@ -55,6 +61,8 @@ What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_countY_preset
 KernelVersion:	4.10
 Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
+		This interface is deprecated; please use the Counter subsystem.
+
 		If the counter device supports preset registers, the preset
 		count for channel Y is provided by this attribute.
 
@@ -62,6 +70,8 @@ What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_countY_quadrature_mode
 KernelVersion:	4.10
 Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
+		This interface is deprecated; please use the Counter subsystem.
+
 		Configure channel Y counter for non-quadrature or quadrature
 		clock mode. Selecting non-quadrature clock mode will disable
 		synchronous load mode. In quadrature clock mode, the channel Y
@@ -83,6 +93,8 @@ What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_countY_set_to_preset_on_index
 KernelVersion:	4.10
 Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
+		This interface is deprecated; please use the Counter subsystem.
+
 		Whether to set channel Y counter with channel Y preset value
 		when channel Y index input is active, or continuously count.
 		Valid attribute values are boolean.
@@ -91,6 +103,8 @@ What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_indexY_index_polarity
 KernelVersion:	4.10
 Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
+		This interface is deprecated; please use the Counter subsystem.
+
 		Active level of channel Y index input; irrelevant in
 		non-synchronous load mode.
 
@@ -98,6 +112,8 @@ What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_indexY_synchronous_mode
 KernelVersion:	4.10
 Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
+		This interface is deprecated; please use the Counter subsystem.
+
 		Configure channel Y counter for non-synchronous or synchronous
 		load mode. Synchronous load mode cannot be selected in
 		non-quadrature clock mode.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-impedance-analyzer-ad5933 b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-impedance-analyzer-ad5933
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0e86747c67f8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-impedance-analyzer-ad5933
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/out_altvoltageY_frequency_start
+Date:		March 2019
+KernelVersion:	3.1.0
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Frequency sweep start frequency in Hz.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/out_altvoltageY_frequency_increment
+Date:		March 2019
+KernelVersion:	3.1.0
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Frequency increment in Hz (step size) between consecutive
+		frequency points along the sweep.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/out_altvoltageY_frequency_points
+Date:		March 2019
+KernelVersion:	3.1.0
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Number of frequency points (steps) in the frequency sweep.
+		This value, in conjunction with the
+		out_altvoltageY_frequency_start and the
+		out_altvoltageY_frequency_increment, determines the frequency
+		sweep range for the sweep operation.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/out_altvoltageY_settling_cycles
+Date:		March 2019
+KernelVersion:	3.1.0
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Number of output excitation cycles (settling time cycles)
+		that are allowed to pass through the unknown impedance,
+		after each frequency increment, and before the ADC is triggered
+		to perform a conversion sequence of the response signal.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-sps30 b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-sps30
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..06e1c272537b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-sps30
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/start_cleaning
+Date:		December 2018
+KernelVersion:	5.0
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Writing 1 starts sensor self cleaning. Internal fan accelerates
+		to its maximum speed and keeps spinning for about 10 seconds in
+		order to blow out accumulated dust.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/cleaning_period
+Date:		January 2019
+KernelVersion:	5.1
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Sensor is capable of triggering self cleaning periodically.
+		Period can be changed by writing a new value here. Upon reading
+		the current one is returned. Units are seconds.
+
+		Writing 0 disables periodical self cleaning entirely.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/cleaning_period_available
+Date:		January 2019
+KernelVersion:	5.1
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		The range of available values in seconds represented as the
+		minimum value, the step and the maximum value, all enclosed in
+		square brackets.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-temperature-max31856 b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-temperature-max31856
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3b3509a3ef2f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-temperature-max31856
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/fault_oc
+KernelVersion:	5.1
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Open-circuit fault. The detection of open-circuit faults,
+		such as those caused by broken thermocouple wires.
+		Reading returns either '1' or '0'.
+		'1' = An open circuit such as broken thermocouple wires
+		      has been detected.
+		'0' = No open circuit or broken thermocouple wires are detected
+
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/fault_ovuv
+KernelVersion:	5.1
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Overvoltage or Undervoltage Input Fault. The internal circuitry
+		is protected from excessive voltages applied to the thermocouple
+		cables by integrated MOSFETs at the T+ and T- inputs, and the
+		BIAS output. These MOSFETs turn off when the input voltage is
+		negative or greater than VDD.
+		Reading returns either '1' or '0'.
+		'1' = The input voltage is negative or greater than VDD.
+		'0' = The input voltage is positive and less than VDD (normal
+		state).
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-intel_th-devices-msc b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-intel_th-devices-msc
index b940c5d91cf7..f54ae244f3f1 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-intel_th-devices-msc
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-intel_th-devices-msc
@@ -30,4 +30,12 @@ Description:	(RW) Configure MSC buffer size for "single" or "multi" modes.
 		there are no active users and tracing is not enabled) and then
 		allocates a new one.
 
+What:		/sys/bus/intel_th/devices/<intel_th_id>-msc<msc-id>/win_switch
+Date:		May 2019
+KernelVersion:	5.2
+Contact:	Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com>
+Description:	(RW) Trigger window switch for the MSC's buffer, in
+		multi-window mode. In "multi" mode, accepts writes of "1", thereby
+		triggering a window switch for the buffer. Returns an error in any
+		other operating mode or attempts to write something other than "1".
 
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-intel_th-output-devices b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-intel_th-output-devices
index 4d48a9451866..d1f667104944 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-intel_th-output-devices
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-intel_th-output-devices
@@ -3,11 +3,13 @@ Date:		June 2015
 KernelVersion:	4.3
 Contact:	Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com>
 Description:	(RW) Writes of 1 or 0 enable or disable trace output to this
-		output device. Reads return current status.
+		output device. Reads return current status. Requires that the
+		correstponding output port driver be loaded.
 
 What:		/sys/bus/intel_th/devices/<intel_th_id>-msc<msc-id>/port
 Date:		June 2015
 KernelVersion:	4.3
 Contact:	Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com>
 Description:	(RO) Port number, corresponding to this output device on the
-		switch (GTH).
+		switch (GTH) or "unassigned" if the corresponding output
+		port driver is not loaded.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-mdio b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-mdio
deleted file mode 100644
index 491baaf4285f..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-mdio
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,29 +0,0 @@
-What:		/sys/bus/mdio_bus/devices/.../phy_id
-Date:		November 2012
-KernelVersion:	3.8
-Contact:	netdev@vger.kernel.org
-Description:
-		This attribute contains the 32-bit PHY Identifier as reported
-		by the device during bus enumeration, encoded in hexadecimal.
-		This ID is used to match the device with the appropriate
-		driver.
-
-What:		/sys/bus/mdio_bus/devices/.../phy_interface
-Date:		February 2014
-KernelVersion:	3.15
-Contact:	netdev@vger.kernel.org
-Description:
-		This attribute contains the PHY interface as configured by the
-		Ethernet driver during bus enumeration, encoded in string.
-		This interface mode is used to configure the Ethernet MAC with the
-		appropriate mode for its data lines to the PHY hardware.
-
-What:		/sys/bus/mdio_bus/devices/.../phy_has_fixups
-Date:		February 2014
-KernelVersion:	3.15
-Contact:	netdev@vger.kernel.org
-Description:
-		This attribute contains the boolean value whether a given PHY
-		device has had any "fixup" workaround running on it, encoded as
-		a boolean. This information is provided to help troubleshooting
-		PHY configurations.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-siox b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-siox
index fed7c3765a4e..c2a403f20b90 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-siox
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-siox
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 What:		/sys/bus/siox/devices/siox-X/active
 KernelVersion:	4.16
-Contact:	Gavin Schenk <g.schenk@eckelmann.de>, Uwe Kleine-König <u.kleine-koenig@pengutronix.de>
+Contact:	Thorsten Scherer <t.scherer@eckelmann.de>, Uwe Kleine-König <u.kleine-koenig@pengutronix.de>
 Description:
 		On reading represents the current state of the bus. If it
 		contains a "0" the bus is stopped and connected devices are
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ Description:
 
 What:		/sys/bus/siox/devices/siox-X/device_add
 KernelVersion:	4.16
-Contact:	Gavin Schenk <g.schenk@eckelmann.de>, Uwe Kleine-König <u.kleine-koenig@pengutronix.de>
+Contact:	Thorsten Scherer <t.scherer@eckelmann.de>, Uwe Kleine-König <u.kleine-koenig@pengutronix.de>
 Description:
 		Write-only file. Write
 
@@ -27,13 +27,13 @@ Description:
 
 What:		/sys/bus/siox/devices/siox-X/device_remove
 KernelVersion:	4.16
-Contact:	Gavin Schenk <g.schenk@eckelmann.de>, Uwe Kleine-König <u.kleine-koenig@pengutronix.de>
+Contact:	Thorsten Scherer <t.scherer@eckelmann.de>, Uwe Kleine-König <u.kleine-koenig@pengutronix.de>
 Description:
 		Write-only file. A single write removes the last device in the siox chain.
 
 What:		/sys/bus/siox/devices/siox-X/poll_interval_ns
 KernelVersion:	4.16
-Contact:	Gavin Schenk <g.schenk@eckelmann.de>, Uwe Kleine-König <u.kleine-koenig@pengutronix.de>
+Contact:	Thorsten Scherer <t.scherer@eckelmann.de>, Uwe Kleine-König <u.kleine-koenig@pengutronix.de>
 Description:
 		Defines the interval between two poll cycles in nano seconds.
 		Note this is rounded to jiffies on writing. On reading the current value
@@ -41,33 +41,33 @@ Description:
 
 What:		/sys/bus/siox/devices/siox-X-Y/connected
 KernelVersion:	4.16
-Contact:	Gavin Schenk <g.schenk@eckelmann.de>, Uwe Kleine-König <u.kleine-koenig@pengutronix.de>
+Contact:	Thorsten Scherer <t.scherer@eckelmann.de>, Uwe Kleine-König <u.kleine-koenig@pengutronix.de>
 Description:
 		Read-only value. "0" means the Yth device on siox bus X isn't "connected" i.e.
 		communication with it is not ensured. "1" signals a working connection.
 
 What:		/sys/bus/siox/devices/siox-X-Y/inbytes
 KernelVersion:	4.16
-Contact:	Gavin Schenk <g.schenk@eckelmann.de>, Uwe Kleine-König <u.kleine-koenig@pengutronix.de>
+Contact:	Thorsten Scherer <t.scherer@eckelmann.de>, Uwe Kleine-König <u.kleine-koenig@pengutronix.de>
 Description:
 		Read-only value reporting the inbytes value provided to siox-X/device_add
 
 What:		/sys/bus/siox/devices/siox-X-Y/status_errors
 KernelVersion:	4.16
-Contact:	Gavin Schenk <g.schenk@eckelmann.de>, Uwe Kleine-König <u.kleine-koenig@pengutronix.de>
+Contact:	Thorsten Scherer <t.scherer@eckelmann.de>, Uwe Kleine-König <u.kleine-koenig@pengutronix.de>
 Description:
 		Counts the number of time intervals when the read status byte doesn't yield the
 		expected value.
 
 What:		/sys/bus/siox/devices/siox-X-Y/type
 KernelVersion:	4.16
-Contact:	Gavin Schenk <g.schenk@eckelmann.de>, Uwe Kleine-König <u.kleine-koenig@pengutronix.de>
+Contact:	Thorsten Scherer <t.scherer@eckelmann.de>, Uwe Kleine-König <u.kleine-koenig@pengutronix.de>
 Description:
 		Read-only value reporting the type value provided to siox-X/device_add.
 
 What:		/sys/bus/siox/devices/siox-X-Y/watchdog
 KernelVersion:	4.16
-Contact:	Gavin Schenk <g.schenk@eckelmann.de>, Uwe Kleine-König <u.kleine-koenig@pengutronix.de>
+Contact:	Thorsten Scherer <t.scherer@eckelmann.de>, Uwe Kleine-König <u.kleine-koenig@pengutronix.de>
 Description:
 		Read-only value reporting if the watchdog of the siox device is
 		active. "0" means the watchdog is not active and the device is expected to
@@ -75,13 +75,13 @@ Description:
 
 What:		/sys/bus/siox/devices/siox-X-Y/watchdog_errors
 KernelVersion:	4.16
-Contact:	Gavin Schenk <g.schenk@eckelmann.de>, Uwe Kleine-König <u.kleine-koenig@pengutronix.de>
+Contact:	Thorsten Scherer <t.scherer@eckelmann.de>, Uwe Kleine-König <u.kleine-koenig@pengutronix.de>
 Description:
 		Read-only value reporting the number to time intervals when the
 		watchdog was active.
 
 What:		/sys/bus/siox/devices/siox-X-Y/outbytes
 KernelVersion:	4.16
-Contact:	Gavin Schenk <g.schenk@eckelmann.de>, Uwe Kleine-König <u.kleine-koenig@pengutronix.de>
+Contact:	Thorsten Scherer <t.scherer@eckelmann.de>, Uwe Kleine-König <u.kleine-koenig@pengutronix.de>
 Description:
 		Read-only value reporting the outbytes value provided to siox-X/device_add.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb
index 559baa5c418c..614d216dff1d 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb
@@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ Contact:	Lan Tianyu <tianyu.lan@intel.com>
 Description:
 		Some platforms provide usb port connect types through ACPI.
 		This attribute is to expose these information to user space.
-		The file will read "hotplug", "wired" and "not used" if the
+		The file will read "hotplug", "hardwired" and "not used" if the
 		information is available, and "unknown" otherwise.
 
 What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/.../(hub interface)/portX/location
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-chromeos b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-chromeos
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5819699d66ec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-chromeos
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+What:		/sys/class/chromeos/<ec-device-name>/flashinfo
+Date:		August 2015
+KernelVersion:	4.2
+Description:
+		Show the EC flash information.
+
+What:		/sys/class/chromeos/<ec-device-name>/kb_wake_angle
+Date:		March 2018
+KernelVersion:	4.17
+Description:
+		Control the keyboard wake lid angle. Values are between
+		0 and 360. This file will also show the keyboard wake lid
+		angle by querying the hardware.
+
+What:		/sys/class/chromeos/<ec-device-name>/reboot
+Date:		August 2015
+KernelVersion:	4.2
+Description:
+		Tell the EC to reboot in various ways. Options are:
+		"cancel": Cancel a pending reboot.
+		"ro": Jump to RO without rebooting.
+		"rw": Jump to RW without rebooting.
+		"cold": Cold reboot.
+		"disable-jump": Disable jump until next reboot.
+		"hibernate": Hibernate the EC.
+		"at-shutdown": Reboot after an AP shutdown.
+
+What:		/sys/class/chromeos/<ec-device-name>/version
+Date:		August 2015
+KernelVersion:	4.2
+Description:
+		Show the information about the EC software and hardware.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-chromeos-driver-cros-ec-lightbar b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-chromeos-driver-cros-ec-lightbar
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..57a037791403
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-chromeos-driver-cros-ec-lightbar
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+What:		/sys/class/chromeos/<ec-device-name>/lightbar/brightness
+Date:		August 2015
+KernelVersion:	4.2
+Description:
+		Writing to this file adjusts the overall brightness of
+		the lightbar, separate from any color intensity. The
+		valid range is 0 (off) to 255 (maximum brightness).
+
+What:		/sys/class/chromeos/<ec-device-name>/lightbar/interval_msec
+Date:		August 2015
+KernelVersion:	4.2
+Description:
+		The lightbar is controlled by an embedded controller (EC),
+		which also manages the keyboard, battery charging, fans,
+		and other system hardware. To prevent unprivileged users
+		from interfering with the other EC functions, the rate at
+		which the lightbar control files can be read or written is
+		limited.
+
+		Reading this file will return the number of milliseconds
+		that must elapse between accessing any of the lightbar
+		functions through this interface. Going faster will simply
+		block until the necessary interval has lapsed. The interval
+		applies uniformly to all accesses of any kind by any user.
+
+What:		/sys/class/chromeos/<ec-device-name>/lightbar/led_rgb
+Date:		August 2015
+KernelVersion:	4.2
+Description:
+		This allows you to control each LED segment. If the
+		lightbar is already running one of the automatic
+		sequences, you probably won’t see anything change because
+		your color setting will be almost immediately replaced.
+		To get useful results, you should stop the lightbar
+		sequence first.
+
+		The values written to this file are sets of four integers,
+		indicating LED, RED, GREEN, BLUE. The LED number is 0 to 3
+		to select a single segment, or 4 to set all four segments
+		to the same value at once. The RED, GREEN, and BLUE
+		numbers should be in the range 0 (off) to 255 (maximum).
+		You can update more than one segment at a time by writing
+		more than one set of four integers.
+
+What:		/sys/class/chromeos/<ec-device-name>/lightbar/program
+Date:		August 2015
+KernelVersion:	4.2
+Description:
+		This allows you to upload and run custom lightbar sequences.
+
+What:		/sys/class/chromeos/<ec-device-name>/lightbar/sequence
+Date:		August 2015
+KernelVersion:	4.2
+Description:
+		The Pixel lightbar has a number of built-in sequences
+		that it displays under various conditions, such as at
+		power on, shut down, or while running. Reading from this
+		file displays the current sequence that the lightbar is
+		displaying. Writing to this file allows you to change the
+		sequence.
+
+What:		/sys/class/chromeos/<ec-device-name>/lightbar/userspace_control
+Date:		August 2015
+KernelVersion:	4.2
+Description:
+		This allows you to take the control of the lightbar. This
+		prevents the kernel from going through its normal
+		sequences.
+
+What:		/sys/class/chromeos/<ec-device-name>/lightbar/version
+Date:		August 2015
+KernelVersion:	4.2
+Description:
+		Show the information about the lightbar version.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-chromeos-driver-cros-ec-vbc b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-chromeos-driver-cros-ec-vbc
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..38c5aaaaa89a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-chromeos-driver-cros-ec-vbc
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+What:		/sys/class/chromeos/<ec-device-name>/vbc/vboot_context
+Date:		October 2015
+KernelVersion:	4.4
+Description:
+		Read/write the verified boot context data included on a
+		small nvram space on some EC implementations.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-led-trigger-pattern b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-led-trigger-pattern
index 1e5d172e0646..bd92ef9d6faa 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-led-trigger-pattern
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-led-trigger-pattern
@@ -7,55 +7,10 @@ Description:
 		timer. It can do gradual dimming and step change of brightness.
 
 		The pattern is given by a series of tuples, of brightness and
-		duration (ms). The LED is expected to traverse the series and
-		each brightness value for the specified duration. Duration of
-		0 means brightness should immediately change to new value, and
-		writing malformed pattern deactivates any active one.
+		duration (ms).
 
-		1. For gradual dimming, the dimming interval now is set as 50
-		milliseconds. So the tuple with duration less than dimming
-		interval (50ms) is treated as a step change of brightness,
-		i.e. the subsequent brightness will be applied without adding
-		intervening dimming intervals.
-
-		The gradual dimming format of the software pattern values should be:
-		"brightness_1 duration_1 brightness_2 duration_2 brightness_3
-		duration_3 ...". For example:
-
-		echo 0 1000 255 2000 > pattern
-
-		It will make the LED go gradually from zero-intensity to max (255)
-		intensity in 1000 milliseconds, then back to zero intensity in 2000
-		milliseconds:
-
-		LED brightness
-		    ^
-		255-|       / \            / \            /
-		    |      /    \         /    \         /
-		    |     /       \      /       \      /
-		    |    /          \   /          \   /
-		  0-|   /             \/             \/
-		    +---0----1----2----3----4----5----6------------> time (s)
-
-		2. To make the LED go instantly from one brightness value to another,
-		we should use zero-time lengths (the brightness must be same as
-		the previous tuple's). So the format should be:
-		"brightness_1 duration_1 brightness_1 0 brightness_2 duration_2
-		brightness_2 0 ...". For example:
-
-		echo 0 1000 0 0 255 2000 255 0 > pattern
-
-		It will make the LED stay off for one second, then stay at max brightness
-		for two seconds:
-
-		LED brightness
-		    ^
-		255-|        +---------+    +---------+
-		    |        |         |    |         |
-		    |        |         |    |         |
-		    |        |         |    |         |
-		  0-|   -----+         +----+         +----
-		    +---0----1----2----3----4----5----6------------> time (s)
+		The exact format is described in:
+		Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-trigger-pattern.txt
 
 What:		/sys/class/leds/<led>/hw_pattern
 Date:		September 2018
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-mei b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-mei
index 17d7444a2397..a92d844f806e 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-mei
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-mei
@@ -65,3 +65,18 @@ Description:	Display the ME firmware version.
 		<platform>:<major>.<minor>.<milestone>.<build_no>.
 		There can be up to three such blocks for different
 		FW components.
+
+What:		/sys/class/mei/meiN/dev_state
+Date:		Mar 2019
+KernelVersion:	5.1
+Contact:	Tomas Winkler <tomas.winkler@intel.com>
+Description:	Display the ME device state.
+
+		The device state can have following values:
+		INITIALIZING
+		INIT_CLIENTS
+		ENABLED
+		RESETTING
+		DISABLED
+		POWER_DOWN
+		POWER_UP
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-phydev b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-phydev
index 6ebabfb27912..2a5723343aba 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-phydev
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-phydev
@@ -11,24 +11,31 @@ Date:		February 2014
 KernelVersion:	3.15
 Contact:	netdev@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
-		Boolean value indicating whether the PHY device has
-		any fixups registered against it (phy_register_fixup)
+		This attribute contains the boolean value whether a given PHY
+		device has had any "fixup" workaround running on it, encoded as
+		a boolean. This information is provided to help troubleshooting
+		PHY configurations.
 
 What:		/sys/class/mdio_bus/<bus>/<device>/phy_id
 Date:		November 2012
 KernelVersion:	3.8
 Contact:	netdev@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
-		32-bit hexadecimal value corresponding to the PHY device's OUI,
-		model and revision number.
+		This attribute contains the 32-bit PHY Identifier as reported
+		by the device during bus enumeration, encoded in hexadecimal.
+		This ID is used to match the device with the appropriate
+		driver.
 
 What:		/sys/class/mdio_bus/<bus>/<device>/phy_interface
 Date:		February 2014
 KernelVersion:	3.15
 Contact:	netdev@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
-		String value indicating the PHY interface, possible
-		values are:.
+		This attribute contains the PHY interface as configured by the
+		Ethernet driver during bus enumeration, encoded in string.
+		This interface mode is used to configure the Ethernet MAC with the
+		appropriate mode for its data lines to the PHY hardware.
+		Possible values are:
 		<empty> (not available), mii, gmii, sgmii, tbi, rev-mii,
 		rmii, rgmii, rgmii-id, rgmii-rxid, rgmii-txid, rtbi, smii
 		xgmii, moca, qsgmii, trgmii, 1000base-x, 2500base-x, rxaui,
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-qmi b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-qmi
index 7122d6264c49..c310db4ccbc2 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-qmi
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-qmi
@@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ Contact:	Bjørn Mork <bjorn@mork.no>
 Description:
 		Unsigned integer.
 
-		Write a number ranging from 1 to 127 to add a qmap mux
+		Write a number ranging from 1 to 254 to add a qmap mux
 		based network device, supported by recent Qualcomm based
 		modems.
 
@@ -46,5 +46,5 @@ Contact:	Bjørn Mork <bjorn@mork.no>
 Description:
 		Unsigned integer.
 
-		Write a number ranging from 1 to 127 to delete a previously
+		Write a number ranging from 1 to 254 to delete a previously
 		created qmap mux based network device.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-power b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-power
index 5e23e22dce1b..b77e30b9014e 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-power
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-power
@@ -114,15 +114,60 @@ Description:
 		Access: Read
 		Valid values: Represented in microamps
 
+What:		/sys/class/power_supply/<supply_name>/charge_control_limit
+Date:		Oct 2012
+Contact:	linux-pm@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Maximum allowable charging current. Used for charge rate
+		throttling for thermal cooling or improving battery health.
+
+		Access: Read, Write
+		Valid values: Represented in microamps
+
+What:		/sys/class/power_supply/<supply_name>/charge_control_limit_max
+Date:		Oct 2012
+Contact:	linux-pm@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Maximum legal value for the charge_control_limit property.
+
+		Access: Read
+		Valid values: Represented in microamps
+
+What:		/sys/class/power_supply/<supply_name>/charge_control_start_threshold
+Date:		April 2019
+Contact:	linux-pm@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Represents a battery percentage level, below which charging will
+		begin.
+
+		Access: Read, Write
+		Valid values: 0 - 100 (percent)
+
+What:		/sys/class/power_supply/<supply_name>/charge_control_end_threshold
+Date:		April 2019
+Contact:	linux-pm@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Represents a battery percentage level, above which charging will
+		stop.
+
+		Access: Read, Write
+		Valid values: 0 - 100 (percent)
+
 What:		/sys/class/power_supply/<supply_name>/charge_type
 Date:		July 2009
 Contact:	linux-pm@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
 		Represents the type of charging currently being applied to the
-		battery.
+		battery. "Trickle", "Fast", and "Standard" all mean different
+		charging speeds. "Adaptive" means that the charger uses some
+		algorithm to adjust the charge rate dynamically, without
+		any user configuration required. "Custom" means that the charger
+		uses the charge_control_* properties as configuration for some
+		different algorithm.
 
-		Access: Read
-		Valid values: "Unknown", "N/A", "Trickle", "Fast"
+		Access: Read, Write
+		Valid values: "Unknown", "N/A", "Trickle", "Fast", "Standard",
+			      "Adaptive", "Custom"
 
 What:		/sys/class/power_supply/<supply_name>/charge_term_current
 Date:		July 2014
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-watchdog b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-watchdog
index 736046b33040..6317ade5ad19 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-watchdog
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-watchdog
@@ -49,3 +49,26 @@ Contact:	Wim Van Sebroeck <wim@iguana.be>
 Description:
 		It is a read only file. It is read to know about current
 		value of timeout programmed.
+
+What:		/sys/class/watchdog/watchdogn/pretimeout
+Date:		December 2016
+Contact:	Wim Van Sebroeck <wim@iguana.be>
+Description:
+		It is a read only file. It specifies the time in seconds before
+		timeout when the pretimeout interrupt is delivered.  Pretimeout
+		is an optional feature.
+
+What:		/sys/class/watchdog/watchdogn/pretimeout_avaialable_governors
+Date:		February 2017
+Contact:	Wim Van Sebroeck <wim@iguana.be>
+Description:
+		It is a read only file. It shows the pretimeout governors
+		available for this watchdog.
+
+What:		/sys/class/watchdog/watchdogn/pretimeout_governor
+Date:		February 2017
+Contact:	Wim Van Sebroeck <wim@iguana.be>
+Description:
+		It is a read/write file. When read, the currently assigned
+		pretimeout governor is returned.  When written, it sets
+		the pretimeout governor.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-platform-ipmi b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-platform-ipmi
index 2a781e7513b7..afb5db856e1c 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-platform-ipmi
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-platform-ipmi
@@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ Description:
 					Messages may be broken into parts if
 					they are long.
 
-		receieved_messages:	(RO) Number of message responses
+		received_messages:	(RO) Number of message responses
 					received.
 
 		received_message_parts: (RO) Number of message fragments
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-system-cpu b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-system-cpu
index 9605dbd4b5b5..1528239f69b2 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-system-cpu
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-system-cpu
@@ -484,6 +484,7 @@ What:		/sys/devices/system/cpu/vulnerabilities
 		/sys/devices/system/cpu/vulnerabilities/spectre_v2
 		/sys/devices/system/cpu/vulnerabilities/spec_store_bypass
 		/sys/devices/system/cpu/vulnerabilities/l1tf
+		/sys/devices/system/cpu/vulnerabilities/mds
 Date:		January 2018
 Contact:	Linux kernel mailing list <linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org>
 Description:	Information about CPU vulnerabilities
@@ -496,8 +497,7 @@ Description:	Information about CPU vulnerabilities
 		"Vulnerable"	  CPU is affected and no mitigation in effect
 		"Mitigation: $M"  CPU is affected and mitigation $M is in effect
 
-		Details about the l1tf file can be found in
-		Documentation/admin-guide/l1tf.rst
+		See also: Documentation/admin-guide/hw-vuln/index.rst
 
 What:		/sys/devices/system/cpu/smt
 		/sys/devices/system/cpu/smt/active
@@ -511,10 +511,30 @@ Description:	Control Symetric Multi Threading (SMT)
 		control: Read/write interface to control SMT. Possible
 			 values:
 
-			 "on"		SMT is enabled
-			 "off"		SMT is disabled
-			 "forceoff"	SMT is force disabled. Cannot be changed.
-			 "notsupported" SMT is not supported by the CPU
+			 "on"		  SMT is enabled
+			 "off"		  SMT is disabled
+			 "forceoff"	  SMT is force disabled. Cannot be changed.
+			 "notsupported"   SMT is not supported by the CPU
+			 "notimplemented" SMT runtime toggling is not
+					  implemented for the architecture
 
 			 If control status is "forceoff" or "notsupported" writes
 			 are rejected.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu#/power/energy_perf_bias
+Date:		March 2019
+Contact:	linux-pm@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	Intel Energy and Performance Bias Hint (EPB)
+
+		EPB for the given CPU in a sliding scale 0 - 15, where a value
+		of 0 corresponds to a hint preference for highest performance
+		and a value of 15 corresponds to the maximum energy savings.
+
+		In order to change the EPB value for the CPU, write either
+		a number in the 0 - 15 sliding scale above, or one of the
+		strings: "performance", "balance-performance", "normal",
+		"balance-power", "power" (that represent values reflected by
+		their meaning), to this attribute.
+
+		This attribute is present for all online CPUs supporting the
+		Intel EPB feature.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-habanalabs b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-habanalabs
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..78b2bcf316a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-habanalabs
@@ -0,0 +1,190 @@
+What:           /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/armcp_kernel_ver
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Version of the Linux kernel running on the device's CPU
+
+What:           /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/armcp_ver
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Version of the application running on the device's CPU
+
+What:           /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/cpld_ver
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Version of the Device's CPLD F/W
+
+What:           /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/device_type
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Displays the code name of the device according to its type.
+                The supported values are: "GOYA"
+
+What:           /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/eeprom
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    A binary file attribute that contains the contents of the
+                on-board EEPROM
+
+What:           /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/fuse_ver
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Displays the device's version from the eFuse
+
+What:           /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/hard_reset
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Interface to trigger a hard-reset operation for the device.
+                Hard-reset will reset ALL internal components of the device
+                except for the PCI interface and the internal PLLs
+
+What:           /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/hard_reset_cnt
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Displays how many times the device have undergone a hard-reset
+                operation since the driver was loaded
+
+What:           /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/high_pll
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Allows the user to set the maximum clock frequency for MME, TPC
+                and IC when the power management profile is set to "automatic".
+
+What:           /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/ic_clk
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Allows the user to set the maximum clock frequency of the
+                Interconnect fabric. Writes to this parameter affect the device
+                only when the power management profile is set to "manual" mode.
+                The device IC clock might be set to lower value then the
+                maximum. The user should read the ic_clk_curr to see the actual
+                frequency value of the IC
+
+What:           /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/ic_clk_curr
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Displays the current clock frequency of the Interconnect fabric
+
+What:           /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/infineon_ver
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Version of the Device's power supply F/W code
+
+What:           /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/max_power
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Allows the user to set the maximum power consumption of the
+                device in milliwatts.
+
+What:           /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/mme_clk
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Allows the user to set the maximum clock frequency of the
+                MME compute engine. Writes to this parameter affect the device
+                only when the power management profile is set to "manual" mode.
+                The device MME clock might be set to lower value then the
+                maximum. The user should read the mme_clk_curr to see the actual
+                frequency value of the MME
+
+What:           /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/mme_clk_curr
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Displays the current clock frequency of the MME compute engine
+
+What:           /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/pci_addr
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Displays the PCI address of the device. This is needed so the
+                user would be able to open a device based on its PCI address
+
+What:           /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/pm_mng_profile
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Power management profile. Values are "auto", "manual". In "auto"
+                mode, the driver will set the maximum clock frequency to a high
+                value when a user-space process opens the device's file (unless
+                it was already opened by another process). The driver will set
+                the max clock frequency to a low value when there are no user
+                processes that are opened on the device's file. In "manual"
+                mode, the user sets the maximum clock frequency by writing to
+                ic_clk, mme_clk and tpc_clk
+
+
+What:           /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/preboot_btl_ver
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Version of the device's preboot F/W code
+
+What:           /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/soft_reset
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Interface to trigger a soft-reset operation for the device.
+                Soft-reset will reset only the compute and DMA engines of the
+                device
+
+What:           /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/soft_reset_cnt
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Displays how many times the device have undergone a soft-reset
+                operation since the driver was loaded
+
+What:           /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/status
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Status of the card: "Operational", "Malfunction", "In reset".
+
+What:           /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/thermal_ver
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Version of the Device's thermal daemon
+
+What:           /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/tpc_clk
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Allows the user to set the maximum clock frequency of the
+                TPC compute engines. Writes to this parameter affect the device
+                only when the power management profile is set to "manual" mode.
+                The device TPC clock might be set to lower value then the
+                maximum. The user should read the tpc_clk_curr to see the actual
+                frequency value of the TPC
+
+What:           /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/tpc_clk_curr
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Displays the current clock frequency of the TPC compute engines
+
+What:           /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/uboot_ver
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Version of the u-boot running on the device's CPU
+
+What:           /sys/class/habanalabs/hl<n>/write_open_cnt
+Date:           Jan 2019
+KernelVersion:  5.1
+Contact:        oded.gabbay@gmail.com
+Description:    Displays the total number of user processes that are currently
+                opened on the device's file
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-ucsi-ccg b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-ucsi-ccg
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..45cf62ad89e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-ucsi-ccg
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+What:		/sys/bus/i2c/drivers/ucsi_ccg/.../do_flash
+Date:		May 2019
+Contact:	Ajay Gupta <ajayg@nvidia.com>
+Description:
+		Tell the driver for Cypress CCGx Type-C controller to attempt
+		firmware upgrade by writing [Yy1] to the file.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-ext4 b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-ext4
index c631253cf85c..78604db56279 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-ext4
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-ext4
@@ -109,3 +109,10 @@ Description:
 		write operation (since a 4k random write might turn
 		into a much larger write due to the zeroout
 		operation).
+
+What:		/sys/fs/ext4/<disk>/journal_task
+Date:		February 2019
+Contact:	"Theodore Ts'o" <tytso@mit.edu>
+Description:
+		This file is read-only and shows the pid of journal thread in
+		current pid-namespace or 0 if task is unreachable.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-f2fs b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-f2fs
index a7ce33199457..91822ce25831 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-f2fs
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-f2fs
@@ -86,6 +86,13 @@ Description:
 		The unit size is one block, now only support configuring in range
 		of [1, 512].
 
+What:          /sys/fs/f2fs/<disk>/umount_discard_timeout
+Date:          January 2019
+Contact:       "Jaegeuk Kim" <jaegeuk@kernel.org>
+Description:
+		Set timeout to issue discard commands during umount.
+		Default: 5 secs
+
 What:		/sys/fs/f2fs/<disk>/max_victim_search
 Date:		January 2014
 Contact:	"Jaegeuk Kim" <jaegeuk.kim@samsung.com>
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-livepatch b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-livepatch
index dac7e1e62a8b..bea7bd5a1d5f 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-livepatch
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-livepatch
@@ -33,18 +33,6 @@ Description:
 		An attribute which indicates whether the patch is currently in
 		transition.
 
-What:		/sys/kernel/livepatch/<patch>/signal
-Date:		Nov 2017
-KernelVersion:	4.15.0
-Contact:	live-patching@vger.kernel.org
-Description:
-		A writable attribute that allows administrator to affect the
-		course of an existing transition. Writing 1 sends a fake
-		signal to all remaining blocking tasks. The fake signal
-		means that no proper signal is delivered (there is no data in
-		signal pending structures). Tasks are interrupted or woken up,
-		and forced to change their patched state.
-
 What:		/sys/kernel/livepatch/<patch>/force
 Date:		Nov 2017
 KernelVersion:	4.15.0
@@ -57,7 +45,7 @@ Description:
 		use this feature without a clearance from a patch
 		distributor. Removal (rmmod) of patch modules is permanently
 		disabled when the feature is used. See
-		Documentation/livepatch/livepatch.txt for more information.
+		Documentation/livepatch/livepatch.rst for more information.
 
 What:		/sys/kernel/livepatch/<patch>/<object>
 Date:		Nov 2014
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/usb-uevent b/Documentation/ABI/testing/usb-uevent
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d35c3cad892c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/usb-uevent
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+What:		Raise a uevent when a USB Host Controller has died
+Date:		2019-04-17
+KernelVersion:	5.2
+Contact:	linux-usb@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	When the USB Host Controller has entered a state where it is no
+		longer functional a uevent will be raised. The uevent will
+		contain ACTION=offline and ERROR=DEAD.
+
+		Here is an example taken using udevadm monitor -p:
+
+		KERNEL[130.428945] offline  /devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:10.0/usb2 (usb)
+		ACTION=offline
+		BUSNUM=002
+		DEVNAME=/dev/bus/usb/002/001
+		DEVNUM=001
+		DEVPATH=/devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:10.0/usb2
+		DEVTYPE=usb_device
+		DRIVER=usb
+		ERROR=DEAD
+		MAJOR=189
+		MINOR=128
+		PRODUCT=1d6b/2/414
+		SEQNUM=2168
+		SUBSYSTEM=usb
+		TYPE=9/0/1
+
+Users:		chromium-os-dev@chromium.org
diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt b/Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt
index f0cc3f772265..cb712a02f59f 100644
--- a/Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt
+++ b/Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt
@@ -146,114 +146,75 @@ What about block I/O and networking buffers?  The block I/O and
 networking subsystems make sure that the buffers they use are valid
 for you to DMA from/to.
 
-DMA addressing limitations
-==========================
+DMA addressing capabilities
+===========================
 
-Does your device have any DMA addressing limitations?  For example, is
-your device only capable of driving the low order 24-bits of address?
-If so, you need to inform the kernel of this fact.
+By default, the kernel assumes that your device can address 32-bits of DMA
+addressing.  For a 64-bit capable device, this needs to be increased, and for
+a device with limitations, it needs to be decreased.
 
-By default, the kernel assumes that your device can address the full
-32-bits.  For a 64-bit capable device, this needs to be increased.
-And for a device with limitations, as discussed in the previous
-paragraph, it needs to be decreased.
+Special note about PCI: PCI-X specification requires PCI-X devices to support
+64-bit addressing (DAC) for all transactions.  And at least one platform (SGI
+SN2) requires 64-bit consistent allocations to operate correctly when the IO
+bus is in PCI-X mode.
 
-Special note about PCI: PCI-X specification requires PCI-X devices to
-support 64-bit addressing (DAC) for all transactions.  And at least
-one platform (SGI SN2) requires 64-bit consistent allocations to
-operate correctly when the IO bus is in PCI-X mode.
+For correct operation, you must set the DMA mask to inform the kernel about
+your devices DMA addressing capabilities.
 
-For correct operation, you must interrogate the kernel in your device
-probe routine to see if the DMA controller on the machine can properly
-support the DMA addressing limitation your device has.  It is good
-style to do this even if your device holds the default setting,
-because this shows that you did think about these issues wrt. your
-device.
-
-The query is performed via a call to dma_set_mask_and_coherent()::
+This is performed via a call to dma_set_mask_and_coherent()::
 
 	int dma_set_mask_and_coherent(struct device *dev, u64 mask);
 
-which will query the mask for both streaming and coherent APIs together.
-If you have some special requirements, then the following two separate
-queries can be used instead:
+which will set the mask for both streaming and coherent APIs together.  If you
+have some special requirements, then the following two separate calls can be
+used instead:
 
-	The query for streaming mappings is performed via a call to
+	The setup for streaming mappings is performed via a call to
 	dma_set_mask()::
 
 		int dma_set_mask(struct device *dev, u64 mask);
 
-	The query for consistent allocations is performed via a call
+	The setup for consistent allocations is performed via a call
 	to dma_set_coherent_mask()::
 
 		int dma_set_coherent_mask(struct device *dev, u64 mask);
 
-Here, dev is a pointer to the device struct of your device, and mask
-is a bit mask describing which bits of an address your device
-supports.  It returns zero if your card can perform DMA properly on
-the machine given the address mask you provided.  In general, the
-device struct of your device is embedded in the bus-specific device
-struct of your device.  For example, &pdev->dev is a pointer to the
-device struct of a PCI device (pdev is a pointer to the PCI device
-struct of your device).
+Here, dev is a pointer to the device struct of your device, and mask is a bit
+mask describing which bits of an address your device supports.  Often the
+device struct of your device is embedded in the bus-specific device struct of
+your device.  For example, &pdev->dev is a pointer to the device struct of a
+PCI device (pdev is a pointer to the PCI device struct of your device).
 
-If it returns non-zero, your device cannot perform DMA properly on
-this platform, and attempting to do so will result in undefined
-behavior.  You must either use a different mask, or not use DMA.
+These calls usually return zero to indicated your device can perform DMA
+properly on the machine given the address mask you provided, but they might
+return an error if the mask is too small to be supportable on the given
+system.  If it returns non-zero, your device cannot perform DMA properly on
+this platform, and attempting to do so will result in undefined behavior.
+You must not use DMA on this device unless the dma_set_mask family of
+functions has returned success.
 
-This means that in the failure case, you have three options:
+This means that in the failure case, you have two options:
 
-1) Use another DMA mask, if possible (see below).
-2) Use some non-DMA mode for data transfer, if possible.
-3) Ignore this device and do not initialize it.
+1) Use some non-DMA mode for data transfer, if possible.
+2) Ignore this device and do not initialize it.
 
-It is recommended that your driver print a kernel KERN_WARNING message
-when you end up performing either #2 or #3.  In this manner, if a user
-of your driver reports that performance is bad or that the device is not
-even detected, you can ask them for the kernel messages to find out
-exactly why.
+It is recommended that your driver print a kernel KERN_WARNING message when
+setting the DMA mask fails.  In this manner, if a user of your driver reports
+that performance is bad or that the device is not even detected, you can ask
+them for the kernel messages to find out exactly why.
 
-The standard 32-bit addressing device would do something like this::
+The standard 64-bit addressing device would do something like this::
 
-	if (dma_set_mask_and_coherent(dev, DMA_BIT_MASK(32))) {
+	if (dma_set_mask_and_coherent(dev, DMA_BIT_MASK(64))) {
 		dev_warn(dev, "mydev: No suitable DMA available\n");
 		goto ignore_this_device;
 	}
 
-Another common scenario is a 64-bit capable device.  The approach here
-is to try for 64-bit addressing, but back down to a 32-bit mask that
-should not fail.  The kernel may fail the 64-bit mask not because the
-platform is not capable of 64-bit addressing.  Rather, it may fail in
-this case simply because 32-bit addressing is done more efficiently
-than 64-bit addressing.  For example, Sparc64 PCI SAC addressing is
-more efficient than DAC addressing.
-
-Here is how you would handle a 64-bit capable device which can drive
-all 64-bits when accessing streaming DMA::
-
-	int using_dac;
+If the device only supports 32-bit addressing for descriptors in the
+coherent allocations, but supports full 64-bits for streaming mappings
+it would look like this:
 
-	if (!dma_set_mask(dev, DMA_BIT_MASK(64))) {
-		using_dac = 1;
-	} else if (!dma_set_mask(dev, DMA_BIT_MASK(32))) {
-		using_dac = 0;
-	} else {
-		dev_warn(dev, "mydev: No suitable DMA available\n");
-		goto ignore_this_device;
-	}
-
-If a card is capable of using 64-bit consistent allocations as well,
-the case would look like this::
-
-	int using_dac, consistent_using_dac;
-
-	if (!dma_set_mask_and_coherent(dev, DMA_BIT_MASK(64))) {
-		using_dac = 1;
-		consistent_using_dac = 1;
-	} else if (!dma_set_mask_and_coherent(dev, DMA_BIT_MASK(32))) {
-		using_dac = 0;
-		consistent_using_dac = 0;
-	} else {
+	if (dma_set_mask(dev, DMA_BIT_MASK(64))) {
 		dev_warn(dev, "mydev: No suitable DMA available\n");
 		goto ignore_this_device;
 	}
@@ -404,13 +365,12 @@ __get_free_pages() (but takes size instead of a page order).  If your
 driver needs regions sized smaller than a page, you may prefer using
 the dma_pool interface, described below.
 
-The consistent DMA mapping interfaces, for non-NULL dev, will by
-default return a DMA address which is 32-bit addressable.  Even if the
-device indicates (via DMA mask) that it may address the upper 32-bits,
-consistent allocation will only return > 32-bit addresses for DMA if
-the consistent DMA mask has been explicitly changed via
-dma_set_coherent_mask().  This is true of the dma_pool interface as
-well.
+The consistent DMA mapping interfaces, will by default return a DMA address
+which is 32-bit addressable.  Even if the device indicates (via the DMA mask)
+that it may address the upper 32-bits, consistent allocation will only
+return > 32-bit addresses for DMA if the consistent DMA mask has been
+explicitly changed via dma_set_coherent_mask().  This is true of the
+dma_pool interface as well.
 
 dma_alloc_coherent() returns two values: the virtual address which you
 can use to access it from the CPU and dma_handle which you pass to the
diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
index e133ccd60228..0076150fdccb 100644
--- a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
+++ b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
@@ -195,6 +195,14 @@ Requesting the required mask does not alter the current mask.  If you
 wish to take advantage of it, you should issue a dma_set_mask()
 call to set the mask to the value returned.
 
+::
+
+	size_t
+	dma_direct_max_mapping_size(struct device *dev);
+
+Returns the maximum size of a mapping for the device. The size parameter
+of the mapping functions like dma_map_single(), dma_map_page() and
+others should not be larger than the returned value.
 
 Part Id - Streaming DMA mappings
 --------------------------------
@@ -530,8 +538,8 @@ that simply cannot make consistent memory.
 	dma_free_attrs(struct device *dev, size_t size, void *cpu_addr,
 		       dma_addr_t dma_handle, unsigned long attrs)
 
-Free memory allocated by the dma_alloc_attrs().  All parameters common
-parameters must identical to those otherwise passed to dma_fre_coherent,
+Free memory allocated by the dma_alloc_attrs().  All common
+parameters must be identical to those otherwise passed to dma_free_coherent,
 and the attrs argument must be identical to the attrs passed to
 dma_alloc_attrs().
 
@@ -566,8 +574,7 @@ boundaries when doing this.
 
 	int
 	dma_declare_coherent_memory(struct device *dev, phys_addr_t phys_addr,
-				    dma_addr_t device_addr, size_t size, int
-				    flags)
+				    dma_addr_t device_addr, size_t size);
 
 Declare region of memory to be handed out by dma_alloc_coherent() when
 it's asked for coherent memory for this device.
@@ -581,12 +588,6 @@ dma_addr_t in dma_alloc_coherent()).
 
 size is the size of the area (must be multiples of PAGE_SIZE).
 
-flags can be ORed together and are:
-
-- DMA_MEMORY_EXCLUSIVE - only allocate memory from the declared regions.
-  Do not allow dma_alloc_coherent() to fall back to system memory when
-  it's out of memory in the declared region.
-
 As a simplification for the platforms, only *one* such region of
 memory may be declared per device.
 
@@ -605,23 +606,6 @@ unconditionally having removed all the required structures.  It is the
 driver's job to ensure that no parts of this memory region are
 currently in use.
 
-::
-
-	void *
-	dma_mark_declared_memory_occupied(struct device *dev,
-					  dma_addr_t device_addr, size_t size)
-
-This is used to occupy specific regions of the declared space
-(dma_alloc_coherent() will hand out the first free region it finds).
-
-device_addr is the *device* address of the region requested.
-
-size is the size (and should be a page-sized multiple).
-
-The return value will be either a pointer to the processor virtual
-address of the memory, or an error (via PTR_ERR()) if any part of the
-region is occupied.
-
 Part III - Debug drivers use of the DMA-API
 -------------------------------------------
 
@@ -696,6 +680,9 @@ dma-api/disabled		This read-only file contains the character 'Y'
 				happen when it runs out of memory or if it was
 				disabled at boot time
 
+dma-api/dump			This read-only file contains current DMA
+				mappings.
+
 dma-api/error_count		This file is read-only and shows the total
 				numbers of errors found.
 
@@ -717,7 +704,7 @@ dma-api/num_free_entries	The current number of free dma_debug_entries
 dma-api/nr_total_entries	The total number of dma_debug_entries in the
 				allocator, both free and used.
 
-dma-api/driver-filter		You can write a name of a driver into this file
+dma-api/driver_filter		You can write a name of a driver into this file
 				to limit the debug output to requests from that
 				particular driver. Write an empty string to
 				that file to disable the filter and see
diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-ISA-LPC.txt b/Documentation/DMA-ISA-LPC.txt
index 8c2b8be6e45b..b1ec7b16c21f 100644
--- a/Documentation/DMA-ISA-LPC.txt
+++ b/Documentation/DMA-ISA-LPC.txt
@@ -52,8 +52,8 @@ Address translation
 -------------------
 
 To translate the virtual address to a bus address, use the normal DMA
-API. Do _not_ use isa_virt_to_phys() even though it does the same
-thing. The reason for this is that the function isa_virt_to_phys()
+API. Do _not_ use isa_virt_to_bus() even though it does the same
+thing. The reason for this is that the function isa_virt_to_bus()
 will require a Kconfig dependency to ISA, not just ISA_DMA_API which
 is really all you need. Remember that even though the DMA controller
 has its origins in ISA it is used elsewhere.
diff --git a/Documentation/Makefile b/Documentation/Makefile
index 9786957c6a35..e889e7cb8511 100644
--- a/Documentation/Makefile
+++ b/Documentation/Makefile
@@ -28,8 +28,13 @@ ifeq ($(HAVE_SPHINX),0)
 
 else # HAVE_SPHINX
 
-# User-friendly check for pdflatex
+# User-friendly check for pdflatex and latexmk
 HAVE_PDFLATEX := $(shell if which $(PDFLATEX) >/dev/null 2>&1; then echo 1; else echo 0; fi)
+HAVE_LATEXMK := $(shell if which latexmk >/dev/null 2>&1; then echo 1; else echo 0; fi)
+
+ifeq ($(HAVE_LATEXMK),1)
+	PDFLATEX := latexmk -$(PDFLATEX)
+endif #HAVE_LATEXMK
 
 # Internal variables.
 PAPEROPT_a4     = -D latex_paper_size=a4
@@ -82,7 +87,7 @@ pdfdocs:
 else # HAVE_PDFLATEX
 
 pdfdocs: latexdocs
-	$(foreach var,$(SPHINXDIRS), $(MAKE) PDFLATEX=$(PDFLATEX) LATEXOPTS="$(LATEXOPTS)" -C $(BUILDDIR)/$(var)/latex || exit;)
+	$(foreach var,$(SPHINXDIRS), $(MAKE) PDFLATEX="$(PDFLATEX)" LATEXOPTS="$(LATEXOPTS)" -C $(BUILDDIR)/$(var)/latex || exit;)
 
 endif # HAVE_PDFLATEX
 
diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Data-Structures/Data-Structures.html b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Data-Structures/Data-Structures.html
index 18f179807563..c30c1957c7e6 100644
--- a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Data-Structures/Data-Structures.html
+++ b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Data-Structures/Data-Structures.html
@@ -155,8 +155,7 @@ keeping lock contention under control at all tree levels regardless
 of the level of loading on the system.
 
 </p><p>RCU updaters wait for normal grace periods by registering
-RCU callbacks, either directly via <tt>call_rcu()</tt> and
-friends (namely <tt>call_rcu_bh()</tt> and <tt>call_rcu_sched()</tt>),
+RCU callbacks, either directly via <tt>call_rcu()</tt>
 or indirectly via <tt>synchronize_rcu()</tt> and friends.
 RCU callbacks are represented by <tt>rcu_head</tt> structures,
 which are queued on <tt>rcu_data</tt> structures while they are
diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Expedited-Grace-Periods/ExpSchedFlow.svg b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Expedited-Grace-Periods/ExpSchedFlow.svg
index e4233ac93c2b..6189ffcc6aff 100644
--- a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Expedited-Grace-Periods/ExpSchedFlow.svg
+++ b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Expedited-Grace-Periods/ExpSchedFlow.svg
@@ -328,13 +328,13 @@
      inkscape:window-height="1148"
      id="namedview90"
      showgrid="true"
-     inkscape:zoom="0.80021373"
-     inkscape:cx="462.49289"
-     inkscape:cy="473.6718"
+     inkscape:zoom="0.69092787"
+     inkscape:cx="476.34085"
+     inkscape:cy="712.80957"
      inkscape:window-x="770"
      inkscape:window-y="24"
      inkscape:window-maximized="0"
-     inkscape:current-layer="g4114-9-3-9"
+     inkscape:current-layer="g4"
      inkscape:snap-grids="false"
      fit-margin-top="5"
      fit-margin-right="5"
@@ -813,14 +813,18 @@
       <text
          sodipodi:linespacing="125%"
          id="text4110-5-7-6-2-4-0"
-         y="841.88086"
+         y="670.74316"
          x="1460.1007"
          style="font-size:267.24359131px;font-style:normal;font-weight:normal;text-align:center;line-height:125%;letter-spacing:0px;word-spacing:0px;text-anchor:middle;fill:#000000;fill-opacity:1;stroke:none;font-family:Sans"
          xml:space="preserve"><tspan
-           y="841.88086"
+           y="670.74316"
+           x="1460.1007"
+           sodipodi:role="line"
+           id="tspan4925-1-2-4-5">Request</tspan><tspan
+           y="1004.7976"
            x="1460.1007"
            sodipodi:role="line"
-           id="tspan4925-1-2-4-5">reched_cpu()</tspan></text>
+           id="tspan3100">context switch</tspan></text>
     </g>
   </g>
 </svg>
diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Expedited-Grace-Periods/Expedited-Grace-Periods.html b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Expedited-Grace-Periods/Expedited-Grace-Periods.html
index 8e4f873b979f..57300db4b5ff 100644
--- a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Expedited-Grace-Periods/Expedited-Grace-Periods.html
+++ b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Expedited-Grace-Periods/Expedited-Grace-Periods.html
@@ -56,6 +56,7 @@ sections.
 RCU-preempt Expedited Grace Periods</a></h2>
 
 <p>
+<tt>CONFIG_PREEMPT=y</tt> kernels implement RCU-preempt.
 The overall flow of the handling of a given CPU by an RCU-preempt
 expedited grace period is shown in the following diagram:
 
@@ -72,10 +73,10 @@ will ignore it because idle and offline CPUs are already residing
 in quiescent states.
 Otherwise, the expedited grace period will use
 <tt>smp_call_function_single()</tt> to send the CPU an IPI, which
-is handled by <tt>sync_rcu_exp_handler()</tt>.
+is handled by <tt>rcu_exp_handler()</tt>.
 
 <p>
-However, because this is preemptible RCU, <tt>sync_rcu_exp_handler()</tt>
+However, because this is preemptible RCU, <tt>rcu_exp_handler()</tt>
 can check to see if the CPU is currently running in an RCU read-side
 critical section.
 If not, the handler can immediately report a quiescent state.
@@ -139,25 +140,25 @@ or offline, among other things.
 RCU-sched Expedited Grace Periods</a></h2>
 
 <p>
+<tt>CONFIG_PREEMPT=n</tt> kernels implement RCU-sched.
 The overall flow of the handling of a given CPU by an RCU-sched
 expedited grace period is shown in the following diagram:
 
 <p><img src="ExpSchedFlow.svg" alt="ExpSchedFlow.svg" width="55%">
 
 <p>
-As with RCU-preempt's <tt>synchronize_rcu_expedited()</tt>,
-<tt>synchronize_sched_expedited()</tt> ignores offline and
+As with RCU-preempt, RCU-sched's
+<tt>synchronize_rcu_expedited()</tt> ignores offline and
 idle CPUs, again because they are in remotely detectable
 quiescent states.
-However, the <tt>synchronize_rcu_expedited()</tt> handler
-is <tt>sync_sched_exp_handler()</tt>, and because the
+However, because the
 <tt>rcu_read_lock_sched()</tt> and <tt>rcu_read_unlock_sched()</tt>
 leave no trace of their invocation, in general it is not possible to tell
 whether or not the current CPU is in an RCU read-side critical section.
-The best that <tt>sync_sched_exp_handler()</tt> can do is to check
+The best that RCU-sched's <tt>rcu_exp_handler()</tt> can do is to check
 for idle, on the off-chance that the CPU went idle while the IPI
 was in flight.
-If the CPU is idle, then <tt>sync_sched_exp_handler()</tt> reports
+If the CPU is idle, then <tt>rcu_exp_handler()</tt> reports
 the quiescent state.
 
 <p> Otherwise, the handler forces a future context switch by setting the
@@ -298,19 +299,18 @@ Instead, the task pushing the grace period forward will include the
 idle CPUs in the mask passed to <tt>rcu_report_exp_cpu_mult()</tt>.
 
 <p>
-For RCU-sched, there is an additional check for idle in the IPI
-handler, <tt>sync_sched_exp_handler()</tt>.
+For RCU-sched, there is an additional check:
 If the IPI has interrupted the idle loop, then
-<tt>sync_sched_exp_handler()</tt> invokes <tt>rcu_report_exp_rdp()</tt>
+<tt>rcu_exp_handler()</tt> invokes <tt>rcu_report_exp_rdp()</tt>
 to report the corresponding quiescent state.
 
 <p>
 For RCU-preempt, there is no specific check for idle in the
-IPI handler (<tt>sync_rcu_exp_handler()</tt>), but because
+IPI handler (<tt>rcu_exp_handler()</tt>), but because
 RCU read-side critical sections are not permitted within the
-idle loop, if <tt>sync_rcu_exp_handler()</tt> sees that the CPU is within
+idle loop, if <tt>rcu_exp_handler()</tt> sees that the CPU is within
 RCU read-side critical section, the CPU cannot possibly be idle.
-Otherwise, <tt>sync_rcu_exp_handler()</tt> invokes
+Otherwise, <tt>rcu_exp_handler()</tt> invokes
 <tt>rcu_report_exp_rdp()</tt> to report the corresponding quiescent
 state, regardless of whether or not that quiescent state was due to
 the CPU being idle.
@@ -625,6 +625,8 @@ checks, but only during the mid-boot dead zone.
 <p>
 With this refinement, synchronous grace periods can now be used from
 task context pretty much any time during the life of the kernel.
+That is, aside from some points in the suspend, hibernate, or shutdown
+code path.
 
 <h3><a name="Summary">
 Summary</a></h3>
diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/Tree-RCU-Memory-Ordering.html b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/Tree-RCU-Memory-Ordering.html
index e4d94fba6c89..c64f8d26609f 100644
--- a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/Tree-RCU-Memory-Ordering.html
+++ b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/Tree-RCU-Memory-Ordering.html
@@ -34,12 +34,11 @@ Similarly, any code that happens before the beginning of a given RCU grace
 period is guaranteed to see the effects of all accesses following the end
 of that grace period that are within RCU read-side critical sections.
 
-<p>This guarantee is particularly pervasive for <tt>synchronize_sched()</tt>,
-for which RCU-sched read-side critical sections include any region
+<p>Note well that RCU-sched read-side critical sections include any region
 of code for which preemption is disabled.
 Given that each individual machine instruction can be thought of as
 an extremely small region of preemption-disabled code, one can think of
-<tt>synchronize_sched()</tt> as <tt>smp_mb()</tt> on steroids.
+<tt>synchronize_rcu()</tt> as <tt>smp_mb()</tt> on steroids.
 
 <p>RCU updaters use this guarantee by splitting their updates into
 two phases, one of which is executed before the grace period and
@@ -485,13 +484,13 @@ section that the grace period must wait on.
 noted by <tt>rcu_node_context_switch()</tt> on the left.
 On the other hand, if the CPU takes a scheduler-clock interrupt
 while executing in usermode, a quiescent state will be noted by
-<tt>rcu_check_callbacks()</tt> on the right.
+<tt>rcu_sched_clock_irq()</tt> on the right.
 Either way, the passage through a quiescent state will be noted
 in a per-CPU variable.
 
 <p>The next time an <tt>RCU_SOFTIRQ</tt> handler executes on
 this CPU (for example, after the next scheduler-clock
-interrupt), <tt>__rcu_process_callbacks()</tt> will invoke
+interrupt), <tt>rcu_core()</tt> will invoke
 <tt>rcu_check_quiescent_state()</tt>, which will notice the
 recorded quiescent state, and invoke
 <tt>rcu_report_qs_rdp()</tt>.
@@ -651,7 +650,7 @@ to end.
 These callbacks are identified by <tt>rcu_advance_cbs()</tt>,
 which is usually invoked by <tt>__note_gp_changes()</tt>.
 As shown in the diagram below, this invocation can be triggered by
-the scheduling-clock interrupt (<tt>rcu_check_callbacks()</tt> on
+the scheduling-clock interrupt (<tt>rcu_sched_clock_irq()</tt> on
 the left) or by idle entry (<tt>rcu_cleanup_after_idle()</tt> on
 the right, but only for kernels build with
 <tt>CONFIG_RCU_FAST_NO_HZ=y</tt>).
diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-callback-invocation.svg b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-callback-invocation.svg
index 832408313d93..3fcf0c17cef2 100644
--- a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-callback-invocation.svg
+++ b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-callback-invocation.svg
@@ -349,7 +349,7 @@
        font-weight="bold"
        font-size="192"
        id="text202-7-5"
-       style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">rcu_check_callbacks()</text>
+       style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">rcu_sched_clock_irq()</text>
     <rect
        x="7069.6187"
        y="5087.4678"
diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-gp.svg b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-gp.svg
index acd73c7ad0f4..2bcd742d6e49 100644
--- a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-gp.svg
+++ b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-gp.svg
@@ -3902,7 +3902,7 @@
          font-style="normal"
          y="-4418.6582"
          x="3745.7725"
-         xml:space="preserve">rcu_check_callbacks()</text>
+         xml:space="preserve">rcu_sched_clock_irq()</text>
     </g>
     <g
        transform="translate(-850.30204,55463.106)"
@@ -3924,7 +3924,7 @@
          font-style="normal"
          y="-4418.6582"
          x="3745.7725"
-         xml:space="preserve">rcu_process_callbacks()</text>
+         xml:space="preserve">rcu_core()</text>
       <text
          style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier"
          id="text202-7-5-3-27-0"
@@ -3933,7 +3933,7 @@
          font-style="normal"
          y="-4165.7954"
          x="3745.7725"
-         xml:space="preserve">rcu_check_quiescent_state())</text>
+         xml:space="preserve">rcu_check_quiescent_state()</text>
       <text
          style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier"
          id="text202-7-5-3-27-0-9"
@@ -4968,7 +4968,7 @@
        font-weight="bold"
        font-size="192"
        id="text202-7-5-19"
-       style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">rcu_check_callbacks()</text>
+       style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">rcu_sched_clock_irq()</text>
     <rect
        x="5314.2671"
        y="82817.688"
diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-qs.svg b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-qs.svg
index 149bec2a4493..779c9ac31a52 100644
--- a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-qs.svg
+++ b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-qs.svg
@@ -775,7 +775,7 @@
          font-style="normal"
          y="-4418.6582"
          x="3745.7725"
-         xml:space="preserve">rcu_check_callbacks()</text>
+         xml:space="preserve">rcu_sched_clock_irq()</text>
     </g>
     <g
        transform="translate(399.7744,828.86448)"
@@ -797,7 +797,7 @@
          font-style="normal"
          y="-4418.6582"
          x="3745.7725"
-         xml:space="preserve">rcu_process_callbacks()</text>
+         xml:space="preserve">rcu_core()</text>
       <text
          style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier"
          id="text202-7-5-3-27-0"
@@ -806,7 +806,7 @@
          font-style="normal"
          y="-4165.7954"
          x="3745.7725"
-         xml:space="preserve">rcu_check_quiescent_state())</text>
+         xml:space="preserve">rcu_check_quiescent_state()</text>
       <text
          style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier"
          id="text202-7-5-3-27-0-9"
diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Requirements/Requirements.html b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Requirements/Requirements.html
index 9fca73e03a98..5a9238a2883c 100644
--- a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Requirements/Requirements.html
+++ b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Requirements/Requirements.html
@@ -3099,7 +3099,7 @@ If you block forever in one of a given domain's SRCU read-side critical
 sections, then that domain's grace periods will also be blocked forever.
 Of course, one good way to block forever is to deadlock, which can
 happen if any operation in a given domain's SRCU read-side critical
-section can block waiting, either directly or indirectly, for that domain's
+section can wait, either directly or indirectly, for that domain's
 grace period to elapse.
 For example, this results in a self-deadlock:
 
@@ -3139,12 +3139,18 @@ API, which, in combination with <tt>srcu_read_unlock()</tt>,
 guarantees a full memory barrier.
 
 <p>
-Also unlike other RCU flavors, SRCU's callbacks-wait function
-<tt>srcu_barrier()</tt> may be invoked from CPU-hotplug notifiers,
-though this is not necessarily a good idea.
-The reason that this is possible is that SRCU is insensitive
-to whether or not a CPU is online, which means that <tt>srcu_barrier()</tt>
-need not exclude CPU-hotplug operations.
+Also unlike other RCU flavors, <tt>synchronize_srcu()</tt> may <b>not</b>
+be invoked from CPU-hotplug notifiers, due to the fact that SRCU grace
+periods make use of timers and the possibility of timers being temporarily
+&ldquo;stranded&rdquo; on the outgoing CPU.
+This stranding of timers means that timers posted to the outgoing CPU
+will not fire until late in the CPU-hotplug process.
+The problem is that if a notifier is waiting on an SRCU grace period,
+that grace period is waiting on a timer, and that timer is stranded on the
+outgoing CPU, then the notifier will never be awakened, in other words,
+deadlock has occurred.
+This same situation of course also prohibits <tt>srcu_barrier()</tt>
+from being invoked from CPU-hotplug notifiers.
 
 <p>
 SRCU also differs from other RCU flavors in that SRCU's expedited and
diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/NMI-RCU.txt b/Documentation/RCU/NMI-RCU.txt
index 687777f83b23..881353fd5bff 100644
--- a/Documentation/RCU/NMI-RCU.txt
+++ b/Documentation/RCU/NMI-RCU.txt
@@ -81,18 +81,19 @@ currently executing on some other CPU.  We therefore cannot free
 up any data structures used by the old NMI handler until execution
 of it completes on all other CPUs.
 
-One way to accomplish this is via synchronize_sched(), perhaps as
+One way to accomplish this is via synchronize_rcu(), perhaps as
 follows:
 
 	unset_nmi_callback();
-	synchronize_sched();
+	synchronize_rcu();
 	kfree(my_nmi_data);
 
-This works because synchronize_sched() blocks until all CPUs complete
-any preemption-disabled segments of code that they were executing.
-Since NMI handlers disable preemption, synchronize_sched() is guaranteed
+This works because (as of v4.20) synchronize_rcu() blocks until all
+CPUs complete any preemption-disabled segments of code that they were
+executing.
+Since NMI handlers disable preemption, synchronize_rcu() is guaranteed
 not to return until all ongoing NMI handlers exit.  It is therefore safe
-to free up the handler's data as soon as synchronize_sched() returns.
+to free up the handler's data as soon as synchronize_rcu() returns.
 
 Important note: for this to work, the architecture in question must
 invoke nmi_enter() and nmi_exit() on NMI entry and exit, respectively.
diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/UP.txt b/Documentation/RCU/UP.txt
index 90ec5341ee98..53bde717017b 100644
--- a/Documentation/RCU/UP.txt
+++ b/Documentation/RCU/UP.txt
@@ -86,10 +86,8 @@ even on a UP system.  So do not do it!  Even on a UP system, the RCU
 infrastructure -must- respect grace periods, and -must- invoke callbacks
 from a known environment in which no locks are held.
 
-It -is- safe for synchronize_sched() and synchronize_rcu_bh() to return
-immediately on an UP system.  It is also safe for synchronize_rcu()
-to return immediately on UP systems, except when running preemptable
-RCU.
+Note that it -is- safe for synchronize_rcu() to return immediately on
+UP systems, including !PREEMPT SMP builds running on UP systems.
 
 Quick Quiz #3: Why can't synchronize_rcu() return immediately on
 	UP systems running preemptable RCU?
diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt b/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt
index 6f469864d9f5..e98ff261a438 100644
--- a/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt
+++ b/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt
@@ -182,16 +182,13 @@ over a rather long period of time, but improvements are always welcome!
 		when publicizing a pointer to a structure that can
 		be traversed by an RCU read-side critical section.
 
-5.	If call_rcu(), or a related primitive such as call_rcu_bh(),
-	call_rcu_sched(), or call_srcu() is used, the callback function
-	will be called from softirq context.  In particular, it cannot
-	block.
+5.	If call_rcu() or call_srcu() is used, the callback function will
+	be called from softirq context.  In particular, it cannot block.
 
-6.	Since synchronize_rcu() can block, it cannot be called from
-	any sort of irq context.  The same rule applies for
-	synchronize_rcu_bh(), synchronize_sched(), synchronize_srcu(),
-	synchronize_rcu_expedited(), synchronize_rcu_bh_expedited(),
-	synchronize_sched_expedite(), and synchronize_srcu_expedited().
+6.	Since synchronize_rcu() can block, it cannot be called
+	from any sort of irq context.  The same rule applies
+	for synchronize_srcu(), synchronize_rcu_expedited(), and
+	synchronize_srcu_expedited().
 
 	The expedited forms of these primitives have the same semantics
 	as the non-expedited forms, but expediting is both expensive and
@@ -212,20 +209,20 @@ over a rather long period of time, but improvements are always welcome!
 	of the system, especially to real-time workloads running on
 	the rest of the system.
 
-7.	If the updater uses call_rcu() or synchronize_rcu(), then the
-	corresponding readers must use rcu_read_lock() and
-	rcu_read_unlock().  If the updater uses call_rcu_bh() or
-	synchronize_rcu_bh(), then the corresponding readers must
-	use rcu_read_lock_bh() and rcu_read_unlock_bh().  If the
-	updater uses call_rcu_sched() or synchronize_sched(), then
-	the corresponding readers must disable preemption, possibly
-	by calling rcu_read_lock_sched() and rcu_read_unlock_sched().
-	If the updater uses synchronize_srcu() or call_srcu(), then
-	the corresponding readers must use srcu_read_lock() and
+7.	As of v4.20, a given kernel implements only one RCU flavor,
+	which is RCU-sched for PREEMPT=n and RCU-preempt for PREEMPT=y.
+	If the updater uses call_rcu() or synchronize_rcu(),
+	then the corresponding readers my use rcu_read_lock() and
+	rcu_read_unlock(), rcu_read_lock_bh() and rcu_read_unlock_bh(),
+	or any pair of primitives that disables and re-enables preemption,
+	for example, rcu_read_lock_sched() and rcu_read_unlock_sched().
+	If the updater uses synchronize_srcu() or call_srcu(),
+	then the corresponding readers must use srcu_read_lock() and
 	srcu_read_unlock(), and with the same srcu_struct.  The rules for
 	the expedited primitives are the same as for their non-expedited
 	counterparts.  Mixing things up will result in confusion and
-	broken kernels.
+	broken kernels, and has even resulted in an exploitable security
+	issue.
 
 	One exception to this rule: rcu_read_lock() and rcu_read_unlock()
 	may be substituted for rcu_read_lock_bh() and rcu_read_unlock_bh()
@@ -288,8 +285,7 @@ over a rather long period of time, but improvements are always welcome!
 	d.	Periodically invoke synchronize_rcu(), permitting a limited
 		number of updates per grace period.
 
-	The same cautions apply to call_rcu_bh(), call_rcu_sched(),
-	call_srcu(), and kfree_rcu().
+	The same cautions apply to call_srcu() and kfree_rcu().
 
 	Note that although these primitives do take action to avoid memory
 	exhaustion when any given CPU has too many callbacks, a determined
@@ -322,7 +318,7 @@ over a rather long period of time, but improvements are always welcome!
 
 11.	Any lock acquired by an RCU callback must be acquired elsewhere
 	with softirq disabled, e.g., via spin_lock_irqsave(),
-	spin_lock_bh(), etc.  Failing to disable irq on a given
+	spin_lock_bh(), etc.  Failing to disable softirq on a given
 	acquisition of that lock will result in deadlock as soon as
 	the RCU softirq handler happens to run your RCU callback while
 	interrupting that acquisition's critical section.
@@ -335,13 +331,16 @@ over a rather long period of time, but improvements are always welcome!
 	must use whatever locking or other synchronization is required
 	to safely access and/or modify that data structure.
 
-	RCU callbacks are -usually- executed on the same CPU that executed
-	the corresponding call_rcu(), call_rcu_bh(), or call_rcu_sched(),
-	but are by -no- means guaranteed to be.  For example, if a given
-	CPU goes offline while having an RCU callback pending, then that
-	RCU callback will execute on some surviving CPU.  (If this was
-	not the case, a self-spawning RCU callback would prevent the
-	victim CPU from ever going offline.)
+	Do not assume that RCU callbacks will be executed on the same
+	CPU that executed the corresponding call_rcu() or call_srcu().
+	For example, if a given CPU goes offline while having an RCU
+	callback pending, then that RCU callback will execute on some
+	surviving CPU.	(If this was not the case, a self-spawning RCU
+	callback would prevent the victim CPU from ever going offline.)
+	Furthermore, CPUs designated by rcu_nocbs= might well -always-
+	have their RCU callbacks executed on some other CPUs, in fact,
+	for some  real-time workloads, this is the whole point of using
+	the rcu_nocbs= kernel boot parameter.
 
 13.	Unlike other forms of RCU, it -is- permissible to block in an
 	SRCU read-side critical section (demarked by srcu_read_lock()
@@ -381,11 +380,11 @@ over a rather long period of time, but improvements are always welcome!
 
 	SRCU's expedited primitive (synchronize_srcu_expedited())
 	never sends IPIs to other CPUs, so it is easier on
-	real-time workloads than is synchronize_rcu_expedited(),
-	synchronize_rcu_bh_expedited() or synchronize_sched_expedited().
+	real-time workloads than is synchronize_rcu_expedited().
 
-	Note that rcu_dereference() and rcu_assign_pointer() relate to
-	SRCU just as they do to other forms of RCU.
+	Note that rcu_assign_pointer() relates to SRCU just as it does to
+	other forms of RCU, but instead of rcu_dereference() you should
+	use srcu_dereference() in order to avoid lockdep splats.
 
 14.	The whole point of call_rcu(), synchronize_rcu(), and friends
 	is to wait until all pre-existing readers have finished before
@@ -405,6 +404,9 @@ over a rather long period of time, but improvements are always welcome!
 	read-side critical sections.  It is the responsibility of the
 	RCU update-side primitives to deal with this.
 
+	For SRCU readers, you can use smp_mb__after_srcu_read_unlock()
+	immediately after an srcu_read_unlock() to get a full barrier.
+
 16.	Use CONFIG_PROVE_LOCKING, CONFIG_DEBUG_OBJECTS_RCU_HEAD, and the
 	__rcu sparse checks to validate your RCU code.	These can help
 	find problems as follows:
@@ -428,22 +430,19 @@ over a rather long period of time, but improvements are always welcome!
 	These debugging aids can help you find problems that are
 	otherwise extremely difficult to spot.
 
-17.	If you register a callback using call_rcu(), call_rcu_bh(),
-	call_rcu_sched(), or call_srcu(), and pass in a function defined
-	within a loadable module, then it in necessary to wait for
-	all pending callbacks to be invoked after the last invocation
-	and before unloading that module.  Note that it is absolutely
-	-not- sufficient to wait for a grace period!  The current (say)
-	synchronize_rcu() implementation waits only for all previous
-	callbacks registered on the CPU that synchronize_rcu() is running
-	on, but it is -not- guaranteed to wait for callbacks registered
-	on other CPUs.
+17.	If you register a callback using call_rcu() or call_srcu(), and
+	pass in a function defined within a loadable module, then it in
+	necessary to wait for all pending callbacks to be invoked after
+	the last invocation and before unloading that module.  Note that
+	it is absolutely -not- sufficient to wait for a grace period!
+	The current (say) synchronize_rcu() implementation is -not-
+	guaranteed to wait for callbacks registered on other CPUs.
+	Or even on the current CPU if that CPU recently went offline
+	and came back online.
 
 	You instead need to use one of the barrier functions:
 
 	o	call_rcu() -> rcu_barrier()
-	o	call_rcu_bh() -> rcu_barrier()
-	o	call_rcu_sched() -> rcu_barrier()
 	o	call_srcu() -> srcu_barrier()
 
 	However, these barrier functions are absolutely -not- guaranteed
diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/lockdep-splat.txt b/Documentation/RCU/lockdep-splat.txt
index 238e9f61352f..9c015976b174 100644
--- a/Documentation/RCU/lockdep-splat.txt
+++ b/Documentation/RCU/lockdep-splat.txt
@@ -14,9 +14,9 @@ being the real world and all that.
 So let's look at an example RCU lockdep splat from 3.0-rc5, one that
 has long since been fixed:
 
-===============================
-[ INFO: suspicious RCU usage. ]
--------------------------------
+=============================
+WARNING: suspicious RCU usage
+-----------------------------
 block/cfq-iosched.c:2776 suspicious rcu_dereference_protected() usage!
 
 other info that might help us debug this:
@@ -24,11 +24,11 @@ other info that might help us debug this:
 
 rcu_scheduler_active = 1, debug_locks = 0
 3 locks held by scsi_scan_6/1552:
- #0:  (&shost->scan_mutex){+.+.+.}, at: [<ffffffff8145efca>]
+ #0:  (&shost->scan_mutex){+.+.}, at: [<ffffffff8145efca>]
 scsi_scan_host_selected+0x5a/0x150
- #1:  (&eq->sysfs_lock){+.+...}, at: [<ffffffff812a5032>]
+ #1:  (&eq->sysfs_lock){+.+.}, at: [<ffffffff812a5032>]
 elevator_exit+0x22/0x60
- #2:  (&(&q->__queue_lock)->rlock){-.-...}, at: [<ffffffff812b6233>]
+ #2:  (&(&q->__queue_lock)->rlock){-.-.}, at: [<ffffffff812b6233>]
 cfq_exit_queue+0x43/0x190
 
 stack backtrace:
diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/rcu.txt b/Documentation/RCU/rcu.txt
index 721b3e426515..c818cf65c5a9 100644
--- a/Documentation/RCU/rcu.txt
+++ b/Documentation/RCU/rcu.txt
@@ -52,10 +52,10 @@ o	If I am running on a uniprocessor kernel, which can only do one
 o	How can I see where RCU is currently used in the Linux kernel?
 
 	Search for "rcu_read_lock", "rcu_read_unlock", "call_rcu",
-	"rcu_read_lock_bh", "rcu_read_unlock_bh", "call_rcu_bh",
-	"srcu_read_lock", "srcu_read_unlock", "synchronize_rcu",
-	"synchronize_net", "synchronize_srcu", and the other RCU
-	primitives.  Or grab one of the cscope databases from:
+	"rcu_read_lock_bh", "rcu_read_unlock_bh", "srcu_read_lock",
+	"srcu_read_unlock", "synchronize_rcu", "synchronize_net",
+	"synchronize_srcu", and the other RCU primitives.  Or grab one
+	of the cscope databases from:
 
 	http://www.rdrop.com/users/paulmck/RCU/linuxusage/rculocktab.html
 
diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/rcu_dereference.txt b/Documentation/RCU/rcu_dereference.txt
index ab96227bad42..bf699e8cfc75 100644
--- a/Documentation/RCU/rcu_dereference.txt
+++ b/Documentation/RCU/rcu_dereference.txt
@@ -351,3 +351,106 @@ garbage values.
 
 In short, rcu_dereference() is -not- optional when you are going to
 dereference the resulting pointer.
+
+
+WHICH MEMBER OF THE rcu_dereference() FAMILY SHOULD YOU USE?
+
+First, please avoid using rcu_dereference_raw() and also please avoid
+using rcu_dereference_check() and rcu_dereference_protected() with a
+second argument with a constant value of 1 (or true, for that matter).
+With that caution out of the way, here is some guidance for which
+member of the rcu_dereference() to use in various situations:
+
+1.	If the access needs to be within an RCU read-side critical
+	section, use rcu_dereference().  With the new consolidated
+	RCU flavors, an RCU read-side critical section is entered
+	using rcu_read_lock(), anything that disables bottom halves,
+	anything that disables interrupts, or anything that disables
+	preemption.
+
+2.	If the access might be within an RCU read-side critical section
+	on the one hand, or protected by (say) my_lock on the other,
+	use rcu_dereference_check(), for example:
+
+		p1 = rcu_dereference_check(p->rcu_protected_pointer,
+					   lockdep_is_held(&my_lock));
+
+
+3.	If the access might be within an RCU read-side critical section
+	on the one hand, or protected by either my_lock or your_lock on
+	the other, again use rcu_dereference_check(), for example:
+
+		p1 = rcu_dereference_check(p->rcu_protected_pointer,
+					   lockdep_is_held(&my_lock) ||
+					   lockdep_is_held(&your_lock));
+
+4.	If the access is on the update side, so that it is always protected
+	by my_lock, use rcu_dereference_protected():
+
+		p1 = rcu_dereference_protected(p->rcu_protected_pointer,
+					       lockdep_is_held(&my_lock));
+
+	This can be extended to handle multiple locks as in #3 above,
+	and both can be extended to check other conditions as well.
+
+5.	If the protection is supplied by the caller, and is thus unknown
+	to this code, that is the rare case when rcu_dereference_raw()
+	is appropriate.  In addition, rcu_dereference_raw() might be
+	appropriate when the lockdep expression would be excessively
+	complex, except that a better approach in that case might be to
+	take a long hard look at your synchronization design.  Still,
+	there are data-locking cases where any one of a very large number
+	of locks or reference counters suffices to protect the pointer,
+	so rcu_dereference_raw() does have its place.
+
+	However, its place is probably quite a bit smaller than one
+	might expect given the number of uses in the current kernel.
+	Ditto for its synonym, rcu_dereference_check( ... , 1), and
+	its close relative, rcu_dereference_protected(... , 1).
+
+
+SPARSE CHECKING OF RCU-PROTECTED POINTERS
+
+The sparse static-analysis tool checks for direct access to RCU-protected
+pointers, which can result in "interesting" bugs due to compiler
+optimizations involving invented loads and perhaps also load tearing.
+For example, suppose someone mistakenly does something like this:
+
+	p = q->rcu_protected_pointer;
+	do_something_with(p->a);
+	do_something_else_with(p->b);
+
+If register pressure is high, the compiler might optimize "p" out
+of existence, transforming the code to something like this:
+
+	do_something_with(q->rcu_protected_pointer->a);
+	do_something_else_with(q->rcu_protected_pointer->b);
+
+This could fatally disappoint your code if q->rcu_protected_pointer
+changed in the meantime.  Nor is this a theoretical problem:  Exactly
+this sort of bug cost Paul E. McKenney (and several of his innocent
+colleagues) a three-day weekend back in the early 1990s.
+
+Load tearing could of course result in dereferencing a mashup of a pair
+of pointers, which also might fatally disappoint your code.
+
+These problems could have been avoided simply by making the code instead
+read as follows:
+
+	p = rcu_dereference(q->rcu_protected_pointer);
+	do_something_with(p->a);
+	do_something_else_with(p->b);
+
+Unfortunately, these sorts of bugs can be extremely hard to spot during
+review.  This is where the sparse tool comes into play, along with the
+"__rcu" marker.  If you mark a pointer declaration, whether in a structure
+or as a formal parameter, with "__rcu", which tells sparse to complain if
+this pointer is accessed directly.  It will also cause sparse to complain
+if a pointer not marked with "__rcu" is accessed using rcu_dereference()
+and friends.  For example, ->rcu_protected_pointer might be declared as
+follows:
+
+	struct foo __rcu *rcu_protected_pointer;
+
+Use of "__rcu" is opt-in.  If you choose not to use it, then you should
+ignore the sparse warnings.
diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/rcubarrier.txt b/Documentation/RCU/rcubarrier.txt
index 5d7759071a3e..a2782df69732 100644
--- a/Documentation/RCU/rcubarrier.txt
+++ b/Documentation/RCU/rcubarrier.txt
@@ -83,16 +83,15 @@ Pseudo-code using rcu_barrier() is as follows:
    2. Execute rcu_barrier().
    3. Allow the module to be unloaded.
 
-There are also rcu_barrier_bh(), rcu_barrier_sched(), and srcu_barrier()
-functions for the other flavors of RCU, and you of course must match
-the flavor of rcu_barrier() with that of call_rcu().  If your module
-uses multiple flavors of call_rcu(), then it must also use multiple
+There is also an srcu_barrier() function for SRCU, and you of course
+must match the flavor of rcu_barrier() with that of call_rcu().  If your
+module uses multiple flavors of call_rcu(), then it must also use multiple
 flavors of rcu_barrier() when unloading that module.  For example, if
-it uses call_rcu_bh(), call_srcu() on srcu_struct_1, and call_srcu() on
+it uses call_rcu(), call_srcu() on srcu_struct_1, and call_srcu() on
 srcu_struct_2(), then the following three lines of code will be required
 when unloading:
 
- 1 rcu_barrier_bh();
+ 1 rcu_barrier();
  2 srcu_barrier(&srcu_struct_1);
  3 srcu_barrier(&srcu_struct_2);
 
@@ -185,12 +184,12 @@ module invokes call_rcu() from timers, you will need to first cancel all
 the timers, and only then invoke rcu_barrier() to wait for any remaining
 RCU callbacks to complete.
 
-Of course, if you module uses call_rcu_bh(), you will need to invoke
-rcu_barrier_bh() before unloading.  Similarly, if your module uses
-call_rcu_sched(), you will need to invoke rcu_barrier_sched() before
-unloading.  If your module uses call_rcu(), call_rcu_bh(), -and-
-call_rcu_sched(), then you will need to invoke each of rcu_barrier(),
-rcu_barrier_bh(), and rcu_barrier_sched().
+Of course, if you module uses call_rcu(), you will need to invoke
+rcu_barrier() before unloading.  Similarly, if your module uses
+call_srcu(), you will need to invoke srcu_barrier() before unloading,
+and on the same srcu_struct structure.  If your module uses call_rcu()
+-and- call_srcu(), then you will need to invoke rcu_barrier() -and-
+srcu_barrier().
 
 
 Implementing rcu_barrier()
@@ -223,8 +222,8 @@ shown below. Note that the final "1" in on_each_cpu()'s argument list
 ensures that all the calls to rcu_barrier_func() will have completed
 before on_each_cpu() returns. Line 9 then waits for the completion.
 
-This code was rewritten in 2008 to support rcu_barrier_bh() and
-rcu_barrier_sched() in addition to the original rcu_barrier().
+This code was rewritten in 2008 and several times thereafter, but this
+still gives the general idea.
 
 The rcu_barrier_func() runs on each CPU, where it invokes call_rcu()
 to post an RCU callback, as follows:
diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt b/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt
index 073dbc12d1ea..1ab70c37921f 100644
--- a/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt
+++ b/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt
@@ -219,17 +219,18 @@ an estimate of the total number of RCU callbacks queued across all CPUs
 In kernels with CONFIG_RCU_FAST_NO_HZ, more information is printed
 for each CPU:
 
-	0: (64628 ticks this GP) idle=dd5/3fffffffffffffff/0 softirq=82/543 last_accelerate: a345/d342 nonlazy_posted: 25 .D
+	0: (64628 ticks this GP) idle=dd5/3fffffffffffffff/0 softirq=82/543 last_accelerate: a345/d342 Nonlazy posted: ..D
 
 The "last_accelerate:" prints the low-order 16 bits (in hex) of the
 jiffies counter when this CPU last invoked rcu_try_advance_all_cbs()
 from rcu_needs_cpu() or last invoked rcu_accelerate_cbs() from
-rcu_prepare_for_idle().  The "nonlazy_posted:" prints the number
-of non-lazy callbacks posted since the last call to rcu_needs_cpu().
-Finally, an "L" indicates that there are currently no non-lazy callbacks
-("." is printed otherwise, as shown above) and "D" indicates that
-dyntick-idle processing is enabled ("." is printed otherwise, for example,
-if disabled via the "nohz=" kernel boot parameter).
+rcu_prepare_for_idle().  The "Nonlazy posted:" indicates lazy-callback
+status, so that an "l" indicates that all callbacks were lazy at the start
+of the last idle period and an "L" indicates that there are currently
+no non-lazy callbacks (in both cases, "." is printed otherwise, as
+shown above) and "D" indicates that dyntick-idle processing is enabled
+("." is printed otherwise, for example, if disabled via the "nohz="
+kernel boot parameter).
 
 If the grace period ends just as the stall warning starts printing,
 there will be a spurious stall-warning message, which will include
diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/torture.txt b/Documentation/RCU/torture.txt
index 55918b54808b..a41a0384d20c 100644
--- a/Documentation/RCU/torture.txt
+++ b/Documentation/RCU/torture.txt
@@ -10,173 +10,8 @@ status messages via printk(), which can be examined via the dmesg
 command (perhaps grepping for "torture").  The test is started
 when the module is loaded, and stops when the module is unloaded.
 
-
-MODULE PARAMETERS
-
-This module has the following parameters:
-
-fqs_duration	Duration (in microseconds) of artificially induced bursts
-		of force_quiescent_state() invocations.  In RCU
-		implementations having force_quiescent_state(), these
-		bursts help force races between forcing a given grace
-		period and that grace period ending on its own.
-
-fqs_holdoff	Holdoff time (in microseconds) between consecutive calls
-		to force_quiescent_state() within a burst.
-
-fqs_stutter	Wait time (in seconds) between consecutive bursts
-		of calls to force_quiescent_state().
-
-gp_normal	Make the fake writers use normal synchronous grace-period
-		primitives.
-
-gp_exp		Make the fake writers use expedited synchronous grace-period
-		primitives.  If both gp_normal and gp_exp are set, or
-		if neither gp_normal nor gp_exp are set, then randomly
-		choose the primitive so that about 50% are normal and
-		50% expedited.  By default, neither are set, which
-		gives best overall test coverage.
-
-irqreader	Says to invoke RCU readers from irq level.  This is currently
-		done via timers.  Defaults to "1" for variants of RCU that
-		permit this.  (Or, more accurately, variants of RCU that do
-		-not- permit this know to ignore this variable.)
-
-n_barrier_cbs	If this is nonzero, RCU barrier testing will be conducted,
-		in which case n_barrier_cbs specifies the number of
-		RCU callbacks (and corresponding kthreads) to use for
-		this testing.  The value cannot be negative.  If you
-		specify this to be non-zero when torture_type indicates a
-		synchronous RCU implementation (one for which a member of
-		the synchronize_rcu() rather than the call_rcu() family is
-		used -- see the documentation for torture_type below), an
-		error will be reported and no testing will be carried out.
-
-nfakewriters	This is the number of RCU fake writer threads to run.  Fake
-		writer threads repeatedly use the synchronous "wait for
-		current readers" function of the interface selected by
-		torture_type, with a delay between calls to allow for various
-		different numbers of writers running in parallel.
-		nfakewriters defaults to 4, which provides enough parallelism
-		to trigger special cases caused by multiple writers, such as
-		the synchronize_srcu() early return optimization.
-
-nreaders	This is the number of RCU reading threads supported.
-		The default is twice the number of CPUs.  Why twice?
-		To properly exercise RCU implementations with preemptible
-		read-side critical sections.
-
-onoff_interval
-		The number of seconds between each attempt to execute a
-		randomly selected CPU-hotplug operation.  Defaults to
-		zero, which disables CPU hotplugging.  In HOTPLUG_CPU=n
-		kernels, rcutorture will silently refuse to do any
-		CPU-hotplug operations regardless of what value is
-		specified for onoff_interval.
-
-onoff_holdoff	The number of seconds to wait until starting CPU-hotplug
-		operations.  This would normally only be used when
-		rcutorture was built into the kernel and started
-		automatically at boot time, in which case it is useful
-		in order to avoid confusing boot-time code with CPUs
-		coming and going.
-
-shuffle_interval
-		The number of seconds to keep the test threads affinitied
-		to a particular subset of the CPUs, defaults to 3 seconds.
-		Used in conjunction with test_no_idle_hz.
-
-shutdown_secs	The number of seconds to run the test before terminating
-		the test and powering off the system.  The default is
-		zero, which disables test termination and system shutdown.
-		This capability is useful for automated testing.
-
-stall_cpu	The number of seconds that a CPU should be stalled while
-		within both an rcu_read_lock() and a preempt_disable().
-		This stall happens only once per rcutorture run.
-		If you need multiple stalls, use modprobe and rmmod to
-		repeatedly run rcutorture.  The default for stall_cpu
-		is zero, which prevents rcutorture from stalling a CPU.
-
-		Note that attempts to rmmod rcutorture while the stall
-		is ongoing will hang, so be careful what value you
-		choose for this module parameter!  In addition, too-large
-		values for stall_cpu might well induce failures and
-		warnings in other parts of the kernel.  You have been
-		warned!
-
-stall_cpu_holdoff
-		The number of seconds to wait after rcutorture starts
-		before stalling a CPU.  Defaults to 10 seconds.
-
-stat_interval	The number of seconds between output of torture
-		statistics (via printk()).  Regardless of the interval,
-		statistics are printed when the module is unloaded.
-		Setting the interval to zero causes the statistics to
-		be printed -only- when the module is unloaded, and this
-		is the default.
-
-stutter		The length of time to run the test before pausing for this
-		same period of time.  Defaults to "stutter=5", so as
-		to run and pause for (roughly) five-second intervals.
-		Specifying "stutter=0" causes the test to run continuously
-		without pausing, which is the old default behavior.
-
-test_boost	Whether or not to test the ability of RCU to do priority
-		boosting.  Defaults to "test_boost=1", which performs
-		RCU priority-inversion testing only if the selected
-		RCU implementation supports priority boosting.  Specifying
-		"test_boost=0" never performs RCU priority-inversion
-		testing.  Specifying "test_boost=2" performs RCU
-		priority-inversion testing even if the selected RCU
-		implementation does not support RCU priority boosting,
-		which can be used to test rcutorture's ability to
-		carry out RCU priority-inversion testing.
-
-test_boost_interval
-		The number of seconds in an RCU priority-inversion test
-		cycle.	Defaults to "test_boost_interval=7".  It is
-		usually wise for this value to be relatively prime to
-		the value selected for "stutter".
-
-test_boost_duration
-		The number of seconds to do RCU priority-inversion testing
-		within any given "test_boost_interval".  Defaults to
-		"test_boost_duration=4".
-
-test_no_idle_hz	Whether or not to test the ability of RCU to operate in
-		a kernel that disables the scheduling-clock interrupt to
-		idle CPUs.  Boolean parameter, "1" to test, "0" otherwise.
-		Defaults to omitting this test.
-
-torture_type	The type of RCU to test, with string values as follows:
-
-		"rcu":  rcu_read_lock(), rcu_read_unlock() and call_rcu(),
-			along with expedited, synchronous, and polling
-			variants.
-
-		"rcu_bh": rcu_read_lock_bh(), rcu_read_unlock_bh(), and
-			call_rcu_bh(), along with expedited and synchronous
-			variants.
-
-		"rcu_busted": This tests an intentionally incorrect version
-			of RCU in order to help test rcutorture itself.
-
-		"srcu": srcu_read_lock(), srcu_read_unlock() and
-			call_srcu(), along with expedited and
-			synchronous variants.
-
-		"sched": preempt_disable(), preempt_enable(), and
-			call_rcu_sched(), along with expedited,
-			synchronous, and polling variants.
-
-		"tasks": voluntary context switch and call_rcu_tasks(),
-			along with expedited and synchronous variants.
-
-		Defaults to "rcu".
-
-verbose		Enable debug printk()s.  Default is disabled.
-
+Module parameters are prefixed by "rcutorture." in
+Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.txt.
 
 OUTPUT
 
diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt b/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt
index 4a6854318b17..981651a8b65d 100644
--- a/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt
+++ b/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt
@@ -302,7 +302,7 @@ rcu_dereference()
 	must prohibit.	The rcu_dereference_protected() variant takes
 	a lockdep expression to indicate which locks must be acquired
 	by the caller. If the indicated protection is not provided,
-	a lockdep splat is emitted.  See RCU/Design/Requirements.html
+	a lockdep splat is emitted.  See RCU/Design/Requirements/Requirements.html
 	and the API's code comments for more details and example usage.
 
 The following diagram shows how each API communicates among the
@@ -310,7 +310,7 @@ reader, updater, and reclaimer.
 
 
 	    rcu_assign_pointer()
-	    			    +--------+
+	                            +--------+
 	    +---------------------->| reader |---------+
 	    |                       +--------+         |
 	    |                           |              |
@@ -318,12 +318,12 @@ reader, updater, and reclaimer.
 	    |                           |              | rcu_read_lock()
 	    |                           |              | rcu_read_unlock()
 	    |        rcu_dereference()  |              |
-       +---------+                      |              |
-       | updater |<---------------------+              |
-       +---------+                                     V
+	    +---------+                 |              |
+	    | updater |<----------------+              |
+	    +---------+                                V
 	    |                                    +-----------+
 	    +----------------------------------->| reclaimer |
-	    				         +-----------+
+	                                         +-----------+
 	      Defer:
 	      synchronize_rcu() & call_rcu()
 
@@ -560,7 +560,7 @@ presents two such "toy" implementations of RCU, one that is implemented
 in terms of familiar locking primitives, and another that more closely
 resembles "classic" RCU.  Both are way too simple for real-world use,
 lacking both functionality and performance.  However, they are useful
-in getting a feel for how RCU works.  See kernel/rcupdate.c for a
+in getting a feel for how RCU works.  See kernel/rcu/update.c for a
 production-quality implementation, and see:
 
 	http://www.rdrop.com/users/paulmck/RCU
diff --git a/Documentation/accounting/psi.txt b/Documentation/accounting/psi.txt
index b8ca28b60215..5cbe5659e3b7 100644
--- a/Documentation/accounting/psi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/accounting/psi.txt
@@ -56,12 +56,116 @@ situation from a state where some tasks are stalled but the CPU is
 still doing productive work. As such, time spent in this subset of the
 stall state is tracked separately and exported in the "full" averages.
 
-The ratios are tracked as recent trends over ten, sixty, and three
-hundred second windows, which gives insight into short term events as
-well as medium and long term trends. The total absolute stall time is
-tracked and exported as well, to allow detection of latency spikes
-which wouldn't necessarily make a dent in the time averages, or to
-average trends over custom time frames.
+The ratios (in %) are tracked as recent trends over ten, sixty, and
+three hundred second windows, which gives insight into short term events
+as well as medium and long term trends. The total absolute stall time
+(in us) is tracked and exported as well, to allow detection of latency
+spikes which wouldn't necessarily make a dent in the time averages,
+or to average trends over custom time frames.
+
+Monitoring for pressure thresholds
+==================================
+
+Users can register triggers and use poll() to be woken up when resource
+pressure exceeds certain thresholds.
+
+A trigger describes the maximum cumulative stall time over a specific
+time window, e.g. 100ms of total stall time within any 500ms window to
+generate a wakeup event.
+
+To register a trigger user has to open psi interface file under
+/proc/pressure/ representing the resource to be monitored and write the
+desired threshold and time window. The open file descriptor should be
+used to wait for trigger events using select(), poll() or epoll().
+The following format is used:
+
+<some|full> <stall amount in us> <time window in us>
+
+For example writing "some 150000 1000000" into /proc/pressure/memory
+would add 150ms threshold for partial memory stall measured within
+1sec time window. Writing "full 50000 1000000" into /proc/pressure/io
+would add 50ms threshold for full io stall measured within 1sec time window.
+
+Triggers can be set on more than one psi metric and more than one trigger
+for the same psi metric can be specified. However for each trigger a separate
+file descriptor is required to be able to poll it separately from others,
+therefore for each trigger a separate open() syscall should be made even
+when opening the same psi interface file.
+
+Monitors activate only when system enters stall state for the monitored
+psi metric and deactivates upon exit from the stall state. While system is
+in the stall state psi signal growth is monitored at a rate of 10 times per
+tracking window.
+
+The kernel accepts window sizes ranging from 500ms to 10s, therefore min
+monitoring update interval is 50ms and max is 1s. Min limit is set to
+prevent overly frequent polling. Max limit is chosen as a high enough number
+after which monitors are most likely not needed and psi averages can be used
+instead.
+
+When activated, psi monitor stays active for at least the duration of one
+tracking window to avoid repeated activations/deactivations when system is
+bouncing in and out of the stall state.
+
+Notifications to the userspace are rate-limited to one per tracking window.
+
+The trigger will de-register when the file descriptor used to define the
+trigger  is closed.
+
+Userspace monitor usage example
+===============================
+
+#include <errno.h>
+#include <fcntl.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <poll.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+
+/*
+ * Monitor memory partial stall with 1s tracking window size
+ * and 150ms threshold.
+ */
+int main() {
+	const char trig[] = "some 150000 1000000";
+	struct pollfd fds;
+	int n;
+
+	fds.fd = open("/proc/pressure/memory", O_RDWR | O_NONBLOCK);
+	if (fds.fd < 0) {
+		printf("/proc/pressure/memory open error: %s\n",
+			strerror(errno));
+		return 1;
+	}
+	fds.events = POLLPRI;
+
+	if (write(fds.fd, trig, strlen(trig) + 1) < 0) {
+		printf("/proc/pressure/memory write error: %s\n",
+			strerror(errno));
+		return 1;
+	}
+
+	printf("waiting for events...\n");
+	while (1) {
+		n = poll(&fds, 1, -1);
+		if (n < 0) {
+			printf("poll error: %s\n", strerror(errno));
+			return 1;
+		}
+		if (fds.revents & POLLERR) {
+			printf("got POLLERR, event source is gone\n");
+			return 0;
+		}
+		if (fds.revents & POLLPRI) {
+			printf("event triggered!\n");
+		} else {
+			printf("unknown event received: 0x%x\n", fds.revents);
+			return 1;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return 0;
+}
 
 Cgroup2 interface
 =================
@@ -71,3 +175,6 @@ mounted, pressure stall information is also tracked for tasks grouped
 into cgroups. Each subdirectory in the cgroupfs mountpoint contains
 cpu.pressure, memory.pressure, and io.pressure files; the format is
 the same as the /proc/pressure/ files.
+
+Per-cgroup psi monitors can be specified and used the same way as
+system-wide ones.
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/aml-debugger.txt b/Documentation/acpi/aml-debugger.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index e851cc5de63f..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/acpi/aml-debugger.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,66 +0,0 @@
-The AML Debugger
-
-Copyright (C) 2016, Intel Corporation
-Author: Lv Zheng <lv.zheng@intel.com>
-
-
-This document describes the usage of the AML debugger embedded in the Linux
-kernel.
-
-1. Build the debugger
-
-   The following kernel configuration items are required to enable the AML
-   debugger interface from the Linux kernel:
-
-   CONFIG_ACPI_DEBUGGER=y
-   CONFIG_ACPI_DEBUGGER_USER=m
-
-   The userspace utilities can be built from the kernel source tree using
-   the following commands:
-
-   $ cd tools
-   $ make acpi
-
-   The resultant userspace tool binary is then located at:
-
-     tools/acpi/power/acpi/acpidbg/acpidbg
-
-   It can be installed to system directories by running "make install" (as a
-   sufficiently privileged user).
-
-2. Start the userspace debugger interface
-
-   After booting the kernel with the debugger built-in, the debugger can be
-   started by using the following commands:
-
-   # mount -t debugfs none /sys/kernel/debug
-   # modprobe acpi_dbg
-   # tools/acpi/power/acpi/acpidbg/acpidbg
-
-   That spawns the interactive AML debugger environment where you can execute
-   debugger commands.
-
-   The commands are documented in the "ACPICA Overview and Programmer Reference"
-   that can be downloaded from
-
-   https://acpica.org/documentation
-
-   The detailed debugger commands reference is located in Chapter 12 "ACPICA
-   Debugger Reference".  The "help" command can be used for a quick reference.
-
-3. Stop the userspace debugger interface
-
-   The interactive debugger interface can be closed by pressing Ctrl+C or using
-   the "quit" or "exit" commands.  When finished, unload the module with:
-
-   # rmmod acpi_dbg
-
-   The module unloading may fail if there is an acpidbg instance running.
-
-4. Run the debugger in a script
-
-   It may be useful to run the AML debugger in a test script. "acpidbg" supports
-   this in a special "batch" mode.  For example, the following command outputs
-   the entire ACPI namespace:
-
-   # acpidbg -b "namespace"
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/apei/output_format.txt b/Documentation/acpi/apei/output_format.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 0c49c197c47a..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/acpi/apei/output_format.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,147 +0,0 @@
-                     APEI output format
-                     ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-APEI uses printk as hardware error reporting interface, the output
-format is as follow.
-
-<error record> :=
-APEI generic hardware error status
-severity: <integer>, <severity string>
-section: <integer>, severity: <integer>, <severity string>
-flags: <integer>
-<section flags strings>
-fru_id: <uuid string>
-fru_text: <string>
-section_type: <section type string>
-<section data>
-
-<severity string>* := recoverable | fatal | corrected | info
-
-<section flags strings># :=
-[primary][, containment warning][, reset][, threshold exceeded]\
-[, resource not accessible][, latent error]
-
-<section type string> := generic processor error | memory error | \
-PCIe error | unknown, <uuid string>
-
-<section data> :=
-<generic processor section data> | <memory section data> | \
-<pcie section data> | <null>
-
-<generic processor section data> :=
-[processor_type: <integer>, <proc type string>]
-[processor_isa: <integer>, <proc isa string>]
-[error_type: <integer>
-<proc error type strings>]
-[operation: <integer>, <proc operation string>]
-[flags: <integer>
-<proc flags strings>]
-[level: <integer>]
-[version_info: <integer>]
-[processor_id: <integer>]
-[target_address: <integer>]
-[requestor_id: <integer>]
-[responder_id: <integer>]
-[IP: <integer>]
-
-<proc type string>* := IA32/X64 | IA64
-
-<proc isa string>* := IA32 | IA64 | X64
-
-<processor error type strings># :=
-[cache error][, TLB error][, bus error][, micro-architectural error]
-
-<proc operation string>* := unknown or generic | data read | data write | \
-instruction execution
-
-<proc flags strings># :=
-[restartable][, precise IP][, overflow][, corrected]
-
-<memory section data> :=
-[error_status: <integer>]
-[physical_address: <integer>]
-[physical_address_mask: <integer>]
-[node: <integer>]
-[card: <integer>]
-[module: <integer>]
-[bank: <integer>]
-[device: <integer>]
-[row: <integer>]
-[column: <integer>]
-[bit_position: <integer>]
-[requestor_id: <integer>]
-[responder_id: <integer>]
-[target_id: <integer>]
-[error_type: <integer>, <mem error type string>]
-
-<mem error type string>* :=
-unknown | no error | single-bit ECC | multi-bit ECC | \
-single-symbol chipkill ECC | multi-symbol chipkill ECC | master abort | \
-target abort | parity error | watchdog timeout | invalid address | \
-mirror Broken | memory sparing | scrub corrected error | \
-scrub uncorrected error
-
-<pcie section data> :=
-[port_type: <integer>, <pcie port type string>]
-[version: <integer>.<integer>]
-[command: <integer>, status: <integer>]
-[device_id: <integer>:<integer>:<integer>.<integer>
-slot: <integer>
-secondary_bus: <integer>
-vendor_id: <integer>, device_id: <integer>
-class_code: <integer>]
-[serial number: <integer>, <integer>]
-[bridge: secondary_status: <integer>, control: <integer>]
-[aer_status: <integer>, aer_mask: <integer>
-<aer status string>
-[aer_uncor_severity: <integer>]
-aer_layer=<aer layer string>, aer_agent=<aer agent string>
-aer_tlp_header: <integer> <integer> <integer> <integer>]
-
-<pcie port type string>* := PCIe end point | legacy PCI end point | \
-unknown | unknown | root port | upstream switch port | \
-downstream switch port | PCIe to PCI/PCI-X bridge | \
-PCI/PCI-X to PCIe bridge | root complex integrated endpoint device | \
-root complex event collector
-
-if section severity is fatal or recoverable
-<aer status string># :=
-unknown | unknown | unknown | unknown | Data Link Protocol | \
-unknown | unknown | unknown | unknown | unknown | unknown | unknown | \
-Poisoned TLP | Flow Control Protocol | Completion Timeout | \
-Completer Abort | Unexpected Completion | Receiver Overflow | \
-Malformed TLP | ECRC | Unsupported Request
-else
-<aer status string># :=
-Receiver Error | unknown | unknown | unknown | unknown | unknown | \
-Bad TLP | Bad DLLP | RELAY_NUM Rollover | unknown | unknown | unknown | \
-Replay Timer Timeout | Advisory Non-Fatal
-fi
-
-<aer layer string> :=
-Physical Layer | Data Link Layer | Transaction Layer
-
-<aer agent string> :=
-Receiver ID | Requester ID | Completer ID | Transmitter ID
-
-Where, [] designate corresponding content is optional
-
-All <field string> description with * has the following format:
-
-field: <integer>, <field string>
-
-Where value of <integer> should be the position of "string" in <field
-string> description. Otherwise, <field string> will be "unknown".
-
-All <field strings> description with # has the following format:
-
-field: <integer>
-<field strings>
-
-Where each string in <fields strings> corresponding to one set bit of
-<integer>. The bit position is the position of "string" in <field
-strings> description.
-
-For more detailed explanation of every field, please refer to UEFI
-specification version 2.3 or later, section Appendix N: Common
-Platform Error Record.
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/dsd/leds.txt b/Documentation/acpi/dsd/leds.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..81a63af42ed2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/acpi/dsd/leds.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
+Describing and referring to LEDs in ACPI
+
+Individual LEDs are described by hierarchical data extension [6] nodes under the
+device node, the LED driver chip. The "reg" property in the LED specific nodes
+tells the numerical ID of each individual LED output to which the LEDs are
+connected. [3] The hierarchical data nodes are named "led@X", where X is the
+number of the LED output.
+
+Referring to LEDs in Device tree is documented in [4], in "flash-leds" property
+documentation. In short, LEDs are directly referred to by using phandles.
+
+While Device tree allows referring to any node in the tree[1], in ACPI
+references are limited to device nodes only [2]. For this reason using the same
+mechanism on ACPI is not possible. A mechanism to refer to non-device ACPI nodes
+is documented in [7].
+
+ACPI allows (as does DT) using integer arguments after the reference. A
+combination of the LED driver device reference and an integer argument,
+referring to the "reg" property of the relevant LED, is used to identify
+individual LEDs. The value of the "reg" property is a contract between the
+firmware and software, it uniquely identifies the LED driver outputs.
+
+Under the LED driver device, The first hierarchical data extension package list
+entry shall contain the string "led@" followed by the number of the LED,
+followed by the referred object name. That object shall be named "LED" followed
+by the number of the LED.
+
+An ASL example of a camera sensor device and a LED driver device for two LEDs.
+Objects not relevant for LEDs or the references to them have been omitted.
+
+	Device (LED)
+	{
+		Name (_DSD, Package () {
+			ToUUID("dbb8e3e6-5886-4ba6-8795-1319f52a966b"),
+			Package () {
+				Package () { "led@0", LED0 },
+				Package () { "led@1", LED1 },
+			}
+		})
+		Name (LED0, Package () {
+			ToUUID("daffd814-6eba-4d8c-8a91-bc9bbf4aa301"),
+			Package () {
+				Package () { "reg", 0 },
+				Package () { "flash-max-microamp", 1000000 },
+				Package () { "flash-timeout-us", 200000 },
+				Package () { "led-max-microamp", 100000 },
+				Package () { "label", "white:flash" },
+			}
+		})
+		Name (LED1, Package () {
+			ToUUID("daffd814-6eba-4d8c-8a91-bc9bbf4aa301"),
+			Package () {
+				Package () { "reg", 1 },
+				Package () { "led-max-microamp", 10000 },
+				Package () { "label", "red:indicator" },
+			}
+		})
+	}
+
+	Device (SEN)
+	{
+		Name (_DSD, Package () {
+			ToUUID("daffd814-6eba-4d8c-8a91-bc9bbf4aa301"),
+			Package () {
+				Package () {
+					"flash-leds",
+					Package () { ^LED, "led@0", ^LED, "led@1" },
+				}
+			}
+		})
+	}
+
+where
+
+	LED	LED driver device
+	LED0	First LED
+	LED1	Second LED
+	SEN	Camera sensor device (or another device the LED is
+		related to)
+
+[1] Device tree. <URL:http://www.devicetree.org>, referenced 2019-02-21.
+
+[2] Advanced Configuration and Power Interface Specification.
+    <URL:https://uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/ACPI_6_3_final_Jan30.pdf>,
+    referenced 2019-02-21.
+
+[3] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/common.txt
+
+[4] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/video-interfaces.txt
+
+[5] Device Properties UUID For _DSD.
+    <URL:http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/_DSD-device-properties-UUID.pdf>,
+    referenced 2019-02-21.
+
+[6] Hierarchical Data Extension UUID For _DSD.
+    <URL:http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/_DSD-hierarchical-data-extension-UUID-v1.1.pdf>,
+    referenced 2019-02-21.
+
+[7] Documentation/acpi/dsd/data-node-reference.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/i2c-muxes.txt b/Documentation/acpi/i2c-muxes.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 9fcc4f0b885e..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/acpi/i2c-muxes.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,58 +0,0 @@
-ACPI I2C Muxes
---------------
-
-Describing an I2C device hierarchy that includes I2C muxes requires an ACPI
-Device () scope per mux channel.
-
-Consider this topology:
-
-+------+   +------+
-| SMB1 |-->| MUX0 |--CH00--> i2c client A (0x50)
-|      |   | 0x70 |--CH01--> i2c client B (0x50)
-+------+   +------+
-
-which corresponds to the following ASL:
-
-Device (SMB1)
-{
-    Name (_HID, ...)
-    Device (MUX0)
-    {
-        Name (_HID, ...)
-        Name (_CRS, ResourceTemplate () {
-            I2cSerialBus (0x70, ControllerInitiated, I2C_SPEED,
-                          AddressingMode7Bit, "^SMB1", 0x00,
-                          ResourceConsumer,,)
-        }
-
-        Device (CH00)
-        {
-            Name (_ADR, 0)
-
-            Device (CLIA)
-            {
-                Name (_HID, ...)
-                Name (_CRS, ResourceTemplate () {
-                    I2cSerialBus (0x50, ControllerInitiated, I2C_SPEED,
-                                  AddressingMode7Bit, "^CH00", 0x00,
-                                  ResourceConsumer,,)
-                }
-            }
-        }
-
-        Device (CH01)
-        {
-            Name (_ADR, 1)
-
-            Device (CLIB)
-            {
-                Name (_HID, ...)
-                Name (_CRS, ResourceTemplate () {
-                    I2cSerialBus (0x50, ControllerInitiated, I2C_SPEED,
-                                  AddressingMode7Bit, "^CH01", 0x00,
-                                  ResourceConsumer,,)
-                }
-            }
-        }
-    }
-}
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/initrd_table_override.txt b/Documentation/acpi/initrd_table_override.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index eb651a6aa285..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/acpi/initrd_table_override.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,107 +0,0 @@
-Upgrading ACPI tables via initrd
-================================
-
-1) Introduction (What is this about)
-2) What is this for
-3) How does it work
-4) References (Where to retrieve userspace tools)
-
-1) What is this about
----------------------
-
-If the ACPI_TABLE_UPGRADE compile option is true, it is possible to
-upgrade the ACPI execution environment that is defined by the ACPI tables
-via upgrading the ACPI tables provided by the BIOS with an instrumented,
-modified, more recent version one, or installing brand new ACPI tables.
-
-For a full list of ACPI tables that can be upgraded/installed, take a look
-at the char *table_sigs[MAX_ACPI_SIGNATURE]; definition in
-drivers/acpi/tables.c.
-All ACPI tables iasl (Intel's ACPI compiler and disassembler) knows should
-be overridable, except:
-   - ACPI_SIG_RSDP (has a signature of 6 bytes)
-   - ACPI_SIG_FACS (does not have an ordinary ACPI table header)
-Both could get implemented as well.
-
-
-2) What is this for
--------------------
-
-Complain to your platform/BIOS vendor if you find a bug which is so severe
-that a workaround is not accepted in the Linux kernel. And this facility
-allows you to upgrade the buggy tables before your platform/BIOS vendor
-releases an upgraded BIOS binary.
-
-This facility can be used by platform/BIOS vendors to provide a Linux
-compatible environment without modifying the underlying platform firmware.
-
-This facility also provides a powerful feature to easily debug and test
-ACPI BIOS table compatibility with the Linux kernel by modifying old
-platform provided ACPI tables or inserting new ACPI tables.
-
-It can and should be enabled in any kernel because there is no functional
-change with not instrumented initrds.
-
-
-3) How does it work
--------------------
-
-# Extract the machine's ACPI tables:
-cd /tmp
-acpidump >acpidump
-acpixtract -a acpidump
-# Disassemble, modify and recompile them:
-iasl -d *.dat
-# For example add this statement into a _PRT (PCI Routing Table) function
-# of the DSDT:
-Store("HELLO WORLD", debug)
-# And increase the OEM Revision. For example, before modification:
-DefinitionBlock ("DSDT.aml", "DSDT", 2, "INTEL ", "TEMPLATE", 0x00000000)
-# After modification:
-DefinitionBlock ("DSDT.aml", "DSDT", 2, "INTEL ", "TEMPLATE", 0x00000001)
-iasl -sa dsdt.dsl
-# Add the raw ACPI tables to an uncompressed cpio archive.
-# They must be put into a /kernel/firmware/acpi directory inside the cpio
-# archive. Note that if the table put here matches a platform table
-# (similar Table Signature, and similar OEMID, and similar OEM Table ID)
-# with a more recent OEM Revision, the platform table will be upgraded by
-# this table. If the table put here doesn't match a platform table
-# (dissimilar Table Signature, or dissimilar OEMID, or dissimilar OEM Table
-# ID), this table will be appended.
-mkdir -p kernel/firmware/acpi
-cp dsdt.aml kernel/firmware/acpi
-# A maximum of "NR_ACPI_INITRD_TABLES (64)" tables are currently allowed
-# (see osl.c):
-iasl -sa facp.dsl
-iasl -sa ssdt1.dsl
-cp facp.aml kernel/firmware/acpi
-cp ssdt1.aml kernel/firmware/acpi
-# The uncompressed cpio archive must be the first. Other, typically
-# compressed cpio archives, must be concatenated on top of the uncompressed
-# one. Following command creates the uncompressed cpio archive and
-# concatenates the original initrd on top:
-find kernel | cpio -H newc --create > /boot/instrumented_initrd
-cat /boot/initrd >>/boot/instrumented_initrd
-# reboot with increased acpi debug level, e.g. boot params:
-acpi.debug_level=0x2 acpi.debug_layer=0xFFFFFFFF
-# and check your syslog:
-[    1.268089] ACPI: PCI Interrupt Routing Table [\_SB_.PCI0._PRT]
-[    1.272091] [ACPI Debug]  String [0x0B] "HELLO WORLD"
-
-iasl is able to disassemble and recompile quite a lot different,
-also static ACPI tables.
-
-
-4) Where to retrieve userspace tools
-------------------------------------
-
-iasl and acpixtract are part of Intel's ACPICA project:
-http://acpica.org/
-and should be packaged by distributions (for example in the acpica package
-on SUSE).
-
-acpidump can be found in Len Browns pmtools:
-ftp://kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/lenb/acpi/utils/pmtools/acpidump
-This tool is also part of the acpica package on SUSE.
-Alternatively, used ACPI tables can be retrieved via sysfs in latest kernels:
-/sys/firmware/acpi/tables
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/method-customizing.txt b/Documentation/acpi/method-customizing.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 7235da975f23..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/acpi/method-customizing.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,73 +0,0 @@
-Linux ACPI Custom Control Method How To
-=======================================
-
-Written by Zhang Rui <rui.zhang@intel.com>
-
-
-Linux supports customizing ACPI control methods at runtime.
-
-Users can use this to
-1. override an existing method which may not work correctly,
-   or just for debugging purposes.
-2. insert a completely new method in order to create a missing
-   method such as _OFF, _ON, _STA, _INI, etc.
-For these cases, it is far simpler to dynamically install a single
-control method rather than override the entire DSDT, because kernel
-rebuild/reboot is not needed and test result can be got in minutes.
-
-Note: Only ACPI METHOD can be overridden, any other object types like
-      "Device", "OperationRegion", are not recognized. Methods
-      declared inside scope operators are also not supported.
-Note: The same ACPI control method can be overridden for many times,
-      and it's always the latest one that used by Linux/kernel.
-Note: To get the ACPI debug object output (Store (AAAA, Debug)),
-      please run "echo 1 > /sys/module/acpi/parameters/aml_debug_output".
-
-1. override an existing method
-   a) get the ACPI table via ACPI sysfs I/F. e.g. to get the DSDT,
-      just run "cat /sys/firmware/acpi/tables/DSDT > /tmp/dsdt.dat"
-   b) disassemble the table by running "iasl -d dsdt.dat".
-   c) rewrite the ASL code of the method and save it in a new file,
-   d) package the new file (psr.asl) to an ACPI table format.
-      Here is an example of a customized \_SB._AC._PSR method,
-
-      DefinitionBlock ("", "SSDT", 1, "", "", 0x20080715)
-      {
-	Method (\_SB_.AC._PSR, 0, NotSerialized)
-	{
-		Store ("In AC _PSR", Debug)
-		Return (ACON)
-	}
-      }
-      Note that the full pathname of the method in ACPI namespace
-      should be used.
-   e) assemble the file to generate the AML code of the method.
-      e.g. "iasl -vw 6084 psr.asl" (psr.aml is generated as a result)
-      If parameter "-vw 6084" is not supported by your iASL compiler,
-      please try a newer version.
-   f) mount debugfs by "mount -t debugfs none /sys/kernel/debug"
-   g) override the old method via the debugfs by running
-      "cat /tmp/psr.aml > /sys/kernel/debug/acpi/custom_method"
-
-2. insert a new method
-   This is easier than overriding an existing method.
-   We just need to create the ASL code of the method we want to
-   insert and then follow the step c) ~ g) in section 1.
-
-3. undo your changes
-   The "undo" operation is not supported for a new inserted method
-   right now, i.e. we can not remove a method currently.
-   For an overridden method, in order to undo your changes, please
-   save a copy of the method original ASL code in step c) section 1,
-   and redo step c) ~ g) to override the method with the original one.
-
-
-Note: We can use a kernel with multiple custom ACPI method running,
-      But each individual write to debugfs can implement a SINGLE
-      method override. i.e. if we want to insert/override multiple
-      ACPI methods, we need to redo step c) ~ g) for multiple times.
-
-Note: Be aware that root can mis-use this driver to modify arbitrary
-      memory and gain additional rights, if root's privileges got
-      restricted (for example if root is not allowed to load additional
-      modules after boot).
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/method-tracing.txt b/Documentation/acpi/method-tracing.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 0aba14c8f459..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/acpi/method-tracing.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,192 +0,0 @@
-ACPICA Trace Facility
-
-Copyright (C) 2015, Intel Corporation
-Author: Lv Zheng <lv.zheng@intel.com>
-
-
-Abstract:
-
-This document describes the functions and the interfaces of the method
-tracing facility.
-
-1. Functionalities and usage examples:
-
-   ACPICA provides method tracing capability. And two functions are
-   currently implemented using this capability.
-
-   A. Log reducer
-   ACPICA subsystem provides debugging outputs when CONFIG_ACPI_DEBUG is
-   enabled. The debugging messages which are deployed via
-   ACPI_DEBUG_PRINT() macro can be reduced at 2 levels - per-component
-   level (known as debug layer, configured via
-   /sys/module/acpi/parameters/debug_layer) and per-type level (known as
-   debug level, configured via /sys/module/acpi/parameters/debug_level).
-
-   But when the particular layer/level is applied to the control method
-   evaluations, the quantity of the debugging outputs may still be too
-   large to be put into the kernel log buffer. The idea thus is worked out
-   to only enable the particular debug layer/level (normally more detailed)
-   logs when the control method evaluation is started, and disable the
-   detailed logging when the control method evaluation is stopped.
-
-   The following command examples illustrate the usage of the "log reducer"
-   functionality:
-   a. Filter out the debug layer/level matched logs when control methods
-      are being evaluated:
-      # cd /sys/module/acpi/parameters
-      # echo "0xXXXXXXXX" > trace_debug_layer
-      # echo "0xYYYYYYYY" > trace_debug_level
-      # echo "enable" > trace_state
-   b. Filter out the debug layer/level matched logs when the specified
-      control method is being evaluated:
-      # cd /sys/module/acpi/parameters
-      # echo "0xXXXXXXXX" > trace_debug_layer
-      # echo "0xYYYYYYYY" > trace_debug_level
-      # echo "\PPPP.AAAA.TTTT.HHHH" > trace_method_name
-      # echo "method" > /sys/module/acpi/parameters/trace_state
-   c. Filter out the debug layer/level matched logs when the specified
-      control method is being evaluated for the first time:
-      # cd /sys/module/acpi/parameters
-      # echo "0xXXXXXXXX" > trace_debug_layer
-      # echo "0xYYYYYYYY" > trace_debug_level
-      # echo "\PPPP.AAAA.TTTT.HHHH" > trace_method_name
-      # echo "method-once" > /sys/module/acpi/parameters/trace_state
-   Where:
-      0xXXXXXXXX/0xYYYYYYYY: Refer to Documentation/acpi/debug.txt for
-			     possible debug layer/level masking values.
-      \PPPP.AAAA.TTTT.HHHH: Full path of a control method that can be found
-			    in the ACPI namespace. It needn't be an entry
-			    of a control method evaluation.
-
-   B. AML tracer
-
-   There are special log entries added by the method tracing facility at
-   the "trace points" the AML interpreter starts/stops to execute a control
-   method, or an AML opcode. Note that the format of the log entries are
-   subject to change:
-     [    0.186427]   exdebug-0398 ex_trace_point        : Method Begin [0xf58394d8:\_SB.PCI0.LPCB.ECOK] execution.
-     [    0.186630]   exdebug-0398 ex_trace_point        : Opcode Begin [0xf5905c88:If] execution.
-     [    0.186820]   exdebug-0398 ex_trace_point        : Opcode Begin [0xf5905cc0:LEqual] execution.
-     [    0.187010]   exdebug-0398 ex_trace_point        : Opcode Begin [0xf5905a20:-NamePath-] execution.
-     [    0.187214]   exdebug-0398 ex_trace_point        : Opcode End [0xf5905a20:-NamePath-] execution.
-     [    0.187407]   exdebug-0398 ex_trace_point        : Opcode Begin [0xf5905f60:One] execution.
-     [    0.187594]   exdebug-0398 ex_trace_point        : Opcode End [0xf5905f60:One] execution.
-     [    0.187789]   exdebug-0398 ex_trace_point        : Opcode End [0xf5905cc0:LEqual] execution.
-     [    0.187980]   exdebug-0398 ex_trace_point        : Opcode Begin [0xf5905cc0:Return] execution.
-     [    0.188146]   exdebug-0398 ex_trace_point        : Opcode Begin [0xf5905f60:One] execution.
-     [    0.188334]   exdebug-0398 ex_trace_point        : Opcode End [0xf5905f60:One] execution.
-     [    0.188524]   exdebug-0398 ex_trace_point        : Opcode End [0xf5905cc0:Return] execution.
-     [    0.188712]   exdebug-0398 ex_trace_point        : Opcode End [0xf5905c88:If] execution.
-     [    0.188903]   exdebug-0398 ex_trace_point        : Method End [0xf58394d8:\_SB.PCI0.LPCB.ECOK] execution.
-
-   Developers can utilize these special log entries to track the AML
-   interpretion, thus can aid issue debugging and performance tuning. Note
-   that, as the "AML tracer" logs are implemented via ACPI_DEBUG_PRINT()
-   macro, CONFIG_ACPI_DEBUG is also required to be enabled for enabling
-   "AML tracer" logs.
-
-   The following command examples illustrate the usage of the "AML tracer"
-   functionality:
-   a. Filter out the method start/stop "AML tracer" logs when control
-      methods are being evaluated:
-      # cd /sys/module/acpi/parameters
-      # echo "0x80" > trace_debug_layer
-      # echo "0x10" > trace_debug_level
-      # echo "enable" > trace_state
-   b. Filter out the method start/stop "AML tracer" when the specified
-      control method is being evaluated:
-      # cd /sys/module/acpi/parameters
-      # echo "0x80" > trace_debug_layer
-      # echo "0x10" > trace_debug_level
-      # echo "\PPPP.AAAA.TTTT.HHHH" > trace_method_name
-      # echo "method" > trace_state
-   c. Filter out the method start/stop "AML tracer" logs when the specified
-      control method is being evaluated for the first time:
-      # cd /sys/module/acpi/parameters
-      # echo "0x80" > trace_debug_layer
-      # echo "0x10" > trace_debug_level
-      # echo "\PPPP.AAAA.TTTT.HHHH" > trace_method_name
-      # echo "method-once" > trace_state
-   d. Filter out the method/opcode start/stop "AML tracer" when the
-      specified control method is being evaluated:
-      # cd /sys/module/acpi/parameters
-      # echo "0x80" > trace_debug_layer
-      # echo "0x10" > trace_debug_level
-      # echo "\PPPP.AAAA.TTTT.HHHH" > trace_method_name
-      # echo "opcode" > trace_state
-   e. Filter out the method/opcode start/stop "AML tracer" when the
-      specified control method is being evaluated for the first time:
-      # cd /sys/module/acpi/parameters
-      # echo "0x80" > trace_debug_layer
-      # echo "0x10" > trace_debug_level
-      # echo "\PPPP.AAAA.TTTT.HHHH" > trace_method_name
-      # echo "opcode-opcode" > trace_state
-
-  Note that all above method tracing facility related module parameters can
-  be used as the boot parameters, for example:
-      acpi.trace_debug_layer=0x80 acpi.trace_debug_level=0x10 \
-      acpi.trace_method_name=\_SB.LID0._LID acpi.trace_state=opcode-once
-
-2. Interface descriptions:
-
-   All method tracing functions can be configured via ACPI module
-   parameters that are accessible at /sys/module/acpi/parameters/:
-
-   trace_method_name
-	The full path of the AML method that the user wants to trace.
-	Note that the full path shouldn't contain the trailing "_"s in its
-	name segments but may contain "\" to form an absolute path.
-
-   trace_debug_layer
-	The temporary debug_layer used when the tracing feature is enabled.
-	Using ACPI_EXECUTER (0x80) by default, which is the debug_layer
-	used to match all "AML tracer" logs.
-
-   trace_debug_level
-	The temporary debug_level used when the tracing feature is enabled.
-	Using ACPI_LV_TRACE_POINT (0x10) by default, which is the
-	debug_level used to match all "AML tracer" logs.
-
-   trace_state
-	The status of the tracing feature.
-	Users can enable/disable this debug tracing feature by executing
-	the following command:
-	    # echo string > /sys/module/acpi/parameters/trace_state
-	Where "string" should be one of the following:
-	"disable"
-	    Disable the method tracing feature.
-	"enable"
-	    Enable the method tracing feature.
-	    ACPICA debugging messages matching
-	    "trace_debug_layer/trace_debug_level" during any method
-	    execution will be logged.
-	"method"
-	    Enable the method tracing feature.
-	    ACPICA debugging messages matching
-	    "trace_debug_layer/trace_debug_level" during method execution
-	    of "trace_method_name" will be logged.
-	"method-once"
-	    Enable the method tracing feature.
-	    ACPICA debugging messages matching
-	    "trace_debug_layer/trace_debug_level" during method execution
-	    of "trace_method_name" will be logged only once.
-	"opcode"
-	    Enable the method tracing feature.
-	    ACPICA debugging messages matching
-	    "trace_debug_layer/trace_debug_level" during method/opcode
-	    execution of "trace_method_name" will be logged.
-	"opcode-once"
-	    Enable the method tracing feature.
-	    ACPICA debugging messages matching
-	    "trace_debug_layer/trace_debug_level" during method/opcode
-	    execution of "trace_method_name" will be logged only once.
-	Note that, the difference between the "enable" and other feature
-        enabling options are:
-	1. When "enable" is specified, since
-	   "trace_debug_layer/trace_debug_level" shall apply to all control
-	   method evaluations, after configuring "trace_state" to "enable",
-	   "trace_method_name" will be reset to NULL.
-	2. When "method/opcode" is specified, if
-	   "trace_method_name" is NULL when "trace_state" is configured to
-	   these options, the "trace_debug_layer/trace_debug_level" will
-	   apply to all control method evaluations.
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/ssdt-overlays.txt b/Documentation/acpi/ssdt-overlays.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 5ae13f161ea2..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/acpi/ssdt-overlays.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,172 +0,0 @@
-
-In order to support ACPI open-ended hardware configurations (e.g. development
-boards) we need a way to augment the ACPI configuration provided by the firmware
-image. A common example is connecting sensors on I2C / SPI buses on development
-boards.
-
-Although this can be accomplished by creating a kernel platform driver or
-recompiling the firmware image with updated ACPI tables, neither is practical:
-the former proliferates board specific kernel code while the latter requires
-access to firmware tools which are often not publicly available.
-
-Because ACPI supports external references in AML code a more practical
-way to augment firmware ACPI configuration is by dynamically loading
-user defined SSDT tables that contain the board specific information.
-
-For example, to enumerate a Bosch BMA222E accelerometer on the I2C bus of the
-Minnowboard MAX development board exposed via the LSE connector [1], the
-following ASL code can be used:
-
-DefinitionBlock ("minnowmax.aml", "SSDT", 1, "Vendor", "Accel", 0x00000003)
-{
-    External (\_SB.I2C6, DeviceObj)
-
-    Scope (\_SB.I2C6)
-    {
-        Device (STAC)
-        {
-            Name (_ADR, Zero)
-            Name (_HID, "BMA222E")
-
-            Method (_CRS, 0, Serialized)
-            {
-                Name (RBUF, ResourceTemplate ()
-                {
-                    I2cSerialBus (0x0018, ControllerInitiated, 0x00061A80,
-                                  AddressingMode7Bit, "\\_SB.I2C6", 0x00,
-                                  ResourceConsumer, ,)
-                    GpioInt (Edge, ActiveHigh, Exclusive, PullDown, 0x0000,
-                             "\\_SB.GPO2", 0x00, ResourceConsumer, , )
-                    { // Pin list
-                        0
-                    }
-                })
-                Return (RBUF)
-            }
-        }
-    }
-}
-
-which can then be compiled to AML binary format:
-
-$ iasl minnowmax.asl
-
-Intel ACPI Component Architecture
-ASL Optimizing Compiler version 20140214-64 [Mar 29 2014]
-Copyright (c) 2000 - 2014 Intel Corporation
-
-ASL Input:     minnomax.asl - 30 lines, 614 bytes, 7 keywords
-AML Output:    minnowmax.aml - 165 bytes, 6 named objects, 1 executable opcodes
-
-[1] http://wiki.minnowboard.org/MinnowBoard_MAX#Low_Speed_Expansion_Connector_.28Top.29
-
-The resulting AML code can then be loaded by the kernel using one of the methods
-below.
-
-== Loading ACPI SSDTs from initrd ==
-
-This option allows loading of user defined SSDTs from initrd and it is useful
-when the system does not support EFI or when there is not enough EFI storage.
-
-It works in a similar way with initrd based ACPI tables override/upgrade: SSDT
-aml code must be placed in the first, uncompressed, initrd under the
-"kernel/firmware/acpi" path. Multiple files can be used and this will translate
-in loading multiple tables. Only SSDT and OEM tables are allowed. See
-initrd_table_override.txt for more details.
-
-Here is an example:
-
-# Add the raw ACPI tables to an uncompressed cpio archive.
-# They must be put into a /kernel/firmware/acpi directory inside the
-# cpio archive.
-# The uncompressed cpio archive must be the first.
-# Other, typically compressed cpio archives, must be
-# concatenated on top of the uncompressed one.
-mkdir -p kernel/firmware/acpi
-cp ssdt.aml kernel/firmware/acpi
-
-# Create the uncompressed cpio archive and concatenate the original initrd
-# on top:
-find kernel | cpio -H newc --create > /boot/instrumented_initrd
-cat /boot/initrd >>/boot/instrumented_initrd
-
-== Loading ACPI SSDTs from EFI variables ==
-
-This is the preferred method, when EFI is supported on the platform, because it
-allows a persistent, OS independent way of storing the user defined SSDTs. There
-is also work underway to implement EFI support for loading user defined SSDTs
-and using this method will make it easier to convert to the EFI loading
-mechanism when that will arrive.
-
-In order to load SSDTs from an EFI variable the efivar_ssdt kernel command line
-parameter can be used. The argument for the option is the variable name to
-use. If there are multiple variables with the same name but with different
-vendor GUIDs, all of them will be loaded.
-
-In order to store the AML code in an EFI variable the efivarfs filesystem can be
-used. It is enabled and mounted by default in /sys/firmware/efi/efivars in all
-recent distribution.
-
-Creating a new file in /sys/firmware/efi/efivars will automatically create a new
-EFI variable. Updating a file in /sys/firmware/efi/efivars will update the EFI
-variable. Please note that the file name needs to be specially formatted as
-"Name-GUID" and that the first 4 bytes in the file (little-endian format)
-represent the attributes of the EFI variable (see EFI_VARIABLE_MASK in
-include/linux/efi.h). Writing to the file must also be done with one write
-operation.
-
-For example, you can use the following bash script to create/update an EFI
-variable with the content from a given file:
-
-#!/bin/sh -e
-
-while ! [ -z "$1" ]; do
-        case "$1" in
-        "-f") filename="$2"; shift;;
-        "-g") guid="$2"; shift;;
-        *) name="$1";;
-        esac
-        shift
-done
-
-usage()
-{
-        echo "Syntax: ${0##*/} -f filename [ -g guid ] name"
-        exit 1
-}
-
-[ -n "$name" -a -f "$filename" ] || usage
-
-EFIVARFS="/sys/firmware/efi/efivars"
-
-[ -d "$EFIVARFS" ] || exit 2
-
-if stat -tf $EFIVARFS | grep -q -v de5e81e4; then
-        mount -t efivarfs none $EFIVARFS
-fi
-
-# try to pick up an existing GUID
-[ -n "$guid" ] || guid=$(find "$EFIVARFS" -name "$name-*" | head -n1 | cut -f2- -d-)
-
-# use a randomly generated GUID
-[ -n "$guid" ] || guid="$(cat /proc/sys/kernel/random/uuid)"
-
-# efivarfs expects all of the data in one write
-tmp=$(mktemp)
-/bin/echo -ne "\007\000\000\000" | cat - $filename > $tmp
-dd if=$tmp of="$EFIVARFS/$name-$guid" bs=$(stat -c %s $tmp)
-rm $tmp
-
-== Loading ACPI SSDTs from configfs ==
-
-This option allows loading of user defined SSDTs from userspace via the configfs
-interface. The CONFIG_ACPI_CONFIGFS option must be select and configfs must be
-mounted. In the following examples, we assume that configfs has been mounted in
-/config.
-
-New tables can be loading by creating new directories in /config/acpi/table/ and
-writing the SSDT aml code in the aml attribute:
-
-cd /config/acpi/table
-mkdir my_ssdt
-cat ~/ssdt.aml > my_ssdt/aml
diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/LSM/SafeSetID.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/LSM/SafeSetID.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..212434ef65ad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/LSM/SafeSetID.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,107 @@
+=========
+SafeSetID
+=========
+SafeSetID is an LSM module that gates the setid family of syscalls to restrict
+UID/GID transitions from a given UID/GID to only those approved by a
+system-wide whitelist. These restrictions also prohibit the given UIDs/GIDs
+from obtaining auxiliary privileges associated with CAP_SET{U/G}ID, such as
+allowing a user to set up user namespace UID mappings.
+
+
+Background
+==========
+In absence of file capabilities, processes spawned on a Linux system that need
+to switch to a different user must be spawned with CAP_SETUID privileges.
+CAP_SETUID is granted to programs running as root or those running as a non-root
+user that have been explicitly given the CAP_SETUID runtime capability. It is
+often preferable to use Linux runtime capabilities rather than file
+capabilities, since using file capabilities to run a program with elevated
+privileges opens up possible security holes since any user with access to the
+file can exec() that program to gain the elevated privileges.
+
+While it is possible to implement a tree of processes by giving full
+CAP_SET{U/G}ID capabilities, this is often at odds with the goals of running a
+tree of processes under non-root user(s) in the first place. Specifically,
+since CAP_SETUID allows changing to any user on the system, including the root
+user, it is an overpowered capability for what is needed in this scenario,
+especially since programs often only call setuid() to drop privileges to a
+lesser-privileged user -- not elevate privileges. Unfortunately, there is no
+generally feasible way in Linux to restrict the potential UIDs that a user can
+switch to through setuid() beyond allowing a switch to any user on the system.
+This SafeSetID LSM seeks to provide a solution for restricting setid
+capabilities in such a way.
+
+The main use case for this LSM is to allow a non-root program to transition to
+other untrusted uids without full blown CAP_SETUID capabilities. The non-root
+program would still need CAP_SETUID to do any kind of transition, but the
+additional restrictions imposed by this LSM would mean it is a "safer" version
+of CAP_SETUID since the non-root program cannot take advantage of CAP_SETUID to
+do any unapproved actions (e.g. setuid to uid 0 or create/enter new user
+namespace). The higher level goal is to allow for uid-based sandboxing of system
+services without having to give out CAP_SETUID all over the place just so that
+non-root programs can drop to even-lesser-privileged uids. This is especially
+relevant when one non-root daemon on the system should be allowed to spawn other
+processes as different uids, but its undesirable to give the daemon a
+basically-root-equivalent CAP_SETUID.
+
+
+Other Approaches Considered
+===========================
+
+Solve this problem in userspace
+-------------------------------
+For candidate applications that would like to have restricted setid capabilities
+as implemented in this LSM, an alternative option would be to simply take away
+setid capabilities from the application completely and refactor the process
+spawning semantics in the application (e.g. by using a privileged helper program
+to do process spawning and UID/GID transitions). Unfortunately, there are a
+number of semantics around process spawning that would be affected by this, such
+as fork() calls where the program doesn???t immediately call exec() after the
+fork(), parent processes specifying custom environment variables or command line
+args for spawned child processes, or inheritance of file handles across a
+fork()/exec(). Because of this, as solution that uses a privileged helper in
+userspace would likely be less appealing to incorporate into existing projects
+that rely on certain process-spawning semantics in Linux.
+
+Use user namespaces
+-------------------
+Another possible approach would be to run a given process tree in its own user
+namespace and give programs in the tree setid capabilities. In this way,
+programs in the tree could change to any desired UID/GID in the context of their
+own user namespace, and only approved UIDs/GIDs could be mapped back to the
+initial system user namespace, affectively preventing privilege escalation.
+Unfortunately, it is not generally feasible to use user namespaces in isolation,
+without pairing them with other namespace types, which is not always an option.
+Linux checks for capabilities based off of the user namespace that ???owns??? some
+entity. For example, Linux has the notion that network namespaces are owned by
+the user namespace in which they were created. A consequence of this is that
+capability checks for access to a given network namespace are done by checking
+whether a task has the given capability in the context of the user namespace
+that owns the network namespace -- not necessarily the user namespace under
+which the given task runs. Therefore spawning a process in a new user namespace
+effectively prevents it from accessing the network namespace owned by the
+initial namespace. This is a deal-breaker for any application that expects to
+retain the CAP_NET_ADMIN capability for the purpose of adjusting network
+configurations. Using user namespaces in isolation causes problems regarding
+other system interactions, including use of pid namespaces and device creation.
+
+Use an existing LSM
+-------------------
+None of the other in-tree LSMs have the capability to gate setid transitions, or
+even employ the security_task_fix_setuid hook at all. SELinux says of that hook:
+"Since setuid only affects the current process, and since the SELinux controls
+are not based on the Linux identity attributes, SELinux does not need to control
+this operation."
+
+
+Directions for use
+==================
+This LSM hooks the setid syscalls to make sure transitions are allowed if an
+applicable restriction policy is in place. Policies are configured through
+securityfs by writing to the safesetid/add_whitelist_policy and
+safesetid/flush_whitelist_policies files at the location where securityfs is
+mounted. The format for adding a policy is '<UID>:<UID>', using literal
+numbers, such as '123:456'. To flush the policies, any write to the file is
+sufficient. Again, configuring a policy for a UID will prevent that UID from
+obtaining auxiliary setid privileges, such as allowing a user to set up user
+namespace UID mappings.
diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/LSM/index.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/LSM/index.rst
index c980dfe9abf1..a6ba95fbaa9f 100644
--- a/Documentation/admin-guide/LSM/index.rst
+++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/LSM/index.rst
@@ -17,9 +17,8 @@ MAC extensions, other extensions can be built using the LSM to provide
 specific changes to system operation when these tweaks are not available
 in the core functionality of Linux itself.
 
-Without a specific LSM built into the kernel, the default LSM will be the
-Linux capabilities system. Most LSMs choose to extend the capabilities
-system, building their checks on top of the defined capability hooks.
+The Linux capabilities modules will always be included. This may be
+followed by any number of "minor" modules and at most one "major" module.
 For more details on capabilities, see ``capabilities(7)`` in the Linux
 man-pages project.
 
@@ -30,6 +29,14 @@ order in which checks are made. The capability module will always
 be first, followed by any "minor" modules (e.g. Yama) and then
 the one "major" module (e.g. SELinux) if there is one configured.
 
+Process attributes associated with "major" security modules should
+be accessed and maintained using the special files in ``/proc/.../attr``.
+A security module may maintain a module specific subdirectory there,
+named after the module. ``/proc/.../attr/smack`` is provided by the Smack
+security module and contains all its special files. The files directly
+in ``/proc/.../attr`` remain as legacy interfaces for modules that provide
+subdirectories.
+
 .. toctree::
    :maxdepth: 1
 
@@ -39,3 +46,4 @@ the one "major" module (e.g. SELinux) if there is one configured.
    Smack
    tomoyo
    Yama
+   SafeSetID
diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/README.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/README.rst
index 47e577264198..a582c780c3bd 100644
--- a/Documentation/admin-guide/README.rst
+++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/README.rst
@@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ Configuring the kernel
 Compiling the kernel
 --------------------
 
- - Make sure you have at least gcc 3.2 available.
+ - Make sure you have at least gcc 4.6 available.
    For more information, refer to :ref:`Documentation/process/changes.rst <changes>`.
 
    Please note that you can still run a.out user programs with this kernel.
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/cppc_sysfs.txt b/Documentation/admin-guide/acpi/cppc_sysfs.rst
index f20fb445135d..a4b99afbe331 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/cppc_sysfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/acpi/cppc_sysfs.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,11 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
 
-	Collaborative Processor Performance Control (CPPC)
+==================================================
+Collaborative Processor Performance Control (CPPC)
+==================================================
+
+CPPC
+====
 
 CPPC defined in the ACPI spec describes a mechanism for the OS to manage the
 performance of a logical processor on a contigious and abstract performance
@@ -10,31 +16,28 @@ For more details on CPPC please refer to the ACPI specification at:
 
 http://uefi.org/specifications
 
-Some of the CPPC registers are exposed via sysfs under:
-
-/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuX/acpi_cppc/
-
-for each cpu X
+Some of the CPPC registers are exposed via sysfs under::
 
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+  /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuX/acpi_cppc/
 
-$ ls -lR  /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu0/acpi_cppc/
-/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu0/acpi_cppc/:
-total 0
--r--r--r-- 1 root root 65536 Mar  5 19:38 feedback_ctrs
--r--r--r-- 1 root root 65536 Mar  5 19:38 highest_perf
--r--r--r-- 1 root root 65536 Mar  5 19:38 lowest_freq
--r--r--r-- 1 root root 65536 Mar  5 19:38 lowest_nonlinear_perf
--r--r--r-- 1 root root 65536 Mar  5 19:38 lowest_perf
--r--r--r-- 1 root root 65536 Mar  5 19:38 nominal_freq
--r--r--r-- 1 root root 65536 Mar  5 19:38 nominal_perf
--r--r--r-- 1 root root 65536 Mar  5 19:38 reference_perf
--r--r--r-- 1 root root 65536 Mar  5 19:38 wraparound_time
+for each cpu X::
 
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+  $ ls -lR  /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu0/acpi_cppc/
+  /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu0/acpi_cppc/:
+  total 0
+  -r--r--r-- 1 root root 65536 Mar  5 19:38 feedback_ctrs
+  -r--r--r-- 1 root root 65536 Mar  5 19:38 highest_perf
+  -r--r--r-- 1 root root 65536 Mar  5 19:38 lowest_freq
+  -r--r--r-- 1 root root 65536 Mar  5 19:38 lowest_nonlinear_perf
+  -r--r--r-- 1 root root 65536 Mar  5 19:38 lowest_perf
+  -r--r--r-- 1 root root 65536 Mar  5 19:38 nominal_freq
+  -r--r--r-- 1 root root 65536 Mar  5 19:38 nominal_perf
+  -r--r--r-- 1 root root 65536 Mar  5 19:38 reference_perf
+  -r--r--r-- 1 root root 65536 Mar  5 19:38 wraparound_time
 
 * highest_perf : Highest performance of this processor (abstract scale).
-* nominal_perf : Highest sustained performance of this processor (abstract scale).
+* nominal_perf : Highest sustained performance of this processor
+  (abstract scale).
 * lowest_nonlinear_perf : Lowest performance of this processor with nonlinear
   power savings (abstract scale).
 * lowest_perf : Lowest performance of this processor (abstract scale).
@@ -48,22 +51,26 @@ total 0
 * feedback_ctrs : Includes both Reference and delivered performance counter.
   Reference counter ticks up proportional to processor's reference performance.
   Delivered counter ticks up proportional to processor's delivered performance.
-* wraparound_time: Minimum time for the feedback counters to wraparound (seconds).
+* wraparound_time: Minimum time for the feedback counters to wraparound
+  (seconds).
 * reference_perf : Performance level at which reference performance counter
   accumulates (abstract scale).
 
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
-		Computing Average Delivered Performance
+Computing Average Delivered Performance
+=======================================
+
+Below describes the steps to compute the average performance delivered by
+taking two different snapshots of feedback counters at time T1 and T2.
+
+  T1: Read feedback_ctrs as fbc_t1
+      Wait or run some workload
 
-Below describes the steps to compute the average performance delivered by taking
-two different snapshots of feedback counters at time T1 and T2.
+  T2: Read feedback_ctrs as fbc_t2
 
-T1: Read feedback_ctrs as fbc_t1
-    Wait or run some workload
-T2: Read feedback_ctrs as fbc_t2
+::
 
-delivered_counter_delta = fbc_t2[del] - fbc_t1[del]
-reference_counter_delta = fbc_t2[ref] - fbc_t1[ref]
+  delivered_counter_delta = fbc_t2[del] - fbc_t1[del]
+  reference_counter_delta = fbc_t2[ref] - fbc_t1[ref]
 
-delivered_perf = (refernce_perf x delivered_counter_delta) / reference_counter_delta
+  delivered_perf = (refernce_perf x delivered_counter_delta) / reference_counter_delta
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/dsdt-override.txt b/Documentation/admin-guide/acpi/dsdt-override.rst
index 784841caa6e6..50bd7f194bf4 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/dsdt-override.txt
+++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/acpi/dsdt-override.rst
@@ -1,6 +1,12 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+===============
+Overriding DSDT
+===============
+
 Linux supports a method of overriding the BIOS DSDT:
 
-CONFIG_ACPI_CUSTOM_DSDT builds the image into the kernel.
+CONFIG_ACPI_CUSTOM_DSDT - builds the image into the kernel.
 
 When to use this method is described in detail on the
 Linux/ACPI home page:
diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/acpi/index.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/acpi/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4d13eeea1eca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/acpi/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+============
+ACPI Support
+============
+
+Here we document in detail how to interact with various mechanisms in
+the Linux ACPI support.
+
+.. toctree::
+   :maxdepth: 1
+
+   initrd_table_override
+   dsdt-override
+   ssdt-overlays
+   cppc_sysfs
diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/acpi/initrd_table_override.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/acpi/initrd_table_override.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..cbd768207631
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/acpi/initrd_table_override.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,115 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+================================
+Upgrading ACPI tables via initrd
+================================
+
+What is this about
+==================
+
+If the ACPI_TABLE_UPGRADE compile option is true, it is possible to
+upgrade the ACPI execution environment that is defined by the ACPI tables
+via upgrading the ACPI tables provided by the BIOS with an instrumented,
+modified, more recent version one, or installing brand new ACPI tables.
+
+When building initrd with kernel in a single image, option
+ACPI_TABLE_OVERRIDE_VIA_BUILTIN_INITRD should also be true for this
+feature to work.
+
+For a full list of ACPI tables that can be upgraded/installed, take a look
+at the char `*table_sigs[MAX_ACPI_SIGNATURE];` definition in
+drivers/acpi/tables.c.
+
+All ACPI tables iasl (Intel's ACPI compiler and disassembler) knows should
+be overridable, except:
+
+  - ACPI_SIG_RSDP (has a signature of 6 bytes)
+  - ACPI_SIG_FACS (does not have an ordinary ACPI table header)
+
+Both could get implemented as well.
+
+
+What is this for
+================
+
+Complain to your platform/BIOS vendor if you find a bug which is so severe
+that a workaround is not accepted in the Linux kernel. And this facility
+allows you to upgrade the buggy tables before your platform/BIOS vendor
+releases an upgraded BIOS binary.
+
+This facility can be used by platform/BIOS vendors to provide a Linux
+compatible environment without modifying the underlying platform firmware.
+
+This facility also provides a powerful feature to easily debug and test
+ACPI BIOS table compatibility with the Linux kernel by modifying old
+platform provided ACPI tables or inserting new ACPI tables.
+
+It can and should be enabled in any kernel because there is no functional
+change with not instrumented initrds.
+
+
+How does it work
+================
+::
+
+  # Extract the machine's ACPI tables:
+  cd /tmp
+  acpidump >acpidump
+  acpixtract -a acpidump
+  # Disassemble, modify and recompile them:
+  iasl -d *.dat
+  # For example add this statement into a _PRT (PCI Routing Table) function
+  # of the DSDT:
+  Store("HELLO WORLD", debug)
+  # And increase the OEM Revision. For example, before modification:
+  DefinitionBlock ("DSDT.aml", "DSDT", 2, "INTEL ", "TEMPLATE", 0x00000000)
+  # After modification:
+  DefinitionBlock ("DSDT.aml", "DSDT", 2, "INTEL ", "TEMPLATE", 0x00000001)
+  iasl -sa dsdt.dsl
+  # Add the raw ACPI tables to an uncompressed cpio archive.
+  # They must be put into a /kernel/firmware/acpi directory inside the cpio
+  # archive. Note that if the table put here matches a platform table
+  # (similar Table Signature, and similar OEMID, and similar OEM Table ID)
+  # with a more recent OEM Revision, the platform table will be upgraded by
+  # this table. If the table put here doesn't match a platform table
+  # (dissimilar Table Signature, or dissimilar OEMID, or dissimilar OEM Table
+  # ID), this table will be appended.
+  mkdir -p kernel/firmware/acpi
+  cp dsdt.aml kernel/firmware/acpi
+  # A maximum of "NR_ACPI_INITRD_TABLES (64)" tables are currently allowed
+  # (see osl.c):
+  iasl -sa facp.dsl
+  iasl -sa ssdt1.dsl
+  cp facp.aml kernel/firmware/acpi
+  cp ssdt1.aml kernel/firmware/acpi
+  # The uncompressed cpio archive must be the first. Other, typically
+  # compressed cpio archives, must be concatenated on top of the uncompressed
+  # one. Following command creates the uncompressed cpio archive and
+  # concatenates the original initrd on top:
+  find kernel | cpio -H newc --create > /boot/instrumented_initrd
+  cat /boot/initrd >>/boot/instrumented_initrd
+  # reboot with increased acpi debug level, e.g. boot params:
+  acpi.debug_level=0x2 acpi.debug_layer=0xFFFFFFFF
+  # and check your syslog:
+  [    1.268089] ACPI: PCI Interrupt Routing Table [\_SB_.PCI0._PRT]
+  [    1.272091] [ACPI Debug]  String [0x0B] "HELLO WORLD"
+
+iasl is able to disassemble and recompile quite a lot different,
+also static ACPI tables.
+
+
+Where to retrieve userspace tools
+=================================
+
+iasl and acpixtract are part of Intel's ACPICA project:
+http://acpica.org/
+
+and should be packaged by distributions (for example in the acpica package
+on SUSE).
+
+acpidump can be found in Len Browns pmtools:
+ftp://kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/lenb/acpi/utils/pmtools/acpidump
+
+This tool is also part of the acpica package on SUSE.
+Alternatively, used ACPI tables can be retrieved via sysfs in latest kernels:
+/sys/firmware/acpi/tables
diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/acpi/ssdt-overlays.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/acpi/ssdt-overlays.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..da37455f96c9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/acpi/ssdt-overlays.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,180 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=============
+SSDT Overlays
+=============
+
+In order to support ACPI open-ended hardware configurations (e.g. development
+boards) we need a way to augment the ACPI configuration provided by the firmware
+image. A common example is connecting sensors on I2C / SPI buses on development
+boards.
+
+Although this can be accomplished by creating a kernel platform driver or
+recompiling the firmware image with updated ACPI tables, neither is practical:
+the former proliferates board specific kernel code while the latter requires
+access to firmware tools which are often not publicly available.
+
+Because ACPI supports external references in AML code a more practical
+way to augment firmware ACPI configuration is by dynamically loading
+user defined SSDT tables that contain the board specific information.
+
+For example, to enumerate a Bosch BMA222E accelerometer on the I2C bus of the
+Minnowboard MAX development board exposed via the LSE connector [1], the
+following ASL code can be used::
+
+    DefinitionBlock ("minnowmax.aml", "SSDT", 1, "Vendor", "Accel", 0x00000003)
+    {
+        External (\_SB.I2C6, DeviceObj)
+
+        Scope (\_SB.I2C6)
+        {
+            Device (STAC)
+            {
+                Name (_ADR, Zero)
+                Name (_HID, "BMA222E")
+
+                Method (_CRS, 0, Serialized)
+                {
+                    Name (RBUF, ResourceTemplate ()
+                    {
+                        I2cSerialBus (0x0018, ControllerInitiated, 0x00061A80,
+                                    AddressingMode7Bit, "\\_SB.I2C6", 0x00,
+                                    ResourceConsumer, ,)
+                        GpioInt (Edge, ActiveHigh, Exclusive, PullDown, 0x0000,
+                                "\\_SB.GPO2", 0x00, ResourceConsumer, , )
+                        { // Pin list
+                            0
+                        }
+                    })
+                    Return (RBUF)
+                }
+            }
+        }
+    }
+
+which can then be compiled to AML binary format::
+
+    $ iasl minnowmax.asl
+
+    Intel ACPI Component Architecture
+    ASL Optimizing Compiler version 20140214-64 [Mar 29 2014]
+    Copyright (c) 2000 - 2014 Intel Corporation
+
+    ASL Input:     minnomax.asl - 30 lines, 614 bytes, 7 keywords
+    AML Output:    minnowmax.aml - 165 bytes, 6 named objects, 1 executable opcodes
+
+[1] http://wiki.minnowboard.org/MinnowBoard_MAX#Low_Speed_Expansion_Connector_.28Top.29
+
+The resulting AML code can then be loaded by the kernel using one of the methods
+below.
+
+Loading ACPI SSDTs from initrd
+==============================
+
+This option allows loading of user defined SSDTs from initrd and it is useful
+when the system does not support EFI or when there is not enough EFI storage.
+
+It works in a similar way with initrd based ACPI tables override/upgrade: SSDT
+aml code must be placed in the first, uncompressed, initrd under the
+"kernel/firmware/acpi" path. Multiple files can be used and this will translate
+in loading multiple tables. Only SSDT and OEM tables are allowed. See
+initrd_table_override.txt for more details.
+
+Here is an example::
+
+    # Add the raw ACPI tables to an uncompressed cpio archive.
+    # They must be put into a /kernel/firmware/acpi directory inside the
+    # cpio archive.
+    # The uncompressed cpio archive must be the first.
+    # Other, typically compressed cpio archives, must be
+    # concatenated on top of the uncompressed one.
+    mkdir -p kernel/firmware/acpi
+    cp ssdt.aml kernel/firmware/acpi
+
+    # Create the uncompressed cpio archive and concatenate the original initrd
+    # on top:
+    find kernel | cpio -H newc --create > /boot/instrumented_initrd
+    cat /boot/initrd >>/boot/instrumented_initrd
+
+Loading ACPI SSDTs from EFI variables
+=====================================
+
+This is the preferred method, when EFI is supported on the platform, because it
+allows a persistent, OS independent way of storing the user defined SSDTs. There
+is also work underway to implement EFI support for loading user defined SSDTs
+and using this method will make it easier to convert to the EFI loading
+mechanism when that will arrive.
+
+In order to load SSDTs from an EFI variable the efivar_ssdt kernel command line
+parameter can be used. The argument for the option is the variable name to
+use. If there are multiple variables with the same name but with different
+vendor GUIDs, all of them will be loaded.
+
+In order to store the AML code in an EFI variable the efivarfs filesystem can be
+used. It is enabled and mounted by default in /sys/firmware/efi/efivars in all
+recent distribution.
+
+Creating a new file in /sys/firmware/efi/efivars will automatically create a new
+EFI variable. Updating a file in /sys/firmware/efi/efivars will update the EFI
+variable. Please note that the file name needs to be specially formatted as
+"Name-GUID" and that the first 4 bytes in the file (little-endian format)
+represent the attributes of the EFI variable (see EFI_VARIABLE_MASK in
+include/linux/efi.h). Writing to the file must also be done with one write
+operation.
+
+For example, you can use the following bash script to create/update an EFI
+variable with the content from a given file::
+
+    #!/bin/sh -e
+
+    while ! [ -z "$1" ]; do
+            case "$1" in
+            "-f") filename="$2"; shift;;
+            "-g") guid="$2"; shift;;
+            *) name="$1";;
+            esac
+            shift
+    done
+
+    usage()
+    {
+            echo "Syntax: ${0##*/} -f filename [ -g guid ] name"
+            exit 1
+    }
+
+    [ -n "$name" -a -f "$filename" ] || usage
+
+    EFIVARFS="/sys/firmware/efi/efivars"
+
+    [ -d "$EFIVARFS" ] || exit 2
+
+    if stat -tf $EFIVARFS | grep -q -v de5e81e4; then
+            mount -t efivarfs none $EFIVARFS
+    fi
+
+    # try to pick up an existing GUID
+    [ -n "$guid" ] || guid=$(find "$EFIVARFS" -name "$name-*" | head -n1 | cut -f2- -d-)
+
+    # use a randomly generated GUID
+    [ -n "$guid" ] || guid="$(cat /proc/sys/kernel/random/uuid)"
+
+    # efivarfs expects all of the data in one write
+    tmp=$(mktemp)
+    /bin/echo -ne "\007\000\000\000" | cat - $filename > $tmp
+    dd if=$tmp of="$EFIVARFS/$name-$guid" bs=$(stat -c %s $tmp)
+    rm $tmp
+
+Loading ACPI SSDTs from configfs
+================================
+
+This option allows loading of user defined SSDTs from userspace via the configfs
+interface. The CONFIG_ACPI_CONFIGFS option must be select and configfs must be
+mounted. In the following examples, we assume that configfs has been mounted in
+/config.
+
+New tables can be loading by creating new directories in /config/acpi/table/ and
+writing the SSDT aml code in the aml attribute::
+
+    cd /config/acpi/table
+    mkdir my_ssdt
+    cat ~/ssdt.aml > my_ssdt/aml
diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/cgroup-v2.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/cgroup-v2.rst
index 7bf3f129c68b..cf88c1f98270 100644
--- a/Documentation/admin-guide/cgroup-v2.rst
+++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/cgroup-v2.rst
@@ -177,6 +177,15 @@ cgroup v2 currently supports the following mount options.
 	ignored on non-init namespace mounts.  Please refer to the
 	Delegation section for details.
 
+  memory_localevents
+
+        Only populate memory.events with data for the current cgroup,
+        and not any subtrees. This is legacy behaviour, the default
+        behaviour without this option is to include subtree counts.
+        This option is system wide and can only be set on mount or
+        modified through remount from the init namespace. The mount
+        option is ignored on non-init namespace mounts.
+
 
 Organizing Processes and Threads
 --------------------------------
@@ -864,6 +873,8 @@ All cgroup core files are prefixed with "cgroup."
 	  populated
 		1 if the cgroup or its descendants contains any live
 		processes; otherwise, 0.
+	  frozen
+		1 if the cgroup is frozen; otherwise, 0.
 
   cgroup.max.descendants
 	A read-write single value files.  The default is "max".
@@ -897,6 +908,31 @@ All cgroup core files are prefixed with "cgroup."
 		A dying cgroup can consume system resources not exceeding
 		limits, which were active at the moment of cgroup deletion.
 
+  cgroup.freeze
+	A read-write single value file which exists on non-root cgroups.
+	Allowed values are "0" and "1". The default is "0".
+
+	Writing "1" to the file causes freezing of the cgroup and all
+	descendant cgroups. This means that all belonging processes will
+	be stopped and will not run until the cgroup will be explicitly
+	unfrozen. Freezing of the cgroup may take some time; when this action
+	is completed, the "frozen" value in the cgroup.events control file
+	will be updated to "1" and the corresponding notification will be
+	issued.
+
+	A cgroup can be frozen either by its own settings, or by settings
+	of any ancestor cgroups. If any of ancestor cgroups is frozen, the
+	cgroup will remain frozen.
+
+	Processes in the frozen cgroup can be killed by a fatal signal.
+	They also can enter and leave a frozen cgroup: either by an explicit
+	move by a user, or if freezing of the cgroup races with fork().
+	If a process is moved to a frozen cgroup, it stops. If a process is
+	moved out of a frozen cgroup, it becomes running.
+
+	Frozen status of a cgroup doesn't affect any cgroup tree operations:
+	it's possible to delete a frozen (and empty) cgroup, as well as
+	create new sub-cgroups.
 
 Controllers
 ===========
@@ -1189,6 +1225,10 @@ PAGE_SIZE multiple when read back.
 		Amount of cached filesystem data that was modified and
 		is currently being written back to disk
 
+	  anon_thp
+		Amount of memory used in anonymous mappings backed by
+		transparent hugepages
+
 	  inactive_anon, active_anon, inactive_file, active_file, unevictable
 		Amount of memory, swap-backed and filesystem-backed,
 		on the internal memory management lists used by the
@@ -1248,6 +1288,18 @@ PAGE_SIZE multiple when read back.
 
 		Amount of reclaimed lazyfree pages
 
+	  thp_fault_alloc
+
+		Number of transparent hugepages which were allocated to satisfy
+		a page fault, including COW faults. This counter is not present
+		when CONFIG_TRANSPARENT_HUGEPAGE is not set.
+
+	  thp_collapse_alloc
+
+		Number of transparent hugepages which were allocated to allow
+		collapsing an existing range of pages. This counter is not
+		present when CONFIG_TRANSPARENT_HUGEPAGE is not set.
+
   memory.swap.current
 	A read-only single value file which exists on non-root
 	cgroups.
@@ -1503,7 +1555,7 @@ protected workload.
 
 The limits are only applied at the peer level in the hierarchy.  This means that
 in the diagram below, only groups A, B, and C will influence each other, and
-groups D and F will influence each other.  Group G will influence nobody.
+groups D and F will influence each other.  Group G will influence nobody::
 
 			[root]
 		/	   |		\
diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/ext4.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/ext4.rst
index e506d3dae510..059ddcbe769d 100644
--- a/Documentation/admin-guide/ext4.rst
+++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/ext4.rst
@@ -91,10 +91,48 @@ Currently Available
 * large block (up to pagesize) support
 * efficient new ordered mode in JBD2 and ext4 (avoid using buffer head to force
   the ordering)
+* Case-insensitive file name lookups
 
 [1] Filesystems with a block size of 1k may see a limit imposed by the
 directory hash tree having a maximum depth of two.
 
+case-insensitive file name lookups
+======================================================
+
+The case-insensitive file name lookup feature is supported on a
+per-directory basis, allowing the user to mix case-insensitive and
+case-sensitive directories in the same filesystem.  It is enabled by
+flipping the +F inode attribute of an empty directory.  The
+case-insensitive string match operation is only defined when we know how
+text in encoded in a byte sequence.  For that reason, in order to enable
+case-insensitive directories, the filesystem must have the
+casefold feature, which stores the filesystem-wide encoding
+model used.  By default, the charset adopted is the latest version of
+Unicode (12.1.0, by the time of this writing), encoded in the UTF-8
+form.  The comparison algorithm is implemented by normalizing the
+strings to the Canonical decomposition form, as defined by Unicode,
+followed by a byte per byte comparison.
+
+The case-awareness is name-preserving on the disk, meaning that the file
+name provided by userspace is a byte-per-byte match to what is actually
+written in the disk.  The Unicode normalization format used by the
+kernel is thus an internal representation, and not exposed to the
+userspace nor to the disk, with the important exception of disk hashes,
+used on large case-insensitive directories with DX feature.  On DX
+directories, the hash must be calculated using the casefolded version of
+the filename, meaning that the normalization format used actually has an
+impact on where the directory entry is stored.
+
+When we change from viewing filenames as opaque byte sequences to seeing
+them as encoded strings we need to address what happens when a program
+tries to create a file with an invalid name.  The Unicode subsystem
+within the kernel leaves the decision of what to do in this case to the
+filesystem, which select its preferred behavior by enabling/disabling
+the strict mode.  When Ext4 encounters one of those strings and the
+filesystem did not require strict mode, it falls back to considering the
+entire string as an opaque byte sequence, which still allows the user to
+operate on that file, but the case-insensitive lookups won't work.
+
 Options
 =======
 
diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/hw-vuln/index.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/hw-vuln/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..49311f3da6f2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/hw-vuln/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+========================
+Hardware vulnerabilities
+========================
+
+This section describes CPU vulnerabilities and provides an overview of the
+possible mitigations along with guidance for selecting mitigations if they
+are configurable at compile, boot or run time.
+
+.. toctree::
+   :maxdepth: 1
+
+   spectre
+   l1tf
+   mds
diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/l1tf.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/hw-vuln/l1tf.rst
index 9af977384168..31653a9f0e1b 100644
--- a/Documentation/admin-guide/l1tf.rst
+++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/hw-vuln/l1tf.rst
@@ -445,6 +445,7 @@ The default is 'cond'. If 'l1tf=full,force' is given on the kernel command
 line, then 'always' is enforced and the kvm-intel.vmentry_l1d_flush
 module parameter is ignored and writes to the sysfs file are rejected.
 
+.. _mitigation_selection:
 
 Mitigation selection guide
 --------------------------
diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/hw-vuln/mds.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/hw-vuln/mds.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e3a796c0d3a2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/hw-vuln/mds.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,308 @@
+MDS - Microarchitectural Data Sampling
+======================================
+
+Microarchitectural Data Sampling is a hardware vulnerability which allows
+unprivileged speculative access to data which is available in various CPU
+internal buffers.
+
+Affected processors
+-------------------
+
+This vulnerability affects a wide range of Intel processors. The
+vulnerability is not present on:
+
+   - Processors from AMD, Centaur and other non Intel vendors
+
+   - Older processor models, where the CPU family is < 6
+
+   - Some Atoms (Bonnell, Saltwell, Goldmont, GoldmontPlus)
+
+   - Intel processors which have the ARCH_CAP_MDS_NO bit set in the
+     IA32_ARCH_CAPABILITIES MSR.
+
+Whether a processor is affected or not can be read out from the MDS
+vulnerability file in sysfs. See :ref:`mds_sys_info`.
+
+Not all processors are affected by all variants of MDS, but the mitigation
+is identical for all of them so the kernel treats them as a single
+vulnerability.
+
+Related CVEs
+------------
+
+The following CVE entries are related to the MDS vulnerability:
+
+   ==============  =====  ===================================================
+   CVE-2018-12126  MSBDS  Microarchitectural Store Buffer Data Sampling
+   CVE-2018-12130  MFBDS  Microarchitectural Fill Buffer Data Sampling
+   CVE-2018-12127  MLPDS  Microarchitectural Load Port Data Sampling
+   CVE-2019-11091  MDSUM  Microarchitectural Data Sampling Uncacheable Memory
+   ==============  =====  ===================================================
+
+Problem
+-------
+
+When performing store, load, L1 refill operations, processors write data
+into temporary microarchitectural structures (buffers). The data in the
+buffer can be forwarded to load operations as an optimization.
+
+Under certain conditions, usually a fault/assist caused by a load
+operation, data unrelated to the load memory address can be speculatively
+forwarded from the buffers. Because the load operation causes a fault or
+assist and its result will be discarded, the forwarded data will not cause
+incorrect program execution or state changes. But a malicious operation
+may be able to forward this speculative data to a disclosure gadget which
+allows in turn to infer the value via a cache side channel attack.
+
+Because the buffers are potentially shared between Hyper-Threads cross
+Hyper-Thread attacks are possible.
+
+Deeper technical information is available in the MDS specific x86
+architecture section: :ref:`Documentation/x86/mds.rst <mds>`.
+
+
+Attack scenarios
+----------------
+
+Attacks against the MDS vulnerabilities can be mounted from malicious non
+priviledged user space applications running on hosts or guest. Malicious
+guest OSes can obviously mount attacks as well.
+
+Contrary to other speculation based vulnerabilities the MDS vulnerability
+does not allow the attacker to control the memory target address. As a
+consequence the attacks are purely sampling based, but as demonstrated with
+the TLBleed attack samples can be postprocessed successfully.
+
+Web-Browsers
+^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+  It's unclear whether attacks through Web-Browsers are possible at
+  all. The exploitation through Java-Script is considered very unlikely,
+  but other widely used web technologies like Webassembly could possibly be
+  abused.
+
+
+.. _mds_sys_info:
+
+MDS system information
+-----------------------
+
+The Linux kernel provides a sysfs interface to enumerate the current MDS
+status of the system: whether the system is vulnerable, and which
+mitigations are active. The relevant sysfs file is:
+
+/sys/devices/system/cpu/vulnerabilities/mds
+
+The possible values in this file are:
+
+  .. list-table::
+
+     * - 'Not affected'
+       - The processor is not vulnerable
+     * - 'Vulnerable'
+       - The processor is vulnerable, but no mitigation enabled
+     * - 'Vulnerable: Clear CPU buffers attempted, no microcode'
+       - The processor is vulnerable but microcode is not updated.
+
+         The mitigation is enabled on a best effort basis. See :ref:`vmwerv`
+     * - 'Mitigation: Clear CPU buffers'
+       - The processor is vulnerable and the CPU buffer clearing mitigation is
+         enabled.
+
+If the processor is vulnerable then the following information is appended
+to the above information:
+
+    ========================  ============================================
+    'SMT vulnerable'          SMT is enabled
+    'SMT mitigated'           SMT is enabled and mitigated
+    'SMT disabled'            SMT is disabled
+    'SMT Host state unknown'  Kernel runs in a VM, Host SMT state unknown
+    ========================  ============================================
+
+.. _vmwerv:
+
+Best effort mitigation mode
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+  If the processor is vulnerable, but the availability of the microcode based
+  mitigation mechanism is not advertised via CPUID the kernel selects a best
+  effort mitigation mode.  This mode invokes the mitigation instructions
+  without a guarantee that they clear the CPU buffers.
+
+  This is done to address virtualization scenarios where the host has the
+  microcode update applied, but the hypervisor is not yet updated to expose
+  the CPUID to the guest. If the host has updated microcode the protection
+  takes effect otherwise a few cpu cycles are wasted pointlessly.
+
+  The state in the mds sysfs file reflects this situation accordingly.
+
+
+Mitigation mechanism
+-------------------------
+
+The kernel detects the affected CPUs and the presence of the microcode
+which is required.
+
+If a CPU is affected and the microcode is available, then the kernel
+enables the mitigation by default. The mitigation can be controlled at boot
+time via a kernel command line option. See
+:ref:`mds_mitigation_control_command_line`.
+
+.. _cpu_buffer_clear:
+
+CPU buffer clearing
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+  The mitigation for MDS clears the affected CPU buffers on return to user
+  space and when entering a guest.
+
+  If SMT is enabled it also clears the buffers on idle entry when the CPU
+  is only affected by MSBDS and not any other MDS variant, because the
+  other variants cannot be protected against cross Hyper-Thread attacks.
+
+  For CPUs which are only affected by MSBDS the user space, guest and idle
+  transition mitigations are sufficient and SMT is not affected.
+
+.. _virt_mechanism:
+
+Virtualization mitigation
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+  The protection for host to guest transition depends on the L1TF
+  vulnerability of the CPU:
+
+  - CPU is affected by L1TF:
+
+    If the L1D flush mitigation is enabled and up to date microcode is
+    available, the L1D flush mitigation is automatically protecting the
+    guest transition.
+
+    If the L1D flush mitigation is disabled then the MDS mitigation is
+    invoked explicit when the host MDS mitigation is enabled.
+
+    For details on L1TF and virtualization see:
+    :ref:`Documentation/admin-guide/hw-vuln//l1tf.rst <mitigation_control_kvm>`.
+
+  - CPU is not affected by L1TF:
+
+    CPU buffers are flushed before entering the guest when the host MDS
+    mitigation is enabled.
+
+  The resulting MDS protection matrix for the host to guest transition:
+
+  ============ ===== ============= ============ =================
+   L1TF         MDS   VMX-L1FLUSH   Host MDS     MDS-State
+
+   Don't care   No    Don't care    N/A          Not affected
+
+   Yes          Yes   Disabled      Off          Vulnerable
+
+   Yes          Yes   Disabled      Full         Mitigated
+
+   Yes          Yes   Enabled       Don't care   Mitigated
+
+   No           Yes   N/A           Off          Vulnerable
+
+   No           Yes   N/A           Full         Mitigated
+  ============ ===== ============= ============ =================
+
+  This only covers the host to guest transition, i.e. prevents leakage from
+  host to guest, but does not protect the guest internally. Guests need to
+  have their own protections.
+
+.. _xeon_phi:
+
+XEON PHI specific considerations
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+  The XEON PHI processor family is affected by MSBDS which can be exploited
+  cross Hyper-Threads when entering idle states. Some XEON PHI variants allow
+  to use MWAIT in user space (Ring 3) which opens an potential attack vector
+  for malicious user space. The exposure can be disabled on the kernel
+  command line with the 'ring3mwait=disable' command line option.
+
+  XEON PHI is not affected by the other MDS variants and MSBDS is mitigated
+  before the CPU enters a idle state. As XEON PHI is not affected by L1TF
+  either disabling SMT is not required for full protection.
+
+.. _mds_smt_control:
+
+SMT control
+^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+  All MDS variants except MSBDS can be attacked cross Hyper-Threads. That
+  means on CPUs which are affected by MFBDS or MLPDS it is necessary to
+  disable SMT for full protection. These are most of the affected CPUs; the
+  exception is XEON PHI, see :ref:`xeon_phi`.
+
+  Disabling SMT can have a significant performance impact, but the impact
+  depends on the type of workloads.
+
+  See the relevant chapter in the L1TF mitigation documentation for details:
+  :ref:`Documentation/admin-guide/hw-vuln/l1tf.rst <smt_control>`.
+
+
+.. _mds_mitigation_control_command_line:
+
+Mitigation control on the kernel command line
+---------------------------------------------
+
+The kernel command line allows to control the MDS mitigations at boot
+time with the option "mds=". The valid arguments for this option are:
+
+  ============  =============================================================
+  full		If the CPU is vulnerable, enable all available mitigations
+		for the MDS vulnerability, CPU buffer clearing on exit to
+		userspace and when entering a VM. Idle transitions are
+		protected as well if SMT is enabled.
+
+		It does not automatically disable SMT.
+
+  full,nosmt	The same as mds=full, with SMT disabled on vulnerable
+		CPUs.  This is the complete mitigation.
+
+  off		Disables MDS mitigations completely.
+
+  ============  =============================================================
+
+Not specifying this option is equivalent to "mds=full".
+
+
+Mitigation selection guide
+--------------------------
+
+1. Trusted userspace
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+   If all userspace applications are from a trusted source and do not
+   execute untrusted code which is supplied externally, then the mitigation
+   can be disabled.
+
+
+2. Virtualization with trusted guests
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+   The same considerations as above versus trusted user space apply.
+
+3. Virtualization with untrusted guests
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+   The protection depends on the state of the L1TF mitigations.
+   See :ref:`virt_mechanism`.
+
+   If the MDS mitigation is enabled and SMT is disabled, guest to host and
+   guest to guest attacks are prevented.
+
+.. _mds_default_mitigations:
+
+Default mitigations
+-------------------
+
+  The kernel default mitigations for vulnerable processors are:
+
+  - Enable CPU buffer clearing
+
+  The kernel does not by default enforce the disabling of SMT, which leaves
+  SMT systems vulnerable when running untrusted code. The same rationale as
+  for L1TF applies.
+  See :ref:`Documentation/admin-guide/hw-vuln//l1tf.rst <default_mitigations>`.
diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/hw-vuln/spectre.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/hw-vuln/spectre.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..25f3b2532198
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/hw-vuln/spectre.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,697 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+Spectre Side Channels
+=====================
+
+Spectre is a class of side channel attacks that exploit branch prediction
+and speculative execution on modern CPUs to read memory, possibly
+bypassing access controls. Speculative execution side channel exploits
+do not modify memory but attempt to infer privileged data in the memory.
+
+This document covers Spectre variant 1 and Spectre variant 2.
+
+Affected processors
+-------------------
+
+Speculative execution side channel methods affect a wide range of modern
+high performance processors, since most modern high speed processors
+use branch prediction and speculative execution.
+
+The following CPUs are vulnerable:
+
+    - Intel Core, Atom, Pentium, and Xeon processors
+
+    - AMD Phenom, EPYC, and Zen processors
+
+    - IBM POWER and zSeries processors
+
+    - Higher end ARM processors
+
+    - Apple CPUs
+
+    - Higher end MIPS CPUs
+
+    - Likely most other high performance CPUs. Contact your CPU vendor for details.
+
+Whether a processor is affected or not can be read out from the Spectre
+vulnerability files in sysfs. See :ref:`spectre_sys_info`.
+
+Related CVEs
+------------
+
+The following CVE entries describe Spectre variants:
+
+   =============   =======================  =================
+   CVE-2017-5753   Bounds check bypass      Spectre variant 1
+   CVE-2017-5715   Branch target injection  Spectre variant 2
+   =============   =======================  =================
+
+Problem
+-------
+
+CPUs use speculative operations to improve performance. That may leave
+traces of memory accesses or computations in the processor's caches,
+buffers, and branch predictors. Malicious software may be able to
+influence the speculative execution paths, and then use the side effects
+of the speculative execution in the CPUs' caches and buffers to infer
+privileged data touched during the speculative execution.
+
+Spectre variant 1 attacks take advantage of speculative execution of
+conditional branches, while Spectre variant 2 attacks use speculative
+execution of indirect branches to leak privileged memory.
+See :ref:`[1] <spec_ref1>` :ref:`[5] <spec_ref5>` :ref:`[7] <spec_ref7>`
+:ref:`[10] <spec_ref10>` :ref:`[11] <spec_ref11>`.
+
+Spectre variant 1 (Bounds Check Bypass)
+---------------------------------------
+
+The bounds check bypass attack :ref:`[2] <spec_ref2>` takes advantage
+of speculative execution that bypasses conditional branch instructions
+used for memory access bounds check (e.g. checking if the index of an
+array results in memory access within a valid range). This results in
+memory accesses to invalid memory (with out-of-bound index) that are
+done speculatively before validation checks resolve. Such speculative
+memory accesses can leave side effects, creating side channels which
+leak information to the attacker.
+
+There are some extensions of Spectre variant 1 attacks for reading data
+over the network, see :ref:`[12] <spec_ref12>`. However such attacks
+are difficult, low bandwidth, fragile, and are considered low risk.
+
+Spectre variant 2 (Branch Target Injection)
+-------------------------------------------
+
+The branch target injection attack takes advantage of speculative
+execution of indirect branches :ref:`[3] <spec_ref3>`.  The indirect
+branch predictors inside the processor used to guess the target of
+indirect branches can be influenced by an attacker, causing gadget code
+to be speculatively executed, thus exposing sensitive data touched by
+the victim. The side effects left in the CPU's caches during speculative
+execution can be measured to infer data values.
+
+.. _poison_btb:
+
+In Spectre variant 2 attacks, the attacker can steer speculative indirect
+branches in the victim to gadget code by poisoning the branch target
+buffer of a CPU used for predicting indirect branch addresses. Such
+poisoning could be done by indirect branching into existing code,
+with the address offset of the indirect branch under the attacker's
+control. Since the branch prediction on impacted hardware does not
+fully disambiguate branch address and uses the offset for prediction,
+this could cause privileged code's indirect branch to jump to a gadget
+code with the same offset.
+
+The most useful gadgets take an attacker-controlled input parameter (such
+as a register value) so that the memory read can be controlled. Gadgets
+without input parameters might be possible, but the attacker would have
+very little control over what memory can be read, reducing the risk of
+the attack revealing useful data.
+
+One other variant 2 attack vector is for the attacker to poison the
+return stack buffer (RSB) :ref:`[13] <spec_ref13>` to cause speculative
+subroutine return instruction execution to go to a gadget.  An attacker's
+imbalanced subroutine call instructions might "poison" entries in the
+return stack buffer which are later consumed by a victim's subroutine
+return instructions.  This attack can be mitigated by flushing the return
+stack buffer on context switch, or virtual machine (VM) exit.
+
+On systems with simultaneous multi-threading (SMT), attacks are possible
+from the sibling thread, as level 1 cache and branch target buffer
+(BTB) may be shared between hardware threads in a CPU core.  A malicious
+program running on the sibling thread may influence its peer's BTB to
+steer its indirect branch speculations to gadget code, and measure the
+speculative execution's side effects left in level 1 cache to infer the
+victim's data.
+
+Attack scenarios
+----------------
+
+The following list of attack scenarios have been anticipated, but may
+not cover all possible attack vectors.
+
+1. A user process attacking the kernel
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+   The attacker passes a parameter to the kernel via a register or
+   via a known address in memory during a syscall. Such parameter may
+   be used later by the kernel as an index to an array or to derive
+   a pointer for a Spectre variant 1 attack.  The index or pointer
+   is invalid, but bound checks are bypassed in the code branch taken
+   for speculative execution. This could cause privileged memory to be
+   accessed and leaked.
+
+   For kernel code that has been identified where data pointers could
+   potentially be influenced for Spectre attacks, new "nospec" accessor
+   macros are used to prevent speculative loading of data.
+
+   Spectre variant 2 attacker can :ref:`poison <poison_btb>` the branch
+   target buffer (BTB) before issuing syscall to launch an attack.
+   After entering the kernel, the kernel could use the poisoned branch
+   target buffer on indirect jump and jump to gadget code in speculative
+   execution.
+
+   If an attacker tries to control the memory addresses leaked during
+   speculative execution, he would also need to pass a parameter to the
+   gadget, either through a register or a known address in memory. After
+   the gadget has executed, he can measure the side effect.
+
+   The kernel can protect itself against consuming poisoned branch
+   target buffer entries by using return trampolines (also known as
+   "retpoline") :ref:`[3] <spec_ref3>` :ref:`[9] <spec_ref9>` for all
+   indirect branches. Return trampolines trap speculative execution paths
+   to prevent jumping to gadget code during speculative execution.
+   x86 CPUs with Enhanced Indirect Branch Restricted Speculation
+   (Enhanced IBRS) available in hardware should use the feature to
+   mitigate Spectre variant 2 instead of retpoline. Enhanced IBRS is
+   more efficient than retpoline.
+
+   There may be gadget code in firmware which could be exploited with
+   Spectre variant 2 attack by a rogue user process. To mitigate such
+   attacks on x86, Indirect Branch Restricted Speculation (IBRS) feature
+   is turned on before the kernel invokes any firmware code.
+
+2. A user process attacking another user process
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+   A malicious user process can try to attack another user process,
+   either via a context switch on the same hardware thread, or from the
+   sibling hyperthread sharing a physical processor core on simultaneous
+   multi-threading (SMT) system.
+
+   Spectre variant 1 attacks generally require passing parameters
+   between the processes, which needs a data passing relationship, such
+   as remote procedure calls (RPC).  Those parameters are used in gadget
+   code to derive invalid data pointers accessing privileged memory in
+   the attacked process.
+
+   Spectre variant 2 attacks can be launched from a rogue process by
+   :ref:`poisoning <poison_btb>` the branch target buffer.  This can
+   influence the indirect branch targets for a victim process that either
+   runs later on the same hardware thread, or running concurrently on
+   a sibling hardware thread sharing the same physical core.
+
+   A user process can protect itself against Spectre variant 2 attacks
+   by using the prctl() syscall to disable indirect branch speculation
+   for itself.  An administrator can also cordon off an unsafe process
+   from polluting the branch target buffer by disabling the process's
+   indirect branch speculation. This comes with a performance cost
+   from not using indirect branch speculation and clearing the branch
+   target buffer.  When SMT is enabled on x86, for a process that has
+   indirect branch speculation disabled, Single Threaded Indirect Branch
+   Predictors (STIBP) :ref:`[4] <spec_ref4>` are turned on to prevent the
+   sibling thread from controlling branch target buffer.  In addition,
+   the Indirect Branch Prediction Barrier (IBPB) is issued to clear the
+   branch target buffer when context switching to and from such process.
+
+   On x86, the return stack buffer is stuffed on context switch.
+   This prevents the branch target buffer from being used for branch
+   prediction when the return stack buffer underflows while switching to
+   a deeper call stack. Any poisoned entries in the return stack buffer
+   left by the previous process will also be cleared.
+
+   User programs should use address space randomization to make attacks
+   more difficult (Set /proc/sys/kernel/randomize_va_space = 1 or 2).
+
+3. A virtualized guest attacking the host
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+   The attack mechanism is similar to how user processes attack the
+   kernel.  The kernel is entered via hyper-calls or other virtualization
+   exit paths.
+
+   For Spectre variant 1 attacks, rogue guests can pass parameters
+   (e.g. in registers) via hyper-calls to derive invalid pointers to
+   speculate into privileged memory after entering the kernel.  For places
+   where such kernel code has been identified, nospec accessor macros
+   are used to stop speculative memory access.
+
+   For Spectre variant 2 attacks, rogue guests can :ref:`poison
+   <poison_btb>` the branch target buffer or return stack buffer, causing
+   the kernel to jump to gadget code in the speculative execution paths.
+
+   To mitigate variant 2, the host kernel can use return trampolines
+   for indirect branches to bypass the poisoned branch target buffer,
+   and flushing the return stack buffer on VM exit.  This prevents rogue
+   guests from affecting indirect branching in the host kernel.
+
+   To protect host processes from rogue guests, host processes can have
+   indirect branch speculation disabled via prctl().  The branch target
+   buffer is cleared before context switching to such processes.
+
+4. A virtualized guest attacking other guest
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+   A rogue guest may attack another guest to get data accessible by the
+   other guest.
+
+   Spectre variant 1 attacks are possible if parameters can be passed
+   between guests.  This may be done via mechanisms such as shared memory
+   or message passing.  Such parameters could be used to derive data
+   pointers to privileged data in guest.  The privileged data could be
+   accessed by gadget code in the victim's speculation paths.
+
+   Spectre variant 2 attacks can be launched from a rogue guest by
+   :ref:`poisoning <poison_btb>` the branch target buffer or the return
+   stack buffer. Such poisoned entries could be used to influence
+   speculation execution paths in the victim guest.
+
+   Linux kernel mitigates attacks to other guests running in the same
+   CPU hardware thread by flushing the return stack buffer on VM exit,
+   and clearing the branch target buffer before switching to a new guest.
+
+   If SMT is used, Spectre variant 2 attacks from an untrusted guest
+   in the sibling hyperthread can be mitigated by the administrator,
+   by turning off the unsafe guest's indirect branch speculation via
+   prctl().  A guest can also protect itself by turning on microcode
+   based mitigations (such as IBPB or STIBP on x86) within the guest.
+
+.. _spectre_sys_info:
+
+Spectre system information
+--------------------------
+
+The Linux kernel provides a sysfs interface to enumerate the current
+mitigation status of the system for Spectre: whether the system is
+vulnerable, and which mitigations are active.
+
+The sysfs file showing Spectre variant 1 mitigation status is:
+
+   /sys/devices/system/cpu/vulnerabilities/spectre_v1
+
+The possible values in this file are:
+
+  =======================================  =================================
+  'Mitigation: __user pointer sanitation'  Protection in kernel on a case by
+                                           case base with explicit pointer
+                                           sanitation.
+  =======================================  =================================
+
+However, the protections are put in place on a case by case basis,
+and there is no guarantee that all possible attack vectors for Spectre
+variant 1 are covered.
+
+The spectre_v2 kernel file reports if the kernel has been compiled with
+retpoline mitigation or if the CPU has hardware mitigation, and if the
+CPU has support for additional process-specific mitigation.
+
+This file also reports CPU features enabled by microcode to mitigate
+attack between user processes:
+
+1. Indirect Branch Prediction Barrier (IBPB) to add additional
+   isolation between processes of different users.
+2. Single Thread Indirect Branch Predictors (STIBP) to add additional
+   isolation between CPU threads running on the same core.
+
+These CPU features may impact performance when used and can be enabled
+per process on a case-by-case base.
+
+The sysfs file showing Spectre variant 2 mitigation status is:
+
+   /sys/devices/system/cpu/vulnerabilities/spectre_v2
+
+The possible values in this file are:
+
+  - Kernel status:
+
+  ====================================  =================================
+  'Not affected'                        The processor is not vulnerable
+  'Vulnerable'                          Vulnerable, no mitigation
+  'Mitigation: Full generic retpoline'  Software-focused mitigation
+  'Mitigation: Full AMD retpoline'      AMD-specific software mitigation
+  'Mitigation: Enhanced IBRS'           Hardware-focused mitigation
+  ====================================  =================================
+
+  - Firmware status: Show if Indirect Branch Restricted Speculation (IBRS) is
+    used to protect against Spectre variant 2 attacks when calling firmware (x86 only).
+
+  ========== =============================================================
+  'IBRS_FW'  Protection against user program attacks when calling firmware
+  ========== =============================================================
+
+  - Indirect branch prediction barrier (IBPB) status for protection between
+    processes of different users. This feature can be controlled through
+    prctl() per process, or through kernel command line options. This is
+    an x86 only feature. For more details see below.
+
+  ===================   ========================================================
+  'IBPB: disabled'      IBPB unused
+  'IBPB: always-on'     Use IBPB on all tasks
+  'IBPB: conditional'   Use IBPB on SECCOMP or indirect branch restricted tasks
+  ===================   ========================================================
+
+  - Single threaded indirect branch prediction (STIBP) status for protection
+    between different hyper threads. This feature can be controlled through
+    prctl per process, or through kernel command line options. This is x86
+    only feature. For more details see below.
+
+  ====================  ========================================================
+  'STIBP: disabled'     STIBP unused
+  'STIBP: forced'       Use STIBP on all tasks
+  'STIBP: conditional'  Use STIBP on SECCOMP or indirect branch restricted tasks
+  ====================  ========================================================
+
+  - Return stack buffer (RSB) protection status:
+
+  =============   ===========================================
+  'RSB filling'   Protection of RSB on context switch enabled
+  =============   ===========================================
+
+Full mitigation might require a microcode update from the CPU
+vendor. When the necessary microcode is not available, the kernel will
+report vulnerability.
+
+Turning on mitigation for Spectre variant 1 and Spectre variant 2
+-----------------------------------------------------------------
+
+1. Kernel mitigation
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+   For the Spectre variant 1, vulnerable kernel code (as determined
+   by code audit or scanning tools) is annotated on a case by case
+   basis to use nospec accessor macros for bounds clipping :ref:`[2]
+   <spec_ref2>` to avoid any usable disclosure gadgets. However, it may
+   not cover all attack vectors for Spectre variant 1.
+
+   For Spectre variant 2 mitigation, the compiler turns indirect calls or
+   jumps in the kernel into equivalent return trampolines (retpolines)
+   :ref:`[3] <spec_ref3>` :ref:`[9] <spec_ref9>` to go to the target
+   addresses.  Speculative execution paths under retpolines are trapped
+   in an infinite loop to prevent any speculative execution jumping to
+   a gadget.
+
+   To turn on retpoline mitigation on a vulnerable CPU, the kernel
+   needs to be compiled with a gcc compiler that supports the
+   -mindirect-branch=thunk-extern -mindirect-branch-register options.
+   If the kernel is compiled with a Clang compiler, the compiler needs
+   to support -mretpoline-external-thunk option.  The kernel config
+   CONFIG_RETPOLINE needs to be turned on, and the CPU needs to run with
+   the latest updated microcode.
+
+   On Intel Skylake-era systems the mitigation covers most, but not all,
+   cases. See :ref:`[3] <spec_ref3>` for more details.
+
+   On CPUs with hardware mitigation for Spectre variant 2 (e.g. Enhanced
+   IBRS on x86), retpoline is automatically disabled at run time.
+
+   The retpoline mitigation is turned on by default on vulnerable
+   CPUs. It can be forced on or off by the administrator
+   via the kernel command line and sysfs control files. See
+   :ref:`spectre_mitigation_control_command_line`.
+
+   On x86, indirect branch restricted speculation is turned on by default
+   before invoking any firmware code to prevent Spectre variant 2 exploits
+   using the firmware.
+
+   Using kernel address space randomization (CONFIG_RANDOMIZE_SLAB=y
+   and CONFIG_SLAB_FREELIST_RANDOM=y in the kernel configuration) makes
+   attacks on the kernel generally more difficult.
+
+2. User program mitigation
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+   User programs can mitigate Spectre variant 1 using LFENCE or "bounds
+   clipping". For more details see :ref:`[2] <spec_ref2>`.
+
+   For Spectre variant 2 mitigation, individual user programs
+   can be compiled with return trampolines for indirect branches.
+   This protects them from consuming poisoned entries in the branch
+   target buffer left by malicious software.  Alternatively, the
+   programs can disable their indirect branch speculation via prctl()
+   (See :ref:`Documentation/userspace-api/spec_ctrl.rst <set_spec_ctrl>`).
+   On x86, this will turn on STIBP to guard against attacks from the
+   sibling thread when the user program is running, and use IBPB to
+   flush the branch target buffer when switching to/from the program.
+
+   Restricting indirect branch speculation on a user program will
+   also prevent the program from launching a variant 2 attack
+   on x86.  All sand-boxed SECCOMP programs have indirect branch
+   speculation restricted by default.  Administrators can change
+   that behavior via the kernel command line and sysfs control files.
+   See :ref:`spectre_mitigation_control_command_line`.
+
+   Programs that disable their indirect branch speculation will have
+   more overhead and run slower.
+
+   User programs should use address space randomization
+   (/proc/sys/kernel/randomize_va_space = 1 or 2) to make attacks more
+   difficult.
+
+3. VM mitigation
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+   Within the kernel, Spectre variant 1 attacks from rogue guests are
+   mitigated on a case by case basis in VM exit paths. Vulnerable code
+   uses nospec accessor macros for "bounds clipping", to avoid any
+   usable disclosure gadgets.  However, this may not cover all variant
+   1 attack vectors.
+
+   For Spectre variant 2 attacks from rogue guests to the kernel, the
+   Linux kernel uses retpoline or Enhanced IBRS to prevent consumption of
+   poisoned entries in branch target buffer left by rogue guests.  It also
+   flushes the return stack buffer on every VM exit to prevent a return
+   stack buffer underflow so poisoned branch target buffer could be used,
+   or attacker guests leaving poisoned entries in the return stack buffer.
+
+   To mitigate guest-to-guest attacks in the same CPU hardware thread,
+   the branch target buffer is sanitized by flushing before switching
+   to a new guest on a CPU.
+
+   The above mitigations are turned on by default on vulnerable CPUs.
+
+   To mitigate guest-to-guest attacks from sibling thread when SMT is
+   in use, an untrusted guest running in the sibling thread can have
+   its indirect branch speculation disabled by administrator via prctl().
+
+   The kernel also allows guests to use any microcode based mitigation
+   they choose to use (such as IBPB or STIBP on x86) to protect themselves.
+
+.. _spectre_mitigation_control_command_line:
+
+Mitigation control on the kernel command line
+---------------------------------------------
+
+Spectre variant 2 mitigation can be disabled or force enabled at the
+kernel command line.
+
+	nospectre_v2
+
+		[X86] Disable all mitigations for the Spectre variant 2
+		(indirect branch prediction) vulnerability. System may
+		allow data leaks with this option, which is equivalent
+		to spectre_v2=off.
+
+
+        spectre_v2=
+
+		[X86] Control mitigation of Spectre variant 2
+		(indirect branch speculation) vulnerability.
+		The default operation protects the kernel from
+		user space attacks.
+
+		on
+			unconditionally enable, implies
+			spectre_v2_user=on
+		off
+			unconditionally disable, implies
+		        spectre_v2_user=off
+		auto
+			kernel detects whether your CPU model is
+		        vulnerable
+
+		Selecting 'on' will, and 'auto' may, choose a
+		mitigation method at run time according to the
+		CPU, the available microcode, the setting of the
+		CONFIG_RETPOLINE configuration option, and the
+		compiler with which the kernel was built.
+
+		Selecting 'on' will also enable the mitigation
+		against user space to user space task attacks.
+
+		Selecting 'off' will disable both the kernel and
+		the user space protections.
+
+		Specific mitigations can also be selected manually:
+
+		retpoline
+					replace indirect branches
+		retpoline,generic
+					google's original retpoline
+		retpoline,amd
+					AMD-specific minimal thunk
+
+		Not specifying this option is equivalent to
+		spectre_v2=auto.
+
+For user space mitigation:
+
+        spectre_v2_user=
+
+		[X86] Control mitigation of Spectre variant 2
+		(indirect branch speculation) vulnerability between
+		user space tasks
+
+		on
+			Unconditionally enable mitigations. Is
+			enforced by spectre_v2=on
+
+		off
+			Unconditionally disable mitigations. Is
+			enforced by spectre_v2=off
+
+		prctl
+			Indirect branch speculation is enabled,
+			but mitigation can be enabled via prctl
+			per thread. The mitigation control state
+			is inherited on fork.
+
+		prctl,ibpb
+			Like "prctl" above, but only STIBP is
+			controlled per thread. IBPB is issued
+			always when switching between different user
+			space processes.
+
+		seccomp
+			Same as "prctl" above, but all seccomp
+			threads will enable the mitigation unless
+			they explicitly opt out.
+
+		seccomp,ibpb
+			Like "seccomp" above, but only STIBP is
+			controlled per thread. IBPB is issued
+			always when switching between different
+			user space processes.
+
+		auto
+			Kernel selects the mitigation depending on
+			the available CPU features and vulnerability.
+
+		Default mitigation:
+		If CONFIG_SECCOMP=y then "seccomp", otherwise "prctl"
+
+		Not specifying this option is equivalent to
+		spectre_v2_user=auto.
+
+		In general the kernel by default selects
+		reasonable mitigations for the current CPU. To
+		disable Spectre variant 2 mitigations, boot with
+		spectre_v2=off. Spectre variant 1 mitigations
+		cannot be disabled.
+
+Mitigation selection guide
+--------------------------
+
+1. Trusted userspace
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+   If all userspace applications are from trusted sources and do not
+   execute externally supplied untrusted code, then the mitigations can
+   be disabled.
+
+2. Protect sensitive programs
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+   For security-sensitive programs that have secrets (e.g. crypto
+   keys), protection against Spectre variant 2 can be put in place by
+   disabling indirect branch speculation when the program is running
+   (See :ref:`Documentation/userspace-api/spec_ctrl.rst <set_spec_ctrl>`).
+
+3. Sandbox untrusted programs
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+   Untrusted programs that could be a source of attacks can be cordoned
+   off by disabling their indirect branch speculation when they are run
+   (See :ref:`Documentation/userspace-api/spec_ctrl.rst <set_spec_ctrl>`).
+   This prevents untrusted programs from polluting the branch target
+   buffer.  All programs running in SECCOMP sandboxes have indirect
+   branch speculation restricted by default. This behavior can be
+   changed via the kernel command line and sysfs control files. See
+   :ref:`spectre_mitigation_control_command_line`.
+
+3. High security mode
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+   All Spectre variant 2 mitigations can be forced on
+   at boot time for all programs (See the "on" option in
+   :ref:`spectre_mitigation_control_command_line`).  This will add
+   overhead as indirect branch speculations for all programs will be
+   restricted.
+
+   On x86, branch target buffer will be flushed with IBPB when switching
+   to a new program. STIBP is left on all the time to protect programs
+   against variant 2 attacks originating from programs running on
+   sibling threads.
+
+   Alternatively, STIBP can be used only when running programs
+   whose indirect branch speculation is explicitly disabled,
+   while IBPB is still used all the time when switching to a new
+   program to clear the branch target buffer (See "ibpb" option in
+   :ref:`spectre_mitigation_control_command_line`).  This "ibpb" option
+   has less performance cost than the "on" option, which leaves STIBP
+   on all the time.
+
+References on Spectre
+---------------------
+
+Intel white papers:
+
+.. _spec_ref1:
+
+[1] `Intel analysis of speculative execution side channels <https://newsroom.intel.com/wp-content/uploads/sites/11/2018/01/Intel-Analysis-of-Speculative-Execution-Side-Channels.pdf>`_.
+
+.. _spec_ref2:
+
+[2] `Bounds check bypass <https://software.intel.com/security-software-guidance/software-guidance/bounds-check-bypass>`_.
+
+.. _spec_ref3:
+
+[3] `Deep dive: Retpoline: A branch target injection mitigation <https://software.intel.com/security-software-guidance/insights/deep-dive-retpoline-branch-target-injection-mitigation>`_.
+
+.. _spec_ref4:
+
+[4] `Deep Dive: Single Thread Indirect Branch Predictors <https://software.intel.com/security-software-guidance/insights/deep-dive-single-thread-indirect-branch-predictors>`_.
+
+AMD white papers:
+
+.. _spec_ref5:
+
+[5] `AMD64 technology indirect branch control extension <https://developer.amd.com/wp-content/resources/Architecture_Guidelines_Update_Indirect_Branch_Control.pdf>`_.
+
+.. _spec_ref6:
+
+[6] `Software techniques for managing speculation on AMD processors <https://developer.amd.com/wp-content/resources/90343-B_SoftwareTechniquesforManagingSpeculation_WP_7-18Update_FNL.pdf>`_.
+
+ARM white papers:
+
+.. _spec_ref7:
+
+[7] `Cache speculation side-channels <https://developer.arm.com/support/arm-security-updates/speculative-processor-vulnerability/download-the-whitepaper>`_.
+
+.. _spec_ref8:
+
+[8] `Cache speculation issues update <https://developer.arm.com/support/arm-security-updates/speculative-processor-vulnerability/latest-updates/cache-speculation-issues-update>`_.
+
+Google white paper:
+
+.. _spec_ref9:
+
+[9] `Retpoline: a software construct for preventing branch-target-injection <https://support.google.com/faqs/answer/7625886>`_.
+
+MIPS white paper:
+
+.. _spec_ref10:
+
+[10] `MIPS: response on speculative execution and side channel vulnerabilities <https://www.mips.com/blog/mips-response-on-speculative-execution-and-side-channel-vulnerabilities/>`_.
+
+Academic papers:
+
+.. _spec_ref11:
+
+[11] `Spectre Attacks: Exploiting Speculative Execution <https://spectreattack.com/spectre.pdf>`_.
+
+.. _spec_ref12:
+
+[12] `NetSpectre: Read Arbitrary Memory over Network <https://arxiv.org/abs/1807.10535>`_.
+
+.. _spec_ref13:
+
+[13] `Spectre Returns! Speculation Attacks using the Return Stack Buffer <https://www.usenix.org/system/files/conference/woot18/woot18-paper-koruyeh.pdf>`_.
diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/index.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/index.rst
index 0a491676685e..8001917ee012 100644
--- a/Documentation/admin-guide/index.rst
+++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/index.rst
@@ -17,14 +17,12 @@ etc.
    kernel-parameters
    devices
 
-This section describes CPU vulnerabilities and provides an overview of the
-possible mitigations along with guidance for selecting mitigations if they
-are configurable at compile, boot or run time.
+This section describes CPU vulnerabilities and their mitigations.
 
 .. toctree::
    :maxdepth: 1
 
-   l1tf
+   hw-vuln/index
 
 Here is a set of documents aimed at users who are trying to track down
 problems and bugs in particular.
@@ -77,6 +75,7 @@ configure specific aspects of kernel behavior to your liking.
    LSM/index
    mm/index
    perf-security
+   acpi/index
 
 .. only::  subproject and html
 
diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.rst
index b8d0bc07ed0a..0124980dca2d 100644
--- a/Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.rst
+++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.rst
@@ -88,6 +88,7 @@ parameter is applicable::
 	APIC	APIC support is enabled.
 	APM	Advanced Power Management support is enabled.
 	ARM	ARM architecture is enabled.
+	ARM64	ARM64 architecture is enabled.
 	AX25	Appropriate AX.25 support is enabled.
 	CLK	Common clock infrastructure is enabled.
 	CMA	Contiguous Memory Area support is enabled.
diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.txt
index 858b6c0b9a15..0082d1e56999 100644
--- a/Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.txt
+++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.txt
@@ -461,6 +461,11 @@
 			possible to determine what the correct size should be.
 			This option provides an override for these situations.
 
+	carrier_timeout=
+			[NET] Specifies amount of time (in seconds) that
+			the kernel should wait for a network carrier. By default
+			it waits 120 seconds.
+
 	ca_keys=	[KEYS] This parameter identifies a specific key(s) on
 			the system trusted keyring to be used for certificate
 			trust validation.
@@ -699,8 +704,11 @@
 			upon panic. This parameter reserves the physical
 			memory region [offset, offset + size] for that kernel
 			image. If '@offset' is omitted, then a suitable offset
-			is selected automatically. Check
-			Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt for further details.
+			is selected automatically.
+			[KNL, x86_64] select a region under 4G first, and
+			fall back to reserve region above 4G when '@offset'
+			hasn't been specified.
+			See Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt for further details.
 
 	crashkernel=range1:size1[,range2:size2,...][@offset]
 			[KNL] Same as above, but depends on the memory
@@ -910,6 +918,10 @@
 			The filter can be disabled or changed to another
 			driver later using sysfs.
 
+	driver_async_probe=  [KNL]
+			List of driver names to be probed asynchronously.
+			Format: <driver_name1>,<driver_name2>...
+
 	drm.edid_firmware=[<connector>:]<file>[,[<connector>:]<file>]
 			Broken monitors, graphic adapters, KVMs and EDIDless
 			panels may send no or incorrect EDID data sets.
@@ -1073,9 +1085,15 @@
 			specified address. The serial port must already be
 			setup and configured. Options are not yet supported.
 
+		efifb,[options]
+			Start an early, unaccelerated console on the EFI
+			memory mapped framebuffer (if available). On cache
+			coherent non-x86 systems that use system memory for
+			the framebuffer, pass the 'ram' option so that it is
+			mapped with the correct attributes.
+
 	earlyprintk=	[X86,SH,ARM,M68k,S390]
 			earlyprintk=vga
-			earlyprintk=efi
 			earlyprintk=sclp
 			earlyprintk=xen
 			earlyprintk=serial[,ttySn[,baudrate]]
@@ -1182,9 +1200,10 @@
 			arch/x86/kernel/cpu/cpufreq/elanfreq.c.
 
 	elevator=	[IOSCHED]
-			Format: {"cfq" | "deadline" | "noop"}
-			See Documentation/block/cfq-iosched.txt and
-			Documentation/block/deadline-iosched.txt for details.
+			Format: { "mq-deadline" | "kyber" | "bfq" }
+			See Documentation/block/deadline-iosched.txt,
+			Documentation/block/kyber-iosched.txt and
+			Documentation/block/bfq-iosched.txt for details.
 
 	elfcorehdr=[size[KMG]@]offset[KMG] [IA64,PPC,SH,X86,S390]
 			Specifies physical address of start of kernel core
@@ -1569,7 +1588,7 @@
 			Format: { "off" | "enforce" | "fix" | "log" }
 			default: "enforce"
 
-	ima_appraise_tcb [IMA]
+	ima_appraise_tcb [IMA] Deprecated.  Use ima_policy= instead.
 			The builtin appraise policy appraises all files
 			owned by uid=0.
 
@@ -1596,8 +1615,7 @@
 			uid=0.
 
 			The "appraise_tcb" policy appraises the integrity of
-			all files owned by root. (This is the equivalent
-			of ima_appraise_tcb.)
+			all files owned by root.
 
 			The "secure_boot" policy appraises the integrity
 			of files (eg. kexec kernel image, kernel modules,
@@ -1812,6 +1830,9 @@
 	ip=		[IP_PNP]
 			See Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfsroot.txt.
 
+	ipcmni_extend	[KNL] Extend the maximum number of unique System V
+			IPC identifiers from 32,768 to 16,777,216.
+
 	irqaffinity=	[SMP] Set the default irq affinity mask
 			The argument is a cpu list, as described above.
 
@@ -1830,6 +1851,11 @@
 			to let secondary kernels in charge of setting up
 			LPIs.
 
+	irqchip.gicv3_pseudo_nmi= [ARM64]
+			Enables support for pseudo-NMIs in the kernel. This
+			requires the kernel to be built with
+			CONFIG_ARM64_PSEUDO_NMI.
+
 	irqfixup	[HW]
 			When an interrupt is not handled search all handlers
 			for it. Intended to get systems with badly broken
@@ -1981,6 +2007,12 @@
 			Built with CONFIG_DEBUG_KMEMLEAK_DEFAULT_OFF=y,
 			the default is off.
 
+	kpti=		[ARM64] Control page table isolation of user
+			and kernel address spaces.
+			Default: enabled on cores which need mitigation.
+			0: force disabled
+			1: force enabled
+
 	kvm.ignore_msrs=[KVM] Ignore guest accesses to unhandled MSRs.
 			Default is 0 (don't ignore, but inject #GP)
 
@@ -2114,7 +2146,7 @@
 
 			Default is 'flush'.
 
-			For details see: Documentation/admin-guide/l1tf.rst
+			For details see: Documentation/admin-guide/hw-vuln/l1tf.rst
 
 	l2cr=		[PPC]
 
@@ -2318,6 +2350,10 @@
 
 	lsm.debug	[SECURITY] Enable LSM initialization debugging output.
 
+	lsm=lsm1,...,lsmN
+			[SECURITY] Choose order of LSM initialization. This
+			overrides CONFIG_LSM, and the "security=" parameter.
+
 	machvec=	[IA-64] Force the use of a particular machine-vector
 			(machvec) in a generic kernel.
 			Example: machvec=hpzx1_swiotlb
@@ -2356,6 +2392,32 @@
 			Format: <first>,<last>
 			Specifies range of consoles to be captured by the MDA.
 
+	mds=		[X86,INTEL]
+			Control mitigation for the Micro-architectural Data
+			Sampling (MDS) vulnerability.
+
+			Certain CPUs are vulnerable to an exploit against CPU
+			internal buffers which can forward information to a
+			disclosure gadget under certain conditions.
+
+			In vulnerable processors, the speculatively
+			forwarded data can be used in a cache side channel
+			attack, to access data to which the attacker does
+			not have direct access.
+
+			This parameter controls the MDS mitigation. The
+			options are:
+
+			full       - Enable MDS mitigation on vulnerable CPUs
+			full,nosmt - Enable MDS mitigation and disable
+				     SMT on vulnerable CPUs
+			off        - Unconditionally disable MDS mitigation
+
+			Not specifying this option is equivalent to
+			mds=full.
+
+			For details see: Documentation/admin-guide/hw-vuln/mds.rst
+
 	mem=nn[KMG]	[KNL,BOOT] Force usage of a specific amount of memory
 			Amount of memory to be used when the kernel is not able
 			to see the whole system memory or for test.
@@ -2513,6 +2575,42 @@
 			in the "bleeding edge" mini2440 support kernel at
 			http://repo.or.cz/w/linux-2.6/mini2440.git
 
+	mitigations=
+			[X86,PPC,S390,ARM64] Control optional mitigations for
+			CPU vulnerabilities.  This is a set of curated,
+			arch-independent options, each of which is an
+			aggregation of existing arch-specific options.
+
+			off
+				Disable all optional CPU mitigations.  This
+				improves system performance, but it may also
+				expose users to several CPU vulnerabilities.
+				Equivalent to: nopti [X86,PPC]
+					       kpti=0 [ARM64]
+					       nospectre_v1 [PPC]
+					       nobp=0 [S390]
+					       nospectre_v2 [X86,PPC,S390,ARM64]
+					       spectre_v2_user=off [X86]
+					       spec_store_bypass_disable=off [X86,PPC]
+					       ssbd=force-off [ARM64]
+					       l1tf=off [X86]
+					       mds=off [X86]
+
+			auto (default)
+				Mitigate all CPU vulnerabilities, but leave SMT
+				enabled, even if it's vulnerable.  This is for
+				users who don't want to be surprised by SMT
+				getting disabled across kernel upgrades, or who
+				have other ways of avoiding SMT-based attacks.
+				Equivalent to: (default behavior)
+
+			auto,nosmt
+				Mitigate all CPU vulnerabilities, disabling SMT
+				if needed.  This is for users who always want to
+				be fully mitigated, even if it means losing SMT.
+				Equivalent to: l1tf=flush,nosmt [X86]
+					       mds=full,nosmt [X86]
+
 	mminit_loglevel=
 			[KNL] When CONFIG_DEBUG_MEMORY_INIT is set, this
 			parameter allows control of the logging verbosity for
@@ -2808,11 +2906,11 @@
 			noexec=on: enable non-executable mappings (default)
 			noexec=off: disable non-executable mappings
 
-	nosmap		[X86]
+	nosmap		[X86,PPC]
 			Disable SMAP (Supervisor Mode Access Prevention)
 			even if it is supported by processor.
 
-	nosmep		[X86]
+	nosmep		[X86,PPC]
 			Disable SMEP (Supervisor Mode Execution Prevention)
 			even if it is supported by processor.
 
@@ -2842,10 +2940,10 @@
 			check bypass). With this option data leaks are possible
 			in the system.
 
-	nospectre_v2	[X86,PPC_FSL_BOOK3E] Disable all mitigations for the Spectre variant 2
-			(indirect branch prediction) vulnerability. System may
-			allow data leaks with this option, which is equivalent
-			to spectre_v2=off.
+	nospectre_v2	[X86,PPC_FSL_BOOK3E,ARM64] Disable all mitigations for
+			the Spectre variant 2 (indirect branch prediction)
+			vulnerability. System may allow data leaks with this
+			option.
 
 	nospec_store_bypass_disable
 			[HW] Disable all mitigations for the Speculative Store Bypass vulnerability
@@ -3079,6 +3177,16 @@
 			This will also cause panics on machine check exceptions.
 			Useful together with panic=30 to trigger a reboot.
 
+	page_alloc.shuffle=
+			[KNL] Boolean flag to control whether the page allocator
+			should randomize its free lists. The randomization may
+			be automatically enabled if the kernel detects it is
+			running on a platform with a direct-mapped memory-side
+			cache, and this parameter can be used to
+			override/disable that behavior. The state of the flag
+			can be read from sysfs at:
+			/sys/module/page_alloc/parameters/shuffle.
+
 	page_owner=	[KNL] Boot-time page_owner enabling option.
 			Storage of the information about who allocated
 			each page is disabled in default. With this switch,
@@ -3104,6 +3212,7 @@
 			bit 2: print timer info
 			bit 3: print locks info if CONFIG_LOCKDEP is on
 			bit 4: print ftrace buffer
+			bit 5: print all printk messages in buffer
 
 	panic_on_warn	panic() instead of WARN().  Useful to cause kdump
 			on a WARN().
@@ -3363,6 +3472,8 @@
 				bridges without forcing it upstream. Note:
 				this removes isolation between devices and
 				may put more devices in an IOMMU group.
+		force_floating	[S390] Force usage of floating interrupts.
+		nomio		[S390] Do not use MIO instructions.
 
 	pcie_aspm=	[PCIE] Forcibly enable or disable PCIe Active State Power
 			Management.
@@ -3592,7 +3703,9 @@
 				see CONFIG_RAS_CEC help text.
 
 	rcu_nocbs=	[KNL]
-			The argument is a cpu list, as described above.
+			The argument is a cpu list, as described above,
+			except that the string "all" can be used to
+			specify every CPU on the system.
 
 			In kernels built with CONFIG_RCU_NOCB_CPU=y, set
 			the specified list of CPUs to be no-callback CPUs.
@@ -3653,19 +3766,6 @@
 			latencies, which will choose a value aligned
 			with the appropriate hardware boundaries.
 
-	rcutree.jiffies_till_sched_qs= [KNL]
-			Set required age in jiffies for a
-			given grace period before RCU starts
-			soliciting quiescent-state help from
-			rcu_note_context_switch().  If not specified, the
-			kernel will calculate a value based on the most
-			recent settings of rcutree.jiffies_till_first_fqs
-			and rcutree.jiffies_till_next_fqs.
-			This calculated value may be viewed in
-			rcutree.jiffies_to_sched_qs.  Any attempt to
-			set rcutree.jiffies_to_sched_qs will be
-			cheerfully overwritten.
-
 	rcutree.jiffies_till_first_fqs= [KNL]
 			Set delay from grace-period initialization to
 			first attempt to force quiescent states.
@@ -3677,6 +3777,20 @@
 			quiescent states.  Units are jiffies, minimum
 			value is one, and maximum value is HZ.
 
+	rcutree.jiffies_till_sched_qs= [KNL]
+			Set required age in jiffies for a
+			given grace period before RCU starts
+			soliciting quiescent-state help from
+			rcu_note_context_switch() and cond_resched().
+			If not specified, the kernel will calculate
+			a value based on the most recent settings
+			of rcutree.jiffies_till_first_fqs
+			and rcutree.jiffies_till_next_fqs.
+			This calculated value may be viewed in
+			rcutree.jiffies_to_sched_qs.  Any attempt to set
+			rcutree.jiffies_to_sched_qs will be cheerfully
+			overwritten.
+
 	rcutree.kthread_prio= 	 [KNL,BOOT]
 			Set the SCHED_FIFO priority of the RCU per-CPU
 			kthreads (rcuc/N). This value is also used for
@@ -3720,6 +3834,11 @@
 			This wake_up() will be accompanied by a
 			WARN_ONCE() splat and an ftrace_dump().
 
+	rcutree.sysrq_rcu= [KNL]
+			Commandeer a sysrq key to dump out Tree RCU's
+			rcu_node tree with an eye towards determining
+			why a new grace period has not yet started.
+
 	rcuperf.gp_async= [KNL]
 			Measure performance of asynchronous
 			grace-period primitives such as call_rcu().
@@ -3949,7 +4068,9 @@
 				[[,]s[mp]#### \
 				[[,]b[ios] | a[cpi] | k[bd] | t[riple] | e[fi] | p[ci]] \
 				[[,]f[orce]
-			Where reboot_mode is one of warm (soft) or cold (hard) or gpio,
+			Where reboot_mode is one of warm (soft) or cold (hard) or gpio
+					(prefix with 'panic_' to set mode for panic
+					reboot only),
 			      reboot_type is one of bios, acpi, kbd, triple, efi, or pci,
 			      reboot_force is either force or not specified,
 			      reboot_cpu is s[mp]#### with #### being the processor
@@ -4089,11 +4210,9 @@
 			Note: increases power consumption, thus should only be
 			enabled if running jitter sensitive (HPC/RT) workloads.
 
-	security=	[SECURITY] Choose a security module to enable at boot.
-			If this boot parameter is not specified, only the first
-			security module asking for security registration will be
-			loaded. An invalid security module name will be treated
-			as if no module has been chosen.
+	security=	[SECURITY] Choose a legacy "major" security module to
+			enable at boot. This has been deprecated by the
+			"lsm=" parameter.
 
 	selinux=	[SELINUX] Disable or enable SELinux at boot time.
 			Format: { "0" | "1" }
@@ -4668,6 +4787,10 @@
 			[x86] unstable: mark the TSC clocksource as unstable, this
 			marks the TSC unconditionally unstable at bootup and
 			avoids any further wobbles once the TSC watchdog notices.
+			[x86] nowatchdog: disable clocksource watchdog. Used
+			in situations with strict latency requirements (where
+			interruptions from clocksource watchdog are not
+			acceptable).
 
 	turbografx.map[2|3]=	[HW,JOY]
 			TurboGraFX parallel port interface
@@ -4697,7 +4820,8 @@
 	usbcore.authorized_default=
 			[USB] Default USB device authorization:
 			(default -1 = authorized except for wireless USB,
-			0 = not authorized, 1 = authorized)
+			0 = not authorized, 1 = authorized, 2 = authorized
+			if device connected to internal port)
 
 	usbcore.autosuspend=
 			[USB] The autosuspend time delay (in seconds) used
@@ -4978,12 +5102,6 @@
 			emulate     [default] Vsyscalls turn into traps and are
 			            emulated reasonably safely.
 
-			native      Vsyscalls are native syscall instructions.
-			            This is a little bit faster than trapping
-			            and makes a few dynamic recompilers work
-			            better than they would in emulation mode.
-			            It also makes exploits much easier to write.
-
 			none        Vsyscalls don't work at all.  This makes
 			            them quite hard to use for exploits but
 			            might break your system.
@@ -5042,6 +5160,14 @@
 			or other driver-specific files in the
 			Documentation/watchdog/ directory.
 
+	watchdog_thresh=
+			[KNL]
+			Set the hard lockup detector stall duration
+			threshold in seconds. The soft lockup detector
+			threshold is set to twice the value. A value of 0
+			disables both lockup detectors. Default is 10
+			seconds.
+
 	workqueue.watchdog_thresh=
 			If CONFIG_WQ_WATCHDOG is configured, workqueue can
 			warn stall conditions and dump internal state to
@@ -5129,6 +5255,13 @@
 			with /sys/devices/system/xen_memory/xen_memory0/scrub_pages.
 			Default value controlled with CONFIG_XEN_SCRUB_PAGES_DEFAULT.
 
+	xen_timer_slop=	[X86-64,XEN]
+			Set the timer slop (in nanoseconds) for the virtual Xen
+			timers (default is 100000). This adjusts the minimum
+			delta of virtualized Xen timers, where lower values
+			improve timer resolution at the expense of processing
+			more timer interrupts.
+
 	xirc2ps_cs=	[NET,PCMCIA]
 			Format:
 			<irq>,<irq_mask>,<io>,<full_duplex>,<do_sound>,<lockup_hack>[,<irq2>[,<irq3>[,<irq4>]]]
diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/md.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/md.rst
index 84de718f24a4..3c51084ffd37 100644
--- a/Documentation/admin-guide/md.rst
+++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/md.rst
@@ -756,3 +756,6 @@ These currently include:
       The cache mode for raid5. raid5 could include an extra disk for
       caching. The mode can be "write-throuth" and "write-back". The
       default is "write-through".
+
+  ppl_write_hint
+      NVMe stream ID to be set for each PPL write request.
diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/mm/index.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/mm/index.rst
index 8edb35f11317..ddf8d8d33377 100644
--- a/Documentation/admin-guide/mm/index.rst
+++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/mm/index.rst
@@ -31,6 +31,7 @@ the Linux memory management.
    ksm
    memory-hotplug
    numa_memory_policy
+   numaperf
    pagemap
    soft-dirty
    transhuge
diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/mm/numaperf.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/mm/numaperf.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c067ed145158
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/mm/numaperf.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,169 @@
+.. _numaperf:
+
+=============
+NUMA Locality
+=============
+
+Some platforms may have multiple types of memory attached to a compute
+node. These disparate memory ranges may share some characteristics, such
+as CPU cache coherence, but may have different performance. For example,
+different media types and buses affect bandwidth and latency.
+
+A system supports such heterogeneous memory by grouping each memory type
+under different domains, or "nodes", based on locality and performance
+characteristics.  Some memory may share the same node as a CPU, and others
+are provided as memory only nodes. While memory only nodes do not provide
+CPUs, they may still be local to one or more compute nodes relative to
+other nodes. The following diagram shows one such example of two compute
+nodes with local memory and a memory only node for each of compute node::
+
+ +------------------+     +------------------+
+ | Compute Node 0   +-----+ Compute Node 1   |
+ | Local Node0 Mem  |     | Local Node1 Mem  |
+ +--------+---------+     +--------+---------+
+          |                        |
+ +--------+---------+     +--------+---------+
+ | Slower Node2 Mem |     | Slower Node3 Mem |
+ +------------------+     +--------+---------+
+
+A "memory initiator" is a node containing one or more devices such as
+CPUs or separate memory I/O devices that can initiate memory requests.
+A "memory target" is a node containing one or more physical address
+ranges accessible from one or more memory initiators.
+
+When multiple memory initiators exist, they may not all have the same
+performance when accessing a given memory target. Each initiator-target
+pair may be organized into different ranked access classes to represent
+this relationship. The highest performing initiator to a given target
+is considered to be one of that target's local initiators, and given
+the highest access class, 0. Any given target may have one or more
+local initiators, and any given initiator may have multiple local
+memory targets.
+
+To aid applications matching memory targets with their initiators, the
+kernel provides symlinks to each other. The following example lists the
+relationship for the access class "0" memory initiators and targets::
+
+	# symlinks -v /sys/devices/system/node/nodeX/access0/targets/
+	relative: /sys/devices/system/node/nodeX/access0/targets/nodeY -> ../../nodeY
+
+	# symlinks -v /sys/devices/system/node/nodeY/access0/initiators/
+	relative: /sys/devices/system/node/nodeY/access0/initiators/nodeX -> ../../nodeX
+
+A memory initiator may have multiple memory targets in the same access
+class. The target memory's initiators in a given class indicate the
+nodes' access characteristics share the same performance relative to other
+linked initiator nodes. Each target within an initiator's access class,
+though, do not necessarily perform the same as each other.
+
+================
+NUMA Performance
+================
+
+Applications may wish to consider which node they want their memory to
+be allocated from based on the node's performance characteristics. If
+the system provides these attributes, the kernel exports them under the
+node sysfs hierarchy by appending the attributes directory under the
+memory node's access class 0 initiators as follows::
+
+	/sys/devices/system/node/nodeY/access0/initiators/
+
+These attributes apply only when accessed from nodes that have the
+are linked under the this access's inititiators.
+
+The performance characteristics the kernel provides for the local initiators
+are exported are as follows::
+
+	# tree -P "read*|write*" /sys/devices/system/node/nodeY/access0/initiators/
+	/sys/devices/system/node/nodeY/access0/initiators/
+	|-- read_bandwidth
+	|-- read_latency
+	|-- write_bandwidth
+	`-- write_latency
+
+The bandwidth attributes are provided in MiB/second.
+
+The latency attributes are provided in nanoseconds.
+
+The values reported here correspond to the rated latency and bandwidth
+for the platform.
+
+==========
+NUMA Cache
+==========
+
+System memory may be constructed in a hierarchy of elements with various
+performance characteristics in order to provide large address space of
+slower performing memory cached by a smaller higher performing memory. The
+system physical addresses memory  initiators are aware of are provided
+by the last memory level in the hierarchy. The system meanwhile uses
+higher performing memory to transparently cache access to progressively
+slower levels.
+
+The term "far memory" is used to denote the last level memory in the
+hierarchy. Each increasing cache level provides higher performing
+initiator access, and the term "near memory" represents the fastest
+cache provided by the system.
+
+This numbering is different than CPU caches where the cache level (ex:
+L1, L2, L3) uses the CPU-side view where each increased level is lower
+performing. In contrast, the memory cache level is centric to the last
+level memory, so the higher numbered cache level corresponds to  memory
+nearer to the CPU, and further from far memory.
+
+The memory-side caches are not directly addressable by software. When
+software accesses a system address, the system will return it from the
+near memory cache if it is present. If it is not present, the system
+accesses the next level of memory until there is either a hit in that
+cache level, or it reaches far memory.
+
+An application does not need to know about caching attributes in order
+to use the system. Software may optionally query the memory cache
+attributes in order to maximize the performance out of such a setup.
+If the system provides a way for the kernel to discover this information,
+for example with ACPI HMAT (Heterogeneous Memory Attribute Table),
+the kernel will append these attributes to the NUMA node memory target.
+
+When the kernel first registers a memory cache with a node, the kernel
+will create the following directory::
+
+	/sys/devices/system/node/nodeX/memory_side_cache/
+
+If that directory is not present, the system either does not not provide
+a memory-side cache, or that information is not accessible to the kernel.
+
+The attributes for each level of cache is provided under its cache
+level index::
+
+	/sys/devices/system/node/nodeX/memory_side_cache/indexA/
+	/sys/devices/system/node/nodeX/memory_side_cache/indexB/
+	/sys/devices/system/node/nodeX/memory_side_cache/indexC/
+
+Each cache level's directory provides its attributes. For example, the
+following shows a single cache level and the attributes available for
+software to query::
+
+	# tree sys/devices/system/node/node0/memory_side_cache/
+	/sys/devices/system/node/node0/memory_side_cache/
+	|-- index1
+	|   |-- indexing
+	|   |-- line_size
+	|   |-- size
+	|   `-- write_policy
+
+The "indexing" will be 0 if it is a direct-mapped cache, and non-zero
+for any other indexed based, multi-way associativity.
+
+The "line_size" is the number of bytes accessed from the next cache
+level on a miss.
+
+The "size" is the number of bytes provided by this cache level.
+
+The "write_policy" will be 0 for write-back, and non-zero for
+write-through caching.
+
+========
+See Also
+========
+.. [1] https://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/ACPI_6_2.pdf
+       Section 5.2.27
diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/mm/pagemap.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/mm/pagemap.rst
index 3f7bade2c231..340a5aee9b80 100644
--- a/Documentation/admin-guide/mm/pagemap.rst
+++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/mm/pagemap.rst
@@ -75,9 +75,10 @@ number of times a page is mapped.
     20. NOPAGE
     21. KSM
     22. THP
-    23. BALLOON
+    23. OFFLINE
     24. ZERO_PAGE
     25. IDLE
+    26. PGTABLE
 
  * ``/proc/kpagecgroup``.  This file contains a 64-bit inode number of the
    memory cgroup each page is charged to, indexed by PFN. Only available when
@@ -118,8 +119,8 @@ Short descriptions to the page flags
     identical memory pages dynamically shared between one or more processes
 22 - THP
     contiguous pages which construct transparent hugepages
-23 - BALLOON
-    balloon compaction page
+23 - OFFLINE
+    page is logically offline
 24 - ZERO_PAGE
     zero page for pfn_zero or huge_zero page
 25 - IDLE
@@ -128,6 +129,8 @@ Short descriptions to the page flags
     Note that this flag may be stale in case the page was accessed via
     a PTE. To make sure the flag is up-to-date one has to read
     ``/sys/kernel/mm/page_idle/bitmap`` first.
+26 - PGTABLE
+    page is in use as a page table
 
 IO related page flags
 ---------------------
diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/perf-security.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/perf-security.rst
index f73ebfe9bfe2..72effa7c23b9 100644
--- a/Documentation/admin-guide/perf-security.rst
+++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/perf-security.rst
@@ -6,83 +6,211 @@ Perf Events and tool security
 Overview
 --------
 
-Usage of Performance Counters for Linux (perf_events) [1]_ , [2]_ , [3]_ can
-impose a considerable risk of leaking sensitive data accessed by monitored
-processes. The data leakage is possible both in scenarios of direct usage of
-perf_events system call API [2]_ and over data files generated by Perf tool user
-mode utility (Perf) [3]_ , [4]_ . The risk depends on the nature of data that
-perf_events performance monitoring units (PMU) [2]_ collect and expose for
-performance analysis. Having that said perf_events/Perf performance monitoring
-is the subject for security access control management [5]_ .
+Usage of Performance Counters for Linux (perf_events) [1]_ , [2]_ , [3]_
+can impose a considerable risk of leaking sensitive data accessed by
+monitored processes. The data leakage is possible both in scenarios of
+direct usage of perf_events system call API [2]_ and over data files
+generated by Perf tool user mode utility (Perf) [3]_ , [4]_ . The risk
+depends on the nature of data that perf_events performance monitoring
+units (PMU) [2]_ and Perf collect and expose for performance analysis.
+Collected system and performance data may be split into several
+categories:
+
+1. System hardware and software configuration data, for example: a CPU
+   model and its cache configuration, an amount of available memory and
+   its topology, used kernel and Perf versions, performance monitoring
+   setup including experiment time, events configuration, Perf command
+   line parameters, etc.
+
+2. User and kernel module paths and their load addresses with sizes,
+   process and thread names with their PIDs and TIDs, timestamps for
+   captured hardware and software events.
+
+3. Content of kernel software counters (e.g., for context switches, page
+   faults, CPU migrations), architectural hardware performance counters
+   (PMC) [8]_ and machine specific registers (MSR) [9]_ that provide
+   execution metrics for various monitored parts of the system (e.g.,
+   memory controller (IMC), interconnect (QPI/UPI) or peripheral (PCIe)
+   uncore counters) without direct attribution to any execution context
+   state.
+
+4. Content of architectural execution context registers (e.g., RIP, RSP,
+   RBP on x86_64), process user and kernel space memory addresses and
+   data, content of various architectural MSRs that capture data from
+   this category.
+
+Data that belong to the fourth category can potentially contain
+sensitive process data. If PMUs in some monitoring modes capture values
+of execution context registers or data from process memory then access
+to such monitoring capabilities requires to be ordered and secured
+properly. So, perf_events/Perf performance monitoring is the subject for
+security access control management [5]_ .
 
 perf_events/Perf access control
 -------------------------------
 
-To perform security checks, the Linux implementation splits processes into two
-categories [6]_ : a) privileged processes (whose effective user ID is 0, referred
-to as superuser or root), and b) unprivileged processes (whose effective UID is
-nonzero). Privileged processes bypass all kernel security permission checks so
-perf_events performance monitoring is fully available to privileged processes
-without access, scope and resource restrictions.
-
-Unprivileged processes are subject to a full security permission check based on
-the process's credentials [5]_ (usually: effective UID, effective GID, and
-supplementary group list).
-
-Linux divides the privileges traditionally associated with superuser into
-distinct units, known as capabilities [6]_ , which can be independently enabled
-and disabled on per-thread basis for processes and files of unprivileged users.
-
-Unprivileged processes with enabled CAP_SYS_ADMIN capability are treated as
-privileged processes with respect to perf_events performance monitoring and
-bypass *scope* permissions checks in the kernel.
-
-Unprivileged processes using perf_events system call API is also subject for
-PTRACE_MODE_READ_REALCREDS ptrace access mode check [7]_ , whose outcome
-determines whether monitoring is permitted. So unprivileged processes provided
-with CAP_SYS_PTRACE capability are effectively permitted to pass the check.
-
-Other capabilities being granted to unprivileged processes can effectively
-enable capturing of additional data required for later performance analysis of
-monitored processes or a system. For example, CAP_SYSLOG capability permits
-reading kernel space memory addresses from /proc/kallsyms file.
+To perform security checks, the Linux implementation splits processes
+into two categories [6]_ : a) privileged processes (whose effective user
+ID is 0, referred to as superuser or root), and b) unprivileged
+processes (whose effective UID is nonzero). Privileged processes bypass
+all kernel security permission checks so perf_events performance
+monitoring is fully available to privileged processes without access,
+scope and resource restrictions.
+
+Unprivileged processes are subject to a full security permission check
+based on the process's credentials [5]_ (usually: effective UID,
+effective GID, and supplementary group list).
+
+Linux divides the privileges traditionally associated with superuser
+into distinct units, known as capabilities [6]_ , which can be
+independently enabled and disabled on per-thread basis for processes and
+files of unprivileged users.
+
+Unprivileged processes with enabled CAP_SYS_ADMIN capability are treated
+as privileged processes with respect to perf_events performance
+monitoring and bypass *scope* permissions checks in the kernel.
+
+Unprivileged processes using perf_events system call API is also subject
+for PTRACE_MODE_READ_REALCREDS ptrace access mode check [7]_ , whose
+outcome determines whether monitoring is permitted. So unprivileged
+processes provided with CAP_SYS_PTRACE capability are effectively
+permitted to pass the check.
+
+Other capabilities being granted to unprivileged processes can
+effectively enable capturing of additional data required for later
+performance analysis of monitored processes or a system. For example,
+CAP_SYSLOG capability permits reading kernel space memory addresses from
+/proc/kallsyms file.
+
+perf_events/Perf privileged users
+---------------------------------
+
+Mechanisms of capabilities, privileged capability-dumb files [6]_ and
+file system ACLs [10]_ can be used to create a dedicated group of
+perf_events/Perf privileged users who are permitted to execute
+performance monitoring without scope limits. The following steps can be
+taken to create such a group of privileged Perf users.
+
+1. Create perf_users group of privileged Perf users, assign perf_users
+   group to Perf tool executable and limit access to the executable for
+   other users in the system who are not in the perf_users group:
+
+::
+
+   # groupadd perf_users
+   # ls -alhF
+   -rwxr-xr-x  2 root root  11M Oct 19 15:12 perf
+   # chgrp perf_users perf
+   # ls -alhF
+   -rwxr-xr-x  2 root perf_users  11M Oct 19 15:12 perf
+   # chmod o-rwx perf
+   # ls -alhF
+   -rwxr-x---  2 root perf_users  11M Oct 19 15:12 perf
+
+2. Assign the required capabilities to the Perf tool executable file and
+   enable members of perf_users group with performance monitoring
+   privileges [6]_ :
+
+::
+
+   # setcap "cap_sys_admin,cap_sys_ptrace,cap_syslog=ep" perf
+   # setcap -v "cap_sys_admin,cap_sys_ptrace,cap_syslog=ep" perf
+   perf: OK
+   # getcap perf
+   perf = cap_sys_ptrace,cap_sys_admin,cap_syslog+ep
+
+As a result, members of perf_users group are capable of conducting
+performance monitoring by using functionality of the configured Perf
+tool executable that, when executes, passes perf_events subsystem scope
+checks.
+
+This specific access control management is only available to superuser
+or root running processes with CAP_SETPCAP, CAP_SETFCAP [6]_
+capabilities.
 
 perf_events/Perf unprivileged users
 -----------------------------------
 
-perf_events/Perf *scope* and *access* control for unprivileged processes is
-governed by perf_event_paranoid [2]_ setting:
+perf_events/Perf *scope* and *access* control for unprivileged processes
+is governed by perf_event_paranoid [2]_ setting:
 
 -1:
-     Impose no *scope* and *access* restrictions on using perf_events performance
-     monitoring. Per-user per-cpu perf_event_mlock_kb [2]_ locking limit is
-     ignored when allocating memory buffers for storing performance data.
-     This is the least secure mode since allowed monitored *scope* is
-     maximized and no perf_events specific limits are imposed on *resources*
-     allocated for performance monitoring.
+     Impose no *scope* and *access* restrictions on using perf_events
+     performance monitoring. Per-user per-cpu perf_event_mlock_kb [2]_
+     locking limit is ignored when allocating memory buffers for storing
+     performance data. This is the least secure mode since allowed
+     monitored *scope* is maximized and no perf_events specific limits
+     are imposed on *resources* allocated for performance monitoring.
 
 >=0:
      *scope* includes per-process and system wide performance monitoring
-     but excludes raw tracepoints and ftrace function tracepoints monitoring.
-     CPU and system events happened when executing either in user or
-     in kernel space can be monitored and captured for later analysis.
-     Per-user per-cpu perf_event_mlock_kb locking limit is imposed but
-     ignored for unprivileged processes with CAP_IPC_LOCK [6]_ capability.
+     but excludes raw tracepoints and ftrace function tracepoints
+     monitoring. CPU and system events happened when executing either in
+     user or in kernel space can be monitored and captured for later
+     analysis. Per-user per-cpu perf_event_mlock_kb locking limit is
+     imposed but ignored for unprivileged processes with CAP_IPC_LOCK
+     [6]_ capability.
 
 >=1:
-     *scope* includes per-process performance monitoring only and excludes
-     system wide performance monitoring. CPU and system events happened when
-     executing either in user or in kernel space can be monitored and
-     captured for later analysis. Per-user per-cpu perf_event_mlock_kb
-     locking limit is imposed but ignored for unprivileged processes with
-     CAP_IPC_LOCK capability.
+     *scope* includes per-process performance monitoring only and
+     excludes system wide performance monitoring. CPU and system events
+     happened when executing either in user or in kernel space can be
+     monitored and captured for later analysis. Per-user per-cpu
+     perf_event_mlock_kb locking limit is imposed but ignored for
+     unprivileged processes with CAP_IPC_LOCK capability.
 
 >=2:
-     *scope* includes per-process performance monitoring only. CPU and system
-     events happened when executing in user space only can be monitored and
-     captured for later analysis. Per-user per-cpu perf_event_mlock_kb
-     locking limit is imposed but ignored for unprivileged processes with
-     CAP_IPC_LOCK capability.
+     *scope* includes per-process performance monitoring only. CPU and
+     system events happened when executing in user space only can be
+     monitored and captured for later analysis. Per-user per-cpu
+     perf_event_mlock_kb locking limit is imposed but ignored for
+     unprivileged processes with CAP_IPC_LOCK capability.
+
+perf_events/Perf resource control
+---------------------------------
+
+Open file descriptors
++++++++++++++++++++++
+
+The perf_events system call API [2]_ allocates file descriptors for
+every configured PMU event. Open file descriptors are a per-process
+accountable resource governed by the RLIMIT_NOFILE [11]_ limit
+(ulimit -n), which is usually derived from the login shell process. When
+configuring Perf collection for a long list of events on a large server
+system, this limit can be easily hit preventing required monitoring
+configuration. RLIMIT_NOFILE limit can be increased on per-user basis
+modifying content of the limits.conf file [12]_ . Ordinarily, a Perf
+sampling session (perf record) requires an amount of open perf_event
+file descriptors that is not less than the number of monitored events
+multiplied by the number of monitored CPUs.
+
+Memory allocation
++++++++++++++++++
+
+The amount of memory available to user processes for capturing
+performance monitoring data is governed by the perf_event_mlock_kb [2]_
+setting. This perf_event specific resource setting defines overall
+per-cpu limits of memory allowed for mapping by the user processes to
+execute performance monitoring. The setting essentially extends the
+RLIMIT_MEMLOCK [11]_ limit, but only for memory regions mapped
+specifically for capturing monitored performance events and related data.
+
+For example, if a machine has eight cores and perf_event_mlock_kb limit
+is set to 516 KiB, then a user process is provided with 516 KiB * 8 =
+4128 KiB of memory above the RLIMIT_MEMLOCK limit (ulimit -l) for
+perf_event mmap buffers. In particular, this means that, if the user
+wants to start two or more performance monitoring processes, the user is
+required to manually distribute the available 4128 KiB between the
+monitoring processes, for example, using the --mmap-pages Perf record
+mode option. Otherwise, the first started performance monitoring process
+allocates all available 4128 KiB and the other processes will fail to
+proceed due to the lack of memory.
+
+RLIMIT_MEMLOCK and perf_event_mlock_kb resource constraints are ignored
+for processes with the CAP_IPC_LOCK capability. Thus, perf_events/Perf
+privileged users can be provided with memory above the constraints for
+perf_events/Perf performance monitoring purpose by providing the Perf
+executable with CAP_IPC_LOCK capability.
 
 Bibliography
 ------------
@@ -94,4 +222,9 @@ Bibliography
 .. [5] `<https://www.kernel.org/doc/html/latest/security/credentials.html>`_
 .. [6] `<http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man7/capabilities.7.html>`_
 .. [7] `<http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man2/ptrace.2.html>`_
+.. [8] `<https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hardware_performance_counter>`_
+.. [9] `<https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Model-specific_register>`_
+.. [10] `<http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man5/acl.5.html>`_
+.. [11] `<http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man2/getrlimit.2.html>`_
+.. [12] `<http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man5/limits.conf.5.html>`_
 
diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/cpufreq.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/cpufreq.rst
index 7eca9026a9ed..0c74a7784964 100644
--- a/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/cpufreq.rst
+++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/cpufreq.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,6 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+.. include:: <isonum.txt>
+
 .. |struct cpufreq_policy| replace:: :c:type:`struct cpufreq_policy <cpufreq_policy>`
 .. |intel_pstate| replace:: :doc:`intel_pstate <intel_pstate>`
 
@@ -5,9 +8,10 @@
 CPU Performance Scaling
 =======================
 
-::
+:Copyright: |copy| 2017 Intel Corporation
+
+:Author: Rafael J. Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>
 
- Copyright (c) 2017 Intel Corp., Rafael J. Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>
 
 The Concept of CPU Performance Scaling
 ======================================
@@ -396,8 +400,8 @@ RT or deadline scheduling classes, the governor will increase the frequency to
 the allowed maximum (that is, the ``scaling_max_freq`` policy limit).  In turn,
 if it is invoked by the CFS scheduling class, the governor will use the
 Per-Entity Load Tracking (PELT) metric for the root control group of the
-given CPU as the CPU utilization estimate (see the `Per-entity load tracking`_
-LWN.net article for a description of the PELT mechanism).  Then, the new
+given CPU as the CPU utilization estimate (see the *Per-entity load tracking*
+LWN.net article [1]_ for a description of the PELT mechanism).  Then, the new
 CPU frequency to apply is computed in accordance with the formula
 
 	f = 1.25 * ``f_0`` * ``util`` / ``max``
@@ -698,4 +702,8 @@ hardware feature (e.g. all Intel ones), even if the
 :c:macro:`CONFIG_X86_ACPI_CPUFREQ_CPB` configuration option is set.
 
 
-.. _Per-entity load tracking: https://lwn.net/Articles/531853/
+References
+==========
+
+.. [1] Jonathan Corbet, *Per-entity load tracking*,
+       https://lwn.net/Articles/531853/
diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/cpuidle.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/cpuidle.rst
index 106379e2619f..e70b365dbc60 100644
--- a/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/cpuidle.rst
+++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/cpuidle.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,6 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+.. include:: <isonum.txt>
+
 .. |struct cpuidle_state| replace:: :c:type:`struct cpuidle_state <cpuidle_state>`
 .. |cpufreq| replace:: :doc:`CPU Performance Scaling <cpufreq>`
 
@@ -5,9 +8,10 @@
 CPU Idle Time Management
 ========================
 
-::
+:Copyright: |copy| 2018 Intel Corporation
+
+:Author: Rafael J. Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>
 
- Copyright (c) 2018 Intel Corp., Rafael J. Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>
 
 Concepts
 ========
@@ -155,14 +159,14 @@ governor uses that information depends on what algorithm is implemented by it
 and that is the primary reason for having more than one governor in the
 ``CPUIdle`` subsystem.
 
-There are two ``CPUIdle`` governors available, ``menu`` and ``ladder``.  Which
-of them is used depends on the configuration of the kernel and in particular on
-whether or not the scheduler tick can be `stopped by the idle
-loop <idle-cpus-and-tick_>`_.  It is possible to change the governor at run time
-if the ``cpuidle_sysfs_switch`` command line parameter has been passed to the
-kernel, but that is not safe in general, so it should not be done on production
-systems (that may change in the future, though).  The name of the ``CPUIdle``
-governor currently used by the kernel can be read from the
+There are three ``CPUIdle`` governors available, ``menu``, `TEO <teo-gov_>`_
+and ``ladder``.  Which of them is used by default depends on the configuration
+of the kernel and in particular on whether or not the scheduler tick can be
+`stopped by the idle loop <idle-cpus-and-tick_>`_.  It is possible to change the
+governor at run time if the ``cpuidle_sysfs_switch`` command line parameter has
+been passed to the kernel, but that is not safe in general, so it should not be
+done on production systems (that may change in the future, though).  The name of
+the ``CPUIdle`` governor currently used by the kernel can be read from the
 :file:`current_governor_ro` (or :file:`current_governor` if
 ``cpuidle_sysfs_switch`` is present in the kernel command line) file under
 :file:`/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuidle/` in ``sysfs``.
@@ -256,6 +260,8 @@ the ``menu`` governor by default and if it is not tickless, the default
 ``CPUIdle`` governor on it will be ``ladder``.
 
 
+.. _menu-gov:
+
 The ``menu`` Governor
 =====================
 
@@ -333,6 +339,92 @@ that time, the governor may need to select a shallower state with a suitable
 target residency.
 
 
+.. _teo-gov:
+
+The Timer Events Oriented (TEO) Governor
+========================================
+
+The timer events oriented (TEO) governor is an alternative ``CPUIdle`` governor
+for tickless systems.  It follows the same basic strategy as the ``menu`` `one
+<menu-gov_>`_: it always tries to find the deepest idle state suitable for the
+given conditions.  However, it applies a different approach to that problem.
+
+First, it does not use sleep length correction factors, but instead it attempts
+to correlate the observed idle duration values with the available idle states
+and use that information to pick up the idle state that is most likely to
+"match" the upcoming CPU idle interval.   Second, it does not take the tasks
+that were running on the given CPU in the past and are waiting on some I/O
+operations to complete now at all (there is no guarantee that they will run on
+the same CPU when they become runnable again) and the pattern detection code in
+it avoids taking timer wakeups into account.  It also only uses idle duration
+values less than the current time till the closest timer (with the scheduler
+tick excluded) for that purpose.
+
+Like in the ``menu`` governor `case <menu-gov_>`_, the first step is to obtain
+the *sleep length*, which is the time until the closest timer event with the
+assumption that the scheduler tick will be stopped (that also is the upper bound
+on the time until the next CPU wakeup).  That value is then used to preselect an
+idle state on the basis of three metrics maintained for each idle state provided
+by the ``CPUIdle`` driver: ``hits``, ``misses`` and ``early_hits``.
+
+The ``hits`` and ``misses`` metrics measure the likelihood that a given idle
+state will "match" the observed (post-wakeup) idle duration if it "matches" the
+sleep length.  They both are subject to decay (after a CPU wakeup) every time
+the target residency of the idle state corresponding to them is less than or
+equal to the sleep length and the target residency of the next idle state is
+greater than the sleep length (that is, when the idle state corresponding to
+them "matches" the sleep length).  The ``hits`` metric is increased if the
+former condition is satisfied and the target residency of the given idle state
+is less than or equal to the observed idle duration and the target residency of
+the next idle state is greater than the observed idle duration at the same time
+(that is, it is increased when the given idle state "matches" both the sleep
+length and the observed idle duration).  In turn, the ``misses`` metric is
+increased when the given idle state "matches" the sleep length only and the
+observed idle duration is too short for its target residency.
+
+The ``early_hits`` metric measures the likelihood that a given idle state will
+"match" the observed (post-wakeup) idle duration if it does not "match" the
+sleep length.  It is subject to decay on every CPU wakeup and it is increased
+when the idle state corresponding to it "matches" the observed (post-wakeup)
+idle duration and the target residency of the next idle state is less than or
+equal to the sleep length (i.e. the idle state "matching" the sleep length is
+deeper than the given one).
+
+The governor walks the list of idle states provided by the ``CPUIdle`` driver
+and finds the last (deepest) one with the target residency less than or equal
+to the sleep length.  Then, the ``hits`` and ``misses`` metrics of that idle
+state are compared with each other and it is preselected if the ``hits`` one is
+greater (which means that that idle state is likely to "match" the observed idle
+duration after CPU wakeup).  If the ``misses`` one is greater, the governor
+preselects the shallower idle state with the maximum ``early_hits`` metric
+(or if there are multiple shallower idle states with equal ``early_hits``
+metric which also is the maximum, the shallowest of them will be preselected).
+[If there is a wakeup latency constraint coming from the `PM QoS framework
+<cpu-pm-qos_>`_ which is hit before reaching the deepest idle state with the
+target residency within the sleep length, the deepest idle state with the exit
+latency within the constraint is preselected without consulting the ``hits``,
+``misses`` and ``early_hits`` metrics.]
+
+Next, the governor takes several idle duration values observed most recently
+into consideration and if at least a half of them are greater than or equal to
+the target residency of the preselected idle state, that idle state becomes the
+final candidate to ask for.  Otherwise, the average of the most recent idle
+duration values below the target residency of the preselected idle state is
+computed and the governor walks the idle states shallower than the preselected
+one and finds the deepest of them with the target residency within that average.
+That idle state is then taken as the final candidate to ask for.
+
+Still, at this point the governor may need to refine the idle state selection if
+it has not decided to `stop the scheduler tick <idle-cpus-and-tick_>`_.  That
+generally happens if the target residency of the idle state selected so far is
+less than the tick period and the tick has not been stopped already (in a
+previous iteration of the idle loop).  Then, like in the ``menu`` governor
+`case <menu-gov_>`_, the sleep length used in the previous computations may not
+reflect the real time until the closest timer event and if it really is greater
+than that time, a shallower state with a suitable target residency may need to
+be selected.
+
+
 .. _idle-states-representation:
 
 Representation of Idle States
diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/index.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/index.rst
index 49237ac73442..39f8f9f81e7a 100644
--- a/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/index.rst
+++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/index.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,5 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
 ================
 Power Management
 ================
diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/intel_epb.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/intel_epb.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..005121167af7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/intel_epb.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+.. include:: <isonum.txt>
+
+======================================
+Intel Performance and Energy Bias Hint
+======================================
+
+:Copyright: |copy| 2019 Intel Corporation
+
+:Author: Rafael J. Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>
+
+
+.. kernel-doc:: arch/x86/kernel/cpu/intel_epb.c
+   :doc: overview
+
+Intel Performance and Energy Bias Attribute in ``sysfs``
+========================================================
+
+The Intel Performance and Energy Bias Hint (EPB) value for a given (logical) CPU
+can be checked or updated through a ``sysfs`` attribute (file) under
+:file:`/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu<N>/power/`, where the CPU number ``<N>``
+is allocated at the system initialization time:
+
+``energy_perf_bias``
+	Shows the current EPB value for the CPU in a sliding scale 0 - 15, where
+	a value of 0 corresponds to a hint preference for highest performance
+	and a value of 15 corresponds to the maximum energy savings.
+
+	In order to update the EPB value for the CPU, this attribute can be
+	written to, either with a number in the 0 - 15 sliding scale above, or
+	with one of the strings: "performance", "balance-performance", "normal",
+	"balance-power", "power" that represent values reflected by their
+	meaning.
+
+	This attribute is present for all online CPUs supporting the EPB
+	feature.
+
+Note that while the EPB interface to the processor is defined at the logical CPU
+level, the physical register backing it may be shared by multiple CPUs (for
+example, SMT siblings or cores in one package).  For this reason, updating the
+EPB value for one CPU may cause the EPB values for other CPUs to change.
diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/intel_pstate.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/intel_pstate.rst
index ec0f7c111f65..67e414e34f37 100644
--- a/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/intel_pstate.rst
+++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/intel_pstate.rst
@@ -1,10 +1,13 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+.. include:: <isonum.txt>
+
 ===============================================
 ``intel_pstate`` CPU Performance Scaling Driver
 ===============================================
 
-::
+:Copyright: |copy| 2017 Intel Corporation
 
- Copyright (c) 2017 Intel Corp., Rafael J. Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>
+:Author: Rafael J. Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>
 
 
 General Information
@@ -20,11 +23,10 @@ you have not done that yet.]
 
 For the processors supported by ``intel_pstate``, the P-state concept is broader
 than just an operating frequency or an operating performance point (see the
-`LinuxCon Europe 2015 presentation by Kristen Accardi <LCEU2015_>`_ for more
+LinuxCon Europe 2015 presentation by Kristen Accardi [1]_ for more
 information about that).  For this reason, the representation of P-states used
 by ``intel_pstate`` internally follows the hardware specification (for details
-refer to `Intel® 64 and IA-32 Architectures Software Developer’s Manual
-Volume 3: System Programming Guide <SDM_>`_).  However, the ``CPUFreq`` core
+refer to Intel Software Developer’s Manual [2]_).  However, the ``CPUFreq`` core
 uses frequencies for identifying operating performance points of CPUs and
 frequencies are involved in the user space interface exposed by it, so
 ``intel_pstate`` maps its internal representation of P-states to frequencies too
@@ -561,9 +563,9 @@ or to pin every task potentially sensitive to them to a specific CPU.]
 
 On the majority of systems supported by ``intel_pstate``, the ACPI tables
 provided by the platform firmware contain ``_PSS`` objects returning information
-that can be used for CPU performance scaling (refer to the `ACPI specification`_
-for details on the ``_PSS`` objects and the format of the information returned
-by them).
+that can be used for CPU performance scaling (refer to the ACPI specification
+[3]_ for details on the ``_PSS`` objects and the format of the information
+returned by them).
 
 The information returned by the ACPI ``_PSS`` objects is used by the
 ``acpi-cpufreq`` scaling driver.  On systems supported by ``intel_pstate``
@@ -728,6 +730,14 @@ P-state is called, the ``ftrace`` filter can be set to to
            <idle>-0     [000] ..s.  2537.654843: intel_pstate_set_pstate <-intel_pstate_timer_func
 
 
-.. _LCEU2015: http://events.linuxfoundation.org/sites/events/files/slides/LinuxConEurope_2015.pdf
-.. _SDM: http://www.intel.com/content/www/us/en/architecture-and-technology/64-ia-32-architectures-software-developer-system-programming-manual-325384.html
-.. _ACPI specification: http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/ACPI_6_1.pdf
+References
+==========
+
+.. [1] Kristen Accardi, *Balancing Power and Performance in the Linux Kernel*,
+       http://events.linuxfoundation.org/sites/events/files/slides/LinuxConEurope_2015.pdf
+
+.. [2] *Intel® 64 and IA-32 Architectures Software Developer’s Manual Volume 3: System Programming Guide*,
+       http://www.intel.com/content/www/us/en/architecture-and-technology/64-ia-32-architectures-software-developer-system-programming-manual-325384.html
+
+.. [3] *Advanced Configuration and Power Interface Specification*,
+       https://uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/ACPI_6_3_final_Jan30.pdf
diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/sleep-states.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/sleep-states.rst
index dbf5acd49f35..cd3a28cb81f4 100644
--- a/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/sleep-states.rst
+++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/sleep-states.rst
@@ -1,10 +1,14 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+.. include:: <isonum.txt>
+
 ===================
 System Sleep States
 ===================
 
-::
+:Copyright: |copy| 2017 Intel Corporation
+
+:Author: Rafael J. Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>
 
- Copyright (c) 2017 Intel Corp., Rafael J. Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>
 
 Sleep states are global low-power states of the entire system in which user
 space code cannot be executed and the overall system activity is significantly
diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/strategies.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/strategies.rst
index afe4d3f831fe..dd0362e32fa5 100644
--- a/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/strategies.rst
+++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/strategies.rst
@@ -1,10 +1,14 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+.. include:: <isonum.txt>
+
 ===========================
 Power Management Strategies
 ===========================
 
-::
+:Copyright: |copy| 2017 Intel Corporation
+
+:Author: Rafael J. Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>
 
- Copyright (c) 2017 Intel Corp., Rafael J. Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>
 
 The Linux kernel supports two major high-level power management strategies.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/system-wide.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/system-wide.rst
index 0c81e4c5de39..2b1f987b34f0 100644
--- a/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/system-wide.rst
+++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/system-wide.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,5 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
 ============================
 System-Wide Power Management
 ============================
diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/working-state.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/working-state.rst
index b6cef9b5e961..fc298eb1234b 100644
--- a/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/working-state.rst
+++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/working-state.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,5 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
 ==============================
 Working-State Power Management
 ==============================
@@ -8,3 +10,4 @@ Working-State Power Management
    cpuidle
    cpufreq
    intel_pstate
+   intel_epb
diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/tainted-kernels.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/tainted-kernels.rst
index 28a869c509a0..71e9184a9079 100644
--- a/Documentation/admin-guide/tainted-kernels.rst
+++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/tainted-kernels.rst
@@ -1,59 +1,164 @@
 Tainted kernels
 ---------------
 
-Some oops reports contain the string **'Tainted: '** after the program
-counter. This indicates that the kernel has been tainted by some
-mechanism.  The string is followed by a series of position-sensitive
-characters, each representing a particular tainted value.
-
- 1)  ``G`` if all modules loaded have a GPL or compatible license, ``P`` if
+The kernel will mark itself as 'tainted' when something occurs that might be
+relevant later when investigating problems. Don't worry too much about this,
+most of the time it's not a problem to run a tainted kernel; the information is
+mainly of interest once someone wants to investigate some problem, as its real
+cause might be the event that got the kernel tainted. That's why bug reports
+from tainted kernels will often be ignored by developers, hence try to reproduce
+problems with an untainted kernel.
+
+Note the kernel will remain tainted even after you undo what caused the taint
+(i.e. unload a proprietary kernel module), to indicate the kernel remains not
+trustworthy. That's also why the kernel will print the tainted state when it
+notices an internal problem (a 'kernel bug'), a recoverable error
+('kernel oops') or a non-recoverable error ('kernel panic') and writes debug
+information about this to the logs ``dmesg`` outputs. It's also possible to
+check the tainted state at runtime through a file in ``/proc/``.
+
+
+Tainted flag in bugs, oops or panics messages
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+You find the tainted state near the top in a line starting with 'CPU:'; if or
+why the kernel was tainted is shown after the Process ID ('PID:') and a shortened
+name of the command ('Comm:') that triggered the event::
+
+	BUG: unable to handle kernel NULL pointer dereference at 0000000000000000
+	Oops: 0002 [#1] SMP PTI
+	CPU: 0 PID: 4424 Comm: insmod Tainted: P        W  O      4.20.0-0.rc6.fc30 #1
+	Hardware name: Red Hat KVM, BIOS 0.5.1 01/01/2011
+	RIP: 0010:my_oops_init+0x13/0x1000 [kpanic]
+	[...]
+
+You'll find a 'Not tainted: ' there if the kernel was not tainted at the
+time of the event; if it was, then it will print 'Tainted: ' and characters
+either letters or blanks. In above example it looks like this::
+
+	Tainted: P        W  O
+
+The meaning of those characters is explained in the table below. In tis case
+the kernel got tainted earlier because a proprietary Module (``P``) was loaded,
+a warning occurred (``W``), and an externally-built module was loaded (``O``).
+To decode other letters use the table below.
+
+
+Decoding tainted state at runtime
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+At runtime, you can query the tainted state by reading
+``cat /proc/sys/kernel/tainted``. If that returns ``0``, the kernel is not
+tainted; any other number indicates the reasons why it is. The easiest way to
+decode that number is the script ``tools/debugging/kernel-chktaint``, which your
+distribution might ship as part of a package called ``linux-tools`` or
+``kernel-tools``; if it doesn't you can download the script from
+`git.kernel.org <https://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/torvalds/linux.git/plain/tools/debugging/kernel-chktaint>`_
+and execute it with ``sh kernel-chktaint``, which would print something like
+this on the machine that had the statements in the logs that were quoted earlier::
+
+	Kernel is Tainted for following reasons:
+	 * Proprietary module was loaded (#0)
+	 * Kernel issued warning (#9)
+	 * Externally-built ('out-of-tree') module was loaded  (#12)
+	See Documentation/admin-guide/tainted-kernels.rst in the the Linux kernel or
+	 https://www.kernel.org/doc/html/latest/admin-guide/tainted-kernels.html for
+	 a more details explanation of the various taint flags.
+	Raw taint value as int/string: 4609/'P        W  O     '
+
+You can try to decode the number yourself. That's easy if there was only one
+reason that got your kernel tainted, as in this case you can find the number
+with the table below. If there were multiple reasons you need to decode the
+number, as it is a bitfield, where each bit indicates the absence or presence of
+a particular type of taint. It's best to leave that to the aforementioned
+script, but if you need something quick you can use this shell command to check
+which bits are set::
+
+	$ for i in $(seq 18); do echo $(($i-1)) $(($(cat /proc/sys/kernel/tainted)>>($i-1)&1));done
+
+Table for decoding tainted state
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+===  ===  ======  ========================================================
+Bit  Log  Number  Reason that got the kernel tainted
+===  ===  ======  ========================================================
+  0  G/P       1  proprietary module was loaded
+  1  _/F       2  module was force loaded
+  2  _/S       4  SMP kernel oops on an officially SMP incapable processor
+  3  _/R       8  module was force unloaded
+  4  _/M      16  processor reported a Machine Check Exception (MCE)
+  5  _/B      32  bad page referenced or some unexpected page flags
+  6  _/U      64  taint requested by userspace application
+  7  _/D     128  kernel died recently, i.e. there was an OOPS or BUG
+  8  _/A     256  ACPI table overridden by user
+  9  _/W     512  kernel issued warning
+ 10  _/C    1024  staging driver was loaded
+ 11  _/I    2048  workaround for bug in platform firmware applied
+ 12  _/O    4096  externally-built ("out-of-tree") module was loaded
+ 13  _/E    8192  unsigned module was loaded
+ 14  _/L   16384  soft lockup occurred
+ 15  _/K   32768  kernel has been live patched
+ 16  _/X   65536  auxiliary taint, defined for and used by distros
+ 17  _/T  131072  kernel was built with the struct randomization plugin
+===  ===  ======  ========================================================
+
+Note: The character ``_`` is representing a blank in this table to make reading
+easier.
+
+More detailed explanation for tainting
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+ 0)  ``G`` if all modules loaded have a GPL or compatible license, ``P`` if
      any proprietary module has been loaded.  Modules without a
      MODULE_LICENSE or with a MODULE_LICENSE that is not recognised by
      insmod as GPL compatible are assumed to be proprietary.
 
- 2)  ``F`` if any module was force loaded by ``insmod -f``, ``' '`` if all
+ 1)  ``F`` if any module was force loaded by ``insmod -f``, ``' '`` if all
      modules were loaded normally.
 
- 3)  ``S`` if the oops occurred on an SMP kernel running on hardware that
+ 2)  ``S`` if the oops occurred on an SMP kernel running on hardware that
      hasn't been certified as safe to run multiprocessor.
      Currently this occurs only on various Athlons that are not
      SMP capable.
 
- 4)  ``R`` if a module was force unloaded by ``rmmod -f``, ``' '`` if all
+ 3)  ``R`` if a module was force unloaded by ``rmmod -f``, ``' '`` if all
      modules were unloaded normally.
 
- 5)  ``M`` if any processor has reported a Machine Check Exception,
+ 4)  ``M`` if any processor has reported a Machine Check Exception,
      ``' '`` if no Machine Check Exceptions have occurred.
 
- 6)  ``B`` if a page-release function has found a bad page reference or
-     some unexpected page flags.
+ 5)  ``B`` If a page-release function has found a bad page reference or some
+     unexpected page flags. This indicates a hardware problem or a kernel bug;
+     there should be other information in the log indicating why this tainting
+     occured.
 
- 7)  ``U`` if a user or user application specifically requested that the
+ 6)  ``U`` if a user or user application specifically requested that the
      Tainted flag be set, ``' '`` otherwise.
 
- 8)  ``D`` if the kernel has died recently, i.e. there was an OOPS or BUG.
+ 7)  ``D`` if the kernel has died recently, i.e. there was an OOPS or BUG.
 
- 9)  ``A`` if the ACPI table has been overridden.
+ 8)  ``A`` if an ACPI table has been overridden.
 
- 10) ``W`` if a warning has previously been issued by the kernel.
+ 9)  ``W`` if a warning has previously been issued by the kernel.
      (Though some warnings may set more specific taint flags.)
 
- 11) ``C`` if a staging driver has been loaded.
+ 10) ``C`` if a staging driver has been loaded.
 
- 12) ``I`` if the kernel is working around a severe bug in the platform
+ 11) ``I`` if the kernel is working around a severe bug in the platform
      firmware (BIOS or similar).
 
- 13) ``O`` if an externally-built ("out-of-tree") module has been loaded.
+ 12) ``O`` if an externally-built ("out-of-tree") module has been loaded.
 
- 14) ``E`` if an unsigned module has been loaded in a kernel supporting
+ 13) ``E`` if an unsigned module has been loaded in a kernel supporting
      module signature.
 
- 15) ``L`` if a soft lockup has previously occurred on the system.
+ 14) ``L`` if a soft lockup has previously occurred on the system.
+
+ 15) ``K`` if the kernel has been live patched.
 
- 16) ``K`` if the kernel has been live patched.
+ 16) ``X`` Auxiliary taint, defined for and used by Linux distributors.
 
-The primary reason for the **'Tainted: '** string is to tell kernel
-debuggers if this is a clean kernel or if anything unusual has
-occurred.  Tainting is permanent: even if an offending module is
-unloaded, the tainted value remains to indicate that the kernel is not
-trustworthy.
+ 17) ``T`` Kernel was build with the randstruct plugin, which can intentionally
+     produce extremely unusual kernel structure layouts (even performance
+     pathological ones), which is important to know when debugging. Set at
+     build time.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/kernel_mode_neon.txt b/Documentation/arm/kernel_mode_neon.txt
index 525452726d31..b9e060c5b61e 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/kernel_mode_neon.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/kernel_mode_neon.txt
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ TL;DR summary
 * Use only NEON instructions, or VFP instructions that don't rely on support
   code
 * Isolate your NEON code in a separate compilation unit, and compile it with
-  '-mfpu=neon -mfloat-abi=softfp'
+  '-march=armv7-a -mfpu=neon -mfloat-abi=softfp'
 * Put kernel_neon_begin() and kernel_neon_end() calls around the calls into your
   NEON code
 * Don't sleep in your NEON code, and be aware that it will be executed with
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ instructions appearing in unexpected places if no special care is taken.
 Therefore, the recommended and only supported way of using NEON/VFP in the
 kernel is by adhering to the following rules:
 * isolate the NEON code in a separate compilation unit and compile it with
-  '-mfpu=neon -mfloat-abi=softfp';
+  '-march=armv7-a -mfpu=neon -mfloat-abi=softfp';
 * issue the calls to kernel_neon_begin(), kernel_neon_end() as well as the calls
   into the unit containing the NEON code from a compilation unit which is *not*
   built with the GCC flag '-mfpu=neon' set.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm64/booting.txt b/Documentation/arm64/booting.txt
index 8df9f4658d6f..fbab7e21d116 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm64/booting.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm64/booting.txt
@@ -188,6 +188,11 @@ Before jumping into the kernel, the following conditions must be met:
   the kernel image will be entered must be initialised by software at a
   higher exception level to prevent execution in an UNKNOWN state.
 
+  - SCR_EL3.FIQ must have the same value across all CPUs the kernel is
+    executing on.
+  - The value of SCR_EL3.FIQ must be the same as the one present at boot
+    time whenever the kernel is executing.
+
   For systems with a GICv3 interrupt controller to be used in v3 mode:
   - If EL3 is present:
     ICC_SRE_EL3.Enable (bit 3) must be initialiased to 0b1.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm64/cpu-feature-registers.txt b/Documentation/arm64/cpu-feature-registers.txt
index d4b4dd1fe786..684a0da39378 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm64/cpu-feature-registers.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm64/cpu-feature-registers.txt
@@ -209,6 +209,22 @@ infrastructure:
      | AT                           | [35-32] |    y    |
      x--------------------------------------------------x
 
+  6) ID_AA64ZFR0_EL1 - SVE feature ID register 0
+
+     x--------------------------------------------------x
+     | Name                         |  bits   | visible |
+     |--------------------------------------------------|
+     | SM4                          | [43-40] |    y    |
+     |--------------------------------------------------|
+     | SHA3                         | [35-32] |    y    |
+     |--------------------------------------------------|
+     | BitPerm                      | [19-16] |    y    |
+     |--------------------------------------------------|
+     | AES                          | [7-4]   |    y    |
+     |--------------------------------------------------|
+     | SVEVer                       | [3-0]   |    y    |
+     x--------------------------------------------------x
+
 Appendix I: Example
 ---------------------------
 
diff --git a/Documentation/arm64/elf_hwcaps.txt b/Documentation/arm64/elf_hwcaps.txt
index 13d6691b37be..b73a2519ecf2 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm64/elf_hwcaps.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm64/elf_hwcaps.txt
@@ -13,9 +13,9 @@ architected discovery mechanism available to userspace code at EL0. The
 kernel exposes the presence of these features to userspace through a set
 of flags called hwcaps, exposed in the auxilliary vector.
 
-Userspace software can test for features by acquiring the AT_HWCAP entry
-of the auxilliary vector, and testing whether the relevant flags are
-set, e.g.
+Userspace software can test for features by acquiring the AT_HWCAP or
+AT_HWCAP2 entry of the auxiliary vector, and testing whether the relevant
+flags are set, e.g.
 
 bool floating_point_is_present(void)
 {
@@ -135,6 +135,10 @@ HWCAP_DCPOP
 
     Functionality implied by ID_AA64ISAR1_EL1.DPB == 0b0001.
 
+HWCAP2_DCPODP
+
+    Functionality implied by ID_AA64ISAR1_EL1.DPB == 0b0010.
+
 HWCAP_SHA3
 
     Functionality implied by ID_AA64ISAR0_EL1.SHA3 == 0b0001.
@@ -159,6 +163,30 @@ HWCAP_SVE
 
     Functionality implied by ID_AA64PFR0_EL1.SVE == 0b0001.
 
+HWCAP2_SVE2
+
+    Functionality implied by ID_AA64ZFR0_EL1.SVEVer == 0b0001.
+
+HWCAP2_SVEAES
+
+    Functionality implied by ID_AA64ZFR0_EL1.AES == 0b0001.
+
+HWCAP2_SVEPMULL
+
+    Functionality implied by ID_AA64ZFR0_EL1.AES == 0b0010.
+
+HWCAP2_SVEBITPERM
+
+    Functionality implied by ID_AA64ZFR0_EL1.BitPerm == 0b0001.
+
+HWCAP2_SVESHA3
+
+    Functionality implied by ID_AA64ZFR0_EL1.SHA3 == 0b0001.
+
+HWCAP2_SVESM4
+
+    Functionality implied by ID_AA64ZFR0_EL1.SM4 == 0b0001.
+
 HWCAP_ASIMDFHM
 
    Functionality implied by ID_AA64ISAR0_EL1.FHM == 0b0001.
@@ -194,3 +222,10 @@ HWCAP_PACG
     Functionality implied by ID_AA64ISAR1_EL1.GPA == 0b0001 or
     ID_AA64ISAR1_EL1.GPI == 0b0001, as described by
     Documentation/arm64/pointer-authentication.txt.
+
+
+4. Unused AT_HWCAP bits
+-----------------------
+
+For interoperation with userspace, the kernel guarantees that bits 62
+and 63 of AT_HWCAP will always be returned as 0.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm64/perf.txt b/Documentation/arm64/perf.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0d6a7d87d49e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/arm64/perf.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
+Perf Event Attributes
+=====================
+
+Author: Andrew Murray <andrew.murray@arm.com>
+Date: 2019-03-06
+
+exclude_user
+------------
+
+This attribute excludes userspace.
+
+Userspace always runs at EL0 and thus this attribute will exclude EL0.
+
+
+exclude_kernel
+--------------
+
+This attribute excludes the kernel.
+
+The kernel runs at EL2 with VHE and EL1 without. Guest kernels always run
+at EL1.
+
+For the host this attribute will exclude EL1 and additionally EL2 on a VHE
+system.
+
+For the guest this attribute will exclude EL1. Please note that EL2 is
+never counted within a guest.
+
+
+exclude_hv
+----------
+
+This attribute excludes the hypervisor.
+
+For a VHE host this attribute is ignored as we consider the host kernel to
+be the hypervisor.
+
+For a non-VHE host this attribute will exclude EL2 as we consider the
+hypervisor to be any code that runs at EL2 which is predominantly used for
+guest/host transitions.
+
+For the guest this attribute has no effect. Please note that EL2 is
+never counted within a guest.
+
+
+exclude_host / exclude_guest
+----------------------------
+
+These attributes exclude the KVM host and guest, respectively.
+
+The KVM host may run at EL0 (userspace), EL1 (non-VHE kernel) and EL2 (VHE
+kernel or non-VHE hypervisor).
+
+The KVM guest may run at EL0 (userspace) and EL1 (kernel).
+
+Due to the overlapping exception levels between host and guests we cannot
+exclusively rely on the PMU's hardware exception filtering - therefore we
+must enable/disable counting on the entry and exit to the guest. This is
+performed differently on VHE and non-VHE systems.
+
+For non-VHE systems we exclude EL2 for exclude_host - upon entering and
+exiting the guest we disable/enable the event as appropriate based on the
+exclude_host and exclude_guest attributes.
+
+For VHE systems we exclude EL1 for exclude_guest and exclude both EL0,EL2
+for exclude_host. Upon entering and exiting the guest we modify the event
+to include/exclude EL0 as appropriate based on the exclude_host and
+exclude_guest attributes.
+
+The statements above also apply when these attributes are used within a
+non-VHE guest however please note that EL2 is never counted within a guest.
+
+
+Accuracy
+--------
+
+On non-VHE hosts we enable/disable counters on the entry/exit of host/guest
+transition at EL2 - however there is a period of time between
+enabling/disabling the counters and entering/exiting the guest. We are
+able to eliminate counters counting host events on the boundaries of guest
+entry/exit when counting guest events by filtering out EL2 for
+exclude_host. However when using !exclude_hv there is a small blackout
+window at the guest entry/exit where host events are not captured.
+
+On VHE systems there are no blackout windows.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm64/pointer-authentication.txt b/Documentation/arm64/pointer-authentication.txt
index a25cd21290e9..fc71b33de87e 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm64/pointer-authentication.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm64/pointer-authentication.txt
@@ -78,11 +78,30 @@ bits can vary between the two. Note that the masks apply to TTBR0
 addresses, and are not valid to apply to TTBR1 addresses (e.g. kernel
 pointers).
 
+Additionally, when CONFIG_CHECKPOINT_RESTORE is also set, the kernel
+will expose the NT_ARM_PACA_KEYS and NT_ARM_PACG_KEYS regsets (struct
+user_pac_address_keys and struct user_pac_generic_keys). These can be
+used to get and set the keys for a thread.
+
 
 Virtualization
 --------------
 
-Pointer authentication is not currently supported in KVM guests. KVM
-will mask the feature bits from ID_AA64ISAR1_EL1, and attempted use of
-the feature will result in an UNDEFINED exception being injected into
-the guest.
+Pointer authentication is enabled in KVM guest when each virtual cpu is
+initialised by passing flags KVM_ARM_VCPU_PTRAUTH_[ADDRESS/GENERIC] and
+requesting these two separate cpu features to be enabled. The current KVM
+guest implementation works by enabling both features together, so both
+these userspace flags are checked before enabling pointer authentication.
+The separate userspace flag will allow to have no userspace ABI changes
+if support is added in the future to allow these two features to be
+enabled independently of one another.
+
+As Arm Architecture specifies that Pointer Authentication feature is
+implemented along with the VHE feature so KVM arm64 ptrauth code relies
+on VHE mode to be present.
+
+Additionally, when these vcpu feature flags are not set then KVM will
+filter out the Pointer Authentication system key registers from
+KVM_GET/SET_REG_* ioctls and mask those features from cpufeature ID
+register. Any attempt to use the Pointer Authentication instructions will
+result in an UNDEFINED exception being injected into the guest.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm64/silicon-errata.txt b/Documentation/arm64/silicon-errata.txt
index 1f09d043d086..2735462d5958 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm64/silicon-errata.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm64/silicon-errata.txt
@@ -44,6 +44,8 @@ stable kernels.
 
 | Implementor    | Component       | Erratum ID      | Kconfig                     |
 +----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
+| Allwinner      | A64/R18         | UNKNOWN1        | SUN50I_ERRATUM_UNKNOWN1     |
+|                |                 |                 |                             |
 | ARM            | Cortex-A53      | #826319         | ARM64_ERRATUM_826319        |
 | ARM            | Cortex-A53      | #827319         | ARM64_ERRATUM_827319        |
 | ARM            | Cortex-A53      | #824069         | ARM64_ERRATUM_824069        |
@@ -56,12 +58,14 @@ stable kernels.
 | ARM            | Cortex-A72      | #853709         | N/A                         |
 | ARM            | Cortex-A73      | #858921         | ARM64_ERRATUM_858921        |
 | ARM            | Cortex-A55      | #1024718        | ARM64_ERRATUM_1024718       |
-| ARM            | Cortex-A76      | #1188873        | ARM64_ERRATUM_1188873       |
+| ARM            | Cortex-A76      | #1188873,1418040| ARM64_ERRATUM_1418040       |
 | ARM            | Cortex-A76      | #1165522        | ARM64_ERRATUM_1165522       |
 | ARM            | Cortex-A76      | #1286807        | ARM64_ERRATUM_1286807       |
-| ARM            | MMU-500         | #841119,#826419 | N/A                         |
+| ARM            | Cortex-A76      | #1463225        | ARM64_ERRATUM_1463225       |
+| ARM            | Neoverse-N1     | #1188873,1418040| ARM64_ERRATUM_1418040       |
+| ARM            | MMU-500         | #841119,826419  | N/A                         |
 |                |                 |                 |                             |
-| Cavium         | ThunderX ITS    | #22375, #24313  | CAVIUM_ERRATUM_22375        |
+| Cavium         | ThunderX ITS    | #22375,24313    | CAVIUM_ERRATUM_22375        |
 | Cavium         | ThunderX ITS    | #23144          | CAVIUM_ERRATUM_23144        |
 | Cavium         | ThunderX GICv3  | #23154          | CAVIUM_ERRATUM_23154        |
 | Cavium         | ThunderX Core   | #27456          | CAVIUM_ERRATUM_27456        |
@@ -75,8 +79,10 @@ stable kernels.
 | Hisilicon      | Hip0{5,6,7}     | #161010101      | HISILICON_ERRATUM_161010101 |
 | Hisilicon      | Hip0{6,7}       | #161010701      | N/A                         |
 | Hisilicon      | Hip07           | #161600802      | HISILICON_ERRATUM_161600802 |
+| Hisilicon      | Hip08 SMMU PMCG | #162001800      | N/A                         |
 |                |                 |                 |                             |
 | Qualcomm Tech. | Kryo/Falkor v1  | E1003           | QCOM_FALKOR_ERRATUM_1003    |
 | Qualcomm Tech. | Falkor v1       | E1009           | QCOM_FALKOR_ERRATUM_1009    |
 | Qualcomm Tech. | QDF2400 ITS     | E0065           | QCOM_QDF2400_ERRATUM_0065   |
 | Qualcomm Tech. | Falkor v{1,2}   | E1041           | QCOM_FALKOR_ERRATUM_1041    |
+| Fujitsu        | A64FX           | E#010001        | FUJITSU_ERRATUM_010001      |
diff --git a/Documentation/arm64/sve.txt b/Documentation/arm64/sve.txt
index 7169a0ec41d8..5689fc9a976a 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm64/sve.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm64/sve.txt
@@ -34,11 +34,40 @@ model features for SVE is included in Appendix A.
   following sections: software that needs to verify that those interfaces are
   present must check for HWCAP_SVE instead.
 
+* On hardware that supports the SVE2 extensions, HWCAP2_SVE2 will also
+  be reported in the AT_HWCAP2 aux vector entry.  In addition to this,
+  optional extensions to SVE2 may be reported by the presence of:
+
+	HWCAP2_SVE2
+	HWCAP2_SVEAES
+	HWCAP2_SVEPMULL
+	HWCAP2_SVEBITPERM
+	HWCAP2_SVESHA3
+	HWCAP2_SVESM4
+
+  This list may be extended over time as the SVE architecture evolves.
+
+  These extensions are also reported via the CPU ID register ID_AA64ZFR0_EL1,
+  which userspace can read using an MRS instruction.  See elf_hwcaps.txt and
+  cpu-feature-registers.txt for details.
+
 * Debuggers should restrict themselves to interacting with the target via the
   NT_ARM_SVE regset.  The recommended way of detecting support for this regset
   is to connect to a target process first and then attempt a
   ptrace(PTRACE_GETREGSET, pid, NT_ARM_SVE, &iov).
 
+* Whenever SVE scalable register values (Zn, Pn, FFR) are exchanged in memory
+  between userspace and the kernel, the register value is encoded in memory in
+  an endianness-invariant layout, with bits [(8 * i + 7) : (8 * i)] encoded at
+  byte offset i from the start of the memory representation.  This affects for
+  example the signal frame (struct sve_context) and ptrace interface
+  (struct user_sve_header) and associated data.
+
+  Beware that on big-endian systems this results in a different byte order than
+  for the FPSIMD V-registers, which are stored as single host-endian 128-bit
+  values, with bits [(127 - 8 * i) : (120 - 8 * i)] of the register encoded at
+  byte offset i.  (struct fpsimd_context, struct user_fpsimd_state).
+
 
 2.  Vector length terminology
 -----------------------------
@@ -107,6 +136,10 @@ the SVE instruction set architecture.
   size and layout.  Macros SVE_SIG_* are defined [1] to facilitate access to
   the members.
 
+* Each scalable register (Zn, Pn, FFR) is stored in an endianness-invariant
+  layout, with bits [(8 * i + 7) : (8 * i)] stored at byte offset i from the
+  start of the register's representation in memory.
+
 * If the SVE context is too big to fit in sigcontext.__reserved[], then extra
   space is allocated on the stack, an extra_context record is written in
   __reserved[] referencing this space.  sve_context is then written in the
diff --git a/Documentation/atomic_bitops.txt b/Documentation/atomic_bitops.txt
index be70b32c95d9..093cdaefdb37 100644
--- a/Documentation/atomic_bitops.txt
+++ b/Documentation/atomic_bitops.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
-
-On atomic bitops.
-
+=============
+Atomic bitops
+=============
 
 While our bitmap_{}() functions are non-atomic, we have a number of operations
 operating on single bits in a bitmap that are atomic.
diff --git a/Documentation/atomic_t.txt b/Documentation/atomic_t.txt
index 913396ac5824..dca3fb0554db 100644
--- a/Documentation/atomic_t.txt
+++ b/Documentation/atomic_t.txt
@@ -56,6 +56,23 @@ Barriers:
   smp_mb__{before,after}_atomic()
 
 
+TYPES (signed vs unsigned)
+-----
+
+While atomic_t, atomic_long_t and atomic64_t use int, long and s64
+respectively (for hysterical raisins), the kernel uses -fno-strict-overflow
+(which implies -fwrapv) and defines signed overflow to behave like
+2s-complement.
+
+Therefore, an explicitly unsigned variant of the atomic ops is strictly
+unnecessary and we can simply cast, there is no UB.
+
+There was a bug in UBSAN prior to GCC-8 that would generate UB warnings for
+signed types.
+
+With this we also conform to the C/C++ _Atomic behaviour and things like
+P1236R1.
+
 
 SEMANTICS
 ---------
diff --git a/Documentation/block/bfq-iosched.txt b/Documentation/block/bfq-iosched.txt
index 98a8dd5ee385..1a0f2ac02eb6 100644
--- a/Documentation/block/bfq-iosched.txt
+++ b/Documentation/block/bfq-iosched.txt
@@ -20,13 +20,26 @@ for that device, by setting low_latency to 0. See Section 3 for
 details on how to configure BFQ for the desired tradeoff between
 latency and throughput, or on how to maximize throughput.
 
-BFQ has a non-null overhead, which limits the maximum IOPS that a CPU
-can process for a device scheduled with BFQ. To give an idea of the
-limits on slow or average CPUs, here are, first, the limits of BFQ for
-three different CPUs, on, respectively, an average laptop, an old
-desktop, and a cheap embedded system, in case full hierarchical
-support is enabled (i.e., CONFIG_BFQ_GROUP_IOSCHED is set), but
-CONFIG_DEBUG_BLK_CGROUP is not set (Section 4-2):
+As every I/O scheduler, BFQ adds some overhead to per-I/O-request
+processing. To give an idea of this overhead, the total,
+single-lock-protected, per-request processing time of BFQ---i.e., the
+sum of the execution times of the request insertion, dispatch and
+completion hooks---is, e.g., 1.9 us on an Intel Core i7-2760QM@2.40GHz
+(dated CPU for notebooks; time measured with simple code
+instrumentation, and using the throughput-sync.sh script of the S
+suite [1], in performance-profiling mode). To put this result into
+context, the total, single-lock-protected, per-request execution time
+of the lightest I/O scheduler available in blk-mq, mq-deadline, is 0.7
+us (mq-deadline is ~800 LOC, against ~10500 LOC for BFQ).
+
+Scheduling overhead further limits the maximum IOPS that a CPU can
+process (already limited by the execution of the rest of the I/O
+stack). To give an idea of the limits with BFQ, on slow or average
+CPUs, here are, first, the limits of BFQ for three different CPUs, on,
+respectively, an average laptop, an old desktop, and a cheap embedded
+system, in case full hierarchical support is enabled (i.e.,
+CONFIG_BFQ_GROUP_IOSCHED is set), but CONFIG_DEBUG_BLK_CGROUP is not
+set (Section 4-2):
 - Intel i7-4850HQ: 400 KIOPS
 - AMD A8-3850: 250 KIOPS
 - ARM CortexTM-A53 Octa-core: 80 KIOPS
@@ -566,3 +579,5 @@ applications. Unset this tunable if you need/want to control weights.
     Slightly extended version:
     http://algogroup.unimore.it/people/paolo/disk_sched/bfq-v1-suite-
 							results.pdf
+
+[3] https://github.com/Algodev-github/S
diff --git a/Documentation/block/biovecs.txt b/Documentation/block/biovecs.txt
index 25689584e6e0..ce6eccaf5df7 100644
--- a/Documentation/block/biovecs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/block/biovecs.txt
@@ -117,3 +117,28 @@ Other implications:
    size limitations and the limitations of the underlying devices. Thus
    there's no need to define ->merge_bvec_fn() callbacks for individual block
    drivers.
+
+Usage of helpers:
+=================
+
+* The following helpers whose names have the suffix of "_all" can only be used
+on non-BIO_CLONED bio. They are usually used by filesystem code. Drivers
+shouldn't use them because the bio may have been split before it reached the
+driver.
+
+	bio_for_each_segment_all()
+	bio_first_bvec_all()
+	bio_first_page_all()
+	bio_last_bvec_all()
+
+* The following helpers iterate over single-page segment. The passed 'struct
+bio_vec' will contain a single-page IO vector during the iteration
+
+	bio_for_each_segment()
+	bio_for_each_segment_all()
+
+* The following helpers iterate over multi-page bvec. The passed 'struct
+bio_vec' will contain a multi-page IO vector during the iteration
+
+	bio_for_each_bvec()
+	rq_for_each_bvec()
diff --git a/Documentation/block/null_blk.txt b/Documentation/block/null_blk.txt
index 4cad1024fff7..41f0a3d33bbd 100644
--- a/Documentation/block/null_blk.txt
+++ b/Documentation/block/null_blk.txt
@@ -93,3 +93,7 @@ zoned=[0/1]: Default: 0
 
 zone_size=[MB]: Default: 256
   Per zone size when exposed as a zoned block device. Must be a power of two.
+
+zone_nr_conv=[nr_conv]: Default: 0
+  The number of conventional zones to create when block device is zoned.  If
+  zone_nr_conv >= nr_zones, it will be reduced to nr_zones - 1.
diff --git a/Documentation/block/switching-sched.txt b/Documentation/block/switching-sched.txt
index 3b2612e342f1..7977f6fb8b20 100644
--- a/Documentation/block/switching-sched.txt
+++ b/Documentation/block/switching-sched.txt
@@ -13,11 +13,9 @@ you can do so by typing:
 
 # mount none /sys -t sysfs
 
-As of the Linux 2.6.10 kernel, it is now possible to change the
-IO scheduler for a given block device on the fly (thus making it possible,
-for instance, to set the CFQ scheduler for the system default, but
-set a specific device to use the deadline or noop schedulers - which
-can improve that device's throughput).
+It is possible to change the IO scheduler for a given block device on
+the fly to select one of mq-deadline, none, bfq, or kyber schedulers -
+which can improve that device's throughput.
 
 To set a specific scheduler, simply do this:
 
@@ -30,8 +28,8 @@ The list of defined schedulers can be found by simply doing
 a "cat /sys/block/DEV/queue/scheduler" - the list of valid names
 will be displayed, with the currently selected scheduler in brackets:
 
-# cat /sys/block/hda/queue/scheduler
-noop deadline [cfq]
-# echo deadline > /sys/block/hda/queue/scheduler
-# cat /sys/block/hda/queue/scheduler
-noop [deadline] cfq
+# cat /sys/block/sda/queue/scheduler
+[mq-deadline] kyber bfq none
+# echo none >/sys/block/sda/queue/scheduler
+# cat /sys/block/sda/queue/scheduler
+[none] mq-deadline kyber bfq
diff --git a/Documentation/bpf/bpf_design_QA.rst b/Documentation/bpf/bpf_design_QA.rst
index 7cc9e368c1e9..cb402c59eca5 100644
--- a/Documentation/bpf/bpf_design_QA.rst
+++ b/Documentation/bpf/bpf_design_QA.rst
@@ -36,27 +36,27 @@ consideration important quirks of other architectures) and
 defines calling convention that is compatible with C calling
 convention of the linux kernel on those architectures.
 
-Q: can multiple return values be supported in the future?
+Q: Can multiple return values be supported in the future?
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 A: NO. BPF allows only register R0 to be used as return value.
 
-Q: can more than 5 function arguments be supported in the future?
+Q: Can more than 5 function arguments be supported in the future?
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 A: NO. BPF calling convention only allows registers R1-R5 to be used
 as arguments. BPF is not a standalone instruction set.
 (unlike x64 ISA that allows msft, cdecl and other conventions)
 
-Q: can BPF programs access instruction pointer or return address?
+Q: Can BPF programs access instruction pointer or return address?
 -----------------------------------------------------------------
 A: NO.
 
-Q: can BPF programs access stack pointer ?
+Q: Can BPF programs access stack pointer ?
 ------------------------------------------
 A: NO.
 
 Only frame pointer (register R10) is accessible.
 From compiler point of view it's necessary to have stack pointer.
-For example LLVM defines register R11 as stack pointer in its
+For example, LLVM defines register R11 as stack pointer in its
 BPF backend, but it makes sure that generated code never uses it.
 
 Q: Does C-calling convention diminishes possible use cases?
@@ -66,8 +66,8 @@ A: YES.
 BPF design forces addition of major functionality in the form
 of kernel helper functions and kernel objects like BPF maps with
 seamless interoperability between them. It lets kernel call into
-BPF programs and programs call kernel helpers with zero overhead.
-As all of them were native C code. That is particularly the case
+BPF programs and programs call kernel helpers with zero overhead,
+as all of them were native C code. That is particularly the case
 for JITed BPF programs that are indistinguishable from
 native kernel C code.
 
@@ -75,9 +75,9 @@ Q: Does it mean that 'innovative' extensions to BPF code are disallowed?
 ------------------------------------------------------------------------
 A: Soft yes.
 
-At least for now until BPF core has support for
+At least for now, until BPF core has support for
 bpf-to-bpf calls, indirect calls, loops, global variables,
-jump tables, read only sections and all other normal constructs
+jump tables, read-only sections, and all other normal constructs
 that C code can produce.
 
 Q: Can loops be supported in a safe way?
@@ -85,8 +85,33 @@ Q: Can loops be supported in a safe way?
 A: It's not clear yet.
 
 BPF developers are trying to find a way to
-support bounded loops where the verifier can guarantee that
-the program terminates in less than 4096 instructions.
+support bounded loops.
+
+Q: What are the verifier limits?
+--------------------------------
+A: The only limit known to the user space is BPF_MAXINSNS (4096).
+It's the maximum number of instructions that the unprivileged bpf
+program can have. The verifier has various internal limits.
+Like the maximum number of instructions that can be explored during
+program analysis. Currently, that limit is set to 1 million.
+Which essentially means that the largest program can consist
+of 1 million NOP instructions. There is a limit to the maximum number
+of subsequent branches, a limit to the number of nested bpf-to-bpf
+calls, a limit to the number of the verifier states per instruction,
+a limit to the number of maps used by the program.
+All these limits can be hit with a sufficiently complex program.
+There are also non-numerical limits that can cause the program
+to be rejected. The verifier used to recognize only pointer + constant
+expressions. Now it can recognize pointer + bounded_register.
+bpf_lookup_map_elem(key) had a requirement that 'key' must be
+a pointer to the stack. Now, 'key' can be a pointer to map value.
+The verifier is steadily getting 'smarter'. The limits are
+being removed. The only way to know that the program is going to
+be accepted by the verifier is to try to load it.
+The bpf development process guarantees that the future kernel
+versions will accept all bpf programs that were accepted by
+the earlier versions.
+
 
 Instruction level questions
 ---------------------------
@@ -109,16 +134,16 @@ For example why BPF_JNE and other compare and jumps are not cpu-like?
 A: This was necessary to avoid introducing flags into ISA which are
 impossible to make generic and efficient across CPU architectures.
 
-Q: why BPF_DIV instruction doesn't map to x64 div?
+Q: Why BPF_DIV instruction doesn't map to x64 div?
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 A: Because if we picked one-to-one relationship to x64 it would have made
 it more complicated to support on arm64 and other archs. Also it
 needs div-by-zero runtime check.
 
-Q: why there is no BPF_SDIV for signed divide operation?
+Q: Why there is no BPF_SDIV for signed divide operation?
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 A: Because it would be rarely used. llvm errors in such case and
-prints a suggestion to use unsigned divide instead
+prints a suggestion to use unsigned divide instead.
 
 Q: Why BPF has implicit prologue and epilogue?
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
diff --git a/Documentation/bpf/btf.rst b/Documentation/bpf/btf.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..35d83e24dbdb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/bpf/btf.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,907 @@
+=====================
+BPF Type Format (BTF)
+=====================
+
+1. Introduction
+***************
+
+BTF (BPF Type Format) is the metadata format which encodes the debug info
+related to BPF program/map. The name BTF was used initially to describe data
+types. The BTF was later extended to include function info for defined
+subroutines, and line info for source/line information.
+
+The debug info is used for map pretty print, function signature, etc. The
+function signature enables better bpf program/function kernel symbol. The line
+info helps generate source annotated translated byte code, jited code and
+verifier log.
+
+The BTF specification contains two parts,
+  * BTF kernel API
+  * BTF ELF file format
+
+The kernel API is the contract between user space and kernel. The kernel
+verifies the BTF info before using it. The ELF file format is a user space
+contract between ELF file and libbpf loader.
+
+The type and string sections are part of the BTF kernel API, describing the
+debug info (mostly types related) referenced by the bpf program. These two
+sections are discussed in details in :ref:`BTF_Type_String`.
+
+.. _BTF_Type_String:
+
+2. BTF Type and String Encoding
+*******************************
+
+The file ``include/uapi/linux/btf.h`` provides high-level definition of how
+types/strings are encoded.
+
+The beginning of data blob must be::
+
+    struct btf_header {
+        __u16   magic;
+        __u8    version;
+        __u8    flags;
+        __u32   hdr_len;
+
+        /* All offsets are in bytes relative to the end of this header */
+        __u32   type_off;       /* offset of type section       */
+        __u32   type_len;       /* length of type section       */
+        __u32   str_off;        /* offset of string section     */
+        __u32   str_len;        /* length of string section     */
+    };
+
+The magic is ``0xeB9F``, which has different encoding for big and little
+endian systems, and can be used to test whether BTF is generated for big- or
+little-endian target. The ``btf_header`` is designed to be extensible with
+``hdr_len`` equal to ``sizeof(struct btf_header)`` when a data blob is
+generated.
+
+2.1 String Encoding
+===================
+
+The first string in the string section must be a null string. The rest of
+string table is a concatenation of other null-terminated strings.
+
+2.2 Type Encoding
+=================
+
+The type id ``0`` is reserved for ``void`` type. The type section is parsed
+sequentially and type id is assigned to each recognized type starting from id
+``1``. Currently, the following types are supported::
+
+    #define BTF_KIND_INT            1       /* Integer      */
+    #define BTF_KIND_PTR            2       /* Pointer      */
+    #define BTF_KIND_ARRAY          3       /* Array        */
+    #define BTF_KIND_STRUCT         4       /* Struct       */
+    #define BTF_KIND_UNION          5       /* Union        */
+    #define BTF_KIND_ENUM           6       /* Enumeration  */
+    #define BTF_KIND_FWD            7       /* Forward      */
+    #define BTF_KIND_TYPEDEF        8       /* Typedef      */
+    #define BTF_KIND_VOLATILE       9       /* Volatile     */
+    #define BTF_KIND_CONST          10      /* Const        */
+    #define BTF_KIND_RESTRICT       11      /* Restrict     */
+    #define BTF_KIND_FUNC           12      /* Function     */
+    #define BTF_KIND_FUNC_PROTO     13      /* Function Proto       */
+    #define BTF_KIND_VAR            14      /* Variable     */
+    #define BTF_KIND_DATASEC        15      /* Section      */
+
+Note that the type section encodes debug info, not just pure types.
+``BTF_KIND_FUNC`` is not a type, and it represents a defined subprogram.
+
+Each type contains the following common data::
+
+    struct btf_type {
+        __u32 name_off;
+        /* "info" bits arrangement
+         * bits  0-15: vlen (e.g. # of struct's members)
+         * bits 16-23: unused
+         * bits 24-27: kind (e.g. int, ptr, array...etc)
+         * bits 28-30: unused
+         * bit     31: kind_flag, currently used by
+         *             struct, union and fwd
+         */
+        __u32 info;
+        /* "size" is used by INT, ENUM, STRUCT and UNION.
+         * "size" tells the size of the type it is describing.
+         *
+         * "type" is used by PTR, TYPEDEF, VOLATILE, CONST, RESTRICT,
+         * FUNC and FUNC_PROTO.
+         * "type" is a type_id referring to another type.
+         */
+        union {
+                __u32 size;
+                __u32 type;
+        };
+    };
+
+For certain kinds, the common data are followed by kind-specific data. The
+``name_off`` in ``struct btf_type`` specifies the offset in the string table.
+The following sections detail encoding of each kind.
+
+2.2.1 BTF_KIND_INT
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+``struct btf_type`` encoding requirement:
+ * ``name_off``: any valid offset
+ * ``info.kind_flag``: 0
+ * ``info.kind``: BTF_KIND_INT
+ * ``info.vlen``: 0
+ * ``size``: the size of the int type in bytes.
+
+``btf_type`` is followed by a ``u32`` with the following bits arrangement::
+
+  #define BTF_INT_ENCODING(VAL)   (((VAL) & 0x0f000000) >> 24)
+  #define BTF_INT_OFFSET(VAL)     (((VAL) & 0x00ff0000) >> 16)
+  #define BTF_INT_BITS(VAL)       ((VAL)  & 0x000000ff)
+
+The ``BTF_INT_ENCODING`` has the following attributes::
+
+  #define BTF_INT_SIGNED  (1 << 0)
+  #define BTF_INT_CHAR    (1 << 1)
+  #define BTF_INT_BOOL    (1 << 2)
+
+The ``BTF_INT_ENCODING()`` provides extra information: signedness, char, or
+bool, for the int type. The char and bool encoding are mostly useful for
+pretty print. At most one encoding can be specified for the int type.
+
+The ``BTF_INT_BITS()`` specifies the number of actual bits held by this int
+type. For example, a 4-bit bitfield encodes ``BTF_INT_BITS()`` equals to 4.
+The ``btf_type.size * 8`` must be equal to or greater than ``BTF_INT_BITS()``
+for the type. The maximum value of ``BTF_INT_BITS()`` is 128.
+
+The ``BTF_INT_OFFSET()`` specifies the starting bit offset to calculate values
+for this int. For example, a bitfield struct member has:
+ * btf member bit offset 100 from the start of the structure,
+ * btf member pointing to an int type,
+ * the int type has ``BTF_INT_OFFSET() = 2`` and ``BTF_INT_BITS() = 4``
+
+Then in the struct memory layout, this member will occupy ``4`` bits starting
+from bits ``100 + 2 = 102``.
+
+Alternatively, the bitfield struct member can be the following to access the
+same bits as the above:
+ * btf member bit offset 102,
+ * btf member pointing to an int type,
+ * the int type has ``BTF_INT_OFFSET() = 0`` and ``BTF_INT_BITS() = 4``
+
+The original intention of ``BTF_INT_OFFSET()`` is to provide flexibility of
+bitfield encoding. Currently, both llvm and pahole generate
+``BTF_INT_OFFSET() = 0`` for all int types.
+
+2.2.2 BTF_KIND_PTR
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+``struct btf_type`` encoding requirement:
+  * ``name_off``: 0
+  * ``info.kind_flag``: 0
+  * ``info.kind``: BTF_KIND_PTR
+  * ``info.vlen``: 0
+  * ``type``: the pointee type of the pointer
+
+No additional type data follow ``btf_type``.
+
+2.2.3 BTF_KIND_ARRAY
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+``struct btf_type`` encoding requirement:
+  * ``name_off``: 0
+  * ``info.kind_flag``: 0
+  * ``info.kind``: BTF_KIND_ARRAY
+  * ``info.vlen``: 0
+  * ``size/type``: 0, not used
+
+``btf_type`` is followed by one ``struct btf_array``::
+
+    struct btf_array {
+        __u32   type;
+        __u32   index_type;
+        __u32   nelems;
+    };
+
+The ``struct btf_array`` encoding:
+  * ``type``: the element type
+  * ``index_type``: the index type
+  * ``nelems``: the number of elements for this array (``0`` is also allowed).
+
+The ``index_type`` can be any regular int type (``u8``, ``u16``, ``u32``,
+``u64``, ``unsigned __int128``). The original design of including
+``index_type`` follows DWARF, which has an ``index_type`` for its array type.
+Currently in BTF, beyond type verification, the ``index_type`` is not used.
+
+The ``struct btf_array`` allows chaining through element type to represent
+multidimensional arrays. For example, for ``int a[5][6]``, the following type
+information illustrates the chaining:
+
+  * [1]: int
+  * [2]: array, ``btf_array.type = [1]``, ``btf_array.nelems = 6``
+  * [3]: array, ``btf_array.type = [2]``, ``btf_array.nelems = 5``
+
+Currently, both pahole and llvm collapse multidimensional array into
+one-dimensional array, e.g., for ``a[5][6]``, the ``btf_array.nelems`` is
+equal to ``30``. This is because the original use case is map pretty print
+where the whole array is dumped out so one-dimensional array is enough. As
+more BTF usage is explored, pahole and llvm can be changed to generate proper
+chained representation for multidimensional arrays.
+
+2.2.4 BTF_KIND_STRUCT
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+2.2.5 BTF_KIND_UNION
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+``struct btf_type`` encoding requirement:
+  * ``name_off``: 0 or offset to a valid C identifier
+  * ``info.kind_flag``: 0 or 1
+  * ``info.kind``: BTF_KIND_STRUCT or BTF_KIND_UNION
+  * ``info.vlen``: the number of struct/union members
+  * ``info.size``: the size of the struct/union in bytes
+
+``btf_type`` is followed by ``info.vlen`` number of ``struct btf_member``.::
+
+    struct btf_member {
+        __u32   name_off;
+        __u32   type;
+        __u32   offset;
+    };
+
+``struct btf_member`` encoding:
+  * ``name_off``: offset to a valid C identifier
+  * ``type``: the member type
+  * ``offset``: <see below>
+
+If the type info ``kind_flag`` is not set, the offset contains only bit offset
+of the member. Note that the base type of the bitfield can only be int or enum
+type. If the bitfield size is 32, the base type can be either int or enum
+type. If the bitfield size is not 32, the base type must be int, and int type
+``BTF_INT_BITS()`` encodes the bitfield size.
+
+If the ``kind_flag`` is set, the ``btf_member.offset`` contains both member
+bitfield size and bit offset. The bitfield size and bit offset are calculated
+as below.::
+
+  #define BTF_MEMBER_BITFIELD_SIZE(val)   ((val) >> 24)
+  #define BTF_MEMBER_BIT_OFFSET(val)      ((val) & 0xffffff)
+
+In this case, if the base type is an int type, it must be a regular int type:
+
+  * ``BTF_INT_OFFSET()`` must be 0.
+  * ``BTF_INT_BITS()`` must be equal to ``{1,2,4,8,16} * 8``.
+
+The following kernel patch introduced ``kind_flag`` and explained why both
+modes exist:
+
+  https://github.com/torvalds/linux/commit/9d5f9f701b1891466fb3dbb1806ad97716f95cc3#diff-fa650a64fdd3968396883d2fe8215ff3
+
+2.2.6 BTF_KIND_ENUM
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+``struct btf_type`` encoding requirement:
+  * ``name_off``: 0 or offset to a valid C identifier
+  * ``info.kind_flag``: 0
+  * ``info.kind``: BTF_KIND_ENUM
+  * ``info.vlen``: number of enum values
+  * ``size``: 4
+
+``btf_type`` is followed by ``info.vlen`` number of ``struct btf_enum``.::
+
+    struct btf_enum {
+        __u32   name_off;
+        __s32   val;
+    };
+
+The ``btf_enum`` encoding:
+  * ``name_off``: offset to a valid C identifier
+  * ``val``: any value
+
+2.2.7 BTF_KIND_FWD
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+``struct btf_type`` encoding requirement:
+  * ``name_off``: offset to a valid C identifier
+  * ``info.kind_flag``: 0 for struct, 1 for union
+  * ``info.kind``: BTF_KIND_FWD
+  * ``info.vlen``: 0
+  * ``type``: 0
+
+No additional type data follow ``btf_type``.
+
+2.2.8 BTF_KIND_TYPEDEF
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+``struct btf_type`` encoding requirement:
+  * ``name_off``: offset to a valid C identifier
+  * ``info.kind_flag``: 0
+  * ``info.kind``: BTF_KIND_TYPEDEF
+  * ``info.vlen``: 0
+  * ``type``: the type which can be referred by name at ``name_off``
+
+No additional type data follow ``btf_type``.
+
+2.2.9 BTF_KIND_VOLATILE
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+``struct btf_type`` encoding requirement:
+  * ``name_off``: 0
+  * ``info.kind_flag``: 0
+  * ``info.kind``: BTF_KIND_VOLATILE
+  * ``info.vlen``: 0
+  * ``type``: the type with ``volatile`` qualifier
+
+No additional type data follow ``btf_type``.
+
+2.2.10 BTF_KIND_CONST
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+``struct btf_type`` encoding requirement:
+  * ``name_off``: 0
+  * ``info.kind_flag``: 0
+  * ``info.kind``: BTF_KIND_CONST
+  * ``info.vlen``: 0
+  * ``type``: the type with ``const`` qualifier
+
+No additional type data follow ``btf_type``.
+
+2.2.11 BTF_KIND_RESTRICT
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+``struct btf_type`` encoding requirement:
+  * ``name_off``: 0
+  * ``info.kind_flag``: 0
+  * ``info.kind``: BTF_KIND_RESTRICT
+  * ``info.vlen``: 0
+  * ``type``: the type with ``restrict`` qualifier
+
+No additional type data follow ``btf_type``.
+
+2.2.12 BTF_KIND_FUNC
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+``struct btf_type`` encoding requirement:
+  * ``name_off``: offset to a valid C identifier
+  * ``info.kind_flag``: 0
+  * ``info.kind``: BTF_KIND_FUNC
+  * ``info.vlen``: 0
+  * ``type``: a BTF_KIND_FUNC_PROTO type
+
+No additional type data follow ``btf_type``.
+
+A BTF_KIND_FUNC defines not a type, but a subprogram (function) whose
+signature is defined by ``type``. The subprogram is thus an instance of that
+type. The BTF_KIND_FUNC may in turn be referenced by a func_info in the
+:ref:`BTF_Ext_Section` (ELF) or in the arguments to :ref:`BPF_Prog_Load`
+(ABI).
+
+2.2.13 BTF_KIND_FUNC_PROTO
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+``struct btf_type`` encoding requirement:
+  * ``name_off``: 0
+  * ``info.kind_flag``: 0
+  * ``info.kind``: BTF_KIND_FUNC_PROTO
+  * ``info.vlen``: # of parameters
+  * ``type``: the return type
+
+``btf_type`` is followed by ``info.vlen`` number of ``struct btf_param``.::
+
+    struct btf_param {
+        __u32   name_off;
+        __u32   type;
+    };
+
+If a BTF_KIND_FUNC_PROTO type is referred by a BTF_KIND_FUNC type, then
+``btf_param.name_off`` must point to a valid C identifier except for the
+possible last argument representing the variable argument. The btf_param.type
+refers to parameter type.
+
+If the function has variable arguments, the last parameter is encoded with
+``name_off = 0`` and ``type = 0``.
+
+2.2.14 BTF_KIND_VAR
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+``struct btf_type`` encoding requirement:
+  * ``name_off``: offset to a valid C identifier
+  * ``info.kind_flag``: 0
+  * ``info.kind``: BTF_KIND_VAR
+  * ``info.vlen``: 0
+  * ``type``: the type of the variable
+
+``btf_type`` is followed by a single ``struct btf_variable`` with the
+following data::
+
+    struct btf_var {
+        __u32   linkage;
+    };
+
+``struct btf_var`` encoding:
+  * ``linkage``: currently only static variable 0, or globally allocated
+                 variable in ELF sections 1
+
+Not all type of global variables are supported by LLVM at this point.
+The following is currently available:
+
+  * static variables with or without section attributes
+  * global variables with section attributes
+
+The latter is for future extraction of map key/value type id's from a
+map definition.
+
+2.2.15 BTF_KIND_DATASEC
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+``struct btf_type`` encoding requirement:
+  * ``name_off``: offset to a valid name associated with a variable or
+                  one of .data/.bss/.rodata
+  * ``info.kind_flag``: 0
+  * ``info.kind``: BTF_KIND_DATASEC
+  * ``info.vlen``: # of variables
+  * ``size``: total section size in bytes (0 at compilation time, patched
+              to actual size by BPF loaders such as libbpf)
+
+``btf_type`` is followed by ``info.vlen`` number of ``struct btf_var_secinfo``.::
+
+    struct btf_var_secinfo {
+        __u32   type;
+        __u32   offset;
+        __u32   size;
+    };
+
+``struct btf_var_secinfo`` encoding:
+  * ``type``: the type of the BTF_KIND_VAR variable
+  * ``offset``: the in-section offset of the variable
+  * ``size``: the size of the variable in bytes
+
+3. BTF Kernel API
+*****************
+
+The following bpf syscall command involves BTF:
+   * BPF_BTF_LOAD: load a blob of BTF data into kernel
+   * BPF_MAP_CREATE: map creation with btf key and value type info.
+   * BPF_PROG_LOAD: prog load with btf function and line info.
+   * BPF_BTF_GET_FD_BY_ID: get a btf fd
+   * BPF_OBJ_GET_INFO_BY_FD: btf, func_info, line_info
+     and other btf related info are returned.
+
+The workflow typically looks like:
+::
+
+  Application:
+      BPF_BTF_LOAD
+          |
+          v
+      BPF_MAP_CREATE and BPF_PROG_LOAD
+          |
+          V
+      ......
+
+  Introspection tool:
+      ......
+      BPF_{PROG,MAP}_GET_NEXT_ID (get prog/map id's)
+          |
+          V
+      BPF_{PROG,MAP}_GET_FD_BY_ID (get a prog/map fd)
+          |
+          V
+      BPF_OBJ_GET_INFO_BY_FD (get bpf_prog_info/bpf_map_info with btf_id)
+          |                                     |
+          V                                     |
+      BPF_BTF_GET_FD_BY_ID (get btf_fd)         |
+          |                                     |
+          V                                     |
+      BPF_OBJ_GET_INFO_BY_FD (get btf)          |
+          |                                     |
+          V                                     V
+      pretty print types, dump func signatures and line info, etc.
+
+
+3.1 BPF_BTF_LOAD
+================
+
+Load a blob of BTF data into kernel. A blob of data, described in
+:ref:`BTF_Type_String`, can be directly loaded into the kernel. A ``btf_fd``
+is returned to a userspace.
+
+3.2 BPF_MAP_CREATE
+==================
+
+A map can be created with ``btf_fd`` and specified key/value type id.::
+
+    __u32   btf_fd;         /* fd pointing to a BTF type data */
+    __u32   btf_key_type_id;        /* BTF type_id of the key */
+    __u32   btf_value_type_id;      /* BTF type_id of the value */
+
+In libbpf, the map can be defined with extra annotation like below:
+::
+
+    struct bpf_map_def SEC("maps") btf_map = {
+        .type = BPF_MAP_TYPE_ARRAY,
+        .key_size = sizeof(int),
+        .value_size = sizeof(struct ipv_counts),
+        .max_entries = 4,
+    };
+    BPF_ANNOTATE_KV_PAIR(btf_map, int, struct ipv_counts);
+
+Here, the parameters for macro BPF_ANNOTATE_KV_PAIR are map name, key and
+value types for the map. During ELF parsing, libbpf is able to extract
+key/value type_id's and assign them to BPF_MAP_CREATE attributes
+automatically.
+
+.. _BPF_Prog_Load:
+
+3.3 BPF_PROG_LOAD
+=================
+
+During prog_load, func_info and line_info can be passed to kernel with proper
+values for the following attributes:
+::
+
+    __u32           insn_cnt;
+    __aligned_u64   insns;
+    ......
+    __u32           prog_btf_fd;    /* fd pointing to BTF type data */
+    __u32           func_info_rec_size;     /* userspace bpf_func_info size */
+    __aligned_u64   func_info;      /* func info */
+    __u32           func_info_cnt;  /* number of bpf_func_info records */
+    __u32           line_info_rec_size;     /* userspace bpf_line_info size */
+    __aligned_u64   line_info;      /* line info */
+    __u32           line_info_cnt;  /* number of bpf_line_info records */
+
+The func_info and line_info are an array of below, respectively.::
+
+    struct bpf_func_info {
+        __u32   insn_off; /* [0, insn_cnt - 1] */
+        __u32   type_id;  /* pointing to a BTF_KIND_FUNC type */
+    };
+    struct bpf_line_info {
+        __u32   insn_off; /* [0, insn_cnt - 1] */
+        __u32   file_name_off; /* offset to string table for the filename */
+        __u32   line_off; /* offset to string table for the source line */
+        __u32   line_col; /* line number and column number */
+    };
+
+func_info_rec_size is the size of each func_info record, and
+line_info_rec_size is the size of each line_info record. Passing the record
+size to kernel make it possible to extend the record itself in the future.
+
+Below are requirements for func_info:
+  * func_info[0].insn_off must be 0.
+  * the func_info insn_off is in strictly increasing order and matches
+    bpf func boundaries.
+
+Below are requirements for line_info:
+  * the first insn in each func must have a line_info record pointing to it.
+  * the line_info insn_off is in strictly increasing order.
+
+For line_info, the line number and column number are defined as below:
+::
+
+    #define BPF_LINE_INFO_LINE_NUM(line_col)        ((line_col) >> 10)
+    #define BPF_LINE_INFO_LINE_COL(line_col)        ((line_col) & 0x3ff)
+
+3.4 BPF_{PROG,MAP}_GET_NEXT_ID
+==============================
+
+In kernel, every loaded program, map or btf has a unique id. The id won't
+change during the lifetime of a program, map, or btf.
+
+The bpf syscall command BPF_{PROG,MAP}_GET_NEXT_ID returns all id's, one for
+each command, to user space, for bpf program or maps, respectively, so an
+inspection tool can inspect all programs and maps.
+
+3.5 BPF_{PROG,MAP}_GET_FD_BY_ID
+===============================
+
+An introspection tool cannot use id to get details about program or maps.
+A file descriptor needs to be obtained first for reference-counting purpose.
+
+3.6 BPF_OBJ_GET_INFO_BY_FD
+==========================
+
+Once a program/map fd is acquired, an introspection tool can get the detailed
+information from kernel about this fd, some of which are BTF-related. For
+example, ``bpf_map_info`` returns ``btf_id`` and key/value type ids.
+``bpf_prog_info`` returns ``btf_id``, func_info, and line info for translated
+bpf byte codes, and jited_line_info.
+
+3.7 BPF_BTF_GET_FD_BY_ID
+========================
+
+With ``btf_id`` obtained in ``bpf_map_info`` and ``bpf_prog_info``, bpf
+syscall command BPF_BTF_GET_FD_BY_ID can retrieve a btf fd. Then, with
+command BPF_OBJ_GET_INFO_BY_FD, the btf blob, originally loaded into the
+kernel with BPF_BTF_LOAD, can be retrieved.
+
+With the btf blob, ``bpf_map_info``, and ``bpf_prog_info``, an introspection
+tool has full btf knowledge and is able to pretty print map key/values, dump
+func signatures and line info, along with byte/jit codes.
+
+4. ELF File Format Interface
+****************************
+
+4.1 .BTF section
+================
+
+The .BTF section contains type and string data. The format of this section is
+same as the one describe in :ref:`BTF_Type_String`.
+
+.. _BTF_Ext_Section:
+
+4.2 .BTF.ext section
+====================
+
+The .BTF.ext section encodes func_info and line_info which needs loader
+manipulation before loading into the kernel.
+
+The specification for .BTF.ext section is defined at ``tools/lib/bpf/btf.h``
+and ``tools/lib/bpf/btf.c``.
+
+The current header of .BTF.ext section::
+
+    struct btf_ext_header {
+        __u16   magic;
+        __u8    version;
+        __u8    flags;
+        __u32   hdr_len;
+
+        /* All offsets are in bytes relative to the end of this header */
+        __u32   func_info_off;
+        __u32   func_info_len;
+        __u32   line_info_off;
+        __u32   line_info_len;
+    };
+
+It is very similar to .BTF section. Instead of type/string section, it
+contains func_info and line_info section. See :ref:`BPF_Prog_Load` for details
+about func_info and line_info record format.
+
+The func_info is organized as below.::
+
+     func_info_rec_size
+     btf_ext_info_sec for section #1 /* func_info for section #1 */
+     btf_ext_info_sec for section #2 /* func_info for section #2 */
+     ...
+
+``func_info_rec_size`` specifies the size of ``bpf_func_info`` structure when
+.BTF.ext is generated. ``btf_ext_info_sec``, defined below, is a collection of
+func_info for each specific ELF section.::
+
+     struct btf_ext_info_sec {
+        __u32   sec_name_off; /* offset to section name */
+        __u32   num_info;
+        /* Followed by num_info * record_size number of bytes */
+        __u8    data[0];
+     };
+
+Here, num_info must be greater than 0.
+
+The line_info is organized as below.::
+
+     line_info_rec_size
+     btf_ext_info_sec for section #1 /* line_info for section #1 */
+     btf_ext_info_sec for section #2 /* line_info for section #2 */
+     ...
+
+``line_info_rec_size`` specifies the size of ``bpf_line_info`` structure when
+.BTF.ext is generated.
+
+The interpretation of ``bpf_func_info->insn_off`` and
+``bpf_line_info->insn_off`` is different between kernel API and ELF API. For
+kernel API, the ``insn_off`` is the instruction offset in the unit of ``struct
+bpf_insn``. For ELF API, the ``insn_off`` is the byte offset from the
+beginning of section (``btf_ext_info_sec->sec_name_off``).
+
+5. Using BTF
+************
+
+5.1 bpftool map pretty print
+============================
+
+With BTF, the map key/value can be printed based on fields rather than simply
+raw bytes. This is especially valuable for large structure or if your data
+structure has bitfields. For example, for the following map,::
+
+      enum A { A1, A2, A3, A4, A5 };
+      typedef enum A ___A;
+      struct tmp_t {
+           char a1:4;
+           int  a2:4;
+           int  :4;
+           __u32 a3:4;
+           int b;
+           ___A b1:4;
+           enum A b2:4;
+      };
+      struct bpf_map_def SEC("maps") tmpmap = {
+           .type = BPF_MAP_TYPE_ARRAY,
+           .key_size = sizeof(__u32),
+           .value_size = sizeof(struct tmp_t),
+           .max_entries = 1,
+      };
+      BPF_ANNOTATE_KV_PAIR(tmpmap, int, struct tmp_t);
+
+bpftool is able to pretty print like below:
+::
+
+      [{
+            "key": 0,
+            "value": {
+                "a1": 0x2,
+                "a2": 0x4,
+                "a3": 0x6,
+                "b": 7,
+                "b1": 0x8,
+                "b2": 0xa
+            }
+        }
+      ]
+
+5.2 bpftool prog dump
+=====================
+
+The following is an example showing how func_info and line_info can help prog
+dump with better kernel symbol names, function prototypes and line
+information.::
+
+    $ bpftool prog dump jited pinned /sys/fs/bpf/test_btf_haskv
+    [...]
+    int test_long_fname_2(struct dummy_tracepoint_args * arg):
+    bpf_prog_44a040bf25481309_test_long_fname_2:
+    ; static int test_long_fname_2(struct dummy_tracepoint_args *arg)
+       0:   push   %rbp
+       1:   mov    %rsp,%rbp
+       4:   sub    $0x30,%rsp
+       b:   sub    $0x28,%rbp
+       f:   mov    %rbx,0x0(%rbp)
+      13:   mov    %r13,0x8(%rbp)
+      17:   mov    %r14,0x10(%rbp)
+      1b:   mov    %r15,0x18(%rbp)
+      1f:   xor    %eax,%eax
+      21:   mov    %rax,0x20(%rbp)
+      25:   xor    %esi,%esi
+    ; int key = 0;
+      27:   mov    %esi,-0x4(%rbp)
+    ; if (!arg->sock)
+      2a:   mov    0x8(%rdi),%rdi
+    ; if (!arg->sock)
+      2e:   cmp    $0x0,%rdi
+      32:   je     0x0000000000000070
+      34:   mov    %rbp,%rsi
+    ; counts = bpf_map_lookup_elem(&btf_map, &key);
+    [...]
+
+5.3 Verifier Log
+================
+
+The following is an example of how line_info can help debugging verification
+failure.::
+
+       /* The code at tools/testing/selftests/bpf/test_xdp_noinline.c
+        * is modified as below.
+        */
+       data = (void *)(long)xdp->data;
+       data_end = (void *)(long)xdp->data_end;
+       /*
+       if (data + 4 > data_end)
+               return XDP_DROP;
+       */
+       *(u32 *)data = dst->dst;
+
+    $ bpftool prog load ./test_xdp_noinline.o /sys/fs/bpf/test_xdp_noinline type xdp
+        ; data = (void *)(long)xdp->data;
+        224: (79) r2 = *(u64 *)(r10 -112)
+        225: (61) r2 = *(u32 *)(r2 +0)
+        ; *(u32 *)data = dst->dst;
+        226: (63) *(u32 *)(r2 +0) = r1
+        invalid access to packet, off=0 size=4, R2(id=0,off=0,r=0)
+        R2 offset is outside of the packet
+
+6. BTF Generation
+*****************
+
+You need latest pahole
+
+  https://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/devel/pahole/pahole.git/
+
+or llvm (8.0 or later). The pahole acts as a dwarf2btf converter. It doesn't
+support .BTF.ext and btf BTF_KIND_FUNC type yet. For example,::
+
+      -bash-4.4$ cat t.c
+      struct t {
+        int a:2;
+        int b:3;
+        int c:2;
+      } g;
+      -bash-4.4$ gcc -c -O2 -g t.c
+      -bash-4.4$ pahole -JV t.o
+      File t.o:
+      [1] STRUCT t kind_flag=1 size=4 vlen=3
+              a type_id=2 bitfield_size=2 bits_offset=0
+              b type_id=2 bitfield_size=3 bits_offset=2
+              c type_id=2 bitfield_size=2 bits_offset=5
+      [2] INT int size=4 bit_offset=0 nr_bits=32 encoding=SIGNED
+
+The llvm is able to generate .BTF and .BTF.ext directly with -g for bpf target
+only. The assembly code (-S) is able to show the BTF encoding in assembly
+format.::
+
+    -bash-4.4$ cat t2.c
+    typedef int __int32;
+    struct t2 {
+      int a2;
+      int (*f2)(char q1, __int32 q2, ...);
+      int (*f3)();
+    } g2;
+    int main() { return 0; }
+    int test() { return 0; }
+    -bash-4.4$ clang -c -g -O2 -target bpf t2.c
+    -bash-4.4$ readelf -S t2.o
+      ......
+      [ 8] .BTF              PROGBITS         0000000000000000  00000247
+           000000000000016e  0000000000000000           0     0     1
+      [ 9] .BTF.ext          PROGBITS         0000000000000000  000003b5
+           0000000000000060  0000000000000000           0     0     1
+      [10] .rel.BTF.ext      REL              0000000000000000  000007e0
+           0000000000000040  0000000000000010          16     9     8
+      ......
+    -bash-4.4$ clang -S -g -O2 -target bpf t2.c
+    -bash-4.4$ cat t2.s
+      ......
+            .section        .BTF,"",@progbits
+            .short  60319                   # 0xeb9f
+            .byte   1
+            .byte   0
+            .long   24
+            .long   0
+            .long   220
+            .long   220
+            .long   122
+            .long   0                       # BTF_KIND_FUNC_PROTO(id = 1)
+            .long   218103808               # 0xd000000
+            .long   2
+            .long   83                      # BTF_KIND_INT(id = 2)
+            .long   16777216                # 0x1000000
+            .long   4
+            .long   16777248                # 0x1000020
+      ......
+            .byte   0                       # string offset=0
+            .ascii  ".text"                 # string offset=1
+            .byte   0
+            .ascii  "/home/yhs/tmp-pahole/t2.c" # string offset=7
+            .byte   0
+            .ascii  "int main() { return 0; }" # string offset=33
+            .byte   0
+            .ascii  "int test() { return 0; }" # string offset=58
+            .byte   0
+            .ascii  "int"                   # string offset=83
+      ......
+            .section        .BTF.ext,"",@progbits
+            .short  60319                   # 0xeb9f
+            .byte   1
+            .byte   0
+            .long   24
+            .long   0
+            .long   28
+            .long   28
+            .long   44
+            .long   8                       # FuncInfo
+            .long   1                       # FuncInfo section string offset=1
+            .long   2
+            .long   .Lfunc_begin0
+            .long   3
+            .long   .Lfunc_begin1
+            .long   5
+            .long   16                      # LineInfo
+            .long   1                       # LineInfo section string offset=1
+            .long   2
+            .long   .Ltmp0
+            .long   7
+            .long   33
+            .long   7182                    # Line 7 Col 14
+            .long   .Ltmp3
+            .long   7
+            .long   58
+            .long   8206                    # Line 8 Col 14
+
+7. Testing
+**********
+
+Kernel bpf selftest `test_btf.c` provides extensive set of BTF-related tests.
diff --git a/Documentation/bpf/index.rst b/Documentation/bpf/index.rst
index 00a8450a602f..d3fe4cac0c90 100644
--- a/Documentation/bpf/index.rst
+++ b/Documentation/bpf/index.rst
@@ -15,6 +15,13 @@ that goes into great technical depth about the BPF Architecture.
 The primary info for the bpf syscall is available in the `man-pages`_
 for `bpf(2)`_.
 
+BPF Type Format (BTF)
+=====================
+
+.. toctree::
+   :maxdepth: 1
+
+   btf
 
 
 Frequently asked questions (FAQ)
@@ -29,6 +36,16 @@ Two sets of Questions and Answers (Q&A) are maintained.
    bpf_devel_QA
 
 
+Program types
+=============
+
+.. toctree::
+   :maxdepth: 1
+
+   prog_cgroup_sysctl
+   prog_flow_dissector
+
+
 .. Links:
 .. _Documentation/networking/filter.txt: ../networking/filter.txt
 .. _man-pages: https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/
diff --git a/Documentation/bpf/prog_cgroup_sysctl.rst b/Documentation/bpf/prog_cgroup_sysctl.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..677d6c637cf3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/bpf/prog_cgroup_sysctl.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,125 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: (LGPL-2.1 OR BSD-2-Clause)
+
+===========================
+BPF_PROG_TYPE_CGROUP_SYSCTL
+===========================
+
+This document describes ``BPF_PROG_TYPE_CGROUP_SYSCTL`` program type that
+provides cgroup-bpf hook for sysctl.
+
+The hook has to be attached to a cgroup and will be called every time a
+process inside that cgroup tries to read from or write to sysctl knob in proc.
+
+1. Attach type
+**************
+
+``BPF_CGROUP_SYSCTL`` attach type has to be used to attach
+``BPF_PROG_TYPE_CGROUP_SYSCTL`` program to a cgroup.
+
+2. Context
+**********
+
+``BPF_PROG_TYPE_CGROUP_SYSCTL`` provides access to the following context from
+BPF program::
+
+    struct bpf_sysctl {
+        __u32 write;
+        __u32 file_pos;
+    };
+
+* ``write`` indicates whether sysctl value is being read (``0``) or written
+  (``1``). This field is read-only.
+
+* ``file_pos`` indicates file position sysctl is being accessed at, read
+  or written. This field is read-write. Writing to the field sets the starting
+  position in sysctl proc file ``read(2)`` will be reading from or ``write(2)``
+  will be writing to. Writing zero to the field can be used e.g. to override
+  whole sysctl value by ``bpf_sysctl_set_new_value()`` on ``write(2)`` even
+  when it's called by user space on ``file_pos > 0``. Writing non-zero
+  value to the field can be used to access part of sysctl value starting from
+  specified ``file_pos``. Not all sysctl support access with ``file_pos !=
+  0``, e.g. writes to numeric sysctl entries must always be at file position
+  ``0``. See also ``kernel.sysctl_writes_strict`` sysctl.
+
+See `linux/bpf.h`_ for more details on how context field can be accessed.
+
+3. Return code
+**************
+
+``BPF_PROG_TYPE_CGROUP_SYSCTL`` program must return one of the following
+return codes:
+
+* ``0`` means "reject access to sysctl";
+* ``1`` means "proceed with access".
+
+If program returns ``0`` user space will get ``-1`` from ``read(2)`` or
+``write(2)`` and ``errno`` will be set to ``EPERM``.
+
+4. Helpers
+**********
+
+Since sysctl knob is represented by a name and a value, sysctl specific BPF
+helpers focus on providing access to these properties:
+
+* ``bpf_sysctl_get_name()`` to get sysctl name as it is visible in
+  ``/proc/sys`` into provided by BPF program buffer;
+
+* ``bpf_sysctl_get_current_value()`` to get string value currently held by
+  sysctl into provided by BPF program buffer. This helper is available on both
+  ``read(2)`` from and ``write(2)`` to sysctl;
+
+* ``bpf_sysctl_get_new_value()`` to get new string value currently being
+  written to sysctl before actual write happens. This helper can be used only
+  on ``ctx->write == 1``;
+
+* ``bpf_sysctl_set_new_value()`` to override new string value currently being
+  written to sysctl before actual write happens. Sysctl value will be
+  overridden starting from the current ``ctx->file_pos``. If the whole value
+  has to be overridden BPF program can set ``file_pos`` to zero before calling
+  to the helper. This helper can be used only on ``ctx->write == 1``. New
+  string value set by the helper is treated and verified by kernel same way as
+  an equivalent string passed by user space.
+
+BPF program sees sysctl value same way as user space does in proc filesystem,
+i.e. as a string. Since many sysctl values represent an integer or a vector
+of integers, the following helpers can be used to get numeric value from the
+string:
+
+* ``bpf_strtol()`` to convert initial part of the string to long integer
+  similar to user space `strtol(3)`_;
+* ``bpf_strtoul()`` to convert initial part of the string to unsigned long
+  integer similar to user space `strtoul(3)`_;
+
+See `linux/bpf.h`_ for more details on helpers described here.
+
+5. Examples
+***********
+
+See `test_sysctl_prog.c`_ for an example of BPF program in C that access
+sysctl name and value, parses string value to get vector of integers and uses
+the result to make decision whether to allow or deny access to sysctl.
+
+6. Notes
+********
+
+``BPF_PROG_TYPE_CGROUP_SYSCTL`` is intended to be used in **trusted** root
+environment, for example to monitor sysctl usage or catch unreasonable values
+an application, running as root in a separate cgroup, is trying to set.
+
+Since `task_dfl_cgroup(current)` is called at `sys_read` / `sys_write` time it
+may return results different from that at `sys_open` time, i.e. process that
+opened sysctl file in proc filesystem may differ from process that is trying
+to read from / write to it and two such processes may run in different
+cgroups, what means ``BPF_PROG_TYPE_CGROUP_SYSCTL`` should not be used as a
+security mechanism to limit sysctl usage.
+
+As with any cgroup-bpf program additional care should be taken if an
+application running as root in a cgroup should not be allowed to
+detach/replace BPF program attached by administrator.
+
+.. Links
+.. _linux/bpf.h: ../../include/uapi/linux/bpf.h
+.. _strtol(3): http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man3/strtol.3p.html
+.. _strtoul(3): http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man3/strtoul.3p.html
+.. _test_sysctl_prog.c:
+   ../../tools/testing/selftests/bpf/progs/test_sysctl_prog.c
diff --git a/Documentation/bpf/prog_flow_dissector.rst b/Documentation/bpf/prog_flow_dissector.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ed343abe541e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/bpf/prog_flow_dissector.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+============================
+BPF_PROG_TYPE_FLOW_DISSECTOR
+============================
+
+Overview
+========
+
+Flow dissector is a routine that parses metadata out of the packets. It's
+used in the various places in the networking subsystem (RFS, flow hash, etc).
+
+BPF flow dissector is an attempt to reimplement C-based flow dissector logic
+in BPF to gain all the benefits of BPF verifier (namely, limits on the
+number of instructions and tail calls).
+
+API
+===
+
+BPF flow dissector programs operate on an ``__sk_buff``. However, only the
+limited set of fields is allowed: ``data``, ``data_end`` and ``flow_keys``.
+``flow_keys`` is ``struct bpf_flow_keys`` and contains flow dissector input
+and output arguments.
+
+The inputs are:
+  * ``nhoff`` - initial offset of the networking header
+  * ``thoff`` - initial offset of the transport header, initialized to nhoff
+  * ``n_proto`` - L3 protocol type, parsed out of L2 header
+
+Flow dissector BPF program should fill out the rest of the ``struct
+bpf_flow_keys`` fields. Input arguments ``nhoff/thoff/n_proto`` should be
+also adjusted accordingly.
+
+The return code of the BPF program is either BPF_OK to indicate successful
+dissection, or BPF_DROP to indicate parsing error.
+
+__sk_buff->data
+===============
+
+In the VLAN-less case, this is what the initial state of the BPF flow
+dissector looks like::
+
+  +------+------+------------+-----------+
+  | DMAC | SMAC | ETHER_TYPE | L3_HEADER |
+  +------+------+------------+-----------+
+                              ^
+                              |
+                              +-- flow dissector starts here
+
+
+.. code:: c
+
+  skb->data + flow_keys->nhoff point to the first byte of L3_HEADER
+  flow_keys->thoff = nhoff
+  flow_keys->n_proto = ETHER_TYPE
+
+In case of VLAN, flow dissector can be called with the two different states.
+
+Pre-VLAN parsing::
+
+  +------+------+------+-----+-----------+-----------+
+  | DMAC | SMAC | TPID | TCI |ETHER_TYPE | L3_HEADER |
+  +------+------+------+-----+-----------+-----------+
+                        ^
+                        |
+                        +-- flow dissector starts here
+
+.. code:: c
+
+  skb->data + flow_keys->nhoff point the to first byte of TCI
+  flow_keys->thoff = nhoff
+  flow_keys->n_proto = TPID
+
+Please note that TPID can be 802.1AD and, hence, BPF program would
+have to parse VLAN information twice for double tagged packets.
+
+
+Post-VLAN parsing::
+
+  +------+------+------+-----+-----------+-----------+
+  | DMAC | SMAC | TPID | TCI |ETHER_TYPE | L3_HEADER |
+  +------+------+------+-----+-----------+-----------+
+                                          ^
+                                          |
+                                          +-- flow dissector starts here
+
+.. code:: c
+
+  skb->data + flow_keys->nhoff point the to first byte of L3_HEADER
+  flow_keys->thoff = nhoff
+  flow_keys->n_proto = ETHER_TYPE
+
+In this case VLAN information has been processed before the flow dissector
+and BPF flow dissector is not required to handle it.
+
+
+The takeaway here is as follows: BPF flow dissector program can be called with
+the optional VLAN header and should gracefully handle both cases: when single
+or double VLAN is present and when it is not present. The same program
+can be called for both cases and would have to be written carefully to
+handle both cases.
+
+
+Reference Implementation
+========================
+
+See ``tools/testing/selftests/bpf/progs/bpf_flow.c`` for the reference
+implementation and ``tools/testing/selftests/bpf/flow_dissector_load.[hc]``
+for the loader. bpftool can be used to load BPF flow dissector program as well.
+
+The reference implementation is organized as follows:
+  * ``jmp_table`` map that contains sub-programs for each supported L3 protocol
+  * ``_dissect`` routine - entry point; it does input ``n_proto`` parsing and
+    does ``bpf_tail_call`` to the appropriate L3 handler
+
+Since BPF at this point doesn't support looping (or any jumping back),
+jmp_table is used instead to handle multiple levels of encapsulation (and
+IPv6 options).
+
+
+Current Limitations
+===================
+BPF flow dissector doesn't support exporting all the metadata that in-kernel
+C-based implementation can export. Notable example is single VLAN (802.1Q)
+and double VLAN (802.1AD) tags. Please refer to the ``struct bpf_flow_keys``
+for a set of information that's currently can be exported from the BPF context.
diff --git a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/blkio-controller.txt b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/blkio-controller.txt
index 673dc34d3f78..d1a1b7bdd03a 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/blkio-controller.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/blkio-controller.txt
@@ -8,61 +8,13 @@ both at leaf nodes as well as at intermediate nodes in a storage hierarchy.
 Plan is to use the same cgroup based management interface for blkio controller
 and based on user options switch IO policies in the background.
 
-Currently two IO control policies are implemented. First one is proportional
-weight time based division of disk policy. It is implemented in CFQ. Hence
-this policy takes effect only on leaf nodes when CFQ is being used. The second
-one is throttling policy which can be used to specify upper IO rate limits
-on devices. This policy is implemented in generic block layer and can be
-used on leaf nodes as well as higher level logical devices like device mapper.
+One IO control policy is throttling policy which can be used to
+specify upper IO rate limits on devices. This policy is implemented in
+generic block layer and can be used on leaf nodes as well as higher
+level logical devices like device mapper.
 
 HOWTO
 =====
-Proportional Weight division of bandwidth
------------------------------------------
-You can do a very simple testing of running two dd threads in two different
-cgroups. Here is what you can do.
-
-- Enable Block IO controller
-	CONFIG_BLK_CGROUP=y
-
-- Enable group scheduling in CFQ
-	CONFIG_CFQ_GROUP_IOSCHED=y
-
-- Compile and boot into kernel and mount IO controller (blkio); see
-  cgroups.txt, Why are cgroups needed?.
-
-	mount -t tmpfs cgroup_root /sys/fs/cgroup
-	mkdir /sys/fs/cgroup/blkio
-	mount -t cgroup -o blkio none /sys/fs/cgroup/blkio
-
-- Create two cgroups
-	mkdir -p /sys/fs/cgroup/blkio/test1/ /sys/fs/cgroup/blkio/test2
-
-- Set weights of group test1 and test2
-	echo 1000 > /sys/fs/cgroup/blkio/test1/blkio.weight
-	echo 500 > /sys/fs/cgroup/blkio/test2/blkio.weight
-
-- Create two same size files (say 512MB each) on same disk (file1, file2) and
-  launch two dd threads in different cgroup to read those files.
-
-	sync
-	echo 3 > /proc/sys/vm/drop_caches
-
-	dd if=/mnt/sdb/zerofile1 of=/dev/null &
-	echo $! > /sys/fs/cgroup/blkio/test1/tasks
-	cat /sys/fs/cgroup/blkio/test1/tasks
-
-	dd if=/mnt/sdb/zerofile2 of=/dev/null &
-	echo $! > /sys/fs/cgroup/blkio/test2/tasks
-	cat /sys/fs/cgroup/blkio/test2/tasks
-
-- At macro level, first dd should finish first. To get more precise data, keep
-  on looking at (with the help of script), at blkio.disk_time and
-  blkio.disk_sectors files of both test1 and test2 groups. This will tell how
-  much disk time (in milliseconds), each group got and how many sectors each
-  group dispatched to the disk. We provide fairness in terms of disk time, so
-  ideally io.disk_time of cgroups should be in proportion to the weight.
-
 Throttling/Upper Limit policy
 -----------------------------
 - Enable Block IO controller
@@ -94,7 +46,7 @@ Throttling/Upper Limit policy
 Hierarchical Cgroups
 ====================
 
-Both CFQ and throttling implement hierarchy support; however,
+Throttling implements hierarchy support; however,
 throttling's hierarchy support is enabled iff "sane_behavior" is
 enabled from cgroup side, which currently is a development option and
 not publicly available.
@@ -107,9 +59,8 @@ If somebody created a hierarchy like as follows.
 			|
 		     test3
 
-CFQ by default and throttling with "sane_behavior" will handle the
-hierarchy correctly.  For details on CFQ hierarchy support, refer to
-Documentation/block/cfq-iosched.txt.  For throttling, all limits apply
+Throttling with "sane_behavior" will handle the
+hierarchy correctly. For throttling, all limits apply
 to the whole subtree while all statistics are local to the IOs
 directly generated by tasks in that cgroup.
 
@@ -130,10 +81,6 @@ CONFIG_DEBUG_BLK_CGROUP
 	- Debug help. Right now some additional stats file show up in cgroup
 	  if this option is enabled.
 
-CONFIG_CFQ_GROUP_IOSCHED
-	- Enables group scheduling in CFQ. Currently only 1 level of group
-	  creation is allowed.
-
 CONFIG_BLK_DEV_THROTTLING
 	- Enable block device throttling support in block layer.
 
@@ -344,32 +291,3 @@ Common files among various policies
 - blkio.reset_stats
 	- Writing an int to this file will result in resetting all the stats
 	  for that cgroup.
-
-CFQ sysfs tunable
-=================
-/sys/block/<disk>/queue/iosched/slice_idle
-------------------------------------------
-On a faster hardware CFQ can be slow, especially with sequential workload.
-This happens because CFQ idles on a single queue and single queue might not
-drive deeper request queue depths to keep the storage busy. In such scenarios
-one can try setting slice_idle=0 and that would switch CFQ to IOPS
-(IO operations per second) mode on NCQ supporting hardware.
-
-That means CFQ will not idle between cfq queues of a cfq group and hence be
-able to driver higher queue depth and achieve better throughput. That also
-means that cfq provides fairness among groups in terms of IOPS and not in
-terms of disk time.
-
-/sys/block/<disk>/queue/iosched/group_idle
-------------------------------------------
-If one disables idling on individual cfq queues and cfq service trees by
-setting slice_idle=0, group_idle kicks in. That means CFQ will still idle
-on the group in an attempt to provide fairness among groups.
-
-By default group_idle is same as slice_idle and does not do anything if
-slice_idle is enabled.
-
-One can experience an overall throughput drop if you have created multiple
-groups and put applications in that group which are not driving enough
-IO to keep disk busy. In that case set group_idle=0, and CFQ will not idle
-on individual groups and throughput should improve.
diff --git a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/hugetlb.txt b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/hugetlb.txt
index 106245c3aecc..1260e5369b9b 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/hugetlb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/hugetlb.txt
@@ -32,14 +32,18 @@ Brief summary of control files
  hugetlb.<hugepagesize>.usage_in_bytes     # show current usage for "hugepagesize" hugetlb
  hugetlb.<hugepagesize>.failcnt		   # show the number of allocation failure due to HugeTLB limit
 
-For a system supporting two hugepage size (16M and 16G) the control
+For a system supporting three hugepage sizes (64k, 32M and 1G), the control
 files include:
 
-hugetlb.16GB.limit_in_bytes
-hugetlb.16GB.max_usage_in_bytes
-hugetlb.16GB.usage_in_bytes
-hugetlb.16GB.failcnt
-hugetlb.16MB.limit_in_bytes
-hugetlb.16MB.max_usage_in_bytes
-hugetlb.16MB.usage_in_bytes
-hugetlb.16MB.failcnt
+hugetlb.1GB.limit_in_bytes
+hugetlb.1GB.max_usage_in_bytes
+hugetlb.1GB.usage_in_bytes
+hugetlb.1GB.failcnt
+hugetlb.64KB.limit_in_bytes
+hugetlb.64KB.max_usage_in_bytes
+hugetlb.64KB.usage_in_bytes
+hugetlb.64KB.failcnt
+hugetlb.32MB.limit_in_bytes
+hugetlb.32MB.max_usage_in_bytes
+hugetlb.32MB.usage_in_bytes
+hugetlb.32MB.failcnt
diff --git a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/memcg_test.txt b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/memcg_test.txt
index 5c7f310f32bb..621e29ffb358 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/memcg_test.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/memcg_test.txt
@@ -107,9 +107,9 @@ Under below explanation, we assume CONFIG_MEM_RES_CTRL_SWAP=y.
 
 8. LRU
         Each memcg has its own private LRU. Now, its handling is under global
-	VM's control (means that it's handled under global zone_lru_lock).
+	VM's control (means that it's handled under global pgdat->lru_lock).
 	Almost all routines around memcg's LRU is called by global LRU's
-	list management functions under zone_lru_lock().
+	list management functions under pgdat->lru_lock.
 
 	A special function is mem_cgroup_isolate_pages(). This scans
 	memcg's private LRU and call __isolate_lru_page() to extract a page
diff --git a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/memory.txt b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/memory.txt
index 3682e99234c2..a33cedf85427 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/memory.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/memory.txt
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Brief summary of control files.
  memory.soft_limit_in_bytes	 # set/show soft limit of memory usage
  memory.stat			 # show various statistics
  memory.use_hierarchy		 # set/show hierarchical account enabled
- memory.force_empty		 # trigger forced move charge to parent
+ memory.force_empty		 # trigger forced page reclaim
  memory.pressure_level		 # set memory pressure notifications
  memory.swappiness		 # set/show swappiness parameter of vmscan
 				 (See sysctl's vm.swappiness)
@@ -267,11 +267,11 @@ When oom event notifier is registered, event will be delivered.
    Other lock order is following:
    PG_locked.
    mm->page_table_lock
-       zone_lru_lock
+       pgdat->lru_lock
 	  lock_page_cgroup.
   In many cases, just lock_page_cgroup() is called.
   per-zone-per-cgroup LRU (cgroup's private LRU) is just guarded by
-  zone_lru_lock, it has no lock of its own.
+  pgdat->lru_lock, it has no lock of its own.
 
 2.7 Kernel Memory Extension (CONFIG_MEMCG_KMEM)
 
@@ -459,8 +459,9 @@ About use_hierarchy, see Section 6.
   the cgroup will be reclaimed and as many pages reclaimed as possible.
 
   The typical use case for this interface is before calling rmdir().
-  Because rmdir() moves all pages to parent, some out-of-use page caches can be
-  moved to the parent. If you want to avoid that, force_empty will be useful.
+  Though rmdir() offlines memcg, but the memcg may still stay there due to
+  charged file caches. Some out-of-use page caches may keep charged until
+  memory pressure happens. If you want to avoid that, force_empty will be useful.
 
   Also, note that when memory.kmem.limit_in_bytes is set the charges due to
   kernel pages will still be seen. This is not considered a failure and the
diff --git a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/pids.txt b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/pids.txt
index 1a078b5d281a..e105d708ccde 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/pids.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/pids.txt
@@ -33,6 +33,9 @@ limit in the hierarchy is followed).
 pids.current tracks all child cgroup hierarchies, so parent/pids.current is a
 superset of parent/child/pids.current.
 
+The pids.events file contains event counters:
+  - max: Number of times fork failed because limit was hit.
+
 Example
 -------
 
diff --git a/Documentation/clearing-warn-once.txt b/Documentation/clearing-warn-once.txt
index 5b1f5d547be1..211fd926cf00 100644
--- a/Documentation/clearing-warn-once.txt
+++ b/Documentation/clearing-warn-once.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
+Clearing WARN_ONCE
+------------------
 
-WARN_ONCE / WARN_ON_ONCE only print a warning once.
+WARN_ONCE / WARN_ON_ONCE / printk_once only emit a message once.
 
 echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/clear_warn_once
 
diff --git a/Documentation/conf.py b/Documentation/conf.py
index 72647a38b5c2..7ace3f8852bd 100644
--- a/Documentation/conf.py
+++ b/Documentation/conf.py
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ needs_sphinx = '1.3'
 extensions = ['kerneldoc', 'rstFlatTable', 'kernel_include', 'cdomain', 'kfigure', 'sphinx.ext.ifconfig']
 
 # The name of the math extension changed on Sphinx 1.4
-if major == 1 and minor > 3:
+if (major == 1 and minor > 3) or (major > 1):
     extensions.append("sphinx.ext.imgmath")
 else:
     extensions.append("sphinx.ext.pngmath")
diff --git a/Documentation/core-api/cachetlb.rst b/Documentation/core-api/cachetlb.rst
index 6eb9d3f090cd..93cb65d52720 100644
--- a/Documentation/core-api/cachetlb.rst
+++ b/Documentation/core-api/cachetlb.rst
@@ -101,16 +101,6 @@ changes occur:
 	translations for software managed TLB configurations.
 	The sparc64 port currently does this.
 
-6) ``void tlb_migrate_finish(struct mm_struct *mm)``
-
-	This interface is called at the end of an explicit
-	process migration. This interface provides a hook
-	to allow a platform to update TLB or context-specific
-	information for the address space.
-
-	The ia64 sn2 platform is one example of a platform
-	that uses this interface.
-
 Next, we have the cache flushing interfaces.  In general, when Linux
 is changing an existing virtual-->physical mapping to a new value,
 the sequence will be in one of the following forms::
diff --git a/Documentation/core-api/flexible-arrays.rst b/Documentation/core-api/flexible-arrays.rst
deleted file mode 100644
index b6b85a1b518e..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/core-api/flexible-arrays.rst
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,130 +0,0 @@
-
-===================================
-Using flexible arrays in the kernel
-===================================
-
-Large contiguous memory allocations can be unreliable in the Linux kernel.
-Kernel programmers will sometimes respond to this problem by allocating
-pages with :c:func:`vmalloc()`.  This solution not ideal, though.  On 32-bit
-systems, memory from vmalloc() must be mapped into a relatively small address
-space; it's easy to run out.  On SMP systems, the page table changes required
-by vmalloc() allocations can require expensive cross-processor interrupts on
-all CPUs.  And, on all systems, use of space in the vmalloc() range increases
-pressure on the translation lookaside buffer (TLB), reducing the performance
-of the system.
-
-In many cases, the need for memory from vmalloc() can be eliminated by piecing
-together an array from smaller parts; the flexible array library exists to make
-this task easier.
-
-A flexible array holds an arbitrary (within limits) number of fixed-sized
-objects, accessed via an integer index.  Sparse arrays are handled
-reasonably well.  Only single-page allocations are made, so memory
-allocation failures should be relatively rare.  The down sides are that the
-arrays cannot be indexed directly, individual object size cannot exceed the
-system page size, and putting data into a flexible array requires a copy
-operation.  It's also worth noting that flexible arrays do no internal
-locking at all; if concurrent access to an array is possible, then the
-caller must arrange for appropriate mutual exclusion.
-
-The creation of a flexible array is done with :c:func:`flex_array_alloc()`::
-
-    #include <linux/flex_array.h>
-
-    struct flex_array *flex_array_alloc(int element_size,
-					unsigned int total,
-					gfp_t flags);
-
-The individual object size is provided by ``element_size``, while total is the
-maximum number of objects which can be stored in the array.  The flags
-argument is passed directly to the internal memory allocation calls.  With
-the current code, using flags to ask for high memory is likely to lead to
-notably unpleasant side effects.
-
-It is also possible to define flexible arrays at compile time with::
-
-    DEFINE_FLEX_ARRAY(name, element_size, total);
-
-This macro will result in a definition of an array with the given name; the
-element size and total will be checked for validity at compile time.
-
-Storing data into a flexible array is accomplished with a call to
-:c:func:`flex_array_put()`::
-
-    int flex_array_put(struct flex_array *array, unsigned int element_nr,
-    		       void *src, gfp_t flags);
-
-This call will copy the data from src into the array, in the position
-indicated by ``element_nr`` (which must be less than the maximum specified when
-the array was created).  If any memory allocations must be performed, flags
-will be used.  The return value is zero on success, a negative error code
-otherwise.
-
-There might possibly be a need to store data into a flexible array while
-running in some sort of atomic context; in this situation, sleeping in the
-memory allocator would be a bad thing.  That can be avoided by using
-``GFP_ATOMIC`` for the flags value, but, often, there is a better way.  The
-trick is to ensure that any needed memory allocations are done before
-entering atomic context, using :c:func:`flex_array_prealloc()`::
-
-    int flex_array_prealloc(struct flex_array *array, unsigned int start,
-			    unsigned int nr_elements, gfp_t flags);
-
-This function will ensure that memory for the elements indexed in the range
-defined by ``start`` and ``nr_elements`` has been allocated.  Thereafter, a
-``flex_array_put()`` call on an element in that range is guaranteed not to
-block.
-
-Getting data back out of the array is done with :c:func:`flex_array_get()`::
-
-    void *flex_array_get(struct flex_array *fa, unsigned int element_nr);
-
-The return value is a pointer to the data element, or NULL if that
-particular element has never been allocated.
-
-Note that it is possible to get back a valid pointer for an element which
-has never been stored in the array.  Memory for array elements is allocated
-one page at a time; a single allocation could provide memory for several
-adjacent elements.  Flexible array elements are normally initialized to the
-value ``FLEX_ARRAY_FREE`` (defined as 0x6c in <linux/poison.h>), so errors
-involving that number probably result from use of unstored array entries.
-Note that, if array elements are allocated with ``__GFP_ZERO``, they will be
-initialized to zero and this poisoning will not happen.
-
-Individual elements in the array can be cleared with
-:c:func:`flex_array_clear()`::
-
-    int flex_array_clear(struct flex_array *array, unsigned int element_nr);
-
-This function will set the given element to ``FLEX_ARRAY_FREE`` and return
-zero.  If storage for the indicated element is not allocated for the array,
-``flex_array_clear()`` will return ``-EINVAL`` instead.  Note that clearing an
-element does not release the storage associated with it; to reduce the
-allocated size of an array, call :c:func:`flex_array_shrink()`::
-
-    int flex_array_shrink(struct flex_array *array);
-
-The return value will be the number of pages of memory actually freed.
-This function works by scanning the array for pages containing nothing but
-``FLEX_ARRAY_FREE`` bytes, so (1) it can be expensive, and (2) it will not work
-if the array's pages are allocated with ``__GFP_ZERO``.
-
-It is possible to remove all elements of an array with a call to
-:c:func:`flex_array_free_parts()`::
-
-    void flex_array_free_parts(struct flex_array *array);
-
-This call frees all elements, but leaves the array itself in place.
-Freeing the entire array is done with :c:func:`flex_array_free()`::
-
-    void flex_array_free(struct flex_array *array);
-
-As of this writing, there are no users of flexible arrays in the mainline
-kernel.  The functions described here are also not exported to modules;
-that will probably be fixed when somebody comes up with a need for it.
-
-
-Flexible array functions
-------------------------
-
-.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/flex_array.h
diff --git a/Documentation/core-api/generic-radix-tree.rst b/Documentation/core-api/generic-radix-tree.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ed42839ae42f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/core-api/generic-radix-tree.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+=================================
+Generic radix trees/sparse arrays
+=================================
+
+.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/generic-radix-tree.h
+   :doc: Generic radix trees/sparse arrays
+
+generic radix tree functions
+----------------------------
+
+.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/generic-radix-tree.h
+   :functions:
diff --git a/Documentation/core-api/index.rst b/Documentation/core-api/index.rst
index 3adee82be311..ee1bb8983a88 100644
--- a/Documentation/core-api/index.rst
+++ b/Documentation/core-api/index.rst
@@ -22,12 +22,12 @@ Core utilities
    workqueue
    genericirq
    xarray
-   flexible-arrays
    librs
    genalloc
    errseq
    printk-formats
    circular-buffers
+   generic-radix-tree
    memory-allocation
    mm-api
    gfp_mask-from-fs-io
diff --git a/Documentation/core-api/kernel-api.rst b/Documentation/core-api/kernel-api.rst
index cdd24943fbcc..a29c99d13331 100644
--- a/Documentation/core-api/kernel-api.rst
+++ b/Documentation/core-api/kernel-api.rst
@@ -147,10 +147,10 @@ Division Functions
 .. kernel-doc:: include/linux/math64.h
    :internal:
 
-.. kernel-doc:: lib/div64.c
+.. kernel-doc:: lib/math/div64.c
    :functions: div_s64_rem div64_u64_rem div64_u64 div64_s64
 
-.. kernel-doc:: lib/gcd.c
+.. kernel-doc:: lib/math/gcd.c
    :export:
 
 UUID/GUID
@@ -356,10 +356,6 @@ Read-Copy Update (RCU)
 
 .. kernel-doc:: include/linux/rcupdate.h
 
-.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/rcupdate_wait.h
-
-.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/rcutree.h
-
 .. kernel-doc:: kernel/rcu/tree.c
 
 .. kernel-doc:: kernel/rcu/tree_plugin.h
diff --git a/Documentation/core-api/memory-allocation.rst b/Documentation/core-api/memory-allocation.rst
index 8954a88ff5b7..7744aa3bf2e0 100644
--- a/Documentation/core-api/memory-allocation.rst
+++ b/Documentation/core-api/memory-allocation.rst
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.. _memory-allocation:
+.. _memory_allocation:
 
 =======================
 Memory Allocation Guide
@@ -113,9 +113,11 @@ see :c:func:`kvmalloc_node` reference documentation. Note that
 
 If you need to allocate many identical objects you can use the slab
 cache allocator. The cache should be set up with
-:c:func:`kmem_cache_create` before it can be used. Afterwards
-:c:func:`kmem_cache_alloc` and its convenience wrappers can allocate
-memory from that cache.
+:c:func:`kmem_cache_create` or :c:func:`kmem_cache_create_usercopy`
+before it can be used. The second function should be used if a part of
+the cache might be copied to the userspace.  After the cache is
+created :c:func:`kmem_cache_alloc` and its convenience wrappers can
+allocate memory from that cache.
 
 When the allocated memory is no longer needed it must be freed. You
 can use :c:func:`kvfree` for the memory allocated with `kmalloc`,
diff --git a/Documentation/core-api/mm-api.rst b/Documentation/core-api/mm-api.rst
index aa8e54b85221..128e8a721c1e 100644
--- a/Documentation/core-api/mm-api.rst
+++ b/Documentation/core-api/mm-api.rst
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ users will want to use a plain ``GFP_KERNEL``.
    :doc: Reclaim modifiers
 
 .. kernel-doc:: include/linux/gfp.h
-   :doc: Common combinations
+   :doc: Useful GFP flag combinations
 
 The Slab Cache
 ==============
diff --git a/Documentation/core-api/printk-formats.rst b/Documentation/core-api/printk-formats.rst
index a7fae4538946..75d2bbe9813f 100644
--- a/Documentation/core-api/printk-formats.rst
+++ b/Documentation/core-api/printk-formats.rst
@@ -13,6 +13,10 @@ Integer types
 
 	If variable is of Type,		use printk format specifier:
 	------------------------------------------------------------
+		char			%hhd or %hhx
+		unsigned char		%hhu or %hhx
+		short int		%hd or %hx
+		unsigned short int	%hu or %hx
 		int			%d or %x
 		unsigned int		%u or %x
 		long			%ld or %lx
@@ -21,6 +25,10 @@ Integer types
 		unsigned long long	%llu or %llx
 		size_t			%zu or %zx
 		ssize_t			%zd or %zx
+		s8			%hhd or %hhx
+		u8			%hhu or %hhx
+		s16			%hd or %hx
+		u16			%hu or %hx
 		s32			%d or %x
 		u32			%u or %x
 		s64			%lld or %llx
@@ -50,6 +58,14 @@ A raw pointer value may be printed with %p which will hash the address
 before printing. The kernel also supports extended specifiers for printing
 pointers of different types.
 
+Some of the extended specifiers print the data on the given address instead
+of printing the address itself. In this case, the following error messages
+might be printed instead of the unreachable information::
+
+	(null)	 data on plain NULL address
+	(efault) data on invalid address
+	(einval) invalid data on a valid address
+
 Plain Pointers
 --------------
 
diff --git a/Documentation/core-api/refcount-vs-atomic.rst b/Documentation/core-api/refcount-vs-atomic.rst
index 322851bada16..976e85adffe8 100644
--- a/Documentation/core-api/refcount-vs-atomic.rst
+++ b/Documentation/core-api/refcount-vs-atomic.rst
@@ -54,6 +54,13 @@ must propagate to all other CPUs before the release operation
 (A-cumulative property). This is implemented using
 :c:func:`smp_store_release`.
 
+An ACQUIRE memory ordering guarantees that all post loads and
+stores (all po-later instructions) on the same CPU are
+completed after the acquire operation. It also guarantees that all
+po-later stores on the same CPU must propagate to all other CPUs
+after the acquire operation executes. This is implemented using
+:c:func:`smp_acquire__after_ctrl_dep`.
+
 A control dependency (on success) for refcounters guarantees that
 if a reference for an object was successfully obtained (reference
 counter increment or addition happened, function returned true),
@@ -119,13 +126,24 @@ Memory ordering guarantees changes:
    result of obtaining pointer to the object!
 
 
-case 5) - decrement-based RMW ops that return a value
------------------------------------------------------
+case 5) - generic dec/sub decrement-based RMW ops that return a value
+---------------------------------------------------------------------
 
 Function changes:
 
  * :c:func:`atomic_dec_and_test` --> :c:func:`refcount_dec_and_test`
  * :c:func:`atomic_sub_and_test` --> :c:func:`refcount_sub_and_test`
+
+Memory ordering guarantees changes:
+
+ * fully ordered --> RELEASE ordering + ACQUIRE ordering on success
+
+
+case 6) other decrement-based RMW ops that return a value
+---------------------------------------------------------
+
+Function changes:
+
  * no atomic counterpart --> :c:func:`refcount_dec_if_one`
  * ``atomic_add_unless(&var, -1, 1)`` --> ``refcount_dec_not_one(&var)``
 
@@ -136,7 +154,7 @@ Memory ordering guarantees changes:
 .. note:: :c:func:`atomic_add_unless` only provides full order on success.
 
 
-case 6) - lock-based RMW
+case 7) - lock-based RMW
 ------------------------
 
 Function changes:
diff --git a/Documentation/core-api/xarray.rst b/Documentation/core-api/xarray.rst
index 5d54b27c6eba..ef6f9f98f595 100644
--- a/Documentation/core-api/xarray.rst
+++ b/Documentation/core-api/xarray.rst
@@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ which was at that index; if it returns the same entry which was passed as
 
 If you want to only store a new entry to an index if the current entry
 at that index is ``NULL``, you can use :c:func:`xa_insert` which
-returns ``-EEXIST`` if the entry is not empty.
+returns ``-EBUSY`` if the entry is not empty.
 
 You can enquire whether a mark is set on an entry by using
 :c:func:`xa_get_mark`.  If the entry is not ``NULL``, you can set a mark
@@ -131,17 +131,23 @@ If you use :c:func:`DEFINE_XARRAY_ALLOC` to define the XArray, or
 initialise it by passing ``XA_FLAGS_ALLOC`` to :c:func:`xa_init_flags`,
 the XArray changes to track whether entries are in use or not.
 
-You can call :c:func:`xa_alloc` to store the entry at any unused index
+You can call :c:func:`xa_alloc` to store the entry at an unused index
 in the XArray.  If you need to modify the array from interrupt context,
 you can use :c:func:`xa_alloc_bh` or :c:func:`xa_alloc_irq` to disable
 interrupts while allocating the ID.
 
-Using :c:func:`xa_store`, :c:func:`xa_cmpxchg` or :c:func:`xa_insert`
-will mark the entry as being allocated.  Unlike a normal XArray, storing
+Using :c:func:`xa_store`, :c:func:`xa_cmpxchg` or :c:func:`xa_insert` will
+also mark the entry as being allocated.  Unlike a normal XArray, storing
 ``NULL`` will mark the entry as being in use, like :c:func:`xa_reserve`.
 To free an entry, use :c:func:`xa_erase` (or :c:func:`xa_release` if
 you only want to free the entry if it's ``NULL``).
 
+By default, the lowest free entry is allocated starting from 0.  If you
+want to allocate entries starting at 1, it is more efficient to use
+:c:func:`DEFINE_XARRAY_ALLOC1` or ``XA_FLAGS_ALLOC1``.  If you want to
+allocate IDs up to a maximum, then wrap back around to the lowest free
+ID, you can use :c:func:`xa_alloc_cyclic`.
+
 You cannot use ``XA_MARK_0`` with an allocating XArray as this mark
 is used to track whether an entry is free or not.  The other marks are
 available for your use.
@@ -209,7 +215,6 @@ Assumes xa_lock held on entry:
  * :c:func:`__xa_erase`
  * :c:func:`__xa_cmpxchg`
  * :c:func:`__xa_alloc`
- * :c:func:`__xa_reserve`
  * :c:func:`__xa_set_mark`
  * :c:func:`__xa_clear_mark`
 
diff --git a/Documentation/cpuidle/driver.txt b/Documentation/cpuidle/driver.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 1b0d81d92583..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/cpuidle/driver.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,37 +0,0 @@
-
-
-		Supporting multiple CPU idle levels in kernel
-
-				cpuidle drivers
-
-
-
-
-cpuidle driver hooks into the cpuidle infrastructure and handles the
-architecture/platform dependent part of CPU idle states. Driver
-provides the platform idle state detection capability and also
-has mechanisms in place to support actual entry-exit into CPU idle states.
-
-cpuidle driver initializes the cpuidle_device structure for each CPU device
-and registers with cpuidle using cpuidle_register_device.
-
-If all the idle states are the same, the wrapper function cpuidle_register
-could be used instead.
-
-It can also support the dynamic changes (like battery <-> AC), by using
-cpuidle_pause_and_lock, cpuidle_disable_device and cpuidle_enable_device,
-cpuidle_resume_and_unlock.
-
-Interfaces:
-extern int cpuidle_register(struct cpuidle_driver *drv,
-                            const struct cpumask *const coupled_cpus);
-extern int cpuidle_unregister(struct cpuidle_driver *drv);
-extern int cpuidle_register_driver(struct cpuidle_driver *drv);
-extern void cpuidle_unregister_driver(struct cpuidle_driver *drv);
-extern int cpuidle_register_device(struct cpuidle_device *dev);
-extern void cpuidle_unregister_device(struct cpuidle_device *dev);
-
-extern void cpuidle_pause_and_lock(void);
-extern void cpuidle_resume_and_unlock(void);
-extern int cpuidle_enable_device(struct cpuidle_device *dev);
-extern void cpuidle_disable_device(struct cpuidle_device *dev);
diff --git a/Documentation/cpuidle/governor.txt b/Documentation/cpuidle/governor.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index d9020f5e847b..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/cpuidle/governor.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
-		Supporting multiple CPU idle levels in kernel
-
-				cpuidle governors
-
-
-
-
-cpuidle governor is policy routine that decides what idle state to enter at
-any given time. cpuidle core uses different callbacks to the governor.
-
-* enable() to enable governor for a particular device
-* disable() to disable governor for a particular device
-* select() to select an idle state to enter
-* reflect() called after returning from the idle state, which can be used
-  by the governor for some record keeping.
-
-More than one governor can be registered at the same time and
-users can switch between drivers using /sysfs interface (when enabled).
-More than one governor part is supported for developers to easily experiment
-with different governors. By default, most optimal governor based on your
-kernel configuration and platform will be selected by cpuidle.
-
-Interfaces:
-extern int cpuidle_register_governor(struct cpuidle_governor *gov);
-struct cpuidle_governor
diff --git a/Documentation/cputopology.txt b/Documentation/cputopology.txt
index c6e7e9196a8b..cb61277e2308 100644
--- a/Documentation/cputopology.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cputopology.txt
@@ -3,79 +3,79 @@ How CPU topology info is exported via sysfs
 ===========================================
 
 Export CPU topology info via sysfs. Items (attributes) are similar
-to /proc/cpuinfo output of some architectures:
+to /proc/cpuinfo output of some architectures.  They reside in
+/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuX/topology/:
 
-1) /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuX/topology/physical_package_id:
+physical_package_id:
 
 	physical package id of cpuX. Typically corresponds to a physical
 	socket number, but the actual value is architecture and platform
 	dependent.
 
-2) /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuX/topology/core_id:
+core_id:
 
 	the CPU core ID of cpuX. Typically it is the hardware platform's
 	identifier (rather than the kernel's).  The actual value is
 	architecture and platform dependent.
 
-3) /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuX/topology/book_id:
+book_id:
 
 	the book ID of cpuX. Typically it is the hardware platform's
 	identifier (rather than the kernel's).	The actual value is
 	architecture and platform dependent.
 
-4) /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuX/topology/drawer_id:
+drawer_id:
 
 	the drawer ID of cpuX. Typically it is the hardware platform's
 	identifier (rather than the kernel's).	The actual value is
 	architecture and platform dependent.
 
-5) /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuX/topology/thread_siblings:
+thread_siblings:
 
 	internal kernel map of cpuX's hardware threads within the same
 	core as cpuX.
 
-6) /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuX/topology/thread_siblings_list:
+thread_siblings_list:
 
 	human-readable list of cpuX's hardware threads within the same
 	core as cpuX.
 
-7) /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuX/topology/core_siblings:
+core_siblings:
 
 	internal kernel map of cpuX's hardware threads within the same
 	physical_package_id.
 
-8) /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuX/topology/core_siblings_list:
+core_siblings_list:
 
 	human-readable list of cpuX's hardware threads within the same
 	physical_package_id.
 
-9) /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuX/topology/book_siblings:
+book_siblings:
 
 	internal kernel map of cpuX's hardware threads within the same
 	book_id.
 
-10) /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuX/topology/book_siblings_list:
+book_siblings_list:
 
 	human-readable list of cpuX's hardware threads within the same
 	book_id.
 
-11) /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuX/topology/drawer_siblings:
+drawer_siblings:
 
 	internal kernel map of cpuX's hardware threads within the same
 	drawer_id.
 
-12) /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuX/topology/drawer_siblings_list:
+drawer_siblings_list:
 
 	human-readable list of cpuX's hardware threads within the same
 	drawer_id.
 
-To implement it in an architecture-neutral way, a new source file,
-drivers/base/topology.c, is to export the 6 to 12 attributes. The book
-and drawer related sysfs files will only be created if CONFIG_SCHED_BOOK
-and CONFIG_SCHED_DRAWER are selected.
+Architecture-neutral, drivers/base/topology.c, exports these attributes.
+However, the book and drawer related sysfs files will only be created if
+CONFIG_SCHED_BOOK and CONFIG_SCHED_DRAWER are selected, respectively.
 
-CONFIG_SCHED_BOOK and CONFIG_DRAWER are currently only used on s390, where
-they reflect the cpu and cache hierarchy.
+CONFIG_SCHED_BOOK and CONFIG_SCHED_DRAWER are currently only used on s390,
+where they reflect the cpu and cache hierarchy.
 
 For an architecture to support this feature, it must define some of
 these macros in include/asm-XXX/topology.h::
@@ -98,10 +98,10 @@ To be consistent on all architectures, include/linux/topology.h
 provides default definitions for any of the above macros that are
 not defined by include/asm-XXX/topology.h:
 
-1) physical_package_id: -1
-2) core_id: 0
-3) sibling_cpumask: just the given CPU
-4) core_cpumask: just the given CPU
+1) topology_physical_package_id: -1
+2) topology_core_id: 0
+3) topology_sibling_cpumask: just the given CPU
+4) topology_core_cpumask: just the given CPU
 
 For architectures that don't support books (CONFIG_SCHED_BOOK) there are no
 default definitions for topology_book_id() and topology_book_cpumask().
diff --git a/Documentation/crypto/api-samples.rst b/Documentation/crypto/api-samples.rst
index 0f6ca8b7261e..f14afaaf2f32 100644
--- a/Documentation/crypto/api-samples.rst
+++ b/Documentation/crypto/api-samples.rst
@@ -133,7 +133,6 @@ Code Example For Use of Operational State Memory With SHASH
         if (!sdesc)
             return ERR_PTR(-ENOMEM);
         sdesc->shash.tfm = alg;
-        sdesc->shash.flags = 0x0;
         return sdesc;
     }
 
diff --git a/Documentation/dev-tools/gcov.rst b/Documentation/dev-tools/gcov.rst
index 69a7d90c320a..46aae52a41d0 100644
--- a/Documentation/dev-tools/gcov.rst
+++ b/Documentation/dev-tools/gcov.rst
@@ -34,10 +34,6 @@ Configure the kernel with::
         CONFIG_DEBUG_FS=y
         CONFIG_GCOV_KERNEL=y
 
-select the gcc's gcov format, default is autodetect based on gcc version::
-
-        CONFIG_GCOV_FORMAT_AUTODETECT=y
-
 and to get coverage data for the entire kernel::
 
         CONFIG_GCOV_PROFILE_ALL=y
@@ -169,6 +165,20 @@ b) gcov is run on the BUILD machine
       [user@build] gcov -o /tmp/coverage/tmp/out/init main.c
 
 
+Note on compilers
+-----------------
+
+GCC and LLVM gcov tools are not necessarily compatible. Use gcov_ to work with
+GCC-generated .gcno and .gcda files, and use llvm-cov_ for Clang.
+
+.. _gcov: http://gcc.gnu.org/onlinedocs/gcc/Gcov.html
+.. _llvm-cov: https://llvm.org/docs/CommandGuide/llvm-cov.html
+
+Build differences between GCC and Clang gcov are handled by Kconfig. It
+automatically selects the appropriate gcov format depending on the detected
+toolchain.
+
+
 Troubleshooting
 ---------------
 
diff --git a/Documentation/dev-tools/kcov.rst b/Documentation/dev-tools/kcov.rst
index c2f6452e38ed..42b612677799 100644
--- a/Documentation/dev-tools/kcov.rst
+++ b/Documentation/dev-tools/kcov.rst
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ Configure the kernel with::
 
         CONFIG_KCOV=y
 
-CONFIG_KCOV requires gcc built on revision 231296 or later.
+CONFIG_KCOV requires gcc 6.1.0 or later.
 
 If the comparison operands need to be collected, set::
 
diff --git a/Documentation/dev-tools/kselftest.rst b/Documentation/dev-tools/kselftest.rst
index 7756f7a7c23b..25604904fa6e 100644
--- a/Documentation/dev-tools/kselftest.rst
+++ b/Documentation/dev-tools/kselftest.rst
@@ -7,6 +7,11 @@ directory. These are intended to be small tests to exercise individual code
 paths in the kernel. Tests are intended to be run after building, installing
 and booting a kernel.
 
+You can find additional information on Kselftest framework, how to
+write new tests using the framework on Kselftest wiki:
+
+https://kselftest.wiki.kernel.org/
+
 On some systems, hot-plug tests could hang forever waiting for cpu and
 memory to be ready to be offlined. A special hot-plug target is created
 to run the full range of hot-plug tests. In default mode, hot-plug tests run
@@ -14,6 +19,10 @@ in safe mode with a limited scope. In limited mode, cpu-hotplug test is
 run on a single cpu as opposed to all hotplug capable cpus, and memory
 hotplug test is run on 2% of hotplug capable memory instead of 10%.
 
+kselftest runs as a userspace process.  Tests that can be written/run in
+userspace may wish to use the `Test Harness`_.  Tests that need to be
+run in kernel space may wish to use a `Test Module`_.
+
 Running the selftests (hotplug tests are run in limited mode)
 =============================================================
 
@@ -31,17 +40,32 @@ To build and run the tests with a single command, use::
 
 Note that some tests will require root privileges.
 
-Build and run from user specific object directory (make O=dir)::
+Kselftest supports saving output files in a separate directory and then
+running tests. To locate output files in a separate directory two syntaxes
+are supported. In both cases the working directory must be the root of the
+kernel src. This is applicable to "Running a subset of selftests" section
+below.
+
+To build, save output files in a separate directory with O= ::
 
   $ make O=/tmp/kselftest kselftest
 
-Build and run KBUILD_OUTPUT directory (make KBUILD_OUTPUT=)::
+To build, save output files in a separate directory with KBUILD_OUTPUT ::
+
+  $ export KBUILD_OUTPUT=/tmp/kselftest; make kselftest
 
-  $ make KBUILD_OUTPUT=/tmp/kselftest kselftest
+The O= assignment takes precedence over the KBUILD_OUTPUT environment
+variable.
 
-The above commands run the tests and print pass/fail summary to make it
-easier to understand the test results. Please find the detailed individual
-test results for each test in /tmp/testname file(s).
+The above commands by default run the tests and print full pass/fail report.
+Kselftest supports "summary" option to make it easier to understand the test
+results. Please find the detailed individual test results for each test in
+/tmp/testname file(s) when summary option is specified. This is applicable
+to "Running a subset of selftests" section below.
+
+To run kselftest with summary option enabled ::
+
+  $ make summary=1 kselftest
 
 Running a subset of selftests
 =============================
@@ -57,17 +81,13 @@ You can specify multiple tests to build and run::
 
   $  make TARGETS="size timers" kselftest
 
-Build and run from user specific object directory (make O=dir)::
+To build, save output files in a separate directory with O= ::
 
   $ make O=/tmp/kselftest TARGETS="size timers" kselftest
 
-Build and run KBUILD_OUTPUT directory (make KBUILD_OUTPUT=)::
+To build, save output files in a separate directory with KBUILD_OUTPUT ::
 
-  $ make KBUILD_OUTPUT=/tmp/kselftest TARGETS="size timers" kselftest
-
-The above commands run the tests and print pass/fail summary to make it
-easier to understand the test results. Please find the detailed individual
-test results for each test in /tmp/testname file(s).
+  $ export KBUILD_OUTPUT=/tmp/kselftest; make TARGETS="size timers" kselftest
 
 See the top-level tools/testing/selftests/Makefile for the list of all
 possible targets.
@@ -161,11 +181,97 @@ Contributing new tests (details)
 
    e.g: tools/testing/selftests/android/config
 
+Test Module
+===========
+
+Kselftest tests the kernel from userspace.  Sometimes things need
+testing from within the kernel, one method of doing this is to create a
+test module.  We can tie the module into the kselftest framework by
+using a shell script test runner.  ``kselftest_module.sh`` is designed
+to facilitate this process.  There is also a header file provided to
+assist writing kernel modules that are for use with kselftest:
+
+- ``tools/testing/kselftest/kselftest_module.h``
+- ``tools/testing/kselftest/kselftest_module.sh``
+
+How to use
+----------
+
+Here we show the typical steps to create a test module and tie it into
+kselftest.  We use kselftests for lib/ as an example.
+
+1. Create the test module
+
+2. Create the test script that will run (load/unload) the module
+   e.g. ``tools/testing/selftests/lib/printf.sh``
+
+3. Add line to config file e.g. ``tools/testing/selftests/lib/config``
+
+4. Add test script to makefile  e.g. ``tools/testing/selftests/lib/Makefile``
+
+5. Verify it works:
+
+.. code-block:: sh
+
+   # Assumes you have booted a fresh build of this kernel tree
+   cd /path/to/linux/tree
+   make kselftest-merge
+   make modules
+   sudo make modules_install
+   make TARGETS=lib kselftest
+
+Example Module
+--------------
+
+A bare bones test module might look like this:
+
+.. code-block:: c
+
+   // SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+
+   #define pr_fmt(fmt) KBUILD_MODNAME ": " fmt
+
+   #include "../tools/testing/selftests/kselftest_module.h"
+
+   KSTM_MODULE_GLOBALS();
+
+   /*
+    * Kernel module for testing the foobinator
+    */
+
+   static int __init test_function()
+   {
+           ...
+   }
+
+   static void __init selftest(void)
+   {
+           KSTM_CHECK_ZERO(do_test_case("", 0));
+   }
+
+   KSTM_MODULE_LOADERS(test_foo);
+   MODULE_AUTHOR("John Developer <jd@fooman.org>");
+   MODULE_LICENSE("GPL");
+
+Example test script
+-------------------
+
+.. code-block:: sh
+
+    #!/bin/bash
+    # SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+    $(dirname $0)/../kselftest_module.sh "foo" test_foo
+
+
 Test Harness
 ============
 
-The kselftest_harness.h file contains useful helpers to build tests.  The tests
-from tools/testing/selftests/seccomp/seccomp_bpf.c can be used as example.
+The kselftest_harness.h file contains useful helpers to build tests.  The
+test harness is for userspace testing, for kernel space testing see `Test
+Module`_ above.
+
+The tests from tools/testing/selftests/seccomp/seccomp_bpf.c can be used as
+example.
 
 Example
 -------
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/cache.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/cache.txt
index ff0841711fd5..8ae1cf8e94da 100644
--- a/Documentation/device-mapper/cache.txt
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/cache.txt
@@ -206,6 +206,9 @@ Optional feature arguments are:
                   in a separate btree, which improves speed of shutting
 		  down the cache.
 
+   no_discard_passdown	: disable passing down discards from the cache
+			  to the origin's data device.
+
 A policy called 'default' is always registered.  This is an alias for
 the policy we currently think is giving best all round performance.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-dust.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-dust.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..954d402a1f6a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-dust.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,272 @@
+dm-dust
+=======
+
+This target emulates the behavior of bad sectors at arbitrary
+locations, and the ability to enable the emulation of the failures
+at an arbitrary time.
+
+This target behaves similarly to a linear target.  At a given time,
+the user can send a message to the target to start failing read
+requests on specific blocks (to emulate the behavior of a hard disk
+drive with bad sectors).
+
+When the failure behavior is enabled (i.e.: when the output of
+"dmsetup status" displays "fail_read_on_bad_block"), reads of blocks
+in the "bad block list" will fail with EIO ("Input/output error").
+
+Writes of blocks in the "bad block list will result in the following:
+
+1. Remove the block from the "bad block list".
+2. Successfully complete the write.
+
+This emulates the "remapped sector" behavior of a drive with bad
+sectors.
+
+Normally, a drive that is encountering bad sectors will most likely
+encounter more bad sectors, at an unknown time or location.
+With dm-dust, the user can use the "addbadblock" and "removebadblock"
+messages to add arbitrary bad blocks at new locations, and the
+"enable" and "disable" messages to modulate the state of whether the
+configured "bad blocks" will be treated as bad, or bypassed.
+This allows the pre-writing of test data and metadata prior to
+simulating a "failure" event where bad sectors start to appear.
+
+Table parameters:
+-----------------
+<device_path> <offset> <blksz>
+
+Mandatory parameters:
+    <device_path>: path to the block device.
+    <offset>: offset to data area from start of device_path
+    <blksz>: block size in bytes
+	     (minimum 512, maximum 1073741824, must be a power of 2)
+
+Usage instructions:
+-------------------
+
+First, find the size (in 512-byte sectors) of the device to be used:
+
+$ sudo blockdev --getsz /dev/vdb1
+33552384
+
+Create the dm-dust device:
+(For a device with a block size of 512 bytes)
+$ sudo dmsetup create dust1 --table '0 33552384 dust /dev/vdb1 0 512'
+
+(For a device with a block size of 4096 bytes)
+$ sudo dmsetup create dust1 --table '0 33552384 dust /dev/vdb1 0 4096'
+
+Check the status of the read behavior ("bypass" indicates that all I/O
+will be passed through to the underlying device):
+$ sudo dmsetup status dust1
+0 33552384 dust 252:17 bypass
+
+$ sudo dd if=/dev/mapper/dust1 of=/dev/null bs=512 count=128 iflag=direct
+128+0 records in
+128+0 records out
+
+$ sudo dd if=/dev/zero of=/dev/mapper/dust1 bs=512 count=128 oflag=direct
+128+0 records in
+128+0 records out
+
+Adding and removing bad blocks:
+-------------------------------
+
+At any time (i.e.: whether the device has the "bad block" emulation
+enabled or disabled), bad blocks may be added or removed from the
+device via the "addbadblock" and "removebadblock" messages:
+
+$ sudo dmsetup message dust1 0 addbadblock 60
+kernel: device-mapper: dust: badblock added at block 60
+
+$ sudo dmsetup message dust1 0 addbadblock 67
+kernel: device-mapper: dust: badblock added at block 67
+
+$ sudo dmsetup message dust1 0 addbadblock 72
+kernel: device-mapper: dust: badblock added at block 72
+
+These bad blocks will be stored in the "bad block list".
+While the device is in "bypass" mode, reads and writes will succeed:
+
+$ sudo dmsetup status dust1
+0 33552384 dust 252:17 bypass
+
+Enabling block read failures:
+-----------------------------
+
+To enable the "fail read on bad block" behavior, send the "enable" message:
+
+$ sudo dmsetup message dust1 0 enable
+kernel: device-mapper: dust: enabling read failures on bad sectors
+
+$ sudo dmsetup status dust1
+0 33552384 dust 252:17 fail_read_on_bad_block
+
+With the device in "fail read on bad block" mode, attempting to read a
+block will encounter an "Input/output error":
+
+$ sudo dd if=/dev/mapper/dust1 of=/dev/null bs=512 count=1 skip=67 iflag=direct
+dd: error reading '/dev/mapper/dust1': Input/output error
+0+0 records in
+0+0 records out
+0 bytes copied, 0.00040651 s, 0.0 kB/s
+
+...and writing to the bad blocks will remove the blocks from the list,
+therefore emulating the "remap" behavior of hard disk drives:
+
+$ sudo dd if=/dev/zero of=/dev/mapper/dust1 bs=512 count=128 oflag=direct
+128+0 records in
+128+0 records out
+
+kernel: device-mapper: dust: block 60 removed from badblocklist by write
+kernel: device-mapper: dust: block 67 removed from badblocklist by write
+kernel: device-mapper: dust: block 72 removed from badblocklist by write
+kernel: device-mapper: dust: block 87 removed from badblocklist by write
+
+Bad block add/remove error handling:
+------------------------------------
+
+Attempting to add a bad block that already exists in the list will
+result in an "Invalid argument" error, as well as a helpful message:
+
+$ sudo dmsetup message dust1 0 addbadblock 88
+device-mapper: message ioctl on dust1  failed: Invalid argument
+kernel: device-mapper: dust: block 88 already in badblocklist
+
+Attempting to remove a bad block that doesn't exist in the list will
+result in an "Invalid argument" error, as well as a helpful message:
+
+$ sudo dmsetup message dust1 0 removebadblock 87
+device-mapper: message ioctl on dust1  failed: Invalid argument
+kernel: device-mapper: dust: block 87 not found in badblocklist
+
+Counting the number of bad blocks in the bad block list:
+--------------------------------------------------------
+
+To count the number of bad blocks configured in the device, run the
+following message command:
+
+$ sudo dmsetup message dust1 0 countbadblocks
+
+A message will print with the number of bad blocks currently
+configured on the device:
+
+kernel: device-mapper: dust: countbadblocks: 895 badblock(s) found
+
+Querying for specific bad blocks:
+---------------------------------
+
+To find out if a specific block is in the bad block list, run the
+following message command:
+
+$ sudo dmsetup message dust1 0 queryblock 72
+
+The following message will print if the block is in the list:
+device-mapper: dust: queryblock: block 72 found in badblocklist
+
+The following message will print if the block is in the list:
+device-mapper: dust: queryblock: block 72 not found in badblocklist
+
+The "queryblock" message command will work in both the "enabled"
+and "disabled" modes, allowing the verification of whether a block
+will be treated as "bad" without having to issue I/O to the device,
+or having to "enable" the bad block emulation.
+
+Clearing the bad block list:
+----------------------------
+
+To clear the bad block list (without needing to individually run
+a "removebadblock" message command for every block), run the
+following message command:
+
+$ sudo dmsetup message dust1 0 clearbadblocks
+
+After clearing the bad block list, the following message will appear:
+
+kernel: device-mapper: dust: clearbadblocks: badblocks cleared
+
+If there were no bad blocks to clear, the following message will
+appear:
+
+kernel: device-mapper: dust: clearbadblocks: no badblocks found
+
+Message commands list:
+----------------------
+
+Below is a list of the messages that can be sent to a dust device:
+
+Operations on blocks (requires a <blknum> argument):
+
+addbadblock <blknum>
+queryblock <blknum>
+removebadblock <blknum>
+
+...where <blknum> is a block number within range of the device
+  (corresponding to the block size of the device.)
+
+Single argument message commands:
+
+countbadblocks
+clearbadblocks
+disable
+enable
+quiet
+
+Device removal:
+---------------
+
+When finished, remove the device via the "dmsetup remove" command:
+
+$ sudo dmsetup remove dust1
+
+Quiet mode:
+-----------
+
+On test runs with many bad blocks, it may be desirable to avoid
+excessive logging (from bad blocks added, removed, or "remapped").
+This can be done by enabling "quiet mode" via the following message:
+
+$ sudo dmsetup message dust1 0 quiet
+
+This will suppress log messages from add / remove / removed by write
+operations.  Log messages from "countbadblocks" or "queryblock"
+message commands will still print in quiet mode.
+
+The status of quiet mode can be seen by running "dmsetup status":
+
+$ sudo dmsetup status dust1
+0 33552384 dust 252:17 fail_read_on_bad_block quiet
+
+To disable quiet mode, send the "quiet" message again:
+
+$ sudo dmsetup message dust1 0 quiet
+
+$ sudo dmsetup status dust1
+0 33552384 dust 252:17 fail_read_on_bad_block verbose
+
+(The presence of "verbose" indicates normal logging.)
+
+"Why not...?"
+-------------
+
+scsi_debug has a "medium error" mode that can fail reads on one
+specified sector (sector 0x1234, hardcoded in the source code), but
+it uses RAM for the persistent storage, which drastically decreases
+the potential device size.
+
+dm-flakey fails all I/O from all block locations at a specified time
+frequency, and not a given point in time.
+
+When a bad sector occurs on a hard disk drive, reads to that sector
+are failed by the device, usually resulting in an error code of EIO
+("I/O error") or ENODATA ("No data available").  However, a write to
+the sector may succeed, and result in the sector becoming readable
+after the device controller no longer experiences errors reading the
+sector (or after a reallocation of the sector).  However, there may
+be bad sectors that occur on the device in the future, in a different,
+unpredictable location.
+
+This target seeks to provide a device that can exhibit the behavior
+of a bad sector at a known sector location, at a known time, based
+on a large storage device (at least tens of gigabytes, not occupying
+system memory).
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-init.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-init.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8464ee7c01b8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-init.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+Early creation of mapped devices
+====================================
+
+It is possible to configure a device-mapper device to act as the root device for
+your system in two ways.
+
+The first is to build an initial ramdisk which boots to a minimal userspace
+which configures the device, then pivot_root(8) in to it.
+
+The second is to create one or more device-mappers using the module parameter
+"dm-mod.create=" through the kernel boot command line argument.
+
+The format is specified as a string of data separated by commas and optionally
+semi-colons, where:
+ - a comma is used to separate fields like name, uuid, flags and table
+   (specifies one device)
+ - a semi-colon is used to separate devices.
+
+So the format will look like this:
+
+ dm-mod.create=<name>,<uuid>,<minor>,<flags>,<table>[,<table>+][;<name>,<uuid>,<minor>,<flags>,<table>[,<table>+]+]
+
+Where,
+	<name>		::= The device name.
+	<uuid>		::= xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx | ""
+	<minor>		::= The device minor number | ""
+	<flags>		::= "ro" | "rw"
+	<table>		::= <start_sector> <num_sectors> <target_type> <target_args>
+	<target_type>	::= "verity" | "linear" | ... (see list below)
+
+The dm line should be equivalent to the one used by the dmsetup tool with the
+--concise argument.
+
+Target types
+============
+
+Not all target types are available as there are serious risks in allowing
+activation of certain DM targets without first using userspace tools to check
+the validity of associated metadata.
+
+	"cache":		constrained, userspace should verify cache device
+	"crypt":		allowed
+	"delay":		allowed
+	"era":			constrained, userspace should verify metadata device
+	"flakey":		constrained, meant for test
+	"linear":		allowed
+	"log-writes":		constrained, userspace should verify metadata device
+	"mirror":		constrained, userspace should verify main/mirror device
+	"raid":			constrained, userspace should verify metadata device
+	"snapshot":		constrained, userspace should verify src/dst device
+	"snapshot-origin":	allowed
+	"snapshot-merge":	constrained, userspace should verify src/dst device
+	"striped":		allowed
+	"switch":		constrained, userspace should verify dev path
+	"thin":			constrained, requires dm target message from userspace
+	"thin-pool":		constrained, requires dm target message from userspace
+	"verity":		allowed
+	"writecache":		constrained, userspace should verify cache device
+	"zero":			constrained, not meant for rootfs
+
+If the target is not listed above, it is constrained by default (not tested).
+
+Examples
+========
+An example of booting to a linear array made up of user-mode linux block
+devices:
+
+  dm-mod.create="lroot,,,rw, 0 4096 linear 98:16 0, 4096 4096 linear 98:32 0" root=/dev/dm-0
+
+This will boot to a rw dm-linear target of 8192 sectors split across two block
+devices identified by their major:minor numbers.  After boot, udev will rename
+this target to /dev/mapper/lroot (depending on the rules). No uuid was assigned.
+
+An example of multiple device-mappers, with the dm-mod.create="..." contents is shown here
+split on multiple lines for readability:
+
+  vroot,,,ro,
+    0 1740800 verity 254:0 254:0 1740800 sha1
+      76e9be054b15884a9fa85973e9cb274c93afadb6
+      5b3549d54d6c7a3837b9b81ed72e49463a64c03680c47835bef94d768e5646fe;
+  vram,,,rw,
+    0 32768 linear 1:0 0,
+    32768 32768 linear 1:1 0
+
+Other examples (per target):
+
+"crypt":
+  dm-crypt,,8,ro,
+    0 1048576 crypt aes-xts-plain64
+    babebabebabebabebabebabebabebabebabebabebabebabebabebabebabebabe 0
+    /dev/sda 0 1 allow_discards
+
+"delay":
+  dm-delay,,4,ro,0 409600 delay /dev/sda1 0 500
+
+"linear":
+  dm-linear,,,rw,
+    0 32768 linear /dev/sda1 0,
+    32768 1024000 linear /dev/sda2 0,
+    1056768 204800 linear /dev/sda3 0,
+    1261568 512000 linear /dev/sda4 0
+
+"snapshot-origin":
+  dm-snap-orig,,4,ro,0 409600 snapshot-origin 8:2
+
+"striped":
+  dm-striped,,4,ro,0 1638400 striped 4 4096
+  /dev/sda1 0 /dev/sda2 0 /dev/sda3 0 /dev/sda4 0
+
+"verity":
+  dm-verity,,4,ro,
+    0 1638400 verity 1 8:1 8:2 4096 4096 204800 1 sha256
+    fb1a5a0f00deb908d8b53cb270858975e76cf64105d412ce764225d53b8f3cfd
+    51934789604d1b92399c52e7cb149d1b3a1b74bbbcb103b2a0aaacbed5c08584
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-integrity.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-integrity.txt
index 297251b0d2d5..d63d78ffeb73 100644
--- a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-integrity.txt
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-integrity.txt
@@ -21,6 +21,13 @@ mode it calculates and verifies the integrity tag internally. In this
 mode, the dm-integrity target can be used to detect silent data
 corruption on the disk or in the I/O path.
 
+There's an alternate mode of operation where dm-integrity uses bitmap
+instead of a journal. If a bit in the bitmap is 1, the corresponding
+region's data and integrity tags are not synchronized - if the machine
+crashes, the unsynchronized regions will be recalculated. The bitmap mode
+is faster than the journal mode, because we don't have to write the data
+twice, but it is also less reliable, because if data corruption happens
+when the machine crashes, it may not be detected.
 
 When loading the target for the first time, the kernel driver will format
 the device. But it will only format the device if the superblock contains
@@ -59,6 +66,10 @@ Target arguments:
 		either both data and tag or none of them are written. The
 		journaled mode degrades write throughput twice because the
 		data have to be written twice.
+	B - bitmap mode - data and metadata are written without any
+		synchronization, the driver maintains a bitmap of dirty
+		regions where data and metadata don't match. This mode can
+		only be used with internal hash.
 	R - recovery mode - in this mode, journal is not replayed,
 		checksums are not checked and writes to the device are not
 		allowed. This mode is useful for data recovery if the
@@ -79,6 +90,10 @@ interleave_sectors:number
 	a power of two. If the device is already formatted, the value from
 	the superblock is used.
 
+meta_device:device
+	Don't interleave the data and metadata on on device. Use a
+	separate device for metadata.
+
 buffer_sectors:number
 	The number of sectors in one buffer. The value is rounded down to
 	a power of two.
@@ -146,6 +161,15 @@ block_size:number
 	Supported values are 512, 1024, 2048 and 4096 bytes.  If not
 	specified the default block size is 512 bytes.
 
+sectors_per_bit:number
+	In the bitmap mode, this parameter specifies the number of
+	512-byte sectors that corresponds to one bitmap bit.
+
+bitmap_flush_interval:number
+	The bitmap flush interval in milliseconds. The metadata buffers
+	are synchronized when this interval expires.
+
+
 The journal mode (D/J), buffer_sectors, journal_watermark, commit_time can
 be changed when reloading the target (load an inactive table and swap the
 tables with suspend and resume). The other arguments should not be changed
@@ -167,7 +191,13 @@ The layout of the formatted block device:
 	  provides (i.e. the size of the device minus the size of all
 	  metadata and padding). The user of this target should not send
 	  bios that access data beyond the "provided data sectors" limit.
-	* flags - a flag is set if journal_mac is used
+	* flags
+	  SB_FLAG_HAVE_JOURNAL_MAC - a flag is set if journal_mac is used
+	  SB_FLAG_RECALCULATING - recalculating is in progress
+	  SB_FLAG_DIRTY_BITMAP - journal area contains the bitmap of dirty
+		blocks
+	* log2(sectors per block)
+	* a position where recalculating finished
 * journal
 	The journal is divided into sections, each section contains:
 	* metadata area (4kiB), it contains journal entries
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/Makefile b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/Makefile
index 50daa0b3b032..8a2774b5834b 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/Makefile
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/Makefile
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ DT_MK_SCHEMA ?= dt-mk-schema
 DT_MK_SCHEMA_FLAGS := $(if $(DT_SCHEMA_FILES), -u)
 
 quiet_cmd_chk_binding = CHKDT   $(patsubst $(srctree)/%,%,$<)
-      cmd_chk_binding = $(DT_DOC_CHECKER) $< ; \
+      cmd_chk_binding = $(DT_DOC_CHECKER) -u $(srctree)/$(src) $< ; \
                         $(DT_EXTRACT_EX) $< > $@
 
 $(obj)/%.example.dts: $(src)/%.yaml FORCE
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ DT_TMP_SCHEMA := processed-schema.yaml
 extra-y += $(DT_TMP_SCHEMA)
 
 quiet_cmd_mk_schema = SCHEMA  $@
-      cmd_mk_schema = $(DT_MK_SCHEMA) $(DT_MK_SCHEMA_FLAGS) -o $@ $(filter-out FORCE, $^)
+      cmd_mk_schema = $(DT_MK_SCHEMA) $(DT_MK_SCHEMA_FLAGS) -o $@ $(real-prereqs)
 
 DT_DOCS = $(shell \
 	cd $(srctree)/$(src) && \
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/altera/socfpga-system.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/altera/socfpga-system.txt
index f4d04a067282..82edbaaa3f85 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/altera/socfpga-system.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/altera/socfpga-system.txt
@@ -11,3 +11,15 @@ Example:
 		reg = <0xffd08000 0x1000>;
 		cpu1-start-addr = <0xffd080c4>;
 	};
+
+ARM64 - Stratix10
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "altr,sys-mgr-s10"
+- reg : Should contain 1 register range(address and length)
+        for system manager register.
+
+Example:
+	 sysmgr@ffd12000 {
+		compatible = "altr,sys-mgr-s10";
+		reg = <0xffd12000 0x228>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/amlogic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/amlogic.txt
index 8dbc259081e4..061f7b98a07f 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/amlogic.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/amlogic.txt
@@ -109,6 +109,8 @@ Board compatible values (alphabetically, grouped by SoC):
   - "amlogic,s400" (Meson axg a113d)
 
   - "amlogic,u200" (Meson g12a s905d2)
+  - "amediatech,x96-max" (Meson g12a s905x2)
+  - "seirobotics,sei510" (Meson g12a s905x2)
 
 Amlogic Meson Firmware registers Interface
 ------------------------------------------
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/arm-boards b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/arm-boards
index b6e810c2781a..abff8d834a6a 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/arm-boards
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/arm-boards
@@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ Example:
 		#size-cells = <0>;
 
 		A57_0: cpu@0 {
-			compatible = "arm,cortex-a57","arm,armv8";
+			compatible = "arm,cortex-a57";
 			reg = <0x0 0x0>;
 			device_type = "cpu";
 			enable-method = "psci";
@@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ Example:
 		.....
 
 		A53_0: cpu@100 {
-			compatible = "arm,cortex-a53","arm,armv8";
+			compatible = "arm,cortex-a53";
 			reg = <0x0 0x100>;
 			device_type = "cpu";
 			enable-method = "psci";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/armadeus.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/armadeus.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 9821283ff516..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/armadeus.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
-Armadeus i.MX Platforms Device Tree Bindings
------------------------------------------------
-
-APF51: i.MX51 based module.
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "armadeus,imx51-apf51", "fsl,imx51";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/atmel-at91.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/atmel-at91.txt
index 4bf1b4da7659..99dee23c74a4 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/atmel-at91.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/atmel-at91.txt
@@ -25,6 +25,7 @@ compatible: must be one of:
     o "atmel,at91sam9n12"
     o "atmel,at91sam9rl"
     o "atmel,at91sam9xe"
+    o "microchip,sam9x60"
  * "atmel,sama5" for SoCs using a Cortex-A5, shall be extended with the specific
    SoC family:
     o "atmel,sama5d2" shall be extended with the specific SoC compatible:
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/atmel-sysregs.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/atmel-sysregs.txt
index 14f319f694b7..9fbde401a090 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/atmel-sysregs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/atmel-sysregs.txt
@@ -21,7 +21,8 @@ Its subnodes can be:
 
 RSTC Reset Controller required properties:
 - compatible: Should be "atmel,<chip>-rstc".
-  <chip> can be "at91sam9260" or "at91sam9g45" or "sama5d3"
+  <chip> can be "at91sam9260", "at91sam9g45", "sama5d3" or "samx7"
+  it also can be "microchip,sam9x60-rstc"
 - reg: Should contain registers location and length
 - clocks: phandle to input clock.
 
@@ -83,7 +84,7 @@ SHDWC SAMA5D2-Compatible Shutdown Controller
 1) shdwc node
 
 required properties:
-- compatible: should be "atmel,sama5d2-shdwc".
+- compatible: should be "atmel,sama5d2-shdwc" or "microchip,sam9x60-shdwc".
 - reg: should contain registers location and length
 - clocks: phandle to input clock.
 - #address-cells: should be one. The cell is the wake-up input index.
@@ -95,6 +96,9 @@ optional properties:
   microseconds. It's usually a board-related property.
 - atmel,wakeup-rtc-timer: boolean to enable Real-Time Clock wake-up.
 
+optional microchip,sam9x60-shdwc properties:
+- atmel,wakeup-rtt-timer: boolean to enable Real-time Timer Wake-up.
+
 The node contains child nodes for each wake-up input that the platform uses.
 
 2) input nodes
@@ -147,6 +151,7 @@ required properties:
 - compatible: Should be "atmel,<chip>-sfr", "syscon" or
 	"atmel,<chip>-sfrbu", "syscon"
   <chip> can be "sama5d3", "sama5d4" or "sama5d2".
+  It also can be "microchip,sam9x60-sfr", "syscon".
 - reg: Should contain registers location and length
 
 	sfr@f0038000 {
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bcm/brcm,bcm2835.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bcm/brcm,bcm2835.txt
index 0dcc3ea5adff..245328f36580 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bcm/brcm,bcm2835.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bcm/brcm,bcm2835.txt
@@ -30,6 +30,10 @@ Raspberry Pi 2 Model B
 Required root node properties:
 compatible = "raspberrypi,2-model-b", "brcm,bcm2836";
 
+Raspberry Pi 3 Model A+
+Required root node properties:
+compatible = "raspberrypi,3-model-a-plus", "brcm,bcm2837";
+
 Raspberry Pi 3 Model B
 Required root node properties:
 compatible = "raspberrypi,3-model-b", "brcm,bcm2837";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bhf.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bhf.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 886b503caf9c..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bhf.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
-Beckhoff Automation Platforms Device Tree Bindings
---------------------------------------------------
-
-CX9020 Embedded PC
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "bhf,cx9020", "fsl,imx53";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bitmain.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bitmain.yaml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0efdb4ac028e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bitmain.yaml
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+%YAML 1.2
+---
+$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/arm/bitmain.yaml#
+$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml#
+
+title: Bitmain platform device tree bindings
+
+maintainers:
+  - Manivannan Sadhasivam <manivannan.sadhasivam@linaro.org>
+
+properties:
+  compatible:
+    items:
+      - enum:
+        - bitmain,sophon-edge
+      - const: bitmain,bm1880
+...
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/compulab-boards.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/compulab-boards.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 42a10285af9c..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/compulab-boards.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-CompuLab SB-SOM is a multi-module baseboard capable of carrying:
- - CM-T43
- - CM-T54
- - CM-QS600
- - CL-SOM-AM57x
- - CL-SOM-iMX7
-modules with minor modifications to the SB-SOM assembly.
-
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = should be "compulab,sb-som"
-
-Compulab CL-SOM-iMX7 is a miniature System-on-Module (SoM) based on
-Freescale i.MX7 ARM Cortex-A7 System-on-Chip.
-
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "compulab,cl-som-imx7", "fsl,imx7d";
-
-Compulab SBC-iMX7 is a single board computer based on the
-Freescale i.MX7 system-on-chip. SBC-iMX7 is implemented with
-the CL-SOM-iMX7 System-on-Module providing most of the functions,
-and SB-SOM-iMX7 carrier board providing additional peripheral
-functions and connectors.
-
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "compulab,sbc-imx7", "compulab,cl-som-imx7", "fsl,imx7d";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/coresight.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/coresight.txt
index f8aff65ab921..8a88ddebc1a2 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/coresight.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/coresight.txt
@@ -8,7 +8,8 @@ through the intermediate links connecting the source to the currently selected
 sink. Each CoreSight component device should use these properties to describe
 its hardware characteristcs.
 
-* Required properties for all components *except* non-configurable replicators:
+* Required properties for all components *except* non-configurable replicators
+  and non-configurable funnels:
 
 	* compatible: These have to be supplemented with "arm,primecell" as
 	  drivers are using the AMBA bus interface.  Possible values include:
@@ -24,8 +25,10 @@ its hardware characteristcs.
 		  discovered at boot time when the device is probed.
 			"arm,coresight-tmc", "arm,primecell";
 
-		- Trace Funnel:
-			"arm,coresight-funnel", "arm,primecell";
+		- Trace Programmable Funnel:
+			"arm,coresight-dynamic-funnel", "arm,primecell";
+			"arm,coresight-funnel", "arm,primecell"; (OBSOLETE. For
+				backward compatibility and will be removed)
 
 		- Embedded Trace Macrocell (version 3.x) and
 					Program Flow Trace Macrocell:
@@ -65,11 +68,17 @@ its hardware characteristcs.
 	  "stm-stimulus-base", each corresponding to the areas defined in "reg".
 
 * Required properties for devices that don't show up on the AMBA bus, such as
-  non-configurable replicators:
+  non-configurable replicators and non-configurable funnels:
 
 	* compatible: Currently supported value is (note the absence of the
 	  AMBA markee):
-		- "arm,coresight-replicator"
+		- Coresight Non-configurable Replicator:
+			"arm,coresight-static-replicator";
+			"arm,coresight-replicator"; (OBSOLETE. For backward
+				compatibility and will be removed)
+
+		- Coresight Non-configurable Funnel:
+			"arm,coresight-static-funnel";
 
 	* port or ports: see "Graph bindings for Coresight" below.
 
@@ -169,7 +178,7 @@ Example:
 		/* non-configurable replicators don't show up on the
 		 * AMBA bus.  As such no need to add "arm,primecell".
 		 */
-		compatible = "arm,coresight-replicator";
+		compatible = "arm,coresight-static-replicator";
 
 		out-ports {
 			#address-cells = <1>;
@@ -200,8 +209,45 @@ Example:
 		};
 	};
 
+	funnel {
+		/*
+		 * non-configurable funnel don't show up on the AMBA
+		 * bus.  As such no need to add "arm,primecell".
+		 */
+		compatible = "arm,coresight-static-funnel";
+		clocks = <&crg_ctrl HI3660_PCLK>;
+		clock-names = "apb_pclk";
+
+		out-ports {
+			port {
+				combo_funnel_out: endpoint {
+					remote-endpoint = <&top_funnel_in>;
+				};
+			};
+		};
+
+		in-ports {
+			#address-cells = <1>;
+			#size-cells = <0>;
+
+			port@0 {
+				reg = <0>;
+				combo_funnel_in0: endpoint {
+					remote-endpoint = <&cluster0_etf_out>;
+				};
+			};
+
+			port@1 {
+				reg = <1>;
+				combo_funnel_in1: endpoint {
+					remote-endpoint = <&cluster1_etf_out>;
+				};
+			};
+		};
+	};
+
 	funnel@20040000 {
-		compatible = "arm,coresight-funnel", "arm,primecell";
+		compatible = "arm,coresight-dynamic-funnel", "arm,primecell";
 		reg = <0 0x20040000 0 0x1000>;
 
 		clocks = <&oscclk6a>;
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cpu-capacity.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cpu-capacity.txt
index 96fa46cb133c..380e21c5fc7e 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cpu-capacity.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cpu-capacity.txt
@@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ cpus {
 	};
 
 	A57_0: cpu@0 {
-		compatible = "arm,cortex-a57","arm,armv8";
+		compatible = "arm,cortex-a57";
 		reg = <0x0 0x0>;
 		device_type = "cpu";
 		enable-method = "psci";
@@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ cpus {
 	};
 
 	A57_1: cpu@1 {
-		compatible = "arm,cortex-a57","arm,armv8";
+		compatible = "arm,cortex-a57";
 		reg = <0x0 0x1>;
 		device_type = "cpu";
 		enable-method = "psci";
@@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ cpus {
 	};
 
 	A53_0: cpu@100 {
-		compatible = "arm,cortex-a53","arm,armv8";
+		compatible = "arm,cortex-a53";
 		reg = <0x0 0x100>;
 		device_type = "cpu";
 		enable-method = "psci";
@@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ cpus {
 	};
 
 	A53_1: cpu@101 {
-		compatible = "arm,cortex-a53","arm,armv8";
+		compatible = "arm,cortex-a53";
 		reg = <0x0 0x101>;
 		device_type = "cpu";
 		enable-method = "psci";
@@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ cpus {
 	};
 
 	A53_2: cpu@102 {
-		compatible = "arm,cortex-a53","arm,armv8";
+		compatible = "arm,cortex-a53";
 		reg = <0x0 0x102>;
 		device_type = "cpu";
 		enable-method = "psci";
@@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ cpus {
 	};
 
 	A53_3: cpu@103 {
-		compatible = "arm,cortex-a53","arm,armv8";
+		compatible = "arm,cortex-a53";
 		reg = <0x0 0x103>;
 		device_type = "cpu";
 		enable-method = "psci";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cpus.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cpus.yaml
index 298c17b327c6..591bbd012d63 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cpus.yaml
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cpus.yaml
@@ -67,6 +67,7 @@ properties:
 
 patternProperties:
   '^cpu@[0-9a-f]+$':
+    type: object
     properties:
       device_type:
         const: cpu
@@ -228,6 +229,7 @@ patternProperties:
                 - renesas,r9a06g032-smp
                 - rockchip,rk3036-smp
                 - rockchip,rk3066-smp
+                - socionext,milbeaut-m10v-smp
                 - ste,dbx500-smp
 
       cpu-release-addr:
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/freescale/fsl,imx7ulp-sim.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/freescale/fsl,imx7ulp-sim.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7d0c7f002401
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/freescale/fsl,imx7ulp-sim.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+Freescale i.MX7ULP System Integration Module
+----------------------------------------------
+The system integration module (SIM) provides system control and chip configuration
+registers. In this module, chip revision information is located in JTAG ID register,
+and a set of registers have been made available in DGO domain for SW use, with the
+objective to maintain its value between system resets.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible:	Should be "fsl,imx7ulp-sim".
+- reg:		Specifies base physical address and size of the register sets.
+
+Example:
+sim: sim@410a3000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx7ulp-sim", "syscon";
+	reg = <0x410a3000 0x1000>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/freescale/fsl,scu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/freescale/fsl,scu.txt
index 27784b6edfed..5d7dbabbb784 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/freescale/fsl,scu.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/freescale/fsl,scu.txt
@@ -22,9 +22,11 @@ Required properties:
 -------------------
 - compatible:	should be "fsl,imx-scu".
 - mbox-names:	should include "tx0", "tx1", "tx2", "tx3",
-			       "rx0", "rx1", "rx2", "rx3".
-- mboxes:	List of phandle of 4 MU channels for tx and 4 MU channels
-		for rx. All 8 MU channels must be in the same MU instance.
+			       "rx0", "rx1", "rx2", "rx3";
+		include "gip3" if want to support general MU interrupt.
+- mboxes:	List of phandle of 4 MU channels for tx, 4 MU channels for
+		rx, and 1 optional MU channel for general interrupt.
+		All MU channels must be in the same MU instance.
 		Cross instances are not allowed. The MU instance can only
 		be one of LSIO MU0~M4 for imx8qxp and imx8qm. Users need
 		to make sure use the one which is not conflict with other
@@ -34,6 +36,7 @@ Required properties:
 		Channel 1 must be "tx1" or "rx1".
 		Channel 2 must be "tx2" or "rx2".
 		Channel 3 must be "tx3" or "rx3".
+		General interrupt rx channel must be "gip3".
 		e.g.
 		mboxes = <&lsio_mu1 0 0
 			  &lsio_mu1 0 1
@@ -42,10 +45,18 @@ Required properties:
 			  &lsio_mu1 1 0
 			  &lsio_mu1 1 1
 			  &lsio_mu1 1 2
-			  &lsio_mu1 1 3>;
+			  &lsio_mu1 1 3
+			  &lsio_mu1 3 3>;
 		See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mailbox/fsl,mu.txt
 		for detailed mailbox binding.
 
+Note: Each mu which supports general interrupt should have an alias correctly
+numbered in "aliases" node.
+e.g.
+aliases {
+	mu1 = &lsio_mu1;
+};
+
 i.MX SCU Client Device Node:
 ============================================================
 
@@ -58,7 +69,11 @@ This binding for the SCU power domain providers uses the generic power
 domain binding[2].
 
 Required properties:
-- compatible:		Should be "fsl,imx8qxp-scu-pd".
+- compatible:		Should be one of:
+			  "fsl,imx8qm-scu-pd",
+			  "fsl,imx8qxp-scu-pd"
+			followed by "fsl,scu-pd"
+
 - #power-domain-cells:	Must be 1. Contains the Resource ID used by
 			SCU commands.
 			See detailed Resource ID list from:
@@ -70,7 +85,10 @@ Clock bindings based on SCU Message Protocol
 This binding uses the common clock binding[1].
 
 Required properties:
-- compatible:		Should be "fsl,imx8qxp-clock".
+- compatible:		Should be one of:
+			  "fsl,imx8qm-clock"
+			  "fsl,imx8qxp-clock"
+			followed by "fsl,scu-clk"
 - #clock-cells:		Should be 1. Contains the Clock ID value.
 - clocks:		List of clock specifiers, must contain an entry for
 			each required entry in clock-names
@@ -117,6 +135,10 @@ Required properties:
 
 Example (imx8qxp):
 -------------
+aliases {
+	mu1 = &lsio_mu1;
+};
+
 lsio_mu1: mailbox@5d1c0000 {
 	...
 	#mbox-cells = <2>;
@@ -126,7 +148,8 @@ firmware {
 	scu {
 		compatible = "fsl,imx-scu";
 		mbox-names = "tx0", "tx1", "tx2", "tx3",
-			     "rx0", "rx1", "rx2", "rx3";
+			     "rx0", "rx1", "rx2", "rx3",
+			     "gip3";
 		mboxes = <&lsio_mu1 0 0
 			  &lsio_mu1 0 1
 			  &lsio_mu1 0 2
@@ -134,10 +157,11 @@ firmware {
 			  &lsio_mu1 1 0
 			  &lsio_mu1 1 1
 			  &lsio_mu1 1 2
-			  &lsio_mu1 1 3>;
+			  &lsio_mu1 1 3
+			  &lsio_mu1 3 3>;
 
 		clk: clk {
-			compatible = "fsl,imx8qxp-clk";
+			compatible = "fsl,imx8qxp-clk", "fsl,scu-clk";
 			#clock-cells = <1>;
 		};
 
@@ -154,7 +178,7 @@ firmware {
 		};
 
 		pd: imx8qx-pd {
-			compatible = "fsl,imx8qxp-scu-pd";
+			compatible = "fsl,imx8qxp-scu-pd", "fsl,scu-pd";
 			#power-domain-cells = <1>;
 		};
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 7fbc42484001..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,237 +0,0 @@
-Freescale i.MX Platforms Device Tree Bindings
------------------------------------------------
-
-i.MX23 Evaluation Kit
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,imx23-evk", "fsl,imx23";
-
-i.MX25 Product Development Kit
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,imx25-pdk", "fsl,imx25";
-
-i.MX27 Product Development Kit
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,imx27-pdk", "fsl,imx27";
-
-i.MX28 Evaluation Kit
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,imx28-evk", "fsl,imx28";
-
-i.MX51 Babbage Board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,imx51-babbage", "fsl,imx51";
-
-i.MX53 Automotive Reference Design Board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,imx53-ard", "fsl,imx53";
-
-i.MX53 Evaluation Kit
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,imx53-evk", "fsl,imx53";
-
-i.MX53 Quick Start Board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,imx53-qsb", "fsl,imx53";
-
-i.MX53 Smart Mobile Reference Design Board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,imx53-smd", "fsl,imx53";
-
-i.MX6 Quad Armadillo2 Board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,imx6q-arm2", "fsl,imx6q";
-
-i.MX6 Quad SABRE Lite Board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,imx6q-sabrelite", "fsl,imx6q";
-
-i.MX6 Quad SABRE Smart Device Board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,imx6q-sabresd", "fsl,imx6q";
-
-i.MX6 Quad SABRE Automotive Board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,imx6q-sabreauto", "fsl,imx6q";
-
-i.MX6SLL EVK board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,imx6sll-evk", "fsl,imx6sll";
-
-i.MX6 Quad Plus SABRE Smart Device Board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,imx6qp-sabresd", "fsl,imx6qp";
-
-i.MX6 Quad Plus SABRE Automotive Board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,imx6qp-sabreauto", "fsl,imx6qp";
-
-i.MX6 DualLite SABRE Smart Device Board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,imx6dl-sabresd", "fsl,imx6dl";
-
-i.MX6 DualLite/Solo SABRE Automotive Board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,imx6dl-sabreauto", "fsl,imx6dl";
-
-i.MX6 SoloLite EVK Board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,imx6sl-evk", "fsl,imx6sl";
-
-i.MX6 UltraLite 14x14 EVK Board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,imx6ul-14x14-evk", "fsl,imx6ul";
-
-i.MX6 UltraLiteLite 14x14 EVK Board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,imx6ull-14x14-evk", "fsl,imx6ull";
-
-i.MX6 ULZ 14x14 EVK Board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,imx6ulz-14x14-evk", "fsl,imx6ull", "fsl,imx6ulz";
-
-i.MX6 SoloX SDB Board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,imx6sx-sdb", "fsl,imx6sx";
-
-i.MX6 SoloX Sabre Auto Board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,imx6sx-sabreauto", "fsl,imx6sx";
-
-i.MX7 SabreSD Board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,imx7d-sdb", "fsl,imx7d";
-
-i.MX7ULP Evaluation Kit
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,imx7ulp-evk", "fsl,imx7ulp";
-
-Generic i.MX boards
--------------------
-
-No iomux setup is done for these boards, so this must have been configured
-by the bootloader for boards to work with the generic bindings.
-
-i.MX27 generic board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,imx27";
-
-i.MX51 generic board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,imx51";
-
-i.MX53 generic board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,imx53";
-
-i.MX6q generic board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,imx6q";
-
-i.MX7ULP generic board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,imx7ulp";
-
-Freescale Vybrid Platform Device Tree Bindings
-----------------------------------------------
-
-For the Vybrid SoC familiy all variants with DDR controller are supported,
-which is the VF5xx and VF6xx series. Out of historical reasons, in most
-places the kernel uses vf610 to refer to the whole familiy.
-The compatible string "fsl,vf610m4" is used for the secondary Cortex-M4
-core support.
-
-Required root node compatible property (one of them):
-    - compatible = "fsl,vf500";
-    - compatible = "fsl,vf510";
-    - compatible = "fsl,vf600";
-    - compatible = "fsl,vf610";
-    - compatible = "fsl,vf610m4";
-
-Freescale LS1021A Platform Device Tree Bindings
-------------------------------------------------
-
-Required root node compatible properties:
-  - compatible = "fsl,ls1021a";
-
-Freescale ARMv8 based Layerscape SoC family Device Tree Bindings
-----------------------------------------------------------------
-
-LS1012A SoC
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,ls1012a";
-
-LS1012A ARMv8 based RDB Board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,ls1012a-rdb", "fsl,ls1012a";
-
-LS1012A ARMv8 based FRDM Board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,ls1012a-frdm", "fsl,ls1012a";
-
-LS1012A ARMv8 based QDS Board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,ls1012a-qds", "fsl,ls1012a";
-
-LS1043A SoC
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,ls1043a";
-
-LS1043A ARMv8 based RDB Board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,ls1043a-rdb", "fsl,ls1043a";
-
-LS1043A ARMv8 based QDS Board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,ls1043a-qds", "fsl,ls1043a";
-
-LS1046A SoC
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,ls1046a";
-
-LS1046A ARMv8 based QDS Board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,ls1046a-qds", "fsl,ls1046a";
-
-LS1046A ARMv8 based RDB Board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,ls1046a-rdb", "fsl,ls1046a";
-
-LS1088A SoC
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,ls1088a";
-
-LS1088A ARMv8 based QDS Board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,ls1088a-qds", "fsl,ls1088a";
-
-LS1088A ARMv8 based RDB Board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,ls1088a-rdb", "fsl,ls1088a";
-
-LS2080A SoC
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,ls2080a";
-
-LS2080A ARMv8 based Simulator model
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,ls2080a-simu", "fsl,ls2080a";
-
-LS2080A ARMv8 based QDS Board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,ls2080a-qds", "fsl,ls2080a";
-
-LS2080A ARMv8 based RDB Board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,ls2080a-rdb", "fsl,ls2080a";
-
-LS2088A SoC
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,ls2088a";
-
-LS2088A ARMv8 based QDS Board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,ls2088a-qds", "fsl,ls2088a";
-
-LS2088A ARMv8 based RDB Board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "fsl,ls2088a-rdb", "fsl,ls2088a";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.yaml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..407138ebc0d0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.yaml
@@ -0,0 +1,268 @@
+# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+%YAML 1.2
+---
+$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/bindings/arm/fsl.yaml#
+$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml#
+
+title: Freescale i.MX Platforms Device Tree Bindings
+
+maintainers:
+  - Shawn Guo <shawnguo@kernel.org>
+  - Li Yang <leoyang.li@nxp.com>
+
+properties:
+  $nodename:
+    const: '/'
+  compatible:
+    oneOf:
+      - description: i.MX23 based Boards
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - fsl,imx23-evk
+              - olimex,imx23-olinuxino
+          - const: fsl,imx23
+
+      - description: i.MX25 Product Development Kit
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - fsl,imx25-pdk
+          - const: fsl,imx25
+
+      - description: i.MX27 Product Development Kit
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - fsl,imx27-pdk
+          - const: fsl,imx27
+
+      - description: i.MX28 based Boards
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - fsl,imx28-evk
+              - i2se,duckbill
+              - i2se,duckbill-2
+              - technologic,imx28-ts4600
+          - const: fsl,imx28
+      - description: i.MX28 Duckbill 2 based Boards
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - i2se,duckbill-2-485
+              - i2se,duckbill-2-enocean
+              - i2se,duckbill-2-spi
+          - const: i2se,duckbill-2
+          - const: fsl,imx28
+
+      - description: i.MX50 based Boards
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - fsl,imx50-evk
+              - kobo,aura
+          - const: fsl,imx50
+
+      - description: i.MX51 Babbage Board
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - armadeus,imx51-apf51
+              - fsl,imx51-babbage
+              - technologic,imx51-ts4800
+          - const: fsl,imx51
+
+      - description: i.MX53 based Boards
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - bhf,cx9020
+              - fsl,imx53-ard
+              - fsl,imx53-evk
+              - fsl,imx53-qsb
+              - fsl,imx53-smd
+              - menlo,m53menlo
+          - const: fsl,imx53
+
+      - description: i.MX6Q based Boards
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - fsl,imx6q-arm2
+              - fsl,imx6q-sabreauto
+              - fsl,imx6q-sabrelite
+              - fsl,imx6q-sabresd
+              - technologic,imx6q-ts4900
+              - technologic,imx6q-ts7970
+          - const: fsl,imx6q
+
+      - description: i.MX6QP based Boards
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - fsl,imx6qp-sabreauto      # i.MX6 Quad Plus SABRE Automotive Board
+              - fsl,imx6qp-sabresd        # i.MX6 Quad Plus SABRE Smart Device Board
+          - const: fsl,imx6qp
+
+      - description: i.MX6DL based Boards
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - eckelmann,imx6dl-ci4x10
+              - fsl,imx6dl-sabreauto      # i.MX6 DualLite/Solo SABRE Automotive Board
+              - fsl,imx6dl-sabresd        # i.MX6 DualLite SABRE Smart Device Board
+              - technologic,imx6dl-ts4900
+              - technologic,imx6dl-ts7970
+              - ysoft,imx6dl-yapp4-draco  # i.MX6 DualLite Y Soft IOTA Draco board
+              - ysoft,imx6dl-yapp4-hydra  # i.MX6 DualLite Y Soft IOTA Hydra board
+              - ysoft,imx6dl-yapp4-ursa   # i.MX6 Solo Y Soft IOTA Ursa board
+          - const: fsl,imx6dl
+
+      - description: i.MX6SL based Boards
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - fsl,imx6sl-evk            # i.MX6 SoloLite EVK Board
+          - const: fsl,imx6sl
+
+      - description: i.MX6SLL based Boards
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - fsl,imx6sll-evk
+          - const: fsl,imx6sll
+
+      - description: i.MX6SX based Boards
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - fsl,imx6sx-sabreauto      # i.MX6 SoloX Sabre Auto Board
+              - fsl,imx6sx-sdb            # i.MX6 SoloX SDB Board
+          - const: fsl,imx6sx
+
+      - description: i.MX6UL based Boards
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - fsl,imx6ul-14x14-evk      # i.MX6 UltraLite 14x14 EVK Board
+          - const: fsl,imx6ul
+
+      - description: i.MX6ULL based Boards
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - fsl,imx6ull-14x14-evk     # i.MX6 UltraLiteLite 14x14 EVK Board
+          - const: fsl,imx6ull
+
+      - description: i.MX6ULZ based Boards
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - fsl,imx6ulz-14x14-evk     # i.MX6 ULZ 14x14 EVK Board
+          - const: fsl,imx6ull # This seems odd. Should be last?
+          - const: fsl,imx6ulz
+
+      - description: i.MX7S based Boards
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - tq,imx7s-mba7             # i.MX7S TQ MBa7 with TQMa7S SoM
+          - const: fsl,imx7s
+
+      - description: i.MX7D based Boards
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - fsl,imx7d-sdb             # i.MX7 SabreSD Board
+              - tq,imx7d-mba7             # i.MX7D TQ MBa7 with TQMa7D SoM
+              - zii,imx7d-rpu2            # ZII RPU2 Board
+          - const: fsl,imx7d
+
+      - description:
+          Compulab SBC-iMX7 is a single board computer based on the
+          Freescale i.MX7 system-on-chip. SBC-iMX7 is implemented with
+          the CL-SOM-iMX7 System-on-Module providing most of the functions,
+          and SB-SOM-iMX7 carrier board providing additional peripheral
+          functions and connectors.
+        items:
+          - const: compulab,sbc-imx7
+          - const: compulab,cl-som-imx7
+          - const: fsl,imx7d
+
+      - description: i.MX8MM based Boards
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - fsl,imx8mm-evk            # i.MX8MM EVK Board
+          - const: fsl,imx8mm
+
+      - description: i.MX8QXP based Boards
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - fsl,imx8qxp-mek           # i.MX8QXP MEK Board
+          - const: fsl,imx8qxp
+
+      - description:
+          Freescale Vybrid Platform Device Tree Bindings
+
+          For the Vybrid SoC familiy all variants with DDR controller are supported,
+          which is the VF5xx and VF6xx series. Out of historical reasons, in most
+          places the kernel uses vf610 to refer to the whole familiy.
+          The compatible string "fsl,vf610m4" is used for the secondary Cortex-M4
+          core support.
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - fsl,vf500
+              - fsl,vf510
+              - fsl,vf600
+              - fsl,vf610
+              - fsl,vf610m4
+
+      - description: ZII's VF610 based Boards
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - zii,vf610cfu1      # ZII VF610 CFU1 Board
+              - zii,vf610dev-c     # ZII VF610 Development Board, Rev C
+              - zii,vf610dev-b     # ZII VF610 Development Board, Rev B
+              - zii,vf610scu4-aib  # ZII VF610 SCU4 AIB
+              - zii,vf610dtu       # ZII VF610 SSMB DTU Board
+              - zii,vf610spu3      # ZII VF610 SSMB SPU3 Board
+              - zii,vf610spb4      # ZII VF610 SPB4 Board
+          - const: zii,vf610dev
+          - const: fsl,vf610
+
+      - description: LS1012A based Boards
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - ebs-systart,oxalis
+              - fsl,ls1012a-rdb
+              - fsl,ls1012a-frdm
+              - fsl,ls1012a-qds
+          - const: fsl,ls1012a
+
+      - description: LS1021A based Boards
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - fsl,ls1021a-moxa-uc-8410a
+              - fsl,ls1021a-qds
+              - fsl,ls1021a-twr
+          - const: fsl,ls1021a
+
+      - description: LS1043A based Boards
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - fsl,ls1043a-rdb
+              - fsl,ls1043a-qds
+          - const: fsl,ls1043a
+
+      - description: LS1046A based Boards
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - fsl,ls1046a-qds
+              - fsl,ls1046a-rdb
+          - const: fsl,ls1046a
+
+      - description: LS1088A based Boards
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - fsl,ls1088a-qds
+              - fsl,ls1088a-rdb
+          - const: fsl,ls1088a
+
+      - description: LS2080A based Boards
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - fsl,ls2080a-simu
+              - fsl,ls2080a-qds
+              - fsl,ls2080a-rdb
+          - const: fsl,ls2080a
+
+      - description: LS2088A based Boards
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - fsl,ls2088a-qds
+              - fsl,ls2088a-rdb
+          - const: fsl,ls2088a
+
+...
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/i2se.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/i2se.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index dbd54a3aa07d..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/i2se.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-I2SE Device Tree Bindings
--------------------------
-
-Duckbill Board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "i2se,duckbill", "fsl,imx28";
-
-Duckbill 2 Board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "i2se,duckbill-2", "fsl,imx28";
-
-Duckbill 2 485 Board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "i2se,duckbill-2-485", "i2se,duckbill-2", "fsl,imx28";
-
-Duckbill 2 EnOcean Board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "i2se,duckbill-2-enocean", "i2se,duckbill-2", "fsl,imx28";
-
-Duckbill 2 SPI Board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "i2se,duckbill-2-spi", "i2se,duckbill-2", "fsl,imx28";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/intel-ixp4xx.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/intel-ixp4xx.yaml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f4f7451e5e8a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/intel-ixp4xx.yaml
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+%YAML 1.2
+---
+$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/arm/intel-ixp4xx.yaml#
+$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml#
+
+title: Intel IXP4xx Device Tree Bindings
+
+maintainers:
+  - Linus Walleij <linus.walleij@linaro.org>
+
+properties:
+  compatible:
+    oneOf:
+      - items:
+          - enum:
+              - linksys,nslu2
+          - const: intel,ixp42x
+      - items:
+          - enum:
+              - gateworks,gw2358
+          - const: intel,ixp43x
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/keystone/ti,sci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/keystone/ti,sci.txt
index b56a02c10ae6..6f0cd31c1520 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/keystone/ti,sci.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/keystone/ti,sci.txt
@@ -24,7 +24,8 @@ relationship between the TI-SCI parent node to the child node.
 
 Required properties:
 -------------------
-- compatible: should be "ti,k2g-sci"
+- compatible:	should be "ti,k2g-sci" for TI 66AK2G SoC
+		should be "ti,am654-sci" for for TI AM654 SoC
 - mbox-names:
 	"rx" - Mailbox corresponding to receive path
 	"tx" - Mailbox corresponding to transmit path
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/l2c2x0.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/l2c2x0.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index fbe6cb21f4cf..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/l2c2x0.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,114 +0,0 @@
-* ARM L2 Cache Controller
-
-ARM cores often have a separate L2C210/L2C220/L2C310 (also known as PL210/PL220/
-PL310 and variants) based level 2 cache controller. All these various implementations
-of the L2 cache controller have compatible programming models (Note 1).
-Some of the properties that are just prefixed "cache-*" are taken from section
-3.7.3 of the Devicetree Specification which can be found at:
-https://www.devicetree.org/specifications/
-
-The ARM L2 cache representation in the device tree should be done as follows:
-
-Required properties:
-
-- compatible : should be one of:
-  "arm,pl310-cache"
-  "arm,l220-cache"
-  "arm,l210-cache"
-  "bcm,bcm11351-a2-pl310-cache": DEPRECATED by "brcm,bcm11351-a2-pl310-cache"
-  "brcm,bcm11351-a2-pl310-cache": For Broadcom bcm11351 chipset where an
-     offset needs to be added to the address before passing down to the L2
-     cache controller
-  "marvell,aurora-system-cache": Marvell Controller designed to be
-     compatible with the ARM one, with system cache mode (meaning
-     maintenance operations on L1 are broadcasted to the L2 and L2
-     performs the same operation).
-  "marvell,aurora-outer-cache": Marvell Controller designed to be
-     compatible with the ARM one with outer cache mode.
-  "marvell,tauros3-cache": Marvell Tauros3 cache controller, compatible
-     with arm,pl310-cache controller.
-- cache-unified : Specifies the cache is a unified cache.
-- cache-level : Should be set to 2 for a level 2 cache.
-- reg : Physical base address and size of cache controller's memory mapped
-  registers.
-
-Optional properties:
-
-- arm,data-latency : Cycles of latency for Data RAM accesses. Specifies 3 cells of
-  read, write and setup latencies. Minimum valid values are 1. Controllers
-  without setup latency control should use a value of 0.
-- arm,tag-latency : Cycles of latency for Tag RAM accesses. Specifies 3 cells of
-  read, write and setup latencies. Controllers without setup latency control
-  should use 0. Controllers without separate read and write Tag RAM latency
-  values should only use the first cell.
-- arm,dirty-latency : Cycles of latency for Dirty RAMs. This is a single cell.
-- arm,filter-ranges : <start length> Starting address and length of window to
-  filter. Addresses in the filter window are directed to the M1 port. Other
-  addresses will go to the M0 port.
-- arm,io-coherent : indicates that the system is operating in an hardware
-  I/O coherent mode. Valid only when the arm,pl310-cache compatible
-  string is used.
-- interrupts : 1 combined interrupt.
-- cache-size : specifies the size in bytes of the cache
-- cache-sets : specifies the number of associativity sets of the cache
-- cache-block-size : specifies the size in bytes of a cache block
-- cache-line-size : specifies the size in bytes of a line in the cache,
-  if this is not specified, the line size is assumed to be equal to the
-  cache block size
-- cache-id-part: cache id part number to be used if it is not present
-  on hardware
-- wt-override: If present then L2 is forced to Write through mode
-- arm,double-linefill : Override double linefill enable setting. Enable if
-  non-zero, disable if zero.
-- arm,double-linefill-incr : Override double linefill on INCR read. Enable
-  if non-zero, disable if zero.
-- arm,double-linefill-wrap : Override double linefill on WRAP read. Enable
-  if non-zero, disable if zero.
-- arm,prefetch-drop : Override prefetch drop enable setting. Enable if non-zero,
-  disable if zero.
-- arm,prefetch-offset : Override prefetch offset value. Valid values are
-  0-7, 15, 23, and 31.
-- arm,shared-override : The default behavior of the L220 or PL310 cache
-  controllers with respect to the shareable attribute is to transform "normal
-  memory non-cacheable transactions" into "cacheable no allocate" (for reads)
-  or "write through no write allocate" (for writes).
-  On systems where this may cause DMA buffer corruption, this property must be
-  specified to indicate that such transforms are precluded.
-- arm,parity-enable : enable parity checking on the L2 cache (L220 or PL310).
-- arm,parity-disable : disable parity checking on the L2 cache (L220 or PL310).
-- arm,outer-sync-disable : disable the outer sync operation on the L2 cache.
-  Some core tiles, especially ARM PB11MPCore have a faulty L220 cache that
-  will randomly hang unless outer sync operations are disabled.
-- prefetch-data : Data prefetch. Value: <0> (forcibly disable), <1>
-  (forcibly enable), property absent (retain settings set by firmware)
-- prefetch-instr : Instruction prefetch. Value: <0> (forcibly disable),
-  <1> (forcibly enable), property absent (retain settings set by
-  firmware)
-- arm,dynamic-clock-gating : L2 dynamic clock gating. Value: <0> (forcibly
-  disable), <1> (forcibly enable), property absent (OS specific behavior,
-  preferably retain firmware settings)
-- arm,standby-mode: L2 standby mode enable. Value <0> (forcibly disable),
-  <1> (forcibly enable), property absent (OS specific behavior,
-  preferably retain firmware settings)
-- arm,early-bresp-disable : Disable the CA9 optimization Early BRESP (PL310)
-- arm,full-line-zero-disable : Disable the CA9 optimization Full line of zero
-  write (PL310)
-
-Example:
-
-L2: cache-controller {
-        compatible = "arm,pl310-cache";
-        reg = <0xfff12000 0x1000>;
-        arm,data-latency = <1 1 1>;
-        arm,tag-latency = <2 2 2>;
-        arm,filter-ranges = <0x80000000 0x8000000>;
-        cache-unified;
-        cache-level = <2>;
-	interrupts = <45>;
-};
-
-Note 1: The description in this document doesn't apply to integrated L2
-	cache controllers as found in e.g. Cortex-A15/A7/A57/A53. These
-	integrated L2 controllers are assumed to be all preconfigured by
-	early secure boot code. Thus no need to deal with their configuration
-	in the kernel at all.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/l2c2x0.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/l2c2x0.yaml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..bfc5c185561c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/l2c2x0.yaml
@@ -0,0 +1,248 @@
+# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+%YAML 1.2
+---
+$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/arm/l2c2x0.yaml#
+$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml#
+
+title: ARM L2 Cache Controller
+
+maintainers:
+  - Rob Herring <robh@kernel.org>
+
+description: |+
+  ARM cores often have a separate L2C210/L2C220/L2C310 (also known as PL210/
+  PL220/PL310 and variants) based level 2 cache controller. All these various
+  implementations of the L2 cache controller have compatible programming
+  models (Note 1). Some of the properties that are just prefixed "cache-*" are
+  taken from section 3.7.3 of the Devicetree Specification which can be found
+  at:
+  https://www.devicetree.org/specifications/
+
+  Note 1: The description in this document doesn't apply to integrated L2
+    cache controllers as found in e.g. Cortex-A15/A7/A57/A53. These
+    integrated L2 controllers are assumed to be all preconfigured by
+    early secure boot code. Thus no need to deal with their configuration
+    in the kernel at all.
+
+allOf:
+  - $ref: /schemas/cache-controller.yaml#
+
+properties:
+  compatible:
+    enum:
+      - arm,pl310-cache
+      - arm,l220-cache
+      - arm,l210-cache
+        # DEPRECATED by "brcm,bcm11351-a2-pl310-cache"
+      - bcm,bcm11351-a2-pl310-cache
+        # For Broadcom bcm11351 chipset where an
+        # offset needs to be added to the address before passing down to the L2
+        # cache controller
+      - brcm,bcm11351-a2-pl310-cache
+        # Marvell Controller designed to be
+        # compatible with the ARM one, with system cache mode (meaning
+        # maintenance operations on L1 are broadcasted to the L2 and L2
+        # performs the same operation).
+      - marvell,aurora-system-cache
+        # Marvell Controller designed to be
+        # compatible with the ARM one with outer cache mode.
+      - marvell,aurora-outer-cache
+        # Marvell Tauros3 cache controller, compatible
+        # with arm,pl310-cache controller.
+      - marvell,tauros3-cache
+
+  cache-level:
+    const: 2
+
+  cache-unified: true
+  cache-size: true
+  cache-sets: true
+  cache-block-size: true
+  cache-line-size: true
+
+  reg:
+    maxItems: 1
+
+  arm,data-latency:
+    description: Cycles of latency for Data RAM accesses. Specifies 3 cells of
+      read, write and setup latencies. Minimum valid values are 1. Controllers
+      without setup latency control should use a value of 0.
+    allOf:
+      - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32-array
+      - minItems: 2
+        maxItems: 3
+        items:
+          minimum: 0
+          maximum: 8
+
+  arm,tag-latency:
+    description: Cycles of latency for Tag RAM accesses. Specifies 3 cells of
+      read, write and setup latencies. Controllers without setup latency control
+      should use 0. Controllers without separate read and write Tag RAM latency
+      values should only use the first cell.
+    allOf:
+      - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32-array
+      - minItems: 1
+        maxItems: 3
+        items:
+          minimum: 0
+          maximum: 8
+
+  arm,dirty-latency:
+    description: Cycles of latency for Dirty RAMs. This is a single cell.
+    allOf:
+      - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32
+      - minimum: 1
+        maximum: 8
+
+  arm,filter-ranges:
+    description: <start length> Starting address and length of window to
+      filter. Addresses in the filter window are directed to the M1 port. Other
+      addresses will go to the M0 port.
+    allOf:
+      - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32-array
+      - items:
+          minItems: 2
+          maxItems: 2
+
+  arm,io-coherent:
+    description: indicates that the system is operating in an hardware
+      I/O coherent mode. Valid only when the arm,pl310-cache compatible
+      string is used.
+    type: boolean
+
+  interrupts:
+    # Either a single combined interrupt or up to 9 individual interrupts
+    minItems: 1
+    maxItems: 9
+
+  cache-id-part:
+    description: cache id part number to be used if it is not present
+      on hardware
+    $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32
+
+  wt-override:
+    description: If present then L2 is forced to Write through mode
+    type: boolean
+
+  arm,double-linefill:
+    description: Override double linefill enable setting. Enable if
+      non-zero, disable if zero.
+    allOf:
+      - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32
+      - enum: [ 0, 1 ]
+
+  arm,double-linefill-incr:
+    description: Override double linefill on INCR read. Enable
+      if non-zero, disable if zero.
+    allOf:
+      - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32
+      - enum: [ 0, 1 ]
+
+  arm,double-linefill-wrap:
+    description: Override double linefill on WRAP read. Enable
+      if non-zero, disable if zero.
+    allOf:
+      - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32
+      - enum: [ 0, 1 ]
+
+  arm,prefetch-drop:
+    description: Override prefetch drop enable setting. Enable if non-zero,
+      disable if zero.
+    allOf:
+      - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32
+      - enum: [ 0, 1 ]
+
+  arm,prefetch-offset:
+    description: Override prefetch offset value.
+    allOf:
+      - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32
+      - enum: [ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 15, 23, 31 ]
+
+  arm,shared-override:
+    description: The default behavior of the L220 or PL310 cache
+      controllers with respect to the shareable attribute is to transform "normal
+      memory non-cacheable transactions" into "cacheable no allocate" (for reads)
+      or "write through no write allocate" (for writes).
+      On systems where this may cause DMA buffer corruption, this property must
+      be specified to indicate that such transforms are precluded.
+    type: boolean
+
+  arm,parity-enable:
+    description: enable parity checking on the L2 cache (L220 or PL310).
+    type: boolean
+
+  arm,parity-disable:
+    description: disable parity checking on the L2 cache (L220 or PL310).
+    type: boolean
+
+  arm,outer-sync-disable:
+    description: disable the outer sync operation on the L2 cache.
+      Some core tiles, especially ARM PB11MPCore have a faulty L220 cache that
+      will randomly hang unless outer sync operations are disabled.
+    type: boolean
+
+  prefetch-data:
+    description: |
+      Data prefetch. Value: <0> (forcibly disable), <1>
+      (forcibly enable), property absent (retain settings set by firmware)
+    allOf:
+      - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32
+      - enum: [ 0, 1 ]
+
+  prefetch-instr:
+    description: |
+      Instruction prefetch. Value: <0> (forcibly disable),
+      <1> (forcibly enable), property absent (retain settings set by
+      firmware)
+    allOf:
+      - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32
+      - enum: [ 0, 1 ]
+
+  arm,dynamic-clock-gating:
+    description: |
+      L2 dynamic clock gating. Value: <0> (forcibly
+      disable), <1> (forcibly enable), property absent (OS specific behavior,
+      preferably retain firmware settings)
+    allOf:
+      - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32
+      - enum: [ 0, 1 ]
+
+  arm,standby-mode:
+    description: L2 standby mode enable. Value <0> (forcibly disable),
+      <1> (forcibly enable), property absent (OS specific behavior,
+      preferably retain firmware settings)
+    allOf:
+      - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32
+      - enum: [ 0, 1 ]
+
+  arm,early-bresp-disable:
+    description: Disable the CA9 optimization Early BRESP (PL310)
+    type: boolean
+
+  arm,full-line-zero-disable:
+    description: Disable the CA9 optimization Full line of zero
+      write (PL310)
+    type: boolean
+
+required:
+  - compatible
+  - cache-unified
+  - reg
+
+additionalProperties: false
+
+examples:
+  - |
+    cache-controller@fff12000 {
+        compatible = "arm,pl310-cache";
+        reg = <0xfff12000 0x1000>;
+        arm,data-latency = <1 1 1>;
+        arm,tag-latency = <2 2 2>;
+        arm,filter-ranges = <0x80000000 0x8000000>;
+        cache-unified;
+        cache-level = <2>;
+        interrupts = <45>;
+    };
+
+...
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek.txt
index 8f260e5cfd16..56ac7896d6d8 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek.txt
@@ -15,11 +15,12 @@ compatible: Must contain one of
    "mediatek,mt6795"
    "mediatek,mt6797"
    "mediatek,mt7622"
-   "mediatek,mt7623" which is referred to MT7623N SoC
-   "mediatek,mt7623a"
+   "mediatek,mt7623"
+   "mediatek,mt7629"
    "mediatek,mt8127"
    "mediatek,mt8135"
    "mediatek,mt8173"
+   "mediatek,mt8183"
 
 
 Supported boards:
@@ -57,6 +58,9 @@ Supported boards:
 - Reference board variant 1 for MT7622:
     Required root node properties:
       - compatible = "mediatek,mt7622-rfb1", "mediatek,mt7622";
+- Bananapi BPI-R64 for MT7622:
+    Required root node properties:
+      - compatible = "bananapi,bpi-r64", "mediatek,mt7622";
 - Reference board for MT7623a with eMMC:
     Required root node properties:
       - compatible = "mediatek,mt7623a-rfb-emmc", "mediatek,mt7623";
@@ -68,6 +72,9 @@ Supported boards:
       - compatible = "mediatek,mt7623n-rfb-emmc", "mediatek,mt7623";
 - Bananapi BPI-R2 board:
       - compatible = "bananapi,bpi-r2", "mediatek,mt7623";
+- Reference board for MT7629:
+    Required root node properties:
+      - compatible = "mediatek,mt7629-rfb", "mediatek,mt7629";
 - MTK mt8127 tablet moose EVB:
     Required root node properties:
       - compatible = "mediatek,mt8127-moose", "mediatek,mt8127";
@@ -77,3 +84,6 @@ Supported boards:
 - MTK mt8173 tablet EVB:
     Required root node properties:
       - compatible = "mediatek,mt8173-evb", "mediatek,mt8173";
+- Evaluation board for MT8183:
+    Required root node properties:
+      - compatible = "mediatek,mt8183-evb", "mediatek,mt8183";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,apmixedsys.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,apmixedsys.txt
index de4075413d91..161e63a6c254 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,apmixedsys.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,apmixedsys.txt
@@ -14,6 +14,8 @@ Required Properties:
 	- "mediatek,mt7629-apmixedsys"
 	- "mediatek,mt8135-apmixedsys"
 	- "mediatek,mt8173-apmixedsys"
+	- "mediatek,mt8183-apmixedsys", "syscon"
+	- "mediatek,mt8516-apmixedsys"
 - #clock-cells: Must be 1
 
 The apmixedsys controller uses the common clk binding from
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,audsys.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,audsys.txt
index d1606b2c3e63..f3cef1a6d95c 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,audsys.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,audsys.txt
@@ -9,6 +9,7 @@ Required Properties:
 	- "mediatek,mt2701-audsys", "syscon"
 	- "mediatek,mt7622-audsys", "syscon"
 	- "mediatek,mt7623-audsys", "mediatek,mt2701-audsys", "syscon"
+	- "mediatek,mt8183-audiosys", "syscon"
 - #clock-cells: Must be 1
 
 The AUDSYS controller uses the common clk binding from
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,camsys.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,camsys.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d8930f64aa98
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,camsys.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+MediaTek CAMSYS controller
+============================
+
+The MediaTek camsys controller provides various clocks to the system.
+
+Required Properties:
+
+- compatible: Should be one of:
+	- "mediatek,mt8183-camsys", "syscon"
+- #clock-cells: Must be 1
+
+The camsys controller uses the common clk binding from
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt
+The available clocks are defined in dt-bindings/clock/mt*-clk.h.
+
+Example:
+
+camsys: camsys@1a000000  {
+	compatible = "mediatek,mt8183-camsys", "syscon";
+	reg = <0 0x1a000000  0 0x1000>;
+	#clock-cells = <1>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,imgsys.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,imgsys.txt
index 3f99672163e3..e3bc4a1e7a6e 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,imgsys.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,imgsys.txt
@@ -11,6 +11,7 @@ Required Properties:
 	- "mediatek,mt6797-imgsys", "syscon"
 	- "mediatek,mt7623-imgsys", "mediatek,mt2701-imgsys", "syscon"
 	- "mediatek,mt8173-imgsys", "syscon"
+	- "mediatek,mt8183-imgsys", "syscon"
 - #clock-cells: Must be 1
 
 The imgsys controller uses the common clk binding from
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,infracfg.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,infracfg.txt
index 417bd83d1378..a90913988d7e 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,infracfg.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,infracfg.txt
@@ -15,6 +15,8 @@ Required Properties:
 	- "mediatek,mt7629-infracfg", "syscon"
 	- "mediatek,mt8135-infracfg", "syscon"
 	- "mediatek,mt8173-infracfg", "syscon"
+	- "mediatek,mt8183-infracfg", "syscon"
+	- "mediatek,mt8516-infracfg", "syscon"
 - #clock-cells: Must be 1
 - #reset-cells: Must be 1
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,ipu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,ipu.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..aabc8c5c8ed2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,ipu.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+Mediatek IPU controller
+============================
+
+The Mediatek ipu controller provides various clocks to the system.
+
+Required Properties:
+
+- compatible: Should be one of:
+	- "mediatek,mt8183-ipu_conn", "syscon"
+	- "mediatek,mt8183-ipu_adl", "syscon"
+	- "mediatek,mt8183-ipu_core0", "syscon"
+	- "mediatek,mt8183-ipu_core1", "syscon"
+- #clock-cells: Must be 1
+
+The ipu controller uses the common clk binding from
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt
+The available clocks are defined in dt-bindings/clock/mt*-clk.h.
+
+Example:
+
+ipu_conn: syscon@19000000 {
+	compatible = "mediatek,mt8183-ipu_conn", "syscon";
+	reg = <0 0x19000000 0 0x1000>;
+	#clock-cells = <1>;
+};
+
+ipu_adl: syscon@19010000 {
+	compatible = "mediatek,mt8183-ipu_adl", "syscon";
+	reg = <0 0x19010000 0 0x1000>;
+	#clock-cells = <1>;
+};
+
+ipu_core0: syscon@19180000 {
+	compatible = "mediatek,mt8183-ipu_core0", "syscon";
+	reg = <0 0x19180000 0 0x1000>;
+	#clock-cells = <1>;
+};
+
+ipu_core1: syscon@19280000 {
+	compatible = "mediatek,mt8183-ipu_core1", "syscon";
+	reg = <0 0x19280000 0 0x1000>;
+	#clock-cells = <1>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,mcucfg.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,mcucfg.txt
index b8fb03f3613e..2b882b7ca72e 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,mcucfg.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,mcucfg.txt
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ Required Properties:
 
 - compatible: Should be one of:
 	- "mediatek,mt2712-mcucfg", "syscon"
+	- "mediatek,mt8183-mcucfg", "syscon"
 - #clock-cells: Must be 1
 
 The mcucfg controller uses the common clk binding from
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,mfgcfg.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,mfgcfg.txt
index 859e67b416d5..72787e7dd227 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,mfgcfg.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,mfgcfg.txt
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ Required Properties:
 
 - compatible: Should be one of:
 	- "mediatek,mt2712-mfgcfg", "syscon"
+	- "mediatek,mt8183-mfgcfg", "syscon"
 - #clock-cells: Must be 1
 
 The mfgcfg controller uses the common clk binding from
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,mmsys.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,mmsys.txt
index 15d977afad31..545eab717c96 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,mmsys.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,mmsys.txt
@@ -11,6 +11,7 @@ Required Properties:
 	- "mediatek,mt6797-mmsys", "syscon"
 	- "mediatek,mt7623-mmsys", "mediatek,mt2701-mmsys", "syscon"
 	- "mediatek,mt8173-mmsys", "syscon"
+	- "mediatek,mt8183-mmsys", "syscon"
 - #clock-cells: Must be 1
 
 The mmsys controller uses the common clk binding from
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,topckgen.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,topckgen.txt
index d160c2b4b6fe..a023b8338960 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,topckgen.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,topckgen.txt
@@ -14,6 +14,8 @@ Required Properties:
 	- "mediatek,mt7629-topckgen"
 	- "mediatek,mt8135-topckgen"
 	- "mediatek,mt8173-topckgen"
+	- "mediatek,mt8183-topckgen", "syscon"
+	- "mediatek,mt8516-topckgen"
 - #clock-cells: Must be 1
 
 The topckgen controller uses the common clk binding from
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,vdecsys.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,vdecsys.txt
index 3212afc753c8..57176bb8dbb5 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,vdecsys.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,vdecsys.txt
@@ -11,6 +11,7 @@ Required Properties:
 	- "mediatek,mt6797-vdecsys", "syscon"
 	- "mediatek,mt7623-vdecsys", "mediatek,mt2701-vdecsys", "syscon"
 	- "mediatek,mt8173-vdecsys", "syscon"
+	- "mediatek,mt8183-vdecsys", "syscon"
 - #clock-cells: Must be 1
 
 The vdecsys controller uses the common clk binding from
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,vencsys.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,vencsys.txt
index 851545357e94..c9faa6269087 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,vencsys.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,vencsys.txt
@@ -9,6 +9,7 @@ Required Properties:
 	- "mediatek,mt2712-vencsys", "syscon"
 	- "mediatek,mt6797-vencsys", "syscon"
 	- "mediatek,mt8173-vencsys", "syscon"
+	- "mediatek,mt8183-vencsys", "syscon"
 - #clock-cells: Must be 1
 
 The vencsys controller uses the common clk binding from
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/olimex.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/olimex.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index d726aeca56be..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/olimex.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-Olimex Device Tree Bindings
----------------------------
-
-SAM9-L9260 Board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "olimex,sam9-l9260", "atmel,at91sam9260";
-
-i.MX23 Olinuxino Low Cost Board
-Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "olimex,imx23-olinuxino", "fsl,imx23";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/crossbar.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/crossbar.txt
index 4cd5d873fc3a..a43e4c7aba3d 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/crossbar.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/crossbar.txt
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ Examples:
 Consumer:
 ========
 See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt and
-Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/arm,gic.txt for
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/arm,gic.yaml for
 further details.
 
 An interrupt consumer on an SoC using crossbar will use:
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/omap.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/omap.txt
index 2ecc712bf707..1c1e48fd94b5 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/omap.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/omap.txt
@@ -92,6 +92,9 @@ SoCs:
 - DRA718
   compatible = "ti,dra718", "ti,dra722", "ti,dra72", "ti,dra7"
 
+- AM5748
+  compatible = "ti,am5748", "ti,dra762", "ti,dra7"
+
 - AM5728
   compatible = "ti,am5728", "ti,dra742", "ti,dra74", "ti,dra7"
 
@@ -184,6 +187,9 @@ Boards:
 - AM57XX SBC-AM57x
   compatible = "compulab,sbc-am57x", "compulab,cl-som-am57x", "ti,am5728", "ti,dra742", "ti,dra74", "ti,dra7"
 
+- AM5748 IDK
+  compatible = "ti,am5748-idk", "ti,am5748", "ti,dra762", "ti,dra7";
+
 - AM5728 IDK
   compatible = "ti,am5728-idk", "ti,am5728", "ti,dra742", "ti,dra74", "ti,dra7"
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/pmu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/pmu.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 13611a8199bb..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/pmu.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,70 +0,0 @@
-* ARM Performance Monitor Units
-
-ARM cores often have a PMU for counting cpu and cache events like cache misses
-and hits. The interface to the PMU is part of the ARM ARM. The ARM PMU
-representation in the device tree should be done as under:-
-
-Required properties:
-
-- compatible : should be one of
-	"apm,potenza-pmu"
-	"arm,armv8-pmuv3"
-	"arm,cortex-a73-pmu"
-	"arm,cortex-a72-pmu"
-	"arm,cortex-a57-pmu"
-	"arm,cortex-a53-pmu"
-	"arm,cortex-a35-pmu"
-	"arm,cortex-a17-pmu"
-	"arm,cortex-a15-pmu"
-	"arm,cortex-a12-pmu"
-	"arm,cortex-a9-pmu"
-	"arm,cortex-a8-pmu"
-	"arm,cortex-a7-pmu"
-	"arm,cortex-a5-pmu"
-	"arm,arm11mpcore-pmu"
-	"arm,arm1176-pmu"
-	"arm,arm1136-pmu"
-	"brcm,vulcan-pmu"
-	"cavium,thunder-pmu"
-	"qcom,scorpion-pmu"
-	"qcom,scorpion-mp-pmu"
-	"qcom,krait-pmu"
-- interrupts : 1 combined interrupt or 1 per core. If the interrupt is a per-cpu
-               interrupt (PPI) then 1 interrupt should be specified.
-
-Optional properties:
-
-- interrupt-affinity : When using SPIs, specifies a list of phandles to CPU
-                       nodes corresponding directly to the affinity of
-		       the SPIs listed in the interrupts property.
-
-                       When using a PPI, specifies a list of phandles to CPU
-		       nodes corresponding to the set of CPUs which have
-		       a PMU of this type signalling the PPI listed in the
-		       interrupts property, unless this is already specified
-		       by the PPI interrupt specifier itself (in which case
-		       the interrupt-affinity property shouldn't be present).
-
-                       This property should be present when there is more than
-		       a single SPI.
-
-
-- qcom,no-pc-write : Indicates that this PMU doesn't support the 0xc and 0xd
-                     events.
-
-- secure-reg-access : Indicates that the ARMv7 Secure Debug Enable Register
-		      (SDER) is accessible. This will cause the driver to do
-		      any setup required that is only possible in ARMv7 secure
-		      state. If not present the ARMv7 SDER will not be touched,
-		      which means the PMU may fail to operate unless external
-		      code (bootloader or security monitor) has performed the
-		      appropriate initialisation. Note that this property is
-		      not valid for non-ARMv7 CPUs or ARMv7 CPUs booting Linux
-		      in Non-secure state.
-
-Example:
-
-pmu {
-        compatible = "arm,cortex-a9-pmu";
-        interrupts = <100 101>;
-};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/pmu.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/pmu.yaml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..52ae094ce330
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/pmu.yaml
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+%YAML 1.2
+---
+$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/arm/pmu.yaml#
+$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml#
+
+title: ARM Performance Monitor Units
+
+maintainers:
+  - Mark Rutland <mark.rutland@arm.com>
+  - Will Deacon <will.deacon@arm.com>
+
+description: |+
+  ARM cores often have a PMU for counting cpu and cache events like cache misses
+  and hits. The interface to the PMU is part of the ARM ARM. The ARM PMU
+  representation in the device tree should be done as under:-
+
+properties:
+  compatible:
+    items:
+      - enum:
+          - apm,potenza-pmu
+          - arm,armv8-pmuv3
+          - arm,cortex-a73-pmu
+          - arm,cortex-a72-pmu
+          - arm,cortex-a57-pmu
+          - arm,cortex-a53-pmu
+          - arm,cortex-a35-pmu
+          - arm,cortex-a17-pmu
+          - arm,cortex-a15-pmu
+          - arm,cortex-a12-pmu
+          - arm,cortex-a9-pmu
+          - arm,cortex-a8-pmu
+          - arm,cortex-a7-pmu
+          - arm,cortex-a5-pmu
+          - arm,arm11mpcore-pmu
+          - arm,arm1176-pmu
+          - arm,arm1136-pmu
+          - brcm,vulcan-pmu
+          - cavium,thunder-pmu
+          - qcom,scorpion-pmu
+          - qcom,scorpion-mp-pmu
+          - qcom,krait-pmu
+
+  interrupts:
+    # Don't know how many CPUs, so no constraints to specify
+    description: 1 per-cpu interrupt (PPI) or 1 interrupt per core.
+
+  interrupt-affinity:
+    $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/phandle-array
+    description:
+      When using SPIs, specifies a list of phandles to CPU
+      nodes corresponding directly to the affinity of
+      the SPIs listed in the interrupts property.
+
+      When using a PPI, specifies a list of phandles to CPU
+      nodes corresponding to the set of CPUs which have
+      a PMU of this type signalling the PPI listed in the
+      interrupts property, unless this is already specified
+      by the PPI interrupt specifier itself (in which case
+      the interrupt-affinity property shouldn't be present).
+
+      This property should be present when there is more than
+      a single SPI.
+
+  qcom,no-pc-write:
+    type: boolean
+    description:
+      Indicates that this PMU doesn't support the 0xc and 0xd events.
+
+  secure-reg-access:
+    type: boolean
+    description:
+      Indicates that the ARMv7 Secure Debug Enable Register
+      (SDER) is accessible. This will cause the driver to do
+      any setup required that is only possible in ARMv7 secure
+      state. If not present the ARMv7 SDER will not be touched,
+      which means the PMU may fail to operate unless external
+      code (bootloader or security monitor) has performed the
+      appropriate initialisation. Note that this property is
+      not valid for non-ARMv7 CPUs or ARMv7 CPUs booting Linux
+      in Non-secure state.
+
+required:
+  - compatible
+
+...
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/renesas.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/renesas.yaml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..19f379863d50
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/renesas.yaml
@@ -0,0 +1,238 @@
+# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+%YAML 1.2
+---
+$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/arm/shmobile.yaml#
+$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml#
+
+title: Renesas SH-Mobile, R-Mobile, and R-Car Platform Device Tree Bindings
+
+maintainers:
+  - Geert Uytterhoeven <geert+renesas@glider.be>
+
+properties:
+  $nodename:
+    const: '/'
+  compatible:
+    oneOf:
+      - description: Emma Mobile EV2
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - renesas,kzm9d # Kyoto Microcomputer Co. KZM-A9-Dual
+          - const: renesas,emev2
+
+      - description: RZ/A1H (R7S72100)
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - renesas,genmai # Genmai (RTK772100BC00000BR)
+              - renesas,gr-peach # GR-Peach (X28A-M01-E/F)
+              - renesas,rskrza1 # RSKRZA1 (YR0K77210C000BE)
+          - const: renesas,r7s72100
+
+      - description: RZ/A2 (R7S9210)
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - renesas,rza2mevb # RZ/A2M Eval Board (RTK7921053S00000BE)
+          - const: renesas,r7s9210
+
+      - description: SH-Mobile AG5 (R8A73A00/SH73A0)
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - renesas,kzm9g # Kyoto Microcomputer Co. KZM-A9-GT
+          - const: renesas,sh73a0
+
+      - description: R-Mobile APE6 (R8A73A40)
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - renesas,ape6evm
+          - const: renesas,r8a73a4
+
+      - description: R-Mobile A1 (R8A77400)
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - renesas,armadillo800eva # Atmark Techno Armadillo-800 EVA
+          - const: renesas,r8a7740
+
+      - description: RZ/G1H (R8A77420)
+        items:
+          - const: renesas,r8a7742
+
+      - description: RZ/G1M (R8A77430)
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              # iWave Systems RZ/G1M Qseven Development Platform (iW-RainboW-G20D-Qseven)
+              - iwave,g20d
+          - const: iwave,g20m
+          - const: renesas,r8a7743
+
+      - items:
+          - enum:
+              # iWave Systems RZ/G1M Qseven System On Module (iW-RainboW-G20M-Qseven)
+              - iwave,g20m
+              - renesas,sk-rzg1m # SK-RZG1M (YR8A77430S000BE)
+          - const: renesas,r8a7743
+
+      - description: RZ/G1N (R8A77440)
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              # iWave Systems RZ/G1N Qseven Development Platform (iW-RainboW-G20D-Qseven)
+              - iwave,g20d
+          - const: iwave,g20m
+          - const: renesas,r8a7744
+
+      - items:
+          - enum:
+              # iWave Systems RZ/G1N Qseven System On Module (iW-RainboW-G20M-Qseven)
+              - iwave,g20m
+          - const: renesas,r8a7744
+
+      - description: RZ/G1E (R8A77450)
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - iwave,g22m # iWave Systems RZ/G1E SODIMM System On Module (iW-RainboW-G22M-SM)
+              - renesas,sk-rzg1e # SK-RZG1E (YR8A77450S000BE)
+          - const: renesas,r8a7745
+
+      - description: iWave Systems RZ/G1E SODIMM SOM Development Platform (iW-RainboW-G22D)
+        items:
+          - const: iwave,g22d
+          - const: iwave,g22m
+          - const: renesas,r8a7745
+
+      - description: RZ/G1C (R8A77470)
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - iwave,g23s #iWave Systems RZ/G1C Single Board Computer (iW-RainboW-G23S)
+          - const: renesas,r8a77470
+
+      - description: RZ/G2M (R8A774A1)
+        items:
+          - const: renesas,r8a774a1
+
+      - description: RZ/G2E (R8A774C0)
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - si-linux,cat874 # Silicon Linux RZ/G2E 96board platform (CAT874)
+          - const: renesas,r8a774c0
+
+      - items:
+          - enum:
+              - si-linux,cat875 # Silicon Linux sub board for CAT874 (CAT875)
+          - const: si-linux,cat874
+          - const: renesas,r8a774c0
+
+      - description: R-Car M1A (R8A77781)
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - renesas,bockw
+          - const: renesas,r8a7778
+
+      - description: R-Car H1 (R8A77790)
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - renesas,marzen # Marzen (R0P7779A00010S)
+          - const: renesas,r8a7779
+
+      - description: R-Car H2 (R8A77900)
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - renesas,lager # Lager (RTP0RC7790SEB00010S)
+              - renesas,stout # Stout (ADAS Starterkit, Y-R-CAR-ADAS-SKH2-BOARD)
+          - const: renesas,r8a7790
+
+      - description: R-Car M2-W (R8A77910)
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - renesas,henninger
+              - renesas,koelsch # Koelsch (RTP0RC7791SEB00010S)
+              - renesas,porter # Porter (M2-LCDP)
+          - const: renesas,r8a7791
+
+      - description: R-Car V2H (R8A77920)
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - renesas,blanche # Blanche (RTP0RC7792SEB00010S)
+              - renesas,wheat # Wheat (RTP0RC7792ASKB0000JE)
+          - const: renesas,r8a7792
+
+      - description: R-Car M2-N (R8A77930)
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - renesas,gose # Gose (RTP0RC7793SEB00010S)
+          - const: renesas,r8a7793
+
+      - description: R-Car E2 (R8A77940)
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - renesas,alt # Alt (RTP0RC7794SEB00010S)
+              - renesas,silk # SILK (RTP0RC7794LCB00011S)
+          - const: renesas,r8a7794
+
+      - description: R-Car H3 (R8A77950)
+        items:
+          - enum:
+                # H3ULCB (R-Car Starter Kit Premier, RTP0RC7795SKBX0010SA00 (H3 ES1.1))
+                # H3ULCB (R-Car Starter Kit Premier, RTP0RC77951SKBX010SA00 (H3 ES2.0))
+              - renesas,h3ulcb
+              - renesas,salvator-x # Salvator-X (RTP0RC7795SIPB0010S)
+              - renesas,salvator-xs # Salvator-XS (Salvator-X 2nd version, RTP0RC7795SIPB0012S)
+          - const: renesas,r8a7795
+
+      - description: R-Car M3-W (R8A77960)
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - renesas,m3ulcb # M3ULCB (R-Car Starter Kit Pro, RTP0RC7796SKBX0010SA09 (M3 ES1.0))
+              - renesas,salvator-x # Salvator-X (RTP0RC7796SIPB0011S)
+              - renesas,salvator-xs # Salvator-XS (Salvator-X 2nd version, RTP0RC7796SIPB0012S)
+          - const: renesas,r8a7796
+
+      - description: Kingfisher (SBEV-RCAR-KF-M03)
+        items:
+          - const: shimafuji,kingfisher
+          - enum:
+              - renesas,h3ulcb
+              - renesas,m3ulcb
+          - enum:
+              - renesas,r8a7795
+              - renesas,r8a7796
+
+      - description: R-Car M3-N (R8A77965)
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - renesas,m3nulcb # M3NULCB (R-Car Starter Kit Pro, RTP0RC77965SKBX010SA00 (M3-N ES1.1))
+              - renesas,salvator-x # Salvator-X (RTP0RC7796SIPB0011S (M3-N))
+              - renesas,salvator-xs # Salvator-XS (Salvator-X 2nd version, RTP0RC77965SIPB012S)
+          - const: renesas,r8a77965
+
+      - description: R-Car V3M (R8A77970)
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - renesas,eagle # Eagle (RTP0RC77970SEB0010S)
+              - renesas,v3msk # V3MSK (Y-ASK-RCAR-V3M-WS10)
+          - const: renesas,r8a77970
+
+      - description: R-Car V3H (R8A77980)
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - renesas,condor # Condor (RTP0RC77980SEB0010SS/RTP0RC77980SEB0010SA01)
+              - renesas,v3hsk # V3HSK (Y-ASK-RCAR-V3H-WS10)
+          - const: renesas,r8a77980
+
+      - description: R-Car E3 (R8A77990)
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - renesas,ebisu # Ebisu (RTP0RC77990SEB0010S)
+          - const: renesas,r8a77990
+
+      - description: R-Car D3 (R8A77995)
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - renesas,draak # Draak (RTP0RC77995SEB0010S)
+          - const: renesas,r8a77995
+
+      - description: RZ/N1D (R9A06G032)
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - renesas,rzn1d400-db # RZN1D-DB (RZ/N1D Demo Board for the RZ/N1D 400 pins package)
+          - const: renesas,r9a06g032
+
+...
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/rockchip.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/rockchip.yaml
index b12958bda09c..5c6bbf10abc9 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/rockchip.yaml
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/rockchip.yaml
@@ -60,6 +60,11 @@ properties:
           - const: chipspark,rayeager-px2
           - const: rockchip,rk3066a
 
+      - description: Elgin RV1108 R1
+        items:
+          - const: elgin,rv1108-r1
+          - const: rockchip,rv1108
+
       - description: Firefly Firefly-RK3288
         items:
           - enum:
@@ -87,6 +92,14 @@ properties:
           - const: firefly,roc-rk3399-pc
           - const: rockchip,rk3399
 
+      - description: FriendlyElec NanoPi4 series boards
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - friendlyarm,nanopc-t4
+              - friendlyarm,nanopi-m4
+              - friendlyarm,nanopi-neo4
+          - const: rockchip,rk3399
+
       - description: GeekBuying GeekBox
         items:
           - const: geekbuying,geekbox
@@ -134,7 +147,7 @@ properties:
           - const: google,gru
           - const: rockchip,rk3399
 
-      - description: Google Jaq (Haier Chromebook 11 and more)
+      - description: Google Jaq (Haier Chromebook 11 and more w/ uSD)
         items:
           - const: google,veyron-jaq-rev5
           - const: google,veyron-jaq-rev4
@@ -147,6 +160,12 @@ properties:
 
       - description: Google Jerry (Hisense Chromebook C11 and more)
         items:
+          - const: google,veyron-jerry-rev15
+          - const: google,veyron-jerry-rev14
+          - const: google,veyron-jerry-rev13
+          - const: google,veyron-jerry-rev12
+          - const: google,veyron-jerry-rev11
+          - const: google,veyron-jerry-rev10
           - const: google,veyron-jerry-rev7
           - const: google,veyron-jerry-rev6
           - const: google,veyron-jerry-rev5
@@ -187,6 +206,17 @@ properties:
           - const: google,veyron
           - const: rockchip,rk3288
 
+      - description: Google Mighty (Haier Chromebook 11 and more w/ SD)
+        items:
+          - const: google,veyron-mighty-rev5
+          - const: google,veyron-mighty-rev4
+          - const: google,veyron-mighty-rev3
+          - const: google,veyron-mighty-rev2
+          - const: google,veyron-mighty-rev1
+          - const: google,veyron-mighty
+          - const: google,veyron
+          - const: rockchip,rk3288
+
       - description: Google Minnie (Asus Chromebook Flip C100P)
         items:
           - const: google,veyron-minnie-rev4
@@ -296,6 +326,11 @@ properties:
           - const: netxeon,r89
           - const: rockchip,rk3288
 
+      - description: Orange Pi RK3399 board
+        items:
+          - const: rockchip,rk3399-orangepi
+          - const: rockchip,rk3399
+
       - description: Phytec phyCORE-RK3288 Rapid Development Kit
         items:
           - const: phytec,rk3288-pcm-947
@@ -317,6 +352,11 @@ properties:
           - const: radxa,rock
           - const: rockchip,rk3188
 
+      - description: Radxa ROCK Pi 4
+        items:
+          - const: radxa,rockpi4
+          - const: rockchip,rk3399
+
       - description: Radxa Rock2 Square
         items:
           - const: radxa,rock2-square
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/shmobile.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/shmobile.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 7f91c2a8b54e..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/shmobile.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,155 +0,0 @@
-Renesas SH-Mobile, R-Mobile, and R-Car Platform Device Tree Bindings
---------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-SoCs:
-
-  - Emma Mobile EV2
-    compatible = "renesas,emev2"
-  - RZ/A1H (R7S72100)
-    compatible = "renesas,r7s72100"
-  - RZ/A2 (R7S9210)
-    compatible = "renesas,r7s9210"
-  - SH-Mobile AG5 (R8A73A00/SH73A0)
-    compatible = "renesas,sh73a0"
-  - R-Mobile APE6 (R8A73A40)
-    compatible = "renesas,r8a73a4"
-  - R-Mobile A1 (R8A77400)
-    compatible = "renesas,r8a7740"
-  - RZ/G1H (R8A77420)
-    compatible = "renesas,r8a7742"
-  - RZ/G1M (R8A77430)
-    compatible = "renesas,r8a7743"
-  - RZ/G1N (R8A77440)
-    compatible = "renesas,r8a7744"
-  - RZ/G1E (R8A77450)
-    compatible = "renesas,r8a7745"
-  - RZ/G1C (R8A77470)
-    compatible = "renesas,r8a77470"
-  - RZ/G2M (R8A774A1)
-    compatible = "renesas,r8a774a1"
-  - RZ/G2E (R8A774C0)
-    compatible = "renesas,r8a774c0"
-  - R-Car M1A (R8A77781)
-    compatible = "renesas,r8a7778"
-  - R-Car H1 (R8A77790)
-    compatible = "renesas,r8a7779"
-  - R-Car H2 (R8A77900)
-    compatible = "renesas,r8a7790"
-  - R-Car M2-W (R8A77910)
-    compatible = "renesas,r8a7791"
-  - R-Car V2H (R8A77920)
-    compatible = "renesas,r8a7792"
-  - R-Car M2-N (R8A77930)
-    compatible = "renesas,r8a7793"
-  - R-Car E2 (R8A77940)
-    compatible = "renesas,r8a7794"
-  - R-Car H3 (R8A77950)
-    compatible = "renesas,r8a7795"
-  - R-Car M3-W (R8A77960)
-    compatible = "renesas,r8a7796"
-  - R-Car M3-N (R8A77965)
-    compatible = "renesas,r8a77965"
-  - R-Car V3M (R8A77970)
-    compatible = "renesas,r8a77970"
-  - R-Car V3H (R8A77980)
-    compatible = "renesas,r8a77980"
-  - R-Car E3 (R8A77990)
-    compatible = "renesas,r8a77990"
-  - R-Car D3 (R8A77995)
-    compatible = "renesas,r8a77995"
-  - RZ/N1D (R9A06G032)
-    compatible = "renesas,r9a06g032"
-
-Boards:
-
-  - Alt (RTP0RC7794SEB00010S)
-    compatible = "renesas,alt", "renesas,r8a7794"
-  - APE6-EVM
-    compatible = "renesas,ape6evm", "renesas,r8a73a4"
-  - Atmark Techno Armadillo-800 EVA
-    compatible = "renesas,armadillo800eva", "renesas,r8a7740"
-  - Blanche (RTP0RC7792SEB00010S)
-    compatible = "renesas,blanche", "renesas,r8a7792"
-  - BOCK-W
-    compatible = "renesas,bockw", "renesas,r8a7778"
-  - Condor (RTP0RC77980SEB0010SS/RTP0RC77980SEB0010SA01)
-    compatible = "renesas,condor", "renesas,r8a77980"
-  - Draak (RTP0RC77995SEB0010S)
-    compatible = "renesas,draak", "renesas,r8a77995"
-  - Eagle (RTP0RC77970SEB0010S)
-    compatible = "renesas,eagle", "renesas,r8a77970"
-  - Ebisu (RTP0RC77990SEB0010S)
-    compatible = "renesas,ebisu", "renesas,r8a77990"
-  - Genmai (RTK772100BC00000BR)
-    compatible = "renesas,genmai", "renesas,r7s72100"
-  - GR-Peach (X28A-M01-E/F)
-    compatible = "renesas,gr-peach", "renesas,r7s72100"
-  - Gose (RTP0RC7793SEB00010S)
-    compatible = "renesas,gose", "renesas,r8a7793"
-  - H3ULCB (R-Car Starter Kit Premier, RTP0RC7795SKBX0010SA00 (H3 ES1.1))
-    H3ULCB (R-Car Starter Kit Premier, RTP0RC77951SKBX010SA00 (H3 ES2.0))
-    compatible = "renesas,h3ulcb", "renesas,r8a7795"
-  - Henninger
-    compatible = "renesas,henninger", "renesas,r8a7791"
-  - iWave Systems RZ/G1C Single Board Computer (iW-RainboW-G23S)
-    compatible = "iwave,g23s", "renesas,r8a77470"
-  - iWave Systems RZ/G1E SODIMM SOM Development Platform (iW-RainboW-G22D)
-    compatible = "iwave,g22d", "iwave,g22m", "renesas,r8a7745"
-  - iWave Systems RZ/G1E SODIMM System On Module (iW-RainboW-G22M-SM)
-    compatible = "iwave,g22m", "renesas,r8a7745"
-  - iWave Systems RZ/G1M Qseven Development Platform (iW-RainboW-G20D-Qseven)
-    compatible = "iwave,g20d", "iwave,g20m", "renesas,r8a7743"
-  - iWave Systems RZ/G1M Qseven System On Module (iW-RainboW-G20M-Qseven)
-    compatible = "iwave,g20m", "renesas,r8a7743"
-  - iWave Systems RZ/G1N Qseven Development Platform (iW-RainboW-G20D-Qseven)
-    compatible = "iwave,g20d", "iwave,g20m", "renesas,r8a7744"
-  - iWave Systems RZ/G1N Qseven System On Module (iW-RainboW-G20M-Qseven)
-    compatible = "iwave,g20m", "renesas,r8a7744"
-  - Kingfisher (SBEV-RCAR-KF-M03)
-    compatible = "shimafuji,kingfisher"
-  - Koelsch (RTP0RC7791SEB00010S)
-    compatible = "renesas,koelsch", "renesas,r8a7791"
-  - Kyoto Microcomputer Co. KZM-A9-Dual
-    compatible = "renesas,kzm9d", "renesas,emev2"
-  - Kyoto Microcomputer Co. KZM-A9-GT
-    compatible = "renesas,kzm9g", "renesas,sh73a0"
-  - Lager (RTP0RC7790SEB00010S)
-    compatible = "renesas,lager", "renesas,r8a7790"
-  - M3ULCB (R-Car Starter Kit Pro, RTP0RC7796SKBX0010SA09 (M3 ES1.0))
-    compatible = "renesas,m3ulcb", "renesas,r8a7796"
-  - M3NULCB (R-Car Starter Kit Pro, RTP0RC77965SKBX010SA00 (M3-N ES1.1))
-    compatible = "renesas,m3nulcb", "renesas,r8a77965"
-  - Marzen (R0P7779A00010S)
-    compatible = "renesas,marzen", "renesas,r8a7779"
-  - Porter (M2-LCDP)
-    compatible = "renesas,porter", "renesas,r8a7791"
-  - RSKRZA1 (YR0K77210C000BE)
-    compatible = "renesas,rskrza1", "renesas,r7s72100"
-  - RZN1D-DB (RZ/N1D Demo Board for the RZ/N1D 400 pins package)
-    compatible = "renesas,rzn1d400-db", "renesas,r9a06g032"
-  - Salvator-X (RTP0RC7795SIPB0010S)
-    compatible = "renesas,salvator-x", "renesas,r8a7795"
-  - Salvator-X (RTP0RC7796SIPB0011S)
-    compatible = "renesas,salvator-x", "renesas,r8a7796"
-  - Salvator-X (RTP0RC7796SIPB0011S (M3-N))
-    compatible = "renesas,salvator-x", "renesas,r8a77965"
-  - Salvator-XS (Salvator-X 2nd version, RTP0RC7795SIPB0012S)
-    compatible = "renesas,salvator-xs", "renesas,r8a7795"
-  - Salvator-XS (Salvator-X 2nd version, RTP0RC7796SIPB0012S)
-    compatible = "renesas,salvator-xs", "renesas,r8a7796"
-  - Salvator-XS (Salvator-X 2nd version, RTP0RC77965SIPB012S)
-    compatible = "renesas,salvator-xs", "renesas,r8a77965"
-  - SILK (RTP0RC7794LCB00011S)
-    compatible = "renesas,silk", "renesas,r8a7794"
-  - SK-RZG1E (YR8A77450S000BE)
-    compatible = "renesas,sk-rzg1e", "renesas,r8a7745"
-  - SK-RZG1M (YR8A77430S000BE)
-    compatible = "renesas,sk-rzg1m", "renesas,r8a7743"
-  - Stout (ADAS Starterkit, Y-R-CAR-ADAS-SKH2-BOARD)
-    compatible = "renesas,stout", "renesas,r8a7790"
-  - V3HSK (Y-ASK-RCAR-V3H-WS10)
-    compatible = "renesas,v3hsk", "renesas,r8a77980"
-  - V3MSK (Y-ASK-RCAR-V3M-WS10)
-    compatible = "renesas,v3msk", "renesas,r8a77970"
-  - Wheat (RTP0RC7792ASKB0000JE)
-    compatible = "renesas,wheat", "renesas,r8a7792"
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/socionext/milbeaut.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/socionext/milbeaut.yaml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..aae53fc3cb1e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/socionext/milbeaut.yaml
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+%YAML 1.2
+---
+$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/arm/milbeaut.yaml#
+$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml#
+
+title: Milbeaut platforms device tree bindings
+
+maintainers:
+  - Taichi Sugaya <sugaya.taichi@socionext.com>
+  - Takao Orito <orito.takao@socionext.com>
+
+properties:
+  $nodename:
+    const: '/'
+  compatible:
+    oneOf:
+      - items:
+          - enum:
+              - socionext,milbeaut-m10v-evb
+          - const: socionext,sc2000a
+...
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/stm32/stm32-syscon.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/stm32/stm32-syscon.txt
index 99980aee26e5..c92d411fd023 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/stm32/stm32-syscon.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/stm32/stm32-syscon.txt
@@ -5,10 +5,12 @@ Properties:
                  - " st,stm32mp157-syscfg " - for stm32mp157 based SoCs,
                  second value must be always "syscon".
    - reg : offset and length of the register set.
+   - clocks: phandle to the syscfg clock
 
  Example:
          syscfg: syscon@50020000 {
                  compatible = "st,stm32mp157-syscfg", "syscon";
                  reg = <0x50020000 0x400>;
+                 clocks = <&rcc SYSCFG>;
          };
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/sunxi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/sunxi.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 9254cbe7d516..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/sunxi.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-Allwinner sunXi Platforms Device Tree Bindings
-
-Each device tree must specify which Allwinner SoC it uses,
-using one of the following compatible strings:
-
-  allwinner,sun4i-a10
-  allwinner,sun5i-a10s
-  allwinner,sun5i-a13
-  allwinner,sun5i-r8
-  allwinner,sun6i-a31
-  allwinner,sun7i-a20
-  allwinner,sun8i-a23
-  allwinner,sun8i-a33
-  allwinner,sun8i-a83t
-  allwinner,sun8i-h2-plus
-  allwinner,sun8i-h3
-  allwinner,sun8i-r40
-  allwinner,sun8i-t3
-  allwinner,sun8i-v3s
-  allwinner,sun9i-a80
-  allwinner,sun50i-a64
-  allwinner,suniv-f1c100s
-  nextthing,gr8
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/sunxi.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/sunxi.yaml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..285f4fc8519d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/sunxi.yaml
@@ -0,0 +1,807 @@
+# SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0+ OR X11)
+%YAML 1.2
+---
+$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/arm/sunxi.yaml#
+$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml#
+
+title: Allwinner platforms device tree bindings
+
+maintainers:
+  - Chen-Yu Tsai <wens@csie.org>
+  - Maxime Ripard <maxime.ripard@bootlin.com>
+
+properties:
+  $nodename:
+    const: '/'
+  compatible:
+    oneOf:
+
+      - description: Allwinner A23 Evaluation Board
+        items:
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-a23-evb
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-a23
+
+      - description: Allwinner A31 APP4 Evaluation Board
+        items:
+          - const: allwinner,app4-evb1
+          - const: allwinner,sun6i-a31
+
+      - description: Allwinner A83t Homlet Evaluation Board v2
+        items:
+          - const: allwinner,h8homlet-v2
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-a83t
+
+      - description: Allwinner GA10H Quad Core Tablet v1.1
+        items:
+          - const: allwinner,ga10h-v1.1
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-a33
+
+      - description: Allwinner GT90H Tablet v4
+        items:
+          - const: allwinner,gt90h-v4
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-a23
+
+      - description: Allwinner R16 EVB (Parrot)
+        items:
+          - const: allwinner,parrot
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-a33
+
+      - description: Amarula A64 Relic
+        items:
+          - const: amarula,a64-relic
+          - const: allwinner,sun50i-a64
+
+      - description: Auxtek T003 A10s HDMI TV Stick
+        items:
+          - const: allwinner,auxtek-t003
+          - const: allwinner,sun5i-a10s
+
+      - description: Auxtek T004 A10s HDMI TV Stick
+        items:
+          - const: allwinner,auxtek-t004
+          - const: allwinner,sun5i-a10s
+
+      - description: BA10 TV Box
+        items:
+          - const: allwinner,ba10-tvbox
+          - const: allwinner,sun4i-a10
+
+      - description: BananaPi
+        items:
+          - const: lemaker,bananapi
+          - const: allwinner,sun7i-a20
+
+      - description: BananaPi M1 Plus
+        items:
+          - const: sinovoip,bpi-m1-plus
+          - const: allwinner,sun7i-a20
+
+      - description: BananaPi M2
+        items:
+          - const: sinovoip,bpi-m2
+          - const: allwinner,sun6i-a31s
+
+      - description: BananaPi M2 Berry
+        items:
+          - const: sinovoip,bpi-m2-berry
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-r40
+
+      - description: BananaPi M2 Plus
+        items:
+          - const: sinovoip,bpi-m2-plus
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-h3
+
+      - description: BananaPi M2 Plus
+        items:
+          - const: sinovoip,bpi-m2-plus
+          - const: allwinner,sun50i-h5
+
+      - description: BananaPi M2 Plus v1.2
+        items:
+          - const: bananapi,bpi-m2-plus-v1.2
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-h3
+
+      - description: BananaPi M2 Plus v1.2
+        items:
+          - const: bananapi,bpi-m2-plus-v1.2
+          - const: allwinner,sun50i-h5
+
+      - description: BananaPi M2 Magic
+        items:
+          - const: sinovoip,bananapi-m2m
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-a33
+
+      - description: BananaPi M2 Ultra
+        items:
+          - const: sinovoip,bpi-m2-ultra
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-r40
+
+      - description: BananaPi M2 Zero
+        items:
+          - const: sinovoip,bpi-m2-zero
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-h2-plus
+
+      - description: BananaPi M3
+        items:
+          - const: sinovoip,bpi-m3
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-a83t
+
+      - description: BananaPi M64
+        items:
+          - const: sinovoip,bananapi-m64
+          - const: allwinner,sun50i-a64
+
+      - description: BananaPro
+        items:
+          - const: lemaker,bananapro
+          - const: allwinner,sun7i-a20
+
+      - description: Beelink GS1
+        items:
+          - const: azw,beelink-gs1
+          - const: allwinner,sun50i-h6
+
+      - description: Beelink X2
+        items:
+          - const: roofull,beelink-x2
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-h3
+
+      - description: Chuwi V7 CW0825
+        items:
+          - const: chuwi,v7-cw0825
+          - const: allwinner,sun4i-a10
+
+      - description: Colorfly E708 Q1 Tablet
+        items:
+          - const: colorfly,e708-q1
+          - const: allwinner,sun6i-a31s
+
+      - description: CSQ CS908 Set Top Box
+        items:
+          - const: csq,cs908
+          - const: allwinner,sun6i-a31s
+
+      - description: Cubietech Cubieboard
+        items:
+          - const: cubietech,a10-cubieboard
+          - const: allwinner,sun4i-a10
+
+      - description: Cubietech Cubieboard2
+        items:
+          - const: cubietech,cubieboard2
+          - const: allwinner,sun7i-a20
+
+      - description: Cubietech Cubieboard4
+        items:
+          - const: cubietech,a80-cubieboard4
+          - const: allwinner,sun9i-a80
+
+      - description: Cubietech Cubietruck
+        items:
+          - const: cubietech,cubietruck
+          - const: allwinner,sun7i-a20
+
+      - description: Cubietech Cubietruck Plus
+        items:
+          - const: cubietech,cubietruck-plus
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-a83t
+
+      - description: Difrnce DIT4350
+        items:
+          - const: difrnce,dit4350
+          - const: allwinner,sun5i-a13
+
+      - description: Dserve DSRV9703C
+        items:
+          - const: dserve,dsrv9703c
+          - const: allwinner,sun4i-a10
+
+      - description: Empire Electronix D709 Tablet
+        items:
+          - const: empire-electronix,d709
+          - const: allwinner,sun5i-a13
+
+      - description: Empire Electronix M712 Tablet
+        items:
+          - const: empire-electronix,m712
+          - const: allwinner,sun5i-a13
+
+      - description: FriendlyARM NanoPi A64
+        items:
+          - const: friendlyarm,nanopi-a64
+          - const: allwinner,sun50i-a64
+
+      - description: FriendlyARM NanoPi M1
+        items:
+          - const: friendlyarm,nanopi-m1
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-h3
+
+      - description: FriendlyARM NanoPi M1 Plus
+        items:
+          - const: friendlyarm,nanopi-m1-plus
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-h3
+
+      - description: FriendlyARM NanoPi Neo
+        items:
+          - const: friendlyarm,nanopi-neo
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-h3
+
+      - description: FriendlyARM NanoPi Neo 2
+        items:
+          - const: friendlyarm,nanopi-neo2
+          - const: allwinner,sun50i-h5
+
+      - description: FriendlyARM NanoPi Neo Air
+        items:
+          - const: friendlyarm,nanopi-neo-air
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-h3
+
+      - description: FriendlyARM NanoPi Neo Plus2
+        items:
+          - const: friendlyarm,nanopi-neo-plus2
+          - const: allwinner,sun50i-h5
+
+      - description: Gemei G9 Tablet
+        items:
+          - const: gemei,g9
+          - const: allwinner,sun4i-a10
+
+      - description: Hyundai A7HD
+        items:
+          - const: hyundai,a7hd
+          - const: allwinner,sun4i-a10
+
+      - description: HSG H702
+        items:
+          - const: hsg,h702
+          - const: allwinner,sun5i-a13
+
+      - description: I12 TV Box
+        items:
+          - const: allwinner,i12-tvbox
+          - const: allwinner,sun7i-a20
+
+      - description: ICNova A20 SWAC
+        items:
+          - const: swac,icnova-a20-swac
+          - const: incircuit,icnova-a20
+          - const: allwinner,sun7i-a20
+
+      - description: INet-1
+        items:
+          - const: inet-tek,inet1
+          - const: allwinner,sun4i-a10
+
+      - description: iNet-86DZ Rev 01
+        items:
+          - const: primux,inet86dz
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-a23
+
+      - description: iNet-9F Rev 03
+        items:
+          - const: inet-tek,inet9f-rev03
+          - const: allwinner,sun4i-a10
+
+      - description: iNet-97F Rev 02
+        items:
+          - const: primux,inet97fv2
+          - const: allwinner,sun4i-a10
+
+      - description: iNet-98V Rev 02
+        items:
+          - const: primux,inet98v-rev2
+          - const: allwinner,sun5i-a13
+
+      - description: iNet D978 Rev 02 Tablet
+        items:
+          - const: primux,inet-d978-rev2
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-a33
+
+      - description: iNet Q972 Tablet
+        items:
+          - const: inet-tek,inet-q972
+          - const: allwinner,sun6i-a31s
+
+      - description: Itead Ibox A20
+        items:
+          - const: itead,itead-ibox-a20
+          - const: allwinner,sun7i-a20
+
+      - description: Itead Iteaduino Plus A10
+        items:
+          - const: itead,iteaduino-plus-a10
+          - const: allwinner,sun4i-a10
+
+      - description: Jesurun Q5
+        items:
+          - const: jesurun,q5
+          - const: allwinner,sun4i-a10
+
+      - description: Lamobo R1
+        items:
+          - const: lamobo,lamobo-r1
+          - const: allwinner,sun7i-a20
+
+      - description: Libre Computer Board ALL-H3-CC H2+
+        items:
+          - const: libretech,all-h3-cc-h2-plus
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-h2-plus
+
+      - description: Libre Computer Board ALL-H3-CC H3
+        items:
+          - const: libretech,all-h3-cc-h3
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-h3
+
+      - description: Libre Computer Board ALL-H3-CC H5
+        items:
+          - const: libretech,all-h3-cc-h5
+          - const: allwinner,sun50i-h5
+
+      - description: Lichee Pi One
+        items:
+          - const: licheepi,licheepi-one
+          - const: allwinner,sun5i-a13
+
+      - description: Lichee Pi Zero
+        items:
+          - const: licheepi,licheepi-zero
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-v3s
+
+      - description: Lichee Pi Zero (with Dock)
+        items:
+          - const: licheepi,licheepi-zero-dock
+          - const: licheepi,licheepi-zero
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-v3s
+
+      - description: Linksprite PCDuino
+        items:
+          - const: linksprite,a10-pcduino
+          - const: allwinner,sun4i-a10
+
+      - description: Linksprite PCDuino2
+        items:
+          - const: linksprite,a10-pcduino2
+          - const: allwinner,sun4i-a10
+
+      - description: Linksprite PCDuino3
+        items:
+          - const: linksprite,pcduino3
+          - const: allwinner,sun7i-a20
+
+      - description: Linksprite PCDuino3 Nano
+        items:
+          - const: linksprite,pcduino3-nano
+          - const: allwinner,sun7i-a20
+
+      - description: HAOYU Electronics Marsboard A10
+        items:
+          - const: haoyu,a10-marsboard
+          - const: allwinner,sun4i-a10
+
+      - description: MapleBoard MP130
+        items:
+          - const: mapleboard,mp130
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-h3
+
+      - description: Mele A1000
+        items:
+          - const: mele,a1000
+          - const: allwinner,sun4i-a10
+
+      - description: Mele A1000G Quad Set Top Box
+        items:
+          - const: mele,a1000g-quad
+          - const: allwinner,sun6i-a31
+
+      - description: Mele I7 Quad Set Top Box
+        items:
+          - const: mele,i7
+          - const: allwinner,sun6i-a31
+
+      - description: Mele M3
+        items:
+          - const: mele,m3
+          - const: allwinner,sun7i-a20
+
+      - description: Mele M9 Set Top Box
+        items:
+          - const: mele,m9
+          - const: allwinner,sun6i-a31
+
+      - description: Merrii A20 Hummingboard
+        items:
+          - const: merrii,a20-hummingbird
+          - const: allwinner,sun7i-a20
+
+      - description: Merrii A31 Hummingboard
+        items:
+          - const: merrii,a31-hummingbird
+          - const: allwinner,sun6i-a31
+
+      - description: Merrii A80 Optimus
+        items:
+          - const: merrii,a80-optimus
+          - const: allwinner,sun9i-a80
+
+      - description: Miniand Hackberry
+        items:
+          - const: miniand,hackberry
+          - const: allwinner,sun4i-a10
+
+      - description: MK802
+        items:
+          - const: allwinner,mk802
+          - const: allwinner,sun4i-a10
+
+      - description: MK802-A10s
+        items:
+          - const: allwinner,a10s-mk802
+          - const: allwinner,sun5i-a10s
+
+      - description: MK802-II
+        items:
+          - const: allwinner,mk802ii
+          - const: allwinner,sun4i-a10
+
+      - description: MK808c
+        items:
+          - const: allwinner,mk808c
+          - const: allwinner,sun7i-a20
+
+      - description: MSI Primo81 Tablet
+        items:
+          - const: msi,primo81
+          - const: allwinner,sun6i-a31s
+
+      - description: Emlid Neutis N5 Developper Board
+        items:
+          - const: emlid,neutis-n5-devboard
+          - const: emlid,neutis-n5
+          - const: allwinner,sun50i-h5
+
+      - description: NextThing Co. CHIP
+        items:
+          - const: nextthing,chip
+          - const: allwinner,sun5i-r8
+          - const: allwinner,sun5i-a13
+
+      - description: NextThing Co. CHIP Pro
+        items:
+          - const: nextthing,chip-pro
+          - const: nextthing,gr8
+
+      - description: NextThing Co. GR8 Evaluation Board
+        items:
+          - const: nextthing,gr8-evb
+          - const: nextthing,gr8
+
+      - description: Nintendo NES Classic
+        items:
+          - const: nintendo,nes-classic
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-r16
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-a33
+
+      - description: Nintendo Super NES Classic
+        items:
+          - const: nintendo,super-nes-classic
+          - const: nintendo,nes-classic
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-r16
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-a33
+
+      - description: Oceanic 5inMFD (5205)
+        items:
+          - const: oceanic,5205-5inmfd
+          - const: allwinner,sun50i-a64
+
+      - description: Olimex A10-OlinuXino LIME
+        items:
+          - const: olimex,a10-olinuxino-lime
+          - const: allwinner,sun4i-a10
+
+      - description: Olimex A10s-OlinuXino Micro
+        items:
+          - const: olimex,a10s-olinuxino-micro
+          - const: allwinner,sun5i-a10s
+
+      - description: Olimex A13-OlinuXino
+        items:
+          - const: olimex,a13-olinuxino
+          - const: allwinner,sun5i-a13
+
+      - description: Olimex A13-OlinuXino Micro
+        items:
+          - const: olimex,a13-olinuxino-micro
+          - const: allwinner,sun5i-a13
+
+      - description: Olimex A20-Olimex SOM Evaluation Board
+        items:
+          - const: olimex,a20-olimex-som-evb
+          - const: allwinner,sun7i-a20
+
+      - description: Olimex A20-Olimex SOM Evaluation Board (with eMMC)
+        items:
+          - const: olimex,a20-olimex-som-evb-emmc
+          - const: allwinner,sun7i-a20
+
+      - description: Olimex A20-OlinuXino LIME
+        items:
+          - const: olimex,a20-olinuxino-lime
+          - const: allwinner,sun7i-a20
+
+      - description: Olimex A20-OlinuXino LIME2
+        items:
+          - const: olimex,a20-olinuxino-lime2
+          - const: allwinner,sun7i-a20
+
+      - description: Olimex A20-OlinuXino LIME2 (with eMMC)
+        items:
+          - const: olimex,a20-olinuxino-lime2-emmc
+          - const: allwinner,sun7i-a20
+
+      - description: Olimex A20-OlinuXino Micro
+        items:
+          - const: olimex,a20-olinuxino-micro
+          - const: allwinner,sun7i-a20
+
+      - description: Olimex A20-OlinuXino Micro (with eMMC)
+        items:
+          - const: olimex,a20-olinuxino-micro-emmc
+          - const: allwinner,sun7i-a20
+
+      - description: Olimex A20-SOM204 Evaluation Board
+        items:
+          - const: olimex,a20-olimex-som204-evb
+          - const: allwinner,sun7i-a20
+
+      - description: Olimex A20-SOM204 Evaluation Board (with eMMC)
+        items:
+          - const: olimex,a20-olimex-som204-evb-emmc
+          - const: allwinner,sun7i-a20
+
+      - description: Olimex A33-OlinuXino
+        items:
+          - const: olimex,a33-olinuxino
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-a33
+
+      - description: Olimex A64-OlinuXino
+        items:
+          - const: olimex,a64-olinuxino
+          - const: allwinner,sun50i-a64
+
+      - description: Olimex A64 Teres-I
+        items:
+          - const: olimex,a64-teres-i
+          - const: allwinner,sun50i-a64
+
+      - description: Pine64
+        items:
+          - const: pine64,pine64
+          - const: allwinner,sun50i-a64
+
+      - description: Pine64+
+        items:
+          - const: pine64,pine64-plus
+          - const: allwinner,sun50i-a64
+
+      - description: Pine64 PineH64
+        items:
+          - const: pine64,pine-h64
+          - const: allwinner,sun50i-h6
+
+      - description: Pine64 LTS
+        items:
+          - const: pine64,pine64-lts
+          - const: allwinner,sun50i-r18
+          - const: allwinner,sun50i-a64
+
+      - description: Pine64 Pinebook
+        items:
+          - const: pine64,pinebook
+          - const: allwinner,sun50i-a64
+
+      - description: Pine64 SoPine Baseboard
+        items:
+          - const: pine64,sopine-baseboard
+          - const: pine64,sopine
+          - const: allwinner,sun50i-a64
+
+      - description: PineRiver Mini X-Plus
+        items:
+          - const: pineriver,mini-xplus
+          - const: allwinner,sun4i-a10
+
+      - description: Point of View Protab2-IPS9
+        items:
+          - const: pov,protab2-ips9
+          - const: allwinner,sun4i-a10
+
+      - description: Polaroid MID2407PXE03 Tablet
+        items:
+          - const: polaroid,mid2407pxe03
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-a23
+
+      - description: Polaroid MID2809PXE04 Tablet
+        items:
+          - const: polaroid,mid2809pxe04
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-a23
+
+      - description: Q8 A13 Tablet
+        items:
+          - const: allwinner,q8-a13
+          - const: allwinner,sun5i-a13
+
+      - description: Q8 A23 Tablet
+        items:
+          - const: allwinner,q8-a23
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-a23
+
+      - description: Q8 A33 Tablet
+        items:
+          - const: allwinner,q8-a33
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-a33
+
+      - description: Qihua CQA3T BV3
+        items:
+          - const: qihua,t3-cqa3t-bv3
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-t3
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-r40
+
+      - description: R7 A10s HDMI TV Stick
+        items:
+          - const: allwinner,r7-tv-dongle
+          - const: allwinner,sun5i-a10s
+
+      - description: RerVision H3-DVK
+        items:
+          - const: rervision,h3-dvk
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-h3
+
+      - description: Sinlinx SinA31s Core Board
+        items:
+          - const: sinlinx,sina31s
+          - const: allwinner,sun6i-a31s
+
+      - description: Sinlinx SinA31s Development Board
+        items:
+          - const: sinlinx,sina31s-sdk
+          - const: allwinner,sun6i-a31s
+
+      - description: Sinlinx SinA33
+        items:
+          - const: sinlinx,sina33
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-a33
+
+      - description: TBS A711 Tablet
+        items:
+          - const: tbs-biometrics,a711
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-a83t
+
+      - description: Utoo P66
+        items:
+          - const: utoo,p66
+          - const: allwinner,sun5i-a13
+
+      - description: Wexler TAB7200
+        items:
+          - const: wexler,tab7200
+          - const: allwinner,sun7i-a20
+
+      - description: WITS A31 Colombus Evaluation Board
+        items:
+          - const: wits,colombus
+          - const: allwinner,sun6i-a31
+
+      - description: WITS Pro A20 DKT
+        items:
+          - const: wits,pro-a20-dkt
+          - const: allwinner,sun7i-a20
+
+      - description: Wobo i5
+        items:
+          - const: wobo,a10s-wobo-i5
+          - const: allwinner,sun5i-a10s
+
+      - description: Yones TopTech BS1078 v2 Tablet
+        items:
+          - const: yones-toptech,bs1078-v2
+          - const: allwinner,sun6i-a31s
+
+      - description: Xunlong OrangePi
+        items:
+          - const: xunlong,orangepi
+          - const: allwinner,sun7i-a20
+
+      - description: Xunlong OrangePi 2
+        items:
+          - const: xunlong,orangepi-2
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-h3
+
+      - description: Xunlong OrangePi 3
+        items:
+          - const: xunlong,orangepi-3
+          - const: allwinner,sun50i-h6
+
+      - description: Xunlong OrangePi Lite
+        items:
+          - const: xunlong,orangepi-lite
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-h3
+
+      - description: Xunlong OrangePi Lite2
+        items:
+          - const: xunlong,orangepi-lite2
+          - const: allwinner,sun50i-h6
+
+      - description: Xunlong OrangePi Mini
+        items:
+          - const: xunlong,orangepi-mini
+          - const: allwinner,sun7i-a20
+
+      - description: Xunlong OrangePi One
+        items:
+          - const: xunlong,orangepi-one
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-h3
+
+      - description: Xunlong OrangePi One Plus
+        items:
+          - const: xunlong,orangepi-one-plus
+          - const: allwinner,sun50i-h6
+
+      - description: Xunlong OrangePi PC
+        items:
+          - const: xunlong,orangepi-pc
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-h3
+
+      - description: Xunlong OrangePi PC 2
+        items:
+          - const: xunlong,orangepi-pc2
+          - const: allwinner,sun50i-h5
+
+      - description: Xunlong OrangePi PC Plus
+        items:
+          - const: xunlong,orangepi-pc-plus
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-h3
+
+      - description: Xunlong OrangePi Plus
+        items:
+          - const: xunlong,orangepi-plus
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-h3
+
+      - description: Xunlong OrangePi Plus 2E
+        items:
+          - const: xunlong,orangepi-plus2e
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-h3
+
+      - description: Xunlong OrangePi Prime
+        items:
+          - const: xunlong,orangepi-prime
+          - const: allwinner,sun50i-h5
+
+      - description: Xunlong OrangePi R1
+        items:
+          - const: xunlong,orangepi-r1
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-h2-plus
+
+      - description: Xunlong OrangePi Win
+        items:
+          - const: xunlong,orangepi-win
+          - const: allwinner,sun50i-a64
+
+      - description: Xunlong OrangePi Zero
+        items:
+          - const: xunlong,orangepi-zero
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-h2-plus
+
+      - description: Xunlong OrangePi Zero Plus
+        items:
+          - const: xunlong,orangepi-zero-plus
+          - const: allwinner,sun50i-h5
+
+      - description: Xunlong OrangePi Zero Plus2
+        items:
+          - const: xunlong,orangepi-zero-plus2
+          - const: allwinner,sun50i-h5
+
+      - description: Xunlong OrangePi Zero Plus2
+        items:
+          - const: xunlong,orangepi-zero-plus2-h3
+          - const: allwinner,sun8i-h3
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/sunxi/sunxi-mbus.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/sunxi/sunxi-mbus.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1464a4713553
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/sunxi/sunxi-mbus.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+Allwinner Memory Bus (MBUS) controller
+
+The MBUS controller drives the MBUS that other devices in the SoC will
+use to perform DMA. It also has a register interface that allows to
+monitor and control the bandwidth and priorities for masters on that
+bus.
+
+Required properties:
+ - compatible: Must be one of:
+	- allwinner,sun5i-a13-mbus
+ - reg: Offset and length of the register set for the controller
+ - clocks: phandle to the clock driving the controller
+ - dma-ranges: See section 2.3.9 of the DeviceTree Specification
+ - #interconnect-cells: Must be one, with the argument being the MBUS
+   port ID
+
+Each device having to perform their DMA through the MBUS must have the
+interconnects and interconnect-names properties set to the MBUS
+controller and with "dma-mem" as the interconnect name.
+
+Example:
+
+mbus: dram-controller@1c01000 {
+	compatible = "allwinner,sun5i-a13-mbus";
+	reg = <0x01c01000 0x1000>;
+	clocks = <&ccu CLK_MBUS>;
+	dma-ranges = <0x00000000 0x40000000 0x20000000>;
+	#interconnect-cells = <1>;
+};
+
+fe0: display-frontend@1e00000 {
+	compatible = "allwinner,sun5i-a13-display-frontend";
+	...
+	interconnects = <&mbus 19>;
+	interconnect-names = "dma-mem";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/technologic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/technologic.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index f1cedc00dcab..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/technologic.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-Technologic Systems Platforms Device Tree Bindings
---------------------------------------------------
-
-TS-4600 is a System-on-Module based on the Freescale i.MX28 System-on-Chip.
-It can be mounted on a carrier board providing additional peripheral connectors.
-Required root node properties:
-	- compatible = "technologic,imx28-ts4600", "fsl,imx28"
-
-TS-4800 board
-Required root node properties:
-	- compatible = "technologic,imx51-ts4800", "fsl,imx51";
-
-TS-4900 is a System-on-Module based on the Freescale i.MX6 System-on-Chip.
-It can be mounted on a carrier board providing additional peripheral connectors.
-Required root node properties:
-	- compatible = "technologic,imx6dl-ts4900", "fsl,imx6dl"
-	- compatible = "technologic,imx6q-ts4900", "fsl,imx6q"
-
-TS-7970 is a System-on-Module based on the Freescale i.MX6 System-on-Chip.
-It can be mounted on a carrier board providing additional peripheral connectors.
-Required root node properties:
-	- compatible = "technologic,imx6dl-ts7970", "fsl,imx6dl"
-	- compatible = "technologic,imx6q-ts7970", "fsl,imx6q"
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/tegra.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/tegra.yaml
index fbcde8a7e067..60b38eb5c61a 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/tegra.yaml
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/tegra.yaml
@@ -87,9 +87,11 @@ properties:
           - const: nvidia,tegra124
       - items:
           - enum:
+              - nvidia,darcy
               - nvidia,p2371-0000
               - nvidia,p2371-2180
               - nvidia,p2571
+              - nvidia,p2894-0050-a08
           - const: nvidia,tegra210
       - items:
           - enum:
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/imx-weim.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/imx-weim.txt
index 683eaf3aed79..dda7d6d66479 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/imx-weim.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/imx-weim.txt
@@ -47,9 +47,9 @@ Optional properties:
 Timing property for child nodes. It is mandatory, not optional.
 
  - fsl,weim-cs-timing:	The timing array, contains timing values for the
-			child node. We can get the CS index from the child
-			node's "reg" property. The number of registers depends
-			on the selected chip.
+			child node. We get the CS indexes from the address
+			ranges in the child node's "reg" property.
+			The number of registers depends on the selected chip:
 			For i.MX1, i.MX21 ("fsl,imx1-weim") there are two
 			registers: CSxU, CSxL.
 			For i.MX25, i.MX27, i.MX31 and i.MX35 ("fsl,imx27-weim")
@@ -80,3 +80,29 @@ Example for an imx6q-sabreauto board, the NOR flash connected to the WEIM:
 					0x0000c000 0x1404a38e 0x00000000>;
 		};
 	};
+
+Example for an imx6q-based board, a multi-chipselect device connected to WEIM:
+
+In this case, both chip select 0 and 1 will be configured with the same timing
+array values.
+
+	weim: weim@21b8000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,imx6q-weim";
+		reg = <0x021b8000 0x4000>;
+		clocks = <&clks 196>;
+		#address-cells = <2>;
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+		ranges = <0 0 0x08000000 0x02000000
+			  1 0 0x0a000000 0x02000000
+			  2 0 0x0c000000 0x02000000
+			  3 0 0x0e000000 0x02000000>;
+		fsl,weim-cs-gpr = <&gpr>;
+
+		acme@0 {
+			compatible = "acme,whatever";
+			reg = <0 0 0x100>, <0 0x400000 0x800>,
+				<1 0x400000 0x800>;
+			fsl,weim-cs-timing = <0x024400b1 0x00001010 0x20081100
+				0x00000000 0xa0000240 0x00000000>;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/ti-sysc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/ti-sysc.txt
index 85a23f551f02..233eb8294204 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/ti-sysc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/ti-sysc.txt
@@ -94,6 +94,8 @@ Optional properties:
 
 - ti,no-idle-on-init	interconnect target module should not be idled at init
 
+- ti,no-idle		interconnect target module should not be idled
+
 Example: Single instance of MUSB controller on omap4 using interconnect ranges
 using offsets from l4_cfg second segment (0x4a000000 + 0x80000 = 0x4a0ab000):
 
@@ -131,6 +133,6 @@ using offsets from l4_cfg second segment (0x4a000000 + 0x80000 = 0x4a0ab000):
 		};
 	};
 
-Note that other SoCs, such as am335x can have multipe child devices. On am335x
+Note that other SoCs, such as am335x can have multiple child devices. On am335x
 there are two MUSB instances, two USB PHY instances, and a single CPPI41 DMA
-instance as children of a single interconnet target module.
+instance as children of a single interconnect target module.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/actions,owl-cmu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/actions,owl-cmu.txt
index 2ef86ae96df8..d19885b7c73f 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/actions,owl-cmu.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/actions,owl-cmu.txt
@@ -2,13 +2,14 @@
 
 The Actions Semi Owl Clock Management Unit generates and supplies clock
 to various controllers within the SoC. The clock binding described here is
-applicable to S900 and S700 SoC's.
+applicable to S900, S700 and S500 SoC's.
 
 Required Properties:
 
 - compatible: should be one of the following,
 	"actions,s900-cmu"
 	"actions,s700-cmu"
+	"actions,s500-cmu"
 - reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
   region.
 - clocks: Reference to the parent clocks ("hosc", "losc")
@@ -19,8 +20,8 @@ Each clock is assigned an identifier, and client nodes can use this identifier
 to specify the clock which they consume.
 
 All available clocks are defined as preprocessor macros in corresponding
-dt-bindings/clock/actions,s900-cmu.h or actions,s700-cmu.h header and can be
-used in device tree sources.
+dt-bindings/clock/actions,s900-cmu.h or actions,s700-cmu.h or
+actions,s500-cmu.h header and can be used in device tree sources.
 
 External clocks:
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/amlogic,axg-audio-clkc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/amlogic,axg-audio-clkc.txt
index 61777ad24f61..0f777749f4f1 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/amlogic,axg-audio-clkc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/amlogic,axg-audio-clkc.txt
@@ -6,7 +6,8 @@ devices.
 
 Required Properties:
 
-- compatible	: should be "amlogic,axg-audio-clkc" for the A113X and A113D
+- compatible	: should be "amlogic,axg-audio-clkc" for the A113X and A113D,
+		  "amlogic,g12a-audio-clkc" for G12A.
 - reg		: physical base address of the clock controller and length of
 		  memory mapped region.
 - clocks	: a list of phandle + clock-specifier pairs for the clocks listed
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/amlogic,gxbb-aoclkc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/amlogic,gxbb-aoclkc.txt
index 79511d7bb321..c41f0be5d438 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/amlogic,gxbb-aoclkc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/amlogic,gxbb-aoclkc.txt
@@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ Required Properties:
 	- GXL (S905X, S905D) : "amlogic,meson-gxl-aoclkc"
 	- GXM (S912) : "amlogic,meson-gxm-aoclkc"
 	- AXG (A113D, A113X) : "amlogic,meson-axg-aoclkc"
+	- G12A (S905X2, S905D2, S905Y2) : "amlogic,meson-g12a-aoclkc"
 	followed by the common "amlogic,meson-gx-aoclkc"
 - clocks: list of clock phandle, one for each entry clock-names.
 - clock-names: should contain the following:
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/amlogic,gxbb-clkc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/amlogic,gxbb-clkc.txt
index a6871953bf04..5c8b105be4d6 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/amlogic,gxbb-clkc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/amlogic,gxbb-clkc.txt
@@ -9,6 +9,7 @@ Required Properties:
 		"amlogic,gxbb-clkc" for GXBB SoC,
 		"amlogic,gxl-clkc" for GXL and GXM SoC,
 		"amlogic,axg-clkc" for AXG SoC.
+		"amlogic,g12a-clkc" for G12A SoC.
 - clocks : list of clock phandle, one for each entry clock-names.
 - clock-names : should contain the following:
   * "xtal": the platform xtal
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/at91-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/at91-clock.txt
index e9f70fcdfe80..b520280e33ff 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/at91-clock.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/at91-clock.txt
@@ -8,35 +8,30 @@ Slow Clock controller:
 
 Required properties:
 - compatible : shall be one of the following:
-	"atmel,at91sam9x5-sckc" or
+	"atmel,at91sam9x5-sckc",
+	"atmel,sama5d3-sckc" or
 	"atmel,sama5d4-sckc":
 		at91 SCKC (Slow Clock Controller)
-		This node contains the slow clock definitions.
-
-	"atmel,at91sam9x5-clk-slow-osc":
-		at91 slow oscillator
-
-	"atmel,at91sam9x5-clk-slow-rc-osc":
-		at91 internal slow RC oscillator
-- reg : defines the IO memory reserved for the SCKC.
-- #size-cells : shall be 0 (reg is used to encode clk id).
-- #address-cells : shall be 1 (reg is used to encode clk id).
+- #clock-cells : shall be 0.
+- clocks : shall be the input parent clock phandle for the clock.
 
+Optional properties:
+- atmel,osc-bypass : boolean property. Set this when a clock signal is directly
+  provided on XIN.
 
 For example:
-	sckc: sckc@fffffe50 {
-		compatible = "atmel,sama5d3-pmc";
-		reg = <0xfffffe50 0x4>
-		#size-cells = <0>;
-		#address-cells = <1>;
-
-		/* put at91 slow clocks here */
+	sckc@fffffe50 {
+		compatible = "atmel,at91sam9x5-sckc";
+		reg = <0xfffffe50 0x4>;
+		clocks = <&slow_xtal>;
+		#clock-cells = <0>;
 	};
 
 Power Management Controller (PMC):
 
 Required properties:
-- compatible : shall be "atmel,<chip>-pmc", "syscon":
+- compatible : shall be "atmel,<chip>-pmc", "syscon" or
+	"microchip,sam9x60-pmc"
 	<chip> can be: at91rm9200, at91sam9260, at91sam9261,
 	at91sam9263, at91sam9g45, at91sam9n12, at91sam9rl, at91sam9g15,
 	at91sam9g25, at91sam9g35, at91sam9x25, at91sam9x35, at91sam9x5,
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/cirrus,lochnagar.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/cirrus,lochnagar.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b8d8ef3bdc5f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/cirrus,lochnagar.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+Cirrus Logic Lochnagar Audio Development Board
+
+Lochnagar is an evaluation and development board for Cirrus Logic
+Smart CODEC and Amp devices. It allows the connection of most Cirrus
+Logic devices on mini-cards, as well as allowing connection of
+various application processor systems to provide a full evaluation
+platform.  Audio system topology, clocking and power can all be
+controlled through the Lochnagar, allowing the device under test
+to be used in a variety of possible use cases.
+
+This binding document describes the binding for the clock portion of
+the driver.
+
+Also see these documents for generic binding information:
+  [1] Clock : ../clock/clock-bindings.txt
+
+And these for relevant defines:
+  [2] include/dt-bindings/clock/lochnagar.h
+
+This binding must be part of the Lochnagar MFD binding:
+  [3] ../mfd/cirrus,lochnagar.txt
+
+Required properties:
+
+  - compatible : One of the following strings:
+                 "cirrus,lochnagar1-clk"
+                 "cirrus,lochnagar2-clk"
+
+  - #clock-cells : Must be 1. The first cell indicates the clock
+    number, see [2] for available clocks and [1].
+
+Optional properties:
+
+  - clocks : Must contain an entry for each clock in clock-names.
+  - clock-names : May contain entries for each of the following
+    clocks:
+     - ln-cdc-clkout : Output clock from CODEC card.
+     - ln-dsp-clkout : Output clock from DSP card.
+     - ln-gf-mclk1,ln-gf-mclk2,ln-gf-mclk3,ln-gf-mclk4 : Optional
+       input audio clocks from host system.
+     - ln-psia1-mclk, ln-psia2-mclk : Optional input audio clocks from
+       external connector.
+     - ln-spdif-clkout : Optional input audio clock from SPDIF.
+     - ln-adat-mclk : Optional input audio clock from ADAT.
+     - ln-pmic-32k : On board fixed clock.
+     - ln-clk-12m : On board fixed clock.
+     - ln-clk-11m : On board fixed clock.
+     - ln-clk-24m : On board fixed clock.
+     - ln-clk-22m : On board fixed clock.
+     - ln-clk-8m : On board fixed clock.
+     - ln-usb-clk-24m : On board fixed clock.
+     - ln-usb-clk-12m : On board fixed clock.
+
+  - assigned-clocks : A list of Lochnagar clocks to be reparented, see
+    [2] for available clocks.
+  - assigned-clock-parents : Parents to be assigned to the clocks
+    listed in "assigned-clocks".
+
+Optional nodes:
+
+  - fixed-clock nodes may be registered for the following on board clocks:
+     - ln-pmic-32k : 32768 Hz
+     - ln-clk-12m : 12288000 Hz
+     - ln-clk-11m : 11298600 Hz
+     - ln-clk-24m : 24576000 Hz
+     - ln-clk-22m : 22579200 Hz
+     - ln-clk-8m : 8192000 Hz
+     - ln-usb-clk-24m : 24576000 Hz
+     - ln-usb-clk-12m : 12288000 Hz
+
+Example:
+
+lochnagar {
+	lochnagar-clk {
+		compatible = "cirrus,lochnagar2-clk";
+
+		#clock-cells = <1>;
+
+		clocks = <&clk-audio>, <&clk_pmic>;
+		clock-names = "ln-gf-mclk2", "ln-pmic-32k";
+
+		assigned-clocks = <&lochnagar-clk LOCHNAGAR_CDC_MCLK1>,
+				  <&lochnagar-clk LOCHNAGAR_CDC_MCLK2>;
+		assigned-clock-parents = <&clk-audio>,
+					 <&clk-pmic>;
+	};
+
+	clk-pmic: clk-pmic {
+		compatible = "fixed-clock";
+		clock-cells = <0>;
+		clock-frequency = <32768>;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5433-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5433-clock.txt
index 50d5897c9849..183c327a7d6b 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5433-clock.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5433-clock.txt
@@ -50,6 +50,8 @@ Required Properties:
     IPs.
   - "samsung,exynos5433-cmu-cam1" - clock controller compatible for CMU_CAM1
     which generates clocks for Cortex-A5/MIPI_CSIS2/FIMC-LITE_C/FIMC-FD IPs.
+  - "samsung,exynos5433-cmu-imem"   - clock controller compatible for CMU_IMEM
+    which generates clocks for SSS (Security SubSystem) and SlimSSS IPs.
 
 - reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
   region.
@@ -168,6 +170,12 @@ Required Properties:
 		- aclk_cam1_400
 		- aclk_cam1_552
 
+	Input clocks for imem clock controller:
+		- oscclk
+		- aclk_imem_sssx_266
+		- aclk_imem_266
+		- aclk_imem_200
+
 Optional properties:
   - power-domains: a phandle to respective power domain node as described by
 	generic PM domain bindings (see power/power_domain.txt for more
@@ -469,6 +477,21 @@ Example 2: Examples of clock controller nodes are listed below.
 		power-domains = <&pd_cam1>;
 	};
 
+	cmu_imem: clock-controller@11060000 {
+		compatible = "samsung,exynos5433-cmu-imem";
+		reg = <0x11060000 0x1000>;
+		#clock-cells = <1>;
+
+		clock-names = "oscclk",
+			"aclk_imem_sssx_266",
+			"aclk_imem_266",
+			"aclk_imem_200";
+		clocks = <&xxti>,
+			<&cmu_top CLK_DIV_ACLK_IMEM_SSSX_266>,
+			<&cmu_top CLK_DIV_ACLK_IMEM_266>,
+			<&cmu_top CLK_DIV_ACLK_IMEM_200>;
+	};
+
 Example 3: UART controller node that consumes the clock generated by the clock
 	   controller.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/fixed-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/fixed-clock.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 0641a663ad69..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/fixed-clock.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-Binding for simple fixed-rate clock sources.
-
-This binding uses the common clock binding[1].
-
-[1] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt
-
-Required properties:
-- compatible : shall be "fixed-clock".
-- #clock-cells : from common clock binding; shall be set to 0.
-- clock-frequency : frequency of clock in Hz. Should be a single cell.
-
-Optional properties:
-- clock-accuracy : accuracy of clock in ppb (parts per billion).
-		   Should be a single cell.
-- clock-output-names : From common clock binding.
-
-Example:
-	clock {
-		compatible = "fixed-clock";
-		#clock-cells = <0>;
-		clock-frequency = <1000000000>;
-		clock-accuracy = <100>;
-	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/fixed-clock.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/fixed-clock.yaml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b657ecd0ef1c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/fixed-clock.yaml
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+%YAML 1.2
+---
+$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/clock/fixed-clock.yaml#
+$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml#
+
+title: Binding for simple fixed-rate clock sources
+
+maintainers:
+  - Michael Turquette <mturquette@baylibre.com>
+  - Stephen Boyd <sboyd@kernel.org>
+
+properties:
+  compatible:
+    const: fixed-clock
+
+  "#clock-cells":
+    const: 0
+
+  clock-frequency: true
+
+  clock-accuracy:
+    description: accuracy of clock in ppb (parts per billion).
+    $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32
+
+  clock-output-names:
+    maxItems: 1
+
+required:
+  - compatible
+  - "#clock-cells"
+  - clock-frequency
+
+additionalProperties: false
+
+examples:
+  - |
+    clock {
+      compatible = "fixed-clock";
+      #clock-cells = <0>;
+      clock-frequency = <1000000000>;
+      clock-accuracy = <100>;
+    };
+...
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/fixed-factor-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/fixed-factor-clock.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 189467a7188a..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/fixed-factor-clock.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
-Binding for simple fixed factor rate clock sources.
-
-This binding uses the common clock binding[1].
-
-[1] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt
-
-Required properties:
-- compatible : shall be "fixed-factor-clock".
-- #clock-cells : from common clock binding; shall be set to 0.
-- clock-div: fixed divider.
-- clock-mult: fixed multiplier.
-- clocks: parent clock.
-
-Optional properties:
-- clock-output-names : From common clock binding.
-
-Some clocks that require special treatments are also handled by that
-driver, with the compatibles:
-  - allwinner,sun4i-a10-pll3-2x-clk
-
-Example:
-	clock {
-		compatible = "fixed-factor-clock";
-		clocks = <&parentclk>;
-		#clock-cells = <0>;
-		clock-div = <2>;
-		clock-mult = <1>;
-	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/fixed-factor-clock.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/fixed-factor-clock.yaml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b567f8092f8c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/fixed-factor-clock.yaml
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+%YAML 1.2
+---
+$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/clock/fixed-factor-clock.yaml#
+$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml#
+
+title: Binding for simple fixed factor rate clock sources
+
+maintainers:
+  - Michael Turquette <mturquette@baylibre.com>
+  - Stephen Boyd <sboyd@kernel.org>
+
+properties:
+  compatible:
+    enum:
+      - allwinner,sun4i-a10-pll3-2x-clk
+      - fixed-factor-clock
+
+  "#clock-cells":
+    const: 0
+
+  clocks:
+    maxItems: 1
+
+  clock-div:
+    description: Fixed divider
+    allOf:
+      - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32
+      - minimum: 1
+
+  clock-mult:
+    description: Fixed multiplier
+    $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32
+
+  clock-output-names:
+    maxItems: 1
+
+required:
+  - compatible
+  - clocks
+  - "#clock-cells"
+  - clock-div
+  - clock-mult
+
+additionalProperties: false
+
+examples:
+  - |
+    clock {
+      compatible = "fixed-factor-clock";
+      clocks = <&parentclk>;
+      #clock-cells = <0>;
+      clock-div = <2>;
+      clock-mult = <1>;
+    };
+...
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/fixed-mmio-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/fixed-mmio-clock.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c359367fd1a9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/fixed-mmio-clock.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+Binding for simple memory mapped io fixed-rate clock sources.
+The driver reads a clock frequency value from a single 32-bit memory mapped
+I/O register and registers it as a fixed rate clock.
+
+It was designed for test systems, like FPGA, not for complete, finished SoCs.
+
+This binding uses the common clock binding[1].
+
+[1] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : shall be "fixed-mmio-clock".
+- #clock-cells : from common clock binding; shall be set to 0.
+- reg : Address and length of the clock value register set.
+
+Optional properties:
+- clock-output-names : From common clock binding.
+
+Example:
+sysclock: sysclock@fd020004 {
+	#clock-cells = <0>;
+	compatible = "fixed-mmio-clock";
+	reg = <0xfd020004 0x4>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx8mm-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx8mm-clock.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8e4ab9e619a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx8mm-clock.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+* Clock bindings for NXP i.MX8M Mini
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "fsl,imx8mm-ccm"
+- reg: Address and length of the register set
+- #clock-cells: Should be <1>
+- clocks: list of clock specifiers, must contain an entry for each required
+          entry in clock-names
+- clock-names: should include the following entries:
+    - "osc_32k"
+    - "osc_24m"
+    - "clk_ext1"
+    - "clk_ext2"
+    - "clk_ext3"
+    - "clk_ext4"
+
+clk: clock-controller@30380000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx8mm-ccm";
+	reg = <0x0 0x30380000 0x0 0x10000>;
+	#clock-cells = <1>;
+	clocks = <&osc_32k>, <&osc_24m>, <&clk_ext1>, <&clk_ext2>,
+		 <&clk_ext3>, <&clk_ext4>;
+	clock-names = "osc_32k", "osc_24m", "clk_ext1", "clk_ext2",
+		      "clk_ext3", "clk_ext4";
+};
+
+The clock consumer should specify the desired clock by having the clock
+ID in its "clocks" phandle cell. See include/dt-bindings/clock/imx8mm-clock.h
+for the full list of i.MX8M Mini clock IDs.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/milbeaut-clock.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/milbeaut-clock.yaml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5cf0b811821e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/milbeaut-clock.yaml
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+%YAML 1.2
+---
+$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/bindings/clock/milbeaut-clock.yaml#
+$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml#
+
+title: Milbeaut SoCs Clock Controller Binding
+
+maintainers:
+  - Taichi Sugaya <sugaya.taichi@socionext.com>
+
+description: |
+  Milbeaut SoCs Clock controller is an integrated clock controller, which
+  generates and supplies to all modules.
+
+  This binding uses common clock bindings
+  [1] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt
+
+properties:
+  compatible:
+    oneOf:
+      - items:
+          - enum:
+              - socionext,milbeaut-m10v-ccu
+  clocks:
+    maxItems: 1
+    description: external clock
+
+  '#clock-cells':
+    const: 1
+
+required:
+  - compatible
+  - reg
+  - clocks
+  - '#clock-cells'
+
+examples:
+  # Clock controller node:
+  - |
+    m10v-clk-ctrl@1d021000 {
+        compatible = "socionext,milbeaut-m10v-clk-ccu";
+        reg = <0x1d021000 0x4000>;
+        #clock-cells = <1>;
+        clocks = <&clki40mhz>;
+    };
+
+  # Required an external clock for Clock controller node:
+  - |
+    clocks {
+        clki40mhz: clki40mhz {
+            compatible = "fixed-clock";
+            #clock-cells = <0>;
+            clock-frequency = <40000000>;
+        };
+        /* other clocks */
+    };
+
+  # The clock consumer shall specify the desired clock-output of the clock
+  # controller as below by specifying output-id in its "clk" phandle cell.
+  # 2: uart
+  # 4: 32-bit timer
+  # 7: UHS-I/II
+  - |
+    serial@1e700010 {
+        compatible = "socionext,milbeaut-usio-uart";
+        reg = <0x1e700010 0x10>;
+        interrupts = <0 141 0x4>, <0 149 0x4>;
+        interrupt-names = "rx", "tx";
+        clocks = <&clk 2>;
+    };
+
+...
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/nvidia,tegra124-dfll.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/nvidia,tegra124-dfll.txt
index dff236f524a7..958e0ad78c52 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/nvidia,tegra124-dfll.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/nvidia,tegra124-dfll.txt
@@ -8,10 +8,11 @@ the fast CPU cluster. It consists of a free-running voltage controlled
 oscillator connected to the CPU voltage rail (VDD_CPU), and a closed loop
 control module that will automatically adjust the VDD_CPU voltage by
 communicating with an off-chip PMIC either via an I2C bus or via PWM signals.
-Currently only the I2C mode is supported by these bindings.
 
 Required properties:
-- compatible : should be "nvidia,tegra124-dfll"
+- compatible : should be one of:
+  - "nvidia,tegra124-dfll": for Tegra124
+  - "nvidia,tegra210-dfll": for Tegra210
 - reg : Defines the following set of registers, in the order listed:
         - registers for the DFLL control logic.
         - registers for the I2C output logic.
@@ -45,10 +46,31 @@ Required properties for the control loop parameters:
 Optional properties for the control loop parameters:
 - nvidia,cg-scale: Boolean value, see the field DFLL_PARAMS_CG_SCALE in the TRM.
 
+Optional properties for mode selection:
+- nvidia,pwm-to-pmic: Use PWM to control regulator rather then I2C.
+
 Required properties for I2C mode:
 - nvidia,i2c-fs-rate: I2C transfer rate, if using full speed mode.
 
-Example:
+Required properties for PWM mode:
+- nvidia,pwm-period-nanoseconds: period of PWM square wave in nanoseconds.
+- nvidia,pwm-tristate-microvolts: Regulator voltage in micro volts when PWM
+  control is disabled and the PWM output is tristated. Note that this voltage is
+  configured in hardware, typically via a resistor divider.
+- nvidia,pwm-min-microvolts: Regulator voltage in micro volts when PWM control
+  is enabled and PWM output is low. Hence, this is the minimum output voltage
+  that the regulator supports when PWM control is enabled.
+- nvidia,pwm-voltage-step-microvolts: Voltage increase in micro volts
+  corresponding to a 1/33th increase in duty cycle. Eg the voltage for 2/33th
+  duty cycle would be: nvidia,pwm-min-microvolts +
+  nvidia,pwm-voltage-step-microvolts * 2.
+- pinctrl-0: I/O pad configuration when PWM control is enabled.
+- pinctrl-1: I/O pad configuration when PWM control is disabled.
+- pinctrl-names: must include the following entries:
+  - dvfs_pwm_enable: I/O pad configuration when PWM control is enabled.
+  - dvfs_pwm_disable: I/O pad configuration when PWM control is disabled.
+
+Example for I2C:
 
 clock@70110000 {
         compatible = "nvidia,tegra124-dfll";
@@ -76,3 +98,58 @@ clock@70110000 {
 
         nvidia,i2c-fs-rate = <400000>;
 };
+
+Example for PWM:
+
+clock@70110000 {
+	compatible = "nvidia,tegra124-dfll";
+	reg = <0 0x70110000 0 0x100>, /* DFLL control */
+	      <0 0x70110000 0 0x100>, /* I2C output control */
+	      <0 0x70110100 0 0x100>, /* Integrated I2C controller */
+	      <0 0x70110200 0 0x100>; /* Look-up table RAM */
+	interrupts = <GIC_SPI 62 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
+	clocks = <&tegra_car TEGRA210_CLK_DFLL_SOC>,
+	         <&tegra_car TEGRA210_CLK_DFLL_REF>,
+		 <&tegra_car TEGRA124_CLK_I2C5>;;
+	clock-names = "soc", "ref", "i2c";
+	resets = <&tegra_car TEGRA124_RST_DFLL_DVCO>;
+	reset-names = "dvco";
+	#clock-cells = <0>;
+	clock-output-names = "dfllCPU_out";
+
+	nvidia,sample-rate = <25000>;
+	nvidia,droop-ctrl = <0x00000f00>;
+	nvidia,force-mode = <1>;
+	nvidia,cf = <6>;
+	nvidia,ci = <0>;
+	nvidia,cg = <2>;
+
+	nvidia,pwm-min-microvolts = <708000>; /* 708mV */
+	nvidia,pwm-period-nanoseconds = <2500>; /* 2.5us */
+	nvidia,pwm-to-pmic;
+	nvidia,pwm-tristate-microvolts = <1000000>;
+	nvidia,pwm-voltage-step-microvolts = <19200>; /* 19.2mV */
+
+	pinctrl-names = "dvfs_pwm_enable", "dvfs_pwm_disable";
+	pinctrl-0 = <&dvfs_pwm_active_state>;
+	pinctrl-1 = <&dvfs_pwm_inactive_state>;
+};
+
+/* pinmux nodes added for completeness. Binding doc can be found in:
+ * Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/nvidia,tegra210-pinmux.txt
+ */
+
+pinmux: pinmux@700008d4 {
+	dvfs_pwm_active_state: dvfs_pwm_active {
+		dvfs_pwm_pbb1 {
+			nvidia,pins = "dvfs_pwm_pbb1";
+			nvidia,tristate = <TEGRA_PIN_DISABLE>;
+		};
+	};
+	dvfs_pwm_inactive_state: dvfs_pwm_inactive {
+		dvfs_pwm_pbb1 {
+			nvidia,pins = "dvfs_pwm_pbb1";
+			nvidia,tristate = <TEGRA_PIN_ENABLE>;
+		};
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/qcom,rpmcc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/qcom,rpmcc.txt
index 87b4949e9bc8..944719bd586f 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/qcom,rpmcc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/qcom,rpmcc.txt
@@ -16,6 +16,7 @@ Required properties :
 			"qcom,rpmcc-msm8974", "qcom,rpmcc"
 			"qcom,rpmcc-apq8064", "qcom,rpmcc"
 			"qcom,rpmcc-msm8996", "qcom,rpmcc"
+			"qcom,rpmcc-msm8998", "qcom,rpmcc"
 			"qcom,rpmcc-qcs404", "qcom,rpmcc"
 
 - #clock-cells : shall contain 1
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/qcom,turingcc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/qcom,turingcc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..126517de5f9a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/qcom,turingcc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+Qualcomm Turing Clock & Reset Controller Binding
+------------------------------------------------
+
+Required properties :
+- compatible: shall contain "qcom,qcs404-turingcc".
+- reg: shall contain base register location and length.
+- clocks: ahb clock for the TuringCC
+- #clock-cells: from common clock binding, shall contain 1.
+- #reset-cells: from common reset binding, shall contain 1.
+
+Example:
+	turingcc: clock-controller@800000 {
+		compatible = "qcom,qcs404-turingcc";
+		reg = <0x00800000 0x30000>;
+		clocks = <&gcc GCC_CDSP_CFG_AHB_CLK>;
+
+		#clock-cells = <1>;
+		#reset-cells = <1>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/qoriq-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/qoriq-clock.txt
index c655f28d5918..f7d48f23da44 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/qoriq-clock.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/qoriq-clock.txt
@@ -39,6 +39,7 @@ Required properties:
 	* "fsl,b4860-clockgen"
 	* "fsl,ls1012a-clockgen"
 	* "fsl,ls1021a-clockgen"
+	* "fsl,ls1028a-clockgen"
 	* "fsl,ls1043a-clockgen"
 	* "fsl,ls1046a-clockgen"
 	* "fsl,ls1088a-clockgen"
@@ -83,8 +84,8 @@ second cell is the clock index for the specified type.
 	1	cmux		index (n in CLKCnCSR)
 	2	hwaccel		index (n in CLKCGnHWACSR)
 	3	fman		0 for fm1, 1 for fm2
-	4	platform pll	0=pll, 1=pll/2, 2=pll/3, 3=pll/4
-				4=pll/5, 5=pll/6, 6=pll/7, 7=pll/8
+	4	platform pll	n=pll/(n+1). For example, when n=1,
+				that means output_freq=PLL_freq/2.
 	5	coreclk		must be 0
 
 3. Example
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/samsung,s5pv210-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/samsung,s5pv210-clock.txt
index 15b48e20a061..a86c83bf9d4e 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/samsung,s5pv210-clock.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/samsung,s5pv210-clock.txt
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ board device tree, including the system base clock, as selected by XOM[0]
 pin of the SoC. Refer to generic fixed rate clock bindings
 documentation[1] for more information how to specify these clocks.
 
-[1] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/fixed-clock.txt
+[1] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/fixed-clock.yaml
 
 Example: Clock controller node:
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/sifive/fu540-prci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/sifive/fu540-prci.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..349808f4fb8c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/sifive/fu540-prci.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+SiFive FU540 PRCI bindings
+
+On the FU540 family of SoCs, most system-wide clock and reset integration
+is via the PRCI IP block.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "sifive,<chip>-prci".  Only one value is
+	supported: "sifive,fu540-c000-prci"
+- reg: Should describe the PRCI's register target physical address region
+- clocks: Should point to the hfclk device tree node and the rtcclk
+          device tree node.  The RTC clock here is not a time-of-day clock,
+	  but is instead a high-stability clock source for system timers
+	  and cycle counters.
+- #clock-cells: Should be <1>
+
+The clock consumer should specify the desired clock via the clock ID
+macros defined in include/dt-bindings/clock/sifive-fu540-prci.h.
+These macros begin with PRCI_CLK_.
+
+The hfclk and rtcclk nodes are required, and represent physical
+crystals or resonators located on the PCB.  These nodes should be present
+underneath /, rather than /soc.
+
+Examples:
+
+/* under /, in PCB-specific DT data */
+hfclk: hfclk {
+	#clock-cells = <0>;
+	compatible = "fixed-clock";
+	clock-frequency = <33333333>;
+	clock-output-names = "hfclk";
+};
+rtcclk: rtcclk {
+	#clock-cells = <0>;
+	compatible = "fixed-clock";
+	clock-frequency = <1000000>;
+	clock-output-names = "rtcclk";
+};
+
+/* under /soc, in SoC-specific DT data */
+prci: clock-controller@10000000 {
+	compatible = "sifive,fu540-c000-prci";
+	reg = <0x0 0x10000000 0x0 0x1000>;
+	clocks = <&hfclk>, <&rtcclk>;
+	#clock-cells = <1>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/st,stm32-rcc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/st,stm32-rcc.txt
index b240121d2ac9..cfa04b614d8a 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/st,stm32-rcc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/st,stm32-rcc.txt
@@ -11,6 +11,8 @@ Required properties:
   "st,stm32f42xx-rcc"
   "st,stm32f469-rcc"
   "st,stm32f746-rcc"
+  "st,stm32f769-rcc"
+
 - reg: should be register base and length as documented in the
   datasheet
 - #reset-cells: 1, see below
@@ -102,6 +104,10 @@ The secondary index is bound with the following magic numbers:
 	28	CLK_I2C3
 	29	CLK_I2C4
 	30	CLK_LPTIMER	(LPTimer1 clock)
+	31	CLK_PLL_SRC
+	32	CLK_DFSDM1
+	33	CLK_ADFSDM1
+	34	CLK_F769_DSI
 )
 
 Example:
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/xlnx,zynqmp-clk.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/xlnx,zynqmp-clk.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..391ee1a60bed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/xlnx,zynqmp-clk.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Device Tree Clock bindings for the Zynq Ultrascale+ MPSoC controlled using
+Zynq MPSoC firmware interface
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------
+The clock controller is a h/w block of Zynq Ultrascale+ MPSoC clock
+tree. It reads required input clock frequencies from the devicetree and acts
+as clock provider for all clock consumers of PS clocks.
+
+See clock_bindings.txt for more information on the generic clock bindings.
+
+Required properties:
+ - #clock-cells:	Must be 1
+ - compatible:		Must contain:	"xlnx,zynqmp-clk"
+ - clocks:		List of clock specifiers which are external input
+			clocks to the given clock controller. Please refer
+			the next section to find the input clocks for a
+			given controller.
+ - clock-names:		List of clock names which are exteral input clocks
+			to the given clock controller. Please refer to the
+			clock bindings for more details.
+
+Input clocks for zynqmp Ultrascale+ clock controller:
+
+The Zynq UltraScale+ MPSoC has one primary and four alternative reference clock
+inputs. These required clock inputs are:
+ - pss_ref_clk (PS reference clock)
+ - video_clk (reference clock for video system )
+ - pss_alt_ref_clk (alternative PS reference clock)
+ - aux_ref_clk
+ - gt_crx_ref_clk (transceiver reference clock)
+
+The following strings are optional parameters to the 'clock-names' property in
+order to provide an optional (E)MIO clock source:
+ - swdt0_ext_clk
+ - swdt1_ext_clk
+ - gem0_emio_clk
+ - gem1_emio_clk
+ - gem2_emio_clk
+ - gem3_emio_clk
+ - mio_clk_XX		# with XX = 00..77
+ - mio_clk_50_or_51	#for the mux clock to gem tsu from 50 or 51
+
+
+Output clocks are registered based on clock information received
+from firmware. Output clocks indexes are mentioned in
+include/dt-bindings/clock/xlnx-zynqmp-clk.h.
+
+-------
+Example
+-------
+
+firmware {
+	zynqmp_firmware: zynqmp-firmware {
+		compatible = "xlnx,zynqmp-firmware";
+		method = "smc";
+		zynqmp_clk: clock-controller {
+			#clock-cells = <1>;
+			compatible = "xlnx,zynqmp-clk";
+			clocks = <&pss_ref_clk>, <&video_clk>, <&pss_alt_ref_clk>, <&aux_ref_clk>, <&gt_crx_ref_clk>;
+			clock-names = "pss_ref_clk", "video_clk", "pss_alt_ref_clk","aux_ref_clk", "gt_crx_ref_clk";
+		};
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/connector/usb-connector.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/connector/usb-connector.txt
index a9a2f2fc44f2..cef556d4e5ee 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/connector/usb-connector.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/connector/usb-connector.txt
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ Required properties for usb-c-connector with power delivery support:
 Required nodes:
 - any data bus to the connector should be modeled using the OF graph bindings
   specified in bindings/graph.txt, unless the bus is between parent node and
-  the connector. Since single connector can have multpile data buses every bus
+  the connector. Since single connector can have multiple data buses every bus
   has assigned OF graph port number as follows:
     0: High Speed (HS), present in all connectors,
     1: Super Speed (SS), present in SS capable connectors,
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/counter/ftm-quaddec.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/counter/ftm-quaddec.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4d18cd722074
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/counter/ftm-quaddec.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+FlexTimer Quadrature decoder counter
+
+This driver exposes a simple counter for the quadrature decoder mode.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible:		Must be "fsl,ftm-quaddec".
+- reg:			Must be set to the memory region of the flextimer.
+
+Optional property:
+- big-endian:		Access the device registers in big-endian mode.
+
+Example:
+		counter0: counter@29d0000 {
+			compatible = "fsl,ftm-quaddec";
+			reg = <0x0 0x29d0000 0x0 0x10000>;
+			big-endian;
+			status = "disabled";
+		};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/counter/stm32-lptimer-cnt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/counter/stm32-lptimer-cnt.txt
index a04aa5c04103..e90bc47f752a 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/counter/stm32-lptimer-cnt.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/counter/stm32-lptimer-cnt.txt
@@ -10,8 +10,9 @@ See ../mfd/stm32-lptimer.txt for details about the parent node.
 
 Required properties:
 - compatible:		Must be "st,stm32-lptimer-counter".
-- pinctrl-names: 	Set to "default".
-- pinctrl-0: 		List of phandles pointing to pin configuration nodes,
+- pinctrl-names: 	Set to "default". An additional "sleep" state can be
+			defined to set pins in sleep state.
+- pinctrl-n: 		List of phandles pointing to pin configuration nodes,
 			to set IN1/IN2 pins in mode of operation for Low-Power
 			Timer input on external pin.
 
@@ -21,7 +22,8 @@ Example:
 		...
 		counter {
 			compatible = "st,stm32-lptimer-counter";
-			pinctrl-names = "default";
+			pinctrl-names = "default", "sleep";
 			pinctrl-0 = <&lptim1_in_pins>;
+			pinctrl-1 = <&lptim1_sleep_in_pins>;
 		};
 	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/counter/stm32-timer-cnt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/counter/stm32-timer-cnt.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c52fcdd4bf6c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/counter/stm32-timer-cnt.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+STMicroelectronics STM32 Timer quadrature encoder
+
+STM32 Timer provides quadrature encoder to detect
+angular position and direction of rotary elements,
+from IN1 and IN2 input signals.
+
+Must be a sub-node of an STM32 Timer device tree node.
+See ../mfd/stm32-timers.txt for details about the parent node.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible:		Must be "st,stm32-timer-counter".
+- pinctrl-names: 	Set to "default".
+- pinctrl-0: 		List of phandles pointing to pin configuration nodes,
+			to set CH1/CH2 pins in mode of operation for STM32
+			Timer input on external pin.
+
+Example:
+	timers@40010000 {
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+		compatible = "st,stm32-timers";
+		reg = <0x40010000 0x400>;
+		clocks = <&rcc 0 160>;
+		clock-names = "int";
+
+		counter {
+			compatible = "st,stm32-timer-counter";
+			pinctrl-names = "default";
+			pinctrl-0 = <&tim1_in_pins>;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/cpufreq/nvidia,tegra124-cpufreq.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/cpufreq/nvidia,tegra124-cpufreq.txt
index b1669fbfb740..03196d5ea515 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/cpufreq/nvidia,tegra124-cpufreq.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/cpufreq/nvidia,tegra124-cpufreq.txt
@@ -9,11 +9,9 @@ Required properties:
   See ../clocks/clock-bindings.txt for details.
 - clock-names: Must include the following entries:
   - cpu_g: Clock mux for the fast CPU cluster.
-  - cpu_lp: Clock mux for the low-power CPU cluster.
   - pll_x: Fast PLL clocksource.
   - pll_p: Auxiliary PLL used during fast PLL rate changes.
   - dfll: Fast DFLL clocksource that also automatically scales CPU voltage.
-- vdd-cpu-supply: Regulator for CPU voltage
 
 Optional properties:
 - clock-latency: Specify the possible maximum transition latency for clock,
@@ -31,13 +29,11 @@ cpus {
 		reg = <0>;
 
 		clocks = <&tegra_car TEGRA124_CLK_CCLK_G>,
-			 <&tegra_car TEGRA124_CLK_CCLK_LP>,
 			 <&tegra_car TEGRA124_CLK_PLL_X>,
 			 <&tegra_car TEGRA124_CLK_PLL_P>,
 			 <&dfll>;
-		clock-names = "cpu_g", "cpu_lp", "pll_x", "pll_p", "dfll";
+		clock-names = "cpu_g", "pll_x", "pll_p", "dfll";
 		clock-latency = <300000>;
-		vdd-cpu-supply: <&vdd_cpu>;
 	};
 
 	<...>
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/samsung-slimsss.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/samsung-slimsss.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7ec9a5a7727a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/samsung-slimsss.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+Samsung SoC SlimSSS (Slim Security SubSystem) module
+
+The SlimSSS module in Exynos5433 SoC supports the following:
+-- Feeder (FeedCtrl)
+-- Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) with ECB,CBC,CTR,XTS and (CBC/XTS)/CTS
+-- SHA-1/SHA-256 and (SHA-1/SHA-256)/HMAC
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible : Should contain entry for slimSSS version:
+  - "samsung,exynos5433-slim-sss" for Exynos5433 SoC.
+- reg : Offset and length of the register set for the module
+- interrupts : interrupt specifiers of SlimSSS module interrupts (one feed
+		control interrupt).
+
+- clocks : list of clock phandle and specifier pairs for all clocks listed in
+		clock-names property.
+- clock-names : list of device clock input names; should contain "pclk" and
+		"aclk" for slim-sss in Exynos5433.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/amlogic,meson-dw-hdmi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/amlogic,meson-dw-hdmi.txt
index bf4a18047309..3a50a7862cf3 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/amlogic,meson-dw-hdmi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/amlogic,meson-dw-hdmi.txt
@@ -37,6 +37,7 @@ Required properties:
 	- GXL (S905X, S905D) : "amlogic,meson-gxl-dw-hdmi"
 	- GXM (S912) : "amlogic,meson-gxm-dw-hdmi"
 	followed by the common "amlogic,meson-gx-dw-hdmi"
+	- G12A (S905X2, S905Y2, S905D2) : "amlogic,meson-g12a-dw-hdmi"
 - reg: Physical base address and length of the controller's registers.
 - interrupts: The HDMI interrupt number
 - clocks, clock-names : must have the phandles to the HDMI iahb and isfr clocks,
@@ -66,6 +67,9 @@ corresponding to each HDMI output and input.
  S905X (GXL)	VENC Input	TMDS Output
  S905D (GXL)	VENC Input	TMDS Output
  S912 (GXM)	VENC Input	TMDS Output
+ S905X2 (G12A)	VENC Input	TMDS Output
+ S905Y2 (G12A)	VENC Input	TMDS Output
+ S905D2 (G12A)	VENC Input	TMDS Output
 
 Example:
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/amlogic,meson-vpu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/amlogic,meson-vpu.txt
index c65fd7a7467c..be40a780501c 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/amlogic,meson-vpu.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/amlogic,meson-vpu.txt
@@ -57,18 +57,18 @@ Required properties:
 	- GXL (S905X, S905D) : "amlogic,meson-gxl-vpu"
 	- GXM (S912) : "amlogic,meson-gxm-vpu"
 	followed by the common "amlogic,meson-gx-vpu"
+	- G12A (S905X2, S905Y2, S905D2) : "amlogic,meson-g12a-vpu"
 - reg: base address and size of he following memory-mapped regions :
 	- vpu
 	- hhi
-	- dmc
 - reg-names: should contain the names of the previous memory regions
 - interrupts: should contain the VENC Vsync interrupt number
+- amlogic,canvas: phandle to canvas provider node as described in the file
+	../soc/amlogic/amlogic,canvas.txt
 
 Optional properties:
 - power-domains: Optional phandle to associated power domain as described in
 	the file ../power/power_domain.txt
-- amlogic,canvas: phandle to canvas provider node as described in the file
-	../soc/amlogic/amlogic,canvas.txt
 
 Required nodes:
 
@@ -84,6 +84,9 @@ corresponding to each VPU output.
  S905X (GXL)	CVBS VDAC	HDMI-TX
  S905D (GXL)	CVBS VDAC	HDMI-TX
  S912 (GXM)	CVBS VDAC	HDMI-TX
+ S905X2 (G12A)	CVBS VDAC	HDMI-TX
+ S905Y2 (G12A)	CVBS VDAC	HDMI-TX
+ S905D2 (G12A)	CVBS VDAC	HDMI-TX
 
 Example:
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/arm,komeda.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/arm,komeda.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..02b226532ebd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/arm,komeda.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+Device Tree bindings for Arm Komeda display driver
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "arm,mali-d71"
+- reg: Physical base address and length of the registers in the system
+- interrupts: the interrupt line number of the device in the system
+- clocks: A list of phandle + clock-specifier pairs, one for each entry
+    in 'clock-names'
+- clock-names: A list of clock names. It should contain:
+      - "mclk": for the main processor clock
+      - "pclk": for the APB interface clock
+- #address-cells: Must be 1
+- #size-cells: Must be 0
+
+Required properties for sub-node: pipeline@nq
+Each device contains one or two pipeline sub-nodes (at least one), each
+pipeline node should provide properties:
+- reg: Zero-indexed identifier for the pipeline
+- clocks: A list of phandle + clock-specifier pairs, one for each entry
+    in 'clock-names'
+- clock-names: should contain:
+      - "pxclk": pixel clock
+      - "aclk": AXI interface clock
+
+- port: each pipeline connect to an encoder input port. The connection is
+    modeled using the OF graph bindings specified in
+    Documentation/devicetree/bindings/graph.txt
+
+Optional properties:
+  - memory-region: phandle to a node describing memory (see
+    Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reserved-memory/reserved-memory.txt)
+    to be used for the framebuffer; if not present, the framebuffer may
+    be located anywhere in memory.
+
+Example:
+/ {
+	...
+
+	dp0: display@c00000 {
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+		compatible = "arm,mali-d71";
+		reg = <0xc00000 0x20000>;
+		interrupts = <0 168 4>;
+		clocks = <&dpu_mclk>, <&dpu_aclk>;
+		clock-names = "mclk", "pclk";
+
+		dp0_pipe0: pipeline@0 {
+			clocks = <&fpgaosc2>, <&dpu_aclk>;
+			clock-names = "pxclk", "aclk";
+			reg = <0>;
+
+			port {
+				dp0_pipe0_out: endpoint {
+					remote-endpoint = <&db_dvi0_in>;
+				};
+			};
+		};
+
+		dp0_pipe1: pipeline@1 {
+			clocks = <&fpgaosc2>, <&dpu_aclk>;
+			clock-names = "pxclk", "aclk";
+			reg = <1>;
+
+			port {
+				dp0_pipe1_out: endpoint {
+					remote-endpoint = <&db_dvi1_in>;
+				};
+			};
+		};
+	};
+	...
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/cdns,dsi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/cdns,dsi.txt
index f5725bb6c61c..525a4bfd8634 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/cdns,dsi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/cdns,dsi.txt
@@ -31,28 +31,7 @@ Required subnodes:
 - one subnode per DSI device connected on the DSI bus. Each DSI device should
   contain a reg property encoding its virtual channel.
 
-Cadence DPHY
-============
-
-Cadence DPHY block.
-
-Required properties:
-- compatible: should be set to "cdns,dphy".
-- reg: physical base address and length of the DPHY registers.
-- clocks: DPHY reference clocks.
-- clock-names: must contain "psm" and "pll_ref".
-- #phy-cells: must be set to 0.
-
-
 Example:
-	dphy0: dphy@fd0e0000{
-		compatible = "cdns,dphy";
-		reg = <0x0 0xfd0e0000 0x0 0x1000>;
-		clocks = <&psm_clk>, <&pll_ref_clk>;
-		clock-names = "psm", "pll_ref";
-		#phy-cells = <0>;
-	};
-
 	dsi0: dsi@fd0c0000 {
 		compatible = "cdns,dsi";
 		reg = <0x0 0xfd0c0000 0x0 0x1000>;
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/lvds-transmitter.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/lvds-transmitter.txt
index 50220190c203..60091db5dfa5 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/lvds-transmitter.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/lvds-transmitter.txt
@@ -22,13 +22,11 @@ among others.
 
 Required properties:
 
-- compatible: Must be one or more of the following
-  - "ti,ds90c185" for the TI DS90C185 FPD-Link Serializer
-  - "lvds-encoder" for a generic LVDS encoder device
+- compatible: Must be "lvds-encoder"
 
-  When compatible with the generic version, nodes must list the
-  device-specific version corresponding to the device first
-  followed by the generic version.
+  Any encoder compatible with this generic binding, but with additional
+  properties not listed here, must list a device specific compatible first
+  followed by this generic compatible.
 
 Required nodes:
 
@@ -44,8 +42,6 @@ Example
 
 lvds-encoder {
 	compatible = "lvds-encoder";
-	#address-cells = <1>;
-	#size-cells = <0>;
 
 	ports {
 		#address-cells = <1>;
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/renesas,lvds.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/renesas,lvds.txt
index ba5469dd09f3..900a884ad9f5 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/renesas,lvds.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/renesas,lvds.txt
@@ -8,6 +8,8 @@ Required properties:
 
 - compatible : Shall contain one of
   - "renesas,r8a7743-lvds" for R8A7743 (RZ/G1M) compatible LVDS encoders
+  - "renesas,r8a7744-lvds" for R8A7744 (RZ/G1N) compatible LVDS encoders
+  - "renesas,r8a774c0-lvds" for R8A774C0 (RZ/G2E) compatible LVDS encoders
   - "renesas,r8a7790-lvds" for R8A7790 (R-Car H2) compatible LVDS encoders
   - "renesas,r8a7791-lvds" for R8A7791 (R-Car M2-W) compatible LVDS encoders
   - "renesas,r8a7793-lvds" for R8A7793 (R-Car M2-N) compatible LVDS encoders
@@ -25,7 +27,7 @@ Required properties:
 - clock-names: Name of the clocks. This property is model-dependent.
   - The functional clock, which mandatory for all models, shall be listed
     first, and shall be named "fck".
-  - On R8A77990 and R8A77995, the LVDS encoder can use the EXTAL or
+  - On R8A77990, R8A77995 and R8A774C0, the LVDS encoder can use the EXTAL or
     DU_DOTCLKINx clocks. Those clocks are optional. When supplied they must be
     named "extal" and "dclkin.x" respectively, with "x" being the DU_DOTCLKIN
     numerical index.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/thine,thc63lvdm83d.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/thine,thc63lvdm83d.txt
index 527e236e9a2a..fee3c88e1a17 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/thine,thc63lvdm83d.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/thine,thc63lvdm83d.txt
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ Required properties:
 
 Optional properties:
 
-- pwdn-gpios: Power down control GPIO
+- powerdown-gpios: Power down control GPIO (the /PWDN pin, active low).
 
 Required nodes:
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/ti,ds90c185.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/ti,ds90c185.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e575f996959a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/ti,ds90c185.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+Texas Instruments FPD-Link (LVDS) Serializer
+--------------------------------------------
+
+The DS90C185 and DS90C187 are low-power serializers for portable
+battery-powered applications that reduces the size of the RGB
+interface between the host GPU and the display.
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible: Should be
+  "ti,ds90c185", "lvds-encoder"  for the TI DS90C185 FPD-Link Serializer
+  "ti,ds90c187", "lvds-encoder"  for the TI DS90C187 FPD-Link Serializer
+
+Optional properties:
+
+- powerdown-gpios: Power down control GPIO (the PDB pin, active-low)
+
+Required nodes:
+
+The devices have two video ports. Their connections are modeled using the OF
+graph bindings specified in Documentation/devicetree/bindings/graph.txt.
+
+- Video port 0 for parallel input
+- Video port 1 for LVDS output
+
+
+Example
+-------
+
+lvds-encoder {
+	compatible = "ti,ds90c185", "lvds-encoder";
+
+	powerdown-gpios = <&gpio 17 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>;
+
+	ports {
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+
+		port@0 {
+			reg = <0>;
+
+			lvds_enc_in: endpoint {
+				remote-endpoint = <&lcdc_out_rgb>;
+			};
+		};
+
+		port@1 {
+			reg = <1>;
+
+			lvds_enc_out: endpoint {
+				remote-endpoint = <&lvds_panel_in>;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/ti,tfp410.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/ti,tfp410.txt
index 54d7e31525ec..5ff4f64ef8e8 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/ti,tfp410.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/ti,tfp410.txt
@@ -6,15 +6,32 @@ Required properties:
 
 Optional properties:
 - powerdown-gpios: power-down gpio
-- reg: I2C address. If and only if present the device node
-       should be placed into the i2c controller node where the
-       tfp410 i2c is connected to.
+- reg: I2C address. If and only if present the device node should be placed
+  into the I2C controller node where the TFP410 I2C is connected to.
+- ti,deskew: data de-skew in 350ps increments, from -4 to +3, as configured
+  through th DK[3:1] pins. This property shall be present only if the TFP410
+  is not connected through I2C.
 
 Required nodes:
-- Video port 0 for DPI input [1].
-- Video port 1 for DVI output [1].
 
-[1]: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/video-interfaces.txt
+This device has two video ports. Their connections are modeled using the OF
+graph bindings specified in [1]. Each port node shall have a single endpoint.
+
+- Port 0 is the DPI input port. Its endpoint subnode shall contain a
+  pclk-sample and bus-width property and a remote-endpoint property as specified
+  in [1].
+  - If pclk-sample is not defined, pclk-sample = 0 should be assumed for
+    backward compatibility.
+  - If bus-width is not defined then bus-width = 24 should be assumed for
+    backward compatibility.
+    bus-width = 24: 24 data lines are connected and single-edge mode
+    bus-width = 12: 12 data lines are connected and dual-edge mode
+
+- Port 1 is the DVI output port. Its endpoint subnode shall contain a
+  remote-endpoint property is specified in [1].
+
+[1] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/video-interfaces.txt
+
 
 Example
 -------
@@ -22,6 +39,7 @@ Example
 tfp410: encoder@0 {
 	compatible = "ti,tfp410";
 	powerdown-gpios = <&twl_gpio 2 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>;
+	ti,deskew = <4>;
 
 	ports {
 		#address-cells = <1>;
@@ -31,6 +49,8 @@ tfp410: encoder@0 {
 			reg = <0>;
 
 			tfp410_in: endpoint@0 {
+				pclk-sample = <1>;
+				bus-width = <24>;
 				remote-endpoint = <&dpi_out>;
 			};
 		};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/msm/gmu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/msm/gmu.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..90af5b0a56a9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/msm/gmu.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+Qualcomm adreno/snapdragon GMU (Graphics management unit)
+
+The GMU is a programmable power controller for the GPU. the CPU controls the
+GMU which in turn handles power controls for the GPU.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "qcom,adreno-gmu-XYZ.W", "qcom,adreno-gmu"
+    for example: "qcom,adreno-gmu-630.2", "qcom,adreno-gmu"
+  Note that you need to list the less specific "qcom,adreno-gmu"
+  for generic matches and the more specific identifier to identify
+  the specific device.
+- reg: Physical base address and length of the GMU registers.
+- reg-names: Matching names for the register regions
+  * "gmu"
+  * "gmu_pdc"
+  * "gmu_pdc_seg"
+- interrupts: The interrupt signals from the GMU.
+- interrupt-names: Matching names for the interrupts
+  * "hfi"
+  * "gmu"
+- clocks: phandles to the device clocks
+- clock-names: Matching names for the clocks
+   * "gmu"
+   * "cxo"
+   * "axi"
+   * "mnoc"
+- power-domains: should be:
+	<&clock_gpucc GPU_CX_GDSC>
+	<&clock_gpucc GPU_GX_GDSC>
+- power-domain-names: Matching names for the power domains
+- iommus: phandle to the adreno iommu
+- operating-points-v2: phandle to the OPP operating points
+
+Example:
+
+/ {
+	...
+
+	gmu: gmu@506a000 {
+		compatible="qcom,adreno-gmu-630.2", "qcom,adreno-gmu";
+
+		reg = <0x506a000 0x30000>,
+			<0xb280000 0x10000>,
+			<0xb480000 0x10000>;
+		reg-names = "gmu", "gmu_pdc", "gmu_pdc_seq";
+
+		interrupts = <GIC_SPI 304 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>,
+		     <GIC_SPI 305 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
+		interrupt-names = "hfi", "gmu";
+
+		clocks = <&gpucc GPU_CC_CX_GMU_CLK>,
+			<&gpucc GPU_CC_CXO_CLK>,
+			<&gcc GCC_DDRSS_GPU_AXI_CLK>,
+			<&gcc GCC_GPU_MEMNOC_GFX_CLK>;
+		clock-names = "gmu", "cxo", "axi", "memnoc";
+
+		power-domains = <&gpucc GPU_CX_GDSC>,
+				<&gpucc GPU_GX_GDSC>;
+		power-domain-names = "cx", "gx";
+
+		iommus = <&adreno_smmu 5>;
+
+		operating-points-v2 = <&gmu_opp_table>;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/msm/gpu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/msm/gpu.txt
index f8759145ce1a..2b8fd26c43b0 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/msm/gpu.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/msm/gpu.txt
@@ -10,14 +10,28 @@ Required properties:
   If "amd,imageon" is used, there should be no top level msm device.
 - reg: Physical base address and length of the controller's registers.
 - interrupts: The interrupt signal from the gpu.
-- clocks: device clocks
+- clocks: device clocks (if applicable)
   See ../clocks/clock-bindings.txt for details.
-- clock-names: the following clocks are required:
+- clock-names: the following clocks are required by a3xx, a4xx and a5xx
+  cores:
   * "core"
   * "iface"
   * "mem_iface"
+  For GMU attached devices the GPU clocks are not used and are not required. The
+  following devices should not list clocks:
+   - qcom,adreno-630.2
+- iommus: optional phandle to an adreno iommu instance
+- operating-points-v2: optional phandle to the OPP operating points
+- interconnects: optional phandle to an interconnect provider.  See
+  ../interconnect/interconnect.txt for details.
+- qcom,gmu: For GMU attached devices a phandle to the GMU device that will
+  control the power for the GPU. Applicable targets:
+    - qcom,adreno-630.2
+- zap-shader: For a5xx and a6xx devices this node contains a memory-region that
+  points to reserved memory to store the zap shader that can be used to help
+  bring the GPU out of secure mode.
 
-Example:
+Example 3xx/4xx/a5xx:
 
 / {
 	...
@@ -37,3 +51,36 @@ Example:
 		    <&mmcc MMSS_IMEM_AHB_CLK>;
 	};
 };
+
+Example a6xx (with GMU):
+
+/ {
+	...
+
+	gpu@5000000 {
+		compatible = "qcom,adreno-630.2", "qcom,adreno";
+		#stream-id-cells = <16>;
+
+		reg = <0x5000000 0x40000>, <0x509e000 0x10>;
+		reg-names = "kgsl_3d0_reg_memory", "cx_mem";
+
+		/*
+		 * Look ma, no clocks! The GPU clocks and power are
+		 * controlled entirely by the GMU
+		 */
+
+		interrupts = <GIC_SPI 300 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
+
+		iommus = <&adreno_smmu 0>;
+
+		operating-points-v2 = <&gpu_opp_table>;
+
+		interconnects = <&rsc_hlos MASTER_GFX3D &rsc_hlos SLAVE_EBI1>;
+
+		qcom,gmu = <&gmu>;
+
+		zap-shader {
+			memory-region = <&zap_shader_region>;
+		};
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/auo,g101evn010 b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/auo,g101evn010.txt
index bc6a0c858e23..bc6a0c858e23 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/auo,g101evn010
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/auo,g101evn010.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/feiyang,fy07024di26a30d.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/feiyang,fy07024di26a30d.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..82caa7b65ae8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/feiyang,fy07024di26a30d.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+Feiyang FY07024DI26A30-D 7" MIPI-DSI LCD Panel
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: must be "feiyang,fy07024di26a30d"
+- reg: DSI virtual channel used by that screen
+- avdd-supply: analog regulator dc1 switch
+- dvdd-supply: 3v3 digital regulator
+- reset-gpios: a GPIO phandle for the reset pin
+
+Optional properties:
+- backlight: phandle for the backlight control.
+
+panel@0 {
+	compatible = "feiyang,fy07024di26a30d";
+	reg = <0>;
+	avdd-supply = <&reg_dc1sw>;
+	dvdd-supply = <&reg_dldo2>;
+	reset-gpios = <&pio 3 24 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; /* LCD-RST: PD24 */
+	backlight = <&backlight>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/innolux,ee101ia-01d.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/innolux,ee101ia-01d.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e5ca4ccd55ed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/innolux,ee101ia-01d.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+Innolux Corporation 10.1" EE101IA-01D WXGA (1280x800) LVDS panel
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: should be "innolux,ee101ia-01d"
+
+This binding is compatible with the lvds-panel binding, which is specified
+in panel-lvds.txt in this directory.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/innolux,p079zca.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/innolux,p079zca.txt
index d0f55161579a..3ab8c7412cf6 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/innolux,p079zca.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/innolux,p079zca.txt
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ Optional properties:
 Example:
 
 	&mipi_dsi {
-		panel {
+		panel@0 {
 			compatible = "innolux,p079zca";
 			reg = <0>;
 			power-supply = <...>;
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/innolux,p097pfg.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/innolux,p097pfg.txt
index 595d9dfeffd3..d1cab3a8f0fb 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/innolux,p097pfg.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/innolux,p097pfg.txt
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ Optional properties:
 Example:
 
 	&mipi_dsi {
-		panel {
+		panel@0 {
 			compatible = "innolux,p079zca";
 			reg = <0>;
 			avdd-supply = <...>;
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/kingdisplay,kd097d04.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/kingdisplay,kd097d04.txt
index 164a5fa236da..cfefff688614 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/kingdisplay,kd097d04.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/kingdisplay,kd097d04.txt
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ Optional properties:
 Example:
 
 	&mipi_dsi {
-		panel {
+		panel@0 {
 			compatible = "kingdisplay,kd097d04";
 			reg = <0>;
 			power-supply = <...>;
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/lemaker,bl035-rgb-002.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/lemaker,bl035-rgb-002.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..74ee7ea6b493
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/lemaker,bl035-rgb-002.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+LeMaker BL035-RGB-002 3.5" QVGA TFT LCD panel
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: should be "lemaker,bl035-rgb-002"
+- power-supply: as specified in the base binding
+
+Optional properties:
+- backlight: as specified in the base binding
+- enable-gpios: as specified in the base binding
+
+This binding is compatible with the simple-panel binding, which is specified
+in simple-panel.txt in this directory.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/lg,acx467akm-7.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/lg,acx467akm-7.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..fc1e1b325e49
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/lg,acx467akm-7.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+LG ACX467AKM-7 4.95" 1080×1920 LCD Panel
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: must be "lg,acx467akm-7"
+
+This binding is compatible with the simple-panel binding, which is specified
+in simple-panel.txt in this directory.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/osddisplays,osd070t1718-19ts.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/osddisplays,osd070t1718-19ts.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e57883ccdf2f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/osddisplays,osd070t1718-19ts.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+OSD Displays OSD070T1718-19TS 7" WVGA TFT LCD panel
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: shall be "osddisplays,osd070t1718-19ts"
+- power-supply: see simple-panel.txt
+
+Optional properties:
+- backlight: see simple-panel.txt
+
+This binding is compatible with the simple-panel binding, which is specified
+in simple-panel.txt in this directory. No other simple-panel properties than
+the ones specified herein are valid.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/pda,91-00156-a0.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/pda,91-00156-a0.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1639fb17a9f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/pda,91-00156-a0.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+PDA 91-00156-A0 5.0" WVGA TFT LCD panel
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: should be "pda,91-00156-a0"
+- power-supply: this panel requires a single power supply. A phandle to a
+regulator needs to be specified here. Compatible with panel-common binding which
+is specified in the panel-common.txt in this directory.
+- backlight: this panel's backlight is controlled by an external backlight
+controller. A phandle to this controller needs to be specified here.
+Compatible with panel-common binding which is specified in the panel-common.txt
+in this directory.
+
+This binding is compatible with the simple-panel binding, which is specified
+in simple-panel.txt in this directory.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/rocktech,jh057n00900.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/rocktech,jh057n00900.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1b5763200cf6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/rocktech,jh057n00900.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+Rocktech jh057n00900 5.5" 720x1440 TFT LCD panel
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: should be "rocktech,jh057n00900"
+- reg: DSI virtual channel of the peripheral
+- reset-gpios: panel reset gpio
+- backlight: phandle of the backlight device attached to the panel
+
+Example:
+
+	&mipi_dsi {
+		panel@0 {
+			compatible = "rocktech,jh057n00900";
+			reg = <0>;
+			backlight = <&backlight>;
+			reset-gpios = <&gpio3 13 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/ronbo,rb070d30.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/ronbo,rb070d30.yaml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0e7987f1cdb7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/ronbo,rb070d30.yaml
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+# SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0+ OR X11)
+%YAML 1.2
+---
+$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/display/panel/ronbo,rb070d30.yaml#
+$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml#
+
+title: Ronbo RB070D30 DSI Display Panel
+
+maintainers:
+  - Maxime Ripard <maxime.ripard@bootlin.com>
+
+properties:
+  compatible:
+    const: ronbo,rb070d30
+
+  reg:
+    description: MIPI-DSI virtual channel
+
+  power-gpios:
+    description: GPIO used for the power pin
+    maxItems: 1
+
+  reset-gpios:
+    description: GPIO used for the reset pin
+    maxItems: 1
+
+  shlr-gpios:
+    description: GPIO used for the shlr pin (horizontal flip)
+    maxItems: 1
+
+  updn-gpios:
+    description: GPIO used for the updn pin (vertical flip)
+    maxItems: 1
+
+  vcc-lcd-supply:
+    description: Power regulator
+
+  backlight:
+    description: Backlight used by the panel
+    $ref: "/schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/phandle"
+
+required:
+  - compatible
+  - power-gpios
+  - reg
+  - reset-gpios
+  - shlr-gpios
+  - updn-gpios
+  - vcc-lcd-supply
+
+additionalProperties: false
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/sitronix,st7701.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/sitronix,st7701.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ccd17597f1f6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/sitronix,st7701.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+Sitronix ST7701 based LCD panels
+
+ST7701 designed for small and medium sizes of TFT LCD display, is
+capable of supporting up to 480RGBX864 in resolution. It provides
+several system interfaces like MIPI/RGB/SPI.
+
+Techstar TS8550B is 480x854, 2-lane MIPI DSI LCD panel which has
+inbuilt ST7701 chip.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: must be "sitronix,st7701" and one of
+  * "techstar,ts8550b"
+- reset-gpios: a GPIO phandle for the reset pin
+
+Required properties for techstar,ts8550b:
+- reg: DSI virtual channel used by that screen
+- VCC-supply: analog regulator for MIPI circuit
+- IOVCC-supply: I/O system regulator
+
+Optional properties:
+- backlight: phandle for the backlight control.
+
+panel@0 {
+	compatible = "techstar,ts8550b", "sitronix,st7701";
+	reg = <0>;
+	VCC-supply = <&reg_dldo2>;
+	IOVCC-supply = <&reg_dldo2>;
+	reset-gpios = <&pio 3 24 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; /* LCD-RST: PD24 */
+	backlight = <&backlight>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/tpo,td028ttec1.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/tpo,td028ttec1.txt
index ed34253d9fb1..898e06ecf4ef 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/tpo,td028ttec1.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/tpo,td028ttec1.txt
@@ -6,6 +6,7 @@ Required properties:
 
 Optional properties:
 - label: a symbolic name for the panel
+- backlight: phandle of the backlight device
 
 Required nodes:
 - Video port for DPI input
@@ -21,6 +22,7 @@ lcd-panel: td028ttec1@0 {
 	spi-cpha;
 
 	label = "lcd";
+	backlight = <&backlight>;
 	port {
 		lcd_in: endpoint {
 			remote-endpoint = <&dpi_out>;
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/renesas,du.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/renesas,du.txt
index 3c855d9f2719..aedb22b4d161 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/renesas,du.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/renesas,du.txt
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ Required Properties:
     - "renesas,du-r8a7744" for R8A7744 (RZ/G1N) compatible DU
     - "renesas,du-r8a7745" for R8A7745 (RZ/G1E) compatible DU
     - "renesas,du-r8a77470" for R8A77470 (RZ/G1C) compatible DU
+    - "renesas,du-r8a774c0" for R8A774C0 (RZ/G2E) compatible DU
     - "renesas,du-r8a7779" for R8A7779 (R-Car H1) compatible DU
     - "renesas,du-r8a7790" for R8A7790 (R-Car H2) compatible DU
     - "renesas,du-r8a7791" for R8A7791 (R-Car M2-W) compatible DU
@@ -57,6 +58,7 @@ corresponding to each DU output.
  R8A7744 (RZ/G1N)       DPAD 0         LVDS 0         -              -
  R8A7745 (RZ/G1E)       DPAD 0         DPAD 1         -              -
  R8A77470 (RZ/G1C)      DPAD 0         DPAD 1         LVDS 0         -
+ R8A774C0 (RZ/G2E)      DPAD 0         LVDS 0         LVDS 1         -
  R8A7779 (R-Car H1)     DPAD 0         DPAD 1         -              -
  R8A7790 (R-Car H2)     DPAD 0         LVDS 0         LVDS 1         -
  R8A7791 (R-Car M2-W)   DPAD 0         LVDS 0         -              -
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/rockchip/rockchip,rk3066-hdmi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/rockchip/rockchip,rk3066-hdmi.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d1ad31bca8d9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/rockchip/rockchip,rk3066-hdmi.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+Rockchip specific extensions for rk3066 HDMI
+============================================
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible:
+	"rockchip,rk3066-hdmi";
+- reg:
+	Physical base address and length of the controller's registers.
+- clocks, clock-names:
+	Phandle to HDMI controller clock, name should be "hclk".
+- interrupts:
+	HDMI interrupt number.
+- power-domains:
+	Phandle to the RK3066_PD_VIO power domain.
+- rockchip,grf:
+	This soc uses GRF regs to switch the HDMI TX input between vop0 and vop1.
+- ports:
+	Contains one port node with two endpoints, numbered 0 and 1,
+	connected respectively to vop0 and vop1.
+	Contains one port node with one endpoint
+	connected to a hdmi-connector node.
+- pinctrl-0, pinctrl-name:
+	Switch the iomux for the HPD/I2C pins to HDMI function.
+
+Example:
+	hdmi: hdmi@10116000 {
+		compatible = "rockchip,rk3066-hdmi";
+		reg = <0x10116000 0x2000>;
+		interrupts = <GIC_SPI 64 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
+		clocks = <&cru HCLK_HDMI>;
+		clock-names = "hclk";
+		power-domains = <&power RK3066_PD_VIO>;
+		rockchip,grf = <&grf>;
+		pinctrl-names = "default";
+		pinctrl-0 = <&hdmii2c_xfer>, <&hdmi_hpd>;
+
+		ports {
+			#address-cells = <1>;
+			#size-cells = <0>;
+			hdmi_in: port@0 {
+				reg = <0>;
+				#address-cells = <1>;
+				#size-cells = <0>;
+				hdmi_in_vop0: endpoint@0 {
+					reg = <0>;
+					remote-endpoint = <&vop0_out_hdmi>;
+				};
+				hdmi_in_vop1: endpoint@1 {
+					reg = <1>;
+					remote-endpoint = <&vop1_out_hdmi>;
+				};
+			};
+			hdmi_out: port@1 {
+				reg = <1>;
+				hdmi_out_con: endpoint {
+					remote-endpoint = <&hdmi_con_in>;
+				};
+			};
+		};
+	};
+
+&pinctrl {
+		hdmi {
+			hdmi_hpd: hdmi-hpd {
+				rockchip,pins = <0 RK_PA0 1 &pcfg_pull_default>;
+			};
+			hdmii2c_xfer: hdmii2c-xfer {
+				rockchip,pins = <0 RK_PA1 1 &pcfg_pull_none>,
+						<0 RK_PA2 1 &pcfg_pull_none>;
+			};
+		};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/rockchip/rockchip-vop.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/rockchip/rockchip-vop.txt
index b79e5769f0ae..4f58c5a2d195 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/rockchip/rockchip-vop.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/rockchip/rockchip-vop.txt
@@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ Required properties:
 		"rockchip,rk3126-vop";
 		"rockchip,px30-vop-lit";
 		"rockchip,px30-vop-big";
+		"rockchip,rk3066-vop";
 		"rockchip,rk3188-vop";
 		"rockchip,rk3288-vop";
 		"rockchip,rk3368-vop";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/simple-framebuffer-sunxi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/simple-framebuffer-sunxi.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index d693b8dc9a62..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/simple-framebuffer-sunxi.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,36 +0,0 @@
-Sunxi specific Simple Framebuffer bindings
-
-This binding documents sunxi specific extensions to the simple-framebuffer
-bindings. The sunxi simplefb u-boot code relies on the devicetree containing
-pre-populated simplefb nodes.
-
-These extensions are intended so that u-boot can select the right node based
-on which pipeline is being used. As such they are solely intended for
-firmware / bootloader use, and the OS should ignore them.
-
-Required properties:
-- compatible: "allwinner,simple-framebuffer"
-- allwinner,pipeline, one of:
-  "de_be0-lcd0"
-  "de_be1-lcd1"
-  "de_be0-lcd0-hdmi"
-  "de_be1-lcd1-hdmi"
-  "mixer0-lcd0"
-  "mixer0-lcd0-hdmi"
-  "mixer1-lcd1-hdmi"
-  "mixer1-lcd1-tve"
-
-Example:
-
-chosen {
-	#address-cells = <1>;
-	#size-cells = <1>;
-	ranges;
-
-	framebuffer@0 {
-		compatible = "allwinner,simple-framebuffer", "simple-framebuffer";
-		allwinner,pipeline = "de_be0-lcd0-hdmi";
-		clocks = <&pll5 1>, <&ahb_gates 36>, <&ahb_gates 43>,
-			 <&ahb_gates 44>;
-	};
-};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/simple-framebuffer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/simple-framebuffer.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 5a9ce511be88..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/simple-framebuffer.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,91 +0,0 @@
-Simple Framebuffer
-
-A simple frame-buffer describes a frame-buffer setup by firmware or
-the bootloader, with the assumption that the display hardware has already
-been set up to scan out from the memory pointed to by the reg property.
-
-Since simplefb nodes represent runtime information they must be sub-nodes of
-the chosen node (*). Simplefb nodes must be named "framebuffer@<address>".
-
-If the devicetree contains nodes for the display hardware used by a simplefb,
-then the simplefb node must contain a property called "display", which
-contains a phandle pointing to the primary display hw node, so that the OS
-knows which simplefb to disable when handing over control to a driver for the
-real hardware. The bindings for the hw nodes must specify which node is
-considered the primary node.
-
-It is advised to add display# aliases to help the OS determine how to number
-things. If display# aliases are used, then if the simplefb node contains a
-"display" property then the /aliases/display# path must point to the display
-hw node the "display" property points to, otherwise it must point directly
-to the simplefb node.
-
-If a simplefb node represents the preferred console for user interaction,
-then the chosen node's stdout-path property should point to it, or to the
-primary display hw node, as with display# aliases. If display aliases are
-used then it should be set to the alias instead.
-
-It is advised that devicetree files contain pre-filled, disabled framebuffer
-nodes, so that the firmware only needs to update the mode information and
-enable them. This way if e.g. later on support for more display clocks get
-added, the simplefb nodes will already contain this info and the firmware
-does not need to be updated.
-
-If pre-filled framebuffer nodes are used, the firmware may need extra
-information to find the right node. In that case an extra platform specific
-compatible and platform specific properties should be used and documented,
-see e.g. simple-framebuffer-sunxi.txt .
-
-Required properties:
-- compatible: "simple-framebuffer"
-- reg: Should contain the location and size of the framebuffer memory.
-- width: The width of the framebuffer in pixels.
-- height: The height of the framebuffer in pixels.
-- stride: The number of bytes in each line of the framebuffer.
-- format: The format of the framebuffer surface. Valid values are:
-  - r5g6b5 (16-bit pixels, d[15:11]=r, d[10:5]=g, d[4:0]=b).
-  - a8b8g8r8 (32-bit pixels, d[31:24]=a, d[23:16]=b, d[15:8]=g, d[7:0]=r).
-
-Optional properties:
-- clocks : List of clocks used by the framebuffer.
-- *-supply : Any number of regulators used by the framebuffer. These should
-	     be named according to the names in the device's design.
-
-  The above resources are expected to already be configured correctly.
-  The OS must ensure they are not modified or disabled while the simple
-  framebuffer remains active.
-
-- display : phandle pointing to the primary display hardware node
-
-Example:
-
-aliases {
-	display0 = &lcdc0;
-}
-
-chosen {
-	framebuffer0: framebuffer@1d385000 {
-		compatible = "simple-framebuffer";
-		reg = <0x1d385000 (1600 * 1200 * 2)>;
-		width = <1600>;
-		height = <1200>;
-		stride = <(1600 * 2)>;
-		format = "r5g6b5";
-		clocks = <&ahb_gates 36>, <&ahb_gates 43>, <&ahb_gates 44>;
-		lcd-supply = <&reg_dc1sw>;
-		display = <&lcdc0>;
-	};
-	stdout-path = "display0";
-};
-
-soc@1c00000 {
-	lcdc0: lcdc@1c0c000 {
-		compatible = "allwinner,sun4i-a10-lcdc";
-		...
-	};
-};
-
-
-*) Older devicetree files may have a compatible = "simple-framebuffer" node
-in a different place, operating systems must first enumerate any compatible
-nodes found under chosen and then check for other compatible nodes.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/simple-framebuffer.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/simple-framebuffer.yaml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b052d76cf8b6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/simple-framebuffer.yaml
@@ -0,0 +1,160 @@
+# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+%YAML 1.2
+---
+$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/display/simple-framebuffer.yaml#
+$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml#
+
+title: Simple Framebuffer Device Tree Bindings
+
+maintainers:
+  - Bartlomiej Zolnierkiewicz <b.zolnierkie@samsung.com>
+  - Hans de Goede <hdegoede@redhat.com>
+
+description: |+
+  A simple frame-buffer describes a frame-buffer setup by firmware or
+  the bootloader, with the assumption that the display hardware has
+  already been set up to scan out from the memory pointed to by the
+  reg property.
+
+  Since simplefb nodes represent runtime information they must be
+  sub-nodes of the chosen node (*). Simplefb nodes must be named
+  framebuffer@<address>.
+
+  If the devicetree contains nodes for the display hardware used by a
+  simplefb, then the simplefb node must contain a property called
+  display, which contains a phandle pointing to the primary display
+  hw node, so that the OS knows which simplefb to disable when handing
+  over control to a driver for the real hardware. The bindings for the
+  hw nodes must specify which node is considered the primary node.
+
+  It is advised to add display# aliases to help the OS determine how
+  to number things. If display# aliases are used, then if the simplefb
+  node contains a display property then the /aliases/display# path
+  must point to the display hw node the display property points to,
+  otherwise it must point directly to the simplefb node.
+
+  If a simplefb node represents the preferred console for user
+  interaction, then the chosen node stdout-path property should point
+  to it, or to the primary display hw node, as with display#
+  aliases. If display aliases are used then it should be set to the
+  alias instead.
+
+  It is advised that devicetree files contain pre-filled, disabled
+  framebuffer nodes, so that the firmware only needs to update the
+  mode information and enable them. This way if e.g. later on support
+  for more display clocks get added, the simplefb nodes will already
+  contain this info and the firmware does not need to be updated.
+
+  If pre-filled framebuffer nodes are used, the firmware may need
+  extra information to find the right node. In that case an extra
+  platform specific compatible and platform specific properties should
+  be used and documented.
+
+properties:
+  compatible:
+    items:
+      - enum:
+          - allwinner,simple-framebuffer
+          - amlogic,simple-framebuffer
+      - const: simple-framebuffer
+
+  reg:
+    description: Location and size of the framebuffer memory
+
+  clocks:
+    description: List of clocks used by the framebuffer.
+
+  power-domains:
+    description: List of power domains used by the framebuffer.
+
+  width:
+    $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32
+    description: Width of the framebuffer in pixels
+
+  height:
+    $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32
+    description: Height of the framebuffer in pixels
+
+  stride:
+    $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32
+    description: Number of bytes of a line in the framebuffer
+
+  format:
+    description: >
+      Format of the framebuffer:
+        * `a8b8g8r8` - 32-bit pixels, d[31:24]=a, d[23:16]=b, d[15:8]=g, d[7:0]=r
+        * `r5g6b5` - 16-bit pixels, d[15:11]=r, d[10:5]=g, d[4:0]=b
+    enum:
+      - a8b8g8r8
+      - r5g6b5
+
+  display:
+    $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/phandle
+    description: Primary display hardware node
+
+  allwinner,pipeline:
+    description: Pipeline used by the framebuffer on Allwinner SoCs
+    enum:
+      - de_be0-lcd0
+      - de_be0-lcd0-hdmi
+      - de_be0-lcd0-tve0
+      - de_be1-lcd0
+      - de_be1-lcd1-hdmi
+      - de_fe0-de_be0-lcd0
+      - de_fe0-de_be0-lcd0-hdmi
+      - de_fe0-de_be0-lcd0-tve0
+      - mixer0-lcd0
+      - mixer0-lcd0-hdmi
+      - mixer1-lcd1-hdmi
+      - mixer1-lcd1-tve
+
+  amlogic,pipeline:
+    description: Pipeline used by the framebuffer on Amlogic SoCs
+    enum:
+      - vpu-cvbs
+      - vpu-hdmi
+
+patternProperties:
+  "^[a-zA-Z0-9-]+-supply$":
+    $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/phandle
+    description:
+      Regulators used by the framebuffer. These should be named
+      according to the names in the device design.
+
+required:
+  # The binding requires also reg, width, height, stride and format,
+  # but usually they will be filled by the bootloader.
+  - compatible
+
+additionalProperties: false
+
+examples:
+  - |
+    aliases {
+      display0 = &lcdc0;
+    };
+
+    chosen {
+      #address-cells = <1>;
+      #size-cells = <1>;
+      stdout-path = "display0";
+      framebuffer0: framebuffer@1d385000 {
+        compatible = "simple-framebuffer";
+        reg = <0x1d385000 3840000>;
+        width = <1600>;
+        height = <1200>;
+        stride = <3200>;
+        format = "r5g6b5";
+        clocks = <&ahb_gates 36>, <&ahb_gates 43>, <&ahb_gates 44>;
+        lcd-supply = <&reg_dc1sw>;
+        display = <&lcdc0>;
+      };
+    };
+
+    soc@1c00000 {
+      lcdc0: lcdc@1c0c000 {
+        compatible = "allwinner,sun4i-a10-lcdc";
+      };
+    };
+
+...
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/sitronix,st7735r.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/sitronix,st7735r.txt
index f0a5090a3326..cd5c7186890a 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/sitronix,st7735r.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/sitronix,st7735r.txt
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ Example:
 	backlight: backlight {
 		compatible = "gpio-backlight";
 		gpios = <&gpio 44 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>;
-	}
+	};
 
 	...
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/ssd1307fb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/ssd1307fb.txt
index 209d931ef16c..b67f8caa212c 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/ssd1307fb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/ssd1307fb.txt
@@ -36,7 +36,6 @@ ssd1307: oled@3c {
         reg = <0x3c>;
         pwms = <&pwm 4 3000>;
         reset-gpios = <&gpio2 7>;
-        reset-active-low;
 };
 
 ssd1306: oled@3c {
@@ -44,7 +43,6 @@ ssd1306: oled@3c {
         reg = <0x3c>;
         pwms = <&pwm 4 3000>;
         reset-gpios = <&gpio2 7>;
-        reset-active-low;
         solomon,com-lrremap;
         solomon,com-invdir;
         solomon,com-offset = <32>;
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/ste,mcde.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/ste,mcde.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4c33c692bd5f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/ste,mcde.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,104 @@
+ST-Ericsson Multi Channel Display Engine MCDE
+
+The ST-Ericsson MCDE is a display controller with support for compositing
+and displaying several channels memory resident graphics data on DSI or
+LCD displays or bridges. It is used in the ST-Ericsson U8500 platform.
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible: must be:
+  "ste,mcde"
+- reg: register base for the main MCDE control registers, should be
+  0x1000 in size
+- interrupts: the interrupt line for the MCDE
+- epod-supply: a phandle to the EPOD regulator
+- vana-supply: a phandle to the analog voltage regulator
+- clocks: an array of the MCDE clocks in this strict order:
+  MCDECLK (main MCDE clock), LCDCLK (LCD clock), PLLDSI
+  (HDMI clock), DSI0ESCLK (DSI0 energy save clock),
+  DSI1ESCLK (DSI1 energy save clock), DSI2ESCLK (DSI2 energy
+  save clock)
+- clock-names: must be the following array:
+  "mcde", "lcd", "hdmi"
+  to match the required clock inputs above.
+- #address-cells: should be <1> (for the DSI hosts that will be children)
+- #size-cells: should be <1> (for the DSI hosts that will be children)
+- ranges: this should always be stated
+
+Required subnodes:
+
+The devicetree must specify subnodes for the DSI host adapters.
+These must have the following characteristics:
+
+- compatible: must be:
+  "ste,mcde-dsi"
+- reg: must specify the register range for the DSI host
+- vana-supply: phandle to the VANA voltage regulator
+- clocks: phandles to the high speed and low power (energy save) clocks
+  the high speed clock is not present on the third (dsi2) block, so it
+  should only have the "lp" clock
+- clock-names: "hs" for the high speed clock and "lp" for the low power
+  (energy save) clock
+- #address-cells: should be <1>
+- #size-cells: should be <0>
+
+Display panels and bridges will appear as children on the DSI hosts, and
+the displays are connected to the DSI hosts using the common binding
+for video transmitter interfaces; see
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/video-interfaces.txt
+
+If a DSI host is unused (not connected) it will have no children defined.
+
+Example:
+
+mcde@a0350000 {
+	compatible = "ste,mcde";
+	reg = <0xa0350000 0x1000>;
+	interrupts = <GIC_SPI 48 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
+	epod-supply = <&db8500_b2r2_mcde_reg>;
+	vana-supply = <&ab8500_ldo_ana_reg>;
+	clocks = <&prcmu_clk PRCMU_MCDECLK>, /* Main MCDE clock */
+		 <&prcmu_clk PRCMU_LCDCLK>, /* LCD clock */
+		 <&prcmu_clk PRCMU_PLLDSI>; /* HDMI clock */
+	clock-names = "mcde", "lcd", "hdmi";
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <1>;
+	ranges;
+
+	dsi0: dsi@a0351000 {
+		compatible = "ste,mcde-dsi";
+		reg = <0xa0351000 0x1000>;
+		vana-supply = <&ab8500_ldo_ana_reg>;
+		clocks = <&prcmu_clk PRCMU_DSI0CLK>, <&prcmu_clk PRCMU_DSI0ESCCLK>;
+		clock-names = "hs", "lp";
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+
+		panel {
+			compatible = "samsung,s6d16d0";
+			reg = <0>;
+			vdd1-supply = <&ab8500_ldo_aux1_reg>;
+			reset-gpios = <&gpio2 1 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>;
+		};
+
+	};
+	dsi1: dsi@a0352000 {
+		compatible = "ste,mcde-dsi";
+		reg = <0xa0352000 0x1000>;
+		vana-supply = <&ab8500_ldo_ana_reg>;
+		clocks = <&prcmu_clk PRCMU_DSI1CLK>, <&prcmu_clk PRCMU_DSI1ESCCLK>;
+		clock-names = "hs", "lp";
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+	};
+	dsi2: dsi@a0353000 {
+		compatible = "ste,mcde-dsi";
+		reg = <0xa0353000 0x1000>;
+		vana-supply = <&ab8500_ldo_ana_reg>;
+		/* This DSI port only has the Low Power / Energy Save clock */
+		clocks = <&prcmu_clk PRCMU_DSI2ESCCLK>;
+		clock-names = "lp";
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/sunxi/sun4i-drm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/sunxi/sun4i-drm.txt
index f426bdb42f18..31ab72cba3d4 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/sunxi/sun4i-drm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/sunxi/sun4i-drm.txt
@@ -156,6 +156,7 @@ Required properties:
    * allwinner,sun6i-a31-tcon
    * allwinner,sun6i-a31s-tcon
    * allwinner,sun7i-a20-tcon
+   * allwinner,sun8i-a23-tcon
    * allwinner,sun8i-a33-tcon
    * allwinner,sun8i-a83t-tcon-lcd
    * allwinner,sun8i-a83t-tcon-tv
@@ -276,6 +277,7 @@ Required properties:
   - compatible: value must be one of:
     * allwinner,sun6i-a31-drc
     * allwinner,sun6i-a31s-drc
+    * allwinner,sun8i-a23-drc
     * allwinner,sun8i-a33-drc
     * allwinner,sun9i-a80-drc
   - reg: base address and size of the memory-mapped region.
@@ -303,6 +305,7 @@ Required properties:
     * allwinner,sun5i-a13-display-backend
     * allwinner,sun6i-a31-display-backend
     * allwinner,sun7i-a20-display-backend
+    * allwinner,sun8i-a23-display-backend
     * allwinner,sun8i-a33-display-backend
     * allwinner,sun9i-a80-display-backend
   - reg: base address and size of the memory-mapped region.
@@ -360,6 +363,7 @@ Required properties:
     * allwinner,sun5i-a13-display-frontend
     * allwinner,sun6i-a31-display-frontend
     * allwinner,sun7i-a20-display-frontend
+    * allwinner,sun8i-a23-display-frontend
     * allwinner,sun8i-a33-display-frontend
     * allwinner,sun9i-a80-display-frontend
   - reg: base address and size of the memory-mapped region.
@@ -419,6 +423,7 @@ Required properties:
     * allwinner,sun6i-a31-display-engine
     * allwinner,sun6i-a31s-display-engine
     * allwinner,sun7i-a20-display-engine
+    * allwinner,sun8i-a23-display-engine
     * allwinner,sun8i-a33-display-engine
     * allwinner,sun8i-a83t-display-engine
     * allwinner,sun8i-h3-display-engine
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/tegra/nvidia,tegra20-host1x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/tegra/nvidia,tegra20-host1x.txt
index 593be44a53c9..9999255ac5b6 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/tegra/nvidia,tegra20-host1x.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/tegra/nvidia,tegra20-host1x.txt
@@ -238,6 +238,9 @@ of the following host1x client modules:
   - nvidia,hpd-gpio: specifies a GPIO used for hotplug detection
   - nvidia,edid: supplies a binary EDID blob
   - nvidia,panel: phandle of a display panel
+  - nvidia,xbar-cfg: 5 cells containing the crossbar configuration. Each lane
+    of the SOR, identified by the cell's index, is mapped via the crossbar to
+    the pad specified by the cell's value.
 
   Optional properties when driving an eDP output:
   - nvidia,dpaux: phandle to a DispayPort AUX interface
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/adi,axi-dmac.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/adi,axi-dmac.txt
index 47cb1d14b690..b38ee732efa9 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/adi,axi-dmac.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/adi,axi-dmac.txt
@@ -18,7 +18,6 @@ Required properties for adi,channels sub-node:
 
 Required channel sub-node properties:
  - reg: Which channel this node refers to.
- - adi,length-width: Width of the DMA transfer length register.
  - adi,source-bus-width,
    adi,destination-bus-width: Width of the source or destination bus in bits.
  - adi,source-bus-type,
@@ -28,7 +27,8 @@ Required channel sub-node properties:
 	1 (AXI_DMAC_TYPE_AXI_STREAM): Streaming AXI interface
 	2 (AXI_DMAC_TYPE_AXI_FIFO): FIFO interface
 
-Optional channel properties:
+Deprecated optional channel properties:
+ - adi,length-width: Width of the DMA transfer length register.
  - adi,cyclic: Must be set if the channel supports hardware cyclic DMA
    transfers.
  - adi,2d: Must be set if the channel supports hardware 2D DMA transfers.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/dma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/dma.txt
index 6312fb00ce8d..eeb4e4d1771e 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/dma.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/dma.txt
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ Optional properties:
 - dma-channels: 	Number of DMA channels supported by the controller.
 - dma-requests: 	Number of DMA request signals supported by the
 			controller.
+- dma-channel-mask:	Bitmask of available DMA channels in ascending order
+			that are not reserved by firmware and are available to
+			the kernel. i.e. first channel corresponds to LSB.
 
 Example:
 
@@ -29,6 +32,7 @@ Example:
 		#dma-cells = <1>;
 		dma-channels = <32>;
 		dma-requests = <127>;
+		dma-channel-mask = <0xfffe>
 	};
 
 * DMA router
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/fsl-imx-sdma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/fsl-imx-sdma.txt
index 3c9a57a8443b..9d8bbac27d8b 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/fsl-imx-sdma.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/fsl-imx-sdma.txt
@@ -9,6 +9,7 @@ Required properties:
       "fsl,imx53-sdma"
       "fsl,imx6q-sdma"
       "fsl,imx7d-sdma"
+      "fsl,imx8mq-sdma"
   The -to variants should be preferred since they allow to determine the
   correct ROM script addresses needed for the driver to work without additional
   firmware.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/fsl-qdma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/fsl-qdma.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6a0ff9059e72
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/fsl-qdma.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+NXP Layerscape SoC qDMA Controller
+==================================
+
+This device follows the generic DMA bindings defined in dma/dma.txt.
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible:		Must be one of
+			 "fsl,ls1021a-qdma": for LS1021A Board
+			 "fsl,ls1043a-qdma": for ls1043A Board
+			 "fsl,ls1046a-qdma": for ls1046A Board
+- reg:			Should contain the register's base address and length.
+- interrupts:		Should contain a reference to the interrupt used by this
+			device.
+- interrupt-names:	Should contain interrupt names:
+			 "qdma-queue0": the block0 interrupt
+			 "qdma-queue1": the block1 interrupt
+			 "qdma-queue2": the block2 interrupt
+			 "qdma-queue3": the block3 interrupt
+			 "qdma-error":  the error interrupt
+- fsl,dma-queues:	Should contain number of queues supported.
+- dma-channels:	Number of DMA channels supported
+- block-number:	the virtual block number
+- block-offset:	the offset of different virtual block
+- status-sizes:	status queue size of per virtual block
+- queue-sizes:		command queue size of per virtual block, the size number
+			based on queues
+
+Optional properties:
+
+- dma-channels:		Number of DMA channels supported by the controller.
+- big-endian:		If present registers and hardware scatter/gather descriptors
+			of the qDMA are implemented in big endian mode, otherwise in little
+			mode.
+
+Examples:
+
+	qdma: dma-controller@8390000 {
+			compatible = "fsl,ls1021a-qdma";
+			reg = <0x0 0x8388000 0x0 0x1000>, /* Controller regs */
+			      <0x0 0x8389000 0x0 0x1000>, /* Status regs */
+			      <0x0 0x838a000 0x0 0x2000>; /* Block regs */
+			interrupts = <GIC_SPI 185 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>,
+				     <GIC_SPI 76 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>,
+				     <GIC_SPI 77 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
+			interrupt-names = "qdma-error",
+				"qdma-queue0", "qdma-queue1";
+			dma-channels = <8>;
+			block-number = <2>;
+			block-offset = <0x1000>;
+			fsl,dma-queues = <2>;
+			status-sizes = <64>;
+			queue-sizes = <64 64>;
+			big-endian;
+		};
+
+DMA clients must use the format described in dma/dma.txt file.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/k3dma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/k3dma.txt
index 4945aeac4dc4..10a2f15b08a3 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/k3dma.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/k3dma.txt
@@ -3,7 +3,9 @@
 See dma.txt first
 
 Required properties:
-- compatible: Should be "hisilicon,k3-dma-1.0"
+- compatible: Must be one of
+-              "hisilicon,k3-dma-1.0"
+-              "hisilicon,hisi-pcm-asp-dma-1.0"
 - reg: Should contain DMA registers location and length.
 - interrupts: Should contain one interrupt shared by all channel
 - #dma-cells: see dma.txt, should be 1, para number
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/nvidia,tegra210-adma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/nvidia,tegra210-adma.txt
index 2f35b047f772..245d3063715c 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/nvidia,tegra210-adma.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/nvidia,tegra210-adma.txt
@@ -4,7 +4,9 @@ The Tegra Audio DMA controller that is used for transferring data
 between system memory and the Audio Processing Engine (APE).
 
 Required properties:
-- compatible: Must be "nvidia,tegra210-adma".
+- compatible: Should contain one of the following:
+  - "nvidia,tegra210-adma": for Tegra210
+  - "nvidia,tegra186-adma": for Tegra186 and Tegra194
 - reg: Should contain DMA registers location and length. This should be
   a single entry that includes all of the per-channel registers in one
   contiguous bank.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/snps-dma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/snps-dma.txt
index db757df7057d..0bedceed1963 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/snps-dma.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/snps-dma.txt
@@ -23,8 +23,6 @@ Deprecated properties:
 
 
 Optional properties:
-- is_private: The device channels should be marked as private and not for by the
-  general purpose DMA channel allocator. False if not passed.
 - multi-block: Multi block transfers supported by hardware. Array property with
   one cell per channel. 0: not supported, 1 (default): supported.
 - snps,dma-protection-control: AHB HPROT[3:1] protection setting.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/sprd-dma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/sprd-dma.txt
index 7a10fea2e51b..adccea9941f1 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/sprd-dma.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/sprd-dma.txt
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ DMA clients connected to the Spreadtrum DMA controller must use the format
 described in the dma.txt file, using a two-cell specifier for each channel.
 The two cells in order are:
 1. A phandle pointing to the DMA controller.
-2. The channel id.
+2. The slave id.
 
 spi0: spi@70a00000{
 	...
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/xilinx/xilinx_dma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/xilinx/xilinx_dma.txt
index 174af2c45e77..93b6d961dd4f 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/xilinx/xilinx_dma.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/xilinx/xilinx_dma.txt
@@ -37,10 +37,11 @@ Required properties:
 Required properties for VDMA:
 - xlnx,num-fstores: Should be the number of framebuffers as configured in h/w.
 
-Optional properties:
-- xlnx,include-sg: Tells configured for Scatter-mode in
-	the hardware.
 Optional properties for AXI DMA:
+- xlnx,sg-length-width: Should be set to the width in bits of the length
+	register as configured in h/w. Takes values {8...26}. If the property
+	is missing or invalid then the default value 23 is used. This is the
+	maximum value that is supported by all IP versions.
 - xlnx,mcdma: Tells whether configured for multi-channel mode in the hardware.
 Optional properties for VDMA:
 - xlnx,flush-fsync: Tells which channel to Flush on Frame sync.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/edac/aspeed-sdram-edac.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/edac/aspeed-sdram-edac.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6a0f3d90d682
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/edac/aspeed-sdram-edac.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+Aspeed AST2500 SoC EDAC node
+
+The Aspeed AST2500 SoC supports DDR3 and DDR4 memory with and without ECC (error
+correction check).
+
+The memory controller supports SECDED (single bit error correction, double bit
+error detection) and single bit error auto scrubbing by reserving 8 bits for
+every 64 bit word (effectively reducing available memory to 8/9).
+
+Note, the bootloader must configure ECC mode in the memory controller.
+
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: should be "aspeed,ast2500-sdram-edac"
+- reg:        sdram controller register set should be <0x1e6e0000 0x174>
+- interrupts: should be AVIC interrupt #0
+
+
+Example:
+
+	edac: sdram@1e6e0000 {
+		compatible = "aspeed,ast2500-sdram-edac";
+		reg = <0x1e6e0000 0x174>;
+		interrupts = <0>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/edac/socfpga-eccmgr.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/edac/socfpga-eccmgr.txt
index 5626560a6cfd..8f52206cfd2a 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/edac/socfpga-eccmgr.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/edac/socfpga-eccmgr.txt
@@ -232,37 +232,152 @@ Example:
 		};
 	};
 
-Stratix10 SoCFPGA ECC Manager
+Stratix10 SoCFPGA ECC Manager (ARM64)
 The Stratix10 SoC ECC Manager handles the IRQs for each peripheral
-in a shared register similar to the Arria10. However, ECC requires
-access to registers that can only be read from Secure Monitor with
-SMC calls. Therefore the device tree is slightly different.
+in a shared register similar to the Arria10. However, Stratix10 ECC
+requires access to registers that can only be read from Secure Monitor
+with SMC calls. Therefore the device tree is slightly different. Note
+that only 1 interrupt is sent in Stratix10 because the double bit errors
+are treated as SErrors in ARM64 instead of IRQs in ARM32.
 
 Required Properties:
 - compatible : Should be "altr,socfpga-s10-ecc-manager"
-- interrupts : Should be single bit error interrupt, then double bit error
-	interrupt.
+- altr,sysgr-syscon : phandle to Stratix10 System Manager Block
+	              containing the ECC manager registers.
+- interrupts : Should be single bit error interrupt.
 - interrupt-controller : boolean indicator that ECC Manager is an interrupt controller
 - #interrupt-cells : must be set to 2.
+- #address-cells: must be 1
+- #size-cells: must be 1
+- ranges : standard definition, should translate from local addresses
 
 Subcomponents:
 
 SDRAM ECC
 Required Properties:
 - compatible : Should be "altr,sdram-edac-s10"
-- interrupts : Should be single bit error interrupt, then double bit error
-	interrupt, in this order.
+- interrupts : Should be single bit error interrupt.
+
+On-Chip RAM ECC
+Required Properties:
+- compatible      : Should be "altr,socfpga-s10-ocram-ecc"
+- reg             : Address and size for ECC block registers.
+- altr,ecc-parent : phandle to parent OCRAM node.
+- interrupts      : Should be single bit error interrupt.
+
+Ethernet FIFO ECC
+Required Properties:
+- compatible      : Should be "altr,socfpga-s10-eth-mac-ecc"
+- reg             : Address and size for ECC block registers.
+- altr,ecc-parent : phandle to parent Ethernet node.
+- interrupts      : Should be single bit error interrupt.
+
+NAND FIFO ECC
+Required Properties:
+- compatible      : Should be "altr,socfpga-s10-nand-ecc"
+- reg             : Address and size for ECC block registers.
+- altr,ecc-parent : phandle to parent NAND node.
+- interrupts      : Should be single bit error interrupt.
+
+DMA FIFO ECC
+Required Properties:
+- compatible      : Should be "altr,socfpga-s10-dma-ecc"
+- reg             : Address and size for ECC block registers.
+- altr,ecc-parent : phandle to parent DMA node.
+- interrupts      : Should be single bit error interrupt.
+
+USB FIFO ECC
+Required Properties:
+- compatible      : Should be "altr,socfpga-s10-usb-ecc"
+- reg             : Address and size for ECC block registers.
+- altr,ecc-parent : phandle to parent USB node.
+- interrupts      : Should be single bit error interrupt.
+
+SDMMC FIFO ECC
+Required Properties:
+- compatible      : Should be "altr,socfpga-s10-sdmmc-ecc"
+- reg             : Address and size for ECC block registers.
+- altr,ecc-parent : phandle to parent SD/MMC node.
+- interrupts      : Should be single bit error interrupt for port A
+		    and then single bit error interrupt for port B.
 
 Example:
 
 	eccmgr {
 		compatible = "altr,socfpga-s10-ecc-manager";
-		interrupts = <0 15 4>, <0 95 4>;
+		altr,sysmgr-syscon = <&sysmgr>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+		interrupts = <0 15 4>;
 		interrupt-controller;
 		#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+		ranges;
 
 		sdramedac {
 			compatible = "altr,sdram-edac-s10";
-			interrupts = <16 4>, <48 4>;
+			interrupts = <16 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
+		};
+
+		ocram-ecc@ff8cc000 {
+			compatible = "altr,socfpga-s10-ocram-ecc";
+			reg = <ff8cc000 0x100>;
+			altr,ecc-parent = <&ocram>;
+			interrupts = <1 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
+		};
+
+		emac0-rx-ecc@ff8c0000 {
+			compatible = "altr,socfpga-s10-eth-mac-ecc";
+			reg = <0xff8c0000 0x100>;
+			altr,ecc-parent = <&gmac0>;
+			interrupts = <4 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
+		};
+
+		emac0-tx-ecc@ff8c0400 {
+			compatible = "altr,socfpga-s10-eth-mac-ecc";
+			reg = <0xff8c0400 0x100>;
+			altr,ecc-parent = <&gmac0>;
+			interrupts = <5 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>'
+		};
+
+		nand-buf-ecc@ff8c8000 {
+			compatible = "altr,socfpga-s10-nand-ecc";
+			reg = <0xff8c8000 0x100>;
+			altr,ecc-parent = <&nand>;
+			interrupts = <11 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
+		};
+
+		nand-rd-ecc@ff8c8400 {
+			compatible = "altr,socfpga-s10-nand-ecc";
+			reg = <0xff8c8400 0x100>;
+			altr,ecc-parent = <&nand>;
+			interrupts = <13 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
+		};
+
+		nand-wr-ecc@ff8c8800 {
+			compatible = "altr,socfpga-s10-nand-ecc";
+			reg = <0xff8c8800 0x100>;
+			altr,ecc-parent = <&nand>;
+			interrupts = <12 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
+		};
+
+		dma-ecc@ff8c9000 {
+			compatible = "altr,socfpga-s10-dma-ecc";
+			reg = <0xff8c9000 0x100>;
+			altr,ecc-parent = <&pdma>;
+			interrupts = <10 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
+
+		usb0-ecc@ff8c4000 {
+			compatible = "altr,socfpga-s10-usb-ecc";
+			reg = <0xff8c4000 0x100>;
+			altr,ecc-parent = <&usb0>;
+			interrupts = <2 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
+		};
+
+		sdmmc-ecc@ff8c8c00 {
+			compatible = "altr,socfpga-s10-sdmmc-ecc";
+			reg = <0xff8c8c00 0x100>;
+			altr,ecc-parent = <&mmc>;
+			interrupts = <14 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>,
+				     <15 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
 		};
 	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/eeprom/at24.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/eeprom/at24.txt
index f9a7c984274c..22aead844d0f 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/eeprom/at24.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/eeprom/at24.txt
@@ -50,6 +50,7 @@ Required properties:
 
                 "nxp,se97b" - the fallback is "atmel,24c02",
                 "renesas,r1ex24002" - the fallback is "atmel,24c02"
+                "renesas,r1ex24016" - the fallback is "atmel,24c16"
                 "renesas,r1ex24128" - the fallback is "atmel,24c128"
                 "rohm,br24t01" - the fallback is "atmel,24c01"
 
@@ -75,6 +76,8 @@ Optional properties:
 
   - address-width: number of address bits (one of 8, 16).
 
+  - num-addresses: total number of i2c slave addresses this device takes
+
 Example:
 
 eeprom@52 {
@@ -82,4 +85,5 @@ eeprom@52 {
 	reg = <0x52>;
 	pagesize = <32>;
 	wp-gpios = <&gpio1 3 0>;
+	num-addresses = <8>;
 };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/extcon/extcon-ptn5150.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/extcon/extcon-ptn5150.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..936fbdf12815
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/extcon/extcon-ptn5150.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+* PTN5150 CC (Configuration Channel) Logic device
+
+PTN5150 is a small thin low power CC logic chip supporting the USB Type-C
+connector application with CC control logic detection and indication functions.
+It is interfaced to the host controller using an I2C interface.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: should be "nxp,ptn5150"
+- reg: specifies the I2C slave address of the device
+- int-gpio: should contain a phandle and GPIO specifier for the GPIO pin
+	connected to the PTN5150's INTB pin.
+- vbus-gpio: should contain a phandle and GPIO specifier for the GPIO pin which
+	is used to control VBUS.
+- pinctrl-names : a pinctrl state named "default" must be defined.
+- pinctrl-0 : phandle referencing pin configuration of interrupt and vbus
+	control.
+
+Example:
+	ptn5150@1d {
+		compatible = "nxp,ptn5150";
+		reg = <0x1d>;
+		int-gpio = <&msmgpio 78 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>;
+		vbus-gpio = <&msmgpio 148 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>;
+		pinctrl-names = "default";
+		pinctrl-0 = <&ptn5150_default>;
+		status = "okay";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/fieldbus/arcx,anybus-controller.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/fieldbus/arcx,anybus-controller.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b1f9474f36d5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/fieldbus/arcx,anybus-controller.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+* Arcx Anybus-S controller
+
+This chip communicates with the SoC over a parallel bus. It is
+expected that its Device Tree node is specified as the child of a node
+corresponding to the parallel bus used for communication.
+
+Required properties:
+--------------------
+
+  - compatible : The following chip-specific string:
+        "arcx,anybus-controller"
+
+  - reg : three areas:
+	index 0: bus memory area where the cpld registers are located.
+	index 1: bus memory area of the first  host's dual-port ram.
+	index 2: bus memory area of the second host's dual-port ram.
+
+  - reset-gpios : the GPIO pin connected to the reset line of the controller.
+
+  - interrupts : two interrupts:
+		index 0: interrupt connected to the first  host
+		index 1: interrupt connected to the second host
+	Generic interrupt client node bindings are described in
+	interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt
+
+Optional: use of subnodes
+-------------------------
+
+The card connected to a host may need additional properties. These can be
+specified in subnodes to the controller node.
+
+The subnodes are identified by the standard 'reg' property. Which information
+exactly can be specified depends on the bindings for the function driver
+for the subnode.
+
+Required controller node properties when using subnodes:
+- #address-cells: should be one.
+- #size-cells: should be zero.
+
+Required subnode properties:
+- reg: Must contain the host index of the card this subnode describes:
+		<0>	for the first  host on the controller
+		<1>	for the second host on the controller
+	Note that only a single card can be plugged into a host, so the host
+	index uniquely describes the card location.
+
+Example of usage:
+-----------------
+
+This example places the bridge on top of the i.MX WEIM parallel bus, see:
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/imx-weim.txt
+
+&weim {
+	controller@0,0 {
+		compatible = "arcx,anybus-controller";
+		reg = <0 0 0x100>, <0 0x400000 0x800>, <1 0x400000 0x800>;
+		reset-gpios = <&gpio5 2 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&gpio1>;
+		interrupts = <1 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW>, <5 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW>;
+		/* fsl,weim-cs-timing is a i.MX WEIM bus specific property */
+		fsl,weim-cs-timing = <0x024400b1 0x00001010 0x20081100
+				0x00000000 0xa0000240 0x00000000>;
+		/* optional subnode for a card plugged into the first host */
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+		card@0 {
+			reg = <0>;
+			/* card specific properties go here */
+		};
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/firmware/intel,ixp4xx-network-processing-engine.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/firmware/intel,ixp4xx-network-processing-engine.yaml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8cb136c376fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/firmware/intel,ixp4xx-network-processing-engine.yaml
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+# SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0 OR BSD-2-Clause)
+# Copyright 2019 Linaro Ltd.
+%YAML 1.2
+---
+$id: "http://devicetree.org/schemas/firmware/intel-ixp4xx-network-processing-engine.yaml#"
+$schema: "http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml#"
+
+title: Intel IXP4xx Network Processing Engine
+
+maintainers:
+  - Linus Walleij <linus.walleij@linaro.org>
+
+description: |
+  On the IXP4xx SoCs, the Network Processing Engine (NPE) is a small
+  processor that can load a firmware to perform offloading of networking
+  and crypto tasks. It also manages the MDIO bus to the ethernet PHYs
+  on the IXP4xx platform. All IXP4xx platforms have three NPEs at
+  consecutive memory locations. They are all included in the same
+  device node since they are not independent of each other.
+
+properties:
+  compatible:
+    oneOf:
+      - items:
+          - const: intel,ixp4xx-network-processing-engine
+
+  reg:
+    minItems: 3
+    maxItems: 3
+    items:
+      - description: NPE0 register range
+      - description: NPE1 register range
+      - description: NPE2 register range
+
+required:
+  - compatible
+  - reg
+
+examples:
+  - |
+    npe@c8006000 {
+         compatible = "intel,ixp4xx-network-processing-engine";
+         reg = <0xc8006000 0x1000>, <0xc8007000 0x1000>, <0xc8008000 0x1000>;
+    };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/firmware/nvidia,tegra186-bpmp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/firmware/nvidia,tegra186-bpmp.txt
index 0c10802c8327..ff380dadb5f9 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/firmware/nvidia,tegra186-bpmp.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/firmware/nvidia,tegra186-bpmp.txt
@@ -8,7 +8,6 @@ which can create the interprocessor communication (IPC) between the CPU
 and BPMP.
 
 Required properties:
-- name : Should be bpmp
 - compatible
     Array of strings
     One of:
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/firmware/nvidia,tegra210-bpmp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/firmware/nvidia,tegra210-bpmp.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..68d814e8c09d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/firmware/nvidia,tegra210-bpmp.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+NVIDIA Tegra210 Boot and Power Management Processor (BPMP)
+
+The Boot and Power Management Processor (BPMP) is a co-processor found
+in Tegra210 SoC. It is designed to handle the early stages of the boot
+process as well as to assisting in entering deep low power state
+(suspend to ram), and also offloading DRAM memory clock scaling on
+some platforms. The binding document defines the resources that would
+be used by the BPMP T210 firmware driver, which can create the
+interprocessor communication (IPC) between the CPU and BPMP.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible
+    Array of strings
+    One of:
+    - "nvidia,tegra210-bpmp"
+- reg: physical base address and length for HW synchornization primitives
+       1) base address and length to Tegra 'atomics' hardware
+       2) base address and length to Tegra 'semaphore' hardware
+- interrupts: specifies the interrupt number for receiving messages ("rx")
+              and for triggering messages ("tx")
+
+Optional properties:
+- #clock-cells : Should be 1 for platforms where DRAM clock control is
+                 offloaded to bpmp.
+
+Example:
+
+bpmp@70016000 {
+	compatible = "nvidia,tegra210-bpmp";
+	reg = <0x0 0x70016000 0x0 0x2000
+	       0x0 0x60001000 0x0 0x1000>;
+	interrupts = <GIC_SPI 6 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING>,
+		     <GIC_SPI 4 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING>;
+	interrupt-names = "tx", "rx";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/firmware/xilinx/xlnx,zynqmp-firmware.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/firmware/xilinx/xlnx,zynqmp-firmware.txt
index 614bac55df86..a4fe136be2ba 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/firmware/xilinx/xlnx,zynqmp-firmware.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/firmware/xilinx/xlnx,zynqmp-firmware.txt
@@ -17,53 +17,6 @@ Required properties:
 		  - "smc" : SMC #0, following the SMCCC
 		  - "hvc" : HVC #0, following the SMCCC
 
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Device Tree Clock bindings for the Zynq Ultrascale+ MPSoC controlled using
-Zynq MPSoC firmware interface
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-The clock controller is a h/w block of Zynq Ultrascale+ MPSoC clock
-tree. It reads required input clock frequencies from the devicetree and acts
-as clock provider for all clock consumers of PS clocks.
-
-See clock_bindings.txt for more information on the generic clock bindings.
-
-Required properties:
- - #clock-cells:	Must be 1
- - compatible:		Must contain:	"xlnx,zynqmp-clk"
- - clocks:		List of clock specifiers which are external input
-			clocks to the given clock controller. Please refer
-			the next section to find the input clocks for a
-			given controller.
- - clock-names:		List of clock names which are exteral input clocks
-			to the given clock controller. Please refer to the
-			clock bindings for more details.
-
-Input clocks for zynqmp Ultrascale+ clock controller:
-
-The Zynq UltraScale+ MPSoC has one primary and four alternative reference clock
-inputs. These required clock inputs are:
- - pss_ref_clk (PS reference clock)
- - video_clk (reference clock for video system )
- - pss_alt_ref_clk (alternative PS reference clock)
- - aux_ref_clk
- - gt_crx_ref_clk (transceiver reference clock)
-
-The following strings are optional parameters to the 'clock-names' property in
-order to provide an optional (E)MIO clock source:
- - swdt0_ext_clk
- - swdt1_ext_clk
- - gem0_emio_clk
- - gem1_emio_clk
- - gem2_emio_clk
- - gem3_emio_clk
- - mio_clk_XX		# with XX = 00..77
- - mio_clk_50_or_51	#for the mux clock to gem tsu from 50 or 51
-
-
-Output clocks are registered based on clock information received
-from firmware. Output clocks indexes are mentioned in
-include/dt-bindings/clock/xlnx,zynqmp-clk.h.
-
 -------
 Example
 -------
@@ -72,11 +25,6 @@ firmware {
 	zynqmp_firmware: zynqmp-firmware {
 		compatible = "xlnx,zynqmp-firmware";
 		method = "smc";
-		zynqmp_clk: clock-controller {
-			#clock-cells = <1>;
-			compatible = "xlnx,zynqmp-clk";
-			clocks = <&pss_ref_clk>, <&video_clk>, <&pss_alt_ref_clk>, <&aux_ref_clk>, <&gt_crx_ref_clk>;
-			clock-names = "pss_ref_clk", "video_clk", "pss_alt_ref_clk","aux_ref_clk", "gt_crx_ref_clk";
-		};
+		...
 	};
 };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/fpga/xlnx,zynqmp-pcap-fpga.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/fpga/xlnx,zynqmp-pcap-fpga.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3052bf619dd5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/fpga/xlnx,zynqmp-pcap-fpga.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+Devicetree bindings for Zynq Ultrascale MPSoC FPGA Manager.
+The ZynqMP SoC uses the PCAP (Processor configuration Port) to configure the
+Programmable Logic (PL). The configuration uses  the firmware interface.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: should contain "xlnx,zynqmp-pcap-fpga"
+
+Example for full FPGA configuration:
+
+	fpga-region0 {
+		compatible = "fpga-region";
+		fpga-mgr = <&zynqmp_pcap>;
+		#address-cells = <0x1>;
+		#size-cells = <0x1>;
+	};
+
+	firmware {
+		zynqmp_firmware: zynqmp-firmware {
+			compatible = "xlnx,zynqmp-firmware";
+			method = "smc";
+			zynqmp_pcap: pcap {
+				compatible = "xlnx,zynqmp-pcap-fpga";
+			};
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gnss/gnss.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gnss/gnss.txt
index f1e4a2ff47c5..f547bd4549fe 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gnss/gnss.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gnss/gnss.txt
@@ -17,6 +17,7 @@ Required properties:
 		  represents
 
 Optional properties:
+- lna-supply	: Separate supply for an LNA
 - enable-gpios	: GPIO used to enable the device
 - timepulse-gpios	: Time pulse GPIO
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gnss/mediatek.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gnss/mediatek.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..80cb802813c5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gnss/mediatek.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+Mediatek-based GNSS Receiver DT binding
+
+Mediatek chipsets are used in GNSS-receiver modules produced by several
+vendors and can use a UART interface.
+
+Please see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gnss/gnss.txt for generic
+properties.
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible	: Must be
+
+			"globaltop,pa6h"
+
+- vcc-supply	: Main voltage regulator (pin name: VCC)
+
+Optional properties:
+
+- current-speed		: Default UART baud rate
+- gnss-fix-gpios	: GPIO used to determine device position fix state
+			  (pin name: FIX, 3D_FIX)
+- reset-gpios		: GPIO used to reset the device (pin name: RESET, NRESET)
+- timepulse-gpios	: Time pulse GPIO (pin name: PPS1, 1PPS)
+- vbackup-supply	: Backup voltage regulator (pin name: VBAT, VBACKUP)
+
+Example:
+
+serial@1234 {
+	compatible = "ns16550a";
+
+	gnss {
+		compatible = "globaltop,pa6h";
+		vcc-supply = <&vcc_3v3>;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gnss/sirfstar.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gnss/sirfstar.txt
index 648d183cdb77..f4252b6b660b 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gnss/sirfstar.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gnss/sirfstar.txt
@@ -12,6 +12,7 @@ Required properties:
 
 			"fastrax,uc430"
 			"linx,r4"
+			"wi2wi,w2sg0004"
 			"wi2wi,w2sg0008i"
 			"wi2wi,w2sg0084i"
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gnss/u-blox.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gnss/u-blox.txt
index e475659cb85f..7cdefd058fe0 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gnss/u-blox.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gnss/u-blox.txt
@@ -9,6 +9,7 @@ Required properties:
 
 - compatible	: Must be one of
 
+			"u-blox,neo-6m"
 			"u-blox,neo-8"
 			"u-blox,neo-m8"
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gateworks,pld-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gateworks,pld-gpio.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6e81f8b755c5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gateworks,pld-gpio.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+Gateworks PLD GPIO controller bindings
+
+The GPIO controller should be a child node on an I2C bus,
+see: i2c/i2c.txt for details.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "gateworks,pld-gpio"
+- reg: I2C slave address
+- gpio-controller: Marks the device node as a GPIO controller.
+- #gpio-cells: Should be <2>. The first cell is the gpio number and
+  the second cell is used to specify optional parameters.
+
+Example:
+
+pld@56 {
+	compatible = "gateworks,pld-gpio";
+	reg = <0x56>;
+	gpio-controller;
+	#gpio-cells = <2>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-eic-sprd.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-eic-sprd.txt
index 93d98d09d92b..54040a2bfe3a 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-eic-sprd.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-eic-sprd.txt
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ Required properties:
   "sprd,sc9860-eic-latch",
   "sprd,sc9860-eic-async",
   "sprd,sc9860-eic-sync",
-  "sprd,sc27xx-eic".
+  "sprd,sc2731-eic".
 - reg: Define the base and range of the I/O address space containing
   the GPIO controller registers.
 - gpio-controller: Marks the device node as a GPIO controller.
@@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Example:
 	};
 
 	pmic_eic: gpio@300 {
-		compatible = "sprd,sc27xx-eic";
+		compatible = "sprd,sc2731-eic";
 		reg = <0x300>;
 		interrupt-parent = <&sc2731_pmic>;
 		interrupts = <5 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-pca953x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-pca953x.txt
index 4e3c550e319a..dab537c20def 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-pca953x.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-pca953x.txt
@@ -2,6 +2,7 @@
 
 Required properties:
  - compatible: Has to contain one of the following:
+	nxp,pca6416
 	nxp,pca9505
 	nxp,pca9534
 	nxp,pca9535
@@ -16,6 +17,7 @@ Required properties:
 	nxp,pca9574
 	nxp,pca9575
 	nxp,pca9698
+	nxp,pcal6416
 	nxp,pcal6524
 	nxp,pcal9555a
 	maxim,max7310
@@ -29,6 +31,7 @@ Required properties:
 	ti,tca6424
 	ti,tca9539
 	ti,tca9554
+	onnn,cat9554
 	onnn,pca9654
 	exar,xra1202
  - gpio-controller: if used as gpio expander.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt
index f0ba154b5723..a8895d339bfe 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt
@@ -67,6 +67,18 @@ Optional standard bitfield specifiers for the last cell:
            https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Open_collector
 - Bit 3: 0 means the output should be maintained during sleep/low-power mode
          1 means the output state can be lost during sleep/low-power mode
+- Bit 4: 0 means no pull-up resistor should be enabled
+         1 means a pull-up resistor should be enabled
+         This setting only applies to hardware with a simple on/off
+         control for pull-up configuration. If the hardware has more
+         elaborate pull-up configuration, it should be represented
+         using a pin control binding.
+- Bit 5: 0 means no pull-down resistor should be enabled
+         1 means a pull-down resistor should be enabled
+         This setting only applies to hardware with a simple on/off
+         control for pull-down configuration. If the hardware has more
+         elaborate pull-down configuration, it should be represented
+         using a pin control binding.
 
 1.1) GPIO specifier best practices
 ----------------------------------
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/intel,ixp4xx-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/intel,ixp4xx-gpio.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8dc41ed99685
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/intel,ixp4xx-gpio.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+Intel IXP4xx XScale Networking Processors GPIO
+
+This GPIO controller is found in the Intel IXP4xx processors.
+It supports 16 GPIO lines.
+
+The interrupt portions of the GPIO controller is hierarchical:
+the synchronous edge detector is part of the GPIO block, but the
+actual enabling/disabling of the interrupt line is done in the
+main IXP4xx interrupt controller which has a 1:1 mapping for
+the first 12 GPIO lines to 12 system interrupts.
+
+The remaining 4 GPIO lines can not be used for receiving
+interrupts.
+
+The interrupt parent of this GPIO controller must be the
+IXP4xx interrupt controller.
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible : Should be
+  "intel,ixp4xx-gpio"
+- reg : Should contain registers location and length
+- gpio-controller : marks this as a GPIO controller
+- #gpio-cells : Should be 2, see gpio/gpio.txt
+- interrupt-controller : marks this as an interrupt controller
+- #interrupt-cells : a standard two-cell interrupt, see
+  interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt
+
+Example:
+
+gpio0: gpio@c8004000 {
+	compatible = "intel,ixp4xx-gpio";
+	reg = <0xc8004000 0x1000>;
+	gpio-controller;
+	#gpio-cells = <2>;
+	interrupt-controller;
+	#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/arm,mali-bifrost.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/arm,mali-bifrost.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b8be9dbc68b4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/arm,mali-bifrost.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,92 @@
+ARM Mali Bifrost GPU
+====================
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible :
+  * Since Mali Bifrost GPU model/revision is fully discoverable by reading
+    some determined registers, must contain the following:
+    + "arm,mali-bifrost"
+  * which must be preceded by one of the following vendor specifics:
+    + "amlogic,meson-g12a-mali"
+
+- reg : Physical base address of the device and length of the register area.
+
+- interrupts : Contains the three IRQ lines required by Mali Bifrost devices,
+  in the following defined order.
+
+- interrupt-names : Contains the names of IRQ resources in this exact defined
+  order: "job", "mmu", "gpu".
+
+Optional properties:
+
+- clocks : Phandle to clock for the Mali Bifrost device.
+
+- mali-supply : Phandle to regulator for the Mali device. Refer to
+  Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt for details.
+
+- operating-points-v2 : Refer to Documentation/devicetree/bindings/opp/opp.txt
+  for details.
+
+- resets : Phandle of the GPU reset line.
+
+Vendor-specific bindings
+------------------------
+
+The Mali GPU is integrated very differently from one SoC to
+another. In order to accommodate those differences, you have the option
+to specify one more vendor-specific compatible, among:
+
+- "amlogic,meson-g12a-mali"
+  Required properties:
+  - resets : Should contain phandles of :
+    + GPU reset line
+    + GPU APB glue reset line
+
+Example for a Mali-G31:
+
+gpu@ffa30000 {
+	compatible = "amlogic,meson-g12a-mali", "arm,mali-bifrost";
+	reg = <0xffe40000 0x10000>;
+	interrupts = <GIC_SPI 160 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>,
+		     <GIC_SPI 161 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>,
+		     <GIC_SPI 162 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
+	interrupt-names = "job", "mmu", "gpu";
+	clocks = <&clk CLKID_MALI>;
+	mali-supply = <&vdd_gpu>;
+	operating-points-v2 = <&gpu_opp_table>;
+	resets = <&reset RESET_DVALIN_CAPB3>, <&reset RESET_DVALIN>;
+};
+
+gpu_opp_table: opp_table0 {
+	compatible = "operating-points-v2";
+
+	opp@533000000 {
+		opp-hz = /bits/ 64 <533000000>;
+		opp-microvolt = <1250000>;
+	};
+	opp@450000000 {
+		opp-hz = /bits/ 64 <450000000>;
+		opp-microvolt = <1150000>;
+	};
+	opp@400000000 {
+		opp-hz = /bits/ 64 <400000000>;
+		opp-microvolt = <1125000>;
+	};
+	opp@350000000 {
+		opp-hz = /bits/ 64 <350000000>;
+		opp-microvolt = <1075000>;
+	};
+	opp@266000000 {
+		opp-hz = /bits/ 64 <266000000>;
+		opp-microvolt = <1025000>;
+	};
+	opp@160000000 {
+		opp-hz = /bits/ 64 <160000000>;
+		opp-microvolt = <925000>;
+	};
+	opp@100000000 {
+		opp-hz = /bits/ 64 <100000000>;
+		opp-microvolt = <912500>;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/arm,mali-midgard.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/arm,mali-midgard.txt
index 18a2cde2e5f3..1b1a74129141 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/arm,mali-midgard.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/arm,mali-midgard.txt
@@ -37,6 +37,20 @@ Optional properties:
 - operating-points-v2 : Refer to Documentation/devicetree/bindings/opp/opp.txt
   for details.
 
+- resets : Phandle of the GPU reset line.
+
+Vendor-specific bindings
+------------------------
+
+The Mali GPU is integrated very differently from one SoC to
+another. In order to accomodate those differences, you have the option
+to specify one more vendor-specific compatible, among:
+
+- "amlogic,meson-gxm-mali"
+  Required properties:
+  - resets : Should contain phandles of :
+    + GPU reset line
+    + GPU APB glue reset line
 
 Example for a Mali-T760:
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/arm,mali-utgard.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/arm,mali-utgard.txt
index 3f128e4f95c6..ae63f09fda7d 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/arm,mali-utgard.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/arm,mali-utgard.txt
@@ -13,6 +13,8 @@ Required properties:
       + allwinner,sun8i-h3-mali
       + allwinner,sun50i-a64-mali
       + allwinner,sun50i-h5-mali
+      + amlogic,meson8-mali
+      + amlogic,meson8b-mali
       + amlogic,meson-gxbb-mali
       + amlogic,meson-gxl-mali
       + rockchip,rk3036-mali
@@ -82,6 +84,10 @@ to specify one more vendor-specific compatible, among:
     Required properties:
       * resets: phandle to the reset line for the GPU
 
+  - amlogic,meson8-mali and amlogic,meson8b-mali
+    Required properties:
+      * resets: phandle to the reset line for the GPU
+
   - Rockchip variants:
     Required properties:
       * resets: phandle to the reset line for the GPU
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/aspeed-gfx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/aspeed-gfx.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..958bdf962339
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/aspeed-gfx.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+Device tree configuration for the GFX display device on the ASPEED SoCs
+
+Required properties:
+  - compatible
+    * Must be one of the following:
+      + aspeed,ast2500-gfx
+      + aspeed,ast2400-gfx
+    * In addition, the ASPEED pinctrl bindings require the 'syscon' property to
+      be present
+
+  - reg: Physical base address and length of the GFX registers
+
+  - interrupts: interrupt number for the GFX device
+
+  - clocks: clock number used to generate the pixel clock
+
+  - resets: reset line that must be released to use the GFX device
+
+  - memory-region:
+    Phandle to a memory region to allocate from, as defined in
+    Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reserved-memory/reserved-memory.txt
+
+
+Example:
+
+gfx: display@1e6e6000 {
+	compatible = "aspeed,ast2500-gfx", "syscon";
+	reg = <0x1e6e6000 0x1000>;
+	reg-io-width = <4>;
+	clocks = <&syscon ASPEED_CLK_GATE_D1CLK>;
+	resets = <&syscon ASPEED_RESET_CRT1>;
+	interrupts = <0x19>;
+	memory-region = <&gfx_memory>;
+};
+
+gfx_memory: framebuffer {
+	size = <0x01000000>;
+	alignment = <0x01000000>;
+	compatible = "shared-dma-pool";
+	reusable;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/brcm,bcm-v3d.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/brcm,bcm-v3d.txt
index c907aa8dd755..b2df82b44625 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/brcm,bcm-v3d.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/brcm,bcm-v3d.txt
@@ -6,15 +6,20 @@ For V3D 2.x, see brcm,bcm-vc4.txt.
 Required properties:
 - compatible:	Should be "brcm,7268-v3d" or "brcm,7278-v3d"
 - reg:		Physical base addresses and lengths of the register areas
-- reg-names:	Names for the register areas.  The "hub", "bridge", and "core0"
+- reg-names:	Names for the register areas.  The "hub" and "core0"
 		  register areas are always required.  The "gca" register area
-		  is required if the GCA cache controller is present.
+		  is required if the GCA cache controller is present.  The
+		  "bridge" register area is required if an external reset
+		  controller is not present.
 - interrupts:	The interrupt numbers.  The first interrupt is for the hub,
-		  while the following interrupts are for the cores.
+		  while the following interrupts are separate interrupt lines
+		  for the cores (if they don't share the hub's interrupt).
 		  See bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt
 
 Optional properties:
 - clocks:	The core clock the unit runs on
+- resets:	The reset line for v3d, if not using a mapping of the bridge
+		  See bindings/reset/reset.txt
 
 v3d {
 	compatible = "brcm,7268-v3d";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/samsung-rotator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/samsung-rotator.txt
index 82cd1ed0be93..3aca2578da0b 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/samsung-rotator.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/samsung-rotator.txt
@@ -2,9 +2,10 @@
 
 Required properties:
   - compatible : value should be one of the following:
-	(a) "samsung,exynos4210-rotator" for Rotator IP in Exynos4210
-	(b) "samsung,exynos4212-rotator" for Rotator IP in Exynos4212/4412
-	(c) "samsung,exynos5250-rotator" for Rotator IP in Exynos5250
+	* "samsung,s5pv210-rotator" for Rotator IP in S5PV210
+	* "samsung,exynos4210-rotator" for Rotator IP in Exynos4210
+	* "samsung,exynos4212-rotator" for Rotator IP in Exynos4212/4412
+	* "samsung,exynos5250-rotator" for Rotator IP in Exynos5250
 
   - reg : Physical base address of the IP registers and length of memory
 	  mapped region.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/ad741x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/ad741x.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9102152c8410
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/ad741x.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+* AD7416/AD7417/AD7418 Temperature Sensor Device Tree Bindings
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: one of
+		"adi,ad7416"
+		"adi,ad7417"
+		"adi,ad7418"
+- reg: I2C address
+
+Example:
+
+hwmon@28 {
+	compatible = "adi,ad7418";
+	reg = <0x28>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/adc128d818.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/adc128d818.txt
index 08bab0e94d25..d0ae46d7bac3 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/adc128d818.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/adc128d818.txt
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ Required node properties:
 
 Optional node properties:
 
- - ti,mode:     Operation mode (see above).
+ - ti,mode:     Operation mode (u8) (see above).
 
 
 Example (operation mode 2):
@@ -34,5 +34,5 @@ Example (operation mode 2):
 	adc128d818@1d {
 		compatible = "ti,adc128d818";
 		reg = <0x1d>;
-		ti,mode = <2>;
+		ti,mode = /bits/ 8 <2>;
 	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/cirrus,lochnagar.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/cirrus,lochnagar.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ffb79ccf51ee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/cirrus,lochnagar.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+Cirrus Logic Lochnagar Audio Development Board
+
+Lochnagar is an evaluation and development board for Cirrus Logic
+Smart CODEC and Amp devices. It allows the connection of most Cirrus
+Logic devices on mini-cards, as well as allowing connection of
+various application processor systems to provide a full evaluation
+platform.  Audio system topology, clocking and power can all be
+controlled through the Lochnagar, allowing the device under test
+to be used in a variety of possible use cases.
+
+This binding document describes the binding for the hardware monitor
+portion of the driver.
+
+This binding must be part of the Lochnagar MFD binding:
+  [4] ../mfd/cirrus,lochnagar.txt
+
+Required properties:
+
+  - compatible : One of the following strings:
+                 "cirrus,lochnagar2-hwmon"
+
+Example:
+
+lochnagar-hwmon {
+	compatible = "cirrus,lochnagar2-hwmon";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/dps650ab.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/dps650ab.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..76780e795899
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/dps650ab.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+Bindings for Delta Electronics DPS-650-AB power supply
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "delta,dps650ab"
+- reg        : I2C address, one of 0x58, 0x59.
+
+Example:
+	dps650ab@58 {
+		    compatible = "delta,dps650ab";
+		    reg = <0x58>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/g762.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/g762.txt
index 25cc6d8ee575..6d154c4923de 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/g762.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/g762.txt
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ If an optional property is not set in .dts file, then current value is kept
 unmodified (e.g. u-boot installed value).
 
 Additional information on operational parameters for the device is available
-in Documentation/hwmon/g762. A detailed datasheet for the device is available
+in Documentation/hwmon/g762.rst. A detailed datasheet for the device is available
 at http://natisbad.org/NAS/refs/GMT_EDS-762_763-080710-0.2.pdf.
 
 Example g762 node:
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/hih6130.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/hih6130.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2c43837af4c2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/hih6130.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+Honeywell Humidicon HIH-6130 humidity/temperature sensor
+--------------------------------------------------------
+
+Requires node properties:
+- compatible : "honeywell,hi6130"
+- reg : the I2C address of the device. This is 0x27.
+
+Example:
+	hih6130@27 {
+		compatible = "honeywell,hih6130";
+		reg = <0x27>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/ina3221.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/ina3221.txt
index a7b25caa2b8e..fa63b6171407 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/ina3221.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/ina3221.txt
@@ -6,6 +6,16 @@ Texas Instruments INA3221 Device Tree Bindings
   - reg: I2C address
 
   Optional properties:
+  - ti,single-shot: This chip has two power modes: single-shot (chip takes one
+                    measurement and then shuts itself down) and continuous (
+                    chip takes continuous measurements). The continuous mode is
+                    more reliable and suitable for hardware monitor type device,
+                    but the single-shot mode is more power-friendly and useful
+                    for battery-powered device which cares power consumptions
+                    while still needs some measurements occasionally.
+                    If this property is present, the single-shot mode will be
+                    used, instead of the default continuous one for monitoring.
+
   = The node contains optional child nodes for three channels =
   = Each child node describes the information of input source =
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/lm75.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/lm75.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..586b5ed70be7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/lm75.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+*LM75 hwmon sensor.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: manufacturer and chip name, one of
+		"adi,adt75",
+		"dallas,ds1775",
+		"dallas,ds75",
+		"dallas,ds7505",
+		"gmt,g751",
+		"national,lm75",
+		"national,lm75a",
+		"national,lm75b",
+		"maxim,max6625",
+		"maxim,max6626",
+		"maxim,max31725",
+		"maxim,max31726",
+		"maxim,mcp980x",
+		"st,stds75",
+		"st,stlm75",
+		"microchip,tcn75",
+		"ti,tmp100",
+		"ti,tmp101",
+		"ti,tmp105",
+		"ti,tmp112",
+		"ti,tmp175",
+		"ti,tmp275",
+		"ti,tmp75",
+		"ti,tmp75b",
+		"ti,tmp75c",
+
+- reg: I2C bus address of the device
+
+Example:
+
+sensor@48 {
+	compatible = "st,stlm75";
+	reg = <0x48>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/pwm-fan.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/pwm-fan.txt
index c6d533202d3e..41b76762953a 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/pwm-fan.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/pwm-fan.txt
@@ -6,11 +6,21 @@ Required properties:
 - cooling-levels      : PWM duty cycle values in a range from 0 to 255
 			which correspond to thermal cooling states
 
+Optional properties:
+- fan-supply		: phandle to the regulator that provides power to the fan
+- interrupts		: This contains a single interrupt specifier which
+			  describes the tachometer output of the fan as an
+			  interrupt source. The output signal must generate a
+			  defined number of interrupts per fan revolution, which
+			  require that it must be self resetting edge interrupts.
+			  See interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for the format.
+- pulses-per-revolution : define the tachometer pulses per fan revolution as
+			  an integer (default is 2 interrupts per revolution).
+			  The value must be greater than zero.
+
 Example:
 	fan0: pwm-fan {
 		compatible = "pwm-fan";
-		cooling-min-state = <0>;
-		cooling-max-state = <3>;
 		#cooling-cells = <2>;
 		pwms = <&pwm 0 10000 0>;
 		cooling-levels = <0 102 170 230>;
@@ -35,3 +45,13 @@ Example:
 					};
 			     };
 		};
+
+Example 2:
+	fan0: pwm-fan {
+		compatible = "pwm-fan";
+		pwms = <&pwm 0 40000 0>;
+		fan-supply = <&reg_fan>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&gpio5>;
+		interrupts = <1 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING>;
+		pulses-per-revolution = <2>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/brcm,iproc-i2c.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/brcm,iproc-i2c.txt
index 81f982ccca31..d12cc33cca6c 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/brcm,iproc-i2c.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/brcm,iproc-i2c.txt
@@ -3,15 +3,12 @@ Broadcom iProc I2C controller
 Required properties:
 
 - compatible:
-    Must be "brcm,iproc-i2c"
+    Must be "brcm,iproc-i2c" or "brcm,iproc-nic-i2c"
 
 - reg:
     Define the base and range of the I/O address space that contain the iProc
     I2C controller registers
 
-- interrupts:
-    Should contain the I2C interrupt
-
 - clock-frequency:
     This is the I2C bus clock. Need to be either 100000 or 400000
 
@@ -21,6 +18,18 @@ Required properties:
 - #size-cells:
     Always 0
 
+Optional properties:
+
+- interrupts:
+    Should contain the I2C interrupt. For certain revisions of the I2C
+    controller, I2C interrupt is unwired to the interrupt controller. In such
+    case, this property should be left unspecified, and driver will fall back
+    to polling mode
+
+- brcm,ape-hsls-addr-mask:
+    Required for "brcm,iproc-nic-i2c". Host view of address mask into the
+    'APE' co-processor. Value must be unsigned, 32-bit
+
 Example:
 	i2c0: i2c@18008000 {
 		compatible = "brcm,iproc-i2c";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-designware.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-designware.txt
index 3e4bcc2fb6f7..08be4d3846e5 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-designware.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-designware.txt
@@ -6,12 +6,21 @@ Required properties :
                 or "mscc,ocelot-i2c" with "snps,designware-i2c" for fallback
  - reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device
  - interrupts : <IRQ> where IRQ is the interrupt number.
+ - clocks : phandles for the clocks, see the description of clock-names below.
+   The phandle for the "ic_clk" clock is required. The phandle for the "pclk"
+   clock is optional. If a single clock is specified but no clock-name, it is
+   the "ic_clk" clock. If both clocks are listed, the "ic_clk" must be first.
 
 Recommended properties :
 
  - clock-frequency : desired I2C bus clock frequency in Hz.
 
 Optional properties :
+
+ - clock-names : Contains the names of the clocks:
+    "ic_clk", for the core clock used to generate the external I2C clock.
+    "pclk", the interface clock, required for register access.
+
  - reg : for "mscc,ocelot-i2c", a second register set to configure the SDA hold
    time, named ICPU_CFG:TWI_DELAY in the datasheet.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-iop3xx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-iop3xx.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..dcc8390e0d24
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-iop3xx.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+i2c Controller on XScale platforms such as IOP3xx and IXP4xx
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Must be one of
+  "intel,iop3xx-i2c"
+  "intel,ixp4xx-i2c";
+- reg
+- #address-cells = <1>;
+- #size-cells = <0>;
+
+Optional properties:
+- Child nodes conforming to i2c bus binding
+
+Example:
+
+i2c@c8011000 {
+	compatible = "intel,ixp4xx-i2c";
+	reg = <0xc8011000 0x18>;
+	interrupts = <33 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-mtk.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-mt65xx.txt
index e199695b1c96..68f6d73a8b73 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-mtk.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-mt65xx.txt
@@ -10,14 +10,18 @@ Required properties:
       "mediatek,mt6589-i2c": for MediaTek MT6589
       "mediatek,mt7622-i2c": for MediaTek MT7622
       "mediatek,mt7623-i2c", "mediatek,mt6577-i2c": for MediaTek MT7623
+      "mediatek,mt7629-i2c", "mediatek,mt2712-i2c": for MediaTek MT7629
       "mediatek,mt8173-i2c": for MediaTek MT8173
+      "mediatek,mt8183-i2c": for MediaTek MT8183
+      "mediatek,mt8516-i2c", "mediatek,mt2712-i2c": for MediaTek MT8516
   - reg: physical base address of the controller and dma base, length of memory
     mapped region.
   - interrupts: interrupt number to the cpu.
   - clock-div: the fixed value for frequency divider of clock source in i2c
     module. Each IC may be different.
   - clocks: clock name from clock manager
-  - clock-names: Must include "main" and "dma", if enable have-pmic need include
+  - clock-names: Must include "main" and "dma", "arb" is for multi-master that
+    one bus has more than two i2c controllers, if enable have-pmic need include
     "pmic" extra.
 
 Optional properties:
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-riic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-riic.txt
index 0bcc4716c319..e26fe3ad86a9 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-riic.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-riic.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,10 @@
 Device tree configuration for Renesas RIIC driver
 
 Required properties:
-- compatible      : "renesas,riic-<soctype>". "renesas,riic-rz" as fallback
+- compatible      :
+	"renesas,riic-r7s72100" if the device is a part of a R7S72100 SoC.
+	"renesas,riic-r7s9210" if the device is a part of a R7S9210 SoC.
+	"renesas,riic-rz" for a generic RZ/A compatible device.
 - reg             : address start and address range size of device
 - interrupts      : 8 interrupts (TEI, RI, TI, SPI, STI, NAKI, ALI, TMOI)
 - clock-frequency : frequency of bus clock in Hz
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-stm32.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-stm32.txt
index 69240e189b01..f334738f7a35 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-stm32.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-stm32.txt
@@ -1,11 +1,11 @@
 * I2C controller embedded in STMicroelectronics STM32 I2C platform
 
-Required properties :
-- compatible : Must be one of the following
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Must be one of the following
   - "st,stm32f4-i2c"
   - "st,stm32f7-i2c"
-- reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device
-- interrupts : Must contain the interrupt id for I2C event and then the
+- reg: Offset and length of the register set for the device
+- interrupts: Must contain the interrupt id for I2C event and then the
   interrupt id for I2C error.
 - resets: Must contain the phandle to the reset controller.
 - clocks: Must contain the input clock of the I2C instance.
@@ -14,25 +14,26 @@ Required properties :
 - #address-cells = <1>;
 - #size-cells = <0>;
 
-Optional properties :
-- clock-frequency : Desired I2C bus clock frequency in Hz. If not specified,
+Optional properties:
+- clock-frequency: Desired I2C bus clock frequency in Hz. If not specified,
   the default 100 kHz frequency will be used.
   For STM32F4 SoC Standard-mode and Fast-mode are supported, possible values are
   100000 and 400000.
-  For STM32F7 SoC, Standard-mode, Fast-mode and Fast-mode Plus are supported,
-  possible values are 100000, 400000 and 1000000.
-- i2c-scl-rising-time-ns : Only for STM32F7, I2C SCL Rising time for the board
-  (default: 25)
-- i2c-scl-falling-time-ns : Only for STM32F7, I2C SCL Falling time for the board
-  (default: 10)
+  For STM32F7, STM32H7 and STM32MP1 SoCs, Standard-mode, Fast-mode and Fast-mode
+  Plus are supported, possible values are 100000, 400000 and 1000000.
+- i2c-scl-rising-time-ns: I2C SCL Rising time for the board (default: 25)
+  For STM32F7, STM32H7 and STM32MP1 only.
+- i2c-scl-falling-time-ns: I2C SCL Falling time for the board (default: 10)
+  For STM32F7, STM32H7 and STM32MP1 only.
   I2C Timings are derived from these 2 values
-- st,syscfg-fmp:  Only for STM32F7, use to set Fast Mode Plus bit within SYSCFG
-  whether Fast Mode Plus speed is selected by slave.
-	1st cell : phandle to syscfg
-	2nd cell : register offset within SYSCFG
-	3rd cell : register bitmask for FMP bit
+- st,syscfg-fmp: Use to set Fast Mode Plus bit within SYSCFG when Fast Mode
+  Plus speed is selected by slave.
+	1st cell: phandle to syscfg
+	2nd cell: register offset within SYSCFG
+	3rd cell: register bitmask for FMP bit
+  For STM32F7, STM32H7 and STM32MP1 only.
 
-Example :
+Example:
 
 	i2c@40005400 {
 		compatible = "st,stm32f4-i2c";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-st-ddci2c.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-stu300.txt
index bd81a482634f..bd81a482634f 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-st-ddci2c.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-stu300.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-sunxi-p2wi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-sun6i-p2wi.txt
index 49df0053347a..49df0053347a 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-sunxi-p2wi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-sun6i-p2wi.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-vt8500.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-wmt.txt
index 94a425eaa6c7..94a425eaa6c7 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-vt8500.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-wmt.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/kionix,kxcjk1013.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/kionix,kxcjk1013.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..eb76a02e2a82
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/kionix,kxcjk1013.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+Kionix KXCJK-1013 Accelerometer device tree bindings
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible: Must be one of:
+    "kionix,kxcjk1013"
+    "kionix,kxcj91008"
+    "kionix,kxtj21009"
+    "kionix,kxtf9"
+ - reg: i2c slave address
+
+Example:
+
+kxtf9@f {
+	compatible = "kionix,kxtf9";
+	reg = <0x0F>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/mma8452.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/mma8452.txt
index 2100e9af379c..e132394375a1 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/mma8452.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/mma8452.txt
@@ -20,6 +20,10 @@ Optional properties:
   - interrupt-names: should contain "INT1" and/or "INT2", the accelerometer's
 		     interrupt line in use.
 
+  - vdd-supply: phandle to the regulator that provides vdd power to the accelerometer.
+
+  - vddio-supply: phandle to the regulator that provides vddio power to the accelerometer.
+
 Example:
 
 	mma8453fc@1d {
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/adi,ad7606.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/adi,ad7606.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d8652460198e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/adi,ad7606.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+Analog Devices AD7606 Simultaneous Sampling ADC
+
+Required properties for the AD7606:
+
+- compatible: Must be one of
+	* "adi,ad7605-4"
+	* "adi,ad7606-8"
+	* "adi,ad7606-6"
+	* "adi,ad7606-4"
+	* "adi,ad7616"
+- reg: SPI chip select number for the device
+- spi-max-frequency: Max SPI frequency to use
+	see: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt
+- spi-cpha: See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt
+- avcc-supply: phandle to the Avcc power supply
+- interrupts: IRQ line for the ADC
+	see: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt
+- adi,conversion-start-gpios: must be the device tree identifier of the CONVST pin.
+		  This logic input is used to initiate conversions on the analog
+		  input channels. As the line is active high, it should be marked
+		  GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH.
+
+Optional properties:
+
+- reset-gpios: must be the device tree identifier of the RESET pin. If specified,
+	       it will be asserted during driver probe. As the line is active high,
+	       it should be marked GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH.
+- standby-gpios: must be the device tree identifier of the STBY pin. This pin is used
+		to place the AD7606 into one of two power-down modes, Standby mode or
+		Shutdown mode. As the line is active low, it should be marked
+		GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW.
+- adi,first-data-gpios: must be the device tree identifier of the FRSTDATA pin.
+		    The FRSTDATA output indicates when the first channel, V1, is
+		    being read back on either the parallel, byte or serial interface.
+		    As the line is active high, it should be marked GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH.
+- adi,range-gpios: must be the device tree identifier of the RANGE pin. The polarity on
+	      this pin determines the input range of the analog input channels. If
+	      this pin is tied to a logic high, the analog input range is ±10V for
+	      all channels. If this pin is tied to a logic low, the analog input range
+	      is ±5V for all channels. As the line is active high, it should be marked
+	      GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH.
+- adi,oversampling-ratio-gpios: must be the device tree identifier of the over-sampling
+				mode pins. As the line is active high, it should be marked
+				GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH.
+
+Example:
+
+	adc@0 {
+		compatible = "adi,ad7606-8";
+		reg = <0>;
+		spi-max-frequency = <1000000>;
+		spi-cpol;
+
+		avcc-supply = <&adc_vref>;
+
+		interrupts = <25 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&gpio>;
+
+		adi,conversion-start-gpios = <&gpio 17 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>;
+		reset-gpios = <&gpio 27 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>;
+		adi,first-data-gpios = <&gpio 22 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>;
+		adi,oversampling-ratio-gpios = <&gpio 18 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH
+						&gpio 23 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH
+						&gpio 26 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>;
+		standby-gpios = <&gpio 24 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/adi,ad7768-1.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/adi,ad7768-1.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9f5b88cf680d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/adi,ad7768-1.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+Analog Devices AD7768-1 ADC device driver
+
+Required properties for the AD7768-1:
+
+- compatible: Must be "adi,ad7768-1"
+- reg: SPI chip select number for the device
+- spi-max-frequency: Max SPI frequency to use
+	see: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt
+- clocks: phandle to the master clock (mclk)
+	see: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt
+- clock-names: Must be "mclk".
+- interrupts: IRQ line for the ADC
+	see: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt
+- vref-supply: vref supply can be used as reference for conversion
+- adi,sync-in-gpios: must be the device tree identifier of the SYNC-IN pin. Enables
+	synchronization of multiple devices that require simultaneous sampling.
+	A pulse is always required if the configuration is changed in any way, for example
+	if the filter decimation rate changes. As the line is active low, it should
+	be marked GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW.
+
+Optional properties:
+
+ - reset-gpios : GPIO spec for the RESET pin. If specified, it will be asserted during
+	driver probe. As the line is active low, it should be marked GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW.
+
+Example:
+
+	adc@0 {
+		compatible = "adi,ad7768-1";
+		reg = <0>;
+		spi-max-frequency = <2000000>;
+		spi-cpol;
+		spi-cpha;
+		vref-supply = <&adc_vref>;
+		interrupts = <25 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&gpio>;
+		adi,sync-in-gpios = <&gpio 22 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>;
+		reset-gpios = <&gpio 27 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>;
+		clocks = <&ad7768_mclk>;
+		clock-names = "mclk";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/adi,ad7780.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/adi,ad7780.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..440e52555349
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/adi,ad7780.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+* Analog Devices AD7170/AD7171/AD7780/AD7781
+
+Data sheets:
+
+- AD7170:
+	* https://www.analog.com/media/en/technical-documentation/data-sheets/AD7170.pdf
+- AD7171:
+	* https://www.analog.com/media/en/technical-documentation/data-sheets/AD7171.pdf
+- AD7780:
+	* https://www.analog.com/media/en/technical-documentation/data-sheets/ad7780.pdf
+- AD7781:
+	* https://www.analog.com/media/en/technical-documentation/data-sheets/AD7781.pdf
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible: should be one of
+	* "adi,ad7170"
+	* "adi,ad7171"
+	* "adi,ad7780"
+	* "adi,ad7781"
+- reg: spi chip select number for the device
+- vref-supply: the regulator supply for the ADC reference voltage
+
+Optional properties:
+
+- powerdown-gpios:  must be the device tree identifier of the PDRST pin. If
+		    specified, it will be asserted during driver probe. As the
+		    line is active high, it should be marked GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH.
+- adi,gain-gpios:   must be the device tree identifier of the GAIN pin. Only for
+		    the ad778x chips. If specified, it will be asserted during
+		    driver probe. As the line is active low, it should be marked
+		    GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW.
+- adi,filter-gpios: must be the device tree identifier of the FILTER pin. Only
+		    for the ad778x chips. If specified, it will be asserted
+		    during driver probe. As the line is active low, it should be
+		    marked GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW.
+
+Example:
+
+adc@0 {
+	compatible =  "adi,ad7780";
+	reg =	      <0>;
+	vref-supply = <&vdd_supply>
+
+	powerdown-gpios  = <&gpio 12 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>;
+	adi,gain-gpios   = <&gpio  5 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>;
+	adi,filter-gpios = <&gpio 15 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/amlogic,meson-saradc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/amlogic,meson-saradc.txt
index 325090e43ce6..d57e9df25f4f 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/amlogic,meson-saradc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/amlogic,meson-saradc.txt
@@ -9,6 +9,7 @@ Required properties:
 			- "amlogic,meson-gxl-saradc" for GXL
 			- "amlogic,meson-gxm-saradc" for GXM
 			- "amlogic,meson-axg-saradc" for AXG
+			- "amlogic,meson-g12a-saradc" for AXG
 		along with the generic "amlogic,meson-saradc"
 - reg:		the physical base address and length of the registers
 - interrupts:	the interrupt indicating end of sampling
@@ -23,6 +24,10 @@ Required properties:
 - #io-channel-cells: must be 1, see ../iio-bindings.txt
 
 Optional properties:
+- amlogic,hhi-sysctrl:	phandle to the syscon which contains the 5th bit
+			of the TSC (temperature sensor coefficient) on
+			Meson8b and Meson8m2 (which used to calibrate the
+			temperature sensor)
 - nvmem-cells:		phandle to the temperature_calib eFuse cells
 - nvmem-cell-names:	if present (to enable the temperature sensor
 			calibration) this must contain "temperature_calib"
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/avia-hx711.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/avia-hx711.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 7222328a3d0d..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/avia-hx711.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
-* AVIA HX711 ADC chip for weight cells
-  Bit-banging driver
-
-Required properties:
- - compatible:	Should be "avia,hx711"
- - sck-gpios:	Definition of the GPIO for the clock
- - dout-gpios:	Definition of the GPIO for data-out
-		See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt
- - avdd-supply:	Definition of the regulator used as analog supply
-
-Optional properties:
- - clock-frequency:	Frequency of PD_SCK in Hz
-			Minimum value allowed is 10 kHz because of maximum
-			high time of 50 microseconds.
-
-Example:
-weight {
-	compatible = "avia,hx711";
-	sck-gpios = <&gpio3 10 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>;
-	dout-gpios = <&gpio0 7 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>;
-	avdd-suppy = <&avdd>;
-	clock-frequency = <100000>;
-};
-
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/avia-hx711.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/avia-hx711.yaml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8a4100ceeaf2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/avia-hx711.yaml
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+%YAML 1.2
+---
+$id: "http://devicetree.org/schemas/iio/adc/avia-hx711.yaml#"
+$schema: "http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml#"
+
+title: AVIA HX711 ADC chip for weight cells
+
+maintainers:
+  - Andreas Klinger <ak@it-klinger.de>
+
+description: |
+  Bit-banging driver using two GPIOs:
+  - sck-gpio gives a clock to the sensor with 24 cycles for data retrieval
+    and up to 3 cycles for selection of the input channel and gain for the
+    next measurement
+  - dout-gpio is the sensor data the sensor responds to the clock
+
+  Specifications about the driver can be found at:
+  http://www.aviaic.com/ENProducts.aspx
+
+properties:
+  compatible:
+    enum:
+      - avia,hx711
+
+  sck-gpios:
+    description:
+      Definition of the GPIO for the clock (output). In the datasheet it is
+      named PD_SCK
+    maxItems: 1
+
+  dout-gpios:
+    description:
+      Definition of the GPIO for the data-out sent by the sensor in
+      response to the clock (input).
+      See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt for information
+      on how to specify a consumer gpio.
+    maxItems: 1
+
+  avdd-supply:
+    description:
+      Definition of the regulator used as analog supply
+    maxItems: 1
+
+  clock-frequency:
+    minimum: 20000
+    maximum: 2500000
+    default: 400000
+
+required:
+  - compatible
+  - sck-gpios
+  - dout-gpios
+  - avdd-supply
+
+examples:
+  - |
+    #include <dt-bindings/gpio/gpio.h>
+    weight {
+        compatible = "avia,hx711";
+        sck-gpios = <&gpio3 10 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>;
+        dout-gpios = <&gpio0 7 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>;
+        avdd-suppy = <&avdd>;
+        clock-frequency = <100000>;
+    };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/imx7d-adc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/imx7d-adc.txt
index 5c184b940669..f1f3a552459b 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/imx7d-adc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/imx7d-adc.txt
@@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ Required properties:
 - clocks: The root clock of the ADC controller
 - clock-names: Must contain "adc", matching entry in the clocks property
 - vref-supply: The regulator supply ADC reference voltage
+- #io-channel-cells: Must be 1 as per ../iio-bindings.txt
 
 Example:
 adc1: adc@30610000 {
@@ -19,4 +20,5 @@ adc1: adc@30610000 {
 	clocks = <&clks IMX7D_ADC_ROOT_CLK>;
 	clock-names = "adc";
 	vref-supply = <&reg_vcc_3v3_mcu>;
+	#io-channel-cells = <1>;
 };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/ingenic,adc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/ingenic,adc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f01159f20d87
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/ingenic,adc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+* Ingenic JZ47xx ADC controller IIO bindings
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible: Should be one of:
+  * ingenic,jz4725b-adc
+  * ingenic,jz4740-adc
+- reg: ADC controller registers location and length.
+- clocks: phandle to the SoC's ADC clock.
+- clock-names: Must be set to "adc".
+- #io-channel-cells: Must be set to <1> to indicate channels are selected
+  by index.
+
+ADC clients must use the format described in iio-bindings.txt, giving
+a phandle and IIO specifier pair ("io-channels") to the ADC controller.
+
+Example:
+
+#include <dt-bindings/iio/adc/ingenic,adc.h>
+
+adc: adc@10070000 {
+	compatible = "ingenic,jz4740-adc";
+	#io-channel-cells = <1>;
+
+	reg = <0x10070000 0x30>;
+
+	clocks = <&cgu JZ4740_CLK_ADC>;
+	clock-names = "adc";
+
+	interrupt-parent = <&intc>;
+	interrupts = <18>;
+};
+
+adc-keys {
+	...
+	compatible = "adc-keys";
+	io-channels = <&adc INGENIC_ADC_AUX>;
+	io-channel-names = "buttons";
+	...
+};
+
+battery {
+	...
+	compatible = "ingenic,jz4740-battery";
+	io-channels = <&adc INGENIC_ADC_BATTERY>;
+	io-channel-names = "battery";
+	...
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/staging/iio/adc/lpc32xx-adc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/lpc32xx-adc.txt
index b3629d3a9adf..3a1bc669bd51 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/staging/iio/adc/lpc32xx-adc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/lpc32xx-adc.txt
@@ -6,6 +6,10 @@ Required properties:
   region.
 - interrupts: The ADC interrupt
 
+Optional:
+ - vref-supply: The regulator supply ADC reference voltage, optional
+   for legacy reason, but highly encouraging to us in new device tree
+
 Example:
 
 	adc@40048000 {
@@ -13,4 +17,5 @@ Example:
 		reg = <0x40048000 0x1000>;
 		interrupt-parent = <&mic>;
 		interrupts = <39 0>;
+		vref-supply = <&vcc>;
 	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/nuvoton,npcm-adc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/nuvoton,npcm-adc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..eb939fe77836
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/nuvoton,npcm-adc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+Nuvoton NPCM Analog to Digital Converter (ADC)
+
+The NPCM ADC is a 10-bit converter for eight channel inputs.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "nuvoton,npcm750-adc" for the NPCM7XX BMC.
+- reg: specifies physical base address and size of the registers.
+- interrupts: Contain the ADC interrupt with flags for falling edge.
+
+Optional properties:
+- clocks: phandle of ADC reference clock, in case the clock is not
+		  added the ADC will use the default ADC sample rate.
+- vref-supply: The regulator supply ADC reference voltage, in case the
+			   vref-supply is not added the ADC will use internal voltage
+			   reference.
+
+Example:
+
+adc: adc@f000c000 {
+	compatible = "nuvoton,npcm750-adc";
+	reg = <0xf000c000 0x8>;
+	interrupts = <GIC_SPI 0 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
+	clocks = <&clk NPCM7XX_CLK_ADC>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/qcom,spmi-vadc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/qcom,spmi-vadc.txt
index c81993f8d8c3..c8787688122a 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/qcom,spmi-vadc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/qcom,spmi-vadc.txt
@@ -13,6 +13,7 @@ VADC node:
     Definition: Should contain "qcom,spmi-vadc".
                 Should contain "qcom,spmi-adc5" for PMIC5 ADC driver.
                 Should contain "qcom,spmi-adc-rev2" for PMIC rev2 ADC driver.
+                Should contain "qcom,pms405-adc" for PMS405 PMIC
 
 - reg:
     Usage: required
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/samsung,exynos-adc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/samsung,exynos-adc.txt
index a10c1f89037d..e1fe02f3e3e9 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/samsung,exynos-adc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/samsung,exynos-adc.txt
@@ -11,11 +11,13 @@ New driver handles the following
 
 Required properties:
 - compatible:		Must be "samsung,exynos-adc-v1"
-				for exynos4412/5250 controllers.
+				for Exynos5250 controllers.
 			Must be "samsung,exynos-adc-v2" for
 				future controllers.
 			Must be "samsung,exynos3250-adc" for
 				controllers compatible with ADC of Exynos3250.
+			Must be "samsung,exynos4212-adc" for
+				controllers compatible with ADC of Exynos4212 and Exynos4412.
 			Must be "samsung,exynos7-adc" for
 				the ADC in Exynos7 and compatibles
 			Must be "samsung,s3c2410-adc" for
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/stmpe-adc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/stmpe-adc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..480e66422625
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/stmpe-adc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+STMPE ADC driver
+----------------
+
+Required properties:
+ - compatible: "st,stmpe-adc"
+
+Optional properties:
+Note that the ADC is shared with the STMPE touchscreen. ADC related settings
+have to be done in the mfd.
+- st,norequest-mask: bitmask specifying which ADC channels should _not_ be
+  requestable due to different usage (e.g. touch)
+
+Node name must be stmpe_adc and should be child node of stmpe node to
+which it belongs.
+
+Example:
+
+	stmpe_adc {
+		compatible = "st,stmpe-adc";
+		st,norequest-mask = <0x0F>; /* dont use ADC CH3-0 */
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/ti-ads124s08.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/ti-ads124s08.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ecf807bb32f7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/ti-ads124s08.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+* Texas Instruments' ads124s08 and ads124s06 ADC chip
+
+Required properties:
+ - compatible :
+	"ti,ads124s08"
+	"ti,ads124s06"
+ - reg : spi chip select number for the device
+
+Recommended properties:
+ - spi-max-frequency : Definition as per
+		Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt
+ - spi-cpha : Definition as per
+		Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt
+
+Optional properties:
+ - reset-gpios : GPIO pin used to reset the device.
+
+Example:
+adc@0 {
+	compatible = "ti,ads124s08";
+	reg = <0>;
+	spi-max-frequency = <1000000>;
+	spi-cpha;
+	reset-gpios = <&gpio1 16 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/ti-ads8344.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/ti-ads8344.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e47c3759a82b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/ti-ads8344.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+* Texas Instruments ADS8344 A/DC chip
+
+Required properties:
+ - compatible: Must be "ti,ads8344"
+ - reg: SPI chip select number for the device
+ - vref-supply: phandle to a regulator node that supplies the
+   reference voltage
+
+Recommended properties:
+ - spi-max-frequency: Definition as per
+		Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt
+
+Example:
+adc@0 {
+	compatible = "ti,ads8344";
+	reg = <0>;
+	vref-supply = <&refin_supply>;
+	spi-max-frequency = <10000000>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/chemical/bme680.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/chemical/bme680.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7f3827cfb2ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/chemical/bme680.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+Bosch Sensortec BME680 pressure/temperature/humidity/voc sensors
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: must be "bosch,bme680"
+
+Example:
+
+bme680@76 {
+          compatible = "bosch,bme680";
+          reg = <0x76>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/chemical/plantower,pms7003.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/chemical/plantower,pms7003.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c52ea2126eaa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/chemical/plantower,pms7003.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+* Plantower PMS7003 particulate matter sensor
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: must one of:
+   "plantower,pms1003"
+   "plantower,pms3003"
+   "plantower,pms5003"
+   "plantower,pms6003"
+   "plantower,pms7003"
+   "plantower,pmsa003"
+- vcc-supply: phandle to the regulator that provides power to the sensor
+
+Optional properties:
+- plantower,set-gpios: phandle to the GPIO connected to the SET line
+- reset-gpios: phandle to the GPIO connected to the RESET line
+
+Refer to serial/slave-device.txt for generic serial attached device bindings.
+
+Example:
+
+&uart0 {
+	air-pollution-sensor {
+		compatible = "plantower,pms7003";
+		vcc-supply = <&reg_vcc5v0>;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/chemical/sensirion,sgp30.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/chemical/sensirion,sgp30.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5844ed58173c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/chemical/sensirion,sgp30.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+* Sensirion SGP30/SGPC3 multi-pixel Gas Sensor
+
+Required properties:
+
+  - compatible: must be one of
+    "sensirion,sgp30"
+    "sensirion,sgpc3"
+  - reg: the I2C address of the sensor
+
+Example:
+
+gas@58 {
+	compatible = "sensirion,sgp30";
+	reg = <0x58>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/chemical/sensirion,sps30.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/chemical/sensirion,sps30.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6eee2709b5b6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/chemical/sensirion,sps30.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+* Sensirion SPS30 particulate matter sensor
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: must be "sensirion,sps30"
+- reg: the I2C address of the sensor
+
+Example:
+
+sps30@69 {
+	compatible = "sensirion,sps30";
+	reg = <0x69>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/dac/ti,dac7612.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/dac/ti,dac7612.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..639c94ed83e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/dac/ti,dac7612.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+* Texas Instruments Dual, 12-Bit Serial Input Digital-to-Analog Converter
+
+The DAC7612 is a dual, 12-bit digital-to-analog converter (DAC) with guaranteed
+12-bit monotonicity performance over the industrial temperature range.
+Is is programmable through an SPI interface.
+
+The internal DACs are loaded when the LOADDACS pin is pulled down.
+
+http://www.ti.com/lit/ds/sbas106/sbas106.pdf
+
+Required Properties:
+- compatible: Should be one of:
+		"ti,dac7612"
+		"ti,dac7612u"
+		"ti,dac7612ub"
+- reg: Definition as per Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt
+
+Optional Properties:
+- ti,loaddacs-gpios: GPIO descriptor for the LOADDACS pin.
+- spi-*: Definition as per Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt
+
+Example:
+
+	dac@1 {
+		compatible = "ti,dac7612";
+		reg = <0x1>;
+		ti,loaddacs-gpios = <&msmgpio 25 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/gyroscope/bmg160.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/gyroscope/bmg160.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..78e18a1e9c1d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/gyroscope/bmg160.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+* Bosch BMG160 triaxial rotation sensor (gyroscope)
+
+Required properties:
+
+  - compatible : should be "bosch,bmg160" or "bosch,bmi055_gyro"
+  - reg : the I2C address of the sensor (0x69)
+
+Optional properties:
+
+  - interrupts : interrupt mapping for GPIO IRQ, it should by configured with
+		flags IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING
+
+Example:
+
+bmg160@69 {
+	compatible = "bosch,bmg160";
+	reg = <0x69>;
+	interrupt-parent = <&gpio6>;
+	interrupts = <18 (IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING)>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/gyroscope/nxp,fxas21002c.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/gyroscope/nxp,fxas21002c.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..465e104bbf14
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/gyroscope/nxp,fxas21002c.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+* NXP FXAS21002C Gyroscope device tree bindings
+
+http://www.nxp.com/products/sensors/gyroscopes/3-axis-digital-gyroscope:FXAS21002C
+
+Required properties:
+  - compatible : should be "nxp,fxas21002c"
+  - reg : the I2C address of the sensor or SPI chip select number for the
+          device.
+  - vdd-supply: phandle to the regulator that provides power to the sensor.
+  - vddio-supply: phandle to the regulator that provides power to the bus.
+
+Optional properties:
+  - reset-gpios : gpio used to reset the device, see gpio/gpio.txt
+  - interrupts : device support 2 interrupts, INT1 and INT2,
+                 the interrupts can be triggered on rising or falling edges.
+                 See interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt
+  - interrupt-names: should contain "INT1" or "INT2", the gyroscope interrupt
+                     line in use.
+  - drive-open-drain: the interrupt/data ready line will be configured
+                      as open drain, which is useful if several sensors share
+                      the same interrupt line. This is a boolean property.
+                      (This binding is taken from pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt)
+
+Example:
+
+gyroscope@20 {
+	compatible = "nxp,fxas21002c";
+	reg = <0x20>;
+	vdd-supply = <&reg_peri_3p15v>;
+	vddio-supply = <&reg_peri_3p15v>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/impedance-analyzer/ad5933.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/impedance-analyzer/ad5933.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5ff38728ff91
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/impedance-analyzer/ad5933.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+Analog Devices AD5933/AD5934 Impedance Converter, Network Analyzer
+
+https://www.analog.com/media/en/technical-documentation/data-sheets/AD5933.pdf
+https://www.analog.com/media/en/technical-documentation/data-sheets/AD5934.pdf
+
+Required properties:
+ - compatible : should be one of
+		"adi,ad5933"
+		"adi,ad5934"
+ - reg : the I2C address.
+ - vdd-supply : The regulator supply for DVDD, AVDD1 and AVDD2 when they
+   are connected together.
+
+Optional properties:
+- clocks : external clock reference.
+- clock-names : must be "mclk" if clocks is set.
+
+Example for a I2C device node:
+
+	impedance-analyzer@0d {
+		compatible = "adi,adxl345";
+		reg = <0x0d>;
+		vdd-supply = <&vdd_supply>;
+		clocks = <&ref_clk>;
+		clock-names = "mclk";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/imu/adi,adis16480.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/imu/adi,adis16480.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ed7783f45233
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/imu/adi,adis16480.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
+
+Analog Devices ADIS16480 and similar IMUs
+
+Required properties for the ADIS16480:
+
+- compatible: Must be one of
+	* "adi,adis16375"
+	* "adi,adis16480"
+	* "adi,adis16485"
+	* "adi,adis16488"
+	* "adi,adis16495-1"
+	* "adi,adis16495-2"
+	* "adi,adis16495-3"
+	* "adi,adis16497-1"
+	* "adi,adis16497-2"
+	* "adi,adis16497-3"
+- reg: SPI chip select number for the device
+- spi-max-frequency: Max SPI frequency to use
+	see: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt
+- spi-cpha: See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt
+- spi-cpol: See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt
+- interrupts: interrupt mapping for IRQ, accepted values are:
+	* IRQF_TRIGGER_RISING
+	* IRQF_TRIGGER_FALLING
+
+Optional properties:
+
+- interrupt-names: Data ready line selection. Valid values are:
+	* DIO1
+	* DIO2
+	* DIO3
+	* DIO4
+	If this field is left empty, DIO1 is assigned as default data ready
+	signal.
+- reset-gpios: must be the device tree identifier of the RESET pin. As the line
+	is active low, it should be marked GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW.
+- clocks: phandle to the external clock. Should be set according to
+	"clock-names".
+	If this field is left empty together with the "clock-names" field, then
+	the internal clock is used.
+- clock-names: The name of the external clock to be used. Valid values are:
+	* sync: In sync mode, the internal clock is disabled and the frequency
+		of the external clock signal establishes therate of data
+		collection and processing. See Fig 14 and 15 in the datasheet.
+		The clock-frequency must be:
+		* 3000 to 4500 Hz for adis1649x devices.
+		* 700 to 2400 Hz for adis1648x devices.
+	* pps: In Pulse Per Second (PPS) Mode, the rate of data collection and
+	       production is equal to the product of the external clock
+	       frequency and the scale factor in the SYNC_SCALE register, see
+	       Table 154 in the datasheet.
+	       The clock-frequency must be:
+	       * 1 to 128 Hz for adis1649x devices.
+	       * This mode is not supported by adis1648x devices.
+	If this field is left empty together with the "clocks" field, then the
+	internal clock is used.
+- adi,ext-clk-pin: The DIOx line to be used as an external clock input.
+	Valid values are:
+	* DIO1
+	* DIO2
+	* DIO3
+	* DIO4
+	Each DIOx pin supports only one function at a time (data ready line
+	selection or external clock input). When a single pin has two
+	two assignments, the enable bit for the lower priority function
+	automatically resets to zero (disabling the lower priority function).
+	Data ready has highest priority.
+	If this field is left empty, DIO2 is assigned as default external clock
+	input pin.
+
+Example:
+
+	imu@0 {
+		compatible = "adi,adis16495-1";
+		reg = <0>;
+		spi-max-frequency = <3200000>;
+		spi-cpol;
+		spi-cpha;
+		interrupts = <25 IRQF_TRIGGER_FALLING>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&gpio>;
+		interrupt-names = "DIO2";
+		clocks = <&adis16495_sync>;
+		clock-names = "sync";
+		adi,ext-clk-pin = "DIO1";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/imu/bmi160.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/imu/bmi160.txt
index 0c1c105fb503..900c169de00f 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/imu/bmi160.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/imu/bmi160.txt
@@ -9,9 +9,11 @@ Required properties:
  - spi-max-frequency : set maximum clock frequency (only for SPI)
 
 Optional properties:
- - interrupts : interrupt mapping for IRQ, must be IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW
+ - interrupts : interrupt mapping for IRQ
  - interrupt-names : set to "INT1" if INT1 pin should be used as interrupt
    input, set to "INT2" if INT2 pin should be used instead
+ - drive-open-drain : set if the specified interrupt pin should be configured as
+   open drain. If not set, defaults to push-pull.
 
 Examples:
 
@@ -20,7 +22,7 @@ bmi160@68 {
 	reg = <0x68>;
 
 	interrupt-parent = <&gpio4>;
-	interrupts = <12 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW>;
+	interrupts = <12 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING>;
 	interrupt-names = "INT1";
 };
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/imu/inv_mpu6050.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/imu/inv_mpu6050.txt
index 6ab9a9d196b0..268bf7568e19 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/imu/inv_mpu6050.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/imu/inv_mpu6050.txt
@@ -11,6 +11,7 @@ Required properties:
 		"invensense,mpu9250"
 		"invensense,mpu9255"
 		"invensense,icm20608"
+		"invensense,icm20602"
  - reg : the I2C address of the sensor
  - interrupts: interrupt mapping for IRQ. It should be configured with flags
    IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH, IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING, IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW or
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/imu/st_lsm6dsx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/imu/st_lsm6dsx.txt
index 69d53d98d0f0..efec9ece034a 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/imu/st_lsm6dsx.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/imu/st_lsm6dsx.txt
@@ -8,6 +8,9 @@ Required properties:
   "st,lsm6dsm"
   "st,ism330dlc"
   "st,lsm6dso"
+  "st,asm330lhh"
+  "st,lsm6dsox"
+  "st,lsm6dsr"
 - reg: i2c address of the sensor / spi cs line
 
 Optional properties:
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/max44009.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/max44009.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4a98848e35c0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/max44009.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+* MAX44009 Ambient Light Sensor
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible: should be "maxim,max44009"
+- reg: the I2C address of the device (default is <0x4a>)
+
+Optional properties:
+
+- interrupts: interrupt mapping for GPIO IRQ. Should be configured with
+  IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING.
+
+Refer to interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for generic interrupt client
+node bindings.
+
+Example:
+
+light-sensor@4a {
+	compatible = "maxim,max44009";
+	reg = <0x4a>;
+
+	interrupt-parent = <&gpio1>;
+	interrupts = <17 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/vcnl4000.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/vcnl4000.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..955af4555c90
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/vcnl4000.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+VISHAY VCNL4000 -  Ambient Light and proximity sensor
+
+This driver supports the VCNL4000/10/20/40 and VCNL4200 chips
+
+Required properties:
+
+	-compatible: must be one of :
+        vishay,vcnl4000
+        vishay,vcnl4010
+        vishay,vcnl4020
+        vishay,vcnl4040
+        vishay,vcnl4200
+
+	-reg: I2C address of the sensor, should be one from below based on the model:
+        0x13
+        0x51
+        0x60
+
+Example:
+
+light-sensor@51 {
+	compatible = "vishay,vcnl4200";
+	reg = <0x51>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/pressure/bmp085.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/pressure/bmp085.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 61c72e63c584..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/pressure/bmp085.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-BMP085/BMP18x/BMP28x digital pressure sensors
-
-Required properties:
-- compatible: must be one of:
-  "bosch,bmp085"
-  "bosch,bmp180"
-  "bosch,bmp280"
-  "bosch,bme280"
-
-Optional properties:
-- interrupts: interrupt mapping for IRQ
-- reset-gpios: a GPIO line handling reset of the sensor: as the line is
-  active low, it should be marked GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW (see gpio/gpio.txt)
-- vddd-supply: digital voltage regulator (see regulator/regulator.txt)
-- vdda-supply: analog voltage regulator (see regulator/regulator.txt)
-
-Example:
-
-pressure@77 {
-	compatible = "bosch,bmp085";
-	reg = <0x77>;
-	interrupt-parent = <&gpio0>;
-	interrupts = <25 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING>;
-	reset-gpios = <&gpio0 26 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>;
-	vddd-supply = <&foo>;
-	vdda-supply = <&bar>;
-};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/pressure/bmp085.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/pressure/bmp085.yaml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c6721a7e8938
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/pressure/bmp085.yaml
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+%YAML 1.2
+---
+$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/iio/pressure/bmp085.yaml#
+$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml#
+
+title: BMP085/BMP180/BMP280/BME280 pressure iio sensors
+
+maintainers:
+  - Andreas Klinger <ak@it-klinger.de>
+
+description: |
+  Pressure, temperature and humidity iio sensors with i2c and spi interfaces
+
+  Specifications about the sensor can be found at:
+    https://www.bosch-sensortec.com/bst/products/all_products/bmp180
+    https://www.bosch-sensortec.com/bst/products/all_products/bmp280
+    https://www.bosch-sensortec.com/bst/products/all_products/bme280
+
+properties:
+  compatible:
+    enum:
+      - bosch,bmp085
+      - bosch,bmp180
+      - bosch,bmp280
+      - bosch,bme280
+
+  vddd-supply:
+    description:
+      digital voltage regulator (see regulator/regulator.txt)
+    maxItems: 1
+
+  vdda-supply:
+    description:
+      analog voltage regulator (see regulator/regulator.txt)
+    maxItems: 1
+
+  reset-gpios:
+    description:
+      A GPIO line handling reset of the sensor. As the line is active low,
+      it should be marked GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW (see gpio/gpio.txt)
+    maxItems: 1
+
+  interrupts:
+    description:
+      interrupt mapping for IRQ (BMP085 only)
+    maxItems: 1
+
+required:
+  - compatible
+  - vddd-supply
+  - vdda-supply
+
+examples:
+  - |
+    #include <dt-bindings/gpio/gpio.h>
+    #include <dt-bindings/interrupt-controller/irq.h>
+    i2c0 {
+      #address-cells = <1>;
+      #size-cells = <0>;
+      pressure@77 {
+          compatible = "bosch,bmp085";
+          reg = <0x77>;
+          interrupt-parent = <&gpio0>;
+          interrupts = <25 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING>;
+          reset-gpios = <&gpio0 26 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>;
+          vddd-supply = <&foo>;
+          vdda-supply = <&bar>;
+      };
+    };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/proximity/devantech-srf04.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/proximity/devantech-srf04.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index d4dc7a227e2e..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/proximity/devantech-srf04.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
-* Devantech SRF04 ultrasonic range finder
-  Bit-banging driver using two GPIOs
-
-Required properties:
- - compatible:	Should be "devantech,srf04"
-
- - trig-gpios:	Definition of the GPIO for the triggering (output)
-		This GPIO is set for about 10 us by the driver to tell the
-		device it should initiate the measurement cycle.
-
- - echo-gpios:	Definition of the GPIO for the echo (input)
-		This GPIO is set by the device as soon as an ultrasonic
-		burst is sent out and reset when the first echo is
-		received.
-		Thus this GPIO is set while the ultrasonic waves are doing
-		one round trip.
-		It needs to be an GPIO which is able to deliver an
-		interrupt because the time between two interrupts is
-		measured in the driver.
-		See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt for
-		information on how to specify a consumer gpio.
-
-Example:
-srf04@0 {
-	compatible = "devantech,srf04";
-	trig-gpios = <&gpio1 15 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>;
-	echo-gpios = <&gpio2  6 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>;
-};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/proximity/devantech-srf04.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/proximity/devantech-srf04.yaml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4e80ea7c1475
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/proximity/devantech-srf04.yaml
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+%YAML 1.2
+---
+$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/iio/proximity/devantech-srf04.yaml#
+$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml#
+
+title: Devantech SRF04 and Maxbotix mb1000 ultrasonic range finder
+
+maintainers:
+  - Andreas Klinger <ak@it-klinger.de>
+
+description: |
+  Bit-banging driver using two GPIOs:
+  - trigger-gpio is raised by the driver to start sending out an ultrasonic
+    burst
+  - echo-gpio is held high by the sensor after sending ultrasonic burst
+    until it is received once again
+
+  Specifications about the devices can be found at:
+  http://www.robot-electronics.co.uk/htm/srf04tech.htm
+
+  http://www.maxbotix.com/documents/LV-MaxSonar-EZ_Datasheet.pdf
+
+properties:
+  compatible:
+    enum:
+      - devantech,srf04
+      - maxbotix,mb1000
+      - maxbotix,mb1010
+      - maxbotix,mb1020
+      - maxbotix,mb1030
+      - maxbotix,mb1040
+
+  trig-gpios:
+    description:
+      Definition of the GPIO for the triggering (output)
+      This GPIO is set for about 10 us by the driver to tell the device it
+      should initiate the measurement cycle.
+      See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt for information
+      on how to specify a consumer gpio.
+    maxItems: 1
+
+  echo-gpios:
+    description:
+      Definition of the GPIO for the echo (input)
+      This GPIO is set by the device as soon as an ultrasonic burst is sent
+      out and reset when the first echo is received.
+      Thus this GPIO is set while the ultrasonic waves are doing one round
+      trip.
+      It needs to be an GPIO which is able to deliver an interrupt because
+      the time between two interrupts is measured in the driver.
+    maxItems: 1
+
+required:
+  - compatible
+  - trig-gpios
+  - echo-gpios
+
+examples:
+  - |
+    #include <dt-bindings/gpio/gpio.h>
+    proximity {
+        compatible = "devantech,srf04";
+        trig-gpios = <&gpio1 15 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>;
+        echo-gpios = <&gpio2  6 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>;
+    };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/proximity/maxbotix,mb1232.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/proximity/maxbotix,mb1232.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..dd1058fbe9c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/proximity/maxbotix,mb1232.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+* MaxBotix I2CXL-MaxSonar ultrasonic distance sensor of type  mb1202,
+  mb1212, mb1222, mb1232, mb1242, mb7040 or mb7137 using the i2c interface
+  for ranging
+
+Required properties:
+ - compatible:		"maxbotix,mb1202",
+			"maxbotix,mb1212",
+			"maxbotix,mb1222",
+			"maxbotix,mb1232",
+			"maxbotix,mb1242",
+			"maxbotix,mb7040" or
+			"maxbotix,mb7137"
+
+ - reg:			i2c address of the device, see also i2c/i2c.txt
+
+Optional properties:
+ - interrupts:		Interrupt used to announce the preceding reading
+			request has finished and that data is available.
+			If no interrupt is specified the device driver
+			falls back to wait a fixed amount of time until
+			data can be retrieved.
+
+Example:
+proximity@70 {
+	compatible = "maxbotix,mb1232";
+	reg = <0x70>;
+	interrupt-parent = <&gpio2>;
+	interrupts = <2 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/st-sensors.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/st-sensors.txt
index ddcb95509599..0ef64a444479 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/st-sensors.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/st-sensors.txt
@@ -49,6 +49,7 @@ Accelerometers:
 - st,lis2dw12
 - st,lis3dhh
 - st,lis3de
+- st,lis2de12
 
 Gyroscopes:
 - st,l3g4200d-gyro
@@ -77,3 +78,4 @@ Pressure sensors:
 - st,lps22hb-press
 - st,lps33hw
 - st,lps35hw
+- st,lps22hh
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/temperature/max31856.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/temperature/max31856.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..06ab43bb4de8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/temperature/max31856.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+Maxim MAX31856 thermocouple support
+
+https://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX31856.pdf
+
+Optional property:
+	- thermocouple-type: Type of thermocouple (THERMOCOUPLE_TYPE_K if
+		omitted). Supported types are B, E, J, K, N, R, S, T.
+
+Required properties:
+	- compatible: must be "maxim,max31856"
+	- reg: SPI chip select number for the device
+	- spi-max-frequency: As per datasheet max. supported freq is 5000000
+	- spi-cpha: must be defined for max31856 to enable SPI mode 1
+
+	Refer to spi/spi-bus.txt for generic SPI slave bindings.
+
+ Example:
+	temp-sensor@0 {
+		compatible = "maxim,max31856";
+		reg = <0>;
+		spi-max-frequency = <5000000>;
+		spi-cpha;
+		thermocouple-type = <THERMOCOUPLE_TYPE_K>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/temperature/temperature-bindings.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/temperature/temperature-bindings.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8f339cab74ae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/temperature/temperature-bindings.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+If the temperature sensor device can be configured to use some specific
+thermocouple type, you can use the defined types provided in the file
+"include/dt-bindings/iio/temperature/thermocouple.h".
+
+Property:
+thermocouple-type:	A single cell representing the type of the thermocouple
+			used by the device.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/cypress,tm2-touchkey.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/cypress,tm2-touchkey.txt
index 0c252d9306da..ef2ae729718f 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/cypress,tm2-touchkey.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/cypress,tm2-touchkey.txt
@@ -1,13 +1,19 @@
 Samsung tm2-touchkey
 
 Required properties:
-- compatible: must be "cypress,tm2-touchkey"
+- compatible:
+    * "cypress,tm2-touchkey" - for the touchkey found on the tm2 board
+    * "cypress,midas-touchkey" - for the touchkey found on midas boards
+    * "cypress,aries-touchkey" - for the touchkey found on aries boards
 - reg: I2C address of the chip.
 - interrupts: interrupt to which the chip is connected (see interrupt
 	binding[0]).
 - vcc-supply : internal regulator output. 1.8V
 - vdd-supply : power supply for IC 3.3V
 
+Optional properties:
+- linux,keycodes: array of keycodes (max 4), default KEY_PHONE and KEY_BACK
+
 [0]: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt
 
 Example:
@@ -21,5 +27,6 @@ Example:
 			interrupts = <2 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING>;
 			vcc-supply=<&ldo32_reg>;
 			vdd-supply=<&ldo33_reg>;
+			linux,keycodes = <KEY_PHONE KEY_BACK>;
 		};
 	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/gpio-vibrator.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/gpio-vibrator.yaml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..903475f52dbd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/gpio-vibrator.yaml
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+%YAML 1.2
+---
+$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/bindings/input/gpio-vibrator.yaml#
+$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml#
+
+title: GPIO vibrator
+
+maintainers:
+  - Luca Weiss <luca@z3ntu.xyz>
+
+description: |+
+  Registers a GPIO device as vibrator, where the on/off capability is controlled by a GPIO.
+
+properties:
+  compatible:
+    const: gpio-vibrator
+
+  enable-gpios:
+    maxItems: 1
+
+  vcc-supply:
+    description: Regulator that provides power
+
+required:
+  - compatible
+  - enable-gpios
+
+examples:
+  - |
+    #include <dt-bindings/gpio/gpio.h>
+
+    vibrator {
+        compatible = "gpio-vibrator";
+        enable-gpios = <&msmgpio 86 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>;
+        vcc-supply = <&pm8941_l18>;
+    };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/ilitek,ili2xxx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/ilitek,ili2xxx.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b2a76301e632
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/ilitek,ili2xxx.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+Ilitek ILI210x/ILI251x touchscreen controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible:
+    ilitek,ili210x for ILI210x
+    ilitek,ili251x for ILI251x
+
+- reg: The I2C address of the device
+
+- interrupts: The sink for the touchscreen's IRQ output
+    See ../interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt
+
+Optional properties for main touchpad device:
+
+- reset-gpios: GPIO specifier for the touchscreen's reset pin (active low)
+
+Example:
+
+	touchscreen@41 {
+		compatible = "ilitek,ili251x";
+		reg = <0x41>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&gpio4>;
+		interrupts = <7 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING>;
+		reset-gpios = <&gpio5 21 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/lpc32xx-key.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/lpc32xx-key.txt
index bcf62f856358..2b075a080d30 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/lpc32xx-key.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/lpc32xx-key.txt
@@ -8,6 +8,7 @@ Required Properties:
 - reg: Physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
   region.
 - interrupts: The interrupt number to the cpu.
+- clocks: phandle to clock controller plus clock-specifier pair
 - nxp,debounce-delay-ms: Debounce delay in ms
 - nxp,scan-delay-ms: Repeated scan period in ms
 - linux,keymap: the key-code to be reported when the key is pressed
@@ -22,7 +23,9 @@ Example:
 	key@40050000 {
 		compatible = "nxp,lpc3220-key";
 		reg = <0x40050000 0x1000>;
-		interrupts = <54 0>;
+		clocks = <&clk LPC32XX_CLK_KEY>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&sic1>;
+		interrupts = <22 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
 		keypad,num-rows = <1>;
 		keypad,num-columns = <1>;
 		nxp,debounce-delay-ms = <3>;
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/max77650-onkey.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/max77650-onkey.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..477dc74f452a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/max77650-onkey.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+Onkey driver for MAX77650 PMIC from Maxim Integrated.
+
+This module is part of the MAX77650 MFD device. For more details
+see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max77650.txt.
+
+The onkey controller is represented as a sub-node of the PMIC node on
+the device tree.
+
+Required properties:
+--------------------
+- compatible:		Must be "maxim,max77650-onkey".
+
+Optional properties:
+- linux,code:		The key-code to be reported when the key is pressed.
+			Defaults to KEY_POWER.
+- maxim,onkey-slide:	The system's button is a slide switch, not the default
+			push button.
+
+Example:
+--------
+
+	onkey {
+		compatible = "maxim,max77650-onkey";
+		linux,code = <KEY_END>;
+		maxim,onkey-slide;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/microchip,qt1050.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/microchip,qt1050.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..80e75f96252b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/microchip,qt1050.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+Microchip AT42QT1050 Five-channel Touch Sensor IC
+
+The AT42QT1050 (QT1050) is a QTouchADC sensor device. The device can sense from
+one to five keys, dependent on mode. The QT1050 includes all signal processing
+functions necessary to provide stable sensing under a wide variety of changing
+conditions, and the outputs are fully debounced.
+
+The touchkey device node should be placed inside an I2C bus node.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Must be "microchip,qt1050"
+- reg: The I2C address of the device
+- interrupts: The sink for the touchpad's IRQ output,
+  see ../interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt
+
+Optional properties:
+- wakeup-source: touch keys can be used as a wakeup source
+
+Each button (key) is represented as a sub-node:
+
+Each not specified key or key with linux,code set to KEY_RESERVED gets disabled
+in HW.
+
+Subnode properties:
+- linux,code: Keycode to emit.
+- reg: The key number. Valid values: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4.
+
+Optional subnode-properties:
+
+If a optional property is missing or has a invalid value the default value is
+taken.
+
+- microchip,pre-charge-time-ns:
+  Each touchpad need some time to precharge. The value depends on the mechanical
+  layout.
+  Valid value range: 0 - 637500; values must be a multiple of 2500;
+  default is 0.
+- microchip,average-samples:
+  Number of data samples which are averaged for each read.
+  Valid values: 1, 4, 16, 64, 256, 1024, 4096, 16384; default is 1.
+- microchip,average-scaling:
+  The scaling factor which is used to scale the average-samples.
+  Valid values: 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128; default is 1.
+- microchip,threshold:
+  Number of counts to register a touch detection.
+  Valid value range: 0 - 255; default is 20.
+
+Example:
+QT1050 with 3 non continuous keys, key2 and key4 are disabled.
+
+touchkeys@41 {
+	compatible = "microchip,qt1050";
+	reg = <0x41>;
+	interrupt-parent = <&gpio0>;
+	interrupts = <17 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING>;
+
+	up@0 {
+		reg = <0>;
+		linux,code = <KEY_UP>;
+		microchip,average-samples = <64>;
+		microchip,average-scaling = <16>;
+		microchip,pre-charge-time-ns = <10000>;
+	};
+
+	right@1 {
+		reg = <1>;
+		linux,code = <KEY_RIGHT>;
+		microchip,average-samples = <64>;
+		microchip,average-scaling = <8>;
+	};
+
+	down@3 {
+		reg = <3>;
+		linux,code = <KEY_DOWN>;
+		microchip,average-samples = <256>;
+		microchip,average-scaling = <16>;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/msm-vibrator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/msm-vibrator.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8dcf014ef2e5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/msm-vibrator.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+* Device tree bindings for the Qualcomm MSM vibrator
+
+Required properties:
+
+  - compatible: Should be one of
+		"qcom,msm8226-vibrator"
+		"qcom,msm8974-vibrator"
+  - reg: the base address and length of the IO memory for the registers.
+  - pinctrl-names: set to default.
+  - pinctrl-0: phandles pointing to pin configuration nodes. See
+               Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt
+  - clock-names: set to pwm
+  - clocks: phandle of the clock. See
+            Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt
+  - enable-gpios: GPIO that enables the vibrator.
+
+Optional properties:
+
+  - vcc-supply: phandle to the regulator that provides power to the sensor.
+
+Example from a LG Nexus 5 (hammerhead) phone:
+
+vibrator@fd8c3450 {
+	reg = <0xfd8c3450 0x400>;
+	compatible = "qcom,msm8974-vibrator";
+
+	vcc-supply = <&pm8941_l19>;
+
+	clocks = <&mmcc CAMSS_GP1_CLK>;
+	clock-names = "pwm";
+
+	enable-gpios = <&msmgpio 60 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>;
+
+	pinctrl-names = "default";
+	pinctrl-0 = <&vibrator_pin>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/st,stpmic1-onkey.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/st,stpmic1-onkey.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4494613ae7ad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/st,stpmic1-onkey.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+STMicroelectronics STPMIC1 Onkey
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible = "st,stpmic1-onkey";
+- interrupts: interrupt line to use
+- interrupt-names = "onkey-falling", "onkey-rising"
+	onkey-falling: happens when onkey is pressed; IT_PONKEY_F of pmic
+	onkey-rising: happens when onkey is released; IT_PONKEY_R of pmic
+
+Optional properties:
+
+- st,onkey-clear-cc-flag: onkey is able power on after an
+  over-current shutdown event.
+- st,onkey-pu-inactive: onkey pull up is not active
+- power-off-time-sec: Duration in seconds which the key should be kept
+        pressed for device to power off automatically (from 1 to 16 seconds).
+        see See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/keys.txt
+
+Example:
+
+onkey {
+	compatible = "st,stpmic1-onkey";
+	interrupt-parent = <&pmic>;
+	interrupts = <IT_PONKEY_F 0>,<IT_PONKEY_R 1>;
+	interrupt-names = "onkey-falling", "onkey-rising";
+	power-off-time-sec = <10>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/sun4i-lradc-keys.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/sun4i-lradc-keys.txt
index 1458c3179a63..496125c6bfb7 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/sun4i-lradc-keys.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/sun4i-lradc-keys.txt
@@ -2,12 +2,14 @@ Allwinner sun4i low res adc attached tablet keys
 ------------------------------------------------
 
 Required properties:
- - compatible: "allwinner,sun4i-a10-lradc-keys"
+ - compatible: should be one of the following string:
+		"allwinner,sun4i-a10-lradc-keys"
+		"allwinner,sun8i-a83t-r-lradc"
  - reg: mmio address range of the chip
  - interrupts: interrupt to which the chip is connected
  - vref-supply: powersupply for the lradc reference voltage
 
-Each key is represented as a sub-node of "allwinner,sun4i-a10-lradc-keys":
+Each key is represented as a sub-node of the compatible mentioned above:
 
 Required subnode-properties:
 	- label: Descriptive name of the key.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/edt-ft5x06.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/edt-ft5x06.txt
index da2dc5d6c98b..870b8c5cce9b 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/edt-ft5x06.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/edt-ft5x06.txt
@@ -1,11 +1,12 @@
 FocalTech EDT-FT5x06 Polytouch driver
 =====================================
 
-There are 3 variants of the chip for various touch panel sizes
+There are 5 variants of the chip for various touch panel sizes
 FT5206GE1  2.8" .. 3.8"
 FT5306DE4  4.3" .. 7"
 FT5406EE8  7"   .. 8.9"
 FT5506EEG  7"   .. 8.9"
+FT5726NEI  5.7� .. 11.6"
 
 The software interface is identical for all those chips, so that
 currently there is no need for the driver to distinguish between the
@@ -19,6 +20,7 @@ Required properties:
            or:  "edt,edt-ft5306"
            or:  "edt,edt-ft5406"
            or:  "edt,edt-ft5506"
+           or:  "evervision,ev-ft5726"
            or:  "focaltech,ft6236"
 
  - reg:         I2C slave address of the chip (0x38)
@@ -42,6 +44,15 @@ Optional properties:
 
  - offset:      allows setting the edge compensation in the range from
                 0 to 31.
+
+ - offset-x:    Same as offset, but applies only to the horizontal position.
+                Range from 0 to 80, only supported by evervision,ev-ft5726
+                devices.
+
+ - offset-y:    Same as offset, but applies only to the vertical position.
+                Range from 0 to 80, only supported by evervision,ev-ft5726
+                devices.
+
  - touchscreen-size-x	   : See touchscreen.txt
  - touchscreen-size-y	   : See touchscreen.txt
  - touchscreen-fuzz-x      : See touchscreen.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/goodix.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/goodix.txt
index f7e95c52f3c7..fc03ea4cf5ab 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/goodix.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/goodix.txt
@@ -3,6 +3,8 @@ Device tree bindings for Goodix GT9xx series touchscreen controller
 Required properties:
 
  - compatible		: Should be "goodix,gt1151"
+				 or "goodix,gt5663"
+				 or "goodix,gt5688"
 				 or "goodix,gt911"
 				 or "goodix,gt9110"
 				 or "goodix,gt912"
@@ -18,11 +20,16 @@ Optional properties:
  - irq-gpios		: GPIO pin used for IRQ. The driver uses the
 			  interrupt gpio pin as output to reset the device.
  - reset-gpios		: GPIO pin used for reset
-
- - touchscreen-inverted-x  : X axis is inverted (boolean)
- - touchscreen-inverted-y  : Y axis is inverted (boolean)
- - touchscreen-swapped-x-y : X and Y axis are swapped (boolean)
-                             (swapping is done after inverting the axis)
+ - AVDD28-supply	: Analog power supply regulator on AVDD28 pin
+ - VDDIO-supply		: GPIO power supply regulator on VDDIO pin
+ - touchscreen-inverted-x
+ - touchscreen-inverted-y
+ - touchscreen-size-x
+ - touchscreen-size-y
+ - touchscreen-swapped-x-y
+
+The touchscreen-* properties are documented in touchscreen.txt in this
+directory.
 
 Example:
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/iqs5xx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/iqs5xx.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..efa0820e2469
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/iqs5xx.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+Azoteq IQS550/572/525 Trackpad/Touchscreen Controller
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible			: Must be equal to one of the following:
+				  "azoteq,iqs550"
+				  "azoteq,iqs572"
+				  "azoteq,iqs525"
+
+- reg				: I2C slave address for the device.
+
+- interrupts			: GPIO to which the device's active-high RDY
+				  output is connected (see [0]).
+
+- reset-gpios			: GPIO to which the device's active-low NRST
+				  input is connected (see [1]).
+
+Optional properties:
+
+- touchscreen-min-x		: See [2].
+
+- touchscreen-min-y		: See [2].
+
+- touchscreen-size-x		: See [2]. If this property is omitted, the
+				  maximum x-coordinate is specified by the
+				  device's "X Resolution" register.
+
+- touchscreen-size-y		: See [2]. If this property is omitted, the
+				  maximum y-coordinate is specified by the
+				  device's "Y Resolution" register.
+
+- touchscreen-max-pressure	: See [2]. Pressure is expressed as the sum of
+				  the deltas across all channels impacted by a
+				  touch event. A channel's delta is calculated
+				  as its count value minus a reference, where
+				  the count value is inversely proportional to
+				  the channel's capacitance.
+
+- touchscreen-fuzz-x		: See [2].
+
+- touchscreen-fuzz-y		: See [2].
+
+- touchscreen-fuzz-pressure	: See [2].
+
+- touchscreen-inverted-x	: See [2]. Inversion is applied relative to that
+				  which may already be specified by the device's
+				  FLIP_X and FLIP_Y register fields.
+
+- touchscreen-inverted-y	: See [2]. Inversion is applied relative to that
+				  which may already be specified by the device's
+				  FLIP_X and FLIP_Y register fields.
+
+- touchscreen-swapped-x-y	: See [2]. Swapping is applied relative to that
+				  which may already be specified by the device's
+				  SWITCH_XY_AXIS register field.
+
+[0]: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt
+[1]: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt
+[2]: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/touchscreen.txt
+
+Example:
+
+	&i2c1 {
+		/* ... */
+
+		touchscreen@74 {
+			compatible = "azoteq,iqs550";
+			reg = <0x74>;
+			interrupt-parent = <&gpio>;
+			interrupts = <17 4>;
+			reset-gpios = <&gpio 27 1>;
+
+			touchscreen-size-x = <640>;
+			touchscreen-size-y = <480>;
+
+			touchscreen-max-pressure = <16000>;
+		};
+
+		/* ... */
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/sitronix-st1232.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/sitronix-st1232.txt
index 64ad48b824a2..019373253b28 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/sitronix-st1232.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/sitronix-st1232.txt
@@ -1,13 +1,17 @@
-* Sitronix st1232 touchscreen controller
+* Sitronix st1232 or st1633 touchscreen controller
 
 Required properties:
-- compatible: must be "sitronix,st1232"
+- compatible: must contain one of
+  * "sitronix,st1232"
+  * "sitronix,st1633"
 - reg: I2C address of the chip
 - interrupts: interrupt to which the chip is connected
 
 Optional properties:
 - gpios: a phandle to the reset GPIO
 
+For additional optional properties see: touchscreen.txt
+
 Example:
 
 	i2c@00000000 {
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/stmpe.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/stmpe.txt
index 127baa31a77a..c549924603d2 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/stmpe.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/stmpe.txt
@@ -5,39 +5,105 @@ Required properties:
  - compatible: "st,stmpe-ts"
 
 Optional properties:
-- st,sample-time: ADC converstion time in number of clock.  (0 -> 36 clocks, 1 ->
-  44 clocks, 2 -> 56 clocks, 3 -> 64 clocks, 4 -> 80 clocks, 5 -> 96 clocks, 6
-  -> 144 clocks), recommended is 4.
-- st,mod-12b: ADC Bit mode (0 -> 10bit ADC, 1 -> 12bit ADC)
-- st,ref-sel: ADC reference source (0 -> internal reference, 1 -> external
-  reference)
-- st,adc-freq: ADC Clock speed (0 -> 1.625 MHz, 1 -> 3.25 MHz, 2 || 3 -> 6.5 MHz)
-- st,ave-ctrl: Sample average control (0 -> 1 sample, 1 -> 2 samples, 2 -> 4
-  samples, 3 -> 8 samples)
-- st,touch-det-delay: Touch detect interrupt delay (0 -> 10 us, 1 -> 50 us, 2 ->
-  100 us, 3 -> 500 us, 4-> 1 ms, 5 -> 5 ms, 6 -> 10 ms, 7 -> 50 ms) recommended
-  is 3
-- st,settling: Panel driver settling time (0 -> 10 us, 1 -> 100 us, 2 -> 500 us, 3
-  -> 1 ms, 4 -> 5 ms, 5 -> 10 ms, 6 for 50 ms, 7 -> 100 ms) recommended is 2
-- st,fraction-z: Length of the fractional part in z (fraction-z ([0..7]) = Count of
-  the fractional part) recommended is 7
-- st,i-drive: current limit value of the touchscreen drivers (0 -> 20 mA typical 35
-  mA max, 1 -> 50 mA typical 80 mA max)
+- st,ave-ctrl		: Sample average control
+				0 -> 1 sample
+				1 -> 2 samples
+				2 -> 4 samples
+				3 -> 8 samples
+- st,touch-det-delay	: Touch detect interrupt delay (recommended is 3)
+				0 -> 10 us
+				1 -> 50 us
+				2 -> 100 us
+				3 -> 500 us
+				4 -> 1 ms
+				5 -> 5 ms
+				6 -> 10 ms
+				7 -> 50 ms
+- st,settling		: Panel driver settling time (recommended is 2)
+				0 -> 10 us
+				1 -> 100 us
+				2 -> 500 us
+				3 -> 1 ms
+				4 -> 5 ms
+				5 -> 10 ms
+				6 -> 50 ms
+				7 -> 100 ms
+- st,fraction-z		: Length of the fractional part in z (recommended is 7)
+			  (fraction-z ([0..7]) = Count of the fractional part)
+- st,i-drive		: current limit value of the touchscreen drivers
+				0 -> 20 mA (typical 35mA max)
+				1 -> 50 mA (typical 80 mA max)
+
+Optional properties common with MFD (deprecated):
+ - st,sample-time	: ADC conversion time in number of clock.
+				0 -> 36 clocks
+				1 -> 44 clocks
+				2 -> 56 clocks
+				3 -> 64 clocks
+				4 -> 80 clocks (recommended)
+				5 -> 96 clocks
+				6 -> 124 clocks
+ - st,mod-12b		: ADC Bit mode
+				0 -> 10bit ADC
+				1 -> 12bit ADC
+ - st,ref-sel		: ADC reference source
+				0 -> internal
+				1 -> external
+ - st,adc-freq		: ADC Clock speed
+				0 -> 1.625 MHz
+				1 -> 3.25 MHz
+				2 || 3 -> 6.5 MHz
 
 Node name must be stmpe_touchscreen and should be child node of stmpe node to
 which it belongs.
 
+Note that common ADC settings of stmpe_touchscreen (child) will take precedence
+over the settings done in MFD.
+
 Example:
 
+stmpe811@41 {
+	compatible = "st,stmpe811";
+	pinctrl-names = "default";
+	pinctrl-0 = <&pinctrl_touch_int>;
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+	reg = <0x41>;
+	interrupts = <10 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW>;
+	interrupt-parent = <&gpio4>;
+	interrupt-controller;
+	id = <0>;
+	blocks = <0x5>;
+	irq-trigger = <0x1>;
+	/* Common ADC settings */
+	/* 3.25 MHz ADC clock speed */
+	st,adc-freq = <1>;
+	/* 12-bit ADC */
+	st,mod-12b = <1>;
+	/* internal ADC reference */
+	st,ref-sel = <0>;
+	/* ADC converstion time: 80 clocks */
+	st,sample-time = <4>;
+
 	stmpe_touchscreen {
 		compatible = "st,stmpe-ts";
-		st,sample-time = <4>;
-		st,mod-12b = <1>;
-		st,ref-sel = <0>;
-		st,adc-freq = <1>;
-		st,ave-ctrl = <1>;
-		st,touch-det-delay = <2>;
-		st,settling = <2>;
+		reg = <0>;
+		/* 8 sample average control */
+		st,ave-ctrl = <3>;
+		/* 5 ms touch detect interrupt delay */
+		st,touch-det-delay = <5>;
+		/* 1 ms panel driver settling time */
+		st,settling = <3>;
+		/* 7 length fractional part in z */
 		st,fraction-z = <7>;
+		/*
+		 * 50 mA typical 80 mA max touchscreen drivers
+		 * current limit value
+		 */
 		st,i-drive = <1>;
 	};
+	stmpe_adc {
+		compatible = "st,stmpe-adc";
+		st,norequest-mask = <0x0F>;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/sx8654.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/sx8654.txt
index 4886c4aa2906..0ebe6dd043c7 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/sx8654.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/sx8654.txt
@@ -1,10 +1,17 @@
 * Semtech SX8654 I2C Touchscreen Controller
 
 Required properties:
-- compatible: must be "semtech,sx8654"
+- compatible: must be one of the following, depending on the model:
+	"semtech,sx8650"
+	"semtech,sx8654"
+	"semtech,sx8655"
+	"semtech,sx8656"
 - reg: i2c slave address
 - interrupts: touch controller interrupt
 
+Optional properties:
+ - reset-gpios: GPIO specification for the NRST input
+
 Example:
 
 	sx8654@48 {
@@ -12,4 +19,5 @@ Example:
 		reg = <0x48>;
 		interrupt-parent = <&gpio6>;
 		interrupts = <3 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING>;
+		reset-gpios = <&gpio4 2 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>;
 	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/ti-tsc-adc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/ti-tsc-adc.txt
index b1163bf97146..aad5e34965eb 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/ti-tsc-adc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/ti-tsc-adc.txt
@@ -2,7 +2,12 @@
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 
 Required properties:
+- mfd
+	compatible: Should be
+		"ti,am3359-tscadc" for AM335x/AM437x SoCs
+		"ti,am654-tscadc", "ti,am3359-tscadc" for AM654 SoCs
 - child "tsc"
+	compatible: Should be "ti,am3359-tsc".
 	ti,wires: Wires refer to application modes i.e. 4/5/8 wire touchscreen
 		  support on the platform.
 	ti,x-plate-resistance: X plate resistance
@@ -25,6 +30,9 @@ Required properties:
 			AIN0 = 0, AIN1 = 1 and so on till AIN7 = 7.
 			XP  = 0, XN = 1, YP = 2, YN = 3.
 - child "adc"
+	compatible: Should be
+		    "ti,am3359-adc" for AM335x/AM437x SoCs
+		    "ti,am654-adc", "ti,am3359-adc" for AM654 SoCs
 	ti,adc-channels: List of analog inputs available for ADC.
 			 AIN0 = 0, AIN1 = 1 and so on till AIN7 = 7.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interconnect/interconnect.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interconnect/interconnect.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6f5d23a605b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interconnect/interconnect.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+Interconnect Provider Device Tree Bindings
+=========================================
+
+The purpose of this document is to define a common set of generic interconnect
+providers/consumers properties.
+
+
+= interconnect providers =
+
+The interconnect provider binding is intended to represent the interconnect
+controllers in the system. Each provider registers a set of interconnect
+nodes, which expose the interconnect related capabilities of the interconnect
+to consumer drivers. These capabilities can be throughput, latency, priority
+etc. The consumer drivers set constraints on interconnect path (or endpoints)
+depending on the use case. Interconnect providers can also be interconnect
+consumers, such as in the case where two network-on-chip fabrics interface
+directly.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : contains the interconnect provider compatible string
+- #interconnect-cells : number of cells in a interconnect specifier needed to
+			encode the interconnect node id
+
+Example:
+
+		snoc: interconnect@580000 {
+			compatible = "qcom,msm8916-snoc";
+			#interconnect-cells = <1>;
+			reg = <0x580000 0x14000>;
+			clock-names = "bus_clk", "bus_a_clk";
+			clocks = <&rpmcc RPM_SMD_SNOC_CLK>,
+				 <&rpmcc RPM_SMD_SNOC_A_CLK>;
+		};
+
+
+= interconnect consumers =
+
+The interconnect consumers are device nodes which dynamically express their
+bandwidth requirements along interconnect paths they are connected to. There
+can be multiple interconnect providers on a SoC and the consumer may consume
+multiple paths from different providers depending on use case and the
+components it has to interact with.
+
+Required properties:
+interconnects : Pairs of phandles and interconnect provider specifier to denote
+	        the edge source and destination ports of the interconnect path.
+
+Optional properties:
+interconnect-names : List of interconnect path name strings sorted in the same
+		     order as the interconnects property. Consumers drivers will use
+		     interconnect-names to match interconnect paths with interconnect
+		     specifier pairs.
+
+                     Reserved interconnect names:
+			 * dma-mem: Path from the device to the main memory of
+			            the system
+
+Example:
+
+	sdhci@7864000 {
+		...
+		interconnects = <&pnoc MASTER_SDCC_1 &bimc SLAVE_EBI_CH0>;
+		interconnect-names = "sdhc-mem";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interconnect/qcom,sdm845.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interconnect/qcom,sdm845.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5c4f1d911630
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interconnect/qcom,sdm845.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+Qualcomm SDM845 Network-On-Chip interconnect driver binding
+-----------------------------------------------------------
+
+SDM845 interconnect providers support system bandwidth requirements through
+RPMh hardware accelerators known as Bus Clock Manager (BCM). The provider is
+able to communicate with the BCM through the Resource State Coordinator (RSC)
+associated with each execution environment. Provider nodes must reside within
+an RPMh device node pertaining to their RSC and each provider maps to a single
+RPMh resource.
+
+Required properties :
+- compatible : shall contain only one of the following:
+			"qcom,sdm845-rsc-hlos"
+- #interconnect-cells : should contain 1
+
+Examples:
+
+apps_rsc: rsc {
+	rsc_hlos: interconnect {
+		compatible = "qcom,sdm845-rsc-hlos";
+		#interconnect-cells = <1>;
+	};
+};
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/arm,gic-v3.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/arm,gic-v3.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index a3be5298a5eb..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/arm,gic-v3.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,175 +0,0 @@
-* ARM Generic Interrupt Controller, version 3
-
-AArch64 SMP cores are often associated with a GICv3, providing Private
-Peripheral Interrupts (PPI), Shared Peripheral Interrupts (SPI),
-Software Generated Interrupts (SGI), and Locality-specific Peripheral
-Interrupts (LPI).
-
-Main node required properties:
-
-- compatible : should at least contain  "arm,gic-v3" or either
-		"qcom,msm8996-gic-v3", "arm,gic-v3" for msm8996 SoCs
-		to address SoC specific bugs/quirks
-- interrupt-controller : Identifies the node as an interrupt controller
-- #interrupt-cells : Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an
-  interrupt source. Must be a single cell with a value of at least 3.
-  If the system requires describing PPI affinity, then the value must
-  be at least 4.
-
-  The 1st cell is the interrupt type; 0 for SPI interrupts, 1 for PPI
-  interrupts. Other values are reserved for future use.
-
-  The 2nd cell contains the interrupt number for the interrupt type.
-  SPI interrupts are in the range [0-987]. PPI interrupts are in the
-  range [0-15].
-
-  The 3rd cell is the flags, encoded as follows:
-	bits[3:0] trigger type and level flags.
-		1 = edge triggered
-		4 = level triggered
-
-  The 4th cell is a phandle to a node describing a set of CPUs this
-  interrupt is affine to. The interrupt must be a PPI, and the node
-  pointed must be a subnode of the "ppi-partitions" subnode. For
-  interrupt types other than PPI or PPIs that are not partitionned,
-  this cell must be zero. See the "ppi-partitions" node description
-  below.
-
-  Cells 5 and beyond are reserved for future use and must have a value
-  of 0 if present.
-
-- reg : Specifies base physical address(s) and size of the GIC
-  registers, in the following order:
-  - GIC Distributor interface (GICD)
-  - GIC Redistributors (GICR), one range per redistributor region
-  - GIC CPU interface (GICC)
-  - GIC Hypervisor interface (GICH)
-  - GIC Virtual CPU interface (GICV)
-
-  GICC, GICH and GICV are optional.
-
-- interrupts : Interrupt source of the VGIC maintenance interrupt.
-
-Optional
-
-- redistributor-stride : If using padding pages, specifies the stride
-  of consecutive redistributors. Must be a multiple of 64kB.
-
-- #redistributor-regions: The number of independent contiguous regions
-  occupied by the redistributors. Required if more than one such
-  region is present.
-
-- msi-controller: Boolean property. Identifies the node as an MSI
-  controller. Only present if the Message Based Interrupt
-  functionnality is being exposed by the HW, and the mbi-ranges
-  property present.
-
-- mbi-ranges: A list of pairs <intid span>, where "intid" is the first
-  SPI of a range that can be used an MBI, and "span" the size of that
-  range. Multiple ranges can be provided. Requires "msi-controller" to
-  be set.
-
-- mbi-alias: Address property. Base address of an alias of the GICD
-  region containing only the {SET,CLR}SPI registers to be used if
-  isolation is required, and if supported by the HW.
-
-Sub-nodes:
-
-PPI affinity can be expressed as a single "ppi-partitions" node,
-containing a set of sub-nodes, each with the following property:
-- affinity: Should be a list of phandles to CPU nodes (as described in
-  Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cpus.yaml).
-
-GICv3 has one or more Interrupt Translation Services (ITS) that are
-used to route Message Signalled Interrupts (MSI) to the CPUs.
-
-These nodes must have the following properties:
-- compatible : Should at least contain  "arm,gic-v3-its".
-- msi-controller : Boolean property. Identifies the node as an MSI controller
-- #msi-cells: Must be <1>. The single msi-cell is the DeviceID of the device
-  which will generate the MSI.
-- reg: Specifies the base physical address and size of the ITS
-  registers.
-
-Optional:
-- socionext,synquacer-pre-its: (u32, u32) tuple describing the untranslated
-  address and size of the pre-ITS window.
-
-The main GIC node must contain the appropriate #address-cells,
-#size-cells and ranges properties for the reg property of all ITS
-nodes.
-
-Examples:
-
-	gic: interrupt-controller@2cf00000 {
-		compatible = "arm,gic-v3";
-		#interrupt-cells = <3>;
-		#address-cells = <2>;
-		#size-cells = <2>;
-		ranges;
-		interrupt-controller;
-		reg = <0x0 0x2f000000 0 0x10000>,	// GICD
-		      <0x0 0x2f100000 0 0x200000>,	// GICR
-		      <0x0 0x2c000000 0 0x2000>,	// GICC
-		      <0x0 0x2c010000 0 0x2000>,	// GICH
-		      <0x0 0x2c020000 0 0x2000>;	// GICV
-		interrupts = <1 9 4>;
-
-		msi-controller;
-		mbi-ranges = <256 128>;
-
-		gic-its@2c200000 {
-			compatible = "arm,gic-v3-its";
-			msi-controller;
-			#msi-cells = <1>;
-			reg = <0x0 0x2c200000 0 0x20000>;
-		};
-	};
-
-	gic: interrupt-controller@2c010000 {
-		compatible = "arm,gic-v3";
-		#interrupt-cells = <4>;
-		#address-cells = <2>;
-		#size-cells = <2>;
-		ranges;
-		interrupt-controller;
-		redistributor-stride = <0x0 0x40000>;	// 256kB stride
-		#redistributor-regions = <2>;
-		reg = <0x0 0x2c010000 0 0x10000>,	// GICD
-		      <0x0 0x2d000000 0 0x800000>,	// GICR 1: CPUs 0-31
-		      <0x0 0x2e000000 0 0x800000>;	// GICR 2: CPUs 32-63
-		      <0x0 0x2c040000 0 0x2000>,	// GICC
-		      <0x0 0x2c060000 0 0x2000>,	// GICH
-		      <0x0 0x2c080000 0 0x2000>;	// GICV
-		interrupts = <1 9 4>;
-
-		gic-its@2c200000 {
-			compatible = "arm,gic-v3-its";
-			msi-controller;
-			#msi-cells = <1>;
-			reg = <0x0 0x2c200000 0 0x20000>;
-		};
-
-		gic-its@2c400000 {
-			compatible = "arm,gic-v3-its";
-			msi-controller;
-			#msi-cells = <1>;
-			reg = <0x0 0x2c400000 0 0x20000>;
-		};
-
-		ppi-partitions {
-			part0: interrupt-partition-0 {
-				affinity = <&cpu0 &cpu2>;
-			};
-
-			part1: interrupt-partition-1 {
-				affinity = <&cpu1 &cpu3>;
-			};
-		};
-	};
-
-
-	device@0 {
-		reg = <0 0 0 4>;
-		interrupts = <1 1 4 &part0>;
-	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/arm,gic-v3.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/arm,gic-v3.yaml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c34df35a25fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/arm,gic-v3.yaml
@@ -0,0 +1,279 @@
+# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+%YAML 1.2
+---
+$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/interrupt-controller/arm,gic-v3.yaml#
+$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml#
+
+title: ARM Generic Interrupt Controller, version 3
+
+maintainers:
+  - Marc Zyngier <marc.zyngier@arm.com>
+
+description: |
+  AArch64 SMP cores are often associated with a GICv3, providing Private
+  Peripheral Interrupts (PPI), Shared Peripheral Interrupts (SPI),
+  Software Generated Interrupts (SGI), and Locality-specific Peripheral
+  Interrupts (LPI).
+
+allOf:
+  - $ref: /schemas/interrupt-controller.yaml#
+
+properties:
+  compatible:
+    oneOf:
+      - items:
+          - enum:
+              - qcom,msm8996-gic-v3
+          - const: arm,gic-v3
+      - const: arm,gic-v3
+
+  interrupt-controller: true
+
+  "#address-cells":
+    enum: [ 0, 1, 2 ]
+  "#size-cells":
+    enum: [ 1, 2 ]
+
+  ranges: true
+
+  "#interrupt-cells":
+    description: |
+      Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an interrupt source.
+      Must be a single cell with a value of at least 3.
+      If the system requires describing PPI affinity, then the value must
+      be at least 4.
+
+      The 1st cell is the interrupt type; 0 for SPI interrupts, 1 for PPI
+      interrupts. Other values are reserved for future use.
+
+      The 2nd cell contains the interrupt number for the interrupt type.
+      SPI interrupts are in the range [0-987]. PPI interrupts are in the
+      range [0-15].
+
+      The 3rd cell is the flags, encoded as follows:
+      bits[3:0] trigger type and level flags.
+        1 = edge triggered
+        4 = level triggered
+
+      The 4th cell is a phandle to a node describing a set of CPUs this
+      interrupt is affine to. The interrupt must be a PPI, and the node
+      pointed must be a subnode of the "ppi-partitions" subnode. For
+      interrupt types other than PPI or PPIs that are not partitionned,
+      this cell must be zero. See the "ppi-partitions" node description
+      below.
+
+      Cells 5 and beyond are reserved for future use and must have a value
+      of 0 if present.
+    enum: [ 3, 4 ]
+
+  reg:
+    description: |
+      Specifies base physical address(s) and size of the GIC
+      registers, in the following order:
+      - GIC Distributor interface (GICD)
+      - GIC Redistributors (GICR), one range per redistributor region
+      - GIC CPU interface (GICC)
+      - GIC Hypervisor interface (GICH)
+      - GIC Virtual CPU interface (GICV)
+
+      GICC, GICH and GICV are optional.
+    minItems: 2
+    maxItems: 4096   # Should be enough?
+
+  interrupts:
+    description:
+      Interrupt source of the VGIC maintenance interrupt.
+    maxItems: 1
+
+  redistributor-stride:
+    description:
+      If using padding pages, specifies the stride of consecutive
+      redistributors. Must be a multiple of 64kB.
+    allOf:
+      - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint64
+      - multipleOf: 0x10000
+        exclusiveMinimum: 0
+
+  "#redistributor-regions":
+    description:
+      The number of independent contiguous regions occupied by the
+      redistributors. Required if more than one such region is present.
+    allOf:
+      - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32
+      - maximum: 4096   # Should be enough?
+
+  msi-controller:
+    description:
+      Only present if the Message Based Interrupt functionnality is
+      being exposed by the HW, and the mbi-ranges property present.
+
+  mbi-ranges:
+    description:
+      A list of pairs <intid span>, where "intid" is the first SPI of a range
+      that can be used an MBI, and "span" the size of that range. Multiple
+      ranges can be provided.
+    allOf:
+      - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32-matrix
+      - items:
+          minItems: 2
+          maxItems: 2
+
+  mbi-alias:
+    description:
+      Address property. Base address of an alias of the GICD region containing
+      only the {SET,CLR}SPI registers to be used if isolation is required,
+      and if supported by the HW.
+    allOf:
+      - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32-array
+      - items:
+          minItems: 1
+          maxItems: 2
+
+  ppi-partitions:
+    type: object
+    description:
+      PPI affinity can be expressed as a single "ppi-partitions" node,
+      containing a set of sub-nodes.
+    patternProperties:
+      "^interrupt-partition-[0-9]+$":
+        properties:
+          affinity:
+            $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/phandle-array
+            description:
+              Should be a list of phandles to CPU nodes (as described in
+              Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cpus.yaml).
+
+        required:
+          - affinity
+
+dependencies:
+  mbi-ranges: [ msi-controller ]
+  msi-controller: [ mbi-ranges ]
+
+required:
+  - compatible
+  - interrupts
+  - reg
+
+patternProperties:
+  "^gic-its@": false
+  "^interrupt-controller@[0-9a-f]+$": false
+  # msi-controller is preferred, but allow other names
+  "^(msi-controller|gic-its|interrupt-controller)@[0-9a-f]+$":
+    type: object
+    description:
+      GICv3 has one or more Interrupt Translation Services (ITS) that are
+      used to route Message Signalled Interrupts (MSI) to the CPUs.
+    properties:
+      compatible:
+        const: arm,gic-v3-its
+
+      msi-controller: true
+
+      "#msi-cells":
+        description:
+          The single msi-cell is the DeviceID of the device which will generate
+          the MSI.
+        const: 1
+
+      reg:
+        description:
+          Specifies the base physical address and size of the ITS registers.
+        maxItems: 1
+
+      socionext,synquacer-pre-its:
+        description:
+          (u32, u32) tuple describing the untranslated
+          address and size of the pre-ITS window.
+        allOf:
+          - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32-array
+          - items:
+              minItems: 2
+              maxItems: 2
+
+    required:
+      - compatible
+      - msi-controller
+      - "#msi-cells"
+      - reg
+
+    additionalProperties: false
+
+additionalProperties: false
+
+examples:
+  - |
+    gic: interrupt-controller@2cf00000 {
+      compatible = "arm,gic-v3";
+      #interrupt-cells = <3>;
+      #address-cells = <1>;
+      #size-cells = <1>;
+      ranges;
+      interrupt-controller;
+      reg = <0x2f000000 0x10000>,  // GICD
+            <0x2f100000 0x200000>,  // GICR
+            <0x2c000000 0x2000>,  // GICC
+            <0x2c010000 0x2000>,  // GICH
+            <0x2c020000 0x2000>;  // GICV
+      interrupts = <1 9 4>;
+
+      msi-controller;
+      mbi-ranges = <256 128>;
+
+      msi-controller@2c200000 {
+        compatible = "arm,gic-v3-its";
+        msi-controller;
+        #msi-cells = <1>;
+        reg = <0x2c200000 0x20000>;
+      };
+    };
+
+    interrupt-controller@2c010000 {
+      compatible = "arm,gic-v3";
+      #interrupt-cells = <4>;
+      #address-cells = <1>;
+      #size-cells = <1>;
+      ranges;
+      interrupt-controller;
+      redistributor-stride = <0x0 0x40000>;  // 256kB stride
+      #redistributor-regions = <2>;
+      reg = <0x2c010000 0x10000>,  // GICD
+            <0x2d000000 0x800000>,  // GICR 1: CPUs 0-31
+            <0x2e000000 0x800000>,  // GICR 2: CPUs 32-63
+            <0x2c040000 0x2000>,  // GICC
+            <0x2c060000 0x2000>,  // GICH
+            <0x2c080000 0x2000>;  // GICV
+      interrupts = <1 9 4>;
+
+      msi-controller@2c200000 {
+        compatible = "arm,gic-v3-its";
+        msi-controller;
+        #msi-cells = <1>;
+        reg = <0x2c200000 0x20000>;
+      };
+
+      msi-controller@2c400000 {
+        compatible = "arm,gic-v3-its";
+        msi-controller;
+        #msi-cells = <1>;
+        reg = <0x2c400000 0x20000>;
+      };
+
+      ppi-partitions {
+        part0: interrupt-partition-0 {
+          affinity = <&cpu0 &cpu2>;
+        };
+
+        part1: interrupt-partition-1 {
+          affinity = <&cpu1 &cpu3>;
+        };
+      };
+    };
+
+
+    device@0 {
+      reg = <0 4>;
+      interrupts = <1 1 4 &part0>;
+    };
+
+...
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/arm,gic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/arm,gic.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 2f3244648646..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/arm,gic.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,171 +0,0 @@
-* ARM Generic Interrupt Controller
-
-ARM SMP cores are often associated with a GIC, providing per processor
-interrupts (PPI), shared processor interrupts (SPI) and software
-generated interrupts (SGI).
-
-Primary GIC is attached directly to the CPU and typically has PPIs and SGIs.
-Secondary GICs are cascaded into the upward interrupt controller and do not
-have PPIs or SGIs.
-
-Main node required properties:
-
-- compatible : should be one of:
-	"arm,arm1176jzf-devchip-gic"
-	"arm,arm11mp-gic"
-	"arm,cortex-a15-gic"
-	"arm,cortex-a7-gic"
-	"arm,cortex-a9-gic"
-	"arm,eb11mp-gic"
-	"arm,gic-400"
-	"arm,pl390"
-	"arm,tc11mp-gic"
-	"brcm,brahma-b15-gic"
-	"nvidia,tegra210-agic"
-	"qcom,msm-8660-qgic"
-	"qcom,msm-qgic2"
-- interrupt-controller : Identifies the node as an interrupt controller
-- #interrupt-cells : Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an
-  interrupt source.  The type shall be a <u32> and the value shall be 3.
-
-  The 1st cell is the interrupt type; 0 for SPI interrupts, 1 for PPI
-  interrupts.
-
-  The 2nd cell contains the interrupt number for the interrupt type.
-  SPI interrupts are in the range [0-987].  PPI interrupts are in the
-  range [0-15].
-
-  The 3rd cell is the flags, encoded as follows:
-	bits[3:0] trigger type and level flags.
-		1 = low-to-high edge triggered
-		2 = high-to-low edge triggered (invalid for SPIs)
-		4 = active high level-sensitive
-		8 = active low level-sensitive (invalid for SPIs).
-	bits[15:8] PPI interrupt cpu mask.  Each bit corresponds to each of
-	the 8 possible cpus attached to the GIC.  A bit set to '1' indicated
-	the interrupt is wired to that CPU.  Only valid for PPI interrupts.
-	Also note that the configurability of PPI interrupts is IMPLEMENTATION
-	DEFINED and as such not guaranteed to be present (most SoC available
-	in 2014 seem to ignore the setting of this flag and use the hardware
-	default value).
-
-- reg : Specifies base physical address(s) and size of the GIC registers. The
-  first region is the GIC distributor register base and size. The 2nd region is
-  the GIC cpu interface register base and size.
-
-Optional
-- interrupts	: Interrupt source of the parent interrupt controller on
-  secondary GICs, or VGIC maintenance interrupt on primary GIC (see
-  below).
-
-- cpu-offset	: per-cpu offset within the distributor and cpu interface
-  regions, used when the GIC doesn't have banked registers. The offset is
-  cpu-offset * cpu-nr.
-
-- clocks        : List of phandle and clock-specific pairs, one for each entry
-  in clock-names.
-- clock-names   : List of names for the GIC clock input(s). Valid clock names
-  depend on the GIC variant:
-	"ic_clk" (for "arm,arm11mp-gic")
-	"PERIPHCLKEN" (for "arm,cortex-a15-gic")
-	"PERIPHCLK", "PERIPHCLKEN" (for "arm,cortex-a9-gic")
-	"clk" (for "arm,gic-400" and "nvidia,tegra210")
-	"gclk" (for "arm,pl390")
-
-- power-domains : A phandle and PM domain specifier as defined by bindings of
-		  the power controller specified by phandle, used when the GIC
-		  is part of a Power or Clock Domain.
-
-
-Example:
-
-	intc: interrupt-controller@fff11000 {
-		compatible = "arm,cortex-a9-gic";
-		#interrupt-cells = <3>;
-		#address-cells = <1>;
-		interrupt-controller;
-		reg = <0xfff11000 0x1000>,
-		      <0xfff10100 0x100>;
-	};
-
-
-* GIC virtualization extensions (VGIC)
-
-For ARM cores that support the virtualization extensions, additional
-properties must be described (they only exist if the GIC is the
-primary interrupt controller).
-
-Required properties:
-
-- reg : Additional regions specifying the base physical address and
-  size of the VGIC registers. The first additional region is the GIC
-  virtual interface control register base and size. The 2nd additional
-  region is the GIC virtual cpu interface register base and size.
-
-- interrupts : VGIC maintenance interrupt.
-
-Example:
-
-	interrupt-controller@2c001000 {
-		compatible = "arm,cortex-a15-gic";
-		#interrupt-cells = <3>;
-		interrupt-controller;
-		reg = <0x2c001000 0x1000>,
-		      <0x2c002000 0x2000>,
-		      <0x2c004000 0x2000>,
-		      <0x2c006000 0x2000>;
-		interrupts = <1 9 0xf04>;
-	};
-
-
-* GICv2m extension for MSI/MSI-x support (Optional)
-
-Certain revisions of GIC-400 supports MSI/MSI-x via V2M register frame(s).
-This is enabled by specifying v2m sub-node(s).
-
-Required properties:
-
-- compatible	    : The value here should contain "arm,gic-v2m-frame".
-
-- msi-controller    : Identifies the node as an MSI controller.
-
-- reg		    : GICv2m MSI interface register base and size
-
-Optional properties:
-
-- arm,msi-base-spi  : When the MSI_TYPER register contains an incorrect
-  		      value, this property should contain the SPI base of
-		      the MSI frame, overriding the HW value.
-
-- arm,msi-num-spis  : When the MSI_TYPER register contains an incorrect
-  		      value, this property should contain the number of
-		      SPIs assigned to the frame, overriding the HW value.
-
-Example:
-
-	interrupt-controller@e1101000 {
-		compatible = "arm,gic-400";
-		#interrupt-cells = <3>;
-		#address-cells = <2>;
-		#size-cells = <2>;
-		interrupt-controller;
-		interrupts = <1 8 0xf04>;
-		ranges = <0 0 0 0xe1100000 0 0x100000>;
-		reg = <0x0 0xe1110000 0 0x01000>,
-		      <0x0 0xe112f000 0 0x02000>,
-		      <0x0 0xe1140000 0 0x10000>,
-		      <0x0 0xe1160000 0 0x10000>;
-		v2m0: v2m@8000 {
-			compatible = "arm,gic-v2m-frame";
-			msi-controller;
-			reg = <0x0 0x80000 0 0x1000>;
-		};
-
-		....
-
-		v2mN: v2m@9000 {
-			compatible = "arm,gic-v2m-frame";
-			msi-controller;
-			reg = <0x0 0x90000 0 0x1000>;
-		};
-	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/arm,gic.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/arm,gic.yaml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9a47820ef346
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/arm,gic.yaml
@@ -0,0 +1,226 @@
+# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+%YAML 1.2
+---
+$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/interrupt-controller/arm,gic.yaml#
+$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml#
+
+title: ARM Generic Interrupt Controller v1 and v2
+
+maintainers:
+  - Marc Zyngier <marc.zyngier@arm.com>
+
+description: |+
+  ARM SMP cores are often associated with a GIC, providing per processor
+  interrupts (PPI), shared processor interrupts (SPI) and software
+  generated interrupts (SGI).
+
+  Primary GIC is attached directly to the CPU and typically has PPIs and SGIs.
+  Secondary GICs are cascaded into the upward interrupt controller and do not
+  have PPIs or SGIs.
+
+allOf:
+  - $ref: /schemas/interrupt-controller.yaml#
+
+properties:
+  compatible:
+    oneOf:
+      - items:
+          - enum:
+              - arm,arm11mp-gic
+              - arm,cortex-a15-gic
+              - arm,cortex-a7-gic
+              - arm,cortex-a5-gic
+              - arm,cortex-a9-gic
+              - arm,eb11mp-gic
+              - arm,gic-400
+              - arm,pl390
+              - arm,tc11mp-gic
+              - nvidia,tegra210-agic
+              - qcom,msm-8660-qgic
+              - qcom,msm-qgic2
+
+      - items:
+          - const: arm,arm1176jzf-devchip-gic
+          - const: arm,arm11mp-gic
+
+      - items:
+          - const: brcm,brahma-b15-gic
+          - const: arm,cortex-a15-gic
+
+  interrupt-controller: true
+
+  "#address-cells":
+    enum: [ 0, 1 ]
+  "#size-cells":
+    const: 1
+
+  "#interrupt-cells":
+    const: 3
+    description: |
+      The 1st cell is the interrupt type; 0 for SPI interrupts, 1 for PPI
+      interrupts.
+
+      The 2nd cell contains the interrupt number for the interrupt type.
+      SPI interrupts are in the range [0-987].  PPI interrupts are in the
+      range [0-15].
+
+      The 3rd cell is the flags, encoded as follows:
+        bits[3:0] trigger type and level flags.
+          1 = low-to-high edge triggered
+          2 = high-to-low edge triggered (invalid for SPIs)
+          4 = active high level-sensitive
+          8 = active low level-sensitive (invalid for SPIs).
+        bits[15:8] PPI interrupt cpu mask.  Each bit corresponds to each of
+        the 8 possible cpus attached to the GIC.  A bit set to '1' indicated
+        the interrupt is wired to that CPU.  Only valid for PPI interrupts.
+        Also note that the configurability of PPI interrupts is IMPLEMENTATION
+        DEFINED and as such not guaranteed to be present (most SoC available
+        in 2014 seem to ignore the setting of this flag and use the hardware
+        default value).
+
+  reg:
+    description: |
+      Specifies base physical address(s) and size of the GIC registers. The
+      first region is the GIC distributor register base and size. The 2nd region
+      is the GIC cpu interface register base and size.
+
+      For GICv2 with virtualization extensions, additional regions are
+      required for specifying the base physical address and size of the VGIC
+      registers. The first additional region is the GIC virtual interface
+      control register base and size. The 2nd additional region is the GIC
+      virtual cpu interface register base and size.
+    minItems: 2
+    maxItems: 4
+
+  ranges: true
+
+  interrupts:
+    description: Interrupt source of the parent interrupt controller on
+      secondary GICs, or VGIC maintenance interrupt on primary GIC (see
+      below).
+    maxItems: 1
+
+  cpu-offset:
+    description: per-cpu offset within the distributor and cpu interface
+      regions, used when the GIC doesn't have banked registers. The offset
+      is cpu-offset * cpu-nr.
+    $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32
+
+  clocks:
+    minItems: 1
+    maxItems: 2
+
+  clock-names:
+    description: List of names for the GIC clock input(s). Valid clock names
+      depend on the GIC variant.
+    oneOf:
+      - const: ic_clk # for "arm,arm11mp-gic"
+      - const: PERIPHCLKEN # for "arm,cortex-a15-gic"
+      - items: # for "arm,cortex-a9-gic"
+          - const: PERIPHCLK
+          - const: PERIPHCLKEN
+      - const: clk # for "arm,gic-400" and "nvidia,tegra210"
+      - const: gclk #for "arm,pl390"
+
+  power-domains:
+    maxItems: 1
+
+required:
+  - compatible
+  - reg
+
+patternProperties:
+  "^v2m@[0-9a-f]+$":
+    type: object
+    description: |
+      * GICv2m extension for MSI/MSI-x support (Optional)
+
+      Certain revisions of GIC-400 supports MSI/MSI-x via V2M register frame(s).
+      This is enabled by specifying v2m sub-node(s).
+
+    properties:
+      compatible:
+        const: arm,gic-v2m-frame
+
+      msi-controller: true
+
+      reg:
+        maxItems: 1
+        description: GICv2m MSI interface register base and size
+
+      arm,msi-base-spi:
+        description: When the MSI_TYPER register contains an incorrect value,
+          this property should contain the SPI base of the MSI frame, overriding
+          the HW value.
+        $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32
+
+      arm,msi-num-spis:
+        description: When the MSI_TYPER register contains an incorrect value,
+          this property should contain the number of SPIs assigned to the
+          frame, overriding the HW value.
+        $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32
+
+    required:
+      - compatible
+      - msi-controller
+      - reg
+
+    additionalProperties: false
+
+additionalProperties: false
+
+examples:
+  - |
+    // GICv1
+    intc: interrupt-controller@fff11000 {
+      compatible = "arm,cortex-a9-gic";
+      #interrupt-cells = <3>;
+      #address-cells = <1>;
+      interrupt-controller;
+      reg = <0xfff11000 0x1000>,
+            <0xfff10100 0x100>;
+    };
+
+  - |
+    // GICv2
+    interrupt-controller@2c001000 {
+      compatible = "arm,cortex-a15-gic";
+      #interrupt-cells = <3>;
+      interrupt-controller;
+      reg = <0x2c001000 0x1000>,
+            <0x2c002000 0x2000>,
+            <0x2c004000 0x2000>,
+            <0x2c006000 0x2000>;
+      interrupts = <1 9 0xf04>;
+    };
+
+  - |
+    // GICv2m extension for MSI/MSI-x support
+    interrupt-controller@e1101000 {
+      compatible = "arm,gic-400";
+      #interrupt-cells = <3>;
+      #address-cells = <1>;
+      #size-cells = <1>;
+      interrupt-controller;
+      interrupts = <1 8 0xf04>;
+      ranges = <0 0xe1100000 0x100000>;
+      reg = <0xe1110000 0x01000>,
+            <0xe112f000 0x02000>,
+            <0xe1140000 0x10000>,
+            <0xe1160000 0x10000>;
+
+      v2m0: v2m@80000 {
+        compatible = "arm,gic-v2m-frame";
+        msi-controller;
+        reg = <0x80000 0x1000>;
+      };
+
+      //...
+
+      v2mN: v2m@90000 {
+        compatible = "arm,gic-v2m-frame";
+        msi-controller;
+        reg = <0x90000 0x1000>;
+      };
+    };
+...
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/fsl,irqsteer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/fsl,irqsteer.txt
index 45790ce6f5b9..582991c426ee 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/fsl,irqsteer.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/fsl,irqsteer.txt
@@ -6,8 +6,9 @@ Required properties:
 	- "fsl,imx8m-irqsteer"
 	- "fsl,imx-irqsteer"
 - reg: Physical base address and size of registers.
-- interrupts: Should contain the parent interrupt line used to multiplex the
-  input interrupts.
+- interrupts: Should contain the up to 8 parent interrupt lines used to
+  multiplex the input interrupts. They should be specified sequentially
+  from output 0 to 7.
 - clocks: Should contain one clock for entry in clock-names
   see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt
 - clock-names:
@@ -16,8 +17,8 @@ Required properties:
 - #interrupt-cells: Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an
   interrupt source. The value must be 1.
 - fsl,channel: The output channel that all input IRQs should be steered into.
-- fsl,irq-groups: Number of IRQ groups managed by this controller instance.
-  Each group manages 64 input interrupts.
+- fsl,num-irqs: Number of input interrupts of this channel.
+  Should be multiple of 32 input interrupts and up to 512 interrupts.
 
 Example:
 
@@ -28,7 +29,7 @@ Example:
 		clocks = <&clk IMX8MQ_CLK_DISP_APB_ROOT>;
 		clock-names = "ipg";
 		fsl,channel = <0>;
-		fsl,irq-groups = <1>;
+		fsl,num-irqs = <64>;
 		interrupt-controller;
 		#interrupt-cells = <1>;
 	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/intel,ixp4xx-interrupt.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/intel,ixp4xx-interrupt.yaml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..bae10e261fa9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/intel,ixp4xx-interrupt.yaml
@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
+# SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0 OR BSD-2-Clause)
+# Copyright 2018 Linaro Ltd.
+%YAML 1.2
+---
+$id: "http://devicetree.org/schemas/interrupt/intel-ixp4xx-interrupt.yaml#"
+$schema: "http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml#"
+
+title: Intel IXP4xx XScale Networking Processors Interrupt Controller
+
+maintainers:
+  - Linus Walleij <linus.walleij@linaro.org>
+
+description: |
+  This interrupt controller is found in the Intel IXP4xx processors.
+  Some processors have 32 interrupts, some have up to 64 interrupts.
+  The exact number of interrupts is determined from the compatible
+  string.
+
+  The distinct IXP4xx families with different interrupt controller
+  variations are IXP42x, IXP43x, IXP45x and IXP46x. Those four
+  families were the only ones to reach the developer and consumer
+  market.
+
+properties:
+  compatible:
+    items:
+      - enum:
+        - intel,ixp42x-interrupt
+        - intel,ixp43x-interrupt
+        - intel,ixp45x-interrupt
+        - intel,ixp46x-interrupt
+
+  reg:
+    maxItems: 1
+
+  interrupt-controller: true
+
+  '#interrupt-cells':
+    const: 2
+
+required:
+  - compatible
+  - reg
+  - interrupt-controller
+  - '#interrupt-cells'
+
+examples:
+  - |
+    intcon: interrupt-controller@c8003000 {
+        compatible = "intel,ixp43x-interrupt";
+        reg = <0xc8003000 0x100>;
+        interrupt-controller;
+        #interrupt-cells = <2>;
+    };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/loongson,ls1x-intc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/loongson,ls1x-intc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a63ed9fcb535
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/loongson,ls1x-intc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+Loongson ls1x Interrupt Controller
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible : should be "loongson,ls1x-intc". Valid strings are:
+
+- reg : Specifies base physical address and size of the registers.
+- interrupt-controller : Identifies the node as an interrupt controller
+- #interrupt-cells : Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an
+  interrupt source. The value shall be 2.
+- interrupts : Specifies the CPU interrupt the controller is connected to.
+
+Example:
+
+intc: interrupt-controller@1fd01040 {
+	compatible = "loongson,ls1x-intc";
+	reg = <0x1fd01040 0x18>;
+
+	interrupt-controller;
+	#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+
+	interrupt-parent = <&cpu_intc>;
+	interrupts = <2>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/marvell,odmi-controller.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/marvell,odmi-controller.txt
index 930fb462fd9f..0ebfc952cb34 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/marvell,odmi-controller.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/marvell,odmi-controller.txt
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ Required properties:
 - marvell,spi-base     : List of GIC base SPI interrupts, one for each
                          ODMI frame. Those SPI interrupts are 0-based,
                          i.e marvell,spi-base = <128> will use SPI #96.
-                         See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/arm,gic.txt
+                         See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/arm,gic.yaml
                          for details about the GIC Device Tree binding.
 
 Example:
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/mediatek,sysirq.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/mediatek,sysirq.txt
index 33a98eb44949..0e312fea2a5d 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/mediatek,sysirq.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/mediatek,sysirq.txt
@@ -1,14 +1,18 @@
-+Mediatek MT65xx/MT67xx/MT81xx sysirq
+MediaTek sysirq
 
-Mediatek SOCs sysirq support controllable irq inverter for each GIC SPI
+MediaTek SOCs sysirq support controllable irq inverter for each GIC SPI
 interrupt.
 
 Required properties:
 - compatible: should be
+	"mediatek,mt8516-sysirq", "mediatek,mt6577-sysirq": for MT8516
+	"mediatek,mt8183-sysirq", "mediatek,mt6577-sysirq": for MT8183
 	"mediatek,mt8173-sysirq", "mediatek,mt6577-sysirq": for MT8173
 	"mediatek,mt8135-sysirq", "mediatek,mt6577-sysirq": for MT8135
 	"mediatek,mt8127-sysirq", "mediatek,mt6577-sysirq": for MT8127
 	"mediatek,mt7622-sysirq", "mediatek,mt6577-sysirq": for MT7622
+	"mediatek,mt7623-sysirq", "mediatek,mt6577-sysirq": for MT7623
+	"mediatek,mt7629-sysirq", "mediatek,mt6577-sysirq": for MT7629
 	"mediatek,mt6795-sysirq", "mediatek,mt6577-sysirq": for MT6795
 	"mediatek,mt6797-sysirq", "mediatek,mt6577-sysirq": for MT6797
 	"mediatek,mt6765-sysirq", "mediatek,mt6577-sysirq": for MT6765
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/renesas,irqc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/renesas,irqc.txt
index 8de96a4fb2d5..f977ea7617f6 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/renesas,irqc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/renesas,irqc.txt
@@ -16,6 +16,7 @@ Required properties:
     - "renesas,irqc-r8a7793" (R-Car M2-N)
     - "renesas,irqc-r8a7794" (R-Car E2)
     - "renesas,intc-ex-r8a774a1" (RZ/G2M)
+    - "renesas,intc-ex-r8a774c0" (RZ/G2E)
     - "renesas,intc-ex-r8a7795" (R-Car H3)
     - "renesas,intc-ex-r8a7796" (R-Car M3-W)
     - "renesas,intc-ex-r8a77965" (R-Car M3-N)
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/ti,sci-inta.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/ti,sci-inta.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7841cb099e13
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/ti,sci-inta.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+Texas Instruments K3 Interrupt Aggregator
+=========================================
+
+The Interrupt Aggregator (INTA) provides a centralized machine
+which handles the termination of system events to that they can
+be coherently processed by the host(s) in the system. A maximum
+of 64 events can be mapped to a single interrupt.
+
+
+                              Interrupt Aggregator
+                     +-----------------------------------------+
+                     |      Intmap            VINT             |
+                     | +--------------+  +------------+        |
+            m ------>| | vint  | bit  |  | 0 |.....|63| vint0  |
+               .     | +--------------+  +------------+        |       +------+
+               .     |         .               .               |       | HOST |
+Globalevents  ------>|         .               .               |------>| IRQ  |
+               .     |         .               .               |       | CTRL |
+               .     |         .               .               |       +------+
+            n ------>| +--------------+  +------------+        |
+                     | | vint  | bit  |  | 0 |.....|63| vintx  |
+                     | +--------------+  +------------+        |
+                     |                                         |
+                     +-----------------------------------------+
+
+Configuration of these Intmap registers that maps global events to vint is done
+by a system controller (like the Device Memory and Security Controller on K3
+AM654 SoC). Driver should request the system controller to get the range
+of global events and vints assigned to the requesting host. Management
+of these requested resources should be handled by driver and requests
+system controller to map specific global event to vint, bit pair.
+
+Communication between the host processor running an OS and the system
+controller happens through a protocol called TI System Control Interface
+(TISCI protocol). For more details refer:
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/keystone/ti,sci.txt
+
+TISCI Interrupt Aggregator Node:
+-------------------------------
+- compatible:		Must be "ti,sci-inta".
+- reg:			Should contain registers location and length.
+- interrupt-controller:	Identifies the node as an interrupt controller
+- msi-controller:	Identifies the node as an MSI controller.
+- interrupt-parent:	phandle of irq parent.
+- ti,sci:		Phandle to TI-SCI compatible System controller node.
+- ti,sci-dev-id:	TISCI device ID of the Interrupt Aggregator.
+- ti,sci-rm-range-vint:	Array of TISCI subtype ids representing vints(inta
+			outputs) range within this INTA, assigned to the
+			requesting host context.
+- ti,sci-rm-range-global-event:	Array of TISCI subtype ids representing the
+			global events range reaching this IA and are assigned
+			to the requesting host context.
+
+Example:
+--------
+main_udmass_inta: interrupt-controller@33d00000 {
+	compatible = "ti,sci-inta";
+	reg = <0x0 0x33d00000 0x0 0x100000>;
+	interrupt-controller;
+	msi-controller;
+	interrupt-parent = <&main_navss_intr>;
+	ti,sci = <&dmsc>;
+	ti,sci-dev-id = <179>;
+	ti,sci-rm-range-vint = <0x0>;
+	ti,sci-rm-range-global-event = <0x1>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/ti,sci-intr.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/ti,sci-intr.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1a8718f8855d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/ti,sci-intr.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+Texas Instruments K3 Interrupt Router
+=====================================
+
+The Interrupt Router (INTR) module provides a mechanism to mux M
+interrupt inputs to N interrupt outputs, where all M inputs are selectable
+to be driven per N output. An Interrupt Router can either handle edge triggered
+or level triggered interrupts and that is fixed in hardware.
+
+                                 Interrupt Router
+                             +----------------------+
+                             |  Inputs     Outputs  |
+        +-------+            | +------+    +-----+  |
+        | GPIO  |----------->| | irq0 |    |  0  |  |       Host IRQ
+        +-------+            | +------+    +-----+  |      controller
+                             |    .           .     |      +-------+
+        +-------+            |    .           .     |----->|  IRQ  |
+        | INTA  |----------->|    .           .     |      +-------+
+        +-------+            |    .        +-----+  |
+                             | +------+    |  N  |  |
+                             | | irqM |    +-----+  |
+                             | +------+             |
+                             |                      |
+                             +----------------------+
+
+There is one register per output (MUXCNTL_N) that controls the selection.
+Configuration of these MUXCNTL_N registers is done by a system controller
+(like the Device Memory and Security Controller on K3 AM654 SoC). System
+controller will keep track of the used and unused registers within the Router.
+Driver should request the system controller to get the range of GIC IRQs
+assigned to the requesting hosts. It is the drivers responsibility to keep
+track of Host IRQs.
+
+Communication between the host processor running an OS and the system
+controller happens through a protocol called TI System Control Interface
+(TISCI protocol). For more details refer:
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/keystone/ti,sci.txt
+
+TISCI Interrupt Router Node:
+----------------------------
+Required Properties:
+- compatible:		Must be "ti,sci-intr".
+- ti,intr-trigger-type:	Should be one of the following:
+			1: If intr supports edge triggered interrupts.
+			4: If intr supports level triggered interrupts.
+- interrupt-controller:	Identifies the node as an interrupt controller
+- #interrupt-cells:	Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an
+			interrupt source. The value should be 2.
+			First cell should contain the TISCI device ID of source
+			Second cell should contain the interrupt source offset
+			within the device.
+- ti,sci:		Phandle to TI-SCI compatible System controller node.
+- ti,sci-dst-id:	TISCI device ID of the destination IRQ controller.
+- ti,sci-rm-range-girq:	Array of TISCI subtype ids representing the host irqs
+			assigned to this interrupt router. Each subtype id
+			corresponds to a range of host irqs.
+
+For more details on TISCI IRQ resource management refer:
+http://downloads.ti.com/tisci/esd/latest/2_tisci_msgs/rm/rm_irq.html
+
+Example:
+--------
+The following example demonstrates both interrupt router node and the consumer
+node(main gpio) on the AM654 SoC:
+
+main_intr: interrupt-controller0 {
+	compatible = "ti,sci-intr";
+	ti,intr-trigger-type = <1>;
+	interrupt-controller;
+	interrupt-parent = <&gic500>;
+	#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+	ti,sci = <&dmsc>;
+	ti,sci-dst-id = <56>;
+	ti,sci-rm-range-girq = <0x1>;
+};
+
+main_gpio0: gpio@600000 {
+	...
+	interrupt-parent = <&main_intr>;
+	interrupts = <57 256>, <57 257>, <57 258>,
+		     <57 259>, <57 260>, <57 261>;
+	...
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iommu/nvidia,tegra20-gart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iommu/nvidia,tegra20-gart.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 099d9362ebc1..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iommu/nvidia,tegra20-gart.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
-NVIDIA Tegra 20 GART
-
-Required properties:
-- compatible: "nvidia,tegra20-gart"
-- reg: Two pairs of cells specifying the physical address and size of
-  the memory controller registers and the GART aperture respectively.
-
-Example:
-
-	gart {
-		compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-gart";
-		reg = <0x7000f024 0x00000018	/* controller registers */
-		       0x58000000 0x02000000>;	/* GART aperture */
-	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/backlight/lm3630a-backlight.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/backlight/lm3630a-backlight.yaml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4d61fe0a98a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/backlight/lm3630a-backlight.yaml
@@ -0,0 +1,129 @@
+# SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0 OR BSD-2-Clause)
+%YAML 1.2
+---
+$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/leds/backlight/lm3630a-backlight.yaml#
+$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml#
+
+title: TI LM3630A High-Efficiency Dual-String White LED
+
+maintainers:
+  - Lee Jones <lee.jones@linaro.org>
+  - Daniel Thompson <daniel.thompson@linaro.org>
+  - Jingoo Han <jingoohan1@gmail.com>
+
+description: |
+  The LM3630A is a current-mode boost converter which supplies the power and
+  controls the current in up to two strings of 10 LEDs per string.
+  https://www.ti.com/product/LM3630A
+
+properties:
+  compatible:
+    const: ti,lm3630a
+
+  reg:
+    maxItems: 1
+
+  ti,linear-mapping-mode:
+    description: |
+      Enable linear mapping mode. If disabled, then it will use exponential
+      mapping mode in which the ramp up/down appears to have a more uniform
+      transition to the human eye.
+    type: boolean
+
+required:
+  - compatible
+  - reg
+
+patternProperties:
+  "^led@[01]$":
+    type: object
+    description: |
+      Properties for a string of connected LEDs.
+
+    properties:
+      reg:
+        description: |
+          The control bank that is used to program the two current sinks. The
+          LM3630A has two control banks (A and B) and are represented as 0 or 1
+          in this property. The two current sinks can be controlled
+          independently with both banks, or bank A can be configured to control
+          both sinks with the led-sources property.
+        maxItems: 1
+        minimum: 0
+        maximum: 1
+
+      label:
+        maxItems: 1
+
+      led-sources:
+        allOf:
+          - minItems: 1
+            maxItems: 2
+            items:
+              minimum: 0
+              maximum: 1
+
+      default-brightness:
+        description: Default brightness level on boot.
+        minimum: 0
+        maximum: 255
+
+      max-brightness:
+        description: Maximum brightness that is allowed during runtime.
+        minimum: 0
+        maximum: 255
+
+    required:
+      - reg
+
+    additionalProperties: false
+
+additionalProperties: false
+
+examples:
+  - |
+    i2c {
+        #address-cells = <1>;
+        #size-cells = <0>;
+
+        led-controller@38 {
+                compatible = "ti,lm3630a";
+                reg = <0x38>;
+
+                #address-cells = <1>;
+                #size-cells = <0>;
+
+                led@0 {
+                        reg = <0>;
+                        led-sources = <0 1>;
+                        label = "lcd-backlight";
+                        default-brightness = <200>;
+                        max-brightness = <255>;
+                };
+        };
+    };
+  - |
+    i2c {
+        #address-cells = <1>;
+        #size-cells = <0>;
+
+        led-controller@38 {
+                compatible = "ti,lm3630a";
+                reg = <0x38>;
+
+                #address-cells = <1>;
+                #size-cells = <0>;
+
+                led@0 {
+                        reg = <0>;
+                        default-brightness = <150>;
+                        ti,linear-mapping-mode;
+                };
+
+                led@1 {
+                        reg = <1>;
+                        default-brightness = <225>;
+                        ti,linear-mapping-mode;
+                };
+        };
+    };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/common.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/common.txt
index aa1399814a2a..70876ac11367 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/common.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/common.txt
@@ -37,6 +37,18 @@ Optional properties for child nodes:
      "ide-disk" - LED indicates IDE disk activity (deprecated),
                   in new implementations use "disk-activity"
      "timer" - LED flashes at a fixed, configurable rate
+     "pattern" - LED alters the brightness for the specified duration with one
+                 software timer (requires "led-pattern" property)
+
+- led-pattern : Array of integers with default pattern for certain triggers.
+                Each trigger may parse this property differently:
+                - one-shot : two numbers specifying delay on and delay off (in ms),
+                - timer : two numbers specifying delay on and delay off (in ms),
+                - pattern : the pattern is given by a series of tuples, of
+                  brightness and duration (in ms).  The exact format is
+                  described in:
+                  Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-trigger-pattern.txt
+
 
 - led-max-microamp : Maximum LED supply current in microamperes. This property
                      can be made mandatory for the board configurations
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/irled/spi-ir-led.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/irled/spi-ir-led.txt
index 896b6997cf30..21882c8d4b0c 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/irled/spi-ir-led.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/irled/spi-ir-led.txt
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ Optional properties:
 	- power-supply: specifies the power source. It can either be a regulator
 	  or a gpio which enables a regulator, i.e. a regulator-fixed as
 	  described in
-	  Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/fixed-regulator.txt
+	  Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/fixed-regulator.yaml
 
 Example:
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-lm3532.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-lm3532.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c087f85ddddc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-lm3532.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,101 @@
+* Texas Instruments - lm3532 White LED driver with ambient light sensing
+capability.
+
+The LM3532 provides the 3 high-voltage, low-side current sinks. The device is
+programmable over an I2C-compatible interface and has independent
+current control for all three channels. The adaptive current regulation
+method allows for different LED currents in each current sink thus allowing
+for a wide variety of backlight and keypad applications.
+
+The main features of the LM3532 include dual ambient light sensor inputs
+each with 32 internal voltage setting resistors, 8-bit logarithmic and linear
+brightness control, dual external PWM brightness control inputs, and up to
+1000:1 dimming ratio with programmable fade in and fade out settings.
+
+Required properties:
+	- compatible : "ti,lm3532"
+	- reg : I2C slave address
+	- #address-cells : 1
+	- #size-cells : 0
+
+Optional properties:
+	- enable-gpios : gpio pin to enable (active high)/disable the device.
+	- ramp-up-us - The Run time ramp rates/step are from one current
+		       set-point to another after the device has reached its
+		       initial target set point from turn-on
+	- ramp-down-us - The Run time ramp rates/step are from one current
+			 set-point to another after the device has reached its
+			 initial target set point from turn-on
+	Range for ramp settings: 8us - 65536us
+
+Optional properties if ALS mode is used:
+	- ti,als-vmin - Minimum ALS voltage defined in Volts
+	- ti,als-vmax - Maximum ALS voltage defined in Volts
+	Per the data sheet the max ALS voltage is 2V and the min is 0V
+
+	- ti,als1-imp-sel - ALS1 impedance resistor selection in Ohms
+	- ti,als2-imp-sel - ALS2 impedance resistor selection in Ohms
+	Range for impedance select: 37000 Ohms - 1190 Ohms
+	Values above 37kohms will be set to the "High Impedance" setting
+
+	- ti,als-avrg-time-us - Determines the length of time the device needs to
+			  average the two ALS inputs.  This is only used if
+			  the input mode is LM3532_ALS_INPUT_AVRG.
+			     Range: 17920us - 2293760us
+	- ti,als-input-mode - Determines how the device uses the attached ALS
+			   devices.
+			   0x00 - ALS1 and ALS2 input average
+			   0x01 - ALS1 Input
+			   0x02 - ALS2 Input
+			   0x03 - Max of ALS1 and ALS2
+
+Required child properties:
+	- reg : Indicates control bank the LED string is controlled by
+	- led-sources : see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/common.txt
+	- ti,led-mode : Defines if the LED strings are manually controlled or
+			if the LED strings are controlled by the ALS.
+			0x00 - LED strings are I2C controlled via full scale
+			       brightness control register
+			0x01 - LED strings are ALS controlled
+
+Optional LED child properties:
+	- label : see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/common.txt
+	- linux,default-trigger :
+	   see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/common.txt
+
+Example:
+led-controller@38 {
+	compatible = "ti,lm3532";
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+	reg = <0x38>;
+
+	enable-gpios = <&gpio6 12 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>;
+	ramp-up-us = <1024>;
+	ramp-down-us = <65536>;
+
+	ti,als-vmin = <0>;
+	ti,als-vmax = <2000>;
+	ti,als1-imp-sel = <4110>;
+	ti,als2-imp-sel = <2180>;
+	ti,als-avrg-time-us = <17920>;
+	ti,als-input-mode = <0x00>;
+
+	led@0 {
+		reg = <0>;
+		led-sources = <2>;
+		ti,led-mode = <1>;
+		label = ":backlight";
+		linux,default-trigger = "backlight";
+	};
+
+	led@1 {
+		reg = <1>;
+		led-sources = <1>;
+		ti,led-mode = <0>;
+		label = ":kbd_backlight";
+	};
+};
+
+For more product information please see the links below:
+http://www.ti.com/product/LM3532
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-max77650.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-max77650.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3a67115cc1da
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-max77650.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+LED driver for MAX77650 PMIC from Maxim Integrated.
+
+This module is part of the MAX77650 MFD device. For more details
+see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max77650.txt.
+
+The LED controller is represented as a sub-node of the PMIC node on
+the device tree.
+
+This device has three current sinks.
+
+Required properties:
+--------------------
+- compatible:		Must be "maxim,max77650-led"
+- #address-cells:	Must be <1>.
+- #size-cells:		Must be <0>.
+
+Each LED is represented as a sub-node of the LED-controller node. Up to
+three sub-nodes can be defined.
+
+Required properties of the sub-node:
+------------------------------------
+
+- reg:			Must be <0>, <1> or <2>.
+
+Optional properties of the sub-node:
+------------------------------------
+
+- label:		See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/common.txt
+- linux,default-trigger: See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/common.txt
+
+For more details, please refer to the generic GPIO DT binding document
+<devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt>.
+
+Example:
+--------
+
+	leds {
+		compatible = "maxim,max77650-led";
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+
+		led@0 {
+			reg = <0>;
+			label = "blue:usr0";
+		};
+
+		led@1 {
+			reg = <1>;
+			label = "red:usr1";
+			linux,default-trigger = "heartbeat";
+		};
+
+		led@2 {
+			reg = <2>;
+			label = "green:usr2";
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-trigger-pattern.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-trigger-pattern.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d3696680bfc8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-trigger-pattern.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+* Pattern format for LED pattern trigger
+
+The pattern is given by a series of tuples, of brightness and duration (ms).
+The LED is expected to traverse the series and each brightness value for the
+specified duration. Duration of 0 means brightness should immediately change to
+new value, and writing malformed pattern deactivates any active one.
+
+1. For gradual dimming, the dimming interval now is set as 50 milliseconds. So
+the tuple with duration less than dimming interval (50ms) is treated as a step
+change of brightness, i.e. the subsequent brightness will be applied without
+adding intervening dimming intervals.
+
+The gradual dimming format of the software pattern values should be:
+"brightness_1 duration_1 brightness_2 duration_2 brightness_3 duration_3 ...".
+For example (using sysfs interface):
+
+echo 0 1000 255 2000 > pattern
+
+It will make the LED go gradually from zero-intensity to max (255) intensity in
+1000 milliseconds, then back to zero intensity in 2000 milliseconds:
+
+LED brightness
+    ^
+255-|       / \            / \            /
+    |      /    \         /    \         /
+    |     /       \      /       \      /
+    |    /          \   /          \   /
+  0-|   /             \/             \/
+    +---0----1----2----3----4----5----6------------> time (s)
+
+2. To make the LED go instantly from one brightness value to another, we should
+use zero-time lengths (the brightness must be same as the previous tuple's). So
+the format should be: "brightness_1 duration_1 brightness_1 0 brightness_2
+duration_2 brightness_2 0 ...".
+For example (using sysfs interface):
+
+echo 0 1000 0 0 255 2000 255 0 > pattern
+
+It will make the LED stay off for one second, then stay at max brightness for
+two seconds:
+
+LED brightness
+    ^
+255-|        +---------+    +---------+
+    |        |         |    |         |
+    |        |         |    |         |
+    |        |         |    |         |
+  0-|   -----+         +----+         +----
+    +---0----1----2----3----4----5----6------------> time (s)
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mailbox/marvell,armada-3700-rwtm-mailbox.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mailbox/marvell,armada-3700-rwtm-mailbox.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..282ab81a4ea6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mailbox/marvell,armada-3700-rwtm-mailbox.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+* rWTM BIU Mailbox driver for Armada 37xx
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible:	must be "marvell,armada-3700-rwtm-mailbox"
+- reg:		physical base address of the mailbox and length of memory mapped
+		region
+- interrupts:	the IRQ line for the mailbox
+- #mbox-cells:	must be 1
+
+Example:
+	rwtm: mailbox@b0000 {
+		compatible = "marvell,armada-3700-rwtm-mailbox";
+		reg = <0xb0000 0x100>;
+		interrupts = <GIC_SPI 18 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
+		#mbox-cells = <1>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mailbox/xlnx,zynqmp-ipi-mailbox.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mailbox/xlnx,zynqmp-ipi-mailbox.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4438432bfe9b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mailbox/xlnx,zynqmp-ipi-mailbox.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,127 @@
+Xilinx IPI Mailbox Controller
+========================================
+
+The Xilinx IPI(Inter Processor Interrupt) mailbox controller is to manage
+messaging between two Xilinx Zynq UltraScale+ MPSoC IPI agents. Each IPI
+agent owns registers used for notification and buffers for message.
+
+               +-------------------------------------+
+               | Xilinx ZynqMP IPI Controller        |
+               +-------------------------------------+
+    +--------------------------------------------------+
+ATF                    |                     |
+                       |                     |
+                       |                     |
+    +--------------------------+             |
+                       |                     |
+                       |                     |
+    +--------------------------------------------------+
+            +------------------------------------------+
+            |  +----------------+   +----------------+ |
+Hardware    |  |  IPI Agent     |   |  IPI Buffers   | |
+            |  |  Registers     |   |                | |
+            |  |                |   |                | |
+            |  +----------------+   +----------------+ |
+            |                                          |
+            | Xilinx IPI Agent Block                   |
+            +------------------------------------------+
+
+
+Controller Device Node:
+===========================
+Required properties:
+--------------------
+IPI agent node:
+- compatible:		Shall be: "xlnx,zynqmp-ipi-mailbox"
+- interrupt-parent:	Phandle for the interrupt controller
+- interrupts:		Interrupt information corresponding to the
+			interrupt-names property.
+- xlnx,ipi-id:		local Xilinx IPI agent ID
+- #address-cells:	number of address cells of internal IPI mailbox nodes
+- #size-cells:		number of size cells of internal IPI mailbox nodes
+
+Internal IPI mailbox node:
+- reg:			IPI buffers address ranges
+- reg-names:		Names of the reg resources. It should have:
+			* local_request_region
+			  - IPI request msg buffer written by local and read
+			    by remote
+			* local_response_region
+			  - IPI response msg buffer written by local and read
+			    by remote
+			* remote_request_region
+			  - IPI request msg buffer written by remote and read
+			    by local
+			* remote_response_region
+			  - IPI response msg buffer written by remote and read
+			    by local
+- #mbox-cells:		Shall be 1. It contains:
+			* tx(0) or rx(1) channel
+- xlnx,ipi-id:		remote Xilinx IPI agent ID of which the mailbox is
+			connected to.
+
+Optional properties:
+--------------------
+- method:              The method of accessing the IPI agent registers.
+                       Permitted values are: "smc" and "hvc". Default is
+                       "smc".
+
+Client Device Node:
+===========================
+Required properties:
+--------------------
+- mboxes:		Standard property to specify a mailbox
+			(See ./mailbox.txt)
+- mbox-names:		List of identifier  strings for each mailbox
+			channel.
+
+Example:
+===========================
+	zynqmp_ipi {
+		compatible = "xlnx,zynqmp-ipi-mailbox";
+		interrupt-parent = <&gic>;
+		interrupts = <0 29 4>;
+		xlnx,ipi-id = <0>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+		ranges;
+
+		/* APU<->RPU0 IPI mailbox controller */
+		ipi_mailbox_rpu0: mailbox@ff90400 {
+			reg = <0xff990400 0x20>,
+			      <0xff990420 0x20>,
+			      <0xff990080 0x20>,
+			      <0xff9900a0 0x20>;
+			reg-names = "local_request_region",
+				    "local_response_region",
+				    "remote_request_region",
+				    "remote_response_region";
+			#mbox-cells = <1>;
+			xlnx,ipi-id = <1>;
+		};
+		/* APU<->RPU1 IPI mailbox controller */
+		ipi_mailbox_rpu1: mailbox@ff990440 {
+			reg = <0xff990440 0x20>,
+			      <0xff990460 0x20>,
+			      <0xff990280 0x20>,
+			      <0xff9902a0 0x20>;
+			reg-names = "local_request_region",
+				    "local_response_region",
+				    "remote_request_region",
+				    "remote_response_region";
+			#mbox-cells = <1>;
+			xlnx,ipi-id = <2>;
+		};
+	};
+	rpu0 {
+		...
+		mboxes = <&ipi_mailbox_rpu0 0>,
+			 <&ipi_mailbox_rpu0 1>;
+		mbox-names = "tx", "rx";
+	};
+	rpu1 {
+		...
+		mboxes = <&ipi_mailbox_rpu1 0>,
+			 <&ipi_mailbox_rpu1 1>;
+		mbox-names = "tx", "rx";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/aspeed-video.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/aspeed-video.txt
index 78b464ae2672..ce2894506e1f 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/aspeed-video.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/aspeed-video.txt
@@ -14,6 +14,11 @@ Required properties:
 			the VE
  - interrupts:		the interrupt associated with the VE on this platform
 
+Optional properties:
+ - memory-region:
+	phandle to a memory region to allocate from, as defined in
+	Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reserved-memory/reserved-memory.txt
+
 Example:
 
 video-engine@1e700000 {
@@ -23,4 +28,5 @@ video-engine@1e700000 {
     clock-names = "vclk", "eclk";
     resets = <&syscon ASPEED_RESET_VIDEO>;
     interrupts = <7>;
+    memory-region = <&video_engine_memory>;
 };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/cedrus.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/cedrus.txt
index bce0705df953..20c82fb0c343 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/cedrus.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/cedrus.txt
@@ -13,6 +13,7 @@ Required properties:
 			- "allwinner,sun8i-h3-video-engine"
 			- "allwinner,sun50i-a64-video-engine"
 			- "allwinner,sun50i-h5-video-engine"
+			- "allwinner,sun50i-h6-video-engine"
 - reg			: register base and length of VE;
 - clocks		: list of clock specifiers, corresponding to entries in
 			  the clock-names property;
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/adv748x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/adv748x.txt
index 5dddc95f9cc4..4f91686e54a6 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/adv748x.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/adv748x.txt
@@ -48,7 +48,16 @@ are numbered as follows.
 	  TXA		source		10
 	  TXB		source		11
 
-The digital output port nodes must contain at least one endpoint.
+The digital output port nodes, when present, shall contain at least one
+endpoint. Each of those endpoints shall contain the data-lanes property as
+described in video-interfaces.txt.
+
+Required source endpoint properties:
+  - data-lanes: an array of physical data lane indexes
+    The accepted value(s) for this property depends on which of the two
+    sources are described. For TXA 1, 2 or 4 data lanes can be described
+    while for TXB only 1 data lane is valid. See video-interfaces.txt
+    for detailed description.
 
 Ports are optional if they are not connected to anything at the hardware level.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/melexis,mlx90640.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/melexis,mlx90640.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..060d2b7a5893
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/melexis,mlx90640.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+* Melexis MLX90640 FIR Sensor
+
+Melexis MLX90640 FIR sensor support which allows recording of thermal data
+with 32x24 resolution excluding 2 lines of coefficient data that is used by
+userspace to render processed frames.
+
+Required Properties:
+ - compatible : Must be "melexis,mlx90640"
+ - reg : i2c address of the device
+
+Example:
+
+	i2c0@1c22000 {
+		...
+		mlx90640@33 {
+			compatible = "melexis,mlx90640";
+			reg = <0x33>;
+		};
+		...
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/mt9m001.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/mt9m001.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c920552b03ef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/mt9m001.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+MT9M001: 1/2-Inch Megapixel Digital Image Sensor
+
+The MT9M001 is an SXGA-format with a 1/2-inch CMOS active-pixel digital
+image sensor. It is programmable through I2C interface.
+
+Required Properties:
+
+- compatible: shall be "onnn,mt9m001".
+- clocks: reference to the master clock into sensor
+
+Optional Properties:
+
+- reset-gpios: GPIO handle which is connected to the reset pin of the chip.
+  Active low.
+- standby-gpios: GPIO handle which is connected to the standby pin of the chip.
+  Active high.
+
+The device node must contain one 'port' child node with one 'endpoint' child
+sub-node for its digital output video port, in accordance with the video
+interface bindings defined in:
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/video-interfaces.txt
+
+Example:
+
+	&i2c1 {
+		camera-sensor@5d {
+			compatible = "onnn,mt9m001";
+			reg = <0x5d>;
+			reset-gpios = <&gpio0 0 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>;
+			standby-gpios = <&gpio0 1 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>;
+			clocks = <&camera_clk>;
+			port {
+				mt9m001_out: endpoint {
+					remote-endpoint = <&vcap_in>;
+				};
+			};
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/ov5645.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/ov5645.txt
index fd7aec9f8e24..72ad992f77be 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/ov5645.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/ov5645.txt
@@ -26,9 +26,9 @@ Example:
 	&i2c1 {
 		...
 
-		ov5645: ov5645@78 {
+		ov5645: ov5645@3c {
 			compatible = "ovti,ov5645";
-			reg = <0x78>;
+			reg = <0x3c>;
 
 			enable-gpios = <&gpio1 6 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>;
 			reset-gpios = <&gpio5 20 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>;
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ Example:
 
 			clocks = <&clks 200>;
 			clock-names = "xclk";
-			clock-frequency = <23880000>;
+			clock-frequency = <24000000>;
 
 			vdddo-supply = <&camera_dovdd_1v8>;
 			vdda-supply = <&camera_avdd_2v8>;
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/st,st-mipid02.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/st,st-mipid02.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7976e6c40a80
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/st,st-mipid02.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+STMicroelectronics MIPID02 CSI-2 to PARALLEL bridge
+
+MIPID02 has two CSI-2 input ports, only one of those ports can be active at a
+time. Active port input stream will be de-serialized and its content outputted
+through PARALLEL output port.
+CSI-2 first input port is a dual lane 800Mbps per lane whereas CSI-2 second
+input port is a single lane 800Mbps. Both ports support clock and data lane
+polarity swap. First port also supports data lane swap.
+PARALLEL output port has a maximum width of 12 bits.
+Supported formats are RAW6, RAW7, RAW8, RAW10, RAW12, RGB565, RGB888, RGB444,
+YUV420 8-bit, YUV422 8-bit and YUV420 10-bit.
+
+Required Properties:
+- compatible: shall be "st,st-mipid02"
+- clocks: reference to the xclk input clock.
+- clock-names: shall be "xclk".
+- VDDE-supply: sensor digital IO supply. Must be 1.8 volts.
+- VDDIN-supply: sensor internal regulator supply. Must be 1.8 volts.
+
+Optional Properties:
+- reset-gpios: reference to the GPIO connected to the xsdn pin, if any.
+	       This is an active low signal to the mipid02.
+
+Required subnodes:
+  - ports: A ports node with one port child node per device input and output
+	   port, in accordance with the video interface bindings defined in
+	   Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/video-interfaces.txt. The
+	   port nodes are numbered as follows:
+
+	   Port Description
+	   -----------------------------
+	   0    CSI-2 first input port
+	   1    CSI-2 second input port
+	   2    PARALLEL output
+
+Endpoint node required property for CSI-2 connection is:
+- data-lanes: shall be <1> for Port 1. for Port 0 dual-lane operation shall be
+<1 2> or <2 1>. For Port 0 single-lane operation shall be <1> or <2>.
+Endpoint node optional property for CSI-2 connection is:
+- lane-polarities: any lane can be inverted or not.
+
+Endpoint node required property for PARALLEL connection is:
+- bus-width: shall be set to <6>, <7>, <8>, <10> or <12>.
+Endpoint node optional properties for PARALLEL connection are:
+- hsync-active: active state of the HSYNC signal, 0/1 for LOW/HIGH respectively.
+LOW being the default.
+- vsync-active: active state of the VSYNC signal, 0/1 for LOW/HIGH respectively.
+LOW being the default.
+
+Example:
+
+mipid02: csi2rx@14 {
+	compatible = "st,st-mipid02";
+	reg = <0x14>;
+	status = "okay";
+	clocks = <&clk_ext_camera_12>;
+	clock-names = "xclk";
+	VDDE-supply = <&vdd>;
+	VDDIN-supply = <&vdd>;
+	ports {
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+		port@0 {
+			reg = <0>;
+
+			ep0: endpoint {
+				data-lanes = <1 2>;
+				remote-endpoint = <&mipi_csi2_in>;
+			};
+		};
+		port@2 {
+			reg = <2>;
+
+			ep2: endpoint {
+				bus-width = <8>;
+				hsync-active = <0>;
+				vsync-active = <0>;
+				remote-endpoint = <&parallel_out>;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/imx7-csi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/imx7-csi.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3c07bc676bc3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/imx7-csi.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+Freescale i.MX7 CMOS Sensor Interface
+=====================================
+
+csi node
+--------
+
+This is device node for the CMOS Sensor Interface (CSI) which enables the chip
+to connect directly to external CMOS image sensors.
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible    : "fsl,imx7-csi";
+- reg           : base address and length of the register set for the device;
+- interrupts    : should contain CSI interrupt;
+- clocks        : list of clock specifiers, see
+        Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt for details;
+- clock-names   : must contain "axi", "mclk" and "dcic" entries, matching
+                 entries in the clock property;
+
+The device node shall contain one 'port' child node with one child 'endpoint'
+node, according to the bindings defined in:
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/video-interfaces.txt.
+
+In the following example a remote endpoint is a video multiplexer.
+
+example:
+
+                csi: csi@30710000 {
+                        #address-cells = <1>;
+                        #size-cells = <0>;
+
+                        compatible = "fsl,imx7-csi";
+                        reg = <0x30710000 0x10000>;
+                        interrupts = <GIC_SPI 7 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
+                        clocks = <&clks IMX7D_CLK_DUMMY>,
+                                        <&clks IMX7D_CSI_MCLK_ROOT_CLK>,
+                                        <&clks IMX7D_CLK_DUMMY>;
+                        clock-names = "axi", "mclk", "dcic";
+
+                        port {
+                                csi_from_csi_mux: endpoint {
+                                        remote-endpoint = <&csi_mux_to_csi>;
+                                };
+                        };
+                };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/imx7-mipi-csi2.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/imx7-mipi-csi2.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..71fd74ed3ec8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/imx7-mipi-csi2.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+Freescale i.MX7 Mipi CSI2
+=========================
+
+mipi_csi2 node
+--------------
+
+This is the device node for the MIPI CSI-2 receiver core in i.MX7 SoC. It is
+compatible with previous version of Samsung D-phy.
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible    : "fsl,imx7-mipi-csi2";
+- reg           : base address and length of the register set for the device;
+- interrupts    : should contain MIPI CSIS interrupt;
+- clocks        : list of clock specifiers, see
+        Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt for details;
+- clock-names   : must contain "pclk", "wrap" and "phy" entries, matching
+                  entries in the clock property;
+- power-domains : a phandle to the power domain, see
+          Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/power_domain.txt for details.
+- reset-names   : should include following entry "mrst";
+- resets        : a list of phandle, should contain reset entry of
+                  reset-names;
+- phy-supply    : from the generic phy bindings, a phandle to a regulator that
+	          provides power to MIPI CSIS core;
+
+Optional properties:
+
+- clock-frequency : The IP's main (system bus) clock frequency in Hz, default
+		    value when this property is not specified is 166 MHz;
+- fsl,csis-hs-settle : differential receiver (HS-RX) settle time;
+
+The device node should contain two 'port' child nodes with one child 'endpoint'
+node, according to the bindings defined in:
+ Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ media/video-interfaces.txt.
+ The following are properties specific to those nodes.
+
+port node
+---------
+
+- reg		  : (required) can take the values 0 or 1, where 0 shall be
+                     related to the sink port and port 1 shall be the source
+                     one;
+
+endpoint node
+-------------
+
+- data-lanes    : (required) an array specifying active physical MIPI-CSI2
+		    data input lanes and their mapping to logical lanes; this
+                    shall only be applied to port 0 (sink port), the array's
+                    content is unused only its length is meaningful,
+                    in this case the maximum length supported is 2;
+
+example:
+
+        mipi_csi: mipi-csi@30750000 {
+                #address-cells = <1>;
+                #size-cells = <0>;
+
+                compatible = "fsl,imx7-mipi-csi2";
+                reg = <0x30750000 0x10000>;
+                interrupts = <GIC_SPI 25 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
+                clocks = <&clks IMX7D_IPG_ROOT_CLK>,
+                                <&clks IMX7D_MIPI_CSI_ROOT_CLK>,
+                                <&clks IMX7D_MIPI_DPHY_ROOT_CLK>;
+                clock-names = "pclk", "wrap", "phy";
+                clock-frequency = <166000000>;
+                power-domains = <&pgc_mipi_phy>;
+                phy-supply = <&reg_1p0d>;
+                resets = <&src IMX7_RESET_MIPI_PHY_MRST>;
+                reset-names = "mrst";
+                fsl,csis-hs-settle = <3>;
+
+                port@0 {
+                        reg = <0>;
+
+                        mipi_from_sensor: endpoint {
+                                remote-endpoint = <&ov2680_to_mipi>;
+                                data-lanes = <1>;
+                        };
+                };
+
+                port@1 {
+                        reg = <1>;
+
+                        mipi_vc0_to_csi_mux: endpoint {
+                                remote-endpoint = <&csi_mux_from_mipi_vc0>;
+                        };
+                };
+        };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/mediatek-vcodec.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/mediatek-vcodec.txt
index 2a615d84a682..b6b5dde6abd8 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/mediatek-vcodec.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/mediatek-vcodec.txt
@@ -66,6 +66,15 @@ vcodec_dec: vcodec@16000000 {
                   "vencpll",
                   "venc_lt_sel",
                   "vdec_bus_clk_src";
+    assigned-clocks = <&topckgen CLK_TOP_VENC_LT_SEL>,
+                      <&topckgen CLK_TOP_CCI400_SEL>,
+                      <&topckgen CLK_TOP_VDEC_SEL>,
+                      <&apmixedsys CLK_APMIXED_VCODECPLL>,
+                      <&apmixedsys CLK_APMIXED_VENCPLL>;
+    assigned-clock-parents = <&topckgen CLK_TOP_VCODECPLL_370P5>,
+                             <&topckgen CLK_TOP_UNIVPLL_D2>,
+                             <&topckgen CLK_TOP_VCODECPLL>;
+    assigned-clock-rates = <0>, <0>, <0>, <1482000000>, <800000000>;
   };
 
   vcodec_enc: vcodec@18002000 {
@@ -105,4 +114,8 @@ vcodec_dec: vcodec@16000000 {
                   "venc_sel",
                   "venc_lt_sel_src",
                   "venc_lt_sel";
+    assigned-clocks = <&topckgen CLK_TOP_VENC_SEL>,
+                      <&topckgen CLK_TOP_VENC_LT_SEL>;
+    assigned-clock-parents = <&topckgen CLK_TOP_VENCPLL_D2>,
+                             <&topckgen CLK_TOP_UNIVPLL1_D2>;
   };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/meson-ao-cec.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/meson-ao-cec.txt
index 8671bdb08080..c67fc41d4aa2 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/meson-ao-cec.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/meson-ao-cec.txt
@@ -4,16 +4,23 @@ The Amlogic Meson AO-CEC module is present is Amlogic SoCs and its purpose is
 to handle communication between HDMI connected devices over the CEC bus.
 
 Required properties:
-  - compatible : value should be following
+  - compatible : value should be following depending on the SoC :
+	For GXBB, GXL, GXM and G12A (AO_CEC_A module) :
 	"amlogic,meson-gx-ao-cec"
+	For G12A (AO_CEC_B module) :
+	"amlogic,meson-g12a-ao-cec"
 
   - reg : Physical base address of the IP registers and length of memory
 	  mapped region.
 
   - interrupts : AO-CEC interrupt number to the CPU.
   - clocks : from common clock binding: handle to AO-CEC clock.
-  - clock-names : from common clock binding: must contain "core",
-		  corresponding to entry in the clocks property.
+  - clock-names : from common clock binding, must contain :
+		For GXBB, GXL, GXM and G12A (AO_CEC_A module) :
+		- "core"
+		For G12A (AO_CEC_B module) :
+		- "oscin"
+		corresponding to entry in the clocks property.
   - hdmi-phandle: phandle to the HDMI controller
 
 Example:
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/rcar_imr.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/rcar_imr.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b0614153ed36
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/rcar_imr.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+Renesas R-Car Image Renderer (Distortion Correction Engine)
+-----------------------------------------------------------
+
+The image renderer, or the distortion correction engine, is a drawing processor
+with a simple instruction system capable of referencing video capture data or
+data in an external memory as 2D texture data and performing texture mapping
+and drawing with respect to any shape that is split into triangular objects.
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible: "renesas,<soctype>-imr-lx4", "renesas,imr-lx4" as a fallback for
+  the image renderer light extended 4 (IMR-LX4) found in the R-Car gen3 SoCs,
+  where the examples with <soctype> are:
+  - "renesas,r8a7795-imr-lx4" for R-Car H3,
+  - "renesas,r8a7796-imr-lx4" for R-Car M3-W.
+- reg: offset and length of the register block;
+- interrupts: single interrupt specifier;
+- clocks: single clock phandle/specifier pair;
+- power-domains: power domain phandle/specifier pair;
+- resets: reset phandle/specifier pair.
+
+Example:
+
+	imr-lx4@fe860000 {
+		compatible = "renesas,r8a7795-imr-lx4", "renesas,imr-lx4";
+		reg = <0 0xfe860000 0 0x2000>;
+		interrupts = <GIC_SPI 192 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
+		clocks = <&cpg CPG_MOD 823>;
+		power-domains = <&sysc R8A7795_PD_A3VC>;
+		resets = <&cpg 823>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/rcar_vin.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/rcar_vin.txt
index 0dd84a183ca7..aa217b096279 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/rcar_vin.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/rcar_vin.txt
@@ -7,12 +7,14 @@ family of devices.
 Each VIN instance has a single parallel input that supports RGB and YUV video,
 with both external synchronization and BT.656 synchronization for the latter.
 Depending on the instance the VIN input is connected to external SoC pins, or
-on Gen3 platforms to a CSI-2 receiver.
+on Gen3 and RZ/G2 platforms to a CSI-2 receiver.
 
  - compatible: Must be one or more of the following
    - "renesas,vin-r8a7743" for the R8A7743 device
    - "renesas,vin-r8a7744" for the R8A7744 device
    - "renesas,vin-r8a7745" for the R8A7745 device
+   - "renesas,vin-r8a774a1" for the R8A774A1 device
+   - "renesas,vin-r8a774c0" for the R8A774C0 device
    - "renesas,vin-r8a7778" for the R8A7778 device
    - "renesas,vin-r8a7779" for the R8A7779 device
    - "renesas,vin-r8a7790" for the R8A7790 device
@@ -61,10 +63,10 @@ The per-board settings Gen2 platforms:
     - data-enable-active: polarity of CLKENB signal, see [1] for
       description. Default is active high.
 
-The per-board settings Gen3 platforms:
+The per-board settings Gen3 and RZ/G2 platforms:
 
-Gen3 platforms can support both a single connected parallel input source
-from external SoC pins (port@0) and/or multiple parallel input sources
+Gen3 and RZ/G2 platforms can support both a single connected parallel input
+source from external SoC pins (port@0) and/or multiple parallel input sources
 from local SoC CSI-2 receivers (port@1) depending on SoC.
 
 - renesas,id - ID number of the VIN, VINx in the documentation.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/renesas,fcp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/renesas,fcp.txt
index 3ec91803ba58..79c37395b396 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/renesas,fcp.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/renesas,fcp.txt
@@ -2,8 +2,9 @@ Renesas R-Car Frame Compression Processor (FCP)
 -----------------------------------------------
 
 The FCP is a companion module of video processing modules in the Renesas R-Car
-Gen3 SoCs. It provides data compression and decompression, data caching, and
-conversion of AXI transactions in order to reduce the memory bandwidth.
+Gen3 and RZ/G2 SoCs. It provides data compression and decompression, data
+caching, and conversion of AXI transactions in order to reduce the memory
+bandwidth.
 
 There are three types of FCP: FCP for Codec (FCPC), FCP for VSP (FCPV) and FCP
 for FDP (FCPF). Their configuration and behaviour depend on the module they
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/renesas,rcar-csi2.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/renesas,rcar-csi2.txt
index 541d936b62e8..331409259752 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/renesas,rcar-csi2.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/renesas,rcar-csi2.txt
@@ -2,12 +2,14 @@ Renesas R-Car MIPI CSI-2
 ------------------------
 
 The R-Car CSI-2 receiver device provides MIPI CSI-2 capabilities for the
-Renesas R-Car family of devices. It is used in conjunction with the
+Renesas R-Car and RZ/G2 family of devices. It is used in conjunction with the
 R-Car VIN module, which provides the video capture capabilities.
 
 Mandatory properties
 --------------------
  - compatible: Must be one or more of the following
+   - "renesas,r8a774a1-csi2" for the R8A774A1 device.
+   - "renesas,r8a774c0-csi2" for the R8A774C0 device.
    - "renesas,r8a7795-csi2" for the R8A7795 device.
    - "renesas,r8a7796-csi2" for the R8A7796 device.
    - "renesas,r8a77965-csi2" for the R8A77965 device.
@@ -17,7 +19,8 @@ Mandatory properties
 
  - reg: the register base and size for the device registers
  - interrupts: the interrupt for the device
- - clocks: reference to the parent clock
+ - clocks: A phandle + clock specifier for the module clock
+ - resets: A phandle + reset specifier for the module reset
 
 The device node shall contain two 'port' child nodes according to the
 bindings defined in Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/renesas,vsp1.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/renesas,vsp1.txt
index 16427017cb45..cd5a955b2ea0 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/renesas,vsp1.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/renesas,vsp1.txt
@@ -2,13 +2,13 @@
 
 The VSP is a video processing engine that supports up-/down-scaling, alpha
 blending, color space conversion and various other image processing features.
-It can be found in the Renesas R-Car second generation SoCs.
+It can be found in the Renesas R-Car Gen2, R-Car Gen3, RZ/G1, and RZ/G2 SoCs.
 
 Required properties:
 
   - compatible: Must contain one of the following values
-    - "renesas,vsp1" for the R-Car Gen2 VSP1
-    - "renesas,vsp2" for the R-Car Gen3 VSP2
+    - "renesas,vsp1" for the R-Car Gen2 and RZ/G1 VSP1
+    - "renesas,vsp2" for the R-Car Gen3 and RZ/G2 VSP2
 
   - reg: Base address and length of the registers block for the VSP.
   - interrupts: VSP interrupt specifier.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/si470x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/si470x.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a9403558362e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/si470x.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+* Silicon Labs FM Radio receiver
+
+The Silicon Labs Si470x is family of FM radio receivers with receive power scan
+supporting 76-108 MHz, programmable through an I2C interface.
+Some of them includes an RDS encoder.
+
+Required Properties:
+- compatible: Should contain "silabs,si470x"
+- reg: the I2C address of the device
+
+Optional Properties:
+- interrupts : The interrupt number
+- reset-gpios: GPIO specifier for the chips reset line
+
+Example:
+
+&i2c2 {
+        si470x@63 {
+                compatible = "silabs,si470x";
+                reg = <0x63>;
+
+                interrupt-parent = <&gpj2>;
+                interrupts = <4 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING>;
+                reset-gpios = <&gpj2 5 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>;
+        };
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/sun6i-csi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/sun6i-csi.txt
index d4ab34f2240c..0dd540bb03db 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/sun6i-csi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/sun6i-csi.txt
@@ -6,8 +6,9 @@ Allwinner V3s SoC features a CSI module(CSI1) with parallel interface.
 Required properties:
   - compatible: value must be one of:
     * "allwinner,sun6i-a31-csi"
-    * "allwinner,sun8i-h3-csi", "allwinner,sun6i-a31-csi"
+    * "allwinner,sun8i-h3-csi"
     * "allwinner,sun8i-v3s-csi"
+    * "allwinner,sun50i-a64-csi"
   - reg: base address and size of the memory-mapped region.
   - interrupts: interrupt associated to this IP
   - clocks: phandles to the clocks feeding the CSI
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/atmel,ebi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/atmel,ebi.txt
index 9bb5f57e2066..94bf7896a688 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/atmel,ebi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/atmel,ebi.txt
@@ -15,6 +15,7 @@ Required properties:
 			"atmel,at91sam9g45-ebi"
 			"atmel,at91sam9x5-ebi"
 			"atmel,sama5d3-ebi"
+			"microchip,sam9x60-ebi"
 
 - reg:			Contains offset/length value for EBI memory mapping.
 			This property might contain several entries if the EBI
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/fsl/mmdc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/fsl/mmdc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..bcc36c5b543c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/fsl/mmdc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+Freescale Multi Mode DDR controller (MMDC)
+
+Required properties :
+- compatible : should be one of following:
+	for i.MX6Q/i.MX6DL:
+	- "fsl,imx6q-mmdc";
+	for i.MX6QP:
+	- "fsl,imx6qp-mmdc", "fsl,imx6q-mmdc";
+	for i.MX6SL:
+	- "fsl,imx6sl-mmdc", "fsl,imx6q-mmdc";
+	for i.MX6SLL:
+	- "fsl,imx6sll-mmdc", "fsl,imx6q-mmdc";
+	for i.MX6SX:
+	- "fsl,imx6sx-mmdc", "fsl,imx6q-mmdc";
+	for i.MX6UL/i.MX6ULL/i.MX6ULZ:
+	- "fsl,imx6ul-mmdc", "fsl,imx6q-mmdc";
+	for i.MX7ULP:
+	- "fsl,imx7ulp-mmdc", "fsl,imx6q-mmdc";
+- reg : address and size of MMDC DDR controller registers
+
+Optional properties :
+- clocks : the clock provided by the SoC to access the MMDC registers
+
+Example :
+	mmdc0: memory-controller@21b0000 { /* MMDC0 */
+		compatible = "fsl,imx6q-mmdc";
+		reg = <0x021b0000 0x4000>;
+		clocks = <&clks IMX6QDL_CLK_MMDC_P0_IPG>;
+	};
+
+	mmdc1: memory-controller@21b4000 { /* MMDC1 */
+		compatible = "fsl,imx6q-mmdc";
+		reg = <0x021b4000 0x4000>;
+		status = "disabled";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/nvidia,tegra20-mc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/nvidia,tegra20-mc.txt
index 7d60a50a4fa1..e55328237df4 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/nvidia,tegra20-mc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/nvidia,tegra20-mc.txt
@@ -1,26 +1,37 @@
 NVIDIA Tegra20 MC(Memory Controller)
 
 Required properties:
-- compatible : "nvidia,tegra20-mc"
-- reg : Should contain 2 register ranges(address and length); see the
-  example below. Note that the MC registers are interleaved with the
-  GART registers, and hence must be represented as multiple ranges.
+- compatible : "nvidia,tegra20-mc-gart"
+- reg : Should contain 2 register ranges: physical base address and length of
+  the controller's registers and the GART aperture respectively.
+- clocks: Must contain an entry for each entry in clock-names.
+  See ../clocks/clock-bindings.txt for details.
+- clock-names: Must include the following entries:
+  - mc: the module's clock input
 - interrupts : Should contain MC General interrupt.
 - #reset-cells : Should be 1. This cell represents memory client module ID.
   The assignments may be found in header file <dt-bindings/memory/tegra20-mc.h>
   or in the TRM documentation.
+- #iommu-cells: Should be 0. This cell represents the number of cells in an
+  IOMMU specifier needed to encode an address. GART supports only a single
+  address space that is shared by all devices, therefore no additional
+  information needed for the address encoding.
 
 Example:
 	mc: memory-controller@7000f000 {
-		compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-mc";
-		reg = <0x7000f000 0x024
-		       0x7000f03c 0x3c4>;
-		interrupts = <0 77 0x04>;
+		compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-mc-gart";
+		reg = <0x7000f000 0x400		/* controller registers */
+		       0x58000000 0x02000000>;	/* GART aperture */
+		clocks = <&tegra_car TEGRA20_CLK_MC>;
+		clock-names = "mc";
+		interrupts = <GIC_SPI 77 0x04>;
 		#reset-cells = <1>;
+		#iommu-cells = <0>;
 	};
 
 	video-codec@6001a000 {
 		compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-vde";
 		...
 		resets = <&mc TEGRA20_MC_RESET_VDE>;
+		iommus = <&mc>;
 	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/aspeed-lpc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/aspeed-lpc.txt
index 34dd89087cff..86446074e206 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/aspeed-lpc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/aspeed-lpc.txt
@@ -135,6 +135,8 @@ Required properties:
 - clocks:	contains a phandle to the syscon node describing the clocks.
 		There should then be one cell representing the clock to use
 
+Optional properties:
+
 - memory-region: A phandle to a reserved_memory region to be used for the LPC
 		to AHB mapping
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/atmel-hlcdc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/atmel-hlcdc.txt
index 3f643ef121ff..5f8880cc757e 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/atmel-hlcdc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/atmel-hlcdc.txt
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ Required properties:
    "atmel,sama5d2-hlcdc"
    "atmel,sama5d3-hlcdc"
    "atmel,sama5d4-hlcdc"
+   "microchip,sam9x60-hlcdc"
  - reg: base address and size of the HLCDC device registers.
  - clock-names: the name of the 3 clocks requested by the HLCDC device.
    Should contain "periph_clk", "sys_clk" and "slow_clk".
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/axp20x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/axp20x.txt
index 2af4ff95d6bc..4991a6415796 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/axp20x.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/axp20x.txt
@@ -25,6 +25,7 @@ Required properties:
     * "x-powers,axp223"
     * "x-powers,axp803"
     * "x-powers,axp806"
+    * "x-powers,axp805", "x-powers,axp806"
     * "x-powers,axp809"
     * "x-powers,axp813"
 - reg: The I2C slave address or RSB hardware address for the AXP chip
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/cirrus,lochnagar.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/cirrus,lochnagar.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3bf92ad37fa1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/cirrus,lochnagar.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
+Cirrus Logic Lochnagar Audio Development Board
+
+Lochnagar is an evaluation and development board for Cirrus Logic
+Smart CODEC and Amp devices. It allows the connection of most Cirrus
+Logic devices on mini-cards, as well as allowing connection of
+various application processor systems to provide a full evaluation
+platform.  Audio system topology, clocking and power can all be
+controlled through the Lochnagar, allowing the device under test
+to be used in a variety of possible use cases.
+
+Also see these documents for generic binding information:
+  [1] GPIO : ../gpio/gpio.txt
+
+And these for relevant defines:
+  [2] include/dt-bindings/pinctrl/lochnagar.h
+  [3] include/dt-bindings/clock/lochnagar.h
+
+And these documents for the required sub-node binding details:
+  [4] Clock: ../clock/cirrus,lochnagar.txt
+  [5] Pinctrl: ../pinctrl/cirrus,lochnagar.txt
+  [6] Regulator: ../regulator/cirrus,lochnagar.txt
+  [7] Sound: ../sound/cirrus,lochnagar.txt
+  [8] Hardware Monitor: ../hwmon/cirrus,lochnagar.txt
+
+Required properties:
+
+  - compatible : One of the following strings:
+                 "cirrus,lochnagar1"
+                 "cirrus,lochnagar2"
+
+  - reg : I2C slave address
+
+  - reset-gpios : Reset line to the Lochnagar, see [1].
+
+Required sub-nodes:
+
+  - lochnagar-clk : Binding for the clocking components, see [4].
+
+  - lochnagar-pinctrl : Binding for the pin control components, see [5].
+
+Optional sub-nodes:
+
+  - Bindings for the regulator components, see [6]. Only available on
+    Lochnagar 2.
+
+  - lochnagar-sc : Binding for the sound card components, see [7].
+                   Only available on Lochnagar 2.
+  - lochnagar-hwmon : Binding for the hardware monitor components, see [8].
+                      Only available on Lochnagar 2.
+
+Optional properties:
+
+  - present-gpios : Host present line, indicating the presence of a
+    host system, see [1]. This can be omitted if the present line is
+    tied in hardware.
+
+Example:
+
+lochnagar: lochnagar@22 {
+	compatible = "cirrus,lochnagar2";
+	reg = <0x22>;
+
+	reset-gpios = <&gpio0 55 0>;
+	present-gpios = <&gpio0 60 0>;
+
+	lochnagar-clk {
+		compatible = "cirrus,lochnagar2-clk";
+		...
+	};
+
+	lochnagar-pinctrl {
+		compatible = "cirrus,lochnagar-pinctrl";
+		...
+	};
+
+	lochnagar-sc {
+		compatible = "cirrus,lochnagar2-soundcard";
+		...
+	};
+
+	lochnagar-hwmon {
+		compatible = "cirrus,lochnagar2-hwmon";
+		...
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max77620.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max77620.txt
index 9c16d51cc15b..5a642a51d58e 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max77620.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max77620.txt
@@ -4,7 +4,8 @@ Required properties:
 -------------------
 - compatible: Must be one of
 		"maxim,max77620"
-		"maxim,max20024".
+		"maxim,max20024"
+		"maxim,max77663"
 - reg: I2C device address.
 
 Optional properties:
@@ -17,6 +18,11 @@ Optional properties:
 			IRQ numbers for different interrupt source of MAX77620
 			are defined at dt-bindings/mfd/max77620.h.
 
+- system-power-controller: Indicates that this PMIC is controlling the
+			   system power, see [1] for more details.
+
+[1] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/power-controller.txt
+
 Optional subnodes and their properties:
 =======================================
 
@@ -105,6 +111,7 @@ Optional properties:
 Here supported time periods by device in microseconds are as follows:
 MAX77620 supports 40, 80, 160, 320, 640, 1280, 2560 and 5120 microseconds.
 MAX20024 supports 20, 40, 80, 160, 320, 640, 1280 and 2540 microseconds.
+MAX77663 supports 20, 40, 80, 160, 320, 640, 1280 and 2540 microseconds.
 
 -maxim,power-ok-control: configure map power ok bit
 			1: Enables POK(Power OK) to control nRST_IO and GPIO1
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max77650.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max77650.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b529d8d19335
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max77650.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+MAX77650 ultra low-power PMIC from Maxim Integrated.
+
+Required properties:
+-------------------
+- compatible:		Must be "maxim,max77650"
+- reg:			I2C device address.
+- interrupts:		The interrupt on the parent the controller is
+			connected to.
+- interrupt-controller: Marks the device node as an interrupt controller.
+- #interrupt-cells:	Must be <2>.
+
+- gpio-controller:	Marks the device node as a gpio controller.
+- #gpio-cells:		Must be <2>. The first cell is the pin number and
+			the second cell is used to specify the gpio active
+			state.
+
+Optional properties:
+--------------------
+gpio-line-names:	Single string containing the name of the GPIO line.
+
+The GPIO-controller module is represented as part of the top-level PMIC
+node. The device exposes a single GPIO line.
+
+For device-tree bindings of other sub-modules (regulator, power supply,
+LEDs and onkey) refer to the binding documents under the respective
+sub-system directories.
+
+For more details on GPIO bindings, please refer to the generic GPIO DT
+binding document <devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt>.
+
+Example:
+--------
+
+	pmic@48 {
+		compatible = "maxim,max77650";
+		reg = <0x48>;
+
+		interrupt-controller;
+		interrupt-parent = <&gpio2>;
+		#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+		interrupts = <3 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW>;
+
+		gpio-controller;
+		#gpio-cells = <2>;
+		gpio-line-names = "max77650-charger";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/rohm,bd71837-pmic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/rohm,bd71837-pmic.txt
index a4b056761eaa..d5f68ac78d15 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/rohm,bd71837-pmic.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/rohm,bd71837-pmic.txt
@@ -23,6 +23,20 @@ Required properties:
 
 Optional properties:
 - clock-output-names	: Should contain name for output clock.
+- rohm,reset-snvs-powered : Transfer BD718x7 to SNVS state at reset.
+
+The BD718x7 supports two different HW states as reset target states. States
+are called as SNVS and READY. At READY state all the PMIC power outputs go
+down and OTP is reload. At the SNVS state all other logic and external
+devices apart from the SNVS power domain are shut off. Please refer to NXP
+i.MX8 documentation for further information regarding SNVS state. When a
+reset is done via SNVS state the PMIC OTP data is not reload. This causes
+power outputs that have been under SW control to stay down when reset has
+switched power state to SNVS. If reset is done via READY state the power
+outputs will be returned to HW control by OTP loading. Thus the reset
+target state is set to READY by default. If SNVS state is used the boot
+crucial regulators must have the regulator-always-on and regulator-boot-on
+properties set in regulator node.
 
 Example:
 
@@ -43,6 +57,7 @@ Example:
 		#clock-cells = <0>;
 		clocks = <&osc 0>;
 		clock-output-names = "bd71837-32k-out";
+		rohm,reset-snvs-powered;
 
 		regulators {
 			buck1: BUCK1 {
@@ -50,8 +65,10 @@ Example:
 				regulator-min-microvolt = <700000>;
 				regulator-max-microvolt = <1300000>;
 				regulator-boot-on;
+				regulator-always-on;
 				regulator-ramp-delay = <1250>;
 			};
+			// [...]
 		};
 	};
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/st,stpmic1.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/st,stpmic1.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..afd45c089585
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/st,stpmic1.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
+* STMicroelectronics STPMIC1 Power Management IC
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible:		: "st,stpmic1"
+- reg:			: The I2C slave address for the STPMIC1 chip.
+- interrupts:		: The interrupt line the device is connected to.
+- #interrupt-cells:	: Should be 1.
+- interrupt-controller:	: Marks the device node as an interrupt controller.
+			    Interrupt numbers are defined at
+			    dt-bindings/mfd/st,stpmic1.h.
+
+STPMIC1 consists in a varied group of sub-devices.
+Each sub-device binding is be described in own documentation file.
+
+Device			 Description
+------			------------
+st,stpmic1-onkey	: Power on key, see ../input/st,stpmic1-onkey.txt
+st,stpmic1-regulators	: Regulators, see ../regulator/st,stpmic1-regulator.txt
+st,stpmic1-wdt		: Watchdog, see ../watchdog/st,stpmic1-wdt.txt
+
+Example:
+
+#include <dt-bindings/mfd/st,stpmic1.h>
+
+pmic: pmic@33 {
+	compatible = "st,stpmic1";
+	reg = <0x33>;
+	interrupt-parent = <&gpioa>;
+	interrupts = <0 2>;
+
+	interrupt-controller;
+	#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+
+	onkey {
+		compatible = "st,stpmic1-onkey";
+		interrupts = <IT_PONKEY_F 0>,<IT_PONKEY_R 1>;
+		interrupt-names = "onkey-falling", "onkey-rising";
+		power-off-time-sec = <10>;
+	};
+
+	watchdog {
+		compatible = "st,stpmic1-wdt";
+	};
+
+	regulators {
+		compatible = "st,stpmic1-regulators";
+
+		vdd_core: buck1 {
+			regulator-name = "vdd_core";
+			regulator-boot-on;
+			regulator-min-microvolt = <700000>;
+			regulator-max-microvolt = <1200000>;
+		};
+		vdd: buck3 {
+			regulator-name = "vdd";
+			regulator-min-microvolt = <3300000>;
+			regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+			regulator-boot-on;
+			regulator-pull-down;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/stm32-lptimer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/stm32-lptimer.txt
index 2a9ff29db9c9..fb54e4dad5b3 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/stm32-lptimer.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/stm32-lptimer.txt
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ Required properties:
 
 Optional subnodes:
 - pwm:			See ../pwm/pwm-stm32-lp.txt
-- counter:		See ../iio/timer/stm32-lptimer-cnt.txt
+- counter:		See ../counter/stm32-lptimer-cnt.txt
 - trigger:		See ../iio/timer/stm32-lptimer-trigger.txt
 
 Example:
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/stm32-timers.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/stm32-timers.txt
index 0e900b52e895..15c3b87f51d9 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/stm32-timers.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/stm32-timers.txt
@@ -28,6 +28,7 @@ Optional parameters:
 Optional subnodes:
 - pwm:			See ../pwm/pwm-stm32.txt
 - timer:		See ../iio/timer/stm32-timer-trigger.txt
+- counter:		See ../counter/stm32-timer-cnt.txt
 
 Example:
 	timers@40010000 {
@@ -48,6 +49,12 @@ Example:
 			compatible = "st,stm32-timer-trigger";
 			reg = <0>;
 		};
+
+		counter {
+			compatible = "st,stm32-timer-counter";
+			pinctrl-names = "default";
+			pinctrl-0 = <&tim1_in_pins>;
+		};
 	};
 
 Example with all dmas:
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/stmfx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/stmfx.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f0c2f7fcf5c7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/stmfx.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+STMicroelectonics Multi-Function eXpander (STMFX) Core bindings
+
+ST Multi-Function eXpander (STMFX) is a slave controller using I2C for
+communication with the main MCU. Its main features are GPIO expansion, main
+MCU IDD measurement (IDD is the amount of current that flows through VDD) and
+resistive touchscreen controller.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: should be "st,stmfx-0300".
+- reg: I2C slave address of the device.
+- interrupts: interrupt specifier triggered by MFX_IRQ_OUT signal.
+  Please refer to ../interrupt-controller/interrupt.txt
+
+Optional properties:
+- drive-open-drain: configure MFX_IRQ_OUT as open drain.
+- vdd-supply: phandle of the regulator supplying STMFX.
+
+Example:
+
+	stmfx: stmfx@42 {
+		compatible = "st,stmfx-0300";
+		reg = <0x42>;
+		interrupts = <8 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&gpioi>;
+		vdd-supply = <&v3v3>;
+	};
+
+Please refer to ../pinctrl/pinctrl-stmfx.txt for STMFX GPIO expander function bindings.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/stmpe.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/stmpe.txt
index c797c05cd3c2..d4408a417193 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/stmpe.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/stmpe.txt
@@ -4,15 +4,29 @@ STMPE is an MFD device which may expose the following inbuilt devices: gpio,
 keypad, touchscreen, adc, pwm, rotator.
 
 Required properties:
- - compatible                   : "st,stmpe[610|801|811|1600|1601|2401|2403]"
- - reg                          : I2C/SPI address of the device
+ - compatible			: "st,stmpe[610|801|811|1600|1601|2401|2403]"
+ - reg				: I2C/SPI address of the device
 
 Optional properties:
- - interrupts                   : The interrupt outputs from the controller
- - interrupt-controller         : Marks the device node as an interrupt controller
- - wakeup-source                : Marks the input device as wakable
- - st,autosleep-timeout         : Valid entries (ms); 4, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512 and 1024
- - irq-gpio                     : If present, which GPIO to use for event IRQ
+ - interrupts			: The interrupt outputs from the controller
+ - interrupt-controller		: Marks the device node as an interrupt controller
+ - wakeup-source		: Marks the input device as wakable
+ - st,autosleep-timeout		: Valid entries (ms); 4, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512 and 1024
+ - irq-gpio			: If present, which GPIO to use for event IRQ
+
+Optional properties for devices with touch and ADC (STMPE811|STMPE610):
+ - st,sample-time		: ADC conversion time in number of clock.
+					0 -> 36 clocks		4 -> 80 clocks (recommended)
+					1 -> 44 clocks		5 -> 96 clocks
+					2 -> 56 clocks		6 -> 124 clocks
+					3 -> 64 clocks
+ - st,mod-12b			: ADC Bit mode
+					0 -> 10bit ADC		1 -> 12bit ADC
+ - st,ref-sel			: ADC reference source
+					0 -> internal		1 -> external
+ - st,adc-freq			: ADC Clock speed
+					0 -> 1.625 MHz		2 || 3 -> 6.5 MHz
+					1 -> 3.25 MHz
 
 Example:
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/ti-lmu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/ti-lmu.txt
index c885cf89b8ce..86ca786d54fc 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/ti-lmu.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/ti-lmu.txt
@@ -4,7 +4,6 @@ TI LMU driver supports lighting devices below.
 
    Name                  Child nodes
   ------      ---------------------------------
-  LM3532       Backlight
   LM3631       Backlight and regulator
   LM3632       Backlight and regulator
   LM3633       Backlight, LED and fault monitor
@@ -13,7 +12,6 @@ TI LMU driver supports lighting devices below.
 
 Required properties:
   - compatible: Should be one of:
-                "ti,lm3532"
                 "ti,lm3631"
                 "ti,lm3632"
                 "ti,lm3633"
@@ -23,7 +21,6 @@ Required properties:
          0x11 for LM3632
          0x29 for LM3631
          0x36 for LM3633, LM3697
-         0x38 for LM3532
          0x63 for LM3695
 
 Optional property:
@@ -47,23 +44,6 @@ Optional nodes:
 [2] ../leds/leds-lm3633.txt
 [3] ../regulator/lm363x-regulator.txt
 
-lm3532@38 {
-	compatible = "ti,lm3532";
-	reg = <0x38>;
-
-	enable-gpios = <&pioC 2 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>;
-
-	backlight {
-		compatible = "ti,lm3532-backlight";
-
-		lcd {
-			led-sources = <0 1 2>;
-			ramp-up-msec = <30>;
-			ramp-down-msec = <0>;
-		};
-	};
-};
-
 lm3631@29 {
 	compatible = "ti,lm3631";
 	reg = <0x29>;
@@ -124,8 +104,8 @@ lm3632@11 {
 	regulators {
 		compatible = "ti,lm363x-regulator";
 
-		ti,lcm-en1-gpio = <&pioC 0 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; /* PC0 */
-		ti,lcm-en2-gpio = <&pioC 1 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; /* PC1 */
+		enable-gpios = <&pioC 0 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>,
+			       <&pioC 1 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>;
 
 		vboost {
 			regulator-name = "lcd_boost";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/lantiq/rcu-gphy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/lantiq/rcu-gphy.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index a0c19bd1ce66..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/lantiq/rcu-gphy.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,36 +0,0 @@
-Lantiq XWAY SoC GPHY binding
-============================
-
-This binding describes a software-defined ethernet PHY, provided by the RCU
-module on newer Lantiq XWAY SoCs (xRX200 and newer).
-
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Required properties:
-- compatible		: Should be one of
-				"lantiq,xrx200a1x-gphy"
-				"lantiq,xrx200a2x-gphy"
-				"lantiq,xrx300-gphy"
-				"lantiq,xrx330-gphy"
-- reg			: Addrress of the GPHY FW load address register
-- resets		: Must reference the RCU GPHY reset bit
-- reset-names		: One entry, value must be "gphy" or optional "gphy2"
-- clocks		: A reference to the (PMU) GPHY clock gate
-
-Optional properties:
-- lantiq,gphy-mode	: GPHY_MODE_GE (default) or GPHY_MODE_FE as defined in
-			  <dt-bindings/mips/lantiq_xway_gphy.h>
-
-
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Example for the GPHys on the xRX200 SoCs:
-
-#include <dt-bindings/mips/lantiq_rcu_gphy.h>
-	gphy0: gphy@20 {
-		compatible = "lantiq,xrx200a2x-gphy";
-		reg = <0x20 0x4>;
-
-		resets = <&reset0 31 30>, <&reset1 7 7>;
-		reset-names = "gphy", "gphy2";
-		clocks = <&pmu0 XRX200_PMU_GATE_GPHY>;
-		lantiq,gphy-mode = <GPHY_MODE_GE>;
-	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/lantiq/rcu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/lantiq/rcu.txt
index 7f0822b4beae..58d51f480c9e 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/lantiq/rcu.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/lantiq/rcu.txt
@@ -26,24 +26,6 @@ Example of the RCU bindings on a xRX200 SoC:
 		ranges = <0x0 0x203000 0x100>;
 		big-endian;
 
-		gphy0: gphy@20 {
-			compatible = "lantiq,xrx200a2x-gphy";
-			reg = <0x20 0x4>;
-
-			resets = <&reset0 31 30>, <&reset1 7 7>;
-			reset-names = "gphy", "gphy2";
-			lantiq,gphy-mode = <GPHY_MODE_GE>;
-		};
-
-		gphy1: gphy@68 {
-			compatible = "lantiq,xrx200a2x-gphy";
-			reg = <0x68 0x4>;
-
-			resets = <&reset0 29 28>, <&reset1 6 6>;
-			reset-names = "gphy", "gphy2";
-			lantiq,gphy-mode = <GPHY_MODE_GE>;
-		};
-
 		reset0: reset-controller@10 {
 			compatible = "lantiq,xrx200-reset";
 			reg = <0x10 4>, <0x14 4>;
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/aspeed-p2a-ctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/aspeed-p2a-ctrl.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..854bd67ffec6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/aspeed-p2a-ctrl.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+======================================================================
+Device tree bindings for Aspeed AST2400/AST2500 PCI-to-AHB Bridge Control Driver
+======================================================================
+
+The bridge is available on platforms with the VGA enabled on the Aspeed device.
+In this case, the host has access to a 64KiB window into all of the BMC's
+memory.  The BMC can disable this bridge.  If the bridge is enabled, the host
+has read access to all the regions of memory, however the host only has read
+and write access depending on a register controlled by the BMC.
+
+Required properties:
+===================
+
+ - compatible: must be one of:
+	- "aspeed,ast2400-p2a-ctrl"
+	- "aspeed,ast2500-p2a-ctrl"
+
+Optional properties:
+===================
+
+- memory-region: A phandle to a reserved_memory region to be used for the PCI
+		to AHB mapping
+
+The p2a-control node should be the child of a syscon node with the required
+property:
+
+- compatible : Should be one of the following:
+		"aspeed,ast2400-scu", "syscon", "simple-mfd"
+		"aspeed,g4-scu", "syscon", "simple-mfd"
+		"aspeed,ast2500-scu", "syscon", "simple-mfd"
+		"aspeed,g5-scu", "syscon", "simple-mfd"
+
+Example
+===================
+
+g4 Example
+----------
+
+syscon: scu@1e6e2000 {
+	compatible = "aspeed,ast2400-scu", "syscon", "simple-mfd";
+	reg = <0x1e6e2000 0x1a8>;
+
+	p2a: p2a-control {
+		compatible = "aspeed,ast2400-p2a-ctrl";
+		memory-region = <&reserved_memory>;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/intel,ixp4xx-queue-manager.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/intel,ixp4xx-queue-manager.yaml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d2313b1d9405
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/intel,ixp4xx-queue-manager.yaml
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+# SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0 OR BSD-2-Clause)
+# Copyright 2019 Linaro Ltd.
+%YAML 1.2
+---
+$id: "http://devicetree.org/schemas/misc/intel-ixp4xx-ahb-queue-manager.yaml#"
+$schema: "http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml#"
+
+title: Intel IXP4xx AHB Queue Manager
+
+maintainers:
+  - Linus Walleij <linus.walleij@linaro.org>
+
+description: |
+  The IXP4xx AHB Queue Manager maintains queues as circular buffers in
+  an 8KB embedded SRAM along with hardware pointers. It is used by both
+  the XScale processor and the NPEs (Network Processing Units) in the
+  IXP4xx for accelerating queues, especially for networking. Clients pick
+  queues from the queue manager with foo-queue = <&qmgr N> where the
+  &qmgr is a phandle to the queue manager and N is the queue resource
+  number. The queue resources available and their specific purpose
+  on a certain IXP4xx system will vary.
+
+properties:
+  compatible:
+    items:
+      - const: intel,ixp4xx-ahb-queue-manager
+
+  reg:
+    maxItems: 1
+
+  interrupts:
+    items:
+      - description: Interrupt for queues 0-31
+      - description: Interrupt for queues 32-63
+
+required:
+  - compatible
+  - reg
+  - interrupts
+
+examples:
+  - |
+    #include <dt-bindings/interrupt-controller/irq.h>
+
+    qmgr: queue-manager@60000000 {
+         compatible = "intel,ixp4xx-ahb-queue-manager";
+         reg = <0x60000000 0x4000>;
+         interrupts = <3 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, <4 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
+    };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/qcom,fastrpc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/qcom,fastrpc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2a1827ab50d2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/qcom,fastrpc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+Qualcomm Technologies, Inc. FastRPC Driver
+
+The FastRPC implements an IPC (Inter-Processor Communication)
+mechanism that allows for clients to transparently make remote method
+invocations across DSP and APPS boundaries. This enables developers
+to offload tasks to the DSP and free up the application processor for
+other tasks.
+
+- compatible:
+	Usage: required
+	Value type: <stringlist>
+	Definition: must be "qcom,fastrpc"
+
+- label
+	Usage: required
+	Value type: <string>
+	Definition: should specify the dsp domain name this fastrpc
+	corresponds to. must be one of this: "adsp", "mdsp", "sdsp", "cdsp"
+
+- #address-cells
+	Usage: required
+	Value type: <u32>
+	Definition: Must be 1
+
+- #size-cells
+	Usage: required
+	Value type: <u32>
+	Definition: Must be 0
+
+= COMPUTE BANKS
+Each subnode of the Fastrpc represents compute context banks available
+on the dsp.
+- All Compute context banks MUST contain the following properties:
+
+- compatible:
+	Usage: required
+	Value type: <stringlist>
+	Definition: must be "qcom,fastrpc-compute-cb"
+
+- reg
+	Usage: required
+	Value type: <u32>
+	Definition: Context Bank ID.
+
+- qcom,nsessions:
+	Usage: Optional
+	Value type: <u32>
+	Defination: A value indicating how many sessions can share this
+		    context bank. Defaults to 1 when this property
+		    is not specified.
+
+Example:
+
+adsp-pil {
+	compatible = "qcom,msm8996-adsp-pil";
+	...
+	smd-edge {
+		label = "lpass";
+		fastrpc {
+			compatible = "qcom,fastrpc";
+			qcom,smd-channels = "fastrpcsmd-apps-dsp";
+			label = "adsp";
+			#address-cells = <1>;
+			#size-cells = <0>;
+
+			cb@1 {
+				compatible = "qcom,fastrpc-compute-cb";
+				reg = <1>;
+			};
+
+			cb@2 {
+				compatible = "qcom,fastrpc-compute-cb";
+				reg = <2>;
+			};
+			...
+		};
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-esdhc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-esdhc.txt
index 99c5cf8507e8..edb8cadb9541 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-esdhc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-esdhc.txt
@@ -17,6 +17,7 @@ Required properties:
 	"fsl,t4240-esdhc"
     Possible compatibles for ARM:
 	"fsl,ls1012a-esdhc"
+	"fsl,ls1028a-esdhc"
 	"fsl,ls1088a-esdhc"
 	"fsl,ls1043a-esdhc"
 	"fsl,ls1046a-esdhc"
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-imx-esdhc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-imx-esdhc.txt
index 9201a7d8d7b0..f707b8bee304 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-imx-esdhc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-imx-esdhc.txt
@@ -15,7 +15,9 @@ Required properties:
 	       "fsl,imx6q-usdhc"
 	       "fsl,imx6sl-usdhc"
 	       "fsl,imx6sx-usdhc"
+	       "fsl,imx6ull-usdhc"
 	       "fsl,imx7d-usdhc"
+	       "fsl,imx7ulp-usdhc"
 	       "fsl,imx8qxp-usdhc"
 
 Optional properties:
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/k3-dw-mshc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/k3-dw-mshc.txt
index 07242d141773..36c4bea675d5 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/k3-dw-mshc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/k3-dw-mshc.txt
@@ -13,6 +13,8 @@ Required Properties:
 
 * compatible: should be one of the following.
   - "hisilicon,hi3660-dw-mshc": for controllers with hi3660 specific extensions.
+  - "hisilicon,hi3670-dw-mshc", "hisilicon,hi3660-dw-mshc": for controllers
+     with hi3670 specific extensions.
   - "hisilicon,hi4511-dw-mshc": for controllers with hi4511 specific extensions.
   - "hisilicon,hi6220-dw-mshc": for controllers with hi6220 specific extensions.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmc.txt
index f5a0923b34ca..c269dbe384fe 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmc.txt
@@ -62,6 +62,10 @@ Optional properties:
   be referred to mmc-pwrseq-simple.txt. But now it's reused as a tunable delay
   waiting for I/O signalling and card power supply to be stable, regardless of
   whether pwrseq-simple is used. Default to 10ms if no available.
+- supports-cqe : The presence of this property indicates that the corresponding
+  MMC host controller supports HW command queue feature.
+- disable-cqe-dcmd: This property indicates that the MMC controller's command
+  queue engine (CQE) does not support direct commands (DCMDs).
 
 *NOTE* on CD and WP polarity. To use common for all SD/MMC host controllers line
 polarity properties, we have to fix the meaning of the "normal" and "inverted"
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mtk-sd.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mtk-sd.txt
index f5bcda3980cc..8a532f4453f2 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mtk-sd.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mtk-sd.txt
@@ -11,10 +11,12 @@ Required properties:
 	"mediatek,mt8135-mmc": for mmc host ip compatible with mt8135
 	"mediatek,mt8173-mmc": for mmc host ip compatible with mt8173
 	"mediatek,mt8183-mmc": for mmc host ip compatible with mt8183
+	"mediatek,mt8516-mmc": for mmc host ip compatible with mt8516
 	"mediatek,mt2701-mmc": for mmc host ip compatible with mt2701
 	"mediatek,mt2712-mmc": for mmc host ip compatible with mt2712
 	"mediatek,mt7622-mmc": for MT7622 SoC
 	"mediatek,mt7623-mmc", "mediatek,mt2701-mmc": for MT7623 SoC
+	"mediatek,mt7620-mmc", for MT7621 SoC (and others)
 
 - reg: physical base address of the controller and length
 - interrupts: Should contain MSDC interrupt number
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/nvidia,tegra20-sdhci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/nvidia,tegra20-sdhci.txt
index 32b4b4e41923..2cf3affa1be7 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/nvidia,tegra20-sdhci.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/nvidia,tegra20-sdhci.txt
@@ -14,6 +14,7 @@ Required properties:
   - "nvidia,tegra124-sdhci": for Tegra124 and Tegra132
   - "nvidia,tegra210-sdhci": for Tegra210
   - "nvidia,tegra186-sdhci": for Tegra186
+  - "nvidia,tegra194-sdhci": for Tegra194
 - clocks : Must contain one entry, for the module clock.
   See ../clocks/clock-bindings.txt for details.
 - resets : Must contain an entry for each entry in reset-names.
@@ -39,12 +40,16 @@ sdhci@c8000200 {
 	bus-width = <8>;
 };
 
-Optional properties for Tegra210 and Tegra186:
+Optional properties for Tegra210, Tegra186 and Tegra194:
 - pinctrl-names, pinctrl-0, pinctrl-1 : Specify pad voltage
   configurations. Valid pinctrl-names are "sdmmc-3v3" and "sdmmc-1v8"
   for controllers supporting multiple voltage levels. The order of names
   should correspond to the pin configuration states in pinctrl-0 and
   pinctrl-1.
+- pinctrl-names : "sdmmc-3v3-drv" and "sdmmc-1v8-drv" are applicable for
+  Tegra210 where pad config registers are in the pinmux register domain
+  for pull-up-strength and pull-down-strength values configuration when
+  using pads at 3V3 and 1V8 levels.
 - nvidia,only-1-8-v : The presence of this property indicates that the
   controller operates at a 1.8 V fixed I/O voltage.
 - nvidia,pad-autocal-pull-up-offset-3v3,
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/ti-omap.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/ti-omap.txt
index 8de579969763..02fd31cf361d 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/ti-omap.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/ti-omap.txt
@@ -24,31 +24,3 @@ Examples:
 		dmas = <&sdma 61 &sdma 62>;
 		dma-names = "tx", "rx";
 	};
-
-* TI MMC host controller for OMAP1 and 2420
-
-The MMC Host Controller on TI OMAP1 and 2420 family provides
-an interface for MMC, SD, and SDIO types of memory cards.
-
-This file documents differences between the core properties described
-by mmc.txt and the properties used by the omap mmc driver.
-
-Note that this driver will not work with omap2430 or later omaps,
-please see the omap hsmmc driver for the current omaps.
-
-Required properties:
-- compatible: Must be "ti,omap2420-mmc", for OMAP2420 controllers
-- ti,hwmods: For 2420, must be "msdi<n>", where n is controller
-  instance starting 1
-
-Examples:
-
-	msdi1: mmc@4809c000 {
-		compatible = "ti,omap2420-mmc";
-		ti,hwmods = "msdi1";
-		reg = <0x4809c000 0x80>;
-		interrupts = <83>;
-		dmas = <&sdma 61 &sdma 62>;
-		dma-names = "tx", "rx";
-	};
-
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/allwinner,sun4i-a10-nand.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/allwinner,sun4i-a10-nand.yaml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..fbd4da3684fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/allwinner,sun4i-a10-nand.yaml
@@ -0,0 +1,97 @@
+# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+%YAML 1.2
+---
+$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/mtd/allwinner,sun4i-a10-nand.yaml#
+$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml#
+
+title: Allwinner A10 NAND Controller Device Tree Bindings
+
+allOf:
+  - $ref: "nand-controller.yaml"
+
+maintainers:
+  - Chen-Yu Tsai <wens@csie.org>
+  - Maxime Ripard <maxime.ripard@bootlin.com>
+
+properties:
+  "#address-cells": true
+  "#size-cells": true
+
+  compatible:
+    enum:
+      - allwinner,sun4i-a10-nand
+      - allwinner,sun8i-a23-nand-controller
+  reg:
+    maxItems: 1
+
+  interrupts:
+    maxItems: 1
+
+  clocks:
+    items:
+      - description: Bus Clock
+      - description: Module Clock
+
+  clock-names:
+    items:
+      - const: ahb
+      - const: mod
+
+  resets:
+    maxItems: 1
+
+  reset-names:
+    const: ahb
+
+  dmas:
+    maxItems: 1
+
+  dma-names:
+    const: rxtx
+
+  pinctrl-names: true
+
+patternProperties:
+  "^pinctrl-[0-9]+$": true
+
+  "^nand@[a-f0-9]+$":
+    properties:
+      reg:
+        maxItems: 1
+        minimum: 0
+        maximum: 7
+
+      nand-ecc-mode: true
+
+      nand-ecc-algo:
+        const: bch
+
+      nand-ecc-step-size:
+        enum: [ 512, 1024 ]
+
+      nand-ecc-strength:
+        maximum: 80
+
+      allwinner,rb:
+        description:
+          Contains the native Ready/Busy IDs.
+        allOf:
+          - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32-array
+          - minItems: 1
+            maxItems: 2
+            items:
+              minimum: 0
+              maximum: 1
+
+    additionalProperties: false
+
+required:
+  - compatible
+  - reg
+  - interrupts
+  - clocks
+  - clock-names
+
+additionalProperties: false
+
+...
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/amlogic,meson-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/amlogic,meson-nand.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5794ab1147c1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/amlogic,meson-nand.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+Amlogic NAND Flash Controller (NFC) for GXBB/GXL/AXG family SoCs
+
+This file documents the properties in addition to those available in
+the MTD NAND bindings.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : contains one of:
+  - "amlogic,meson-gxl-nfc"
+  - "amlogic,meson-axg-nfc"
+- clocks     :
+	A list of phandle + clock-specifier pairs for the clocks listed
+	in clock-names.
+
+- clock-names: Should contain the following:
+	"core" - NFC module gate clock
+	"device" - device clock from eMMC sub clock controller
+	"rx" - rx clock phase
+	"tx" - tx clock phase
+
+- amlogic,mmc-syscon	: Required for NAND clocks, it's shared with SD/eMMC
+				controller port C
+
+Optional children nodes:
+Children nodes represent the available nand chips.
+
+Other properties:
+see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/nand-controller.yaml for generic bindings.
+
+Example demonstrate on AXG SoC:
+
+	sd_emmc_c_clkc: mmc@7000 {
+		compatible = "amlogic,meson-axg-mmc-clkc", "syscon";
+		reg = <0x0 0x7000 0x0 0x800>;
+	};
+
+	nand-controller@7800 {
+		compatible = "amlogic,meson-axg-nfc";
+		reg = <0x0 0x7800 0x0 0x100>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+		interrupts = <GIC_SPI 34 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING>;
+
+		clocks = <&clkc CLKID_SD_EMMC_C>,
+			<&sd_emmc_c_clkc CLKID_MMC_DIV>,
+			<&sd_emmc_c_clkc CLKID_MMC_PHASE_RX>,
+			<&sd_emmc_c_clkc CLKID_MMC_PHASE_TX>;
+		clock-names = "core", "device", "rx", "tx";
+		amlogic,mmc-syscon = <&sd_emmc_c_clkc>;
+
+		pinctrl-names = "default";
+		pinctrl-0 = <&nand_pins>;
+
+		nand@0 {
+			reg = <0>;
+			#address-cells = <1>;
+			#size-cells = <1>;
+
+			nand-on-flash-bbt;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/atmel-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/atmel-nand.txt
index 9bb66e476672..68b51dc58816 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/atmel-nand.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/atmel-nand.txt
@@ -14,6 +14,7 @@ Required properties:
 	"atmel,at91sam9261-nand-controller"
 	"atmel,at91sam9g45-nand-controller"
 	"atmel,sama5d3-nand-controller"
+	"microchip,sam9x60-nand-controller"
 - ranges: empty ranges property to forward EBI ranges definitions.
 - #address-cells: should be set to 2.
 - #size-cells: should be set to 1.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/brcm,brcmnand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/brcm,brcmnand.txt
index bcda1dfc4bac..0b7c3738b66c 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/brcm,brcmnand.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/brcm,brcmnand.txt
@@ -101,12 +101,12 @@ Required properties:
                               number (e.g., 0, 1, 2, etc.)
 - #address-cells            : see partition.txt
 - #size-cells               : see partition.txt
-- nand-ecc-strength         : see nand.txt
-- nand-ecc-step-size        : must be 512 or 1024. See nand.txt
+- nand-ecc-strength         : see nand-controller.yaml
+- nand-ecc-step-size        : must be 512 or 1024. See nand-controller.yaml
 
 Optional properties:
 - nand-on-flash-bbt         : boolean, to enable the on-flash BBT for this
-                              chip-select. See nand.txt
+                              chip-select. See nand-controller.yaml
 - brcm,nand-oob-sector-size : integer, to denote the spare area sector size
                               expected for the ECC layout in use. This size, in
                               addition to the strength and step-size,
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/cadence-quadspi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/cadence-quadspi.txt
index bb2075df9b38..4345c3a6f530 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/cadence-quadspi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/cadence-quadspi.txt
@@ -4,6 +4,7 @@ Required properties:
 - compatible : should be one of the following:
 	Generic default - "cdns,qspi-nor".
 	For TI 66AK2G SoC - "ti,k2g-qspi", "cdns,qspi-nor".
+	For TI AM654 SoC  - "ti,am654-ospi", "cdns,qspi-nor".
 - reg : Contains two entries, each of which is a tuple consisting of a
 	physical address and length. The first entry is the address and
 	length of the controller register set. The second entry is the
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/denali-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/denali-nand.txt
index f33da8782741..b32aed1db46d 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/denali-nand.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/denali-nand.txt
@@ -7,34 +7,48 @@ Required properties:
       "socionext,uniphier-denali-nand-v5b"  - for Socionext UniPhier (v5b)
   - reg : should contain registers location and length for data and reg.
   - reg-names: Should contain the reg names "nand_data" and "denali_reg"
+  - #address-cells: should be 1. The cell encodes the chip select connection.
+  - #size-cells : should be 0.
   - interrupts : The interrupt number.
   - clocks: should contain phandle of the controller core clock, the bus
     interface clock, and the ECC circuit clock.
   - clock-names: should contain "nand", "nand_x", "ecc"
 
-Optional properties:
-  - nand-ecc-step-size: see nand.txt for details.  If present, the value must be
-      512        for "altr,socfpga-denali-nand"
-      1024       for "socionext,uniphier-denali-nand-v5a"
-      1024       for "socionext,uniphier-denali-nand-v5b"
-  - nand-ecc-strength: see nand.txt for details.  Valid values are:
-      8, 15      for "altr,socfpga-denali-nand"
-      8, 16, 24  for "socionext,uniphier-denali-nand-v5a"
-      8, 16      for "socionext,uniphier-denali-nand-v5b"
-  - nand-ecc-maximize: see nand.txt for details
-
-The device tree may optionally contain sub-nodes describing partitions of the
+Sub-nodes:
+  Sub-nodes represent available NAND chips.
+
+  Required properties:
+    - reg: should contain the bank ID of the controller to which each chip
+      select is connected.
+
+  Optional properties:
+    - nand-ecc-step-size: see nand-controller.yaml for details.
+      If present, the value must be
+        512        for "altr,socfpga-denali-nand"
+        1024       for "socionext,uniphier-denali-nand-v5a"
+        1024       for "socionext,uniphier-denali-nand-v5b"
+    - nand-ecc-strength: see nand-controller.yaml for details. Valid values are:
+        8, 15      for "altr,socfpga-denali-nand"
+        8, 16, 24  for "socionext,uniphier-denali-nand-v5a"
+        8, 16      for "socionext,uniphier-denali-nand-v5b"
+    - nand-ecc-maximize: see nand-controller.yaml for details
+
+The chip nodes may optionally contain sub-nodes describing partitions of the
 address space. See partition.txt for more detail.
 
 Examples:
 
 nand: nand@ff900000 {
 	#address-cells = <1>;
-	#size-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
 	compatible = "altr,socfpga-denali-nand";
 	reg = <0xff900000 0x20>, <0xffb80000 0x1000>;
 	reg-names = "nand_data", "denali_reg";
 	clocks = <&nand_clk>, <&nand_x_clk>, <&nand_ecc_clk>;
 	clock-names = "nand", "nand_x", "ecc";
 	interrupts = <0 144 4>;
+
+	nand@0 {
+		reg = <0>;
+	}
 };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/fsmc-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/fsmc-nand.txt
index 32636eb77304..6762d3c4d5a4 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/fsmc-nand.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/fsmc-nand.txt
@@ -30,9 +30,9 @@ Optional properties:
                  command is asserted. Zero means one cycle, 255 means 256
                  cycles.
 - bank: default NAND bank to use (0-3 are valid, 0 is the default).
-- nand-ecc-mode      : see nand.txt
-- nand-ecc-strength  : see nand.txt
-- nand-ecc-step-size : see nand.txt
+- nand-ecc-mode      : see nand-controller.yaml
+- nand-ecc-strength  : see nand-controller.yaml
+- nand-ecc-step-size : see nand-controller.yaml
 
 Can support 1-bit HW ECC (default) or if stronger correction is required,
 software-based BCH.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmc-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmc-nand.txt
index c059ab74ed88..44919d48d241 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmc-nand.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmc-nand.txt
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ explained in a separate documents - please refer to
 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/omap-gpmc.txt
 
 For NAND specific properties such as ECC modes or bus width, please refer to
-Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/nand.txt
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/nand-controller.yaml
 
 
 Required properties:
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/hisi504-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/hisi504-nand.txt
index 2e35f0662912..8963983ae7cb 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/hisi504-nand.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/hisi504-nand.txt
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ Required properties:
                        NAND controller's registers. The second contains base
                        physical address and size of NAND controller's buffer.
 - interrupts:          Interrupt number for nfc.
-- nand-bus-width:      See nand.txt.
+- nand-bus-width:      See nand-controller.yaml.
 - nand-ecc-mode:       Support none and hw ecc mode.
 - #address-cells:      Partition address, should be set 1.
 - #size-cells:         Partition size, should be set 1.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/ingenic,jz4780-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/ingenic,jz4780-nand.txt
index 29ea5853ca91..c02259353327 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/ingenic,jz4780-nand.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/ingenic,jz4780-nand.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-* Ingenic JZ4780 NAND/BCH
+* Ingenic JZ4780 NAND/ECC
 
 This file documents the device tree bindings for NAND flash devices on the
 JZ4780. NAND devices are connected to the NEMC controller (described in
@@ -6,15 +6,18 @@ memory-controllers/ingenic,jz4780-nemc.txt), and thus NAND device nodes must
 be children of the NEMC node.
 
 Required NAND controller device properties:
-- compatible: Should be set to "ingenic,jz4780-nand".
+- compatible: Should be one of:
+  * ingenic,jz4740-nand
+  * ingenic,jz4725b-nand
+  * ingenic,jz4780-nand
 - reg: For each bank with a NAND chip attached, should specify a bank number,
   an offset of 0 and a size of 0x1000000 (i.e. the whole NEMC bank).
 
 Optional NAND controller device properties:
-- ingenic,bch-controller: To make use of the hardware BCH controller, this
-  property must contain a phandle for the BCH controller node. The required
+- ecc-engine: To make use of the hardware ECC controller, this
+  property must contain a phandle for the ECC controller node. The required
   properties for this node are described below. If this is not specified,
-  software BCH will be used instead.
+  software ECC will be used instead.
 
 Optional children nodes:
 - Individual NAND chips are children of the NAND controller node.
@@ -45,7 +48,7 @@ nemc: nemc@13410000 {
 		#address-cells = <1>;
 		#size-cells = <0>;
 
-		ingenic,bch-controller = <&bch>;
+		ecc-engine = <&bch>;
 
 		nand@1 {
 			reg = <1>;
@@ -67,14 +70,17 @@ nemc: nemc@13410000 {
 	};
 };
 
-The BCH controller is a separate SoC component used for error correction on
+The ECC controller is a separate SoC component used for error correction on
 NAND devices. The following is a description of the device properties for a
-BCH controller.
-
-Required BCH properties:
-- compatible: Should be set to "ingenic,jz4780-bch".
-- reg: Should specify the BCH controller registers location and length.
-- clocks: Clock for the BCH controller.
+ECC controller.
+
+Required ECC properties:
+- compatible: Should be one of:
+  * ingenic,jz4740-ecc
+  * ingenic,jz4725b-bch
+  * ingenic,jz4780-bch
+- reg: Should specify the ECC controller registers location and length.
+- clocks: Clock for the ECC controller.
 
 Example:
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/marvell-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/marvell-nand.txt
index e0c790706b9b..a2d9a0f2b683 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/marvell-nand.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/marvell-nand.txt
@@ -36,29 +36,29 @@ Children nodes represent the available NAND chips.
 
 Required properties:
 - reg: shall contain the native Chip Select ids (0-3).
-- nand-rb: see nand.txt (0-1).
+- nand-rb: see nand-controller.yaml (0-1).
 
 Optional properties:
 - marvell,nand-keep-config: orders the driver not to take the timings
   from the core and leaving them completely untouched. Bootloader
   timings will then be used.
 - label: MTD name.
-- nand-on-flash-bbt: see nand.txt.
-- nand-ecc-mode: see nand.txt. Will use hardware ECC if not specified.
-- nand-ecc-algo: see nand.txt. This property is essentially useful when
+- nand-on-flash-bbt: see nand-controller.yaml.
+- nand-ecc-mode: see nand-controller.yaml. Will use hardware ECC if not specified.
+- nand-ecc-algo: see nand-controller.yaml. This property is essentially useful when
   not using hardware ECC. Howerver, it may be added when using hardware
   ECC for clarification but will be ignored by the driver because ECC
   mode is chosen depending on the page size and the strength required by
   the NAND chip. This value may be overwritten with nand-ecc-strength
   property.
-- nand-ecc-strength: see nand.txt.
-- nand-ecc-step-size: see nand.txt. Marvell's NAND flash controller does
+- nand-ecc-strength: see nand-controller.yaml.
+- nand-ecc-step-size: see nand-controller.yaml. Marvell's NAND flash controller does
   use fixed strength (1-bit for Hamming, 16-bit for BCH), so the actual
   step size will shrink or grow in order to fit the required strength.
   Step sizes are not completely random for all and follow certain
   patterns described in AN-379, "Marvell SoC NFC ECC".
 
-See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/nand.txt for more details on
+See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/nand-controller.yaml for more details on
 generic bindings.
 
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/mtd-physmap.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/mtd-physmap.txt
index 7df0dcaccb7d..c69f4f065d23 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/mtd-physmap.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/mtd-physmap.txt
@@ -96,3 +96,19 @@ An example using SRAM:
 		bank-width = <2>;
 	};
 
+An example using gpio-addrs
+
+	flash@20000000 {
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+		compatible = "cfi-flash", "jedec-flash";
+		reg = <0x20000000 0x02000000>;
+		ranges = <0 0x00000000 0x02000000
+		          1 0x02000000 0x02000000>;
+		bank-width = <2>;
+		addr-gpios = <&gpio1 2 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>;
+		partition@0 {
+			label = "test-part1";
+			reg = <0 0x04000000>;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/mtk-quadspi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/mtk-quadspi.txt
index 56d3668e2c50..a12e3b5c495d 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/mtk-quadspi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/mtk-quadspi.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-* Serial NOR flash controller for MTK MT81xx (and similar)
+* Serial NOR flash controller for MediaTek SoCs
 
 Required properties:
 - compatible: 	  For mt8173, compatible should be "mediatek,mt8173-nor",
@@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ Required properties:
 		  "mediatek,mt2712-nor", "mediatek,mt8173-nor"
 		  "mediatek,mt7622-nor", "mediatek,mt8173-nor"
 		  "mediatek,mt7623-nor", "mediatek,mt8173-nor"
+		  "mediatek,mt7629-nor", "mediatek,mt8173-nor"
 		  "mediatek,mt8173-nor"
 - reg: 		  physical base address and length of the controller's register
 - clocks: 	  the phandle of the clocks needed by the nor controller
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/mxc-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/mxc-nand.txt
index b5833d11c7be..2857c628fba4 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/mxc-nand.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/mxc-nand.txt
@@ -4,9 +4,9 @@ Required properties:
 - compatible: "fsl,imxXX-nand"
 - reg: address range of the nfc block
 - interrupts: irq to be used
-- nand-bus-width: see nand.txt
-- nand-ecc-mode: see nand.txt
-- nand-on-flash-bbt: see nand.txt
+- nand-bus-width: see nand-controller.yaml
+- nand-ecc-mode: see nand-controller.yaml
+- nand-on-flash-bbt: see nand-controller.yaml
 
 Example:
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/nand-controller.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/nand-controller.yaml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..199ba5ac2a06
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/nand-controller.yaml
@@ -0,0 +1,143 @@
+# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+%YAML 1.2
+---
+$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/mtd/nand-controller.yaml#
+$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml#
+
+title: NAND Chip and NAND Controller Generic Binding
+
+maintainers:
+  - Miquel Raynal <miquel.raynal@bootlin.com>
+  - Richard Weinberger <richard@nod.at>
+
+description: |
+  The NAND controller should be represented with its own DT node, and
+  all NAND chips attached to this controller should be defined as
+  children nodes of the NAND controller. This representation should be
+  enforced even for simple controllers supporting only one chip.
+
+  The ECC strength and ECC step size properties define the user
+  desires in terms of correction capability of a controller. Together,
+  they request the ECC engine to correct {strength} bit errors per
+  {size} bytes.
+
+  The interpretation of these parameters is implementation-defined, so
+  not all implementations must support all possible
+  combinations. However, implementations are encouraged to further
+  specify the value(s) they support.
+
+properties:
+  $nodename:
+    pattern: "^nand-controller(@.*)?"
+
+  "#address-cells":
+    const: 1
+
+  "#size-cells":
+    const: 0
+
+  ranges: true
+
+patternProperties:
+  "^nand@[a-f0-9]$":
+    properties:
+      reg:
+        description:
+          Contains the native Ready/Busy IDs.
+
+      nand-ecc-mode:
+        allOf:
+          - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/string
+          - enum: [ none, soft, hw, hw_syndrome, hw_oob_first, on-die ]
+        description:
+          Desired ECC engine, either hardware (most of the time
+          embedded in the NAND controller) or software correction
+          (Linux will handle the calculations). soft_bch is deprecated
+          and should be replaced by soft and nand-ecc-algo.
+
+      nand-ecc-algo:
+        allOf:
+          - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/string
+          - enum: [ hamming, bch, rs ]
+        description:
+          Desired ECC algorithm.
+
+      nand-bus-width:
+        allOf:
+          - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32
+          - enum: [ 8, 16 ]
+          - default: 8
+        description:
+          Bus width to the NAND chip
+
+      nand-on-flash-bbt:
+        $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/flag
+        description:
+          With this property, the OS will search the device for a Bad
+          Block Table (BBT). If not found, it will create one, reserve
+          a few blocks at the end of the device to store it and update
+          it as the device ages. Otherwise, the out-of-band area of a
+          few pages of all the blocks will be scanned at boot time to
+          find Bad Block Markers (BBM). These markers will help to
+          build a volatile BBT in RAM.
+
+      nand-ecc-strength:
+        allOf:
+          - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32
+          - minimum: 1
+        description:
+          Maximum number of bits that can be corrected per ECC step.
+
+      nand-ecc-step-size:
+        allOf:
+          - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32
+          - minimum: 1
+        description:
+          Number of data bytes covered by a single ECC step.
+
+      nand-ecc-maximize:
+        $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/flag
+        description:
+          Whether or not the ECC strength should be maximized. The
+          maximum ECC strength is both controller and chip
+          dependent. The ECC engine has to select the ECC config
+          providing the best strength and taking the OOB area size
+          constraint into account. This is particularly useful when
+          only the in-band area is used by the upper layers, and you
+          want to make your NAND as reliable as possible.
+
+      nand-is-boot-medium:
+        $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/flag
+        description:
+          Whether or not the NAND chip is a boot medium. Drivers might
+          use this information to select ECC algorithms supported by
+          the boot ROM or similar restrictions.
+
+      nand-rb:
+        $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32-array
+        description:
+          Contains the native Ready/Busy IDs.
+
+    required:
+      - reg
+
+required:
+  - "#address-cells"
+  - "#size-cells"
+
+examples:
+  - |
+    nand-controller {
+      #address-cells = <1>;
+      #size-cells = <0>;
+
+      /* controller specific properties */
+
+      nand@0 {
+        reg = <0>;
+        nand-ecc-mode = "soft";
+        nand-ecc-algo = "bch";
+
+        /* controller specific properties */
+      };
+    };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/nand.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index e949c778e983..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/nand.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,75 +0,0 @@
-* NAND chip and NAND controller generic binding
-
-NAND controller/NAND chip representation:
-
-The NAND controller should be represented with its own DT node, and all
-NAND chips attached to this controller should be defined as children nodes
-of the NAND controller. This representation should be enforced even for
-simple controllers supporting only one chip.
-
-Mandatory NAND controller properties:
-- #address-cells: depends on your controller. Should at least be 1 to
-		  encode the CS line id.
-- #size-cells: depends on your controller. Put zero unless you need a
-	       mapping between CS lines and dedicated memory regions
-
-Optional NAND controller properties
-- ranges: only needed if you need to define a mapping between CS lines and
-	  memory regions
-
-Optional NAND chip properties:
-
-- nand-ecc-mode : String, operation mode of the NAND ecc mode.
-		  Supported values are: "none", "soft", "hw", "hw_syndrome",
-		  "hw_oob_first", "on-die".
-		  Deprecated values:
-		  "soft_bch": use "soft" and nand-ecc-algo instead
-- nand-ecc-algo: string, algorithm of NAND ECC.
-		 Valid values are: "hamming", "bch", "rs".
-- nand-bus-width : 8 or 16 bus width if not present 8
-- nand-on-flash-bbt: boolean to enable on flash bbt option if not present false
-
-- nand-ecc-strength: integer representing the number of bits to correct
-		     per ECC step.
-
-- nand-ecc-step-size: integer representing the number of data bytes
-		      that are covered by a single ECC step.
-
-- nand-ecc-maximize: boolean used to specify that you want to maximize ECC
-		     strength. The maximum ECC strength is both controller and
-		     chip dependent. The controller side has to select the ECC
-		     config providing the best strength and taking the OOB area
-		     size constraint into account.
-		     This is particularly useful when only the in-band area is
-		     used by the upper layers, and you want to make your NAND
-		     as reliable as possible.
-- nand-is-boot-medium: Whether the NAND chip is a boot medium. Drivers might use
-		       this information to select ECC algorithms supported by
-		       the boot ROM or similar restrictions.
-
-- nand-rb: shall contain the native Ready/Busy ids.
-
-The ECC strength and ECC step size properties define the correction capability
-of a controller. Together, they say a controller can correct "{strength} bit
-errors per {size} bytes".
-
-The interpretation of these parameters is implementation-defined, so not all
-implementations must support all possible combinations. However, implementations
-are encouraged to further specify the value(s) they support.
-
-Example:
-
-	nand-controller {
-		#address-cells = <1>;
-		#size-cells = <0>;
-
-		/* controller specific properties */
-
-		nand@0 {
-			reg = <0>;
-			nand-ecc-mode = "soft";
-			nand-ecc-algo = "bch";
-
-			/* controller specific properties */
-		};
-	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/nvidia-tegra20-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/nvidia-tegra20-nand.txt
index b2f2ca12f9e6..e737e5beb7bf 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/nvidia-tegra20-nand.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/nvidia-tegra20-nand.txt
@@ -26,14 +26,14 @@ Optional children node properties:
 		 "hw" is supported.
 - nand-ecc-algo: string, algorithm of NAND ECC.
 		 Supported values with "hw" ECC mode are: "rs", "bch".
-- nand-bus-width : See nand.txt
-- nand-on-flash-bbt: See nand.txt
+- nand-bus-width : See nand-controller.yaml
+- nand-on-flash-bbt: See nand-controller.yaml
 - nand-ecc-strength: integer representing the number of bits to correct
 		     per ECC step (always 512). Supported strength using HW ECC
 		     modes are:
 		     - RS: 4, 6, 8
 		     - BCH: 4, 8, 14, 16
-- nand-ecc-maximize: See nand.txt
+- nand-ecc-maximize: See nand-controller.yaml
 - nand-is-boot-medium: Makes sure only ECC strengths supported by the boot ROM
 		       are chosen.
 - wp-gpios: GPIO specifier for the write protect pin.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/oxnas-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/oxnas-nand.txt
index 56d5c19da41d..2ba07fc8b79c 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/oxnas-nand.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/oxnas-nand.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 * Oxford Semiconductor OXNAS NAND Controller
 
-Please refer to nand.txt for generic information regarding MTD NAND bindings.
+Please refer to nand-controller.yaml for generic information regarding MTD NAND bindings.
 
 Required properties:
  - compatible: "oxsemi,ox820-nand"
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/partitions/arm,arm-firmware-suite.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/partitions/arm,arm-firmware-suite.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d5c5616f6db5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/partitions/arm,arm-firmware-suite.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+ARM AFS - ARM Firmware Suite Partitions
+=======================================
+
+The ARM Firmware Suite is a flash partitioning system found on the
+ARM reference designs: Integrator AP, Integrator CP, Versatile AB,
+Versatile PB, the RealView family, Versatile Express and Juno.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : (required) must be "arm,arm-firmware-suite"
+
+Example:
+
+flash@0 {
+	partitions {
+		compatible = "arm,arm-firmware-suite";
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/partitions/brcm,bcm963xx-cfe-nor-partitions.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/partitions/brcm,bcm963xx-cfe-nor-partitions.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9f630e95f180
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/partitions/brcm,bcm963xx-cfe-nor-partitions.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+Broadcom BCM963XX CFE Loader NOR Flash Partitions
+=================================================
+
+Most Broadcom BCM63XX SoC based devices follow the Broadcom reference layout for
+NOR. The first erase block used for the CFE bootloader, the last for an
+NVRAM partition, and the remainder in-between for one to two firmware partitions
+at fixed offsets. A valid firmware partition is identified by the ImageTag
+header found at beginning of the second erase block, containing the rootfs and
+kernel offsets and sizes within the firmware partition.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : must be "brcm,bcm963xx-cfe-nor-partitions"
+
+Example:
+
+flash@1fc00000 {
+	compatible = "cfi-flash";
+	reg = <0x1fc00000 0x400000>;
+	bank-width = <2>;
+
+	partitions {
+		compatible = "brcm,bcm963xx-cfe-nor-partitions";
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/partitions/brcm,bcm963xx-imagetag.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/partitions/brcm,bcm963xx-imagetag.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f8b7418ed817
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/partitions/brcm,bcm963xx-imagetag.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+Broadcom BCM963XX ImageTag Partition Container
+==============================================
+
+Some Broadcom BCM63XX SoC based devices contain additional, non discoverable
+partitions or non standard bootloader partition sizes. For these a mixed layout
+needs to be used with an explicit firmware partition.
+
+The BCM963XX ImageTag is a simple firmware header describing the offsets and
+sizes of the rootfs and kernel parts contained in the firmware.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : must be "brcm,bcm963xx-imagetag"
+
+Example:
+
+flash@1e000000 {
+	compatible = "cfi-flash";
+	reg = <0x1e000000 0x2000000>;
+	bank-width = <2>;
+
+	partitions {
+		compatible = "fixed-partitions";
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+
+		cfe@0 {
+			reg = <0x0 0x10000>;
+			read-only;
+		};
+
+		firmware@10000 {
+			reg = <0x10000 0x7d0000>;
+			compatible = "brcm,bcm963xx-imagetag";
+		};
+
+		caldata@7e0000 {
+			reg = <0x7e0000 0x10000>;
+			read-only;
+		};
+
+		nvram@7f0000 {
+			reg = <0x7f0000 0x10000>;
+		};
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/qcom_nandc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/qcom_nandc.txt
index 1123cc6d56ef..5c2fba4b30fe 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/qcom_nandc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/qcom_nandc.txt
@@ -47,8 +47,8 @@ Required properties:
 - #size-cells:		see partition.txt
 
 Optional properties:
-- nand-bus-width:	see nand.txt
-- nand-ecc-strength:	see nand.txt. If not specified, then ECC strength will
+- nand-bus-width:	see nand-controller.yaml
+- nand-ecc-strength:	see nand-controller.yaml. If not specified, then ECC strength will
 			be used according to chip requirement and available
 			OOB size.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/samsung-s3c2410.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/samsung-s3c2410.txt
index 0040eb8895e0..09815c40fc8a 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/samsung-s3c2410.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/samsung-s3c2410.txt
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ Required properties:
 	"samsung,s3c2412-nand"
 	"samsung,s3c2440-nand"
 - reg : register's location and length.
-- #address-cells, #size-cells : see nand.txt
+- #address-cells, #size-cells : see nand-controller.yaml
 - clocks : phandle to the nand controller clock
 - clock-names : must contain "nand"
 
@@ -14,8 +14,8 @@ Optional child nodes:
 Child nodes representing the available nand chips.
 
 Optional child properties:
-- nand-ecc-mode : see nand.txt
-- nand-on-flash-bbt : see nand.txt
+- nand-ecc-mode : see nand-controller.yaml
+- nand-on-flash-bbt : see nand-controller.yaml
 
 Each child device node may optionally contain a 'partitions' sub-node,
 which further contains sub-nodes describing the flash partition mapping.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/stm32-fmc2-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/stm32-fmc2-nand.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e55895e8dae4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/stm32-fmc2-nand.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
+STMicroelectronics Flexible Memory Controller 2 (FMC2)
+NAND Interface
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be one of:
+              * st,stm32mp15-fmc2
+- reg: NAND flash controller memory areas.
+       First region contains the register location.
+       Regions 2 to 4 respectively contain the data, command,
+       and address space for CS0.
+       Regions 5 to 7 contain the same areas for CS1.
+- interrupts: The interrupt number
+- pinctrl-0: Standard Pinctrl phandle (see: pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt)
+- clocks: The clock needed by the NAND flash controller
+
+Optional properties:
+- resets: Reference to a reset controller asserting the FMC controller
+- dmas: DMA specifiers (see: dma/stm32-mdma.txt)
+- dma-names: Must be "tx", "rx" and "ecc"
+
+* NAND device bindings:
+
+Required properties:
+- reg: describes the CS lines assigned to the NAND device.
+
+Optional properties:
+- nand-on-flash-bbt: see nand-controller.yaml
+- nand-ecc-strength: see nand-controller.yaml
+- nand-ecc-step-size: see nand-controller.yaml
+
+The following ECC strength and step size are currently supported:
+ - nand-ecc-strength = <1>, nand-ecc-step-size = <512> (Hamming)
+ - nand-ecc-strength = <4>, nand-ecc-step-size = <512> (BCH4)
+ - nand-ecc-strength = <8>, nand-ecc-step-size = <512> (BCH8) (default)
+
+Example:
+
+	fmc: nand-controller@58002000 {
+		compatible = "st,stm32mp15-fmc2";
+		reg = <0x58002000 0x1000>,
+		      <0x80000000 0x1000>,
+		      <0x88010000 0x1000>,
+		      <0x88020000 0x1000>,
+		      <0x81000000 0x1000>,
+		      <0x89010000 0x1000>,
+		      <0x89020000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <GIC_SPI 48 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
+		clocks = <&rcc FMC_K>;
+		resets = <&rcc FMC_R>;
+		pinctrl-names = "default";
+		pinctrl-0 = <&fmc_pins_a>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+
+		nand@0 {
+			reg = <0>;
+			nand-on-flash-bbt;
+			#address-cells = <1>;
+			#size-cells = <1>;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/sunxi-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/sunxi-nand.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index dcd5a5d80dc0..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/sunxi-nand.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,48 +0,0 @@
-Allwinner NAND Flash Controller (NFC)
-
-Required properties:
-- compatible : "allwinner,sun4i-a10-nand".
-- reg : shall contain registers location and length for data and reg.
-- interrupts : shall define the nand controller interrupt.
-- #address-cells: shall be set to 1. Encode the nand CS.
-- #size-cells : shall be set to 0.
-- clocks : shall reference nand controller clocks.
-- clock-names : nand controller internal clock names. Shall contain :
-    * "ahb" : AHB gating clock
-    * "mod" : nand controller clock
-
-Optional properties:
-- dmas : shall reference DMA channel associated to the NAND controller.
-- dma-names : shall be "rxtx".
-
-Optional children nodes:
-Children nodes represent the available nand chips.
-
-Optional properties:
-- reset : phandle + reset specifier pair
-- reset-names : must contain "ahb"
-- allwinner,rb : shall contain the native Ready/Busy ids.
-- nand-ecc-mode : one of the supported ECC modes ("hw", "soft", "soft_bch" or
-		  "none")
-
-see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/nand.txt for generic bindings.
-
-
-Examples:
-nfc: nand@1c03000 {
-	compatible = "allwinner,sun4i-a10-nand";
-	reg = <0x01c03000 0x1000>;
-	interrupts = <0 37 1>;
-	clocks = <&ahb_gates 13>, <&nand_clk>;
-	clock-names = "ahb", "mod";
-	#address-cells = <1>;
-	#size-cells = <0>;
-	pinctrl-names = "default";
-	pinctrl-0 = <&nand_pins_a &nand_cs0_pins_a &nand_rb0_pins_a>;
-
-	nand@0 {
-		reg = <0>;
-		allwinner,rb = <0>;
-		nand-ecc-mode = "soft_bch";
-	};
-};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/tango-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/tango-nand.txt
index cd1bf2ac9055..91c8420241af 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/tango-nand.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/tango-nand.txt
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ Required properties:
 - #size-cells: <0>
 
 Children nodes represent the available NAND chips.
-See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/nand.txt for generic bindings.
+See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/nand-controller.yaml for generic bindings.
 
 Example:
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/vf610-nfc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/vf610-nfc.txt
index c96eeb65f450..7db5e6e609df 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/vf610-nfc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/vf610-nfc.txt
@@ -25,14 +25,14 @@ only handle one NAND chip.
 
 Required properties:
 - compatible: Should be set to "fsl,vf610-nfc-cs".
-- nand-bus-width: see nand.txt
-- nand-ecc-mode: see nand.txt
+- nand-bus-width: see nand-controller.yaml
+- nand-ecc-mode: see nand-controller.yaml
 
 Required properties for hardware ECC:
-- nand-ecc-strength: supported strengths are 24 and 32 bit (see nand.txt)
+- nand-ecc-strength: supported strengths are 24 and 32 bit (see nand-controller.yaml)
 - nand-ecc-step-size: step size equals page size, currently only 2k pages are
     supported
-- nand-on-flash-bbt: see nand.txt
+- nand-on-flash-bbt: see nand-controller.yaml
 
 Example:
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/altera_tse.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/altera_tse.txt
index 0e21df94a53f..0b7d4d3758ea 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/altera_tse.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/altera_tse.txt
@@ -46,9 +46,8 @@ Required properties:
 	- reg: phy id used to communicate to phy.
 	- device_type: Must be "ethernet-phy".
 
-Optional properties:
-- local-mac-address: See ethernet.txt in the same directory.
-- max-frame-size: See ethernet.txt in the same directory.
+The MAC address will be determined using the optional properties defined in
+ethernet.txt.
 
 Example:
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/amd-xgbe.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/amd-xgbe.txt
index 93dcb79a5f16..9c27dfcd1133 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/amd-xgbe.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/amd-xgbe.txt
@@ -24,8 +24,6 @@ Required properties:
 - phy-mode: See ethernet.txt file in the same directory
 
 Optional properties:
-- mac-address: mac address to be assigned to the device. Can be overridden
-  by UEFI.
 - dma-coherent: Present if dma operations are coherent
 - amd,per-channel-interrupt: Indicates that Rx and Tx complete will generate
   a unique interrupt for each DMA channel - this requires an additional
@@ -34,6 +32,9 @@ Optional properties:
     0 - 1GbE and 10GbE (default)
     1 - 2.5GbE and 10GbE
 
+The MAC address will be determined using the optional properties defined in
+ethernet.txt.
+
 The following optional properties are represented by an array with each
 value corresponding to a particular speed. The first array value represents
 the setting for the 1GbE speed, the second value for the 2.5GbE speed and
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/brcm,amac.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/brcm,amac.txt
index 0bfad656a9ff..0120ebe93262 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/brcm,amac.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/brcm,amac.txt
@@ -16,8 +16,8 @@ Required properties:
 				registers (required for Northstar2)
  - interrupts:	Interrupt number
 
-Optional properties:
-- mac-address:	See ethernet.txt file in the same directory
+The MAC address will be determined using the optional properties
+defined in ethernet.txt.
 
 Examples:
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/btusb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/btusb.txt
index 37d67926dd6d..b1ad6ee68e90 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/btusb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/btusb.txt
@@ -9,6 +9,9 @@ Required properties:
 		 (more may be added later) are:
 
 		  "usb1286,204e" (Marvell 8997)
+		  "usbcf3,e300" (Qualcomm QCA6174A)
+		  "usb4ca,301a" (Qualcomm QCA6174A (Lite-On))
+
 
 Also, vendors that use btusb may have device additional properties, e.g:
 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/marvell-bt-8xxx.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/microchip,mcp251x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/microchip,mcp251x.txt
index 188c8bd4eb67..5a0111d4de58 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/microchip,mcp251x.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/microchip,mcp251x.txt
@@ -4,6 +4,7 @@ Required properties:
  - compatible: Should be one of the following:
    - "microchip,mcp2510" for MCP2510.
    - "microchip,mcp2515" for MCP2515.
+   - "microchip,mcp25625" for MCP25625.
  - reg: SPI chip select.
  - clocks: The clock feeding the CAN controller.
  - interrupts: Should contain IRQ line for the CAN controller.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/cpsw-phy-sel.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/cpsw-phy-sel.txt
index 764c0c79b43d..5d76f991c027 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/cpsw-phy-sel.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/cpsw-phy-sel.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-TI CPSW Phy mode Selection Device Tree Bindings
+TI CPSW Phy mode Selection Device Tree Bindings (DEPRECATED)
 -----------------------------------------------
 
 Required properties:
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/cpsw.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/cpsw.txt
index 3264e1978d25..7c7ac5eb0313 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/cpsw.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/cpsw.txt
@@ -49,10 +49,12 @@ Required properties:
 
 Optional properties:
 - dual_emac_res_vlan	: Specifies VID to be used to segregate the ports
-- mac-address		: See ethernet.txt file in the same directory
 - phy_id		: Specifies slave phy id (deprecated, use phy-handle)
 - phy-handle		: See ethernet.txt file in the same directory
 
+The MAC address will be determined using the optional properties
+defined in ethernet.txt.
+
 Slave sub-nodes:
 - fixed-link		: See fixed-link.txt file in the same directory
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/davinci_emac.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/davinci_emac.txt
index 24c5cdaba8d2..5e3579e72e2d 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/davinci_emac.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/davinci_emac.txt
@@ -23,6 +23,9 @@ Optional properties:
 - ti,davinci-rmii-en: 1 byte, 1 means use RMII
 - ti,davinci-no-bd-ram: boolean, does EMAC have BD RAM?
 
+The MAC address will be determined using the optional properties
+defined in ethernet.txt.
+
 Example (enbw_cmc board):
 	eth0: emac@1e20000 {
 		compatible = "ti,davinci-dm6467-emac";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/dsa.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/dsa.txt
index 35694c0c376b..f66bb7ecdb82 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/dsa.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/dsa.txt
@@ -1,12 +1,6 @@
 Distributed Switch Architecture Device Tree Bindings
 ----------------------------------------------------
 
-Two bindings exist, one of which has been deprecated due to
-limitations.
-
-Current Binding
----------------
-
 Switches are true Linux devices and can be probed by any means. Once
 probed, they register to the DSA framework, passing a node
 pointer. This node is expected to fulfil the following binding, and
@@ -71,6 +65,9 @@ properties, described in binding documents:
 			  Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fixed-link.txt
 			  for details.
 
+The MAC address will be determined using the optional properties
+defined in ethernet.txt.
+
 Example
 
 The following example shows three switches on three MDIO busses,
@@ -97,6 +94,7 @@ linked into one DSA cluster.
 			port@1 {
 				reg = <1>;
 				label = "lan1";
+				local-mac-address = [00 00 00 00 00 00];
 			};
 
 			port@2 {
@@ -257,152 +255,3 @@ linked into one DSA cluster.
 		};
 	};
 };
-
-Deprecated Binding
-------------------
-
-The deprecated binding makes use of a platform device to represent the
-switches. The switches themselves are not Linux devices, and make use
-of an MDIO bus for management.
-
-Required properties:
-- compatible		: Should be "marvell,dsa"
-- #address-cells	: Must be 2, first cell is the address on the MDIO bus
-			  and second cell is the address in the switch tree.
-			  Second cell is used only when cascading/chaining.
-- #size-cells		: Must be 0
-- dsa,ethernet		: Should be a phandle to a valid Ethernet device node
-- dsa,mii-bus		: Should be a phandle to a valid MDIO bus device node
-
-Optional properties:
-- interrupts		: property with a value describing the switch
-			  interrupt number (not supported by the driver)
-
-A DSA node can contain multiple switch chips which are therefore child nodes of
-the parent DSA node. The maximum number of allowed child nodes is 4
-(DSA_MAX_SWITCHES).
-Each of these switch child nodes should have the following required properties:
-
-- reg			: Contains two fields. The first one describes the
-			  address on the MII bus. The second is the switch
-			  number that must be unique in cascaded configurations
-- #address-cells	: Must be 1
-- #size-cells		: Must be 0
-
-A switch child node has the following optional property:
-
-- eeprom-length		: Set to the length of an EEPROM connected to the
-			  switch. Must be set if the switch can not detect
-			  the presence and/or size of a connected EEPROM,
-			  otherwise optional.
-
-A switch may have multiple "port" children nodes
-
-Each port children node must have the following mandatory properties:
-- reg			: Describes the port address in the switch
-- label			: Describes the label associated with this port, special
-			  labels are "cpu" to indicate a CPU port and "dsa" to
-			  indicate an uplink/downlink port.
-
-Note that a port labelled "dsa" will imply checking for the uplink phandle
-described below.
-
-Optional property:
-- link			: Should be a list of phandles to another switch's DSA port.
-			  This property is only used when switches are being
-			  chained/cascaded together. This port is used as outgoing port
-			  towards the phandle port, which can be more than one hop away.
-
-- phy-handle		: Phandle to a PHY on an external MDIO bus, not the
-			  switch internal one. See
-			  Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/ethernet.txt
-			  for details.
-
-- phy-mode		: String representing the connection to the designated
-			  PHY node specified by the 'phy-handle' property. See
-			  Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/ethernet.txt
-			  for details.
-
-- mii-bus		: Should be a phandle to a valid MDIO bus device node.
-			  This mii-bus will be used in preference to the
-			  global dsa,mii-bus defined above, for this switch.
-
-Optional subnodes:
-- fixed-link		: Fixed-link subnode describing a link to a non-MDIO
-			  managed entity. See
-			  Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fixed-link.txt
-			  for details.
-
-Example:
-
-	dsa@0 {
-		compatible = "marvell,dsa";
-		#address-cells = <2>;
-		#size-cells = <0>;
-
-		interrupts = <10>;
-		dsa,ethernet = <&ethernet0>;
-		dsa,mii-bus = <&mii_bus0>;
-
-		switch@0 {
-			#address-cells = <1>;
-			#size-cells = <0>;
-			reg = <16 0>;	/* MDIO address 16, switch 0 in tree */
-
-			port@0 {
-				reg = <0>;
-				label = "lan1";
-				phy-handle = <&phy0>;
-			};
-
-			port@1 {
-				reg = <1>;
-				label = "lan2";
-			};
-
-			port@5 {
-				reg = <5>;
-				label = "cpu";
-			};
-
-			switch0port6: port@6 {
-				reg = <6>;
-				label = "dsa";
-				link = <&switch1port0
-				        &switch2port0>;
-			};
-		};
-
-		switch@1 {
-			#address-cells = <1>;
-			#size-cells = <0>;
-			reg = <17 1>;	/* MDIO address 17, switch 1 in tree */
-			mii-bus = <&mii_bus1>;
-			reset-gpios = <&gpio5 1 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>;
-
-			switch1port0: port@0 {
-				reg = <0>;
-				label = "dsa";
-				link = <&switch0port6>;
-			};
-			switch1port1: port@1 {
-				reg = <1>;
-				label = "dsa";
-				link = <&switch2port1>;
-			};
-		};
-
-		switch@2 {
-			#address-cells = <1>;
-			#size-cells = <0>;
-			reg = <18 2>;	/* MDIO address 18, switch 2 in tree */
-			mii-bus = <&mii_bus1>;
-
-			switch2port0: port@0 {
-				reg = <0>;
-				label = "dsa";
-				link = <&switch1port1
-				        &switch0port6>;
-			};
-		};
-	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/ksz.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/ksz.txt
index 0f407fb371ce..e7db7268fd0f 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/ksz.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/ksz.txt
@@ -7,6 +7,11 @@ Required properties:
   of the following:
   - "microchip,ksz9477"
   - "microchip,ksz9897"
+  - "microchip,ksz9896"
+  - "microchip,ksz9567"
+  - "microchip,ksz8565"
+  - "microchip,ksz9893"
+  - "microchip,ksz9563"
 
 Optional properties:
 
@@ -19,58 +24,96 @@ Examples:
 
 Ethernet switch connected via SPI to the host, CPU port wired to eth0:
 
-                             eth0: ethernet@10001000 {
-                                             fixed-link {
-                                                             speed = <1000>;
-                                                             full-duplex;
-                                             };
-                             };
+	eth0: ethernet@10001000 {
+		fixed-link {
+			speed = <1000>;
+			full-duplex;
+		};
+	};
 
-                             spi1: spi@f8008000 {
-                                             pinctrl-0 = <&pinctrl_spi_ksz>;
-                                             cs-gpios = <&pioC 25 0>;
-                                             id = <1>;
+	spi1: spi@f8008000 {
+		pinctrl-0 = <&pinctrl_spi_ksz>;
+		cs-gpios = <&pioC 25 0>;
+		id = <1>;
 
-                                             ksz9477: ksz9477@0 {
-                                                             compatible = "microchip,ksz9477";
-                                                             reg = <0>;
+		ksz9477: ksz9477@0 {
+			compatible = "microchip,ksz9477";
+			reg = <0>;
 
-                                                             spi-max-frequency = <44000000>;
-                                                             spi-cpha;
-                                                             spi-cpol;
+			spi-max-frequency = <44000000>;
+			spi-cpha;
+			spi-cpol;
 
-                                                             ports {
-                                                                             #address-cells = <1>;
-                                                                             #size-cells = <0>;
-                                                                             port@0 {
-                                                                                             reg = <0>;
-                                                                                             label = "lan1";
-                                                                             };
-                                                                             port@1 {
-                                                                                             reg = <1>;
-                                                                                             label = "lan2";
-                                                                             };
-                                                                             port@2 {
-                                                                                             reg = <2>;
-                                                                                             label = "lan3";
-                                                                             };
-                                                                             port@3 {
-                                                                                             reg = <3>;
-                                                                                             label = "lan4";
-                                                                             };
-                                                                             port@4 {
-                                                                                             reg = <4>;
-                                                                                             label = "lan5";
-                                                                             };
-                                                                             port@5 {
-                                                                                             reg = <5>;
-                                                                                             label = "cpu";
-                                                                                             ethernet = <&eth0>;
-                                                                                             fixed-link {
-                                                                                                             speed = <1000>;
-                                                                                                             full-duplex;
-                                                                                             };
-                                                                             };
-                                                             };
-                                             };
-                             };
+			ports {
+				#address-cells = <1>;
+				#size-cells = <0>;
+				port@0 {
+					reg = <0>;
+					label = "lan1";
+				};
+				port@1 {
+					reg = <1>;
+					label = "lan2";
+				};
+				port@2 {
+					reg = <2>;
+					label = "lan3";
+				};
+				port@3 {
+					reg = <3>;
+					label = "lan4";
+				};
+				port@4 {
+					reg = <4>;
+					label = "lan5";
+				};
+				port@5 {
+					reg = <5>;
+					label = "cpu";
+					ethernet = <&eth0>;
+					fixed-link {
+						speed = <1000>;
+						full-duplex;
+					};
+				};
+			};
+		};
+		ksz8565: ksz8565@0 {
+			compatible = "microchip,ksz8565";
+			reg = <0>;
+
+			spi-max-frequency = <44000000>;
+			spi-cpha;
+			spi-cpol;
+
+			ports {
+				#address-cells = <1>;
+				#size-cells = <0>;
+				port@0 {
+					reg = <0>;
+					label = "lan1";
+				};
+				port@1 {
+					reg = <1>;
+					label = "lan2";
+				};
+				port@2 {
+					reg = <2>;
+					label = "lan3";
+				};
+				port@3 {
+					reg = <3>;
+					label = "lan4";
+				};
+				port@6 {
+					reg = <6>;
+					label = "cpu";
+					ethernet = <&eth0>;
+					fixed-link {
+						speed = <1000>;
+						full-duplex;
+					};
+				};
+			};
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/mt7530.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/mt7530.txt
index aa3527f71fdc..47aa205ee0bd 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/mt7530.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/mt7530.txt
@@ -3,12 +3,16 @@ Mediatek MT7530 Ethernet switch
 
 Required properties:
 
-- compatible: Must be compatible = "mediatek,mt7530";
+- compatible: may be compatible = "mediatek,mt7530"
+	or compatible = "mediatek,mt7621"
 - #address-cells: Must be 1.
 - #size-cells: Must be 0.
 - mediatek,mcm: Boolean; if defined, indicates that either MT7530 is the part
 	on multi-chip module belong to MT7623A has or the remotely standalone
 	chip as the function MT7623N reference board provided for.
+
+If compatible mediatek,mt7530 is set then the following properties are required
+
 - core-supply: Phandle to the regulator node necessary for the core power.
 - io-supply: Phandle to the regulator node necessary for the I/O power.
 	See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/mt6323-regulator.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/qca8k.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/qca8k.txt
index bbcb255c3150..93a7469e70d4 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/qca8k.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/qca8k.txt
@@ -12,10 +12,15 @@ Required properties:
 Subnodes:
 
 The integrated switch subnode should be specified according to the binding
-described in dsa/dsa.txt. As the QCA8K switches do not have a N:N mapping of
-port and PHY id, each subnode describing a port needs to have a valid phandle
-referencing the internal PHY connected to it. The CPU port of this switch is
-always port 0.
+described in dsa/dsa.txt. If the QCA8K switch is connect to a SoC's external
+mdio-bus each subnode describing a port needs to have a valid phandle
+referencing the internal PHY it is connected to. This is because there's no
+N:N mapping of port and PHY id.
+
+Don't use mixed external and internal mdio-bus configurations, as this is
+not supported by the hardware.
+
+The CPU port of this switch is always port 0.
 
 A CPU port node has the following optional node:
 
@@ -31,8 +36,9 @@ For QCA8K the 'fixed-link' sub-node supports only the following properties:
 - 'full-duplex' (boolean, optional), to indicate that full duplex is
   used. When absent, half duplex is assumed.
 
-Example:
+Examples:
 
+for the external mdio-bus configuration:
 
 	&mdio0 {
 		phy_port1: phy@0 {
@@ -55,12 +61,12 @@ Example:
 			reg = <4>;
 		};
 
-		switch0@0 {
+		switch@10 {
 			compatible = "qca,qca8337";
 			#address-cells = <1>;
 			#size-cells = <0>;
 
-			reg = <0>;
+			reg = <0x10>;
 
 			ports {
 				#address-cells = <1>;
@@ -108,3 +114,56 @@ Example:
 			};
 		};
 	};
+
+for the internal master mdio-bus configuration:
+
+	&mdio0 {
+		switch@10 {
+			compatible = "qca,qca8337";
+			#address-cells = <1>;
+			#size-cells = <0>;
+
+			reg = <0x10>;
+
+			ports {
+				#address-cells = <1>;
+				#size-cells = <0>;
+
+				port@0 {
+					reg = <0>;
+					label = "cpu";
+					ethernet = <&gmac1>;
+					phy-mode = "rgmii";
+					fixed-link {
+						speed = 1000;
+						full-duplex;
+					};
+				};
+
+				port@1 {
+					reg = <1>;
+					label = "lan1";
+				};
+
+				port@2 {
+					reg = <2>;
+					label = "lan2";
+				};
+
+				port@3 {
+					reg = <3>;
+					label = "lan3";
+				};
+
+				port@4 {
+					reg = <4>;
+					label = "lan4";
+				};
+
+				port@5 {
+					reg = <5>;
+					label = "wan";
+				};
+			};
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/sja1105.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/sja1105.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..13fd21074d48
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/sja1105.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,156 @@
+NXP SJA1105 switch driver
+=========================
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible:
+	Must be one of:
+	- "nxp,sja1105e"
+	- "nxp,sja1105t"
+	- "nxp,sja1105p"
+	- "nxp,sja1105q"
+	- "nxp,sja1105r"
+	- "nxp,sja1105s"
+
+	Although the device ID could be detected at runtime, explicit bindings
+	are required in order to be able to statically check their validity.
+	For example, SGMII can only be specified on port 4 of R and S devices,
+	and the non-SGMII devices, while pin-compatible, are not equal in terms
+	of support for RGMII internal delays (supported on P/Q/R/S, but not on
+	E/T).
+
+Optional properties:
+
+- sja1105,role-mac:
+- sja1105,role-phy:
+	Boolean properties that can be assigned under each port node. By
+	default (unless otherwise specified) a port is configured as MAC if it
+	is driving a PHY (phy-handle is present) or as PHY if it is PHY-less
+	(fixed-link specified, presumably because it is connected to a MAC).
+	The effect of this property (in either its implicit or explicit form)
+	is:
+	- In the case of MII or RMII it specifies whether the SJA1105 port is a
+	  clock source or sink for this interface (not applicable for RGMII
+	  where there is a Tx and an Rx clock).
+	- In the case of RGMII it affects the behavior regarding internal
+	  delays:
+	  1. If sja1105,role-mac is specified, and the phy-mode property is one
+	     of "rgmii-id", "rgmii-txid" or "rgmii-rxid", then the entity
+	     designated to apply the delay/clock skew necessary for RGMII
+	     is the PHY. The SJA1105 MAC does not apply any internal delays.
+	  2. If sja1105,role-phy is specified, and the phy-mode property is one
+	     of the above, the designated entity to apply the internal delays
+	     is the SJA1105 MAC (if hardware-supported). This is only supported
+	     by the second-generation (P/Q/R/S) hardware. On a first-generation
+	     E or T device, it is an error to specify an RGMII phy-mode other
+	     than "rgmii" for a port that is in fixed-link mode. In that case,
+	     the clock skew must either be added by the MAC at the other end of
+	     the fixed-link, or by PCB serpentine traces on the board.
+	These properties are required, for example, in the case where SJA1105
+	ports are at both ends of a MII/RMII PHY-less setup. One end would need
+	to have sja1105,role-mac, while the other sja1105,role-phy.
+
+See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/dsa.txt for the list of standard
+DSA required and optional properties.
+
+Other observations
+------------------
+
+The SJA1105 SPI interface requires a CS-to-CLK time (t2 in UM10944) of at least
+one half of t_CLK. At an SPI frequency of 1MHz, this means a minimum
+cs_sck_delay of 500ns. Ensuring that this SPI timing requirement is observed
+depends on the SPI bus master driver.
+
+Example
+-------
+
+Ethernet switch connected via SPI to the host, CPU port wired to enet2:
+
+arch/arm/boot/dts/ls1021a-tsn.dts:
+
+/* SPI controller of the LS1021 */
+&dspi0 {
+	sja1105@1 {
+		reg = <0x1>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+		compatible = "nxp,sja1105t";
+		spi-max-frequency = <4000000>;
+		fsl,spi-cs-sck-delay = <1000>;
+		fsl,spi-sck-cs-delay = <1000>;
+		ports {
+			#address-cells = <1>;
+			#size-cells = <0>;
+			port@0 {
+				/* ETH5 written on chassis */
+				label = "swp5";
+				phy-handle = <&rgmii_phy6>;
+				phy-mode = "rgmii-id";
+				reg = <0>;
+				/* Implicit "sja1105,role-mac;" */
+			};
+			port@1 {
+				/* ETH2 written on chassis */
+				label = "swp2";
+				phy-handle = <&rgmii_phy3>;
+				phy-mode = "rgmii-id";
+				reg = <1>;
+				/* Implicit "sja1105,role-mac;" */
+			};
+			port@2 {
+				/* ETH3 written on chassis */
+				label = "swp3";
+				phy-handle = <&rgmii_phy4>;
+				phy-mode = "rgmii-id";
+				reg = <2>;
+				/* Implicit "sja1105,role-mac;" */
+			};
+			port@3 {
+				/* ETH4 written on chassis */
+				phy-handle = <&rgmii_phy5>;
+				label = "swp4";
+				phy-mode = "rgmii-id";
+				reg = <3>;
+				/* Implicit "sja1105,role-mac;" */
+			};
+			port@4 {
+				/* Internal port connected to eth2 */
+				ethernet = <&enet2>;
+				phy-mode = "rgmii";
+				reg = <4>;
+				/* Implicit "sja1105,role-phy;" */
+				fixed-link {
+					speed = <1000>;
+					full-duplex;
+				};
+			};
+		};
+	};
+};
+
+/* MDIO controller of the LS1021 */
+&mdio0 {
+	/* BCM5464 */
+	rgmii_phy3: ethernet-phy@3 {
+		reg = <0x3>;
+	};
+	rgmii_phy4: ethernet-phy@4 {
+		reg = <0x4>;
+	};
+	rgmii_phy5: ethernet-phy@5 {
+		reg = <0x5>;
+	};
+	rgmii_phy6: ethernet-phy@6 {
+		reg = <0x6>;
+	};
+};
+
+/* Ethernet master port of the LS1021 */
+&enet2 {
+	phy-connection-type = "rgmii";
+	status = "ok";
+	fixed-link {
+		speed = <1000>;
+		full-duplex;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/ethernet.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/ethernet.txt
index cfc376bc977a..e88c3641d613 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/ethernet.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/ethernet.txt
@@ -4,21 +4,22 @@ NOTE: All 'phy*' properties documented below are Ethernet specific. For the
 generic PHY 'phys' property, see
 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-bindings.txt.
 
-- local-mac-address: array of 6 bytes, specifies the MAC address that was
-  assigned to the network device;
 - mac-address: array of 6 bytes, specifies the MAC address that was last used by
   the boot program; should be used in cases where the MAC address assigned to
   the device by the boot program is different from the "local-mac-address"
   property;
-- nvmem-cells: phandle, reference to an nvmem node for the MAC address;
-- nvmem-cell-names: string, should be "mac-address" if nvmem is to be used;
+- local-mac-address: array of 6 bytes, specifies the MAC address that was
+  assigned to the network device;
+- nvmem-cells: phandle, reference to an nvmem node for the MAC address
+- nvmem-cell-names: string, should be "mac-address" if nvmem is to be used
 - max-speed: number, specifies maximum speed in Mbit/s supported by the device;
 - max-frame-size: number, maximum transfer unit (IEEE defined MTU), rather than
   the maximum frame size (there's contradiction in the Devicetree
   Specification).
 - phy-mode: string, operation mode of the PHY interface. This is now a de-facto
   standard property; supported values are:
-  * "internal"
+  * "internal" (Internal means there is not a standard bus between the MAC and
+     the PHY, something proprietary is being used to embed the PHY in the MAC.)
   * "mii"
   * "gmii"
   * "sgmii"
@@ -37,7 +38,7 @@ Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-bindings.txt.
   * "smii"
   * "xgmii"
   * "trgmii"
-  * "2000base-x",
+  * "1000base-x",
   * "2500base-x",
   * "rxaui"
   * "xaui"
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-enetc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-enetc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c812e25ae90f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-enetc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+* ENETC ethernet device tree bindings
+
+Depending on board design and ENETC port type (internal or
+external) there are two supported link modes specified by
+below device tree bindings.
+
+Required properties:
+
+- reg		: Specifies PCIe Device Number and Function
+		  Number of the ENETC endpoint device, according
+		  to parent node bindings.
+- compatible	: Should be "fsl,enetc".
+
+1) The ENETC external port is connected to a MDIO configurable phy:
+
+In this case, the ENETC node should include a "mdio" sub-node
+that in turn should contain the "ethernet-phy" node describing the
+external phy.  Below properties are required, their bindings
+already defined in ethernet.txt or phy.txt, under
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/*.
+
+Required:
+
+- phy-handle		: Phandle to a PHY on the MDIO bus.
+			  Defined in ethernet.txt.
+
+- phy-connection-type	: Defined in ethernet.txt.
+
+- mdio			: "mdio" node, defined in mdio.txt.
+
+- ethernet-phy		: "ethernet-phy" node, defined in phy.txt.
+
+Example:
+
+	ethernet@0,0 {
+		compatible = "fsl,enetc";
+		reg = <0x000000 0 0 0 0>;
+		phy-handle = <&sgmii_phy0>;
+		phy-connection-type = "sgmii";
+
+		mdio {
+			#address-cells = <1>;
+			#size-cells = <0>;
+			sgmii_phy0: ethernet-phy@2 {
+				reg = <0x2>;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+
+2) The ENETC port is an internal port or has a fixed-link external
+connection:
+
+In this case, the ENETC port node defines a fixed link connection,
+as specified by "fixed-link.txt", under
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/*.
+
+Required:
+
+- fixed-link	: "fixed-link" node, defined in "fixed-link.txt".
+
+Example:
+	ethernet@0,2 {
+		compatible = "fsl,enetc";
+		reg = <0x000200 0 0 0 0>;
+		fixed-link {
+			speed = <1000>;
+			full-duplex;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/hisilicon-femac.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/hisilicon-femac.txt
index d11af5ecace8..5f96976f3cea 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/hisilicon-femac.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/hisilicon-femac.txt
@@ -14,7 +14,6 @@ Required properties:
 	the PHY reset signal(optional).
 - reset-names: should contain the reset signal name "mac"(required)
 	and "phy"(optional).
-- mac-address: see ethernet.txt [1].
 - phy-mode: see ethernet.txt [1].
 - phy-handle: see ethernet.txt [1].
 - hisilicon,phy-reset-delays-us: triplet of delays if PHY reset signal given.
@@ -22,6 +21,9 @@ Required properties:
 	The 2nd cell is reset pulse in micro seconds.
 	The 3rd cell is reset post-delay in micro seconds.
 
+The MAC address will be determined using the optional properties
+defined in ethernet.txt[1].
+
 [1] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/ethernet.txt
 
 Example:
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/hisilicon-hix5hd2-gmac.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/hisilicon-hix5hd2-gmac.txt
index eea73adc678f..cddf46bf6b63 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/hisilicon-hix5hd2-gmac.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/hisilicon-hix5hd2-gmac.txt
@@ -18,7 +18,6 @@ Required properties:
 - #size-cells: must be <0>.
 - phy-mode: see ethernet.txt [1].
 - phy-handle: see ethernet.txt [1].
-- mac-address: see ethernet.txt [1].
 - clocks: clock phandle and specifier pair.
 - clock-names: contain the clock name "mac_core"(required) and "mac_ifc"(optional).
 - resets: should contain the phandle to the MAC core reset signal(optional),
@@ -31,6 +30,9 @@ Required properties:
 	The 2nd cell is reset pulse in micro seconds.
 	The 3rd cell is reset post-delay in micro seconds.
 
+The MAC address will be determined using the properties defined in
+ethernet.txt[1].
+
 - PHY subnode: inherits from phy binding [2]
 
 [1] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/ethernet.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/keystone-netcp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/keystone-netcp.txt
index 04ba1dc34fd6..6262c2f293b0 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/keystone-netcp.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/keystone-netcp.txt
@@ -135,14 +135,14 @@ Optional properties:
 		are swapped.  The netcp driver will swap the two DWORDs
 		back to the proper order when this property is set to 2
 		when it obtains the mac address from efuse.
-- local-mac-address:	the driver is designed to use the of_get_mac_address api
-			only if efuse-mac is 0. When efuse-mac is 0, the MAC
-			address is obtained from local-mac-address. If this
-			attribute is not present, then the driver will use a
-			random MAC address.
 - "netcp-device label":	phandle to the device specification for each of NetCP
 			sub-module attached to this interface.
 
+The MAC address will be determined using the optional properties defined in
+ethernet.txt and only if efuse-mac is set to 0. If all of the optional MAC
+address properties are not present, then the driver will use a random MAC
+address.
+
 Example binding:
 
 netcp: netcp@2000000 {
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/macb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/macb.txt
index 3e17ac1d5d58..9c5e94482b5f 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/macb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/macb.txt
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
 Required properties:
 - compatible: Should be "cdns,[<chip>-]{macb|gem}"
   Use "cdns,at91rm9200-emac" Atmel at91rm9200 SoC.
-  Use "cdns,at91sam9260-macb" for Atmel at91sam9 SoCs or the 10/100Mbit IP
-  available on sama5d3 SoCs.
+  Use "cdns,at91sam9260-macb" for Atmel at91sam9 SoCs.
+  Use "cdns,sam9x60-macb" for Microchip sam9x60 SoC.
   Use "cdns,np4-macb" for NP4 SoC devices.
   Use "cdns,at32ap7000-macb" for other 10/100 usage or use the generic form: "cdns,macb".
   Use "cdns,pc302-gem" for Picochip picoXcell pc302 and later devices based on
@@ -26,6 +26,9 @@ Required properties:
 	Optional elements: 'tsu_clk'
 - clocks: Phandles to input clocks.
 
+The MAC address will be determined using the optional properties
+defined in ethernet.txt.
+
 Optional properties for PHY child node:
 - reset-gpios : Should specify the gpio for phy reset
 - magic-packet : If present, indicates that the hardware supports waking
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/marvell-armada-370-neta.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/marvell-armada-370-neta.txt
index bedcfd5a52cd..691f886cfc4a 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/marvell-armada-370-neta.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/marvell-armada-370-neta.txt
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ Optional properties:
   "marvell,armada-370-neta" and 9800B for others.
 - clock-names: List of names corresponding to clocks property; shall be
   "core" for core clock and "bus" for the optional bus clock.
-
+- phys: comphy for the ethernet port, see ../phy/phy-bindings.txt
 
 Optional properties (valid only for Armada XP/38x):
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/marvell-pxa168.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/marvell-pxa168.txt
index 845a148a346e..5574af3554aa 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/marvell-pxa168.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/marvell-pxa168.txt
@@ -11,7 +11,9 @@ Optional properties:
 - #address-cells: must be 1 when using sub-nodes.
 - #size-cells: must be 0 when using sub-nodes.
 - phy-handle: see ethernet.txt file in the same directory.
-- local-mac-address: see ethernet.txt file in the same directory.
+
+The MAC address will be determined using the optional properties
+defined in ethernet.txt.
 
 Sub-nodes:
 Each PHY can be represented as a sub-node. This is not mandatory.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mdio-mux-meson-g12a.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mdio-mux-meson-g12a.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3a96cbed9294
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mdio-mux-meson-g12a.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+Properties for the MDIO bus multiplexer/glue of Amlogic G12a SoC family.
+
+This is a special case of a MDIO bus multiplexer. It allows to choose between
+the internal mdio bus leading to the embedded 10/100 PHY or the external
+MDIO bus.
+
+Required properties in addition to the generic multiplexer properties:
+- compatible : amlogic,g12a-mdio-mux
+- reg: physical address and length of the multiplexer/glue registers
+- clocks: list of clock phandle, one for each entry clock-names.
+- clock-names: should contain the following:
+  * "pclk"   : peripheral clock.
+  * "clkin0" : platform crytal
+  * "clkin1" : SoC 50MHz MPLL
+
+Example :
+
+mdio_mux: mdio-multiplexer@4c000 {
+	compatible = "amlogic,g12a-mdio-mux";
+	reg = <0x0 0x4c000 0x0 0xa4>;
+	clocks = <&clkc CLKID_ETH_PHY>,
+		 <&xtal>,
+		 <&clkc CLKID_MPLL_5OM>;
+	clock-names = "pclk", "clkin0", "clkin1";
+	mdio-parent-bus = <&mdio0>;
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+
+	ext_mdio: mdio@0 {
+		reg = <0>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+	};
+
+	int_mdio: mdio@1 {
+		reg = <1>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+
+		internal_ephy: ethernet-phy@8 {
+			compatible = "ethernet-phy-id0180.3301",
+				     "ethernet-phy-ieee802.3-c22";
+			interrupts = <GIC_SPI 9 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
+			reg = <8>;
+			max-speed = <100>;
+		};
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mdio-mux-multiplexer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mdio-mux-multiplexer.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..534e38058fe0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mdio-mux-multiplexer.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+Properties for an MDIO bus multiplexer consumer device
+
+This is a special case of MDIO mux  when MDIO mux is defined as a consumer
+of a mux producer device. The mux producer can be of any type like mmio mux
+producer, gpio mux producer or generic register based mux producer.
+
+Required properties in addition to the MDIO Bus multiplexer properties:
+
+- compatible : should be "mmio-mux-multiplexer"
+- mux-controls : mux controller node to use for operating the mux
+- mdio-parent-bus : phandle to the parent MDIO bus.
+
+each child node of mdio bus multiplexer consumer device represent a mdio
+bus.
+
+for more information please refer
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mux/mux-controller.txt
+and Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mdio-mux.txt
+
+Example:
+In below example the Mux producer and consumer are separate nodes.
+
+&i2c0 {
+	fpga@66 { // fpga connected to i2c
+		compatible = "fsl,lx2160aqds-fpga", "fsl,fpga-qixis-i2c",
+			     "simple-mfd";
+		reg = <0x66>;
+
+		mux: mux-controller { // Mux Producer
+			compatible = "reg-mux";
+			#mux-control-cells = <1>;
+			mux-reg-masks = <0x54 0xf8>, /* 0: reg 0x54, bits 7:3 */
+					<0x54 0x07>; /* 1: reg 0x54, bits 2:0 */
+		};
+	};
+};
+
+mdio-mux-1 { // Mux consumer
+	compatible = "mdio-mux-multiplexer";
+	mux-controls = <&mux 0>;
+	mdio-parent-bus = <&emdio1>;
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+
+	mdio@0 {
+		reg = <0x0>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+	};
+
+	mdio@8 {
+		reg = <0x8>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+	};
+
+	..
+	..
+};
+
+mdio-mux-2 { // Mux consumer
+	compatible = "mdio-mux-multiplexer";
+	mux-controls = <&mux 1>;
+	mdio-parent-bus = <&emdio2>;
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+
+	mdio@0 {
+		reg = <0x0>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+	};
+
+	mdio@1 {
+		reg = <0x1>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+	};
+
+	..
+	..
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mediatek-bluetooth.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mediatek-bluetooth.txt
index 14ceb2a5b4e8..41a7dcc80f5b 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mediatek-bluetooth.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mediatek-bluetooth.txt
@@ -33,3 +33,67 @@ Example:
 			clock-names = "ref";
 		};
 	};
+
+MediaTek UART based Bluetooth Devices
+==================================
+
+This device is a serial attached device to UART device and thus it must be a
+child node of the serial node with UART.
+
+Please refer to the following documents for generic properties:
+
+	Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/slave-device.txt
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible:	Must be
+		  "mediatek,mt7663u-bluetooth": for MT7663U device
+		  "mediatek,mt7668u-bluetooth": for MT7668U device
+- vcc-supply:	Main voltage regulator
+- pinctrl-names: Should be "default", "runtime"
+- pinctrl-0: Should contain UART RXD low when the device is powered up to
+	     enter proper bootstrap mode.
+- pinctrl-1: Should contain UART mode pin ctrl
+
+Optional properties:
+
+- reset-gpios:	GPIO used to reset the device whose initial state keeps low,
+		if the GPIO is missing, then board-level design should be
+		guaranteed.
+- current-speed:  Current baud rate of the device whose defaults to 921600
+
+Example:
+
+	uart1_pins_boot: uart1-default {
+		pins-dat {
+			pinmux = <MT7623_PIN_81_URXD1_FUNC_GPIO81>;
+			output-low;
+		};
+	};
+
+	uart1_pins_runtime: uart1-runtime {
+		pins-dat {
+			pinmux = <MT7623_PIN_81_URXD1_FUNC_URXD1>,
+				 <MT7623_PIN_82_UTXD1_FUNC_UTXD1>;
+		};
+	};
+
+	uart1: serial@11003000 {
+		compatible = "mediatek,mt7623-uart",
+			     "mediatek,mt6577-uart";
+		reg = <0 0x11003000 0 0x400>;
+		interrupts = <GIC_SPI 52 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW>;
+		clocks = <&pericfg CLK_PERI_UART1_SEL>,
+			 <&pericfg CLK_PERI_UART1>;
+		clock-names = "baud", "bus";
+
+		bluetooth {
+			compatible = "mediatek,mt7663u-bluetooth";
+			vcc-supply = <&reg_5v>;
+			reset-gpios = <&pio 24 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>;
+			pinctrl-names = "default", "runtime";
+			pinctrl-0 = <&uart1_pins_boot>;
+			pinctrl-1 = <&uart1_pins_runtime>;
+			current-speed = <921600>;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/microchip,enc28j60.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/microchip,enc28j60.txt
index 24626e082b83..a8275921a896 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/microchip,enc28j60.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/microchip,enc28j60.txt
@@ -21,8 +21,9 @@ Optional properties:
 - spi-max-frequency: Maximum frequency of the SPI bus when accessing the ENC28J60.
   According to the ENC28J80 datasheet, the chip allows a maximum of 20 MHz, however,
   board designs may need to limit this value.
-- local-mac-address: See ethernet.txt in the same directory.
 
+The MAC address will be determined using the optional properties
+defined in ethernet.txt.
 
 Example (for NXP i.MX28 with pin control stuff for GPIO irq):
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/microchip,lan78xx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/microchip,lan78xx.txt
index 76786a0f6d3d..11a679530ae6 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/microchip,lan78xx.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/microchip,lan78xx.txt
@@ -7,9 +7,8 @@ The Device Tree properties, if present, override the OTP and EEPROM.
 Required properties:
 - compatible: Should be one of "usb424,7800", "usb424,7801" or "usb424,7850".
 
-Optional properties:
-- local-mac-address:   see ethernet.txt
-- mac-address:         see ethernet.txt
+The MAC address will be determined using the optional properties
+defined in ethernet.txt.
 
 Optional properties of the embedded PHY:
 - microchip,led-modes: a 0..4 element vector, with each element configuring
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nixge.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nixge.txt
index e55af7f0881a..85d7240a9b20 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nixge.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nixge.txt
@@ -1,17 +1,53 @@
 * NI XGE Ethernet controller
 
 Required properties:
-- compatible: Should be "ni,xge-enet-2.00"
-- reg: Address and length of the register set for the device
+- compatible: Should be "ni,xge-enet-3.00", but can be "ni,xge-enet-2.00" for
+              older device trees with DMA engines co-located in the address map,
+              with the one reg entry to describe the whole device.
+- reg: Address and length of the register set for the device. It contains the
+       information of registers in the same order as described by reg-names.
+- reg-names: Should contain the reg names
+	"dma":  DMA engine control and status region
+        "ctrl": MDIO and PHY control and status region
 - interrupts: Should contain tx and rx interrupt
 - interrupt-names: Should be "rx" and "tx"
 - phy-mode: See ethernet.txt file in the same directory.
-- phy-handle: See ethernet.txt file in the same directory.
 - nvmem-cells: Phandle of nvmem cell containing the MAC address
 - nvmem-cell-names: Should be "address"
 
+Optional properties:
+- mdio subnode to indicate presence of MDIO controller
+- fixed-link : Assume a fixed link. See fixed-link.txt in the same directory.
+  Use instead of phy-handle.
+- phy-handle: See ethernet.txt file in the same directory.
+
 Examples (10G generic PHY):
 	nixge0: ethernet@40000000 {
+		compatible = "ni,xge-enet-3.00";
+		reg = <0x40000000 0x4000
+		       0x41002000 0x2000>;
+		reg-names = "dma", "ctrl";
+
+		nvmem-cells = <&eth1_addr>;
+		nvmem-cell-names = "address";
+
+		interrupts = <0 29 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, <0 30 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
+		interrupt-names = "rx", "tx";
+		interrupt-parent = <&intc>;
+
+		phy-mode = "xgmii";
+		phy-handle = <&ethernet_phy1>;
+
+		mdio {
+			ethernet_phy1: ethernet-phy@4 {
+				compatible = "ethernet-phy-ieee802.3-c45";
+				reg = <4>;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+
+Examples (10G generic PHY, no MDIO):
+	nixge0: ethernet@40000000 {
 		compatible = "ni,xge-enet-2.00";
 		reg = <0x40000000 0x6000>;
 
@@ -24,9 +60,33 @@ Examples (10G generic PHY):
 
 		phy-mode = "xgmii";
 		phy-handle = <&ethernet_phy1>;
+	};
+
+Examples (1G generic fixed-link + MDIO):
+	nixge0: ethernet@40000000 {
+		compatible = "ni,xge-enet-2.00";
+		reg = <0x40000000 0x6000>;
 
-		ethernet_phy1: ethernet-phy@4 {
-			compatible = "ethernet-phy-ieee802.3-c45";
-			reg = <4>;
+		nvmem-cells = <&eth1_addr>;
+		nvmem-cell-names = "address";
+
+		interrupts = <0 29 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, <0 30 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
+		interrupt-names = "rx", "tx";
+		interrupt-parent = <&intc>;
+
+		phy-mode = "xgmii";
+
+		fixed-link {
+			speed = <1000>;
+			pause;
+			link-gpios = <&gpio0 63 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>;
+		};
+
+		mdio {
+			ethernet_phy1: ethernet-phy@4 {
+				compatible = "ethernet-phy-ieee802.3-c22";
+				reg = <4>;
+			};
 		};
+
 	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/phy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/phy.txt
index 17c1d2bd00f6..9b9e5b1765dd 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/phy.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/phy.txt
@@ -51,6 +51,10 @@ Optional Properties:
   to ensure the integrated PHY is used. The absence of this property indicates
   the muxers should be configured so that the external PHY is used.
 
+- resets: The reset-controller phandle and specifier for the PHY reset signal.
+
+- reset-names: Must be "phy" for the PHY reset signal.
+
 - reset-gpios: The GPIO phandle and specifier for the PHY reset signal.
 
 - reset-assert-us: Delay after the reset was asserted in microseconds.
@@ -67,6 +71,8 @@ ethernet-phy@0 {
 	interrupts = <35 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING>;
 	reg = <0>;
 
+	resets = <&rst 8>;
+	reset-names = "phy";
 	reset-gpios = <&gpio1 4 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>;
 	reset-assert-us = <1000>;
 	reset-deassert-us = <2000>;
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/qca,qca7000.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/qca,qca7000.txt
index e4a8a51086df..21c36e524993 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/qca,qca7000.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/qca,qca7000.txt
@@ -23,7 +23,6 @@ Optional properties:
 		      Numbers smaller than 1000000 or greater than 16000000
 		      are invalid. Missing the property will set the SPI
 		      frequency to 8000000 Hertz.
-- local-mac-address : see ./ethernet.txt
 - qca,legacy-mode   : Set the SPI data transfer of the QCA7000 to legacy mode.
 		      In this mode the SPI master must toggle the chip select
 		      between each data word. In burst mode these gaps aren't
@@ -31,6 +30,9 @@ Optional properties:
 		      the QCA7000 is setup via GPIO pin strapping. If the
 		      property is missing the driver defaults to burst mode.
 
+The MAC address will be determined using the optional properties
+defined in ethernet.txt.
+
 SPI Example:
 
 /* Freescale i.MX28 SPI master*/
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/qcom,ethqos.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/qcom,ethqos.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..fcf5035810b5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/qcom,ethqos.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+Qualcomm Ethernet ETHQOS device
+
+This documents dwmmac based ethernet device which supports Gigabit
+ethernet for version v2.3.0 onwards.
+
+This device has following properties:
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible: Should be qcom,qcs404-ethqos"
+
+- reg: Address and length of the register set for the device
+
+- reg-names: Should contain register names "stmmaceth", "rgmii"
+
+- clocks: Should contain phandle to clocks
+
+- clock-names: Should contain clock names "stmmaceth", "pclk",
+		"ptp_ref", "rgmii"
+
+- interrupts: Should contain phandle to interrupts
+
+- interrupt-names: Should contain interrupt names "macirq", "eth_lpi"
+
+Rest of the properties are defined in stmmac.txt file in same directory
+
+
+Example:
+
+ethernet: ethernet@7a80000 {
+	compatible = "qcom,qcs404-ethqos";
+	reg = <0x07a80000 0x10000>,
+		<0x07a96000 0x100>;
+	reg-names = "stmmaceth", "rgmii";
+	clock-names = "stmmaceth", "pclk", "ptp_ref", "rgmii";
+	clocks = <&gcc GCC_ETH_AXI_CLK>,
+		<&gcc GCC_ETH_SLAVE_AHB_CLK>,
+		<&gcc GCC_ETH_PTP_CLK>,
+		<&gcc GCC_ETH_RGMII_CLK>;
+	interrupts = <GIC_SPI 56 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>,
+			<GIC_SPI 55 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
+	interrupt-names = "macirq", "eth_lpi";
+	snps,reset-gpio = <&tlmm 60 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>;
+	snps,reset-active-low;
+
+	snps,txpbl = <8>;
+	snps,rxpbl = <2>;
+	snps,aal;
+	snps,tso;
+
+	phy-handle = <&phy1>;
+	phy-mode = "rgmii";
+
+	mdio {
+		#address-cells = <0x1>;
+		#size-cells = <0x0>;
+		compatible = "snps,dwmac-mdio";
+		phy1: phy@4 {
+			device_type = "ethernet-phy";
+			reg = <0x4>;
+		};
+	};
+
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/qualcomm-bluetooth.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/qualcomm-bluetooth.txt
index 824c0e23c544..7ef6118abd3d 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/qualcomm-bluetooth.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/qualcomm-bluetooth.txt
@@ -11,20 +11,21 @@ Required properties:
  - compatible: should contain one of the following:
    * "qcom,qca6174-bt"
    * "qcom,wcn3990-bt"
+   * "qcom,wcn3998-bt"
 
 Optional properties for compatible string qcom,qca6174-bt:
 
  - enable-gpios: gpio specifier used to enable chip
  - clocks: clock provided to the controller (SUSCLK_32KHZ)
 
-Required properties for compatible string qcom,wcn3990-bt:
+Required properties for compatible string qcom,wcn399x-bt:
 
  - vddio-supply: VDD_IO supply regulator handle.
  - vddxo-supply: VDD_XO supply regulator handle.
  - vddrf-supply: VDD_RF supply regulator handle.
  - vddch0-supply: VDD_CH0 supply regulator handle.
 
-Optional properties for compatible string qcom,wcn3990-bt:
+Optional properties for compatible string qcom,wcn399x-bt:
 
  - max-speed: see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/slave-device.txt
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/samsung-sxgbe.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/samsung-sxgbe.txt
index 46e591178911..2cff6d8a585a 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/samsung-sxgbe.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/samsung-sxgbe.txt
@@ -21,10 +21,12 @@ Required properties:
   range.
 
 Optional properties:
-- mac-address: 6 bytes, mac address
 - max-frame-size: Maximum Transfer Unit (IEEE defined MTU), rather
 		  than the maximum frame size.
 
+The MAC address will be determined using the optional properties
+defined in ethernet.txt.
+
 Example:
 
 	aliases {
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/snps,dwc-qos-ethernet.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/snps,dwc-qos-ethernet.txt
index 36f1aef585f0..ad3c6e109ce1 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/snps,dwc-qos-ethernet.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/snps,dwc-qos-ethernet.txt
@@ -103,8 +103,6 @@ Required properties:
 
 Optional properties:
 - dma-coherent: Present if dma operations are coherent
-- mac-address: See ethernet.txt in the same directory
-- local-mac-address: See ethernet.txt in the same directory
 - phy-reset-gpios: Phandle and specifier for any GPIO used to reset the PHY.
   See ../gpio/gpio.txt.
 - snps,en-lpi: If present it enables use of the AXI low-power interface
@@ -133,6 +131,9 @@ Optional properties:
     - device_type: Must be "ethernet-phy".
     - fixed-mode device tree subnode: see fixed-link.txt in the same directory
 
+The MAC address will be determined using the optional properties
+defined in ethernet.txt.
+
 Examples:
 ethernet2@40010000 {
 	clock-names = "phy_ref_clk", "apb_pclk";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/socionext,uniphier-ave4.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/socionext,uniphier-ave4.txt
index fc8f01718690..4e85fc495e87 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/socionext,uniphier-ave4.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/socionext,uniphier-ave4.txt
@@ -31,8 +31,8 @@ Required properties:
  - socionext,syscon-phy-mode: A phandle to syscon with one argument
 	that configures phy mode. The argument is the ID of MAC instance.
 
-Optional properties:
- - local-mac-address: See ethernet.txt in the same directory.
+The MAC address will be determined using the optional properties
+defined in ethernet.txt.
 
 Required subnode:
  - mdio: A container for child nodes representing phy nodes.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/socionext-netsec.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/socionext-netsec.txt
index 0cff94fb0433..9d6c9feb12ff 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/socionext-netsec.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/socionext-netsec.txt
@@ -26,11 +26,12 @@ Required properties:
 Optional properties: (See ethernet.txt file in the same directory)
 - dma-coherent: Boolean property, must only be present if memory
 	accesses performed by the device are cache coherent.
-- local-mac-address: See ethernet.txt in the same directory.
-- mac-address: See ethernet.txt in the same directory.
 - max-speed: See ethernet.txt in the same directory.
 - max-frame-size: See ethernet.txt in the same directory.
 
+The MAC address will be determined using the optional properties
+defined in ethernet.txt.
+
 Example:
 	eth0: ethernet@522d0000 {
 		compatible = "socionext,synquacer-netsec";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/stm32-dwmac.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/stm32-dwmac.txt
index 1341012722aa..a90eef11dc46 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/stm32-dwmac.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/stm32-dwmac.txt
@@ -14,8 +14,7 @@ Required properties:
 - clock-names: Should be "stmmaceth" for the host clock.
 	       Should be "mac-clk-tx" for the MAC TX clock.
 	       Should be "mac-clk-rx" for the MAC RX clock.
-	       For MPU family need to add also "ethstp" for power mode clock and,
-	                                       "syscfg-clk" for SYSCFG clock.
+	       For MPU family need to add also "ethstp" for power mode clock
 - interrupt-names: Should contain a list of interrupt names corresponding to
            the interrupts in the interrupts property, if available.
 		   Should be "macirq" for the main MAC IRQ
@@ -24,9 +23,9 @@ Required properties:
 	       encompases the glue register, and the offset of the control register.
 
 Optional properties:
-- clock-names:     For MPU family "mac-clk-ck" for PHY without quartz
-- st,int-phyclk (boolean) :  valid only where PHY do not have quartz and need to be clock
-	           by RCC
+- clock-names:     For MPU family "eth-ck" for PHY without quartz
+- st,eth-clk-sel (boolean) : set this property in RGMII PHY when you want to select RCC clock instead of ETH_CLK125.
+- st,eth-ref-clk-sel (boolean) :  set this property in RMII mode when you have PHY without crystal 50MHz and want to select RCC clock instead of ETH_REF_CLK.
 
 Example:
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/wireless/mediatek,mt76.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/wireless/mediatek,mt76.txt
index 0c17a0ec9b7b..7e675dafc256 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/wireless/mediatek,mt76.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/wireless/mediatek,mt76.txt
@@ -4,13 +4,21 @@ This node provides properties for configuring the MediaTek mt76xx wireless
 device. The node is expected to be specified as a child node of the PCI
 controller to which the wireless chip is connected.
 
+Alternatively, it can specify the wireless part of the MT7628/MT7688 SoC.
+For SoC, use the compatible string "mediatek,mt7628-wmac" and the following
+properties:
+
+- reg: Address and length of the register set for the device.
+- interrupts: Main device interrupt
+
 Optional properties:
 
-- mac-address: See ethernet.txt in the parent directory
-- local-mac-address: See ethernet.txt in the parent directory
 - ieee80211-freq-limit: See ieee80211.txt
 - mediatek,mtd-eeprom: Specify a MTD partition + offset containing EEPROM data
 
+The MAC address can as well be set with corresponding optional properties
+defined in net/ethernet.txt.
+
 Optional nodes:
 - led: Properties for a connected LED
   Optional properties:
@@ -30,3 +38,15 @@ Optional nodes:
 		};
 	};
 };
+
+MT7628 example:
+
+wmac: wmac@10300000 {
+	compatible = "mediatek,mt7628-wmac";
+	reg = <0x10300000 0x100000>;
+
+	interrupt-parent = <&cpuintc>;
+	interrupts = <6>;
+
+	mediatek,mtd-eeprom = <&factory 0x0000>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/wireless/qca,ath9k.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/wireless/qca,ath9k.txt
index b7396c8c271c..aaaeeb5f935b 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/wireless/qca,ath9k.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/wireless/qca,ath9k.txt
@@ -34,9 +34,9 @@ Optional properties:
 			ath9k wireless chip (in this case the calibration /
 			EEPROM data will be loaded from userspace using the
 			kernel firmware loader).
-- mac-address: See ethernet.txt in the parent directory
-- local-mac-address: See ethernet.txt in the parent directory
 
+The MAC address will be determined using the optional properties defined in
+net/ethernet.txt.
 
 In this example, the node is defined as child node of the PCI controller:
 &pci0 {
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/allwinner,sunxi-sid.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/allwinner,sunxi-sid.txt
index 99c4ba6a3f61..cfb18b4ef8f7 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/allwinner,sunxi-sid.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/allwinner,sunxi-sid.txt
@@ -8,11 +8,12 @@ Required properties:
   "allwinner,sun8i-h3-sid"
   "allwinner,sun50i-a64-sid"
   "allwinner,sun50i-h5-sid"
+  "allwinner,sun50i-h6-sid"
 
 - reg: Should contain registers location and length
 
 = Data cells =
-Are child nodes of qfprom, bindings of which as described in
+Are child nodes of sunxi-sid, bindings of which as described in
 bindings/nvmem/nvmem.txt
 
 Example for sun4i:
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/imx-ocotp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/imx-ocotp.txt
index 792bc5fafeb9..68f7d6fdd140 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/imx-ocotp.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/imx-ocotp.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
 Freescale i.MX6 On-Chip OTP Controller (OCOTP) device tree bindings
 
 This binding represents the on-chip eFuse OTP controller found on
-i.MX6Q/D, i.MX6DL/S, i.MX6SL, i.MX6SX, i.MX6UL and i.MX6SLL SoCs.
+i.MX6Q/D, i.MX6DL/S, i.MX6SL, i.MX6SX, i.MX6UL, i.MX6ULL/ULZ, i.MX6SLL,
+i.MX7D/S, i.MX7ULP and i.MX8MQ SoCs.
 
 Required properties:
 - compatible: should be one of
@@ -9,8 +10,11 @@ Required properties:
 	"fsl,imx6sl-ocotp" (i.MX6SL), or
 	"fsl,imx6sx-ocotp" (i.MX6SX),
 	"fsl,imx6ul-ocotp" (i.MX6UL),
+	"fsl,imx6ull-ocotp" (i.MX6ULL/ULZ),
 	"fsl,imx7d-ocotp" (i.MX7D/S),
 	"fsl,imx6sll-ocotp" (i.MX6SLL),
+	"fsl,imx7ulp-ocotp" (i.MX7ULP),
+	"fsl,imx8mq-ocotp" (i.MX8MQ),
 	followed by "syscon".
 - #address-cells : Should be 1
 - #size-cells : Should be 1
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/st,stm32-romem.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/st,stm32-romem.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..142a51d5a9be
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/st,stm32-romem.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+STMicroelectronics STM32 Factory-programmed data device tree bindings
+
+This represents STM32 Factory-programmed read only non-volatile area: locked
+flash, OTP, read-only HW regs... This contains various information such as:
+analog calibration data for temperature sensor (e.g. TS_CAL1, TS_CAL2),
+internal vref (VREFIN_CAL), unique device ID...
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible:		Should be one of:
+			"st,stm32f4-otp"
+			"st,stm32mp15-bsec"
+- reg:			Offset and length of factory-programmed area.
+- #address-cells:	Should be '<1>'.
+- #size-cells:		Should be '<1>'.
+
+Optional Data cells:
+- Must be child nodes as described in nvmem.txt.
+
+Example on stm32f4:
+	romem: nvmem@1fff7800 {
+		compatible = "st,stm32f4-otp";
+		reg = <0x1fff7800 0x400>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+
+		/* Data cells: ts_cal1 at 0x1fff7a2c */
+		ts_cal1: calib@22c {
+			reg = <0x22c 0x2>;
+		};
+		...
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/xlnx,zynqmp-nvmem.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/xlnx,zynqmp-nvmem.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4881561b3a02
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/xlnx,zynqmp-nvmem.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------
+=  Zynq UltraScale+ MPSoC nvmem firmware driver binding =
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------
+The nvmem_firmware node provides access to the hardware related data
+like soc revision, IDCODE... etc, By using the firmware interface.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: should be "xlnx,zynqmp-nvmem-fw"
+
+= Data cells =
+Are child nodes of silicon id, bindings of which as described in
+bindings/nvmem/nvmem.txt
+
+-------
+ Example
+-------
+firmware {
+	zynqmp_firmware: zynqmp-firmware {
+		compatible = "xlnx,zynqmp-firmware";
+		method = "smc";
+
+		nvmem_firmware {
+			compatible = "xlnx,zynqmp-nvmem-fw";
+			#address-cells = <1>;
+			#size-cells = <1>;
+
+			/* Data cells */
+			soc_revision: soc_revision {
+				reg = <0x0 0x4>;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+};
+
+= Data consumers =
+Are device nodes which consume nvmem data cells.
+
+For example:
+	pcap {
+		...
+
+		nvmem-cells = <&soc_revision>;
+		nvmem-cell-names = "soc_revision";
+
+		...
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/opp/opp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/opp/opp.txt
index c396c4c0af92..76b6c79604a5 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/opp/opp.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/opp/opp.txt
@@ -129,6 +129,9 @@ Optional properties:
 - opp-microamp-<name>: Named opp-microamp property. Similar to
   opp-microvolt-<name> property, but for microamp instead.
 
+- opp-level: A value representing the performance level of the device,
+  expressed as a 32-bit integer.
+
 - clock-latency-ns: Specifies the maximum possible transition latency (in
   nanoseconds) for switching to this OPP from any other OPP.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/altera-pcie.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/altera-pcie.txt
index 6c396f17c91a..816b244a221e 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/altera-pcie.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/altera-pcie.txt
@@ -1,11 +1,13 @@
 * Altera PCIe controller
 
 Required properties:
-- compatible :	should contain "altr,pcie-root-port-1.0"
+- compatible :	should contain "altr,pcie-root-port-1.0" or "altr,pcie-root-port-2.0"
 - reg:		a list of physical base address and length for TXS and CRA.
+		For "altr,pcie-root-port-2.0", additional HIP base address and length.
 - reg-names:	must include the following entries:
 		"Txs": TX slave port region
 		"Cra": Control register access region
+		"Hip": Hard IP region (if "altr,pcie-root-port-2.0")
 - interrupts:	specifies the interrupt source of the parent interrupt
 		controller.  The format of the interrupt specifier depends
 		on the parent interrupt controller.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/designware-pcie.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/designware-pcie.txt
index c124f9bc11f3..5561a1c060d0 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/designware-pcie.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/designware-pcie.txt
@@ -4,8 +4,11 @@ Required properties:
 - compatible:
 	"snps,dw-pcie" for RC mode;
 	"snps,dw-pcie-ep" for EP mode;
-- reg: Should contain the configuration address space.
-- reg-names: Must be "config" for the PCIe configuration space.
+- reg: For designware cores version < 4.80 contains the configuration
+       address space. For designware core version >= 4.80, contains
+       the configuration and ATU address space
+- reg-names: Must be "config" for the PCIe configuration space and "atu" for
+	     the ATU address space.
     (The old way of getting the configuration address space from "ranges"
     is deprecated and should be avoided.)
 - num-lanes: number of lanes to use
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/fsl,imx6q-pcie.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/fsl,imx6q-pcie.txt
index d514c1f2365f..a7f5f5afa0e6 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/fsl,imx6q-pcie.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/fsl,imx6q-pcie.txt
@@ -9,6 +9,7 @@ Required properties:
 	- "fsl,imx6sx-pcie",
 	- "fsl,imx6qp-pcie"
 	- "fsl,imx7d-pcie"
+	- "fsl,imx8mq-pcie"
 - reg: base address and length of the PCIe controller
 - interrupts: A list of interrupt outputs of the controller. Must contain an
   entry for each entry in the interrupt-names property.
@@ -45,7 +46,7 @@ Additional required properties for imx6sx-pcie:
   PCIE_PHY power domains
 - power-domain-names: Must be "pcie", "pcie_phy"
 
-Additional required properties for imx7d-pcie:
+Additional required properties for imx7d-pcie and imx8mq-pcie:
 - power-domains: Must be set to a phandle pointing to PCIE_PHY power domain
 - resets: Must contain phandles to PCIe-related reset lines exposed by SRC
   IP block
@@ -53,6 +54,11 @@ Additional required properties for imx7d-pcie:
 	       - "pciephy"
 	       - "apps"
 	       - "turnoff"
+- fsl,imx7d-pcie-phy: A phandle to an fsl,imx7d-pcie-phy node.
+
+Additional required properties for imx8mq-pcie:
+- clock-names: Must include the following additional entries:
+	- "pcie_aux"
 
 Example:
 
@@ -79,3 +85,13 @@ Example:
 		clocks = <&clks 144>, <&clks 206>, <&clks 189>;
 		clock-names = "pcie", "pcie_bus", "pcie_phy";
 	};
+
+* Freescale i.MX7d PCIe PHY
+
+This is the PHY associated with the IMX7d PCIe controller.  It's used by the
+PCI-e controller via the fsl,imx7d-pcie-phy phandle.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible:
+	- "fsl,imx7d-pcie-phy"
+- reg: base address and length of the PCIe PHY controller
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/layerscape-pci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/layerscape-pci.txt
index 9b2b8d66d1f4..e20ceaab9b38 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/layerscape-pci.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/layerscape-pci.txt
@@ -13,6 +13,7 @@ information.
 
 Required properties:
 - compatible: should contain the platform identifier such as:
+  RC mode:
         "fsl,ls1021a-pcie"
         "fsl,ls2080a-pcie", "fsl,ls2085a-pcie"
         "fsl,ls2088a-pcie"
@@ -20,6 +21,8 @@ Required properties:
         "fsl,ls1046a-pcie"
         "fsl,ls1043a-pcie"
         "fsl,ls1012a-pcie"
+  EP mode:
+	"fsl,ls1046a-pcie-ep", "fsl,ls-pcie-ep"
 - reg: base addresses and lengths of the PCIe controller register blocks.
 - interrupts: A list of interrupt outputs of the controller. Must contain an
   entry for each entry in the interrupt-names property.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/pci-keystone.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/pci-keystone.txt
index 2030ee0dc4f9..47202a2938f2 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/pci-keystone.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/pci-keystone.txt
@@ -11,16 +11,24 @@ described here as well as properties that are not applicable.
 
 Required Properties:-
 
-compatibility: "ti,keystone-pcie"
-reg:	index 1 is the base address and length of DW application registers.
-	index 2 is the base address and length of PCI device ID register.
+compatibility: Should be "ti,keystone-pcie" for RC on Keystone2 SoC
+	       Should be "ti,am654-pcie-rc" for RC on AM654x SoC
+reg: Three register ranges as listed in the reg-names property
+reg-names: "dbics" for the DesignWare PCIe registers, "app" for the
+	   TI specific application registers, "config" for the
+	   configuration space address
 
 pcie_msi_intc : Interrupt controller device node for MSI IRQ chip
 	interrupt-cells: should be set to 1
 	interrupts: GIC interrupt lines connected to PCI MSI interrupt lines
+	(required if the compatible is "ti,keystone-pcie")
+msi-map: As specified in Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/pci-msi.txt
+	 (required if the compatible is "ti,am654-pcie-rc".
 
 ti,syscon-pcie-id : phandle to the device control module required to set device
 		    id and vendor id.
+ti,syscon-pcie-mode : phandle to the device control module required to configure
+		      PCI in either RC mode or EP mode.
 
  Example:
 	pcie_msi_intc: msi-interrupt-controller {
@@ -61,3 +69,47 @@ Optional properties:-
 DesignWare DT Properties not applicable for Keystone PCI
 
 1. pcie_bus clock-names not used.  Instead, a phandle to phys is used.
+
+AM654 PCIe Endpoint
+===================
+
+Required Properties:-
+
+compatibility: Should be "ti,am654-pcie-ep" for EP on AM654x SoC
+reg: Four register ranges as listed in the reg-names property
+reg-names: "dbics" for the DesignWare PCIe registers, "app" for the
+	   TI specific application registers, "atu" for the
+	   Address Translation Unit configuration registers and
+	   "addr_space" used to map remote RC address space
+num-ib-windows: As specified in
+		Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/designware-pcie.txt
+num-ob-windows: As specified in
+		Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/designware-pcie.txt
+num-lanes: As specified in
+	   Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/designware-pcie.txt
+power-domains: As documented by the generic PM domain bindings in
+	       Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/power_domain.txt.
+ti,syscon-pcie-mode: phandle to the device control module required to configure
+		      PCI in either RC mode or EP mode.
+
+Optional properties:-
+
+phys: list of PHY specifiers (used by generic PHY framework)
+phy-names: must be "pcie-phy0", "pcie-phy1", "pcie-phyN".. based on the
+               number of lanes as specified in *num-lanes* property.
+("phys" and "phy-names" DT bindings are specified in
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-bindings.txt)
+interrupts: platform interrupt for error interrupts.
+
+pcie-ep {
+	compatible = "ti,am654-pcie-ep";
+	reg =  <0x5500000 0x1000>, <0x5501000 0x1000>,
+	       <0x10000000 0x8000000>, <0x5506000 0x1000>;
+	reg-names = "app", "dbics", "addr_space", "atu";
+	power-domains = <&k3_pds 120>;
+	ti,syscon-pcie-mode = <&pcie0_mode>;
+	num-lanes = <1>;
+	num-ib-windows = <16>;
+	num-ob-windows = <16>;
+	interrupts = <GIC_SPI 340 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/pci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/pci.txt
index c77981c5dd18..92c01db610df 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/pci.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/pci.txt
@@ -24,3 +24,53 @@ driver implementation may support the following properties:
    unsupported link speed, for instance, trying to do training for
    unsupported link speed, etc.  Must be '4' for gen4, '3' for gen3, '2'
    for gen2, and '1' for gen1. Any other values are invalid.
+
+PCI-PCI Bridge properties
+-------------------------
+
+PCIe root ports and switch ports may be described explicitly in the device
+tree, as children of the host bridge node. Even though those devices are
+discoverable by probing, it might be necessary to describe properties that
+aren't provided by standard PCIe capabilities.
+
+Required properties:
+
+- reg:
+   Identifies the PCI-PCI bridge. As defined in the IEEE Std 1275-1994
+   document, it is a five-cell address encoded as (phys.hi phys.mid
+   phys.lo size.hi size.lo). phys.hi should contain the device's BDF as
+   0b00000000 bbbbbbbb dddddfff 00000000. The other cells should be zero.
+
+   The bus number is defined by firmware, through the standard bridge
+   configuration mechanism. If this port is a switch port, then firmware
+   allocates the bus number and writes it into the Secondary Bus Number
+   register of the bridge directly above this port. Otherwise, the bus
+   number of a root port is the first number in the bus-range property,
+   defaulting to zero.
+
+   If firmware leaves the ARI Forwarding Enable bit set in the bridge
+   above this port, then phys.hi contains the 8-bit function number as
+   0b00000000 bbbbbbbb ffffffff 00000000. Note that the PCIe specification
+   recommends that firmware only leaves ARI enabled when it knows that the
+   OS is ARI-aware.
+
+Optional properties:
+
+- external-facing:
+   When present, the port is external-facing. All bridges and endpoints
+   downstream of this port are external to the machine. The OS can, for
+   example, use this information to identify devices that cannot be
+   trusted with relaxed DMA protection, as users could easily attach
+   malicious devices to this port.
+
+Example:
+
+pcie@10000000 {
+	compatible = "pci-host-ecam-generic";
+	...
+	pcie@0008 {
+		/* Root port 00:01.0 is external-facing */
+		reg = <0x00000800 0 0 0 0>;
+		external-facing;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/rcar-pci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/rcar-pci.txt
index 976ef7bfff93..6904882a0e94 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/rcar-pci.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/rcar-pci.txt
@@ -3,6 +3,7 @@
 Required properties:
 compatible: "renesas,pcie-r8a7743" for the R8A7743 SoC;
 	    "renesas,pcie-r8a7744" for the R8A7744 SoC;
+	    "renesas,pcie-r8a774c0" for the R8A774C0 SoC;
 	    "renesas,pcie-r8a7779" for the R8A7779 SoC;
 	    "renesas,pcie-r8a7790" for the R8A7790 SoC;
 	    "renesas,pcie-r8a7791" for the R8A7791 SoC;
@@ -13,7 +14,8 @@ compatible: "renesas,pcie-r8a7743" for the R8A7743 SoC;
 	    "renesas,pcie-r8a77990" for the R8A77990 SoC;
 	    "renesas,pcie-rcar-gen2" for a generic R-Car Gen2 or
 				     RZ/G1 compatible device.
-	    "renesas,pcie-rcar-gen3" for a generic R-Car Gen3 compatible device.
+	    "renesas,pcie-rcar-gen3" for a generic R-Car Gen3 or
+				     RZ/G2 compatible device.
 
 	    When compatible with the generic version, nodes must list the
 	    SoC-specific version corresponding to the platform first
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/ti-pci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/ti-pci.txt
index 452fe48c4fdd..d5cbfe6b0d89 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/ti-pci.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/ti-pci.txt
@@ -1,14 +1,21 @@
 TI PCI Controllers
 
 PCIe DesignWare Controller
- - compatible: Should be "ti,dra7-pcie" for RC
-	       Should be "ti,dra7-pcie-ep" for EP
+ - compatible: Should be "ti,dra7-pcie" for RC (deprecated)
+	       Should be "ti,dra7-pcie-ep" for EP (deprecated)
+	       Should be "ti,dra746-pcie-rc" for dra74x/dra76 in RC mode
+	       Should be "ti,dra746-pcie-ep" for dra74x/dra76 in EP mode
+	       Should be "ti,dra726-pcie-rc" for dra72x in RC mode
+	       Should be "ti,dra726-pcie-ep" for dra72x in EP mode
  - phys : list of PHY specifiers (used by generic PHY framework)
  - phy-names : must be "pcie-phy0", "pcie-phy1", "pcie-phyN".. based on the
 	       number of PHYs as specified in *phys* property.
  - ti,hwmods : Name of the hwmod associated to the pcie, "pcie<X>",
 	       where <X> is the instance number of the pcie from the HW spec.
  - num-lanes as specified in ../designware-pcie.txt
+ - ti,syscon-lane-sel : phandle/offset pair. Phandle to the system control
+			module and the register offset to specify lane
+			selection.
 
 HOST MODE
 =========
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/brcm,stingray-usb-phy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/brcm,stingray-usb-phy.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4ba298966af9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/brcm,stingray-usb-phy.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+Broadcom Stingray USB PHY
+
+Required properties:
+ - compatible : should be one of the listed compatibles
+	- "brcm,sr-usb-combo-phy" is combo PHY has two PHYs, one SS and one HS.
+	- "brcm,sr-usb-hs-phy" is a single HS PHY.
+ - reg: offset and length of the PHY blocks registers
+ - #phy-cells:
+   - Must be 1 for brcm,sr-usb-combo-phy as it expects one argument to indicate
+     the PHY number of two PHYs. 0 for HS PHY and 1 for SS PHY.
+   - Must be 0 for brcm,sr-usb-hs-phy.
+
+Refer to phy/phy-bindings.txt for the generic PHY binding properties
+
+Example:
+	usbphy0: usb-phy@0 {
+		compatible = "brcm,sr-usb-combo-phy";
+		reg = <0x00000000 0x100>;
+		#phy-cells = <1>;
+	};
+
+	usbphy1: usb-phy@10000 {
+		compatible = "brcm,sr-usb-combo-phy";
+		reg = <0x00010000 0x100>,
+		#phy-cells = <1>;
+	};
+
+	usbphy2: usb-phy@20000 {
+		compatible = "brcm,sr-usb-hs-phy";
+		reg = <0x00020000 0x100>,
+		#phy-cells = <0>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/cdns,dphy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/cdns,dphy.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1095bc4e72d9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/cdns,dphy.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+Cadence DPHY
+============
+
+Cadence DPHY block.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: should be set to "cdns,dphy".
+- reg: physical base address and length of the DPHY registers.
+- clocks: DPHY reference clocks.
+- clock-names: must contain "psm" and "pll_ref".
+- #phy-cells: must be set to 0.
+
+Example:
+	dphy0: dphy@fd0e0000{
+		compatible = "cdns,dphy";
+		reg = <0x0 0xfd0e0000 0x0 0x1000>;
+		clocks = <&psm_clk>, <&pll_ref_clk>;
+		clock-names = "psm", "pll_ref";
+		#phy-cells = <0>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/fsl,imx8mq-usb-phy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/fsl,imx8mq-usb-phy.txt
index a22e853d710c..ed47e5cd067e 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/fsl,imx8mq-usb-phy.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/fsl,imx8mq-usb-phy.txt
@@ -7,6 +7,9 @@ Required properties:
 - clocks:	phandles to the clocks for each clock listed in clock-names
 - clock-names:	must contain "phy"
 
+Optional properties:
+- vbus-supply: A phandle to the regulator for USB VBUS.
+
 Example:
 	usb3_phy0: phy@381f0040 {
 		compatible = "fsl,imx8mq-usb-phy";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/meson-g12a-usb2-phy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/meson-g12a-usb2-phy.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a6ebc3dea159
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/meson-g12a-usb2-phy.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+* Amlogic G12A USB2 PHY binding
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible:	Should be "amlogic,meson-g12a-usb2-phy"
+- reg:		The base address and length of the registers
+- #phys-cells:	must be 0 (see phy-bindings.txt in this directory)
+- clocks:	a phandle to the clock of this PHY
+- clock-names:	must be "xtal"
+- resets:	a phandle to the reset line of this PHY
+- reset-names:	must be "phy"
+- phy-supply:	see phy-bindings.txt in this directory
+
+Example:
+	usb2_phy0: phy@36000 {
+		compatible = "amlogic,g12a-usb2-phy";
+		reg = <0x0 0x36000 0x0 0x2000>;
+		clocks = <&xtal>;
+		clock-names = "xtal";
+		resets = <&reset RESET_USB_PHY21>;
+		reset-names = "phy";
+		#phy-cells = <0>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/meson-g12a-usb3-pcie-phy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/meson-g12a-usb3-pcie-phy.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7cfc17e2df31
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/meson-g12a-usb3-pcie-phy.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+* Amlogic G12A USB3 + PCIE Combo PHY binding
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible:	Should be "amlogic,meson-g12a-usb3-pcie-phy"
+- #phys-cells:	must be 1. The cell number is used to select the phy mode
+  as defined in <dt-bindings/phy/phy.h> between PHY_TYPE_USB3 and PHY_TYPE_PCIE
+- reg:		The base address and length of the registers
+- clocks:	a phandle to the 100MHz reference clock of this PHY
+- clock-names:	must be "ref_clk"
+- resets:	phandle to the reset lines for the PHY control
+- reset-names:	must be "phy"
+
+Example:
+	usb3_pcie_phy: phy@46000 {
+		compatible = "amlogic,g12a-usb3-pcie-phy";
+		reg = <0x0 0x46000 0x0 0x2000>;
+		clocks = <&clkc CLKID_PCIE_PLL>;
+		clock-names = "ref_clk";
+		resets = <&reset RESET_PCIE_PHY>;
+		reset-names = "phy";
+		#phy-cells = <1>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/nvidia,tegra124-xusb-padctl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/nvidia,tegra124-xusb-padctl.txt
index 3742c152c467..daedb15f322e 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/nvidia,tegra124-xusb-padctl.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/nvidia,tegra124-xusb-padctl.txt
@@ -36,11 +36,20 @@ Required properties:
   - Tegra124: "nvidia,tegra124-xusb-padctl"
   - Tegra132: "nvidia,tegra132-xusb-padctl", "nvidia,tegra124-xusb-padctl"
   - Tegra210: "nvidia,tegra210-xusb-padctl"
+  - Tegra186: "nvidia,tegra186-xusb-padctl"
 - reg: Physical base address and length of the controller's registers.
 - resets: Must contain an entry for each entry in reset-names.
 - reset-names: Must include the following entries:
   - "padctl"
 
+For Tegra186:
+- avdd-pll-erefeut-supply: UPHY brick and reference clock as well as UTMI PHY
+  power supply. Must supply 1.8 V.
+- avdd-usb-supply: USB I/Os, VBUS, ID, REXT, D+/D- power supply. Must supply
+  3.3 V.
+- vclamp-usb-supply: Bias rail for USB pad. Must supply 1.8 V.
+- vddio-hsic-supply: HSIC PHY power supply. Must supply 1.2 V.
+
 
 Pad nodes:
 ==========
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-armada38x-comphy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-armada38x-comphy.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ad49e5c01334
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-armada38x-comphy.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+mvebu armada 38x comphy driver
+------------------------------
+
+This comphy controller can be found on Marvell Armada 38x. It provides a
+number of shared PHYs used by various interfaces (network, sata, usb,
+PCIe...).
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible: should be "marvell,armada-380-comphy"
+- reg: should contain the comphy register location and length.
+- #address-cells: should be 1.
+- #size-cells: should be 0.
+
+A sub-node is required for each comphy lane provided by the comphy.
+
+Required properties (child nodes):
+
+- reg: comphy lane number.
+- #phy-cells : from the generic phy bindings, must be 1. Defines the
+               input port to use for a given comphy lane.
+
+Example:
+
+	comphy: phy@18300 {
+		compatible = "marvell,armada-380-comphy";
+		reg = <0x18300 0x100>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+
+		cpm_comphy0: phy@0 {
+			reg = <0>;
+			#phy-cells = <1>;
+		};
+
+		cpm_comphy1: phy@1 {
+			reg = <1>;
+			#phy-cells = <1>;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-hi3660-usb3.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-hi3660-usb3.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e88ba7d92dcb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-hi3660-usb3.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+Hisilicon hi3660 USB PHY
+-----------------------
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: should be "hisilicon,hi3660-usb-phy"
+- #phy-cells: must be 0
+- hisilicon,pericrg-syscon: phandle of syscon used to control phy.
+- hisilicon,pctrl-syscon: phandle of syscon used to control phy.
+- hisilicon,eye-diagram-param: parameter set for phy
+Refer to phy/phy-bindings.txt for the generic PHY binding properties
+
+This is a subnode of usb3_otg_bc register node.
+
+Example:
+	usb3_otg_bc: usb3_otg_bc@ff200000 {
+		compatible = "syscon", "simple-mfd";
+		reg = <0x0 0xff200000 0x0 0x1000>;
+
+		usb-phy {
+			compatible = "hisilicon,hi3660-usb-phy";
+			#phy-cells = <0>;
+			hisilicon,pericrg-syscon = <&crg_ctrl>;
+			hisilicon,pctrl-syscon = <&pctrl>;
+			hisilicon,eye-diagram-param = <0x22466e4>;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-mtk-ufs.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-mtk-ufs.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5789029a1d42
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-mtk-ufs.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+MediaTek Universal Flash Storage (UFS) M-PHY binding
+--------------------------------------------------------
+
+UFS M-PHY nodes are defined to describe on-chip UFS M-PHY hardware macro.
+Each UFS M-PHY node should have its own node.
+
+To bind UFS M-PHY with UFS host controller, the controller node should
+contain a phandle reference to UFS M-PHY node.
+
+Required properties for UFS M-PHY nodes:
+- compatible         : Compatible list, contains the following controller:
+                       "mediatek,mt8183-ufsphy" for ufs phy
+                       persent on MT81xx chipsets.
+- reg                : Address and length of the UFS M-PHY register set.
+- #phy-cells         : This property shall be set to 0.
+- clocks             : List of phandle and clock specifier pairs.
+- clock-names        : List of clock input name strings sorted in the same
+                       order as the clocks property. Following clocks are
+                       mandatory.
+                       "unipro": Unipro core control clock.
+                       "mp": M-PHY core control clock.
+
+Example:
+
+	ufsphy: phy@11fa0000 {
+		compatible = "mediatek,mt8183-ufsphy";
+		reg = <0 0x11fa0000 0 0xc000>;
+		#phy-cells = <0>;
+
+		clocks = <&infracfg_ao INFRACFG_AO_UNIPRO_SCK_CG>,
+			 <&infracfg_ao INFRACFG_AO_UFS_MP_SAP_BCLK_CG>;
+		clock-names = "unipro", "mp";
+	};
+
+	ufshci@11270000 {
+		...
+		phys = <&ufsphy>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-mvebu-comphy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-mvebu-comphy.txt
index bfcf80341657..cf2cd86db267 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-mvebu-comphy.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-mvebu-comphy.txt
@@ -1,16 +1,27 @@
-mvebu comphy driver
--------------------
+MVEBU comphy drivers
+--------------------
 
-A comphy controller can be found on Marvell Armada 7k/8k on the CP110. It
-provides a number of shared PHYs used by various interfaces (network, sata,
-usb, PCIe...).
+COMPHY controllers can be found on the following Marvell MVEBU SoCs:
+* Armada 7k/8k (on the CP110)
+* Armada 3700
+It provides a number of shared PHYs used by various interfaces (network, SATA,
+USB, PCIe...).
 
 Required properties:
 
-- compatible: should be "marvell,comphy-cp110"
-- reg: should contain the comphy register location and length.
-- marvell,system-controller: should contain a phandle to the
-                             system controller node.
+- compatible: should be one of:
+  * "marvell,comphy-cp110" for Armada 7k/8k
+  * "marvell,comphy-a3700" for Armada 3700
+- reg: should contain the COMPHY register(s) location(s) and length(s).
+  * 1 entry for Armada 7k/8k
+  * 4 entries for Armada 3700 along with the corresponding reg-names
+    properties, memory areas are:
+    * Generic COMPHY registers
+    * Lane 1 (PCIe/GbE)
+    * Lane 0 (USB3/GbE)
+    * Lane 2 (SATA/USB3)
+- marvell,system-controller: should contain a phandle to the system
+			     controller node (only for Armada 7k/8k)
 - #address-cells: should be 1.
 - #size-cells: should be 0.
 
@@ -18,11 +29,11 @@ A sub-node is required for each comphy lane provided by the comphy.
 
 Required properties (child nodes):
 
-- reg: comphy lane number.
-- #phy-cells : from the generic phy bindings, must be 1. Defines the
+- reg: COMPHY lane number.
+- #phy-cells : from the generic PHY bindings, must be 1. Defines the
                input port to use for a given comphy lane.
 
-Example:
+Examples:
 
 	cpm_comphy: phy@120000 {
 		compatible = "marvell,comphy-cp110";
@@ -41,3 +52,33 @@ Example:
 			#phy-cells = <1>;
 		};
 	};
+
+	comphy: phy@18300 {
+		compatible = "marvell,comphy-a3700";
+		reg = <0x18300 0x300>,
+		<0x1F000 0x400>,
+		<0x5C000 0x400>,
+		<0xe0178 0x8>;
+		reg-names = "comphy",
+		"lane1_pcie_gbe",
+		"lane0_usb3_gbe",
+		"lane2_sata_usb3";
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+
+
+		comphy0: phy@0 {
+			reg = <0>;
+			#phy-cells = <1>;
+		};
+
+		comphy1: phy@1 {
+			reg = <1>;
+			#phy-cells = <1>;
+		};
+
+		comphy2: phy@2 {
+			reg = <2>;
+			#phy-cells = <1>;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-mvebu-utmi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-mvebu-utmi.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..aa99ceec73b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-mvebu-utmi.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+MVEBU A3700 UTMI PHY
+--------------------
+
+USB2 UTMI+ PHY controllers can be found on the following Marvell MVEBU SoCs:
+* Armada 3700
+
+On Armada 3700, there are two USB controllers, one is compatible with the USB2
+and USB3 specifications and supports OTG. The other one is USB2 compliant and
+only supports host mode. Both of these controllers come with a slightly
+different UTMI PHY.
+
+Required Properties:
+
+- compatible: Should be one of:
+	      * "marvell,a3700-utmi-host-phy" for the PHY connected to
+	        the USB2 host-only controller.
+	      * "marvell,a3700-utmi-otg-phy" for the PHY connected to
+	        the USB3 and USB2 OTG capable controller.
+- reg: PHY IP register range.
+- marvell,usb-misc-reg: handle on the "USB miscellaneous registers" shared
+			region covering registers related to both the host
+			controller and the PHY.
+- #phy-cells: Standard property (Documentation: phy-bindings.txt) Should be 0.
+
+
+Example:
+
+	usb2_utmi_host_phy: phy@5f000 {
+		compatible = "marvell,armada-3700-utmi-host-phy";
+		reg = <0x5f000 0x800>;
+		marvell,usb-misc-reg = <&usb2_syscon>;
+		#phy-cells = <0>;
+	};
+
+	usb2_syscon: system-controller@5f800 {
+		compatible = "marvell,armada-3700-usb2-host-misc", "syscon";
+		reg = <0x5f800 0x800>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-rockchip-inno-usb2.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-rockchip-inno-usb2.txt
index 074a7b3b0425..00639baae74a 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-rockchip-inno-usb2.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-rockchip-inno-usb2.txt
@@ -23,6 +23,8 @@ Optional properties:
 		 register files". When set driver will request its
 		 phandle as one companion-grf for some special SoCs
 		 (e.g RV1108).
+ - extcon : phandle to the extcon device providing the cable state for
+		 the otg phy.
 
 Required nodes : a sub-node is required for each port the phy provides.
 		 The sub-node name is used to identify host or otg port,
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/qcom-qmp-phy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/qcom-qmp-phy.txt
index 41a1074228ba..085fbd676cfc 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/qcom-qmp-phy.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/qcom-qmp-phy.txt
@@ -9,6 +9,9 @@ Required properties:
 	       "qcom,ipq8074-qmp-pcie-phy" for PCIe phy on IPQ8074
 	       "qcom,msm8996-qmp-pcie-phy" for 14nm PCIe phy on msm8996,
 	       "qcom,msm8996-qmp-usb3-phy" for 14nm USB3 phy on msm8996,
+	       "qcom,msm8998-qmp-usb3-phy" for USB3 QMP V3 phy on msm8998,
+	       "qcom,msm8998-qmp-ufs-phy" for UFS QMP phy on msm8998,
+	       "qcom,msm8998-qmp-pcie-phy" for PCIe QMP phy on msm8998,
 	       "qcom,sdm845-qmp-usb3-phy" for USB3 QMP V3 phy on sdm845,
 	       "qcom,sdm845-qmp-usb3-uni-phy" for USB3 QMP V3 UNI phy on sdm845,
 	       "qcom,sdm845-qmp-ufs-phy" for UFS QMP phy on sdm845.
@@ -42,6 +45,12 @@ Required properties:
 			"aux", "cfg_ahb", "ref".
 		For "qcom,msm8996-qmp-usb3-phy" must contain:
 			"aux", "cfg_ahb", "ref".
+		For "qcom,msm8998-qmp-usb3-phy" must contain:
+			"aux", "cfg_ahb", "ref".
+		For "qcom,msm8998-qmp-ufs-phy" must contain:
+			"ref", "ref_aux".
+		For "qcom,msm8998-qmp-pcie-phy" must contain:
+			"aux", "cfg_ahb", "ref".
 		For "qcom,sdm845-qmp-usb3-phy" must contain:
 			"aux", "cfg_ahb", "ref", "com_aux".
 		For "qcom,sdm845-qmp-usb3-uni-phy" must contain:
@@ -53,7 +62,8 @@ Required properties:
 	   one for each entry in reset-names.
  - reset-names: "phy" for reset of phy block,
 		"common" for phy common block reset,
-		"cfg" for phy's ahb cfg block reset.
+		"cfg" for phy's ahb cfg block reset,
+		"ufsphy" for the PHY reset in the UFS controller.
 
 		For "qcom,ipq8074-qmp-pcie-phy" must contain:
 			"phy", "common".
@@ -61,11 +71,18 @@ Required properties:
 			"phy", "common", "cfg".
 		For "qcom,msm8996-qmp-usb3-phy" must contain
 			"phy", "common".
+		For "qcom,msm8998-qmp-usb3-phy" must contain
+			"phy", "common".
+		For "qcom,msm8998-qmp-ufs-phy": must contain:
+			"ufsphy".
+		For "qcom,msm8998-qmp-pcie-phy" must contain:
+			"phy", "common".
 		For "qcom,sdm845-qmp-usb3-phy" must contain:
 			"phy", "common".
 		For "qcom,sdm845-qmp-usb3-uni-phy" must contain:
 			"phy", "common".
-		For "qcom,sdm845-qmp-ufs-phy": no resets are listed.
+		For "qcom,sdm845-qmp-ufs-phy": must contain:
+			"ufsphy".
 
  - vdda-phy-supply: Phandle to a regulator supply to PHY core block.
  - vdda-pll-supply: Phandle to 1.8V regulator supply to PHY refclk pll block.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/qcom-qusb2-phy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/qcom-qusb2-phy.txt
index 03025d97998b..fe29f9e0af6d 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/qcom-qusb2-phy.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/qcom-qusb2-phy.txt
@@ -6,6 +6,7 @@ QUSB2 controller supports LS/FS/HS usb connectivity on Qualcomm chipsets.
 Required properties:
  - compatible: compatible list, contains
 	       "qcom,msm8996-qusb2-phy" for 14nm PHY on msm8996,
+	       "qcom,msm8998-qusb2-phy" for 10nm PHY on msm8998,
 	       "qcom,sdm845-qusb2-phy" for 10nm PHY on sdm845.
 
  - reg: offset and length of the PHY register set.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/rcar-gen2-phy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/rcar-gen2-phy.txt
index 4f0879a0ca12..ac96d6481bb8 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/rcar-gen2-phy.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/rcar-gen2-phy.txt
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ Required properties:
 - compatible: "renesas,usb-phy-r8a7743" if the device is a part of R8A7743 SoC.
 	      "renesas,usb-phy-r8a7744" if the device is a part of R8A7744 SoC.
 	      "renesas,usb-phy-r8a7745" if the device is a part of R8A7745 SoC.
+	      "renesas,usb-phy-r8a77470" if the device is a part of R8A77470 SoC.
 	      "renesas,usb-phy-r8a7790" if the device is a part of R8A7790 SoC.
 	      "renesas,usb-phy-r8a7791" if the device is a part of R8A7791 SoC.
 	      "renesas,usb-phy-r8a7794" if the device is a part of R8A7794 SoC.
@@ -30,7 +31,7 @@ channels. These subnodes must contain the following properties:
 - #phy-cells: see phy-bindings.txt in the same directory, must be <1>.
 
 The phandle's argument in the PHY specifier is the USB controller selector for
-the USB channel; see the selector meanings below:
+the USB channel other than r8a77470 SoC; see the selector meanings below:
 
 +-----------+---------------+---------------+
 |\ Selector |               |               |
@@ -41,6 +42,16 @@ the USB channel; see the selector meanings below:
 | 2         | PCI EHCI/OHCI | xHCI          |
 +-----------+---------------+---------------+
 
+For r8a77470 SoC;see the selector meaning below:
+
++-----------+---------------+---------------+
+|\ Selector |               |               |
++ --------- +       0       |       1       |
+| Channel  \|               |               |
++-----------+---------------+---------------+
+| 0         | EHCI/OHCI     | HS-USB        |
++-----------+---------------+---------------+
+
 Example (Lager board):
 
 	usb-phy@e6590100 {
@@ -48,15 +59,53 @@ Example (Lager board):
 		reg = <0 0xe6590100 0 0x100>;
 		#address-cells = <1>;
 		#size-cells = <0>;
-		clocks = <&mstp7_clks R8A7790_CLK_HSUSB>;
+		clocks = <&cpg CPG_MOD 704>;
 		clock-names = "usbhs";
+		power-domains = <&sysc R8A7790_PD_ALWAYS_ON>;
+		resets = <&cpg 704>;
 
-		usb-channel@0 {
+		usb0: usb-channel@0 {
 			reg = <0>;
 			#phy-cells = <1>;
 		};
-		usb-channel@2 {
+		usb2: usb-channel@2 {
 			reg = <2>;
 			#phy-cells = <1>;
 		};
 	};
+
+Example (iWave RZ/G1C sbc):
+
+	usbphy0: usb-phy0@e6590100 {
+		compatible = "renesas,usb-phy-r8a77470",
+			     "renesas,rcar-gen2-usb-phy";
+		reg = <0 0xe6590100 0 0x100>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+		clocks = <&cpg CPG_MOD 704>;
+		clock-names = "usbhs";
+		power-domains = <&sysc R8A77470_PD_ALWAYS_ON>;
+		resets = <&cpg 704>;
+
+		usb0: usb-channel@0 {
+			reg = <0>;
+			#phy-cells = <1>;
+		};
+	};
+
+	usbphy1: usb-phy@e6598100 {
+		compatible = "renesas,usb-phy-r8a77470",
+			     "renesas,rcar-gen2-usb-phy";
+		reg = <0 0xe6598100 0 0x100>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+		clocks = <&cpg CPG_MOD 706>;
+		clock-names = "usbhs";
+		power-domains = <&sysc R8A77470_PD_ALWAYS_ON>;
+		resets = <&cpg 706>;
+
+		usb1: usb-channel@0 {
+			reg = <0>;
+			#phy-cells = <1>;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/rcar-gen3-phy-usb2.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/rcar-gen3-phy-usb2.txt
index de7b5393c163..d46188f450bf 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/rcar-gen3-phy-usb2.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/rcar-gen3-phy-usb2.txt
@@ -1,10 +1,14 @@
 * Renesas R-Car generation 3 USB 2.0 PHY
 
 This file provides information on what the device node for the R-Car generation
-3 and RZ/G2 USB 2.0 PHY contain.
+3, RZ/G1C and RZ/G2 USB 2.0 PHY contain.
 
 Required properties:
-- compatible: "renesas,usb2-phy-r8a774a1" if the device is a part of an R8A774A1
+- compatible: "renesas,usb2-phy-r8a77470" if the device is a part of an R8A77470
+	      SoC.
+	      "renesas,usb2-phy-r8a774a1" if the device is a part of an R8A774A1
+	      SoC.
+	      "renesas,usb2-phy-r8a774c0" if the device is a part of an R8A774C0
 	      SoC.
 	      "renesas,usb2-phy-r8a7795" if the device is a part of an R8A7795
 	      SoC.
@@ -25,7 +29,13 @@ Required properties:
 
 - reg: offset and length of the partial USB 2.0 Host register block.
 - clocks: clock phandle and specifier pair(s).
-- #phy-cells: see phy-bindings.txt in the same directory, must be <0>.
+- #phy-cells: see phy-bindings.txt in the same directory, must be <1> (and
+	      using <0> is deprecated).
+
+The phandle's argument in the PHY specifier is the INT_STATUS bit of controller:
+- 1 = USBH_INTA (OHCI)
+- 2 = USBH_INTB (EHCI)
+- 3 = UCOM_INT (OTG and BC)
 
 Optional properties:
 To use a USB channel where USB 2.0 Host and HSUSB (USB 2.0 Peripheral) are
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/rockchip-emmc-phy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/rockchip-emmc-phy.txt
index e3ea55763b0a..e728786f21e0 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/rockchip-emmc-phy.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/rockchip-emmc-phy.txt
@@ -7,12 +7,15 @@ Required properties:
  - reg: PHY register address offset and length in "general
    register files"
 
-Optional clocks using the clock bindings (see ../clock/clock-bindings.txt),
-specified by name:
+Optional properties:
  - clock-names: Should contain "emmcclk".  Although this is listed as optional
 		(because most boards can get basic functionality without having
 		access to it), it is strongly suggested.
+		See ../clock/clock-bindings.txt for details.
  - clocks: Should have a phandle to the card clock exported by the SDHCI driver.
+ - drive-impedance-ohm: Specifies the drive impedance in Ohm.
+                        Possible values are 33, 40, 50, 66 and 100.
+                        If not set, the default value of 50 will be applied.
 
 Example:
 
@@ -29,6 +32,7 @@ grf: syscon@ff770000 {
 		reg = <0xf780 0x20>;
 		clocks = <&sdhci>;
 		clock-names = "emmcclk";
+		drive-impedance-ohm = <50>;
 		#phy-cells = <0>;
 	};
 };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/ti,phy-am654-serdes.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/ti,phy-am654-serdes.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..64b286d2d398
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/ti,phy-am654-serdes.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+TI AM654 SERDES
+
+Required properties:
+ - compatible: Should be "ti,phy-am654-serdes"
+ - reg : Address and length of the register set for the device.
+ - #phy-cells: determine the number of cells that should be given in the
+	phandle while referencing this phy. Should be "2". The 1st cell
+	corresponds to the phy type (should be one of the types specified in
+	include/dt-bindings/phy/phy.h) and the 2nd cell should be the serdes
+	lane function.
+	If SERDES0 is referenced 2nd cell should be:
+		0 - USB3
+		1 - PCIe0 Lane0
+		2 - ICSS2 SGMII Lane0
+	If SERDES1 is referenced 2nd cell should be:
+		0 - PCIe1 Lane0
+		1 - PCIe0 Lane1
+		2 - ICSS2 SGMII Lane1
+ - power-domains: As documented by the generic PM domain bindings in
+	Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/power_domain.txt.
+ - clocks: List of clock-specifiers representing the input to the SERDES.
+	Should have 3 items representing the left input clock, external
+	reference clock and right input clock in that order.
+ - clock-output-names: List of clock names for each of the clock outputs of
+	SERDES. Should have 3 items for CMU reference clock,
+	left output clock and right output clock in that order.
+ - assigned-clocks: As defined in
+	Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt
+ - assigned-clock-parents: As defined in
+	Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt
+ - #clock-cells: Should be <1> to choose between the 3 output clocks.
+	Defined in Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt
+
+   The following macros are defined in dt-bindings/phy/phy-am654-serdes.h
+   for selecting the correct reference clock. This can be used while
+   specifying the clocks created by SERDES.
+	=> AM654_SERDES_CMU_REFCLK
+	=> AM654_SERDES_LO_REFCLK
+	=> AM654_SERDES_RO_REFCLK
+
+ - mux-controls: Phandle to the multiplexer that is used to select the lane
+	function. See #phy-cells above to see the multiplex values.
+
+Example:
+
+Example for SERDES0 is given below. It has 3 clock inputs;
+left input reference clock as indicated by <&k3_clks 153 4>, external
+reference clock as indicated by <&k3_clks 153 1> and right input
+reference clock as indicated by <&serdes1 AM654_SERDES_LO_REFCLK>. (The
+right input of SERDES0 is connected to the left output of SERDES1).
+
+SERDES0 registers 3 clock outputs as indicated in clock-output-names. The
+first refers to the CMU reference clock, second refers to the left output
+reference clock and the third refers to the right output reference clock.
+
+The assigned-clocks and assigned-clock-parents is used here to set the
+parent of left input reference clock to MAINHSDIV_CLKOUT4 and parent of
+CMU reference clock to left input reference clock.
+
+serdes0: serdes@900000 {
+	compatible = "ti,phy-am654-serdes";
+	reg = <0x0 0x900000 0x0 0x2000>;
+	reg-names = "serdes";
+	#phy-cells = <2>;
+	power-domains = <&k3_pds 153>;
+	clocks = <&k3_clks 153 4>, <&k3_clks 153 1>,
+			<&serdes1 AM654_SERDES_LO_REFCLK>;
+	clock-output-names = "serdes0_cmu_refclk", "serdes0_lo_refclk",
+				"serdes0_ro_refclk";
+	assigned-clocks = <&k3_clks 153 4>, <&serdes0 AM654_SERDES_CMU_REFCLK>;
+	assigned-clock-parents = <&k3_clks 153 8>, <&k3_clks 153 4>;
+	ti,serdes-clk = <&serdes0_clk>;
+	mux-controls = <&serdes_mux 0>;
+	#clock-cells = <1>;
+};
+
+Example for PCIe consumer node using the SERDES PHY specifier is given below.
+&pcie0_rc {
+        num-lanes = <2>;
+        phys = <&serdes0 PHY_TYPE_PCIE 1>, <&serdes1 PHY_TYPE_PCIE 1>;
+        phy-names = "pcie-phy0", "pcie-phy1";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/ti-phy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/ti-phy.txt
index 57dfda8a7a1d..8f93c3b694a7 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/ti-phy.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/ti-phy.txt
@@ -35,6 +35,7 @@ Required properties:
 	       DRA7x
 	       Should be "ti,dra7x-usb2-phy2" for the 2nd instance of USB2 PHY
 	       in DRA7x
+	       Should be "ti,am654-usb2" for the USB2 PHYs on AM654.
  - reg : Address and length of the register set for the device.
  - #phy-cells: determine the number of cells that should be given in the
    phandle while referencing this phy.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/atmel,at91-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/atmel,at91-pinctrl.txt
index 3e23fece99da..eb39f5051159 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/atmel,at91-pinctrl.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/atmel,at91-pinctrl.txt
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ such as pull-up, multi drive, etc.
 
 Required properties for iomux controller:
 - compatible: "atmel,at91rm9200-pinctrl" or "atmel,at91sam9x5-pinctrl"
-		or "atmel,sama5d3-pinctrl"
+		or "atmel,sama5d3-pinctrl" or "microchip,sam9x60-pinctrl"
 - atmel,mux-mask: array of mask (periph per bank) to describe if a pin can be
   configured in this periph mode. All the periph and bank need to be describe.
 
@@ -100,6 +100,7 @@ DRIVE_STRENGTH (3 << 5): indicate the drive strength of the pin using the
 				11 - High
 OUTPUT		(1 << 7): indicate this pin need to be configured as an output.
 OUTPUT_VAL	(1 << 8): output val (1 = high, 0 = low)
+SLEWRATE	(1 << 9): slew rate of the pin: 0 = disable, 1 = enable
 DEBOUNCE	(1 << 16): indicate this pin needs debounce.
 DEBOUNCE_VAL	(0x3fff << 17): debounce value.
 
@@ -116,6 +117,19 @@ Some requirements for using atmel,at91rm9200-pinctrl binding:
    configurations by referring to the phandle of that pin configuration node.
 4. The gpio controller must be describe in the pinctrl simple-bus.
 
+For each bank the required properties are:
+- compatible: "atmel,at91sam9x5-gpio" or "atmel,at91rm9200-gpio" or
+  "microchip,sam9x60-gpio"
+- reg: physical base address and length of the controller's registers
+- interrupts: interrupt outputs from the controller
+- interrupt-controller: marks the device node as an interrupt controller
+- #interrupt-cells: should be 2; refer to ../interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt
+  for more details.
+- gpio-controller
+- #gpio-cells: should be 2; the first cell is the GPIO number and the second
+  cell specifies GPIO flags as defined in <dt-bindings/gpio/gpio.h>.
+- clocks: bank clock
+
 Examples:
 
 pinctrl@fffff400 {
@@ -125,6 +139,17 @@ pinctrl@fffff400 {
 	compatible = "atmel,at91rm9200-pinctrl", "simple-bus";
 	reg = <0xfffff400 0x600>;
 
+	pioA: gpio@fffff400 {
+		compatible = "atmel,at91sam9x5-gpio";
+		reg = <0xfffff400 0x200>;
+		interrupts = <2 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH 1>;
+		#gpio-cells = <2>;
+		gpio-controller;
+		interrupt-controller;
+		#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+		clocks = <&pmc PMC_TYPE_PERIPHERAL 2>;
+	};
+
 	atmel,mux-mask = <
 	      /*    A         B     */
 	       0xffffffff 0xffc00c3b  /* pioA */
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/bitmain,bm1880-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/bitmain,bm1880-pinctrl.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ed34bb1ee81c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/bitmain,bm1880-pinctrl.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
+Bitmain BM1880 Pin Controller
+
+This binding describes the pin controller found in the BM1880 SoC.
+
+Required Properties:
+
+- compatible:   Should be "bitmain,bm1880-pinctrl"
+- reg:          Offset and length of pinctrl space in SCTRL.
+
+Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the
+common pinctrl bindings used by client devices, including the meaning of the
+phrase "pin configuration node".
+
+The pin configuration nodes act as a container for an arbitrary number of
+subnodes. Each of these subnodes represents some desired configuration for a
+pin, a group, or a list of pins or groups. This configuration for BM1880 SoC
+includes only pinmux as there is no pinconf support available in SoC.
+
+Each configuration node can consist of multiple nodes describing the pinmux
+options. The name of each subnode is not important; all subnodes should be
+enumerated and processed purely based on their content.
+
+The following generic properties as defined in pinctrl-bindings.txt are valid
+to specify in a pinmux subnode:
+
+Required Properties:
+
+- pins:           An array of strings, each string containing the name of a pin.
+                  Valid values for pins are:
+
+                  MIO0 - MIO111
+
+- groups:         An array of strings, each string containing the name of a pin
+                  group. Valid values for groups are:
+
+                  nand_grp, spi_grp, emmc_grp, sdio_grp, eth0_grp, pwm0_grp,
+                  pwm1_grp, pwm2_grp, pwm3_grp, pwm4_grp, pwm5_grp, pwm6_grp,
+                  pwm7_grp, pwm8_grp, pwm9_grp, pwm10_grp, pwm11_grp, pwm12_grp,
+                  pwm13_grp, pwm14_grp, pwm15_grp, pwm16_grp, pwm17_grp,
+                  pwm18_grp, pwm19_grp, pwm20_grp, pwm21_grp, pwm22_grp,
+                  pwm23_grp, pwm24_grp, pwm25_grp, pwm26_grp, pwm27_grp,
+                  pwm28_grp, pwm29_grp, pwm30_grp, pwm31_grp, pwm32_grp,
+                  pwm33_grp, pwm34_grp, pwm35_grp, pwm36_grp, i2c0_grp,
+                  i2c1_grp, i2c2_grp, i2c3_grp, i2c4_grp, uart0_grp, uart1_grp,
+                  uart2_grp, uart3_grp, uart4_grp, uart5_grp, uart6_grp,
+                  uart7_grp, uart8_grp, uart9_grp, uart10_grp, uart11_grp,
+                  uart12_grp, uart13_grp, uart14_grp, uart15_grp, gpio0_grp,
+                  gpio1_grp, gpio2_grp, gpio3_grp, gpio4_grp, gpio5_grp,
+                  gpio6_grp, gpio7_grp, gpio8_grp, gpio9_grp, gpio10_grp,
+                  gpio11_grp, gpio12_grp, gpio13_grp, gpio14_grp, gpio15_grp,
+                  gpio16_grp, gpio17_grp, gpio18_grp, gpio19_grp, gpio20_grp,
+                  gpio21_grp, gpio22_grp, gpio23_grp, gpio24_grp, gpio25_grp,
+                  gpio26_grp, gpio27_grp, gpio28_grp, gpio29_grp, gpio30_grp,
+                  gpio31_grp, gpio32_grp, gpio33_grp, gpio34_grp, gpio35_grp,
+                  gpio36_grp, gpio37_grp, gpio38_grp, gpio39_grp, gpio40_grp,
+                  gpio41_grp, gpio42_grp, gpio43_grp, gpio44_grp, gpio45_grp,
+                  gpio46_grp, gpio47_grp, gpio48_grp, gpio49_grp, gpio50_grp,
+                  gpio51_grp, gpio52_grp, gpio53_grp, gpio54_grp, gpio55_grp,
+                  gpio56_grp, gpio57_grp, gpio58_grp, gpio59_grp, gpio60_grp,
+                  gpio61_grp, gpio62_grp, gpio63_grp, gpio64_grp, gpio65_grp,
+                  gpio66_grp, gpio67_grp, eth1_grp, i2s0_grp, i2s0_mclkin_grp,
+                  i2s1_grp, i2s1_mclkin_grp, spi0_grp
+
+- function:       An array of strings, each string containing the name of the
+                  pinmux functions. The following are the list of pinmux
+                  functions available:
+
+                  nand, spi, emmc, sdio, eth0, pwm0, pwm1, pwm2, pwm3, pwm4,
+                  pwm5, pwm6, pwm7, pwm8, pwm9, pwm10, pwm11, pwm12, pwm13,
+                  pwm14, pwm15, pwm16, pwm17, pwm18, pwm19, pwm20, pwm21, pwm22,
+                  pwm23, pwm24, pwm25, pwm26, pwm27, pwm28, pwm29, pwm30, pwm31,
+                  pwm32, pwm33, pwm34, pwm35, pwm36, i2c0, i2c1, i2c2, i2c3,
+                  i2c4, uart0, uart1, uart2, uart3, uart4, uart5, uart6, uart7,
+                  uart8, uart9, uart10, uart11, uart12, uart13, uart14, uart15,
+                  gpio0, gpio1, gpio2, gpio3, gpio4, gpio5, gpio6, gpio7, gpio8,
+                  gpio9, gpio10, gpio11, gpio12, gpio13, gpio14, gpio15, gpio16,
+                  gpio17, gpio18, gpio19, gpio20, gpio21, gpio22, gpio23,
+                  gpio24, gpio25, gpio26, gpio27, gpio28, gpio29, gpio30,
+                  gpio31, gpio32, gpio33, gpio34, gpio35, gpio36, gpio37,
+                  gpio38, gpio39, gpio40, gpio41, gpio42, gpio43, gpio44,
+                  gpio45, gpio46, gpio47, gpio48, gpio49, gpio50, gpio51,
+                  gpio52, gpio53, gpio54, gpio55, gpio56, gpio57, gpio58,
+                  gpio59, gpio60, gpio61, gpio62, gpio63, gpio64, gpio65,
+                  gpio66, gpio67, eth1, i2s0, i2s0_mclkin, i2s1, i2s1_mclkin,
+                  spi0
+
+Example:
+        pinctrl: pinctrl@50 {
+                compatible = "bitmain,bm1880-pinctrl";
+                reg = <0x50 0x4B0>;
+
+                pinctrl_uart0_default: uart0-default {
+                        pinmux {
+                                groups = "uart0_grp";
+                                function = "uart0";
+                        };
+                };
+        };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/cirrus,lochnagar.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/cirrus,lochnagar.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a87447180e83
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/cirrus,lochnagar.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,141 @@
+Cirrus Logic Lochnagar Audio Development Board
+
+Lochnagar is an evaluation and development board for Cirrus Logic
+Smart CODEC and Amp devices. It allows the connection of most Cirrus
+Logic devices on mini-cards, as well as allowing connection of
+various application processor systems to provide a full evaluation
+platform.  Audio system topology, clocking and power can all be
+controlled through the Lochnagar, allowing the device under test
+to be used in a variety of possible use cases.
+
+This binding document describes the binding for the pinctrl portion
+of the driver.
+
+Also see these documents for generic binding information:
+  [1] GPIO : ../gpio/gpio.txt
+  [2] Pinctrl: ../pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt
+
+And these for relevant defines:
+  [3] include/dt-bindings/pinctrl/lochnagar.h
+
+This binding must be part of the Lochnagar MFD binding:
+  [4] ../mfd/cirrus,lochnagar.txt
+
+Required properties:
+
+  - compatible : One of the following strings:
+                 "cirrus,lochnagar-pinctrl"
+
+  - gpio-controller : Indicates this device is a GPIO controller.
+  - #gpio-cells : Must be 2. The first cell is the pin number, see
+    [3] for available pins and the second cell is used to specify
+    optional parameters, see [1].
+  - gpio-ranges : Range of pins managed by the GPIO controller, see
+    [1]. Both the GPIO and Pinctrl base should be set to zero and the
+    count to the appropriate of the LOCHNAGARx_PIN_NUM_GPIOS define,
+    see [3].
+
+  - pinctrl-names : A pinctrl state named "default" must be defined.
+  - pinctrl-0 : A phandle to the default pinctrl state.
+
+Required sub-nodes:
+
+The pin configurations are defined as a child of the pinctrl states
+node, see [2]. Each sub-node can have the following properties:
+  - groups : A list of groups to select (either this or "pins" must be
+    specified), available groups:
+      codec-aif1, codec-aif2, codec-aif3, dsp-aif1, dsp-aif2, psia1,
+      psia2, gf-aif1, gf-aif2, gf-aif3, gf-aif4, spdif-aif, usb-aif1,
+      usb-aif2, adat-aif, soundcard-aif
+  - pins : A list of pin names to select (either this or "groups" must
+    be specified), available pins:
+      fpga-gpio1, fpga-gpio2, fpga-gpio3, fpga-gpio4, fpga-gpio5,
+      fpga-gpio6, codec-gpio1, codec-gpio2, codec-gpio3, codec-gpio4,
+      codec-gpio5, codec-gpio6, codec-gpio7, codec-gpio8, dsp-gpio1,
+      dsp-gpio2, dsp-gpio3, dsp-gpio4, dsp-gpio5, dsp-gpio6, gf-gpio2,
+      gf-gpio3, gf-gpio7, codec-aif1-bclk, codec-aif1-rxdat,
+      codec-aif1-lrclk, codec-aif1-txdat, codec-aif2-bclk,
+      codec-aif2-rxdat, codec-aif2-lrclk, codec-aif2-txdat,
+      codec-aif3-bclk, codec-aif3-rxdat, codec-aif3-lrclk,
+      codec-aif3-txdat, dsp-aif1-bclk, dsp-aif1-rxdat, dsp-aif1-lrclk,
+      dsp-aif1-txdat, dsp-aif2-bclk, dsp-aif2-rxdat,
+      dsp-aif2-lrclk, dsp-aif2-txdat, psia1-bclk, psia1-rxdat,
+      psia1-lrclk, psia1-txdat, psia2-bclk, psia2-rxdat, psia2-lrclk,
+      psia2-txdat, gf-aif3-bclk, gf-aif3-rxdat, gf-aif3-lrclk,
+      gf-aif3-txdat, gf-aif4-bclk, gf-aif4-rxdat, gf-aif4-lrclk,
+      gf-aif4-txdat, gf-aif1-bclk, gf-aif1-rxdat, gf-aif1-lrclk,
+      gf-aif1-txdat, gf-aif2-bclk, gf-aif2-rxdat, gf-aif2-lrclk,
+      gf-aif2-txdat, dsp-uart1-rx, dsp-uart1-tx, dsp-uart2-rx,
+      dsp-uart2-tx, gf-uart2-rx, gf-uart2-tx, usb-uart-rx,
+      codec-pdmclk1, codec-pdmdat1, codec-pdmclk2, codec-pdmdat2,
+      codec-dmicclk1, codec-dmicdat1, codec-dmicclk2, codec-dmicdat2,
+      codec-dmicclk3, codec-dmicdat3, codec-dmicclk4, codec-dmicdat4,
+      dsp-dmicclk1, dsp-dmicdat1, dsp-dmicclk2, dsp-dmicdat2, i2c2-scl,
+      i2c2-sda, i2c3-scl, i2c3-sda, i2c4-scl, i2c4-sda, dsp-standby,
+      codec-mclk1, codec-mclk2, dsp-clkin, psia1-mclk, psia2-mclk,
+      gf-gpio1, gf-gpio5, dsp-gpio20, led1, led2
+  - function : The mux function to select, available functions:
+      aif, fpga-gpio1, fpga-gpio2, fpga-gpio3, fpga-gpio4, fpga-gpio5,
+      fpga-gpio6, codec-gpio1, codec-gpio2, codec-gpio3, codec-gpio4,
+      codec-gpio5, codec-gpio6, codec-gpio7, codec-gpio8, dsp-gpio1,
+      dsp-gpio2, dsp-gpio3, dsp-gpio4, dsp-gpio5, dsp-gpio6, gf-gpio2,
+      gf-gpio3, gf-gpio7, gf-gpio1, gf-gpio5, dsp-gpio20, codec-clkout,
+      dsp-clkout, pmic-32k, spdif-clkout, clk-12m288, clk-11m2986,
+      clk-24m576, clk-22m5792, xmos-mclk, gf-clkout1, gf-mclk1,
+      gf-mclk3, gf-mclk2, gf-clkout2, codec-mclk1, codec-mclk2,
+      dsp-clkin, psia1-mclk, psia2-mclk, spdif-mclk, codec-irq,
+      codec-reset, dsp-reset, dsp-irq, dsp-standby, codec-pdmclk1,
+      codec-pdmdat1, codec-pdmclk2, codec-pdmdat2, codec-dmicclk1,
+      codec-dmicdat1, codec-dmicclk2, codec-dmicdat2, codec-dmicclk3,
+      codec-dmicdat3, codec-dmicclk4, codec-dmicdat4, dsp-dmicclk1,
+      dsp-dmicdat1, dsp-dmicclk2, dsp-dmicdat2, dsp-uart1-rx,
+      dsp-uart1-tx, dsp-uart2-rx, dsp-uart2-tx, gf-uart2-rx,
+      gf-uart2-tx, usb-uart-rx, usb-uart-tx, i2c2-scl, i2c2-sda,
+      i2c3-scl, i2c3-sda, i2c4-scl, i2c4-sda, spdif-aif, psia1,
+      psia1-bclk, psia1-lrclk, psia1-rxdat, psia1-txdat, psia2,
+      psia2-bclk, psia2-lrclk, psia2-rxdat, psia2-txdat, codec-aif1,
+      codec-aif1-bclk, codec-aif1-lrclk, codec-aif1-rxdat,
+      codec-aif1-txdat, codec-aif2, codec-aif2-bclk, codec-aif2-lrclk,
+      codec-aif2-rxdat, codec-aif2-txdat, codec-aif3, codec-aif3-bclk,
+      codec-aif3-lrclk, codec-aif3-rxdat, codec-aif3-txdat, dsp-aif1,
+      dsp-aif1-bclk, dsp-aif1-lrclk, dsp-aif1-rxdat, dsp-aif1-txdat,
+      dsp-aif2, dsp-aif2-bclk, dsp-aif2-lrclk, dsp-aif2-rxdat,
+      dsp-aif2-txdat, gf-aif3, gf-aif3-bclk, gf-aif3-lrclk,
+      gf-aif3-rxdat, gf-aif3-txdat, gf-aif4, gf-aif4-bclk,
+      gf-aif4-lrclk, gf-aif4-rxdat, gf-aif4-txdat, gf-aif1,
+      gf-aif1-bclk, gf-aif1-lrclk, gf-aif1-rxdat, gf-aif1-txdat,
+      gf-aif2, gf-aif2-bclk, gf-aif2-lrclk, gf-aif2-rxdat,
+      gf-aif2-txdat, usb-aif1, usb-aif2, adat-aif, soundcard-aif,
+
+  - output-enable : Specifies that an AIF group will be used as a master
+    interface (either this or input-enable is required if a group is
+    being muxed to an AIF)
+  - input-enable : Specifies that an AIF group will be used as a slave
+    interface (either this or output-enable is required if a group is
+    being muxed to an AIF)
+
+Example:
+
+lochnagar-pinctrl {
+	compatible = "cirrus,lochnagar-pinctrl";
+
+	gpio-controller;
+	#gpio-cells = <2>;
+	gpio-ranges = <&lochnagar 0 0 LOCHNAGAR2_PIN_NUM_GPIOS>;
+
+	pinctrl-names = "default";
+	pinctrl-0 = <&pin-settings>;
+
+	pin-settings: pin-settings {
+		ap-aif {
+			input-enable;
+			groups = "gf-aif1";
+			function = "codec-aif3";
+		};
+		codec-aif {
+			output-enable;
+			groups = "codec-aif3";
+			function = "gf-aif1";
+		};
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx50-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx50-pinctrl.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6da01d619d33
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx50-pinctrl.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+* Freescale IMX50 IOMUX Controller
+
+Please refer to fsl,imx-pinctrl.txt in this directory for common binding part
+and usage.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "fsl,imx50-iomuxc"
+- fsl,pins: two integers array, represents a group of pins mux and config
+  setting. The format is fsl,pins = <PIN_FUNC_ID CONFIG>, PIN_FUNC_ID is a
+  pin working on a specific function, CONFIG is the pad setting value like
+  pull-up for this pin. Please refer to imx50 datasheet for the valid pad
+  config settings.
+
+CONFIG bits definition:
+PAD_CTL_HVE			(1 << 13)
+PAD_CTL_HYS			(1 << 8)
+PAD_CTL_PKE			(1 << 7)
+PAD_CTL_PUE			(1 << 6)
+PAD_CTL_PUS_100K_DOWN		(0 << 4)
+PAD_CTL_PUS_47K_UP		(1 << 4)
+PAD_CTL_PUS_100K_UP		(2 << 4)
+PAD_CTL_PUS_22K_UP		(3 << 4)
+PAD_CTL_ODE			(1 << 3)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_LOW			(0 << 1)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_MED			(1 << 1)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_HIGH		(2 << 1)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_MAX			(3 << 1)
+PAD_CTL_SRE_FAST		(1 << 0)
+PAD_CTL_SRE_SLOW		(0 << 0)
+
+Refer to imx50-pinfunc.h in device tree source folder for all available
+imx50 PIN_FUNC_ID.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx7d-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx7d-pinctrl.txt
index 6666277c3acb..8ac1d0851a0f 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx7d-pinctrl.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx7d-pinctrl.txt
@@ -48,9 +48,9 @@ PAD_CTL_HYS                     (1 << 3)
 PAD_CTL_SRE_SLOW                (1 << 2)
 PAD_CTL_SRE_FAST                (0 << 2)
 PAD_CTL_DSE_X1                  (0 << 0)
-PAD_CTL_DSE_X2                  (1 << 0)
-PAD_CTL_DSE_X3                  (2 << 0)
-PAD_CTL_DSE_X4                  (3 << 0)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_X4                  (1 << 0)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_X2                  (2 << 0)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_X6                  (3 << 0)
 
 Examples:
 While iomuxc-lpsr is intended to be used by dedicated peripherals to take
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx8mm-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx8mm-pinctrl.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..524a16fca666
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx8mm-pinctrl.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+* Freescale IMX8MM IOMUX Controller
+
+Please refer to fsl,imx-pinctrl.txt and pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory
+for common binding part and usage.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "fsl,imx8mm-iomuxc"
+- reg: should contain the base physical address and size of the iomuxc
+  registers.
+
+Required properties in sub-nodes:
+- fsl,pins: each entry consists of 6 integers and represents the mux and config
+  setting for one pin.  The first 5 integers <mux_reg conf_reg input_reg mux_val
+  input_val> are specified using a PIN_FUNC_ID macro, which can be found in
+  <dt-bindings/pinctrl/imx8mm-pinfunc.h>. The last integer CONFIG is
+  the pad setting value like pull-up on this pin.  Please refer to i.MX8M Mini
+  Reference Manual for detailed CONFIG settings.
+
+Examples:
+
+&uart1 {
+       pinctrl-names = "default";
+       pinctrl-0 = <&pinctrl_uart1>;
+};
+
+iomuxc: pinctrl@30330000 {
+        compatible = "fsl,imx8mm-iomuxc";
+        reg = <0x0 0x30330000 0x0 0x10000>;
+
+        pinctrl_uart1: uart1grp {
+                fsl,pins = <
+                        MX8MM_IOMUXC_UART1_RXD_UART1_DCE_RX             0x140
+                        MX8MM_IOMUXC_UART1_TXD_UART1_DCE_TX             0x140
+                >;
+        };
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,armada-37xx-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,armada-37xx-pinctrl.txt
index c7c088d2dd50..38dc56a57760 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,armada-37xx-pinctrl.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,armada-37xx-pinctrl.txt
@@ -58,11 +58,11 @@ group pwm3
  - functions pwm, gpio
 
 group pmic1
- - pin 17
+ - pin 7
  - functions pmic, gpio
 
 group pmic0
- - pin 16
+ - pin 6
  - functions pmic, gpio
 
 group i2c2
@@ -112,19 +112,31 @@ group usb2_drvvbus1
  - functions drvbus, gpio
 
 group sdio_sb
- - pins 60-64
+ - pins 60-65
  - functions sdio, gpio
 
 group rgmii
- - pins 42-55
+ - pins 42-53
  - functions mii, gpio
 
 group pcie1
- - pins 39-40
+ - pins 39
+ - functions pcie, gpio
+
+group pcie1_clkreq
+ - pins 40
  - functions pcie, gpio
 
+group pcie1_wakeup
+ - pins 41
+ - functions pcie, gpio
+
+group smi
+ - pins 54-55
+ - functions smi, gpio
+
 group ptp
- - pins 56-58
+ - pins 56
  - functions ptp, gpio
 
 group ptp_clk
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/meson,pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/meson,pinctrl.txt
index 82ead40311f6..a47dd990a8d3 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/meson,pinctrl.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/meson,pinctrl.txt
@@ -23,11 +23,11 @@ The GPIO bank for the controller is represented as a sub-node and it acts as a
 GPIO controller.
 
 Required properties for sub-nodes are:
- - reg: should contain address and size for mux, pull-enable, pull and
-   gpio register sets
- - reg-names: an array of strings describing the "reg" entries. Must
-   contain "mux", "pull" and "gpio". "pull-enable" is optional and
-   when it is missing the "pull" registers are used instead
+ - reg: should contain a list of address and size, one tuple for each entry
+   in reg-names.
+ - reg-names: an array of strings describing the "reg" entries.
+   Must contain "mux" and "gpio".
+   May contain "pull", "pull-enable" and "ds" when appropriate.
  - gpio-controller: identifies the node as a gpio controller
  - #gpio-cells: must be 2
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-mt65xx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-mt65xx.txt
index e7d6f81c227f..205be98ae078 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-mt65xx.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-mt65xx.txt
@@ -11,6 +11,7 @@ Required properties:
 	"mediatek,mt8127-pinctrl", compatible with mt8127 pinctrl.
 	"mediatek,mt8135-pinctrl", compatible with mt8135 pinctrl.
 	"mediatek,mt8173-pinctrl", compatible with mt8173 pinctrl.
+	"mediatek,mt8516-pinctrl", compatible with mt8516 pinctrl.
 - pins-are-numbered: Specify the subnodes are using numbered pinmux to
   specify pins.
 - gpio-controller : Marks the device node as a gpio controller.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-mt8183.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-mt8183.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..eccbe3f55d3f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-mt8183.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,132 @@
+* Mediatek MT8183 Pin Controller
+
+The Mediatek's Pin controller is used to control SoC pins.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: value should be one of the following.
+	"mediatek,mt8183-pinctrl", compatible with mt8183 pinctrl.
+- gpio-controller : Marks the device node as a gpio controller.
+- #gpio-cells: number of cells in GPIO specifier. Since the generic GPIO
+  binding is used, the amount of cells must be specified as 2. See the below
+  mentioned gpio binding representation for description of particular cells.
+- gpio-ranges : gpio valid number range.
+- reg: physical address base for gpio base registers. There are 10 GPIO
+  physical address base in mt8183.
+
+Optional properties:
+- reg-names: gpio base register names. There are 10 gpio base register
+  names in mt8183. They are "iocfg0", "iocfg1", "iocfg2", "iocfg3", "iocfg4",
+  "iocfg5", "iocfg6", "iocfg7", "iocfg8", "eint".
+- interrupt-controller: Marks the device node as an interrupt controller
+- #interrupt-cells: Should be two.
+- interrupts : The interrupt outputs to sysirq.
+
+Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the
+common pinctrl bindings used by client devices.
+
+Subnode format
+A pinctrl node should contain at least one subnodes representing the
+pinctrl groups available on the machine. Each subnode will list the
+pins it needs, and how they should be configured, with regard to muxer
+configuration, pullups, drive strength, input enable/disable and input schmitt.
+
+    node {
+	pinmux = <PIN_NUMBER_PINMUX>;
+	GENERIC_PINCONFIG;
+    };
+
+Required properties:
+- pinmux: integer array, represents gpio pin number and mux setting.
+    Supported pin number and mux varies for different SoCs, and are defined
+    as macros in boot/dts/<soc>-pinfunc.h directly.
+
+Optional properties:
+- GENERIC_PINCONFIG: is the generic pinconfig options to use, bias-disable,
+    bias-pull-down, bias-pull-up, input-enable, input-disable, output-low,
+    output-high, input-schmitt-enable, input-schmitt-disable
+    and drive-strength are valid.
+
+    Some special pins have extra pull up strength, there are R0 and R1 pull-up
+    resistors available, but for user, it's only need to set R1R0 as 00, 01,
+    10 or 11. So It needs config "mediatek,pull-up-adv" or
+    "mediatek,pull-down-adv" to support arguments for those special pins.
+    Valid arguments are from 0 to 3.
+
+    mediatek,tdsel: An integer describing the steps for output level shifter
+      duty cycle when asserted (high pulse width adjustment). Valid arguments
+      are from 0 to 15.
+    mediatek,rdsel: An integer describing the steps for input level shifter
+      duty cycle when asserted (high pulse width adjustment). Valid arguments
+      are from 0 to 63.
+
+    When config drive-strength, it can support some arguments, such as
+    MTK_DRIVE_4mA, MTK_DRIVE_6mA, etc. See dt-bindings/pinctrl/mt65xx.h.
+    It can only support 2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16mA in mt8183.
+    For I2C pins, there are existing generic driving setup and the specific
+    driving setup. I2C pins can only support 2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16mA driving
+    adjustment in generic driving setup. But in specific driving setup,
+    they can support 0.125/0.25/0.5/1mA adjustment. If we enable specific
+    driving setup for I2C pins, the existing generic driving setup will be
+    disabled. For some special features, we need the I2C pins specific
+    driving setup. The specific driving setup is controlled by E1E0EN.
+    So we need add extra vendor driving preperty instead of
+    the generic driving property.
+    We can add "mediatek,drive-strength-adv = <XXX>;" to describe the specific
+    driving setup property. "XXX" means the value of E1E0EN. EN is 0 or 1.
+    It is used to enable or disable the specific driving setup.
+    E1E0 is used to describe the detail strength specification of the I2C pin.
+    When E1=0/E0=0, the strength is 0.125mA.
+    When E1=0/E0=1, the strength is 0.25mA.
+    When E1=1/E0=0, the strength is 0.5mA.
+    When E1=1/E0=1, the strength is 1mA.
+    So the valid arguments of "mediatek,drive-strength-adv" are from 0 to 7.
+
+Examples:
+
+#include "mt8183-pinfunc.h"
+
+...
+{
+	pio: pinctrl@10005000 {
+		compatible = "mediatek,mt8183-pinctrl";
+		reg = <0 0x10005000 0 0x1000>,
+		      <0 0x11f20000 0 0x1000>,
+		      <0 0x11e80000 0 0x1000>,
+		      <0 0x11e70000 0 0x1000>,
+		      <0 0x11e90000 0 0x1000>,
+		      <0 0x11d30000 0 0x1000>,
+		      <0 0x11d20000 0 0x1000>,
+		      <0 0x11c50000 0 0x1000>,
+		      <0 0x11f30000 0 0x1000>,
+		      <0 0x1000b000 0 0x1000>;
+		reg-names = "iocfg0", "iocfg1", "iocfg2",
+			    "iocfg3", "iocfg4", "iocfg5",
+			    "iocfg6", "iocfg7", "iocfg8",
+			    "eint";
+		gpio-controller;
+		#gpio-cells = <2>;
+		gpio-ranges = <&pio 0 0 192>;
+		interrupt-controller;
+		interrupts = <GIC_SPI 177 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
+		#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+
+		i2c0_pins_a: i2c0 {
+			pins1 {
+				pinmux = <PINMUX_GPIO48__FUNC_SCL5>,
+					 <PINMUX_GPIO49__FUNC_SDA5>;
+				mediatek,pull-up-adv = <3>;
+				mediatek,drive-strength-adv = <7>;
+			};
+		};
+
+		i2c1_pins_a: i2c1 {
+			pins {
+				pinmux = <PINMUX_GPIO50__FUNC_SCL3>,
+					 <PINMUX_GPIO51__FUNC_SDA3>;
+				mediatek,pull-down-adv = <2>;
+				mediatek,drive-strength-adv = <4>;
+			};
+		};
+		...
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-stmfx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-stmfx.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c1b4c1819b84
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-stmfx.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,116 @@
+STMicroelectronics Multi-Function eXpander (STMFX) GPIO expander bindings
+
+ST Multi-Function eXpander (STMFX) offers up to 24 GPIOs expansion.
+Please refer to ../mfd/stmfx.txt for STMFX Core bindings.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: should be "st,stmfx-0300-pinctrl".
+- #gpio-cells: should be <2>, the first cell is the GPIO number and the second
+  cell is the gpio flags in accordance with <dt-bindings/gpio/gpio.h>.
+- gpio-controller: marks the device as a GPIO controller.
+- #interrupt-cells: should be <2>, the first cell is the GPIO number and the
+  second cell is the interrupt flags in accordance with
+  <dt-bindings/interrupt-controller/irq.h>.
+- interrupt-controller: marks the device as an interrupt controller.
+- gpio-ranges: specifies the mapping between gpio controller and pin
+  controller pins. Check "Concerning gpio-ranges property" below.
+Please refer to ../gpio/gpio.txt.
+
+Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt for pin configuration.
+
+Required properties for pin configuration sub-nodes:
+- pins: list of pins to which the configuration applies.
+
+Optional properties for pin configuration sub-nodes (pinconf-generic ones):
+- bias-disable: disable any bias on the pin.
+- bias-pull-up: the pin will be pulled up.
+- bias-pull-pin-default: use the pin-default pull state.
+- bias-pull-down: the pin will be pulled down.
+- drive-open-drain: the pin will be driven with open drain.
+- drive-push-pull: the pin will be driven actively high and low.
+- output-high: the pin will be configured as an output driving high level.
+- output-low: the pin will be configured as an output driving low level.
+
+Note that STMFX pins[15:0] are called "gpio[15:0]", and STMFX pins[23:16] are
+called "agpio[7:0]". Example, to refer to pin 18 of STMFX, use "agpio2".
+
+Concerning gpio-ranges property:
+- if all STMFX pins[24:0] are available (no other STMFX function in use), you
+  should use gpio-ranges = <&stmfx_pinctrl 0 0 24>;
+- if agpio[3:0] are not available (STMFX Touchscreen function in use), you
+  should use gpio-ranges = <&stmfx_pinctrl 0 0 16>, <&stmfx_pinctrl 20 20 4>;
+- if agpio[7:4] are not available (STMFX IDD function in use), you
+  should use gpio-ranges = <&stmfx_pinctrl 0 0 20>;
+
+
+Example:
+
+	stmfx: stmfx@42 {
+		...
+
+		stmfx_pinctrl: stmfx-pin-controller {
+			compatible = "st,stmfx-0300-pinctrl";
+			#gpio-cells = <2>;
+			#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+			gpio-controller;
+			interrupt-controller;
+			gpio-ranges = <&stmfx_pinctrl 0 0 24>;
+
+			joystick_pins: joystick {
+				pins = "gpio0", "gpio1", "gpio2", "gpio3", "gpio4";
+				drive-push-pull;
+				bias-pull-up;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+
+Example of STMFX GPIO consumers:
+
+	joystick {
+		compatible = "gpio-keys";
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+		pinctrl-0 = <&joystick_pins>;
+		pinctrl-names = "default";
+		button-0 {
+			label = "JoySel";
+			linux,code = <KEY_ENTER>;
+			interrupt-parent = <&stmfx_pinctrl>;
+			interrupts = <0 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING>;
+		};
+		button-1 {
+			label = "JoyDown";
+			linux,code = <KEY_DOWN>;
+			interrupt-parent = <&stmfx_pinctrl>;
+			interrupts = <1 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING>;
+		};
+		button-2 {
+			label = "JoyLeft";
+			linux,code = <KEY_LEFT>;
+			interrupt-parent = <&stmfx_pinctrl>;
+			interrupts = <2 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING>;
+		};
+		button-3 {
+			label = "JoyRight";
+			linux,code = <KEY_RIGHT>;
+			interrupt-parent = <&stmfx_pinctrl>;
+			interrupts = <3 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING>;
+		};
+		button-4 {
+			label = "JoyUp";
+			linux,code = <KEY_UP>;
+			interrupt-parent = <&stmfx_pinctrl>;
+			interrupts = <4 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING>;
+		};
+	};
+
+	leds {
+		compatible = "gpio-leds";
+		orange {
+			gpios = <&stmfx_pinctrl 17 1>;
+		};
+
+		blue {
+			gpios = <&stmfx_pinctrl 19 1>;
+		};
+	}
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,apq8064-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,apq8064-pinctrl.txt
index c2dbb3e8d840..4e90ddd77784 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,apq8064-pinctrl.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,apq8064-pinctrl.txt
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ information about e.g. the mux function.
 The following generic properties as defined in pinctrl-bindings.txt are valid
 to specify in a pin configuration subnode:
 
- pins, function, bias-disable, bias-pull-down, bias-pull,up, drive-strength,
+ pins, function, bias-disable, bias-pull-down, bias-pull-up, drive-strength,
  output-low, output-high.
 
 Non-empty subnodes must specify the 'pins' property.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,ipq4019-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,ipq4019-pinctrl.txt
index 991be0cd0948..84be0f2c6f3b 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,ipq4019-pinctrl.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,ipq4019-pinctrl.txt
@@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ information about e.g. the mux function.
 
 The following generic properties as defined in pinctrl-bindings.txt are valid
 to specify in a pin configuration subnode:
- pins, function, bias-disable, bias-pull-down, bias-pull,up, drive-strength.
+ pins, function, bias-disable, bias-pull-down, bias-pull-up, drive-strength.
 
 Non-empty subnodes must specify the 'pins' property.
 Note that not all properties are valid for all pins.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,ipq8064-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,ipq8064-pinctrl.txt
index 7ed56a1b70fc..a7aaaa7db83b 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,ipq8064-pinctrl.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,ipq8064-pinctrl.txt
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ information about e.g. the mux function.
 The following generic properties as defined in pinctrl-bindings.txt are valid
 to specify in a pin configuration subnode:
 
- pins, function, bias-disable, bias-pull-down, bias-pull,up, drive-strength,
+ pins, function, bias-disable, bias-pull-down, bias-pull-up, drive-strength,
  output-low, output-high.
 
 Non-empty subnodes must specify the 'pins' property.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8660-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8660-pinctrl.txt
index cdc4787e59d2..f095209848c8 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8660-pinctrl.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8660-pinctrl.txt
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ information about e.g. the mux function.
 The following generic properties as defined in pinctrl-bindings.txt are valid
 to specify in a pin configuration subnode:
 
- pins, function, bias-disable, bias-pull-down, bias-pull,up, drive-strength,
+ pins, function, bias-disable, bias-pull-down, bias-pull-up, drive-strength,
  output-low, output-high.
 
 Non-empty subnodes must specify the 'pins' property.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8974-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8974-pinctrl.txt
index c22e6c425d0b..004056506679 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8974-pinctrl.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8974-pinctrl.txt
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ information about e.g. the mux function.
 
 The following generic properties as defined in pinctrl-bindings.txt are valid
 to specify in a pin configuration subnode:
- pins, function, bias-disable, bias-pull-down, bias-pull,up, drive-strength.
+ pins, function, bias-disable, bias-pull-down, bias-pull-up, drive-strength.
 
 Non-empty subnodes must specify the 'pins' property.
 Note that not all properties are valid for all pins.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,pmic-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,pmic-gpio.txt
index 759aa1732e48..7f64a7e92c28 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,pmic-gpio.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,pmic-gpio.txt
@@ -19,6 +19,7 @@ PMIC's from Qualcomm.
 		    "qcom,pm8998-gpio"
 		    "qcom,pma8084-gpio"
 		    "qcom,pmi8994-gpio"
+		    "qcom,pmi8998-gpio"
 		    "qcom,pms405-gpio"
 
 		    And must contain either "qcom,spmi-gpio" or "qcom,ssbi-gpio"
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/st,stm32-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/st,stm32-pinctrl.txt
index 48df30a36b01..00169255e48c 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/st,stm32-pinctrl.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/st,stm32-pinctrl.txt
@@ -57,6 +57,8 @@ Optional properties:
  - st,bank-ioport: should correspond to the EXTI IOport selection (EXTI line
    used to select GPIOs as interrupts).
  - hwlocks: reference to a phandle of a hardware spinlock provider node.
+ - st,package: Indicates the SOC package used.
+   More details in include/dt-bindings/pinctrl/stm32-pinfunc.h
 
 Example 1:
 #include <dt-bindings/pinctrl/stm32f429-pinfunc.h>
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/amlogic,meson-gx-pwrc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/amlogic,meson-gx-pwrc.txt
index 1cd050b4054c..0fdc3dd1125e 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/amlogic,meson-gx-pwrc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/amlogic,meson-gx-pwrc.txt
@@ -16,7 +16,9 @@ Device Tree Bindings:
 ---------------------
 
 Required properties:
-- compatible: should be "amlogic,meson-gx-pwrc-vpu" for the Meson GX SoCs
+- compatible: should be one of the following :
+	- "amlogic,meson-gx-pwrc-vpu" for the Meson GX SoCs
+	- "amlogic,meson-g12a-pwrc-vpu" for the Meson G12A SoCs
 - #power-domain-cells: should be 0
 - amlogic,hhi-sysctrl: phandle to the HHI sysctrl node
 - resets: phandles to the reset lines needed for this power demain sequence
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/fsl,imx-gpcv2.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/fsl,imx-gpcv2.txt
index 7c947a996df1..7c7e972aaa42 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/fsl,imx-gpcv2.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/fsl,imx-gpcv2.txt
@@ -32,6 +32,9 @@ Required properties:
 Optional properties:
 
 - power-supply: Power supply used to power the domain
+- clocks: a number of phandles to clocks that need to be enabled during
+  domain power-up sequencing to ensure reset propagation into devices
+  located inside this power domain
 
 Example:
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/qcom,rpmpd.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/qcom,rpmpd.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..980e5413d18f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/qcom,rpmpd.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,145 @@
+Qualcomm RPM/RPMh Power domains
+
+For RPM/RPMh Power domains, we communicate a performance state to RPM/RPMh
+which then translates it into a corresponding voltage on a rail
+
+Required Properties:
+ - compatible: Should be one of the following
+	* qcom,msm8996-rpmpd: RPM Power domain for the msm8996 family of SoC
+	* qcom,sdm845-rpmhpd: RPMh Power domain for the sdm845 family of SoC
+ - #power-domain-cells: number of cells in Power domain specifier
+	must be 1.
+ - operating-points-v2: Phandle to the OPP table for the Power domain.
+	Refer to Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/power_domain.txt
+	and Documentation/devicetree/bindings/opp/opp.txt for more details
+
+Refer to <dt-bindings/power/qcom-rpmpd.h> for the level values for
+various OPPs for different platforms as well as Power domain indexes
+
+Example: rpmh power domain controller and OPP table
+
+#include <dt-bindings/power/qcom-rpmhpd.h>
+
+opp-level values specified in the OPP tables for RPMh power domains
+should use the RPMH_REGULATOR_LEVEL_* constants from
+<dt-bindings/power/qcom-rpmhpd.h>
+
+	rpmhpd: power-controller {
+		compatible = "qcom,sdm845-rpmhpd";
+		#power-domain-cells = <1>;
+		operating-points-v2 = <&rpmhpd_opp_table>;
+
+		rpmhpd_opp_table: opp-table {
+			compatible = "operating-points-v2";
+
+			rpmhpd_opp_ret: opp1 {
+				opp-level = <RPMH_REGULATOR_LEVEL_RETENTION>;
+			};
+
+			rpmhpd_opp_min_svs: opp2 {
+				opp-level = <RPMH_REGULATOR_LEVEL_MIN_SVS>;
+			};
+
+			rpmhpd_opp_low_svs: opp3 {
+				opp-level = <RPMH_REGULATOR_LEVEL_LOW_SVS>;
+			};
+
+			rpmhpd_opp_svs: opp4 {
+				opp-level = <RPMH_REGULATOR_LEVEL_SVS>;
+			};
+
+			rpmhpd_opp_svs_l1: opp5 {
+				opp-level = <RPMH_REGULATOR_LEVEL_SVS_L1>;
+			};
+
+			rpmhpd_opp_nom: opp6 {
+				opp-level = <RPMH_REGULATOR_LEVEL_NOM>;
+			};
+
+			rpmhpd_opp_nom_l1: opp7 {
+				opp-level = <RPMH_REGULATOR_LEVEL_NOM_L1>;
+			};
+
+			rpmhpd_opp_nom_l2: opp8 {
+				opp-level = <RPMH_REGULATOR_LEVEL_NOM_L2>;
+			};
+
+			rpmhpd_opp_turbo: opp9 {
+				opp-level = <RPMH_REGULATOR_LEVEL_TURBO>;
+			};
+
+			rpmhpd_opp_turbo_l1: opp10 {
+				opp-level = <RPMH_REGULATOR_LEVEL_TURBO_L1>;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+
+Example: rpm power domain controller and OPP table
+
+	rpmpd: power-controller {
+		compatible = "qcom,msm8996-rpmpd";
+		#power-domain-cells = <1>;
+		operating-points-v2 = <&rpmpd_opp_table>;
+
+		rpmpd_opp_table: opp-table {
+			compatible = "operating-points-v2";
+
+			rpmpd_opp_low: opp1 {
+				opp-level = <1>;
+			};
+
+			rpmpd_opp_ret: opp2 {
+				opp-level = <2>;
+			};
+
+			rpmpd_opp_svs: opp3 {
+				opp-level = <3>;
+			};
+
+			rpmpd_opp_normal: opp4 {
+				opp-level = <4>;
+			};
+
+			rpmpd_opp_high: opp5 {
+				opp-level = <5>;
+			};
+
+			rpmpd_opp_turbo: opp6 {
+				opp-level = <6>;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+
+Example: Client/Consumer device using OPP table
+
+	leaky-device0@12350000 {
+		compatible = "foo,i-leak-current";
+		reg = <0x12350000 0x1000>;
+		power-domains = <&rpmhpd SDM845_MX>;
+		operating-points-v2 = <&leaky_opp_table>;
+	};
+
+
+	leaky_opp_table: opp-table {
+		compatible = "operating-points-v2";
+
+		opp1 {
+			opp-hz = /bits/ 64 <144000>;
+			required-opps = <&rpmhpd_opp_low>;
+		};
+
+		opp2 {
+			opp-hz = /bits/ 64 <400000>;
+			required-opps = <&rpmhpd_opp_ret>;
+		};
+
+		opp3 {
+			opp-hz = /bits/ 64 <20000000>;
+			required-opps = <&rpmpd_opp_svs>;
+		};
+
+		opp4 {
+			opp-hz = /bits/ 64 <25000000>;
+			required-opps = <&rpmpd_opp_normal>;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/reset/syscon-reboot.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/reset/syscon-reboot.txt
index 11906316b43d..e23dea8344f8 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/reset/syscon-reboot.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/reset/syscon-reboot.txt
@@ -3,13 +3,20 @@ Generic SYSCON mapped register reset driver
 This is a generic reset driver using syscon to map the reset register.
 The reset is generally performed with a write to the reset register
 defined by the register map pointed by syscon reference plus the offset
-with the mask defined in the reboot node.
+with the value and mask defined in the reboot node.
 
 Required properties:
 - compatible: should contain "syscon-reboot"
 - regmap: this is phandle to the register map node
 - offset: offset in the register map for the reboot register (in bytes)
-- mask: the reset value written to the reboot register (32 bit access)
+- value: the reset value written to the reboot register (32 bit access)
+
+Optional properties:
+- mask: update only the register bits defined by the mask (32 bit)
+
+Legacy usage:
+If a node doesn't contain a value property but contains a mask property, the
+mask property is used as the value.
 
 Default will be little endian mode, 32 bit access only.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/reset/xlnx,zynqmp-power.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/reset/xlnx,zynqmp-power.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d366f1eb623a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/reset/xlnx,zynqmp-power.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+--------------------------------------------------------------------
+Device Tree Bindings for the Xilinx Zynq MPSoC Power Management
+--------------------------------------------------------------------
+The zynqmp-power node describes the power management configurations.
+It will control remote suspend/shutdown interfaces.
+
+Required properties:
+ - compatible:		Must contain:	"xlnx,zynqmp-power"
+ - interrupts:		Interrupt specifier
+
+-------
+Example
+-------
+
+firmware {
+	zynqmp_firmware: zynqmp-firmware {
+		compatible = "xlnx,zynqmp-firmware";
+		method = "smc";
+
+		zynqmp_power: zynqmp-power {
+			compatible = "xlnx,zynqmp-power";
+			interrupts = <0 35 4>;
+		};
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/axp20x_usb_power.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/axp20x_usb_power.txt
index ba8d35f66cbe..b2d4968fde7d 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/axp20x_usb_power.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/axp20x_usb_power.txt
@@ -4,6 +4,7 @@ Required Properties:
 -compatible: One of: "x-powers,axp202-usb-power-supply"
                      "x-powers,axp221-usb-power-supply"
                      "x-powers,axp223-usb-power-supply"
+		     "x-powers,axp813-usb-power-supply"
 
 The AXP223 PMIC shares most of its behaviour with the AXP221 but has slight
 variations such as the former being able to set the VBUS power supply max
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/battery.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/battery.txt
index 89871ab8c704..5c913d4cf36c 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/battery.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/battery.txt
@@ -16,6 +16,7 @@ Required Properties:
 
 Optional Properties:
  - voltage-min-design-microvolt: drained battery voltage
+ - voltage-max-design-microvolt: fully charged battery voltage
  - energy-full-design-microwatt-hours: battery design energy
  - charge-full-design-microamp-hours: battery design capacity
  - precharge-current-microamp: current for pre-charge phase
@@ -48,6 +49,7 @@ Example:
 	bat: battery {
 		compatible = "simple-battery";
 		voltage-min-design-microvolt = <3200000>;
+		voltage-max-design-microvolt = <4200000>;
 		energy-full-design-microwatt-hours = <5290000>;
 		charge-full-design-microamp-hours = <1430000>;
 		precharge-current-microamp = <256000>;
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/gpio-charger.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/gpio-charger.txt
index adbb5dc5b6e9..0fb33b2c62a6 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/gpio-charger.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/gpio-charger.txt
@@ -14,13 +14,17 @@ Required properties :
      usb-cdp (USB charging downstream port)
      usb-aca (USB accessory charger adapter)
 
+Optional properties:
+ - charge-status-gpios: GPIO indicating whether a battery is charging.
+
 Example:
 
 	usb_charger: charger {
 		compatible = "gpio-charger";
 		charger-type = "usb-sdp";
-		gpios = <&gpf0 2 0 0 0>;
-	}
+		gpios = <&gpd 28 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>;
+		charge-status-gpios = <&gpc 27 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>;
+	};
 
 	battery {
 		power-supplies = <&usb_charger>;
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/ingenic,battery.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/ingenic,battery.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..66430bf73815
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/ingenic,battery.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+* Ingenic JZ47xx battery bindings
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible: Must be "ingenic,jz4740-battery".
+- io-channels: phandle and IIO specifier pair to the IIO device.
+  Format described in iio-bindings.txt.
+- monitored-battery: phandle to a "simple-battery" compatible node.
+
+The "monitored-battery" property must be a phandle to a node using the format
+described in battery.txt, with the following properties being required:
+
+- voltage-min-design-microvolt: Drained battery voltage.
+- voltage-max-design-microvolt: Fully charged battery voltage.
+
+Example:
+
+#include <dt-bindings/iio/adc/ingenic,adc.h>
+
+simple_battery: battery {
+	compatible = "simple-battery";
+	voltage-min-design-microvolt = <3600000>;
+	voltage-max-design-microvolt = <4200000>;
+};
+
+ingenic_battery {
+	compatible = "ingenic,jz4740-battery";
+	io-channels = <&adc INGENIC_ADC_BATTERY>;
+	io-channel-names = "battery";
+	monitored-battery = <&simple_battery>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/ltc3651-charger.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/lt3651-charger.txt
index 71f2840e8209..40811ff8de10 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/ltc3651-charger.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/lt3651-charger.txt
@@ -1,14 +1,16 @@
-ltc3651-charger
+Analog Devices LT3651 Charger Power Supply bindings: lt3651-charger
 
 Required properties:
- - compatible: "lltc,ltc3651-charger"
+- compatible: Should contain one of the following:
+ * "lltc,ltc3651-charger", (DEPRECATED: Use "lltc,lt3651-charger")
+ * "lltc,lt3651-charger"
  - lltc,acpr-gpios: Connect to ACPR output. See remark below.
 
 Optional properties:
  - lltc,fault-gpios: Connect to FAULT output. See remark below.
  - lltc,chrg-gpios: Connect to CHRG output. See remark below.
 
-The ltc3651 outputs are open-drain type and active low. The driver assumes the
+The lt3651 outputs are open-drain type and active low. The driver assumes the
 GPIO reports "active" when the output is asserted, so if the pins have been
 connected directly, the GPIO flags should be set to active low also.
 
@@ -20,7 +22,7 @@ attributes to detect changes.
 Example:
 
 	charger: battery-charger {
-		compatible = "lltc,ltc3651-charger";
+		compatible = "lltc,lt3651-charger";
 		lltc,acpr-gpios = <&gpio0 68 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>;
 		lltc,fault-gpios = <&gpio0 64 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>;
 		lltc,chrg-gpios = <&gpio0 63 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>;
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/max77650-charger.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/max77650-charger.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e6d0fb6ff94e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/max77650-charger.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+Battery charger driver for MAX77650 PMIC from Maxim Integrated.
+
+This module is part of the MAX77650 MFD device. For more details
+see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max77650.txt.
+
+The charger is represented as a sub-node of the PMIC node on the device tree.
+
+Required properties:
+--------------------
+- compatible:		Must be "maxim,max77650-charger"
+
+Optional properties:
+--------------------
+- input-voltage-min-microvolt:	Minimum CHGIN regulation voltage. Must be one
+				of: 4000000, 4100000, 4200000, 4300000,
+				4400000, 4500000, 4600000, 4700000.
+- input-current-limit-microamp:	CHGIN input current limit (in microamps). Must
+				be one of: 95000, 190000, 285000, 380000,
+				475000.
+
+Example:
+--------
+
+	charger {
+		compatible = "maxim,max77650-charger";
+		input-voltage-min-microvolt = <4200000>;
+		input-current-limit-microamp = <285000>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/microchip,ucs1002.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/microchip,ucs1002.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1d284ad816bf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/microchip,ucs1002.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+Microchip UCS1002 USB Port Power Controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible		: Should be "microchip,ucs1002";
+- reg			: I2C slave address
+
+Optional properties:
+- interrupts		: A list of interrupts lines present (could be either
+			  corresponding to A_DET# pin, ALERT# pin, or both)
+- interrupt-names	: A list of interrupt names. Should contain (if
+			  present):
+			  - "a_det" for line connected to A_DET# pin
+			  - "alert" for line connected to ALERT# pin
+			  Both are expected to be IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_BOTH
+Example:
+
+&i2c3 {
+	charger@32 {
+		compatible = "microchip,ucs1002";
+		pinctrl-names = "default";
+		pinctrl-0 = <&pinctrl_ucs1002_pins>;
+		reg = <0x32>;
+		interrupts-extended = <&gpio5 2 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_BOTH>,
+				      <&gpio3 21 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_BOTH>;
+		interrupt-names = "a_det", "alert";
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/olpc_battery.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/olpc_battery.txt
index c8901b3992d9..8d87d6b35a98 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/olpc_battery.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/olpc_battery.txt
@@ -2,4 +2,4 @@ OLPC battery
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~
 
 Required properties:
-  - compatible : "olpc,xo1-battery"
+  - compatible : "olpc,xo1-battery" or "olpc,xo1.5-battery"
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/sc27xx-fg.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/sc27xx-fg.txt
index fc35ac577401..0a5705b8b592 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/sc27xx-fg.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/sc27xx-fg.txt
@@ -9,8 +9,8 @@ Required properties:
   "sprd,sc2731-fgu".
 - reg: The address offset of fuel gauge unit.
 - battery-detect-gpios: GPIO for battery detection.
-- io-channels: Specify the IIO ADC channel to get temperature.
-- io-channel-names: Should be "bat-temp".
+- io-channels: Specify the IIO ADC channels to get temperature and charge voltage.
+- io-channel-names: Should be "bat-temp" or "charge-vol".
 - nvmem-cells: A phandle to the calibration cells provided by eFuse device.
 - nvmem-cell-names: Should be "fgu_calib".
 - monitored-battery: Phandle of battery characteristics devicetree node.
@@ -47,8 +47,8 @@ Example:
 			compatible = "sprd,sc2731-fgu";
 			reg = <0xa00>;
 			battery-detect-gpios = <&pmic_eic 9 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>;
-			io-channels = <&pmic_adc 5>;
-			io-channel-names = "bat-temp";
+			io-channels = <&pmic_adc 5>, <&pmic_adc 14>;
+			io-channel-names = "bat-temp", "charge-vol";
 			nvmem-cells = <&fgu_calib>;
 			nvmem-cell-names = "fgu_calib";
 			monitored-battery = <&bat>;
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/xlnx,zynqmp-genpd.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/xlnx,zynqmp-genpd.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8d1b8200ebd0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/xlnx,zynqmp-genpd.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+-----------------------------------------------------------
+Device Tree Bindings for the Xilinx Zynq MPSoC PM domains
+-----------------------------------------------------------
+The binding for zynqmp-power-controller follow the common
+generic PM domain binding[1].
+
+[1] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/power_domain.txt
+
+== Zynq MPSoC Generic PM Domain Node ==
+
+Required property:
+ - Below property should be in zynqmp-firmware node.
+ - #power-domain-cells:	Number of cells in a PM domain specifier. Must be 1.
+
+Power domain ID indexes are mentioned in
+include/dt-bindings/power/xlnx-zynqmp-power.h.
+
+-------
+Example
+-------
+
+firmware {
+	zynqmp_firmware: zynqmp-firmware {
+		...
+		#power-domain-cells = <1>;
+		...
+	};
+};
+
+sata {
+	...
+	power-domains = <&zynqmp_firmware 28>;
+	...
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pps/pps-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pps/pps-gpio.txt
index 3683874832ae..9012a2a02e14 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pps/pps-gpio.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pps/pps-gpio.txt
@@ -7,6 +7,10 @@ Required properties:
 - compatible: should be "pps-gpio"
 - gpios: one PPS GPIO in the format described by ../gpio/gpio.txt
 
+Additional required properties for the PPS ECHO functionality:
+- echo-gpios: one PPS ECHO GPIO in the format described by ../gpio/gpio.txt
+- echo-active-ms: duration in ms of the active portion of the echo pulse
+
 Optional properties:
 - assert-falling-edge: when present, assert is indicated by a falling edge
                        (instead of by a rising edge)
@@ -19,5 +23,8 @@ Example:
 		gpios = <&gpio1 26 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>;
 		assert-falling-edge;
 
+		echo-gpios = <&gpio1 27 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>;
+		echo-active-ms = <100>;
+
 		compatible = "pps-gpio";
 	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/property-units.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/property-units.txt
index 45ce054d844d..bfd33734faca 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/property-units.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/property-units.txt
@@ -31,6 +31,7 @@ Electricity
 -microwatt-hours: micro Watt-hours
 -microvolt	: micro volts
 -picofarads	: picofarads
+-femtofarads	: femtofarads
 
 Temperature
 ----------------------------------------
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ptp/ptp-qoriq.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ptp/ptp-qoriq.txt
index c5d0e7998e2b..454c937076a2 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ptp/ptp-qoriq.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ptp/ptp-qoriq.txt
@@ -17,6 +17,11 @@ Clock Properties:
   - fsl,tmr-fiper1   Fixed interval period pulse generator.
   - fsl,tmr-fiper2   Fixed interval period pulse generator.
   - fsl,max-adj      Maximum frequency adjustment in parts per billion.
+  - fsl,extts-fifo   The presence of this property indicates hardware
+		     support for the external trigger stamp FIFO.
+  - little-endian    The presence of this property indicates the 1588 timer
+		     IP block is little-endian mode. The default endian mode
+		     is big-endian.
 
   These properties set the operational parameters for the PTP
   clock. You must choose these carefully for the clock to work right.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/atmel-pwm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/atmel-pwm.txt
index c8c831d7b0d1..591ecdd39c7b 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/atmel-pwm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/atmel-pwm.txt
@@ -5,6 +5,7 @@ Required properties:
     - "atmel,at91sam9rl-pwm"
     - "atmel,sama5d3-pwm"
     - "atmel,sama5d2-pwm"
+    - "microchip,sam9x60-pwm"
   - reg: physical base address and length of the controller's registers
   - #pwm-cells: Should be 3. See pwm.txt in this directory for a
     description of the cells format.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/imx-tpm-pwm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/imx-tpm-pwm.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3ba958d764ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/imx-tpm-pwm.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+Freescale i.MX TPM PWM controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Should be "fsl,imx7ulp-pwm".
+- reg: Physical base address and length of the controller's registers.
+- #pwm-cells: Should be 3. See pwm.txt in this directory for a description of the cells format.
+- clocks : The clock provided by the SoC to drive the PWM.
+- interrupts: The interrupt for the PWM controller.
+
+Note: The TPM counter and period counter are shared between multiple channels, so all channels
+should use same period setting.
+
+Example:
+
+tpm4: pwm@40250000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx7ulp-pwm";
+	reg = <0x40250000 0x1000>;
+	assigned-clocks = <&pcc2 IMX7ULP_CLK_LPTPM4>;
+	assigned-clock-parents = <&scg1 IMX7ULP_CLK_SOSC_BUS_CLK>;
+	clocks = <&pcc2 IMX7ULP_CLK_LPTPM4>;
+	#pwm-cells = <3>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-hibvt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-hibvt.txt
index fa7849d67836..daedfef09bb6 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-hibvt.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-hibvt.txt
@@ -5,6 +5,8 @@ Required properties:
  The SoC specific strings supported including:
 	"hisilicon,hi3516cv300-pwm"
 	"hisilicon,hi3519v100-pwm"
+	"hisilicon,hi3559v100-shub-pwm"
+	"hisilicon,hi3559v100-pwm
 - reg: physical base address and length of the controller's registers.
 - clocks: phandle and clock specifier of the PWM reference clock.
 - resets: phandle and reset specifier for the PWM controller reset.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-meson.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-meson.txt
index 1fa3f7182133..891632354065 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-meson.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-meson.txt
@@ -7,6 +7,9 @@ Required properties:
                          or "amlogic,meson-gxbb-ao-pwm"
                          or "amlogic,meson-axg-ee-pwm"
                          or "amlogic,meson-axg-ao-pwm"
+                         or "amlogic,meson-g12a-ee-pwm"
+                         or "amlogic,meson-g12a-ao-pwm-ab"
+                         or "amlogic,meson-g12a-ao-pwm-cd"
 - #pwm-cells: Should be 3. See pwm.txt in this directory for a description of
   the cells format.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-tiehrpwm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-tiehrpwm.txt
index 944fe356bb45..31c4577157dd 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-tiehrpwm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-tiehrpwm.txt
@@ -4,6 +4,7 @@ Required properties:
 - compatible: Must be "ti,<soc>-ehrpwm".
   for am33xx  - compatible = "ti,am3352-ehrpwm", "ti,am33xx-ehrpwm";
   for am4372  - compatible = "ti,am4372-ehrpwm", "ti-am3352-ehrpwm", "ti,am33xx-ehrpwm";
+  for am654   - compatible = "ti,am654-ehrpwm", "ti-am3352-ehrpwm";
   for da850   - compatible = "ti,da850-ehrpwm", "ti-am3352-ehrpwm", "ti,am33xx-ehrpwm";
   for dra746 - compatible = "ti,dra746-ehrpwm", "ti-am3352-ehrpwm";
 - #pwm-cells: should be 3. See pwm.txt in this directory for a description of
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/fan53555.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/fan53555.txt
index 54a3f2c80e3a..e7fc045281d1 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/fan53555.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/fan53555.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
 Binding for Fairchild FAN53555 regulators
 
 Required properties:
-  - compatible: one of "fcs,fan53555", "silergy,syr827", "silergy,syr828"
+  - compatible: one of "fcs,fan53555", "fcs,fan53526", "silergy,syr827" or
+		"silergy,syr828"
   - reg: I2C address
 
 Optional properties:
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/fixed-regulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/fixed-regulator.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 0c2a6c8a1536..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/fixed-regulator.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,35 +0,0 @@
-Fixed Voltage regulators
-
-Required properties:
-- compatible: Must be "regulator-fixed";
-- regulator-name: Defined in regulator.txt as optional, but required here.
-
-Optional properties:
-- gpio: gpio to use for enable control
-- startup-delay-us: startup time in microseconds
-- enable-active-high: Polarity of GPIO is Active high
-If this property is missing, the default assumed is Active low.
-- gpio-open-drain: GPIO is open drain type.
-  If this property is missing then default assumption is false.
--vin-supply: Input supply name.
-
-Any property defined as part of the core regulator
-binding, defined in regulator.txt, can also be used.
-However a fixed voltage regulator is expected to have the
-regulator-min-microvolt and regulator-max-microvolt
-to be the same.
-
-Example:
-
-	abc: fixedregulator@0 {
-		compatible = "regulator-fixed";
-		regulator-name = "fixed-supply";
-		regulator-min-microvolt = <1800000>;
-		regulator-max-microvolt = <1800000>;
-		gpio = <&gpio1 16 0>;
-		startup-delay-us = <70000>;
-		enable-active-high;
-		regulator-boot-on;
-		gpio-open-drain;
-		vin-supply = <&parent_reg>;
-	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/fixed-regulator.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/fixed-regulator.yaml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d289c2f7455a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/fixed-regulator.yaml
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+%YAML 1.2
+---
+$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/regulator/fixed-regulator.yaml#
+$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml#
+
+title: Fixed Voltage regulators
+
+maintainers:
+  - Liam Girdwood <lgirdwood@gmail.com>
+  - Mark Brown <broonie@kernel.org>
+
+description:
+  Any property defined as part of the core regulator binding, defined in
+  regulator.txt, can also be used. However a fixed voltage regulator is
+  expected to have the regulator-min-microvolt and regulator-max-microvolt
+  to be the same.
+
+properties:
+  compatible:
+    const: regulator-fixed
+
+  regulator-name: true
+
+  gpio:
+    description: gpio to use for enable control
+    maxItems: 1
+
+  startup-delay-us:
+    description: startup time in microseconds
+    $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32
+
+  enable-active-high:
+    description:
+      Polarity of GPIO is Active high. If this property is missing,
+      the default assumed is Active low.
+    type: boolean
+
+  gpio-open-drain:
+    description:
+      GPIO is open drain type. If this property is missing then default
+      assumption is false.
+    type: boolean
+
+  vin-supply:
+    description: Input supply phandle.
+    $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/phandle
+
+required:
+  - compatible
+  - regulator-name
+
+examples:
+  - |
+    reg_1v8: regulator-1v8 {
+      compatible = "regulator-fixed";
+      regulator-name = "1v8";
+      regulator-min-microvolt = <1800000>;
+      regulator-max-microvolt = <1800000>;
+      gpio = <&gpio1 16 0>;
+      startup-delay-us = <70000>;
+      enable-active-high;
+      regulator-boot-on;
+      gpio-open-drain;
+      vin-supply = <&parent_reg>;
+    };
+...
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/gpio-regulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/gpio-regulator.txt
index 1f496159e2bb..dd25e73b5d79 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/gpio-regulator.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/gpio-regulator.txt
@@ -4,16 +4,30 @@ Required properties:
 - compatible		: Must be "regulator-gpio".
 - regulator-name	: Defined in regulator.txt as optional, but required
 			  here.
-- states		: Selection of available voltages and GPIO configs.
-                          if there are no states, then use a fixed regulator
+- gpios			: Array of one or more GPIO pins used to select the
+			  regulator voltage/current listed in "states".
+- states		: Selection of available voltages/currents provided by
+			  this regulator and matching GPIO configurations to
+			  achieve them. If there are no states in the "states"
+			  array, use a fixed regulator instead.
 
 Optional properties:
-- enable-gpio		: GPIO to use to enable/disable the regulator.
-- gpios			: GPIO group used to control voltage.
-- gpios-states		: gpios pin's initial states array. 0: LOW, 1: HIGH.
-			  defualt is LOW if nothing is specified.
+- enable-gpios		: GPIO used to enable/disable the regulator.
+			  Warning, the GPIO phandle flags are ignored and the
+			  GPIO polarity is controlled solely by the presence
+			  of "enable-active-high" DT property. This is due to
+			  compatibility with old DTs.
+- enable-active-high	: Polarity of "enable-gpio" GPIO is active HIGH.
+			  Default is active LOW.
+- gpios-states		: On operating systems, that don't support reading back
+			  gpio values in output mode (most notably linux), this
+			  array provides the state of GPIO pins set when
+			  requesting them from the gpio controller. Systems,
+			  that are capable of preserving state when requesting
+			  the lines, are free to ignore this property.
+			  0: LOW, 1: HIGH. Default is LOW if nothing else
+			  is specified.
 - startup-delay-us	: Startup time in microseconds.
-- enable-active-high	: Polarity of GPIO is active high (default is low).
 - regulator-type	: Specifies what is being regulated, must be either
 			  "voltage" or "current", defaults to voltage.
 
@@ -30,7 +44,7 @@ Example:
 		regulator-max-microvolt = <2600000>;
 		regulator-boot-on;
 
-		enable-gpio = <&gpio0 23 0x4>;
+		enable-gpios = <&gpio0 23 0x4>;
 		gpios = <&gpio0 24 0x4
 			 &gpio0 25 0x4>;
 		states = <1800000 0x3
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/max77650-regulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/max77650-regulator.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f1cbe813c30f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/max77650-regulator.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+Regulator driver for MAX77650 PMIC from Maxim Integrated.
+
+This module is part of the MAX77650 MFD device. For more details
+see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max77650.txt.
+
+The regulator controller is represented as a sub-node of the PMIC node
+on the device tree.
+
+The device has a single LDO regulator and a SIMO buck-boost regulator with
+three independent power rails.
+
+Required properties:
+--------------------
+- compatible:		Must be "maxim,max77650-regulator"
+
+Each rail must be instantiated under the regulators subnode of the top PMIC
+node. Up to four regulators can be defined. For standard regulator properties
+refer to Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt.
+
+Available regulator compatible strings are: "ldo", "sbb0", "sbb1", "sbb2".
+
+Example:
+--------
+
+	regulators {
+		compatible = "maxim,max77650-regulator";
+
+		max77650_ldo: regulator@0 {
+			regulator-compatible = "ldo";
+			regulator-name = "max77650-ldo";
+			regulator-min-microvolt = <1350000>;
+			regulator-max-microvolt = <2937500>;
+		};
+
+		max77650_sbb0: regulator@1 {
+			regulator-compatible = "sbb0";
+			regulator-name = "max77650-sbb0";
+			regulator-min-microvolt = <800000>;
+			regulator-max-microvolt = <1587500>;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/pfuze100.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/pfuze100.txt
index f9be1acf891c..4d3b12b92cb3 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/pfuze100.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/pfuze100.txt
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ Optional properties:
 - fsl,pfuze-support-disable-sw: Boolean, if present disable all unused switch
   regulators to save power consumption. Attention, ensure that all important
   regulators (e.g. DDR ref, DDR supply) has set the "regulator-always-on"
-  property. If not present, the switched regualtors are always on and can't be
+  property. If not present, the switched regulators are always on and can't be
   disabled. This binding is a workaround to keep backward compatibility with
   old dtb's which rely on the fact that the switched regulators are always on
   and don't mark them explicit as "regulator-always-on".
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/rohm,bd70528-regulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/rohm,bd70528-regulator.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..698cfc3bc3dd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/rohm,bd70528-regulator.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+ROHM BD70528 Power Management Integrated Circuit regulator bindings
+
+Required properties:
+ - regulator-name: should be "buck1", "buck2", "buck3", "ldo1", "ldo2", "ldo3",
+		   "led_ldo1", "led_ldo2"
+
+List of regulators provided by this controller. BD70528 regulators node
+should be sub node of the BD70528 MFD node. See BD70528 MFD bindings at
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/rohm,bd70528-pmic.txt
+
+The valid names for BD70528 regulator nodes are:
+BUCK1, BUCK2, BUCK3, LDO1, LDO2, LDO3, LED_LDO1, LED_LDO2
+
+Optional properties:
+- Any optional property defined in bindings/regulator/regulator.txt
+
+Example:
+regulators {
+	buck1: BUCK1 {
+		regulator-name = "buck1";
+		regulator-min-microvolt = <1200000>;
+		regulator-max-microvolt = <3400000>;
+		regulator-boot-on;
+		regulator-ramp-delay = <125>;
+	};
+	buck2: BUCK2 {
+		regulator-name = "buck2";
+		regulator-min-microvolt = <1200000>;
+		regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+		regulator-boot-on;
+		regulator-ramp-delay = <125>;
+	};
+	buck3: BUCK3 {
+		regulator-name = "buck3";
+		regulator-min-microvolt = <800000>;
+		regulator-max-microvolt = <1800000>;
+		regulator-boot-on;
+		regulator-ramp-delay = <250>;
+	};
+	ldo1: LDO1 {
+		regulator-name = "ldo1";
+		regulator-min-microvolt = <1650000>;
+		regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+		regulator-boot-on;
+	};
+	ldo2: LDO2 {
+		regulator-name = "ldo2";
+		regulator-min-microvolt = <1650000>;
+		regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+		regulator-boot-on;
+	};
+
+	ldo3: LDO3 {
+		regulator-name = "ldo3";
+		regulator-min-microvolt = <1650000>;
+		regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+	};
+	led_ldo1: LED_LDO1 {
+		regulator-name = "led_ldo1";
+		regulator-min-microvolt = <200000>;
+		regulator-max-microvolt = <300000>;
+	};
+	led_ldo2: LED_LDO2 {
+		regulator-name = "led_ldo2";
+		regulator-min-microvolt = <200000>;
+		regulator-max-microvolt = <300000>;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/rohm,bd71837-regulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/rohm,bd71837-regulator.txt
index 4b98ca26e61a..cbce62c22b60 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/rohm,bd71837-regulator.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/rohm,bd71837-regulator.txt
@@ -27,8 +27,38 @@ BUCK1, BUCK2, BUCK3, BUCK4, BUCK5, BUCK6
 LDO1, LDO2, LDO3, LDO4, LDO5, LDO6
 
 Optional properties:
+- rohm,dvs-run-voltage		: PMIC default "RUN" state voltage in uV.
+				  See below table for bucks which support this.
+- rohm,dvs-idle-voltage		: PMIC default "IDLE" state voltage in uV.
+				  See below table for bucks which support this.
+- rohm,dvs-suspend-voltage	: PMIC default "SUSPEND" state voltage in uV.
+				  See below table for bucks which support this.
 - Any optional property defined in bindings/regulator/regulator.txt
 
+Supported default DVS states:
+
+BD71837:
+buck	| dvs-run-voltage	| dvs-idle-voltage	| dvs-suspend-voltage
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+1	| supported		| supported		| supported
+----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+2	| supported		| supported		| not supported
+----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+3	| supported		| not supported		| not supported
+----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+4	| supported		| not supported		| not supported
+----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+rest	| not supported		| not supported		| not supported
+
+BD71847:
+buck	| dvs-run-voltage	| dvs-idle-voltage	| dvs-suspend-voltage
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+1	| supported		| supported		| supported
+----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+2	| supported		| supported		| not supported
+----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+rest	| not supported		| not supported		| not supported
+
 Example:
 regulators {
 	buck1: BUCK1 {
@@ -36,7 +66,11 @@ regulators {
 		regulator-min-microvolt = <700000>;
 		regulator-max-microvolt = <1300000>;
 		regulator-boot-on;
+		regulator-always-on;
 		regulator-ramp-delay = <1250>;
+		rohm,dvs-run-voltage = <900000>;
+		rohm,dvs-idle-voltage = <850000>;
+		rohm,dvs-suspend-voltage = <800000>;
 	};
 	buck2: BUCK2 {
 		regulator-name = "buck2";
@@ -45,18 +79,22 @@ regulators {
 		regulator-boot-on;
 		regulator-always-on;
 		regulator-ramp-delay = <1250>;
+		rohm,dvs-run-voltage = <1000000>;
+		rohm,dvs-idle-voltage = <900000>;
 	};
 	buck3: BUCK3 {
 		regulator-name = "buck3";
 		regulator-min-microvolt = <700000>;
 		regulator-max-microvolt = <1300000>;
 		regulator-boot-on;
+		rohm,dvs-run-voltage = <1000000>;
 	};
 	buck4: BUCK4 {
 		regulator-name = "buck4";
 		regulator-min-microvolt = <700000>;
 		regulator-max-microvolt = <1300000>;
 		regulator-boot-on;
+		rohm,dvs-run-voltage = <1000000>;
 	};
 	buck5: BUCK5 {
 		regulator-name = "buck5";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/st,stm32mp1-pwr-reg.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/st,stm32mp1-pwr-reg.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e372dd3f0c8a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/st,stm32mp1-pwr-reg.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+STM32MP1 PWR Regulators
+-----------------------
+
+Available Regulators in STM32MP1 PWR block are:
+  - reg11 for regulator 1V1
+  - reg18 for regulator 1V8
+  - usb33 for the swtich USB3V3
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Must be "st,stm32mp1,pwr-reg"
+- list of child nodes that specify the regulator reg11, reg18 or usb33
+  initialization data for defined regulators. The definition for each of
+  these nodes is defined using the standard binding for regulators found at
+  Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt.
+- vdd-supply: phandle to the parent supply/regulator node for vdd input
+- vdd_3v3_usbfs-supply: phandle to the parent supply/regulator node for usb33
+
+Example:
+
+pwr_regulators: pwr@50001000 {
+	compatible = "st,stm32mp1,pwr-reg";
+	reg = <0x50001000 0x10>;
+	vdd-supply = <&vdd>;
+	vdd_3v3_usbfs-supply = <&vdd_usb>;
+
+	reg11: reg11 {
+		regulator-name = "reg11";
+		regulator-min-microvolt = <1100000>;
+		regulator-max-microvolt = <1100000>;
+	};
+
+	reg18: reg18 {
+		regulator-name = "reg18";
+		regulator-min-microvolt = <1800000>;
+		regulator-max-microvolt = <1800000>;
+	};
+
+	usb33: usb33 {
+		regulator-name = "usb33";
+		regulator-min-microvolt = <3300000>;
+		regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/st,stpmic1-regulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/st,stpmic1-regulator.txt
index a3f476240565..6189df71ea98 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/st,stpmic1-regulator.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/st,stpmic1-regulator.txt
@@ -23,16 +23,14 @@ Switches are fixed voltage regulators with only enable/disable capability.
 Optional properties:
 - st,mask-reset: mask reset for this regulator: the regulator configuration
   is maintained during pmic reset.
-- regulator-pull-down: enable high pull down
-  if not specified light pull down is used
 - regulator-over-current-protection:
     if set, all regulators are switched off in case of over-current detection
     on this regulator,
     if not set, the driver only sends an over-current event.
-- interrupt-parent: phandle to the parent interrupt controller
 - interrupts: index of current limit detection interrupt
 - <regulator>-supply: phandle to the parent supply/regulator node
 	each regulator supply can be described except vref_ddr.
+- regulator-active-discharge: can be used on pwr_sw1 and pwr_sw2.
 
 Example:
 regulators {
@@ -43,7 +41,6 @@ regulators {
 	vdd_core: buck1 {
 		regulator-name = "vdd_core";
 		interrupts = <IT_CURLIM_BUCK1 0>;
-		interrupt-parent = <&pmic>;
 		st,mask-reset;
 		regulator-pull-down;
 		regulator-min-microvolt = <700000>;
@@ -53,7 +50,6 @@ regulators {
 	v3v3: buck4 {
 		regulator-name = "v3v3";
 		interrupts = <IT_CURLIM_BUCK4 0>;
-		interrupt-parent = <&mypmic>;
 
 		regulator-min-microvolt = <3300000>;
 		regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/tps65218.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/tps65218.txt
index 02f0e9bbfbf8..54aded3b78e2 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/tps65218.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/tps65218.txt
@@ -71,8 +71,13 @@ tps65218: tps65218@24 {
 		regulator-always-on;
 	};
 
+	ls2: regulator-ls2 {
+		regulator-min-microamp = <100000>;
+		regulator-max-microamp = <1000000>;
+	};
+
 	ls3: regulator-ls3 {
-		regulator-min-microvolt = <100000>;
-		regulator-max-microvolt = <1000000>;
+		regulator-min-microamp = <100000>;
+		regulator-max-microamp = <1000000>;
 	};
 };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/remoteproc/qcom,adsp-pil.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/remoteproc/qcom,adsp-pil.txt
index a842a782b557..66af2c30944f 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/remoteproc/qcom,adsp-pil.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/remoteproc/qcom,adsp-pil.txt
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ on the Qualcomm Technology Inc. ADSP Hexagon core.
 	Value type: <stringlist>
 	Definition: List of clock input name strings sorted in the same
 		    order as the clocks property. Definition must have
-		    "xo", "sway_cbcr", "lpass_aon", "lpass_ahbs_aon_cbcr",
+		    "xo", "sway_cbcr", "lpass_ahbs_aon_cbcr",
 		    "lpass_ahbm_aon_cbcr", "qdsp6ss_xo", "qdsp6ss_sleep"
 		    and "qdsp6ss_core".
 
@@ -100,13 +100,12 @@ ADSP, as it is found on SDM845 boards.
 
 		clocks = <&rpmhcc RPMH_CXO_CLK>,
 			<&gcc GCC_LPASS_SWAY_CLK>,
-			<&lpasscc LPASS_AUDIO_WRAPPER_AON_CLK>,
 			<&lpasscc LPASS_Q6SS_AHBS_AON_CLK>,
 			<&lpasscc LPASS_Q6SS_AHBM_AON_CLK>,
 			<&lpasscc LPASS_QDSP6SS_XO_CLK>,
 			<&lpasscc LPASS_QDSP6SS_SLEEP_CLK>,
 			<&lpasscc LPASS_QDSP6SS_CORE_CLK>;
-		clock-names = "xo", "sway_cbcr", "lpass_aon",
+		clock-names = "xo", "sway_cbcr",
 			"lpass_ahbs_aon_cbcr",
 			"lpass_ahbm_aon_cbcr", "qdsp6ss_xo",
 			"qdsp6ss_sleep", "qdsp6ss_core";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/remoteproc/qcom,adsp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/remoteproc/qcom,adsp.txt
index 9c0cff3a5ed8..292dfda9770d 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/remoteproc/qcom,adsp.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/remoteproc/qcom,adsp.txt
@@ -19,13 +19,30 @@ on the Qualcomm ADSP Hexagon core.
 - interrupts-extended:
 	Usage: required
 	Value type: <prop-encoded-array>
-	Definition: must list the watchdog, fatal IRQs ready, handover and
-		    stop-ack IRQs
+	Definition: reference to the interrupts that match interrupt-names
 
 - interrupt-names:
 	Usage: required
 	Value type: <stringlist>
-	Definition: must be "wdog", "fatal", "ready", "handover", "stop-ack"
+	Definition: The interrupts needed depends on the compatible
+		    string:
+	qcom,msm8974-adsp-pil:
+	qcom,msm8996-adsp-pil:
+	qcom,msm8996-slpi-pil:
+	qcom,qcs404-adsp-pas:
+	qcom,qcs404-cdsp-pas:
+	qcom,sdm845-adsp-pas:
+	qcom,sdm845-cdsp-pas:
+		    must be "wdog", "fatal", "ready", "handover", "stop-ack"
+	qcom,qcs404-wcss-pas:
+		    must be "wdog", "fatal", "ready", "handover", "stop-ack",
+		    "shutdown-ack"
+
+- firmware-name:
+	Usage: optional
+	Value type: <string>
+	Definition: must list the relative firmware image path for the
+		    Hexagon Core.
 
 - clocks:
 	Usage: required
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/remoteproc/qcom,q6v5.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/remoteproc/qcom,q6v5.txt
index 9ff5b0309417..41ca5df5be5a 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/remoteproc/qcom,q6v5.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/remoteproc/qcom,q6v5.txt
@@ -28,24 +28,51 @@ on the Qualcomm Hexagon core.
 - interrupts-extended:
 	Usage: required
 	Value type: <prop-encoded-array>
-	Definition: must list the watchdog, fatal IRQs ready, handover and
-		    stop-ack IRQs
+	Definition: reference to the interrupts that match interrupt-names
 
 - interrupt-names:
 	Usage: required
 	Value type: <stringlist>
-	Definition: must be "wdog", "fatal", "ready", "handover", "stop-ack"
+	Definition: The interrupts needed depends on the the compatible
+		    string:
+	qcom,q6v5-pil:
+	qcom,ipq8074-wcss-pil:
+	qcom,msm8916-mss-pil:
+	qcom,msm8974-mss-pil:
+		    must be "wdog", "fatal", "ready", "handover", "stop-ack"
+	qcom,msm8996-mss-pil:
+	qcom,sdm845-mss-pil:
+		    must be "wdog", "fatal", "ready", "handover", "stop-ack",
+		    "shutdown-ack"
+
+- firmware-name:
+	Usage: optional
+	Value type: <stringlist>
+	Definition: must list the relative firmware image paths for mba and
+		    modem. They are used for booting and authenticating the
+		    Hexagon core.
 
 - clocks:
 	Usage: required
 	Value type: <phandle>
-	Definition: reference to the iface, bus and mem clocks to be held on
-		    behalf of the booting of the Hexagon core
+	Definition: reference to the clocks that match clock-names
 
 - clock-names:
 	Usage: required
 	Value type: <stringlist>
-	Definition: must be "iface", "bus", "mem"
+	Definition: The clocks needed depend on the compatible string:
+	qcom,ipq8074-wcss-pil:
+		    no clock names required
+	qcom,q6v5-pil:
+	qcom,msm8916-mss-pil:
+	qcom,msm8974-mss-pil:
+		    must be "iface", "bus", "mem", "xo"
+	qcom,msm8996-mss-pil:
+		    must be "iface", "bus", "mem", "xo", "gpll0_mss",
+		    "snoc_axi", "mnoc_axi", "pnoc", "qdss"
+	qcom,sdm845-mss-pil:
+		    must be "iface", "bus", "mem", "xo", "gpll0_mss",
+		    "snoc_axi", "mnoc_axi", "prng"
 
 - resets:
 	Usage: required
@@ -65,6 +92,19 @@ on the Qualcomm Hexagon core.
 		    must be "mss_restart", "pdc_reset" for the modem
 		    sub-system on SDM845 SoCs
 
+For the compatible strings below the following supplies are required:
+  "qcom,q6v5-pil"
+  "qcom,msm8916-mss-pil",
+- cx-supply:
+- mx-supply:
+- pll-supply:
+	Usage: required
+	Value type: <phandle>
+	Definition: reference to the regulators to be held on behalf of the
+		    booting of the Hexagon core
+
+For the compatible string below the following supplies are required:
+  "qcom,msm8974-mss-pil"
 - cx-supply:
 - mss-supply:
 - mx-supply:
@@ -74,6 +114,33 @@ on the Qualcomm Hexagon core.
 	Definition: reference to the regulators to be held on behalf of the
 		    booting of the Hexagon core
 
+For the compatible string below the following supplies are required:
+  "qcom,msm8996-mss-pil"
+- pll-supply:
+	Usage: required
+	Value type: <phandle>
+	Definition: reference to the regulators to be held on behalf of the
+		    booting of the Hexagon core
+
+- power-domains:
+	Usage: required
+	Value type: <phandle>
+	Definition: reference to power-domains that match power-domain-names
+
+- power-domain-names:
+	Usage: required
+	Value type: <stringlist>
+	Definition: The power-domains needed depend on the compatible string:
+	qcom,q6v5-pil:
+	qcom,ipq8074-wcss-pil:
+	qcom,msm8916-mss-pil:
+	qcom,msm8974-mss-pil:
+		    no power-domain names required
+	qcom,msm8996-mss-pil:
+		    must be "cx", "mx"
+	qcom,sdm845-mss-pil:
+		    must be "cx", "mx", "mss", "load_state"
+
 - qcom,smem-states:
 	Usage: required
 	Value type: <phandle>
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/brcm,brcmstb-reset.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/brcm,brcmstb-reset.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6e5341b4f891
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/brcm,brcmstb-reset.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+Broadcom STB SW_INIT-style reset controller
+===========================================
+
+Broadcom STB SoCs have a SW_INIT-style reset controller with separate
+SET/CLEAR/STATUS registers and possibly multiple banks, each of 32 bit
+reset lines.
+
+Please also refer to reset.txt in this directory for common reset
+controller binding usage.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: should be brcm,brcmstb-reset
+- reg: register base and length
+- #reset-cells: must be set to 1
+
+Example:
+
+	reset: reset-controller@8404318 {
+		compatible = "brcm,brcmstb-reset";
+		reg = <0x8404318 0x30>;
+		#reset-cells = <1>;
+	};
+
+	&ethernet_switch {
+		resets = <&reset>;
+		reset-names = "switch";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/fsl,imx7-src.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/fsl,imx7-src.txt
index 1ab1d109318e..2ecf33815d18 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/fsl,imx7-src.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/fsl,imx7-src.txt
@@ -5,7 +5,9 @@ Please also refer to reset.txt in this directory for common reset
 controller binding usage.
 
 Required properties:
-- compatible: Should be "fsl,imx7d-src", "syscon"
+- compatible:
+	- For i.MX7 SoCs should be "fsl,imx7d-src", "syscon"
+	- For i.MX8MQ SoCs should be "fsl,imx8mq-src", "syscon"
 - reg: should be register base and length as documented in the
   datasheet
 - interrupts: Should contain SRC interrupt
@@ -44,4 +46,5 @@ Example:
 
 
 For list of all valid reset indicies see
-<dt-bindings/reset/imx7-reset.h>
+<dt-bindings/reset/imx7-reset.h> for i.MX7 and
+<dt-bindings/reset/imx8mq-reset.h> for i.MX8MQ
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/hisilicon,hi3660-reset.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/hisilicon,hi3660-reset.txt
index 2bf3344b2a02..2df4bddeb688 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/hisilicon,hi3660-reset.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/hisilicon,hi3660-reset.txt
@@ -5,11 +5,12 @@ Please also refer to reset.txt in this directory for common reset
 controller binding usage.
 
 The reset controller registers are part of the system-ctl block on
-hi3660 SoC.
+hi3660 and hi3670 SoCs.
 
 Required properties:
-- compatible: should be
-		 "hisilicon,hi3660-reset"
+- compatible: should be one of the following:
+		 "hisilicon,hi3660-reset" for HI3660
+		 "hisilicon,hi3670-reset", "hisilicon,hi3660-reset" for HI3670
 - hisi,rst-syscon: phandle of the reset's syscon.
 - #reset-cells : Specifies the number of cells needed to encode a
   reset source.  The type shall be a <u32> and the value shall be 2.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/xlnx,zynqmp-reset.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/xlnx,zynqmp-reset.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..27a45fe5ecf1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/xlnx,zynqmp-reset.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ =  Zynq UltraScale+ MPSoC reset driver binding =
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------
+The Zynq UltraScale+ MPSoC has several different resets.
+
+See Chapter 36 of the Zynq UltraScale+ MPSoC TRM (UG) for more information
+about zynqmp resets.
+
+Please also refer to reset.txt in this directory for common reset
+controller binding usage.
+
+Required Properties:
+- compatible:	"xlnx,zynqmp-reset"
+- #reset-cells:	Specifies the number of cells needed to encode reset
+		line, should be 1
+
+-------
+Example
+-------
+
+firmware {
+	zynqmp_firmware: zynqmp-firmware {
+		compatible = "xlnx,zynqmp-firmware";
+		method = "smc";
+
+		zynqmp_reset: reset-controller {
+			compatible = "xlnx,zynqmp-reset";
+			#reset-cells = <1>;
+		};
+	};
+};
+
+Specifying reset lines connected to IP modules
+==============================================
+
+Device nodes that need access to reset lines should
+specify them as a reset phandle in their corresponding node as
+specified in reset.txt.
+
+For list of all valid reset indicies see
+<dt-bindings/reset/xlnx-zynqmp-resets.h>
+
+Example:
+
+serdes: zynqmp_phy@fd400000 {
+	...
+
+	resets = <&zynqmp_reset ZYNQMP_RESET_SATA>;
+	reset-names = "sata_rst";
+
+	...
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/riscv/cpus.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/riscv/cpus.yaml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f97a4ecd7b91
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/riscv/cpus.yaml
@@ -0,0 +1,170 @@
+# SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0 OR MIT)
+%YAML 1.2
+---
+$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/riscv/cpus.yaml#
+$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml#
+
+title: RISC-V bindings for 'cpus' DT nodes
+
+maintainers:
+  - Paul Walmsley <paul.walmsley@sifive.com>
+  - Palmer Dabbelt <palmer@sifive.com>
+
+allOf:
+  - $ref: /schemas/cpus.yaml#
+
+properties:
+  $nodename:
+    const: cpus
+    description: Container of cpu nodes
+
+  '#address-cells':
+    const: 1
+    description: |
+      A single unsigned 32-bit integer uniquely identifies each RISC-V
+      hart in a system.  (See the "reg" node under the "cpu" node,
+      below).
+
+  '#size-cells':
+    const: 0
+
+patternProperties:
+  '^cpu@[0-9a-f]+$':
+    properties:
+      compatible:
+        type: array
+        items:
+          - enum:
+              - sifive,rocket0
+              - sifive,e5
+              - sifive,e51
+              - sifive,u54-mc
+              - sifive,u54
+              - sifive,u5
+          - const: riscv
+        description:
+          Identifies that the hart uses the RISC-V instruction set
+          and identifies the type of the hart.
+
+      mmu-type:
+        allOf:
+          - $ref: "/schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/string"
+          - enum:
+              - riscv,sv32
+              - riscv,sv39
+              - riscv,sv48
+        description:
+          Identifies the MMU address translation mode used on this
+          hart.  These values originate from the RISC-V Privileged
+          Specification document, available from
+          https://riscv.org/specifications/
+
+      riscv,isa:
+        allOf:
+          - $ref: "/schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/string"
+          - enum:
+              - rv64imac
+              - rv64imafdc
+        description:
+          Identifies the specific RISC-V instruction set architecture
+          supported by the hart.  These are documented in the RISC-V
+          User-Level ISA document, available from
+          https://riscv.org/specifications/
+
+      timebase-frequency:
+        type: integer
+        minimum: 1
+        description:
+          Specifies the clock frequency of the system timer in Hz.
+          This value is common to all harts on a single system image.
+
+      interrupt-controller:
+        type: object
+        description: Describes the CPU's local interrupt controller
+
+        properties:
+          '#interrupt-cells':
+            const: 1
+
+          compatible:
+            const: riscv,cpu-intc
+
+          interrupt-controller: true
+
+        required:
+          - '#interrupt-cells'
+          - compatible
+          - interrupt-controller
+
+    required:
+      - riscv,isa
+      - timebase-frequency
+      - interrupt-controller
+
+examples:
+  - |
+    // Example 1: SiFive Freedom U540G Development Kit
+    cpus {
+        #address-cells = <1>;
+        #size-cells = <0>;
+        timebase-frequency = <1000000>;
+        cpu@0 {
+                clock-frequency = <0>;
+                compatible = "sifive,rocket0", "riscv";
+                device_type = "cpu";
+                i-cache-block-size = <64>;
+                i-cache-sets = <128>;
+                i-cache-size = <16384>;
+                reg = <0>;
+                riscv,isa = "rv64imac";
+                cpu_intc0: interrupt-controller {
+                        #interrupt-cells = <1>;
+                        compatible = "riscv,cpu-intc";
+                        interrupt-controller;
+                };
+        };
+        cpu@1 {
+                clock-frequency = <0>;
+                compatible = "sifive,rocket0", "riscv";
+                d-cache-block-size = <64>;
+                d-cache-sets = <64>;
+                d-cache-size = <32768>;
+                d-tlb-sets = <1>;
+                d-tlb-size = <32>;
+                device_type = "cpu";
+                i-cache-block-size = <64>;
+                i-cache-sets = <64>;
+                i-cache-size = <32768>;
+                i-tlb-sets = <1>;
+                i-tlb-size = <32>;
+                mmu-type = "riscv,sv39";
+                reg = <1>;
+                riscv,isa = "rv64imafdc";
+                tlb-split;
+                cpu_intc1: interrupt-controller {
+                        #interrupt-cells = <1>;
+                        compatible = "riscv,cpu-intc";
+                        interrupt-controller;
+                };
+        };
+    };
+
+  - |
+    // Example 2: Spike ISA Simulator with 1 Hart
+    cpus {
+        #address-cells = <1>;
+        #size-cells = <0>;
+        cpu@0 {
+                device_type = "cpu";
+                reg = <0>;
+                compatible = "riscv";
+                riscv,isa = "rv64imafdc";
+                mmu-type = "riscv,sv48";
+                interrupt-controller {
+                        #interrupt-cells = <1>;
+                        interrupt-controller;
+                        compatible = "riscv,cpu-intc";
+                };
+        };
+    };
+...
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/riscv/sifive-l2-cache.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/riscv/sifive-l2-cache.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..73d8f19c3bd9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/riscv/sifive-l2-cache.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+SiFive L2 Cache Controller
+--------------------------
+The SiFive Level 2 Cache Controller is used to provide access to fast copies
+of memory for masters in a Core Complex. The Level 2 Cache Controller also
+acts as directory-based coherency manager.
+All the properties in ePAPR/DeviceTree specification applies for this platform
+
+Required Properties:
+--------------------
+- compatible: Should be "sifive,fu540-c000-ccache" and "cache"
+
+- cache-block-size: Specifies the block size in bytes of the cache.
+  Should be 64
+
+- cache-level: Should be set to 2 for a level 2 cache
+
+- cache-sets: Specifies the number of associativity sets of the cache.
+  Should be 1024
+
+- cache-size: Specifies the size in bytes of the cache. Should be 2097152
+
+- cache-unified: Specifies the cache is a unified cache
+
+- interrupts: Must contain 3 entries (DirError, DataError and DataFail signals)
+
+- reg: Physical base address and size of L2 cache controller registers map
+
+Optional Properties:
+--------------------
+- next-level-cache: phandle to the next level cache if present.
+
+- memory-region: reference to the reserved-memory for the L2 Loosely Integrated
+  Memory region. The reserved memory node should be defined as per the bindings
+  in reserved-memory.txt
+
+
+Example:
+
+	cache-controller@2010000 {
+		compatible = "sifive,fu540-c000-ccache", "cache";
+		cache-block-size = <64>;
+		cache-level = <2>;
+		cache-sets = <1024>;
+		cache-size = <2097152>;
+		cache-unified;
+		interrupt-parent = <&plic0>;
+		interrupts = <1 2 3>;
+		reg = <0x0 0x2010000 0x0 0x1000>;
+		next-level-cache = <&L25 &L40 &L36>;
+		memory-region = <&l2_lim>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/riscv/sifive.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/riscv/sifive.yaml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9d17dc2f3f84
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/riscv/sifive.yaml
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+# SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0 OR MIT)
+%YAML 1.2
+---
+$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/riscv/sifive.yaml#
+$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml#
+
+title: SiFive SoC-based boards
+
+maintainers:
+  - Paul Walmsley <paul.walmsley@sifive.com>
+  - Palmer Dabbelt <palmer@sifive.com>
+
+description:
+  SiFive SoC-based boards
+
+properties:
+  $nodename:
+    const: '/'
+  compatible:
+    items:
+      - enum:
+          - sifive,freedom-unleashed-a00
+      - const: sifive,fu540-c000
+      - const: sifive,fu540
+...
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/abracon,abx80x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/abracon,abx80x.txt
index 18b892d010d8..2405e35a1bc0 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/abracon,abx80x.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/abracon,abx80x.txt
@@ -16,6 +16,7 @@ Required properties:
         "abracon,ab1803"
         "abracon,ab1804"
         "abracon,ab1805"
+        "microcrystal,rv1805"
 	Using "abracon,abx80x" will enable chip autodetection.
  - "reg": I2C bus address of the device
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/cdns,rtc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/cdns,rtc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..14a04487b432
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/cdns,rtc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+Cadence Real Time Clock
+
+The Cadence RTC controller with date, time and alarm capabilities.
+The alarm may wake the system from low-power state.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "cdns,rtc-r109v3"
+- reg: Specifies base physical address and size of the register area.
+- interrupts: A single interrupt specifier.
+- clocks: Must contain two entries:
+	- pclk: APB registers clock
+	- ref_clk: reference 1Hz or 100Hz clock, depending on IP configuration
+	See ../clocks/clock-bindings.txt for details.
+
+Example:
+        rtc0: rtc@fd080000 {
+        	compatible = "cdns,rtc-r109v3";
+        	reg = <0xfd080000 0x1000>;
+
+        	clock-names = "pclk", "ref_clk";
+        	clocks = <&sysclock>, <&refclock>;
+
+        	interrupt-parent = <&gic>;
+        	interrupts = <0 6 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
+        };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/isil,isl1208.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/isil,isl1208.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..51f003006f04
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/isil,isl1208.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+Intersil ISL1209/19 I2C RTC/Alarm chip with event in
+
+ISL12X9 have additional pins EVIN and #EVDET for tamper detection, while the
+ISL1208 and ISL1218 do not.  They are all use the same driver with the bindings
+described here, with chip specific properties as noted.
+
+Required properties supported by the device:
+ - "compatible": Should be one of the following:
+		- "isil,isl1208"
+		- "isil,isl1209"
+		- "isil,isl1218"
+		- "isil,isl1219"
+ - "reg": I2C bus address of the device
+
+Optional properties:
+ - "interrupt-names": list which may contains "irq" and "evdet"
+	evdet applies to isl1209 and isl1219 only
+ - "interrupts": list of interrupts for "irq" and "evdet"
+	evdet applies to isl1209 and isl1219 only
+ - "isil,ev-evienb": Enable or disable internal pull on EVIN pin
+	Applies to isl1209 and isl1219 only
+	Possible values are 0 and 1
+	Value 0 enables internal pull-up on evin pin, 1 disables it.
+	Default will leave the non-volatile configuration of the pullup
+	as is.
+
+Example isl1219 node with #IRQ pin connected to SoC gpio1 pin12 and #EVDET pin
+connected to SoC gpio2 pin 24 and internal pull-up enabled in EVIN pin.
+
+	isl1219: rtc@68 {
+		compatible = "isil,isl1219";
+		reg = <0x68>;
+		interrupt-names = "irq", "evdet";
+		interrupts-extended = <&gpio1 12 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING>,
+			<&gpio2 24 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING>;
+		isil,ev-evienb = <1>;
+	};
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/isil,isl1219.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/isil,isl1219.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index c3efd48e91c2..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/isil,isl1219.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,29 +0,0 @@
-Intersil ISL1219 I2C RTC/Alarm chip with event in
-
-ISL1219 has additional pins EVIN and #EVDET for tamper detection.
-
-Required properties supported by the device:
-
- - "compatible": must be "isil,isl1219"
- - "reg": I2C bus address of the device
-
-Optional properties:
-
- - "interrupt-names": list which may contains "irq" and "evdet"
- - "interrupts": list of interrupts for "irq" and "evdet"
- - "isil,ev-evienb": if present EV.EVIENB bit is set to the specified
-                     value for proper operation.
-
-
-Example isl1219 node with #IRQ pin connected to SoC gpio1 pin12
- and #EVDET pin connected to SoC gpio2 pin 24:
-
-	isl1219: rtc@68 {
-		compatible = "isil,isl1219";
-		reg = <0x68>;
-		interrupt-names = "irq", "evdet";
-		interrupts-extended = <&gpio1 12 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING>,
-			<&gpio2 24 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING>;
-		isil,ev-evienb = <1>;
-	};
-
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/nxp,pcf85063.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/nxp,pcf85063.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..627bb533eff7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/nxp,pcf85063.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+* NXP PCF85063 Real Time Clock
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should one of contain:
+	"nxp,pcf85063",
+	"nxp,pcf85063a",
+	"nxp,pcf85063tp",
+	"microcrystal,rv8263"
+- reg: I2C address for chip.
+
+Optional property:
+- quartz-load-femtofarads: The capacitive load of the quartz(x-tal),
+  expressed in femto Farad (fF). Valid values are 7000 and 12500.
+  Default value (if no value is specified) is 7000fF.
+
+Example:
+
+pcf85063: rtc@51 {
+	compatible = "nxp,pcf85063";
+	reg = <0x51>;
+	quartz-load-femtofarads = <12500>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/nxp,pcf8523.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/nxp,pcf8523.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0b1080c60f63
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/nxp,pcf8523.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+* NXP PCF8523 Real Time Clock
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should contain "nxp,pcf8523".
+- reg: I2C address for chip.
+
+Optional property:
+- quartz-load-femtofarads: The capacitive load of the quartz(x-tal),
+  expressed in femto Farad (fF). Valid values are 7000 and 12500.
+  Default value (if no value is specified) is 12500fF.
+
+Example:
+
+pcf8523: rtc@68 {
+	compatible = "nxp,pcf8523";
+	reg = <0x68>;
+	quartz-load-femtofarads = <7000>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-aspeed.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-aspeed.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2e956b3dc276
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-aspeed.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+ASPEED BMC RTC
+==============
+
+Required properties:
+ - compatible: should be one of the following
+   * aspeed,ast2400-rtc for the ast2400
+   * aspeed,ast2500-rtc for the ast2500
+   * aspeed,ast2600-rtc for the ast2600
+
+ - reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
+   region
+
+ - interrupts: The interrupt number
+
+Example:
+
+   rtc@1e781000 {
+           compatible = "aspeed,ast2400-rtc";
+           reg = <0x1e781000 0x18>;
+           interrupts = <22>;
+           status = "disabled";
+   };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-meson.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-meson.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e921fe66a362
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-meson.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+* Amlogic Meson6, Meson8, Meson8b and Meson8m2 RTC
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: should be one of the following describing the hardware:
+	* "amlogic,meson6-rtc"
+	* "amlogic,meson8-rtc"
+	* "amlogic,meson8b-rtc"
+	* "amlogic,meson8m2-rtc"
+
+- reg: physical register space for the controller's memory mapped registers.
+- interrupts: the interrupt line of the RTC block.
+- clocks: reference to the external 32.768kHz crystal oscillator.
+- vdd-supply: reference to the power supply of the RTC block.
+- resets: reset controller reference to allow reset of the controller
+
+Optional properties for the battery-backed non-volatile memory:
+- #address-cells: should be 1 to address the battery-backed non-volatile memory
+- #size-cells: should be 1 to reference the battery-backed non-volatile memory
+
+Optional child nodes:
+- see ../nvmem/nvmem.txt
+
+Example:
+
+	rtc: rtc@740 {
+		compatible = "amlogic,meson6-rtc";
+		reg = <0x740 0x14>;
+		interrupts = <GIC_SPI 72 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING>;
+		clocks = <&rtc32k_xtal>;
+		vdd-supply = <&rtc_vdd>;
+		resets = <&reset RESET_RTC>;
+
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc.txt
index 7c8da6926095..a97fc6a9a75e 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc.txt
@@ -21,12 +21,16 @@ Optional properties
 The following properties may not be supported by all drivers. However, if a
 driver wants to support one of the below features, it should adapt the bindings
 below.
-- trickle-resistor-ohms : Selected resistor for trickle charger. Should be given
-                          if trickle charger should be enabled
-- trickle-diode-disable : Do not use internal trickle charger diode Should be
-                          given if internal trickle charger diode should be
-                          disabled
-- wakeup-source :         Enables wake up of host system on alarm
+- trickle-resistor-ohms :   Selected resistor for trickle charger. Should be given
+                            if trickle charger should be enabled
+- trickle-diode-disable :   Do not use internal trickle charger diode Should be
+                            given if internal trickle charger diode should be
+                            disabled
+- wakeup-source :           Enables wake up of host system on alarm
+- quartz-load-femtofarads : The capacitive load of the quartz(x-tal),
+                            expressed in femto Farad (fF).
+                            The default value shall be listed (if optional),
+                            and likewise all valid values.
 
 Trivial RTCs
 ------------
@@ -39,21 +43,23 @@ possibly an interrupt line.
 Compatible		Vendor / Chip
 ==========		=============
 abracon,abb5zes3	AB-RTCMC-32.768kHz-B5ZE-S3: Real Time Clock/Calendar Module with I2C Interface
+abracon,abeoz9		AB-RTCMC-32.768kHz-EOZ9: Real Time Clock/Calendar Module with I2C Interface
 dallas,ds1374		I2C, 32-Bit Binary Counter Watchdog RTC with Trickle Charger and Reset Input/Output
 dallas,ds1672		Dallas DS1672 Real-time Clock
 dallas,ds3232		Extremely Accurate I²C RTC with Integrated Crystal and SRAM
 epson,rx8010		I2C-BUS INTERFACE REAL TIME CLOCK MODULE
+epson,rx8571		I2C-BUS INTERFACE REAL TIME CLOCK MODULE with Battery Backed RAM
 epson,rx8581		I2C-BUS INTERFACE REAL TIME CLOCK MODULE
 emmicro,em3027		EM Microelectronic EM3027 Real-time Clock
 isil,isl1208		Intersil ISL1208 Low Power RTC with Battery Backed SRAM
 isil,isl1218		Intersil ISL1218 Low Power RTC with Battery Backed SRAM
 isil,isl12022		Intersil ISL12022 Real-time Clock
+microcrystal,rv3028	Real Time Clock Module with I2C-Bus
 microcrystal,rv3029	Real Time Clock Module with I2C-Bus
+microcrystal,rv8523	Real Time Clock
 nxp,pcf2127		Real-time clock
 nxp,pcf2129		Real-time clock
-nxp,pcf8523		Real-time Clock
 nxp,pcf8563		Real-time clock/calendar
-nxp,pcf85063		Tiny Real-Time Clock
 pericom,pt7c4338	Real-time Clock Module
 ricoh,r2025sd		I2C bus SERIAL INTERFACE REAL-TIME CLOCK IC
 ricoh,r2221tl		I2C bus SERIAL INTERFACE REAL-TIME CLOCK IC
@@ -62,3 +68,5 @@ ricoh,rs5c372b		I2C bus SERIAL INTERFACE REAL-TIME CLOCK IC
 ricoh,rv5c386		I2C bus SERIAL INTERFACE REAL-TIME CLOCK IC
 ricoh,rv5c387a		I2C bus SERIAL INTERFACE REAL-TIME CLOCK IC
 sii,s35390a		2-wire CMOS real-time clock
+whwave,sd3078		I2C bus SERIAL INTERFACE REAL-TIME CLOCK IC
+xircom,x1205		Xircom X1205 I2C RTC
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/8250.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/8250.txt
index da50321da34d..3cba12f855b7 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/8250.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/8250.txt
@@ -21,6 +21,7 @@ Required properties:
 	- "altr,16550-FIFO128"
 	- "fsl,16550-FIFO64"
 	- "fsl,ns16550"
+	- "intel,xscale-uart"
 	- "ti,da830-uart"
 	- "aspeed,ast2400-vuart"
 	- "aspeed,ast2500-vuart"
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/cdns,uart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/cdns,uart.txt
index 227bb770b027..4efc560f90ab 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/cdns,uart.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/cdns,uart.txt
@@ -12,6 +12,11 @@ Required properties:
   See ../clocks/clock-bindings.txt for details.
 
 
+Optional properties:
+- cts-override : Override the CTS modem status signal. This signal will
+  always be reported as active instead of being obtained from the modem status
+  register. Define this if your serial port does not use this pin
+
 Example:
 	uart@e0000000 {
 		compatible = "cdns,uart-r1p8";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/ingenic,uart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/ingenic,uart.txt
index c3c6406d5cfe..24ed8769f4af 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/ingenic,uart.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/ingenic,uart.txt
@@ -6,7 +6,8 @@ Required properties:
   - "ingenic,jz4760-uart",
   - "ingenic,jz4770-uart",
   - "ingenic,jz4775-uart",
-  - "ingenic,jz4780-uart".
+  - "ingenic,jz4780-uart",
+  - "ingenic,x1000-uart".
 - reg : offset and length of the register set for the device.
 - interrupts : should contain uart interrupt.
 - clocks : phandles to the module & baud clocks.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/milbeaut-uart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/milbeaut-uart.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3d2fb1a7ba94
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/milbeaut-uart.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+Socionext Milbeaut UART controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: should be "socionext,milbeaut-usio-uart".
+- reg: offset and length of the register set for the device.
+- interrupts: two interrupts specifier.
+- interrupt-names: should be "rx", "tx".
+- clocks: phandle to the input clock.
+
+Optional properties:
+- auto-flow-control: flow control enable.
+
+Example:
+	usio1: usio_uart@1e700010 {
+		compatible = "socionext,milbeaut-usio-uart";
+		reg = <0x1e700010 0x10>;
+		interrupts = <0 141 0x4>, <0 149 0x4>;
+		interrupt-names = "rx", "tx";
+		clocks = <&clk 2>;
+		auto-flow-control;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/mtk-uart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/mtk-uart.txt
index 742cb470595b..c6b5262eb352 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/mtk-uart.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/mtk-uart.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-* Mediatek Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART)
+* MediaTek Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART)
 
 Required properties:
 - compatible should contain:
@@ -13,9 +13,12 @@ Required properties:
   * "mediatek,mt6797-uart" for MT6797 compatible UARTS
   * "mediatek,mt7622-uart" for MT7622 compatible UARTS
   * "mediatek,mt7623-uart" for MT7623 compatible UARTS
+  * "mediatek,mt7629-uart" for MT7629 compatible UARTS
   * "mediatek,mt8127-uart" for MT8127 compatible UARTS
   * "mediatek,mt8135-uart" for MT8135 compatible UARTS
   * "mediatek,mt8173-uart" for MT8173 compatible UARTS
+  * "mediatek,mt8183-uart", "mediatek,mt6577-uart" for MT8183 compatible UARTS
+  * "mediatek,mt8516-uart" for MT8516 compatible UARTS
   * "mediatek,mt6577-uart" for MT6577 and all of the above
 
 - reg: The base address of the UART register bank.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/nvidia,tegra194-tcu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/nvidia,tegra194-tcu.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..085a8591accd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/nvidia,tegra194-tcu.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+NVIDIA Tegra Combined UART (TCU)
+
+The TCU is a system for sharing a hardware UART instance among multiple
+systems within the Tegra SoC. It is implemented through a mailbox-
+based protocol where each "virtual UART" has a pair of mailboxes, one
+for transmitting and one for receiving, that is used to communicate
+with the hardware implementing the TCU.
+
+Required properties:
+- name : Should be tcu
+- compatible
+    Array of strings
+    One of:
+    - "nvidia,tegra194-tcu"
+- mbox-names:
+    "rx" - Mailbox for receiving data from hardware UART
+    "tx" - Mailbox for transmitting data to hardware UART
+- mboxes: Mailboxes corresponding to the mbox-names.
+
+This node is a mailbox consumer. See the following files for details of
+the mailbox subsystem, and the specifiers implemented by the relevant
+provider(s):
+
+- .../mailbox/mailbox.txt
+- .../mailbox/nvidia,tegra186-hsp.txt
+
+Example bindings:
+-----------------
+
+tcu: tcu {
+	compatible = "nvidia,tegra194-tcu";
+	mboxes = <&hsp_top0 TEGRA_HSP_MBOX_TYPE_SM 0>,
+	         <&hsp_aon TEGRA_HSP_MBOX_TYPE_SM 1>;
+	mbox-names = "rx", "tx";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/nxp,sc16is7xx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/nxp,sc16is7xx.txt
index e7921a8e276b..c1091a923a89 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/nxp,sc16is7xx.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/nxp,sc16is7xx.txt
@@ -12,6 +12,8 @@ Required properties:
 - reg: I2C address of the SC16IS7xx device.
 - interrupts: Should contain the UART interrupt
 - clocks: Reference to the IC source clock.
+	OR (when there is no clock provider visible to the platform)
+- clock-frequency: The source clock frequency for the IC.
 
 Optional properties:
 - gpio-controller: Marks the device node as a GPIO controller.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/omap_serial.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/omap_serial.txt
index c35d5ece1156..0a9b5444f4e6 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/omap_serial.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/omap_serial.txt
@@ -22,6 +22,8 @@ Optional properties:
 - dma-names : "rx" for receive channel, "tx" for transmit channel.
 - rs485-rts-delay, rs485-rx-during-tx, linux,rs485-enabled-at-boot-time: see rs485.txt
 - rs485-rts-active-high: drive RTS high when sending (default is low).
+- clocks: phandle to the functional clock as per
+  Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt
 
 Example:
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/pl011.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/pl011.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 77863aefe9ef..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/pl011.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,51 +0,0 @@
-* ARM AMBA Primecell PL011 serial UART
-
-Required properties:
-- compatible: must be "arm,primecell", "arm,pl011", "zte,zx296702-uart"
-- reg: exactly one register range with length 0x1000
-- interrupts: exactly one interrupt specifier
-
-Optional properties:
-- pinctrl:
-	   When present, must have one state named "default",
-	   and may contain a second name named "sleep". The former
-	   state sets up pins for ordinary operation whereas
-	   the latter state will put the associated pins to sleep
-	   when the UART is unused
-- clocks:
-	   When present, the first clock listed must correspond to
-	   the clock named UARTCLK on the IP block, i.e. the clock
-	   to the external serial line, whereas the second clock
-	   must correspond to the PCLK clocking the internal logic
-	   of the block. Just listing one clock (the first one) is
-	   deprecated.
-- clock-names:
-	   When present, the first clock listed must be named
-	   "uartclk" and the second clock listed must be named
-	   "apb_pclk"
-- dmas:	
-	   When present, may have one or two dma channels.
-	   The first one must be named "rx", the second one
-	   must be named "tx".
-- auto-poll:
-	   Enables polling when using RX DMA.
-- poll-rate-ms:
-	   Rate at which poll occurs when auto-poll is set,
-	   default 100ms.
-- poll-timeout-ms:
-	   Poll timeout when auto-poll is set, default
-	   3000ms.
-
-See also bindings/arm/primecell.txt
-
-Example:
-
-uart@80120000 {
-	compatible = "arm,pl011", "arm,primecell";
-	reg = <0x80120000 0x1000>;
-	interrupts = <0 11 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
-	dmas = <&dma 13 0 0x2>, <&dma 13 0 0x0>;
-	dma-names = "rx", "tx";
-	clocks = <&foo_clk>, <&bar_clk>;
-	clock-names = "uartclk", "apb_pclk";
-};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/pl011.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/pl011.yaml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1a64d59152aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/pl011.yaml
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+%YAML 1.2
+---
+$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/serial/pl011.yaml#
+$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml#
+
+title: ARM AMBA Primecell PL011 serial UART
+
+maintainers:
+  - Rob Herring <robh@kernel.org>
+
+allOf:
+  - $ref: /schemas/serial.yaml#
+
+# Need a custom select here or 'arm,primecell' will match on lots of nodes
+select:
+  properties:
+    compatible:
+      contains:
+        enum:
+          - arm,pl011
+          - zte,zx296702-uart
+  required:
+    - compatible
+
+properties:
+  compatible:
+    oneOf:
+      - items:
+          - const: arm,pl011
+          - const: arm,primecell
+      - items:
+          - const: zte,zx296702-uart
+          - const: arm,primecell
+
+  reg:
+    maxItems: 1
+
+  interrupts:
+    maxItems: 1
+
+  pinctrl-0: true
+  pinctrl-1: true
+
+  pinctrl-names:
+    description:
+      When present, must have one state named "default",
+      and may contain a second name named "sleep". The former
+      state sets up pins for ordinary operation whereas
+      the latter state will put the associated pins to sleep
+      when the UART is unused
+    minItems: 1
+    items:
+      - const: default
+      - const: sleep
+
+  clocks:
+    description:
+      When present, the first clock listed must correspond to
+      the clock named UARTCLK on the IP block, i.e. the clock
+      to the external serial line, whereas the second clock
+      must correspond to the PCLK clocking the internal logic
+      of the block. Just listing one clock (the first one) is
+      deprecated.
+    maxItems: 2
+
+  clock-names:
+    items:
+      - const: uartclk
+      - const: apb_pclk
+
+  dmas:
+    minItems: 1
+    maxItems: 2
+
+  dma-names:
+    minItems: 1
+    items:
+      - const: rx
+      - const: tx
+
+  auto-poll:
+    description:
+      Enables polling when using RX DMA.
+    type: boolean
+
+  poll-rate-ms:
+    description:
+      Rate at which poll occurs when auto-poll is set.
+      default 100ms.
+    allOf:
+      - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32
+      - default: 100
+
+  poll-timeout-ms:
+    description:
+      Poll timeout when auto-poll is set, default
+      3000ms.
+    allOf:
+      - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32
+      - default: 3000
+
+required:
+  - compatible
+  - reg
+  - interrupts
+
+dependencies:
+  poll-rate-ms: [ auto-poll ]
+  poll-timeout-ms: [ auto-poll ]
+
+additionalProperties: false
+
+examples:
+  - |
+    serial@80120000 {
+      compatible = "arm,pl011", "arm,primecell";
+      reg = <0x80120000 0x1000>;
+      interrupts = <0 11 4>;
+      dmas = <&dma 13 0 0x2>, <&dma 13 0 0x0>;
+      dma-names = "rx", "tx";
+      clocks = <&foo_clk>, <&bar_clk>;
+      clock-names = "uartclk", "apb_pclk";
+    };
+
+...
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/renesas,rzn1-uart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/renesas,rzn1-uart.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 8b9e0d4dc2e4..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/renesas,rzn1-uart.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-Renesas RZ/N1 UART
-
-This controller is based on the Synopsys DesignWare ABP UART and inherits all
-properties defined in snps-dw-apb-uart.txt except for the compatible property.
-
-Required properties:
-- compatible : The device specific string followed by the generic RZ/N1 string.
-   Therefore it must be one of:
-   "renesas,r9a06g032-uart", "renesas,rzn1-uart"
-   "renesas,r9a06g033-uart", "renesas,rzn1-uart"
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/renesas,sci-serial.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/renesas,sci-serial.txt
index 20232ad05d89..dd63151dc8b6 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/renesas,sci-serial.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/renesas,sci-serial.txt
@@ -29,7 +29,9 @@ Required properties:
     - "renesas,scif-r8a774c0" for R8A774C0 (RZ/G2E) SCIF compatible UART.
     - "renesas,hscif-r8a774c0" for R8A774C0 (RZ/G2E) HSCIF compatible UART.
     - "renesas,scif-r8a7778" for R8A7778 (R-Car M1) SCIF compatible UART.
+    - "renesas,hscif-r8a7778" for R8A7778 (R-Car M1) HSCIF compatible UART.
     - "renesas,scif-r8a7779" for R8A7779 (R-Car H1) SCIF compatible UART.
+    - "renesas,hscif-r8a7779" for R8A7779 (R-Car H1) HSCIF compatible UART.
     - "renesas,scif-r8a7790" for R8A7790 (R-Car H2) SCIF compatible UART.
     - "renesas,scifa-r8a7790" for R8A7790 (R-Car H2) SCIFA compatible UART.
     - "renesas,scifb-r8a7790" for R8A7790 (R-Car H2) SCIFB compatible UART.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/sifive-serial.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/sifive-serial.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c86b1e524159
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/sifive-serial.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+SiFive asynchronous serial interface (UART)
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible: should be something similar to
+	      "sifive,<chip>-uart" for the UART as integrated
+	      on a particular chip, and "sifive,uart<version>" for the
+	      general UART IP block programming model.	Supported
+	      compatible strings as of the date of this writing are:
+	      "sifive,fu540-c000-uart" for the SiFive UART v0 as
+	      integrated onto the SiFive FU540 chip, or "sifive,uart0"
+	      for the SiFive UART v0 IP block with no chip integration
+	      tweaks (if any)
+- reg: address and length of the register space
+- interrupts: Should contain the UART interrupt identifier
+- clocks: Should contain a clock identifier for the UART's parent clock
+
+
+UART HDL that corresponds to the IP block version numbers can be found
+here:
+
+https://github.com/sifive/sifive-blocks/tree/master/src/main/scala/devices/uart
+
+
+Example:
+
+uart0: serial@10010000 {
+	compatible = "sifive,fu540-c000-uart", "sifive,uart0";
+	interrupt-parent = <&plic0>;
+	interrupts = <80>;
+	reg = <0x0 0x10010000 0x0 0x1000>;
+	clocks = <&prci PRCI_CLK_TLCLK>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/snps-dw-apb-uart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/snps-dw-apb-uart.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 12bbe9f22560..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/snps-dw-apb-uart.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,76 +0,0 @@
-* Synopsys DesignWare ABP UART
-
-Required properties:
-- compatible : "snps,dw-apb-uart"
-- reg : offset and length of the register set for the device.
-- interrupts : should contain uart interrupt.
-
-Clock handling:
-The clock rate of the input clock needs to be supplied by one of
-- clock-frequency : the input clock frequency for the UART.
-- clocks : phandle to the input clock
-
-The supplying peripheral clock can also be handled, needing a second property
-- clock-names: tuple listing input clock names.
-	Required elements: "baudclk", "apb_pclk"
-
-Optional properties:
-- snps,uart-16550-compatible : reflects the value of UART_16550_COMPATIBLE
-  configuration parameter. Define this if your UART does not implement the busy
-  functionality.
-- resets : phandle to the parent reset controller.
-- reg-shift : quantity to shift the register offsets by.  If this property is
-  not present then the register offsets are not shifted.
-- reg-io-width : the size (in bytes) of the IO accesses that should be
-  performed on the device.  If this property is not present then single byte
-  accesses are used.
-- dcd-override : Override the DCD modem status signal. This signal will always
-  be reported as active instead of being obtained from the modem status
-  register. Define this if your serial port does not use this pin.
-- dsr-override : Override the DTS modem status signal. This signal will always
-  be reported as active instead of being obtained from the modem status
-  register. Define this if your serial port does not use this pin.
-- cts-override : Override the CTS modem status signal. This signal will always
-  be reported as active instead of being obtained from the modem status
-  register. Define this if your serial port does not use this pin.
-- ri-override : Override the RI modem status signal. This signal will always be
-  reported as inactive instead of being obtained from the modem status register.
-  Define this if your serial port does not use this pin.
-
-Example:
-
-	uart@80230000 {
-		compatible = "snps,dw-apb-uart";
-		reg = <0x80230000 0x100>;
-		clock-frequency = <3686400>;
-		interrupts = <10>;
-		reg-shift = <2>;
-		reg-io-width = <4>;
-		dcd-override;
-		dsr-override;
-		cts-override;
-		ri-override;
-	};
-
-Example with one clock:
-
-	uart@80230000 {
-		compatible = "snps,dw-apb-uart";
-		reg = <0x80230000 0x100>;
-		clocks = <&baudclk>;
-		interrupts = <10>;
-		reg-shift = <2>;
-		reg-io-width = <4>;
-	};
-
-Example with two clocks:
-
-	uart@80230000 {
-		compatible = "snps,dw-apb-uart";
-		reg = <0x80230000 0x100>;
-		clocks = <&baudclk>, <&apb_pclk>;
-		clock-names = "baudclk", "apb_pclk";
-		interrupts = <10>;
-		reg-shift = <2>;
-		reg-io-width = <4>;
-	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/snps-dw-apb-uart.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/snps-dw-apb-uart.yaml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b42002542690
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/snps-dw-apb-uart.yaml
@@ -0,0 +1,140 @@
+# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+%YAML 1.2
+---
+$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/serial/snps-dw-apb-uart.yaml#
+$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml#
+
+title: Synopsys DesignWare ABP UART
+
+maintainers:
+  - Rob Herring <robh@kernel.org>
+
+allOf:
+  - $ref: /schemas/serial.yaml#
+
+properties:
+  compatible:
+    oneOf:
+      - items:
+          - enum:
+              - renesas,r9a06g032-uart
+              - renesas,r9a06g033-uart
+          - const: renesas,rzn1-uart
+      - items:
+          - enum:
+              - rockchip,px30-uart
+              - rockchip,rk3036-uart
+              - rockchip,rk3066-uart
+              - rockchip,rk3188-uart
+              - rockchip,rk3288-uart
+              - rockchip,rk3328-uart
+              - rockchip,rk3368-uart
+              - rockchip,rk3399-uart
+              - rockchip,rv1108-uart
+          - const: snps,dw-apb-uart
+      - items:
+          - enum:
+              - brcm,bcm11351-dw-apb-uart
+              - brcm,bcm21664-dw-apb-uart
+          - const: snps,dw-apb-uart
+      - const: snps,dw-apb-uart
+
+  reg:
+    maxItems: 1
+
+  interrupts:
+    maxItems: 1
+
+  clock-frequency: true
+
+  clocks:
+    minItems: 1
+    maxItems: 2
+
+  clock-names:
+    items:
+      - const: baudclk
+      - const: apb_pclk
+
+  snps,uart-16550-compatible:
+    description: reflects the value of UART_16550_COMPATIBLE configuration
+      parameter. Define this if your UART does not implement the busy functionality.
+    type: boolean
+
+  resets:
+    maxItems: 1
+
+  reg-shift: true
+
+  reg-io-width: true
+
+  dcd-override:
+    description: Override the DCD modem status signal. This signal will
+      always be reported as active instead of being obtained from the modem
+      status register. Define this if your serial port does not use this
+      pin.
+    type: boolean
+
+  dsr-override:
+    description: Override the DTS modem status signal. This signal will
+      always be reported as active instead of being obtained from the modem
+      status register. Define this if your serial port does not use this
+      pin.
+    type: boolean
+
+  cts-override:
+    description: Override the CTS modem status signal. This signal will
+      always be reported as active instead of being obtained from the modem
+      status register. Define this if your serial port does not use this
+      pin.
+    type: boolean
+
+  ri-override:
+    description: Override the RI modem status signal. This signal will always
+      be reported as inactive instead of being obtained from the modem status
+      register. Define this if your serial port does not use this pin.
+    type: boolean
+
+required:
+  - compatible
+  - reg
+  - interrupts
+
+examples:
+  - |
+    serial@80230000 {
+      compatible = "snps,dw-apb-uart";
+      reg = <0x80230000 0x100>;
+      clock-frequency = <3686400>;
+      interrupts = <10>;
+      reg-shift = <2>;
+      reg-io-width = <4>;
+      dcd-override;
+      dsr-override;
+      cts-override;
+      ri-override;
+    };
+
+  - |
+    // Example with one clock:
+    serial@80230000 {
+      compatible = "snps,dw-apb-uart";
+      reg = <0x80230000 0x100>;
+      clocks = <&baudclk>;
+      interrupts = <10>;
+      reg-shift = <2>;
+      reg-io-width = <4>;
+    };
+
+  - |
+    // Example with two clocks:
+    serial@80230000 {
+      compatible = "snps,dw-apb-uart";
+      reg = <0x80230000 0x100>;
+      clocks = <&baudclk>, <&apb_pclk>;
+      clock-names = "baudclk", "apb_pclk";
+      interrupts = <10>;
+      reg-shift = <2>;
+      reg-io-width = <4>;
+    };
+...
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/sprd-uart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/sprd-uart.txt
index cab40f0f6f49..9607dc616205 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/sprd-uart.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/sprd-uart.txt
@@ -7,7 +7,17 @@ Required properties:
 
 - reg: offset and length of the register set for the device
 - interrupts: exactly one interrupt specifier
-- clocks: phandles to input clocks.
+- clock-names: Should contain following entries:
+  "enable" for UART module enable clock,
+  "uart" for UART clock,
+  "source" for UART source (parent) clock.
+- clocks: Should contain a clock specifier for each entry in clock-names.
+  UART clock and source clock are optional properties, but enable clock
+  is required.
+
+Optional properties:
+- dma-names: Should contain "rx" for receive and "tx" for transmit channels.
+- dmas: A list of dma specifiers, one for each entry in dma-names.
 
 Example:
 	uart0: serial@0 {
@@ -15,5 +25,8 @@ Example:
 			     "sprd,sc9836-uart";
 		reg = <0x0 0x100>;
 		interrupts = <GIC_SPI 2 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
-		clocks = <&ext_26m>;
+		dma-names = "rx", "tx";
+		dmas = <&ap_dma 19>, <&ap_dma 20>;
+		clock-names = "enable", "uart", "source";
+		clocks = <&clk_ap_apb_gates 9>, <&clk_uart0>, <&ext_26m>;
 	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sifive/sifive-blocks-ip-versioning.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sifive/sifive-blocks-ip-versioning.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..beaa3b64084e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sifive/sifive-blocks-ip-versioning.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+DT compatible string versioning for SiFive open-source IP blocks
+
+This document describes the version specification for DT "compatible"
+strings for open-source SiFive IP blocks.  HDL for these IP blocks
+can be found in this public repository:
+
+https://github.com/sifive/sifive-blocks
+
+IP block-specific DT compatible strings are contained within the HDL,
+in the form "sifive,<ip-block-name><integer version number>".
+
+An example is "sifive,uart0" from:
+
+https://github.com/sifive/sifive-blocks/blob/v1.0/src/main/scala/devices/uart/UART.scala#L43
+
+Until these IP blocks (or IP integration) support version
+auto-discovery, the maintainers of these IP blocks intend to increment
+the suffixed number in the compatible string whenever the software
+interface to these IP blocks changes, or when the functionality of the
+underlying IP blocks changes in a way that software should be aware of.
+
+Driver developers can use compatible string "match" values such as
+"sifive,uart0" to indicate that their driver is compatible with the
+register interface and functionality associated with the relevant
+upstream sifive-blocks commits.  It is expected that most drivers will
+match on these IP block-specific compatible strings.
+
+DT data authors, when writing data for a particular SoC, should
+continue to specify an SoC-specific compatible string value, such as
+"sifive,fu540-c000-uart".  This way, if SoC-specific
+integration-specific bug fixes or workarounds are needed, the kernel
+or other system software can match on this string to apply them.  The
+IP block-specific compatible string (such as "sifive,uart0") should
+then be specified as a subsequent value.
+
+An example of this style:
+
+    compatible = "sifive,fu540-c000-uart", "sifive,uart0";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/amlogic/clk-measure.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/amlogic/clk-measure.txt
index 205a54bcd7c7..6bf6b43f8dd8 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/amlogic/clk-measure.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/amlogic/clk-measure.txt
@@ -9,6 +9,8 @@ Required properties:
 			"amlogic,meson-gx-clk-measure" for GX SoCs
 			"amlogic,meson8-clk-measure" for Meson8 SoCs
 			"amlogic,meson8b-clk-measure" for Meson8b SoCs
+			"amlogic,meson-axg-clk-measure" for AXG SoCs
+			"amlogic,meson-g12a-clk-measure" for G12a SoCs
 - reg: base address and size of the Clock Measurer register space.
 
 Example:
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/bcm/brcm,bcm2835-pm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/bcm/brcm,bcm2835-pm.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3b7d32956391
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/bcm/brcm,bcm2835-pm.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+BCM2835 PM (Power domains, watchdog)
+
+The PM block controls power domains and some reset lines, and includes
+a watchdog timer.  This binding supersedes the brcm,bcm2835-pm-wdt
+binding which covered some of PM's register range and functionality.
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible:		Should be "brcm,bcm2835-pm"
+- reg:			Specifies base physical address and size of the two
+			  register ranges ("PM" and "ASYNC_BRIDGE" in that
+			  order)
+- clocks:		a) v3d: The V3D clock from CPRMAN
+			b) peri_image: The PERI_IMAGE clock from CPRMAN
+			c) h264: The H264 clock from CPRMAN
+			d) isp: The ISP clock from CPRMAN
+- #reset-cells: 	Should be 1.  This property follows the reset controller
+			  bindings[1].
+- #power-domain-cells:	Should be 1.  This property follows the power domain
+			  bindings[2].
+
+Optional properties:
+
+- timeout-sec:		Contains the watchdog timeout in seconds
+- system-power-controller: Whether the watchdog is controlling the
+    system power.  This node follows the power controller bindings[3].
+
+[1] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/reset.txt
+[2] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/power_domain.txt
+[3] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/power-controller.txt
+
+Example:
+
+pm {
+	compatible = "brcm,bcm2835-pm", "brcm,bcm2835-pm-wdt";
+	#power-domain-cells = <1>;
+	#reset-cells = <1>;
+	reg = <0x7e100000 0x114>,
+	      <0x7e00a000 0x24>;
+	clocks = <&clocks BCM2835_CLOCK_V3D>,
+		 <&clocks BCM2835_CLOCK_PERI_IMAGE>,
+		 <&clocks BCM2835_CLOCK_H264>,
+		 <&clocks BCM2835_CLOCK_ISP>;
+	clock-names = "v3d", "peri_image", "h264", "isp";
+	system-power-controller;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/mediatek/pwrap.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/mediatek/pwrap.txt
index 5a2ef1726e2a..7a32404c6114 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/mediatek/pwrap.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/mediatek/pwrap.txt
@@ -25,6 +25,7 @@ Required properties in pwrap device node.
 	"mediatek,mt8135-pwrap" for MT8135 SoCs
 	"mediatek,mt8173-pwrap" for MT8173 SoCs
 	"mediatek,mt8183-pwrap" for MT8183 SoCs
+	"mediatek,mt8516-pwrap" for MT8516 SoCs
 - interrupts: IRQ for pwrap in SOC
 - reg-names: Must include the following entries:
   "pwrap": Main registers base
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/mediatek/scpsys.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/mediatek/scpsys.txt
index d6fe16f094af..876693a7ada5 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/mediatek/scpsys.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/mediatek/scpsys.txt
@@ -23,6 +23,7 @@ Required properties:
 	- "mediatek,mt7622-scpsys"
 	- "mediatek,mt7623-scpsys", "mediatek,mt2701-scpsys": For MT7623 SoC
 	- "mediatek,mt7623a-scpsys": For MT7623A SoC
+	- "mediatek,mt7629-scpsys", "mediatek,mt7622-scpsys": For MT7629 SoC
 	- "mediatek,mt8173-scpsys"
 - #power-domain-cells: Must be 1
 - reg: Address range of the SCPSYS unit
@@ -33,8 +34,8 @@ Required properties:
 	Required clocks for MT2701 or MT7623: "mm", "mfg", "ethif"
 	Required clocks for MT2712: "mm", "mfg", "venc", "jpgdec", "audio", "vdec"
 	Required clocks for MT6797: "mm", "mfg", "vdec"
-	Required clocks for MT7622: "hif_sel"
-	Required clocks for MT7622A: "ethif"
+	Required clocks for MT7622 or MT7629: "hif_sel"
+	Required clocks for MT7623A: "ethif"
 	Required clocks for MT8173: "mm", "mfg", "venc", "venc_lt"
 
 Optional properties:
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/qcom/qcom,smd-rpm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/qcom/qcom,smd-rpm.txt
index ec95705ba692..f3fa313963d5 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/qcom/qcom,smd-rpm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/qcom/qcom,smd-rpm.txt
@@ -23,6 +23,7 @@ resources.
 		    "qcom,rpm-msm8916"
 		    "qcom,rpm-msm8974"
 		    "qcom,rpm-msm8998"
+		    "qcom,rpm-sdm660"
 		    "qcom,rpm-qcs404"
 
 - qcom,smd-channels:
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/adi,adau1977.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/adi,adau1977.txt
index e79aeef73f28..9225472c80b4 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/adi,adau1977.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/adi,adau1977.txt
@@ -17,12 +17,18 @@ Required properties:
                 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt
 
 Optional properties:
- - reset-gpio:  the reset pin for the chip, for more details consult
+ - reset-gpios: the reset pin for the chip, for more details consult
                 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt
 
  - DVDD-supply: supply voltage for the digital core, please consult
                 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt
 
+- adi,micbias: configures the voltage setting for the MICBIAS pin.
+		Select 0/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 to specify MICBIAS voltage
+		5V/5.5V/6V/6.5V/7V/7.5V/8V/8.5V/9V
+		If not specified the default value will be "7" meaning 8.5 Volts.
+		This property is only valid for the ADAU1977
+
 For required properties on SPI, please consult
 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt
 
@@ -40,7 +46,8 @@ Examples:
 		AVDD-supply = <&regulator>;
 		DVDD-supply = <&regulator_digital>;
 
-		reset_gpio = <&gpio 10 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>;
+		adi,micbias = <3>;
+		reset-gpios = <&gpio 10 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>;
 	};
 
 	adau1977_i2c: adau1977@11 {
@@ -50,5 +57,5 @@ Examples:
 		AVDD-supply = <&regulator>;
 		DVDD-supply = <&regulator_digital>;
 
-		reset_gpio = <&gpio 10 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>;
+		reset-gpios = <&gpio 10 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>;
 	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/adi,axi-i2s.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/adi,axi-i2s.txt
index 4248b662deff..229ad1392cdc 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/adi,axi-i2s.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/adi,axi-i2s.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,8 @@
 ADI AXI-I2S controller
 
+The core can be generated with transmit (playback), only receive
+(capture) or both directions enabled.
+
 Required properties:
  - compatible : Must be "adi,axi-i2s-1.00.a"
  - reg : Must contain I2S core's registers location and length
@@ -9,8 +12,8 @@ Required properties:
  - clock-names : "axi" for the clock to the AXI interface, "ref" for the sample
    rate reference clock.
  - dmas: Pairs of phandle and specifier for the DMA channels that are used by
-   the core. The core expects two dma channels, one for transmit and one for
-   receive.
+   the core. The core expects two dma channels if both transmit and receive are
+   enabled, one channel otherwise.
  - dma-names : "tx" for the transmit channel, "rx" for the receive channel.
 
 For more details on the 'dma', 'dma-names', 'clock' and 'clock-names' properties
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ak4458.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ak4458.txt
index 7839be78448d..e5820235e0d5 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ak4458.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ak4458.txt
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ This device supports I2C mode.
 
 Required properties:
 
-- compatible : "asahi-kasei,ak4458"
+- compatible : "asahi-kasei,ak4458" or "asahi-kasei,ak4497"
 - reg : The I2C address of the device for I2C
 
 Optional properties:
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/amlogic,axg-fifo.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/amlogic,axg-fifo.txt
index 3dfc2515e5c6..4330fc9dca6d 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/amlogic,axg-fifo.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/amlogic,axg-fifo.txt
@@ -2,7 +2,9 @@
 
 Required properties:
 - compatible: 'amlogic,axg-toddr' or
-	      'amlogic,axg-frddr'
+	      'amlogic,axg-toddr' or
+	      'amlogic,g12a-frddr' or
+	      'amlogic,g12a-toddr'
 - reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory
        mapped region.
 - interrupts: interrupt specifier for the fifo.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/amlogic,axg-pdm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/amlogic,axg-pdm.txt
index 5672d0bc5b16..73f473a9365f 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/amlogic,axg-pdm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/amlogic,axg-pdm.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
 * Amlogic Audio PDM input
 
 Required properties:
-- compatible: 'amlogic,axg-pdm'
+- compatible: 'amlogic,axg-pdm' or
+	      'amlogic,g12a-pdm'
 - reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory
        mapped region.
 - clocks: list of clock phandle, one for each entry clock-names.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/amlogic,axg-spdifin.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/amlogic,axg-spdifin.txt
index 2e6cb7d9b202..0b82504fa419 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/amlogic,axg-spdifin.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/amlogic,axg-spdifin.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
 * Amlogic Audio SPDIF Input
 
 Required properties:
-- compatible: 'amlogic,axg-spdifin'
+- compatible: 'amlogic,axg-spdifin' or
+	      'amlogic,g12a-spdifin'
 - interrupts: interrupt specifier for the spdif input.
 - clocks: list of clock phandle, one for each entry clock-names.
 - clock-names: should contain the following:
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/amlogic,axg-spdifout.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/amlogic,axg-spdifout.txt
index 521c38ad89e7..826152730508 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/amlogic,axg-spdifout.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/amlogic,axg-spdifout.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
 * Amlogic Audio SPDIF Output
 
 Required properties:
-- compatible: 'amlogic,axg-spdifout'
+- compatible: 'amlogic,axg-spdifout' or
+	      'amlogic,g12a-spdifout'
 - clocks: list of clock phandle, one for each entry clock-names.
 - clock-names: should contain the following:
   * "pclk" : peripheral clock.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/amlogic,axg-tdm-formatters.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/amlogic,axg-tdm-formatters.txt
index 1c1b7490554e..3b94a715a0b9 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/amlogic,axg-tdm-formatters.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/amlogic,axg-tdm-formatters.txt
@@ -2,7 +2,9 @@
 
 Required properties:
 - compatible: 'amlogic,axg-tdmin' or
-	      'amlogic,axg-tdmout'
+	      'amlogic,axg-tdmout' or
+	      'amlogic,g12a-tdmin' or
+	      'amlogic,g12a-tdmout'
 - reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory
        mapped region.
 - clocks: list of clock phandle, one for each entry clock-names.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/audio-graph-scu-card.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/audio-graph-scu-card.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 62d42768a00b..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/audio-graph-scu-card.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,123 +0,0 @@
-Audio-Graph-SCU-Card:
-
-Audio-Graph-SCU-Card is "Audio-Graph-Card" + "ALSA DPCM".
-
-It is based on common bindings for device graphs.
-see ${LINUX}/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/graph.txt
-
-Basically, Audio-Graph-SCU-Card property is same as
-Simple-Card / Simple-SCU-Card / Audio-Graph-Card.
-see ${LINUX}/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/simple-card.txt
-    ${LINUX}/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/simple-scu-card.txt
-    ${LINUX}/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/audio-graph-card.txt
-
-Below are same as Simple-Card / Audio-Graph-Card.
-
-- label
-- dai-format
-- frame-master
-- bitclock-master
-- bitclock-inversion
-- frame-inversion
-- dai-tdm-slot-num
-- dai-tdm-slot-width
-- clocks / system-clock-frequency
-
-Below are same as Simple-SCU-Card.
-
-- convert-rate
-- convert-channels
-- prefix
-- routing
-
-Required properties:
-
-- compatible				: "audio-graph-scu-card";
-- dais					: list of CPU DAI port{s}
-
-Example 1. Sampling Rate Conversion
-
-	sound_card {
-		compatible = "audio-graph-scu-card";
-
-		label = "sound-card";
-		prefix = "codec";
-		routing = "codec Playback", "DAI0 Playback",
-			  "DAI0 Capture",   "codec Capture";
-		convert-rate = <48000>;
-
-		dais = <&cpu_port>;
-	};
-
-	audio-codec {
-		...
-
-		port {
-			codec_endpoint: endpoint {
-				remote-endpoint = <&cpu_endpoint>;
-			};
-		};
-	};
-
-	dai-controller {
-		...
-		cpu_port: port {
-			cpu_endpoint: endpoint {
-				remote-endpoint = <&codec_endpoint>;
-
-				dai-format = "left_j";
-				...
-			};
-		};
-	};
-
-Example 2. 2 CPU 1 Codec (Mixing)
-
-	sound_card {
-		compatible = "audio-graph-scu-card";
-
-		label = "sound-card";
-		routing = "codec Playback", "DAI0 Playback",
-			  "codec Playback", "DAI1 Playback",
-			  "DAI0 Capture",   "codec Capture";
-
-		dais = <&cpu_port0
-			&cpu_port1>;
-	};
-
-	audio-codec {
-		...
-
-		audio-graph-card,prefix = "codec";
-		audio-graph-card,convert-rate = <48000>;
-		port {
-			codec_endpoint0: endpoint {
-				remote-endpoint = <&cpu_endpoint0>;
-			};
-			codec_endpoint1: endpoint {
-				remote-endpoint = <&cpu_endpoint1>;
-			};
-		};
-	};
-
-	dai-controller {
-		...
-		ports {
-			cpu_port0: port {
-				cpu_endpoint0: endpoint {
-					remote-endpoint = <&codec_endpoint0>;
-
-					dai-format = "left_j";
-					...
-				};
-			};
-			cpu_port1: port {
-				cpu_endpoint1: endpoint {
-					remote-endpoint = <&codec_endpoint1>;
-
-					dai-format = "left_j";
-					...
-				};
-			};
-		};
-	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cirrus,lochnagar.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cirrus,lochnagar.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..41ae2699f07a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cirrus,lochnagar.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+Cirrus Logic Lochnagar Audio Development Board
+
+Lochnagar is an evaluation and development board for Cirrus Logic
+Smart CODEC and Amp devices. It allows the connection of most Cirrus
+Logic devices on mini-cards, as well as allowing connection of
+various application processor systems to provide a full evaluation
+platform.  Audio system topology, clocking and power can all be
+controlled through the Lochnagar, allowing the device under test
+to be used in a variety of possible use cases.
+
+This binding document describes the binding for the audio portion
+of the driver.
+
+This binding must be part of the Lochnagar MFD binding:
+  [4] ../mfd/cirrus,lochnagar.txt
+
+Required properties:
+
+  - compatible : One of the following strings:
+                 "cirrus,lochnagar2-soundcard"
+
+  - #sound-dai-cells : Must be set to 1.
+
+  - clocks : Contains an entry for each entry in clock-names.
+  - clock-names : Must include the following clocks:
+      "mclk" Master clock source for the sound card, should normally
+      be set to LOCHNAGAR_SOUNDCARD_MCLK provided by the Lochnagar
+      clock driver.
+
+Example:
+
+lochnagar-sc {
+	compatible = "cirrus,lochnagar2-soundcard";
+
+	#sound-dai-cells = <1>;
+
+	clocks = <&lochnagar_clk LOCHNAGAR_SOUNDCARD_MCLK>;
+	clock-names = "mclk";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs35l36.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs35l36.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..912bd162b477
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs35l36.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,168 @@
+CS35L36 Speaker Amplifier
+
+Required properties:
+
+  - compatible : "cirrus,cs35l36"
+
+  - reg : the I2C address of the device for I2C
+
+  - VA-supply, VP-supply : power supplies for the device,
+  as covered in
+  Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt.
+
+  - cirrus,boost-ctl-millivolt : Boost Voltage Value.  Configures the boost
+  converter's output voltage in mV. The range is from 2550mV to 12000mV with
+  increments of 50mV.
+  (Default) VP
+
+  - cirrus,boost-peak-milliamp : Boost-converter peak current limit in mA.
+  Configures the peak current by monitoring the current through the boost FET.
+  Range starts at 1600mA and goes to a maximum of 4500mA with increments of
+  50mA.
+  (Default) 4.50 Amps
+
+  - cirrus,boost-ind-nanohenry : Inductor estimation LBST reference value.
+  Seeds the digital boost converter's inductor estimation block with the initial
+  inductance value to reference.
+
+  1000 = 1uH (Default)
+  1200 = 1.2uH
+
+Optional properties:
+  - cirrus,multi-amp-mode : Boolean to determine if there are more than
+  one amplifier in the system. If more than one it is best to Hi-Z the ASP
+  port to prevent bus contention on the output signal
+
+  - cirrus,boost-ctl-select : Boost conerter control source selection.
+  Selects the source of the BST_CTL target VBST voltage for the boost
+  converter to generate.
+  0x00 - Control Port Value
+  0x01 - Class H Tracking (Default)
+  0x10 - MultiDevice Sync Value
+
+  - cirrus,amp-pcm-inv : Boolean to determine Amplifier will invert incoming
+  PCM data
+
+  - cirrus,imon-pol-inv : Boolean to determine Amplifier will invert the
+  polarity of outbound IMON feedback data
+
+  - cirrus,vmon-pol-inv : Boolean to determine Amplifier will invert the
+  polarity of outbound VMON feedback data
+
+  - cirrus,dcm-mode-enable : Boost converter automatic DCM Mode enable.
+  This enables the digital boost converter to operate in a low power
+  (Discontinuous Conduction) mode during low loading conditions.
+
+  - cirrus,weak-fet-disable : Boolean : The strength of the output drivers is
+  reduced when operating in a Weak-FET Drive Mode and must not be used to drive
+  a large load.
+
+  - cirrus,classh-wk-fet-delay :  Weak-FET entry delay. Controls the delay
+  (in ms) before the Class H algorithm switches to the weak-FET voltage
+  (after the audio falls and remains below the value specified in WKFET_AMP_THLD).
+
+  0 = 0ms
+  1 = 5ms
+  2 = 10ms
+  3 = 50ms
+  4 = 100ms (Default)
+  5 = 200ms
+  6 = 500ms
+  7 = 1000ms
+
+  - cirrus,classh-weak-fet-thld-millivolt : Weak-FET amplifier drive threshold.
+  Configures the signal threshold at which the PWM output stage enters
+  weak-FET operation. The range is 50mV to 700mV in 50mV increments.
+
+  - cirrus,temp-warn-threshold :  Amplifier overtemperature warning threshold.
+  Configures the threshold at which the overtemperature warning condition occurs.
+  When the threshold is met, the overtemperature warning attenuation is applied
+  and the TEMP_WARN_EINT interrupt status bit is set.
+  If TEMP_WARN_MASK = 0, INTb is asserted.
+
+  0 = 105C
+  1 = 115C
+  2 = 125C (Default)
+  3 = 135C
+
+  - cirrus,irq-drive-select : Selects the driver type of the selected interrupt
+  output.
+
+  0 = Open-drain
+  1 = Push-pull (Default)
+
+  - cirrus,irq-gpio-select : Selects the pin to serve as the programmable
+  interrupt output.
+
+  0 = PDM_DATA / SWIRE_SD / INT (Default)
+  1 = GPIO
+
+Optional properties for the "cirrus,vpbr-config" Sub-node
+
+  - cirrus,vpbr-en : VBST brownout prevention enable. Configures whether the
+  VBST brownout prevention algorithm is enabled or disabled.
+
+  0 = VBST brownout prevention disabled (default)
+  1 = VBST brownout prevention enabled
+
+  See Section 7.31.1 VPBR Config for configuration options & further details
+
+  - cirrus,vpbr-thld : Initial VPBR threshold. Configures the VP brownout
+  threshold voltage
+
+  - cirrus,cirrus,vpbr-atk-rate : Attenuation attack step rate. Configures the
+  amount delay between consecutive volume attenuation steps when a brownout
+  condition is present and the VP brownout condition is in an attacking state.
+
+  - cirrus,vpbr-atk-vol : VP brownout prevention step size. Configures the VP
+  brownout prevention attacking attenuation step size when operating in either
+  digital volume or analog gain modes.
+
+  - cirrus,vpbr-max-attn : Maximum attenuation that the VP brownout prevention
+  can apply to the audio signal.
+
+  - cirrus,vpbr-wait : Configures the delay time between a brownout condition
+  no longer being present and the VP brownout prevention entering an attenuation
+  release state.
+
+  - cirrus,vpbr-rel-rate : Attenuation release step rate. Configures the delay
+  between consecutive volume attenuation release steps when a brownout condition
+  is not longer present and the VP brownout is in an attenuation release state.
+
+  - cirrus,vpbr-mute-en : During the attack state, if the vpbr-max-attn value
+  is reached, the error condition still remains, and this bit is set, the audio
+  is muted.
+
+Example:
+
+cs35l36: cs35l36@40 {
+	compatible = "cirrus,cs35l36";
+	reg = <0x40>;
+	VA-supply = <&dummy_vreg>;
+	VP-supply = <&dummy_vreg>;
+	reset-gpios = <&gpio0 54 0>;
+	interrupt-parent = <&gpio8>;
+	interrupts = <3 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW>;
+
+	cirrus,boost-ind-nanohenry = <1000>;
+	cirrus,boost-ctl-millivolt = <10000>;
+	cirrus,boost-peak-milliamp = <4500>;
+	cirrus,boost-ctl-select = <0x00>;
+	cirrus,weak-fet-delay = <0x04>;
+	cirrus,weak-fet-thld = <0x01>;
+	cirrus,temp-warn-threshold = <0x01>;
+	cirrus,multi-amp-mode;
+	cirrus,irq-drive-select = <0x01>;
+	cirrus,irq-gpio-select = <0x01>;
+
+	cirrus,vpbr-config {
+		cirrus,vpbr-en = <0x00>;
+		cirrus,vpbr-thld = <0x05>;
+		cirrus,vpbr-atk-rate = <0x02>;
+		cirrus,vpbr-atk-vol = <0x01>;
+		cirrus,vpbr-max-attn = <0x09>;
+		cirrus,vpbr-wait = <0x01>;
+		cirrus,vpbr-rel-rate = <0x05>;
+		cirrus,vpbr-mute-en = <0x00>;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs42l51.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs42l51.txt
index 4b5de33ce377..acbd68ddd2cb 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs42l51.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs42l51.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,17 @@
 CS42L51 audio CODEC
 
+Required properties:
+
+  - compatible : "cirrus,cs42l51"
+
+  - reg : the I2C address of the device for I2C.
+
 Optional properties:
+  - VL-supply, VD-supply, VA-supply, VAHP-supply: power supplies for the device,
+    as covered in Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt.
+
+  - reset-gpios : GPIO specification for the reset pin. If specified, it will be
+    deasserted before starting the communication with the codec.
 
   - clocks : a list of phandles + clock-specifiers, one for each entry in
     clock-names
@@ -14,4 +25,9 @@ cs42l51: cs42l51@4a {
 	reg = <0x4a>;
 	clocks = <&mclk_prov>;
 	clock-names = "MCLK";
+	VL-supply = <&reg_audio>;
+	VD-supply = <&reg_audio>;
+	VA-supply = <&reg_audio>;
+	VAHP-supply = <&reg_audio>;
+	reset-gpios = <&gpiog 9 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>;
 };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs4341.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs4341.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..12b4aa8ef0db
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs4341.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+Cirrus Logic CS4341 audio DAC
+
+This device supports both I2C and SPI (configured with pin strapping
+on the board).
+
+Required properties:
+  - compatible: "cirrus,cs4341a"
+  - reg : the I2C address of the device for I2C, the chip select
+          number for SPI.
+
+For required properties on I2C-bus, please consult
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c.txt
+For required properties on SPI-bus, please consult
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt
+
+Example:
+	codec: cs4341@0 {
+		#sound-dai-cells = <0>;
+		compatible = "cirrus,cs4341a";
+		reg = <0>;
+		spi-max-frequency = <6000000>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/da7219.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/da7219.txt
index e9d0baeb94e2..add1caf26ac2 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/da7219.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/da7219.txt
@@ -23,8 +23,8 @@ Optional properties:
   interrupt is to be used to wake system, otherwise "irq" should be used.
 - wakeup-source: Flag to indicate this device can wake system (suspend/resume).
 
-- #clock-cells :  Should be set to '<0>', only one clock source provided;
-- clock-output-names : Name given for DAI clocks output;
+- #clock-cells :  Should be set to '<1>', two clock sources provided;
+- clock-output-names : Names given for DAI clock outputs (WCLK & BCLK);
 
 - clocks : phandle and clock specifier for codec MCLK.
 - clock-names : Clock name string for 'clocks' attribute, should be "mclk".
@@ -84,8 +84,8 @@ Example:
 		VDDMIC-supply = <&reg_audio>;
 		VDDIO-supply = <&reg_audio>;
 
-		#clock-cells = <0>;
-		clock-output-names = "dai-clks";
+		#clock-cells = <1>;
+		clock-output-names = "dai-wclk", "dai-bclk";
 
 		clocks = <&clks 201>;
 		clock-names = "mclk";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/davinci-mcasp-audio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/davinci-mcasp-audio.txt
index b279b6072bd5..a58f79f5345c 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/davinci-mcasp-audio.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/davinci-mcasp-audio.txt
@@ -45,6 +45,23 @@ Optional properties:
 - fck_parent : Should contain a valid clock name which will be used as parent
 	       for the McASP fck
 
+Optional GPIO support:
+If any McASP pin need to be used as GPIO then the McASP node must have:
+...
+  gpio-controller
+  #gpio-cells = <2>;
+...
+
+When requesting a GPIO, the first parameter is the PIN index in McASP_P*
+registers.
+For example to request the AXR2 pin of mcasp8:
+function-gpios = <&mcasp8 2 0>;
+
+Or to request the ACLKR pin of mcasp8:
+function-gpios = <&mcasp8 29 0>;
+
+For generic gpio information, please refer to bindings/gpio/gpio.txt
+
 Example:
 
 mcasp0: mcasp0@1d00000 {
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl,audmix.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl,audmix.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..840b7e0d6a63
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl,audmix.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+NXP Audio Mixer (AUDMIX).
+
+The Audio Mixer is a on-chip functional module that allows mixing of two
+audio streams into a single audio stream. Audio Mixer has two input serial
+audio interfaces. These are driven by two Synchronous Audio interface
+modules (SAI). Each input serial interface carries 8 audio channels in its
+frame in TDM manner. Mixer mixes audio samples of corresponding channels
+from two interfaces into a single sample. Before mixing, audio samples of
+two inputs can be attenuated based on configuration. The output of the
+Audio Mixer is also a serial audio interface. Like input interfaces it has
+the same TDM frame format. This output is used to drive the serial DAC TDM
+interface of audio codec and also sent to the external pins along with the
+receive path of normal audio SAI module for readback by the CPU.
+
+The output of Audio Mixer can be selected from any of the three streams
+ - serial audio input 1
+ - serial audio input 2
+ - mixed audio
+
+Mixing operation is independent of audio sample rate but the two audio
+input streams must have same audio sample rate with same number of channels
+in TDM frame to be eligible for mixing.
+
+Device driver required properties:
+=================================
+  - compatible		: Compatible list, contains "fsl,imx8qm-audmix"
+
+  - reg			: Offset and length of the register set for the device.
+
+  - clocks		: Must contain an entry for each entry in clock-names.
+
+  - clock-names		: Must include the "ipg" for register access.
+
+  - power-domains	: Must contain the phandle to AUDMIX power domain node
+
+  - dais		: Must contain a list of phandles to AUDMIX connected
+			  DAIs. The current implementation requires two phandles
+			  to SAI interfaces to be provided, the first SAI in the
+			  list being used to route the AUDMIX output.
+
+Device driver configuration example:
+======================================
+  audmix: audmix@59840000 {
+    compatible = "fsl,imx8qm-audmix";
+    reg = <0x0 0x59840000 0x0 0x10000>;
+    clocks = <&clk IMX8QXP_AUD_AUDMIX_IPG>;
+    clock-names = "ipg";
+    power-domains = <&pd_audmix>;
+    dais = <&sai4>, <&sai5>;
+  };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl,micfil.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl,micfil.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..53e227b15277
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl,micfil.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+NXP MICFIL Digital Audio Interface (MICFIL).
+
+The MICFIL digital interface provides a 16-bit audio signal from a PDM
+microphone bitstream in a configurable output sampling rate.
+
+Required properties:
+
+  - compatible		: Compatible list, contains "fsl,imx8mm-micfil"
+
+  - reg			: Offset and length of the register set for the device.
+
+  - interrupts		: Contains the micfil interrupts.
+
+  - clocks		: Must contain an entry for each entry in clock-names.
+
+  - clock-names		: Must include the "ipg_clk" for register access and
+			  "ipg_clk_app" for internal micfil clock.
+
+  - dmas		: Generic dma devicetree binding as described in
+			  Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/dma.txt.
+
+Example:
+micfil: micfil@30080000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx8mm-micfil";
+	reg = <0x0 0x30080000 0x0 0x10000>;
+	interrupts = <GIC_SPI 109 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>,
+		     <GIC_SPI 110 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
+	clocks = <&clk IMX8MM_CLK_PDM_IPG>,
+		 <&clk IMX8MM_CLK_PDM_ROOT>;
+	clock-names = "ipg_clk", "ipg_clk_app";
+	dmas = <&sdma2 24 26 0x80000000>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/google,cros-ec-codec.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/google,cros-ec-codec.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1084f7f22eea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/google,cros-ec-codec.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+* Audio codec controlled by ChromeOS EC
+
+Google's ChromeOS EC codec is a digital mic codec provided by the
+Embedded Controller (EC) and is controlled via a host-command interface.
+
+An EC codec node should only be found as a sub-node of the EC node (see
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/cros-ec.txt).
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Must contain "google,cros-ec-codec"
+- #sound-dai-cells: Should be 1. The cell specifies number of DAIs.
+- max-dmic-gain: A number for maximum gain in dB on digital microphone.
+
+Example:
+
+cros-ec@0 {
+	compatible = "google,cros-ec-spi";
+
+	...
+
+	cros_ec_codec: ec-codec {
+		compatible = "google,cros-ec-codec";
+		#sound-dai-cells = <1>;
+		max-dmic-gain = <43>;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ingenic,jz4725b-codec.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ingenic,jz4725b-codec.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..05adc0d47b13
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ingenic,jz4725b-codec.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+Ingenic JZ4725B codec controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "ingenic,jz4725b-codec"
+- reg : codec registers location and length
+- clocks : phandle to the AIC clock.
+- clock-names: must be set to "aic".
+- #sound-dai-cells: Must be set to 0.
+
+Example:
+
+codec: audio-codec@100200a4 {
+	compatible = "ingenic,jz4725b-codec";
+	reg = <0x100200a4 0x8>;
+
+	#sound-dai-cells = <0>;
+
+	clocks = <&cgu JZ4725B_CLK_AIC>;
+	clock-names = "aic";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ingenic,jz4740-codec.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ingenic,jz4740-codec.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1ffcade87e7b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ingenic,jz4740-codec.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+Ingenic JZ4740 codec controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "ingenic,jz4740-codec"
+- reg : codec registers location and length
+- clocks : phandle to the AIC clock.
+- clock-names: must be set to "aic".
+- #sound-dai-cells: Must be set to 0.
+
+Example:
+
+codec: audio-codec@10020080 {
+	compatible = "ingenic,jz4740-codec";
+	reg = <0x10020080 0x8>;
+
+	#sound-dai-cells = <0>;
+
+	clocks = <&cgu JZ4740_CLK_AIC>;
+	clock-names = "aic";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mchp-i2s-mcc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mchp-i2s-mcc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..91ec83a6faed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mchp-i2s-mcc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+* Microchip I2S Multi-Channel Controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible:     Should be "microchip,sam9x60-i2smcc".
+- reg:            Should be the physical base address of the controller and the
+                  length of memory mapped region.
+- interrupts:     Should contain the interrupt for the controller.
+- dmas:           Should be one per channel name listed in the dma-names property,
+                  as described in atmel-dma.txt and dma.txt files.
+- dma-names:      Identifier string for each DMA request line in the dmas property.
+		  Two dmas have to be defined, "tx" and "rx".
+- clocks:         Must contain an entry for each entry in clock-names.
+                  Please refer to clock-bindings.txt.
+- clock-names:    Should be one of each entry matching the clocks phandles list:
+                  - "pclk" (peripheral clock) Required.
+                  - "gclk" (generated clock) Optional (1).
+
+Optional properties:
+- pinctrl-0:      Should specify pin control groups used for this controller.
+- princtrl-names: Should contain only one value - "default".
+
+
+(1) : Only the peripheral clock is required. The generated clock is optional
+      and should be set mostly when Master Mode is required.
+
+Example:
+
+	i2s@f001c000 {
+		compatible = "microchip,sam9x60-i2smcc";
+		reg = <0xf001c000 0x100>;
+		interrupts = <34 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH 7>;
+		dmas = <&dma0
+			(AT91_XDMAC_DT_MEM_IF(0) | AT91_XDMAC_DT_PER_IF(1) |
+			 AT91_XDMAC_DT_PERID(36))>,
+		       <&dma0
+			(AT91_XDMAC_DT_MEM_IF(0) | AT91_XDMAC_DT_PER_IF(1) |
+			 AT91_XDMAC_DT_PERID(37))>;
+		dma-names = "tx", "rx";
+		clocks = <&i2s_clk>, <&i2s_gclk>;
+		clock-names = "pclk", "gclk";
+		pinctrl-names = "default";
+		pinctrl-0 = <&pinctrl_i2s_default>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mt6358.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mt6358.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5465730013a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mt6358.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+Mediatek MT6358 Audio Codec
+
+The communication between MT6358 and SoC is through Mediatek PMIC wrapper.
+For more detail, please visit Mediatek PMIC wrapper documentation.
+
+Must be a child node of PMIC wrapper.
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible : "mediatek,mt6358-sound".
+- Avdd-supply : power source of AVDD
+
+Example:
+
+mt6358_snd {
+	compatible = "mediatek,mt6358-sound";
+	Avdd-supply = <&mt6358_vaud28_reg>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mt8183-afe-pcm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mt8183-afe-pcm.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..396ba38619f6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mt8183-afe-pcm.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+Mediatek AFE PCM controller for mt8183
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible = "mediatek,mt68183-audio";
+- reg: register location and size
+- interrupts: should contain AFE interrupt
+- power-domains: should define the power domain
+- clocks: Must contain an entry for each entry in clock-names
+- clock-names: should have these clock names:
+		"infra_sys_audio_clk",
+		"mtkaif_26m_clk",
+		"top_mux_audio",
+		"top_mux_aud_intbus",
+		"top_sys_pll3_d4",
+		"top_clk26m_clk";
+
+Example:
+
+	afe: mt8183-afe-pcm@11220000  {
+		compatible = "mediatek,mt8183-audio";
+		reg = <0 0x11220000 0 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <GIC_SPI 161 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW>;
+		power-domains = <&scpsys MT8183_POWER_DOMAIN_AUDIO>;
+		clocks = <&infrasys CLK_INFRA_AUDIO>,
+			 <&infrasys CLK_INFRA_AUDIO_26M_BCLK>,
+			 <&topckgen CLK_TOP_MUX_AUDIO>,
+			 <&topckgen CLK_TOP_MUX_AUD_INTBUS>,
+			 <&topckgen CLK_TOP_SYSPLL_D2_D4>,
+			 <&clk26m>;
+		clock-names = "infra_sys_audio_clk",
+			      "mtkaif_26m_clk",
+			      "top_mux_audio",
+			      "top_mux_aud_intbus",
+			      "top_sys_pll_d2_d4",
+			      "top_clk26m_clk";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mt8183-da7219-max98357.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mt8183-da7219-max98357.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..92ac86f83822
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mt8183-da7219-max98357.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+MT8183 with MT6358, DA7219 and MAX98357 CODECS
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "mediatek,mt8183_da7219_max98357"
+- mediatek,headset-codec: the phandles of da7219 codecs
+- mediatek,platform: the phandle of MT8183 ASoC platform
+
+Example:
+
+	sound {
+		compatible = "mediatek,mt8183_da7219_max98357";
+		mediatek,headset-codec = <&da7219>;
+		mediatek,platform = <&afe>;
+	};
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mt8183-mt6358-ts3a227-max98357.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mt8183-mt6358-ts3a227-max98357.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d6d5207fa996
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mt8183-mt6358-ts3a227-max98357.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+MT8183 with MT6358, TS3A227 and MAX98357 CODECS
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "mediatek,mt8183_mt6358_ts3a227_max98357"
+- mediatek,headset-codec: the phandles of ts3a227 codecs
+- mediatek,platform: the phandle of MT8183 ASoC platform
+
+Example:
+
+	sound {
+		compatible = "mediatek,mt8183_mt6358_ts3a227_max98357";
+		mediatek,headset-codec = <&ts3a227>;
+		mediatek,platform = <&afe>;
+	};
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mtk-btcvsd-snd.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mtk-btcvsd-snd.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..679e44839b48
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mtk-btcvsd-snd.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+Mediatek ALSA BT SCO CVSD/MSBC Driver
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible = "mediatek,mtk-btcvsd-snd";
+- reg: register location and size of PKV and SRAM_BANK2
+- interrupts: should contain BTSCO interrupt
+- mediatek,infracfg: the phandles of INFRASYS
+- mediatek,offset: Array contains of register offset and mask
+    infra_misc_offset,
+    infra_conn_bt_cvsd_mask,
+    cvsd_mcu_read_offset,
+    cvsd_mcu_write_offset,
+    cvsd_packet_indicator_offset
+
+Example:
+
+	mtk-btcvsd-snd@18000000 {
+		compatible = "mediatek,mtk-btcvsd-snd";
+		reg=<0 0x18000000 0 0x1000>,
+		    <0 0x18080000 0 0x8000>;
+		interrupts = <GIC_SPI 286 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW>;
+		mediatek,infracfg = <&infrasys>;
+		mediatek,offset = <0xf00 0x800 0xfd0 0xfd4 0xfd8>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra30-hda.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra30-hda.txt
index 44d27456e8a4..21cd310963b1 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra30-hda.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra30-hda.txt
@@ -13,6 +13,10 @@ Required properties:
   See ../reset/reset.txt for details.
 - reset-names : Must include the following entries: hda, hda2hdmi, hda2codec_2x
 
+Optional properties:
+- nvidia,model : The user-visible name of this sound complex. Since the property
+  is optional, legacy boards can use default name provided in hda driver.
+
 Example:
 
 hda@70030000 {
@@ -27,4 +31,5 @@ hda@70030000 {
 		 <&tegra_car 128>, /* hda2hdmi */
 		 <&tegra_car 111>; /* hda2codec_2x */
 	reset-names = "hda", "hda2hdmi", "hda2codec_2x";
+	nvidia,model = "jetson-tk1-hda";
 };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,msm8916-wcd-analog.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,msm8916-wcd-analog.txt
index fdcea3d12ee5..e7d17dda55db 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,msm8916-wcd-analog.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,msm8916-wcd-analog.txt
@@ -30,6 +30,7 @@ Required properties
  - vdd-cdc-io-supply: phandle to VDD_CDC_IO regulator DT node.
  - vdd-cdc-tx-rx-cx-supply: phandle to VDD_CDC_TX/RX/CX regulator DT node.
  - vdd-micbias-supply: phandle of VDD_MICBIAS supply's regulator DT node.
+
 Optional Properties:
  - qcom,mbhc-vthreshold-low: Array of 5 threshold voltages in mV for 5 buttons
 			     detection on headset when the mbhc is powered up
@@ -92,9 +93,9 @@ spmi_bus {
 				  "cdc_ear_cnp_int",
 				  "cdc_hphr_cnp_int",
 				  "cdc_hphl_cnp_int";
-	               VDD-CDC-IO-supply = <&pm8916_l5>;
-	               VDD-CDC-TX-RX-CX-supply = <&pm8916_l5>;
-	               VDD-MICBIAS-supply = <&pm8916_l13>;
+	               vdd-cdc-io-supply = <&pm8916_l5>;
+	               vdd-cdc-tx-rx-cx-supply = <&pm8916_l5>;
+	               vdd-micbias-supply = <&pm8916_l13>;
 	               #sound-dai-cells = <1>;
 	};
 };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,wcd9335.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,wcd9335.txt
index 1d8d49e30af7..5d6ea66a863f 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,wcd9335.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,wcd9335.txt
@@ -34,12 +34,12 @@ Required properties with SLIMbus Interface:
 	Definition: Interrupt names of WCD INTR1 and INTR2
 	Should be: "intr1", "intr2"
 
-- reset-gpio:
+- reset-gpios:
 	Usage: required
 	Value type: <String Array>
 	Definition: Reset gpio line
 
-- qcom,ifd:
+- slim-ifc-dev:
 	Usage: required
 	Value type: <phandle>
 	Definition: SLIM interface device
@@ -104,13 +104,13 @@ Required properties with SLIMbus Interface:
 	Value type: <u32>
 	Definition: Must be 1
 
-codec@1{
+audio-codec@1{
 	compatible = "slim217,1a0";
 	reg  = <1 0>;
 	interrupts = <&msmgpio 54 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
 	interrupt-names = "intr2"
-	reset-gpio = <&msmgpio 64 0>;
-	qcom,ifd  = <&wc9335_ifd>;
+	reset-gpios = <&msmgpio 64 0>;
+	slim-ifc-dev  = <&wc9335_ifd>;
 	clock-names = "mclk", "native";
 	clocks = <&rpmcc RPM_SMD_DIV_CLK1>,
 		 <&rpmcc RPM_SMD_BB_CLK1>;
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/renesas,rsnd.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/renesas,rsnd.txt
index 648d43e1b1e9..5c52182f7dcf 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/renesas,rsnd.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/renesas,rsnd.txt
@@ -266,6 +266,7 @@ Required properties:
 				    - "renesas,rcar_sound-r8a7743" (RZ/G1M)
 				    - "renesas,rcar_sound-r8a7744" (RZ/G1N)
 				    - "renesas,rcar_sound-r8a7745" (RZ/G1E)
+				    - "renesas,rcar_sound-r8a77470" (RZ/G1C)
 				    - "renesas,rcar_sound-r8a774a1" (RZ/G2M)
 				    - "renesas,rcar_sound-r8a774c0" (RZ/G2E)
 				    - "renesas,rcar_sound-r8a7778" (R-Car M1A)
@@ -282,7 +283,12 @@ Required properties:
 - reg				: Should contain the register physical address.
 				  required register is
 				   SRU/ADG/SSI      if generation1
-				   SRU/ADG/SSIU/SSI if generation2
+				   SRU/ADG/SSIU/SSI/AUDIO-DMAC-periperi if generation2/generation3
+				   Select extended AUDIO-DMAC-periperi address if SoC has it,
+				   otherwise select normal AUDIO-DMAC-periperi address.
+- reg-names			: Should contain the register names.
+				   scu/adg/ssi	if generation1
+				   scu/adg/ssiu/ssi/audmapp if generation2/generation3
 - rcar_sound,ssi		: Should contain SSI feature.
 				  The number of SSI subnode should be same as HW.
 				  see below for detail.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rockchip,pdm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rockchip,pdm.txt
index 47f164fbd1d7..98572a25122f 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rockchip,pdm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rockchip,pdm.txt
@@ -3,6 +3,9 @@
 Required properties:
 
 - compatible: "rockchip,pdm"
+  - "rockchip,px30-pdm"
+  - "rockchip,rk1808-pdm"
+  - "rockchip,rk3308-pdm"
 - reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
   region.
 - dmas: DMA specifiers for rx dma. See the DMA client binding,
@@ -12,6 +15,8 @@ Required properties:
 - clock-names: should contain following:
    - "pdm_hclk": clock for PDM BUS
    - "pdm_clk" : clock for PDM controller
+- resets: a list of phandle + reset-specifer paris, one for each entry in reset-names.
+- reset-names: reset names, should include "pdm-m".
 - pinctrl-names: Must contain a "default" entry.
 - pinctrl-N: One property must exist for each entry in
 	     pinctrl-names. See ../pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rockchip,rk3328-codec.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rockchip,rk3328-codec.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2469588c7ccb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rockchip,rk3328-codec.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+* Rockchip Rk3328 internal codec
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible: "rockchip,rk3328-codec"
+- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
+  region.
+- rockchip,grf: the phandle of the syscon node for GRF register.
+- clocks: a list of phandle + clock-specifer pairs, one for each entry in clock-names.
+- clock-names: should be "pclk".
+- spk-depop-time-ms: speak depop time msec.
+
+Example for rk3328 internal codec:
+
+codec: codec@ff410000 {
+	compatible = "rockchip,rk3328-codec";
+	reg = <0x0 0xff410000 0x0 0x1000>;
+	rockchip,grf = <&grf>;
+	clocks = <&cru PCLK_ACODEC>;
+	clock-names = "pclk";
+	spk-depop-time-ms = 100;
+	status = "disabled";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rt5651.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rt5651.txt
index a41199a5cd79..56e736a1cba9 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rt5651.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rt5651.txt
@@ -22,6 +22,11 @@ Optional properties:
   2: Use JD1_2 pin for jack-detect
   3: Use JD2 pin for jack-detect
 
+- realtek,jack-detect-not-inverted
+  bool. Normal jack-detect switches give an inverted (active-low) signal,
+  set this bool in the rare case you've a jack-detect switch which is not
+  inverted.
+
 - realtek,over-current-threshold-microamp
   u32, micbias over-current detection threshold in µA, valid values are
   600, 1500 and 2000µA.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/sgtl5000.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/sgtl5000.txt
index 9c58f724396a..9d9ff5184939 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/sgtl5000.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/sgtl5000.txt
@@ -37,6 +37,15 @@ VDDIO		1.8V		2.5V		3.3V
 2 =		3.33 mA		5.74 mA		8.03  mA
 3 =		4.99 mA		8.61 mA		12.05 mA
 
+- sclk-strength: the SCLK pad strength. Possible values are:
+0, 1, 2 and 3 as per the table below:
+
+VDDIO		1.8V		2.5V		3.3V
+0 = 		Disable
+1 =		1.66 mA		2.87 mA		4.02  mA
+2 =		3.33 mA		5.74 mA		8.03  mA
+3 =		4.99 mA		8.61 mA		12.05 mA
+
 Example:
 
 sgtl5000: codec@a {
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/simple-amplifier.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/simple-amplifier.txt
index 7182ac4f1e65..b1b097cc9b68 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/simple-amplifier.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/simple-amplifier.txt
@@ -2,9 +2,9 @@ Simple Amplifier Audio Driver
 
 Required properties:
 - compatible : "dioo,dio2125" or "simple-audio-amplifier"
-- enable-gpios : the gpio connected to the enable pin of the simple amplifier
 
 Optional properties:
+- enable-gpios : the gpio connected to the enable pin of the simple amplifier
 - VCC-supply   : power supply for the device, as covered
                  in Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/simple-card.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/simple-card.txt
index 4629c8f8a6b6..79954cd6e37b 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/simple-card.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/simple-card.txt
@@ -24,6 +24,8 @@ Optional properties:
 					  a microphone is attached.
 - simple-audio-card,aux-devs		: List of phandles pointing to auxiliary devices, such
 					  as amplifiers, to be added to the sound card.
+- simple-audio-card,pin-switches	: List of strings containing the widget names for
+					  which pin switches must be created.
 
 Optional subnodes:
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/simple-scu-card.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/simple-scu-card.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 3a2f71616cda..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/simple-scu-card.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,94 +0,0 @@
-ASoC Simple SCU Sound Card
-
-Simple SCU Sound Card is "Simple Sound Card" + "ALSA DPCM".
-For example, you can use this driver if you want to exchange sampling rate convert,
-Mixing, etc...
-
-Required properties:
-
-- compatible				: "simple-scu-audio-card"
-					  "renesas,rsrc-card"
-Optional properties:
-
-- simple-audio-card,name		: see simple-audio-card.txt
-- simple-audio-card,cpu			: see simple-audio-card.txt
-- simple-audio-card,codec		: see simple-audio-card.txt
-
-Optional subnode properties:
-
-- simple-audio-card,format		: see simple-audio-card.txt
-- simple-audio-card,frame-master	: see simple-audio-card.txt
-- simple-audio-card,bitclock-master	: see simple-audio-card.txt
-- simple-audio-card,bitclock-inversion	: see simple-audio-card.txt
-- simple-audio-card,frame-inversion	: see simple-audio-card.txt
-- simple-audio-card,convert-rate	: platform specified sampling rate convert
-- simple-audio-card,convert-channels	: platform specified converted channel size (2 - 8 ch)
-- simple-audio-card,prefix		: see routing
-- simple-audio-card,widgets		: Please refer to widgets.txt.
-- simple-audio-card,routing		: A list of the connections between audio components.
-					  Each entry is a pair of strings, the first being the connection's sink,
-					  the second being the connection's source. Valid names for sources.
-					  use audio-prefix if some components is using same sink/sources naming.
-					  it can be used if compatible was "renesas,rsrc-card";
-
-Required CPU/CODEC subnodes properties:
-
-- sound-dai				: see simple-audio-card.txt
-
-Optional CPU/CODEC subnodes properties:
-
-- clocks / system-clock-frequency	: see simple-audio-card.txt
-
-Example 1. Sampling Rate Conversion
-
-sound {
-	compatible = "simple-scu-audio-card";
-
-	simple-audio-card,name = "rsnd-ak4643";
-	simple-audio-card,format = "left_j";
-	simple-audio-card,bitclock-master = <&sndcodec>;
-	simple-audio-card,frame-master = <&sndcodec>;
-
-	simple-audio-card,convert-rate = <48000>;
-
-	simple-audio-card,prefix = "ak4642";
-	simple-audio-card,routing = "ak4642 Playback", "DAI0 Playback",
-			"DAI0 Capture", "ak4642 Capture";
-
-	sndcpu: simple-audio-card,cpu {
-		sound-dai = <&rcar_sound>;
-	};
-
-	sndcodec: simple-audio-card,codec {
-		sound-dai = <&ak4643>;
-		system-clock-frequency = <11289600>;
-	};
-};
-
-Example 2. 2 CPU 1 Codec (Mixing)
-
-sound {
-	compatible = "simple-scu-audio-card";
-
-	simple-audio-card,name = "rsnd-ak4643";
-	simple-audio-card,format = "left_j";
-	simple-audio-card,bitclock-master = <&dpcmcpu>;
-	simple-audio-card,frame-master = <&dpcmcpu>;
-
-	simple-audio-card,routing = "ak4642 Playback", "DAI0 Playback",
-			"ak4642 Playback", "DAI1 Playback";
-
-	dpcmcpu: cpu@0 {
-		sound-dai = <&rcar_sound 0>;
-	};
-
-	cpu@1 {
-		sound-dai = <&rcar_sound 1>;
-	};
-
-	codec {
-		prefix = "ak4642";
-		sound-dai = <&ak4643>;
-		clocks = <&audio_clock>;
-	};
-};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/sprd-mcdt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/sprd-mcdt.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..274ba0acbfd6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/sprd-mcdt.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+Spreadtrum Multi-Channel Data Transfer Binding
+
+The Multi-channel data transfer controller is used for sound stream
+transmission between audio subsystem and other AP/CP subsystem. It
+supports 10 DAC channel and 10 ADC channel, and each channel can be
+configured with DMA mode or interrupt mode.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "sprd,sc9860-mcdt".
+- reg: Should contain registers address and length.
+- interrupts: Should contain one interrupt shared by all channel.
+
+Example:
+
+mcdt@41490000 {
+	compatible = "sprd,sc9860-mcdt";
+	reg = <0 0x41490000 0 0x170>;
+	interrupts = <GIC_SPI 48 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/sprd-pcm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/sprd-pcm.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4b23e84b2e57
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/sprd-pcm.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+* Spreadtrum DMA platfrom bindings
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "sprd,pcm-platform".
+- dmas: Specify the list of DMA controller phandle and DMA request line ordered pairs.
+- dma-names: Identifier string for each DMA request line in the dmas property.
+  These strings correspond 1:1 with the ordered pairs in dmas.
+
+Example:
+
+	audio_platform:platform@0 {
+		compatible = "sprd,pcm-platform";
+		dmas = <&agcp_dma 1 1>, <&agcp_dma 2 2>,
+		     <&agcp_dma 3 3>, <&agcp_dma 4 4>,
+		     <&agcp_dma 5 5>, <&agcp_dma 6 6>,
+		     <&agcp_dma 7 7>, <&agcp_dma 8 8>,
+		     <&agcp_dma 9 9>, <&agcp_dma 10 10>;
+		dma-names = "normal_p_l", "normal_p_r",
+			"normal_c_l", "normal_c_r",
+			"voice_c", "fast_p",
+			"loop_c", "loop_p",
+			"voip_c", "voip_p";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/xlnx,audio-formatter.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/xlnx,audio-formatter.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..cbc93c8f4963
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/xlnx,audio-formatter.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+Device-Tree bindings for Xilinx PL audio formatter
+
+The IP core supports DMA, data formatting(AES<->PCM conversion)
+of audio samples.
+
+Required properties:
+ - compatible: "xlnx,audio-formatter-1.0"
+ - interrupt-names: Names specified to list of interrupts in same
+		    order mentioned under "interrupts".
+		    List of supported interrupt names are:
+		    "irq_mm2s" : interrupt from MM2S block
+		    "irq_s2mm" : interrupt from S2MM block
+ - interrupts-parent: Phandle for interrupt controller.
+ - interrupts: List of Interrupt numbers.
+ - reg: Base address and size of the IP core instance.
+ - clock-names: List of input clocks.
+   Required elements: "s_axi_lite_aclk", "aud_mclk"
+ - clocks: Input clock specifier. Refer to common clock bindings.
+
+Example:
+	audio_ss_0_audio_formatter_0: audio_formatter@80010000 {
+		compatible = "xlnx,audio-formatter-1.0";
+		interrupt-names = "irq_mm2s", "irq_s2mm";
+		interrupt-parent = <&gic>;
+		interrupts = <0 104 4>, <0 105 4>;
+		reg = <0x0 0x80010000 0x0 0x1000>;
+		clock-names = "s_axi_lite_aclk", "aud_mclk";
+		clocks = <&clk 71>, <&clk_wiz_1 0>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/xlnx,spdif.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/xlnx,spdif.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..15c2d64d247c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/xlnx,spdif.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+Device-Tree bindings for Xilinx SPDIF IP
+
+The IP supports playback and capture of SPDIF audio
+
+Required properties:
+ - compatible: "xlnx,spdif-2.0"
+ - clock-names: List of input clocks.
+   Required elements: "s_axi_aclk", "aud_clk_i"
+ - clocks: Input clock specifier. Refer to common clock bindings.
+ - reg: Base address and address length of the IP core instance.
+ - interrupts-parent: Phandle for interrupt controller.
+ - interrupts: List of Interrupt numbers.
+ - xlnx,spdif-mode: 0 :- receiver mode
+		    1 :- transmitter mode
+ - xlnx,aud_clk_i: input audio clock value.
+
+Example:
+	spdif_0: spdif@80010000 {
+		clock-names = "aud_clk_i", "s_axi_aclk";
+		clocks = <&misc_clk_0>, <&clk 71>;
+		compatible = "xlnx,spdif-2.0";
+		interrupt-names = "spdif_interrupt";
+		interrupt-parent = <&gic>;
+		interrupts = <0 91 4>;
+		reg = <0x0 0x80010000 0x0 0x10000>;
+		xlnx,spdif-mode = <1>;
+		xlnx,aud_clk_i = <49152913>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/atmel-quadspi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/atmel-quadspi.txt
index b93c1e2f25dd..7c40ea694352 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/atmel-quadspi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/atmel-quadspi.txt
@@ -1,14 +1,19 @@
 * Atmel Quad Serial Peripheral Interface (QSPI)
 
 Required properties:
-- compatible:     Should be "atmel,sama5d2-qspi".
+- compatible:     Should be one of the following:
+		  - "atmel,sama5d2-qspi"
+		  - "microchip,sam9x60-qspi"
 - reg:            Should contain the locations and lengths of the base registers
                   and the mapped memory.
 - reg-names:      Should contain the resource reg names:
                   - qspi_base: configuration register address space
                   - qspi_mmap: memory mapped address space
 - interrupts:     Should contain the interrupt for the device.
-- clocks:         The phandle of the clock needed by the QSPI controller.
+- clocks:         Should reference the peripheral clock and the QSPI system
+                  clock if available.
+- clock-names:    Should contain "pclk" for the peripheral clock and "qspick"
+                  for the system clock when available.
 - #address-cells: Should be <1>.
 - #size-cells:    Should be <0>.
 
@@ -19,7 +24,8 @@ spi@f0020000 {
 	reg = <0xf0020000 0x100>, <0xd0000000 0x8000000>;
 	reg-names = "qspi_base", "qspi_mmap";
 	interrupts = <52 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH 7>;
-	clocks = <&spi0_clk>;
+	clocks = <&pmc PMC_TYPE_PERIPHERAL 52>;
+	clock-names = "pclk";
 	#address-cells = <1>;
 	#size-cells = <0>;
 	pinctrl-names = "default";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/fsl-imx-cspi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/fsl-imx-cspi.txt
index e3c48b20b1a6..2d3264140cc5 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/fsl-imx-cspi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/fsl-imx-cspi.txt
@@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ Required properties:
   - "fsl,imx35-cspi" for SPI compatible with the one integrated on i.MX35
   - "fsl,imx51-ecspi" for SPI compatible with the one integrated on i.MX51
   - "fsl,imx53-ecspi" for SPI compatible with the one integrated on i.MX53 and later Soc
+  - "fsl,imx8mq-ecspi" for SPI compatible with the one integrated on i.MX8M
 - reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device
 - interrupts : Should contain CSPI/eCSPI interrupt
 - clocks : Clock specifiers for both ipg and per clocks.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/fsl-spi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/fsl-spi.txt
index 8854004a1d3a..411375eac54d 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/fsl-spi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/fsl-spi.txt
@@ -18,6 +18,10 @@ Optional properties:
 - gpios : specifies the gpio pins to be used for chipselects.
   The gpios will be referred to as reg = <index> in the SPI child nodes.
   If unspecified, a single SPI device without a chip select can be used.
+- fsl,spisel_boot : for the MPC8306 and MPC8309, specifies that the
+  SPISEL_BOOT signal is used as chip select for a slave device. Use
+  reg = <number of gpios> in the corresponding child node, i.e. 0 if
+  the gpios property is not present.
 
 Example:
 	spi@4c0 {
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/nvidia,tegra114-spi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/nvidia,tegra114-spi.txt
index 9ba7c5a273b4..db8e0d71c5bc 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/nvidia,tegra114-spi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/nvidia,tegra114-spi.txt
@@ -23,6 +23,18 @@ Required properties:
 Recommended properties:
 - spi-max-frequency: Definition as per
                      Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt
+Optional properties:
+- nvidia,tx-clk-tap-delay: Delays the clock going out to the external device
+  with this tap value. This property is used to tune the outgoing data from
+  Tegra SPI master with respect to outgoing Tegra SPI master clock.
+  Tap values vary based on the platform design trace lengths from Tegra SPI
+  to corresponding slave devices. Valid tap values are from 0 thru 63.
+- nvidia,rx-clk-tap-delay: Delays the clock coming in from the external device
+  with this tap value. This property is used to adjust the Tegra SPI master
+  clock with respect to the data from the SPI slave device.
+  Tap values vary based on the platform design trace lengths from Tegra SPI
+  to corresponding slave devices. Valid tap values are from 0 thru 63.
+
 Example:
 
 spi@7000d600 {
@@ -38,4 +50,12 @@ spi@7000d600 {
 	reset-names = "spi";
 	dmas = <&apbdma 16>, <&apbdma 16>;
 	dma-names = "rx", "tx";
+	<spi-client>@<bus_num> {
+		...
+		...
+		nvidia,rx-clk-tap-delay = <0>;
+		nvidia,tx-clk-tap-delay = <16>;
+		...
+	};
+
 };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/sh-msiof.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/sh-msiof.txt
index 37cf69586d10..18e14ee257b2 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/sh-msiof.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/sh-msiof.txt
@@ -4,6 +4,7 @@ Required properties:
 - compatible           : "renesas,msiof-r8a7743" (RZ/G1M)
 			 "renesas,msiof-r8a7744" (RZ/G1N)
 			 "renesas,msiof-r8a7745" (RZ/G1E)
+			 "renesas,msiof-r8a77470" (RZ/G1C)
 			 "renesas,msiof-r8a774a1" (RZ/G2M)
 			 "renesas,msiof-r8a774c0" (RZ/G2E)
 			 "renesas,msiof-r8a7790" (R-Car H2)
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/snps,dw-apb-ssi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/snps,dw-apb-ssi.txt
index 2864bc6b659c..f54c8c36395e 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/snps,dw-apb-ssi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/snps,dw-apb-ssi.txt
@@ -8,9 +8,16 @@ Required properties:
 - interrupts : One interrupt, used by the controller.
 - #address-cells : <1>, as required by generic SPI binding.
 - #size-cells : <0>, also as required by generic SPI binding.
+- clocks : phandles for the clocks, see the description of clock-names below.
+   The phandle for the "ssi_clk" is required. The phandle for the "pclk" clock
+   is optional. If a single clock is specified but no clock-name, it is the
+   "ssi_clk" clock. If both clocks are listed, the "ssi_clk" must be first.
 
 Optional properties:
-- cs-gpios : Specifies the gpio pis to be used for chipselects.
+- clock-names : Contains the names of the clocks:
+    "ssi_clk", for the core clock used to generate the external SPI clock.
+    "pclk", the interface clock, required for register access.
+- cs-gpios : Specifies the gpio pins to be used for chipselects.
 - num-cs : The number of chipselects. If omitted, this will default to 4.
 - reg-io-width : The I/O register width (in bytes) implemented by this
   device.  Supported values are 2 or 4 (the default).
@@ -25,6 +32,7 @@ Example:
 		interrupts = <0 154 4>;
 		#address-cells = <1>;
 		#size-cells = <0>;
+		clocks = <&spi_m_clk>;
 		num-cs = <2>;
 		cs-gpios = <&gpio0 13 0>,
 			   <&gpio0 14 0>;
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-fsl-lpspi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-fsl-lpspi.txt
index 6cc3c6fe25a3..e71b81a41ac0 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-fsl-lpspi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-fsl-lpspi.txt
@@ -7,7 +7,11 @@ Required properties:
 - reg : address and length of the lpspi master registers
 - interrupt-parent : core interrupt controller
 - interrupts : lpspi interrupt
-- clocks : lpspi clock specifier
+- clocks : lpspi clock specifier. Its number and order need to correspond to the
+	   value in clock-names.
+- clock-names : Corresponding to per clock and ipg clock in "clocks"
+		respectively. In i.MX7ULP, it only has per clk, so use CLK_DUMMY
+		to fill the "ipg" blank.
 - spi-slave : spi slave mode support. In slave mode, add this attribute without
 	      value. In master mode, remove it.
 
@@ -18,6 +22,8 @@ lpspi2: lpspi@40290000 {
 	reg = <0x40290000 0x10000>;
 	interrupt-parent = <&intc>;
 	interrupts = <GIC_SPI 28 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
-	clocks = <&clks IMX7ULP_CLK_LPSPI2>;
+	clocks = <&clks IMX7ULP_CLK_LPSPI2>,
+		 <&clks IMX7ULP_CLK_DUMMY>;
+	clock-names = "per", "ipg";
 	spi-slave;
 };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/fsl-quadspi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-fsl-qspi.txt
index 483e9cfac1b1..e8f1d627d288 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/fsl-quadspi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-fsl-qspi.txt
@@ -14,15 +14,13 @@ Required properties:
   - clocks : The clocks needed by the QuadSPI controller
   - clock-names : Should contain the name of the clocks: "qspi_en" and "qspi".
 
-Optional properties:
-  - fsl,qspi-has-second-chip: The controller has two buses, bus A and bus B.
-                              Each bus can be connected with two NOR flashes.
-			      Most of the time, each bus only has one NOR flash
-			      connected, this is the default case.
-			      But if there are two NOR flashes connected to the
-			      bus, you should enable this property.
-			      (Please check the board's schematic.)
-  - big-endian : That means the IP register is big endian
+Required SPI slave node properties:
+  - reg: There are two buses (A and B) with two chip selects each.
+	 This encodes to which bus and CS the flash is connected:
+		<0>: Bus A, CS 0
+		<1>: Bus A, CS 1
+		<2>: Bus B, CS 0
+		<3>: Bus B, CS 1
 
 Example:
 
@@ -40,7 +38,7 @@ qspi0: quadspi@40044000 {
 	};
 };
 
-Example showing the usage of two SPI NOR devices:
+Example showing the usage of two SPI NOR devices on bus A:
 
 &qspi2 {
 	pinctrl-names = "default";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-mt65xx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-mt65xx.txt
index 69c356767cf8..c0f6c8ecfa2e 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-mt65xx.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-mt65xx.txt
@@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ Required properties:
     - mediatek,mt8135-spi: for mt8135 platforms
     - mediatek,mt8173-spi: for mt8173 platforms
     - mediatek,mt8183-spi: for mt8183 platforms
+    - "mediatek,mt8516-spi", "mediatek,mt2712-spi": for mt8516 platforms
 
 - #address-cells: should be 1.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-mt7621.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-mt7621.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d5baec0fa56e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-mt7621.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+Binding for MTK SPI controller (MT7621 MIPS)
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be one of the following:
+  - "ralink,mt7621-spi": for mt7621/mt7628/mt7688 platforms
+- #address-cells: should be 1.
+- #size-cells: should be 0.
+- reg: Address and length of the register set for the device
+- resets: phandle to the reset controller asserting this device in
+          reset
+  See ../reset/reset.txt for details.
+
+Optional properties:
+- cs-gpios: see spi-bus.txt.
+
+Example:
+
+- SoC Specific Portion:
+spi0: spi@b00 {
+	compatible = "ralink,mt7621-spi";
+	reg = <0xb00 0x100>;
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+	resets = <&rstctrl 18>;
+	reset-names = "spi";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-nxp-fspi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-nxp-fspi.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2cd67eb727d4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-nxp-fspi.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+* NXP Flex Serial Peripheral Interface (FSPI)
+
+Required properties:
+  - compatible : Should be "nxp,lx2160a-fspi"
+  - reg :        First contains the register location and length,
+                 Second contains the memory mapping address and length
+  - reg-names :  Should contain the resource reg names:
+	         - fspi_base: configuration register address space
+                 - fspi_mmap: memory mapped address space
+  - interrupts : Should contain the interrupt for the device
+
+Required SPI slave node properties:
+  - reg :        There are two buses (A and B) with two chip selects each.
+                 This encodes to which bus and CS the flash is connected:
+                 - <0>: Bus A, CS 0
+                 - <1>: Bus A, CS 1
+                 - <2>: Bus B, CS 0
+                 - <3>: Bus B, CS 1
+
+Example showing the usage of two SPI NOR slave devices on bus A:
+
+fspi0: spi@20c0000 {
+	compatible = "nxp,lx2160a-fspi";
+	reg = <0x0 0x20c0000 0x0 0x10000>, <0x0 0x20000000 0x0 0x10000000>;
+	reg-names = "fspi_base", "fspi_mmap";
+	interrupts = <0 25 0x4>; /* Level high type */
+	clocks = <&clockgen 4 3>, <&clockgen 4 3>;
+	clock-names = "fspi_en", "fspi";
+
+	mt35xu512aba0: flash@0 {
+		reg = <0>;
+		....
+	};
+
+	mt35xu512aba1: flash@1 {
+		reg = <1>;
+		....
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-sifive.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-sifive.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3f5c6e438972
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-sifive.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+SiFive SPI controller Device Tree Bindings
+------------------------------------------
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible		: Should be "sifive,<chip>-spi" and "sifive,spi<version>".
+			  Supported compatible strings are:
+			  "sifive,fu540-c000-spi" for the SiFive SPI v0 as integrated
+			  onto the SiFive FU540 chip, and "sifive,spi0" for the SiFive
+			  SPI v0 IP block with no chip integration tweaks.
+			  Please refer to sifive-blocks-ip-versioning.txt for details
+- reg			: Physical base address and size of SPI registers map
+			  A second (optional) range can indicate memory mapped flash
+- interrupts		: Must contain one entry
+- interrupt-parent	: Must be core interrupt controller
+- clocks		: Must reference the frequency given to the controller
+- #address-cells	: Must be '1', indicating which CS to use
+- #size-cells		: Must be '0'
+
+Optional properties:
+- sifive,fifo-depth		: Depth of hardware queues; defaults to 8
+- sifive,max-bits-per-word	: Maximum bits per word; defaults to 8
+
+SPI RTL that corresponds to the IP block version numbers can be found here:
+https://github.com/sifive/sifive-blocks/tree/master/src/main/scala/devices/spi
+
+Example:
+	spi: spi@10040000 {
+		compatible = "sifive,fu540-c000-spi", "sifive,spi0";
+		reg = <0x0 0x10040000 0x0 0x1000 0x0 0x20000000 0x0 0x10000000>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&plic>;
+		interrupts = <51>;
+		clocks = <&tlclk>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+		sifive,fifo-depth = <8>;
+		sifive,max-bits-per-word = <8>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-sprd.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-sprd.txt
index bad211a19da4..3c7eacce0ee3 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-sprd.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-sprd.txt
@@ -14,6 +14,11 @@ Required properties:
 	address on the SPI bus. Should be set to 1.
 - #size-cells: Should be set to 0.
 
+Optional properties:
+dma-names: Should contain names of the SPI used DMA channel.
+dmas: Should contain DMA channels and DMA slave ids which the SPI used
+	sorted in the same order as the dma-names property.
+
 Example:
 spi0: spi@70a00000{
 	compatible = "sprd,sc9860-spi";
@@ -21,6 +26,8 @@ spi0: spi@70a00000{
 	interrupts = <GIC_SPI 7 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
 	clock-names = "spi", "source","enable";
 	clocks = <&clk_spi0>, <&ext_26m>, <&clk_ap_apb_gates 5>;
+	dma-names = "rx_chn", "tx_chn";
+	dmas = <&apdma 11 11>, <&apdma 12 12>;
 	#address-cells = <1>;
 	#size-cells = <0>;
 };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-stm32.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-stm32.txt
index 1b3fa2c119d5..d82755c63eaf 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-stm32.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-stm32.txt
@@ -7,7 +7,9 @@ from 4 to 32-bit data size. Although it can be configured as master or slave,
 only master is supported by the driver.
 
 Required properties:
-- compatible: Must be "st,stm32h7-spi".
+- compatible: Should be one of:
+  "st,stm32h7-spi"
+  "st,stm32f4-spi"
 - reg: Offset and length of the device's register set.
 - interrupts: Must contain the interrupt id.
 - clocks: Must contain an entry for spiclk (which feeds the internal clock
@@ -30,8 +32,9 @@ Child nodes represent devices on the SPI bus
   See ../spi/spi-bus.txt
 
 Optional properties:
-- st,spi-midi-ns: (Master Inter-Data Idleness) minimum time delay in
-		  nanoseconds inserted between two consecutive data frames.
+- st,spi-midi-ns: Only for STM32H7, (Master Inter-Data Idleness) minimum time
+		  delay in nanoseconds inserted between two consecutive data
+		  frames.
 
 
 Example:
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-zynq-qspi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-zynq-qspi.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..16b734ad3102
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-zynq-qspi.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+Xilinx Zynq QSPI controller Device Tree Bindings
+-------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible		: Should be "xlnx,zynq-qspi-1.0".
+- reg			: Physical base address and size of QSPI registers map.
+- interrupts		: Property with a value describing the interrupt
+			  number.
+- clock-names		: List of input clock names - "ref_clk", "pclk"
+			  (See clock bindings for details).
+- clocks		: Clock phandles (see clock bindings for details).
+
+Optional properties:
+- num-cs		: Number of chip selects used.
+
+Example:
+	qspi: spi@e000d000 {
+		compatible = "xlnx,zynq-qspi-1.0";
+		reg = <0xe000d000 0x1000>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&intc>;
+		interrupts = <0 19 4>;
+		clock-names = "ref_clk", "pclk";
+		clocks = <&clkc 10>, <&clkc 43>;
+		num-cs = <1>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sram/milbeaut-smp-sram.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sram/milbeaut-smp-sram.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..194f6a3c1c1e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sram/milbeaut-smp-sram.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+Milbeaut SRAM for smp bringup
+
+Milbeaut SoCs use a part of the sram for the bringup of the secondary cores.
+Once they get powered up in the bootloader, they stay at the specific part
+of the sram.
+Therefore the part needs to be added as the sub-node of mmio-sram.
+
+Required sub-node properties:
+- compatible : should be "socionext,milbeaut-smp-sram"
+
+Example:
+
+        sram: sram@0 {
+                compatible = "mmio-sram";
+                reg = <0x0 0x10000>;
+                #address-cells = <1>;
+                #size-cells = <1>;
+                ranges = <0 0x0 0x10000>;
+
+                smp-sram@f100 {
+                        compatible = "socionext,milbeaut-smp-sram";
+                        reg = <0xf100 0x20>;
+                };
+        };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sram/sunxi-sram.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sram/sunxi-sram.txt
index ab5a70bb9a64..380246a805f2 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sram/sunxi-sram.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sram/sunxi-sram.txt
@@ -63,6 +63,7 @@ The valid sections compatible for H5 are:
 
 The valid sections compatible for H6 are:
     - allwinner,sun50i-h6-sram-c, allwinner,sun50i-a64-sram-c
+    - allwinner,sun50i-h6-sram-c1, allwinner,sun4i-a10-sram-c1
 
 The valid sections compatible for F1C100s are:
     - allwinner,suniv-f1c100s-sram-d, allwinner,sun4i-a10-sram-d
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/amazon,al-thermal.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/amazon,al-thermal.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..703979dbd577
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/amazon,al-thermal.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+Amazon's Annapurna Labs Thermal Sensor
+
+Simple thermal device that allows temperature reading by a single MMIO
+transaction.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "amazon,al-thermal".
+- reg: The physical base address and length of the sensor's registers.
+- #thermal-sensor-cells: Must be 1. See ./thermal.txt for a description.
+
+Example:
+	thermal: thermal {
+		compatible = "amazon,al-thermal";
+		reg = <0x0 0x05002860 0x0 0x1>;
+		#thermal-sensor-cells = <0x1>;
+	};
+
+	thermal-zones {
+		thermal-z0 {
+			polling-delay-passive = <250>;
+			polling-delay = <1000>;
+			thermal-sensors = <&thermal 0>;
+			trips {
+				critical {
+					temperature = <105000>;
+					hysteresis = <2000>;
+					type = "critical";
+				};
+			};
+
+		};
+	};
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/brcm,sr-thermal.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/brcm,sr-thermal.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3ab330219d45
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/brcm,sr-thermal.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,105 @@
+* Broadcom Stingray Thermal
+
+This binding describes thermal sensors that is part of Stingray SoCs.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Must be "brcm,sr-thermal"
+- reg : Memory where tmon data will be available.
+- brcm,tmon-mask: A one cell bit mask of valid TMON sources.
+                  Each bit represents single TMON source.
+- #thermal-sensor-cells : Thermal sensor phandler
+- polling-delay: Max number of milliseconds to wait between polls.
+- thermal-sensors: A list of thermal sensor phandles and specifier.
+                   specifier value is tmon ID and it should be
+                   in correspond with brcm,tmon-mask.
+- temperature: trip temperature threshold in millicelsius.
+
+Example:
+	tmons {
+		compatible = "simple-bus";
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+		ranges = <0x0 0x0 0x8f100000 0x100>;
+
+		tmon: tmon@0 {
+			compatible = "brcm,sr-thermal";
+			reg = <0x0 0x40>;
+			brcm,tmon-mask = <0x3f>;
+			#thermal-sensor-cells = <1>;
+		};
+	};
+
+	thermal-zones {
+		ihost0_thermal: ihost0-thermal {
+			polling-delay-passive = <0>;
+			polling-delay = <1000>;
+			thermal-sensors = <&tmon 0>;
+			trips {
+				cpu-crit {
+					temperature = <105000>;
+					hysteresis = <0>;
+					type = "critical";
+				};
+			};
+		};
+		ihost1_thermal: ihost1-thermal {
+			polling-delay-passive = <0>;
+			polling-delay = <1000>;
+			thermal-sensors = <&tmon 1>;
+			trips {
+				cpu-crit {
+					temperature = <105000>;
+					hysteresis = <0>;
+					type = "critical";
+				};
+			};
+		};
+		ihost2_thermal: ihost2-thermal {
+			polling-delay-passive = <0>;
+			polling-delay = <1000>;
+			thermal-sensors = <&tmon 2>;
+			trips {
+				cpu-crit {
+					temperature = <105000>;
+					hysteresis = <0>;
+					type = "critical";
+				};
+			};
+		};
+		ihost3_thermal: ihost3-thermal {
+			polling-delay-passive = <0>;
+			polling-delay = <1000>;
+			thermal-sensors = <&tmon 3>;
+			trips {
+				cpu-crit {
+					temperature = <105000>;
+					hysteresis = <0>;
+					type = "critical";
+				};
+			};
+		};
+		crmu_thermal: crmu-thermal {
+			polling-delay-passive = <0>;
+			polling-delay = <1000>;
+			thermal-sensors = <&tmon 4>;
+			trips {
+				cpu-crit {
+					temperature = <105000>;
+					hysteresis = <0>;
+					type = "critical";
+				};
+			};
+		};
+		nitro_thermal: nitro-thermal {
+			polling-delay-passive = <0>;
+			polling-delay = <1000>;
+			thermal-sensors = <&tmon 5>;
+			trips {
+				cpu-crit {
+					temperature = <105000>;
+					hysteresis = <0>;
+					type = "critical";
+				};
+			};
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/mediatek-thermal.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/mediatek-thermal.txt
index 41d6a443ad66..f8d7831f3974 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/mediatek-thermal.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/mediatek-thermal.txt
@@ -13,6 +13,7 @@ Required properties:
   - "mediatek,mt2701-thermal" : For MT2701 family of SoCs
   - "mediatek,mt2712-thermal" : For MT2712 family of SoCs
   - "mediatek,mt7622-thermal" : For MT7622 SoC
+  - "mediatek,mt8183-thermal" : For MT8183 family of SoCs
 - reg: Address range of the thermal controller
 - interrupts: IRQ for the thermal controller
 - clocks, clock-names: Clocks needed for the thermal controller. required
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/nvidia,tegra124-soctherm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/nvidia,tegra124-soctherm.txt
index b6c0ae53d4dc..f02f38527a6b 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/nvidia,tegra124-soctherm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/nvidia,tegra124-soctherm.txt
@@ -52,13 +52,47 @@ Required properties :
         Must set as following values:
         TEGRA_SOCTHERM_THROT_LEVEL_LOW, TEGRA_SOCTHERM_THROT_LEVEL_MED
         TEGRA_SOCTHERM_THROT_LEVEL_HIGH, TEGRA_SOCTHERM_THROT_LEVEL_NONE
+      - nvidia,gpu-throt-level: This property is for Tegra124 and Tegra210.
+        It is the level of pulse skippers, which used to throttle clock
+        frequencies. It indicates gpu clock throttling depth and can be
+        programmed to any of the following values which represent a throttling
+        percentage:
+        TEGRA_SOCTHERM_THROT_LEVEL_NONE (0%)
+        TEGRA_SOCTHERM_THROT_LEVEL_LOW (50%),
+        TEGRA_SOCTHERM_THROT_LEVEL_MED (75%),
+        TEGRA_SOCTHERM_THROT_LEVEL_HIGH (85%).
       - #cooling-cells: Should be 1. This cooling device only support on/off state.
         See ./thermal.txt for a description of this property.
 
+      Optional properties: The following properties are T210 specific and
+      valid only for OCx throttle events.
+      - nvidia,count-threshold: Specifies the number of OC events that are
+        required for triggering an interrupt. Interrupts are not triggered if
+        the property is missing. A value of 0 will interrupt on every OC alarm.
+      - nvidia,polarity-active-low: Configures the polarity of the OC alaram
+        signal. If present, this means assert low, otherwise assert high.
+      - nvidia,alarm-filter: Number of clocks to filter event. When the filter
+        expires (which means the OC event has not occurred for a long time),
+        the counter is cleared and filter is rearmed. Default value is 0.
+      - nvidia,throttle-period-us: Specifies the number of uSec for which
+        throttling is engaged after the OC event is deasserted. Default value
+        is 0.
+
+Optional properties:
+- nvidia,thermtrips : When present, this property specifies the temperature at
+  which the soctherm hardware will assert the thermal trigger signal to the
+  Power Management IC, which can be configured to reset or shutdown the device.
+  It is an array of pairs where each pair represents a tsensor id followed by a
+  temperature in milli Celcius. In the absence of this property the critical
+  trip point will be used for thermtrip temperature.
+
 Note:
-- the "critical" type trip points will be set to SOC_THERM hardware as the
-shut down temperature. Once the temperature of this thermal zone is higher
-than it, the system will be shutdown or reset by hardware.
+- the "critical" type trip points will be used to set the temperature at which
+the SOC_THERM hardware will assert a thermal trigger if the "nvidia,thermtrips"
+property is missing. When the thermtrips property is present, the breach of a
+critical trip point is reported back to the thermal framework to implement
+software shutdown.
+
 - the "hot" type trip points will be set to SOC_THERM hardware as the throttle
 temperature. Once the the temperature of this thermal zone is higher
 than it, it will trigger the HW throttle event.
@@ -79,25 +113,32 @@ Example :
 
 		#thermal-sensor-cells = <1>;
 
+		nvidia,thermtrips = <TEGRA124_SOCTHERM_SENSOR_CPU 102500
+				     TEGRA124_SOCTHERM_SENSOR_GPU 103000>;
+
 		throttle-cfgs {
 			/*
 			 * When the "heavy" cooling device triggered,
-			 * the HW will skip cpu clock's pulse in 85% depth
+			 * the HW will skip cpu clock's pulse in 85% depth,
+			 * skip gpu clock's pulse in 85% level
 			 */
 			throttle_heavy: heavy {
 				nvidia,priority = <100>;
 				nvidia,cpu-throt-percent = <85>;
+				nvidia,gpu-throt-level = <TEGRA_SOCTHERM_THROT_LEVEL_HIGH>;
 
 				#cooling-cells = <1>;
 			};
 
 			/*
 			 * When the "light" cooling device triggered,
-			 * the HW will skip cpu clock's pulse in 50% depth
+			 * the HW will skip cpu clock's pulse in 50% depth,
+			 * skip gpu clock's pulse in 50% level
 			 */
 			throttle_light: light {
 				nvidia,priority = <80>;
 				nvidia,cpu-throt-percent = <50>;
+				nvidia,gpu-throt-level = <TEGRA_SOCTHERM_THROT_LEVEL_LOW>;
 
 				#cooling-cells = <1>;
 			};
@@ -107,6 +148,17 @@ Example :
 			 * arbiter will select the highest priority as the final throttle
 			 * settings to skip cpu pulse.
 			 */
+
+			throttle_oc1: oc1 {
+				nvidia,priority = <50>;
+				nvidia,polarity-active-low;
+				nvidia,count-threshold = <100>;
+				nvidia,alarm-filter = <5100000>;
+				nvidia,throttle-period-us = <0>;
+				nvidia,cpu-throt-percent = <75>;
+				nvidia,gpu-throt-level =
+						<TEGRA_SOCTHERM_THROT_LEVEL_MED>;
+                        };
 		};
 	};
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/qcom-tsens.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/qcom-tsens.txt
index 1d9e8cf61018..673cc1831ee9 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/qcom-tsens.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/qcom-tsens.txt
@@ -6,11 +6,14 @@ Required properties:
     - "qcom,msm8916-tsens" (MSM8916)
     - "qcom,msm8974-tsens" (MSM8974)
     - "qcom,msm8996-tsens" (MSM8996)
+    - "qcom,qcs404-tsens", "qcom,tsens-v1" (QCS404)
     - "qcom,msm8998-tsens", "qcom,tsens-v2" (MSM8998)
     - "qcom,sdm845-tsens", "qcom,tsens-v2" (SDM845)
   The generic "qcom,tsens-v2" property must be used as a fallback for any SoC
   with version 2 of the TSENS IP. MSM8996 is the only exception because the
   generic property did not exist when support was added.
+  Similarly, the generic "qcom,tsens-v1" property must be used as a fallback for
+  any SoC with version 1 of the TSENS IP.
 
 - reg: Address range of the thermal registers.
   New platforms containing v2.x.y of the TSENS IP must specify the SROT and TM
@@ -39,3 +42,14 @@ tsens0: thermal-sensor@c263000 {
 		#qcom,sensors = <13>;
 		#thermal-sensor-cells = <1>;
 	};
+
+Example 3 (for any platform containing v1 of the TSENS IP):
+tsens: thermal-sensor@4a9000 {
+		compatible = "qcom,qcs404-tsens", "qcom,tsens-v1";
+		reg = <0x004a9000 0x1000>, /* TM */
+		      <0x004a8000 0x1000>; /* SROT */
+		nvmem-cells = <&tsens_caldata>;
+		nvmem-cell-names = "calib";
+		#qcom,sensors = <10>;
+		#thermal-sensor-cells = <1>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/rockchip-thermal.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/rockchip-thermal.txt
index 43d744e5305e..c6aac9bcacf1 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/rockchip-thermal.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/rockchip-thermal.txt
@@ -2,6 +2,7 @@
 
 Required properties:
 - compatible : should be "rockchip,<name>-tsadc"
+   "rockchip,px30-tsadc":   found on PX30 SoCs
    "rockchip,rv1108-tsadc": found on RV1108 SoCs
    "rockchip,rk3228-tsadc": found on RK3228 SoCs
    "rockchip,rk3288-tsadc": found on RK3288 SoCs
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/thermal-generic-adc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/thermal-generic-adc.txt
index d72355502b78..691a09db2fef 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/thermal-generic-adc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/thermal-generic-adc.txt
@@ -8,16 +8,22 @@ temperature using voltage-temperature lookup table.
 Required properties:
 ===================
 - compatible:		     Must be "generic-adc-thermal".
+- #thermal-sensor-cells:     Should be 1. See ./thermal.txt for a description
+		             of this property.
+Optional properties:
+===================
 - temperature-lookup-table:  Two dimensional array of Integer; lookup table
 			     to map the relation between ADC value and
 			     temperature. When ADC is read, the value is
 			     looked up on the table to get the equivalent
 			     temperature.
+
 			     The first value of the each row of array is the
 			     temperature in milliCelsius and second value of
 			     the each row of array is the ADC read value.
-- #thermal-sensor-cells:     Should be 1. See ./thermal.txt for a description
-			     of this property.
+
+			     If not specified, driver assumes the ADC channel
+			     gives milliCelsius directly.
 
 Example :
 #include <dt-bindings/thermal/thermal.h>
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/allwinner,sun4i-timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/allwinner,sun4i-timer.txt
index 5c2e23574ca0..3da9d515c03a 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/allwinner,sun4i-timer.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/allwinner,sun4i-timer.txt
@@ -2,7 +2,9 @@ Allwinner A1X SoCs Timer Controller
 
 Required properties:
 
-- compatible : should be "allwinner,sun4i-a10-timer"
+- compatible : should be one of the following:
+              "allwinner,sun4i-a10-timer"
+              "allwinner,suniv-f1c100s-timer"
 - reg : Specifies base physical address and size of the registers.
 - interrupts : The interrupt of the first timer
 - clocks: phandle to the source clock (usually a 24 MHz fixed clock)
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/arm,arch_timer_mmio.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/arm,arch_timer_mmio.yaml
index c4ab59550fc2..b3f0fe96ff0d 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/arm,arch_timer_mmio.yaml
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/arm,arch_timer_mmio.yaml
@@ -59,6 +59,7 @@ properties:
 
 patternProperties:
   '^frame@[0-9a-z]*$':
+    type: object
     description: A timer node has up to 8 frame sub-nodes, each with the following properties.
     properties:
       frame-number:
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/fsl,imxgpt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/fsl,imxgpt.txt
index 9809b11f7180..5d8fd5b52598 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/fsl,imxgpt.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/fsl,imxgpt.txt
@@ -2,17 +2,44 @@ Freescale i.MX General Purpose Timer (GPT)
 
 Required properties:
 
-- compatible : should be "fsl,<soc>-gpt"
-- reg : Specifies base physical address and size of the registers.
-- interrupts : A list of 4 interrupts; one per timer channel.
-- clocks : The clocks provided by the SoC to drive the timer.
+- compatible : should be one of following:
+  for i.MX1:
+  - "fsl,imx1-gpt";
+  for i.MX21:
+  - "fsl,imx21-gpt";
+  for i.MX27:
+  - "fsl,imx27-gpt", "fsl,imx21-gpt";
+  for i.MX31:
+  - "fsl,imx31-gpt";
+  for i.MX25:
+  - "fsl,imx25-gpt", "fsl,imx31-gpt";
+  for i.MX50:
+  - "fsl,imx50-gpt", "fsl,imx31-gpt";
+  for i.MX51:
+  - "fsl,imx51-gpt", "fsl,imx31-gpt";
+  for i.MX53:
+  - "fsl,imx53-gpt", "fsl,imx31-gpt";
+  for i.MX6Q:
+  - "fsl,imx6q-gpt", "fsl,imx31-gpt";
+  for i.MX6DL:
+  - "fsl,imx6dl-gpt";
+  for i.MX6SL:
+  - "fsl,imx6sl-gpt", "fsl,imx6dl-gpt";
+  for i.MX6SX:
+  - "fsl,imx6sx-gpt", "fsl,imx6dl-gpt";
+- reg : specifies base physical address and size of the registers.
+- interrupts : should be the gpt interrupt.
+- clocks : the clocks provided by the SoC to drive the timer, must contain
+           an entry for each entry in clock-names.
+- clock-names : must include "ipg" entry first, then "per" entry.
 
 Example:
 
 gpt1: timer@10003000 {
-	compatible = "fsl,imx27-gpt", "fsl,imx1-gpt";
+	compatible = "fsl,imx27-gpt", "fsl,imx21-gpt";
 	reg = <0x10003000 0x1000>;
 	interrupts = <26>;
-	clocks = <&clks 46>, <&clks 61>;
+	clocks = <&clks IMX27_CLK_GPT1_IPG_GATE>,
+		 <&clks IMX27_CLK_PER1_GATE>;
 	clock-names = "ipg", "per";
 };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/intel,ixp4xx-timer.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/intel,ixp4xx-timer.yaml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a36a0746c056
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/intel,ixp4xx-timer.yaml
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+# SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0 OR BSD-2-Clause)
+# Copyright 2018 Linaro Ltd.
+%YAML 1.2
+---
+$id: "http://devicetree.org/schemas/timer/intel-ixp4xx-timer.yaml#"
+$schema: "http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml#"
+
+title: Intel IXP4xx XScale Networking Processors Timers
+
+maintainers:
+  - Linus Walleij <linus.walleij@linaro.org>
+
+description: This timer is found in the Intel IXP4xx processors.
+
+properties:
+  compatible:
+    items:
+      - const: intel,ixp4xx-timer
+
+  reg:
+    description: Should contain registers location and length
+
+  interrupts:
+    minItems: 1
+    maxItems: 2
+    items:
+      - description: Timer 1 interrupt
+      - description: Timer 2 interrupt
+
+required:
+  - compatible
+  - reg
+  - interrupts
+
+examples:
+  - |
+    #include <dt-bindings/interrupt-controller/irq.h>
+    timer@c8005000 {
+        compatible = "intel,ixp4xx-timer";
+        reg = <0xc8005000 0x100>;
+        interrupts = <5 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
+    };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/mediatek,mtk-timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/mediatek,mtk-timer.txt
index 18d4d0166c76..74c3eadad844 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/mediatek,mtk-timer.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/mediatek,mtk-timer.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
-Mediatek Timers
+MediaTek Timers
 ---------------
 
-Mediatek SoCs have two different timers on different platforms,
+MediaTek SoCs have two different timers on different platforms,
 - GPT (General Purpose Timer)
 - SYST (System Timer)
 
@@ -9,6 +9,7 @@ The proper timer will be selected automatically by driver.
 
 Required properties:
 - compatible should contain:
+	For those SoCs that use GPT
 	* "mediatek,mt2701-timer" for MT2701 compatible timers (GPT)
 	* "mediatek,mt6580-timer" for MT6580 compatible timers (GPT)
 	* "mediatek,mt6589-timer" for MT6589 compatible timers (GPT)
@@ -16,8 +17,13 @@ Required properties:
 	* "mediatek,mt8127-timer" for MT8127 compatible timers (GPT)
 	* "mediatek,mt8135-timer" for MT8135 compatible timers (GPT)
 	* "mediatek,mt8173-timer" for MT8173 compatible timers (GPT)
+	* "mediatek,mt8516-timer" for MT8516 compatible timers (GPT)
 	* "mediatek,mt6577-timer" for MT6577 and all above compatible timers (GPT)
-	* "mediatek,mt6765-timer" for MT6765 compatible timers (SYST)
+
+	For those SoCs that use SYST
+	* "mediatek,mt7629-timer" for MT7629 compatible timers (SYST)
+	* "mediatek,mt6765-timer" for MT6765 and all above compatible timers (SYST)
+
 - reg: Should contain location and length for timer register.
 - clocks: Should contain system clock.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/nvidia,tegra210-timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/nvidia,tegra210-timer.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..032cda96fe0d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/nvidia,tegra210-timer.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+NVIDIA Tegra210 timer
+
+The Tegra210 timer provides fourteen 29-bit timer counters and one 32-bit
+timestamp counter. The TMRs run at either a fixed 1 MHz clock rate derived
+from the oscillator clock (TMR0-TMR9) or directly at the oscillator clock
+(TMR10-TMR13). Each TMR can be programmed to generate one-shot, periodic,
+or watchdog interrupts.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "nvidia,tegra210-timer".
+- reg : Specifies base physical address and size of the registers.
+- interrupts : A list of 14 interrupts; one per each timer channels 0 through
+  13.
+- clocks : Must contain one entry, for the module clock.
+  See ../clocks/clock-bindings.txt for details.
+
+timer@60005000 {
+	compatible = "nvidia,tegra210-timer";
+	reg = <0x0 0x60005000 0x0 0x400>;
+	interrupts = <GIC_SPI 156 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>,
+		     <GIC_SPI 0 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>,
+		     <GIC_SPI 1 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>,
+		     <GIC_SPI 41 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>,
+		     <GIC_SPI 42 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>,
+		     <GIC_SPI 121 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>,
+		     <GIC_SPI 152 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>,
+		     <GIC_SPI 153 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>,
+		     <GIC_SPI 154 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>,
+		     <GIC_SPI 155 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>,
+		     <GIC_SPI 176 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>,
+		     <GIC_SPI 177 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>,
+		     <GIC_SPI 178 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>,
+		     <GIC_SPI 179 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
+	clocks = <&tegra_car TEGRA210_CLK_TIMER>;
+	clock-names = "timer";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/renesas,cmt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/renesas,cmt.txt
index 862a80f0380a..c0594450e9ef 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/renesas,cmt.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/renesas,cmt.txt
@@ -32,6 +32,8 @@ Required Properties:
     - "renesas,r8a77470-cmt1" for the 48-bit CMT1 device included in r8a77470.
     - "renesas,r8a774a1-cmt0" for the 32-bit CMT0 device included in r8a774a1.
     - "renesas,r8a774a1-cmt1" for the 48-bit CMT1 device included in r8a774a1.
+    - "renesas,r8a774c0-cmt0" for the 32-bit CMT0 device included in r8a774c0.
+    - "renesas,r8a774c0-cmt1" for the 48-bit CMT1 device included in r8a774c0.
     - "renesas,r8a7790-cmt0" for the 32-bit CMT0 device included in r8a7790.
     - "renesas,r8a7790-cmt1" for the 48-bit CMT1 device included in r8a7790.
     - "renesas,r8a7791-cmt0" for the 32-bit CMT0 device included in r8a7791.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/renesas,tmu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/renesas,tmu.txt
index 4ddff85837da..13ad07416bdd 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/renesas,tmu.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/renesas,tmu.txt
@@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ Required Properties:
 
   - compatible: must contain one or more of the following:
     - "renesas,tmu-r8a7740" for the r8a7740 TMU
+    - "renesas,tmu-r8a774c0" for the r8a774C0 TMU
     - "renesas,tmu-r8a7778" for the r8a7778 TMU
     - "renesas,tmu-r8a7779" for the r8a7779 TMU
     - "renesas,tmu-r8a77970" for the r8a77970 TMU
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/socionext,milbeaut-timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/socionext,milbeaut-timer.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ac44c4b67530
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/socionext,milbeaut-timer.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+Milbeaut SoCs Timer Controller
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible : should be "socionext,milbeaut-timer".
+- reg : Specifies base physical address and size of the registers.
+- interrupts : The interrupt of the first timer.
+- clocks: phandle to the input clk.
+
+Example:
+
+timer {
+	compatible = "socionext,milbeaut-timer";
+	reg = <0x1e000050 0x20>
+	interrupts = <0 91 4>;
+	clocks = <&clk 4>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/trivial-devices.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/trivial-devices.yaml
index cc64ec63a6ad..747fd3f689dc 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/trivial-devices.yaml
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/trivial-devices.yaml
@@ -92,6 +92,8 @@ properties:
           - fsl,sgtl5000
             # G751: Digital Temperature Sensor and Thermal Watchdog with Two-Wire Interface
           - gmt,g751
+            # Infineon IR38064 Voltage Regulator
+          - infineon,ir38064
             # Infineon SLB9635 (Soft-) I2C TPM (old protocol, max 100khz)
           - infineon,slb9635tt
             # Infineon SLB9645 I2C TPM (new protocol, max 400khz)
@@ -102,6 +104,8 @@ properties:
           - isil,isl29028
             # Intersil ISL29030 Ambient Light and Proximity Sensor
           - isil,isl29030
+            # Intersil ISL68137 Digital Output Configurable PWM Controller
+          - isil,isl68137
             # 5 Bit Programmable, Pulse-Width Modulator
           - maxim,ds1050
             # Low-Power, 4-/12-Channel, 2-Wire Serial, 12-Bit ADCs
@@ -322,6 +326,8 @@ properties:
           - ti,ads7830
             # Temperature Monitoring and Fan Control
           - ti,amc6821
+            # Temperature sensor with integrated fan control
+          - ti,lm96000
             # I2C Touch-Screen Controller
           - ti,tsc2003
             # Low Power Digital Temperature Sensor with SMBUS/Two Wire Serial Interface
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ufs/cdns,ufshc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ufs/cdns,ufshc.txt
index a04a4989ec7f..02347b017abd 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ufs/cdns,ufshc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ufs/cdns,ufshc.txt
@@ -5,8 +5,9 @@ Each UFS controller instance should have its own node.
 Please see the ufshcd-pltfrm.txt for a list of all available properties.
 
 Required properties:
-- compatible	: Compatible list, contains the following controller:
-			"cdns,ufshc"
+- compatible	: Compatible list, contains one of the following controllers:
+			"cdns,ufshc" - Generic CDNS HCI,
+			"cdns,ufshc-m31-16nm" - CDNS UFS HC + M31 16nm PHY
 		  complemented with the JEDEC version:
 			"jedec,ufs-2.0"
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ufs/ufs-hisi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ufs/ufs-hisi.txt
index a48c44817367..0b83df1a5418 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ufs/ufs-hisi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ufs/ufs-hisi.txt
@@ -6,9 +6,10 @@ Each UFS Host Controller should have its own node.
 Required properties:
 - compatible        : compatible list, contains one of the following -
 					"hisilicon,hi3660-ufs", "jedec,ufs-1.1" for hisi ufs
-					host controller present on Hi36xx chipset.
+					host controller present on Hi3660 chipset.
+					"hisilicon,hi3670-ufs", "jedec,ufs-2.1" for hisi ufs
+					host controller present on Hi3670 chipset.
 - reg               : should contain UFS register address space & UFS SYS CTRL register address,
-- interrupt-parent  : interrupt device
 - interrupts        : interrupt number
 - clocks	        : List of phandle and clock specifier pairs
 - clock-names       : List of clock input name strings sorted in the same
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ufs/ufs-mediatek.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ufs/ufs-mediatek.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..72aab8547308
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ufs/ufs-mediatek.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+* Mediatek Universal Flash Storage (UFS) Host Controller
+
+UFS nodes are defined to describe on-chip UFS hardware macro.
+Each UFS Host Controller should have its own node.
+
+To bind UFS PHY with UFS host controller, the controller node should
+contain a phandle reference to UFS M-PHY node.
+
+Required properties for UFS nodes:
+- compatible         : Compatible list, contains the following controller:
+                       "mediatek,mt8183-ufshci" for MediaTek UFS host controller
+                       present on MT81xx chipsets.
+- reg                : Address and length of the UFS register set.
+- phys               : phandle to m-phy.
+- clocks             : List of phandle and clock specifier pairs.
+- clock-names        : List of clock input name strings sorted in the same
+                       order as the clocks property. "ufs" is mandatory.
+                       "ufs": ufshci core control clock.
+- freq-table-hz      : Array of <min max> operating frequencies stored in the same
+                       order as the clocks property. If this property is not
+                       defined or a value in the array is "0" then it is assumed
+                       that the frequency is set by the parent clock or a
+                       fixed rate clock source.
+- vcc-supply         : phandle to VCC supply regulator node.
+
+Example:
+
+	ufsphy: phy@11fa0000 {
+		...
+	};
+
+	ufshci@11270000 {
+		compatible = "mediatek,mt8183-ufshci";
+		reg = <0 0x11270000 0 0x2300>;
+		interrupts = <GIC_SPI 104 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW>;
+		phys = <&ufsphy>;
+
+		clocks = <&infracfg_ao INFRACFG_AO_UFS_CG>;
+		clock-names = "ufs";
+		freq-table-hz = <0 0>;
+
+		vcc-supply = <&mt_pmic_vemc_ldo_reg>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ufs/ufs-qcom.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ufs/ufs-qcom.txt
index 21d9a93db2e9..fd59f93e9556 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ufs/ufs-qcom.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ufs/ufs-qcom.txt
@@ -29,6 +29,7 @@ Optional properties:
 - vdda-pll-max-microamp : specifies max. load that can be drawn from pll supply
 - vddp-ref-clk-supply   : phandle to UFS device ref_clk pad power supply
 - vddp-ref-clk-max-microamp : specifies max. load that can be drawn from this supply
+- resets : specifies the PHY reset in the UFS controller
 
 Example:
 
@@ -51,9 +52,11 @@ Example:
 			<&clock_gcc clk_ufs_phy_ldo>,
 			<&clock_gcc clk_gcc_ufs_tx_cfg_clk>,
 			<&clock_gcc clk_gcc_ufs_rx_cfg_clk>;
+		resets = <&ufshc 0>;
 	};
 
-	ufshc@fc598000 {
+	ufshc: ufshc@fc598000 {
+		#reset-cells = <1>;
 		...
 		phys = <&ufsphy1>;
 		phy-names = "ufsphy";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ufs/ufshcd-pltfrm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ufs/ufshcd-pltfrm.txt
index 8cf59452c675..a74720486ee2 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ufs/ufshcd-pltfrm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ufs/ufshcd-pltfrm.txt
@@ -4,11 +4,15 @@ UFSHC nodes are defined to describe on-chip UFS host controllers.
 Each UFS controller instance should have its own node.
 
 Required properties:
-- compatible		: must contain "jedec,ufs-1.1" or "jedec,ufs-2.0", may
-			  also list one or more of the following:
-					  "qcom,msm8994-ufshc"
-					  "qcom,msm8996-ufshc"
-					  "qcom,ufshc"
+- compatible		: must contain "jedec,ufs-1.1" or "jedec,ufs-2.0"
+
+			  For Qualcomm SoCs must contain, as below, an
+			  SoC-specific compatible along with "qcom,ufshc" and
+			  the appropriate jedec string:
+			    "qcom,msm8994-ufshc", "qcom,ufshc", "jedec,ufs-2.0"
+			    "qcom,msm8996-ufshc", "qcom,ufshc", "jedec,ufs-2.0"
+			    "qcom,msm8998-ufshc", "qcom,ufshc", "jedec,ufs-2.0"
+			    "qcom,sdm845-ufshc", "qcom,ufshc", "jedec,ufs-2.0"
 - interrupts        : <interrupt mapping for UFS host controller IRQ>
 - reg               : <registers mapping>
 
@@ -28,7 +32,6 @@ Optional properties:
 - vcc-max-microamp      : specifies max. load that can be drawn from vcc supply
 - vccq-max-microamp     : specifies max. load that can be drawn from vccq supply
 - vccq2-max-microamp    : specifies max. load that can be drawn from vccq2 supply
-- <name>-fixed-regulator : boolean property specifying that <name>-supply is a fixed regulator
 
 - clocks                : List of phandle and clock specifier pairs
 - clock-names           : List of clock input name strings sorted in the same
@@ -47,6 +50,8 @@ Optional properties:
 -lanes-per-direction	: number of lanes available per direction - either 1 or 2.
 			  Note that it is assume same number of lanes is used both
 			  directions at once. If not specified, default is 2 lanes per direction.
+- #reset-cells		: Must be <1> for Qualcomm UFS controllers that expose
+			  PHY reset from the UFS controller.
 - resets            : reset node register
 - reset-names       : describe reset node register, the "rst" corresponds to reset the whole UFS IP.
 
@@ -60,7 +65,6 @@ Example:
 		interrupts = <0 28 0>;
 
 		vdd-hba-supply = <&xxx_reg0>;
-		vdd-hba-fixed-regulator;
 		vcc-supply = <&xxx_reg1>;
 		vcc-supply-1p8;
 		vccq-supply = <&xxx_reg2>;
@@ -76,4 +80,5 @@ Example:
 		reset-names = "rst";
 		phys = <&ufsphy1>;
 		phy-names = "ufsphy";
+		#reset-cells = <1>;
 	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/amlogic,dwc3.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/amlogic,dwc3.txt
index 9a8b631904fd..b9f04e617eb7 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/amlogic,dwc3.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/amlogic,dwc3.txt
@@ -40,3 +40,91 @@ Example device nodes:
 				phy-names = "usb2-phy", "usb3-phy";
 			};
 		};
+
+Amlogic Meson G12A DWC3 USB SoC Controller Glue
+
+The Amlogic G12A embeds a DWC3 USB IP Core configured for USB2 and USB3
+in host-only mode, and a DWC2 IP Core configured for USB2 peripheral mode
+only.
+
+A glue connects the DWC3 core to USB2 PHYs and optionnaly to an USB3 PHY.
+
+One of the USB2 PHY can be re-routed in peripheral mode to a DWC2 USB IP.
+
+The DWC3 Glue controls the PHY routing and power, an interrupt line is
+connected to the Glue to serve as OTG ID change detection.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible:	Should be "amlogic,meson-g12a-usb-ctrl"
+- clocks:	a handle for the "USB" clock
+- resets:	a handle for the shared "USB" reset line
+- reg:		The base address and length of the registers
+- interrupts:	the interrupt specifier for the OTG detection
+- phys: 	handle to used PHYs on the system
+	- a <0> phandle can be used if a PHY is not used
+- phy-names:	names of the used PHYs on the system :
+	- "usb2-phy0" for USB2 PHY0 if USBHOST_A port is used
+	- "usb2-phy1" for USB2 PHY1 if USBOTG_B port is used
+	- "usb3-phy0" for USB3 PHY if USB3_0 is used
+- dr_mode:	should be "host", "peripheral", or "otg" depending on
+	the usage and configuration of the OTG Capable port.
+	- "host" and "peripheral" means a fixed Host or Device only connection
+	- "otg" means the port can be used as both Host or Device and
+	  be switched automatically using the OTG ID pin.
+
+Optional properties:
+- vbus-supply:	should be a phandle to the regulator controlling the VBUS
+		power supply when used in OTG switchable mode
+
+Required child nodes:
+
+A child node must exist to represent the core DWC3 IP block. The name of
+the node is not important. The content of the node is defined in dwc3.txt.
+
+A child node must exist to represent the core DWC2 IP block. The name of
+the node is not important. The content of the node is defined in dwc2.txt.
+
+PHY documentation is provided in the following places:
+- Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/meson-g12a-usb2-phy.txt
+- Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/meson-g12a-usb3-pcie-phy.txt
+
+Example device nodes:
+	usb: usb@ffe09000 {
+			compatible = "amlogic,meson-g12a-usb-ctrl";
+			reg = <0x0 0xffe09000 0x0 0xa0>;
+			interrupts = <GIC_SPI 16 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
+			#address-cells = <2>;
+			#size-cells = <2>;
+			ranges;
+
+			clocks = <&clkc CLKID_USB>;
+			resets = <&reset RESET_USB>;
+
+			dr_mode = "otg";
+
+			phys = <&usb2_phy0>, <&usb2_phy1>,
+			       <&usb3_pcie_phy PHY_TYPE_USB3>;
+			phy-names = "usb2-phy0", "usb2-phy1", "usb3-phy0";
+
+			dwc2: usb@ff400000 {
+				compatible = "amlogic,meson-g12a-usb", "snps,dwc2";
+				reg = <0x0 0xff400000 0x0 0x40000>;
+				interrupts = <GIC_SPI 31 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
+				clocks = <&clkc CLKID_USB1_DDR_BRIDGE>;
+				clock-names = "ddr";
+				phys = <&usb2_phy1>;
+				dr_mode = "peripheral";
+				g-rx-fifo-size = <192>;
+				g-np-tx-fifo-size = <128>;
+				g-tx-fifo-size = <128 128 16 16 16>;
+			};
+
+			dwc3: usb@ff500000 {
+				compatible = "snps,dwc3";
+				reg = <0x0 0xff500000 0x0 0x100000>;
+				interrupts = <GIC_SPI 30 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
+				dr_mode = "host";
+				snps,dis_u2_susphy_quirk;
+				snps,quirk-frame-length-adjustment;
+			};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ci-hdrc-usb2.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ci-hdrc-usb2.txt
index adae82385dd6..a254386a91ad 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ci-hdrc-usb2.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ci-hdrc-usb2.txt
@@ -93,6 +93,7 @@ i.mx specific properties
 - over-current-active-low: over current signal polarity is active low.
 - over-current-active-high: over current signal polarity is active high.
   It's recommended to specify the over current polarity.
+- power-active-high: power signal polarity is active high
 - external-vbus-divider: enables off-chip resistor divider for Vbus
 
 Example:
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/dwc2.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/dwc2.txt
index 6dc3c4a34483..49eac0dc86b0 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/dwc2.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/dwc2.txt
@@ -14,6 +14,7 @@ Required properties:
   - "amlogic,meson8-usb": The DWC2 USB controller instance in Amlogic Meson8 SoCs;
   - "amlogic,meson8b-usb": The DWC2 USB controller instance in Amlogic Meson8b SoCs;
   - "amlogic,meson-gxbb-usb": The DWC2 USB controller instance in Amlogic S905 SoCs;
+  - "amlogic,meson-g12a-usb": The DWC2 USB controller instance in Amlogic G12A SoCs;
   - "amcc,dwc-otg": The DWC2 USB controller instance in AMCC Canyonlands 460EX SoCs;
   - snps,dwc2: A generic DWC2 USB controller with default parameters.
   - "st,stm32f4x9-fsotg": The DWC2 USB FS/HS controller instance in STM32F4x9 SoCs
@@ -31,12 +32,18 @@ Refer to clk/clock-bindings.txt for generic clock consumer properties
 Optional properties:
 - phys: phy provider specifier
 - phy-names: shall be "usb2-phy"
+- vbus-supply: reference to the VBUS regulator. Depending on the current mode
+  this is enabled (in "host" mode") or disabled (in "peripheral" mode). The
+  regulator is updated if the controller is configured in "otg" mode and the
+  status changes between "host" and "peripheral".
 Refer to phy/phy-bindings.txt for generic phy consumer properties
 - dr_mode: shall be one of "host", "peripheral" and "otg"
   Refer to usb/generic.txt
 - g-rx-fifo-size: size of rx fifo size in gadget mode.
 - g-np-tx-fifo-size: size of non-periodic tx fifo size in gadget mode.
 - g-tx-fifo-size: size of periodic tx fifo per endpoint (except ep0) in gadget mode.
+- snps,reset-phy-on-wake: If present indicates that we need to reset the PHY when
+                          we detect a wakeup.  This is due to a hardware errata.
 
 Deprecated properties:
 - g-use-dma: gadget DMA mode is automatically detected
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/generic-ehci.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/generic-ehci.yaml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d3b4f6415920
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/generic-ehci.yaml
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+%YAML 1.2
+---
+$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/usb/generic-ehci.yaml#
+$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml#
+
+title: USB EHCI Controller Device Tree Bindings
+
+allOf:
+  - $ref: "usb-hcd.yaml"
+
+maintainers:
+  - Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org>
+
+properties:
+  compatible:
+    contains:
+      const: generic-ehci
+
+  reg:
+    maxItems: 1
+
+  interrupts:
+    maxItems: 1
+
+  resets:
+    minItems: 1
+    maxItems: 4
+
+  clocks:
+    minItems: 1
+    maxItems: 4
+    description: |
+      In case the Renesas R-Car Gen3 SoCs:
+        - if a host only channel: first clock should be host.
+        - if a USB DRD channel: first clock should be host and second
+          one should be peripheral
+
+  big-endian:
+    $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/flag
+    description:
+      Set this flag for HCDs with big endian descriptors and big
+      endian registers.
+
+  big-endian-desc:
+    $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/flag
+    description:
+      Set this flag for HCDs with big endian descriptors.
+
+  big-endian-regs:
+    $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/flag
+    description:
+      Set this flag for HCDs with big endian registers.
+
+  has-transaction-translator:
+    $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/flag
+    description:
+      Set this flag if EHCI has a Transaction Translator built into
+      the root hub.
+
+  needs-reset-on-resume:
+    $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/flag
+    description:
+      Set this flag to force EHCI reset after resume.
+
+  phys: true
+
+required:
+  - compatible
+  - reg
+  - interrupts
+
+additionalProperties: false
+
+examples:
+  - |
+    ehci@e0000300 {
+        compatible = "ibm,usb-ehci-440epx", "generic-ehci";
+        interrupt-parent = <&UIC0>;
+        interrupts = <0x1a 4>;
+        reg = <0 0xe0000300 90 0 0xe0000390 70>;
+        big-endian;
+    };
+
+  - |
+    ehci0: usb@1c14000 {
+        compatible = "allwinner,sun4i-a10-ehci", "generic-ehci";
+        reg = <0x01c14000 0x100>;
+        interrupts = <39>;
+        clocks = <&ahb_gates 1>;
+        phys = <&usbphy 1>;
+        phy-names = "usb";
+    };
+
+...
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/generic-ohci.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/generic-ohci.yaml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..da5a14becbe5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/generic-ohci.yaml
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+%YAML 1.2
+---
+$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/usb/generic-ohci.yaml#
+$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml#
+
+title: USB OHCI Controller Device Tree Bindings
+
+allOf:
+  - $ref: "usb-hcd.yaml"
+
+maintainers:
+  - Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org>
+
+properties:
+  compatible:
+    contains:
+      const: generic-ohci
+
+  reg:
+    maxItems: 1
+
+  interrupts:
+    maxItems: 1
+
+  resets:
+    minItems: 1
+    maxItems: 2
+
+  clocks:
+    minItems: 1
+    maxItems: 3
+    description: |
+      In case the Renesas R-Car Gen3 SoCs:
+        - if a host only channel: first clock should be host.
+        - if a USB DRD channel: first clock should be host and second
+          one should be peripheral
+
+  big-endian:
+    $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/flag
+    description:
+      Set this flag for HCDs with big endian descriptors and big
+      endian registers.
+
+  big-endian-desc:
+    $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/flag
+    description:
+      Set this flag for HCDs with big endian descriptors.
+
+  big-endian-regs:
+    $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/flag
+    description:
+      Set this flag for HCDs with big endian registers.
+
+  remote-wakeup-connected:
+    $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/flag
+    description:
+      Remote wakeup is wired on the platform.
+
+  no-big-frame-no:
+    $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/flag
+    description:
+      Set if frame_no lives in bits [15:0] of HCCA
+
+  num-ports:
+    $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32
+    description:
+      Overrides the detected port count
+
+  phys: true
+
+required:
+  - compatible
+  - reg
+  - interrupts
+
+additionalProperties: false
+
+examples:
+  - |
+      ohci0: usb@1c14400 {
+          compatible = "allwinner,sun4i-a10-ohci", "generic-ohci";
+          reg = <0x01c14400 0x100>;
+          interrupts = <64>;
+          clocks = <&usb_clk 6>, <&ahb_gates 2>;
+          phys = <&usbphy 1>;
+      };
+
+...
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ingenic,jz4740-musb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ingenic,jz4740-musb.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..16808721f3ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ingenic,jz4740-musb.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+Ingenic JZ4740 MUSB driver
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible: Must be "ingenic,jz4740-musb"
+- reg: Address range of the UDC register set
+- interrupts: IRQ number related to the UDC hardware
+- interrupt-names: must be "mc"
+- clocks: phandle to the "udc" clock
+- clock-names: must be "udc"
+- phys: phandle to the USB PHY
+
+Example:
+
+usb_phy: usb-phy@0 {
+	compatible = "usb-nop-xceiv";
+	#phy-cells = <0>;
+};
+
+udc: usb@13040000 {
+	compatible = "ingenic,jz4740-musb";
+	reg = <0x13040000 0x10000>;
+
+	interrupt-parent = <&intc>;
+	interrupts = <24>;
+	interrupt-names = "mc";
+
+	clocks = <&cgu JZ4740_CLK_UDC>;
+	clock-names = "udc";
+
+	phys = <&usb_phy>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/keystone-usb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/keystone-usb.txt
index f96e09f784cc..77df82e36138 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/keystone-usb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/keystone-usb.txt
@@ -3,7 +3,9 @@ TI Keystone Soc USB Controller
 DWC3 GLUE
 
 Required properties:
- - compatible: should be "ti,keystone-dwc3".
+ - compatible: should be
+		"ti,keystone-dwc3" for Keystone 2 SoCs
+		"ti,am654-dwc3" for AM654 SoC
  - #address-cells, #size-cells : should be '1' if the device has sub-nodes
    with 'reg' property.
  - reg : Address and length of the register set for the USB subsystem on
@@ -21,7 +23,7 @@ SoCs only:
 - clock-names:		Must be "usb".
 
 
-The following are mandatory properties for Keystone 2 66AK2G SoCs only:
+The following are mandatory properties for 66AK2G and AM654:
 
 - power-domains:	Should contain a phandle to a PM domain provider node
 			and an args specifier containing the USB device id
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/nvidia,tegra124-xusb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/nvidia,tegra124-xusb.txt
index 4156c3e181c5..5bfcc0b4d6b9 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/nvidia,tegra124-xusb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/nvidia,tegra124-xusb.txt
@@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ Required properties:
   - Tegra124: "nvidia,tegra124-xusb"
   - Tegra132: "nvidia,tegra132-xusb", "nvidia,tegra124-xusb"
   - Tegra210: "nvidia,tegra210-xusb"
+  - Tegra186: "nvidia,tegra186-xusb"
 - reg: Must contain the base and length of the xHCI host registers, XUSB FPCI
   registers and XUSB IPFS registers.
 - reg-names: Must contain the following entries:
@@ -59,6 +60,8 @@ For Tegra210:
 - avdd-pll-uerefe-supply: PLLE reference PLL power supply. Must supply 1.05 V.
 - dvdd-pex-pll-supply: PCIe/USB3 PLL power supply. Must supply 1.05 V.
 - hvdd-pex-pll-e-supply: High-voltage PLLE power supply. Must supply 1.8 V.
+
+For Tegra210 and Tegra186:
 - power-domains: A list of PM domain specifiers that reference each power-domain
   used by the xHCI controller. This list must comprise of a specifier for the
   XUSBA and XUSBC power-domains. See ../power/power_domain.txt and
@@ -78,6 +81,7 @@ Optional properties:
   - Tegra132: usb2-0, usb2-1, usb2-2, hsic-0, hsic-1, usb3-0, usb3-1
   - Tegra210: usb2-0, usb2-1, usb2-2, usb2-3, hsic-0, usb3-0, usb3-1, usb3-2,
               usb3-3
+  - Tegra186: usb2-0, usb2-1, usb2-2, hsic-0, usb3-0, usb3-1, usb3-2
 
 Example:
 --------
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/qcom,dwc3.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/qcom,dwc3.txt
index 95afdcf3c337..cb695aa3fba4 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/qcom,dwc3.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/qcom,dwc3.txt
@@ -4,6 +4,7 @@ Required properties:
 - compatible:		Compatible list, contains
 			"qcom,dwc3"
 			"qcom,msm8996-dwc3" for msm8996 SOC.
+			"qcom,msm8998-dwc3" for msm8998 SOC.
 			"qcom,sdm845-dwc3" for sdm845 SOC.
 - reg:			Offset and length of register set for QSCRATCH wrapper
 - power-domains:	specifies a phandle to PM domain provider node
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/renesas_usb3.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/renesas_usb3.txt
index d366555166d0..35039e720515 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/renesas_usb3.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/renesas_usb3.txt
@@ -3,6 +3,7 @@ Renesas Electronics USB3.0 Peripheral driver
 Required properties:
   - compatible: Must contain one of the following:
 	- "renesas,r8a774a1-usb3-peri"
+	- "renesas,r8a774c0-usb3-peri"
 	- "renesas,r8a7795-usb3-peri"
 	- "renesas,r8a7796-usb3-peri"
 	- "renesas,r8a77965-usb3-peri"
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/renesas_usbhs.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/renesas_usbhs.txt
index 90719f501852..b8acc2a994a8 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/renesas_usbhs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/renesas_usbhs.txt
@@ -6,7 +6,9 @@ Required properties:
 	- "renesas,usbhs-r8a7743" for r8a7743 (RZ/G1M) compatible device
 	- "renesas,usbhs-r8a7744" for r8a7744 (RZ/G1N) compatible device
 	- "renesas,usbhs-r8a7745" for r8a7745 (RZ/G1E) compatible device
+	- "renesas,usbhs-r8a77470" for r8a77470 (RZ/G1C) compatible device
 	- "renesas,usbhs-r8a774a1" for r8a774a1 (RZ/G2M) compatible device
+	- "renesas,usbhs-r8a774c0" for r8a774c0 (RZ/G2E) compatible device
 	- "renesas,usbhs-r8a7790" for r8a7790 (R-Car H2) compatible device
 	- "renesas,usbhs-r8a7791" for r8a7791 (R-Car M2-W) compatible device
 	- "renesas,usbhs-r8a7792" for r8a7792 (R-Car V2H) compatible device
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-ehci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-ehci.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 406252d14c6b..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-ehci.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
-USB EHCI controllers
-
-Required properties:
-  - compatible : should be "generic-ehci".
-  - reg : should contain at least address and length of the standard EHCI
-    register set for the device. Optional platform-dependent registers
-    (debug-port or other) can be also specified here, but only after
-    definition of standard EHCI registers.
-  - interrupts : one EHCI interrupt should be described here.
-
-Optional properties:
- - big-endian-regs : boolean, set this for hcds with big-endian registers
- - big-endian-desc : boolean, set this for hcds with big-endian descriptors
- - big-endian : boolean, for hcds with big-endian-regs + big-endian-desc
- - needs-reset-on-resume : boolean, set this to force EHCI reset after resume
- - has-transaction-translator : boolean, set this if EHCI have a Transaction
-				Translator built into the root hub.
- - clocks : a list of phandle + clock specifier pairs. In case of Renesas
-	    R-Car Gen3 SoCs:
-	    - if a host only channel: first clock should be host.
-	    - if a USB DRD channel: first clock should be host and second one
-				    should be peripheral.
- - phys : see usb-hcd.txt in the current directory
- - resets : phandle + reset specifier pair
-
-additionally the properties from usb-hcd.txt (in the current directory) are
-supported.
-
-Example (Sequoia 440EPx):
-    ehci@e0000300 {
-	   compatible = "ibm,usb-ehci-440epx", "usb-ehci";
-	   interrupt-parent = <&UIC0>;
-	   interrupts = <1a 4>;
-	   reg = <0 e0000300 90 0 e0000390 70>;
-	   big-endian;
-   };
-
-Example (Allwinner sun4i A10 SoC):
-   ehci0: usb@1c14000 {
-	   compatible = "allwinner,sun4i-a10-ehci", "generic-ehci";
-	   reg = <0x01c14000 0x100>;
-	   interrupts = <39>;
-	   clocks = <&ahb_gates 1>;
-	   phys = <&usbphy 1>;
-	   phy-names = "usb";
-   };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-hcd.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-hcd.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 50529b838c9c..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-hcd.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-Generic USB HCD (Host Controller Device) Properties
-
-Optional properties:
-- phys: a list of all USB PHYs on this HCD
-
-Example:
-	&usb1 {
-		phys = <&usb2_phy1>, <&usb3_phy1>;
-	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-hcd.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-hcd.yaml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9c8c56d3a792
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-hcd.yaml
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+%YAML 1.2
+---
+$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/usb/usb-hcd.yaml#
+$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml#
+
+title: Generic USB Host Controller Device Tree Bindings
+
+maintainers:
+  - Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org>
+
+properties:
+  $nodename:
+    pattern: "^usb(@.*)?"
+
+  phys:
+    $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/phandle-array
+    description:
+      List of all the USB PHYs on this HCD
+
+examples:
+  - |
+    usb {
+        phys = <&usb2_phy1>, <&usb3_phy1>;
+    };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-ohci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-ohci.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index aaaa5255c972..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-ohci.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,35 +0,0 @@
-USB OHCI controllers
-
-Required properties:
-- compatible : "generic-ohci"
-- reg : ohci controller register range (address and length)
-- interrupts : ohci controller interrupt
-
-Optional properties:
-- big-endian-regs : boolean, set this for hcds with big-endian registers
-- big-endian-desc : boolean, set this for hcds with big-endian descriptors
-- big-endian : boolean, for hcds with big-endian-regs + big-endian-desc
-- no-big-frame-no : boolean, set if frame_no lives in bits [15:0] of HCCA
-- remote-wakeup-connected: remote wakeup is wired on the platform
-- num-ports : u32, to override the detected port count
-- clocks : a list of phandle + clock specifier pairs. In case of Renesas
-	   R-Car Gen3 SoCs:
-	   - if a host only channel: first clock should be host.
-	   - if a USB DRD channel: first clock should be host and second one
-				   should be peripheral.
-- phys : see usb-hcd.txt in the current directory
-- resets : a list of phandle + reset specifier pairs
-
-additionally the properties from usb-hcd.txt (in the current directory) are
-supported.
-
-Example:
-
-	ohci0: usb@1c14400 {
-		compatible = "allwinner,sun4i-a10-ohci", "generic-ohci";
-		reg = <0x01c14400 0x100>;
-		interrupts = <64>;
-		clocks = <&usb_clk 6>, <&ahb_gates 2>;
-		phys = <&usbphy 1>;
-		phy-names = "usb";
-	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-xhci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-xhci.txt
index fea8b1545751..97400e8f8605 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-xhci.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-xhci.txt
@@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ Required properties:
     - "renesas,xhci-r8a7743" for r8a7743 SoC
     - "renesas,xhci-r8a7744" for r8a7744 SoC
     - "renesas,xhci-r8a774a1" for r8a774a1 SoC
+    - "renesas,xhci-r8a774c0" for r8a774c0 SoC
     - "renesas,xhci-r8a7790" for r8a7790 SoC
     - "renesas,xhci-r8a7791" for r8a7791 SoC
     - "renesas,xhci-r8a7793" for r8a7793 SoC
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb251xb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb251xb.txt
index 168ff819e827..bc7945e9dbfe 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb251xb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb251xb.txt
@@ -64,6 +64,10 @@ Optional properties :
  - power-on-time-ms : Specifies the time it takes from the time the host
 	initiates the power-on sequence to a port until the port has adequate
 	power. The value is given in ms in a 0 - 510 range (default is 100ms).
+ - swap-dx-lanes : Specifies the downstream ports which will swap the
+	differential-pair (D+/D-), default is not-swapped.
+ - swap-us-lanes : Selects the upstream port differential-pair (D+/D-)
+	swapping (boolean, default is not-swapped)
 
 Examples:
 	usb2512b@2c {
@@ -81,4 +85,6 @@ Examples:
 		manufacturer = "Foo";
 		product = "Foo-Bar";
 		serial = "1234567890A";
+		/* correct misplaced usb connectors on port 1,2 */
+		swap-dx-lanes = <1 2>;
 	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 389508584f48..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,449 +0,0 @@
-Device tree binding vendor prefix registry.  Keep list in alphabetical order.
-
-This isn't an exhaustive list, but you should add new prefixes to it before
-using them to avoid name-space collisions.
-
-abilis	Abilis Systems
-abracon	Abracon Corporation
-actions	Actions Semiconductor Co., Ltd.
-active-semi	Active-Semi International Inc
-ad	Avionic Design GmbH
-adafruit	Adafruit Industries, LLC
-adapteva	Adapteva, Inc.
-adaptrum	Adaptrum, Inc.
-adh	AD Holdings Plc.
-adi	Analog Devices, Inc.
-advantech	Advantech Corporation
-aeroflexgaisler	Aeroflex Gaisler AB
-al	Annapurna Labs
-allo	Allo.com
-allwinner	Allwinner Technology Co., Ltd.
-alphascale	AlphaScale Integrated Circuits Systems, Inc.
-altr	Altera Corp.
-amarula	Amarula Solutions
-amazon	Amazon.com, Inc.
-amcc	Applied Micro Circuits Corporation (APM, formally AMCC)
-amd	Advanced Micro Devices (AMD), Inc.
-amlogic	Amlogic, Inc.
-ampire	Ampire Co., Ltd.
-ams	AMS AG
-amstaos	AMS-Taos Inc.
-analogix	Analogix Semiconductor, Inc.
-andestech	Andes Technology Corporation
-apm	Applied Micro Circuits Corporation (APM)
-aptina	Aptina Imaging
-arasan	Arasan Chip Systems
-archermind ArcherMind Technology (Nanjing) Co., Ltd.
-arctic	Arctic Sand
-aries	Aries Embedded GmbH
-arm	ARM Ltd.
-armadeus	ARMadeus Systems SARL
-arrow	Arrow Electronics
-artesyn	Artesyn Embedded Technologies Inc.
-asahi-kasei	Asahi Kasei Corp.
-aspeed	ASPEED Technology Inc.
-asus	AsusTek Computer Inc.
-atlas	Atlas Scientific LLC
-atmel	Atmel Corporation
-auo	AU Optronics Corporation
-auvidea Auvidea GmbH
-avago	Avago Technologies
-avia	avia semiconductor
-avic	Shanghai AVIC Optoelectronics Co., Ltd.
-avnet	Avnet, Inc.
-axentia	Axentia Technologies AB
-axis	Axis Communications AB
-bananapi BIPAI KEJI LIMITED
-bhf	Beckhoff Automation GmbH & Co. KG
-bitmain	Bitmain Technologies
-boe	BOE Technology Group Co., Ltd.
-bosch	Bosch Sensortec GmbH
-boundary	Boundary Devices Inc.
-brcm	Broadcom Corporation
-buffalo	Buffalo, Inc.
-bticino Bticino International
-calxeda	Calxeda
-capella	Capella Microsystems, Inc
-cascoda	Cascoda, Ltd.
-cavium	Cavium, Inc.
-cdns	Cadence Design Systems Inc.
-cdtech	CDTech(H.K.) Electronics Limited
-ceva	Ceva, Inc.
-chipidea	Chipidea, Inc
-chipone		ChipOne
-chipspark	ChipSPARK
-chrp	Common Hardware Reference Platform
-chunghwa	Chunghwa Picture Tubes Ltd.
-ciaa	Computadora Industrial Abierta Argentina
-cirrus	Cirrus Logic, Inc.
-cloudengines	Cloud Engines, Inc.
-cnm	Chips&Media, Inc.
-cnxt	Conexant Systems, Inc.
-compulab	CompuLab Ltd.
-cortina	Cortina Systems, Inc.
-cosmic	Cosmic Circuits
-crane	Crane Connectivity Solutions
-creative	Creative Technology Ltd
-crystalfontz	Crystalfontz America, Inc.
-csky	Hangzhou C-SKY Microsystems Co., Ltd
-cubietech	Cubietech, Ltd.
-cypress	Cypress Semiconductor Corporation
-cznic	CZ.NIC, z.s.p.o.
-dallas	Maxim Integrated Products (formerly Dallas Semiconductor)
-dataimage	DataImage, Inc.
-davicom	DAVICOM Semiconductor, Inc.
-delta	Delta Electronics, Inc.
-denx	Denx Software Engineering
-devantech	Devantech, Ltd.
-dh	DH electronics GmbH
-digi	Digi International Inc.
-digilent	Diglent, Inc.
-dioo	Dioo Microcircuit Co., Ltd
-dlc	DLC Display Co., Ltd.
-dlg	Dialog Semiconductor
-dlink	D-Link Corporation
-dmo	Data Modul AG
-domintech	Domintech Co., Ltd.
-dongwoon	Dongwoon Anatech
-dptechnics	DPTechnics
-dragino	Dragino Technology Co., Limited
-ea	Embedded Artists AB
-ebv	EBV Elektronik
-eckelmann	Eckelmann AG
-edt	Emerging Display Technologies
-eeti	eGalax_eMPIA Technology Inc
-elan	Elan Microelectronic Corp.
-embest	Shenzhen Embest Technology Co., Ltd.
-emlid	Emlid, Ltd.
-emmicro	EM Microelectronic
-emtrion	emtrion GmbH
-endless	Endless Mobile, Inc.
-energymicro	Silicon Laboratories (formerly Energy Micro AS)
-engicam	Engicam S.r.l.
-epcos	EPCOS AG
-epfl	Ecole Polytechnique Fédérale de Lausanne
-epson	Seiko Epson Corp.
-est	ESTeem Wireless Modems
-ettus	NI Ettus Research
-eukrea  Eukréa Electromatique
-everest	Everest Semiconductor Co. Ltd.
-everspin	Everspin Technologies, Inc.
-exar	Exar Corporation
-excito	Excito
-ezchip	EZchip Semiconductor
-facebook	Facebook
-fairphone	Fairphone B.V.
-faraday	Faraday Technology Corporation
-fastrax	Fastrax Oy
-fcs	Fairchild Semiconductor
-firefly	Firefly
-focaltech	FocalTech Systems Co.,Ltd
-friendlyarm	Guangzhou FriendlyARM Computer Tech Co., Ltd
-fsl	Freescale Semiconductor
-fujitsu	Fujitsu Ltd.
-gcw Game Consoles Worldwide
-ge	General Electric Company
-geekbuying	GeekBuying
-gef	GE Fanuc Intelligent Platforms Embedded Systems, Inc.
-GEFanuc	GE Fanuc Intelligent Platforms Embedded Systems, Inc.
-geniatech	Geniatech, Inc.
-giantec	Giantec Semiconductor, Inc.
-giantplus	Giantplus Technology Co., Ltd.
-globalscale	Globalscale Technologies, Inc.
-gmt	Global Mixed-mode Technology, Inc.
-goodix	Shenzhen Huiding Technology Co., Ltd.
-google	Google, Inc.
-grinn	Grinn
-grmn	Garmin Limited
-gumstix	Gumstix, Inc.
-gw	Gateworks Corporation
-hannstar	HannStar Display Corporation
-haoyu	Haoyu Microelectronic Co. Ltd.
-hardkernel	Hardkernel Co., Ltd
-hideep	HiDeep Inc.
-himax	Himax Technologies, Inc.
-hisilicon	Hisilicon Limited.
-hit	Hitachi Ltd.
-hitex	Hitex Development Tools
-holt	Holt Integrated Circuits, Inc.
-honeywell	Honeywell
-hp	Hewlett Packard
-holtek	Holtek Semiconductor, Inc.
-hwacom	HwaCom Systems Inc.
-i2se	I2SE GmbH
-ibm	International Business Machines (IBM)
-icplus	IC Plus Corp.
-idt	Integrated Device Technologies, Inc.
-ifi	Ingenieurburo Fur Ic-Technologie (I/F/I)
-ilitek	ILI Technology Corporation (ILITEK)
-img	Imagination Technologies Ltd.
-infineon Infineon Technologies
-inforce	Inforce Computing
-ingenic	Ingenic Semiconductor
-innolux	Innolux Corporation
-inside-secure	INSIDE Secure
-intel	Intel Corporation
-intercontrol	Inter Control Group
-invensense	InvenSense Inc.
-inversepath	Inverse Path
-iom	Iomega Corporation
-isee	ISEE 2007 S.L.
-isil	Intersil
-issi	Integrated Silicon Solutions Inc.
-itead	ITEAD Intelligent Systems Co.Ltd
-iwave  iWave Systems Technologies Pvt. Ltd.
-jdi	Japan Display Inc.
-jedec	JEDEC Solid State Technology Association
-jianda	Jiandangjing Technology Co., Ltd.
-karo	Ka-Ro electronics GmbH
-keithkoep	Keith & Koep GmbH
-keymile	Keymile GmbH
-khadas	Khadas
-kiebackpeter    Kieback & Peter GmbH
-kinetic Kinetic Technologies
-kingdisplay	King & Display Technology Co., Ltd.
-kingnovel	Kingnovel Technology Co., Ltd.
-koe	Kaohsiung Opto-Electronics Inc.
-kosagi	Sutajio Ko-Usagi PTE Ltd.
-kyo	Kyocera Corporation
-lacie	LaCie
-laird	Laird PLC
-lantiq	Lantiq Semiconductor
-lattice	Lattice Semiconductor
-lego	LEGO Systems A/S
-lenovo	Lenovo Group Ltd.
-lg	LG Corporation
-libretech	Shenzhen Libre Technology Co., Ltd
-licheepi	Lichee Pi
-linaro	Linaro Limited
-linksys	Belkin International, Inc. (Linksys)
-linux	Linux-specific binding
-linx	Linx Technologies
-lltc	Linear Technology Corporation
-logicpd	Logic PD, Inc.
-lsi	LSI Corp. (LSI Logic)
-lwn	Liebherr-Werk Nenzing GmbH
-macnica	Macnica Americas
-marvell	Marvell Technology Group Ltd.
-maxim	Maxim Integrated Products
-mbvl	Mobiveil Inc.
-mcube	mCube
-meas	Measurement Specialties
-mediatek	MediaTek Inc.
-megachips	MegaChips
-mele	Shenzhen MeLE Digital Technology Ltd.
-melexis	Melexis N.V.
-melfas	MELFAS Inc.
-mellanox	Mellanox Technologies
-memsic	MEMSIC Inc.
-merrii	Merrii Technology Co., Ltd.
-micrel	Micrel Inc.
-microchip	Microchip Technology Inc.
-microcrystal	Micro Crystal AG
-micron	Micron Technology Inc.
-mikroe		MikroElektronika d.o.o.
-minix	MINIX Technology Ltd.
-miramems	MiraMEMS Sensing Technology Co., Ltd.
-mitsubishi	Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
-mosaixtech	Mosaix Technologies, Inc.
-motorola	Motorola, Inc.
-moxa	Moxa Inc.
-mpl	MPL AG
-mqmaker	mqmaker Inc.
-mscc	Microsemi Corporation
-msi	Micro-Star International Co. Ltd.
-mti	Imagination Technologies Ltd. (formerly MIPS Technologies Inc.)
-multi-inno	Multi-Inno Technology Co.,Ltd
-mundoreader	Mundo Reader S.L.
-murata	Murata Manufacturing Co., Ltd.
-mxicy	Macronix International Co., Ltd.
-myir	MYIR Tech Limited
-national	National Semiconductor
-nec	NEC LCD Technologies, Ltd.
-neonode		Neonode Inc.
-netgear	NETGEAR
-netlogic	Broadcom Corporation (formerly NetLogic Microsystems)
-netron-dy	Netron DY
-netxeon		Shenzhen Netxeon Technology CO., LTD
-nexbox	Nexbox
-nextthing	Next Thing Co.
-newhaven	Newhaven Display International
-ni	National Instruments
-nintendo	Nintendo
-nlt	NLT Technologies, Ltd.
-nokia	Nokia
-nordic	Nordic Semiconductor
-nutsboard	NutsBoard
-nuvoton	Nuvoton Technology Corporation
-nvd	New Vision Display
-nvidia	NVIDIA
-nxp	NXP Semiconductors
-okaya	Okaya Electric America, Inc.
-oki	Oki Electric Industry Co., Ltd.
-olimex	OLIMEX Ltd.
-olpc	One Laptop Per Child
-onion	Onion Corporation
-onnn	ON Semiconductor Corp.
-ontat	On Tat Industrial Company
-opalkelly	Opal Kelly Incorporated
-opencores	OpenCores.org
-openrisc	OpenRISC.io
-option	Option NV
-oranth	Shenzhen Oranth Technology Co., Ltd.
-ORCL	Oracle Corporation
-orisetech	Orise Technology
-ortustech	Ortus Technology Co., Ltd.
-ovti	OmniVision Technologies
-oxsemi	Oxford Semiconductor, Ltd.
-panasonic	Panasonic Corporation
-parade	Parade Technologies Inc.
-pericom	Pericom Technology Inc.
-pervasive	Pervasive Displays, Inc.
-phicomm PHICOMM Co., Ltd.
-phytec	PHYTEC Messtechnik GmbH
-picochip	Picochip Ltd
-pine64	Pine64
-pixcir  PIXCIR MICROELECTRONICS Co., Ltd
-plathome	Plat'Home Co., Ltd.
-plda	PLDA
-plx	Broadcom Corporation (formerly PLX Technology)
-pni	PNI Sensor Corporation
-portwell	Portwell Inc.
-poslab	Poslab Technology Co., Ltd.
-powervr	PowerVR (deprecated, use img)
-probox2	PROBOX2 (by W2COMP Co., Ltd.)
-pulsedlight	PulsedLight, Inc
-qca	Qualcomm Atheros, Inc.
-qcom	Qualcomm Technologies, Inc
-qemu	QEMU, a generic and open source machine emulator and virtualizer
-qi	Qi Hardware
-qiaodian	QiaoDian XianShi Corporation
-qnap	QNAP Systems, Inc.
-radxa	Radxa
-raidsonic	RaidSonic Technology GmbH
-ralink	Mediatek/Ralink Technology Corp.
-ramtron	Ramtron International
-raspberrypi	Raspberry Pi Foundation
-raydium	Raydium Semiconductor Corp.
-rda	Unisoc Communications, Inc.
-realtek Realtek Semiconductor Corp.
-renesas	Renesas Electronics Corporation
-richtek	Richtek Technology Corporation
-ricoh	Ricoh Co. Ltd.
-rikomagic	Rikomagic Tech Corp. Ltd
-riscv	RISC-V Foundation
-rockchip	Fuzhou Rockchip Electronics Co., Ltd
-rohm	ROHM Semiconductor Co., Ltd
-roofull	Shenzhen Roofull Technology Co, Ltd
-samsung	Samsung Semiconductor
-samtec	Samtec/Softing company
-sancloud	Sancloud Ltd
-sandisk	Sandisk Corporation
-sbs	Smart Battery System
-schindler	Schindler
-seagate	Seagate Technology PLC
-semtech	Semtech Corporation
-sensirion	Sensirion AG
-sff	Small Form Factor Committee
-sgd	Solomon Goldentek Display Corporation
-sgx	SGX Sensortech
-sharp	Sharp Corporation
-shimafuji	Shimafuji Electric, Inc.
-si-en	Si-En Technology Ltd.
-sifive	SiFive, Inc.
-sigma	Sigma Designs, Inc.
-sii	Seiko Instruments, Inc.
-sil	Silicon Image
-silabs	Silicon Laboratories
-silead	Silead Inc.
-silergy	Silergy Corp.
-siliconmitus	Silicon Mitus, Inc.
-simtek
-sirf	SiRF Technology, Inc.
-sis	Silicon Integrated Systems Corp.
-sitronix	Sitronix Technology Corporation
-skyworks	Skyworks Solutions, Inc.
-smsc	Standard Microsystems Corporation
-snps	Synopsys, Inc.
-socionext	Socionext Inc.
-solidrun	SolidRun
-solomon        Solomon Systech Limited
-sony	Sony Corporation
-spansion	Spansion Inc.
-sprd	Spreadtrum Communications Inc.
-sst	Silicon Storage Technology, Inc.
-st	STMicroelectronics
-starry	Starry Electronic Technology (ShenZhen) Co., LTD
-startek	Startek
-ste	ST-Ericsson
-stericsson	ST-Ericsson
-summit	Summit microelectronics
-sunchip	Shenzhen Sunchip Technology Co., Ltd
-SUNW	Sun Microsystems, Inc
-swir	Sierra Wireless
-syna	Synaptics Inc.
-synology	Synology, Inc.
-tbs	TBS Technologies
-tbs-biometrics	Touchless Biometric Systems AG
-tcg	Trusted Computing Group
-tcl	Toby Churchill Ltd.
-technexion	TechNexion
-technologic	Technologic Systems
-tempo	Tempo Semiconductor
-terasic	Terasic Inc.
-thine	THine Electronics, Inc.
-ti	Texas Instruments
-tianma	Tianma Micro-electronics Co., Ltd.
-tlm	Trusted Logic Mobility
-tmt	Tecon Microprocessor Technologies, LLC.
-topeet  Topeet
-toradex	Toradex AG
-toshiba	Toshiba Corporation
-toumaz	Toumaz
-tpk	TPK U.S.A. LLC
-tplink	TP-LINK Technologies Co., Ltd.
-tpo	TPO
-tronfy	Tronfy
-tronsmart	Tronsmart
-truly	Truly Semiconductors Limited
-tsd	Theobroma Systems Design und Consulting GmbH
-tyan	Tyan Computer Corporation
-u-blox	u-blox
-ucrobotics	uCRobotics
-ubnt	Ubiquiti Networks
-udoo	Udoo
-uniwest	United Western Technologies Corp (UniWest)
-upisemi	uPI Semiconductor Corp.
-urt	United Radiant Technology Corporation
-usi	Universal Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd.
-v3	V3 Semiconductor
-vamrs	Vamrs Ltd.
-variscite	Variscite Ltd.
-via	VIA Technologies, Inc.
-virtio	Virtual I/O Device Specification, developed by the OASIS consortium
-vishay	Vishay Intertechnology, Inc
-vitesse	Vitesse Semiconductor Corporation
-vivante	Vivante Corporation
-vocore VoCore Studio
-voipac	Voipac Technologies s.r.o.
-vot	Vision Optical Technology Co., Ltd.
-wd	Western Digital Corp.
-wetek	WeTek Electronics, limited.
-wexler	Wexler
-wi2wi	Wi2Wi, Inc.
-winbond Winbond Electronics corp.
-winstar	Winstar Display Corp.
-wlf	Wolfson Microelectronics
-wm	Wondermedia Technologies, Inc.
-x-powers	X-Powers
-xes	Extreme Engineering Solutions (X-ES)
-xillybus	Xillybus Ltd.
-xlnx	Xilinx
-xunlong	Shenzhen Xunlong Software CO.,Limited
-ysoft	Y Soft Corporation a.s.
-zarlink	Zarlink Semiconductor
-zeitec	ZEITEC Semiconductor Co., LTD.
-zidoo	Shenzhen Zidoo Technology Co., Ltd.
-zii	Zodiac Inflight Innovations
-zte	ZTE Corp.
-zyxel	ZyXEL Communications Corp.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.yaml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..33a65a45e319
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.yaml
@@ -0,0 +1,977 @@
+# SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0 OR BSD-2-Clause)
+%YAML 1.2
+---
+$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/vendor-prefixes.yaml#
+$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml#
+
+title: Devicetree Vendor Prefix Registry
+
+maintainers:
+  - Rob Herring <robh@kernel.org>
+
+select: true
+
+properties: {}
+
+patternProperties:
+  # Prefixes which are not vendors, but followed the pattern
+  # DO NOT ADD NEW PROPERTIES TO THIS LIST
+  "^(at25|devbus|dmacap|dsa|exynos|gpio-fan|gpio|gpmc|hdmi|i2c-gpio),.*": true
+  "^(keypad|m25p|max8952|max8997|max8998|mpmc),.*": true
+  "^(pinctrl-single|#pinctrl-single|PowerPC),.*": true
+  "^(pl022|pxa-mmc|rcar_sound|rotary-encoder|s5m8767|sdhci),.*": true
+  "^(simple-audio-card|simple-graph-card|st-plgpio|st-spics|ts),.*": true
+
+  # Keep list in alphabetical order.
+  "^abilis,.*":
+    description: Abilis Systems
+  "^abracon,.*":
+    description: Abracon Corporation
+  "^actions,.*":
+    description: Actions Semiconductor Co., Ltd.
+  "^active-semi,.*":
+    description: Active-Semi International Inc
+  "^ad,.*":
+    description: Avionic Design GmbH
+  "^adafruit,.*":
+    description: Adafruit Industries, LLC
+  "^adapteva,.*":
+    description: Adapteva, Inc.
+  "^adaptrum,.*":
+    description: Adaptrum, Inc.
+  "^adh,.*":
+    description: AD Holdings Plc.
+  "^adi,.*":
+    description: Analog Devices, Inc.
+  "^advantech,.*":
+    description: Advantech Corporation
+  "^aeroflexgaisler,.*":
+    description: Aeroflex Gaisler AB
+  "^al,.*":
+    description: Annapurna Labs
+  "^allo,.*":
+    description: Allo.com
+  "^allwinner,.*":
+    description: Allwinner Technology Co., Ltd.
+  "^alphascale,.*":
+    description: AlphaScale Integrated Circuits Systems, Inc.
+  "^altr,.*":
+    description: Altera Corp.
+  "^amarula,.*":
+    description: Amarula Solutions
+  "^amazon,.*":
+    description: Amazon.com, Inc.
+  "^amcc,.*":
+    description: Applied Micro Circuits Corporation (APM, formally AMCC)
+  "^amd,.*":
+    description: Advanced Micro Devices (AMD), Inc.
+  "^amediatech,.*":
+    description: Shenzhen Amediatech Technology Co., Ltd
+  "^amlogic,.*":
+    description: Amlogic, Inc.
+  "^ampire,.*":
+    description: Ampire Co., Ltd.
+  "^ams,.*":
+    description: AMS AG
+  "^amstaos,.*":
+    description: AMS-Taos Inc.
+  "^analogix,.*":
+    description: Analogix Semiconductor, Inc.
+  "^andestech,.*":
+    description: Andes Technology Corporation
+  "^apm,.*":
+    description: Applied Micro Circuits Corporation (APM)
+  "^aptina,.*":
+    description: Aptina Imaging
+  "^arasan,.*":
+    description: Arasan Chip Systems
+  "^archermind,.*":
+    description: ArcherMind Technology (Nanjing) Co., Ltd.
+  "^arctic,.*":
+    description: Arctic Sand
+  "^arcx,.*":
+    description: arcx Inc. / Archronix Inc.
+  "^aries,.*":
+    description: Aries Embedded GmbH
+  "^arm,.*":
+    description: ARM Ltd.
+  "^armadeus,.*":
+    description: ARMadeus Systems SARL
+  "^arrow,.*":
+    description: Arrow Electronics
+  "^artesyn,.*":
+    description: Artesyn Embedded Technologies Inc.
+  "^asahi-kasei,.*":
+    description: Asahi Kasei Corp.
+  "^aspeed,.*":
+    description: ASPEED Technology Inc.
+  "^asus,.*":
+    description: AsusTek Computer Inc.
+  "^atlas,.*":
+    description: Atlas Scientific LLC
+  "^atmel,.*":
+    description: Atmel Corporation
+  "^auo,.*":
+    description: AU Optronics Corporation
+  "^auvidea,.*":
+    description: Auvidea GmbH
+  "^avago,.*":
+    description: Avago Technologies
+  "^avia,.*":
+    description: avia semiconductor
+  "^avic,.*":
+    description: Shanghai AVIC Optoelectronics Co., Ltd.
+  "^avnet,.*":
+    description: Avnet, Inc.
+  "^axentia,.*":
+    description: Axentia Technologies AB
+  "^axis,.*":
+    description: Axis Communications AB
+  "^azoteq,.*":
+    description: Azoteq (Pty) Ltd
+  "^azw,.*":
+    description: Shenzhen AZW Technology Co., Ltd.
+  "^bananapi,.*":
+    description: BIPAI KEJI LIMITED
+  "^bhf,.*":
+    description: Beckhoff Automation GmbH & Co. KG
+  "^bitmain,.*":
+    description: Bitmain Technologies
+  "^boe,.*":
+    description: BOE Technology Group Co., Ltd.
+  "^bosch,.*":
+    description: Bosch Sensortec GmbH
+  "^boundary,.*":
+    description: Boundary Devices Inc.
+  "^brcm,.*":
+    description: Broadcom Corporation
+  "^buffalo,.*":
+    description: Buffalo, Inc.
+  "^bticino,.*":
+    description: Bticino International
+  "^calxeda,.*":
+    description: Calxeda
+  "^capella,.*":
+    description: Capella Microsystems, Inc
+  "^cascoda,.*":
+    description: Cascoda, Ltd.
+  "^catalyst,.*":
+    description: Catalyst Semiconductor, Inc.
+  "^cavium,.*":
+    description: Cavium, Inc.
+  "^cdns,.*":
+    description: Cadence Design Systems Inc.
+  "^cdtech,.*":
+    description: CDTech(H.K.) Electronics Limited
+  "^ceva,.*":
+    description: Ceva, Inc.
+  "^chipidea,.*":
+    description: Chipidea, Inc
+  "^chipone,.*":
+    description: ChipOne
+  "^chipspark,.*":
+    description: ChipSPARK
+  "^chrp,.*":
+    description: Common Hardware Reference Platform
+  "^chunghwa,.*":
+    description: Chunghwa Picture Tubes Ltd.
+  "^ciaa,.*":
+    description: Computadora Industrial Abierta Argentina
+  "^cirrus,.*":
+    description: Cirrus Logic, Inc.
+  "^cloudengines,.*":
+    description: Cloud Engines, Inc.
+  "^cnm,.*":
+    description: Chips&Media, Inc.
+  "^cnxt,.*":
+    description: Conexant Systems, Inc.
+  "^compulab,.*":
+    description: CompuLab Ltd.
+  "^cortina,.*":
+    description: Cortina Systems, Inc.
+  "^cosmic,.*":
+    description: Cosmic Circuits
+  "^crane,.*":
+    description: Crane Connectivity Solutions
+  "^creative,.*":
+    description: Creative Technology Ltd
+  "^crystalfontz,.*":
+    description: Crystalfontz America, Inc.
+  "^csky,.*":
+    description: Hangzhou C-SKY Microsystems Co., Ltd
+  "^cubietech,.*":
+    description: Cubietech, Ltd.
+  "^cypress,.*":
+    description: Cypress Semiconductor Corporation
+  "^cznic,.*":
+    description: CZ.NIC, z.s.p.o.
+  "^dallas,.*":
+    description: Maxim Integrated Products (formerly Dallas Semiconductor)
+  "^dataimage,.*":
+    description: DataImage, Inc.
+  "^davicom,.*":
+    description: DAVICOM Semiconductor, Inc.
+  "^delta,.*":
+    description: Delta Electronics, Inc.
+  "^denx,.*":
+    description: Denx Software Engineering
+  "^devantech,.*":
+    description: Devantech, Ltd.
+  "^dh,.*":
+    description: DH electronics GmbH
+  "^digi,.*":
+    description: Digi International Inc.
+  "^digilent,.*":
+    description: Diglent, Inc.
+  "^dioo,.*":
+    description: Dioo Microcircuit Co., Ltd
+  "^dlc,.*":
+    description: DLC Display Co., Ltd.
+  "^dlg,.*":
+    description: Dialog Semiconductor
+  "^dlink,.*":
+    description: D-Link Corporation
+  "^dmo,.*":
+    description: Data Modul AG
+  "^domintech,.*":
+    description: Domintech Co., Ltd.
+  "^dongwoon,.*":
+    description: Dongwoon Anatech
+  "^dptechnics,.*":
+    description: DPTechnics
+  "^dragino,.*":
+    description: Dragino Technology Co., Limited
+  "^ea,.*":
+    description: Embedded Artists AB
+  "^ebs-systart,.*":
+    description: EBS-SYSTART GmbH
+  "^ebv,.*":
+    description: EBV Elektronik
+  "^eckelmann,.*":
+    description: Eckelmann AG
+  "^edt,.*":
+    description: Emerging Display Technologies
+  "^eeti,.*":
+    description: eGalax_eMPIA Technology Inc
+  "^elan,.*":
+    description: Elan Microelectronic Corp.
+  "^elgin,.*":
+    description: Elgin S/A.
+  "^embest,.*":
+    description: Shenzhen Embest Technology Co., Ltd.
+  "^emlid,.*":
+    description: Emlid, Ltd.
+  "^emmicro,.*":
+    description: EM Microelectronic
+  "^emtrion,.*":
+    description: emtrion GmbH
+  "^endless,.*":
+    description: Endless Mobile, Inc.
+  "^energymicro,.*":
+    description: Silicon Laboratories (formerly Energy Micro AS)
+  "^engicam,.*":
+    description: Engicam S.r.l.
+  "^epcos,.*":
+    description: EPCOS AG
+  "^epfl,.*":
+    description: Ecole Polytechnique Fédérale de Lausanne
+  "^epson,.*":
+    description: Seiko Epson Corp.
+  "^est,.*":
+    description: ESTeem Wireless Modems
+  "^ettus,.*":
+    description: NI Ettus Research
+  "^eukrea,.*":
+    description: Eukréa Electromatique
+  "^everest,.*":
+    description: Everest Semiconductor Co. Ltd.
+  "^everspin,.*":
+    description: Everspin Technologies, Inc.
+  "^exar,.*":
+    description: Exar Corporation
+  "^excito,.*":
+    description: Excito
+  "^ezchip,.*":
+    description: EZchip Semiconductor
+  "^facebook,.*":
+    description: Facebook
+  "^fairphone,.*":
+    description: Fairphone B.V.
+  "^faraday,.*":
+    description: Faraday Technology Corporation
+  "^fastrax,.*":
+    description: Fastrax Oy
+  "^fcs,.*":
+    description: Fairchild Semiconductor
+  "^feiyang,.*":
+    description: Shenzhen Fly Young Technology Co.,LTD.
+  "^firefly,.*":
+    description: Firefly
+  "^focaltech,.*":
+    description: FocalTech Systems Co.,Ltd
+  "^friendlyarm,.*":
+    description: Guangzhou FriendlyARM Computer Tech Co., Ltd
+  "^fsl,.*":
+    description: Freescale Semiconductor
+  "^fujitsu,.*":
+    description: Fujitsu Ltd.
+  "^gateworks,.*":
+    description: Gateworks Corporation
+  "^gcw,.*":
+    description: Game Consoles Worldwide
+  "^ge,.*":
+    description: General Electric Company
+  "^geekbuying,.*":
+    description: GeekBuying
+  "^gef,.*":
+    description: GE Fanuc Intelligent Platforms Embedded Systems, Inc.
+  "^GEFanuc,.*":
+    description: GE Fanuc Intelligent Platforms Embedded Systems, Inc.
+  "^geniatech,.*":
+    description: Geniatech, Inc.
+  "^giantec,.*":
+    description: Giantec Semiconductor, Inc.
+  "^giantplus,.*":
+    description: Giantplus Technology Co., Ltd.
+  "^globalscale,.*":
+    description: Globalscale Technologies, Inc.
+  "^globaltop,.*":
+    description: GlobalTop Technology, Inc.
+  "^gmt,.*":
+    description: Global Mixed-mode Technology, Inc.
+  "^goodix,.*":
+    description: Shenzhen Huiding Technology Co., Ltd.
+  "^google,.*":
+    description: Google, Inc.
+  "^grinn,.*":
+    description: Grinn
+  "^grmn,.*":
+    description: Garmin Limited
+  "^gumstix,.*":
+    description: Gumstix, Inc.
+  "^gw,.*":
+    description: Gateworks Corporation
+  "^hannstar,.*":
+    description: HannStar Display Corporation
+  "^haoyu,.*":
+    description: Haoyu Microelectronic Co. Ltd.
+  "^hardkernel,.*":
+    description: Hardkernel Co., Ltd
+  "^hideep,.*":
+    description: HiDeep Inc.
+  "^himax,.*":
+    description: Himax Technologies, Inc.
+  "^hisilicon,.*":
+    description: Hisilicon Limited.
+  "^hit,.*":
+    description: Hitachi Ltd.
+  "^hitex,.*":
+    description: Hitex Development Tools
+  "^holt,.*":
+    description: Holt Integrated Circuits, Inc.
+  "^honeywell,.*":
+    description: Honeywell
+  "^hp,.*":
+    description: Hewlett Packard
+  "^holtek,.*":
+    description: Holtek Semiconductor, Inc.
+  "^hwacom,.*":
+    description: HwaCom Systems Inc.
+  "^i2se,.*":
+    description: I2SE GmbH
+  "^ibm,.*":
+    description: International Business Machines (IBM)
+  "^icplus,.*":
+    description: IC Plus Corp.
+  "^idt,.*":
+    description: Integrated Device Technologies, Inc.
+  "^ifi,.*":
+    description: Ingenieurburo Fur Ic-Technologie (I/F/I)
+  "^ilitek,.*":
+    description: ILI Technology Corporation (ILITEK)
+  "^img,.*":
+    description: Imagination Technologies Ltd.
+  "^infineon,.*":
+    description: Infineon Technologies
+  "^inforce,.*":
+    description: Inforce Computing
+  "^ingenic,.*":
+    description: Ingenic Semiconductor
+  "^innolux,.*":
+    description: Innolux Corporation
+  "^inside-secure,.*":
+    description: INSIDE Secure
+  "^intel,.*":
+    description: Intel Corporation
+  "^intercontrol,.*":
+    description: Inter Control Group
+  "^invensense,.*":
+    description: InvenSense Inc.
+  "^inversepath,.*":
+    description: Inverse Path
+  "^iom,.*":
+    description: Iomega Corporation
+  "^isee,.*":
+    description: ISEE 2007 S.L.
+  "^isil,.*":
+    description: Intersil
+  "^issi,.*":
+    description: Integrated Silicon Solutions Inc.
+  "^itead,.*":
+    description: ITEAD Intelligent Systems Co.Ltd
+  "^iwave,.*":
+    description: iWave Systems Technologies Pvt. Ltd.
+  "^jdi,.*":
+    description: Japan Display Inc.
+  "^jedec,.*":
+    description: JEDEC Solid State Technology Association
+  "^jianda,.*":
+    description: Jiandangjing Technology Co., Ltd.
+  "^karo,.*":
+    description: Ka-Ro electronics GmbH
+  "^keithkoep,.*":
+    description: Keith & Koep GmbH
+  "^keymile,.*":
+    description: Keymile GmbH
+  "^khadas,.*":
+    description: Khadas
+  "^kiebackpeter,.*":
+    description: Kieback & Peter GmbH
+  "^kinetic,.*":
+    description: Kinetic Technologies
+  "^kingdisplay,.*":
+    description: King & Display Technology Co., Ltd.
+  "^kingnovel,.*":
+    description: Kingnovel Technology Co., Ltd.
+  "^kionix,.*":
+    description: Kionix, Inc.
+  "^kobo,.*":
+    description: Rakuten Kobo Inc.
+  "^koe,.*":
+    description: Kaohsiung Opto-Electronics Inc.
+  "^kosagi,.*":
+    description: Sutajio Ko-Usagi PTE Ltd.
+  "^kyo,.*":
+    description: Kyocera Corporation
+  "^lacie,.*":
+    description: LaCie
+  "^laird,.*":
+    description: Laird PLC
+  "^lantiq,.*":
+    description: Lantiq Semiconductor
+  "^lattice,.*":
+    description: Lattice Semiconductor
+  "^lego,.*":
+    description: LEGO Systems A/S
+  "^lemaker,.*":
+    description: Shenzhen LeMaker Technology Co., Ltd.
+  "^lenovo,.*":
+    description: Lenovo Group Ltd.
+  "^lg,.*":
+    description: LG Corporation
+  "^libretech,.*":
+    description: Shenzhen Libre Technology Co., Ltd
+  "^licheepi,.*":
+    description: Lichee Pi
+  "^linaro,.*":
+    description: Linaro Limited
+  "^linksys,.*":
+    description: Belkin International, Inc. (Linksys)
+  "^linux,.*":
+    description: Linux-specific binding
+  "^linx,.*":
+    description: Linx Technologies
+  "^lltc,.*":
+    description: Linear Technology Corporation
+  "^logicpd,.*":
+    description: Logic PD, Inc.
+  "^lsi,.*":
+    description: LSI Corp. (LSI Logic)
+  "^lwn,.*":
+    description: Liebherr-Werk Nenzing GmbH
+  "^macnica,.*":
+    description: Macnica Americas
+  "^marvell,.*":
+    description: Marvell Technology Group Ltd.
+  "^maxbotix,.*":
+    description: MaxBotix Inc.
+  "^maxim,.*":
+    description: Maxim Integrated Products
+  "^mbvl,.*":
+    description: Mobiveil Inc.
+  "^mcube,.*":
+    description: mCube
+  "^meas,.*":
+    description: Measurement Specialties
+  "^mediatek,.*":
+    description: MediaTek Inc.
+  "^megachips,.*":
+    description: MegaChips
+  "^mele,.*":
+    description: Shenzhen MeLE Digital Technology Ltd.
+  "^melexis,.*":
+    description: Melexis N.V.
+  "^melfas,.*":
+    description: MELFAS Inc.
+  "^mellanox,.*":
+    description: Mellanox Technologies
+  "^memsic,.*":
+    description: MEMSIC Inc.
+  "^menlo,.*":
+    description: Menlo Systems GmbH
+  "^merrii,.*":
+    description: Merrii Technology Co., Ltd.
+  "^micrel,.*":
+    description: Micrel Inc.
+  "^microchip,.*":
+    description: Microchip Technology Inc.
+  "^microcrystal,.*":
+    description: Micro Crystal AG
+  "^micron,.*":
+    description: Micron Technology Inc.
+  "^mikroe,.*":
+    description: MikroElektronika d.o.o.
+  "^minix,.*":
+    description: MINIX Technology Ltd.
+  "^miramems,.*":
+    description: MiraMEMS Sensing Technology Co., Ltd.
+  "^mitsubishi,.*":
+    description: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
+  "^mosaixtech,.*":
+    description: Mosaix Technologies, Inc.
+  "^motorola,.*":
+    description: Motorola, Inc.
+  "^moxa,.*":
+    description: Moxa Inc.
+  "^mpl,.*":
+    description: MPL AG
+  "^mqmaker,.*":
+    description: mqmaker Inc.
+  "^mscc,.*":
+    description: Microsemi Corporation
+  "^msi,.*":
+    description: Micro-Star International Co. Ltd.
+  "^mti,.*":
+    description: Imagination Technologies Ltd. (formerly MIPS Technologies Inc.)
+  "^multi-inno,.*":
+    description: Multi-Inno Technology Co.,Ltd
+  "^mundoreader,.*":
+    description: Mundo Reader S.L.
+  "^murata,.*":
+    description: Murata Manufacturing Co., Ltd.
+  "^mxicy,.*":
+    description: Macronix International Co., Ltd.
+  "^myir,.*":
+    description: MYIR Tech Limited
+  "^national,.*":
+    description: National Semiconductor
+  "^nec,.*":
+    description: NEC LCD Technologies, Ltd.
+  "^neonode,.*":
+    description: Neonode Inc.
+  "^netgear,.*":
+    description: NETGEAR
+  "^netlogic,.*":
+    description: Broadcom Corporation (formerly NetLogic Microsystems)
+  "^netron-dy,.*":
+    description: Netron DY
+  "^netxeon,.*":
+    description: Shenzhen Netxeon Technology CO., LTD
+  "^nexbox,.*":
+    description: Nexbox
+  "^nextthing,.*":
+    description: Next Thing Co.
+  "^newhaven,.*":
+    description: Newhaven Display International
+  "^ni,.*":
+    description: National Instruments
+  "^nintendo,.*":
+    description: Nintendo
+  "^nlt,.*":
+    description: NLT Technologies, Ltd.
+  "^nokia,.*":
+    description: Nokia
+  "^nordic,.*":
+    description: Nordic Semiconductor
+  "^novtech,.*":
+    description: NovTech, Inc.
+  "^nutsboard,.*":
+    description: NutsBoard
+  "^nuvoton,.*":
+    description: Nuvoton Technology Corporation
+  "^nvd,.*":
+    description: New Vision Display
+  "^nvidia,.*":
+    description: NVIDIA
+  "^nxp,.*":
+    description: NXP Semiconductors
+  "^oceanic,.*":
+    description: Oceanic Systems (UK) Ltd.
+  "^okaya,.*":
+    description: Okaya Electric America, Inc.
+  "^oki,.*":
+    description: Oki Electric Industry Co., Ltd.
+  "^olimex,.*":
+    description: OLIMEX Ltd.
+  "^olpc,.*":
+    description: One Laptop Per Child
+  "^onion,.*":
+    description: Onion Corporation
+  "^onnn,.*":
+    description: ON Semiconductor Corp.
+  "^ontat,.*":
+    description: On Tat Industrial Company
+  "^opalkelly,.*":
+    description: Opal Kelly Incorporated
+  "^opencores,.*":
+    description: OpenCores.org
+  "^openrisc,.*":
+    description: OpenRISC.io
+  "^option,.*":
+    description: Option NV
+  "^oranth,.*":
+    description: Shenzhen Oranth Technology Co., Ltd.
+  "^ORCL,.*":
+    description: Oracle Corporation
+  "^orisetech,.*":
+    description: Orise Technology
+  "^ortustech,.*":
+    description: Ortus Technology Co., Ltd.
+  "^osddisplays,.*":
+    description: OSD Displays
+  "^ovti,.*":
+    description: OmniVision Technologies
+  "^oxsemi,.*":
+    description: Oxford Semiconductor, Ltd.
+  "^panasonic,.*":
+    description: Panasonic Corporation
+  "^parade,.*":
+    description: Parade Technologies Inc.
+  "^pda,.*":
+    description: Precision Design Associates, Inc.
+  "^pericom,.*":
+    description: Pericom Technology Inc.
+  "^pervasive,.*":
+    description: Pervasive Displays, Inc.
+  "^phicomm,.*":
+    description: PHICOMM Co., Ltd.
+  "^phytec,.*":
+    description: PHYTEC Messtechnik GmbH
+  "^picochip,.*":
+    description: Picochip Ltd
+  "^pine64,.*":
+    description: Pine64
+  "^pixcir,.*":
+    description: PIXCIR MICROELECTRONICS Co., Ltd
+  "^plantower,.*":
+    description: Plantower Co., Ltd
+  "^plathome,.*":
+    description: Plat'Home Co., Ltd.
+  "^plda,.*":
+    description: PLDA
+  "^plx,.*":
+    description: Broadcom Corporation (formerly PLX Technology)
+  "^pni,.*":
+    description: PNI Sensor Corporation
+  "^portwell,.*":
+    description: Portwell Inc.
+  "^poslab,.*":
+    description: Poslab Technology Co., Ltd.
+  "^powervr,.*":
+    description: PowerVR (deprecated, use img)
+  "^probox2,.*":
+    description: PROBOX2 (by W2COMP Co., Ltd.)
+  "^pulsedlight,.*":
+    description: PulsedLight, Inc
+  "^qca,.*":
+    description: Qualcomm Atheros, Inc.
+  "^qcom,.*":
+    description: Qualcomm Technologies, Inc
+  "^qemu,.*":
+    description: QEMU, a generic and open source machine emulator and virtualizer
+  "^qi,.*":
+    description: Qi Hardware
+  "^qiaodian,.*":
+    description: QiaoDian XianShi Corporation
+  "^qnap,.*":
+    description: QNAP Systems, Inc.
+  "^radxa,.*":
+    description: Radxa
+  "^raidsonic,.*":
+    description: RaidSonic Technology GmbH
+  "^ralink,.*":
+    description: Mediatek/Ralink Technology Corp.
+  "^ramtron,.*":
+    description: Ramtron International
+  "^raspberrypi,.*":
+    description: Raspberry Pi Foundation
+  "^raydium,.*":
+    description: Raydium Semiconductor Corp.
+  "^rda,.*":
+    description: Unisoc Communications, Inc.
+  "^realtek,.*":
+    description: Realtek Semiconductor Corp.
+  "^renesas,.*":
+    description: Renesas Electronics Corporation
+  "^richtek,.*":
+    description: Richtek Technology Corporation
+  "^ricoh,.*":
+    description: Ricoh Co. Ltd.
+  "^rikomagic,.*":
+    description: Rikomagic Tech Corp. Ltd
+  "^riscv,.*":
+    description: RISC-V Foundation
+  "^rockchip,.*":
+    description: Fuzhou Rockchip Electronics Co., Ltd
+  "^rocktech,.*":
+    description: ROCKTECH DISPLAYS LIMITED
+  "^rohm,.*":
+    description: ROHM Semiconductor Co., Ltd
+  "^ronbo,.*":
+    description: Ronbo Electronics
+  "^roofull,.*":
+    description: Shenzhen Roofull Technology Co, Ltd
+  "^samsung,.*":
+    description: Samsung Semiconductor
+  "^samtec,.*":
+    description: Samtec/Softing company
+  "^sancloud,.*":
+    description: Sancloud Ltd
+  "^sandisk,.*":
+    description: Sandisk Corporation
+  "^sbs,.*":
+    description: Smart Battery System
+  "^schindler,.*":
+    description: Schindler
+  "^seagate,.*":
+    description: Seagate Technology PLC
+  "^seirobotics,.*":
+    description: Shenzhen SEI Robotics Co., Ltd
+  "^semtech,.*":
+    description: Semtech Corporation
+  "^sensirion,.*":
+    description: Sensirion AG
+  "^sff,.*":
+    description: Small Form Factor Committee
+  "^sgd,.*":
+    description: Solomon Goldentek Display Corporation
+  "^sgx,.*":
+    description: SGX Sensortech
+  "^sharp,.*":
+    description: Sharp Corporation
+  "^shimafuji,.*":
+    description: Shimafuji Electric, Inc.
+  "^si-en,.*":
+    description: Si-En Technology Ltd.
+  "^si-linux,.*":
+    description: Silicon Linux Corporation
+  "^sifive,.*":
+    description: SiFive, Inc.
+  "^sigma,.*":
+    description: Sigma Designs, Inc.
+  "^sii,.*":
+    description: Seiko Instruments, Inc.
+  "^sil,.*":
+    description: Silicon Image
+  "^silabs,.*":
+    description: Silicon Laboratories
+  "^silead,.*":
+    description: Silead Inc.
+  "^silergy,.*":
+    description: Silergy Corp.
+  "^siliconmitus,.*":
+    description: Silicon Mitus, Inc.
+  "^simte,.*":
+    description: k
+  "^sirf,.*":
+    description: SiRF Technology, Inc.
+  "^sis,.*":
+    description: Silicon Integrated Systems Corp.
+  "^sitronix,.*":
+    description: Sitronix Technology Corporation
+  "^skyworks,.*":
+    description: Skyworks Solutions, Inc.
+  "^smsc,.*":
+    description: Standard Microsystems Corporation
+  "^snps,.*":
+    description: Synopsys, Inc.
+  "^socionext,.*":
+    description: Socionext Inc.
+  "^solidrun,.*":
+    description: SolidRun
+  "^solomon,.*":
+    description: Solomon Systech Limited
+  "^sony,.*":
+    description: Sony Corporation
+  "^spansion,.*":
+    description: Spansion Inc.
+  "^sprd,.*":
+    description: Spreadtrum Communications Inc.
+  "^sst,.*":
+    description: Silicon Storage Technology, Inc.
+  "^st,.*":
+    description: STMicroelectronics
+  "^starry,.*":
+    description: Starry Electronic Technology (ShenZhen) Co., LTD
+  "^startek,.*":
+    description: Startek
+  "^ste,.*":
+    description: ST-Ericsson
+  "^stericsson,.*":
+    description: ST-Ericsson
+  "^summit,.*":
+    description: Summit microelectronics
+  "^sunchip,.*":
+    description: Shenzhen Sunchip Technology Co., Ltd
+  "^SUNW,.*":
+    description: Sun Microsystems, Inc
+  "^swir,.*":
+    description: Sierra Wireless
+  "^syna,.*":
+    description: Synaptics Inc.
+  "^synology,.*":
+    description: Synology, Inc.
+  "^tbs,.*":
+    description: TBS Technologies
+  "^tbs-biometrics,.*":
+    description: Touchless Biometric Systems AG
+  "^tcg,.*":
+    description: Trusted Computing Group
+  "^tcl,.*":
+    description: Toby Churchill Ltd.
+  "^technexion,.*":
+    description: TechNexion
+  "^technologic,.*":
+    description: Technologic Systems
+  "^tempo,.*":
+    description: Tempo Semiconductor
+  "^techstar,.*":
+    description: Shenzhen Techstar Electronics Co., Ltd.
+  "^terasic,.*":
+    description: Terasic Inc.
+  "^thine,.*":
+    description: THine Electronics, Inc.
+  "^ti,.*":
+    description: Texas Instruments
+  "^tianma,.*":
+    description: Tianma Micro-electronics Co., Ltd.
+  "^tlm,.*":
+    description: Trusted Logic Mobility
+  "^tmt,.*":
+    description: Tecon Microprocessor Technologies, LLC.
+  "^topeet,.*":
+    description: Topeet
+  "^toradex,.*":
+    description: Toradex AG
+  "^toshiba,.*":
+    description: Toshiba Corporation
+  "^toumaz,.*":
+    description: Toumaz
+  "^tpk,.*":
+    description: TPK U.S.A. LLC
+  "^tplink,.*":
+    description: TP-LINK Technologies Co., Ltd.
+  "^tpo,.*":
+    description: TPO
+  "^tq,.*":
+    description: TQ Systems GmbH
+  "^tronfy,.*":
+    description: Tronfy
+  "^tronsmart,.*":
+    description: Tronsmart
+  "^truly,.*":
+    description: Truly Semiconductors Limited
+  "^tsd,.*":
+    description: Theobroma Systems Design und Consulting GmbH
+  "^tyan,.*":
+    description: Tyan Computer Corporation
+  "^u-blox,.*":
+    description: u-blox
+  "^ucrobotics,.*":
+    description: uCRobotics
+  "^ubnt,.*":
+    description: Ubiquiti Networks
+  "^udoo,.*":
+    description: Udoo
+  "^uniwest,.*":
+    description: United Western Technologies Corp (UniWest)
+  "^upisemi,.*":
+    description: uPI Semiconductor Corp.
+  "^urt,.*":
+    description: United Radiant Technology Corporation
+  "^usi,.*":
+    description: Universal Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd.
+  "^v3,.*":
+    description: V3 Semiconductor
+  "^vamrs,.*":
+    description: Vamrs Ltd.
+  "^variscite,.*":
+    description: Variscite Ltd.
+  "^via,.*":
+    description: VIA Technologies, Inc.
+  "^virtio,.*":
+    description: Virtual I/O Device Specification, developed by the OASIS consortium
+  "^vishay,.*":
+    description: Vishay Intertechnology, Inc
+  "^vitesse,.*":
+    description: Vitesse Semiconductor Corporation
+  "^vivante,.*":
+    description: Vivante Corporation
+  "^vocore,.*":
+    description: VoCore Studio
+  "^voipac,.*":
+    description: Voipac Technologies s.r.o.
+  "^vot,.*":
+    description: Vision Optical Technology Co., Ltd.
+  "^wd,.*":
+    description: Western Digital Corp.
+  "^wetek,.*":
+    description: WeTek Electronics, limited.
+  "^wexler,.*":
+    description: Wexler
+  "^whwave,.*":
+    description: Shenzhen whwave Electronics, Inc.
+  "^wi2wi,.*":
+    description: Wi2Wi, Inc.
+  "^winbond,.*":
+    description: Winbond Electronics corp.
+  "^winstar,.*":
+    description: Winstar Display Corp.
+  "^wlf,.*":
+    description: Wolfson Microelectronics
+  "^wm,.*":
+    description: Wondermedia Technologies, Inc.
+  "^x-powers,.*":
+    description: X-Powers
+  "^xes,.*":
+    description: Extreme Engineering Solutions (X-ES)
+  "^xillybus,.*":
+    description: Xillybus Ltd.
+  "^xlnx,.*":
+    description: Xilinx
+  "^xunlong,.*":
+    description: Shenzhen Xunlong Software CO.,Limited
+  "^ysoft,.*":
+    description: Y Soft Corporation a.s.
+  "^zarlink,.*":
+    description: Zarlink Semiconductor
+  "^zeitec,.*":
+    description: ZEITEC Semiconductor Co., LTD.
+  "^zidoo,.*":
+    description: Shenzhen Zidoo Technology Co., Ltd.
+  "^zii,.*":
+    description: Zodiac Inflight Innovations
+  "^zte,.*":
+    description: ZTE Corp.
+  "^zyxel,.*":
+    description: ZyXEL Communications Corp.
+
+  # Normal property name match without a comma
+  # These should catch all node/property names without a prefix
+  "^[a-zA-Z0-9#][a-zA-Z0-9+\\-._@]{0,63}$": true
+  "^[a-zA-Z0-9+\\-._]*@[0-9a-zA-Z,]*$": true
+  "^#.*": true
+
+additionalProperties: false
+
+...
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/fsl-imx-sc-wdt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/fsl-imx-sc-wdt.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..02b87e92ae68
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/fsl-imx-sc-wdt.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+* Freescale i.MX System Controller Watchdog
+
+i.MX system controller watchdog is for i.MX SoCs with system controller inside,
+the watchdog is managed by system controller, users can ONLY communicate with
+system controller from secure mode for watchdog operations, so Linux i.MX system
+controller watchdog driver will call ARM SMC API and trap into ARM-Trusted-Firmware
+for watchdog operations, ARM-Trusted-Firmware is running at secure EL3 mode and
+it will request system controller to execute the watchdog operation passed from
+Linux kernel.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible:	Should be :
+		"fsl,imx8qxp-sc-wdt"
+		followed by "fsl,imx-sc-wdt";
+
+Optional properties:
+- timeout-sec : Contains the watchdog timeout in seconds.
+
+Examples:
+
+watchdog {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx8qxp-sc-wdt", "fsl,imx-sc-wdt";
+	timeout-sec = <60>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/mtk-wdt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/mtk-wdt.txt
index 8682d6a93e5b..fd380eb28df5 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/mtk-wdt.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/mtk-wdt.txt
@@ -9,6 +9,7 @@ Required properties:
 	"mediatek,mt7622-wdt", "mediatek,mt6589-wdt": for MT7622
 	"mediatek,mt7623-wdt", "mediatek,mt6589-wdt": for MT7623
 	"mediatek,mt7629-wdt", "mediatek,mt6589-wdt": for MT7629
+	"mediatek,mt8516-wdt", "mediatek,mt6589-wdt": for MT8516
 
 - reg : Specifies base physical address and size of the registers.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/renesas-wdt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/renesas-wdt.txt
index ef2b97b72e08..9f365c1a3399 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/renesas-wdt.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/renesas-wdt.txt
@@ -8,6 +8,7 @@ Required properties:
 		 - "renesas,r8a7743-wdt" (RZ/G1M)
 		 - "renesas,r8a7744-wdt" (RZ/G1N)
 		 - "renesas,r8a7745-wdt" (RZ/G1E)
+		 - "renesas,r8a77470-wdt" (RZ/G1C)
 		 - "renesas,r8a774a1-wdt" (RZ/G2M)
 		 - "renesas,r8a774c0-wdt" (RZ/G2E)
 	         - "renesas,r8a7790-wdt" (R-Car H2)
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/st,stpmic1-wdt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/st,stpmic1-wdt.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7cc1407f15cb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/st,stpmic1-wdt.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+STMicroelectronics STPMIC1 Watchdog
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible : should be "st,stpmic1-wdt"
+
+Example:
+
+watchdog {
+	compatible = "st,stpmic1-wdt";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/writing-bindings.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/writing-bindings.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..27dfd2d8016e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/writing-bindings.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+DOs and DON'Ts for designing and writing Devicetree bindings
+
+This is a list of common review feedback items focused on binding design. With
+every rule, there are exceptions and bindings have many gray areas.
+
+For guidelines related to patches, see
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/submitting-patches.txt
+
+
+Overall design
+
+- DO attempt to make bindings complete even if a driver doesn't support some
+  features. For example, if a device has an interrupt, then include the
+  'interrupts' property even if the driver is only polled mode.
+
+- DON'T refer to Linux or "device driver" in bindings. Bindings should be
+  based on what the hardware has, not what an OS and driver currently support.
+
+- DO use node names matching the class of the device. Many standard names are
+  defined in the DT Spec. If there isn't one, consider adding it.
+
+- DO check that the example matches the documentation especially after making
+  review changes.
+
+- DON'T create nodes just for the sake of instantiating drivers. Multi-function
+  devices only need child nodes when the child nodes have their own DT
+  resources. A single node can be multiple providers (e.g. clocks and resets).
+
+- DON'T use 'syscon' alone without a specific compatible string. A 'syscon'
+  hardware block should have a compatible string unique enough to infer the
+  register layout of the entire block (at a minimum).
+
+
+Properties
+
+- DO make 'compatible' properties specific. DON'T use wildcards in compatible
+  strings. DO use fallback compatibles when devices are the same as or a subset
+  of prior implementations. DO add new compatibles in case there are new
+  features or bugs.
+
+- DO use a vendor prefix on device specific property names. Consider if
+  properties could be common among devices of the same class. Check other
+  existing bindings for similar devices.
+
+- DON'T redefine common properties. Just reference the definition and define
+  constraints specific to the device.
+
+- DO use common property unit suffixes for properties with scientific units.
+  See property-units.txt.
+
+- DO define properties in terms of constraints. How many entries? What are
+  possible values? What is the order?
+
+
+Board/SoC .dts Files
+
+- DO put all MMIO devices under a bus node and not at the top-level.
+
+- DO use non-empty 'ranges' to limit the size of child buses/devices. 64-bit
+  platforms don't need all devices to have 64-bit address and size.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/writing-schema.md b/Documentation/devicetree/writing-schema.md
index a3652d33a48f..dc032db36262 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/writing-schema.md
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/writing-schema.md
@@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ The DT schema project must be installed in order to validate the DT schema
 binding documents and validate DTS files using the DT schema. The DT schema
 project can be installed with pip:
 
-`pip3 install git+https://github.com/robherring/yaml-bindings.git@master`
+`pip3 install git+https://github.com/devicetree-org/dt-schema.git@master`
 
 dtc must also be built with YAML output support enabled. This requires that
 libyaml and its headers be installed on the host system.
diff --git a/Documentation/doc-guide/index.rst b/Documentation/doc-guide/index.rst
index a7f95d7d3a63..603f3ff55d5a 100644
--- a/Documentation/doc-guide/index.rst
+++ b/Documentation/doc-guide/index.rst
@@ -7,9 +7,9 @@ How to write kernel documentation
 .. toctree::
    :maxdepth: 1
 
-   sphinx.rst
-   kernel-doc.rst
-   parse-headers.rst
+   sphinx
+   kernel-doc
+   parse-headers
 
 .. only::  subproject and html
 
diff --git a/Documentation/doc-guide/kernel-doc.rst b/Documentation/doc-guide/kernel-doc.rst
index 51be62aa4385..f96059767c8c 100644
--- a/Documentation/doc-guide/kernel-doc.rst
+++ b/Documentation/doc-guide/kernel-doc.rst
@@ -490,7 +490,7 @@ doc: *title*
 
 functions: *[ function ...]*
   Include documentation for each *function* in *source*.
-  If no *function* if specified, the documentaion for all functions
+  If no *function* is specified, the documentation for all functions
   and types in the *source* will be included.
 
   Examples::
@@ -517,4 +517,17 @@ How to use kernel-doc to generate man pages
 If you just want to use kernel-doc to generate man pages you can do this
 from the kernel git tree::
 
-  $ scripts/kernel-doc -man $(git grep -l '/\*\*' -- :^Documentation :^tools) | scripts/split-man.pl /tmp/man
+  $ scripts/kernel-doc -man \
+    $(git grep -l '/\*\*' -- :^Documentation :^tools) \
+    | scripts/split-man.pl /tmp/man
+
+Some older versions of git do not support some of the variants of syntax for
+path exclusion.  One of the following commands may work for those versions::
+
+  $ scripts/kernel-doc -man \
+    $(git grep -l '/\*\*' -- . ':!Documentation' ':!tools') \
+    | scripts/split-man.pl /tmp/man
+
+  $ scripts/kernel-doc -man \
+    $(git grep -l '/\*\*' -- . ":(exclude)Documentation" ":(exclude)tools") \
+    | scripts/split-man.pl /tmp/man
diff --git a/Documentation/doc-guide/sphinx.rst b/Documentation/doc-guide/sphinx.rst
index 02605ee1d876..c039224b404e 100644
--- a/Documentation/doc-guide/sphinx.rst
+++ b/Documentation/doc-guide/sphinx.rst
@@ -27,8 +27,8 @@ Sphinx Install
 ==============
 
 The ReST markups currently used by the Documentation/ files are meant to be
-built with ``Sphinx`` version 1.3 or upper. If you're desiring to build
-PDF outputs, it is recommended to use version 1.4.6 or upper.
+built with ``Sphinx`` version 1.3 or higher. If you desire to build
+PDF output, it is recommended to use version 1.4.6 or higher.
 
 There's a script that checks for the Sphinx requirements. Please see
 :ref:`sphinx-pre-install` for further details.
@@ -37,15 +37,15 @@ Most distributions are shipped with Sphinx, but its toolchain is fragile,
 and it is not uncommon that upgrading it or some other Python packages
 on your machine would cause the documentation build to break.
 
-A way to get rid of that is to use a different version than the one shipped
-on your distributions. In order to do that, it is recommended to install
+A way to avoid that is to use a different version than the one shipped
+with your distributions. In order to do so, it is recommended to install
 Sphinx inside a virtual environment, using ``virtualenv-3``
 or ``virtualenv``, depending on how your distribution packaged Python 3.
 
 .. note::
 
    #) Sphinx versions below 1.5 don't work properly with Python's
-      docutils version 0.13.1 or upper. So, if you're willing to use
+      docutils version 0.13.1 or higher. So, if you're willing to use
       those versions, you should run ``pip install 'docutils==0.12'``.
 
    #) It is recommended to use the RTD theme for html output. Depending
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ output.
 PDF and LaTeX builds
 --------------------
 
-Such builds are currently supported only with Sphinx versions 1.4 and upper.
+Such builds are currently supported only with Sphinx versions 1.4 and higher.
 
 For PDF and LaTeX output, you'll also need ``XeLaTeX`` version 3.14159265.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/dontdiff b/Documentation/dontdiff
index 2228fcc8e29f..5eba889ea84d 100644
--- a/Documentation/dontdiff
+++ b/Documentation/dontdiff
@@ -106,7 +106,6 @@ compile.h*
 conf
 config
 config-*
-config_data.h*
 config.mak
 config.mak.autogen
 conmakehash
@@ -128,7 +127,7 @@ flask.h
 fore200e_mkfirm
 fore200e_pca_fw.c*
 gconf
-gconf.glade.h
+gconf-cfg
 gen-devlist
 gen_crc32table
 gen_init_cpio
@@ -149,24 +148,22 @@ int32.c
 int4.c
 int8.c
 kallsyms
-kconfig
 keywords.c
 ksym.c*
 ksym.h*
-kxgettext
 *lex.c
 *lex.*.c
 linux
 logo_*.c
 logo_*_clut224.c
 logo_*_mono.c
-lxdialog
 mach-types
 mach-types.h
 machtypes.h
 map
 map_hugetlb
 mconf
+mconf-cfg
 miboot*
 mk_elfconfig
 mkboot
@@ -177,11 +174,14 @@ mkprep
 mkregtable
 mktables
 mktree
+mkutf8data
 modpost
 modules.builtin
+modules.builtin.modinfo
 modules.order
 modversions.h*
 nconf
+nconf-cfg
 ncscope.*
 offset.h
 oui.c*
@@ -201,6 +201,7 @@ pnmtologo
 ppc_defs.h*
 pss_boot.h
 qconf
+qconf-cfg
 r100_reg_safe.h
 r200_reg_safe.h
 r300_reg_safe.h
@@ -255,6 +256,7 @@ vsyscall_32.lds
 wanxlfw.inc
 uImage
 unifdef
+utf8data.h
 wakeup.bin
 wakeup.elf
 wakeup.lds
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/80211/mac80211.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/80211/mac80211.rst
index 85a8335e80b6..eab40bcf3987 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-api/80211/mac80211.rst
+++ b/Documentation/driver-api/80211/mac80211.rst
@@ -126,6 +126,9 @@ functions/definitions
    :functions: ieee80211_rx_status
 
 .. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
+   :functions: mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
+
+.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
    :functions: mac80211_rx_flags
 
 .. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/acpi/index.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/acpi/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ace0008e54c2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/driver-api/acpi/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+============
+ACPI Support
+============
+
+.. toctree::
+   :maxdepth: 2
+
+   linuxized-acpica
+   scan_handlers
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/linuxized-acpica.txt b/Documentation/driver-api/acpi/linuxized-acpica.rst
index 3ad7b0dfb083..0ca8f1538519 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/linuxized-acpica.txt
+++ b/Documentation/driver-api/acpi/linuxized-acpica.rst
@@ -1,31 +1,37 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+.. include:: <isonum.txt>
+
+============================================================
 Linuxized ACPICA - Introduction to ACPICA Release Automation
+============================================================
 
-Copyright (C) 2013-2016, Intel Corporation
-Author: Lv Zheng <lv.zheng@intel.com>
+:Copyright: |copy| 2013-2016, Intel Corporation
 
+:Author: Lv Zheng <lv.zheng@intel.com>
 
-Abstract:
 
+Abstract
+========
 This document describes the ACPICA project and the relationship between
 ACPICA and Linux.  It also describes how ACPICA code in drivers/acpi/acpica,
 include/acpi and tools/power/acpi is automatically updated to follow the
 upstream.
 
+ACPICA Project
+==============
 
-1. ACPICA Project
-
-   The ACPI Component Architecture (ACPICA) project provides an operating
-   system (OS)-independent reference implementation of the Advanced
-   Configuration and Power Interface Specification (ACPI).  It has been
-   adapted by various host OSes.  By directly integrating ACPICA, Linux can
-   also benefit from the application experiences of ACPICA from other host
-   OSes.
+The ACPI Component Architecture (ACPICA) project provides an operating
+system (OS)-independent reference implementation of the Advanced
+Configuration and Power Interface Specification (ACPI).  It has been
+adapted by various host OSes.  By directly integrating ACPICA, Linux can
+also benefit from the application experiences of ACPICA from other host
+OSes.
 
-   The homepage of ACPICA project is: www.acpica.org, it is maintained and
-   supported by Intel Corporation.
+The homepage of ACPICA project is: www.acpica.org, it is maintained and
+supported by Intel Corporation.
 
-   The following figure depicts the Linux ACPI subsystem where the ACPICA
-   adaptation is included:
+The following figure depicts the Linux ACPI subsystem where the ACPICA
+adaptation is included::
 
       +---------------------------------------------------------+
       |                                                         |
@@ -71,21 +77,27 @@ upstream.
 
                  Figure 1. Linux ACPI Software Components
 
-   NOTE:
+.. note::
     A. OS Service Layer - Provided by Linux to offer OS dependent
        implementation of the predefined ACPICA interfaces (acpi_os_*).
+       ::
+
          include/acpi/acpiosxf.h
          drivers/acpi/osl.c
          include/acpi/platform
          include/asm/acenv.h
     B. ACPICA Functionality - Released from ACPICA code base to offer
        OS independent implementation of the ACPICA interfaces (acpi_*).
+       ::
+
          drivers/acpi/acpica
          include/acpi/ac*.h
          tools/power/acpi
     C. Linux/ACPI Functionality - Providing Linux specific ACPI
        functionality to the other Linux kernel subsystems and user space
        programs.
+       ::
+
          drivers/acpi
          include/linux/acpi.h
          include/linux/acpi*.h
@@ -95,24 +107,27 @@ upstream.
        ACPI subsystem to offer architecture specific implementation of the
        ACPI interfaces.  They are Linux specific components and are out of
        the scope of this document.
+       ::
+
          include/asm/acpi.h
          include/asm/acpi*.h
          arch/*/acpi
 
-2. ACPICA Release
+ACPICA Release
+==============
 
-   The ACPICA project maintains its code base at the following repository URL:
-   https://github.com/acpica/acpica.git. As a rule, a release is made every
-   month.
+The ACPICA project maintains its code base at the following repository URL:
+https://github.com/acpica/acpica.git. As a rule, a release is made every
+month.
 
-   As the coding style adopted by the ACPICA project is not acceptable by
-   Linux, there is a release process to convert the ACPICA git commits into
-   Linux patches.  The patches generated by this process are referred to as
-   "linuxized ACPICA patches".  The release process is carried out on a local
-   copy the ACPICA git repository.  Each commit in the monthly release is
-   converted into a linuxized ACPICA patch.  Together, they form the monthly
-   ACPICA release patchset for the Linux ACPI community.  This process is
-   illustrated in the following figure:
+As the coding style adopted by the ACPICA project is not acceptable by
+Linux, there is a release process to convert the ACPICA git commits into
+Linux patches.  The patches generated by this process are referred to as
+"linuxized ACPICA patches".  The release process is carried out on a local
+copy the ACPICA git repository.  Each commit in the monthly release is
+converted into a linuxized ACPICA patch.  Together, they form the monthly
+ACPICA release patchset for the Linux ACPI community.  This process is
+illustrated in the following figure::
 
     +-----------------------------+
     | acpica / master (-) commits |
@@ -153,7 +168,7 @@ upstream.
 
                 Figure 2. ACPICA -> Linux Upstream Process
 
-   NOTE:
+.. note::
     A. Linuxize Utilities - Provided by the ACPICA repository, including a
        utility located in source/tools/acpisrc folder and a number of
        scripts located in generate/linux folder.
@@ -170,19 +185,20 @@ upstream.
    following kernel configuration options:
    CONFIG_ACPI/CONFIG_ACPI_DEBUG/CONFIG_ACPI_DEBUGGER
 
-3. ACPICA Divergences
+ACPICA Divergences
+==================
 
-   Ideally, all of the ACPICA commits should be converted into Linux patches
-   automatically without manual modifications, the "linux / master" tree should
-   contain the ACPICA code that exactly corresponds to the ACPICA code
-   contained in "new linuxized acpica" tree and it should be possible to run
-   the release process fully automatically.
+Ideally, all of the ACPICA commits should be converted into Linux patches
+automatically without manual modifications, the "linux / master" tree should
+contain the ACPICA code that exactly corresponds to the ACPICA code
+contained in "new linuxized acpica" tree and it should be possible to run
+the release process fully automatically.
 
-   As a matter of fact, however, there are source code differences between
-   the ACPICA code in Linux and the upstream ACPICA code, referred to as
-   "ACPICA Divergences".
+As a matter of fact, however, there are source code differences between
+the ACPICA code in Linux and the upstream ACPICA code, referred to as
+"ACPICA Divergences".
 
-   The various sources of ACPICA divergences include:
+The various sources of ACPICA divergences include:
    1. Legacy divergences - Before the current ACPICA release process was
       established, there already had been divergences between Linux and
       ACPICA. Over the past several years those divergences have been greatly
@@ -213,11 +229,12 @@ upstream.
       rebased on the ACPICA side in order to offer better solutions, new ACPICA
       divergences are generated.
 
-4. ACPICA Development
+ACPICA Development
+==================
 
-   This paragraph guides Linux developers to use the ACPICA upstream release
-   utilities to obtain Linux patches corresponding to upstream ACPICA commits
-   before they become available from the ACPICA release process.
+This paragraph guides Linux developers to use the ACPICA upstream release
+utilities to obtain Linux patches corresponding to upstream ACPICA commits
+before they become available from the ACPICA release process.
 
    1. Cherry-pick an ACPICA commit
 
@@ -225,7 +242,7 @@ upstream.
    you want to cherry pick must be committed into the local repository.
 
    Then the gen-patch.sh command can help to cherry-pick an ACPICA commit
-   from the ACPICA local repository:
+   from the ACPICA local repository::
 
    $ git clone https://github.com/acpica/acpica
    $ cd acpica
@@ -240,7 +257,7 @@ upstream.
    changes that haven't been applied to Linux yet.
 
    You can generate the ACPICA release series yourself and rebase your code on
-   top of the generated ACPICA release patches:
+   top of the generated ACPICA release patches::
 
    $ git clone https://github.com/acpica/acpica
    $ cd acpica
@@ -254,7 +271,7 @@ upstream.
    3. Inspect the current divergences
 
    If you have local copies of both Linux and upstream ACPICA, you can generate
-   a diff file indicating the state of the current divergences:
+   a diff file indicating the state of the current divergences::
 
    # git clone https://github.com/acpica/acpica
    # git clone http://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/torvalds/linux.git
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/scan_handlers.txt b/Documentation/driver-api/acpi/scan_handlers.rst
index 3246ccf15992..7a197b3a33fc 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/scan_handlers.txt
+++ b/Documentation/driver-api/acpi/scan_handlers.rst
@@ -1,7 +1,13 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+.. include:: <isonum.txt>
+
+==================
 ACPI Scan Handlers
+==================
+
+:Copyright: |copy| 2012, Intel Corporation
 
-Copyright (C) 2012, Intel Corporation
-Author: Rafael J. Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>
+:Author: Rafael J. Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>
 
 During system initialization and ACPI-based device hot-add, the ACPI namespace
 is scanned in search of device objects that generally represent various pieces
@@ -30,14 +36,14 @@ to configure that link so that the kernel can use it.
 Those additional configuration tasks usually depend on the type of the hardware
 component represented by the given device node which can be determined on the
 basis of the device node's hardware ID (HID).  They are performed by objects
-called ACPI scan handlers represented by the following structure:
+called ACPI scan handlers represented by the following structure::
 
-struct acpi_scan_handler {
-	const struct acpi_device_id *ids;
-	struct list_head list_node;
-	int (*attach)(struct acpi_device *dev, const struct acpi_device_id *id);
-	void (*detach)(struct acpi_device *dev);
-};
+	struct acpi_scan_handler {
+		const struct acpi_device_id *ids;
+		struct list_head list_node;
+		int (*attach)(struct acpi_device *dev, const struct acpi_device_id *id);
+		void (*detach)(struct acpi_device *dev);
+	};
 
 where ids is the list of IDs of device nodes the given handler is supposed to
 take care of, list_node is the hook to the global list of ACPI scan handlers
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/component.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/component.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..57e37590733f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/driver-api/component.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+.. _component:
+
+======================================
+Component Helper for Aggregate Drivers
+======================================
+
+.. kernel-doc:: drivers/base/component.c
+   :doc: overview
+
+
+API
+===
+
+.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/component.h
+   :internal:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: drivers/base/component.c
+   :export:
+
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/device-io.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/device-io.rst
index b00b23903078..0e389378f71d 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-api/device-io.rst
+++ b/Documentation/driver-api/device-io.rst
@@ -103,51 +103,6 @@ continuing execution::
         ha->flags.ints_enabled = 0;
     }
 
-In addition to write posting, on some large multiprocessing systems
-(e.g. SGI Challenge, Origin and Altix machines) posted writes won't be
-strongly ordered coming from different CPUs. Thus it's important to
-properly protect parts of your driver that do memory-mapped writes with
-locks and use the :c:func:`mmiowb()` to make sure they arrive in the
-order intended. Issuing a regular readX() will also ensure write ordering,
-but should only be used when the 
-driver has to be sure that the write has actually arrived at the device
-(not that it's simply ordered with respect to other writes), since a
-full readX() is a relatively expensive operation.
-
-Generally, one should use :c:func:`mmiowb()` prior to releasing a spinlock
-that protects regions using :c:func:`writeb()` or similar functions that
-aren't surrounded by readb() calls, which will ensure ordering
-and flushing. The following pseudocode illustrates what might occur if
-write ordering isn't guaranteed via :c:func:`mmiowb()` or one of the
-readX() functions::
-
-    CPU A:  spin_lock_irqsave(&dev_lock, flags)
-    CPU A:  ...
-    CPU A:  writel(newval, ring_ptr);
-    CPU A:  spin_unlock_irqrestore(&dev_lock, flags)
-            ...
-    CPU B:  spin_lock_irqsave(&dev_lock, flags)
-    CPU B:  writel(newval2, ring_ptr);
-    CPU B:  ...
-    CPU B:  spin_unlock_irqrestore(&dev_lock, flags)
-
-In the case above, newval2 could be written to ring_ptr before newval.
-Fixing it is easy though::
-
-    CPU A:  spin_lock_irqsave(&dev_lock, flags)
-    CPU A:  ...
-    CPU A:  writel(newval, ring_ptr);
-    CPU A:  mmiowb(); /* ensure no other writes beat us to the device */
-    CPU A:  spin_unlock_irqrestore(&dev_lock, flags)
-            ...
-    CPU B:  spin_lock_irqsave(&dev_lock, flags)
-    CPU B:  writel(newval2, ring_ptr);
-    CPU B:  ...
-    CPU B:  mmiowb();
-    CPU B:  spin_unlock_irqrestore(&dev_lock, flags)
-
-See tg3.c for a real world example of how to use :c:func:`mmiowb()`
-
 PCI ordering rules also guarantee that PIO read responses arrive after any
 outstanding DMA writes from that bus, since for some devices the result of
 a readb() call may signal to the driver that a DMA transaction is
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/device_link.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/device_link.rst
index d6763272e747..ae1e3d0394b0 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-api/device_link.rst
+++ b/Documentation/driver-api/device_link.rst
@@ -1,6 +1,9 @@
 .. |struct dev_pm_domain| replace:: :c:type:`struct dev_pm_domain <dev_pm_domain>`
 .. |struct generic_pm_domain| replace:: :c:type:`struct generic_pm_domain <generic_pm_domain>`
 
+
+.. _device_link:
+
 ============
 Device links
 ============
@@ -25,8 +28,8 @@ suspend/resume and shutdown ordering.
 
 Device links allow representation of such dependencies in the driver core.
 
-In its standard form, a device link combines *both* dependency types:
-It guarantees correct suspend/resume and shutdown ordering between a
+In its standard or *managed* form, a device link combines *both* dependency
+types:  It guarantees correct suspend/resume and shutdown ordering between a
 "supplier" device and its "consumer" devices, and it guarantees driver
 presence on the supplier.  The consumer devices are not probed before the
 supplier is bound to a driver, and they're unbound before the supplier
@@ -59,18 +62,24 @@ device ``->probe`` callback or a boot-time PCI quirk.
 
 Another example for an inconsistent state would be a device link that
 represents a driver presence dependency, yet is added from the consumer's
-``->probe`` callback while the supplier hasn't probed yet:  Had the driver
-core known about the device link earlier, it wouldn't have probed the
+``->probe`` callback while the supplier hasn't started to probe yet:  Had the
+driver core known about the device link earlier, it wouldn't have probed the
 consumer in the first place.  The onus is thus on the consumer to check
 presence of the supplier after adding the link, and defer probing on
-non-presence.
-
-If a device link is added in the ``->probe`` callback of the supplier or
-consumer driver, it is typically deleted in its ``->remove`` callback for
-symmetry.  That way, if the driver is compiled as a module, the device
-link is added on module load and orderly deleted on unload.  The same
-restrictions that apply to device link addition (e.g. exclusion of a
-parallel suspend/resume transition) apply equally to deletion.
+non-presence.  [Note that it is valid to create a link from the consumer's
+``->probe`` callback while the supplier is still probing, but the consumer must
+know that the supplier is functional already at the link creation time (that is
+the case, for instance, if the consumer has just acquired some resources that
+would not have been available had the supplier not been functional then).]
+
+If a device link with ``DL_FLAG_STATELESS`` set (i.e. a stateless device link)
+is added in the ``->probe`` callback of the supplier or consumer driver, it is
+typically deleted in its ``->remove`` callback for symmetry.  That way, if the
+driver is compiled as a module, the device link is added on module load and
+orderly deleted on unload.  The same restrictions that apply to device link
+addition (e.g. exclusion of a parallel suspend/resume transition) apply equally
+to deletion.  Device links with ``DL_FLAG_STATELESS`` unset (i.e. managed
+device links) are deleted automatically by the driver core.
 
 Several flags may be specified on device link addition, two of which
 have already been mentioned above:  ``DL_FLAG_STATELESS`` to express that no
@@ -80,25 +89,55 @@ integration is desired.
 
 Two other flags are specifically targeted at use cases where the device
 link is added from the consumer's ``->probe`` callback:  ``DL_FLAG_RPM_ACTIVE``
-can be specified to runtime resume the supplier upon addition of the
-device link.  ``DL_FLAG_AUTOREMOVE_CONSUMER`` causes the device link to be
-automatically purged when the consumer fails to probe or later unbinds.
-This obviates the need to explicitly delete the link in the ``->remove``
-callback or in the error path of the ``->probe`` callback.
+can be specified to runtime resume the supplier and prevent it from suspending
+before the consumer is runtime suspended.  ``DL_FLAG_AUTOREMOVE_CONSUMER``
+causes the device link to be automatically purged when the consumer fails to
+probe or later unbinds.
 
 Similarly, when the device link is added from supplier's ``->probe`` callback,
 ``DL_FLAG_AUTOREMOVE_SUPPLIER`` causes the device link to be automatically
 purged when the supplier fails to probe or later unbinds.
 
+If neither ``DL_FLAG_AUTOREMOVE_CONSUMER`` nor ``DL_FLAG_AUTOREMOVE_SUPPLIER``
+is set, ``DL_FLAG_AUTOPROBE_CONSUMER`` can be used to request the driver core
+to probe for a driver for the consumer driver on the link automatically after
+a driver has been bound to the supplier device.
+
+Note, however, that any combinations of ``DL_FLAG_AUTOREMOVE_CONSUMER``,
+``DL_FLAG_AUTOREMOVE_SUPPLIER`` or ``DL_FLAG_AUTOPROBE_CONSUMER`` with
+``DL_FLAG_STATELESS`` are invalid and cannot be used.
+
 Limitations
 ===========
 
-Driver authors should be aware that a driver presence dependency (i.e. when
-``DL_FLAG_STATELESS`` is not specified on link addition) may cause probing of
-the consumer to be deferred indefinitely.  This can become a problem if the
-consumer is required to probe before a certain initcall level is reached.
-Worse, if the supplier driver is blacklisted or missing, the consumer will
-never be probed.
+Driver authors should be aware that a driver presence dependency for managed
+device links (i.e. when ``DL_FLAG_STATELESS`` is not specified on link addition)
+may cause probing of the consumer to be deferred indefinitely.  This can become
+a problem if the consumer is required to probe before a certain initcall level
+is reached.  Worse, if the supplier driver is blacklisted or missing, the
+consumer will never be probed.
+
+Moreover, managed device links cannot be deleted directly.  They are deleted
+by the driver core when they are not necessary any more in accordance with the
+``DL_FLAG_AUTOREMOVE_CONSUMER`` and ``DL_FLAG_AUTOREMOVE_SUPPLIER`` flags.
+However, stateless device links (i.e. device links with ``DL_FLAG_STATELESS``
+set) are expected to be removed by whoever called :c:func:`device_link_add()`
+to add them with the help of either :c:func:`device_link_del()` or
+:c:func:`device_link_remove()`.
+
+Passing ``DL_FLAG_RPM_ACTIVE`` along with ``DL_FLAG_STATELESS`` to
+:c:func:`device_link_add()` may cause the PM-runtime usage counter of the
+supplier device to remain nonzero after a subsequent invocation of either
+:c:func:`device_link_del()` or :c:func:`device_link_remove()` to remove the
+device link returned by it.  This happens if :c:func:`device_link_add()` is
+called twice in a row for the same consumer-supplier pair without removing the
+link between these calls, in which case allowing the PM-runtime usage counter
+of the supplier to drop on an attempt to remove the link may cause it to be
+suspended while the consumer is still PM-runtime-active and that has to be
+avoided.  [To work around this limitation it is sufficient to let the consumer
+runtime suspend at least once, or call :c:func:`pm_runtime_set_suspended()` for
+it with PM-runtime disabled, between the :c:func:`device_link_add()` and
+:c:func:`device_link_del()` or :c:func:`device_link_remove()` calls.]
 
 Sometimes drivers depend on optional resources.  They are able to operate
 in a degraded mode (reduced feature set or performance) when those resources
@@ -282,4 +321,4 @@ API
 ===
 
 .. kernel-doc:: drivers/base/core.c
-   :functions: device_link_add device_link_del
+   :functions: device_link_add device_link_del device_link_remove
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/dmaengine/client.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/dmaengine/client.rst
index fbbb2831f29f..45953f171500 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-api/dmaengine/client.rst
+++ b/Documentation/driver-api/dmaengine/client.rst
@@ -168,6 +168,13 @@ The details of these operations are:
    dmaengine_submit() will not start the DMA operation, it merely adds
    it to the pending queue. For this, see step 5, dma_async_issue_pending.
 
+   .. note::
+
+      After calling ``dmaengine_submit()`` the submitted transfer descriptor
+      (``struct dma_async_tx_descriptor``) belongs to the DMA engine.
+      Consequently, the client must consider invalid the pointer to that
+      descriptor.
+
 5. Issue pending DMA requests and wait for callback notification
 
    The transactions in the pending queue can be activated by calling the
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/dmaengine/dmatest.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/dmaengine/dmatest.rst
index 8d81f1a7169b..e78d070bb468 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-api/dmaengine/dmatest.rst
+++ b/Documentation/driver-api/dmaengine/dmatest.rst
@@ -59,6 +59,7 @@ parameter, that specific channel is requested using the dmaengine and a thread
 is created with the existing parameters. This thread is set as pending
 and will be executed once run is set to 1. Any parameters set after the thread
 is created are not applied.
+
 .. hint::
   available channel list could be extracted by running the following command::
 
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/generic-counter.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/generic-counter.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0c161b1a3be6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/driver-api/generic-counter.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,342 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=========================
+Generic Counter Interface
+=========================
+
+Introduction
+============
+
+Counter devices are prevalent within a diverse spectrum of industries.
+The ubiquitous presence of these devices necessitates a common interface
+and standard of interaction and exposure. This driver API attempts to
+resolve the issue of duplicate code found among existing counter device
+drivers by introducing a generic counter interface for consumption. The
+Generic Counter interface enables drivers to support and expose a common
+set of components and functionality present in counter devices.
+
+Theory
+======
+
+Counter devices can vary greatly in design, but regardless of whether
+some devices are quadrature encoder counters or tally counters, all
+counter devices consist of a core set of components. This core set of
+components, shared by all counter devices, is what forms the essence of
+the Generic Counter interface.
+
+There are three core components to a counter:
+
+* Count:
+  Count data for a set of Signals.
+
+* Signal:
+  Input data that is evaluated by the counter to determine the count
+  data.
+
+* Synapse:
+  The association of a Signal with a respective Count.
+
+COUNT
+-----
+A Count represents the count data for a set of Signals. The Generic
+Counter interface provides the following available count data types:
+
+* COUNT_POSITION:
+  Unsigned integer value representing position.
+
+A Count has a count function mode which represents the update behavior
+for the count data. The Generic Counter interface provides the following
+available count function modes:
+
+* Increase:
+  Accumulated count is incremented.
+
+* Decrease:
+  Accumulated count is decremented.
+
+* Pulse-Direction:
+  Rising edges on signal A updates the respective count. The input level
+  of signal B determines direction.
+
+* Quadrature:
+  A pair of quadrature encoding signals are evaluated to determine
+  position and direction. The following Quadrature modes are available:
+
+  - x1 A:
+    If direction is forward, rising edges on quadrature pair signal A
+    updates the respective count; if the direction is backward, falling
+    edges on quadrature pair signal A updates the respective count.
+    Quadrature encoding determines the direction.
+
+  - x1 B:
+    If direction is forward, rising edges on quadrature pair signal B
+    updates the respective count; if the direction is backward, falling
+    edges on quadrature pair signal B updates the respective count.
+    Quadrature encoding determines the direction.
+
+  - x2 A:
+    Any state transition on quadrature pair signal A updates the
+    respective count. Quadrature encoding determines the direction.
+
+  - x2 B:
+    Any state transition on quadrature pair signal B updates the
+    respective count. Quadrature encoding determines the direction.
+
+  - x4:
+    Any state transition on either quadrature pair signals updates the
+    respective count. Quadrature encoding determines the direction.
+
+A Count has a set of one or more associated Signals.
+
+SIGNAL
+------
+A Signal represents a counter input data; this is the input data that is
+evaluated by the counter to determine the count data; e.g. a quadrature
+signal output line of a rotary encoder. Not all counter devices provide
+user access to the Signal data.
+
+The Generic Counter interface provides the following available signal
+data types for when the Signal data is available for user access:
+
+* SIGNAL_LEVEL:
+  Signal line state level. The following states are possible:
+
+  - SIGNAL_LEVEL_LOW:
+    Signal line is in a low state.
+
+  - SIGNAL_LEVEL_HIGH:
+    Signal line is in a high state.
+
+A Signal may be associated with one or more Counts.
+
+SYNAPSE
+-------
+A Synapse represents the association of a Signal with a respective
+Count. Signal data affects respective Count data, and the Synapse
+represents this relationship.
+
+The Synapse action mode specifies the Signal data condition which
+triggers the respective Count's count function evaluation to update the
+count data. The Generic Counter interface provides the following
+available action modes:
+
+* None:
+  Signal does not trigger the count function. In Pulse-Direction count
+  function mode, this Signal is evaluated as Direction.
+
+* Rising Edge:
+  Low state transitions to high state.
+
+* Falling Edge:
+  High state transitions to low state.
+
+* Both Edges:
+  Any state transition.
+
+A counter is defined as a set of input signals associated with count
+data that are generated by the evaluation of the state of the associated
+input signals as defined by the respective count functions. Within the
+context of the Generic Counter interface, a counter consists of Counts
+each associated with a set of Signals, whose respective Synapse
+instances represent the count function update conditions for the
+associated Counts.
+
+Paradigm
+========
+
+The most basic counter device may be expressed as a single Count
+associated with a single Signal via a single Synapse. Take for example
+a counter device which simply accumulates a count of rising edges on a
+source input line::
+
+                Count                Synapse        Signal
+                -----                -------        ------
+        +---------------------+
+        | Data: Count         |    Rising Edge     ________
+        | Function: Increase  |  <-------------   / Source \
+        |                     |                  ____________
+        +---------------------+
+
+In this example, the Signal is a source input line with a pulsing
+voltage, while the Count is a persistent count value which is repeatedly
+incremented. The Signal is associated with the respective Count via a
+Synapse. The increase function is triggered by the Signal data condition
+specified by the Synapse -- in this case a rising edge condition on the
+voltage input line. In summary, the counter device existence and
+behavior is aptly represented by respective Count, Signal, and Synapse
+components: a rising edge condition triggers an increase function on an
+accumulating count datum.
+
+A counter device is not limited to a single Signal; in fact, in theory
+many Signals may be associated with even a single Count. For example, a
+quadrature encoder counter device can keep track of position based on
+the states of two input lines::
+
+                   Count                 Synapse     Signal
+                   -----                 -------     ------
+        +-------------------------+
+        | Data: Position          |    Both Edges     ___
+        | Function: Quadrature x4 |  <------------   / A \
+        |                         |                 _______
+        |                         |
+        |                         |    Both Edges     ___
+        |                         |  <------------   / B \
+        |                         |                 _______
+        +-------------------------+
+
+In this example, two Signals (quadrature encoder lines A and B) are
+associated with a single Count: a rising or falling edge on either A or
+B triggers the "Quadrature x4" function which determines the direction
+of movement and updates the respective position data. The "Quadrature
+x4" function is likely implemented in the hardware of the quadrature
+encoder counter device; the Count, Signals, and Synapses simply
+represent this hardware behavior and functionality.
+
+Signals associated with the same Count can have differing Synapse action
+mode conditions. For example, a quadrature encoder counter device
+operating in a non-quadrature Pulse-Direction mode could have one input
+line dedicated for movement and a second input line dedicated for
+direction::
+
+                   Count                   Synapse      Signal
+                   -----                   -------      ------
+        +---------------------------+
+        | Data: Position            |    Rising Edge     ___
+        | Function: Pulse-Direction |  <-------------   / A \ (Movement)
+        |                           |                  _______
+        |                           |
+        |                           |       None         ___
+        |                           |  <-------------   / B \ (Direction)
+        |                           |                  _______
+        +---------------------------+
+
+Only Signal A triggers the "Pulse-Direction" update function, but the
+instantaneous state of Signal B is still required in order to know the
+direction so that the position data may be properly updated. Ultimately,
+both Signals are associated with the same Count via two respective
+Synapses, but only one Synapse has an active action mode condition which
+triggers the respective count function while the other is left with a
+"None" condition action mode to indicate its respective Signal's
+availability for state evaluation despite its non-triggering mode.
+
+Keep in mind that the Signal, Synapse, and Count are abstract
+representations which do not need to be closely married to their
+respective physical sources. This allows the user of a counter to
+divorce themselves from the nuances of physical components (such as
+whether an input line is differential or single-ended) and instead focus
+on the core idea of what the data and process represent (e.g. position
+as interpreted from quadrature encoding data).
+
+Userspace Interface
+===================
+
+Several sysfs attributes are generated by the Generic Counter interface,
+and reside under the /sys/bus/counter/devices/counterX directory, where
+counterX refers to the respective counter device. Please see
+Documentation/ABI/testing/sys-bus-counter-generic-sysfs for detailed
+information on each Generic Counter interface sysfs attribute.
+
+Through these sysfs attributes, programs and scripts may interact with
+the Generic Counter paradigm Counts, Signals, and Synapses of respective
+counter devices.
+
+Driver API
+==========
+
+Driver authors may utilize the Generic Counter interface in their code
+by including the include/linux/counter.h header file. This header file
+provides several core data structures, function prototypes, and macros
+for defining a counter device.
+
+.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/counter.h
+   :internal:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: drivers/counter/counter.c
+   :export:
+
+Implementation
+==============
+
+To support a counter device, a driver must first allocate the available
+Counter Signals via counter_signal structures. These Signals should
+be stored as an array and set to the signals array member of an
+allocated counter_device structure before the Counter is registered to
+the system.
+
+Counter Counts may be allocated via counter_count structures, and
+respective Counter Signal associations (Synapses) made via
+counter_synapse structures. Associated counter_synapse structures are
+stored as an array and set to the the synapses array member of the
+respective counter_count structure. These counter_count structures are
+set to the counts array member of an allocated counter_device structure
+before the Counter is registered to the system.
+
+Driver callbacks should be provided to the counter_device structure via
+a constant counter_ops structure in order to communicate with the
+device: to read and write various Signals and Counts, and to set and get
+the "action mode" and "function mode" for various Synapses and Counts
+respectively.
+
+A defined counter_device structure may be registered to the system by
+passing it to the counter_register function, and unregistered by passing
+it to the counter_unregister function. Similarly, the
+devm_counter_register and devm_counter_unregister functions may be used
+if device memory-managed registration is desired.
+
+Extension sysfs attributes can be created for auxiliary functionality
+and data by passing in defined counter_device_ext, counter_count_ext,
+and counter_signal_ext structures. In these cases, the
+counter_device_ext structure is used for global configuration of the
+respective Counter device, while the counter_count_ext and
+counter_signal_ext structures allow for auxiliary exposure and
+configuration of a specific Count or Signal respectively.
+
+Architecture
+============
+
+When the Generic Counter interface counter module is loaded, the
+counter_init function is called which registers a bus_type named
+"counter" to the system. Subsequently, when the module is unloaded, the
+counter_exit function is called which unregisters the bus_type named
+"counter" from the system.
+
+Counter devices are registered to the system via the counter_register
+function, and later removed via the counter_unregister function. The
+counter_register function establishes a unique ID for the Counter
+device and creates a respective sysfs directory, where X is the
+mentioned unique ID:
+
+    /sys/bus/counter/devices/counterX
+
+Sysfs attributes are created within the counterX directory to expose
+functionality, configurations, and data relating to the Counts, Signals,
+and Synapses of the Counter device, as well as options and information
+for the Counter device itself.
+
+Each Signal has a directory created to house its relevant sysfs
+attributes, where Y is the unique ID of the respective Signal:
+
+    /sys/bus/counter/devices/counterX/signalY
+
+Similarly, each Count has a directory created to house its relevant
+sysfs attributes, where Y is the unique ID of the respective Count:
+
+    /sys/bus/counter/devices/counterX/countY
+
+For a more detailed breakdown of the available Generic Counter interface
+sysfs attributes, please refer to the
+Documentation/ABI/testing/sys-bus-counter file.
+
+The Signals and Counts associated with the Counter device are registered
+to the system as well by the counter_register function. The
+signal_read/signal_write driver callbacks are associated with their
+respective Signal attributes, while the count_read/count_write and
+function_get/function_set driver callbacks are associated with their
+respective Count attributes; similarly, the same is true for the
+action_get/action_set driver callbacks and their respective Synapse
+attributes. If a driver callback is left undefined, then the respective
+read/write permission is left disabled for the relevant attributes.
+
+Similarly, extension sysfs attributes are created for the defined
+counter_device_ext, counter_count_ext, and counter_signal_ext
+structures that are passed in.
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/board.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/board.rst
index a0f294e2e250..b37f3f7b8926 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/board.rst
+++ b/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/board.rst
@@ -204,6 +204,7 @@ between a caller and a respective .get/set_multiple() callback of a GPIO chip.
 
 In order to qualify for fast bitmap processing, the array must meet the
 following requirements:
+
 - pin hardware number of array member 0 must also be 0,
 - pin hardware numbers of consecutive array members which belong to the same
   chip as member 0 does must also match their array indexes.
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/driver.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/driver.rst
index a92d8837b62b..1ce7fcd0f989 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/driver.rst
+++ b/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/driver.rst
@@ -1,10 +1,8 @@
-================================
-GPIO Descriptor Driver Interface
-================================
+=====================
+GPIO Driver Interface
+=====================
 
-This document serves as a guide for GPIO chip drivers writers. Note that it
-describes the new descriptor-based interface. For a description of the
-deprecated integer-based GPIO interface please refer to gpio-legacy.txt.
+This document serves as a guide for writers of GPIO chip drivers.
 
 Each GPIO controller driver needs to include the following header, which defines
 the structures used to define a GPIO driver:
@@ -15,32 +13,49 @@ the structures used to define a GPIO driver:
 Internal Representation of GPIOs
 ================================
 
-Inside a GPIO driver, individual GPIOs are identified by their hardware number,
-which is a unique number between 0 and n, n being the number of GPIOs managed by
-the chip. This number is purely internal: the hardware number of a particular
-GPIO descriptor is never made visible outside of the driver.
-
-On top of this internal number, each GPIO also need to have a global number in
-the integer GPIO namespace so that it can be used with the legacy GPIO
+A GPIO chip handles one or more GPIO lines. To be considered a GPIO chip, the
+lines must conform to the definition: General Purpose Input/Output. If the
+line is not general purpose, it is not GPIO and should not be handled by a
+GPIO chip. The use case is the indicative: certain lines in a system may be
+called GPIO but serve a very particular purpose thus not meeting the criteria
+of a general purpose I/O. On the other hand a LED driver line may be used as a
+GPIO and should therefore still be handled by a GPIO chip driver.
+
+Inside a GPIO driver, individual GPIO lines are identified by their hardware
+number, sometime also referred to as ``offset``, which is a unique number
+between 0 and n-1, n being the number of GPIOs managed by the chip.
+
+The hardware GPIO number should be something intuitive to the hardware, for
+example if a system uses a memory-mapped set of I/O-registers where 32 GPIO
+lines are handled by one bit per line in a 32-bit register, it makes sense to
+use hardware offsets 0..31 for these, corresponding to bits 0..31 in the
+register.
+
+This number is purely internal: the hardware number of a particular GPIO
+line is never made visible outside of the driver.
+
+On top of this internal number, each GPIO line also needs to have a global
+number in the integer GPIO namespace so that it can be used with the legacy GPIO
 interface. Each chip must thus have a "base" number (which can be automatically
-assigned), and for each GPIO the global number will be (base + hardware number).
-Although the integer representation is considered deprecated, it still has many
-users and thus needs to be maintained.
+assigned), and for each GPIO line the global number will be (base + hardware
+number). Although the integer representation is considered deprecated, it still
+has many users and thus needs to be maintained.
 
-So for example one platform could use numbers 32-159 for GPIOs, with a
+So for example one platform could use global numbers 32-159 for GPIOs, with a
 controller defining 128 GPIOs at a "base" of 32 ; while another platform uses
-numbers 0..63 with one set of GPIO controllers, 64-79 with another type of GPIO
-controller, and on one particular board 80-95 with an FPGA. The numbers need not
-be contiguous; either of those platforms could also use numbers 2000-2063 to
-identify GPIOs in a bank of I2C GPIO expanders.
+global numbers 0..63 with one set of GPIO controllers, 64-79 with another type
+of GPIO controller, and on one particular board 80-95 with an FPGA. The legacy
+numbers need not be contiguous; either of those platforms could also use numbers
+2000-2063 to identify GPIO lines in a bank of I2C GPIO expanders.
 
 
 Controller Drivers: gpio_chip
 =============================
 
 In the gpiolib framework each GPIO controller is packaged as a "struct
-gpio_chip" (see linux/gpio/driver.h for its complete definition) with members
-common to each controller of that type:
+gpio_chip" (see <linux/gpio/driver.h> for its complete definition) with members
+common to each controller of that type, these should be assigned by the
+driver code:
 
  - methods to establish GPIO line direction
  - methods used to access GPIO line values
@@ -48,12 +63,12 @@ common to each controller of that type:
  - method to return the IRQ number associated to a given GPIO line
  - flag saying whether calls to its methods may sleep
  - optional line names array to identify lines
- - optional debugfs dump method (showing extra state like pullup config)
+ - optional debugfs dump method (showing extra state information)
  - optional base number (will be automatically assigned if omitted)
  - optional label for diagnostics and GPIO chip mapping using platform data
 
 The code implementing a gpio_chip should support multiple instances of the
-controller, possibly using the driver model. That code will configure each
+controller, preferably using the driver model. That code will configure each
 gpio_chip and issue ``gpiochip_add[_data]()`` or ``devm_gpiochip_add_data()``.
 Removing a GPIO controller should be rare; use ``[devm_]gpiochip_remove()``
 when it is unavoidable.
@@ -62,24 +77,28 @@ Often a gpio_chip is part of an instance-specific structure with states not
 exposed by the GPIO interfaces, such as addressing, power management, and more.
 Chips such as audio codecs will have complex non-GPIO states.
 
-Any debugfs dump method should normally ignore signals which haven't been
-requested as GPIOs. They can use gpiochip_is_requested(), which returns either
-NULL or the label associated with that GPIO when it was requested.
+Any debugfs dump method should normally ignore lines which haven't been
+requested. They can use gpiochip_is_requested(), which returns either
+NULL or the label associated with that GPIO line when it was requested.
 
-RT_FULL: the GPIO driver should not use spinlock_t or any sleepable APIs
-(like PM runtime) in its gpio_chip implementation (.get/.set and direction
-control callbacks) if it is expected to call GPIO APIs from atomic context
-on -RT (inside hard IRQ handlers and similar contexts). Normally this should
-not be required.
+Realtime considerations: the GPIO driver should not use spinlock_t or any
+sleepable APIs (like PM runtime) in its gpio_chip implementation (.get/.set
+and direction control callbacks) if it is expected to call GPIO APIs from
+atomic context on realtime kernels (inside hard IRQ handlers and similar
+contexts). Normally this should not be required.
 
 
 GPIO electrical configuration
 -----------------------------
 
-GPIOs can be configured for several electrical modes of operation by using the
-.set_config() callback. Currently this API supports setting debouncing and
-single-ended modes (open drain/open source). These settings are described
-below.
+GPIO lines can be configured for several electrical modes of operation by using
+the .set_config() callback. Currently this API supports setting:
+
+- Debouncing
+- Single-ended modes (open drain/open source)
+- Pull up and pull down resistor enablement
+
+These settings are described below.
 
 The .set_config() callback uses the same enumerators and configuration
 semantics as the generic pin control drivers. This is not a coincidence: it is
@@ -94,8 +113,8 @@ description needs to provide "GPIO ranges" mapping the GPIO line offsets to pin
 numbers on the pin controller so they can properly cross-reference each other.
 
 
-GPIOs with debounce support
----------------------------
+GPIO lines with debounce support
+--------------------------------
 
 Debouncing is a configuration set to a pin indicating that it is connected to
 a mechanical switch or button, or similar that may bounce. Bouncing means the
@@ -111,8 +130,8 @@ a certain number of milliseconds for debouncing, or just "on/off" if that time
 is not configurable.
 
 
-GPIOs with open drain/source support
-------------------------------------
+GPIO lines with open drain/source support
+-----------------------------------------
 
 Open drain (CMOS) or open collector (TTL) means the line is not actively driven
 high: instead you provide the drain/collector as output, so when the transistor
@@ -132,13 +151,13 @@ This configuration is normally used as a way to achieve one of two things:
 - Level-shifting: to reach a logical level higher than that of the silicon
   where the output resides.
 
-- inverse wire-OR on an I/O line, for example a GPIO line, making it possible
+- Inverse wire-OR on an I/O line, for example a GPIO line, making it possible
   for any driving stage on the line to drive it low even if any other output
   to the same line is simultaneously driving it high. A special case of this
-  is driving the SCL and SCA lines of an I2C bus, which is by definition a
+  is driving the SCL and SDA lines of an I2C bus, which is by definition a
   wire-OR bus.
 
-Both usecases require that the line be equipped with a pull-up resistor. This
+Both use cases require that the line be equipped with a pull-up resistor. This
 resistor will make the line tend to high level unless one of the transistors on
 the rail actively pulls it down.
 
@@ -208,27 +227,91 @@ For open source configuration the same principle is used, just that instead
 of actively driving the line low, it is set to input.
 
 
+GPIO lines with pull up/down resistor support
+---------------------------------------------
+
+A GPIO line can support pull-up/down using the .set_config() callback. This
+means that a pull up or pull-down resistor is available on the output of the
+GPIO line, and this resistor is software controlled.
+
+In discrete designs, a pull-up or pull-down resistor is simply soldered on
+the circuit board. This is not something we deal or model in software. The
+most you will think about these lines is that they will very likely be
+configured as open drain or open source (see the section above).
+
+The .set_config() callback can only turn pull up or down on and off, and will
+no have any semantic knowledge about the resistance used. It will only say
+switch a bit in a register enabling or disabling pull-up or pull-down.
+
+If the GPIO line supports shunting in different resistance values for the
+pull-up or pull-down resistor, the GPIO chip callback .set_config() will not
+suffice. For these complex use cases, a combined GPIO chip and pin controller
+need to be implemented, as the pin config interface of a pin controller
+supports more versatile control over electrical properties and can handle
+different pull-up or pull-down resistance values.
+
+
 GPIO drivers providing IRQs
----------------------------
+===========================
+
 It is custom that GPIO drivers (GPIO chips) are also providing interrupts,
 most often cascaded off a parent interrupt controller, and in some special
 cases the GPIO logic is melded with a SoC's primary interrupt controller.
 
-The IRQ portions of the GPIO block are implemented using an irqchip, using
+The IRQ portions of the GPIO block are implemented using an irq_chip, using
 the header <linux/irq.h>. So basically such a driver is utilizing two sub-
 systems simultaneously: gpio and irq.
 
-RT_FULL: a realtime compliant GPIO driver should not use spinlock_t or any
-sleepable APIs (like PM runtime) as part of its irq_chip implementation.
+It is legal for any IRQ consumer to request an IRQ from any irqchip even if it
+is a combined GPIO+IRQ driver. The basic premise is that gpio_chip and
+irq_chip are orthogonal, and offering their services independent of each
+other.
 
-* spinlock_t should be replaced with raw_spinlock_t [1].
-* If sleepable APIs have to be used, these can be done from the .irq_bus_lock()
+gpiod_to_irq() is just a convenience function to figure out the IRQ for a
+certain GPIO line and should not be relied upon to have been called before
+the IRQ is used.
+
+Always prepare the hardware and make it ready for action in respective
+callbacks from the GPIO and irq_chip APIs. Do not rely on gpiod_to_irq() having
+been called first.
+
+We can divide GPIO irqchips in two broad categories:
+
+- CASCADED INTERRUPT CHIPS: this means that the GPIO chip has one common
+  interrupt output line, which is triggered by any enabled GPIO line on that
+  chip. The interrupt output line will then be routed to an parent interrupt
+  controller one level up, in the most simple case the systems primary
+  interrupt controller. This is modeled by an irqchip that will inspect bits
+  inside the GPIO controller to figure out which line fired it. The irqchip
+  part of the driver needs to inspect registers to figure this out and it
+  will likely also need to acknowledge that it is handling the interrupt
+  by clearing some bit (sometime implicitly, by just reading a status
+  register) and it will often need to set up the configuration such as
+  edge sensitivity (rising or falling edge, or high/low level interrupt for
+  example).
+
+- HIERARCHICAL INTERRUPT CHIPS: this means that each GPIO line has a dedicated
+  irq line to a parent interrupt controller one level up. There is no need
+  to inquire the GPIO hardware to figure out which line has figured, but it
+  may still be necessary to acknowledge the interrupt and set up the
+  configuration such as edge sensitivity.
+
+Realtime considerations: a realtime compliant GPIO driver should not use
+spinlock_t or any sleepable APIs (like PM runtime) as part of its irqchip
+implementation.
+
+- spinlock_t should be replaced with raw_spinlock_t [1].
+- If sleepable APIs have to be used, these can be done from the .irq_bus_lock()
   and .irq_bus_unlock() callbacks, as these are the only slowpath callbacks
   on an irqchip. Create the callbacks if needed [2].
 
-GPIO irqchips usually fall in one of two categories:
 
-* CHAINED GPIO irqchips: these are usually the type that is embedded on
+Cascaded GPIO irqchips
+----------------------
+
+Cascaded GPIO irqchips usually fall in one of three categories:
+
+- CHAINED CASCADED GPIO IRQCHIPS: these are usually the type that is embedded on
   an SoC. This means that there is a fast IRQ flow handler for the GPIOs that
   gets called in a chain from the parent IRQ handler, most typically the
   system interrupt controller. This means that the GPIO irqchip handler will
@@ -245,16 +328,19 @@ GPIO irqchips usually fall in one of two categories:
   struct gpio_chip, as everything happens directly in the callbacks: no
   slow bus traffic like I2C can be used.
 
-  RT_FULL: Note, chained IRQ handlers will not be forced threaded on -RT.
-  As result, spinlock_t or any sleepable APIs (like PM runtime) can't be used
-  in chained IRQ handler.
-  If required (and if it can't be converted to the nested threaded GPIO irqchip)
-  a chained IRQ handler can be converted to generic irq handler and this way
-  it will be a threaded IRQ handler on -RT and a hard IRQ handler on non-RT
-  (for example, see [3]).
-  Know W/A: The generic_handle_irq() is expected to be called with IRQ disabled,
+  Realtime considerations: Note that chained IRQ handlers will not be forced
+  threaded on -RT. As a result, spinlock_t or any sleepable APIs (like PM
+  runtime) can't be used in a chained IRQ handler.
+
+  If required (and if it can't be converted to the nested threaded GPIO irqchip,
+  see below) a chained IRQ handler can be converted to generic irq handler and
+  this way it will become a threaded IRQ handler on -RT and a hard IRQ handler
+  on non-RT (for example, see [3]).
+
+  The generic_handle_irq() is expected to be called with IRQ disabled,
   so the IRQ core will complain if it is called from an IRQ handler which is
-  forced to a thread. The "fake?" raw lock can be used to W/A this problem::
+  forced to a thread. The "fake?" raw lock can be used to work around this
+  problem::
 
 	raw_spinlock_t wa_lock;
 	static irqreturn_t omap_gpio_irq_handler(int irq, void *gpiobank)
@@ -263,7 +349,7 @@ GPIO irqchips usually fall in one of two categories:
 		generic_handle_irq(irq_find_mapping(bank->chip.irq.domain, bit));
 		raw_spin_unlock_irqrestore(&bank->wa_lock, wa_lock_flags);
 
-* GENERIC CHAINED GPIO irqchips: these are the same as "CHAINED GPIO irqchips",
+- GENERIC CHAINED GPIO IRQCHIPS: these are the same as "CHAINED GPIO irqchips",
   but chained IRQ handlers are not used. Instead GPIO IRQs dispatching is
   performed by generic IRQ handler which is configured using request_irq().
   The GPIO irqchip will then end up calling something like this sequence in
@@ -273,16 +359,19 @@ GPIO irqchips usually fall in one of two categories:
         for each detected GPIO IRQ
             generic_handle_irq(...);
 
-  RT_FULL: Such kind of handlers will be forced threaded on -RT, as result IRQ
-  core will complain that generic_handle_irq() is called with IRQ enabled and
-  the same W/A as for "CHAINED GPIO irqchips" can be applied.
+  Realtime considerations: this kind of handlers will be forced threaded on -RT,
+  and as result the IRQ core will complain that generic_handle_irq() is called
+  with IRQ enabled and the same work around as for "CHAINED GPIO irqchips" can
+  be applied.
+
+- NESTED THREADED GPIO IRQCHIPS: these are off-chip GPIO expanders and any
+  other GPIO irqchip residing on the other side of a sleeping bus such as I2C
+  or SPI.
 
-* NESTED THREADED GPIO irqchips: these are off-chip GPIO expanders and any
-  other GPIO irqchip residing on the other side of a sleeping bus. Of course
-  such drivers that need slow bus traffic to read out IRQ status and similar,
-  traffic which may in turn incur other IRQs to happen, cannot be handled
-  in a quick IRQ handler with IRQs disabled. Instead they need to spawn a
-  thread and then mask the parent IRQ line until the interrupt is handled
+  Of course such drivers that need slow bus traffic to read out IRQ status and
+  similar, traffic which may in turn incur other IRQs to happen, cannot be
+  handled in a quick IRQ handler with IRQs disabled. Instead they need to spawn
+  a thread and then mask the parent IRQ line until the interrupt is handled
   by the driver. The hallmark of this driver is to call something like
   this in its interrupt handler::
 
@@ -294,36 +383,46 @@ GPIO irqchips usually fall in one of two categories:
   flag on struct gpio_chip to true, indicating that this chip may sleep
   when accessing the GPIOs.
 
+  These kinds of irqchips are inherently realtime tolerant as they are
+  already set up to handle sleeping contexts.
+
+
+Infrastructure helpers for GPIO irqchips
+----------------------------------------
+
 To help out in handling the set-up and management of GPIO irqchips and the
 associated irqdomain and resource allocation callbacks, the gpiolib has
 some helpers that can be enabled by selecting the GPIOLIB_IRQCHIP Kconfig
 symbol:
 
-* gpiochip_irqchip_add(): adds a chained irqchip to a gpiochip. It will pass
-  the struct gpio_chip* for the chip to all IRQ callbacks, so the callbacks
-  need to embed the gpio_chip in its state container and obtain a pointer
-  to the container using container_of().
+- gpiochip_irqchip_add(): adds a chained cascaded irqchip to a gpiochip. It
+  will pass the struct gpio_chip* for the chip to all IRQ callbacks, so the
+  callbacks need to embed the gpio_chip in its state container and obtain a
+  pointer to the container using container_of().
   (See Documentation/driver-model/design-patterns.txt)
 
-* gpiochip_irqchip_add_nested(): adds a nested irqchip to a gpiochip.
+- gpiochip_irqchip_add_nested(): adds a nested cascaded irqchip to a gpiochip,
+  as discussed above regarding different types of cascaded irqchips. The
+  cascaded irq has to be handled by a threaded interrupt handler.
   Apart from that it works exactly like the chained irqchip.
 
-* gpiochip_set_chained_irqchip(): sets up a chained irq handler for a
+- gpiochip_set_chained_irqchip(): sets up a chained cascaded irq handler for a
   gpio_chip from a parent IRQ and passes the struct gpio_chip* as handler
-  data. (Notice handler data, since the irqchip data is likely used by the
-  parent irqchip!).
+  data. Notice that we pass is as the handler data, since the irqchip data is
+  likely used by the parent irqchip.
 
-* gpiochip_set_nested_irqchip(): sets up a nested irq handler for a
+- gpiochip_set_nested_irqchip(): sets up a nested cascaded irq handler for a
   gpio_chip from a parent IRQ. As the parent IRQ has usually been
   explicitly requested by the driver, this does very little more than
   mark all the child IRQs as having the other IRQ as parent.
 
-If there is a need to exclude certain GPIOs from the IRQ domain, you can
-set .irq.need_valid_mask of the gpiochip before gpiochip_add_data() is
-called. This allocates an .irq.valid_mask with as many bits set as there
-are GPIOs in the chip. Drivers can exclude GPIOs by clearing bits from this
-mask. The mask must be filled in before gpiochip_irqchip_add() or
-gpiochip_irqchip_add_nested() is called.
+If there is a need to exclude certain GPIO lines from the IRQ domain handled by
+these helpers, we can set .irq.need_valid_mask of the gpiochip before
+[devm_]gpiochip_add_data() is called. This allocates an .irq.valid_mask with as
+many bits set as there are GPIO lines in the chip, each bit representing line
+0..n-1. Drivers can exclude GPIO lines by clearing bits from this mask. The mask
+must be filled in before gpiochip_irqchip_add() or gpiochip_irqchip_add_nested()
+is called.
 
 To use the helpers please keep the following in mind:
 
@@ -333,33 +432,24 @@ To use the helpers please keep the following in mind:
 
 - Nominally set all handlers to handle_bad_irq() in the setup call and pass
   handle_bad_irq() as flow handler parameter in gpiochip_irqchip_add() if it is
-  expected for GPIO driver that irqchip .set_type() callback have to be called
-  before using/enabling GPIO IRQ. Then set the handler to handle_level_irq()
-  and/or handle_edge_irq() in the irqchip .set_type() callback depending on
-  what your controller supports.
+  expected for GPIO driver that irqchip .set_type() callback will be called
+  before using/enabling each GPIO IRQ. Then set the handler to
+  handle_level_irq() and/or handle_edge_irq() in the irqchip .set_type()
+  callback depending on what your controller supports and what is requested
+  by the consumer.
 
-It is legal for any IRQ consumer to request an IRQ from any irqchip no matter
-if that is a combined GPIO+IRQ driver. The basic premise is that gpio_chip and
-irq_chip are orthogonal, and offering their services independent of each
-other.
-
-gpiod_to_irq() is just a convenience function to figure out the IRQ for a
-certain GPIO line and should not be relied upon to have been called before
-the IRQ is used.
 
-So always prepare the hardware and make it ready for action in respective
-callbacks from the GPIO and irqchip APIs. Do not rely on gpiod_to_irq() having
-been called first.
+Locking IRQ usage
+-----------------
 
-This orthogonality leads to ambiguities that we need to solve: if there is
-competition inside the subsystem which side is using the resource (a certain
-GPIO line and register for example) it needs to deny certain operations and
-keep track of usage inside of the gpiolib subsystem. This is why the API
-below exists.
+Since GPIO and irq_chip are orthogonal, we can get conflicts between different
+use cases. For example a GPIO line used for IRQs should be an input line,
+it does not make sense to fire interrupts on an output GPIO.
 
+If there is competition inside the subsystem which side is using the
+resource (a certain GPIO line and register for example) it needs to deny
+certain operations and keep track of usage inside of the gpiolib subsystem.
 
-Locking IRQ usage
------------------
 Input GPIOs can be used as IRQ signals. When this happens, a driver is requested
 to mark the GPIO as being used as an IRQ::
 
@@ -380,9 +470,15 @@ assigned.
 
 Disabling and enabling IRQs
 ---------------------------
+
+In some (fringe) use cases, a driver may be using a GPIO line as input for IRQs,
+but occasionally switch that line over to drive output and then back to being
+an input with interrupts again. This happens on things like CEC (Consumer
+Electronics Control).
+
 When a GPIO is used as an IRQ signal, then gpiolib also needs to know if
 the IRQ is enabled or disabled. In order to inform gpiolib about this,
-a driver should call::
+the irqchip driver should call::
 
 	void gpiochip_disable_irq(struct gpio_chip *chip, unsigned int offset)
 
@@ -398,40 +494,45 @@ irqchip.
 When using the gpiolib irqchip helpers, these callbacks are automatically
 assigned.
 
+
 Real-Time compliance for GPIO IRQ chips
 ---------------------------------------
 
-Any provider of irqchips needs to be carefully tailored to support Real Time
+Any provider of irqchips needs to be carefully tailored to support Real-Time
 preemption. It is desirable that all irqchips in the GPIO subsystem keep this
 in mind and do the proper testing to assure they are real time-enabled.
-So, pay attention on above " RT_FULL:" notes, please.
-The following is a checklist to follow when preparing a driver for real
-time-compliance:
 
-- ensure spinlock_t is not used as part irq_chip implementation;
-- ensure that sleepable APIs are not used as part irq_chip implementation.
+So, pay attention on above realtime considerations in the documentation.
+
+The following is a checklist to follow when preparing a driver for real-time
+compliance:
+
+- ensure spinlock_t is not used as part irq_chip implementation
+- ensure that sleepable APIs are not used as part irq_chip implementation
   If sleepable APIs have to be used, these can be done from the .irq_bus_lock()
-  and .irq_bus_unlock() callbacks;
+  and .irq_bus_unlock() callbacks
 - Chained GPIO irqchips: ensure spinlock_t or any sleepable APIs are not used
-  from chained IRQ handler;
+  from the chained IRQ handler
 - Generic chained GPIO irqchips: take care about generic_handle_irq() calls and
-  apply corresponding W/A;
-- Chained GPIO irqchips: get rid of chained IRQ handler and use generic irq
-  handler if possible :)
-- regmap_mmio: Sry, but you are in trouble :( if MMIO regmap is used as for
-  GPIO IRQ chip implementation;
-- Test your driver with the appropriate in-kernel real time test cases for both
-  level and edge IRQs.
+  apply corresponding work-around
+- Chained GPIO irqchips: get rid of the chained IRQ handler and use generic irq
+  handler if possible
+- regmap_mmio: it is possible to disable internal locking in regmap by setting
+  .disable_locking and handling the locking in the GPIO driver
+- Test your driver with the appropriate in-kernel real-time test cases for both
+  level and edge IRQs
+
+* [1] http://www.spinics.net/lists/linux-omap/msg120425.html
+* [2] https://lkml.org/lkml/2015/9/25/494
+* [3] https://lkml.org/lkml/2015/9/25/495
 
 
 Requesting self-owned GPIO pins
--------------------------------
+===============================
 
 Sometimes it is useful to allow a GPIO chip driver to request its own GPIO
-descriptors through the gpiolib API. Using gpio_request() for this purpose
-does not help since it pins the module to the kernel forever (it calls
-try_module_get()). A GPIO driver can use the following functions instead
-to request and free descriptors without being pinned to the kernel forever::
+descriptors through the gpiolib API. A GPIO driver can use the following
+functions to request and free descriptors::
 
 	struct gpio_desc *gpiochip_request_own_desc(struct gpio_desc *desc,
 						    u16 hwnum,
@@ -446,7 +547,3 @@ gpiochip_free_own_desc().
 These functions must be used with care since they do not affect module use
 count. Do not use the functions to request gpio descriptors not owned by the
 calling driver.
-
-* [1] http://www.spinics.net/lists/linux-omap/msg120425.html
-* [2] https://lkml.org/lkml/2015/9/25/494
-* [3] https://lkml.org/lkml/2015/9/25/495
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/legacy.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/legacy.rst
index 5e9421e05f1d..9bc34ba697d9 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/legacy.rst
+++ b/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/legacy.rst
@@ -690,11 +690,10 @@ and have the following read/write attributes:
 		and if it has been configured to generate interrupts (see the
 		description of "edge"), you can poll(2) on that file and
 		poll(2) will return whenever the interrupt was triggered. If
-		you use poll(2), set the events POLLPRI and POLLERR. If you
-		use select(2), set the file descriptor in exceptfds. After
-		poll(2) returns, either lseek(2) to the beginning of the sysfs
-		file and read the new value or close the file and re-open it
-		to read the value.
+		you use poll(2), set the events POLLPRI. If you use select(2),
+		set the file descriptor in exceptfds. After poll(2) returns,
+		either lseek(2) to the beginning of the sysfs file and read the
+		new value or close the file and re-open it to read the value.
 
 	"edge" ... reads as either "none", "rising", "falling", or
 		"both". Write these strings to select the signal edge(s)
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/iio/buffers.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/iio/buffers.rst
index 02c99a6bee18..e9036ef9f8f4 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-api/iio/buffers.rst
+++ b/Documentation/driver-api/iio/buffers.rst
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ IIO buffer setup
 ================
 
 The meta information associated with a channel reading placed in a buffer is
-called a scan element . The important bits configuring scan elements are
+called a scan element. The important bits configuring scan elements are
 exposed to userspace applications via the
 :file:`/sys/bus/iio/iio:device{X}/scan_elements/*` directory. This file contains
 attributes of the following form:
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/iio/core.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/iio/core.rst
index 9a34ae03b679..b0bc0c028cc5 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-api/iio/core.rst
+++ b/Documentation/driver-api/iio/core.rst
@@ -2,8 +2,8 @@
 Core elements
 =============
 
-The Industrial I/O core offers a unified framework for writing drivers for
-many different types of embedded sensors. a standard interface to user space
+The Industrial I/O core offers both a unified framework for writing drivers for
+many different types of embedded sensors and a standard interface to user space
 applications manipulating sensors. The implementation can be found under
 :file:`drivers/iio/industrialio-*`
 
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ Industrial I/O Devices
 ----------------------
 
 * struct :c:type:`iio_dev` - industrial I/O device
-* :c:func:`iio_device_alloc()` - alocate an :c:type:`iio_dev` from a driver
+* :c:func:`iio_device_alloc()` - allocate an :c:type:`iio_dev` from a driver
 * :c:func:`iio_device_free()` - free an :c:type:`iio_dev` from a driver
 * :c:func:`iio_device_register()` - register a device with the IIO subsystem
 * :c:func:`iio_device_unregister()` - unregister a device from the IIO
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/iio/hw-consumer.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/iio/hw-consumer.rst
index 8facce6a6733..e0fe0b98230e 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-api/iio/hw-consumer.rst
+++ b/Documentation/driver-api/iio/hw-consumer.rst
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 ===========
 HW consumer
 ===========
-An IIO device can be directly connected to another device in hardware. in this
+An IIO device can be directly connected to another device in hardware. In this
 case the buffers between IIO provider and IIO consumer are handled by hardware.
 The Industrial I/O HW consumer offers a way to bond these IIO devices without
 software buffer for data. The implementation can be found under
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/iio/triggers.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/iio/triggers.rst
index f89d37e7dd82..5c2156de6284 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-api/iio/triggers.rst
+++ b/Documentation/driver-api/iio/triggers.rst
@@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ There are two locations in sysfs related to triggers:
 
 * :file:`/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:device{X}/trigger/*`, this directory is
   created once the device supports a triggered buffer. We can associate a
-  trigger with our  device by writing the trigger's name in the
+  trigger with our device by writing the trigger's name in the
   :file:`current_trigger` file.
 
 IIO trigger setup
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/index.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/index.rst
index ab38ced66a44..d26308af6036 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-api/index.rst
+++ b/Documentation/driver-api/index.rst
@@ -22,6 +22,7 @@ available subsections can be seen below.
    device_connection
    dma-buf
    device_link
+   component
    message-based
    sound
    frame-buffer
@@ -55,6 +56,8 @@ available subsections can be seen below.
    slimbus
    soundwire/index
    fpga/index
+   acpi/index
+   generic-counter
 
 .. only::  subproject and html
 
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/pci/p2pdma.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/pci/p2pdma.rst
index 6d85b5a2598d..44deb52beeb4 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-api/pci/p2pdma.rst
+++ b/Documentation/driver-api/pci/p2pdma.rst
@@ -132,10 +132,6 @@ precludes passing these pages to userspace.
 P2P memory is also technically IO memory but should never have any side
 effects behind it. Thus, the order of loads and stores should not be important
 and ioreadX(), iowriteX() and friends should not be necessary.
-However, as the memory is not cache coherent, if access ever needs to
-be protected by a spinlock then :c:func:`mmiowb()` must be used before
-unlocking the lock. (See ACQUIRES VS I/O ACCESSES in
-Documentation/memory-barriers.txt)
 
 
 P2P DMA Support Library
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/pinctl.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/pinctl.rst
index 6cb68d67fa75..2bb1bc484278 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-api/pinctl.rst
+++ b/Documentation/driver-api/pinctl.rst
@@ -274,15 +274,6 @@ configuration in the pin controller ops like this::
 		.confops = &foo_pconf_ops,
 	};
 
-Since some controllers have special logic for handling entire groups of pins
-they can exploit the special whole-group pin control function. The
-pin_config_group_set() callback is allowed to return the error code -EAGAIN,
-for groups it does not want to handle, or if it just wants to do some
-group-level handling and then fall through to iterate over all pins, in which
-case each individual pin will be treated by separate pin_config_set() calls as
-well.
-
-
 Interaction with the GPIO subsystem
 ===================================
 
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/pm/cpuidle.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/pm/cpuidle.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..006cf6db40c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/driver-api/pm/cpuidle.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,285 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+.. include:: <isonum.txt>
+
+.. |struct cpuidle_governor| replace:: :c:type:`struct cpuidle_governor <cpuidle_governor>`
+.. |struct cpuidle_device| replace:: :c:type:`struct cpuidle_device <cpuidle_device>`
+.. |struct cpuidle_driver| replace:: :c:type:`struct cpuidle_driver <cpuidle_driver>`
+.. |struct cpuidle_state| replace:: :c:type:`struct cpuidle_state <cpuidle_state>`
+
+========================
+CPU Idle Time Management
+========================
+
+:Copyright: |copy| 2019 Intel Corporation
+
+:Author: Rafael J. Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>
+
+
+CPU Idle Time Management Subsystem
+==================================
+
+Every time one of the logical CPUs in the system (the entities that appear to
+fetch and execute instructions: hardware threads, if present, or processor
+cores) is idle after an interrupt or equivalent wakeup event, which means that
+there are no tasks to run on it except for the special "idle" task associated
+with it, there is an opportunity to save energy for the processor that it
+belongs to.  That can be done by making the idle logical CPU stop fetching
+instructions from memory and putting some of the processor's functional units
+depended on by it into an idle state in which they will draw less power.
+
+However, there may be multiple different idle states that can be used in such a
+situation in principle, so it may be necessary to find the most suitable one
+(from the kernel perspective) and ask the processor to use (or "enter") that
+particular idle state.  That is the role of the CPU idle time management
+subsystem in the kernel, called ``CPUIdle``.
+
+The design of ``CPUIdle`` is modular and based on the code duplication avoidance
+principle, so the generic code that in principle need not depend on the hardware
+or platform design details in it is separate from the code that interacts with
+the hardware.  It generally is divided into three categories of functional
+units: *governors* responsible for selecting idle states to ask the processor
+to enter, *drivers* that pass the governors' decisions on to the hardware and
+the *core* providing a common framework for them.
+
+
+CPU Idle Time Governors
+=======================
+
+A CPU idle time (``CPUIdle``) governor is a bundle of policy code invoked when
+one of the logical CPUs in the system turns out to be idle.  Its role is to
+select an idle state to ask the processor to enter in order to save some energy.
+
+``CPUIdle`` governors are generic and each of them can be used on any hardware
+platform that the Linux kernel can run on.  For this reason, data structures
+operated on by them cannot depend on any hardware architecture or platform
+design details as well.
+
+The governor itself is represented by a |struct cpuidle_governor| object
+containing four callback pointers, :c:member:`enable`, :c:member:`disable`,
+:c:member:`select`, :c:member:`reflect`, a :c:member:`rating` field described
+below, and a name (string) used for identifying it.
+
+For the governor to be available at all, that object needs to be registered
+with the ``CPUIdle`` core by calling :c:func:`cpuidle_register_governor()` with
+a pointer to it passed as the argument.  If successful, that causes the core to
+add the governor to the global list of available governors and, if it is the
+only one in the list (that is, the list was empty before) or the value of its
+:c:member:`rating` field is greater than the value of that field for the
+governor currently in use, or the name of the new governor was passed to the
+kernel as the value of the ``cpuidle.governor=`` command line parameter, the new
+governor will be used from that point on (there can be only one ``CPUIdle``
+governor in use at a time).  Also, if ``cpuidle_sysfs_switch`` is passed to the
+kernel in the command line, user space can choose the ``CPUIdle`` governor to
+use at run time via ``sysfs``.
+
+Once registered, ``CPUIdle`` governors cannot be unregistered, so it is not
+practical to put them into loadable kernel modules.
+
+The interface between ``CPUIdle`` governors and the core consists of four
+callbacks:
+
+:c:member:`enable`
+	::
+
+	  int (*enable) (struct cpuidle_driver *drv, struct cpuidle_device *dev);
+
+	The role of this callback is to prepare the governor for handling the
+	(logical) CPU represented by the |struct cpuidle_device| object	pointed
+	to by the ``dev`` argument.  The |struct cpuidle_driver| object pointed
+	to by the ``drv`` argument represents the ``CPUIdle`` driver to be used
+	with that CPU (among other things, it should contain the list of
+	|struct cpuidle_state| objects representing idle states that the
+	processor holding the given CPU can be asked to enter).
+
+	It may fail, in which case it is expected to return a negative error
+	code, and that causes the kernel to run the architecture-specific
+	default code for idle CPUs on the CPU in question instead of ``CPUIdle``
+	until the ``->enable()`` governor callback is invoked for that CPU
+	again.
+
+:c:member:`disable`
+	::
+
+	  void (*disable) (struct cpuidle_driver *drv, struct cpuidle_device *dev);
+
+	Called to make the governor stop handling the (logical) CPU represented
+	by the |struct cpuidle_device| object pointed to by the ``dev``
+	argument.
+
+	It is expected to reverse any changes made by the ``->enable()``
+	callback when it was last invoked for the target CPU, free all memory
+	allocated by that callback and so on.
+
+:c:member:`select`
+	::
+
+	  int (*select) (struct cpuidle_driver *drv, struct cpuidle_device *dev,
+	                 bool *stop_tick);
+
+	Called to select an idle state for the processor holding the (logical)
+	CPU represented by the |struct cpuidle_device| object pointed to by the
+	``dev`` argument.
+
+	The list of idle states to take into consideration is represented by the
+	:c:member:`states` array of |struct cpuidle_state| objects held by the
+	|struct cpuidle_driver| object pointed to by the ``drv`` argument (which
+	represents the ``CPUIdle`` driver to be used with the CPU at hand).  The
+	value returned by this callback is interpreted as an index into that
+	array (unless it is a negative error code).
+
+	The ``stop_tick`` argument is used to indicate whether or not to stop
+	the scheduler tick before asking the processor to enter the selected
+	idle state.  When the ``bool`` variable pointed to by it (which is set
+	to ``true`` before invoking this callback) is cleared to ``false``, the
+	processor will be asked to enter the selected idle state without
+	stopping the scheduler tick on the given CPU (if the tick has been
+	stopped on that CPU already, however, it will not be restarted before
+	asking the processor to enter the idle state).
+
+	This callback is mandatory (i.e. the :c:member:`select` callback pointer
+	in |struct cpuidle_governor| must not be ``NULL`` for the registration
+	of the governor to succeed).
+
+:c:member:`reflect`
+	::
+
+	  void (*reflect) (struct cpuidle_device *dev, int index);
+
+	Called to allow the governor to evaluate the accuracy of the idle state
+	selection made by the ``->select()`` callback (when it was invoked last
+	time) and possibly use the result of that to improve the accuracy of
+	idle state selections in the future.
+
+In addition, ``CPUIdle`` governors are required to take power management
+quality of service (PM QoS) constraints on the processor wakeup latency into
+account when selecting idle states.  In order to obtain the current effective
+PM QoS wakeup latency constraint for a given CPU, a ``CPUIdle`` governor is
+expected to pass the number of the CPU to
+:c:func:`cpuidle_governor_latency_req()`.  Then, the governor's ``->select()``
+callback must not return the index of an indle state whose
+:c:member:`exit_latency` value is greater than the number returned by that
+function.
+
+
+CPU Idle Time Management Drivers
+================================
+
+CPU idle time management (``CPUIdle``) drivers provide an interface between the
+other parts of ``CPUIdle`` and the hardware.
+
+First of all, a ``CPUIdle`` driver has to populate the :c:member:`states` array
+of |struct cpuidle_state| objects included in the |struct cpuidle_driver| object
+representing it.  Going forward this array will represent the list of available
+idle states that the processor hardware can be asked to enter shared by all of
+the logical CPUs handled by the given driver.
+
+The entries in the :c:member:`states` array are expected to be sorted by the
+value of the :c:member:`target_residency` field in |struct cpuidle_state| in
+the ascending order (that is, index 0 should correspond to the idle state with
+the minimum value of :c:member:`target_residency`).  [Since the
+:c:member:`target_residency` value is expected to reflect the "depth" of the
+idle state represented by the |struct cpuidle_state| object holding it, this
+sorting order should be the same as the ascending sorting order by the idle
+state "depth".]
+
+Three fields in |struct cpuidle_state| are used by the existing ``CPUIdle``
+governors for computations related to idle state selection:
+
+:c:member:`target_residency`
+	Minimum time to spend in this idle state including the time needed to
+	enter it (which may be substantial) to save more energy than could
+	be saved by staying in a shallower idle state for the same amount of
+	time, in microseconds.
+
+:c:member:`exit_latency`
+	Maximum time it will take a CPU asking the processor to enter this idle
+	state to start executing the first instruction after a wakeup from it,
+	in microseconds.
+
+:c:member:`flags`
+	Flags representing idle state properties.  Currently, governors only use
+	the ``CPUIDLE_FLAG_POLLING`` flag which is set if the given object
+	does not represent a real idle state, but an interface to a software
+	"loop" that can be used in order to avoid asking the processor to enter
+	any idle state at all.  [There are other flags used by the ``CPUIdle``
+	core in special situations.]
+
+The :c:member:`enter` callback pointer in |struct cpuidle_state|, which must not
+be ``NULL``, points to the routine to execute in order to ask the processor to
+enter this particular idle state:
+
+::
+
+  void (*enter) (struct cpuidle_device *dev, struct cpuidle_driver *drv,
+                 int index);
+
+The first two arguments of it point to the |struct cpuidle_device| object
+representing the logical CPU running this callback and the
+|struct cpuidle_driver| object representing the driver itself, respectively,
+and the last one is an index of the |struct cpuidle_state| entry in the driver's
+:c:member:`states` array representing the idle state to ask the processor to
+enter.
+
+The analogous ``->enter_s2idle()`` callback in |struct cpuidle_state| is used
+only for implementing the suspend-to-idle system-wide power management feature.
+The difference between in and ``->enter()`` is that it must not re-enable
+interrupts at any point (even temporarily) or attempt to change the states of
+clock event devices, which the ``->enter()`` callback may do sometimes.
+
+Once the :c:member:`states` array has been populated, the number of valid
+entries in it has to be stored in the :c:member:`state_count` field of the
+|struct cpuidle_driver| object representing the driver.  Moreover, if any
+entries in the :c:member:`states` array represent "coupled" idle states (that
+is, idle states that can only be asked for if multiple related logical CPUs are
+idle), the :c:member:`safe_state_index` field in |struct cpuidle_driver| needs
+to be the index of an idle state that is not "coupled" (that is, one that can be
+asked for if only one logical CPU is idle).
+
+In addition to that, if the given ``CPUIdle`` driver is only going to handle a
+subset of logical CPUs in the system, the :c:member:`cpumask` field in its
+|struct cpuidle_driver| object must point to the set (mask) of CPUs that will be
+handled by it.
+
+A ``CPUIdle`` driver can only be used after it has been registered.  If there
+are no "coupled" idle state entries in the driver's :c:member:`states` array,
+that can be accomplished by passing the driver's |struct cpuidle_driver| object
+to :c:func:`cpuidle_register_driver()`.  Otherwise, :c:func:`cpuidle_register()`
+should be used for this purpose.
+
+However, it also is necessary to register |struct cpuidle_device| objects for
+all of the logical CPUs to be handled by the given ``CPUIdle`` driver with the
+help of :c:func:`cpuidle_register_device()` after the driver has been registered
+and :c:func:`cpuidle_register_driver()`, unlike :c:func:`cpuidle_register()`,
+does not do that automatically.  For this reason, the drivers that use
+:c:func:`cpuidle_register_driver()` to register themselves must also take care
+of registering the |struct cpuidle_device| objects as needed, so it is generally
+recommended to use :c:func:`cpuidle_register()` for ``CPUIdle`` driver
+registration in all cases.
+
+The registration of a |struct cpuidle_device| object causes the ``CPUIdle``
+``sysfs`` interface to be created and the governor's ``->enable()`` callback to
+be invoked for the logical CPU represented by it, so it must take place after
+registering the driver that will handle the CPU in question.
+
+``CPUIdle`` drivers and |struct cpuidle_device| objects can be unregistered
+when they are not necessary any more which allows some resources associated with
+them to be released.  Due to dependencies between them, all of the
+|struct cpuidle_device| objects representing CPUs handled by the given
+``CPUIdle`` driver must be unregistered, with the help of
+:c:func:`cpuidle_unregister_device()`, before calling
+:c:func:`cpuidle_unregister_driver()` to unregister the driver.  Alternatively,
+:c:func:`cpuidle_unregister()` can be called to unregister a ``CPUIdle`` driver
+along with all of the |struct cpuidle_device| objects representing CPUs handled
+by it.
+
+``CPUIdle`` drivers can respond to runtime system configuration changes that
+lead to modifications of the list of available processor idle states (which can
+happen, for example, when the system's power source is switched from AC to
+battery or the other way around).  Upon a notification of such a change,
+a ``CPUIdle`` driver is expected to call :c:func:`cpuidle_pause_and_lock()` to
+turn ``CPUIdle`` off temporarily and then :c:func:`cpuidle_disable_device()` for
+all of the |struct cpuidle_device| objects representing CPUs affected by that
+change.  Next, it can update its :c:member:`states` array in accordance with
+the new configuration of the system, call :c:func:`cpuidle_enable_device()` for
+all of the relevant |struct cpuidle_device| objects and invoke
+:c:func:`cpuidle_resume_and_unlock()` to allow ``CPUIdle`` to be used again.
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/pm/devices.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/pm/devices.rst
index 090c151aa86b..30835683616a 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-api/pm/devices.rst
+++ b/Documentation/driver-api/pm/devices.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,6 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+.. include:: <isonum.txt>
+
 .. |struct dev_pm_ops| replace:: :c:type:`struct dev_pm_ops <dev_pm_ops>`
 .. |struct dev_pm_domain| replace:: :c:type:`struct dev_pm_domain <dev_pm_domain>`
 .. |struct bus_type| replace:: :c:type:`struct bus_type <bus_type>`
@@ -12,11 +15,12 @@
 Device Power Management Basics
 ==============================
 
-::
+:Copyright: |copy| 2010-2011 Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>, Novell Inc.
+:Copyright: |copy| 2010 Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu>
+:Copyright: |copy| 2016 Intel Corporation
+
+:Author: Rafael J. Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>
 
- Copyright (c) 2010-2011 Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>, Novell Inc.
- Copyright (c) 2010 Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu>
- Copyright (c) 2016 Intel Corp., Rafael J. Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>
 
 Most of the code in Linux is device drivers, so most of the Linux power
 management (PM) code is also driver-specific.  Most drivers will do very
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/pm/index.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/pm/index.rst
index 2f6d0e9cf6b7..c2a9ef8d115c 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-api/pm/index.rst
+++ b/Documentation/driver-api/pm/index.rst
@@ -1,9 +1,12 @@
-=======================
-Device Power Management
-=======================
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+===============================
+CPU and Device Power Management
+===============================
 
 .. toctree::
 
+   cpuidle
    devices
    notifiers
    types
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/pm/notifiers.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/pm/notifiers.rst
index 62f860026992..186435c43b77 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-api/pm/notifiers.rst
+++ b/Documentation/driver-api/pm/notifiers.rst
@@ -1,10 +1,14 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+.. include:: <isonum.txt>
+
 =============================
 Suspend/Hibernation Notifiers
 =============================
 
-::
+:Copyright: |copy| 2016 Intel Corporation
+
+:Author: Rafael J. Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>
 
- Copyright (c) 2016 Intel Corp., Rafael J. Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>
 
 There are some operations that subsystems or drivers may want to carry out
 before hibernation/suspend or after restore/resume, but they require the system
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/pm/types.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/pm/types.rst
index 3ebdecc54104..73a231caf764 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-api/pm/types.rst
+++ b/Documentation/driver-api/pm/types.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,5 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
 ==================================
 Device Power Management Data Types
 ==================================
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/soundwire/stream.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/soundwire/stream.rst
index 26a6064503fd..5351bd2f34a8 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-api/soundwire/stream.rst
+++ b/Documentation/driver-api/soundwire/stream.rst
@@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ Bus implements below API for allocate a stream which needs to be called once
 per stream. From ASoC DPCM framework, this stream state maybe linked to
 .startup() operation.
 
-  .. code-block:: c
+.. code-block:: c
 
   int sdw_alloc_stream(char * stream_name);
 
@@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ the respective Master(s) and Slave(s) associated with stream. These APIs can
 only be invoked once by respective Master(s) and Slave(s). From ASoC DPCM
 framework, this stream state is linked to .hw_params() operation.
 
-  .. code-block:: c
+.. code-block:: c
 
   int sdw_stream_add_master(struct sdw_bus * bus,
 		struct sdw_stream_config * stream_config,
@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Bus implements below API for PREPARE state which needs to be called once per
 stream. From ASoC DPCM framework, this stream state is linked to
 .prepare() operation.
 
-  .. code-block:: c
+.. code-block:: c
 
   int sdw_prepare_stream(struct sdw_stream_runtime * stream);
 
@@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ Bus implements below API for ENABLE state which needs to be called once per
 stream. From ASoC DPCM framework, this stream state is linked to
 .trigger() start operation.
 
-  .. code-block:: c
+.. code-block:: c
 
   int sdw_enable_stream(struct sdw_stream_runtime * stream);
 
@@ -332,7 +332,7 @@ Bus implements below API for DISABLED state which needs to be called once
 per stream. From ASoC DPCM framework, this stream state is linked to
 .trigger() stop operation.
 
-  .. code-block:: c
+.. code-block:: c
 
   int sdw_disable_stream(struct sdw_stream_runtime * stream);
 
@@ -357,7 +357,7 @@ Bus implements below API for DEPREPARED state which needs to be called once
 per stream. From ASoC DPCM framework, this stream state is linked to
 .trigger() stop operation.
 
-  .. code-block:: c
+.. code-block:: c
 
   int sdw_deprepare_stream(struct sdw_stream_runtime * stream);
 
@@ -382,7 +382,7 @@ Bus implements below APIs for RELEASE state which needs to be called by
 all the Master(s) and Slave(s) associated with stream. From ASoC DPCM
 framework, this stream state is linked to .hw_free() operation.
 
-  .. code-block:: c
+.. code-block:: c
 
   int sdw_stream_remove_master(struct sdw_bus * bus,
 		struct sdw_stream_runtime * stream);
@@ -395,7 +395,7 @@ stream assigned as part of ALLOCATED state.
 
 In .shutdown() the data structure maintaining stream state are freed up.
 
-  .. code-block:: c
+.. code-block:: c
 
   void sdw_release_stream(struct sdw_stream_runtime * stream);
 
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/uio-howto.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/uio-howto.rst
index 25f50eace28b..8fecfa11d4ff 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-api/uio-howto.rst
+++ b/Documentation/driver-api/uio-howto.rst
@@ -276,8 +276,8 @@ fields of ``struct uio_mem``:
 -  ``int memtype``: Required if the mapping is used. Set this to
    ``UIO_MEM_PHYS`` if you you have physical memory on your card to be
    mapped. Use ``UIO_MEM_LOGICAL`` for logical memory (e.g. allocated
-   with :c:func:`kmalloc()`). There's also ``UIO_MEM_VIRTUAL`` for
-   virtual memory.
+   with :c:func:`__get_free_pages()` but not kmalloc()). There's also
+   ``UIO_MEM_VIRTUAL`` for virtual memory.
 
 -  ``phys_addr_t addr``: Required if the mapping is used. Fill in the
    address of your memory block. This address is the one that appears in
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/usb/power-management.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/usb/power-management.rst
index 79beb807996b..4a74cf6f2797 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-api/usb/power-management.rst
+++ b/Documentation/driver-api/usb/power-management.rst
@@ -370,11 +370,15 @@ autosuspend the interface's device.  When the usage counter is = 0
 then the interface is considered to be idle, and the kernel may
 autosuspend the device.
 
-Drivers need not be concerned about balancing changes to the usage
-counter; the USB core will undo any remaining "get"s when a driver
-is unbound from its interface.  As a corollary, drivers must not call
-any of the ``usb_autopm_*`` functions after their ``disconnect``
-routine has returned.
+Drivers must be careful to balance their overall changes to the usage
+counter.  Unbalanced "get"s will remain in effect when a driver is
+unbound from its interface, preventing the device from going into
+runtime suspend should the interface be bound to a driver again.  On
+the other hand, drivers are allowed to achieve this balance by calling
+the ``usb_autopm_*`` functions even after their ``disconnect`` routine
+has returned -- say from within a work-queue routine -- provided they
+retain an active reference to the interface (via ``usb_get_intf`` and
+``usb_put_intf``).
 
 Drivers using the async routines are responsible for their own
 synchronization and mutual exclusion.
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt
index b277cafce71e..69c7fa7f616c 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt
+++ b/Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt
@@ -242,9 +242,11 @@ certainly invest a bit more effort into libata core layer).
 
 CLOCK
   devm_clk_get()
+  devm_clk_get_optional()
   devm_clk_put()
   devm_clk_hw_register()
   devm_of_clk_add_hw_provider()
+  devm_clk_hw_register_clkdev()
 
 DMA
   dmaenginem_async_device_register()
@@ -254,6 +256,9 @@ DMA
   dmam_pool_create()
   dmam_pool_destroy()
 
+DRM
+  devm_drm_dev_init()
+
 GPIO
   devm_gpiod_get()
   devm_gpiod_get_index()
@@ -266,6 +271,9 @@ GPIO
   devm_gpio_request_one()
   devm_gpio_free()
 
+I2C
+  devm_i2c_new_dummy_device()
+
 IIO
   devm_iio_device_alloc()
   devm_iio_device_free()
diff --git a/Documentation/fault-injection/fault-injection.txt b/Documentation/fault-injection/fault-injection.txt
index 4d1b7b4ccfaf..a17517a083c3 100644
--- a/Documentation/fault-injection/fault-injection.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fault-injection/fault-injection.txt
@@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ o #include <linux/fault-inject.h>
 
 o define the fault attributes
 
-  DECLARE_FAULT_INJECTION(name);
+  DECLARE_FAULT_ATTR(name);
 
   Please see the definition of struct fault_attr in fault-inject.h
   for details.
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/fbcon.txt b/Documentation/fb/fbcon.txt
index 60a5ec04e8f0..5a865437b33f 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/fbcon.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/fbcon.txt
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ C. Boot options
 
         Select the initial font to use. The value 'name' can be any of the
         compiled-in fonts: 10x18, 6x10, 7x14, Acorn8x8, MINI4x6,
-        PEARL8x8, ProFont6x11, SUN12x22, SUN8x16, VGA8x16, VGA8x8.
+        PEARL8x8, ProFont6x11, SUN12x22, SUN8x16, TER16x32, VGA8x16, VGA8x8.
 
 	Note, not all drivers can handle font with widths not divisible by 8,
         such as vga16fb.
diff --git a/Documentation/features/debug/kgdb/arch-support.txt b/Documentation/features/debug/kgdb/arch-support.txt
index 3e6b8f07d5d0..38c40cfa0578 100644
--- a/Documentation/features/debug/kgdb/arch-support.txt
+++ b/Documentation/features/debug/kgdb/arch-support.txt
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
     |       nds32: | TODO |
     |       nios2: |  ok  |
     |    openrisc: | TODO |
-    |      parisc: | TODO |
+    |      parisc: |  ok  |
     |     powerpc: |  ok  |
     |       riscv: | TODO |
     |        s390: | TODO |
diff --git a/Documentation/features/debug/kprobes/arch-support.txt b/Documentation/features/debug/kprobes/arch-support.txt
index f4e45bd58fea..e68239b5d2f0 100644
--- a/Documentation/features/debug/kprobes/arch-support.txt
+++ b/Documentation/features/debug/kprobes/arch-support.txt
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
     |       nds32: | TODO |
     |       nios2: | TODO |
     |    openrisc: | TODO |
-    |      parisc: | TODO |
+    |      parisc: |  ok  |
     |     powerpc: |  ok  |
     |       riscv: |  ok  |
     |        s390: |  ok  |
diff --git a/Documentation/features/debug/kretprobes/arch-support.txt b/Documentation/features/debug/kretprobes/arch-support.txt
index 1d5651ef11f8..f17131b328e5 100644
--- a/Documentation/features/debug/kretprobes/arch-support.txt
+++ b/Documentation/features/debug/kretprobes/arch-support.txt
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
     |       nds32: | TODO |
     |       nios2: | TODO |
     |    openrisc: | TODO |
-    |      parisc: | TODO |
+    |      parisc: |  ok  |
     |     powerpc: |  ok  |
     |       riscv: | TODO |
     |        s390: |  ok  |
diff --git a/Documentation/features/time/modern-timekeeping/arch-support.txt b/Documentation/features/time/modern-timekeeping/arch-support.txt
index 2855dfe2464d..1d46da165b75 100644
--- a/Documentation/features/time/modern-timekeeping/arch-support.txt
+++ b/Documentation/features/time/modern-timekeeping/arch-support.txt
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
     |       h8300: |  ok  |
     |     hexagon: |  ok  |
     |        ia64: |  ok  |
-    |        m68k: | TODO |
+    |        m68k: |  ok  |
     |  microblaze: |  ok  |
     |        mips: |  ok  |
     |       nds32: |  ok  |
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking
index efea228ccd8a..dac435575384 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ prototypes:
 	int (*rename) (struct inode *, struct dentry *,
 			struct inode *, struct dentry *, unsigned int);
 	int (*readlink) (struct dentry *, char __user *,int);
-	const char *(*get_link) (struct dentry *, struct inode *, void **);
+	const char *(*get_link) (struct dentry *, struct inode *, struct delayed_call *);
 	void (*truncate) (struct inode *);
 	int (*permission) (struct inode *, int, unsigned int);
 	int (*get_acl)(struct inode *, int);
@@ -118,6 +118,7 @@ set:		exclusive
 --------------------------- super_operations ---------------------------
 prototypes:
 	struct inode *(*alloc_inode)(struct super_block *sb);
+	void (*free_inode)(struct inode *);
 	void (*destroy_inode)(struct inode *);
 	void (*dirty_inode) (struct inode *, int flags);
 	int (*write_inode) (struct inode *, struct writeback_control *wbc);
@@ -139,6 +140,7 @@ locking rules:
 	All may block [not true, see below]
 			s_umount
 alloc_inode:
+free_inode:				called from RCU callback
 destroy_inode:
 dirty_inode:
 write_inode:
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/api-summary.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/api-summary.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..aa51ffcfa029
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/api-summary.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,150 @@
+=============================
+Linux Filesystems API summary
+=============================
+
+This section contains API-level documentation, mostly taken from the source
+code itself.
+
+The Linux VFS
+=============
+
+The Filesystem types
+--------------------
+
+.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/fs.h
+   :internal:
+
+The Directory Cache
+-------------------
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/dcache.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/dcache.h
+   :internal:
+
+Inode Handling
+--------------
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/inode.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/bad_inode.c
+   :export:
+
+Registration and Superblocks
+----------------------------
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/super.c
+   :export:
+
+File Locks
+----------
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/locks.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/locks.c
+   :internal:
+
+Other Functions
+---------------
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/mpage.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/namei.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/buffer.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: block/bio.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/seq_file.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/filesystems.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/fs-writeback.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/block_dev.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/anon_inodes.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/attr.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/d_path.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/dax.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/direct-io.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/file_table.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/libfs.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/posix_acl.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/stat.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/sync.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/xattr.c
+   :export:
+
+The proc filesystem
+===================
+
+sysctl interface
+----------------
+
+.. kernel-doc:: kernel/sysctl.c
+   :export:
+
+proc filesystem interface
+-------------------------
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/proc/base.c
+   :internal:
+
+Events based on file descriptors
+================================
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/eventfd.c
+   :export:
+
+The Filesystem for Exporting Kernel Objects
+===========================================
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/sysfs/file.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/sysfs/symlink.c
+   :export:
+
+The debugfs filesystem
+======================
+
+debugfs interface
+-----------------
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/debugfs/inode.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/debugfs/file.c
+   :export:
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/autofs-mount-control.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/autofs-mount-control.txt
index 45edad6933cc..acc02fc57993 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/autofs-mount-control.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/autofs-mount-control.txt
@@ -354,8 +354,10 @@ this ioctl is called until no further expire candidates are found.
 
 The call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl with the
 ioctlfd field set to the descriptor obtained from the open call. In
-addition an immediate expire, independent of the mount timeout, can be
-requested by setting the how field of struct args_expire to 1. If no
+addition an immediate expire that's independent of the mount timeout,
+and a forced expire that's independent of whether the mount is busy,
+can be requested by setting the how field of struct args_expire to
+AUTOFS_EXP_IMMEDIATE or AUTOFS_EXP_FORCED, respectively . If no
 expire candidates can be found the ioctl returns -1 with errno set to
 EAGAIN.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/autofs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/autofs.txt
index 373ad25852d3..3af38c7fd26d 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/autofs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/autofs.txt
@@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ that purpose there is another flag.
 **DCACHE_MANAGE_TRANSIT**
 
 If a dentry has DCACHE_MANAGE_TRANSIT set then two very different but
-related behaviors are invoked, both using the `d_op->d_manage()`
+related behaviours are invoked, both using the `d_op->d_manage()`
 dentry operation.
 
 Firstly, before checking to see if any filesystem is mounted on the
@@ -193,8 +193,8 @@ VFS remain in RCU-walk mode, but can only tell it to get out of
 RCU-walk mode by returning `-ECHILD`.
 
 So `d_manage()`, when called with `rcu_walk` set, should either return
--ECHILD if there is any reason to believe it is unsafe to end the
-mounted filesystem, and otherwise should return 0.
+-ECHILD if there is any reason to believe it is unsafe to enter the
+mounted filesystem, otherwise it should return 0.
 
 autofs will return `-ECHILD` if an expiry of the filesystem has been
 initiated or is being considered, otherwise it returns 0.
@@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ mounts that were created by `d_automount()` returning a filesystem to be
 mounted.  As autofs doesn't return such a filesystem but leaves the
 mounting to the automount daemon, it must involve the automount daemon
 in unmounting as well.  This also means that autofs has more control
-of expiry.
+over expiry.
 
 The VFS also supports "expiry" of mounts using the MNT_EXPIRE flag to
 the `umount` system call.  Unmounting with MNT_EXPIRE will fail unless
@@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ unmount any filesystems mounted on the autofs filesystem or remove any
 symbolic links or empty directories any time it likes.  If the unmount
 or removal is successful the filesystem will be returned to the state
 it was before the mount or creation, so that any access of the name
-will trigger normal auto-mount processing.  In particlar, `rmdir` and
+will trigger normal auto-mount processing.  In particular, `rmdir` and
 `unlink` do not leave negative entries in the dcache as a normal
 filesystem would, so an attempt to access a recently-removed object is
 passed to autofs for handling.
@@ -240,11 +240,18 @@ Normally the daemon only wants to remove entries which haven't been
 used for a while.  For this purpose autofs maintains a "`last_used`"
 time stamp on each directory or symlink.  For symlinks it genuinely
 does record the last time the symlink was "used" or followed to find
-out where it points to.  For directories the field is a slight
-misnomer.  It actually records the last time that autofs checked if
-the directory or one of its descendents was busy and found that it
-was.  This is just as useful and doesn't require updating the field so
-often.
+out where it points to.  For directories the field is used slightly
+differently.  The field is updated at mount time and during expire
+checks if it is found to be in use (ie. open file descriptor or
+process working directory) and during path walks. The update done
+during path walks prevents frequent expire and immediate mount of
+frequently accessed automounts. But in the case where a GUI continually
+access or an application frequently scans an autofs directory tree
+there can be an accumulation of mounts that aren't actually being
+used. To cater for this case the "`strictexpire`" autofs mount option
+can be used to avoid the "`last_used`" update on path walk thereby
+preventing this apparent inability to expire mounts that aren't
+really in use.
 
 The daemon is able to ask autofs if anything is due to be expired,
 using an `ioctl` as discussed later.  For a *direct* mount, autofs
@@ -255,8 +262,12 @@ up.
 
 There is an option with indirect mounts to consider each of the leaves
 that has been mounted on instead of considering the top-level names.
-This is intended for compatability with version 4 of autofs and should
-be considered as deprecated.
+This was originally intended for compatibility with version 4 of autofs
+and should be considered as deprecated for Sun Format automount maps.
+However, it may be used again for amd format mount maps (which are
+generally indirect maps) because the amd automounter allows for the
+setting of an expire timeout for individual mounts. But there are
+some difficulties in making the needed changes for this.
 
 When autofs considers a directory it checks the `last_used` time and
 compares it with the "timeout" value set when the filesystem was
@@ -273,7 +284,7 @@ mounts.  If it finds something in the root directory to expire it will
 return the name of that thing.  Once a name has been returned the
 automount daemon needs to unmount any filesystems mounted below the
 name normally.  As described above, this is unsafe for non-toplevel
-mounts in a version-5 autofs.  For this reason the current `automountd`
+mounts in a version-5 autofs.  For this reason the current `automount(8)`
 does not use this ioctl.
 
 The second mechanism uses either the **AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_EXPIRE_CMD** or
@@ -345,7 +356,7 @@ The `wait_queue_token` is a unique number which can identify a
 particular request to be acknowledged.  When a message is sent over
 the pipe the affected dentry is marked as either "active" or
 "expiring" and other accesses to it block until the message is
-acknowledged using one of the ioctls below and the relevant
+acknowledged using one of the ioctls below with the relevant
 `wait_queue_token`.
 
 Communicating with autofs: root directory ioctls
@@ -367,15 +378,14 @@ The available ioctl commands are:
     This mode is also entered if a write to the pipe fails.
 - **AUTOFS_IOC_PROTOVER**:  This returns the protocol version in use.
 - **AUTOFS_IOC_PROTOSUBVER**: Returns the protocol sub-version which
-    is really a version number for the implementation.  It is
-    currently 2.
+    is really a version number for the implementation.
 - **AUTOFS_IOC_SETTIMEOUT**:  This passes a pointer to an unsigned
     long.  The value is used to set the timeout for expiry, and
     the current timeout value is stored back through the pointer.
 - **AUTOFS_IOC_ASKUMOUNT**:  Returns, in the pointed-to `int`, 1 if
     the filesystem could be unmounted.  This is only a hint as
     the situation could change at any instant.  This call can be
-    use to avoid a more expensive full unmount attempt.
+    used to avoid a more expensive full unmount attempt.
 - **AUTOFS_IOC_EXPIRE**: as described above, this asks if there is
     anything suitable to expire.  A pointer to a packet:
 
@@ -400,6 +410,11 @@ The available ioctl commands are:
      **AUTOFS_EXP_IMMEDIATE** causes `last_used` time to be ignored
      and objects are expired if the are not in use.
 
+     **AUTOFS_EXP_FORCED** causes the in use status to be ignored
+     and objects are expired ieven if they are in use. This assumes
+     that the daemon has requested this because it is capable of
+     performing the umount.
+
      **AUTOFS_EXP_LEAVES** will select a leaf rather than a top-level
      name to expire.  This is only safe when *maxproto* is 4.
 
@@ -415,7 +430,7 @@ which can be used to communicate directly with the autofs filesystem.
 It requires CAP_SYS_ADMIN for access.
 
 The `ioctl`s that can be used on this device are described in a separate
-document `autofs-mount-control.txt`, and are summarized briefly here.
+document `autofs-mount-control.txt`, and are summarised briefly here.
 Each ioctl is passed a pointer to an `autofs_dev_ioctl` structure:
 
         struct autofs_dev_ioctl {
@@ -511,6 +526,21 @@ directories.
 Catatonic mode can only be left via the
 **AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_OPENMOUNT_CMD** ioctl on the `/dev/autofs`.
 
+The "ignore" mount option
+-------------------------
+
+The "ignore" mount option can be used to provide a generic indicator
+to applications that the mount entry should be ignored when displaying
+mount information.
+
+In other OSes that provide autofs and that provide a mount list to user
+space based on the kernel mount list a no-op mount option ("ignore" is
+the one use on the most common OSes) is allowed so that autofs file
+system users can optionally use it.
+
+This is intended to be used by user space programs to exclude autofs
+mounts from consideration when reading the mounts list.
+
 autofs, name spaces, and shared mounts
 --------------------------------------
 
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/binderfs.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/binderfs.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c009671f8434
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/binderfs.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+The Android binderfs Filesystem
+===============================
+
+Android binderfs is a filesystem for the Android binder IPC mechanism.  It
+allows to dynamically add and remove binder devices at runtime.  Binder devices
+located in a new binderfs instance are independent of binder devices located in
+other binderfs instances.  Mounting a new binderfs instance makes it possible
+to get a set of private binder devices.
+
+Mounting binderfs
+-----------------
+
+Android binderfs can be mounted with::
+
+  mkdir /dev/binderfs
+  mount -t binder binder /dev/binderfs
+
+at which point a new instance of binderfs will show up at ``/dev/binderfs``.
+In a fresh instance of binderfs no binder devices will be present.  There will
+only be a ``binder-control`` device which serves as the request handler for
+binderfs. Mounting another binderfs instance at a different location will
+create a new and separate instance from all other binderfs mounts.  This is
+identical to the behavior of e.g. ``devpts`` and ``tmpfs``. The Android
+binderfs filesystem can be mounted in user namespaces.
+
+Options
+-------
+max
+  binderfs instances can be mounted with a limit on the number of binder
+  devices that can be allocated. The ``max=<count>`` mount option serves as
+  a per-instance limit. If ``max=<count>`` is set then only ``<count>`` number
+  of binder devices can be allocated in this binderfs instance.
+
+Allocating binder Devices
+-------------------------
+
+.. _ioctl: http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man2/ioctl.2.html
+
+To allocate a new binder device in a binderfs instance a request needs to be
+sent through the ``binder-control`` device node.  A request is sent in the form
+of an `ioctl() <ioctl_>`_.
+
+What a program needs to do is to open the ``binder-control`` device node and
+send a ``BINDER_CTL_ADD`` request to the kernel.  Users of binderfs need to
+tell the kernel which name the new binder device should get.  By default a name
+can only contain up to ``BINDERFS_MAX_NAME`` chars including the terminating
+zero byte.
+
+Once the request is made via an `ioctl() <ioctl_>`_ passing a ``struct
+binder_device`` with the name to the kernel it will allocate a new binder
+device and return the major and minor number of the new device in the struct
+(This is necessary because binderfs allocates a major device number
+dynamically.).  After the `ioctl() <ioctl_>`_ returns there will be a new
+binder device located under /dev/binderfs with the chosen name.
+
+Deleting binder Devices
+-----------------------
+
+.. _unlink: http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man2/unlink.2.html
+.. _rm: http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/rm.1.html
+
+Binderfs binder devices can be deleted via `unlink() <unlink_>`_.  This means
+that the `rm() <rm_>`_ tool can be used to delete them. Note that the
+``binder-control`` device cannot be deleted since this would make the binderfs
+instance unuseable.  The ``binder-control`` device will be deleted when the
+binderfs instance is unmounted and all references to it have been dropped.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ceph.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ceph.txt
index 1177052701e1..d2c6a5ccf0f5 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/ceph.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ceph.txt
@@ -22,9 +22,7 @@ In contrast to cluster filesystems like GFS, OCFS2, and GPFS that rely
 on symmetric access by all clients to shared block devices, Ceph
 separates data and metadata management into independent server
 clusters, similar to Lustre.  Unlike Lustre, however, metadata and
-storage nodes run entirely as user space daemons.  Storage nodes
-utilize btrfs to store data objects, leveraging its advanced features
-(checksumming, metadata replication, etc.).  File data is striped
+storage nodes run entirely as user space daemons.  File data is striped
 across storage nodes in large chunks to distribute workload and
 facilitate high throughputs.  When storage nodes fail, data is
 re-replicated in a distributed fashion by the storage nodes themselves
@@ -118,6 +116,10 @@ Mount Options
 	of a non-responsive Ceph file system.  The default is 30
 	seconds.
 
+  caps_max=X
+	Specify the maximum number of caps to hold. Unused caps are released
+	when number of caps exceeds the limit. The default is 0 (no limit)
+
   rbytes
 	When stat() is called on a directory, set st_size to 'rbytes',
 	the summation of file sizes over all files nested beneath that
@@ -160,11 +162,11 @@ More Information
 ================
 
 For more information on Ceph, see the home page at
-	http://ceph.newdream.net/
+	https://ceph.com/
 
 The Linux kernel client source tree is available at
-	git://ceph.newdream.net/git/ceph-client.git
+	https://github.com/ceph/ceph-client.git
 	git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/sage/ceph-client.git
 
 and the source for the full system is at
-	git://ceph.newdream.net/git/ceph.git
+	https://github.com/ceph/ceph.git
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/TODO b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/TODO
index 66b3f54aa6dc..9267f3fb131f 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/TODO
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/TODO
@@ -111,7 +111,8 @@ negotiated size) and send larger write sizes to modern servers.
 
 5) Continue to extend the smb3 "buildbot" which does automated xfstesting
 against Windows, Samba and Azure currently - to add additional tests and
-to allow the buildbot to execute the tests faster.
+to allow the buildbot to execute the tests faster. The URL for the
+buildbot is: http://smb3-test-rhel-75.southcentralus.cloudapp.azure.com
 
 6) Address various coverity warnings (most are not bugs per-se, but
 the more warnings are addressed, the easier it is to spot real
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/cifs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/cifs.txt
index 67756607246e..1be3d21c286e 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/cifs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/cifs.txt
@@ -1,16 +1,21 @@
   This is the client VFS module for the SMB3 NAS protocol as well
-  older dialects such as the Common Internet File System (CIFS)
+  as for older dialects such as the Common Internet File System (CIFS)
   protocol which was the successor to the Server Message Block
   (SMB) protocol, the native file sharing mechanism for most early
   PC operating systems. New and improved versions of CIFS are now
-  called SMB2 and SMB3. These dialects are also supported by the
-  CIFS VFS module. CIFS is fully supported by network
-  file servers such as Windows 2000, 2003, 2008, 2012 and 2016
-  as well by Samba (which provides excellent CIFS
-  server support for Linux and many other operating systems), Apple
-  systems, as well as most Network Attached Storage vendors, so
-  this network filesystem client can mount to a wide variety of
-  servers.
+  called SMB2 and SMB3. Use of SMB3 (and later, including SMB3.1.1)
+  is strongly preferred over using older dialects like CIFS due to
+  security reaasons. All modern dialects, including the most recent,
+  SMB3.1.1 are supported by the CIFS VFS module. The SMB3 protocol
+  is implemented and supported by all major file servers
+  such as all modern versions of Windows (including Windows 2016
+  Server), as well as by Samba (which provides excellent
+  CIFS/SMB2/SMB3 server support and tools for Linux and many other
+  operating systems).  Apple systems also support SMB3 well, as
+  do most Network Attached Storage vendors, so this network
+  filesystem client can mount to a wide variety of systems.
+  It also supports mounting to the cloud (for example
+  Microsoft Azure), including the necessary security features.
 
   The intent of this module is to provide the most advanced network
   file system function for SMB3 compliant servers, including advanced
@@ -24,12 +29,17 @@
   cluster file systems for fileserving in some Linux to Linux environments,
   not just in Linux to Windows (or Linux to Mac) environments.
 
-  This filesystem has an mount utility (mount.cifs) that can be obtained from
+  This filesystem has a mount utility (mount.cifs) and various user space
+  tools (including smbinfo and setcifsacl) that can be obtained from
 
-      https://ftp.samba.org/pub/linux-cifs/cifs-utils/
+      https://git.samba.org/?p=cifs-utils.git
+  or
+      git://git.samba.org/cifs-utils.git
 
-  It must be installed in the directory with the other mount helpers.
+  mount.cifs should be installed in the directory with the other mount helpers.
 
   For more information on the module see the project wiki page at
 
+      https://wiki.samba.org/index.php/LinuxCIFS
+  and
       https://wiki.samba.org/index.php/LinuxCIFS_utils
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/debugfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/debugfs.txt
index 4f45f71149cb..4a0a9c3f4af6 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/debugfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/debugfs.txt
@@ -31,10 +31,10 @@ This call, if successful, will make a directory called name underneath the
 indicated parent directory.  If parent is NULL, the directory will be
 created in the debugfs root.  On success, the return value is a struct
 dentry pointer which can be used to create files in the directory (and to
-clean it up at the end).  A NULL return value indicates that something went
-wrong.  If ERR_PTR(-ENODEV) is returned, that is an indication that the
-kernel has been built without debugfs support and none of the functions
-described below will work.
+clean it up at the end).  An ERR_PTR(-ERROR) return value indicates that
+something went wrong.  If ERR_PTR(-ENODEV) is returned, that is an
+indication that the kernel has been built without debugfs support and none
+of the functions described below will work.
 
 The most general way to create a file within a debugfs directory is with:
 
@@ -48,8 +48,9 @@ should hold the file, data will be stored in the i_private field of the
 resulting inode structure, and fops is a set of file operations which
 implement the file's behavior.  At a minimum, the read() and/or write()
 operations should be provided; others can be included as needed.  Again,
-the return value will be a dentry pointer to the created file, NULL for
-error, or ERR_PTR(-ENODEV) if debugfs support is missing.
+the return value will be a dentry pointer to the created file,
+ERR_PTR(-ERROR) on error, or ERR_PTR(-ENODEV) if debugfs support is
+missing.
 
 Create a file with an initial size, the following function can be used
 instead:
@@ -214,7 +215,8 @@ can be removed with:
 
     void debugfs_remove(struct dentry *dentry);
 
-The dentry value can be NULL, in which case nothing will be removed.
+The dentry value can be NULL or an error value, in which case nothing will
+be removed.
 
 Once upon a time, debugfs users were required to remember the dentry
 pointer for every debugfs file they created so that all files could be
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/exofs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/exofs.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 23583a136975..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/exofs.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,185 +0,0 @@
-===============================================================================
-WHAT IS EXOFS?
-===============================================================================
-
-exofs is a file system that uses an OSD and exports the API of a normal Linux
-file system. Users access exofs like any other local file system, and exofs
-will in turn issue commands to the local OSD initiator.
-
-OSD is a new T10 command set that views storage devices not as a large/flat
-array of sectors but as a container of objects, each having a length, quota,
-time attributes and more. Each object is addressed by a 64bit ID, and is
-contained in a 64bit ID partition. Each object has associated attributes
-attached to it, which are integral part of the object and provide metadata about
-the object. The standard defines some common obligatory attributes, but user
-attributes can be added as needed.
-
-===============================================================================
-ENVIRONMENT
-===============================================================================
-
-To use this file system, you need to have an object store to run it on.  You
-may download a target from:
-http://open-osd.org
-
-See Documentation/scsi/osd.txt for how to setup a working osd environment.
-
-===============================================================================
-USAGE
-===============================================================================
-
-1. Download and compile exofs and open-osd initiator:
-  You need an external Kernel source tree or kernel headers from your
-  distribution. (anything based on 2.6.26 or later).
-
-  a. download open-osd including exofs source using:
-     [parent-directory]$ git clone git://git.open-osd.org/open-osd.git
-
-  b. Build the library module like this:
-     [parent-directory]$ make -C KSRC=$(KER_DIR) open-osd
-
-     This will build both the open-osd initiator as well as the exofs kernel
-     module. Use whatever parameters you compiled your Kernel with and
-     $(KER_DIR) above pointing to the Kernel you compile against. See the file
-     open-osd/top-level-Makefile for an example.
-
-2. Get the OSD initiator and target set up properly, and login to the target.
-  See Documentation/scsi/osd.txt for farther instructions. Also see ./do-osd
-  for example script that does all these steps.
-
-3. Insmod the exofs.ko module:
-   [exofs]$ insmod exofs.ko
-
-4. Make sure the directory where you want to mount exists. If not, create it.
-   (For example, mkdir /mnt/exofs)
-
-5. At first run you will need to invoke the mkfs.exofs application
-
-   As an example, this will create the file system on:
-   /dev/osd0 partition ID 65536
-
-   mkfs.exofs --pid=65536 --format /dev/osd0
-
-   The --format is optional. If not specified, no OSD_FORMAT will be
-   performed and a clean file system will be created in the specified pid,
-   in the available space of the target. (Use --format=size_in_meg to limit
-   the total LUN space available)
-
-   If pid already exists, it will be deleted and a new one will be created in
-   its place. Be careful.
-
-   An exofs lives inside a single OSD partition. You can create multiple exofs
-   filesystems on the same device using multiple pids.
-
-   (run mkfs.exofs without any parameters for usage help message)
-
-6. Mount the file system.
-
-   For example, to mount /dev/osd0, partition ID 0x10000 on /mnt/exofs:
-
-	mount -t exofs -o pid=65536 /dev/osd0 /mnt/exofs/
-
-7. For reference (See do-exofs example script):
-	do-exofs start - an example of how to perform the above steps.
-	do-exofs stop - an example of how to unmount the file system.
-	do-exofs format - an example of how to format and mkfs a new exofs.
-
-8. Extra compilation flags (uncomment in fs/exofs/Kbuild):
-	CONFIG_EXOFS_DEBUG - for debug messages and extra checks.
-
-===============================================================================
-exofs mount options
-===============================================================================
-Similar to any mount command:
-	mount -t exofs -o exofs_options /dev/osdX mount_exofs_directory
-
-Where:
-    -t exofs: specifies the exofs file system
-
-    /dev/osdX: X is a decimal number. /dev/osdX was created after a successful
-               login into an OSD target.
-
-    mount_exofs_directory: The directory to mount the file system on
-
-    exofs specific options: Options are separated by commas (,)
-		pid=<integer> - The partition number to mount/create as
-                                container of the filesystem.
-                                This option is mandatory. integer can be
-                                Hex by pre-pending an 0x to the number.
-		osdname=<id>  - Mount by a device's osdname.
-                                osdname is usually a 36 character uuid of the
-                                form "d2683732-c906-4ee1-9dbd-c10c27bb40df".
-                                It is one of the device's uuid specified in the
-                                mkfs.exofs format command.
-                                If this option is specified then the /dev/osdX
-                                above can be empty and is ignored.
-                to=<integer>  - Timeout in ticks for a single command.
-                                default is (60 * HZ) [for debugging only]
-
-===============================================================================
-DESIGN
-===============================================================================
-
-* The file system control block (AKA on-disk superblock) resides in an object
-  with a special ID (defined in common.h).
-  Information included in the file system control block is used to fill the
-  in-memory superblock structure at mount time. This object is created before
-  the file system is used by mkexofs.c. It contains information such as:
-	- The file system's magic number
-	- The next inode number to be allocated
-
-* Each file resides in its own object and contains the data (and it will be
-  possible to extend the file over multiple objects, though this has not been
-  implemented yet).
-
-* A directory is treated as a file, and essentially contains a list of <file
-  name, inode #> pairs for files that are found in that directory. The object
-  IDs correspond to the files' inode numbers and will be allocated according to
-  a bitmap (stored in a separate object). Now they are allocated using a
-  counter.
-
-* Each file's control block (AKA on-disk inode) is stored in its object's
-  attributes. This applies to both regular files and other types (directories,
-  device files, symlinks, etc.).
-
-* Credentials are generated per object (inode and superblock) when they are
-  created in memory (read from disk or created). The credential works for all
-  operations and is used as long as the object remains in memory.
-
-* Async OSD operations are used whenever possible, but the target may execute
-  them out of order. The operations that concern us are create, delete,
-  readpage, writepage, update_inode, and truncate. The following pairs of
-  operations should execute in the order written, and we need to prevent them
-  from executing in reverse order:
-	- The following are handled with the OBJ_CREATED and OBJ_2BCREATED
-	  flags. OBJ_CREATED is set when we know the object exists on the OSD -
-	  in create's callback function, and when we successfully do a
-	  read_inode.
-	  OBJ_2BCREATED is set in the beginning of the create function, so we
-	  know that we should wait.
-		- create/delete: delete should wait until the object is created
-		  on the OSD.
-		- create/readpage: readpage should be able to return a page
-		  full of zeroes in this case. If there was a write already
-		  en-route (i.e. create, writepage, readpage) then the page
-		  would be locked, and so it would really be the same as
-		  create/writepage.
-		- create/writepage: if writepage is called for a sync write, it
-		  should wait until the object is created on the OSD.
-		  Otherwise, it should just return.
-		- create/truncate: truncate should wait until the object is
-		  created on the OSD.
-		- create/update_inode: update_inode should wait until the
-		  object is created on the OSD.
-	- Handled by VFS locks:
-		- readpage/delete: shouldn't happen because of page lock.
-		- writepage/delete: shouldn't happen because of page lock.
-		- readpage/writepage: shouldn't happen because of page lock.
-
-===============================================================================
-LICENSE/COPYRIGHT
-===============================================================================
-The exofs file system is based on ext2 v0.5b (distributed with the Linux kernel
-version 2.6.10).  All files include the original copyrights, and the license
-is GPL version 2 (only version 2, as is true for the Linux kernel).  The
-Linux kernel can be downloaded from www.kernel.org.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/f2fs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/f2fs.txt
index e46c2147ddf8..f7b5e4ff0de3 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/f2fs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/f2fs.txt
@@ -126,6 +126,8 @@ disable_ext_identify   Disable the extension list configured by mkfs, so f2fs
                        does not aware of cold files such as media files.
 inline_xattr           Enable the inline xattrs feature.
 noinline_xattr         Disable the inline xattrs feature.
+inline_xattr_size=%u   Support configuring inline xattr size, it depends on
+		       flexible inline xattr feature.
 inline_data            Enable the inline data feature: New created small(<~3.4k)
                        files can be written into inode block.
 inline_dentry          Enable the inline dir feature: data in new created
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/fscrypt.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/fscrypt.rst
index 3a7b60521b94..08c23b60e016 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/fscrypt.rst
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/fscrypt.rst
@@ -343,9 +343,9 @@ FS_IOC_SET_ENCRYPTION_POLICY can fail with the following errors:
 - ``ENOTEMPTY``: the file is unencrypted and is a nonempty directory
 - ``ENOTTY``: this type of filesystem does not implement encryption
 - ``EOPNOTSUPP``: the kernel was not configured with encryption
-  support for this filesystem, or the filesystem superblock has not
+  support for filesystems, or the filesystem superblock has not
   had encryption enabled on it.  (For example, to use encryption on an
-  ext4 filesystem, CONFIG_EXT4_ENCRYPTION must be enabled in the
+  ext4 filesystem, CONFIG_FS_ENCRYPTION must be enabled in the
   kernel config, and the superblock must have had the "encrypt"
   feature flag enabled using ``tune2fs -O encrypt`` or ``mkfs.ext4 -O
   encrypt``.)
@@ -451,10 +451,18 @@ astute users may notice some differences in behavior:
 - Unencrypted files, or files encrypted with a different encryption
   policy (i.e. different key, modes, or flags), cannot be renamed or
   linked into an encrypted directory; see `Encryption policy
-  enforcement`_.  Attempts to do so will fail with EPERM.  However,
+  enforcement`_.  Attempts to do so will fail with EXDEV.  However,
   encrypted files can be renamed within an encrypted directory, or
   into an unencrypted directory.
 
+  Note: "moving" an unencrypted file into an encrypted directory, e.g.
+  with the `mv` program, is implemented in userspace by a copy
+  followed by a delete.  Be aware that the original unencrypted data
+  may remain recoverable from free space on the disk; prefer to keep
+  all files encrypted from the very beginning.  The `shred` program
+  may be used to overwrite the source files but isn't guaranteed to be
+  effective on all filesystems and storage devices.
+
 - Direct I/O is not supported on encrypted files.  Attempts to use
   direct I/O on such files will fall back to buffered I/O.
 
@@ -541,7 +549,7 @@ not be encrypted.
 Except for those special files, it is forbidden to have unencrypted
 files, or files encrypted with a different encryption policy, in an
 encrypted directory tree.  Attempts to link or rename such a file into
-an encrypted directory will fail with EPERM.  This is also enforced
+an encrypted directory will fail with EXDEV.  This is also enforced
 during ->lookup() to provide limited protection against offline
 attacks that try to disable or downgrade encryption in known locations
 where applications may later write sensitive data.  It is recommended
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/index.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/index.rst
index 605befab300b..1131c34d77f6 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/index.rst
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/index.rst
@@ -1,382 +1,43 @@
-=====================
-Linux Filesystems API
-=====================
+===============================
+Filesystems in the Linux kernel
+===============================
 
-The Linux VFS
-=============
+This under-development manual will, some glorious day, provide
+comprehensive information on how the Linux virtual filesystem (VFS) layer
+works, along with the filesystems that sit below it.  For now, what we have
+can be found below.
 
-The Filesystem types
---------------------
-
-.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/fs.h
-   :internal:
-
-The Directory Cache
--------------------
-
-.. kernel-doc:: fs/dcache.c
-   :export:
-
-.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/dcache.h
-   :internal:
-
-Inode Handling
---------------
-
-.. kernel-doc:: fs/inode.c
-   :export:
-
-.. kernel-doc:: fs/bad_inode.c
-   :export:
-
-Registration and Superblocks
-----------------------------
-
-.. kernel-doc:: fs/super.c
-   :export:
-
-File Locks
-----------
-
-.. kernel-doc:: fs/locks.c
-   :export:
-
-.. kernel-doc:: fs/locks.c
-   :internal:
-
-Other Functions
----------------
-
-.. kernel-doc:: fs/mpage.c
-   :export:
-
-.. kernel-doc:: fs/namei.c
-   :export:
-
-.. kernel-doc:: fs/buffer.c
-   :export:
-
-.. kernel-doc:: block/bio.c
-   :export:
-
-.. kernel-doc:: fs/seq_file.c
-   :export:
-
-.. kernel-doc:: fs/filesystems.c
-   :export:
-
-.. kernel-doc:: fs/fs-writeback.c
-   :export:
-
-.. kernel-doc:: fs/block_dev.c
-   :export:
-
-.. kernel-doc:: fs/anon_inodes.c
-   :export:
-
-.. kernel-doc:: fs/attr.c
-   :export:
-
-.. kernel-doc:: fs/d_path.c
-   :export:
-
-.. kernel-doc:: fs/dax.c
-   :export:
-
-.. kernel-doc:: fs/direct-io.c
-   :export:
-
-.. kernel-doc:: fs/file_table.c
-   :export:
-
-.. kernel-doc:: fs/libfs.c
-   :export:
-
-.. kernel-doc:: fs/posix_acl.c
-   :export:
-
-.. kernel-doc:: fs/stat.c
-   :export:
-
-.. kernel-doc:: fs/sync.c
-   :export:
-
-.. kernel-doc:: fs/xattr.c
-   :export:
-
-The proc filesystem
-===================
-
-sysctl interface
-----------------
-
-.. kernel-doc:: kernel/sysctl.c
-   :export:
-
-proc filesystem interface
--------------------------
-
-.. kernel-doc:: fs/proc/base.c
-   :internal:
-
-Events based on file descriptors
-================================
-
-.. kernel-doc:: fs/eventfd.c
-   :export:
-
-The Filesystem for Exporting Kernel Objects
-===========================================
-
-.. kernel-doc:: fs/sysfs/file.c
-   :export:
-
-.. kernel-doc:: fs/sysfs/symlink.c
-   :export:
-
-The debugfs filesystem
+Core VFS documentation
 ======================
 
-debugfs interface
------------------
+See these manuals for documentation about the VFS layer itself and how its
+algorithms work.
 
-.. kernel-doc:: fs/debugfs/inode.c
-   :export:
+.. toctree::
+   :maxdepth: 2
 
-.. kernel-doc:: fs/debugfs/file.c
-   :export:
+   path-lookup.rst
+   api-summary
+   splice
 
-The Linux Journalling API
+Filesystem support layers
 =========================
 
-Overview
---------
-
-Details
-~~~~~~~
-
-The journalling layer is easy to use. You need to first of all create a
-journal_t data structure. There are two calls to do this dependent on
-how you decide to allocate the physical media on which the journal
-resides. The :c:func:`jbd2_journal_init_inode` call is for journals stored in
-filesystem inodes, or the :c:func:`jbd2_journal_init_dev` call can be used
-for journal stored on a raw device (in a continuous range of blocks). A
-journal_t is a typedef for a struct pointer, so when you are finally
-finished make sure you call :c:func:`jbd2_journal_destroy` on it to free up
-any used kernel memory.
-
-Once you have got your journal_t object you need to 'mount' or load the
-journal file. The journalling layer expects the space for the journal
-was already allocated and initialized properly by the userspace tools.
-When loading the journal you must call :c:func:`jbd2_journal_load` to process
-journal contents. If the client file system detects the journal contents
-does not need to be processed (or even need not have valid contents), it
-may call :c:func:`jbd2_journal_wipe` to clear the journal contents before
-calling :c:func:`jbd2_journal_load`.
-
-Note that jbd2_journal_wipe(..,0) calls
-:c:func:`jbd2_journal_skip_recovery` for you if it detects any outstanding
-transactions in the journal and similarly :c:func:`jbd2_journal_load` will
-call :c:func:`jbd2_journal_recover` if necessary. I would advise reading
-:c:func:`ext4_load_journal` in fs/ext4/super.c for examples on this stage.
-
-Now you can go ahead and start modifying the underlying filesystem.
-Almost.
-
-You still need to actually journal your filesystem changes, this is done
-by wrapping them into transactions. Additionally you also need to wrap
-the modification of each of the buffers with calls to the journal layer,
-so it knows what the modifications you are actually making are. To do
-this use :c:func:`jbd2_journal_start` which returns a transaction handle.
-
-:c:func:`jbd2_journal_start` and its counterpart :c:func:`jbd2_journal_stop`,
-which indicates the end of a transaction are nestable calls, so you can
-reenter a transaction if necessary, but remember you must call
-:c:func:`jbd2_journal_stop` the same number of times as
-:c:func:`jbd2_journal_start` before the transaction is completed (or more
-accurately leaves the update phase). Ext4/VFS makes use of this feature to
-simplify handling of inode dirtying, quota support, etc.
-
-Inside each transaction you need to wrap the modifications to the
-individual buffers (blocks). Before you start to modify a buffer you
-need to call :c:func:`jbd2_journal_get_create_access()` /
-:c:func:`jbd2_journal_get_write_access()` /
-:c:func:`jbd2_journal_get_undo_access()` as appropriate, this allows the
-journalling layer to copy the unmodified
-data if it needs to. After all the buffer may be part of a previously
-uncommitted transaction. At this point you are at last ready to modify a
-buffer, and once you are have done so you need to call
-:c:func:`jbd2_journal_dirty_metadata`. Or if you've asked for access to a
-buffer you now know is now longer required to be pushed back on the
-device you can call :c:func:`jbd2_journal_forget` in much the same way as you
-might have used :c:func:`bforget` in the past.
-
-A :c:func:`jbd2_journal_flush` may be called at any time to commit and
-checkpoint all your transactions.
-
-Then at umount time , in your :c:func:`put_super` you can then call
-:c:func:`jbd2_journal_destroy` to clean up your in-core journal object.
-
-Unfortunately there a couple of ways the journal layer can cause a
-deadlock. The first thing to note is that each task can only have a
-single outstanding transaction at any one time, remember nothing commits
-until the outermost :c:func:`jbd2_journal_stop`. This means you must complete
-the transaction at the end of each file/inode/address etc. operation you
-perform, so that the journalling system isn't re-entered on another
-journal. Since transactions can't be nested/batched across differing
-journals, and another filesystem other than yours (say ext4) may be
-modified in a later syscall.
-
-The second case to bear in mind is that :c:func:`jbd2_journal_start` can block
-if there isn't enough space in the journal for your transaction (based
-on the passed nblocks param) - when it blocks it merely(!) needs to wait
-for transactions to complete and be committed from other tasks, so
-essentially we are waiting for :c:func:`jbd2_journal_stop`. So to avoid
-deadlocks you must treat :c:func:`jbd2_journal_start` /
-:c:func:`jbd2_journal_stop` as if they were semaphores and include them in
-your semaphore ordering rules to prevent
-deadlocks. Note that :c:func:`jbd2_journal_extend` has similar blocking
-behaviour to :c:func:`jbd2_journal_start` so you can deadlock here just as
-easily as on :c:func:`jbd2_journal_start`.
-
-Try to reserve the right number of blocks the first time. ;-). This will
-be the maximum number of blocks you are going to touch in this
-transaction. I advise having a look at at least ext4_jbd.h to see the
-basis on which ext4 uses to make these decisions.
-
-Another wriggle to watch out for is your on-disk block allocation
-strategy. Why? Because, if you do a delete, you need to ensure you
-haven't reused any of the freed blocks until the transaction freeing
-these blocks commits. If you reused these blocks and crash happens,
-there is no way to restore the contents of the reallocated blocks at the
-end of the last fully committed transaction. One simple way of doing
-this is to mark blocks as free in internal in-memory block allocation
-structures only after the transaction freeing them commits. Ext4 uses
-journal commit callback for this purpose.
-
-With journal commit callbacks you can ask the journalling layer to call
-a callback function when the transaction is finally committed to disk,
-so that you can do some of your own management. You ask the journalling
-layer for calling the callback by simply setting
-``journal->j_commit_callback`` function pointer and that function is
-called after each transaction commit. You can also use
-``transaction->t_private_list`` for attaching entries to a transaction
-that need processing when the transaction commits.
-
-JBD2 also provides a way to block all transaction updates via
-:c:func:`jbd2_journal_lock_updates()` /
-:c:func:`jbd2_journal_unlock_updates()`. Ext4 uses this when it wants a
-window with a clean and stable fs for a moment. E.g.
-
-::
-
-
-        jbd2_journal_lock_updates() //stop new stuff happening..
-        jbd2_journal_flush()        // checkpoint everything.
-        ..do stuff on stable fs
-        jbd2_journal_unlock_updates() // carry on with filesystem use.
-
-The opportunities for abuse and DOS attacks with this should be obvious,
-if you allow unprivileged userspace to trigger codepaths containing
-these calls.
-
-Summary
-~~~~~~~
-
-Using the journal is a matter of wrapping the different context changes,
-being each mount, each modification (transaction) and each changed
-buffer to tell the journalling layer about them.
-
-Data Types
-----------
-
-The journalling layer uses typedefs to 'hide' the concrete definitions
-of the structures used. As a client of the JBD2 layer you can just rely
-on the using the pointer as a magic cookie of some sort. Obviously the
-hiding is not enforced as this is 'C'.
-
-Structures
-~~~~~~~~~~
-
-.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/jbd2.h
-   :internal:
-
-Functions
----------
-
-The functions here are split into two groups those that affect a journal
-as a whole, and those which are used to manage transactions
-
-Journal Level
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-.. kernel-doc:: fs/jbd2/journal.c
-   :export:
-
-.. kernel-doc:: fs/jbd2/recovery.c
-   :internal:
-
-Transasction Level
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-.. kernel-doc:: fs/jbd2/transaction.c
-
-See also
---------
-
-`Journaling the Linux ext2fs Filesystem, LinuxExpo 98, Stephen
-Tweedie <http://kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/sct/ext3/journal-design.ps.gz>`__
-
-`Ext3 Journalling FileSystem, OLS 2000, Dr. Stephen
-Tweedie <http://olstrans.sourceforge.net/release/OLS2000-ext3/OLS2000-ext3.html>`__
-
-splice API
-==========
-
-splice is a method for moving blocks of data around inside the kernel,
-without continually transferring them between the kernel and user space.
-
-.. kernel-doc:: fs/splice.c
-
-pipes API
-=========
-
-Pipe interfaces are all for in-kernel (builtin image) use. They are not
-exported for use by modules.
-
-.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/pipe_fs_i.h
-   :internal:
-
-.. kernel-doc:: fs/pipe.c
-
-Encryption API
-==============
-
-A library which filesystems can hook into to support transparent
-encryption of files and directories.
+Documentation for the support code within the filesystem layer for use in
+filesystem implementations.
 
 .. toctree::
-    :maxdepth: 2
-
-    fscrypt
-
-Pathname lookup
-===============
-
-
-This write-up is based on three articles published at lwn.net:
+   :maxdepth: 2
 
-- <https://lwn.net/Articles/649115/> Pathname lookup in Linux
-- <https://lwn.net/Articles/649729/> RCU-walk: faster pathname lookup in Linux
-- <https://lwn.net/Articles/650786/> A walk among the symlinks
+   journalling
+   fscrypt
 
-Written by Neil Brown with help from Al Viro and Jon Corbet.
-It has subsequently been updated to reflect changes in the kernel
-including:
+Filesystem-specific documentation
+=================================
 
-- per-directory parallel name lookup.
+Documentation for individual filesystem types can be found here.
 
 .. toctree::
    :maxdepth: 2
 
-   path-lookup.rst
+   binderfs.rst
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/journalling.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/journalling.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..58ce6b395206
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/journalling.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,184 @@
+The Linux Journalling API
+=========================
+
+Overview
+--------
+
+Details
+~~~~~~~
+
+The journalling layer is easy to use. You need to first of all create a
+journal_t data structure. There are two calls to do this dependent on
+how you decide to allocate the physical media on which the journal
+resides. The :c:func:`jbd2_journal_init_inode` call is for journals stored in
+filesystem inodes, or the :c:func:`jbd2_journal_init_dev` call can be used
+for journal stored on a raw device (in a continuous range of blocks). A
+journal_t is a typedef for a struct pointer, so when you are finally
+finished make sure you call :c:func:`jbd2_journal_destroy` on it to free up
+any used kernel memory.
+
+Once you have got your journal_t object you need to 'mount' or load the
+journal file. The journalling layer expects the space for the journal
+was already allocated and initialized properly by the userspace tools.
+When loading the journal you must call :c:func:`jbd2_journal_load` to process
+journal contents. If the client file system detects the journal contents
+does not need to be processed (or even need not have valid contents), it
+may call :c:func:`jbd2_journal_wipe` to clear the journal contents before
+calling :c:func:`jbd2_journal_load`.
+
+Note that jbd2_journal_wipe(..,0) calls
+:c:func:`jbd2_journal_skip_recovery` for you if it detects any outstanding
+transactions in the journal and similarly :c:func:`jbd2_journal_load` will
+call :c:func:`jbd2_journal_recover` if necessary. I would advise reading
+:c:func:`ext4_load_journal` in fs/ext4/super.c for examples on this stage.
+
+Now you can go ahead and start modifying the underlying filesystem.
+Almost.
+
+You still need to actually journal your filesystem changes, this is done
+by wrapping them into transactions. Additionally you also need to wrap
+the modification of each of the buffers with calls to the journal layer,
+so it knows what the modifications you are actually making are. To do
+this use :c:func:`jbd2_journal_start` which returns a transaction handle.
+
+:c:func:`jbd2_journal_start` and its counterpart :c:func:`jbd2_journal_stop`,
+which indicates the end of a transaction are nestable calls, so you can
+reenter a transaction if necessary, but remember you must call
+:c:func:`jbd2_journal_stop` the same number of times as
+:c:func:`jbd2_journal_start` before the transaction is completed (or more
+accurately leaves the update phase). Ext4/VFS makes use of this feature to
+simplify handling of inode dirtying, quota support, etc.
+
+Inside each transaction you need to wrap the modifications to the
+individual buffers (blocks). Before you start to modify a buffer you
+need to call :c:func:`jbd2_journal_get_create_access()` /
+:c:func:`jbd2_journal_get_write_access()` /
+:c:func:`jbd2_journal_get_undo_access()` as appropriate, this allows the
+journalling layer to copy the unmodified
+data if it needs to. After all the buffer may be part of a previously
+uncommitted transaction. At this point you are at last ready to modify a
+buffer, and once you are have done so you need to call
+:c:func:`jbd2_journal_dirty_metadata`. Or if you've asked for access to a
+buffer you now know is now longer required to be pushed back on the
+device you can call :c:func:`jbd2_journal_forget` in much the same way as you
+might have used :c:func:`bforget` in the past.
+
+A :c:func:`jbd2_journal_flush` may be called at any time to commit and
+checkpoint all your transactions.
+
+Then at umount time , in your :c:func:`put_super` you can then call
+:c:func:`jbd2_journal_destroy` to clean up your in-core journal object.
+
+Unfortunately there a couple of ways the journal layer can cause a
+deadlock. The first thing to note is that each task can only have a
+single outstanding transaction at any one time, remember nothing commits
+until the outermost :c:func:`jbd2_journal_stop`. This means you must complete
+the transaction at the end of each file/inode/address etc. operation you
+perform, so that the journalling system isn't re-entered on another
+journal. Since transactions can't be nested/batched across differing
+journals, and another filesystem other than yours (say ext4) may be
+modified in a later syscall.
+
+The second case to bear in mind is that :c:func:`jbd2_journal_start` can block
+if there isn't enough space in the journal for your transaction (based
+on the passed nblocks param) - when it blocks it merely(!) needs to wait
+for transactions to complete and be committed from other tasks, so
+essentially we are waiting for :c:func:`jbd2_journal_stop`. So to avoid
+deadlocks you must treat :c:func:`jbd2_journal_start` /
+:c:func:`jbd2_journal_stop` as if they were semaphores and include them in
+your semaphore ordering rules to prevent
+deadlocks. Note that :c:func:`jbd2_journal_extend` has similar blocking
+behaviour to :c:func:`jbd2_journal_start` so you can deadlock here just as
+easily as on :c:func:`jbd2_journal_start`.
+
+Try to reserve the right number of blocks the first time. ;-). This will
+be the maximum number of blocks you are going to touch in this
+transaction. I advise having a look at at least ext4_jbd.h to see the
+basis on which ext4 uses to make these decisions.
+
+Another wriggle to watch out for is your on-disk block allocation
+strategy. Why? Because, if you do a delete, you need to ensure you
+haven't reused any of the freed blocks until the transaction freeing
+these blocks commits. If you reused these blocks and crash happens,
+there is no way to restore the contents of the reallocated blocks at the
+end of the last fully committed transaction. One simple way of doing
+this is to mark blocks as free in internal in-memory block allocation
+structures only after the transaction freeing them commits. Ext4 uses
+journal commit callback for this purpose.
+
+With journal commit callbacks you can ask the journalling layer to call
+a callback function when the transaction is finally committed to disk,
+so that you can do some of your own management. You ask the journalling
+layer for calling the callback by simply setting
+``journal->j_commit_callback`` function pointer and that function is
+called after each transaction commit. You can also use
+``transaction->t_private_list`` for attaching entries to a transaction
+that need processing when the transaction commits.
+
+JBD2 also provides a way to block all transaction updates via
+:c:func:`jbd2_journal_lock_updates()` /
+:c:func:`jbd2_journal_unlock_updates()`. Ext4 uses this when it wants a
+window with a clean and stable fs for a moment. E.g.
+
+::
+
+
+        jbd2_journal_lock_updates() //stop new stuff happening..
+        jbd2_journal_flush()        // checkpoint everything.
+        ..do stuff on stable fs
+        jbd2_journal_unlock_updates() // carry on with filesystem use.
+
+The opportunities for abuse and DOS attacks with this should be obvious,
+if you allow unprivileged userspace to trigger codepaths containing
+these calls.
+
+Summary
+~~~~~~~
+
+Using the journal is a matter of wrapping the different context changes,
+being each mount, each modification (transaction) and each changed
+buffer to tell the journalling layer about them.
+
+Data Types
+----------
+
+The journalling layer uses typedefs to 'hide' the concrete definitions
+of the structures used. As a client of the JBD2 layer you can just rely
+on the using the pointer as a magic cookie of some sort. Obviously the
+hiding is not enforced as this is 'C'.
+
+Structures
+~~~~~~~~~~
+
+.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/jbd2.h
+   :internal:
+
+Functions
+---------
+
+The functions here are split into two groups those that affect a journal
+as a whole, and those which are used to manage transactions
+
+Journal Level
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/jbd2/journal.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/jbd2/recovery.c
+   :internal:
+
+Transasction Level
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/jbd2/transaction.c
+
+See also
+--------
+
+`Journaling the Linux ext2fs Filesystem, LinuxExpo 98, Stephen
+Tweedie <http://kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/sct/ext3/journal-design.ps.gz>`__
+
+`Ext3 Journalling FileSystem, OLS 2000, Dr. Stephen
+Tweedie <http://olstrans.sourceforge.net/release/OLS2000-ext3/OLS2000-ext3.html>`__
+
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/mount_api.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/mount_api.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..00ff0cfccfa7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/mount_api.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,732 @@
+			     ====================
+			     FILESYSTEM MOUNT API
+			     ====================
+
+CONTENTS
+
+ (1) Overview.
+
+ (2) The filesystem context.
+
+ (3) The filesystem context operations.
+
+ (4) Filesystem context security.
+
+ (5) VFS filesystem context API.
+
+ (6) Superblock creation helpers.
+
+ (7) Parameter description.
+
+ (8) Parameter helper functions.
+
+
+========
+OVERVIEW
+========
+
+The creation of new mounts is now to be done in a multistep process:
+
+ (1) Create a filesystem context.
+
+ (2) Parse the parameters and attach them to the context.  Parameters are
+     expected to be passed individually from userspace, though legacy binary
+     parameters can also be handled.
+
+ (3) Validate and pre-process the context.
+
+ (4) Get or create a superblock and mountable root.
+
+ (5) Perform the mount.
+
+ (6) Return an error message attached to the context.
+
+ (7) Destroy the context.
+
+To support this, the file_system_type struct gains two new fields:
+
+	int (*init_fs_context)(struct fs_context *fc);
+	const struct fs_parameter_description *parameters;
+
+The first is invoked to set up the filesystem-specific parts of a filesystem
+context, including the additional space, and the second points to the
+parameter description for validation at registration time and querying by a
+future system call.
+
+Note that security initialisation is done *after* the filesystem is called so
+that the namespaces may be adjusted first.
+
+
+======================
+THE FILESYSTEM CONTEXT
+======================
+
+The creation and reconfiguration of a superblock is governed by a filesystem
+context.  This is represented by the fs_context structure:
+
+	struct fs_context {
+		const struct fs_context_operations *ops;
+		struct file_system_type *fs_type;
+		void			*fs_private;
+		struct dentry		*root;
+		struct user_namespace	*user_ns;
+		struct net		*net_ns;
+		const struct cred	*cred;
+		char			*source;
+		char			*subtype;
+		void			*security;
+		void			*s_fs_info;
+		unsigned int		sb_flags;
+		unsigned int		sb_flags_mask;
+		unsigned int		s_iflags;
+		unsigned int		lsm_flags;
+		enum fs_context_purpose	purpose:8;
+		...
+	};
+
+The fs_context fields are as follows:
+
+ (*) const struct fs_context_operations *ops
+
+     These are operations that can be done on a filesystem context (see
+     below).  This must be set by the ->init_fs_context() file_system_type
+     operation.
+
+ (*) struct file_system_type *fs_type
+
+     A pointer to the file_system_type of the filesystem that is being
+     constructed or reconfigured.  This retains a reference on the type owner.
+
+ (*) void *fs_private
+
+     A pointer to the file system's private data.  This is where the filesystem
+     will need to store any options it parses.
+
+ (*) struct dentry *root
+
+     A pointer to the root of the mountable tree (and indirectly, the
+     superblock thereof).  This is filled in by the ->get_tree() op.  If this
+     is set, an active reference on root->d_sb must also be held.
+
+ (*) struct user_namespace *user_ns
+ (*) struct net *net_ns
+
+     There are a subset of the namespaces in use by the invoking process.  They
+     retain references on each namespace.  The subscribed namespaces may be
+     replaced by the filesystem to reflect other sources, such as the parent
+     mount superblock on an automount.
+
+ (*) const struct cred *cred
+
+     The mounter's credentials.  This retains a reference on the credentials.
+
+ (*) char *source
+
+     This specifies the source.  It may be a block device (e.g. /dev/sda1) or
+     something more exotic, such as the "host:/path" that NFS desires.
+
+ (*) char *subtype
+
+     This is a string to be added to the type displayed in /proc/mounts to
+     qualify it (used by FUSE).  This is available for the filesystem to set if
+     desired.
+
+ (*) void *security
+
+     A place for the LSMs to hang their security data for the superblock.  The
+     relevant security operations are described below.
+
+ (*) void *s_fs_info
+
+     The proposed s_fs_info for a new superblock, set in the superblock by
+     sget_fc().  This can be used to distinguish superblocks.
+
+ (*) unsigned int sb_flags
+ (*) unsigned int sb_flags_mask
+
+     Which bits SB_* flags are to be set/cleared in super_block::s_flags.
+
+ (*) unsigned int s_iflags
+
+     These will be bitwise-OR'd with s->s_iflags when a superblock is created.
+
+ (*) enum fs_context_purpose
+
+     This indicates the purpose for which the context is intended.  The
+     available values are:
+
+	FS_CONTEXT_FOR_MOUNT,		-- New superblock for explicit mount
+	FS_CONTEXT_FOR_SUBMOUNT		-- New automatic submount of extant mount
+	FS_CONTEXT_FOR_RECONFIGURE	-- Change an existing mount
+
+The mount context is created by calling vfs_new_fs_context() or
+vfs_dup_fs_context() and is destroyed with put_fs_context().  Note that the
+structure is not refcounted.
+
+VFS, security and filesystem mount options are set individually with
+vfs_parse_mount_option().  Options provided by the old mount(2) system call as
+a page of data can be parsed with generic_parse_monolithic().
+
+When mounting, the filesystem is allowed to take data from any of the pointers
+and attach it to the superblock (or whatever), provided it clears the pointer
+in the mount context.
+
+The filesystem is also allowed to allocate resources and pin them with the
+mount context.  For instance, NFS might pin the appropriate protocol version
+module.
+
+
+=================================
+THE FILESYSTEM CONTEXT OPERATIONS
+=================================
+
+The filesystem context points to a table of operations:
+
+	struct fs_context_operations {
+		void (*free)(struct fs_context *fc);
+		int (*dup)(struct fs_context *fc, struct fs_context *src_fc);
+		int (*parse_param)(struct fs_context *fc,
+				   struct struct fs_parameter *param);
+		int (*parse_monolithic)(struct fs_context *fc, void *data);
+		int (*get_tree)(struct fs_context *fc);
+		int (*reconfigure)(struct fs_context *fc);
+	};
+
+These operations are invoked by the various stages of the mount procedure to
+manage the filesystem context.  They are as follows:
+
+ (*) void (*free)(struct fs_context *fc);
+
+     Called to clean up the filesystem-specific part of the filesystem context
+     when the context is destroyed.  It should be aware that parts of the
+     context may have been removed and NULL'd out by ->get_tree().
+
+ (*) int (*dup)(struct fs_context *fc, struct fs_context *src_fc);
+
+     Called when a filesystem context has been duplicated to duplicate the
+     filesystem-private data.  An error may be returned to indicate failure to
+     do this.
+
+     [!] Note that even if this fails, put_fs_context() will be called
+	 immediately thereafter, so ->dup() *must* make the
+	 filesystem-private data safe for ->free().
+
+ (*) int (*parse_param)(struct fs_context *fc,
+			struct struct fs_parameter *param);
+
+     Called when a parameter is being added to the filesystem context.  param
+     points to the key name and maybe a value object.  VFS-specific options
+     will have been weeded out and fc->sb_flags updated in the context.
+     Security options will also have been weeded out and fc->security updated.
+
+     The parameter can be parsed with fs_parse() and fs_lookup_param().  Note
+     that the source(s) are presented as parameters named "source".
+
+     If successful, 0 should be returned or a negative error code otherwise.
+
+ (*) int (*parse_monolithic)(struct fs_context *fc, void *data);
+
+     Called when the mount(2) system call is invoked to pass the entire data
+     page in one go.  If this is expected to be just a list of "key[=val]"
+     items separated by commas, then this may be set to NULL.
+
+     The return value is as for ->parse_param().
+
+     If the filesystem (e.g. NFS) needs to examine the data first and then
+     finds it's the standard key-val list then it may pass it off to
+     generic_parse_monolithic().
+
+ (*) int (*get_tree)(struct fs_context *fc);
+
+     Called to get or create the mountable root and superblock, using the
+     information stored in the filesystem context (reconfiguration goes via a
+     different vector).  It may detach any resources it desires from the
+     filesystem context and transfer them to the superblock it creates.
+
+     On success it should set fc->root to the mountable root and return 0.  In
+     the case of an error, it should return a negative error code.
+
+     The phase on a userspace-driven context will be set to only allow this to
+     be called once on any particular context.
+
+ (*) int (*reconfigure)(struct fs_context *fc);
+
+     Called to effect reconfiguration of a superblock using information stored
+     in the filesystem context.  It may detach any resources it desires from
+     the filesystem context and transfer them to the superblock.  The
+     superblock can be found from fc->root->d_sb.
+
+     On success it should return 0.  In the case of an error, it should return
+     a negative error code.
+
+     [NOTE] reconfigure is intended as a replacement for remount_fs.
+
+
+===========================
+FILESYSTEM CONTEXT SECURITY
+===========================
+
+The filesystem context contains a security pointer that the LSMs can use for
+building up a security context for the superblock to be mounted.  There are a
+number of operations used by the new mount code for this purpose:
+
+ (*) int security_fs_context_alloc(struct fs_context *fc,
+				   struct dentry *reference);
+
+     Called to initialise fc->security (which is preset to NULL) and allocate
+     any resources needed.  It should return 0 on success or a negative error
+     code on failure.
+
+     reference will be non-NULL if the context is being created for superblock
+     reconfiguration (FS_CONTEXT_FOR_RECONFIGURE) in which case it indicates
+     the root dentry of the superblock to be reconfigured.  It will also be
+     non-NULL in the case of a submount (FS_CONTEXT_FOR_SUBMOUNT) in which case
+     it indicates the automount point.
+
+ (*) int security_fs_context_dup(struct fs_context *fc,
+				 struct fs_context *src_fc);
+
+     Called to initialise fc->security (which is preset to NULL) and allocate
+     any resources needed.  The original filesystem context is pointed to by
+     src_fc and may be used for reference.  It should return 0 on success or a
+     negative error code on failure.
+
+ (*) void security_fs_context_free(struct fs_context *fc);
+
+     Called to clean up anything attached to fc->security.  Note that the
+     contents may have been transferred to a superblock and the pointer cleared
+     during get_tree.
+
+ (*) int security_fs_context_parse_param(struct fs_context *fc,
+					 struct fs_parameter *param);
+
+     Called for each mount parameter, including the source.  The arguments are
+     as for the ->parse_param() method.  It should return 0 to indicate that
+     the parameter should be passed on to the filesystem, 1 to indicate that
+     the parameter should be discarded or an error to indicate that the
+     parameter should be rejected.
+
+     The value pointed to by param may be modified (if a string) or stolen
+     (provided the value pointer is NULL'd out).  If it is stolen, 1 must be
+     returned to prevent it being passed to the filesystem.
+
+ (*) int security_fs_context_validate(struct fs_context *fc);
+
+     Called after all the options have been parsed to validate the collection
+     as a whole and to do any necessary allocation so that
+     security_sb_get_tree() and security_sb_reconfigure() are less likely to
+     fail.  It should return 0 or a negative error code.
+
+     In the case of reconfiguration, the target superblock will be accessible
+     via fc->root.
+
+ (*) int security_sb_get_tree(struct fs_context *fc);
+
+     Called during the mount procedure to verify that the specified superblock
+     is allowed to be mounted and to transfer the security data there.  It
+     should return 0 or a negative error code.
+
+ (*) void security_sb_reconfigure(struct fs_context *fc);
+
+     Called to apply any reconfiguration to an LSM's context.  It must not
+     fail.  Error checking and resource allocation must be done in advance by
+     the parameter parsing and validation hooks.
+
+ (*) int security_sb_mountpoint(struct fs_context *fc, struct path *mountpoint,
+				unsigned int mnt_flags);
+
+     Called during the mount procedure to verify that the root dentry attached
+     to the context is permitted to be attached to the specified mountpoint.
+     It should return 0 on success or a negative error code on failure.
+
+
+==========================
+VFS FILESYSTEM CONTEXT API
+==========================
+
+There are four operations for creating a filesystem context and one for
+destroying a context:
+
+ (*) struct fs_context *fs_context_for_mount(
+		struct file_system_type *fs_type,
+		unsigned int sb_flags);
+
+     Allocate a filesystem context for the purpose of setting up a new mount,
+     whether that be with a new superblock or sharing an existing one.  This
+     sets the superblock flags, initialises the security and calls
+     fs_type->init_fs_context() to initialise the filesystem private data.
+
+     fs_type specifies the filesystem type that will manage the context and
+     sb_flags presets the superblock flags stored therein.
+
+ (*) struct fs_context *fs_context_for_reconfigure(
+		struct dentry *dentry,
+		unsigned int sb_flags,
+		unsigned int sb_flags_mask);
+
+     Allocate a filesystem context for the purpose of reconfiguring an
+     existing superblock.  dentry provides a reference to the superblock to be
+     configured.  sb_flags and sb_flags_mask indicate which superblock flags
+     need changing and to what.
+
+ (*) struct fs_context *fs_context_for_submount(
+		struct file_system_type *fs_type,
+		struct dentry *reference);
+
+     Allocate a filesystem context for the purpose of creating a new mount for
+     an automount point or other derived superblock.  fs_type specifies the
+     filesystem type that will manage the context and the reference dentry
+     supplies the parameters.  Namespaces are propagated from the reference
+     dentry's superblock also.
+
+     Note that it's not a requirement that the reference dentry be of the same
+     filesystem type as fs_type.
+
+ (*) struct fs_context *vfs_dup_fs_context(struct fs_context *src_fc);
+
+     Duplicate a filesystem context, copying any options noted and duplicating
+     or additionally referencing any resources held therein.  This is available
+     for use where a filesystem has to get a mount within a mount, such as NFS4
+     does by internally mounting the root of the target server and then doing a
+     private pathwalk to the target directory.
+
+     The purpose in the new context is inherited from the old one.
+
+ (*) void put_fs_context(struct fs_context *fc);
+
+     Destroy a filesystem context, releasing any resources it holds.  This
+     calls the ->free() operation.  This is intended to be called by anyone who
+     created a filesystem context.
+
+     [!] filesystem contexts are not refcounted, so this causes unconditional
+	 destruction.
+
+In all the above operations, apart from the put op, the return is a mount
+context pointer or a negative error code.
+
+For the remaining operations, if an error occurs, a negative error code will be
+returned.
+
+ (*) int vfs_parse_fs_param(struct fs_context *fc,
+			    struct fs_parameter *param);
+
+     Supply a single mount parameter to the filesystem context.  This include
+     the specification of the source/device which is specified as the "source"
+     parameter (which may be specified multiple times if the filesystem
+     supports that).
+
+     param specifies the parameter key name and the value.  The parameter is
+     first checked to see if it corresponds to a standard mount flag (in which
+     case it is used to set an SB_xxx flag and consumed) or a security option
+     (in which case the LSM consumes it) before it is passed on to the
+     filesystem.
+
+     The parameter value is typed and can be one of:
+
+	fs_value_is_flag,		Parameter not given a value.
+	fs_value_is_string,		Value is a string
+	fs_value_is_blob,		Value is a binary blob
+	fs_value_is_filename,		Value is a filename* + dirfd
+	fs_value_is_filename_empty,	Value is a filename* + dirfd + AT_EMPTY_PATH
+	fs_value_is_file,		Value is an open file (file*)
+
+     If there is a value, that value is stored in a union in the struct in one
+     of param->{string,blob,name,file}.  Note that the function may steal and
+     clear the pointer, but then becomes responsible for disposing of the
+     object.
+
+ (*) int vfs_parse_fs_string(struct fs_context *fc, const char *key,
+			     const char *value, size_t v_size);
+
+     A wrapper around vfs_parse_fs_param() that copies the value string it is
+     passed.
+
+ (*) int generic_parse_monolithic(struct fs_context *fc, void *data);
+
+     Parse a sys_mount() data page, assuming the form to be a text list
+     consisting of key[=val] options separated by commas.  Each item in the
+     list is passed to vfs_mount_option().  This is the default when the
+     ->parse_monolithic() method is NULL.
+
+ (*) int vfs_get_tree(struct fs_context *fc);
+
+     Get or create the mountable root and superblock, using the parameters in
+     the filesystem context to select/configure the superblock.  This invokes
+     the ->get_tree() method.
+
+ (*) struct vfsmount *vfs_create_mount(struct fs_context *fc);
+
+     Create a mount given the parameters in the specified filesystem context.
+     Note that this does not attach the mount to anything.
+
+
+===========================
+SUPERBLOCK CREATION HELPERS
+===========================
+
+A number of VFS helpers are available for use by filesystems for the creation
+or looking up of superblocks.
+
+ (*) struct super_block *
+     sget_fc(struct fs_context *fc,
+	     int (*test)(struct super_block *sb, struct fs_context *fc),
+	     int (*set)(struct super_block *sb, struct fs_context *fc));
+
+     This is the core routine.  If test is non-NULL, it searches for an
+     existing superblock matching the criteria held in the fs_context, using
+     the test function to match them.  If no match is found, a new superblock
+     is created and the set function is called to set it up.
+
+     Prior to the set function being called, fc->s_fs_info will be transferred
+     to sb->s_fs_info - and fc->s_fs_info will be cleared if set returns
+     success (ie. 0).
+
+The following helpers all wrap sget_fc():
+
+ (*) int vfs_get_super(struct fs_context *fc,
+		       enum vfs_get_super_keying keying,
+		       int (*fill_super)(struct super_block *sb,
+					 struct fs_context *fc))
+
+     This creates/looks up a deviceless superblock.  The keying indicates how
+     many superblocks of this type may exist and in what manner they may be
+     shared:
+
+	(1) vfs_get_single_super
+
+	    Only one such superblock may exist in the system.  Any further
+	    attempt to get a new superblock gets this one (and any parameter
+	    differences are ignored).
+
+	(2) vfs_get_keyed_super
+
+	    Multiple superblocks of this type may exist and they're keyed on
+	    their s_fs_info pointer (for example this may refer to a
+	    namespace).
+
+	(3) vfs_get_independent_super
+
+	    Multiple independent superblocks of this type may exist.  This
+	    function never matches an existing one and always creates a new
+	    one.
+
+
+=====================
+PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
+=====================
+
+Parameters are described using structures defined in linux/fs_parser.h.
+There's a core description struct that links everything together:
+
+	struct fs_parameter_description {
+		const char	name[16];
+		const struct fs_parameter_spec *specs;
+		const struct fs_parameter_enum *enums;
+	};
+
+For example:
+
+	enum {
+		Opt_autocell,
+		Opt_bar,
+		Opt_dyn,
+		Opt_foo,
+		Opt_source,
+	};
+
+	static const struct fs_parameter_description afs_fs_parameters = {
+		.name		= "kAFS",
+		.specs		= afs_param_specs,
+		.enums		= afs_param_enums,
+	};
+
+The members are as follows:
+
+ (1) const char name[16];
+
+     The name to be used in error messages generated by the parse helper
+     functions.
+
+ (2) const struct fs_parameter_specification *specs;
+
+     Table of parameter specifications, terminated with a null entry, where the
+     entries are of type:
+
+	struct fs_parameter_spec {
+		const char		*name;
+		u8			opt;
+		enum fs_parameter_type	type:8;
+		unsigned short		flags;
+	};
+
+     The 'name' field is a string to match exactly to the parameter key (no
+     wildcards, patterns and no case-independence) and 'opt' is the value that
+     will be returned by the fs_parser() function in the case of a successful
+     match.
+
+     The 'type' field indicates the desired value type and must be one of:
+
+	TYPE NAME		EXPECTED VALUE		RESULT IN
+	=======================	=======================	=====================
+	fs_param_is_flag	No value		n/a
+	fs_param_is_bool	Boolean value		result->boolean
+	fs_param_is_u32		32-bit unsigned int	result->uint_32
+	fs_param_is_u32_octal	32-bit octal int	result->uint_32
+	fs_param_is_u32_hex	32-bit hex int		result->uint_32
+	fs_param_is_s32		32-bit signed int	result->int_32
+	fs_param_is_u64		64-bit unsigned int	result->uint_64
+	fs_param_is_enum	Enum value name 	result->uint_32
+	fs_param_is_string	Arbitrary string	param->string
+	fs_param_is_blob	Binary blob		param->blob
+	fs_param_is_blockdev	Blockdev path		* Needs lookup
+	fs_param_is_path	Path			* Needs lookup
+	fs_param_is_fd		File descriptor		result->int_32
+
+     Note that if the value is of fs_param_is_bool type, fs_parse() will try
+     to match any string value against "0", "1", "no", "yes", "false", "true".
+
+     Each parameter can also be qualified with 'flags':
+
+	fs_param_v_optional	The value is optional
+	fs_param_neg_with_no	result->negated set if key is prefixed with "no"
+	fs_param_neg_with_empty	result->negated set if value is ""
+	fs_param_deprecated	The parameter is deprecated.
+
+     These are wrapped with a number of convenience wrappers:
+
+	MACRO			SPECIFIES
+	=======================	===============================================
+	fsparam_flag()		fs_param_is_flag
+	fsparam_flag_no()	fs_param_is_flag, fs_param_neg_with_no
+	fsparam_bool()		fs_param_is_bool
+	fsparam_u32()		fs_param_is_u32
+	fsparam_u32oct()	fs_param_is_u32_octal
+	fsparam_u32hex()	fs_param_is_u32_hex
+	fsparam_s32()		fs_param_is_s32
+	fsparam_u64()		fs_param_is_u64
+	fsparam_enum()		fs_param_is_enum
+	fsparam_string()	fs_param_is_string
+	fsparam_blob()		fs_param_is_blob
+	fsparam_bdev()		fs_param_is_blockdev
+	fsparam_path()		fs_param_is_path
+	fsparam_fd()		fs_param_is_fd
+
+     all of which take two arguments, name string and option number - for
+     example:
+
+	static const struct fs_parameter_spec afs_param_specs[] = {
+		fsparam_flag	("autocell",	Opt_autocell),
+		fsparam_flag	("dyn",		Opt_dyn),
+		fsparam_string	("source",	Opt_source),
+		fsparam_flag_no	("foo",		Opt_foo),
+		{}
+	};
+
+     An addition macro, __fsparam() is provided that takes an additional pair
+     of arguments to specify the type and the flags for anything that doesn't
+     match one of the above macros.
+
+ (6) const struct fs_parameter_enum *enums;
+
+     Table of enum value names to integer mappings, terminated with a null
+     entry.  This is of type:
+
+	struct fs_parameter_enum {
+		u8		opt;
+		char		name[14];
+		u8		value;
+	};
+
+     Where the array is an unsorted list of { parameter ID, name }-keyed
+     elements that indicate the value to map to, e.g.:
+
+	static const struct fs_parameter_enum afs_param_enums[] = {
+		{ Opt_bar,   "x",      1},
+		{ Opt_bar,   "y",      23},
+		{ Opt_bar,   "z",      42},
+	};
+
+     If a parameter of type fs_param_is_enum is encountered, fs_parse() will
+     try to look the value up in the enum table and the result will be stored
+     in the parse result.
+
+The parser should be pointed to by the parser pointer in the file_system_type
+struct as this will provide validation on registration (if
+CONFIG_VALIDATE_FS_PARSER=y) and will allow the description to be queried from
+userspace using the fsinfo() syscall.
+
+
+==========================
+PARAMETER HELPER FUNCTIONS
+==========================
+
+A number of helper functions are provided to help a filesystem or an LSM
+process the parameters it is given.
+
+ (*) int lookup_constant(const struct constant_table tbl[],
+			 const char *name, int not_found);
+
+     Look up a constant by name in a table of name -> integer mappings.  The
+     table is an array of elements of the following type:
+
+	struct constant_table {
+		const char	*name;
+		int		value;
+	};
+
+     If a match is found, the corresponding value is returned.  If a match
+     isn't found, the not_found value is returned instead.
+
+ (*) bool validate_constant_table(const struct constant_table *tbl,
+				  size_t tbl_size,
+				  int low, int high, int special);
+
+     Validate a constant table.  Checks that all the elements are appropriately
+     ordered, that there are no duplicates and that the values are between low
+     and high inclusive, though provision is made for one allowable special
+     value outside of that range.  If no special value is required, special
+     should just be set to lie inside the low-to-high range.
+
+     If all is good, true is returned.  If the table is invalid, errors are
+     logged to dmesg and false is returned.
+
+ (*) bool fs_validate_description(const struct fs_parameter_description *desc);
+
+     This performs some validation checks on a parameter description.  It
+     returns true if the description is good and false if it is not.  It will
+     log errors to dmesg if validation fails.
+
+ (*) int fs_parse(struct fs_context *fc,
+		  const struct fs_parameter_description *desc,
+		  struct fs_parameter *param,
+		  struct fs_parse_result *result);
+
+     This is the main interpreter of parameters.  It uses the parameter
+     description to look up a parameter by key name and to convert that to an
+     option number (which it returns).
+
+     If successful, and if the parameter type indicates the result is a
+     boolean, integer or enum type, the value is converted by this function and
+     the result stored in result->{boolean,int_32,uint_32,uint_64}.
+
+     If a match isn't initially made, the key is prefixed with "no" and no
+     value is present then an attempt will be made to look up the key with the
+     prefix removed.  If this matches a parameter for which the type has flag
+     fs_param_neg_with_no set, then a match will be made and result->negated
+     will be set to true.
+
+     If the parameter isn't matched, -ENOPARAM will be returned; if the
+     parameter is matched, but the value is erroneous, -EINVAL will be
+     returned; otherwise the parameter's option number will be returned.
+
+ (*) int fs_lookup_param(struct fs_context *fc,
+			 struct fs_parameter *value,
+			 bool want_bdev,
+			 struct path *_path);
+
+     This takes a parameter that carries a string or filename type and attempts
+     to do a path lookup on it.  If the parameter expects a blockdev, a check
+     is made that the inode actually represents one.
+
+     Returns 0 if successful and *_path will be set; returns a negative error
+     code if not.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/overlayfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/overlayfs.txt
index eef7d9d259e8..1da2f1668f08 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/overlayfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/overlayfs.txt
@@ -336,8 +336,20 @@ the copied layers will fail the verification of the lower root file handle.
 Non-standard behavior
 ---------------------
 
-Overlayfs can now act as a POSIX compliant filesystem with the following
-features turned on:
+Current version of overlayfs can act as a mostly POSIX compliant
+filesystem.
+
+This is the list of cases that overlayfs doesn't currently handle:
+
+a) POSIX mandates updating st_atime for reads.  This is currently not
+done in the case when the file resides on a lower layer.
+
+b) If a file residing on a lower layer is opened for read-only and then
+memory mapped with MAP_SHARED, then subsequent changes to the file are not
+reflected in the memory mapping.
+
+The following options allow overlayfs to act more like a standards
+compliant filesystem:
 
 1) "redirect_dir"
 
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.rst
index 9d6b68853f5b..434a07b0002b 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.rst
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,18 @@
+===============
+Pathname lookup
+===============
+
+This write-up is based on three articles published at lwn.net:
+
+- <https://lwn.net/Articles/649115/> Pathname lookup in Linux
+- <https://lwn.net/Articles/649729/> RCU-walk: faster pathname lookup in Linux
+- <https://lwn.net/Articles/650786/> A walk among the symlinks
+
+Written by Neil Brown with help from Al Viro and Jon Corbet.
+It has subsequently been updated to reflect changes in the kernel
+including:
+
+- per-directory parallel name lookup.
 
 Introduction to pathname lookup
 ===============================
@@ -344,7 +359,7 @@ In particular it is held while scanning chains in the dcache hash
 table, and the mount point hash table.
 
 Bringing it together with ``struct nameidata``
---------------------------------------------
+----------------------------------------------
 
 .. _First edition Unix: http://minnie.tuhs.org/cgi-bin/utree.pl?file=V1/u2.s
 
@@ -355,7 +370,7 @@ converts a "name" to an "inode".  ``struct nameidata`` contains (among
 other fields):
 
 ``struct path path``
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 
 A ``path`` contains a ``struct vfsmount`` (which is
 embedded in a ``struct mount``) and a ``struct dentry``.  Together these
@@ -366,13 +381,13 @@ step.  A reference through ``d_lockref`` and ``mnt_count`` is always
 held.
 
 ``struct qstr last``
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 
 This is a string together with a length (i.e. _not_ ``nul`` terminated)
 that is the "next" component in the pathname.
 
 ``int last_type``
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 
 This is one of ``LAST_NORM``, ``LAST_ROOT``, ``LAST_DOT``, ``LAST_DOTDOT``, or
 ``LAST_BIND``.  The ``last`` field is only valid if the type is
@@ -381,7 +396,7 @@ components of the symlink have been processed yet.  Others should be
 fairly self-explanatory.
 
 ``struct path root``
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 
 This is used to hold a reference to the effective root of the
 filesystem.  Often that reference won't be needed, so this field is
@@ -510,7 +525,7 @@ potentially interesting things about these dentries corresponding
 to three different flags that might be set in ``dentry->d_flags``:
 
 ``DCACHE_MANAGE_TRANSIT``
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 
 If this flag has been set, then the filesystem has requested that the
 ``d_manage()`` dentry operation be called before handling any possible
@@ -529,7 +544,7 @@ filesystem, which will then give it a special pass through
 ``d_manage()`` by returning ``-EISDIR``.
 
 ``DCACHE_MOUNTED``
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 
 This flag is set on every dentry that is mounted on.  As Linux
 supports multiple filesystem namespaces, it is possible that the
@@ -542,7 +557,7 @@ If this flag is set, and ``d_manage()`` didn't return ``-EISDIR``,
 and a new ``dentry`` (both with counted references).
 
 ``DCACHE_NEED_AUTOMOUNT``
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 
 If ``d_manage()`` allowed us to get this far, and ``lookup_mnt()`` didn't
 find a mount point, then this flag causes the ``d_automount()`` dentry
@@ -698,7 +713,7 @@ With that little refresher on seqlocks out of the way we can look at
 the bigger picture of how RCU-walk uses seqlocks.
 
 ``mount_lock`` and ``nd->m_seq``
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 
 We already met the ``mount_lock`` seqlock when REF-walk used it to
 ensure that crossing a mount point is performed safely.  RCU-walk uses
@@ -727,7 +742,7 @@ results would have been the same.  This ensures the invariant holds,
 at least for vfsmount structures.
 
 ``dentry->d_seq`` and ``nd->seq``
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 
 In place of taking a count or lock on ``d_reflock``, RCU-walk samples
 the per-dentry ``d_seq`` seqlock, and stores the sequence number in the
@@ -774,7 +789,7 @@ getting a counted reference to the new dentry before dropping that for
 the old dentry which we saw in REF-walk.
 
 No ``inode->i_rwsem`` or even ``rename_lock``
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 
 A semaphore is a fairly heavyweight lock that can only be taken when it is
 permissible to sleep.  As ``rcu_read_lock()`` forbids sleeping,
@@ -796,7 +811,7 @@ locking.  This neatly handles all cases, so adding extra checks on
 rename_lock would bring no significant value.
 
 ``unlazy walk()`` and ``complete_walk()``
--------------------------------------
+-----------------------------------------
 
 That "dropping down to REF-walk" typically involves a call to
 ``unlazy_walk()``, so named because "RCU-walk" is also sometimes
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/porting b/Documentation/filesystems/porting
index cf43bc4dbf31..3bd1148d8bb6 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/porting
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/porting
@@ -638,3 +638,38 @@ in your dentry operations instead.
 	inode to d_splice_alias() will also do the right thing (equivalent of
 	d_add(dentry, NULL); return NULL;), so that kind of special cases
 	also doesn't need a separate treatment.
+--
+[strongly recommended]
+	take the RCU-delayed parts of ->destroy_inode() into a new method -
+	->free_inode().  If ->destroy_inode() becomes empty - all the better,
+	just get rid of it.  Synchronous work (e.g. the stuff that can't
+	be done from an RCU callback, or any WARN_ON() where we want the
+	stack trace) *might* be movable to ->evict_inode(); however,
+	that goes only for the things that are not needed to balance something
+	done by ->alloc_inode().  IOW, if it's cleaning up the stuff that
+	might have accumulated over the life of in-core inode, ->evict_inode()
+	might be a fit.
+
+	Rules for inode destruction:
+		* if ->destroy_inode() is non-NULL, it gets called
+		* if ->free_inode() is non-NULL, it gets scheduled by call_rcu()
+		* combination of NULL ->destroy_inode and NULL ->free_inode is
+		  treated as NULL/free_inode_nonrcu, to preserve the compatibility.
+
+	Note that the callback (be it via ->free_inode() or explicit call_rcu()
+	in ->destroy_inode()) is *NOT* ordered wrt superblock destruction;
+	as the matter of fact, the superblock and all associated structures
+	might be already gone.  The filesystem driver is guaranteed to be still
+	there, but that's it.  Freeing memory in the callback is fine; doing
+	more than that is possible, but requires a lot of care and is best
+	avoided.
+--
+[mandatory]
+	DCACHE_RCUACCESS is gone; having an RCU delay on dentry freeing is the
+	default.  DCACHE_NORCU opts out, and only d_alloc_pseudo() has any
+	business doing so.
+--
+[mandatory]
+	d_alloc_pseudo() is internal-only; uses outside of alloc_file_pseudo() are
+	very suspect (and won't work in modules).  Such uses are very likely to
+	be misspelled d_alloc_anon().
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/splice.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/splice.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..edd874808472
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/splice.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+================
+splice and pipes
+================
+
+splice API
+==========
+
+splice is a method for moving blocks of data around inside the kernel,
+without continually transferring them between the kernel and user space.
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/splice.c
+
+pipes API
+=========
+
+Pipe interfaces are all for in-kernel (builtin image) use. They are not
+exported for use by modules.
+
+.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/pipe_fs_i.h
+   :internal:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/pipe.c
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt
index 41411b0c60a3..5b5311f9358d 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt
@@ -116,6 +116,27 @@ static struct device_attribute dev_attr_foo = {
 	.store = store_foo,
 };
 
+Note as stated in include/linux/kernel.h "OTHER_WRITABLE?  Generally
+considered a bad idea." so trying to set a sysfs file writable for
+everyone will fail reverting to RO mode for "Others".
+
+For the common cases sysfs.h provides convenience macros to make
+defining attributes easier as well as making code more concise and
+readable. The above case could be shortened to:
+
+static struct device_attribute dev_attr_foo = __ATTR_RW(foo);
+
+the list of helpers available to define your wrapper function is:
+__ATTR_RO(name): assumes default name_show and mode 0444
+__ATTR_WO(name): assumes a name_store only and is restricted to mode
+                 0200 that is root write access only.
+__ATTR_RO_MODE(name, mode): fore more restrictive RO access currently
+                 only use case is the EFI System Resource Table
+                 (see drivers/firmware/efi/esrt.c)
+__ATTR_RW(name): assumes default name_show, name_store and setting
+                 mode to 0644.
+__ATTR_NULL: which sets the name to NULL and is used as end of list
+                 indicator (see: kernel/workqueue.c)
 
 Subsystem-Specific Callbacks
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt
index 8dc8e9c2913f..57fc576b1f3e 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt
@@ -3,8 +3,6 @@
 
 	Original author: Richard Gooch <rgooch@atnf.csiro.au>
 
-		  Last updated on June 24, 2007.
-
   Copyright (C) 1999 Richard Gooch
   Copyright (C) 2005 Pekka Enberg
 
@@ -465,6 +463,12 @@ otherwise noted.
 	argument.  If request can't be handled without leaving RCU mode,
 	have it return ERR_PTR(-ECHILD).
 
+	If the filesystem stores the symlink target in ->i_link, the
+	VFS may use it directly without calling ->get_link(); however,
+	->get_link() must still be provided.  ->i_link must not be
+	freed until after an RCU grace period.  Writing to ->i_link
+	post-iget() time requires a 'release' memory barrier.
+
   readlink: this is now just an override for use by readlink(2) for the
 	cases when ->get_link uses nd_jump_link() or object is not in
 	fact a symlink.  Normally filesystems should only implement
@@ -857,6 +861,7 @@ struct file_operations {
 	ssize_t (*write) (struct file *, const char __user *, size_t, loff_t *);
 	ssize_t (*read_iter) (struct kiocb *, struct iov_iter *);
 	ssize_t (*write_iter) (struct kiocb *, struct iov_iter *);
+	int (*iopoll)(struct kiocb *kiocb, bool spin);
 	int (*iterate) (struct file *, struct dir_context *);
 	int (*iterate_shared) (struct file *, struct dir_context *);
 	__poll_t (*poll) (struct file *, struct poll_table_struct *);
@@ -902,6 +907,8 @@ otherwise noted.
 
   write_iter: possibly asynchronous write with iov_iter as source
 
+  iopoll: called when aio wants to poll for completions on HIPRI iocbs
+
   iterate: called when the VFS needs to read the directory contents
 
   iterate_shared: called when the VFS needs to read the directory contents
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/xfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/xfs.txt
index 9ccfd1bc6201..a5cbb5e0e3db 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/xfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/xfs.txt
@@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ The following sysctls are available for the XFS filesystem:
 		XFS_ERRLEVEL_LOW:       1
 		XFS_ERRLEVEL_HIGH:      5
 
-  fs.xfs.panic_mask		(Min: 0  Default: 0  Max: 255)
+  fs.xfs.panic_mask		(Min: 0  Default: 0  Max: 256)
 	Causes certain error conditions to call BUG(). Value is a bitmask;
 	OR together the tags which represent errors which should cause panics:
 
@@ -285,6 +285,7 @@ The following sysctls are available for the XFS filesystem:
 		XFS_PTAG_SHUTDOWN_IOERROR       0x00000020
 		XFS_PTAG_SHUTDOWN_LOGERROR      0x00000040
 		XFS_PTAG_FSBLOCK_ZERO           0x00000080
+		XFS_PTAG_VERIFIER_ERROR         0x00000100
 
 	This option is intended for debugging only.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/DSD-properties-rules.txt b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/DSD-properties-rules.rst
index 3e4862bdad98..4306f29b6103 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/DSD-properties-rules.txt
+++ b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/DSD-properties-rules.rst
@@ -1,8 +1,11 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+==================================
 _DSD Device Properties Usage Rules
-----------------------------------
+==================================
 
 Properties, Property Sets and Property Subsets
-----------------------------------------------
+==============================================
 
 The _DSD (Device Specific Data) configuration object, introduced in ACPI 5.1,
 allows any type of device configuration data to be provided via the ACPI
@@ -18,7 +21,7 @@ specific type) associated with it.
 
 In the ACPI _DSD context it is an element of the sub-package following the
 generic Device Properties UUID in the _DSD return package as specified in the
-Device Properties UUID definition document [1].
+Device Properties UUID definition document [1]_.
 
 It also may be regarded as the definition of a key and the associated data type
 that can be returned by _DSD in the Device Properties UUID sub-package for a
@@ -33,14 +36,14 @@ Property subsets are nested collections of properties.  Each of them is
 associated with an additional key (name) allowing the subset to be referred
 to as a whole (and to be treated as a separate entity).  The canonical
 representation of property subsets is via the mechanism specified in the
-Hierarchical Properties Extension UUID definition document [2].
+Hierarchical Properties Extension UUID definition document [2]_.
 
 Property sets may be hierarchical.  That is, a property set may contain
 multiple property subsets that each may contain property subsets of its
 own and so on.
 
 General Validity Rule for Property Sets
----------------------------------------
+=======================================
 
 Valid property sets must follow the guidance given by the Device Properties UUID
 definition document [1].
@@ -73,7 +76,7 @@ suitable for the ACPI environment and consequently they cannot belong to a valid
 property set.
 
 Property Sets and Device Tree Bindings
---------------------------------------
+======================================
 
 It often is useful to make _DSD return property sets that follow Device Tree
 bindings.
@@ -91,7 +94,7 @@ expected to automatically work in the ACPI environment regardless of their
 contents.
 
 References
-----------
+==========
 
-[1] http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/_DSD-device-properties-UUID.pdf
-[2] http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/_DSD-hierarchical-data-extension-UUID-v1.1.pdf
+.. [1] http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/_DSD-device-properties-UUID.pdf
+.. [2] http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/_DSD-hierarchical-data-extension-UUID-v1.1.pdf
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/acpi-lid.txt b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/acpi-lid.rst
index effe7af3a5af..874ce0ed340d 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/acpi-lid.txt
+++ b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/acpi-lid.rst
@@ -1,13 +1,18 @@
-Special Usage Model of the ACPI Control Method Lid Device
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+.. include:: <isonum.txt>
 
-Copyright (C) 2016, Intel Corporation
-Author: Lv Zheng <lv.zheng@intel.com>
+=========================================================
+Special Usage Model of the ACPI Control Method Lid Device
+=========================================================
 
+:Copyright: |copy| 2016, Intel Corporation
 
-Abstract:
+:Author: Lv Zheng <lv.zheng@intel.com>
 
-Platforms containing lids convey lid state (open/close) to OSPMs using a
-control method lid device. To implement this, the AML tables issue
+Abstract
+========
+Platforms containing lids convey lid state (open/close) to OSPMs
+using a control method lid device. To implement this, the AML tables issue
 Notify(lid_device, 0x80) to notify the OSPMs whenever the lid state has
 changed. The _LID control method for the lid device must be implemented to
 report the "current" state of the lid as either "opened" or "closed".
@@ -19,7 +24,8 @@ taken into account. This document describes the restrictions and the
 expections of the Linux ACPI lid device driver.
 
 
-1. Restrictions of the returning value of the _LID control method
+Restrictions of the returning value of the _LID control method
+==============================================================
 
 The _LID control method is described to return the "current" lid state.
 However the word of "current" has ambiguity, some buggy AML tables return
@@ -30,7 +36,8 @@ initial returning value. When the AML tables implement this control method
 with cached value, the initial returning value is likely not reliable.
 There are platforms always retun "closed" as initial lid state.
 
-2. Restrictions of the lid state change notifications
+Restrictions of the lid state change notifications
+==================================================
 
 There are buggy AML tables never notifying when the lid device state is
 changed to "opened". Thus the "opened" notification is not guaranteed. But
@@ -39,18 +46,22 @@ state is changed to "closed". The "closed" notification is normally used to
 trigger some system power saving operations on Windows. Since it is fully
 tested, it is reliable from all AML tables.
 
-3. Expections for the userspace users of the ACPI lid device driver
+Expections for the userspace users of the ACPI lid device driver
+================================================================
 
 The ACPI button driver exports the lid state to the userspace via the
-following file:
+following file::
+
   /proc/acpi/button/lid/LID0/state
+
 This file actually calls the _LID control method described above. And given
 the previous explanation, it is not reliable enough on some platforms. So
 it is advised for the userspace program to not to solely rely on this file
 to determine the actual lid state.
 
 The ACPI button driver emits the following input event to the userspace:
-  SW_LID
+  * SW_LID
+
 The ACPI lid device driver is implemented to try to deliver the platform
 triggered events to the userspace. However, given the fact that the buggy
 firmware cannot make sure "opened"/"closed" events are paired, the ACPI
@@ -59,20 +70,25 @@ button driver uses the following 3 modes in order not to trigger issues.
 If the userspace hasn't been prepared to ignore the unreliable "opened"
 events and the unreliable initial state notification, Linux users can use
 the following kernel parameters to handle the possible issues:
+
 A. button.lid_init_state=method:
    When this option is specified, the ACPI button driver reports the
    initial lid state using the returning value of the _LID control method
    and whether the "opened"/"closed" events are paired fully relies on the
    firmware implementation.
+
    This option can be used to fix some platforms where the returning value
    of the _LID control method is reliable but the initial lid state
    notification is missing.
+
    This option is the default behavior during the period the userspace
    isn't ready to handle the buggy AML tables.
+
 B. button.lid_init_state=open:
    When this option is specified, the ACPI button driver always reports the
    initial lid state as "opened" and whether the "opened"/"closed" events
    are paired fully relies on the firmware implementation.
+
    This may fix some platforms where the returning value of the _LID
    control method is not reliable and the initial lid state notification is
    missing.
@@ -80,6 +96,7 @@ B. button.lid_init_state=open:
 If the userspace has been prepared to ignore the unreliable "opened" events
 and the unreliable initial state notification, Linux users should always
 use the following kernel parameter:
+
 C. button.lid_init_state=ignore:
    When this option is specified, the ACPI button driver never reports the
    initial lid state and there is a compensation mechanism implemented to
@@ -89,6 +106,7 @@ C. button.lid_init_state=ignore:
    notifications can be delivered to the userspace when the lid is actually
    opens given that some AML tables do not send "opened" notifications
    reliably.
+
    In this mode, if everything is correctly implemented by the platform
    firmware, the old userspace programs should still work. Otherwise, the
    new userspace programs are required to work with the ACPI button driver.
diff --git a/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/aml-debugger.rst b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/aml-debugger.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a889d43bc6c5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/aml-debugger.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+.. include:: <isonum.txt>
+
+================
+The AML Debugger
+================
+
+:Copyright: |copy| 2016, Intel Corporation
+:Author: Lv Zheng <lv.zheng@intel.com>
+
+
+This document describes the usage of the AML debugger embedded in the Linux
+kernel.
+
+1. Build the debugger
+=====================
+
+The following kernel configuration items are required to enable the AML
+debugger interface from the Linux kernel::
+
+   CONFIG_ACPI_DEBUGGER=y
+   CONFIG_ACPI_DEBUGGER_USER=m
+
+The userspace utilities can be built from the kernel source tree using
+the following commands::
+
+   $ cd tools
+   $ make acpi
+
+The resultant userspace tool binary is then located at::
+
+   tools/power/acpi/acpidbg
+
+It can be installed to system directories by running "make install" (as a
+sufficiently privileged user).
+
+2. Start the userspace debugger interface
+=========================================
+
+After booting the kernel with the debugger built-in, the debugger can be
+started by using the following commands::
+
+   # mount -t debugfs none /sys/kernel/debug
+   # modprobe acpi_dbg
+   # tools/power/acpi/acpidbg
+
+That spawns the interactive AML debugger environment where you can execute
+debugger commands.
+
+The commands are documented in the "ACPICA Overview and Programmer Reference"
+that can be downloaded from
+
+https://acpica.org/documentation
+
+The detailed debugger commands reference is located in Chapter 12 "ACPICA
+Debugger Reference".  The "help" command can be used for a quick reference.
+
+3. Stop the userspace debugger interface
+========================================
+
+The interactive debugger interface can be closed by pressing Ctrl+C or using
+the "quit" or "exit" commands.  When finished, unload the module with::
+
+   # rmmod acpi_dbg
+
+The module unloading may fail if there is an acpidbg instance running.
+
+4. Run the debugger in a script
+===============================
+
+It may be useful to run the AML debugger in a test script. "acpidbg" supports
+this in a special "batch" mode.  For example, the following command outputs
+the entire ACPI namespace::
+
+   # acpidbg -b "namespace"
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/apei/einj.txt b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/apei/einj.rst
index e550c8b98139..e588bccf5158 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/apei/einj.txt
+++ b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/apei/einj.rst
@@ -1,13 +1,16 @@
-			APEI Error INJection
-			~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+====================
+APEI Error INJection
+====================
 
 EINJ provides a hardware error injection mechanism. It is very useful
 for debugging and testing APEI and RAS features in general.
 
 You need to check whether your BIOS supports EINJ first. For that, look
-for early boot messages similar to this one:
+for early boot messages similar to this one::
 
-ACPI: EINJ 0x000000007370A000 000150 (v01 INTEL           00000001 INTL 00000001)
+  ACPI: EINJ 0x000000007370A000 000150 (v01 INTEL           00000001 INTL 00000001)
 
 which shows that the BIOS is exposing an EINJ table - it is the
 mechanism through which the injection is done.
@@ -23,11 +26,11 @@ order to see the APEI,EINJ,... functionality supported and exposed by
 the BIOS menu.
 
 To use EINJ, make sure the following are options enabled in your kernel
-configuration:
+configuration::
 
-CONFIG_DEBUG_FS
-CONFIG_ACPI_APEI
-CONFIG_ACPI_APEI_EINJ
+  CONFIG_DEBUG_FS
+  CONFIG_ACPI_APEI
+  CONFIG_ACPI_APEI_EINJ
 
 The EINJ user interface is in <debugfs mount point>/apei/einj.
 
@@ -37,20 +40,22 @@ The following files belong to it:
 
   This file shows which error types are supported:
 
+  ================  ===================================
   Error Type Value	Error Description
-  ================	=================
-  0x00000001		Processor Correctable
-  0x00000002		Processor Uncorrectable non-fatal
-  0x00000004		Processor Uncorrectable fatal
-  0x00000008		Memory Correctable
-  0x00000010		Memory Uncorrectable non-fatal
-  0x00000020		Memory Uncorrectable fatal
-  0x00000040		PCI Express Correctable
-  0x00000080		PCI Express Uncorrectable fatal
-  0x00000100		PCI Express Uncorrectable non-fatal
-  0x00000200		Platform Correctable
-  0x00000400		Platform Uncorrectable non-fatal
-  0x00000800		Platform Uncorrectable fatal
+  ================  ===================================
+  0x00000001        Processor Correctable
+  0x00000002        Processor Uncorrectable non-fatal
+  0x00000004        Processor Uncorrectable fatal
+  0x00000008        Memory Correctable
+  0x00000010        Memory Uncorrectable non-fatal
+  0x00000020        Memory Uncorrectable fatal
+  0x00000040        PCI Express Correctable
+  0x00000080        PCI Express Uncorrectable fatal
+  0x00000100        PCI Express Uncorrectable non-fatal
+  0x00000200        Platform Correctable
+  0x00000400        Platform Uncorrectable non-fatal
+  0x00000800        Platform Uncorrectable fatal
+  ================  ===================================
 
   The format of the file contents are as above, except present are only
   the available error types.
@@ -73,9 +78,12 @@ The following files belong to it:
   injection. Value is a bitmask as specified in ACPI5.0 spec for the
   SET_ERROR_TYPE_WITH_ADDRESS data structure:
 
-	Bit 0 - Processor APIC field valid (see param3 below).
-	Bit 1 - Memory address and mask valid (param1 and param2).
-	Bit 2 - PCIe (seg,bus,dev,fn) valid (see param4 below).
+    Bit 0
+      Processor APIC field valid (see param3 below).
+    Bit 1
+      Memory address and mask valid (param1 and param2).
+    Bit 2
+      PCIe (seg,bus,dev,fn) valid (see param4 below).
 
   If set to zero, legacy behavior is mimicked where the type of
   injection specifies just one bit set, and param1 is multiplexed.
@@ -121,7 +129,7 @@ BIOS versions based on the ACPI 5.0 specification have more control over
 the target of the injection. For processor-related errors (type 0x1, 0x2
 and 0x4), you can set flags to 0x3 (param3 for bit 0, and param1 and
 param2 for bit 1) so that you have more information added to the error
-signature being injected. The actual data passed is this:
+signature being injected. The actual data passed is this::
 
 	memory_address = param1;
 	memory_address_range = param2;
@@ -131,7 +139,7 @@ signature being injected. The actual data passed is this:
 For memory errors (type 0x8, 0x10 and 0x20) the address is set using
 param1 with a mask in param2 (0x0 is equivalent to all ones). For PCI
 express errors (type 0x40, 0x80 and 0x100) the segment, bus, device and
-function are specified using param1:
+function are specified using param1::
 
          31     24 23    16 15    11 10      8  7        0
 	+-------------------------------------------------+
@@ -152,26 +160,26 @@ documentation for details (and expect changes to this API if vendors
 creativity in using this feature expands beyond our expectations).
 
 
-An error injection example:
+An error injection example::
 
-# cd /sys/kernel/debug/apei/einj
-# cat available_error_type		# See which errors can be injected
-0x00000002	Processor Uncorrectable non-fatal
-0x00000008	Memory Correctable
-0x00000010	Memory Uncorrectable non-fatal
-# echo 0x12345000 > param1		# Set memory address for injection
-# echo $((-1 << 12)) > param2		# Mask 0xfffffffffffff000 - anywhere in this page
-# echo 0x8 > error_type			# Choose correctable memory error
-# echo 1 > error_inject			# Inject now
+  # cd /sys/kernel/debug/apei/einj
+  # cat available_error_type		# See which errors can be injected
+  0x00000002	Processor Uncorrectable non-fatal
+  0x00000008	Memory Correctable
+  0x00000010	Memory Uncorrectable non-fatal
+  # echo 0x12345000 > param1		# Set memory address for injection
+  # echo $((-1 << 12)) > param2		# Mask 0xfffffffffffff000 - anywhere in this page
+  # echo 0x8 > error_type			# Choose correctable memory error
+  # echo 1 > error_inject			# Inject now
 
-You should see something like this in dmesg:
+You should see something like this in dmesg::
 
-[22715.830801] EDAC sbridge MC3: HANDLING MCE MEMORY ERROR
-[22715.834759] EDAC sbridge MC3: CPU 0: Machine Check Event: 0 Bank 7: 8c00004000010090
-[22715.834759] EDAC sbridge MC3: TSC 0
-[22715.834759] EDAC sbridge MC3: ADDR 12345000 EDAC sbridge MC3: MISC 144780c86
-[22715.834759] EDAC sbridge MC3: PROCESSOR 0:306e7 TIME 1422553404 SOCKET 0 APIC 0
-[22716.616173] EDAC MC3: 1 CE memory read error on CPU_SrcID#0_Channel#0_DIMM#0 (channel:0 slot:0 page:0x12345 offset:0x0 grain:32 syndrome:0x0 -  area:DRAM err_code:0001:0090 socket:0 channel_mask:1 rank:0)
+  [22715.830801] EDAC sbridge MC3: HANDLING MCE MEMORY ERROR
+  [22715.834759] EDAC sbridge MC3: CPU 0: Machine Check Event: 0 Bank 7: 8c00004000010090
+  [22715.834759] EDAC sbridge MC3: TSC 0
+  [22715.834759] EDAC sbridge MC3: ADDR 12345000 EDAC sbridge MC3: MISC 144780c86
+  [22715.834759] EDAC sbridge MC3: PROCESSOR 0:306e7 TIME 1422553404 SOCKET 0 APIC 0
+  [22716.616173] EDAC MC3: 1 CE memory read error on CPU_SrcID#0_Channel#0_DIMM#0 (channel:0 slot:0 page:0x12345 offset:0x0 grain:32 syndrome:0x0 -  area:DRAM err_code:0001:0090 socket:0 channel_mask:1 rank:0)
 
 For more information about EINJ, please refer to ACPI specification
 version 4.0, section 17.5 and ACPI 5.0, section 18.6.
diff --git a/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/apei/output_format.rst b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/apei/output_format.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c2e7ebddb529
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/apei/output_format.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,150 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+==================
+APEI output format
+==================
+
+APEI uses printk as hardware error reporting interface, the output
+format is as follow::
+
+        <error record> :=
+        APEI generic hardware error status
+        severity: <integer>, <severity string>
+        section: <integer>, severity: <integer>, <severity string>
+        flags: <integer>
+        <section flags strings>
+        fru_id: <uuid string>
+        fru_text: <string>
+        section_type: <section type string>
+        <section data>
+
+        <severity string>* := recoverable | fatal | corrected | info
+
+        <section flags strings># :=
+        [primary][, containment warning][, reset][, threshold exceeded]\
+        [, resource not accessible][, latent error]
+
+        <section type string> := generic processor error | memory error | \
+        PCIe error | unknown, <uuid string>
+
+        <section data> :=
+        <generic processor section data> | <memory section data> | \
+        <pcie section data> | <null>
+
+        <generic processor section data> :=
+        [processor_type: <integer>, <proc type string>]
+        [processor_isa: <integer>, <proc isa string>]
+        [error_type: <integer>
+        <proc error type strings>]
+        [operation: <integer>, <proc operation string>]
+        [flags: <integer>
+        <proc flags strings>]
+        [level: <integer>]
+        [version_info: <integer>]
+        [processor_id: <integer>]
+        [target_address: <integer>]
+        [requestor_id: <integer>]
+        [responder_id: <integer>]
+        [IP: <integer>]
+
+        <proc type string>* := IA32/X64 | IA64
+
+        <proc isa string>* := IA32 | IA64 | X64
+
+        <processor error type strings># :=
+        [cache error][, TLB error][, bus error][, micro-architectural error]
+
+        <proc operation string>* := unknown or generic | data read | data write | \
+        instruction execution
+
+        <proc flags strings># :=
+        [restartable][, precise IP][, overflow][, corrected]
+
+        <memory section data> :=
+        [error_status: <integer>]
+        [physical_address: <integer>]
+        [physical_address_mask: <integer>]
+        [node: <integer>]
+        [card: <integer>]
+        [module: <integer>]
+        [bank: <integer>]
+        [device: <integer>]
+        [row: <integer>]
+        [column: <integer>]
+        [bit_position: <integer>]
+        [requestor_id: <integer>]
+        [responder_id: <integer>]
+        [target_id: <integer>]
+        [error_type: <integer>, <mem error type string>]
+
+        <mem error type string>* :=
+        unknown | no error | single-bit ECC | multi-bit ECC | \
+        single-symbol chipkill ECC | multi-symbol chipkill ECC | master abort | \
+        target abort | parity error | watchdog timeout | invalid address | \
+        mirror Broken | memory sparing | scrub corrected error | \
+        scrub uncorrected error
+
+        <pcie section data> :=
+        [port_type: <integer>, <pcie port type string>]
+        [version: <integer>.<integer>]
+        [command: <integer>, status: <integer>]
+        [device_id: <integer>:<integer>:<integer>.<integer>
+        slot: <integer>
+        secondary_bus: <integer>
+        vendor_id: <integer>, device_id: <integer>
+        class_code: <integer>]
+        [serial number: <integer>, <integer>]
+        [bridge: secondary_status: <integer>, control: <integer>]
+        [aer_status: <integer>, aer_mask: <integer>
+        <aer status string>
+        [aer_uncor_severity: <integer>]
+        aer_layer=<aer layer string>, aer_agent=<aer agent string>
+        aer_tlp_header: <integer> <integer> <integer> <integer>]
+
+        <pcie port type string>* := PCIe end point | legacy PCI end point | \
+        unknown | unknown | root port | upstream switch port | \
+        downstream switch port | PCIe to PCI/PCI-X bridge | \
+        PCI/PCI-X to PCIe bridge | root complex integrated endpoint device | \
+        root complex event collector
+
+        if section severity is fatal or recoverable
+        <aer status string># :=
+        unknown | unknown | unknown | unknown | Data Link Protocol | \
+        unknown | unknown | unknown | unknown | unknown | unknown | unknown | \
+        Poisoned TLP | Flow Control Protocol | Completion Timeout | \
+        Completer Abort | Unexpected Completion | Receiver Overflow | \
+        Malformed TLP | ECRC | Unsupported Request
+        else
+        <aer status string># :=
+        Receiver Error | unknown | unknown | unknown | unknown | unknown | \
+        Bad TLP | Bad DLLP | RELAY_NUM Rollover | unknown | unknown | unknown | \
+        Replay Timer Timeout | Advisory Non-Fatal
+        fi
+
+        <aer layer string> :=
+        Physical Layer | Data Link Layer | Transaction Layer
+
+        <aer agent string> :=
+        Receiver ID | Requester ID | Completer ID | Transmitter ID
+
+Where, [] designate corresponding content is optional
+
+All <field string> description with * has the following format::
+
+        field: <integer>, <field string>
+
+Where value of <integer> should be the position of "string" in <field
+string> description. Otherwise, <field string> will be "unknown".
+
+All <field strings> description with # has the following format::
+
+        field: <integer>
+        <field strings>
+
+Where each string in <fields strings> corresponding to one set bit of
+<integer>. The bit position is the position of "string" in <field
+strings> description.
+
+For more detailed explanation of every field, please refer to UEFI
+specification version 2.3 or later, section Appendix N: Common
+Platform Error Record.
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/debug.txt b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/debug.rst
index 65bf47c46b6d..1a152dd1d765 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/debug.txt
+++ b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/debug.rst
@@ -1,18 +1,21 @@
-			ACPI Debug Output
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
 
+=================
+ACPI Debug Output
+=================
 
 The ACPI CA, the Linux ACPI core, and some ACPI drivers can generate debug
 output.  This document describes how to use this facility.
 
 Compile-time configuration
---------------------------
+==========================
 
 ACPI debug output is globally enabled by CONFIG_ACPI_DEBUG.  If this config
 option is turned off, the debug messages are not even built into the
 kernel.
 
 Boot- and run-time configuration
---------------------------------
+================================
 
 When CONFIG_ACPI_DEBUG=y, you can select the component and level of messages
 you're interested in.  At boot-time, use the acpi.debug_layer and
@@ -21,7 +24,7 @@ debug_layer and debug_level files in /sys/module/acpi/parameters/ to control
 the debug messages.
 
 debug_layer (component)
------------------------
+=======================
 
 The "debug_layer" is a mask that selects components of interest, e.g., a
 specific driver or part of the ACPI interpreter.  To build the debug_layer
@@ -33,7 +36,7 @@ to /sys/module/acpi/parameters/debug_layer.
 
 The possible components are defined in include/acpi/acoutput.h and
 include/acpi/acpi_drivers.h.  Reading /sys/module/acpi/parameters/debug_layer
-shows the supported mask values, currently these:
+shows the supported mask values, currently these::
 
     ACPI_UTILITIES                  0x00000001
     ACPI_HARDWARE                   0x00000002
@@ -65,7 +68,7 @@ shows the supported mask values, currently these:
     ACPI_PROCESSOR_COMPONENT        0x20000000
 
 debug_level
------------
+===========
 
 The "debug_level" is a mask that selects different types of messages, e.g.,
 those related to initialization, method execution, informational messages, etc.
@@ -81,7 +84,7 @@ to /sys/module/acpi/parameters/debug_level.
 
 The possible levels are defined in include/acpi/acoutput.h.  Reading
 /sys/module/acpi/parameters/debug_level shows the supported mask values,
-currently these:
+currently these::
 
     ACPI_LV_INIT                    0x00000001
     ACPI_LV_DEBUG_OBJECT            0x00000002
@@ -113,9 +116,9 @@ currently these:
     ACPI_LV_EVENTS                  0x80000000
 
 Examples
---------
+========
 
-For example, drivers/acpi/bus.c contains this:
+For example, drivers/acpi/bus.c contains this::
 
     #define _COMPONENT              ACPI_BUS_COMPONENT
     ...
@@ -127,22 +130,22 @@ statement uses ACPI_DB_INFO, which is macro based on the ACPI_LV_INFO
 definition.)
 
 Enable all AML "Debug" output (stores to the Debug object while interpreting
-AML) during boot:
+AML) during boot::
 
     acpi.debug_layer=0xffffffff acpi.debug_level=0x2
 
-Enable PCI and PCI interrupt routing debug messages:
+Enable PCI and PCI interrupt routing debug messages::
 
     acpi.debug_layer=0x400000 acpi.debug_level=0x4
 
-Enable all ACPI hardware-related messages:
+Enable all ACPI hardware-related messages::
 
     acpi.debug_layer=0x2 acpi.debug_level=0xffffffff
 
-Enable all ACPI_DB_INFO messages after boot:
+Enable all ACPI_DB_INFO messages after boot::
 
     # echo 0x4 > /sys/module/acpi/parameters/debug_level
 
-Show all valid component values:
+Show all valid component values::
 
     # cat /sys/module/acpi/parameters/debug_layer
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/dsd/data-node-references.txt b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/dsd/data-node-references.rst
index c3871565c8cf..febccbc5689d 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/dsd/data-node-references.txt
+++ b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/dsd/data-node-references.rst
@@ -1,9 +1,12 @@
-Copyright (C) 2018 Intel Corporation
-Author: Sakari Ailus <sakari.ailus@linux.intel.com>
-
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+.. include:: <isonum.txt>
 
+===================================
 Referencing hierarchical data nodes
------------------------------------
+===================================
+
+:Copyright: |copy| 2018 Intel Corporation
+:Author: Sakari Ailus <sakari.ailus@linux.intel.com>
 
 ACPI in general allows referring to device objects in the tree only.
 Hierarchical data extension nodes may not be referred to directly, hence this
@@ -28,21 +31,22 @@ extension key.
 
 
 Example
--------
+=======
 
-	In the ASL snippet below, the "reference" _DSD property [2] contains a
-	device object reference to DEV0 and under that device object, a
-	hierarchical data extension key "node@1" referring to the NOD1 object
-	and lastly, a hierarchical data extension key "anothernode" referring to
-	the ANOD object which is also the final target node of the reference.
+In the ASL snippet below, the "reference" _DSD property [2] contains a
+device object reference to DEV0 and under that device object, a
+hierarchical data extension key "node@1" referring to the NOD1 object
+and lastly, a hierarchical data extension key "anothernode" referring to
+the ANOD object which is also the final target node of the reference.
+::
 
 	Device (DEV0)
 	{
 	    Name (_DSD, Package () {
 		ToUUID("dbb8e3e6-5886-4ba6-8795-1319f52a966b"),
 		Package () {
-		    Package () { "node@0", NOD0 },
-		    Package () { "node@1", NOD1 },
+		    Package () { "node@0", "NOD0" },
+		    Package () { "node@1", "NOD1" },
 		}
 	    })
 	    Name (NOD0, Package() {
@@ -54,7 +58,7 @@ Example
 	    Name (NOD1, Package() {
 		ToUUID("dbb8e3e6-5886-4ba6-8795-1319f52a966b"),
 		Package () {
-		    Package () { "anothernode", ANOD },
+		    Package () { "anothernode", "ANOD" },
 		}
 	    })
 	    Name (ANOD, Package() {
@@ -75,15 +79,15 @@ Example
 	    })
 	}
 
-Please also see a graph example in graph.txt .
+Please also see a graph example in :doc:`graph`.
 
 References
-----------
+==========
 
 [1] Hierarchical Data Extension UUID For _DSD.
-    <URL:http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/_DSD-hierarchical-data-extension-UUID-v1.1.pdf>,
-    referenced 2018-07-17.
+<http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/_DSD-hierarchical-data-extension-UUID-v1.1.pdf>,
+referenced 2018-07-17.
 
 [2] Device Properties UUID For _DSD.
-    <URL:http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/_DSD-device-properties-UUID.pdf>,
-    referenced 2016-10-04.
+<http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/_DSD-device-properties-UUID.pdf>,
+referenced 2016-10-04.
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/dsd/graph.txt b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/dsd/graph.rst
index b9ce910781dc..1a6ce7afba5e 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/dsd/graph.txt
+++ b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/dsd/graph.rst
@@ -1,8 +1,11 @@
-Graphs
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
 
+======
+Graphs
+======
 
 _DSD
-----
+====
 
 _DSD (Device Specific Data) [7] is a predefined ACPI device
 configuration object that can be used to convey information on
@@ -30,7 +33,7 @@ hierarchical data extension array on each depth.
 
 
 Ports and endpoints
--------------------
+===================
 
 The port and endpoint concepts are very similar to those in Devicetree
 [3]. A port represents an interface in a device, and an endpoint
@@ -38,20 +41,20 @@ represents a connection to that interface.
 
 All port nodes are located under the device's "_DSD" node in the hierarchical
 data extension tree. The data extension related to each port node must begin
-with "port" and must be followed by the "@" character and the number of the port
-as its key. The target object it refers to should be called "PRTX", where "X" is
-the number of the port. An example of such a package would be:
+with "port" and must be followed by the "@" character and the number of the
+port as its key. The target object it refers to should be called "PRTX", where
+"X" is the number of the port. An example of such a package would be::
 
-    Package() { "port@4", PRT4 }
+    Package() { "port@4", "PRT4" }
 
 Further on, endpoints are located under the port nodes. The hierarchical
 data extension key of the endpoint nodes must begin with
 "endpoint" and must be followed by the "@" character and the number of the
 endpoint. The object it refers to should be called "EPXY", where "X" is the
 number of the port and "Y" is the number of the endpoint. An example of such a
-package would be:
+package would be::
 
-    Package() { "endpoint@0", EP40 }
+    Package() { "endpoint@0", "EP40" }
 
 Each port node contains a property extension key "port", the value of which is
 the number of the port. Each endpoint is similarly numbered with a property
@@ -62,20 +65,20 @@ of that port shall be zero. Similarly, if a port may only have a single
 endpoint, the number of that endpoint shall be zero.
 
 The endpoint reference uses property extension with "remote-endpoint" property
-name followed by a reference in the same package. Such references consist of the
+name followed by a reference in the same package. Such references consist of
 the remote device reference, the first package entry of the port data extension
 reference under the device and finally the first package entry of the endpoint
-data extension reference under the port. Individual references thus appear as:
+data extension reference under the port. Individual references thus appear as::
 
     Package() { device, "port@X", "endpoint@Y" }
 
-In the above example, "X" is the number of the port and "Y" is the number of the
-endpoint.
+In the above example, "X" is the number of the port and "Y" is the number of
+the endpoint.
 
 The references to endpoints must be always done both ways, to the
 remote endpoint and back from the referred remote endpoint node.
 
-A simple example of this is show below:
+A simple example of this is show below::
 
     Scope (\_SB.PCI0.I2C2)
     {
@@ -88,7 +91,7 @@ A simple example of this is show below:
 		},
 		ToUUID("dbb8e3e6-5886-4ba6-8795-1319f52a966b"),
 		Package () {
-		    Package () { "port@0", PRT0 },
+		    Package () { "port@0", "PRT0" },
 		}
 	    })
 	    Name (PRT0, Package() {
@@ -98,7 +101,7 @@ A simple example of this is show below:
 		},
 		ToUUID("dbb8e3e6-5886-4ba6-8795-1319f52a966b"),
 		Package () {
-		    Package () { "endpoint@0", EP00 },
+		    Package () { "endpoint@0", "EP00" },
 		}
 	    })
 	    Name (EP00, Package() {
@@ -118,7 +121,7 @@ A simple example of this is show below:
 	    Name (_DSD, Package () {
 		ToUUID("dbb8e3e6-5886-4ba6-8795-1319f52a966b"),
 		Package () {
-		    Package () { "port@4", PRT4 },
+		    Package () { "port@4", "PRT4" },
 		}
 	    })
 
@@ -129,7 +132,7 @@ A simple example of this is show below:
 		},
 		ToUUID("dbb8e3e6-5886-4ba6-8795-1319f52a966b"),
 		Package () {
-		    Package () { "endpoint@0", EP40 },
+		    Package () { "endpoint@0", "EP40" },
 		}
 	    })
 
@@ -148,27 +151,27 @@ the "ISP" device and vice versa.
 
 
 References
-----------
+==========
 
 [1] _DSD (Device Specific Data) Implementation Guide.
-    <URL:http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/_DSD-implementation-guide-toplevel-1_1.htm>,
+    http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/_DSD-implementation-guide-toplevel-1_1.htm,
     referenced 2016-10-03.
 
-[2] Devicetree. <URL:http://www.devicetree.org>, referenced 2016-10-03.
+[2] Devicetree. http://www.devicetree.org, referenced 2016-10-03.
 
 [3] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/graph.txt
 
 [4] Device Properties UUID For _DSD.
-    <URL:http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/_DSD-device-properties-UUID.pdf>,
+    http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/_DSD-device-properties-UUID.pdf,
     referenced 2016-10-04.
 
 [5] Hierarchical Data Extension UUID For _DSD.
-    <URL:http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/_DSD-hierarchical-data-extension-UUID-v1.1.pdf>,
+    http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/_DSD-hierarchical-data-extension-UUID-v1.1.pdf,
     referenced 2016-10-04.
 
 [6] Advanced Configuration and Power Interface Specification.
-    <URL:http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/ACPI_6_1.pdf>,
+    http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/ACPI_6_1.pdf,
     referenced 2016-10-04.
 
 [7] _DSD Device Properties Usage Rules.
-    Documentation/acpi/DSD-properties-rules.txt
+    :doc:`../DSD-properties-rules`
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/enumeration.txt b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/enumeration.rst
index 7bcf9c3d9fbe..850be9696931 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/enumeration.txt
+++ b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/enumeration.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,9 @@
-ACPI based device enumeration
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=============================
+ACPI Based Device Enumeration
+=============================
+
 ACPI 5 introduced a set of new resources (UartTSerialBus, I2cSerialBus,
 SpiSerialBus, GpioIo and GpioInt) which can be used in enumerating slave
 devices behind serial bus controllers.
@@ -11,12 +15,12 @@ that are accessed through memory-mapped registers.
 In order to support this and re-use the existing drivers as much as
 possible we decided to do following:
 
-	o Devices that have no bus connector resource are represented as
-	  platform devices.
+  - Devices that have no bus connector resource are represented as
+    platform devices.
 
-	o Devices behind real busses where there is a connector resource
-	  are represented as struct spi_device or struct i2c_device
-	  (standard UARTs are not busses so there is no struct uart_device).
+  - Devices behind real busses where there is a connector resource
+    are represented as struct spi_device or struct i2c_device
+    (standard UARTs are not busses so there is no struct uart_device).
 
 As both ACPI and Device Tree represent a tree of devices (and their
 resources) this implementation follows the Device Tree way as much as
@@ -31,7 +35,8 @@ enumerated from ACPI namespace. This handle can be used to extract other
 device-specific configuration. There is an example of this below.
 
 Platform bus support
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+====================
+
 Since we are using platform devices to represent devices that are not
 connected to any physical bus we only need to implement a platform driver
 for the device and add supported ACPI IDs. If this same IP-block is used on
@@ -39,7 +44,7 @@ some other non-ACPI platform, the driver might work out of the box or needs
 some minor changes.
 
 Adding ACPI support for an existing driver should be pretty
-straightforward. Here is the simplest example:
+straightforward. Here is the simplest example::
 
 	#ifdef CONFIG_ACPI
 	static const struct acpi_device_id mydrv_acpi_match[] = {
@@ -61,12 +66,13 @@ configuring GPIOs it can get its ACPI handle and extract this information
 from ACPI tables.
 
 DMA support
-~~~~~~~~~~~
+===========
+
 DMA controllers enumerated via ACPI should be registered in the system to
 provide generic access to their resources. For example, a driver that would
 like to be accessible to slave devices via generic API call
 dma_request_slave_channel() must register itself at the end of the probe
-function like this:
+function like this::
 
 	err = devm_acpi_dma_controller_register(dev, xlate_func, dw);
 	/* Handle the error if it's not a case of !CONFIG_ACPI */
@@ -74,7 +80,7 @@ function like this:
 and implement custom xlate function if needed (usually acpi_dma_simple_xlate()
 is enough) which converts the FixedDMA resource provided by struct
 acpi_dma_spec into the corresponding DMA channel. A piece of code for that case
-could look like:
+could look like::
 
 	#ifdef CONFIG_ACPI
 	struct filter_args {
@@ -114,7 +120,7 @@ provided by struct acpi_dma.
 Clients must call dma_request_slave_channel() with the string parameter that
 corresponds to a specific FixedDMA resource. By default "tx" means the first
 entry of the FixedDMA resource array, "rx" means the second entry. The table
-below shows a layout:
+below shows a layout::
 
 	Device (I2C0)
 	{
@@ -138,12 +144,13 @@ acpi_dma_request_slave_chan_by_index() directly and therefore choose the
 specific FixedDMA resource by its index.
 
 SPI serial bus support
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+======================
+
 Slave devices behind SPI bus have SpiSerialBus resource attached to them.
 This is extracted automatically by the SPI core and the slave devices are
 enumerated once spi_register_master() is called by the bus driver.
 
-Here is what the ACPI namespace for a SPI slave might look like:
+Here is what the ACPI namespace for a SPI slave might look like::
 
 	Device (EEP0)
 	{
@@ -163,7 +170,7 @@ Here is what the ACPI namespace for a SPI slave might look like:
 
 The SPI device drivers only need to add ACPI IDs in a similar way than with
 the platform device drivers. Below is an example where we add ACPI support
-to at25 SPI eeprom driver (this is meant for the above ACPI snippet):
+to at25 SPI eeprom driver (this is meant for the above ACPI snippet)::
 
 	#ifdef CONFIG_ACPI
 	static const struct acpi_device_id at25_acpi_match[] = {
@@ -182,7 +189,7 @@ to at25 SPI eeprom driver (this is meant for the above ACPI snippet):
 
 Note that this driver actually needs more information like page size of the
 eeprom etc. but at the time writing this there is no standard way of
-passing those. One idea is to return this in _DSM method like:
+passing those. One idea is to return this in _DSM method like::
 
 	Device (EEP0)
 	{
@@ -202,7 +209,7 @@ passing those. One idea is to return this in _DSM method like:
 		}
 
 Then the at25 SPI driver can get this configuration by calling _DSM on its
-ACPI handle like:
+ACPI handle like::
 
 	struct acpi_buffer output = { ACPI_ALLOCATE_BUFFER, NULL };
 	struct acpi_object_list input;
@@ -220,14 +227,15 @@ ACPI handle like:
 	kfree(output.pointer);
 
 I2C serial bus support
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+======================
+
 The slaves behind I2C bus controller only need to add the ACPI IDs like
 with the platform and SPI drivers. The I2C core automatically enumerates
 any slave devices behind the controller device once the adapter is
 registered.
 
 Below is an example of how to add ACPI support to the existing mpu3050
-input driver:
+input driver::
 
 	#ifdef CONFIG_ACPI
 	static const struct acpi_device_id mpu3050_acpi_match[] = {
@@ -251,56 +259,57 @@ input driver:
 	};
 
 GPIO support
-~~~~~~~~~~~~
+============
+
 ACPI 5 introduced two new resources to describe GPIO connections: GpioIo
 and GpioInt. These resources can be used to pass GPIO numbers used by
 the device to the driver. ACPI 5.1 extended this with _DSD (Device
 Specific Data) which made it possible to name the GPIOs among other things.
 
-For example:
+For example::
 
-Device (DEV)
-{
-	Method (_CRS, 0, NotSerialized)
+	Device (DEV)
 	{
-		Name (SBUF, ResourceTemplate()
+		Method (_CRS, 0, NotSerialized)
 		{
-			...
-			// Used to power on/off the device
-			GpioIo (Exclusive, PullDefault, 0x0000, 0x0000,
-				IoRestrictionOutputOnly, "\\_SB.PCI0.GPI0",
-				0x00, ResourceConsumer,,)
+			Name (SBUF, ResourceTemplate()
 			{
-				// Pin List
-				0x0055
-			}
+				...
+				// Used to power on/off the device
+				GpioIo (Exclusive, PullDefault, 0x0000, 0x0000,
+					IoRestrictionOutputOnly, "\\_SB.PCI0.GPI0",
+					0x00, ResourceConsumer,,)
+				{
+					// Pin List
+					0x0055
+				}
+
+				// Interrupt for the device
+				GpioInt (Edge, ActiveHigh, ExclusiveAndWake, PullNone,
+					0x0000, "\\_SB.PCI0.GPI0", 0x00, ResourceConsumer,,)
+				{
+					// Pin list
+					0x0058
+				}
+
+				...
 
-			// Interrupt for the device
-			GpioInt (Edge, ActiveHigh, ExclusiveAndWake, PullNone,
-				 0x0000, "\\_SB.PCI0.GPI0", 0x00, ResourceConsumer,,)
-			{
-				// Pin list
-				0x0058
 			}
 
-			...
-
+			Return (SBUF)
 		}
 
-		Return (SBUF)
-	}
-
-	// ACPI 5.1 _DSD used for naming the GPIOs
-	Name (_DSD, Package ()
-	{
-		ToUUID("daffd814-6eba-4d8c-8a91-bc9bbf4aa301"),
-		Package ()
+		// ACPI 5.1 _DSD used for naming the GPIOs
+		Name (_DSD, Package ()
 		{
-			Package () {"power-gpios", Package() {^DEV, 0, 0, 0 }},
-			Package () {"irq-gpios", Package() {^DEV, 1, 0, 0 }},
-		}
-	})
-	...
+			ToUUID("daffd814-6eba-4d8c-8a91-bc9bbf4aa301"),
+			Package ()
+			{
+				Package () {"power-gpios", Package() {^DEV, 0, 0, 0 }},
+				Package () {"irq-gpios", Package() {^DEV, 1, 0, 0 }},
+			}
+		})
+		...
 
 These GPIO numbers are controller relative and path "\\_SB.PCI0.GPI0"
 specifies the path to the controller. In order to use these GPIOs in Linux
@@ -310,7 +319,7 @@ There is a standard GPIO API for that and is documented in
 Documentation/gpio/.
 
 In the above example we can get the corresponding two GPIO descriptors with
-a code like this:
+a code like this::
 
 	#include <linux/gpio/consumer.h>
 	...
@@ -334,21 +343,22 @@ See Documentation/acpi/gpio-properties.txt for more information about the
 _DSD binding related to GPIOs.
 
 MFD devices
-~~~~~~~~~~~
+===========
+
 The MFD devices register their children as platform devices. For the child
 devices there needs to be an ACPI handle that they can use to reference
 parts of the ACPI namespace that relate to them. In the Linux MFD subsystem
 we provide two ways:
 
-	o The children share the parent ACPI handle.
-	o The MFD cell can specify the ACPI id of the device.
+  - The children share the parent ACPI handle.
+  - The MFD cell can specify the ACPI id of the device.
 
 For the first case, the MFD drivers do not need to do anything. The
 resulting child platform device will have its ACPI_COMPANION() set to point
 to the parent device.
 
 If the ACPI namespace has a device that we can match using an ACPI id or ACPI
-adr, the cell should be set like:
+adr, the cell should be set like::
 
 	static struct mfd_cell_acpi_match my_subdevice_cell_acpi_match = {
 		.pnpid = "XYZ0001",
@@ -366,7 +376,8 @@ the MFD device and if found, that ACPI companion device is bound to the
 resulting child platform device.
 
 Device Tree namespace link device ID
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+====================================
+
 The Device Tree protocol uses device identification based on the "compatible"
 property whose value is a string or an array of strings recognized as device
 identifiers by drivers and the driver core.  The set of all those strings may be
@@ -410,6 +421,32 @@ Specifically, the device IDs returned by _HID and preceding PRP0001 in the _CID
 return package will be checked first.  Also in that case the bus type the device
 will be enumerated to depends on the device ID returned by _HID.
 
+For example, the following ACPI sample might be used to enumerate an lm75-type
+I2C temperature sensor and match it to the driver using the Device Tree
+namespace link::
+
+	Device (TMP0)
+	{
+		Name (_HID, "PRP0001")
+		Name (_DSD, Package() {
+			ToUUID("daffd814-6eba-4d8c-8a91-bc9bbf4aa301"),
+			Package () {
+				Package (2) { "compatible", "ti,tmp75" },
+			}
+		})
+		Method (_CRS, 0, Serialized)
+		{
+			Name (SBUF, ResourceTemplate ()
+			{
+				I2cSerialBusV2 (0x48, ControllerInitiated,
+					400000, AddressingMode7Bit,
+					"\\_SB.PCI0.I2C1", 0x00,
+					ResourceConsumer, , Exclusive,)
+			})
+			Return (SBUF)
+		}
+	}
+
 It is valid to define device objects with a _HID returning PRP0001 and without
 the "compatible" property in the _DSD or a _CID as long as one of their
 ancestors provides a _DSD with a valid "compatible" property.  Such device
@@ -423,4 +460,4 @@ the _DSD of the device object itself or the _DSD of its ancestor in the
 Otherwise, the _DSD itself is regarded as invalid and therefore the "compatible"
 property returned by it is meaningless.
 
-Refer to DSD-properties-rules.txt for more information.
+Refer to :doc:`DSD-properties-rules` for more information.
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/gpio-properties.txt b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/gpio-properties.rst
index 88c65cb5bf0a..bb6d74f23ee0 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/gpio-properties.txt
+++ b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/gpio-properties.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,8 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+======================================
 _DSD Device Properties Related to GPIO
---------------------------------------
+======================================
 
 With the release of ACPI 5.1, the _DSD configuration object finally
 allows names to be given to GPIOs (and other things as well) returned
@@ -8,7 +11,7 @@ the corresponding GPIO, which is pretty error prone (it depends on
 the _CRS output ordering, for example).
 
 With _DSD we can now query GPIOs using a name instead of an integer
-index, like the ASL example below shows:
+index, like the ASL example below shows::
 
   // Bluetooth device with reset and shutdown GPIOs
   Device (BTH)
@@ -34,15 +37,19 @@ index, like the ASL example below shows:
       })
   }
 
-The format of the supported GPIO property is:
+The format of the supported GPIO property is::
 
   Package () { "name", Package () { ref, index, pin, active_low }}
 
-  ref - The device that has _CRS containing GpioIo()/GpioInt() resources,
-        typically this is the device itself (BTH in our case).
-  index - Index of the GpioIo()/GpioInt() resource in _CRS starting from zero.
-  pin - Pin in the GpioIo()/GpioInt() resource. Typically this is zero.
-  active_low - If 1 the GPIO is marked as active_low.
+ref
+  The device that has _CRS containing GpioIo()/GpioInt() resources,
+  typically this is the device itself (BTH in our case).
+index
+  Index of the GpioIo()/GpioInt() resource in _CRS starting from zero.
+pin
+  Pin in the GpioIo()/GpioInt() resource. Typically this is zero.
+active_low
+  If 1 the GPIO is marked as active_low.
 
 Since ACPI GpioIo() resource does not have a field saying whether it is
 active low or high, the "active_low" argument can be used here.  Setting
@@ -55,7 +62,7 @@ It is possible to leave holes in the array of GPIOs. This is useful in
 cases like with SPI host controllers where some chip selects may be
 implemented as GPIOs and some as native signals. For example a SPI host
 controller can have chip selects 0 and 2 implemented as GPIOs and 1 as
-native:
+native::
 
   Package () {
       "cs-gpios",
@@ -67,7 +74,7 @@ native:
   }
 
 Other supported properties
---------------------------
+==========================
 
 Following Device Tree compatible device properties are also supported by
 _DSD device properties for GPIO controllers:
@@ -78,7 +85,7 @@ _DSD device properties for GPIO controllers:
 - input
 - line-name
 
-Example:
+Example::
 
   Name (_DSD, Package () {
       // _DSD Hierarchical Properties Extension UUID
@@ -100,7 +107,7 @@ Example:
 
 - gpio-line-names
 
-Example:
+Example::
 
   Package () {
       "gpio-line-names",
@@ -114,7 +121,7 @@ See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt for more information
 about these properties.
 
 ACPI GPIO Mappings Provided by Drivers
---------------------------------------
+======================================
 
 There are systems in which the ACPI tables do not contain _DSD but provide _CRS
 with GpioIo()/GpioInt() resources and device drivers still need to work with
@@ -139,16 +146,16 @@ line in that resource starting from zero, and the active-low flag for that line,
 respectively, in analogy with the _DSD GPIO property format specified above.
 
 For the example Bluetooth device discussed previously the data structures in
-question would look like this:
+question would look like this::
 
-static const struct acpi_gpio_params reset_gpio = { 1, 1, false };
-static const struct acpi_gpio_params shutdown_gpio = { 0, 0, false };
+  static const struct acpi_gpio_params reset_gpio = { 1, 1, false };
+  static const struct acpi_gpio_params shutdown_gpio = { 0, 0, false };
 
-static const struct acpi_gpio_mapping bluetooth_acpi_gpios[] = {
-  { "reset-gpios", &reset_gpio, 1 },
-  { "shutdown-gpios", &shutdown_gpio, 1 },
-  { },
-};
+  static const struct acpi_gpio_mapping bluetooth_acpi_gpios[] = {
+    { "reset-gpios", &reset_gpio, 1 },
+    { "shutdown-gpios", &shutdown_gpio, 1 },
+    { },
+  };
 
 Next, the mapping table needs to be passed as the second argument to
 acpi_dev_add_driver_gpios() that will register it with the ACPI device object
@@ -158,12 +165,12 @@ calling acpi_dev_remove_driver_gpios() on the ACPI device object where that
 table was previously registered.
 
 Using the _CRS fallback
------------------------
+=======================
 
 If a device does not have _DSD or the driver does not create ACPI GPIO
 mapping, the Linux GPIO framework refuses to return any GPIOs. This is
 because the driver does not know what it actually gets. For example if we
-have a device like below:
+have a device like below::
 
   Device (BTH)
   {
@@ -177,7 +184,7 @@ have a device like below:
       })
   }
 
-The driver might expect to get the right GPIO when it does:
+The driver might expect to get the right GPIO when it does::
 
   desc = gpiod_get(dev, "reset", GPIOD_OUT_LOW);
 
@@ -193,22 +200,25 @@ the ACPI GPIO mapping tables are hardly linked to ACPI ID and certain
 objects, as listed in the above chapter, of the device in question.
 
 Getting GPIO descriptor
------------------------
+=======================
+
+There are two main approaches to get GPIO resource from ACPI::
 
-There are two main approaches to get GPIO resource from ACPI:
-	desc = gpiod_get(dev, connection_id, flags);
-	desc = gpiod_get_index(dev, connection_id, index, flags);
+  desc = gpiod_get(dev, connection_id, flags);
+  desc = gpiod_get_index(dev, connection_id, index, flags);
 
 We may consider two different cases here, i.e. when connection ID is
 provided and otherwise.
 
-Case 1:
-	desc = gpiod_get(dev, "non-null-connection-id", flags);
-	desc = gpiod_get_index(dev, "non-null-connection-id", index, flags);
+Case 1::
+
+  desc = gpiod_get(dev, "non-null-connection-id", flags);
+  desc = gpiod_get_index(dev, "non-null-connection-id", index, flags);
+
+Case 2::
 
-Case 2:
-	desc = gpiod_get(dev, NULL, flags);
-	desc = gpiod_get_index(dev, NULL, index, flags);
+  desc = gpiod_get(dev, NULL, flags);
+  desc = gpiod_get_index(dev, NULL, index, flags);
 
 Case 1 assumes that corresponding ACPI device description must have
 defined device properties and will prevent to getting any GPIO resources
diff --git a/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/i2c-muxes.rst b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/i2c-muxes.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3a8997ccd7c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/i2c-muxes.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+==============
+ACPI I2C Muxes
+==============
+
+Describing an I2C device hierarchy that includes I2C muxes requires an ACPI
+Device () scope per mux channel.
+
+Consider this topology::
+
+    +------+   +------+
+    | SMB1 |-->| MUX0 |--CH00--> i2c client A (0x50)
+    |      |   | 0x70 |--CH01--> i2c client B (0x50)
+    +------+   +------+
+
+which corresponds to the following ASL::
+
+    Device (SMB1)
+    {
+        Name (_HID, ...)
+        Device (MUX0)
+        {
+            Name (_HID, ...)
+            Name (_CRS, ResourceTemplate () {
+                I2cSerialBus (0x70, ControllerInitiated, I2C_SPEED,
+                            AddressingMode7Bit, "^SMB1", 0x00,
+                            ResourceConsumer,,)
+            }
+
+            Device (CH00)
+            {
+                Name (_ADR, 0)
+
+                Device (CLIA)
+                {
+                    Name (_HID, ...)
+                    Name (_CRS, ResourceTemplate () {
+                        I2cSerialBus (0x50, ControllerInitiated, I2C_SPEED,
+                                    AddressingMode7Bit, "^CH00", 0x00,
+                                    ResourceConsumer,,)
+                    }
+                }
+            }
+
+            Device (CH01)
+            {
+                Name (_ADR, 1)
+
+                Device (CLIB)
+                {
+                    Name (_HID, ...)
+                    Name (_CRS, ResourceTemplate () {
+                        I2cSerialBus (0x50, ControllerInitiated, I2C_SPEED,
+                                    AddressingMode7Bit, "^CH01", 0x00,
+                                    ResourceConsumer,,)
+                    }
+                }
+            }
+        }
+    }
diff --git a/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/index.rst b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ae609eec4679
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+============
+ACPI Support
+============
+
+.. toctree::
+   :maxdepth: 1
+
+   namespace
+   dsd/graph
+   dsd/data-node-references
+   enumeration
+   osi
+   method-customizing
+   method-tracing
+   DSD-properties-rules
+   debug
+   aml-debugger
+   apei/output_format
+   apei/einj
+   gpio-properties
+   i2c-muxes
+   acpi-lid
+   lpit
+   video_extension
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/lpit.txt b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/lpit.rst
index b426398d2e97..aca928fab027 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/lpit.txt
+++ b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/lpit.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,9 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+===========================
+Low Power Idle Table (LPIT)
+===========================
+
 To enumerate platform Low Power Idle states, Intel platforms are using
 “Low Power Idle Table� (LPIT). More details about this table can be
 downloaded from:
@@ -8,13 +14,15 @@ Residencies for each low power state can be read via FFH
 
 On platforms supporting S0ix sleep states, there can be two types of
 residencies:
-- CPU PKG C10 (Read via FFH interface)
-- Platform Controller Hub (PCH) SLP_S0 (Read via memory mapped interface)
+
+  - CPU PKG C10 (Read via FFH interface)
+  - Platform Controller Hub (PCH) SLP_S0 (Read via memory mapped interface)
 
 The following attributes are added dynamically to the cpuidle
-sysfs attribute group:
-	/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuidle/low_power_idle_cpu_residency_us
-	/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuidle/low_power_idle_system_residency_us
+sysfs attribute group::
+
+  /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuidle/low_power_idle_cpu_residency_us
+  /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuidle/low_power_idle_system_residency_us
 
 The "low_power_idle_cpu_residency_us" attribute shows time spent
 by the CPU package in PKG C10
diff --git a/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/method-customizing.rst b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/method-customizing.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..de3ebcaed4cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/method-customizing.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=======================================
+Linux ACPI Custom Control Method How To
+=======================================
+
+:Author: Zhang Rui <rui.zhang@intel.com>
+
+
+Linux supports customizing ACPI control methods at runtime.
+
+Users can use this to:
+
+1. override an existing method which may not work correctly,
+   or just for debugging purposes.
+2. insert a completely new method in order to create a missing
+   method such as _OFF, _ON, _STA, _INI, etc.
+
+For these cases, it is far simpler to dynamically install a single
+control method rather than override the entire DSDT, because kernel
+rebuild/reboot is not needed and test result can be got in minutes.
+
+.. note::
+
+  - Only ACPI METHOD can be overridden, any other object types like
+    "Device", "OperationRegion", are not recognized. Methods
+    declared inside scope operators are also not supported.
+
+  - The same ACPI control method can be overridden for many times,
+    and it's always the latest one that used by Linux/kernel.
+
+  - To get the ACPI debug object output (Store (AAAA, Debug)),
+    please run::
+
+      echo 1 > /sys/module/acpi/parameters/aml_debug_output
+
+
+1. override an existing method
+==============================
+a) get the ACPI table via ACPI sysfs I/F. e.g. to get the DSDT,
+   just run "cat /sys/firmware/acpi/tables/DSDT > /tmp/dsdt.dat"
+b) disassemble the table by running "iasl -d dsdt.dat".
+c) rewrite the ASL code of the method and save it in a new file,
+d) package the new file (psr.asl) to an ACPI table format.
+   Here is an example of a customized \_SB._AC._PSR method::
+
+      DefinitionBlock ("", "SSDT", 1, "", "", 0x20080715)
+      {
+         Method (\_SB_.AC._PSR, 0, NotSerialized)
+         {
+            Store ("In AC _PSR", Debug)
+            Return (ACON)
+         }
+      }
+
+   Note that the full pathname of the method in ACPI namespace
+   should be used.
+e) assemble the file to generate the AML code of the method.
+   e.g. "iasl -vw 6084 psr.asl" (psr.aml is generated as a result)
+   If parameter "-vw 6084" is not supported by your iASL compiler,
+   please try a newer version.
+f) mount debugfs by "mount -t debugfs none /sys/kernel/debug"
+g) override the old method via the debugfs by running
+   "cat /tmp/psr.aml > /sys/kernel/debug/acpi/custom_method"
+
+2. insert a new method
+======================
+This is easier than overriding an existing method.
+We just need to create the ASL code of the method we want to
+insert and then follow the step c) ~ g) in section 1.
+
+3. undo your changes
+====================
+The "undo" operation is not supported for a new inserted method
+right now, i.e. we can not remove a method currently.
+For an overridden method, in order to undo your changes, please
+save a copy of the method original ASL code in step c) section 1,
+and redo step c) ~ g) to override the method with the original one.
+
+
+.. note:: We can use a kernel with multiple custom ACPI method running,
+   But each individual write to debugfs can implement a SINGLE
+   method override. i.e. if we want to insert/override multiple
+   ACPI methods, we need to redo step c) ~ g) for multiple times.
+
+.. note:: Be aware that root can mis-use this driver to modify arbitrary
+   memory and gain additional rights, if root's privileges got
+   restricted (for example if root is not allowed to load additional
+   modules after boot).
diff --git a/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/method-tracing.rst b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/method-tracing.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d0b077b73f5f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/method-tracing.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,238 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+.. include:: <isonum.txt>
+
+=====================
+ACPICA Trace Facility
+=====================
+
+:Copyright: |copy| 2015, Intel Corporation
+:Author: Lv Zheng <lv.zheng@intel.com>
+
+
+Abstract
+========
+This document describes the functions and the interfaces of the
+method tracing facility.
+
+Functionalities and usage examples
+==================================
+
+ACPICA provides method tracing capability. And two functions are
+currently implemented using this capability.
+
+Log reducer
+-----------
+
+ACPICA subsystem provides debugging outputs when CONFIG_ACPI_DEBUG is
+enabled. The debugging messages which are deployed via
+ACPI_DEBUG_PRINT() macro can be reduced at 2 levels - per-component
+level (known as debug layer, configured via
+/sys/module/acpi/parameters/debug_layer) and per-type level (known as
+debug level, configured via /sys/module/acpi/parameters/debug_level).
+
+But when the particular layer/level is applied to the control method
+evaluations, the quantity of the debugging outputs may still be too
+large to be put into the kernel log buffer. The idea thus is worked out
+to only enable the particular debug layer/level (normally more detailed)
+logs when the control method evaluation is started, and disable the
+detailed logging when the control method evaluation is stopped.
+
+The following command examples illustrate the usage of the "log reducer"
+functionality:
+
+a. Filter out the debug layer/level matched logs when control methods
+   are being evaluated::
+
+      # cd /sys/module/acpi/parameters
+      # echo "0xXXXXXXXX" > trace_debug_layer
+      # echo "0xYYYYYYYY" > trace_debug_level
+      # echo "enable" > trace_state
+
+b. Filter out the debug layer/level matched logs when the specified
+   control method is being evaluated::
+
+      # cd /sys/module/acpi/parameters
+      # echo "0xXXXXXXXX" > trace_debug_layer
+      # echo "0xYYYYYYYY" > trace_debug_level
+      # echo "\PPPP.AAAA.TTTT.HHHH" > trace_method_name
+      # echo "method" > /sys/module/acpi/parameters/trace_state
+
+c. Filter out the debug layer/level matched logs when the specified
+   control method is being evaluated for the first time::
+
+      # cd /sys/module/acpi/parameters
+      # echo "0xXXXXXXXX" > trace_debug_layer
+      # echo "0xYYYYYYYY" > trace_debug_level
+      # echo "\PPPP.AAAA.TTTT.HHHH" > trace_method_name
+      # echo "method-once" > /sys/module/acpi/parameters/trace_state
+
+Where:
+   0xXXXXXXXX/0xYYYYYYYY
+     Refer to Documentation/acpi/debug.txt for possible debug layer/level
+     masking values.
+   \PPPP.AAAA.TTTT.HHHH
+     Full path of a control method that can be found in the ACPI namespace.
+     It needn't be an entry of a control method evaluation.
+
+AML tracer
+----------
+
+There are special log entries added by the method tracing facility at
+the "trace points" the AML interpreter starts/stops to execute a control
+method, or an AML opcode. Note that the format of the log entries are
+subject to change::
+
+   [    0.186427]   exdebug-0398 ex_trace_point        : Method Begin [0xf58394d8:\_SB.PCI0.LPCB.ECOK] execution.
+   [    0.186630]   exdebug-0398 ex_trace_point        : Opcode Begin [0xf5905c88:If] execution.
+   [    0.186820]   exdebug-0398 ex_trace_point        : Opcode Begin [0xf5905cc0:LEqual] execution.
+   [    0.187010]   exdebug-0398 ex_trace_point        : Opcode Begin [0xf5905a20:-NamePath-] execution.
+   [    0.187214]   exdebug-0398 ex_trace_point        : Opcode End [0xf5905a20:-NamePath-] execution.
+   [    0.187407]   exdebug-0398 ex_trace_point        : Opcode Begin [0xf5905f60:One] execution.
+   [    0.187594]   exdebug-0398 ex_trace_point        : Opcode End [0xf5905f60:One] execution.
+   [    0.187789]   exdebug-0398 ex_trace_point        : Opcode End [0xf5905cc0:LEqual] execution.
+   [    0.187980]   exdebug-0398 ex_trace_point        : Opcode Begin [0xf5905cc0:Return] execution.
+   [    0.188146]   exdebug-0398 ex_trace_point        : Opcode Begin [0xf5905f60:One] execution.
+   [    0.188334]   exdebug-0398 ex_trace_point        : Opcode End [0xf5905f60:One] execution.
+   [    0.188524]   exdebug-0398 ex_trace_point        : Opcode End [0xf5905cc0:Return] execution.
+   [    0.188712]   exdebug-0398 ex_trace_point        : Opcode End [0xf5905c88:If] execution.
+   [    0.188903]   exdebug-0398 ex_trace_point        : Method End [0xf58394d8:\_SB.PCI0.LPCB.ECOK] execution.
+
+Developers can utilize these special log entries to track the AML
+interpretion, thus can aid issue debugging and performance tuning. Note
+that, as the "AML tracer" logs are implemented via ACPI_DEBUG_PRINT()
+macro, CONFIG_ACPI_DEBUG is also required to be enabled for enabling
+"AML tracer" logs.
+
+The following command examples illustrate the usage of the "AML tracer"
+functionality:
+
+a. Filter out the method start/stop "AML tracer" logs when control
+   methods are being evaluated::
+
+      # cd /sys/module/acpi/parameters
+      # echo "0x80" > trace_debug_layer
+      # echo "0x10" > trace_debug_level
+      # echo "enable" > trace_state
+
+b. Filter out the method start/stop "AML tracer" when the specified
+   control method is being evaluated::
+
+      # cd /sys/module/acpi/parameters
+      # echo "0x80" > trace_debug_layer
+      # echo "0x10" > trace_debug_level
+      # echo "\PPPP.AAAA.TTTT.HHHH" > trace_method_name
+      # echo "method" > trace_state
+
+c. Filter out the method start/stop "AML tracer" logs when the specified
+   control method is being evaluated for the first time::
+
+      # cd /sys/module/acpi/parameters
+      # echo "0x80" > trace_debug_layer
+      # echo "0x10" > trace_debug_level
+      # echo "\PPPP.AAAA.TTTT.HHHH" > trace_method_name
+      # echo "method-once" > trace_state
+
+d. Filter out the method/opcode start/stop "AML tracer" when the
+   specified control method is being evaluated::
+
+      # cd /sys/module/acpi/parameters
+      # echo "0x80" > trace_debug_layer
+      # echo "0x10" > trace_debug_level
+      # echo "\PPPP.AAAA.TTTT.HHHH" > trace_method_name
+      # echo "opcode" > trace_state
+
+e. Filter out the method/opcode start/stop "AML tracer" when the
+   specified control method is being evaluated for the first time::
+
+      # cd /sys/module/acpi/parameters
+      # echo "0x80" > trace_debug_layer
+      # echo "0x10" > trace_debug_level
+      # echo "\PPPP.AAAA.TTTT.HHHH" > trace_method_name
+      # echo "opcode-opcode" > trace_state
+
+Note that all above method tracing facility related module parameters can
+be used as the boot parameters, for example::
+
+   acpi.trace_debug_layer=0x80 acpi.trace_debug_level=0x10 \
+   acpi.trace_method_name=\_SB.LID0._LID acpi.trace_state=opcode-once
+
+
+Interface descriptions
+======================
+
+All method tracing functions can be configured via ACPI module
+parameters that are accessible at /sys/module/acpi/parameters/:
+
+trace_method_name
+  The full path of the AML method that the user wants to trace.
+
+  Note that the full path shouldn't contain the trailing "_"s in its
+  name segments but may contain "\" to form an absolute path.
+
+trace_debug_layer
+  The temporary debug_layer used when the tracing feature is enabled.
+
+  Using ACPI_EXECUTER (0x80) by default, which is the debug_layer
+  used to match all "AML tracer" logs.
+
+trace_debug_level
+  The temporary debug_level used when the tracing feature is enabled.
+
+  Using ACPI_LV_TRACE_POINT (0x10) by default, which is the
+  debug_level used to match all "AML tracer" logs.
+
+trace_state
+  The status of the tracing feature.
+
+  Users can enable/disable this debug tracing feature by executing
+  the following command::
+
+   # echo string > /sys/module/acpi/parameters/trace_state
+
+Where "string" should be one of the following:
+
+"disable"
+  Disable the method tracing feature.
+
+"enable"
+  Enable the method tracing feature.
+  
+  ACPICA debugging messages matching "trace_debug_layer/trace_debug_level"
+  during any method execution will be logged.
+
+"method"
+  Enable the method tracing feature.
+
+  ACPICA debugging messages matching "trace_debug_layer/trace_debug_level"
+  during method execution of "trace_method_name" will be logged.
+
+"method-once"
+  Enable the method tracing feature.
+
+  ACPICA debugging messages matching "trace_debug_layer/trace_debug_level"
+  during method execution of "trace_method_name" will be logged only once.
+
+"opcode"
+  Enable the method tracing feature.
+
+  ACPICA debugging messages matching "trace_debug_layer/trace_debug_level"
+  during method/opcode execution of "trace_method_name" will be logged.
+
+"opcode-once"
+  Enable the method tracing feature.
+
+  ACPICA debugging messages matching "trace_debug_layer/trace_debug_level"
+  during method/opcode execution of "trace_method_name" will be logged only
+  once.
+
+Note that, the difference between the "enable" and other feature
+enabling options are:
+
+1. When "enable" is specified, since
+   "trace_debug_layer/trace_debug_level" shall apply to all control
+   method evaluations, after configuring "trace_state" to "enable",
+   "trace_method_name" will be reset to NULL.
+2. When "method/opcode" is specified, if
+   "trace_method_name" is NULL when "trace_state" is configured to
+   these options, the "trace_debug_layer/trace_debug_level" will
+   apply to all control method evaluations.
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/namespace.txt b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/namespace.rst
index 1860cb3865c6..835521baeb89 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/namespace.txt
+++ b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/namespace.rst
@@ -1,85 +1,90 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+.. include:: <isonum.txt>
+
+===================================================
 ACPI Device Tree - Representation of ACPI Namespace
+===================================================
 
-Copyright (C) 2013, Intel Corporation
-Author: Lv Zheng <lv.zheng@intel.com>
+:Copyright: |copy| 2013, Intel Corporation
 
+:Author: Lv Zheng <lv.zheng@intel.com>
 
-Abstract:
+:Credit:   Thanks for the help from Zhang Rui <rui.zhang@intel.com> and
+           Rafael J.Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>.
 
+Abstract
+========
 The Linux ACPI subsystem converts ACPI namespace objects into a Linux
 device tree under the /sys/devices/LNXSYSTEM:00 and updates it upon
-receiving ACPI hotplug notification events.  For each device object in this
-hierarchy there is a corresponding symbolic link in the
+receiving ACPI hotplug notification events.  For each device object
+in this hierarchy there is a corresponding symbolic link in the
 /sys/bus/acpi/devices.
+
 This document illustrates the structure of the ACPI device tree.
 
+ACPI Definition Blocks
+======================
+
+The ACPI firmware sets up RSDP (Root System Description Pointer) in the
+system memory address space pointing to the XSDT (Extended System
+Description Table).  The XSDT always points to the FADT (Fixed ACPI
+Description Table) using its first entry, the data within the FADT
+includes various fixed-length entries that describe fixed ACPI features
+of the hardware.  The FADT contains a pointer to the DSDT
+(Differentiated System Descripition Table).  The XSDT also contains
+entries pointing to possibly multiple SSDTs (Secondary System
+Description Table).
+
+The DSDT and SSDT data is organized in data structures called definition
+blocks that contain definitions of various objects, including ACPI
+control methods, encoded in AML (ACPI Machine Language).  The data block
+of the DSDT along with the contents of SSDTs represents a hierarchical
+data structure called the ACPI namespace whose topology reflects the
+structure of the underlying hardware platform.
+
+The relationships between ACPI System Definition Tables described above
+are illustrated in the following diagram::
+
+   +---------+    +-------+    +--------+    +------------------------+
+   |  RSDP   | +->| XSDT  | +->|  FADT  |    |  +-------------------+ |
+   +---------+ |  +-------+ |  +--------+  +-|->|       DSDT        | |
+   | Pointer | |  | Entry |-+  | ...... |  | |  +-------------------+ |
+   +---------+ |  +-------+    | X_DSDT |--+ |  | Definition Blocks | |
+   | Pointer |-+  | ..... |    | ...... |    |  +-------------------+ |
+   +---------+    +-------+    +--------+    |  +-------------------+ |
+                  | Entry |------------------|->|       SSDT        | |
+                  +- - - -+                  |  +-------------------| |
+                  | Entry | - - - - - - - -+ |  | Definition Blocks | |
+                  +- - - -+                | |  +-------------------+ |
+                                          | |  +- - - - - - - - - -+ |
+                                          +-|->|       SSDT        | |
+                                             |  +-------------------+ |
+                                             |  | Definition Blocks | |
+                                             |  +- - - - - - - - - -+ |
+                                             +------------------------+
+                                                         |
+                                             OSPM Loading |
+                                                         \|/
+                                                   +----------------+
+                                                   | ACPI Namespace |
+                                                   +----------------+
+
+                  Figure 1. ACPI Definition Blocks
+
+.. note:: RSDP can also contain a pointer to the RSDT (Root System
+   Description Table).  Platforms provide RSDT to enable
+   compatibility with ACPI 1.0 operating systems.  The OS is expected
+   to use XSDT, if present.
+
+
+Example ACPI Namespace
+======================
+
+All definition blocks are loaded into a single namespace.  The namespace
+is a hierarchy of objects identified by names and paths.
+The following naming conventions apply to object names in the ACPI
+namespace:
 
-Credit:
-
-Thanks for the help from Zhang Rui <rui.zhang@intel.com> and Rafael J.
-Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>.
-
-
-1. ACPI Definition Blocks
-
-   The ACPI firmware sets up RSDP (Root System Description Pointer) in the
-   system memory address space pointing to the XSDT (Extended System
-   Description Table).  The XSDT always points to the FADT (Fixed ACPI
-   Description Table) using its first entry, the data within the FADT
-   includes various fixed-length entries that describe fixed ACPI features
-   of the hardware.  The FADT contains a pointer to the DSDT
-   (Differentiated System Descripition Table).  The XSDT also contains
-   entries pointing to possibly multiple SSDTs (Secondary System
-   Description Table).
-
-   The DSDT and SSDT data is organized in data structures called definition
-   blocks that contain definitions of various objects, including ACPI
-   control methods, encoded in AML (ACPI Machine Language).  The data block
-   of the DSDT along with the contents of SSDTs represents a hierarchical
-   data structure called the ACPI namespace whose topology reflects the
-   structure of the underlying hardware platform.
-
-   The relationships between ACPI System Definition Tables described above
-   are illustrated in the following diagram.
-
-     +---------+    +-------+    +--------+    +------------------------+
-     |  RSDP   | +->| XSDT  | +->|  FADT  |    |  +-------------------+ |
-     +---------+ |  +-------+ |  +--------+  +-|->|       DSDT        | |
-     | Pointer | |  | Entry |-+  | ...... |  | |  +-------------------+ |
-     +---------+ |  +-------+    | X_DSDT |--+ |  | Definition Blocks | |
-     | Pointer |-+  | ..... |    | ...... |    |  +-------------------+ |
-     +---------+    +-------+    +--------+    |  +-------------------+ |
-                    | Entry |------------------|->|       SSDT        | |
-                    +- - - -+                  |  +-------------------| |
-                    | Entry | - - - - - - - -+ |  | Definition Blocks | |
-                    +- - - -+                | |  +-------------------+ |
-                                             | |  +- - - - - - - - - -+ |
-                                             +-|->|       SSDT        | |
-                                               |  +-------------------+ |
-                                               |  | Definition Blocks | |
-                                               |  +- - - - - - - - - -+ |
-                                               +------------------------+
-                                                           |
-                                              OSPM Loading |
-                                                          \|/
-                                                    +----------------+
-                                                    | ACPI Namespace |
-                                                    +----------------+
-
-                     Figure 1. ACPI Definition Blocks
-
-   NOTE: RSDP can also contain a pointer to the RSDT (Root System
-         Description Table).  Platforms provide RSDT to enable
-         compatibility with ACPI 1.0 operating systems.  The OS is expected
-         to use XSDT, if present.
-
-
-2. Example ACPI Namespace
-
-   All definition blocks are loaded into a single namespace.  The namespace
-   is a hierarchy of objects identified by names and paths.
-   The following naming conventions apply to object names in the ACPI
-   namespace:
    1. All names are 32 bits long.
    2. The first byte of a name must be one of 'A' - 'Z', '_'.
    3. Each of the remaining bytes of a name must be one of 'A' - 'Z', '0'
@@ -91,7 +96,7 @@ Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>.
       (i.e. names prepended with '^' are relative to the parent of the
       current namespace node).
 
-   The figure below shows an example ACPI namespace.
+The figure below shows an example ACPI namespace::
 
    +------+
    | \    |                     Root
@@ -184,19 +189,20 @@ Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>.
                      Figure 2. Example ACPI Namespace
 
 
-3. Linux ACPI Device Objects
+Linux ACPI Device Objects
+=========================
 
-   The Linux kernel's core ACPI subsystem creates struct acpi_device
-   objects for ACPI namespace objects representing devices, power resources
-   processors, thermal zones.  Those objects are exported to user space via
-   sysfs as directories in the subtree under /sys/devices/LNXSYSTM:00.  The
-   format of their names is <bus_id:instance>, where 'bus_id' refers to the
-   ACPI namespace representation of the given object and 'instance' is used
-   for distinguishing different object of the same 'bus_id' (it is
-   two-digit decimal representation of an unsigned integer).
+The Linux kernel's core ACPI subsystem creates struct acpi_device
+objects for ACPI namespace objects representing devices, power resources
+processors, thermal zones.  Those objects are exported to user space via
+sysfs as directories in the subtree under /sys/devices/LNXSYSTM:00.  The
+format of their names is <bus_id:instance>, where 'bus_id' refers to the
+ACPI namespace representation of the given object and 'instance' is used
+for distinguishing different object of the same 'bus_id' (it is
+two-digit decimal representation of an unsigned integer).
 
-   The value of 'bus_id' depends on the type of the object whose name it is
-   part of as listed in the table below.
+The value of 'bus_id' depends on the type of the object whose name it is
+part of as listed in the table below::
 
                 +---+-----------------+-------+----------+
                 |   | Object/Feature  | Table | bus_id   |
@@ -226,10 +232,11 @@ Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>.
 
                  Table 1. ACPI Namespace Objects Mapping
 
-   The following rules apply when creating struct acpi_device objects on
-   the basis of the contents of ACPI System Description Tables (as
-   indicated by the letter in the first column and the notation in the
-   second column of the table above):
+The following rules apply when creating struct acpi_device objects on
+the basis of the contents of ACPI System Description Tables (as
+indicated by the letter in the first column and the notation in the
+second column of the table above):
+
    N:
       The object's source is an ACPI namespace node (as indicated by the
       named object's type in the second column).  In that case the object's
@@ -249,13 +256,14 @@ Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>.
       struct acpi_device object with LNXVIDEO 'bus_id' will be created for
       it.
 
-   The third column of the above table indicates which ACPI System
-   Description Tables contain information used for the creation of the
-   struct acpi_device objects represented by the given row (xSDT means DSDT
-   or SSDT).
+The third column of the above table indicates which ACPI System
+Description Tables contain information used for the creation of the
+struct acpi_device objects represented by the given row (xSDT means DSDT
+or SSDT).
+
+The forth column of the above table indicates the 'bus_id' generation
+rule of the struct acpi_device object:
 
-   The forth column of the above table indicates the 'bus_id' generation
-   rule of the struct acpi_device object:
    _HID:
       _HID in the last column of the table means that the object's bus_id
       is derived from the _HID/_CID identification objects present under
@@ -275,45 +283,47 @@ Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>.
       object's bus_id.
 
 
-4. Linux ACPI Physical Device Glue
-
-   ACPI device (i.e. struct acpi_device) objects may be linked to other
-   objects in the Linux' device hierarchy that represent "physical" devices
-   (for example, devices on the PCI bus).  If that happens, it means that
-   the ACPI device object is a "companion" of a device otherwise
-   represented in a different way and is used (1) to provide configuration
-   information on that device which cannot be obtained by other means and
-   (2) to do specific things to the device with the help of its ACPI
-   control methods.  One ACPI device object may be linked this way to
-   multiple "physical" devices.
-
-   If an ACPI device object is linked to a "physical" device, its sysfs
-   directory contains the "physical_node" symbolic link to the sysfs
-   directory of the target device object.  In turn, the target device's
-   sysfs directory will then contain the "firmware_node" symbolic link to
-   the sysfs directory of the companion ACPI device object.
-   The linking mechanism relies on device identification provided by the
-   ACPI namespace.  For example, if there's an ACPI namespace object
-   representing a PCI device (i.e. a device object under an ACPI namespace
-   object representing a PCI bridge) whose _ADR returns 0x00020000 and the
-   bus number of the parent PCI bridge is 0, the sysfs directory
-   representing the struct acpi_device object created for that ACPI
-   namespace object will contain the 'physical_node' symbolic link to the
-   /sys/devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:02:0/ sysfs directory of the
-   corresponding PCI device.
-
-   The linking mechanism is generally bus-specific.  The core of its
-   implementation is located in the drivers/acpi/glue.c file, but there are
-   complementary parts depending on the bus types in question located
-   elsewhere.  For example, the PCI-specific part of it is located in
-   drivers/pci/pci-acpi.c.
-
-
-5. Example Linux ACPI Device Tree
-
-   The sysfs hierarchy of struct acpi_device objects corresponding to the
-   example ACPI namespace illustrated in Figure 2 with the addition of
-   fixed PWR_BUTTON/SLP_BUTTON devices is shown below.
+Linux ACPI Physical Device Glue
+===============================
+
+ACPI device (i.e. struct acpi_device) objects may be linked to other
+objects in the Linux' device hierarchy that represent "physical" devices
+(for example, devices on the PCI bus).  If that happens, it means that
+the ACPI device object is a "companion" of a device otherwise
+represented in a different way and is used (1) to provide configuration
+information on that device which cannot be obtained by other means and
+(2) to do specific things to the device with the help of its ACPI
+control methods.  One ACPI device object may be linked this way to
+multiple "physical" devices.
+
+If an ACPI device object is linked to a "physical" device, its sysfs
+directory contains the "physical_node" symbolic link to the sysfs
+directory of the target device object.  In turn, the target device's
+sysfs directory will then contain the "firmware_node" symbolic link to
+the sysfs directory of the companion ACPI device object.
+The linking mechanism relies on device identification provided by the
+ACPI namespace.  For example, if there's an ACPI namespace object
+representing a PCI device (i.e. a device object under an ACPI namespace
+object representing a PCI bridge) whose _ADR returns 0x00020000 and the
+bus number of the parent PCI bridge is 0, the sysfs directory
+representing the struct acpi_device object created for that ACPI
+namespace object will contain the 'physical_node' symbolic link to the
+/sys/devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:02:0/ sysfs directory of the
+corresponding PCI device.
+
+The linking mechanism is generally bus-specific.  The core of its
+implementation is located in the drivers/acpi/glue.c file, but there are
+complementary parts depending on the bus types in question located
+elsewhere.  For example, the PCI-specific part of it is located in
+drivers/pci/pci-acpi.c.
+
+
+Example Linux ACPI Device Tree
+=================================
+
+The sysfs hierarchy of struct acpi_device objects corresponding to the
+example ACPI namespace illustrated in Figure 2 with the addition of
+fixed PWR_BUTTON/SLP_BUTTON devices is shown below::
 
    +--------------+---+-----------------+
    | LNXSYSTEM:00 | \ | acpi:LNXSYSTEM: |
@@ -377,12 +387,14 @@ Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>.
 
                   Figure 3. Example Linux ACPI Device Tree
 
-   NOTE: Each node is represented as "object/path/modalias", where:
-         1. 'object' is the name of the object's directory in sysfs.
-         2. 'path' is the ACPI namespace path of the corresponding
-            ACPI namespace object, as returned by the object's 'path'
-            sysfs attribute.
-         3. 'modalias' is the value of the object's 'modalias' sysfs
-            attribute (as described earlier in this document).
-   NOTE: N/A indicates the device object does not have the 'path' or the
-         'modalias' attribute.
+.. note:: Each node is represented as "object/path/modalias", where:
+
+   1. 'object' is the name of the object's directory in sysfs.
+   2. 'path' is the ACPI namespace path of the corresponding
+      ACPI namespace object, as returned by the object's 'path'
+      sysfs attribute.
+   3. 'modalias' is the value of the object's 'modalias' sysfs
+      attribute (as described earlier in this document).
+
+.. note:: N/A indicates the device object does not have the 'path' or the
+   'modalias' attribute.
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/osi.txt b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/osi.rst
index 50cde0ceb9b0..29e9ef79ebc0 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/osi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/osi.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,8 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+==========================
 ACPI _OSI and _REV methods
---------------------------
+==========================
 
 An ACPI BIOS can use the "Operating System Interfaces" method (_OSI)
 to find out what the operating system supports. Eg. If BIOS
@@ -14,7 +17,7 @@ This document explains how and why the BIOS and Linux should use these methods.
 It also explains how and why they are widely misused.
 
 How to use _OSI
----------------
+===============
 
 Linux runs on two groups of machines -- those that are tested by the OEM
 to be compatible with Linux, and those that were never tested with Linux,
@@ -62,7 +65,7 @@ the string when that support is added to the kernel.
 That was easy.  Read on, to find out how to do it wrong.
 
 Before _OSI, there was _OS
---------------------------
+==========================
 
 ACPI 1.0 specified "_OS" as an
 "object that evaluates to a string that identifies the operating system."
@@ -96,7 +99,7 @@ That is the *only* viable strategy, as that is what modern Windows does,
 and so doing otherwise could steer the BIOS down an untested path.
 
 _OSI is born, and immediately misused
---------------------------------------
+=====================================
 
 With _OSI, the *BIOS* provides the string describing an interface,
 and asks the OS: "YES/NO, are you compatible with this interface?"
@@ -144,7 +147,7 @@ catastrophic failure resulting from the BIOS taking paths that
 were never validated under *any* OS.
 
 Do not use _REV
----------------
+===============
 
 Since _OSI("Linux") went away, some BIOS writers used _REV
 to support Linux and Windows differences in the same BIOS.
@@ -164,7 +167,7 @@ from mid-2015 onward.  The ACPI specification will also be updated
 to reflect that _REV is deprecated, and always returns 2.
 
 Apple Mac and _OSI("Darwin")
-----------------------------
+============================
 
 On Apple's Mac platforms, the ACPI BIOS invokes _OSI("Darwin")
 to determine if the machine is running Apple OSX.
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/video_extension.txt b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/video_extension.rst
index 79bf6a4921be..099b8607e07b 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/video_extension.txt
+++ b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/video_extension.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,8 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=====================
 ACPI video extensions
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+=====================
 
 This driver implement the ACPI Extensions For Display Adapters for
 integrated graphics devices on motherboard, as specified in ACPI 2.0
@@ -8,9 +11,10 @@ defining the video POST device, retrieving EDID information or to
 setup a video output, etc.  Note that this is an ref. implementation
 only.  It may or may not work for your integrated video device.
 
-The ACPI video driver does 3 things regarding backlight control:
+The ACPI video driver does 3 things regarding backlight control.
 
-1 Export a sysfs interface for user space to control backlight level
+Export a sysfs interface for user space to control backlight level
+==================================================================
 
 If the ACPI table has a video device, and acpi_backlight=vendor kernel
 command line is not present, the driver will register a backlight device
@@ -22,36 +26,41 @@ The backlight sysfs interface has a standard definition here:
 Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-class-backlight.
 
 And what ACPI video driver does is:
-actual_brightness: on read, control method _BQC will be evaluated to
-get the brightness level the firmware thinks it is at;
-bl_power: not implemented, will set the current brightness instead;
-brightness: on write, control method _BCM will run to set the requested
-brightness level;
-max_brightness: Derived from the _BCL package(see below);
-type: firmware
+
+actual_brightness:
+  on read, control method _BQC will be evaluated to
+  get the brightness level the firmware thinks it is at;
+bl_power:
+  not implemented, will set the current brightness instead;
+brightness:
+  on write, control method _BCM will run to set the requested brightness level;
+max_brightness:
+  Derived from the _BCL package(see below);
+type:
+  firmware
 
 Note that ACPI video backlight driver will always use index for
 brightness, actual_brightness and max_brightness. So if we have
-the following _BCL package:
+the following _BCL package::
 
-Method (_BCL, 0, NotSerialized)
-{
-	Return (Package (0x0C)
+	Method (_BCL, 0, NotSerialized)
 	{
-		0x64,
-		0x32,
-		0x0A,
-		0x14,
-		0x1E,
-		0x28,
-		0x32,
-		0x3C,
-		0x46,
-		0x50,
-		0x5A,
-		0x64
-	})
-}
+		Return (Package (0x0C)
+		{
+			0x64,
+			0x32,
+			0x0A,
+			0x14,
+			0x1E,
+			0x28,
+			0x32,
+			0x3C,
+			0x46,
+			0x50,
+			0x5A,
+			0x64
+		})
+	}
 
 The first two levels are for when laptop are on AC or on battery and are
 not used by Linux currently. The remaining 10 levels are supported levels
@@ -62,13 +71,15 @@ as a "brightness level" indicator. Thus from the user space perspective
 the range of available brightness levels is from 0 to 9 (max_brightness)
 inclusive.
 
-2 Notify user space about hotkey event
+Notify user space about hotkey event
+====================================
 
 There are generally two cases for hotkey event reporting:
+
 i) For some laptops, when user presses the hotkey, a scancode will be
    generated and sent to user space through the input device created by
    the keyboard driver as a key type input event, with proper remap, the
-   following key code will appear to user space:
+   following key code will appear to user space::
 
 	EV_KEY, KEY_BRIGHTNESSUP
 	EV_KEY, KEY_BRIGHTNESSDOWN
@@ -84,23 +95,27 @@ ii) For some laptops, the press of the hotkey will not generate the
     notify value it received and send the event to user space through the
     input device it created:
 
+	=====		==================
 	event		keycode
+	=====		==================
 	0x86		KEY_BRIGHTNESSUP
 	0x87		KEY_BRIGHTNESSDOWN
 	etc.
+	=====		==================
 
 so this would lead to the same effect as case i) now.
 
 Once user space tool receives this event, it can modify the backlight
 level through the sysfs interface.
 
-3 Change backlight level in the kernel
+Change backlight level in the kernel
+====================================
 
 This works for machines covered by case ii) in Section 2. Once the driver
 received a notification, it will set the backlight level accordingly. This does
 not affect the sending of event to user space, they are always sent to user
 space regardless of whether or not the video module controls the backlight level
 directly. This behaviour can be controlled through the brightness_switch_enabled
-module parameter as documented in admin-guide/kernel-parameters.rst. It is recommended to
-disable this behaviour once a GUI environment starts up and wants to have full
-control of the backlight level.
+module parameter as documented in admin-guide/kernel-parameters.rst. It is
+recommended to disable this behaviour once a GUI environment starts up and
+wants to have full control of the backlight level.
diff --git a/Documentation/firmware-guide/index.rst b/Documentation/firmware-guide/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5355784ca0a2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/firmware-guide/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+===============================
+The Linux kernel firmware guide
+===============================
+
+This section describes the ACPI subsystem in Linux from firmware perspective.
+
+.. toctree::
+   :maxdepth: 1
+
+   acpi/index
+
diff --git a/Documentation/flexible-arrays.txt b/Documentation/flexible-arrays.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index a0f2989dd804..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/flexible-arrays.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,123 +0,0 @@
-===================================
-Using flexible arrays in the kernel
-===================================
-
-:Updated: Last updated for 2.6.32
-:Author: Jonathan Corbet <corbet@lwn.net>
-
-Large contiguous memory allocations can be unreliable in the Linux kernel.
-Kernel programmers will sometimes respond to this problem by allocating
-pages with vmalloc().  This solution not ideal, though.  On 32-bit systems,
-memory from vmalloc() must be mapped into a relatively small address space;
-it's easy to run out.  On SMP systems, the page table changes required by
-vmalloc() allocations can require expensive cross-processor interrupts on
-all CPUs.  And, on all systems, use of space in the vmalloc() range
-increases pressure on the translation lookaside buffer (TLB), reducing the
-performance of the system.
-
-In many cases, the need for memory from vmalloc() can be eliminated by
-piecing together an array from smaller parts; the flexible array library
-exists to make this task easier.
-
-A flexible array holds an arbitrary (within limits) number of fixed-sized
-objects, accessed via an integer index.  Sparse arrays are handled
-reasonably well.  Only single-page allocations are made, so memory
-allocation failures should be relatively rare.  The down sides are that the
-arrays cannot be indexed directly, individual object size cannot exceed the
-system page size, and putting data into a flexible array requires a copy
-operation.  It's also worth noting that flexible arrays do no internal
-locking at all; if concurrent access to an array is possible, then the
-caller must arrange for appropriate mutual exclusion.
-
-The creation of a flexible array is done with::
-
-    #include <linux/flex_array.h>
-
-    struct flex_array *flex_array_alloc(int element_size,
-					unsigned int total,
-					gfp_t flags);
-
-The individual object size is provided by element_size, while total is the
-maximum number of objects which can be stored in the array.  The flags
-argument is passed directly to the internal memory allocation calls.  With
-the current code, using flags to ask for high memory is likely to lead to
-notably unpleasant side effects.
-
-It is also possible to define flexible arrays at compile time with::
-
-    DEFINE_FLEX_ARRAY(name, element_size, total);
-
-This macro will result in a definition of an array with the given name; the
-element size and total will be checked for validity at compile time.
-
-Storing data into a flexible array is accomplished with a call to::
-
-    int flex_array_put(struct flex_array *array, unsigned int element_nr,
-    		       void *src, gfp_t flags);
-
-This call will copy the data from src into the array, in the position
-indicated by element_nr (which must be less than the maximum specified when
-the array was created).  If any memory allocations must be performed, flags
-will be used.  The return value is zero on success, a negative error code
-otherwise.
-
-There might possibly be a need to store data into a flexible array while
-running in some sort of atomic context; in this situation, sleeping in the
-memory allocator would be a bad thing.  That can be avoided by using
-GFP_ATOMIC for the flags value, but, often, there is a better way.  The
-trick is to ensure that any needed memory allocations are done before
-entering atomic context, using::
-
-    int flex_array_prealloc(struct flex_array *array, unsigned int start,
-			    unsigned int nr_elements, gfp_t flags);
-
-This function will ensure that memory for the elements indexed in the range
-defined by start and nr_elements has been allocated.  Thereafter, a
-flex_array_put() call on an element in that range is guaranteed not to
-block.
-
-Getting data back out of the array is done with::
-
-    void *flex_array_get(struct flex_array *fa, unsigned int element_nr);
-
-The return value is a pointer to the data element, or NULL if that
-particular element has never been allocated.
-
-Note that it is possible to get back a valid pointer for an element which
-has never been stored in the array.  Memory for array elements is allocated
-one page at a time; a single allocation could provide memory for several
-adjacent elements.  Flexible array elements are normally initialized to the
-value FLEX_ARRAY_FREE (defined as 0x6c in <linux/poison.h>), so errors
-involving that number probably result from use of unstored array entries.
-Note that, if array elements are allocated with __GFP_ZERO, they will be
-initialized to zero and this poisoning will not happen.
-
-Individual elements in the array can be cleared with::
-
-    int flex_array_clear(struct flex_array *array, unsigned int element_nr);
-
-This function will set the given element to FLEX_ARRAY_FREE and return
-zero.  If storage for the indicated element is not allocated for the array,
-flex_array_clear() will return -EINVAL instead.  Note that clearing an
-element does not release the storage associated with it; to reduce the
-allocated size of an array, call::
-
-    int flex_array_shrink(struct flex_array *array);
-
-The return value will be the number of pages of memory actually freed.
-This function works by scanning the array for pages containing nothing but
-FLEX_ARRAY_FREE bytes, so (1) it can be expensive, and (2) it will not work
-if the array's pages are allocated with __GFP_ZERO.
-
-It is possible to remove all elements of an array with a call to::
-
-    void flex_array_free_parts(struct flex_array *array);
-
-This call frees all elements, but leaves the array itself in place.
-Freeing the entire array is done with::
-
-    void flex_array_free(struct flex_array *array);
-
-As of this writing, there are no users of flexible arrays in the mainline
-kernel.  The functions described here are also not exported to modules;
-that will probably be fixed when somebody comes up with a need for it.
diff --git a/Documentation/gpio/index.rst b/Documentation/gpio/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..09a4a553f434
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/gpio/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+:orphan:
+
+====
+gpio
+====
+
+.. toctree::
+    :maxdepth: 1
+
+    sysfs
+
+.. only::  subproject and html
+
+   Indices
+   =======
+
+   * :ref:`genindex`
diff --git a/Documentation/gpio/sysfs.txt b/Documentation/gpio/sysfs.rst
index 58eeab81f349..ec09ffd983e7 100644
--- a/Documentation/gpio/sysfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/gpio/sysfs.rst
@@ -1,10 +1,12 @@
 GPIO Sysfs Interface for Userspace
 ==================================
 
-THIS ABI IS DEPRECATED, THE ABI DOCUMENTATION HAS BEEN MOVED TO
-Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-gpio AND NEW USERSPACE CONSUMERS
-ARE SUPPOSED TO USE THE CHARACTER DEVICE ABI. THIS OLD SYSFS ABI WILL
-NOT BE DEVELOPED (NO NEW FEATURES), IT WILL JUST BE MAINTAINED.
+.. warning::
+
+  THIS ABI IS DEPRECATED, THE ABI DOCUMENTATION HAS BEEN MOVED TO
+  Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-gpio AND NEW USERSPACE CONSUMERS
+  ARE SUPPOSED TO USE THE CHARACTER DEVICE ABI. THIS OLD SYSFS ABI WILL
+  NOT BE DEVELOPED (NO NEW FEATURES), IT WILL JUST BE MAINTAINED.
 
 Refer to the examples in tools/gpio/* for an introduction to the new
 character device ABI. Also see the userspace header in
@@ -51,13 +53,15 @@ The control interfaces are write-only:
 
     /sys/class/gpio/
 
-    	"export" ... Userspace may ask the kernel to export control of
+	"export" ...
+		Userspace may ask the kernel to export control of
 		a GPIO to userspace by writing its number to this file.
 
 		Example:  "echo 19 > export" will create a "gpio19" node
 		for GPIO #19, if that's not requested by kernel code.
 
-    	"unexport" ... Reverses the effect of exporting to userspace.
+	"unexport" ...
+		Reverses the effect of exporting to userspace.
 
 		Example:  "echo 19 > unexport" will remove a "gpio19"
 		node exported using the "export" file.
@@ -67,7 +71,8 @@ and have the following read/write attributes:
 
     /sys/class/gpio/gpioN/
 
-	"direction" ... reads as either "in" or "out". This value may
+	"direction" ...
+		reads as either "in" or "out". This value may
 		normally be written. Writing as "out" defaults to
 		initializing the value as low. To ensure glitch free
 		operation, values "low" and "high" may be written to
@@ -78,7 +83,8 @@ and have the following read/write attributes:
 		it was exported by kernel code that didn't explicitly
 		allow userspace to reconfigure this GPIO's direction.
 
-	"value" ... reads as either 0 (low) or 1 (high). If the GPIO
+	"value" ...
+		reads as either 0 (low) or 1 (high). If the GPIO
 		is configured as an output, this value may be written;
 		any nonzero value is treated as high.
 
@@ -92,14 +98,16 @@ and have the following read/write attributes:
 		file and read the new value or close the file and re-open it
 		to read the value.
 
-	"edge" ... reads as either "none", "rising", "falling", or
+	"edge" ...
+		reads as either "none", "rising", "falling", or
 		"both". Write these strings to select the signal edge(s)
 		that will make poll(2) on the "value" file return.
 
 		This file exists only if the pin can be configured as an
 		interrupt generating input pin.
 
-	"active_low" ... reads as either 0 (false) or 1 (true). Write
+	"active_low" ...
+		reads as either 0 (false) or 1 (true). Write
 		any nonzero value to invert the value attribute both
 		for reading and writing. Existing and subsequent
 		poll(2) support configuration via the edge attribute
@@ -112,11 +120,14 @@ read-only attributes:
 
     /sys/class/gpio/gpiochipN/
 
-    	"base" ... same as N, the first GPIO managed by this chip
+	"base" ...
+		same as N, the first GPIO managed by this chip
 
-    	"label" ... provided for diagnostics (not always unique)
+	"label" ...
+		provided for diagnostics (not always unique)
 
-        "ngpio" ... how many GPIOs this manages (N to N + ngpio - 1)
+	"ngpio" ...
+		how many GPIOs this manages (N to N + ngpio - 1)
 
 Board documentation should in most cases cover what GPIOs are used for
 what purposes. However, those numbers are not always stable; GPIOs on
@@ -129,7 +140,7 @@ the correct GPIO number to use for a given signal.
 Exporting from Kernel code
 --------------------------
 Kernel code can explicitly manage exports of GPIOs which have already been
-requested using gpio_request():
+requested using gpio_request()::
 
 	/* export the GPIO to userspace */
 	int gpiod_export(struct gpio_desc *desc, bool direction_may_change);
diff --git a/Documentation/gpu/afbc.rst b/Documentation/gpu/afbc.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4d38dc49d105
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/gpu/afbc.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,235 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+
+===================================
+ Arm Framebuffer Compression (AFBC)
+===================================
+
+AFBC is a proprietary lossless image compression protocol and format.
+It provides fine-grained random access and minimizes the amount of
+data transferred between IP blocks.
+
+AFBC can be enabled on drivers which support it via use of the AFBC
+format modifiers defined in drm_fourcc.h. See DRM_FORMAT_MOD_ARM_AFBC(*).
+
+All users of the AFBC modifiers must follow the usage guidelines laid
+out in this document, to ensure compatibility across different AFBC
+producers and consumers.
+
+Components and Ordering
+=======================
+
+AFBC streams can contain several components - where a component
+corresponds to a color channel (i.e. R, G, B, X, A, Y, Cb, Cr).
+The assignment of input/output color channels must be consistent
+between the encoder and the decoder for correct operation, otherwise
+the consumer will interpret the decoded data incorrectly.
+
+Furthermore, when the lossless colorspace transform is used
+(AFBC_FORMAT_MOD_YTR, which should be enabled for RGB buffers for
+maximum compression efficiency), the component order must be:
+
+ * Component 0: R
+ * Component 1: G
+ * Component 2: B
+
+The component ordering is communicated via the fourcc code in the
+fourcc:modifier pair. In general, component '0' is considered to
+reside in the least-significant bits of the corresponding linear
+format. For example, COMP(bits):
+
+ * DRM_FORMAT_ABGR8888
+
+   * Component 0: R(8)
+   * Component 1: G(8)
+   * Component 2: B(8)
+   * Component 3: A(8)
+
+ * DRM_FORMAT_BGR888
+
+   * Component 0: R(8)
+   * Component 1: G(8)
+   * Component 2: B(8)
+
+ * DRM_FORMAT_YUYV
+
+   * Component 0: Y(8)
+   * Component 1: Cb(8, 2x1 subsampled)
+   * Component 2: Cr(8, 2x1 subsampled)
+
+In AFBC, 'X' components are not treated any differently from any other
+component. Therefore, an AFBC buffer with fourcc DRM_FORMAT_XBGR8888
+encodes with 4 components, like so:
+
+ * DRM_FORMAT_XBGR8888
+
+   * Component 0: R(8)
+   * Component 1: G(8)
+   * Component 2: B(8)
+   * Component 3: X(8)
+
+Please note, however, that the inclusion of a "wasted" 'X' channel is
+bad for compression efficiency, and so it's recommended to avoid
+formats containing 'X' bits. If a fourth component is
+required/expected by the encoder/decoder, then it is recommended to
+instead use an equivalent format with alpha, setting all alpha bits to
+'1'. If there is no requirement for a fourth component, then a format
+which doesn't include alpha can be used, e.g. DRM_FORMAT_BGR888.
+
+Number of Planes
+================
+
+Formats which are typically multi-planar in linear layouts (e.g. YUV
+420), can be encoded into one, or multiple, AFBC planes. As with
+component order, the encoder and decoder must agree about the number
+of planes in order to correctly decode the buffer. The fourcc code is
+used to determine the number of encoded planes in an AFBC buffer,
+matching the number of planes for the linear (unmodified) format.
+Within each plane, the component ordering also follows the fourcc
+code:
+
+For example:
+
+ * DRM_FORMAT_YUYV: nplanes = 1
+
+   * Plane 0:
+
+     * Component 0: Y(8)
+     * Component 1: Cb(8, 2x1 subsampled)
+     * Component 2: Cr(8, 2x1 subsampled)
+
+ * DRM_FORMAT_NV12: nplanes = 2
+
+   * Plane 0:
+
+     * Component 0: Y(8)
+
+   * Plane 1:
+
+     * Component 0: Cb(8, 2x1 subsampled)
+     * Component 1: Cr(8, 2x1 subsampled)
+
+Cross-device interoperability
+=============================
+
+For maximum compatibility across devices, the table below defines
+canonical formats for use between AFBC-enabled devices. Formats which
+are listed here must be used exactly as specified when using the AFBC
+modifiers. Formats which are not listed should be avoided.
+
+.. flat-table:: AFBC formats
+
+   * - Fourcc code
+     - Description
+     - Planes/Components
+
+   * - DRM_FORMAT_ABGR2101010
+     - 10-bit per component RGB, with 2-bit alpha
+     - Plane 0: 4 components
+              * Component 0: R(10)
+              * Component 1: G(10)
+              * Component 2: B(10)
+              * Component 3: A(2)
+
+   * - DRM_FORMAT_ABGR8888
+     - 8-bit per component RGB, with 8-bit alpha
+     - Plane 0: 4 components
+              * Component 0: R(8)
+              * Component 1: G(8)
+              * Component 2: B(8)
+              * Component 3: A(8)
+
+   * - DRM_FORMAT_BGR888
+     - 8-bit per component RGB
+     - Plane 0: 3 components
+              * Component 0: R(8)
+              * Component 1: G(8)
+              * Component 2: B(8)
+
+   * - DRM_FORMAT_BGR565
+     - 5/6-bit per component RGB
+     - Plane 0: 3 components
+              * Component 0: R(5)
+              * Component 1: G(6)
+              * Component 2: B(5)
+
+   * - DRM_FORMAT_ABGR1555
+     - 5-bit per component RGB, with 1-bit alpha
+     - Plane 0: 4 components
+              * Component 0: R(5)
+              * Component 1: G(5)
+              * Component 2: B(5)
+              * Component 3: A(1)
+
+   * - DRM_FORMAT_VUY888
+     - 8-bit per component YCbCr 444, single plane
+     - Plane 0: 3 components
+              * Component 0: Y(8)
+              * Component 1: Cb(8)
+              * Component 2: Cr(8)
+
+   * - DRM_FORMAT_VUY101010
+     - 10-bit per component YCbCr 444, single plane
+     - Plane 0: 3 components
+              * Component 0: Y(10)
+              * Component 1: Cb(10)
+              * Component 2: Cr(10)
+
+   * - DRM_FORMAT_YUYV
+     - 8-bit per component YCbCr 422, single plane
+     - Plane 0: 3 components
+              * Component 0: Y(8)
+              * Component 1: Cb(8, 2x1 subsampled)
+              * Component 2: Cr(8, 2x1 subsampled)
+
+   * - DRM_FORMAT_NV16
+     - 8-bit per component YCbCr 422, two plane
+     - Plane 0: 1 component
+              * Component 0: Y(8)
+       Plane 1: 2 components
+              * Component 0: Cb(8, 2x1 subsampled)
+              * Component 1: Cr(8, 2x1 subsampled)
+
+   * - DRM_FORMAT_Y210
+     - 10-bit per component YCbCr 422, single plane
+     - Plane 0: 3 components
+              * Component 0: Y(10)
+              * Component 1: Cb(10, 2x1 subsampled)
+              * Component 2: Cr(10, 2x1 subsampled)
+
+   * - DRM_FORMAT_P210
+     - 10-bit per component YCbCr 422, two plane
+     - Plane 0: 1 component
+              * Component 0: Y(10)
+       Plane 1: 2 components
+              * Component 0: Cb(10, 2x1 subsampled)
+              * Component 1: Cr(10, 2x1 subsampled)
+
+   * - DRM_FORMAT_YUV420_8BIT
+     - 8-bit per component YCbCr 420, single plane
+     - Plane 0: 3 components
+              * Component 0: Y(8)
+              * Component 1: Cb(8, 2x2 subsampled)
+              * Component 2: Cr(8, 2x2 subsampled)
+
+   * - DRM_FORMAT_YUV420_10BIT
+     - 10-bit per component YCbCr 420, single plane
+     - Plane 0: 3 components
+              * Component 0: Y(10)
+              * Component 1: Cb(10, 2x2 subsampled)
+              * Component 2: Cr(10, 2x2 subsampled)
+
+   * - DRM_FORMAT_NV12
+     - 8-bit per component YCbCr 420, two plane
+     - Plane 0: 1 component
+              * Component 0: Y(8)
+       Plane 1: 2 components
+              * Component 0: Cb(8, 2x2 subsampled)
+              * Component 1: Cr(8, 2x2 subsampled)
+
+   * - DRM_FORMAT_P010
+     - 10-bit per component YCbCr 420, two plane
+     - Plane 0: 1 component
+              * Component 0: Y(10)
+       Plane 1: 2 components
+              * Component 0: Cb(10, 2x2 subsampled)
+              * Component 1: Cr(10, 2x2 subsampled)
diff --git a/Documentation/gpu/dp-mst/topology-figure-1.dot b/Documentation/gpu/dp-mst/topology-figure-1.dot
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..157e17c7e0b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/gpu/dp-mst/topology-figure-1.dot
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+digraph T {
+    /* Make sure our payloads are always drawn below the driver node */
+    subgraph cluster_driver {
+        fillcolor = grey;
+        style = filled;
+        driver -> {payload1, payload2} [dir=none];
+    }
+
+    /* Driver malloc references */
+    edge [style=dashed];
+    driver -> port1;
+    driver -> port2;
+    driver -> port3:e;
+    driver -> port4;
+
+    payload1:s -> port1:e;
+    payload2:s -> port3:e;
+    edge [style=""];
+
+    subgraph cluster_topology {
+        label="Topology Manager";
+        labelloc=bottom;
+
+        /* Topology references */
+        mstb1 -> {port1, port2};
+        port1 -> mstb2;
+        port2 -> mstb3 -> {port3, port4};
+        port3 -> mstb4;
+
+        /* Malloc references */
+        edge [style=dashed;dir=back];
+        mstb1 -> {port1, port2};
+        port1 -> mstb2;
+        port2 -> mstb3 -> {port3, port4};
+        port3 -> mstb4;
+    }
+
+    driver [label="DRM driver";style=filled;shape=box;fillcolor=lightblue];
+
+    payload1 [label="Payload #1";style=filled;shape=box;fillcolor=lightblue];
+    payload2 [label="Payload #2";style=filled;shape=box;fillcolor=lightblue];
+
+    mstb1 [label="MSTB #1";style=filled;fillcolor=palegreen;shape=oval];
+    mstb2 [label="MSTB #2";style=filled;fillcolor=palegreen;shape=oval];
+    mstb3 [label="MSTB #3";style=filled;fillcolor=palegreen;shape=oval];
+    mstb4 [label="MSTB #4";style=filled;fillcolor=palegreen;shape=oval];
+
+    port1 [label="Port #1";shape=oval];
+    port2 [label="Port #2";shape=oval];
+    port3 [label="Port #3";shape=oval];
+    port4 [label="Port #4";shape=oval];
+}
diff --git a/Documentation/gpu/dp-mst/topology-figure-2.dot b/Documentation/gpu/dp-mst/topology-figure-2.dot
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4243dd1737cb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/gpu/dp-mst/topology-figure-2.dot
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+digraph T {
+    /* Make sure our payloads are always drawn below the driver node */
+    subgraph cluster_driver {
+        fillcolor = grey;
+        style = filled;
+        driver -> {payload1, payload2} [dir=none];
+    }
+
+    /* Driver malloc references */
+    edge [style=dashed];
+    driver -> port1;
+    driver -> port2;
+    driver -> port3:e;
+    driver -> port4 [color=red];
+
+    payload1:s -> port1:e;
+    payload2:s -> port3:e;
+    edge [style=""];
+
+    subgraph cluster_topology {
+        label="Topology Manager";
+        labelloc=bottom;
+
+        /* Topology references */
+        mstb1 -> {port1, port2};
+        port1 -> mstb2;
+        edge [color=red];
+        port2 -> mstb3 -> {port3, port4};
+        port3 -> mstb4;
+        edge [color=""];
+
+        /* Malloc references */
+        edge [style=dashed;dir=back];
+        mstb1 -> {port1, port2};
+        port1 -> mstb2;
+        port2 -> mstb3 -> port3;
+        edge [color=red];
+        mstb3 -> port4;
+        port3 -> mstb4;
+    }
+
+    mstb1 [label="MSTB #1";style=filled;fillcolor=palegreen];
+    mstb2 [label="MSTB #2";style=filled;fillcolor=palegreen];
+    mstb3 [label="MSTB #3";style=filled;fillcolor=palegreen];
+    mstb4 [label="MSTB #4";style=filled;fillcolor=grey];
+
+    port1 [label="Port #1"];
+    port2 [label="Port #2"];
+    port3 [label="Port #3"];
+    port4 [label="Port #4";style=filled;fillcolor=grey];
+
+    driver [label="DRM driver";style=filled;shape=box;fillcolor=lightblue];
+
+    payload1 [label="Payload #1";style=filled;shape=box;fillcolor=lightblue];
+    payload2 [label="Payload #2";style=filled;shape=box;fillcolor=lightblue];
+}
diff --git a/Documentation/gpu/dp-mst/topology-figure-3.dot b/Documentation/gpu/dp-mst/topology-figure-3.dot
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6cd78d06778b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/gpu/dp-mst/topology-figure-3.dot
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+digraph T {
+    /* Make sure our payloads are always drawn below the driver node */
+    subgraph cluster_driver {
+        fillcolor = grey;
+        style = filled;
+        edge [dir=none];
+        driver -> payload1;
+        driver -> payload2 [penwidth=3];
+        edge [dir=""];
+    }
+
+    /* Driver malloc references */
+    edge [style=dashed];
+    driver -> port1;
+    driver -> port2;
+    driver -> port3:e;
+    driver -> port4 [color=grey];
+    payload1:s -> port1:e;
+    payload2:s -> port3:e [penwidth=3];
+    edge [style=""];
+
+    subgraph cluster_topology {
+        label="Topology Manager";
+        labelloc=bottom;
+
+        /* Topology references */
+        mstb1 -> {port1, port2};
+        port1 -> mstb2;
+        edge [color=grey];
+        port2 -> mstb3 -> {port3, port4};
+        port3 -> mstb4;
+        edge [color=""];
+
+        /* Malloc references */
+        edge [style=dashed;dir=back];
+        mstb1 -> {port1, port2};
+        port1 -> mstb2;
+        port2 -> mstb3 [penwidth=3];
+        mstb3 -> port3 [penwidth=3];
+        edge [color=grey];
+        mstb3 -> port4;
+        port3 -> mstb4;
+    }
+
+    mstb1 [label="MSTB #1";style=filled;fillcolor=palegreen];
+    mstb2 [label="MSTB #2";style=filled;fillcolor=palegreen];
+    mstb3 [label="MSTB #3";style=filled;fillcolor=palegreen;penwidth=3];
+    mstb4 [label="MSTB #4";style=filled;fillcolor=grey];
+
+    port1 [label="Port #1"];
+    port2 [label="Port #2";penwidth=5];
+    port3 [label="Port #3";penwidth=3];
+    port4 [label="Port #4";style=filled;fillcolor=grey];
+
+    driver [label="DRM driver";style=filled;shape=box;fillcolor=lightblue];
+
+    payload1 [label="Payload #1";style=filled;shape=box;fillcolor=lightblue];
+    payload2 [label="Payload #2";style=filled;shape=box;fillcolor=lightblue;penwidth=3];
+}
diff --git a/Documentation/gpu/drivers.rst b/Documentation/gpu/drivers.rst
index 7c1672118a73..044a7025477c 100644
--- a/Documentation/gpu/drivers.rst
+++ b/Documentation/gpu/drivers.rst
@@ -17,6 +17,8 @@ GPU Driver Documentation
    vkms
    bridge/dw-hdmi
    xen-front
+   afbc
+   komeda-kms
 
 .. only::  subproject and html
 
diff --git a/Documentation/gpu/drm-internals.rst b/Documentation/gpu/drm-internals.rst
index 5ee9674fb9e9..966bd2d9f0cc 100644
--- a/Documentation/gpu/drm-internals.rst
+++ b/Documentation/gpu/drm-internals.rst
@@ -39,68 +39,6 @@ sections.
 Driver Information
 ------------------
 
-Driver Features
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Drivers inform the DRM core about their requirements and supported
-features by setting appropriate flags in the driver_features field.
-Since those flags influence the DRM core behaviour since registration
-time, most of them must be set to registering the :c:type:`struct
-drm_driver <drm_driver>` instance.
-
-u32 driver_features;
-
-DRIVER_USE_AGP
-    Driver uses AGP interface, the DRM core will manage AGP resources.
-
-DRIVER_LEGACY
-    Denote a legacy driver using shadow attach. Don't use.
-
-DRIVER_KMS_LEGACY_CONTEXT
-    Used only by nouveau for backwards compatibility with existing userspace.
-    Don't use.
-
-DRIVER_PCI_DMA
-    Driver is capable of PCI DMA, mapping of PCI DMA buffers to
-    userspace will be enabled. Deprecated.
-
-DRIVER_SG
-    Driver can perform scatter/gather DMA, allocation and mapping of
-    scatter/gather buffers will be enabled. Deprecated.
-
-DRIVER_HAVE_DMA
-    Driver supports DMA, the userspace DMA API will be supported.
-    Deprecated.
-
-DRIVER_HAVE_IRQ; DRIVER_IRQ_SHARED
-    DRIVER_HAVE_IRQ indicates whether the driver has an IRQ handler
-    managed by the DRM Core. The core will support simple IRQ handler
-    installation when the flag is set. The installation process is
-    described in ?.
-
-    DRIVER_IRQ_SHARED indicates whether the device & handler support
-    shared IRQs (note that this is required of PCI drivers).
-
-DRIVER_GEM
-    Driver use the GEM memory manager.
-
-DRIVER_MODESET
-    Driver supports mode setting interfaces (KMS).
-
-DRIVER_PRIME
-    Driver implements DRM PRIME buffer sharing.
-
-DRIVER_RENDER
-    Driver supports dedicated render nodes.
-
-DRIVER_ATOMIC
-    Driver supports atomic properties. In this case the driver must
-    implement appropriate obj->atomic_get_property() vfuncs for any
-    modeset objects with driver specific properties.
-
-DRIVER_SYNCOBJ
-    Driver support drm sync objects.
-
 Major, Minor and Patchlevel
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 
@@ -143,6 +81,9 @@ Device Instance and Driver Handling
 .. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_drv.c
    :doc: driver instance overview
 
+.. kernel-doc:: include/drm/drm_device.h
+   :internal:
+
 .. kernel-doc:: include/drm/drm_drv.h
    :internal:
 
@@ -152,6 +93,11 @@ Device Instance and Driver Handling
 Driver Load
 -----------
 
+Component Helper Usage
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_drv.c
+   :doc: component helper usage recommendations
 
 IRQ Helper Library
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
@@ -230,6 +176,15 @@ Printer
 .. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_print.c
    :export:
 
+Utilities
+---------
+
+.. kernel-doc:: include/drm/drm_util.h
+   :doc: drm utils
+
+.. kernel-doc:: include/drm/drm_util.h
+   :internal:
+
 
 Legacy Support Code
 ===================
diff --git a/Documentation/gpu/drm-kms-helpers.rst b/Documentation/gpu/drm-kms-helpers.rst
index b422eb8edf16..14102ae035dc 100644
--- a/Documentation/gpu/drm-kms-helpers.rst
+++ b/Documentation/gpu/drm-kms-helpers.rst
@@ -107,6 +107,12 @@ fbdev Helper Functions Reference
 .. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_fb_helper.c
    :export:
 
+format Helper Functions Reference
+=================================
+
+.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_format_helper.c
+   :export:
+
 Framebuffer CMA Helper Functions Reference
 ==========================================
 
@@ -116,8 +122,6 @@ Framebuffer CMA Helper Functions Reference
 .. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_fb_cma_helper.c
    :export:
 
-.. _drm_bridges:
-
 Framebuffer GEM Helper Reference
 ================================
 
@@ -127,6 +131,8 @@ Framebuffer GEM Helper Reference
 .. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_gem_framebuffer_helper.c
    :export:
 
+.. _drm_bridges:
+
 Bridges
 =======
 
@@ -208,18 +214,40 @@ Display Port Dual Mode Adaptor Helper Functions Reference
 .. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_dp_dual_mode_helper.c
    :export:
 
-Display Port MST Helper Functions Reference
-===========================================
+Display Port MST Helpers
+========================
+
+Overview
+--------
 
 .. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_dp_mst_topology.c
    :doc: dp mst helper
 
+.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_dp_mst_topology.c
+   :doc: Branch device and port refcounting
+
+Functions Reference
+-------------------
+
 .. kernel-doc:: include/drm/drm_dp_mst_helper.h
    :internal:
 
 .. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_dp_mst_topology.c
    :export:
 
+Topology Lifetime Internals
+---------------------------
+
+These functions aren't exported to drivers, but are documented here to help make
+the MST topology helpers easier to understand
+
+.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_dp_mst_topology.c
+   :functions: drm_dp_mst_topology_try_get_mstb drm_dp_mst_topology_get_mstb
+               drm_dp_mst_topology_put_mstb
+               drm_dp_mst_topology_try_get_port drm_dp_mst_topology_get_port
+               drm_dp_mst_topology_put_port
+               drm_dp_mst_get_mstb_malloc drm_dp_mst_put_mstb_malloc
+
 MIPI DSI Helper Functions Reference
 ===================================
 
@@ -274,18 +302,6 @@ SCDC Helper Functions Reference
 .. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_scdc_helper.c
    :export:
 
-Rectangle Utilities Reference
-=============================
-
-.. kernel-doc:: include/drm/drm_rect.h
-   :doc: rect utils
-
-.. kernel-doc:: include/drm/drm_rect.h
-   :internal:
-
-.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_rect.c
-   :export:
-
 HDMI Infoframes Helper Reference
 ================================
 
@@ -300,6 +316,18 @@ libraries and hence is also included here.
 .. kernel-doc:: drivers/video/hdmi.c
    :export:
 
+Rectangle Utilities Reference
+=============================
+
+.. kernel-doc:: include/drm/drm_rect.h
+   :doc: rect utils
+
+.. kernel-doc:: include/drm/drm_rect.h
+   :internal:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_rect.c
+   :export:
+
 Flip-work Helper Reference
 ==========================
 
@@ -347,3 +375,15 @@ Legacy CRTC/Modeset Helper Functions Reference
 
 .. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_crtc_helper.c
    :export:
+
+SHMEM GEM Helper Reference
+==========================
+
+.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_gem_shmem_helper.c
+   :doc: overview
+
+.. kernel-doc:: include/drm/drm_gem_shmem_helper.h
+   :internal:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_gem_shmem_helper.c
+   :export:
diff --git a/Documentation/gpu/drm-kms.rst b/Documentation/gpu/drm-kms.rst
index 75c882e09fee..23a3c986ef6d 100644
--- a/Documentation/gpu/drm-kms.rst
+++ b/Documentation/gpu/drm-kms.rst
@@ -410,102 +410,6 @@ Encoder Functions Reference
 .. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_encoder.c
    :export:
 
-KMS Initialization and Cleanup
-==============================
-
-A KMS device is abstracted and exposed as a set of planes, CRTCs,
-encoders and connectors. KMS drivers must thus create and initialize all
-those objects at load time after initializing mode setting.
-
-CRTCs (:c:type:`struct drm_crtc <drm_crtc>`)
---------------------------------------------
-
-A CRTC is an abstraction representing a part of the chip that contains a
-pointer to a scanout buffer. Therefore, the number of CRTCs available
-determines how many independent scanout buffers can be active at any
-given time. The CRTC structure contains several fields to support this:
-a pointer to some video memory (abstracted as a frame buffer object), a
-display mode, and an (x, y) offset into the video memory to support
-panning or configurations where one piece of video memory spans multiple
-CRTCs.
-
-CRTC Initialization
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-A KMS device must create and register at least one struct
-:c:type:`struct drm_crtc <drm_crtc>` instance. The instance is
-allocated and zeroed by the driver, possibly as part of a larger
-structure, and registered with a call to :c:func:`drm_crtc_init()`
-with a pointer to CRTC functions.
-
-
-Cleanup
--------
-
-The DRM core manages its objects' lifetime. When an object is not needed
-anymore the core calls its destroy function, which must clean up and
-free every resource allocated for the object. Every
-:c:func:`drm_\*_init()` call must be matched with a corresponding
-:c:func:`drm_\*_cleanup()` call to cleanup CRTCs
-(:c:func:`drm_crtc_cleanup()`), planes
-(:c:func:`drm_plane_cleanup()`), encoders
-(:c:func:`drm_encoder_cleanup()`) and connectors
-(:c:func:`drm_connector_cleanup()`). Furthermore, connectors that
-have been added to sysfs must be removed by a call to
-:c:func:`drm_connector_unregister()` before calling
-:c:func:`drm_connector_cleanup()`.
-
-Connectors state change detection must be cleanup up with a call to
-:c:func:`drm_kms_helper_poll_fini()`.
-
-Output discovery and initialization example
--------------------------------------------
-
-.. code-block:: c
-
-    void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev)
-    {
-        struct drm_connector *connector;
-        struct intel_output *intel_output;
-
-        intel_output = kzalloc(sizeof(struct intel_output), GFP_KERNEL);
-        if (!intel_output)
-            return;
-
-        connector = &intel_output->base;
-        drm_connector_init(dev, &intel_output->base,
-                   &intel_crt_connector_funcs, DRM_MODE_CONNECTOR_VGA);
-
-        drm_encoder_init(dev, &intel_output->enc, &intel_crt_enc_funcs,
-                 DRM_MODE_ENCODER_DAC);
-
-        drm_connector_attach_encoder(&intel_output->base,
-                          &intel_output->enc);
-
-        /* Set up the DDC bus. */
-        intel_output->ddc_bus = intel_i2c_create(dev, GPIOA, "CRTDDC_A");
-        if (!intel_output->ddc_bus) {
-            dev_printk(KERN_ERR, &dev->pdev->dev, "DDC bus registration "
-                   "failed.\n");
-            return;
-        }
-
-        intel_output->type = INTEL_OUTPUT_ANALOG;
-        connector->interlace_allowed = 0;
-        connector->doublescan_allowed = 0;
-
-        drm_encoder_helper_add(&intel_output->enc, &intel_crt_helper_funcs);
-        drm_connector_helper_add(connector, &intel_crt_connector_helper_funcs);
-
-        drm_connector_register(connector);
-    }
-
-In the example above (taken from the i915 driver), a CRTC, connector and
-encoder combination is created. A device-specific i2c bus is also
-created for fetching EDID data and performing monitor detection. Once
-the process is complete, the new connector is registered with sysfs to
-make its properties available to applications.
-
 KMS Locking
 ===========
 
diff --git a/Documentation/gpu/drm-uapi.rst b/Documentation/gpu/drm-uapi.rst
index a752aa561ea4..c9fd23efd957 100644
--- a/Documentation/gpu/drm-uapi.rst
+++ b/Documentation/gpu/drm-uapi.rst
@@ -238,6 +238,14 @@ DRM specific patterns. Note that ENOTTY has the slightly unintuitive meaning of
 Testing and validation
 ======================
 
+Testing Requirements for userspace API
+--------------------------------------
+
+New cross-driver userspace interface extensions, like new IOCTL, new KMS
+properties, new files in sysfs or anything else that constitutes an API change
+should have driver-agnostic testcases in IGT for that feature, if such a test
+can be reasonably made using IGT for the target hardware.
+
 Validating changes with IGT
 ---------------------------
 
diff --git a/Documentation/gpu/kms-properties.csv b/Documentation/gpu/kms-properties.csv
index bfde04eddd14..07ed22ea3bd6 100644
--- a/Documentation/gpu/kms-properties.csv
+++ b/Documentation/gpu/kms-properties.csv
@@ -17,7 +17,6 @@ Owner Module/Drivers,Group,Property Name,Type,Property Values,Object attached,De
 ,Virtual GPU,“suggested X�,RANGE,"Min=0, Max=0xffffffff",Connector,property to suggest an X offset for a connector
 ,,“suggested Y�,RANGE,"Min=0, Max=0xffffffff",Connector,property to suggest an Y offset for a connector
 ,Optional,"""aspect ratio""",ENUM,"{ ""None"", ""4:3"", ""16:9"" }",Connector,TDB
-,Optional,"""content type""",ENUM,"{ ""No Data"", ""Graphics"", ""Photo"", ""Cinema"", ""Game"" }",Connector,TBD
 i915,Generic,"""Broadcast RGB""",ENUM,"{ ""Automatic"", ""Full"", ""Limited 16:235"" }",Connector,"When this property is set to Limited 16:235 and CTM is set, the hardware will be programmed with the result of the multiplication of CTM by the limited range matrix to ensure the pixels normaly in the range 0..1.0 are remapped to the range 16/255..235/255."
 ,,“audio�,ENUM,"{ ""force-dvi"", ""off"", ""auto"", ""on"" }",Connector,TBD
 ,SDVO-TV,“mode�,ENUM,"{ ""NTSC_M"", ""NTSC_J"", ""NTSC_443"", ""PAL_B"" } etc.",Connector,TBD
diff --git a/Documentation/gpu/komeda-kms.rst b/Documentation/gpu/komeda-kms.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b08da1cffecc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/gpu/komeda-kms.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,488 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+==============================
+ drm/komeda Arm display driver
+==============================
+
+The drm/komeda driver supports the Arm display processor D71 and later products,
+this document gives a brief overview of driver design: how it works and why
+design it like that.
+
+Overview of D71 like display IPs
+================================
+
+From D71, Arm display IP begins to adopt a flexible and modularized
+architecture. A display pipeline is made up of multiple individual and
+functional pipeline stages called components, and every component has some
+specific capabilities that can give the flowed pipeline pixel data a
+particular processing.
+
+Typical D71 components:
+
+Layer
+-----
+Layer is the first pipeline stage, which prepares the pixel data for the next
+stage. It fetches the pixel from memory, decodes it if it's AFBC, rotates the
+source image, unpacks or converts YUV pixels to the device internal RGB pixels,
+then adjusts the color_space of pixels if needed.
+
+Scaler
+------
+As its name suggests, scaler takes responsibility for scaling, and D71 also
+supports image enhancements by scaler.
+The usage of scaler is very flexible and can be connected to layer output
+for layer scaling, or connected to compositor and scale the whole display
+frame and then feed the output data into wb_layer which will then write it
+into memory.
+
+Compositor (compiz)
+-------------------
+Compositor blends multiple layers or pixel data flows into one single display
+frame. its output frame can be fed into post image processor for showing it on
+the monitor or fed into wb_layer and written to memory at the same time.
+user can also insert a scaler between compositor and wb_layer to down scale
+the display frame first and and then write to memory.
+
+Writeback Layer (wb_layer)
+--------------------------
+Writeback layer does the opposite things of Layer, which connects to compiz
+and writes the composition result to memory.
+
+Post image processor (improc)
+-----------------------------
+Post image processor adjusts frame data like gamma and color space to fit the
+requirements of the monitor.
+
+Timing controller (timing_ctrlr)
+--------------------------------
+Final stage of display pipeline, Timing controller is not for the pixel
+handling, but only for controlling the display timing.
+
+Merger
+------
+D71 scaler mostly only has the half horizontal input/output capabilities
+compared with Layer, like if Layer supports 4K input size, the scaler only can
+support 2K input/output in the same time. To achieve the ful frame scaling, D71
+introduces Layer Split, which splits the whole image to two half parts and feeds
+them to two Layers A and B, and does the scaling independently. After scaling
+the result need to be fed to merger to merge two part images together, and then
+output merged result to compiz.
+
+Splitter
+--------
+Similar to Layer Split, but Splitter is used for writeback, which splits the
+compiz result to two parts and then feed them to two scalers.
+
+Possible D71 Pipeline usage
+===========================
+
+Benefitting from the modularized architecture, D71 pipelines can be easily
+adjusted to fit different usages. And D71 has two pipelines, which support two
+types of working mode:
+
+-   Dual display mode
+    Two pipelines work independently and separately to drive two display outputs.
+
+-   Single display mode
+    Two pipelines work together to drive only one display output.
+
+    On this mode, pipeline_B doesn't work indenpendently, but outputs its
+    composition result into pipeline_A, and its pixel timing also derived from
+    pipeline_A.timing_ctrlr. The pipeline_B works just like a "slave" of
+    pipeline_A(master)
+
+Single pipeline data flow
+-------------------------
+
+.. kernel-render:: DOT
+   :alt: Single pipeline digraph
+   :caption: Single pipeline data flow
+
+   digraph single_ppl {
+      rankdir=LR;
+
+      subgraph {
+         "Memory";
+         "Monitor";
+      }
+
+      subgraph cluster_pipeline {
+          style=dashed
+          node [shape=box]
+          {
+              node [bgcolor=grey style=dashed]
+              "Scaler-0";
+              "Scaler-1";
+              "Scaler-0/1"
+          }
+
+         node [bgcolor=grey style=filled]
+         "Layer-0" -> "Scaler-0"
+         "Layer-1" -> "Scaler-0"
+         "Layer-2" -> "Scaler-1"
+         "Layer-3" -> "Scaler-1"
+
+         "Layer-0" -> "Compiz"
+         "Layer-1" -> "Compiz"
+         "Layer-2" -> "Compiz"
+         "Layer-3" -> "Compiz"
+         "Scaler-0" -> "Compiz"
+         "Scaler-1" -> "Compiz"
+
+         "Compiz" -> "Scaler-0/1" -> "Wb_layer"
+         "Compiz" -> "Improc" -> "Timing Controller"
+      }
+
+      "Wb_layer" -> "Memory"
+      "Timing Controller" -> "Monitor"
+   }
+
+Dual pipeline with Slave enabled
+--------------------------------
+
+.. kernel-render:: DOT
+   :alt: Slave pipeline digraph
+   :caption: Slave pipeline enabled data flow
+
+   digraph slave_ppl {
+      rankdir=LR;
+
+      subgraph {
+         "Memory";
+         "Monitor";
+      }
+      node [shape=box]
+      subgraph cluster_pipeline_slave {
+          style=dashed
+          label="Slave Pipeline_B"
+          node [shape=box]
+          {
+              node [bgcolor=grey style=dashed]
+              "Slave.Scaler-0";
+              "Slave.Scaler-1";
+          }
+
+         node [bgcolor=grey style=filled]
+         "Slave.Layer-0" -> "Slave.Scaler-0"
+         "Slave.Layer-1" -> "Slave.Scaler-0"
+         "Slave.Layer-2" -> "Slave.Scaler-1"
+         "Slave.Layer-3" -> "Slave.Scaler-1"
+
+         "Slave.Layer-0" -> "Slave.Compiz"
+         "Slave.Layer-1" -> "Slave.Compiz"
+         "Slave.Layer-2" -> "Slave.Compiz"
+         "Slave.Layer-3" -> "Slave.Compiz"
+         "Slave.Scaler-0" -> "Slave.Compiz"
+         "Slave.Scaler-1" -> "Slave.Compiz"
+      }
+
+      subgraph cluster_pipeline_master {
+          style=dashed
+          label="Master Pipeline_A"
+          node [shape=box]
+          {
+              node [bgcolor=grey style=dashed]
+              "Scaler-0";
+              "Scaler-1";
+              "Scaler-0/1"
+          }
+
+         node [bgcolor=grey style=filled]
+         "Layer-0" -> "Scaler-0"
+         "Layer-1" -> "Scaler-0"
+         "Layer-2" -> "Scaler-1"
+         "Layer-3" -> "Scaler-1"
+
+         "Slave.Compiz" -> "Compiz"
+         "Layer-0" -> "Compiz"
+         "Layer-1" -> "Compiz"
+         "Layer-2" -> "Compiz"
+         "Layer-3" -> "Compiz"
+         "Scaler-0" -> "Compiz"
+         "Scaler-1" -> "Compiz"
+
+         "Compiz" -> "Scaler-0/1" -> "Wb_layer"
+         "Compiz" -> "Improc" -> "Timing Controller"
+      }
+
+      "Wb_layer" -> "Memory"
+      "Timing Controller" -> "Monitor"
+   }
+
+Sub-pipelines for input and output
+----------------------------------
+
+A complete display pipeline can be easily divided into three sub-pipelines
+according to the in/out usage.
+
+Layer(input) pipeline
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+.. kernel-render:: DOT
+   :alt: Layer data digraph
+   :caption: Layer (input) data flow
+
+   digraph layer_data_flow {
+      rankdir=LR;
+      node [shape=box]
+
+      {
+         node [bgcolor=grey style=dashed]
+           "Scaler-n";
+      }
+
+      "Layer-n" -> "Scaler-n" -> "Compiz"
+   }
+
+.. kernel-render:: DOT
+   :alt: Layer Split digraph
+   :caption: Layer Split pipeline
+
+   digraph layer_data_flow {
+      rankdir=LR;
+      node [shape=box]
+
+      "Layer-0/1" -> "Scaler-0" -> "Merger"
+      "Layer-2/3" -> "Scaler-1" -> "Merger"
+      "Merger" -> "Compiz"
+   }
+
+Writeback(output) pipeline
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+.. kernel-render:: DOT
+   :alt: writeback digraph
+   :caption: Writeback(output) data flow
+
+   digraph writeback_data_flow {
+      rankdir=LR;
+      node [shape=box]
+
+      {
+         node [bgcolor=grey style=dashed]
+           "Scaler-n";
+      }
+
+      "Compiz" -> "Scaler-n" -> "Wb_layer"
+   }
+
+.. kernel-render:: DOT
+   :alt: split writeback digraph
+   :caption: Writeback(output) Split data flow
+
+   digraph writeback_data_flow {
+      rankdir=LR;
+      node [shape=box]
+
+      "Compiz" -> "Splitter"
+      "Splitter" -> "Scaler-0" -> "Merger"
+      "Splitter" -> "Scaler-1" -> "Merger"
+      "Merger" -> "Wb_layer"
+   }
+
+Display output pipeline
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+.. kernel-render:: DOT
+   :alt: display digraph
+   :caption: display output data flow
+
+   digraph single_ppl {
+      rankdir=LR;
+      node [shape=box]
+
+      "Compiz" -> "Improc" -> "Timing Controller"
+   }
+
+In the following section we'll see these three sub-pipelines will be handled
+by KMS-plane/wb_conn/crtc respectively.
+
+Komeda Resource abstraction
+===========================
+
+struct komeda_pipeline/component
+--------------------------------
+
+To fully utilize and easily access/configure the HW, the driver side also uses
+a similar architecture: Pipeline/Component to describe the HW features and
+capabilities, and a specific component includes two parts:
+
+-  Data flow controlling.
+-  Specific component capabilities and features.
+
+So the driver defines a common header struct komeda_component to describe the
+data flow control and all specific components are a subclass of this base
+structure.
+
+.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/arm/display/komeda/komeda_pipeline.h
+   :internal:
+
+Resource discovery and initialization
+=====================================
+
+Pipeline and component are used to describe how to handle the pixel data. We
+still need a @struct komeda_dev to describe the whole view of the device, and
+the control-abilites of device.
+
+We have &komeda_dev, &komeda_pipeline, &komeda_component. Now fill devices with
+pipelines. Since komeda is not for D71 only but also intended for later products,
+of course we’d better share as much as possible between different products. To
+achieve this, split the komeda device into two layers: CORE and CHIP.
+
+-   CORE: for common features and capabilities handling.
+-   CHIP: for register programing and HW specific feature (limitation) handling.
+
+CORE can access CHIP by three chip function structures:
+
+-   struct komeda_dev_funcs
+-   struct komeda_pipeline_funcs
+-   struct komeda_component_funcs
+
+.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/arm/display/komeda/komeda_dev.h
+   :internal:
+
+Format handling
+===============
+
+.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/arm/display/komeda/komeda_format_caps.h
+   :internal:
+.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/arm/display/komeda/komeda_framebuffer.h
+   :internal:
+
+Attach komeda_dev to DRM-KMS
+============================
+
+Komeda abstracts resources by pipeline/component, but DRM-KMS uses
+crtc/plane/connector. One KMS-obj cannot represent only one single component,
+since the requirements of a single KMS object cannot simply be achieved by a
+single component, usually that needs multiple components to fit the requirement.
+Like set mode, gamma, ctm for KMS all target on CRTC-obj, but komeda needs
+compiz, improc and timing_ctrlr to work together to fit these requirements.
+And a KMS-Plane may require multiple komeda resources: layer/scaler/compiz.
+
+So, one KMS-Obj represents a sub-pipeline of komeda resources.
+
+-   Plane: `Layer(input) pipeline`_
+-   Wb_connector: `Writeback(output) pipeline`_
+-   Crtc: `Display output pipeline`_
+
+So, for komeda, we treat KMS crtc/plane/connector as users of pipeline and
+component, and at any one time a pipeline/component only can be used by one
+user. And pipeline/component will be treated as private object of DRM-KMS; the
+state will be managed by drm_atomic_state as well.
+
+How to map plane to Layer(input) pipeline
+-----------------------------------------
+
+Komeda has multiple Layer input pipelines, see:
+-   `Single pipeline data flow`_
+-   `Dual pipeline with Slave enabled`_
+
+The easiest way is binding a plane to a fixed Layer pipeline, but consider the
+komeda capabilities:
+
+-   Layer Split, See `Layer(input) pipeline`_
+
+    Layer_Split is quite complicated feature, which splits a big image into two
+    parts and handles it by two layers and two scalers individually. But it
+    imports an edge problem or effect in the middle of the image after the split.
+    To avoid such a problem, it needs a complicated Split calculation and some
+    special configurations to the layer and scaler. We'd better hide such HW
+    related complexity to user mode.
+
+-   Slave pipeline, See `Dual pipeline with Slave enabled`_
+
+    Since the compiz component doesn't output alpha value, the slave pipeline
+    only can be used for bottom layers composition. The komeda driver wants to
+    hide this limitation to the user. The way to do this is to pick a suitable
+    Layer according to plane_state->zpos.
+
+So for komeda, the KMS-plane doesn't represent a fixed komeda layer pipeline,
+but multiple Layers with same capabilities. Komeda will select one or more
+Layers to fit the requirement of one KMS-plane.
+
+Make component/pipeline to be drm_private_obj
+---------------------------------------------
+
+Add :c:type:`drm_private_obj` to :c:type:`komeda_component`, :c:type:`komeda_pipeline`
+
+.. code-block:: c
+
+    struct komeda_component {
+        struct drm_private_obj obj;
+        ...
+    }
+
+    struct komeda_pipeline {
+        struct drm_private_obj obj;
+        ...
+    }
+
+Tracking component_state/pipeline_state by drm_atomic_state
+-----------------------------------------------------------
+
+Add :c:type:`drm_private_state` and user to :c:type:`komeda_component_state`,
+:c:type:`komeda_pipeline_state`
+
+.. code-block:: c
+
+    struct komeda_component_state {
+        struct drm_private_state obj;
+        void *binding_user;
+        ...
+    }
+
+    struct komeda_pipeline_state {
+        struct drm_private_state obj;
+        struct drm_crtc *crtc;
+        ...
+    }
+
+komeda component validation
+---------------------------
+
+Komeda has multiple types of components, but the process of validation are
+similar, usually including the following steps:
+
+.. code-block:: c
+
+    int komeda_xxxx_validate(struct komeda_component_xxx xxx_comp,
+                struct komeda_component_output *input_dflow,
+                struct drm_plane/crtc/connector *user,
+                struct drm_plane/crtc/connector_state, *user_state)
+    {
+         setup 1: check if component is needed, like the scaler is optional depending
+                  on the user_state; if unneeded, just return, and the caller will
+                  put the data flow into next stage.
+         Setup 2: check user_state with component features and capabilities to see
+                  if requirements can be met; if not, return fail.
+         Setup 3: get component_state from drm_atomic_state, and try set to set
+                  user to component; fail if component has been assigned to another
+                  user already.
+         Setup 3: configure the component_state, like set its input component,
+                  convert user_state to component specific state.
+         Setup 4: adjust the input_dflow and prepare it for the next stage.
+    }
+
+komeda_kms Abstraction
+----------------------
+
+.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/arm/display/komeda/komeda_kms.h
+   :internal:
+
+komde_kms Functions
+-------------------
+.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/arm/display/komeda/komeda_crtc.c
+   :internal:
+.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/arm/display/komeda/komeda_plane.c
+   :internal:
+
+Build komeda to be a Linux module driver
+========================================
+
+Now we have two level devices:
+
+-   komeda_dev: describes the real display hardware.
+-   komeda_kms_dev: attachs or connects komeda_dev to DRM-KMS.
+
+All komeda operations are supplied or operated by komeda_dev or komeda_kms_dev,
+the module driver is only a simple wrapper to pass the Linux command
+(probe/remove/pm) into komeda_dev or komeda_kms_dev.
diff --git a/Documentation/gpu/meson.rst b/Documentation/gpu/meson.rst
index 479f6f51a13b..b9e2f9aa3bd8 100644
--- a/Documentation/gpu/meson.rst
+++ b/Documentation/gpu/meson.rst
@@ -42,12 +42,6 @@ Video Encoder
 .. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/meson/meson_venc.c
    :doc: Video Encoder
 
-Video Canvas Management
-=======================
-
-.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/meson/meson_canvas.c
-   :doc: Canvas
-
 Video Clocks
 ============
 
diff --git a/Documentation/gpu/tinydrm.rst b/Documentation/gpu/tinydrm.rst
index a913644bfc19..33a41544f659 100644
--- a/Documentation/gpu/tinydrm.rst
+++ b/Documentation/gpu/tinydrm.rst
@@ -1,34 +1,22 @@
-==========================
-drm/tinydrm Driver library
-==========================
+============================
+drm/tinydrm Tiny DRM drivers
+============================
 
-.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/tinydrm/core/tinydrm-core.c
-   :doc: overview
-
-Core functionality
-==================
+tinydrm is a collection of DRM drivers that are so small they can fit in a
+single source file.
 
-.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/tinydrm/core/tinydrm-core.c
-   :doc: core
+Helpers
+=======
 
-.. kernel-doc:: include/drm/tinydrm/tinydrm.h
+.. kernel-doc:: include/drm/tinydrm/tinydrm-helpers.h
    :internal:
 
-.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/tinydrm/core/tinydrm-core.c
+.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/tinydrm/core/tinydrm-helpers.c
    :export:
 
 .. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/tinydrm/core/tinydrm-pipe.c
    :export:
 
-Additional helpers
-==================
-
-.. kernel-doc:: include/drm/tinydrm/tinydrm-helpers.h
-   :internal:
-
-.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/tinydrm/core/tinydrm-helpers.c
-   :export:
-
 MIPI DBI Compatible Controllers
 ===============================
 
diff --git a/Documentation/gpu/todo.rst b/Documentation/gpu/todo.rst
index 14191b64446d..1528ad2d598b 100644
--- a/Documentation/gpu/todo.rst
+++ b/Documentation/gpu/todo.rst
@@ -82,30 +82,6 @@ events for atomic commits correctly. But fixing these bugs is good anyway.
 
 Contact: Daniel Vetter, respective driver maintainers
 
-Better manual-upload support for atomic
----------------------------------------
-
-This would be especially useful for tinydrm:
-
-- Add a struct drm_rect dirty_clip to drm_crtc_state. When duplicating the
-  crtc state, clear that to the max values, x/y = 0 and w/h = MAX_INT, in
-  __drm_atomic_helper_crtc_duplicate_state().
-
-- Move tinydrm_merge_clips into drm_framebuffer.c, dropping the tinydrm\_
-  prefix ofc and using drm_fb\_. drm_framebuffer.c makes sense since this
-  is a function useful to implement the fb->dirty function.
-
-- Create a new drm_fb_dirty function which does essentially what e.g.
-  mipi_dbi_fb_dirty does. You can use e.g. drm_atomic_helper_update_plane as the
-  template. But instead of doing a simple full-screen plane update, this new
-  helper also sets crtc_state->dirty_clip to the right coordinates. And of
-  course it needs to check whether the fb is actually active (and maybe where),
-  so there's some book-keeping involved. There's also some good fun involved in
-  scaling things appropriately. For that case we might simply give up and
-  declare the entire area covered by the plane as dirty.
-
-Contact: Noralf Trønnes, Daniel Vetter
-
 Fallout from atomic KMS
 -----------------------
 
@@ -209,12 +185,42 @@ Would be great to refactor this all into a set of small common helpers.
 
 Contact: Daniel Vetter
 
-Put a reservation_object into drm_gem_object
+Generic fbdev defio support
+---------------------------
+
+The defio support code in the fbdev core has some very specific requirements,
+which means drivers need to have a special framebuffer for fbdev. Which prevents
+us from using the generic fbdev emulation code everywhere. The main issue is
+that it uses some fields in struct page itself, which breaks shmem gem objects
+(and other things).
+
+Possible solution would be to write our own defio mmap code in the drm fbdev
+emulation. It would need to fully wrap the existing mmap ops, forwarding
+everything after it has done the write-protect/mkwrite trickery:
+
+- In the drm_fbdev_fb_mmap helper, if we need defio, change the
+  default page prots to write-protected with something like this::
+
+      vma->vm_page_prot = pgprot_wrprotect(vma->vm_page_prot);
+
+- Set the mkwrite and fsync callbacks with similar implementions to the core
+  fbdev defio stuff. These should all work on plain ptes, they don't actually
+  require a struct page.  uff. These should all work on plain ptes, they don't
+  actually require a struct page.
+
+- Track the dirty pages in a separate structure (bitfield with one bit per page
+  should work) to avoid clobbering struct page.
+
+Might be good to also have some igt testcases for this.
+
+Contact: Daniel Vetter, Noralf Tronnes
+
+Remove the ->gem_prime_res_obj callback
 --------------------------------------------
 
-This would remove the need for the ->gem_prime_res_obj callback. It would also
-allow us to implement generic helpers for waiting for a bo, allowing for quite a
-bit of refactoring in the various wait ioctl implementations.
+The ->gem_prime_res_obj callback can be removed from drivers by using the
+reservation_object in the drm_gem_object. It may also be possible to use the
+generic drm_gem_reservation_object_wait helper for waiting for a bo.
 
 Contact: Daniel Vetter
 
@@ -256,6 +262,44 @@ As a reference, take a look at the conversions already completed in drm core.
 
 Contact: Sean Paul, respective driver maintainers
 
+Rename CMA helpers to DMA helpers
+---------------------------------
+
+CMA (standing for contiguous memory allocator) is really a bit an accident of
+what these were used for first, a much better name would be DMA helpers. In the
+text these should even be called coherent DMA memory helpers (so maybe CDM, but
+no one knows what that means) since underneath they just use dma_alloc_coherent.
+
+Contact: Laurent Pinchart, Daniel Vetter
+
+Convert direct mode.vrefresh accesses to use drm_mode_vrefresh()
+----------------------------------------------------------------
+
+drm_display_mode.vrefresh isn't guaranteed to be populated. As such, using it
+is risky and has been known to cause div-by-zero bugs. Fortunately, drm core
+has helper which will use mode.vrefresh if it's !0 and will calculate it from
+the timings when it's 0.
+
+Use simple search/replace, or (more fun) cocci to replace instances of direct
+vrefresh access with a call to the helper. Check out
+https://lists.freedesktop.org/archives/dri-devel/2019-January/205186.html for
+inspiration.
+
+Once all instances of vrefresh have been converted, remove vrefresh from
+drm_display_mode to avoid future use.
+
+Contact: Sean Paul
+
+Remove drm_display_mode.hsync
+-----------------------------
+
+We have drm_mode_hsync() to calculate this from hsync_start/end, since drivers
+shouldn't/don't use this, remove this member to avoid any temptations to use it
+in the future. If there is any debug code using drm_display_mode.hsync, convert
+it to use drm_mode_hsync() instead.
+
+Contact: Sean Paul
+
 Core refactorings
 =================
 
@@ -354,13 +398,6 @@ KMS cleanups
 
 Some of these date from the very introduction of KMS in 2008 ...
 
-- drm_mode_config.crtc_idr is misnamed, since it contains all KMS object. Should
-  be renamed to drm_mode_config.object_idr.
-
-- drm_display_mode doesn't need to be derived from drm_mode_object. That's
-  leftovers from older (never merged into upstream) KMS designs where modes
-  where set using their ID, including support to add/remove modes.
-
 - Make ->funcs and ->helper_private vtables optional. There's a bunch of empty
   function tables in drivers, but before we can remove them we need to make sure
   that all the users in helpers and drivers do correctly check for a NULL
@@ -432,21 +469,6 @@ those drivers as simple as possible, so lots of room for refactoring:
   one of the ideas for having a shared dsi/dbi helper, abstracting away the
   transport details more.
 
-- tinydrm_gem_cma_prime_import_sg_table should probably go into the cma
-  helpers, as a _vmapped variant (since not every driver needs the vmap).
-  And tinydrm_gem_cma_free_object could the be merged into
-  drm_gem_cma_free_object().
-
-- tinydrm_fb_create we could move into drm_simple_pipe, only need to add
-  the fb_create hook to drm_simple_pipe_funcs, which would again simplify a
-  bunch of things (since it gives you a one-stop vfunc for simple drivers).
-
-- Quick aside: The unregister devm stuff is kinda getting the lifetimes of
-  a drm_device wrong. Doesn't matter, since everyone else gets it wrong
-  too :-)
-
-- also rework the drm_framebuffer_funcs->dirty hook wire-up, see above.
-
 Contact: Noralf Trønnes, Daniel Vetter
 
 AMD DC Display Driver
diff --git a/Documentation/gpu/vkms.rst b/Documentation/gpu/vkms.rst
index 7dfc349a4508..61586fc861bb 100644
--- a/Documentation/gpu/vkms.rst
+++ b/Documentation/gpu/vkms.rst
@@ -23,17 +23,6 @@ CRC API Improvements
 - Add igt test to check extreme alpha values i.e. fully opaque and fully
   transparent (intermediate values are affected by hw-specific rounding modes).
 
-Vblank issues
--------------
-
-Some IGT test cases are failing. Need to analyze why and fix the issues:
-
-- plain-flip-fb-recreate
-- plain-flip-ts-check
-- flip-vs-blocking-wf-vblank
-- plain-flip-fb-recreate-interruptible
-- flip-vs-wf_vblank-interruptible
-
 Runtime Configuration
 ---------------------
 
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ab8500 b/Documentation/hwmon/ab8500.rst
index cf169c8ef4e3..33f93a9cec04 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/ab8500
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ab8500.rst
@@ -2,19 +2,23 @@ Kernel driver ab8500
 ====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * ST-Ericsson AB8500
+
     Prefix: 'ab8500'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: http://www.stericsson.com/developers/documentation.jsp
 
 Authors:
-        Martin Persson <martin.persson@stericsson.com>
-        Hongbo Zhang <hongbo.zhang@linaro.org>
+	- Martin Persson <martin.persson@stericsson.com>
+	- Hongbo Zhang <hongbo.zhang@linaro.org>
 
 Description
 -----------
 
-See also Documentation/hwmon/abx500. This is the ST-Ericsson AB8500 specific
+See also Documentation/hwmon/abx500.rst. This is the ST-Ericsson AB8500 specific
 driver.
 
 Currently only the AB8500 internal sensor and one external sensor for battery
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru b/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru
deleted file mode 100644
index 44013d23b3f0..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,92 +0,0 @@
-Kernel driver abituguru
-=======================
-
-Supported chips:
-  * Abit uGuru revision 1 & 2 (Hardware Monitor part only)
-    Prefix: 'abituguru'
-    Addresses scanned: ISA 0x0E0
-    Datasheet: Not available, this driver is based on reverse engineering.
-	A "Datasheet" has been written based on the reverse engineering it
-	should be available in the same dir as this file under the name
-	abituguru-datasheet.
-    Note:
-	The uGuru is a microcontroller with onboard firmware which programs
-	it to behave as a hwmon IC. There are many different revisions of the
-	firmware and thus effectivly many different revisions of the uGuru.
-	Below is an incomplete list with which revisions are used for which
-	Motherboards:
-	uGuru 1.00    ~ 1.24    (AI7, KV8-MAX3, AN7) (1)
-	uGuru 2.0.0.0 ~ 2.0.4.2 (KV8-PRO)
-	uGuru 2.1.0.0 ~ 2.1.2.8 (AS8, AV8, AA8, AG8, AA8XE, AX8)
-	uGuru 2.2.0.0 ~ 2.2.0.6 (AA8 Fatal1ty)
-	uGuru 2.3.0.0 ~ 2.3.0.9 (AN8)
-	uGuru 3.0.0.0 ~ 3.0.x.x (AW8, AL8, AT8, NI8 SLI, AT8 32X, AN8 32X,
-				 AW9D-MAX) (2)
-	1) For revisions 2 and 3 uGuru's the driver can autodetect the
-	   sensortype (Volt or Temp) for bank1 sensors, for revision 1 uGuru's
-	   this does not always work. For these uGuru's the autodetection can
-	   be overridden with the bank1_types module param. For all 3 known
-	   revison 1 motherboards the correct use of this param is:
-	   bank1_types=1,1,0,0,0,0,0,2,0,0,0,0,2,0,0,1
-	   You may also need to specify the fan_sensors option for these boards
-	   fan_sensors=5
-	2) There is a separate abituguru3 driver for these motherboards,
-	   the abituguru (without the 3 !) driver will not work on these
-	   motherboards (and visa versa)!
-
-Authors:
-	Hans de Goede <j.w.r.degoede@hhs.nl>,
-	(Initial reverse engineering done by Olle Sandberg
-	 <ollebull@gmail.com>)
-
-
-Module Parameters
------------------
-
-* force: bool		Force detection. Note this parameter only causes the
-			detection to be skipped, and thus the insmod to
-			succeed. If the uGuru can't be read the actual hwmon
-			driver will not load and thus no hwmon device will get
-			registered.
-* bank1_types: int[]	Bank1 sensortype autodetection override:
-			  -1 autodetect (default)
-			   0 volt sensor
-			   1 temp sensor
-			   2 not connected
-* fan_sensors: int	Tell the driver how many fan speed sensors there are
-			on your motherboard. Default: 0 (autodetect).
-* pwms: int		Tell the driver how many fan speed controls (fan
-			pwms) your motherboard has. Default: 0 (autodetect).
-* verbose: int		How verbose should the driver be? (0-3):
-			   0 normal output
-			   1 + verbose error reporting
-			   2 + sensors type probing info (default)
-			   3 + retryable error reporting
-			Default: 2 (the driver is still in the testing phase)
-
-Notice if you need any of the first three options above please insmod the
-driver with verbose set to 3 and mail me <j.w.r.degoede@hhs.nl> the output of:
-dmesg | grep abituguru
-
-
-Description
------------
-
-This driver supports the hardware monitoring features of the first and
-second revision of the Abit uGuru chip found on Abit uGuru featuring
-motherboards (most modern Abit motherboards).
-
-The first and second revision of the uGuru chip in reality is a Winbond
-W83L950D in disguise (despite Abit claiming it is "a new microprocessor
-designed by the ABIT Engineers"). Unfortunately this doesn't help since the
-W83L950D is a generic microcontroller with a custom Abit application running
-on it.
-
-Despite Abit not releasing any information regarding the uGuru, Olle
-Sandberg <ollebull@gmail.com> has managed to reverse engineer the sensor part
-of the uGuru. Without his work this driver would not have been possible.
-
-Known Issues
-------------
-
-The voltage and frequency control parts of the Abit uGuru are not supported.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru-datasheet b/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru-datasheet.rst
index 86c0b1251c81..6d5253e2223b 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru-datasheet
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru-datasheet.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+===============
 uGuru datasheet
 ===============
 
@@ -168,34 +169,35 @@ This bank contains 0 sensors, iow the sensor address is ignored (but must be
 written) just use 0. Bank 0x20 contains 3 bytes:
 
 Byte 0:
-This byte holds the alarm flags for sensor 0-7 of Sensor Bank1, with bit 0
-corresponding to sensor 0, 1 to 1, etc.
+  This byte holds the alarm flags for sensor 0-7 of Sensor Bank1, with bit 0
+  corresponding to sensor 0, 1 to 1, etc.
 
 Byte 1:
-This byte holds the alarm flags for sensor 8-15 of Sensor Bank1, with bit 0
-corresponding to sensor 8, 1 to 9, etc.
+  This byte holds the alarm flags for sensor 8-15 of Sensor Bank1, with bit 0
+  corresponding to sensor 8, 1 to 9, etc.
 
 Byte 2:
-This byte holds the alarm flags for sensor 0-5 of Sensor Bank2, with bit 0
-corresponding to sensor 0, 1 to 1, etc.
+  This byte holds the alarm flags for sensor 0-5 of Sensor Bank2, with bit 0
+  corresponding to sensor 0, 1 to 1, etc.
 
 
 Bank 0x21 Sensor Bank1 Values / Readings (R)
 --------------------------------------------
 This bank contains 16 sensors, for each sensor it contains 1 byte.
 So far the following sensors are known to be available on all motherboards:
-Sensor  0 CPU temp
-Sensor  1 SYS temp
-Sensor  3 CPU core volt
-Sensor  4 DDR volt
-Sensor 10 DDR Vtt volt
-Sensor 15 PWM temp
+
+- Sensor  0 CPU temp
+- Sensor  1 SYS temp
+- Sensor  3 CPU core volt
+- Sensor  4 DDR volt
+- Sensor 10 DDR Vtt volt
+- Sensor 15 PWM temp
 
 Byte 0:
-This byte holds the reading from the sensor. Sensors in Bank1 can be both
-volt and temp sensors, this is motherboard specific. The uGuru however does
-seem to know (be programmed with) what kindoff sensor is attached see Sensor
-Bank1 Settings description.
+  This byte holds the reading from the sensor. Sensors in Bank1 can be both
+  volt and temp sensors, this is motherboard specific. The uGuru however does
+  seem to know (be programmed with) what kindoff sensor is attached see Sensor
+  Bank1 Settings description.
 
 Volt sensors use a linear scale, a reading 0 corresponds with 0 volt and a
 reading of 255 with 3494 mV. The sensors for higher voltages however are
@@ -207,96 +209,118 @@ Temp sensors also use a linear scale, a reading of 0 corresponds with 0 degree
 Celsius and a reading of 255 with a reading of 255 degrees Celsius.
 
 
-Bank 0x22 Sensor Bank1 Settings (R)
-Bank 0x23 Sensor Bank1 Settings (W)
------------------------------------
+Bank 0x22 Sensor Bank1 Settings (R) and Bank 0x23 Sensor Bank1 Settings (W)
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
-This bank contains 16 sensors, for each sensor it contains 3 bytes. Each
+Those banks contain 16 sensors, for each sensor it contains 3 bytes. Each
 set of 3 bytes contains the settings for the sensor with the same sensor
 address in Bank 0x21 .
 
 Byte 0:
-Alarm behaviour for the selected sensor. A 1 enables the described behaviour.
-Bit 0: Give an alarm if measured temp is over the warning threshold	(RW) *
-Bit 1: Give an alarm if measured volt is over the max threshold		(RW) **
-Bit 2: Give an alarm if measured volt is under the min threshold	(RW) **
-Bit 3: Beep if alarm							(RW)
-Bit 4: 1 if alarm cause measured temp is over the warning threshold	(R)
-Bit 5: 1 if alarm cause measured volt is over the max threshold		(R)
-Bit 6: 1 if alarm cause measured volt is under the min threshold	(R)
-Bit 7: Volt sensor: Shutdown if alarm persist for more than 4 seconds	(RW)
-       Temp sensor: Shutdown if temp is over the shutdown threshold	(RW)
-
-*  This bit is only honored/used by the uGuru if a temp sensor is connected
-** This bit is only honored/used by the uGuru if a volt sensor is connected
-Note with some trickery this can be used to find out what kinda sensor is
-detected see the Linux kernel driver for an example with many comments on
-how todo this.
+  Alarm behaviour for the selected sensor. A 1 enables the described
+  behaviour.
+
+Bit 0:
+  Give an alarm if measured temp is over the warning threshold		(RW) [1]_
+
+Bit 1:
+  Give an alarm if measured volt is over the max threshold		(RW) [2]_
+
+Bit 2:
+  Give an alarm if measured volt is under the min threshold		(RW) [2]_
+
+Bit 3:
+  Beep if alarm								(RW)
+
+Bit 4:
+  1 if alarm cause measured temp is over the warning threshold		(R)
+
+Bit 5:
+  1 if alarm cause measured volt is over the max threshold		(R)
+
+Bit 6:
+  1 if alarm cause measured volt is under the min threshold		(R)
+
+Bit 7:
+  - Volt sensor: Shutdown if alarm persist for more than 4 seconds	(RW)
+  - Temp sensor: Shutdown if temp is over the shutdown threshold	(RW)
+
+.. [1] This bit is only honored/used by the uGuru if a temp sensor is connected
+
+.. [2] This bit is only honored/used by the uGuru if a volt sensor is connected
+       Note with some trickery this can be used to find out what kinda sensor
+       is detected see the Linux kernel driver for an example with many
+       comments on how todo this.
 
 Byte 1:
-Temp sensor: warning threshold  (scale as bank 0x21)
-Volt sensor: min threshold      (scale as bank 0x21)
+  - Temp sensor: warning threshold  (scale as bank 0x21)
+  - Volt sensor: min threshold      (scale as bank 0x21)
 
 Byte 2:
-Temp sensor: shutdown threshold (scale as bank 0x21)
-Volt sensor: max threshold      (scale as bank 0x21)
+  - Temp sensor: shutdown threshold (scale as bank 0x21)
+  - Volt sensor: max threshold      (scale as bank 0x21)
 
 
-Bank 0x24 PWM outputs for FAN's (R)
-Bank 0x25 PWM outputs for FAN's (W)
------------------------------------
+Bank 0x24 PWM outputs for FAN's (R) and Bank 0x25 PWM outputs for FAN's (W)
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
-This bank contains 3 "sensors", for each sensor it contains 5 bytes.
-Sensor 0 usually controls the CPU fan
-Sensor 1 usually controls the NB (or chipset for single chip) fan
-Sensor 2 usually controls the System fan
+Those banks contain 3 "sensors", for each sensor it contains 5 bytes.
+  - Sensor 0 usually controls the CPU fan
+  - Sensor 1 usually controls the NB (or chipset for single chip) fan
+  - Sensor 2 usually controls the System fan
 
 Byte 0:
-Flag 0x80 to enable control, Fan runs at 100% when disabled.
-low nibble (temp)sensor address at bank 0x21 used for control.
+  Flag 0x80 to enable control, Fan runs at 100% when disabled.
+  low nibble (temp)sensor address at bank 0x21 used for control.
 
 Byte 1:
-0-255 = 0-12v (linear), specify voltage at which fan will rotate when under
-low threshold temp (specified in byte 3)
+  0-255 = 0-12v (linear), specify voltage at which fan will rotate when under
+  low threshold temp (specified in byte 3)
 
 Byte 2:
-0-255 = 0-12v (linear), specify voltage at which fan will rotate when above
-high threshold temp (specified in byte 4)
+  0-255 = 0-12v (linear), specify voltage at which fan will rotate when above
+  high threshold temp (specified in byte 4)
 
 Byte 3:
-Low threshold temp  (scale as bank 0x21)
+  Low threshold temp  (scale as bank 0x21)
 
 byte 4:
-High threshold temp (scale as bank 0x21)
+  High threshold temp (scale as bank 0x21)
 
 
 Bank 0x26 Sensors Bank2 Values / Readings (R)
 ---------------------------------------------
 
 This bank contains 6 sensors (AFAIK), for each sensor it contains 1 byte.
+
 So far the following sensors are known to be available on all motherboards:
-Sensor 0: CPU fan speed
-Sensor 1: NB (or chipset for single chip) fan speed
-Sensor 2: SYS fan speed
+  - Sensor 0: CPU fan speed
+  - Sensor 1: NB (or chipset for single chip) fan speed
+  - Sensor 2: SYS fan speed
 
 Byte 0:
-This byte holds the reading from the sensor. 0-255 = 0-15300 (linear)
+  This byte holds the reading from the sensor. 0-255 = 0-15300 (linear)
 
 
-Bank 0x27 Sensors Bank2 Settings (R)
-Bank 0x28 Sensors Bank2 Settings (W)
-------------------------------------
+Bank 0x27 Sensors Bank2 Settings (R) and Bank 0x28 Sensors Bank2 Settings (W)
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
-This bank contains 6 sensors (AFAIK), for each sensor it contains 2 bytes.
+Those banks contain 6 sensors (AFAIK), for each sensor it contains 2 bytes.
 
 Byte 0:
-Alarm behaviour for the selected sensor. A 1 enables the described behaviour.
-Bit 0: Give an alarm if measured rpm is under the min threshold	(RW)
-Bit 3: Beep if alarm						(RW)
-Bit 7: Shutdown if alarm persist for more than 4 seconds	(RW)
+  Alarm behaviour for the selected sensor. A 1 enables the described behaviour.
+
+Bit 0:
+  Give an alarm if measured rpm is under the min threshold	(RW)
+
+Bit 3:
+  Beep if alarm							(RW)
+
+Bit 7:
+  Shutdown if alarm persist for more than 4 seconds		(RW)
 
 Byte 1:
-min threshold (scale as bank 0x26)
+  min threshold (scale as bank 0x26)
 
 
 Warning for the adventurous
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru.rst b/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d8243c827de9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,113 @@
+Kernel driver abituguru
+=======================
+
+Supported chips:
+
+  * Abit uGuru revision 1 & 2 (Hardware Monitor part only)
+
+    Prefix: 'abituguru'
+
+    Addresses scanned: ISA 0x0E0
+
+    Datasheet: Not available, this driver is based on reverse engineering.
+    A "Datasheet" has been written based on the reverse engineering it
+    should be available in the same dir as this file under the name
+    abituguru-datasheet.
+
+    Note:
+	The uGuru is a microcontroller with onboard firmware which programs
+	it to behave as a hwmon IC. There are many different revisions of the
+	firmware and thus effectivly many different revisions of the uGuru.
+	Below is an incomplete list with which revisions are used for which
+	Motherboards:
+
+	- uGuru 1.00    ~ 1.24    (AI7, KV8-MAX3, AN7) [1]_
+	- uGuru 2.0.0.0 ~ 2.0.4.2 (KV8-PRO)
+	- uGuru 2.1.0.0 ~ 2.1.2.8 (AS8, AV8, AA8, AG8, AA8XE, AX8)
+	- uGuru 2.2.0.0 ~ 2.2.0.6 (AA8 Fatal1ty)
+	- uGuru 2.3.0.0 ~ 2.3.0.9 (AN8)
+	- uGuru 3.0.0.0 ~ 3.0.x.x (AW8, AL8, AT8, NI8 SLI, AT8 32X, AN8 32X,
+	  AW9D-MAX) [2]_
+
+.. [1]  For revisions 2 and 3 uGuru's the driver can autodetect the
+	sensortype (Volt or Temp) for bank1 sensors, for revision 1 uGuru's
+	this does not always work. For these uGuru's the autodetection can
+	be overridden with the bank1_types module param. For all 3 known
+	revison 1 motherboards the correct use of this param is:
+	bank1_types=1,1,0,0,0,0,0,2,0,0,0,0,2,0,0,1
+	You may also need to specify the fan_sensors option for these boards
+	fan_sensors=5
+
+.. [2]  There is a separate abituguru3 driver for these motherboards,
+	the abituguru (without the 3 !) driver will not work on these
+	motherboards (and visa versa)!
+
+Authors:
+	- Hans de Goede <j.w.r.degoede@hhs.nl>,
+	- (Initial reverse engineering done by Olle Sandberg
+	  <ollebull@gmail.com>)
+
+
+Module Parameters
+-----------------
+
+* force: bool
+			Force detection. Note this parameter only causes the
+			detection to be skipped, and thus the insmod to
+			succeed. If the uGuru can't be read the actual hwmon
+			driver will not load and thus no hwmon device will get
+			registered.
+* bank1_types: int[]
+			Bank1 sensortype autodetection override:
+
+			  * -1 autodetect (default)
+			  *  0 volt sensor
+			  *  1 temp sensor
+			  *  2 not connected
+* fan_sensors: int
+			Tell the driver how many fan speed sensors there are
+			on your motherboard. Default: 0 (autodetect).
+* pwms: int
+			Tell the driver how many fan speed controls (fan
+			pwms) your motherboard has. Default: 0 (autodetect).
+* verbose: int
+			How verbose should the driver be? (0-3):
+
+			   * 0 normal output
+			   * 1 + verbose error reporting
+			   * 2 + sensors type probing info (default)
+			   * 3 + retryable error reporting
+
+			Default: 2 (the driver is still in the testing phase)
+
+Notice: if you need any of the first three options above please insmod the
+driver with verbose set to 3 and mail me <j.w.r.degoede@hhs.nl> the output of:
+dmesg | grep abituguru
+
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+This driver supports the hardware monitoring features of the first and
+second revision of the Abit uGuru chip found on Abit uGuru featuring
+motherboards (most modern Abit motherboards).
+
+The first and second revision of the uGuru chip in reality is a Winbond
+W83L950D in disguise (despite Abit claiming it is "a new microprocessor
+designed by the ABIT Engineers"). Unfortunately this doesn't help since the
+W83L950D is a generic microcontroller with a custom Abit application running
+on it.
+
+Despite Abit not releasing any information regarding the uGuru, Olle
+Sandberg <ollebull@gmail.com> has managed to reverse engineer the sensor part
+of the uGuru. Without his work this driver would not have been possible.
+
+Known Issues
+------------
+
+The voltage and frequency control parts of the Abit uGuru are not supported.
+
+.. toctree::
+   :maxdepth: 1
+
+   abituguru-datasheet.rst
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru3 b/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru3.rst
index a6ccfe4bb6aa..514f11f41e8b 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru3
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru3.rst
@@ -3,41 +3,51 @@ Kernel driver abituguru3
 
 Supported chips:
   * Abit uGuru revision 3 (Hardware Monitor part, reading only)
+
     Prefix: 'abituguru3'
+
     Addresses scanned: ISA 0x0E0
+
     Datasheet: Not available, this driver is based on reverse engineering.
+
     Note:
 	The uGuru is a microcontroller with onboard firmware which programs
 	it to behave as a hwmon IC. There are many different revisions of the
 	firmware and thus effectivly many different revisions of the uGuru.
 	Below is an incomplete list with which revisions are used for which
 	Motherboards:
-	uGuru 1.00    ~ 1.24    (AI7, KV8-MAX3, AN7)
-	uGuru 2.0.0.0 ~ 2.0.4.2 (KV8-PRO)
-	uGuru 2.1.0.0 ~ 2.1.2.8 (AS8, AV8, AA8, AG8, AA8XE, AX8)
-	uGuru 2.3.0.0 ~ 2.3.0.9 (AN8)
-	uGuru 3.0.0.0 ~ 3.0.x.x (AW8, AL8, AT8, NI8 SLI, AT8 32X, AN8 32X,
-				 AW9D-MAX)
+
+	- uGuru 1.00    ~ 1.24    (AI7, KV8-MAX3, AN7)
+	- uGuru 2.0.0.0 ~ 2.0.4.2 (KV8-PRO)
+	- uGuru 2.1.0.0 ~ 2.1.2.8 (AS8, AV8, AA8, AG8, AA8XE, AX8)
+	- uGuru 2.3.0.0 ~ 2.3.0.9 (AN8)
+	- uGuru 3.0.0.0 ~ 3.0.x.x (AW8, AL8, AT8, NI8 SLI, AT8 32X, AN8 32X,
+	  AW9D-MAX)
+
 	The abituguru3 driver is only for revison 3.0.x.x motherboards,
 	this driver will not work on older motherboards. For older
 	motherboards use the abituguru (without the 3 !) driver.
 
 Authors:
-	Hans de Goede <j.w.r.degoede@hhs.nl>,
-	(Initial reverse engineering done by Louis Kruger)
+	- Hans de Goede <j.w.r.degoede@hhs.nl>,
+	- (Initial reverse engineering done by Louis Kruger)
 
 
 Module Parameters
 -----------------
 
-* force: bool		Force detection. Note this parameter only causes the
+* force: bool
+			Force detection. Note this parameter only causes the
 			detection to be skipped, and thus the insmod to
 			succeed. If the uGuru can't be read the actual hwmon
 			driver will not load and thus no hwmon device will get
 			registered.
-* verbose: bool		Should the driver be verbose?
-			0/off/false  normal output
-			1/on/true    + verbose error reporting (default)
+* verbose: bool
+			Should the driver be verbose?
+
+			* 0/off/false  normal output
+			* 1/on/true    + verbose error reporting (default)
+
 			Default: 1 (the driver is still in the testing phase)
 
 Description
@@ -62,4 +72,4 @@ neither is writing any of the sensor settings and writing / reading the
 fanspeed control registers (FanEQ)
 
 If you encounter any problems please mail me <j.w.r.degoede@hhs.nl> and
-include the output of: "dmesg | grep abituguru"
+include the output of: `dmesg | grep abituguru`
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/abx500 b/Documentation/hwmon/abx500.rst
index 319a058cec7c..3d88b2ce0f00 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/abx500
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/abx500.rst
@@ -2,14 +2,18 @@ Kernel driver abx500
 ====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * ST-Ericsson ABx500 series
+
     Prefix: 'abx500'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: http://www.stericsson.com/developers/documentation.jsp
 
 Authors:
-        Martin Persson <martin.persson@stericsson.com>
-        Hongbo Zhang <hongbo.zhang@linaro.org>
+	Martin Persson <martin.persson@stericsson.com>
+	Hongbo Zhang <hongbo.zhang@linaro.org>
 
 Description
 -----------
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/acpi_power_meter b/Documentation/hwmon/acpi_power_meter.rst
index c80399a00c50..4a0941ade0ca 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/acpi_power_meter
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/acpi_power_meter.rst
@@ -4,8 +4,11 @@ Kernel driver power_meter
 This driver talks to ACPI 4.0 power meters.
 
 Supported systems:
+
   * Any recent system with ACPI 4.0.
+
     Prefix: 'power_meter'
+
     Datasheet: http://acpi.info/, section 10.4.
 
 Author: Darrick J. Wong
@@ -18,26 +21,26 @@ the ACPI 4.0 spec (Chapter 10.4).  These devices have a simple set of
 features--a power meter that returns average power use over a configurable
 interval, an optional capping mechanism, and a couple of trip points.  The
 sysfs interface conforms with the specification outlined in the "Power" section
-of Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface.
+of Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface.rst.
 
 Special Features
 ----------------
 
-The power[1-*]_is_battery knob indicates if the power supply is a battery.
-Both power[1-*]_average_{min,max} must be set before the trip points will work.
+The `power[1-*]_is_battery` knob indicates if the power supply is a battery.
+Both `power[1-*]_average_{min,max}` must be set before the trip points will work.
 When both of them are set, an ACPI event will be broadcast on the ACPI netlink
 socket and a poll notification will be sent to the appropriate
-power[1-*]_average sysfs file.
+`power[1-*]_average` sysfs file.
 
-The power[1-*]_{model_number, serial_number, oem_info} fields display arbitrary
-strings that ACPI provides with the meter.  The measures/ directory contains
-symlinks to the devices that this meter measures.
+The `power[1-*]_{model_number, serial_number, oem_info}` fields display
+arbitrary strings that ACPI provides with the meter.  The measures/ directory
+contains symlinks to the devices that this meter measures.
 
 Some computers have the ability to enforce a power cap in hardware.  If this is
-the case, the power[1-*]_cap and related sysfs files will appear.  When the
+the case, the `power[1-*]_cap` and related sysfs files will appear.  When the
 average power consumption exceeds the cap, an ACPI event will be broadcast on
 the netlink event socket and a poll notification will be sent to the
-appropriate power[1-*]_alarm file to indicate that capping has begun, and the
+appropriate `power[1-*]_alarm` file to indicate that capping has begun, and the
 hardware has taken action to reduce power consumption.  Most likely this will
 result in reduced performance.
 
@@ -46,6 +49,6 @@ all cases the ACPI event will be broadcast on the ACPI netlink event socket as
 well as sent as a poll notification to a sysfs file.  The events are as
 follows:
 
-power[1-*]_cap will be notified if the firmware changes the power cap.
-power[1-*]_interval will be notified if the firmware changes the averaging
+`power[1-*]_cap` will be notified if the firmware changes the power cap.
+`power[1-*]_interval` will be notified if the firmware changes the averaging
 interval.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ad7314 b/Documentation/hwmon/ad7314.rst
index 1912549c7467..bf389736bcd1 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/ad7314
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ad7314.rst
@@ -2,14 +2,23 @@ Kernel driver ad7314
 ====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
    * Analog Devices AD7314
+
      Prefix: 'ad7314'
+
      Datasheet: Publicly available at Analog Devices website.
+
    * Analog Devices ADT7301
+
      Prefix: 'adt7301'
+
      Datasheet: Publicly available at Analog Devices website.
+
    * Analog Devices ADT7302
+
      Prefix: 'adt7302'
+
      Datasheet: Publicly available at Analog Devices website.
 
 Description
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/adc128d818 b/Documentation/hwmon/adc128d818.rst
index 39c95004dabc..6753468932ab 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/adc128d818
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/adc128d818.rst
@@ -2,11 +2,14 @@ Kernel driver adc128d818
 ========================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Texas Instruments ADC818D818
+
     Prefix: 'adc818d818'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x1d, 0x1e, 0x1f, 0x2d, 0x2e, 0x2f
-    Datasheet: Publicly available at the TI website
-               http://www.ti.com/
+
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the TI website http://www.ti.com/
 
 Author: Guenter Roeck
 
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/adm1021 b/Documentation/hwmon/adm1021.rst
index 02ad96cf9b2b..6cbb0f75fe00 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/adm1021
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/adm1021.rst
@@ -2,51 +2,91 @@ Kernel driver adm1021
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Analog Devices ADM1021
+
     Prefix: 'adm1021'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website
+
   * Analog Devices ADM1021A/ADM1023
+
     Prefix: 'adm1023'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website
+
   * Genesys Logic GL523SM
+
     Prefix: 'gl523sm'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e
+
     Datasheet:
+
   * Maxim MAX1617
+
     Prefix: 'max1617'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website
+
   * Maxim MAX1617A
+
     Prefix: 'max1617a'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website
+
   * National Semiconductor LM84
+
     Prefix: 'lm84'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
+
   * Philips NE1617
+
     Prefix: 'max1617' (probably detected as a max1617)
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Philips website
+
   * Philips NE1617A
+
     Prefix: 'max1617' (probably detected as a max1617)
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Philips website
+
   * TI THMC10
+
     Prefix: 'thmc10'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the TI website
+
   * Onsemi MC1066
+
     Prefix: 'mc1066'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Onsemi website
 
 
 Authors:
-        Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>,
-        Philip Edelbrock <phil@netroedge.com>
+	- Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>,
+	- Philip Edelbrock <phil@netroedge.com>
 
 Module Parameters
 -----------------
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/adm1025 b/Documentation/hwmon/adm1025.rst
index 99f05049c68a..283e65e348a5 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/adm1025
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/adm1025.rst
@@ -2,23 +2,32 @@ Kernel driver adm1025
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Analog Devices ADM1025, ADM1025A
+
     Prefix: 'adm1025'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2e
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website
+
   * Philips NE1619
+
     Prefix: 'ne1619'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2d
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Philips website
 
 The NE1619 presents some differences with the original ADM1025:
+
   * Only two possible addresses (0x2c - 0x2d).
   * No temperature offset register, but we don't use it anyway.
   * No INT mode for pin 16. We don't play with it anyway.
 
 Authors:
-        Chen-Yuan Wu <gwu@esoft.com>,
-        Jean Delvare <jdelvare@suse.de>
+	- Chen-Yuan Wu <gwu@esoft.com>,
+	- Jean Delvare <jdelvare@suse.de>
 
 Description
 -----------
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/adm1026 b/Documentation/hwmon/adm1026.rst
index d8fabe0c23ac..35d63e6498a3 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/adm1026
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/adm1026.rst
@@ -3,28 +3,36 @@ Kernel driver adm1026
 
 Supported chips:
   * Analog Devices ADM1026
+
     Prefix: 'adm1026'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website
-               http://www.onsemi.com/PowerSolutions/product.do?id=ADM1026
+
+	       http://www.onsemi.com/PowerSolutions/product.do?id=ADM1026
 
 Authors:
-        Philip Pokorny <ppokorny@penguincomputing.com> for Penguin Computing
-        Justin Thiessen <jthiessen@penguincomputing.com>
+	- Philip Pokorny <ppokorny@penguincomputing.com> for Penguin Computing
+	- Justin Thiessen <jthiessen@penguincomputing.com>
 
 Module Parameters
 -----------------
 
 * gpio_input: int array (min = 1, max = 17)
-  List of GPIO pins (0-16) to program as inputs
+    List of GPIO pins (0-16) to program as inputs
+
 * gpio_output: int array (min = 1, max = 17)
-  List of GPIO pins (0-16) to program as outputs
+    List of GPIO pins (0-16) to program as outputs
+
 * gpio_inverted: int array (min = 1, max = 17)
-  List of GPIO pins (0-16) to program as inverted
+    List of GPIO pins (0-16) to program as inverted
+
 * gpio_normal: int array (min = 1, max = 17)
-  List of GPIO pins (0-16) to program as normal/non-inverted
+    List of GPIO pins (0-16) to program as normal/non-inverted
+
 * gpio_fan: int array (min = 1, max = 8)
-  List of GPIO pins (0-7) to program as fan tachs
+    List of GPIO pins (0-7) to program as fan tachs
 
 
 Description
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/adm1031 b/Documentation/hwmon/adm1031.rst
index a143117c99cb..a677c3ab5574 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/adm1031
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/adm1031.rst
@@ -3,20 +3,28 @@ Kernel driver adm1031
 
 Supported chips:
   * Analog Devices ADM1030
+
     Prefix: 'adm1030'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c to 0x2e
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website
-               http://www.analog.com/en/prod/0%2C2877%2CADM1030%2C00.html
+
+	       http://www.analog.com/en/prod/0%2C2877%2CADM1030%2C00.html
 
   * Analog Devices ADM1031
+
     Prefix: 'adm1031'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c to 0x2e
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website
-               http://www.analog.com/en/prod/0%2C2877%2CADM1031%2C00.html
+
+	       http://www.analog.com/en/prod/0%2C2877%2CADM1031%2C00.html
 
 Authors:
-        Alexandre d'Alton <alex@alexdalton.org>
-        Jean Delvare <jdelvare@suse.de>
+	- Alexandre d'Alton <alex@alexdalton.org>
+	- Jean Delvare <jdelvare@suse.de>
 
 Description
 -----------
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/adm1275 b/Documentation/hwmon/adm1275.rst
index 5e277b0d91ce..9a1913e5b4d9 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/adm1275
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/adm1275.rst
@@ -2,29 +2,53 @@ Kernel driver adm1275
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Analog Devices ADM1075
+
     Prefix: 'adm1075'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: www.analog.com/static/imported-files/data_sheets/ADM1075.pdf
+
   * Analog Devices ADM1272
+
     Prefix: 'adm1272'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: www.analog.com/static/imported-files/data_sheets/ADM1272.pdf
+
   * Analog Devices ADM1275
+
     Prefix: 'adm1275'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: www.analog.com/static/imported-files/data_sheets/ADM1275.pdf
+
   * Analog Devices ADM1276
+
     Prefix: 'adm1276'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: www.analog.com/static/imported-files/data_sheets/ADM1276.pdf
+
   * Analog Devices ADM1278
+
     Prefix: 'adm1278'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: www.analog.com/static/imported-files/data_sheets/ADM1278.pdf
+
   * Analog Devices ADM1293/ADM1294
+
     Prefix: 'adm1293', 'adm1294'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: http://www.analog.com/media/en/technical-documentation/data-sheets/ADM1293_1294.pdf
 
 Author: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
@@ -44,7 +68,7 @@ integrated 12 bit analog-to-digital converter (ADC), accessed using a
 PMBus interface.
 
 The driver is a client driver to the core PMBus driver. Please see
-Documentation/hwmon/pmbus for details on PMBus client drivers.
+Documentation/hwmon/pmbus.rst for details on PMBus client drivers.
 
 
 Usage Notes
@@ -66,7 +90,7 @@ Platform data support
 ---------------------
 
 The driver supports standard PMBus driver platform data. Please see
-Documentation/hwmon/pmbus for details.
+Documentation/hwmon/pmbus.rst for details.
 
 
 Sysfs entries
@@ -75,6 +99,7 @@ Sysfs entries
 The following attributes are supported. Limits are read-write, history reset
 attributes are write-only, all other attributes are read-only.
 
+======================= =======================================================
 inX_label		"vin1" or "vout1" depending on chip variant and
 			configuration. On ADM1075, ADM1293, and ADM1294,
 			vout1 reports the voltage on the VAUX pin.
@@ -120,3 +145,4 @@ temp1_reset_history	Write any value to reset history.
 
 			Temperature attributes are supported on ADM1272 and
 			ADM1278.
+======================= =======================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/adm9240 b/Documentation/hwmon/adm9240.rst
index 9b174fc700cc..91063b0f4c6f 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/adm9240
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/adm9240.rst
@@ -2,30 +2,43 @@ Kernel driver adm9240
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Analog Devices ADM9240
+
     Prefix: 'adm9240'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2f
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website
-    http://www.analog.com/UploadedFiles/Data_Sheets/79857778ADM9240_0.pdf
+
+	http://www.analog.com/UploadedFiles/Data_Sheets/79857778ADM9240_0.pdf
 
   * Dallas Semiconductor DS1780
+
     Prefix: 'ds1780'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2f
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Dallas Semiconductor (Maxim) website
-    http://pdfserv.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/DS1780.pdf
+
+	http://pdfserv.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/DS1780.pdf
 
   * National Semiconductor LM81
+
     Prefix: 'lm81'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2f
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
-    http://www.national.com/ds.cgi/LM/LM81.pdf
+
+	http://www.national.com/ds.cgi/LM/LM81.pdf
 
 Authors:
-    Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>,
-    Philip Edelbrock <phil@netroedge.com>,
-    Michiel Rook <michiel@grendelproject.nl>,
-    Grant Coady <gcoady.lk@gmail.com> with guidance
-        from Jean Delvare <jdelvare@suse.de>
+    - Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>,
+    - Philip Edelbrock <phil@netroedge.com>,
+    - Michiel Rook <michiel@grendelproject.nl>,
+    - Grant Coady <gcoady.lk@gmail.com> with guidance
+      from Jean Delvare <jdelvare@suse.de>
 
 Interface
 ---------
@@ -87,11 +100,13 @@ rpm = (22500 * 60) / (count * divider)
 Automatic fan clock divider
 
   * User sets 0 to fan_min limit
+
     - low speed alarm is disabled
     - fan clock divider not changed
     - auto fan clock adjuster enabled for valid fan speed reading
 
   * User sets fan_min limit too low
+
     - low speed alarm is enabled
     - fan clock divider set to max
     - fan_min set to register value 254 which corresponds
@@ -101,18 +116,20 @@ Automatic fan clock divider
     - auto fan clock adjuster disabled
 
   * User sets reasonable fan speed
+
     - low speed alarm is enabled
     - fan clock divider set to suit fan_min
     - auto fan clock adjuster enabled: adjusts fan_min
 
   * User sets unreasonably high low fan speed limit
+
     - resolution of the low speed limit may be reduced
     - alarm will be asserted
     - auto fan clock adjuster enabled: adjusts fan_min
 
-    * fan speed may be displayed as zero until the auto fan clock divider
-      adjuster brings fan speed clock divider back into chip measurement
-      range, this will occur within a few measurement cycles.
+  * fan speed may be displayed as zero until the auto fan clock divider
+    adjuster brings fan speed clock divider back into chip measurement
+    range, this will occur within a few measurement cycles.
 
 Analog Output
 -------------
@@ -122,16 +139,21 @@ power up or reset. This doesn't do much on the test Intel SE440BX-2.
 
 Voltage Monitor
 
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
 Voltage (IN) measurement is internally scaled:
 
+    === =========== =========== ========= ==========
     nr  label       nominal     maximum   resolution
-                      mV          mV         mV
+		      mV          mV         mV
+    === =========== =========== ========= ==========
     0   +2.5V        2500        3320       13.0
     1   Vccp1        2700        3600       14.1
     2   +3.3V        3300        4380       17.2
     3     +5V        5000        6640       26.0
     4    +12V       12000       15940       62.5
     5   Vccp2        2700        3600       14.1
+    === =========== =========== ========= ==========
 
 The reading is an unsigned 8-bit value, nominal voltage measurement is
 represented by a reading of 192, being 3/4 of the measurement range.
@@ -159,8 +181,9 @@ Clear the CI latch by writing value 0 to the sysfs intrusion0_alarm file.
 
 Alarm flags reported as 16-bit word
 
+    ===     =============       ==========================
     bit     label               comment
-    ---     -------------       --------------------------
+    ===     =============       ==========================
      0      +2.5 V_Error        high or low limit exceeded
      1      VCCP_Error          high or low limit exceeded
      2      +3.3 V_Error        high or low limit exceeded
@@ -171,6 +194,7 @@ Alarm flags reported as 16-bit word
      8      +12 V_Error         high or low limit exceeded
      9      VCCP2_Error         high or low limit exceeded
     12      Chassis_Error       CI pin went high
+    ===     =============       ==========================
 
 Remaining bits are reserved and thus undefined. It is important to note
 that alarm bits may be cleared on read, user-space may latch alarms and
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ads1015 b/Documentation/hwmon/ads1015.rst
index 02d2a459385f..e0951c4e57bb 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/ads1015
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ads1015.rst
@@ -2,17 +2,25 @@ Kernel driver ads1015
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Texas Instruments ADS1015
+
     Prefix: 'ads1015'
-    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Texas Instruments website :
-               http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ads1015.pdf
+
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Texas Instruments website:
+
+	       http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ads1015.pdf
+
   * Texas Instruments ADS1115
+
     Prefix: 'ads1115'
-    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Texas Instruments website :
-               http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ads1115.pdf
+
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Texas Instruments website:
+
+	       http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ads1115.pdf
 
 Authors:
-        Dirk Eibach, Guntermann & Drunck GmbH <eibach@gdsys.de>
+	Dirk Eibach, Guntermann & Drunck GmbH <eibach@gdsys.de>
 
 Description
 -----------
@@ -24,14 +32,15 @@ This device is a 12/16-bit A-D converter with 4 inputs.
 The inputs can be used single ended or in certain differential combinations.
 
 The inputs can be made available by 8 sysfs input files in0_input - in7_input:
-in0: Voltage over AIN0 and AIN1.
-in1: Voltage over AIN0 and AIN3.
-in2: Voltage over AIN1 and AIN3.
-in3: Voltage over AIN2 and AIN3.
-in4: Voltage over AIN0 and GND.
-in5: Voltage over AIN1 and GND.
-in6: Voltage over AIN2 and GND.
-in7: Voltage over AIN3 and GND.
+
+  - in0: Voltage over AIN0 and AIN1.
+  - in1: Voltage over AIN0 and AIN3.
+  - in2: Voltage over AIN1 and AIN3.
+  - in3: Voltage over AIN2 and AIN3.
+  - in4: Voltage over AIN0 and GND.
+  - in5: Voltage over AIN1 and GND.
+  - in6: Voltage over AIN2 and GND.
+  - in7: Voltage over AIN3 and GND.
 
 Which inputs are available can be configured using platform data or devicetree.
 
@@ -42,29 +51,34 @@ Platform Data
 
 In linux/platform_data/ads1015.h platform data is defined, channel_data contains
 configuration data for the used input combinations:
+
 - pga is the programmable gain amplifier (values are full scale)
-  0: +/- 6.144 V
-  1: +/- 4.096 V
-  2: +/- 2.048 V
-  3: +/- 1.024 V
-  4: +/- 0.512 V
-  5: +/- 0.256 V
+
+    - 0: +/- 6.144 V
+    - 1: +/- 4.096 V
+    - 2: +/- 2.048 V
+    - 3: +/- 1.024 V
+    - 4: +/- 0.512 V
+    - 5: +/- 0.256 V
+
 - data_rate in samples per second
-  0: 128
-  1: 250
-  2: 490
-  3: 920
-  4: 1600
-  5: 2400
-  6: 3300
-
-Example:
-struct ads1015_platform_data data = {
+
+    - 0: 128
+    - 1: 250
+    - 2: 490
+    - 3: 920
+    - 4: 1600
+    - 5: 2400
+    - 6: 3300
+
+Example::
+
+  struct ads1015_platform_data data = {
 	.channel_data = {
 		[2] = { .enabled = true, .pga = 1, .data_rate = 0 },
 		[4] = { .enabled = true, .pga = 4, .data_rate = 5 },
 	}
-};
+  };
 
 In this case only in2_input (FS +/- 4.096 V, 128 SPS) and in4_input
 (FS +/- 0.512 V, 2400 SPS) would be created.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ads7828 b/Documentation/hwmon/ads7828.rst
index f6e263e0f607..b830b490cfe4 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/ads7828
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ads7828.rst
@@ -2,20 +2,27 @@ Kernel driver ads7828
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Texas Instruments/Burr-Brown ADS7828
+
     Prefix: 'ads7828'
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Texas Instruments website:
-               http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ads7828.pdf
+
+	       http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ads7828.pdf
 
   * Texas Instruments ADS7830
+
     Prefix: 'ads7830'
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Texas Instruments website:
-               http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ads7830.pdf
+
+	       http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ads7830.pdf
 
 Authors:
-        Steve Hardy <shardy@redhat.com>
-        Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com>
-        Guillaume Roguez <guillaume.roguez@savoirfairelinux.com>
+	- Steve Hardy <shardy@redhat.com>
+	- Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com>
+	- Guillaume Roguez <guillaume.roguez@savoirfairelinux.com>
 
 Platform data
 -------------
@@ -24,16 +31,16 @@ The ads7828 driver accepts an optional ads7828_platform_data structure (defined
 in include/linux/platform_data/ads7828.h). The structure fields are:
 
 * diff_input: (bool) Differential operation
-  set to true for differential mode, false for default single ended mode.
+    set to true for differential mode, false for default single ended mode.
 
 * ext_vref: (bool) External reference
-  set to true if it operates with an external reference, false for default
-  internal reference.
+    set to true if it operates with an external reference, false for default
+    internal reference.
 
 * vref_mv: (unsigned int) Voltage reference
-  if using an external reference, set this to the reference voltage in mV,
-  otherwise it will default to the internal value (2500mV). This value will be
-  bounded with limits accepted by the chip, described in the datasheet.
+    if using an external reference, set this to the reference voltage in mV,
+    otherwise it will default to the internal value (2500mV). This value will be
+    bounded with limits accepted by the chip, described in the datasheet.
 
  If no structure is provided, the configuration defaults to single ended
  operation and internal voltage reference (2.5V).
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/adt7410 b/Documentation/hwmon/adt7410.rst
index 9817941e5f19..24caaa83c8ec 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/adt7410
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/adt7410.rst
@@ -2,26 +2,45 @@ Kernel driver adt7410
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Analog Devices ADT7410
+
     Prefix: 'adt7410'
+
     Addresses scanned: None
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website
-               http://www.analog.com/static/imported-files/data_sheets/ADT7410.pdf
+
+	       http://www.analog.com/static/imported-files/data_sheets/ADT7410.pdf
   * Analog Devices ADT7420
+
     Prefix: 'adt7420'
+
     Addresses scanned: None
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website
-               http://www.analog.com/static/imported-files/data_sheets/ADT7420.pdf
+
+	       http://www.analog.com/static/imported-files/data_sheets/ADT7420.pdf
+
   * Analog Devices ADT7310
+
     Prefix: 'adt7310'
+
     Addresses scanned: None
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website
-               http://www.analog.com/static/imported-files/data_sheets/ADT7310.pdf
+
+	       http://www.analog.com/static/imported-files/data_sheets/ADT7310.pdf
+
   * Analog Devices ADT7320
+
     Prefix: 'adt7320'
+
     Addresses scanned: None
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website
-               http://www.analog.com/static/imported-files/data_sheets/ADT7320.pdf
+
+	       http://www.analog.com/static/imported-files/data_sheets/ADT7320.pdf
 
 Author: Hartmut Knaack <knaack.h@gmx.de>
 
@@ -61,13 +80,15 @@ The device is set to 16 bit resolution and comparator mode.
 sysfs-Interface
 ---------------
 
-temp#_input		- temperature input
-temp#_min		- temperature minimum setpoint
-temp#_max		- temperature maximum setpoint
-temp#_crit		- critical temperature setpoint
-temp#_min_hyst		- hysteresis for temperature minimum (read-only)
-temp#_max_hyst		- hysteresis for temperature maximum (read/write)
-temp#_crit_hyst		- hysteresis for critical temperature (read-only)
-temp#_min_alarm		- temperature minimum alarm flag
-temp#_max_alarm		- temperature maximum alarm flag
-temp#_crit_alarm	- critical temperature alarm flag
+======================== ====================================================
+temp#_input		 temperature input
+temp#_min		 temperature minimum setpoint
+temp#_max		 temperature maximum setpoint
+temp#_crit		 critical temperature setpoint
+temp#_min_hyst		 hysteresis for temperature minimum (read-only)
+temp#_max_hyst		 hysteresis for temperature maximum (read/write)
+temp#_crit_hyst		 hysteresis for critical temperature (read-only)
+temp#_min_alarm		 temperature minimum alarm flag
+temp#_max_alarm		 temperature maximum alarm flag
+temp#_crit_alarm	 critical temperature alarm flag
+======================== ====================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/adt7411 b/Documentation/hwmon/adt7411.rst
index 1632960f9745..57ad16fb216a 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/adt7411
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/adt7411.rst
@@ -2,9 +2,13 @@ Kernel driver adt7411
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Analog Devices ADT7411
+
     Prefix: 'adt7411'
+
     Addresses scanned: 0x48, 0x4a, 0x4b
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website
 
 Author: Wolfram Sang (based on adt7470 by Darrick J. Wong)
@@ -26,15 +30,19 @@ Check the datasheet for details.
 sysfs-Interface
 ---------------
 
-in0_input	- vdd voltage input
-in[1-8]_input	- analog 1-8 input
-temp1_input	- temperature input
+================ =================
+in0_input	 vdd voltage input
+in[1-8]_input	 analog 1-8 input
+temp1_input	 temperature input
+================ =================
 
 Besides standard interfaces, this driver adds (0 = off, 1 = on):
 
-  adc_ref_vdd	- Use vdd as reference instead of 2.25 V
-  fast_sampling	- Sample at 22.5 kHz instead of 1.4 kHz, but drop filters
-  no_average	- Turn off averaging over 16 samples
+  ============== =======================================================
+  adc_ref_vdd	 Use vdd as reference instead of 2.25 V
+  fast_sampling	 Sample at 22.5 kHz instead of 1.4 kHz, but drop filters
+  no_average	 Turn off averaging over 16 samples
+  ============== =======================================================
 
 Notes
 -----
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/adt7462 b/Documentation/hwmon/adt7462.rst
index ec660b328275..139e19696188 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/adt7462
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/adt7462.rst
@@ -1,10 +1,14 @@
 Kernel driver adt7462
-======================
+=====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Analog Devices ADT7462
+
     Prefix: 'adt7462'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x58, 0x5C
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website
 
 Author: Darrick J. Wong
@@ -57,11 +61,10 @@ Besides standard interfaces driver adds the following:
 * pwm#_auto_point1_pwm and temp#_auto_point1_temp and
 * pwm#_auto_point2_pwm and temp#_auto_point2_temp -
 
-point1: Set the pwm speed at a lower temperature bound.
-point2: Set the pwm speed at a higher temperature bound.
+  - point1: Set the pwm speed at a lower temperature bound.
+  - point2: Set the pwm speed at a higher temperature bound.
 
 The ADT7462 will scale the pwm between the lower and higher pwm speed when
 the temperature is between the two temperature boundaries.  PWM values range
 from 0 (off) to 255 (full speed).  Fan speed will be set to maximum when the
 temperature sensor associated with the PWM control exceeds temp#_max.
-
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/adt7470 b/Documentation/hwmon/adt7470.rst
index fe68e18a0c8d..d225f816e992 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/adt7470
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/adt7470.rst
@@ -2,9 +2,13 @@ Kernel driver adt7470
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Analog Devices ADT7470
+
     Prefix: 'adt7470'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2C, 0x2E, 0x2F
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website
 
 Author: Darrick J. Wong
@@ -56,8 +60,8 @@ Besides standard interfaces driver adds the following:
 * pwm#_auto_point1_pwm and pwm#_auto_point1_temp and
 * pwm#_auto_point2_pwm and pwm#_auto_point2_temp -
 
-point1: Set the pwm speed at a lower temperature bound.
-point2: Set the pwm speed at a higher temperature bound.
+  - point1: Set the pwm speed at a lower temperature bound.
+  - point2: Set the pwm speed at a higher temperature bound.
 
 The ADT7470 will scale the pwm between the lower and higher pwm speed when
 the temperature is between the two temperature boundaries.  PWM values range
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/adt7475 b/Documentation/hwmon/adt7475.rst
index 01b46b290532..ef3ea1ea9bc1 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/adt7475
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/adt7475.rst
@@ -2,28 +2,44 @@ Kernel driver adt7475
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Analog Devices ADT7473
+
     Prefix: 'adt7473'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2C, 0x2D, 0x2E
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the On Semiconductors website
+
   * Analog Devices ADT7475
+
     Prefix: 'adt7475'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2E
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the On Semiconductors website
+
   * Analog Devices ADT7476
+
     Prefix: 'adt7476'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2C, 0x2D, 0x2E
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the On Semiconductors website
+
   * Analog Devices ADT7490
+
     Prefix: 'adt7490'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2C, 0x2D, 0x2E
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the On Semiconductors website
 
 Authors:
-	Jordan Crouse
-	Hans de Goede
-	Darrick J. Wong (documentation)
-	Jean Delvare
+	- Jordan Crouse
+	- Hans de Goede
+	- Darrick J. Wong (documentation)
+	- Jean Delvare
 
 
 Description
@@ -82,14 +98,16 @@ ADT7490:
 Sysfs Mapping
 -------------
 
-     ADT7490     ADT7476     ADT7475   ADT7473
-     -------     -------     -------   -------
+==== =========== =========== ========= ==========
+in   ADT7490     ADT7476     ADT7475   ADT7473
+==== =========== =========== ========= ==========
 in0  2.5VIN (22) 2.5VIN (22) -         -
 in1  VCCP   (23) VCCP   (23) VCCP (14) VCCP (14)
 in2  VCC    (4)  VCC    (4)  VCC  (4)  VCC  (3)
 in3  5VIN   (20) 5VIN   (20)
 in4  12VIN  (21) 12VIN  (21)
 in5  VTT    (8)
+==== =========== =========== ========= ==========
 
 Special Features
 ----------------
@@ -107,8 +125,8 @@ Fan Speed Control
 
 The driver exposes two trip points per PWM channel.
 
-point1: Set the PWM speed at the lower temperature bound
-point2: Set the PWM speed at the higher temperature bound
+- point1: Set the PWM speed at the lower temperature bound
+- point2: Set the PWM speed at the higher temperature bound
 
 The ADT747x will scale the PWM linearly between the lower and higher PWM
 speed when the temperature is between the two temperature boundaries.
@@ -123,12 +141,12 @@ the PWM control exceeds temp#_max.
 
 At Tmin - hysteresis the PWM output can either be off (0% duty cycle) or at the
 minimum (i.e. auto_point1_pwm). This behaviour can be configured using the
-pwm[1-*]_stall_disable sysfs attribute. A value of 0 means the fans will shut
+`pwm[1-*]_stall_disable sysfs attribute`. A value of 0 means the fans will shut
 off. A value of 1 means the fans will run at auto_point1_pwm.
 
 The responsiveness of the ADT747x to temperature changes can be configured.
 This allows smoothing of the fan speed transition. To set the transition time
-set the value in ms in the temp[1-*]_smoothing sysfs attribute.
+set the value in ms in the `temp[1-*]_smoothing` sysfs attribute.
 
 Notes
 -----
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/amc6821 b/Documentation/hwmon/amc6821.rst
index ced8359c50f8..5ddb2849da90 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/amc6821
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/amc6821.rst
@@ -2,9 +2,13 @@ Kernel driver amc6821
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
 	Texas Instruments AMC6821
+
 	Prefix: 'amc6821'
+
 	Addresses scanned: 0x18, 0x19, 0x1a, 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e, 0x4c, 0x4d, 0x4e
+
 	Datasheet: http://focus.ti.com/docs/prod/folders/print/amc6821.html
 
 Authors:
@@ -21,10 +25,11 @@ The pwm can be controlled either from software or automatically.
 
 The driver provides the following sensor accesses in sysfs:
 
+======================= ==      ===============================================
 temp1_input		ro	on-chip temperature
 temp1_min		rw	"
 temp1_max		rw	"
-temp1_crit	 	rw	"
+temp1_crit		rw	"
 temp1_min_alarm		ro	"
 temp1_max_alarm		ro	"
 temp1_crit_alarm	ro	"
@@ -32,16 +37,16 @@ temp1_crit_alarm	ro	"
 temp2_input		ro	remote temperature
 temp2_min		rw	"
 temp2_max		rw	"
-temp2_crit	 	rw	"
+temp2_crit		rw	"
 temp2_min_alarm		ro	"
 temp2_max_alarm		ro	"
 temp2_crit_alarm	ro	"
 temp2_fault		ro	"
 
-fan1_input	 	ro	tachometer speed
+fan1_input		ro	tachometer speed
 fan1_min		rw	"
 fan1_max		rw	"
-fan1_fault	 	ro	"
+fan1_fault		ro	"
 fan1_div		rw	Fan divisor can be either 2 or 4.
 
 pwm1			rw	pwm1
@@ -87,6 +92,7 @@ temp2_auto_point3_temp	rw	Above this temperature fan runs at maximum
 				values which depend on temp2_auto_point2_temp
 				and pwm1_auto_point2_pwm. Read it out after
 				writing to get actual value.
+======================= ==      ===============================================
 
 
 Module parameters
@@ -97,6 +103,6 @@ load the module with: init=0.
 
 If your board BIOS doesn't initialize the chip, or you want
 different settings, you can set the following parameters:
-init=1,
-pwminv: 0 default pwm output, 1 inverts pwm output.
 
+- init=1,
+- pwminv: 0 default pwm output, 1 inverts pwm output.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/asb100 b/Documentation/hwmon/asb100.rst
index ab7365e139be..c2d5f97085fe 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/asb100
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/asb100.rst
@@ -2,9 +2,13 @@ Kernel driver asb100
 ====================
 
 Supported Chips:
+
   * Asus ASB100 and ASB100-A "Bach"
+
     Prefix: 'asb100'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2d
+
     Datasheet: none released
 
 Author: Mark M. Hoffman <mhoffman@lightlink.com>
@@ -41,32 +45,29 @@ processor itself. It is a value in volts.
 
 Alarms: (TODO question marks indicate may or may not work)
 
-0x0001 => in0 (?)
-0x0002 => in1 (?)
-0x0004 => in2
-0x0008 => in3
-0x0010 => temp1 (1)
-0x0020 => temp2
-0x0040 => fan1
-0x0080 => fan2
-0x0100 => in4
-0x0200 => in5 (?) (2)
-0x0400 => in6 (?) (2)
-0x0800 => fan3
-0x1000 => chassis switch
-0x2000 => temp3
-
-Alarm Notes:
-
-(1) This alarm will only trigger if the hysteresis value is 127C.
-I.e. it behaves the same as w83781d.
-
-(2) The min and max registers for these values appear to
-be read-only or otherwise stuck at 0x00.
+- 0x0001 => in0 (?)
+- 0x0002 => in1 (?)
+- 0x0004 => in2
+- 0x0008 => in3
+- 0x0010 => temp1 [1]_
+- 0x0020 => temp2
+- 0x0040 => fan1
+- 0x0080 => fan2
+- 0x0100 => in4
+- 0x0200 => in5 (?) [2]_
+- 0x0400 => in6 (?) [2]_
+- 0x0800 => fan3
+- 0x1000 => chassis switch
+- 0x2000 => temp3
+
+.. [1]	This alarm will only trigger if the hysteresis value is 127C.
+	I.e. it behaves the same as w83781d.
+
+.. [2]	The min and max registers for these values appear to
+	be read-only or otherwise stuck at 0x00.
 
 TODO:
-* Experiment with fan divisors > 8.
-* Experiment with temp. sensor types.
-* Are there really 13 voltage inputs? Probably not...
-* Cleanups, no doubt...
-
+  * Experiment with fan divisors > 8.
+  * Experiment with temp. sensor types.
+  * Are there really 13 voltage inputs? Probably not...
+  * Cleanups, no doubt...
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/asc7621 b/Documentation/hwmon/asc7621.rst
index 7287be7e1f21..b5a9fad0f172 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/asc7621
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/asc7621.rst
@@ -1,10 +1,15 @@
+=====================
 Kernel driver asc7621
-==================
+=====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
     Andigilog aSC7621 and aSC7621a
+
     Prefix: 'asc7621'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e
+
     Datasheet: http://www.fairview5.com/linux/asc7621/asc7621.pdf
 
 Author:
@@ -73,8 +78,10 @@ Finally, we have added a tach disable function that turns off the tach
 measurement system for individual tachs in order to save power. That is
 in register 75h.
 
---
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
 aSC7621 Product Description
+===========================
 
 The aSC7621 has a two wire digital interface compatible with SMBus 2.0.
 Using a 10-bit ADC, the aSC7621 measures the temperature of two remote diode
@@ -102,6 +109,8 @@ System voltages of VCCP, 2.5V, 3.3V, 5.0V, and 12V motherboard power are
 monitored efficiently with internal scaling resistors.
 
 Features
+--------
+
 - Supports PECI interface and monitors internal and remote thermal diodes
 - 2-wire, SMBus 2.0 compliant, serial interface
 - 10-bit ADC
@@ -110,7 +119,7 @@ Features
 - Noise filtering of temperature reading for fan speed control
 - 0.25C digital temperature sensor resolution
 - 3 PWM fan speed control outputs for 2-, 3- or 4-wire fans and up to 4 fan
-	tachometer inputs
+  tachometer inputs
 - Enhanced measured temperature to Temperature Zone assignment.
 - Provides high and low PWM frequency ranges
 - 3 GPIO pins for custom use
@@ -123,17 +132,20 @@ Except where noted below, the sysfs entries created by this driver follow
 the standards defined in "sysfs-interface".
 
 temp1_source
+	=	===============================================
 	0 	(default) peci_legacy = 0, Remote 1 Temperature
-			peci_legacy = 1, PECI Processor Temperature 0
+		peci_legacy = 1, PECI Processor Temperature 0
 	1 	Remote 1 Temperature
 	2 	Remote 2 Temperature
 	3 	Internal Temperature
 	4 	PECI Processor Temperature 0
 	5 	PECI Processor Temperature 1
 	6 	PECI Processor Temperature 2
-	7  PECI Processor Temperature 3
+	7	PECI Processor Temperature 3
+	=	===============================================
 
 temp2_source
+	=	===============================================
 	0 	(default) Internal Temperature
 	1 	Remote 1 Temperature
 	2 	Remote 2 Temperature
@@ -142,8 +154,10 @@ temp2_source
 	5 	PECI Processor Temperature 1
 	6 	PECI Processor Temperature 2
 	7 	PECI Processor Temperature 3
+	=	===============================================
 
 temp3_source
+	=	===============================================
 	0 	(default) Remote 2 Temperature
 	1 	Remote 1 Temperature
 	2 	Remote 2 Temperature
@@ -152,10 +166,12 @@ temp3_source
 	5 	PECI Processor Temperature 1
 	6 	PECI Processor Temperature 2
 	7 	PECI Processor Temperature 3
+	=	===============================================
 
 temp4_source
+	=	===============================================
 	0 	(default) peci_legacy = 0, PECI Processor Temperature 0
-			peci_legacy = 1, Remote 1 Temperature
+		peci_legacy = 1, Remote 1 Temperature
 	1 	Remote 1 Temperature
 	2 	Remote 2 Temperature
 	3 	Internal Temperature
@@ -163,58 +179,65 @@ temp4_source
 	5 	PECI Processor Temperature 1
 	6 	PECI Processor Temperature 2
 	7 	PECI Processor Temperature 3
+	=	===============================================
 
-temp[1-4]_smoothing_enable
-temp[1-4]_smoothing_time
+temp[1-4]_smoothing_enable / temp[1-4]_smoothing_time
 	Smooths spikes in temp readings caused by noise.
 	Valid values in milliseconds are:
-	35000
-	17600
-	11800
-	 7000
-	 4400
-	 3000
-	 1600
-	  800
+
+	* 35000
+	* 17600
+	* 11800
+	*  7000
+	*  4400
+	*  3000
+	*  1600
+	*   800
 
 temp[1-4]_crit
 	When the corresponding zone temperature reaches this value,
 	ALL pwm outputs will got to 100%.
 
-temp[5-8]_input
-temp[5-8]_enable
+temp[5-8]_input / temp[5-8]_enable
 	The aSC7621 can also read temperatures provided by the processor
 	via the PECI bus.  Usually these are "core" temps and are relative
 	to the point where the automatic thermal control circuit starts
 	throttling.  This means that these are usually negative numbers.
 
 pwm[1-3]_enable
+	=============== ========================================================
 	0		Fan off.
 	1		Fan on manual control.
 	2		Fan on automatic control and will run at the minimum pwm
-				if the temperature for the zone is below the minimum.
-	3		Fan on automatic control but will be off if the temperature
-				for the zone is below the minimum.
-	4-254	Ignored.
+			if the temperature for the zone is below the minimum.
+	3		Fan on automatic control but will be off if the
+			temperature for the zone is below the minimum.
+	4-254		Ignored.
 	255		Fan on full.
+	=============== ========================================================
 
 pwm[1-3]_auto_channels
 	Bitmap as described in sysctl-interface with the following
 	exceptions...
+
 	Only the following combination of zones (and their corresponding masks)
 	are valid:
-	1
-	2
-	3
-	2,3
-	1,2,3
-	4
-	1,2,3,4
 
-	Special values:
-	0			Disabled.
-	16		Fan on manual control.
-	31		Fan on full.
+	* 1
+	* 2
+	* 3
+	* 2,3
+	* 1,2,3
+	* 4
+	* 1,2,3,4
+
+	* Special values:
+
+	  ==		======================
+	  0		Disabled.
+	  16		Fan on manual control.
+	  31		Fan on full.
+	  ==		======================
 
 
 pwm[1-3]_invert
@@ -226,22 +249,22 @@ pwm[1-3]_freq
 	PWM frequency in Hz
 	Valid values in Hz are:
 
-	10
-	15
-	23
-	30  (default)
-	38
-	47
-	62
-	94
-	23000
-	24000
-	25000
-	26000
-	27000
-	28000
-	29000
-	30000
+	* 10
+	* 15
+	* 23
+	* 30  (default)
+	* 38
+	* 47
+	* 62
+	* 94
+	* 23000
+	* 24000
+	* 25000
+	* 26000
+	* 27000
+	* 28000
+	* 29000
+	* 30000
 
 	Setting any other value will be ignored.
 
@@ -251,17 +274,17 @@ peci_enable
 peci_avg
 	Input filter average time.
 
-	0 	0 Sec. (no Smoothing) (default)
-	1 	0.25 Sec.
-	2 	0.5 Sec.
-	3 	1.0 Sec.
-	4 	2.0 Sec.
-	5 	4.0 Sec.
-	6 	8.0 Sec.
-	7 	0.0 Sec.
+	* 0 	0 Sec. (no Smoothing) (default)
+	* 1 	0.25 Sec.
+	* 2 	0.5 Sec.
+	* 3 	1.0 Sec.
+	* 4 	2.0 Sec.
+	* 5 	4.0 Sec.
+	* 6 	8.0 Sec.
+	* 7 	0.0 Sec.
 
 peci_legacy
-
+	=	============================================
 	0	Standard Mode (default)
 		Remote Diode 1 reading is associated with
 		Temperature Zone 1, PECI is associated with
@@ -270,10 +293,12 @@ peci_legacy
 	1	Legacy Mode
 		PECI is associated with Temperature Zone 1,
 		Remote Diode 1 is associated with Zone 4
+	=	============================================
 
 peci_diode
 	Diode filter
 
+	=	====================
 	0	0.25 Sec.
 	1 	1.1 Sec.
 	2 	2.4 Sec.  (default)
@@ -282,15 +307,20 @@ peci_diode
 	5 	6.8 Sec.
 	6 	10.2 Sec.
 	7 	16.4 Sec.
+	=	====================
 
 peci_4domain
 	Four domain enable
 
+	=	===============================================
 	0 	1 or 2 Domains for enabled processors (default)
 	1 	3 or 4 Domains for enabled processors
+	=	===============================================
 
 peci_domain
 	Domain
 
+	=	==================================================
 	0 	Processor contains a single domain (0) 	 (default)
 	1 	Processor contains two domains (0,1)
+	=	==================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/aspeed-pwm-tacho b/Documentation/hwmon/aspeed-pwm-tacho.rst
index 7cfb34977460..6dcec845fbc7 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/aspeed-pwm-tacho
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/aspeed-pwm-tacho.rst
@@ -15,8 +15,10 @@ controller supports up to 16 tachometer inputs.
 
 The driver provides the following sensor accesses in sysfs:
 
+=============== ======= =====================================================
 fanX_input	ro	provide current fan rotation value in RPM as reported
 			by the fan to the device.
 
 pwmX		rw	get or set PWM fan control value. This is an integer
 			value between 0(off) and 255(full speed).
+=============== ======= =====================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/coretemp b/Documentation/hwmon/coretemp.rst
index fec5a9bf755f..c609329e3bc4 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/coretemp
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/coretemp.rst
@@ -3,20 +3,29 @@ Kernel driver coretemp
 
 Supported chips:
   * All Intel Core family
+
     Prefix: 'coretemp'
-    CPUID: family 0x6, models 0xe (Pentium M DC), 0xf (Core 2 DC 65nm),
-                              0x16 (Core 2 SC 65nm), 0x17 (Penryn 45nm),
-                              0x1a (Nehalem), 0x1c (Atom), 0x1e (Lynnfield),
-                              0x26 (Tunnel Creek Atom), 0x27 (Medfield Atom),
-                              0x36 (Cedar Trail Atom)
-    Datasheet: Intel 64 and IA-32 Architectures Software Developer's Manual
-               Volume 3A: System Programming Guide
-               http://softwarecommunity.intel.com/Wiki/Mobility/720.htm
+
+    CPUID: family 0x6, models
+
+			    - 0xe (Pentium M DC), 0xf (Core 2 DC 65nm),
+			    - 0x16 (Core 2 SC 65nm), 0x17 (Penryn 45nm),
+			    - 0x1a (Nehalem), 0x1c (Atom), 0x1e (Lynnfield),
+			    - 0x26 (Tunnel Creek Atom), 0x27 (Medfield Atom),
+			    - 0x36 (Cedar Trail Atom)
+
+    Datasheet:
+
+	       Intel 64 and IA-32 Architectures Software Developer's Manual
+	       Volume 3A: System Programming Guide
+
+	       http://softwarecommunity.intel.com/Wiki/Mobility/720.htm
 
 Author: Rudolf Marek
 
 Description
 -----------
+
 This driver permits reading the DTS (Digital Temperature Sensor) embedded
 inside Intel CPUs. This driver can read both the per-core and per-package
 temperature using the appropriate sensors. The per-package sensor is new;
@@ -35,14 +44,17 @@ may be raised, if the temperature grows enough (more than TjMax) to trigger
 the Out-Of-Spec bit. Following table summarizes the exported sysfs files:
 
 All Sysfs entries are named with their core_id (represented here by 'X').
-tempX_input	 - Core temperature (in millidegrees Celsius).
-tempX_max	 - All cooling devices should be turned on (on Core2).
-tempX_crit	 - Maximum junction temperature (in millidegrees Celsius).
-tempX_crit_alarm - Set when Out-of-spec bit is set, never clears.
-		   Correct CPU operation is no longer guaranteed.
-tempX_label	 - Contains string "Core X", where X is processor
-		   number. For Package temp, this will be "Physical id Y",
-		   where Y is the package number.
+
+================= ========================================================
+tempX_input	  Core temperature (in millidegrees Celsius).
+tempX_max	  All cooling devices should be turned on (on Core2).
+tempX_crit	  Maximum junction temperature (in millidegrees Celsius).
+tempX_crit_alarm  Set when Out-of-spec bit is set, never clears.
+		  Correct CPU operation is no longer guaranteed.
+tempX_label	  Contains string "Core X", where X is processor
+		  number. For Package temp, this will be "Physical id Y",
+		  where Y is the package number.
+================= ========================================================
 
 On CPU models which support it, TjMax is read from a model-specific register.
 On other models, it is set to an arbitrary value based on weak heuristics.
@@ -52,6 +64,7 @@ as a module parameter (tjmax).
 Appendix A. Known TjMax lists (TBD):
 Some information comes from ark.intel.com
 
+=============== =============================================== ================
 Process		Processor					TjMax(C)
 
 22nm		Core i5/i7 Processors
@@ -179,3 +192,4 @@ Process		Processor					TjMax(C)
 65nm		Celeron Processors
 		T1700/1600					100
 		560/550/540/530					100
+=============== =============================================== ================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/da9052 b/Documentation/hwmon/da9052.rst
index 5bc51346b689..c1c0f1f08904 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/da9052
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/da9052.rst
@@ -1,6 +1,12 @@
+Kernel driver da9052
+====================
+
 Supported chips:
+
   * Dialog Semiconductors DA9052-BC and DA9053-AA/Bx PMICs
+
     Prefix: 'da9052'
+
     Datasheet: Datasheet is not publicly available.
 
 Authors: David Dajun Chen <dchen@diasemi.com>
@@ -15,17 +21,20 @@ different inputs. The track and hold circuit ensures stable input voltages at
 the input of the ADC during the conversion.
 
 The ADC is used to measure the following inputs:
-Channel 0: VDDOUT - measurement of the system voltage
-Channel 1: ICH - internal battery charger current measurement
-Channel 2: TBAT - output from the battery NTC
-Channel 3: VBAT - measurement of the battery voltage
-Channel 4: ADC_IN4 - high impedance input (0 - 2.5V)
-Channel 5: ADC_IN5 - high impedance input (0 - 2.5V)
-Channel 6: ADC_IN6 - high impedance input (0 - 2.5V)
-Channel 7: XY - TSI interface to measure the X and Y voltage of the touch
-	   screen resistive potentiometers
-Channel 8: Internal Tjunc. - sense (internal temp. sensor)
-Channel 9: VBBAT - measurement of the backup battery voltage
+
+========= ===================================================================
+Channel 0 VDDOUT - measurement of the system voltage
+Channel 1 ICH - internal battery charger current measurement
+Channel 2 TBAT - output from the battery NTC
+Channel 3 VBAT - measurement of the battery voltage
+Channel 4 ADC_IN4 - high impedance input (0 - 2.5V)
+Channel 5 ADC_IN5 - high impedance input (0 - 2.5V)
+Channel 6 ADC_IN6 - high impedance input (0 - 2.5V)
+Channel 7 XY - TSI interface to measure the X and Y voltage of the touch
+	  screen resistive potentiometers
+Channel 8 Internal Tjunc. - sense (internal temp. sensor)
+Channel 9 VBBAT - measurement of the backup battery voltage
+========= ===================================================================
 
 By using sysfs attributes we can measure the system voltage VDDOUT, the battery
 charging current ICH, battery temperature TBAT, battery junction temperature
@@ -37,12 +46,15 @@ Voltage Monitoring
 Voltages are sampled by a 10 bit ADC.
 
 The battery voltage is calculated as:
+
 	Milli volt = ((ADC value * 1000) / 512) + 2500
 
 The backup battery voltage is calculated as:
+
 	Milli volt = (ADC value * 2500) / 512;
 
 The voltages on ADC channels 4, 5 and 6 are calculated as:
+
 	Milli volt = (ADC value * 2500) / 1023
 
 Temperature Monitoring
@@ -52,10 +64,15 @@ Temperatures are sampled by a 10 bit ADC.  Junction and battery temperatures
 are monitored by the ADC channels.
 
 The junction temperature is calculated:
+
 	Degrees celsius = 1.708 * (TJUNC_RES - T_OFFSET) - 108.8
+
 The junction temperature attribute is supported by the driver.
 
 The battery temperature is calculated:
-	Degree Celsius = 1 / (t1 + 1/298)- 273
+
+	Degree Celsius = 1 / (t1 + 1/298) - 273
+
 where t1 = (1/B)* ln(( ADCval * 2.5)/(R25*ITBAT*255))
+
 Default values of R25, B, ITBAT are 10e3, 3380 and 50e-6 respectively.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/da9055 b/Documentation/hwmon/da9055.rst
index 855c3f536e00..beae271a3312 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/da9055
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/da9055.rst
@@ -1,6 +1,11 @@
+Kernel driver da9055
+====================
+
 Supported chips:
   * Dialog Semiconductors DA9055 PMIC
+
     Prefix: 'da9055'
+
     Datasheet: Datasheet is not publicly available.
 
 Authors: David Dajun Chen <dchen@diasemi.com>
@@ -15,11 +20,12 @@ different inputs. The track and hold circuit ensures stable input voltages at
 the input of the ADC during the conversion.
 
 The ADC is used to measure the following inputs:
-Channel 0: VDDOUT - measurement of the system voltage
-Channel 1: ADC_IN1 - high impedance input (0 - 2.5V)
-Channel 2: ADC_IN2 - high impedance input (0 - 2.5V)
-Channel 3: ADC_IN3 - high impedance input (0 - 2.5V)
-Channel 4: Internal Tjunc. - sense (internal temp. sensor)
+
+- Channel 0: VDDOUT - measurement of the system voltage
+- Channel 1: ADC_IN1 - high impedance input (0 - 2.5V)
+- Channel 2: ADC_IN2 - high impedance input (0 - 2.5V)
+- Channel 3: ADC_IN3 - high impedance input (0 - 2.5V)
+- Channel 4: Internal Tjunc. - sense (internal temp. sensor)
 
 By using sysfs attributes we can measure the system voltage VDDOUT,
 chip junction temperature and auxiliary channels voltages.
@@ -31,9 +37,11 @@ Voltages are sampled in a AUTO mode it can be manually sampled too and results
 are stored in a 10 bit ADC.
 
 The system voltage is calculated as:
+
 	Milli volt = ((ADC value * 1000) / 85) + 2500
 
 The voltages on ADC channels 1, 2 and 3 are calculated as:
+
 	Milli volt = (ADC value * 1000) / 102
 
 Temperature Monitoring
@@ -43,5 +51,7 @@ Temperatures are sampled by a 10 bit ADC.  Junction temperatures
 are monitored by the ADC channels.
 
 The junction temperature is calculated:
+
 	Degrees celsius = -0.4084 * (ADC_RES - T_OFFSET) + 307.6332
+
 The junction temperature attribute is supported by the driver.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/dme1737 b/Documentation/hwmon/dme1737.rst
index 4d2935145a1c..82fcbc6b2b43 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/dme1737
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/dme1737.rst
@@ -2,21 +2,37 @@ Kernel driver dme1737
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * SMSC DME1737 and compatibles (like Asus A8000)
+
     Prefix: 'dme1737'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e
+
     Datasheet: Provided by SMSC upon request and under NDA
+
   * SMSC SCH3112, SCH3114, SCH3116
+
     Prefix: 'sch311x'
+
     Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super-I/O config space
+
     Datasheet: Available on the Internet
+
   * SMSC SCH5027
+
     Prefix: 'sch5027'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e
+
     Datasheet: Provided by SMSC upon request and under NDA
+
   * SMSC SCH5127
+
     Prefix: 'sch5127'
+
     Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super-I/O config space
+
     Datasheet: Provided by SMSC upon request and under NDA
 
 Authors:
@@ -26,11 +42,14 @@ Authors:
 Module Parameters
 -----------------
 
-* force_start: bool	Enables the monitoring of voltage, fan and temp inputs
+* force_start: bool
+			Enables the monitoring of voltage, fan and temp inputs
 			and PWM output control functions. Using this parameter
 			shouldn't be required since the BIOS usually takes care
 			of this.
-* probe_all_addr: bool	Include non-standard LPC addresses 0x162e and 0x164e
+
+* probe_all_addr: bool
+			Include non-standard LPC addresses 0x162e and 0x164e
 			when probing for ISA devices. This is required for the
 			following boards:
 			- VIA EPIA SN18000
@@ -70,7 +89,8 @@ scaling resistors. The values returned by the driver therefore reflect true
 millivolts and don't need scaling. The voltage inputs are mapped as follows
 (the last column indicates the input ranges):
 
-DME1737, A8000:
+DME1737, A8000::
+
 	in0: +5VTR	(+5V standby)		0V - 6.64V
 	in1: Vccp	(processor core)	0V - 3V
 	in2: VCC	(internal +3.3V)	0V - 4.38V
@@ -79,7 +99,8 @@ DME1737, A8000:
 	in5: VTR	(+3.3V standby)		0V - 4.38V
 	in6: Vbat	(+3.0V)			0V - 4.38V
 
-SCH311x:
+SCH311x::
+
 	in0: +2.5V				0V - 3.32V
 	in1: Vccp	(processor core)	0V - 2V
 	in2: VCC	(internal +3.3V)	0V - 4.38V
@@ -88,7 +109,8 @@ SCH311x:
 	in5: VTR	(+3.3V standby)		0V - 4.38V
 	in6: Vbat	(+3.0V)			0V - 4.38V
 
-SCH5027:
+SCH5027::
+
 	in0: +5VTR	(+5V standby)		0V - 6.64V
 	in1: Vccp	(processor core)	0V - 3V
 	in2: VCC	(internal +3.3V)	0V - 4.38V
@@ -97,7 +119,8 @@ SCH5027:
 	in5: VTR	(+3.3V standby)		0V - 4.38V
 	in6: Vbat	(+3.0V)			0V - 4.38V
 
-SCH5127:
+SCH5127::
+
 	in0: +2.5				0V - 3.32V
 	in1: Vccp	(processor core)	0V - 3V
 	in2: VCC	(internal +3.3V)	0V - 4.38V
@@ -119,7 +142,7 @@ Celsius. The chip also features offsets for all 3 temperature inputs which -
 when programmed - get added to the input readings. The chip does all the
 scaling by itself and the driver therefore reports true temperatures that don't
 need any user-space adjustments. The temperature inputs are mapped as follows
-(the last column indicates the input ranges):
+(the last column indicates the input ranges)::
 
 	temp1: Remote diode 1 (3904 type) temperature	-127C - +127C
 	temp2: DME1737 internal temperature		-127C - +127C
@@ -171,6 +194,7 @@ pwm[1-3]_auto_pwm_min, respectively. The thermal thresholds of the zones are
 programmed via zone[1-3]_auto_point[1-3]_temp and
 zone[1-3]_auto_point1_temp_hyst:
 
+	=============================== =======================================
 	pwm[1-3]_auto_point2_pwm	full-speed duty-cycle (255, i.e., 100%)
 	pwm[1-3]_auto_point1_pwm	low-speed duty-cycle
 	pwm[1-3]_auto_pwm_min		min-speed duty-cycle
@@ -179,6 +203,7 @@ zone[1-3]_auto_point1_temp_hyst:
 	zone[1-3]_auto_point2_temp	full-speed temp
 	zone[1-3]_auto_point1_temp	low-speed temp
 	zone[1-3]_auto_point1_temp_hyst	min-speed temp
+	=============================== =======================================
 
 The chip adjusts the output duty-cycle linearly in the range of auto_point1_pwm
 to auto_point2_pwm if the temperature of the associated zone is between
@@ -192,17 +217,21 @@ all PWM outputs are set to 100% duty-cycle.
 Following is another representation of how the chip sets the output duty-cycle
 based on the temperature of the associated thermal zone:
 
-			Duty-Cycle	Duty-Cycle
-	Temperature	Rising Temp	Falling Temp
-	-----------	-----------	------------
+	=============== =============== =================
+	Temperature	Duty-Cycle	Duty-Cycle
+			Rising Temp	Falling Temp
+	=============== =============== =================
 	full-speed	full-speed	full-speed
 
-			< linearly adjusted duty-cycle >
+	-		< linearly	-
+			adjusted
+			duty-cycle >
 
 	low-speed	low-speed	low-speed
-			min-speed	low-speed
+	-		min-speed	low-speed
 	min-speed	min-speed	min-speed
-			min-speed	min-speed
+	-		min-speed	min-speed
+	=============== =============== =================
 
 
 Sysfs Attributes
@@ -211,8 +240,9 @@ Sysfs Attributes
 Following is a list of all sysfs attributes that the driver provides, their
 permissions and a short description:
 
+=============================== ======= =======================================
 Name				Perm	Description
-----				----	-----------
+=============================== ======= =======================================
 cpu0_vid			RO	CPU core reference voltage in
 					millivolts.
 vrm				RW	Voltage regulator module version
@@ -242,9 +272,10 @@ temp[1-3]_fault			RO	Temp input fault. Returns 1 if the chip
 zone[1-3]_auto_channels_temp	RO	Temperature zone to temperature input
 					mapping. This attribute is a bitfield
 					and supports the following values:
-						1: temp1
-						2: temp2
-						4: temp3
+
+						- 1: temp1
+						- 2: temp2
+						- 4: temp3
 zone[1-3]_auto_point1_temp_hyst	RW	Auto PWM temp point1 hysteresis. The
 					output of the corresponding PWM is set
 					to the pwm_auto_min value if the temp
@@ -275,9 +306,10 @@ pmw[1-3,5-6]			RO/RW	Duty-cycle of PWM output. Supported
 					manual mode.
 pwm[1-3]_enable			RW	Enable of PWM outputs 1-3. Supported
 					values are:
-						 0: turned off (output @ 100%)
-						 1: manual mode
-						 2: automatic mode
+
+						- 0: turned off (output @ 100%)
+						- 1: manual mode
+						- 2: automatic mode
 pwm[5-6]_enable			RO	Enable of PWM outputs 5-6. Always
 					returns 1 since these 2 outputs are
 					hard-wired to manual mode.
@@ -294,11 +326,12 @@ pmw[1-3]_ramp_rate		RW	Ramp rate of PWM output. Determines how
 pwm[1-3]_auto_channels_zone	RW	PWM output to temperature zone mapping.
 					This attribute is a bitfield and
 					supports the following values:
-						1: zone1
-						2: zone2
-						4: zone3
-						6: highest of zone[2-3]
-						7: highest of zone[1-3]
+
+						- 1: zone1
+						- 2: zone2
+						- 4: zone3
+						- 6: highest of zone[2-3]
+						- 7: highest of zone[1-3]
 pwm[1-3]_auto_pwm_min		RW	Auto PWM min pwm. Minimum PWM duty-
 					cycle. Supported values are 0 or
 					auto_point1_pwm.
@@ -307,12 +340,14 @@ pwm[1-3]_auto_point1_pwm	RW	Auto PWM pwm point. Auto_point1 is the
 pwm[1-3]_auto_point2_pwm	RO	Auto PWM pwm point. Auto_point2 is the
 					full-speed duty-cycle which is hard-
 					wired to 255 (100% duty-cycle).
+=============================== ======= =======================================
 
 Chip Differences
 ----------------
 
+======================= ======= ======= ======= =======
 Feature			dme1737	sch311x	sch5027	sch5127
--------------------------------------------------------
+======================= ======= ======= ======= =======
 temp[1-3]_offset	yes	yes
 vid			yes
 zone3			yes	yes	yes
@@ -326,3 +361,4 @@ pwm5			opt		opt
 fan6			opt		opt
 pwm6			opt		opt
 in7						yes
+======================= ======= ======= ======= =======
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ds1621 b/Documentation/hwmon/ds1621.rst
index fa3407997795..552b37e9dd34 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/ds1621
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ds1621.rst
@@ -2,42 +2,61 @@ Kernel driver ds1621
 ====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Dallas Semiconductor / Maxim Integrated DS1621
+
     Prefix: 'ds1621'
+
     Addresses scanned: none
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available from www.maximintegrated.com
 
   * Dallas Semiconductor DS1625
+
     Prefix: 'ds1625'
+
     Addresses scanned: none
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available from www.datasheetarchive.com
 
   * Maxim Integrated DS1631
+
     Prefix: 'ds1631'
+
     Addresses scanned: none
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available from www.maximintegrated.com
 
   * Maxim Integrated DS1721
+
     Prefix: 'ds1721'
+
     Addresses scanned: none
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available from www.maximintegrated.com
 
   * Maxim Integrated DS1731
+
     Prefix: 'ds1731'
+
     Addresses scanned: none
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available from www.maximintegrated.com
 
 Authors:
-        Christian W. Zuckschwerdt <zany@triq.net>
-        valuable contributions by Jan M. Sendler <sendler@sendler.de>
-        ported to 2.6 by Aurelien Jarno <aurelien@aurel32.net>
-        with the help of Jean Delvare <jdelvare@suse.de>
+      - Christian W. Zuckschwerdt <zany@triq.net>
+      - valuable contributions by Jan M. Sendler <sendler@sendler.de>
+      - ported to 2.6 by Aurelien Jarno <aurelien@aurel32.net>
+	with the help of Jean Delvare <jdelvare@suse.de>
 
 Module Parameters
 ------------------
 
 * polarity int
-  Output's polarity: 0 = active high, 1 = active low
+  Output's polarity:
+
+  * 0 = active high,
+  * 1 = active low
 
 Description
 -----------
@@ -87,28 +106,31 @@ are used internally, however, these flags do get set and cleared as the actual
 temperature crosses the min or max settings (which by default are set to 75
 and 80 degrees respectively).
 
-Temperature Conversion:
------------------------
-DS1621 - 750ms (older devices may take up to 1000ms)
-DS1625 - 500ms
-DS1631 - 93ms..750ms for 9..12 bits resolution, respectively.
-DS1721 - 93ms..750ms for 9..12 bits resolution, respectively.
-DS1731 - 93ms..750ms for 9..12 bits resolution, respectively.
+Temperature Conversion
+----------------------
+
+- DS1621 - 750ms (older devices may take up to 1000ms)
+- DS1625 - 500ms
+- DS1631 - 93ms..750ms for 9..12 bits resolution, respectively.
+- DS1721 - 93ms..750ms for 9..12 bits resolution, respectively.
+- DS1731 - 93ms..750ms for 9..12 bits resolution, respectively.
 
 Note:
 On the DS1621, internal access to non-volatile registers may last for 10ms
 or less (unverified on the other devices).
 
-Temperature Accuracy:
----------------------
-DS1621: +/- 0.5 degree Celsius (from 0 to +70 degrees)
-DS1625: +/- 0.5 degree Celsius (from 0 to +70 degrees)
-DS1631: +/- 0.5 degree Celsius (from 0 to +70 degrees)
-DS1721: +/- 1.0 degree Celsius (from -10 to +85 degrees)
-DS1731: +/- 1.0 degree Celsius (from -10 to +85 degrees)
+Temperature Accuracy
+--------------------
 
-Note:
-Please refer to the device datasheets for accuracy at other temperatures.
+- DS1621: +/- 0.5 degree Celsius (from 0 to +70 degrees)
+- DS1625: +/- 0.5 degree Celsius (from 0 to +70 degrees)
+- DS1631: +/- 0.5 degree Celsius (from 0 to +70 degrees)
+- DS1721: +/- 1.0 degree Celsius (from -10 to +85 degrees)
+- DS1731: +/- 1.0 degree Celsius (from -10 to +85 degrees)
+
+.. Note::
+
+   Please refer to the device datasheets for accuracy at other temperatures.
 
 Temperature Resolution:
 -----------------------
@@ -117,60 +139,67 @@ support, which is achieved via the R0 and R1 config register bits, where:
 
 R0..R1
 ------
- 0  0 => 9 bits, 0.5 degrees Celsius
- 1  0 => 10 bits, 0.25 degrees Celsius
- 0  1 => 11 bits, 0.125 degrees Celsius
- 1  1 => 12 bits, 0.0625 degrees Celsius
 
-Note:
-At initial device power-on, the default resolution is set to 12-bits.
+== ==  ===============================
+R0 R1
+== ==  ===============================
+ 0  0  9 bits, 0.5 degrees Celsius
+ 1  0  10 bits, 0.25 degrees Celsius
+ 0  1  11 bits, 0.125 degrees Celsius
+ 1  1  12 bits, 0.0625 degrees Celsius
+== ==  ===============================
+
+.. Note::
+
+   At initial device power-on, the default resolution is set to 12-bits.
 
 The resolution mode for the DS1631, DS1721, or DS1731 can be changed from
 userspace, via the device 'update_interval' sysfs attribute. This attribute
 will normalize the range of input values to the device maximum resolution
 values defined in the datasheet as follows:
 
+============= ================== ===============
 Resolution    Conversion Time    Input Range
  (C/LSB)       (msec)             (msec)
-------------------------------------------------
+============= ================== ===============
 0.5             93.75              0....94
 0.25            187.5              95...187
 0.125           375                188..375
 0.0625          750                376..infinity
-------------------------------------------------
+============= ================== ===============
 
 The following examples show how the 'update_interval' attribute can be
-used to change the conversion time:
-
-$ cat update_interval
-750
-$ cat temp1_input
-22062
-$
-$ echo 300 > update_interval
-$ cat update_interval
-375
-$ cat temp1_input
-22125
-$
-$ echo 150 > update_interval
-$ cat update_interval
-188
-$ cat temp1_input
-22250
-$
-$ echo 1 > update_interval
-$ cat update_interval
-94
-$ cat temp1_input
-22000
-$
-$ echo 1000 > update_interval
-$ cat update_interval
-750
-$ cat temp1_input
-22062
-$
+used to change the conversion time::
+
+  $ cat update_interval
+  750
+  $ cat temp1_input
+  22062
+  $
+  $ echo 300 > update_interval
+  $ cat update_interval
+  375
+  $ cat temp1_input
+  22125
+  $
+  $ echo 150 > update_interval
+  $ cat update_interval
+  188
+  $ cat temp1_input
+  22250
+  $
+  $ echo 1 > update_interval
+  $ cat update_interval
+  94
+  $ cat temp1_input
+  22000
+  $
+  $ echo 1000 > update_interval
+  $ cat update_interval
+  750
+  $ cat temp1_input
+  22062
+  $
 
 As shown, the ds1621 driver automatically adjusts the 'update_interval'
 user input, via a step function. Reading back the 'update_interval' value
@@ -182,6 +211,7 @@ via the following function:
    g(x) = 0.5 * [minimum_conversion_time/x]
 
 where:
- -> 'x' = the output from 'update_interval'
- -> 'g(x)' = the resolution in degrees C per LSB.
- -> 93.75ms = minimum conversion time
+
+ - 'x' = the output from 'update_interval'
+ - 'g(x)' = the resolution in degrees C per LSB.
+ - 93.75ms = minimum conversion time
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ds620 b/Documentation/hwmon/ds620.rst
index 1fbe3cd916cc..2d686b17b547 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/ds620
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ds620.rst
@@ -2,15 +2,19 @@ Kernel driver ds620
 ===================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Dallas Semiconductor DS620
+
     Prefix: 'ds620'
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Dallas Semiconductor website
-               http://www.dalsemi.com/
+
+	       http://www.dalsemi.com/
 
 Authors:
-        Roland Stigge <stigge@antcom.de>
-        based on ds1621.c by
-        Christian W. Zuckschwerdt <zany@triq.net>
+	Roland Stigge <stigge@antcom.de>
+	based on ds1621.c by
+	Christian W. Zuckschwerdt <zany@triq.net>
 
 Description
 -----------
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/emc1403 b/Documentation/hwmon/emc1403.rst
index a869b0ef6a9d..3a4913b63ef3 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/emc1403
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/emc1403.rst
@@ -2,28 +2,48 @@ Kernel driver emc1403
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * SMSC / Microchip EMC1402, EMC1412
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18, 0x1c, 0x29, 0x4c, 0x4d, 0x5c
+
     Prefix: 'emc1402'
+
     Datasheets:
-	http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/1412.pdf
-	http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/1402.pdf
+
+	- http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/1412.pdf
+	- http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/1402.pdf
+
   * SMSC / Microchip EMC1403, EMC1404, EMC1413, EMC1414
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18, 0x29, 0x4c, 0x4d
+
     Prefix: 'emc1403', 'emc1404'
+
     Datasheets:
-	http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/1403_1404.pdf
-	http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/1413_1414.pdf
+
+	- http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/1403_1404.pdf
+	- http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/1413_1414.pdf
+
   * SMSC / Microchip EMC1422
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c
+
     Prefix: 'emc1422'
+
     Datasheet:
-	http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/1422.pdf
+
+	- http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/1422.pdf
+
   * SMSC / Microchip EMC1423, EMC1424
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c
+
     Prefix: 'emc1423', 'emc1424'
+
     Datasheet:
-	http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/1423_1424.pdf
+
+	- http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/1423_1424.pdf
 
 Author:
     Kalhan Trisal <kalhan.trisal@intel.com
@@ -46,6 +66,7 @@ difference between the limit and its hysteresis is always the same for
 all three limits.
 
 This implementation detail implies the following:
+
 * When setting a limit, its hysteresis will automatically follow, the
   difference staying unchanged. For example, if the old critical limit
   was 80 degrees C, and the hysteresis was 75 degrees C, and you change
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/emc2103 b/Documentation/hwmon/emc2103.rst
index a12b2c127140..6a6ca6d1b34e 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/emc2103
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/emc2103.rst
@@ -2,13 +2,17 @@ Kernel driver emc2103
 ======================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * SMSC EMC2103
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2e
+
     Prefix: 'emc2103'
+
     Datasheet: Not public
 
 Authors:
-        Steve Glendinning <steve.glendinning@smsc.com>
+	Steve Glendinning <steve.glendinning@smsc.com>
 
 Description
 -----------
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/emc6w201 b/Documentation/hwmon/emc6w201.rst
index 757629b12897..a8e1185b9bb6 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/emc6w201
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/emc6w201.rst
@@ -2,9 +2,13 @@ Kernel driver emc6w201
 ======================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * SMSC EMC6W201
+
     Prefix: 'emc6w201'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e
+
     Datasheet: Not public
 
 Author: Jean Delvare <jdelvare@suse.de>
@@ -38,5 +42,6 @@ Known Systems With EMC6W201
 
 The EMC6W201 is a rare device, only found on a few systems, made in
 2005 and 2006. Known systems with this device:
+
 * Dell Precision 670 workstation
 * Gigabyte 2CEWH mainboard
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/f71805f b/Documentation/hwmon/f71805f.rst
index 48a356084bc6..1efe5e5d337c 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/f71805f
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/f71805f.rst
@@ -2,17 +2,29 @@ Kernel driver f71805f
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Fintek F71805F/FG
+
     Prefix: 'f71805f'
+
     Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
+
     Datasheet: Available from the Fintek website
+
   * Fintek F71806F/FG
+
     Prefix: 'f71872f'
+
     Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
+
     Datasheet: Available from the Fintek website
+
   * Fintek F71872F/FG
+
     Prefix: 'f71872f'
+
     Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
+
     Datasheet: Available from the Fintek website
 
 Author: Jean Delvare <jdelvare@suse.de>
@@ -64,24 +76,26 @@ you can only set the limits in steps of 32 mV (before scaling).
 
 The wirings and resistor values suggested by Fintek are as follow:
 
-        pin                                           expected
-        name    use           R1      R2     divider  raw val.
-
+======= ======= =========== ==== ======= ============ ==============
+in      pin                                           expected
+	name    use           R1      R2     divider  raw val.
+======= ======= =========== ==== ======= ============ ==============
 in0     VCC     VCC3.3V     int.    int.        2.00    1.65 V
 in1     VIN1    VTT1.2V      10K       -        1.00    1.20 V
-in2     VIN2    VRAM        100K    100K        2.00   ~1.25 V (1)
-in3     VIN3    VCHIPSET     47K    100K        1.47    2.24 V (2)
+in2     VIN2    VRAM        100K    100K        2.00   ~1.25 V [1]_
+in3     VIN3    VCHIPSET     47K    100K        1.47    2.24 V [2]_
 in4     VIN4    VCC5V       200K     47K        5.25    0.95 V
 in5     VIN5    +12V        200K     20K       11.00    1.05 V
 in6     VIN6    VCC1.5V      10K       -        1.00    1.50 V
-in7     VIN7    VCORE        10K       -        1.00   ~1.40 V (1)
+in7     VIN7    VCORE        10K       -        1.00   ~1.40 V [1]_
 in8     VIN8    VSB5V       200K     47K        1.00    0.95 V
-in10    VSB     VSB3.3V     int.    int.        2.00    1.65 V (3)
-in9     VBAT    VBATTERY    int.    int.        2.00    1.50 V (3)
+in10    VSB     VSB3.3V     int.    int.        2.00    1.65 V [3]_
+in9     VBAT    VBATTERY    int.    int.        2.00    1.50 V [3]_
+======= ======= =========== ==== ======= ============ ==============
 
-(1) Depends on your hardware setup.
-(2) Obviously not correct, swapping R1 and R2 would make more sense.
-(3) F71872F/FG only.
+.. [1] Depends on your hardware setup.
+.. [2] Obviously not correct, swapping R1 and R2 would make more sense.
+.. [3] F71872F/FG only.
 
 These values can be used as hints at best, as motherboard manufacturers
 are free to use a completely different setup. As a matter of fact, the
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg b/Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg.rst
index de91c0db5846..5c0b7b0db150 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg.rst
@@ -2,60 +2,114 @@ Kernel driver f71882fg
 ======================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Fintek F71808E
+
     Prefix: 'f71808e'
+
     Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
+
     Datasheet: Not public
+
   * Fintek F71808A
+
     Prefix: 'f71808a'
+
     Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
+
     Datasheet: Not public
+
   * Fintek F71858FG
+
     Prefix: 'f71858fg'
+
     Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
+
     Datasheet: Available from the Fintek website
+
   * Fintek F71862FG and F71863FG
+
     Prefix: 'f71862fg'
+
     Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
+
     Datasheet: Available from the Fintek website
+
   * Fintek F71869F and F71869E
+
     Prefix: 'f71869'
+
     Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
+
     Datasheet: Available from the Fintek website
+
   * Fintek F71869A
+
     Prefix: 'f71869a'
+
     Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
+
     Datasheet: Not public
+
   * Fintek F71882FG and F71883FG
+
     Prefix: 'f71882fg'
+
     Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
+
     Datasheet: Available from the Fintek website
+
   * Fintek F71889FG
+
     Prefix: 'f71889fg'
+
     Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
+
     Datasheet: Available from the Fintek website
+
   * Fintek F71889ED
+
     Prefix: 'f71889ed'
+
     Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
+
     Datasheet: Should become available on the Fintek website soon
+
   * Fintek F71889A
+
     Prefix: 'f71889a'
+
     Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
+
     Datasheet: Should become available on the Fintek website soon
+
   * Fintek F8000
+
     Prefix: 'f8000'
+
     Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
+
     Datasheet: Not public
+
   * Fintek F81801U
+
     Prefix: 'f71889fg'
+
     Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
+
     Datasheet: Not public
-    Note: This is the 64-pin variant of the F71889FG, they have the
+
+    Note:
+	  This is the 64-pin variant of the F71889FG, they have the
 	  same device ID and are fully compatible as far as hardware
 	  monitoring is concerned.
+
   * Fintek F81865F
+
     Prefix: 'f81865f'
+
     Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
+
     Datasheet: Available from the Fintek website
 
 Author: Hans de Goede <hdegoede@redhat.com>
@@ -94,7 +148,7 @@ Note that the lowest numbered temperature zone trip point corresponds to
 to the border between the highest and one but highest temperature zones, and
 vica versa. So the temperature zone trip points 1-4 (or 1-2) go from high temp
 to low temp! This is how things are implemented in the IC, and the driver
-mimicks this.
+mimics this.
 
 There are 2 modes to specify the speed of the fan, PWM duty cycle (or DC
 voltage) mode, where 0-100% duty cycle (0-100% of 12V) is specified. And RPM
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/fam15h_power b/Documentation/hwmon/fam15h_power.rst
index fb594c281c46..fdde632c93a3 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/fam15h_power
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/fam15h_power.rst
@@ -2,15 +2,20 @@ Kernel driver fam15h_power
 ==========================
 
 Supported chips:
+
 * AMD Family 15h Processors
+
 * AMD Family 16h Processors
 
   Prefix: 'fam15h_power'
+
   Addresses scanned: PCI space
+
   Datasheets:
-  BIOS and Kernel Developer's Guide (BKDG) For AMD Family 15h Processors
-  BIOS and Kernel Developer's Guide (BKDG) For AMD Family 16h Processors
-  AMD64 Architecture Programmer's Manual Volume 2: System Programming
+
+  - BIOS and Kernel Developer's Guide (BKDG) For AMD Family 15h Processors
+  - BIOS and Kernel Developer's Guide (BKDG) For AMD Family 16h Processors
+  - AMD64 Architecture Programmer's Manual Volume 2: System Programming
 
 Author: Andreas Herrmann <herrmann.der.user@googlemail.com>
 
@@ -31,14 +36,19 @@ For AMD Family 15h and 16h processors the following power values can
 be calculated using different processor northbridge function
 registers:
 
-* BasePwrWatts: Specifies in watts the maximum amount of power
-  consumed by the processor for NB and logic external to the core.
-* ProcessorPwrWatts: Specifies in watts the maximum amount of power
-  the processor can support.
-* CurrPwrWatts: Specifies in watts the current amount of power being
-  consumed by the processor.
+* BasePwrWatts:
+    Specifies in watts the maximum amount of power
+    consumed by the processor for NB and logic external to the core.
+
+* ProcessorPwrWatts:
+    Specifies in watts the maximum amount of power
+    the processor can support.
+* CurrPwrWatts:
+    Specifies in watts the current amount of power being
+    consumed by the processor.
 
 This driver provides ProcessorPwrWatts and CurrPwrWatts:
+
 * power1_crit (ProcessorPwrWatts)
 * power1_input (CurrPwrWatts)
 
@@ -53,35 +63,53 @@ calculate the average power consumed by a processor during a
 measurement interval Tm. The feature of accumulated power mechanism is
 indicated by CPUID Fn8000_0007_EDX[12].
 
-* Tsample: compute unit power accumulator sample period
-* Tref: the PTSC counter period
-* PTSC: performance timestamp counter
-* N: the ratio of compute unit power accumulator sample period to the
-  PTSC period
-* Jmax: max compute unit accumulated power which is indicated by
-  MaxCpuSwPwrAcc MSR C001007b
-* Jx/Jy: compute unit accumulated power which is indicated by
-  CpuSwPwrAcc MSR C001007a
-* Tx/Ty: the value of performance timestamp counter which is indicated
-  by CU_PTSC MSR C0010280
-* PwrCPUave: CPU average power
+* Tsample:
+	compute unit power accumulator sample period
+
+* Tref:
+	the PTSC counter period
+
+* PTSC:
+	performance timestamp counter
+
+* N:
+	the ratio of compute unit power accumulator sample period to the
+	PTSC period
+
+* Jmax:
+	max compute unit accumulated power which is indicated by
+	MaxCpuSwPwrAcc MSR C001007b
+
+* Jx/Jy:
+	compute unit accumulated power which is indicated by
+	CpuSwPwrAcc MSR C001007a
+* Tx/Ty:
+	the value of performance timestamp counter which is indicated
+	by CU_PTSC MSR C0010280
+
+* PwrCPUave:
+	CPU average power
 
 i. Determine the ratio of Tsample to Tref by executing CPUID Fn8000_0007.
+
 	N = value of CPUID Fn8000_0007_ECX[CpuPwrSampleTimeRatio[15:0]].
 
 ii. Read the full range of the cumulative energy value from the new
-MSR MaxCpuSwPwrAcc.
+    MSR MaxCpuSwPwrAcc.
+
 	Jmax = value returned.
+
 iii. At time x, SW reads CpuSwPwrAcc MSR and samples the PTSC.
-	Jx = value read from CpuSwPwrAcc and Tx = value read from
-PTSC.
+
+	Jx = value read from CpuSwPwrAcc and Tx = value read from PTSC.
 
 iv. At time y, SW reads CpuSwPwrAcc MSR and samples the PTSC.
-	Jy = value read from CpuSwPwrAcc and Ty = value read from
-PTSC.
+
+	Jy = value read from CpuSwPwrAcc and Ty = value read from PTSC.
 
 v. Calculate the average power consumption for a compute unit over
-time period (y-x). Unit of result is uWatt.
+   time period (y-x). Unit of result is uWatt::
+
 	if (Jy < Jx) // Rollover has occurred
 		Jdelta = (Jy + Jmax) - Jx
 	else
@@ -90,13 +118,14 @@ time period (y-x). Unit of result is uWatt.
 
 This driver provides PwrCPUave and interval(default is 10 millisecond
 and maximum is 1 second):
+
 * power1_average (PwrCPUave)
 * power1_average_interval (Interval)
 
 The power1_average_interval can be updated at /etc/sensors3.conf file
 as below:
 
-chip "fam15h_power-*"
+chip `fam15h_power-*`
 	set power1_average_interval 0.01
 
 Then save it with "sensors -s".
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ftsteutates b/Documentation/hwmon/ftsteutates.rst
index af54db92391b..58a2483d8d0d 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/ftsteutates
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ftsteutates.rst
@@ -1,9 +1,12 @@
 Kernel driver ftsteutates
-=====================
+=========================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * FTS Teutates
+
     Prefix: 'ftsteutates'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x73 (7-Bit)
 
 Author: Thilo Cestonaro <thilo.cestonaro@ts.fujitsu.com>
@@ -11,6 +14,7 @@ Author: Thilo Cestonaro <thilo.cestonaro@ts.fujitsu.com>
 
 Description
 -----------
+
 The BMC Teutates is the Eleventh generation of Superior System
 monitoring and thermal management solution. It is builds on the basic
 functionality of the BMC Theseus and contains several new features and
@@ -19,9 +23,11 @@ enhancements. It can monitor up to 4 voltages, 16 temperatures and
 implemented in this driver.
 
 To clear a temperature or fan alarm, execute the following command with the
-correct path to the alarm file:
+correct path to the alarm file::
+
 	echo 0 >XXXX_alarm
 
 Specification of the chip can be found here:
-ftp://ftp.ts.fujitsu.com/pub/Mainboard-OEM-Sales/Services/Software&Tools/Linux_SystemMonitoring&Watchdog&GPIO/BMC-Teutates_Specification_V1.21.pdf
-ftp://ftp.ts.fujitsu.com/pub/Mainboard-OEM-Sales/Services/Software&Tools/Linux_SystemMonitoring&Watchdog&GPIO/Fujitsu_mainboards-1-Sensors_HowTo-en-US.pdf
+
+- ftp://ftp.ts.fujitsu.com/pub/Mainboard-OEM-Sales/Services/Software&Tools/Linux_SystemMonitoring&Watchdog&GPIO/BMC-Teutates_Specification_V1.21.pdf
+- ftp://ftp.ts.fujitsu.com/pub/Mainboard-OEM-Sales/Services/Software&Tools/Linux_SystemMonitoring&Watchdog&GPIO/Fujitsu_mainboards-1-Sensors_HowTo-en-US.pdf
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/g760a b/Documentation/hwmon/g760a.rst
index cfc894537061..d82952cc8319 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/g760a
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/g760a.rst
@@ -2,9 +2,13 @@ Kernel driver g760a
 ===================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Global Mixed-mode Technology Inc. G760A
+
     Prefix: 'g760a'
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the GMT website
+
       http://www.gmt.com.tw/product/datasheet/EDS-760A.pdf
 
 Author: Herbert Valerio Riedel <hvr@gnu.org>
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/g762 b/Documentation/hwmon/g762.rst
index 923db9c5b5bc..0371b3365c48 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/g762
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/g762.rst
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ modes - PWM or DC - are supported by the device.
 
 For additional information, a detailed datasheet is available at
 http://natisbad.org/NAS/ref/GMT_EDS-762_763-080710-0.2.pdf. sysfs
-bindings are described in Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface.
+bindings are described in Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface.rst.
 
 The following entries are available to the user in a subdirectory of
 /sys/bus/i2c/drivers/g762/ to control the operation of the device.
@@ -21,34 +21,43 @@ documented in Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/g762.txt or
 using a specific platform_data structure in board initialization
 file (see include/linux/platform_data/g762.h).
 
-  fan1_target: set desired fan speed. This only makes sense in closed-loop
-            fan speed control (i.e. when pwm1_enable is set to 2).
+  fan1_target:
+	    set desired fan speed. This only makes sense in closed-loop
+	    fan speed control (i.e. when pwm1_enable is set to 2).
 
-  fan1_input: provide current fan rotation value in RPM as reported by
-            the fan to the device.
+  fan1_input:
+	    provide current fan rotation value in RPM as reported by
+	    the fan to the device.
 
-  fan1_div: fan clock divisor. Supported value are 1, 2, 4 and 8.
+  fan1_div:
+	    fan clock divisor. Supported value are 1, 2, 4 and 8.
 
-  fan1_pulses: number of pulses per fan revolution. Supported values
-            are 2 and 4.
+  fan1_pulses:
+	    number of pulses per fan revolution. Supported values
+	    are 2 and 4.
 
-  fan1_fault: reports fan failure, i.e. no transition on fan gear pin for
-            about 0.7s (if the fan is not voluntarily set off).
+  fan1_fault:
+	    reports fan failure, i.e. no transition on fan gear pin for
+	    about 0.7s (if the fan is not voluntarily set off).
 
-  fan1_alarm: in closed-loop control mode, if fan RPM value is 25% out
-            of the programmed value for over 6 seconds 'fan1_alarm' is
-            set to 1.
+  fan1_alarm:
+	    in closed-loop control mode, if fan RPM value is 25% out
+	    of the programmed value for over 6 seconds 'fan1_alarm' is
+	    set to 1.
 
-  pwm1_enable: set current fan speed control mode i.e. 1 for manual fan
-            speed control (open-loop) via pwm1 described below, 2 for
-            automatic fan speed control (closed-loop) via fan1_target
-            above.
+  pwm1_enable:
+	    set current fan speed control mode i.e. 1 for manual fan
+	    speed control (open-loop) via pwm1 described below, 2 for
+	    automatic fan speed control (closed-loop) via fan1_target
+	    above.
 
-  pwm1_mode: set or get fan driving mode: 1 for PWM mode, 0 for DC mode.
+  pwm1_mode:
+	    set or get fan driving mode: 1 for PWM mode, 0 for DC mode.
 
-  pwm1: get or set PWM fan control value in open-loop mode. This is an
-            integer value between 0 and 255. 0 stops the fan, 255 makes
-            it run at full speed.
+  pwm1:
+	    get or set PWM fan control value in open-loop mode. This is an
+	    integer value between 0 and 255. 0 stops the fan, 255 makes
+	    it run at full speed.
 
 Both in PWM mode ('pwm1_mode' set to 1) and DC mode ('pwm1_mode' set to 0),
 when current fan speed control mode is open-loop ('pwm1_enable' set to 1),
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/gl518sm b/Documentation/hwmon/gl518sm.rst
index 494bb55b6e72..bf1e0b5e824b 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/gl518sm
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/gl518sm.rst
@@ -2,27 +2,34 @@ Kernel driver gl518sm
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Genesys Logic GL518SM release 0x00
+
     Prefix: 'gl518sm'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c and 0x2d
+
   * Genesys Logic GL518SM release 0x80
+
     Prefix: 'gl518sm'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c and 0x2d
+
     Datasheet: http://www.genesyslogic.com/
 
 Authors:
-        Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>,
-        Kyösti Mälkki <kmalkki@cc.hut.fi>
-        Hong-Gunn Chew <hglinux@gunnet.org>
-        Jean Delvare <jdelvare@suse.de>
+       - Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>,
+       - Kyösti Mälkki <kmalkki@cc.hut.fi>
+       - Hong-Gunn Chew <hglinux@gunnet.org>
+       - Jean Delvare <jdelvare@suse.de>
 
 Description
 -----------
 
-IMPORTANT:
+.. important::
 
-For the revision 0x00 chip, the in0, in1, and in2  values (+5V, +3V,
-and +12V) CANNOT be read. This is a limitation of the chip, not the driver.
+   For the revision 0x00 chip, the in0, in1, and in2  values (+5V, +3V,
+   and +12V) CANNOT be read. This is a limitation of the chip, not the driver.
 
 This driver supports the Genesys Logic GL518SM chip. There are at least
 two revision of this chip, which we call revision 0x00 and 0x80. Revision
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/hih6130 b/Documentation/hwmon/hih6130.rst
index 73dae918ea7b..649bd4be4fc2 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/hih6130
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/hih6130.rst
@@ -2,11 +2,16 @@ Kernel driver hih6130
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Honeywell HIH-6130 / HIH-6131
+
     Prefix: 'hih6130'
+
     Addresses scanned: none
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Honeywell website
-    http://sensing.honeywell.com/index.php?ci_id=3106&la_id=1&defId=44872
+
+	http://sensing.honeywell.com/index.php?ci_id=3106&la_id=1&defId=44872
 
 Author:
   Iain Paton <ipaton0@gmail.com>
@@ -28,8 +33,11 @@ instantiate I2C devices.
 sysfs-Interface
 ---------------
 
-temp1_input - temperature input
-humidity1_input - humidity input
+temp1_input
+	temperature input
+
+humidity1_input
+	humidity input
 
 Notes
 -----
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/hwmon-kernel-api.txt b/Documentation/hwmon/hwmon-kernel-api.rst
index 8bdefb41be30..c41eb6108103 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/hwmon-kernel-api.txt
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/hwmon-kernel-api.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-The Linux Hardware Monitoring kernel API.
-=========================================
+The Linux Hardware Monitoring kernel API
+========================================
 
 Guenter Roeck
 
@@ -12,42 +12,43 @@ drivers that want to use the hardware monitoring framework.
 This document does not describe what a hardware monitoring (hwmon) Driver or
 Device is. It also does not describe the API which can be used by user space
 to communicate with a hardware monitoring device. If you want to know this
-then please read the following file: Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface.
+then please read the following file: Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface.rst.
 
 For additional guidelines on how to write and improve hwmon drivers, please
-also read Documentation/hwmon/submitting-patches.
+also read Documentation/hwmon/submitting-patches.rst.
 
 The API
 -------
 Each hardware monitoring driver must #include <linux/hwmon.h> and, in most
 cases, <linux/hwmon-sysfs.h>. linux/hwmon.h declares the following
-register/unregister functions:
-
-struct device *
-hwmon_device_register_with_groups(struct device *dev, const char *name,
-				  void *drvdata,
-				  const struct attribute_group **groups);
-
-struct device *
-devm_hwmon_device_register_with_groups(struct device *dev,
-				       const char *name, void *drvdata,
-				       const struct attribute_group **groups);
-
-struct device *
-hwmon_device_register_with_info(struct device *dev,
-				const char *name, void *drvdata,
-				const struct hwmon_chip_info *info,
-				const struct attribute_group **extra_groups);
-
-struct device *
-devm_hwmon_device_register_with_info(struct device *dev,
-				const char *name,
-				void *drvdata,
-				const struct hwmon_chip_info *info,
-				const struct attribute_group **extra_groups);
-
-void hwmon_device_unregister(struct device *dev);
-void devm_hwmon_device_unregister(struct device *dev);
+register/unregister functions::
+
+  struct device *
+  hwmon_device_register_with_groups(struct device *dev, const char *name,
+				    void *drvdata,
+				    const struct attribute_group **groups);
+
+  struct device *
+  devm_hwmon_device_register_with_groups(struct device *dev,
+					 const char *name, void *drvdata,
+					 const struct attribute_group **groups);
+
+  struct device *
+  hwmon_device_register_with_info(struct device *dev,
+				  const char *name, void *drvdata,
+				  const struct hwmon_chip_info *info,
+				  const struct attribute_group **extra_groups);
+
+  struct device *
+  devm_hwmon_device_register_with_info(struct device *dev,
+				       const char *name,
+				       void *drvdata,
+				       const struct hwmon_chip_info *info,
+				       const struct attribute_group **extra_groups);
+
+  void hwmon_device_unregister(struct device *dev);
+
+  void devm_hwmon_device_unregister(struct device *dev);
 
 hwmon_device_register_with_groups registers a hardware monitoring device.
 The first parameter of this function is a pointer to the parent device.
@@ -100,78 +101,89 @@ Using devm_hwmon_device_register_with_info()
 hwmon_device_register_with_info() registers a hardware monitoring device.
 The parameters to this function are
 
-struct device *dev	Pointer to parent device
-const char *name	Device name
-void *drvdata		Driver private data
-const struct hwmon_chip_info *info
-			Pointer to chip description.
-const struct attribute_group **extra_groups
-			Null-terminated list of additional non-standard
-			sysfs attribute groups.
+=============================================== ===============================================
+`struct device *dev`				Pointer to parent device
+`const char *name`				Device name
+`void *drvdata`					Driver private data
+`const struct hwmon_chip_info *info`		Pointer to chip description.
+`const struct attribute_group **extra_groups` 	Null-terminated list of additional non-standard
+						sysfs attribute groups.
+=============================================== ===============================================
 
 This function returns a pointer to the created hardware monitoring device
 on success and a negative error code for failure.
 
-The hwmon_chip_info structure looks as follows.
+The hwmon_chip_info structure looks as follows::
 
-struct hwmon_chip_info {
-	const struct hwmon_ops *ops;
-	const struct hwmon_channel_info **info;
-};
+	struct hwmon_chip_info {
+		const struct hwmon_ops *ops;
+		const struct hwmon_channel_info **info;
+	};
 
 It contains the following fields:
 
-* ops:	Pointer to device operations.
-* info: NULL-terminated list of device channel descriptors.
+* ops:
+	Pointer to device operations.
+* info:
+	NULL-terminated list of device channel descriptors.
 
-The list of hwmon operations is defined as:
+The list of hwmon operations is defined as::
 
-struct hwmon_ops {
+  struct hwmon_ops {
 	umode_t (*is_visible)(const void *, enum hwmon_sensor_types type,
 			      u32 attr, int);
 	int (*read)(struct device *, enum hwmon_sensor_types type,
 		    u32 attr, int, long *);
 	int (*write)(struct device *, enum hwmon_sensor_types type,
 		     u32 attr, int, long);
-};
+  };
 
 It defines the following operations.
 
-* is_visible: Pointer to a function to return the file mode for each supported
-  attribute. This function is mandatory.
+* is_visible:
+    Pointer to a function to return the file mode for each supported
+    attribute. This function is mandatory.
 
-* read: Pointer to a function for reading a value from the chip. This function
-  is optional, but must be provided if any readable attributes exist.
+* read:
+    Pointer to a function for reading a value from the chip. This function
+    is optional, but must be provided if any readable attributes exist.
 
-* write: Pointer to a function for writing a value to the chip. This function is
-  optional, but must be provided if any writeable attributes exist.
+* write:
+    Pointer to a function for writing a value to the chip. This function is
+    optional, but must be provided if any writeable attributes exist.
 
 Each sensor channel is described with struct hwmon_channel_info, which is
-defined as follows.
+defined as follows::
 
-struct hwmon_channel_info {
-	enum hwmon_sensor_types type;
-	u32 *config;
-};
+	struct hwmon_channel_info {
+		enum hwmon_sensor_types type;
+		u32 *config;
+	};
 
 It contains following fields:
 
-* type: The hardware monitoring sensor type.
-  Supported sensor types are
-  * hwmon_chip		A virtual sensor type, used to describe attributes
-  *			which are not bound to a specific input or output
-  * hwmon_temp		Temperature sensor
-  * hwmon_in		Voltage sensor
-  * hwmon_curr		Current sensor
-  * hwmon_power		Power sensor
-  * hwmon_energy	Energy sensor
-  * hwmon_humidity	Humidity sensor
-  * hwmon_fan		Fan speed sensor
-  * hwmon_pwm		PWM control
-
-* config: Pointer to a 0-terminated list of configuration values for each
-  sensor of the given type. Each value is a combination of bit values
-  describing the attributes supposed by a single sensor.
+* type:
+    The hardware monitoring sensor type.
+
+    Supported sensor types are
+
+     ================== ==================================================
+     hwmon_chip		A virtual sensor type, used to describe attributes
+			which are not bound to a specific input or output
+     hwmon_temp		Temperature sensor
+     hwmon_in		Voltage sensor
+     hwmon_curr		Current sensor
+     hwmon_power		Power sensor
+     hwmon_energy	Energy sensor
+     hwmon_humidity	Humidity sensor
+     hwmon_fan		Fan speed sensor
+     hwmon_pwm		PWM control
+     ================== ==================================================
+
+* config:
+    Pointer to a 0-terminated list of configuration values for each
+    sensor of the given type. Each value is a combination of bit values
+    describing the attributes supposed by a single sensor.
 
 As an example, here is the complete description file for a LM75 compatible
 sensor chip. The chip has a single temperature sensor. The driver wants to
@@ -179,48 +191,62 @@ register with the thermal subsystem (HWMON_C_REGISTER_TZ), and it supports
 the update_interval attribute (HWMON_C_UPDATE_INTERVAL). The chip supports
 reading the temperature (HWMON_T_INPUT), it has a maximum temperature
 register (HWMON_T_MAX) as well as a maximum temperature hysteresis register
-(HWMON_T_MAX_HYST).
-
-static const u32 lm75_chip_config[] = {
-	HWMON_C_REGISTER_TZ | HWMON_C_UPDATE_INTERVAL,
-	0
-};
-
-static const struct hwmon_channel_info lm75_chip = {
-	.type = hwmon_chip,
-	.config = lm75_chip_config,
-};
-
-static const u32 lm75_temp_config[] = {
-	HWMON_T_INPUT | HWMON_T_MAX | HWMON_T_MAX_HYST,
-	0
-};
-
-static const struct hwmon_channel_info lm75_temp = {
-	.type = hwmon_temp,
-	.config = lm75_temp_config,
-};
-
-static const struct hwmon_channel_info *lm75_info[] = {
-	&lm75_chip,
-	&lm75_temp,
-	NULL
-};
-
-static const struct hwmon_ops lm75_hwmon_ops = {
-	.is_visible = lm75_is_visible,
-	.read = lm75_read,
-	.write = lm75_write,
-};
-
-static const struct hwmon_chip_info lm75_chip_info = {
-	.ops = &lm75_hwmon_ops,
-	.info = lm75_info,
-};
+(HWMON_T_MAX_HYST)::
+
+	static const u32 lm75_chip_config[] = {
+		HWMON_C_REGISTER_TZ | HWMON_C_UPDATE_INTERVAL,
+		0
+	};
+
+	static const struct hwmon_channel_info lm75_chip = {
+		.type = hwmon_chip,
+		.config = lm75_chip_config,
+	};
+
+	static const u32 lm75_temp_config[] = {
+		HWMON_T_INPUT | HWMON_T_MAX | HWMON_T_MAX_HYST,
+		0
+	};
+
+	static const struct hwmon_channel_info lm75_temp = {
+		.type = hwmon_temp,
+		.config = lm75_temp_config,
+	};
+
+	static const struct hwmon_channel_info *lm75_info[] = {
+		&lm75_chip,
+		&lm75_temp,
+		NULL
+	};
+
+	The HWMON_CHANNEL_INFO() macro can and should be used when possible.
+	With this macro, the above example can be simplified to
+
+	static const struct hwmon_channel_info *lm75_info[] = {
+		HWMON_CHANNEL_INFO(chip,
+				HWMON_C_REGISTER_TZ | HWMON_C_UPDATE_INTERVAL),
+		HWMON_CHANNEL_INFO(temp,
+				HWMON_T_INPUT | HWMON_T_MAX | HWMON_T_MAX_HYST),
+		NULL
+	};
+
+	The remaining declarations are as follows.
+
+	static const struct hwmon_ops lm75_hwmon_ops = {
+		.is_visible = lm75_is_visible,
+		.read = lm75_read,
+		.write = lm75_write,
+	};
+
+	static const struct hwmon_chip_info lm75_chip_info = {
+		.ops = &lm75_hwmon_ops,
+		.info = lm75_info,
+	};
 
 A complete list of bit values indicating individual attribute support
 is defined in include/linux/hwmon.h. Definition prefixes are as follows.
 
+=============== =================================================
 HWMON_C_xxxx	Chip attributes, for use with hwmon_chip.
 HWMON_T_xxxx	Temperature attributes, for use with hwmon_temp.
 HWMON_I_xxxx	Voltage attributes, for use with hwmon_in.
@@ -231,57 +257,76 @@ HWMON_E_xxxx	Energy attributes, for use with hwmon_energy.
 HWMON_H_xxxx	Humidity attributes, for use with hwmon_humidity.
 HWMON_F_xxxx	Fan speed attributes, for use with hwmon_fan.
 HWMON_PWM_xxxx	PWM control attributes, for use with hwmon_pwm.
+=============== =================================================
 
 Driver callback functions
 -------------------------
 
 Each driver provides is_visible, read, and write functions. Parameters
-and return values for those functions are as follows.
+and return values for those functions are as follows::
 
-umode_t is_visible_func(const void *data, enum hwmon_sensor_types type,
-			u32 attr, int channel)
+  umode_t is_visible_func(const void *data, enum hwmon_sensor_types type,
+			  u32 attr, int channel)
 
 Parameters:
-	data:	Pointer to device private data structure.
-	type:	The sensor type.
-	attr:	Attribute identifier associated with a specific attribute.
+	data:
+		Pointer to device private data structure.
+	type:
+		The sensor type.
+	attr:
+		Attribute identifier associated with a specific attribute.
 		For example, the attribute value for HWMON_T_INPUT would be
 		hwmon_temp_input. For complete mappings of bit fields to
 		attribute values please see include/linux/hwmon.h.
-	channel:The sensor channel number.
+	channel:
+		The sensor channel number.
 
 Return value:
 	The file mode for this attribute. Typically, this will be 0 (the
 	attribute will not be created), S_IRUGO, or 'S_IRUGO | S_IWUSR'.
 
-int read_func(struct device *dev, enum hwmon_sensor_types type,
-	      u32 attr, int channel, long *val)
+::
+
+	int read_func(struct device *dev, enum hwmon_sensor_types type,
+		      u32 attr, int channel, long *val)
 
 Parameters:
-	dev:	Pointer to the hardware monitoring device.
-	type:	The sensor type.
-	attr:	Attribute identifier associated with a specific attribute.
+	dev:
+		Pointer to the hardware monitoring device.
+	type:
+		The sensor type.
+	attr:
+		Attribute identifier associated with a specific attribute.
 		For example, the attribute value for HWMON_T_INPUT would be
 		hwmon_temp_input. For complete mappings please see
 		include/linux/hwmon.h.
-	channel:The sensor channel number.
-	val:	Pointer to attribute value.
+	channel:
+		The sensor channel number.
+	val:
+		Pointer to attribute value.
 
 Return value:
 	0 on success, a negative error number otherwise.
 
-int write_func(struct device *dev, enum hwmon_sensor_types type,
-	       u32 attr, int channel, long val)
+::
+
+	int write_func(struct device *dev, enum hwmon_sensor_types type,
+		       u32 attr, int channel, long val)
 
 Parameters:
-	dev:	Pointer to the hardware monitoring device.
-	type:	The sensor type.
-	attr:	Attribute identifier associated with a specific attribute.
+	dev:
+		Pointer to the hardware monitoring device.
+	type:
+		The sensor type.
+	attr:
+		Attribute identifier associated with a specific attribute.
 		For example, the attribute value for HWMON_T_INPUT would be
 		hwmon_temp_input. For complete mappings please see
 		include/linux/hwmon.h.
-	channel:The sensor channel number.
-	val:	The value to write to the chip.
+	channel:
+		The sensor channel number.
+	val:
+		The value to write to the chip.
 
 Return value:
 	0 on success, a negative error number otherwise.
@@ -317,25 +362,25 @@ Standard functions, similar to DEVICE_ATTR_{RW,RO,WO}, have _show and _store
 appended to the provided function name.
 
 SENSOR_DEVICE_ATTR and its variants define a struct sensor_device_attribute
-variable. This structure has the following fields.
+variable. This structure has the following fields::
 
-struct sensor_device_attribute {
-	struct device_attribute dev_attr;
-	int index;
-};
+	struct sensor_device_attribute {
+		struct device_attribute dev_attr;
+		int index;
+	};
 
 You can use to_sensor_dev_attr to get the pointer to this structure from the
 attribute read or write function. Its parameter is the device to which the
 attribute is attached.
 
 SENSOR_DEVICE_ATTR_2 and its variants define a struct sensor_device_attribute_2
-variable, which is defined as follows.
+variable, which is defined as follows::
 
-struct sensor_device_attribute_2 {
-	struct device_attribute dev_attr;
-	u8 index;
-	u8 nr;
-};
+	struct sensor_device_attribute_2 {
+		struct device_attribute dev_attr;
+		u8 index;
+		u8 nr;
+	};
 
 Use to_sensor_dev_attr_2 to get the pointer to this structure. Its parameter
 is the device to which the attribute is attached.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ibm-cffps b/Documentation/hwmon/ibm-cffps.rst
index e05ecd8ecfcf..52e74e39463a 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/ibm-cffps
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ibm-cffps.rst
@@ -2,6 +2,7 @@ Kernel driver ibm-cffps
 =======================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * IBM Common Form Factor power supply
 
 Author: Eddie James <eajames@us.ibm.com>
@@ -24,6 +25,7 @@ Sysfs entries
 
 The following attributes are supported:
 
+======================= ======================================================
 curr1_alarm		Output current over-current alarm.
 curr1_input		Measured output current in mA.
 curr1_label		"iout1"
@@ -52,3 +54,4 @@ temp2_alarm		Secondary rectifier temp over-temperature alarm.
 temp2_input		Measured secondary rectifier temp in millidegrees C.
 temp3_alarm		ORing FET temperature over-temperature alarm.
 temp3_input		Measured ORing FET temperature in millidegrees C.
+======================= ======================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ibmaem b/Documentation/hwmon/ibmaem.rst
index 1e0d59e000b4..f07a14a1c2f5 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/ibmaem
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ibmaem.rst
@@ -1,15 +1,21 @@
 Kernel driver ibmaem
-======================
+====================
 
 This driver talks to the IBM Systems Director Active Energy Manager, known
 henceforth as AEM.
 
 Supported systems:
+
   * Any recent IBM System X server with AEM support.
+
     This includes the x3350, x3550, x3650, x3655, x3755, x3850 M2,
-    x3950 M2, and certain HC10/HS2x/LS2x/QS2x blades.  The IPMI host interface
+    x3950 M2, and certain HC10/HS2x/LS2x/QS2x blades.
+
+    The IPMI host interface
     driver ("ipmi-si") needs to be loaded for this driver to do anything.
+
     Prefix: 'ibmaem'
+
     Datasheet: Not available
 
 Author: Darrick J. Wong
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ibmpowernv b/Documentation/hwmon/ibmpowernv.rst
index 56468258711f..5d642bc3dec0 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/ibmpowernv
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ibmpowernv.rst
@@ -2,6 +2,7 @@ Kernel Driver IBMPOWERNV
 ========================
 
 Supported systems:
+
   * Any recent IBM P servers based on POWERNV platform
 
 Author: Neelesh Gupta
@@ -29,10 +30,11 @@ CONFIG_SENSORS_IBMPOWERNV. It can also be built as module 'ibmpowernv'.
 Sysfs attributes
 ----------------
 
+======================= =======================================================
 fanX_input		Measured RPM value.
 fanX_min		Threshold RPM for alert generation.
-fanX_fault		0: No fail condition
-			1: Failing fan
+fanX_fault		- 0: No fail condition
+			- 1: Failing fan
 
 tempX_input		Measured ambient temperature.
 tempX_max		Threshold ambient temperature for alert generation.
@@ -42,20 +44,22 @@ tempX_enable		Enable/disable all temperature sensors belonging to the
 			sub-group. In POWER9, this attribute corresponds to
 			each OCC. Using this attribute each OCC can be asked to
 			disable/enable all of its temperature sensors.
-			1: Enable
-			0: Disable
+
+			- 1: Enable
+			- 0: Disable
 
 inX_input		Measured power supply voltage (millivolt)
-inX_fault		0: No fail condition.
-			1: Failing power supply.
+inX_fault		- 0: No fail condition.
+			- 1: Failing power supply.
 inX_highest		Historical maximum voltage
 inX_lowest		Historical minimum voltage
 inX_enable		Enable/disable all voltage sensors belonging to the
 			sub-group. In POWER9, this attribute corresponds to
 			each OCC. Using this attribute each OCC can be asked to
 			disable/enable all of its voltage sensors.
-			1: Enable
-			0: Disable
+
+			- 1: Enable
+			- 0: Disable
 
 powerX_input		Power consumption (microWatt)
 powerX_input_highest	Historical maximum power
@@ -64,8 +68,9 @@ powerX_enable		Enable/disable all power sensors belonging to the
 			sub-group. In POWER9, this attribute corresponds to
 			each OCC. Using this attribute each OCC can be asked to
 			disable/enable all of its power sensors.
-			1: Enable
-			0: Disable
+
+			- 1: Enable
+			- 0: Disable
 
 currX_input		Measured current (milliampere)
 currX_highest		Historical maximum current
@@ -74,7 +79,9 @@ currX_enable		Enable/disable all current sensors belonging to the
 			sub-group. In POWER9, this attribute corresponds to
 			each OCC. Using this attribute each OCC can be asked to
 			disable/enable all of its current sensors.
-			1: Enable
-			0: Disable
+
+			- 1: Enable
+			- 0: Disable
 
 energyX_input		Cumulative energy (microJoule)
+======================= =======================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ina209 b/Documentation/hwmon/ina209.rst
index 672501de4509..64322075a145 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/ina209
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ina209.rst
@@ -1,16 +1,21 @@
 Kernel driver ina209
-=====================
+====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Burr-Brown / Texas Instruments INA209
+
     Prefix: 'ina209'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet:
-        http://www.ti.com/lit/gpn/ina209
+	http://www.ti.com/lit/gpn/ina209
 
-Author: Paul Hays <Paul.Hays@cattail.ca>
-Author: Ira W. Snyder <iws@ovro.caltech.edu>
-Author: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
+Author:
+	- Paul Hays <Paul.Hays@cattail.ca>
+	- Ira W. Snyder <iws@ovro.caltech.edu>
+	- Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
 
 
 Description
@@ -31,7 +36,7 @@ the I2C bus. See the datasheet for details.
 This tries to expose most monitoring features of the hardware via
 sysfs. It does not support every feature of this chip.
 
-
+======================= =======================================================
 in0_input		shunt voltage (mV)
 in0_input_highest	shunt voltage historical maximum reading (mV)
 in0_input_lowest	shunt voltage historical minimum reading (mV)
@@ -70,6 +75,7 @@ curr1_input		current measurement (mA)
 
 update_interval		data conversion time; affects number of samples used
 			to average results for shunt and bus voltages.
+======================= =======================================================
 
 General Remarks
 ---------------
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ina2xx b/Documentation/hwmon/ina2xx.rst
index 0f36c021192d..94b9a260c518 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/ina2xx
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ina2xx.rst
@@ -2,35 +2,56 @@ Kernel driver ina2xx
 ====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Texas Instruments INA219
+
+
     Prefix: 'ina219'
     Addresses: I2C 0x40 - 0x4f
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Texas Instruments website
-               http://www.ti.com/
+
+	       http://www.ti.com/
 
   * Texas Instruments INA220
+
     Prefix: 'ina220'
+
     Addresses: I2C 0x40 - 0x4f
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Texas Instruments website
-               http://www.ti.com/
+
+	       http://www.ti.com/
 
   * Texas Instruments INA226
+
     Prefix: 'ina226'
+
     Addresses: I2C 0x40 - 0x4f
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Texas Instruments website
-               http://www.ti.com/
+
+	       http://www.ti.com/
 
   * Texas Instruments INA230
+
     Prefix: 'ina230'
+
     Addresses: I2C 0x40 - 0x4f
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Texas Instruments website
-               http://www.ti.com/
+
+	       http://www.ti.com/
 
   * Texas Instruments INA231
+
     Prefix: 'ina231'
+
     Addresses: I2C 0x40 - 0x4f
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Texas Instruments website
-               http://www.ti.com/
+
+	       http://www.ti.com/
 
 Author: Lothar Felten <lothar.felten@gmail.com>
 
@@ -57,23 +78,27 @@ refer to the Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/ina2xx.txt for bindings
 if the device tree is used.
 
 Additionally ina226 supports update_interval attribute as described in
-Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface. Internally the interval is the sum of
+Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface.rst. Internally the interval is the sum of
 bus and shunt voltage conversion times multiplied by the averaging rate. We
 don't touch the conversion times and only modify the number of averages. The
 lower limit of the update_interval is 2 ms, the upper limit is 2253 ms.
 The actual programmed interval may vary from the desired value.
 
 General sysfs entries
--------------
+---------------------
 
+======================= ===============================
 in0_input		Shunt voltage(mV) channel
 in1_input		Bus voltage(mV) channel
 curr1_input		Current(mA) measurement channel
 power1_input		Power(uW) measurement channel
 shunt_resistor		Shunt resistance(uOhm) channel
+======================= ===============================
 
 Sysfs entries for ina226, ina230 and ina231 only
--------------
+------------------------------------------------
 
+======================= ====================================================
 update_interval		data conversion time; affects number of samples used
 			to average results for shunt and bus voltages.
+======================= ====================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ina3221 b/Documentation/hwmon/ina3221.rst
index 4b82cbfb551c..f6007ae8f4e2 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/ina3221
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ina3221.rst
@@ -2,11 +2,16 @@ Kernel driver ina3221
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Texas Instruments INA3221
+
     Prefix: 'ina3221'
+
     Addresses: I2C 0x40 - 0x43
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Texas Instruments website
-               http://www.ti.com/
+
+	       http://www.ti.com/
 
 Author: Andrew F. Davis <afd@ti.com>
 
@@ -21,17 +26,37 @@ and power are calculated host-side from these.
 Sysfs entries
 -------------
 
+======================= =======================================================
 in[123]_label           Voltage channel labels
 in[123]_enable          Voltage channel enable controls
 in[123]_input           Bus voltage(mV) channels
 curr[123]_input         Current(mA) measurement channels
 shunt[123]_resistor     Shunt resistance(uOhm) channels
 curr[123]_crit          Critical alert current(mA) setting, activates the
-                          corresponding alarm when the respective current
-                          is above this value
+			corresponding alarm when the respective current
+			is above this value
 curr[123]_crit_alarm    Critical alert current limit exceeded
 curr[123]_max           Warning alert current(mA) setting, activates the
-                          corresponding alarm when the respective current
-                          average is above this value.
+			corresponding alarm when the respective current
+			average is above this value.
 curr[123]_max_alarm     Warning alert current limit exceeded
 in[456]_input           Shunt voltage(uV) for channels 1, 2, and 3 respectively
+samples                 Number of samples using in the averaging mode.
+
+                        Supports the list of number of samples:
+
+                          1, 4, 16, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024
+
+update_interval         Data conversion time in millisecond, following:
+
+                          update_interval = C x S x (BC + SC)
+
+                          * C:	number of enabled channels
+                          * S:	number of samples
+                          * BC:	bus-voltage conversion time in millisecond
+                          * SC:	shunt-voltage conversion time in millisecond
+
+                        Affects both Bus- and Shunt-voltage conversion time.
+                        Note that setting update_interval to 0ms sets both BC
+                        and SC to 140 us (minimum conversion time).
+======================= =======================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/index.rst b/Documentation/hwmon/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ee090e51653a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,182 @@
+=========================
+Linux Hardware Monitoring
+=========================
+
+.. toctree::
+   :maxdepth: 1
+
+   hwmon-kernel-api
+   pmbus-core
+   submitting-patches
+   sysfs-interface
+   userspace-tools
+
+Hardware Monitoring Kernel Drivers
+==================================
+
+.. toctree::
+   :maxdepth: 1
+
+   ab8500
+   abituguru
+   abituguru3
+   abx500
+   acpi_power_meter
+   ad7314
+   adc128d818
+   adm1021
+   adm1025
+   adm1026
+   adm1031
+   adm1275
+   adm9240
+   ads1015
+   ads7828
+   adt7410
+   adt7411
+   adt7462
+   adt7470
+   adt7475
+   amc6821
+   asb100
+   asc7621
+   aspeed-pwm-tacho
+   coretemp
+   da9052
+   da9055
+   dme1737
+   ds1621
+   ds620
+   emc1403
+   emc2103
+   emc6w201
+   f71805f
+   f71882fg
+   fam15h_power
+   ftsteutates
+   g760a
+   g762
+   gl518sm
+   hih6130
+   ibmaem
+   ibm-cffps
+   ibmpowernv
+   ina209
+   ina2xx
+   ina3221
+   ir35221
+   ir38064
+   isl68137
+   it87
+   jc42
+   k10temp
+   k8temp
+   lineage-pem
+   lm25066
+   lm63
+   lm70
+   lm73
+   lm75
+   lm77
+   lm78
+   lm80
+   lm83
+   lm85
+   lm87
+   lm90
+   lm92
+   lm93
+   lm95234
+   lm95245
+   lochnagar
+   ltc2945
+   ltc2978
+   ltc2990
+   ltc3815
+   ltc4151
+   ltc4215
+   ltc4245
+   ltc4260
+   ltc4261
+   max16064
+   max16065
+   max1619
+   max1668
+   max197
+   max20751
+   max31722
+   max31785
+   max31790
+   max34440
+   max6639
+   max6642
+   max6650
+   max6697
+   max8688
+   mc13783-adc
+   mcp3021
+   menf21bmc
+   mlxreg-fan
+   nct6683
+   nct6775
+   nct7802
+   nct7904
+   npcm750-pwm-fan
+   nsa320
+   ntc_thermistor
+   occ
+   pc87360
+   pc87427
+   pcf8591
+   pmbus
+   powr1220
+   pwm-fan
+   raspberrypi-hwmon
+   sch5627
+   sch5636
+   scpi-hwmon
+   sht15
+   sht21
+   sht3x
+   shtc1
+   sis5595
+   smm665
+   smsc47b397
+   smsc47m192
+   smsc47m1
+   tc654
+   tc74
+   thmc50
+   tmp102
+   tmp103
+   tmp108
+   tmp401
+   tmp421
+   tps40422
+   twl4030-madc-hwmon
+   ucd9000
+   ucd9200
+   vexpress
+   via686a
+   vt1211
+   w83627ehf
+   w83627hf
+   w83773g
+   w83781d
+   w83791d
+   w83792d
+   w83793
+   w83795
+   w83l785ts
+   w83l786ng
+   wm831x
+   wm8350
+   xgene-hwmon
+   zl6100
+
+.. only::  subproject and html
+
+   Indices
+   =======
+
+   * :ref:`genindex`
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ir35221 b/Documentation/hwmon/ir35221.rst
index f7e112752c04..a83922e5ccb5 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/ir35221
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ir35221.rst
@@ -2,9 +2,12 @@ Kernel driver ir35221
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
-  * Infinion IR35221
+  * Infineon IR35221
+
     Prefix: 'ir35221'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: Datasheet is not publicly available.
 
 Author: Samuel Mendoza-Jonas <sam@mendozajonas.com>
@@ -23,15 +26,16 @@ This driver does not probe for PMBus devices. You will have to instantiate
 devices explicitly.
 
 Example: the following commands will load the driver for an IR35221
-at address 0x70 on I2C bus #4:
+at address 0x70 on I2C bus #4::
 
-# modprobe ir35221
-# echo ir35221 0x70 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/i2c-4/new_device
+	# modprobe ir35221
+	# echo ir35221 0x70 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/i2c-4/new_device
 
 
 Sysfs attributes
 ----------------
 
+======================= =======================================================
 curr1_label		"iin"
 curr1_input		Measured input current
 curr1_max		Maximum current
@@ -85,3 +89,4 @@ temp[1-2]_highest	Highest temperature
 temp[1-2]_lowest	Lowest temperature
 temp[1-2]_max		Maximum temperature
 temp[1-2]_max_alarm	Chip temperature high alarm
+======================= =======================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ir38064.rst b/Documentation/hwmon/ir38064.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c455d755a267
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ir38064.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+Kernel driver ir38064
+=====================
+
+Supported chips:
+
+  * Infineon IR38064
+
+    Prefix: 'ir38064'
+    Addresses scanned: -
+
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Infineon webiste
+      https://www.infineon.com/dgdl/Infineon-IR38064MTRPBF-DS-v03_07-EN.pdf?fileId=5546d462584d1d4a0158db0d9efb67ca
+
+Authors:
+      - Maxim Sloyko <maxims@google.com>
+      - Patrick Venture <venture@google.com>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+IR38064 is a Single-input Voltage, Synchronous Buck Regulator, DC-DC Converter.
+
+Usage Notes
+-----------
+
+This driver does not probe for PMBus devices. You will have to instantiate
+devices explicitly.
+
+Sysfs attributes
+----------------
+
+======================= ===========================
+curr1_label		"iout1"
+curr1_input		Measured output current
+curr1_crit		Critical maximum current
+curr1_crit_alarm	Current critical high alarm
+curr1_max		Maximum current
+curr1_max_alarm		Current high alarm
+
+in1_label		"vin"
+in1_input		Measured input voltage
+in1_crit		Critical maximum input voltage
+in1_crit_alarm		Input voltage critical high alarm
+in1_min			Minimum input voltage
+in1_min_alarm		Input voltage low alarm
+
+in2_label		"vout1"
+in2_input		Measured output voltage
+in2_lcrit		Critical minimum output voltage
+in2_lcrit_alarm		Output voltage critical low alarm
+in2_crit		Critical maximum output voltage
+in2_crit_alarm		Output voltage critical high alarm
+in2_max			Maximum output voltage
+in2_max_alarm		Output voltage high alarm
+in2_min			Minimum output voltage
+in2_min_alarm		Output voltage low alarm
+
+power1_label		"pout1"
+power1_input		Measured output power
+
+temp1_input		Measured temperature
+temp1_crit		Critical high temperature
+temp1_crit_alarm	Chip temperature critical high alarm
+temp1_max		Maximum temperature
+temp1_max_alarm		Chip temperature high alarm
+======================= ===========================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/isl68137.rst b/Documentation/hwmon/isl68137.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a5a7c8545c9e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/isl68137.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+Kernel driver isl68137
+======================
+
+Supported chips:
+
+  * Intersil ISL68137
+
+    Prefix: 'isl68137'
+
+    Addresses scanned: -
+
+    Datasheet:
+
+      Publicly available at the Intersil website
+      https://www.intersil.com/content/dam/Intersil/documents/isl6/isl68137.pdf
+
+Authors:
+      - Maxim Sloyko <maxims@google.com>
+      - Robert Lippert <rlippert@google.com>
+      - Patrick Venture <venture@google.com>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+Intersil ISL68137 is a digital output 7-phase configurable PWM
+controller with an AVSBus interface.
+
+Usage Notes
+-----------
+
+This driver does not probe for PMBus devices. You will have to instantiate
+devices explicitly.
+
+The ISL68137 AVS operation mode must be enabled/disabled at runtime.
+
+Beyond the normal sysfs pmbus attributes, the driver exposes a control attribute.
+
+Additional Sysfs attributes
+---------------------------
+
+======================= ====================================
+avs(0|1)_enable		Controls the AVS state of each rail.
+
+curr1_label		"iin"
+curr1_input		Measured input current
+curr1_crit		Critical maximum current
+curr1_crit_alarm	Current critical high alarm
+
+curr[2-3]_label		"iout[1-2]"
+curr[2-3]_input		Measured output current
+curr[2-3]_crit		Critical maximum current
+curr[2-3]_crit_alarm	Current critical high alarm
+
+in1_label		"vin"
+in1_input		Measured input voltage
+in1_lcrit		Critical minimum input voltage
+in1_lcrit_alarm		Input voltage critical low alarm
+in1_crit		Critical maximum input voltage
+in1_crit_alarm		Input voltage critical high alarm
+
+in[2-3]_label		"vout[1-2]"
+in[2-3]_input		Measured output voltage
+in[2-3]_lcrit		Critical minimum output voltage
+in[2-3]_lcrit_alarm	Output voltage critical low alarm
+in[2-3]_crit		Critical maximum output voltage
+in[2-3]_crit_alarm	Output voltage critical high alarm
+
+power1_label		"pin"
+power1_input		Measured input power
+power1_alarm		Input power high alarm
+
+power[2-3]_label	"pout[1-2]"
+power[2-3]_input	Measured output power
+
+temp[1-3]_input		Measured temperature
+temp[1-3]_crit		Critical high temperature
+temp[1-3]_crit_alarm	Chip temperature critical high alarm
+temp[1-3]_max		Maximum temperature
+temp[1-3]_max_alarm	Chip temperature high alarm
+======================= ====================================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/it87 b/Documentation/hwmon/it87.rst
index fff6f6bf55bc..2d83f23bee93 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/it87
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/it87.rst
@@ -2,105 +2,179 @@ Kernel driver it87
 ==================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * IT8603E/IT8623E
+
     Prefix: 'it8603'
+
     Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
+
     Datasheet: Not publicly available
+
   * IT8620E
+
     Prefix: 'it8620'
+
     Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
+
   * IT8628E
+
     Prefix: 'it8628'
+
     Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
+
     Datasheet: Not publicly available
+
   * IT8705F
+
     Prefix: 'it87'
+
     Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
+
     Datasheet: Once publicly available at the ITE website, but no longer
+
   * IT8712F
+
     Prefix: 'it8712'
+
     Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
+
     Datasheet: Once publicly available at the ITE website, but no longer
+
   * IT8716F/IT8726F
+
     Prefix: 'it8716'
+
     Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
+
     Datasheet: Once publicly available at the ITE website, but no longer
+
   * IT8718F
+
     Prefix: 'it8718'
+
     Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
+
     Datasheet: Once publicly available at the ITE website, but no longer
+
   * IT8720F
+
     Prefix: 'it8720'
+
     Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
+
     Datasheet: Not publicly available
+
   * IT8721F/IT8758E
+
     Prefix: 'it8721'
+
     Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
+
     Datasheet: Not publicly available
+
   * IT8728F
+
     Prefix: 'it8728'
+
     Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
+
     Datasheet: Not publicly available
+
   * IT8732F
+
     Prefix: 'it8732'
+
     Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
+
     Datasheet: Not publicly available
+
   * IT8771E
+
     Prefix: 'it8771'
+
     Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
+
     Datasheet: Not publicly available
+
   * IT8772E
+
     Prefix: 'it8772'
+
     Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
+
     Datasheet: Not publicly available
+
   * IT8781F
+
     Prefix: 'it8781'
+
     Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
+
     Datasheet: Not publicly available
+
   * IT8782F
+
     Prefix: 'it8782'
+
     Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
+
     Datasheet: Not publicly available
+
   * IT8783E/F
+
     Prefix: 'it8783'
+
     Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
+
     Datasheet: Not publicly available
+
   * IT8786E
+
     Prefix: 'it8786'
+
     Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
+
     Datasheet: Not publicly available
+
   * IT8790E
+
     Prefix: 'it8790'
+
     Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
+
     Datasheet: Not publicly available
+
   * SiS950   [clone of IT8705F]
+
     Prefix: 'it87'
+
     Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
+
     Datasheet: No longer be available
 
+
 Authors:
-    Christophe Gauthron
-    Jean Delvare <jdelvare@suse.de>
+    - Christophe Gauthron
+    - Jean Delvare <jdelvare@suse.de>
 
 
 Module Parameters
 -----------------
 
 * update_vbat: int
-
-  0 if vbat should report power on value, 1 if vbat should be updated after
-  each read. Default is 0. On some boards the battery voltage is provided
-  by either the battery or the onboard power supply. Only the first reading
-  at power on will be the actual battery voltage (which the chip does
-  automatically). On other boards the battery voltage is always fed to
-  the chip so can be read at any time. Excessive reading may decrease
-  battery life but no information is given in the datasheet.
+    0 if vbat should report power on value, 1 if vbat should be updated after
+    each read. Default is 0. On some boards the battery voltage is provided
+    by either the battery or the onboard power supply. Only the first reading
+    at power on will be the actual battery voltage (which the chip does
+    automatically). On other boards the battery voltage is always fed to
+    the chip so can be read at any time. Excessive reading may decrease
+    battery life but no information is given in the datasheet.
 
 * fix_pwm_polarity int
-
-  Force PWM polarity to active high (DANGEROUS). Some chips are
-  misconfigured by BIOS - PWM values would be inverted. This option tries
-  to fix this. Please contact your BIOS manufacturer and ask him for fix.
+    Force PWM polarity to active high (DANGEROUS). Some chips are
+    misconfigured by BIOS - PWM values would be inverted. This option tries
+    to fix this. Please contact your BIOS manufacturer and ask him for fix.
 
 
 Hardware Interfaces
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/jc42 b/Documentation/hwmon/jc42.rst
index b4b671f22453..5b14b49bb6f7 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/jc42
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/jc42.rst
@@ -2,53 +2,100 @@ Kernel driver jc42
 ==================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Analog Devices ADT7408
+
     Datasheets:
+
 	http://www.analog.com/static/imported-files/data_sheets/ADT7408.pdf
+
   * Atmel AT30TS00, AT30TS002A/B, AT30TSE004A
+
     Datasheets:
+
 	http://www.atmel.com/Images/doc8585.pdf
+
 	http://www.atmel.com/Images/doc8711.pdf
+
 	http://www.atmel.com/Images/Atmel-8852-SEEPROM-AT30TSE002A-Datasheet.pdf
+
 	http://www.atmel.com/Images/Atmel-8868-DTS-AT30TSE004A-Datasheet.pdf
+
   * IDT TSE2002B3, TSE2002GB2, TSE2004GB2, TS3000B3, TS3000GB0, TS3000GB2,
+
 	TS3001GB2
+
     Datasheets:
+
 	Available from IDT web site
+
   * Maxim MAX6604
+
     Datasheets:
+
 	http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX6604.pdf
+
   * Microchip MCP9804, MCP9805, MCP9808, MCP98242, MCP98243, MCP98244, MCP9843
+
     Datasheets:
+
 	http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/22203C.pdf
+
 	http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/21977b.pdf
+
 	http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/25095A.pdf
+
 	http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/21996a.pdf
+
 	http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/22153c.pdf
+
 	http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/22327A.pdf
+
   * NXP Semiconductors SE97, SE97B, SE98, SE98A
+
     Datasheets:
+
 	http://www.nxp.com/documents/data_sheet/SE97.pdf
+
 	http://www.nxp.com/documents/data_sheet/SE97B.pdf
+
 	http://www.nxp.com/documents/data_sheet/SE98.pdf
+
 	http://www.nxp.com/documents/data_sheet/SE98A.pdf
+
   * ON Semiconductor CAT34TS02, CAT6095
+
     Datasheet:
+
 	http://www.onsemi.com/pub_link/Collateral/CAT34TS02-D.PDF
+
 	http://www.onsemi.com/pub/Collateral/CAT6095-D.PDF
+
   * ST Microelectronics STTS424, STTS424E02, STTS2002, STTS2004, STTS3000
+
     Datasheets:
+
 	http://www.st.com/web/en/resource/technical/document/datasheet/CD00157556.pdf
+
 	http://www.st.com/web/en/resource/technical/document/datasheet/CD00157558.pdf
+
 	http://www.st.com/web/en/resource/technical/document/datasheet/CD00266638.pdf
+
 	http://www.st.com/web/en/resource/technical/document/datasheet/CD00225278.pdf
+
 	http://www.st.com/web/en/resource/technical/document/datasheet/DM00076709.pdf
+
   * JEDEC JC 42.4 compliant temperature sensor chips
+
     Datasheet:
+
 	http://www.jedec.org/sites/default/files/docs/4_01_04R19.pdf
 
+
   Common for all chips:
+
     Prefix: 'jc42'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1f
 
 Author:
@@ -67,10 +114,10 @@ The driver auto-detects the chips listed above, but can be manually instantiated
 to support other JC 42.4 compliant chips.
 
 Example: the following will load the driver for a generic JC 42.4 compliant
-temperature sensor at address 0x18 on I2C bus #1:
+temperature sensor at address 0x18 on I2C bus #1::
 
-# modprobe jc42
-# echo jc42 0x18 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/i2c-1/new_device
+	# modprobe jc42
+	# echo jc42 0x18 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/i2c-1/new_device
 
 A JC 42.4 compliant chip supports a single temperature sensor. Minimum, maximum,
 and critical temperature can be configured. There are alarms for high, low,
@@ -90,6 +137,7 @@ cannot be changed.
 Sysfs entries
 -------------
 
+======================= ===========================================
 temp1_input		Temperature (RO)
 temp1_min		Minimum temperature (RO or RW)
 temp1_max		Maximum temperature (RO or RW)
@@ -101,3 +149,4 @@ temp1_max_hyst		Maximum hysteresis temperature (RO)
 temp1_min_alarm		Temperature low alarm
 temp1_max_alarm		Temperature high alarm
 temp1_crit_alarm	Temperature critical alarm
+======================= ===========================================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/k10temp b/Documentation/hwmon/k10temp.rst
index 254d2f55345a..12a86ba17de9 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/k10temp
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/k10temp.rst
@@ -2,42 +2,77 @@ Kernel driver k10temp
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
 * AMD Family 10h processors:
+
   Socket F: Quad-Core/Six-Core/Embedded Opteron (but see below)
+
   Socket AM2+: Quad-Core Opteron, Phenom (II) X3/X4, Athlon X2 (but see below)
+
   Socket AM3: Quad-Core Opteron, Athlon/Phenom II X2/X3/X4, Sempron II
+
   Socket S1G3: Athlon II, Sempron, Turion II
+
 * AMD Family 11h processors:
+
   Socket S1G2: Athlon (X2), Sempron (X2), Turion X2 (Ultra)
+
 * AMD Family 12h processors: "Llano" (E2/A4/A6/A8-Series)
+
 * AMD Family 14h processors: "Brazos" (C/E/G/Z-Series)
+
 * AMD Family 15h processors: "Bulldozer" (FX-Series), "Trinity", "Kaveri", "Carrizo"
+
 * AMD Family 16h processors: "Kabini", "Mullins"
 
   Prefix: 'k10temp'
+
   Addresses scanned: PCI space
+
   Datasheets:
+
   BIOS and Kernel Developer's Guide (BKDG) For AMD Family 10h Processors:
+
     http://support.amd.com/us/Processor_TechDocs/31116.pdf
+
   BIOS and Kernel Developer's Guide (BKDG) for AMD Family 11h Processors:
+
     http://support.amd.com/us/Processor_TechDocs/41256.pdf
+
   BIOS and Kernel Developer's Guide (BKDG) for AMD Family 12h Processors:
+
     http://support.amd.com/us/Processor_TechDocs/41131.pdf
+
   BIOS and Kernel Developer's Guide (BKDG) for AMD Family 14h Models 00h-0Fh Processors:
+
     http://support.amd.com/us/Processor_TechDocs/43170.pdf
+
   Revision Guide for AMD Family 10h Processors:
+
     http://support.amd.com/us/Processor_TechDocs/41322.pdf
+
   Revision Guide for AMD Family 11h Processors:
+
     http://support.amd.com/us/Processor_TechDocs/41788.pdf
+
   Revision Guide for AMD Family 12h Processors:
+
     http://support.amd.com/us/Processor_TechDocs/44739.pdf
+
   Revision Guide for AMD Family 14h Models 00h-0Fh Processors:
+
     http://support.amd.com/us/Processor_TechDocs/47534.pdf
+
   AMD Family 11h Processor Power and Thermal Data Sheet for Notebooks:
+
     http://support.amd.com/us/Processor_TechDocs/43373.pdf
+
   AMD Family 10h Server and Workstation Processor Power and Thermal Data Sheet:
+
     http://support.amd.com/us/Processor_TechDocs/43374.pdf
+
   AMD Family 10h Desktop Processor Power and Thermal Data Sheet:
+
     http://support.amd.com/us/Processor_TechDocs/43375.pdf
 
 Author: Clemens Ladisch <clemens@ladisch.de>
@@ -60,7 +95,7 @@ are using an AM3 processor on an AM2+ mainboard, you can safely use the
 
 There is one temperature measurement value, available as temp1_input in
 sysfs. It is measured in degrees Celsius with a resolution of 1/8th degree.
-Please note that it is defined as a relative value; to quote the AMD manual:
+Please note that it is defined as a relative value; to quote the AMD manual::
 
   Tctl is the processor temperature control value, used by the platform to
   control cooling systems. Tctl is a non-physical temperature on an
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/k8temp b/Documentation/hwmon/k8temp.rst
index 716dc24c7237..72da12aa17e5 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/k8temp
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/k8temp.rst
@@ -2,12 +2,17 @@ Kernel driver k8temp
 ====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * AMD Athlon64/FX or Opteron CPUs
+
     Prefix: 'k8temp'
+
     Addresses scanned: PCI space
+
     Datasheet: http://support.amd.com/us/Processor_TechDocs/32559.pdf
 
 Author: Rudolf Marek
+
 Contact: Rudolf Marek <r.marek@assembler.cz>
 
 Description
@@ -27,10 +32,12 @@ implemented sensors.
 
 Mapping of /sys files is as follows:
 
-temp1_input - temperature of Core 0 and "place" 0
-temp2_input - temperature of Core 0 and "place" 1
-temp3_input - temperature of Core 1 and "place" 0
-temp4_input - temperature of Core 1 and "place" 1
+============= ===================================
+temp1_input   temperature of Core 0 and "place" 0
+temp2_input   temperature of Core 0 and "place" 1
+temp3_input   temperature of Core 1 and "place" 0
+temp4_input   temperature of Core 1 and "place" 1
+============= ===================================
 
 Temperatures are measured in degrees Celsius and measurement resolution is
 1 degree C. It is expected that future CPU will have better resolution. The
@@ -48,7 +55,7 @@ computed temperature called TControl, which must be lower than TControlMax.
 
 The relationship is following:
 
-temp1_input - TjOffset*2 < TControlMax,
+	temp1_input - TjOffset*2 < TControlMax,
 
 TjOffset is not yet exported by the driver, TControlMax is usually
 70 degrees C. The rule of the thumb -> CPU temperature should not cross
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lineage-pem b/Documentation/hwmon/lineage-pem.rst
index 83b2ddc160c8..10c271dc20e8 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/lineage-pem
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lineage-pem.rst
@@ -2,11 +2,16 @@ Kernel driver lineage-pem
 =========================
 
 Supported devices:
+
   * Lineage Compact Power Line Power Entry Modules
+
     Prefix: 'lineage-pem'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Documentation:
-        http://www.lineagepower.com/oem/pdf/CPLI2C.pdf
+
+	http://www.lineagepower.com/oem/pdf/CPLI2C.pdf
 
 Author: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
 
@@ -31,9 +36,10 @@ which can be safely used to identify the chip. You will have to instantiate
 the devices explicitly.
 
 Example: the following will load the driver for a Lineage PEM at address 0x40
-on I2C bus #1:
-$ modprobe lineage-pem
-$ echo lineage-pem 0x40 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/i2c-1/new_device
+on I2C bus #1::
+
+	$ modprobe lineage-pem
+	$ echo lineage-pem 0x40 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/i2c-1/new_device
 
 All Lineage CPL power entry modules have a built-in I2C bus master selector
 (PCA9541). To ensure device access, this driver should only be used as client
@@ -51,6 +57,7 @@ Input voltage, input current, input power, and fan speed measurement is only
 supported on newer devices. The driver detects if those attributes are supported,
 and only creates respective sysfs entries if they are.
 
+======================= ===============================
 in1_input		Output voltage (mV)
 in1_min_alarm		Output undervoltage alarm
 in1_max_alarm		Output overvoltage alarm
@@ -75,3 +82,4 @@ temp1_crit
 temp1_alarm
 temp1_crit_alarm
 temp1_fault
+======================= ===============================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm25066 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm25066.rst
index 51b32aa203a8..da15e3094c8c 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm25066
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm25066.rst
@@ -2,34 +2,62 @@ Kernel driver lm25066
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * TI LM25056
+
     Prefix: 'lm25056'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheets:
+
 	http://www.ti.com/lit/gpn/lm25056
+
 	http://www.ti.com/lit/gpn/lm25056a
+
   * National Semiconductor LM25066
+
     Prefix: 'lm25066'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheets:
+
 	http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM25066.html
+
 	http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM25066A.html
+
   * National Semiconductor LM5064
+
     Prefix: 'lm5064'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet:
+
 	http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM5064.html
+
   * National Semiconductor LM5066
+
     Prefix: 'lm5066'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet:
+
 	http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM5066.html
+
   * Texas Instruments LM5066I
+
     Prefix: 'lm5066i'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
 	Datasheet:
+
     http://www.ti.com/product/LM5066I
 
+
 Author: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
 
 
@@ -41,7 +69,7 @@ LM25066, LM5064, and LM5066/LM5066I Power Management, Monitoring,
 Control, and Protection ICs.
 
 The driver is a client driver to the core PMBus driver. Please see
-Documentation/hwmon/pmbus for details on PMBus client drivers.
+Documentation/hwmon/pmbus.rst for details on PMBus client drivers.
 
 
 Usage Notes
@@ -64,6 +92,7 @@ Sysfs entries
 The following attributes are supported. Limits are read-write; all other
 attributes are read-only.
 
+======================= =======================================================
 in1_label		"vin"
 in1_input		Measured input voltage.
 in1_average		Average measured input voltage.
@@ -105,3 +134,4 @@ temp1_max		Maximum temperature.
 temp1_crit		Critical high temperature.
 temp1_max_alarm		Chip temperature high alarm.
 temp1_crit_alarm	Chip temperature critical high alarm.
+======================= =======================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm63 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm63.rst
index 4a00461512a6..f478132b0408 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm63
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm63.rst
@@ -2,26 +2,43 @@ Kernel driver lm63
 ==================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * National Semiconductor LM63
+
     Prefix: 'lm63'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
-               http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM63.html
+
+	       http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM63.html
+
   * National Semiconductor LM64
+
     Prefix: 'lm64'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 and 0x4e
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
-               http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM64.html
+
+	       http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM64.html
+
   * National Semiconductor LM96163
+
     Prefix: 'lm96163'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
-               http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM96163.html
+
+	       http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM96163.html
+
 
 Author: Jean Delvare <jdelvare@suse.de>
 
 Thanks go to Tyan and especially Alex Buckingham for setting up a remote
 access to their S4882 test platform for this driver.
+
   http://www.tyan.com/
 
 Description
@@ -32,6 +49,7 @@ and control.
 
 The LM63 is basically an LM86 with fan speed monitoring and control
 capabilities added. It misses some of the LM86 features though:
+
  - No low limit for local temperature.
  - No critical limit for local temperature.
  - Critical limit for remote temperature can be changed only once. We
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm70 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm70.rst
index c3a1f2ea017d..f259bc1fcd91 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm70
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm70.rst
@@ -2,19 +2,30 @@ Kernel driver lm70
 ==================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * National Semiconductor LM70
+
     Datasheet: http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM70.html
+
   * Texas Instruments TMP121/TMP123
+
     Information: http://focus.ti.com/docs/prod/folders/print/tmp121.html
+
   * Texas Instruments TMP122/TMP124
+
     Information: http://www.ti.com/product/tmp122
+
   * National Semiconductor LM71
+
     Datasheet: http://www.ti.com/product/LM71
+
   * National Semiconductor LM74
+
     Datasheet: http://www.ti.com/product/LM74
 
+
 Author:
-        Kaiwan N Billimoria <kaiwan@designergraphix.com>
+	Kaiwan N Billimoria <kaiwan@designergraphix.com>
 
 Description
 -----------
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm73 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm73.rst
index 8af059dcb642..1d6a46844e85 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm73
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm73.rst
@@ -2,13 +2,20 @@ Kernel driver lm73
 ==================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Texas Instruments LM73
+
     Prefix: 'lm73'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48, 0x49, 0x4a, 0x4c, 0x4d, and 0x4e
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Texas Instruments website
-               http://www.ti.com/product/lm73
+
+	       http://www.ti.com/product/lm73
+
 
 Author: Guillaume Ligneul <guillaume.ligneul@gmail.com>
+
 Documentation: Chris Verges <kg4ysn@gmail.com>
 
 
@@ -29,17 +36,18 @@ conversion time via the 'update_interval' sysfs attribute for the
 device.  This attribute will normalize ranges of input values to the
 maximum times defined for the resolution in the datasheet.
 
+    ============= ============= ============
     Resolution    Conv. Time    Input Range
     (C/LSB)       (msec)        (msec)
-    --------------------------------------
+    ============= ============= ============
     0.25          14             0..14
     0.125         28            15..28
     0.0625        56            29..56
     0.03125       112           57..infinity
-    --------------------------------------
+    ============= ============= ============
 
 The following examples show how the 'update_interval' attribute can be
-used to change the conversion time:
+used to change the conversion time::
 
     $ echo 0 > update_interval
     $ cat update_interval
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm75 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm75.rst
index 010583608f12..ba8acbd2a6cb 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm75
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm75.rst
@@ -2,68 +2,132 @@ Kernel driver lm75
 ==================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * National Semiconductor LM75
+
     Prefix: 'lm75'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
-               http://www.national.com/
+
+	       http://www.national.com/
+
   * National Semiconductor LM75A
+
     Prefix: 'lm75a'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
-               http://www.national.com/
+
+	       http://www.national.com/
+
   * Dallas Semiconductor (now Maxim) DS75, DS1775, DS7505
+
     Prefixes: 'ds75', 'ds1775', 'ds7505'
+
     Addresses scanned: none
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website
-               http://www.maximintegrated.com/
+
+	       http://www.maximintegrated.com/
+
   * Maxim MAX6625, MAX6626, MAX31725, MAX31726
+
     Prefixes: 'max6625', 'max6626', 'max31725', 'max31726'
+
     Addresses scanned: none
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website
-               http://www.maxim-ic.com/
+
+	       http://www.maxim-ic.com/
+
   * Microchip (TelCom) TCN75
+
     Prefix: 'tcn75'
+
     Addresses scanned: none
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Microchip website
-               http://www.microchip.com/
+
+	       http://www.microchip.com/
+
   * Microchip MCP9800, MCP9801, MCP9802, MCP9803
+
     Prefix: 'mcp980x'
+
     Addresses scanned: none
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Microchip website
-               http://www.microchip.com/
+
+	       http://www.microchip.com/
+
   * Analog Devices ADT75
+
     Prefix: 'adt75'
+
     Addresses scanned: none
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website
-               http://www.analog.com/adt75
+
+	       http://www.analog.com/adt75
+
   * ST Microelectronics STDS75
+
     Prefix: 'stds75'
+
     Addresses scanned: none
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the ST website
-               http://www.st.com/internet/analog/product/121769.jsp
+
+	       http://www.st.com/internet/analog/product/121769.jsp
+
   * ST Microelectronics STLM75
+
     Prefix: 'stlm75'
+
     Addresses scanned: none
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the ST website
+
 	       https://www.st.com/resource/en/datasheet/stlm75.pdf
-  * Texas Instruments TMP100, TMP101, TMP105, TMP112, TMP75, TMP75C, TMP175, TMP275
-    Prefixes: 'tmp100', 'tmp101', 'tmp105', 'tmp112', 'tmp175', 'tmp75', 'tmp75c', 'tmp275'
+
+  * Texas Instruments TMP100, TMP101, TMP105, TMP112, TMP75, TMP75B, TMP75C, TMP175, TMP275
+
+    Prefixes: 'tmp100', 'tmp101', 'tmp105', 'tmp112', 'tmp175', 'tmp75', 'tmp75b', 'tmp75c', 'tmp275'
+
     Addresses scanned: none
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Texas Instruments website
-               http://www.ti.com/product/tmp100
-               http://www.ti.com/product/tmp101
-               http://www.ti.com/product/tmp105
-               http://www.ti.com/product/tmp112
-               http://www.ti.com/product/tmp75
-               http://www.ti.com/product/tmp75c
-               http://www.ti.com/product/tmp175
-               http://www.ti.com/product/tmp275
+
+	       http://www.ti.com/product/tmp100
+
+	       http://www.ti.com/product/tmp101
+
+	       http://www.ti.com/product/tmp105
+
+	       http://www.ti.com/product/tmp112
+
+	       http://www.ti.com/product/tmp75
+
+	       http://www.ti.com/product/tmp75b
+
+	       http://www.ti.com/product/tmp75c
+
+	       http://www.ti.com/product/tmp175
+
+	       http://www.ti.com/product/tmp275
+
   * NXP LM75B
+
     Prefix: 'lm75b'
+
     Addresses scanned: none
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the NXP website
-               http://www.nxp.com/documents/data_sheet/LM75B.pdf
+
+	       http://www.nxp.com/documents/data_sheet/LM75B.pdf
 
 Author: Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>
 
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm77 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm77.rst
index bfc915fe3639..4ed3fe6b999a 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm77
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm77.rst
@@ -2,11 +2,17 @@ Kernel driver lm77
 ==================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * National Semiconductor LM77
+
     Prefix: 'lm77'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4b
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
-               http://www.national.com/
+
+	       http://www.national.com/
+
 
 Author: Andras BALI <drewie@freemail.hu>
 
@@ -25,6 +31,7 @@ register on the chip, which means that the relative difference between
 the limit and its hysteresis is always the same for all 3 limits.
 
 This implementation detail implies the following:
+
 * When setting a limit, its hysteresis will automatically follow, the
   difference staying unchanged. For example, if the old critical limit
   was 80 degrees C, and the hysteresis was 75 degrees C, and you change
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm78 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm78.rst
index 4dd47731789f..cb7a4832f35e 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm78
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm78.rst
@@ -2,19 +2,31 @@ Kernel driver lm78
 ==================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * National Semiconductor LM78 / LM78-J
+
     Prefix: 'lm78'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x28 - 0x2f, ISA 0x290 (8 I/O ports)
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
-               http://www.national.com/
+
+	       http://www.national.com/
+
   * National Semiconductor LM79
+
     Prefix: 'lm79'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x28 - 0x2f, ISA 0x290 (8 I/O ports)
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
-               http://www.national.com/
 
-Authors: Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>
-         Jean Delvare <jdelvare@suse.de>
+	       http://www.national.com/
+
+
+Authors:
+	- Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>
+	- Jean Delvare <jdelvare@suse.de>
 
 Description
 -----------
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm80 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm80.rst
index a60b43efc32b..c53186abd82e 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm80
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm80.rst
@@ -2,20 +2,31 @@ Kernel driver lm80
 ==================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * National Semiconductor LM80
+
     Prefix: 'lm80'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x28 - 0x2f
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
-               http://www.national.com/
+
+	       http://www.national.com/
+
   * National Semiconductor LM96080
+
     Prefix: 'lm96080'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x28 - 0x2f
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
-               http://www.national.com/
+
+	       http://www.national.com/
+
 
 Authors:
-        Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>,
-        Philip Edelbrock <phil@netroedge.com>
+       - Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>,
+       - Philip Edelbrock <phil@netroedge.com>
 
 Description
 -----------
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm83 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm83.rst
index 50be5cb26de9..ecf83819960e 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm83
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm83.rst
@@ -2,16 +2,24 @@ Kernel driver lm83
 ==================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * National Semiconductor LM83
+
     Prefix: 'lm83'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
-               http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM83.html
+
+	       http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM83.html
+
   * National Semiconductor LM82
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
-               http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM82.html
 
+	       http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM82.html
 
 Author: Jean Delvare <jdelvare@suse.de>
 
@@ -34,13 +42,17 @@ fact that any of these motherboards do actually have an LM83, please
 contact us. Note that the LM90 can easily be misdetected as a LM83.
 
 Confirmed motherboards:
+    ===		=====
     SBS         P014
     SBS         PSL09
+    ===		=====
 
 Unconfirmed motherboards:
+    =========== ==========
     Gigabyte    GA-8IK1100
     Iwill       MPX2
     Soltek      SL-75DRV5
+    =========== ==========
 
 The LM82 is confirmed to have been found on most AMD Geode reference
 designs and test platforms.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm85.rst
index 7c49feaa79d2..faa92f54431c 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm85
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm85.rst
@@ -2,45 +2,85 @@ Kernel driver lm85
 ==================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * National Semiconductor LM85 (B and C versions)
-    Prefix: 'lm85'
+
+    Prefix: 'lm85b' or 'lm85c'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e
+
     Datasheet: http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM85.html
+
+  * Texas Instruments LM96000
+
+    Prefix: 'lm9600'
+
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e
+
+    Datasheet: http://www.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/lm96000.pdf
+
   * Analog Devices ADM1027
+
     Prefix: 'adm1027'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e
+
     Datasheet: http://www.onsemi.com/PowerSolutions/product.do?id=ADM1027
+
   * Analog Devices ADT7463
+
     Prefix: 'adt7463'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e
+
     Datasheet: http://www.onsemi.com/PowerSolutions/product.do?id=ADT7463
+
   * Analog Devices ADT7468
+
     Prefix: 'adt7468'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e
+
     Datasheet: http://www.onsemi.com/PowerSolutions/product.do?id=ADT7468
+
   * SMSC EMC6D100, SMSC EMC6D101
+
     Prefix: 'emc6d100'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e
-    Datasheet: http://www.smsc.com/media/Downloads_Public/discontinued/6d100.pdf 
+
+    Datasheet: http://www.smsc.com/media/Downloads_Public/discontinued/6d100.pdf
+
   * SMSC EMC6D102
+
     Prefix: 'emc6d102'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e
+
     Datasheet: http://www.smsc.com/main/catalog/emc6d102.html
+
   * SMSC EMC6D103
+
     Prefix: 'emc6d103'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e
+
     Datasheet: http://www.smsc.com/main/catalog/emc6d103.html
+
   * SMSC EMC6D103S
+
     Prefix: 'emc6d103s'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e
+
     Datasheet: http://www.smsc.com/main/catalog/emc6d103s.html
 
 Authors:
-        Philip Pokorny <ppokorny@penguincomputing.com>,
-        Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>,
-        Richard Barrington <rich_b_nz@clear.net.nz>,
-        Margit Schubert-While <margitsw@t-online.de>,
-        Justin Thiessen <jthiessen@penguincomputing.com>
+       - Philip Pokorny <ppokorny@penguincomputing.com>,
+       - Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>,
+       - Richard Barrington <rich_b_nz@clear.net.nz>,
+       - Margit Schubert-While <margitsw@t-online.de>,
+       - Justin Thiessen <jthiessen@penguincomputing.com>
 
 Description
 -----------
@@ -136,6 +176,9 @@ of voltage and temperature channels.
 SMSC EMC6D103S is similar to EMC6D103, but does not support pwm#_auto_pwm_minctl
 and temp#_auto_temp_off.
 
+The LM96000 supports additional high frequency PWM modes (22.5 kHz, 24 kHz,
+25.7 kHz, 27.7 kHz and 30 kHz), which can be configured on a per-PWM basis.
+
 Hardware Configurations
 -----------------------
 
@@ -170,38 +213,50 @@ Each temperature sensor is associated with a Zone. There are three
 sensors and therefore three zones (# 1, 2 and 3). Each zone has the following
 temperature configuration points:
 
-* temp#_auto_temp_off - temperature below which fans should be off or spinning very low.
-* temp#_auto_temp_min - temperature over which fans start to spin.
-* temp#_auto_temp_max - temperature when fans spin at full speed.
-* temp#_auto_temp_crit - temperature when all fans will run full speed.
+* temp#_auto_temp_off
+	- temperature below which fans should be off or spinning very low.
+* temp#_auto_temp_min
+	- temperature over which fans start to spin.
+* temp#_auto_temp_max
+	- temperature when fans spin at full speed.
+* temp#_auto_temp_crit
+	- temperature when all fans will run full speed.
 
-* PWM Control
+PWM Control
+^^^^^^^^^^^
 
 There are three PWM outputs. The LM85 datasheet suggests that the
 pwm3 output control both fan3 and fan4. Each PWM can be individually
 configured and assigned to a zone for its control value. Each PWM can be
 configured individually according to the following options.
 
-* pwm#_auto_pwm_min - this specifies the PWM value for temp#_auto_temp_off
-                      temperature. (PWM value from 0 to 255)
+* pwm#_auto_pwm_min
+	- this specifies the PWM value for temp#_auto_temp_off
+	  temperature. (PWM value from 0 to 255)
+
+* pwm#_auto_pwm_minctl
+	- this flags selects for temp#_auto_temp_off temperature
+	  the behaviour of fans. Write 1 to let fans spinning at
+	  pwm#_auto_pwm_min or write 0 to let them off.
 
-* pwm#_auto_pwm_minctl - this flags selects for temp#_auto_temp_off temperature
-                         the behaviour of fans. Write 1 to let fans spinning at
-			 pwm#_auto_pwm_min or write 0 to let them off.
+.. note::
 
-NOTE: It has been reported that there is a bug in the LM85 that causes the flag
-to be associated with the zones not the PWMs. This contradicts all the
-published documentation. Setting pwm#_min_ctl in this case actually affects all
-PWMs controlled by zone '#'.
+	It has been reported that there is a bug in the LM85 that causes
+	the flag to be associated with the zones not the PWMs. This
+	contradicts all the published documentation. Setting pwm#_min_ctl
+	in this case actually affects all PWMs controlled by zone '#'.
 
-* PWM Controlling Zone selection
+PWM Controlling Zone selection
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
 
-* pwm#_auto_channels - controls zone that is associated with PWM
+* pwm#_auto_channels
+	- controls zone that is associated with PWM
 
 Configuration choices:
 
-   Value     Meaning
-  ------  ------------------------------------------------
+========== =============================================
+Value      Meaning
+========== =============================================
       1    Controlled by Zone 1
       2    Controlled by Zone 2
       3    Controlled by Zone 3
@@ -210,6 +265,7 @@ Configuration choices:
       0    PWM always 0%  (off)
      -1    PWM always 100%  (full on)
      -2    Manual control (write to 'pwm#' to set)
+========== =============================================
 
 The National LM85's have two vendor specific configuration
 features. Tach. mode and Spinup Control. For more details on these,
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm87 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm87.rst
index a2339fd9acb9..72fcb577ef2a 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm87
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm87.rst
@@ -2,23 +2,32 @@ Kernel driver lm87
 ==================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * National Semiconductor LM87
+
     Prefix: 'lm87'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2e
+
     Datasheet: http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM87.html
+
   * Analog Devices ADM1024
+
     Prefix: 'adm1024'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2e
+
     Datasheet: http://www.analog.com/en/prod/0,2877,ADM1024,00.html
 
+
 Authors:
-        Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>,
-        Philip Edelbrock <phil@netroedge.com>,
-        Mark Studebaker <mdsxyz123@yahoo.com>,
-        Stephen Rousset <stephen.rousset@rocketlogix.com>,
-        Dan Eaton <dan.eaton@rocketlogix.com>,
-        Jean Delvare <jdelvare@suse.de>,
-        Original 2.6 port Jeff Oliver
+	- Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>,
+	- Philip Edelbrock <phil@netroedge.com>,
+	- Mark Studebaker <mdsxyz123@yahoo.com>,
+	- Stephen Rousset <stephen.rousset@rocketlogix.com>,
+	- Dan Eaton <dan.eaton@rocketlogix.com>,
+	- Jean Delvare <jdelvare@suse.de>,
+	- Original 2.6 port Jeff Oliver
 
 Description
 -----------
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm90.rst
index 8122675d30f6..953315987c06 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm90
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm90.rst
@@ -2,132 +2,256 @@ Kernel driver lm90
 ==================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * National Semiconductor LM90
+
     Prefix: 'lm90'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
-               http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM90.html
+
+	       http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM90.html
+
   * National Semiconductor LM89
+
     Prefix: 'lm89' (no auto-detection)
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c and 0x4d
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
-               http://www.national.com/mpf/LM/LM89.html
+
+	       http://www.national.com/mpf/LM/LM89.html
+
   * National Semiconductor LM99
+
     Prefix: 'lm99'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c and 0x4d
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
-               http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM99.html
+
+	       http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM99.html
+
   * National Semiconductor LM86
+
     Prefix: 'lm86'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
-               http://www.national.com/mpf/LM/LM86.html
+
+	       http://www.national.com/mpf/LM/LM86.html
+
   * Analog Devices ADM1032
+
     Prefix: 'adm1032'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c and 0x4d
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the ON Semiconductor website
-               http://www.onsemi.com/PowerSolutions/product.do?id=ADM1032
+
+	       http://www.onsemi.com/PowerSolutions/product.do?id=ADM1032
+
   * Analog Devices ADT7461
+
     Prefix: 'adt7461'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c and 0x4d
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the ON Semiconductor website
-               http://www.onsemi.com/PowerSolutions/product.do?id=ADT7461
+
+	       http://www.onsemi.com/PowerSolutions/product.do?id=ADT7461
+
   * Analog Devices ADT7461A
+
     Prefix: 'adt7461a'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c and 0x4d
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the ON Semiconductor website
-               http://www.onsemi.com/PowerSolutions/product.do?id=ADT7461A
+
+	       http://www.onsemi.com/PowerSolutions/product.do?id=ADT7461A
+
   * ON Semiconductor NCT1008
+
     Prefix: 'nct1008'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c and 0x4d
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the ON Semiconductor website
-               http://www.onsemi.com/PowerSolutions/product.do?id=NCT1008
+
+	       http://www.onsemi.com/PowerSolutions/product.do?id=NCT1008
+
   * Maxim MAX6646
+
     Prefix: 'max6646'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4d
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website
-               http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/3497
+
+	       http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/3497
+
   * Maxim MAX6647
+
     Prefix: 'max6646'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4e
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website
-               http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/3497
+
+	       http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/3497
+
   * Maxim MAX6648
+
     Prefix: 'max6646'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website
-               http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/3500
+
+	       http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/3500
+
   * Maxim MAX6649
+
     Prefix: 'max6646'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website
-               http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/3497
+
+	       http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/3497
+
   * Maxim MAX6657
+
     Prefix: 'max6657'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website
-               http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/2578
+
+	       http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/2578
+
   * Maxim MAX6658
+
     Prefix: 'max6657'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website
-               http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/2578
+
+	       http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/2578
+
   * Maxim MAX6659
+
     Prefix: 'max6659'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c, 0x4d, 0x4e
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website
-               http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/2578
+
+	       http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/2578
+
   * Maxim MAX6680
+
     Prefix: 'max6680'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18, 0x19, 0x1a, 0x29, 0x2a, 0x2b,
-                           0x4c, 0x4d and 0x4e
+
+			   0x4c, 0x4d and 0x4e
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website
-               http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/3370
+
+	       http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/3370
+
   * Maxim MAX6681
+
     Prefix: 'max6680'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18, 0x19, 0x1a, 0x29, 0x2a, 0x2b,
-                           0x4c, 0x4d and 0x4e
+
+			   0x4c, 0x4d and 0x4e
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website
-               http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/3370
+
+	       http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/3370
+
   * Maxim MAX6692
+
     Prefix: 'max6646'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website
-               http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/3500
+
+	       http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/3500
+
   * Maxim MAX6695
+
     Prefix: 'max6695'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website
-               http://www.maxim-ic.com/datasheet/index.mvp/id/4199
+
+	       http://www.maxim-ic.com/datasheet/index.mvp/id/4199
+
   * Maxim MAX6696
+
     Prefix: 'max6695'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18, 0x19, 0x1a, 0x29, 0x2a, 0x2b,
-                           0x4c, 0x4d and 0x4e
+
+			   0x4c, 0x4d and 0x4e
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website
-               http://www.maxim-ic.com/datasheet/index.mvp/id/4199
+
+	       http://www.maxim-ic.com/datasheet/index.mvp/id/4199
+
   * Winbond/Nuvoton W83L771W/G
+
     Prefix: 'w83l771'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c
+
     Datasheet: No longer available
+
   * Winbond/Nuvoton W83L771AWG/ASG
+
     Prefix: 'w83l771'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c
+
     Datasheet: Not publicly available, can be requested from Nuvoton
+
   * Philips/NXP SA56004X
+
     Prefix: 'sa56004'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 through 0x4F
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at NXP website
-               http://ics.nxp.com/products/interface/datasheet/sa56004x.pdf
+
+	       http://ics.nxp.com/products/interface/datasheet/sa56004x.pdf
+
   * GMT G781
+
     Prefix: 'g781'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c, 0x4d
+
     Datasheet: Not publicly available from GMT
+
   * Texas Instruments TMP451
+
     Prefix: 'tmp451'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at TI website
-               http://www.ti.com/litv/pdf/sbos686
 
+	       http://www.ti.com/litv/pdf/sbos686
 
 Author: Jean Delvare <jdelvare@suse.de>
 
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm92 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm92.rst
index cfa99a353b8c..c131b923ed36 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm92
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm92.rst
@@ -2,22 +2,35 @@ Kernel driver lm92
 ==================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * National Semiconductor LM92
+
     Prefix: 'lm92'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4b
+
     Datasheet: http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM92.html
+
   * National Semiconductor LM76
+
     Prefix: 'lm92'
+
     Addresses scanned: none, force parameter needed
+
     Datasheet: http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM76.html
+
   * Maxim MAX6633/MAX6634/MAX6635
+
     Prefix: 'max6635'
+
     Addresses scanned: none, force parameter needed
+
     Datasheet: http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/3074
 
+
 Authors:
-        Abraham van der Merwe <abraham@2d3d.co.za>
-        Jean Delvare <jdelvare@suse.de>
+       - Abraham van der Merwe <abraham@2d3d.co.za>
+       - Jean Delvare <jdelvare@suse.de>
 
 
 Description
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm93 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm93.rst
index f3b2ad2ceb01..49d199b45b67 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm93
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm93.rst
@@ -2,20 +2,29 @@ Kernel driver lm93
 ==================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * National Semiconductor LM93
+
     Prefix 'lm93'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c-0x2e
+
     Datasheet: http://www.national.com/ds.cgi/LM/LM93.pdf
+
   * National Semiconductor LM94
+
     Prefix 'lm94'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c-0x2e
+
     Datasheet: http://www.national.com/ds.cgi/LM/LM94.pdf
 
+
 Authors:
-	Mark M. Hoffman <mhoffman@lightlink.com>
-	Ported to 2.6 by Eric J. Bowersox <ericb@aspsys.com>
-	Adapted to 2.6.20 by Carsten Emde <ce@osadl.org>
-	Modified for mainline integration by Hans J. Koch <hjk@hansjkoch.de>
+	- Mark M. Hoffman <mhoffman@lightlink.com>
+	- Ported to 2.6 by Eric J. Bowersox <ericb@aspsys.com>
+	- Adapted to 2.6.20 by Carsten Emde <ce@osadl.org>
+	- Modified for mainline integration by Hans J. Koch <hjk@hansjkoch.de>
 
 Module Parameters
 -----------------
@@ -67,7 +76,8 @@ LM94 are not supported.
 User Interface
 --------------
 
-#PROCHOT:
+#PROCHOT
+^^^^^^^^
 
 The LM93 can monitor two #PROCHOT signals.  The results are found in the
 sysfs files prochot1, prochot2, prochot1_avg, prochot2_avg, prochot1_max,
@@ -86,7 +96,8 @@ prochot2_interval.  The values in these files specify the intervals for
 list will cause the driver to use the next largest interval.  The available
 intervals are (in seconds):
 
-#PROCHOT intervals: 0.73, 1.46, 2.9, 5.8, 11.7, 23.3, 46.6, 93.2, 186, 372
+#PROCHOT intervals:
+	0.73, 1.46, 2.9, 5.8, 11.7, 23.3, 46.6, 93.2, 186, 372
 
 It is possible to configure the LM93 to logically short the two #PROCHOT
 signals.  I.e. when #P1_PROCHOT is asserted, the LM93 will automatically
@@ -105,16 +116,15 @@ contains a value controlling the duty cycle for the PWM signal used when
 the override function is enabled.  This value ranges from 0 to 15, with 0
 indicating minimum duty cycle and 15 indicating maximum.
 
-#VRD_HOT:
+#VRD_HOT
+^^^^^^^^
 
 The LM93 can monitor two #VRD_HOT signals. The results are found in the
 sysfs files vrdhot1 and vrdhot2. There is one value per file: a boolean for
 which 1 indicates #VRD_HOT is asserted and 0 indicates it is negated. These
 files are read-only.
 
-Smart Tach Mode:
-
-(from the datasheet)
+Smart Tach Mode (from the datasheet)::
 
 	If a fan is driven using a low-side drive PWM, the tachometer
 	output of the fan is corrupted. The LM93 includes smart tachometer
@@ -127,7 +137,8 @@ the fan tachometer with a pwm) to the sysfs file fan<n>_smart_tach.  A zero
 will disable the function for that fan.  Note that Smart tach mode cannot be
 enabled if the PWM output frequency is 22500 Hz (see below).
 
-Manual PWM:
+Manual PWM
+^^^^^^^^^^
 
 The LM93 has a fixed or override mode for the two PWM outputs (although, there
 are still some conditions that will override even this mode - see section
@@ -141,7 +152,8 @@ will cause the driver to use the next largest value.  Also note: when manual
 PWM mode is disabled, the value of pwm1 and pwm2 indicates the current duty
 cycle chosen by the h/w.
 
-PWM Output Frequency:
+PWM Output Frequency
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
 
 The LM93 supports several different frequencies for the PWM output channels.
 The sysfs files pwm1_freq and pwm2_freq are used to select the frequency. The
@@ -149,9 +161,11 @@ frequency values are constrained by the hardware.  Selecting a value which is
 not available will cause the driver to use the next largest value.  Also note
 that this parameter has implications for the Smart Tach Mode (see above).
 
-PWM Output Frequencies (in Hz): 12, 36, 48, 60, 72, 84, 96, 22500 (default)
+PWM Output Frequencies (in Hz):
+	12, 36, 48, 60, 72, 84, 96, 22500 (default)
 
-Automatic PWM:
+Automatic PWM
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^
 
 The LM93 is capable of complex automatic fan control, with many different
 points of configuration.  To start, each PWM output can be bound to any
@@ -163,14 +177,16 @@ The eight control sources are: temp1-temp4 (aka "zones" in the datasheet),
 in the sysfs files pwm<n>_auto_channels, where a "1" enables the binding, and
 a "0" disables it. The h/w default is 0x0f (all temperatures bound).
 
-	0x01 - Temp 1
-	0x02 - Temp 2
-	0x04 - Temp 3
-	0x08 - Temp 4
-	0x10 - #PROCHOT 1
-	0x20 - #PROCHOT 2
-	0x40 - #VRDHOT 1
-	0x80 - #VRDHOT 2
+	====== ===========
+	0x01   Temp 1
+	0x02   Temp 2
+	0x04   Temp 3
+	0x08   Temp 4
+	0x10   #PROCHOT 1
+	0x20   #PROCHOT 2
+	0x40   #VRDHOT 1
+	0x80   #VRDHOT 2
+	====== ===========
 
 The function y = f(x) takes a source temperature x to a PWM output y.  This
 function of the LM93 is derived from a base temperature and a table of 12
@@ -180,7 +196,9 @@ degrees C, with the value of offset <i> for temperature value <n> being
 contained in the file temp<n>_auto_offset<i>.  E.g. if the base temperature
 is 40C:
 
+     ========== ======================= =============== =======
      offset #	temp<n>_auto_offset<i>	range		pwm
+     ========== ======================= =============== =======
 	 1		0		-		 25.00%
 	 2		0		-		 28.57%
 	 3		1		40C - 41C	 32.14%
@@ -193,7 +211,8 @@ is 40C:
 	10		2		54C - 56C	 57.14%
 	11		2		56C - 58C	 71.43%
 	12		2		58C - 60C	 85.71%
-					> 60C		100.00%
+	-		-		> 60C		100.00%
+     ========== ======================= =============== =======
 
 Valid offsets are in the range 0C <= x <= 7.5C in 0.5C increments.
 
@@ -213,7 +232,8 @@ temp<n>_auto_pwm_min.  Note, there are only two minimums: one each for temp[12]
 and temp[34].  Therefore, any change to e.g. temp1_auto_pwm_min will also
 affect temp2_auto_pwm_min.
 
-PWM Spin-Up Cycle:
+PWM Spin-Up Cycle
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
 
 A spin-up cycle occurs when a PWM output is commanded from 0% duty cycle to
 some value > 0%.  The LM93 supports a minimum duty cycle during spin-up.  These
@@ -225,10 +245,11 @@ the spin-up time in seconds.  The available spin-up times are constrained by
 the hardware.  Selecting a value which is not available will cause the driver
 to use the next largest value.
 
-Spin-up Durations: 0 (disabled, h/w default), 0.1, 0.25, 0.4, 0.7, 1.0,
-		   2.0, 4.0
+Spin-up Durations:
+	0 (disabled, h/w default), 0.1, 0.25, 0.4, 0.7, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0
 
-#PROCHOT and #VRDHOT PWM Ramping:
+#PROCHOT and #VRDHOT PWM Ramping
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
 
 If the #PROCHOT or #VRDHOT signals are asserted while bound to a PWM output
 channel, the LM93 will ramp the PWM output up to 100% duty cycle in discrete
@@ -237,9 +258,11 @@ one value each in seconds: pwm_auto_prochot_ramp and pwm_auto_vrdhot_ramp.
 The available ramp times are constrained by the hardware.  Selecting a value
 which is not available will cause the driver to use the next largest value.
 
-Ramp Times: 0 (disabled, h/w default) to 0.75 in 0.05 second intervals
+Ramp Times:
+	0 (disabled, h/w default) to 0.75 in 0.05 second intervals
 
-Fan Boost:
+Fan Boost
+^^^^^^^^^
 
 For each temperature channel, there is a boost temperature: if the channel
 exceeds this limit, the LM93 will immediately drive both PWM outputs to 100%.
@@ -249,7 +272,8 @@ limit is reached, the temperature channel must drop below this value before
 the boost function is disabled.  This temperature is also expressed in degrees
 C in the sysfs files temp<n>_auto_boost_hyst.
 
-GPIO Pins:
+GPIO Pins
+^^^^^^^^^
 
 The LM93 can monitor the logic level of four dedicated GPIO pins as well as the
 four tach input pins.  GPIO0-GPIO3 correspond to (fan) tach 1-4, respectively.
@@ -260,50 +284,29 @@ LSB is GPIO0, and the MSB is GPIO7.
 LM93 Unique sysfs Files
 -----------------------
 
-	file			description
-	-------------------------------------------------------------
-
-	prochot<n>		current #PROCHOT %
-
-	prochot<n>_avg		moving average #PROCHOT %
-
-	prochot<n>_max		limit #PROCHOT %
-
-	prochot_short		enable or disable logical #PROCHOT pin short
-
-	prochot<n>_override	force #PROCHOT assertion as PWM
-
-	prochot_override_duty_cycle
-				duty cycle for the PWM signal used when
-				#PROCHOT is overridden
-
-	prochot<n>_interval	#PROCHOT PWM sampling interval
-
-	vrdhot<n>		0 means negated, 1 means asserted
-
-	fan<n>_smart_tach	enable or disable smart tach mode
-
-	pwm<n>_auto_channels	select control sources for PWM outputs
-
-	pwm<n>_auto_spinup_min	minimum duty cycle during spin-up
-
-	pwm<n>_auto_spinup_time	duration of spin-up
-
-	pwm_auto_prochot_ramp	ramp time per step when #PROCHOT asserted
-
-	pwm_auto_vrdhot_ramp	ramp time per step when #VRDHOT asserted
-
-	temp<n>_auto_base	temperature channel base
-
-	temp<n>_auto_offset[1-12]
-				temperature channel offsets
-
-	temp<n>_auto_offset_hyst
-				temperature channel offset hysteresis
-
-	temp<n>_auto_boost	temperature channel boost (PWMs to 100%) limit
-
-	temp<n>_auto_boost_hyst	temperature channel boost hysteresis
-
-	gpio			input state of 8 GPIO pins; read-only
-
+=========================== ===============================================
+file			    description
+=========================== ===============================================
+prochot<n>		    current #PROCHOT %
+prochot<n>_avg		    moving average #PROCHOT %
+prochot<n>_max		    limit #PROCHOT %
+prochot_short		    enable or disable logical #PROCHOT pin short
+prochot<n>_override	    force #PROCHOT assertion as PWM
+prochot_override_duty_cycle duty cycle for the PWM signal used when
+			    #PROCHOT is overridden
+prochot<n>_interval	    #PROCHOT PWM sampling interval
+vrdhot<n>		    0 means negated, 1 means asserted
+fan<n>_smart_tach	    enable or disable smart tach mode
+pwm<n>_auto_channels	    select control sources for PWM outputs
+pwm<n>_auto_spinup_min	    minimum duty cycle during spin-up
+pwm<n>_auto_spinup_time	    duration of spin-up
+pwm_auto_prochot_ramp	    ramp time per step when #PROCHOT asserted
+pwm_auto_vrdhot_ramp	    ramp time per step when #VRDHOT asserted
+temp<n>_auto_base	    temperature channel base
+temp<n>_auto_offset[1-12]   temperature channel offsets
+temp<n>_auto_offset_hyst    temperature channel offset hysteresis
+temp<n>_auto_boost	    temperature channel boost (PWMs to 100%)
+			    limit
+temp<n>_auto_boost_hyst     temperature channel boost hysteresis
+gpio			    input state of 8 GPIO pins; read-only
+=========================== ===============================================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm95234 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm95234.rst
index 32b777ef224c..e4c14bea5efd 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm95234
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm95234.rst
@@ -2,15 +2,22 @@ Kernel driver lm95234
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * National Semiconductor / Texas Instruments LM95233
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18, 0x2a, 0x2b
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Texas Instruments website
-               http://www.ti.com/product/lm95233
+
+	       http://www.ti.com/product/lm95233
+
   * National Semiconductor / Texas Instruments LM95234
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18, 0x4d, 0x4e
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Texas Instruments website
-               http://www.ti.com/product/lm95234
 
+	       http://www.ti.com/product/lm95234
 
 Author: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
 
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm95245 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm95245.rst
index d755901f58c4..566d1dc8c5a6 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm95245
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm95245.rst
@@ -1,16 +1,23 @@
 Kernel driver lm95245
-==================
+=====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * TI LM95235
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18, 0x29, 0x4c
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the TI website
-               http://www.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/lm95235.pdf
+
+	       http://www.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/lm95235.pdf
+
   * TI / National Semiconductor LM95245
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18, 0x19, 0x29, 0x4c, 0x4d
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the TI website
-               http://www.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/lm95245.pdf
 
+	       http://www.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/lm95245.pdf
 
 Author: Alexander Stein <alexander.stein@systec-electronic.com>
 
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lochnagar.rst b/Documentation/hwmon/lochnagar.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1d609c4d18c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lochnagar.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+Kernel Driver Lochnagar
+=======================
+
+Supported systems:
+  * Cirrus Logic : Lochnagar 2
+
+Author: Lucas A. Tanure Alves
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+Lochnagar 2 features built-in Current Monitor circuitry that allows for the
+measurement of both voltage and current on up to eight of the supply voltage
+rails provided to the minicards. The Current Monitor does not require any
+hardware modifications or external circuitry to operate.
+
+The current and voltage measurements are obtained through the standard register
+map interface to the Lochnagar board controller, and can therefore be monitored
+by software.
+
+Sysfs attributes
+----------------
+
+======================= =======================================================
+temp1_input             The Lochnagar board temperature (milliCelsius)
+in0_input               Measured voltage for DBVDD1 (milliVolts)
+in0_label               "DBVDD1"
+curr1_input             Measured current for DBVDD1 (milliAmps)
+curr1_label             "DBVDD1"
+power1_average          Measured average power for DBVDD1 (microWatts)
+power1_average_interval Power averaging time input valid from 1 to 1708mS
+power1_label            "DBVDD1"
+in1_input               Measured voltage for 1V8 DSP (milliVolts)
+in1_label               "1V8 DSP"
+curr2_input             Measured current for 1V8 DSP (milliAmps)
+curr2_label             "1V8 DSP"
+power2_average          Measured average power for 1V8 DSP (microWatts)
+power2_average_interval Power averaging time input valid from 1 to 1708mS
+power2_label            "1V8 DSP"
+in2_input               Measured voltage for 1V8 CDC (milliVolts)
+in2_label               "1V8 CDC"
+curr3_input             Measured current for 1V8 CDC (milliAmps)
+curr3_label             "1V8 CDC"
+power3_average          Measured average power for 1V8 CDC (microWatts)
+power3_average_interval Power averaging time input valid from 1 to 1708mS
+power3_label            "1V8 CDC"
+in3_input               Measured voltage for VDDCORE DSP (milliVolts)
+in3_label               "VDDCORE DSP"
+curr4_input             Measured current for VDDCORE DSP (milliAmps)
+curr4_label             "VDDCORE DSP"
+power4_average          Measured average power for VDDCORE DSP (microWatts)
+power4_average_interval Power averaging time input valid from 1 to 1708mS
+power4_label            "VDDCORE DSP"
+in4_input               Measured voltage for AVDD 1V8 (milliVolts)
+in4_label               "AVDD 1V8"
+curr5_input             Measured current for AVDD 1V8 (milliAmps)
+curr5_label             "AVDD 1V8"
+power5_average          Measured average power for AVDD 1V8 (microWatts)
+power5_average_interval Power averaging time input valid from 1 to 1708mS
+power5_label            "AVDD 1V8"
+curr6_input             Measured current for SYSVDD (milliAmps)
+curr6_label             "SYSVDD"
+power6_average          Measured average power for SYSVDD (microWatts)
+power6_average_interval Power averaging time input valid from 1 to 1708mS
+power6_label            "SYSVDD"
+in6_input               Measured voltage for VDDCORE CDC (milliVolts)
+in6_label               "VDDCORE CDC"
+curr7_input             Measured current for VDDCORE CDC (milliAmps)
+curr7_label             "VDDCORE CDC"
+power7_average          Measured average power for VDDCORE CDC (microWatts)
+power7_average_interval Power averaging time input valid from 1 to 1708mS
+power7_label            "VDDCORE CDC"
+in7_input               Measured voltage for MICVDD (milliVolts)
+in7_label               "MICVDD"
+curr8_input             Measured current for MICVDD (milliAmps)
+curr8_label             "MICVDD"
+power8_average          Measured average power for MICVDD (microWatts)
+power8_average_interval Power averaging time input valid from 1 to 1708mS
+power8_label            "MICVDD"
+======================= =======================================================
+
+Note:
+    It is not possible to measure voltage on the SYSVDD rail.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ltc2945 b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc2945.rst
index f8d0f7f19adb..20c884985367 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/ltc2945
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc2945.rst
@@ -2,11 +2,16 @@ Kernel driver ltc2945
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Linear Technology LTC2945
+
     Prefix: 'ltc2945'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet:
-        http://cds.linear.com/docs/en/datasheet/2945fa.pdf
+
+	http://cds.linear.com/docs/en/datasheet/2945fa.pdf
 
 Author: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
 
@@ -26,9 +31,10 @@ which can be safely used to identify the chip. You will have to instantiate
 the devices explicitly.
 
 Example: the following will load the driver for an LTC2945 at address 0x10
-on I2C bus #1:
-$ modprobe ltc2945
-$ echo ltc2945 0x10 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/i2c-1/new_device
+on I2C bus #1::
+
+	$ modprobe ltc2945
+	$ echo ltc2945 0x10 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/i2c-1/new_device
 
 
 Sysfs entries
@@ -45,6 +51,7 @@ Current Sense register. The reported value assumes that a 1 mOhm sense resistor
 is installed. If a different sense resistor is installed, calculate the real
 current by dividing the reported value by the sense resistor value in mOhm.
 
+======================= ========================================================
 in1_input		VIN voltage (mV). Voltage is measured either at
 			SENSE+ or VDD pin depending on chip configuration.
 in1_min			Undervoltage threshold
@@ -82,3 +89,4 @@ power1_input_highest	Historical maximum power use
 power1_reset_history	Write 1 to reset power1 history
 power1_min_alarm	Low power alarm
 power1_max_alarm	High power alarm
+======================= ========================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ltc2978 b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc2978.rst
index dfb2caa401d9..01a24fd6d5fe 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/ltc2978
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc2978.rst
@@ -2,85 +2,143 @@ Kernel driver ltc2978
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Linear Technology LTC2974
+
     Prefix: 'ltc2974'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: http://www.linear.com/product/ltc2974
+
   * Linear Technology LTC2975
+
     Prefix: 'ltc2975'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: http://www.linear.com/product/ltc2975
+
   * Linear Technology LTC2977
+
     Prefix: 'ltc2977'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: http://www.linear.com/product/ltc2977
+
   * Linear Technology LTC2978, LTC2978A
+
     Prefix: 'ltc2978'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: http://www.linear.com/product/ltc2978
-    	       http://www.linear.com/product/ltc2978a
+
+	       http://www.linear.com/product/ltc2978a
+
   * Linear Technology LTC2980
+
     Prefix: 'ltc2980'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: http://www.linear.com/product/ltc2980
+
   * Linear Technology LTC3880
+
     Prefix: 'ltc3880'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: http://www.linear.com/product/ltc3880
+
   * Linear Technology LTC3882
+
     Prefix: 'ltc3882'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: http://www.linear.com/product/ltc3882
+
   * Linear Technology LTC3883
+
     Prefix: 'ltc3883'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: http://www.linear.com/product/ltc3883
+
   * Linear Technology LTC3886
+
     Prefix: 'ltc3886'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: http://www.linear.com/product/ltc3886
+
   * Linear Technology LTC3887
+
     Prefix: 'ltc3887'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: http://www.linear.com/product/ltc3887
+
   * Linear Technology LTM2987
+
     Prefix: 'ltm2987'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: http://www.linear.com/product/ltm2987
+
   * Linear Technology LTM4675
+
     Prefix: 'ltm4675'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: http://www.linear.com/product/ltm4675
+
   * Linear Technology LTM4676
+
     Prefix: 'ltm4676'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: http://www.linear.com/product/ltm4676
+
   * Analog Devices LTM4686
+
     Prefix: 'ltm4686'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: http://www.analog.com/ltm4686
 
+
 Author: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
 
 
 Description
 -----------
 
-LTC2974 and LTC2975 are quad digital power supply managers.
-LTC2978 is an octal power supply monitor.
-LTC2977 is a pin compatible replacement for LTC2978.
-LTC2980 is a 16-channel Power System Manager, consisting of two LTC2977
-in a single die. The chip is instantiated and reported as two separate chips
-on two different I2C bus addresses.
-LTC3880, LTC3882, LTC3886, and LTC3887 are dual output poly-phase step-down
-DC/DC controllers.
-LTC3883 is a single phase step-down DC/DC controller.
-LTM2987 is a 16-channel Power System Manager with two LTC2977 plus
-additional components on a single die. The chip is instantiated and reported
-as two separate chips on two different I2C bus addresses.
-LTM4675 is a dual 9A or single 18A μModule regulator
-LTM4676 is a dual 13A or single 26A uModule regulator.
-LTM4686 is a dual 10A or single 20A uModule regulator.
+- LTC2974 and LTC2975 are quad digital power supply managers.
+- LTC2978 is an octal power supply monitor.
+- LTC2977 is a pin compatible replacement for LTC2978.
+- LTC2980 is a 16-channel Power System Manager, consisting of two LTC2977
+- in a single die. The chip is instantiated and reported as two separate chips
+- on two different I2C bus addresses.
+- LTC3880, LTC3882, LTC3886, and LTC3887 are dual output poly-phase step-down
+- DC/DC controllers.
+- LTC3883 is a single phase step-down DC/DC controller.
+- LTM2987 is a 16-channel Power System Manager with two LTC2977 plus
+- additional components on a single die. The chip is instantiated and reported
+- as two separate chips on two different I2C bus addresses.
+- LTM4675 is a dual 9A or single 18A μModule regulator
+- LTM4676 is a dual 13A or single 26A uModule regulator.
+- LTM4686 is a dual 10A or single 20A uModule regulator.
 
 
 Usage Notes
@@ -90,127 +148,208 @@ This driver does not probe for PMBus devices. You will have to instantiate
 devices explicitly.
 
 Example: the following commands will load the driver for an LTC2978 at address
-0x60 on I2C bus #1:
+0x60 on I2C bus #1::
 
-# modprobe ltc2978
-# echo ltc2978 0x60 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/i2c-1/new_device
+	# modprobe ltc2978
+	# echo ltc2978 0x60 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/i2c-1/new_device
 
 
 Sysfs attributes
 ----------------
 
+======================= ========================================================
 in1_label		"vin"
+
 in1_input		Measured input voltage.
+
 in1_min			Minimum input voltage.
+
 in1_max			Maximum input voltage.
+
 			LTC2974, LTC2975, LTC2977, LTC2980, LTC2978, and
 			LTM2987 only.
+
 in1_lcrit		Critical minimum input voltage.
+
 			LTC2974, LTC2975, LTC2977, LTC2980, LTC2978, and
 			LTM2987 only.
+
 in1_crit		Critical maximum input voltage.
+
 in1_min_alarm		Input voltage low alarm.
+
 in1_max_alarm		Input voltage high alarm.
+
 			LTC2974, LTC2975, LTC2977, LTC2980, LTC2978, and
 			LTM2987 only.
 in1_lcrit_alarm		Input voltage critical low alarm.
+
 			LTC2974, LTC2975, LTC2977, LTC2980, LTC2978, and
 			LTM2987 only.
 in1_crit_alarm		Input voltage critical high alarm.
+
 in1_lowest		Lowest input voltage.
+
 			LTC2974, LTC2975, LTC2977, LTC2980, LTC2978, and
 			LTM2987 only.
 in1_highest		Highest input voltage.
+
 in1_reset_history	Reset input voltage history.
 
 in[N]_label		"vout[1-8]".
-			LTC2974, LTC2975: N=2-5
-			LTC2977, LTC2980, LTM2987: N=2-9
-			LTC2978: N=2-9
-			LTC3880, LTC3882, LTC23886 LTC3887, LTM4675, LTM4676:
-				N=2-3
-			LTC3883: N=2
+
+			- LTC2974, LTC2975: N=2-5
+			- LTC2977, LTC2980, LTM2987: N=2-9
+			- LTC2978: N=2-9
+			- LTC3880, LTC3882, LTC23886 LTC3887, LTM4675, LTM4676:
+			  N=2-3
+			- LTC3883: N=2
+
 in[N]_input		Measured output voltage.
+
 in[N]_min		Minimum output voltage.
+
 in[N]_max		Maximum output voltage.
+
 in[N]_lcrit		Critical minimum output voltage.
+
 in[N]_crit		Critical maximum output voltage.
+
 in[N]_min_alarm		Output voltage low alarm.
+
 in[N]_max_alarm		Output voltage high alarm.
+
 in[N]_lcrit_alarm	Output voltage critical low alarm.
+
 in[N]_crit_alarm	Output voltage critical high alarm.
-in[N]_lowest		Lowest output voltage. LTC2974, LTC2975,
-			and LTC2978 only.
+
+in[N]_lowest		Lowest output voltage.
+
+
+			LTC2974, LTC2975,and LTC2978 only.
+
 in[N]_highest		Highest output voltage.
+
 in[N]_reset_history	Reset output voltage history.
 
 temp[N]_input		Measured temperature.
-			On LTC2974 and LTC2975, temp[1-4] report external
-			temperatures, and temp5 reports the chip temperature.
-			On LTC2977, LTC2980, LTC2978, and LTM2987, only one
-			temperature measurement is supported and reports
-			the chip temperature.
-			On LTC3880, LTC3882, LTC3887, LTM4675, and LTM4676,
-			temp1 and temp2 report external temperatures, and temp3
-			reports the chip temperature.
-			On LTC3883, temp1 reports an external temperature,
-			and temp2 reports the chip temperature.
-temp[N]_min		Mimimum temperature. LTC2974, LCT2977, LTM2980, LTC2978,
-			and LTM2987 only.
+
+			- On LTC2974 and LTC2975, temp[1-4] report external
+			  temperatures, and temp5 reports the chip temperature.
+			- On LTC2977, LTC2980, LTC2978, and LTM2987, only one
+			  temperature measurement is supported and reports
+			  the chip temperature.
+			- On LTC3880, LTC3882, LTC3887, LTM4675, and LTM4676,
+			  temp1 and temp2 report external temperatures, and
+			  temp3 reports the chip temperature.
+			- On LTC3883, temp1 reports an external temperature,
+			  and temp2 reports the chip temperature.
+
+temp[N]_min		Mimimum temperature.
+
+			LTC2974, LCT2977, LTM2980, LTC2978, and LTM2987 only.
+
 temp[N]_max		Maximum temperature.
+
 temp[N]_lcrit		Critical low temperature.
+
 temp[N]_crit		Critical high temperature.
+
 temp[N]_min_alarm	Temperature low alarm.
+
 			LTC2974, LTC2975, LTC2977, LTM2980, LTC2978, and
 			LTM2987 only.
+
 temp[N]_max_alarm	Temperature high alarm.
+
+
 temp[N]_lcrit_alarm	Temperature critical low alarm.
+
 temp[N]_crit_alarm	Temperature critical high alarm.
+
 temp[N]_lowest		Lowest measured temperature.
-			LTC2974, LTC2975, LTC2977, LTM2980, LTC2978, and
-			LTM2987 only.
-			Not supported for chip temperature sensor on LTC2974 and
-			LTC2975.
-temp[N]_highest		Highest measured temperature. Not supported for chip
-			temperature sensor on LTC2974 and LTC2975.
-temp[N]_reset_history	Reset temperature history. Not supported for chip
-			temperature sensor on LTC2974 and LTC2975.
+
+			- LTC2974, LTC2975, LTC2977, LTM2980, LTC2978, and
+			  LTM2987 only.
+			- Not supported for chip temperature sensor on LTC2974
+			  and LTC2975.
+
+temp[N]_highest		Highest measured temperature.
+
+			Not supported for chip temperature sensor on
+			LTC2974 and LTC2975.
+
+temp[N]_reset_history	Reset temperature history.
+
+			Not supported for chip temperature sensor on
+			LTC2974 and LTC2975.
 
 power1_label		"pin". LTC3883 and LTC3886 only.
+
 power1_input		Measured input power.
 
 power[N]_label		"pout[1-4]".
-			LTC2974, LTC2975: N=1-4
-			LTC2977, LTC2980, LTM2987: Not supported
-			LTC2978: Not supported
-			LTC3880, LTC3882, LTC3886, LTC3887, LTM4675, LTM4676:
-				N=1-2
-			LTC3883: N=2
+
+			- LTC2974, LTC2975: N=1-4
+			- LTC2977, LTC2980, LTM2987: Not supported
+			- LTC2978: Not supported
+			- LTC3880, LTC3882, LTC3886, LTC3887, LTM4675, LTM4676:
+			  N=1-2
+			- LTC3883: N=2
+
 power[N]_input		Measured output power.
 
-curr1_label		"iin". LTC3880, LTC3883, LTC3886, LTC3887, LTM4675,
+curr1_label		"iin".
+
+			LTC3880, LTC3883, LTC3886, LTC3887, LTM4675,
 			and LTM4676 only.
+
 curr1_input		Measured input current.
+
 curr1_max		Maximum input current.
+
 curr1_max_alarm		Input current high alarm.
-curr1_highest		Highest input current. LTC3883 and LTC3886 only.
-curr1_reset_history	Reset input current history. LTC3883 and LTC3886 only.
+
+curr1_highest		Highest input current.
+
+			LTC3883 and LTC3886 only.
+
+curr1_reset_history	Reset input current history.
+
+			LTC3883 and LTC3886 only.
 
 curr[N]_label		"iout[1-4]".
-			LTC2974, LTC2975: N=1-4
-			LTC2977, LTC2980, LTM2987: not supported
-			LTC2978: not supported
-			LTC3880, LTC3882, LTC3886, LTC3887, LTM4675, LTM4676:
-				N=2-3
-			LTC3883: N=2
+
+			- LTC2974, LTC2975: N=1-4
+			- LTC2977, LTC2980, LTM2987: not supported
+			- LTC2978: not supported
+			- LTC3880, LTC3882, LTC3886, LTC3887, LTM4675, LTM4676:
+			  N=2-3
+			- LTC3883: N=2
+
 curr[N]_input		Measured output current.
+
 curr[N]_max		Maximum output current.
+
 curr[N]_crit		Critical high output current.
-curr[N]_lcrit		Critical low output current. LTC2974 and LTC2975 only.
+
+curr[N]_lcrit		Critical low output current.
+
+			LTC2974 and LTC2975 only.
+
 curr[N]_max_alarm	Output current high alarm.
+
 curr[N]_crit_alarm	Output current critical high alarm.
+
 curr[N]_lcrit_alarm	Output current critical low alarm.
+
+			LTC2974 and LTC2975 only.
+
+curr[N]_lowest		Lowest output current.
+
 			LTC2974 and LTC2975 only.
-curr[N]_lowest		Lowest output current. LTC2974 and LTC2975 only.
+
 curr[N]_highest		Highest output current.
+
 curr[N]_reset_history	Reset output current history.
+======================= ========================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ltc2990 b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc2990.rst
index 3ed68f676c0f..e0a369e679d3 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/ltc2990
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc2990.rst
@@ -1,14 +1,23 @@
 Kernel driver ltc2990
 =====================
 
+
 Supported chips:
+
   * Linear Technology LTC2990
+
     Prefix: 'ltc2990'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: http://www.linear.com/product/ltc2990
 
-Author: Mike Looijmans <mike.looijmans@topic.nl>
-        Tom Levens <tom.levens@cern.ch>
+
+
+Author:
+
+	- Mike Looijmans <mike.looijmans@topic.nl>
+	- Tom Levens <tom.levens@cern.ch>
 
 
 Description
@@ -31,17 +40,21 @@ devices explicitly.
 Sysfs attributes
 ----------------
 
+============= ==================================================
 in0_input     Voltage at Vcc pin in millivolt (range 2.5V to 5V)
-temp1_input   Internal chip temperature in millidegrees Celcius
+temp1_input   Internal chip temperature in millidegrees Celsius
+============= ==================================================
 
 A subset of the following attributes are visible, depending on the measurement
 mode of the chip.
 
+============= ==========================================================
 in[1-4]_input Voltage at V[1-4] pin in millivolt
-temp2_input   External temperature sensor TR1 in millidegrees Celcius
-temp3_input   External temperature sensor TR2 in millidegrees Celcius
+temp2_input   External temperature sensor TR1 in millidegrees Celsius
+temp3_input   External temperature sensor TR2 in millidegrees Celsius
 curr1_input   Current in mA across V1-V2 assuming a 1mOhm sense resistor
 curr2_input   Current in mA across V3-V4 assuming a 1mOhm sense resistor
+============= ==========================================================
 
 The "curr*_input" measurements actually report the voltage drop across the
 input pins in microvolts. This is equivalent to the current through a 1mOhm
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ltc3815 b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc3815.rst
index eb7db2d13587..fb0135fc1925 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/ltc3815
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc3815.rst
@@ -2,9 +2,13 @@ Kernel driver ltc3815
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Linear Technology LTC3815
+
     Prefix: 'ltc3815'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: http://www.linear.com/product/ltc3815
 
 Author: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
@@ -23,15 +27,16 @@ This driver does not probe for PMBus devices. You will have to instantiate
 devices explicitly.
 
 Example: the following commands will load the driver for an LTC3815
-at address 0x20 on I2C bus #1:
+at address 0x20 on I2C bus #1::
 
-# modprobe ltc3815
-# echo ltc3815 0x20 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/i2c-1/new_device
+	# modprobe ltc3815
+	# echo ltc3815 0x20 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/i2c-1/new_device
 
 
 Sysfs attributes
 ----------------
 
+======================= =======================================================
 in1_label		"vin"
 in1_input		Measured input voltage.
 in1_alarm		Input voltage alarm.
@@ -59,3 +64,4 @@ curr2_input		Measured output current.
 curr2_alarm		Output current alarm.
 curr2_highest		Highest output current.
 curr2_reset_history	Reset output current history.
+======================= =======================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4151 b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4151.rst
index 43c667e6677a..c39229b19624 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4151
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4151.rst
@@ -2,11 +2,16 @@ Kernel driver ltc4151
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Linear Technology LTC4151
+
     Prefix: 'ltc4151'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet:
-        http://www.linear.com/docs/Datasheet/4151fc.pdf
+
+	http://www.linear.com/docs/Datasheet/4151fc.pdf
 
 Author: Per Dalen <per.dalen@appeartv.com>
 
@@ -25,9 +30,10 @@ which can be safely used to identify the chip. You will have to instantiate
 the devices explicitly.
 
 Example: the following will load the driver for an LTC4151 at address 0x6f
-on I2C bus #0:
-# modprobe ltc4151
-# echo ltc4151 0x6f > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/i2c-0/new_device
+on I2C bus #0::
+
+	# modprobe ltc4151
+	# echo ltc4151 0x6f > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/i2c-0/new_device
 
 
 Sysfs entries
@@ -40,8 +46,10 @@ Current reading provided by this driver is reported as obtained from the Current
 Sense register. The reported value assumes that a 1 mOhm sense resistor is
 installed.
 
+======================= ==================
 in1_input		VDIN voltage (mV)
 
 in2_input		ADIN voltage (mV)
 
 curr1_input		SENSE current (mA)
+======================= ==================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4215 b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4215.rst
index c196a1846259..8d5044d99bab 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4215
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4215.rst
@@ -2,11 +2,16 @@ Kernel driver ltc4215
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Linear Technology LTC4215
+
     Prefix: 'ltc4215'
+
     Addresses scanned: 0x44
+
     Datasheet:
-        http://www.linear.com/pc/downloadDocument.do?navId=H0,C1,C1003,C1006,C1163,P17572,D12697
+
+	http://www.linear.com/pc/downloadDocument.do?navId=H0,C1,C1003,C1006,C1163,P17572,D12697
 
 Author: Ira W. Snyder <iws@ovro.caltech.edu>
 
@@ -26,9 +31,10 @@ of the possible addresses are unfriendly to probing. You will have to
 instantiate the devices explicitly.
 
 Example: the following will load the driver for an LTC4215 at address 0x44
-on I2C bus #0:
-$ modprobe ltc4215
-$ echo ltc4215 0x44 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/i2c-0/new_device
+on I2C bus #0::
+
+	$ modprobe ltc4215
+	$ echo ltc4215 0x44 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/i2c-0/new_device
 
 
 Sysfs entries
@@ -38,6 +44,7 @@ The LTC4215 has built-in limits for overvoltage, undervoltage, and
 undercurrent warnings. This makes it very likely that the reference
 circuit will be used.
 
+======================= =========================
 in1_input		input voltage
 in2_input		output voltage
 
@@ -49,3 +56,4 @@ curr1_max_alarm		overcurrent alarm
 
 power1_input		power usage
 power1_alarm		power bad alarm
+======================= =========================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4245 b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4245.rst
index 4ca7a9da09f9..3dafd08a4e87 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4245
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4245.rst
@@ -2,11 +2,16 @@ Kernel driver ltc4245
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Linear Technology LTC4245
+
     Prefix: 'ltc4245'
+
     Addresses scanned: 0x20-0x3f
+
     Datasheet:
-        http://www.linear.com/pc/downloadDocument.do?navId=H0,C1,C1003,C1006,C1140,P19392,D13517
+
+	http://www.linear.com/pc/downloadDocument.do?navId=H0,C1,C1003,C1006,C1140,P19392,D13517
 
 Author: Ira W. Snyder <iws@ovro.caltech.edu>
 
@@ -27,9 +32,10 @@ of the possible addresses are unfriendly to probing. You will have to
 instantiate the devices explicitly.
 
 Example: the following will load the driver for an LTC4245 at address 0x23
-on I2C bus #1:
-$ modprobe ltc4245
-$ echo ltc4245 0x23 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/i2c-1/new_device
+on I2C bus #1::
+
+	$ modprobe ltc4245
+	$ echo ltc4245 0x23 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/i2c-1/new_device
 
 
 Sysfs entries
@@ -42,6 +48,7 @@ This driver uses the values in the datasheet to change the register values
 into the values specified in the sysfs-interface document. The current readings
 rely on the sense resistors listed in Table 2: "Sense Resistor Values".
 
+======================= =======================================================
 in1_input		12v input voltage (mV)
 in2_input		5v  input voltage (mV)
 in3_input		3v  input voltage (mV)
@@ -80,6 +87,7 @@ power1_input		12v power usage (mW)
 power2_input		5v  power usage (mW)
 power3_input		3v  power usage (mW)
 power4_input		Vee (-12v) power usage (mW)
+======================= =======================================================
 
 
 Note 1
@@ -96,6 +104,7 @@ slowly, -EAGAIN will be returned when you read the sysfs attribute containing
 the sensor reading.
 
 The LTC4245 chip can be configured to sample all GPIO pins with two methods:
+
 1) platform data -- see include/linux/platform_data/ltc4245.h
 2) OF device tree -- add the "ltc4245,use-extra-gpios" property to each chip
 
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4260 b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4260.rst
index c4ff4ad998b2..4c335b6a51d1 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4260
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4260.rst
@@ -2,11 +2,16 @@ Kernel driver ltc4260
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Linear Technology LTC4260
+
     Prefix: 'ltc4260'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet:
-        http://cds.linear.com/docs/en/datasheet/4260fc.pdf
+
+	http://cds.linear.com/docs/en/datasheet/4260fc.pdf
 
 Author: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
 
@@ -26,9 +31,10 @@ which can be safely used to identify the chip. You will have to instantiate
 the devices explicitly.
 
 Example: the following will load the driver for an LTC4260 at address 0x10
-on I2C bus #1:
-$ modprobe ltc4260
-$ echo ltc4260 0x10 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/i2c-1/new_device
+on I2C bus #1::
+
+	$ modprobe ltc4260
+	$ echo ltc4260 0x10 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/i2c-1/new_device
 
 
 Sysfs entries
@@ -45,6 +51,7 @@ Current Sense register. The reported value assumes that a 1 mOhm sense resistor
 is installed. If a different sense resistor is installed, calculate the real
 current by dividing the reported value by the sense resistor value in mOhm.
 
+======================= =======================
 in1_input		SOURCE voltage (mV)
 in1_min_alarm		Undervoltage alarm
 in1_max_alarm		Overvoltage alarm
@@ -54,3 +61,4 @@ in2_alarm		Power bad alarm
 
 curr1_input		SENSE current (mA)
 curr1_alarm		SENSE overcurrent alarm
+======================= =======================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4261 b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4261.rst
index 9378a75c6134..c80233f8082e 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4261
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4261.rst
@@ -2,11 +2,16 @@ Kernel driver ltc4261
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Linear Technology LTC4261
+
     Prefix: 'ltc4261'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet:
-        http://cds.linear.com/docs/Datasheet/42612fb.pdf
+
+	http://cds.linear.com/docs/Datasheet/42612fb.pdf
 
 Author: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
 
@@ -26,9 +31,10 @@ which can be safely used to identify the chip. You will have to instantiate
 the devices explicitly.
 
 Example: the following will load the driver for an LTC4261 at address 0x10
-on I2C bus #1:
-$ modprobe ltc4261
-$ echo ltc4261 0x10 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/i2c-1/new_device
+on I2C bus #1::
+
+	$ modprobe ltc4261
+	$ echo ltc4261 0x10 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/i2c-1/new_device
 
 
 Sysfs entries
@@ -51,6 +57,7 @@ the proximity of the ADIN2 pin to the OV pin. ADIN2 is, however, not available
 on all chip variants. To ensure that the alarm condition is reported to the user,
 report it with both voltage sensors.
 
+======================= =============================
 in1_input		ADIN2 voltage (mV)
 in1_min_alarm		ADIN/ADIN2 Undervoltage alarm
 in1_max_alarm		ADIN/ADIN2 Overvoltage alarm
@@ -61,3 +68,4 @@ in2_max_alarm		ADIN/ADIN2 Overvoltage alarm
 
 curr1_input		SENSE current (mA)
 curr1_alarm		SENSE overcurrent alarm
+======================= =============================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max16064 b/Documentation/hwmon/max16064.rst
index 265370f5cb82..6d5e9538991f 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/max16064
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max16064.rst
@@ -2,9 +2,13 @@ Kernel driver max16064
 ======================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Maxim MAX16064
+
     Prefix: 'max16064'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX16064.pdf
 
 Author: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
@@ -17,7 +21,7 @@ This driver supports hardware monitoring for Maxim MAX16064 Quad Power-Supply
 Controller with Active-Voltage Output Control and PMBus Interface.
 
 The driver is a client driver to the core PMBus driver.
-Please see Documentation/hwmon/pmbus for details on PMBus client drivers.
+Please see Documentation/hwmon/pmbus.rst for details on PMBus client drivers.
 
 
 Usage Notes
@@ -40,16 +44,20 @@ Sysfs entries
 The following attributes are supported. Limits are read-write; all other
 attributes are read-only.
 
+======================= ========================================================
 in[1-4]_label		"vout[1-4]"
 in[1-4]_input		Measured voltage. From READ_VOUT register.
 in[1-4]_min		Minimum Voltage. From VOUT_UV_WARN_LIMIT register.
 in[1-4]_max		Maximum voltage. From VOUT_OV_WARN_LIMIT register.
 in[1-4]_lcrit		Critical minimum Voltage. VOUT_UV_FAULT_LIMIT register.
-in[1-4]_crit		Critical maximum voltage. From VOUT_OV_FAULT_LIMIT register.
+in[1-4]_crit		Critical maximum voltage. From VOUT_OV_FAULT_LIMIT
+			register.
 in[1-4]_min_alarm	Voltage low alarm. From VOLTAGE_UV_WARNING status.
 in[1-4]_max_alarm	Voltage high alarm. From VOLTAGE_OV_WARNING status.
-in[1-4]_lcrit_alarm	Voltage critical low alarm. From VOLTAGE_UV_FAULT status.
-in[1-4]_crit_alarm	Voltage critical high alarm. From VOLTAGE_OV_FAULT status.
+in[1-4]_lcrit_alarm	Voltage critical low alarm. From VOLTAGE_UV_FAULT
+			status.
+in[1-4]_crit_alarm	Voltage critical high alarm. From VOLTAGE_OV_FAULT
+			status.
 in[1-4]_highest		Historical maximum voltage.
 in[1-4]_reset_history	Write any value to reset history.
 
@@ -64,3 +72,4 @@ temp1_crit_alarm	Chip temperature critical high alarm. Set by comparing
 			status is set.
 temp1_highest		Historical maximum temperature.
 temp1_reset_history	Write any value to reset history.
+======================= ========================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max16065 b/Documentation/hwmon/max16065.rst
index 208a29e43010..fa5c852a178c 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/max16065
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max16065.rst
@@ -1,28 +1,48 @@
 Kernel driver max16065
 ======================
 
+
 Supported chips:
+
   * Maxim MAX16065, MAX16066
+
     Prefixes: 'max16065', 'max16066'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet:
+
 	http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX16065-MAX16066.pdf
+
  *  Maxim MAX16067
+
     Prefix: 'max16067'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet:
+
 	http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX16067.pdf
+
  *  Maxim MAX16068
+
     Prefix: 'max16068'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet:
+
 	http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX16068.pdf
+
  *  Maxim MAX16070/MAX16071
+
     Prefixes: 'max16070', 'max16071'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet:
-	http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX16070-MAX16071.pdf
 
+	http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX16070-MAX16071.pdf
 
 Author: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
 
@@ -73,6 +93,7 @@ turn into a brick.
 Sysfs entries
 -------------
 
+======================= ========================================================
 in[0-11]_input		Input voltage measurements.
 
 in12_input		Voltage on CSP (Current Sense Positive) pin.
@@ -103,3 +124,4 @@ curr1_input		Current sense input; only if the chip supports current
 
 curr1_alarm		Overcurrent alarm; only if the chip supports current
 			sensing and if current sensing is enabled.
+======================= ========================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max1619 b/Documentation/hwmon/max1619.rst
index 518bae3a80c4..e25956e70f73 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/max1619
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max1619.rst
@@ -2,15 +2,20 @@ Kernel driver max1619
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Maxim MAX1619
+
     Prefix: 'max1619'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18-0x1a, 0x29-0x2b, 0x4c-0x4e
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website
-               http://pdfserv.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX1619.pdf
+
+	       http://pdfserv.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX1619.pdf
 
 Authors:
-        Oleksij Rempel <bug-track@fisher-privat.net>,
-        Jean Delvare <jdelvare@suse.de>
+       - Oleksij Rempel <bug-track@fisher-privat.net>,
+       - Jean Delvare <jdelvare@suse.de>
 
 Description
 -----------
@@ -26,4 +31,3 @@ Only the external sensor has high and low limits.
 The max1619 driver will not update its values more frequently than every
 other second; reading them more often will do no harm, but will return
 'old' values.
-
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max1668 b/Documentation/hwmon/max1668.rst
index 8f9d570dbfec..417f17d750e6 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/max1668
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max1668.rst
@@ -2,12 +2,17 @@ Kernel driver max1668
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Maxim MAX1668, MAX1805 and MAX1989
+
     Prefix: 'max1668'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18, 0x19, 0x1a, 0x29, 0x2a, 0x2b, 0x4c, 0x4d, 0x4e
+
     Datasheet: http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX1668-MAX1989.pdf
 
 Author:
+
     David George <david.george@ska.ac.za>
 
 Description
@@ -23,8 +28,9 @@ two ICs.
 The driver is able to distinguish between the devices and creates sysfs
 entries as follows:
 
-MAX1805, MAX1668 and MAX1989:
+- MAX1805, MAX1668 and MAX1989:
 
+=============== == ============================================================
 temp1_input     ro local (ambient) temperature
 temp1_max       rw local temperature maximum threshold for alarm
 temp1_max_alarm ro local temperature maximum threshold alarm
@@ -40,8 +46,11 @@ temp3_max       rw remote temperature 2 maximum threshold for alarm
 temp3_max_alarm ro remote temperature 2 maximum threshold alarm
 temp3_min       rw remote temperature 2 minimum threshold for alarm
 temp3_min_alarm ro remote temperature 2 minimum threshold alarm
+=============== == ============================================================
+
+- MAX1668 and MAX1989 only:
 
-MAX1668 and MAX1989 only:
+=============== == ============================================================
 temp4_input     ro remote temperature 3
 temp4_max       rw remote temperature 3 maximum threshold for alarm
 temp4_max_alarm ro remote temperature 3 maximum threshold alarm
@@ -52,6 +61,7 @@ temp5_max       rw remote temperature 4 maximum threshold for alarm
 temp5_max_alarm ro remote temperature 4 maximum threshold alarm
 temp5_min       rw remote temperature 4 minimum threshold for alarm
 temp5_min_alarm ro remote temperature 4 minimum threshold alarm
+=============== == ============================================================
 
 Module Parameters
 -----------------
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max197 b/Documentation/hwmon/max197.rst
index 8d89b9009df8..02fe19bc3428 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/max197
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max197.rst
@@ -1,16 +1,22 @@
-Maxim MAX197 driver
-===================
+Kernel driver max197
+====================
 
 Author:
+
   * Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com>
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Maxim MAX197
+
     Prefix: 'max197'
+
     Datasheet: http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX197.pdf
 
   * Maxim MAX199
+
     Prefix: 'max199'
+
     Datasheet: http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX199.pdf
 
 Description
@@ -26,7 +32,7 @@ Platform data
 -------------
 
 The MAX197 platform data (defined in linux/platform_data/max197.h) should be
-filled with a pointer to a conversion function, defined like:
+filled with a pointer to a conversion function, defined like::
 
     int convert(u8 ctrl);
 
@@ -36,25 +42,29 @@ or a negative error code otherwise.
 
 Control byte format:
 
+======= ========== ============================================
 Bit     Name       Description
 7,6     PD1,PD0    Clock and Power-Down modes
 5       ACQMOD     Internal or External Controlled Acquisition
 4       RNG        Full-scale voltage magnitude at the input
 3       BIP        Unipolar or Bipolar conversion mode
 2,1,0   A2,A1,A0   Channel
+======= ========== ============================================
 
 Sysfs interface
 ---------------
 
-* in[0-7]_input: The conversion value for the corresponding channel.
-                 RO
+  ============== ==============================================================
+  in[0-7]_input  The conversion value for the corresponding channel.
+		 RO
 
-* in[0-7]_min:   The lower limit (in mV) for the corresponding channel.
-                 For the MAX197, it will be adjusted to -10000, -5000, or 0.
-                 For the MAX199, it will be adjusted to -4000, -2000, or 0.
-                 RW
+  in[0-7]_min    The lower limit (in mV) for the corresponding channel.
+		 For the MAX197, it will be adjusted to -10000, -5000, or 0.
+		 For the MAX199, it will be adjusted to -4000, -2000, or 0.
+		 RW
 
-* in[0-7]_max:   The higher limit (in mV) for the corresponding channel.
-                 For the MAX197, it will be adjusted to 0, 5000, or 10000.
-                 For the MAX199, it will be adjusted to 0, 2000, or 4000.
-                 RW
+  in[0-7]_max    The higher limit (in mV) for the corresponding channel.
+		 For the MAX197, it will be adjusted to 0, 5000, or 10000.
+		 For the MAX199, it will be adjusted to 0, 2000, or 4000.
+		 RW
+  ============== ==============================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max20751 b/Documentation/hwmon/max20751.rst
index f9fa25ebb521..aa4469be6674 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/max20751
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max20751.rst
@@ -2,10 +2,15 @@ Kernel driver max20751
 ======================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * maxim MAX20751
+
     Prefix: 'max20751'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: http://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX20751.pdf
+
     Application note: http://pdfserv.maximintegrated.com/en/an/AN5941.pdf
 
 Author: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
@@ -18,7 +23,7 @@ This driver supports MAX20751 Multiphase Master with PMBus Interface
 and Internal Buck Converter.
 
 The driver is a client driver to the core PMBus driver.
-Please see Documentation/hwmon/pmbus for details on PMBus client drivers.
+Please see Documentation/hwmon/pmbus.rst for details on PMBus client drivers.
 
 
 Usage Notes
@@ -40,6 +45,7 @@ Sysfs entries
 
 The following attributes are supported.
 
+======================= =======================================================
 in1_label		"vin1"
 in1_input		Measured voltage.
 in1_min			Minimum input voltage.
@@ -75,3 +81,4 @@ temp1_crit_alarm	Chip temperature critical high alarm.
 
 power1_input		Output power.
 power1_label		"pout1"
+======================= =======================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max31722 b/Documentation/hwmon/max31722.rst
index 090da84538c8..0ab15c00b226 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/max31722
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max31722.rst
@@ -2,15 +2,25 @@ Kernel driver max31722
 ======================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Maxim Integrated MAX31722
+
     Prefix: 'max31722'
+
     ACPI ID: MAX31722
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: https://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX31722-MAX31723.pdf
+
   * Maxim Integrated MAX31723
+
     Prefix: 'max31723'
+
     ACPI ID: MAX31723
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: https://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX31722-MAX31723.pdf
 
 Author: Tiberiu Breana <tiberiu.a.breana@intel.com>
@@ -31,4 +41,6 @@ Sysfs entries
 
 The following attribute is supported:
 
+======================= =======================================================
 temp1_input		Measured temperature. Read-only.
+======================= =======================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max31785 b/Documentation/hwmon/max31785.rst
index 270c5f865261..c8c6756d0ee1 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/max31785
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max31785.rst
@@ -2,9 +2,13 @@ Kernel driver max31785
 ======================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Maxim MAX31785, MAX31785A
+
     Prefix: 'max31785' or 'max31785a'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: https://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX31785.pdf
 
 Author: Andrew Jeffery <andrew@aj.id.au>
@@ -30,6 +34,7 @@ devices explicitly.
 Sysfs attributes
 ----------------
 
+======================= =======================================================
 fan[1-4]_alarm		Fan alarm.
 fan[1-4]_fault		Fan fault.
 fan[1-8]_input		Fan RPM. On the MAX31785A, inputs 5-8 correspond to the
@@ -58,3 +63,4 @@ temp[1-11]_crit_alarm	Chip temperature critical high alarm
 temp[1-11]_input	Measured temperature
 temp[1-11]_max		Maximum temperature
 temp[1-11]_max_alarm	Chip temperature high alarm
+======================= =======================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max31790 b/Documentation/hwmon/max31790.rst
index 855e62430da9..84c62a12ef3a 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/max31790
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max31790.rst
@@ -2,9 +2,13 @@ Kernel driver max31790
 ======================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Maxim MAX31790
+
     Prefix: 'max31790'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: http://pdfserv.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX31790.pdf
 
 Author: Il Han <corone.il.han@gmail.com>
@@ -30,8 +34,10 @@ also be configured to serve as tachometer inputs.
 Sysfs entries
 -------------
 
+================== === =======================================================
 fan[1-12]_input    RO  fan tachometer speed in RPM
 fan[1-12]_fault    RO  fan experienced fault
 fan[1-6]_target    RW  desired fan speed in RPM
 pwm[1-6]_enable    RW  regulator mode, 0=disabled, 1=manual mode, 2=rpm mode
 pwm[1-6]           RW  fan target duty cycle (0-255)
+================== === =======================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max34440 b/Documentation/hwmon/max34440.rst
index b2de8fa49273..939138e12b02 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/max34440
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max34440.rst
@@ -2,34 +2,63 @@ Kernel driver max34440
 ======================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Maxim MAX34440
+
     Prefixes: 'max34440'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: http://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX34440.pdf
+
   * Maxim MAX34441
+
     PMBus 5-Channel Power-Supply Manager and Intelligent Fan Controller
+
     Prefixes: 'max34441'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: http://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX34441.pdf
+
   * Maxim MAX34446
+
     PMBus Power-Supply Data Logger
+
     Prefixes: 'max34446'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: http://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX34446.pdf
+
   * Maxim MAX34451
+
     PMBus 16-Channel V/I Monitor and 12-Channel Sequencer/Marginer
+
     Prefixes: 'max34451'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: http://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX34451.pdf
+
   * Maxim MAX34460
+
     PMBus 12-Channel Voltage Monitor & Sequencer
+
     Prefix: 'max34460'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: http://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX34460.pdf
+
   * Maxim MAX34461
+
     PMBus 16-Channel Voltage Monitor & Sequencer
+
     Prefix: 'max34461'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: http://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX34461.pdf
 
 Author: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
@@ -47,7 +76,7 @@ based on GIN pins. The MAX34460 supports 12 voltage channels, and the MAX34461
 supports 16 voltage channels.
 
 The driver is a client driver to the core PMBus driver. Please see
-Documentation/hwmon/pmbus for details on PMBus client drivers.
+Documentation/hwmon/pmbus.rst for details on PMBus client drivers.
 
 
 Usage Notes
@@ -77,42 +106,67 @@ Sysfs entries
 The following attributes are supported. Limits are read-write; all other
 attributes are read-only.
 
+In
+~~
+
+======================= =======================================================
 in[1-6]_label		"vout[1-6]".
 in[1-6]_input		Measured voltage. From READ_VOUT register.
 in[1-6]_min		Minimum Voltage. From VOUT_UV_WARN_LIMIT register.
 in[1-6]_max		Maximum voltage. From VOUT_OV_WARN_LIMIT register.
 in[1-6]_lcrit		Critical minimum Voltage. VOUT_UV_FAULT_LIMIT register.
-in[1-6]_crit		Critical maximum voltage. From VOUT_OV_FAULT_LIMIT register.
+in[1-6]_crit		Critical maximum voltage. From VOUT_OV_FAULT_LIMIT
+			register.
 in[1-6]_min_alarm	Voltage low alarm. From VOLTAGE_UV_WARNING status.
 in[1-6]_max_alarm	Voltage high alarm. From VOLTAGE_OV_WARNING status.
-in[1-6]_lcrit_alarm	Voltage critical low alarm. From VOLTAGE_UV_FAULT status.
-in[1-6]_crit_alarm	Voltage critical high alarm. From VOLTAGE_OV_FAULT status.
+in[1-6]_lcrit_alarm	Voltage critical low alarm. From VOLTAGE_UV_FAULT
+			status.
+in[1-6]_crit_alarm	Voltage critical high alarm. From VOLTAGE_OV_FAULT
+			status.
 in[1-6]_lowest		Historical minimum voltage.
 in[1-6]_highest		Historical maximum voltage.
 in[1-6]_reset_history	Write any value to reset history.
+======================= =======================================================
+
+.. note:: MAX34446 only supports in[1-4].
 
-			MAX34446 only supports in[1-4].
+Curr
+~~~~
 
+======================= ========================================================
 curr[1-6]_label		"iout[1-6]".
 curr[1-6]_input		Measured current. From READ_IOUT register.
 curr[1-6]_max		Maximum current. From IOUT_OC_WARN_LIMIT register.
-curr[1-6]_crit		Critical maximum current. From IOUT_OC_FAULT_LIMIT register.
+curr[1-6]_crit		Critical maximum current. From IOUT_OC_FAULT_LIMIT
+			register.
 curr[1-6]_max_alarm	Current high alarm. From IOUT_OC_WARNING status.
 curr[1-6]_crit_alarm	Current critical high alarm. From IOUT_OC_FAULT status.
 curr[1-4]_average	Historical average current (MAX34446/34451 only).
 curr[1-6]_highest	Historical maximum current.
 curr[1-6]_reset_history	Write any value to reset history.
+======================= ========================================================
+
+.. note::
+
+    - in6 and curr6 attributes only exist for MAX34440.
+    - MAX34446 only supports curr[1-4].
 
-			in6 and curr6 attributes only exist for MAX34440.
-			MAX34446 only supports curr[1-4].
+Power
+~~~~~
 
+======================= ========================================================
 power[1,3]_label	"pout[1,3]"
 power[1,3]_input	Measured power.
 power[1,3]_average	Historical average power.
 power[1,3]_highest	Historical maximum power.
+======================= ========================================================
 
-			Power attributes only exist for MAX34446.
+.. note:: Power attributes only exist for MAX34446.
 
+Temp
+~~~~
+
+======================= ========================================================
 temp[1-8]_input		Measured temperatures. From READ_TEMPERATURE_1 register.
 			temp1 is the chip's internal temperature. temp2..temp5
 			are remote I2C temperature sensors. For MAX34441, temp6
@@ -125,11 +179,17 @@ temp[1-8]_crit_alarm	Temperature critical high alarm.
 temp[1-8]_average	Historical average temperature (MAX34446 only).
 temp[1-8]_highest	Historical maximum temperature.
 temp[1-8]_reset_history	Write any value to reset history.
+======================= ========================================================
+
+
+.. note::
+   - temp7 and temp8 attributes only exist for MAX34440.
+   - MAX34446 only supports temp[1-3].
+
 
-			temp7 and temp8 attributes only exist for MAX34440.
-			MAX34446 only supports temp[1-3].
+.. note::
 
-MAX34451 supports attribute groups in[1-16] (or curr[1-16] based on input pins)
-and temp[1-5].
-MAX34460 supports attribute groups in[1-12] and temp[1-5].
-MAX34461 supports attribute groups in[1-16] and temp[1-5].
+   - MAX34451 supports attribute groups in[1-16] (or curr[1-16] based on
+     input pins) and temp[1-5].
+   - MAX34460 supports attribute groups in[1-12] and temp[1-5].
+   - MAX34461 supports attribute groups in[1-16] and temp[1-5].
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max6639 b/Documentation/hwmon/max6639.rst
index dc49f8be7167..3da54225f83c 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/max6639
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max6639.rst
@@ -2,14 +2,18 @@ Kernel driver max6639
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Maxim MAX6639
+
     Prefix: 'max6639'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2e, 0x2f
+
     Datasheet: http://pdfserv.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX6639.pdf
 
 Authors:
-    He Changqing <hechangqing@semptian.com>
-    Roland Stigge <stigge@antcom.de>
+    - He Changqing <hechangqing@semptian.com>
+    - Roland Stigge <stigge@antcom.de>
 
 Description
 -----------
@@ -21,19 +25,20 @@ diode-connected transistors.
 
 The following device attributes are implemented via sysfs:
 
+====================== ==== ===================================================
 Attribute              R/W  Contents
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+====================== ==== ===================================================
 temp1_input            R    Temperature channel 1 input (0..150 C)
 temp2_input            R    Temperature channel 2 input (0..150 C)
 temp1_fault            R    Temperature channel 1 diode fault
 temp2_fault            R    Temperature channel 2 diode fault
 temp1_max              RW   Set THERM temperature for input 1
-                            (in C, see datasheet)
+			    (in C, see datasheet)
 temp2_max              RW   Set THERM temperature for input 2
 temp1_crit             RW   Set ALERT temperature for input 1
 temp2_crit             RW   Set ALERT temperature for input 2
 temp1_emergency        RW   Set OT temperature for input 1
-                            (in C, see datasheet)
+			    (in C, see datasheet)
 temp2_emergency        RW   Set OT temperature for input 2
 pwm1                   RW   Fan 1 target duty cycle (0..255)
 pwm2                   RW   Fan 2 target duty cycle (0..255)
@@ -47,3 +52,4 @@ temp1_crit_alarm       R    Alarm on ALERT temperature on channel 1
 temp2_crit_alarm       R    Alarm on ALERT temperature on channel 2
 temp1_emergency_alarm  R    Alarm on OT temperature on channel 1
 temp2_emergency_alarm  R    Alarm on OT temperature on channel 2
+====================== ==== ===================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max6642 b/Documentation/hwmon/max6642.rst
index afbd3e4942e2..7e5b7d4f9492 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/max6642
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max6642.rst
@@ -2,14 +2,20 @@ Kernel driver max6642
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Maxim MAX6642
+
     Prefix: 'max6642'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48-0x4f
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website
-               http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX6642.pdf
+
+	       http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX6642.pdf
 
 Authors:
-        Per Dalen <per.dalen@appeartv.com>
+
+	Per Dalen <per.dalen@appeartv.com>
 
 Description
 -----------
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max6650 b/Documentation/hwmon/max6650.rst
index dff1d296a48b..253482add082 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/max6650
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max6650.rst
@@ -2,19 +2,27 @@ Kernel driver max6650
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Maxim MAX6650
+
     Prefix: 'max6650'
+
     Addresses scanned: none
+
     Datasheet: http://pdfserv.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX6650-MAX6651.pdf
+
   * Maxim MAX6651
+
     Prefix: 'max6651'
+
     Addresses scanned: none
+
     Datasheet: http://pdfserv.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX6650-MAX6651.pdf
 
 Authors:
-    Hans J. Koch <hjk@hansjkoch.de>
-    John Morris <john.morris@spirentcom.com>
-    Claus Gindhart <claus.gindhart@kontron.com>
+    - Hans J. Koch <hjk@hansjkoch.de>
+    - John Morris <john.morris@spirentcom.com>
+    - Claus Gindhart <claus.gindhart@kontron.com>
 
 Description
 -----------
@@ -28,6 +36,7 @@ The driver is not able to distinguish between the 2 devices.
 
 The driver provides the following sensor accesses in sysfs:
 
+=============== ======= =======================================================
 fan1_input	ro	fan tachometer speed in RPM
 fan2_input	ro	"
 fan3_input	ro	"
@@ -40,6 +49,7 @@ pwm1		rw	relative speed (0-255), 255=max. speed.
 fan1_div	rw	sets the speed range the inputs can handle. Legal
 			values are 1, 2, 4, and 8. Use lower values for
 			faster fans.
+=============== ======= =======================================================
 
 Usage notes
 -----------
@@ -62,4 +72,3 @@ clock: The clock frequency in Hz of the chip the driver should assume [254000]
 
 Please have a look at the MAX6650/6651 data sheet and make sure that you fully
 understand the meaning of these parameters before you attempt to change them.
-
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max6697 b/Documentation/hwmon/max6697.rst
index 6594177ededa..ffc5a7d8d33b 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/max6697
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max6697.rst
@@ -2,38 +2,69 @@ Kernel driver max6697
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Maxim MAX6581
+
     Prefix: 'max6581'
+
     Datasheet: http://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX6581.pdf
+
   * Maxim MAX6602
+
     Prefix: 'max6602'
+
     Datasheet: http://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX6602.pdf
+
   * Maxim MAX6622
+
     Prefix: 'max6622'
+
     Datasheet: http://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX6622.pdf
+
   * Maxim MAX6636
+
     Prefix: 'max6636'
+
     Datasheet: http://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX6636.pdf
+
   * Maxim MAX6689
+
     Prefix: 'max6689'
+
     Datasheet: http://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX6689.pdf
+
   * Maxim MAX6693
+
     Prefix: 'max6693'
+
     Datasheet: http://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX6693.pdf
+
   * Maxim MAX6694
+
     Prefix: 'max6694'
+
     Datasheet: http://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX6694.pdf
+
   * Maxim MAX6697
+
     Prefix: 'max6697'
+
     Datasheet: http://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX6697.pdf
+
   * Maxim MAX6698
+
     Prefix: 'max6698'
+
     Datasheet: http://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX6698.pdf
+
   * Maxim MAX6699
+
     Prefix: 'max6699'
+
     Datasheet: http://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX6699.pdf
 
 Author:
+
     Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
 
 Description
@@ -50,9 +81,11 @@ The driver provides the following sysfs attributes. temp1 is the local (chip)
 temperature, temp[2..n] are remote temperatures. The actually supported
 per-channel attributes are chip type and channel dependent.
 
+================ == ==========================================================
 tempX_input      RO temperature
 tempX_max        RW temperature maximum threshold
 tempX_max_alarm  RO temperature maximum threshold alarm
 tempX_crit       RW temperature critical threshold
 tempX_crit_alarm RO temperature critical threshold alarm
 tempX_fault      RO temperature diode fault (remote sensors only)
+================ == ==========================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max8688 b/Documentation/hwmon/max8688.rst
index ca233bec7a8a..009487759c61 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/max8688
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max8688.rst
@@ -2,9 +2,13 @@ Kernel driver max8688
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Maxim MAX8688
+
     Prefix: 'max8688'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX8688.pdf
 
 Author: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
@@ -17,7 +21,7 @@ This driver supports hardware monitoring for Maxim MAX8688 Digital Power-Supply
 Controller/Monitor with PMBus Interface.
 
 The driver is a client driver to the core PMBus driver. Please see
-Documentation/hwmon/pmbus for details on PMBus client drivers.
+Documentation/hwmon/pmbus.rst for details on PMBus client drivers.
 
 
 Usage Notes
@@ -40,23 +44,28 @@ Sysfs entries
 The following attributes are supported. Limits are read-write; all other
 attributes are read-only.
 
+======================= ========================================================
 in1_label		"vout1"
 in1_input		Measured voltage. From READ_VOUT register.
 in1_min			Minimum Voltage. From VOUT_UV_WARN_LIMIT register.
 in1_max			Maximum voltage. From VOUT_OV_WARN_LIMIT register.
 in1_lcrit		Critical minimum Voltage. VOUT_UV_FAULT_LIMIT register.
-in1_crit		Critical maximum voltage. From VOUT_OV_FAULT_LIMIT register.
+in1_crit		Critical maximum voltage. From VOUT_OV_FAULT_LIMIT
+			register.
 in1_min_alarm		Voltage low alarm. From VOLTAGE_UV_WARNING status.
 in1_max_alarm		Voltage high alarm. From VOLTAGE_OV_WARNING status.
-in1_lcrit_alarm		Voltage critical low alarm. From VOLTAGE_UV_FAULT status.
-in1_crit_alarm		Voltage critical high alarm. From VOLTAGE_OV_FAULT status.
+in1_lcrit_alarm		Voltage critical low alarm. From VOLTAGE_UV_FAULT
+			status.
+in1_crit_alarm		Voltage critical high alarm. From VOLTAGE_OV_FAULT
+			status.
 in1_highest		Historical maximum voltage.
 in1_reset_history	Write any value to reset history.
 
 curr1_label		"iout1"
 curr1_input		Measured current. From READ_IOUT register.
 curr1_max		Maximum current. From IOUT_OC_WARN_LIMIT register.
-curr1_crit		Critical maximum current. From IOUT_OC_FAULT_LIMIT register.
+curr1_crit		Critical maximum current. From IOUT_OC_FAULT_LIMIT
+			register.
 curr1_max_alarm		Current high alarm. From IOUT_OC_WARN_LIMIT register.
 curr1_crit_alarm	Current critical high alarm. From IOUT_OC_FAULT status.
 curr1_highest		Historical maximum current.
@@ -73,3 +82,4 @@ temp1_crit_alarm	Chip temperature critical high alarm. Set by comparing
 			status is set.
 temp1_highest		Historical maximum temperature.
 temp1_reset_history	Write any value to reset history.
+======================= ========================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/mc13783-adc b/Documentation/hwmon/mc13783-adc.rst
index 05ccc9f159f1..cae70350ba2f 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/mc13783-adc
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/mc13783-adc.rst
@@ -2,16 +2,25 @@ Kernel driver mc13783-adc
 =========================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Freescale MC13783
+
     Prefix: 'mc13783'
+
     Datasheet: https://www.nxp.com/docs/en/data-sheet/MC13783.pdf
+
   * Freescale MC13892
+
     Prefix: 'mc13892'
+
     Datasheet: https://www.nxp.com/docs/en/data-sheet/MC13892.pdf
 
+
+
 Authors:
-    Sascha Hauer <s.hauer@pengutronix.de>
-    Luotao Fu <l.fu@pengutronix.de>
+
+   - Sascha Hauer <s.hauer@pengutronix.de>
+   - Luotao Fu <l.fu@pengutronix.de>
 
 Description
 -----------
@@ -30,9 +39,11 @@ the General Purpose inputs and touchscreen.
 See the following tables for the meaning of the different channels and their
 chip internal scaling:
 
-MC13783:
+- MC13783:
+
+======= =============================================== =============== =======
 Channel	Signal						Input Range	Scaling
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+======= =============================================== =============== =======
 0	Battery Voltage (BATT)				2.50 - 4.65V	-2.40V
 1	Battery Current (BATT - BATTISNS)		-50 - 50 mV	x20
 2	Application Supply (BP)				2.50 - 4.65V	-2.40V
@@ -52,10 +63,13 @@ Channel	Signal						Input Range	Scaling
 13	General Purpose TSX2 / Touchscreen X-plate 2	0 - 2.30V	No
 14	General Purpose TSY1 / Touchscreen Y-plate 1	0 - 2.30V	No
 15	General Purpose TSY2 / Touchscreen Y-plate 2	0 - 2.30V	No
+======= =============================================== =============== =======
+
+- MC13892:
 
-MC13892:
+======= =============================================== =============== =======
 Channel	Signal						Input Range	Scaling
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+======= =============================================== =============== =======
 0	Battery Voltage (BATT)				0 - 4.8V	/2
 1	Battery Current (BATT - BATTISNSCC)		-60 - 60 mV	x20
 2	Application Supply (BPSNS)			0 - 4.8V	/2
@@ -72,3 +86,4 @@ Channel	Signal						Input Range	Scaling
 13	General Purpose TSX2 / Touchscreen X-plate 2	0 - 2.4V	No
 14	General Purpose TSY1 / Touchscreen Y-plate 1	0 - 2.4V	No
 15	General Purpose TSY2 / Touchscreen Y-plate 2	0 - 2.4V	No
+======= =============================================== =============== =======
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/mcp3021 b/Documentation/hwmon/mcp3021.rst
index 74a6b72adf5f..83f4bda2f269 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/mcp3021
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/mcp3021.rst
@@ -1,17 +1,26 @@
 Kernel driver MCP3021
-======================
+=====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Microchip Technology MCP3021
+
     Prefix: 'mcp3021'
+
     Datasheet: http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/21805a.pdf
+
   * Microchip Technology MCP3221
+
     Prefix: 'mcp3221'
+
     Datasheet: http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/21732c.pdf
 
+
+
 Authors:
-   Mingkai Hu
-   Sven Schuchmann <schuchmann@schleissheimer.de>
+
+   - Mingkai Hu
+   - Sven Schuchmann <schuchmann@schleissheimer.de>
 
 Description
 -----------
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/menf21bmc b/Documentation/hwmon/menf21bmc.rst
index 2a273a065c5e..1f0c6b2235ab 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/menf21bmc
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/menf21bmc.rst
@@ -2,8 +2,11 @@ Kernel driver menf21bmc_hwmon
 =============================
 
 Supported chips:
+
 	* MEN 14F021P00
+
 	  Prefix: 'menf21bmc_hwmon'
+
 	  Adresses scanned: -
 
 Author: Andreas Werner <andreas.werner@men.de>
@@ -34,6 +37,7 @@ Sysfs entries
 The following attributes are supported. All attributes are read only
 The Limits are read once by the driver.
 
+=============== ==========================
 in0_input	+3.3V input voltage
 in1_input	+5.0V input voltage
 in2_input	+12.0V input voltage
@@ -48,3 +52,4 @@ in1_label	"MON_5V"
 in2_label	"MON_12V"
 in3_label	"5V_STANDBY"
 in4_label	"VBAT"
+=============== ==========================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/mlxreg-fan b/Documentation/hwmon/mlxreg-fan.rst
index fc531c6978d4..c92b8e885f7e 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/mlxreg-fan
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/mlxreg-fan.rst
@@ -2,32 +2,38 @@ Kernel driver mlxreg-fan
 ========================
 
 Provides FAN control for the next Mellanox systems:
-QMB700, equipped with 40x200GbE InfiniBand ports;
-MSN3700, equipped with 32x200GbE or 16x400GbE Ethernet ports;
-MSN3410, equipped with 6x400GbE plus 48x50GbE Ethernet ports;
-MSN3800, equipped with 64x1000GbE Ethernet ports;
+
+- QMB700, equipped with 40x200GbE InfiniBand ports;
+- MSN3700, equipped with 32x200GbE or 16x400GbE Ethernet ports;
+- MSN3410, equipped with 6x400GbE plus 48x50GbE Ethernet ports;
+- MSN3800, equipped with 64x1000GbE Ethernet ports;
+
+Author: Vadim Pasternak <vadimp@mellanox.com>
+
 These are the Top of the Rack systems, equipped with Mellanox switch
 board with Mellanox Quantum or Spectrume-2 devices.
 FAN controller is implemented by the programmable device logic.
 
 The default registers offsets set within the programmable device is as
 following:
-- pwm1			0xe3
-- fan1 (tacho1)		0xe4
-- fan2 (tacho2)		0xe5
-- fan3 (tacho3)		0xe6
-- fan4 (tacho4)		0xe7
-- fan5 (tacho5)		0xe8
-- fan6 (tacho6)		0xe9
-- fan7 (tacho7)		0xea
-- fan8 (tacho8)		0xeb
-- fan9 (tacho9)		0xec
-- fan10 (tacho10)	0xed
-- fan11 (tacho11)	0xee
-- fan12 (tacho12)	0xef
-This setup can be re-programmed with other registers.
 
-Author: Vadim Pasternak <vadimp@mellanox.com>
+======================= ====
+pwm1			0xe3
+fan1 (tacho1)		0xe4
+fan2 (tacho2)		0xe5
+fan3 (tacho3)		0xe6
+fan4 (tacho4)		0xe7
+fan5 (tacho5)		0xe8
+fan6 (tacho6)		0xe9
+fan7 (tacho7)		0xea
+fan8 (tacho8)		0xeb
+fan9 (tacho9)		0xec
+fan10 (tacho10)		0xed
+fan11 (tacho11)		0xee
+fan12 (tacho12)		0xef
+======================= ====
+
+This setup can be re-programmed with other registers.
 
 Description
 -----------
@@ -48,13 +54,17 @@ thermal's sysfs interfaces.
 /sys files in hwmon subsystem
 -----------------------------
 
-fan[1-12]_fault - RO files for tachometers TACH1-TACH12 fault indication
-fan[1-12]_input - RO files for tachometers TACH1-TACH12 input (in RPM)
-pwm1		- RW file for fan[1-12] target duty cycle (0..255)
+================= == ===================================================
+fan[1-12]_fault   RO files for tachometers TACH1-TACH12 fault indication
+fan[1-12]_input   RO files for tachometers TACH1-TACH12 input (in RPM)
+pwm1		  RW file for fan[1-12] target duty cycle (0..255)
+================= == ===================================================
 
 /sys files in thermal subsystem
 -------------------------------
 
-cur_state	- RW file for current cooling state of the cooling device
-		  (0..max_state)
-max_state	- RO file for maximum cooling state of the cooling device
+================= == ====================================================
+cur_state	  RW file for current cooling state of the cooling device
+		     (0..max_state)
+max_state	  RO file for maximum cooling state of the cooling device
+================= == ====================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/nct6683 b/Documentation/hwmon/nct6683.rst
index c1301d4300cd..efbf7e9703ec 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/nct6683
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/nct6683.rst
@@ -2,13 +2,18 @@ Kernel driver nct6683
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Nuvoton NCT6683D
+
     Prefix: 'nct6683'
+
     Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers
+
     Datasheet: Available from Nuvoton upon request
 
 Authors:
-        Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
+
+	Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
 
 Description
 -----------
@@ -50,8 +55,10 @@ Tested Boards and Firmware Versions
 The driver has been reported to work with the following boards and
 firmware versions.
 
+=============== ===============================================
 Board		Firmware version
----------------------------------------------------------------
+=============== ===============================================
 Intel DH87RL	NCT6683D EC firmware version 1.0 build 04/03/13
 Intel DH87MC	NCT6683D EC firmware version 1.0 build 04/03/13
 Intel DB85FL	NCT6683D EC firmware version 1.0 build 04/03/13
+=============== ===============================================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/nct6775 b/Documentation/hwmon/nct6775.rst
index bd59834d310f..1d0315c40952 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/nct6775
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/nct6775.rst
@@ -1,52 +1,90 @@
-Note
-====
-
-This driver supersedes the NCT6775F and NCT6776F support in the W83627EHF
-driver.
-
 Kernel driver NCT6775
 =====================
 
+.. note::
+
+    This driver supersedes the NCT6775F and NCT6776F support in the W83627EHF
+    driver.
+
 Supported chips:
+
   * Nuvoton NCT6102D/NCT6104D/NCT6106D
+
     Prefix: 'nct6106'
+
     Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers
+
     Datasheet: Available from the Nuvoton web site
+
   * Nuvoton NCT5572D/NCT6771F/NCT6772F/NCT6775F/W83677HG-I
+
     Prefix: 'nct6775'
+
     Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers
+
     Datasheet: Available from Nuvoton upon request
+
   * Nuvoton NCT5573D/NCT5577D/NCT6776D/NCT6776F
+
     Prefix: 'nct6776'
+
     Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers
+
     Datasheet: Available from Nuvoton upon request
+
   * Nuvoton NCT5532D/NCT6779D
+
     Prefix: 'nct6779'
+
     Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers
+
     Datasheet: Available from Nuvoton upon request
+
   * Nuvoton NCT6791D
+
     Prefix: 'nct6791'
+
     Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers
+
     Datasheet: Available from Nuvoton upon request
+
   * Nuvoton NCT6792D
+
     Prefix: 'nct6792'
+
     Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers
+
     Datasheet: Available from Nuvoton upon request
+
   * Nuvoton NCT6793D
+
     Prefix: 'nct6793'
+
     Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers
+
     Datasheet: Available from Nuvoton upon request
+
   * Nuvoton NCT6795D
+
     Prefix: 'nct6795'
+
     Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers
+
     Datasheet: Available from Nuvoton upon request
+
   * Nuvoton NCT6796D
+
     Prefix: 'nct6796'
+
     Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers
+
     Datasheet: Available from Nuvoton upon request
 
+
+
 Authors:
-        Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
+
+	Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
 
 Description
 -----------
@@ -96,10 +134,14 @@ The mode works for fan1-fan5.
 sysfs attributes
 ----------------
 
-pwm[1-7] - this file stores PWM duty cycle or DC value (fan speed) in range:
+pwm[1-7]
+    - this file stores PWM duty cycle or DC value (fan speed) in range:
+
 	   0 (lowest speed) to 255 (full)
 
-pwm[1-7]_enable - this file controls mode of fan/temperature control:
+pwm[1-7]_enable
+    - this file controls mode of fan/temperature control:
+
 	* 0 Fan control disabled (fans set to maximum speed)
 	* 1 Manual mode, write to pwm[0-5] any value 0-255
 	* 2 "Thermal Cruise" mode
@@ -107,15 +149,19 @@ pwm[1-7]_enable - this file controls mode of fan/temperature control:
 	* 4 "Smart Fan III" mode (NCT6775F only)
 	* 5 "Smart Fan IV" mode
 
-pwm[1-7]_mode - controls if output is PWM or DC level
-        * 0 DC output
-        * 1 PWM output
+pwm[1-7]_mode
+    - controls if output is PWM or DC level
+
+	* 0 DC output
+	* 1 PWM output
 
 Common fan control attributes
 -----------------------------
 
-pwm[1-7]_temp_sel	Temperature source. Value is temperature sensor index.
+pwm[1-7]_temp_sel
+			Temperature source. Value is temperature sensor index.
 			For example, select '1' for temp1_input.
+
 pwm[1-7]_weight_temp_sel
 			Secondary temperature source. Value is temperature
 			sensor index. For example, select '1' for temp1_input.
@@ -126,13 +172,16 @@ following attributes.
 
 pwm[1-7]_weight_duty_step
 			Duty step size.
+
 pwm[1-7]_weight_temp_step
 			Temperature step size. With each step over
 			temp_step_base, the value of weight_duty_step is added
 			to the current pwm value.
+
 pwm[1-7]_weight_temp_step_base
 			Temperature at which secondary temperature control kicks
 			in.
+
 pwm[1-7]_weight_temp_step_tol
 			Temperature step tolerance.
 
@@ -141,24 +190,35 @@ Thermal Cruise mode (2)
 
 If the temperature is in the range defined by:
 
-pwm[1-7]_target_temp	Target temperature, unit millidegree Celsius
+pwm[1-7]_target_temp
+			Target temperature, unit millidegree Celsius
 			(range 0 - 127000)
+
 pwm[1-7]_temp_tolerance
 			Target temperature tolerance, unit millidegree Celsius
 
-there are no changes to fan speed. Once the temperature leaves the interval, fan
+There are no changes to fan speed. Once the temperature leaves the interval, fan
 speed increases (if temperature is higher that desired) or decreases (if
 temperature is lower than desired), using the following limits and time
 intervals.
 
-pwm[1-7]_start		fan pwm start value (range 1 - 255), to start fan
+pwm[1-7]_start
+			fan pwm start value (range 1 - 255), to start fan
 			when the temperature is above defined range.
-pwm[1-7]_floor		lowest fan pwm (range 0 - 255) if temperature is below
+
+pwm[1-7]_floor
+			lowest fan pwm (range 0 - 255) if temperature is below
 			the defined range. If set to 0, the fan is expected to
 			stop if the temperature is below the defined range.
-pwm[1-7]_step_up_time	milliseconds before fan speed is increased
-pwm[1-7]_step_down_time	milliseconds before fan speed is decreased
-pwm[1-7]_stop_time	how many milliseconds must elapse to switch
+
+pwm[1-7]_step_up_time
+			milliseconds before fan speed is increased
+
+pwm[1-7]_step_down_time
+			milliseconds before fan speed is decreased
+
+pwm[1-7]_stop_time
+			how many milliseconds must elapse to switch
 			corresponding fan off (when the temperature was below
 			defined range).
 
@@ -167,7 +227,9 @@ Speed Cruise mode (3)
 
 This modes tries to keep the fan speed constant.
 
-fan[1-7]_target		Target fan speed
+fan[1-7]_target
+			Target fan speed
+
 fan[1-7]_tolerance
 			Target speed tolerance
 
@@ -188,16 +250,22 @@ critical temperature mode, in which the fans should run at full speed.
 pwm[1-7]_auto_point[1-7]_pwm
 			pwm value to be set if temperature reaches matching
 			temperature range.
+
 pwm[1-7]_auto_point[1-7]_temp
 			Temperature over which the matching pwm is enabled.
+
 pwm[1-7]_temp_tolerance
 			Temperature tolerance, unit millidegree Celsius
+
 pwm[1-7]_crit_temp_tolerance
 			Temperature tolerance for critical temperature,
 			unit millidegree Celsius
 
-pwm[1-7]_step_up_time	milliseconds before fan speed is increased
-pwm[1-7]_step_down_time	milliseconds before fan speed is decreased
+pwm[1-7]_step_up_time
+			milliseconds before fan speed is increased
+
+pwm[1-7]_step_down_time
+			milliseconds before fan speed is decreased
 
 Usage Notes
 -----------
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/nct7802 b/Documentation/hwmon/nct7802.rst
index 5438deb6be02..8b7365a7cb32 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/nct7802
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/nct7802.rst
@@ -2,13 +2,18 @@ Kernel driver nct7802
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Nuvoton NCT7802Y
+
     Prefix: 'nct7802'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x28..0x2f
+
     Datasheet: Available from Nuvoton web site
 
 Authors:
-        Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
+
+	Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
 
 Description
 -----------
@@ -25,7 +30,9 @@ Tested Boards and BIOS Versions
 The driver has been reported to work with the following boards and
 BIOS versions.
 
+======================= ===============================================
 Board			BIOS version
----------------------------------------------------------------
+======================= ===============================================
 Kontron COMe-bSC2	CHR2E934.001.GGO
 Kontron COMe-bIP2	CCR2E212
+======================= ===============================================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/nct7904 b/Documentation/hwmon/nct7904.rst
index 57fffe33ebfc..5b2f111582ff 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/nct7904
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/nct7904.rst
@@ -1,11 +1,16 @@
 Kernel driver nct7904
-====================
+=====================
 
 Supported chip:
+
   * Nuvoton NCT7904D
+
     Prefix: nct7904
+
     Addresses: I2C 0x2d, 0x2e
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at Nuvoton website
+
 	http://www.nuvoton.com/
 
 Author: Vadim V. Vlasov <vvlasov@dev.rtsoft.ru>
@@ -25,6 +30,7 @@ Sysfs entries
 
 Currently, the driver supports only the following features:
 
+======================= =======================================================
 in[1-20]_input		Input voltage measurements (mV)
 
 fan[1-12]_input		Fan tachometer measurements (rpm)
@@ -40,6 +46,7 @@ pwm[1-4]_enable		R/W, 1/2 for manual or SmartFan mode
 			previously configured by BIOS (or configuration EEPROM)
 
 pwm[1-4]		R/O in SmartFan mode, R/W in manual control mode
+======================= =======================================================
 
 The driver checks sensor control registers and does not export the sensors
 that are not enabled. Anyway, a sensor that is enabled may actually be not
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/npcm750-pwm-fan b/Documentation/hwmon/npcm750-pwm-fan.rst
index 6156ef7398e6..c67af08b6773 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/npcm750-pwm-fan
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/npcm750-pwm-fan.rst
@@ -2,9 +2,11 @@ Kernel driver npcm750-pwm-fan
 =============================
 
 Supported chips:
+
 	NUVOTON NPCM750/730/715/705
 
 Authors:
+
 	<tomer.maimon@nuvoton.com>
 
 Description:
@@ -15,8 +17,10 @@ controller supports up to 16 tachometer inputs.
 
 The driver provides the following sensor accesses in sysfs:
 
+=============== ======= =====================================================
 fanX_input	ro	provide current fan rotation value in RPM as reported
 			by the fan to the device.
 
 pwmX		rw	get or set PWM fan control value. This is an integer
 			value between 0(off) and 255(full speed).
+=============== ======= =====================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/nsa320 b/Documentation/hwmon/nsa320.rst
index fdbd6947799b..4fe75fd2f937 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/nsa320
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/nsa320.rst
@@ -2,14 +2,23 @@ Kernel driver nsa320_hwmon
 ==========================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Holtek HT46R065 microcontroller with onboard firmware that configures
+
 	it to act as a hardware monitor.
+
     Prefix: 'nsa320'
+
     Addresses scanned: none
+
     Datasheet: Not available, driver was reverse engineered based upon the
+
 	Zyxel kernel source
 
+
+
 Author:
+
   Adam Baker <linux@baker-net.org.uk>
 
 Description
@@ -31,8 +40,10 @@ tenths of a degree.
 sysfs-Interface
 ---------------
 
-temp1_input - temperature input
-fan1_input - fan speed
+============= =================
+temp1_input   temperature input
+fan1_input    fan speed
+============= =================
 
 Notes
 -----
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ntc_thermistor b/Documentation/hwmon/ntc_thermistor.rst
index 8b9ff23edc32..d0e7f91726b9 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/ntc_thermistor
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ntc_thermistor.rst
@@ -1,22 +1,29 @@
 Kernel driver ntc_thermistor
-=================
+============================
 
 Supported thermistors from Murata:
+
 * Murata NTC Thermistors NCP15WB473, NCP18WB473, NCP21WB473, NCP03WB473,
   NCP15WL333, NCP03WF104, NCP15XH103
+
   Prefixes: 'ncp15wb473', 'ncp18wb473', 'ncp21wb473', 'ncp03wb473',
   'ncp15wl333', 'ncp03wf104', 'ncp15xh103'
+
   Datasheet: Publicly available at Murata
 
 Supported thermistors from EPCOS:
+
 * EPCOS NTC Thermistors B57330V2103
+
   Prefixes: b57330v2103
+
   Datasheet: Publicly available at EPCOS
 
 Other NTC thermistors can be supported simply by adding compensation
 tables; e.g., NCP15WL333 support is added by the table ncpXXwl333.
 
 Authors:
+
 	MyungJoo Ham <myungjoo.ham@samsung.com>
 
 Description
@@ -29,57 +36,60 @@ compensation table to get the temperature input.
 The NTC driver provides lookup tables with a linear approximation function
 and four circuit models with an option not to use any of the four models.
 
+Using the following convention::
+
+   $	resistor
+   [TH]	the thermistor
+
 The four circuit models provided are:
 
-	$: resister, [TH]: the thermistor
-
- 1. connect = NTC_CONNECTED_POSITIVE, pullup_ohm > 0
-
-   [pullup_uV]
-       |    |
-      [TH]  $ (pullup_ohm)
-       |    |
-       +----+-----------------------[read_uV]
-       |
-       $ (pulldown_ohm)
-       |
-      --- (ground)
-
- 2. connect = NTC_CONNECTED_POSITIVE, pullup_ohm = 0 (not-connected)
-
-   [pullup_uV]
-       |
-      [TH]
-       |
-       +----------------------------[read_uV]
-       |
-       $ (pulldown_ohm)
-       |
-      --- (ground)
-
- 3. connect = NTC_CONNECTED_GROUND, pulldown_ohm > 0
-
-   [pullup_uV]
-       |
-       $ (pullup_ohm)
-       |
-       +----+-----------------------[read_uV]
-       |    |
-      [TH]  $ (pulldown_ohm)
-       |    |
-      -------- (ground)
-
- 4. connect = NTC_CONNECTED_GROUND, pulldown_ohm = 0 (not-connected)
-
-   [pullup_uV]
-       |
-       $ (pullup_ohm)
-       |
-       +----------------------------[read_uV]
-       |
-      [TH]
-       |
-      --- (ground)
+1. connect = NTC_CONNECTED_POSITIVE, pullup_ohm > 0::
+
+     [pullup_uV]
+	 |    |
+	[TH]  $ (pullup_ohm)
+	 |    |
+	 +----+-----------------------[read_uV]
+	 |
+	 $ (pulldown_ohm)
+	 |
+	-+- (ground)
+
+2. connect = NTC_CONNECTED_POSITIVE, pullup_ohm = 0 (not-connected)::
+
+     [pullup_uV]
+	 |
+	[TH]
+	 |
+	 +----------------------------[read_uV]
+	 |
+	 $ (pulldown_ohm)
+	 |
+	-+- (ground)
+
+3. connect = NTC_CONNECTED_GROUND, pulldown_ohm > 0::
+
+     [pullup_uV]
+	 |
+	 $ (pullup_ohm)
+	 |
+	 +----+-----------------------[read_uV]
+	 |    |
+	[TH]  $ (pulldown_ohm)
+	 |    |
+	-+----+- (ground)
+
+4. connect = NTC_CONNECTED_GROUND, pulldown_ohm = 0 (not-connected)::
+
+     [pullup_uV]
+	 |
+	 $ (pullup_ohm)
+	 |
+	 +----------------------------[read_uV]
+	 |
+	[TH]
+	 |
+	-+- (ground)
 
 When one of the four circuit models is used, read_uV, pullup_uV, pullup_ohm,
 pulldown_ohm, and connect should be provided. When none of the four models
@@ -88,13 +98,14 @@ provide read_ohm and _not_ provide the others.
 
 Sysfs Interface
 ---------------
-name		the mandatory global attribute, the thermistor name.
 
-temp1_type	always 4 (thermistor)
-		RO
+=============== == =============================================================
+name		   the mandatory global attribute, the thermistor name.
+=============== == =============================================================
+temp1_type	RO always 4 (thermistor)
 
-temp1_input	measure the temperature and provide the measured value.
-		(reading this file initiates the reading procedure.)
-		RO
+temp1_input	RO measure the temperature and provide the measured value.
+		   (reading this file initiates the reading procedure.)
+=============== == =============================================================
 
 Note that each NTC thermistor has only _one_ thermistor; thus, only temp1 exists.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/occ b/Documentation/hwmon/occ.rst
index e787596e03fe..bf41c162d70e 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/occ
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/occ.rst
@@ -2,6 +2,7 @@ Kernel driver occ-hwmon
 =======================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * POWER8
   * POWER9
 
@@ -37,53 +38,87 @@ Some entries are only present with certain OCC sensor versions or only on
 certain OCCs in the system. The version number is not exported to the user
 but can be inferred.
 
-temp[1-n]_label		OCC sensor ID.
+temp[1-n]_label
+	OCC sensor ID.
+
 [with temperature sensor version 1]
-    temp[1-n]_input	Measured temperature of the component in millidegrees
+
+    temp[1-n]_input
+			Measured temperature of the component in millidegrees
 			Celsius.
+
 [with temperature sensor version >= 2]
-    temp[1-n]_type		The FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) type
+
+    temp[1-n]_type
+				The FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) type
 				(represented by an integer) for the component
 				that this sensor measures.
-    temp[1-n]_fault		Temperature sensor fault boolean; 1 to indicate
+    temp[1-n]_fault
+				Temperature sensor fault boolean; 1 to indicate
 				that a fault is present or 0 to indicate that
 				no fault is present.
+
     [with type == 3 (FRU type is VRM)]
-        temp[1-n]_alarm		VRM temperature alarm boolean; 1 to indicate
+
+	temp[1-n]_alarm
+				VRM temperature alarm boolean; 1 to indicate
 				alarm, 0 to indicate no alarm
+
     [else]
-        temp[1-n]_input		Measured temperature of the component in
-				millidegrees Celsius.
 
-freq[1-n]_label		OCC sensor ID.
-freq[1-n]_input		Measured frequency of the component in MHz.
+	temp[1-n]_input
+				Measured temperature of the component in
+				millidegrees Celsius.
 
-power[1-n]_input	Latest measured power reading of the component in
+freq[1-n]_label
+			OCC sensor ID.
+freq[1-n]_input
+			Measured frequency of the component in MHz.
+power[1-n]_input
+			Latest measured power reading of the component in
 			microwatts.
-power[1-n]_average	Average power of the component in microwatts.
-power[1-n]_average_interval	The amount of time over which the power average
+power[1-n]_average
+			Average power of the component in microwatts.
+power[1-n]_average_interval
+				The amount of time over which the power average
 				was taken in microseconds.
+
 [with power sensor version < 2]
-    power[1-n]_label	OCC sensor ID.
+
+    power[1-n]_label
+			OCC sensor ID.
+
 [with power sensor version >= 2]
-    power[1-n]_label	OCC sensor ID + function ID + channel in the form
+
+    power[1-n]_label
+			OCC sensor ID + function ID + channel in the form
 			of a string, delimited by underscores, i.e. "0_15_1".
 			Both the function ID and channel are integers that
 			further identify the power sensor.
+
 [with power sensor version 0xa0]
-    power[1-n]_label	OCC sensor ID + sensor type in the form of a string,
+
+    power[1-n]_label
+			OCC sensor ID + sensor type in the form of a string,
 			delimited by an underscore, i.e. "0_system". Sensor
 			type will be one of "system", "proc", "vdd" or "vdn".
 			For this sensor version, OCC sensor ID will be the same
 			for all power sensors.
+
 [present only on "master" OCC; represents the whole system power; only one of
- this type of power sensor will be present]
-    power[1-n]_label		"system"
-    power[1-n]_input		Latest system output power in microwatts.
-    power[1-n]_cap		Current system power cap in microwatts.
-    power[1-n]_cap_not_redundant	System power cap in microwatts when
-					there is not redundant power.
-    power[1-n]_cap_max		Maximum power cap that the OCC can enforce in
+this type of power sensor will be present]
+
+    power[1-n]_label
+				"system"
+    power[1-n]_input
+				Latest system output power in microwatts.
+    power[1-n]_cap
+				Current system power cap in microwatts.
+    power[1-n]_cap_not_redundant
+				System power cap in microwatts when
+				there is not redundant power.
+    power[1-n]_cap_max
+				Maximum power cap that the OCC can enforce in
 				microwatts.
     power[1-n]_cap_min		Minimum power cap that the OCC can enforce in
 				microwatts.
@@ -94,8 +129,11 @@ power[1-n]_average_interval	The amount of time over which the power average
 				ignored, i.e. requesting a power cap of
 				500900000 microwatts will result in a power cap
 				request of 500 watts.
+
     [with caps sensor version > 1]
-        power[1-n]_cap_user_source	Indicates how the user power cap was
+
+	power[1-n]_cap_user_source
+					Indicates how the user power cap was
 					set. This is an integer that maps to
 					system or firmware components that can
 					set the user power cap.
@@ -104,9 +142,12 @@ The following "extn" sensors are exported as a way for the OCC to provide data
 that doesn't fit anywhere else. The meaning of these sensors is entirely
 dependent on their data, and cannot be statically defined.
 
-extn[1-n]_label		ASCII ID or OCC sensor ID.
-extn[1-n]_flags		This is one byte hexadecimal value. Bit 7 indicates the
+extn[1-n]_label
+			ASCII ID or OCC sensor ID.
+extn[1-n]_flags
+			This is one byte hexadecimal value. Bit 7 indicates the
 			type of the label attribute; 1 for sensor ID, 0 for
 			ASCII ID. Other bits are reserved.
-extn[1-n]_input		6 bytes of hexadecimal data, with a meaning defined by
+extn[1-n]_input
+			6 bytes of hexadecimal data, with a meaning defined by
 			the sensor ID.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/pc87360 b/Documentation/hwmon/pc87360.rst
index d5f5cf16ce59..4bad07bce54b 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/pc87360
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/pc87360.rst
@@ -2,14 +2,19 @@ Kernel driver pc87360
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * National Semiconductor PC87360, PC87363, PC87364, PC87365 and PC87366
+
     Prefixes: 'pc87360', 'pc87363', 'pc87364', 'pc87365', 'pc87366'
+
     Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
+
     Datasheets: No longer available
 
 Authors: Jean Delvare <jdelvare@suse.de>
 
 Thanks to Sandeep Mehta, Tonko de Rooy and Daniel Ceregatti for testing.
+
 Thanks to Rudolf Marek for helping me investigate conversion issues.
 
 
@@ -17,11 +22,13 @@ Module Parameters
 -----------------
 
 * init int
-  Chip initialization level:
-   0: None
-  *1: Forcibly enable internal voltage and temperature channels, except in9
-   2: Forcibly enable all voltage and temperature channels, except in9
-   3: Forcibly enable all voltage and temperature channels, including in9
+    Chip initialization level:
+
+    - 0: None
+    - **1**: Forcibly enable internal voltage and temperature channels,
+      except in9
+    - 2: Forcibly enable all voltage and temperature channels, except in9
+    - 3: Forcibly enable all voltage and temperature channels, including in9
 
 Note that this parameter has no effect for the PC87360, PC87363 and PC87364
 chips.
@@ -43,13 +50,15 @@ hardware monitoring chipsets, not only controlling and monitoring three fans,
 but also monitoring eleven voltage inputs and two (PC87365) or up to four
 (PC87366) temperatures.
 
+  =========== ======= ======= ======= ======= =====
   Chip        #vin    #fan    #pwm    #temp   devid
-
+  =========== ======= ======= ======= ======= =====
   PC87360     -       2       2       -       0xE1
   PC87363     -       2       2       -       0xE8
   PC87364     -       3       3       -       0xE4
   PC87365     11      3       3       2       0xE5
   PC87366     11      3       3       3-4     0xE9
+  =========== ======= ======= ======= ======= =====
 
 The driver assumes that no more than one chip is present, and one of the
 standard Super I/O addresses is used (0x2E/0x2F or 0x4E/0x4F)
@@ -68,18 +77,23 @@ have to care no more.
 
 For reference, here are a few values about clock dividers:
 
-                slowest         accuracy        highest
-                measurable      around 3000     accurate
+    =========== =============== =============== ===========
+		slowest         accuracy        highest
+		measurable      around 3000     accurate
     divider     speed (RPM)     RPM (RPM)       speed (RPM)
-         1        1882              18           6928
-         2         941              37           4898
-         4         470              74           3464
-         8         235             150           2449
+    =========== =============== =============== ===========
+	 1        1882              18           6928
+	 2         941              37           4898
+	 4         470              74           3464
+	 8         235             150           2449
+    =========== =============== =============== ===========
 
 For the curious, here is how the values above were computed:
+
  * slowest measurable speed: clock/(255*divider)
  * accuracy around 3000 RPM: 3000^2/clock
  * highest accurate speed: sqrt(clock*100)
+
 The clock speed for the PC87360 family is 480 kHz. I arbitrarily chose 100
 RPM as the lowest acceptable accuracy.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/pc87427 b/Documentation/hwmon/pc87427.rst
index c313eb66e08a..22d8f62d851f 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/pc87427
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/pc87427.rst
@@ -2,9 +2,13 @@ Kernel driver pc87427
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * National Semiconductor PC87427
+
     Prefix: 'pc87427'
+
     Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
+
     Datasheet: No longer available
 
 Author: Jean Delvare <jdelvare@suse.de>
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/pcf8591 b/Documentation/hwmon/pcf8591.rst
index 447c0702c0ec..e98bd542a441 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/pcf8591
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/pcf8591.rst
@@ -2,16 +2,21 @@ Kernel driver pcf8591
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Philips/NXP PCF8591
+
     Prefix: 'pcf8591'
+
     Addresses scanned: none
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the NXP website
-               http://www.nxp.com/pip/PCF8591_6.html
+
+	       http://www.nxp.com/pip/PCF8591_6.html
 
 Authors:
-        Aurelien Jarno <aurelien@aurel32.net>
-        valuable contributions by Jan M. Sendler <sendler@sendler.de>,
-        Jean Delvare <jdelvare@suse.de>
+      - Aurelien Jarno <aurelien@aurel32.net>
+      - valuable contributions by Jan M. Sendler <sendler@sendler.de>,
+      - Jean Delvare <jdelvare@suse.de>
 
 
 Description
@@ -22,24 +27,25 @@ analog output) for the I2C bus produced by Philips Semiconductors (now NXP).
 It is designed to provide a byte I2C interface to up to 4 separate devices.
 
 The PCF8591 has 4 analog inputs programmable as single-ended or
-differential inputs :
+differential inputs:
+
 - mode 0 : four single ended inputs
-        Pins AIN0 to AIN3 are single ended inputs for channels 0 to 3
+	Pins AIN0 to AIN3 are single ended inputs for channels 0 to 3
 
 - mode 1 : three differential inputs
-        Pins AIN3 is the common negative differential input
-        Pins AIN0 to AIN2 are positive differential inputs for channels 0 to 2
+	Pins AIN3 is the common negative differential input
+	Pins AIN0 to AIN2 are positive differential inputs for channels 0 to 2
 
 - mode 2 : single ended and differential mixed
-        Pins AIN0 and AIN1 are single ended inputs for channels 0 and 1
-        Pins AIN2 is the positive differential input for channel 3
-        Pins AIN3 is the negative differential input for channel 3
+	Pins AIN0 and AIN1 are single ended inputs for channels 0 and 1
+	Pins AIN2 is the positive differential input for channel 3
+	Pins AIN3 is the negative differential input for channel 3
 
 - mode 3 : two differential inputs
-        Pins AIN0 is the positive differential input for channel 0
-        Pins AIN1 is the negative differential input for channel 0
-        Pins AIN2 is the positive differential input for channel 1
-        Pins AIN3 is the negative differential input for channel 1
+	Pins AIN0 is the positive differential input for channel 0
+	Pins AIN1 is the negative differential input for channel 0
+	Pins AIN2 is the positive differential input for channel 1
+	Pins AIN3 is the negative differential input for channel 1
 
 See the datasheet for details.
 
@@ -49,10 +55,11 @@ Module parameters
 * input_mode int
 
     Analog input mode:
-         0 = four single ended inputs
-         1 = three differential inputs
-         2 = single ended and differential mixed
-         3 = two differential inputs
+
+	 - 0 = four single ended inputs
+	 - 1 = three differential inputs
+	 - 2 = single ended and differential mixed
+	 - 3 = two differential inputs
 
 
 Accessing PCF8591 via /sys interface
@@ -67,11 +74,12 @@ for details.
 Directories are being created for each instantiated PCF8591:
 
 /sys/bus/i2c/devices/<0>-<1>/
-where <0> is the bus the chip is connected to (e. g. i2c-0)
-and <1> the chip address ([48..4f])
+   where <0> is the bus the chip is connected to (e. g. i2c-0)
+   and <1> the chip address ([48..4f])
 
 Inside these directories, there are such files:
-in0_input, in1_input, in2_input, in3_input, out0_enable, out0_output, name
+
+   in0_input, in1_input, in2_input, in3_input, out0_enable, out0_output, name
 
 Name contains chip name.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus-core b/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus-core.rst
index 8ed10e9ddfb5..92515c446fe3 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus-core
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus-core.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+==================================
 PMBus core driver and internal API
 ==================================
 
@@ -120,24 +121,24 @@ Specifically, it provides the following information.
   non-standard PMBus commands to standard commands, or to augment standard
   command return values with device specific information.
 
-  API functions
-  -------------
+API functions
+=============
 
-  Functions provided by chip driver
-  ---------------------------------
+Functions provided by chip driver
+---------------------------------
 
-  All functions return the command return value (read) or zero (write) if
-  successful. A return value of -ENODATA indicates that there is no manufacturer
-  specific command, but that a standard PMBus command may exist. Any other
-  negative return value indicates that the commands does not exist for this
-  chip, and that no attempt should be made to read or write the standard
-  command.
+All functions return the command return value (read) or zero (write) if
+successful. A return value of -ENODATA indicates that there is no manufacturer
+specific command, but that a standard PMBus command may exist. Any other
+negative return value indicates that the commands does not exist for this
+chip, and that no attempt should be made to read or write the standard
+command.
 
-  As mentioned above, an exception to this rule applies to virtual commands,
-  which  _must_ be handled in driver specific code. See "Virtual PMBus Commands"
-  above for more details.
+As mentioned above, an exception to this rule applies to virtual commands,
+which *must* be handled in driver specific code. See "Virtual PMBus Commands"
+above for more details.
 
-  Command execution in the core PMBus driver code is as follows.
+Command execution in the core PMBus driver code is as follows::
 
 	if (chip_access_function) {
 		status = chip_access_function();
@@ -148,128 +149,160 @@ Specifically, it provides the following information.
 		return -EINVAL;
 	return generic_access();
 
-  Chip drivers may provide pointers to the following functions in struct
-  pmbus_driver_info. All functions are optional.
+Chip drivers may provide pointers to the following functions in struct
+pmbus_driver_info. All functions are optional.
+
+::
 
   int (*read_byte_data)(struct i2c_client *client, int page, int reg);
 
-  Read byte from page <page>, register <reg>.
-  <page> may be -1, which means "current page".
+Read byte from page <page>, register <reg>.
+<page> may be -1, which means "current page".
+
+
+::
 
   int (*read_word_data)(struct i2c_client *client, int page, int reg);
 
-  Read word from page <page>, register <reg>.
+Read word from page <page>, register <reg>.
+
+::
 
   int (*write_word_data)(struct i2c_client *client, int page, int reg,
-		         u16 word);
+			 u16 word);
 
-  Write word to page <page>, register <reg>.
+Write word to page <page>, register <reg>.
+
+::
 
   int (*write_byte)(struct i2c_client *client, int page, u8 value);
 
-  Write byte to page <page>, register <reg>.
-  <page> may be -1, which means "current page".
+Write byte to page <page>, register <reg>.
+<page> may be -1, which means "current page".
+
+::
 
   int (*identify)(struct i2c_client *client, struct pmbus_driver_info *info);
 
-  Determine supported PMBus functionality. This function is only necessary
-  if a chip driver supports multiple chips, and the chip functionality is not
-  pre-determined. It is currently only used by the generic pmbus driver
-  (pmbus.c).
+Determine supported PMBus functionality. This function is only necessary
+if a chip driver supports multiple chips, and the chip functionality is not
+pre-determined. It is currently only used by the generic pmbus driver
+(pmbus.c).
+
+Functions exported by core driver
+---------------------------------
 
-  Functions exported by core driver
-  ---------------------------------
+Chip drivers are expected to use the following functions to read or write
+PMBus registers. Chip drivers may also use direct I2C commands. If direct I2C
+commands are used, the chip driver code must not directly modify the current
+page, since the selected page is cached in the core driver and the core driver
+will assume that it is selected. Using pmbus_set_page() to select a new page
+is mandatory.
 
-  Chip drivers are expected to use the following functions to read or write
-  PMBus registers. Chip drivers may also use direct I2C commands. If direct I2C
-  commands are used, the chip driver code must not directly modify the current
-  page, since the selected page is cached in the core driver and the core driver
-  will assume that it is selected. Using pmbus_set_page() to select a new page
-  is mandatory.
+::
 
   int pmbus_set_page(struct i2c_client *client, u8 page);
 
-  Set PMBus page register to <page> for subsequent commands.
+Set PMBus page register to <page> for subsequent commands.
+
+::
 
   int pmbus_read_word_data(struct i2c_client *client, u8 page, u8 reg);
 
-  Read word data from <page>, <reg>. Similar to i2c_smbus_read_word_data(), but
-  selects page first.
+Read word data from <page>, <reg>. Similar to i2c_smbus_read_word_data(), but
+selects page first.
+
+::
 
   int pmbus_write_word_data(struct i2c_client *client, u8 page, u8 reg,
 			    u16 word);
 
-  Write word data to <page>, <reg>. Similar to i2c_smbus_write_word_data(), but
-  selects page first.
+Write word data to <page>, <reg>. Similar to i2c_smbus_write_word_data(), but
+selects page first.
+
+::
 
   int pmbus_read_byte_data(struct i2c_client *client, int page, u8 reg);
 
-  Read byte data from <page>, <reg>. Similar to i2c_smbus_read_byte_data(), but
-  selects page first. <page> may be -1, which means "current page".
+Read byte data from <page>, <reg>. Similar to i2c_smbus_read_byte_data(), but
+selects page first. <page> may be -1, which means "current page".
+
+::
 
   int pmbus_write_byte(struct i2c_client *client, int page, u8 value);
 
-  Write byte data to <page>, <reg>. Similar to i2c_smbus_write_byte(), but
-  selects page first. <page> may be -1, which means "current page".
+Write byte data to <page>, <reg>. Similar to i2c_smbus_write_byte(), but
+selects page first. <page> may be -1, which means "current page".
+
+::
 
   void pmbus_clear_faults(struct i2c_client *client);
 
-  Execute PMBus "Clear Fault" command on all chip pages.
-  This function calls the device specific write_byte function if defined.
-  Therefore, it must _not_ be called from that function.
+Execute PMBus "Clear Fault" command on all chip pages.
+This function calls the device specific write_byte function if defined.
+Therefore, it must _not_ be called from that function.
+
+::
 
   bool pmbus_check_byte_register(struct i2c_client *client, int page, int reg);
 
-  Check if byte register exists. Return true if the register exists, false
-  otherwise.
-  This function calls the device specific write_byte function if defined to
-  obtain the chip status. Therefore, it must _not_ be called from that function.
+Check if byte register exists. Return true if the register exists, false
+otherwise.
+This function calls the device specific write_byte function if defined to
+obtain the chip status. Therefore, it must _not_ be called from that function.
+
+::
 
   bool pmbus_check_word_register(struct i2c_client *client, int page, int reg);
 
-  Check if word register exists. Return true if the register exists, false
-  otherwise.
-  This function calls the device specific write_byte function if defined to
-  obtain the chip status. Therefore, it must _not_ be called from that function.
+Check if word register exists. Return true if the register exists, false
+otherwise.
+This function calls the device specific write_byte function if defined to
+obtain the chip status. Therefore, it must _not_ be called from that function.
+
+::
 
   int pmbus_do_probe(struct i2c_client *client, const struct i2c_device_id *id,
-                     struct pmbus_driver_info *info);
+		     struct pmbus_driver_info *info);
+
+Execute probe function. Similar to standard probe function for other drivers,
+with the pointer to struct pmbus_driver_info as additional argument. Calls
+identify function if supported. Must only be called from device probe
+function.
 
-  Execute probe function. Similar to standard probe function for other drivers,
-  with the pointer to struct pmbus_driver_info as additional argument. Calls
-  identify function if supported. Must only be called from device probe
-  function.
+::
 
   void pmbus_do_remove(struct i2c_client *client);
 
-  Execute driver remove function. Similar to standard driver remove function.
+Execute driver remove function. Similar to standard driver remove function.
+
+::
 
   const struct pmbus_driver_info
 	*pmbus_get_driver_info(struct i2c_client *client);
 
-  Return pointer to struct pmbus_driver_info as passed to pmbus_do_probe().
+Return pointer to struct pmbus_driver_info as passed to pmbus_do_probe().
 
 
 PMBus driver platform data
 ==========================
 
 PMBus platform data is defined in include/linux/pmbus.h. Platform data
-currently only provides a flag field with a single bit used.
+currently only provides a flag field with a single bit used::
 
-#define PMBUS_SKIP_STATUS_CHECK (1 << 0)
+	#define PMBUS_SKIP_STATUS_CHECK (1 << 0)
 
-struct pmbus_platform_data {
-        u32 flags;              /* Device specific flags */
-};
+	struct pmbus_platform_data {
+		u32 flags;              /* Device specific flags */
+	};
 
 
 Flags
 -----
 
 PMBUS_SKIP_STATUS_CHECK
-
-During register detection, skip checking the status register for
-communication or command errors.
+	During register detection, skip checking the status register for
+	communication or command errors.
 
 Some PMBus chips respond with valid data when trying to read an unsupported
 register. For such chips, checking the status register is mandatory when
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus b/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus.rst
index dfd9c65996c0..abfb9dd4857d 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus.rst
@@ -1,42 +1,77 @@
 Kernel driver pmbus
-====================
+===================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Ericsson BMR453, BMR454
+
     Prefixes: 'bmr453', 'bmr454'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet:
+
  http://archive.ericsson.net/service/internet/picov/get?DocNo=28701-EN/LZT146395
+
   * ON Semiconductor ADP4000, NCP4200, NCP4208
+
     Prefixes: 'adp4000', 'ncp4200', 'ncp4208'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheets:
+
 	http://www.onsemi.com/pub_link/Collateral/ADP4000-D.PDF
+
 	http://www.onsemi.com/pub_link/Collateral/NCP4200-D.PDF
+
 	http://www.onsemi.com/pub_link/Collateral/JUNE%202009-%20REV.%200.PDF
+
   * Lineage Power
+
     Prefixes: 'mdt040', 'pdt003', 'pdt006', 'pdt012', 'udt020'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheets:
+
 	http://www.lineagepower.com/oem/pdf/PDT003A0X.pdf
+
 	http://www.lineagepower.com/oem/pdf/PDT006A0X.pdf
+
 	http://www.lineagepower.com/oem/pdf/PDT012A0X.pdf
+
 	http://www.lineagepower.com/oem/pdf/UDT020A0X.pdf
+
 	http://www.lineagepower.com/oem/pdf/MDT040A0X.pdf
+
   * Texas Instruments TPS40400, TPS544B20, TPS544B25, TPS544C20, TPS544C25
+
     Prefixes: 'tps40400', 'tps544b20', 'tps544b25', 'tps544c20', 'tps544c25'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheets:
+
 	http://www.ti.com/lit/gpn/tps40400
+
 	http://www.ti.com/lit/gpn/tps544b20
+
 	http://www.ti.com/lit/gpn/tps544b25
+
 	http://www.ti.com/lit/gpn/tps544c20
+
 	http://www.ti.com/lit/gpn/tps544c25
+
   * Generic PMBus devices
+
     Prefix: 'pmbus'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: n.a.
 
+
 Author: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
 
 
@@ -62,9 +97,10 @@ supported by all chips), and since there is no well defined address range for
 PMBus devices. You will have to instantiate the devices explicitly.
 
 Example: the following will load the driver for an LTC2978 at address 0x60
-on I2C bus #1:
-$ modprobe pmbus
-$ echo ltc2978 0x60 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/i2c-1/new_device
+on I2C bus #1::
+
+	$ modprobe pmbus
+	$ echo ltc2978 0x60 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/i2c-1/new_device
 
 
 Platform data support
@@ -72,9 +108,9 @@ Platform data support
 
 Support for additional PMBus chips can be added by defining chip parameters in
 a new chip specific driver file. For example, (untested) code to add support for
-Emerson DS1200 power modules might look as follows.
+Emerson DS1200 power modules might look as follows::
 
-static struct pmbus_driver_info ds1200_info = {
+  static struct pmbus_driver_info ds1200_info = {
 	.pages = 1,
 	/* Note: All other sensors are in linear mode */
 	.direct[PSC_VOLTAGE_OUT] = true,
@@ -95,45 +131,45 @@ static struct pmbus_driver_info ds1200_info = {
 		   | PMBUS_HAVE_PIN | PMBUS_HAVE_POUT
 		   | PMBUS_HAVE_TEMP | PMBUS_HAVE_STATUS_TEMP
 		   | PMBUS_HAVE_FAN12 | PMBUS_HAVE_STATUS_FAN12,
-};
+  };
 
-static int ds1200_probe(struct i2c_client *client,
-			const struct i2c_device_id *id)
-{
+  static int ds1200_probe(struct i2c_client *client,
+			  const struct i2c_device_id *id)
+  {
 	return pmbus_do_probe(client, id, &ds1200_info);
-}
+  }
 
-static int ds1200_remove(struct i2c_client *client)
-{
+  static int ds1200_remove(struct i2c_client *client)
+  {
 	return pmbus_do_remove(client);
-}
+  }
 
-static const struct i2c_device_id ds1200_id[] = {
+  static const struct i2c_device_id ds1200_id[] = {
 	{"ds1200", 0},
 	{}
-};
+  };
 
-MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE(i2c, ds1200_id);
+  MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE(i2c, ds1200_id);
 
-/* This is the driver that will be inserted */
-static struct i2c_driver ds1200_driver = {
+  /* This is the driver that will be inserted */
+  static struct i2c_driver ds1200_driver = {
 	.driver = {
 		   .name = "ds1200",
 		   },
 	.probe = ds1200_probe,
 	.remove = ds1200_remove,
 	.id_table = ds1200_id,
-};
+  };
 
-static int __init ds1200_init(void)
-{
+  static int __init ds1200_init(void)
+  {
 	return i2c_add_driver(&ds1200_driver);
-}
+  }
 
-static void __exit ds1200_exit(void)
-{
+  static void __exit ds1200_exit(void)
+  {
 	i2c_del_driver(&ds1200_driver);
-}
+  }
 
 
 Sysfs entries
@@ -148,6 +184,7 @@ a given sysfs entry.
 The following attributes are supported. Limits are read-write; all other
 attributes are read-only.
 
+======================= ========================================================
 inX_input		Measured voltage. From READ_VIN or READ_VOUT register.
 inX_min			Minimum Voltage.
 			From VIN_UV_WARN_LIMIT or VOUT_UV_WARN_LIMIT register.
@@ -214,3 +251,4 @@ tempX_lcrit_alarm	Chip temperature critical low alarm. Set by comparing
 tempX_crit_alarm	Chip temperature critical high alarm. Set by comparing
 			READ_TEMPERATURE_X with OT_FAULT_LIMIT if
 			TEMP_OT_FAULT status is set.
+======================= ========================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/powr1220 b/Documentation/hwmon/powr1220.rst
index 21e44f71ae6e..a7fc258da0a8 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/powr1220
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/powr1220.rst
@@ -1,12 +1,17 @@
 Kernel driver powr1220
-==================
+======================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Lattice POWR1220AT8
+
     Prefix: 'powr1220'
+
     Addresses scanned: none
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Lattice website
-               http://www.latticesemi.com/
+
+	       http://www.latticesemi.com/
 
 Author: Scott Kanowitz <scott.kanowitz@gmail.com>
 
@@ -26,7 +31,9 @@ value over the low measurement range maximum of 2 V.
 
 The input naming convention is as follows:
 
+============== ========
 driver name    pin name
+============== ========
 in0            VMON1
 in1            VMON2
 in2            VMON3
@@ -41,5 +48,6 @@ in10           VMON11
 in11           VMON12
 in12           VCCA
 in13           VCCINP
+============== ========
 
 The ADC readings are updated on request with a minimum period of 1s.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/pwm-fan b/Documentation/hwmon/pwm-fan.rst
index 18529d2e3bcf..82fe96742fee 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/pwm-fan
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/pwm-fan.rst
@@ -15,3 +15,6 @@ The driver implements a simple interface for driving a fan connected to
 a PWM output. It uses the generic PWM interface, thus it can be used with
 a range of SoCs. The driver exposes the fan to the user space through
 the hwmon's sysfs interface.
+
+The fan rotation speed returned via the optional 'fan1_input' is extrapolated
+from the sampled interrupts from the tachometer signal within 1 second.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/raspberrypi-hwmon b/Documentation/hwmon/raspberrypi-hwmon.rst
index 3c92e2cb52d6..8038ade36490 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/raspberrypi-hwmon
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/raspberrypi-hwmon.rst
@@ -2,6 +2,7 @@ Kernel driver raspberrypi-hwmon
 ===============================
 
 Supported boards:
+
   * Raspberry Pi A+ (via GPIO on SoC)
   * Raspberry Pi B+ (via GPIO on SoC)
   * Raspberry Pi 2 B (via GPIO on SoC)
@@ -19,4 +20,6 @@ undervoltage conditions.
 Sysfs entries
 -------------
 
+======================= ==================
 in0_lcrit_alarm		Undervoltage alarm
+======================= ==================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/sch5627 b/Documentation/hwmon/sch5627.rst
index 0551d266c51c..187682e99114 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/sch5627
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/sch5627.rst
@@ -2,9 +2,13 @@ Kernel driver sch5627
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * SMSC SCH5627
+
     Prefix: 'sch5627'
+
     Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
+
     Datasheet: Application Note available upon request
 
 Author: Hans de Goede <hdegoede@redhat.com>
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/sch5636 b/Documentation/hwmon/sch5636.rst
index 7b0a01da0717..4aaee3672f13 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/sch5636
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/sch5636.rst
@@ -2,8 +2,11 @@ Kernel driver sch5636
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * SMSC SCH5636
+
     Prefix: 'sch5636'
+
     Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
 
 Author: Hans de Goede <hdegoede@redhat.com>
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/scpi-hwmon b/Documentation/hwmon/scpi-hwmon.rst
index 4cfcdf2d5eab..eee7022b44db 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/scpi-hwmon
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/scpi-hwmon.rst
@@ -2,8 +2,11 @@ Kernel driver scpi-hwmon
 ========================
 
 Supported chips:
+
  * Chips based on ARM System Control Processor Interface
+
    Addresses scanned: -
+
    Datasheet: http://infocenter.arm.com/help/index.jsp?topic=/com.arm.doc.dui0922b/index.html
 
 Author: Punit Agrawal <punit.agrawal@arm.com>
@@ -14,7 +17,7 @@ Description
 This driver supports hardware monitoring for SoC's based on the ARM
 System Control Processor (SCP) implementing the System Control
 Processor Interface (SCPI). The following sensor types are supported
-by the SCP -
+by the SCP:
 
   * temperature
   * voltage
@@ -30,4 +33,4 @@ Usage Notes
 The driver relies on device tree node to indicate the presence of SCPI
 support in the kernel. See
 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/arm,scpi.txt for details of the
-devicetree node.
\ No newline at end of file
+devicetree node.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/sht15 b/Documentation/hwmon/sht15.rst
index 5e3207c3b177..485abe037f6c 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/sht15
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/sht15.rst
@@ -2,29 +2,37 @@ Kernel driver sht15
 ===================
 
 Authors:
+
   * Wouter Horre
   * Jonathan Cameron
   * Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com>
   * Jerome Oufella <jerome.oufella@savoirfairelinux.com>
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Sensirion SHT10
+
     Prefix: 'sht10'
 
   * Sensirion SHT11
+
     Prefix: 'sht11'
 
   * Sensirion SHT15
+
     Prefix: 'sht15'
 
   * Sensirion SHT71
+
     Prefix: 'sht71'
 
   * Sensirion SHT75
+
     Prefix: 'sht75'
 
 Datasheet: Publicly available at the Sensirion website
-http://www.sensirion.ch/en/pdf/product_information/Datasheet-humidity-sensor-SHT1x.pdf
+
+	http://www.sensirion.ch/en/pdf/product_information/Datasheet-humidity-sensor-SHT1x.pdf
 
 Description
 -----------
@@ -63,11 +71,13 @@ Platform data
 Sysfs interface
 ---------------
 
-* temp1_input:     temperature input
-* humidity1_input: humidity input
-* heater_enable:   write 1 in this attribute to enable the on-chip heater,
-                   0 to disable it. Be careful not to enable the heater
-                   for too long.
-* temp1_fault:     if 1, this means that the voltage is low (below 2.47V) and
-                   measurement may be invalid.
-* humidity1_fault: same as temp1_fault.
+================== ==========================================================
+temp1_input        temperature input
+humidity1_input    humidity input
+heater_enable      write 1 in this attribute to enable the on-chip heater,
+		   0 to disable it. Be careful not to enable the heater
+		   for too long.
+temp1_fault        if 1, this means that the voltage is low (below 2.47V) and
+		   measurement may be invalid.
+humidity1_fault    same as temp1_fault.
+================== ==========================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/sht21 b/Documentation/hwmon/sht21.rst
index 8b3cdda541c1..f1f5da030108 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/sht21
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/sht21.rst
@@ -2,19 +2,33 @@ Kernel driver sht21
 ===================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Sensirion SHT21
+
     Prefix: 'sht21'
+
     Addresses scanned: none
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Sensirion website
+
     http://www.sensirion.com/file/datasheet_sht21
 
+
+
   * Sensirion SHT25
+
     Prefix: 'sht25'
+
     Addresses scanned: none
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Sensirion website
+
     http://www.sensirion.com/file/datasheet_sht25
 
+
+
 Author:
+
   Urs Fleisch <urs.fleisch@sensirion.com>
 
 Description
@@ -33,9 +47,13 @@ in the board setup code.
 sysfs-Interface
 ---------------
 
-temp1_input - temperature input
-humidity1_input - humidity input
-eic - Electronic Identification Code
+temp1_input
+	- temperature input
+
+humidity1_input
+	- humidity input
+eic
+	- Electronic Identification Code
 
 Notes
 -----
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/sht3x b/Documentation/hwmon/sht3x.rst
index d9daa6ab1e8e..978a7117e4b2 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/sht3x
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/sht3x.rst
@@ -2,14 +2,19 @@ Kernel driver sht3x
 ===================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Sensirion SHT3x-DIS
+
     Prefix: 'sht3x'
+
     Addresses scanned: none
+
     Datasheet: https://www.sensirion.com/file/datasheet_sht3x_digital
 
 Author:
-  David Frey <david.frey@sensirion.com>
-  Pascal Sachs <pascal.sachs@sensirion.com>
+
+  - David Frey <david.frey@sensirion.com>
+  - Pascal Sachs <pascal.sachs@sensirion.com>
 
 Description
 -----------
@@ -24,6 +29,7 @@ addresses 0x44 or 0x45, depending on the wiring. See
 Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices for methods to instantiate the device.
 
 There are two options configurable by means of sht3x_platform_data:
+
 1. blocking (pull the I2C clock line down while performing the measurement) or
    non-blocking mode. Blocking mode will guarantee the fastest result but
    the I2C bus will be busy during that time. By default, non-blocking mode
@@ -35,12 +41,15 @@ There are two options configurable by means of sht3x_platform_data:
 The sht3x sensor supports a single shot mode as well as 5 periodic measure
 modes, which can be controlled with the update_interval sysfs interface.
 The allowed update_interval in milliseconds are as follows:
-  *     0   single shot mode
-  *  2000   0.5 Hz periodic measurement
-  *  1000   1   Hz periodic measurement
-  *   500   2   Hz periodic measurement
-  *   250   4   Hz periodic measurement
-  *   100  10   Hz periodic measurement
+
+    ===== ======= ====================
+       0          single shot mode
+    2000   0.5 Hz periodic measurement
+    1000   1   Hz periodic measurement
+     500   2   Hz periodic measurement
+     250   4   Hz periodic measurement
+     100  10   Hz periodic measurement
+    ===== ======= ====================
 
 In the periodic measure mode, the sensor automatically triggers a measurement
 with the configured update interval on the chip. When a temperature or humidity
@@ -53,6 +62,7 @@ low.
 sysfs-Interface
 ---------------
 
+=================== ============================================================
 temp1_input:        temperature input
 humidity1_input:    humidity input
 temp1_max:          temperature max value
@@ -64,13 +74,15 @@ temp1_min_hyst:     temperature hysteresis value for min limit
 humidity1_min:      humidity min value
 humidity1_min_hyst: humidity hysteresis value for min limit
 temp1_alarm:        alarm flag is set to 1 if the temperature is outside the
-                    configured limits. Alarm only works in periodic measure mode
+		    configured limits. Alarm only works in periodic measure mode
 humidity1_alarm:    alarm flag is set to 1 if the humidity is outside the
-                    configured limits. Alarm only works in periodic measure mode
+		    configured limits. Alarm only works in periodic measure mode
 heater_enable:      heater enable, heating element removes excess humidity from
-                    sensor
-                        0: turned off
-                        1: turned on
+		    sensor:
+
+			- 0: turned off
+			- 1: turned on
 update_interval:    update interval, 0 for single shot, interval in msec
-                    for periodic measurement. If the interval is not supported
-                    by the sensor, the next faster interval is chosen
+		    for periodic measurement. If the interval is not supported
+		    by the sensor, the next faster interval is chosen
+=================== ============================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/shtc1 b/Documentation/hwmon/shtc1.rst
index 6b1e05458f0f..aa116332ba26 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/shtc1
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/shtc1.rst
@@ -2,17 +2,29 @@ Kernel driver shtc1
 ===================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Sensirion SHTC1
+
     Prefix: 'shtc1'
+
     Addresses scanned: none
+
     Datasheet: http://www.sensirion.com/file/datasheet_shtc1
 
+
+
   * Sensirion SHTW1
+
     Prefix: 'shtw1'
+
     Addresses scanned: none
+
     Datasheet: Not publicly available
 
+
+
 Author:
+
   Johannes Winkelmann <johannes.winkelmann@sensirion.com>
 
 Description
@@ -28,6 +40,7 @@ address 0x70. See Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices for methods to
 instantiate the device.
 
 There are two options configurable by means of shtc1_platform_data:
+
 1. blocking (pull the I2C clock line down while performing the measurement) or
    non-blocking mode. Blocking mode will guarantee the fastest result but
    the I2C bus will be busy during that time. By default, non-blocking mode
@@ -39,5 +52,7 @@ There are two options configurable by means of shtc1_platform_data:
 sysfs-Interface
 ---------------
 
-temp1_input - temperature input
-humidity1_input - humidity input
+temp1_input
+	- temperature input
+humidity1_input
+	- humidity input
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/sis5595 b/Documentation/hwmon/sis5595.rst
index 4f8877a34f37..16123b3bfff9 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/sis5595
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/sis5595.rst
@@ -2,49 +2,67 @@ Kernel driver sis5595
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Silicon Integrated Systems Corp. SiS5595 Southbridge Hardware Monitor
+
     Prefix: 'sis5595'
+
     Addresses scanned: ISA in PCI-space encoded address
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Silicon Integrated Systems Corp. site.
 
+
+
 Authors:
-        Kyösti Mälkki <kmalkki@cc.hut.fi>,
-        Mark D. Studebaker <mdsxyz123@yahoo.com>,
-        Aurelien Jarno <aurelien@aurel32.net> 2.6 port
+
+      - Kyösti Mälkki <kmalkki@cc.hut.fi>,
+      - Mark D. Studebaker <mdsxyz123@yahoo.com>,
+      - Aurelien Jarno <aurelien@aurel32.net> 2.6 port
 
    SiS southbridge has a LM78-like chip integrated on the same IC.
    This driver is a customized copy of lm78.c
 
    Supports following revisions:
+
+       =============== =============== ==============
        Version         PCI ID          PCI Revision
+       =============== =============== ==============
        1               1039/0008       AF or less
        2               1039/0008       B0 or greater
+       =============== =============== ==============
 
    Note: these chips contain a 0008 device which is incompatible with the
-        5595. We recognize these by the presence of the listed
-        "blacklist" PCI ID and refuse to load.
+	5595. We recognize these by the presence of the listed
+	"blacklist" PCI ID and refuse to load.
 
+   =================== =============== ================
    NOT SUPPORTED       PCI ID          BLACKLIST PCI ID
-        540            0008            0540
-        550            0008            0550
+   =================== =============== ================
+	540            0008            0540
+	550            0008            0550
        5513            0008            5511
        5581            0008            5597
        5582            0008            5597
        5597            0008            5597
-        630            0008            0630
-        645            0008            0645
-        730            0008            0730
-        735            0008            0735
+	630            0008            0630
+	645            0008            0645
+	730            0008            0730
+	735            0008            0735
+   =================== =============== ================
 
 
 Module Parameters
 -----------------
+
+======================= =====================================================
 force_addr=0xaddr	Set the I/O base address. Useful for boards
 			that don't set the address in the BIOS. Does not do a
 			PCI force; the device must still be present in lspci.
 			Don't use this unless the driver complains that the
 			base address is not set.
+
 			Example: 'modprobe sis5595 force_addr=0x290'
+======================= =====================================================
 
 
 Description
@@ -103,4 +121,3 @@ Problems
 --------
 Some chips refuse to be enabled. We don't know why.
 The driver will recognize this and print a message in dmesg.
-
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/smm665 b/Documentation/hwmon/smm665.rst
index a341eeedab75..a0e27f62b57b 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/smm665
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/smm665.rst
@@ -2,31 +2,57 @@ Kernel driver smm665
 ====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Summit Microelectronics SMM465
+
     Prefix: 'smm465'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet:
+
       http://www.summitmicro.com/prod_select/summary/SMM465/SMM465DS.pdf
+
   * Summit Microelectronics SMM665, SMM665B
+
     Prefix: 'smm665'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet:
+
       http://www.summitmicro.com/prod_select/summary/SMM665/SMM665B_2089_20.pdf
+
   * Summit Microelectronics SMM665C
+
     Prefix: 'smm665c'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet:
+
       http://www.summitmicro.com/prod_select/summary/SMM665C/SMM665C_2125.pdf
+
   * Summit Microelectronics SMM764
+
     Prefix: 'smm764'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet:
+
       http://www.summitmicro.com/prod_select/summary/SMM764/SMM764_2098.pdf
+
   * Summit Microelectronics SMM766, SMM766B
+
     Prefix: 'smm766'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheets:
+
       http://www.summitmicro.com/prod_select/summary/SMM766/SMM766_2086.pdf
+
       http://www.summitmicro.com/prod_select/summary/SMM766B/SMM766B_2122.pdf
 
 Author: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
@@ -36,9 +62,10 @@ Module Parameters
 -----------------
 
 * vref: int
-  Default: 1250 (mV)
-  Reference voltage on VREF_ADC pin in mV. It should not be necessary to set
-  this parameter unless a non-default reference voltage is used.
+    Default: 1250 (mV)
+
+    Reference voltage on VREF_ADC pin in mV. It should not be necessary to set
+    this parameter unless a non-default reference voltage is used.
 
 
 Description
@@ -64,9 +91,10 @@ the devices explicitly. When instantiating the device, you have to specify
 its configuration register address.
 
 Example: the following will load the driver for an SMM665 at address 0x57
-on I2C bus #1:
-$ modprobe smm665
-$ echo smm665 0x57 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/i2c-1/new_device
+on I2C bus #1::
+
+	$ modprobe smm665
+	$ echo smm665 0x57 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/i2c-1/new_device
 
 
 Sysfs entries
@@ -84,6 +112,7 @@ max otherwise. For details please see the SMM665 datasheet.
 
 For SMM465 and SMM764, values for Channel E and F are reported but undefined.
 
+======================= =======================================================
 in1_input		12V input voltage (mV)
 in2_input		3.3V (VDD) input voltage (mV)
 in3_input		Channel A voltage (mV)
@@ -155,3 +184,4 @@ temp1_min		Mimimum chip temperature
 temp1_max		Maximum chip temperature
 temp1_crit		Critical chip temperature
 temp1_crit_alarm	Temperature critical alarm
+======================= =======================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/smsc47b397 b/Documentation/hwmon/smsc47b397.rst
index 3a43b6948924..600194cf1804 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/smsc47b397
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/smsc47b397.rst
@@ -2,29 +2,38 @@ Kernel driver smsc47b397
 ========================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * SMSC LPC47B397-NC
+
   * SMSC SCH5307-NS
+
   * SMSC SCH5317
+
     Prefix: 'smsc47b397'
+
     Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
+
     Datasheet: In this file
 
-Authors: Mark M. Hoffman <mhoffman@lightlink.com>
-         Utilitek Systems, Inc.
+Authors:
+
+       - Mark M. Hoffman <mhoffman@lightlink.com>
+       - Utilitek Systems, Inc.
 
 November 23, 2004
 
-The following specification describes the SMSC LPC47B397-NC[1] sensor chip
+The following specification describes the SMSC LPC47B397-NC [1]_ sensor chip
 (for which there is no public datasheet available). This document was
 provided by Craig Kelly (In-Store Broadcast Network) and edited/corrected
 by Mark M. Hoffman <mhoffman@lightlink.com>.
 
-[1] And SMSC SCH5307-NS and SCH5317, which have different device IDs but are
-otherwise compatible.
+.. [1] And SMSC SCH5307-NS and SCH5317, which have different device IDs but are
+       otherwise compatible.
 
-* * * * *
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
-Methods for detecting the HP SIO and reading the thermal data on a dc7100.
+Methods for detecting the HP SIO and reading the thermal data on a dc7100
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
 The thermal information on the dc7100 is contained in the SIO Hardware Monitor
 (HWM). The information is accessed through an index/data pair. The index/data
@@ -35,18 +44,22 @@ and 0x61 (LSB). Currently we are using 0x480 for the HWM Base Address and
 
 Reading temperature information.
 The temperature information is located in the following registers:
+
+=============== ======= =======================================================
 Temp1		0x25	(Currently, this reflects the CPU temp on all systems).
 Temp2		0x26
 Temp3		0x27
 Temp4		0x80
+=============== ======= =======================================================
 
 Programming Example
-The following is an example of how to read the HWM temperature registers:
-MOV	DX,480H
-MOV	AX,25H
-OUT	DX,AL
-MOV	DX,481H
-IN	AL,DX
+The following is an example of how to read the HWM temperature registers::
+
+	MOV	DX,480H
+	MOV	AX,25H
+	OUT	DX,AL
+	MOV	DX,481H
+	IN	AL,DX
 
 AL contains the data in hex, the temperature in Celsius is the decimal
 equivalent.
@@ -55,25 +68,32 @@ Ex: If AL contains 0x2A, the temperature is 42 degrees C.
 
 Reading tach information.
 The fan speed information is located in the following registers:
+
+=============== ======= ======= =================================
 		LSB	MSB
 Tach1		0x28	0x29	(Currently, this reflects the CPU
 				fan speed on all systems).
 Tach2		0x2A	0x2B
 Tach3		0x2C	0x2D
 Tach4		0x2E	0x2F
+=============== ======= ======= =================================
 
-Important!!!
-Reading the tach LSB locks the tach MSB.
-The LSB Must be read first.
+.. Important::
+
+	Reading the tach LSB locks the tach MSB.
+	The LSB Must be read first.
+
+How to convert the tach reading to RPM
+--------------------------------------
 
-How to convert the tach reading to RPM.
 The tach reading (TCount) is given by: (Tach MSB * 256) + (Tach LSB)
 The SIO counts the number of 90kHz (11.111us) pulses per revolution.
 RPM = 60/(TCount * 11.111us)
 
-Example:
-Reg 0x28 = 0x9B
-Reg 0x29 = 0x08
+Example::
+
+	Reg 0x28 = 0x9B
+	Reg 0x29 = 0x08
 
 TCount = 0x89B = 2203
 
@@ -81,21 +101,28 @@ RPM = 60 / (2203 * 11.11111 E-6) = 2451 RPM
 
 Obtaining the SIO version.
 
-CONFIGURATION SEQUENCE
+Configuration Sequence
+----------------------
+
 To program the configuration registers, the following sequence must be followed:
 1. Enter Configuration Mode
 2. Configure the Configuration Registers
 3. Exit Configuration Mode.
 
 Enter Configuration Mode
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
 To place the chip into the Configuration State The config key (0x55) is written
 to the CONFIG PORT (0x2E).
 
 Configuration Mode
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
 In configuration mode, the INDEX PORT is located at the CONFIG PORT address and
 the DATA PORT is at INDEX PORT address + 1.
 
 The desired configuration registers are accessed in two steps:
+
 a.	Write the index of the Logical Device Number Configuration Register
 	(i.e., 0x07) to the INDEX PORT and then write the number of the
 	desired logical device to the DATA PORT.
@@ -104,30 +131,35 @@ b.	Write the address of the desired configuration register within the
 	logical device to the INDEX PORT and then write or read the config-
 	uration register through the DATA PORT.
 
-Note: If accessing the Global Configuration Registers, step (a) is not required.
+Note:
+	If accessing the Global Configuration Registers, step (a) is not required.
 
 Exit Configuration Mode
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
 To exit the Configuration State the write 0xAA to the CONFIG PORT (0x2E).
 The chip returns to the RUN State.  (This is important).
 
 Programming Example
-The following is an example of how to read the SIO Device ID located at 0x20
-
-; ENTER CONFIGURATION MODE
-MOV	DX,02EH
-MOV	AX,055H
-OUT	DX,AL
-; GLOBAL CONFIGURATION  REGISTER
-MOV	DX,02EH
-MOV	AL,20H
-OUT	DX,AL
-; READ THE DATA
-MOV	DX,02FH
-IN	AL,DX
-; EXIT CONFIGURATION MODE
-MOV	DX,02EH
-MOV	AX,0AAH
-OUT	DX,AL
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+The following is an example of how to read the SIO Device ID located at 0x20:
+
+	; ENTER CONFIGURATION MODE
+	MOV	DX,02EH
+	MOV	AX,055H
+	OUT	DX,AL
+	; GLOBAL CONFIGURATION  REGISTER
+	MOV	DX,02EH
+	MOV	AL,20H
+	OUT	DX,AL
+	; READ THE DATA
+	MOV	DX,02FH
+	IN	AL,DX
+	; EXIT CONFIGURATION MODE
+	MOV	DX,02EH
+	MOV	AX,0AAH
+	OUT	DX,AL
 
 The registers of interest for identifying the SIO on the dc7100 are Device ID
 (0x20) and Device Rev  (0x21).
@@ -135,29 +167,31 @@ The registers of interest for identifying the SIO on the dc7100 are Device ID
 The Device ID will read 0x6F (0x81 for SCH5307-NS, and 0x85 for SCH5317)
 The Device Rev currently reads 0x01
 
-Obtaining the HWM Base Address.
+Obtaining the HWM Base Address
+------------------------------
+
 The following is an example of how to read the HWM Base Address located in
-Logical Device 8.
-
-; ENTER CONFIGURATION MODE
-MOV	DX,02EH
-MOV	AX,055H
-OUT	DX,AL
-; CONFIGURE REGISTER CRE0,
-; LOGICAL DEVICE 8
-MOV	DX,02EH
-MOV	AL,07H
-OUT	DX,AL ;Point to LD# Config Reg
-MOV	DX,02FH
-MOV	AL, 08H
-OUT	DX,AL;Point to Logical Device 8
-;
-MOV	DX,02EH
-MOV	AL,60H
-OUT	DX,AL	; Point to HWM Base Addr MSB
-MOV	DX,02FH
-IN	AL,DX	; Get MSB of HWM Base Addr
-; EXIT CONFIGURATION MODE
-MOV	DX,02EH
-MOV	AX,0AAH
-OUT	DX,AL
+Logical Device 8::
+
+	; ENTER CONFIGURATION MODE
+	MOV	DX,02EH
+	MOV	AX,055H
+	OUT	DX,AL
+	; CONFIGURE REGISTER CRE0,
+	; LOGICAL DEVICE 8
+	MOV	DX,02EH
+	MOV	AL,07H
+	OUT	DX,AL ;Point to LD# Config Reg
+	MOV	DX,02FH
+	MOV	AL, 08H
+	OUT	DX,AL;Point to Logical Device 8
+	;
+	MOV	DX,02EH
+	MOV	AL,60H
+	OUT	DX,AL	; Point to HWM Base Addr MSB
+	MOV	DX,02FH
+	IN	AL,DX	; Get MSB of HWM Base Addr
+	; EXIT CONFIGURATION MODE
+	MOV	DX,02EH
+	MOV	AX,0AAH
+	OUT	DX,AL
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/smsc47m1 b/Documentation/hwmon/smsc47m1.rst
index 10a24b420686..c54eabd5eb57 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/smsc47m1
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/smsc47m1.rst
@@ -2,30 +2,53 @@ Kernel driver smsc47m1
 ======================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * SMSC LPC47B27x, LPC47M112, LPC47M10x, LPC47M13x, LPC47M14x,
+
     LPC47M15x and LPC47M192
+
     Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
+
     Prefix: 'smsc47m1'
+
     Datasheets:
-        http://www.smsc.com/media/Downloads_Public/Data_Sheets/47b272.pdf
-        http://www.smsc.com/media/Downloads_Public/Data_Sheets/47m10x.pdf
-        http://www.smsc.com/media/Downloads_Public/Data_Sheets/47m112.pdf
-        http://www.smsc.com/
+
+	http://www.smsc.com/media/Downloads_Public/Data_Sheets/47b272.pdf
+
+	http://www.smsc.com/media/Downloads_Public/Data_Sheets/47m10x.pdf
+
+	http://www.smsc.com/media/Downloads_Public/Data_Sheets/47m112.pdf
+
+	http://www.smsc.com/
+
   * SMSC LPC47M292
+
     Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
+
     Prefix: 'smsc47m2'
+
     Datasheet: Not public
+
   * SMSC LPC47M997
+
     Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
+
     Prefix: 'smsc47m1'
+
     Datasheet: none
 
+
+
 Authors:
-        Mark D. Studebaker <mdsxyz123@yahoo.com>,
-        With assistance from Bruce Allen <ballen@uwm.edu>, and his
-        fan.c program: http://www.lsc-group.phys.uwm.edu/%7Eballen/driver/
-        Gabriele Gorla <gorlik@yahoo.com>,
-        Jean Delvare <jdelvare@suse.de>
+
+     - Mark D. Studebaker <mdsxyz123@yahoo.com>,
+     - With assistance from Bruce Allen <ballen@uwm.edu>, and his
+       fan.c program:
+
+       - http://www.lsc-group.phys.uwm.edu/%7Eballen/driver/
+
+     - Gabriele Gorla <gorlik@yahoo.com>,
+     - Jean Delvare <jdelvare@suse.de>
 
 Description
 -----------
@@ -57,7 +80,7 @@ hardware registers are read whenever any data is read (unless it is less
 than 1.5 seconds since the last update). This means that you can easily
 miss once-only alarms.
 
+------------------------------------------------------------------
 
-**********************
 The lm_sensors project gratefully acknowledges the support of
 Intel in the development of this driver.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/smsc47m192 b/Documentation/hwmon/smsc47m192
deleted file mode 100644
index 6d54ecb7b3f8..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/smsc47m192
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,103 +0,0 @@
-Kernel driver smsc47m192
-========================
-
-Supported chips:
-  * SMSC LPC47M192, LPC47M15x, LPC47M292 and LPC47M997
-    Prefix: 'smsc47m192'
-    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2d
-    Datasheet: The datasheet for LPC47M192 is publicly available from
-               http://www.smsc.com/
-               The LPC47M15x, LPC47M292 and LPC47M997 are compatible for
-               hardware monitoring.
-
-Author: Hartmut Rick <linux@rick.claranet.de>
-        Special thanks to Jean Delvare for careful checking
-        of the code and many helpful comments and suggestions.
-
-
-Description
------------
-
-This driver implements support for the hardware sensor capabilities
-of the SMSC LPC47M192 and compatible Super-I/O chips.
-
-These chips support 3 temperature channels and 8 voltage inputs
-as well as CPU voltage VID input.
-
-They do also have fan monitoring and control capabilities, but the
-these features are accessed via ISA bus and are not supported by this
-driver. Use the 'smsc47m1' driver for fan monitoring and control.
-
-Voltages and temperatures are measured by an 8-bit ADC, the resolution
-of the temperatures is 1 bit per degree C.
-Voltages are scaled such that the nominal voltage corresponds to
-192 counts, i.e. 3/4 of the full range. Thus the available range for
-each voltage channel is 0V ... 255/192*(nominal voltage), the resolution
-is 1 bit per (nominal voltage)/192.
-Both voltage and temperature values are scaled by 1000, the sys files
-show voltages in mV and temperatures in units of 0.001 degC.
-
-The +12V analog voltage input channel (in4_input) is multiplexed with
-bit 4 of the encoded CPU voltage. This means that you either get
-a +12V voltage measurement or a 5 bit CPU VID, but not both.
-The default setting is to use the pin as 12V input, and use only 4 bit VID.
-This driver assumes that the information in the configuration register
-is correct, i.e. that the BIOS has updated the configuration if
-the motherboard has this input wired to VID4.
-
-The temperature and voltage readings are updated once every 1.5 seconds.
-Reading them more often repeats the same values.
-
-
-sysfs interface
----------------
-
-in0_input	- +2.5V voltage input
-in1_input	- CPU voltage input (nominal 2.25V)
-in2_input	- +3.3V voltage input
-in3_input	- +5V voltage input
-in4_input	- +12V voltage input (may be missing if used as VID4)
-in5_input	- Vcc voltage input (nominal 3.3V)
-		  This is the supply voltage of the sensor chip itself.
-in6_input	- +1.5V voltage input
-in7_input	- +1.8V voltage input
-
-in[0-7]_min,
-in[0-7]_max	- lower and upper alarm thresholds for in[0-7]_input reading
-
-		  All voltages are read and written in mV.
-
-in[0-7]_alarm	- alarm flags for voltage inputs
-		  These files read '1' in case of alarm, '0' otherwise.
-
-temp1_input	- chip temperature measured by on-chip diode
-temp[2-3]_input	- temperature measured by external diodes (one of these would
-		  typically be wired to the diode inside the CPU)
-
-temp[1-3]_min,
-temp[1-3]_max	- lower and upper alarm thresholds for temperatures
-
-temp[1-3]_offset - temperature offset registers
-		  The chip adds the offsets stored in these registers to
-		  the corresponding temperature readings.
-		  Note that temp1 and temp2 offsets share the same register,
-		  they cannot both be different from zero at the same time.
-		  Writing a non-zero number to one of them will reset the other
-		  offset to zero.
-
-		  All temperatures and offsets are read and written in
-		  units of 0.001 degC.
-
-temp[1-3]_alarm - alarm flags for temperature inputs, '1' in case of alarm,
-		  '0' otherwise.
-temp[2-3]_input_fault - diode fault flags for temperature inputs 2 and 3.
-		  A fault is detected if the two pins for the corresponding
-		  sensor are open or shorted, or any of the two is shorted
-		  to ground or Vcc. '1' indicates a diode fault.
-
-cpu0_vid	- CPU voltage as received from the CPU
-
-vrm		- CPU VID standard used for decoding CPU voltage
-
-		  The *_min, *_max, *_offset and vrm files can be read and
-		  written, all others are read-only.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/smsc47m192.rst b/Documentation/hwmon/smsc47m192.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a2e86ab67918
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/smsc47m192.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,116 @@
+Kernel driver smsc47m192
+========================
+
+Supported chips:
+
+  * SMSC LPC47M192, LPC47M15x, LPC47M292 and LPC47M997
+
+    Prefix: 'smsc47m192'
+
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2d
+
+    Datasheet: The datasheet for LPC47M192 is publicly available from
+
+	       http://www.smsc.com/
+
+	       The LPC47M15x, LPC47M292 and LPC47M997 are compatible for
+
+	       hardware monitoring.
+
+
+
+Author:
+      - Hartmut Rick <linux@rick.claranet.de>
+
+      - Special thanks to Jean Delvare for careful checking
+	of the code and many helpful comments and suggestions.
+
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+This driver implements support for the hardware sensor capabilities
+of the SMSC LPC47M192 and compatible Super-I/O chips.
+
+These chips support 3 temperature channels and 8 voltage inputs
+as well as CPU voltage VID input.
+
+They do also have fan monitoring and control capabilities, but the
+these features are accessed via ISA bus and are not supported by this
+driver. Use the 'smsc47m1' driver for fan monitoring and control.
+
+Voltages and temperatures are measured by an 8-bit ADC, the resolution
+of the temperatures is 1 bit per degree C.
+Voltages are scaled such that the nominal voltage corresponds to
+192 counts, i.e. 3/4 of the full range. Thus the available range for
+each voltage channel is 0V ... 255/192*(nominal voltage), the resolution
+is 1 bit per (nominal voltage)/192.
+Both voltage and temperature values are scaled by 1000, the sys files
+show voltages in mV and temperatures in units of 0.001 degC.
+
+The +12V analog voltage input channel (in4_input) is multiplexed with
+bit 4 of the encoded CPU voltage. This means that you either get
+a +12V voltage measurement or a 5 bit CPU VID, but not both.
+The default setting is to use the pin as 12V input, and use only 4 bit VID.
+This driver assumes that the information in the configuration register
+is correct, i.e. that the BIOS has updated the configuration if
+the motherboard has this input wired to VID4.
+
+The temperature and voltage readings are updated once every 1.5 seconds.
+Reading them more often repeats the same values.
+
+
+sysfs interface
+---------------
+
+===================== ==========================================================
+in0_input	      +2.5V voltage input
+in1_input	      CPU voltage input (nominal 2.25V)
+in2_input	      +3.3V voltage input
+in3_input	      +5V voltage input
+in4_input	      +12V voltage input (may be missing if used as VID4)
+in5_input	      Vcc voltage input (nominal 3.3V)
+		      This is the supply voltage of the sensor chip itself.
+in6_input	      +1.5V voltage input
+in7_input	      +1.8V voltage input
+
+in[0-7]_min,
+in[0-7]_max	      lower and upper alarm thresholds for in[0-7]_input reading
+
+		      All voltages are read and written in mV.
+
+in[0-7]_alarm	      alarm flags for voltage inputs
+		      These files read '1' in case of alarm, '0' otherwise.
+
+temp1_input	      chip temperature measured by on-chip diode
+temp[2-3]_input	      temperature measured by external diodes (one of these
+		      would typically be wired to the diode inside the CPU)
+
+temp[1-3]_min,
+temp[1-3]_max	      lower and upper alarm thresholds for temperatures
+
+temp[1-3]_offset      temperature offset registers
+		      The chip adds the offsets stored in these registers to
+		      the corresponding temperature readings.
+		      Note that temp1 and temp2 offsets share the same register,
+		      they cannot both be different from zero at the same time.
+		      Writing a non-zero number to one of them will reset the other
+		      offset to zero.
+
+		      All temperatures and offsets are read and written in
+		      units of 0.001 degC.
+
+temp[1-3]_alarm       alarm flags for temperature inputs, '1' in case of alarm,
+		      '0' otherwise.
+temp[2-3]_input_fault diode fault flags for temperature inputs 2 and 3.
+		      A fault is detected if the two pins for the corresponding
+		      sensor are open or shorted, or any of the two is shorted
+		      to ground or Vcc. '1' indicates a diode fault.
+
+cpu0_vid	      CPU voltage as received from the CPU
+
+vrm		      CPU VID standard used for decoding CPU voltage
+===================== ==========================================================
+
+The `*_min`, `*_max`, `*_offset` and `vrm` files can be read and written,
+all others are read-only.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/submitting-patches b/Documentation/hwmon/submitting-patches.rst
index f88221b46153..f9796b9d9db6 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/submitting-patches
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/submitting-patches.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-	How to Get Your Patch Accepted Into the Hwmon Subsystem
-	-------------------------------------------------------
+How to Get Your Patch Accepted Into the Hwmon Subsystem
+=======================================================
 
 This text is a collection of suggestions for people writing patches or
 drivers for the hwmon subsystem. Following these suggestions will greatly
@@ -9,11 +9,12 @@ increase the chances of your change being accepted.
 1. General
 ----------
 
-* It should be unnecessary to mention, but please read and follow
-    Documentation/process/submit-checklist.rst
-    Documentation/process/submitting-drivers.rst
-    Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst
-    Documentation/process/coding-style.rst
+* It should be unnecessary to mention, but please read and follow:
+
+    - Documentation/process/submit-checklist.rst
+    - Documentation/process/submitting-drivers.rst
+    - Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst
+    - Documentation/process/coding-style.rst
 
 * Please run your patch through 'checkpatch --strict'. There should be no
   errors, no warnings, and few if any check messages. If there are any
@@ -38,7 +39,7 @@ increase the chances of your change being accepted.
 2. Adding functionality to existing drivers
 -------------------------------------------
 
-* Make sure the documentation in Documentation/hwmon/<driver_name> is up to
+* Make sure the documentation in Documentation/hwmon/<driver_name>.rst is up to
   date.
 
 * Make sure the information in Kconfig is up to date.
@@ -60,7 +61,7 @@ increase the chances of your change being accepted.
 
 * Consider adding yourself to MAINTAINERS.
 
-* Document the driver in Documentation/hwmon/<driver_name>.
+* Document the driver in Documentation/hwmon/<driver_name>.rst.
 
 * Add the driver to Kconfig and Makefile in alphabetical order.
 
@@ -133,7 +134,7 @@ increase the chances of your change being accepted.
   non-standard attributes, or you believe you do, discuss it on the mailing list
   first. Either case, provide a detailed explanation why you need the
   non-standard attribute(s).
-  Standard attributes are specified in Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface.
+  Standard attributes are specified in Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface.rst.
 
 * When deciding which sysfs attributes to support, look at the chip's
   capabilities. While we do not expect your driver to support everything the
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface b/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface.rst
index 2b9e1005d88b..fd590633bb14 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 Naming and data format standards for sysfs files
-------------------------------------------------
+================================================
 
 The libsensors library offers an interface to the raw sensors data
 through the sysfs interface. Since lm-sensors 3.0.0, libsensors is
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ this reason, it is still not recommended to bypass the library.
 
 Each chip gets its own directory in the sysfs /sys/devices tree.  To
 find all sensor chips, it is easier to follow the device symlinks from
-/sys/class/hwmon/hwmon*.
+`/sys/class/hwmon/hwmon*`.
 
 Up to lm-sensors 3.0.0, libsensors looks for hardware monitoring attributes
 in the "physical" device directory. Since lm-sensors 3.0.1, attributes found
@@ -67,11 +67,13 @@ are interpreted as 0! For more on how written strings are interpreted see the
 
 -------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
-[0-*]	denotes any positive number starting from 0
-[1-*]	denotes any positive number starting from 1
+======= ===========================================
+`[0-*]`	denotes any positive number starting from 0
+`[1-*]`	denotes any positive number starting from 1
 RO	read only value
 WO	write only value
 RW	read/write value
+======= ===========================================
 
 Read/write values may be read-only for some chips, depending on the
 hardware implementation.
@@ -80,57 +82,82 @@ All entries (except name) are optional, and should only be created in a
 given driver if the chip has the feature.
 
 
-*********************
-* Global attributes *
-*********************
+*****************
+Global attributes
+*****************
 
-name		The chip name.
+`name`
+		The chip name.
 		This should be a short, lowercase string, not containing
 		whitespace, dashes, or the wildcard character '*'.
 		This attribute represents the chip name. It is the only
 		mandatory attribute.
 		I2C devices get this attribute created automatically.
+
 		RO
 
-update_interval	The interval at which the chip will update readings.
+`update_interval`
+		The interval at which the chip will update readings.
 		Unit: millisecond
+
 		RW
+
 		Some devices have a variable update rate or interval.
 		This attribute can be used to change it to the desired value.
 
 
-************
-* Voltages *
-************
+********
+Voltages
+********
+
+`in[0-*]_min`
+		Voltage min value.
 
-in[0-*]_min	Voltage min value.
 		Unit: millivolt
+
 		RW
-		
-in[0-*]_lcrit	Voltage critical min value.
+
+`in[0-*]_lcrit`
+		Voltage critical min value.
+
 		Unit: millivolt
+
 		RW
+
 		If voltage drops to or below this limit, the system may
 		take drastic action such as power down or reset. At the very
 		least, it should report a fault.
 
-in[0-*]_max	Voltage max value.
+`in[0-*]_max`
+		Voltage max value.
+
 		Unit: millivolt
+
 		RW
-		
-in[0-*]_crit	Voltage critical max value.
+
+`in[0-*]_crit`
+		Voltage critical max value.
+
 		Unit: millivolt
+
 		RW
+
 		If voltage reaches or exceeds this limit, the system may
 		take drastic action such as power down or reset. At the very
 		least, it should report a fault.
 
-in[0-*]_input	Voltage input value.
+`in[0-*]_input`
+		Voltage input value.
+
 		Unit: millivolt
+
 		RO
+
 		Voltage measured on the chip pin.
+
 		Actual voltage depends on the scaling resistors on the
 		motherboard, as recommended in the chip datasheet.
+
 		This varies by chip and by motherboard.
 		Because of this variation, values are generally NOT scaled
 		by the chip driver, and must be done by the application.
@@ -140,166 +167,232 @@ in[0-*]_input	Voltage input value.
 		thumb: drivers should report the voltage values at the
 		"pins" of the chip.
 
-in[0-*]_average
+`in[0-*]_average`
 		Average voltage
+
 		Unit: millivolt
+
 		RO
 
-in[0-*]_lowest
+`in[0-*]_lowest`
 		Historical minimum voltage
+
 		Unit: millivolt
+
 		RO
 
-in[0-*]_highest
+`in[0-*]_highest`
 		Historical maximum voltage
+
 		Unit: millivolt
+
 		RO
 
-in[0-*]_reset_history
+`in[0-*]_reset_history`
 		Reset inX_lowest and inX_highest
+
 		WO
 
-in_reset_history
+`in_reset_history`
 		Reset inX_lowest and inX_highest for all sensors
+
 		WO
 
-in[0-*]_label	Suggested voltage channel label.
+`in[0-*]_label`
+		Suggested voltage channel label.
+
 		Text string
+
 		Should only be created if the driver has hints about what
 		this voltage channel is being used for, and user-space
 		doesn't. In all other cases, the label is provided by
 		user-space.
+
 		RO
 
-in[0-*]_enable
+`in[0-*]_enable`
 		Enable or disable the sensors.
+
 		When disabled the sensor read will return -ENODATA.
-		1: Enable
-		0: Disable
+
+		- 1: Enable
+		- 0: Disable
+
 		RW
 
-cpu[0-*]_vid	CPU core reference voltage.
+`cpu[0-*]_vid`
+		CPU core reference voltage.
+
 		Unit: millivolt
+
 		RO
+
 		Not always correct.
 
-vrm		Voltage Regulator Module version number. 
+`vrm`
+		Voltage Regulator Module version number.
+
 		RW (but changing it should no more be necessary)
+
 		Originally the VRM standard version multiplied by 10, but now
 		an arbitrary number, as not all standards have a version
 		number.
+
 		Affects the way the driver calculates the CPU core reference
 		voltage from the vid pins.
 
 Also see the Alarms section for status flags associated with voltages.
 
 
-********
-* Fans *
-********
+****
+Fans
+****
+
+`fan[1-*]_min`
+		Fan minimum value
 
-fan[1-*]_min	Fan minimum value
 		Unit: revolution/min (RPM)
+
 		RW
 
-fan[1-*]_max	Fan maximum value
+`fan[1-*]_max`
+		Fan maximum value
+
 		Unit: revolution/min (RPM)
+
 		Only rarely supported by the hardware.
 		RW
 
-fan[1-*]_input	Fan input value.
+`fan[1-*]_input`
+		Fan input value.
+
 		Unit: revolution/min (RPM)
+
 		RO
 
-fan[1-*]_div	Fan divisor.
+`fan[1-*]_div`
+		Fan divisor.
+
 		Integer value in powers of two (1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128).
+
 		RW
+
 		Some chips only support values 1, 2, 4 and 8.
 		Note that this is actually an internal clock divisor, which
 		affects the measurable speed range, not the read value.
 
-fan[1-*]_pulses	Number of tachometer pulses per fan revolution.
+`fan[1-*]_pulses`
+		Number of tachometer pulses per fan revolution.
+
 		Integer value, typically between 1 and 4.
+
 		RW
+
 		This value is a characteristic of the fan connected to the
 		device's input, so it has to be set in accordance with the fan
 		model.
+
 		Should only be created if the chip has a register to configure
 		the number of pulses. In the absence of such a register (and
 		thus attribute) the value assumed by all devices is 2 pulses
 		per fan revolution.
 
-fan[1-*]_target
+`fan[1-*]_target`
 		Desired fan speed
+
 		Unit: revolution/min (RPM)
+
 		RW
+
 		Only makes sense if the chip supports closed-loop fan speed
 		control based on the measured fan speed.
 
-fan[1-*]_label	Suggested fan channel label.
+`fan[1-*]_label`
+		Suggested fan channel label.
+
 		Text string
+
 		Should only be created if the driver has hints about what
 		this fan channel is being used for, and user-space doesn't.
 		In all other cases, the label is provided by user-space.
+
 		RO
 
-fan[1-*]_enable
+`fan[1-*]_enable`
 		Enable or disable the sensors.
+
 		When disabled the sensor read will return -ENODATA.
-		1: Enable
-		0: Disable
+
+		- 1: Enable
+		- 0: Disable
+
 		RW
 
 Also see the Alarms section for status flags associated with fans.
 
 
-*******
-* PWM *
-*******
+***
+PWM
+***
+
+`pwm[1-*]`
+		Pulse width modulation fan control.
 
-pwm[1-*]	Pulse width modulation fan control.
 		Integer value in the range 0 to 255
+
 		RW
+
 		255 is max or 100%.
 
-pwm[1-*]_enable
+`pwm[1-*]_enable`
 		Fan speed control method:
-		0: no fan speed control (i.e. fan at full speed)
-		1: manual fan speed control enabled (using pwm[1-*])
-		2+: automatic fan speed control enabled
+
+		- 0: no fan speed control (i.e. fan at full speed)
+		- 1: manual fan speed control enabled (using `pwm[1-*]`)
+		- 2+: automatic fan speed control enabled
+
 		Check individual chip documentation files for automatic mode
 		details.
+
 		RW
 
-pwm[1-*]_mode	0: DC mode (direct current)
-		1: PWM mode (pulse-width modulation)
+`pwm[1-*]_mode`
+		- 0: DC mode (direct current)
+		- 1: PWM mode (pulse-width modulation)
+
 		RW
 
-pwm[1-*]_freq	Base PWM frequency in Hz.
+`pwm[1-*]_freq`
+		Base PWM frequency in Hz.
+
 		Only possibly available when pwmN_mode is PWM, but not always
 		present even then.
+
 		RW
 
-pwm[1-*]_auto_channels_temp
+`pwm[1-*]_auto_channels_temp`
 		Select which temperature channels affect this PWM output in
-		auto mode. Bitfield, 1 is temp1, 2 is temp2, 4 is temp3 etc...
+		auto mode.
+
+		Bitfield, 1 is temp1, 2 is temp2, 4 is temp3 etc...
 		Which values are possible depend on the chip used.
+
 		RW
 
-pwm[1-*]_auto_point[1-*]_pwm
-pwm[1-*]_auto_point[1-*]_temp
-pwm[1-*]_auto_point[1-*]_temp_hyst
-		Define the PWM vs temperature curve. Number of trip points is
-		chip-dependent. Use this for chips which associate trip points
-		to PWM output channels.
+`pwm[1-*]_auto_point[1-*]_pwm` / `pwm[1-*]_auto_point[1-*]_temp` / `pwm[1-*]_auto_point[1-*]_temp_hyst`
+		Define the PWM vs temperature curve.
+
+		Number of trip points is chip-dependent. Use this for chips
+		which associate trip points to PWM output channels.
+
 		RW
 
-temp[1-*]_auto_point[1-*]_pwm
-temp[1-*]_auto_point[1-*]_temp
-temp[1-*]_auto_point[1-*]_temp_hyst
-		Define the PWM vs temperature curve. Number of trip points is
-		chip-dependent. Use this for chips which associate trip points
-		to temperature channels.
+`temp[1-*]_auto_point[1-*]_pwm` / `temp[1-*]_auto_point[1-*]_temp` / `temp[1-*]_auto_point[1-*]_temp_hyst`
+		Define the PWM vs temperature curve.
+
+		Number of trip points is chip-dependent. Use this for chips
+		which associate trip points to temperature channels.
+
 		RW
 
 There is a third case where trip points are associated to both PWM output
@@ -312,122 +405,173 @@ The actual result is up to the chip, but in general the highest candidate
 value (fastest fan speed) wins.
 
 
-****************
-* Temperatures *
-****************
+************
+Temperatures
+************
+
+`temp[1-*]_type`
+		Sensor type selection.
 
-temp[1-*]_type	Sensor type selection.
 		Integers 1 to 6
+
 		RW
-		1: CPU embedded diode
-		2: 3904 transistor
-		3: thermal diode
-		4: thermistor
-		5: AMD AMDSI
-		6: Intel PECI
+
+		- 1: CPU embedded diode
+		- 2: 3904 transistor
+		- 3: thermal diode
+		- 4: thermistor
+		- 5: AMD AMDSI
+		- 6: Intel PECI
+
 		Not all types are supported by all chips
 
-temp[1-*]_max	Temperature max value.
+`temp[1-*]_max`
+		Temperature max value.
+
 		Unit: millidegree Celsius (or millivolt, see below)
+
 		RW
 
-temp[1-*]_min	Temperature min value.
+`temp[1-*]_min`
+		Temperature min value.
+
 		Unit: millidegree Celsius
+
 		RW
 
-temp[1-*]_max_hyst
+`temp[1-*]_max_hyst`
 		Temperature hysteresis value for max limit.
+
 		Unit: millidegree Celsius
+
 		Must be reported as an absolute temperature, NOT a delta
 		from the max value.
+
 		RW
 
-temp[1-*]_min_hyst
+`temp[1-*]_min_hyst`
 		Temperature hysteresis value for min limit.
 		Unit: millidegree Celsius
+
 		Must be reported as an absolute temperature, NOT a delta
 		from the min value.
+
 		RW
 
-temp[1-*]_input Temperature input value.
+`temp[1-*]_input`
+	 Temperature input value.
+
 		Unit: millidegree Celsius
+
 		RO
 
-temp[1-*]_crit	Temperature critical max value, typically greater than
+`temp[1-*]_crit`
+		Temperature critical max value, typically greater than
 		corresponding temp_max values.
+
 		Unit: millidegree Celsius
+
 		RW
 
-temp[1-*]_crit_hyst
+`temp[1-*]_crit_hyst`
 		Temperature hysteresis value for critical limit.
+
 		Unit: millidegree Celsius
+
 		Must be reported as an absolute temperature, NOT a delta
 		from the critical value.
+
 		RW
 
-temp[1-*]_emergency
+`temp[1-*]_emergency`
 		Temperature emergency max value, for chips supporting more than
 		two upper temperature limits. Must be equal or greater than
 		corresponding temp_crit values.
+
 		Unit: millidegree Celsius
+
 		RW
 
-temp[1-*]_emergency_hyst
+`temp[1-*]_emergency_hyst`
 		Temperature hysteresis value for emergency limit.
+
 		Unit: millidegree Celsius
+
 		Must be reported as an absolute temperature, NOT a delta
 		from the emergency value.
+
 		RW
 
-temp[1-*]_lcrit	Temperature critical min value, typically lower than
+`temp[1-*]_lcrit`
+		Temperature critical min value, typically lower than
 		corresponding temp_min values.
+
 		Unit: millidegree Celsius
+
 		RW
 
-temp[1-*]_lcrit_hyst
+`temp[1-*]_lcrit_hyst`
 		Temperature hysteresis value for critical min limit.
+
 		Unit: millidegree Celsius
+
 		Must be reported as an absolute temperature, NOT a delta
 		from the critical min value.
+
 		RW
 
-temp[1-*]_offset
+`temp[1-*]_offset`
 		Temperature offset which is added to the temperature reading
 		by the chip.
+
 		Unit: millidegree Celsius
+
 		Read/Write value.
 
-temp[1-*]_label	Suggested temperature channel label.
+`temp[1-*]_label`
+		Suggested temperature channel label.
+
 		Text string
+
 		Should only be created if the driver has hints about what
 		this temperature channel is being used for, and user-space
 		doesn't. In all other cases, the label is provided by
 		user-space.
+
 		RO
 
-temp[1-*]_lowest
+`temp[1-*]_lowest`
 		Historical minimum temperature
+
 		Unit: millidegree Celsius
+
 		RO
 
-temp[1-*]_highest
+`temp[1-*]_highest`
 		Historical maximum temperature
+
 		Unit: millidegree Celsius
+
 		RO
 
-temp[1-*]_reset_history
+`temp[1-*]_reset_history`
 		Reset temp_lowest and temp_highest
+
 		WO
 
-temp_reset_history
+`temp_reset_history`
 		Reset temp_lowest and temp_highest for all sensors
+
 		WO
 
-temp[1-*]_enable
+`temp[1-*]_enable`
 		Enable or disable the sensors.
+
 		When disabled the sensor read will return -ENODATA.
-		1: Enable
-		0: Disable
+
+		- 1: Enable
+		- 0: Disable
+
 		RW
 
 Some chips measure temperature using external thermistors and an ADC, and
@@ -442,201 +586,300 @@ channels by the driver.
 Also see the Alarms section for status flags associated with temperatures.
 
 
-************
-* Currents *
-************
+********
+Currents
+********
+
+`curr[1-*]_max`
+		Current max value
 
-curr[1-*]_max	Current max value
 		Unit: milliampere
+
 		RW
 
-curr[1-*]_min	Current min value.
+`curr[1-*]_min`
+		Current min value.
+
 		Unit: milliampere
+
 		RW
 
-curr[1-*]_lcrit	Current critical low value
+`curr[1-*]_lcrit`
+		Current critical low value
+
 		Unit: milliampere
+
 		RW
 
-curr[1-*]_crit	Current critical high value.
+`curr[1-*]_crit`
+		Current critical high value.
+
 		Unit: milliampere
+
 		RW
 
-curr[1-*]_input	Current input value
+`curr[1-*]_input`
+		Current input value
+
 		Unit: milliampere
+
 		RO
 
-curr[1-*]_average
+`curr[1-*]_average`
 		Average current use
+
 		Unit: milliampere
+
 		RO
 
-curr[1-*]_lowest
+`curr[1-*]_lowest`
 		Historical minimum current
+
 		Unit: milliampere
+
 		RO
 
-curr[1-*]_highest
+`curr[1-*]_highest`
 		Historical maximum current
 		Unit: milliampere
 		RO
 
-curr[1-*]_reset_history
+`curr[1-*]_reset_history`
 		Reset currX_lowest and currX_highest
+
 		WO
 
-curr_reset_history
+`curr_reset_history`
 		Reset currX_lowest and currX_highest for all sensors
+
 		WO
 
-curr[1-*]_enable
+`curr[1-*]_enable`
 		Enable or disable the sensors.
+
 		When disabled the sensor read will return -ENODATA.
-		1: Enable
-		0: Disable
+
+		- 1: Enable
+		- 0: Disable
+
 		RW
 
 Also see the Alarms section for status flags associated with currents.
 
-*********
-* Power *
-*********
+*****
+Power
+*****
+
+`power[1-*]_average`
+				Average power use
 
-power[1-*]_average		Average power use
 				Unit: microWatt
+
 				RO
 
-power[1-*]_average_interval	Power use averaging interval.  A poll
+`power[1-*]_average_interval`
+				Power use averaging interval.  A poll
 				notification is sent to this file if the
 				hardware changes the averaging interval.
+
 				Unit: milliseconds
+
 				RW
 
-power[1-*]_average_interval_max	Maximum power use averaging interval
+`power[1-*]_average_interval_max`
+				Maximum power use averaging interval
+
 				Unit: milliseconds
+
 				RO
 
-power[1-*]_average_interval_min	Minimum power use averaging interval
+`power[1-*]_average_interval_min`
+				Minimum power use averaging interval
+
 				Unit: milliseconds
+
 				RO
 
-power[1-*]_average_highest	Historical average maximum power use
+`power[1-*]_average_highest`
+				Historical average maximum power use
+
 				Unit: microWatt
+
 				RO
 
-power[1-*]_average_lowest	Historical average minimum power use
+`power[1-*]_average_lowest`
+				Historical average minimum power use
+
 				Unit: microWatt
+
 				RO
 
-power[1-*]_average_max		A poll notification is sent to
-				power[1-*]_average when power use
+`power[1-*]_average_max`
+				A poll notification is sent to
+				`power[1-*]_average` when power use
 				rises above this value.
+
 				Unit: microWatt
+
 				RW
 
-power[1-*]_average_min		A poll notification is sent to
-				power[1-*]_average when power use
+`power[1-*]_average_min`
+				A poll notification is sent to
+				`power[1-*]_average` when power use
 				sinks below this value.
+
 				Unit: microWatt
+
 				RW
 
-power[1-*]_input		Instantaneous power use
+`power[1-*]_input`
+				Instantaneous power use
+
 				Unit: microWatt
+
 				RO
 
-power[1-*]_input_highest	Historical maximum power use
+`power[1-*]_input_highest`
+				Historical maximum power use
+
 				Unit: microWatt
+
 				RO
 
-power[1-*]_input_lowest		Historical minimum power use
+`power[1-*]_input_lowest`
+				Historical minimum power use
+
 				Unit: microWatt
+
 				RO
 
-power[1-*]_reset_history	Reset input_highest, input_lowest,
+`power[1-*]_reset_history`
+				Reset input_highest, input_lowest,
 				average_highest and average_lowest.
+
 				WO
 
-power[1-*]_accuracy		Accuracy of the power meter.
+`power[1-*]_accuracy`
+				Accuracy of the power meter.
+
 				Unit: Percent
+
 				RO
 
-power[1-*]_cap			If power use rises above this limit, the
+`power[1-*]_cap`
+				If power use rises above this limit, the
 				system should take action to reduce power use.
 				A poll notification is sent to this file if the
-				cap is changed by the hardware.  The *_cap
+				cap is changed by the hardware.  The `*_cap`
 				files only appear if the cap is known to be
 				enforced by hardware.
+
 				Unit: microWatt
+
 				RW
 
-power[1-*]_cap_hyst		Margin of hysteresis built around capping and
+`power[1-*]_cap_hyst`
+				Margin of hysteresis built around capping and
 				notification.
+
 				Unit: microWatt
+
 				RW
 
-power[1-*]_cap_max		Maximum cap that can be set.
+`power[1-*]_cap_max`
+				Maximum cap that can be set.
+
 				Unit: microWatt
+
 				RO
 
-power[1-*]_cap_min		Minimum cap that can be set.
+`power[1-*]_cap_min`
+				Minimum cap that can be set.
+
 				Unit: microWatt
+
 				RO
 
-power[1-*]_max			Maximum power.
+`power[1-*]_max`
+				Maximum power.
+
 				Unit: microWatt
+
 				RW
 
-power[1-*]_crit			Critical maximum power.
+`power[1-*]_crit`
+				Critical maximum power.
+
 				If power rises to or above this limit, the
 				system is expected take drastic action to reduce
 				power consumption, such as a system shutdown or
 				a forced powerdown of some devices.
+
 				Unit: microWatt
+
 				RW
 
-power[1-*]_enable		Enable or disable the sensors.
+`power[1-*]_enable`
+				Enable or disable the sensors.
+
 				When disabled the sensor read will return
 				-ENODATA.
-				1: Enable
-				0: Disable
+
+				- 1: Enable
+				- 0: Disable
+
 				RW
 
 Also see the Alarms section for status flags associated with power readings.
 
-**********
-* Energy *
-**********
+******
+Energy
+******
+
+`energy[1-*]_input`
+				Cumulative energy use
 
-energy[1-*]_input		Cumulative energy use
 				Unit: microJoule
+
 				RO
 
-energy[1-*]_enable		Enable or disable the sensors.
+`energy[1-*]_enable`
+				Enable or disable the sensors.
+
 				When disabled the sensor read will return
 				-ENODATA.
-				1: Enable
-				0: Disable
+
+				- 1: Enable
+				- 0: Disable
+
 				RW
 
-************
-* Humidity *
-************
+********
+Humidity
+********
+
+`humidity[1-*]_input`
+				Humidity
 
-humidity[1-*]_input		Humidity
 				Unit: milli-percent (per cent mille, pcm)
+
 				RO
 
 
-humidity[1-*]_enable		Enable or disable the sensors
+`humidity[1-*]_enable`
+				Enable or disable the sensors
+
 				When disabled the sensor read will return
 				-ENODATA.
-				1: Enable
-				0: Disable
+
+				- 1: Enable
+				- 0: Disable
+
 				RW
 
-**********
-* Alarms *
-**********
+******
+Alarms
+******
 
 Each channel or limit may have an associated alarm file, containing a
 boolean value. 1 means than an alarm condition exists, 0 means no alarm.
@@ -645,67 +888,67 @@ Usually a given chip will either use channel-related alarms, or
 limit-related alarms, not both. The driver should just reflect the hardware
 implementation.
 
-in[0-*]_alarm
-curr[1-*]_alarm
-power[1-*]_alarm
-fan[1-*]_alarm
-temp[1-*]_alarm
-		Channel alarm
-		0: no alarm
-		1: alarm
-		RO
-
-OR
-
-in[0-*]_min_alarm
-in[0-*]_max_alarm
-in[0-*]_lcrit_alarm
-in[0-*]_crit_alarm
-curr[1-*]_min_alarm
-curr[1-*]_max_alarm
-curr[1-*]_lcrit_alarm
-curr[1-*]_crit_alarm
-power[1-*]_cap_alarm
-power[1-*]_max_alarm
-power[1-*]_crit_alarm
-fan[1-*]_min_alarm
-fan[1-*]_max_alarm
-temp[1-*]_min_alarm
-temp[1-*]_max_alarm
-temp[1-*]_lcrit_alarm
-temp[1-*]_crit_alarm
-temp[1-*]_emergency_alarm
-		Limit alarm
-		0: no alarm
-		1: alarm
-		RO
++-------------------------------+-----------------------+
+| **`in[0-*]_alarm`,		| Channel alarm		|
+| `curr[1-*]_alarm`,		|			|
+| `power[1-*]_alarm`,		|   - 0: no alarm	|
+| `fan[1-*]_alarm`,		|   - 1: alarm		|
+| `temp[1-*]_alarm`**		|			|
+|				|   RO			|
++-------------------------------+-----------------------+
+
+**OR**
+
++-------------------------------+-----------------------+
+| **`in[0-*]_min_alarm`,	| Limit alarm		|
+| `in[0-*]_max_alarm`,		|			|
+| `in[0-*]_lcrit_alarm`,	|   - 0: no alarm	|
+| `in[0-*]_crit_alarm`,		|   - 1: alarm		|
+| `curr[1-*]_min_alarm`,	|			|
+| `curr[1-*]_max_alarm`,	| RO			|
+| `curr[1-*]_lcrit_alarm`,	|			|
+| `curr[1-*]_crit_alarm`,	|			|
+| `power[1-*]_cap_alarm`,	|			|
+| `power[1-*]_max_alarm`,	|			|
+| `power[1-*]_crit_alarm`,	|			|
+| `fan[1-*]_min_alarm`,		|			|
+| `fan[1-*]_max_alarm`,		|			|
+| `temp[1-*]_min_alarm`,	|			|
+| `temp[1-*]_max_alarm`,	|			|
+| `temp[1-*]_lcrit_alarm`,	|			|
+| `temp[1-*]_crit_alarm`,	|			|
+| `temp[1-*]_emergency_alarm`**	|			|
++-------------------------------+-----------------------+
 
 Each input channel may have an associated fault file. This can be used
 to notify open diodes, unconnected fans etc. where the hardware
 supports it. When this boolean has value 1, the measurement for that
 channel should not be trusted.
 
-fan[1-*]_fault
-temp[1-*]_fault
+`fan[1-*]_fault` / `temp[1-*]_fault`
 		Input fault condition
-		0: no fault occurred
-		1: fault condition
+
+		- 0: no fault occurred
+		- 1: fault condition
+
 		RO
 
 Some chips also offer the possibility to get beeped when an alarm occurs:
 
-beep_enable	Master beep enable
-		0: no beeps
-		1: beeps
+`beep_enable`
+		Master beep enable
+
+		- 0: no beeps
+		- 1: beeps
+
 		RW
 
-in[0-*]_beep
-curr[1-*]_beep
-fan[1-*]_beep
-temp[1-*]_beep
+`in[0-*]_beep`, `curr[1-*]_beep`, `fan[1-*]_beep`, `temp[1-*]_beep`,
 		Channel beep
-		0: disable
-		1: enable
+
+		- 0: disable
+		- 1: enable
+
 		RW
 
 In theory, a chip could provide per-limit beep masking, but no such chip
@@ -715,56 +958,90 @@ Old drivers provided a different, non-standard interface to alarms and
 beeps. These interface files are deprecated, but will be kept around
 for compatibility reasons:
 
-alarms		Alarm bitmask.
+`alarms`
+		Alarm bitmask.
+
 		RO
+
 		Integer representation of one to four bytes.
+
 		A '1' bit means an alarm.
+
 		Chips should be programmed for 'comparator' mode so that
 		the alarm will 'come back' after you read the register
 		if it is still valid.
+
 		Generally a direct representation of a chip's internal
 		alarm registers; there is no standard for the position
 		of individual bits. For this reason, the use of this
 		interface file for new drivers is discouraged. Use
-		individual *_alarm and *_fault files instead.
+		`individual *_alarm` and `*_fault` files instead.
 		Bits are defined in kernel/include/sensors.h.
 
-beep_mask	Bitmask for beep.
+`beep_mask`
+		Bitmask for beep.
 		Same format as 'alarms' with the same bit locations,
 		use discouraged for the same reason. Use individual
-		*_beep files instead.
+		`*_beep` files instead.
 		RW
 
 
-***********************
-* Intrusion detection *
-***********************
+*******************
+Intrusion detection
+*******************
 
-intrusion[0-*]_alarm
+`intrusion[0-*]_alarm`
 		Chassis intrusion detection
-		0: OK
-		1: intrusion detected
+
+		- 0: OK
+		- 1: intrusion detected
+
 		RW
+
 		Contrary to regular alarm flags which clear themselves
 		automatically when read, this one sticks until cleared by
 		the user. This is done by writing 0 to the file. Writing
 		other values is unsupported.
 
-intrusion[0-*]_beep
+`intrusion[0-*]_beep`
 		Chassis intrusion beep
+
 		0: disable
 		1: enable
+
 		RW
 
+****************************
+Average sample configuration
+****************************
+
+Devices allowing for reading {in,power,curr,temp}_average values may export
+attributes for controlling number of samples used to compute average.
+
++--------------+---------------------------------------------------------------+
+| samples      | Sets number of average samples for all types of measurements. |
+|	       |							       |
+|	       | RW							       |
++--------------+---------------------------------------------------------------+
+| in_samples   | Sets number of average samples for specific type of	       |
+| power_samples| measurements.						       |
+| curr_samples |							       |
+| temp_samples | Note that on some devices it won't be possible to set all of  |
+|	       | them to different values so changing one might also change    |
+|	       | some others.						       |
+|	       |							       |
+|	       | RW							       |
++--------------+---------------------------------------------------------------+
 
 sysfs attribute writes interpretation
 -------------------------------------
 
 hwmon sysfs attributes always contain numbers, so the first thing to do is to
 convert the input to a number, there are 2 ways todo this depending whether
-the number can be negative or not:
-unsigned long u = simple_strtoul(buf, NULL, 10);
-long s = simple_strtol(buf, NULL, 10);
+the number can be negative or not::
+
+	unsigned long u = simple_strtoul(buf, NULL, 10);
+	long s = simple_strtol(buf, NULL, 10);
 
 With buf being the buffer with the user input being passed by the kernel.
 Notice that we do not use the second argument of strto[u]l, and thus cannot
@@ -789,13 +1066,13 @@ limits using clamp_val(value, min_limit, max_limit). If it is not continuous
 like for example a tempX_type, then when an invalid value is written,
 -EINVAL should be returned.
 
-Example1, temp1_max, register is a signed 8 bit value (-128 - 127 degrees):
+Example1, temp1_max, register is a signed 8 bit value (-128 - 127 degrees)::
 
 	long v = simple_strtol(buf, NULL, 10) / 1000;
 	v = clamp_val(v, -128, 127);
 	/* write v to register */
 
-Example2, fan divider setting, valid values 2, 4 and 8:
+Example2, fan divider setting, valid values 2, 4 and 8::
 
 	unsigned long v = simple_strtoul(buf, NULL, 10);
 
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/tc654 b/Documentation/hwmon/tc654.rst
index 47636a8077b4..ce546ee6dfed 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/tc654
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/tc654.rst
@@ -2,13 +2,16 @@ Kernel driver tc654
 ===================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Microchip TC654 and TC655
+
     Prefix: 'tc654'
-    Datasheet: http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/20001734C.pdf
+    Datasheet: http://ww1.m
+    icrochip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/20001734C.pdf
 
 Authors:
-        Chris Packham <chris.packham@alliedtelesis.co.nz>
-        Masahiko Iwamoto <iwamoto@allied-telesis.co.jp>
+      - Chris Packham <chris.packham@alliedtelesis.co.nz>
+      - Masahiko Iwamoto <iwamoto@allied-telesis.co.jp>
 
 Description
 -----------
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/tc74 b/Documentation/hwmon/tc74.rst
index 43027aad5f8e..f1764211c129 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/tc74
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/tc74.rst
@@ -2,8 +2,11 @@ Kernel driver tc74
 ====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
    * Microchip TC74
+
      Prefix: 'tc74'
+
      Datasheet: Publicly available at Microchip website.
 
 Description
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/thmc50 b/Documentation/hwmon/thmc50.rst
index 8a7772ade8d0..cfff3885287d 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/thmc50
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/thmc50.rst
@@ -2,30 +2,41 @@ Kernel driver thmc50
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Analog Devices ADM1022
+
     Prefix: 'adm1022'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2e
+
     Datasheet: http://www.analog.com/en/prod/0,2877,ADM1022,00.html
+
   * Texas Instruments THMC50
+
     Prefix: 'thmc50'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2e
-    Datasheet: http://www.ti.com/ 
+
+    Datasheet: http://www.ti.com/
+
 
 Author: Krzysztof Helt <krzysztof.h1@wp.pl>
 
 This driver was derived from the 2.4 kernel thmc50.c source file.
 
 Credits:
+
   thmc50.c (2.4 kernel):
-	Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>
-	Philip Edelbrock <phil@netroedge.com>
+
+	- Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>
+	- Philip Edelbrock <phil@netroedge.com>
 
 Module Parameters
 -----------------
 
 * adm1022_temp3: short array
-  List of adapter,address pairs to force chips into ADM1022 mode with
-  second remote temperature. This does not work for original THMC50 chips.
+    List of adapter,address pairs to force chips into ADM1022 mode with
+    second remote temperature. This does not work for original THMC50 chips.
 
 Description
 -----------
@@ -59,16 +70,20 @@ Driver Features
 
 The driver provides up to three temperatures:
 
-temp1		-- internal
-temp2		-- remote
-temp3		-- 2nd remote only for ADM1022
+temp1
+	- internal
+temp2
+	- remote
+temp3
+	- 2nd remote only for ADM1022
 
-pwm1		-- fan speed (0 = stop, 255 = full)
-pwm1_mode	-- always 0 (DC mode)
+pwm1
+	- fan speed (0 = stop, 255 = full)
+pwm1_mode
+	- always 0 (DC mode)
 
 The value of 0 for pwm1 also forces FAN_OFF signal from the chip,
 so it stops fans even if the value 0 into the ANALOG_OUT register does not.
 
 The driver was tested on Compaq AP550 with two ADM1022 chips (one works
 in the temp3 mode), five temperature readings and two fans.
-
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/tmp102 b/Documentation/hwmon/tmp102.rst
index 8454a7763122..b1f585531a88 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/tmp102
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/tmp102.rst
@@ -2,12 +2,17 @@ Kernel driver tmp102
 ====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Texas Instruments TMP102
+
     Prefix: 'tmp102'
+
     Addresses scanned: none
+
     Datasheet: http://focus.ti.com/docs/prod/folders/print/tmp102.html
 
 Author:
+
 	Steven King <sfking@fdwdc.com>
 
 Description
@@ -23,4 +28,4 @@ The TMP102 has a programmable update rate that can select between 8, 4, 1, and
 0.5 Hz. (Currently the driver only supports the default of 4 Hz).
 
 The driver provides the common sysfs-interface for temperatures (see
-Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface under Temperatures).
+Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface.rst under Temperatures).
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/tmp103 b/Documentation/hwmon/tmp103.rst
index ec00a15645ba..15d25806d585 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/tmp103
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/tmp103.rst
@@ -2,12 +2,17 @@ Kernel driver tmp103
 ====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Texas Instruments TMP103
+
     Prefix: 'tmp103'
+
     Addresses scanned: none
+
     Product info and datasheet: http://www.ti.com/product/tmp103
 
 Author:
+
 	Heiko Schocher <hs@denx.de>
 
 Description
@@ -22,7 +27,7 @@ Resolution: 8 Bits
 Accuracy: ±1°C Typ (–10°C to +100°C)
 
 The driver provides the common sysfs-interface for temperatures (see
-Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface under Temperatures).
+Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface.rst under Temperatures).
 
 Please refer how to instantiate this driver:
 Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/tmp108 b/Documentation/hwmon/tmp108.rst
index 25802df23010..5f4266a16cb2 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/tmp108
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/tmp108.rst
@@ -2,12 +2,17 @@ Kernel driver tmp108
 ====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Texas Instruments TMP108
+
     Prefix: 'tmp108'
+
     Addresses scanned: none
+
     Datasheet: http://www.ti.com/product/tmp108
 
 Author:
+
 	John Muir <john@jmuir.com>
 
 Description
@@ -33,4 +38,4 @@ and then the device is shut down automatically. (This driver only supports
 continuous mode.)
 
 The driver provides the common sysfs-interface for temperatures (see
-Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface under Temperatures).
+Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface.rst under Temperatures).
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/tmp401 b/Documentation/hwmon/tmp401.rst
index 2d9ca42213cf..6a05a0719bc7 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/tmp401
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/tmp401.rst
@@ -2,33 +2,59 @@ Kernel driver tmp401
 ====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Texas Instruments TMP401
+
     Prefix: 'tmp401'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c
+
     Datasheet: http://focus.ti.com/docs/prod/folders/print/tmp401.html
+
   * Texas Instruments TMP411
+
     Prefix: 'tmp411'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c, 0x4d, 0x4e
+
     Datasheet: http://focus.ti.com/docs/prod/folders/print/tmp411.html
+
   * Texas Instruments TMP431
+
     Prefix: 'tmp431'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c, 0x4d
+
     Datasheet: http://focus.ti.com/docs/prod/folders/print/tmp431.html
+
   * Texas Instruments TMP432
+
     Prefix: 'tmp432'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c, 0x4d
+
     Datasheet: http://focus.ti.com/docs/prod/folders/print/tmp432.html
+
   * Texas Instruments TMP435
+
     Prefix: 'tmp435'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f
+
     Datasheet: http://focus.ti.com/docs/prod/folders/print/tmp435.html
+
   * Texas Instruments TMP461
+
     Prefix: 'tmp461'
+
     Datasheet: http://www.ti.com/product/tmp461
 
+
+
 Authors:
-         Hans de Goede <hdegoede@redhat.com>
-	 Andre Prendel <andre.prendel@gmx.de>
+
+	- Hans de Goede <hdegoede@redhat.com>
+	- Andre Prendel <andre.prendel@gmx.de>
 
 Description
 -----------
@@ -42,7 +68,7 @@ supported by the driver so far, so using the default resolution of 0.5
 degree).
 
 The driver provides the common sysfs-interface for temperatures (see
-Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface under Temperatures).
+Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface.rst under Temperatures).
 
 The TMP411 and TMP431 chips are compatible with TMP401. TMP411 provides
 some additional features.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/tmp421 b/Documentation/hwmon/tmp421.rst
index 9e6fe5549ca1..1ba926a3605c 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/tmp421
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/tmp421.rst
@@ -2,28 +2,49 @@ Kernel driver tmp421
 ====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Texas Instruments TMP421
+
     Prefix: 'tmp421'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2a, 0x4c, 0x4d, 0x4e and 0x4f
+
     Datasheet: http://focus.ti.com/docs/prod/folders/print/tmp421.html
+
   * Texas Instruments TMP422
+
     Prefix: 'tmp422'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c, 0x4d, 0x4e and 0x4f
+
     Datasheet: http://focus.ti.com/docs/prod/folders/print/tmp421.html
+
   * Texas Instruments TMP423
+
     Prefix: 'tmp423'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c and 0x4d
+
     Datasheet: http://focus.ti.com/docs/prod/folders/print/tmp421.html
+
   * Texas Instruments TMP441
+
     Prefix: 'tmp441'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2a, 0x4c, 0x4d, 0x4e and 0x4f
+
     Datasheet: http://www.ti.com/product/tmp441
+
   * Texas Instruments TMP442
+
     Prefix: 'tmp442'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c and 0x4d
+
     Datasheet: http://www.ti.com/product/tmp442
 
 Authors:
+
 	Andre Prendel <andre.prendel@gmx.de>
 
 Description
@@ -40,5 +61,6 @@ for both the local and remote channels is 0.0625 degree C.
 The chips support only temperature measurement. The driver exports
 the temperature values via the following sysfs files:
 
-temp[1-4]_input
-temp[2-4]_fault
+**temp[1-4]_input**
+
+**temp[2-4]_fault**
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/tps40422 b/Documentation/hwmon/tps40422.rst
index 24bb0688d515..b691e30479dd 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/tps40422
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/tps40422.rst
@@ -2,9 +2,13 @@ Kernel driver tps40422
 ======================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * TI TPS40422
+
     Prefix: 'tps40422'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: http://www.ti.com/lit/gpn/tps40422
 
 Author: Zhu Laiwen <richard.zhu@nsn.com>
@@ -17,7 +21,7 @@ This driver supports TI TPS40422 Dual-Output or Two-Phase Synchronous Buck
 Controller with PMBus
 
 The driver is a client driver to the core PMBus driver.
-Please see Documentation/hwmon/pmbus for details on PMBus client drivers.
+Please see Documentation/hwmon/pmbus.rst for details on PMBus client drivers.
 
 
 Usage Notes
@@ -39,6 +43,7 @@ Sysfs entries
 
 The following attributes are supported.
 
+======================= =======================================================
 in[1-2]_label		"vout[1-2]"
 in[1-2]_input		Measured voltage. From READ_VOUT register.
 in[1-2]_alarm		voltage alarm.
@@ -46,19 +51,23 @@ in[1-2]_alarm		voltage alarm.
 curr[1-2]_input		Measured current. From READ_IOUT register.
 curr[1-2]_label		"iout[1-2]"
 curr1_max		Maximum current. From IOUT_OC_WARN_LIMIT register.
-curr1_crit		Critical maximum current. From IOUT_OC_FAULT_LIMIT register.
+curr1_crit		Critical maximum current. From IOUT_OC_FAULT_LIMIT
+			register.
 curr1_max_alarm		Current high alarm. From IOUT_OC_WARN_LIMIT status.
 curr1_crit_alarm	Current critical high alarm. From IOUT_OC_FAULT status.
 curr2_alarm		Current high alarm. From IOUT_OC_WARNING status.
 
-temp1_input		Measured temperature. From READ_TEMPERATURE_2 register on page 0.
+temp1_input		Measured temperature. From READ_TEMPERATURE_2 register
+			on page 0.
 temp1_max		Maximum temperature. From OT_WARN_LIMIT register.
 temp1_crit		Critical high temperature. From OT_FAULT_LIMIT register.
 temp1_max_alarm		Chip temperature high alarm. Set by comparing
-			READ_TEMPERATURE_2 on page 0 with OT_WARN_LIMIT if TEMP_OT_WARNING
-			status is set.
+			READ_TEMPERATURE_2 on page 0 with OT_WARN_LIMIT if
+			TEMP_OT_WARNING status is set.
 temp1_crit_alarm	Chip temperature critical high alarm. Set by comparing
-			READ_TEMPERATURE_2 on page 0 with OT_FAULT_LIMIT if TEMP_OT_FAULT
-			status is set.
-temp2_input		Measured temperature. From READ_TEMPERATURE_2 register on page 1.
+			READ_TEMPERATURE_2 on page 0 with OT_FAULT_LIMIT if
+			TEMP_OT_FAULT status is set.
+temp2_input		Measured temperature. From READ_TEMPERATURE_2 register
+			on page 1.
 temp2_alarm		Chip temperature alarm on page 1.
+======================= =======================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/twl4030-madc-hwmon b/Documentation/hwmon/twl4030-madc-hwmon.rst
index c3a3a5be10ad..22c885383b11 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/twl4030-madc-hwmon
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/twl4030-madc-hwmon.rst
@@ -1,8 +1,10 @@
 Kernel driver twl4030-madc
-=========================
+==========================
 
 Supported chips:
+
 	* Texas Instruments TWL4030
+
 	Prefix: 'twl4030-madc'
 
 
@@ -19,8 +21,9 @@ channels which can be used in different modes.
 
 See this table for the meaning of the different channels
 
+======= ==========================================================
 Channel Signal
-------------------------------------------
+======= ==========================================================
 0	Battery type(BTYPE)
 1	BCI: Battery temperature (BTEMP)
 2	GP analog input
@@ -37,6 +40,7 @@ Channel Signal
 13	Reserved
 14	Reserved
 15	VRUSB Supply/Speaker left/Speaker right polarization level
+======= ==========================================================
 
 
 The Sysfs nodes will represent the voltage in the units of mV,
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ucd9000 b/Documentation/hwmon/ucd9000.rst
index 262e713e60ff..ebc4f2b3bfea 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/ucd9000
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ucd9000.rst
@@ -2,15 +2,20 @@ Kernel driver ucd9000
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * TI UCD90120, UCD90124, UCD90160, UCD9090, and UCD90910
+
     Prefixes: 'ucd90120', 'ucd90124', 'ucd90160', 'ucd9090', 'ucd90910'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheets:
-	http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd90120.pdf
-	http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd90124.pdf
-	http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd90160.pdf
-	http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd9090.pdf
-	http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd90910.pdf
+
+	- http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd90120.pdf
+	- http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd90124.pdf
+	- http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd90160.pdf
+	- http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd9090.pdf
+	- http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd90910.pdf
 
 Author: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
 
@@ -52,7 +57,7 @@ system-health monitor. The device integrates a 12-bit ADC for monitoring up to
 13 power-supply voltage, current, or temperature inputs.
 
 This driver is a client driver to the core PMBus driver. Please see
-Documentation/hwmon/pmbus for details on PMBus client drivers.
+Documentation/hwmon/pmbus.rst for details on PMBus client drivers.
 
 
 Usage Notes
@@ -67,7 +72,7 @@ Platform data support
 ---------------------
 
 The driver supports standard PMBus driver platform data. Please see
-Documentation/hwmon/pmbus for details.
+Documentation/hwmon/pmbus.rst for details.
 
 
 Sysfs entries
@@ -76,23 +81,28 @@ Sysfs entries
 The following attributes are supported. Limits are read-write; all other
 attributes are read-only.
 
+======================= ========================================================
 in[1-12]_label		"vout[1-12]".
 in[1-12]_input		Measured voltage. From READ_VOUT register.
 in[1-12]_min		Minimum Voltage. From VOUT_UV_WARN_LIMIT register.
 in[1-12]_max		Maximum voltage. From VOUT_OV_WARN_LIMIT register.
 in[1-12]_lcrit		Critical minimum Voltage. VOUT_UV_FAULT_LIMIT register.
-in[1-12]_crit		Critical maximum voltage. From VOUT_OV_FAULT_LIMIT register.
+in[1-12]_crit		Critical maximum voltage. From VOUT_OV_FAULT_LIMIT
+			register.
 in[1-12]_min_alarm	Voltage low alarm. From VOLTAGE_UV_WARNING status.
 in[1-12]_max_alarm	Voltage high alarm. From VOLTAGE_OV_WARNING status.
-in[1-12]_lcrit_alarm	Voltage critical low alarm. From VOLTAGE_UV_FAULT status.
-in[1-12]_crit_alarm	Voltage critical high alarm. From VOLTAGE_OV_FAULT status.
+in[1-12]_lcrit_alarm	Voltage critical low alarm. From VOLTAGE_UV_FAULT
+			status.
+in[1-12]_crit_alarm	Voltage critical high alarm. From VOLTAGE_OV_FAULT
+			status.
 
 curr[1-12]_label	"iout[1-12]".
 curr[1-12]_input	Measured current. From READ_IOUT register.
 curr[1-12]_max		Maximum current. From IOUT_OC_WARN_LIMIT register.
-curr[1-12]_lcrit	Critical minimum output current. From IOUT_UC_FAULT_LIMIT
+curr[1-12]_lcrit	Critical minimum output current. From
+			IOUT_UC_FAULT_LIMIT register.
+curr[1-12]_crit		Critical maximum current. From IOUT_OC_FAULT_LIMIT
 			register.
-curr[1-12]_crit		Critical maximum current. From IOUT_OC_FAULT_LIMIT register.
 curr[1-12]_max_alarm	Current high alarm. From IOUT_OC_WARNING status.
 curr[1-12]_crit_alarm	Current critical high alarm. From IOUT_OC_FAULT status.
 
@@ -116,3 +126,4 @@ fan[1-4]_fault		Fan fault.
 			created only for enabled fans.
 			Note that even though UCD90910 supports up to 10 fans,
 			only up to four fans are currently supported.
+======================= ========================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ucd9200 b/Documentation/hwmon/ucd9200.rst
index 1e8060e631bd..b819dfd75f71 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/ucd9200
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ucd9200.rst
@@ -2,18 +2,23 @@ Kernel driver ucd9200
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * TI UCD9220, UCD9222, UCD9224, UCD9240, UCD9244, UCD9246, and UCD9248
+
     Prefixes: 'ucd9220', 'ucd9222', 'ucd9224', 'ucd9240', 'ucd9244', 'ucd9246',
-	'ucd9248'
+    'ucd9248'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheets:
-	http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd9220.pdf
-	http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd9222.pdf
-	http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd9224.pdf
-	http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd9240.pdf
-	http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd9244.pdf
-	http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd9246.pdf
-	http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd9248.pdf
+
+	- http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd9220.pdf
+	- http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd9222.pdf
+	- http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd9224.pdf
+	- http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd9240.pdf
+	- http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd9244.pdf
+	- http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd9246.pdf
+	- http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd9248.pdf
 
 Author: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
 
@@ -28,7 +33,7 @@ dedicated circuitry for DC/DC loop management with flash memory and a serial
 interface to support configuration, monitoring and management.
 
 This driver is a client driver to the core PMBus driver. Please see
-Documentation/hwmon/pmbus for details on PMBus client drivers.
+Documentation/hwmon/pmbus.rst for details on PMBus client drivers.
 
 
 Usage Notes
@@ -43,7 +48,7 @@ Platform data support
 ---------------------
 
 The driver supports standard PMBus driver platform data. Please see
-Documentation/hwmon/pmbus for details.
+Documentation/hwmon/pmbus.rst for details.
 
 
 Sysfs entries
@@ -52,12 +57,14 @@ Sysfs entries
 The following attributes are supported. Limits are read-write; all other
 attributes are read-only.
 
+======================= ========================================================
 in1_label		"vin".
 in1_input		Measured voltage. From READ_VIN register.
 in1_min			Minimum Voltage. From VIN_UV_WARN_LIMIT register.
 in1_max			Maximum voltage. From VIN_OV_WARN_LIMIT register.
 in1_lcrit		Critical minimum Voltage. VIN_UV_FAULT_LIMIT register.
-in1_crit		Critical maximum voltage. From VIN_OV_FAULT_LIMIT register.
+in1_crit		Critical maximum voltage. From VIN_OV_FAULT_LIMIT
+			register.
 in1_min_alarm		Voltage low alarm. From VIN_UV_WARNING status.
 in1_max_alarm		Voltage high alarm. From VIN_OV_WARNING status.
 in1_lcrit_alarm		Voltage critical low alarm. From VIN_UV_FAULT status.
@@ -68,11 +75,14 @@ in[2-5]_input		Measured voltage. From READ_VOUT register.
 in[2-5]_min		Minimum Voltage. From VOUT_UV_WARN_LIMIT register.
 in[2-5]_max		Maximum voltage. From VOUT_OV_WARN_LIMIT register.
 in[2-5]_lcrit		Critical minimum Voltage. VOUT_UV_FAULT_LIMIT register.
-in[2-5]_crit		Critical maximum voltage. From VOUT_OV_FAULT_LIMIT register.
+in[2-5]_crit		Critical maximum voltage. From VOUT_OV_FAULT_LIMIT
+			register.
 in[2-5]_min_alarm	Voltage low alarm. From VOLTAGE_UV_WARNING status.
 in[2-5]_max_alarm	Voltage high alarm. From VOLTAGE_OV_WARNING status.
-in[2-5]_lcrit_alarm	Voltage critical low alarm. From VOLTAGE_UV_FAULT status.
-in[2-5]_crit_alarm	Voltage critical high alarm. From VOLTAGE_OV_FAULT status.
+in[2-5]_lcrit_alarm	Voltage critical low alarm. From VOLTAGE_UV_FAULT
+			status.
+in[2-5]_crit_alarm	Voltage critical high alarm. From VOLTAGE_OV_FAULT
+			status.
 
 curr1_label		"iin".
 curr1_input		Measured current. From READ_IIN register.
@@ -80,9 +90,10 @@ curr1_input		Measured current. From READ_IIN register.
 curr[2-5]_label		"iout[1-4]".
 curr[2-5]_input		Measured current. From READ_IOUT register.
 curr[2-5]_max		Maximum current. From IOUT_OC_WARN_LIMIT register.
-curr[2-5]_lcrit		Critical minimum output current. From IOUT_UC_FAULT_LIMIT
+curr[2-5]_lcrit		Critical minimum output current. From
+			IOUT_UC_FAULT_LIMIT register.
+curr[2-5]_crit		Critical maximum current. From IOUT_OC_FAULT_LIMIT
 			register.
-curr[2-5]_crit		Critical maximum current. From IOUT_OC_FAULT_LIMIT register.
 curr[2-5]_max_alarm	Current high alarm. From IOUT_OC_WARNING status.
 curr[2-5]_crit_alarm	Current critical high alarm. From IOUT_OC_FAULT status.
 
@@ -97,7 +108,7 @@ power[2-5]_label	"pout[1-4]"
 			rails. See chip datasheets for details.
 
 temp[1-5]_input		Measured temperatures. From READ_TEMPERATURE_1 and
-		        READ_TEMPERATURE_2 registers.
+			READ_TEMPERATURE_2 registers.
 			temp1 is the chip internal temperature. temp[2-5] are
 			rail temperatures.  temp[2-5] attributes are only
 			created for enabled rails. See chip datasheets for
@@ -110,3 +121,4 @@ temp[1-5]_crit_alarm	Temperature critical high alarm.
 fan1_input		Fan RPM. ucd9240 only.
 fan1_alarm		Fan alarm. ucd9240 only.
 fan1_fault		Fan fault. ucd9240 only.
+======================= ========================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/userspace-tools b/Documentation/hwmon/userspace-tools.rst
index 9865aeedc58f..bf3797c8e734 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/userspace-tools
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/userspace-tools.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,6 @@
+Userspace tools
+===============
+
 Introduction
 ------------
 
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/vexpress b/Documentation/hwmon/vexpress.rst
index 557d6d5ad90d..8c861c8151ac 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/vexpress
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/vexpress.rst
@@ -2,14 +2,21 @@ Kernel driver vexpress
 ======================
 
 Supported systems:
+
   * ARM Ltd. Versatile Express platform
+
     Prefix: 'vexpress'
+
     Datasheets:
+
       * "Hardware Description" sections of the Technical Reference Manuals
-        for the Versatile Express boards:
-        http://infocenter.arm.com/help/topic/com.arm.doc.subset.boards.express/index.html
+	for the Versatile Express boards:
+
+	- http://infocenter.arm.com/help/topic/com.arm.doc.subset.boards.express/index.html
+
       * Section "4.4.14. System Configuration registers" of the V2M-P1 TRM:
-        http://infocenter.arm.com/help/index.jsp?topic=/com.arm.doc.dui0447-/index.html
+
+	- http://infocenter.arm.com/help/index.jsp?topic=/com.arm.doc.dui0447-/index.html
 
 Author: Pawel Moll
 
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/via686a b/Documentation/hwmon/via686a.rst
index e5f90ab5c48d..a343c35df740 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/via686a
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/via686a.rst
@@ -2,29 +2,35 @@ Kernel driver via686a
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Via VT82C686A, VT82C686B  Southbridge Integrated Hardware Monitor
+
     Prefix: 'via686a'
+
     Addresses scanned: ISA in PCI-space encoded address
+
     Datasheet: On request through web form (http://www.via.com.tw/en/resources/download-center/)
 
 Authors:
-        Kyösti Mälkki <kmalkki@cc.hut.fi>,
-        Mark D. Studebaker <mdsxyz123@yahoo.com>
-        Bob Dougherty <bobd@stanford.edu>
-        (Some conversion-factor data were contributed by
-        Jonathan Teh Soon Yew <j.teh@iname.com>
-        and Alex van Kaam <darkside@chello.nl>.)
+	- Kyösti Mälkki <kmalkki@cc.hut.fi>,
+	- Mark D. Studebaker <mdsxyz123@yahoo.com>
+	- Bob Dougherty <bobd@stanford.edu>
+	- (Some conversion-factor data were contributed by
+	- Jonathan Teh Soon Yew <j.teh@iname.com>
+	- and Alex van Kaam <darkside@chello.nl>.)
 
 Module Parameters
 -----------------
 
+======================= =======================================================
 force_addr=0xaddr       Set the I/O base address. Useful for boards that
-                        don't set the address in the BIOS. Look for a BIOS
-                        upgrade before resorting to this. Does not do a
-                        PCI force; the via686a must still be present in lspci.
-                        Don't use this unless the driver complains that the
-                        base address is not set.
-                        Example: 'modprobe via686a force_addr=0x6000'
+			don't set the address in the BIOS. Look for a BIOS
+			upgrade before resorting to this. Does not do a
+			PCI force; the via686a must still be present in lspci.
+			Don't use this unless the driver complains that the
+			base address is not set.
+			Example: 'modprobe via686a force_addr=0x6000'
+======================= =======================================================
 
 Description
 -----------
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/vt1211 b/Documentation/hwmon/vt1211.rst
index 77fa633b97a8..ddbcde7dd642 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/vt1211
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/vt1211.rst
@@ -2,9 +2,13 @@ Kernel driver vt1211
 ====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * VIA VT1211
+
     Prefix: 'vt1211'
+
     Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super-I/O config space
+
     Datasheet: Provided by VIA upon request and under NDA
 
 Authors: Juerg Haefliger <juergh@gmail.com>
@@ -19,14 +23,17 @@ technical support.
 Module Parameters
 -----------------
 
-* uch_config: int	Override the BIOS default universal channel (UCH)
+
+* uch_config: int
+			Override the BIOS default universal channel (UCH)
 			configuration for channels 1-5.
 			Legal values are in the range of 0-31. Bit 0 maps to
 			UCH1, bit 1 maps to UCH2 and so on. Setting a bit to 1
 			enables the thermal input of that particular UCH and
 			setting a bit to 0 enables the voltage input.
 
-* int_mode: int		Override the BIOS default temperature interrupt mode.
+* int_mode: int
+			Override the BIOS default temperature interrupt mode.
 			The only possible value is 0 which forces interrupt
 			mode 0. In this mode, any pending interrupt is cleared
 			when the status register is read but is regenerated as
@@ -55,8 +62,9 @@ connected to the PWM outputs of the VT1211 :-().
 The following table shows the relationship between the vt1211 inputs and the
 sysfs nodes.
 
+=============== ============== =========== ================================
 Sensor          Voltage Mode   Temp Mode   Default Use (from the datasheet)
-------          ------------   ---------   --------------------------------
+=============== ============== =========== ================================
 Reading 1                      temp1       Intel thermal diode
 Reading 3                      temp2       Internal thermal diode
 UCH1/Reading2   in0            temp3       NTC type thermistor
@@ -65,6 +73,7 @@ UCH3            in2            temp5       VccP (processor core)
 UCH4            in3            temp6       +5V
 UCH5            in4            temp7       +12V
 +3.3V           in5                        Internal VCC (+3.3V)
+=============== ============== =========== ================================
 
 
 Voltage Monitoring
@@ -82,19 +91,22 @@ follows. And this is of course totally dependent on the actual board
 implementation :-) You will have to find documentation for your own
 motherboard and edit sensors.conf accordingly.
 
-                                      Expected
+============= ====== ====== ========= ============
+				      Expected
 Voltage       R1     R2     Divider   Raw Value
------------------------------------------------
+============= ====== ====== ========= ============
 +2.5V         2K     10K    1.2       2083 mV
-VccP          ---    ---    1.0       1400 mV (1)
+VccP          ---    ---    1.0       1400 mV [1]_
 +5V           14K    10K    2.4       2083 mV
 +12V          47K    10K    5.7       2105 mV
-+3.3V (int)   2K     3.4K   1.588     3300 mV (2)
++3.3V (int)   2K     3.4K   1.588     3300 mV [2]_
 +3.3V (ext)   6.8K   10K    1.68      1964 mV
+============= ====== ====== ========= ============
+
+.. [1] Depending on the CPU (1.4V is for a VIA C3 Nehemiah).
 
-(1) Depending on the CPU (1.4V is for a VIA C3 Nehemiah).
-(2) R1 and R2 for 3.3V (int) are internal to the VT1211 chip and the driver
-    performs the scaling and returns the properly scaled voltage value.
+.. [2] R1 and R2 for 3.3V (int) are internal to the VT1211 chip and the driver
+       performs the scaling and returns the properly scaled voltage value.
 
 Each measured voltage has an associated low and high limit which triggers an
 alarm when crossed.
@@ -124,35 +136,37 @@ compute temp1 (@-Offset)/Gain, (@*Gain)+Offset
 According to the VIA VT1211 BIOS porting guide, the following gain and offset
 values should be used:
 
+=============== ======== ===========
 Diode Type      Offset   Gain
-----------      ------   ----
+=============== ======== ===========
 Intel CPU       88.638   0.9528
-                65.000   0.9686   *)
+		65.000   0.9686 [3]_
 VIA C3 Ezra     83.869   0.9528
 VIA C3 Ezra-T   73.869   0.9528
+=============== ======== ===========
 
-*) This is the formula from the lm_sensors 2.10.0 sensors.conf file. I don't
-know where it comes from or how it was derived, it's just listed here for
-completeness.
+.. [3] This is the formula from the lm_sensors 2.10.0 sensors.conf file. I don't
+       know where it comes from or how it was derived, it's just listed here for
+       completeness.
 
 Temp3-temp7 support NTC thermistors. For these channels, the driver returns
 the voltages as seen at the individual pins of UCH1-UCH5. The voltage at the
 pin (Vpin) is formed by a voltage divider made of the thermistor (Rth) and a
-scaling resistor (Rs):
+scaling resistor (Rs)::
 
-Vpin = 2200 * Rth / (Rs + Rth)   (2200 is the ADC max limit of 2200 mV)
+  Vpin = 2200 * Rth / (Rs + Rth)   (2200 is the ADC max limit of 2200 mV)
 
 The equation for the thermistor is as follows (google it if you want to know
-more about it):
+more about it)::
 
-Rth = Ro * exp(B * (1 / T - 1 / To))   (To is 298.15K (25C) and Ro is the
-                                        nominal resistance at 25C)
+  Rth = Ro * exp(B * (1 / T - 1 / To))   (To is 298.15K (25C) and Ro is the
+					  nominal resistance at 25C)
 
 Mingling the above two equations and assuming Rs = Ro and B = 3435 yields the
-following formula for sensors.conf:
+following formula for sensors.conf::
 
-compute tempx 1 / (1 / 298.15 - (` (2200 / @ - 1)) / 3435) - 273.15,
-              2200 / (1 + (^ (3435 / 298.15 - 3435 / (273.15 + @))))
+  compute tempx 1 / (1 / 298.15 - (` (2200 / @ - 1)) / 3435) - 273.15,
+		2200 / (1 + (^ (3435 / 298.15 - 3435 / (273.15 + @))))
 
 
 Fan Speed Control
@@ -176,31 +190,37 @@ registers in the VT1211 and programming one set is sufficient (actually only
 the first set pwm1_auto_point[1-4]_temp is writable, the second set is
 read-only).
 
+========================== =========================================
 PWM Auto Point             PWM Output Duty-Cycle
-------------------------------------------------
+========================== =========================================
 pwm[1-2]_auto_point4_pwm   full speed duty-cycle (hard-wired to 255)
 pwm[1-2]_auto_point3_pwm   high speed duty-cycle
 pwm[1-2]_auto_point2_pwm   low speed duty-cycle
 pwm[1-2]_auto_point1_pwm   off duty-cycle (hard-wired to 0)
+========================== =========================================
 
+==========================  =================
 Temp Auto Point             Thermal Threshold
----------------------------------------------
+==========================  =================
 pwm[1-2]_auto_point4_temp   full speed temp
 pwm[1-2]_auto_point3_temp   high speed temp
 pwm[1-2]_auto_point2_temp   low speed temp
 pwm[1-2]_auto_point1_temp   off temp
+==========================  =================
 
 Long story short, the controller implements the following algorithm to set the
 PWM output duty-cycle based on the input temperature:
 
-Thermal Threshold             Output Duty-Cycle
-                    (Rising Temp)           (Falling Temp)
-----------------------------------------------------------
-                    full speed duty-cycle   full speed duty-cycle
+=================== ======================= ========================
+Thermal Threshold   Output Duty-Cycle       Output Duty-Cycle
+		    (Rising Temp)           (Falling Temp)
+=================== ======================= ========================
+-                   full speed duty-cycle   full speed duty-cycle
 full speed temp
-                    high speed duty-cycle   full speed duty-cycle
+-		    high speed duty-cycle   full speed duty-cycle
 high speed temp
-                    low speed duty-cycle    high speed duty-cycle
+-		    low speed duty-cycle    high speed duty-cycle
 low speed temp
-                    off duty-cycle          low speed duty-cycle
+-		    off duty-cycle          low speed duty-cycle
 off temp
+=================== ======================= ========================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83627ehf b/Documentation/hwmon/w83627ehf.rst
index 735c42a85ead..74d19ef11e1f 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/w83627ehf
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83627ehf.rst
@@ -2,45 +2,79 @@ Kernel driver w83627ehf
 =======================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Winbond W83627EHF/EHG (ISA access ONLY)
+
     Prefix: 'w83627ehf'
+
     Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers
+
     Datasheet: not available
+
   * Winbond W83627DHG
+
     Prefix: 'w83627dhg'
+
     Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers
+
     Datasheet: not available
+
   * Winbond W83627DHG-P
+
     Prefix: 'w83627dhg'
+
     Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers
+
     Datasheet: not available
+
   * Winbond W83627UHG
+
     Prefix: 'w83627uhg'
+
     Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers
+
     Datasheet: available from www.nuvoton.com
+
   * Winbond W83667HG
+
     Prefix: 'w83667hg'
+
     Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers
+
     Datasheet: not available
+
   * Winbond W83667HG-B
+
     Prefix: 'w83667hg'
+
     Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers
+
     Datasheet: Available from Nuvoton upon request
+
   * Nuvoton NCT6775F/W83667HG-I
+
     Prefix: 'nct6775'
+
     Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers
+
     Datasheet: Available from Nuvoton upon request
+
   * Nuvoton NCT6776F
+
     Prefix: 'nct6776'
+
     Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers
+
     Datasheet: Available from Nuvoton upon request
 
+
 Authors:
-        Jean Delvare <jdelvare@suse.de>
-        Yuan Mu (Winbond)
-        Rudolf Marek <r.marek@assembler.cz>
-        David Hubbard <david.c.hubbard@gmail.com>
-        Gong Jun <JGong@nuvoton.com>
+
+	- Jean Delvare <jdelvare@suse.de>
+	- Yuan Mu (Winbond)
+	- Rudolf Marek <r.marek@assembler.cz>
+	- David Hubbard <david.c.hubbard@gmail.com>
+	- Gong Jun <JGong@nuvoton.com>
 
 Description
 -----------
@@ -85,25 +119,30 @@ predefined temperature range. If the temperature goes out of range, fan
 is driven slower/faster to reach the predefined range again.
 
 The mode works for fan1-fan4. Mapping of temperatures to pwm outputs is as
-follows:
+follows::
 
-temp1 -> pwm1
-temp2 -> pwm2
-temp3 -> pwm3 (not on 627UHG)
-prog  -> pwm4 (not on 667HG and 667HG-B; the programmable setting is not
-	       supported by the driver)
+  temp1 -> pwm1
+  temp2 -> pwm2
+  temp3 -> pwm3 (not on 627UHG)
+  prog  -> pwm4 (not on 667HG and 667HG-B; the programmable setting is not
+		 supported by the driver)
 
 /sys files
 ----------
 
-name - this is a standard hwmon device entry, it contains the name of
-       the device (see the prefix in the list of supported devices at
-       the top of this file)
+name
+	this is a standard hwmon device entry, it contains the name of
+	the device (see the prefix in the list of supported devices at
+	the top of this file)
+
+pwm[1-4]
+	this file stores PWM duty cycle or DC value (fan speed) in range:
 
-pwm[1-4] - this file stores PWM duty cycle or DC value (fan speed) in range:
 	   0 (stop) to 255 (full)
 
-pwm[1-4]_enable - this file controls mode of fan/temperature control:
+pwm[1-4]_enable
+	this file controls mode of fan/temperature control:
+
 	* 1 Manual mode, write to pwm file any value 0-255 (full speed)
 	* 2 "Thermal Cruise" mode
 	* 3 "Fan Speed Cruise" mode
@@ -121,33 +160,43 @@ pwm[1-4]_enable - this file controls mode of fan/temperature control:
 	returned when reading pwm attributes is unrelated to SmartFan IV
 	operation.
 
-pwm[1-4]_mode - controls if output is PWM or DC level
-        * 0 DC output (0 - 12v)
-        * 1 PWM output
+pwm[1-4]_mode
+	controls if output is PWM or DC level
+
+	* 0 DC output (0 - 12v)
+	* 1 PWM output
 
 Thermal Cruise mode
 -------------------
 
 If the temperature is in the range defined by:
 
-pwm[1-4]_target    - set target temperature, unit millidegree Celsius
-		     (range 0 - 127000)
-pwm[1-4]_tolerance - tolerance, unit millidegree Celsius (range 0 - 15000)
+pwm[1-4]_target
+		   set target temperature, unit millidegree Celsius
+		   (range 0 - 127000)
+pwm[1-4]_tolerance
+		   tolerance, unit millidegree Celsius (range 0 - 15000)
 
 there are no changes to fan speed. Once the temperature leaves the interval,
 fan speed increases (temp is higher) or decreases if lower than desired.
 There are defined steps and times, but not exported by the driver yet.
 
-pwm[1-4]_min_output - minimum fan speed (range 1 - 255), when the temperature
-                      is below defined range.
-pwm[1-4]_stop_time  - how many milliseconds [ms] must elapse to switch
-                      corresponding fan off. (when the temperature was below
-                      defined range).
-pwm[1-4]_start_output-minimum fan speed (range 1 - 255) when spinning up
-pwm[1-4]_step_output- rate of fan speed change (1 - 255)
-pwm[1-4]_stop_output- minimum fan speed (range 1 - 255) when spinning down
-pwm[1-4]_max_output - maximum fan speed (range 1 - 255), when the temperature
-                      is above defined range.
+pwm[1-4]_min_output
+		   minimum fan speed (range 1 - 255), when the temperature
+		   is below defined range.
+pwm[1-4]_stop_time
+		   how many milliseconds [ms] must elapse to switch
+		   corresponding fan off. (when the temperature was below
+		   defined range).
+pwm[1-4]_start_output
+		   minimum fan speed (range 1 - 255) when spinning up
+pwm[1-4]_step_output
+		   rate of fan speed change (1 - 255)
+pwm[1-4]_stop_output
+		   minimum fan speed (range 1 - 255) when spinning down
+pwm[1-4]_max_output
+		   maximum fan speed (range 1 - 255), when the temperature
+		   is above defined range.
 
 Note: last six functions are influenced by other control bits, not yet exported
       by the driver, so a change might not have any effect.
@@ -161,26 +210,35 @@ different power-on default values, but BIOS should already be loading
 appropriate defaults. Note that bank selection must be performed as is currently
 done in the driver for all register addresses.
 
-0x49:  only on DHG, selects temperature source for AUX fan, CPU fan0
-0x4a:  not completely documented for the EHF and the DHG documentation assigns
-       different behavior to bits 7 and 6, including extending the temperature
-       input selection to SmartFan I, not just SmartFan III. Testing on the EHF
-       will reveal whether they are compatible or not.
-
-0x58:  Chip ID: 0xa1=EHF 0xc1=DHG
-0x5e:  only on DHG, has bits to enable "current mode" temperature detection and
-       critical temperature protection
-0x45b: only on EHF, bit 3, vin4 alarm (EHF supports 10 inputs, only 9 on DHG)
-0x552: only on EHF, vin4
-0x558: only on EHF, vin4 high limit
-0x559: only on EHF, vin4 low limit
-0x6b:  only on DHG, SYS fan critical temperature
-0x6c:  only on DHG, CPU fan0 critical temperature
-0x6d:  only on DHG, AUX fan critical temperature
-0x6e:  only on DHG, CPU fan1 critical temperature
-
-0x50-0x55 and 0x650-0x657 are marked "Test Register" for the EHF, but "Reserved
-       Register" for the DHG
+========================= =====================================================
+Register(s)		  Meaning
+========================= =====================================================
+0x49                      only on DHG, selects temperature source for AUX fan,
+			  CPU fan0
+0x4a                      not completely documented for the EHF and the DHG
+			  documentation assigns different behavior to bits 7
+			  and 6, including extending the temperature input
+			  selection to SmartFan I, not just SmartFan III.
+			  Testing on the EHF will reveal whether they are
+			  compatible or not.
+0x58                      Chip ID: 0xa1=EHF 0xc1=DHG
+0x5e                      only on DHG, has bits to enable "current mode"
+			  temperature detection and critical temperature
+			  protection
+0x45b                     only on EHF, bit 3, vin4 alarm (EHF supports 10
+			  inputs, only 9 on DHG)
+0x552                     only on EHF, vin4
+0x558                     only on EHF, vin4 high limit
+0x559                     only on EHF, vin4 low limit
+0x6b                      only on DHG, SYS fan critical temperature
+0x6c                      only on DHG, CPU fan0 critical temperature
+0x6d                      only on DHG, AUX fan critical temperature
+0x6e                      only on DHG, CPU fan1 critical temperature
+0x50-0x55 and 0x650-0x657 marked as:
+
+			    - "Test Register" for the EHF
+			    - "Reserved Register" for the DHG
+========================= =====================================================
 
 The DHG also supports PECI, where the DHG queries Intel CPU temperatures, and
 the ICH8 southbridge gets that data via PECI from the DHG, so that the
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83627hf b/Documentation/hwmon/w83627hf.rst
index 8432e1118173..d1406c28dee7 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/w83627hf
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83627hf.rst
@@ -20,10 +20,10 @@ Supported chips:
     Datasheet: Provided by Winbond on request(http://www.winbond.com/hq/enu)
 
 Authors:
-        Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>,
-        Philip Edelbrock <phil@netroedge.com>,
-        Mark Studebaker <mdsxyz123@yahoo.com>,
-        Bernhard C. Schrenk <clemy@clemy.org>
+	Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>,
+	Philip Edelbrock <phil@netroedge.com>,
+	Mark Studebaker <mdsxyz123@yahoo.com>,
+	Bernhard C. Schrenk <clemy@clemy.org>
 
 Module Parameters
 -----------------
@@ -52,8 +52,8 @@ If you really want i2c accesses for these Super I/O chips,
 use the w83781d driver. However this is not the preferred method
 now that this ISA driver has been developed.
 
-The w83627_HF_ uses pins 110-106 as VID0-VID4. The w83627_THF_ uses the
-same pins as GPIO[0:4]. Technically, the w83627_THF_ does not support a
+The `w83627_HF_` uses pins 110-106 as VID0-VID4. The `w83627_THF_` uses the
+same pins as GPIO[0:4]. Technically, the `w83627_THF_` does not support a
 VID reading. However the two chips have the identical 128 pin package. So,
 it is possible or even likely for a w83627thf to have the VID signals routed
 to these pins despite their not being labeled for that purpose. Therefore,
@@ -75,19 +75,23 @@ module parameter is gone for technical reasons. If you need this feature,
 you can obtain the same result by using the isaset tool (part of
 lm-sensors) before loading the driver:
 
-# Enter the Super I/O config space
-isaset -y -f 0x2e 0x87
-isaset -y -f 0x2e 0x87
+# Enter the Super I/O config space::
 
-# Select the hwmon logical device
-isaset -y 0x2e 0x2f 0x07 0x0b
+	isaset -y -f 0x2e 0x87
+	isaset -y -f 0x2e 0x87
 
-# Set the base I/O address (to 0x290 in this example)
-isaset -y 0x2e 0x2f 0x60 0x02
-isaset -y 0x2e 0x2f 0x61 0x90
+# Select the hwmon logical device::
 
-# Exit the Super-I/O config space
-isaset -y -f 0x2e 0xaa
+	isaset -y 0x2e 0x2f 0x07 0x0b
+
+# Set the base I/O address (to 0x290 in this example)::
+
+	isaset -y 0x2e 0x2f 0x60 0x02
+	isaset -y 0x2e 0x2f 0x61 0x90
+
+# Exit the Super-I/O config space::
+
+	isaset -y -f 0x2e 0xaa
 
 The above sequence assumes a Super-I/O config space at 0x2e/0x2f, but
 0x4e/0x4f is also possible.
@@ -97,18 +101,23 @@ Voltage pin mapping
 
 Here is a summary of the voltage pin mapping for the W83627THF. This
 can be useful to convert data provided by board manufacturers into
-working libsensors configuration statements.
-
-    W83627THF		|
-  Pin	| Name		| Register	| Sysfs attribute
------------------------------------------------------
-  100	| CPUVCORE	| 20h		| in0
-   99	| VIN0		| 21h		| in1
-   98	| VIN1		| 22h		| in2
-   97	| VIN2		| 24h		| in4
-  114	| AVCC		| 23h		| in3
-   61	| 5VSB		| 50h (bank 5)	| in7
-   74	| VBAT		| 51h (bank 5)	| in8
+working libsensors configuration statements:
+
+
+- W83627THF
+
+
+  ======== =============== =============== ===============
+  Pin	   Name		   Register	   Sysfs attribute
+  ======== =============== =============== ===============
+    100	   CPUVCORE	   20h		   in0
+     99	   VIN0		   21h		   in1
+     98	   VIN1		   22h		   in2
+     97	   VIN2		   24h		   in4
+    114	   AVCC		   23h		   in3
+     61	   5VSB		   50h (bank 5)	   in7
+     74	   VBAT		   51h (bank 5)	   in8
+  ======== =============== =============== ===============
 
 For other supported devices, you'll have to take the hard path and
 look up the information in the datasheet yourself (and then add it
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83773g b/Documentation/hwmon/w83773g.rst
index 4cc6c0b8257f..cabaed391414 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/w83773g
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83773g.rst
@@ -1,13 +1,18 @@
 Kernel driver w83773g
-====================
+=====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Nuvoton W83773G
+
     Prefix: 'w83773g'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c and 0x4d
+
     Datasheet: https://www.nuvoton.com/resource-files/W83773G_SG_DatasheetV1_2.pdf
 
 Authors:
+
 	Lei YU <mine260309@gmail.com>
 
 Description
@@ -27,7 +32,4 @@ Resolution for both the local and remote channels is 0.125 degree C.
 The chip supports only temperature measurement. The driver exports
 the temperature values via the following sysfs files:
 
-temp[1-3]_input
-temp[2-3]_fault
-temp[2-3]_offset
-update_interval
+**temp[1-3]_input, temp[2-3]_fault, temp[2-3]_offset, update_interval**
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83781d b/Documentation/hwmon/w83781d.rst
index 129b0a3b555b..f36d33dfb704 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/w83781d
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83781d.rst
@@ -2,44 +2,64 @@ Kernel driver w83781d
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Winbond W83781D
+
     Prefix: 'w83781d'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x28 - 0x2f, ISA 0x290 (8 I/O ports)
+
     Datasheet: http://www.winbond-usa.com/products/winbond_products/pdfs/PCIC/w83781d.pdf
+
   * Winbond W83782D
+
     Prefix: 'w83782d'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x28 - 0x2f, ISA 0x290 (8 I/O ports)
+
     Datasheet: http://www.winbond.com
+
   * Winbond W83783S
+
     Prefix: 'w83783s'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2d
+
     Datasheet: http://www.winbond-usa.com/products/winbond_products/pdfs/PCIC/w83783s.pdf
+
   * Asus AS99127F
+
     Prefix: 'as99127f'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x28 - 0x2f
+
     Datasheet: Unavailable from Asus
 
+
+
 Authors:
-        Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>,
-        Philip Edelbrock <phil@netroedge.com>,
-        Mark Studebaker <mdsxyz123@yahoo.com>
+
+      - Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>,
+      - Philip Edelbrock <phil@netroedge.com>,
+      - Mark Studebaker <mdsxyz123@yahoo.com>
 
 Module parameters
 -----------------
 
 * init int
-  (default 1)
-  Use 'init=0' to bypass initializing the chip.
-  Try this if your computer crashes when you load the module.
+    (default 1)
+
+    Use 'init=0' to bypass initializing the chip.
+    Try this if your computer crashes when you load the module.
 
 * reset int
-  (default 0)
-  The driver used to reset the chip on load, but does no more. Use
-  'reset=1' to restore the old behavior. Report if you need to do this.
+    (default 0)
+    The driver used to reset the chip on load, but does no more. Use
+    'reset=1' to restore the old behavior. Report if you need to do this.
 
 force_subclients=bus,caddr,saddr,saddr
   This is used to force the i2c addresses for subclients of
-  a certain chip. Typical usage is `force_subclients=0,0x2d,0x4a,0x4b'
+  a certain chip. Typical usage is `force_subclients=0,0x2d,0x4a,0x4b`
   to force the subclients of chip 0x2d on bus 0 to i2c addresses
   0x4a and 0x4b. This parameter is useful for certain Tyan boards.
 
@@ -54,12 +74,19 @@ There is quite some difference between these chips, but they are similar
 enough that it was sensible to put them together in one driver.
 The Asus chips are similar to an I2C-only W83782D.
 
-Chip        #vin    #fanin  #pwm    #temp   wchipid vendid  i2c     ISA
-as99127f    7       3       0       3       0x31    0x12c3  yes     no
-as99127f rev.2 (type_name = as99127f)       0x31    0x5ca3  yes     no
-w83781d     7       3       0       3       0x10-1  0x5ca3  yes     yes
-w83782d     9       3       2-4     3       0x30    0x5ca3  yes     yes
-w83783s     5-6     3       2       1-2     0x40    0x5ca3  yes     no
++----------+---------+--------+-------+-------+---------+--------+------+-----+
+| Chip     | #vin    | #fanin | #pwm  | #temp | wchipid | vendid | i2c  | ISA |
++----------+---------+--------+-------+-------+---------+--------+------+-----+
+| as99127f | 7       | 3      | 0     | 3     | 0x31    | 0x12c3 | yes  |  no |
++----------+---------+--------+-------+-------+---------+--------+------+-----+
+| as99127f rev.2 (type_name = as99127f)       | 0x31    | 0x5ca3 | yes  |  no |
++----------+---------+--------+-------+-------+---------+--------+------+-----+
+| w83781d  | 7       | 3      | 0     | 3     | 0x10-1  | 0x5ca3 | yes  | yes |
++----------+---------+--------+-------+-------+---------+--------+------+-----+
+| w83782d  | 9       | 3      | 2-4   | 3     | 0x30    | 0x5ca3 | yes  | yes |
++----------+---------+--------+-------+-------+---------+--------+------+-----+
+| w83783s  | 5-6     | 3      | 2     |  1-2  | 0x40    | 0x5ca3 | yes  |  no |
++----------+---------+--------+-------+-------+---------+--------+------+-----+
 
 Detection of these chips can sometimes be foiled because they can be in
 an internal state that allows no clean access. If you know the address
@@ -124,22 +151,24 @@ or only the beeping for some alarms.
 
 Individual alarm and beep bits:
 
-0x000001: in0
-0x000002: in1
-0x000004: in2
-0x000008: in3
-0x000010: temp1
-0x000020: temp2 (+temp3 on W83781D)
-0x000040: fan1
-0x000080: fan2
-0x000100: in4
-0x000200: in5
-0x000400: in6
-0x000800: fan3
-0x001000: chassis
-0x002000: temp3 (W83782D only)
-0x010000: in7 (W83782D only)
-0x020000: in8 (W83782D only)
+======== ==========================
+0x000001 in0
+0x000002 in1
+0x000004 in2
+0x000008 in3
+0x000010 temp1
+0x000020 temp2 (+temp3 on W83781D)
+0x000040 fan1
+0x000080 fan2
+0x000100 in4
+0x000200 in5
+0x000400 in6
+0x000800 fan3
+0x001000 chassis
+0x002000 temp3 (W83782D only)
+0x010000 in7 (W83782D only)
+0x020000 in8 (W83782D only)
+======== ==========================
 
 If an alarm triggers, it will remain triggered until the hardware register
 is read at least once. This means that the cause for the alarm may
@@ -179,68 +208,74 @@ Please do not send mail to the author or the sensors group asking for
 a datasheet or ideas on how to convince Asus. We can't help.
 
 
-NOTES:
+NOTES
 -----
   783s has no in1 so that in[2-6] are compatible with the 781d/782d.
 
   783s pin is programmable for -5V or temp1; defaults to -5V,
-       no control in driver so temp1 doesn't work.
+  no control in driver so temp1 doesn't work.
 
   782d and 783s datasheets differ on which is pwm1 and which is pwm2.
-       We chose to follow 782d.
+  We chose to follow 782d.
 
   782d and 783s pin is programmable for fan3 input or pwm2 output;
-       defaults to fan3 input.
-       If pwm2 is enabled (with echo 255 1 > pwm2), then
-       fan3 will report 0.
+  defaults to fan3 input.
+  If pwm2 is enabled (with echo 255 1 > pwm2), then
+  fan3 will report 0.
 
   782d has pwm1-2 for ISA, pwm1-4 for i2c. (pwm3-4 share pins with
-       the ISA pins)
+  the ISA pins)
 
-Data sheet updates:
+Data sheet updates
 ------------------
 	- PWM clock registers:
-
-		000: master /  512
-		001: master / 1024
-		010: master / 2048
-		011: master / 4096
-		100: master / 8192
+		* 000: master /  512
+		* 001: master / 1024
+		* 010: master / 2048
+		* 011: master / 4096
+		* 100: master / 8192
 
 
 Answers from Winbond tech support
 ---------------------------------
->
-> 1) In the W83781D data sheet section 7.2 last paragraph, it talks about
->    reprogramming the R-T table if the Beta of the thermistor is not
->    3435K. The R-T table is described briefly in section 8.20.
->    What formulas do I use to program a new R-T table for a given Beta?
->
-	We are sorry that the calculation for R-T table value is
-confidential. If you have another Beta value of thermistor, we can help
-to calculate the R-T table for you. But you should give us real R-T
-Table which can be gotten by thermistor vendor. Therefore we will calculate
-them and obtain 32-byte data, and you can fill the 32-byte data to the
-register in Bank0.CR51 of W83781D.
 
+::
+
+  >
+  > 1) In the W83781D data sheet section 7.2 last paragraph, it talks about
+  >    reprogramming the R-T table if the Beta of the thermistor is not
+  >    3435K. The R-T table is described briefly in section 8.20.
+  >    What formulas do I use to program a new R-T table for a given Beta?
+  >
+
+  We are sorry that the calculation for R-T table value is
+  confidential. If you have another Beta value of thermistor, we can help
+  to calculate the R-T table for you. But you should give us real R-T
+  Table which can be gotten by thermistor vendor. Therefore we will calculate
+  them and obtain 32-byte data, and you can fill the 32-byte data to the
+  register in Bank0.CR51 of W83781D.
 
-> 2) In the W83782D data sheet, it mentions that pins 38, 39, and 40 are
->    programmable to be either thermistor or Pentium II diode inputs.
->    How do I program them for diode inputs? I can't find any register
->    to program these to be diode inputs.
- --> You may program Bank0 CR[5Dh] and CR[59h] registers.
 
- 	CR[5Dh]    		bit 1(VTIN1)    bit 2(VTIN2)   bit 3(VTIN3)
+  > 2) In the W83782D data sheet, it mentions that pins 38, 39, and 40 are
+  >    programmable to be either thermistor or Pentium II diode inputs.
+  >    How do I program them for diode inputs? I can't find any register
+  >    to program these to be diode inputs.
 
-      	thermistor                0		 0		0
- 	diode 		          1		 1		1
+  You may program Bank0 CR[5Dh] and CR[59h] registers.
 
+  =============================== =============== ============== ============
+	CR[5Dh]    		bit 1(VTIN1)    bit 2(VTIN2)   bit 3(VTIN3)
 
-(error) CR[59h] 		bit 4(VTIN1)	bit 2(VTIN2)   bit 3(VTIN3)
-(right) CR[59h] 		bit 4(VTIN1)	bit 5(VTIN2)   bit 6(VTIN3)
+		thermistor                0		 0		0
+	diode 			  1		 1		1
 
- 	PII thermal diode         1		 1		1
- 	2N3904	diode	          0		 0		0
+
+  (error) CR[59h] 		bit 4(VTIN1)	bit 2(VTIN2)   bit 3(VTIN3)
+  (right) CR[59h] 		bit 4(VTIN1)	bit 5(VTIN2)   bit 6(VTIN3)
+
+	PII thermal diode         1		 1		1
+	2N3904	diode		  0		 0		0
+  =============================== =============== ============== ============
 
 
 Asus Clones
@@ -251,18 +286,21 @@ Here are some very useful information that were given to us by Alex Van
 Kaam about how to detect these chips, and how to read their values. He
 also gives advice for another Asus chipset, the Mozart-2 (which we
 don't support yet). Thanks Alex!
+
 I reworded some parts and added personal comments.
 
-# Detection:
+Detection
+^^^^^^^^^
 
 AS99127F rev.1, AS99127F rev.2 and ASB100:
 - I2C address range: 0x29 - 0x2F
-- If register 0x58 holds 0x31 then we have an Asus (either ASB100 or
-  AS99127F)
+- If register 0x58 holds 0x31 then we have an Asus (either ASB100 or AS99127F)
 - Which one depends on register 0x4F (manufacturer ID):
-  0x06 or 0x94: ASB100
-  0x12 or 0xC3: AS99127F rev.1
-  0x5C or 0xA3: AS99127F rev.2
+
+  - 0x06 or 0x94: ASB100
+  - 0x12 or 0xC3: AS99127F rev.1
+  - 0x5C or 0xA3: AS99127F rev.2
+
   Note that 0x5CA3 is Winbond's ID (WEC), which let us think Asus get their
   AS99127F rev.2 direct from Winbond. The other codes mean ATT and DVC,
   respectively. ATT could stand for Asustek something (although it would be
@@ -273,88 +311,103 @@ Mozart-2:
 - I2C address: 0x77
 - If register 0x58 holds 0x56 or 0x10 then we have a Mozart-2
 - Of the Mozart there are 3 types:
-  0x58=0x56, 0x4E=0x94, 0x4F=0x36: Asus ASM58 Mozart-2
-  0x58=0x56, 0x4E=0x94, 0x4F=0x06: Asus AS2K129R Mozart-2
-  0x58=0x10, 0x4E=0x5C, 0x4F=0xA3: Asus ??? Mozart-2
+
+  - 0x58=0x56, 0x4E=0x94, 0x4F=0x36: Asus ASM58 Mozart-2
+  - 0x58=0x56, 0x4E=0x94, 0x4F=0x06: Asus AS2K129R Mozart-2
+  - 0x58=0x10, 0x4E=0x5C, 0x4F=0xA3: Asus ??? Mozart-2
+
   You can handle all 3 the exact same way :)
 
-# Temperature sensors:
+Temperature sensors
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
 
 ASB100:
-- sensor 1: register 0x27
-- sensor 2 & 3 are the 2 LM75's on the SMBus
-- sensor 4: register 0x17
-Remark: I noticed that on Intel boards sensor 2 is used for the CPU
+  - sensor 1: register 0x27
+  - sensor 2 & 3 are the 2 LM75's on the SMBus
+  - sensor 4: register 0x17
+
+Remark:
+
+  I noticed that on Intel boards sensor 2 is used for the CPU
   and 4 is ignored/stuck, on AMD boards sensor 4 is the CPU and sensor 2 is
   either ignored or a socket temperature.
 
 AS99127F (rev.1 and 2 alike):
-- sensor 1: register 0x27
-- sensor 2 & 3 are the 2 LM75's on the SMBus
-Remark: Register 0x5b is suspected to be temperature type selector. Bit 1
+  - sensor 1: register 0x27
+  - sensor 2 & 3 are the 2 LM75's on the SMBus
+
+Remark:
+
+  Register 0x5b is suspected to be temperature type selector. Bit 1
   would control temp1, bit 3 temp2 and bit 5 temp3.
 
 Mozart-2:
-- sensor 1: register 0x27
-- sensor 2: register 0x13
+  - sensor 1: register 0x27
+  - sensor 2: register 0x13
 
-# Fan sensors:
+Fan sensors
+^^^^^^^^^^^
 
 ASB100, AS99127F (rev.1 and 2 alike):
-- 3 fans, identical to the W83781D
+  - 3 fans, identical to the W83781D
 
 Mozart-2:
-- 2 fans only, 1350000/RPM/div
-- fan 1: register 0x28,  divisor on register 0xA1 (bits 4-5)
-- fan 2: register 0x29,  divisor on register 0xA1 (bits 6-7)
+  - 2 fans only, 1350000/RPM/div
+  - fan 1: register 0x28,  divisor on register 0xA1 (bits 4-5)
+  - fan 2: register 0x29,  divisor on register 0xA1 (bits 6-7)
 
-# Voltages:
+Voltages
+^^^^^^^^
 
 This is where there is a difference between AS99127F rev.1 and 2.
-Remark: The difference is similar to the difference between
+
+Remark:
+
+  The difference is similar to the difference between
   W83781D and W83782D.
 
 ASB100:
-in0=r(0x20)*0.016
-in1=r(0x21)*0.016
-in2=r(0x22)*0.016
-in3=r(0x23)*0.016*1.68
-in4=r(0x24)*0.016*3.8
-in5=r(0x25)*(-0.016)*3.97
-in6=r(0x26)*(-0.016)*1.666
+  - in0=r(0x20)*0.016
+  - in1=r(0x21)*0.016
+  - in2=r(0x22)*0.016
+  - in3=r(0x23)*0.016*1.68
+  - in4=r(0x24)*0.016*3.8
+  - in5=r(0x25)*(-0.016)*3.97
+  - in6=r(0x26)*(-0.016)*1.666
 
 AS99127F rev.1:
-in0=r(0x20)*0.016
-in1=r(0x21)*0.016
-in2=r(0x22)*0.016
-in3=r(0x23)*0.016*1.68
-in4=r(0x24)*0.016*3.8
-in5=r(0x25)*(-0.016)*3.97
-in6=r(0x26)*(-0.016)*1.503
+  - in0=r(0x20)*0.016
+  - in1=r(0x21)*0.016
+  - in2=r(0x22)*0.016
+  - in3=r(0x23)*0.016*1.68
+  - in4=r(0x24)*0.016*3.8
+  - in5=r(0x25)*(-0.016)*3.97
+  - in6=r(0x26)*(-0.016)*1.503
 
 AS99127F rev.2:
-in0=r(0x20)*0.016
-in1=r(0x21)*0.016
-in2=r(0x22)*0.016
-in3=r(0x23)*0.016*1.68
-in4=r(0x24)*0.016*3.8
-in5=(r(0x25)*0.016-3.6)*5.14+3.6
-in6=(r(0x26)*0.016-3.6)*3.14+3.6
+  - in0=r(0x20)*0.016
+  - in1=r(0x21)*0.016
+  - in2=r(0x22)*0.016
+  - in3=r(0x23)*0.016*1.68
+  - in4=r(0x24)*0.016*3.8
+  - in5=(r(0x25)*0.016-3.6)*5.14+3.6
+  - in6=(r(0x26)*0.016-3.6)*3.14+3.6
 
 Mozart-2:
-in0=r(0x20)*0.016
-in1=255
-in2=r(0x22)*0.016
-in3=r(0x23)*0.016*1.68
-in4=r(0x24)*0.016*4
-in5=255
-in6=255
+  - in0=r(0x20)*0.016
+  - in1=255
+  - in2=r(0x22)*0.016
+  - in3=r(0x23)*0.016*1.68
+  - in4=r(0x24)*0.016*4
+  - in5=255
+  - in6=255
 
 
-# PWM
+PWM
+^^^
 
 * Additional info about PWM on the AS99127F (may apply to other Asus
-chips as well) by Jean Delvare as of 2004-04-09:
+  chips as well) by Jean Delvare as of 2004-04-09:
 
 AS99127F revision 2 seems to have two PWM registers at 0x59 and 0x5A,
 and a temperature sensor type selector at 0x5B (which basically means
@@ -401,15 +454,20 @@ AS99127F chips at all.
 I've been fiddling around with the (in)famous 0x59 register and
 found out the following values do work as a form of coarse pwm:
 
-0x80 - seems to turn fans off after some time(1-2 minutes)... might be
-some form of auto-fan-control based on temp? hmm (Qfan? this mobo is an
-old ASUS, it isn't marketed as Qfan. Maybe some beta pre-attempt at Qfan
-that was dropped at the BIOS)
-0x81 - off
-0x82 - slightly "on-ner" than off, but my fans do not get to move. I can
-hear the high-pitched PWM sound that motors give off at too-low-pwm.
-0x83 - now they do move. Estimate about 70% speed or so.
-0x84-0x8f - full on
+0x80
+ - seems to turn fans off after some time(1-2 minutes)... might be
+   some form of auto-fan-control based on temp? hmm (Qfan? this mobo is an
+   old ASUS, it isn't marketed as Qfan. Maybe some beta pre-attempt at Qfan
+   that was dropped at the BIOS)
+0x81
+ - off
+0x82
+ - slightly "on-ner" than off, but my fans do not get to move. I can
+   hear the high-pitched PWM sound that motors give off at too-low-pwm.
+0x83
+ - now they do move. Estimate about 70% speed or so.
+0x84-0x8f
+ - full on
 
 Changing the high nibble doesn't seem to do much except the high bit
 (0x80) must be set for PWM to work, else the current pwm doesn't seem to
@@ -435,6 +493,7 @@ looks like PWM is filtered on this motherboard.
 
 Here are some of measurements:
 
+==== =========
 0x80     20 mV
 0x81     20 mV
 0x82    232 mV
@@ -451,3 +510,4 @@ Here are some of measurements:
 0x8d  12.4  V
 0x8e  12.4  V
 0x8f  12.4  V
+==== =========
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d b/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d.rst
index f4021a285460..3adaed39b157 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d.rst
@@ -2,9 +2,13 @@ Kernel driver w83791d
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Winbond W83791D
+
     Prefix: 'w83791d'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2f
+
     Datasheet: http://www.winbond-usa.com/products/winbond_products/pdfs/PCIC/W83791D_W83791Gb.pdf
 
 Author: Charles Spirakis <bezaur@gmail.com>
@@ -12,39 +16,46 @@ Author: Charles Spirakis <bezaur@gmail.com>
 This driver was derived from the w83781d.c and w83792d.c source files.
 
 Credits:
+
   w83781d.c:
-    Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>,
-    Philip Edelbrock <phil@netroedge.com>,
-    and Mark Studebaker <mdsxyz123@yahoo.com>
+
+    - Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>,
+    - Philip Edelbrock <phil@netroedge.com>,
+    - Mark Studebaker <mdsxyz123@yahoo.com>
+
   w83792d.c:
-    Shane Huang (Winbond),
-    Rudolf Marek <r.marek@assembler.cz>
+
+    - Shane Huang (Winbond),
+    - Rudolf Marek <r.marek@assembler.cz>
 
 Additional contributors:
-    Sven Anders <anders@anduras.de>
-    Marc Hulsman <m.hulsman@tudelft.nl>
+
+    - Sven Anders <anders@anduras.de>
+    - Marc Hulsman <m.hulsman@tudelft.nl>
 
 Module Parameters
 -----------------
 
 * init boolean
-  (default 0)
-  Use 'init=1' to have the driver do extra software initializations.
-  The default behavior is to do the minimum initialization possible
-  and depend on the BIOS to properly setup the chip. If you know you
-  have a w83791d and you're having problems, try init=1 before trying
-  reset=1.
+    (default 0)
+
+    Use 'init=1' to have the driver do extra software initializations.
+    The default behavior is to do the minimum initialization possible
+    and depend on the BIOS to properly setup the chip. If you know you
+    have a w83791d and you're having problems, try init=1 before trying
+    reset=1.
 
 * reset boolean
-  (default 0)
-  Use 'reset=1' to reset the chip (via index 0x40, bit 7). The default
-  behavior is no chip reset to preserve BIOS settings.
+    (default 0)
+
+    Use 'reset=1' to reset the chip (via index 0x40, bit 7). The default
+    behavior is no chip reset to preserve BIOS settings.
 
 * force_subclients=bus,caddr,saddr,saddr
-  This is used to force the i2c addresses for subclients of
-  a certain chip. Example usage is `force_subclients=0,0x2f,0x4a,0x4b'
-  to force the subclients of chip 0x2f on bus 0 to i2c addresses
-  0x4a and 0x4b.
+    This is used to force the i2c addresses for subclients of
+    a certain chip. Example usage is `force_subclients=0,0x2f,0x4a,0x4b`
+    to force the subclients of chip 0x2f on bus 0 to i2c addresses
+    0x4a and 0x4b.
 
 
 Description
@@ -91,11 +102,11 @@ This file is used for both legacy and new code.
 
 The sysfs interface to the beep bitmask has migrated from the original legacy
 method of a single sysfs beep_mask file to a newer method using multiple
-*_beep files as described in .../Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface.
+`*_beep` files as described in `Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface.rst`.
 
 A similar change has occurred for the bitmap corresponding to the alarms. The
 original legacy method used a single sysfs alarms file containing a bitmap
-of triggered alarms. The newer method uses multiple sysfs *_alarm files
+of triggered alarms. The newer method uses multiple sysfs `*_alarm` files
 (again following the pattern described in sysfs-interface).
 
 Since both methods read and write the underlying hardware, they can be used
@@ -116,46 +127,54 @@ User mode code requesting values more often will receive cached values.
 The sysfs-interface is documented in the 'sysfs-interface' file. Only
 chip-specific options are documented here.
 
-pwm[1-3]_enable -	this file controls mode of fan/temperature control for
+======================= =======================================================
+pwm[1-3]_enable		this file controls mode of fan/temperature control for
 			fan 1-3. Fan/PWM 4-5 only support manual mode.
-		            * 1 Manual mode
-		            * 2 Thermal Cruise mode
-		            * 3 Fan Speed Cruise mode (no further support)
 
-temp[1-3]_target -	defines the target temperature for Thermal Cruise mode.
+			    * 1 Manual mode
+			    * 2 Thermal Cruise mode
+			    * 3 Fan Speed Cruise mode (no further support)
+
+temp[1-3]_target	defines the target temperature for Thermal Cruise mode.
 			Unit: millidegree Celsius
 			RW
 
-temp[1-3]_tolerance -	temperature tolerance for Thermal Cruise mode.
+temp[1-3]_tolerance	temperature tolerance for Thermal Cruise mode.
 			Specifies an interval around the target temperature
 			in which the fan speed is not changed.
 			Unit: millidegree Celsius
 			RW
+======================= =======================================================
 
 Alarms bitmap vs. beep_mask bitmask
-------------------------------------
+-----------------------------------
+
 For legacy code using the alarms and beep_mask files:
 
-in0 (VCORE)  :  alarms: 0x000001 beep_mask: 0x000001
-in1 (VINR0)  :  alarms: 0x000002 beep_mask: 0x002000 <== mismatch
-in2 (+3.3VIN):  alarms: 0x000004 beep_mask: 0x000004
-in3 (5VDD)   :  alarms: 0x000008 beep_mask: 0x000008
-in4 (+12VIN) :  alarms: 0x000100 beep_mask: 0x000100
-in5 (-12VIN) :  alarms: 0x000200 beep_mask: 0x000200
-in6 (-5VIN)  :  alarms: 0x000400 beep_mask: 0x000400
-in7 (VSB)    :  alarms: 0x080000 beep_mask: 0x010000 <== mismatch
-in8 (VBAT)   :  alarms: 0x100000 beep_mask: 0x020000 <== mismatch
-in9 (VINR1)  :  alarms: 0x004000 beep_mask: 0x004000
-temp1        :  alarms: 0x000010 beep_mask: 0x000010
-temp2        :  alarms: 0x000020 beep_mask: 0x000020
-temp3        :  alarms: 0x002000 beep_mask: 0x000002 <== mismatch
-fan1         :  alarms: 0x000040 beep_mask: 0x000040
-fan2         :  alarms: 0x000080 beep_mask: 0x000080
-fan3         :  alarms: 0x000800 beep_mask: 0x000800
-fan4         :  alarms: 0x200000 beep_mask: 0x200000
-fan5         :  alarms: 0x400000 beep_mask: 0x400000
-tart1        :  alarms: 0x010000 beep_mask: 0x040000 <== mismatch
-tart2        :  alarms: 0x020000 beep_mask: 0x080000 <== mismatch
-tart3        :  alarms: 0x040000 beep_mask: 0x100000 <== mismatch
-case_open    :  alarms: 0x001000 beep_mask: 0x001000
-global_enable:  alarms: -------- beep_mask: 0x800000 (modified via beep_enable)
+=============  ========  ========= ==========================
+Signal         Alarms    beep_mask Obs
+=============  ========  ========= ==========================
+in0 (VCORE)    0x000001  0x000001
+in1 (VINR0)    0x000002  0x002000  <== mismatch
+in2 (+3.3VIN)  0x000004  0x000004
+in3 (5VDD)     0x000008  0x000008
+in4 (+12VIN)   0x000100  0x000100
+in5 (-12VIN)   0x000200  0x000200
+in6 (-5VIN)    0x000400  0x000400
+in7 (VSB)      0x080000  0x010000  <== mismatch
+in8 (VBAT)     0x100000  0x020000  <== mismatch
+in9 (VINR1)    0x004000  0x004000
+temp1          0x000010  0x000010
+temp2          0x000020  0x000020
+temp3          0x002000  0x000002  <== mismatch
+fan1           0x000040  0x000040
+fan2           0x000080  0x000080
+fan3           0x000800  0x000800
+fan4           0x200000  0x200000
+fan5           0x400000  0x400000
+tart1          0x010000  0x040000  <== mismatch
+tart2          0x020000  0x080000  <== mismatch
+tart3          0x040000  0x100000  <== mismatch
+case_open      0x001000  0x001000
+global_enable  -         0x800000  (modified via beep_enable)
+=============  ========  ========= ==========================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83792d b/Documentation/hwmon/w83792d.rst
index f2ffc402ea45..92c4bfe4968c 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/w83792d
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83792d.rst
@@ -2,9 +2,13 @@ Kernel driver w83792d
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Winbond W83792D
+
     Prefix: 'w83792d'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2f
+
     Datasheet: http://www.winbond.com.tw
 
 Author: Shane Huang (Winbond)
@@ -15,15 +19,16 @@ Module Parameters
 -----------------
 
 * init int
-  (default 1)
-  Use 'init=0' to bypass initializing the chip.
-  Try this if your computer crashes when you load the module.
+    (default 1)
+
+    Use 'init=0' to bypass initializing the chip.
+    Try this if your computer crashes when you load the module.
 
 * force_subclients=bus,caddr,saddr,saddr
-  This is used to force the i2c addresses for subclients of
-  a certain chip. Example usage is `force_subclients=0,0x2f,0x4a,0x4b'
-  to force the subclients of chip 0x2f on bus 0 to i2c addresses
-  0x4a and 0x4b.
+    This is used to force the i2c addresses for subclients of
+    a certain chip. Example usage is `force_subclients=0,0x2f,0x4a,0x4b`
+    to force the subclients of chip 0x2f on bus 0 to i2c addresses
+    0x4a and 0x4b.
 
 
 Description
@@ -67,31 +72,34 @@ or maximum limit.
 Alarms are provided as output from "realtime status register". Following bits
 are defined:
 
-bit - alarm on:
-0  - in0
-1  - in1
-2  - temp1
-3  - temp2
-4  - temp3
-5  - fan1
-6  - fan2
-7  - fan3
-8  - in2
-9  - in3
-10 - in4
-11 - in5
-12 - in6
-13 - VID change
-14 - chassis
-15 - fan7
-16 - tart1
-17 - tart2
-18 - tart3
-19 - in7
-20 - in8
-21 - fan4
-22 - fan5
-23 - fan6
+==== ==========
+bit   alarm on
+==== ==========
+0    in0
+1    in1
+2    temp1
+3    temp2
+4    temp3
+5    fan1
+6    fan2
+7    fan3
+8    in2
+9    in3
+10   in4
+11   in5
+12   in6
+13   VID change
+14   chassis
+15   fan7
+16   tart1
+17   tart2
+18   tart3
+19   in7
+20   in8
+21   fan4
+22   fan5
+23   fan6
+==== ==========
 
 Tart will be asserted while target temperature cannot be achieved after 3 minutes
 of full speed rotation of corresponding fan.
@@ -114,7 +122,7 @@ Known problems:
 	  by CR[0x49h].
 	- The function of vid and vrm has not been finished, because I'm NOT
 	  very familiar with them. Adding support is welcome.
- 	- The function of chassis open detection needs more tests.
+	- The function of chassis open detection needs more tests.
 	- If you have ASUS server board and chip was not found: Then you will
 	  need to upgrade to latest (or beta) BIOS. If it does not help please
 	  contact us.
@@ -165,17 +173,27 @@ for each fan.
 /sys files
 ----------
 
-pwm[1-7] - this file stores PWM duty cycle or DC value (fan speed) in range:
-	0 (stop) to 255 (full)
-pwm[1-3]_enable - this file controls mode of fan/temperature control:
-            * 0 Disabled
-            * 1 Manual mode
-            * 2 Smart Fan II
-            * 3 Thermal Cruise
-pwm[1-7]_mode - Select PWM or DC mode
-            * 0 DC
-            * 1 PWM
-thermal_cruise[1-3] - Selects the desired temperature for cruise (degC)
-tolerance[1-3] - Value in degrees of Celsius (degC) for +- T
-sf2_point[1-4]_fan[1-3] - four temperature points for each fan for Smart Fan II
-sf2_level[1-3]_fan[1-3] - three PWM/DC levels for each fan for Smart Fan II
+pwm[1-7]
+	- this file stores PWM duty cycle or DC value (fan speed) in range:
+
+	    0 (stop) to 255 (full)
+pwm[1-3]_enable
+	- this file controls mode of fan/temperature control:
+
+	    * 0 Disabled
+	    * 1 Manual mode
+	    * 2 Smart Fan II
+	    * 3 Thermal Cruise
+pwm[1-7]_mode
+	- Select PWM or DC mode
+
+	    * 0 DC
+	    * 1 PWM
+thermal_cruise[1-3]
+	- Selects the desired temperature for cruise (degC)
+tolerance[1-3]
+	- Value in degrees of Celsius (degC) for +- T
+sf2_point[1-4]_fan[1-3]
+	- four temperature points for each fan for Smart Fan II
+sf2_level[1-3]_fan[1-3]
+	- three PWM/DC levels for each fan for Smart Fan II
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83793 b/Documentation/hwmon/w83793
deleted file mode 100644
index 6cc5f639b721..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/w83793
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,106 +0,0 @@
-Kernel driver w83793
-====================
-
-Supported chips:
-  * Winbond W83793G/W83793R
-    Prefix: 'w83793'
-    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2f
-    Datasheet: Still not published
-
-Authors:
-    Yuan Mu (Winbond Electronics)
-    Rudolf Marek <r.marek@assembler.cz>
-
-
-Module parameters
------------------
-
-* reset int
-  (default 0)
-  This parameter is not recommended, it will lose motherboard specific
-  settings. Use 'reset=1' to reset the chip when loading this module.
-
-* force_subclients=bus,caddr,saddr1,saddr2
-  This is used to force the i2c addresses for subclients of
-  a certain chip. Typical usage is `force_subclients=0,0x2f,0x4a,0x4b'
-  to force the subclients of chip 0x2f on bus 0 to i2c addresses
-  0x4a and 0x4b.
-
-
-Description
------------
-
-This driver implements support for Winbond W83793G/W83793R chips.
-
-* Exported features
-  This driver exports 10 voltage sensors, up to 12 fan tachometer inputs,
-  6 remote temperatures, up to 8 sets of PWM fan controls, SmartFan
-  (automatic fan speed control) on all temperature/PWM combinations, 2
-  sets of 6-pin CPU VID input.
-
-* Sensor resolutions
-  If your motherboard maker used the reference design, the resolution of
-  voltage0-2 is 2mV, resolution of voltage3/4/5 is 16mV, 8mV for voltage6,
-  24mV for voltage7/8. Temp1-4 have a 0.25 degree Celsius resolution,
-  temp5-6 have a 1 degree Celsiis resolution.
-
-* Temperature sensor types
-  Temp1-4 have 2 possible types. It can be read from (and written to)
-  temp[1-4]_type.
-  - If the value is 3, it starts monitoring using a remote termal diode
-    (default).
-  - If the value is 6, it starts monitoring using the temperature sensor
-    in Intel CPU and get result by PECI.
-  Temp5-6 can be connected to external thermistors (value of
-  temp[5-6]_type is 4).
-
-* Alarm mechanism
-  For voltage sensors, an alarm triggers if the measured value is below
-  the low voltage limit or over the high voltage limit.
-  For temperature sensors, an alarm triggers if the measured value goes
-  above the high temperature limit, and wears off only after the measured
-  value drops below the hysteresis value.
-  For fan sensors, an alarm triggers if the measured value is below the
-  low speed limit.
-
-* SmartFan/PWM control
-  If you want to set a pwm fan to manual mode, you just need to make sure it
-  is not controlled by any temp channel, for example, you want to set fan1
-  to manual mode, you need to check the value of temp[1-6]_fan_map, make
-  sure bit 0 is cleared in the 6 values. And then set the pwm1 value to
-  control the fan.
-
-  Each temperature channel can control all the 8 PWM outputs (by setting the
-  corresponding bit in tempX_fan_map), you can set the temperature channel
-  mode using temp[1-6]_pwm_enable, 2 is Thermal Cruise mode and 3
-  is the SmartFanII mode. Temperature channels will try to speed up or
-  slow down all controlled fans, this means one fan can receive different
-  PWM value requests from different temperature channels, but the chip
-  will always pick the safest (max) PWM value for each fan.
-
-  In Thermal Cruise mode, the chip attempts to keep the temperature at a
-  predefined value, within a tolerance margin. So if tempX_input >
-  thermal_cruiseX + toleranceX, the chip will increase the PWM value,
-  if tempX_input < thermal_cruiseX - toleranceX, the chip will decrease
-  the PWM value. If the temperature is within the tolerance range, the PWM
-  value is left unchanged.
-
-  SmartFanII works differently, you have to define up to 7 PWM, temperature
-  trip points, defining a PWM/temperature curve which the chip will follow.
-  While not fundamentally different from the Thermal Cruise mode, the
-  implementation is quite different, giving you a finer-grained control.
-
-* Chassis
-  If the case open alarm triggers, it will stay in this state unless cleared
-  by writing 0 to the sysfs file "intrusion0_alarm".
-
-* VID and VRM
-  The VRM version is detected automatically, don't modify the it unless you
-  *do* know the cpu VRM version and it's not properly detected.
-
-
-Notes
------
-
-  Only Fan1-5 and PWM1-3 are guaranteed to always exist, other fan inputs and
-  PWM outputs may or may not exist depending on the chip pin configuration.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83793.rst b/Documentation/hwmon/w83793.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..83bb40c48645
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83793.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,113 @@
+Kernel driver w83793
+====================
+
+Supported chips:
+
+  * Winbond W83793G/W83793R
+
+    Prefix: 'w83793'
+
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2f
+
+    Datasheet: Still not published
+
+Authors:
+    - Yuan Mu (Winbond Electronics)
+    - Rudolf Marek <r.marek@assembler.cz>
+
+
+Module parameters
+-----------------
+
+* reset int
+    (default 0)
+
+    This parameter is not recommended, it will lose motherboard specific
+    settings. Use 'reset=1' to reset the chip when loading this module.
+
+* force_subclients=bus,caddr,saddr1,saddr2
+    This is used to force the i2c addresses for subclients of
+    a certain chip. Typical usage is `force_subclients=0,0x2f,0x4a,0x4b`
+    to force the subclients of chip 0x2f on bus 0 to i2c addresses
+    0x4a and 0x4b.
+
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+This driver implements support for Winbond W83793G/W83793R chips.
+
+* Exported features
+    This driver exports 10 voltage sensors, up to 12 fan tachometer inputs,
+    6 remote temperatures, up to 8 sets of PWM fan controls, SmartFan
+    (automatic fan speed control) on all temperature/PWM combinations, 2
+    sets of 6-pin CPU VID input.
+
+* Sensor resolutions
+    If your motherboard maker used the reference design, the resolution of
+    voltage0-2 is 2mV, resolution of voltage3/4/5 is 16mV, 8mV for voltage6,
+    24mV for voltage7/8. Temp1-4 have a 0.25 degree Celsius resolution,
+    temp5-6 have a 1 degree Celsiis resolution.
+
+* Temperature sensor types
+    Temp1-4 have 2 possible types. It can be read from (and written to)
+    temp[1-4]_type.
+
+    - If the value is 3, it starts monitoring using a remote termal diode
+      (default).
+    - If the value is 6, it starts monitoring using the temperature sensor
+      in Intel CPU and get result by PECI.
+
+    Temp5-6 can be connected to external thermistors (value of
+    temp[5-6]_type is 4).
+
+* Alarm mechanism
+    For voltage sensors, an alarm triggers if the measured value is below
+    the low voltage limit or over the high voltage limit.
+    For temperature sensors, an alarm triggers if the measured value goes
+    above the high temperature limit, and wears off only after the measured
+    value drops below the hysteresis value.
+    For fan sensors, an alarm triggers if the measured value is below the
+    low speed limit.
+
+* SmartFan/PWM control
+    If you want to set a pwm fan to manual mode, you just need to make sure it
+    is not controlled by any temp channel, for example, you want to set fan1
+    to manual mode, you need to check the value of temp[1-6]_fan_map, make
+    sure bit 0 is cleared in the 6 values. And then set the pwm1 value to
+    control the fan.
+
+    Each temperature channel can control all the 8 PWM outputs (by setting the
+    corresponding bit in tempX_fan_map), you can set the temperature channel
+    mode using temp[1-6]_pwm_enable, 2 is Thermal Cruise mode and 3
+    is the SmartFanII mode. Temperature channels will try to speed up or
+    slow down all controlled fans, this means one fan can receive different
+    PWM value requests from different temperature channels, but the chip
+    will always pick the safest (max) PWM value for each fan.
+
+    In Thermal Cruise mode, the chip attempts to keep the temperature at a
+    predefined value, within a tolerance margin. So if tempX_input >
+    thermal_cruiseX + toleranceX, the chip will increase the PWM value,
+    if tempX_input < thermal_cruiseX - toleranceX, the chip will decrease
+    the PWM value. If the temperature is within the tolerance range, the PWM
+    value is left unchanged.
+
+    SmartFanII works differently, you have to define up to 7 PWM, temperature
+    trip points, defining a PWM/temperature curve which the chip will follow.
+    While not fundamentally different from the Thermal Cruise mode, the
+    implementation is quite different, giving you a finer-grained control.
+
+* Chassis
+    If the case open alarm triggers, it will stay in this state unless cleared
+    by writing 0 to the sysfs file "intrusion0_alarm".
+
+* VID and VRM
+    The VRM version is detected automatically, don't modify the it unless you
+    *do* know the cpu VRM version and it's not properly detected.
+
+
+Notes
+-----
+
+  Only Fan1-5 and PWM1-3 are guaranteed to always exist, other fan inputs and
+  PWM outputs may or may not exist depending on the chip pin configuration.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83795 b/Documentation/hwmon/w83795
deleted file mode 100644
index d3e678216b9a..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/w83795
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,127 +0,0 @@
-Kernel driver w83795
-====================
-
-Supported chips:
-  * Winbond/Nuvoton W83795G
-    Prefix: 'w83795g'
-    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2f
-    Datasheet: Available for download on nuvoton.com
-  * Winbond/Nuvoton W83795ADG
-    Prefix: 'w83795adg'
-    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2f
-    Datasheet: Available for download on nuvoton.com
-
-Authors:
-    Wei Song (Nuvoton)
-    Jean Delvare <jdelvare@suse.de>
-
-
-Pin mapping
------------
-
-Here is a summary of the pin mapping for the W83795G and W83795ADG.
-This can be useful to convert data provided by board manufacturers
-into working libsensors configuration statements.
-
-    W83795G			|
-  Pin	| Name			| Register	| Sysfs attribute
-------------------------------------------------------------------
-   13	| VSEN1 (VCORE1)	| 10h		| in0
-   14	| VSEN2 (VCORE2)	| 11h		| in1
-   15	| VSEN3 (VCORE3)	| 12h		| in2
-   16	| VSEN4			| 13h		| in3
-   17	| VSEN5			| 14h		| in4
-   18	| VSEN6			| 15h		| in5
-   19	| VSEN7			| 16h		| in6
-   20	| VSEN8			| 17h		| in7
-   21	| VSEN9			| 18h		| in8
-   22	| VSEN10		| 19h		| in9
-   23	| VSEN11		| 1Ah		| in10
-   28	| VTT			| 1Bh		| in11
-   24	| 3VDD			| 1Ch		| in12
-   25	| 3VSB			| 1Dh		| in13
-   26	| VBAT			| 1Eh		| in14
-    3	| VSEN12/TR5		| 1Fh		| in15/temp5
-    4	| VSEN13/TR5		| 20h		| in16/temp6
-  5/  6	| VDSEN14/TR1/TD1	| 21h		| in17/temp1
-  7/  8	| VDSEN15/TR2/TD2	| 22h		| in18/temp2
-  9/ 10	| VDSEN16/TR3/TD3	| 23h		| in19/temp3
- 11/ 12	| VDSEN17/TR4/TD4	| 24h		| in20/temp4
-   40	| FANIN1		| 2Eh		| fan1
-   42	| FANIN2		| 2Fh		| fan2
-   44	| FANIN3		| 30h		| fan3
-   46	| FANIN4		| 31h		| fan4
-   48	| FANIN5		| 32h		| fan5
-   50	| FANIN6		| 33h		| fan6
-   52	| FANIN7		| 34h		| fan7
-   54	| FANIN8		| 35h		| fan8
-   57	| FANIN9		| 36h		| fan9
-   58	| FANIN10		| 37h		| fan10
-   59	| FANIN11		| 38h		| fan11
-   60	| FANIN12		| 39h		| fan12
-   31	| FANIN13		| 3Ah		| fan13
-   35	| FANIN14		| 3Bh		| fan14
-   41	| FANCTL1		| 10h (bank 2)	| pwm1
-   43	| FANCTL2		| 11h (bank 2)	| pwm2
-   45	| FANCTL3		| 12h (bank 2)	| pwm3
-   47	| FANCTL4		| 13h (bank 2)	| pwm4
-   49	| FANCTL5		| 14h (bank 2)	| pwm5
-   51	| FANCTL6		| 15h (bank 2)	| pwm6
-   53	| FANCTL7		| 16h (bank 2)	| pwm7
-   55	| FANCTL8		| 17h (bank 2)	| pwm8
- 29/ 30	| PECI/TSI (DTS1)	| 26h		| temp7
- 29/ 30	| PECI/TSI (DTS2)	| 27h		| temp8
- 29/ 30	| PECI/TSI (DTS3)	| 28h		| temp9
- 29/ 30	| PECI/TSI (DTS4)	| 29h		| temp10
- 29/ 30	| PECI/TSI (DTS5)	| 2Ah		| temp11
- 29/ 30	| PECI/TSI (DTS6)	| 2Bh		| temp12
- 29/ 30	| PECI/TSI (DTS7)	| 2Ch		| temp13
- 29/ 30	| PECI/TSI (DTS8)	| 2Dh		| temp14
-   27	| CASEOPEN#		| 46h		| intrusion0
-
-    W83795ADG			|
-  Pin	| Name			| Register	| Sysfs attribute
-------------------------------------------------------------------
-   10	| VSEN1 (VCORE1)	| 10h		| in0
-   11	| VSEN2 (VCORE2)	| 11h		| in1
-   12	| VSEN3 (VCORE3)	| 12h		| in2
-   13	| VSEN4			| 13h		| in3
-   14	| VSEN5			| 14h		| in4
-   15	| VSEN6			| 15h		| in5
-   16	| VSEN7			| 16h		| in6
-   17	| VSEN8			| 17h		| in7
-   22	| VTT			| 1Bh		| in11
-   18	| 3VDD			| 1Ch		| in12
-   19	| 3VSB			| 1Dh		| in13
-   20	| VBAT			| 1Eh		| in14
-   48	| VSEN12/TR5		| 1Fh		| in15/temp5
-    1	| VSEN13/TR5		| 20h		| in16/temp6
-  2/  3	| VDSEN14/TR1/TD1	| 21h		| in17/temp1
-  4/  5	| VDSEN15/TR2/TD2	| 22h		| in18/temp2
-  6/  7	| VDSEN16/TR3/TD3	| 23h		| in19/temp3
-  8/  9	| VDSEN17/TR4/TD4	| 24h		| in20/temp4
-   32	| FANIN1		| 2Eh		| fan1
-   34	| FANIN2		| 2Fh		| fan2
-   36	| FANIN3		| 30h		| fan3
-   37	| FANIN4		| 31h		| fan4
-   38	| FANIN5		| 32h		| fan5
-   39	| FANIN6		| 33h		| fan6
-   40	| FANIN7		| 34h		| fan7
-   41	| FANIN8		| 35h		| fan8
-   43	| FANIN9		| 36h		| fan9
-   44	| FANIN10		| 37h		| fan10
-   45	| FANIN11		| 38h		| fan11
-   46	| FANIN12		| 39h		| fan12
-   24	| FANIN13		| 3Ah		| fan13
-   28	| FANIN14		| 3Bh		| fan14
-   33	| FANCTL1		| 10h (bank 2)	| pwm1
-   35	| FANCTL2		| 11h (bank 2)	| pwm2
-   23	| PECI (DTS1)		| 26h		| temp7
-   23	| PECI (DTS2)		| 27h		| temp8
-   23	| PECI (DTS3)		| 28h		| temp9
-   23	| PECI (DTS4)		| 29h		| temp10
-   23	| PECI (DTS5)		| 2Ah		| temp11
-   23	| PECI (DTS6)		| 2Bh		| temp12
-   23	| PECI (DTS7)		| 2Ch		| temp13
-   23	| PECI (DTS8)		| 2Dh		| temp14
-   21	| CASEOPEN#		| 46h		| intrusion0
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83795.rst b/Documentation/hwmon/w83795.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d0615e2fabb9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83795.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,142 @@
+Kernel driver w83795
+====================
+
+Supported chips:
+
+  * Winbond/Nuvoton W83795G
+
+    Prefix: 'w83795g'
+
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2f
+
+    Datasheet: Available for download on nuvoton.com
+
+  * Winbond/Nuvoton W83795ADG
+
+    Prefix: 'w83795adg'
+
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2f
+
+    Datasheet: Available for download on nuvoton.com
+
+Authors:
+    - Wei Song (Nuvoton)
+    - Jean Delvare <jdelvare@suse.de>
+
+
+Pin mapping
+-----------
+
+Here is a summary of the pin mapping for the W83795G and W83795ADG.
+This can be useful to convert data provided by board manufacturers
+into working libsensors configuration statements.
+
+
+- W83795G
+
+========= ======================= =============== ================
+Pin	  Name			  Register	  Sysfs attribute
+========= ======================= =============== ================
+   13	  VSEN1 (VCORE1)	  10h		  in0
+   14	  VSEN2 (VCORE2)	  11h		  in1
+   15	  VSEN3 (VCORE3)	  12h		  in2
+   16	  VSEN4			  13h		  in3
+   17	  VSEN5			  14h		  in4
+   18	  VSEN6			  15h		  in5
+   19	  VSEN7			  16h		  in6
+   20	  VSEN8			  17h		  in7
+   21	  VSEN9			  18h		  in8
+   22	  VSEN10		  19h		  in9
+   23	  VSEN11		  1Ah		  in10
+   28	  VTT			  1Bh		  in11
+   24	  3VDD			  1Ch		  in12
+   25	  3VSB			  1Dh		  in13
+   26	  VBAT			  1Eh		  in14
+    3	  VSEN12/TR5		  1Fh		  in15/temp5
+    4	  VSEN13/TR5		  20h		  in16/temp6
+  5/  6	  VDSEN14/TR1/TD1	  21h		  in17/temp1
+  7/  8	  VDSEN15/TR2/TD2	  22h		  in18/temp2
+  9/ 10	  VDSEN16/TR3/TD3	  23h		  in19/temp3
+ 11/ 12	  VDSEN17/TR4/TD4	  24h		  in20/temp4
+   40	  FANIN1		  2Eh		  fan1
+   42	  FANIN2		  2Fh		  fan2
+   44	  FANIN3		  30h		  fan3
+   46	  FANIN4		  31h		  fan4
+   48	  FANIN5		  32h		  fan5
+   50	  FANIN6		  33h		  fan6
+   52	  FANIN7		  34h		  fan7
+   54	  FANIN8		  35h		  fan8
+   57	  FANIN9		  36h		  fan9
+   58	  FANIN10		  37h		  fan10
+   59	  FANIN11		  38h		  fan11
+   60	  FANIN12		  39h		  fan12
+   31	  FANIN13		  3Ah		  fan13
+   35	  FANIN14		  3Bh		  fan14
+   41	  FANCTL1		  10h (bank 2)	  pwm1
+   43	  FANCTL2		  11h (bank 2)	  pwm2
+   45	  FANCTL3		  12h (bank 2)	  pwm3
+   47	  FANCTL4		  13h (bank 2)	  pwm4
+   49	  FANCTL5		  14h (bank 2)	  pwm5
+   51	  FANCTL6		  15h (bank 2)	  pwm6
+   53	  FANCTL7		  16h (bank 2)	  pwm7
+   55	  FANCTL8		  17h (bank 2)	  pwm8
+ 29/ 30	  PECI/TSI (DTS1)	  26h		  temp7
+ 29/ 30	  PECI/TSI (DTS2)	  27h		  temp8
+ 29/ 30	  PECI/TSI (DTS3)	  28h		  temp9
+ 29/ 30	  PECI/TSI (DTS4)	  29h		  temp10
+ 29/ 30	  PECI/TSI (DTS5)	  2Ah		  temp11
+ 29/ 30	  PECI/TSI (DTS6)	  2Bh		  temp12
+ 29/ 30	  PECI/TSI (DTS7)	  2Ch		  temp13
+ 29/ 30	  PECI/TSI (DTS8)	  2Dh		  temp14
+   27	  CASEOPEN#		  46h		  intrusion0
+========= ======================= =============== ================
+
+- W83795ADG
+
+========= ======================= =============== ================
+Pin	  Name			  Register	  Sysfs attribute
+========= ======================= =============== ================
+   10	  VSEN1 (VCORE1)	  10h		  in0
+   11	  VSEN2 (VCORE2)	  11h		  in1
+   12	  VSEN3 (VCORE3)	  12h		  in2
+   13	  VSEN4			  13h		  in3
+   14	  VSEN5			  14h		  in4
+   15	  VSEN6			  15h		  in5
+   16	  VSEN7			  16h		  in6
+   17	  VSEN8			  17h		  in7
+   22	  VTT			  1Bh		  in11
+   18	  3VDD			  1Ch		  in12
+   19	  3VSB			  1Dh		  in13
+   20	  VBAT			  1Eh		  in14
+   48	  VSEN12/TR5		  1Fh		  in15/temp5
+    1	  VSEN13/TR5		  20h		  in16/temp6
+  2/  3	  VDSEN14/TR1/TD1	  21h		  in17/temp1
+  4/  5	  VDSEN15/TR2/TD2	  22h		  in18/temp2
+  6/  7	  VDSEN16/TR3/TD3	  23h		  in19/temp3
+  8/  9	  VDSEN17/TR4/TD4	  24h		  in20/temp4
+   32	  FANIN1		  2Eh		  fan1
+   34	  FANIN2		  2Fh		  fan2
+   36	  FANIN3		  30h		  fan3
+   37	  FANIN4		  31h		  fan4
+   38	  FANIN5		  32h		  fan5
+   39	  FANIN6		  33h		  fan6
+   40	  FANIN7		  34h		  fan7
+   41	  FANIN8		  35h		  fan8
+   43	  FANIN9		  36h		  fan9
+   44	  FANIN10		  37h		  fan10
+   45	  FANIN11		  38h		  fan11
+   46	  FANIN12		  39h		  fan12
+   24	  FANIN13		  3Ah		  fan13
+   28	  FANIN14		  3Bh		  fan14
+   33	  FANCTL1		  10h (bank 2)	  pwm1
+   35	  FANCTL2		  11h (bank 2)	  pwm2
+   23	  PECI (DTS1)		  26h		  temp7
+   23	  PECI (DTS2)		  27h		  temp8
+   23	  PECI (DTS3)		  28h		  temp9
+   23	  PECI (DTS4)		  29h		  temp10
+   23	  PECI (DTS5)		  2Ah		  temp11
+   23	  PECI (DTS6)		  2Bh		  temp12
+   23	  PECI (DTS7)		  2Ch		  temp13
+   23	  PECI (DTS8)		  2Dh		  temp14
+   21	  CASEOPEN#		  46h		  intrusion0
+========= ======================= =============== ================
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83l785ts b/Documentation/hwmon/w83l785ts.rst
index c8978478871f..7fa5418fed11 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/w83l785ts
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83l785ts.rst
@@ -2,14 +2,19 @@ Kernel driver w83l785ts
 =======================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Winbond W83L785TS-S
+
     Prefix: 'w83l785ts'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2e
+
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Winbond USA website
-               http://www.winbond-usa.com/products/winbond_products/pdfs/PCIC/W83L785TS-S.pdf
+
+	       http://www.winbond-usa.com/products/winbond_products/pdfs/PCIC/W83L785TS-S.pdf
 
 Authors:
-        Jean Delvare <jdelvare@suse.de>
+	Jean Delvare <jdelvare@suse.de>
 
 Description
 -----------
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83l786ng b/Documentation/hwmon/w83l786ng.rst
index d8f55d7fff10..2b7776190de3 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/w83l786ng
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83l786ng.rst
@@ -1,10 +1,14 @@
 Kernel driver w83l786ng
-=====================
+=======================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Winbond W83L786NG/W83L786NR
+
     Prefix: 'w83l786ng'
+
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2e - 0x2f
+
     Datasheet: http://www.winbond-usa.com/products/winbond_products/pdfs/PCIC/W83L786NRNG09.pdf
 
 Author: Kevin Lo <kevlo@kevlo.org>
@@ -14,9 +18,10 @@ Module Parameters
 -----------------
 
 * reset boolean
-  (default 0)
-  Use 'reset=1' to reset the chip (via index 0x40, bit 7). The default
-  behavior is no chip reset to preserve BIOS settings
+    (default 0)
+
+    Use 'reset=1' to reset the chip (via index 0x40, bit 7). The default
+    behavior is no chip reset to preserve BIOS settings
 
 
 Description
@@ -41,14 +46,21 @@ or maximum limit.
 /sys files
 ----------
 
-pwm[1-2] - this file stores PWM duty cycle or DC value (fan speed) in range:
-	    0 (stop) to 255 (full)
-pwm[1-2]_enable - this file controls mode of fan/temperature control:
-            * 0 Manual Mode
-            * 1 Thermal Cruise
-            * 2 Smart Fan II
-            * 4 FAN_SET
-pwm[1-2]_mode - Select PWM of DC mode
-            * 0 DC
-            * 1 PWM
-tolerance[1-2] - Value in degrees of Celsius (degC) for +- T
+pwm[1-2]
+	    - this file stores PWM duty cycle or DC value (fan speed) in range:
+
+	      0 (stop) to 255 (full)
+pwm[1-2]_enable
+	    - this file controls mode of fan/temperature control:
+
+	    * 0 Manual Mode
+	    * 1 Thermal Cruise
+	    * 2 Smart Fan II
+	    * 4 FAN_SET
+pwm[1-2]_mode
+	    - Select PWM of DC mode
+
+	    * 0 DC
+	    * 1 PWM
+tolerance[1-2]
+	    - Value in degrees of Celsius (degC) for +- T
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/wm831x b/Documentation/hwmon/wm831x.rst
index 11446757c8c8..c56fb35a2fb3 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/wm831x
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/wm831x.rst
@@ -3,11 +3,14 @@ Kernel driver wm831x-hwmon
 
 Supported chips:
   * Wolfson Microelectronics WM831x PMICs
+
     Prefix: 'wm831x'
+
     Datasheet:
-	http://www.wolfsonmicro.com/products/WM8310
-	http://www.wolfsonmicro.com/products/WM8311
-	http://www.wolfsonmicro.com/products/WM8312
+
+	- http://www.wolfsonmicro.com/products/WM8310
+	- http://www.wolfsonmicro.com/products/WM8311
+	- http://www.wolfsonmicro.com/products/WM8312
 
 Authors: Mark Brown <broonie@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
 
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/wm8350 b/Documentation/hwmon/wm8350.rst
index 98f923bd2e92..cec044ca5900 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/wm8350
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/wm8350.rst
@@ -2,12 +2,16 @@ Kernel driver wm8350-hwmon
 ==========================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Wolfson Microelectronics WM835x PMICs
+
     Prefix: 'wm8350'
+
     Datasheet:
-	http://www.wolfsonmicro.com/products/WM8350
-	http://www.wolfsonmicro.com/products/WM8351
-	http://www.wolfsonmicro.com/products/WM8352
+
+	- http://www.wolfsonmicro.com/products/WM8350
+	- http://www.wolfsonmicro.com/products/WM8351
+	- http://www.wolfsonmicro.com/products/WM8352
 
 Authors: Mark Brown <broonie@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
 
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/xgene-hwmon b/Documentation/hwmon/xgene-hwmon.rst
index 6ec50ed7cc8f..439b30b881b6 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/xgene-hwmon
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/xgene-hwmon.rst
@@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
 Kernel driver xgene-hwmon
-========================
+=========================
 
 Supported chips:
+
  * APM X-Gene SoC
 
 Description
@@ -15,16 +16,21 @@ For ACPI, it is the PCC mailbox.
 The following sensors are supported
 
   * Temperature
-    - SoC on-die temperature in milli-degree C
-    - Alarm when high/over temperature occurs
+      - SoC on-die temperature in milli-degree C
+      - Alarm when high/over temperature occurs
+
   * Power
-    - CPU power in uW
-    - IO power in uW
+      - CPU power in uW
+      - IO power in uW
 
 sysfs-Interface
 ---------------
 
-temp0_input - SoC on-die temperature (milli-degree C)
-temp0_critical_alarm - An 1 would indicates on-die temperature exceeded threshold
-power0_input - CPU power in (uW)
-power1_input - IO power in (uW)
+temp0_input
+	- SoC on-die temperature (milli-degree C)
+temp0_critical_alarm
+	- An 1 would indicates on-die temperature exceeded threshold
+power0_input
+	- CPU power in (uW)
+power1_input
+	- IO power in (uW)
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/zl6100 b/Documentation/hwmon/zl6100.rst
index 477a94b131ae..41513bb7fe51 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/zl6100
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/zl6100.rst
@@ -2,57 +2,106 @@ Kernel driver zl6100
 ====================
 
 Supported chips:
+
   * Intersil / Zilker Labs ZL2004
+
     Prefix: 'zl2004'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: http://www.intersil.com/data/fn/fn6847.pdf
+
   * Intersil / Zilker Labs ZL2005
+
     Prefix: 'zl2005'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: http://www.intersil.com/data/fn/fn6848.pdf
+
   * Intersil / Zilker Labs ZL2006
+
     Prefix: 'zl2006'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: http://www.intersil.com/data/fn/fn6850.pdf
+
   * Intersil / Zilker Labs ZL2008
+
     Prefix: 'zl2008'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: http://www.intersil.com/data/fn/fn6859.pdf
+
   * Intersil / Zilker Labs ZL2105
+
     Prefix: 'zl2105'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: http://www.intersil.com/data/fn/fn6851.pdf
+
   * Intersil / Zilker Labs ZL2106
+
     Prefix: 'zl2106'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: http://www.intersil.com/data/fn/fn6852.pdf
+
   * Intersil / Zilker Labs ZL6100
+
     Prefix: 'zl6100'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: http://www.intersil.com/data/fn/fn6876.pdf
+
   * Intersil / Zilker Labs ZL6105
+
     Prefix: 'zl6105'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: http://www.intersil.com/data/fn/fn6906.pdf
+
   * Intersil / Zilker Labs ZL9101M
+
     Prefix: 'zl9101'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: http://www.intersil.com/data/fn/fn7669.pdf
+
   * Intersil / Zilker Labs ZL9117M
+
     Prefix: 'zl9117'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet: http://www.intersil.com/data/fn/fn7914.pdf
+
   * Ericsson BMR450, BMR451
+
     Prefix: 'bmr450', 'bmr451'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet:
+
 http://archive.ericsson.net/service/internet/picov/get?DocNo=28701-EN/LZT146401
+
   * Ericsson BMR462, BMR463, BMR464
+
     Prefixes: 'bmr462', 'bmr463', 'bmr464'
+
     Addresses scanned: -
+
     Datasheet:
-http://archive.ericsson.net/service/internet/picov/get?DocNo=28701-EN/LZT146256
 
+	http://archive.ericsson.net/service/internet/picov/get?DocNo=28701-EN/LZT146256
 
 Author: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
 
@@ -64,7 +113,7 @@ This driver supports hardware monitoring for Intersil / Zilker Labs ZL6100 and
 compatible digital DC-DC controllers.
 
 The driver is a client driver to the core PMBus driver. Please see
-Documentation/hwmon/pmbus and Documentation.hwmon/pmbus-core for details
+Documentation/hwmon/pmbus.rst and Documentation.hwmon/pmbus-core for details
 on PMBus client drivers.
 
 
@@ -75,13 +124,15 @@ This driver does not auto-detect devices. You will have to instantiate the
 devices explicitly. Please see Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices for
 details.
 
-WARNING: Do not access chip registers using the i2cdump command, and do not use
-any of the i2ctools commands on a command register used to save and restore
-configuration data (0x11, 0x12, 0x15, 0x16, and 0xf4). The chips supported by
-this driver interpret any access to those command registers (including read
-commands) as request to execute the command in question. Unless write accesses
-to those registers are protected, this may result in power loss, board resets,
-and/or Flash corruption. Worst case, your board may turn into a brick.
+.. warning::
+
+  Do not access chip registers using the i2cdump command, and do not use
+  any of the i2ctools commands on a command register used to save and restore
+  configuration data (0x11, 0x12, 0x15, 0x16, and 0xf4). The chips supported by
+  this driver interpret any access to those command registers (including read
+  commands) as request to execute the command in question. Unless write accesses
+  to those registers are protected, this may result in power loss, board resets,
+  and/or Flash corruption. Worst case, your board may turn into a brick.
 
 
 Platform data support
@@ -110,6 +161,7 @@ Sysfs entries
 The following attributes are supported. Limits are read-write; all other
 attributes are read-only.
 
+======================= ========================================================
 in1_label		"vin"
 in1_input		Measured input voltage.
 in1_min			Minimum input voltage.
@@ -158,3 +210,4 @@ temp[12]_min_alarm	Chip temperature low alarm.
 temp[12]_max_alarm	Chip temperature high alarm.
 temp[12]_lcrit_alarm	Chip temperature critical low alarm.
 temp[12]_crit_alarm	Chip temperature critical high alarm.
+======================= ========================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-amd-mp2 b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-amd-mp2
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6571487171f4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-amd-mp2
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+Kernel driver i2c-amd-mp2
+
+Supported adapters:
+  * AMD MP2 PCIe interface
+
+Datasheet: not publicly available.
+
+Authors:
+	Shyam Sundar S K <Shyam-sundar.S-k@amd.com>
+	Nehal Shah <nehal-bakulchandra.shah@amd.com>
+	Elie Morisse <syniurge@gmail.com>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+The MP2 is an ARM processor programmed as an I2C controller and communicating
+with the x86 host through PCI.
+
+If you see something like this:
+
+03:00.7 MP2 I2C controller: Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. [AMD] Device 15e6
+
+in your 'lspci -v', then this driver is for your device.
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801
index d1ee484a787d..ee9984f35868 100644
--- a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801
+++ b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801
@@ -36,6 +36,7 @@ Supported adapters:
   * Intel Cannon Lake (PCH)
   * Intel Cedar Fork (PCH)
   * Intel Ice Lake (PCH)
+  * Intel Comet Lake (PCH)
    Datasheets: Publicly available at the Intel website
 
 On Intel Patsburg and later chipsets, both the normal host SMBus controller
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-piix4 b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-piix4
index aa959fd22450..2703bc3acad0 100644
--- a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-piix4
+++ b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-piix4
@@ -15,6 +15,8 @@ Supported adapters:
     http://support.amd.com/us/Embedded_TechDocs/44413.pdf
   * AMD Hudson-2, ML, CZ
     Datasheet: Not publicly available
+  * Hygon CZ
+    Datasheet: Not publicly available
   * Standard Microsystems (SMSC) SLC90E66 (Victory66) southbridge
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the SMSC website http://www.smsc.com
 
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/fault-codes b/Documentation/i2c/fault-codes
index 47c25abb7d52..0cee0fc545b4 100644
--- a/Documentation/i2c/fault-codes
+++ b/Documentation/i2c/fault-codes
@@ -112,6 +112,10 @@ EPROTO
 	case is when the length of an SMBus block data response
 	(from the SMBus slave) is outside the range 1-32 bytes.
 
+ESHUTDOWN
+	Returned when a transfer was requested using an adapter
+	which is already suspended.
+
 ETIMEDOUT
 	This is returned by drivers when an operation took too much
 	time, and was aborted before it completed.
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/gpio-fault-injection b/Documentation/i2c/gpio-fault-injection
index a4ce62090fd5..c87f416d53dd 100644
--- a/Documentation/i2c/gpio-fault-injection
+++ b/Documentation/i2c/gpio-fault-injection
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+=========================
 Linux I2C fault injection
 =========================
 
@@ -13,6 +14,9 @@ mounted at /sys/kernel/debug. There will be a separate subdirectory per GPIO
 driven I2C bus. Each subdirectory will contain files to trigger the fault
 injection. They will be described now along with their intended use-cases.
 
+Wire states
+===========
+
 "scl"
 -----
 
@@ -34,10 +38,10 @@ I2C specification version 4, section 3.1.16) using the helpers of the Linux I2C
 core (see 'struct bus_recovery_info'). However, the bus recovery will not
 succeed because SDA is still pinned low until you manually release it again
 with "echo 1 > sda". A test with an automatic release can be done with the
-following class of fault injectors.
+"incomplete transfers" class of fault injectors.
 
-Introduction to incomplete transfers
-------------------------------------
+Incomplete transfers
+====================
 
 The following fault injectors create situations where SDA will be held low by a
 device. Bus recovery should be able to fix these situations. But please note:
@@ -79,3 +83,54 @@ This is why bus recovery (up to 9 clock pulses) must either check SDA or send
 additional STOP conditions to ensure the bus has been released. Otherwise
 random data will be written to a device!
 
+Lost arbitration
+================
+
+Here, we want to simulate the condition where the master under test loses the
+bus arbitration against another master in a multi-master setup.
+
+"lose_arbitration"
+------------------
+
+This file is write only and you need to write the duration of the arbitration
+intereference (in µs, maximum is 100ms). The calling process will then sleep
+and wait for the next bus clock. The process is interruptible, though.
+
+Arbitration lost is achieved by waiting for SCL going down by the master under
+test and then pulling SDA low for some time. So, the I2C address sent out
+should be corrupted and that should be detected properly. That means that the
+address sent out should have a lot of '1' bits to be able to detect corruption.
+There doesn't need to be a device at this address because arbitration lost
+should be detected beforehand. Also note, that SCL going down is monitored
+using interrupts, so the interrupt latency might cause the first bits to be not
+corrupted. A good starting point for using this fault injector on an otherwise
+idle bus is:
+
+# echo 200 > lose_arbitration &
+# i2cget -y <bus_to_test> 0x3f
+
+Panic during transfer
+=====================
+
+This fault injector will create a Kernel panic once the master under test
+started a transfer. This usually means that the state machine of the bus master
+driver will be ungracefully interrupted and the bus may end up in an unusual
+state. Use this to check if your shutdown/reboot/boot code can handle this
+scenario.
+
+"inject_panic"
+--------------
+
+This file is write only and you need to write the delay between the detected
+start of a transmission and the induced Kernel panic (in µs, maximum is 100ms).
+The calling process will then sleep and wait for the next bus clock. The
+process is interruptible, though.
+
+Start of a transfer is detected by waiting for SCL going down by the master
+under test.  A good starting point for using this fault injector is:
+
+# echo 0 > inject_panic &
+# i2cget -y <bus_to_test> <some_address>
+
+Note that there doesn't need to be a device listening to the address you are
+using. Results may vary depending on that, though.
diff --git a/Documentation/index.rst b/Documentation/index.rst
index c858c2e66e36..a7566ef62411 100644
--- a/Documentation/index.rst
+++ b/Documentation/index.rst
@@ -35,6 +35,16 @@ trying to get it to work optimally on a given system.
 
    admin-guide/index
 
+Firmware-related documentation
+------------------------------
+The following holds information on the kernel's expectations regarding the
+platform firmwares.
+
+.. toctree::
+   :maxdepth: 2
+
+   firmware-guide/index
+
 Application-developer documentation
 -----------------------------------
 
@@ -83,6 +93,7 @@ needed).
    media/index
    networking/index
    input/index
+   hwmon/index
    gpu/index
    security/index
    sound/index
@@ -90,6 +101,7 @@ needed).
    filesystems/index
    vm/index
    bpf/index
+   misc-devices/index
 
 Architecture-specific documentation
 -----------------------------------
@@ -100,7 +112,9 @@ implementation.
 .. toctree::
    :maxdepth: 2
 
+   x86/index
    sh/index
+   x86/index
 
 Filesystem Documentation
 ------------------------
diff --git a/Documentation/infiniband/user_verbs.txt b/Documentation/infiniband/user_verbs.txt
index df049b9f5b6e..47ebf2f80b2b 100644
--- a/Documentation/infiniband/user_verbs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/infiniband/user_verbs.txt
@@ -46,11 +46,11 @@ Memory pinning
   I/O targets be kept resident at the same physical address.  The
   ib_uverbs module manages pinning and unpinning memory regions via
   get_user_pages() and put_page() calls.  It also accounts for the
-  amount of memory pinned in the process's locked_vm, and checks that
+  amount of memory pinned in the process's pinned_vm, and checks that
   unprivileged processes do not exceed their RLIMIT_MEMLOCK limit.
 
   Pages that are pinned multiple times are counted each time they are
-  pinned, so the value of locked_vm may be an overestimate of the
+  pinned, so the value of pinned_vm may be an overestimate of the
   number of pages pinned by a process.
 
 /dev files
diff --git a/Documentation/input/devices/xpad.rst b/Documentation/input/devices/xpad.rst
index b8bd65962dd8..173c2acda9fd 100644
--- a/Documentation/input/devices/xpad.rst
+++ b/Documentation/input/devices/xpad.rst
@@ -218,7 +218,7 @@ References
 .. [1] http://euc.jp/periphs/xbox-controller.ja.html (ITO Takayuki)
 .. [2] http://xpad.xbox-scene.com/
 .. [3] http://www.markosweb.com/www/xboxhackz.com/
-.. [4] http://lxr.free-electrons.com/ident?i=xpad_device
+.. [4] https://elixir.bootlin.com/linux/latest/ident/xpad_device
 
 
 Historic Edits
diff --git a/Documentation/interconnect/interconnect.rst b/Documentation/interconnect/interconnect.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b8107dcc4cd3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/interconnect/interconnect.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,94 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=====================================
+GENERIC SYSTEM INTERCONNECT SUBSYSTEM
+=====================================
+
+Introduction
+------------
+
+This framework is designed to provide a standard kernel interface to control
+the settings of the interconnects on an SoC. These settings can be throughput,
+latency and priority between multiple interconnected devices or functional
+blocks. This can be controlled dynamically in order to save power or provide
+maximum performance.
+
+The interconnect bus is hardware with configurable parameters, which can be
+set on a data path according to the requests received from various drivers.
+An example of interconnect buses are the interconnects between various
+components or functional blocks in chipsets. There can be multiple interconnects
+on an SoC that can be multi-tiered.
+
+Below is a simplified diagram of a real-world SoC interconnect bus topology.
+
+::
+
+ +----------------+    +----------------+
+ | HW Accelerator |--->|      M NoC     |<---------------+
+ +----------------+    +----------------+                |
+                         |      |                    +------------+
+  +-----+  +-------------+      V       +------+     |            |
+  | DDR |  |                +--------+  | PCIe |     |            |
+  +-----+  |                | Slaves |  +------+     |            |
+    ^ ^    |                +--------+     |         |   C NoC    |
+    | |    V                               V         |            |
+ +------------------+   +------------------------+   |            |   +-----+
+ |                  |-->|                        |-->|            |-->| CPU |
+ |                  |-->|                        |<--|            |   +-----+
+ |     Mem NoC      |   |         S NoC          |   +------------+
+ |                  |<--|                        |---------+    |
+ |                  |<--|                        |<------+ |    |   +--------+
+ +------------------+   +------------------------+       | |    +-->| Slaves |
+   ^  ^    ^    ^          ^                             | |        +--------+
+   |  |    |    |          |                             | V
+ +------+  |  +-----+   +-----+  +---------+   +----------------+   +--------+
+ | CPUs |  |  | GPU |   | DSP |  | Masters |-->|       P NoC    |-->| Slaves |
+ +------+  |  +-----+   +-----+  +---------+   +----------------+   +--------+
+           |
+       +-------+
+       | Modem |
+       +-------+
+
+Terminology
+-----------
+
+Interconnect provider is the software definition of the interconnect hardware.
+The interconnect providers on the above diagram are M NoC, S NoC, C NoC, P NoC
+and Mem NoC.
+
+Interconnect node is the software definition of the interconnect hardware
+port. Each interconnect provider consists of multiple interconnect nodes,
+which are connected to other SoC components including other interconnect
+providers. The point on the diagram where the CPUs connect to the memory is
+called an interconnect node, which belongs to the Mem NoC interconnect provider.
+
+Interconnect endpoints are the first or the last element of the path. Every
+endpoint is a node, but not every node is an endpoint.
+
+Interconnect path is everything between two endpoints including all the nodes
+that have to be traversed to reach from a source to destination node. It may
+include multiple master-slave pairs across several interconnect providers.
+
+Interconnect consumers are the entities which make use of the data paths exposed
+by the providers. The consumers send requests to providers requesting various
+throughput, latency and priority. Usually the consumers are device drivers, that
+send request based on their needs. An example for a consumer is a video decoder
+that supports various formats and image sizes.
+
+Interconnect providers
+----------------------
+
+Interconnect provider is an entity that implements methods to initialize and
+configure interconnect bus hardware. The interconnect provider drivers should
+be registered with the interconnect provider core.
+
+.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/interconnect-provider.h
+
+Interconnect consumers
+----------------------
+
+Interconnect consumers are the clients which use the interconnect APIs to
+get paths between endpoints and set their bandwidth/latency/QoS requirements
+for these interconnect paths.
+
+.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/interconnect.h
diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt
index c9e3d93e7a89..9c230ea71963 100644
--- a/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt
@@ -11,6 +11,11 @@ modules.builtin
 This file lists all modules that are built into the kernel. This is used
 by modprobe to not fail when trying to load something builtin.
 
+modules.builtin.modinfo
+--------------------------------------------------
+This file contains modinfo from all modules that are built into the kernel.
+Unlike modinfo of a separate module, all fields are prefixed with module name.
+
 
 Environment variables
 
@@ -232,17 +237,12 @@ KBUILD_LDS
 --------------------------------------------------
 The linker script with full path. Assigned by the top-level Makefile.
 
-KBUILD_VMLINUX_INIT
---------------------------------------------------
-All object files for the init (first) part of vmlinux.
-Files specified with KBUILD_VMLINUX_INIT are linked first.
-
-KBUILD_VMLINUX_MAIN
+KBUILD_VMLINUX_OBJS
 --------------------------------------------------
-All object files for the main part of vmlinux.
+All object files for vmlinux. They are linked to vmlinux in the same
+order as listed in KBUILD_VMLINUX_OBJS.
 
 KBUILD_VMLINUX_LIBS
 --------------------------------------------------
-All .a "lib" files for vmlinux.
-KBUILD_VMLINUX_INIT, KBUILD_VMLINUX_MAIN, and KBUILD_VMLINUX_LIBS together
-specify all the object files used to link vmlinux.
+All .a "lib" files for vmlinux. KBUILD_VMLINUX_OBJS and KBUILD_VMLINUX_LIBS
+together specify all the object files used to link vmlinux.
diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt
index bf28c47bfd72..d65ad5746f94 100644
--- a/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt
@@ -154,13 +154,8 @@ more details, with real examples.
 
 	Kbuild compiles all the $(obj-y) files.  It then calls
 	"$(AR) rcSTP" to merge these files into one built-in.a file.
-	This is a thin archive without a symbol table, which makes it
-	unsuitable as a linker input.
-
-	The scripts/link-vmlinux.sh script later makes an aggregate
-	built-in.a with "${AR} rcsTP", which creates the thin archive
-	with a symbol table and an index, making it a valid input for
-	the final vmlinux link passes.
+	This is a thin archive without a symbol table. It will be later
+	linked into vmlinux by scripts/link-vmlinux.sh
 
 	The order of files in $(obj-y) is significant.  Duplicates in
 	the lists are allowed: the first instance will be linked into
@@ -442,20 +437,6 @@ more details, with real examples.
 	The second argument is optional, and if supplied will be used
 	if first argument is not supported.
 
-    cc-ldoption
-	cc-ldoption is used to check if $(CC) when used to link object files
-	supports the given option.  An optional second option may be
-	specified if first option are not supported.
-
-	Example:
-		#arch/x86/kernel/Makefile
-		vsyscall-flags += $(call cc-ldoption, -Wl$(comma)--hash-style=sysv)
-
-	In the above example, vsyscall-flags will be assigned the option
-	-Wl$(comma)--hash-style=sysv if it is supported by $(CC).
-	The second argument is optional, and if supplied will be used
-	if first argument is not supported.
-
     as-instr
 	as-instr checks if the assembler reports a specific instruction
 	and then outputs either option1 or option2
@@ -504,23 +485,6 @@ more details, with real examples.
 	In the above example, -Wno-unused-but-set-variable will be added to
 	KBUILD_CFLAGS only if gcc really accepts it.
 
-    cc-version
-	cc-version returns a numerical version of the $(CC) compiler version.
-	The format is <major><minor> where both are two digits. So for example
-	gcc 3.41 would return 0341.
-	cc-version is useful when a specific $(CC) version is faulty in one
-	area, for example -mregparm=3 was broken in some gcc versions
-	even though the option was accepted by gcc.
-
-	Example:
-		#arch/x86/Makefile
-		cflags-y += $(shell \
-		if [ $(cc-version) -ge 0300 ] ; then \
-			echo "-mregparm=3"; fi ;)
-
-	In the above example, -mregparm=3 is only used for gcc version greater
-	than or equal to gcc 3.0.
-
     cc-ifversion
 	cc-ifversion tests the version of $(CC) and equals the fourth parameter
 	if version expression is true, or the fifth (if given) if the version
@@ -1296,7 +1260,7 @@ See subsequent chapter for the syntax of the Kbuild file.
 
 --- 7.4 mandatory-y
 
-	mandatory-y is essentially used by include/(uapi/)asm-generic/Kbuild.asm
+	mandatory-y is essentially used by include/(uapi/)asm-generic/Kbuild
 	to define the minimum set of ASM headers that all architectures must have.
 
 	This works like optional generic-y. If a mandatory header is missing
diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/modules.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/modules.txt
index 3fb39e0116b4..80295c613e37 100644
--- a/Documentation/kbuild/modules.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kbuild/modules.txt
@@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ executed to make module versioning work.
 		make -C $KDIR M=$PWD bar.lst
 		make -C $KDIR M=$PWD baz.o
 		make -C $KDIR M=$PWD foo.ko
-		make -C $KDIR M=$PWD /
+		make -C $KDIR M=$PWD ./
 
 
 === 3. Creating a Kbuild File for an External Module
diff --git a/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt b/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt
index 51814450a7f8..3162eeb8c262 100644
--- a/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt
@@ -410,7 +410,7 @@ Notes on loading the dump-capture kernel:
 * Boot parameter "1" boots the dump-capture kernel into single-user
   mode without networking. If you want networking, use "3".
 
-* We generally don' have to bring up a SMP kernel just to capture the
+* We generally don't have to bring up a SMP kernel just to capture the
   dump. Hence generally it is useful either to build a UP dump-capture
   kernel or specify maxcpus=1 option while loading dump-capture kernel.
   Note, though maxcpus always works, you had better replace it with
diff --git a/Documentation/kdump/vmcoreinfo.txt b/Documentation/kdump/vmcoreinfo.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..bb94a4bd597a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/kdump/vmcoreinfo.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,495 @@
+================================================================
+			VMCOREINFO
+================================================================
+
+===========
+What is it?
+===========
+
+VMCOREINFO is a special ELF note section. It contains various
+information from the kernel like structure size, page size, symbol
+values, field offsets, etc. These data are packed into an ELF note
+section and used by user-space tools like crash and makedumpfile to
+analyze a kernel's memory layout.
+
+================
+Common variables
+================
+
+init_uts_ns.name.release
+------------------------
+
+The version of the Linux kernel. Used to find the corresponding source
+code from which the kernel has been built. For example, crash uses it to
+find the corresponding vmlinux in order to process vmcore.
+
+PAGE_SIZE
+---------
+
+The size of a page. It is the smallest unit of data used by the memory
+management facilities. It is usually 4096 bytes of size and a page is
+aligned on 4096 bytes. Used for computing page addresses.
+
+init_uts_ns
+-----------
+
+The UTS namespace which is used to isolate two specific elements of the
+system that relate to the uname(2) system call. It is named after the
+data structure used to store information returned by the uname(2) system
+call.
+
+User-space tools can get the kernel name, host name, kernel release
+number, kernel version, architecture name and OS type from it.
+
+node_online_map
+---------------
+
+An array node_states[N_ONLINE] which represents the set of online nodes
+in a system, one bit position per node number. Used to keep track of
+which nodes are in the system and online.
+
+swapper_pg_dir
+-------------
+
+The global page directory pointer of the kernel. Used to translate
+virtual to physical addresses.
+
+_stext
+------
+
+Defines the beginning of the text section. In general, _stext indicates
+the kernel start address. Used to convert a virtual address from the
+direct kernel map to a physical address.
+
+vmap_area_list
+--------------
+
+Stores the virtual area list. makedumpfile gets the vmalloc start value
+from this variable and its value is necessary for vmalloc translation.
+
+mem_map
+-------
+
+Physical addresses are translated to struct pages by treating them as
+an index into the mem_map array. Right-shifting a physical address
+PAGE_SHIFT bits converts it into a page frame number which is an index
+into that mem_map array.
+
+Used to map an address to the corresponding struct page.
+
+contig_page_data
+----------------
+
+Makedumpfile gets the pglist_data structure from this symbol, which is
+used to describe the memory layout.
+
+User-space tools use this to exclude free pages when dumping memory.
+
+mem_section|(mem_section, NR_SECTION_ROOTS)|(mem_section, section_mem_map)
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+The address of the mem_section array, its length, structure size, and
+the section_mem_map offset.
+
+It exists in the sparse memory mapping model, and it is also somewhat
+similar to the mem_map variable, both of them are used to translate an
+address.
+
+page
+----
+
+The size of a page structure. struct page is an important data structure
+and it is widely used to compute contiguous memory.
+
+pglist_data
+-----------
+
+The size of a pglist_data structure. This value is used to check if the
+pglist_data structure is valid. It is also used for checking the memory
+type.
+
+zone
+----
+
+The size of a zone structure. This value is used to check if the zone
+structure has been found. It is also used for excluding free pages.
+
+free_area
+---------
+
+The size of a free_area structure. It indicates whether the free_area
+structure is valid or not. Useful when excluding free pages.
+
+list_head
+---------
+
+The size of a list_head structure. Used when iterating lists in a
+post-mortem analysis session.
+
+nodemask_t
+----------
+
+The size of a nodemask_t type. Used to compute the number of online
+nodes.
+
+(page, flags|_refcount|mapping|lru|_mapcount|private|compound_dtor|
+       compound_order|compound_head)
+-------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+User-space tools compute their values based on the offset of these
+variables. The variables are used when excluding unnecessary pages.
+
+(pglist_data, node_zones|nr_zones|node_mem_map|node_start_pfn|node_
+              spanned_pages|node_id)
+-------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+On NUMA machines, each NUMA node has a pg_data_t to describe its memory
+layout. On UMA machines there is a single pglist_data which describes the
+whole memory.
+
+These values are used to check the memory type and to compute the
+virtual address for memory map.
+
+(zone, free_area|vm_stat|spanned_pages)
+---------------------------------------
+
+Each node is divided into a number of blocks called zones which
+represent ranges within memory. A zone is described by a structure zone.
+
+User-space tools compute required values based on the offset of these
+variables.
+
+(free_area, free_list)
+----------------------
+
+Offset of the free_list's member. This value is used to compute the number
+of free pages.
+
+Each zone has a free_area structure array called free_area[MAX_ORDER].
+The free_list represents a linked list of free page blocks.
+
+(list_head, next|prev)
+----------------------
+
+Offsets of the list_head's members. list_head is used to define a
+circular linked list. User-space tools need these in order to traverse
+lists.
+
+(vmap_area, va_start|list)
+--------------------------
+
+Offsets of the vmap_area's members. They carry vmalloc-specific
+information. Makedumpfile gets the start address of the vmalloc region
+from this.
+
+(zone.free_area, MAX_ORDER)
+---------------------------
+
+Free areas descriptor. User-space tools use this value to iterate the
+free_area ranges. MAX_ORDER is used by the zone buddy allocator.
+
+log_first_idx
+-------------
+
+Index of the first record stored in the buffer log_buf. Used by
+user-space tools to read the strings in the log_buf.
+
+log_buf
+-------
+
+Console output is written to the ring buffer log_buf at index
+log_first_idx. Used to get the kernel log.
+
+log_buf_len
+-----------
+
+log_buf's length.
+
+clear_idx
+---------
+
+The index that the next printk() record to read after the last clear
+command. It indicates the first record after the last SYSLOG_ACTION
+_CLEAR, like issued by 'dmesg -c'. Used by user-space tools to dump
+the dmesg log.
+
+log_next_idx
+------------
+
+The index of the next record to store in the buffer log_buf. Used to
+compute the index of the current buffer position.
+
+printk_log
+----------
+
+The size of a structure printk_log. Used to compute the size of
+messages, and extract dmesg log. It encapsulates header information for
+log_buf, such as timestamp, syslog level, etc.
+
+(printk_log, ts_nsec|len|text_len|dict_len)
+-------------------------------------------
+
+It represents field offsets in struct printk_log. User space tools
+parse it and check whether the values of printk_log's members have been
+changed.
+
+(free_area.free_list, MIGRATE_TYPES)
+------------------------------------
+
+The number of migrate types for pages. The free_list is described by the
+array. Used by tools to compute the number of free pages.
+
+NR_FREE_PAGES
+-------------
+
+On linux-2.6.21 or later, the number of free pages is in
+vm_stat[NR_FREE_PAGES]. Used to get the number of free pages.
+
+PG_lru|PG_private|PG_swapcache|PG_swapbacked|PG_slab|PG_hwpoision
+|PG_head_mask|PAGE_BUDDY_MAPCOUNT_VALUE(~PG_buddy)
+|PAGE_OFFLINE_MAPCOUNT_VALUE(~PG_offline)
+-----------------------------------------------------------------
+
+Page attributes. These flags are used to filter various unnecessary for
+dumping pages.
+
+HUGETLB_PAGE_DTOR
+-----------------
+
+The HUGETLB_PAGE_DTOR flag denotes hugetlbfs pages. Makedumpfile
+excludes these pages.
+
+======
+x86_64
+======
+
+phys_base
+---------
+
+Used to convert the virtual address of an exported kernel symbol to its
+corresponding physical address.
+
+init_top_pgt
+------------
+
+Used to walk through the whole page table and convert virtual addresses
+to physical addresses. The init_top_pgt is somewhat similar to
+swapper_pg_dir, but it is only used in x86_64.
+
+pgtable_l5_enabled
+------------------
+
+User-space tools need to know whether the crash kernel was in 5-level
+paging mode.
+
+node_data
+---------
+
+This is a struct pglist_data array and stores all NUMA nodes
+information. Makedumpfile gets the pglist_data structure from it.
+
+(node_data, MAX_NUMNODES)
+-------------------------
+
+The maximum number of nodes in system.
+
+KERNELOFFSET
+------------
+
+The kernel randomization offset. Used to compute the page offset. If
+KASLR is disabled, this value is zero.
+
+KERNEL_IMAGE_SIZE
+-----------------
+
+Currently unused by Makedumpfile. Used to compute the module virtual
+address by Crash.
+
+sme_mask
+--------
+
+AMD-specific with SME support: it indicates the secure memory encryption
+mask. Makedumpfile tools need to know whether the crash kernel was
+encrypted. If SME is enabled in the first kernel, the crash kernel's
+page table entries (pgd/pud/pmd/pte) contain the memory encryption
+mask. This is used to remove the SME mask and obtain the true physical
+address.
+
+Currently, sme_mask stores the value of the C-bit position. If needed,
+additional SME-relevant info can be placed in that variable.
+
+For example:
+[ misc	        ][ enc bit  ][ other misc SME info       ]
+0000_0000_0000_0000_1000_0000_0000_0000_0000_0000_..._0000
+63   59   55   51   47   43   39   35   31   27   ... 3
+
+======
+x86_32
+======
+
+X86_PAE
+-------
+
+Denotes whether physical address extensions are enabled. It has the cost
+of a higher page table lookup overhead, and also consumes more page
+table space per process. Used to check whether PAE was enabled in the
+crash kernel when converting virtual addresses to physical addresses.
+
+====
+ia64
+====
+
+pgdat_list|(pgdat_list, MAX_NUMNODES)
+-------------------------------------
+
+pg_data_t array storing all NUMA nodes information. MAX_NUMNODES
+indicates the number of the nodes.
+
+node_memblk|(node_memblk, NR_NODE_MEMBLKS)
+------------------------------------------
+
+List of node memory chunks. Filled when parsing the SRAT table to obtain
+information about memory nodes. NR_NODE_MEMBLKS indicates the number of
+node memory chunks.
+
+These values are used to compute the number of nodes the crashed kernel used.
+
+node_memblk_s|(node_memblk_s, start_paddr)|(node_memblk_s, size)
+----------------------------------------------------------------
+
+The size of a struct node_memblk_s and the offsets of the
+node_memblk_s's members. Used to compute the number of nodes.
+
+PGTABLE_3|PGTABLE_4
+-------------------
+
+User-space tools need to know whether the crash kernel was in 3-level or
+4-level paging mode. Used to distinguish the page table.
+
+=====
+ARM64
+=====
+
+VA_BITS
+-------
+
+The maximum number of bits for virtual addresses. Used to compute the
+virtual memory ranges.
+
+kimage_voffset
+--------------
+
+The offset between the kernel virtual and physical mappings. Used to
+translate virtual to physical addresses.
+
+PHYS_OFFSET
+-----------
+
+Indicates the physical address of the start of memory. Similar to
+kimage_voffset, which is used to translate virtual to physical
+addresses.
+
+KERNELOFFSET
+------------
+
+The kernel randomization offset. Used to compute the page offset. If
+KASLR is disabled, this value is zero.
+
+====
+arm
+====
+
+ARM_LPAE
+--------
+
+It indicates whether the crash kernel supports large physical address
+extensions. Used to translate virtual to physical addresses.
+
+====
+s390
+====
+
+lowcore_ptr
+----------
+
+An array with a pointer to the lowcore of every CPU. Used to print the
+psw and all registers information.
+
+high_memory
+-----------
+
+Used to get the vmalloc_start address from the high_memory symbol.
+
+(lowcore_ptr, NR_CPUS)
+----------------------
+
+The maximum number of CPUs.
+
+=======
+powerpc
+=======
+
+
+node_data|(node_data, MAX_NUMNODES)
+-----------------------------------
+
+See above.
+
+contig_page_data
+----------------
+
+See above.
+
+vmemmap_list
+------------
+
+The vmemmap_list maintains the entire vmemmap physical mapping. Used
+to get vmemmap list count and populated vmemmap regions info. If the
+vmemmap address translation information is stored in the crash kernel,
+it is used to translate vmemmap kernel virtual addresses.
+
+mmu_vmemmap_psize
+-----------------
+
+The size of a page. Used to translate virtual to physical addresses.
+
+mmu_psize_defs
+--------------
+
+Page size definitions, i.e. 4k, 64k, or 16M.
+
+Used to make vtop translations.
+
+vmemmap_backing|(vmemmap_backing, list)|(vmemmap_backing, phys)|
+(vmemmap_backing, virt_addr)
+----------------------------------------------------------------
+
+The vmemmap virtual address space management does not have a traditional
+page table to track which virtual struct pages are backed by a physical
+mapping. The virtual to physical mappings are tracked in a simple linked
+list format.
+
+User-space tools need to know the offset of list, phys and virt_addr
+when computing the count of vmemmap regions.
+
+mmu_psize_def|(mmu_psize_def, shift)
+------------------------------------
+
+The size of a struct mmu_psize_def and the offset of mmu_psize_def's
+member.
+
+Used in vtop translations.
+
+==
+sh
+==
+
+node_data|(node_data, MAX_NUMNODES)
+-----------------------------------
+
+See above.
+
+X2TLB
+-----
+
+Indicates whether the crashed kernel enabled SH extended mode.
diff --git a/Documentation/kprobes.txt b/Documentation/kprobes.txt
index 10f4499e677c..8baab8832c5b 100644
--- a/Documentation/kprobes.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kprobes.txt
@@ -243,10 +243,10 @@ Optimization
 ^^^^^^^^^^^^
 
 The Kprobe-optimizer doesn't insert the jump instruction immediately;
-rather, it calls synchronize_sched() for safety first, because it's
+rather, it calls synchronize_rcu() for safety first, because it's
 possible for a CPU to be interrupted in the middle of executing the
-optimized region [3]_.  As you know, synchronize_sched() can ensure
-that all interruptions that were active when synchronize_sched()
+optimized region [3]_.  As you know, synchronize_rcu() can ensure
+that all interruptions that were active when synchronize_rcu()
 was called are done, but only if CONFIG_PREEMPT=n.  So, this version
 of kprobe optimization supports only kernels with CONFIG_PREEMPT=n [4]_.
 
@@ -321,6 +321,7 @@ architectures:
 - ppc
 - mips
 - s390
+- parisc
 
 Configuring Kprobes
 ===================
diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/lg-laptop.rst b/Documentation/laptops/lg-laptop.rst
index e486fe7ddc35..aa503ee9b3bc 100644
--- a/Documentation/laptops/lg-laptop.rst
+++ b/Documentation/laptops/lg-laptop.rst
@@ -1,4 +1,5 @@
 .. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+
 LG Gram laptop extra features
 =============================
 
@@ -9,6 +10,7 @@ Hotkeys
 -------
 
 The following FN keys are ignored by the kernel without this driver:
+
 - FN-F1 (LG control panel)   - Generates F15
 - FN-F5 (Touchpad toggle)    - Generates F13
 - FN-F6 (Airplane mode)      - Generates RFKILL
@@ -16,7 +18,7 @@ The following FN keys are ignored by the kernel without this driver:
   This key also changes keyboard backlight mode.
 - FN-F9 (Reader mode)        - Generates F14
 
-The rest of the FN key work without a need for a special driver.
+The rest of the FN keys work without a need for a special driver.
 
 
 Reader mode
diff --git a/Documentation/livepatch/callbacks.rst b/Documentation/livepatch/callbacks.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..470944aa8658
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/livepatch/callbacks.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,133 @@
+======================
+(Un)patching Callbacks
+======================
+
+Livepatch (un)patch-callbacks provide a mechanism for livepatch modules
+to execute callback functions when a kernel object is (un)patched.  They
+can be considered a **power feature** that **extends livepatching abilities**
+to include:
+
+  - Safe updates to global data
+
+  - "Patches" to init and probe functions
+
+  - Patching otherwise unpatchable code (i.e. assembly)
+
+In most cases, (un)patch callbacks will need to be used in conjunction
+with memory barriers and kernel synchronization primitives, like
+mutexes/spinlocks, or even stop_machine(), to avoid concurrency issues.
+
+1. Motivation
+=============
+
+Callbacks differ from existing kernel facilities:
+
+  - Module init/exit code doesn't run when disabling and re-enabling a
+    patch.
+
+  - A module notifier can't stop a to-be-patched module from loading.
+
+Callbacks are part of the klp_object structure and their implementation
+is specific to that klp_object.  Other livepatch objects may or may not
+be patched, irrespective of the target klp_object's current state.
+
+2. Callback types
+=================
+
+Callbacks can be registered for the following livepatch actions:
+
+  * Pre-patch
+                 - before a klp_object is patched
+
+  * Post-patch
+                 - after a klp_object has been patched and is active
+                   across all tasks
+
+  * Pre-unpatch
+                 - before a klp_object is unpatched (ie, patched code is
+                   active), used to clean up post-patch callback
+                   resources
+
+  * Post-unpatch
+                 - after a klp_object has been patched, all code has
+                   been restored and no tasks are running patched code,
+                   used to cleanup pre-patch callback resources
+
+3. How it works
+===============
+
+Each callback is optional, omitting one does not preclude specifying any
+other.  However, the livepatching core executes the handlers in
+symmetry: pre-patch callbacks have a post-unpatch counterpart and
+post-patch callbacks have a pre-unpatch counterpart.  An unpatch
+callback will only be executed if its corresponding patch callback was
+executed.  Typical use cases pair a patch handler that acquires and
+configures resources with an unpatch handler tears down and releases
+those same resources.
+
+A callback is only executed if its host klp_object is loaded.  For
+in-kernel vmlinux targets, this means that callbacks will always execute
+when a livepatch is enabled/disabled.  For patch target kernel modules,
+callbacks will only execute if the target module is loaded.  When a
+module target is (un)loaded, its callbacks will execute only if the
+livepatch module is enabled.
+
+The pre-patch callback, if specified, is expected to return a status
+code (0 for success, -ERRNO on error).  An error status code indicates
+to the livepatching core that patching of the current klp_object is not
+safe and to stop the current patching request.  (When no pre-patch
+callback is provided, the transition is assumed to be safe.)  If a
+pre-patch callback returns failure, the kernel's module loader will:
+
+  - Refuse to load a livepatch, if the livepatch is loaded after
+    targeted code.
+
+    or:
+
+  - Refuse to load a module, if the livepatch was already successfully
+    loaded.
+
+No post-patch, pre-unpatch, or post-unpatch callbacks will be executed
+for a given klp_object if the object failed to patch, due to a failed
+pre_patch callback or for any other reason.
+
+If a patch transition is reversed, no pre-unpatch handlers will be run
+(this follows the previously mentioned symmetry -- pre-unpatch callbacks
+will only occur if their corresponding post-patch callback executed).
+
+If the object did successfully patch, but the patch transition never
+started for some reason (e.g., if another object failed to patch),
+only the post-unpatch callback will be called.
+
+4. Use cases
+============
+
+Sample livepatch modules demonstrating the callback API can be found in
+samples/livepatch/ directory.  These samples were modified for use in
+kselftests and can be found in the lib/livepatch directory.
+
+Global data update
+------------------
+
+A pre-patch callback can be useful to update a global variable.  For
+example, 75ff39ccc1bd ("tcp: make challenge acks less predictable")
+changes a global sysctl, as well as patches the tcp_send_challenge_ack()
+function.
+
+In this case, if we're being super paranoid, it might make sense to
+patch the data *after* patching is complete with a post-patch callback,
+so that tcp_send_challenge_ack() could first be changed to read
+sysctl_tcp_challenge_ack_limit with READ_ONCE.
+
+__init and probe function patches support
+-----------------------------------------
+
+Although __init and probe functions are not directly livepatch-able, it
+may be possible to implement similar updates via pre/post-patch
+callbacks.
+
+The commit ``48900cb6af42 ("virtio-net: drop NETIF_F_FRAGLIST")`` change the way that
+virtnet_probe() initialized its driver's net_device features.  A
+pre/post-patch callback could iterate over all such devices, making a
+similar change to their hw_features value.  (Client functions of the
+value may need to be updated accordingly.)
diff --git a/Documentation/livepatch/callbacks.txt b/Documentation/livepatch/callbacks.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index c9776f48e458..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/livepatch/callbacks.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,605 +0,0 @@
-======================
-(Un)patching Callbacks
-======================
-
-Livepatch (un)patch-callbacks provide a mechanism for livepatch modules
-to execute callback functions when a kernel object is (un)patched.  They
-can be considered a "power feature" that extends livepatching abilities
-to include:
-
-  - Safe updates to global data
-
-  - "Patches" to init and probe functions
-
-  - Patching otherwise unpatchable code (i.e. assembly)
-
-In most cases, (un)patch callbacks will need to be used in conjunction
-with memory barriers and kernel synchronization primitives, like
-mutexes/spinlocks, or even stop_machine(), to avoid concurrency issues.
-
-Callbacks differ from existing kernel facilities:
-
-  - Module init/exit code doesn't run when disabling and re-enabling a
-    patch.
-
-  - A module notifier can't stop a to-be-patched module from loading.
-
-Callbacks are part of the klp_object structure and their implementation
-is specific to that klp_object.  Other livepatch objects may or may not
-be patched, irrespective of the target klp_object's current state.
-
-Callbacks can be registered for the following livepatch actions:
-
-  * Pre-patch    - before a klp_object is patched
-
-  * Post-patch   - after a klp_object has been patched and is active
-                   across all tasks
-
-  * Pre-unpatch  - before a klp_object is unpatched (ie, patched code is
-                   active), used to clean up post-patch callback
-                   resources
-
-  * Post-unpatch - after a klp_object has been patched, all code has
-                   been restored and no tasks are running patched code,
-                   used to cleanup pre-patch callback resources
-
-Each callback is optional, omitting one does not preclude specifying any
-other.  However, the livepatching core executes the handlers in
-symmetry: pre-patch callbacks have a post-unpatch counterpart and
-post-patch callbacks have a pre-unpatch counterpart.  An unpatch
-callback will only be executed if its corresponding patch callback was
-executed.  Typical use cases pair a patch handler that acquires and
-configures resources with an unpatch handler tears down and releases
-those same resources.
-
-A callback is only executed if its host klp_object is loaded.  For
-in-kernel vmlinux targets, this means that callbacks will always execute
-when a livepatch is enabled/disabled.  For patch target kernel modules,
-callbacks will only execute if the target module is loaded.  When a
-module target is (un)loaded, its callbacks will execute only if the
-livepatch module is enabled.
-
-The pre-patch callback, if specified, is expected to return a status
-code (0 for success, -ERRNO on error).  An error status code indicates
-to the livepatching core that patching of the current klp_object is not
-safe and to stop the current patching request.  (When no pre-patch
-callback is provided, the transition is assumed to be safe.)  If a
-pre-patch callback returns failure, the kernel's module loader will:
-
-  - Refuse to load a livepatch, if the livepatch is loaded after
-    targeted code.
-
-    or:
-
-  - Refuse to load a module, if the livepatch was already successfully
-    loaded.
-
-No post-patch, pre-unpatch, or post-unpatch callbacks will be executed
-for a given klp_object if the object failed to patch, due to a failed
-pre_patch callback or for any other reason.
-
-If a patch transition is reversed, no pre-unpatch handlers will be run
-(this follows the previously mentioned symmetry -- pre-unpatch callbacks
-will only occur if their corresponding post-patch callback executed).
-
-If the object did successfully patch, but the patch transition never
-started for some reason (e.g., if another object failed to patch),
-only the post-unpatch callback will be called.
-
-
-Example Use-cases
-=================
-
-Update global data
-------------------
-
-A pre-patch callback can be useful to update a global variable.  For
-example, 75ff39ccc1bd ("tcp: make challenge acks less predictable")
-changes a global sysctl, as well as patches the tcp_send_challenge_ack()
-function.
-
-In this case, if we're being super paranoid, it might make sense to
-patch the data *after* patching is complete with a post-patch callback,
-so that tcp_send_challenge_ack() could first be changed to read
-sysctl_tcp_challenge_ack_limit with READ_ONCE.
-
-
-Support __init and probe function patches
------------------------------------------
-
-Although __init and probe functions are not directly livepatch-able, it
-may be possible to implement similar updates via pre/post-patch
-callbacks.
-
-48900cb6af42 ("virtio-net: drop NETIF_F_FRAGLIST") change the way that
-virtnet_probe() initialized its driver's net_device features.  A
-pre/post-patch callback could iterate over all such devices, making a
-similar change to their hw_features value.  (Client functions of the
-value may need to be updated accordingly.)
-
-
-Test cases
-==========
-
-What follows is not an exhaustive test suite of every possible livepatch
-pre/post-(un)patch combination, but a selection that demonstrates a few
-important concepts.  Each test case uses the kernel modules located in
-the samples/livepatch/ and assumes that no livepatches are loaded at the
-beginning of the test.
-
-
-Test 1
-------
-
-Test a combination of loading a kernel module and a livepatch that
-patches a function in the first module.  (Un)load the target module
-before the livepatch module:
-
-- load target module
-- load livepatch
-- disable livepatch
-- unload target module
-- unload livepatch
-
-First load a target module:
-
-  % insmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-mod.ko
-  [   34.475708] livepatch_callbacks_mod: livepatch_callbacks_mod_init
-
-On livepatch enable, before the livepatch transition starts, pre-patch
-callbacks are executed for vmlinux and livepatch_callbacks_mod (those
-klp_objects currently loaded).  After klp_objects are patched according
-to the klp_patch, their post-patch callbacks run and the transition
-completes:
-
-  % insmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-demo.ko
-  [   36.503719] livepatch: enabling patch 'livepatch_callbacks_demo'
-  [   36.504213] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': initializing patching transition
-  [   36.504238] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_patch_callback: vmlinux
-  [   36.504721] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_patch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_LIVE] Normal state
-  [   36.505849] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': starting patching transition
-  [   37.727133] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': completing patching transition
-  [   37.727232] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_patch_callback: vmlinux
-  [   37.727860] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_patch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_LIVE] Normal state
-  [   37.728792] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': patching complete
-
-Similarly, on livepatch disable, pre-patch callbacks run before the
-unpatching transition starts.  klp_objects are reverted, post-patch
-callbacks execute and the transition completes:
-
-  % echo 0 > /sys/kernel/livepatch/livepatch_callbacks_demo/enabled
-  [   38.510209] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': initializing unpatching transition
-  [   38.510234] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_unpatch_callback: vmlinux
-  [   38.510982] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_unpatch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_LIVE] Normal state
-  [   38.512209] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': starting unpatching transition
-  [   39.711132] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': completing unpatching transition
-  [   39.711210] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_unpatch_callback: vmlinux
-  [   39.711779] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_unpatch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_LIVE] Normal state
-  [   39.712735] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': unpatching complete
-
-  % rmmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-demo.ko
-  % rmmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-mod.ko
-  [   42.534183] livepatch_callbacks_mod: livepatch_callbacks_mod_exit
-
-
-Test 2
-------
-
-This test is similar to the previous test, but (un)load the livepatch
-module before the target kernel module.  This tests the livepatch core's
-module_coming handler:
-
-- load livepatch
-- load target module
-- disable livepatch
-- unload livepatch
-- unload target module
-
-
-On livepatch enable, only pre/post-patch callbacks are executed for
-currently loaded klp_objects, in this case, vmlinux:
-
-  % insmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-demo.ko
-  [   44.553328] livepatch: enabling patch 'livepatch_callbacks_demo'
-  [   44.553997] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': initializing patching transition
-  [   44.554049] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_patch_callback: vmlinux
-  [   44.554845] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': starting patching transition
-  [   45.727128] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': completing patching transition
-  [   45.727212] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_patch_callback: vmlinux
-  [   45.727961] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': patching complete
-
-When a targeted module is subsequently loaded, only its pre/post-patch
-callbacks are executed:
-
-  % insmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-mod.ko
-  [   46.560845] livepatch: applying patch 'livepatch_callbacks_demo' to loading module 'livepatch_callbacks_mod'
-  [   46.561988] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_patch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_COMING] Full formed, running module_init
-  [   46.563452] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_patch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_COMING] Full formed, running module_init
-  [   46.565495] livepatch_callbacks_mod: livepatch_callbacks_mod_init
-
-On livepatch disable, all currently loaded klp_objects' (vmlinux and
-livepatch_callbacks_mod) pre/post-unpatch callbacks are executed:
-
-  % echo 0 > /sys/kernel/livepatch/livepatch_callbacks_demo/enabled
-  [   48.568885] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': initializing unpatching transition
-  [   48.568910] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_unpatch_callback: vmlinux
-  [   48.569441] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_unpatch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_LIVE] Normal state
-  [   48.570502] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': starting unpatching transition
-  [   49.759091] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': completing unpatching transition
-  [   49.759171] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_unpatch_callback: vmlinux
-  [   49.759742] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_unpatch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_LIVE] Normal state
-  [   49.760690] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': unpatching complete
-
-  % rmmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-demo.ko
-  % rmmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-mod.ko
-  [   52.592283] livepatch_callbacks_mod: livepatch_callbacks_mod_exit
-
-
-Test 3
-------
-
-Test loading the livepatch after a targeted kernel module, then unload
-the kernel module before disabling the livepatch.  This tests the
-livepatch core's module_going handler:
-
-- load target module
-- load livepatch
-- unload target module
-- disable livepatch
-- unload livepatch
-
-First load a target module, then the livepatch:
-
-  % insmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-mod.ko
-  [   54.607948] livepatch_callbacks_mod: livepatch_callbacks_mod_init
-
-  % insmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-demo.ko
-  [   56.613919] livepatch: enabling patch 'livepatch_callbacks_demo'
-  [   56.614411] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': initializing patching transition
-  [   56.614436] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_patch_callback: vmlinux
-  [   56.614818] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_patch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_LIVE] Normal state
-  [   56.615656] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': starting patching transition
-  [   57.759070] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': completing patching transition
-  [   57.759147] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_patch_callback: vmlinux
-  [   57.759621] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_patch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_LIVE] Normal state
-  [   57.760307] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': patching complete
-
-When a target module is unloaded, the livepatch is only reverted from
-that klp_object (livepatch_callbacks_mod).  As such, only its pre and
-post-unpatch callbacks are executed when this occurs:
-
-  % rmmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-mod.ko
-  [   58.623409] livepatch_callbacks_mod: livepatch_callbacks_mod_exit
-  [   58.623903] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_unpatch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_GOING] Going away
-  [   58.624658] livepatch: reverting patch 'livepatch_callbacks_demo' on unloading module 'livepatch_callbacks_mod'
-  [   58.625305] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_unpatch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_GOING] Going away
-
-When the livepatch is disabled, pre and post-unpatch callbacks are run
-for the remaining klp_object, vmlinux:
-
-  % echo 0 > /sys/kernel/livepatch/livepatch_callbacks_demo/enabled
-  [   60.638420] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': initializing unpatching transition
-  [   60.638444] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_unpatch_callback: vmlinux
-  [   60.638996] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': starting unpatching transition
-  [   61.727088] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': completing unpatching transition
-  [   61.727165] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_unpatch_callback: vmlinux
-  [   61.727985] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': unpatching complete
-
-  % rmmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-demo.ko
-
-
-Test 4
-------
-
-This test is similar to the previous test, however the livepatch is
-loaded first.  This tests the livepatch core's module_coming and
-module_going handlers:
-
-- load livepatch
-- load target module
-- unload target module
-- disable livepatch
-- unload livepatch
-
-First load the livepatch:
-
-  % insmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-demo.ko
-  [   64.661552] livepatch: enabling patch 'livepatch_callbacks_demo'
-  [   64.662147] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': initializing patching transition
-  [   64.662175] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_patch_callback: vmlinux
-  [   64.662850] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': starting patching transition
-  [   65.695056] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': completing patching transition
-  [   65.695147] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_patch_callback: vmlinux
-  [   65.695561] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': patching complete
-
-When a targeted kernel module is subsequently loaded, only its
-pre/post-patch callbacks are executed:
-
-  % insmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-mod.ko
-  [   66.669196] livepatch: applying patch 'livepatch_callbacks_demo' to loading module 'livepatch_callbacks_mod'
-  [   66.669882] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_patch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_COMING] Full formed, running module_init
-  [   66.670744] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_patch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_COMING] Full formed, running module_init
-  [   66.672873] livepatch_callbacks_mod: livepatch_callbacks_mod_init
-
-When the target module is unloaded, the livepatch is only reverted from
-the livepatch_callbacks_mod klp_object.  As such, only pre and
-post-unpatch callbacks are executed when this occurs:
-
-  % rmmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-mod.ko
-  [   68.680065] livepatch_callbacks_mod: livepatch_callbacks_mod_exit
-  [   68.680688] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_unpatch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_GOING] Going away
-  [   68.681452] livepatch: reverting patch 'livepatch_callbacks_demo' on unloading module 'livepatch_callbacks_mod'
-  [   68.682094] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_unpatch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_GOING] Going away
-
-  % echo 0 > /sys/kernel/livepatch/livepatch_callbacks_demo/enabled
-  [   70.689225] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': initializing unpatching transition
-  [   70.689256] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_unpatch_callback: vmlinux
-  [   70.689882] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': starting unpatching transition
-  [   71.711080] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': completing unpatching transition
-  [   71.711481] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_unpatch_callback: vmlinux
-  [   71.711988] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': unpatching complete
-
-  % rmmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-demo.ko
-
-
-Test 5
-------
-
-A simple test of loading a livepatch without one of its patch target
-klp_objects ever loaded (livepatch_callbacks_mod):
-
-- load livepatch
-- disable livepatch
-- unload livepatch
-
-Load the livepatch:
-
-  % insmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-demo.ko
-  [   74.711081] livepatch: enabling patch 'livepatch_callbacks_demo'
-  [   74.711595] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': initializing patching transition
-  [   74.711639] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_patch_callback: vmlinux
-  [   74.712272] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': starting patching transition
-  [   75.743137] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': completing patching transition
-  [   75.743219] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_patch_callback: vmlinux
-  [   75.743867] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': patching complete
-
-As expected, only pre/post-(un)patch handlers are executed for vmlinux:
-
-  % echo 0 > /sys/kernel/livepatch/livepatch_callbacks_demo/enabled
-  [   76.716254] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': initializing unpatching transition
-  [   76.716278] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_unpatch_callback: vmlinux
-  [   76.716666] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': starting unpatching transition
-  [   77.727089] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': completing unpatching transition
-  [   77.727194] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_unpatch_callback: vmlinux
-  [   77.727907] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': unpatching complete
-
-  % rmmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-demo.ko
-
-
-Test 6
-------
-
-Test a scenario where a vmlinux pre-patch callback returns a non-zero
-status (ie, failure):
-
-- load target module
-- load livepatch -ENODEV
-- unload target module
-
-First load a target module:
-
-  % insmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-mod.ko
-  [   80.740520] livepatch_callbacks_mod: livepatch_callbacks_mod_init
-
-Load the livepatch module, setting its 'pre_patch_ret' value to -19
-(-ENODEV).  When its vmlinux pre-patch callback executed, this status
-code will propagate back to the module-loading subsystem.  The result is
-that the insmod command refuses to load the livepatch module:
-
-  % insmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-demo.ko pre_patch_ret=-19
-  [   82.747326] livepatch: enabling patch 'livepatch_callbacks_demo'
-  [   82.747743] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': initializing patching transition
-  [   82.747767] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_patch_callback: vmlinux
-  [   82.748237] livepatch: pre-patch callback failed for object 'vmlinux'
-  [   82.748637] livepatch: failed to enable patch 'livepatch_callbacks_demo'
-  [   82.749059] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': canceling transition, going to unpatch
-  [   82.749060] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': completing unpatching transition
-  [   82.749868] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': unpatching complete
-  [   82.765809] insmod: ERROR: could not insert module samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-demo.ko: No such device
-
-  % rmmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-mod.ko
-  [   84.774238] livepatch_callbacks_mod: livepatch_callbacks_mod_exit
-
-
-Test 7
-------
-
-Similar to the previous test, setup a livepatch such that its vmlinux
-pre-patch callback returns success.  However, when a targeted kernel
-module is later loaded, have the livepatch return a failing status code:
-
-- load livepatch
-- setup -ENODEV
-- load target module
-- disable livepatch
-- unload livepatch
-
-Load the livepatch, notice vmlinux pre-patch callback succeeds:
-
-  % insmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-demo.ko
-  [   86.787845] livepatch: enabling patch 'livepatch_callbacks_demo'
-  [   86.788325] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': initializing patching transition
-  [   86.788427] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_patch_callback: vmlinux
-  [   86.788821] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': starting patching transition
-  [   87.711069] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': completing patching transition
-  [   87.711143] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_patch_callback: vmlinux
-  [   87.711886] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': patching complete
-
-Set a trap so subsequent pre-patch callbacks to this livepatch will
-return -ENODEV:
-
-  % echo -19 > /sys/module/livepatch_callbacks_demo/parameters/pre_patch_ret
-
-The livepatch pre-patch callback for subsequently loaded target modules
-will return failure, so the module loader refuses to load the kernel
-module.  Notice that no post-patch or pre/post-unpatch callbacks are
-executed for this klp_object:
-
-  % insmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-mod.ko
-  [   90.796976] livepatch: applying patch 'livepatch_callbacks_demo' to loading module 'livepatch_callbacks_mod'
-  [   90.797834] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_patch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_COMING] Full formed, running module_init
-  [   90.798900] livepatch: pre-patch callback failed for object 'livepatch_callbacks_mod'
-  [   90.799652] livepatch: patch 'livepatch_callbacks_demo' failed for module 'livepatch_callbacks_mod', refusing to load module 'livepatch_callbacks_mod'
-  [   90.819737] insmod: ERROR: could not insert module samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-mod.ko: No such device
-
-However, pre/post-unpatch callbacks run for the vmlinux klp_object:
-
-  % echo 0 > /sys/kernel/livepatch/livepatch_callbacks_demo/enabled
-  [   92.823547] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': initializing unpatching transition
-  [   92.823573] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_unpatch_callback: vmlinux
-  [   92.824331] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': starting unpatching transition
-  [   93.727128] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': completing unpatching transition
-  [   93.727327] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_unpatch_callback: vmlinux
-  [   93.727861] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': unpatching complete
-
-  % rmmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-demo.ko
-
-
-Test 8
-------
-
-Test loading multiple targeted kernel modules.  This test-case is
-mainly for comparing with the next test-case.
-
-- load busy target module (0s sleep),
-- load livepatch
-- load target module
-- unload target module
-- disable livepatch
-- unload livepatch
-- unload busy target module
-
-
-Load a target "busy" kernel module which kicks off a worker function
-that immediately exits:
-
-  % insmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-busymod.ko sleep_secs=0
-  [   96.910107] livepatch_callbacks_busymod: livepatch_callbacks_mod_init
-  [   96.910600] livepatch_callbacks_busymod: busymod_work_func, sleeping 0 seconds ...
-  [   96.913024] livepatch_callbacks_busymod: busymod_work_func exit
-
-Proceed with loading the livepatch and another ordinary target module,
-notice that the post-patch callbacks are executed and the transition
-completes quickly:
-
-  % insmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-demo.ko
-  [   98.917892] livepatch: enabling patch 'livepatch_callbacks_demo'
-  [   98.918426] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': initializing patching transition
-  [   98.918453] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_patch_callback: vmlinux
-  [   98.918955] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_patch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_busymod -> [MODULE_STATE_LIVE] Normal state
-  [   98.923835] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': starting patching transition
-  [   99.743104] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': completing patching transition
-  [   99.743156] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_patch_callback: vmlinux
-  [   99.743679] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_patch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_busymod -> [MODULE_STATE_LIVE] Normal state
-  [   99.744616] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': patching complete
-
-  % insmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-mod.ko
-  [  100.930955] livepatch: applying patch 'livepatch_callbacks_demo' to loading module 'livepatch_callbacks_mod'
-  [  100.931668] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_patch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_COMING] Full formed, running module_init
-  [  100.932645] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_patch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_COMING] Full formed, running module_init
-  [  100.934125] livepatch_callbacks_mod: livepatch_callbacks_mod_init
-
-  % rmmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-mod.ko
-  [  102.942805] livepatch_callbacks_mod: livepatch_callbacks_mod_exit
-  [  102.943640] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_unpatch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_GOING] Going away
-  [  102.944585] livepatch: reverting patch 'livepatch_callbacks_demo' on unloading module 'livepatch_callbacks_mod'
-  [  102.945455] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_unpatch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_GOING] Going away
-
-  % echo 0 > /sys/kernel/livepatch/livepatch_callbacks_demo/enabled
-  [  104.953815] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': initializing unpatching transition
-  [  104.953838] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_unpatch_callback: vmlinux
-  [  104.954431] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_unpatch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_busymod -> [MODULE_STATE_LIVE] Normal state
-  [  104.955426] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': starting unpatching transition
-  [  106.719073] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': completing unpatching transition
-  [  106.722633] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_unpatch_callback: vmlinux
-  [  106.723282] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_unpatch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_busymod -> [MODULE_STATE_LIVE] Normal state
-  [  106.724279] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': unpatching complete
-
-  % rmmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-demo.ko
-  % rmmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-busymod.ko
-  [  108.975660] livepatch_callbacks_busymod: livepatch_callbacks_mod_exit
-
-
-Test 9
-------
-
-A similar test as the previous one, but force the "busy" kernel module
-to do longer work.
-
-The livepatching core will refuse to patch a task that is currently
-executing a to-be-patched function -- the consistency model stalls the
-current patch transition until this safety-check is met.  Test a
-scenario where one of a livepatch's target klp_objects sits on such a
-function for a long time.  Meanwhile, load and unload other target
-kernel modules while the livepatch transition is in progress.
-
-- load busy target module (30s sleep)
-- load livepatch
-- load target module
-- unload target module
-- disable livepatch
-- unload livepatch
-- unload busy target module
-
-
-Load the "busy" kernel module, this time make it do 30 seconds worth of
-work:
-
-  % insmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-busymod.ko sleep_secs=30
-  [  110.993362] livepatch_callbacks_busymod: livepatch_callbacks_mod_init
-  [  110.994059] livepatch_callbacks_busymod: busymod_work_func, sleeping 30 seconds ...
-
-Meanwhile, the livepatch is loaded.  Notice that the patch transition
-does not complete as the targeted "busy" module is sitting on a
-to-be-patched function:
-
-  % insmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-demo.ko
-  [  113.000309] livepatch: enabling patch 'livepatch_callbacks_demo'
-  [  113.000764] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': initializing patching transition
-  [  113.000791] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_patch_callback: vmlinux
-  [  113.001289] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_patch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_busymod -> [MODULE_STATE_LIVE] Normal state
-  [  113.005208] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': starting patching transition
-
-Load a second target module (this one is an ordinary idle kernel
-module).  Note that *no* post-patch callbacks will be executed while the
-livepatch is still in transition:
-
-  % insmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-mod.ko
-  [  115.012740] livepatch: applying patch 'livepatch_callbacks_demo' to loading module 'livepatch_callbacks_mod'
-  [  115.013406] livepatch_callbacks_demo: pre_patch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_COMING] Full formed, running module_init
-  [  115.015315] livepatch_callbacks_mod: livepatch_callbacks_mod_init
-
-Request an unload of the simple kernel module.  The patch is still
-transitioning, so its pre-unpatch callbacks are skipped:
-
-  % rmmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-mod.ko
-  [  117.022626] livepatch_callbacks_mod: livepatch_callbacks_mod_exit
-  [  117.023376] livepatch: reverting patch 'livepatch_callbacks_demo' on unloading module 'livepatch_callbacks_mod'
-  [  117.024533] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_unpatch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_mod -> [MODULE_STATE_GOING] Going away
-
-Finally the livepatch is disabled.  Since none of the patch's
-klp_object's post-patch callbacks executed, the remaining klp_object's
-pre-unpatch callbacks are skipped:
-
-  % echo 0 > /sys/kernel/livepatch/livepatch_callbacks_demo/enabled
-  [  119.035408] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': reversing transition from patching to unpatching
-  [  119.035485] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': starting unpatching transition
-  [  119.711166] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': completing unpatching transition
-  [  119.714179] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_unpatch_callback: vmlinux
-  [  119.714653] livepatch_callbacks_demo: post_unpatch_callback: livepatch_callbacks_busymod -> [MODULE_STATE_LIVE] Normal state
-  [  119.715437] livepatch: 'livepatch_callbacks_demo': unpatching complete
-
-  % rmmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-demo.ko
-  % rmmod samples/livepatch/livepatch-callbacks-busymod.ko
-  [  141.279111] livepatch_callbacks_busymod: busymod_work_func exit
-  [  141.279760] livepatch_callbacks_busymod: livepatch_callbacks_mod_exit
diff --git a/Documentation/livepatch/cumulative-patches.rst b/Documentation/livepatch/cumulative-patches.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1931f318976a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/livepatch/cumulative-patches.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,102 @@
+===================================
+Atomic Replace & Cumulative Patches
+===================================
+
+There might be dependencies between livepatches. If multiple patches need
+to do different changes to the same function(s) then we need to define
+an order in which the patches will be installed. And function implementations
+from any newer livepatch must be done on top of the older ones.
+
+This might become a maintenance nightmare. Especially when more patches
+modified the same function in different ways.
+
+An elegant solution comes with the feature called "Atomic Replace". It allows
+creation of so called "Cumulative Patches". They include all wanted changes
+from all older livepatches and completely replace them in one transition.
+
+Usage
+-----
+
+The atomic replace can be enabled by setting "replace" flag in struct klp_patch,
+for example::
+
+	static struct klp_patch patch = {
+		.mod = THIS_MODULE,
+		.objs = objs,
+		.replace = true,
+	};
+
+All processes are then migrated to use the code only from the new patch.
+Once the transition is finished, all older patches are automatically
+disabled.
+
+Ftrace handlers are transparently removed from functions that are no
+longer modified by the new cumulative patch.
+
+As a result, the livepatch authors might maintain sources only for one
+cumulative patch. It helps to keep the patch consistent while adding or
+removing various fixes or features.
+
+Users could keep only the last patch installed on the system after
+the transition to has finished. It helps to clearly see what code is
+actually in use. Also the livepatch might then be seen as a "normal"
+module that modifies the kernel behavior. The only difference is that
+it can be updated at runtime without breaking its functionality.
+
+
+Features
+--------
+
+The atomic replace allows:
+
+  - Atomically revert some functions in a previous patch while
+    upgrading other functions.
+
+  - Remove eventual performance impact caused by core redirection
+    for functions that are no longer patched.
+
+  - Decrease user confusion about dependencies between livepatches.
+
+
+Limitations:
+------------
+
+  - Once the operation finishes, there is no straightforward way
+    to reverse it and restore the replaced patches atomically.
+
+    A good practice is to set .replace flag in any released livepatch.
+    Then re-adding an older livepatch is equivalent to downgrading
+    to that patch. This is safe as long as the livepatches do _not_ do
+    extra modifications in (un)patching callbacks or in the module_init()
+    or module_exit() functions, see below.
+
+    Also note that the replaced patch can be removed and loaded again
+    only when the transition was not forced.
+
+
+  - Only the (un)patching callbacks from the _new_ cumulative livepatch are
+    executed. Any callbacks from the replaced patches are ignored.
+
+    In other words, the cumulative patch is responsible for doing any actions
+    that are necessary to properly replace any older patch.
+
+    As a result, it might be dangerous to replace newer cumulative patches by
+    older ones. The old livepatches might not provide the necessary callbacks.
+
+    This might be seen as a limitation in some scenarios. But it makes life
+    easier in many others. Only the new cumulative livepatch knows what
+    fixes/features are added/removed and what special actions are necessary
+    for a smooth transition.
+
+    In any case, it would be a nightmare to think about the order of
+    the various callbacks and their interactions if the callbacks from all
+    enabled patches were called.
+
+
+  - There is no special handling of shadow variables. Livepatch authors
+    must create their own rules how to pass them from one cumulative
+    patch to the other. Especially that they should not blindly remove
+    them in module_exit() functions.
+
+    A good practice might be to remove shadow variables in the post-unpatch
+    callback. It is called only when the livepatch is properly disabled.
diff --git a/Documentation/livepatch/index.rst b/Documentation/livepatch/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..edd291d51847
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/livepatch/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+:orphan:
+
+===================
+Kernel Livepatching
+===================
+
+.. toctree::
+    :maxdepth: 1
+
+    livepatch
+    callbacks
+    cumulative-patches
+    module-elf-format
+    shadow-vars
+
+.. only::  subproject and html
+
+   Indices
+   =======
+
+   * :ref:`genindex`
diff --git a/Documentation/livepatch/livepatch.txt b/Documentation/livepatch/livepatch.rst
index 2d7ed09dbd59..c2c598c4ead8 100644
--- a/Documentation/livepatch/livepatch.txt
+++ b/Documentation/livepatch/livepatch.rst
@@ -4,22 +4,22 @@ Livepatch
 
 This document outlines basic information about kernel livepatching.
 
-Table of Contents:
-
-1. Motivation
-2. Kprobes, Ftrace, Livepatching
-3. Consistency model
-4. Livepatch module
-   4.1. New functions
-   4.2. Metadata
-   4.3. Livepatch module handling
-5. Livepatch life-cycle
-   5.1. Registration
-   5.2. Enabling
-   5.3. Disabling
-   5.4. Unregistration
-6. Sysfs
-7. Limitations
+.. Table of Contents:
+
+    1. Motivation
+    2. Kprobes, Ftrace, Livepatching
+    3. Consistency model
+    4. Livepatch module
+       4.1. New functions
+       4.2. Metadata
+    5. Livepatch life-cycle
+       5.1. Loading
+       5.2. Enabling
+       5.3. Replacing
+       5.4. Disabling
+       5.5. Removing
+    6. Sysfs
+    7. Limitations
 
 
 1. Motivation
@@ -40,14 +40,14 @@ There are multiple mechanisms in the Linux kernel that are directly related
 to redirection of code execution; namely: kernel probes, function tracing,
 and livepatching:
 
-  + The kernel probes are the most generic. The code can be redirected by
+  - The kernel probes are the most generic. The code can be redirected by
     putting a breakpoint instruction instead of any instruction.
 
-  + The function tracer calls the code from a predefined location that is
+  - The function tracer calls the code from a predefined location that is
     close to the function entry point. This location is generated by the
     compiler using the '-pg' gcc option.
 
-  + Livepatching typically needs to redirect the code at the very beginning
+  - Livepatching typically needs to redirect the code at the very beginning
     of the function entry before the function parameters or the stack
     are in any way modified.
 
@@ -143,9 +143,9 @@ without HAVE_RELIABLE_STACKTRACE are not considered fully supported by
 the kernel livepatching.
 
 The /sys/kernel/livepatch/<patch>/transition file shows whether a patch
-is in transition.  Only a single patch (the topmost patch on the stack)
-can be in transition at a given time.  A patch can remain in transition
-indefinitely, if any of the tasks are stuck in the initial patch state.
+is in transition.  Only a single patch can be in transition at a given
+time.  A patch can remain in transition indefinitely, if any of the tasks
+are stuck in the initial patch state.
 
 A transition can be reversed and effectively canceled by writing the
 opposite value to the /sys/kernel/livepatch/<patch>/enabled file while
@@ -158,12 +158,11 @@ If a patch is in transition, this file shows 0 to indicate the task is
 unpatched and 1 to indicate it's patched.  Otherwise, if no patch is in
 transition, it shows -1.  Any tasks which are blocking the transition
 can be signaled with SIGSTOP and SIGCONT to force them to change their
-patched state. This may be harmful to the system though.
-/sys/kernel/livepatch/<patch>/signal attribute provides a better alternative.
-Writing 1 to the attribute sends a fake signal to all remaining blocking
-tasks. No proper signal is actually delivered (there is no data in signal
-pending structures). Tasks are interrupted or woken up, and forced to change
-their patched state.
+patched state. This may be harmful to the system though. Sending a fake signal
+to all remaining blocking tasks is a better alternative. No proper signal is
+actually delivered (there is no data in signal pending structures). Tasks are
+interrupted or woken up, and forced to change their patched state. The fake
+signal is automatically sent every 15 seconds.
 
 Administrator can also affect a transition through
 /sys/kernel/livepatch/<patch>/force attribute. Writing 1 there clears
@@ -250,7 +249,7 @@ The patch contains only functions that are really modified. But they
 might want to access functions or data from the original source file
 that may only be locally accessible. This can be solved by a special
 relocation section in the generated livepatch module, see
-Documentation/livepatch/module-elf-format.txt for more details.
+Documentation/livepatch/module-elf-format.rst for more details.
 
 
 4.2. Metadata
@@ -259,7 +258,7 @@ Documentation/livepatch/module-elf-format.txt for more details.
 The patch is described by several structures that split the information
 into three levels:
 
-  + struct klp_func is defined for each patched function. It describes
+  - struct klp_func is defined for each patched function. It describes
     the relation between the original and the new implementation of a
     particular function.
 
@@ -276,7 +275,7 @@ into three levels:
     only for a particular object ( vmlinux or a kernel module ). Note that
     kallsyms allows for searching symbols according to the object name.
 
-  + struct klp_object defines an array of patched functions (struct
+  - struct klp_object defines an array of patched functions (struct
     klp_func) in the same object. Where the object is either vmlinux
     (NULL) or a module name.
 
@@ -286,7 +285,7 @@ into three levels:
     only when they are available.
 
 
-  + struct klp_patch defines an array of patched objects (struct
+  - struct klp_patch defines an array of patched objects (struct
     klp_object).
 
     This structure handles all patched functions consistently and eventually,
@@ -298,117 +297,112 @@ into three levels:
     see the "Consistency model" section.
 
 
-4.3. Livepatch module handling
-------------------------------
-
-The usual behavior is that the new functions will get used when
-the livepatch module is loaded. For this, the module init() function
-has to register the patch (struct klp_patch) and enable it. See the
-section "Livepatch life-cycle" below for more details about these
-two operations.
-
-Module removal is only safe when there are no users of the underlying
-functions. This is the reason why the force feature permanently disables
-the removal. The forced tasks entered the functions but we cannot say
-that they returned back.  Therefore it cannot be decided when the
-livepatch module can be safely removed. When the system is successfully
-transitioned to a new patch state (patched/unpatched) without being
-forced it is guaranteed that no task sleeps or runs in the old code.
-
-
 5. Livepatch life-cycle
 =======================
 
-Livepatching defines four basic operations that define the life cycle of each
-live patch: registration, enabling, disabling and unregistration.  There are
-several reasons why it is done this way.
+Livepatching can be described by five basic operations:
+loading, enabling, replacing, disabling, removing.
 
-First, the patch is applied only when all patched symbols for already
-loaded objects are found. The error handling is much easier if this
-check is done before particular functions get redirected.
+Where the replacing and the disabling operations are mutually
+exclusive. They have the same result for the given patch but
+not for the system.
 
-Second, it might take some time until the entire system is migrated with
-the hybrid consistency model being used. The patch revert might block
-the livepatch module removal for too long. Therefore it is useful to
-revert the patch using a separate operation that might be called
-explicitly. But it does not make sense to remove all information until
-the livepatch module is really removed.
 
+5.1. Loading
+------------
 
-5.1. Registration
------------------
+The only reasonable way is to enable the patch when the livepatch kernel
+module is being loaded. For this, klp_enable_patch() has to be called
+in the module_init() callback. There are two main reasons:
 
-Each patch first has to be registered using klp_register_patch(). This makes
-the patch known to the livepatch framework. Also it does some preliminary
-computing and checks.
+First, only the module has an easy access to the related struct klp_patch.
 
-In particular, the patch is added into the list of known patches. The
-addresses of the patched functions are found according to their names.
-The special relocations, mentioned in the section "New functions", are
-applied. The relevant entries are created under
-/sys/kernel/livepatch/<name>. The patch is rejected when any operation
-fails.
+Second, the error code might be used to refuse loading the module when
+the patch cannot get enabled.
 
 
 5.2. Enabling
 -------------
 
-Registered patches might be enabled either by calling klp_enable_patch() or
-by writing '1' to /sys/kernel/livepatch/<name>/enabled. The system will
-start using the new implementation of the patched functions at this stage.
+The livepatch gets enabled by calling klp_enable_patch() from
+the module_init() callback. The system will start using the new
+implementation of the patched functions at this stage.
+
+First, the addresses of the patched functions are found according to their
+names. The special relocations, mentioned in the section "New functions",
+are applied. The relevant entries are created under
+/sys/kernel/livepatch/<name>. The patch is rejected when any above
+operation fails.
+
+Second, livepatch enters into a transition state where tasks are converging
+to the patched state. If an original function is patched for the first
+time, a function specific struct klp_ops is created and an universal
+ftrace handler is registered\ [#]_. This stage is indicated by a value of '1'
+in /sys/kernel/livepatch/<name>/transition. For more information about
+this process, see the "Consistency model" section.
 
-When a patch is enabled, livepatch enters into a transition state where
-tasks are converging to the patched state.  This is indicated by a value
-of '1' in /sys/kernel/livepatch/<name>/transition.  Once all tasks have
-been patched, the 'transition' value changes to '0'.  For more
-information about this process, see the "Consistency model" section.
+Finally, once all tasks have been patched, the 'transition' value changes
+to '0'.
 
-If an original function is patched for the first time, a function
-specific struct klp_ops is created and an universal ftrace handler is
-registered.
+.. [#]
 
-Functions might be patched multiple times. The ftrace handler is registered
-only once for the given function. Further patches just add an entry to the
-list (see field `func_stack`) of the struct klp_ops. The last added
-entry is chosen by the ftrace handler and becomes the active function
-replacement.
+    Note that functions might be patched multiple times. The ftrace handler
+    is registered only once for a given function. Further patches just add
+    an entry to the list (see field `func_stack`) of the struct klp_ops.
+    The right implementation is selected by the ftrace handler, see
+    the "Consistency model" section.
 
-Note that the patches might be enabled in a different order than they were
-registered.
+    That said, it is highly recommended to use cumulative livepatches
+    because they help keeping the consistency of all changes. In this case,
+    functions might be patched two times only during the transition period.
 
 
-5.3. Disabling
+5.3. Replacing
 --------------
 
-Enabled patches might get disabled either by calling klp_disable_patch() or
-by writing '0' to /sys/kernel/livepatch/<name>/enabled. At this stage
-either the code from the previously enabled patch or even the original
-code gets used.
+All enabled patches might get replaced by a cumulative patch that
+has the .replace flag set.
 
-When a patch is disabled, livepatch enters into a transition state where
-tasks are converging to the unpatched state.  This is indicated by a
-value of '1' in /sys/kernel/livepatch/<name>/transition.  Once all tasks
-have been unpatched, the 'transition' value changes to '0'.  For more
-information about this process, see the "Consistency model" section.
+Once the new patch is enabled and the 'transition' finishes then
+all the functions (struct klp_func) associated with the replaced
+patches are removed from the corresponding struct klp_ops. Also
+the ftrace handler is unregistered and the struct klp_ops is
+freed when the related function is not modified by the new patch
+and func_stack list becomes empty.
 
-Here all the functions (struct klp_func) associated with the to-be-disabled
+See Documentation/livepatch/cumulative-patches.rst for more details.
+
+
+5.4. Disabling
+--------------
+
+Enabled patches might get disabled by writing '0' to
+/sys/kernel/livepatch/<name>/enabled.
+
+First, livepatch enters into a transition state where tasks are converging
+to the unpatched state. The system starts using either the code from
+the previously enabled patch or even the original one. This stage is
+indicated by a value of '1' in /sys/kernel/livepatch/<name>/transition.
+For more information about this process, see the "Consistency model"
+section.
+
+Second, once all tasks have been unpatched, the 'transition' value changes
+to '0'. All the functions (struct klp_func) associated with the to-be-disabled
 patch are removed from the corresponding struct klp_ops. The ftrace handler
 is unregistered and the struct klp_ops is freed when the func_stack list
 becomes empty.
 
-Patches must be disabled in exactly the reverse order in which they were
-enabled. It makes the problem and the implementation much easier.
+Third, the sysfs interface is destroyed.
 
 
-5.4. Unregistration
--------------------
-
-Disabled patches might be unregistered by calling klp_unregister_patch().
-This can be done only when the patch is disabled and the code is no longer
-used. It must be called before the livepatch module gets unloaded.
+5.5. Removing
+-------------
 
-At this stage, all the relevant sys-fs entries are removed and the patch
-is removed from the list of known patches.
+Module removal is only safe when there are no users of functions provided
+by the module. This is the reason why the force feature permanently
+disables the removal. Only when the system is successfully transitioned
+to a new patch state (patched/unpatched) without being forced it is
+guaranteed that no task sleeps or runs in the old code.
 
 
 6. Sysfs
@@ -418,8 +412,8 @@ Information about the registered patches can be found under
 /sys/kernel/livepatch. The patches could be enabled and disabled
 by writing there.
 
-/sys/kernel/livepatch/<patch>/signal and /sys/kernel/livepatch/<patch>/force
-attributes allow administrator to affect a patching operation.
+/sys/kernel/livepatch/<patch>/force attributes allow administrator to affect a
+patching operation.
 
 See Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-livepatch for more details.
 
@@ -429,7 +423,7 @@ See Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-livepatch for more details.
 
 The current Livepatch implementation has several limitations:
 
-  + Only functions that can be traced could be patched.
+  - Only functions that can be traced could be patched.
 
     Livepatch is based on the dynamic ftrace. In particular, functions
     implementing ftrace or the livepatch ftrace handler could not be
@@ -439,7 +433,7 @@ The current Livepatch implementation has several limitations:
 
 
 
-  + Livepatch works reliably only when the dynamic ftrace is located at
+  - Livepatch works reliably only when the dynamic ftrace is located at
     the very beginning of the function.
 
     The function need to be redirected before the stack or the function
@@ -453,7 +447,7 @@ The current Livepatch implementation has several limitations:
     this is handled on the ftrace level.
 
 
-  + Kretprobes using the ftrace framework conflict with the patched
+  - Kretprobes using the ftrace framework conflict with the patched
     functions.
 
     Both kretprobes and livepatches use a ftrace handler that modifies
@@ -461,7 +455,7 @@ The current Livepatch implementation has several limitations:
     is rejected when the handler is already in use by the other.
 
 
-  + Kprobes in the original function are ignored when the code is
+  - Kprobes in the original function are ignored when the code is
     redirected to the new implementation.
 
     There is a work in progress to add warnings about this situation.
diff --git a/Documentation/livepatch/module-elf-format.txt b/Documentation/livepatch/module-elf-format.rst
index f21a5289a09c..2a591e6f8e6c 100644
--- a/Documentation/livepatch/module-elf-format.txt
+++ b/Documentation/livepatch/module-elf-format.rst
@@ -4,33 +4,21 @@ Livepatch module Elf format
 
 This document outlines the Elf format requirements that livepatch modules must follow.
 
------------------
-Table of Contents
------------------
-0. Background and motivation
-1. Livepatch modinfo field
-2. Livepatch relocation sections
-   2.1 What are livepatch relocation sections?
-   2.2 Livepatch relocation section format
-       2.2.1 Required flags
-       2.2.2 Required name format
-       2.2.3 Example livepatch relocation section names
-       2.2.4 Example `readelf --sections` output
-       2.2.5 Example `readelf --relocs` output
-3. Livepatch symbols
-   3.1 What are livepatch symbols?
-   3.2 A livepatch module's symbol table
-   3.3 Livepatch symbol format
-       3.3.1 Required flags
-       3.3.2 Required name format
-       3.3.3 Example livepatch symbol names
-       3.3.4 Example `readelf --symbols` output
-4. Architecture-specific sections
-5. Symbol table and Elf section access
-
-----------------------------
-0. Background and motivation
-----------------------------
+
+.. Table of Contents
+
+   1. Background and motivation
+   2. Livepatch modinfo field
+   3. Livepatch relocation sections
+      3.1 Livepatch relocation section format
+   4. Livepatch symbols
+      4.1 A livepatch module's symbol table
+      4.2 Livepatch symbol format
+   5. Architecture-specific sections
+   6. Symbol table and Elf section access
+
+1. Background and motivation
+============================
 
 Formerly, livepatch required separate architecture-specific code to write
 relocations. However, arch-specific code to write relocations already
@@ -52,8 +40,8 @@ relocation sections and symbols, which are described in this document. The
 Elf constants used to mark livepatch symbols and relocation sections were
 selected from OS-specific ranges according to the definitions from glibc.
 
-0.1 Why does livepatch need to write its own relocations?
----------------------------------------------------------
+Why does livepatch need to write its own relocations?
+-----------------------------------------------------
 A typical livepatch module contains patched versions of functions that can
 reference non-exported global symbols and non-included local symbols.
 Relocations referencing these types of symbols cannot be left in as-is
@@ -72,13 +60,8 @@ relas reference are special livepatch symbols (see section 2 and 3). The
 arch-specific livepatch relocation code is replaced by a call to
 apply_relocate_add().
 
-================================
-PATCH MODULE FORMAT REQUIREMENTS
-================================
-
---------------------------
-1. Livepatch modinfo field
---------------------------
+2. Livepatch modinfo field
+==========================
 
 Livepatch modules are required to have the "livepatch" modinfo attribute.
 See the sample livepatch module in samples/livepatch/ for how this is done.
@@ -87,22 +70,23 @@ Livepatch modules can be identified by users by using the 'modinfo' command
 and looking for the presence of the "livepatch" field. This field is also
 used by the kernel module loader to identify livepatch modules.
 
-Example modinfo output:
------------------------
-% modinfo livepatch-meminfo.ko
-filename:		livepatch-meminfo.ko
-livepatch:		Y
-license:		GPL
-depends:
-vermagic:		4.3.0+ SMP mod_unload
-
---------------------------------
-2. Livepatch relocation sections
---------------------------------
-
--------------------------------------------
-2.1 What are livepatch relocation sections?
--------------------------------------------
+Example:
+--------
+
+**Modinfo output:**
+
+::
+
+	% modinfo livepatch-meminfo.ko
+	filename:		livepatch-meminfo.ko
+	livepatch:		Y
+	license:		GPL
+	depends:
+	vermagic:		4.3.0+ SMP mod_unload
+
+3. Livepatch relocation sections
+================================
+
 A livepatch module manages its own Elf relocation sections to apply
 relocations to modules as well as to the kernel (vmlinux) at the
 appropriate time. For example, if a patch module patches a driver that is
@@ -127,12 +111,9 @@ Every symbol referenced by a rela in a livepatch relocation section is a
 livepatch symbol. These must be resolved before livepatch can call
 apply_relocate_add(). See Section 3 for more information.
 
----------------------------------------
-2.2 Livepatch relocation section format
----------------------------------------
+3.1 Livepatch relocation section format
+=======================================
 
-2.2.1 Required flags
---------------------
 Livepatch relocation sections must be marked with the SHF_RELA_LIVEPATCH
 section flag. See include/uapi/linux/elf.h for the definition. The module
 loader recognizes this flag and will avoid applying those relocation sections
@@ -140,28 +121,39 @@ at patch module load time. These sections must also be marked with SHF_ALLOC,
 so that the module loader doesn't discard them on module load (i.e. they will
 be copied into memory along with the other SHF_ALLOC sections).
 
-2.2.2 Required name format
---------------------------
-The name of a livepatch relocation section must conform to the following format:
+The name of a livepatch relocation section must conform to the following
+format::
 
-.klp.rela.objname.section_name
-^        ^^     ^ ^          ^
-|________||_____| |__________|
-   [A]      [B]        [C]
+  .klp.rela.objname.section_name
+  ^        ^^     ^ ^          ^
+  |________||_____| |__________|
+     [A]      [B]        [C]
 
-[A] The relocation section name is prefixed with the string ".klp.rela."
-[B] The name of the object (i.e. "vmlinux" or name of module) to
-    which the relocation section belongs follows immediately after the prefix.
-[C] The actual name of the section to which this relocation section applies.
+[A]
+  The relocation section name is prefixed with the string ".klp.rela."
 
-2.2.3 Example livepatch relocation section names:
--------------------------------------------------
-.klp.rela.ext4.text.ext4_attr_store
-.klp.rela.vmlinux.text.cmdline_proc_show
+[B]
+  The name of the object (i.e. "vmlinux" or name of module) to
+  which the relocation section belongs follows immediately after the prefix.
+
+[C]
+  The actual name of the section to which this relocation section applies.
+
+Examples:
+---------
+
+**Livepatch relocation section names:**
+
+::
+
+  .klp.rela.ext4.text.ext4_attr_store
+  .klp.rela.vmlinux.text.cmdline_proc_show
+
+**`readelf --sections` output for a patch
+module that patches vmlinux and modules 9p, btrfs, ext4:**
+
+::
 
-2.2.4 Example `readelf --sections` output for a patch
-module that patches vmlinux and modules 9p, btrfs, ext4:
---------------------------------------------------------
   Section Headers:
   [Nr] Name                          Type                    Address          Off    Size   ES Flg Lk Inf Al
   [ snip ]
@@ -175,31 +167,33 @@ module that patches vmlinux and modules 9p, btrfs, ext4:
   [ snip ]                                       ^                                             ^
                                                  |                                             |
                                                 [*]                                           [*]
-[*] Livepatch relocation sections are SHT_RELA sections but with a few special
-characteristics. Notice that they are marked SHF_ALLOC ("A") so that they will
-not be discarded when the module is loaded into memory, as well as with the
-SHF_RELA_LIVEPATCH flag ("o" - for OS-specific).
-
-2.2.5 Example `readelf --relocs` output for a patch module:
------------------------------------------------------------
-Relocation section '.klp.rela.btrfs.text.btrfs_feature_attr_show' at offset 0x2ba0 contains 4 entries:
-    Offset             Info             Type               Symbol's Value  Symbol's Name + Addend
-000000000000001f  0000005e00000002 R_X86_64_PC32          0000000000000000 .klp.sym.vmlinux.printk,0 - 4
-0000000000000028  0000003d0000000b R_X86_64_32S           0000000000000000 .klp.sym.btrfs.btrfs_ktype,0 + 0
-0000000000000036  0000003b00000002 R_X86_64_PC32          0000000000000000 .klp.sym.btrfs.can_modify_feature.isra.3,0 - 4
-000000000000004c  0000004900000002 R_X86_64_PC32          0000000000000000 .klp.sym.vmlinux.snprintf,0 - 4
-[ snip ]                                                                   ^
-                                                                           |
-                                                                          [*]
-[*] Every symbol referenced by a relocation is a livepatch symbol.
-
---------------------
-3. Livepatch symbols
---------------------
-
--------------------------------
-3.1 What are livepatch symbols?
--------------------------------
+
+[*]
+  Livepatch relocation sections are SHT_RELA sections but with a few special
+  characteristics. Notice that they are marked SHF_ALLOC ("A") so that they will
+  not be discarded when the module is loaded into memory, as well as with the
+  SHF_RELA_LIVEPATCH flag ("o" - for OS-specific).
+
+**`readelf --relocs` output for a patch module:**
+
+::
+
+  Relocation section '.klp.rela.btrfs.text.btrfs_feature_attr_show' at offset 0x2ba0 contains 4 entries:
+      Offset             Info             Type               Symbol's Value  Symbol's Name + Addend
+  000000000000001f  0000005e00000002 R_X86_64_PC32          0000000000000000 .klp.sym.vmlinux.printk,0 - 4
+  0000000000000028  0000003d0000000b R_X86_64_32S           0000000000000000 .klp.sym.btrfs.btrfs_ktype,0 + 0
+  0000000000000036  0000003b00000002 R_X86_64_PC32          0000000000000000 .klp.sym.btrfs.can_modify_feature.isra.3,0 - 4
+  000000000000004c  0000004900000002 R_X86_64_PC32          0000000000000000 .klp.sym.vmlinux.snprintf,0 - 4
+  [ snip ]                                                                   ^
+                                                                             |
+                                                                            [*]
+
+[*]
+  Every symbol referenced by a relocation is a livepatch symbol.
+
+4. Livepatch symbols
+====================
+
 Livepatch symbols are symbols referred to by livepatch relocation sections.
 These are symbols accessed from new versions of functions for patched
 objects, whose addresses cannot be resolved by the module loader (because
@@ -219,9 +213,8 @@ loader can identify and ignore them. Livepatch modules keep these symbols
 in their symbol tables, and the symbol table is made accessible through
 module->symtab.
 
--------------------------------------
-3.2 A livepatch module's symbol table
--------------------------------------
+4.1 A livepatch module's symbol table
+=====================================
 Normally, a stripped down copy of a module's symbol table (containing only
 "core" symbols) is made available through module->symtab (See layout_symtab()
 in kernel/module.c). For livepatch modules, the symbol table copied into memory
@@ -231,71 +224,82 @@ relocation section refer to their respective symbols with their symbol indices,
 and the original symbol indices (and thus the symtab ordering) must be
 preserved in order for apply_relocate_add() to find the right symbol.
 
-For example, take this particular rela from a livepatch module:
-Relocation section '.klp.rela.btrfs.text.btrfs_feature_attr_show' at offset 0x2ba0 contains 4 entries:
-    Offset             Info             Type               Symbol's Value  Symbol's Name + Addend
-000000000000001f  0000005e00000002 R_X86_64_PC32          0000000000000000 .klp.sym.vmlinux.printk,0 - 4
-
-This rela refers to the symbol '.klp.sym.vmlinux.printk,0', and the symbol index is encoded
-in 'Info'. Here its symbol index is 0x5e, which is 94 in decimal, which refers to the
-symbol index 94.
-And in this patch module's corresponding symbol table, symbol index 94 refers to that very symbol:
-[ snip ]
-94: 0000000000000000     0 NOTYPE  GLOBAL DEFAULT OS [0xff20] .klp.sym.vmlinux.printk,0
-[ snip ]
-
----------------------------
-3.3 Livepatch symbol format
----------------------------
-
-3.3.1 Required flags
---------------------
+For example, take this particular rela from a livepatch module:::
+
+  Relocation section '.klp.rela.btrfs.text.btrfs_feature_attr_show' at offset 0x2ba0 contains 4 entries:
+      Offset             Info             Type               Symbol's Value  Symbol's Name + Addend
+  000000000000001f  0000005e00000002 R_X86_64_PC32          0000000000000000 .klp.sym.vmlinux.printk,0 - 4
+
+  This rela refers to the symbol '.klp.sym.vmlinux.printk,0', and the symbol index is encoded
+  in 'Info'. Here its symbol index is 0x5e, which is 94 in decimal, which refers to the
+  symbol index 94.
+  And in this patch module's corresponding symbol table, symbol index 94 refers to that very symbol:
+  [ snip ]
+  94: 0000000000000000     0 NOTYPE  GLOBAL DEFAULT OS [0xff20] .klp.sym.vmlinux.printk,0
+  [ snip ]
+
+4.2 Livepatch symbol format
+===========================
+
 Livepatch symbols must have their section index marked as SHN_LIVEPATCH, so
 that the module loader can identify them and not attempt to resolve them.
 See include/uapi/linux/elf.h for the actual definitions.
 
-3.3.2 Required name format
---------------------------
-Livepatch symbol names must conform to the following format:
-
-.klp.sym.objname.symbol_name,sympos
-^       ^^     ^ ^         ^ ^
-|_______||_____| |_________| |
-   [A]     [B]       [C]    [D]
-
-[A] The symbol name is prefixed with the string ".klp.sym."
-[B] The name of the object (i.e. "vmlinux" or name of module) to
-    which the symbol belongs follows immediately after the prefix.
-[C] The actual name of the symbol.
-[D] The position of the symbol in the object (as according to kallsyms)
-    This is used to differentiate duplicate symbols within the same
-    object. The symbol position is expressed numerically (0, 1, 2...).
-    The symbol position of a unique symbol is 0.
-
-3.3.3 Example livepatch symbol names:
--------------------------------------
-.klp.sym.vmlinux.snprintf,0
-.klp.sym.vmlinux.printk,0
-.klp.sym.btrfs.btrfs_ktype,0
-
-3.3.4 Example `readelf --symbols` output for a patch module:
-------------------------------------------------------------
-Symbol table '.symtab' contains 127 entries:
-   Num:    Value          Size Type    Bind   Vis     Ndx         Name
-   [ snip ]
-    73: 0000000000000000     0 NOTYPE  GLOBAL DEFAULT OS [0xff20] .klp.sym.vmlinux.snprintf,0
-    74: 0000000000000000     0 NOTYPE  GLOBAL DEFAULT OS [0xff20] .klp.sym.vmlinux.capable,0
-    75: 0000000000000000     0 NOTYPE  GLOBAL DEFAULT OS [0xff20] .klp.sym.vmlinux.find_next_bit,0
-    76: 0000000000000000     0 NOTYPE  GLOBAL DEFAULT OS [0xff20] .klp.sym.vmlinux.si_swapinfo,0
-  [ snip ]                                               ^
-                                                         |
-                                                        [*]
-[*] Note that the 'Ndx' (Section index) for these symbols is SHN_LIVEPATCH (0xff20).
-    "OS" means OS-specific.
-
----------------------------------
-4. Architecture-specific sections
----------------------------------
+Livepatch symbol names must conform to the following format::
+
+  .klp.sym.objname.symbol_name,sympos
+  ^       ^^     ^ ^         ^ ^
+  |_______||_____| |_________| |
+     [A]     [B]       [C]    [D]
+
+[A]
+  The symbol name is prefixed with the string ".klp.sym."
+
+[B]
+  The name of the object (i.e. "vmlinux" or name of module) to
+  which the symbol belongs follows immediately after the prefix.
+
+[C]
+  The actual name of the symbol.
+
+[D]
+  The position of the symbol in the object (as according to kallsyms)
+  This is used to differentiate duplicate symbols within the same
+  object. The symbol position is expressed numerically (0, 1, 2...).
+  The symbol position of a unique symbol is 0.
+
+Examples:
+---------
+
+**Livepatch symbol names:**
+
+::
+
+	.klp.sym.vmlinux.snprintf,0
+	.klp.sym.vmlinux.printk,0
+	.klp.sym.btrfs.btrfs_ktype,0
+
+**`readelf --symbols` output for a patch module:**
+
+::
+
+  Symbol table '.symtab' contains 127 entries:
+     Num:    Value          Size Type    Bind   Vis     Ndx         Name
+     [ snip ]
+      73: 0000000000000000     0 NOTYPE  GLOBAL DEFAULT OS [0xff20] .klp.sym.vmlinux.snprintf,0
+      74: 0000000000000000     0 NOTYPE  GLOBAL DEFAULT OS [0xff20] .klp.sym.vmlinux.capable,0
+      75: 0000000000000000     0 NOTYPE  GLOBAL DEFAULT OS [0xff20] .klp.sym.vmlinux.find_next_bit,0
+      76: 0000000000000000     0 NOTYPE  GLOBAL DEFAULT OS [0xff20] .klp.sym.vmlinux.si_swapinfo,0
+    [ snip ]                                               ^
+                                                           |
+                                                          [*]
+
+[*]
+  Note that the 'Ndx' (Section index) for these symbols is SHN_LIVEPATCH (0xff20).
+  "OS" means OS-specific.
+
+5. Architecture-specific sections
+=================================
 Architectures may override arch_klp_init_object_loaded() to perform
 additional arch-specific tasks when a target module loads, such as applying
 arch-specific sections. On x86 for example, we must apply per-object
@@ -304,20 +308,19 @@ These sections must be prefixed with ".klp.arch.$objname." so that they can
 be easily identified when iterating through a patch module's Elf sections
 (See arch/x86/kernel/livepatch.c for a complete example).
 
---------------------------------------
-5. Symbol table and Elf section access
---------------------------------------
+6. Symbol table and Elf section access
+======================================
 A livepatch module's symbol table is accessible through module->symtab.
 
 Since apply_relocate_add() requires access to a module's section headers,
 symbol table, and relocation section indices, Elf information is preserved for
 livepatch modules and is made accessible by the module loader through
 module->klp_info, which is a klp_modinfo struct. When a livepatch module loads,
-this struct is filled in by the module loader. Its fields are documented below:
-
-struct klp_modinfo {
-	Elf_Ehdr hdr; /* Elf header */
-	Elf_Shdr *sechdrs; /* Section header table */
-	char *secstrings; /* String table for the section headers */
-	unsigned int symndx; /* The symbol table section index */
-};
+this struct is filled in by the module loader. Its fields are documented below::
+
+	struct klp_modinfo {
+		Elf_Ehdr hdr; /* Elf header */
+		Elf_Shdr *sechdrs; /* Section header table */
+		char *secstrings; /* String table for the section headers */
+		unsigned int symndx; /* The symbol table section index */
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/livepatch/shadow-vars.txt b/Documentation/livepatch/shadow-vars.rst
index ecc09a7be5dd..c05715aeafa4 100644
--- a/Documentation/livepatch/shadow-vars.txt
+++ b/Documentation/livepatch/shadow-vars.rst
@@ -27,10 +27,13 @@ A hashtable references all shadow variables.  These references are
 stored and retrieved through a <obj, id> pair.
 
 * The klp_shadow variable data structure encapsulates both tracking
-meta-data and shadow-data:
+  meta-data and shadow-data:
+
   - meta-data
+
     - obj - pointer to parent object
     - id - data identifier
+
   - data[] - storage for shadow data
 
 It is important to note that the klp_shadow_alloc() and
@@ -47,31 +50,43 @@ to do actions that can be done only once when a new variable is allocated.
 
 * klp_shadow_alloc() - allocate and add a new shadow variable
   - search hashtable for <obj, id> pair
+
   - if exists
+
     - WARN and return NULL
+
   - if <obj, id> doesn't already exist
+
     - allocate a new shadow variable
     - initialize the variable using a custom constructor and data when provided
     - add <obj, id> to the global hashtable
 
 * klp_shadow_get_or_alloc() - get existing or alloc a new shadow variable
   - search hashtable for <obj, id> pair
+
   - if exists
+
     - return existing shadow variable
+
   - if <obj, id> doesn't already exist
+
     - allocate a new shadow variable
     - initialize the variable using a custom constructor and data when provided
     - add <obj, id> pair to the global hashtable
 
 * klp_shadow_free() - detach and free a <obj, id> shadow variable
   - find and remove a <obj, id> reference from global hashtable
+
     - if found
+
       - call destructor function if defined
       - free shadow variable
 
 * klp_shadow_free_all() - detach and free all <*, id> shadow variables
   - find and remove any <*, id> references from global hashtable
+
     - if found
+
       - call destructor function if defined
       - free shadow variable
 
@@ -102,12 +117,12 @@ parent "goes live" (ie, any shadow variable get-API requests are made
 for this <obj, id> pair.)
 
 For commit 1d147bfa6429, when a parent sta_info structure is allocated,
-allocate a shadow copy of the ps_lock pointer, then initialize it:
+allocate a shadow copy of the ps_lock pointer, then initialize it::
 
-#define PS_LOCK 1
-struct sta_info *sta_info_alloc(struct ieee80211_sub_if_data *sdata,
-				const u8 *addr, gfp_t gfp)
-{
+  #define PS_LOCK 1
+  struct sta_info *sta_info_alloc(struct ieee80211_sub_if_data *sdata,
+				  const u8 *addr, gfp_t gfp)
+  {
 	struct sta_info *sta;
 	spinlock_t *ps_lock;
 
@@ -123,10 +138,10 @@ struct sta_info *sta_info_alloc(struct ieee80211_sub_if_data *sdata,
 	...
 
 When requiring a ps_lock, query the shadow variable API to retrieve one
-for a specific struct sta_info:
+for a specific struct sta_info:::
 
-void ieee80211_sta_ps_deliver_wakeup(struct sta_info *sta)
-{
+  void ieee80211_sta_ps_deliver_wakeup(struct sta_info *sta)
+  {
 	spinlock_t *ps_lock;
 
 	/* sync with ieee80211_tx_h_unicast_ps_buf */
@@ -136,10 +151,10 @@ void ieee80211_sta_ps_deliver_wakeup(struct sta_info *sta)
 	...
 
 When the parent sta_info structure is freed, first free the shadow
-variable:
+variable::
 
-void sta_info_free(struct ieee80211_local *local, struct sta_info *sta)
-{
+  void sta_info_free(struct ieee80211_local *local, struct sta_info *sta)
+  {
 	klp_shadow_free(sta, PS_LOCK, NULL);
 	kfree(sta);
 	...
@@ -155,19 +170,19 @@ these cases, the klp_shadow_get_or_alloc() call can be used to attach
 shadow variables to parents already in-flight.
 
 For commit 1d147bfa6429, a good spot to allocate a shadow spinlock is
-inside ieee80211_sta_ps_deliver_wakeup():
+inside ieee80211_sta_ps_deliver_wakeup()::
 
-int ps_lock_shadow_ctor(void *obj, void *shadow_data, void *ctor_data)
-{
+  int ps_lock_shadow_ctor(void *obj, void *shadow_data, void *ctor_data)
+  {
 	spinlock_t *lock = shadow_data;
 
 	spin_lock_init(lock);
 	return 0;
-}
+  }
 
-#define PS_LOCK 1
-void ieee80211_sta_ps_deliver_wakeup(struct sta_info *sta)
-{
+  #define PS_LOCK 1
+  void ieee80211_sta_ps_deliver_wakeup(struct sta_info *sta)
+  {
 	spinlock_t *ps_lock;
 
 	/* sync with ieee80211_tx_h_unicast_ps_buf */
@@ -200,10 +215,12 @@ suggests how to handle the parent object.
 =============
 
 * https://github.com/dynup/kpatch
-The livepatch implementation is based on the kpatch version of shadow
-variables.
+
+  The livepatch implementation is based on the kpatch version of shadow
+  variables.
 
 * http://files.mkgnu.net/files/dynamos/doc/papers/dynamos_eurosys_07.pdf
-Dynamic and Adaptive Updates of Non-Quiescent Subsystems in Commodity
-Operating System Kernels (Kritis Makris, Kyung Dong Ryu 2007) presented
-a datatype update technique called "shadow data structures".
+
+  Dynamic and Adaptive Updates of Non-Quiescent Subsystems in Commodity
+  Operating System Kernels (Kritis Makris, Kyung Dong Ryu 2007) presented
+  a datatype update technique called "shadow data structures".
diff --git a/Documentation/locking/lockdep-design.txt b/Documentation/locking/lockdep-design.txt
index 49f58a07ee7b..39fae143c9cb 100644
--- a/Documentation/locking/lockdep-design.txt
+++ b/Documentation/locking/lockdep-design.txt
@@ -45,10 +45,10 @@ When locking rules are violated, these state bits are presented in the
 locking error messages, inside curlies. A contrived example:
 
    modprobe/2287 is trying to acquire lock:
-    (&sio_locks[i].lock){-.-...}, at: [<c02867fd>] mutex_lock+0x21/0x24
+    (&sio_locks[i].lock){-.-.}, at: [<c02867fd>] mutex_lock+0x21/0x24
 
    but task is already holding lock:
-    (&sio_locks[i].lock){-.-...}, at: [<c02867fd>] mutex_lock+0x21/0x24
+    (&sio_locks[i].lock){-.-.}, at: [<c02867fd>] mutex_lock+0x21/0x24
 
 
 The bit position indicates STATE, STATE-read, for each of the states listed
diff --git a/Documentation/lzo.txt b/Documentation/lzo.txt
index 6fa6a93d0949..ca983328976b 100644
--- a/Documentation/lzo.txt
+++ b/Documentation/lzo.txt
@@ -78,16 +78,36 @@ Description
      is an implementation design choice independent on the algorithm or
      encoding.
 
+Versions
+
+0: Original version
+1: LZO-RLE
+
+Version 1 of LZO implements an extension to encode runs of zeros using run
+length encoding. This improves speed for data with many zeros, which is a
+common case for zram. This modifies the bitstream in a backwards compatible way
+(v1 can correctly decompress v0 compressed data, but v0 cannot read v1 data).
+
+For maximum compatibility, both versions are available under different names
+(lzo and lzo-rle). Differences in the encoding are noted in this document with
+e.g.: version 1 only.
+
 Byte sequences
 ==============
 
   First byte encoding::
 
-      0..17   : follow regular instruction encoding, see below. It is worth
-                noting that codes 16 and 17 will represent a block copy from
-                the dictionary which is empty, and that they will always be
+      0..16   : follow regular instruction encoding, see below. It is worth
+                noting that code 16 will represent a block copy from the
+                dictionary which is empty, and that it will always be
                 invalid at this place.
 
+      17      : bitstream version. If the first byte is 17, and compressed
+                stream length is at least 5 bytes (length of shortest possible
+                versioned bitstream), the next byte gives the bitstream version
+                (version 1 only).
+                Otherwise, the bitstream version is 0.
+
       18..21  : copy 0..3 literals
                 state = (byte - 17) = 0..3  [ copy <state> literals ]
                 skip byte
@@ -140,6 +160,11 @@ Byte sequences
            state = S (copy S literals after this block)
            End of stream is reached if distance == 16384
 
+        In version 1 only, this instruction is also used to encode a run of
+        zeros if distance = 0xbfff, i.e. H = 1 and the D bits are all 1.
+           In this case, it is followed by a fourth byte, X.
+           run length = ((X << 3) | (0 0 0 0 0 L L L)) + 4.
+
       0 0 1 L L L L L  (32..63)
            Copy of small block within 16kB distance (preferably less than 34B)
            length = 2 + (L ?: 31 + (zero_bytes * 255) + non_zero_byte)
@@ -165,7 +190,9 @@ Authors
 =======
 
   This document was written by Willy Tarreau <w@1wt.eu> on 2014/07/19 during an
-  analysis of the decompression code available in Linux 3.16-rc5. The code is
-  tricky, it is possible that this document contains mistakes or that a few
-  corner cases were overlooked. In any case, please report any doubt, fix, or
-  proposed updates to the author(s) so that the document can be updated.
+  analysis of the decompression code available in Linux 3.16-rc5, and updated
+  by Dave Rodgman <dave.rodgman@arm.com> on 2018/10/30 to introduce run-length
+  encoding. The code is tricky, it is possible that this document contains
+  mistakes or that a few corner cases were overlooked. In any case, please
+  report any doubt, fix, or proposed updates to the author(s) so that the
+  document can be updated.
diff --git a/Documentation/media/dvb-drivers/dvb-usb.rst b/Documentation/media/dvb-drivers/dvb-usb.rst
index 6679191819aa..b2d5d9e62b30 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/dvb-drivers/dvb-usb.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/dvb-drivers/dvb-usb.rst
@@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ https://linuxtv.org/wiki/index.php/DVB_USB
 
   2004-12-26
 
-  - refactored the dibusb-driver, splitted into separate files
+  - refactored the dibusb-driver, split into separate files
   - i2c-probing enabled
 
   2004-12-06
diff --git a/Documentation/media/index.rst b/Documentation/media/index.rst
index 0a222fc1d7ca..0301c25ff887 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/index.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/index.rst
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ Linux Media Subsystem Documentation
    v4l-drivers/index
    cec-drivers/index
 
-.. only::  subproject
+.. only:: html and subproject
 
    Indices
    =======
diff --git a/Documentation/media/kapi/dtv-core.rst b/Documentation/media/kapi/dtv-core.rst
index 17454a2cf6b0..ac005b46f23e 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/kapi/dtv-core.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/kapi/dtv-core.rst
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ Digital TV devices are implemented by several different drivers:
 - Frontend drivers that are usually implemented as two separate drivers:
 
   - A tuner driver that implements the logic with commands the part of the
-    hardware with is reponsible to tune into a digital TV transponder or
+    hardware with is responsible to tune into a digital TV transponder or
     physical channel. The output of a tuner is usually a baseband or
     Intermediate Frequency (IF) signal;
 
diff --git a/Documentation/media/kapi/dtv-frontend.rst b/Documentation/media/kapi/dtv-frontend.rst
index 8ea64742c7ba..fbc5517c8d5a 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/kapi/dtv-frontend.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/kapi/dtv-frontend.rst
@@ -328,7 +328,7 @@ Statistics collect
 
 On almost all frontend hardware, the bit and byte counts are stored by
 the hardware after a certain amount of time or after the total bit/block
-counter reaches a certain value (usually programable), for example, on
+counter reaches a certain value (usually programmable), for example, on
 every 1000 ms or after receiving 1,000,000 bits.
 
 So, if you read the registers too soon, you'll end by reading the same
diff --git a/Documentation/media/kapi/mc-core.rst b/Documentation/media/kapi/mc-core.rst
index 0bcfeadbc52d..05bba0b61748 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/kapi/mc-core.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/kapi/mc-core.rst
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ Drivers initialize entity pads by calling
 
 Drivers register entities with a media device by calling
 :c:func:`media_device_register_entity()`
-and unregistred by calling
+and unregistered by calling
 :c:func:`media_device_unregister_entity()`.
 
 Interfaces
@@ -259,6 +259,45 @@ Subsystems should facilitate link validation by providing subsystem specific
 helper functions to provide easy access for commonly needed information, and
 in the end provide a way to use driver-specific callbacks.
 
+Media Controller Device Allocator API
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+When the media device belongs to more than one driver, the shared media
+device is allocated with the shared struct device as the key for look ups.
+
+The shared media device should stay in registered state until the last
+driver unregisters it. In addition, the media device should be released when
+all the references are released. Each driver gets a reference to the media
+device during probe, when it allocates the media device. If media device is
+already allocated, the allocate API bumps up the refcount and returns the
+existing media device. The driver puts the reference back in its disconnect
+routine when it calls :c:func:`media_device_delete()`.
+
+The media device is unregistered and cleaned up from the kref put handler to
+ensure that the media device stays in registered state until the last driver
+unregisters the media device.
+
+**Driver Usage**
+
+Drivers should use the appropriate media-core routines to manage the shared
+media device life-time handling the two states:
+1. allocate -> register -> delete
+2. get reference to already registered device -> delete
+
+call :c:func:`media_device_delete()` routine to make sure the shared media
+device delete is handled correctly.
+
+**driver probe:**
+Call :c:func:`media_device_usb_allocate()` to allocate or get a reference
+Call :c:func:`media_device_register()`, if media devnode isn't registered
+
+**driver disconnect:**
+Call :c:func:`media_device_delete()` to free the media_device. Freeing is
+handled by the kref put handler.
+
+API Definitions
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
 .. kernel-doc:: include/media/media-device.h
 
 .. kernel-doc:: include/media/media-devnode.h
@@ -266,3 +305,5 @@ in the end provide a way to use driver-specific callbacks.
 .. kernel-doc:: include/media/media-entity.h
 
 .. kernel-doc:: include/media/media-request.h
+
+.. kernel-doc:: include/media/media-dev-allocator.h
diff --git a/Documentation/media/kapi/v4l2-device.rst b/Documentation/media/kapi/v4l2-device.rst
index c4311f0421be..5e25bf182c18 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/kapi/v4l2-device.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/kapi/v4l2-device.rst
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ You can iterate over all registered devices as follows:
 		int err;
 
 		/* Find driver 'ivtv' on the PCI bus.
-		pci_bus_type is a global. For USB busses use usb_bus_type. */
+		pci_bus_type is a global. For USB buses use usb_bus_type. */
 		drv = driver_find("ivtv", &pci_bus_type);
 		/* iterate over all ivtv device instances */
 		err = driver_for_each_device(drv, NULL, p, callback);
diff --git a/Documentation/media/kapi/v4l2-intro.rst b/Documentation/media/kapi/v4l2-intro.rst
index cea3e263e48b..4d54fa9d7a12 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/kapi/v4l2-intro.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/kapi/v4l2-intro.rst
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ hardware: most devices have multiple ICs, export multiple device nodes in
 Especially the fact that V4L2 drivers have to setup supporting ICs to
 do audio/video muxing/encoding/decoding makes it more complex than most.
 Usually these ICs are connected to the main bridge driver through one or
-more I2C busses, but other busses can also be used. Such devices are
+more I2C buses, but other buses can also be used. Such devices are
 called 'sub-devices'.
 
 For a long time the framework was limited to the video_device struct for
diff --git a/Documentation/media/kapi/v4l2-subdev.rst b/Documentation/media/kapi/v4l2-subdev.rst
index be4970909f40..29e07e23f888 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/kapi/v4l2-subdev.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/kapi/v4l2-subdev.rst
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ device data.
 
 You also need a way to go from the low-level struct to :c:type:`v4l2_subdev`.
 For the common i2c_client struct the i2c_set_clientdata() call is used to store
-a :c:type:`v4l2_subdev` pointer, for other busses you may have to use other
+a :c:type:`v4l2_subdev` pointer, for other buses you may have to use other
 methods.
 
 Bridges might also need to store per-subdev private data, such as a pointer to
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ provides host private data for that purpose that can be accessed with
 
 From the bridge driver perspective, you load the sub-device module and somehow
 obtain the :c:type:`v4l2_subdev` pointer. For i2c devices this is easy: you call
-``i2c_get_clientdata()``. For other busses something similar needs to be done.
+``i2c_get_clientdata()``. For other buses something similar needs to be done.
 Helper functions exists for sub-devices on an I2C bus that do most of this
 tricky work for you.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/media/lirc.h.rst.exceptions b/Documentation/media/lirc.h.rst.exceptions
index 379b9e7df5d0..ac768d769113 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/lirc.h.rst.exceptions
+++ b/Documentation/media/lirc.h.rst.exceptions
@@ -60,6 +60,10 @@ ignore symbol RC_PROTO_SHARP
 ignore symbol RC_PROTO_XMP
 ignore symbol RC_PROTO_CEC
 ignore symbol RC_PROTO_IMON
+ignore symbol RC_PROTO_RCMM12
+ignore symbol RC_PROTO_RCMM24
+ignore symbol RC_PROTO_RCMM32
+ignore symbol RC_PROTO_XBOX_DVD
 
 # Undocumented macros
 
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/audio-set-bypass-mode.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/audio-set-bypass-mode.rst
index d537da90acf5..d68f05d48d12 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/audio-set-bypass-mode.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/audio-set-bypass-mode.rst
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ Description
 
 This ioctl call asks the Audio Device to bypass the Audio decoder and
 forward the stream without decoding. This mode shall be used if streams
-that can’t be handled by the Digial TV system shall be decoded. Dolby
+that can’t be handled by the Digital TV system shall be decoded. Dolby
 DigitalTM streams are automatically forwarded by the Digital TV subsystem if
 the hardware can handle it.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/ca-set-descr.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/ca-set-descr.rst
index 22c8b8f94c7e..d36464ba2317 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/ca-set-descr.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/ca-set-descr.rst
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ Description
 -----------
 
 CA_SET_DESCR is used for feeding descrambler CA slots with descrambling
-keys (refered as control words).
+keys (referred as control words).
 
 Return Value
 ------------
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/dmx-qbuf.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/dmx-qbuf.rst
index 9a1d85147c25..9dc845daa59d 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/dmx-qbuf.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/dmx-qbuf.rst
@@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ the device is closed.
 
 Applications call the ``DMX_DQBUF`` ioctl to dequeue a filled
 (capturing) buffer from the driver's outgoing queue.
-They just set the ``index`` field withe the buffer ID to be queued.
+They just set the ``index`` field with the buffer ID to be queued.
 When ``DMX_DQBUF`` is called with a pointer to struct :c:type:`dmx_buffer`,
 the driver fills the remaining fields or returns an error code.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/dvbproperty.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/dvbproperty.rst
index 371c72bb9419..0c4f5598f2be 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/dvbproperty.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/dvbproperty.rst
@@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ with supports all digital TV delivery systems.
       struct :c:type:`dvb_frontend_parameters`.
 
    2. Don't use DVB API version 3 calls on hardware with supports
-      newer standards. Such API provides no suport or a very limited
+      newer standards. Such API provides no support or a very limited
       support to new standards and/or new hardware.
 
    3. Nowadays, most frontends support multiple delivery systems.
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/video_types.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/video_types.rst
index 2ed8aad84003..479942ce6fb8 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/video_types.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/video_types.rst
@@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ If video_blank is set video will be blanked out if the channel is
 changed or if playback is stopped. Otherwise, the last picture will be
 displayed. play_state indicates if the video is currently frozen,
 stopped, or being played back. The stream_source corresponds to the
-seleted source for the video stream. It can come either from the
+selected source for the video stream. It can come either from the
 demultiplexer or from memory. The video_format indicates the aspect
 ratio (one of 4:3 or 16:9) of the currently played video stream.
 Finally, display_format corresponds to the selected cropping mode in
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/fdl-appendix.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/fdl-appendix.rst
index f8dc85d3939c..9316b8617502 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/fdl-appendix.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/fdl-appendix.rst
@@ -363,7 +363,7 @@ various documents with a single copy that is included in the collection,
 provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim copying
 of each of the documents in all other respects.
 
-You may extract a single document from such a collection, and dispbibute
+You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute
 it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this
 License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all
 other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document.
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/mediactl/media-types.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/mediactl/media-types.rst
index 8627587b7075..3af6a414b501 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/mediactl/media-types.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/mediactl/media-types.rst
@@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ Types and flags used to represent the media graph elements
 
     *  -  ``MEDIA_ENT_F_PROC_VIDEO_PIXEL_ENC_CONV``
        -  Video pixel encoding converter. An entity capable of pixel
-	  enconding conversion must have at least one sink pad and one
+	  encoding conversion must have at least one sink pad and one
 	  source pad, and convert the encoding of pixels received on
 	  its sink pad(s) to a different encoding output on its source
 	  pad(s). Pixel encoding conversion includes but isn't limited
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/mediactl/request-api.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/mediactl/request-api.rst
index 4b25ad03f45a..a74c82d95609 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/mediactl/request-api.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/mediactl/request-api.rst
@@ -91,9 +91,9 @@ A request must contain at least one buffer, otherwise ``ENOENT`` is returned.
 A queued request cannot be modified anymore.
 
 .. caution::
-   For :ref:`memory-to-memory devices <codec>` you can use requests only for
+   For :ref:`memory-to-memory devices <mem2mem>` you can use requests only for
    output buffers, not for capture buffers. Attempting to add a capture buffer
-   to a request will result in an ``EACCES`` error.
+   to a request will result in an ``EBADR`` error.
 
 If the request contains configurations for multiple entities, individual drivers
 may synchronize so the requested pipeline's topology is applied before the
@@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ if it had just been allocated.
 Example for a Codec Device
 --------------------------
 
-For use-cases such as :ref:`codecs <codec>`, the request API can be used
+For use-cases such as :ref:`codecs <mem2mem>`, the request API can be used
 to associate specific controls to
 be applied by the driver for the OUTPUT buffer, allowing user-space
 to queue many such buffers in advance. It can also take advantage of requests'
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/rc/rc-tables.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/rc/rc-tables.rst
index cb670d10998b..177ac44fa0fa 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/rc/rc-tables.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/rc/rc-tables.rst
@@ -385,7 +385,7 @@ the remote via /dev/input/event devices.
 
        -  ``KEY_CHANNELDOWN``
 
-       -  Decrease channel sequencially
+       -  Decrease channel sequentially
 
        -  CHANNEL - / CHANNEL DOWN / DOWN
 
@@ -393,7 +393,7 @@ the remote via /dev/input/event devices.
 
        -  ``KEY_CHANNELUP``
 
-       -  Increase channel sequencially
+       -  Increase channel sequentially
 
        -  CHANNEL + / CHANNEL UP / UP
 
@@ -623,7 +623,7 @@ the remote via /dev/input/event devices.
 
     -  .. row 78
 
-       -  ``KEY_SCREEN``
+       -  ``KEY_ASPECT_RATIO``
 
        -  Select screen aspect ratio
 
@@ -631,7 +631,7 @@ the remote via /dev/input/event devices.
 
     -  .. row 79
 
-       -  ``KEY_ZOOM``
+       -  ``KEY_FULL_SCREEN``
 
        -  Put device into zoom/full screen mode
 
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/buffer.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/buffer.rst
index 86878bb0087f..1cbd9cde57f3 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/buffer.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/buffer.rst
@@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ of appropriately sized buffers for each use case).
 struct v4l2_buffer
 ==================
 
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{2.8cm}|p{2.5cm}|p{1.3cm}|p{10.5cm}|
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{2.8cm}|p{2.5cm}|p{1.6cm}|p{10.2cm}|
 
 .. cssclass:: longtable
 
@@ -230,8 +230,7 @@ struct v4l2_buffer
     * - struct :c:type:`v4l2_timecode`
       - ``timecode``
       -
-      - When ``type`` is ``V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_CAPTURE`` and the
-	``V4L2_BUF_FLAG_TIMECODE`` flag is set in ``flags``, this
+      - When the ``V4L2_BUF_FLAG_TIMECODE`` flag is set in ``flags``, this
 	structure contains a frame timecode. In
 	:c:type:`V4L2_FIELD_ALTERNATE <v4l2_field>` mode the top and
 	bottom field contain the same timecode. Timecodes are intended to
@@ -327,7 +326,7 @@ struct v4l2_buffer
 	Applications should not set ``V4L2_BUF_FLAG_REQUEST_FD`` for any ioctls
 	other than :ref:`VIDIOC_QBUF <VIDIOC_QBUF>`.
 
-	If the device does not support requests, then ``EACCES`` will be returned.
+	If the device does not support requests, then ``EBADR`` will be returned.
 	If requests are supported but an invalid request file descriptor is
 	given, then ``EINVAL`` will be returned.
 
@@ -421,7 +420,7 @@ enum v4l2_buf_type
 
 .. cssclass:: longtable
 
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{7.2cm}|p{0.6cm}|p{9.7cm}|
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{7.8cm}|p{0.6cm}|p{9.1cm}|
 
 .. flat-table::
     :header-rows:  0
@@ -483,7 +482,11 @@ enum v4l2_buf_type
 Buffer Flags
 ============
 
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{7.0cm}|p{2.2cm}|p{8.3cm}|
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \small
+
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{7.0cm}|p{2.1cm}|p{8.4cm}|
 
 .. cssclass:: longtable
 
@@ -682,6 +685,9 @@ Buffer Flags
 	exposure of the frame has begun. This is only valid for the
 	``V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_CAPTURE`` buffer type.
 
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \normalsize
 
 
 .. c:type:: v4l2_memory
@@ -689,7 +695,7 @@ Buffer Flags
 enum v4l2_memory
 ================
 
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{6.6cm}|p{2.2cm}|p{8.7cm}|
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{5.0cm}|p{0.8cm}|p{11.7cm}|
 
 .. flat-table::
     :header-rows:  0
@@ -714,10 +720,10 @@ enum v4l2_memory
 Timecodes
 =========
 
-The struct :c:type:`v4l2_timecode` structure is designed to hold a
-:ref:`smpte12m` or similar timecode. (struct
-struct :c:type:`timeval` timestamps are stored in struct
-:c:type:`v4l2_buffer` field ``timestamp``.)
+The :c:type:`v4l2_buffer_timecode` structure is designed to hold a
+:ref:`smpte12m` or similar timecode.
+(struct :c:type:`timeval` timestamps are stored in the struct
+:c:type:`v4l2_buffer` ``timestamp`` field.)
 
 
 .. c:type:: v4l2_timecode
@@ -725,7 +731,7 @@ struct :c:type:`timeval` timestamps are stored in struct
 struct v4l2_timecode
 --------------------
 
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{4.4cm}|p{4.4cm}|p{8.7cm}|
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{1.4cm}|p{2.8cm}|p{12.3cm}|
 
 .. flat-table::
     :header-rows:  0
@@ -762,7 +768,7 @@ struct v4l2_timecode
 Timecode Types
 --------------
 
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{6.6cm}|p{2.2cm}|p{8.7cm}|
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{5.6cm}|p{0.8cm}|p{11.1cm}|
 
 .. flat-table::
     :header-rows:  0
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/colorspaces-defs.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/colorspaces-defs.rst
index c4e8fc620379..e122bbe3d799 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/colorspaces-defs.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/colorspaces-defs.rst
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ whole range, 0-255, dividing the angular value by 1.41. The enum
    colorspaces except for BT.2020 which uses limited range R'G'B'
    quantization.
 
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{6.0cm}|p{11.5cm}|
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{6.7cm}|p{10.8cm}|
 
 .. c:type:: v4l2_colorspace
 
@@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ whole range, 0-255, dividing the angular value by 1.41. The enum
 
 .. c:type:: v4l2_ycbcr_encoding
 
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{6.5cm}|p{11.0cm}|
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{7.2cm}|p{10.3cm}|
 
 .. flat-table:: V4L2 Y'CbCr Encodings
     :header-rows:  1
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/colorspaces.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/colorspaces.rst
index c5a560f0c13d..4f6c82fa057f 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/colorspaces.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/colorspaces.rst
@@ -56,9 +56,9 @@ The Y value in the CIE XYZ colorspace corresponds to luminance. Often
 the CIE XYZ colorspace is transformed to the normalized CIE xyY
 colorspace:
 
-x = X / (X + Y + Z)
+	x = X / (X + Y + Z)
 
-y = Y / (X + Y + Z)
+	y = Y / (X + Y + Z)
 
 The x and y values are the chromaticity coordinates and can be used to
 define a color without the luminance component Y. It is very confusing
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/common.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/common.rst
index 889f2f2632a1..5e87ae24e4b4 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/common.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/common.rst
@@ -46,6 +46,17 @@ applicable to all devices.
     dv-timings
     control
     extended-controls
+    ext-ctrls-camera
+    ext-ctrls-flash
+    ext-ctrls-image-source
+    ext-ctrls-image-process
+    ext-ctrls-codec
+    ext-ctrls-jpeg
+    ext-ctrls-dv
+    ext-ctrls-rf-tuner
+    ext-ctrls-fm-tx
+    ext-ctrls-fm-rx
+    ext-ctrls-detect
     format
     planar-apis
     selection-api
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/control.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/control.rst
index 0d46526b5935..71417bba028c 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/control.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/control.rst
@@ -499,7 +499,7 @@ Example: Changing controls
 .. [#f1]
    The use of ``V4L2_CID_PRIVATE_BASE`` is problematic because different
    drivers may use the same ``V4L2_CID_PRIVATE_BASE`` ID for different
-   controls. This makes it hard to programatically set such controls
+   controls. This makes it hard to programmatically set such controls
    since the meaning of the control with that ID is driver dependent. In
    order to resolve this drivers use unique IDs and the
    ``V4L2_CID_PRIVATE_BASE`` IDs are mapped to those unique IDs by the
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/dev-effect.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/dev-effect.rst
deleted file mode 100644
index b165e2c20910..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/dev-effect.rst
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
-.. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
-.. document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License,
-.. Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software
-.. Foundation, with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts
-.. and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included at
-.. Documentation/media/uapi/fdl-appendix.rst.
-..
-.. TODO: replace it to GFDL-1.1-or-later WITH no-invariant-sections
-
-.. _effect:
-
-************************
-Effect Devices Interface
-************************
-
-.. note::
-    This interface has been be suspended from the V4L2 API.
-    The implementation for such effects should be done
-    via mem2mem devices.
-
-A V4L2 video effect device can do image effects, filtering, or combine
-two or more images or image streams. For example video transitions or
-wipes. Applications send data to be processed and receive the result
-data either with :ref:`read() <func-read>` and
-:ref:`write() <func-write>` functions, or through the streaming I/O
-mechanism.
-
-[to do]
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/dev-codec.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/dev-mem2mem.rst
index b5e017c17834..67a980818dc8 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/dev-codec.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/dev-mem2mem.rst
@@ -7,37 +7,36 @@
 ..
 .. TODO: replace it to GFDL-1.1-or-later WITH no-invariant-sections
 
-.. _codec:
+.. _mem2mem:
 
-***************
-Codec Interface
-***************
+********************************
+Video Memory-To-Memory Interface
+********************************
 
-A V4L2 codec can compress, decompress, transform, or otherwise convert
-video data from one format into another format, in memory. Typically
-such devices are memory-to-memory devices (i.e. devices with the
-``V4L2_CAP_VIDEO_M2M`` or ``V4L2_CAP_VIDEO_M2M_MPLANE`` capability set).
+A V4L2 memory-to-memory device can compress, decompress, transform, or
+otherwise convert video data from one format into another format, in memory.
+Such memory-to-memory devices set the ``V4L2_CAP_VIDEO_M2M`` or
+``V4L2_CAP_VIDEO_M2M_MPLANE`` capability. Examples of memory-to-memory
+devices are codecs, scalers, deinterlacers or format converters (i.e.
+converting from YUV to RGB).
 
 A memory-to-memory video node acts just like a normal video node, but it
-supports both output (sending frames from memory to the codec hardware)
-and capture (receiving the processed frames from the codec hardware into
+supports both output (sending frames from memory to the hardware)
+and capture (receiving the processed frames from the hardware into
 memory) stream I/O. An application will have to setup the stream I/O for
 both sides and finally call :ref:`VIDIOC_STREAMON <VIDIOC_STREAMON>`
-for both capture and output to start the codec.
-
-Video compression codecs use the MPEG controls to setup their codec
-parameters
-
-.. note::
-
-   The MPEG controls actually support many more codecs than
-   just MPEG. See :ref:`mpeg-controls`.
+for both capture and output to start the hardware.
 
 Memory-to-memory devices function as a shared resource: you can
 open the video node multiple times, each application setting up their
-own codec properties that are local to the file handle, and each can use
+own properties that are local to the file handle, and each can use
 it independently from the others. The driver will arbitrate access to
-the codec and reprogram it whenever another file handler gets access.
+the hardware and reprogram it whenever another file handler gets access.
 This is different from the usual video node behavior where the video
 properties are global to the device (i.e. changing something through one
 file handle is visible through another file handle).
+
+One of the most common memory-to-memory device is the codec. Codecs
+are more complicated than most and require additional setup for
+their codec parameters. This is done through codec controls.
+See :ref:`mpeg-controls`.
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/dev-raw-vbi.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/dev-raw-vbi.rst
index d6a707f0b24f..e06b03ca2ab2 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/dev-raw-vbi.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/dev-raw-vbi.rst
@@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ VBI devices must implement both the :ref:`VIDIOC_G_FMT <VIDIOC_G_FMT>` and
 and always returns default parameters as :ref:`VIDIOC_G_FMT <VIDIOC_G_FMT>` does.
 :ref:`VIDIOC_TRY_FMT <VIDIOC_G_FMT>` is optional.
 
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{2.4cm}|p{4.4cm}|p{10.7cm}|
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{1.6cm}|p{4.2cm}|p{11.7cm}|
 
 .. c:type:: v4l2_vbi_format
 
@@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ and always returns default parameters as :ref:`VIDIOC_G_FMT <VIDIOC_G_FMT>` does
 	applications must set it to zero.
 
 
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{4.0cm}|p{1.5cm}|p{12.0cm}|
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{4.4cm}|p{1.5cm}|p{11.6cm}|
 
 .. _vbifmt-flags:
 
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/dev-rds.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/dev-rds.rst
index 624d6f95b842..64a724ef58f5 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/dev-rds.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/dev-rds.rst
@@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ RDS datastructures
 
 .. _v4l2-rds-block-codes:
 
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{5.6cm}|p{2.0cm}|p{1.5cm}|p{7.0cm}|
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{6.4cm}|p{2.0cm}|p{1.2cm}|p{7.9cm}|
 
 .. flat-table:: Block defines
     :header-rows:  0
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/dev-sliced-vbi.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/dev-sliced-vbi.rst
index 0aa6cb8a272b..e86346f66017 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/dev-sliced-vbi.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/dev-sliced-vbi.rst
@@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ struct v4l2_sliced_vbi_format
     \scriptsize
     \setlength{\tabcolsep}{2pt}
 
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{.75cm}|p{3.3cm}|p{3.4cm}|p{3.4cm}|p{3.4cm}|
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{.85cm}|p{3.3cm}|p{4.4cm}|p{4.4cm}|p{4.4cm}|
 
 .. cssclass:: longtable
 
@@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ Sliced VBI services
 
 .. raw:: latex
 
-    \footnotesize
+    \scriptsize
 
 .. tabularcolumns:: |p{4.1cm}|p{1.1cm}|p{2.4cm}|p{2.0cm}|p{7.3cm}|
 
@@ -541,7 +541,7 @@ Magic Constants for struct v4l2_mpeg_vbi_fmt_ivtv magic field
 structs v4l2_mpeg_vbi_itv0 and v4l2_mpeg_vbi_ITV0
 -------------------------------------------------
 
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{4.9cm}|p{2.4cm}|p{10.2cm}|
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{5.2cm}|p{2.4cm}|p{9.9cm}|
 
 .. flat-table::
     :header-rows:  0
@@ -561,12 +561,12 @@ structs v4l2_mpeg_vbi_itv0 and v4l2_mpeg_vbi_ITV0
 
 	::
 
-	    linemask[0] b0:     line  6     first field
-	    linemask[0] b17:    line 23     first field
-	    linemask[0] b18:    line  6     second field
-	    linemask[0] b31:    line 19     second field
-	    linemask[1] b0:     line 20     second field
-	    linemask[1] b3:     line 23     second field
+	    linemask[0] b0:     line  6  first field
+	    linemask[0] b17:    line 23  first field
+	    linemask[0] b18:    line  6  second field
+	    linemask[0] b31:    line 19  second field
+	    linemask[1] b0:     line 20  second field
+	    linemask[1] b3:     line 23  second field
 	    linemask[1] b4-b31: unused and set to 0
     * - struct
 	:c:type:`v4l2_mpeg_vbi_itv0_line`
@@ -590,7 +590,7 @@ structs v4l2_mpeg_vbi_itv0 and v4l2_mpeg_vbi_ITV0
 struct v4l2_mpeg_vbi_ITV0
 -------------------------
 
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{4.9cm}|p{4.4cm}|p{8.2cm}|
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{5.2cm}|p{2.4cm}|p{9.9cm}|
 
 .. flat-table::
     :header-rows:  0
@@ -635,7 +635,7 @@ struct v4l2_mpeg_vbi_itv0_line
 Line Identifiers for struct v4l2_mpeg_vbi_itv0_line id field
 ------------------------------------------------------------
 
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{6.6cm}|p{2.2cm}|p{8.7cm}|
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{7.0cm}|p{1.8cm}|p{8.7cm}|
 
 .. flat-table::
     :header-rows:  1
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/dev-subdev.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/dev-subdev.rst
index 2c2768c7343b..029bb2d9928a 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/dev-subdev.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/dev-subdev.rst
@@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ list entity names and pad numbers).
 
 .. raw:: latex
 
-    \tiny
+    \scriptsize
 
 .. tabularcolumns:: |p{2.0cm}|p{2.3cm}|p{2.3cm}|p{2.3cm}|p{2.3cm}|p{2.3cm}|p{2.3cm}|
 
@@ -223,40 +223,80 @@ list entity names and pad numbers).
     :widths: 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
 
     * -
-      - Sensor/0 format
-      - Frontend/0 format
-      - Frontend/1 format
-      - Scaler/0 format
-      - Scaler/0 compose selection rectangle
-      - Scaler/1 format
+      - Sensor/0
+
+        format
+      - Frontend/0
+
+        format
+      - Frontend/1
+
+        format
+      - Scaler/0
+
+        format
+      - Scaler/0
+
+        compose selection rectangle
+      - Scaler/1
+
+        format
     * - Initial state
-      - 2048x1536/SGRBG8_1X8
+      - 2048x1536
+
+        SGRBG8_1X8
       - (default)
       - (default)
       - (default)
       - (default)
       - (default)
     * - Configure frontend sink format
-      - 2048x1536/SGRBG8_1X8
-      - *2048x1536/SGRBG8_1X8*
-      - *2046x1534/SGRBG8_1X8*
+      - 2048x1536
+
+        SGRBG8_1X8
+      - *2048x1536*
+
+        *SGRBG8_1X8*
+      - *2046x1534*
+
+        *SGRBG8_1X8*
       - (default)
       - (default)
       - (default)
     * - Configure scaler sink format
-      - 2048x1536/SGRBG8_1X8
-      - 2048x1536/SGRBG8_1X8
-      - 2046x1534/SGRBG8_1X8
-      - *2046x1534/SGRBG8_1X8*
+      - 2048x1536
+
+        SGRBG8_1X8
+      - 2048x1536
+
+        SGRBG8_1X8
+      - 2046x1534
+
+        SGRBG8_1X8
+      - *2046x1534*
+
+        *SGRBG8_1X8*
       - *0,0/2046x1534*
-      - *2046x1534/SGRBG8_1X8*
+      - *2046x1534*
+
+        *SGRBG8_1X8*
     * - Configure scaler sink compose selection
-      - 2048x1536/SGRBG8_1X8
-      - 2048x1536/SGRBG8_1X8
-      - 2046x1534/SGRBG8_1X8
-      - 2046x1534/SGRBG8_1X8
+      - 2048x1536
+
+        SGRBG8_1X8
+      - 2048x1536
+
+        SGRBG8_1X8
+      - 2046x1534
+
+        SGRBG8_1X8
+      - 2046x1534
+
+        SGRBG8_1X8
       - *0,0/1280x960*
-      - *1280x960/SGRBG8_1X8*
+      - *1280x960*
+
+        *SGRBG8_1X8*
 
 .. raw:: latex
 
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/dev-teletext.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/dev-teletext.rst
deleted file mode 100644
index 35e8c4b35458..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/dev-teletext.rst
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
-.. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
-.. document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License,
-.. Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software
-.. Foundation, with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts
-.. and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included at
-.. Documentation/media/uapi/fdl-appendix.rst.
-..
-.. TODO: replace it to GFDL-1.1-or-later WITH no-invariant-sections
-
-.. _ttx:
-
-******************
-Teletext Interface
-******************
-
-This interface was aimed at devices receiving and demodulating Teletext
-data [:ref:`ets300706`, :ref:`itu653`], evaluating the Teletext
-packages and storing formatted pages in cache memory. Such devices are
-usually implemented as microcontrollers with serial interface
-(I\ :sup:`2`\ C) and could be found on old TV cards, dedicated Teletext
-decoding cards and home-brew devices connected to the PC parallel port.
-
-The Teletext API was designed by Martin Buck. It was defined in the
-kernel header file ``linux/videotext.h``, the specification is available
-from
-`ftp://ftp.gwdg.de/pub/linux/misc/videotext/ <ftp://ftp.gwdg.de/pub/linux/misc/videotext/>`__.
-(Videotext is the name of the German public television Teletext
-service.)
-
-Eventually the Teletext API was integrated into the V4L API with
-character device file names ``/dev/vtx0`` to ``/dev/vtx31``, device
-major number 81, minor numbers 192 to 223.
-
-However, teletext decoders were quickly replaced by more generic VBI
-demodulators and those dedicated teletext decoders no longer exist. For
-many years the vtx devices were still around, even though nobody used
-them. So the decision was made to finally remove support for the
-Teletext API in kernel 2.6.37.
-
-Modern devices all use the :ref:`raw <raw-vbi>` or
-:ref:`sliced` VBI API.
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/devices.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/devices.rst
index 5dbe9d13b6e6..07f8d047662b 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/devices.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/devices.rst
@@ -21,11 +21,9 @@ Interfaces
     dev-overlay
     dev-output
     dev-osd
-    dev-codec
-    dev-effect
+    dev-mem2mem
     dev-raw-vbi
     dev-sliced-vbi
-    dev-teletext
     dev-radio
     dev-rds
     dev-sdr
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-camera.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-camera.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..51c1d5c9eb00
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-camera.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,515 @@
+.. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
+.. document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License,
+.. Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software
+.. Foundation, with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts
+.. and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included at
+.. Documentation/media/uapi/fdl-appendix.rst.
+..
+.. TODO: replace it to GFDL-1.1-or-later WITH no-invariant-sections
+
+.. _camera-controls:
+
+************************
+Camera Control Reference
+************************
+
+The Camera class includes controls for mechanical (or equivalent
+digital) features of a device such as controllable lenses or sensors.
+
+
+.. _camera-control-id:
+
+Camera Control IDs
+==================
+
+``V4L2_CID_CAMERA_CLASS (class)``
+    The Camera class descriptor. Calling
+    :ref:`VIDIOC_QUERYCTRL` for this control will
+    return a description of this control class.
+
+.. _v4l2-exposure-auto-type:
+
+``V4L2_CID_EXPOSURE_AUTO``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_exposure_auto_type -
+    Enables automatic adjustments of the exposure time and/or iris
+    aperture. The effect of manual changes of the exposure time or iris
+    aperture while these features are enabled is undefined, drivers
+    should ignore such requests. Possible values are:
+
+
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_EXPOSURE_AUTO``
+      - Automatic exposure time, automatic iris aperture.
+    * - ``V4L2_EXPOSURE_MANUAL``
+      - Manual exposure time, manual iris.
+    * - ``V4L2_EXPOSURE_SHUTTER_PRIORITY``
+      - Manual exposure time, auto iris.
+    * - ``V4L2_EXPOSURE_APERTURE_PRIORITY``
+      - Auto exposure time, manual iris.
+
+
+
+``V4L2_CID_EXPOSURE_ABSOLUTE (integer)``
+    Determines the exposure time of the camera sensor. The exposure time
+    is limited by the frame interval. Drivers should interpret the
+    values as 100 µs units, where the value 1 stands for 1/10000th of a
+    second, 10000 for 1 second and 100000 for 10 seconds.
+
+``V4L2_CID_EXPOSURE_AUTO_PRIORITY (boolean)``
+    When ``V4L2_CID_EXPOSURE_AUTO`` is set to ``AUTO`` or
+    ``APERTURE_PRIORITY``, this control determines if the device may
+    dynamically vary the frame rate. By default this feature is disabled
+    (0) and the frame rate must remain constant.
+
+``V4L2_CID_AUTO_EXPOSURE_BIAS (integer menu)``
+    Determines the automatic exposure compensation, it is effective only
+    when ``V4L2_CID_EXPOSURE_AUTO`` control is set to ``AUTO``,
+    ``SHUTTER_PRIORITY`` or ``APERTURE_PRIORITY``. It is expressed in
+    terms of EV, drivers should interpret the values as 0.001 EV units,
+    where the value 1000 stands for +1 EV.
+
+    Increasing the exposure compensation value is equivalent to
+    decreasing the exposure value (EV) and will increase the amount of
+    light at the image sensor. The camera performs the exposure
+    compensation by adjusting absolute exposure time and/or aperture.
+
+.. _v4l2-exposure-metering:
+
+``V4L2_CID_EXPOSURE_METERING``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_exposure_metering -
+    Determines how the camera measures the amount of light available for
+    the frame exposure. Possible values are:
+
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{8.7cm}|p{8.8cm}|
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_EXPOSURE_METERING_AVERAGE``
+      - Use the light information coming from the entire frame and average
+	giving no weighting to any particular portion of the metered area.
+    * - ``V4L2_EXPOSURE_METERING_CENTER_WEIGHTED``
+      - Average the light information coming from the entire frame giving
+	priority to the center of the metered area.
+    * - ``V4L2_EXPOSURE_METERING_SPOT``
+      - Measure only very small area at the center of the frame.
+    * - ``V4L2_EXPOSURE_METERING_MATRIX``
+      - A multi-zone metering. The light intensity is measured in several
+	points of the frame and the results are combined. The algorithm of
+	the zones selection and their significance in calculating the
+	final value is device dependent.
+
+
+
+``V4L2_CID_PAN_RELATIVE (integer)``
+    This control turns the camera horizontally by the specified amount.
+    The unit is undefined. A positive value moves the camera to the
+    right (clockwise when viewed from above), a negative value to the
+    left. A value of zero does not cause motion. This is a write-only
+    control.
+
+``V4L2_CID_TILT_RELATIVE (integer)``
+    This control turns the camera vertically by the specified amount.
+    The unit is undefined. A positive value moves the camera up, a
+    negative value down. A value of zero does not cause motion. This is
+    a write-only control.
+
+``V4L2_CID_PAN_RESET (button)``
+    When this control is set, the camera moves horizontally to the
+    default position.
+
+``V4L2_CID_TILT_RESET (button)``
+    When this control is set, the camera moves vertically to the default
+    position.
+
+``V4L2_CID_PAN_ABSOLUTE (integer)``
+    This control turns the camera horizontally to the specified
+    position. Positive values move the camera to the right (clockwise
+    when viewed from above), negative values to the left. Drivers should
+    interpret the values as arc seconds, with valid values between -180
+    * 3600 and +180 * 3600 inclusive.
+
+``V4L2_CID_TILT_ABSOLUTE (integer)``
+    This control turns the camera vertically to the specified position.
+    Positive values move the camera up, negative values down. Drivers
+    should interpret the values as arc seconds, with valid values
+    between -180 * 3600 and +180 * 3600 inclusive.
+
+``V4L2_CID_FOCUS_ABSOLUTE (integer)``
+    This control sets the focal point of the camera to the specified
+    position. The unit is undefined. Positive values set the focus
+    closer to the camera, negative values towards infinity.
+
+``V4L2_CID_FOCUS_RELATIVE (integer)``
+    This control moves the focal point of the camera by the specified
+    amount. The unit is undefined. Positive values move the focus closer
+    to the camera, negative values towards infinity. This is a
+    write-only control.
+
+``V4L2_CID_FOCUS_AUTO (boolean)``
+    Enables continuous automatic focus adjustments. The effect of manual
+    focus adjustments while this feature is enabled is undefined,
+    drivers should ignore such requests.
+
+``V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_START (button)``
+    Starts single auto focus process. The effect of setting this control
+    when ``V4L2_CID_FOCUS_AUTO`` is set to ``TRUE`` (1) is undefined,
+    drivers should ignore such requests.
+
+``V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_STOP (button)``
+    Aborts automatic focusing started with ``V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_START``
+    control. It is effective only when the continuous autofocus is
+    disabled, that is when ``V4L2_CID_FOCUS_AUTO`` control is set to
+    ``FALSE`` (0).
+
+.. _v4l2-auto-focus-status:
+
+``V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_STATUS (bitmask)``
+    The automatic focus status. This is a read-only control.
+
+    Setting ``V4L2_LOCK_FOCUS`` lock bit of the ``V4L2_CID_3A_LOCK``
+    control may stop updates of the ``V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_STATUS``
+    control value.
+
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{6.7cm}|p{10.8cm}|
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_AUTO_FOCUS_STATUS_IDLE``
+      - Automatic focus is not active.
+    * - ``V4L2_AUTO_FOCUS_STATUS_BUSY``
+      - Automatic focusing is in progress.
+    * - ``V4L2_AUTO_FOCUS_STATUS_REACHED``
+      - Focus has been reached.
+    * - ``V4L2_AUTO_FOCUS_STATUS_FAILED``
+      - Automatic focus has failed, the driver will not transition from
+	this state until another action is performed by an application.
+
+
+
+.. _v4l2-auto-focus-range:
+
+``V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_RANGE``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_auto_focus_range -
+    Determines auto focus distance range for which lens may be adjusted.
+
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{6.8cm}|p{10.7cm}|
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_AUTO_FOCUS_RANGE_AUTO``
+      - The camera automatically selects the focus range.
+    * - ``V4L2_AUTO_FOCUS_RANGE_NORMAL``
+      - Normal distance range, limited for best automatic focus
+	performance.
+    * - ``V4L2_AUTO_FOCUS_RANGE_MACRO``
+      - Macro (close-up) auto focus. The camera will use its minimum
+	possible distance for auto focus.
+    * - ``V4L2_AUTO_FOCUS_RANGE_INFINITY``
+      - The lens is set to focus on an object at infinite distance.
+
+
+
+``V4L2_CID_ZOOM_ABSOLUTE (integer)``
+    Specify the objective lens focal length as an absolute value. The
+    zoom unit is driver-specific and its value should be a positive
+    integer.
+
+``V4L2_CID_ZOOM_RELATIVE (integer)``
+    Specify the objective lens focal length relatively to the current
+    value. Positive values move the zoom lens group towards the
+    telephoto direction, negative values towards the wide-angle
+    direction. The zoom unit is driver-specific. This is a write-only
+    control.
+
+``V4L2_CID_ZOOM_CONTINUOUS (integer)``
+    Move the objective lens group at the specified speed until it
+    reaches physical device limits or until an explicit request to stop
+    the movement. A positive value moves the zoom lens group towards the
+    telephoto direction. A value of zero stops the zoom lens group
+    movement. A negative value moves the zoom lens group towards the
+    wide-angle direction. The zoom speed unit is driver-specific.
+
+``V4L2_CID_IRIS_ABSOLUTE (integer)``
+    This control sets the camera's aperture to the specified value. The
+    unit is undefined. Larger values open the iris wider, smaller values
+    close it.
+
+``V4L2_CID_IRIS_RELATIVE (integer)``
+    This control modifies the camera's aperture by the specified amount.
+    The unit is undefined. Positive values open the iris one step
+    further, negative values close it one step further. This is a
+    write-only control.
+
+``V4L2_CID_PRIVACY (boolean)``
+    Prevent video from being acquired by the camera. When this control
+    is set to ``TRUE`` (1), no image can be captured by the camera.
+    Common means to enforce privacy are mechanical obturation of the
+    sensor and firmware image processing, but the device is not
+    restricted to these methods. Devices that implement the privacy
+    control must support read access and may support write access.
+
+``V4L2_CID_BAND_STOP_FILTER (integer)``
+    Switch the band-stop filter of a camera sensor on or off, or specify
+    its strength. Such band-stop filters can be used, for example, to
+    filter out the fluorescent light component.
+
+.. _v4l2-auto-n-preset-white-balance:
+
+``V4L2_CID_AUTO_N_PRESET_WHITE_BALANCE``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_auto_n_preset_white_balance -
+    Sets white balance to automatic, manual or a preset. The presets
+    determine color temperature of the light as a hint to the camera for
+    white balance adjustments resulting in most accurate color
+    representation. The following white balance presets are listed in
+    order of increasing color temperature.
+
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{7.2 cm}|p{10.3cm}|
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_MANUAL``
+      - Manual white balance.
+    * - ``V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_AUTO``
+      - Automatic white balance adjustments.
+    * - ``V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_INCANDESCENT``
+      - White balance setting for incandescent (tungsten) lighting. It
+	generally cools down the colors and corresponds approximately to
+	2500...3500 K color temperature range.
+    * - ``V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_FLUORESCENT``
+      - White balance preset for fluorescent lighting. It corresponds
+	approximately to 4000...5000 K color temperature.
+    * - ``V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_FLUORESCENT_H``
+      - With this setting the camera will compensate for fluorescent H
+	lighting.
+    * - ``V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_HORIZON``
+      - White balance setting for horizon daylight. It corresponds
+	approximately to 5000 K color temperature.
+    * - ``V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_DAYLIGHT``
+      - White balance preset for daylight (with clear sky). It corresponds
+	approximately to 5000...6500 K color temperature.
+    * - ``V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_FLASH``
+      - With this setting the camera will compensate for the flash light.
+	It slightly warms up the colors and corresponds roughly to
+	5000...5500 K color temperature.
+    * - ``V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_CLOUDY``
+      - White balance preset for moderately overcast sky. This option
+	corresponds approximately to 6500...8000 K color temperature
+	range.
+    * - ``V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_SHADE``
+      - White balance preset for shade or heavily overcast sky. It
+	corresponds approximately to 9000...10000 K color temperature.
+
+
+
+.. _v4l2-wide-dynamic-range:
+
+``V4L2_CID_WIDE_DYNAMIC_RANGE (boolean)``
+    Enables or disables the camera's wide dynamic range feature. This
+    feature allows to obtain clear images in situations where intensity
+    of the illumination varies significantly throughout the scene, i.e.
+    there are simultaneously very dark and very bright areas. It is most
+    commonly realized in cameras by combining two subsequent frames with
+    different exposure times.  [#f1]_
+
+.. _v4l2-image-stabilization:
+
+``V4L2_CID_IMAGE_STABILIZATION (boolean)``
+    Enables or disables image stabilization.
+
+``V4L2_CID_ISO_SENSITIVITY (integer menu)``
+    Determines ISO equivalent of an image sensor indicating the sensor's
+    sensitivity to light. The numbers are expressed in arithmetic scale,
+    as per :ref:`iso12232` standard, where doubling the sensor
+    sensitivity is represented by doubling the numerical ISO value.
+    Applications should interpret the values as standard ISO values
+    multiplied by 1000, e.g. control value 800 stands for ISO 0.8.
+    Drivers will usually support only a subset of standard ISO values.
+    The effect of setting this control while the
+    ``V4L2_CID_ISO_SENSITIVITY_AUTO`` control is set to a value other
+    than ``V4L2_CID_ISO_SENSITIVITY_MANUAL`` is undefined, drivers
+    should ignore such requests.
+
+.. _v4l2-iso-sensitivity-auto-type:
+
+``V4L2_CID_ISO_SENSITIVITY_AUTO``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_iso_sensitivity_type -
+    Enables or disables automatic ISO sensitivity adjustments.
+
+
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_CID_ISO_SENSITIVITY_MANUAL``
+      - Manual ISO sensitivity.
+    * - ``V4L2_CID_ISO_SENSITIVITY_AUTO``
+      - Automatic ISO sensitivity adjustments.
+
+
+
+.. _v4l2-scene-mode:
+
+``V4L2_CID_SCENE_MODE``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_scene_mode -
+    This control allows to select scene programs as the camera automatic
+    modes optimized for common shooting scenes. Within these modes the
+    camera determines best exposure, aperture, focusing, light metering,
+    white balance and equivalent sensitivity. The controls of those
+    parameters are influenced by the scene mode control. An exact
+    behavior in each mode is subject to the camera specification.
+
+    When the scene mode feature is not used, this control should be set
+    to ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_NONE`` to make sure the other possibly related
+    controls are accessible. The following scene programs are defined:
+
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \small
+
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{5.9cm}|p{11.5cm}|
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_NONE``
+      - The scene mode feature is disabled.
+    * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_BACKLIGHT``
+      - Backlight. Compensates for dark shadows when light is coming from
+	behind a subject, also by automatically turning on the flash.
+    * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_BEACH_SNOW``
+      - Beach and snow. This mode compensates for all-white or bright
+	scenes, which tend to look gray and low contrast, when camera's
+	automatic exposure is based on an average scene brightness. To
+	compensate, this mode automatically slightly overexposes the
+	frames. The white balance may also be adjusted to compensate for
+	the fact that reflected snow looks bluish rather than white.
+    * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_CANDLELIGHT``
+      - Candle light. The camera generally raises the ISO sensitivity and
+	lowers the shutter speed. This mode compensates for relatively
+	close subject in the scene. The flash is disabled in order to
+	preserve the ambiance of the light.
+    * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_DAWN_DUSK``
+      - Dawn and dusk. Preserves the colors seen in low natural light
+	before dusk and after down. The camera may turn off the flash, and
+	automatically focus at infinity. It will usually boost saturation
+	and lower the shutter speed.
+    * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_FALL_COLORS``
+      - Fall colors. Increases saturation and adjusts white balance for
+	color enhancement. Pictures of autumn leaves get saturated reds
+	and yellows.
+    * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_FIREWORKS``
+      - Fireworks. Long exposure times are used to capture the expanding
+	burst of light from a firework. The camera may invoke image
+	stabilization.
+    * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_LANDSCAPE``
+      - Landscape. The camera may choose a small aperture to provide deep
+	depth of field and long exposure duration to help capture detail
+	in dim light conditions. The focus is fixed at infinity. Suitable
+	for distant and wide scenery.
+    * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_NIGHT``
+      - Night, also known as Night Landscape. Designed for low light
+	conditions, it preserves detail in the dark areas without blowing
+	out bright objects. The camera generally sets itself to a
+	medium-to-high ISO sensitivity, with a relatively long exposure
+	time, and turns flash off. As such, there will be increased image
+	noise and the possibility of blurred image.
+    * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_PARTY_INDOOR``
+      - Party and indoor. Designed to capture indoor scenes that are lit
+	by indoor background lighting as well as the flash. The camera
+	usually increases ISO sensitivity, and adjusts exposure for the
+	low light conditions.
+    * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_PORTRAIT``
+      - Portrait. The camera adjusts the aperture so that the depth of
+	field is reduced, which helps to isolate the subject against a
+	smooth background. Most cameras recognize the presence of faces in
+	the scene and focus on them. The color hue is adjusted to enhance
+	skin tones. The intensity of the flash is often reduced.
+    * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_SPORTS``
+      - Sports. Significantly increases ISO and uses a fast shutter speed
+	to freeze motion of rapidly-moving subjects. Increased image noise
+	may be seen in this mode.
+    * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_SUNSET``
+      - Sunset. Preserves deep hues seen in sunsets and sunrises. It bumps
+	up the saturation.
+    * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_TEXT``
+      - Text. It applies extra contrast and sharpness, it is typically a
+	black-and-white mode optimized for readability. Automatic focus
+	may be switched to close-up mode and this setting may also involve
+	some lens-distortion correction.
+
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \normalsize
+
+
+``V4L2_CID_3A_LOCK (bitmask)``
+    This control locks or unlocks the automatic focus, exposure and
+    white balance. The automatic adjustments can be paused independently
+    by setting the corresponding lock bit to 1. The camera then retains
+    the settings until the lock bit is cleared. The following lock bits
+    are defined:
+
+    When a given algorithm is not enabled, drivers should ignore
+    requests to lock it and should return no error. An example might be
+    an application setting bit ``V4L2_LOCK_WHITE_BALANCE`` when the
+    ``V4L2_CID_AUTO_WHITE_BALANCE`` control is set to ``FALSE``. The
+    value of this control may be changed by exposure, white balance or
+    focus controls.
+
+
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_LOCK_EXPOSURE``
+      - Automatic exposure adjustments lock.
+    * - ``V4L2_LOCK_WHITE_BALANCE``
+      - Automatic white balance adjustments lock.
+    * - ``V4L2_LOCK_FOCUS``
+      - Automatic focus lock.
+
+
+
+``V4L2_CID_PAN_SPEED (integer)``
+    This control turns the camera horizontally at the specific speed.
+    The unit is undefined. A positive value moves the camera to the
+    right (clockwise when viewed from above), a negative value to the
+    left. A value of zero stops the motion if one is in progress and has
+    no effect otherwise.
+
+``V4L2_CID_TILT_SPEED (integer)``
+    This control turns the camera vertically at the specified speed. The
+    unit is undefined. A positive value moves the camera up, a negative
+    value down. A value of zero stops the motion if one is in progress
+    and has no effect otherwise.
+
+.. [#f1]
+   This control may be changed to a menu control in the future, if more
+   options are required.
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-codec.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-codec.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4a8446203085
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-codec.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,2668 @@
+.. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
+.. document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License,
+.. Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software
+.. Foundation, with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts
+.. and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included at
+.. Documentation/media/uapi/fdl-appendix.rst.
+..
+.. TODO: replace it to GFDL-1.1-or-later WITH no-invariant-sections
+
+.. _mpeg-controls:
+
+***********************
+Codec Control Reference
+***********************
+
+Below all controls within the Codec control class are described. First
+the generic controls, then controls specific for certain hardware.
+
+.. note::
+
+   These controls are applicable to all codecs and not just MPEG. The
+   defines are prefixed with V4L2_CID_MPEG/V4L2_MPEG as the controls
+   were originally made for MPEG codecs and later extended to cover all
+   encoding formats.
+
+
+Generic Codec Controls
+======================
+
+
+.. _mpeg-control-id:
+
+Codec Control IDs
+-----------------
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CLASS (class)``
+    The Codec class descriptor. Calling
+    :ref:`VIDIOC_QUERYCTRL` for this control will
+    return a description of this control class. This description can be
+    used as the caption of a Tab page in a GUI, for example.
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-stream-type:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_STREAM_TYPE``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_stream_type -
+    The MPEG-1, -2 or -4 output stream type. One cannot assume anything
+    here. Each hardware MPEG encoder tends to support different subsets
+    of the available MPEG stream types. This control is specific to
+    multiplexed MPEG streams. The currently defined stream types are:
+
+
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_STREAM_TYPE_MPEG2_PS``
+      - MPEG-2 program stream
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_STREAM_TYPE_MPEG2_TS``
+      - MPEG-2 transport stream
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_STREAM_TYPE_MPEG1_SS``
+      - MPEG-1 system stream
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_STREAM_TYPE_MPEG2_DVD``
+      - MPEG-2 DVD-compatible stream
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_STREAM_TYPE_MPEG1_VCD``
+      - MPEG-1 VCD-compatible stream
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_STREAM_TYPE_MPEG2_SVCD``
+      - MPEG-2 SVCD-compatible stream
+
+
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_STREAM_PID_PMT (integer)``
+    Program Map Table Packet ID for the MPEG transport stream (default
+    16)
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_STREAM_PID_AUDIO (integer)``
+    Audio Packet ID for the MPEG transport stream (default 256)
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_STREAM_PID_VIDEO (integer)``
+    Video Packet ID for the MPEG transport stream (default 260)
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_STREAM_PID_PCR (integer)``
+    Packet ID for the MPEG transport stream carrying PCR fields (default
+    259)
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_STREAM_PES_ID_AUDIO (integer)``
+    Audio ID for MPEG PES
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_STREAM_PES_ID_VIDEO (integer)``
+    Video ID for MPEG PES
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-stream-vbi-fmt:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_STREAM_VBI_FMT``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_stream_vbi_fmt -
+    Some cards can embed VBI data (e. g. Closed Caption, Teletext) into
+    the MPEG stream. This control selects whether VBI data should be
+    embedded, and if so, what embedding method should be used. The list
+    of possible VBI formats depends on the driver. The currently defined
+    VBI format types are:
+
+
+
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{6.6 cm}|p{10.9cm}|
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_STREAM_VBI_FMT_NONE``
+      - No VBI in the MPEG stream
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_STREAM_VBI_FMT_IVTV``
+      - VBI in private packets, IVTV format (documented in the kernel
+	sources in the file
+	``Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/cx2341x.rst``)
+
+
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-sampling-freq:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_SAMPLING_FREQ``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_sampling_freq -
+    MPEG Audio sampling frequency. Possible values are:
+
+
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_SAMPLING_FREQ_44100``
+      - 44.1 kHz
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_SAMPLING_FREQ_48000``
+      - 48 kHz
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_SAMPLING_FREQ_32000``
+      - 32 kHz
+
+
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-encoding:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_ENCODING``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_encoding -
+    MPEG Audio encoding. This control is specific to multiplexed MPEG
+    streams. Possible values are:
+
+
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_ENCODING_LAYER_1``
+      - MPEG-1/2 Layer I encoding
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_ENCODING_LAYER_2``
+      - MPEG-1/2 Layer II encoding
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_ENCODING_LAYER_3``
+      - MPEG-1/2 Layer III encoding
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_ENCODING_AAC``
+      - MPEG-2/4 AAC (Advanced Audio Coding)
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_ENCODING_AC3``
+      - AC-3 aka ATSC A/52 encoding
+
+
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-l1-bitrate:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_l1_bitrate -
+    MPEG-1/2 Layer I bitrate. Possible values are:
+
+
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_32K``
+      - 32 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_64K``
+      - 64 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_96K``
+      - 96 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_128K``
+      - 128 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_160K``
+      - 160 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_192K``
+      - 192 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_224K``
+      - 224 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_256K``
+      - 256 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_288K``
+      - 288 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_320K``
+      - 320 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_352K``
+      - 352 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_384K``
+      - 384 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_416K``
+      - 416 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_448K``
+      - 448 kbit/s
+
+
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-l2-bitrate:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_l2_bitrate -
+    MPEG-1/2 Layer II bitrate. Possible values are:
+
+
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_32K``
+      - 32 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_48K``
+      - 48 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_56K``
+      - 56 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_64K``
+      - 64 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_80K``
+      - 80 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_96K``
+      - 96 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_112K``
+      - 112 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_128K``
+      - 128 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_160K``
+      - 160 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_192K``
+      - 192 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_224K``
+      - 224 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_256K``
+      - 256 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_320K``
+      - 320 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_384K``
+      - 384 kbit/s
+
+
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-l3-bitrate:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_l3_bitrate -
+    MPEG-1/2 Layer III bitrate. Possible values are:
+
+
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_32K``
+      - 32 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_40K``
+      - 40 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_48K``
+      - 48 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_56K``
+      - 56 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_64K``
+      - 64 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_80K``
+      - 80 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_96K``
+      - 96 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_112K``
+      - 112 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_128K``
+      - 128 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_160K``
+      - 160 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_192K``
+      - 192 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_224K``
+      - 224 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_256K``
+      - 256 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_320K``
+      - 320 kbit/s
+
+
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_AAC_BITRATE (integer)``
+    AAC bitrate in bits per second.
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-ac3-bitrate:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_ac3_bitrate -
+    AC-3 bitrate. Possible values are:
+
+
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_32K``
+      - 32 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_40K``
+      - 40 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_48K``
+      - 48 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_56K``
+      - 56 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_64K``
+      - 64 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_80K``
+      - 80 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_96K``
+      - 96 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_112K``
+      - 112 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_128K``
+      - 128 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_160K``
+      - 160 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_192K``
+      - 192 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_224K``
+      - 224 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_256K``
+      - 256 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_320K``
+      - 320 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_384K``
+      - 384 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_448K``
+      - 448 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_512K``
+      - 512 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_576K``
+      - 576 kbit/s
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_640K``
+      - 640 kbit/s
+
+
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-mode:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_MODE``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_mode -
+    MPEG Audio mode. Possible values are:
+
+
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_MODE_STEREO``
+      - Stereo
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_MODE_JOINT_STEREO``
+      - Joint Stereo
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_MODE_DUAL``
+      - Bilingual
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_MODE_MONO``
+      - Mono
+
+
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-mode-extension:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_MODE_EXTENSION``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_mode_extension -
+    Joint Stereo audio mode extension. In Layer I and II they indicate
+    which subbands are in intensity stereo. All other subbands are coded
+    in stereo. Layer III is not (yet) supported. Possible values are:
+
+
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_MODE_EXTENSION_BOUND_4``
+      - Subbands 4-31 in intensity stereo
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_MODE_EXTENSION_BOUND_8``
+      - Subbands 8-31 in intensity stereo
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_MODE_EXTENSION_BOUND_12``
+      - Subbands 12-31 in intensity stereo
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_MODE_EXTENSION_BOUND_16``
+      - Subbands 16-31 in intensity stereo
+
+
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-emphasis:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_EMPHASIS``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_emphasis -
+    Audio Emphasis. Possible values are:
+
+
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_EMPHASIS_NONE``
+      - None
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_EMPHASIS_50_DIV_15_uS``
+      - 50/15 microsecond emphasis
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_EMPHASIS_CCITT_J17``
+      - CCITT J.17
+
+
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-crc:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_CRC``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_crc -
+    CRC method. Possible values are:
+
+
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_CRC_NONE``
+      - None
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_CRC_CRC16``
+      - 16 bit parity check
+
+
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_MUTE (boolean)``
+    Mutes the audio when capturing. This is not done by muting audio
+    hardware, which can still produce a slight hiss, but in the encoder
+    itself, guaranteeing a fixed and reproducible audio bitstream. 0 =
+    unmuted, 1 = muted.
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-dec-playback:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_PLAYBACK``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_dec_playback -
+    Determines how monolingual audio should be played back. Possible
+    values are:
+
+
+
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{9.8cm}|p{7.7cm}|
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_PLAYBACK_AUTO``
+      - Automatically determines the best playback mode.
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_PLAYBACK_STEREO``
+      - Stereo playback.
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_PLAYBACK_LEFT``
+      - Left channel playback.
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_PLAYBACK_RIGHT``
+      - Right channel playback.
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_PLAYBACK_MONO``
+      - Mono playback.
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_PLAYBACK_SWAPPED_STEREO``
+      - Stereo playback with swapped left and right channels.
+
+
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-dec-multilingual-playback:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_MULTILINGUAL_PLAYBACK``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_dec_playback -
+    Determines how multilingual audio should be played back.
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-encoding:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_ENCODING``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_video_encoding -
+    MPEG Video encoding method. This control is specific to multiplexed
+    MPEG streams. Possible values are:
+
+
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_ENCODING_MPEG_1``
+      - MPEG-1 Video encoding
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_ENCODING_MPEG_2``
+      - MPEG-2 Video encoding
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_ENCODING_MPEG_4_AVC``
+      - MPEG-4 AVC (H.264) Video encoding
+
+
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-aspect:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_ASPECT``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_video_aspect -
+    Video aspect. Possible values are:
+
+
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_ASPECT_1x1``
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_ASPECT_4x3``
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_ASPECT_16x9``
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_ASPECT_221x100``
+
+
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_B_FRAMES (integer)``
+    Number of B-Frames (default 2)
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_GOP_SIZE (integer)``
+    GOP size (default 12)
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_GOP_CLOSURE (boolean)``
+    GOP closure (default 1)
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_PULLDOWN (boolean)``
+    Enable 3:2 pulldown (default 0)
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-bitrate-mode:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_BITRATE_MODE``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_video_bitrate_mode -
+    Video bitrate mode. Possible values are:
+
+
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_BITRATE_MODE_VBR``
+      - Variable bitrate
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_BITRATE_MODE_CBR``
+      - Constant bitrate
+
+
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_BITRATE (integer)``
+    Video bitrate in bits per second.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_BITRATE_PEAK (integer)``
+    Peak video bitrate in bits per second. Must be larger or equal to
+    the average video bitrate. It is ignored if the video bitrate mode
+    is set to constant bitrate.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_TEMPORAL_DECIMATION (integer)``
+    For every captured frame, skip this many subsequent frames (default
+    0).
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MUTE (boolean)``
+    "Mutes" the video to a fixed color when capturing. This is useful
+    for testing, to produce a fixed video bitstream. 0 = unmuted, 1 =
+    muted.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MUTE_YUV (integer)``
+    Sets the "mute" color of the video. The supplied 32-bit integer is
+    interpreted as follows (bit 0 = least significant bit):
+
+
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - Bit 0:7
+      - V chrominance information
+    * - Bit 8:15
+      - U chrominance information
+    * - Bit 16:23
+      - Y luminance information
+    * - Bit 24:31
+      - Must be zero.
+
+
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-dec-pts:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_DEC_PTS (integer64)``
+    This read-only control returns the 33-bit video Presentation Time
+    Stamp as defined in ITU T-REC-H.222.0 and ISO/IEC 13818-1 of the
+    currently displayed frame. This is the same PTS as is used in
+    :ref:`VIDIOC_DECODER_CMD`.
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-dec-frame:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_DEC_FRAME (integer64)``
+    This read-only control returns the frame counter of the frame that
+    is currently displayed (decoded). This value is reset to 0 whenever
+    the decoder is started.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_DECODER_SLICE_INTERFACE (boolean)``
+    If enabled the decoder expects to receive a single slice per buffer,
+    otherwise the decoder expects a single frame in per buffer.
+    Applicable to the decoder, all codecs.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_ENABLE (boolean)``
+    Enable writing sample aspect ratio in the Video Usability
+    Information. Applicable to the H264 encoder.
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-vui-sar-idc:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_vui_sar_idc -
+    VUI sample aspect ratio indicator for H.264 encoding. The value is
+    defined in the table E-1 in the standard. Applicable to the H264
+    encoder.
+
+
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_UNSPECIFIED``
+      - Unspecified
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_1x1``
+      - 1x1
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_12x11``
+      - 12x11
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_10x11``
+      - 10x11
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_16x11``
+      - 16x11
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_40x33``
+      - 40x33
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_24x11``
+      - 24x11
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_20x11``
+      - 20x11
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_32x11``
+      - 32x11
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_80x33``
+      - 80x33
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_18x11``
+      - 18x11
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_15x11``
+      - 15x11
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_64x33``
+      - 64x33
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_160x99``
+      - 160x99
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_4x3``
+      - 4x3
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_3x2``
+      - 3x2
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_2x1``
+      - 2x1
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_EXTENDED``
+      - Extended SAR
+
+
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_EXT_SAR_WIDTH (integer)``
+    Extended sample aspect ratio width for H.264 VUI encoding.
+    Applicable to the H264 encoder.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_EXT_SAR_HEIGHT (integer)``
+    Extended sample aspect ratio height for H.264 VUI encoding.
+    Applicable to the H264 encoder.
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-level:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_level -
+    The level information for the H264 video elementary stream.
+    Applicable to the H264 encoder. Possible values are:
+
+
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_1_0``
+      - Level 1.0
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_1B``
+      - Level 1B
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_1_1``
+      - Level 1.1
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_1_2``
+      - Level 1.2
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_1_3``
+      - Level 1.3
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_2_0``
+      - Level 2.0
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_2_1``
+      - Level 2.1
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_2_2``
+      - Level 2.2
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_3_0``
+      - Level 3.0
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_3_1``
+      - Level 3.1
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_3_2``
+      - Level 3.2
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_4_0``
+      - Level 4.0
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_4_1``
+      - Level 4.1
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_4_2``
+      - Level 4.2
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_5_0``
+      - Level 5.0
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_5_1``
+      - Level 5.1
+
+
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-mpeg4-level:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_LEVEL``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_video_mpeg4_level -
+    The level information for the MPEG4 elementary stream. Applicable to
+    the MPEG4 encoder. Possible values are:
+
+
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_LEVEL_0``
+      - Level 0
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_LEVEL_0B``
+      - Level 0b
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_LEVEL_1``
+      - Level 1
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_LEVEL_2``
+      - Level 2
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_LEVEL_3``
+      - Level 3
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_LEVEL_3B``
+      - Level 3b
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_LEVEL_4``
+      - Level 4
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_LEVEL_5``
+      - Level 5
+
+
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-profile:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_profile -
+    The profile information for H264. Applicable to the H264 encoder.
+    Possible values are:
+
+
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_BASELINE``
+      - Baseline profile
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_CONSTRAINED_BASELINE``
+      - Constrained Baseline profile
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_MAIN``
+      - Main profile
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_EXTENDED``
+      - Extended profile
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_HIGH``
+      - High profile
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_HIGH_10``
+      - High 10 profile
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_HIGH_422``
+      - High 422 profile
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_HIGH_444_PREDICTIVE``
+      - High 444 Predictive profile
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_HIGH_10_INTRA``
+      - High 10 Intra profile
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_HIGH_422_INTRA``
+      - High 422 Intra profile
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_HIGH_444_INTRA``
+      - High 444 Intra profile
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_CAVLC_444_INTRA``
+      - CAVLC 444 Intra profile
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_SCALABLE_BASELINE``
+      - Scalable Baseline profile
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_SCALABLE_HIGH``
+      - Scalable High profile
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_SCALABLE_HIGH_INTRA``
+      - Scalable High Intra profile
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_STEREO_HIGH``
+      - Stereo High profile
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_MULTIVIEW_HIGH``
+      - Multiview High profile
+
+
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-mpeg4-profile:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_PROFILE``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_video_mpeg4_profile -
+    The profile information for MPEG4. Applicable to the MPEG4 encoder.
+    Possible values are:
+
+
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_PROFILE_SIMPLE``
+      - Simple profile
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_PROFILE_ADVANCED_SIMPLE``
+      - Advanced Simple profile
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_PROFILE_CORE``
+      - Core profile
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_PROFILE_SIMPLE_SCALABLE``
+      - Simple Scalable profile
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_PROFILE_ADVANCED_CODING_EFFICIENCY``
+      -
+
+
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MAX_REF_PIC (integer)``
+    The maximum number of reference pictures used for encoding.
+    Applicable to the encoder.
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-multi-slice-mode:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MODE``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_video_multi_slice_mode -
+    Determines how the encoder should handle division of frame into
+    slices. Applicable to the encoder. Possible values are:
+
+
+
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{9.6cm}|p{7.9cm}|
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MODE_SINGLE``
+      - Single slice per frame.
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MODE_MAX_MB``
+      - Multiple slices with set maximum number of macroblocks per slice.
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MODE_MAX_BYTES``
+      - Multiple slice with set maximum size in bytes per slice.
+
+
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MAX_MB (integer)``
+    The maximum number of macroblocks in a slice. Used when
+    ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MODE`` is set to
+    ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MODE_MAX_MB``. Applicable to the
+    encoder.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MAX_BYTES (integer)``
+    The maximum size of a slice in bytes. Used when
+    ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MODE`` is set to
+    ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MODE_MAX_BYTES``. Applicable to the
+    encoder.
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-loop-filter-mode:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LOOP_FILTER_MODE``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_loop_filter_mode -
+    Loop filter mode for H264 encoder. Possible values are:
+
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \small
+
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{13.6cm}|p{3.9cm}|
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LOOP_FILTER_MODE_ENABLED``
+      - Loop filter is enabled.
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LOOP_FILTER_MODE_DISABLED``
+      - Loop filter is disabled.
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LOOP_FILTER_MODE_DISABLED_AT_SLICE_BOUNDARY``
+      - Loop filter is disabled at the slice boundary.
+
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \normalsize
+
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LOOP_FILTER_ALPHA (integer)``
+    Loop filter alpha coefficient, defined in the H264 standard.
+    This value corresponds to the slice_alpha_c0_offset_div2 slice header
+    field, and should be in the range of -6 to +6, inclusive. The actual alpha
+    offset FilterOffsetA is twice this value.
+    Applicable to the H264 encoder.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LOOP_FILTER_BETA (integer)``
+    Loop filter beta coefficient, defined in the H264 standard.
+    This corresponds to the slice_beta_offset_div2 slice header field, and
+    should be in the range of -6 to +6, inclusive. The actual beta offset
+    FilterOffsetB is twice this value.
+    Applicable to the H264 encoder.
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-entropy-mode:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_ENTROPY_MODE``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_entropy_mode -
+    Entropy coding mode for H264 - CABAC/CAVALC. Applicable to the H264
+    encoder. Possible values are:
+
+
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{9.0cm}|p{8.5cm}|
+
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_ENTROPY_MODE_CAVLC``
+      - Use CAVLC entropy coding.
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_ENTROPY_MODE_CABAC``
+      - Use CABAC entropy coding.
+
+
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_8X8_TRANSFORM (boolean)``
+    Enable 8X8 transform for H264. Applicable to the H264 encoder.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_CONSTRAINED_INTRA_PREDICTION (boolean)``
+    Enable constrained intra prediction for H264. Applicable to the H264
+    encoder.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_CHROMA_QP_INDEX_OFFSET (integer)``
+    Specify the offset that should be added to the luma quantization
+    parameter to determine the chroma quantization parameter. Applicable
+    to the H264 encoder.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_CYCLIC_INTRA_REFRESH_MB (integer)``
+    Cyclic intra macroblock refresh. This is the number of continuous
+    macroblocks refreshed every frame. Each frame a successive set of
+    macroblocks is refreshed until the cycle completes and starts from
+    the top of the frame. Applicable to H264, H263 and MPEG4 encoder.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_FRAME_RC_ENABLE (boolean)``
+    Frame level rate control enable. If this control is disabled then
+    the quantization parameter for each frame type is constant and set
+    with appropriate controls (e.g.
+    ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H263_I_FRAME_QP``). If frame rate control is
+    enabled then quantization parameter is adjusted to meet the chosen
+    bitrate. Minimum and maximum value for the quantization parameter
+    can be set with appropriate controls (e.g.
+    ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H263_MIN_QP``). Applicable to encoders.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MB_RC_ENABLE (boolean)``
+    Macroblock level rate control enable. Applicable to the MPEG4 and
+    H264 encoders.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_QPEL (boolean)``
+    Quarter pixel motion estimation for MPEG4. Applicable to the MPEG4
+    encoder.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H263_I_FRAME_QP (integer)``
+    Quantization parameter for an I frame for H263. Valid range: from 1
+    to 31.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H263_MIN_QP (integer)``
+    Minimum quantization parameter for H263. Valid range: from 1 to 31.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H263_MAX_QP (integer)``
+    Maximum quantization parameter for H263. Valid range: from 1 to 31.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H263_P_FRAME_QP (integer)``
+    Quantization parameter for an P frame for H263. Valid range: from 1
+    to 31.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H263_B_FRAME_QP (integer)``
+    Quantization parameter for an B frame for H263. Valid range: from 1
+    to 31.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_I_FRAME_QP (integer)``
+    Quantization parameter for an I frame for H264. Valid range: from 0
+    to 51.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_MIN_QP (integer)``
+    Minimum quantization parameter for H264. Valid range: from 0 to 51.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_MAX_QP (integer)``
+    Maximum quantization parameter for H264. Valid range: from 0 to 51.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_P_FRAME_QP (integer)``
+    Quantization parameter for an P frame for H264. Valid range: from 0
+    to 51.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_B_FRAME_QP (integer)``
+    Quantization parameter for an B frame for H264. Valid range: from 0
+    to 51.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_I_FRAME_MIN_QP (integer)``
+    Minimum quantization parameter for the H264 I frame to limit I frame
+    quality to a range. Valid range: from 0 to 51. If
+    V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_MIN_QP is also set, the quantization parameter
+    should be chosen to meet both requirements.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_I_FRAME_MAX_QP (integer)``
+    Maximum quantization parameter for the H264 I frame to limit I frame
+    quality to a range. Valid range: from 0 to 51. If
+    V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_MAX_QP is also set, the quantization parameter
+    should be chosen to meet both requirements.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_P_FRAME_MIN_QP (integer)``
+    Minimum quantization parameter for the H264 P frame to limit P frame
+    quality to a range. Valid range: from 0 to 51. If
+    V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_MIN_QP is also set, the quantization parameter
+    should be chosen to meet both requirements.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_P_FRAME_MAX_QP (integer)``
+    Maximum quantization parameter for the H264 P frame to limit P frame
+    quality to a range. Valid range: from 0 to 51. If
+    V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_MAX_QP is also set, the quantization parameter
+    should be chosen to meet both requirements.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_I_FRAME_QP (integer)``
+    Quantization parameter for an I frame for MPEG4. Valid range: from 1
+    to 31.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_MIN_QP (integer)``
+    Minimum quantization parameter for MPEG4. Valid range: from 1 to 31.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_MAX_QP (integer)``
+    Maximum quantization parameter for MPEG4. Valid range: from 1 to 31.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_P_FRAME_QP (integer)``
+    Quantization parameter for an P frame for MPEG4. Valid range: from 1
+    to 31.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_B_FRAME_QP (integer)``
+    Quantization parameter for an B frame for MPEG4. Valid range: from 1
+    to 31.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VBV_SIZE (integer)``
+    The Video Buffer Verifier size in kilobytes, it is used as a
+    limitation of frame skip. The VBV is defined in the standard as a
+    mean to verify that the produced stream will be successfully
+    decoded. The standard describes it as "Part of a hypothetical
+    decoder that is conceptually connected to the output of the encoder.
+    Its purpose is to provide a constraint on the variability of the
+    data rate that an encoder or editing process may produce.".
+    Applicable to the MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG4 encoders.
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-vbv-delay:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VBV_DELAY (integer)``
+    Sets the initial delay in milliseconds for VBV buffer control.
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-hor-search-range:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MV_H_SEARCH_RANGE (integer)``
+    Horizontal search range defines maximum horizontal search area in
+    pixels to search and match for the present Macroblock (MB) in the
+    reference picture. This V4L2 control macro is used to set horizontal
+    search range for motion estimation module in video encoder.
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-vert-search-range:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MV_V_SEARCH_RANGE (integer)``
+    Vertical search range defines maximum vertical search area in pixels
+    to search and match for the present Macroblock (MB) in the reference
+    picture. This V4L2 control macro is used to set vertical search
+    range for motion estimation module in video encoder.
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-force-key-frame:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_FORCE_KEY_FRAME (button)``
+    Force a key frame for the next queued buffer. Applicable to
+    encoders. This is a general, codec-agnostic keyframe control.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_CPB_SIZE (integer)``
+    The Coded Picture Buffer size in kilobytes, it is used as a
+    limitation of frame skip. The CPB is defined in the H264 standard as
+    a mean to verify that the produced stream will be successfully
+    decoded. Applicable to the H264 encoder.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_I_PERIOD (integer)``
+    Period between I-frames in the open GOP for H264. In case of an open
+    GOP this is the period between two I-frames. The period between IDR
+    (Instantaneous Decoding Refresh) frames is taken from the GOP_SIZE
+    control. An IDR frame, which stands for Instantaneous Decoding
+    Refresh is an I-frame after which no prior frames are referenced.
+    This means that a stream can be restarted from an IDR frame without
+    the need to store or decode any previous frames. Applicable to the
+    H264 encoder.
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-header-mode:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEADER_MODE``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_video_header_mode -
+    Determines whether the header is returned as the first buffer or is
+    it returned together with the first frame. Applicable to encoders.
+    Possible values are:
+
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \small
+
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{10.3cm}|p{7.2cm}|
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEADER_MODE_SEPARATE``
+      - The stream header is returned separately in the first buffer.
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEADER_MODE_JOINED_WITH_1ST_FRAME``
+      - The stream header is returned together with the first encoded
+	frame.
+
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \normalsize
+
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_REPEAT_SEQ_HEADER (boolean)``
+    Repeat the video sequence headers. Repeating these headers makes
+    random access to the video stream easier. Applicable to the MPEG1, 2
+    and 4 encoder.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_DECODER_MPEG4_DEBLOCK_FILTER (boolean)``
+    Enabled the deblocking post processing filter for MPEG4 decoder.
+    Applicable to the MPEG4 decoder.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_VOP_TIME_RES (integer)``
+    vop_time_increment_resolution value for MPEG4. Applicable to the
+    MPEG4 encoder.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_VOP_TIME_INC (integer)``
+    vop_time_increment value for MPEG4. Applicable to the MPEG4
+    encoder.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FRAME_PACKING (boolean)``
+    Enable generation of frame packing supplemental enhancement
+    information in the encoded bitstream. The frame packing SEI message
+    contains the arrangement of L and R planes for 3D viewing.
+    Applicable to the H264 encoder.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_CURRENT_FRAME_0 (boolean)``
+    Sets current frame as frame0 in frame packing SEI. Applicable to the
+    H264 encoder.
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-sei-fp-arrangement-type:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_sei_fp_arrangement_type -
+    Frame packing arrangement type for H264 SEI. Applicable to the H264
+    encoder. Possible values are:
+
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \small
+
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{12cm}|p{5.5cm}|
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE_CHEKERBOARD``
+      - Pixels are alternatively from L and R.
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE_COLUMN``
+      - L and R are interlaced by column.
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE_ROW``
+      - L and R are interlaced by row.
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE_SIDE_BY_SIDE``
+      - L is on the left, R on the right.
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE_TOP_BOTTOM``
+      - L is on top, R on bottom.
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE_TEMPORAL``
+      - One view per frame.
+
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \normalsize
+
+
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO (boolean)``
+    Enables flexible macroblock ordering in the encoded bitstream. It is
+    a technique used for restructuring the ordering of macroblocks in
+    pictures. Applicable to the H264 encoder.
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-fmo-map-type:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE``
+   (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_fmo_map_type -
+    When using FMO, the map type divides the image in different scan
+    patterns of macroblocks. Applicable to the H264 encoder. Possible
+    values are:
+
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \small
+
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{12.5cm}|p{5.0cm}|
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_INTERLEAVED_SLICES``
+      - Slices are interleaved one after other with macroblocks in run
+	length order.
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_SCATTERED_SLICES``
+      - Scatters the macroblocks based on a mathematical function known to
+	both encoder and decoder.
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_FOREGROUND_WITH_LEFT_OVER``
+      - Macroblocks arranged in rectangular areas or regions of interest.
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_BOX_OUT``
+      - Slice groups grow in a cyclic way from centre to outwards.
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_RASTER_SCAN``
+      - Slice groups grow in raster scan pattern from left to right.
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_WIPE_SCAN``
+      - Slice groups grow in wipe scan pattern from top to bottom.
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_EXPLICIT``
+      - User defined map type.
+
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \normalsize
+
+
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_SLICE_GROUP (integer)``
+    Number of slice groups in FMO. Applicable to the H264 encoder.
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-fmo-change-direction:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_CHANGE_DIRECTION``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_fmo_change_dir -
+    Specifies a direction of the slice group change for raster and wipe
+    maps. Applicable to the H264 encoder. Possible values are:
+
+
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_CHANGE_DIR_RIGHT``
+      - Raster scan or wipe right.
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_CHANGE_DIR_LEFT``
+      - Reverse raster scan or wipe left.
+
+
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_CHANGE_RATE (integer)``
+    Specifies the size of the first slice group for raster and wipe map.
+    Applicable to the H264 encoder.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_RUN_LENGTH (integer)``
+    Specifies the number of consecutive macroblocks for the interleaved
+    map. Applicable to the H264 encoder.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_ASO (boolean)``
+    Enables arbitrary slice ordering in encoded bitstream. Applicable to
+    the H264 encoder.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_ASO_SLICE_ORDER (integer)``
+    Specifies the slice order in ASO. Applicable to the H264 encoder.
+    The supplied 32-bit integer is interpreted as follows (bit 0 = least
+    significant bit):
+
+
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - Bit 0:15
+      - Slice ID
+    * - Bit 16:32
+      - Slice position or order
+
+
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_HIERARCHICAL_CODING (boolean)``
+    Enables H264 hierarchical coding. Applicable to the H264 encoder.
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-hierarchical-coding-type:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_HIERARCHICAL_CODING_TYPE``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_hierarchical_coding_type -
+    Specifies the hierarchical coding type. Applicable to the H264
+    encoder. Possible values are:
+
+
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_HIERARCHICAL_CODING_B``
+      - Hierarchical B coding.
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_HIERARCHICAL_CODING_P``
+      - Hierarchical P coding.
+
+
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_HIERARCHICAL_CODING_LAYER (integer)``
+    Specifies the number of hierarchical coding layers. Applicable to
+    the H264 encoder.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_HIERARCHICAL_CODING_LAYER_QP (integer)``
+    Specifies a user defined QP for each layer. Applicable to the H264
+    encoder. The supplied 32-bit integer is interpreted as follows (bit
+    0 = least significant bit):
+
+
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - Bit 0:15
+      - QP value
+    * - Bit 16:32
+      - Layer number
+
+
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-mpeg2:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG2_SLICE_PARAMS (struct)``
+    Specifies the slice parameters (as extracted from the bitstream) for the
+    associated MPEG-2 slice data. This includes the necessary parameters for
+    configuring a stateless hardware decoding pipeline for MPEG-2.
+    The bitstream parameters are defined according to :ref:`mpeg2part2`.
+
+    .. note::
+
+       This compound control is not yet part of the public kernel API and
+       it is expected to change.
+
+.. c:type:: v4l2_ctrl_mpeg2_slice_params
+
+.. cssclass:: longtable
+
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{5.8cm}|p{4.8cm}|p{6.6cm}|
+
+.. flat-table:: struct v4l2_ctrl_mpeg2_slice_params
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+    :widths:       1 1 2
+
+    * - __u32
+      - ``bit_size``
+      - Size (in bits) of the current slice data.
+    * - __u32
+      - ``data_bit_offset``
+      - Offset (in bits) to the video data in the current slice data.
+    * - struct :c:type:`v4l2_mpeg2_sequence`
+      - ``sequence``
+      - Structure with MPEG-2 sequence metadata, merging relevant fields from
+	the sequence header and sequence extension parts of the bitstream.
+    * - struct :c:type:`v4l2_mpeg2_picture`
+      - ``picture``
+      - Structure with MPEG-2 picture metadata, merging relevant fields from
+	the picture header and picture coding extension parts of the bitstream.
+    * - __u64
+      - ``backward_ref_ts``
+      - Timestamp of the V4L2 capture buffer to use as backward reference, used
+        with B-coded and P-coded frames. The timestamp refers to the
+	``timestamp`` field in struct :c:type:`v4l2_buffer`. Use the
+	:c:func:`v4l2_timeval_to_ns()` function to convert the struct
+	:c:type:`timeval` in struct :c:type:`v4l2_buffer` to a __u64.
+    * - __u64
+      - ``forward_ref_ts``
+      - Timestamp for the V4L2 capture buffer to use as forward reference, used
+        with B-coded frames. The timestamp refers to the ``timestamp`` field in
+	struct :c:type:`v4l2_buffer`. Use the :c:func:`v4l2_timeval_to_ns()`
+	function to convert the struct :c:type:`timeval` in struct
+	:c:type:`v4l2_buffer` to a __u64.
+    * - __u32
+      - ``quantiser_scale_code``
+      - Code used to determine the quantization scale to use for the IDCT.
+
+.. c:type:: v4l2_mpeg2_sequence
+
+.. cssclass:: longtable
+
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{1.5cm}|p{6.3cm}|p{9.4cm}|
+
+.. flat-table:: struct v4l2_mpeg2_sequence
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+    :widths:       1 1 2
+
+    * - __u16
+      - ``horizontal_size``
+      - The width of the displayable part of the frame's luminance component.
+    * - __u16
+      - ``vertical_size``
+      - The height of the displayable part of the frame's luminance component.
+    * - __u32
+      - ``vbv_buffer_size``
+      - Used to calculate the required size of the video buffering verifier,
+	defined (in bits) as: 16 * 1024 * vbv_buffer_size.
+    * - __u16
+      - ``profile_and_level_indication``
+      - The current profile and level indication as extracted from the
+	bitstream.
+    * - __u8
+      - ``progressive_sequence``
+      - Indication that all the frames for the sequence are progressive instead
+	of interlaced.
+    * - __u8
+      - ``chroma_format``
+      - The chrominance sub-sampling format (1: 4:2:0, 2: 4:2:2, 3: 4:4:4).
+
+.. c:type:: v4l2_mpeg2_picture
+
+.. cssclass:: longtable
+
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{1.5cm}|p{6.3cm}|p{9.4cm}|
+
+.. flat-table:: struct v4l2_mpeg2_picture
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+    :widths:       1 1 2
+
+    * - __u8
+      - ``picture_coding_type``
+      - Picture coding type for the frame covered by the current slice
+	(V4L2_MPEG2_PICTURE_CODING_TYPE_I, V4L2_MPEG2_PICTURE_CODING_TYPE_P or
+	V4L2_MPEG2_PICTURE_CODING_TYPE_B).
+    * - __u8
+      - ``f_code[2][2]``
+      - Motion vector codes.
+    * - __u8
+      - ``intra_dc_precision``
+      - Precision of Discrete Cosine transform (0: 8 bits precision,
+	1: 9 bits precision, 2: 10 bits precision, 3: 11 bits precision).
+    * - __u8
+      - ``picture_structure``
+      - Picture structure (1: interlaced top field, 2: interlaced bottom field,
+	3: progressive frame).
+    * - __u8
+      - ``top_field_first``
+      - If set to 1 and interlaced stream, top field is output first.
+    * - __u8
+      - ``frame_pred_frame_dct``
+      - If set to 1, only frame-DCT and frame prediction are used.
+    * - __u8
+      - ``concealment_motion_vectors``
+      -  If set to 1, motion vectors are coded for intra macroblocks.
+    * - __u8
+      - ``q_scale_type``
+      - This flag affects the inverse quantization process.
+    * - __u8
+      - ``intra_vlc_format``
+      - This flag affects the decoding of transform coefficient data.
+    * - __u8
+      - ``alternate_scan``
+      - This flag affects the decoding of transform coefficient data.
+    * - __u8
+      - ``repeat_first_field``
+      - This flag affects the decoding process of progressive frames.
+    * - __u16
+      - ``progressive_frame``
+      - Indicates whether the current frame is progressive.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG2_QUANTIZATION (struct)``
+    Specifies quantization matrices (as extracted from the bitstream) for the
+    associated MPEG-2 slice data.
+
+    .. note::
+
+       This compound control is not yet part of the public kernel API and
+       it is expected to change.
+
+.. c:type:: v4l2_ctrl_mpeg2_quantization
+
+.. cssclass:: longtable
+
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{1.2cm}|p{8.0cm}|p{7.4cm}|
+
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \small
+
+.. flat-table:: struct v4l2_ctrl_mpeg2_quantization
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+    :widths:       1 1 2
+
+    * - __u8
+      - ``load_intra_quantiser_matrix``
+      - One bit to indicate whether to load the ``intra_quantiser_matrix`` data.
+    * - __u8
+      - ``load_non_intra_quantiser_matrix``
+      - One bit to indicate whether to load the ``non_intra_quantiser_matrix``
+	data.
+    * - __u8
+      - ``load_chroma_intra_quantiser_matrix``
+      - One bit to indicate whether to load the
+	``chroma_intra_quantiser_matrix`` data, only relevant for non-4:2:0 YUV
+	formats.
+    * - __u8
+      - ``load_chroma_non_intra_quantiser_matrix``
+      - One bit to indicate whether to load the
+	``chroma_non_intra_quantiser_matrix`` data, only relevant for non-4:2:0
+	YUV formats.
+    * - __u8
+      - ``intra_quantiser_matrix[64]``
+      - The quantization matrix coefficients for intra-coded frames, in zigzag
+	scanning order. It is relevant for both luma and chroma components,
+	although it can be superseded by the chroma-specific matrix for
+	non-4:2:0 YUV formats.
+    * - __u8
+      - ``non_intra_quantiser_matrix[64]``
+      - The quantization matrix coefficients for non-intra-coded frames, in
+	zigzag scanning order. It is relevant for both luma and chroma
+	components, although it can be superseded by the chroma-specific matrix
+	for non-4:2:0 YUV formats.
+    * - __u8
+      - ``chroma_intra_quantiser_matrix[64]``
+      - The quantization matrix coefficients for the chominance component of
+	intra-coded frames, in zigzag scanning order. Only relevant for
+	non-4:2:0 YUV formats.
+    * - __u8
+      - ``chroma_non_intra_quantiser_matrix[64]``
+      - The quantization matrix coefficients for the chrominance component of
+	non-intra-coded frames, in zigzag scanning order. Only relevant for
+	non-4:2:0 YUV formats.
+
+``V4L2_CID_FWHT_I_FRAME_QP (integer)``
+    Quantization parameter for an I frame for FWHT. Valid range: from 1
+    to 31.
+
+``V4L2_CID_FWHT_P_FRAME_QP (integer)``
+    Quantization parameter for a P frame for FWHT. Valid range: from 1
+    to 31.
+
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \normalsize
+
+
+MFC 5.1 MPEG Controls
+=====================
+
+The following MPEG class controls deal with MPEG decoding and encoding
+settings that are specific to the Multi Format Codec 5.1 device present
+in the S5P family of SoCs by Samsung.
+
+
+.. _mfc51-control-id:
+
+MFC 5.1 Control IDs
+-------------------
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_DECODER_H264_DISPLAY_DELAY_ENABLE (boolean)``
+    If the display delay is enabled then the decoder is forced to return
+    a CAPTURE buffer (decoded frame) after processing a certain number
+    of OUTPUT buffers. The delay can be set through
+    ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_DECODER_H264_DISPLAY_DELAY``. This
+    feature can be used for example for generating thumbnails of videos.
+    Applicable to the H264 decoder.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_DECODER_H264_DISPLAY_DELAY (integer)``
+    Display delay value for H264 decoder. The decoder is forced to
+    return a decoded frame after the set 'display delay' number of
+    frames. If this number is low it may result in frames returned out
+    of display order, in addition the hardware may still be using the
+    returned buffer as a reference picture for subsequent frames.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_H264_NUM_REF_PIC_FOR_P (integer)``
+    The number of reference pictures used for encoding a P picture.
+    Applicable to the H264 encoder.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_PADDING (boolean)``
+    Padding enable in the encoder - use a color instead of repeating
+    border pixels. Applicable to encoders.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_PADDING_YUV (integer)``
+    Padding color in the encoder. Applicable to encoders. The supplied
+    32-bit integer is interpreted as follows (bit 0 = least significant
+    bit):
+
+
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - Bit 0:7
+      - V chrominance information
+    * - Bit 8:15
+      - U chrominance information
+    * - Bit 16:23
+      - Y luminance information
+    * - Bit 24:31
+      - Must be zero.
+
+
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_RC_REACTION_COEFF (integer)``
+    Reaction coefficient for MFC rate control. Applicable to encoders.
+
+    .. note::
+
+       #. Valid only when the frame level RC is enabled.
+
+       #. For tight CBR, this field must be small (ex. 2 ~ 10). For
+	  VBR, this field must be large (ex. 100 ~ 1000).
+
+       #. It is not recommended to use the greater number than
+	  FRAME_RATE * (10^9 / BIT_RATE).
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_H264_ADAPTIVE_RC_DARK (boolean)``
+    Adaptive rate control for dark region. Valid only when H.264 and
+    macroblock level RC is enabled
+    (``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MB_RC_ENABLE``). Applicable to the H264
+    encoder.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_H264_ADAPTIVE_RC_SMOOTH (boolean)``
+    Adaptive rate control for smooth region. Valid only when H.264 and
+    macroblock level RC is enabled
+    (``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MB_RC_ENABLE``). Applicable to the H264
+    encoder.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_H264_ADAPTIVE_RC_STATIC (boolean)``
+    Adaptive rate control for static region. Valid only when H.264 and
+    macroblock level RC is enabled
+    (``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MB_RC_ENABLE``). Applicable to the H264
+    encoder.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_H264_ADAPTIVE_RC_ACTIVITY (boolean)``
+    Adaptive rate control for activity region. Valid only when H.264 and
+    macroblock level RC is enabled
+    (``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MB_RC_ENABLE``). Applicable to the H264
+    encoder.
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-mfc51-video-frame-skip-mode:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_FRAME_SKIP_MODE``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_mfc51_video_frame_skip_mode -
+    Indicates in what conditions the encoder should skip frames. If
+    encoding a frame would cause the encoded stream to be larger then a
+    chosen data limit then the frame will be skipped. Possible values
+    are:
+
+
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{9.2cm}|p{8.3cm}|
+
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \small
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_MFC51_FRAME_SKIP_MODE_DISABLED``
+      - Frame skip mode is disabled.
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_MFC51_FRAME_SKIP_MODE_LEVEL_LIMIT``
+      - Frame skip mode enabled and buffer limit is set by the chosen
+	level and is defined by the standard.
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_MFC51_FRAME_SKIP_MODE_BUF_LIMIT``
+      - Frame skip mode enabled and buffer limit is set by the VBV
+	(MPEG1/2/4) or CPB (H264) buffer size control.
+
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \normalsize
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_RC_FIXED_TARGET_BIT (integer)``
+    Enable rate-control with fixed target bit. If this setting is
+    enabled, then the rate control logic of the encoder will calculate
+    the average bitrate for a GOP and keep it below or equal the set
+    bitrate target. Otherwise the rate control logic calculates the
+    overall average bitrate for the stream and keeps it below or equal
+    to the set bitrate. In the first case the average bitrate for the
+    whole stream will be smaller then the set bitrate. This is caused
+    because the average is calculated for smaller number of frames, on
+    the other hand enabling this setting will ensure that the stream
+    will meet tight bandwidth constraints. Applicable to encoders.
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-mfc51-video-force-frame-type:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_FORCE_FRAME_TYPE``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_mfc51_video_force_frame_type -
+    Force a frame type for the next queued buffer. Applicable to
+    encoders. Possible values are:
+
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{9.5cm}|p{8.0cm}|
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_MFC51_FORCE_FRAME_TYPE_DISABLED``
+      - Forcing a specific frame type disabled.
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_MFC51_FORCE_FRAME_TYPE_I_FRAME``
+      - Force an I-frame.
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_MFC51_FORCE_FRAME_TYPE_NOT_CODED``
+      - Force a non-coded frame.
+
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-fwht:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_FWHT_PARAMS (struct)``
+    Specifies the fwht parameters (as extracted from the bitstream) for the
+    associated FWHT data. This includes the necessary parameters for
+    configuring a stateless hardware decoding pipeline for FWHT.
+
+    .. note::
+
+       This compound control is not yet part of the public kernel API and
+       it is expected to change.
+
+.. c:type:: v4l2_ctrl_fwht_params
+
+.. cssclass:: longtable
+
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{1.4cm}|p{4.3cm}|p{11.8cm}|
+
+.. flat-table:: struct v4l2_ctrl_fwht_params
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+    :widths:       1 1 2
+
+    * - __u64
+      - ``backward_ref_ts``
+      - Timestamp of the V4L2 capture buffer to use as backward reference, used
+        with P-coded frames. The timestamp refers to the
+	``timestamp`` field in struct :c:type:`v4l2_buffer`. Use the
+	:c:func:`v4l2_timeval_to_ns()` function to convert the struct
+	:c:type:`timeval` in struct :c:type:`v4l2_buffer` to a __u64.
+    * - __u32
+      - ``version``
+      - The version of the codec
+    * - __u32
+      - ``width``
+      - The width of the frame
+    * - __u32
+      - ``height``
+      - The height of the frame
+    * - __u32
+      - ``flags``
+      - The flags of the frame, see :ref:`fwht-flags`.
+    * - __u32
+      - ``colorspace``
+      - The colorspace of the frame, from enum :c:type:`v4l2_colorspace`.
+    * - __u32
+      - ``xfer_func``
+      - The transfer function, from enum :c:type:`v4l2_xfer_func`.
+    * - __u32
+      - ``ycbcr_enc``
+      - The Y'CbCr encoding, from enum :c:type:`v4l2_ycbcr_encoding`.
+    * - __u32
+      - ``quantization``
+      - The quantization range, from enum :c:type:`v4l2_quantization`.
+
+
+
+.. _fwht-flags:
+
+FWHT Flags
+============
+
+.. cssclass:: longtable
+
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{6.8cm}|p{2.4cm}|p{8.3cm}|
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+    :widths:       3 1 4
+
+    * - ``FWHT_FL_IS_INTERLACED``
+      - 0x00000001
+      - Set if this is an interlaced format
+    * - ``FWHT_FL_IS_BOTTOM_FIRST``
+      - 0x00000002
+      - Set if this is a bottom-first (NTSC) interlaced format
+    * - ``FWHT_FL_IS_ALTERNATE``
+      - 0x00000004
+      - Set if each 'frame' contains just one field
+    * - ``FWHT_FL_IS_BOTTOM_FIELD``
+      - 0x00000008
+      - If FWHT_FL_IS_ALTERNATE was set, then this is set if this 'frame' is the
+	bottom field, else it is the top field.
+    * - ``FWHT_FL_LUMA_IS_UNCOMPRESSED``
+      - 0x00000010
+      - Set if the luma plane is uncompressed
+    * - ``FWHT_FL_CB_IS_UNCOMPRESSED``
+      - 0x00000020
+      - Set if the cb plane is uncompressed
+    * - ``FWHT_FL_CR_IS_UNCOMPRESSED``
+      - 0x00000040
+      - Set if the cr plane is uncompressed
+    * - ``FWHT_FL_CHROMA_FULL_HEIGHT``
+      - 0x00000080
+      - Set if the chroma plane has the same height as the luma plane,
+	else the chroma plane is half the height of the luma plane
+    * - ``FWHT_FL_CHROMA_FULL_WIDTH``
+      - 0x00000100
+      - Set if the chroma plane has the same width as the luma plane,
+	else the chroma plane is half the width of the luma plane
+    * - ``FWHT_FL_ALPHA_IS_UNCOMPRESSED``
+      - 0x00000200
+      - Set if the alpha plane is uncompressed
+    * - ``FWHT_FL_I_FRAME``
+      - 0x00000400
+      - Set if this is an I-frame
+    * - ``FWHT_FL_COMPONENTS_NUM_MSK``
+      - 0x00070000
+      - A 4-values flag - the number of components - 1
+    * - ``FWHT_FL_PIXENC_YUV``
+      - 0x00080000
+      - Set if the pixel encoding is YUV
+    * - ``FWHT_FL_PIXENC_RGB``
+      - 0x00100000
+      - Set if the pixel encoding is RGB
+    * - ``FWHT_FL_PIXENC_HSV``
+      - 0x00180000
+      - Set if the pixel encoding is HSV
+
+
+CX2341x MPEG Controls
+=====================
+
+The following MPEG class controls deal with MPEG encoding settings that
+are specific to the Conexant CX23415 and CX23416 MPEG encoding chips.
+
+
+.. _cx2341x-control-id:
+
+CX2341x Control IDs
+-------------------
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-cx2341x-video-spatial-filter-mode:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_SPATIAL_FILTER_MODE``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_cx2341x_video_spatial_filter_mode -
+    Sets the Spatial Filter mode (default ``MANUAL``). Possible values
+    are:
+
+
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_SPATIAL_FILTER_MODE_MANUAL``
+      - Choose the filter manually
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_SPATIAL_FILTER_MODE_AUTO``
+      - Choose the filter automatically
+
+
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_SPATIAL_FILTER (integer (0-15))``
+    The setting for the Spatial Filter. 0 = off, 15 = maximum. (Default
+    is 0.)
+
+.. _luma-spatial-filter-type:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_LUMA_SPATIAL_FILTER_TYPE``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_cx2341x_video_luma_spatial_filter_type -
+    Select the algorithm to use for the Luma Spatial Filter (default
+    ``1D_HOR``). Possible values:
+
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{14.5cm}|p{3.0cm}|
+
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \small
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_LUMA_SPATIAL_FILTER_TYPE_OFF``
+      - No filter
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_LUMA_SPATIAL_FILTER_TYPE_1D_HOR``
+      - One-dimensional horizontal
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_LUMA_SPATIAL_FILTER_TYPE_1D_VERT``
+      - One-dimensional vertical
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_LUMA_SPATIAL_FILTER_TYPE_2D_HV_SEPARABLE``
+      - Two-dimensional separable
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_LUMA_SPATIAL_FILTER_TYPE_2D_SYM_NON_SEPARABLE``
+      - Two-dimensional symmetrical non-separable
+
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \normalsize
+
+
+
+.. _chroma-spatial-filter-type:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_CHROMA_SPATIAL_FILTER_TYPE``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_cx2341x_video_chroma_spatial_filter_type -
+    Select the algorithm for the Chroma Spatial Filter (default
+    ``1D_HOR``). Possible values are:
+
+
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{14.0cm}|p{3.5cm}|
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_CHROMA_SPATIAL_FILTER_TYPE_OFF``
+      - No filter
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_CHROMA_SPATIAL_FILTER_TYPE_1D_HOR``
+      - One-dimensional horizontal
+
+
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-cx2341x-video-temporal-filter-mode:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_TEMPORAL_FILTER_MODE``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_cx2341x_video_temporal_filter_mode -
+    Sets the Temporal Filter mode (default ``MANUAL``). Possible values
+    are:
+
+
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_TEMPORAL_FILTER_MODE_MANUAL``
+      - Choose the filter manually
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_TEMPORAL_FILTER_MODE_AUTO``
+      - Choose the filter automatically
+
+
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_TEMPORAL_FILTER (integer (0-31))``
+    The setting for the Temporal Filter. 0 = off, 31 = maximum. (Default
+    is 8 for full-scale capturing and 0 for scaled capturing.)
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-cx2341x-video-median-filter-type:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_MEDIAN_FILTER_TYPE``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_cx2341x_video_median_filter_type -
+    Median Filter Type (default ``OFF``). Possible values are:
+
+
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_MEDIAN_FILTER_TYPE_OFF``
+      - No filter
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_MEDIAN_FILTER_TYPE_HOR``
+      - Horizontal filter
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_MEDIAN_FILTER_TYPE_VERT``
+      - Vertical filter
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_MEDIAN_FILTER_TYPE_HOR_VERT``
+      - Horizontal and vertical filter
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_MEDIAN_FILTER_TYPE_DIAG``
+      - Diagonal filter
+
+
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_LUMA_MEDIAN_FILTER_BOTTOM (integer (0-255))``
+    Threshold above which the luminance median filter is enabled
+    (default 0)
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_LUMA_MEDIAN_FILTER_TOP (integer (0-255))``
+    Threshold below which the luminance median filter is enabled
+    (default 255)
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_CHROMA_MEDIAN_FILTER_BOTTOM (integer (0-255))``
+    Threshold above which the chroma median filter is enabled (default
+    0)
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_CHROMA_MEDIAN_FILTER_TOP (integer (0-255))``
+    Threshold below which the chroma median filter is enabled (default
+    255)
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_STREAM_INSERT_NAV_PACKETS (boolean)``
+    The CX2341X MPEG encoder can insert one empty MPEG-2 PES packet into
+    the stream between every four video frames. The packet size is 2048
+    bytes, including the packet_start_code_prefix and stream_id
+    fields. The stream_id is 0xBF (private stream 2). The payload
+    consists of 0x00 bytes, to be filled in by the application. 0 = do
+    not insert, 1 = insert packets.
+
+
+VPX Control Reference
+=====================
+
+The VPX controls include controls for encoding parameters of VPx video
+codec.
+
+
+.. _vpx-control-id:
+
+VPX Control IDs
+---------------
+
+.. _v4l2-vpx-num-partitions:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_NUM_PARTITIONS``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_vp8_num_partitions -
+    The number of token partitions to use in VP8 encoder. Possible
+    values are:
+
+
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_1_PARTITION``
+      - 1 coefficient partition
+    * - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_2_PARTITIONS``
+      - 2 coefficient partitions
+    * - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_4_PARTITIONS``
+      - 4 coefficient partitions
+    * - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_8_PARTITIONS``
+      - 8 coefficient partitions
+
+
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_IMD_DISABLE_4X4 (boolean)``
+    Setting this prevents intra 4x4 mode in the intra mode decision.
+
+.. _v4l2-vpx-num-ref-frames:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_NUM_REF_FRAMES``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_vp8_num_ref_frames -
+    The number of reference pictures for encoding P frames. Possible
+    values are:
+
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{7.9cm}|p{9.6cm}|
+
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \small
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_1_REF_FRAME``
+      - Last encoded frame will be searched
+    * - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_2_REF_FRAME``
+      - Two frames will be searched among the last encoded frame, the
+	golden frame and the alternate reference (altref) frame. The
+	encoder implementation will decide which two are chosen.
+    * - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_3_REF_FRAME``
+      - The last encoded frame, the golden frame and the altref frame will
+	be searched.
+
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \normalsize
+
+
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_FILTER_LEVEL (integer)``
+    Indicates the loop filter level. The adjustment of the loop filter
+    level is done via a delta value against a baseline loop filter
+    value.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_FILTER_SHARPNESS (integer)``
+    This parameter affects the loop filter. Anything above zero weakens
+    the deblocking effect on the loop filter.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_GOLDEN_FRAME_REF_PERIOD (integer)``
+    Sets the refresh period for the golden frame. The period is defined
+    in number of frames. For a value of 'n', every nth frame starting
+    from the first key frame will be taken as a golden frame. For eg.
+    for encoding sequence of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 where the golden
+    frame refresh period is set as 4, the frames 0, 4, 8 etc will be
+    taken as the golden frames as frame 0 is always a key frame.
+
+.. _v4l2-vpx-golden-frame-sel:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_GOLDEN_FRAME_SEL``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_vp8_golden_frame_sel -
+    Selects the golden frame for encoding. Possible values are:
+
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \scriptsize
+
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{9.0cm}|p{8.0cm}|
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_GOLDEN_FRAME_USE_PREV``
+      - Use the (n-2)th frame as a golden frame, current frame index being
+	'n'.
+    * - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_GOLDEN_FRAME_USE_REF_PERIOD``
+      - Use the previous specific frame indicated by
+	``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_GOLDEN_FRAME_REF_PERIOD`` as a
+	golden frame.
+
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \normalsize
+
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_MIN_QP (integer)``
+    Minimum quantization parameter for VP8.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_MAX_QP (integer)``
+    Maximum quantization parameter for VP8.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_I_FRAME_QP (integer)``
+    Quantization parameter for an I frame for VP8.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_P_FRAME_QP (integer)``
+    Quantization parameter for a P frame for VP8.
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-vp8-profile:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VP8_PROFILE``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_video_vp8_profile -
+    This control allows selecting the profile for VP8 encoder.
+    This is also used to enumerate supported profiles by VP8 encoder or decoder.
+    Possible values are:
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_VP8_PROFILE_0``
+      - Profile 0
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_VP8_PROFILE_1``
+      - Profile 1
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_VP8_PROFILE_2``
+      - Profile 2
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_VP8_PROFILE_3``
+      - Profile 3
+
+.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-vp9-profile:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VP9_PROFILE``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_video_vp9_profile -
+    This control allows selecting the profile for VP9 encoder.
+    This is also used to enumerate supported profiles by VP9 encoder or decoder.
+    Possible values are:
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_VP9_PROFILE_0``
+      - Profile 0
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_VP9_PROFILE_1``
+      - Profile 1
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_VP9_PROFILE_2``
+      - Profile 2
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_VP9_PROFILE_3``
+      - Profile 3
+
+
+High Efficiency Video Coding (HEVC/H.265) Control Reference
+===========================================================
+
+The HEVC/H.265 controls include controls for encoding parameters of HEVC/H.265
+video codec.
+
+
+.. _hevc-control-id:
+
+HEVC/H.265 Control IDs
+----------------------
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP (integer)``
+    Minimum quantization parameter for HEVC.
+    Valid range: from 0 to 51.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP (integer)``
+    Maximum quantization parameter for HEVC.
+    Valid range: from 0 to 51.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_I_FRAME_QP (integer)``
+    Quantization parameter for an I frame for HEVC.
+    Valid range: [V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP,
+    V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP].
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_P_FRAME_QP (integer)``
+    Quantization parameter for a P frame for HEVC.
+    Valid range: [V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP,
+    V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP].
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_B_FRAME_QP (integer)``
+    Quantization parameter for a B frame for HEVC.
+    Valid range: [V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP,
+    V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP].
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_QP (boolean)``
+    HIERARCHICAL_QP allows the host to specify the quantization parameter
+    values for each temporal layer through HIERARCHICAL_QP_LAYER. This is
+    valid only if HIERARCHICAL_CODING_LAYER is greater than 1. Setting the
+    control value to 1 enables setting of the QP values for the layers.
+
+.. _v4l2-hevc-hier-coding-type:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_TYPE``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_video_hevc_hier_coding_type -
+    Selects the hierarchical coding type for encoding. Possible values are:
+
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \footnotesize
+
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{9.0cm}|p{8.0cm}|
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIERARCHICAL_CODING_B``
+      - Use the B frame for hierarchical coding.
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIERARCHICAL_CODING_P``
+      - Use the P frame for hierarchical coding.
+
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \normalsize
+
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_LAYER (integer)``
+    Selects the hierarchical coding layer. In normal encoding
+    (non-hierarchial coding), it should be zero. Possible values are [0, 6].
+    0 indicates HIERARCHICAL CODING LAYER 0, 1 indicates HIERARCHICAL CODING
+    LAYER 1 and so on.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L0_QP (integer)``
+    Indicates quantization parameter for hierarchical coding layer 0.
+    Valid range: [V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP,
+    V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP].
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L1_QP (integer)``
+    Indicates quantization parameter for hierarchical coding layer 1.
+    Valid range: [V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP,
+    V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP].
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L2_QP (integer)``
+    Indicates quantization parameter for hierarchical coding layer 2.
+    Valid range: [V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP,
+    V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP].
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L3_QP (integer)``
+    Indicates quantization parameter for hierarchical coding layer 3.
+    Valid range: [V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP,
+    V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP].
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L4_QP (integer)``
+    Indicates quantization parameter for hierarchical coding layer 4.
+    Valid range: [V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP,
+    V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP].
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L5_QP (integer)``
+    Indicates quantization parameter for hierarchical coding layer 5.
+    Valid range: [V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP,
+    V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP].
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L6_QP (integer)``
+    Indicates quantization parameter for hierarchical coding layer 6.
+    Valid range: [V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP,
+    V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP].
+
+.. _v4l2-hevc-profile:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_PROFILE``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_video_hevc_profile -
+    Select the desired profile for HEVC encoder.
+
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \footnotesize
+
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{9.0cm}|p{8.0cm}|
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_PROFILE_MAIN``
+      - Main profile.
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_PROFILE_MAIN_STILL_PICTURE``
+      - Main still picture profile.
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_PROFILE_MAIN_10``
+      - Main 10 profile.
+
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \normalsize
+
+
+.. _v4l2-hevc-level:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_video_hevc_level -
+    Selects the desired level for HEVC encoder.
+
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \footnotesize
+
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{9.0cm}|p{8.0cm}|
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_1``
+      - Level 1.0
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_2``
+      - Level 2.0
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_2_1``
+      - Level 2.1
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_3``
+      - Level 3.0
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_3_1``
+      - Level 3.1
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_4``
+      - Level 4.0
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_4_1``
+      - Level 4.1
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_5``
+      - Level 5.0
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_5_1``
+      - Level 5.1
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_5_2``
+      - Level 5.2
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_6``
+      - Level 6.0
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_6_1``
+      - Level 6.1
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_6_2``
+      - Level 6.2
+
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \normalsize
+
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_FRAME_RATE_RESOLUTION (integer)``
+    Indicates the number of evenly spaced subintervals, called ticks, within
+    one second. This is a 16 bit unsigned integer and has a maximum value up to
+    0xffff and a minimum value of 1.
+
+.. _v4l2-hevc-tier:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_TIER``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_video_hevc_tier -
+    TIER_FLAG specifies tiers information of the HEVC encoded picture. Tier
+    were made to deal with applications that differ in terms of maximum bit
+    rate. Setting the flag to 0 selects HEVC tier as Main tier and setting
+    this flag to 1 indicates High tier. High tier is for applications requiring
+    high bit rates.
+
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \footnotesize
+
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{9.0cm}|p{8.0cm}|
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_TIER_MAIN``
+      - Main tier.
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_TIER_HIGH``
+      - High tier.
+
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \normalsize
+
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_PARTITION_DEPTH (integer)``
+    Selects HEVC maximum coding unit depth.
+
+.. _v4l2-hevc-loop-filter-mode:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LOOP_FILTER_MODE``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_video_hevc_loop_filter_mode -
+    Loop filter mode for HEVC encoder. Possible values are:
+
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \footnotesize
+
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{12.1cm}|p{5.4cm}|
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LOOP_FILTER_MODE_DISABLED``
+      - Loop filter is disabled.
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LOOP_FILTER_MODE_ENABLED``
+      - Loop filter is enabled.
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LOOP_FILTER_MODE_DISABLED_AT_SLICE_BOUNDARY``
+      - Loop filter is disabled at the slice boundary.
+
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \normalsize
+
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LF_BETA_OFFSET_DIV2 (integer)``
+    Selects HEVC loop filter beta offset. The valid range is [-6, +6].
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LF_TC_OFFSET_DIV2 (integer)``
+    Selects HEVC loop filter tc offset. The valid range is [-6, +6].
+
+.. _v4l2-hevc-refresh-type:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_REFRESH_TYPE``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_video_hevc_hier_refresh_type -
+    Selects refresh type for HEVC encoder.
+    Host has to specify the period into
+    V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_REFRESH_PERIOD.
+
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \footnotesize
+
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{8.0cm}|p{9.0cm}|
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_REFRESH_NONE``
+      - Use the B frame for hierarchical coding.
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_REFRESH_CRA``
+      - Use CRA (Clean Random Access Unit) picture encoding.
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_REFRESH_IDR``
+      - Use IDR (Instantaneous Decoding Refresh) picture encoding.
+
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \normalsize
+
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_REFRESH_PERIOD (integer)``
+    Selects the refresh period for HEVC encoder.
+    This specifies the number of I pictures between two CRA/IDR pictures.
+    This is valid only if REFRESH_TYPE is not 0.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LOSSLESS_CU (boolean)``
+    Indicates HEVC lossless encoding. Setting it to 0 disables lossless
+    encoding. Setting it to 1 enables lossless encoding.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_CONST_INTRA_PRED (boolean)``
+    Indicates constant intra prediction for HEVC encoder. Specifies the
+    constrained intra prediction in which intra largest coding unit (LCU)
+    prediction is performed by using residual data and decoded samples of
+    neighboring intra LCU only. Setting the value to 1 enables constant intra
+    prediction and setting the value to 0 disables constant intra prediction.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_WAVEFRONT (boolean)``
+    Indicates wavefront parallel processing for HEVC encoder. Setting it to 0
+    disables the feature and setting it to 1 enables the wavefront parallel
+    processing.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_GENERAL_PB (boolean)``
+    Setting the value to 1 enables combination of P and B frame for HEVC
+    encoder.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_TEMPORAL_ID (boolean)``
+    Indicates temporal identifier for HEVC encoder which is enabled by
+    setting the value to 1.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_STRONG_SMOOTHING (boolean)``
+    Indicates bi-linear interpolation is conditionally used in the intra
+    prediction filtering process in the CVS when set to 1. Indicates bi-linear
+    interpolation is not used in the CVS when set to 0.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_NUM_MERGE_MV_MINUS1 (integer)``
+    Indicates maximum number of merge candidate motion vectors.
+    Values are from 0 to 4.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_TMV_PREDICTION (boolean)``
+    Indicates temporal motion vector prediction for HEVC encoder. Setting it to
+    1 enables the prediction. Setting it to 0 disables the prediction.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_WITHOUT_STARTCODE (boolean)``
+    Specifies if HEVC generates a stream with a size of the length field
+    instead of start code pattern. The size of the length field is configurable
+    through the V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_SIZE_OF_LENGTH_FIELD control. Setting
+    the value to 0 disables encoding without startcode pattern. Setting the
+    value to 1 will enables encoding without startcode pattern.
+
+.. _v4l2-hevc-size-of-length-field:
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_SIZE_OF_LENGTH_FIELD``
+(enum)
+
+enum v4l2_mpeg_video_hevc_size_of_length_field -
+    Indicates the size of length field.
+    This is valid when encoding WITHOUT_STARTCODE_ENABLE is enabled.
+
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \footnotesize
+
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{6.0cm}|p{11.0cm}|
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_SIZE_0``
+      - Generate start code pattern (Normal).
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_SIZE_1``
+      - Generate size of length field instead of start code pattern and length is 1.
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_SIZE_2``
+      - Generate size of length field instead of start code pattern and length is 2.
+    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_SIZE_4``
+      - Generate size of length field instead of start code pattern and length is 4.
+
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \normalsize
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L0_BR (integer)``
+    Indicates bit rate for hierarchical coding layer 0 for HEVC encoder.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L1_BR (integer)``
+    Indicates bit rate for hierarchical coding layer 1 for HEVC encoder.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L2_BR (integer)``
+    Indicates bit rate for hierarchical coding layer 2 for HEVC encoder.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L3_BR (integer)``
+    Indicates bit rate for hierarchical coding layer 3 for HEVC encoder.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L4_BR (integer)``
+    Indicates bit rate for hierarchical coding layer 4 for HEVC encoder.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L5_BR (integer)``
+    Indicates bit rate for hierarchical coding layer 5 for HEVC encoder.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L6_BR (integer)``
+    Indicates bit rate for hierarchical coding layer 6 for HEVC encoder.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_REF_NUMBER_FOR_PFRAMES (integer)``
+    Selects number of P reference pictures required for HEVC encoder.
+    P-Frame can use 1 or 2 frames for reference.
+
+``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_PREPEND_SPSPPS_TO_IDR (integer)``
+    Indicates whether to generate SPS and PPS at every IDR. Setting it to 0
+    disables generating SPS and PPS at every IDR. Setting it to one enables
+    generating SPS and PPS at every IDR.
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-detect.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-detect.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..80981d0cff42
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-detect.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+.. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
+.. document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License,
+.. Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software
+.. Foundation, with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts
+.. and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included at
+.. Documentation/media/uapi/fdl-appendix.rst.
+..
+.. TODO: replace it to GFDL-1.1-or-later WITH no-invariant-sections
+
+.. _detect-controls:
+
+************************
+Detect Control Reference
+************************
+
+The Detect class includes controls for common features of various motion
+or object detection capable devices.
+
+
+.. _detect-control-id:
+
+Detect Control IDs
+==================
+
+``V4L2_CID_DETECT_CLASS (class)``
+    The Detect class descriptor. Calling
+    :ref:`VIDIOC_QUERYCTRL` for this control will
+    return a description of this control class.
+
+``V4L2_CID_DETECT_MD_MODE (menu)``
+    Sets the motion detection mode.
+
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{7.7cm}|p{9.8cm}|
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_DETECT_MD_MODE_DISABLED``
+      - Disable motion detection.
+    * - ``V4L2_DETECT_MD_MODE_GLOBAL``
+      - Use a single motion detection threshold.
+    * - ``V4L2_DETECT_MD_MODE_THRESHOLD_GRID``
+      - The image is divided into a grid, each cell with its own motion
+	detection threshold. These thresholds are set through the
+	``V4L2_CID_DETECT_MD_THRESHOLD_GRID`` matrix control.
+    * - ``V4L2_DETECT_MD_MODE_REGION_GRID``
+      - The image is divided into a grid, each cell with its own region
+	value that specifies which per-region motion detection thresholds
+	should be used. Each region has its own thresholds. How these
+	per-region thresholds are set up is driver-specific. The region
+	values for the grid are set through the
+	``V4L2_CID_DETECT_MD_REGION_GRID`` matrix control.
+
+
+
+``V4L2_CID_DETECT_MD_GLOBAL_THRESHOLD (integer)``
+    Sets the global motion detection threshold to be used with the
+    ``V4L2_DETECT_MD_MODE_GLOBAL`` motion detection mode.
+
+``V4L2_CID_DETECT_MD_THRESHOLD_GRID (__u16 matrix)``
+    Sets the motion detection thresholds for each cell in the grid. To
+    be used with the ``V4L2_DETECT_MD_MODE_THRESHOLD_GRID`` motion
+    detection mode. Matrix element (0, 0) represents the cell at the
+    top-left of the grid.
+
+``V4L2_CID_DETECT_MD_REGION_GRID (__u8 matrix)``
+    Sets the motion detection region value for each cell in the grid. To
+    be used with the ``V4L2_DETECT_MD_MODE_REGION_GRID`` motion
+    detection mode. Matrix element (0, 0) represents the cell at the
+    top-left of the grid.
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-dv.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-dv.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5c70ac98f710
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-dv.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,166 @@
+.. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
+.. document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License,
+.. Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software
+.. Foundation, with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts
+.. and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included at
+.. Documentation/media/uapi/fdl-appendix.rst.
+..
+.. TODO: replace it to GFDL-1.1-or-later WITH no-invariant-sections
+
+.. _dv-controls:
+
+*******************************
+Digital Video Control Reference
+*******************************
+
+The Digital Video control class is intended to control receivers and
+transmitters for `VGA <http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vga>`__,
+`DVI <http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Digital_Visual_Interface>`__
+(Digital Visual Interface), HDMI (:ref:`hdmi`) and DisplayPort
+(:ref:`dp`). These controls are generally expected to be private to
+the receiver or transmitter subdevice that implements them, so they are
+only exposed on the ``/dev/v4l-subdev*`` device node.
+
+.. note::
+
+   Note that these devices can have multiple input or output pads which are
+   hooked up to e.g. HDMI connectors. Even though the subdevice will
+   receive or transmit video from/to only one of those pads, the other pads
+   can still be active when it comes to EDID (Extended Display
+   Identification Data, :ref:`vesaedid`) and HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital
+   Content Protection System, :ref:`hdcp`) processing, allowing the
+   device to do the fairly slow EDID/HDCP handling in advance. This allows
+   for quick switching between connectors.
+
+These pads appear in several of the controls in this section as
+bitmasks, one bit for each pad. Bit 0 corresponds to pad 0, bit 1 to pad
+1, etc. The maximum value of the control is the set of valid pads.
+
+
+.. _dv-control-id:
+
+Digital Video Control IDs
+=========================
+
+``V4L2_CID_DV_CLASS (class)``
+    The Digital Video class descriptor.
+
+``V4L2_CID_DV_TX_HOTPLUG (bitmask)``
+    Many connectors have a hotplug pin which is high if EDID information
+    is available from the source. This control shows the state of the
+    hotplug pin as seen by the transmitter. Each bit corresponds to an
+    output pad on the transmitter. If an output pad does not have an
+    associated hotplug pin, then the bit for that pad will be 0. This
+    read-only control is applicable to DVI-D, HDMI and DisplayPort
+    connectors.
+
+``V4L2_CID_DV_TX_RXSENSE (bitmask)``
+    Rx Sense is the detection of pull-ups on the TMDS clock lines. This
+    normally means that the sink has left/entered standby (i.e. the
+    transmitter can sense that the receiver is ready to receive video).
+    Each bit corresponds to an output pad on the transmitter. If an
+    output pad does not have an associated Rx Sense, then the bit for
+    that pad will be 0. This read-only control is applicable to DVI-D
+    and HDMI devices.
+
+``V4L2_CID_DV_TX_EDID_PRESENT (bitmask)``
+    When the transmitter sees the hotplug signal from the receiver it
+    will attempt to read the EDID. If set, then the transmitter has read
+    at least the first block (= 128 bytes). Each bit corresponds to an
+    output pad on the transmitter. If an output pad does not support
+    EDIDs, then the bit for that pad will be 0. This read-only control
+    is applicable to VGA, DVI-A/D, HDMI and DisplayPort connectors.
+
+``V4L2_CID_DV_TX_MODE``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_dv_tx_mode -
+    HDMI transmitters can transmit in DVI-D mode (just video) or in HDMI
+    mode (video + audio + auxiliary data). This control selects which
+    mode to use: V4L2_DV_TX_MODE_DVI_D or V4L2_DV_TX_MODE_HDMI.
+    This control is applicable to HDMI connectors.
+
+``V4L2_CID_DV_TX_RGB_RANGE``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_dv_rgb_range -
+    Select the quantization range for RGB output. V4L2_DV_RANGE_AUTO
+    follows the RGB quantization range specified in the standard for the
+    video interface (ie. :ref:`cea861` for HDMI).
+    V4L2_DV_RANGE_LIMITED and V4L2_DV_RANGE_FULL override the
+    standard to be compatible with sinks that have not implemented the
+    standard correctly (unfortunately quite common for HDMI and DVI-D).
+    Full range allows all possible values to be used whereas limited
+    range sets the range to (16 << (N-8)) - (235 << (N-8)) where N is
+    the number of bits per component. This control is applicable to VGA,
+    DVI-A/D, HDMI and DisplayPort connectors.
+
+``V4L2_CID_DV_TX_IT_CONTENT_TYPE``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_dv_it_content_type -
+    Configures the IT Content Type of the transmitted video. This
+    information is sent over HDMI and DisplayPort connectors as part of
+    the AVI InfoFrame. The term 'IT Content' is used for content that
+    originates from a computer as opposed to content from a TV broadcast
+    or an analog source. The enum v4l2_dv_it_content_type defines
+    the possible content types:
+
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{7.3cm}|p{10.4cm}|
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_DV_IT_CONTENT_TYPE_GRAPHICS``
+      - Graphics content. Pixel data should be passed unfiltered and
+	without analog reconstruction.
+    * - ``V4L2_DV_IT_CONTENT_TYPE_PHOTO``
+      - Photo content. The content is derived from digital still pictures.
+	The content should be passed through with minimal scaling and
+	picture enhancements.
+    * - ``V4L2_DV_IT_CONTENT_TYPE_CINEMA``
+      - Cinema content.
+    * - ``V4L2_DV_IT_CONTENT_TYPE_GAME``
+      - Game content. Audio and video latency should be minimized.
+    * - ``V4L2_DV_IT_CONTENT_TYPE_NO_ITC``
+      - No IT Content information is available and the ITC bit in the AVI
+	InfoFrame is set to 0.
+
+
+
+``V4L2_CID_DV_RX_POWER_PRESENT (bitmask)``
+    Detects whether the receiver receives power from the source (e.g.
+    HDMI carries 5V on one of the pins). This is often used to power an
+    eeprom which contains EDID information, such that the source can
+    read the EDID even if the sink is in standby/power off. Each bit
+    corresponds to an input pad on the receiver. If an input pad
+    cannot detect whether power is present, then the bit for that pad
+    will be 0. This read-only control is applicable to DVI-D, HDMI and
+    DisplayPort connectors.
+
+``V4L2_CID_DV_RX_RGB_RANGE``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_dv_rgb_range -
+    Select the quantization range for RGB input. V4L2_DV_RANGE_AUTO
+    follows the RGB quantization range specified in the standard for the
+    video interface (ie. :ref:`cea861` for HDMI).
+    V4L2_DV_RANGE_LIMITED and V4L2_DV_RANGE_FULL override the
+    standard to be compatible with sources that have not implemented the
+    standard correctly (unfortunately quite common for HDMI and DVI-D).
+    Full range allows all possible values to be used whereas limited
+    range sets the range to (16 << (N-8)) - (235 << (N-8)) where N is
+    the number of bits per component. This control is applicable to VGA,
+    DVI-A/D, HDMI and DisplayPort connectors.
+
+``V4L2_CID_DV_RX_IT_CONTENT_TYPE``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_dv_it_content_type -
+    Reads the IT Content Type of the received video. This information is
+    sent over HDMI and DisplayPort connectors as part of the AVI
+    InfoFrame. The term 'IT Content' is used for content that originates
+    from a computer as opposed to content from a TV broadcast or an
+    analog source. See ``V4L2_CID_DV_TX_IT_CONTENT_TYPE`` for the
+    available content types.
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-flash.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-flash.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..eff056b17167
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-flash.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,192 @@
+.. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
+.. document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License,
+.. Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software
+.. Foundation, with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts
+.. and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included at
+.. Documentation/media/uapi/fdl-appendix.rst.
+..
+.. TODO: replace it to GFDL-1.1-or-later WITH no-invariant-sections
+
+.. _flash-controls:
+
+***********************
+Flash Control Reference
+***********************
+
+The V4L2 flash controls are intended to provide generic access to flash
+controller devices. Flash controller devices are typically used in
+digital cameras.
+
+The interface can support both LED and xenon flash devices. As of
+writing this, there is no xenon flash driver using this interface.
+
+
+.. _flash-controls-use-cases:
+
+Supported use cases
+===================
+
+
+Unsynchronised LED flash (software strobe)
+------------------------------------------
+
+Unsynchronised LED flash is controlled directly by the host as the
+sensor. The flash must be enabled by the host before the exposure of the
+image starts and disabled once it ends. The host is fully responsible
+for the timing of the flash.
+
+Example of such device: Nokia N900.
+
+
+Synchronised LED flash (hardware strobe)
+----------------------------------------
+
+The synchronised LED flash is pre-programmed by the host (power and
+timeout) but controlled by the sensor through a strobe signal from the
+sensor to the flash.
+
+The sensor controls the flash duration and timing. This information
+typically must be made available to the sensor.
+
+
+LED flash as torch
+------------------
+
+LED flash may be used as torch in conjunction with another use case
+involving camera or individually.
+
+
+.. _flash-control-id:
+
+Flash Control IDs
+-----------------
+
+``V4L2_CID_FLASH_CLASS (class)``
+    The FLASH class descriptor.
+
+``V4L2_CID_FLASH_LED_MODE (menu)``
+    Defines the mode of the flash LED, the high-power white LED attached
+    to the flash controller. Setting this control may not be possible in
+    presence of some faults. See V4L2_CID_FLASH_FAULT.
+
+
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_NONE``
+      - Off.
+    * - ``V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_FLASH``
+      - Flash mode.
+    * - ``V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_TORCH``
+      - Torch mode. See V4L2_CID_FLASH_TORCH_INTENSITY.
+
+
+
+``V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE_SOURCE (menu)``
+    Defines the source of the flash LED strobe.
+
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{7.5cm}|p{10.0cm}|
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_FLASH_STROBE_SOURCE_SOFTWARE``
+      - The flash strobe is triggered by using the
+	V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE control.
+    * - ``V4L2_FLASH_STROBE_SOURCE_EXTERNAL``
+      - The flash strobe is triggered by an external source. Typically
+	this is a sensor, which makes it possible to synchronises the
+	flash strobe start to exposure start.
+
+
+
+``V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE (button)``
+    Strobe flash. Valid when V4L2_CID_FLASH_LED_MODE is set to
+    V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_FLASH and V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE_SOURCE
+    is set to V4L2_FLASH_STROBE_SOURCE_SOFTWARE. Setting this
+    control may not be possible in presence of some faults. See
+    V4L2_CID_FLASH_FAULT.
+
+``V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE_STOP (button)``
+    Stop flash strobe immediately.
+
+``V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE_STATUS (boolean)``
+    Strobe status: whether the flash is strobing at the moment or not.
+    This is a read-only control.
+
+``V4L2_CID_FLASH_TIMEOUT (integer)``
+    Hardware timeout for flash. The flash strobe is stopped after this
+    period of time has passed from the start of the strobe.
+
+``V4L2_CID_FLASH_INTENSITY (integer)``
+    Intensity of the flash strobe when the flash LED is in flash mode
+    (V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_FLASH). The unit should be milliamps (mA)
+    if possible.
+
+``V4L2_CID_FLASH_TORCH_INTENSITY (integer)``
+    Intensity of the flash LED in torch mode
+    (V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_TORCH). The unit should be milliamps (mA)
+    if possible. Setting this control may not be possible in presence of
+    some faults. See V4L2_CID_FLASH_FAULT.
+
+``V4L2_CID_FLASH_INDICATOR_INTENSITY (integer)``
+    Intensity of the indicator LED. The indicator LED may be fully
+    independent of the flash LED. The unit should be microamps (uA) if
+    possible.
+
+``V4L2_CID_FLASH_FAULT (bitmask)``
+    Faults related to the flash. The faults tell about specific problems
+    in the flash chip itself or the LEDs attached to it. Faults may
+    prevent further use of some of the flash controls. In particular,
+    V4L2_CID_FLASH_LED_MODE is set to V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_NONE
+    if the fault affects the flash LED. Exactly which faults have such
+    an effect is chip dependent. Reading the faults resets the control
+    and returns the chip to a usable state if possible.
+
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{8.4cm}|p{9.1cm}|
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_OVER_VOLTAGE``
+      - Flash controller voltage to the flash LED has exceeded the limit
+	specific to the flash controller.
+    * - ``V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_TIMEOUT``
+      - The flash strobe was still on when the timeout set by the user ---
+	V4L2_CID_FLASH_TIMEOUT control --- has expired. Not all flash
+	controllers may set this in all such conditions.
+    * - ``V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_OVER_TEMPERATURE``
+      - The flash controller has overheated.
+    * - ``V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_SHORT_CIRCUIT``
+      - The short circuit protection of the flash controller has been
+	triggered.
+    * - ``V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_OVER_CURRENT``
+      - Current in the LED power supply has exceeded the limit specific to
+	the flash controller.
+    * - ``V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_INDICATOR``
+      - The flash controller has detected a short or open circuit
+	condition on the indicator LED.
+    * - ``V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_UNDER_VOLTAGE``
+      - Flash controller voltage to the flash LED has been below the
+	minimum limit specific to the flash controller.
+    * - ``V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_INPUT_VOLTAGE``
+      - The input voltage of the flash controller is below the limit under
+	which strobing the flash at full current will not be possible.The
+	condition persists until this flag is no longer set.
+    * - ``V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_LED_OVER_TEMPERATURE``
+      - The temperature of the LED has exceeded its allowed upper limit.
+
+
+
+``V4L2_CID_FLASH_CHARGE (boolean)``
+    Enable or disable charging of the xenon flash capacitor.
+
+``V4L2_CID_FLASH_READY (boolean)``
+    Is the flash ready to strobe? Xenon flashes require their capacitors
+    charged before strobing. LED flashes often require a cooldown period
+    after strobe during which another strobe will not be possible. This
+    is a read-only control.
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-fm-rx.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-fm-rx.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3ed6dd7f586d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-fm-rx.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+.. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
+.. document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License,
+.. Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software
+.. Foundation, with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts
+.. and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included at
+.. Documentation/media/uapi/fdl-appendix.rst.
+..
+.. TODO: replace it to GFDL-1.1-or-later WITH no-invariant-sections
+
+.. _fm-rx-controls:
+
+*****************************
+FM Receiver Control Reference
+*****************************
+
+The FM Receiver (FM_RX) class includes controls for common features of
+FM Reception capable devices.
+
+
+.. _fm-rx-control-id:
+
+FM_RX Control IDs
+=================
+
+``V4L2_CID_FM_RX_CLASS (class)``
+    The FM_RX class descriptor. Calling
+    :ref:`VIDIOC_QUERYCTRL` for this control will
+    return a description of this control class.
+
+``V4L2_CID_RDS_RECEPTION (boolean)``
+    Enables/disables RDS reception by the radio tuner
+
+``V4L2_CID_RDS_RX_PTY (integer)``
+    Gets RDS Programme Type field. This encodes up to 31 pre-defined
+    programme types.
+
+``V4L2_CID_RDS_RX_PS_NAME (string)``
+    Gets the Programme Service name (PS_NAME). It is intended for
+    static display on a receiver. It is the primary aid to listeners in
+    programme service identification and selection. In Annex E of
+    :ref:`iec62106`, the RDS specification, there is a full
+    description of the correct character encoding for Programme Service
+    name strings. Also from RDS specification, PS is usually a single
+    eight character text. However, it is also possible to find receivers
+    which can scroll strings sized as 8 x N characters. So, this control
+    must be configured with steps of 8 characters. The result is it must
+    always contain a string with size multiple of 8.
+
+``V4L2_CID_RDS_RX_RADIO_TEXT (string)``
+    Gets the Radio Text info. It is a textual description of what is
+    being broadcasted. RDS Radio Text can be applied when broadcaster
+    wishes to transmit longer PS names, programme-related information or
+    any other text. In these cases, RadioText can be used in addition to
+    ``V4L2_CID_RDS_RX_PS_NAME``. The encoding for Radio Text strings is
+    also fully described in Annex E of :ref:`iec62106`. The length of
+    Radio Text strings depends on which RDS Block is being used to
+    transmit it, either 32 (2A block) or 64 (2B block). However, it is
+    also possible to find receivers which can scroll strings sized as 32
+    x N or 64 x N characters. So, this control must be configured with
+    steps of 32 or 64 characters. The result is it must always contain a
+    string with size multiple of 32 or 64.
+
+``V4L2_CID_RDS_RX_TRAFFIC_ANNOUNCEMENT (boolean)``
+    If set, then a traffic announcement is in progress.
+
+``V4L2_CID_RDS_RX_TRAFFIC_PROGRAM (boolean)``
+    If set, then the tuned programme carries traffic announcements.
+
+``V4L2_CID_RDS_RX_MUSIC_SPEECH (boolean)``
+    If set, then this channel broadcasts music. If cleared, then it
+    broadcasts speech. If the transmitter doesn't make this distinction,
+    then it will be set.
+
+``V4L2_CID_TUNE_DEEMPHASIS``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_deemphasis -
+    Configures the de-emphasis value for reception. A de-emphasis filter
+    is applied to the broadcast to accentuate the high audio
+    frequencies. Depending on the region, a time constant of either 50
+    or 75 useconds is used. The enum v4l2_deemphasis defines possible
+    values for de-emphasis. Here they are:
+
+
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_DEEMPHASIS_DISABLED``
+      - No de-emphasis is applied.
+    * - ``V4L2_DEEMPHASIS_50_uS``
+      - A de-emphasis of 50 uS is used.
+    * - ``V4L2_DEEMPHASIS_75_uS``
+      - A de-emphasis of 75 uS is used.
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-fm-tx.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-fm-tx.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..db88346d99fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-fm-tx.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,188 @@
+.. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
+.. document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License,
+.. Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software
+.. Foundation, with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts
+.. and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included at
+.. Documentation/media/uapi/fdl-appendix.rst.
+..
+.. TODO: replace it to GFDL-1.1-or-later WITH no-invariant-sections
+
+.. _fm-tx-controls:
+
+********************************
+FM Transmitter Control Reference
+********************************
+
+The FM Transmitter (FM_TX) class includes controls for common features
+of FM transmissions capable devices. Currently this class includes
+parameters for audio compression, pilot tone generation, audio deviation
+limiter, RDS transmission and tuning power features.
+
+
+.. _fm-tx-control-id:
+
+FM_TX Control IDs
+=================
+
+``V4L2_CID_FM_TX_CLASS (class)``
+    The FM_TX class descriptor. Calling
+    :ref:`VIDIOC_QUERYCTRL` for this control will
+    return a description of this control class.
+
+``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_DEVIATION (integer)``
+    Configures RDS signal frequency deviation level in Hz. The range and
+    step are driver-specific.
+
+``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_PI (integer)``
+    Sets the RDS Programme Identification field for transmission.
+
+``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_PTY (integer)``
+    Sets the RDS Programme Type field for transmission. This encodes up
+    to 31 pre-defined programme types.
+
+``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_PS_NAME (string)``
+    Sets the Programme Service name (PS_NAME) for transmission. It is
+    intended for static display on a receiver. It is the primary aid to
+    listeners in programme service identification and selection. In
+    Annex E of :ref:`iec62106`, the RDS specification, there is a full
+    description of the correct character encoding for Programme Service
+    name strings. Also from RDS specification, PS is usually a single
+    eight character text. However, it is also possible to find receivers
+    which can scroll strings sized as 8 x N characters. So, this control
+    must be configured with steps of 8 characters. The result is it must
+    always contain a string with size multiple of 8.
+
+``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_RADIO_TEXT (string)``
+    Sets the Radio Text info for transmission. It is a textual
+    description of what is being broadcasted. RDS Radio Text can be
+    applied when broadcaster wishes to transmit longer PS names,
+    programme-related information or any other text. In these cases,
+    RadioText should be used in addition to ``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_PS_NAME``.
+    The encoding for Radio Text strings is also fully described in Annex
+    E of :ref:`iec62106`. The length of Radio Text strings depends on
+    which RDS Block is being used to transmit it, either 32 (2A block)
+    or 64 (2B block). However, it is also possible to find receivers
+    which can scroll strings sized as 32 x N or 64 x N characters. So,
+    this control must be configured with steps of 32 or 64 characters.
+    The result is it must always contain a string with size multiple of
+    32 or 64.
+
+``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_MONO_STEREO (boolean)``
+    Sets the Mono/Stereo bit of the Decoder Identification code. If set,
+    then the audio was recorded as stereo.
+
+``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_ARTIFICIAL_HEAD (boolean)``
+    Sets the
+    `Artificial Head <http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Artificial_head>`__
+    bit of the Decoder Identification code. If set, then the audio was
+    recorded using an artificial head.
+
+``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_COMPRESSED (boolean)``
+    Sets the Compressed bit of the Decoder Identification code. If set,
+    then the audio is compressed.
+
+``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_DYNAMIC_PTY (boolean)``
+    Sets the Dynamic PTY bit of the Decoder Identification code. If set,
+    then the PTY code is dynamically switched.
+
+``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_TRAFFIC_ANNOUNCEMENT (boolean)``
+    If set, then a traffic announcement is in progress.
+
+``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_TRAFFIC_PROGRAM (boolean)``
+    If set, then the tuned programme carries traffic announcements.
+
+``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_MUSIC_SPEECH (boolean)``
+    If set, then this channel broadcasts music. If cleared, then it
+    broadcasts speech. If the transmitter doesn't make this distinction,
+    then it should be set.
+
+``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_ALT_FREQS_ENABLE (boolean)``
+    If set, then transmit alternate frequencies.
+
+``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_ALT_FREQS (__u32 array)``
+    The alternate frequencies in kHz units. The RDS standard allows for
+    up to 25 frequencies to be defined. Drivers may support fewer
+    frequencies so check the array size.
+
+``V4L2_CID_AUDIO_LIMITER_ENABLED (boolean)``
+    Enables or disables the audio deviation limiter feature. The limiter
+    is useful when trying to maximize the audio volume, minimize
+    receiver-generated distortion and prevent overmodulation.
+
+``V4L2_CID_AUDIO_LIMITER_RELEASE_TIME (integer)``
+    Sets the audio deviation limiter feature release time. Unit is in
+    useconds. Step and range are driver-specific.
+
+``V4L2_CID_AUDIO_LIMITER_DEVIATION (integer)``
+    Configures audio frequency deviation level in Hz. The range and step
+    are driver-specific.
+
+``V4L2_CID_AUDIO_COMPRESSION_ENABLED (boolean)``
+    Enables or disables the audio compression feature. This feature
+    amplifies signals below the threshold by a fixed gain and compresses
+    audio signals above the threshold by the ratio of Threshold/(Gain +
+    Threshold).
+
+``V4L2_CID_AUDIO_COMPRESSION_GAIN (integer)``
+    Sets the gain for audio compression feature. It is a dB value. The
+    range and step are driver-specific.
+
+``V4L2_CID_AUDIO_COMPRESSION_THRESHOLD (integer)``
+    Sets the threshold level for audio compression freature. It is a dB
+    value. The range and step are driver-specific.
+
+``V4L2_CID_AUDIO_COMPRESSION_ATTACK_TIME (integer)``
+    Sets the attack time for audio compression feature. It is a useconds
+    value. The range and step are driver-specific.
+
+``V4L2_CID_AUDIO_COMPRESSION_RELEASE_TIME (integer)``
+    Sets the release time for audio compression feature. It is a
+    useconds value. The range and step are driver-specific.
+
+``V4L2_CID_PILOT_TONE_ENABLED (boolean)``
+    Enables or disables the pilot tone generation feature.
+
+``V4L2_CID_PILOT_TONE_DEVIATION (integer)``
+    Configures pilot tone frequency deviation level. Unit is in Hz. The
+    range and step are driver-specific.
+
+``V4L2_CID_PILOT_TONE_FREQUENCY (integer)``
+    Configures pilot tone frequency value. Unit is in Hz. The range and
+    step are driver-specific.
+
+``V4L2_CID_TUNE_PREEMPHASIS``
+    (enum)
+
+enum v4l2_preemphasis -
+    Configures the pre-emphasis value for broadcasting. A pre-emphasis
+    filter is applied to the broadcast to accentuate the high audio
+    frequencies. Depending on the region, a time constant of either 50
+    or 75 useconds is used. The enum v4l2_preemphasis defines possible
+    values for pre-emphasis. Here they are:
+
+
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_PREEMPHASIS_DISABLED``
+      - No pre-emphasis is applied.
+    * - ``V4L2_PREEMPHASIS_50_uS``
+      - A pre-emphasis of 50 uS is used.
+    * - ``V4L2_PREEMPHASIS_75_uS``
+      - A pre-emphasis of 75 uS is used.
+
+
+
+``V4L2_CID_TUNE_POWER_LEVEL (integer)``
+    Sets the output power level for signal transmission. Unit is in
+    dBuV. Range and step are driver-specific.
+
+``V4L2_CID_TUNE_ANTENNA_CAPACITOR (integer)``
+    This selects the value of antenna tuning capacitor manually or
+    automatically if set to zero. Unit, range and step are
+    driver-specific.
+
+For more details about RDS specification, refer to :ref:`iec62106`
+document, from CENELEC.
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-image-process.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-image-process.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..22fc2d3e433d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-image-process.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+.. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
+.. document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License,
+.. Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software
+.. Foundation, with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts
+.. and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included at
+.. Documentation/media/uapi/fdl-appendix.rst.
+..
+.. TODO: replace it to GFDL-1.1-or-later WITH no-invariant-sections
+
+.. _image-process-controls:
+
+*******************************
+Image Process Control Reference
+*******************************
+
+The Image Process control class is intended for low-level control of
+image processing functions. Unlike ``V4L2_CID_IMAGE_SOURCE_CLASS``, the
+controls in this class affect processing the image, and do not control
+capturing of it.
+
+
+.. _image-process-control-id:
+
+Image Process Control IDs
+=========================
+
+``V4L2_CID_IMAGE_PROC_CLASS (class)``
+    The IMAGE_PROC class descriptor.
+
+``V4L2_CID_LINK_FREQ (integer menu)``
+    Data bus frequency. Together with the media bus pixel code, bus type
+    (clock cycles per sample), the data bus frequency defines the pixel
+    rate (``V4L2_CID_PIXEL_RATE``) in the pixel array (or possibly
+    elsewhere, if the device is not an image sensor). The frame rate can
+    be calculated from the pixel clock, image width and height and
+    horizontal and vertical blanking. While the pixel rate control may
+    be defined elsewhere than in the subdev containing the pixel array,
+    the frame rate cannot be obtained from that information. This is
+    because only on the pixel array it can be assumed that the vertical
+    and horizontal blanking information is exact: no other blanking is
+    allowed in the pixel array. The selection of frame rate is performed
+    by selecting the desired horizontal and vertical blanking. The unit
+    of this control is Hz.
+
+``V4L2_CID_PIXEL_RATE (64-bit integer)``
+    Pixel rate in the source pads of the subdev. This control is
+    read-only and its unit is pixels / second.
+
+``V4L2_CID_TEST_PATTERN (menu)``
+    Some capture/display/sensor devices have the capability to generate
+    test pattern images. These hardware specific test patterns can be
+    used to test if a device is working properly.
+
+``V4L2_CID_DEINTERLACING_MODE (menu)``
+    The video deinterlacing mode (such as Bob, Weave, ...). The menu items are
+    driver specific and are documented in :ref:`v4l-drivers`.
+
+``V4L2_CID_DIGITAL_GAIN (integer)``
+    Digital gain is the value by which all colour components
+    are multiplied by. Typically the digital gain applied is the
+    control value divided by e.g. 0x100, meaning that to get no
+    digital gain the control value needs to be 0x100. The no-gain
+    configuration is also typically the default.
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-image-source.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-image-source.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2c3ab5796d76
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-image-source.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+.. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
+.. document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License,
+.. Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software
+.. Foundation, with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts
+.. and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included at
+.. Documentation/media/uapi/fdl-appendix.rst.
+..
+.. TODO: replace it to GFDL-1.1-or-later WITH no-invariant-sections
+
+.. _image-source-controls:
+
+******************************
+Image Source Control Reference
+******************************
+
+The Image Source control class is intended for low-level control of
+image source devices such as image sensors. The devices feature an
+analogue to digital converter and a bus transmitter to transmit the
+image data out of the device.
+
+
+.. _image-source-control-id:
+
+Image Source Control IDs
+========================
+
+``V4L2_CID_IMAGE_SOURCE_CLASS (class)``
+    The IMAGE_SOURCE class descriptor.
+
+``V4L2_CID_VBLANK (integer)``
+    Vertical blanking. The idle period after every frame during which no
+    image data is produced. The unit of vertical blanking is a line.
+    Every line has length of the image width plus horizontal blanking at
+    the pixel rate defined by ``V4L2_CID_PIXEL_RATE`` control in the
+    same sub-device.
+
+``V4L2_CID_HBLANK (integer)``
+    Horizontal blanking. The idle period after every line of image data
+    during which no image data is produced. The unit of horizontal
+    blanking is pixels.
+
+``V4L2_CID_ANALOGUE_GAIN (integer)``
+    Analogue gain is gain affecting all colour components in the pixel
+    matrix. The gain operation is performed in the analogue domain
+    before A/D conversion.
+
+``V4L2_CID_TEST_PATTERN_RED (integer)``
+    Test pattern red colour component.
+
+``V4L2_CID_TEST_PATTERN_GREENR (integer)``
+    Test pattern green (next to red) colour component.
+
+``V4L2_CID_TEST_PATTERN_BLUE (integer)``
+    Test pattern blue colour component.
+
+``V4L2_CID_TEST_PATTERN_GREENB (integer)``
+    Test pattern green (next to blue) colour component.
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-jpeg.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-jpeg.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..60ce3f949319
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-jpeg.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,113 @@
+.. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
+.. document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License,
+.. Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software
+.. Foundation, with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts
+.. and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included at
+.. Documentation/media/uapi/fdl-appendix.rst.
+..
+.. TODO: replace it to GFDL-1.1-or-later WITH no-invariant-sections
+
+.. _jpeg-controls:
+
+**********************
+JPEG Control Reference
+**********************
+
+The JPEG class includes controls for common features of JPEG encoders
+and decoders. Currently it includes features for codecs implementing
+progressive baseline DCT compression process with Huffman entrophy
+coding.
+
+
+.. _jpeg-control-id:
+
+JPEG Control IDs
+================
+
+``V4L2_CID_JPEG_CLASS (class)``
+    The JPEG class descriptor. Calling
+    :ref:`VIDIOC_QUERYCTRL` for this control will
+    return a description of this control class.
+
+``V4L2_CID_JPEG_CHROMA_SUBSAMPLING (menu)``
+    The chroma subsampling factors describe how each component of an
+    input image is sampled, in respect to maximum sample rate in each
+    spatial dimension. See :ref:`itu-t81`, clause A.1.1. for more
+    details. The ``V4L2_CID_JPEG_CHROMA_SUBSAMPLING`` control determines
+    how Cb and Cr components are downsampled after converting an input
+    image from RGB to Y'CbCr color space.
+
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{7.5cm}|p{10.0cm}|
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_JPEG_CHROMA_SUBSAMPLING_444``
+      - No chroma subsampling, each pixel has Y, Cr and Cb values.
+    * - ``V4L2_JPEG_CHROMA_SUBSAMPLING_422``
+      - Horizontally subsample Cr, Cb components by a factor of 2.
+    * - ``V4L2_JPEG_CHROMA_SUBSAMPLING_420``
+      - Subsample Cr, Cb components horizontally and vertically by 2.
+    * - ``V4L2_JPEG_CHROMA_SUBSAMPLING_411``
+      - Horizontally subsample Cr, Cb components by a factor of 4.
+    * - ``V4L2_JPEG_CHROMA_SUBSAMPLING_410``
+      - Subsample Cr, Cb components horizontally by 4 and vertically by 2.
+    * - ``V4L2_JPEG_CHROMA_SUBSAMPLING_GRAY``
+      - Use only luminance component.
+
+
+
+``V4L2_CID_JPEG_RESTART_INTERVAL (integer)``
+    The restart interval determines an interval of inserting RSTm
+    markers (m = 0..7). The purpose of these markers is to additionally
+    reinitialize the encoder process, in order to process blocks of an
+    image independently. For the lossy compression processes the restart
+    interval unit is MCU (Minimum Coded Unit) and its value is contained
+    in DRI (Define Restart Interval) marker. If
+    ``V4L2_CID_JPEG_RESTART_INTERVAL`` control is set to 0, DRI and RSTm
+    markers will not be inserted.
+
+.. _jpeg-quality-control:
+
+``V4L2_CID_JPEG_COMPRESSION_QUALITY (integer)``
+    ``V4L2_CID_JPEG_COMPRESSION_QUALITY`` control determines trade-off
+    between image quality and size. It provides simpler method for
+    applications to control image quality, without a need for direct
+    reconfiguration of luminance and chrominance quantization tables. In
+    cases where a driver uses quantization tables configured directly by
+    an application, using interfaces defined elsewhere,
+    ``V4L2_CID_JPEG_COMPRESSION_QUALITY`` control should be set by
+    driver to 0.
+
+    The value range of this control is driver-specific. Only positive,
+    non-zero values are meaningful. The recommended range is 1 - 100,
+    where larger values correspond to better image quality.
+
+.. _jpeg-active-marker-control:
+
+``V4L2_CID_JPEG_ACTIVE_MARKER (bitmask)``
+    Specify which JPEG markers are included in compressed stream. This
+    control is valid only for encoders.
+
+
+
+.. flat-table::
+    :header-rows:  0
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - ``V4L2_JPEG_ACTIVE_MARKER_APP0``
+      - Application data segment APP\ :sub:`0`.
+    * - ``V4L2_JPEG_ACTIVE_MARKER_APP1``
+      - Application data segment APP\ :sub:`1`.
+    * - ``V4L2_JPEG_ACTIVE_MARKER_COM``
+      - Comment segment.
+    * - ``V4L2_JPEG_ACTIVE_MARKER_DQT``
+      - Quantization tables segment.
+    * - ``V4L2_JPEG_ACTIVE_MARKER_DHT``
+      - Huffman tables segment.
+
+
+
+For more details about JPEG specification, refer to :ref:`itu-t81`,
+:ref:`jfif`, :ref:`w3c-jpeg-jfif`.
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-rf-tuner.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-rf-tuner.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0fb85ba878dd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/ext-ctrls-rf-tuner.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+.. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
+.. document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License,
+.. Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software
+.. Foundation, with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts
+.. and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included at
+.. Documentation/media/uapi/fdl-appendix.rst.
+..
+.. TODO: replace it to GFDL-1.1-or-later WITH no-invariant-sections
+
+.. _rf-tuner-controls:
+
+**************************
+RF Tuner Control Reference
+**************************
+
+The RF Tuner (RF_TUNER) class includes controls for common features of
+devices having RF tuner.
+
+In this context, RF tuner is radio receiver circuit between antenna and
+demodulator. It receives radio frequency (RF) from the antenna and
+converts that received signal to lower intermediate frequency (IF) or
+baseband frequency (BB). Tuners that could do baseband output are often
+called Zero-IF tuners. Older tuners were typically simple PLL tuners
+inside a metal box, while newer ones are highly integrated chips
+without a metal box "silicon tuners". These controls are mostly
+applicable for new feature rich silicon tuners, just because older
+tuners does not have much adjustable features.
+
+For more information about RF tuners see
+`Tuner (radio) <http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tuner_%28radio%29>`__
+and `RF front end <http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/RF_front_end>`__
+from Wikipedia.
+
+
+.. _rf-tuner-control-id:
+
+RF_TUNER Control IDs
+====================
+
+``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_CLASS (class)``
+    The RF_TUNER class descriptor. Calling
+    :ref:`VIDIOC_QUERYCTRL` for this control will
+    return a description of this control class.
+
+``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_BANDWIDTH_AUTO (boolean)``
+    Enables/disables tuner radio channel bandwidth configuration. In
+    automatic mode bandwidth configuration is performed by the driver.
+
+``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_BANDWIDTH (integer)``
+    Filter(s) on tuner signal path are used to filter signal according
+    to receiving party needs. Driver configures filters to fulfill
+    desired bandwidth requirement. Used when
+    V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_BANDWIDTH_AUTO is not set. Unit is in Hz. The
+    range and step are driver-specific.
+
+``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_LNA_GAIN_AUTO (boolean)``
+    Enables/disables LNA automatic gain control (AGC)
+
+``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_MIXER_GAIN_AUTO (boolean)``
+    Enables/disables mixer automatic gain control (AGC)
+
+``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_IF_GAIN_AUTO (boolean)``
+    Enables/disables IF automatic gain control (AGC)
+
+``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_RF_GAIN (integer)``
+    The RF amplifier is the very first amplifier on the receiver signal
+    path, just right after the antenna input. The difference between the
+    LNA gain and the RF gain in this document is that the LNA gain is
+    integrated in the tuner chip while the RF gain is a separate chip.
+    There may be both RF and LNA gain controls in the same device. The
+    range and step are driver-specific.
+
+``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_LNA_GAIN (integer)``
+    LNA (low noise amplifier) gain is first gain stage on the RF tuner
+    signal path. It is located very close to tuner antenna input. Used
+    when ``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_LNA_GAIN_AUTO`` is not set. See
+    ``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_RF_GAIN`` to understand how RF gain and LNA gain
+    differs from the each others. The range and step are
+    driver-specific.
+
+``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_MIXER_GAIN (integer)``
+    Mixer gain is second gain stage on the RF tuner signal path. It is
+    located inside mixer block, where RF signal is down-converted by the
+    mixer. Used when ``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_MIXER_GAIN_AUTO`` is not set.
+    The range and step are driver-specific.
+
+``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_IF_GAIN (integer)``
+    IF gain is last gain stage on the RF tuner signal path. It is
+    located on output of RF tuner. It controls signal level of
+    intermediate frequency output or baseband output. Used when
+    ``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_IF_GAIN_AUTO`` is not set. The range and step
+    are driver-specific.
+
+``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_PLL_LOCK (boolean)``
+    Is synthesizer PLL locked? RF tuner is receiving given frequency
+    when that control is set. This is a read-only control.
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/extended-controls.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/extended-controls.rst
index 286a2dd7ec36..24274b398e63 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/extended-controls.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/extended-controls.rst
@@ -9,9 +9,9 @@
 
 .. _extended-controls:
 
-*****************
-Extended Controls
-*****************
+*********************
+Extended Controls API
+*********************
 
 
 Introduction
@@ -181,3902 +181,3 @@ The flags field of struct :ref:`v4l2_queryctrl <v4l2-queryctrl>` also
 contains hints on the behavior of the control. See the
 :ref:`VIDIOC_QUERYCTRL` documentation for more
 details.
-
-
-.. _mpeg-controls:
-
-Codec Control Reference
-=======================
-
-Below all controls within the Codec control class are described. First
-the generic controls, then controls specific for certain hardware.
-
-.. note::
-
-   These controls are applicable to all codecs and not just MPEG. The
-   defines are prefixed with V4L2_CID_MPEG/V4L2_MPEG as the controls
-   were originally made for MPEG codecs and later extended to cover all
-   encoding formats.
-
-
-Generic Codec Controls
-----------------------
-
-
-.. _mpeg-control-id:
-
-Codec Control IDs
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CLASS (class)``
-    The Codec class descriptor. Calling
-    :ref:`VIDIOC_QUERYCTRL` for this control will
-    return a description of this control class. This description can be
-    used as the caption of a Tab page in a GUI, for example.
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-stream-type:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_STREAM_TYPE``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_stream_type -
-    The MPEG-1, -2 or -4 output stream type. One cannot assume anything
-    here. Each hardware MPEG encoder tends to support different subsets
-    of the available MPEG stream types. This control is specific to
-    multiplexed MPEG streams. The currently defined stream types are:
-
-
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_STREAM_TYPE_MPEG2_PS``
-      - MPEG-2 program stream
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_STREAM_TYPE_MPEG2_TS``
-      - MPEG-2 transport stream
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_STREAM_TYPE_MPEG1_SS``
-      - MPEG-1 system stream
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_STREAM_TYPE_MPEG2_DVD``
-      - MPEG-2 DVD-compatible stream
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_STREAM_TYPE_MPEG1_VCD``
-      - MPEG-1 VCD-compatible stream
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_STREAM_TYPE_MPEG2_SVCD``
-      - MPEG-2 SVCD-compatible stream
-
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_STREAM_PID_PMT (integer)``
-    Program Map Table Packet ID for the MPEG transport stream (default
-    16)
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_STREAM_PID_AUDIO (integer)``
-    Audio Packet ID for the MPEG transport stream (default 256)
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_STREAM_PID_VIDEO (integer)``
-    Video Packet ID for the MPEG transport stream (default 260)
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_STREAM_PID_PCR (integer)``
-    Packet ID for the MPEG transport stream carrying PCR fields (default
-    259)
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_STREAM_PES_ID_AUDIO (integer)``
-    Audio ID for MPEG PES
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_STREAM_PES_ID_VIDEO (integer)``
-    Video ID for MPEG PES
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-stream-vbi-fmt:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_STREAM_VBI_FMT``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_stream_vbi_fmt -
-    Some cards can embed VBI data (e. g. Closed Caption, Teletext) into
-    the MPEG stream. This control selects whether VBI data should be
-    embedded, and if so, what embedding method should be used. The list
-    of possible VBI formats depends on the driver. The currently defined
-    VBI format types are:
-
-
-
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{6 cm}|p{11.5cm}|
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_STREAM_VBI_FMT_NONE``
-      - No VBI in the MPEG stream
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_STREAM_VBI_FMT_IVTV``
-      - VBI in private packets, IVTV format (documented in the kernel
-	sources in the file
-	``Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/cx2341x.rst``)
-
-
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-sampling-freq:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_SAMPLING_FREQ``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_sampling_freq -
-    MPEG Audio sampling frequency. Possible values are:
-
-
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_SAMPLING_FREQ_44100``
-      - 44.1 kHz
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_SAMPLING_FREQ_48000``
-      - 48 kHz
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_SAMPLING_FREQ_32000``
-      - 32 kHz
-
-
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-encoding:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_ENCODING``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_encoding -
-    MPEG Audio encoding. This control is specific to multiplexed MPEG
-    streams. Possible values are:
-
-
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_ENCODING_LAYER_1``
-      - MPEG-1/2 Layer I encoding
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_ENCODING_LAYER_2``
-      - MPEG-1/2 Layer II encoding
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_ENCODING_LAYER_3``
-      - MPEG-1/2 Layer III encoding
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_ENCODING_AAC``
-      - MPEG-2/4 AAC (Advanced Audio Coding)
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_ENCODING_AC3``
-      - AC-3 aka ATSC A/52 encoding
-
-
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-l1-bitrate:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_l1_bitrate -
-    MPEG-1/2 Layer I bitrate. Possible values are:
-
-
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_32K``
-      - 32 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_64K``
-      - 64 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_96K``
-      - 96 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_128K``
-      - 128 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_160K``
-      - 160 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_192K``
-      - 192 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_224K``
-      - 224 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_256K``
-      - 256 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_288K``
-      - 288 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_320K``
-      - 320 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_352K``
-      - 352 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_384K``
-      - 384 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_416K``
-      - 416 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L1_BITRATE_448K``
-      - 448 kbit/s
-
-
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-l2-bitrate:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_l2_bitrate -
-    MPEG-1/2 Layer II bitrate. Possible values are:
-
-
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_32K``
-      - 32 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_48K``
-      - 48 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_56K``
-      - 56 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_64K``
-      - 64 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_80K``
-      - 80 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_96K``
-      - 96 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_112K``
-      - 112 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_128K``
-      - 128 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_160K``
-      - 160 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_192K``
-      - 192 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_224K``
-      - 224 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_256K``
-      - 256 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_320K``
-      - 320 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L2_BITRATE_384K``
-      - 384 kbit/s
-
-
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-l3-bitrate:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_l3_bitrate -
-    MPEG-1/2 Layer III bitrate. Possible values are:
-
-
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_32K``
-      - 32 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_40K``
-      - 40 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_48K``
-      - 48 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_56K``
-      - 56 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_64K``
-      - 64 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_80K``
-      - 80 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_96K``
-      - 96 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_112K``
-      - 112 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_128K``
-      - 128 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_160K``
-      - 160 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_192K``
-      - 192 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_224K``
-      - 224 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_256K``
-      - 256 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_L3_BITRATE_320K``
-      - 320 kbit/s
-
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_AAC_BITRATE (integer)``
-    AAC bitrate in bits per second.
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-ac3-bitrate:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_ac3_bitrate -
-    AC-3 bitrate. Possible values are:
-
-
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_32K``
-      - 32 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_40K``
-      - 40 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_48K``
-      - 48 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_56K``
-      - 56 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_64K``
-      - 64 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_80K``
-      - 80 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_96K``
-      - 96 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_112K``
-      - 112 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_128K``
-      - 128 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_160K``
-      - 160 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_192K``
-      - 192 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_224K``
-      - 224 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_256K``
-      - 256 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_320K``
-      - 320 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_384K``
-      - 384 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_448K``
-      - 448 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_512K``
-      - 512 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_576K``
-      - 576 kbit/s
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_AC3_BITRATE_640K``
-      - 640 kbit/s
-
-
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-mode:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_MODE``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_mode -
-    MPEG Audio mode. Possible values are:
-
-
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_MODE_STEREO``
-      - Stereo
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_MODE_JOINT_STEREO``
-      - Joint Stereo
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_MODE_DUAL``
-      - Bilingual
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_MODE_MONO``
-      - Mono
-
-
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-mode-extension:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_MODE_EXTENSION``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_mode_extension -
-    Joint Stereo audio mode extension. In Layer I and II they indicate
-    which subbands are in intensity stereo. All other subbands are coded
-    in stereo. Layer III is not (yet) supported. Possible values are:
-
-
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_MODE_EXTENSION_BOUND_4``
-      - Subbands 4-31 in intensity stereo
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_MODE_EXTENSION_BOUND_8``
-      - Subbands 8-31 in intensity stereo
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_MODE_EXTENSION_BOUND_12``
-      - Subbands 12-31 in intensity stereo
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_MODE_EXTENSION_BOUND_16``
-      - Subbands 16-31 in intensity stereo
-
-
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-emphasis:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_EMPHASIS``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_emphasis -
-    Audio Emphasis. Possible values are:
-
-
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_EMPHASIS_NONE``
-      - None
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_EMPHASIS_50_DIV_15_uS``
-      - 50/15 microsecond emphasis
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_EMPHASIS_CCITT_J17``
-      - CCITT J.17
-
-
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-crc:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_CRC``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_crc -
-    CRC method. Possible values are:
-
-
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_CRC_NONE``
-      - None
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_CRC_CRC16``
-      - 16 bit parity check
-
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_MUTE (boolean)``
-    Mutes the audio when capturing. This is not done by muting audio
-    hardware, which can still produce a slight hiss, but in the encoder
-    itself, guaranteeing a fixed and reproducible audio bitstream. 0 =
-    unmuted, 1 = muted.
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-dec-playback:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_PLAYBACK``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_dec_playback -
-    Determines how monolingual audio should be played back. Possible
-    values are:
-
-
-
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{9.0cm}|p{8.5cm}|
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_PLAYBACK_AUTO``
-      - Automatically determines the best playback mode.
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_PLAYBACK_STEREO``
-      - Stereo playback.
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_PLAYBACK_LEFT``
-      - Left channel playback.
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_PLAYBACK_RIGHT``
-      - Right channel playback.
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_PLAYBACK_MONO``
-      - Mono playback.
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_PLAYBACK_SWAPPED_STEREO``
-      - Stereo playback with swapped left and right channels.
-
-
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-audio-dec-multilingual-playback:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_MULTILINGUAL_PLAYBACK``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_audio_dec_playback -
-    Determines how multilingual audio should be played back.
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-encoding:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_ENCODING``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_video_encoding -
-    MPEG Video encoding method. This control is specific to multiplexed
-    MPEG streams. Possible values are:
-
-
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_ENCODING_MPEG_1``
-      - MPEG-1 Video encoding
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_ENCODING_MPEG_2``
-      - MPEG-2 Video encoding
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_ENCODING_MPEG_4_AVC``
-      - MPEG-4 AVC (H.264) Video encoding
-
-
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-aspect:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_ASPECT``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_video_aspect -
-    Video aspect. Possible values are:
-
-
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_ASPECT_1x1``
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_ASPECT_4x3``
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_ASPECT_16x9``
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_ASPECT_221x100``
-
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_B_FRAMES (integer)``
-    Number of B-Frames (default 2)
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_GOP_SIZE (integer)``
-    GOP size (default 12)
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_GOP_CLOSURE (boolean)``
-    GOP closure (default 1)
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_PULLDOWN (boolean)``
-    Enable 3:2 pulldown (default 0)
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-bitrate-mode:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_BITRATE_MODE``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_video_bitrate_mode -
-    Video bitrate mode. Possible values are:
-
-
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_BITRATE_MODE_VBR``
-      - Variable bitrate
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_BITRATE_MODE_CBR``
-      - Constant bitrate
-
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_BITRATE (integer)``
-    Video bitrate in bits per second.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_BITRATE_PEAK (integer)``
-    Peak video bitrate in bits per second. Must be larger or equal to
-    the average video bitrate. It is ignored if the video bitrate mode
-    is set to constant bitrate.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_TEMPORAL_DECIMATION (integer)``
-    For every captured frame, skip this many subsequent frames (default
-    0).
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MUTE (boolean)``
-    "Mutes" the video to a fixed color when capturing. This is useful
-    for testing, to produce a fixed video bitstream. 0 = unmuted, 1 =
-    muted.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MUTE_YUV (integer)``
-    Sets the "mute" color of the video. The supplied 32-bit integer is
-    interpreted as follows (bit 0 = least significant bit):
-
-
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - Bit 0:7
-      - V chrominance information
-    * - Bit 8:15
-      - U chrominance information
-    * - Bit 16:23
-      - Y luminance information
-    * - Bit 24:31
-      - Must be zero.
-
-
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-dec-pts:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_DEC_PTS (integer64)``
-    This read-only control returns the 33-bit video Presentation Time
-    Stamp as defined in ITU T-REC-H.222.0 and ISO/IEC 13818-1 of the
-    currently displayed frame. This is the same PTS as is used in
-    :ref:`VIDIOC_DECODER_CMD`.
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-dec-frame:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_DEC_FRAME (integer64)``
-    This read-only control returns the frame counter of the frame that
-    is currently displayed (decoded). This value is reset to 0 whenever
-    the decoder is started.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_DECODER_SLICE_INTERFACE (boolean)``
-    If enabled the decoder expects to receive a single slice per buffer,
-    otherwise the decoder expects a single frame in per buffer.
-    Applicable to the decoder, all codecs.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_ENABLE (boolean)``
-    Enable writing sample aspect ratio in the Video Usability
-    Information. Applicable to the H264 encoder.
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-vui-sar-idc:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_vui_sar_idc -
-    VUI sample aspect ratio indicator for H.264 encoding. The value is
-    defined in the table E-1 in the standard. Applicable to the H264
-    encoder.
-
-
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_UNSPECIFIED``
-      - Unspecified
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_1x1``
-      - 1x1
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_12x11``
-      - 12x11
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_10x11``
-      - 10x11
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_16x11``
-      - 16x11
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_40x33``
-      - 40x33
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_24x11``
-      - 24x11
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_20x11``
-      - 20x11
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_32x11``
-      - 32x11
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_80x33``
-      - 80x33
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_18x11``
-      - 18x11
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_15x11``
-      - 15x11
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_64x33``
-      - 64x33
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_160x99``
-      - 160x99
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_4x3``
-      - 4x3
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_3x2``
-      - 3x2
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_2x1``
-      - 2x1
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC_EXTENDED``
-      - Extended SAR
-
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_EXT_SAR_WIDTH (integer)``
-    Extended sample aspect ratio width for H.264 VUI encoding.
-    Applicable to the H264 encoder.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_EXT_SAR_HEIGHT (integer)``
-    Extended sample aspect ratio height for H.264 VUI encoding.
-    Applicable to the H264 encoder.
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-level:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_level -
-    The level information for the H264 video elementary stream.
-    Applicable to the H264 encoder. Possible values are:
-
-
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_1_0``
-      - Level 1.0
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_1B``
-      - Level 1B
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_1_1``
-      - Level 1.1
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_1_2``
-      - Level 1.2
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_1_3``
-      - Level 1.3
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_2_0``
-      - Level 2.0
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_2_1``
-      - Level 2.1
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_2_2``
-      - Level 2.2
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_3_0``
-      - Level 3.0
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_3_1``
-      - Level 3.1
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_3_2``
-      - Level 3.2
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_4_0``
-      - Level 4.0
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_4_1``
-      - Level 4.1
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_4_2``
-      - Level 4.2
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_5_0``
-      - Level 5.0
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL_5_1``
-      - Level 5.1
-
-
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-mpeg4-level:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_LEVEL``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_video_mpeg4_level -
-    The level information for the MPEG4 elementary stream. Applicable to
-    the MPEG4 encoder. Possible values are:
-
-
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_LEVEL_0``
-      - Level 0
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_LEVEL_0B``
-      - Level 0b
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_LEVEL_1``
-      - Level 1
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_LEVEL_2``
-      - Level 2
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_LEVEL_3``
-      - Level 3
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_LEVEL_3B``
-      - Level 3b
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_LEVEL_4``
-      - Level 4
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_LEVEL_5``
-      - Level 5
-
-
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-profile:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_profile -
-    The profile information for H264. Applicable to the H264 encoder.
-    Possible values are:
-
-
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_BASELINE``
-      - Baseline profile
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_CONSTRAINED_BASELINE``
-      - Constrained Baseline profile
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_MAIN``
-      - Main profile
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_EXTENDED``
-      - Extended profile
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_HIGH``
-      - High profile
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_HIGH_10``
-      - High 10 profile
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_HIGH_422``
-      - High 422 profile
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_HIGH_444_PREDICTIVE``
-      - High 444 Predictive profile
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_HIGH_10_INTRA``
-      - High 10 Intra profile
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_HIGH_422_INTRA``
-      - High 422 Intra profile
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_HIGH_444_INTRA``
-      - High 444 Intra profile
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_CAVLC_444_INTRA``
-      - CAVLC 444 Intra profile
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_SCALABLE_BASELINE``
-      - Scalable Baseline profile
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_SCALABLE_HIGH``
-      - Scalable High profile
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_SCALABLE_HIGH_INTRA``
-      - Scalable High Intra profile
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_STEREO_HIGH``
-      - Stereo High profile
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE_MULTIVIEW_HIGH``
-      - Multiview High profile
-
-
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-mpeg4-profile:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_PROFILE``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_video_mpeg4_profile -
-    The profile information for MPEG4. Applicable to the MPEG4 encoder.
-    Possible values are:
-
-
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_PROFILE_SIMPLE``
-      - Simple profile
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_PROFILE_ADVANCED_SIMPLE``
-      - Advanced Simple profile
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_PROFILE_CORE``
-      - Core profile
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_PROFILE_SIMPLE_SCALABLE``
-      - Simple Scalable profile
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_PROFILE_ADVANCED_CODING_EFFICIENCY``
-      -
-
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MAX_REF_PIC (integer)``
-    The maximum number of reference pictures used for encoding.
-    Applicable to the encoder.
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-multi-slice-mode:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MODE``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_video_multi_slice_mode -
-    Determines how the encoder should handle division of frame into
-    slices. Applicable to the encoder. Possible values are:
-
-
-
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{8.7cm}|p{8.8cm}|
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MODE_SINGLE``
-      - Single slice per frame.
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MODE_MAX_MB``
-      - Multiple slices with set maximum number of macroblocks per slice.
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MODE_MAX_BYTES``
-      - Multiple slice with set maximum size in bytes per slice.
-
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MAX_MB (integer)``
-    The maximum number of macroblocks in a slice. Used when
-    ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MODE`` is set to
-    ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MODE_MAX_MB``. Applicable to the
-    encoder.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MAX_BYTES (integer)``
-    The maximum size of a slice in bytes. Used when
-    ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MODE`` is set to
-    ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MODE_MAX_BYTES``. Applicable to the
-    encoder.
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-loop-filter-mode:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LOOP_FILTER_MODE``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_loop_filter_mode -
-    Loop filter mode for H264 encoder. Possible values are:
-
-
-
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{14.0cm}|p{3.5cm}|
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LOOP_FILTER_MODE_ENABLED``
-      - Loop filter is enabled.
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LOOP_FILTER_MODE_DISABLED``
-      - Loop filter is disabled.
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LOOP_FILTER_MODE_DISABLED_AT_SLICE_BOUNDARY``
-      - Loop filter is disabled at the slice boundary.
-
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LOOP_FILTER_ALPHA (integer)``
-    Loop filter alpha coefficient, defined in the H264 standard.
-    This value corresponds to the slice_alpha_c0_offset_div2 slice header
-    field, and should be in the range of -6 to +6, inclusive. The actual alpha
-    offset FilterOffsetA is twice this value.
-    Applicable to the H264 encoder.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LOOP_FILTER_BETA (integer)``
-    Loop filter beta coefficient, defined in the H264 standard.
-    This corresponds to the slice_beta_offset_div2 slice header field, and
-    should be in the range of -6 to +6, inclusive. The actual beta offset
-    FilterOffsetB is twice this value.
-    Applicable to the H264 encoder.
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-entropy-mode:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_ENTROPY_MODE``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_entropy_mode -
-    Entropy coding mode for H264 - CABAC/CAVALC. Applicable to the H264
-    encoder. Possible values are:
-
-
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_ENTROPY_MODE_CAVLC``
-      - Use CAVLC entropy coding.
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_ENTROPY_MODE_CABAC``
-      - Use CABAC entropy coding.
-
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_8X8_TRANSFORM (boolean)``
-    Enable 8X8 transform for H264. Applicable to the H264 encoder.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_CYCLIC_INTRA_REFRESH_MB (integer)``
-    Cyclic intra macroblock refresh. This is the number of continuous
-    macroblocks refreshed every frame. Each frame a successive set of
-    macroblocks is refreshed until the cycle completes and starts from
-    the top of the frame. Applicable to H264, H263 and MPEG4 encoder.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_FRAME_RC_ENABLE (boolean)``
-    Frame level rate control enable. If this control is disabled then
-    the quantization parameter for each frame type is constant and set
-    with appropriate controls (e.g.
-    ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H263_I_FRAME_QP``). If frame rate control is
-    enabled then quantization parameter is adjusted to meet the chosen
-    bitrate. Minimum and maximum value for the quantization parameter
-    can be set with appropriate controls (e.g.
-    ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H263_MIN_QP``). Applicable to encoders.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MB_RC_ENABLE (boolean)``
-    Macroblock level rate control enable. Applicable to the MPEG4 and
-    H264 encoders.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_QPEL (boolean)``
-    Quarter pixel motion estimation for MPEG4. Applicable to the MPEG4
-    encoder.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H263_I_FRAME_QP (integer)``
-    Quantization parameter for an I frame for H263. Valid range: from 1
-    to 31.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H263_MIN_QP (integer)``
-    Minimum quantization parameter for H263. Valid range: from 1 to 31.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H263_MAX_QP (integer)``
-    Maximum quantization parameter for H263. Valid range: from 1 to 31.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H263_P_FRAME_QP (integer)``
-    Quantization parameter for an P frame for H263. Valid range: from 1
-    to 31.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H263_B_FRAME_QP (integer)``
-    Quantization parameter for an B frame for H263. Valid range: from 1
-    to 31.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_I_FRAME_QP (integer)``
-    Quantization parameter for an I frame for H264. Valid range: from 0
-    to 51.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_MIN_QP (integer)``
-    Minimum quantization parameter for H264. Valid range: from 0 to 51.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_MAX_QP (integer)``
-    Maximum quantization parameter for H264. Valid range: from 0 to 51.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_P_FRAME_QP (integer)``
-    Quantization parameter for an P frame for H264. Valid range: from 0
-    to 51.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_B_FRAME_QP (integer)``
-    Quantization parameter for an B frame for H264. Valid range: from 0
-    to 51.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_I_FRAME_QP (integer)``
-    Quantization parameter for an I frame for MPEG4. Valid range: from 1
-    to 31.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_MIN_QP (integer)``
-    Minimum quantization parameter for MPEG4. Valid range: from 1 to 31.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_MAX_QP (integer)``
-    Maximum quantization parameter for MPEG4. Valid range: from 1 to 31.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_P_FRAME_QP (integer)``
-    Quantization parameter for an P frame for MPEG4. Valid range: from 1
-    to 31.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_B_FRAME_QP (integer)``
-    Quantization parameter for an B frame for MPEG4. Valid range: from 1
-    to 31.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VBV_SIZE (integer)``
-    The Video Buffer Verifier size in kilobytes, it is used as a
-    limitation of frame skip. The VBV is defined in the standard as a
-    mean to verify that the produced stream will be successfully
-    decoded. The standard describes it as "Part of a hypothetical
-    decoder that is conceptually connected to the output of the encoder.
-    Its purpose is to provide a constraint on the variability of the
-    data rate that an encoder or editing process may produce.".
-    Applicable to the MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG4 encoders.
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-vbv-delay:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VBV_DELAY (integer)``
-    Sets the initial delay in milliseconds for VBV buffer control.
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-hor-search-range:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MV_H_SEARCH_RANGE (integer)``
-    Horizontal search range defines maximum horizontal search area in
-    pixels to search and match for the present Macroblock (MB) in the
-    reference picture. This V4L2 control macro is used to set horizontal
-    search range for motion estimation module in video encoder.
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-vert-search-range:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MV_V_SEARCH_RANGE (integer)``
-    Vertical search range defines maximum vertical search area in pixels
-    to search and match for the present Macroblock (MB) in the reference
-    picture. This V4L2 control macro is used to set vertical search
-    range for motion estimation module in video encoder.
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-force-key-frame:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_FORCE_KEY_FRAME (button)``
-    Force a key frame for the next queued buffer. Applicable to
-    encoders. This is a general, codec-agnostic keyframe control.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_CPB_SIZE (integer)``
-    The Coded Picture Buffer size in kilobytes, it is used as a
-    limitation of frame skip. The CPB is defined in the H264 standard as
-    a mean to verify that the produced stream will be successfully
-    decoded. Applicable to the H264 encoder.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_I_PERIOD (integer)``
-    Period between I-frames in the open GOP for H264. In case of an open
-    GOP this is the period between two I-frames. The period between IDR
-    (Instantaneous Decoding Refresh) frames is taken from the GOP_SIZE
-    control. An IDR frame, which stands for Instantaneous Decoding
-    Refresh is an I-frame after which no prior frames are referenced.
-    This means that a stream can be restarted from an IDR frame without
-    the need to store or decode any previous frames. Applicable to the
-    H264 encoder.
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-header-mode:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEADER_MODE``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_video_header_mode -
-    Determines whether the header is returned as the first buffer or is
-    it returned together with the first frame. Applicable to encoders.
-    Possible values are:
-
-
-
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{10.3cm}|p{7.2cm}|
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEADER_MODE_SEPARATE``
-      - The stream header is returned separately in the first buffer.
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEADER_MODE_JOINED_WITH_1ST_FRAME``
-      - The stream header is returned together with the first encoded
-	frame.
-
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_REPEAT_SEQ_HEADER (boolean)``
-    Repeat the video sequence headers. Repeating these headers makes
-    random access to the video stream easier. Applicable to the MPEG1, 2
-    and 4 encoder.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_DECODER_MPEG4_DEBLOCK_FILTER (boolean)``
-    Enabled the deblocking post processing filter for MPEG4 decoder.
-    Applicable to the MPEG4 decoder.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_VOP_TIME_RES (integer)``
-    vop_time_increment_resolution value for MPEG4. Applicable to the
-    MPEG4 encoder.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_VOP_TIME_INC (integer)``
-    vop_time_increment value for MPEG4. Applicable to the MPEG4
-    encoder.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FRAME_PACKING (boolean)``
-    Enable generation of frame packing supplemental enhancement
-    information in the encoded bitstream. The frame packing SEI message
-    contains the arrangement of L and R planes for 3D viewing.
-    Applicable to the H264 encoder.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_CURRENT_FRAME_0 (boolean)``
-    Sets current frame as frame0 in frame packing SEI. Applicable to the
-    H264 encoder.
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-sei-fp-arrangement-type:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_sei_fp_arrangement_type -
-    Frame packing arrangement type for H264 SEI. Applicable to the H264
-    encoder. Possible values are:
-
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{12cm}|p{5.5cm}|
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE_CHEKERBOARD``
-      - Pixels are alternatively from L and R.
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE_COLUMN``
-      - L and R are interlaced by column.
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE_ROW``
-      - L and R are interlaced by row.
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE_SIDE_BY_SIDE``
-      - L is on the left, R on the right.
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE_TOP_BOTTOM``
-      - L is on top, R on bottom.
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE_TEMPORAL``
-      - One view per frame.
-
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO (boolean)``
-    Enables flexible macroblock ordering in the encoded bitstream. It is
-    a technique used for restructuring the ordering of macroblocks in
-    pictures. Applicable to the H264 encoder.
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-fmo-map-type:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE``
-   (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_fmo_map_type -
-    When using FMO, the map type divides the image in different scan
-    patterns of macroblocks. Applicable to the H264 encoder. Possible
-    values are:
-
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{12.5cm}|p{5.0cm}|
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_INTERLEAVED_SLICES``
-      - Slices are interleaved one after other with macroblocks in run
-	length order.
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_SCATTERED_SLICES``
-      - Scatters the macroblocks based on a mathematical function known to
-	both encoder and decoder.
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_FOREGROUND_WITH_LEFT_OVER``
-      - Macroblocks arranged in rectangular areas or regions of interest.
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_BOX_OUT``
-      - Slice groups grow in a cyclic way from centre to outwards.
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_RASTER_SCAN``
-      - Slice groups grow in raster scan pattern from left to right.
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_WIPE_SCAN``
-      - Slice groups grow in wipe scan pattern from top to bottom.
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_EXPLICIT``
-      - User defined map type.
-
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_SLICE_GROUP (integer)``
-    Number of slice groups in FMO. Applicable to the H264 encoder.
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-fmo-change-direction:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_CHANGE_DIRECTION``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_fmo_change_dir -
-    Specifies a direction of the slice group change for raster and wipe
-    maps. Applicable to the H264 encoder. Possible values are:
-
-
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_CHANGE_DIR_RIGHT``
-      - Raster scan or wipe right.
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_CHANGE_DIR_LEFT``
-      - Reverse raster scan or wipe left.
-
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_CHANGE_RATE (integer)``
-    Specifies the size of the first slice group for raster and wipe map.
-    Applicable to the H264 encoder.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_RUN_LENGTH (integer)``
-    Specifies the number of consecutive macroblocks for the interleaved
-    map. Applicable to the H264 encoder.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_ASO (boolean)``
-    Enables arbitrary slice ordering in encoded bitstream. Applicable to
-    the H264 encoder.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_ASO_SLICE_ORDER (integer)``
-    Specifies the slice order in ASO. Applicable to the H264 encoder.
-    The supplied 32-bit integer is interpreted as follows (bit 0 = least
-    significant bit):
-
-
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - Bit 0:15
-      - Slice ID
-    * - Bit 16:32
-      - Slice position or order
-
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_HIERARCHICAL_CODING (boolean)``
-    Enables H264 hierarchical coding. Applicable to the H264 encoder.
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-hierarchical-coding-type:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_HIERARCHICAL_CODING_TYPE``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_hierarchical_coding_type -
-    Specifies the hierarchical coding type. Applicable to the H264
-    encoder. Possible values are:
-
-
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_HIERARCHICAL_CODING_B``
-      - Hierarchical B coding.
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_HIERARCHICAL_CODING_P``
-      - Hierarchical P coding.
-
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_HIERARCHICAL_CODING_LAYER (integer)``
-    Specifies the number of hierarchical coding layers. Applicable to
-    the H264 encoder.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_HIERARCHICAL_CODING_LAYER_QP (integer)``
-    Specifies a user defined QP for each layer. Applicable to the H264
-    encoder. The supplied 32-bit integer is interpreted as follows (bit
-    0 = least significant bit):
-
-
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - Bit 0:15
-      - QP value
-    * - Bit 16:32
-      - Layer number
-
-
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-mpeg2:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG2_SLICE_PARAMS (struct)``
-    Specifies the slice parameters (as extracted from the bitstream) for the
-    associated MPEG-2 slice data. This includes the necessary parameters for
-    configuring a stateless hardware decoding pipeline for MPEG-2.
-    The bitstream parameters are defined according to :ref:`mpeg2part2`.
-
-    .. note::
-
-       This compound control is not yet part of the public kernel API and
-       it is expected to change.
-
-.. c:type:: v4l2_ctrl_mpeg2_slice_params
-
-.. cssclass:: longtable
-
-.. flat-table:: struct v4l2_ctrl_mpeg2_slice_params
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-    :widths:       1 1 2
-
-    * - __u32
-      - ``bit_size``
-      - Size (in bits) of the current slice data.
-    * - __u32
-      - ``data_bit_offset``
-      - Offset (in bits) to the video data in the current slice data.
-    * - struct :c:type:`v4l2_mpeg2_sequence`
-      - ``sequence``
-      - Structure with MPEG-2 sequence metadata, merging relevant fields from
-	the sequence header and sequence extension parts of the bitstream.
-    * - struct :c:type:`v4l2_mpeg2_picture`
-      - ``picture``
-      - Structure with MPEG-2 picture metadata, merging relevant fields from
-	the picture header and picture coding extension parts of the bitstream.
-    * - __u8
-      - ``quantiser_scale_code``
-      - Code used to determine the quantization scale to use for the IDCT.
-    * - __u8
-      - ``backward_ref_index``
-      - Index for the V4L2 buffer to use as backward reference, used with
-	B-coded and P-coded frames.
-    * - __u8
-      - ``forward_ref_index``
-      - Index for the V4L2 buffer to use as forward reference, used with
-	B-coded frames.
-
-.. c:type:: v4l2_mpeg2_sequence
-
-.. cssclass:: longtable
-
-.. flat-table:: struct v4l2_mpeg2_sequence
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-    :widths:       1 1 2
-
-    * - __u16
-      - ``horizontal_size``
-      - The width of the displayable part of the frame's luminance component.
-    * - __u16
-      - ``vertical_size``
-      - The height of the displayable part of the frame's luminance component.
-    * - __u32
-      - ``vbv_buffer_size``
-      - Used to calculate the required size of the video buffering verifier,
-	defined (in bits) as: 16 * 1024 * vbv_buffer_size.
-    * - __u8
-      - ``profile_and_level_indication``
-      - The current profile and level indication as extracted from the
-	bitstream.
-    * - __u8
-      - ``progressive_sequence``
-      - Indication that all the frames for the sequence are progressive instead
-	of interlaced.
-    * - __u8
-      - ``chroma_format``
-      - The chrominance sub-sampling format (1: 4:2:0, 2: 4:2:2, 3: 4:4:4).
-
-.. c:type:: v4l2_mpeg2_picture
-
-.. cssclass:: longtable
-
-.. flat-table:: struct v4l2_mpeg2_picture
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-    :widths:       1 1 2
-
-    * - __u8
-      - ``picture_coding_type``
-      - Picture coding type for the frame covered by the current slice
-	(V4L2_MPEG2_PICTURE_CODING_TYPE_I, V4L2_MPEG2_PICTURE_CODING_TYPE_P or
-	V4L2_MPEG2_PICTURE_CODING_TYPE_B).
-    * - __u8
-      - ``f_code[2][2]``
-      - Motion vector codes.
-    * - __u8
-      - ``intra_dc_precision``
-      - Precision of Discrete Cosine transform (0: 8 bits precision,
-	1: 9 bits precision, 2: 10 bits precision, 3: 11 bits precision).
-    * - __u8
-      - ``picture_structure``
-      - Picture structure (1: interlaced top field, 2: interlaced bottom field,
-	3: progressive frame).
-    * - __u8
-      - ``top_field_first``
-      - If set to 1 and interlaced stream, top field is output first.
-    * - __u8
-      - ``frame_pred_frame_dct``
-      - If set to 1, only frame-DCT and frame prediction are used.
-    * - __u8
-      - ``concealment_motion_vectors``
-      -  If set to 1, motion vectors are coded for intra macroblocks.
-    * - __u8
-      - ``q_scale_type``
-      - This flag affects the inverse quantization process.
-    * - __u8
-      - ``intra_vlc_format``
-      - This flag affects the decoding of transform coefficient data.
-    * - __u8
-      - ``alternate_scan``
-      - This flag affects the decoding of transform coefficient data.
-    * - __u8
-      - ``repeat_first_field``
-      - This flag affects the decoding process of progressive frames.
-    * - __u8
-      - ``progressive_frame``
-      - Indicates whether the current frame is progressive.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG2_QUANTIZATION (struct)``
-    Specifies quantization matrices (as extracted from the bitstream) for the
-    associated MPEG-2 slice data.
-
-    .. note::
-
-       This compound control is not yet part of the public kernel API and
-       it is expected to change.
-
-.. c:type:: v4l2_ctrl_mpeg2_quantization
-
-.. cssclass:: longtable
-
-.. flat-table:: struct v4l2_ctrl_mpeg2_quantization
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-    :widths:       1 1 2
-
-    * - __u8
-      - ``load_intra_quantiser_matrix``
-      - One bit to indicate whether to load the ``intra_quantiser_matrix`` data.
-    * - __u8
-      - ``load_non_intra_quantiser_matrix``
-      - One bit to indicate whether to load the ``non_intra_quantiser_matrix``
-	data.
-    * - __u8
-      - ``load_chroma_intra_quantiser_matrix``
-      - One bit to indicate whether to load the
-	``chroma_intra_quantiser_matrix`` data, only relevant for non-4:2:0 YUV
-	formats.
-    * - __u8
-      - ``load_chroma_non_intra_quantiser_matrix``
-      - One bit to indicate whether to load the
-	``chroma_non_intra_quantiser_matrix`` data, only relevant for non-4:2:0
-	YUV formats.
-    * - __u8
-      - ``intra_quantiser_matrix[64]``
-      - The quantization matrix coefficients for intra-coded frames, in zigzag
-	scanning order. It is relevant for both luma and chroma components,
-	although it can be superseded by the chroma-specific matrix for
-	non-4:2:0 YUV formats.
-    * - __u8
-      - ``non_intra_quantiser_matrix[64]``
-      - The quantization matrix coefficients for non-intra-coded frames, in
-	zigzag scanning order. It is relevant for both luma and chroma
-	components, although it can be superseded by the chroma-specific matrix
-	for non-4:2:0 YUV formats.
-    * - __u8
-      - ``chroma_intra_quantiser_matrix[64]``
-      - The quantization matrix coefficients for the chominance component of
-	intra-coded frames, in zigzag scanning order. Only relevant for
-	non-4:2:0 YUV formats.
-    * - __u8
-      - ``chroma_non_intra_quantiser_matrix[64]``
-      - The quantization matrix coefficients for the chrominance component of
-	non-intra-coded frames, in zigzag scanning order. Only relevant for
-	non-4:2:0 YUV formats.
-
-MFC 5.1 MPEG Controls
----------------------
-
-The following MPEG class controls deal with MPEG decoding and encoding
-settings that are specific to the Multi Format Codec 5.1 device present
-in the S5P family of SoCs by Samsung.
-
-
-.. _mfc51-control-id:
-
-MFC 5.1 Control IDs
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_DECODER_H264_DISPLAY_DELAY_ENABLE (boolean)``
-    If the display delay is enabled then the decoder is forced to return
-    a CAPTURE buffer (decoded frame) after processing a certain number
-    of OUTPUT buffers. The delay can be set through
-    ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_DECODER_H264_DISPLAY_DELAY``. This
-    feature can be used for example for generating thumbnails of videos.
-    Applicable to the H264 decoder.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_DECODER_H264_DISPLAY_DELAY (integer)``
-    Display delay value for H264 decoder. The decoder is forced to
-    return a decoded frame after the set 'display delay' number of
-    frames. If this number is low it may result in frames returned out
-    of dispaly order, in addition the hardware may still be using the
-    returned buffer as a reference picture for subsequent frames.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_H264_NUM_REF_PIC_FOR_P (integer)``
-    The number of reference pictures used for encoding a P picture.
-    Applicable to the H264 encoder.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_PADDING (boolean)``
-    Padding enable in the encoder - use a color instead of repeating
-    border pixels. Applicable to encoders.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_PADDING_YUV (integer)``
-    Padding color in the encoder. Applicable to encoders. The supplied
-    32-bit integer is interpreted as follows (bit 0 = least significant
-    bit):
-
-
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - Bit 0:7
-      - V chrominance information
-    * - Bit 8:15
-      - U chrominance information
-    * - Bit 16:23
-      - Y luminance information
-    * - Bit 24:31
-      - Must be zero.
-
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_RC_REACTION_COEFF (integer)``
-    Reaction coefficient for MFC rate control. Applicable to encoders.
-
-    .. note::
-
-       #. Valid only when the frame level RC is enabled.
-
-       #. For tight CBR, this field must be small (ex. 2 ~ 10). For
-	  VBR, this field must be large (ex. 100 ~ 1000).
-
-       #. It is not recommended to use the greater number than
-	  FRAME_RATE * (10^9 / BIT_RATE).
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_H264_ADAPTIVE_RC_DARK (boolean)``
-    Adaptive rate control for dark region. Valid only when H.264 and
-    macroblock level RC is enabled
-    (``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MB_RC_ENABLE``). Applicable to the H264
-    encoder.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_H264_ADAPTIVE_RC_SMOOTH (boolean)``
-    Adaptive rate control for smooth region. Valid only when H.264 and
-    macroblock level RC is enabled
-    (``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MB_RC_ENABLE``). Applicable to the H264
-    encoder.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_H264_ADAPTIVE_RC_STATIC (boolean)``
-    Adaptive rate control for static region. Valid only when H.264 and
-    macroblock level RC is enabled
-    (``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MB_RC_ENABLE``). Applicable to the H264
-    encoder.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_H264_ADAPTIVE_RC_ACTIVITY (boolean)``
-    Adaptive rate control for activity region. Valid only when H.264 and
-    macroblock level RC is enabled
-    (``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MB_RC_ENABLE``). Applicable to the H264
-    encoder.
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-mfc51-video-frame-skip-mode:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_FRAME_SKIP_MODE``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_mfc51_video_frame_skip_mode -
-    Indicates in what conditions the encoder should skip frames. If
-    encoding a frame would cause the encoded stream to be larger then a
-    chosen data limit then the frame will be skipped. Possible values
-    are:
-
-
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{9.0cm}|p{8.5cm}|
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_MFC51_FRAME_SKIP_MODE_DISABLED``
-      - Frame skip mode is disabled.
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_MFC51_FRAME_SKIP_MODE_LEVEL_LIMIT``
-      - Frame skip mode enabled and buffer limit is set by the chosen
-	level and is defined by the standard.
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_MFC51_FRAME_SKIP_MODE_BUF_LIMIT``
-      - Frame skip mode enabled and buffer limit is set by the VBV
-	(MPEG1/2/4) or CPB (H264) buffer size control.
-
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_RC_FIXED_TARGET_BIT (integer)``
-    Enable rate-control with fixed target bit. If this setting is
-    enabled, then the rate control logic of the encoder will calculate
-    the average bitrate for a GOP and keep it below or equal the set
-    bitrate target. Otherwise the rate control logic calculates the
-    overall average bitrate for the stream and keeps it below or equal
-    to the set bitrate. In the first case the average bitrate for the
-    whole stream will be smaller then the set bitrate. This is caused
-    because the average is calculated for smaller number of frames, on
-    the other hand enabling this setting will ensure that the stream
-    will meet tight bandwidth constraints. Applicable to encoders.
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-mfc51-video-force-frame-type:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_FORCE_FRAME_TYPE``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_mfc51_video_force_frame_type -
-    Force a frame type for the next queued buffer. Applicable to
-    encoders. Possible values are:
-
-
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_MFC51_FORCE_FRAME_TYPE_DISABLED``
-      - Forcing a specific frame type disabled.
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_MFC51_FORCE_FRAME_TYPE_I_FRAME``
-      - Force an I-frame.
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_MFC51_FORCE_FRAME_TYPE_NOT_CODED``
-      - Force a non-coded frame.
-
-
-
-
-CX2341x MPEG Controls
----------------------
-
-The following MPEG class controls deal with MPEG encoding settings that
-are specific to the Conexant CX23415 and CX23416 MPEG encoding chips.
-
-
-.. _cx2341x-control-id:
-
-CX2341x Control IDs
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-cx2341x-video-spatial-filter-mode:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_SPATIAL_FILTER_MODE``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_cx2341x_video_spatial_filter_mode -
-    Sets the Spatial Filter mode (default ``MANUAL``). Possible values
-    are:
-
-
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_SPATIAL_FILTER_MODE_MANUAL``
-      - Choose the filter manually
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_SPATIAL_FILTER_MODE_AUTO``
-      - Choose the filter automatically
-
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_SPATIAL_FILTER (integer (0-15))``
-    The setting for the Spatial Filter. 0 = off, 15 = maximum. (Default
-    is 0.)
-
-.. _luma-spatial-filter-type:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_LUMA_SPATIAL_FILTER_TYPE``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_cx2341x_video_luma_spatial_filter_type -
-    Select the algorithm to use for the Luma Spatial Filter (default
-    ``1D_HOR``). Possible values:
-
-
-
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{14.5cm}|p{3.0cm}|
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_LUMA_SPATIAL_FILTER_TYPE_OFF``
-      - No filter
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_LUMA_SPATIAL_FILTER_TYPE_1D_HOR``
-      - One-dimensional horizontal
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_LUMA_SPATIAL_FILTER_TYPE_1D_VERT``
-      - One-dimensional vertical
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_LUMA_SPATIAL_FILTER_TYPE_2D_HV_SEPARABLE``
-      - Two-dimensional separable
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_LUMA_SPATIAL_FILTER_TYPE_2D_SYM_NON_SEPARABLE``
-      - Two-dimensional symmetrical non-separable
-
-
-
-.. _chroma-spatial-filter-type:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_CHROMA_SPATIAL_FILTER_TYPE``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_cx2341x_video_chroma_spatial_filter_type -
-    Select the algorithm for the Chroma Spatial Filter (default
-    ``1D_HOR``). Possible values are:
-
-
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_CHROMA_SPATIAL_FILTER_TYPE_OFF``
-      - No filter
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_CHROMA_SPATIAL_FILTER_TYPE_1D_HOR``
-      - One-dimensional horizontal
-
-
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-cx2341x-video-temporal-filter-mode:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_TEMPORAL_FILTER_MODE``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_cx2341x_video_temporal_filter_mode -
-    Sets the Temporal Filter mode (default ``MANUAL``). Possible values
-    are:
-
-
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_TEMPORAL_FILTER_MODE_MANUAL``
-      - Choose the filter manually
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_TEMPORAL_FILTER_MODE_AUTO``
-      - Choose the filter automatically
-
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_TEMPORAL_FILTER (integer (0-31))``
-    The setting for the Temporal Filter. 0 = off, 31 = maximum. (Default
-    is 8 for full-scale capturing and 0 for scaled capturing.)
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-cx2341x-video-median-filter-type:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_MEDIAN_FILTER_TYPE``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_cx2341x_video_median_filter_type -
-    Median Filter Type (default ``OFF``). Possible values are:
-
-
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_MEDIAN_FILTER_TYPE_OFF``
-      - No filter
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_MEDIAN_FILTER_TYPE_HOR``
-      - Horizontal filter
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_MEDIAN_FILTER_TYPE_VERT``
-      - Vertical filter
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_MEDIAN_FILTER_TYPE_HOR_VERT``
-      - Horizontal and vertical filter
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_MEDIAN_FILTER_TYPE_DIAG``
-      - Diagonal filter
-
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_LUMA_MEDIAN_FILTER_BOTTOM (integer (0-255))``
-    Threshold above which the luminance median filter is enabled
-    (default 0)
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_LUMA_MEDIAN_FILTER_TOP (integer (0-255))``
-    Threshold below which the luminance median filter is enabled
-    (default 255)
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_CHROMA_MEDIAN_FILTER_BOTTOM (integer (0-255))``
-    Threshold above which the chroma median filter is enabled (default
-    0)
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_VIDEO_CHROMA_MEDIAN_FILTER_TOP (integer (0-255))``
-    Threshold below which the chroma median filter is enabled (default
-    255)
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_CX2341X_STREAM_INSERT_NAV_PACKETS (boolean)``
-    The CX2341X MPEG encoder can insert one empty MPEG-2 PES packet into
-    the stream between every four video frames. The packet size is 2048
-    bytes, including the packet_start_code_prefix and stream_id
-    fields. The stream_id is 0xBF (private stream 2). The payload
-    consists of 0x00 bytes, to be filled in by the application. 0 = do
-    not insert, 1 = insert packets.
-
-
-VPX Control Reference
----------------------
-
-The VPX controls include controls for encoding parameters of VPx video
-codec.
-
-
-.. _vpx-control-id:
-
-VPX Control IDs
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-.. _v4l2-vpx-num-partitions:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_NUM_PARTITIONS``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_vp8_num_partitions -
-    The number of token partitions to use in VP8 encoder. Possible
-    values are:
-
-
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_1_PARTITION``
-      - 1 coefficient partition
-    * - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_2_PARTITIONS``
-      - 2 coefficient partitions
-    * - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_4_PARTITIONS``
-      - 4 coefficient partitions
-    * - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_8_PARTITIONS``
-      - 8 coefficient partitions
-
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_IMD_DISABLE_4X4 (boolean)``
-    Setting this prevents intra 4x4 mode in the intra mode decision.
-
-.. _v4l2-vpx-num-ref-frames:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_NUM_REF_FRAMES``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_vp8_num_ref_frames -
-    The number of reference pictures for encoding P frames. Possible
-    values are:
-
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{7.9cm}|p{9.6cm}|
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_1_REF_FRAME``
-      - Last encoded frame will be searched
-    * - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_2_REF_FRAME``
-      - Two frames will be searched among the last encoded frame, the
-	golden frame and the alternate reference (altref) frame. The
-	encoder implementation will decide which two are chosen.
-    * - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_3_REF_FRAME``
-      - The last encoded frame, the golden frame and the altref frame will
-	be searched.
-
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_FILTER_LEVEL (integer)``
-    Indicates the loop filter level. The adjustment of the loop filter
-    level is done via a delta value against a baseline loop filter
-    value.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_FILTER_SHARPNESS (integer)``
-    This parameter affects the loop filter. Anything above zero weakens
-    the deblocking effect on the loop filter.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_GOLDEN_FRAME_REF_PERIOD (integer)``
-    Sets the refresh period for the golden frame. The period is defined
-    in number of frames. For a value of 'n', every nth frame starting
-    from the first key frame will be taken as a golden frame. For eg.
-    for encoding sequence of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 where the golden
-    frame refresh period is set as 4, the frames 0, 4, 8 etc will be
-    taken as the golden frames as frame 0 is always a key frame.
-
-.. _v4l2-vpx-golden-frame-sel:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_GOLDEN_FRAME_SEL``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_vp8_golden_frame_sel -
-    Selects the golden frame for encoding. Possible values are:
-
-.. raw:: latex
-
-    \footnotesize
-
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{9.0cm}|p{8.0cm}|
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_GOLDEN_FRAME_USE_PREV``
-      - Use the (n-2)th frame as a golden frame, current frame index being
-	'n'.
-    * - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_GOLDEN_FRAME_USE_REF_PERIOD``
-      - Use the previous specific frame indicated by
-	``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_GOLDEN_FRAME_REF_PERIOD`` as a
-	golden frame.
-
-.. raw:: latex
-
-    \normalsize
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_MIN_QP (integer)``
-    Minimum quantization parameter for VP8.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_MAX_QP (integer)``
-    Maximum quantization parameter for VP8.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_I_FRAME_QP (integer)``
-    Quantization parameter for an I frame for VP8.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_P_FRAME_QP (integer)``
-    Quantization parameter for a P frame for VP8.
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-vp8-profile:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VP8_PROFILE``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_video_vp8_profile -
-    This control allows selecting the profile for VP8 encoder.
-    This is also used to enumerate supported profiles by VP8 encoder or decoder.
-    Possible values are:
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_VP8_PROFILE_0``
-      - Profile 0
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_VP8_PROFILE_1``
-      - Profile 1
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_VP8_PROFILE_2``
-      - Profile 2
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_VP8_PROFILE_3``
-      - Profile 3
-
-.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-vp9-profile:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VP9_PROFILE``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_video_vp9_profile -
-    This control allows selecting the profile for VP9 encoder.
-    This is also used to enumerate supported profiles by VP9 encoder or decoder.
-    Possible values are:
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_VP9_PROFILE_0``
-      - Profile 0
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_VP9_PROFILE_1``
-      - Profile 1
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_VP9_PROFILE_2``
-      - Profile 2
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_VP9_PROFILE_3``
-      - Profile 3
-
-
-High Efficiency Video Coding (HEVC/H.265) Control Reference
------------------------------------------------------------
-
-The HEVC/H.265 controls include controls for encoding parameters of HEVC/H.265
-video codec.
-
-
-.. _hevc-control-id:
-
-HEVC/H.265 Control IDs
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP (integer)``
-    Minimum quantization parameter for HEVC.
-    Valid range: from 0 to 51.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP (integer)``
-    Maximum quantization parameter for HEVC.
-    Valid range: from 0 to 51.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_I_FRAME_QP (integer)``
-    Quantization parameter for an I frame for HEVC.
-    Valid range: [V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP,
-    V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP].
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_P_FRAME_QP (integer)``
-    Quantization parameter for a P frame for HEVC.
-    Valid range: [V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP,
-    V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP].
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_B_FRAME_QP (integer)``
-    Quantization parameter for a B frame for HEVC.
-    Valid range: [V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP,
-    V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP].
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_QP (boolean)``
-    HIERARCHICAL_QP allows the host to specify the quantization parameter
-    values for each temporal layer through HIERARCHICAL_QP_LAYER. This is
-    valid only if HIERARCHICAL_CODING_LAYER is greater than 1. Setting the
-    control value to 1 enables setting of the QP values for the layers.
-
-.. _v4l2-hevc-hier-coding-type:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_TYPE``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_video_hevc_hier_coding_type -
-    Selects the hierarchical coding type for encoding. Possible values are:
-
-.. raw:: latex
-
-    \footnotesize
-
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{9.0cm}|p{8.0cm}|
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIERARCHICAL_CODING_B``
-      - Use the B frame for hierarchical coding.
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIERARCHICAL_CODING_P``
-      - Use the P frame for hierarchical coding.
-
-.. raw:: latex
-
-    \normalsize
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_LAYER (integer)``
-    Selects the hierarchical coding layer. In normal encoding
-    (non-hierarchial coding), it should be zero. Possible values are [0, 6].
-    0 indicates HIERARCHICAL CODING LAYER 0, 1 indicates HIERARCHICAL CODING
-    LAYER 1 and so on.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L0_QP (integer)``
-    Indicates quantization parameter for hierarchical coding layer 0.
-    Valid range: [V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP,
-    V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP].
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L1_QP (integer)``
-    Indicates quantization parameter for hierarchical coding layer 1.
-    Valid range: [V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP,
-    V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP].
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L2_QP (integer)``
-    Indicates quantization parameter for hierarchical coding layer 2.
-    Valid range: [V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP,
-    V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP].
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L3_QP (integer)``
-    Indicates quantization parameter for hierarchical coding layer 3.
-    Valid range: [V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP,
-    V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP].
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L4_QP (integer)``
-    Indicates quantization parameter for hierarchical coding layer 4.
-    Valid range: [V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP,
-    V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP].
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L5_QP (integer)``
-    Indicates quantization parameter for hierarchical coding layer 5.
-    Valid range: [V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP,
-    V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP].
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L6_QP (integer)``
-    Indicates quantization parameter for hierarchical coding layer 6.
-    Valid range: [V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MIN_QP,
-    V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_QP].
-
-.. _v4l2-hevc-profile:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_PROFILE``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_video_hevc_profile -
-    Select the desired profile for HEVC encoder.
-
-.. raw:: latex
-
-    \footnotesize
-
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{9.0cm}|p{8.0cm}|
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_PROFILE_MAIN``
-      - Main profile.
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_PROFILE_MAIN_STILL_PICTURE``
-      - Main still picture profile.
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_PROFILE_MAIN_10``
-      - Main 10 profile.
-
-.. raw:: latex
-
-    \normalsize
-
-
-.. _v4l2-hevc-level:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_video_hevc_level -
-    Selects the desired level for HEVC encoder.
-
-.. raw:: latex
-
-    \footnotesize
-
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{9.0cm}|p{8.0cm}|
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_1``
-      - Level 1.0
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_2``
-      - Level 2.0
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_2_1``
-      - Level 2.1
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_3``
-      - Level 3.0
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_3_1``
-      - Level 3.1
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_4``
-      - Level 4.0
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_4_1``
-      - Level 4.1
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_5``
-      - Level 5.0
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_5_1``
-      - Level 5.1
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_5_2``
-      - Level 5.2
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_6``
-      - Level 6.0
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_6_1``
-      - Level 6.1
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LEVEL_6_2``
-      - Level 6.2
-
-.. raw:: latex
-
-    \normalsize
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_FRAME_RATE_RESOLUTION (integer)``
-    Indicates the number of evenly spaced subintervals, called ticks, within
-    one second. This is a 16 bit unsigned integer and has a maximum value up to
-    0xffff and a minimum value of 1.
-
-.. _v4l2-hevc-tier:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_TIER``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_video_hevc_tier -
-    TIER_FLAG specifies tiers information of the HEVC encoded picture. Tier
-    were made to deal with applications that differ in terms of maximum bit
-    rate. Setting the flag to 0 selects HEVC tier as Main tier and setting
-    this flag to 1 indicates High tier. High tier is for applications requiring
-    high bit rates.
-
-.. raw:: latex
-
-    \footnotesize
-
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{9.0cm}|p{8.0cm}|
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_TIER_MAIN``
-      - Main tier.
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_TIER_HIGH``
-      - High tier.
-
-.. raw:: latex
-
-    \normalsize
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_PARTITION_DEPTH (integer)``
-    Selects HEVC maximum coding unit depth.
-
-.. _v4l2-hevc-loop-filter-mode:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LOOP_FILTER_MODE``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_video_hevc_loop_filter_mode -
-    Loop filter mode for HEVC encoder. Possible values are:
-
-.. raw:: latex
-
-    \footnotesize
-
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{10.7cm}|p{6.3cm}|
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LOOP_FILTER_MODE_DISABLED``
-      - Loop filter is disabled.
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LOOP_FILTER_MODE_ENABLED``
-      - Loop filter is enabled.
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LOOP_FILTER_MODE_DISABLED_AT_SLICE_BOUNDARY``
-      - Loop filter is disabled at the slice boundary.
-
-.. raw:: latex
-
-    \normalsize
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LF_BETA_OFFSET_DIV2 (integer)``
-    Selects HEVC loop filter beta offset. The valid range is [-6, +6].
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LF_TC_OFFSET_DIV2 (integer)``
-    Selects HEVC loop filter tc offset. The valid range is [-6, +6].
-
-.. _v4l2-hevc-refresh-type:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_REFRESH_TYPE``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_video_hevc_hier_refresh_type -
-    Selects refresh type for HEVC encoder.
-    Host has to specify the period into
-    V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_REFRESH_PERIOD.
-
-.. raw:: latex
-
-    \footnotesize
-
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{8.0cm}|p{9.0cm}|
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_REFRESH_NONE``
-      - Use the B frame for hierarchical coding.
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_REFRESH_CRA``
-      - Use CRA (Clean Random Access Unit) picture encoding.
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_REFRESH_IDR``
-      - Use IDR (Instantaneous Decoding Refresh) picture encoding.
-
-.. raw:: latex
-
-    \normalsize
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_REFRESH_PERIOD (integer)``
-    Selects the refresh period for HEVC encoder.
-    This specifies the number of I pictures between two CRA/IDR pictures.
-    This is valid only if REFRESH_TYPE is not 0.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_LOSSLESS_CU (boolean)``
-    Indicates HEVC lossless encoding. Setting it to 0 disables lossless
-    encoding. Setting it to 1 enables lossless encoding.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_CONST_INTRA_PRED (boolean)``
-    Indicates constant intra prediction for HEVC encoder. Specifies the
-    constrained intra prediction in which intra largest coding unit (LCU)
-    prediction is performed by using residual data and decoded samples of
-    neighboring intra LCU only. Setting the value to 1 enables constant intra
-    prediction and setting the value to 0 disables constant intra prediction.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_WAVEFRONT (boolean)``
-    Indicates wavefront parallel processing for HEVC encoder. Setting it to 0
-    disables the feature and setting it to 1 enables the wavefront parallel
-    processing.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_GENERAL_PB (boolean)``
-    Setting the value to 1 enables combination of P and B frame for HEVC
-    encoder.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_TEMPORAL_ID (boolean)``
-    Indicates temporal identifier for HEVC encoder which is enabled by
-    setting the value to 1.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_STRONG_SMOOTHING (boolean)``
-    Indicates bi-linear interpolation is conditionally used in the intra
-    prediction filtering process in the CVS when set to 1. Indicates bi-linear
-    interpolation is not used in the CVS when set to 0.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_MAX_NUM_MERGE_MV_MINUS1 (integer)``
-    Indicates maximum number of merge candidate motion vectors.
-    Values are from 0 to 4.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_TMV_PREDICTION (boolean)``
-    Indicates temporal motion vector prediction for HEVC encoder. Setting it to
-    1 enables the prediction. Setting it to 0 disables the prediction.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_WITHOUT_STARTCODE (boolean)``
-    Specifies if HEVC generates a stream with a size of the length field
-    instead of start code pattern. The size of the length field is configurable
-    through the V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_SIZE_OF_LENGTH_FIELD control. Setting
-    the value to 0 disables encoding without startcode pattern. Setting the
-    value to 1 will enables encoding without startcode pattern.
-
-.. _v4l2-hevc-size-of-length-field:
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_SIZE_OF_LENGTH_FIELD``
-(enum)
-
-enum v4l2_mpeg_video_hevc_size_of_length_field -
-    Indicates the size of length field.
-    This is valid when encoding WITHOUT_STARTCODE_ENABLE is enabled.
-
-.. raw:: latex
-
-    \footnotesize
-
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{6.0cm}|p{11.0cm}|
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_SIZE_0``
-      - Generate start code pattern (Normal).
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_SIZE_1``
-      - Generate size of length field instead of start code pattern and length is 1.
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_SIZE_2``
-      - Generate size of length field instead of start code pattern and length is 2.
-    * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_SIZE_4``
-      - Generate size of length field instead of start code pattern and length is 4.
-
-.. raw:: latex
-
-    \normalsize
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L0_BR (integer)``
-    Indicates bit rate for hierarchical coding layer 0 for HEVC encoder.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L1_BR (integer)``
-    Indicates bit rate for hierarchical coding layer 1 for HEVC encoder.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L2_BR (integer)``
-    Indicates bit rate for hierarchical coding layer 2 for HEVC encoder.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L3_BR (integer)``
-    Indicates bit rate for hierarchical coding layer 3 for HEVC encoder.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L4_BR (integer)``
-    Indicates bit rate for hierarchical coding layer 4 for HEVC encoder.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L5_BR (integer)``
-    Indicates bit rate for hierarchical coding layer 5 for HEVC encoder.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEVC_HIER_CODING_L6_BR (integer)``
-    Indicates bit rate for hierarchical coding layer 6 for HEVC encoder.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_REF_NUMBER_FOR_PFRAMES (integer)``
-    Selects number of P reference pictures required for HEVC encoder.
-    P-Frame can use 1 or 2 frames for reference.
-
-``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_PREPEND_SPSPPS_TO_IDR (integer)``
-    Indicates whether to generate SPS and PPS at every IDR. Setting it to 0
-    disables generating SPS and PPS at every IDR. Setting it to one enables
-    generating SPS and PPS at every IDR.
-
-
-.. _camera-controls:
-
-Camera Control Reference
-========================
-
-The Camera class includes controls for mechanical (or equivalent
-digital) features of a device such as controllable lenses or sensors.
-
-
-.. _camera-control-id:
-
-Camera Control IDs
-------------------
-
-``V4L2_CID_CAMERA_CLASS (class)``
-    The Camera class descriptor. Calling
-    :ref:`VIDIOC_QUERYCTRL` for this control will
-    return a description of this control class.
-
-.. _v4l2-exposure-auto-type:
-
-``V4L2_CID_EXPOSURE_AUTO``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_exposure_auto_type -
-    Enables automatic adjustments of the exposure time and/or iris
-    aperture. The effect of manual changes of the exposure time or iris
-    aperture while these features are enabled is undefined, drivers
-    should ignore such requests. Possible values are:
-
-
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_EXPOSURE_AUTO``
-      - Automatic exposure time, automatic iris aperture.
-    * - ``V4L2_EXPOSURE_MANUAL``
-      - Manual exposure time, manual iris.
-    * - ``V4L2_EXPOSURE_SHUTTER_PRIORITY``
-      - Manual exposure time, auto iris.
-    * - ``V4L2_EXPOSURE_APERTURE_PRIORITY``
-      - Auto exposure time, manual iris.
-
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_EXPOSURE_ABSOLUTE (integer)``
-    Determines the exposure time of the camera sensor. The exposure time
-    is limited by the frame interval. Drivers should interpret the
-    values as 100 µs units, where the value 1 stands for 1/10000th of a
-    second, 10000 for 1 second and 100000 for 10 seconds.
-
-``V4L2_CID_EXPOSURE_AUTO_PRIORITY (boolean)``
-    When ``V4L2_CID_EXPOSURE_AUTO`` is set to ``AUTO`` or
-    ``APERTURE_PRIORITY``, this control determines if the device may
-    dynamically vary the frame rate. By default this feature is disabled
-    (0) and the frame rate must remain constant.
-
-``V4L2_CID_AUTO_EXPOSURE_BIAS (integer menu)``
-    Determines the automatic exposure compensation, it is effective only
-    when ``V4L2_CID_EXPOSURE_AUTO`` control is set to ``AUTO``,
-    ``SHUTTER_PRIORITY`` or ``APERTURE_PRIORITY``. It is expressed in
-    terms of EV, drivers should interpret the values as 0.001 EV units,
-    where the value 1000 stands for +1 EV.
-
-    Increasing the exposure compensation value is equivalent to
-    decreasing the exposure value (EV) and will increase the amount of
-    light at the image sensor. The camera performs the exposure
-    compensation by adjusting absolute exposure time and/or aperture.
-
-.. _v4l2-exposure-metering:
-
-``V4L2_CID_EXPOSURE_METERING``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_exposure_metering -
-    Determines how the camera measures the amount of light available for
-    the frame exposure. Possible values are:
-
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{8.5cm}|p{9.0cm}|
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_EXPOSURE_METERING_AVERAGE``
-      - Use the light information coming from the entire frame and average
-	giving no weighting to any particular portion of the metered area.
-    * - ``V4L2_EXPOSURE_METERING_CENTER_WEIGHTED``
-      - Average the light information coming from the entire frame giving
-	priority to the center of the metered area.
-    * - ``V4L2_EXPOSURE_METERING_SPOT``
-      - Measure only very small area at the center of the frame.
-    * - ``V4L2_EXPOSURE_METERING_MATRIX``
-      - A multi-zone metering. The light intensity is measured in several
-	points of the frame and the results are combined. The algorithm of
-	the zones selection and their significance in calculating the
-	final value is device dependent.
-
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_PAN_RELATIVE (integer)``
-    This control turns the camera horizontally by the specified amount.
-    The unit is undefined. A positive value moves the camera to the
-    right (clockwise when viewed from above), a negative value to the
-    left. A value of zero does not cause motion. This is a write-only
-    control.
-
-``V4L2_CID_TILT_RELATIVE (integer)``
-    This control turns the camera vertically by the specified amount.
-    The unit is undefined. A positive value moves the camera up, a
-    negative value down. A value of zero does not cause motion. This is
-    a write-only control.
-
-``V4L2_CID_PAN_RESET (button)``
-    When this control is set, the camera moves horizontally to the
-    default position.
-
-``V4L2_CID_TILT_RESET (button)``
-    When this control is set, the camera moves vertically to the default
-    position.
-
-``V4L2_CID_PAN_ABSOLUTE (integer)``
-    This control turns the camera horizontally to the specified
-    position. Positive values move the camera to the right (clockwise
-    when viewed from above), negative values to the left. Drivers should
-    interpret the values as arc seconds, with valid values between -180
-    * 3600 and +180 * 3600 inclusive.
-
-``V4L2_CID_TILT_ABSOLUTE (integer)``
-    This control turns the camera vertically to the specified position.
-    Positive values move the camera up, negative values down. Drivers
-    should interpret the values as arc seconds, with valid values
-    between -180 * 3600 and +180 * 3600 inclusive.
-
-``V4L2_CID_FOCUS_ABSOLUTE (integer)``
-    This control sets the focal point of the camera to the specified
-    position. The unit is undefined. Positive values set the focus
-    closer to the camera, negative values towards infinity.
-
-``V4L2_CID_FOCUS_RELATIVE (integer)``
-    This control moves the focal point of the camera by the specified
-    amount. The unit is undefined. Positive values move the focus closer
-    to the camera, negative values towards infinity. This is a
-    write-only control.
-
-``V4L2_CID_FOCUS_AUTO (boolean)``
-    Enables continuous automatic focus adjustments. The effect of manual
-    focus adjustments while this feature is enabled is undefined,
-    drivers should ignore such requests.
-
-``V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_START (button)``
-    Starts single auto focus process. The effect of setting this control
-    when ``V4L2_CID_FOCUS_AUTO`` is set to ``TRUE`` (1) is undefined,
-    drivers should ignore such requests.
-
-``V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_STOP (button)``
-    Aborts automatic focusing started with ``V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_START``
-    control. It is effective only when the continuous autofocus is
-    disabled, that is when ``V4L2_CID_FOCUS_AUTO`` control is set to
-    ``FALSE`` (0).
-
-.. _v4l2-auto-focus-status:
-
-``V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_STATUS (bitmask)``
-    The automatic focus status. This is a read-only control.
-
-    Setting ``V4L2_LOCK_FOCUS`` lock bit of the ``V4L2_CID_3A_LOCK``
-    control may stop updates of the ``V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_STATUS``
-    control value.
-
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{6.5cm}|p{11.0cm}|
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_AUTO_FOCUS_STATUS_IDLE``
-      - Automatic focus is not active.
-    * - ``V4L2_AUTO_FOCUS_STATUS_BUSY``
-      - Automatic focusing is in progress.
-    * - ``V4L2_AUTO_FOCUS_STATUS_REACHED``
-      - Focus has been reached.
-    * - ``V4L2_AUTO_FOCUS_STATUS_FAILED``
-      - Automatic focus has failed, the driver will not transition from
-	this state until another action is performed by an application.
-
-
-
-.. _v4l2-auto-focus-range:
-
-``V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_RANGE``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_auto_focus_range -
-    Determines auto focus distance range for which lens may be adjusted.
-
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{6.5cm}|p{11.0cm}|
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_AUTO_FOCUS_RANGE_AUTO``
-      - The camera automatically selects the focus range.
-    * - ``V4L2_AUTO_FOCUS_RANGE_NORMAL``
-      - Normal distance range, limited for best automatic focus
-	performance.
-    * - ``V4L2_AUTO_FOCUS_RANGE_MACRO``
-      - Macro (close-up) auto focus. The camera will use its minimum
-	possible distance for auto focus.
-    * - ``V4L2_AUTO_FOCUS_RANGE_INFINITY``
-      - The lens is set to focus on an object at infinite distance.
-
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_ZOOM_ABSOLUTE (integer)``
-    Specify the objective lens focal length as an absolute value. The
-    zoom unit is driver-specific and its value should be a positive
-    integer.
-
-``V4L2_CID_ZOOM_RELATIVE (integer)``
-    Specify the objective lens focal length relatively to the current
-    value. Positive values move the zoom lens group towards the
-    telephoto direction, negative values towards the wide-angle
-    direction. The zoom unit is driver-specific. This is a write-only
-    control.
-
-``V4L2_CID_ZOOM_CONTINUOUS (integer)``
-    Move the objective lens group at the specified speed until it
-    reaches physical device limits or until an explicit request to stop
-    the movement. A positive value moves the zoom lens group towards the
-    telephoto direction. A value of zero stops the zoom lens group
-    movement. A negative value moves the zoom lens group towards the
-    wide-angle direction. The zoom speed unit is driver-specific.
-
-``V4L2_CID_IRIS_ABSOLUTE (integer)``
-    This control sets the camera's aperture to the specified value. The
-    unit is undefined. Larger values open the iris wider, smaller values
-    close it.
-
-``V4L2_CID_IRIS_RELATIVE (integer)``
-    This control modifies the camera's aperture by the specified amount.
-    The unit is undefined. Positive values open the iris one step
-    further, negative values close it one step further. This is a
-    write-only control.
-
-``V4L2_CID_PRIVACY (boolean)``
-    Prevent video from being acquired by the camera. When this control
-    is set to ``TRUE`` (1), no image can be captured by the camera.
-    Common means to enforce privacy are mechanical obturation of the
-    sensor and firmware image processing, but the device is not
-    restricted to these methods. Devices that implement the privacy
-    control must support read access and may support write access.
-
-``V4L2_CID_BAND_STOP_FILTER (integer)``
-    Switch the band-stop filter of a camera sensor on or off, or specify
-    its strength. Such band-stop filters can be used, for example, to
-    filter out the fluorescent light component.
-
-.. _v4l2-auto-n-preset-white-balance:
-
-``V4L2_CID_AUTO_N_PRESET_WHITE_BALANCE``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_auto_n_preset_white_balance -
-    Sets white balance to automatic, manual or a preset. The presets
-    determine color temperature of the light as a hint to the camera for
-    white balance adjustments resulting in most accurate color
-    representation. The following white balance presets are listed in
-    order of increasing color temperature.
-
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{7.0 cm}|p{10.5cm}|
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_MANUAL``
-      - Manual white balance.
-    * - ``V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_AUTO``
-      - Automatic white balance adjustments.
-    * - ``V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_INCANDESCENT``
-      - White balance setting for incandescent (tungsten) lighting. It
-	generally cools down the colors and corresponds approximately to
-	2500...3500 K color temperature range.
-    * - ``V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_FLUORESCENT``
-      - White balance preset for fluorescent lighting. It corresponds
-	approximately to 4000...5000 K color temperature.
-    * - ``V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_FLUORESCENT_H``
-      - With this setting the camera will compensate for fluorescent H
-	lighting.
-    * - ``V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_HORIZON``
-      - White balance setting for horizon daylight. It corresponds
-	approximately to 5000 K color temperature.
-    * - ``V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_DAYLIGHT``
-      - White balance preset for daylight (with clear sky). It corresponds
-	approximately to 5000...6500 K color temperature.
-    * - ``V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_FLASH``
-      - With this setting the camera will compensate for the flash light.
-	It slightly warms up the colors and corresponds roughly to
-	5000...5500 K color temperature.
-    * - ``V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_CLOUDY``
-      - White balance preset for moderately overcast sky. This option
-	corresponds approximately to 6500...8000 K color temperature
-	range.
-    * - ``V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_SHADE``
-      - White balance preset for shade or heavily overcast sky. It
-	corresponds approximately to 9000...10000 K color temperature.
-
-
-
-.. _v4l2-wide-dynamic-range:
-
-``V4L2_CID_WIDE_DYNAMIC_RANGE (boolean)``
-    Enables or disables the camera's wide dynamic range feature. This
-    feature allows to obtain clear images in situations where intensity
-    of the illumination varies significantly throughout the scene, i.e.
-    there are simultaneously very dark and very bright areas. It is most
-    commonly realized in cameras by combining two subsequent frames with
-    different exposure times.  [#f1]_
-
-.. _v4l2-image-stabilization:
-
-``V4L2_CID_IMAGE_STABILIZATION (boolean)``
-    Enables or disables image stabilization.
-
-``V4L2_CID_ISO_SENSITIVITY (integer menu)``
-    Determines ISO equivalent of an image sensor indicating the sensor's
-    sensitivity to light. The numbers are expressed in arithmetic scale,
-    as per :ref:`iso12232` standard, where doubling the sensor
-    sensitivity is represented by doubling the numerical ISO value.
-    Applications should interpret the values as standard ISO values
-    multiplied by 1000, e.g. control value 800 stands for ISO 0.8.
-    Drivers will usually support only a subset of standard ISO values.
-    The effect of setting this control while the
-    ``V4L2_CID_ISO_SENSITIVITY_AUTO`` control is set to a value other
-    than ``V4L2_CID_ISO_SENSITIVITY_MANUAL`` is undefined, drivers
-    should ignore such requests.
-
-.. _v4l2-iso-sensitivity-auto-type:
-
-``V4L2_CID_ISO_SENSITIVITY_AUTO``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_iso_sensitivity_type -
-    Enables or disables automatic ISO sensitivity adjustments.
-
-
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_CID_ISO_SENSITIVITY_MANUAL``
-      - Manual ISO sensitivity.
-    * - ``V4L2_CID_ISO_SENSITIVITY_AUTO``
-      - Automatic ISO sensitivity adjustments.
-
-
-
-.. _v4l2-scene-mode:
-
-``V4L2_CID_SCENE_MODE``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_scene_mode -
-    This control allows to select scene programs as the camera automatic
-    modes optimized for common shooting scenes. Within these modes the
-    camera determines best exposure, aperture, focusing, light metering,
-    white balance and equivalent sensitivity. The controls of those
-    parameters are influenced by the scene mode control. An exact
-    behavior in each mode is subject to the camera specification.
-
-    When the scene mode feature is not used, this control should be set
-    to ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_NONE`` to make sure the other possibly related
-    controls are accessible. The following scene programs are defined:
-
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{6.0cm}|p{11.5cm}|
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_NONE``
-      - The scene mode feature is disabled.
-    * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_BACKLIGHT``
-      - Backlight. Compensates for dark shadows when light is coming from
-	behind a subject, also by automatically turning on the flash.
-    * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_BEACH_SNOW``
-      - Beach and snow. This mode compensates for all-white or bright
-	scenes, which tend to look gray and low contrast, when camera's
-	automatic exposure is based on an average scene brightness. To
-	compensate, this mode automatically slightly overexposes the
-	frames. The white balance may also be adjusted to compensate for
-	the fact that reflected snow looks bluish rather than white.
-    * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_CANDLELIGHT``
-      - Candle light. The camera generally raises the ISO sensitivity and
-	lowers the shutter speed. This mode compensates for relatively
-	close subject in the scene. The flash is disabled in order to
-	preserve the ambiance of the light.
-    * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_DAWN_DUSK``
-      - Dawn and dusk. Preserves the colors seen in low natural light
-	before dusk and after down. The camera may turn off the flash, and
-	automatically focus at infinity. It will usually boost saturation
-	and lower the shutter speed.
-    * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_FALL_COLORS``
-      - Fall colors. Increases saturation and adjusts white balance for
-	color enhancement. Pictures of autumn leaves get saturated reds
-	and yellows.
-    * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_FIREWORKS``
-      - Fireworks. Long exposure times are used to capture the expanding
-	burst of light from a firework. The camera may invoke image
-	stabilization.
-    * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_LANDSCAPE``
-      - Landscape. The camera may choose a small aperture to provide deep
-	depth of field and long exposure duration to help capture detail
-	in dim light conditions. The focus is fixed at infinity. Suitable
-	for distant and wide scenery.
-    * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_NIGHT``
-      - Night, also known as Night Landscape. Designed for low light
-	conditions, it preserves detail in the dark areas without blowing
-	out bright objects. The camera generally sets itself to a
-	medium-to-high ISO sensitivity, with a relatively long exposure
-	time, and turns flash off. As such, there will be increased image
-	noise and the possibility of blurred image.
-    * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_PARTY_INDOOR``
-      - Party and indoor. Designed to capture indoor scenes that are lit
-	by indoor background lighting as well as the flash. The camera
-	usually increases ISO sensitivity, and adjusts exposure for the
-	low light conditions.
-    * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_PORTRAIT``
-      - Portrait. The camera adjusts the aperture so that the depth of
-	field is reduced, which helps to isolate the subject against a
-	smooth background. Most cameras recognize the presence of faces in
-	the scene and focus on them. The color hue is adjusted to enhance
-	skin tones. The intensity of the flash is often reduced.
-    * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_SPORTS``
-      - Sports. Significantly increases ISO and uses a fast shutter speed
-	to freeze motion of rapidly-moving subjects. Increased image noise
-	may be seen in this mode.
-    * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_SUNSET``
-      - Sunset. Preserves deep hues seen in sunsets and sunrises. It bumps
-	up the saturation.
-    * - ``V4L2_SCENE_MODE_TEXT``
-      - Text. It applies extra contrast and sharpness, it is typically a
-	black-and-white mode optimized for readability. Automatic focus
-	may be switched to close-up mode and this setting may also involve
-	some lens-distortion correction.
-
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_3A_LOCK (bitmask)``
-    This control locks or unlocks the automatic focus, exposure and
-    white balance. The automatic adjustments can be paused independently
-    by setting the corresponding lock bit to 1. The camera then retains
-    the settings until the lock bit is cleared. The following lock bits
-    are defined:
-
-    When a given algorithm is not enabled, drivers should ignore
-    requests to lock it and should return no error. An example might be
-    an application setting bit ``V4L2_LOCK_WHITE_BALANCE`` when the
-    ``V4L2_CID_AUTO_WHITE_BALANCE`` control is set to ``FALSE``. The
-    value of this control may be changed by exposure, white balance or
-    focus controls.
-
-
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_LOCK_EXPOSURE``
-      - Automatic exposure adjustments lock.
-    * - ``V4L2_LOCK_WHITE_BALANCE``
-      - Automatic white balance adjustments lock.
-    * - ``V4L2_LOCK_FOCUS``
-      - Automatic focus lock.
-
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_PAN_SPEED (integer)``
-    This control turns the camera horizontally at the specific speed.
-    The unit is undefined. A positive value moves the camera to the
-    right (clockwise when viewed from above), a negative value to the
-    left. A value of zero stops the motion if one is in progress and has
-    no effect otherwise.
-
-``V4L2_CID_TILT_SPEED (integer)``
-    This control turns the camera vertically at the specified speed. The
-    unit is undefined. A positive value moves the camera up, a negative
-    value down. A value of zero stops the motion if one is in progress
-    and has no effect otherwise.
-
-
-.. _fm-tx-controls:
-
-FM Transmitter Control Reference
-================================
-
-The FM Transmitter (FM_TX) class includes controls for common features
-of FM transmissions capable devices. Currently this class includes
-parameters for audio compression, pilot tone generation, audio deviation
-limiter, RDS transmission and tuning power features.
-
-
-.. _fm-tx-control-id:
-
-FM_TX Control IDs
------------------
-
-``V4L2_CID_FM_TX_CLASS (class)``
-    The FM_TX class descriptor. Calling
-    :ref:`VIDIOC_QUERYCTRL` for this control will
-    return a description of this control class.
-
-``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_DEVIATION (integer)``
-    Configures RDS signal frequency deviation level in Hz. The range and
-    step are driver-specific.
-
-``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_PI (integer)``
-    Sets the RDS Programme Identification field for transmission.
-
-``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_PTY (integer)``
-    Sets the RDS Programme Type field for transmission. This encodes up
-    to 31 pre-defined programme types.
-
-``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_PS_NAME (string)``
-    Sets the Programme Service name (PS_NAME) for transmission. It is
-    intended for static display on a receiver. It is the primary aid to
-    listeners in programme service identification and selection. In
-    Annex E of :ref:`iec62106`, the RDS specification, there is a full
-    description of the correct character encoding for Programme Service
-    name strings. Also from RDS specification, PS is usually a single
-    eight character text. However, it is also possible to find receivers
-    which can scroll strings sized as 8 x N characters. So, this control
-    must be configured with steps of 8 characters. The result is it must
-    always contain a string with size multiple of 8.
-
-``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_RADIO_TEXT (string)``
-    Sets the Radio Text info for transmission. It is a textual
-    description of what is being broadcasted. RDS Radio Text can be
-    applied when broadcaster wishes to transmit longer PS names,
-    programme-related information or any other text. In these cases,
-    RadioText should be used in addition to ``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_PS_NAME``.
-    The encoding for Radio Text strings is also fully described in Annex
-    E of :ref:`iec62106`. The length of Radio Text strings depends on
-    which RDS Block is being used to transmit it, either 32 (2A block)
-    or 64 (2B block). However, it is also possible to find receivers
-    which can scroll strings sized as 32 x N or 64 x N characters. So,
-    this control must be configured with steps of 32 or 64 characters.
-    The result is it must always contain a string with size multiple of
-    32 or 64.
-
-``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_MONO_STEREO (boolean)``
-    Sets the Mono/Stereo bit of the Decoder Identification code. If set,
-    then the audio was recorded as stereo.
-
-``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_ARTIFICIAL_HEAD (boolean)``
-    Sets the
-    `Artificial Head <http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Artificial_head>`__
-    bit of the Decoder Identification code. If set, then the audio was
-    recorded using an artificial head.
-
-``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_COMPRESSED (boolean)``
-    Sets the Compressed bit of the Decoder Identification code. If set,
-    then the audio is compressed.
-
-``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_DYNAMIC_PTY (boolean)``
-    Sets the Dynamic PTY bit of the Decoder Identification code. If set,
-    then the PTY code is dynamically switched.
-
-``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_TRAFFIC_ANNOUNCEMENT (boolean)``
-    If set, then a traffic announcement is in progress.
-
-``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_TRAFFIC_PROGRAM (boolean)``
-    If set, then the tuned programme carries traffic announcements.
-
-``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_MUSIC_SPEECH (boolean)``
-    If set, then this channel broadcasts music. If cleared, then it
-    broadcasts speech. If the transmitter doesn't make this distinction,
-    then it should be set.
-
-``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_ALT_FREQS_ENABLE (boolean)``
-    If set, then transmit alternate frequencies.
-
-``V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_ALT_FREQS (__u32 array)``
-    The alternate frequencies in kHz units. The RDS standard allows for
-    up to 25 frequencies to be defined. Drivers may support fewer
-    frequencies so check the array size.
-
-``V4L2_CID_AUDIO_LIMITER_ENABLED (boolean)``
-    Enables or disables the audio deviation limiter feature. The limiter
-    is useful when trying to maximize the audio volume, minimize
-    receiver-generated distortion and prevent overmodulation.
-
-``V4L2_CID_AUDIO_LIMITER_RELEASE_TIME (integer)``
-    Sets the audio deviation limiter feature release time. Unit is in
-    useconds. Step and range are driver-specific.
-
-``V4L2_CID_AUDIO_LIMITER_DEVIATION (integer)``
-    Configures audio frequency deviation level in Hz. The range and step
-    are driver-specific.
-
-``V4L2_CID_AUDIO_COMPRESSION_ENABLED (boolean)``
-    Enables or disables the audio compression feature. This feature
-    amplifies signals below the threshold by a fixed gain and compresses
-    audio signals above the threshold by the ratio of Threshold/(Gain +
-    Threshold).
-
-``V4L2_CID_AUDIO_COMPRESSION_GAIN (integer)``
-    Sets the gain for audio compression feature. It is a dB value. The
-    range and step are driver-specific.
-
-``V4L2_CID_AUDIO_COMPRESSION_THRESHOLD (integer)``
-    Sets the threshold level for audio compression freature. It is a dB
-    value. The range and step are driver-specific.
-
-``V4L2_CID_AUDIO_COMPRESSION_ATTACK_TIME (integer)``
-    Sets the attack time for audio compression feature. It is a useconds
-    value. The range and step are driver-specific.
-
-``V4L2_CID_AUDIO_COMPRESSION_RELEASE_TIME (integer)``
-    Sets the release time for audio compression feature. It is a
-    useconds value. The range and step are driver-specific.
-
-``V4L2_CID_PILOT_TONE_ENABLED (boolean)``
-    Enables or disables the pilot tone generation feature.
-
-``V4L2_CID_PILOT_TONE_DEVIATION (integer)``
-    Configures pilot tone frequency deviation level. Unit is in Hz. The
-    range and step are driver-specific.
-
-``V4L2_CID_PILOT_TONE_FREQUENCY (integer)``
-    Configures pilot tone frequency value. Unit is in Hz. The range and
-    step are driver-specific.
-
-``V4L2_CID_TUNE_PREEMPHASIS``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_preemphasis -
-    Configures the pre-emphasis value for broadcasting. A pre-emphasis
-    filter is applied to the broadcast to accentuate the high audio
-    frequencies. Depending on the region, a time constant of either 50
-    or 75 useconds is used. The enum v4l2_preemphasis defines possible
-    values for pre-emphasis. Here they are:
-
-
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_PREEMPHASIS_DISABLED``
-      - No pre-emphasis is applied.
-    * - ``V4L2_PREEMPHASIS_50_uS``
-      - A pre-emphasis of 50 uS is used.
-    * - ``V4L2_PREEMPHASIS_75_uS``
-      - A pre-emphasis of 75 uS is used.
-
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_TUNE_POWER_LEVEL (integer)``
-    Sets the output power level for signal transmission. Unit is in
-    dBuV. Range and step are driver-specific.
-
-``V4L2_CID_TUNE_ANTENNA_CAPACITOR (integer)``
-    This selects the value of antenna tuning capacitor manually or
-    automatically if set to zero. Unit, range and step are
-    driver-specific.
-
-For more details about RDS specification, refer to :ref:`iec62106`
-document, from CENELEC.
-
-
-.. _flash-controls:
-
-Flash Control Reference
-=======================
-
-The V4L2 flash controls are intended to provide generic access to flash
-controller devices. Flash controller devices are typically used in
-digital cameras.
-
-The interface can support both LED and xenon flash devices. As of
-writing this, there is no xenon flash driver using this interface.
-
-
-.. _flash-controls-use-cases:
-
-Supported use cases
--------------------
-
-
-Unsynchronised LED flash (software strobe)
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-Unsynchronised LED flash is controlled directly by the host as the
-sensor. The flash must be enabled by the host before the exposure of the
-image starts and disabled once it ends. The host is fully responsible
-for the timing of the flash.
-
-Example of such device: Nokia N900.
-
-
-Synchronised LED flash (hardware strobe)
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-The synchronised LED flash is pre-programmed by the host (power and
-timeout) but controlled by the sensor through a strobe signal from the
-sensor to the flash.
-
-The sensor controls the flash duration and timing. This information
-typically must be made available to the sensor.
-
-
-LED flash as torch
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-LED flash may be used as torch in conjunction with another use case
-involving camera or individually.
-
-
-.. _flash-control-id:
-
-Flash Control IDs
-"""""""""""""""""
-
-``V4L2_CID_FLASH_CLASS (class)``
-    The FLASH class descriptor.
-
-``V4L2_CID_FLASH_LED_MODE (menu)``
-    Defines the mode of the flash LED, the high-power white LED attached
-    to the flash controller. Setting this control may not be possible in
-    presence of some faults. See V4L2_CID_FLASH_FAULT.
-
-
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_NONE``
-      - Off.
-    * - ``V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_FLASH``
-      - Flash mode.
-    * - ``V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_TORCH``
-      - Torch mode. See V4L2_CID_FLASH_TORCH_INTENSITY.
-
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE_SOURCE (menu)``
-    Defines the source of the flash LED strobe.
-
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{7.0cm}|p{10.5cm}|
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_FLASH_STROBE_SOURCE_SOFTWARE``
-      - The flash strobe is triggered by using the
-	V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE control.
-    * - ``V4L2_FLASH_STROBE_SOURCE_EXTERNAL``
-      - The flash strobe is triggered by an external source. Typically
-	this is a sensor, which makes it possible to synchronises the
-	flash strobe start to exposure start.
-
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE (button)``
-    Strobe flash. Valid when V4L2_CID_FLASH_LED_MODE is set to
-    V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_FLASH and V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE_SOURCE
-    is set to V4L2_FLASH_STROBE_SOURCE_SOFTWARE. Setting this
-    control may not be possible in presence of some faults. See
-    V4L2_CID_FLASH_FAULT.
-
-``V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE_STOP (button)``
-    Stop flash strobe immediately.
-
-``V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE_STATUS (boolean)``
-    Strobe status: whether the flash is strobing at the moment or not.
-    This is a read-only control.
-
-``V4L2_CID_FLASH_TIMEOUT (integer)``
-    Hardware timeout for flash. The flash strobe is stopped after this
-    period of time has passed from the start of the strobe.
-
-``V4L2_CID_FLASH_INTENSITY (integer)``
-    Intensity of the flash strobe when the flash LED is in flash mode
-    (V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_FLASH). The unit should be milliamps (mA)
-    if possible.
-
-``V4L2_CID_FLASH_TORCH_INTENSITY (integer)``
-    Intensity of the flash LED in torch mode
-    (V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_TORCH). The unit should be milliamps (mA)
-    if possible. Setting this control may not be possible in presence of
-    some faults. See V4L2_CID_FLASH_FAULT.
-
-``V4L2_CID_FLASH_INDICATOR_INTENSITY (integer)``
-    Intensity of the indicator LED. The indicator LED may be fully
-    independent of the flash LED. The unit should be microamps (uA) if
-    possible.
-
-``V4L2_CID_FLASH_FAULT (bitmask)``
-    Faults related to the flash. The faults tell about specific problems
-    in the flash chip itself or the LEDs attached to it. Faults may
-    prevent further use of some of the flash controls. In particular,
-    V4L2_CID_FLASH_LED_MODE is set to V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_NONE
-    if the fault affects the flash LED. Exactly which faults have such
-    an effect is chip dependent. Reading the faults resets the control
-    and returns the chip to a usable state if possible.
-
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{8.0cm}|p{9.5cm}|
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_OVER_VOLTAGE``
-      - Flash controller voltage to the flash LED has exceeded the limit
-	specific to the flash controller.
-    * - ``V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_TIMEOUT``
-      - The flash strobe was still on when the timeout set by the user ---
-	V4L2_CID_FLASH_TIMEOUT control --- has expired. Not all flash
-	controllers may set this in all such conditions.
-    * - ``V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_OVER_TEMPERATURE``
-      - The flash controller has overheated.
-    * - ``V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_SHORT_CIRCUIT``
-      - The short circuit protection of the flash controller has been
-	triggered.
-    * - ``V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_OVER_CURRENT``
-      - Current in the LED power supply has exceeded the limit specific to
-	the flash controller.
-    * - ``V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_INDICATOR``
-      - The flash controller has detected a short or open circuit
-	condition on the indicator LED.
-    * - ``V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_UNDER_VOLTAGE``
-      - Flash controller voltage to the flash LED has been below the
-	minimum limit specific to the flash controller.
-    * - ``V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_INPUT_VOLTAGE``
-      - The input voltage of the flash controller is below the limit under
-	which strobing the flash at full current will not be possible.The
-	condition persists until this flag is no longer set.
-    * - ``V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_LED_OVER_TEMPERATURE``
-      - The temperature of the LED has exceeded its allowed upper limit.
-
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_FLASH_CHARGE (boolean)``
-    Enable or disable charging of the xenon flash capacitor.
-
-``V4L2_CID_FLASH_READY (boolean)``
-    Is the flash ready to strobe? Xenon flashes require their capacitors
-    charged before strobing. LED flashes often require a cooldown period
-    after strobe during which another strobe will not be possible. This
-    is a read-only control.
-
-
-.. _jpeg-controls:
-
-JPEG Control Reference
-======================
-
-The JPEG class includes controls for common features of JPEG encoders
-and decoders. Currently it includes features for codecs implementing
-progressive baseline DCT compression process with Huffman entrophy
-coding.
-
-
-.. _jpeg-control-id:
-
-JPEG Control IDs
-----------------
-
-``V4L2_CID_JPEG_CLASS (class)``
-    The JPEG class descriptor. Calling
-    :ref:`VIDIOC_QUERYCTRL` for this control will
-    return a description of this control class.
-
-``V4L2_CID_JPEG_CHROMA_SUBSAMPLING (menu)``
-    The chroma subsampling factors describe how each component of an
-    input image is sampled, in respect to maximum sample rate in each
-    spatial dimension. See :ref:`itu-t81`, clause A.1.1. for more
-    details. The ``V4L2_CID_JPEG_CHROMA_SUBSAMPLING`` control determines
-    how Cb and Cr components are downsampled after converting an input
-    image from RGB to Y'CbCr color space.
-
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{7.0cm}|p{10.5cm}|
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_JPEG_CHROMA_SUBSAMPLING_444``
-      - No chroma subsampling, each pixel has Y, Cr and Cb values.
-    * - ``V4L2_JPEG_CHROMA_SUBSAMPLING_422``
-      - Horizontally subsample Cr, Cb components by a factor of 2.
-    * - ``V4L2_JPEG_CHROMA_SUBSAMPLING_420``
-      - Subsample Cr, Cb components horizontally and vertically by 2.
-    * - ``V4L2_JPEG_CHROMA_SUBSAMPLING_411``
-      - Horizontally subsample Cr, Cb components by a factor of 4.
-    * - ``V4L2_JPEG_CHROMA_SUBSAMPLING_410``
-      - Subsample Cr, Cb components horizontally by 4 and vertically by 2.
-    * - ``V4L2_JPEG_CHROMA_SUBSAMPLING_GRAY``
-      - Use only luminance component.
-
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_JPEG_RESTART_INTERVAL (integer)``
-    The restart interval determines an interval of inserting RSTm
-    markers (m = 0..7). The purpose of these markers is to additionally
-    reinitialize the encoder process, in order to process blocks of an
-    image independently. For the lossy compression processes the restart
-    interval unit is MCU (Minimum Coded Unit) and its value is contained
-    in DRI (Define Restart Interval) marker. If
-    ``V4L2_CID_JPEG_RESTART_INTERVAL`` control is set to 0, DRI and RSTm
-    markers will not be inserted.
-
-.. _jpeg-quality-control:
-
-``V4L2_CID_JPEG_COMPRESSION_QUALITY (integer)``
-    ``V4L2_CID_JPEG_COMPRESSION_QUALITY`` control determines trade-off
-    between image quality and size. It provides simpler method for
-    applications to control image quality, without a need for direct
-    reconfiguration of luminance and chrominance quantization tables. In
-    cases where a driver uses quantization tables configured directly by
-    an application, using interfaces defined elsewhere,
-    ``V4L2_CID_JPEG_COMPRESSION_QUALITY`` control should be set by
-    driver to 0.
-
-    The value range of this control is driver-specific. Only positive,
-    non-zero values are meaningful. The recommended range is 1 - 100,
-    where larger values correspond to better image quality.
-
-.. _jpeg-active-marker-control:
-
-``V4L2_CID_JPEG_ACTIVE_MARKER (bitmask)``
-    Specify which JPEG markers are included in compressed stream. This
-    control is valid only for encoders.
-
-
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_JPEG_ACTIVE_MARKER_APP0``
-      - Application data segment APP\ :sub:`0`.
-    * - ``V4L2_JPEG_ACTIVE_MARKER_APP1``
-      - Application data segment APP\ :sub:`1`.
-    * - ``V4L2_JPEG_ACTIVE_MARKER_COM``
-      - Comment segment.
-    * - ``V4L2_JPEG_ACTIVE_MARKER_DQT``
-      - Quantization tables segment.
-    * - ``V4L2_JPEG_ACTIVE_MARKER_DHT``
-      - Huffman tables segment.
-
-
-
-For more details about JPEG specification, refer to :ref:`itu-t81`,
-:ref:`jfif`, :ref:`w3c-jpeg-jfif`.
-
-
-.. _image-source-controls:
-
-Image Source Control Reference
-==============================
-
-The Image Source control class is intended for low-level control of
-image source devices such as image sensors. The devices feature an
-analogue to digital converter and a bus transmitter to transmit the
-image data out of the device.
-
-
-.. _image-source-control-id:
-
-Image Source Control IDs
-------------------------
-
-``V4L2_CID_IMAGE_SOURCE_CLASS (class)``
-    The IMAGE_SOURCE class descriptor.
-
-``V4L2_CID_VBLANK (integer)``
-    Vertical blanking. The idle period after every frame during which no
-    image data is produced. The unit of vertical blanking is a line.
-    Every line has length of the image width plus horizontal blanking at
-    the pixel rate defined by ``V4L2_CID_PIXEL_RATE`` control in the
-    same sub-device.
-
-``V4L2_CID_HBLANK (integer)``
-    Horizontal blanking. The idle period after every line of image data
-    during which no image data is produced. The unit of horizontal
-    blanking is pixels.
-
-``V4L2_CID_ANALOGUE_GAIN (integer)``
-    Analogue gain is gain affecting all colour components in the pixel
-    matrix. The gain operation is performed in the analogue domain
-    before A/D conversion.
-
-``V4L2_CID_TEST_PATTERN_RED (integer)``
-    Test pattern red colour component.
-
-``V4L2_CID_TEST_PATTERN_GREENR (integer)``
-    Test pattern green (next to red) colour component.
-
-``V4L2_CID_TEST_PATTERN_BLUE (integer)``
-    Test pattern blue colour component.
-
-``V4L2_CID_TEST_PATTERN_GREENB (integer)``
-    Test pattern green (next to blue) colour component.
-
-
-.. _image-process-controls:
-
-Image Process Control Reference
-===============================
-
-The Image Process control class is intended for low-level control of
-image processing functions. Unlike ``V4L2_CID_IMAGE_SOURCE_CLASS``, the
-controls in this class affect processing the image, and do not control
-capturing of it.
-
-
-.. _image-process-control-id:
-
-Image Process Control IDs
--------------------------
-
-``V4L2_CID_IMAGE_PROC_CLASS (class)``
-    The IMAGE_PROC class descriptor.
-
-``V4L2_CID_LINK_FREQ (integer menu)``
-    Data bus frequency. Together with the media bus pixel code, bus type
-    (clock cycles per sample), the data bus frequency defines the pixel
-    rate (``V4L2_CID_PIXEL_RATE``) in the pixel array (or possibly
-    elsewhere, if the device is not an image sensor). The frame rate can
-    be calculated from the pixel clock, image width and height and
-    horizontal and vertical blanking. While the pixel rate control may
-    be defined elsewhere than in the subdev containing the pixel array,
-    the frame rate cannot be obtained from that information. This is
-    because only on the pixel array it can be assumed that the vertical
-    and horizontal blanking information is exact: no other blanking is
-    allowed in the pixel array. The selection of frame rate is performed
-    by selecting the desired horizontal and vertical blanking. The unit
-    of this control is Hz.
-
-``V4L2_CID_PIXEL_RATE (64-bit integer)``
-    Pixel rate in the source pads of the subdev. This control is
-    read-only and its unit is pixels / second.
-
-``V4L2_CID_TEST_PATTERN (menu)``
-    Some capture/display/sensor devices have the capability to generate
-    test pattern images. These hardware specific test patterns can be
-    used to test if a device is working properly.
-
-``V4L2_CID_DEINTERLACING_MODE (menu)``
-    The video deinterlacing mode (such as Bob, Weave, ...). The menu items are
-    driver specific and are documented in :ref:`v4l-drivers`.
-
-``V4L2_CID_DIGITAL_GAIN (integer)``
-    Digital gain is the value by which all colour components
-    are multiplied by. Typically the digital gain applied is the
-    control value divided by e.g. 0x100, meaning that to get no
-    digital gain the control value needs to be 0x100. The no-gain
-    configuration is also typically the default.
-
-
-.. _dv-controls:
-
-Digital Video Control Reference
-===============================
-
-The Digital Video control class is intended to control receivers and
-transmitters for `VGA <http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vga>`__,
-`DVI <http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Digital_Visual_Interface>`__
-(Digital Visual Interface), HDMI (:ref:`hdmi`) and DisplayPort
-(:ref:`dp`). These controls are generally expected to be private to
-the receiver or transmitter subdevice that implements them, so they are
-only exposed on the ``/dev/v4l-subdev*`` device node.
-
-.. note::
-
-   Note that these devices can have multiple input or output pads which are
-   hooked up to e.g. HDMI connectors. Even though the subdevice will
-   receive or transmit video from/to only one of those pads, the other pads
-   can still be active when it comes to EDID (Extended Display
-   Identification Data, :ref:`vesaedid`) and HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital
-   Content Protection System, :ref:`hdcp`) processing, allowing the
-   device to do the fairly slow EDID/HDCP handling in advance. This allows
-   for quick switching between connectors.
-
-These pads appear in several of the controls in this section as
-bitmasks, one bit for each pad. Bit 0 corresponds to pad 0, bit 1 to pad
-1, etc. The maximum value of the control is the set of valid pads.
-
-
-.. _dv-control-id:
-
-Digital Video Control IDs
--------------------------
-
-``V4L2_CID_DV_CLASS (class)``
-    The Digital Video class descriptor.
-
-``V4L2_CID_DV_TX_HOTPLUG (bitmask)``
-    Many connectors have a hotplug pin which is high if EDID information
-    is available from the source. This control shows the state of the
-    hotplug pin as seen by the transmitter. Each bit corresponds to an
-    output pad on the transmitter. If an output pad does not have an
-    associated hotplug pin, then the bit for that pad will be 0. This
-    read-only control is applicable to DVI-D, HDMI and DisplayPort
-    connectors.
-
-``V4L2_CID_DV_TX_RXSENSE (bitmask)``
-    Rx Sense is the detection of pull-ups on the TMDS clock lines. This
-    normally means that the sink has left/entered standby (i.e. the
-    transmitter can sense that the receiver is ready to receive video).
-    Each bit corresponds to an output pad on the transmitter. If an
-    output pad does not have an associated Rx Sense, then the bit for
-    that pad will be 0. This read-only control is applicable to DVI-D
-    and HDMI devices.
-
-``V4L2_CID_DV_TX_EDID_PRESENT (bitmask)``
-    When the transmitter sees the hotplug signal from the receiver it
-    will attempt to read the EDID. If set, then the transmitter has read
-    at least the first block (= 128 bytes). Each bit corresponds to an
-    output pad on the transmitter. If an output pad does not support
-    EDIDs, then the bit for that pad will be 0. This read-only control
-    is applicable to VGA, DVI-A/D, HDMI and DisplayPort connectors.
-
-``V4L2_CID_DV_TX_MODE``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_dv_tx_mode -
-    HDMI transmitters can transmit in DVI-D mode (just video) or in HDMI
-    mode (video + audio + auxiliary data). This control selects which
-    mode to use: V4L2_DV_TX_MODE_DVI_D or V4L2_DV_TX_MODE_HDMI.
-    This control is applicable to HDMI connectors.
-
-``V4L2_CID_DV_TX_RGB_RANGE``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_dv_rgb_range -
-    Select the quantization range for RGB output. V4L2_DV_RANGE_AUTO
-    follows the RGB quantization range specified in the standard for the
-    video interface (ie. :ref:`cea861` for HDMI).
-    V4L2_DV_RANGE_LIMITED and V4L2_DV_RANGE_FULL override the
-    standard to be compatible with sinks that have not implemented the
-    standard correctly (unfortunately quite common for HDMI and DVI-D).
-    Full range allows all possible values to be used whereas limited
-    range sets the range to (16 << (N-8)) - (235 << (N-8)) where N is
-    the number of bits per component. This control is applicable to VGA,
-    DVI-A/D, HDMI and DisplayPort connectors.
-
-``V4L2_CID_DV_TX_IT_CONTENT_TYPE``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_dv_it_content_type -
-    Configures the IT Content Type of the transmitted video. This
-    information is sent over HDMI and DisplayPort connectors as part of
-    the AVI InfoFrame. The term 'IT Content' is used for content that
-    originates from a computer as opposed to content from a TV broadcast
-    or an analog source. The enum v4l2_dv_it_content_type defines
-    the possible content types:
-
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{7.0cm}|p{10.5cm}|
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_DV_IT_CONTENT_TYPE_GRAPHICS``
-      - Graphics content. Pixel data should be passed unfiltered and
-	without analog reconstruction.
-    * - ``V4L2_DV_IT_CONTENT_TYPE_PHOTO``
-      - Photo content. The content is derived from digital still pictures.
-	The content should be passed through with minimal scaling and
-	picture enhancements.
-    * - ``V4L2_DV_IT_CONTENT_TYPE_CINEMA``
-      - Cinema content.
-    * - ``V4L2_DV_IT_CONTENT_TYPE_GAME``
-      - Game content. Audio and video latency should be minimized.
-    * - ``V4L2_DV_IT_CONTENT_TYPE_NO_ITC``
-      - No IT Content information is available and the ITC bit in the AVI
-	InfoFrame is set to 0.
-
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_DV_RX_POWER_PRESENT (bitmask)``
-    Detects whether the receiver receives power from the source (e.g.
-    HDMI carries 5V on one of the pins). This is often used to power an
-    eeprom which contains EDID information, such that the source can
-    read the EDID even if the sink is in standby/power off. Each bit
-    corresponds to an input pad on the receiver. If an input pad
-    cannot detect whether power is present, then the bit for that pad
-    will be 0. This read-only control is applicable to DVI-D, HDMI and
-    DisplayPort connectors.
-
-``V4L2_CID_DV_RX_RGB_RANGE``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_dv_rgb_range -
-    Select the quantization range for RGB input. V4L2_DV_RANGE_AUTO
-    follows the RGB quantization range specified in the standard for the
-    video interface (ie. :ref:`cea861` for HDMI).
-    V4L2_DV_RANGE_LIMITED and V4L2_DV_RANGE_FULL override the
-    standard to be compatible with sources that have not implemented the
-    standard correctly (unfortunately quite common for HDMI and DVI-D).
-    Full range allows all possible values to be used whereas limited
-    range sets the range to (16 << (N-8)) - (235 << (N-8)) where N is
-    the number of bits per component. This control is applicable to VGA,
-    DVI-A/D, HDMI and DisplayPort connectors.
-
-``V4L2_CID_DV_RX_IT_CONTENT_TYPE``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_dv_it_content_type -
-    Reads the IT Content Type of the received video. This information is
-    sent over HDMI and DisplayPort connectors as part of the AVI
-    InfoFrame. The term 'IT Content' is used for content that originates
-    from a computer as opposed to content from a TV broadcast or an
-    analog source. See ``V4L2_CID_DV_TX_IT_CONTENT_TYPE`` for the
-    available content types.
-
-
-.. _fm-rx-controls:
-
-FM Receiver Control Reference
-=============================
-
-The FM Receiver (FM_RX) class includes controls for common features of
-FM Reception capable devices.
-
-
-.. _fm-rx-control-id:
-
-FM_RX Control IDs
------------------
-
-``V4L2_CID_FM_RX_CLASS (class)``
-    The FM_RX class descriptor. Calling
-    :ref:`VIDIOC_QUERYCTRL` for this control will
-    return a description of this control class.
-
-``V4L2_CID_RDS_RECEPTION (boolean)``
-    Enables/disables RDS reception by the radio tuner
-
-``V4L2_CID_RDS_RX_PTY (integer)``
-    Gets RDS Programme Type field. This encodes up to 31 pre-defined
-    programme types.
-
-``V4L2_CID_RDS_RX_PS_NAME (string)``
-    Gets the Programme Service name (PS_NAME). It is intended for
-    static display on a receiver. It is the primary aid to listeners in
-    programme service identification and selection. In Annex E of
-    :ref:`iec62106`, the RDS specification, there is a full
-    description of the correct character encoding for Programme Service
-    name strings. Also from RDS specification, PS is usually a single
-    eight character text. However, it is also possible to find receivers
-    which can scroll strings sized as 8 x N characters. So, this control
-    must be configured with steps of 8 characters. The result is it must
-    always contain a string with size multiple of 8.
-
-``V4L2_CID_RDS_RX_RADIO_TEXT (string)``
-    Gets the Radio Text info. It is a textual description of what is
-    being broadcasted. RDS Radio Text can be applied when broadcaster
-    wishes to transmit longer PS names, programme-related information or
-    any other text. In these cases, RadioText can be used in addition to
-    ``V4L2_CID_RDS_RX_PS_NAME``. The encoding for Radio Text strings is
-    also fully described in Annex E of :ref:`iec62106`. The length of
-    Radio Text strings depends on which RDS Block is being used to
-    transmit it, either 32 (2A block) or 64 (2B block). However, it is
-    also possible to find receivers which can scroll strings sized as 32
-    x N or 64 x N characters. So, this control must be configured with
-    steps of 32 or 64 characters. The result is it must always contain a
-    string with size multiple of 32 or 64.
-
-``V4L2_CID_RDS_RX_TRAFFIC_ANNOUNCEMENT (boolean)``
-    If set, then a traffic announcement is in progress.
-
-``V4L2_CID_RDS_RX_TRAFFIC_PROGRAM (boolean)``
-    If set, then the tuned programme carries traffic announcements.
-
-``V4L2_CID_RDS_RX_MUSIC_SPEECH (boolean)``
-    If set, then this channel broadcasts music. If cleared, then it
-    broadcasts speech. If the transmitter doesn't make this distinction,
-    then it will be set.
-
-``V4L2_CID_TUNE_DEEMPHASIS``
-    (enum)
-
-enum v4l2_deemphasis -
-    Configures the de-emphasis value for reception. A de-emphasis filter
-    is applied to the broadcast to accentuate the high audio
-    frequencies. Depending on the region, a time constant of either 50
-    or 75 useconds is used. The enum v4l2_deemphasis defines possible
-    values for de-emphasis. Here they are:
-
-
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_DEEMPHASIS_DISABLED``
-      - No de-emphasis is applied.
-    * - ``V4L2_DEEMPHASIS_50_uS``
-      - A de-emphasis of 50 uS is used.
-    * - ``V4L2_DEEMPHASIS_75_uS``
-      - A de-emphasis of 75 uS is used.
-
-
-
-
-.. _detect-controls:
-
-Detect Control Reference
-========================
-
-The Detect class includes controls for common features of various motion
-or object detection capable devices.
-
-
-.. _detect-control-id:
-
-Detect Control IDs
-------------------
-
-``V4L2_CID_DETECT_CLASS (class)``
-    The Detect class descriptor. Calling
-    :ref:`VIDIOC_QUERYCTRL` for this control will
-    return a description of this control class.
-
-``V4L2_CID_DETECT_MD_MODE (menu)``
-    Sets the motion detection mode.
-
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{7.5cm}|p{10.0cm}|
-
-.. flat-table::
-    :header-rows:  0
-    :stub-columns: 0
-
-    * - ``V4L2_DETECT_MD_MODE_DISABLED``
-      - Disable motion detection.
-    * - ``V4L2_DETECT_MD_MODE_GLOBAL``
-      - Use a single motion detection threshold.
-    * - ``V4L2_DETECT_MD_MODE_THRESHOLD_GRID``
-      - The image is divided into a grid, each cell with its own motion
-	detection threshold. These thresholds are set through the
-	``V4L2_CID_DETECT_MD_THRESHOLD_GRID`` matrix control.
-    * - ``V4L2_DETECT_MD_MODE_REGION_GRID``
-      - The image is divided into a grid, each cell with its own region
-	value that specifies which per-region motion detection thresholds
-	should be used. Each region has its own thresholds. How these
-	per-region thresholds are set up is driver-specific. The region
-	values for the grid are set through the
-	``V4L2_CID_DETECT_MD_REGION_GRID`` matrix control.
-
-
-
-``V4L2_CID_DETECT_MD_GLOBAL_THRESHOLD (integer)``
-    Sets the global motion detection threshold to be used with the
-    ``V4L2_DETECT_MD_MODE_GLOBAL`` motion detection mode.
-
-``V4L2_CID_DETECT_MD_THRESHOLD_GRID (__u16 matrix)``
-    Sets the motion detection thresholds for each cell in the grid. To
-    be used with the ``V4L2_DETECT_MD_MODE_THRESHOLD_GRID`` motion
-    detection mode. Matrix element (0, 0) represents the cell at the
-    top-left of the grid.
-
-``V4L2_CID_DETECT_MD_REGION_GRID (__u8 matrix)``
-    Sets the motion detection region value for each cell in the grid. To
-    be used with the ``V4L2_DETECT_MD_MODE_REGION_GRID`` motion
-    detection mode. Matrix element (0, 0) represents the cell at the
-    top-left of the grid.
-
-
-.. _rf-tuner-controls:
-
-RF Tuner Control Reference
-==========================
-
-The RF Tuner (RF_TUNER) class includes controls for common features of
-devices having RF tuner.
-
-In this context, RF tuner is radio receiver circuit between antenna and
-demodulator. It receives radio frequency (RF) from the antenna and
-converts that received signal to lower intermediate frequency (IF) or
-baseband frequency (BB). Tuners that could do baseband output are often
-called Zero-IF tuners. Older tuners were typically simple PLL tuners
-inside a metal box, while newer ones are highly integrated chips
-without a metal box "silicon tuners". These controls are mostly
-applicable for new feature rich silicon tuners, just because older
-tuners does not have much adjustable features.
-
-For more information about RF tuners see
-`Tuner (radio) <http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tuner_%28radio%29>`__
-and `RF front end <http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/RF_front_end>`__
-from Wikipedia.
-
-
-.. _rf-tuner-control-id:
-
-RF_TUNER Control IDs
---------------------
-
-``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_CLASS (class)``
-    The RF_TUNER class descriptor. Calling
-    :ref:`VIDIOC_QUERYCTRL` for this control will
-    return a description of this control class.
-
-``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_BANDWIDTH_AUTO (boolean)``
-    Enables/disables tuner radio channel bandwidth configuration. In
-    automatic mode bandwidth configuration is performed by the driver.
-
-``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_BANDWIDTH (integer)``
-    Filter(s) on tuner signal path are used to filter signal according
-    to receiving party needs. Driver configures filters to fulfill
-    desired bandwidth requirement. Used when
-    V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_BANDWIDTH_AUTO is not set. Unit is in Hz. The
-    range and step are driver-specific.
-
-``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_LNA_GAIN_AUTO (boolean)``
-    Enables/disables LNA automatic gain control (AGC)
-
-``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_MIXER_GAIN_AUTO (boolean)``
-    Enables/disables mixer automatic gain control (AGC)
-
-``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_IF_GAIN_AUTO (boolean)``
-    Enables/disables IF automatic gain control (AGC)
-
-``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_RF_GAIN (integer)``
-    The RF amplifier is the very first amplifier on the receiver signal
-    path, just right after the antenna input. The difference between the
-    LNA gain and the RF gain in this document is that the LNA gain is
-    integrated in the tuner chip while the RF gain is a separate chip.
-    There may be both RF and LNA gain controls in the same device. The
-    range and step are driver-specific.
-
-``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_LNA_GAIN (integer)``
-    LNA (low noise amplifier) gain is first gain stage on the RF tuner
-    signal path. It is located very close to tuner antenna input. Used
-    when ``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_LNA_GAIN_AUTO`` is not set. See
-    ``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_RF_GAIN`` to understand how RF gain and LNA gain
-    differs from the each others. The range and step are
-    driver-specific.
-
-``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_MIXER_GAIN (integer)``
-    Mixer gain is second gain stage on the RF tuner signal path. It is
-    located inside mixer block, where RF signal is down-converted by the
-    mixer. Used when ``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_MIXER_GAIN_AUTO`` is not set.
-    The range and step are driver-specific.
-
-``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_IF_GAIN (integer)``
-    IF gain is last gain stage on the RF tuner signal path. It is
-    located on output of RF tuner. It controls signal level of
-    intermediate frequency output or baseband output. Used when
-    ``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_IF_GAIN_AUTO`` is not set. The range and step
-    are driver-specific.
-
-``V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_PLL_LOCK (boolean)``
-    Is synthesizer PLL locked? RF tuner is receiving given frequency
-    when that control is set. This is a read-only control.
-
-.. [#f1]
-   This control may be changed to a menu control in the future, if more
-   options are required.
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/field-order.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/field-order.rst
index 8415268d439c..d640e922a974 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/field-order.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/field-order.rst
@@ -64,7 +64,9 @@ enum v4l2_field
 
 .. c:type:: v4l2_field
 
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{6.6cm}|p{2.2cm}|p{8.7cm}|
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{5.8cm}|p{0.6cm}|p{11.1cm}|
+
+.. cssclass:: longtable
 
 .. flat-table::
     :header-rows:  0
@@ -73,12 +75,11 @@ enum v4l2_field
 
     * - ``V4L2_FIELD_ANY``
       - 0
-      - Applications request this field order when any one of the
-	``V4L2_FIELD_NONE``, ``V4L2_FIELD_TOP``, ``V4L2_FIELD_BOTTOM``, or
-	``V4L2_FIELD_INTERLACED`` formats is acceptable. Drivers choose
-	depending on hardware capabilities or e. g. the requested image
-	size, and return the actual field order. Drivers must never return
-	``V4L2_FIELD_ANY``. If multiple field orders are possible the
+      - Applications request this field order when any field format
+	is acceptable. Drivers choose depending on hardware capabilities or
+	e.g. the requested image size, and return the actual field order.
+	Drivers must never return ``V4L2_FIELD_ANY``.
+	If multiple field orders are possible the
 	driver must choose one of the possible field orders during
 	:ref:`VIDIOC_S_FMT <VIDIOC_G_FMT>` or
 	:ref:`VIDIOC_TRY_FMT <VIDIOC_G_FMT>`. struct
@@ -86,9 +87,8 @@ enum v4l2_field
 	``V4L2_FIELD_ANY``.
     * - ``V4L2_FIELD_NONE``
       - 1
-      - Images are in progressive format, not interlaced. The driver may
-	also indicate this order when it cannot distinguish between
-	``V4L2_FIELD_TOP`` and ``V4L2_FIELD_BOTTOM``.
+      - Images are in progressive (frame-based) format, not interlaced
+        (field-based).
     * - ``V4L2_FIELD_TOP``
       - 2
       - Images consist of the top (aka odd) field only.
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/meta-formats.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/meta-formats.rst
index 5f956fa784b7..b10ca9ee3968 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/meta-formats.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/meta-formats.rst
@@ -19,8 +19,8 @@ These formats are used for the :ref:`metadata` interface only.
 .. toctree::
     :maxdepth: 1
 
-    pixfmt-meta-intel-ipu3
     pixfmt-meta-d4xx
+    pixfmt-meta-intel-ipu3
     pixfmt-meta-uvc
     pixfmt-meta-vsp1-hgo
     pixfmt-meta-vsp1-hgt
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-compressed.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-compressed.rst
index e4c5e456df59..6c961cfb74da 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-compressed.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-compressed.rst
@@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Compressed Formats
       - 'MG2S'
       - MPEG-2 parsed slice data, as extracted from the MPEG-2 bitstream.
 	This format is adapted for stateless video decoders that implement a
-	MPEG-2 pipeline (using the :ref:`codec` and :ref:`media-request-api`).
+	MPEG-2 pipeline (using the :ref:`mem2mem` and :ref:`media-request-api`).
 	Metadata associated with the frame to decode is required to be passed
 	through the ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG2_SLICE_PARAMS`` control and
 	quantization matrices can optionally be specified through the
@@ -125,3 +125,9 @@ Compressed Formats
       - Video elementary stream using a codec based on the Fast Walsh Hadamard
         Transform. This codec is implemented by the vicodec ('Virtual Codec')
 	driver. See the codec-fwht.h header for more details.
+    * .. _V4L2-PIX-FMT-FWHT-STATELESS:
+
+      - ``V4L2_PIX_FMT_FWHT_STATELESS``
+      - 'SFWH'
+      - Same format as V4L2_PIX_FMT_FWHT but requires stateless codec implementation.
+	See the :ref:`associated Codec Control IDs <v4l2-mpeg-fwht>`.
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-meta-d4xx.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-meta-d4xx.rst
index 862e1f327150..87e8fd7d5d02 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-meta-d4xx.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-meta-d4xx.rst
@@ -36,13 +36,16 @@ per frame, therefore their headers cannot be larger than 255 bytes.
 Below are proprietary Microsoft style metadata types, used by D4xx cameras,
 where all fields are in little endian order:
 
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{5.0cm}|p{12.5cm}|
+
+
 .. flat-table:: D4xx metadata
-    :widths: 1 4
+    :widths: 1 2
     :header-rows:  1
     :stub-columns: 0
 
-    * - Field
-      - Description
+    * - **Field**
+      - **Description**
     * - :cspan:`1` *Depth Control*
     * - __u32 ID
       - 0x80000000
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-meta-intel-ipu3.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-meta-intel-ipu3.rst
index dc871006b41a..7fb54339f4a7 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-meta-intel-ipu3.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-meta-intel-ipu3.rst
@@ -1,4 +1,27 @@
-.. -*- coding: utf-8; mode: rst -*-
+.. This file is dual-licensed: you can use it either under the terms
+.. of the GPL 2.0 or the GFDL 1.1+ license, at your option. Note that this
+.. dual licensing only applies to this file, and not this project as a
+.. whole.
+..
+.. a) This file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+..    modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version
+..    2.0 as published by the Free Software Foundation.
+..
+..    This file is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+..    but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+..    MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+..    GNU General Public License version 2.0 for more details.
+..
+.. Or, alternatively,
+..
+.. b) Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
+..    document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License,
+..    Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software
+..    Foundation, with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts
+..    and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included at
+..    Documentation/media/uapi/fdl-appendix.rst.
+..
+.. TODO: replace it to GPL-2.0 OR GFDL-1.1-or-later WITH no-invariant-sections
 
 .. _v4l2-meta-fmt-params:
 .. _v4l2-meta-fmt-stat-3a:
@@ -7,21 +30,22 @@
 V4L2_META_FMT_IPU3_PARAMS ('ip3p'), V4L2_META_FMT_IPU3_3A ('ip3s')
 ******************************************************************
 
-.. c:type:: ipu3_uapi_stats_3a
+.. ipu3_uapi_stats_3a
 
 3A statistics
 =============
 
-For IPU3 ImgU, the 3A statistics accelerators collect different statistics over
-an input bayer frame. Those statistics, defined in data struct :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_stats_3a`,
-are obtained from "ipu3-imgu 3a stat" metadata capture video node, which are then
-passed to user space for statistics analysis using :c:type:`v4l2_meta_format` interface.
+The IPU3 ImgU 3A statistics accelerators collect different statistics over
+an input Bayer frame. Those statistics are obtained from the "ipu3-imgu [01] 3a
+stat" metadata capture video nodes, using the :c:type:`v4l2_meta_format`
+interface. They are formatted as described by the :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_stats_3a`
+structure.
 
 The statistics collected are AWB (Auto-white balance) RGBS (Red, Green, Blue and
 Saturation measure) cells, AWB filter response, AF (Auto-focus) filter response,
 and AE (Auto-exposure) histogram.
 
-struct :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_4a_config` saves configurable parameters for all above.
+The struct :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_4a_config` saves all configurable parameters.
 
 .. code-block:: c
 
@@ -37,105 +61,14 @@ struct :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_4a_config` saves configurable parameters for all above
 		struct ipu3_uapi_ff_status stats_3a_status;
 	};
 
-.. c:type:: ipu3_uapi_params
+.. ipu3_uapi_params
 
 Pipeline parameters
 ===================
 
-IPU3 pipeline has a number of image processing stages, each of which takes a
-set of parameters as input. The major stages of pipelines are shown here:
-
-Raw pixels -> Bayer Downscaling -> Optical Black Correction ->
-
-Linearization -> Lens Shading Correction -> White Balance / Exposure /
-
-Focus Apply -> Bayer Noise Reduction -> ANR -> Demosaicing -> Color
-
-Correction Matrix -> Gamma correction -> Color Space Conversion ->
-
-Chroma Down Scaling -> Chromatic Noise Reduction -> Total Color
-
-Correction -> XNR3 -> TNR -> DDR
-
-The table below presents a description of the above algorithms.
-
-======================== =======================================================
-Name			 Description
-======================== =======================================================
-Optical Black Correction Optical Black Correction block subtracts a pre-defined
-			 value from the respective pixel values to obtain better
-			 image quality.
-			 Defined in :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_obgrid_param`.
-Linearization		 This algo block uses linearization parameters to
-			 address non-linearity sensor effects. The Lookup table
-			 table is defined in
-			 :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_isp_lin_vmem_params`.
-SHD			 Lens shading correction is used to correct spatial
-			 non-uniformity of the pixel response due to optical
-			 lens shading. This is done by applying a different gain
-			 for each pixel. The gain, black level etc are
-			 configured in :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_shd_config_static`.
-BNR			 Bayer noise reduction block removes image noise by
-			 applying a bilateral filter.
-			 See :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_bnr_static_config` for details.
-ANR			 Advanced Noise Reduction is a block based algorithm
-			 that performs noise reduction in the Bayer domain. The
-			 convolution matrix etc can be found in
-			 :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_anr_config`.
-Demosaicing		 Demosaicing converts raw sensor data in Bayer format
-			 into RGB (Red, Green, Blue) presentation. Then add
-			 outputs of estimation of Y channel for following stream
-			 processing by Firmware. The struct is defined as
-			 :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_dm_config`. (TODO)
-Color Correction	 Color Correction algo transforms sensor specific color
-			 space to the standard "sRGB" color space. This is done
-			 by applying 3x3 matrix defined in
-			 :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_ccm_mat_config`.
-Gamma correction	 Gamma correction :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_gamma_config` is a
-			 basic non-linear tone mapping correction that is
-			 applied per pixel for each pixel component.
-CSC			 Color space conversion transforms each pixel from the
-			 RGB primary presentation to YUV (Y: brightness,
-			 UV: Luminance) presentation. This is done by applying
-			 a 3x3 matrix defined in
-			 :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_csc_mat_config`
-CDS			 Chroma down sampling
-			 After the CSC is performed, the Chroma Down Sampling
-			 is applied for a UV plane down sampling by a factor
-			 of 2 in each direction for YUV 4:2:0 using a 4x2
-			 configurable filter :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_cds_params`.
-CHNR			 Chroma noise reduction
-			 This block processes only the chrominance pixels and
-			 performs noise reduction by cleaning the high
-			 frequency noise.
-			 See struct :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_yuvp1_chnr_config`.
-TCC			 Total color correction as defined in struct
-			 :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_yuvp2_tcc_static_config`.
-XNR3			 eXtreme Noise Reduction V3 is the third revision of
-			 noise reduction algorithm used to improve image
-			 quality. This removes the low frequency noise in the
-			 captured image. Two related structs are  being defined,
-			 :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_isp_xnr3_params` for ISP data memory
-			 and :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_isp_xnr3_vmem_params` for vector
-			 memory.
-TNR			 Temporal Noise Reduction block compares successive
-			 frames in time to remove anomalies / noise in pixel
-			 values. :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_isp_tnr3_vmem_params` and
-			 :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_isp_tnr3_params` are defined for ISP
-			 vector and data memory respectively.
-======================== =======================================================
-
-A few stages of the pipeline will be executed by firmware running on the ISP
-processor, while many others will use a set of fixed hardware blocks also
-called accelerator cluster (ACC) to crunch pixel data and produce statistics.
-
-ACC parameters of individual algorithms, as defined by
-:c:type:`ipu3_uapi_acc_param`, can be chosen to be applied by the user
-space through struct :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_flags` embedded in
-:c:type:`ipu3_uapi_params` structure. For parameters that are configured as
-not enabled by the user space, the corresponding structs are ignored by the
-driver, in which case the existing configuration of the algorithm will be
-preserved.
+The pipeline parameters are passed to the "ipu3-imgu [01] parameters" metadata
+output video nodes, using the :c:type:`v4l2_meta_format` interface. They are
+formatted as described by the :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_params` structure.
 
 Both 3A statistics and pipeline parameters described here are closely tied to
 the underlying camera sub-system (CSS) APIs. They are usually consumed and
@@ -143,13 +76,6 @@ produced by dedicated user space libraries that comprise the important tuning
 tools, thus freeing the developers from being bothered with the low level
 hardware and algorithm details.
 
-It should be noted that IPU3 DMA operations require the addresses of all data
-structures (that includes both input and output) to be aligned on 32 byte
-boundaries.
-
-The meta data :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_params` will be sent to "ipu3-imgu parameters"
-video node in ``V4L2_BUF_TYPE_META_CAPTURE`` format.
-
 .. code-block:: c
 
 	struct ipu3_uapi_params {
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-meta-vsp1-hgt.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-meta-vsp1-hgt.rst
index 2ebccdcca95d..d1a341af9c48 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-meta-vsp1-hgt.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-meta-vsp1-hgt.rst
@@ -41,6 +41,10 @@ The Hue position **m** (0 - 5) of the bucket in the matrix depends on
 how the HGT Hue areas are configured. There are 6 user configurable Hue
 Areas which can be configured to cover overlapping Hue values:
 
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \small
+
 ::
 
          Area 0       Area 1       Area 2       Area 3       Area 4       Area 5
@@ -53,6 +57,11 @@ Areas which can be configured to cover overlapping Hue values:
   5U   0L      0U   1L      1U   2L      2U   3L      3U   4L      4U   5L      5U   0L
         <0..............................Hue Value............................255>
 
+
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \normalsize
+
 When two consecutive areas don't overlap (n+1L is equal to nU) the boundary
 value is considered as part of the lower area.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-packed-hsv.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-packed-hsv.rst
index 38b1895a509f..dfc4a8367b3d 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-packed-hsv.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-packed-hsv.rst
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ The values are packed in 24 or 32 bit formats.
     \tiny
     \setlength{\tabcolsep}{2pt}
 
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{2.0cm}|p{0.54cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{2.6cm}|p{0.8cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|
 
 .. _packed-hsv-formats:
 
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-packed-rgb.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-packed-rgb.rst
index 6b3781c04dd5..738bb14c0ee2 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-packed-rgb.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-packed-rgb.rst
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ next to each other in memory.
     \tiny
     \setlength{\tabcolsep}{2pt}
 
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{2.3cm}|p{1.6cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{2.8cm}|p{2.0cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|
 
 
 .. _rgb-formats:
@@ -139,6 +139,144 @@ next to each other in memory.
       - r\ :sub:`1`
       - r\ :sub:`0`
       -
+    * .. _V4L2-PIX-FMT-RGBA444:
+
+      - ``V4L2_PIX_FMT_RGBA444``
+      - 'RA12'
+
+      - b\ :sub:`3`
+      - b\ :sub:`2`
+      - b\ :sub:`1`
+      - b\ :sub:`0`
+      - a\ :sub:`3`
+      - a\ :sub:`2`
+      - a\ :sub:`1`
+      - a\ :sub:`0`
+
+      - r\ :sub:`3`
+      - r\ :sub:`2`
+      - r\ :sub:`1`
+      - r\ :sub:`0`
+      - g\ :sub:`3`
+      - g\ :sub:`2`
+      - g\ :sub:`1`
+      - g\ :sub:`0`
+      -
+    * .. _V4L2-PIX-FMT-RGBX444:
+
+      - ``V4L2_PIX_FMT_RGBX444``
+      - 'RX12'
+
+      - b\ :sub:`3`
+      - b\ :sub:`2`
+      - b\ :sub:`1`
+      - b\ :sub:`0`
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+
+      - r\ :sub:`3`
+      - r\ :sub:`2`
+      - r\ :sub:`1`
+      - r\ :sub:`0`
+      - g\ :sub:`3`
+      - g\ :sub:`2`
+      - g\ :sub:`1`
+      - g\ :sub:`0`
+      -
+    * .. _V4L2-PIX-FMT-ABGR444:
+
+      - ``V4L2_PIX_FMT_ABGR444``
+      - 'AB12'
+
+      - g\ :sub:`3`
+      - g\ :sub:`2`
+      - g\ :sub:`1`
+      - g\ :sub:`0`
+      - r\ :sub:`3`
+      - r\ :sub:`2`
+      - r\ :sub:`1`
+      - r\ :sub:`0`
+
+      - a\ :sub:`3`
+      - a\ :sub:`2`
+      - a\ :sub:`1`
+      - a\ :sub:`0`
+      - b\ :sub:`3`
+      - b\ :sub:`2`
+      - b\ :sub:`1`
+      - b\ :sub:`0`
+      -
+    * .. _V4L2-PIX-FMT-XBGR444:
+
+      - ``V4L2_PIX_FMT_XBGR444``
+      - 'XB12'
+
+      - g\ :sub:`3`
+      - g\ :sub:`2`
+      - g\ :sub:`1`
+      - g\ :sub:`0`
+      - r\ :sub:`3`
+      - r\ :sub:`2`
+      - r\ :sub:`1`
+      - r\ :sub:`0`
+
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      - b\ :sub:`3`
+      - b\ :sub:`2`
+      - b\ :sub:`1`
+      - b\ :sub:`0`
+      -
+    * .. _V4L2-PIX-FMT-BGRA444:
+
+      - ``V4L2_PIX_FMT_BGRA444``
+      - 'BA12'
+
+      - r\ :sub:`3`
+      - r\ :sub:`2`
+      - r\ :sub:`1`
+      - r\ :sub:`0`
+      - a\ :sub:`3`
+      - a\ :sub:`2`
+      - a\ :sub:`1`
+      - a\ :sub:`0`
+
+      - b\ :sub:`3`
+      - b\ :sub:`2`
+      - b\ :sub:`1`
+      - b\ :sub:`0`
+      - g\ :sub:`3`
+      - g\ :sub:`2`
+      - g\ :sub:`1`
+      - g\ :sub:`0`
+      -
+    * .. _V4L2-PIX-FMT-BGRX444:
+
+      - ``V4L2_PIX_FMT_BGRX444``
+      - 'BX12'
+
+      - r\ :sub:`3`
+      - r\ :sub:`2`
+      - r\ :sub:`1`
+      - r\ :sub:`0`
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+
+      - b\ :sub:`3`
+      - b\ :sub:`2`
+      - b\ :sub:`1`
+      - b\ :sub:`0`
+      - g\ :sub:`3`
+      - g\ :sub:`2`
+      - g\ :sub:`1`
+      - g\ :sub:`0`
+      -
     * .. _V4L2-PIX-FMT-ARGB555:
 
       - ``V4L2_PIX_FMT_ARGB555``
@@ -185,6 +323,144 @@ next to each other in memory.
       - g\ :sub:`4`
       - g\ :sub:`3`
       -
+    * .. _V4L2-PIX-FMT-RGBA555:
+
+      - ``V4L2_PIX_FMT_RGBA555``
+      - 'RA15'
+
+      - g\ :sub:`1`
+      - g\ :sub:`0`
+      - b\ :sub:`4`
+      - b\ :sub:`3`
+      - b\ :sub:`2`
+      - b\ :sub:`1`
+      - b\ :sub:`0`
+      - a
+
+      - r\ :sub:`4`
+      - r\ :sub:`3`
+      - r\ :sub:`2`
+      - r\ :sub:`1`
+      - r\ :sub:`0`
+      - g\ :sub:`4`
+      - g\ :sub:`3`
+      - g\ :sub:`2`
+      -
+    * .. _V4L2-PIX-FMT-RGBX555:
+
+      - ``V4L2_PIX_FMT_RGBX555``
+      - 'RX15'
+
+      - g\ :sub:`1`
+      - g\ :sub:`0`
+      - b\ :sub:`4`
+      - b\ :sub:`3`
+      - b\ :sub:`2`
+      - b\ :sub:`1`
+      - b\ :sub:`0`
+      -
+
+      - r\ :sub:`4`
+      - r\ :sub:`3`
+      - r\ :sub:`2`
+      - r\ :sub:`1`
+      - r\ :sub:`0`
+      - g\ :sub:`4`
+      - g\ :sub:`3`
+      - g\ :sub:`2`
+      -
+    * .. _V4L2-PIX-FMT-ABGR555:
+
+      - ``V4L2_PIX_FMT_ABGR555``
+      - 'AB15'
+
+      - g\ :sub:`2`
+      - g\ :sub:`1`
+      - g\ :sub:`0`
+      - r\ :sub:`4`
+      - r\ :sub:`3`
+      - r\ :sub:`2`
+      - r\ :sub:`1`
+      - r\ :sub:`0`
+
+      - a
+      - b\ :sub:`4`
+      - b\ :sub:`3`
+      - b\ :sub:`2`
+      - b\ :sub:`1`
+      - b\ :sub:`0`
+      - g\ :sub:`4`
+      - g\ :sub:`3`
+      -
+    * .. _V4L2-PIX-FMT-XBGR555:
+
+      - ``V4L2_PIX_FMT_XBGR555``
+      - 'XB15'
+
+      - g\ :sub:`2`
+      - g\ :sub:`1`
+      - g\ :sub:`0`
+      - r\ :sub:`4`
+      - r\ :sub:`3`
+      - r\ :sub:`2`
+      - r\ :sub:`1`
+      - r\ :sub:`0`
+
+      -
+      - b\ :sub:`4`
+      - b\ :sub:`3`
+      - b\ :sub:`2`
+      - b\ :sub:`1`
+      - b\ :sub:`0`
+      - g\ :sub:`4`
+      - g\ :sub:`3`
+      -
+    * .. _V4L2-PIX-FMT-BGRA555:
+
+      - ``V4L2_PIX_FMT_BGRA555``
+      - 'BA15'
+
+      - g\ :sub:`1`
+      - g\ :sub:`0`
+      - r\ :sub:`4`
+      - r\ :sub:`3`
+      - r\ :sub:`2`
+      - r\ :sub:`1`
+      - r\ :sub:`0`
+      - a
+
+      - b\ :sub:`4`
+      - b\ :sub:`3`
+      - b\ :sub:`2`
+      - b\ :sub:`1`
+      - b\ :sub:`0`
+      - g\ :sub:`4`
+      - g\ :sub:`3`
+      - g\ :sub:`2`
+      -
+    * .. _V4L2-PIX-FMT-BGRX555:
+
+      - ``V4L2_PIX_FMT_BGRX555``
+      - 'BX15'
+
+      - g\ :sub:`1`
+      - g\ :sub:`0`
+      - r\ :sub:`4`
+      - r\ :sub:`3`
+      - r\ :sub:`2`
+      - r\ :sub:`1`
+      - r\ :sub:`0`
+      -
+
+      - b\ :sub:`4`
+      - b\ :sub:`3`
+      - b\ :sub:`2`
+      - b\ :sub:`1`
+      - b\ :sub:`0`
+      - g\ :sub:`4`
+      - g\ :sub:`3`
+      - g\ :sub:`2`
+      -
     * .. _V4L2-PIX-FMT-RGB565:
 
       - ``V4L2_PIX_FMT_RGB565``
@@ -461,6 +737,166 @@ next to each other in memory.
       -
       -
       -
+    * .. _V4L2-PIX-FMT-BGRA32:
+
+      - ``V4L2_PIX_FMT_BGRA32``
+      - 'RA24'
+
+      - a\ :sub:`7`
+      - a\ :sub:`6`
+      - a\ :sub:`5`
+      - a\ :sub:`4`
+      - a\ :sub:`3`
+      - a\ :sub:`2`
+      - a\ :sub:`1`
+      - a\ :sub:`0`
+
+      - b\ :sub:`7`
+      - b\ :sub:`6`
+      - b\ :sub:`5`
+      - b\ :sub:`4`
+      - b\ :sub:`3`
+      - b\ :sub:`2`
+      - b\ :sub:`1`
+      - b\ :sub:`0`
+
+      - g\ :sub:`7`
+      - g\ :sub:`6`
+      - g\ :sub:`5`
+      - g\ :sub:`4`
+      - g\ :sub:`3`
+      - g\ :sub:`2`
+      - g\ :sub:`1`
+      - g\ :sub:`0`
+
+      - r\ :sub:`7`
+      - r\ :sub:`6`
+      - r\ :sub:`5`
+      - r\ :sub:`4`
+      - r\ :sub:`3`
+      - r\ :sub:`2`
+      - r\ :sub:`1`
+      - r\ :sub:`0`
+    * .. _V4L2-PIX-FMT-BGRX32:
+
+      - ``V4L2_PIX_FMT_BGRX32``
+      - 'RX24'
+
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+
+      - b\ :sub:`7`
+      - b\ :sub:`6`
+      - b\ :sub:`5`
+      - b\ :sub:`4`
+      - b\ :sub:`3`
+      - b\ :sub:`2`
+      - b\ :sub:`1`
+      - b\ :sub:`0`
+
+      - g\ :sub:`7`
+      - g\ :sub:`6`
+      - g\ :sub:`5`
+      - g\ :sub:`4`
+      - g\ :sub:`3`
+      - g\ :sub:`2`
+      - g\ :sub:`1`
+      - g\ :sub:`0`
+
+      - r\ :sub:`7`
+      - r\ :sub:`6`
+      - r\ :sub:`5`
+      - r\ :sub:`4`
+      - r\ :sub:`3`
+      - r\ :sub:`2`
+      - r\ :sub:`1`
+      - r\ :sub:`0`
+    * .. _V4L2-PIX-FMT-RGBA32:
+
+      - ``V4L2_PIX_FMT_RGBA32``
+      - 'AB24'
+
+      - r\ :sub:`7`
+      - r\ :sub:`6`
+      - r\ :sub:`5`
+      - r\ :sub:`4`
+      - r\ :sub:`3`
+      - r\ :sub:`2`
+      - r\ :sub:`1`
+      - r\ :sub:`0`
+
+      - g\ :sub:`7`
+      - g\ :sub:`6`
+      - g\ :sub:`5`
+      - g\ :sub:`4`
+      - g\ :sub:`3`
+      - g\ :sub:`2`
+      - g\ :sub:`1`
+      - g\ :sub:`0`
+
+      - b\ :sub:`7`
+      - b\ :sub:`6`
+      - b\ :sub:`5`
+      - b\ :sub:`4`
+      - b\ :sub:`3`
+      - b\ :sub:`2`
+      - b\ :sub:`1`
+      - b\ :sub:`0`
+
+      - a\ :sub:`7`
+      - a\ :sub:`6`
+      - a\ :sub:`5`
+      - a\ :sub:`4`
+      - a\ :sub:`3`
+      - a\ :sub:`2`
+      - a\ :sub:`1`
+      - a\ :sub:`0`
+    * .. _V4L2-PIX-FMT-RGBX32:
+
+      - ``V4L2_PIX_FMT_RGBX32``
+      - 'XB24'
+
+      - r\ :sub:`7`
+      - r\ :sub:`6`
+      - r\ :sub:`5`
+      - r\ :sub:`4`
+      - r\ :sub:`3`
+      - r\ :sub:`2`
+      - r\ :sub:`1`
+      - r\ :sub:`0`
+
+      - g\ :sub:`7`
+      - g\ :sub:`6`
+      - g\ :sub:`5`
+      - g\ :sub:`4`
+      - g\ :sub:`3`
+      - g\ :sub:`2`
+      - g\ :sub:`1`
+      - g\ :sub:`0`
+
+      - b\ :sub:`7`
+      - b\ :sub:`6`
+      - b\ :sub:`5`
+      - b\ :sub:`4`
+      - b\ :sub:`3`
+      - b\ :sub:`2`
+      - b\ :sub:`1`
+      - b\ :sub:`0`
+
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
     * .. _V4L2-PIX-FMT-ARGB32:
 
       - ``V4L2_PIX_FMT_ARGB32``
@@ -656,7 +1092,7 @@ either the corresponding ARGB or XRGB format, depending on the driver.
     \tiny
     \setlength{\tabcolsep}{2pt}
 
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{2.2cm}|p{0.60cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{2.6cm}|p{0.70cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|
 
 .. _rgb-formats-deprecated:
 
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-packed-yuv.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-packed-yuv.rst
index f53e8f57a003..41b60fae703a 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-packed-yuv.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-packed-yuv.rst
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ component of each pixel in one 16 or 32 bit word.
 
 .. _packed-yuv-formats:
 
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{2.0cm}|p{0.67cm}|p{0.29cm}|p{0.29cm}|p{0.29cm}|p{0.29cm}|p{0.29cm}|p{0.29cm}|p{0.29cm}|p{0.29cm}|p{0.29cm}|p{0.29cm}|p{0.29cm}|p{0.29cm}|p{0.29cm}|p{0.29cm}|p{0.29cm}|p{0.29cm}|p{0.29cm}|p{0.29cm}|p{0.29cm}|p{0.29cm}|p{0.29cm}|p{0.29cm}|p{0.29cm}|p{0.29cm}|p{0.29cm}|p{0.29cm}|p{0.29cm}|p{0.29cm}|p{0.29cm}|p{0.29cm}|p{0.29cm}|p{0.29cm}|
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{2.5cm}|p{0.69cm}|p{0.31cm}|p{0.31cm}|p{0.31cm}|p{0.31cm}|p{0.31cm}|p{0.31cm}|p{0.31cm}|p{0.31cm}|p{0.31cm}|p{0.31cm}|p{0.31cm}|p{0.31cm}|p{0.31cm}|p{0.31cm}|p{0.31cm}|p{0.31cm}|p{0.31cm}|p{0.31cm}|p{0.31cm}|p{0.31cm}|p{0.31cm}|p{0.31cm}|p{0.31cm}|p{0.31cm}|p{0.31cm}|p{0.31cm}|p{0.31cm}|p{0.31cm}|p{0.31cm}|p{0.31cm}|p{0.31cm}|p{0.31cm}|
 
 .. flat-table:: Packed YUV Image Formats
     :header-rows:  2
@@ -44,6 +44,7 @@ component of each pixel in one 16 or 32 bit word.
       - :cspan:`7` Byte 2
 
       - :cspan:`7` Byte 3
+
     * -
       -
       - 7
@@ -81,6 +82,7 @@ component of each pixel in one 16 or 32 bit word.
       - 2
       - 1
       - 0
+
     * .. _V4L2-PIX-FMT-YUV444:
 
       - ``V4L2_PIX_FMT_YUV444``
@@ -103,7 +105,9 @@ component of each pixel in one 16 or 32 bit word.
       - Y'\ :sub:`2`
       - Y'\ :sub:`1`
       - Y'\ :sub:`0`
-      -
+
+      -  :cspan:`15`
+
     * .. _V4L2-PIX-FMT-YUV555:
 
       - ``V4L2_PIX_FMT_YUV555``
@@ -126,7 +130,8 @@ component of each pixel in one 16 or 32 bit word.
       - Y'\ :sub:`0`
       - Cb\ :sub:`4`
       - Cb\ :sub:`3`
-      -
+
+      -  :cspan:`15`
     * .. _V4L2-PIX-FMT-YUV565:
 
       - ``V4L2_PIX_FMT_YUV565``
@@ -149,7 +154,9 @@ component of each pixel in one 16 or 32 bit word.
       - Cb\ :sub:`5`
       - Cb\ :sub:`4`
       - Cb\ :sub:`3`
-      -
+
+      -  :cspan:`15`
+
     * .. _V4L2-PIX-FMT-YUV32:
 
       - ``V4L2_PIX_FMT_YUV32``
@@ -191,6 +198,170 @@ component of each pixel in one 16 or 32 bit word.
       - Cr\ :sub:`1`
       - Cr\ :sub:`0`
 
+    * .. _V4L2-PIX-FMT-AYUV32:
+
+      - ``V4L2_PIX_FMT_AYUV32``
+      - 'AYUV'
+
+      - a\ :sub:`7`
+      - a\ :sub:`6`
+      - a\ :sub:`5`
+      - a\ :sub:`4`
+      - a\ :sub:`3`
+      - a\ :sub:`2`
+      - a\ :sub:`1`
+      - a\ :sub:`0`
+
+      - Y'\ :sub:`7`
+      - Y'\ :sub:`6`
+      - Y'\ :sub:`5`
+      - Y'\ :sub:`4`
+      - Y'\ :sub:`3`
+      - Y'\ :sub:`2`
+      - Y'\ :sub:`1`
+      - Y'\ :sub:`0`
+
+      - Cb\ :sub:`7`
+      - Cb\ :sub:`6`
+      - Cb\ :sub:`5`
+      - Cb\ :sub:`4`
+      - Cb\ :sub:`3`
+      - Cb\ :sub:`2`
+      - Cb\ :sub:`1`
+      - Cb\ :sub:`0`
+
+      - Cr\ :sub:`7`
+      - Cr\ :sub:`6`
+      - Cr\ :sub:`5`
+      - Cr\ :sub:`4`
+      - Cr\ :sub:`3`
+      - Cr\ :sub:`2`
+      - Cr\ :sub:`1`
+      - Cr\ :sub:`0`
+
+    * .. _V4L2-PIX-FMT-XYUV32:
+
+      - ``V4L2_PIX_FMT_XYUV32``
+      - 'XYUV'
+
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+
+      - Y'\ :sub:`7`
+      - Y'\ :sub:`6`
+      - Y'\ :sub:`5`
+      - Y'\ :sub:`4`
+      - Y'\ :sub:`3`
+      - Y'\ :sub:`2`
+      - Y'\ :sub:`1`
+      - Y'\ :sub:`0`
+
+      - Cb\ :sub:`7`
+      - Cb\ :sub:`6`
+      - Cb\ :sub:`5`
+      - Cb\ :sub:`4`
+      - Cb\ :sub:`3`
+      - Cb\ :sub:`2`
+      - Cb\ :sub:`1`
+      - Cb\ :sub:`0`
+
+      - Cr\ :sub:`7`
+      - Cr\ :sub:`6`
+      - Cr\ :sub:`5`
+      - Cr\ :sub:`4`
+      - Cr\ :sub:`3`
+      - Cr\ :sub:`2`
+      - Cr\ :sub:`1`
+      - Cr\ :sub:`0`
+
+    * .. _V4L2-PIX-FMT-VUYA32:
+
+      - ``V4L2_PIX_FMT_VUYA32``
+      - 'VUYA'
+
+      - Cr\ :sub:`7`
+      - Cr\ :sub:`6`
+      - Cr\ :sub:`5`
+      - Cr\ :sub:`4`
+      - Cr\ :sub:`3`
+      - Cr\ :sub:`2`
+      - Cr\ :sub:`1`
+      - Cr\ :sub:`0`
+
+      - Cb\ :sub:`7`
+      - Cb\ :sub:`6`
+      - Cb\ :sub:`5`
+      - Cb\ :sub:`4`
+      - Cb\ :sub:`3`
+      - Cb\ :sub:`2`
+      - Cb\ :sub:`1`
+      - Cb\ :sub:`0`
+
+      - Y'\ :sub:`7`
+      - Y'\ :sub:`6`
+      - Y'\ :sub:`5`
+      - Y'\ :sub:`4`
+      - Y'\ :sub:`3`
+      - Y'\ :sub:`2`
+      - Y'\ :sub:`1`
+      - Y'\ :sub:`0`
+
+      - a\ :sub:`7`
+      - a\ :sub:`6`
+      - a\ :sub:`5`
+      - a\ :sub:`4`
+      - a\ :sub:`3`
+      - a\ :sub:`2`
+      - a\ :sub:`1`
+      - a\ :sub:`0`
+
+    * .. _V4L2-PIX-FMT-VUYX32:
+
+      - ``V4L2_PIX_FMT_VUYX32``
+      - 'VUYX'
+
+      - Cr\ :sub:`7`
+      - Cr\ :sub:`6`
+      - Cr\ :sub:`5`
+      - Cr\ :sub:`4`
+      - Cr\ :sub:`3`
+      - Cr\ :sub:`2`
+      - Cr\ :sub:`1`
+      - Cr\ :sub:`0`
+
+      - Cb\ :sub:`7`
+      - Cb\ :sub:`6`
+      - Cb\ :sub:`5`
+      - Cb\ :sub:`4`
+      - Cb\ :sub:`3`
+      - Cb\ :sub:`2`
+      - Cb\ :sub:`1`
+      - Cb\ :sub:`0`
+
+      - Y'\ :sub:`7`
+      - Y'\ :sub:`6`
+      - Y'\ :sub:`5`
+      - Y'\ :sub:`4`
+      - Y'\ :sub:`3`
+      - Y'\ :sub:`2`
+      - Y'\ :sub:`1`
+      - Y'\ :sub:`0`
+
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+
 .. raw:: latex
 
     \endgroup
@@ -202,4 +373,8 @@ component of each pixel in one 16 or 32 bit word.
     #) The value of a = alpha bits is undefined when reading from the driver,
        ignored when writing to the driver, except when alpha blending has
        been negotiated for a :ref:`Video Overlay <overlay>` or
-       :ref:`Video Output Overlay <osd>`.
+       :ref:`Video Output Overlay <osd>` for the formats Y444, YUV555 and
+       YUV4. However, for formats AYUV32 and VUYA32, the alpha component is
+       expected to contain a meaningful value that can be used by drivers
+       and applications. And, the formats XYUV32 and VUYX32 contain undefined
+       alpha values that must be ignored by all applications and drivers.
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-srggb10p.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-srggb10p.rst
index cdb70ac26126..fd32660a3766 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-srggb10p.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-srggb10p.rst
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ of a small V4L2_PIX_FMT_SBGGR10P image:
 **Byte Order.**
 Each cell is one byte.
 
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{2.0cm}|p{1.0cm}|p{1.0cm}|p{1.0cm}|p{1.0cm}|p{5.4cm}|
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{2.4cm}|p{1.4cm}|p{1.2cm}|p{1.2cm}|p{1.2cm}|p{6.4cm}|
 
 .. flat-table::
     :header-rows:  0
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-srggb12p.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-srggb12p.rst
index 01413be12916..960851275f23 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-srggb12p.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-srggb12p.rst
@@ -18,6 +18,7 @@ V4L2_PIX_FMT_SRGGB12P ('pRAA'), V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGRBG12P ('pgAA'), V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGB
 
 
 12-bit packed Bayer formats
+---------------------------
 
 
 Description
@@ -37,7 +38,7 @@ Below is an example of a small V4L2_PIX_FMT_SBGGR12P image:
 **Byte Order.**
 Each cell is one byte.
 
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{2.0cm}|p{1.0cm}|p{1.0cm}|p{2.7cm}|p{1.0cm}|p{1.0cm}|p{2.7cm}|
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{2.2cm}|p{1.2cm}|p{1.2cm}|p{3.1cm}|p{1.2cm}|p{1.2cm}|p{3.1cm}|
 
 
 .. flat-table::
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-srggb14p.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-srggb14p.rst
index b583531c2853..1a988d7e7ff8 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-srggb14p.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-srggb14p.rst
@@ -41,17 +41,21 @@ of one of these formats:
 **Byte Order.**
 Each cell is one byte.
 
+.. raw:: latex
 
+    \footnotesize
+
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{1.8cm}|p{1.0cm}|p{1.0cm}|p{1.0cm}|p{1.1cm}|p{3.3cm}|p{3.3cm}|p{3.3cm}|
 
 .. flat-table::
     :header-rows:  0
     :stub-columns: 0
-    :widths:       2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
+    :widths:       2 1 1 1 1 3 3 3
 
 
     -  .. row 1
 
-       -  start + 0:
+       -  start + 0
 
        -  B\ :sub:`00high`
 
@@ -62,17 +66,20 @@ Each cell is one byte.
        -  G\ :sub:`03high`
 
        -  G\ :sub:`01low bits 1--0`\ (bits 7--6)
+
 	  B\ :sub:`00low bits 5--0`\ (bits 5--0)
 
        -  R\ :sub:`02low bits 3--0`\ (bits 7--4)
+
 	  G\ :sub:`01low bits 5--2`\ (bits 3--0)
 
        -  G\ :sub:`03low bits 5--0`\ (bits 7--2)
+
 	  R\ :sub:`02low bits 5--4`\ (bits 1--0)
 
     -  .. row 2
 
-       -  start + 7:
+       -  start + 7
 
        -  G\ :sub:`00high`
 
@@ -83,12 +90,15 @@ Each cell is one byte.
        -  R\ :sub:`03high`
 
        -  R\ :sub:`01low bits 1--0`\ (bits 7--6)
+
 	  G\ :sub:`00low bits 5--0`\ (bits 5--0)
 
        -  G\ :sub:`02low bits 3--0`\ (bits 7--4)
+
 	  R\ :sub:`01low bits 5--2`\ (bits 3--0)
 
        -  R\ :sub:`03low bits 5--0`\ (bits 7--2)
+
 	  G\ :sub:`02low bits 5--4`\ (bits 1--0)
 
     -  .. row 3
@@ -104,12 +114,15 @@ Each cell is one byte.
        -  G\ :sub:`23high`
 
        -  G\ :sub:`21low bits 1--0`\ (bits 7--6)
+
 	  B\ :sub:`20low bits 5--0`\ (bits 5--0)
 
        -  R\ :sub:`22low bits 3--0`\ (bits 7--4)
+
 	  G\ :sub:`21low bits 5--2`\ (bits 3--0)
 
        -  G\ :sub:`23low bits 5--0`\ (bits 7--2)
+
 	  R\ :sub:`22low bits 5--4`\ (bits 1--0)
 
     -  .. row 4
@@ -132,3 +145,8 @@ Each cell is one byte.
 
        -  R\ :sub:`33low bits 5--0`\ (bits 7--2)
 	  G\ :sub:`32low bits 5--4`\ (bits 1--0)
+
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \normalsize
+
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-v4l2-mplane.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-v4l2-mplane.rst
index 7f82dad9013a..5688c816e334 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-v4l2-mplane.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-v4l2-mplane.rst
@@ -19,6 +19,7 @@ array of struct :c:type:`v4l2_plane_pix_format` structures,
 describing all planes of that format.
 
 
+
 .. tabularcolumns:: |p{4.4cm}|p{4.4cm}|p{8.7cm}|
 
 .. c:type:: v4l2_plane_pix_format
@@ -41,6 +42,10 @@ describing all planes of that format.
 	applications.
 
 
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \small
+
 .. tabularcolumns:: |p{4.4cm}|p{5.6cm}|p{7.5cm}|
 
 .. c:type:: v4l2_pix_format_mplane
@@ -82,9 +87,7 @@ describing all planes of that format.
     * - __u8
       - ``flags``
       - Flags set by the application or driver, see :ref:`format-flags`.
-    * - union {
-      - (anonymous)
-      -
+    * - :cspan:`2` union { (anonymous)
     * - __u8
       - ``ycbcr_enc``
       - Y'CbCr encoding, from enum :c:type:`v4l2_ycbcr_encoding`.
@@ -97,9 +100,7 @@ describing all planes of that format.
         This information supplements the ``colorspace`` and must be set by
 	the driver for capture streams and by the application for output
 	streams, see :ref:`colorspaces`.
-    * - }
-      -
-      -
+    * - :cspan:`2` }
     * - __u8
       - ``quantization``
       - Quantization range, from enum :c:type:`v4l2_quantization`.
@@ -116,3 +117,7 @@ describing all planes of that format.
       - ``reserved[7]``
       - Reserved for future extensions. Should be zeroed by drivers and
 	applications.
+
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \normalsize
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-y10p.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-y10p.rst
index 7893642faee3..39cd789dcb59 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-y10p.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-y10p.rst
@@ -27,6 +27,12 @@ in the same order.
 
 **Bit-packed representation.**
 
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \small
+
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{1.2cm}||p{1.2cm}||p{1.2cm}||p{1.2cm}|p{3.2cm}|p{3.2cm}|
+
 .. flat-table::
     :header-rows:  0
     :stub-columns: 0
@@ -38,3 +44,7 @@ in the same order.
       - Y'\ :sub:`03[9:2]`
       - Y'\ :sub:`03[1:0]`\ (bits 7--6) Y'\ :sub:`02[1:0]`\ (bits 5--4)
 	Y'\ :sub:`01[1:0]`\ (bits 3--2) Y'\ :sub:`00[1:0]`\ (bits 1--0)
+
+.. raw:: latex
+
+    \normalsize
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/subdev-formats.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/subdev-formats.rst
index ff4b2a972fd2..ab1a48a5ae80 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/subdev-formats.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/subdev-formats.rst
@@ -75,15 +75,15 @@ Media Bus Pixel Codes
 ---------------------
 
 The media bus pixel codes describe image formats as flowing over
-physical busses (both between separate physical components and inside
+physical buses (both between separate physical components and inside
 SoC devices). This should not be confused with the V4L2 pixel formats
 that describe, using four character codes, image formats as stored in
 memory.
 
-While there is a relationship between image formats on busses and image
+While there is a relationship between image formats on buses and image
 formats in memory (a raw Bayer image won't be magically converted to
 JPEG just by storing it to memory), there is no one-to-one
-correspondance between them.
+correspondence between them.
 
 
 Packed RGB Formats
@@ -980,6 +980,113 @@ The following tables list existing packed RGB formats.
       - r\ :sub:`2`
       - r\ :sub:`1`
       - r\ :sub:`0`
+    * .. _MEDIA-BUS-FMT-BGR888-3X8:
+
+      - MEDIA_BUS_FMT_BGR888_3X8
+      - 0x101b
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      - b\ :sub:`7`
+      - b\ :sub:`6`
+      - b\ :sub:`5`
+      - b\ :sub:`4`
+      - b\ :sub:`3`
+      - b\ :sub:`2`
+      - b\ :sub:`1`
+      - b\ :sub:`0`
+    * -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      - g\ :sub:`7`
+      - g\ :sub:`6`
+      - g\ :sub:`5`
+      - g\ :sub:`4`
+      - g\ :sub:`3`
+      - g\ :sub:`2`
+      - g\ :sub:`1`
+      - g\ :sub:`0`
+    * -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      -
+      - r\ :sub:`7`
+      - r\ :sub:`6`
+      - r\ :sub:`5`
+      - r\ :sub:`4`
+      - r\ :sub:`3`
+      - r\ :sub:`2`
+      - r\ :sub:`1`
+      - r\ :sub:`0`
     * .. _MEDIA-BUS-FMT-GBR888-1X24:
 
       - MEDIA_BUS_FMT_GBR888_1X24
@@ -7414,7 +7521,7 @@ The following table lists existing HSV/HSL formats.
     \tiny
     \setlength{\tabcolsep}{2pt}
 
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{3.0cm}|p{0.60cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{3.9cm}|p{0.73cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|p{0.22cm}|
 
 .. _v4l2-mbus-pixelcode-hsv:
 
@@ -7524,7 +7631,7 @@ The following table lists existing JPEG compressed formats.
 
 .. _v4l2-mbus-pixelcode-jpeg:
 
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{5.4cm}|p{1.4cm}|p{10.7cm}|
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{6.0cm}|p{1.4cm}|p{10.1cm}|
 
 .. flat-table:: JPEG Formats
     :header-rows:  1
@@ -7557,7 +7664,7 @@ formats.
 
 .. _v4l2-mbus-pixelcode-vendor-specific:
 
-.. tabularcolumns:: |p{6.8cm}|p{1.4cm}|p{9.3cm}|
+.. tabularcolumns:: |p{8.0cm}|p{1.4cm}|p{7.7cm}|
 
 .. flat-table:: Vendor and device specific formats
     :header-rows:  1
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/vidioc-g-parm.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/vidioc-g-parm.rst
index 0d2593176c90..d9d5d97848d3 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/vidioc-g-parm.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/vidioc-g-parm.rst
@@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ union holding separate parameters for input and output devices.
 
 .. _parm-caps:
 
-.. flat-table:: Streaming Parameters Capabilites
+.. flat-table:: Streaming Parameters Capabilities
     :header-rows:  0
     :stub-columns: 0
     :widths:       3 1 4
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/vidioc-prepare-buf.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/vidioc-prepare-buf.rst
index 60986710967b..7c6b5f4e1011 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/vidioc-prepare-buf.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/vidioc-prepare-buf.rst
@@ -43,10 +43,7 @@ Applications can optionally call the :ref:`VIDIOC_PREPARE_BUF` ioctl to
 pass ownership of the buffer to the driver before actually enqueuing it,
 using the :ref:`VIDIOC_QBUF <VIDIOC_QBUF>` ioctl, and to prepare it for future I/O. Such
 preparations may include cache invalidation or cleaning. Performing them
-in advance saves time during the actual I/O. In case such cache
-operations are not required, the application can use one of
-``V4L2_BUF_FLAG_NO_CACHE_INVALIDATE`` and
-``V4L2_BUF_FLAG_NO_CACHE_CLEAN`` flags to skip the respective step.
+in advance saves time during the actual I/O.
 
 The struct :c:type:`v4l2_buffer` structure is specified in
 :ref:`buffer`.
diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/vidioc-qbuf.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/vidioc-qbuf.rst
index 3259168a7358..dbf7b445a27b 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/vidioc-qbuf.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/vidioc-qbuf.rst
@@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ in use. Setting it means that the buffer will not be passed to the driver
 until the request itself is queued. Also, the driver will apply any
 settings associated with the request for this buffer. This field will
 be ignored unless the ``V4L2_BUF_FLAG_REQUEST_FD`` flag is set.
-If the device does not support requests, then ``EACCES`` will be returned.
+If the device does not support requests, then ``EBADR`` will be returned.
 If requests are supported but an invalid request file descriptor is given,
 then ``EINVAL`` will be returned.
 
@@ -123,9 +123,9 @@ then ``EINVAL`` will be returned.
    :ref:`VIDIOC_STREAMOFF <VIDIOC_STREAMON>` or calling :ref:`VIDIOC_REQBUFS`
    the check for this will be reset.
 
-   For :ref:`memory-to-memory devices <codec>` you can specify the
+   For :ref:`memory-to-memory devices <mem2mem>` you can specify the
    ``request_fd`` only for output buffers, not for capture buffers. Attempting
-   to specify this for a capture buffer will result in an ``EACCES`` error.
+   to specify this for a capture buffer will result in an ``EBADR`` error.
 
 Applications call the ``VIDIOC_DQBUF`` ioctl to dequeue a filled
 (capturing) or displayed (output) buffer from the driver's outgoing
@@ -185,9 +185,11 @@ EPIPE
     codecs if a buffer with the ``V4L2_BUF_FLAG_LAST`` was already
     dequeued and no new buffers are expected to become available.
 
-EACCES
+EBADR
     The ``V4L2_BUF_FLAG_REQUEST_FD`` flag was set but the device does not
-    support requests for the given buffer type.
+    support requests for the given buffer type, or
+    the ``V4L2_BUF_FLAG_REQUEST_FD`` flag was not set but the device requires
+    that the buffer is part of a request.
 
 EBUSY
     The first buffer was queued via a request, but the application now tries
diff --git a/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/bttv.rst b/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/bttv.rst
index d72a0f8fd267..f956ee264099 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/bttv.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/bttv.rst
@@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ same card listens there is much higher...
 For problems with sound:  There are a lot of different systems used
 for TV sound all over the world.  And there are also different chips
 which decode the audio signal.  Reports about sound problems ("stereo
-does'nt work") are pretty useless unless you include some details
+doesn't work") are pretty useless unless you include some details
 about your hardware and the TV sound scheme used in your country (or
 at least the country you are living in).
 
@@ -771,7 +771,7 @@ Identifying:
       - Lifeview.com.tw states (Feb. 2002):
         "The FlyVideo2000 and FlyVideo2000s product name have renamed to FlyVideo98."
         Their Bt8x8 cards are listed as discontinued.
-      - Flyvideo 2000S was probably sold as Flyvideo 3000 in some contries(Europe?).
+      - Flyvideo 2000S was probably sold as Flyvideo 3000 in some countries(Europe?).
         The new Flyvideo 2000/3000 are SAA7130/SAA7134 based.
 
 "Flyvideo II" had been the name for the 848 cards, nowadays (in Germany)
diff --git a/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/imx.rst b/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/imx.rst
index 6922dde4a82b..1d7eb8c7bd5c 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/imx.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/imx.rst
@@ -24,12 +24,12 @@ memory. Various dedicated DMA channels exist for both video capture and
 display paths. During transfer, the IDMAC is also capable of vertical
 image flip, 8x8 block transfer (see IRT description), pixel component
 re-ordering (for example UYVY to YUYV) within the same colorspace, and
-even packed <--> planar conversion. It can also perform a simple
-de-interlacing by interleaving even and odd lines during transfer
+packed <--> planar conversion. The IDMAC can also perform a simple
+de-interlacing by interweaving even and odd lines during transfer
 (without motion compensation which requires the VDIC).
 
 The CSI is the backend capture unit that interfaces directly with
-camera sensors over Parallel, BT.656/1120, and MIPI CSI-2 busses.
+camera sensors over Parallel, BT.656/1120, and MIPI CSI-2 buses.
 
 The IC handles color-space conversion, resizing (downscaling and
 upscaling), horizontal flip, and 90/270 degree rotation operations.
@@ -175,15 +175,21 @@ via the SMFC and an IDMAC channel, bypassing IC pre-processing. This
 source pad is routed to a capture device node, with a node name of the
 format "ipuX_csiY capture".
 
-Note that since the IDMAC source pad makes use of an IDMAC channel, it
-can do pixel reordering within the same colorspace. For example, the
-sink pad can take UYVY2X8, but the IDMAC source pad can output YUYV2X8.
-If the sink pad is receiving YUV, the output at the capture device can
-also be converted to a planar YUV format such as YUV420.
-
-It will also perform simple de-interlace without motion compensation,
-which is activated if the sink pad's field type is an interlaced type,
-and the IDMAC source pad field type is set to none.
+Note that since the IDMAC source pad makes use of an IDMAC channel,
+pixel reordering within the same colorspace can be carried out by the
+IDMAC channel. For example, if the CSI sink pad is receiving in UYVY
+order, the capture device linked to the IDMAC source pad can capture
+in YUYV order. Also, if the CSI sink pad is receiving a packed YUV
+format, the capture device can capture a planar YUV format such as
+YUV420.
+
+The IDMAC channel at the IDMAC source pad also supports simple
+interweave without motion compensation, which is activated if the source
+pad's field type is sequential top-bottom or bottom-top, and the
+requested capture interface field type is set to interlaced (t-b, b-t,
+or unqualified interlaced). The capture interface will enforce the same
+field order as the source pad field order (interlaced-bt if source pad
+is seq-bt, interlaced-tb if source pad is seq-tb).
 
 This subdev can generate the following event when enabling the second
 IDMAC source pad:
@@ -201,7 +207,7 @@ The CSI supports cropping the incoming raw sensor frames. This is
 implemented in the ipuX_csiY entities at the sink pad, using the
 crop selection subdev API.
 
-The CSI also supports fixed divide-by-two downscaling indepently in
+The CSI also supports fixed divide-by-two downscaling independently in
 width and height. This is implemented in the ipuX_csiY entities at
 the sink pad, using the compose selection subdev API.
 
@@ -325,14 +331,14 @@ ipuX_vdic
 
 The VDIC carries out motion compensated de-interlacing, with three
 motion compensation modes: low, medium, and high motion. The mode is
-specified with the menu control V4L2_CID_DEINTERLACING_MODE. It has
-two sink pads and a single source pad.
+specified with the menu control V4L2_CID_DEINTERLACING_MODE. The VDIC
+has two sink pads and a single source pad.
 
 The direct sink pad receives from an ipuX_csiY direct pad. With this
 link the VDIC can only operate in high motion mode.
 
 When the IDMAC sink pad is activated, it receives from an output
-or mem2mem device node. With this pipeline, it can also operate
+or mem2mem device node. With this pipeline, the VDIC can also operate
 in low and medium modes, because these modes require receiving
 frames from memory buffers. Note that an output or mem2mem device
 is not implemented yet, so this sink pad currently has no links.
@@ -345,8 +351,8 @@ ipuX_ic_prp
 This is the IC pre-processing entity. It acts as a router, routing
 data from its sink pad to one or both of its source pads.
 
-It has a single sink pad. The sink pad can receive from the ipuX_csiY
-direct pad, or from ipuX_vdic.
+This entity has a single sink pad. The sink pad can receive from the
+ipuX_csiY direct pad, or from ipuX_vdic.
 
 This entity has two source pads. One source pad routes to the
 pre-process encode task entity (ipuX_ic_prpenc), the other to the
@@ -369,8 +375,8 @@ color-space conversion, resizing (downscaling and upscaling),
 horizontal and vertical flip, and 90/270 degree rotation. Flip
 and rotation are provided via standard V4L2 controls.
 
-Like the ipuX_csiY IDMAC source, it can also perform simple de-interlace
-without motion compensation, and pixel reordering.
+Like the ipuX_csiY IDMAC source, this entity also supports simple
+de-interlace without motion compensation, and pixel reordering.
 
 ipuX_ic_prpvf
 -------------
@@ -380,18 +386,18 @@ pad from ipuX_ic_prp, and a single source pad. The source pad is routed
 to a capture device node, with a node name of the format
 "ipuX_ic_prpvf capture".
 
-It is identical in operation to ipuX_ic_prpenc, with the same resizing
-and CSC operations and flip/rotation controls. It will receive and
-process de-interlaced frames from the ipuX_vdic if ipuX_ic_prp is
+This entity is identical in operation to ipuX_ic_prpenc, with the same
+resizing and CSC operations and flip/rotation controls. It will receive
+and process de-interlaced frames from the ipuX_vdic if ipuX_ic_prp is
 receiving from ipuX_vdic.
 
-Like the ipuX_csiY IDMAC source, it can perform simple de-interlace
-without motion compensation. However, note that if the ipuX_vdic is
-included in the pipeline (ipuX_ic_prp is receiving from ipuX_vdic),
-it's not possible to use simple de-interlace in ipuX_ic_prpvf, since
-the ipuX_vdic has already carried out de-interlacing (with motion
-compensation) and therefore the field type output from ipuX_ic_prp can
-only be none.
+Like the ipuX_csiY IDMAC source, this entity supports simple
+interweaving without motion compensation. However, note that if the
+ipuX_vdic is included in the pipeline (ipuX_ic_prp is receiving from
+ipuX_vdic), it's not possible to use interweave in ipuX_ic_prpvf,
+since the ipuX_vdic has already carried out de-interlacing (with
+motion compensation) and therefore the field type output from
+ipuX_vdic can only be none (progressive).
 
 Capture Pipelines
 -----------------
@@ -516,10 +522,33 @@ On the SabreAuto, an on-board ADV7180 SD decoder is connected to the
 parallel bus input on the internal video mux to IPU1 CSI0.
 
 The following example configures a pipeline to capture from the ADV7180
-video decoder, assuming NTSC 720x480 input signals, with Motion
-Compensated de-interlacing. Pad field types assume the adv7180 outputs
-"interlaced". $outputfmt can be any format supported by the ipu1_ic_prpvf
-entity at its output pad:
+video decoder, assuming NTSC 720x480 input signals, using simple
+interweave (unconverted and without motion compensation). The adv7180
+must output sequential or alternating fields (field type 'seq-bt' for
+NTSC, or 'alternate'):
+
+.. code-block:: none
+
+   # Setup links
+   media-ctl -l "'adv7180 3-0021':0 -> 'ipu1_csi0_mux':1[1]"
+   media-ctl -l "'ipu1_csi0_mux':2 -> 'ipu1_csi0':0[1]"
+   media-ctl -l "'ipu1_csi0':2 -> 'ipu1_csi0 capture':0[1]"
+   # Configure pads
+   media-ctl -V "'adv7180 3-0021':0 [fmt:UYVY2X8/720x480 field:seq-bt]"
+   media-ctl -V "'ipu1_csi0_mux':2 [fmt:UYVY2X8/720x480]"
+   media-ctl -V "'ipu1_csi0':2 [fmt:AYUV32/720x480]"
+   # Configure "ipu1_csi0 capture" interface (assumed at /dev/video4)
+   v4l2-ctl -d4 --set-fmt-video=field=interlaced_bt
+
+Streaming can then begin on /dev/video4. The v4l2-ctl tool can also be
+used to select any supported YUV pixelformat on /dev/video4.
+
+This example configures a pipeline to capture from the ADV7180
+video decoder, assuming PAL 720x576 input signals, with Motion
+Compensated de-interlacing. The adv7180 must output sequential or
+alternating fields (field type 'seq-tb' for PAL, or 'alternate').
+$outputfmt can be any format supported by the ipu1_ic_prpvf entity
+at its output pad:
 
 .. code-block:: none
 
@@ -531,11 +560,11 @@ entity at its output pad:
    media-ctl -l "'ipu1_ic_prp':2 -> 'ipu1_ic_prpvf':0[1]"
    media-ctl -l "'ipu1_ic_prpvf':1 -> 'ipu1_ic_prpvf capture':0[1]"
    # Configure pads
-   media-ctl -V "'adv7180 3-0021':0 [fmt:UYVY2X8/720x480]"
-   media-ctl -V "'ipu1_csi0_mux':2 [fmt:UYVY2X8/720x480 field:interlaced]"
-   media-ctl -V "'ipu1_csi0':1 [fmt:AYUV32/720x480 field:interlaced]"
-   media-ctl -V "'ipu1_vdic':2 [fmt:AYUV32/720x480 field:none]"
-   media-ctl -V "'ipu1_ic_prp':2 [fmt:AYUV32/720x480 field:none]"
+   media-ctl -V "'adv7180 3-0021':0 [fmt:UYVY2X8/720x576 field:seq-tb]"
+   media-ctl -V "'ipu1_csi0_mux':2 [fmt:UYVY2X8/720x576]"
+   media-ctl -V "'ipu1_csi0':1 [fmt:AYUV32/720x576]"
+   media-ctl -V "'ipu1_vdic':2 [fmt:AYUV32/720x576 field:none]"
+   media-ctl -V "'ipu1_ic_prp':2 [fmt:AYUV32/720x576 field:none]"
    media-ctl -V "'ipu1_ic_prpvf':1 [fmt:$outputfmt field:none]"
 
 Streaming can then begin on the capture device node at
diff --git a/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/imx7.rst b/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/imx7.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..fe411f65c01c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/imx7.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,162 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+i.MX7 Video Capture Driver
+==========================
+
+Introduction
+------------
+
+The i.MX7 contrary to the i.MX5/6 family does not contain an Image Processing
+Unit (IPU); because of that the capabilities to perform operations or
+manipulation of the capture frames are less feature rich.
+
+For image capture the i.MX7 has three units:
+- CMOS Sensor Interface (CSI)
+- Video Multiplexer
+- MIPI CSI-2 Receiver
+
+.. code-block:: none
+
+   MIPI Camera Input ---> MIPI CSI-2 --- > |\
+                                           | \
+                                           |  \
+                                           | M |
+                                           | U | ------>  CSI ---> Capture
+                                           | X |
+                                           |  /
+   Parallel Camera Input ----------------> | /
+                                           |/
+
+For additional information, please refer to the latest versions of the i.MX7
+reference manual [#f1]_.
+
+Entities
+--------
+
+imx7-mipi-csi2
+--------------
+
+This is the MIPI CSI-2 receiver entity. It has one sink pad to receive the pixel
+data from MIPI CSI-2 camera sensor. It has one source pad, corresponding to the
+virtual channel 0. This module is compliant to previous version of Samsung
+D-phy, and supports two D-PHY Rx Data lanes.
+
+csi_mux
+-------
+
+This is the video multiplexer. It has two sink pads to select from either camera
+sensor with a parallel interface or from MIPI CSI-2 virtual channel 0.  It has
+a single source pad that routes to the CSI.
+
+csi
+---
+
+The CSI enables the chip to connect directly to external CMOS image sensor. CSI
+can interface directly with Parallel and MIPI CSI-2 buses. It has 256 x 64 FIFO
+to store received image pixel data and embedded DMA controllers to transfer data
+from the FIFO through AHB bus.
+
+This entity has one sink pad that receives from the csi_mux entity and a single
+source pad that routes video frames directly to memory buffers. This pad is
+routed to a capture device node.
+
+Usage Notes
+-----------
+
+To aid in configuration and for backward compatibility with V4L2 applications
+that access controls only from video device nodes, the capture device interfaces
+inherit controls from the active entities in the current pipeline, so controls
+can be accessed either directly from the subdev or from the active capture
+device interface. For example, the sensor controls are available either from the
+sensor subdevs or from the active capture device.
+
+Warp7 with OV2680
+-----------------
+
+On this platform an OV2680 MIPI CSI-2 module is connected to the internal MIPI
+CSI-2 receiver. The following example configures a video capture pipeline with
+an output of 800x600, and BGGR 10 bit bayer format:
+
+.. code-block:: none
+
+   # Setup links
+   media-ctl -l "'ov2680 1-0036':0 -> 'imx7-mipi-csis.0':0[1]"
+   media-ctl -l "'imx7-mipi-csis.0':1 -> 'csi_mux':1[1]"
+   media-ctl -l "'csi_mux':2 -> 'csi':0[1]"
+   media-ctl -l "'csi':1 -> 'csi capture':0[1]"
+
+   # Configure pads for pipeline
+   media-ctl -V "'ov2680 1-0036':0 [fmt:SBGGR10_1X10/800x600 field:none]"
+   media-ctl -V "'csi_mux':1 [fmt:SBGGR10_1X10/800x600 field:none]"
+   media-ctl -V "'csi_mux':2 [fmt:SBGGR10_1X10/800x600 field:none]"
+   media-ctl -V "'imx7-mipi-csis.0':0 [fmt:SBGGR10_1X10/800x600 field:none]"
+   media-ctl -V "'csi':0 [fmt:SBGGR10_1X10/800x600 field:none]"
+
+After this streaming can start. The v4l2-ctl tool can be used to select any of
+the resolutions supported by the sensor.
+
+.. code-block:: none
+
+    root@imx7s-warp:~# media-ctl -p
+    Media controller API version 4.17.0
+
+    Media device information
+    ------------------------
+    driver          imx-media
+    model           imx-media
+    serial
+    bus info
+    hw revision     0x0
+    driver version  4.17.0
+
+    Device topology
+    - entity 1: csi (2 pads, 2 links)
+		type V4L2 subdev subtype Unknown flags 0
+		device node name /dev/v4l-subdev0
+	    pad0: Sink
+		    [fmt:SBGGR10_1X10/800x600 field:none]
+		    <- "csi_mux":2 [ENABLED]
+	    pad1: Source
+		    [fmt:SBGGR10_1X10/800x600 field:none]
+		    -> "csi capture":0 [ENABLED]
+
+    - entity 4: csi capture (1 pad, 1 link)
+		type Node subtype V4L flags 0
+		device node name /dev/video0
+	    pad0: Sink
+		    <- "csi":1 [ENABLED]
+
+    - entity 10: csi_mux (3 pads, 2 links)
+		type V4L2 subdev subtype Unknown flags 0
+		device node name /dev/v4l-subdev1
+	    pad0: Sink
+		    [fmt:unknown/0x0]
+	    pad1: Sink
+		    [fmt:unknown/800x600 field:none]
+		    <- "imx7-mipi-csis.0":1 [ENABLED]
+	    pad2: Source
+		    [fmt:unknown/800x600 field:none]
+		    -> "csi":0 [ENABLED]
+
+    - entity 14: imx7-mipi-csis.0 (2 pads, 2 links)
+		type V4L2 subdev subtype Unknown flags 0
+		device node name /dev/v4l-subdev2
+	    pad0: Sink
+		    [fmt:SBGGR10_1X10/800x600 field:none]
+		    <- "ov2680 1-0036":0 [ENABLED]
+	    pad1: Source
+		    [fmt:SBGGR10_1X10/800x600 field:none]
+		    -> "csi_mux":1 [ENABLED]
+
+    - entity 17: ov2680 1-0036 (1 pad, 1 link)
+		type V4L2 subdev subtype Sensor flags 0
+		device node name /dev/v4l-subdev3
+	    pad0: Source
+		    [fmt:SBGGR10_1X10/800x600 field:none]
+		    -> "imx7-mipi-csis.0":0 [ENABLED]
+
+
+References
+----------
+
+.. [#f1] https://www.nxp.com/docs/en/reference-manual/IMX7SRM.pdf
diff --git a/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/index.rst b/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/index.rst
index f28570ec9e42..33a055907258 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/index.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/index.rst
@@ -44,6 +44,7 @@ For more details see the file COPYING in the source distribution of Linux.
 	davinci-vpbe
 	fimc
 	imx
+	imx7
 	ipu3
 	ivtv
 	max2175
@@ -64,5 +65,4 @@ For more details see the file COPYING in the source distribution of Linux.
 	soc-camera
 	uvcvideo
 	vivid
-	zoran
 	zr364xx
diff --git a/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/ipu3.rst b/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/ipu3.rst
index f89b51dafadd..c9f780404eee 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/ipu3.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/ipu3.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,5 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
 .. include:: <isonum.txt>
 
 ===============================================================
@@ -355,10 +357,157 @@ https://chromium.googlesource.com/chromiumos/platform/arc-camera/+/master/
 
 The source can be located under hal/intel directory.
 
+Overview of IPU3 pipeline
+=========================
+
+IPU3 pipeline has a number of image processing stages, each of which takes a
+set of parameters as input. The major stages of pipelines are shown here:
+
+.. kernel-render:: DOT
+   :alt: IPU3 ImgU Pipeline
+   :caption: IPU3 ImgU Pipeline Diagram
+
+   digraph "IPU3 ImgU" {
+       node [shape=box]
+       splines="ortho"
+       rankdir="LR"
+
+       a [label="Raw pixels"]
+       b [label="Bayer Downscaling"]
+       c [label="Optical Black Correction"]
+       d [label="Linearization"]
+       e [label="Lens Shading Correction"]
+       f [label="White Balance / Exposure / Focus Apply"]
+       g [label="Bayer Noise Reduction"]
+       h [label="ANR"]
+       i [label="Demosaicing"]
+       j [label="Color Correction Matrix"]
+       k [label="Gamma correction"]
+       l [label="Color Space Conversion"]
+       m [label="Chroma Down Scaling"]
+       n [label="Chromatic Noise Reduction"]
+       o [label="Total Color Correction"]
+       p [label="XNR3"]
+       q [label="TNR"]
+       r [label="DDR"]
+
+       { rank=same; a -> b -> c -> d -> e -> f }
+       { rank=same; g -> h -> i -> j -> k -> l }
+       { rank=same; m -> n -> o -> p -> q -> r }
+
+       a -> g -> m [style=invis, weight=10]
+
+       f -> g
+       l -> m
+   }
+
+The table below presents a description of the above algorithms.
+
+======================== =======================================================
+Name			 Description
+======================== =======================================================
+Optical Black Correction Optical Black Correction block subtracts a pre-defined
+			 value from the respective pixel values to obtain better
+			 image quality.
+			 Defined in :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_obgrid_param`.
+Linearization		 This algo block uses linearization parameters to
+			 address non-linearity sensor effects. The Lookup table
+			 table is defined in
+			 :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_isp_lin_vmem_params`.
+SHD			 Lens shading correction is used to correct spatial
+			 non-uniformity of the pixel response due to optical
+			 lens shading. This is done by applying a different gain
+			 for each pixel. The gain, black level etc are
+			 configured in :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_shd_config_static`.
+BNR			 Bayer noise reduction block removes image noise by
+			 applying a bilateral filter.
+			 See :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_bnr_static_config` for details.
+ANR			 Advanced Noise Reduction is a block based algorithm
+			 that performs noise reduction in the Bayer domain. The
+			 convolution matrix etc can be found in
+			 :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_anr_config`.
+DM			 Demosaicing converts raw sensor data in Bayer format
+			 into RGB (Red, Green, Blue) presentation. Then add
+			 outputs of estimation of Y channel for following stream
+			 processing by Firmware. The struct is defined as
+			 :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_dm_config`.
+Color Correction	 Color Correction algo transforms sensor specific color
+			 space to the standard "sRGB" color space. This is done
+			 by applying 3x3 matrix defined in
+			 :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_ccm_mat_config`.
+Gamma correction	 Gamma correction :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_gamma_config` is a
+			 basic non-linear tone mapping correction that is
+			 applied per pixel for each pixel component.
+CSC			 Color space conversion transforms each pixel from the
+			 RGB primary presentation to YUV (Y: brightness,
+			 UV: Luminance) presentation. This is done by applying
+			 a 3x3 matrix defined in
+			 :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_csc_mat_config`
+CDS			 Chroma down sampling
+			 After the CSC is performed, the Chroma Down Sampling
+			 is applied for a UV plane down sampling by a factor
+			 of 2 in each direction for YUV 4:2:0 using a 4x2
+			 configurable filter :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_cds_params`.
+CHNR			 Chroma noise reduction
+			 This block processes only the chrominance pixels and
+			 performs noise reduction by cleaning the high
+			 frequency noise.
+			 See struct :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_yuvp1_chnr_config`.
+TCC			 Total color correction as defined in struct
+			 :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_yuvp2_tcc_static_config`.
+XNR3			 eXtreme Noise Reduction V3 is the third revision of
+			 noise reduction algorithm used to improve image
+			 quality. This removes the low frequency noise in the
+			 captured image. Two related structs are  being defined,
+			 :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_isp_xnr3_params` for ISP data memory
+			 and :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_isp_xnr3_vmem_params` for vector
+			 memory.
+TNR			 Temporal Noise Reduction block compares successive
+			 frames in time to remove anomalies / noise in pixel
+			 values. :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_isp_tnr3_vmem_params` and
+			 :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_isp_tnr3_params` are defined for ISP
+			 vector and data memory respectively.
+======================== =======================================================
+
+Other often encountered acronyms not listed in above table:
+
+	ACC
+		Accelerator cluster
+	AWB_FR
+		Auto white balance filter response statistics
+	BDS
+		Bayer downscaler parameters
+	CCM
+		Color correction matrix coefficients
+	IEFd
+		Image enhancement filter directed
+	Obgrid
+		Optical black level compensation
+	OSYS
+		Output system configuration
+	ROI
+		Region of interest
+	YDS
+		Y down sampling
+	YTM
+		Y-tone mapping
+
+A few stages of the pipeline will be executed by firmware running on the ISP
+processor, while many others will use a set of fixed hardware blocks also
+called accelerator cluster (ACC) to crunch pixel data and produce statistics.
+
+ACC parameters of individual algorithms, as defined by
+:c:type:`ipu3_uapi_acc_param`, can be chosen to be applied by the user
+space through struct :c:type:`ipu3_uapi_flags` embedded in
+:c:type:`ipu3_uapi_params` structure. For parameters that are configured as
+not enabled by the user space, the corresponding structs are ignored by the
+driver, in which case the existing configuration of the algorithm will be
+preserved.
+
 References
 ==========
 
-.. [#f5] include/uapi/linux/intel-ipu3.h
+.. [#f5] drivers/staging/media/ipu3/include/intel-ipu3.h
 
 .. [#f1] https://github.com/intel/nvt
 
diff --git a/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/pxa_camera.rst b/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/pxa_camera.rst
index e4fbca755e1a..ee1bd96b66dd 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/pxa_camera.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/pxa_camera.rst
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ Global video workflow
 ---------------------
 
 a) QCI stopped
-   Initialy, the QCI interface is stopped.
+   Initially, the QCI interface is stopped.
    When a buffer is queued (pxa_videobuf_ops->buf_queue), the QCI starts.
 
 b) QCI started
diff --git a/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/qcom_camss.rst b/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/qcom_camss.rst
index 6b15385b12b3..a72e17d09cb7 100644
--- a/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/qcom_camss.rst
+++ b/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/qcom_camss.rst
@@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ The considerations to split the driver in this particular way are as follows:
 - representing CSIPHY and CSID modules by a separate sub-device for each module
   allows to model the hardware links between these modules;
 - representing VFE by a separate sub-devices for each input interface allows
-  to use the input interfaces concurently and independently as this is
+  to use the input interfaces concurrently and independently as this is
   supported by the hardware;
 - representing ISPIF by a number of sub-devices equal to the number of CSID
   sub-devices allows to create linear media controller pipelines when using two
diff --git a/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/zoran.rst b/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/zoran.rst
deleted file mode 100644
index d2724a863d1d..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/zoran.rst
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,583 +0,0 @@
-.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
-
-The Zoran driver
-================
-
-unified zoran driver (zr360x7, zoran, buz, dc10(+), dc30(+), lml33)
-
-website: http://mjpeg.sourceforge.net/driver-zoran/
-
-
-Frequently Asked Questions
---------------------------
-
-What cards are supported
-------------------------
-
-Iomega Buz, Linux Media Labs LML33/LML33R10, Pinnacle/Miro
-DC10/DC10+/DC30/DC30+ and related boards (available under various names).
-
-Iomega Buz
-~~~~~~~~~~
-
-* Zoran zr36067 PCI controller
-* Zoran zr36060 MJPEG codec
-* Philips saa7111 TV decoder
-* Philips saa7185 TV encoder
-
-Drivers to use: videodev, i2c-core, i2c-algo-bit,
-videocodec, saa7111, saa7185, zr36060, zr36067
-
-Inputs/outputs: Composite and S-video
-
-Norms: PAL, SECAM (720x576 @ 25 fps), NTSC (720x480 @ 29.97 fps)
-
-Card number: 7
-
-AverMedia 6 Eyes AVS6EYES
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-* Zoran zr36067 PCI controller
-* Zoran zr36060 MJPEG codec
-* Samsung ks0127 TV decoder
-* Conexant bt866  TV encoder
-
-Drivers to use: videodev, i2c-core, i2c-algo-bit,
-videocodec, ks0127, bt866, zr36060, zr36067
-
-Inputs/outputs:
-	Six physical inputs. 1-6 are composite,
-	1-2, 3-4, 5-6 doubles as S-video,
-	1-3 triples as component.
-	One composite output.
-
-Norms: PAL, SECAM (720x576 @ 25 fps), NTSC (720x480 @ 29.97 fps)
-
-Card number: 8
-
-.. note::
-
-   Not autodetected, card=8 is necessary.
-
-Linux Media Labs LML33
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-* Zoran zr36067 PCI controller
-* Zoran zr36060 MJPEG codec
-* Brooktree bt819 TV decoder
-* Brooktree bt856 TV encoder
-
-Drivers to use: videodev, i2c-core, i2c-algo-bit,
-videocodec, bt819, bt856, zr36060, zr36067
-
-Inputs/outputs: Composite and S-video
-
-Norms: PAL (720x576 @ 25 fps), NTSC (720x480 @ 29.97 fps)
-
-Card number: 5
-
-Linux Media Labs LML33R10
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-* Zoran zr36067 PCI controller
-* Zoran zr36060 MJPEG codec
-* Philips saa7114 TV decoder
-* Analog Devices adv7170 TV encoder
-
-Drivers to use: videodev, i2c-core, i2c-algo-bit,
-videocodec, saa7114, adv7170, zr36060, zr36067
-
-Inputs/outputs: Composite and S-video
-
-Norms: PAL (720x576 @ 25 fps), NTSC (720x480 @ 29.97 fps)
-
-Card number: 6
-
-Pinnacle/Miro DC10(new)
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-* Zoran zr36057 PCI controller
-* Zoran zr36060 MJPEG codec
-* Philips saa7110a TV decoder
-* Analog Devices adv7176 TV encoder
-
-Drivers to use: videodev, i2c-core, i2c-algo-bit,
-videocodec, saa7110, adv7175, zr36060, zr36067
-
-Inputs/outputs: Composite, S-video and Internal
-
-Norms: PAL, SECAM (768x576 @ 25 fps), NTSC (640x480 @ 29.97 fps)
-
-Card number: 1
-
-Pinnacle/Miro DC10+
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-* Zoran zr36067 PCI controller
-* Zoran zr36060 MJPEG codec
-* Philips saa7110a TV decoder
-* Analog Devices adv7176 TV encoder
-
-Drivers to use: videodev, i2c-core, i2c-algo-bit,
-videocodec, sa7110, adv7175, zr36060, zr36067
-
-Inputs/outputs: Composite, S-video and Internal
-
-Norms: PAL, SECAM (768x576 @ 25 fps), NTSC (640x480 @ 29.97 fps)
-
-Card number: 2
-
-Pinnacle/Miro DC10(old)
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-* Zoran zr36057 PCI controller
-* Zoran zr36050 MJPEG codec
-* Zoran zr36016 Video Front End or Fuji md0211 Video Front End (clone?)
-* Micronas vpx3220a TV decoder
-* mse3000 TV encoder or Analog Devices adv7176 TV encoder
-
-Drivers to use: videodev, i2c-core, i2c-algo-bit,
-videocodec, vpx3220, mse3000/adv7175, zr36050, zr36016, zr36067
-
-Inputs/outputs: Composite, S-video and Internal
-
-Norms: PAL, SECAM (768x576 @ 25 fps), NTSC (640x480 @ 29.97 fps)
-
-Card number: 0
-
-Pinnacle/Miro DC30
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-* Zoran zr36057 PCI controller
-* Zoran zr36050 MJPEG codec
-* Zoran zr36016 Video Front End
-* Micronas vpx3225d/vpx3220a/vpx3216b TV decoder
-* Analog Devices adv7176 TV encoder
-
-Drivers to use: videodev, i2c-core, i2c-algo-bit,
-videocodec, vpx3220/vpx3224, adv7175, zr36050, zr36016, zr36067
-
-Inputs/outputs: Composite, S-video and Internal
-
-Norms: PAL, SECAM (768x576 @ 25 fps), NTSC (640x480 @ 29.97 fps)
-
-Card number: 3
-
-Pinnacle/Miro DC30+
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-* Zoran zr36067 PCI controller
-* Zoran zr36050 MJPEG codec
-* Zoran zr36016 Video Front End
-* Micronas vpx3225d/vpx3220a/vpx3216b TV decoder
-* Analog Devices adv7176 TV encoder
-
-Drivers to use: videodev, i2c-core, i2c-algo-bit,
-videocodec, vpx3220/vpx3224, adv7175, zr36050, zr36015, zr36067
-
-Inputs/outputs: Composite, S-video and Internal
-
-Norms: PAL, SECAM (768x576 @ 25 fps), NTSC (640x480 @ 29.97 fps)
-
-Card number: 4
-
-.. note::
-
-   #) No module for the mse3000 is available yet
-   #) No module for the vpx3224 is available yet
-
-1.1 What the TV decoder can do an what not
-------------------------------------------
-
-The best know TV standards are NTSC/PAL/SECAM. but for decoding a frame that
-information is not enough. There are several formats of the TV standards.
-And not every TV decoder is able to handle every format. Also the every
-combination is supported by the driver. There are currently 11 different
-tv broadcast formats all aver the world.
-
-The CCIR defines parameters needed for broadcasting the signal.
-The CCIR has defined different standards: A,B,D,E,F,G,D,H,I,K,K1,L,M,N,...
-The CCIR says not much about the colorsystem used !!!
-And talking about a colorsystem says not to much about how it is broadcast.
-
-The CCIR standards A,E,F are not used any more.
-
-When you speak about NTSC, you usually mean the standard: CCIR - M using
-the NTSC colorsystem which is used in the USA, Japan, Mexico, Canada
-and a few others.
-
-When you talk about PAL, you usually mean: CCIR - B/G using the PAL
-colorsystem which is used in many Countries.
-
-When you talk about SECAM, you mean: CCIR - L using the SECAM Colorsystem
-which is used in France, and a few others.
-
-There the other version of SECAM, CCIR - D/K is used in Bulgaria, China,
-Slovakai, Hungary, Korea (Rep.), Poland, Rumania and a others.
-
-The CCIR - H uses the PAL colorsystem (sometimes SECAM) and is used in
-Egypt, Libya, Sri Lanka, Syrain Arab. Rep.
-
-The CCIR - I uses the PAL colorsystem, and is used in Great Britain, Hong Kong,
-Ireland, Nigeria, South Africa.
-
-The CCIR - N uses the PAL colorsystem and PAL frame size but the NTSC framerate,
-and is used in Argentinia, Uruguay, an a few others
-
-We do not talk about how the audio is broadcast !
-
-A rather good sites about the TV standards are:
-http://www.sony.jp/support/
-http://info.electronicwerkstatt.de/bereiche/fernsehtechnik/frequenzen_und_normen/Fernsehnormen/
-and http://www.cabl.com/restaurant/channel.html
-
-Other weird things around: NTSC 4.43 is a modificated NTSC, which is mainly
-used in PAL VCR's that are able to play back NTSC. PAL 60 seems to be the same
-as NTSC 4.43 . The Datasheets also talk about NTSC 44, It seems as if it would
-be the same as NTSC 4.43.
-NTSC Combs seems to be a decoder mode where the decoder uses a comb filter
-to split coma and luma instead of a Delay line.
-
-But I did not defiantly find out what NTSC Comb is.
-
-Philips saa7111 TV decoder
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- was introduced in 1997, is used in the BUZ and
-- can handle: PAL B/G/H/I, PAL N, PAL M, NTSC M, NTSC N, NTSC 4.43 and SECAM
-
-Philips saa7110a TV decoder
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- was introduced in 1995, is used in the Pinnacle/Miro DC10(new), DC10+ and
-- can handle: PAL B/G, NTSC M and SECAM
-
-Philips saa7114 TV decoder
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- was introduced in 2000, is used in the LML33R10 and
-- can handle: PAL B/G/D/H/I/N, PAL N, PAL M, NTSC M, NTSC 4.43 and SECAM
-
-Brooktree bt819 TV decoder
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- was introduced in 1996, and is used in the LML33 and
-- can handle: PAL B/D/G/H/I, NTSC M
-
-Micronas vpx3220a TV decoder
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- was introduced in 1996, is used in the DC30 and DC30+ and
-- can handle: PAL B/G/H/I, PAL N, PAL M, NTSC M, NTSC 44, PAL 60, SECAM,NTSC Comb
-
-Samsung ks0127 TV decoder
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- is used in the AVS6EYES card and
-- can handle: NTSC-M/N/44, PAL-M/N/B/G/H/I/D/K/L and SECAM
-
-
-What the TV encoder can do an what not
---------------------------------------
-
-The TV encoder are doing the "same" as the decoder, but in the oder direction.
-You feed them digital data and the generate a Composite or SVHS signal.
-For information about the colorsystems and TV norm take a look in the
-TV decoder section.
-
-Philips saa7185 TV Encoder
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- was introduced in 1996, is used in the BUZ
-- can generate: PAL B/G, NTSC M
-
-Brooktree bt856 TV Encoder
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- was introduced in 1994, is used in the LML33
-- can generate: PAL B/D/G/H/I/N, PAL M, NTSC M, PAL-N (Argentina)
-
-Analog Devices adv7170 TV Encoder
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- was introduced in 2000, is used in the LML300R10
-- can generate: PAL B/D/G/H/I/N, PAL M, NTSC M, PAL 60
-
-Analog Devices adv7175 TV Encoder
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- was introduced in 1996, is used in the DC10, DC10+, DC10 old, DC30, DC30+
-- can generate: PAL B/D/G/H/I/N, PAL M, NTSC M
-
-ITT mse3000 TV encoder
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- was introduced in 1991, is used in the DC10 old
-- can generate: PAL , NTSC , SECAM
-
-Conexant bt866 TV encoder
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- is used in AVS6EYES, and
-- can generate: NTSC/PAL, PAL­M, PAL­N
-
-The adv717x, should be able to produce PAL N. But you find nothing PAL N
-specific in the registers. Seem that you have to reuse a other standard
-to generate PAL N, maybe it would work if you use the PAL M settings.
-
-How do I get this damn thing to work
-------------------------------------
-
-Load zr36067.o. If it can't autodetect your card, use the card=X insmod
-option with X being the card number as given in the previous section.
-To have more than one card, use card=X1[,X2[,X3,[X4[..]]]]
-
-To automate this, add the following to your /etc/modprobe.d/zoran.conf:
-
-options zr36067 card=X1[,X2[,X3[,X4[..]]]]
-alias char-major-81-0 zr36067
-
-One thing to keep in mind is that this doesn't load zr36067.o itself yet. It
-just automates loading. If you start using xawtv, the device won't load on
-some systems, since you're trying to load modules as a user, which is not
-allowed ("permission denied"). A quick workaround is to add 'Load "v4l"' to
-XF86Config-4 when you use X by default, or to run 'v4l-conf -c <device>' in
-one of your startup scripts (normally rc.local) if you don't use X. Both
-make sure that the modules are loaded on startup, under the root account.
-
-What mainboard should I use (or why doesn't my card work)
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-<insert lousy disclaimer here>. In short: good=SiS/Intel, bad=VIA.
-
-Experience tells us that people with a Buz, on average, have more problems
-than users with a DC10+/LML33. Also, it tells us that people owning a VIA-
-based mainboard (ktXXX, MVP3) have more problems than users with a mainboard
-based on a different chipset. Here's some notes from Andrew Stevens:
-
-Here's my experience of using LML33 and Buz on various motherboards:
-
-- VIA MVP3
-	- Forget it. Pointless. Doesn't work.
-- Intel 430FX (Pentium 200)
-	- LML33 perfect, Buz tolerable (3 or 4 frames dropped per movie)
-- Intel 440BX (early stepping)
-	- LML33 tolerable. Buz starting to get annoying (6-10 frames/hour)
-- Intel 440BX (late stepping)
-	- Buz tolerable, LML3 almost perfect (occasional single frame drops)
-- SiS735
-	- LML33 perfect, Buz tolerable.
-- VIA KT133(*)
-	- LML33 starting to get annoying, Buz poor enough that I have up.
-
-- Both 440BX boards were dual CPU versions.
-
-Bernhard Praschinger later added:
-
-- AMD 751
-	- Buz perfect-tolerable
-- AMD 760
-	- Buz perfect-tolerable
-
-In general, people on the user mailinglist won't give you much of a chance
-if you have a VIA-based motherboard. They may be cheap, but sometimes, you'd
-rather want to spend some more money on better boards. In general, VIA
-mainboard's IDE/PCI performance will also suck badly compared to others.
-You'll noticed the DC10+/DC30+ aren't mentioned anywhere in the overview.
-Basically, you can assume that if the Buz works, the LML33 will work too. If
-the LML33 works, the DC10+/DC30+ will work too. They're most tolerant to
-different mainboard chipsets from all of the supported cards.
-
-If you experience timeouts during capture, buy a better mainboard or lower
-the quality/buffersize during capture (see 'Concerning buffer sizes, quality,
-output size etc.'). If it hangs, there's little we can do as of now. Check
-your IRQs and make sure the card has its own interrupts.
-
-Programming interface
----------------------
-
-This driver conforms to video4linux2. Support for V4L1 and for the custom
-zoran ioctls has been removed in kernel 2.6.38.
-
-For programming example, please, look at lavrec.c and lavplay.c code in
-the MJPEG-tools (http://mjpeg.sf.net/).
-
-Additional notes for software developers:
-
-   The driver returns maxwidth and maxheight parameters according to
-   the current TV standard (norm). Therefore, the software which
-   communicates with the driver and "asks" for these parameters should
-   first set the correct norm. Well, it seems logically correct: TV
-   standard is "more constant" for current country than geometry
-   settings of a variety of TV capture cards which may work in ITU or
-   square pixel format.
-
-Applications
-------------
-
-Applications known to work with this driver:
-
-TV viewing:
-
-* xawtv
-* kwintv
-* probably any TV application that supports video4linux or video4linux2.
-
-MJPEG capture/playback:
-
-* mjpegtools/lavtools (or Linux Video Studio)
-* gstreamer
-* mplayer
-
-General raw capture:
-
-* xawtv
-* gstreamer
-* probably any application that supports video4linux or video4linux2
-
-Video editing:
-
-* Cinelerra
-* MainActor
-* mjpegtools (or Linux Video Studio)
-
-
-Concerning buffer sizes, quality, output size etc.
---------------------------------------------------
-
-
-The zr36060 can do 1:2 JPEG compression. This is really the theoretical
-maximum that the chipset can reach. The driver can, however, limit compression
-to a maximum (size) of 1:4. The reason for this is that some cards (e.g. Buz)
-can't handle 1:2 compression without stopping capture after only a few minutes.
-With 1:4, it'll mostly work. If you have a Buz, use 'low_bitrate=1' to go into
-1:4 max. compression mode.
-
-100% JPEG quality is thus 1:2 compression in practice. So for a full PAL frame
-(size 720x576). The JPEG fields are stored in YUY2 format, so the size of the
-fields are 720x288x16/2 bits/field (2 fields/frame) = 207360 bytes/field x 2 =
-414720 bytes/frame (add some more bytes for headers and DHT (huffman)/DQT
-(quantization) tables, and you'll get to something like 512kB per frame for
-1:2 compression. For 1:4 compression, you'd have frames of half this size.
-
-Some additional explanation by Martin Samuelsson, which also explains the
-importance of buffer sizes:
---
-> Hmm, I do not think it is really that way. With the current (downloaded
-> at 18:00 Monday) driver I get that output sizes for 10 sec:
-> -q 50 -b 128 : 24.283.332 Bytes
-> -q 50 -b 256 : 48.442.368
-> -q 25 -b 128 : 24.655.992
-> -q 25 -b 256 : 25.859.820
-
-I woke up, and can't go to sleep again. I'll kill some time explaining why
-this doesn't look strange to me.
-
-Let's do some math using a width of 704 pixels. I'm not sure whether the Buz
-actually use that number or not, but that's not too important right now.
-
-704x288 pixels, one field, is 202752 pixels. Divided by 64 pixels per block;
-3168 blocks per field. Each pixel consist of two bytes; 128 bytes per block;
-1024 bits per block. 100% in the new driver mean 1:2 compression; the maximum
-output becomes 512 bits per block. Actually 510, but 512 is simpler to use
-for calculations.
-
-Let's say that we specify d1q50. We thus want 256 bits per block; times 3168
-becomes 811008 bits; 101376 bytes per field. We're talking raw bits and bytes
-here, so we don't need to do any fancy corrections for bits-per-pixel or such
-things. 101376 bytes per field.
-
-d1 video contains two fields per frame. Those sum up to 202752 bytes per
-frame, and one of those frames goes into each buffer.
-
-But wait a second! -b128 gives 128kB buffers! It's not possible to cram
-202752 bytes of JPEG data into 128kB!
-
-This is what the driver notice and automatically compensate for in your
-examples. Let's do some math using this information:
-
-128kB is 131072 bytes. In this buffer, we want to store two fields, which
-leaves 65536 bytes for each field. Using 3168 blocks per field, we get
-20.68686868... available bytes per block; 165 bits. We can't allow the
-request for 256 bits per block when there's only 165 bits available! The -q50
-option is silently overridden, and the -b128 option takes precedence, leaving
-us with the equivalence of -q32.
-
-This gives us a data rate of 165 bits per block, which, times 3168, sums up
-to 65340 bytes per field, out of the allowed 65536. The current driver has
-another level of rate limiting; it won't accept -q values that fill more than
-6/8 of the specified buffers. (I'm not sure why. "Playing it safe" seem to be
-a safe bet. Personally, I think I would have lowered requested-bits-per-block
-by one, or something like that.) We can't use 165 bits per block, but have to
-lower it again, to 6/8 of the available buffer space: We end up with 124 bits
-per block, the equivalence of -q24. With 128kB buffers, you can't use greater
-than -q24 at -d1. (And PAL, and 704 pixels width...)
-
-The third example is limited to -q24 through the same process. The second
-example, using very similar calculations, is limited to -q48. The only
-example that actually grab at the specified -q value is the last one, which
-is clearly visible, looking at the file size.
---
-
-Conclusion: the quality of the resulting movie depends on buffer size, quality,
-whether or not you use 'low_bitrate=1' as insmod option for the zr36060.c
-module to do 1:4 instead of 1:2 compression, etc.
-
-If you experience timeouts, lowering the quality/buffersize or using
-'low_bitrate=1 as insmod option for zr36060.o might actually help, as is
-proven by the Buz.
-
-It hangs/crashes/fails/whatevers! Help!
----------------------------------------
-
-Make sure that the card has its own interrupts (see /proc/interrupts), check
-the output of dmesg at high verbosity (load zr36067.o with debug=2,
-load all other modules with debug=1). Check that your mainboard is favorable
-(see question 2) and if not, test the card in another computer. Also see the
-notes given in question 3 and try lowering quality/buffersize/capturesize
-if recording fails after a period of time.
-
-If all this doesn't help, give a clear description of the problem including
-detailed hardware information (memory+brand, mainboard+chipset+brand, which
-MJPEG card, processor, other PCI cards that might be of interest), give the
-system PnP information (/proc/interrupts, /proc/dma, /proc/devices), and give
-the kernel version, driver version, glibc version, gcc version and any other
-information that might possibly be of interest. Also provide the dmesg output
-at high verbosity. See 'Contacting' on how to contact the developers.
-
-Maintainers/Contacting
-----------------------
-
-The driver is currently maintained by Laurent Pinchart and Ronald Bultje
-(<laurent.pinchart@skynet.be> and <rbultje@ronald.bitfreak.net>). For bug
-reports or questions, please contact the mailinglist instead of the developers
-individually. For user questions (i.e. bug reports or how-to questions), send
-an email to <mjpeg-users@lists.sf.net>, for developers (i.e. if you want to
-help programming), send an email to <mjpeg-developer@lists.sf.net>. See
-http://www.sf.net/projects/mjpeg/ for subscription information.
-
-For bug reports, be sure to include all the information as described in
-the section 'It hangs/crashes/fails/whatevers! Help!'. Please make sure
-you're using the latest version (http://mjpeg.sf.net/driver-zoran/).
-
-Previous maintainers/developers of this driver include Serguei Miridonov
-<mirsev@cicese.mx>, Wolfgang Scherr <scherr@net4you.net>, Dave Perks
-<dperks@ibm.net> and Rainer Johanni <Rainer@Johanni.de>.
-
-Driver's License
-----------------
-
-    This driver is distributed under the terms of the General Public License.
-
-    This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
-    it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
-    the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
-    (at your option) any later version.
-
-    This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-    but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-    MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
-    GNU General Public License for more details.
-
-See http://www.gnu.org/ for more information.
diff --git a/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt b/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt
index 1c22b21ae922..f70ebcdfe592 100644
--- a/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt
+++ b/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt
@@ -1937,21 +1937,6 @@ There are some more advanced barrier functions:
      information on consistent memory.
 
 
-MMIO WRITE BARRIER
-------------------
-
-The Linux kernel also has a special barrier for use with memory-mapped I/O
-writes:
-
-	mmiowb();
-
-This is a variation on the mandatory write barrier that causes writes to weakly
-ordered I/O regions to be partially ordered.  Its effects may go beyond the
-CPU->Hardware interface and actually affect the hardware at some level.
-
-See the subsection "Acquires vs I/O accesses" for more information.
-
-
 ===============================
 IMPLICIT KERNEL MEMORY BARRIERS
 ===============================
@@ -2317,75 +2302,6 @@ But it won't see any of:
 	*E, *F or *G following RELEASE Q
 
 
-
-ACQUIRES VS I/O ACCESSES
-------------------------
-
-Under certain circumstances (especially involving NUMA), I/O accesses within
-two spinlocked sections on two different CPUs may be seen as interleaved by the
-PCI bridge, because the PCI bridge does not necessarily participate in the
-cache-coherence protocol, and is therefore incapable of issuing the required
-read memory barriers.
-
-For example:
-
-	CPU 1				CPU 2
-	===============================	===============================
-	spin_lock(Q)
-	writel(0, ADDR)
-	writel(1, DATA);
-	spin_unlock(Q);
-					spin_lock(Q);
-					writel(4, ADDR);
-					writel(5, DATA);
-					spin_unlock(Q);
-
-may be seen by the PCI bridge as follows:
-
-	STORE *ADDR = 0, STORE *ADDR = 4, STORE *DATA = 1, STORE *DATA = 5
-
-which would probably cause the hardware to malfunction.
-
-
-What is necessary here is to intervene with an mmiowb() before dropping the
-spinlock, for example:
-
-	CPU 1				CPU 2
-	===============================	===============================
-	spin_lock(Q)
-	writel(0, ADDR)
-	writel(1, DATA);
-	mmiowb();
-	spin_unlock(Q);
-					spin_lock(Q);
-					writel(4, ADDR);
-					writel(5, DATA);
-					mmiowb();
-					spin_unlock(Q);
-
-this will ensure that the two stores issued on CPU 1 appear at the PCI bridge
-before either of the stores issued on CPU 2.
-
-
-Furthermore, following a store by a load from the same device obviates the need
-for the mmiowb(), because the load forces the store to complete before the load
-is performed:
-
-	CPU 1				CPU 2
-	===============================	===============================
-	spin_lock(Q)
-	writel(0, ADDR)
-	a = readl(DATA);
-	spin_unlock(Q);
-					spin_lock(Q);
-					writel(4, ADDR);
-					b = readl(DATA);
-					spin_unlock(Q);
-
-
-See Documentation/driver-api/device-io.rst for more information.
-
-
 =================================
 WHERE ARE MEMORY BARRIERS NEEDED?
 =================================
@@ -2532,16 +2448,9 @@ the device to malfunction.
 Inside of the Linux kernel, I/O should be done through the appropriate accessor
 routines - such as inb() or writel() - which know how to make such accesses
 appropriately sequential.  While this, for the most part, renders the explicit
-use of memory barriers unnecessary, there are a couple of situations where they
-might be needed:
-
- (1) On some systems, I/O stores are not strongly ordered across all CPUs, and
-     so for _all_ general drivers locks should be used and mmiowb() must be
-     issued prior to unlocking the critical section.
-
- (2) If the accessor functions are used to refer to an I/O memory window with
-     relaxed memory access properties, then _mandatory_ memory barriers are
-     required to enforce ordering.
+use of memory barriers unnecessary, if the accessor functions are used to refer
+to an I/O memory window with relaxed memory access properties, then _mandatory_
+memory barriers are required to enforce ordering.
 
 See Documentation/driver-api/device-io.rst for more information.
 
@@ -2586,8 +2495,7 @@ explicit barriers are used.
 
 Normally this won't be a problem because the I/O accesses done inside such
 sections will include synchronous load operations on strictly ordered I/O
-registers that form implicit I/O barriers.  If this isn't sufficient then an
-mmiowb() may need to be used explicitly.
+registers that form implicit I/O barriers.
 
 
 A similar situation may occur between an interrupt routine and two routines
@@ -2599,71 +2507,114 @@ likely, then interrupt-disabling locks should be used to guarantee ordering.
 KERNEL I/O BARRIER EFFECTS
 ==========================
 
-When accessing I/O memory, drivers should use the appropriate accessor
-functions:
-
- (*) inX(), outX():
-
-     These are intended to talk to I/O space rather than memory space, but
-     that's primarily a CPU-specific concept.  The i386 and x86_64 processors
-     do indeed have special I/O space access cycles and instructions, but many
-     CPUs don't have such a concept.
-
-     The PCI bus, amongst others, defines an I/O space concept which - on such
-     CPUs as i386 and x86_64 - readily maps to the CPU's concept of I/O
-     space.  However, it may also be mapped as a virtual I/O space in the CPU's
-     memory map, particularly on those CPUs that don't support alternate I/O
-     spaces.
-
-     Accesses to this space may be fully synchronous (as on i386), but
-     intermediary bridges (such as the PCI host bridge) may not fully honour
-     that.
-
-     They are guaranteed to be fully ordered with respect to each other.
-
-     They are not guaranteed to be fully ordered with respect to other types of
-     memory and I/O operation.
+Interfacing with peripherals via I/O accesses is deeply architecture and device
+specific. Therefore, drivers which are inherently non-portable may rely on
+specific behaviours of their target systems in order to achieve synchronization
+in the most lightweight manner possible. For drivers intending to be portable
+between multiple architectures and bus implementations, the kernel offers a
+series of accessor functions that provide various degrees of ordering
+guarantees:
 
  (*) readX(), writeX():
 
-     Whether these are guaranteed to be fully ordered and uncombined with
-     respect to each other on the issuing CPU depends on the characteristics
-     defined for the memory window through which they're accessing.  On later
-     i386 architecture machines, for example, this is controlled by way of the
-     MTRR registers.
+	The readX() and writeX() MMIO accessors take a pointer to the
+	peripheral being accessed as an __iomem * parameter. For pointers
+	mapped with the default I/O attributes (e.g. those returned by
+	ioremap()), the ordering guarantees are as follows:
+
+	1. All readX() and writeX() accesses to the same peripheral are ordered
+	   with respect to each other. This ensures that MMIO register accesses
+	   by the same CPU thread to a particular device will arrive in program
+	   order.
+
+	2. A writeX() issued by a CPU thread holding a spinlock is ordered
+	   before a writeX() to the same peripheral from another CPU thread
+	   issued after a later acquisition of the same spinlock. This ensures
+	   that MMIO register writes to a particular device issued while holding
+	   a spinlock will arrive in an order consistent with acquisitions of
+	   the lock.
+
+	3. A writeX() by a CPU thread to the peripheral will first wait for the
+	   completion of all prior writes to memory either issued by, or
+	   propagated to, the same thread. This ensures that writes by the CPU
+	   to an outbound DMA buffer allocated by dma_alloc_coherent() will be
+	   visible to a DMA engine when the CPU writes to its MMIO control
+	   register to trigger the transfer.
+
+	4. A readX() by a CPU thread from the peripheral will complete before
+	   any subsequent reads from memory by the same thread can begin. This
+	   ensures that reads by the CPU from an incoming DMA buffer allocated
+	   by dma_alloc_coherent() will not see stale data after reading from
+	   the DMA engine's MMIO status register to establish that the DMA
+	   transfer has completed.
+
+	5. A readX() by a CPU thread from the peripheral will complete before
+	   any subsequent delay() loop can begin execution on the same thread.
+	   This ensures that two MMIO register writes by the CPU to a peripheral
+	   will arrive at least 1us apart if the first write is immediately read
+	   back with readX() and udelay(1) is called prior to the second
+	   writeX():
+
+		writel(42, DEVICE_REGISTER_0); // Arrives at the device...
+		readl(DEVICE_REGISTER_0);
+		udelay(1);
+		writel(42, DEVICE_REGISTER_1); // ...at least 1us before this.
+
+	The ordering properties of __iomem pointers obtained with non-default
+	attributes (e.g. those returned by ioremap_wc()) are specific to the
+	underlying architecture and therefore the guarantees listed above cannot
+	generally be relied upon for accesses to these types of mappings.
+
+ (*) readX_relaxed(), writeX_relaxed():
+
+	These are similar to readX() and writeX(), but provide weaker memory
+	ordering guarantees. Specifically, they do not guarantee ordering with
+	respect to locking, normal memory accesses or delay() loops (i.e.
+	bullets 2-5 above) but they are still guaranteed to be ordered with
+	respect to other accesses from the same CPU thread to the same
+	peripheral when operating on __iomem pointers mapped with the default
+	I/O attributes.
+
+ (*) readsX(), writesX():
+
+	The readsX() and writesX() MMIO accessors are designed for accessing
+	register-based, memory-mapped FIFOs residing on peripherals that are not
+	capable of performing DMA. Consequently, they provide only the ordering
+	guarantees of readX_relaxed() and writeX_relaxed(), as documented above.
 
-     Ordinarily, these will be guaranteed to be fully ordered and uncombined,
-     provided they're not accessing a prefetchable device.
+ (*) inX(), outX():
 
-     However, intermediary hardware (such as a PCI bridge) may indulge in
-     deferral if it so wishes; to flush a store, a load from the same location
-     is preferred[*], but a load from the same device or from configuration
-     space should suffice for PCI.
+	The inX() and outX() accessors are intended to access legacy port-mapped
+	I/O peripherals, which may require special instructions on some
+	architectures (notably x86). The port number of the peripheral being
+	accessed is passed as an argument.
 
-     [*] NOTE! attempting to load from the same location as was written to may
-	 cause a malfunction - consider the 16550 Rx/Tx serial registers for
-	 example.
+	Since many CPU architectures ultimately access these peripherals via an
+	internal virtual memory mapping, the portable ordering guarantees
+	provided by inX() and outX() are the same as those provided by readX()
+	and writeX() respectively when accessing a mapping with the default I/O
+	attributes.
 
-     Used with prefetchable I/O memory, an mmiowb() barrier may be required to
-     force stores to be ordered.
+	Device drivers may expect outX() to emit a non-posted write transaction
+	that waits for a completion response from the I/O peripheral before
+	returning. This is not guaranteed by all architectures and is therefore
+	not part of the portable ordering semantics.
 
-     Please refer to the PCI specification for more information on interactions
-     between PCI transactions.
+ (*) insX(), outsX():
 
- (*) readX_relaxed(), writeX_relaxed()
+	As above, the insX() and outsX() accessors provide the same ordering
+	guarantees as readsX() and writesX() respectively when accessing a
+	mapping with the default I/O attributes.
 
-     These are similar to readX() and writeX(), but provide weaker memory
-     ordering guarantees.  Specifically, they do not guarantee ordering with
-     respect to normal memory accesses (e.g. DMA buffers) nor do they guarantee
-     ordering with respect to LOCK or UNLOCK operations.  If the latter is
-     required, an mmiowb() barrier can be used.  Note that relaxed accesses to
-     the same peripheral are guaranteed to be ordered with respect to each
-     other.
+ (*) ioreadX(), iowriteX():
 
- (*) ioreadX(), iowriteX()
+	These will perform appropriately for the type of access they're actually
+	doing, be it inX()/outX() or readX()/writeX().
 
-     These will perform appropriately for the type of access they're actually
-     doing, be it inX()/outX() or readX()/writeX().
+With the exception of the string accessors (insX(), outsX(), readsX() and
+writesX()), all of the above assume that the underlying peripheral is
+little-endian and will therefore perform byte-swapping operations on big-endian
+architectures.
 
 
 ========================================
diff --git a/Documentation/misc-devices/ibmvmc.rst b/Documentation/misc-devices/ibmvmc.rst
index 46ded79554d4..b46df4ea2b81 100644
--- a/Documentation/misc-devices/ibmvmc.rst
+++ b/Documentation/misc-devices/ibmvmc.rst
@@ -1,4 +1,5 @@
 .. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+
 ======================================================
 IBM Virtual Management Channel Kernel Driver (IBMVMC)
 ======================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/misc-devices/index.rst b/Documentation/misc-devices/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..dfd1f45a3127
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/misc-devices/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+============================================
+Assorted Miscellaneous Devices Documentation
+============================================
+
+This documentation contains information for assorted devices that do not
+fit into other categories.
+
+.. class:: toc-title
+
+	   Table of contents
+
+.. toctree::
+   :maxdepth: 2
+
+   ibmvmc
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/af_xdp.rst b/Documentation/networking/af_xdp.rst
index 4ae4f9d8f8fe..50bccbf68308 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/af_xdp.rst
+++ b/Documentation/networking/af_xdp.rst
@@ -295,6 +295,41 @@ using::
 For XDP_SKB mode, use the switch "-S" instead of "-N" and all options
 can be displayed with "-h", as usual.
 
+FAQ
+=======
+
+Q: I am not seeing any traffic on the socket. What am I doing wrong?
+
+A: When a netdev of a physical NIC is initialized, Linux usually
+   allocates one Rx and Tx queue pair per core. So on a 8 core system,
+   queue ids 0 to 7 will be allocated, one per core. In the AF_XDP
+   bind call or the xsk_socket__create libbpf function call, you
+   specify a specific queue id to bind to and it is only the traffic
+   towards that queue you are going to get on you socket. So in the
+   example above, if you bind to queue 0, you are NOT going to get any
+   traffic that is distributed to queues 1 through 7. If you are
+   lucky, you will see the traffic, but usually it will end up on one
+   of the queues you have not bound to.
+
+   There are a number of ways to solve the problem of getting the
+   traffic you want to the queue id you bound to. If you want to see
+   all the traffic, you can force the netdev to only have 1 queue, queue
+   id 0, and then bind to queue 0. You can use ethtool to do this::
+
+     sudo ethtool -L <interface> combined 1
+
+   If you want to only see part of the traffic, you can program the
+   NIC through ethtool to filter out your traffic to a single queue id
+   that you can bind your XDP socket to. Here is one example in which
+   UDP traffic to and from port 4242 are sent to queue 2::
+
+     sudo ethtool -N <interface> rx-flow-hash udp4 fn
+     sudo ethtool -N <interface> flow-type udp4 src-port 4242 dst-port \
+     4242 action 2
+
+   A number of other ways are possible all up to the capabilitites of
+   the NIC you have.
+
 Credits
 =======
 
@@ -309,4 +344,3 @@ Credits
 - Michael S. Tsirkin
 - Qi Z Zhang
 - Willem de Bruijn
-
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.rst b/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.rst
index 245fb6c0ab6f..18020943ba25 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.rst
+++ b/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.rst
@@ -27,24 +27,8 @@ Load the batman-adv module into your kernel::
   $ insmod batman-adv.ko
 
 The module is now waiting for activation. You must add some interfaces on which
-batman can operate. After loading the module batman advanced will scan your
-systems interfaces to search for compatible interfaces. Once found, it will
-create subfolders in the ``/sys`` directories of each supported interface,
-e.g.::
-
-  $ ls /sys/class/net/eth0/batman_adv/
-  elp_interval iface_status mesh_iface throughput_override
-
-If an interface does not have the ``batman_adv`` subfolder, it probably is not
-supported. Not supported interfaces are: loopback, non-ethernet and batman's
-own interfaces.
-
-Note: After the module was loaded it will continuously watch for new
-interfaces to verify the compatibility. There is no need to reload the module
-if you plug your USB wifi adapter into your machine after batman advanced was
-initially loaded.
-
-The batman-adv soft-interface can be created using the iproute2 tool ``ip``::
+batman-adv can operate. The batman-adv soft-interface can be created using the
+iproute2 tool ``ip``::
 
   $ ip link add name bat0 type batadv
 
@@ -52,57 +36,46 @@ To activate a given interface simply attach it to the ``bat0`` interface::
 
   $ ip link set dev eth0 master bat0
 
-Repeat this step for all interfaces you wish to add. Now batman starts
+Repeat this step for all interfaces you wish to add. Now batman-adv starts
 using/broadcasting on this/these interface(s).
 
-By reading the "iface_status" file you can check its status::
-
-  $ cat /sys/class/net/eth0/batman_adv/iface_status
-  active
-
 To deactivate an interface you have to detach it from the "bat0" interface::
 
   $ ip link set dev eth0 nomaster
 
+The same can also be done using the batctl interface subcommand::
 
-All mesh wide settings can be found in batman's own interface folder::
+  batctl -m bat0 interface create
+  batctl -m bat0 interface add -M eth0
 
-  $ ls /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/
-  aggregated_ogms       fragmentation isolation_mark routing_algo
-  ap_isolation          gw_bandwidth  log_level      vlan0
-  bonding               gw_mode       multicast_mode
-  bridge_loop_avoidance gw_sel_class  network_coding
-  distributed_arp_table hop_penalty   orig_interval
+To detach eth0 and destroy bat0::
 
-There is a special folder for debugging information::
+  batctl -m bat0 interface del -M eth0
+  batctl -m bat0 interface destroy
 
-  $ ls /sys/kernel/debug/batman_adv/bat0/
-  bla_backbone_table log         neighbors         transtable_local
-  bla_claim_table    mcast_flags originators
-  dat_cache          nc          socket
-  gateways           nc_nodes    transtable_global
+There are additional settings for each batadv mesh interface, vlan and hardif
+which can be modified using batctl. Detailed information about this can be found
+in its manual.
 
-Some of the files contain all sort of status information regarding the mesh
-network. For example, you can view the table of originators (mesh
-participants) with::
+For instance, you can check the current originator interval (value
+in milliseconds which determines how often batman-adv sends its broadcast
+packets)::
 
-  $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/batman_adv/bat0/originators
-
-Other files allow to change batman's behaviour to better fit your requirements.
-For instance, you can check the current originator interval (value in
-milliseconds which determines how often batman sends its broadcast packets)::
-
-  $ cat /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/orig_interval
+  $ batctl -M bat0 orig_interval
   1000
 
 and also change its value::
 
-  $ echo 3000 > /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/orig_interval
+  $ batctl -M bat0 orig_interval 3000
 
 In very mobile scenarios, you might want to adjust the originator interval to a
 lower value. This will make the mesh more responsive to topology changes, but
 will also increase the overhead.
 
+Information about the current state can be accessed via the batadv generic
+netlink family. batctl provides human readable version via its debug tables
+subcommands.
+
 
 Usage
 =====
@@ -147,43 +120,16 @@ batman-adv module. When building batman-adv as part of kernel, use "make
 menuconfig" and enable the option ``B.A.T.M.A.N. debugging``
 (``CONFIG_BATMAN_ADV_DEBUG=y``).
 
-Those additional debug messages can be accessed using a special file in
-debugfs::
+Those additional debug messages can be accessed using the perf infrastructure::
 
-  $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/batman_adv/bat0/log
+  $ trace-cmd stream -e batadv:batadv_dbg
 
 The additional debug output is by default disabled. It can be enabled during
-run time. Following log_levels are defined:
-
-.. flat-table::
-
-   * - 0
-     - All debug output disabled
-   * - 1
-     - Enable messages related to routing / flooding / broadcasting
-   * - 2
-     - Enable messages related to route added / changed / deleted
-   * - 4
-     - Enable messages related to translation table operations
-   * - 8
-     - Enable messages related to bridge loop avoidance
-   * - 16
-     - Enable messages related to DAT, ARP snooping and parsing
-   * - 32
-     - Enable messages related to network coding
-   * - 64
-     - Enable messages related to multicast
-   * - 128
-     - Enable messages related to throughput meter
-   * - 255
-     - Enable all messages
-
-The debug output can be changed at runtime using the file
-``/sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/log_level``. e.g.::
-
-  $ echo 6 > /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/log_level
-
-will enable debug messages for when routes change.
+run time::
+
+  $ batctl -m bat0 loglevel routes tt
+
+will enable debug messages for when routes and translation table entries change.
 
 Counters for different types of packets entering and leaving the batman-adv
 module are available through ethtool::
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/checksum-offloads.rst b/Documentation/networking/checksum-offloads.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..905c8a84b103
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/checksum-offloads.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,143 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=================
+Checksum Offloads
+=================
+
+
+Introduction
+============
+
+This document describes a set of techniques in the Linux networking stack to
+take advantage of checksum offload capabilities of various NICs.
+
+The following technologies are described:
+
+* TX Checksum Offload
+* LCO: Local Checksum Offload
+* RCO: Remote Checksum Offload
+
+Things that should be documented here but aren't yet:
+
+* RX Checksum Offload
+* CHECKSUM_UNNECESSARY conversion
+
+
+TX Checksum Offload
+===================
+
+The interface for offloading a transmit checksum to a device is explained in
+detail in comments near the top of include/linux/skbuff.h.
+
+In brief, it allows to request the device fill in a single ones-complement
+checksum defined by the sk_buff fields skb->csum_start and skb->csum_offset.
+The device should compute the 16-bit ones-complement checksum (i.e. the
+'IP-style' checksum) from csum_start to the end of the packet, and fill in the
+result at (csum_start + csum_offset).
+
+Because csum_offset cannot be negative, this ensures that the previous value of
+the checksum field is included in the checksum computation, thus it can be used
+to supply any needed corrections to the checksum (such as the sum of the
+pseudo-header for UDP or TCP).
+
+This interface only allows a single checksum to be offloaded.  Where
+encapsulation is used, the packet may have multiple checksum fields in
+different header layers, and the rest will have to be handled by another
+mechanism such as LCO or RCO.
+
+CRC32c can also be offloaded using this interface, by means of filling
+skb->csum_start and skb->csum_offset as described above, and setting
+skb->csum_not_inet: see skbuff.h comment (section 'D') for more details.
+
+No offloading of the IP header checksum is performed; it is always done in
+software.  This is OK because when we build the IP header, we obviously have it
+in cache, so summing it isn't expensive.  It's also rather short.
+
+The requirements for GSO are more complicated, because when segmenting an
+encapsulated packet both the inner and outer checksums may need to be edited or
+recomputed for each resulting segment.  See the skbuff.h comment (section 'E')
+for more details.
+
+A driver declares its offload capabilities in netdev->hw_features; see
+Documentation/networking/netdev-features.txt for more.  Note that a device
+which only advertises NETIF_F_IP[V6]_CSUM must still obey the csum_start and
+csum_offset given in the SKB; if it tries to deduce these itself in hardware
+(as some NICs do) the driver should check that the values in the SKB match
+those which the hardware will deduce, and if not, fall back to checksumming in
+software instead (with skb_csum_hwoffload_help() or one of the
+skb_checksum_help() / skb_crc32c_csum_help functions, as mentioned in
+include/linux/skbuff.h).
+
+The stack should, for the most part, assume that checksum offload is supported
+by the underlying device.  The only place that should check is
+validate_xmit_skb(), and the functions it calls directly or indirectly.  That
+function compares the offload features requested by the SKB (which may include
+other offloads besides TX Checksum Offload) and, if they are not supported or
+enabled on the device (determined by netdev->features), performs the
+corresponding offload in software.  In the case of TX Checksum Offload, that
+means calling skb_csum_hwoffload_help(skb, features).
+
+
+LCO: Local Checksum Offload
+===========================
+
+LCO is a technique for efficiently computing the outer checksum of an
+encapsulated datagram when the inner checksum is due to be offloaded.
+
+The ones-complement sum of a correctly checksummed TCP or UDP packet is equal
+to the complement of the sum of the pseudo header, because everything else gets
+'cancelled out' by the checksum field.  This is because the sum was
+complemented before being written to the checksum field.
+
+More generally, this holds in any case where the 'IP-style' ones complement
+checksum is used, and thus any checksum that TX Checksum Offload supports.
+
+That is, if we have set up TX Checksum Offload with a start/offset pair, we
+know that after the device has filled in that checksum, the ones complement sum
+from csum_start to the end of the packet will be equal to the complement of
+whatever value we put in the checksum field beforehand.  This allows us to
+compute the outer checksum without looking at the payload: we simply stop
+summing when we get to csum_start, then add the complement of the 16-bit word
+at (csum_start + csum_offset).
+
+Then, when the true inner checksum is filled in (either by hardware or by
+skb_checksum_help()), the outer checksum will become correct by virtue of the
+arithmetic.
+
+LCO is performed by the stack when constructing an outer UDP header for an
+encapsulation such as VXLAN or GENEVE, in udp_set_csum().  Similarly for the
+IPv6 equivalents, in udp6_set_csum().
+
+It is also performed when constructing an IPv4 GRE header, in
+net/ipv4/ip_gre.c:build_header().  It is *not* currently performed when
+constructing an IPv6 GRE header; the GRE checksum is computed over the whole
+packet in net/ipv6/ip6_gre.c:ip6gre_xmit2(), but it should be possible to use
+LCO here as IPv6 GRE still uses an IP-style checksum.
+
+All of the LCO implementations use a helper function lco_csum(), in
+include/linux/skbuff.h.
+
+LCO can safely be used for nested encapsulations; in this case, the outer
+encapsulation layer will sum over both its own header and the 'middle' header.
+This does mean that the 'middle' header will get summed multiple times, but
+there doesn't seem to be a way to avoid that without incurring bigger costs
+(e.g. in SKB bloat).
+
+
+RCO: Remote Checksum Offload
+============================
+
+RCO is a technique for eliding the inner checksum of an encapsulated datagram,
+allowing the outer checksum to be offloaded.  It does, however, involve a
+change to the encapsulation protocols, which the receiver must also support.
+For this reason, it is disabled by default.
+
+RCO is detailed in the following Internet-Drafts:
+
+* https://tools.ietf.org/html/draft-herbert-remotecsumoffload-00
+* https://tools.ietf.org/html/draft-herbert-vxlan-rco-00
+
+In Linux, RCO is implemented individually in each encapsulation protocol, and
+most tunnel types have flags controlling its use.  For instance, VXLAN has the
+flag VXLAN_F_REMCSUM_TX (per struct vxlan_rdst) to indicate that RCO should be
+used when transmitting to a given remote destination.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/checksum-offloads.txt b/Documentation/networking/checksum-offloads.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 27bc09cfcf6d..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/networking/checksum-offloads.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,122 +0,0 @@
-Checksum Offloads in the Linux Networking Stack
-
-
-Introduction
-============
-
-This document describes a set of techniques in the Linux networking stack
- to take advantage of checksum offload capabilities of various NICs.
-
-The following technologies are described:
- * TX Checksum Offload
- * LCO: Local Checksum Offload
- * RCO: Remote Checksum Offload
-
-Things that should be documented here but aren't yet:
- * RX Checksum Offload
- * CHECKSUM_UNNECESSARY conversion
-
-
-TX Checksum Offload
-===================
-
-The interface for offloading a transmit checksum to a device is explained
- in detail in comments near the top of include/linux/skbuff.h.
-In brief, it allows to request the device fill in a single ones-complement
- checksum defined by the sk_buff fields skb->csum_start and
- skb->csum_offset.  The device should compute the 16-bit ones-complement
- checksum (i.e. the 'IP-style' checksum) from csum_start to the end of the
- packet, and fill in the result at (csum_start + csum_offset).
-Because csum_offset cannot be negative, this ensures that the previous
- value of the checksum field is included in the checksum computation, thus
- it can be used to supply any needed corrections to the checksum (such as
- the sum of the pseudo-header for UDP or TCP).
-This interface only allows a single checksum to be offloaded.  Where
- encapsulation is used, the packet may have multiple checksum fields in
- different header layers, and the rest will have to be handled by another
- mechanism such as LCO or RCO.
-CRC32c can also be offloaded using this interface, by means of filling
- skb->csum_start and skb->csum_offset as described above, and setting
- skb->csum_not_inet: see skbuff.h comment (section 'D') for more details.
-No offloading of the IP header checksum is performed; it is always done in
- software.  This is OK because when we build the IP header, we obviously
- have it in cache, so summing it isn't expensive.  It's also rather short.
-The requirements for GSO are more complicated, because when segmenting an
- encapsulated packet both the inner and outer checksums may need to be
- edited or recomputed for each resulting segment.  See the skbuff.h comment
- (section 'E') for more details.
-
-A driver declares its offload capabilities in netdev->hw_features; see
- Documentation/networking/netdev-features.txt for more.  Note that a device
- which only advertises NETIF_F_IP[V6]_CSUM must still obey the csum_start
- and csum_offset given in the SKB; if it tries to deduce these itself in
- hardware (as some NICs do) the driver should check that the values in the
- SKB match those which the hardware will deduce, and if not, fall back to
- checksumming in software instead (with skb_csum_hwoffload_help() or one of
- the skb_checksum_help() / skb_crc32c_csum_help functions, as mentioned in
- include/linux/skbuff.h).
-
-The stack should, for the most part, assume that checksum offload is
- supported by the underlying device.  The only place that should check is
- validate_xmit_skb(), and the functions it calls directly or indirectly.
- That function compares the offload features requested by the SKB (which
- may include other offloads besides TX Checksum Offload) and, if they are
- not supported or enabled on the device (determined by netdev->features),
- performs the corresponding offload in software.  In the case of TX
- Checksum Offload, that means calling skb_csum_hwoffload_help(skb, features).
-
-
-LCO: Local Checksum Offload
-===========================
-
-LCO is a technique for efficiently computing the outer checksum of an
- encapsulated datagram when the inner checksum is due to be offloaded.
-The ones-complement sum of a correctly checksummed TCP or UDP packet is
- equal to the complement of the sum of the pseudo header, because everything
- else gets 'cancelled out' by the checksum field.  This is because the sum was
- complemented before being written to the checksum field.
-More generally, this holds in any case where the 'IP-style' ones complement
- checksum is used, and thus any checksum that TX Checksum Offload supports.
-That is, if we have set up TX Checksum Offload with a start/offset pair, we
- know that after the device has filled in that checksum, the ones
- complement sum from csum_start to the end of the packet will be equal to
- the complement of whatever value we put in the checksum field beforehand.
- This allows us to compute the outer checksum without looking at the payload:
- we simply stop summing when we get to csum_start, then add the complement of
- the 16-bit word at (csum_start + csum_offset).
-Then, when the true inner checksum is filled in (either by hardware or by
- skb_checksum_help()), the outer checksum will become correct by virtue of
- the arithmetic.
-
-LCO is performed by the stack when constructing an outer UDP header for an
- encapsulation such as VXLAN or GENEVE, in udp_set_csum().  Similarly for
- the IPv6 equivalents, in udp6_set_csum().
-It is also performed when constructing an IPv4 GRE header, in
- net/ipv4/ip_gre.c:build_header().  It is *not* currently performed when
- constructing an IPv6 GRE header; the GRE checksum is computed over the
- whole packet in net/ipv6/ip6_gre.c:ip6gre_xmit2(), but it should be
- possible to use LCO here as IPv6 GRE still uses an IP-style checksum.
-All of the LCO implementations use a helper function lco_csum(), in
- include/linux/skbuff.h.
-
-LCO can safely be used for nested encapsulations; in this case, the outer
- encapsulation layer will sum over both its own header and the 'middle'
- header.  This does mean that the 'middle' header will get summed multiple
- times, but there doesn't seem to be a way to avoid that without incurring
- bigger costs (e.g. in SKB bloat).
-
-
-RCO: Remote Checksum Offload
-============================
-
-RCO is a technique for eliding the inner checksum of an encapsulated
- datagram, allowing the outer checksum to be offloaded.  It does, however,
- involve a change to the encapsulation protocols, which the receiver must
- also support.  For this reason, it is disabled by default.
-RCO is detailed in the following Internet-Drafts:
-https://tools.ietf.org/html/draft-herbert-remotecsumoffload-00
-https://tools.ietf.org/html/draft-herbert-vxlan-rco-00
-In Linux, RCO is implemented individually in each encapsulation protocol,
- and most tunnel types have flags controlling its use.  For instance, VXLAN
- has the flag VXLAN_F_REMCSUM_TX (per struct vxlan_rdst) to indicate that
- RCO should be used when transmitting to a given remote destination.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/decnet.txt b/Documentation/networking/decnet.txt
index e12a4900cf72..d192f8b9948b 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/decnet.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/decnet.txt
@@ -22,8 +22,6 @@ you'll need the following options as well...
     CONFIG_DECNET_ROUTER (to be able to add/delete routes)
     CONFIG_NETFILTER (will be required for the DECnet routing daemon)
 
-    CONFIG_DECNET_ROUTE_FWMARK is optional
-
 Don't turn on SIOCGIFCONF support for DECnet unless you are really sure
 that you need it, in general you won't and it can cause ifconfig to
 malfunction.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa2/dpio-driver.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa2/dpio-driver.rst
index a188466b6698..5045df990a4c 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa2/dpio-driver.rst
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa2/dpio-driver.rst
@@ -27,11 +27,12 @@ Driver Overview
 
 The DPIO driver is bound to DPIO objects discovered on the fsl-mc bus and
 provides services that:
-  A) allow other drivers, such as the Ethernet driver, to enqueue and dequeue
+
+  A. allow other drivers, such as the Ethernet driver, to enqueue and dequeue
      frames for their respective objects
-  B) allow drivers to register callbacks for data availability notifications
+  B. allow drivers to register callbacks for data availability notifications
      when data becomes available on a queue or channel
-  C) allow drivers to manage hardware buffer pools
+  C. allow drivers to manage hardware buffer pools
 
 The Linux DPIO driver consists of 3 primary components--
    DPIO object driver-- fsl-mc driver that manages the DPIO object
@@ -140,11 +141,10 @@ QBman portal interface (qbman-portal.c)
 
    The qbman-portal component provides APIs to do the low level hardware
    bit twiddling for operations such as:
-      -initializing Qman software portals
-
-      -building and sending portal commands
 
-      -portal interrupt configuration and processing
+      - initializing Qman software portals
+      - building and sending portal commands
+      - portal interrupt configuration and processing
 
    The qbman-portal APIs are not public to other drivers, and are
    only used by dpio-service.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/index.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..75fa537763a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause)
+
+Vendor Device Drivers
+=====================
+
+Contents:
+
+.. toctree::
+   :maxdepth: 2
+
+   freescale/dpaa2/index
+   intel/e100
+   intel/e1000
+   intel/e1000e
+   intel/fm10k
+   intel/igb
+   intel/igbvf
+   intel/ixgb
+   intel/ixgbe
+   intel/ixgbevf
+   intel/i40e
+   intel/iavf
+   intel/ice
+
+.. only::  subproject
+
+   Indices
+   =======
+
+   * :ref:`genindex`
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/e100.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/e100.rst
index 5e2839b4ec92..2b9f4887beda 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/e100.rst
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/e100.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
 .. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
 
+==============================================================
 Linux* Base Driver for the Intel(R) PRO/100 Family of Adapters
 ==============================================================
 
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/e1000.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/e1000.rst
index 6379d4d20771..956560b6e745 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/e1000.rst
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/e1000.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
 .. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
 
+===========================================================
 Linux* Base Driver for Intel(R) Ethernet Network Connection
 ===========================================================
 
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/e1000e.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/e1000e.rst
index 33554e5416c5..01999f05509c 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/e1000e.rst
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/e1000e.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
 .. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
 
+======================================================
 Linux* Driver for Intel(R) Ethernet Network Connection
 ======================================================
 
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/fm10k.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/fm10k.rst
index bf5e5942f28d..ac3269e34f55 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/fm10k.rst
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/fm10k.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
 .. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
 
+==============================================================
 Linux* Base Driver for Intel(R) Ethernet Multi-host Controller
 ==============================================================
 
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/i40e.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/i40e.rst
index 0cc16c525d10..848fd388fa6e 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/i40e.rst
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/i40e.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
 .. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
 
+==================================================================
 Linux* Base Driver for the Intel(R) Ethernet Controller 700 Series
 ==================================================================
 
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/iavf.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/iavf.rst
index f8b42b64eb28..2d0c3baa1752 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/iavf.rst
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/iavf.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
 .. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
 
+==================================================================
 Linux* Base Driver for Intel(R) Ethernet Adaptive Virtual Function
 ==================================================================
 
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ice.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ice.rst
index 4d118b827bbb..c220aa2711c6 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ice.rst
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ice.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
 .. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
 
+===================================================================
 Linux* Base Driver for the Intel(R) Ethernet Connection E800 Series
 ===================================================================
 
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/igb.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/igb.rst
index e87a4a72ea2d..fc8cfaa5dcfa 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/igb.rst
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/igb.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
 .. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
 
+===========================================================
 Linux* Base Driver for Intel(R) Ethernet Network Connection
 ===========================================================
 
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/igbvf.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/igbvf.rst
index a8a9ffa4f8d3..9cddabe8108e 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/igbvf.rst
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/igbvf.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
 .. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
 
+============================================================
 Linux* Base Virtual Function Driver for Intel(R) 1G Ethernet
 ============================================================
 
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ixgb.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ixgb.rst
index 8bd80e27843d..945018207a92 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ixgb.rst
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ixgb.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
 .. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
 
+=====================================================================
 Linux Base Driver for 10 Gigabit Intel(R) Ethernet Network Connection
 =====================================================================
 
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ixgbe.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ixgbe.rst
index 86d887a63606..c7d25483fedb 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ixgbe.rst
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ixgbe.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
 .. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
 
+=============================================================================
 Linux* Base Driver for the Intel(R) Ethernet 10 Gigabit PCI Express Adapters
 =============================================================================
 
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ixgbevf.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ixgbevf.rst
index 56cde6366c2f..5d4977360157 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ixgbevf.rst
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ixgbevf.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
 .. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
 
+=============================================================
 Linux* Base Virtual Function Driver for Intel(R) 10G Ethernet
 =============================================================
 
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/stmicro/stmmac.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/stmicro/stmmac.txt
index 2bb07078f535..1ae979fd90d2 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/stmicro/stmmac.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/stmicro/stmmac.txt
@@ -267,7 +267,7 @@ static struct fixed_phy_status stmmac0_fixed_phy_status = {
 
 During the board's device_init we can configure the first
 MAC for fixed_link by calling:
-  fixed_phy_add(PHY_POLL, 1, &stmmac0_fixed_phy_status, -1);
+  fixed_phy_add(PHY_POLL, 1, &stmmac0_fixed_phy_status);
 and the second one, with a real PHY device attached to the bus,
 by using the stmmac_mdio_bus_data structure (to provide the id, the
 reset procedure etc).
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/devlink-health.txt b/Documentation/networking/devlink-health.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1db3fbea0831
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/devlink-health.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+The health mechanism is targeted for Real Time Alerting, in order to know when
+something bad had happened to a PCI device
+- Provide alert debug information
+- Self healing
+- If problem needs vendor support, provide a way to gather all needed debugging
+  information.
+
+The main idea is to unify and centralize driver health reports in the
+generic devlink instance and allow the user to set different
+attributes of the health reporting and recovery procedures.
+
+The devlink health reporter:
+Device driver creates a "health reporter" per each error/health type.
+Error/Health type can be a known/generic (eg pci error, fw error, rx/tx error)
+or unknown (driver specific).
+For each registered health reporter a driver can issue error/health reports
+asynchronously. All health reports handling is done by devlink.
+Device driver can provide specific callbacks for each "health reporter", e.g.
+ - Recovery procedures
+ - Diagnostics and object dump procedures
+ - OOB initial parameters
+Different parts of the driver can register different types of health reporters
+with different handlers.
+
+Once an error is reported, devlink health will do the following actions:
+  * A log is being send to the kernel trace events buffer
+  * Health status and statistics are being updated for the reporter instance
+  * Object dump is being taken and saved at the reporter instance (as long as
+    there is no other dump which is already stored)
+  * Auto recovery attempt is being done. Depends on:
+    - Auto-recovery configuration
+    - Grace period vs. time passed since last recover
+
+The user interface:
+User can access/change each reporter's parameters and driver specific callbacks
+via devlink, e.g per error type (per health reporter)
+ - Configure reporter's generic parameters (like: disable/enable auto recovery)
+ - Invoke recovery procedure
+ - Run diagnostics
+ - Object dump
+
+The devlink health interface (via netlink):
+DEVLINK_CMD_HEALTH_REPORTER_GET
+  Retrieves status and configuration info per DEV and reporter.
+DEVLINK_CMD_HEALTH_REPORTER_SET
+  Allows reporter-related configuration setting.
+DEVLINK_CMD_HEALTH_REPORTER_RECOVER
+  Triggers a reporter's recovery procedure.
+DEVLINK_CMD_HEALTH_REPORTER_DIAGNOSE
+  Retrieves diagnostics data from a reporter on a device.
+DEVLINK_CMD_HEALTH_REPORTER_DUMP_GET
+  Retrieves the last stored dump. Devlink health
+  saves a single dump. If an dump is not already stored by the devlink
+  for this reporter, devlink generates a new dump.
+  dump output is defined by the reporter.
+DEVLINK_CMD_HEALTH_REPORTER_DUMP_CLEAR
+  Clears the last saved dump file for the specified reporter.
+
+
+                                               netlink
+                                      +--------------------------+
+                                      |                          |
+                                      |            +             |
+                                      |            |             |
+                                      +--------------------------+
+                                                   |request for ops
+                                                   |(diagnose,
+ mlx5_core                             devlink     |recover,
+                                                   |dump)
++--------+                            +--------------------------+
+|        |                            |    reporter|             |
+|        |                            |  +---------v----------+  |
+|        |   ops execution            |  |                    |  |
+|     <----------------------------------+                    |  |
+|        |                            |  |                    |  |
+|        |                            |  + ^------------------+  |
+|        |                            |    | request for ops     |
+|        |                            |    | (recover, dump)     |
+|        |                            |    |                     |
+|        |                            |  +-+------------------+  |
+|        |     health report          |  | health handler     |  |
+|        +------------------------------->                    |  |
+|        |                            |  +--------------------+  |
+|        |     health reporter create |                          |
+|        +---------------------------->                          |
++--------+                            +--------------------------+
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/devlink-info-versions.rst b/Documentation/networking/devlink-info-versions.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4316342b7746
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/devlink-info-versions.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause)
+
+=====================
+Devlink info versions
+=====================
+
+board.id
+========
+
+Unique identifier of the board design.
+
+board.rev
+=========
+
+Board design revision.
+
+board.manufacture
+=================
+
+An identifier of the company or the facility which produced the part.
+
+fw.mgmt
+=======
+
+Control unit firmware version. This firmware is responsible for house
+keeping tasks, PHY control etc. but not the packet-by-packet data path
+operation.
+
+fw.app
+======
+
+Data path microcode controlling high-speed packet processing.
+
+fw.undi
+=======
+
+UNDI software, may include the UEFI driver, firmware or both.
+
+fw.ncsi
+=======
+
+Version of the software responsible for supporting/handling the
+Network Controller Sideband Interface.
+
+fw.psid
+=======
+
+Unique identifier of the firmware parameter set.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/devlink-params-mlxsw.txt b/Documentation/networking/devlink-params-mlxsw.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c63ea9fc7009
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/devlink-params-mlxsw.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+fw_load_policy		[DEVICE, GENERIC]
+			Configuration mode: driverinit
+
+acl_region_rehash_interval	[DEVICE, DRIVER-SPECIFIC]
+			Sets an interval for periodic ACL region rehashes.
+			The value is in milliseconds, minimal value is "3000".
+			Value "0" disables the periodic work.
+			The first rehash will be run right after value is set.
+			Type: u32
+			Configuration mode: runtime
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dsa/bcm_sf2.txt b/Documentation/networking/dsa/bcm_sf2.rst
index eba3a2431e91..dee234039e1e 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/dsa/bcm_sf2.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/dsa/bcm_sf2.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+=============================================
 Broadcom Starfighter 2 Ethernet switch driver
 =============================================
 
@@ -25,27 +26,27 @@ are connected at a lower speed.
 The switch hardware block is typically interfaced using MMIO accesses and
 contains a bunch of sub-blocks/registers:
 
-* SWITCH_CORE: common switch registers
-* SWITCH_REG: external interfaces switch register
-* SWITCH_MDIO: external MDIO bus controller (there is another one in SWITCH_CORE,
+- ``SWITCH_CORE``: common switch registers
+- ``SWITCH_REG``: external interfaces switch register
+- ``SWITCH_MDIO``: external MDIO bus controller (there is another one in SWITCH_CORE,
   which is used for indirect PHY accesses)
-* SWITCH_INDIR_RW: 64-bits wide register helper block
-* SWITCH_INTRL2_0/1: Level-2 interrupt controllers
-* SWITCH_ACB: Admission control block
-* SWITCH_FCB: Fail-over control block
+- ``SWITCH_INDIR_RW``: 64-bits wide register helper block
+- ``SWITCH_INTRL2_0/1``: Level-2 interrupt controllers
+- ``SWITCH_ACB``: Admission control block
+- ``SWITCH_FCB``: Fail-over control block
 
 Implementation details
 ======================
 
-The driver is located in drivers/net/dsa/bcm_sf2.c and is implemented as a DSA
-driver; see Documentation/networking/dsa/dsa.txt for details on the subsystem
+The driver is located in ``drivers/net/dsa/bcm_sf2.c`` and is implemented as a DSA
+driver; see ``Documentation/networking/dsa/dsa.rst`` for details on the subsystem
 and what it provides.
 
 The SF2 switch is configured to enable a Broadcom specific 4-bytes switch tag
 which gets inserted by the switch for every packet forwarded to the CPU
 interface, conversely, the CPU network interface should insert a similar tag for
 packets entering the CPU port. The tag format is described in
-net/dsa/tag_brcm.c.
+``net/dsa/tag_brcm.c``.
 
 Overall, the SF2 driver is a fairly regular DSA driver; there are a few
 specifics covered below.
@@ -54,7 +55,7 @@ Device Tree probing
 -------------------
 
 The DSA platform device driver is probed using a specific compatible string
-provided in net/dsa/dsa.c. The reason for that is because the DSA subsystem gets
+provided in ``net/dsa/dsa.c``. The reason for that is because the DSA subsystem gets
 registered as a platform device driver currently. DSA will provide the needed
 device_node pointers which are then accessible by the switch driver setup
 function to setup resources such as register ranges and interrupts. This
@@ -70,7 +71,7 @@ Broadcom switches connected to a SF2 require the use of the DSA slave MDIO bus
 in order to properly configure them. By default, the SF2 pseudo-PHY address, and
 an external switch pseudo-PHY address will both be snooping for incoming MDIO
 transactions, since they are at the same address (30), resulting in some kind of
-"double" programming. Using DSA, and setting ds->phys_mii_mask accordingly, we
+"double" programming. Using DSA, and setting ``ds->phys_mii_mask`` accordingly, we
 selectively divert reads and writes towards external Broadcom switches
 pseudo-PHY addresses. Newer revisions of the SF2 hardware have introduced a
 configurable pseudo-PHY address which circumvents the initial design limitation.
@@ -86,7 +87,7 @@ firmware gets reloaded. The SF2 driver relies on such events to properly set its
 MoCA interface carrier state and properly report this to the networking stack.
 
 The MoCA interfaces are supported using the PHY library's fixed PHY/emulated PHY
-device and the switch driver registers a fixed_link_update callback for such
+device and the switch driver registers a ``fixed_link_update`` callback for such
 PHYs which reflects the link state obtained from the interrupt handler.
 
 
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dsa/dsa.txt b/Documentation/networking/dsa/dsa.rst
index 101f2b2c69ad..ca87068b9ab9 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/dsa/dsa.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/dsa/dsa.rst
@@ -1,10 +1,8 @@
-Distributed Switch Architecture
-===============================
-
-Introduction
+============
+Architecture
 ============
 
-This document describes the Distributed Switch Architecture (DSA) subsystem
+This document describes the **Distributed Switch Architecture (DSA)** subsystem
 design principles, limitations, interactions with other subsystems, and how to
 develop drivers for this subsystem as well as a TODO for developers interested
 in joining the effort.
@@ -70,11 +68,11 @@ Switch tagging protocols
 DSA currently supports 5 different tagging protocols, and a tag-less mode as
 well. The different protocols are implemented in:
 
-net/dsa/tag_trailer.c: Marvell's 4 trailer tag mode (legacy)
-net/dsa/tag_dsa.c: Marvell's original DSA tag
-net/dsa/tag_edsa.c: Marvell's enhanced DSA tag
-net/dsa/tag_brcm.c: Broadcom's 4 bytes tag
-net/dsa/tag_qca.c: Qualcomm's 2 bytes tag
+- ``net/dsa/tag_trailer.c``: Marvell's 4 trailer tag mode (legacy)
+- ``net/dsa/tag_dsa.c``: Marvell's original DSA tag
+- ``net/dsa/tag_edsa.c``: Marvell's enhanced DSA tag
+- ``net/dsa/tag_brcm.c``: Broadcom's 4 bytes tag
+- ``net/dsa/tag_qca.c``: Qualcomm's 2 bytes tag
 
 The exact format of the tag protocol is vendor specific, but in general, they
 all contain something which:
@@ -89,7 +87,7 @@ Master network devices are regular, unmodified Linux network device drivers for
 the CPU/management Ethernet interface. Such a driver might occasionally need to
 know whether DSA is enabled (e.g.: to enable/disable specific offload features),
 but the DSA subsystem has been proven to work with industry standard drivers:
-e1000e, mv643xx_eth etc. without having to introduce modifications to these
+``e1000e,`` ``mv643xx_eth`` etc. without having to introduce modifications to these
 drivers. Such network devices are also often referred to as conduit network
 devices since they act as a pipe between the host processor and the hardware
 Ethernet switch.
@@ -100,40 +98,42 @@ Networking stack hooks
 When a master netdev is used with DSA, a small hook is placed in in the
 networking stack is in order to have the DSA subsystem process the Ethernet
 switch specific tagging protocol. DSA accomplishes this by registering a
-specific (and fake) Ethernet type (later becoming skb->protocol) with the
-networking stack, this is also known as a ptype or packet_type. A typical
+specific (and fake) Ethernet type (later becoming ``skb->protocol``) with the
+networking stack, this is also known as a ``ptype`` or ``packet_type``. A typical
 Ethernet Frame receive sequence looks like this:
 
 Master network device (e.g.: e1000e):
 
-Receive interrupt fires:
-- receive function is invoked
-- basic packet processing is done: getting length, status etc.
-- packet is prepared to be processed by the Ethernet layer by calling
-  eth_type_trans
+1. Receive interrupt fires:
+
+        - receive function is invoked
+        - basic packet processing is done: getting length, status etc.
+        - packet is prepared to be processed by the Ethernet layer by calling
+          ``eth_type_trans``
+
+2. net/ethernet/eth.c::
 
-net/ethernet/eth.c:
+          eth_type_trans(skb, dev)
+                  if (dev->dsa_ptr != NULL)
+                          -> skb->protocol = ETH_P_XDSA
 
-eth_type_trans(skb, dev)
-	if (dev->dsa_ptr != NULL)
-		-> skb->protocol = ETH_P_XDSA
+3. drivers/net/ethernet/\*::
 
-drivers/net/ethernet/*:
+          netif_receive_skb(skb)
+                  -> iterate over registered packet_type
+                          -> invoke handler for ETH_P_XDSA, calls dsa_switch_rcv()
 
-netif_receive_skb(skb)
-	-> iterate over registered packet_type
-		-> invoke handler for ETH_P_XDSA, calls dsa_switch_rcv()
+4. net/dsa/dsa.c::
 
-net/dsa/dsa.c:
-	-> dsa_switch_rcv()
-		-> invoke switch tag specific protocol handler in
-		   net/dsa/tag_*.c
+          -> dsa_switch_rcv()
+                  -> invoke switch tag specific protocol handler in 'net/dsa/tag_*.c'
 
-net/dsa/tag_*.c:
-	-> inspect and strip switch tag protocol to determine originating port
-	-> locate per-port network device
-	-> invoke eth_type_trans() with the DSA slave network device
-	-> invoked netif_receive_skb()
+5. net/dsa/tag_*.c:
+
+        - inspect and strip switch tag protocol to determine originating port
+        - locate per-port network device
+        - invoke ``eth_type_trans()`` with the DSA slave network device
+        - invoked ``netif_receive_skb()``
 
 Past this point, the DSA slave network devices get delivered regular Ethernet
 frames that can be processed by the networking stack.
@@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ invoke a specific transmit routine which takes care of adding the relevant
 switch tag in the Ethernet frames.
 
 These frames are then queued for transmission using the master network device
-ndo_start_xmit() function, since they contain the appropriate switch tag, the
+``ndo_start_xmit()`` function, since they contain the appropriate switch tag, the
 Ethernet switch will be able to process these incoming frames from the
 management interface and delivers these frames to the physical switch port.
 
@@ -170,23 +170,25 @@ Graphical representation
 ------------------------
 
 Summarized, this is basically how DSA looks like from a network device
-perspective:
-
-
-			|---------------------------
-			| CPU network device (eth0)|
-			----------------------------
-			| <tag added by switch     |
-			|                          |
-			|                          |
-			|        tag added by CPU> |
-		|--------------------------------------------|
-		| Switch driver				     |
-		|--------------------------------------------|
-                    ||        ||         ||
-		|-------|  |-------|  |-------|
-		| sw0p0 |  | sw0p1 |  | sw0p2 |
-		|-------|  |-------|  |-------|
+perspective::
+
+
+                |---------------------------
+                | CPU network device (eth0)|
+                ----------------------------
+                | <tag added by switch     |
+                |                          |
+                |                          |
+                |        tag added by CPU> |
+        |--------------------------------------------|
+        |            Switch driver                   |
+        |--------------------------------------------|
+                  ||        ||         ||
+              |-------|  |-------|  |-------|
+              | sw0p0 |  | sw0p1 |  | sw0p2 |
+              |-------|  |-------|  |-------|
+
+
 
 Slave MDIO bus
 --------------
@@ -207,53 +209,41 @@ PHYs, external PHYs, or even external switches.
 Data structures
 ---------------
 
-DSA data structures are defined in include/net/dsa.h as well as
-net/dsa/dsa_priv.h.
+DSA data structures are defined in ``include/net/dsa.h`` as well as
+``net/dsa/dsa_priv.h``:
 
-dsa_chip_data: platform data configuration for a given switch device, this
-structure describes a switch device's parent device, its address, as well as
-various properties of its ports: names/labels, and finally a routing table
-indication (when cascading switches)
+- ``dsa_chip_data``: platform data configuration for a given switch device,
+  this structure describes a switch device's parent device, its address, as
+  well as various properties of its ports: names/labels, and finally a routing
+  table indication (when cascading switches)
 
-dsa_platform_data: platform device configuration data which can reference a
-collection of dsa_chip_data structure if multiples switches are cascaded, the
-master network device this switch tree is attached to needs to be referenced
+- ``dsa_platform_data``: platform device configuration data which can reference
+  a collection of dsa_chip_data structure if multiples switches are cascaded,
+  the master network device this switch tree is attached to needs to be
+  referenced
 
-dsa_switch_tree: structure assigned to the master network device under
-"dsa_ptr", this structure references a dsa_platform_data structure as well as
-the tagging protocol supported by the switch tree, and which receive/transmit
-function hooks should be invoked, information about the directly attached switch
-is also provided: CPU port. Finally, a collection of dsa_switch are referenced
-to address individual switches in the tree.
+- ``dsa_switch_tree``: structure assigned to the master network device under
+  ``dsa_ptr``, this structure references a dsa_platform_data structure as well as
+  the tagging protocol supported by the switch tree, and which receive/transmit
+  function hooks should be invoked, information about the directly attached
+  switch is also provided: CPU port. Finally, a collection of dsa_switch are
+  referenced to address individual switches in the tree.
 
-dsa_switch: structure describing a switch device in the tree, referencing a
-dsa_switch_tree as a backpointer, slave network devices, master network device,
-and a reference to the backing dsa_switch_ops
+- ``dsa_switch``: structure describing a switch device in the tree, referencing
+  a ``dsa_switch_tree`` as a backpointer, slave network devices, master network
+  device, and a reference to the backing``dsa_switch_ops``
 
-dsa_switch_ops: structure referencing function pointers, see below for a full
-description.
+- ``dsa_switch_ops``: structure referencing function pointers, see below for a
+  full description.
 
 Design limitations
 ==================
 
-DSA is a platform device driver
--------------------------------
-
-DSA is implemented as a DSA platform device driver which is convenient because
-it will register the entire DSA switch tree attached to a master network device
-in one-shot, facilitating the device creation and simplifying the device driver
-model a bit, this comes however with a number of limitations:
-
-- building DSA and its switch drivers as modules is currently not working
-- the device driver parenting does not necessarily reflect the original
-  bus/device the switch can be created from
-- supporting non-MDIO and non-MMIO (platform) switches is not possible
-
 Limits on the number of devices and ports
 -----------------------------------------
 
 DSA currently limits the number of maximum switches within a tree to 4
-(DSA_MAX_SWITCHES), and the number of ports per switch to 12 (DSA_MAX_PORTS).
+(``DSA_MAX_SWITCHES``), and the number of ports per switch to 12 (``DSA_MAX_PORTS``).
 These limits could be extended to support larger configurations would this need
 arise.
 
@@ -292,15 +282,15 @@ Interactions with other subsystems
 
 DSA currently leverages the following subsystems:
 
-- MDIO/PHY library: drivers/net/phy/phy.c, mdio_bus.c
-- Switchdev: net/switchdev/*
+- MDIO/PHY library: ``drivers/net/phy/phy.c``, ``mdio_bus.c``
+- Switchdev:``net/switchdev/*``
 - Device Tree for various of_* functions
 
 MDIO/PHY library
 ----------------
 
 Slave network devices exposed by DSA may or may not be interfacing with PHY
-devices (struct phy_device as defined in include/linux/phy.h), but the DSA
+devices (``struct phy_device`` as defined in ``include/linux/phy.h)``, but the DSA
 subsystem deals with all possible combinations:
 
 - internal PHY devices, built into the Ethernet switch hardware
@@ -309,16 +299,16 @@ subsystem deals with all possible combinations:
 - special, non-autonegotiated or non MDIO-managed PHY devices: SFPs, MoCA; a.k.a
   fixed PHYs
 
-The PHY configuration is done by the dsa_slave_phy_setup() function and the
+The PHY configuration is done by the ``dsa_slave_phy_setup()`` function and the
 logic basically looks like this:
 
 - if Device Tree is used, the PHY device is looked up using the standard
   "phy-handle" property, if found, this PHY device is created and registered
-  using of_phy_connect()
+  using ``of_phy_connect()``
 
 - if Device Tree is used, and the PHY device is "fixed", that is, conforms to
   the definition of a non-MDIO managed PHY as defined in
-  Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fixed-link.txt, the PHY is registered
+  ``Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fixed-link.txt``, the PHY is registered
   and connected transparently using the special fixed MDIO bus driver
 
 - finally, if the PHY is built into the switch, as is very common with
@@ -344,8 +334,8 @@ Device Tree
 -----------
 
 DSA features a standardized binding which is documented in
-Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/dsa.txt. PHY/MDIO library helper
-functions such as of_get_phy_mode(), of_phy_connect() are also used to query
+``Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/dsa.txt``. PHY/MDIO library helper
+functions such as ``of_get_phy_mode()``, ``of_phy_connect()`` are also used to query
 per-port PHY specific details: interface connection, MDIO bus location etc..
 
 Driver development
@@ -354,8 +344,8 @@ Driver development
 DSA switch drivers need to implement a dsa_switch_ops structure which will
 contain the various members described below.
 
-register_switch_driver() registers this dsa_switch_ops in its internal list
-of drivers to probe for. unregister_switch_driver() does the exact opposite.
+``register_switch_driver()`` registers this dsa_switch_ops in its internal list
+of drivers to probe for. ``unregister_switch_driver()`` does the exact opposite.
 
 Unless requested differently by setting the priv_size member accordingly, DSA
 does not allocate any driver private context space.
@@ -363,17 +353,17 @@ does not allocate any driver private context space.
 Switch configuration
 --------------------
 
-- tag_protocol: this is to indicate what kind of tagging protocol is supported,
-  should be a valid value from the dsa_tag_protocol enum
+- ``tag_protocol``: this is to indicate what kind of tagging protocol is supported,
+  should be a valid value from the ``dsa_tag_protocol`` enum
 
-- probe: probe routine which will be invoked by the DSA platform device upon
+- ``probe``: probe routine which will be invoked by the DSA platform device upon
   registration to test for the presence/absence of a switch device. For MDIO
   devices, it is recommended to issue a read towards internal registers using
   the switch pseudo-PHY and return whether this is a supported device. For other
   buses, return a non-NULL string
 
-- setup: setup function for the switch, this function is responsible for setting
-  up the dsa_switch_ops private structure with all it needs: register maps,
+- ``setup``: setup function for the switch, this function is responsible for setting
+  up the ``dsa_switch_ops`` private structure with all it needs: register maps,
   interrupts, mutexes, locks etc.. This function is also expected to properly
   configure the switch to separate all network interfaces from each other, that
   is, they should be isolated by the switch hardware itself, typically by creating
@@ -388,27 +378,27 @@ Switch configuration
 PHY devices and link management
 -------------------------------
 
-- get_phy_flags: Some switches are interfaced to various kinds of Ethernet PHYs,
+- ``get_phy_flags``: Some switches are interfaced to various kinds of Ethernet PHYs,
   if the PHY library PHY driver needs to know about information it cannot obtain
   on its own (e.g.: coming from switch memory mapped registers), this function
   should return a 32-bits bitmask of "flags", that is private between the switch
-  driver and the Ethernet PHY driver in drivers/net/phy/*.
+  driver and the Ethernet PHY driver in ``drivers/net/phy/\*``.
 
-- phy_read: Function invoked by the DSA slave MDIO bus when attempting to read
+- ``phy_read``: Function invoked by the DSA slave MDIO bus when attempting to read
   the switch port MDIO registers. If unavailable, return 0xffff for each read.
   For builtin switch Ethernet PHYs, this function should allow reading the link
   status, auto-negotiation results, link partner pages etc..
 
-- phy_write: Function invoked by the DSA slave MDIO bus when attempting to write
+- ``phy_write``: Function invoked by the DSA slave MDIO bus when attempting to write
   to the switch port MDIO registers. If unavailable return a negative error
   code.
 
-- adjust_link: Function invoked by the PHY library when a slave network device
+- ``adjust_link``: Function invoked by the PHY library when a slave network device
   is attached to a PHY device. This function is responsible for appropriately
   configuring the switch port link parameters: speed, duplex, pause based on
-  what the phy_device is providing.
+  what the ``phy_device`` is providing.
 
-- fixed_link_update: Function invoked by the PHY library, and specifically by
+- ``fixed_link_update``: Function invoked by the PHY library, and specifically by
   the fixed PHY driver asking the switch driver for link parameters that could
   not be auto-negotiated, or obtained by reading the PHY registers through MDIO.
   This is particularly useful for specific kinds of hardware such as QSGMII,
@@ -418,87 +408,87 @@ PHY devices and link management
 Ethtool operations
 ------------------
 
-- get_strings: ethtool function used to query the driver's strings, will
+- ``get_strings``: ethtool function used to query the driver's strings, will
   typically return statistics strings, private flags strings etc.
 
-- get_ethtool_stats: ethtool function used to query per-port statistics and
+- ``get_ethtool_stats``: ethtool function used to query per-port statistics and
   return their values. DSA overlays slave network devices general statistics:
   RX/TX counters from the network device, with switch driver specific statistics
   per port
 
-- get_sset_count: ethtool function used to query the number of statistics items
+- ``get_sset_count``: ethtool function used to query the number of statistics items
 
-- get_wol: ethtool function used to obtain Wake-on-LAN settings per-port, this
+- ``get_wol``: ethtool function used to obtain Wake-on-LAN settings per-port, this
   function may, for certain implementations also query the master network device
   Wake-on-LAN settings if this interface needs to participate in Wake-on-LAN
 
-- set_wol: ethtool function used to configure Wake-on-LAN settings per-port,
+- ``set_wol``: ethtool function used to configure Wake-on-LAN settings per-port,
   direct counterpart to set_wol with similar restrictions
 
-- set_eee: ethtool function which is used to configure a switch port EEE (Green
+- ``set_eee``: ethtool function which is used to configure a switch port EEE (Green
   Ethernet) settings, can optionally invoke the PHY library to enable EEE at the
   PHY level if relevant. This function should enable EEE at the switch port MAC
   controller and data-processing logic
 
-- get_eee: ethtool function which is used to query a switch port EEE settings,
+- ``get_eee``: ethtool function which is used to query a switch port EEE settings,
   this function should return the EEE state of the switch port MAC controller
   and data-processing logic as well as query the PHY for its currently configured
   EEE settings
 
-- get_eeprom_len: ethtool function returning for a given switch the EEPROM
+- ``get_eeprom_len``: ethtool function returning for a given switch the EEPROM
   length/size in bytes
 
-- get_eeprom: ethtool function returning for a given switch the EEPROM contents
+- ``get_eeprom``: ethtool function returning for a given switch the EEPROM contents
 
-- set_eeprom: ethtool function writing specified data to a given switch EEPROM
+- ``set_eeprom``: ethtool function writing specified data to a given switch EEPROM
 
-- get_regs_len: ethtool function returning the register length for a given
+- ``get_regs_len``: ethtool function returning the register length for a given
   switch
 
-- get_regs: ethtool function returning the Ethernet switch internal register
+- ``get_regs``: ethtool function returning the Ethernet switch internal register
   contents. This function might require user-land code in ethtool to
   pretty-print register values and registers
 
 Power management
 ----------------
 
-- suspend: function invoked by the DSA platform device when the system goes to
+- ``suspend``: function invoked by the DSA platform device when the system goes to
   suspend, should quiesce all Ethernet switch activities, but keep ports
   participating in Wake-on-LAN active as well as additional wake-up logic if
   supported
 
-- resume: function invoked by the DSA platform device when the system resumes,
+- ``resume``: function invoked by the DSA platform device when the system resumes,
   should resume all Ethernet switch activities and re-configure the switch to be
   in a fully active state
 
-- port_enable: function invoked by the DSA slave network device ndo_open
+- ``port_enable``: function invoked by the DSA slave network device ndo_open
   function when a port is administratively brought up, this function should be
   fully enabling a given switch port. DSA takes care of marking the port with
-  BR_STATE_BLOCKING if the port is a bridge member, or BR_STATE_FORWARDING if it
+  ``BR_STATE_BLOCKING`` if the port is a bridge member, or ``BR_STATE_FORWARDING`` if it
   was not, and propagating these changes down to the hardware
 
-- port_disable: function invoked by the DSA slave network device ndo_close
+- ``port_disable``: function invoked by the DSA slave network device ndo_close
   function when a port is administratively brought down, this function should be
   fully disabling a given switch port. DSA takes care of marking the port with
-  BR_STATE_DISABLED and propagating changes to the hardware if this port is
+  ``BR_STATE_DISABLED`` and propagating changes to the hardware if this port is
   disabled while being a bridge member
 
 Bridge layer
 ------------
 
-- port_bridge_join: bridge layer function invoked when a given switch port is
+- ``port_bridge_join``: bridge layer function invoked when a given switch port is
   added to a bridge, this function should be doing the necessary at the switch
   level to permit the joining port from being added to the relevant logical
   domain for it to ingress/egress traffic with other members of the bridge.
 
-- port_bridge_leave: bridge layer function invoked when a given switch port is
+- ``port_bridge_leave``: bridge layer function invoked when a given switch port is
   removed from a bridge, this function should be doing the necessary at the
   switch level to deny the leaving port from ingress/egress traffic from the
   remaining bridge members. When the port leaves the bridge, it should be aged
   out at the switch hardware for the switch to (re) learn MAC addresses behind
   this port.
 
-- port_stp_state_set: bridge layer function invoked when a given switch port STP
+- ``port_stp_state_set``: bridge layer function invoked when a given switch port STP
   state is computed by the bridge layer and should be propagated to switch
   hardware to forward/block/learn traffic. The switch driver is responsible for
   computing a STP state change based on current and asked parameters and perform
@@ -507,7 +497,7 @@ Bridge layer
 Bridge VLAN filtering
 ---------------------
 
-- port_vlan_filtering: bridge layer function invoked when the bridge gets
+- ``port_vlan_filtering``: bridge layer function invoked when the bridge gets
   configured for turning on or off VLAN filtering. If nothing specific needs to
   be done at the hardware level, this callback does not need to be implemented.
   When VLAN filtering is turned on, the hardware must be programmed with
@@ -517,61 +507,61 @@ Bridge VLAN filtering
   accept any 802.1Q frames irrespective of their VLAN ID, and untagged frames are
   allowed.
 
-- port_vlan_prepare: bridge layer function invoked when the bridge prepares the
+- ``port_vlan_prepare``: bridge layer function invoked when the bridge prepares the
   configuration of a VLAN on the given port. If the operation is not supported
-  by the hardware, this function should return -EOPNOTSUPP to inform the bridge
+  by the hardware, this function should return ``-EOPNOTSUPP`` to inform the bridge
   code to fallback to a software implementation. No hardware setup must be done
   in this function. See port_vlan_add for this and details.
 
-- port_vlan_add: bridge layer function invoked when a VLAN is configured
+- ``port_vlan_add``: bridge layer function invoked when a VLAN is configured
   (tagged or untagged) for the given switch port
 
-- port_vlan_del: bridge layer function invoked when a VLAN is removed from the
+- ``port_vlan_del``: bridge layer function invoked when a VLAN is removed from the
   given switch port
 
-- port_vlan_dump: bridge layer function invoked with a switchdev callback
+- ``port_vlan_dump``: bridge layer function invoked with a switchdev callback
   function that the driver has to call for each VLAN the given port is a member
   of. A switchdev object is used to carry the VID and bridge flags.
 
-- port_fdb_add: bridge layer function invoked when the bridge wants to install a
+- ``port_fdb_add``: bridge layer function invoked when the bridge wants to install a
   Forwarding Database entry, the switch hardware should be programmed with the
   specified address in the specified VLAN Id in the forwarding database
   associated with this VLAN ID. If the operation is not supported, this
-  function should return -EOPNOTSUPP to inform the bridge code to fallback to
+  function should return ``-EOPNOTSUPP`` to inform the bridge code to fallback to
   a software implementation.
 
-Note: VLAN ID 0 corresponds to the port private database, which, in the context
-of DSA, would be the its port-based VLAN, used by the associated bridge device.
+.. note:: VLAN ID 0 corresponds to the port private database, which, in the context
+        of DSA, would be the its port-based VLAN, used by the associated bridge device.
 
-- port_fdb_del: bridge layer function invoked when the bridge wants to remove a
+- ``port_fdb_del``: bridge layer function invoked when the bridge wants to remove a
   Forwarding Database entry, the switch hardware should be programmed to delete
   the specified MAC address from the specified VLAN ID if it was mapped into
   this port forwarding database
 
-- port_fdb_dump: bridge layer function invoked with a switchdev callback
+- ``port_fdb_dump``: bridge layer function invoked with a switchdev callback
   function that the driver has to call for each MAC address known to be behind
   the given port. A switchdev object is used to carry the VID and FDB info.
 
-- port_mdb_prepare: bridge layer function invoked when the bridge prepares the
+- ``port_mdb_prepare``: bridge layer function invoked when the bridge prepares the
   installation of a multicast database entry. If the operation is not supported,
-  this function should return -EOPNOTSUPP to inform the bridge code to fallback
+  this function should return ``-EOPNOTSUPP`` to inform the bridge code to fallback
   to a software implementation. No hardware setup must be done in this function.
-  See port_fdb_add for this and details.
+  See ``port_fdb_add`` for this and details.
 
-- port_mdb_add: bridge layer function invoked when the bridge wants to install
+- ``port_mdb_add``: bridge layer function invoked when the bridge wants to install
   a multicast database entry, the switch hardware should be programmed with the
   specified address in the specified VLAN ID in the forwarding database
   associated with this VLAN ID.
 
-Note: VLAN ID 0 corresponds to the port private database, which, in the context
-of DSA, would be the its port-based VLAN, used by the associated bridge device.
+.. note:: VLAN ID 0 corresponds to the port private database, which, in the context
+        of DSA, would be the its port-based VLAN, used by the associated bridge device.
 
-- port_mdb_del: bridge layer function invoked when the bridge wants to remove a
+- ``port_mdb_del``: bridge layer function invoked when the bridge wants to remove a
   multicast database entry, the switch hardware should be programmed to delete
   the specified MAC address from the specified VLAN ID if it was mapped into
   this port forwarding database.
 
-- port_mdb_dump: bridge layer function invoked with a switchdev callback
+- ``port_mdb_dump``: bridge layer function invoked with a switchdev callback
   function that the driver has to call for each MAC address known to be behind
   the given port. A switchdev object is used to carry the VID and MDB info.
 
@@ -590,7 +580,7 @@ two subsystems and get the best of both worlds.
 Other hanging fruits
 --------------------
 
-- making the number of ports fully dynamic and not dependent on DSA_MAX_PORTS
+- making the number of ports fully dynamic and not dependent on ``DSA_MAX_PORTS``
 - allowing more than one CPU/management interface:
   http://comments.gmane.org/gmane.linux.network/365657
 - porting more drivers from other vendors:
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dsa/index.rst b/Documentation/networking/dsa/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0e5b7a9be406
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/dsa/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+===============================
+Distributed Switch Architecture
+===============================
+
+.. toctree::
+   :maxdepth: 1
+
+   dsa
+   bcm_sf2
+   lan9303
+   sja1105
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dsa/lan9303.txt b/Documentation/networking/dsa/lan9303.rst
index 144b02b95207..e3c820db28ad 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/dsa/lan9303.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/dsa/lan9303.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+==============================
 LAN9303 Ethernet switch driver
 ==============================
 
@@ -9,10 +10,9 @@ host master network interface (e.g. fixed link).
 Driver details
 ==============
 
-The driver is implemented as a DSA driver, see
-Documentation/networking/dsa/dsa.txt.
+The driver is implemented as a DSA driver, see ``Documentation/networking/dsa/dsa.rst``.
 
-See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/lan9303.txt for device tree
+See ``Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/lan9303.txt`` for device tree
 binding.
 
 The LAN9303 can be managed both via MDIO and I2C, both supported by this driver.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dsa/sja1105.rst b/Documentation/networking/dsa/sja1105.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ea7bac438cfd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/dsa/sja1105.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,220 @@
+=========================
+NXP SJA1105 switch driver
+=========================
+
+Overview
+========
+
+The NXP SJA1105 is a family of 6 devices:
+
+- SJA1105E: First generation, no TTEthernet
+- SJA1105T: First generation, TTEthernet
+- SJA1105P: Second generation, no TTEthernet, no SGMII
+- SJA1105Q: Second generation, TTEthernet, no SGMII
+- SJA1105R: Second generation, no TTEthernet, SGMII
+- SJA1105S: Second generation, TTEthernet, SGMII
+
+These are SPI-managed automotive switches, with all ports being gigabit
+capable, and supporting MII/RMII/RGMII and optionally SGMII on one port.
+
+Being automotive parts, their configuration interface is geared towards
+set-and-forget use, with minimal dynamic interaction at runtime. They
+require a static configuration to be composed by software and packed
+with CRC and table headers, and sent over SPI.
+
+The static configuration is composed of several configuration tables. Each
+table takes a number of entries. Some configuration tables can be (partially)
+reconfigured at runtime, some not. Some tables are mandatory, some not:
+
+============================= ================== =============================
+Table                          Mandatory          Reconfigurable
+============================= ================== =============================
+Schedule                       no                 no
+Schedule entry points          if Scheduling      no
+VL Lookup                      no                 no
+VL Policing                    if VL Lookup       no
+VL Forwarding                  if VL Lookup       no
+L2 Lookup                      no                 no
+L2 Policing                    yes                no
+VLAN Lookup                    yes                yes
+L2 Forwarding                  yes                partially (fully on P/Q/R/S)
+MAC Config                     yes                partially (fully on P/Q/R/S)
+Schedule Params                if Scheduling      no
+Schedule Entry Points Params   if Scheduling      no
+VL Forwarding Params           if VL Forwarding   no
+L2 Lookup Params               no                 partially (fully on P/Q/R/S)
+L2 Forwarding Params           yes                no
+Clock Sync Params              no                 no
+AVB Params                     no                 no
+General Params                 yes                partially
+Retagging                      no                 yes
+xMII Params                    yes                no
+SGMII                          no                 yes
+============================= ================== =============================
+
+
+Also the configuration is write-only (software cannot read it back from the
+switch except for very few exceptions).
+
+The driver creates a static configuration at probe time, and keeps it at
+all times in memory, as a shadow for the hardware state. When required to
+change a hardware setting, the static configuration is also updated.
+If that changed setting can be transmitted to the switch through the dynamic
+reconfiguration interface, it is; otherwise the switch is reset and
+reprogrammed with the updated static configuration.
+
+Traffic support
+===============
+
+The switches do not support switch tagging in hardware. But they do support
+customizing the TPID by which VLAN traffic is identified as such. The switch
+driver is leveraging ``CONFIG_NET_DSA_TAG_8021Q`` by requesting that special
+VLANs (with a custom TPID of ``ETH_P_EDSA`` instead of ``ETH_P_8021Q``) are
+installed on its ports when not in ``vlan_filtering`` mode. This does not
+interfere with the reception and transmission of real 802.1Q-tagged traffic,
+because the switch does no longer parse those packets as VLAN after the TPID
+change.
+The TPID is restored when ``vlan_filtering`` is requested by the user through
+the bridge layer, and general IP termination becomes no longer possible through
+the switch netdevices in this mode.
+
+The switches have two programmable filters for link-local destination MACs.
+These are used to trap BPDUs and PTP traffic to the master netdevice, and are
+further used to support STP and 1588 ordinary clock/boundary clock
+functionality.
+
+The following traffic modes are supported over the switch netdevices:
+
++--------------------+------------+------------------+------------------+
+|                    | Standalone |   Bridged with   |   Bridged with   |
+|                    |    ports   | vlan_filtering 0 | vlan_filtering 1 |
++====================+============+==================+==================+
+| Regular traffic    |     Yes    |       Yes        |  No (use master) |
++--------------------+------------+------------------+------------------+
+| Management traffic |     Yes    |       Yes        |       Yes        |
+|    (BPDU, PTP)     |            |                  |                  |
++--------------------+------------+------------------+------------------+
+
+Switching features
+==================
+
+The driver supports the configuration of L2 forwarding rules in hardware for
+port bridging. The forwarding, broadcast and flooding domain between ports can
+be restricted through two methods: either at the L2 forwarding level (isolate
+one bridge's ports from another's) or at the VLAN port membership level
+(isolate ports within the same bridge). The final forwarding decision taken by
+the hardware is a logical AND of these two sets of rules.
+
+The hardware tags all traffic internally with a port-based VLAN (pvid), or it
+decodes the VLAN information from the 802.1Q tag. Advanced VLAN classification
+is not possible. Once attributed a VLAN tag, frames are checked against the
+port's membership rules and dropped at ingress if they don't match any VLAN.
+This behavior is available when switch ports are enslaved to a bridge with
+``vlan_filtering 1``.
+
+Normally the hardware is not configurable with respect to VLAN awareness, but
+by changing what TPID the switch searches 802.1Q tags for, the semantics of a
+bridge with ``vlan_filtering 0`` can be kept (accept all traffic, tagged or
+untagged), and therefore this mode is also supported.
+
+Segregating the switch ports in multiple bridges is supported (e.g. 2 + 2), but
+all bridges should have the same level of VLAN awareness (either both have
+``vlan_filtering`` 0, or both 1). Also an inevitable limitation of the fact
+that VLAN awareness is global at the switch level is that once a bridge with
+``vlan_filtering`` enslaves at least one switch port, the other un-bridged
+ports are no longer available for standalone traffic termination.
+
+Topology and loop detection through STP is supported.
+
+L2 FDB manipulation (add/delete/dump) is currently possible for the first
+generation devices. Aging time of FDB entries, as well as enabling fully static
+management (no address learning and no flooding of unknown traffic) is not yet
+configurable in the driver.
+
+A special comment about bridging with other netdevices (illustrated with an
+example):
+
+A board has eth0, eth1, swp0@eth1, swp1@eth1, swp2@eth1, swp3@eth1.
+The switch ports (swp0-3) are under br0.
+It is desired that eth0 is turned into another switched port that communicates
+with swp0-3.
+
+If br0 has vlan_filtering 0, then eth0 can simply be added to br0 with the
+intended results.
+If br0 has vlan_filtering 1, then a new br1 interface needs to be created that
+enslaves eth0 and eth1 (the DSA master of the switch ports). This is because in
+this mode, the switch ports beneath br0 are not capable of regular traffic, and
+are only used as a conduit for switchdev operations.
+
+Device Tree bindings and board design
+=====================================
+
+This section references ``Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/sja1105.txt``
+and aims to showcase some potential switch caveats.
+
+RMII PHY role and out-of-band signaling
+---------------------------------------
+
+In the RMII spec, the 50 MHz clock signals are either driven by the MAC or by
+an external oscillator (but not by the PHY).
+But the spec is rather loose and devices go outside it in several ways.
+Some PHYs go against the spec and may provide an output pin where they source
+the 50 MHz clock themselves, in an attempt to be helpful.
+On the other hand, the SJA1105 is only binary configurable - when in the RMII
+MAC role it will also attempt to drive the clock signal. To prevent this from
+happening it must be put in RMII PHY role.
+But doing so has some unintended consequences.
+In the RMII spec, the PHY can transmit extra out-of-band signals via RXD[1:0].
+These are practically some extra code words (/J/ and /K/) sent prior to the
+preamble of each frame. The MAC does not have this out-of-band signaling
+mechanism defined by the RMII spec.
+So when the SJA1105 port is put in PHY role to avoid having 2 drivers on the
+clock signal, inevitably an RMII PHY-to-PHY connection is created. The SJA1105
+emulates a PHY interface fully and generates the /J/ and /K/ symbols prior to
+frame preambles, which the real PHY is not expected to understand. So the PHY
+simply encodes the extra symbols received from the SJA1105-as-PHY onto the
+100Base-Tx wire.
+On the other side of the wire, some link partners might discard these extra
+symbols, while others might choke on them and discard the entire Ethernet
+frames that follow along. This looks like packet loss with some link partners
+but not with others.
+The take-away is that in RMII mode, the SJA1105 must be let to drive the
+reference clock if connected to a PHY.
+
+RGMII fixed-link and internal delays
+------------------------------------
+
+As mentioned in the bindings document, the second generation of devices has
+tunable delay lines as part of the MAC, which can be used to establish the
+correct RGMII timing budget.
+When powered up, these can shift the Rx and Tx clocks with a phase difference
+between 73.8 and 101.7 degrees.
+The catch is that the delay lines need to lock onto a clock signal with a
+stable frequency. This means that there must be at least 2 microseconds of
+silence between the clock at the old vs at the new frequency. Otherwise the
+lock is lost and the delay lines must be reset (powered down and back up).
+In RGMII the clock frequency changes with link speed (125 MHz at 1000 Mbps, 25
+MHz at 100 Mbps and 2.5 MHz at 10 Mbps), and link speed might change during the
+AN process.
+In the situation where the switch port is connected through an RGMII fixed-link
+to a link partner whose link state life cycle is outside the control of Linux
+(such as a different SoC), then the delay lines would remain unlocked (and
+inactive) until there is manual intervention (ifdown/ifup on the switch port).
+The take-away is that in RGMII mode, the switch's internal delays are only
+reliable if the link partner never changes link speeds, or if it does, it does
+so in a way that is coordinated with the switch port (practically, both ends of
+the fixed-link are under control of the same Linux system).
+As to why would a fixed-link interface ever change link speeds: there are
+Ethernet controllers out there which come out of reset in 100 Mbps mode, and
+their driver inevitably needs to change the speed and clock frequency if it's
+required to work at gigabit.
+
+MDIO bus and PHY management
+---------------------------
+
+The SJA1105 does not have an MDIO bus and does not perform in-band AN either.
+Therefore there is no link state notification coming from the switch device.
+A board would need to hook up the PHYs connected to the switch to any other
+MDIO bus available to Linux within the system (e.g. to the DSA master's MDIO
+bus). Link state management then works by the driver manually keeping in sync
+(over SPI commands) the MAC link speed with the settings negotiated by the PHY.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/filter.txt b/Documentation/networking/filter.txt
index 2196b824e96c..319e5e041f38 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/filter.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/filter.txt
@@ -464,10 +464,11 @@ breakpoints: 0 1
 JIT compiler
 ------------
 
-The Linux kernel has a built-in BPF JIT compiler for x86_64, SPARC, PowerPC,
-ARM, ARM64, MIPS and s390 and can be enabled through CONFIG_BPF_JIT. The JIT
-compiler is transparently invoked for each attached filter from user space
-or for internal kernel users if it has been previously enabled by root:
+The Linux kernel has a built-in BPF JIT compiler for x86_64, SPARC,
+PowerPC, ARM, ARM64, MIPS, RISC-V and s390 and can be enabled through
+CONFIG_BPF_JIT. The JIT compiler is transparently invoked for each
+attached filter from user space or for internal kernel users if it has
+been previously enabled by root:
 
   echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/core/bpf_jit_enable
 
@@ -603,9 +604,10 @@ got from bpf_prog_create(), and 'ctx' the given context (e.g.
 skb pointer). All constraints and restrictions from bpf_check_classic() apply
 before a conversion to the new layout is being done behind the scenes!
 
-Currently, the classic BPF format is being used for JITing on most 32-bit
-architectures, whereas x86-64, aarch64, s390x, powerpc64, sparc64, arm32 perform
-JIT compilation from eBPF instruction set.
+Currently, the classic BPF format is being used for JITing on most
+32-bit architectures, whereas x86-64, aarch64, s390x, powerpc64,
+sparc64, arm32, riscv (RV64G) perform JIT compilation from eBPF
+instruction set.
 
 Some core changes of the new internal format:
 
@@ -827,7 +829,7 @@ tracing filters may do to maintain counters of events, for example. Register R9
 is not used by socket filters either, but more complex filters may be running
 out of registers and would have to resort to spill/fill to stack.
 
-Internal BPF can used as generic assembler for last step performance
+Internal BPF can be used as a generic assembler for last step performance
 optimizations, socket filters and seccomp are using it as assembler. Tracing
 filters may use it as assembler to generate code from kernel. In kernel usage
 may not be bounded by security considerations, since generated internal BPF code
@@ -865,7 +867,7 @@ Three LSB bits store instruction class which is one of:
   BPF_STX   0x03          BPF_STX   0x03
   BPF_ALU   0x04          BPF_ALU   0x04
   BPF_JMP   0x05          BPF_JMP   0x05
-  BPF_RET   0x06          [ class 6 unused, for future if needed ]
+  BPF_RET   0x06          BPF_JMP32 0x06
   BPF_MISC  0x07          BPF_ALU64 0x07
 
 When BPF_CLASS(code) == BPF_ALU or BPF_JMP, 4th bit encodes source operand ...
@@ -902,9 +904,9 @@ If BPF_CLASS(code) == BPF_ALU or BPF_ALU64 [ in eBPF ], BPF_OP(code) is one of:
   BPF_ARSH  0xc0  /* eBPF only: sign extending shift right */
   BPF_END   0xd0  /* eBPF only: endianness conversion */
 
-If BPF_CLASS(code) == BPF_JMP, BPF_OP(code) is one of:
+If BPF_CLASS(code) == BPF_JMP or BPF_JMP32 [ in eBPF ], BPF_OP(code) is one of:
 
-  BPF_JA    0x00
+  BPF_JA    0x00  /* BPF_JMP only */
   BPF_JEQ   0x10
   BPF_JGT   0x20
   BPF_JGE   0x30
@@ -912,8 +914,8 @@ If BPF_CLASS(code) == BPF_JMP, BPF_OP(code) is one of:
   BPF_JNE   0x50  /* eBPF only: jump != */
   BPF_JSGT  0x60  /* eBPF only: signed '>' */
   BPF_JSGE  0x70  /* eBPF only: signed '>=' */
-  BPF_CALL  0x80  /* eBPF only: function call */
-  BPF_EXIT  0x90  /* eBPF only: function return */
+  BPF_CALL  0x80  /* eBPF BPF_JMP only: function call */
+  BPF_EXIT  0x90  /* eBPF BPF_JMP only: function return */
   BPF_JLT   0xa0  /* eBPF only: unsigned '<' */
   BPF_JLE   0xb0  /* eBPF only: unsigned '<=' */
   BPF_JSLT  0xc0  /* eBPF only: signed '<' */
@@ -936,8 +938,9 @@ Classic BPF wastes the whole BPF_RET class to represent a single 'ret'
 operation. Classic BPF_RET | BPF_K means copy imm32 into return register
 and perform function exit. eBPF is modeled to match CPU, so BPF_JMP | BPF_EXIT
 in eBPF means function exit only. The eBPF program needs to store return
-value into register R0 before doing a BPF_EXIT. Class 6 in eBPF is currently
-unused and reserved for future use.
+value into register R0 before doing a BPF_EXIT. Class 6 in eBPF is used as
+BPF_JMP32 to mean exactly the same operations as BPF_JMP, but with 32-bit wide
+operands for the comparisons instead.
 
 For load and store instructions the 8-bit 'code' field is divided as:
 
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ieee802154.txt b/Documentation/networking/ieee802154.rst
index e74d8e1da0e2..36ca823a1122 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/ieee802154.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/ieee802154.rst
@@ -1,54 +1,79 @@
-
-		Linux IEEE 802.15.4 implementation
-
+===============================
+IEEE 802.15.4 Developer's Guide
+===============================
 
 Introduction
 ============
 The IEEE 802.15.4 working group focuses on standardization of the bottom
 two layers: Medium Access Control (MAC) and Physical access (PHY). And there
 are mainly two options available for upper layers:
- - ZigBee - proprietary protocol from the ZigBee Alliance
- - 6LoWPAN - IPv6 networking over low rate personal area networks
+
+- ZigBee - proprietary protocol from the ZigBee Alliance
+- 6LoWPAN - IPv6 networking over low rate personal area networks
 
 The goal of the Linux-wpan is to provide a complete implementation
 of the IEEE 802.15.4 and 6LoWPAN protocols. IEEE 802.15.4 is a stack
 of protocols for organizing Low-Rate Wireless Personal Area Networks.
 
 The stack is composed of three main parts:
- - IEEE 802.15.4 layer;  We have chosen to use plain Berkeley socket API,
-   the generic Linux networking stack to transfer IEEE 802.15.4 data
-   messages and a special protocol over netlink for configuration/management
- - MAC - provides access to shared channel and reliable data delivery
- - PHY - represents device drivers
 
+- IEEE 802.15.4 layer;  We have chosen to use plain Berkeley socket API,
+  the generic Linux networking stack to transfer IEEE 802.15.4 data
+  messages and a special protocol over netlink for configuration/management
+- MAC - provides access to shared channel and reliable data delivery
+- PHY - represents device drivers
 
 Socket API
 ==========
 
-int sd = socket(PF_IEEE802154, SOCK_DGRAM, 0);
-.....
+.. c:function:: int sd = socket(PF_IEEE802154, SOCK_DGRAM, 0);
 
 The address family, socket addresses etc. are defined in the
 include/net/af_ieee802154.h header or in the special header
 in the userspace package (see either http://wpan.cakelab.org/ or the
 git tree at https://github.com/linux-wpan/wpan-tools).
 
+6LoWPAN Linux implementation
+============================
+
+The IEEE 802.15.4 standard specifies an MTU of 127 bytes, yielding about 80
+octets of actual MAC payload once security is turned on, on a wireless link
+with a link throughput of 250 kbps or less.  The 6LoWPAN adaptation format
+[RFC4944] was specified to carry IPv6 datagrams over such constrained links,
+taking into account limited bandwidth, memory, or energy resources that are
+expected in applications such as wireless Sensor Networks.  [RFC4944] defines
+a Mesh Addressing header to support sub-IP forwarding, a Fragmentation header
+to support the IPv6 minimum MTU requirement [RFC2460], and stateless header
+compression for IPv6 datagrams (LOWPAN_HC1 and LOWPAN_HC2) to reduce the
+relatively large IPv6 and UDP headers down to (in the best case) several bytes.
+
+In September 2011 the standard update was published - [RFC6282].
+It deprecates HC1 and HC2 compression and defines IPHC encoding format which is
+used in this Linux implementation.
+
+All the code related to 6lowpan you may find in files: net/6lowpan/*
+and net/ieee802154/6lowpan/*
+
+To setup a 6LoWPAN interface you need:
+1. Add IEEE802.15.4 interface and set channel and PAN ID;
+2. Add 6lowpan interface by command like:
+# ip link add link wpan0 name lowpan0 type lowpan
+3. Bring up 'lowpan0' interface
 
-Kernel side
-=============
+Drivers
+=======
 
 Like with WiFi, there are several types of devices implementing IEEE 802.15.4.
 1) 'HardMAC'. The MAC layer is implemented in the device itself, the device
-   exports a management (e.g. MLME) and data API.
+exports a management (e.g. MLME) and data API.
 2) 'SoftMAC' or just radio. These types of devices are just radio transceivers
-   possibly with some kinds of acceleration like automatic CRC computation and
-   comparation, automagic ACK handling, address matching, etc.
+possibly with some kinds of acceleration like automatic CRC computation and
+comparation, automagic ACK handling, address matching, etc.
 
 Those types of devices require different approach to be hooked into Linux kernel.
 
-
 HardMAC
-=======
+-------
 
 See the header include/net/ieee802154_netdev.h. You have to implement Linux
 net_device, with .type = ARPHRD_IEEE802154. Data is exchanged with socket family
@@ -64,9 +89,8 @@ net_device with a pointer to struct ieee802154_mlme_ops instance. The fields
 assoc_req, assoc_resp, disassoc_req, start_req, and scan_req are optional.
 All other fields are required.
 
-
 SoftMAC
-=======
+-------
 
 The MAC is the middle layer in the IEEE 802.15.4 Linux stack. This moment it
 provides interface for drivers registration and management of slave interfaces.
@@ -79,99 +103,78 @@ This layer is going to be extended soon.
 See header include/net/mac802154.h and several drivers in
 drivers/net/ieee802154/.
 
+Fake drivers
+------------
+
+In addition there is a driver available which simulates a real device with
+SoftMAC (fakelb - IEEE 802.15.4 loopback driver) interface. This option
+provides a possibility to test and debug the stack without usage of real hardware.
 
 Device drivers API
 ==================
 
 The include/net/mac802154.h defines following functions:
- - struct ieee802154_hw *
-   ieee802154_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len, const struct ieee802154_ops *ops):
-   allocation of IEEE 802.15.4 compatible hardware device
 
- - void ieee802154_free_hw(struct ieee802154_hw *hw):
-   freeing allocated hardware device
+.. c:function:: struct ieee802154_dev *ieee802154_alloc_device (size_t priv_size, struct ieee802154_ops *ops)
 
- - int ieee802154_register_hw(struct ieee802154_hw *hw):
-   register PHY which is the allocated hardware device, in the system
+Allocation of IEEE 802.15.4 compatible device.
 
- - void ieee802154_unregister_hw(struct ieee802154_hw *hw):
-   freeing registered PHY
+.. c:function:: void ieee802154_free_device(struct ieee802154_dev *dev)
 
- - void ieee802154_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee802154_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
-                              u8 lqi):
-   telling 802.15.4 module there is a new received frame in the skb with
-   the RF Link Quality Indicator (LQI) from the hardware device
+Freeing allocated device.
 
- - void ieee802154_xmit_complete(struct ieee802154_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
-                                 bool ifs_handling):
-   telling 802.15.4 module the frame in the skb is or going to be
-   transmitted through the hardware device
+.. c:function:: int ieee802154_register_device(struct ieee802154_dev *dev)
+
+Register PHY in the system.
+
+.. c:function:: void ieee802154_unregister_device(struct ieee802154_dev *dev)
+
+Freeing registered PHY.
+
+.. c:function:: void ieee802154_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee802154_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb, u8 lqi):
+
+Telling 802.15.4 module there is a new received frame in the skb with
+the RF Link Quality Indicator (LQI) from the hardware device.
+
+.. c:function:: void ieee802154_xmit_complete(struct ieee802154_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb, bool ifs_handling):
+
+Telling 802.15.4 module the frame in the skb is or going to be
+transmitted through the hardware device
 
 The device driver must implement the following callbacks in the IEEE 802.15.4
-operations structure at least:
-struct ieee802154_ops {
-	...
-	int	(*start)(struct ieee802154_hw *hw);
-	void	(*stop)(struct ieee802154_hw *hw);
-	...
-	int	(*xmit_async)(struct ieee802154_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
-	int	(*ed)(struct ieee802154_hw *hw, u8 *level);
-	int	(*set_channel)(struct ieee802154_hw *hw, u8 page, u8 channel);
-	...
-};
-
- - int start(struct ieee802154_hw *hw):
-   handler that 802.15.4 module calls for the hardware device initialization.
-
- - void stop(struct ieee802154_hw *hw):
-   handler that 802.15.4 module calls for the hardware device cleanup.
-
- - int xmit_async(struct ieee802154_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb):
-   handler that 802.15.4 module calls for each frame in the skb going to be
-   transmitted through the hardware device.
-
- - int ed(struct ieee802154_hw *hw, u8 *level):
-   handler that 802.15.4 module calls for Energy Detection from the hardware
-   device.
-
- - int set_channel(struct ieee802154_hw *hw, u8 page, u8 channel):
-   set radio for listening on specific channel of the hardware device.
+operations structure at least::
 
-Moreover IEEE 802.15.4 device operations structure should be filled.
+   struct ieee802154_ops {
+        ...
+        int     (*start)(struct ieee802154_hw *hw);
+        void    (*stop)(struct ieee802154_hw *hw);
+        ...
+        int     (*xmit_async)(struct ieee802154_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
+        int     (*ed)(struct ieee802154_hw *hw, u8 *level);
+        int     (*set_channel)(struct ieee802154_hw *hw, u8 page, u8 channel);
+        ...
+   };
 
-Fake drivers
-============
+.. c:function:: int start(struct ieee802154_hw *hw):
 
-In addition there is a driver available which simulates a real device with
-SoftMAC (fakelb - IEEE 802.15.4 loopback driver) interface. This option
-provides a possibility to test and debug the stack without usage of real hardware.
+Handler that 802.15.4 module calls for the hardware device initialization.
 
-See sources in drivers/net/ieee802154 folder for more details.
+.. c:function:: void stop(struct ieee802154_hw *hw):
 
+Handler that 802.15.4 module calls for the hardware device cleanup.
 
-6LoWPAN Linux implementation
-============================
+.. c:function:: int xmit_async(struct ieee802154_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb):
 
-The IEEE 802.15.4 standard specifies an MTU of 127 bytes, yielding about 80
-octets of actual MAC payload once security is turned on, on a wireless link
-with a link throughput of 250 kbps or less.  The 6LoWPAN adaptation format
-[RFC4944] was specified to carry IPv6 datagrams over such constrained links,
-taking into account limited bandwidth, memory, or energy resources that are
-expected in applications such as wireless Sensor Networks.  [RFC4944] defines
-a Mesh Addressing header to support sub-IP forwarding, a Fragmentation header
-to support the IPv6 minimum MTU requirement [RFC2460], and stateless header
-compression for IPv6 datagrams (LOWPAN_HC1 and LOWPAN_HC2) to reduce the
-relatively large IPv6 and UDP headers down to (in the best case) several bytes.
+Handler that 802.15.4 module calls for each frame in the skb going to be
+transmitted through the hardware device.
 
-In September 2011 the standard update was published - [RFC6282].
-It deprecates HC1 and HC2 compression and defines IPHC encoding format which is
-used in this Linux implementation.
+.. c:function:: int ed(struct ieee802154_hw *hw, u8 *level):
 
-All the code related to 6lowpan you may find in files: net/6lowpan/*
-and net/ieee802154/6lowpan/*
+Handler that 802.15.4 module calls for Energy Detection from the hardware
+device.
 
-To setup a 6LoWPAN interface you need:
-1. Add IEEE802.15.4 interface and set channel and PAN ID;
-2. Add 6lowpan interface by command like:
-   # ip link add link wpan0 name lowpan0 type lowpan
-3. Bring up 'lowpan0' interface
+.. c:function:: int set_channel(struct ieee802154_hw *hw, u8 page, u8 channel):
+
+Set radio for listening on specific channel of the hardware device.
+
+Moreover IEEE 802.15.4 device operations structure should be filled.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/index.rst b/Documentation/networking/index.rst
index 59e86de662cd..a46fca264bee 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/index.rst
+++ b/Documentation/networking/index.rst
@@ -11,27 +11,25 @@ Contents:
    batman-adv
    can
    can_ucan_protocol
-   device_drivers/freescale/dpaa2/index
-   device_drivers/intel/e100
-   device_drivers/intel/e1000
-   device_drivers/intel/e1000e
-   device_drivers/intel/fm10k
-   device_drivers/intel/igb
-   device_drivers/intel/igbvf
-   device_drivers/intel/ixgb
-   device_drivers/intel/ixgbe
-   device_drivers/intel/ixgbevf
-   device_drivers/intel/i40e
-   device_drivers/intel/iavf
-   device_drivers/intel/ice
+   device_drivers/index
+   dsa/index
+   devlink-info-versions
+   ieee802154
    kapi
    z8530book
    msg_zerocopy
    failover
    net_failover
+   phy
+   sfp-phylink
    alias
    bridge
    snmp_counter
+   checksum-offloads
+   segmentation-offloads
+   scaling
+   tls
+   tls-offload
 
 .. only::  subproject
 
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt
index acdfb5d2bcaa..22f6b8b1110a 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt
@@ -81,6 +81,11 @@ fib_multipath_hash_policy - INTEGER
 	0 - Layer 3
 	1 - Layer 4
 
+fib_sync_mem - UNSIGNED INTEGER
+	Amount of dirty memory from fib entries that can be backlogged before
+	synchronize_rcu is forced.
+	  Default: 512kB   Minimum: 64kB   Maximum: 64MB
+
 ip_forward_update_priority - INTEGER
 	Whether to update SKB priority from "TOS" field in IPv4 header after it
 	is forwarded. The new SKB priority is mapped from TOS field value
@@ -250,6 +255,14 @@ tcp_base_mss - INTEGER
 	Path MTU discovery (MTU probing).  If MTU probing is enabled,
 	this is the initial MSS used by the connection.
 
+tcp_min_snd_mss - INTEGER
+	TCP SYN and SYNACK messages usually advertise an ADVMSS option,
+	as described in RFC 1122 and RFC 6691.
+	If this ADVMSS option is smaller than tcp_min_snd_mss,
+	it is silently capped to tcp_min_snd_mss.
+
+	Default : 48 (at least 8 bytes of payload per segment)
+
 tcp_congestion_control - STRING
 	Set the congestion control algorithm to be used for new
 	connections. The algorithm "reno" is always available, but
@@ -422,6 +435,7 @@ tcp_min_rtt_wlen - INTEGER
 	minimum RTT when it is moved to a longer path (e.g., due to traffic
 	engineering). A longer window makes the filter more resistant to RTT
 	inflations such as transient congestion. The unit is seconds.
+	Possible values: 0 - 86400 (1 day)
 	Default: 300
 
 tcp_moderate_rcvbuf - BOOLEAN
@@ -554,10 +568,10 @@ tcp_comp_sack_delay_ns - LONG INTEGER
 	Default : 1,000,000 ns (1 ms)
 
 tcp_comp_sack_nr - INTEGER
-	Max numer of SACK that can be compressed.
+	Max number of SACK that can be compressed.
 	Using 0 disables SACK compression.
 
-	Detault : 44
+	Default : 44
 
 tcp_slow_start_after_idle - BOOLEAN
 	If set, provide RFC2861 behavior and time out the congestion
@@ -766,6 +780,14 @@ tcp_challenge_ack_limit - INTEGER
 	in RFC 5961 (Improving TCP's Robustness to Blind In-Window Attacks)
 	Default: 100
 
+tcp_rx_skb_cache - BOOLEAN
+	Controls a per TCP socket cache of one skb, that might help
+	performance of some workloads. This might be dangerous
+	on systems with a lot of TCP sockets, since it increases
+	memory usage.
+
+	Default: 0 (disabled)
+
 UDP variables:
 
 udp_l3mdev_accept - BOOLEAN
@@ -1336,6 +1358,7 @@ tag - INTEGER
 	Default value is 0.
 
 xfrm4_gc_thresh - INTEGER
+	(Obsolete since linux-4.14)
 	The threshold at which we will start garbage collecting for IPv4
 	destination cache entries.  At twice this value the system will
 	refuse new allocations.
@@ -1908,17 +1931,43 @@ enhanced_dad - BOOLEAN
 
 icmp/*:
 ratelimit - INTEGER
-	Limit the maximal rates for sending ICMPv6 packets.
+	Limit the maximal rates for sending ICMPv6 messages.
 	0 to disable any limiting,
 	otherwise the minimal space between responses in milliseconds.
 	Default: 1000
 
+ratemask - list of comma separated ranges
+	For ICMPv6 message types matching the ranges in the ratemask, limit
+	the sending of the message according to ratelimit parameter.
+
+	The format used for both input and output is a comma separated
+	list of ranges (e.g. "0-127,129" for ICMPv6 message type 0 to 127 and
+	129). Writing to the file will clear all previous ranges of ICMPv6
+	message types and update the current list with the input.
+
+	Refer to: https://www.iana.org/assignments/icmpv6-parameters/icmpv6-parameters.xhtml
+	for numerical values of ICMPv6 message types, e.g. echo request is 128
+	and echo reply is 129.
+
+	Default: 0-1,3-127 (rate limit ICMPv6 errors except Packet Too Big)
+
 echo_ignore_all - BOOLEAN
 	If set non-zero, then the kernel will ignore all ICMP ECHO
 	requests sent to it over the IPv6 protocol.
 	Default: 0
 
+echo_ignore_multicast - BOOLEAN
+	If set non-zero, then the kernel will ignore all ICMP ECHO
+	requests sent to it over the IPv6 protocol via multicast.
+	Default: 0
+
+echo_ignore_anycast - BOOLEAN
+	If set non-zero, then the kernel will ignore all ICMP ECHO
+	requests sent to it over the IPv6 protocol destined to anycast address.
+	Default: 0
+
 xfrm6_gc_thresh - INTEGER
+	(Obsolete since linux-4.14)
 	The threshold at which we will start garbage collecting for IPv6
 	destination cache entries.  At twice this value the system will
 	refuse new allocations.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/msg_zerocopy.rst b/Documentation/networking/msg_zerocopy.rst
index 18c1415e7bfa..ace56204dd03 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/msg_zerocopy.rst
+++ b/Documentation/networking/msg_zerocopy.rst
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ the excellent reporting over at LWN.net or read the original code.
 
   patchset
     [PATCH net-next v4 0/9] socket sendmsg MSG_ZEROCOPY
-    http://lkml.kernel.org/r/20170803202945.70750-1-willemdebruijn.kernel@gmail.com
+    https://lkml.kernel.org/netdev/20170803202945.70750-1-willemdebruijn.kernel@gmail.com
 
 
 Interface
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/netdev-FAQ.rst b/Documentation/networking/netdev-FAQ.rst
index 0ac5fa77f501..642fa963be3c 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/netdev-FAQ.rst
+++ b/Documentation/networking/netdev-FAQ.rst
@@ -131,6 +131,19 @@ it to the maintainer to figure out what is the most recent and current
 version that should be applied. If there is any doubt, the maintainer
 will reply and ask what should be done.
 
+Q: I made changes to only a few patches in a patch series should I resend only those changed?
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+A: No, please resend the entire patch series and make sure you do number your
+patches such that it is clear this is the latest and greatest set of patches
+that can be applied.
+
+Q: I submitted multiple versions of a patch series and it looks like a version other than the last one has been accepted, what should I do?
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+A: There is no revert possible, once it is pushed out, it stays like that.
+Please send incremental versions on top of what has been merged in order to fix
+the patches the way they would look like if your latest patch series was to be
+merged.
+
 Q: How can I tell what patches are queued up for backporting to the various stable releases?
 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 A: Normally Greg Kroah-Hartman collects stable commits himself, but for
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/nf_flowtable.txt b/Documentation/networking/nf_flowtable.txt
index 54128c50d508..ca2136c76042 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/nf_flowtable.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/nf_flowtable.txt
@@ -44,10 +44,10 @@ including the Netfilter hooks and the flowtable fastpath bypass.
      /         \    /          \     |Routing |   /            \
   -->  ingress  ---> prerouting ---> |decision|   | postrouting |--> neigh_xmit
      \_________/    \__________/     ----------   \____________/          ^
-       |      ^          |               |               ^                |
-   flowtable  |          |          ____\/___            |                |
-       |      |          |         /         \           |                |
-    __\/___   |          --------->| forward |------------                |
+       |      ^                          |               ^                |
+   flowtable  |                     ____\/___            |                |
+       |      |                    /         \           |                |
+    __\/___   |                    | forward |------------                |
     |-----|   |                    \_________/                            |
     |-----|   |                 'flow offload' rule                       |
     |-----|   |                   adds entry to                           |
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/phy.rst b/Documentation/networking/phy.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0dd90d7df5ec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/phy.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,447 @@
+=====================
+PHY Abstraction Layer
+=====================
+
+Purpose
+=======
+
+Most network devices consist of set of registers which provide an interface
+to a MAC layer, which communicates with the physical connection through a
+PHY.  The PHY concerns itself with negotiating link parameters with the link
+partner on the other side of the network connection (typically, an ethernet
+cable), and provides a register interface to allow drivers to determine what
+settings were chosen, and to configure what settings are allowed.
+
+While these devices are distinct from the network devices, and conform to a
+standard layout for the registers, it has been common practice to integrate
+the PHY management code with the network driver.  This has resulted in large
+amounts of redundant code.  Also, on embedded systems with multiple (and
+sometimes quite different) ethernet controllers connected to the same
+management bus, it is difficult to ensure safe use of the bus.
+
+Since the PHYs are devices, and the management busses through which they are
+accessed are, in fact, busses, the PHY Abstraction Layer treats them as such.
+In doing so, it has these goals:
+
+#. Increase code-reuse
+#. Increase overall code-maintainability
+#. Speed development time for new network drivers, and for new systems
+
+Basically, this layer is meant to provide an interface to PHY devices which
+allows network driver writers to write as little code as possible, while
+still providing a full feature set.
+
+The MDIO bus
+============
+
+Most network devices are connected to a PHY by means of a management bus.
+Different devices use different busses (though some share common interfaces).
+In order to take advantage of the PAL, each bus interface needs to be
+registered as a distinct device.
+
+#. read and write functions must be implemented. Their prototypes are::
+
+	int write(struct mii_bus *bus, int mii_id, int regnum, u16 value);
+	int read(struct mii_bus *bus, int mii_id, int regnum);
+
+   mii_id is the address on the bus for the PHY, and regnum is the register
+   number.  These functions are guaranteed not to be called from interrupt
+   time, so it is safe for them to block, waiting for an interrupt to signal
+   the operation is complete
+
+#. A reset function is optional. This is used to return the bus to an
+   initialized state.
+
+#. A probe function is needed.  This function should set up anything the bus
+   driver needs, setup the mii_bus structure, and register with the PAL using
+   mdiobus_register.  Similarly, there's a remove function to undo all of
+   that (use mdiobus_unregister).
+
+#. Like any driver, the device_driver structure must be configured, and init
+   exit functions are used to register the driver.
+
+#. The bus must also be declared somewhere as a device, and registered.
+
+As an example for how one driver implemented an mdio bus driver, see
+drivers/net/ethernet/freescale/fsl_pq_mdio.c and an associated DTS file
+for one of the users. (e.g. "git grep fsl,.*-mdio arch/powerpc/boot/dts/")
+
+(RG)MII/electrical interface considerations
+===========================================
+
+The Reduced Gigabit Medium Independent Interface (RGMII) is a 12-pin
+electrical signal interface using a synchronous 125Mhz clock signal and several
+data lines. Due to this design decision, a 1.5ns to 2ns delay must be added
+between the clock line (RXC or TXC) and the data lines to let the PHY (clock
+sink) have enough setup and hold times to sample the data lines correctly. The
+PHY library offers different types of PHY_INTERFACE_MODE_RGMII* values to let
+the PHY driver and optionally the MAC driver, implement the required delay. The
+values of phy_interface_t must be understood from the perspective of the PHY
+device itself, leading to the following:
+
+* PHY_INTERFACE_MODE_RGMII: the PHY is not responsible for inserting any
+  internal delay by itself, it assumes that either the Ethernet MAC (if capable
+  or the PCB traces) insert the correct 1.5-2ns delay
+
+* PHY_INTERFACE_MODE_RGMII_TXID: the PHY should insert an internal delay
+  for the transmit data lines (TXD[3:0]) processed by the PHY device
+
+* PHY_INTERFACE_MODE_RGMII_RXID: the PHY should insert an internal delay
+  for the receive data lines (RXD[3:0]) processed by the PHY device
+
+* PHY_INTERFACE_MODE_RGMII_ID: the PHY should insert internal delays for
+  both transmit AND receive data lines from/to the PHY device
+
+Whenever possible, use the PHY side RGMII delay for these reasons:
+
+* PHY devices may offer sub-nanosecond granularity in how they allow a
+  receiver/transmitter side delay (e.g: 0.5, 1.0, 1.5ns) to be specified. Such
+  precision may be required to account for differences in PCB trace lengths
+
+* PHY devices are typically qualified for a large range of applications
+  (industrial, medical, automotive...), and they provide a constant and
+  reliable delay across temperature/pressure/voltage ranges
+
+* PHY device drivers in PHYLIB being reusable by nature, being able to
+  configure correctly a specified delay enables more designs with similar delay
+  requirements to be operate correctly
+
+For cases where the PHY is not capable of providing this delay, but the
+Ethernet MAC driver is capable of doing so, the correct phy_interface_t value
+should be PHY_INTERFACE_MODE_RGMII, and the Ethernet MAC driver should be
+configured correctly in order to provide the required transmit and/or receive
+side delay from the perspective of the PHY device. Conversely, if the Ethernet
+MAC driver looks at the phy_interface_t value, for any other mode but
+PHY_INTERFACE_MODE_RGMII, it should make sure that the MAC-level delays are
+disabled.
+
+In case neither the Ethernet MAC, nor the PHY are capable of providing the
+required delays, as defined per the RGMII standard, several options may be
+available:
+
+* Some SoCs may offer a pin pad/mux/controller capable of configuring a given
+  set of pins'strength, delays, and voltage; and it may be a suitable
+  option to insert the expected 2ns RGMII delay.
+
+* Modifying the PCB design to include a fixed delay (e.g: using a specifically
+  designed serpentine), which may not require software configuration at all.
+
+Common problems with RGMII delay mismatch
+-----------------------------------------
+
+When there is a RGMII delay mismatch between the Ethernet MAC and the PHY, this
+will most likely result in the clock and data line signals to be unstable when
+the PHY or MAC take a snapshot of these signals to translate them into logical
+1 or 0 states and reconstruct the data being transmitted/received. Typical
+symptoms include:
+
+* Transmission/reception partially works, and there is frequent or occasional
+  packet loss observed
+
+* Ethernet MAC may report some or all packets ingressing with a FCS/CRC error,
+  or just discard them all
+
+* Switching to lower speeds such as 10/100Mbits/sec makes the problem go away
+  (since there is enough setup/hold time in that case)
+
+Connecting to a PHY
+===================
+
+Sometime during startup, the network driver needs to establish a connection
+between the PHY device, and the network device.  At this time, the PHY's bus
+and drivers need to all have been loaded, so it is ready for the connection.
+At this point, there are several ways to connect to the PHY:
+
+#. The PAL handles everything, and only calls the network driver when
+   the link state changes, so it can react.
+
+#. The PAL handles everything except interrupts (usually because the
+   controller has the interrupt registers).
+
+#. The PAL handles everything, but checks in with the driver every second,
+   allowing the network driver to react first to any changes before the PAL
+   does.
+
+#. The PAL serves only as a library of functions, with the network device
+   manually calling functions to update status, and configure the PHY
+
+
+Letting the PHY Abstraction Layer do Everything
+===============================================
+
+If you choose option 1 (The hope is that every driver can, but to still be
+useful to drivers that can't), connecting to the PHY is simple:
+
+First, you need a function to react to changes in the link state.  This
+function follows this protocol::
+
+	static void adjust_link(struct net_device *dev);
+
+Next, you need to know the device name of the PHY connected to this device.
+The name will look something like, "0:00", where the first number is the
+bus id, and the second is the PHY's address on that bus.  Typically,
+the bus is responsible for making its ID unique.
+
+Now, to connect, just call this function::
+
+	phydev = phy_connect(dev, phy_name, &adjust_link, interface);
+
+*phydev* is a pointer to the phy_device structure which represents the PHY.
+If phy_connect is successful, it will return the pointer.  dev, here, is the
+pointer to your net_device.  Once done, this function will have started the
+PHY's software state machine, and registered for the PHY's interrupt, if it
+has one.  The phydev structure will be populated with information about the
+current state, though the PHY will not yet be truly operational at this
+point.
+
+PHY-specific flags should be set in phydev->dev_flags prior to the call
+to phy_connect() such that the underlying PHY driver can check for flags
+and perform specific operations based on them.
+This is useful if the system has put hardware restrictions on
+the PHY/controller, of which the PHY needs to be aware.
+
+*interface* is a u32 which specifies the connection type used
+between the controller and the PHY.  Examples are GMII, MII,
+RGMII, and SGMII.  For a full list, see include/linux/phy.h
+
+Now just make sure that phydev->supported and phydev->advertising have any
+values pruned from them which don't make sense for your controller (a 10/100
+controller may be connected to a gigabit capable PHY, so you would need to
+mask off SUPPORTED_1000baseT*).  See include/linux/ethtool.h for definitions
+for these bitfields. Note that you should not SET any bits, except the
+SUPPORTED_Pause and SUPPORTED_AsymPause bits (see below), or the PHY may get
+put into an unsupported state.
+
+Lastly, once the controller is ready to handle network traffic, you call
+phy_start(phydev).  This tells the PAL that you are ready, and configures the
+PHY to connect to the network. If the MAC interrupt of your network driver
+also handles PHY status changes, just set phydev->irq to PHY_IGNORE_INTERRUPT
+before you call phy_start and use phy_mac_interrupt() from the network
+driver. If you don't want to use interrupts, set phydev->irq to PHY_POLL.
+phy_start() enables the PHY interrupts (if applicable) and starts the
+phylib state machine.
+
+When you want to disconnect from the network (even if just briefly), you call
+phy_stop(phydev). This function also stops the phylib state machine and
+disables PHY interrupts.
+
+Pause frames / flow control
+===========================
+
+The PHY does not participate directly in flow control/pause frames except by
+making sure that the SUPPORTED_Pause and SUPPORTED_AsymPause bits are set in
+MII_ADVERTISE to indicate towards the link partner that the Ethernet MAC
+controller supports such a thing. Since flow control/pause frames generation
+involves the Ethernet MAC driver, it is recommended that this driver takes care
+of properly indicating advertisement and support for such features by setting
+the SUPPORTED_Pause and SUPPORTED_AsymPause bits accordingly. This can be done
+either before or after phy_connect() and/or as a result of implementing the
+ethtool::set_pauseparam feature.
+
+
+Keeping Close Tabs on the PAL
+=============================
+
+It is possible that the PAL's built-in state machine needs a little help to
+keep your network device and the PHY properly in sync.  If so, you can
+register a helper function when connecting to the PHY, which will be called
+every second before the state machine reacts to any changes.  To do this, you
+need to manually call phy_attach() and phy_prepare_link(), and then call
+phy_start_machine() with the second argument set to point to your special
+handler.
+
+Currently there are no examples of how to use this functionality, and testing
+on it has been limited because the author does not have any drivers which use
+it (they all use option 1).  So Caveat Emptor.
+
+Doing it all yourself
+=====================
+
+There's a remote chance that the PAL's built-in state machine cannot track
+the complex interactions between the PHY and your network device.  If this is
+so, you can simply call phy_attach(), and not call phy_start_machine or
+phy_prepare_link().  This will mean that phydev->state is entirely yours to
+handle (phy_start and phy_stop toggle between some of the states, so you
+might need to avoid them).
+
+An effort has been made to make sure that useful functionality can be
+accessed without the state-machine running, and most of these functions are
+descended from functions which did not interact with a complex state-machine.
+However, again, no effort has been made so far to test running without the
+state machine, so tryer beware.
+
+Here is a brief rundown of the functions::
+
+ int phy_read(struct phy_device *phydev, u16 regnum);
+ int phy_write(struct phy_device *phydev, u16 regnum, u16 val);
+
+Simple read/write primitives.  They invoke the bus's read/write function
+pointers.
+::
+
+ void phy_print_status(struct phy_device *phydev);
+
+A convenience function to print out the PHY status neatly.
+::
+
+ void phy_request_interrupt(struct phy_device *phydev);
+
+Requests the IRQ for the PHY interrupts.
+::
+
+ struct phy_device * phy_attach(struct net_device *dev, const char *phy_id,
+		                phy_interface_t interface);
+
+Attaches a network device to a particular PHY, binding the PHY to a generic
+driver if none was found during bus initialization.
+::
+
+ int phy_start_aneg(struct phy_device *phydev);
+
+Using variables inside the phydev structure, either configures advertising
+and resets autonegotiation, or disables autonegotiation, and configures
+forced settings.
+::
+
+ static inline int phy_read_status(struct phy_device *phydev);
+
+Fills the phydev structure with up-to-date information about the current
+settings in the PHY.
+::
+
+ int phy_ethtool_sset(struct phy_device *phydev, struct ethtool_cmd *cmd);
+
+Ethtool convenience functions.
+::
+
+ int phy_mii_ioctl(struct phy_device *phydev,
+                   struct mii_ioctl_data *mii_data, int cmd);
+
+The MII ioctl.  Note that this function will completely screw up the state
+machine if you write registers like BMCR, BMSR, ADVERTISE, etc.  Best to
+use this only to write registers which are not standard, and don't set off
+a renegotiation.
+
+PHY Device Drivers
+==================
+
+With the PHY Abstraction Layer, adding support for new PHYs is
+quite easy. In some cases, no work is required at all! However,
+many PHYs require a little hand-holding to get up-and-running.
+
+Generic PHY driver
+------------------
+
+If the desired PHY doesn't have any errata, quirks, or special
+features you want to support, then it may be best to not add
+support, and let the PHY Abstraction Layer's Generic PHY Driver
+do all of the work.
+
+Writing a PHY driver
+--------------------
+
+If you do need to write a PHY driver, the first thing to do is
+make sure it can be matched with an appropriate PHY device.
+This is done during bus initialization by reading the device's
+UID (stored in registers 2 and 3), then comparing it to each
+driver's phy_id field by ANDing it with each driver's
+phy_id_mask field.  Also, it needs a name.  Here's an example::
+
+   static struct phy_driver dm9161_driver = {
+         .phy_id         = 0x0181b880,
+	 .name           = "Davicom DM9161E",
+	 .phy_id_mask    = 0x0ffffff0,
+	 ...
+   }
+
+Next, you need to specify what features (speed, duplex, autoneg,
+etc) your PHY device and driver support.  Most PHYs support
+PHY_BASIC_FEATURES, but you can look in include/mii.h for other
+features.
+
+Each driver consists of a number of function pointers, documented
+in include/linux/phy.h under the phy_driver structure.
+
+Of these, only config_aneg and read_status are required to be
+assigned by the driver code.  The rest are optional.  Also, it is
+preferred to use the generic phy driver's versions of these two
+functions if at all possible: genphy_read_status and
+genphy_config_aneg.  If this is not possible, it is likely that
+you only need to perform some actions before and after invoking
+these functions, and so your functions will wrap the generic
+ones.
+
+Feel free to look at the Marvell, Cicada, and Davicom drivers in
+drivers/net/phy/ for examples (the lxt and qsemi drivers have
+not been tested as of this writing).
+
+The PHY's MMD register accesses are handled by the PAL framework
+by default, but can be overridden by a specific PHY driver if
+required. This could be the case if a PHY was released for
+manufacturing before the MMD PHY register definitions were
+standardized by the IEEE. Most modern PHYs will be able to use
+the generic PAL framework for accessing the PHY's MMD registers.
+An example of such usage is for Energy Efficient Ethernet support,
+implemented in the PAL. This support uses the PAL to access MMD
+registers for EEE query and configuration if the PHY supports
+the IEEE standard access mechanisms, or can use the PHY's specific
+access interfaces if overridden by the specific PHY driver. See
+the Micrel driver in drivers/net/phy/ for an example of how this
+can be implemented.
+
+Board Fixups
+============
+
+Sometimes the specific interaction between the platform and the PHY requires
+special handling.  For instance, to change where the PHY's clock input is,
+or to add a delay to account for latency issues in the data path.  In order
+to support such contingencies, the PHY Layer allows platform code to register
+fixups to be run when the PHY is brought up (or subsequently reset).
+
+When the PHY Layer brings up a PHY it checks to see if there are any fixups
+registered for it, matching based on UID (contained in the PHY device's phy_id
+field) and the bus identifier (contained in phydev->dev.bus_id).  Both must
+match, however two constants, PHY_ANY_ID and PHY_ANY_UID, are provided as
+wildcards for the bus ID and UID, respectively.
+
+When a match is found, the PHY layer will invoke the run function associated
+with the fixup.  This function is passed a pointer to the phy_device of
+interest.  It should therefore only operate on that PHY.
+
+The platform code can either register the fixup using phy_register_fixup()::
+
+	int phy_register_fixup(const char *phy_id,
+		u32 phy_uid, u32 phy_uid_mask,
+		int (*run)(struct phy_device *));
+
+Or using one of the two stubs, phy_register_fixup_for_uid() and
+phy_register_fixup_for_id()::
+
+ int phy_register_fixup_for_uid(u32 phy_uid, u32 phy_uid_mask,
+		int (*run)(struct phy_device *));
+ int phy_register_fixup_for_id(const char *phy_id,
+		int (*run)(struct phy_device *));
+
+The stubs set one of the two matching criteria, and set the other one to
+match anything.
+
+When phy_register_fixup() or \*_for_uid()/\*_for_id() is called at module,
+unregister fixup and free allocate memory are required.
+
+Call one of following function before unloading module::
+
+ int phy_unregister_fixup(const char *phy_id, u32 phy_uid, u32 phy_uid_mask);
+ int phy_unregister_fixup_for_uid(u32 phy_uid, u32 phy_uid_mask);
+ int phy_register_fixup_for_id(const char *phy_id);
+
+Standards
+=========
+
+IEEE Standard 802.3: CSMA/CD Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications, Section Two:
+http://standards.ieee.org/getieee802/download/802.3-2008_section2.pdf
+
+RGMII v1.3:
+http://web.archive.org/web/20160303212629/http://www.hp.com/rnd/pdfs/RGMIIv1_3.pdf
+
+RGMII v2.0:
+http://web.archive.org/web/20160303171328/http://www.hp.com/rnd/pdfs/RGMIIv2_0_final_hp.pdf
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/phy.txt b/Documentation/networking/phy.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index bdec0f700bc1..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/networking/phy.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,427 +0,0 @@
-
--------
-PHY Abstraction Layer
-(Updated 2008-04-08)
-
-Purpose
-
- Most network devices consist of set of registers which provide an interface
- to a MAC layer, which communicates with the physical connection through a
- PHY.  The PHY concerns itself with negotiating link parameters with the link
- partner on the other side of the network connection (typically, an ethernet
- cable), and provides a register interface to allow drivers to determine what
- settings were chosen, and to configure what settings are allowed.
-
- While these devices are distinct from the network devices, and conform to a
- standard layout for the registers, it has been common practice to integrate
- the PHY management code with the network driver.  This has resulted in large
- amounts of redundant code.  Also, on embedded systems with multiple (and
- sometimes quite different) ethernet controllers connected to the same 
- management bus, it is difficult to ensure safe use of the bus.
-
- Since the PHYs are devices, and the management busses through which they are
- accessed are, in fact, busses, the PHY Abstraction Layer treats them as such.
- In doing so, it has these goals:
-
-   1) Increase code-reuse
-   2) Increase overall code-maintainability
-   3) Speed development time for new network drivers, and for new systems
- 
- Basically, this layer is meant to provide an interface to PHY devices which
- allows network driver writers to write as little code as possible, while
- still providing a full feature set.
-
-The MDIO bus
-
- Most network devices are connected to a PHY by means of a management bus.
- Different devices use different busses (though some share common interfaces).
- In order to take advantage of the PAL, each bus interface needs to be
- registered as a distinct device.
-
- 1) read and write functions must be implemented.  Their prototypes are:
-
-     int write(struct mii_bus *bus, int mii_id, int regnum, u16 value);
-     int read(struct mii_bus *bus, int mii_id, int regnum);
-
-   mii_id is the address on the bus for the PHY, and regnum is the register
-   number.  These functions are guaranteed not to be called from interrupt
-   time, so it is safe for them to block, waiting for an interrupt to signal
-   the operation is complete
- 
- 2) A reset function is optional.  This is used to return the bus to an
-   initialized state.
-
- 3) A probe function is needed.  This function should set up anything the bus
-   driver needs, setup the mii_bus structure, and register with the PAL using
-   mdiobus_register.  Similarly, there's a remove function to undo all of
-   that (use mdiobus_unregister).
- 
- 4) Like any driver, the device_driver structure must be configured, and init
-   exit functions are used to register the driver.
-
- 5) The bus must also be declared somewhere as a device, and registered.
-
- As an example for how one driver implemented an mdio bus driver, see
- drivers/net/ethernet/freescale/fsl_pq_mdio.c and an associated DTS file
- for one of the users. (e.g. "git grep fsl,.*-mdio arch/powerpc/boot/dts/")
-
-(RG)MII/electrical interface considerations
-
- The Reduced Gigabit Medium Independent Interface (RGMII) is a 12-pin
- electrical signal interface using a synchronous 125Mhz clock signal and several
- data lines. Due to this design decision, a 1.5ns to 2ns delay must be added
- between the clock line (RXC or TXC) and the data lines to let the PHY (clock
- sink) have enough setup and hold times to sample the data lines correctly. The
- PHY library offers different types of PHY_INTERFACE_MODE_RGMII* values to let
- the PHY driver and optionally the MAC driver, implement the required delay. The
- values of phy_interface_t must be understood from the perspective of the PHY
- device itself, leading to the following:
-
- * PHY_INTERFACE_MODE_RGMII: the PHY is not responsible for inserting any
-   internal delay by itself, it assumes that either the Ethernet MAC (if capable
-   or the PCB traces) insert the correct 1.5-2ns delay
-
- * PHY_INTERFACE_MODE_RGMII_TXID: the PHY should insert an internal delay
-   for the transmit data lines (TXD[3:0]) processed by the PHY device
-
- * PHY_INTERFACE_MODE_RGMII_RXID: the PHY should insert an internal delay
-   for the receive data lines (RXD[3:0]) processed by the PHY device
-
- * PHY_INTERFACE_MODE_RGMII_ID: the PHY should insert internal delays for
-   both transmit AND receive data lines from/to the PHY device
-
- Whenever possible, use the PHY side RGMII delay for these reasons:
-
- * PHY devices may offer sub-nanosecond granularity in how they allow a
-   receiver/transmitter side delay (e.g: 0.5, 1.0, 1.5ns) to be specified. Such
-   precision may be required to account for differences in PCB trace lengths
-
- * PHY devices are typically qualified for a large range of applications
-   (industrial, medical, automotive...), and they provide a constant and
-   reliable delay across temperature/pressure/voltage ranges
-
- * PHY device drivers in PHYLIB being reusable by nature, being able to
-   configure correctly a specified delay enables more designs with similar delay
-   requirements to be operate correctly
-
- For cases where the PHY is not capable of providing this delay, but the
- Ethernet MAC driver is capable of doing so, the correct phy_interface_t value
- should be PHY_INTERFACE_MODE_RGMII, and the Ethernet MAC driver should be
- configured correctly in order to provide the required transmit and/or receive
- side delay from the perspective of the PHY device. Conversely, if the Ethernet
- MAC driver looks at the phy_interface_t value, for any other mode but
- PHY_INTERFACE_MODE_RGMII, it should make sure that the MAC-level delays are
- disabled.
-
- In case neither the Ethernet MAC, nor the PHY are capable of providing the
- required delays, as defined per the RGMII standard, several options may be
- available:
-
- * Some SoCs may offer a pin pad/mux/controller capable of configuring a given
-   set of pins'strength, delays, and voltage; and it may be a suitable
-   option to insert the expected 2ns RGMII delay.
-
- * Modifying the PCB design to include a fixed delay (e.g: using a specifically
-   designed serpentine), which may not require software configuration at all.
-
-Common problems with RGMII delay mismatch
-
- When there is a RGMII delay mismatch between the Ethernet MAC and the PHY, this
- will most likely result in the clock and data line signals to be unstable when
- the PHY or MAC take a snapshot of these signals to translate them into logical
- 1 or 0 states and reconstruct the data being transmitted/received. Typical
- symptoms include:
-
- * Transmission/reception partially works, and there is frequent or occasional
-   packet loss observed
-
- * Ethernet MAC may report some or all packets ingressing with a FCS/CRC error,
-   or just discard them all
-
- * Switching to lower speeds such as 10/100Mbits/sec makes the problem go away
-   (since there is enough setup/hold time in that case)
-
-
-Connecting to a PHY
-
- Sometime during startup, the network driver needs to establish a connection
- between the PHY device, and the network device.  At this time, the PHY's bus
- and drivers need to all have been loaded, so it is ready for the connection.
- At this point, there are several ways to connect to the PHY:
-
- 1) The PAL handles everything, and only calls the network driver when
-   the link state changes, so it can react.
-
- 2) The PAL handles everything except interrupts (usually because the
-   controller has the interrupt registers).
-
- 3) The PAL handles everything, but checks in with the driver every second,
-   allowing the network driver to react first to any changes before the PAL
-   does.
- 
- 4) The PAL serves only as a library of functions, with the network device
-   manually calling functions to update status, and configure the PHY
-
-
-Letting the PHY Abstraction Layer do Everything
-
- If you choose option 1 (The hope is that every driver can, but to still be
- useful to drivers that can't), connecting to the PHY is simple:
-
- First, you need a function to react to changes in the link state.  This
- function follows this protocol:
-
-   static void adjust_link(struct net_device *dev);
- 
- Next, you need to know the device name of the PHY connected to this device. 
- The name will look something like, "0:00", where the first number is the
- bus id, and the second is the PHY's address on that bus.  Typically,
- the bus is responsible for making its ID unique.
- 
- Now, to connect, just call this function:
- 
-   phydev = phy_connect(dev, phy_name, &adjust_link, interface);
-
- phydev is a pointer to the phy_device structure which represents the PHY.  If
- phy_connect is successful, it will return the pointer.  dev, here, is the
- pointer to your net_device.  Once done, this function will have started the
- PHY's software state machine, and registered for the PHY's interrupt, if it
- has one.  The phydev structure will be populated with information about the
- current state, though the PHY will not yet be truly operational at this
- point.
-
- PHY-specific flags should be set in phydev->dev_flags prior to the call
- to phy_connect() such that the underlying PHY driver can check for flags
- and perform specific operations based on them.
- This is useful if the system has put hardware restrictions on
- the PHY/controller, of which the PHY needs to be aware.
-
- interface is a u32 which specifies the connection type used
- between the controller and the PHY.  Examples are GMII, MII,
- RGMII, and SGMII.  For a full list, see include/linux/phy.h
-
- Now just make sure that phydev->supported and phydev->advertising have any
- values pruned from them which don't make sense for your controller (a 10/100
- controller may be connected to a gigabit capable PHY, so you would need to
- mask off SUPPORTED_1000baseT*).  See include/linux/ethtool.h for definitions
- for these bitfields. Note that you should not SET any bits, except the
- SUPPORTED_Pause and SUPPORTED_AsymPause bits (see below), or the PHY may get
- put into an unsupported state.
-
- Lastly, once the controller is ready to handle network traffic, you call
- phy_start(phydev).  This tells the PAL that you are ready, and configures the
- PHY to connect to the network.  If you want to handle your own interrupts,
- just set phydev->irq to PHY_IGNORE_INTERRUPT before you call phy_start.
- Similarly, if you don't want to use interrupts, set phydev->irq to PHY_POLL.
-
- When you want to disconnect from the network (even if just briefly), you call
- phy_stop(phydev).
-
-Pause frames / flow control
-
- The PHY does not participate directly in flow control/pause frames except by
- making sure that the SUPPORTED_Pause and SUPPORTED_AsymPause bits are set in
- MII_ADVERTISE to indicate towards the link partner that the Ethernet MAC
- controller supports such a thing. Since flow control/pause frames generation
- involves the Ethernet MAC driver, it is recommended that this driver takes care
- of properly indicating advertisement and support for such features by setting
- the SUPPORTED_Pause and SUPPORTED_AsymPause bits accordingly. This can be done
- either before or after phy_connect() and/or as a result of implementing the
- ethtool::set_pauseparam feature.
-
-
-Keeping Close Tabs on the PAL
-
- It is possible that the PAL's built-in state machine needs a little help to
- keep your network device and the PHY properly in sync.  If so, you can
- register a helper function when connecting to the PHY, which will be called
- every second before the state machine reacts to any changes.  To do this, you
- need to manually call phy_attach() and phy_prepare_link(), and then call
- phy_start_machine() with the second argument set to point to your special
- handler.
-
- Currently there are no examples of how to use this functionality, and testing
- on it has been limited because the author does not have any drivers which use
- it (they all use option 1).  So Caveat Emptor.
-
-Doing it all yourself
-
- There's a remote chance that the PAL's built-in state machine cannot track
- the complex interactions between the PHY and your network device.  If this is
- so, you can simply call phy_attach(), and not call phy_start_machine or
- phy_prepare_link().  This will mean that phydev->state is entirely yours to
- handle (phy_start and phy_stop toggle between some of the states, so you
- might need to avoid them).
-
- An effort has been made to make sure that useful functionality can be
- accessed without the state-machine running, and most of these functions are
- descended from functions which did not interact with a complex state-machine.
- However, again, no effort has been made so far to test running without the
- state machine, so tryer beware.
-
- Here is a brief rundown of the functions:
-
- int phy_read(struct phy_device *phydev, u16 regnum);
- int phy_write(struct phy_device *phydev, u16 regnum, u16 val);
-
-   Simple read/write primitives.  They invoke the bus's read/write function
-   pointers.
-
- void phy_print_status(struct phy_device *phydev);
- 
-   A convenience function to print out the PHY status neatly.
-
- int phy_start_interrupts(struct phy_device *phydev);
- int phy_stop_interrupts(struct phy_device *phydev);
-
-   Requests the IRQ for the PHY interrupts, then enables them for
-   start, or disables then frees them for stop.
-
- struct phy_device * phy_attach(struct net_device *dev, const char *phy_id,
-		 phy_interface_t interface);
-
-   Attaches a network device to a particular PHY, binding the PHY to a generic
-   driver if none was found during bus initialization.
-
- int phy_start_aneg(struct phy_device *phydev);
-   
-   Using variables inside the phydev structure, either configures advertising
-   and resets autonegotiation, or disables autonegotiation, and configures
-   forced settings.
-
- static inline int phy_read_status(struct phy_device *phydev);
-
-   Fills the phydev structure with up-to-date information about the current
-   settings in the PHY.
-
- int phy_ethtool_sset(struct phy_device *phydev, struct ethtool_cmd *cmd);
-
-   Ethtool convenience functions.
-
- int phy_mii_ioctl(struct phy_device *phydev,
-                 struct mii_ioctl_data *mii_data, int cmd);
-
-   The MII ioctl.  Note that this function will completely screw up the state
-   machine if you write registers like BMCR, BMSR, ADVERTISE, etc.  Best to
-   use this only to write registers which are not standard, and don't set off
-   a renegotiation.
-
-
-PHY Device Drivers
-
- With the PHY Abstraction Layer, adding support for new PHYs is
- quite easy.  In some cases, no work is required at all!  However,
- many PHYs require a little hand-holding to get up-and-running.
-
-Generic PHY driver
-
- If the desired PHY doesn't have any errata, quirks, or special
- features you want to support, then it may be best to not add
- support, and let the PHY Abstraction Layer's Generic PHY Driver
- do all of the work.  
-
-Writing a PHY driver
-
- If you do need to write a PHY driver, the first thing to do is
- make sure it can be matched with an appropriate PHY device.
- This is done during bus initialization by reading the device's
- UID (stored in registers 2 and 3), then comparing it to each
- driver's phy_id field by ANDing it with each driver's
- phy_id_mask field.  Also, it needs a name.  Here's an example:
-
-   static struct phy_driver dm9161_driver = {
-         .phy_id         = 0x0181b880,
-	 .name           = "Davicom DM9161E",
-	 .phy_id_mask    = 0x0ffffff0,
-	 ...
-   }
-
- Next, you need to specify what features (speed, duplex, autoneg,
- etc) your PHY device and driver support.  Most PHYs support
- PHY_BASIC_FEATURES, but you can look in include/mii.h for other
- features.
-
- Each driver consists of a number of function pointers, documented
- in include/linux/phy.h under the phy_driver structure.
-
- Of these, only config_aneg and read_status are required to be
- assigned by the driver code.  The rest are optional.  Also, it is
- preferred to use the generic phy driver's versions of these two
- functions if at all possible: genphy_read_status and
- genphy_config_aneg.  If this is not possible, it is likely that
- you only need to perform some actions before and after invoking
- these functions, and so your functions will wrap the generic
- ones.
-
- Feel free to look at the Marvell, Cicada, and Davicom drivers in
- drivers/net/phy/ for examples (the lxt and qsemi drivers have
- not been tested as of this writing).
-
- The PHY's MMD register accesses are handled by the PAL framework
- by default, but can be overridden by a specific PHY driver if
- required. This could be the case if a PHY was released for
- manufacturing before the MMD PHY register definitions were
- standardized by the IEEE. Most modern PHYs will be able to use
- the generic PAL framework for accessing the PHY's MMD registers.
- An example of such usage is for Energy Efficient Ethernet support,
- implemented in the PAL. This support uses the PAL to access MMD
- registers for EEE query and configuration if the PHY supports
- the IEEE standard access mechanisms, or can use the PHY's specific
- access interfaces if overridden by the specific PHY driver. See
- the Micrel driver in drivers/net/phy/ for an example of how this
- can be implemented.
-
-Board Fixups
-
- Sometimes the specific interaction between the platform and the PHY requires
- special handling.  For instance, to change where the PHY's clock input is,
- or to add a delay to account for latency issues in the data path.  In order
- to support such contingencies, the PHY Layer allows platform code to register
- fixups to be run when the PHY is brought up (or subsequently reset).
-
- When the PHY Layer brings up a PHY it checks to see if there are any fixups
- registered for it, matching based on UID (contained in the PHY device's phy_id
- field) and the bus identifier (contained in phydev->dev.bus_id).  Both must
- match, however two constants, PHY_ANY_ID and PHY_ANY_UID, are provided as
- wildcards for the bus ID and UID, respectively.
-
- When a match is found, the PHY layer will invoke the run function associated
- with the fixup.  This function is passed a pointer to the phy_device of
- interest.  It should therefore only operate on that PHY.
-
- The platform code can either register the fixup using phy_register_fixup():
-
-	int phy_register_fixup(const char *phy_id,
-		u32 phy_uid, u32 phy_uid_mask,
-		int (*run)(struct phy_device *));
-
- Or using one of the two stubs, phy_register_fixup_for_uid() and
- phy_register_fixup_for_id():
-
- int phy_register_fixup_for_uid(u32 phy_uid, u32 phy_uid_mask,
-		int (*run)(struct phy_device *));
- int phy_register_fixup_for_id(const char *phy_id,
-		int (*run)(struct phy_device *));
-
- The stubs set one of the two matching criteria, and set the other one to
- match anything.
-
- When phy_register_fixup() or *_for_uid()/*_for_id() is called at module,
- unregister fixup and free allocate memory are required.
-
- Call one of following function before unloading module.
-
- int phy_unregister_fixup(const char *phy_id, u32 phy_uid, u32 phy_uid_mask);
- int phy_unregister_fixup_for_uid(u32 phy_uid, u32 phy_uid_mask);
- int phy_register_fixup_for_id(const char *phy_id);
-
-Standards
-
- IEEE Standard 802.3: CSMA/CD Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications, Section Two:
- http://standards.ieee.org/getieee802/download/802.3-2008_section2.pdf
-
- RGMII v1.3:
- http://web.archive.org/web/20160303212629/http://www.hp.com/rnd/pdfs/RGMIIv1_3.pdf
-
- RGMII v2.0:
- http://web.archive.org/web/20160303171328/http://www.hp.com/rnd/pdfs/RGMIIv2_0_final_hp.pdf
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/rds.txt b/Documentation/networking/rds.txt
index 0235ae69af2a..f2a0147c933d 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/rds.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/rds.txt
@@ -389,7 +389,7 @@ Multipath RDS (mprds)
   a common (to all paths) part, and a per-path struct rds_conn_path. All
   I/O workqs and reconnect threads are driven from the rds_conn_path.
   Transports such as TCP that are multipath capable may then set up a
-  TPC socket per rds_conn_path, and this is managed by the transport via
+  TCP socket per rds_conn_path, and this is managed by the transport via
   the transport privatee cp_transport_data pointer.
 
   Transports announce themselves as multipath capable by setting the
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/rxrpc.txt b/Documentation/networking/rxrpc.txt
index 2df5894353d6..180e07d956a7 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/rxrpc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/rxrpc.txt
@@ -796,7 +796,9 @@ The kernel interface functions are as follows:
 				s64 tx_total_len,
 				gfp_t gfp,
 				rxrpc_notify_rx_t notify_rx,
-				bool upgrade);
+				bool upgrade,
+				bool intr,
+				unsigned int debug_id);
 
      This allocates the infrastructure to make a new RxRPC call and assigns
      call and connection numbers.  The call will be made on the UDP port that
@@ -824,6 +826,13 @@ The kernel interface functions are as follows:
      the server upgrade the service to a better one.  The resultant service ID
      is returned by rxrpc_kernel_recv_data().
 
+     intr should be set to true if the call should be interruptible.  If this
+     is not set, this function may not return until a channel has been
+     allocated; if it is set, the function may return -ERESTARTSYS.
+
+     debug_id is the call debugging ID to be used for tracing.  This can be
+     obtained by atomically incrementing rxrpc_debug_id.
+
      If this function is successful, an opaque reference to the RxRPC call is
      returned.  The caller now holds a reference on this and it must be
      properly ended.
@@ -1009,16 +1018,18 @@ The kernel interface functions are as follows:
 
  (*) Check call still alive.
 
-	u32 rxrpc_kernel_check_life(struct socket *sock,
-				    struct rxrpc_call *call);
+	bool rxrpc_kernel_check_life(struct socket *sock,
+				     struct rxrpc_call *call,
+				     u32 *_life);
 	void rxrpc_kernel_probe_life(struct socket *sock,
 				     struct rxrpc_call *call);
 
-     The first function returns a number that is updated when ACKs are received
-     from the peer (notably including PING RESPONSE ACKs which we can elicit by
-     sending PING ACKs to see if the call still exists on the server).  The
-     caller should compare the numbers of two calls to see if the call is still
-     alive after waiting for a suitable interval.
+     The first function passes back in *_life a number that is updated when
+     ACKs are received from the peer (notably including PING RESPONSE ACKs
+     which we can elicit by sending PING ACKs to see if the call still exists
+     on the server).  The caller should compare the numbers of two calls to see
+     if the call is still alive after waiting for a suitable interval.  It also
+     returns true as long as the call hasn't yet reached the completed state.
 
      This allows the caller to work out if the server is still contactable and
      if the call is still alive on the server while waiting for the server to
@@ -1054,6 +1065,16 @@ The kernel interface functions are as follows:
      This value can be used to determine if the remote client has been
      restarted as it shouldn't change otherwise.
 
+ (*) Set the maxmimum lifespan on a call.
+
+	void rxrpc_kernel_set_max_life(struct socket *sock,
+				       struct rxrpc_call *call,
+				       unsigned long hard_timeout)
+
+     This sets the maximum lifespan on a call to hard_timeout (which is in
+     jiffies).  In the event of the timeout occurring, the call will be
+     aborted and -ETIME or -ETIMEDOUT will be returned.
+
 
 =======================
 CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/scaling.txt b/Documentation/networking/scaling.rst
index b7056a8a0540..f78d7bf27ff5 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/scaling.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/scaling.rst
@@ -1,4 +1,8 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=====================================
 Scaling in the Linux Networking Stack
+=====================================
 
 
 Introduction
@@ -10,11 +14,11 @@ multi-processor systems.
 
 The following technologies are described:
 
-  RSS: Receive Side Scaling
-  RPS: Receive Packet Steering
-  RFS: Receive Flow Steering
-  Accelerated Receive Flow Steering
-  XPS: Transmit Packet Steering
+- RSS: Receive Side Scaling
+- RPS: Receive Packet Steering
+- RFS: Receive Flow Steering
+- Accelerated Receive Flow Steering
+- XPS: Transmit Packet Steering
 
 
 RSS: Receive Side Scaling
@@ -45,7 +49,9 @@ programmable filters. For example, webserver bound TCP port 80 packets
 can be directed to their own receive queue. Such “n-tuple� filters can
 be configured from ethtool (--config-ntuple).
 
-==== RSS Configuration
+
+RSS Configuration
+-----------------
 
 The driver for a multi-queue capable NIC typically provides a kernel
 module parameter for specifying the number of hardware queues to
@@ -63,7 +69,9 @@ commands (--show-rxfh-indir and --set-rxfh-indir). Modifying the
 indirection table could be done to give different queues different
 relative weights.
 
-== RSS IRQ Configuration
+
+RSS IRQ Configuration
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 
 Each receive queue has a separate IRQ associated with it. The NIC triggers
 this to notify a CPU when new packets arrive on the given queue. The
@@ -77,7 +85,9 @@ affinity of each interrupt see Documentation/IRQ-affinity.txt. Some systems
 will be running irqbalance, a daemon that dynamically optimizes IRQ
 assignments and as a result may override any manual settings.
 
-== Suggested Configuration
+
+Suggested Configuration
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 
 RSS should be enabled when latency is a concern or whenever receive
 interrupt processing forms a bottleneck. Spreading load between CPUs
@@ -105,10 +115,12 @@ Whereas RSS selects the queue and hence CPU that will run the hardware
 interrupt handler, RPS selects the CPU to perform protocol processing
 above the interrupt handler. This is accomplished by placing the packet
 on the desired CPU’s backlog queue and waking up the CPU for processing.
-RPS has some advantages over RSS: 1) it can be used with any NIC,
-2) software filters can easily be added to hash over new protocols,
+RPS has some advantages over RSS:
+
+1) it can be used with any NIC
+2) software filters can easily be added to hash over new protocols
 3) it does not increase hardware device interrupt rate (although it does
-introduce inter-processor interrupts (IPIs)).
+   introduce inter-processor interrupts (IPIs))
 
 RPS is called during bottom half of the receive interrupt handler, when
 a driver sends a packet up the network stack with netif_rx() or
@@ -135,21 +147,25 @@ packets have been queued to their backlog queue. The IPI wakes backlog
 processing on the remote CPU, and any queued packets are then processed
 up the networking stack.
 
-==== RPS Configuration
+
+RPS Configuration
+-----------------
 
 RPS requires a kernel compiled with the CONFIG_RPS kconfig symbol (on
 by default for SMP). Even when compiled in, RPS remains disabled until
 explicitly configured. The list of CPUs to which RPS may forward traffic
-can be configured for each receive queue using a sysfs file entry:
+can be configured for each receive queue using a sysfs file entry::
 
- /sys/class/net/<dev>/queues/rx-<n>/rps_cpus
+  /sys/class/net/<dev>/queues/rx-<n>/rps_cpus
 
 This file implements a bitmap of CPUs. RPS is disabled when it is zero
 (the default), in which case packets are processed on the interrupting
 CPU. Documentation/IRQ-affinity.txt explains how CPUs are assigned to
 the bitmap.
 
-== Suggested Configuration
+
+Suggested Configuration
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 
 For a single queue device, a typical RPS configuration would be to set
 the rps_cpus to the CPUs in the same memory domain of the interrupting
@@ -163,7 +179,9 @@ and unnecessary. If there are fewer hardware queues than CPUs, then
 RPS might be beneficial if the rps_cpus for each queue are the ones that
 share the same memory domain as the interrupting CPU for that queue.
 
-==== RPS Flow Limit
+
+RPS Flow Limit
+--------------
 
 RPS scales kernel receive processing across CPUs without introducing
 reordering. The trade-off to sending all packets from the same flow
@@ -187,29 +205,33 @@ No packets are dropped when the input packet queue length is below
 the threshold, so flow limit does not sever connections outright:
 even large flows maintain connectivity.
 
-== Interface
+
+Interface
+~~~~~~~~~
 
 Flow limit is compiled in by default (CONFIG_NET_FLOW_LIMIT), but not
 turned on. It is implemented for each CPU independently (to avoid lock
 and cache contention) and toggled per CPU by setting the relevant bit
 in sysctl net.core.flow_limit_cpu_bitmap. It exposes the same CPU
-bitmap interface as rps_cpus (see above) when called from procfs:
+bitmap interface as rps_cpus (see above) when called from procfs::
 
- /proc/sys/net/core/flow_limit_cpu_bitmap
+  /proc/sys/net/core/flow_limit_cpu_bitmap
 
 Per-flow rate is calculated by hashing each packet into a hashtable
 bucket and incrementing a per-bucket counter. The hash function is
 the same that selects a CPU in RPS, but as the number of buckets can
 be much larger than the number of CPUs, flow limit has finer-grained
 identification of large flows and fewer false positives. The default
-table has 4096 buckets. This value can be modified through sysctl
+table has 4096 buckets. This value can be modified through sysctl::
 
- net.core.flow_limit_table_len
+  net.core.flow_limit_table_len
 
 The value is only consulted when a new table is allocated. Modifying
 it does not update active tables.
 
-== Suggested Configuration
+
+Suggested Configuration
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 
 Flow limit is useful on systems with many concurrent connections,
 where a single connection taking up 50% of a CPU indicates a problem.
@@ -280,10 +302,10 @@ table), the packet is enqueued onto that CPU’s backlog. If they differ,
 the current CPU is updated to match the desired CPU if one of the
 following is true:
 
-- The current CPU's queue head counter >= the recorded tail counter
-  value in rps_dev_flow[i]
-- The current CPU is unset (>= nr_cpu_ids)
-- The current CPU is offline
+  - The current CPU's queue head counter >= the recorded tail counter
+    value in rps_dev_flow[i]
+  - The current CPU is unset (>= nr_cpu_ids)
+  - The current CPU is offline
 
 After this check, the packet is sent to the (possibly updated) current
 CPU. These rules aim to ensure that a flow only moves to a new CPU when
@@ -291,19 +313,23 @@ there are no packets outstanding on the old CPU, as the outstanding
 packets could arrive later than those about to be processed on the new
 CPU.
 
-==== RFS Configuration
+
+RFS Configuration
+-----------------
 
 RFS is only available if the kconfig symbol CONFIG_RPS is enabled (on
 by default for SMP). The functionality remains disabled until explicitly
-configured. The number of entries in the global flow table is set through:
+configured. The number of entries in the global flow table is set through::
+
+  /proc/sys/net/core/rps_sock_flow_entries
 
- /proc/sys/net/core/rps_sock_flow_entries
+The number of entries in the per-queue flow table are set through::
 
-The number of entries in the per-queue flow table are set through:
+  /sys/class/net/<dev>/queues/rx-<n>/rps_flow_cnt
 
- /sys/class/net/<dev>/queues/rx-<n>/rps_flow_cnt
 
-== Suggested Configuration
+Suggested Configuration
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 
 Both of these need to be set before RFS is enabled for a receive queue.
 Values for both are rounded up to the nearest power of two. The
@@ -347,7 +373,9 @@ functions in the cpu_rmap (“CPU affinity reverse map�) kernel library
 to populate the map. For each CPU, the corresponding queue in the map is
 set to be one whose processing CPU is closest in cache locality.
 
-==== Accelerated RFS Configuration
+
+Accelerated RFS Configuration
+-----------------------------
 
 Accelerated RFS is only available if the kernel is compiled with
 CONFIG_RFS_ACCEL and support is provided by the NIC device and driver.
@@ -356,11 +384,14 @@ of CPU to queues is automatically deduced from the IRQ affinities
 configured for each receive queue by the driver, so no additional
 configuration should be necessary.
 
-== Suggested Configuration
+
+Suggested Configuration
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 
 This technique should be enabled whenever one wants to use RFS and the
 NIC supports hardware acceleration.
 
+
 XPS: Transmit Packet Steering
 =============================
 
@@ -430,20 +461,25 @@ transport layer is responsible for setting ooo_okay appropriately. TCP,
 for instance, sets the flag when all data for a connection has been
 acknowledged.
 
-==== XPS Configuration
+XPS Configuration
+-----------------
 
 XPS is only available if the kconfig symbol CONFIG_XPS is enabled (on by
 default for SMP). The functionality remains disabled until explicitly
 configured. To enable XPS, the bitmap of CPUs/receive-queues that may
 use a transmit queue is configured using the sysfs file entry:
 
-For selection based on CPUs map:
-/sys/class/net/<dev>/queues/tx-<n>/xps_cpus
+For selection based on CPUs map::
+
+  /sys/class/net/<dev>/queues/tx-<n>/xps_cpus
+
+For selection based on receive-queues map::
+
+  /sys/class/net/<dev>/queues/tx-<n>/xps_rxqs
 
-For selection based on receive-queues map:
-/sys/class/net/<dev>/queues/tx-<n>/xps_rxqs
 
-== Suggested Configuration
+Suggested Configuration
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 
 For a network device with a single transmission queue, XPS configuration
 has no effect, since there is no choice in this case. In a multi-queue
@@ -460,16 +496,18 @@ explicitly configured mapping receive-queue(s) to transmit queue(s). If the
 user configuration for receive-queue map does not apply, then the transmit
 queue is selected based on the CPUs map.
 
-Per TX Queue rate limitation:
-=============================
+
+Per TX Queue rate limitation
+============================
 
 These are rate-limitation mechanisms implemented by HW, where currently
-a max-rate attribute is supported, by setting a Mbps value to
+a max-rate attribute is supported, by setting a Mbps value to::
 
-/sys/class/net/<dev>/queues/tx-<n>/tx_maxrate
+  /sys/class/net/<dev>/queues/tx-<n>/tx_maxrate
 
 A value of zero means disabled, and this is the default.
 
+
 Further Information
 ===================
 RPS and RFS were introduced in kernel 2.6.35. XPS was incorporated into
@@ -480,5 +518,6 @@ Accelerated RFS was introduced in 2.6.35. Original patches were
 submitted by Ben Hutchings (bwh@kernel.org)
 
 Authors:
-Tom Herbert (therbert@google.com)
-Willem de Bruijn (willemb@google.com)
+
+- Tom Herbert (therbert@google.com)
+- Willem de Bruijn (willemb@google.com)
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/segmentation-offloads.txt b/Documentation/networking/segmentation-offloads.rst
index aca542ec125c..085e8fab03fd 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/segmentation-offloads.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/segmentation-offloads.rst
@@ -1,4 +1,9 @@
-Segmentation Offloads in the Linux Networking Stack
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=====================
+Segmentation Offloads
+=====================
+
 
 Introduction
 ============
@@ -13,7 +18,8 @@ The following technologies are described:
  * Generic Segmentation Offload - GSO
  * Generic Receive Offload - GRO
  * Partial Generic Segmentation Offload - GSO_PARTIAL
- * SCTP accelleration with GSO - GSO_BY_FRAGS
+ * SCTP acceleration with GSO - GSO_BY_FRAGS
+
 
 TCP Segmentation Offload
 ========================
@@ -42,6 +48,7 @@ NETIF_F_TSO_MANGLEID set then the IP ID can be ignored when performing TSO
 and we will either increment the IP ID for all frames, or leave it at a
 static value based on driver preference.
 
+
 UDP Fragmentation Offload
 =========================
 
@@ -54,6 +61,7 @@ UFO is deprecated: modern kernels will no longer generate UFO skbs, but can
 still receive them from tuntap and similar devices. Offload of UDP-based
 tunnel protocols is still supported.
 
+
 IPIP, SIT, GRE, UDP Tunnel, and Remote Checksum Offloads
 ========================================================
 
@@ -71,17 +79,19 @@ refer to the tunnel headers as the outer headers, while the encapsulated
 data is normally referred to as the inner headers.  Below is the list of
 calls to access the given headers:
 
-IPIP/SIT Tunnel:
-		Outer			Inner
-MAC		skb_mac_header
-Network		skb_network_header	skb_inner_network_header
-Transport	skb_transport_header
+IPIP/SIT Tunnel::
+
+             Outer                  Inner
+  MAC        skb_mac_header
+  Network    skb_network_header     skb_inner_network_header
+  Transport  skb_transport_header
 
-UDP/GRE Tunnel:
-		Outer			Inner
-MAC		skb_mac_header		skb_inner_mac_header
-Network		skb_network_header	skb_inner_network_header
-Transport	skb_transport_header	skb_inner_transport_header
+UDP/GRE Tunnel::
+
+             Outer                  Inner
+  MAC        skb_mac_header         skb_inner_mac_header
+  Network    skb_network_header     skb_inner_network_header
+  Transport  skb_transport_header   skb_inner_transport_header
 
 In addition to the above tunnel types there are also SKB_GSO_GRE_CSUM and
 SKB_GSO_UDP_TUNNEL_CSUM.  These two additional tunnel types reflect the
@@ -93,6 +103,7 @@ header has requested a remote checksum offload.  In this case the inner
 headers will be left with a partial checksum and only the outer header
 checksum will be computed.
 
+
 Generic Segmentation Offload
 ============================
 
@@ -106,6 +117,7 @@ Before enabling any hardware segmentation offload a corresponding software
 offload is required in GSO.  Otherwise it becomes possible for a frame to
 be re-routed between devices and end up being unable to be transmitted.
 
+
 Generic Receive Offload
 =======================
 
@@ -117,6 +129,7 @@ this is IPv4 ID in the case that the DF bit is set for a given IP header.
 If the value of the IPv4 ID is not sequentially incrementing it will be
 altered so that it is when a frame assembled via GRO is segmented via GSO.
 
+
 Partial Generic Segmentation Offload
 ====================================
 
@@ -134,7 +147,8 @@ is the outer IPv4 ID field.  It is up to the device drivers to guarantee
 that the IPv4 ID field is incremented in the case that a given header does
 not have the DF bit set.
 
-SCTP accelleration with GSO
+
+SCTP acceleration with GSO
 ===========================
 
 SCTP - despite the lack of hardware support - can still take advantage of
@@ -157,14 +171,14 @@ appropriately.
 
 There are some helpers to make this easier:
 
- - skb_is_gso(skb) && skb_is_gso_sctp(skb) is the best way to see if
-   an skb is an SCTP GSO skb.
+- skb_is_gso(skb) && skb_is_gso_sctp(skb) is the best way to see if
+  an skb is an SCTP GSO skb.
 
- - For size checks, the skb_gso_validate_*_len family of helpers correctly
-   considers GSO_BY_FRAGS.
+- For size checks, the skb_gso_validate_*_len family of helpers correctly
+  considers GSO_BY_FRAGS.
 
- - For manipulating packets, skb_increase_gso_size and skb_decrease_gso_size
-   will check for GSO_BY_FRAGS and WARN if asked to manipulate these skbs.
+- For manipulating packets, skb_increase_gso_size and skb_decrease_gso_size
+  will check for GSO_BY_FRAGS and WARN if asked to manipulate these skbs.
 
 This also affects drivers with the NETIF_F_FRAGLIST & NETIF_F_GSO_SCTP bits
 set. Note also that NETIF_F_GSO_SCTP is included in NETIF_F_GSO_SOFTWARE.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/sfp-phylink.rst b/Documentation/networking/sfp-phylink.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5bd26cb07244
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/sfp-phylink.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,268 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=======
+phylink
+=======
+
+Overview
+========
+
+phylink is a mechanism to support hot-pluggable networking modules
+without needing to re-initialise the adapter on hot-plug events.
+
+phylink supports conventional phylib-based setups, fixed link setups
+and SFP (Small Formfactor Pluggable) modules at present.
+
+Modes of operation
+==================
+
+phylink has several modes of operation, which depend on the firmware
+settings.
+
+1. PHY mode
+
+   In PHY mode, we use phylib to read the current link settings from
+   the PHY, and pass them to the MAC driver.  We expect the MAC driver
+   to configure exactly the modes that are specified without any
+   negotiation being enabled on the link.
+
+2. Fixed mode
+
+   Fixed mode is the same as PHY mode as far as the MAC driver is
+   concerned.
+
+3. In-band mode
+
+   In-band mode is used with 802.3z, SGMII and similar interface modes,
+   and we are expecting to use and honor the in-band negotiation or
+   control word sent across the serdes channel.
+
+By example, what this means is that:
+
+.. code-block:: none
+
+  &eth {
+    phy = <&phy>;
+    phy-mode = "sgmii";
+  };
+
+does not use in-band SGMII signalling.  The PHY is expected to follow
+exactly the settings given to it in its :c:func:`mac_config` function.
+The link should be forced up or down appropriately in the
+:c:func:`mac_link_up` and :c:func:`mac_link_down` functions.
+
+.. code-block:: none
+
+  &eth {
+    managed = "in-band-status";
+    phy = <&phy>;
+    phy-mode = "sgmii";
+  };
+
+uses in-band mode, where results from the PHY's negotiation are passed
+to the MAC through the SGMII control word, and the MAC is expected to
+acknowledge the control word.  The :c:func:`mac_link_up` and
+:c:func:`mac_link_down` functions must not force the MAC side link
+up and down.
+
+Rough guide to converting a network driver to sfp/phylink
+=========================================================
+
+This guide briefly describes how to convert a network driver from
+phylib to the sfp/phylink support.  Please send patches to improve
+this documentation.
+
+1. Optionally split the network driver's phylib update function into
+   three parts dealing with link-down, link-up and reconfiguring the
+   MAC settings. This can be done as a separate preparation commit.
+
+   An example of this preparation can be found in git commit fc548b991fb0.
+
+2. Replace::
+
+	select FIXED_PHY
+	select PHYLIB
+
+   with::
+
+	select PHYLINK
+
+   in the driver's Kconfig stanza.
+
+3. Add::
+
+	#include <linux/phylink.h>
+
+   to the driver's list of header files.
+
+4. Add::
+
+	struct phylink *phylink;
+
+   to the driver's private data structure.  We shall refer to the
+   driver's private data pointer as ``priv`` below, and the driver's
+   private data structure as ``struct foo_priv``.
+
+5. Replace the following functions:
+
+   .. flat-table::
+    :header-rows: 1
+    :widths: 1 1
+    :stub-columns: 0
+
+    * - Original function
+      - Replacement function
+    * - phy_start(phydev)
+      - phylink_start(priv->phylink)
+    * - phy_stop(phydev)
+      - phylink_stop(priv->phylink)
+    * - phy_mii_ioctl(phydev, ifr, cmd)
+      - phylink_mii_ioctl(priv->phylink, ifr, cmd)
+    * - phy_ethtool_get_wol(phydev, wol)
+      - phylink_ethtool_get_wol(priv->phylink, wol)
+    * - phy_ethtool_set_wol(phydev, wol)
+      - phylink_ethtool_set_wol(priv->phylink, wol)
+    * - phy_disconnect(phydev)
+      - phylink_disconnect_phy(priv->phylink)
+
+   Please note that some of these functions must be called under the
+   rtnl lock, and will warn if not. This will normally be the case,
+   except if these are called from the driver suspend/resume paths.
+
+6. Add/replace ksettings get/set methods with:
+
+   .. code-block:: c
+
+    static int foo_ethtool_set_link_ksettings(struct net_device *dev,
+					     const struct ethtool_link_ksettings *cmd)
+    {
+	struct foo_priv *priv = netdev_priv(dev);
+
+	return phylink_ethtool_ksettings_set(priv->phylink, cmd);
+    }
+
+    static int foo_ethtool_get_link_ksettings(struct net_device *dev,
+					     struct ethtool_link_ksettings *cmd)
+    {
+	struct foo_priv *priv = netdev_priv(dev);
+
+	return phylink_ethtool_ksettings_get(priv->phylink, cmd);
+    }
+
+7. Replace the call to:
+
+	phy_dev = of_phy_connect(dev, node, link_func, flags, phy_interface);
+
+   and associated code with a call to:
+
+	err = phylink_of_phy_connect(priv->phylink, node, flags);
+
+   For the most part, ``flags`` can be zero; these flags are passed to
+   the of_phy_attach() inside this function call if a PHY is specified
+   in the DT node ``node``.
+
+   ``node`` should be the DT node which contains the network phy property,
+   fixed link properties, and will also contain the sfp property.
+
+   The setup of fixed links should also be removed; these are handled
+   internally by phylink.
+
+   of_phy_connect() was also passed a function pointer for link updates.
+   This function is replaced by a different form of MAC updates
+   described below in (8).
+
+   Manipulation of the PHY's supported/advertised happens within phylink
+   based on the validate callback, see below in (8).
+
+   Note that the driver no longer needs to store the ``phy_interface``,
+   and also note that ``phy_interface`` becomes a dynamic property,
+   just like the speed, duplex etc. settings.
+
+   Finally, note that the MAC driver has no direct access to the PHY
+   anymore; that is because in the phylink model, the PHY can be
+   dynamic.
+
+8. Add a :c:type:`struct phylink_mac_ops <phylink_mac_ops>` instance to
+   the driver, which is a table of function pointers, and implement
+   these functions. The old link update function for
+   :c:func:`of_phy_connect` becomes three methods: :c:func:`mac_link_up`,
+   :c:func:`mac_link_down`, and :c:func:`mac_config`. If step 1 was
+   performed, then the functionality will have been split there.
+
+   It is important that if in-band negotiation is used,
+   :c:func:`mac_link_up` and :c:func:`mac_link_down` do not prevent the
+   in-band negotiation from completing, since these functions are called
+   when the in-band link state changes - otherwise the link will never
+   come up.
+
+   The :c:func:`validate` method should mask the supplied supported mask,
+   and ``state->advertising`` with the supported ethtool link modes.
+   These are the new ethtool link modes, so bitmask operations must be
+   used. For an example, see drivers/net/ethernet/marvell/mvneta.c.
+
+   The :c:func:`mac_link_state` method is used to read the link state
+   from the MAC, and report back the settings that the MAC is currently
+   using. This is particularly important for in-band negotiation
+   methods such as 1000base-X and SGMII.
+
+   The :c:func:`mac_config` method is used to update the MAC with the
+   requested state, and must avoid unnecessarily taking the link down
+   when making changes to the MAC configuration.  This means the
+   function should modify the state and only take the link down when
+   absolutely necessary to change the MAC configuration.  An example
+   of how to do this can be found in :c:func:`mvneta_mac_config` in
+   drivers/net/ethernet/marvell/mvneta.c.
+
+   For further information on these methods, please see the inline
+   documentation in :c:type:`struct phylink_mac_ops <phylink_mac_ops>`.
+
+9. Remove calls to of_parse_phandle() for the PHY,
+   of_phy_register_fixed_link() for fixed links etc. from the probe
+   function, and replace with:
+
+   .. code-block:: c
+
+	struct phylink *phylink;
+
+	phylink = phylink_create(dev, node, phy_mode, &phylink_ops);
+	if (IS_ERR(phylink)) {
+		err = PTR_ERR(phylink);
+		fail probe;
+	}
+
+	priv->phylink = phylink;
+
+   and arrange to destroy the phylink in the probe failure path as
+   appropriate and the removal path too by calling:
+
+   .. code-block:: c
+
+	phylink_destroy(priv->phylink);
+
+10. Arrange for MAC link state interrupts to be forwarded into
+    phylink, via:
+
+    .. code-block:: c
+
+	phylink_mac_change(priv->phylink, link_is_up);
+
+    where ``link_is_up`` is true if the link is currently up or false
+    otherwise.
+
+11. Verify that the driver does not call::
+
+	netif_carrier_on()
+	netif_carrier_off()
+
+   as these will interfere with phylink's tracking of the link state,
+   and cause phylink to omit calls via the :c:func:`mac_link_up` and
+   :c:func:`mac_link_down` methods.
+
+Network drivers should call phylink_stop() and phylink_start() via their
+suspend/resume paths, which ensures that the appropriate
+:c:type:`struct phylink_mac_ops <phylink_mac_ops>` methods are called
+as necessary.
+
+For information describing the SFP cage in DT, please see the binding
+documentation in the kernel source tree
+``Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/sff,sfp.txt``
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/snmp_counter.rst b/Documentation/networking/snmp_counter.rst
index fe8f741193be..38a4edc4522b 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/snmp_counter.rst
+++ b/Documentation/networking/snmp_counter.rst
@@ -1,16 +1,17 @@
-===========
+============
 SNMP counter
-===========
+============
 
 This document explains the meaning of SNMP counters.
 
 General IPv4 counters
-====================
+=====================
 All layer 4 packets and ICMP packets will change these counters, but
 these counters won't be changed by layer 2 packets (such as STP) or
 ARP packets.
 
 * IpInReceives
+
 Defined in `RFC1213 ipInReceives`_
 
 .. _RFC1213 ipInReceives: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1213#page-26
@@ -23,6 +24,7 @@ and so on).  It indicates the number of aggregated segments after
 GRO/LRO.
 
 * IpInDelivers
+
 Defined in `RFC1213 ipInDelivers`_
 
 .. _RFC1213 ipInDelivers: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1213#page-28
@@ -33,6 +35,7 @@ supported protocols will be delivered, if someone listens on the raw
 socket, all valid IP packets will be delivered.
 
 * IpOutRequests
+
 Defined in `RFC1213 ipOutRequests`_
 
 .. _RFC1213 ipOutRequests: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1213#page-28
@@ -42,6 +45,7 @@ multicast packets, and would always be updated together with
 IpExtOutOctets.
 
 * IpExtInOctets and IpExtOutOctets
+
 They are Linux kernel extensions, no RFC definitions. Please note,
 RFC1213 indeed defines ifInOctets  and ifOutOctets, but they
 are different things. The ifInOctets and ifOutOctets include the MAC
@@ -49,6 +53,7 @@ layer header size but IpExtInOctets and IpExtOutOctets don't, they
 only include the IP layer header and the IP layer data.
 
 * IpExtInNoECTPkts, IpExtInECT1Pkts, IpExtInECT0Pkts, IpExtInCEPkts
+
 They indicate the number of four kinds of ECN IP packets, please refer
 `Explicit Congestion Notification`_ for more details.
 
@@ -60,6 +65,7 @@ for the same packet, you might find that IpInReceives count 1, but
 IpExtInNoECTPkts counts 2 or more.
 
 * IpInHdrErrors
+
 Defined in `RFC1213 ipInHdrErrors`_. It indicates the packet is
 dropped due to the IP header error. It might happen in both IP input
 and IP forward paths.
@@ -67,6 +73,7 @@ and IP forward paths.
 .. _RFC1213 ipInHdrErrors: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1213#page-27
 
 * IpInAddrErrors
+
 Defined in `RFC1213 ipInAddrErrors`_. It will be increased in two
 scenarios: (1) The IP address is invalid. (2) The destination IP
 address is not a local address and IP forwarding is not enabled
@@ -74,6 +81,7 @@ address is not a local address and IP forwarding is not enabled
 .. _RFC1213 ipInAddrErrors: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1213#page-27
 
 * IpExtInNoRoutes
+
 This counter means the packet is dropped when the IP stack receives a
 packet and can't find a route for it from the route table. It might
 happen when IP forwarding is enabled and the destination IP address is
@@ -81,6 +89,7 @@ not a local address and there is no route for the destination IP
 address.
 
 * IpInUnknownProtos
+
 Defined in `RFC1213 ipInUnknownProtos`_. It will be increased if the
 layer 4 protocol is unsupported by kernel. If an application is using
 raw socket, kernel will always deliver the packet to the raw socket
@@ -89,10 +98,12 @@ and this counter won't be increased.
 .. _RFC1213 ipInUnknownProtos: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1213#page-27
 
 * IpExtInTruncatedPkts
+
 For IPv4 packet, it means the actual data size is smaller than the
 "Total Length" field in the IPv4 header.
 
 * IpInDiscards
+
 Defined in `RFC1213 ipInDiscards`_. It indicates the packet is dropped
 in the IP receiving path and due to kernel internal reasons (e.g. no
 enough memory).
@@ -100,20 +111,23 @@ enough memory).
 .. _RFC1213 ipInDiscards: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1213#page-28
 
 * IpOutDiscards
+
 Defined in `RFC1213 ipOutDiscards`_. It indicates the packet is
 dropped in the IP sending path and due to kernel internal reasons.
 
 .. _RFC1213 ipOutDiscards: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1213#page-28
 
 * IpOutNoRoutes
+
 Defined in `RFC1213 ipOutNoRoutes`_. It indicates the packet is
 dropped in the IP sending path and no route is found for it.
 
 .. _RFC1213 ipOutNoRoutes: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1213#page-29
 
 ICMP counters
-============
+=============
 * IcmpInMsgs and IcmpOutMsgs
+
 Defined by `RFC1213 icmpInMsgs`_ and `RFC1213 icmpOutMsgs`_
 
 .. _RFC1213 icmpInMsgs: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1213#page-41
@@ -126,6 +140,7 @@ IcmpOutMsgs would still be updated if the IP header is constructed by
 a userspace program.
 
 * ICMP named types
+
 | These counters include most of common ICMP types, they are:
 | IcmpInDestUnreachs: `RFC1213 icmpInDestUnreachs`_
 | IcmpInTimeExcds: `RFC1213 icmpInTimeExcds`_
@@ -180,6 +195,7 @@ straightforward. The 'In' counter means kernel receives such a packet
 and the 'Out' counter means kernel sends such a packet.
 
 * ICMP numeric types
+
 They are IcmpMsgInType[N] and IcmpMsgOutType[N], the [N] indicates the
 ICMP type number. These counters track all kinds of ICMP packets. The
 ICMP type number definition could be found in the `ICMP parameters`_
@@ -192,12 +208,14 @@ IcmpMsgOutType8 would increase 1. And if kernel gets an ICMP Echo Reply
 packet, IcmpMsgInType0 would increase 1.
 
 * IcmpInCsumErrors
+
 This counter indicates the checksum of the ICMP packet is
 wrong. Kernel verifies the checksum after updating the IcmpInMsgs and
 before updating IcmpMsgInType[N]. If a packet has bad checksum, the
 IcmpInMsgs would be updated but none of IcmpMsgInType[N] would be updated.
 
 * IcmpInErrors and IcmpOutErrors
+
 Defined by `RFC1213 icmpInErrors`_ and `RFC1213 icmpOutErrors`_
 
 .. _RFC1213 icmpInErrors: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1213#page-41
@@ -209,7 +227,7 @@ and the sending packet path use IcmpOutErrors. When IcmpInCsumErrors
 is increased, IcmpInErrors would always be increased too.
 
 relationship of the ICMP counters
--------------------------------
+---------------------------------
 The sum of IcmpMsgOutType[N] is always equal to IcmpOutMsgs, as they
 are updated at the same time. The sum of IcmpMsgInType[N] plus
 IcmpInErrors should be equal or larger than IcmpInMsgs. When kernel
@@ -229,8 +247,9 @@ IcmpInMsgs should be less than the sum of IcmpMsgOutType[N] plus
 IcmpInErrors.
 
 General TCP counters
-==================
+====================
 * TcpInSegs
+
 Defined in `RFC1213 tcpInSegs`_
 
 .. _RFC1213 tcpInSegs: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1213#page-48
@@ -247,6 +266,7 @@ isn't aware of GRO. So if two packets are merged by GRO, the TcpInSegs
 counter would only increase 1.
 
 * TcpOutSegs
+
 Defined in `RFC1213 tcpOutSegs`_
 
 .. _RFC1213 tcpOutSegs: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1213#page-48
@@ -258,6 +278,7 @@ GSO, so if a packet would be split to 2 by GSO, TcpOutSegs will
 increase 2.
 
 * TcpActiveOpens
+
 Defined in `RFC1213 tcpActiveOpens`_
 
 .. _RFC1213 tcpActiveOpens: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1213#page-47
@@ -267,6 +288,7 @@ state. Every time TcpActiveOpens increases 1, TcpOutSegs should always
 increase 1.
 
 * TcpPassiveOpens
+
 Defined in `RFC1213 tcpPassiveOpens`_
 
 .. _RFC1213 tcpPassiveOpens: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1213#page-47
@@ -275,6 +297,7 @@ It means the TCP layer receives a SYN, replies a SYN+ACK, come into
 the SYN-RCVD state.
 
 * TcpExtTCPRcvCoalesce
+
 When packets are received by the TCP layer and are not be read by the
 application, the TCP layer will try to merge them. This counter
 indicate how many packets are merged in such situation. If GRO is
@@ -282,12 +305,14 @@ enabled, lots of packets would be merged by GRO, these packets
 wouldn't be counted to TcpExtTCPRcvCoalesce.
 
 * TcpExtTCPAutoCorking
+
 When sending packets, the TCP layer will try to merge small packets to
 a bigger one. This counter increase 1 for every packet merged in such
 situation. Please refer to the LWN article for more details:
 https://lwn.net/Articles/576263/
 
 * TcpExtTCPOrigDataSent
+
 This counter is explained by `kernel commit f19c29e3e391`_, I pasted the
 explaination below::
 
@@ -297,6 +322,7 @@ explaination below::
   more useful to track the TCP retransmission rate.
 
 * TCPSynRetrans
+
 This counter is explained by `kernel commit f19c29e3e391`_, I pasted the
 explaination below::
 
@@ -304,6 +330,7 @@ explaination below::
   retransmissions into SYN, fast-retransmits, timeout retransmits, etc.
 
 * TCPFastOpenActiveFail
+
 This counter is explained by `kernel commit f19c29e3e391`_, I pasted the
 explaination below::
 
@@ -313,6 +340,7 @@ explaination below::
 .. _kernel commit f19c29e3e391: https://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/torvalds/linux.git/commit/?id=f19c29e3e391a66a273e9afebaf01917245148cd
 
 * TcpExtListenOverflows and TcpExtListenDrops
+
 When kernel receives a SYN from a client, and if the TCP accept queue
 is full, kernel will drop the SYN and add 1 to TcpExtListenOverflows.
 At the same time kernel will also add 1 to TcpExtListenDrops. When a
@@ -336,17 +364,22 @@ time client replies ACK, this socket will get another chance to move
 to the accept queue.
 
 
+TCP Fast Open
+=============
 * TcpEstabResets
+
 Defined in `RFC1213 tcpEstabResets`_.
 
 .. _RFC1213 tcpEstabResets: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1213#page-48
 
 * TcpAttemptFails
+
 Defined in `RFC1213 tcpAttemptFails`_.
 
 .. _RFC1213 tcpAttemptFails: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1213#page-48
 
 * TcpOutRsts
+
 Defined in `RFC1213 tcpOutRsts`_. The RFC says this counter indicates
 the 'segments sent containing the RST flag', but in linux kernel, this
 couner indicates the segments kerenl tried to send. The sending
@@ -354,9 +387,33 @@ process might be failed due to some errors (e.g. memory alloc failed).
 
 .. _RFC1213 tcpOutRsts: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1213#page-52
 
+* TcpExtTCPSpuriousRtxHostQueues
+
+When the TCP stack wants to retransmit a packet, and finds that packet
+is not lost in the network, but the packet is not sent yet, the TCP
+stack would give up the retransmission and update this counter. It
+might happen if a packet stays too long time in a qdisc or driver
+queue.
+
+* TcpEstabResets
+
+The socket receives a RST packet in Establish or CloseWait state.
+
+* TcpExtTCPKeepAlive
+
+This counter indicates many keepalive packets were sent. The keepalive
+won't be enabled by default. A userspace program could enable it by
+setting the SO_KEEPALIVE socket option.
+
+* TcpExtTCPSpuriousRTOs
+
+The spurious retransmission timeout detected by the `F-RTO`_
+algorithm.
+
+.. _F-RTO: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5682
 
 TCP Fast Path
-============
+=============
 When kernel receives a TCP packet, it has two paths to handler the
 packet, one is fast path, another is slow path. The comment in kernel
 code provides a good explanation of them, I pasted them below::
@@ -389,20 +446,23 @@ will disable the fast path at first, and try to enable it after kernel
 receives packets.
 
 * TcpExtTCPPureAcks and TcpExtTCPHPAcks
+
 If a packet set ACK flag and has no data, it is a pure ACK packet, if
 kernel handles it in the fast path, TcpExtTCPHPAcks will increase 1,
 if kernel handles it in the slow path, TcpExtTCPPureAcks will
 increase 1.
 
 * TcpExtTCPHPHits
+
 If a TCP packet has data (which means it is not a pure ACK packet),
 and this packet is handled in the fast path, TcpExtTCPHPHits will
 increase 1.
 
 
 TCP abort
-========
+=========
 * TcpExtTCPAbortOnData
+
 It means TCP layer has data in flight, but need to close the
 connection. So TCP layer sends a RST to the other side, indicate the
 connection is not closed very graceful. An easy way to increase this
@@ -421,11 +481,13 @@ when the application closes a connection, kernel will send a RST
 immediately and increase the TcpExtTCPAbortOnData counter.
 
 * TcpExtTCPAbortOnClose
+
 This counter means the application has unread data in the TCP layer when
 the application wants to close the TCP connection. In such a situation,
 kernel will send a RST to the other side of the TCP connection.
 
 * TcpExtTCPAbortOnMemory
+
 When an application closes a TCP connection, kernel still need to track
 the connection, let it complete the TCP disconnect process. E.g. an
 app calls the close method of a socket, kernel sends fin to the other
@@ -447,10 +509,12 @@ the tcp_mem. Please refer the tcp_mem section in the `TCP man page`_:
 
 
 * TcpExtTCPAbortOnTimeout
+
 This counter will increase when any of the TCP timers expire. In such
 situation, kernel won't send RST, just give up the connection.
 
 * TcpExtTCPAbortOnLinger
+
 When a TCP connection comes into FIN_WAIT_2 state, instead of waiting
 for the fin packet from the other side, kernel could send a RST and
 delete the socket immediately. This is not the default behavior of
@@ -458,6 +522,7 @@ Linux kernel TCP stack. By configuring the TCP_LINGER2 socket option,
 you could let kernel follow this behavior.
 
 * TcpExtTCPAbortFailed
+
 The kernel TCP layer will send RST if the `RFC2525 2.17 section`_ is
 satisfied. If an internal error occurs during this process,
 TcpExtTCPAbortFailed will be increased.
@@ -465,7 +530,7 @@ TcpExtTCPAbortFailed will be increased.
 .. _RFC2525 2.17 section: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc2525#page-50
 
 TCP Hybrid Slow Start
-====================
+=====================
 The Hybrid Slow Start algorithm is an enhancement of the traditional
 TCP congestion window Slow Start algorithm. It uses two pieces of
 information to detect whether the max bandwidth of the TCP path is
@@ -481,23 +546,27 @@ relate with the Hybrid Slow Start algorithm.
 .. _Hybrid Slow Start paper: https://pdfs.semanticscholar.org/25e9/ef3f03315782c7f1cbcd31b587857adae7d1.pdf
 
 * TcpExtTCPHystartTrainDetect
+
 How many times the ACK train length threshold is detected
 
 * TcpExtTCPHystartTrainCwnd
+
 The sum of CWND detected by ACK train length. Dividing this value by
 TcpExtTCPHystartTrainDetect is the average CWND which detected by the
 ACK train length.
 
 * TcpExtTCPHystartDelayDetect
+
 How many times the packet delay threshold is detected.
 
 * TcpExtTCPHystartDelayCwnd
+
 The sum of CWND detected by packet delay. Dividing this value by
 TcpExtTCPHystartDelayDetect is the average CWND which detected by the
 packet delay.
 
 TCP retransmission and congestion control
-======================================
+=========================================
 The TCP protocol has two retransmission mechanisms: SACK and fast
 recovery. They are exclusive with each other. When SACK is enabled,
 the kernel TCP stack would use SACK, or kernel would use fast
@@ -516,12 +585,14 @@ https://pdfs.semanticscholar.org/0e9c/968d09ab2e53e24c4dca5b2d67c7f7140f8e.pdf
 .. _RFC6582: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc6582
 
 * TcpExtTCPRenoRecovery and TcpExtTCPSackRecovery
+
 When the congestion control comes into Recovery state, if sack is
 used, TcpExtTCPSackRecovery increases 1, if sack is not used,
 TcpExtTCPRenoRecovery increases 1. These two counters mean the TCP
 stack begins to retransmit the lost packets.
 
 * TcpExtTCPSACKReneging
+
 A packet was acknowledged by SACK, but the receiver has dropped this
 packet, so the sender needs to retransmit this packet. In this
 situation, the sender adds 1 to TcpExtTCPSACKReneging. A receiver
@@ -532,6 +603,7 @@ the RTO expires for this packet, then the sender assumes this packet
 has been dropped by the receiver.
 
 * TcpExtTCPRenoReorder
+
 The reorder packet is detected by fast recovery. It would only be used
 if SACK is disabled. The fast recovery algorithm detects recorder by
 the duplicate ACK number. E.g., if retransmission is triggered, and
@@ -542,6 +614,7 @@ order packet. Thus the sender would find more ACks than its
 expectation, and the sender knows out of order occurs.
 
 * TcpExtTCPTSReorder
+
 The reorder packet is detected when a hole is filled. E.g., assume the
 sender sends packet 1,2,3,4,5, and the receiving order is
 1,2,4,5,3. When the sender receives the ACK of packet 3 (which will
@@ -551,6 +624,7 @@ fill the hole), two conditions will let TcpExtTCPTSReorder increase
 than the retransmission timestamp.
 
 * TcpExtTCPSACKReorder
+
 The reorder packet detected by SACK. The SACK has two methods to
 detect reorder: (1) DSACK is received by the sender. It means the
 sender sends the same packet more than one times. And the only reason
@@ -562,6 +636,29 @@ packet yet, the sender would know packet 4 is out of order. The TCP
 stack of kernel will increase TcpExtTCPSACKReorder for both of the
 above scenarios.
 
+* TcpExtTCPSlowStartRetrans
+
+The TCP stack wants to retransmit a packet and the congestion control
+state is 'Loss'.
+
+* TcpExtTCPFastRetrans
+
+The TCP stack wants to retransmit a packet and the congestion control
+state is not 'Loss'.
+
+* TcpExtTCPLostRetransmit
+
+A SACK points out that a retransmission packet is lost again.
+
+* TcpExtTCPRetransFail
+
+The TCP stack tries to deliver a retransmission packet to lower layers
+but the lower layers return an error.
+
+* TcpExtTCPSynRetrans
+
+The TCP stack retransmits a SYN packet.
+
 DSACK
 =====
 The DSACK is defined in `RFC2883`_. The receiver uses DSACK to report
@@ -574,23 +671,27 @@ sender side.
 .. _RFC2883 : https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc2883
 
 * TcpExtTCPDSACKOldSent
+
 The TCP stack receives a duplicate packet which has been acked, so it
 sends a DSACK to the sender.
 
 * TcpExtTCPDSACKOfoSent
+
 The TCP stack receives an out of order duplicate packet, so it sends a
 DSACK to the sender.
 
 * TcpExtTCPDSACKRecv
+
 The TCP stack receives a DSACK, which indicates an acknowledged
 duplicate packet is received.
 
 * TcpExtTCPDSACKOfoRecv
+
 The TCP stack receives a DSACK, which indicate an out of order
 duplicate packet is received.
 
 invalid SACK and DSACK
-====================
+======================
 When a SACK (or DSACK) block is invalid, a corresponding counter would
 be updated. The validation method is base on the start/end sequence
 number of the SACK block. For more details, please refer the comment
@@ -604,11 +705,13 @@ explaination:
 .. _Add counters for discarded SACK blocks: https://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/torvalds/linux.git/commit/?id=18f02545a9a16c9a89778b91a162ad16d510bb32
 
 * TcpExtTCPSACKDiscard
+
 This counter indicates how many SACK blocks are invalid. If the invalid
 SACK block is caused by ACK recording, the TCP stack will only ignore
 it and won't update this counter.
 
 * TcpExtTCPDSACKIgnoredOld and TcpExtTCPDSACKIgnoredNoUndo
+
 When a DSACK block is invalid, one of these two counters would be
 updated. Which counter will be updated depends on the undo_marker flag
 of the TCP socket. If the undo_marker is not set, the TCP stack isn't
@@ -619,7 +722,7 @@ will be updated. If the undo_marker is set, TcpExtTCPDSACKIgnoredOld
 will be updated. As implied in its name, it might be an old packet.
 
 SACK shift
-=========
+==========
 The linux networking stack stores data in sk_buff struct (skb for
 short). If a SACK block acrosses multiple skb, the TCP stack will try
 to re-arrange data in these skb. E.g. if a SACK block acknowledges seq
@@ -630,33 +733,39 @@ seq 14 to 20. All data in skb2 will be moved to skb1, and skb2 will be
 discard, this operation is 'merge'.
 
 * TcpExtTCPSackShifted
+
 A skb is shifted
 
 * TcpExtTCPSackMerged
+
 A skb is merged
 
 * TcpExtTCPSackShiftFallback
+
 A skb should be shifted or merged, but the TCP stack doesn't do it for
 some reasons.
 
 TCP out of order
-===============
+================
 * TcpExtTCPOFOQueue
+
 The TCP layer receives an out of order packet and has enough memory
 to queue it.
 
 * TcpExtTCPOFODrop
+
 The TCP layer receives an out of order packet but doesn't have enough
 memory, so drops it. Such packets won't be counted into
 TcpExtTCPOFOQueue.
 
 * TcpExtTCPOFOMerge
+
 The received out of order packet has an overlay with the previous
 packet. the overlay part will be dropped. All of TcpExtTCPOFOMerge
 packets will also be counted into TcpExtTCPOFOQueue.
 
 TCP PAWS
-=======
+========
 PAWS (Protection Against Wrapped Sequence numbers) is an algorithm
 which is used to drop old packets. It depends on the TCP
 timestamps. For detail information, please refer the `timestamp wiki`_
@@ -666,13 +775,15 @@ and the `RFC of PAWS`_.
 .. _timestamp wiki: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Transmission_Control_Protocol#TCP_timestamps
 
 * TcpExtPAWSActive
+
 Packets are dropped by PAWS in Syn-Sent status.
 
 * TcpExtPAWSEstab
+
 Packets are dropped by PAWS in any status other than Syn-Sent.
 
 TCP ACK skip
-===========
+============
 In some scenarios, kernel would avoid sending duplicate ACKs too
 frequently. Please find more details in the tcp_invalid_ratelimit
 section of the `sysctl document`_. When kernel decides to skip an ACK
@@ -684,6 +795,7 @@ it has no data.
 .. _sysctl document: https://www.kernel.org/doc/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt
 
 * TcpExtTCPACKSkippedSynRecv
+
 The ACK is skipped in Syn-Recv status. The Syn-Recv status means the
 TCP stack receives a SYN and replies SYN+ACK. Now the TCP stack is
 waiting for an ACK. Generally, the TCP stack doesn't need to send ACK
@@ -697,6 +809,7 @@ increase TcpExtTCPACKSkippedSynRecv.
 
 
 * TcpExtTCPACKSkippedPAWS
+
 The ACK is skipped due to PAWS (Protect Against Wrapped Sequence
 numbers) check fails. If the PAWS check fails in Syn-Recv, Fin-Wait-2
 or Time-Wait statuses, the skipped ACK would be counted to
@@ -705,18 +818,22 @@ TcpExtTCPACKSkippedTimeWait. In all other statuses, the skipped ACK
 would be counted to TcpExtTCPACKSkippedPAWS.
 
 * TcpExtTCPACKSkippedSeq
+
 The sequence number is out of window and the timestamp passes the PAWS
 check and the TCP status is not Syn-Recv, Fin-Wait-2, and Time-Wait.
 
 * TcpExtTCPACKSkippedFinWait2
+
 The ACK is skipped in Fin-Wait-2 status, the reason would be either
 PAWS check fails or the received sequence number is out of window.
 
 * TcpExtTCPACKSkippedTimeWait
+
 Tha ACK is skipped in Time-Wait status, the reason would be either
 PAWS check failed or the received sequence number is out of window.
 
 * TcpExtTCPACKSkippedChallenge
+
 The ACK is skipped if the ACK is a challenge ACK. The RFC 5961 defines
 3 kind of challenge ACK, please refer `RFC 5961 section 3.2`_,
 `RFC 5961 section 4.2`_ and `RFC 5961 section 5.2`_. Besides these
@@ -729,8 +846,9 @@ unacknowledged number (more strict than `RFC 5961 section 5.2`_).
 .. _RFC 5961 section 5.2: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5961#page-11
 
 TCP receive window
-=================
+==================
 * TcpExtTCPWantZeroWindowAdv
+
 Depending on current memory usage, the TCP stack tries to set receive
 window to zero. But the receive window might still be a no-zero
 value. For example, if the previous window size is 10, and the TCP
@@ -738,14 +856,16 @@ stack receives 3 bytes, the current window size would be 7 even if the
 window size calculated by the memory usage is zero.
 
 * TcpExtTCPToZeroWindowAdv
+
 The TCP receive window is set to zero from a no-zero value.
 
 * TcpExtTCPFromZeroWindowAdv
+
 The TCP receive window is set to no-zero value from zero.
 
 
 Delayed ACK
-==========
+===========
 The TCP Delayed ACK is a technique which is used for reducing the
 packet count in the network. For more details, please refer the
 `Delayed ACK wiki`_
@@ -753,10 +873,12 @@ packet count in the network. For more details, please refer the
 .. _Delayed ACK wiki: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/TCP_delayed_acknowledgment
 
 * TcpExtDelayedACKs
+
 A delayed ACK timer expires. The TCP stack will send a pure ACK packet
 and exit the delayed ACK mode.
 
 * TcpExtDelayedACKLocked
+
 A delayed ACK timer expires, but the TCP stack can't send an ACK
 immediately due to the socket is locked by a userspace program. The
 TCP stack will send a pure ACK later (after the userspace program
@@ -765,29 +887,152 @@ TCP stack will also update TcpExtDelayedACKs and exit the delayed ACK
 mode.
 
 * TcpExtDelayedACKLost
+
 It will be updated when the TCP stack receives a packet which has been
 ACKed. A Delayed ACK loss might cause this issue, but it would also be
 triggered by other reasons, such as a packet is duplicated in the
 network.
 
 Tail Loss Probe (TLP)
-===================
+=====================
 TLP is an algorithm which is used to detect TCP packet loss. For more
 details, please refer the `TLP paper`_.
 
 .. _TLP paper: https://tools.ietf.org/html/draft-dukkipati-tcpm-tcp-loss-probe-01
 
 * TcpExtTCPLossProbes
+
 A TLP probe packet is sent.
 
 * TcpExtTCPLossProbeRecovery
+
 A packet loss is detected and recovered by TLP.
 
+TCP Fast Open
+=============
+TCP Fast Open is a technology which allows data transfer before the
+3-way handshake complete. Please refer the `TCP Fast Open wiki`_ for a
+general description.
+
+.. _TCP Fast Open wiki: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/TCP_Fast_Open
+
+* TcpExtTCPFastOpenActive
+
+When the TCP stack receives an ACK packet in the SYN-SENT status, and
+the ACK packet acknowledges the data in the SYN packet, the TCP stack
+understand the TFO cookie is accepted by the other side, then it
+updates this counter.
+
+* TcpExtTCPFastOpenActiveFail
+
+This counter indicates that the TCP stack initiated a TCP Fast Open,
+but it failed. This counter would be updated in three scenarios: (1)
+the other side doesn't acknowledge the data in the SYN packet. (2) The
+SYN packet which has the TFO cookie is timeout at least once. (3)
+after the 3-way handshake, the retransmission timeout happens
+net.ipv4.tcp_retries1 times, because some middle-boxes may black-hole
+fast open after the handshake.
+
+* TcpExtTCPFastOpenPassive
+
+This counter indicates how many times the TCP stack accepts the fast
+open request.
+
+* TcpExtTCPFastOpenPassiveFail
+
+This counter indicates how many times the TCP stack rejects the fast
+open request. It is caused by either the TFO cookie is invalid or the
+TCP stack finds an error during the socket creating process.
+
+* TcpExtTCPFastOpenListenOverflow
+
+When the pending fast open request number is larger than
+fastopenq->max_qlen, the TCP stack will reject the fast open request
+and update this counter. When this counter is updated, the TCP stack
+won't update TcpExtTCPFastOpenPassive or
+TcpExtTCPFastOpenPassiveFail. The fastopenq->max_qlen is set by the
+TCP_FASTOPEN socket operation and it could not be larger than
+net.core.somaxconn. For example:
+
+setsockopt(sfd, SOL_TCP, TCP_FASTOPEN, &qlen, sizeof(qlen));
+
+* TcpExtTCPFastOpenCookieReqd
+
+This counter indicates how many times a client wants to request a TFO
+cookie.
+
+SYN cookies
+===========
+SYN cookies are used to mitigate SYN flood, for details, please refer
+the `SYN cookies wiki`_.
+
+.. _SYN cookies wiki: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/SYN_cookies
+
+* TcpExtSyncookiesSent
+
+It indicates how many SYN cookies are sent.
+
+* TcpExtSyncookiesRecv
+
+How many reply packets of the SYN cookies the TCP stack receives.
+
+* TcpExtSyncookiesFailed
+
+The MSS decoded from the SYN cookie is invalid. When this counter is
+updated, the received packet won't be treated as a SYN cookie and the
+TcpExtSyncookiesRecv counter wont be updated.
+
+Challenge ACK
+=============
+For details of challenge ACK, please refer the explaination of
+TcpExtTCPACKSkippedChallenge.
+
+* TcpExtTCPChallengeACK
+
+The number of challenge acks sent.
+
+* TcpExtTCPSYNChallenge
+
+The number of challenge acks sent in response to SYN packets. After
+updates this counter, the TCP stack might send a challenge ACK and
+update the TcpExtTCPChallengeACK counter, or it might also skip to
+send the challenge and update the TcpExtTCPACKSkippedChallenge.
+
+prune
+=====
+When a socket is under memory pressure, the TCP stack will try to
+reclaim memory from the receiving queue and out of order queue. One of
+the reclaiming method is 'collapse', which means allocate a big sbk,
+copy the contiguous skbs to the single big skb, and free these
+contiguous skbs.
+
+* TcpExtPruneCalled
+
+The TCP stack tries to reclaim memory for a socket. After updates this
+counter, the TCP stack will try to collapse the out of order queue and
+the receiving queue. If the memory is still not enough, the TCP stack
+will try to discard packets from the out of order queue (and update the
+TcpExtOfoPruned counter)
+
+* TcpExtOfoPruned
+
+The TCP stack tries to discard packet on the out of order queue.
+
+* TcpExtRcvPruned
+
+After 'collapse' and discard packets from the out of order queue, if
+the actually used memory is still larger than the max allowed memory,
+this counter will be updated. It means the 'prune' fails.
+
+* TcpExtTCPRcvCollapsed
+
+This counter indicates how many skbs are freed during 'collapse'.
+
 examples
-=======
+========
 
 ping test
---------
+---------
 Run the ping command against the public dns server 8.8.8.8::
 
   nstatuser@nstat-a:~$ ping 8.8.8.8 -c 1
@@ -831,7 +1076,7 @@ and its corresponding Echo Reply packet are constructed by:
 So the IpExtInOctets and IpExtOutOctets are 20+16+48=84.
 
 tcp 3-way handshake
-------------------
+-------------------
 On server side, we run::
 
   nstatuser@nstat-b:~$ nc -lknv 0.0.0.0 9000
@@ -873,7 +1118,7 @@ ACK, so client sent 2 packets, received 1 packet, TcpInSegs increased
 1, TcpOutSegs increased 2.
 
 TCP normal traffic
------------------
+------------------
 Run nc on server::
 
   nstatuser@nstat-b:~$ nc -lkv 0.0.0.0 9000
@@ -996,7 +1241,7 @@ and the packet received from client qualified for fast path, so it
 was counted into 'TcpExtTCPHPHits'.
 
 TcpExtTCPAbortOnClose
---------------------
+---------------------
 On the server side, we run below python script::
 
   import socket
@@ -1030,7 +1275,7 @@ If we run tcpdump on the server side, we could find the server sent a
 RST after we type Ctrl-C.
 
 TcpExtTCPAbortOnMemory and TcpExtTCPAbortOnTimeout
------------------------------------------------
+---------------------------------------------------
 Below is an example which let the orphan socket count be higher than
 net.ipv4.tcp_max_orphans.
 Change tcp_max_orphans to a smaller value on client::
@@ -1152,7 +1397,7 @@ FIN_WAIT_1 state finally. So we wait for a few minutes, we could find
   TcpExtTCPAbortOnTimeout         10                 0.0
 
 TcpExtTCPAbortOnLinger
----------------------
+----------------------
 The server side code::
 
   nstatuser@nstat-b:~$ cat server_linger.py
@@ -1197,7 +1442,7 @@ After run client_linger.py, check the output of nstat::
   TcpExtTCPAbortOnLinger          1                  0.0
 
 TcpExtTCPRcvCoalesce
--------------------
+--------------------
 On the server, we run a program which listen on TCP port 9000, but
 doesn't read any data::
 
@@ -1257,7 +1502,7 @@ the receiving queue. So the TCP layer merged the two packets, and we
 could find the TcpExtTCPRcvCoalesce increased 1.
 
 TcpExtListenOverflows and TcpExtListenDrops
-----------------------------------------
+-------------------------------------------
 On server, run the nc command, listen on port 9000::
 
   nstatuser@nstat-b:~$ nc -lkv 0.0.0.0 9000
@@ -1305,7 +1550,7 @@ TcpExtListenOverflows and TcpExtListenDrops would be larger, because
 the SYN of the 4th nc was dropped, the client was retrying.
 
 IpInAddrErrors, IpExtInNoRoutes and IpOutNoRoutes
-----------------------------------------------
+-------------------------------------------------
 server A IP address: 192.168.122.250
 server B IP address: 192.168.122.251
 Prepare on server A, add a route to server B::
@@ -1400,7 +1645,7 @@ a route for the 8.8.8.8 IP address, so server B increased
 IpOutNoRoutes.
 
 TcpExtTCPACKSkippedSynRecv
-------------------------
+--------------------------
 In this test, we send 3 same SYN packets from client to server. The
 first SYN will let server create a socket, set it to Syn-Recv status,
 and reply a SYN/ACK. The second SYN will let server reply the SYN/ACK
@@ -1448,7 +1693,7 @@ Check snmp cunter on nstat-b::
 As we expected, TcpExtTCPACKSkippedSynRecv is 1.
 
 TcpExtTCPACKSkippedPAWS
-----------------------
+-----------------------
 To trigger PAWS, we could send an old SYN.
 
 On nstat-b, let nc listen on port 9000::
@@ -1485,7 +1730,7 @@ failed, the nstat-b replied an ACK for the first SYN, skipped the ACK
 for the second SYN, and updated TcpExtTCPACKSkippedPAWS.
 
 TcpExtTCPACKSkippedSeq
---------------------
+----------------------
 To trigger TcpExtTCPACKSkippedSeq, we send packets which have valid
 timestamp (to pass PAWS check) but the sequence number is out of
 window. The linux TCP stack would avoid to skip if the packet has
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/switchdev.txt b/Documentation/networking/switchdev.txt
index 97b7ca8b9b86..86174ce8cd13 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/switchdev.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/switchdev.txt
@@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ The switch device will learn/forget source MAC address/VLAN on ingress packets
 and notify the switch driver of the mac/vlan/port tuples.  The switch driver,
 in turn, will notify the bridge driver using the switchdev notifier call:
 
-	err = call_switchdev_notifiers(val, dev, info);
+	err = call_switchdev_notifiers(val, dev, info, extack);
 
 Where val is SWITCHDEV_FDB_ADD when learning and SWITCHDEV_FDB_DEL when
 forgetting, and info points to a struct switchdev_notifier_fdb_info.  On
@@ -232,10 +232,8 @@ Learning_sync attribute enables syncing of the learned/forgotten FDB entry to
 the bridge's FDB.  It's possible, but not optimal, to enable learning on the
 device port and on the bridge port, and disable learning_sync.
 
-To support learning and learning_sync port attributes, the driver implements
-switchdev op switchdev_port_attr_get/set for
-SWITCHDEV_ATTR_PORT_ID_BRIDGE_FLAGS. The driver should initialize the attributes
-to the hardware defaults.
+To support learning, the driver implements switchdev op
+switchdev_port_attr_set for SWITCHDEV_ATTR_PORT_ID_{PRE}_BRIDGE_FLAGS.
 
 FDB Ageing
 ^^^^^^^^^^
@@ -373,22 +371,3 @@ The driver can monitor for updates to arp_tbl using the netevent notifier
 NETEVENT_NEIGH_UPDATE.  The device can be programmed with resolved nexthops
 for the routes as arp_tbl updates.  The driver implements ndo_neigh_destroy
 to know when arp_tbl neighbor entries are purged from the port.
-
-Transaction item queue
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-For switchdev ops attr_set and obj_add, there is a 2 phase transaction model
-used. First phase is to "prepare" anything needed, including various checks,
-memory allocation, etc. The goal is to handle the stuff that is not unlikely
-to fail here. The second phase is to "commit" the actual changes.
-
-Switchdev provides an infrastructure for sharing items (for example memory
-allocations) between the two phases.
-
-The object created by a driver in "prepare" phase and it is queued up by:
-switchdev_trans_item_enqueue()
-During the "commit" phase, the driver gets the object by:
-switchdev_trans_item_dequeue()
-
-If a transaction is aborted during "prepare" phase, switchdev code will handle
-cleanup of the queued-up objects.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/timestamping.txt b/Documentation/networking/timestamping.txt
index 9d1432e0aaa8..bbdaf8990031 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/timestamping.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/timestamping.txt
@@ -6,11 +6,21 @@ The interfaces for receiving network packages timestamps are:
 * SO_TIMESTAMP
   Generates a timestamp for each incoming packet in (not necessarily
   monotonic) system time. Reports the timestamp via recvmsg() in a
-  control message as struct timeval (usec resolution).
+  control message in usec resolution.
+  SO_TIMESTAMP is defined as SO_TIMESTAMP_NEW or SO_TIMESTAMP_OLD
+  based on the architecture type and time_t representation of libc.
+  Control message format is in struct __kernel_old_timeval for
+  SO_TIMESTAMP_OLD and in struct __kernel_sock_timeval for
+  SO_TIMESTAMP_NEW options respectively.
 
 * SO_TIMESTAMPNS
   Same timestamping mechanism as SO_TIMESTAMP, but reports the
-  timestamp as struct timespec (nsec resolution).
+  timestamp as struct timespec in nsec resolution.
+  SO_TIMESTAMPNS is defined as SO_TIMESTAMPNS_NEW or SO_TIMESTAMPNS_OLD
+  based on the architecture type and time_t representation of libc.
+  Control message format is in struct timespec for SO_TIMESTAMPNS_OLD
+  and in struct __kernel_timespec for SO_TIMESTAMPNS_NEW options
+  respectively.
 
 * IP_MULTICAST_LOOP + SO_TIMESTAMP[NS]
   Only for multicast:approximate transmit timestamp obtained by
@@ -22,7 +32,7 @@ The interfaces for receiving network packages timestamps are:
   timestamps for stream sockets.
 
 
-1.1 SO_TIMESTAMP:
+1.1 SO_TIMESTAMP (also SO_TIMESTAMP_OLD and SO_TIMESTAMP_NEW):
 
 This socket option enables timestamping of datagrams on the reception
 path. Because the destination socket, if any, is not known early in
@@ -31,15 +41,25 @@ same is true for all early receive timestamp options.
 
 For interface details, see `man 7 socket`.
 
+Always use SO_TIMESTAMP_NEW timestamp to always get timestamp in
+struct __kernel_sock_timeval format.
 
-1.2 SO_TIMESTAMPNS:
+SO_TIMESTAMP_OLD returns incorrect timestamps after the year 2038
+on 32 bit machines.
+
+1.2 SO_TIMESTAMPNS (also SO_TIMESTAMPNS_OLD and SO_TIMESTAMPNS_NEW):
 
 This option is identical to SO_TIMESTAMP except for the returned data type.
 Its struct timespec allows for higher resolution (ns) timestamps than the
 timeval of SO_TIMESTAMP (ms).
 
+Always use SO_TIMESTAMPNS_NEW timestamp to always get timestamp in
+struct __kernel_timespec format.
+
+SO_TIMESTAMPNS_OLD returns incorrect timestamps after the year 2038
+on 32 bit machines.
 
-1.3 SO_TIMESTAMPING:
+1.3 SO_TIMESTAMPING (also SO_TIMESTAMPING_OLD and SO_TIMESTAMPING_NEW):
 
 Supports multiple types of timestamp requests. As a result, this
 socket option takes a bitmap of flags, not a boolean. In
@@ -323,10 +343,23 @@ SO_TIMESTAMP and SO_TIMESTAMPNS records can be retrieved.
 These timestamps are returned in a control message with cmsg_level
 SOL_SOCKET, cmsg_type SCM_TIMESTAMPING, and payload of type
 
+For SO_TIMESTAMPING_OLD:
+
 struct scm_timestamping {
 	struct timespec ts[3];
 };
 
+For SO_TIMESTAMPING_NEW:
+
+struct scm_timestamping64 {
+	struct __kernel_timespec ts[3];
+
+Always use SO_TIMESTAMPING_NEW timestamp to always get timestamp in
+struct scm_timestamping64 format.
+
+SO_TIMESTAMPING_OLD returns incorrect timestamps after the year 2038
+on 32 bit machines.
+
 The structure can return up to three timestamps. This is a legacy
 feature. At least one field is non-zero at any time. Most timestamps
 are passed in ts[0]. Hardware timestamps are passed in ts[2].
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/tls-offload-layers.svg b/Documentation/networking/tls-offload-layers.svg
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..cf72f05dbb21
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/tls-offload-layers.svg
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+<svg version="1.1" viewBox="0.0 0.0 460.0 500.0" fill="none" stroke="none" stroke-linecap="square" stroke-miterlimit="10" xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"><clipPath id="p.0"><path d="m0 0l960.0 0l0 720.0l-960.0 0l0 -720.0z" clip-rule="nonzero"/></clipPath><g clip-path="url(#p.0)"><path fill="#000000" fill-opacity="0.0" d="m0 0l960.0 0l0 720.0l-960.0 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#cfe2f3" d="m117.02887 0l72.28346 0l0 40.25197l-72.28346 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path stroke="#000000" stroke-width="1.0" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-linecap="butt" d="m117.02887 0l72.28346 0l0 40.25197l-72.28346 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#000000" d="m135.71944 27.045982l0 -9.671875l1.46875 0l0 1.46875q0.5625 -1.03125 1.03125 -1.359375q0.484375 -0.328125 1.0625 -0.328125q0.828125 0 1.6875 0.53125l-0.5625 1.515625q-0.609375 -0.359375 -1.203125 -0.359375q-0.546875 0 -0.96875 0.328125q-0.421875 0.328125 -0.609375 0.890625q-0.28125 0.875 -0.28125 1.921875l0 5.0625l-1.625 0zm12.853302 -3.109375l1.6875 0.203125q-0.40625 1.484375 -1.484375 2.3125q-1.078125 0.8125 -2.765625 0.8125q-2.125 0 -3.375 -1.296875q-1.234375 -1.3125 -1.234375 -3.671875q0 -2.453125 1.25 -3.796875q1.265625 -1.34375 3.265625 -1.34375q1.9375 0 3.15625 1.328125q1.234375 1.3125 1.234375 3.703125q0 0.15625 0 0.4375l-7.21875 0q0.09375 1.59375 0.90625 2.453125q0.8125 0.84375 2.015625 0.84375q0.90625 0 1.546875 -0.46875q0.640625 -0.484375 1.015625 -1.515625zm-5.390625 -2.65625l5.40625 0q-0.109375 -1.21875 -0.625 -1.828125q-0.78125 -0.953125 -2.03125 -0.953125q-1.125 0 -1.90625 0.765625q-0.765625 0.75 -0.84375 2.015625zm15.453842 4.578125q-0.921875 0.765625 -1.765625 1.09375q-0.828125 0.3125 -1.796875 0.3125q-1.59375 0 -2.453125 -0.78125q-0.859375 -0.78125 -0.859375 -1.984375q0 -0.71875 0.328125 -1.296875q0.328125 -0.59375 0.84375 -0.9375q0.53125 -0.359375 1.1875 -0.546875q0.46875 -0.125 1.453125 -0.25q1.984375 -0.234375 2.921875 -0.5625q0.015625 -0.34375 0.015625 -0.421875q0 -1.0 -0.46875 -1.421875q-0.625 -0.546875 -1.875 -0.546875q-1.15625 0 -1.703125 0.40625q-0.546875 0.40625 -0.8125 1.421875l-1.609375 -0.21875q0.21875 -1.015625 0.71875 -1.640625q0.5 -0.640625 1.453125 -0.984375q0.953125 -0.34375 2.1875 -0.34375q1.25 0 2.015625 0.296875q0.78125 0.28125 1.140625 0.734375q0.375 0.4375 0.515625 1.109375q0.078125 0.421875 0.078125 1.515625l0 2.1875q0 2.28125 0.109375 2.890625q0.109375 0.59375 0.40625 1.15625l-1.703125 0q-0.265625 -0.515625 -0.328125 -1.1875zm-0.140625 -3.671875q-0.890625 0.375 -2.671875 0.625q-1.015625 0.140625 -1.4375 0.328125q-0.421875 0.1875 -0.65625 0.53125q-0.21875 0.34375 -0.21875 0.78125q0 0.65625 0.5 1.09375q0.5 0.4375 1.453125 0.4375q0.9375 0 1.671875 -0.40625q0.75 -0.421875 1.09375 -1.140625q0.265625 -0.5625 0.265625 -1.640625l0 -0.609375zm10.469467 4.859375l0 -1.21875q-0.90625 1.4375 -2.703125 1.4375q-1.15625 0 -2.125 -0.640625q-0.96875 -0.640625 -1.5 -1.78125q-0.53125 -1.140625 -0.53125 -2.625q0 -1.453125 0.484375 -2.625q0.484375 -1.1875 1.4375 -1.8125q0.96875 -0.625 2.171875 -0.625q0.875 0 1.546875 0.375q0.6875 0.359375 1.109375 0.953125l0 -4.796875l1.640625 0l0 13.359375l-1.53125 0zm-5.171875 -4.828125q0 1.859375 0.78125 2.78125q0.78125 0.921875 1.84375 0.921875q1.078125 0 1.828125 -0.875q0.75 -0.890625 0.75 -2.6875q0 -1.984375 -0.765625 -2.90625q-0.765625 -0.9375 -1.890625 -0.9375q-1.078125 0 -1.8125 0.890625q-0.734375 0.890625 -0.734375 2.8125z" fill-rule="nonzero"/><path fill="#cfe2f3" d="m309.02887 0l72.28348 0l0 40.25197l-72.28348 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path stroke="#000000" stroke-width="1.0" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-linecap="butt" d="m309.02887 0l72.28348 0l0 40.25197l-72.28348 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#000000" d="m328.4915 27.045982l-2.96875 -9.671875l1.703125 0l1.53125 5.578125l0.578125 2.078125q0.046875 -0.15625 0.5 -2.0l1.546875 -5.65625l1.6875 0l1.4375 5.609375l0.484375 1.84375l0.5625 -1.859375l1.65625 -5.59375l1.59375 0l-3.03125 9.671875l-1.703125 0l-1.53125 -5.796875l-0.375 -1.640625l-1.953125 7.4375l-1.71875 0zm11.676086 0l0 -9.671875l1.46875 0l0 1.46875q0.5625 -1.03125 1.03125 -1.359375q0.484375 -0.328125 1.0625 -0.328125q0.828125 0 1.6875 0.53125l-0.5625 1.515625q-0.609375 -0.359375 -1.203125 -0.359375q-0.546875 0 -0.96875 0.328125q-0.421875 0.328125 -0.609375 0.890625q-0.28125 0.875 -0.28125 1.921875l0 5.0625l-1.625 0zm6.228302 -11.46875l0 -1.890625l1.640625 0l0 1.890625l-1.640625 0zm0 11.46875l0 -9.671875l1.640625 0l0 9.671875l-1.640625 0zm7.722931 -1.46875l0.234375 1.453125q-0.6875 0.140625 -1.234375 0.140625q-0.890625 0 -1.390625 -0.28125q-0.484375 -0.28125 -0.6875 -0.734375q-0.203125 -0.46875 -0.203125 -1.9375l0 -5.578125l-1.203125 0l0 -1.265625l1.203125 0l0 -2.390625l1.625 -0.984375l0 3.375l1.65625 0l0 1.265625l-1.65625 0l0 5.671875q0 0.6875 0.078125 0.890625q0.09375 0.203125 0.28125 0.328125q0.203125 0.109375 0.578125 0.109375q0.265625 0 0.71875 -0.0625zm8.230194 -1.640625l1.6875 0.203125q-0.40625 1.484375 -1.484375 2.3125q-1.078125 0.8125 -2.765625 0.8125q-2.125 0 -3.375 -1.296875q-1.234375 -1.3125 -1.234375 -3.671875q0 -2.453125 1.25 -3.796875q1.265625 -1.34375 3.265625 -1.34375q1.9375 0 3.15625 1.328125q1.234375 1.3125 1.234375 3.703125q0 0.15625 0 0.4375l-7.21875 0q0.09375 1.59375 0.90625 2.453125q0.8125 0.84375 2.015625 0.84375q0.90625 0 1.546875 -0.46875q0.640625 -0.484375 1.015625 -1.515625zm-5.390625 -2.65625l5.40625 0q-0.109375 -1.21875 -0.625 -1.828125q-0.78125 -0.953125 -2.03125 -0.953125q-1.125 0 -1.90625 0.765625q-0.765625 0.75 -0.84375 2.015625z" fill-rule="nonzero"/><path fill="#cfe2f3" d="m73.64304 101.46588l351.0551 0l0 53.70079l-351.0551 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path stroke="#000000" stroke-width="1.0" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-linecap="butt" d="m73.64304 101.46588l351.0551 0l0 53.70079l-351.0551 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#000000" d="m215.67503 135.23627l0 -13.359367l1.640625 0l0 7.6249924l3.890625 -3.9374924l2.109375 0l-3.6875 3.5937424l4.0625 6.078125l-2.015625 0l-3.203125 -4.953125l-1.15625 1.125l0 3.828125l-1.640625 0zm12.90625 -1.46875l0.234375 1.453125q-0.6875 0.140625 -1.234375 0.140625q-0.890625 0 -1.390625 -0.28125q-0.484375 -0.28125 -0.6875 -0.734375q-0.203125 -0.46875 -0.203125 -1.9375l0 -5.5781174l-1.203125 0l0 -1.265625l1.203125 0l0 -2.390625l1.625 -0.984375l0 3.375l1.65625 0l0 1.265625l-1.65625 0l0 5.6718674q0 0.6875 0.078125 0.890625q0.09375 0.203125 0.28125 0.328125q0.203125 0.109375 0.578125 0.109375q0.265625 0 0.71875 -0.0625zm1.5583038 1.46875l0 -13.359367l1.640625 0l0 13.359367l-1.640625 0zm3.5354462 -2.890625l1.625 -0.25q0.125 0.96875 0.75 1.5q0.625 0.515625 1.75 0.515625q1.125 0 1.671875 -0.453125q0.546875 -0.46875 0.546875 -1.09375q0 -0.546875 -0.484375 -0.875q-0.328125 -0.21875 -1.671875 -0.546875q-1.8125 -0.46875 -2.515625 -0.796875q-0.6875 -0.328125 -1.046875 -0.90625q-0.359375 -0.59375 -0.359375 -1.3125q0 -0.6406174 0.296875 -1.1874924q0.296875 -0.5625 0.8125 -0.921875q0.375 -0.28125 1.03125 -0.46875q0.671875 -0.203125 1.421875 -0.203125q1.140625 0 2.0 0.328125q0.859375 0.328125 1.265625 0.890625q0.421875 0.5625 0.578125 1.4999924l-1.609375 0.21875q-0.109375 -0.7499924 -0.640625 -1.1718674q-0.515625 -0.421875 -1.46875 -0.421875q-1.140625 0 -1.625 0.375q-0.46875 0.375 -0.46875 0.875q0 0.31249237 0.1875 0.5781174q0.203125 0.265625 0.640625 0.4375q0.234375 0.09375 1.4375 0.421875q1.75 0.453125 2.4375 0.75q0.6875 0.296875 1.078125 0.859375q0.390625 0.5625 0.390625 1.40625q0 0.828125 -0.484375 1.546875q-0.46875 0.71875 -1.375 1.125q-0.90625 0.390625 -2.046875 0.390625q-1.875 0 -2.875 -0.78125q-0.984375 -0.78125 -1.25 -2.328125zm24.136429 -10.468742l1.765625 0l0 7.7187424q0 2.015625 -0.453125 3.203125q-0.453125 1.1875 -1.640625 1.9375q-1.1875 0.734375 -3.125 0.734375q-1.875 0 -3.078125 -0.640625q-1.1875 -0.65625 -1.703125 -1.875q-0.5 -1.234375 -0.5 -3.359375l0 -7.7187424l1.765625 0l0 7.7187424q0 1.734375 0.3125 2.5625q0.328125 0.8125 1.109375 1.265625q0.796875 0.453125 1.9375 0.453125q1.953125 0 2.78125 -0.890625q0.828125 -0.890625 0.828125 -3.390625l0 -7.7187424zm4.629181 13.359367l0 -13.359367l1.78125 0l0 11.781242l6.5625 0l0 1.578125l-8.34375 0zm10.453857 0l0 -13.359367l5.046875 0q1.328125 0 2.03125 0.125q0.96875 0.171875 1.640625 0.640625q0.671875 0.453125 1.078125 1.28125q0.40625 0.828125 0.40625 1.828125q0 1.703125 -1.09375 2.8906174q-1.078125 1.171875 -3.921875 1.171875l-3.421875 0l0 5.421875l-1.765625 0zm1.765625 -7.0l3.453125 0q1.71875 0 2.4375 -0.6406174q0.71875 -0.640625 0.71875 -1.796875q0 -0.84375 -0.421875 -1.4375q-0.421875 -0.59375 -1.125 -0.78125q-0.4375 -0.125 -1.640625 -0.125l-3.421875 0l0 4.7812424z" fill-rule="nonzero"/><path fill="#cfe2f3" d="m73.64304 216.38058l351.0551 0l0 53.700775l-351.0551 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path stroke="#000000" stroke-width="1.0" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-linecap="butt" d="m73.64304 216.38058l351.0551 0l0 53.700775l-351.0551 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#000000" d="m211.16338 250.15097l0 -11.78125l-4.40625 0l0 -1.578125l10.578125 0l0 1.578125l-4.40625 0l0 11.78125l-1.765625 0zm17.52098 -4.6875l1.765625 0.453125q-0.5625 2.171875 -2.0 3.328125q-1.4375 1.140625 -3.53125 1.140625q-2.15625 0 -3.515625 -0.875q-1.34375 -0.890625 -2.0625 -2.546875q-0.703125 -1.671875 -0.703125 -3.59375q0 -2.078125 0.796875 -3.625q0.796875 -1.5625 2.265625 -2.359375q1.484375 -0.8125 3.25 -0.8125q2.0 0 3.359375 1.015625q1.375 1.015625 1.90625 2.875l-1.734375 0.40625q-0.46875 -1.453125 -1.359375 -2.109375q-0.875 -0.671875 -2.203125 -0.671875q-1.546875 0 -2.578125 0.734375q-1.03125 0.734375 -1.453125 1.984375q-0.421875 1.234375 -0.421875 2.5625q0 1.703125 0.5 2.96875q0.5 1.265625 1.546875 1.90625q1.046875 0.625 2.265625 0.625q1.484375 0 2.515625 -0.859375q1.03125 -0.859375 1.390625 -2.546875zm3.9416962 4.6875l0 -13.359375l5.046875 0q1.328125 0 2.03125 0.125q0.96875 0.171875 1.640625 0.640625q0.671875 0.453125 1.078125 1.28125q0.40625 0.828125 0.40625 1.828125q0 1.703125 -1.09375 2.890625q-1.078125 1.171875 -3.921875 1.171875l-3.421875 0l0 5.421875l-1.765625 0zm1.765625 -7.0l3.453125 0q1.71875 0 2.4375 -0.640625q0.71875 -0.640625 0.71875 -1.796875q0 -0.84375 -0.421875 -1.4375q-0.421875 -0.59375 -1.125 -0.78125q-0.4375 -0.125 -1.640625 -0.125l-3.421875 0l0 4.78125zm14.664642 4.109375l1.625 -0.25q0.125 0.96875 0.75 1.5q0.625 0.515625 1.75 0.515625q1.125 0 1.671875 -0.453125q0.546875 -0.46875 0.546875 -1.09375q0 -0.546875 -0.484375 -0.875q-0.328125 -0.21875 -1.671875 -0.546875q-1.8125 -0.46875 -2.515625 -0.796875q-0.6875 -0.328125 -1.046875 -0.90625q-0.359375 -0.59375 -0.359375 -1.3125q0 -0.640625 0.296875 -1.1875q0.296875 -0.5625 0.8125 -0.921875q0.375 -0.28125 1.03125 -0.46875q0.671875 -0.203125 1.421875 -0.203125q1.140625 0 2.0 0.328125q0.859375 0.328125 1.2656097 0.890625q0.421875 0.5625 0.578125 1.5l-1.6093597 0.21875q-0.109375 -0.75 -0.640625 -1.171875q-0.515625 -0.421875 -1.46875 -0.421875q-1.140625 0 -1.625 0.375q-0.46875 0.375 -0.46875 0.875q0 0.3125 0.1875 0.578125q0.203125 0.265625 0.640625 0.4375q0.234375 0.09375 1.4375 0.421875q1.75 0.453125 2.4375 0.75q0.68748474 0.296875 1.0781097 0.859375q0.390625 0.5625 0.390625 1.40625q0 0.828125 -0.484375 1.546875q-0.46875 0.71875 -1.3749847 1.125q-0.90625 0.390625 -2.046875 0.390625q-1.875 0 -2.875 -0.78125q-0.984375 -0.78125 -1.25 -2.328125zm13.562485 1.421875l0.234375 1.453125q-0.6875 0.140625 -1.234375 0.140625q-0.890625 0 -1.390625 -0.28125q-0.484375 -0.28125 -0.6875 -0.734375q-0.203125 -0.46875 -0.203125 -1.9375l0 -5.578125l-1.203125 0l0 -1.265625l1.203125 0l0 -2.390625l1.625 -0.984375l0 3.375l1.65625 0l0 1.265625l-1.65625 0l0 5.671875q0 0.6875 0.078125 0.890625q0.09375 0.203125 0.28125 0.328125q0.203125 0.109375 0.578125 0.109375q0.265625 0 0.71875 -0.0625zm7.917694 0.28125q-0.921875 0.765625 -1.765625 1.09375q-0.828125 0.3125 -1.796875 0.3125q-1.59375 0 -2.453125 -0.78125q-0.859375 -0.78125 -0.859375 -1.984375q0 -0.71875 0.328125 -1.296875q0.328125 -0.59375 0.84375 -0.9375q0.53125 -0.359375 1.1875 -0.546875q0.46875 -0.125 1.453125 -0.25q1.984375 -0.234375 2.921875 -0.5625q0.015625 -0.34375 0.015625 -0.421875q0 -1.0 -0.46875 -1.421875q-0.625 -0.546875 -1.875 -0.546875q-1.15625 0 -1.703125 0.40625q-0.546875 0.40625 -0.8125 1.421875l-1.609375 -0.21875q0.21875 -1.015625 0.71875 -1.640625q0.5 -0.640625 1.453125 -0.984375q0.953125 -0.34375 2.1875 -0.34375q1.25 0 2.015625 0.296875q0.78125 0.28125 1.140625 0.734375q0.375 0.4375 0.515625 1.109375q0.078125 0.421875 0.078125 1.515625l0 2.1875q0 2.28125 0.109375 2.890625q0.109375 0.59375 0.40625 1.15625l-1.703125 0q-0.265625 -0.515625 -0.328125 -1.1875zm-0.140625 -3.671875q-0.890625 0.375 -2.671875 0.625q-1.015625 0.140625 -1.4375 0.328125q-0.421875 0.1875 -0.65625 0.53125q-0.21875 0.34375 -0.21875 0.78125q0 0.65625 0.5 1.09375q0.5 0.4375 1.453125 0.4375q0.9375 0 1.671875 -0.40625q0.75 -0.421875 1.09375 -1.140625q0.265625 -0.5625 0.265625 -1.640625l0 -0.609375zm10.516327 1.3125l1.609375 0.21875q-0.265625 1.65625 -1.359375 2.609375q-1.078125 0.9375 -2.671875 0.9375q-1.984375 0 -3.1875 -1.296875q-1.203125 -1.296875 -1.203125 -3.71875q0 -1.578125 0.515625 -2.75q0.515625 -1.171875 1.578125 -1.75q1.0625 -0.59375 2.3125 -0.59375q1.578125 0 2.578125 0.796875q1.0 0.796875 1.28125 2.265625l-1.59375 0.234375q-0.234375 -0.96875 -0.8125 -1.453125q-0.578125 -0.5 -1.390625 -0.5q-1.234375 0 -2.015625 0.890625q-0.78125 0.890625 -0.78125 2.8125q0 1.953125 0.75 2.84375q0.75 0.875 1.953125 0.875q0.96875 0 1.609375 -0.59375q0.65625 -0.59375 0.828125 -1.828125zm3.015625 3.546875l0 -13.359375l1.640625 0l0 7.625l3.890625 -3.9375l2.109375 0l-3.6875 3.59375l4.0625 6.078125l-2.015625 0l-3.203125 -4.953125l-1.15625 1.125l0 3.828125l-1.640625 0z" fill-rule="nonzero"/><path fill="#cfe2f3" d="m73.64304 331.2953l351.0551 0l0 53.700775l-351.0551 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path stroke="#000000" stroke-width="1.0" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-linecap="butt" d="m73.64304 331.2953l351.0551 0l0 53.700775l-351.0551 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#000000" d="m225.73463 365.06567l0 -13.359375l4.609375 0q1.546875 0 2.375 0.203125q1.140625 0.25 1.953125 0.953125q1.0625 0.890625 1.578125 2.28125q0.53125 1.390625 0.53125 3.171875q0 1.515625 -0.359375 2.703125q-0.359375 1.171875 -0.921875 1.9375q-0.546875 0.765625 -1.203125 1.21875q-0.65625 0.4375 -1.59375 0.671875q-0.9375 0.21875 -2.140625 0.21875l-4.828125 0zm1.765625 -1.578125l2.859375 0q1.3125 0 2.0625 -0.234375q0.75 -0.25 1.203125 -0.703125q0.625 -0.625 0.96875 -1.6875q0.359375 -1.0625 0.359375 -2.578125q0 -2.09375 -0.6875 -3.21875q-0.6875 -1.125 -1.671875 -1.5q-0.703125 -0.28125 -2.28125 -0.28125l-2.8125 0l0 10.203125zm11.488571 1.578125l0 -9.671875l1.46875 0l0 1.46875q0.5625 -1.03125 1.03125 -1.359375q0.484375 -0.328125 1.0625 -0.328125q0.828125 0 1.6875 0.53125l-0.5625 1.515625q-0.609375 -0.359375 -1.203125 -0.359375q-0.546875 0 -0.96875 0.328125q-0.421875 0.328125 -0.609375 0.890625q-0.28125 0.875 -0.28125 1.921875l0 5.0625l-1.625 0zm6.228302 -11.46875l0 -1.890625l1.640625 0l0 1.890625l-1.640625 0zm0 11.46875l0 -9.671875l1.640625 0l0 9.671875l-1.640625 0zm6.832321 0l-3.6875 -9.671875l1.734375 0l2.078125 5.796875q0.328125 0.9375 0.625 1.9375q0.203125 -0.765625 0.609375 -1.828125l2.140625 -5.90625l1.6874847 0l-3.6562347 9.671875l-1.53125 0zm13.26561 -3.109375l1.6875 0.203125q-0.40625 1.484375 -1.484375 2.3125q-1.078125 0.8125 -2.765625 0.8125q-2.125 0 -3.375 -1.296875q-1.234375 -1.3125 -1.234375 -3.671875q0 -2.453125 1.25 -3.796875q1.265625 -1.34375 3.265625 -1.34375q1.9375 0 3.15625 1.328125q1.234375 1.3125 1.234375 3.703125q0 0.15625 0 0.4375l-7.21875 0q0.09375 1.59375 0.90625 2.453125q0.8125 0.84375 2.015625 0.84375q0.90625 0 1.546875 -0.46875q0.640625 -0.484375 1.015625 -1.515625zm-5.390625 -2.65625l5.40625 0q-0.109375 -1.21875 -0.625 -1.828125q-0.78125 -0.953125 -2.03125 -0.953125q-1.125 0 -1.90625 0.765625q-0.765625 0.75 -0.84375 2.015625zm9.125732 5.765625l0 -9.671875l1.46875 0l0 1.46875q0.5625 -1.03125 1.03125 -1.359375q0.484375 -0.328125 1.0625 -0.328125q0.828125 0 1.6875 0.53125l-0.5625 1.515625q-0.609375 -0.359375 -1.203125 -0.359375q-0.546875 0 -0.96875 0.328125q-0.421875 0.328125 -0.609375 0.890625q-0.28125 0.875 -0.28125 1.921875l0 5.0625l-1.625 0z" fill-rule="nonzero"/><path fill="#cfe2f3" d="m73.64304 446.20996l351.0551 0l0 53.700806l-351.0551 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path stroke="#000000" stroke-width="1.0" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-linecap="butt" d="m73.64304 446.20996l351.0551 0l0 53.700806l-351.0551 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#000000" d="m222.09538 479.98038l0 -13.359375l4.609375 0q1.546875 0 2.375 0.203125q1.140625 0.25 1.953125 0.953125q1.0625 0.890625 1.578125 2.28125q0.53125 1.390625 0.53125 3.171875q0 1.515625 -0.359375 2.703125q-0.359375 1.171875 -0.921875 1.9375q-0.546875 0.765625 -1.203125 1.21875q-0.65625 0.4375 -1.59375 0.671875q-0.9375 0.21875 -2.140625 0.21875l-4.828125 0zm1.765625 -1.578125l2.859375 0q1.3125 0 2.0625 -0.234375q0.75 -0.25 1.203125 -0.703125q0.625 -0.625 0.96875 -1.6875q0.359375 -1.0625 0.359375 -2.578125q0 -2.09375 -0.6875 -3.21875q-0.6875 -1.125 -1.671875 -1.5q-0.703125 -0.28125 -2.28125 -0.28125l-2.8125 0l0 10.203125zm18.129196 -1.53125l1.6875 0.203125q-0.40625 1.484375 -1.484375 2.3125q-1.078125 0.8125 -2.765625 0.8125q-2.125 0 -3.375 -1.296875q-1.234375 -1.3125 -1.234375 -3.671875q0 -2.453125 1.25 -3.796875q1.265625 -1.34375 3.265625 -1.34375q1.9375 0 3.15625 1.328125q1.234375 1.3125 1.234375 3.703125q0 0.15625 0 0.4375l-7.21875 0q0.09375 1.59375 0.90625 2.453125q0.8125 0.84375 2.015625 0.84375q0.90625 0 1.546875 -0.46875q0.640625 -0.484375 1.015625 -1.515625zm-5.390625 -2.65625l5.40625 0q-0.109375 -1.21875 -0.625 -1.828125q-0.78125 -0.953125 -2.03125 -0.953125q-1.125 0 -1.90625 0.765625q-0.765625 0.75 -0.84375 2.015625zm11.828842 5.765625l-3.6875 -9.671875l1.734375 0l2.078125 5.796875q0.328125 0.9375 0.625 1.9375q0.203125 -0.765625 0.609375 -1.828125l2.140625 -5.90625l1.6875 0l-3.65625 9.671875l-1.53125 0zm6.640625 -11.46875l0 -1.890625l1.6406097 0l0 1.890625l-1.6406097 0zm0 11.46875l0 -9.671875l1.6406097 0l0 9.671875l-1.6406097 0zm10.457321 -3.546875l1.609375 0.21875q-0.265625 1.65625 -1.359375 2.609375q-1.078125 0.9375 -2.671875 0.9375q-1.984375 0 -3.1875 -1.296875q-1.203125 -1.296875 -1.203125 -3.71875q0 -1.578125 0.515625 -2.75q0.515625 -1.171875 1.578125 -1.75q1.0625 -0.59375 2.3125 -0.59375q1.578125 0 2.578125 0.796875q1.0 0.796875 1.28125 2.265625l-1.59375 0.234375q-0.234375 -0.96875 -0.8125 -1.453125q-0.578125 -0.5 -1.390625 -0.5q-1.234375 0 -2.015625 0.890625q-0.78125 0.890625 -0.78125 2.8125q0 1.953125 0.75 2.84375q0.75 0.875 1.953125 0.875q0.96875 0 1.609375 -0.59375q0.65625 -0.59375 0.828125 -1.828125zm9.640625 0.4375l1.6875 0.203125q-0.40625 1.484375 -1.484375 2.3125q-1.078125 0.8125 -2.765625 0.8125q-2.125 0 -3.375 -1.296875q-1.234375 -1.3125 -1.234375 -3.671875q0 -2.453125 1.25 -3.796875q1.265625 -1.34375 3.265625 -1.34375q1.9375 0 3.15625 1.328125q1.234375 1.3125 1.234375 3.703125q0 0.15625 0 0.4375l-7.21875 0q0.09375 1.59375 0.90625 2.453125q0.8125 0.84375 2.015625 0.84375q0.90625 0 1.546875 -0.46875q0.640625 -0.484375 1.015625 -1.515625zm-5.390625 -2.65625l5.40625 0q-0.109375 -1.21875 -0.625 -1.828125q-0.78125 -0.953125 -2.03125 -0.953125q-1.125 0 -1.90625 0.765625q-0.765625 0.75 -0.84375 2.015625z" fill-rule="nonzero"/><path fill="#000000" fill-opacity="0.0" d="m153.17061 40.25197l0 0" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path stroke="#000000" stroke-width="1.0" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-linecap="butt" d="m153.17061 40.25197l0 0" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#000000" fill-opacity="0.0" d="m48.435696 73.03937l402.67715 0" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path stroke="#000000" stroke-width="1.0" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-linecap="butt" stroke-dasharray="4.0,3.0" d="m48.435696 73.03937l402.67715 0" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#cfe2f3" d="m177.95801 71.49061l-12.393707 0l0 12.897636l-24.7874 0l0 -12.897636l-12.393692 0l24.7874 -12.89764z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path stroke="#000000" stroke-width="1.0" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-linecap="butt" d="m177.95801 71.49061l-12.393707 0l0 12.897636l-24.7874 0l0 -12.897636l-12.393692 0l24.7874 -12.89764z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#cfe2f3" d="m320.3832 71.49061l12.393707 0l0 -12.89764l24.787384 0l0 12.89764l12.393707 0l-24.787415 12.897636z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path stroke="#000000" stroke-width="1.0" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-linecap="butt" d="m320.3832 71.49061l12.393707 0l0 -12.89764l24.787384 0l0 12.89764l12.393707 0l-24.787415 12.897636z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#cfe2f3" d="m177.95801 188.3931l-12.393707 0l0 12.897629l-24.7874 0l0 -12.897629l-12.393692 0l24.7874 -12.897644z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path stroke="#000000" stroke-width="1.0" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-linecap="butt" d="m177.95801 188.3931l-12.393707 0l0 12.897629l-24.7874 0l0 -12.897629l-12.393692 0l24.7874 -12.897644z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#cfe2f3" d="m320.3832 188.3931l12.393707 0l0 -12.897644l24.787384 0l0 12.897644l12.393707 0l-24.787415 12.897629z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path stroke="#000000" stroke-width="1.0" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-linecap="butt" d="m320.3832 188.3931l12.393707 0l0 -12.897644l24.787384 0l0 12.897644l12.393707 0l-24.787415 12.897629z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#cfe2f3" d="m177.95801 301.4256l-12.393707 0l0 12.897644l-24.7874 0l0 -12.897644l-12.393692 0l24.7874 -12.897644z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path stroke="#000000" stroke-width="1.0" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-linecap="butt" d="m177.95801 301.4256l-12.393707 0l0 12.897644l-24.7874 0l0 -12.897644l-12.393692 0l24.7874 -12.897644z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#cfe2f3" d="m320.3832 301.4256l12.393707 0l0 -12.897644l24.787384 0l0 12.897644l12.393707 0l-24.787415 12.897644z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path stroke="#000000" stroke-width="1.0" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-linecap="butt" d="m320.3832 301.4256l12.393707 0l0 -12.897644l24.787384 0l0 12.897644l12.393707 0l-24.787415 12.897644z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#cfe2f3" d="m177.95801 415.4906l-12.393707 0l0 12.897644l-24.7874 0l0 -12.897644l-12.393692 0l24.7874 -12.897644z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path stroke="#000000" stroke-width="1.0" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-linecap="butt" d="m177.95801 415.4906l-12.393707 0l0 12.897644l-24.7874 0l0 -12.897644l-12.393692 0l24.7874 -12.897644z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#cfe2f3" d="m320.3832 415.4906l12.393707 0l0 -12.897644l24.787384 0l0 12.897644l12.393707 0l-24.787415 12.897644z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path stroke="#000000" stroke-width="1.0" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-linecap="butt" d="m320.3832 415.4906l12.393707 0l0 -12.897644l24.787384 0l0 12.897644l12.393707 0l-24.787415 12.897644z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#000000" fill-opacity="0.0" d="m198.14961 44.009186l109.44881 0l0 53.70079l-109.44881 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#000000" d="m224.98174 70.929184l2.78125 -13.359375l1.65625 0l-1.0 4.78125q0.78125 -0.71875 1.421875 -1.015625q0.640625 -0.296875 1.328125 -0.296875q1.359375 0 2.265625 1.015625q0.90625 1.0 0.90625 2.9375q0 1.28125 -0.375 2.359375q-0.359375 1.0625 -0.890625 1.78125q-0.53125 0.71875 -1.109375 1.15625q-0.578125 0.4375 -1.1875 0.640625q-0.59375 0.21875 -1.140625 0.21875q-0.96875 0 -1.703125 -0.5q-0.71875 -0.515625 -1.125 -1.546875l-0.390625 1.828125l-1.4375 0zm2.4375 -3.96875l-0.015625 0.3125q0 1.234375 0.59375 1.890625q0.59375 0.640625 1.484375 0.640625q0.859375 0 1.578125 -0.609375q0.734375 -0.609375 1.1875 -1.890625q0.46875 -1.28125 0.46875 -2.375q0 -1.21875 -0.59375 -1.890625q-0.578125 -0.671875 -1.4375 -0.671875q-0.90625 0 -1.65625 0.6875q-0.734375 0.6875 -1.234375 2.125q-0.375 1.0625 -0.375 1.78125zm14.531967 2.21875q-1.734375 1.96875 -3.5625 1.96875q-1.109375 0 -1.796875 -0.640625q-0.6875 -0.640625 -0.6875 -1.578125q0 -0.609375 0.296875 -2.09375l1.171875 -5.578125l1.65625 0l-1.296875 6.1875q-0.171875 0.765625 -0.171875 1.203125q0 0.546875 0.328125 0.859375q0.34375 0.296875 0.984375 0.296875q0.703125 0 1.359375 -0.328125q0.65625 -0.34375 1.125 -0.921875q0.484375 -0.578125 0.796875 -1.359375q0.1875 -0.5 0.453125 -1.765625l0.875 -4.171875l1.65625 0l-2.03125 9.671875l-1.515625 0l0.359375 -1.75zm4.000717 1.75l1.765625 -8.40625l-1.484375 0l0.265625 -1.265625l1.484375 0l0.28125 -1.375q0.21875 -1.03125 0.4375 -1.484375q0.234375 -0.453125 0.75 -0.75q0.53125 -0.296875 1.4375 -0.296875q0.625 0 1.828125 0.265625l-0.296875 1.4375q-0.84375 -0.21875 -1.40625 -0.21875q-0.484375 0 -0.734375 0.25q-0.25 0.234375 -0.4375 1.125l-0.21875 1.046875l1.84375 0l-0.265625 1.265625l-1.84375 0l-1.75 8.40625l-1.65625 0zm5.183304 0l1.765625 -8.40625l-1.484375 0l0.265625 -1.265625l1.484375 0l0.28125 -1.375q0.21875 -1.03125 0.4375 -1.484375q0.234375 -0.453125 0.75 -0.75q0.53125 -0.296875 1.4375 -0.296875q0.625 0 1.828125 0.265625l-0.296875 1.4375q-0.84375 -0.21875 -1.40625 -0.21875q-0.484375 0 -0.734375 0.25q-0.25 0.234375 -0.4375 1.125l-0.21875 1.046875l1.84375 0l-0.265625 1.265625l-1.84375 0l-1.75 8.40625l-1.65625 0zm12.058319 -3.28125l1.609375 0.15625q-0.34375 1.1875 -1.59375 2.265625q-1.234375 1.078125 -2.96875 1.078125q-1.0625 0 -1.96875 -0.5q-0.890625 -0.5 -1.359375 -1.4375q-0.46875 -0.953125 -0.46875 -2.15625q0 -1.59375 0.734375 -3.078125q0.734375 -1.484375 1.890625 -2.203125q1.171875 -0.734375 2.53125 -0.734375q1.734375 0 2.765625 1.078125q1.03125 1.0625 1.03125 2.921875q0 0.71875 -0.125 1.46875l-7.125 0q-0.046875 0.28125 -0.046875 0.5q0 1.359375 0.625 2.078125q0.625 0.71875 1.53125 0.71875q0.84375 0 1.65625 -0.546875q0.828125 -0.5625 1.28125 -1.609375zm-4.78125 -2.40625l5.421875 0q0.015625 -0.25 0.015625 -0.359375q0 -1.234375 -0.625 -1.890625q-0.625 -0.671875 -1.59375 -0.671875q-1.0625 0 -1.9375 0.734375q-0.859375 0.71875 -1.28125 2.1875zm8.063202 5.6875l2.015625 -9.671875l1.453125 0l-0.40625 1.96875q0.75 -1.109375 1.453125 -1.640625q0.71875 -0.546875 1.46875 -0.546875q0.5 0 1.21875 0.359375l-0.671875 1.53125q-0.4375 -0.3125 -0.9375 -0.3125q-0.875 0 -1.78125 0.96875q-0.90625 0.953125 -1.4375 3.46875l-0.8125 3.875l-1.5625 0zm6.368927 -3.3125l1.640625 -0.09375q0 0.703125 0.21875 1.21875q0.21875 0.5 0.796875 0.8125q0.59375 0.3125 1.375 0.3125q1.09375 0 1.640625 -0.4375q0.546875 -0.4375 0.546875 -1.015625q0 -0.4375 -0.328125 -0.8125q-0.328125 -0.390625 -1.640625 -0.953125q-1.3125 -0.5625 -1.671875 -0.78125q-0.609375 -0.375 -0.921875 -0.875q-0.3125 -0.515625 -0.3125 -1.171875q0 -1.140625 0.90625 -1.953125q0.921875 -0.828125 2.5625 -0.828125q1.828125 0 2.765625 0.84375q0.953125 0.84375 1.0 2.21875l-1.609375 0.109375q-0.046875 -0.875 -0.625 -1.390625q-0.578125 -0.515625 -1.65625 -0.515625q-0.84375 0 -1.328125 0.40625q-0.46875 0.390625 -0.46875 0.84375q0 0.453125 0.40625 0.796875q0.28125 0.234375 1.421875 0.734375q1.890625 0.8125 2.375 1.28125q0.78125 0.765625 0.78125 1.84375q0 0.71875 -0.4375 1.421875q-0.4375 0.6875 -1.34375 1.109375q-0.90625 0.40625 -2.140625 0.40625q-1.671875 0 -2.84375 -0.828125q-1.1875 -0.828125 -1.109375 -2.703125z" fill-rule="nonzero"/><path fill="#000000" fill-opacity="0.0" d="m198.14961 164.00919l109.44881 0l0 53.70079l-109.44881 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#000000" d="m211.6696 187.61668l1.640625 -0.09375q0 0.703125 0.21875 1.21875q0.21875 0.5 0.796875 0.8125q0.59375 0.3125 1.375 0.3125q1.09375 0 1.640625 -0.4375q0.546875 -0.4375 0.546875 -1.015625q0 -0.4375 -0.328125 -0.8125q-0.328125 -0.390625 -1.640625 -0.953125q-1.3125 -0.5625 -1.671875 -0.78125q-0.609375 -0.375 -0.921875 -0.875q-0.3125 -0.515625 -0.3125 -1.171875q0 -1.140625 0.90625 -1.953125q0.921875 -0.828125 2.5625 -0.828125q1.828125 0 2.765625 0.84375q0.953125 0.84375 1.0 2.21875l-1.609375 0.109375q-0.046875 -0.875 -0.625 -1.390625q-0.578125 -0.515625 -1.65625 -0.515625q-0.84375 0 -1.328125 0.40625q-0.46875 0.390625 -0.46875 0.84375q0 0.453125 0.40625 0.796875q0.28125 0.234375 1.421875 0.734375q1.890625 0.8125 2.375 1.28125q0.78125 0.765625 0.78125 1.84375q0 0.71875 -0.4375 1.421875q-0.4375 0.6875 -1.34375 1.109375q-0.90625 0.40625 -2.140625 0.40625q-1.671875 0 -2.84375 -0.828125q-1.1875 -0.828125 -1.109375 -2.703125zm15.84375 -0.21875l1.65625 0.171875q-0.625 1.8125 -1.765625 2.703125q-1.140625 0.875 -2.609375 0.875q-1.578125 0 -2.5625 -1.015625q-0.96875 -1.03125 -0.96875 -2.859375q0 -1.578125 0.625 -3.109375q0.640625 -1.53125 1.796875 -2.328125q1.171875 -0.796875 2.6875 -0.796875q1.546875 0 2.453125 0.875q0.921875 0.875 0.921875 2.328125l-1.625 0.109375q-0.015625 -0.921875 -0.546875 -1.4375q-0.515625 -0.515625 -1.359375 -0.515625q-1.0 0 -1.734375 0.625q-0.71875 0.625 -1.140625 1.90625q-0.40625 1.28125 -0.40625 2.46875q0 1.234375 0.546875 1.859375q0.546875 0.609375 1.34375 0.609375q0.796875 0 1.53125 -0.609375q0.734375 -0.609375 1.15625 -1.859375zm9.171875 2.328125q-0.859375 0.734375 -1.65625 1.078125q-0.78125 0.34375 -1.6875 0.34375q-1.34375 0 -2.171875 -0.78125q-0.8125 -0.796875 -0.8125 -2.03125q0 -0.796875 0.375 -1.421875q0.375 -0.625 0.984375 -1.0q0.609375 -0.390625 1.484375 -0.546875q0.5625 -0.109375 2.109375 -0.171875q1.5625 -0.0625 2.234375 -0.328125q0.1875 -0.671875 0.1875 -1.125q0 -0.578125 -0.421875 -0.90625q-0.5625 -0.453125 -1.671875 -0.453125q-1.03125 0 -1.703125 0.46875q-0.65625 0.453125 -0.953125 1.296875l-1.671875 -0.140625q0.515625 -1.4375 1.609375 -2.203125q1.109375 -0.765625 2.796875 -0.765625q1.796875 0 2.84375 0.859375q0.796875 0.625 0.796875 1.65625q0 0.765625 -0.21875 1.796875l-0.53125 2.40625q-0.265625 1.140625 -0.265625 1.859375q0 0.453125 0.203125 1.3125l-1.671875 0q-0.125 -0.46875 -0.1875 -1.203125zm0.609375 -3.703125q-0.34375 0.140625 -0.75 0.21875q-0.390625 0.0625 -1.3125 0.15625q-1.4375 0.125 -2.03125 0.328125q-0.59375 0.1875 -0.90625 0.625q-0.296875 0.421875 -0.296875 0.9375q0 0.6875 0.484375 1.140625q0.484375 0.4375 1.359375 0.4375q0.828125 0 1.578125 -0.421875q0.75 -0.4375 1.1875 -1.203125q0.4375 -0.78125 0.6875 -2.21875zm7.094467 3.5625l-0.265625 1.359375q-0.59375 0.140625 -1.15625 0.140625q-0.984375 0 -1.5625 -0.46875q-0.4375 -0.375 -0.4375 -1.0q0 -0.3125 0.234375 -1.46875l1.171875 -5.625l-1.296875 0l0.265625 -1.265625l1.296875 0l0.5 -2.375l1.890625 -1.140625l-0.734375 3.515625l1.625 0l-0.28125 1.265625l-1.609375 0l-1.125 5.359375q-0.203125 1.015625 -0.203125 1.21875q0 0.28125 0.15625 0.4375q0.171875 0.15625 0.5625 0.15625q0.546875 0 0.96875 -0.109375zm5.183304 0l-0.265625 1.359375q-0.59375 0.140625 -1.15625 0.140625q-0.984375 0 -1.5625 -0.46875q-0.4375 -0.375 -0.4375 -1.0q0 -0.3125 0.234375 -1.46875l1.171875 -5.625l-1.296875 0l0.265625 -1.265625l1.296875 0l0.5 -2.375l1.890625 -1.140625l-0.734375 3.515625l1.625 0l-0.28125 1.265625l-1.609375 0l-1.125 5.359375q-0.203125 1.015625 -0.203125 1.21875q0 0.28125 0.15625 0.4375q0.171875 0.15625 0.5625 0.15625q0.546875 0 0.96875 -0.109375zm8.433304 -1.9375l1.609375 0.15625q-0.34375 1.1875 -1.59375 2.265625q-1.234375 1.078125 -2.96875 1.078125q-1.0625 0 -1.96875 -0.5q-0.890625 -0.5 -1.359375 -1.4375q-0.46875 -0.953125 -0.46875 -2.15625q0 -1.59375 0.734375 -3.078125q0.734375 -1.484375 1.890625 -2.203125q1.171875 -0.734375 2.53125 -0.734375q1.734375 0 2.765625 1.078125q1.03125 1.0625 1.03125 2.921875q0 0.71875 -0.125 1.46875l-7.125 0q-0.046875 0.28125 -0.046875 0.5q0 1.359375 0.625 2.078125q0.625 0.71875 1.53125 0.71875q0.84375 0 1.65625 -0.546875q0.828125 -0.5625 1.28125 -1.609375zm-4.78125 -2.40625l5.421875 0q0.015625 -0.25 0.015625 -0.359375q0 -1.234375 -0.625 -1.890625q-0.625 -0.671875 -1.59375 -0.671875q-1.0625 0 -1.9375 0.734375q-0.859375 0.71875 -1.28125 2.1875zm8.063202 5.6875l2.015625 -9.671875l1.453125 0l-0.40625 1.96875q0.75 -1.109375 1.453125 -1.640625q0.71875 -0.546875 1.46875 -0.546875q0.5 0 1.21875 0.359375l-0.671875 1.53125q-0.4375 -0.3125 -0.9375 -0.3125q-0.875 0 -1.78125 0.96875q-0.90625 0.953125 -1.4375 3.46875l-0.8125 3.875l-1.5625 0zm11.255371 0l2.796875 -13.359375l1.640625 0l-2.78125 13.359375l-1.65625 0zm6.613556 -11.484375l0.40625 -1.875l1.625 0l-0.390625 1.875l-1.640625 0zm-2.390625 11.484375l2.015625 -9.671875l1.65625 0l-2.03125 9.671875l-1.640625 0zm4.3635864 -3.3125l1.640625 -0.09375q0 0.703125 0.21875 1.21875q0.21875 0.5 0.796875 0.8125q0.59375 0.3125 1.375 0.3125q1.09375 0 1.640625 -0.4375q0.546875 -0.4375 0.546875 -1.015625q0 -0.4375 -0.328125 -0.8125q-0.328125 -0.390625 -1.640625 -0.953125q-1.3125 -0.5625 -1.671875 -0.78125q-0.609375 -0.375 -0.921875 -0.875q-0.3125 -0.515625 -0.3125 -1.171875q0 -1.140625 0.90625 -1.953125q0.921875 -0.828125 2.5625 -0.828125q1.828125 0 2.765625 0.84375q0.953125 0.84375 1.0 2.21875l-1.609375 0.109375q-0.046875 -0.875 -0.625 -1.390625q-0.578125 -0.515625 -1.65625 -0.515625q-0.84375 0 -1.328125 0.40625q-0.46875 0.390625 -0.46875 0.84375q0 0.453125 0.40625 0.796875q0.28125 0.234375 1.421875 0.734375q1.890625 0.8125 2.375 1.28125q0.78125 0.765625 0.78125 1.84375q0 0.71875 -0.4375 1.421875q-0.4375 0.6875 -1.34375 1.109375q-0.90625 0.40625 -2.140625 0.40625q-1.671875 0 -2.84375 -0.828125q-1.1875 -0.828125 -1.109375 -2.703125zm13.015625 1.96875l-0.265625 1.359375q-0.59375 0.140625 -1.15625 0.140625q-0.984375 0 -1.5625 -0.46875q-0.4375 -0.375 -0.4375 -1.0q0 -0.3125 0.234375 -1.46875l1.171875 -5.625l-1.296875 0l0.265625 -1.265625l1.296875 0l0.5 -2.375l1.890625 -1.140625l-0.734375 3.515625l1.625 0l-0.28125 1.265625l-1.609375 0l-1.125 5.359375q-0.203125 1.015625 -0.203125 1.21875q0 0.28125 0.15625 0.4375q0.171875 0.15625 0.5625 0.15625q0.546875 0 0.96875 -0.109375z" fill-rule="nonzero"/><path fill="#000000" fill-opacity="0.0" d="m198.14961 280.1392l109.44881 0l0 53.700806l-109.44881 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#000000" d="m223.58026 303.7467l1.640625 -0.09375q0 0.703125 0.21875 1.21875q0.21875 0.5 0.796875 0.8125q0.59375 0.3125 1.375 0.3125q1.09375 0 1.640625 -0.4375q0.546875 -0.4375 0.546875 -1.015625q0 -0.4375 -0.328125 -0.8125q-0.328125 -0.390625 -1.640625 -0.953125q-1.3125 -0.5625 -1.671875 -0.78125q-0.609375 -0.375 -0.921875 -0.875q-0.3125 -0.515625 -0.3125 -1.171875q0 -1.140625 0.90625 -1.953125q0.921875 -0.828125 2.5625 -0.828125q1.828125 0 2.765625 0.84375q0.953125 0.84375 1.0 2.21875l-1.609375 0.109375q-0.046875 -0.875 -0.625 -1.390625q-0.578125 -0.515625 -1.65625 -0.515625q-0.84375 0 -1.328125 0.40625q-0.46875 0.390625 -0.46875 0.84375q0 0.453125 0.40625 0.796875q0.28125 0.234375 1.421875 0.734375q1.890625 0.8125 2.375 1.28125q0.78125 0.765625 0.78125 1.84375q0 0.71875 -0.4375 1.421875q-0.4375 0.6875 -1.34375 1.109375q-0.90625 0.40625 -2.140625 0.40625q-1.671875 0 -2.84375 -0.828125q-1.1875 -0.828125 -1.109375 -2.703125zm9.1875 3.3125l2.796875 -13.359375l1.640625 0l-1.734375 8.28125l4.8125 -4.59375l2.171875 0l-4.125 3.609375l2.5 6.0625l-1.8125 0l-1.921875 -4.96875l-2.015625 1.734375l-0.671875 3.234375l-1.640625 0zm7.5 3.703125l0 -1.1875l10.875 0l0 1.1875l-10.875 0zm12.188217 -3.703125l2.78125 -13.359375l1.6562653 0l-1.0000153 4.78125q0.78126526 -0.71875 1.4218903 -1.015625q0.640625 -0.296875 1.328125 -0.296875q1.359375 0 2.265625 1.015625q0.90625 1.0 0.90625 2.9375q0 1.28125 -0.375 2.359375q-0.359375 1.0625 -0.890625 1.78125q-0.53125 0.71875 -1.109375 1.15625q-0.578125 0.4375 -1.1875 0.640625q-0.59375 0.21875 -1.140625 0.21875q-0.96875 0 -1.7031403 -0.5q-0.71875 -0.515625 -1.125 -1.546875l-0.390625 1.828125l-1.4375 0zm2.4375 -3.96875l-0.015625 0.3125q0 1.234375 0.59375 1.890625q0.59376526 0.640625 1.4843903 0.640625q0.859375 0 1.578125 -0.609375q0.734375 -0.609375 1.1875 -1.890625q0.46875 -1.28125 0.46875 -2.375q0 -1.21875 -0.59375 -1.890625q-0.578125 -0.671875 -1.4375 -0.671875q-0.90625 0 -1.65625 0.6875q-0.73439026 0.6875 -1.2343903 2.125q-0.375 1.0625 -0.375 1.78125zm14.531967 2.21875q-1.734375 1.96875 -3.5625 1.96875q-1.109375 0 -1.796875 -0.640625q-0.6875 -0.640625 -0.6875 -1.578125q0 -0.609375 0.296875 -2.09375l1.171875 -5.578125l1.65625 0l-1.296875 6.1875q-0.171875 0.765625 -0.171875 1.203125q0 0.546875 0.328125 0.859375q0.34375 0.296875 0.984375 0.296875q0.703125 0 1.359375 -0.328125q0.65625 -0.34375 1.125 -0.921875q0.484375 -0.578125 0.796875 -1.359375q0.1875 -0.5 0.453125 -1.765625l0.875 -4.171875l1.65625 0l-2.03125 9.671875l-1.515625 0l0.359375 -1.75zm4.0007324 1.75l1.765625 -8.40625l-1.484375 0l0.265625 -1.265625l1.484375 0l0.28125 -1.375q0.21875 -1.03125 0.4375 -1.484375q0.234375 -0.453125 0.75 -0.75q0.53125 -0.296875 1.4375 -0.296875q0.625 0 1.828125 0.265625l-0.296875 1.4375q-0.84375 -0.21875 -1.40625 -0.21875q-0.484375 0 -0.734375 0.25q-0.25 0.234375 -0.4375 1.125l-0.21875 1.046875l1.84375 0l-0.265625 1.265625l-1.84375 0l-1.75 8.40625l-1.65625 0zm5.1832886 0l1.765625 -8.40625l-1.484375 0l0.265625 -1.265625l1.484375 0l0.28125 -1.375q0.21875 -1.03125 0.4375 -1.484375q0.234375 -0.453125 0.75 -0.75q0.53125 -0.296875 1.4375 -0.296875q0.625 0 1.828125 0.265625l-0.296875 1.4375q-0.84375 -0.21875 -1.40625 -0.21875q-0.484375 0 -0.734375 0.25q-0.25 0.234375 -0.4375 1.125l-0.21875 1.046875l1.84375 0l-0.265625 1.265625l-1.84375 0l-1.75 8.40625l-1.65625 0z" fill-rule="nonzero"/><path fill="#000000" fill-opacity="0.0" d="m163.81627 395.2362l178.11024 0l0 53.700806l-178.11024 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#000000" d="m195.60925 418.62497l1.65625 0.171875q-0.625 1.8125 -1.765625 2.703125q-1.140625 0.875 -2.609375 0.875q-1.578125 0 -2.5625 -1.015625q-0.96875 -1.03125 -0.96875 -2.859375q0 -1.578125 0.625 -3.109375q0.640625 -1.53125 1.796875 -2.328125q1.171875 -0.796875 2.6875 -0.796875q1.546875 0 2.453125 0.875q0.921875 0.875 0.921875 2.328125l-1.625 0.109375q-0.015625 -0.921875 -0.546875 -1.4375q-0.515625 -0.515625 -1.359375 -0.515625q-1.0 0 -1.734375 0.625q-0.71875 0.625 -1.140625 1.90625q-0.40625 1.28125 -0.40625 2.46875q0 1.234375 0.546875 1.859375q0.546875 0.609375 1.34375 0.609375q0.796875 0 1.53125 -0.609375q0.734375 -0.609375 1.15625 -1.859375zm2.9375 -0.140625q0 -2.828125 1.671875 -4.6875q1.375 -1.53125 3.609375 -1.53125q1.75 0 2.8125 1.09375q1.078125 1.09375 1.078125 2.953125q0 1.65625 -0.671875 3.09375q-0.671875 1.4375 -1.921875 2.203125q-1.25 0.765625 -2.625 0.765625q-1.125 0 -2.046875 -0.484375q-0.921875 -0.484375 -1.421875 -1.359375q-0.484375 -0.890625 -0.484375 -2.046875zm1.65625 -0.15625q0 1.359375 0.65625 2.0625q0.65625 0.703125 1.65625 0.703125q0.53125 0 1.046875 -0.203125q0.53125 -0.21875 0.96875 -0.65625q0.453125 -0.4375 0.765625 -1.0q0.3125 -0.5625 0.5 -1.203125q0.28125 -0.90625 0.28125 -1.734375q0 -1.3125 -0.65625 -2.03125q-0.65625 -0.734375 -1.65625 -0.734375q-0.78125 0 -1.421875 0.375q-0.625 0.375 -1.140625 1.09375q-0.515625 0.703125 -0.765625 1.640625q-0.234375 0.9375 -0.234375 1.6875zm8.438217 3.828125l2.015625 -9.671875l1.5 0l-0.359375 1.6875q0.96875 -1.0 1.8125 -1.453125q0.859375 -0.453125 1.734375 -0.453125q1.1875 0 1.84375 0.640625q0.671875 0.625 0.671875 1.703125q0 0.53125 -0.234375 1.6875l-1.234375 5.859375l-1.640625 0l1.28125 -6.125q0.1875 -0.890625 0.1875 -1.328125q0 -0.484375 -0.328125 -0.78125q-0.328125 -0.296875 -0.953125 -0.296875q-1.28125 0 -2.265625 0.90625q-0.984375 0.90625 -1.453125 3.125l-0.9375 4.5l-1.640625 0zm14.219467 -1.34375l-0.265625 1.359375q-0.59375 0.140625 -1.15625 0.140625q-0.984375 0 -1.5625 -0.46875q-0.4375 -0.375 -0.4375 -1.0q0 -0.3125 0.234375 -1.46875l1.171875 -5.625l-1.296875 0l0.265625 -1.265625l1.296875 0l0.5 -2.375l1.890625 -1.140625l-0.734375 3.515625l1.625 0l-0.28125 1.265625l-1.609375 0l-1.125 5.359375q-0.203125 1.015625 -0.203125 1.21875q0 0.28125 0.15625 0.4375q0.171875 0.15625 0.5625 0.15625q0.546875 0 0.96875 -0.109375zm8.433304 -1.9375l1.609375 0.15625q-0.34375 1.1875 -1.59375 2.265625q-1.234375 1.078125 -2.96875 1.078125q-1.0625 0 -1.96875 -0.5q-0.890625 -0.5 -1.359375 -1.4375q-0.46875 -0.953125 -0.46875 -2.15625q0 -1.59375 0.734375 -3.078125q0.734375 -1.484375 1.890625 -2.203125q1.171875 -0.734375 2.53125 -0.734375q1.734375 0 2.765625 1.078125q1.03125 1.0625 1.03125 2.921875q0 0.71875 -0.125 1.46875l-7.125 0q-0.046875 0.28125 -0.046875 0.5q0 1.359375 0.625 2.078125q0.625 0.71875 1.53125 0.71875q0.84375 0 1.65625 -0.546875q0.828125 -0.5625 1.28125 -1.609375zm-4.78125 -2.40625l5.421875 0q0.015625 -0.25 0.015625 -0.359375q0 -1.234375 -0.625 -1.890625q-0.625 -0.671875 -1.59375 -0.671875q-1.0625 0 -1.9375 0.734375q-0.859375 0.71875 -1.28125 2.1875zm7.406967 5.6875l4.21875 -4.90625l-2.421875 -4.765625l1.828125 0l0.8125 1.71875q0.453125 0.96875 0.828125 1.84375l2.78125 -3.5625l2.015625 0l-4.0625 4.890625l2.4375 4.78125l-1.8125 0l-0.96875 -1.96875q-0.3125 -0.625 -0.703125 -1.5625l-2.875 3.53125l-2.078125 0zm13.828125 -1.34375l-0.265625 1.359375q-0.59375 0.140625 -1.15625 0.140625q-0.984375 0 -1.5625 -0.46875q-0.4375 -0.375 -0.4375 -1.0q0 -0.3125 0.234375 -1.46875l1.171875 -5.625l-1.296875 0l0.265625 -1.265625l1.296875 0l0.5 -2.375l1.890625 -1.140625l-0.734375 3.515625l1.625 0l-0.28125 1.265625l-1.609375 0l-1.125 5.359375q-0.203125 1.015625 -0.203125 1.21875q0 0.28125 0.15625 0.4375q0.171875 0.15625 0.5625 0.15625q0.546875 0 0.96875 -0.109375zm11.210358 -0.8125l0 -3.671875l-3.640625 0l0 -1.515625l3.640625 0l0 -3.640625l1.546875 0l0 3.640625l3.640625 0l0 1.515625l-3.640625 0l0 3.671875l-1.546875 0zm11.390778 2.15625l2.78125 -13.359375l1.65625 0l-1.0 4.78125q0.78125 -0.71875 1.421875 -1.015625q0.640625 -0.296875 1.328125 -0.296875q1.359375 0 2.265625 1.015625q0.90625 1.0 0.90625 2.9375q0 1.28125 -0.375 2.359375q-0.359375 1.0625 -0.890625 1.78125q-0.53125 0.71875 -1.109375 1.15625q-0.578125 0.4375 -1.1875 0.640625q-0.59375 0.21875 -1.140625 0.21875q-0.96875 0 -1.703125 -0.5q-0.71875 -0.515625 -1.125 -1.546875l-0.390625 1.828125l-1.4375 0zm2.4375 -3.96875l-0.015625 0.3125q0 1.234375 0.59375 1.890625q0.59375 0.640625 1.484375 0.640625q0.859375 0 1.578125 -0.609375q0.734375 -0.609375 1.1875 -1.890625q0.46875 -1.28125 0.46875 -2.375q0 -1.21875 -0.59375 -1.890625q-0.578125 -0.671875 -1.4375 -0.671875q-0.90625 0 -1.65625 0.6875q-0.734375 0.6875 -1.234375 2.125q-0.375 1.0625 -0.375 1.78125zm14.531952 2.21875q-1.734375 1.96875 -3.5625 1.96875q-1.109375 0 -1.796875 -0.640625q-0.6875 -0.640625 -0.6875 -1.578125q0 -0.609375 0.296875 -2.09375l1.171875 -5.578125l1.65625 0l-1.296875 6.1875q-0.171875 0.765625 -0.171875 1.203125q0 0.546875 0.328125 0.859375q0.34375 0.296875 0.984375 0.296875q0.703125 0 1.359375 -0.328125q0.65625 -0.34375 1.125 -0.921875q0.484375 -0.578125 0.796875 -1.359375q0.1875 -0.5 0.453125 -1.765625l0.875 -4.171875l1.65625 0l-2.03125 9.671875l-1.515625 0l0.359375 -1.75zm4.0007324 1.75l1.765625 -8.40625l-1.484375 0l0.265625 -1.265625l1.484375 0l0.28125 -1.375q0.21875 -1.03125 0.4375 -1.484375q0.234375 -0.453125 0.75 -0.75q0.53125 -0.296875 1.4375 -0.296875q0.625 0 1.828125 0.265625l-0.296875 1.4375q-0.84375 -0.21875 -1.40625 -0.21875q-0.484375 0 -0.734375 0.25q-0.25 0.234375 -0.4375 1.125l-0.21875 1.046875l1.84375 0l-0.265625 1.265625l-1.84375 0l-1.75 8.40625l-1.65625 0zm5.1832886 0l1.765625 -8.40625l-1.484375 0l0.265625 -1.265625l1.484375 0l0.28125 -1.375q0.21875 -1.03125 0.4375 -1.484375q0.234375 -0.453125 0.75 -0.75q0.53125 -0.296875 1.4375 -0.296875q0.625 0 1.828125 0.265625l-0.296875 1.4375q-0.84375 -0.21875 -1.40625 -0.21875q-0.484375 0 -0.734375 0.25q-0.25 0.234375 -0.4375 1.125l-0.21875 1.046875l1.84375 0l-0.265625 1.265625l-1.84375 0l-1.75 8.40625l-1.65625 0zm12.058319 -3.28125l1.609375 0.15625q-0.34375 1.1875 -1.59375 2.265625q-1.234375 1.078125 -2.96875 1.078125q-1.0625 0 -1.96875 -0.5q-0.890625 -0.5 -1.359375 -1.4375q-0.46875 -0.953125 -0.46875 -2.15625q0 -1.59375 0.734375 -3.078125q0.734375 -1.484375 1.890625 -2.203125q1.171875 -0.734375 2.53125 -0.734375q1.734375 0 2.765625 1.078125q1.03125 1.0625 1.03125 2.921875q0 0.71875 -0.125 1.46875l-7.125 0q-0.046875 0.28125 -0.046875 0.5q0 1.359375 0.625 2.078125q0.625 0.71875 1.53125 0.71875q0.84375 0 1.65625 -0.546875q0.828125 -0.5625 1.28125 -1.609375zm-4.78125 -2.40625l5.421875 0q0.015625 -0.25 0.015625 -0.359375q0 -1.234375 -0.625 -1.890625q-0.625 -0.671875 -1.59375 -0.671875q-1.0625 0 -1.9375 0.734375q-0.859375 0.71875 -1.28125 2.1875zm8.063202 5.6875l2.015625 -9.671875l1.453125 0l-0.40625 1.96875q0.75 -1.109375 1.453125 -1.640625q0.71875 -0.546875 1.46875 -0.546875q0.5 0 1.21875 0.359375l-0.671875 1.53125q-0.4375 -0.3125 -0.9375 -0.3125q-0.875 0 -1.78125 0.96875q-0.90625 0.953125 -1.4375 3.46875l-0.8125 3.875l-1.5625 0z" fill-rule="nonzero"/><path fill="#cfe2f3" d="m0 165.96588l118.74016 0l0 40.25197l-118.74016 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path stroke="#000000" stroke-width="1.0" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-linecap="butt" d="m0 165.96588l118.74016 0l0 40.25197l-118.74016 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#000000" d="m23.145836 190.12123l1.625 -0.25q0.125 0.96875 0.75 1.5q0.625 0.515625 1.75 0.515625q1.125 0 1.671875 -0.453125q0.546875 -0.46875 0.546875 -1.09375q0 -0.546875 -0.484375 -0.875q-0.328125 -0.21875 -1.671875 -0.546875q-1.8125 -0.46875 -2.515625 -0.796875q-0.6875 -0.328125 -1.046875 -0.90625q-0.359375 -0.59375 -0.359375 -1.3125q0 -0.640625 0.296875 -1.1875q0.296875 -0.5625 0.8125 -0.921875q0.375 -0.28125 1.03125 -0.46875q0.671875 -0.203125 1.421875 -0.203125q1.140625 0 2.0 0.328125q0.859375 0.328125 1.265625 0.890625q0.421875 0.5625 0.578125 1.5l-1.609375 0.21875q-0.109375 -0.75 -0.640625 -1.171875q-0.515625 -0.421875 -1.46875 -0.421875q-1.140625 0 -1.625 0.375q-0.46875 0.375 -0.46875 0.875q0 0.3125 0.1875 0.578125q0.203125 0.265625 0.640625 0.4375q0.234375 0.09375 1.4375 0.421875q1.75 0.453125 2.4375 0.75q0.6875 0.296875 1.078125 0.859375q0.390625 0.5625 0.390625 1.40625q0 0.828125 -0.484375 1.546875q-0.46875 0.71875 -1.375 1.125q-0.90625 0.390625 -2.046875 0.390625q-1.875 0 -2.875 -0.78125q-0.984375 -0.78125 -1.25 -2.328125zm13.5625 1.421875l0.234375 1.453125q-0.6875 0.140625 -1.234375 0.140625q-0.890625 0 -1.390625 -0.28125q-0.484375 -0.28125 -0.6875 -0.734375q-0.203125 -0.46875 -0.203125 -1.9375l0 -5.578125l-1.203125 0l0 -1.265625l1.203125 0l0 -2.390625l1.625 -0.984375l0 3.375l1.65625 0l0 1.265625l-1.65625 0l0 5.671875q0 0.6875 0.078125 0.890625q0.09375 0.203125 0.28125 0.328125q0.203125 0.109375 0.578125 0.109375q0.265625 0 0.71875 -0.0625zm1.5895538 1.46875l0 -9.671875l1.46875 0l0 1.46875q0.5625 -1.03125 1.03125 -1.359375q0.484375 -0.328125 1.0625 -0.328125q0.828125 0 1.6875 0.53125l-0.5625 1.515625q-0.609375 -0.359375 -1.203125 -0.359375q-0.546875 0 -0.96875 0.328125q-0.421875 0.328125 -0.609375 0.890625q-0.28125 0.875 -0.28125 1.921875l0 5.0625l-1.625 0zm6.228302 3.703125l0 -13.375l1.484375 0l0 1.25q0.53125 -0.734375 1.1875 -1.09375q0.671875 -0.375 1.625 -0.375q1.234375 0 2.171875 0.640625q0.953125 0.625 1.4375 1.796875q0.484375 1.15625 0.484375 2.546875q0 1.484375 -0.53125 2.671875q-0.53125 1.1875 -1.546875 1.828125q-1.015625 0.625 -2.140625 0.625q-0.8125 0 -1.46875 -0.34375q-0.65625 -0.34375 -1.0625 -0.875l0 4.703125l-1.640625 0zm1.484375 -8.484375q0 1.859375 0.75 2.765625q0.765625 0.890625 1.828125 0.890625q1.09375 0 1.875 -0.921875q0.78125 -0.9375 0.78125 -2.875q0 -1.84375 -0.765625 -2.765625q-0.75 -0.921875 -1.8125 -0.921875q-1.046875 0 -1.859375 0.984375q-0.796875 0.96875 -0.796875 2.84375zm15.203842 3.59375q-0.921875 0.765625 -1.765625 1.09375q-0.828125 0.3125 -1.796875 0.3125q-1.59375 0 -2.453125 -0.78125q-0.859375 -0.78125 -0.859375 -1.984375q0 -0.71875 0.328125 -1.296875q0.328125 -0.59375 0.84375 -0.9375q0.53125 -0.359375 1.1875 -0.546875q0.46875 -0.125 1.453125 -0.25q1.984375 -0.234375 2.921875 -0.5625q0.015625 -0.34375 0.015625 -0.421875q0 -1.0 -0.46875 -1.421875q-0.625 -0.546875 -1.875 -0.546875q-1.15625 0 -1.703125 0.40625q-0.546875 0.40625 -0.8125 1.421875l-1.609375 -0.21875q0.21875 -1.015625 0.71875 -1.640625q0.5 -0.640625 1.453125 -0.984375q0.953125 -0.34375 2.1875 -0.34375q1.25 0 2.015625 0.296875q0.78125 0.28125 1.140625 0.734375q0.375 0.4375 0.515625 1.109375q0.078125 0.421875 0.078125 1.515625l0 2.1875q0 2.28125 0.109375 2.890625q0.109375 0.59375 0.40625 1.15625l-1.703125 0q-0.265625 -0.515625 -0.328125 -1.1875zm-0.140625 -3.671875q-0.890625 0.375 -2.671875 0.625q-1.015625 0.140625 -1.4375 0.328125q-0.421875 0.1875 -0.65625 0.53125q-0.21875 0.34375 -0.21875 0.78125q0 0.65625 0.5 1.09375q0.5 0.4375 1.453125 0.4375q0.9375 0 1.671875 -0.40625q0.75 -0.421875 1.09375 -1.140625q0.265625 -0.5625 0.265625 -1.640625l0 -0.609375zm4.188217 4.859375l0 -9.671875l1.46875 0l0 1.46875q0.5625 -1.03125 1.03125 -1.359375q0.484375 -0.328125 1.0625 -0.328125q0.828125 0 1.6875 0.53125l-0.5625 1.515625q-0.609375 -0.359375 -1.203125 -0.359375q-0.546875 0 -0.96875 0.328125q-0.421875 0.328125 -0.609375 0.890625q-0.28125 0.875 -0.28125 1.921875l0 5.0625l-1.625 0zm5.572052 -2.890625l1.625 -0.25q0.125 0.96875 0.75 1.5q0.625 0.515625 1.75 0.515625q1.125 0 1.671875 -0.453125q0.546875 -0.46875 0.546875 -1.09375q0 -0.546875 -0.484375 -0.875q-0.328125 -0.21875 -1.671875 -0.546875q-1.8125 -0.46875 -2.515625 -0.796875q-0.6875 -0.328125 -1.046875 -0.90625q-0.359375 -0.59375 -0.359375 -1.3125q0 -0.640625 0.296875 -1.1875q0.296875 -0.5625 0.8125 -0.921875q0.375 -0.28125 1.03125 -0.46875q0.671875 -0.203125 1.421875 -0.203125q1.140625 0 2.0 0.328125q0.859375 0.328125 1.265625 0.890625q0.421875 0.5625 0.578125 1.5l-1.609375 0.21875q-0.109375 -0.75 -0.640625 -1.171875q-0.515625 -0.421875 -1.46875 -0.421875q-1.140625 0 -1.625 0.375q-0.46875 0.375 -0.46875 0.875q0 0.3125 0.1875 0.578125q0.203125 0.265625 0.640625 0.4375q0.234375 0.09375 1.4375 0.421875q1.75 0.453125 2.4375 0.75q0.6875 0.296875 1.078125 0.859375q0.390625 0.5625 0.390625 1.40625q0 0.828125 -0.484375 1.546875q-0.46875 0.71875 -1.375 1.125q-0.90625 0.390625 -2.046875 0.390625q-1.875 0 -2.875 -0.78125q-0.984375 -0.78125 -1.25 -2.328125zm16.609375 -0.21875l1.6875 0.203125q-0.40625 1.484375 -1.484375 2.3125q-1.078125 0.8125 -2.765625 0.8125q-2.125 0 -3.375 -1.296875q-1.234375 -1.3125 -1.234375 -3.671875q0 -2.453125 1.25 -3.796875q1.265625 -1.34375 3.265625 -1.34375q1.9375 0 3.15625 1.328125q1.234375 1.3125 1.234375 3.703125q0 0.15625 0 0.4375l-7.21875 0q0.09375 1.59375 0.90625 2.453125q0.8125 0.84375 2.015625 0.84375q0.90625 0 1.546875 -0.46875q0.640625 -0.484375 1.015625 -1.515625zm-5.390625 -2.65625l5.40625 0q-0.109375 -1.21875 -0.625 -1.828125q-0.78125 -0.953125 -2.03125 -0.953125q-1.125 0 -1.90625 0.765625q-0.765625 0.75 -0.84375 2.015625zm9.125717 5.765625l0 -9.671875l1.46875 0l0 1.46875q0.5625 -1.03125 1.03125 -1.359375q0.484375 -0.328125 1.0625 -0.328125q0.828125 0 1.6875 0.53125l-0.5625 1.515625q-0.609375 -0.359375 -1.203125 -0.359375q-0.546875 0 -0.96875 0.328125q-0.421875 0.328125 -0.609375 0.890625q-0.28125 0.875 -0.28125 1.921875l0 5.0625l-1.625 0z" fill-rule="nonzero"/></g></svg>
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/tls-offload-reorder-bad.svg b/Documentation/networking/tls-offload-reorder-bad.svg
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d107aaf0f71e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/tls-offload-reorder-bad.svg
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+<svg version="1.1" viewBox="0.0 0.0 672.0 68.0" fill="none" stroke="none" stroke-linecap="square" stroke-miterlimit="10" xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"><clipPath id="p.0"><path d="m0 0l960.0 0l0 720.0l-960.0 0l0 -720.0z" clip-rule="nonzero"/></clipPath><g clip-path="url(#p.0)"><path fill="#000000" fill-opacity="0.0" d="m0 0l960.0 0l0 720.0l-960.0 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#b6d7a8" d="m0 24.999102l99.02362 0l0 42.04725l-99.02362 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path stroke="#000000" stroke-width="1.0" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-linecap="butt" d="m0 24.999102l99.02362 0l0 42.04725l-99.02362 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#000000" d="m15.953125 52.942722l-1.640625 0l0 -10.453125q-0.59375 0.5625 -1.5625 1.140625q-0.953125 0.5625 -1.71875 0.84375l0 -1.59375q1.375 -0.640625 2.40625 -1.5625q1.03125 -0.921875 1.453125 -1.78125l1.0625 0l0 13.40625z" fill-rule="nonzero"/><path fill="#c9daf8" d="m340.69897 24.999102l99.02362 0l0 42.04725l-99.02362 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path stroke="#000000" stroke-width="1.0" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-linecap="butt" d="m340.69897 24.999102l99.02362 0l0 42.04725l-99.02362 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#000000" d="m355.73022 52.942722l0 -3.203125l-5.796875 0l0 -1.5l6.09375 -8.65625l1.34375 0l0 8.65625l1.796875 0l0 1.5l-1.796875 0l0 3.203125l-1.640625 0zm0 -4.703125l0 -6.015625l-4.1875 6.015625l4.1875 0z" fill-rule="nonzero"/><path fill="#cfe2f3" d="m225.37527 24.999102l99.02362 0l0 42.04725l-99.02362 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path stroke="#000000" stroke-width="1.0" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-linecap="butt" d="m225.37527 24.999102l99.02362 0l0 42.04725l-99.02362 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#000000" d="m235.15652 49.411472l1.640625 -0.21875q0.28125 1.40625 0.953125 2.015625q0.6875 0.609375 1.65625 0.609375q1.15625 0 1.953125 -0.796875q0.796875 -0.796875 0.796875 -1.984375q0 -1.125 -0.734375 -1.859375q-0.734375 -0.734375 -1.875 -0.734375q-0.46875 0 -1.15625 0.171875l0.1875 -1.4375q0.15625 0.015625 0.265625 0.015625q1.046875 0 1.875 -0.546875q0.84375 -0.546875 0.84375 -1.671875q0 -0.90625 -0.609375 -1.5q-0.609375 -0.59375 -1.578125 -0.59375q-0.953125 0 -1.59375 0.609375q-0.640625 0.59375 -0.8125 1.796875l-1.640625 -0.296875q0.296875 -1.640625 1.359375 -2.546875q1.0625 -0.90625 2.65625 -0.90625q1.09375 0 2.0 0.46875q0.921875 0.46875 1.40625 1.28125q0.5 0.8125 0.5 1.71875q0 0.859375 -0.46875 1.578125q-0.46875 0.703125 -1.375 1.125q1.1875 0.28125 1.84375 1.140625q0.65625 0.859375 0.65625 2.15625q0 1.734375 -1.28125 2.953125q-1.265625 1.21875 -3.21875 1.21875q-1.765625 0 -2.921875 -1.046875q-1.15625 -1.046875 -1.328125 -2.71875z" fill-rule="nonzero"/><path fill="#cfe2f3" d="m572.3295 24.999102l99.02362 0l0 42.04725l-99.02362 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path stroke="#000000" stroke-width="1.0" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-linecap="butt" d="m572.3295 24.999102l99.02362 0l0 42.04725l-99.02362 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#000000" d="m590.72015 51.364597l0 1.578125l-8.828125 0q-0.015625 -0.59375 0.1875 -1.140625q0.34375 -0.90625 1.078125 -1.78125q0.75 -0.875 2.15625 -2.015625q2.171875 -1.78125 2.9375 -2.828125q0.765625 -1.046875 0.765625 -1.96875q0 -0.984375 -0.703125 -1.640625q-0.6875 -0.671875 -1.8125 -0.671875q-1.1875 0 -1.90625 0.71875q-0.703125 0.703125 -0.703125 1.953125l-1.6875 -0.171875q0.171875 -1.890625 1.296875 -2.875q1.140625 -0.984375 3.03125 -0.984375q1.921875 0 3.046875 1.0625q1.125 1.0625 1.125 2.640625q0 0.796875 -0.328125 1.578125q-0.328125 0.78125 -1.09375 1.640625q-0.75 0.84375 -2.53125 2.34375q-1.46875 1.234375 -1.890625 1.6875q-0.421875 0.4375 -0.6875 0.875l6.546875 0z" fill-rule="nonzero"/><path fill="#e06666" d="m615.56793 24.999102l6.5512085 0l0 42.04725l-6.5512085 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path stroke="#000000" stroke-width="1.0" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-linecap="butt" d="m615.56793 24.999102l6.5512085 0l0 42.04725l-6.5512085 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#c9daf8" d="m456.51425 24.999102l99.02365 0l0 42.04725l-99.02365 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path stroke="#000000" stroke-width="1.0" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-linecap="butt" d="m456.51425 24.999102l99.02365 0l0 42.04725l-99.02365 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#000000" d="m466.2955 49.442722l1.71875 -0.140625q0.1875 1.25 0.875 1.890625q0.703125 0.625 1.6875 0.625q1.1875 0 2.0 -0.890625q0.828125 -0.890625 0.828125 -2.359375q0 -1.40625 -0.796875 -2.21875q-0.78125 -0.8125 -2.0625 -0.8125q-0.78125 0 -1.421875 0.359375q-0.640625 0.359375 -1.0 0.9375l-1.546875 -0.203125l1.296875 -6.859375l6.640625 0l0 1.5625l-5.328125 0l-0.71875 3.59375q1.203125 -0.84375 2.515625 -0.84375q1.75 0 2.953125 1.21875q1.203125 1.203125 1.203125 3.109375q0 1.8125 -1.046875 3.140625q-1.296875 1.625 -3.515625 1.625q-1.8125 0 -2.96875 -1.015625q-1.15625 -1.03125 -1.3125 -2.71875z" fill-rule="nonzero"/><path fill="#e06666" d="m391.1985 24.999102l6.551178 0l0 42.04725l-6.551178 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path stroke="#000000" stroke-width="1.0" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-linecap="butt" d="m391.1985 24.999102l6.551178 0l0 42.04725l-6.551178 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#000000" fill-opacity="0.0" d="m114.43843 24.999102l99.02362 0l0 42.04725l-99.02362 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path stroke="#000000" stroke-width="1.0" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-linecap="butt" stroke-dasharray="4.0,3.0" d="m114.43843 24.999102l99.02362 0l0 42.04725l-99.02362 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#000000" fill-opacity="0.0" d="m163.95024 24.999102c0 -12.5 114.47246 -25.007874 228.9449 -25.0c114.47241 0.007874016 228.94489 12.531496 228.94489 25.062992" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path stroke="#000000" stroke-width="2.0" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-linecap="butt" d="m163.95024 24.9991c0 -12.499998 114.47246 -25.007872 228.9449 -24.999998c57.236206 0.003937008 114.47244 3.136811 157.3996 7.835138c21.463562 2.3491635 39.349915 5.0896897 51.8703 8.026144c3.130127 0.7341137 5.9248657 1.4804726 8.356262 2.236023c0.30395508 0.09444237 0.6022339 0.1890316 0.89471436 0.28375435l0.37457275 0.12388611" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#000000" stroke="#000000" stroke-width="2.0" stroke-linecap="butt" d="m609.98517 21.270555l9.406311 2.1936665l-5.7955933 -7.7266836z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#e06666" d="m47.56793 24.999102l6.551182 0l0 42.04725l-6.551182 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path stroke="#000000" stroke-width="1.0" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-linecap="butt" d="m47.56793 24.999102l6.551182 0l0 42.04725l-6.551182 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/></g></svg>
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/tls-offload-reorder-good.svg b/Documentation/networking/tls-offload-reorder-good.svg
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..10e17d91f70c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/tls-offload-reorder-good.svg
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+<svg version="1.1" viewBox="0.0 0.0 672.0 68.0" fill="none" stroke="none" stroke-linecap="square" stroke-miterlimit="10" xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"><clipPath id="p.0"><path d="m0 0l960.0 0l0 720.0l-960.0 0l0 -720.0z" clip-rule="nonzero"/></clipPath><g clip-path="url(#p.0)"><path fill="#000000" fill-opacity="0.0" d="m0 0l960.0 0l0 720.0l-960.0 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#b6d7a8" d="m0 24.999102l99.02362 0l0 42.04725l-99.02362 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path stroke="#000000" stroke-width="1.0" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-linecap="butt" d="m0 24.999102l99.02362 0l0 42.04725l-99.02362 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#000000" d="m15.953125 52.942722l-1.640625 0l0 -10.453125q-0.59375 0.5625 -1.5625 1.140625q-0.953125 0.5625 -1.71875 0.84375l0 -1.59375q1.375 -0.640625 2.40625 -1.5625q1.03125 -0.921875 1.453125 -1.78125l1.0625 0l0 13.40625z" fill-rule="nonzero"/><path fill="#b6d7a8" d="m340.69897 24.999102l99.02362 0l0 42.04725l-99.02362 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path stroke="#000000" stroke-width="1.0" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-linecap="butt" d="m340.69897 24.999102l99.02362 0l0 42.04725l-99.02362 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#000000" d="m355.73022 52.942722l0 -3.203125l-5.796875 0l0 -1.5l6.09375 -8.65625l1.34375 0l0 8.65625l1.796875 0l0 1.5l-1.796875 0l0 3.203125l-1.640625 0zm0 -4.703125l0 -6.015625l-4.1875 6.015625l4.1875 0z" fill-rule="nonzero"/><path fill="#cfe2f3" d="m225.37527 24.999102l99.02362 0l0 42.04725l-99.02362 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path stroke="#000000" stroke-width="1.0" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-linecap="butt" d="m225.37527 24.999102l99.02362 0l0 42.04725l-99.02362 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#000000" d="m235.15652 49.411472l1.640625 -0.21875q0.28125 1.40625 0.953125 2.015625q0.6875 0.609375 1.65625 0.609375q1.15625 0 1.953125 -0.796875q0.796875 -0.796875 0.796875 -1.984375q0 -1.125 -0.734375 -1.859375q-0.734375 -0.734375 -1.875 -0.734375q-0.46875 0 -1.15625 0.171875l0.1875 -1.4375q0.15625 0.015625 0.265625 0.015625q1.046875 0 1.875 -0.546875q0.84375 -0.546875 0.84375 -1.671875q0 -0.90625 -0.609375 -1.5q-0.609375 -0.59375 -1.578125 -0.59375q-0.953125 0 -1.59375 0.609375q-0.640625 0.59375 -0.8125 1.796875l-1.640625 -0.296875q0.296875 -1.640625 1.359375 -2.546875q1.0625 -0.90625 2.65625 -0.90625q1.09375 0 2.0 0.46875q0.921875 0.46875 1.40625 1.28125q0.5 0.8125 0.5 1.71875q0 0.859375 -0.46875 1.578125q-0.46875 0.703125 -1.375 1.125q1.1875 0.28125 1.84375 1.140625q0.65625 0.859375 0.65625 2.15625q0 1.734375 -1.28125 2.953125q-1.265625 1.21875 -3.21875 1.21875q-1.765625 0 -2.921875 -1.046875q-1.15625 -1.046875 -1.328125 -2.71875z" fill-rule="nonzero"/><path fill="#e06666" d="m271.56793 24.999102l6.551178 0l0 42.04725l-6.551178 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path stroke="#000000" stroke-width="1.0" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-linecap="butt" d="m271.56793 24.999102l6.551178 0l0 42.04725l-6.551178 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#cfe2f3" d="m572.3295 24.999102l99.02362 0l0 42.04725l-99.02362 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path stroke="#000000" stroke-width="1.0" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-linecap="butt" d="m572.3295 24.999102l99.02362 0l0 42.04725l-99.02362 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#000000" d="m590.72015 51.364597l0 1.578125l-8.828125 0q-0.015625 -0.59375 0.1875 -1.140625q0.34375 -0.90625 1.078125 -1.78125q0.75 -0.875 2.15625 -2.015625q2.171875 -1.78125 2.9375 -2.828125q0.765625 -1.046875 0.765625 -1.96875q0 -0.984375 -0.703125 -1.640625q-0.6875 -0.671875 -1.8125 -0.671875q-1.1875 0 -1.90625 0.71875q-0.703125 0.703125 -0.703125 1.953125l-1.6875 -0.171875q0.171875 -1.890625 1.296875 -2.875q1.140625 -0.984375 3.03125 -0.984375q1.921875 0 3.046875 1.0625q1.125 1.0625 1.125 2.640625q0 0.796875 -0.328125 1.578125q-0.328125 0.78125 -1.09375 1.640625q-0.75 0.84375 -2.53125 2.34375q-1.46875 1.234375 -1.890625 1.6875q-0.421875 0.4375 -0.6875 0.875l6.546875 0z" fill-rule="nonzero"/><path fill="#b6d7a8" d="m456.51425 24.999102l99.02365 0l0 42.04725l-99.02365 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path stroke="#000000" stroke-width="1.0" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-linecap="butt" d="m456.51425 24.999102l99.02365 0l0 42.04725l-99.02365 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#000000" d="m466.2955 49.442722l1.71875 -0.140625q0.1875 1.25 0.875 1.890625q0.703125 0.625 1.6875 0.625q1.1875 0 2.0 -0.890625q0.828125 -0.890625 0.828125 -2.359375q0 -1.40625 -0.796875 -2.21875q-0.78125 -0.8125 -2.0625 -0.8125q-0.78125 0 -1.421875 0.359375q-0.640625 0.359375 -1.0 0.9375l-1.546875 -0.203125l1.296875 -6.859375l6.640625 0l0 1.5625l-5.328125 0l-0.71875 3.59375q1.203125 -0.84375 2.515625 -0.84375q1.75 0 2.953125 1.21875q1.203125 1.203125 1.203125 3.109375q0 1.8125 -1.046875 3.140625q-1.296875 1.625 -3.515625 1.625q-1.8125 0 -2.96875 -1.015625q-1.15625 -1.03125 -1.3125 -2.71875z" fill-rule="nonzero"/><path fill="#e06666" d="m503.1985 24.999102l6.551178 0l0 42.04725l-6.551178 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path stroke="#000000" stroke-width="1.0" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-linecap="butt" d="m503.1985 24.999102l6.551178 0l0 42.04725l-6.551178 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#000000" fill-opacity="0.0" d="m114.43843 24.999102l99.02362 0l0 42.04725l-99.02362 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path stroke="#000000" stroke-width="1.0" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-linecap="butt" stroke-dasharray="4.0,3.0" d="m114.43843 24.999102l99.02362 0l0 42.04725l-99.02362 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#000000" fill-opacity="0.0" d="m163.95024 24.999102c0 -12.5 114.47246 -25.007874 228.9449 -25.0c114.47241 0.007874016 228.94489 12.531496 228.94489 25.062992" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path stroke="#000000" stroke-width="2.0" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-linecap="butt" d="m163.95024 24.9991c0 -12.499998 114.47246 -25.007872 228.9449 -24.999998c57.236206 0.003937008 114.47244 3.136811 157.3996 7.835138c21.463562 2.3491635 39.349915 5.0896897 51.8703 8.026144c3.130127 0.7341137 5.9248657 1.4804726 8.356262 2.236023c0.30395508 0.09444237 0.6022339 0.1890316 0.89471436 0.28375435l0.37457275 0.12388611" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#000000" stroke="#000000" stroke-width="2.0" stroke-linecap="butt" d="m609.98517 21.270555l9.406311 2.1936665l-5.7955933 -7.7266836z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path fill="#e06666" d="m47.56793 24.999102l6.551182 0l0 42.04725l-6.551182 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/><path stroke="#000000" stroke-width="1.0" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-linecap="butt" d="m47.56793 24.999102l6.551182 0l0 42.04725l-6.551182 0z" fill-rule="evenodd"/></g></svg>
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/tls-offload.rst b/Documentation/networking/tls-offload.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..cb85af559dff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/tls-offload.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,482 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause)
+
+==================
+Kernel TLS offload
+==================
+
+Kernel TLS operation
+====================
+
+Linux kernel provides TLS connection offload infrastructure. Once a TCP
+connection is in ``ESTABLISHED`` state user space can enable the TLS Upper
+Layer Protocol (ULP) and install the cryptographic connection state.
+For details regarding the user-facing interface refer to the TLS
+documentation in :ref:`Documentation/networking/tls.rst <kernel_tls>`.
+
+``ktls`` can operate in three modes:
+
+ * Software crypto mode (``TLS_SW``) - CPU handles the cryptography.
+   In most basic cases only crypto operations synchronous with the CPU
+   can be used, but depending on calling context CPU may utilize
+   asynchronous crypto accelerators. The use of accelerators introduces extra
+   latency on socket reads (decryption only starts when a read syscall
+   is made) and additional I/O load on the system.
+ * Packet-based NIC offload mode (``TLS_HW``) - the NIC handles crypto
+   on a packet by packet basis, provided the packets arrive in order.
+   This mode integrates best with the kernel stack and is described in detail
+   in the remaining part of this document
+   (``ethtool`` flags ``tls-hw-tx-offload`` and ``tls-hw-rx-offload``).
+ * Full TCP NIC offload mode (``TLS_HW_RECORD``) - mode of operation where
+   NIC driver and firmware replace the kernel networking stack
+   with its own TCP handling, it is not usable in production environments
+   making use of the Linux networking stack for example any firewalling
+   abilities or QoS and packet scheduling (``ethtool`` flag ``tls-hw-record``).
+
+The operation mode is selected automatically based on device configuration,
+offload opt-in or opt-out on per-connection basis is not currently supported.
+
+TX
+--
+
+At a high level user write requests are turned into a scatter list, the TLS ULP
+intercepts them, inserts record framing, performs encryption (in ``TLS_SW``
+mode) and then hands the modified scatter list to the TCP layer. From this
+point on the TCP stack proceeds as normal.
+
+In ``TLS_HW`` mode the encryption is not performed in the TLS ULP.
+Instead packets reach a device driver, the driver will mark the packets
+for crypto offload based on the socket the packet is attached to,
+and send them to the device for encryption and transmission.
+
+RX
+--
+
+On the receive side if the device handled decryption and authentication
+successfully, the driver will set the decrypted bit in the associated
+:c:type:`struct sk_buff <sk_buff>`. The packets reach the TCP stack and
+are handled normally. ``ktls`` is informed when data is queued to the socket
+and the ``strparser`` mechanism is used to delineate the records. Upon read
+request, records are retrieved from the socket and passed to decryption routine.
+If device decrypted all the segments of the record the decryption is skipped,
+otherwise software path handles decryption.
+
+.. kernel-figure::  tls-offload-layers.svg
+   :alt:	TLS offload layers
+   :align:	center
+   :figwidth:	28em
+
+   Layers of Kernel TLS stack
+
+Device configuration
+====================
+
+During driver initialization device sets the ``NETIF_F_HW_TLS_RX`` and
+``NETIF_F_HW_TLS_TX`` features and installs its
+:c:type:`struct tlsdev_ops <tlsdev_ops>`
+pointer in the :c:member:`tlsdev_ops` member of the
+:c:type:`struct net_device <net_device>`.
+
+When TLS cryptographic connection state is installed on a ``ktls`` socket
+(note that it is done twice, once for RX and once for TX direction,
+and the two are completely independent), the kernel checks if the underlying
+network device is offload-capable and attempts the offload. In case offload
+fails the connection is handled entirely in software using the same mechanism
+as if the offload was never tried.
+
+Offload request is performed via the :c:member:`tls_dev_add` callback of
+:c:type:`struct tlsdev_ops <tlsdev_ops>`:
+
+.. code-block:: c
+
+	int (*tls_dev_add)(struct net_device *netdev, struct sock *sk,
+			   enum tls_offload_ctx_dir direction,
+			   struct tls_crypto_info *crypto_info,
+			   u32 start_offload_tcp_sn);
+
+``direction`` indicates whether the cryptographic information is for
+the received or transmitted packets. Driver uses the ``sk`` parameter
+to retrieve the connection 5-tuple and socket family (IPv4 vs IPv6).
+Cryptographic information in ``crypto_info`` includes the key, iv, salt
+as well as TLS record sequence number. ``start_offload_tcp_sn`` indicates
+which TCP sequence number corresponds to the beginning of the record with
+sequence number from ``crypto_info``. The driver can add its state
+at the end of kernel structures (see :c:member:`driver_state` members
+in ``include/net/tls.h``) to avoid additional allocations and pointer
+dereferences.
+
+TX
+--
+
+After TX state is installed, the stack guarantees that the first segment
+of the stream will start exactly at the ``start_offload_tcp_sn`` sequence
+number, simplifying TCP sequence number matching.
+
+TX offload being fully initialized does not imply that all segments passing
+through the driver and which belong to the offloaded socket will be after
+the expected sequence number and will have kernel record information.
+In particular, already encrypted data may have been queued to the socket
+before installing the connection state in the kernel.
+
+RX
+--
+
+In RX direction local networking stack has little control over the segmentation,
+so the initial records' TCP sequence number may be anywhere inside the segment.
+
+Normal operation
+================
+
+At the minimum the device maintains the following state for each connection, in
+each direction:
+
+ * crypto secrets (key, iv, salt)
+ * crypto processing state (partial blocks, partial authentication tag, etc.)
+ * record metadata (sequence number, processing offset and length)
+ * expected TCP sequence number
+
+There are no guarantees on record length or record segmentation. In particular
+segments may start at any point of a record and contain any number of records.
+Assuming segments are received in order, the device should be able to perform
+crypto operations and authentication regardless of segmentation. For this
+to be possible device has to keep small amount of segment-to-segment state.
+This includes at least:
+
+ * partial headers (if a segment carried only a part of the TLS header)
+ * partial data block
+ * partial authentication tag (all data had been seen but part of the
+   authentication tag has to be written or read from the subsequent segment)
+
+Record reassembly is not necessary for TLS offload. If the packets arrive
+in order the device should be able to handle them separately and make
+forward progress.
+
+TX
+--
+
+The kernel stack performs record framing reserving space for the authentication
+tag and populating all other TLS header and tailer fields.
+
+Both the device and the driver maintain expected TCP sequence numbers
+due to the possibility of retransmissions and the lack of software fallback
+once the packet reaches the device.
+For segments passed in order, the driver marks the packets with
+a connection identifier (note that a 5-tuple lookup is insufficient to identify
+packets requiring HW offload, see the :ref:`5tuple_problems` section)
+and hands them to the device. The device identifies the packet as requiring
+TLS handling and confirms the sequence number matches its expectation.
+The device performs encryption and authentication of the record data.
+It replaces the authentication tag and TCP checksum with correct values.
+
+RX
+--
+
+Before a packet is DMAed to the host (but after NIC's embedded switching
+and packet transformation functions) the device validates the Layer 4
+checksum and performs a 5-tuple lookup to find any TLS connection the packet
+may belong to (technically a 4-tuple
+lookup is sufficient - IP addresses and TCP port numbers, as the protocol
+is always TCP). If connection is matched device confirms if the TCP sequence
+number is the expected one and proceeds to TLS handling (record delineation,
+decryption, authentication for each record in the packet). The device leaves
+the record framing unmodified, the stack takes care of record decapsulation.
+Device indicates successful handling of TLS offload in the per-packet context
+(descriptor) passed to the host.
+
+Upon reception of a TLS offloaded packet, the driver sets
+the :c:member:`decrypted` mark in :c:type:`struct sk_buff <sk_buff>`
+corresponding to the segment. Networking stack makes sure decrypted
+and non-decrypted segments do not get coalesced (e.g. by GRO or socket layer)
+and takes care of partial decryption.
+
+Resync handling
+===============
+
+In presence of packet drops or network packet reordering, the device may lose
+synchronization with the TLS stream, and require a resync with the kernel's
+TCP stack.
+
+Note that resync is only attempted for connections which were successfully
+added to the device table and are in TLS_HW mode. For example,
+if the table was full when cryptographic state was installed in the kernel,
+such connection will never get offloaded. Therefore the resync request
+does not carry any cryptographic connection state.
+
+TX
+--
+
+Segments transmitted from an offloaded socket can get out of sync
+in similar ways to the receive side-retransmissions - local drops
+are possible, though network reorders are not.
+
+Whenever an out of order segment is transmitted the driver provides
+the device with enough information to perform cryptographic operations.
+This means most likely that the part of the record preceding the current
+segment has to be passed to the device as part of the packet context,
+together with its TCP sequence number and TLS record number. The device
+can then initialize its crypto state, process and discard the preceding
+data (to be able to insert the authentication tag) and move onto handling
+the actual packet.
+
+In this mode depending on the implementation the driver can either ask
+for a continuation with the crypto state and the new sequence number
+(next expected segment is the one after the out of order one), or continue
+with the previous stream state - assuming that the out of order segment
+was just a retransmission. The former is simpler, and does not require
+retransmission detection therefore it is the recommended method until
+such time it is proven inefficient.
+
+RX
+--
+
+A small amount of RX reorder events may not require a full resynchronization.
+In particular the device should not lose synchronization
+when record boundary can be recovered:
+
+.. kernel-figure::  tls-offload-reorder-good.svg
+   :alt:	reorder of non-header segment
+   :align:	center
+
+   Reorder of non-header segment
+
+Green segments are successfully decrypted, blue ones are passed
+as received on wire, red stripes mark start of new records.
+
+In above case segment 1 is received and decrypted successfully.
+Segment 2 was dropped so 3 arrives out of order. The device knows
+the next record starts inside 3, based on record length in segment 1.
+Segment 3 is passed untouched, because due to lack of data from segment 2
+the remainder of the previous record inside segment 3 cannot be handled.
+The device can, however, collect the authentication algorithm's state
+and partial block from the new record in segment 3 and when 4 and 5
+arrive continue decryption. Finally when 2 arrives it's completely outside
+of expected window of the device so it's passed as is without special
+handling. ``ktls`` software fallback handles the decryption of record
+spanning segments 1, 2 and 3. The device did not get out of sync,
+even though two segments did not get decrypted.
+
+Kernel synchronization may be necessary if the lost segment contained
+a record header and arrived after the next record header has already passed:
+
+.. kernel-figure::  tls-offload-reorder-bad.svg
+   :alt:	reorder of header segment
+   :align:	center
+
+   Reorder of segment with a TLS header
+
+In this example segment 2 gets dropped, and it contains a record header.
+Device can only detect that segment 4 also contains a TLS header
+if it knows the length of the previous record from segment 2. In this case
+the device will lose synchronization with the stream.
+
+When the device gets out of sync and the stream reaches TCP sequence
+numbers more than a max size record past the expected TCP sequence number,
+the device starts scanning for a known header pattern. For example
+for TLS 1.2 and TLS 1.3 subsequent bytes of value ``0x03 0x03`` occur
+in the SSL/TLS version field of the header. Once pattern is matched
+the device continues attempting parsing headers at expected locations
+(based on the length fields at guessed locations).
+Whenever the expected location does not contain a valid header the scan
+is restarted.
+
+When the header is matched the device sends a confirmation request
+to the kernel, asking if the guessed location is correct (if a TLS record
+really starts there), and which record sequence number the given header had.
+The kernel confirms the guessed location was correct and tells the device
+the record sequence number. Meanwhile, the device had been parsing
+and counting all records since the just-confirmed one, it adds the number
+of records it had seen to the record number provided by the kernel.
+At this point the device is in sync and can resume decryption at next
+segment boundary.
+
+In a pathological case the device may latch onto a sequence of matching
+headers and never hear back from the kernel (there is no negative
+confirmation from the kernel). The implementation may choose to periodically
+restart scan. Given how unlikely falsely-matching stream is, however,
+periodic restart is not deemed necessary.
+
+Special care has to be taken if the confirmation request is passed
+asynchronously to the packet stream and record may get processed
+by the kernel before the confirmation request.
+
+Error handling
+==============
+
+TX
+--
+
+Packets may be redirected or rerouted by the stack to a different
+device than the selected TLS offload device. The stack will handle
+such condition using the :c:func:`sk_validate_xmit_skb` helper
+(TLS offload code installs :c:func:`tls_validate_xmit_skb` at this hook).
+Offload maintains information about all records until the data is
+fully acknowledged, so if skbs reach the wrong device they can be handled
+by software fallback.
+
+Any device TLS offload handling error on the transmission side must result
+in the packet being dropped. For example if a packet got out of order
+due to a bug in the stack or the device, reached the device and can't
+be encrypted such packet must be dropped.
+
+RX
+--
+
+If the device encounters any problems with TLS offload on the receive
+side it should pass the packet to the host's networking stack as it was
+received on the wire.
+
+For example authentication failure for any record in the segment should
+result in passing the unmodified packet to the software fallback. This means
+packets should not be modified "in place". Splitting segments to handle partial
+decryption is not advised. In other words either all records in the packet
+had been handled successfully and authenticated or the packet has to be passed
+to the host's stack as it was on the wire (recovering original packet in the
+driver if device provides precise error is sufficient).
+
+The Linux networking stack does not provide a way of reporting per-packet
+decryption and authentication errors, packets with errors must simply not
+have the :c:member:`decrypted` mark set.
+
+A packet should also not be handled by the TLS offload if it contains
+incorrect checksums.
+
+Performance metrics
+===================
+
+TLS offload can be characterized by the following basic metrics:
+
+ * max connection count
+ * connection installation rate
+ * connection installation latency
+ * total cryptographic performance
+
+Note that each TCP connection requires a TLS session in both directions,
+the performance may be reported treating each direction separately.
+
+Max connection count
+--------------------
+
+The number of connections device can support can be exposed via
+``devlink resource`` API.
+
+Total cryptographic performance
+-------------------------------
+
+Offload performance may depend on segment and record size.
+
+Overload of the cryptographic subsystem of the device should not have
+significant performance impact on non-offloaded streams.
+
+Statistics
+==========
+
+Following minimum set of TLS-related statistics should be reported
+by the driver:
+
+ * ``rx_tls_decrypted`` - number of successfully decrypted TLS segments
+ * ``tx_tls_encrypted`` - number of in-order TLS segments passed to device
+   for encryption
+ * ``tx_tls_ooo`` - number of TX packets which were part of a TLS stream
+   but did not arrive in the expected order
+ * ``tx_tls_drop_no_sync_data`` - number of TX packets dropped because
+   they arrived out of order and associated record could not be found
+   (see also :ref:`pre_tls_data`)
+
+Notable corner cases, exceptions and additional requirements
+============================================================
+
+.. _5tuple_problems:
+
+5-tuple matching limitations
+----------------------------
+
+The device can only recognize received packets based on the 5-tuple
+of the socket. Current ``ktls`` implementation will not offload sockets
+routed through software interfaces such as those used for tunneling
+or virtual networking. However, many packet transformations performed
+by the networking stack (most notably any BPF logic) do not require
+any intermediate software device, therefore a 5-tuple match may
+consistently miss at the device level. In such cases the device
+should still be able to perform TX offload (encryption) and should
+fallback cleanly to software decryption (RX).
+
+Out of order
+------------
+
+Introducing extra processing in NICs should not cause packets to be
+transmitted or received out of order, for example pure ACK packets
+should not be reordered with respect to data segments.
+
+Ingress reorder
+---------------
+
+A device is permitted to perform packet reordering for consecutive
+TCP segments (i.e. placing packets in the correct order) but any form
+of additional buffering is disallowed.
+
+Coexistence with standard networking offload features
+-----------------------------------------------------
+
+Offloaded ``ktls`` sockets should support standard TCP stack features
+transparently. Enabling device TLS offload should not cause any difference
+in packets as seen on the wire.
+
+Transport layer transparency
+----------------------------
+
+The device should not modify any packet headers for the purpose
+of the simplifying TLS offload.
+
+The device should not depend on any packet headers beyond what is strictly
+necessary for TLS offload.
+
+Segment drops
+-------------
+
+Dropping packets is acceptable only in the event of catastrophic
+system errors and should never be used as an error handling mechanism
+in cases arising from normal operation. In other words, reliance
+on TCP retransmissions to handle corner cases is not acceptable.
+
+TLS device features
+-------------------
+
+Drivers should ignore the changes to TLS the device feature flags.
+These flags will be acted upon accordingly by the core ``ktls`` code.
+TLS device feature flags only control adding of new TLS connection
+offloads, old connections will remain active after flags are cleared.
+
+Known bugs
+==========
+
+skb_orphan() leaks clear text
+-----------------------------
+
+Currently drivers depend on the :c:member:`sk` member of
+:c:type:`struct sk_buff <sk_buff>` to identify segments requiring
+encryption. Any operation which removes or does not preserve the socket
+association such as :c:func:`skb_orphan` or :c:func:`skb_clone`
+will cause the driver to miss the packets and lead to clear text leaks.
+
+Redirects leak clear text
+-------------------------
+
+In the RX direction, if segment has already been decrypted by the device
+and it gets redirected or mirrored - clear text will be transmitted out.
+
+.. _pre_tls_data:
+
+Transmission of pre-TLS data
+----------------------------
+
+User can enqueue some already encrypted and framed records before enabling
+``ktls`` on the socket. Those records have to get sent as they are. This is
+perfectly easy to handle in the software case - such data will be waiting
+in the TCP layer, TLS ULP won't see it. In the offloaded case when pre-queued
+segment reaches transmission point it appears to be out of order (before the
+expected TCP sequence number) and the stack does not have a record information
+associated.
+
+All segments without record information cannot, however, be assumed to be
+pre-queued data, because a race condition exists between TCP stack queuing
+a retransmission, the driver seeing the retransmission and TCP ACK arriving
+for the retransmitted data.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/tls.txt b/Documentation/networking/tls.rst
index 58b5ef75f1b7..5bcbf75e2025 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/tls.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/tls.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,9 @@
+.. _kernel_tls:
+
+==========
+Kernel TLS
+==========
+
 Overview
 ========
 
@@ -12,6 +18,8 @@ Creating a TLS connection
 
 First create a new TCP socket and set the TLS ULP.
 
+.. code-block:: c
+
   sock = socket(AF_INET, SOCK_STREAM, 0);
   setsockopt(sock, SOL_TCP, TCP_ULP, "tls", sizeof("tls"));
 
@@ -21,6 +29,8 @@ handshake is complete, we have all the parameters required to move the
 data-path to the kernel. There is a separate socket option for moving
 the transmit and the receive into the kernel.
 
+.. code-block:: c
+
   /* From linux/tls.h */
   struct tls_crypto_info {
           unsigned short version;
@@ -58,6 +68,8 @@ After setting the TLS_TX socket option all application data sent over this
 socket is encrypted using TLS and the parameters provided in the socket option.
 For example, we can send an encrypted hello world record as follows:
 
+.. code-block:: c
+
   const char *msg = "hello world\n";
   send(sock, msg, strlen(msg));
 
@@ -67,6 +79,8 @@ to the encrypted kernel send buffer if possible.
 The sendfile system call will send the file's data over TLS records of maximum
 length (2^14).
 
+.. code-block:: c
+
   file = open(filename, O_RDONLY);
   fstat(file, &stat);
   sendfile(sock, file, &offset, stat.st_size);
@@ -89,6 +103,8 @@ After setting the TLS_RX socket option, all recv family socket calls
 are decrypted using TLS parameters provided.  A full TLS record must
 be received before decryption can happen.
 
+.. code-block:: c
+
   char buffer[16384];
   recv(sock, buffer, 16384);
 
@@ -97,12 +113,12 @@ large enough, and no additional allocations occur.  If the userspace
 buffer is too small, data is decrypted in the kernel and copied to
 userspace.
 
-EINVAL is returned if the TLS version in the received message does not
+``EINVAL`` is returned if the TLS version in the received message does not
 match the version passed in setsockopt.
 
-EMSGSIZE is returned if the received message is too big.
+``EMSGSIZE`` is returned if the received message is too big.
 
-EBADMSG is returned if decryption failed for any other reason.
+``EBADMSG`` is returned if decryption failed for any other reason.
 
 Send TLS control messages
 -------------------------
@@ -113,9 +129,11 @@ These messages can be sent over the socket by providing the TLS record type
 via a CMSG. For example the following function sends @data of @length bytes
 using a record of type @record_type.
 
-/* send TLS control message using record_type */
+.. code-block:: c
+
+  /* send TLS control message using record_type */
   static int klts_send_ctrl_message(int sock, unsigned char record_type,
-                                  void *data, size_t length)
+                                    void *data, size_t length)
   {
         struct msghdr msg = {0};
         int cmsg_len = sizeof(record_type);
@@ -151,6 +169,8 @@ type passed via cmsg.  If no cmsg buffer is provided, an error is
 returned if a control message is received.  Data messages may be
 received without a cmsg buffer set.
 
+.. code-block:: c
+
   char buffer[16384];
   char cmsg[CMSG_SPACE(sizeof(unsigned char))];
   struct msghdr msg = {0};
@@ -186,12 +206,10 @@ Integrating in to userspace TLS library
 At a high level, the kernel TLS ULP is a replacement for the record
 layer of a userspace TLS library.
 
-A patchset to OpenSSL to use ktls as the record layer is here:
-
-https://github.com/Mellanox/openssl/commits/tls_rx2
-
-An example of calling send directly after a handshake using
-gnutls.  Since it doesn't implement a full record layer, control
-messages are not supported:
+A patchset to OpenSSL to use ktls as the record layer is
+`here <https://github.com/Mellanox/openssl/commits/tls_rx2>`_.
 
-https://github.com/ktls/af_ktls-tool/commits/RX
+`An example <https://github.com/ktls/af_ktls-tool/commits/RX>`_
+of calling send directly after a handshake using gnutls.
+Since it doesn't implement a full record layer, control
+messages are not supported.
diff --git a/Documentation/ntb.txt b/Documentation/ntb.txt
index a043854d28df..074a423c853c 100644
--- a/Documentation/ntb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/ntb.txt
@@ -41,9 +41,10 @@ mainly used to perform the proper memory window initialization. Typically
 there are two types of memory window interfaces supported by the NTB API:
 inbound translation configured on the local ntb port and outbound translation
 configured by the peer, on the peer ntb port. The first type is
-depicted on the next figure
+depicted on the next figure::
+
+ Inbound translation:
 
-Inbound translation:
  Memory:              Local NTB Port:      Peer NTB Port:      Peer MMIO:
   ____________
  | dma-mapped |-ntb_mw_set_trans(addr)  |
@@ -58,9 +59,10 @@ maps corresponding outbound memory window so to have access to the shared
 memory region.
 
 The second type of interface, that implies the shared windows being
-initialized by a peer device, is depicted on the figure:
+initialized by a peer device, is depicted on the figure::
+
+ Outbound translation:
 
-Outbound translation:
  Memory:        Local NTB Port:    Peer NTB Port:      Peer MMIO:
   ____________                      ______________
  | dma-mapped |                |   | MW base addr |<== memory-mapped IO
@@ -75,11 +77,13 @@ outbound memory window so to have access to the shared memory region.
 
 As one can see the described scenarios can be combined in one portable
 algorithm.
+
  Local device:
   1) Allocate memory for a shared window
   2) Initialize memory window by translated address of the allocated region
      (it may fail if local memory window initialization is unsupported)
   3) Send the translated address and memory window index to a peer device
+
  Peer device:
   1) Initialize memory window with retrieved address of the allocated
      by another device memory region (it may fail if peer memory window
@@ -88,6 +92,7 @@ algorithm.
 
 In accordance with this scenario, the NTB Memory Window API can be used as
 follows:
+
  Local device:
   1) ntb_mw_count(pidx) - retrieve number of memory ranges, which can
      be allocated for memory windows between local device and peer device
@@ -103,6 +108,7 @@ follows:
   5) Send translated base address (usually together with memory window
      number) to the peer device using, for instance, scratchpad or message
      registers.
+
  Peer device:
   1) ntb_peer_mw_set_trans(pidx, midx) - try to set received from other
      device (related to pidx) translated address for specified memory
diff --git a/Documentation/packing.txt b/Documentation/packing.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f830c98645f1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/packing.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,149 @@
+================================================
+Generic bitfield packing and unpacking functions
+================================================
+
+Problem statement
+-----------------
+
+When working with hardware, one has to choose between several approaches of
+interfacing with it.
+One can memory-map a pointer to a carefully crafted struct over the hardware
+device's memory region, and access its fields as struct members (potentially
+declared as bitfields). But writing code this way would make it less portable,
+due to potential endianness mismatches between the CPU and the hardware device.
+Additionally, one has to pay close attention when translating register
+definitions from the hardware documentation into bit field indices for the
+structs. Also, some hardware (typically networking equipment) tends to group
+its register fields in ways that violate any reasonable word boundaries
+(sometimes even 64 bit ones). This creates the inconvenience of having to
+define "high" and "low" portions of register fields within the struct.
+A more robust alternative to struct field definitions would be to extract the
+required fields by shifting the appropriate number of bits. But this would
+still not protect from endianness mismatches, except if all memory accesses
+were performed byte-by-byte. Also the code can easily get cluttered, and the
+high-level idea might get lost among the many bit shifts required.
+Many drivers take the bit-shifting approach and then attempt to reduce the
+clutter with tailored macros, but more often than not these macros take
+shortcuts that still prevent the code from being truly portable.
+
+The solution
+------------
+
+This API deals with 2 basic operations:
+  - Packing a CPU-usable number into a memory buffer (with hardware
+    constraints/quirks)
+  - Unpacking a memory buffer (which has hardware constraints/quirks)
+    into a CPU-usable number.
+
+The API offers an abstraction over said hardware constraints and quirks,
+over CPU endianness and therefore between possible mismatches between
+the two.
+
+The basic unit of these API functions is the u64. From the CPU's
+perspective, bit 63 always means bit offset 7 of byte 7, albeit only
+logically. The question is: where do we lay this bit out in memory?
+
+The following examples cover the memory layout of a packed u64 field.
+The byte offsets in the packed buffer are always implicitly 0, 1, ... 7.
+What the examples show is where the logical bytes and bits sit.
+
+1. Normally (no quirks), we would do it like this:
+
+63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32
+7                       6                       5                        4
+31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10  9  8  7  6  5  4  3  2  1  0
+3                       2                       1                        0
+
+That is, the MSByte (7) of the CPU-usable u64 sits at memory offset 0, and the
+LSByte (0) of the u64 sits at memory offset 7.
+This corresponds to what most folks would regard to as "big endian", where
+bit i corresponds to the number 2^i. This is also referred to in the code
+comments as "logical" notation.
+
+
+2. If QUIRK_MSB_ON_THE_RIGHT is set, we do it like this:
+
+56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
+7                       6                        5                       4
+24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23  8  9 10 11 12 13 14 15  0  1  2  3  4  5  6  7
+3                       2                        1                       0
+
+That is, QUIRK_MSB_ON_THE_RIGHT does not affect byte positioning, but
+inverts bit offsets inside a byte.
+
+
+3. If QUIRK_LITTLE_ENDIAN is set, we do it like this:
+
+39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56
+4                       5                       6                       7
+7  6  5  4  3  2  1  0  15 14 13 12 11 10  9  8 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24
+0                       1                       2                       3
+
+Therefore, QUIRK_LITTLE_ENDIAN means that inside the memory region, every
+byte from each 4-byte word is placed at its mirrored position compared to
+the boundary of that word.
+
+4. If QUIRK_MSB_ON_THE_RIGHT and QUIRK_LITTLE_ENDIAN are both set, we do it
+   like this:
+
+32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
+4                       5                       6                       7
+0  1  2  3  4  5  6  7  8   9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
+0                       1                       2                       3
+
+
+5. If just QUIRK_LSW32_IS_FIRST is set, we do it like this:
+
+31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10  9  8  7  6  5  4  3  2  1  0
+3                       2                       1                        0
+63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32
+7                       6                       5                        4
+
+In this case the 8 byte memory region is interpreted as follows: first
+4 bytes correspond to the least significant 4-byte word, next 4 bytes to
+the more significant 4-byte word.
+
+
+6. If QUIRK_LSW32_IS_FIRST and QUIRK_MSB_ON_THE_RIGHT are set, we do it like
+   this:
+
+24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23  8  9 10 11 12 13 14 15  0  1  2  3  4  5  6  7
+3                       2                        1                       0
+56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
+7                       6                        5                       4
+
+
+7. If QUIRK_LSW32_IS_FIRST and QUIRK_LITTLE_ENDIAN are set, it looks like
+   this:
+
+7  6  5  4  3  2  1  0  15 14 13 12 11 10  9  8 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24
+0                       1                       2                       3
+39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56
+4                       5                       6                       7
+
+
+8. If QUIRK_LSW32_IS_FIRST, QUIRK_LITTLE_ENDIAN and QUIRK_MSB_ON_THE_RIGHT
+   are set, it looks like this:
+
+0  1  2  3  4  5  6  7  8   9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
+0                       1                       2                       3
+32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
+4                       5                       6                       7
+
+
+We always think of our offsets as if there were no quirk, and we translate
+them afterwards, before accessing the memory region.
+
+Intended use
+------------
+
+Drivers that opt to use this API first need to identify which of the above 3
+quirk combinations (for a total of 8) match what the hardware documentation
+describes. Then they should wrap the packing() function, creating a new
+xxx_packing() that calls it using the proper QUIRK_* one-hot bits set.
+
+The packing() function returns an int-encoded error code, which protects the
+programmer against incorrect API use.  The errors are not expected to occur
+durring runtime, therefore it is reasonable for xxx_packing() to return void
+and simply swallow those errors. Optionally it can dump stack or print the
+error description.
diff --git a/Documentation/power/energy-model.txt b/Documentation/power/energy-model.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a2b0ae4c76bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/power/energy-model.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,144 @@
+                           ====================
+                           Energy Model of CPUs
+                           ====================
+
+1. Overview
+-----------
+
+The Energy Model (EM) framework serves as an interface between drivers knowing
+the power consumed by CPUs at various performance levels, and the kernel
+subsystems willing to use that information to make energy-aware decisions.
+
+The source of the information about the power consumed by CPUs can vary greatly
+from one platform to another. These power costs can be estimated using
+devicetree data in some cases. In others, the firmware will know better.
+Alternatively, userspace might be best positioned. And so on. In order to avoid
+each and every client subsystem to re-implement support for each and every
+possible source of information on its own, the EM framework intervenes as an
+abstraction layer which standardizes the format of power cost tables in the
+kernel, hence enabling to avoid redundant work.
+
+The figure below depicts an example of drivers (Arm-specific here, but the
+approach is applicable to any architecture) providing power costs to the EM
+framework, and interested clients reading the data from it.
+
+       +---------------+  +-----------------+  +---------------+
+       | Thermal (IPA) |  | Scheduler (EAS) |  |     Other     |
+       +---------------+  +-----------------+  +---------------+
+               |                   | em_pd_energy()    |
+               |                   | em_cpu_get()      |
+               +---------+         |         +---------+
+                         |         |         |
+                         v         v         v
+                        +---------------------+
+                        |    Energy Model     |
+                        |     Framework       |
+                        +---------------------+
+                           ^       ^       ^
+                           |       |       | em_register_perf_domain()
+                +----------+       |       +---------+
+                |                  |                 |
+        +---------------+  +---------------+  +--------------+
+        |  cpufreq-dt   |  |   arm_scmi    |  |    Other     |
+        +---------------+  +---------------+  +--------------+
+                ^                  ^                 ^
+                |                  |                 |
+        +--------------+   +---------------+  +--------------+
+        | Device Tree  |   |   Firmware    |  |      ?       |
+        +--------------+   +---------------+  +--------------+
+
+The EM framework manages power cost tables per 'performance domain' in the
+system. A performance domain is a group of CPUs whose performance is scaled
+together. Performance domains generally have a 1-to-1 mapping with CPUFreq
+policies. All CPUs in a performance domain are required to have the same
+micro-architecture. CPUs in different performance domains can have different
+micro-architectures.
+
+
+2. Core APIs
+------------
+
+  2.1 Config options
+
+CONFIG_ENERGY_MODEL must be enabled to use the EM framework.
+
+
+  2.2 Registration of performance domains
+
+Drivers are expected to register performance domains into the EM framework by
+calling the following API:
+
+  int em_register_perf_domain(cpumask_t *span, unsigned int nr_states,
+			      struct em_data_callback *cb);
+
+Drivers must specify the CPUs of the performance domains using the cpumask
+argument, and provide a callback function returning <frequency, power> tuples
+for each capacity state. The callback function provided by the driver is free
+to fetch data from any relevant location (DT, firmware, ...), and by any mean
+deemed necessary. See Section 3. for an example of driver implementing this
+callback, and kernel/power/energy_model.c for further documentation on this
+API.
+
+
+  2.3 Accessing performance domains
+
+Subsystems interested in the energy model of a CPU can retrieve it using the
+em_cpu_get() API. The energy model tables are allocated once upon creation of
+the performance domains, and kept in memory untouched.
+
+The energy consumed by a performance domain can be estimated using the
+em_pd_energy() API. The estimation is performed assuming that the schedutil
+CPUfreq governor is in use.
+
+More details about the above APIs can be found in include/linux/energy_model.h.
+
+
+3. Example driver
+-----------------
+
+This section provides a simple example of a CPUFreq driver registering a
+performance domain in the Energy Model framework using the (fake) 'foo'
+protocol. The driver implements an est_power() function to be provided to the
+EM framework.
+
+ -> drivers/cpufreq/foo_cpufreq.c
+
+01	static int est_power(unsigned long *mW, unsigned long *KHz, int cpu)
+02	{
+03		long freq, power;
+04
+05		/* Use the 'foo' protocol to ceil the frequency */
+06		freq = foo_get_freq_ceil(cpu, *KHz);
+07		if (freq < 0);
+08			return freq;
+09
+10		/* Estimate the power cost for the CPU at the relevant freq. */
+11		power = foo_estimate_power(cpu, freq);
+12		if (power < 0);
+13			return power;
+14
+15		/* Return the values to the EM framework */
+16		*mW = power;
+17		*KHz = freq;
+18
+19		return 0;
+20	}
+21
+22	static int foo_cpufreq_init(struct cpufreq_policy *policy)
+23	{
+24		struct em_data_callback em_cb = EM_DATA_CB(est_power);
+25		int nr_opp, ret;
+26
+27		/* Do the actual CPUFreq init work ... */
+28		ret = do_foo_cpufreq_init(policy);
+29		if (ret)
+30			return ret;
+31
+32		/* Find the number of OPPs for this policy */
+33		nr_opp = foo_get_nr_opp(policy);
+34
+35		/* And register the new performance domain */
+36		em_register_perf_domain(policy->cpus, nr_opp, &em_cb);
+37
+38	        return 0;
+39	}
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/DAWR-POWER9.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/DAWR-POWER9.txt
index 2feaa6619658..ecdbb076438c 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/DAWR-POWER9.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/DAWR-POWER9.txt
@@ -1,10 +1,10 @@
 DAWR issues on POWER9
 ============================
 
-On POWER9 the DAWR can cause a checkstop if it points to cache
-inhibited (CI) memory. Currently Linux has no way to disinguish CI
-memory when configuring the DAWR, so (for now) the DAWR is disabled by
-this commit:
+On POWER9 the Data Address Watchpoint Register (DAWR) can cause a checkstop
+if it points to cache inhibited (CI) memory. Currently Linux has no way to
+disinguish CI memory when configuring the DAWR, so (for now) the DAWR is
+disabled by this commit:
 
     commit 9654153158d3e0684a1bdb76dbababdb7111d5a0
     Author: Michael Neuling <mikey@neuling.org>
@@ -56,3 +56,35 @@ POWER9. Loads and stores to the watchpoint locations will not be
 trapped in GDB. The watchpoint is remembered, so if the guest is
 migrated back to the POWER8 host, it will start working again.
 
+Force enabling the DAWR
+=============================
+Kernels (since ~v5.2) have an option to force enable the DAWR via:
+
+  echo Y > /sys/kernel/debug/powerpc/dawr_enable_dangerous
+
+This enables the DAWR even on POWER9.
+
+This is a dangerous setting, USE AT YOUR OWN RISK.
+
+Some users may not care about a bad user crashing their box
+(ie. single user/desktop systems) and really want the DAWR.  This
+allows them to force enable DAWR.
+
+This flag can also be used to disable DAWR access. Once this is
+cleared, all DAWR access should be cleared immediately and your
+machine once again safe from crashing.
+
+Userspace may get confused by toggling this. If DAWR is force
+enabled/disabled between getting the number of breakpoints (via
+PTRACE_GETHWDBGINFO) and setting the breakpoint, userspace will get an
+inconsistent view of what's available. Similarly for guests.
+
+For the DAWR to be enabled in a KVM guest, the DAWR needs to be force
+enabled in the host AND the guest. For this reason, this won't work on
+POWERVM as it doesn't allow the HCALL to work. Writes of 'Y' to the
+dawr_enable_dangerous file will fail if the hypervisor doesn't support
+writing the DAWR.
+
+To double check the DAWR is working, run this kernel selftest:
+  tools/testing/selftests/powerpc/ptrace/ptrace-hwbreak.c
+Any errors/failures/skips mean something is wrong.
diff --git a/Documentation/preempt-locking.txt b/Documentation/preempt-locking.txt
index 509f5a422d57..dce336134e54 100644
--- a/Documentation/preempt-locking.txt
+++ b/Documentation/preempt-locking.txt
@@ -52,7 +52,6 @@ preemption must be disabled around such regions.
 
 Note, some FPU functions are already explicitly preempt safe.  For example,
 kernel_fpu_begin and kernel_fpu_end will disable and enable preemption.
-However, fpu__restore() must be called with preemption disabled.
 
 
 RULE #3: Lock acquire and release must be performed by same task
diff --git a/Documentation/process/4.Coding.rst b/Documentation/process/4.Coding.rst
index cfe264889447..4b7a5ab3cec1 100644
--- a/Documentation/process/4.Coding.rst
+++ b/Documentation/process/4.Coding.rst
@@ -249,7 +249,7 @@ features; most of these are found in the "kernel hacking" submenu.  Several
 of these options should be turned on for any kernel used for development or
 testing purposes.  In particular, you should turn on:
 
- - ENABLE_WARN_DEPRECATED, ENABLE_MUST_CHECK, and FRAME_WARN to get an
+ - ENABLE_MUST_CHECK and FRAME_WARN to get an
    extra set of warnings for problems like the use of deprecated interfaces
    or ignoring an important return value from a function.  The output
    generated by these warnings can be verbose, but one need not worry about
diff --git a/Documentation/process/5.Posting.rst b/Documentation/process/5.Posting.rst
index 4213e580f273..855a70b80269 100644
--- a/Documentation/process/5.Posting.rst
+++ b/Documentation/process/5.Posting.rst
@@ -216,10 +216,12 @@ The tags in common use are:
    which can be found in :ref:`Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst <submittingpatches>`
    Code without a proper signoff cannot be merged into the mainline.
 
- - Co-developed-by: states that the patch was also created by another developer
-   along with the original author.  This is useful at times when multiple
-   people work on a single patch.  Note, this person also needs to have a
-   Signed-off-by: line in the patch as well.
+ - Co-developed-by: states that the patch was co-created by several developers;
+   it is a used to give attribution to co-authors (in addition to the author
+   attributed by the From: tag) when multiple people work on a single patch.
+   Every Co-developed-by: must be immediately followed by a Signed-off-by: of
+   the associated co-author.  Details and examples can be found in
+   :ref:`Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst <submittingpatches>`.
 
  - Acked-by: indicates an agreement by another developer (often a
    maintainer of the relevant code) that the patch is appropriate for
diff --git a/Documentation/process/coding-style.rst b/Documentation/process/coding-style.rst
index b78dd680c038..fa864a51e6ea 100644
--- a/Documentation/process/coding-style.rst
+++ b/Documentation/process/coding-style.rst
@@ -443,7 +443,7 @@ In function prototypes, include parameter names with their data types.
 Although this is not required by the C language, it is preferred in Linux
 because it is a simple way to add valuable information for the reader.
 
-Do not use the `extern' keyword with function prototypes as this makes
+Do not use the ``extern`` keyword with function prototypes as this makes
 lines longer and isn't strictly necessary.
 
 
@@ -595,26 +595,43 @@ values.  To do the latter, you can stick the following in your .emacs file:
       (* (max steps 1)
          c-basic-offset)))
 
-  (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook
-            (lambda ()
-              ;; Add kernel style
-              (c-add-style
-               "linux-tabs-only"
-               '("linux" (c-offsets-alist
-                          (arglist-cont-nonempty
-                           c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg
-                           c-lineup-arglist-tabs-only))))))
-
-  (add-hook 'c-mode-hook
-            (lambda ()
-              (let ((filename (buffer-file-name)))
-                ;; Enable kernel mode for the appropriate files
-                (when (and filename
-                           (string-match (expand-file-name "~/src/linux-trees")
-                                         filename))
-                  (setq indent-tabs-mode t)
-                  (setq show-trailing-whitespace t)
-                  (c-set-style "linux-tabs-only")))))
+  (dir-locals-set-class-variables
+   'linux-kernel
+   '((c-mode . (
+          (c-basic-offset . 8)
+          (c-label-minimum-indentation . 0)
+          (c-offsets-alist . (
+                  (arglist-close         . c-lineup-arglist-tabs-only)
+                  (arglist-cont-nonempty .
+		      (c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg c-lineup-arglist-tabs-only))
+                  (arglist-intro         . +)
+                  (brace-list-intro      . +)
+                  (c                     . c-lineup-C-comments)
+                  (case-label            . 0)
+                  (comment-intro         . c-lineup-comment)
+                  (cpp-define-intro      . +)
+                  (cpp-macro             . -1000)
+                  (cpp-macro-cont        . +)
+                  (defun-block-intro     . +)
+                  (else-clause           . 0)
+                  (func-decl-cont        . +)
+                  (inclass               . +)
+                  (inher-cont            . c-lineup-multi-inher)
+                  (knr-argdecl-intro     . 0)
+                  (label                 . -1000)
+                  (statement             . 0)
+                  (statement-block-intro . +)
+                  (statement-case-intro  . +)
+                  (statement-cont        . +)
+                  (substatement          . +)
+                  ))
+          (indent-tabs-mode . t)
+          (show-trailing-whitespace . t)
+          ))))
+
+  (dir-locals-set-directory-class
+   (expand-file-name "~/src/linux-trees")
+   'linux-kernel)
 
 This will make emacs go better with the kernel coding style for C
 files below ``~/src/linux-trees``.
@@ -826,7 +843,8 @@ used.
 The kernel provides the following general purpose memory allocators:
 kmalloc(), kzalloc(), kmalloc_array(), kcalloc(), vmalloc(), and
 vzalloc().  Please refer to the API documentation for further information
-about them.
+about them.  :ref:`Documentation/core-api/memory-allocation.rst
+<memory_allocation>`
 
 The preferred form for passing a size of a struct is the following:
 
@@ -857,6 +875,9 @@ The preferred form for allocating a zeroed array is the following:
 Both forms check for overflow on the allocation size n * sizeof(...),
 and return NULL if that occurred.
 
+These generic allocation functions all emit a stack dump on failure when used
+without __GFP_NOWARN so there is no use in emitting an additional failure
+message when NULL is returned.
 
 15) The inline disease
 ----------------------
@@ -921,7 +942,37 @@ result.  Typical examples would be functions that return pointers; they use
 NULL or the ERR_PTR mechanism to report failure.
 
 
-17) Don't re-invent the kernel macros
+17) Using bool
+--------------
+
+The Linux kernel bool type is an alias for the C99 _Bool type. bool values can
+only evaluate to 0 or 1, and implicit or explicit conversion to bool
+automatically converts the value to true or false. When using bool types the
+!! construction is not needed, which eliminates a class of bugs.
+
+When working with bool values the true and false definitions should be used
+instead of 1 and 0.
+
+bool function return types and stack variables are always fine to use whenever
+appropriate. Use of bool is encouraged to improve readability and is often a
+better option than 'int' for storing boolean values.
+
+Do not use bool if cache line layout or size of the value matters, as its size
+and alignment varies based on the compiled architecture. Structures that are
+optimized for alignment and size should not use bool.
+
+If a structure has many true/false values, consider consolidating them into a
+bitfield with 1 bit members, or using an appropriate fixed width type, such as
+u8.
+
+Similarly for function arguments, many true/false values can be consolidated
+into a single bitwise 'flags' argument and 'flags' can often be a more
+readable alternative if the call-sites have naked true/false constants.
+
+Otherwise limited use of bool in structures and arguments can improve
+readability.
+
+18) Don't re-invent the kernel macros
 -------------------------------------
 
 The header file include/linux/kernel.h contains a number of macros that
@@ -944,7 +995,7 @@ need them.  Feel free to peruse that header file to see what else is already
 defined that you shouldn't reproduce in your code.
 
 
-18) Editor modelines and other cruft
+19) Editor modelines and other cruft
 ------------------------------------
 
 Some editors can interpret configuration information embedded in source files,
@@ -978,7 +1029,7 @@ own custom mode, or may have some other magic method for making indentation
 work correctly.
 
 
-19) Inline assembly
+20) Inline assembly
 -------------------
 
 In architecture-specific code, you may need to use inline assembly to interface
@@ -1010,7 +1061,7 @@ the next instruction in the assembly output:
 	     : /* outputs */ : /* inputs */ : /* clobbers */);
 
 
-20) Conditional Compilation
+21) Conditional Compilation
 ---------------------------
 
 Wherever possible, don't use preprocessor conditionals (#if, #ifdef) in .c
diff --git a/Documentation/process/deprecated.rst b/Documentation/process/deprecated.rst
index 0ef5a63c06ba..49e0f64a3427 100644
--- a/Documentation/process/deprecated.rst
+++ b/Documentation/process/deprecated.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
 .. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
 
+.. _deprecated:
+
 =====================================================================
 Deprecated Interfaces, Language Features, Attributes, and Conventions
 =====================================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/process/howto.rst b/Documentation/process/howto.rst
index 58b2f46c4f98..6ab75c11d2c3 100644
--- a/Documentation/process/howto.rst
+++ b/Documentation/process/howto.rst
@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ Legal Issues
 The Linux kernel source code is released under the GPL.  Please see the file
 COPYING in the main directory of the source tree. The Linux kernel licensing
 rules and how to use `SPDX <https://spdx.org/>`_ identifiers in source code are
-descibed in :ref:`Documentation/process/license-rules.rst <kernel_licensing>`.
+described in :ref:`Documentation/process/license-rules.rst <kernel_licensing>`.
 If you have further questions about the license, please contact a lawyer, and do
 not ask on the Linux kernel mailing list.  The people on the mailing lists are
 not lawyers, and you should not rely on their statements on legal matters.
@@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ Cross-Reference project, which is able to present source code in a
 self-referential, indexed webpage format. An excellent up-to-date
 repository of the kernel code may be found at:
 
-	http://lxr.free-electrons.com/
+	https://elixir.bootlin.com/
 
 
 The development process
@@ -235,23 +235,21 @@ Linux kernel development process currently consists of a few different
 main kernel "branches" and lots of different subsystem-specific kernel
 branches.  These different branches are:
 
-  - main 4.x kernel tree
-  - 4.x.y -stable kernel tree
-  - 4.x -git kernel patches
-  - subsystem specific kernel trees and patches
-  - the 4.x -next kernel tree for integration tests
+  - Linus's mainline tree
+  - Various stable trees with multiple major numbers
+  - Subsystem-specific trees
+  - linux-next integration testing tree
 
-4.x kernel tree
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Mainline tree
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 
-4.x kernels are maintained by Linus Torvalds, and can be found on
-https://kernel.org in the pub/linux/kernel/v4.x/ directory.  Its development
-process is as follows:
+Mainline tree are maintained by Linus Torvalds, and can be found at
+https://kernel.org or in the repo.  Its development process is as follows:
 
   - As soon as a new kernel is released a two weeks window is open,
     during this period of time maintainers can submit big diffs to
     Linus, usually the patches that have already been included in the
-    -next kernel for a few weeks.  The preferred way to submit big changes
+    linux-next for a few weeks.  The preferred way to submit big changes
     is using git (the kernel's source management tool, more information
     can be found at https://git-scm.com/) but plain patches are also just
     fine.
@@ -278,21 +276,19 @@ mailing list about kernel releases:
 	released according to perceived bug status, not according to a
 	preconceived timeline."*
 
-4.x.y -stable kernel tree
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Various stable trees with multiple major numbers
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 
 Kernels with 3-part versions are -stable kernels. They contain
 relatively small and critical fixes for security problems or significant
-regressions discovered in a given 4.x kernel.
+regressions discovered in a given major mainline release, with the first
+2-part of version number are the same correspondingly.
 
 This is the recommended branch for users who want the most recent stable
 kernel and are not interested in helping test development/experimental
 versions.
 
-If no 4.x.y kernel is available, then the highest numbered 4.x
-kernel is the current stable kernel.
-
-4.x.y are maintained by the "stable" team <stable@vger.kernel.org>, and
+Stable trees are maintained by the "stable" team <stable@vger.kernel.org>, and
 are released as needs dictate.  The normal release period is approximately
 two weeks, but it can be longer if there are no pressing problems.  A
 security-related problem, instead, can cause a release to happen almost
@@ -302,17 +298,8 @@ The file :ref:`Documentation/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst <stable_kernel_rule
 in the kernel tree documents what kinds of changes are acceptable for
 the -stable tree, and how the release process works.
 
-4.x -git patches
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-These are daily snapshots of Linus' kernel tree which are managed in a
-git repository (hence the name.) These patches are usually released
-daily and represent the current state of Linus' tree.  They are more
-experimental than -rc kernels since they are generated automatically
-without even a cursory glance to see if they are sane.
-
-Subsystem Specific kernel trees and patches
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Subsystem-specific trees
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 
 The maintainers of the various kernel subsystems --- and also many
 kernel subsystem developers --- expose their current state of
@@ -336,19 +323,19 @@ revisions to it, and maintainers can mark patches as under review,
 accepted, or rejected.  Most of these patchwork sites are listed at
 https://patchwork.kernel.org/.
 
-4.x -next kernel tree for integration tests
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+linux-next integration testing tree
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 
-Before updates from subsystem trees are merged into the mainline 4.x
-tree, they need to be integration-tested.  For this purpose, a special
+Before updates from subsystem trees are merged into the mainline tree,
+they need to be integration-tested.  For this purpose, a special
 testing repository exists into which virtually all subsystem trees are
 pulled on an almost daily basis:
 
 	https://git.kernel.org/?p=linux/kernel/git/next/linux-next.git
 
-This way, the -next kernel gives a summary outlook onto what will be
+This way, the linux-next gives a summary outlook onto what will be
 expected to go into the mainline kernel at the next merge period.
-Adventurous testers are very welcome to runtime-test the -next kernel.
+Adventurous testers are very welcome to runtime-test the linux-next.
 
 
 Bug Reporting
diff --git a/Documentation/process/kernel-docs.rst b/Documentation/process/kernel-docs.rst
index 3fb28de556e4..7a45a8e36ea7 100644
--- a/Documentation/process/kernel-docs.rst
+++ b/Documentation/process/kernel-docs.rst
@@ -95,18 +95,6 @@ On-line docs
         [...]. This paper examines some common problems for
         submitting larger changes and some strategies to avoid problems.
 
-    * Title: **Overview of the Virtual File System**
-
-      :Author: Richard Gooch.
-      :URL: http://www.mjmwired.net/kernel/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt
-      :Date: 2007
-      :Keywords: VFS, File System, mounting filesystems, opening files,
-        dentries, dcache.
-      :Description: Brief introduction to the Linux Virtual File System.
-        What is it, how it works, operations taken when opening a file or
-        mounting a file system and description of important data
-        structures explaining the purpose of each of their entries.
-
     * Title: **Linux Device Drivers, Third Edition**
 
       :Author: Jonathan Corbet, Alessandro Rubini, Greg Kroah-Hartman
@@ -565,7 +553,7 @@ Miscellaneous
 
     * Name: **Cross-Referencing Linux**
 
-      :URL: http://lxr.free-electrons.com/
+      :URL: https://elixir.bootlin.com/
       :Keywords: Browsing source code.
       :Description: Another web-based Linux kernel source code browser.
         Lots of cross references to variables and functions. You can see
diff --git a/Documentation/process/license-rules.rst b/Documentation/process/license-rules.rst
index 2bb8c0fc2238..2ef44ada3f11 100644
--- a/Documentation/process/license-rules.rst
+++ b/Documentation/process/license-rules.rst
@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ License identifier syntax
 
    The SPDX license identifier in kernel files shall be added at the first
    possible line in a file which can contain a comment.  For the majority
-   or files this is the first line, except for scripts which require the
+   of files this is the first line, except for scripts which require the
    '#!PATH_TO_INTERPRETER' in the first line.  For those scripts the SPDX
    identifier goes into the second line.
 
@@ -234,13 +234,13 @@ kernel, can be broken down into:
 
 |
 
-2. Not recommended licenses:
+2. Deprecated licenses:
 
    These licenses should only be used for existing code or for importing
    code from a different project.  These licenses are available from the
    directory::
 
-      LICENSES/other/
+      LICENSES/deprecated/
 
    in the kernel source tree.
 
@@ -250,14 +250,14 @@ kernel, can be broken down into:
 
    Examples::
 
-      LICENSES/other/ISC
+      LICENSES/deprecated/ISC
 
    Contains the Internet Systems Consortium license text and the required
    metatags::
 
-      LICENSES/other/ZLib
+      LICENSES/deprecated/GPL-1.0
 
-   Contains the ZLIB license text and the required metatags.
+   Contains the GPL version 1 license text and the required metatags.
 
    Metatags:
 
@@ -281,7 +281,56 @@ kernel, can be broken down into:
 
 |
 
-3. _`Exceptions`:
+3. Dual Licensing Only
+
+   These licenses should only be used to dual license code with another
+   license in addition to a preferred license.  These licenses are available
+   from the directory::
+
+      LICENSES/dual/
+
+   in the kernel source tree.
+
+   The files in this directory contain the full license text and
+   `Metatags`_.  The file names are identical to the SPDX license
+   identifier which shall be used for the license in source files.
+
+   Examples::
+
+      LICENSES/dual/MPL-1.1
+
+   Contains the Mozilla Public License version 1.1 license text and the
+   required metatags::
+
+      LICENSES/dual/Apache-2.0
+
+   Contains the Apache License version 2.0 license text and the required
+   metatags.
+
+   Metatags:
+
+   The metatag requirements for 'other' licenses are identical to the
+   requirements of the `Preferred licenses`_.
+
+   File format example::
+
+      Valid-License-Identifier: MPL-1.1
+      SPDX-URL: https://spdx.org/licenses/MPL-1.1.html
+      Usage-Guide:
+        Do NOT use. The MPL-1.1 is not GPL2 compatible. It may only be used for
+        dual-licensed files where the other license is GPL2 compatible.
+        If you end up using this it MUST be used together with a GPL2 compatible
+        license using "OR".
+        To use the Mozilla Public License version 1.1 put the following SPDX
+        tag/value pair into a comment according to the placement guidelines in
+        the licensing rules documentation:
+      SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-1.1
+      License-Text:
+        Full license text
+
+|
+
+4. _`Exceptions`:
 
    Some licenses can be amended with exceptions which grant certain rights
    which the original license does not.  These exceptions are available
@@ -368,7 +417,69 @@ kernel, can be broken down into:
 
 
 All SPDX license identifiers and exceptions must have a corresponding file
-in the LICENSE subdirectories. This is required to allow tool
+in the LICENSES subdirectories. This is required to allow tool
 verification (e.g. checkpatch.pl) and to have the licenses ready to read
 and extract right from the source, which is recommended by various FOSS
 organizations, e.g. the `FSFE REUSE initiative <https://reuse.software/>`_.
+
+_`MODULE_LICENSE`
+-----------------
+
+   Loadable kernel modules also require a MODULE_LICENSE() tag. This tag is
+   neither a replacement for proper source code license information
+   (SPDX-License-Identifier) nor in any way relevant for expressing or
+   determining the exact license under which the source code of the module
+   is provided.
+
+   The sole purpose of this tag is to provide sufficient information
+   whether the module is free software or proprietary for the kernel
+   module loader and for user space tools.
+
+   The valid license strings for MODULE_LICENSE() are:
+
+    ============================= =============================================
+    "GPL"			  Module is licensed under GPL version 2. This
+				  does not express any distinction between
+				  GPL-2.0-only or GPL-2.0-or-later. The exact
+				  license information can only be determined
+				  via the license information in the
+				  corresponding source files.
+
+    "GPL v2"			  Same as "GPL". It exists for historic
+				  reasons.
+
+    "GPL and additional rights"   Historical variant of expressing that the
+				  module source is dual licensed under a
+				  GPL v2 variant and MIT license. Please do
+				  not use in new code.
+
+    "Dual MIT/GPL"		  The correct way of expressing that the
+				  module is dual licensed under a GPL v2
+				  variant or MIT license choice.
+
+    "Dual BSD/GPL"		  The module is dual licensed under a GPL v2
+				  variant or BSD license choice. The exact
+				  variant of the BSD license can only be
+				  determined via the license information
+				  in the corresponding source files.
+
+    "Dual MPL/GPL"		  The module is dual licensed under a GPL v2
+				  variant or Mozilla Public License (MPL)
+				  choice. The exact variant of the MPL
+				  license can only be determined via the
+				  license information in the corresponding
+				  source files.
+
+    "Proprietary"		  The module is under a proprietary license.
+				  This string is solely for proprietary third
+				  party modules and cannot be used for modules
+				  which have their source code in the kernel
+				  tree. Modules tagged that way are tainting
+				  the kernel with the 'P' flag when loaded and
+				  the kernel module loader refuses to link such
+				  modules against symbols which are exported
+				  with EXPORT_SYMBOL_GPL().
+    ============================= =============================================
+
+
+
diff --git a/Documentation/process/maintainer-pgp-guide.rst b/Documentation/process/maintainer-pgp-guide.rst
index aff9b1a4d77b..4bab7464ff8c 100644
--- a/Documentation/process/maintainer-pgp-guide.rst
+++ b/Documentation/process/maintainer-pgp-guide.rst
@@ -943,7 +943,7 @@ have on your keyring::
 
 Next, open the `PGP pathfinder`_. In the "From" field, paste the key
 fingerprint of Linus Torvalds from the output above. In the "To" field,
-paste they key-id you found via ``gpg --search`` of the unknown key, and
+paste the key-id you found via ``gpg --search`` of the unknown key, and
 check the results:
 
 - `Finding paths to Linus`_
diff --git a/Documentation/process/stable-api-nonsense.rst b/Documentation/process/stable-api-nonsense.rst
index 24f5aeecee91..a9625ab1fdc2 100644
--- a/Documentation/process/stable-api-nonsense.rst
+++ b/Documentation/process/stable-api-nonsense.rst
@@ -169,14 +169,13 @@ driver for every different kernel version for every distribution is a
 nightmare, and trying to keep up with an ever changing kernel interface
 is also a rough job.
 
-Simple, get your kernel driver into the main kernel tree (remember we
-are talking about GPL released drivers here, if your code doesn't fall
-under this category, good luck, you are on your own here, you leech
-<insert link to leech comment from Andrew and Linus here>.)  If your
-driver is in the tree, and a kernel interface changes, it will be fixed
-up by the person who did the kernel change in the first place.  This
-ensures that your driver is always buildable, and works over time, with
-very little effort on your part.
+Simple, get your kernel driver into the main kernel tree (remember we are
+talking about drivers released under a GPL-compatible license here, if your
+code doesn't fall under this category, good luck, you are on your own here,
+you leech).  If your driver is in the tree, and a kernel interface changes,
+it will be fixed up by the person who did the kernel change in the first
+place.  This ensures that your driver is always buildable, and works over
+time, with very little effort on your part.
 
 The very good side effects of having your driver in the main kernel tree
 are:
diff --git a/Documentation/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst b/Documentation/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst
index 0de6f6145cc6..06f743b612c4 100644
--- a/Documentation/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst
+++ b/Documentation/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst
@@ -38,6 +38,9 @@ Procedure for submitting patches to the -stable tree
  - If the patch covers files in net/ or drivers/net please follow netdev stable
    submission guidelines as described in
    :ref:`Documentation/networking/netdev-FAQ.rst <netdev-FAQ>`
+   after first checking the stable networking queue at
+   https://patchwork.ozlabs.org/bundle/davem/stable/?series=&submitter=&state=*&q=&archive=
+   to ensure the requested patch is not already queued up.
  - Security patches should not be handled (solely) by the -stable review
    process but should follow the procedures in
    :ref:`Documentation/admin-guide/security-bugs.rst <securitybugs>`.
@@ -98,9 +101,9 @@ text, like this:
 
     commit <sha1> upstream.
 
-Additionally, some patches submitted via Option 1 may have additional patch
-prerequisites which can be cherry-picked. This can be specified in the following
-format in the sign-off area:
+Additionally, some patches submitted via :ref:`option_1` may have additional
+patch prerequisites which can be cherry-picked. This can be specified in the
+following format in the sign-off area:
 
 .. code-block:: none
 
diff --git a/Documentation/process/submit-checklist.rst b/Documentation/process/submit-checklist.rst
index 367353c54949..c88867b173d9 100644
--- a/Documentation/process/submit-checklist.rst
+++ b/Documentation/process/submit-checklist.rst
@@ -72,47 +72,44 @@ and elsewhere regarding submitting Linux kernel patches.
 13) Has been build- and runtime tested with and without ``CONFIG_SMP`` and
     ``CONFIG_PREEMPT.``
 
-14) If the patch affects IO/Disk, etc: has been tested with and without
-    ``CONFIG_LBDAF.``
+16) All codepaths have been exercised with all lockdep features enabled.
 
-15) All codepaths have been exercised with all lockdep features enabled.
+17) All new ``/proc`` entries are documented under ``Documentation/``
 
-16) All new ``/proc`` entries are documented under ``Documentation/``
-
-17) All new kernel boot parameters are documented in
+18) All new kernel boot parameters are documented in
     ``Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.rst``.
 
-18) All new module parameters are documented with ``MODULE_PARM_DESC()``
+19) All new module parameters are documented with ``MODULE_PARM_DESC()``
 
-19) All new userspace interfaces are documented in ``Documentation/ABI/``.
+20) All new userspace interfaces are documented in ``Documentation/ABI/``.
     See ``Documentation/ABI/README`` for more information.
     Patches that change userspace interfaces should be CCed to
     linux-api@vger.kernel.org.
 
-20) Check that it all passes ``make headers_check``.
+21) Check that it all passes ``make headers_check``.
 
-21) Has been checked with injection of at least slab and page-allocation
+22) Has been checked with injection of at least slab and page-allocation
     failures.  See ``Documentation/fault-injection/``.
 
     If the new code is substantial, addition of subsystem-specific fault
     injection might be appropriate.
 
-22) Newly-added code has been compiled with ``gcc -W`` (use
+23) Newly-added code has been compiled with ``gcc -W`` (use
     ``make EXTRA_CFLAGS=-W``).  This will generate lots of noise, but is good
     for finding bugs like "warning: comparison between signed and unsigned".
 
-23) Tested after it has been merged into the -mm patchset to make sure
+24) Tested after it has been merged into the -mm patchset to make sure
     that it still works with all of the other queued patches and various
     changes in the VM, VFS, and other subsystems.
 
-24) All memory barriers {e.g., ``barrier()``, ``rmb()``, ``wmb()``} need a
+25) All memory barriers {e.g., ``barrier()``, ``rmb()``, ``wmb()``} need a
     comment in the source code that explains the logic of what they are doing
     and why.
 
-25) If any ioctl's are added by the patch, then also update
+26) If any ioctl's are added by the patch, then also update
     ``Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt``.
 
-26) If your modified source code depends on or uses any of the kernel
+27) If your modified source code depends on or uses any of the kernel
     APIs or features that are related to the following ``Kconfig`` symbols,
     then test multiple builds with the related ``Kconfig`` symbols disabled
     and/or ``=m`` (if that option is available) [not all of these at the
diff --git a/Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst b/Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst
index 30dc00a364e8..9c4299293c72 100644
--- a/Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst
+++ b/Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst
@@ -60,8 +60,8 @@ not in any lower subdirectory.
 
 To create a patch for a single file, it is often sufficient to do::
 
-	SRCTREE= linux
-	MYFILE=  drivers/net/mydriver.c
+	SRCTREE=linux
+	MYFILE=drivers/net/mydriver.c
 
 	cd $SRCTREE
 	cp $MYFILE $MYFILE.orig
@@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ To create a patch for multiple files, you should unpack a "vanilla",
 or unmodified kernel source tree, and generate a ``diff`` against your
 own source tree.  For example::
 
-	MYSRC= /devel/linux
+	MYSRC=/devel/linux
 
 	tar xvfz linux-3.19.tar.gz
 	mv linux-3.19 linux-3.19-vanilla
@@ -182,9 +182,11 @@ change five years from now.
 
 If your patch fixes a bug in a specific commit, e.g. you found an issue using
 ``git bisect``, please use the 'Fixes:' tag with the first 12 characters of
-the SHA-1 ID, and the one line summary.  For example::
+the SHA-1 ID, and the one line summary.  Do not split the tag across multiple
+lines, tags are exempt from the "wrap at 75 columns" rule in order to simplify
+parsing scripts.  For example::
 
-	Fixes: e21d2170f366 ("video: remove unnecessary platform_set_drvdata()")
+	Fixes: 54a4f0239f2e ("KVM: MMU: make kvm_mmu_zap_page() return the number of pages it actually freed")
 
 The following ``git config`` settings can be used to add a pretty format for
 outputting the above style in the ``git log`` or ``git show`` commands::
@@ -543,10 +545,40 @@ person it names - but it should indicate that this person was copied on the
 patch.  This tag documents that potentially interested parties
 have been included in the discussion.
 
-A Co-developed-by: states that the patch was also created by another developer
-along with the original author.  This is useful at times when multiple people
-work on a single patch.  Note, this person also needs to have a Signed-off-by:
-line in the patch as well.
+Co-developed-by: states that the patch was co-created by multiple developers;
+it is a used to give attribution to co-authors (in addition to the author
+attributed by the From: tag) when several people work on a single patch.  Since
+Co-developed-by: denotes authorship, every Co-developed-by: must be immediately
+followed by a Signed-off-by: of the associated co-author.  Standard sign-off
+procedure applies, i.e. the ordering of Signed-off-by: tags should reflect the
+chronological history of the patch insofar as possible, regardless of whether
+the author is attributed via From: or Co-developed-by:.  Notably, the last
+Signed-off-by: must always be that of the developer submitting the patch.
+
+Note, the From: tag is optional when the From: author is also the person (and
+email) listed in the From: line of the email header.
+
+Example of a patch submitted by the From: author::
+
+	<changelog>
+
+	Co-developed-by: First Co-Author <first@coauthor.example.org>
+	Signed-off-by: First Co-Author <first@coauthor.example.org>
+	Co-developed-by: Second Co-Author <second@coauthor.example.org>
+	Signed-off-by: Second Co-Author <second@coauthor.example.org>
+	Signed-off-by: From Author <from@author.example.org>
+
+Example of a patch submitted by a Co-developed-by: author::
+
+	From: From Author <from@author.example.org>
+
+	<changelog>
+
+	Co-developed-by: Random Co-Author <random@coauthor.example.org>
+	Signed-off-by: Random Co-Author <random@coauthor.example.org>
+	Signed-off-by: From Author <from@author.example.org>
+	Co-developed-by: Submitting Co-Author <sub@coauthor.example.org>
+	Signed-off-by: Submitting Co-Author <sub@coauthor.example.org>
 
 
 13) Using Reported-by:, Tested-by:, Reviewed-by:, Suggested-by: and Fixes:
@@ -694,7 +726,7 @@ A couple of example Subjects::
 The ``from`` line must be the very first line in the message body,
 and has the form:
 
-        From: Original Author <author@example.com>
+        From: Patch Author <author@example.com>
 
 The ``from`` line specifies who will be credited as the author of the
 patch in the permanent changelog.  If the ``from`` line is missing,
diff --git a/Documentation/robust-futexes.txt b/Documentation/robust-futexes.txt
index 6c42c75103eb..6361fb01c9c1 100644
--- a/Documentation/robust-futexes.txt
+++ b/Documentation/robust-futexes.txt
@@ -218,5 +218,4 @@ All other architectures should build just fine too - but they won't have
 the new syscalls yet.
 
 Architectures need to implement the new futex_atomic_cmpxchg_inatomic()
-inline function before writing up the syscalls (that function returns
--ENOSYS right now).
+inline function before writing up the syscalls.
diff --git a/Documentation/rtc.txt b/Documentation/rtc.txt
index a129acf38537..688c95b11919 100644
--- a/Documentation/rtc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/rtc.txt
@@ -136,5 +136,5 @@ a high functionality RTC is integrated into the SOC.  That system might read
 the system clock from the discrete RTC, but use the integrated one for all
 other tasks, because of its greater functionality.
 
-Check out tools/testing/selftests/timers/rtctest.c for an example usage of the
+Check out tools/testing/selftests/rtc/rtctest.c for an example usage of the
 ioctl interface.
diff --git a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-energy.txt b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-energy.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..197d81f4b836
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-energy.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,425 @@
+			   =======================
+			   Energy Aware Scheduling
+			   =======================
+
+1. Introduction
+---------------
+
+Energy Aware Scheduling (or EAS) gives the scheduler the ability to predict
+the impact of its decisions on the energy consumed by CPUs. EAS relies on an
+Energy Model (EM) of the CPUs to select an energy efficient CPU for each task,
+with a minimal impact on throughput. This document aims at providing an
+introduction on how EAS works, what are the main design decisions behind it, and
+details what is needed to get it to run.
+
+Before going any further, please note that at the time of writing:
+
+   /!\ EAS does not support platforms with symmetric CPU topologies /!\
+
+EAS operates only on heterogeneous CPU topologies (such as Arm big.LITTLE)
+because this is where the potential for saving energy through scheduling is
+the highest.
+
+The actual EM used by EAS is _not_ maintained by the scheduler, but by a
+dedicated framework. For details about this framework and what it provides,
+please refer to its documentation (see Documentation/power/energy-model.txt).
+
+
+2. Background and Terminology
+-----------------------------
+
+To make it clear from the start:
+ - energy = [joule] (resource like a battery on powered devices)
+ - power = energy/time = [joule/second] = [watt]
+
+The goal of EAS is to minimize energy, while still getting the job done. That
+is, we want to maximize:
+
+	performance [inst/s]
+	--------------------
+	    power [W]
+
+which is equivalent to minimizing:
+
+	energy [J]
+	-----------
+	instruction
+
+while still getting 'good' performance. It is essentially an alternative
+optimization objective to the current performance-only objective for the
+scheduler. This alternative considers two objectives: energy-efficiency and
+performance.
+
+The idea behind introducing an EM is to allow the scheduler to evaluate the
+implications of its decisions rather than blindly applying energy-saving
+techniques that may have positive effects only on some platforms. At the same
+time, the EM must be as simple as possible to minimize the scheduler latency
+impact.
+
+In short, EAS changes the way CFS tasks are assigned to CPUs. When it is time
+for the scheduler to decide where a task should run (during wake-up), the EM
+is used to break the tie between several good CPU candidates and pick the one
+that is predicted to yield the best energy consumption without harming the
+system's throughput. The predictions made by EAS rely on specific elements of
+knowledge about the platform's topology, which include the 'capacity' of CPUs,
+and their respective energy costs.
+
+
+3. Topology information
+-----------------------
+
+EAS (as well as the rest of the scheduler) uses the notion of 'capacity' to
+differentiate CPUs with different computing throughput. The 'capacity' of a CPU
+represents the amount of work it can absorb when running at its highest
+frequency compared to the most capable CPU of the system. Capacity values are
+normalized in a 1024 range, and are comparable with the utilization signals of
+tasks and CPUs computed by the Per-Entity Load Tracking (PELT) mechanism. Thanks
+to capacity and utilization values, EAS is able to estimate how big/busy a
+task/CPU is, and to take this into consideration when evaluating performance vs
+energy trade-offs. The capacity of CPUs is provided via arch-specific code
+through the arch_scale_cpu_capacity() callback.
+
+The rest of platform knowledge used by EAS is directly read from the Energy
+Model (EM) framework. The EM of a platform is composed of a power cost table
+per 'performance domain' in the system (see Documentation/power/energy-model.txt
+for futher details about performance domains).
+
+The scheduler manages references to the EM objects in the topology code when the
+scheduling domains are built, or re-built. For each root domain (rd), the
+scheduler maintains a singly linked list of all performance domains intersecting
+the current rd->span. Each node in the list contains a pointer to a struct
+em_perf_domain as provided by the EM framework.
+
+The lists are attached to the root domains in order to cope with exclusive
+cpuset configurations. Since the boundaries of exclusive cpusets do not
+necessarily match those of performance domains, the lists of different root
+domains can contain duplicate elements.
+
+Example 1.
+    Let us consider a platform with 12 CPUs, split in 3 performance domains
+    (pd0, pd4 and pd8), organized as follows:
+
+	          CPUs:   0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
+	          PDs:   |--pd0--|--pd4--|---pd8---|
+	          RDs:   |----rd1----|-----rd2-----|
+
+    Now, consider that userspace decided to split the system with two
+    exclusive cpusets, hence creating two independent root domains, each
+    containing 6 CPUs. The two root domains are denoted rd1 and rd2 in the
+    above figure. Since pd4 intersects with both rd1 and rd2, it will be
+    present in the linked list '->pd' attached to each of them:
+       * rd1->pd: pd0 -> pd4
+       * rd2->pd: pd4 -> pd8
+
+    Please note that the scheduler will create two duplicate list nodes for
+    pd4 (one for each list). However, both just hold a pointer to the same
+    shared data structure of the EM framework.
+
+Since the access to these lists can happen concurrently with hotplug and other
+things, they are protected by RCU, like the rest of topology structures
+manipulated by the scheduler.
+
+EAS also maintains a static key (sched_energy_present) which is enabled when at
+least one root domain meets all conditions for EAS to start. Those conditions
+are summarized in Section 6.
+
+
+4. Energy-Aware task placement
+------------------------------
+
+EAS overrides the CFS task wake-up balancing code. It uses the EM of the
+platform and the PELT signals to choose an energy-efficient target CPU during
+wake-up balance. When EAS is enabled, select_task_rq_fair() calls
+find_energy_efficient_cpu() to do the placement decision. This function looks
+for the CPU with the highest spare capacity (CPU capacity - CPU utilization) in
+each performance domain since it is the one which will allow us to keep the
+frequency the lowest. Then, the function checks if placing the task there could
+save energy compared to leaving it on prev_cpu, i.e. the CPU where the task ran
+in its previous activation.
+
+find_energy_efficient_cpu() uses compute_energy() to estimate what will be the
+energy consumed by the system if the waking task was migrated. compute_energy()
+looks at the current utilization landscape of the CPUs and adjusts it to
+'simulate' the task migration. The EM framework provides the em_pd_energy() API
+which computes the expected energy consumption of each performance domain for
+the given utilization landscape.
+
+An example of energy-optimized task placement decision is detailed below.
+
+Example 2.
+    Let us consider a (fake) platform with 2 independent performance domains
+    composed of two CPUs each. CPU0 and CPU1 are little CPUs; CPU2 and CPU3
+    are big.
+
+    The scheduler must decide where to place a task P whose util_avg = 200
+    and prev_cpu = 0.
+
+    The current utilization landscape of the CPUs is depicted on the graph
+    below. CPUs 0-3 have a util_avg of 400, 100, 600 and 500 respectively
+    Each performance domain has three Operating Performance Points (OPPs).
+    The CPU capacity and power cost associated with each OPP is listed in
+    the Energy Model table. The util_avg of P is shown on the figures
+    below as 'PP'.
+
+    CPU util.
+      1024                 - - - - - - -              Energy Model
+                                               +-----------+-------------+
+                                               |  Little   |     Big     |
+       768                 =============       +-----+-----+------+------+
+                                               | Cap | Pwr | Cap  | Pwr  |
+                                               +-----+-----+------+------+
+       512  ===========    - ##- - - - -       | 170 | 50  | 512  | 400  |
+                             ##     ##         | 341 | 150 | 768  | 800  |
+       341  -PP - - - -      ##     ##         | 512 | 300 | 1024 | 1700 |
+             PP              ##     ##         +-----+-----+------+------+
+       170  -## - - - -      ##     ##
+             ##     ##       ##     ##
+           ------------    -------------
+            CPU0   CPU1     CPU2   CPU3
+
+      Current OPP: =====       Other OPP: - - -     util_avg (100 each): ##
+
+
+    find_energy_efficient_cpu() will first look for the CPUs with the
+    maximum spare capacity in the two performance domains. In this example,
+    CPU1 and CPU3. Then it will estimate the energy of the system if P was
+    placed on either of them, and check if that would save some energy
+    compared to leaving P on CPU0. EAS assumes that OPPs follow utilization
+    (which is coherent with the behaviour of the schedutil CPUFreq
+    governor, see Section 6. for more details on this topic).
+
+    Case 1. P is migrated to CPU1
+    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+      1024                 - - - - - - -
+
+                                            Energy calculation:
+       768                 =============     * CPU0: 200 / 341 * 150 = 88
+                                             * CPU1: 300 / 341 * 150 = 131
+                                             * CPU2: 600 / 768 * 800 = 625
+       512  - - - - - -    - ##- - - - -     * CPU3: 500 / 768 * 800 = 520
+                             ##     ##          => total_energy = 1364
+       341  ===========      ##     ##
+                    PP       ##     ##
+       170  -## - - PP-      ##     ##
+             ##     ##       ##     ##
+           ------------    -------------
+            CPU0   CPU1     CPU2   CPU3
+
+
+    Case 2. P is migrated to CPU3
+    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+      1024                 - - - - - - -
+
+                                            Energy calculation:
+       768                 =============     * CPU0: 200 / 341 * 150 = 88
+                                             * CPU1: 100 / 341 * 150 = 43
+                                    PP       * CPU2: 600 / 768 * 800 = 625
+       512  - - - - - -    - ##- - -PP -     * CPU3: 700 / 768 * 800 = 729
+                             ##     ##          => total_energy = 1485
+       341  ===========      ##     ##
+                             ##     ##
+       170  -## - - - -      ##     ##
+             ##     ##       ##     ##
+           ------------    -------------
+            CPU0   CPU1     CPU2   CPU3
+
+
+    Case 3. P stays on prev_cpu / CPU 0
+    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+      1024                 - - - - - - -
+
+                                            Energy calculation:
+       768                 =============     * CPU0: 400 / 512 * 300 = 234
+                                             * CPU1: 100 / 512 * 300 = 58
+                                             * CPU2: 600 / 768 * 800 = 625
+       512  ===========    - ##- - - - -     * CPU3: 500 / 768 * 800 = 520
+                             ##     ##          => total_energy = 1437
+       341  -PP - - - -      ##     ##
+             PP              ##     ##
+       170  -## - - - -      ##     ##
+             ##     ##       ##     ##
+           ------------    -------------
+            CPU0   CPU1     CPU2   CPU3
+
+
+    From these calculations, the Case 1 has the lowest total energy. So CPU 1
+    is be the best candidate from an energy-efficiency standpoint.
+
+Big CPUs are generally more power hungry than the little ones and are thus used
+mainly when a task doesn't fit the littles. However, little CPUs aren't always
+necessarily more energy-efficient than big CPUs. For some systems, the high OPPs
+of the little CPUs can be less energy-efficient than the lowest OPPs of the
+bigs, for example. So, if the little CPUs happen to have enough utilization at
+a specific point in time, a small task waking up at that moment could be better
+of executing on the big side in order to save energy, even though it would fit
+on the little side.
+
+And even in the case where all OPPs of the big CPUs are less energy-efficient
+than those of the little, using the big CPUs for a small task might still, under
+specific conditions, save energy. Indeed, placing a task on a little CPU can
+result in raising the OPP of the entire performance domain, and that will
+increase the cost of the tasks already running there. If the waking task is
+placed on a big CPU, its own execution cost might be higher than if it was
+running on a little, but it won't impact the other tasks of the little CPUs
+which will keep running at a lower OPP. So, when considering the total energy
+consumed by CPUs, the extra cost of running that one task on a big core can be
+smaller than the cost of raising the OPP on the little CPUs for all the other
+tasks.
+
+The examples above would be nearly impossible to get right in a generic way, and
+for all platforms, without knowing the cost of running at different OPPs on all
+CPUs of the system. Thanks to its EM-based design, EAS should cope with them
+correctly without too many troubles. However, in order to ensure a minimal
+impact on throughput for high-utilization scenarios, EAS also implements another
+mechanism called 'over-utilization'.
+
+
+5. Over-utilization
+-------------------
+
+From a general standpoint, the use-cases where EAS can help the most are those
+involving a light/medium CPU utilization. Whenever long CPU-bound tasks are
+being run, they will require all of the available CPU capacity, and there isn't
+much that can be done by the scheduler to save energy without severly harming
+throughput. In order to avoid hurting performance with EAS, CPUs are flagged as
+'over-utilized' as soon as they are used at more than 80% of their compute
+capacity. As long as no CPUs are over-utilized in a root domain, load balancing
+is disabled and EAS overridess the wake-up balancing code. EAS is likely to load
+the most energy efficient CPUs of the system more than the others if that can be
+done without harming throughput. So, the load-balancer is disabled to prevent
+it from breaking the energy-efficient task placement found by EAS. It is safe to
+do so when the system isn't overutilized since being below the 80% tipping point
+implies that:
+
+    a. there is some idle time on all CPUs, so the utilization signals used by
+       EAS are likely to accurately represent the 'size' of the various tasks
+       in the system;
+    b. all tasks should already be provided with enough CPU capacity,
+       regardless of their nice values;
+    c. since there is spare capacity all tasks must be blocking/sleeping
+       regularly and balancing at wake-up is sufficient.
+
+As soon as one CPU goes above the 80% tipping point, at least one of the three
+assumptions above becomes incorrect. In this scenario, the 'overutilized' flag
+is raised for the entire root domain, EAS is disabled, and the load-balancer is
+re-enabled. By doing so, the scheduler falls back onto load-based algorithms for
+wake-up and load balance under CPU-bound conditions. This provides a better
+respect of the nice values of tasks.
+
+Since the notion of overutilization largely relies on detecting whether or not
+there is some idle time in the system, the CPU capacity 'stolen' by higher
+(than CFS) scheduling classes (as well as IRQ) must be taken into account. As
+such, the detection of overutilization accounts for the capacity used not only
+by CFS tasks, but also by the other scheduling classes and IRQ.
+
+
+6. Dependencies and requirements for EAS
+----------------------------------------
+
+Energy Aware Scheduling depends on the CPUs of the system having specific
+hardware properties and on other features of the kernel being enabled. This
+section lists these dependencies and provides hints as to how they can be met.
+
+
+  6.1 - Asymmetric CPU topology
+
+As mentioned in the introduction, EAS is only supported on platforms with
+asymmetric CPU topologies for now. This requirement is checked at run-time by
+looking for the presence of the SD_ASYM_CPUCAPACITY flag when the scheduling
+domains are built.
+
+The flag is set/cleared automatically by the scheduler topology code whenever
+there are CPUs with different capacities in a root domain. The capacities of
+CPUs are provided by arch-specific code through the arch_scale_cpu_capacity()
+callback. As an example, arm and arm64 share an implementation of this callback
+which uses a combination of CPUFreq data and device-tree bindings to compute the
+capacity of CPUs (see drivers/base/arch_topology.c for more details).
+
+So, in order to use EAS on your platform your architecture must implement the
+arch_scale_cpu_capacity() callback, and some of the CPUs must have a lower
+capacity than others.
+
+Please note that EAS is not fundamentally incompatible with SMP, but no
+significant savings on SMP platforms have been observed yet. This restriction
+could be amended in the future if proven otherwise.
+
+
+  6.2 - Energy Model presence
+
+EAS uses the EM of a platform to estimate the impact of scheduling decisions on
+energy. So, your platform must provide power cost tables to the EM framework in
+order to make EAS start. To do so, please refer to documentation of the
+independent EM framework in Documentation/power/energy-model.txt.
+
+Please also note that the scheduling domains need to be re-built after the
+EM has been registered in order to start EAS.
+
+
+  6.3 - Energy Model complexity
+
+The task wake-up path is very latency-sensitive. When the EM of a platform is
+too complex (too many CPUs, too many performance domains, too many performance
+states, ...), the cost of using it in the wake-up path can become prohibitive.
+The energy-aware wake-up algorithm has a complexity of:
+
+	C = Nd * (Nc + Ns)
+
+with: Nd the number of performance domains; Nc the number of CPUs; and Ns the
+total number of OPPs (ex: for two perf. domains with 4 OPPs each, Ns = 8).
+
+A complexity check is performed at the root domain level, when scheduling
+domains are built. EAS will not start on a root domain if its C happens to be
+higher than the completely arbitrary EM_MAX_COMPLEXITY threshold (2048 at the
+time of writing).
+
+If you really want to use EAS but the complexity of your platform's Energy
+Model is too high to be used with a single root domain, you're left with only
+two possible options:
+
+    1. split your system into separate, smaller, root domains using exclusive
+       cpusets and enable EAS locally on each of them. This option has the
+       benefit to work out of the box but the drawback of preventing load
+       balance between root domains, which can result in an unbalanced system
+       overall;
+    2. submit patches to reduce the complexity of the EAS wake-up algorithm,
+       hence enabling it to cope with larger EMs in reasonable time.
+
+
+  6.4 - Schedutil governor
+
+EAS tries to predict at which OPP will the CPUs be running in the close future
+in order to estimate their energy consumption. To do so, it is assumed that OPPs
+of CPUs follow their utilization.
+
+Although it is very difficult to provide hard guarantees regarding the accuracy
+of this assumption in practice (because the hardware might not do what it is
+told to do, for example), schedutil as opposed to other CPUFreq governors at
+least _requests_ frequencies calculated using the utilization signals.
+Consequently, the only sane governor to use together with EAS is schedutil,
+because it is the only one providing some degree of consistency between
+frequency requests and energy predictions.
+
+Using EAS with any other governor than schedutil is not supported.
+
+
+  6.5 Scale-invariant utilization signals
+
+In order to make accurate prediction across CPUs and for all performance
+states, EAS needs frequency-invariant and CPU-invariant PELT signals. These can
+be obtained using the architecture-defined arch_scale{cpu,freq}_capacity()
+callbacks.
+
+Using EAS on a platform that doesn't implement these two callbacks is not
+supported.
+
+
+  6.6 Multithreading (SMT)
+
+EAS in its current form is SMT unaware and is not able to leverage
+multithreaded hardware to save energy. EAS considers threads as independent
+CPUs, which can actually be counter-productive for both performance and energy.
+
+EAS on SMT is not supported.
diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/osd.txt b/Documentation/scsi/osd.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 5a9879bad073..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/scsi/osd.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,197 +0,0 @@
-The OSD Standard
-================
-OSD (Object-Based Storage Device) is a T10 SCSI command set that is designed
-to provide efficient operation of input/output logical units that manage the
-allocation, placement, and accessing of variable-size data-storage containers,
-called objects. Objects are intended to contain operating system and application
-constructs. Each object has associated attributes attached to it, which are
-integral part of the object and provide metadata about the object. The standard
-defines some common obligatory attributes, but user attributes can be added as
-needed.
-
-See: http://www.t10.org/ftp/t10/drafts/osd2/ for the latest draft for OSD 2
-or search the web for "OSD SCSI"
-
-OSD in the Linux Kernel
-=======================
-osd-initiator:
-  The main component of OSD in Kernel is the osd-initiator library. Its main
-user is intended to be the pNFS-over-objects layout driver, which uses objects
-as its back-end data storage. Other clients are the other osd parts listed below.
-
-osd-uld:
-  This is a SCSI ULD that registers for OSD type devices and provides a testing
-platform, both for the in-kernel initiator as well as connected targets. It
-currently has no useful user-mode API, though it could have if need be.
-
-exofs:
-  Is an OSD based Linux file system. It uses the osd-initiator and osd-uld,
-to export a usable file system for users.
-See Documentation/filesystems/exofs.txt for more details
-
-osd target:
-  There are no current plans for an OSD target implementation in kernel. For all
-needs, a user-mode target that is based on the scsi tgt target framework is
-available from Ohio Supercomputer Center (OSC) at:
-http://www.open-osd.org/bin/view/Main/OscOsdProject
-There are several other target implementations. See http://open-osd.org for more
-links.
-
-Files and Folders
-=================
-This is the complete list of files included in this work:
-include/scsi/
-	osd_initiator.h   Main API for the initiator library
-	osd_types.h	  Common OSD types
-	osd_sec.h	  Security Manager API
-	osd_protocol.h	  Wire definitions of the OSD standard protocol
-	osd_attributes.h  Wire definitions of OSD attributes
-
-drivers/scsi/osd/
-	osd_initiator.c   OSD-Initiator library implementation
-	osd_uld.c	  The OSD scsi ULD
-	osd_ktest.{h,c}	  In-kernel test suite (called by osd_uld)
-	osd_debug.h	  Some printk macros
-	Makefile	  For both in-tree and out-of-tree compilation
-	Kconfig		  Enables inclusion of the different pieces
-	osd_test.c	  User-mode application to call the kernel tests
-
-The OSD-Initiator Library
-=========================
-osd_initiator is a low level implementation of an osd initiator encoder.
-But even though, it should be intuitive and easy to use. Perhaps over time an
-higher lever will form that automates some of the more common recipes.
-
-init/fini:
-- osd_dev_init() associates a scsi_device with an osd_dev structure
-  and initializes some global pools. This should be done once per scsi_device
-  (OSD LUN). The osd_dev structure is needed for calling osd_start_request().
-
-- osd_dev_fini() cleans up before a osd_dev/scsi_device destruction.
-
-OSD commands encoding, execution, and decoding of results:
-
-struct osd_request's is used to iteratively encode an OSD command and carry
-its state throughout execution. Each request goes through these stages:
-
-a. osd_start_request() allocates the request.
-
-b. Any of the osd_req_* methods is used to encode a request of the specified
-   type.
-
-c. osd_req_add_{get,set}_attr_* may be called to add get/set attributes to the
-   CDB. "List" or "Page" mode can be used exclusively. The attribute-list API
-   can be called multiple times on the same request. However, only one
-   attribute-page can be read, as mandated by the OSD standard.
-
-d. osd_finalize_request() computes offsets into the data-in and data-out buffers
-   and signs the request using the provided capability key and integrity-
-   check parameters.
-
-e. osd_execute_request() may be called to execute the request via the block
-   layer and wait for its completion.  The request can be executed
-   asynchronously by calling the block layer API directly.
-
-f. After execution, osd_req_decode_sense() can be called to decode the request's
-   sense information.
-
-g. osd_req_decode_get_attr() may be called to retrieve osd_add_get_attr_list()
-   values.
-
-h. osd_end_request() must be called to deallocate the request and any resource
-   associated with it. Note that osd_end_request cleans up the request at any
-   stage and it must always be called after a successful osd_start_request().
-
-osd_request's structure:
-
-The OSD standard defines a complex structure of IO segments pointed to by
-members in the CDB. Up to 3 segments can be deployed in the IN-Buffer and up to
-4 in the OUT-Buffer. The ASCII illustration below depicts a secure-read with
-associated get+set of attributes-lists. Other combinations very on the same
-basic theme. From no-segments-used up to all-segments-used.
-
-|________OSD-CDB__________|
-|                         |
-|read_len (offset=0)     -|---------\
-|                         |         |
-|get_attrs_list_length    |         |
-|get_attrs_list_offset   -|----\    |
-|                         |    |    |
-|retrieved_attrs_alloc_len|    |    |
-|retrieved_attrs_offset  -|----|----|-\
-|                         |    |    | |
-|set_attrs_list_length    |    |    | |
-|set_attrs_list_offset   -|-\  |    | |
-|                         | |  |    | |
-|in_data_integ_offset    -|-|--|----|-|-\
-|out_data_integ_offset   -|-|--|--\ | | |
-\_________________________/ |  |  | | | |
-                            |  |  | | | |
-|_______OUT-BUFFER________| |  |  | | | |
-|      Set attr list      |</  |  | | | |
-|                         |    |  | | | |
-|-------------------------|    |  | | | |
-|   Get attr descriptors  |<---/  | | | |
-|                         |       | | | |
-|-------------------------|       | | | |
-|    Out-data integrity   |<------/ | | |
-|                         |         | | |
-\_________________________/         | | |
-                                    | | |
-|________IN-BUFFER________|         | | |
-|      In-Data read       |<--------/ | |
-|                         |           | |
-|-------------------------|           | |
-|      Get attr list      |<----------/ |
-|                         |             |
-|-------------------------|             |
-|    In-data integrity    |<------------/
-|                         |
-\_________________________/
-
-A block device request can carry bidirectional payload by means of associating
-a bidi_read request with a main write-request. Each in/out request is described
-by a chain of BIOs associated with each request.
-The CDB is of a SCSI VARLEN CDB format, as described by OSD standard.
-The OSD standard also mandates alignment restrictions at start of each segment.
-
-In the code, in struct osd_request, there are two _osd_io_info structures to
-describe the IN/OUT buffers above, two BIOs for the data payload and up to five
-_osd_req_data_segment structures to hold the different segments allocation and
-information.
-
-Important: We have chosen to disregard the assumption that a BIO-chain (and
-the resulting sg-list) describes a linear memory buffer. Meaning only first and
-last scatter chain can be incomplete and all the middle chains are of PAGE_SIZE.
-For us, a scatter-gather-list, as its name implies and as used by the Networking
-layer, is to describe a vector of buffers that will be transferred to/from the
-wire. It works very well with current iSCSI transport. iSCSI is currently the
-only deployed OSD transport. In the future we anticipate SAS and FC attached OSD
-devices as well.
-
-The OSD Testing ULD
-===================
-TODO: More user-mode control on tests.
-
-Authors, Mailing list
-=====================
-Please communicate with us on any deployment of osd, whether using this code
-or not.
-
-Any problems, questions, bug reports, lonely OSD nights, please email:
-   OSD Dev List <osd-dev@open-osd.org>
-
-More up-to-date information can be found on:
-http://open-osd.org
-
-Boaz Harrosh <ooo@electrozaur.com>
-
-References
-==========
-Weber, R., "SCSI Object-Based Storage Device Commands",
-T10/1355-D ANSI/INCITS 400-2004,
-http://www.t10.org/ftp/t10/drafts/osd/osd-r10.pdf
-
-Weber, R., "SCSI Object-Based Storage Device Commands -2 (OSD-2)"
-T10/1729-D, Working Draft, rev. 3
-http://www.t10.org/ftp/t10/drafts/osd2/osd2r03.pdf
diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ufs.txt b/Documentation/scsi/ufs.txt
index 520b5b033256..1769f71c4c20 100644
--- a/Documentation/scsi/ufs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/scsi/ufs.txt
@@ -147,6 +147,17 @@ send SG_IO with the applicable sg_io_v4:
 	io_hdr_v4.max_response_len = reply_len;
 	io_hdr_v4.request_len = request_len;
 	io_hdr_v4.request = (__u64)request_upiu;
+	if (dir == SG_DXFER_TO_DEV) {
+		io_hdr_v4.dout_xfer_len = (uint32_t)byte_cnt;
+		io_hdr_v4.dout_xferp = (uintptr_t)(__u64)buff;
+	} else {
+		io_hdr_v4.din_xfer_len = (uint32_t)byte_cnt;
+		io_hdr_v4.din_xferp = (uintptr_t)(__u64)buff;
+	}
+
+If you wish to read or write a descriptor, use the appropriate xferp of
+sg_io_v4.
+
 
 UFS Specifications can be found at,
 UFS - http://www.jedec.org/sites/default/files/docs/JESD220.pdf
diff --git a/Documentation/security/LSM.rst b/Documentation/security/LSM.rst
index 8b9ee597e9d0..31d92bc5fdd2 100644
--- a/Documentation/security/LSM.rst
+++ b/Documentation/security/LSM.rst
@@ -11,4 +11,7 @@ that end users and distros can make a more informed decision about which
 LSMs suit their requirements.
 
 For extensive documentation on the available LSM hook interfaces, please
-see ``include/linux/lsm_hooks.h``.
+see ``include/linux/lsm_hooks.h`` and associated structures:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/lsm_hooks.h
+   :internal:
diff --git a/Documentation/security/LSM-sctp.rst b/Documentation/security/SCTP.rst
index 6e5a3925a860..d903eb97fcf3 100644
--- a/Documentation/security/LSM-sctp.rst
+++ b/Documentation/security/SCTP.rst
@@ -1,6 +1,15 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+====
+SCTP
+====
+
 SCTP LSM Support
 ================
 
+Security Hooks
+--------------
+
 For security module support, three SCTP specific hooks have been implemented::
 
     security_sctp_assoc_request()
@@ -12,11 +21,11 @@ Also the following security hook has been utilised::
     security_inet_conn_established()
 
 The usage of these hooks are described below with the SELinux implementation
-described in ``Documentation/security/SELinux-sctp.rst``
+described in the `SCTP SELinux Support`_ chapter.
 
 
 security_sctp_assoc_request()
------------------------------
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 Passes the ``@ep`` and ``@chunk->skb`` of the association INIT packet to the
 security module. Returns 0 on success, error on failure.
 ::
@@ -26,7 +35,7 @@ security module. Returns 0 on success, error on failure.
 
 
 security_sctp_bind_connect()
------------------------------
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 Passes one or more ipv4/ipv6 addresses to the security module for validation
 based on the ``@optname`` that will result in either a bind or connect
 service as shown in the permission check tables below.
@@ -102,7 +111,7 @@ ASCONF chunk when the corresponding ``@optname``'s are present::
 
 
 security_sctp_sk_clone()
--------------------------
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 Called whenever a new socket is created by **accept**\(2)
 (i.e. a TCP style socket) or when a socket is 'peeled off' e.g userspace
 calls **sctp_peeloff**\(3).
@@ -114,7 +123,7 @@ calls **sctp_peeloff**\(3).
 
 
 security_inet_conn_established()
----------------------------------
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 Called when a COOKIE ACK is received::
 
     @sk  - pointer to sock structure.
@@ -122,7 +131,8 @@ Called when a COOKIE ACK is received::
 
 
 Security Hooks used for Association Establishment
-=================================================
+-------------------------------------------------
+
 The following diagram shows the use of ``security_sctp_bind_connect()``,
 ``security_sctp_assoc_request()``, ``security_inet_conn_established()`` when
 establishing an association.
@@ -173,3 +183,161 @@ establishing an association.
     ------------------------------------------------------------------
 
 
+SCTP SELinux Support
+====================
+
+Security Hooks
+--------------
+
+The `SCTP LSM Support`_ chapter above describes the following SCTP security
+hooks with the SELinux specifics expanded below::
+
+    security_sctp_assoc_request()
+    security_sctp_bind_connect()
+    security_sctp_sk_clone()
+    security_inet_conn_established()
+
+
+security_sctp_assoc_request()
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Passes the ``@ep`` and ``@chunk->skb`` of the association INIT packet to the
+security module. Returns 0 on success, error on failure.
+::
+
+    @ep - pointer to sctp endpoint structure.
+    @skb - pointer to skbuff of association packet.
+
+The security module performs the following operations:
+     IF this is the first association on ``@ep->base.sk``, then set the peer
+     sid to that in ``@skb``. This will ensure there is only one peer sid
+     assigned to ``@ep->base.sk`` that may support multiple associations.
+
+     ELSE validate the ``@ep->base.sk peer_sid`` against the ``@skb peer sid``
+     to determine whether the association should be allowed or denied.
+
+     Set the sctp ``@ep sid`` to socket's sid (from ``ep->base.sk``) with
+     MLS portion taken from ``@skb peer sid``. This will be used by SCTP
+     TCP style sockets and peeled off connections as they cause a new socket
+     to be generated.
+
+     If IP security options are configured (CIPSO/CALIPSO), then the ip
+     options are set on the socket.
+
+
+security_sctp_bind_connect()
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Checks permissions required for ipv4/ipv6 addresses based on the ``@optname``
+as follows::
+
+  ------------------------------------------------------------------
+  |                   BIND Permission Checks                       |
+  |       @optname             |         @address contains         |
+  |----------------------------|-----------------------------------|
+  | SCTP_SOCKOPT_BINDX_ADD     | One or more ipv4 / ipv6 addresses |
+  | SCTP_PRIMARY_ADDR          | Single ipv4 or ipv6 address       |
+  | SCTP_SET_PEER_PRIMARY_ADDR | Single ipv4 or ipv6 address       |
+  ------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+  ------------------------------------------------------------------
+  |                 CONNECT Permission Checks                      |
+  |       @optname             |         @address contains         |
+  |----------------------------|-----------------------------------|
+  | SCTP_SOCKOPT_CONNECTX      | One or more ipv4 / ipv6 addresses |
+  | SCTP_PARAM_ADD_IP          | One or more ipv4 / ipv6 addresses |
+  | SCTP_SENDMSG_CONNECT       | Single ipv4 or ipv6 address       |
+  | SCTP_PARAM_SET_PRIMARY     | Single ipv4 or ipv6 address       |
+  ------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+`SCTP LSM Support`_ gives a summary of the ``@optname``
+entries and also describes ASCONF chunk processing when Dynamic Address
+Reconfiguration is enabled.
+
+
+security_sctp_sk_clone()
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Called whenever a new socket is created by **accept**\(2) (i.e. a TCP style
+socket) or when a socket is 'peeled off' e.g userspace calls
+**sctp_peeloff**\(3). ``security_sctp_sk_clone()`` will set the new
+sockets sid and peer sid to that contained in the ``@ep sid`` and
+``@ep peer sid`` respectively.
+::
+
+    @ep - pointer to current sctp endpoint structure.
+    @sk - pointer to current sock structure.
+    @sk - pointer to new sock structure.
+
+
+security_inet_conn_established()
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Called when a COOKIE ACK is received where it sets the connection's peer sid
+to that in ``@skb``::
+
+    @sk  - pointer to sock structure.
+    @skb - pointer to skbuff of the COOKIE ACK packet.
+
+
+Policy Statements
+-----------------
+The following class and permissions to support SCTP are available within the
+kernel::
+
+    class sctp_socket inherits socket { node_bind }
+
+whenever the following policy capability is enabled::
+
+    policycap extended_socket_class;
+
+SELinux SCTP support adds the ``name_connect`` permission for connecting
+to a specific port type and the ``association`` permission that is explained
+in the section below.
+
+If userspace tools have been updated, SCTP will support the ``portcon``
+statement as shown in the following example::
+
+    portcon sctp 1024-1036 system_u:object_r:sctp_ports_t:s0
+
+
+SCTP Peer Labeling
+------------------
+An SCTP socket will only have one peer label assigned to it. This will be
+assigned during the establishment of the first association. Any further
+associations on this socket will have their packet peer label compared to
+the sockets peer label, and only if they are different will the
+``association`` permission be validated. This is validated by checking the
+socket peer sid against the received packets peer sid to determine whether
+the association should be allowed or denied.
+
+NOTES:
+   1) If peer labeling is not enabled, then the peer context will always be
+      ``SECINITSID_UNLABELED`` (``unlabeled_t`` in Reference Policy).
+
+   2) As SCTP can support more than one transport address per endpoint
+      (multi-homing) on a single socket, it is possible to configure policy
+      and NetLabel to provide different peer labels for each of these. As the
+      socket peer label is determined by the first associations transport
+      address, it is recommended that all peer labels are consistent.
+
+   3) **getpeercon**\(3) may be used by userspace to retrieve the sockets peer
+      context.
+
+   4) While not SCTP specific, be aware when using NetLabel that if a label
+      is assigned to a specific interface, and that interface 'goes down',
+      then the NetLabel service will remove the entry. Therefore ensure that
+      the network startup scripts call **netlabelctl**\(8) to set the required
+      label (see **netlabel-config**\(8) helper script for details).
+
+   5) The NetLabel SCTP peer labeling rules apply as discussed in the following
+      set of posts tagged "netlabel" at: http://www.paul-moore.com/blog/t.
+
+   6) CIPSO is only supported for IPv4 addressing: ``socket(AF_INET, ...)``
+      CALIPSO is only supported for IPv6 addressing: ``socket(AF_INET6, ...)``
+
+      Note the following when testing CIPSO/CALIPSO:
+         a) CIPSO will send an ICMP packet if an SCTP packet cannot be
+            delivered because of an invalid label.
+         b) CALIPSO does not send an ICMP packet, just silently discards it.
+
+   7) IPSEC is not supported as RFC 3554 - sctp/ipsec support has not been
+      implemented in userspace (**racoon**\(8) or **ipsec_pluto**\(8)),
+      although the kernel supports SCTP/IPSEC.
diff --git a/Documentation/security/SELinux-sctp.rst b/Documentation/security/SELinux-sctp.rst
deleted file mode 100644
index a332cb1c5334..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/security/SELinux-sctp.rst
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,158 +0,0 @@
-SCTP SELinux Support
-=====================
-
-Security Hooks
-===============
-
-``Documentation/security/LSM-sctp.rst`` describes the following SCTP security
-hooks with the SELinux specifics expanded below::
-
-    security_sctp_assoc_request()
-    security_sctp_bind_connect()
-    security_sctp_sk_clone()
-    security_inet_conn_established()
-
-
-security_sctp_assoc_request()
------------------------------
-Passes the ``@ep`` and ``@chunk->skb`` of the association INIT packet to the
-security module. Returns 0 on success, error on failure.
-::
-
-    @ep - pointer to sctp endpoint structure.
-    @skb - pointer to skbuff of association packet.
-
-The security module performs the following operations:
-     IF this is the first association on ``@ep->base.sk``, then set the peer
-     sid to that in ``@skb``. This will ensure there is only one peer sid
-     assigned to ``@ep->base.sk`` that may support multiple associations.
-
-     ELSE validate the ``@ep->base.sk peer_sid`` against the ``@skb peer sid``
-     to determine whether the association should be allowed or denied.
-
-     Set the sctp ``@ep sid`` to socket's sid (from ``ep->base.sk``) with
-     MLS portion taken from ``@skb peer sid``. This will be used by SCTP
-     TCP style sockets and peeled off connections as they cause a new socket
-     to be generated.
-
-     If IP security options are configured (CIPSO/CALIPSO), then the ip
-     options are set on the socket.
-
-
-security_sctp_bind_connect()
------------------------------
-Checks permissions required for ipv4/ipv6 addresses based on the ``@optname``
-as follows::
-
-  ------------------------------------------------------------------
-  |                   BIND Permission Checks                       |
-  |       @optname             |         @address contains         |
-  |----------------------------|-----------------------------------|
-  | SCTP_SOCKOPT_BINDX_ADD     | One or more ipv4 / ipv6 addresses |
-  | SCTP_PRIMARY_ADDR          | Single ipv4 or ipv6 address       |
-  | SCTP_SET_PEER_PRIMARY_ADDR | Single ipv4 or ipv6 address       |
-  ------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-  ------------------------------------------------------------------
-  |                 CONNECT Permission Checks                      |
-  |       @optname             |         @address contains         |
-  |----------------------------|-----------------------------------|
-  | SCTP_SOCKOPT_CONNECTX      | One or more ipv4 / ipv6 addresses |
-  | SCTP_PARAM_ADD_IP          | One or more ipv4 / ipv6 addresses |
-  | SCTP_SENDMSG_CONNECT       | Single ipv4 or ipv6 address       |
-  | SCTP_PARAM_SET_PRIMARY     | Single ipv4 or ipv6 address       |
-  ------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-``Documentation/security/LSM-sctp.rst`` gives a summary of the ``@optname``
-entries and also describes ASCONF chunk processing when Dynamic Address
-Reconfiguration is enabled.
-
-
-security_sctp_sk_clone()
--------------------------
-Called whenever a new socket is created by **accept**\(2) (i.e. a TCP style
-socket) or when a socket is 'peeled off' e.g userspace calls
-**sctp_peeloff**\(3). ``security_sctp_sk_clone()`` will set the new
-sockets sid and peer sid to that contained in the ``@ep sid`` and
-``@ep peer sid`` respectively.
-::
-
-    @ep - pointer to current sctp endpoint structure.
-    @sk - pointer to current sock structure.
-    @sk - pointer to new sock structure.
-
-
-security_inet_conn_established()
----------------------------------
-Called when a COOKIE ACK is received where it sets the connection's peer sid
-to that in ``@skb``::
-
-    @sk  - pointer to sock structure.
-    @skb - pointer to skbuff of the COOKIE ACK packet.
-
-
-Policy Statements
-==================
-The following class and permissions to support SCTP are available within the
-kernel::
-
-    class sctp_socket inherits socket { node_bind }
-
-whenever the following policy capability is enabled::
-
-    policycap extended_socket_class;
-
-SELinux SCTP support adds the ``name_connect`` permission for connecting
-to a specific port type and the ``association`` permission that is explained
-in the section below.
-
-If userspace tools have been updated, SCTP will support the ``portcon``
-statement as shown in the following example::
-
-    portcon sctp 1024-1036 system_u:object_r:sctp_ports_t:s0
-
-
-SCTP Peer Labeling
-===================
-An SCTP socket will only have one peer label assigned to it. This will be
-assigned during the establishment of the first association. Any further
-associations on this socket will have their packet peer label compared to
-the sockets peer label, and only if they are different will the
-``association`` permission be validated. This is validated by checking the
-socket peer sid against the received packets peer sid to determine whether
-the association should be allowed or denied.
-
-NOTES:
-   1) If peer labeling is not enabled, then the peer context will always be
-      ``SECINITSID_UNLABELED`` (``unlabeled_t`` in Reference Policy).
-
-   2) As SCTP can support more than one transport address per endpoint
-      (multi-homing) on a single socket, it is possible to configure policy
-      and NetLabel to provide different peer labels for each of these. As the
-      socket peer label is determined by the first associations transport
-      address, it is recommended that all peer labels are consistent.
-
-   3) **getpeercon**\(3) may be used by userspace to retrieve the sockets peer
-      context.
-
-   4) While not SCTP specific, be aware when using NetLabel that if a label
-      is assigned to a specific interface, and that interface 'goes down',
-      then the NetLabel service will remove the entry. Therefore ensure that
-      the network startup scripts call **netlabelctl**\(8) to set the required
-      label (see **netlabel-config**\(8) helper script for details).
-
-   5) The NetLabel SCTP peer labeling rules apply as discussed in the following
-      set of posts tagged "netlabel" at: http://www.paul-moore.com/blog/t.
-
-   6) CIPSO is only supported for IPv4 addressing: ``socket(AF_INET, ...)``
-      CALIPSO is only supported for IPv6 addressing: ``socket(AF_INET6, ...)``
-
-      Note the following when testing CIPSO/CALIPSO:
-         a) CIPSO will send an ICMP packet if an SCTP packet cannot be
-            delivered because of an invalid label.
-         b) CALIPSO does not send an ICMP packet, just silently discards it.
-
-   7) IPSEC is not supported as RFC 3554 - sctp/ipsec support has not been
-      implemented in userspace (**racoon**\(8) or **ipsec_pluto**\(8)),
-      although the kernel supports SCTP/IPSEC.
diff --git a/Documentation/security/index.rst b/Documentation/security/index.rst
index 85492bfca530..aad6d92ffe31 100644
--- a/Documentation/security/index.rst
+++ b/Documentation/security/index.rst
@@ -9,7 +9,6 @@ Security Documentation
    IMA-templates
    keys/index
    LSM
-   LSM-sctp
-   SELinux-sctp
+   SCTP
    self-protection
    tpm/index
diff --git a/Documentation/serial/README.cycladesZ b/Documentation/serial/cyclades_z.rst
index 024a69443cc2..532ff67e2f1c 100644
--- a/Documentation/serial/README.cycladesZ
+++ b/Documentation/serial/cyclades_z.rst
@@ -1,8 +1,11 @@
+================
+Cyclades-Z notes
+================
 
 The Cyclades-Z must have firmware loaded onto the card before it will
 operate.  This operation should be performed during system startup,
 
 The firmware, loader program and the latest device driver code are
 available from Cyclades at
-    ftp://ftp.cyclades.com/pub/cyclades/cyclades-z/linux/
 
+    ftp://ftp.cyclades.com/pub/cyclades/cyclades-z/linux/
diff --git a/Documentation/serial/driver b/Documentation/serial/driver.rst
index 86e47c19a924..4537119bf624 100644
--- a/Documentation/serial/driver
+++ b/Documentation/serial/driver.rst
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
-
-			Low Level Serial API
-			--------------------
+====================
+Low Level Serial API
+====================
 
 
 This document is meant as a brief overview of some aspects of the new serial
@@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ are described in the uart_ops listing below.)
 There are two locks.  A per-port spinlock, and an overall semaphore.
 
 From the core driver perspective, the port->lock locks the following
-data:
+data::
 
 	port->mctrl
 	port->icount
@@ -75,41 +75,51 @@ hardware.
 	return TIOCSER_TEMT.
 
 	Locking: none.
+
 	Interrupts: caller dependent.
+
 	This call must not sleep
 
   set_mctrl(port, mctrl)
 	This function sets the modem control lines for port described
 	by 'port' to the state described by mctrl.  The relevant bits
 	of mctrl are:
+
 		- TIOCM_RTS	RTS signal.
 		- TIOCM_DTR	DTR signal.
 		- TIOCM_OUT1	OUT1 signal.
 		- TIOCM_OUT2	OUT2 signal.
 		- TIOCM_LOOP	Set the port into loopback mode.
+
 	If the appropriate bit is set, the signal should be driven
 	active.  If the bit is clear, the signal should be driven
 	inactive.
 
 	Locking: port->lock taken.
+
 	Interrupts: locally disabled.
+
 	This call must not sleep
 
   get_mctrl(port)
 	Returns the current state of modem control inputs.  The state
 	of the outputs should not be returned, since the core keeps
 	track of their state.  The state information should include:
+
 		- TIOCM_CAR	state of DCD signal
 		- TIOCM_CTS	state of CTS signal
 		- TIOCM_DSR	state of DSR signal
 		- TIOCM_RI	state of RI signal
+
 	The bit is set if the signal is currently driven active.  If
 	the port does not support CTS, DCD or DSR, the driver should
 	indicate that the signal is permanently active.  If RI is
 	not available, the signal should not be indicated as active.
 
 	Locking: port->lock taken.
+
 	Interrupts: locally disabled.
+
 	This call must not sleep
 
   stop_tx(port)
@@ -121,14 +131,18 @@ hardware.
 	possible.
 
 	Locking: port->lock taken.
+
 	Interrupts: locally disabled.
+
 	This call must not sleep
 
   start_tx(port)
 	Start transmitting characters.
 
 	Locking: port->lock taken.
+
 	Interrupts: locally disabled.
+
 	This call must not sleep
 
   throttle(port)
@@ -138,16 +152,17 @@ hardware.
 	This will be called only if hardware assisted flow control is enabled.
 
 	Locking: serialized with .unthrottle() and termios modification by the
-		 tty layer.
+	tty layer.
 
   unthrottle(port)
 	Notify the serial driver that characters can now be sent to the serial
 	port without fear of overrunning the input buffers of the line
 	disciplines.
+
 	This will be called only if hardware assisted flow control is enabled.
 
 	Locking: serialized with .throttle() and termios modification by the
-		 tty layer.
+	tty layer.
 
   send_xchar(port,ch)
 	Transmit a high priority character, even if the port is stopped.
@@ -159,6 +174,7 @@ hardware.
 	Do not transmit if ch == '\0' (__DISABLED_CHAR).
 
 	Locking: none.
+
 	Interrupts: caller dependent.
 
   stop_rx(port)
@@ -166,7 +182,9 @@ hardware.
 	being closed.
 
 	Locking: port->lock taken.
+
 	Interrupts: locally disabled.
+
 	This call must not sleep
 
   enable_ms(port)
@@ -177,7 +195,9 @@ hardware.
 	called.
 
 	Locking: port->lock taken.
+
 	Interrupts: locally disabled.
+
 	This call must not sleep
 
   break_ctl(port,ctl)
@@ -196,6 +216,7 @@ hardware.
 	This method will only be called when the port is initially opened.
 
 	Locking: port_sem taken.
+
 	Interrupts: globally disabled.
 
   shutdown(port)
@@ -210,6 +231,7 @@ hardware.
 	this port.
 
 	Locking: port_sem taken.
+
 	Interrupts: caller dependent.
 
   flush_buffer(port)
@@ -220,7 +242,9 @@ hardware.
 	buffer is cleared.
 
 	Locking: port->lock taken.
+
 	Interrupts: locally disabled.
+
 	This call must not sleep
 
   set_termios(port,termios,oldtermios)
@@ -228,29 +252,46 @@ hardware.
 	bits.  Update read_status_mask and ignore_status_mask to indicate
 	the types of events we are interested in receiving.  Relevant
 	termios->c_cflag bits are:
-		CSIZE	- word size
-		CSTOPB	- 2 stop bits
-		PARENB	- parity enable
-		PARODD	- odd parity (when PARENB is in force)
-		CREAD	- enable reception of characters (if not set,
+
+		CSIZE
+			- word size
+		CSTOPB
+			- 2 stop bits
+		PARENB
+			- parity enable
+		PARODD
+			- odd parity (when PARENB is in force)
+		CREAD
+			- enable reception of characters (if not set,
 			  still receive characters from the port, but
 			  throw them away.
-		CRTSCTS	- if set, enable CTS status change reporting
-		CLOCAL	- if not set, enable modem status change
+		CRTSCTS
+			- if set, enable CTS status change reporting
+		CLOCAL
+			- if not set, enable modem status change
 			  reporting.
+
 	Relevant termios->c_iflag bits are:
-		INPCK	- enable frame and parity error events to be
+
+		INPCK
+			- enable frame and parity error events to be
 			  passed to the TTY layer.
-		BRKINT
-		PARMRK	- both of these enable break events to be
+		BRKINT / PARMRK
+			- both of these enable break events to be
 			  passed to the TTY layer.
 
-		IGNPAR	- ignore parity and framing errors
-		IGNBRK	- ignore break errors,  If IGNPAR is also
+		IGNPAR
+			- ignore parity and framing errors
+		IGNBRK
+			- ignore break errors,  If IGNPAR is also
 			  set, ignore overrun errors as well.
+
 	The interaction of the iflag bits is as follows (parity error
 	given as an example):
+
+	=============== ======= ======  =============================
 	Parity error	INPCK	IGNPAR
+	=============== ======= ======  =============================
 	n/a		0	n/a	character received, marked as
 					TTY_NORMAL
 	None		1	n/a	character received, marked as
@@ -258,16 +299,19 @@ hardware.
 	Yes		1	0	character received, marked as
 					TTY_PARITY
 	Yes		1	1	character discarded
+	=============== ======= ======  =============================
 
 	Other flags may be used (eg, xon/xoff characters) if your
 	hardware supports hardware "soft" flow control.
 
 	Locking: caller holds tty_port->mutex
+
 	Interrupts: caller dependent.
+
 	This call must not sleep
 
   set_ldisc(port,termios)
-	Notifier for discipline change. See Documentation/serial/tty.txt.
+	Notifier for discipline change. See Documentation/serial/tty.rst.
 
 	Locking: caller holds tty_port->mutex
 
@@ -283,6 +327,7 @@ hardware.
 	will occur even if CONFIG_PM is not set.
 
 	Locking: none.
+
 	Interrupts: caller dependent.
 
   type(port)
@@ -291,6 +336,7 @@ hardware.
 	substituted.
 
 	Locking: none.
+
 	Interrupts: caller dependent.
 
   release_port(port)
@@ -298,6 +344,7 @@ hardware.
 	the port.
 
 	Locking: none.
+
 	Interrupts: caller dependent.
 
   request_port(port)
@@ -306,6 +353,7 @@ hardware.
 	returns, and it should return -EBUSY on failure.
 
 	Locking: none.
+
 	Interrupts: caller dependent.
 
   config_port(port,type)
@@ -321,6 +369,7 @@ hardware.
 	internally hard wired (eg, system on a chip implementations).
 
 	Locking: none.
+
 	Interrupts: caller dependent.
 
   verify_port(port,serinfo)
@@ -328,6 +377,7 @@ hardware.
 	suitable for this port type.
 
 	Locking: none.
+
 	Interrupts: caller dependent.
 
   ioctl(port,cmd,arg)
@@ -335,6 +385,7 @@ hardware.
 	using the standard numbering system found in <asm/ioctl.h>
 
 	Locking: none.
+
 	Interrupts: caller dependent.
 
   poll_init(port)
@@ -343,6 +394,7 @@ hardware.
 	this should not request interrupts.
 
 	Locking: tty_mutex and tty_port->mutex taken.
+
 	Interrupts: n/a.
 
   poll_put_char(port,ch)
@@ -350,7 +402,9 @@ hardware.
 	port.  It can and should block until there is space in the TX FIFO.
 
 	Locking: none.
+
 	Interrupts: caller dependent.
+
 	This call must not sleep
 
   poll_get_char(port)
@@ -359,7 +413,9 @@ hardware.
 	the function should return NO_POLL_CHAR immediately.
 
 	Locking: none.
+
 	Interrupts: caller dependent.
+
 	This call must not sleep
 
 Other functions
@@ -370,6 +426,7 @@ uart_update_timeout(port,cflag,baud)
 	number of bits, parity, stop bits and baud rate.
 
 	Locking: caller is expected to take port->lock
+
 	Interrupts: n/a
 
 uart_get_baud_rate(port,termios,old,min,max)
@@ -385,6 +442,7 @@ uart_get_baud_rate(port,termios,old,min,max)
 	Note: min..max must always allow 9600 baud to be selected.
 
 	Locking: caller dependent.
+
 	Interrupts: n/a
 
 uart_get_divisor(port,baud)
@@ -395,6 +453,7 @@ uart_get_divisor(port,baud)
 	custom divisor instead.
 
 	Locking: caller dependent.
+
 	Interrupts: n/a
 
 uart_match_port(port1,port2)
@@ -402,6 +461,7 @@ uart_match_port(port1,port2)
 	uart_port structures describe the same port.
 
 	Locking: n/a
+
 	Interrupts: n/a
 
 uart_write_wakeup(port)
@@ -409,6 +469,7 @@ uart_write_wakeup(port)
 	characters in the transmit buffer have dropped below a threshold.
 
 	Locking: port->lock should be held.
+
 	Interrupts: n/a
 
 uart_register_driver(drv)
@@ -419,6 +480,7 @@ uart_register_driver(drv)
 	registered using uart_add_one_port after this call has succeeded.
 
 	Locking: none
+
 	Interrupts: enabled
 
 uart_unregister_driver()
@@ -427,15 +489,16 @@ uart_unregister_driver()
 	uart_remove_one_port() if it registered them with uart_add_one_port().
 
 	Locking: none
+
 	Interrupts: enabled
 
-uart_suspend_port()
+**uart_suspend_port()**
 
-uart_resume_port()
+**uart_resume_port()**
 
-uart_add_one_port()
+**uart_add_one_port()**
 
-uart_remove_one_port()
+**uart_remove_one_port()**
 
 Other notes
 -----------
@@ -444,7 +507,7 @@ It is intended some day to drop the 'unused' entries from uart_port, and
 allow low level drivers to register their own individual uart_port's with
 the core.  This will allow drivers to use uart_port as a pointer to a
 structure containing both the uart_port entry with their own extensions,
-thus:
+thus::
 
 	struct my_port {
 		struct uart_port	port;
@@ -459,14 +522,14 @@ Some helpers are provided in order to set/get modem control lines via GPIO.
 mctrl_gpio_init(port, idx):
 	This will get the {cts,rts,...}-gpios from device tree if they are
 	present and request them, set direction etc, and return an
-	allocated structure. devm_* functions are used, so there's no need
+	allocated structure. `devm_*` functions are used, so there's no need
 	to call mctrl_gpio_free().
 	As this sets up the irq handling make sure to not handle changes to the
 	gpio input lines in your driver, too.
 
 mctrl_gpio_free(dev, gpios):
 	This will free the requested gpios in mctrl_gpio_init().
-	As devm_* functions are used, there's generally no need to call
+	As `devm_*` functions are used, there's generally no need to call
 	this function.
 
 mctrl_gpio_to_gpiod(gpios, gidx)
diff --git a/Documentation/serial/index.rst b/Documentation/serial/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d0ba22ea23bf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/serial/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+:orphan:
+
+==========================
+Support for Serial devices
+==========================
+
+.. toctree::
+    :maxdepth: 1
+
+
+    driver
+    tty
+
+Serial drivers
+==============
+
+.. toctree::
+    :maxdepth: 1
+
+    cyclades_z
+    moxa-smartio
+    n_gsm
+    rocket
+    serial-iso7816
+    serial-rs485
+
+.. only::  subproject and html
+
+   Indices
+   =======
+
+   * :ref:`genindex`
diff --git a/Documentation/serial/moxa-smartio b/Documentation/serial/moxa-smartio
deleted file mode 100644
index 5d2a33be0bd8..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/serial/moxa-smartio
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,523 +0,0 @@
-=============================================================================
-          MOXA Smartio/Industio Family Device Driver Installation Guide
-		    for Linux Kernel 2.4.x, 2.6.x
-	       Copyright (C) 2008, Moxa Inc.
-=============================================================================
-Date: 01/21/2008
-
-Content
-
-1. Introduction
-2. System Requirement
-3. Installation
-   3.1 Hardware installation
-   3.2 Driver files
-   3.3 Device naming convention
-   3.4 Module driver configuration
-   3.5 Static driver configuration for Linux kernel 2.4.x and 2.6.x.
-   3.6 Custom configuration
-   3.7 Verify driver installation
-4. Utilities
-5. Setserial
-6. Troubleshooting
-
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-1. Introduction
-
-   The Smartio/Industio/UPCI family Linux driver supports following multiport
-   boards.
-
-    - 2 ports multiport board
-	CP-102U, CP-102UL, CP-102UF
-	CP-132U-I, CP-132UL,
-	CP-132, CP-132I, CP132S, CP-132IS,
-	CI-132, CI-132I, CI-132IS,
-	(C102H, C102HI, C102HIS, C102P, CP-102, CP-102S)
-
-    - 4 ports multiport board
-	CP-104EL,
-	CP-104UL, CP-104JU,
-	CP-134U, CP-134U-I,
-	C104H/PCI, C104HS/PCI,
-	CP-114, CP-114I, CP-114S, CP-114IS, CP-114UL,
-	C104H, C104HS,
-	CI-104J, CI-104JS,
-	CI-134, CI-134I, CI-134IS,
-	(C114HI, CT-114I, C104P)
-	POS-104UL,
-	CB-114,
-	CB-134I
-
-    - 8 ports multiport board
-	CP-118EL, CP-168EL,
-	CP-118U, CP-168U,
-	C168H/PCI,
-	C168H, C168HS,
-	(C168P),
-	CB-108
-
-   This driver and installation procedure have been developed upon Linux Kernel
-   2.4.x and 2.6.x. This driver supports Intel x86 hardware platform. In order
-   to maintain compatibility, this version has also been properly tested with
-   RedHat, Mandrake, Fedora and S.u.S.E Linux. However, if compatibility problem
-   occurs, please contact Moxa at support@moxa.com.tw.
-
-   In addition to device driver, useful utilities are also provided in this
-   version. They are
-    - msdiag     Diagnostic program for displaying installed Moxa
-                 Smartio/Industio boards.
-    - msmon      Monitor program to observe data count and line status signals.
-    - msterm     A simple terminal program which is useful in testing serial
-	         ports.
-    - io-irq.exe Configuration program to setup ISA boards. Please note that
-                 this program can only be executed under DOS.
-
-   All the drivers and utilities are published in form of source code under
-   GNU General Public License in this version. Please refer to GNU General
-   Public License announcement in each source code file for more detail.
-
-   In Moxa's Web sites, you may always find latest driver at http://www.moxa.com/.
-
-   This version of driver can be installed as Loadable Module (Module driver)
-   or built-in into kernel (Static driver). You may refer to following
-   installation procedure for suitable one. Before you install the driver,
-   please refer to hardware installation procedure in the User's Manual.
-
-   We assume the user should be familiar with following documents.
-   - Serial-HOWTO
-   - Kernel-HOWTO
-
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-2. System Requirement
-   - Hardware platform: Intel x86 machine
-   - Kernel version: 2.4.x or 2.6.x
-   - gcc version 2.72 or later
-   - Maximum 4 boards can be installed in combination
-
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-3. Installation
-
-   3.1 Hardware installation
-   3.2 Driver files
-   3.3 Device naming convention
-   3.4 Module driver configuration
-   3.5 Static driver configuration for Linux kernel 2.4.x, 2.6.x.
-   3.6 Custom configuration
-   3.7 Verify driver installation
-
-
-   3.1 Hardware installation
-
-       There are two types of buses, ISA and PCI, for Smartio/Industio
-       family multiport board.
-
-       ISA board
-       ---------
-       You'll have to configure CAP address, I/O address, Interrupt Vector
-       as well as IRQ before installing this driver. Please refer to hardware
-       installation procedure in User's Manual before proceed any further.
-       Please make sure the JP1 is open after the ISA board is set properly.
-
-       PCI/UPCI board
-       --------------
-       You may need to adjust IRQ usage in BIOS to avoid from IRQ conflict
-       with other ISA devices. Please refer to hardware installation
-       procedure in User's Manual in advance.
-
-       PCI IRQ Sharing
-       -----------
-       Each port within the same multiport board shares the same IRQ. Up to
-       4 Moxa Smartio/Industio PCI Family multiport boards can be installed
-       together on one system and they can share the same IRQ.
-
-
-   3.2 Driver files
-
-       The driver file may be obtained from ftp, CD-ROM or floppy disk. The
-       first step, anyway, is to copy driver file "mxser.tgz" into specified
-       directory. e.g. /moxa. The execute commands as below.
-
-       # cd /
-       # mkdir moxa
-       # cd /moxa
-       # tar xvf /dev/fd0
-
-       or
-
-       # cd /
-       # mkdir moxa
-       # cd /moxa
-       # cp /mnt/cdrom/<driver directory>/mxser.tgz .
-       # tar xvfz mxser.tgz
-
-
-   3.3 Device naming convention
-
-       You may find all the driver and utilities files in /moxa/mxser.
-       Following installation procedure depends on the model you'd like to
-       run the driver. If you prefer module driver, please refer to 3.4.
-       If static driver is required, please refer to 3.5.
-
-       Dialin and callout port
-       -----------------------
-       This driver remains traditional serial device properties. There are
-       two special file name for each serial port. One is dial-in port
-       which is named "ttyMxx". For callout port, the naming convention
-       is "cumxx".
-
-       Device naming when more than 2 boards installed
-       -----------------------------------------------
-       Naming convention for each Smartio/Industio multiport board is
-       pre-defined as below.
-
-       Board Num.	 Dial-in Port	      Callout port
-       1st board	ttyM0  - ttyM7	      cum0  - cum7
-       2nd board	ttyM8  - ttyM15       cum8  - cum15
-       3rd board	ttyM16 - ttyM23       cum16 - cum23
-       4th board	ttyM24 - ttym31       cum24 - cum31
-
-
-       !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! NOTE !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
-       Under Kernel 2.6 the cum Device is Obsolete. So use ttyM*
-       device instead.
-       !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! NOTE !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
-
-       Board sequence
-       --------------
-       This driver will activate ISA boards according to the parameter set
-       in the driver. After all specified ISA board activated, PCI board
-       will be installed in the system automatically driven.
-       Therefore the board number is sorted by the CAP address of ISA boards.
-       For PCI boards, their sequence will be after ISA boards and C168H/PCI
-       has higher priority than C104H/PCI boards.
-
-   3.4 Module driver configuration
-       Module driver is easiest way to install. If you prefer static driver
-       installation, please skip this paragraph.
-
-
-       ------------- Prepare to use the MOXA driver--------------------
-       3.4.1 Create tty device with correct major number
-          Before using MOXA driver, your system must have the tty devices
-          which are created with driver's major number. We offer one shell
-          script "msmknod" to simplify the procedure.
-          This step is only needed to be executed once. But you still
-          need to do this procedure when:
-          a. You change the driver's major number. Please refer the "3.7"
-             section.
-          b. Your total installed MOXA boards number is changed. Maybe you
-             add/delete one MOXA board.
-          c. You want to change the tty name. This needs to modify the
-             shell script "msmknod"
-
-          The procedure is:
-	  # cd /moxa/mxser/driver
-	  # ./msmknod
-
-          This shell script will require the major number for dial-in
-          device and callout device to create tty device. You also need
-          to specify the total installed MOXA board number. Default major
-          numbers for dial-in device and callout device are 30, 35. If
-          you need to change to other number, please refer section "3.7"
-          for more detailed procedure.
-          Msmknod will delete any special files occupying the same device
-          naming.
-
-       3.4.2 Build the MOXA driver and utilities
-          Before using the MOXA driver and utilities, you need compile the
-          all the source code. This step is only need to be executed once.
-          But you still re-compile the source code if you modify the source
-          code. For example, if you change the driver's major number (see
-          "3.7" section), then you need to do this step again.
-
-          Find "Makefile" in /moxa/mxser, then run
-
-	  # make clean; make install
-
-          !!!!!!!!!! NOTE !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
-	  For Red Hat 9, Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS3/ES3/WS3 & Fedora Core1:
-	  # make clean; make installsp1
-
-	  For Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS4/ES4/WS4:
-	  # make clean; make installsp2
-          !!!!!!!!!! NOTE !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
-
-	  The driver files "mxser.o" and utilities will be properly compiled
-	  and copied to system directories respectively.
-
-       ------------- Load MOXA driver--------------------
-       3.4.3 Load the MOXA driver
-
-	  # modprobe mxser <argument>
-
-	  will activate the module driver. You may run "lsmod" to check
-	  if "mxser" is activated. If the MOXA board is ISA board, the
-          <argument> is needed. Please refer to section "3.4.5" for more
-          information.
-
-
-       ------------- Load MOXA driver on boot --------------------
-       3.4.4 For the above description, you may manually execute
-          "modprobe mxser" to activate this driver and run
-	  "rmmod mxser" to remove it.
-          However, it's better to have a boot time configuration to
-          eliminate manual operation. Boot time configuration can be
-          achieved by rc file. We offer one "rc.mxser" file to simplify
-          the procedure under "moxa/mxser/driver".
-
-          But if you use ISA board, please modify the "modprobe ..." command
-          to add the argument (see "3.4.5" section). After modifying the
-          rc.mxser, please try to execute "/moxa/mxser/driver/rc.mxser"
-          manually to make sure the modification is ok. If any error
-          encountered, please try to modify again. If the modification is
-          completed, follow the below step.
-
-	  Run following command for setting rc files.
-
-	  # cd /moxa/mxser/driver
-	  # cp ./rc.mxser /etc/rc.d
-	  # cd /etc/rc.d
-
-	  Check "rc.serial" is existed or not. If "rc.serial" doesn't exist,
-	  create it by vi, run "chmod 755 rc.serial" to change the permission.
-	  Add "/etc/rc.d/rc.mxser" in last line,
-
-          Reboot and check if moxa.o activated by "lsmod" command.
-
-       3.4.5. If you'd like to drive Smartio/Industio ISA boards in the system,
-          you'll have to add parameter to specify CAP address of given
-	  board while activating "mxser.o". The format for parameters are
-	  as follows.
-
-	  modprobe mxser ioaddr=0x???,0x???,0x???,0x???
-				|      |     |	  |
-				|      |     |	  +- 4th ISA board
-				|      |     +------ 3rd ISA board
-				|      +------------ 2nd ISA board
-				+------------------- 1st ISA board
-
-   3.5 Static driver configuration for Linux kernel 2.4.x and 2.6.x
-
-       Note: To use static driver, you must install the linux kernel
-             source package.
-
-       3.5.1 Backup the built-in driver in the kernel.
-          # cd /usr/src/linux/drivers/char
-          # mv mxser.c mxser.c.old
-
-          For Red Hat 7.x user, you need to create link:
-          # cd /usr/src
-          # ln -s linux-2.4 linux
-
-       3.5.2 Create link
-	  # cd /usr/src/linux/drivers/char
-	  # ln -s /moxa/mxser/driver/mxser.c mxser.c
-
-       3.5.3 Add CAP address list for ISA boards. For PCI boards user,
-          please skip this step.
-
-	  In module mode, the CAP address for ISA board is given by
-	  parameter. In static driver configuration, you'll have to
-	  assign it within driver's source code. If you will not
-	  install any ISA boards, you may skip to next portion.
-	  The instructions to modify driver source code are as
-	  below.
-	  a. # cd /moxa/mxser/driver
-	     # vi mxser.c
-	  b. Find the array mxserBoardCAP[] as below.
-
-	     static int mxserBoardCAP[]
-	     = {0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00};
-
-	  c. Change the address within this array using vi. For
-	     example, to driver 2 ISA boards with CAP address
-	     0x280 and 0x180 as 1st and 2nd board. Just to change
-	     the source code as follows.
-
-	     static int mxserBoardCAP[]
-	     = {0x280, 0x180, 0x00, 0x00};
-
-       3.5.4 Setup kernel configuration
-
-          Configure the kernel:
-
-            # cd /usr/src/linux
-            # make menuconfig
-
-          You will go into a menu-driven system. Please select [Character
-          devices][Non-standard serial port support], enable the [Moxa
-          SmartIO support] driver with "[*]" for built-in (not "[M]"), then
-          select [Exit] to exit this program.
-
-       3.5.5 Rebuild kernel
-	  The following are for Linux kernel rebuilding, for your
-          reference only.
-	  For appropriate details, please refer to the Linux document.
-
-	   a. cd /usr/src/linux
-	   b. make clean	     /* take a few minutes */
-	   c. make dep		     /* take a few minutes */
-	   d. make bzImage	     /* take probably 10-20 minutes */
-	   e. make install	     /* copy boot image to correct position */
-	   f. Please make sure the boot kernel (vmlinuz) is in the
-	      correct position.
-	   g. If you use 'lilo' utility, you should check /etc/lilo.conf
-	      'image' item specified the path which is the 'vmlinuz' path,
-	      or you will load wrong (or old) boot kernel image (vmlinuz).
-	      After checking /etc/lilo.conf, please run "lilo".
-
-	  Note that if the result of "make bzImage" is ERROR, then you have to
-	  go back to Linux configuration Setup. Type "make menuconfig" in
-          directory /usr/src/linux.
-
-
-       3.5.6 Make tty device and special file
-          # cd /moxa/mxser/driver
-          # ./msmknod
-
-       3.5.7 Make utility
-	  # cd /moxa/mxser/utility
-	  # make clean; make install
-
-       3.5.8 Reboot
-
-
-
-   3.6 Custom configuration
-       Although this driver already provides you default configuration, you
-       still can change the device name and major number. The instruction to
-       change these parameters are shown as below.
-
-       Change Device name
-       ------------------
-       If you'd like to use other device names instead of default naming
-       convention, all you have to do is to modify the internal code
-       within the shell script "msmknod". First, you have to open "msmknod"
-       by vi. Locate each line contains "ttyM" and "cum" and change them
-       to the device name you desired. "msmknod" creates the device names
-       you need next time executed.
-
-       Change Major number
-       -------------------
-       If major number 30 and 35 had been occupied, you may have to select
-       2 free major numbers for this driver. There are 3 steps to change
-       major numbers.
-
-       3.6.1 Find free major numbers
-	  In /proc/devices, you may find all the major numbers occupied
-	  in the system. Please select 2 major numbers that are available.
-	  e.g. 40, 45.
-       3.6.2 Create special files
-	  Run /moxa/mxser/driver/msmknod to create special files with
-	  specified major numbers.
-       3.6.3 Modify driver with new major number
-	  Run vi to open /moxa/mxser/driver/mxser.c. Locate the line
-	  contains "MXSERMAJOR". Change the content as below.
-	  #define	  MXSERMAJOR		  40
-	  #define	  MXSERCUMAJOR		  45
-       3.6.4 Run "make clean; make install" in /moxa/mxser/driver.
-
-   3.7 Verify driver installation
-       You may refer to /var/log/messages to check the latest status
-       log reported by this driver whenever it's activated.
-
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-4. Utilities
-   There are 3 utilities contained in this driver. They are msdiag, msmon and
-   msterm. These 3 utilities are released in form of source code. They should
-   be compiled into executable file and copied into /usr/bin.
-
-   Before using these utilities, please load driver (refer 3.4 & 3.5) and
-   make sure you had run the "msmknod" utility.
-
-   msdiag - Diagnostic
-   --------------------
-   This utility provides the function to display what Moxa Smartio/Industio
-   board found by driver in the system.
-
-   msmon - Port Monitoring
-   -----------------------
-   This utility gives the user a quick view about all the MOXA ports'
-   activities. One can easily learn each port's total received/transmitted
-   (Rx/Tx) character count since the time when the monitoring is started.
-   Rx/Tx throughputs per second are also reported in interval basis (e.g.
-   the last 5 seconds) and in average basis (since the time the monitoring
-   is started). You can reset all ports' count by <HOME> key. <+> <->
-   (plus/minus) keys to change the displaying time interval. Press <ENTER>
-   on the port, that cursor stay, to view the port's communication
-   parameters, signal status, and input/output queue.
-
-   msterm - Terminal Emulation
-   ---------------------------
-   This utility provides data sending and receiving ability of all tty ports,
-   especially for MOXA ports. It is quite useful for testing simple
-   application, for example, sending AT command to a modem connected to the
-   port or used as a terminal for login purpose. Note that this is only a
-   dumb terminal emulation without handling full screen operation.
-
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-5. Setserial
-
-   Supported Setserial parameters are listed as below.
-
-   uart		  set UART type(16450-->disable FIFO, 16550A-->enable FIFO)
-   close_delay	  set the amount of time(in 1/100 of a second) that DTR
-		  should be kept low while being closed.
-   closing_wait   set the amount of time(in 1/100 of a second) that the
-		  serial port should wait for data to be drained while
-		  being closed, before the receiver is disable.
-   spd_hi	  Use  57.6kb  when  the application requests 38.4kb.
-   spd_vhi	  Use  115.2kb	when  the application requests 38.4kb.
-   spd_shi	  Use  230.4kb	when  the application requests 38.4kb.
-   spd_warp	  Use  460.8kb	when  the application requests 38.4kb.
-   spd_normal	  Use  38.4kb  when  the application requests 38.4kb.
-   spd_cust	  Use  the custom divisor to set the speed when  the
-		  application requests 38.4kb.
-   divisor	  This option set the custom division.
-   baud_base	  This option set the base baud rate.
-
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-6. Troubleshooting
-
-   The boot time error messages and solutions are stated as clearly as
-   possible. If all the possible solutions fail, please contact our technical
-   support team to get more help.
-
-
-   Error msg: More than 4 Moxa Smartio/Industio family boards found. Fifth board
-              and after are ignored.
-   Solution:
-   To avoid this problem, please unplug fifth and after board, because Moxa
-   driver supports up to 4 boards.
-
-   Error msg: Request_irq fail, IRQ(?) may be conflict with another device.
-   Solution:
-   Other PCI or ISA devices occupy the assigned IRQ. If you are not sure
-   which device causes the situation, please check /proc/interrupts to find
-   free IRQ and simply change another free IRQ for Moxa board.
-
-   Error msg: Board #: C1xx Series(CAP=xxx) interrupt number invalid.
-   Solution:
-   Each port within the same multiport board shares the same IRQ. Please set
-   one IRQ (IRQ doesn't equal to zero) for one Moxa board.
-
-   Error msg: No interrupt vector be set for Moxa ISA board(CAP=xxx).
-   Solution:
-   Moxa ISA board needs an interrupt vector.Please refer to user's manual
-   "Hardware Installation" chapter to set interrupt vector.
-
-   Error msg: Couldn't install MOXA Smartio/Industio family driver!
-   Solution:
-   Load Moxa driver fail, the major number may conflict with other devices.
-   Please refer to previous section 3.7 to change a free major number for
-   Moxa driver.
-
-   Error msg: Couldn't install MOXA Smartio/Industio family callout driver!
-   Solution:
-   Load Moxa callout driver fail, the callout device major number may
-   conflict with other devices. Please refer to previous section 3.7 to
-   change a free callout device major number for Moxa driver.
-
-
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
diff --git a/Documentation/serial/moxa-smartio.rst b/Documentation/serial/moxa-smartio.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..156100f17c3f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/serial/moxa-smartio.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,615 @@
+=============================================================
+MOXA Smartio/Industio Family Device Driver Installation Guide
+=============================================================
+
+.. note::
+
+   This file is outdated. It needs some care in order to make it
+   updated to Kernel 5.0 and upper
+
+Copyright (C) 2008, Moxa Inc.
+
+Date: 01/21/2008
+
+.. Content
+
+   1. Introduction
+   2. System Requirement
+   3. Installation
+      3.1 Hardware installation
+      3.2 Driver files
+      3.3 Device naming convention
+      3.4 Module driver configuration
+      3.5 Static driver configuration for Linux kernel 2.4.x and 2.6.x.
+      3.6 Custom configuration
+      3.7 Verify driver installation
+   4. Utilities
+   5. Setserial
+   6. Troubleshooting
+
+1. Introduction
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+   The Smartio/Industio/UPCI family Linux driver supports following multiport
+   boards.
+
+    - 2 ports multiport board
+	CP-102U, CP-102UL, CP-102UF
+	CP-132U-I, CP-132UL,
+	CP-132, CP-132I, CP132S, CP-132IS,
+	CI-132, CI-132I, CI-132IS,
+	(C102H, C102HI, C102HIS, C102P, CP-102, CP-102S)
+
+    - 4 ports multiport board
+	CP-104EL,
+	CP-104UL, CP-104JU,
+	CP-134U, CP-134U-I,
+	C104H/PCI, C104HS/PCI,
+	CP-114, CP-114I, CP-114S, CP-114IS, CP-114UL,
+	C104H, C104HS,
+	CI-104J, CI-104JS,
+	CI-134, CI-134I, CI-134IS,
+	(C114HI, CT-114I, C104P),
+	POS-104UL,
+	CB-114,
+	CB-134I
+
+    - 8 ports multiport board
+	CP-118EL, CP-168EL,
+	CP-118U, CP-168U,
+	C168H/PCI,
+	C168H, C168HS,
+	(C168P),
+	CB-108
+
+   This driver and installation procedure have been developed upon Linux Kernel
+   2.4.x and 2.6.x. This driver supports Intel x86 hardware platform. In order
+   to maintain compatibility, this version has also been properly tested with
+   RedHat, Mandrake, Fedora and S.u.S.E Linux. However, if compatibility problem
+   occurs, please contact Moxa at support@moxa.com.tw.
+
+   In addition to device driver, useful utilities are also provided in this
+   version. They are:
+
+    - msdiag
+		 Diagnostic program for displaying installed Moxa
+                 Smartio/Industio boards.
+    - msmon
+		 Monitor program to observe data count and line status signals.
+    - msterm     A simple terminal program which is useful in testing serial
+	         ports.
+    - io-irq.exe
+		 Configuration program to setup ISA boards. Please note that
+                 this program can only be executed under DOS.
+
+   All the drivers and utilities are published in form of source code under
+   GNU General Public License in this version. Please refer to GNU General
+   Public License announcement in each source code file for more detail.
+
+   In Moxa's Web sites, you may always find latest driver at http://www.moxa.com/.
+
+   This version of driver can be installed as Loadable Module (Module driver)
+   or built-in into kernel (Static driver). You may refer to following
+   installation procedure for suitable one. Before you install the driver,
+   please refer to hardware installation procedure in the User's Manual.
+
+   We assume the user should be familiar with following documents.
+
+   - Serial-HOWTO
+   - Kernel-HOWTO
+
+2. System Requirement
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+   - Hardware platform: Intel x86 machine
+   - Kernel version: 2.4.x or 2.6.x
+   - gcc version 2.72 or later
+   - Maximum 4 boards can be installed in combination
+
+3. Installation
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+3.1 Hardware installation
+=========================
+
+   There are two types of buses, ISA and PCI, for Smartio/Industio
+   family multiport board.
+
+ISA board
+---------
+
+   You'll have to configure CAP address, I/O address, Interrupt Vector
+   as well as IRQ before installing this driver. Please refer to hardware
+   installation procedure in User's Manual before proceed any further.
+   Please make sure the JP1 is open after the ISA board is set properly.
+
+PCI/UPCI board
+--------------
+
+   You may need to adjust IRQ usage in BIOS to avoid from IRQ conflict
+   with other ISA devices. Please refer to hardware installation
+   procedure in User's Manual in advance.
+
+PCI IRQ Sharing
+---------------
+
+   Each port within the same multiport board shares the same IRQ. Up to
+   4 Moxa Smartio/Industio PCI Family multiport boards can be installed
+   together on one system and they can share the same IRQ.
+
+
+3.2 Driver files
+================
+
+   The driver file may be obtained from ftp, CD-ROM or floppy disk. The
+   first step, anyway, is to copy driver file "mxser.tgz" into specified
+   directory. e.g. /moxa. The execute commands as below::
+
+       # cd /
+       # mkdir moxa
+       # cd /moxa
+       # tar xvf /dev/fd0
+
+or::
+
+       # cd /
+       # mkdir moxa
+       # cd /moxa
+       # cp /mnt/cdrom/<driver directory>/mxser.tgz .
+       # tar xvfz mxser.tgz
+
+
+3.3 Device naming convention
+============================
+
+   You may find all the driver and utilities files in /moxa/mxser.
+   Following installation procedure depends on the model you'd like to
+   run the driver. If you prefer module driver, please refer to 3.4.
+   If static driver is required, please refer to 3.5.
+
+Dialin and callout port
+-----------------------
+
+   This driver remains traditional serial device properties. There are
+   two special file name for each serial port. One is dial-in port
+   which is named "ttyMxx". For callout port, the naming convention
+   is "cumxx".
+
+Device naming when more than 2 boards installed
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+   Naming convention for each Smartio/Industio multiport board is
+   pre-defined as below.
+
+   ============ ===============       ==============
+   Board Num.	 Dial-in Port	      Callout port
+   1st board	ttyM0  - ttyM7	      cum0  - cum7
+   2nd board	ttyM8  - ttyM15       cum8  - cum15
+   3rd board	ttyM16 - ttyM23       cum16 - cum23
+   4th board	ttyM24 - ttym31       cum24 - cum31
+   ============ ===============       ==============
+
+.. note::
+
+   Under Kernel 2.6 and upper, the cum Device is Obsolete. So use ttyM*
+   device instead.
+
+Board sequence
+--------------
+
+   This driver will activate ISA boards according to the parameter set
+   in the driver. After all specified ISA board activated, PCI board
+   will be installed in the system automatically driven.
+   Therefore the board number is sorted by the CAP address of ISA boards.
+   For PCI boards, their sequence will be after ISA boards and C168H/PCI
+   has higher priority than C104H/PCI boards.
+
+3.4 Module driver configuration
+===============================
+
+   Module driver is easiest way to install. If you prefer static driver
+   installation, please skip this paragraph.
+
+
+   ------------- Prepare to use the MOXA driver --------------------
+
+3.4.1 Create tty device with correct major number
+-------------------------------------------------
+
+   Before using MOXA driver, your system must have the tty devices
+   which are created with driver's major number. We offer one shell
+   script "msmknod" to simplify the procedure.
+   This step is only needed to be executed once. But you still
+   need to do this procedure when:
+
+   a. You change the driver's major number. Please refer the "3.7"
+      section.
+   b. Your total installed MOXA boards number is changed. Maybe you
+      add/delete one MOXA board.
+   c. You want to change the tty name. This needs to modify the
+      shell script "msmknod"
+
+   The procedure is::
+
+	 # cd /moxa/mxser/driver
+	 # ./msmknod
+
+   This shell script will require the major number for dial-in
+   device and callout device to create tty device. You also need
+   to specify the total installed MOXA board number. Default major
+   numbers for dial-in device and callout device are 30, 35. If
+   you need to change to other number, please refer section "3.7"
+   for more detailed procedure.
+   Msmknod will delete any special files occupying the same device
+   naming.
+
+3.4.2 Build the MOXA driver and utilities
+-----------------------------------------
+
+   Before using the MOXA driver and utilities, you need compile the
+   all the source code. This step is only need to be executed once.
+   But you still re-compile the source code if you modify the source
+   code. For example, if you change the driver's major number (see
+   "3.7" section), then you need to do this step again.
+
+   Find "Makefile" in /moxa/mxser, then run
+
+	 # make clean; make install
+
+   ..note::
+
+	 For Red Hat 9, Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS3/ES3/WS3 & Fedora Core1:
+	 # make clean; make installsp1
+
+	 For Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS4/ES4/WS4:
+	 # make clean; make installsp2
+
+   The driver files "mxser.o" and utilities will be properly compiled
+   and copied to system directories respectively.
+
+------------- Load MOXA driver--------------------
+
+3.4.3 Load the MOXA driver
+--------------------------
+
+   ::
+
+	 # modprobe mxser <argument>
+
+   will activate the module driver. You may run "lsmod" to check
+   if "mxser" is activated. If the MOXA board is ISA board, the
+   <argument> is needed. Please refer to section "3.4.5" for more
+   information.
+
+------------- Load MOXA driver on boot --------------------
+
+3.4.4 Load the mxser driver
+---------------------------
+
+
+   For the above description, you may manually execute
+   "modprobe mxser" to activate this driver and run
+   "rmmod mxser" to remove it.
+
+   However, it's better to have a boot time configuration to
+   eliminate manual operation. Boot time configuration can be
+   achieved by rc file. We offer one "rc.mxser" file to simplify
+   the procedure under "moxa/mxser/driver".
+
+   But if you use ISA board, please modify the "modprobe ..." command
+   to add the argument (see "3.4.5" section). After modifying the
+   rc.mxser, please try to execute "/moxa/mxser/driver/rc.mxser"
+   manually to make sure the modification is ok. If any error
+   encountered, please try to modify again. If the modification is
+   completed, follow the below step.
+
+   Run following command for setting rc files::
+
+	 # cd /moxa/mxser/driver
+	 # cp ./rc.mxser /etc/rc.d
+	 # cd /etc/rc.d
+
+   Check "rc.serial" is existed or not. If "rc.serial" doesn't exist,
+   create it by vi, run "chmod 755 rc.serial" to change the permission.
+
+   Add "/etc/rc.d/rc.mxser" in last line.
+
+   Reboot and check if moxa.o activated by "lsmod" command.
+
+3.4.5. specify CAP address
+--------------------------
+
+   If you'd like to drive Smartio/Industio ISA boards in the system,
+   you'll have to add parameter to specify CAP address of given
+   board while activating "mxser.o". The format for parameters are
+   as follows.::
+
+	   modprobe mxser ioaddr=0x???,0x???,0x???,0x???
+				  |  |  |    |
+				  |  |  |    +- 4th ISA board
+				  |  |  +------ 3rd ISA board
+				  |  +------------ 2nd ISA board
+				  +-------------------1st ISA board
+
+3.5 Static driver configuration for Linux kernel 2.4.x and 2.6.x
+================================================================
+
+    Note:
+          To use static driver, you must install the linux kernel
+          source package.
+
+3.5.1 Backup the built-in driver in the kernel
+----------------------------------------------
+
+    ::
+
+       # cd /usr/src/linux/drivers/char
+       # mv mxser.c mxser.c.old
+
+       For Red Hat 7.x user, you need to create link:
+       # cd /usr/src
+       # ln -s linux-2.4 linux
+
+3.5.2 Create link
+-----------------
+    ::
+
+	  # cd /usr/src/linux/drivers/char
+	  # ln -s /moxa/mxser/driver/mxser.c mxser.c
+
+3.5.3 Add CAP address list for ISA boards.
+------------------------------------------
+
+    For PCI boards user, please skip this step.
+
+    In module mode, the CAP address for ISA board is given by
+    parameter. In static driver configuration, you'll have to
+    assign it within driver's source code. If you will not
+    install any ISA boards, you may skip to next portion.
+    The instructions to modify driver source code are as
+    below.
+
+    a. run::
+
+	# cd /moxa/mxser/driver
+	# vi mxser.c
+
+    b. Find the array mxserBoardCAP[] as below::
+
+	  static int mxserBoardCAP[] = {0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00};
+
+    c. Change the address within this array using vi. For
+       example, to driver 2 ISA boards with CAP address
+       0x280 and 0x180 as 1st and 2nd board. Just to change
+       the source code as follows::
+
+	  static int mxserBoardCAP[] = {0x280, 0x180, 0x00, 0x00};
+
+3.5.4 Setup kernel configuration
+--------------------------------
+
+    Configure the kernel::
+
+      # cd /usr/src/linux
+      # make menuconfig
+
+    You will go into a menu-driven system. Please select [Character
+    devices][Non-standard serial port support], enable the [Moxa
+    SmartIO support] driver with "[*]" for built-in (not "[M]"), then
+    select [Exit] to exit this program.
+
+3.5.5 Rebuild kernel
+--------------------
+
+    The following are for Linux kernel rebuilding, for your
+    reference only.
+
+    For appropriate details, please refer to the Linux document:
+
+        a. Run the following commands::
+
+	     cd /usr/src/linux
+	     make clean		     # take a few minutes
+	     make dep		     # take a few minutes
+	     make bzImage	     # take probably 10-20 minutes
+	     make install	     # copy boot image to correct position
+
+	f. Please make sure the boot kernel (vmlinuz) is in the
+	   correct position.
+	g. If you use 'lilo' utility, you should check /etc/lilo.conf
+	   'image' item specified the path which is the 'vmlinuz' path,
+	   or you will load wrong (or old) boot kernel image (vmlinuz).
+	   After checking /etc/lilo.conf, please run "lilo".
+
+	  Note that if the result of "make bzImage" is ERROR, then you have to
+	  go back to Linux configuration Setup. Type "make menuconfig" in
+          directory /usr/src/linux.
+
+
+3.5.6 Make tty device and special file
+--------------------------------------
+
+    ::
+       # cd /moxa/mxser/driver
+       # ./msmknod
+
+3.5.7 Make utility
+------------------
+
+    ::
+
+	  # cd /moxa/mxser/utility
+	  # make clean; make install
+
+3.5.8 Reboot
+------------
+
+
+
+3.6 Custom configuration
+========================
+
+    Although this driver already provides you default configuration, you
+    still can change the device name and major number. The instruction to
+    change these parameters are shown as below.
+
+a. Change Device name
+
+    If you'd like to use other device names instead of default naming
+    convention, all you have to do is to modify the internal code
+    within the shell script "msmknod". First, you have to open "msmknod"
+    by vi. Locate each line contains "ttyM" and "cum" and change them
+    to the device name you desired. "msmknod" creates the device names
+    you need next time executed.
+
+b. Change Major number
+
+    If major number 30 and 35 had been occupied, you may have to select
+    2 free major numbers for this driver. There are 3 steps to change
+    major numbers.
+
+3.6.1 Find free major numbers
+-----------------------------
+
+    In /proc/devices, you may find all the major numbers occupied
+    in the system. Please select 2 major numbers that are available.
+    e.g. 40, 45.
+
+3.6.2 Create special files
+--------------------------
+
+   Run /moxa/mxser/driver/msmknod to create special files with
+   specified major numbers.
+
+3.6.3 Modify driver with new major number
+-----------------------------------------
+
+   Run vi to open /moxa/mxser/driver/mxser.c. Locate the line
+   contains "MXSERMAJOR". Change the content as below::
+
+	  #define	  MXSERMAJOR		  40
+	  #define	  MXSERCUMAJOR		  45
+
+    3.6.4 Run "make clean; make install" in /moxa/mxser/driver.
+
+3.7 Verify driver installation
+==============================
+
+    You may refer to /var/log/messages to check the latest status
+    log reported by this driver whenever it's activated.
+
+4. Utilities
+^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+   There are 3 utilities contained in this driver. They are msdiag, msmon and
+   msterm. These 3 utilities are released in form of source code. They should
+   be compiled into executable file and copied into /usr/bin.
+
+   Before using these utilities, please load driver (refer 3.4 & 3.5) and
+   make sure you had run the "msmknod" utility.
+
+msdiag - Diagnostic
+===================
+
+   This utility provides the function to display what Moxa Smartio/Industio
+   board found by driver in the system.
+
+msmon - Port Monitoring
+=======================
+
+   This utility gives the user a quick view about all the MOXA ports'
+   activities. One can easily learn each port's total received/transmitted
+   (Rx/Tx) character count since the time when the monitoring is started.
+
+   Rx/Tx throughputs per second are also reported in interval basis (e.g.
+   the last 5 seconds) and in average basis (since the time the monitoring
+   is started). You can reset all ports' count by <HOME> key. <+> <->
+   (plus/minus) keys to change the displaying time interval. Press <ENTER>
+   on the port, that cursor stay, to view the port's communication
+   parameters, signal status, and input/output queue.
+
+msterm - Terminal Emulation
+===========================
+
+   This utility provides data sending and receiving ability of all tty ports,
+   especially for MOXA ports. It is quite useful for testing simple
+   application, for example, sending AT command to a modem connected to the
+   port or used as a terminal for login purpose. Note that this is only a
+   dumb terminal emulation without handling full screen operation.
+
+5. Setserial
+^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+   Supported Setserial parameters are listed as below.
+
+   ============== =========================================================
+   uart		  set UART type(16450-->disable FIFO, 16550A-->enable FIFO)
+   close_delay	  set the amount of time(in 1/100 of a second) that DTR
+		  should be kept low while being closed.
+   closing_wait   set the amount of time(in 1/100 of a second) that the
+		  serial port should wait for data to be drained while
+		  being closed, before the receiver is disable.
+   spd_hi	  Use  57.6kb  when  the application requests 38.4kb.
+   spd_vhi	  Use  115.2kb	when  the application requests 38.4kb.
+   spd_shi	  Use  230.4kb	when  the application requests 38.4kb.
+   spd_warp	  Use  460.8kb	when  the application requests 38.4kb.
+   spd_normal	  Use  38.4kb  when  the application requests 38.4kb.
+   spd_cust	  Use  the custom divisor to set the speed when  the
+		  application requests 38.4kb.
+   divisor	  This option set the custom division.
+   baud_base	  This option set the base baud rate.
+   ============== =========================================================
+
+6. Troubleshooting
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+   The boot time error messages and solutions are stated as clearly as
+   possible. If all the possible solutions fail, please contact our technical
+   support team to get more help.
+
+
+   Error msg:
+	      More than 4 Moxa Smartio/Industio family boards found. Fifth board
+              and after are ignored.
+
+   Solution:
+   To avoid this problem, please unplug fifth and after board, because Moxa
+   driver supports up to 4 boards.
+
+   Error msg:
+	      Request_irq fail, IRQ(?) may be conflict with another device.
+
+   Solution:
+   Other PCI or ISA devices occupy the assigned IRQ. If you are not sure
+   which device causes the situation, please check /proc/interrupts to find
+   free IRQ and simply change another free IRQ for Moxa board.
+
+   Error msg:
+	      Board #: C1xx Series(CAP=xxx) interrupt number invalid.
+
+   Solution:
+   Each port within the same multiport board shares the same IRQ. Please set
+   one IRQ (IRQ doesn't equal to zero) for one Moxa board.
+
+   Error msg:
+	      No interrupt vector be set for Moxa ISA board(CAP=xxx).
+
+   Solution:
+   Moxa ISA board needs an interrupt vector.Please refer to user's manual
+   "Hardware Installation" chapter to set interrupt vector.
+
+   Error msg:
+              Couldn't install MOXA Smartio/Industio family driver!
+
+   Solution:
+   Load Moxa driver fail, the major number may conflict with other devices.
+   Please refer to previous section 3.7 to change a free major number for
+   Moxa driver.
+
+   Error msg:
+              Couldn't install MOXA Smartio/Industio family callout driver!
+
+   Solution:
+   Load Moxa callout driver fail, the callout device major number may
+   conflict with other devices. Please refer to previous section 3.7 to
+   change a free callout device major number for Moxa driver.
diff --git a/Documentation/serial/n_gsm.rst b/Documentation/serial/n_gsm.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f3ad9fd26408
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/serial/n_gsm.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+==============================
+GSM 0710 tty multiplexor HOWTO
+==============================
+
+This line discipline implements the GSM 07.10 multiplexing protocol
+detailed in the following 3GPP document:
+
+	http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/07_series/07.10/0710-720.zip
+
+This document give some hints on how to use this driver with GPRS and 3G
+modems connected to a physical serial port.
+
+How to use it
+-------------
+1. initialize the modem in 0710 mux mode (usually AT+CMUX= command) through
+   its serial port. Depending on the modem used, you can pass more or less
+   parameters to this command,
+2. switch the serial line to using the n_gsm line discipline by using
+   TIOCSETD ioctl,
+3. configure the mux using GSMIOC_GETCONF / GSMIOC_SETCONF ioctl,
+
+Major parts of the initialization program :
+(a good starting point is util-linux-ng/sys-utils/ldattach.c)::
+
+  #include <linux/gsmmux.h>
+  #define N_GSM0710	21	/* GSM 0710 Mux */
+  #define DEFAULT_SPEED	B115200
+  #define SERIAL_PORT	/dev/ttyS0
+
+	int ldisc = N_GSM0710;
+	struct gsm_config c;
+	struct termios configuration;
+
+	/* open the serial port connected to the modem */
+	fd = open(SERIAL_PORT, O_RDWR | O_NOCTTY | O_NDELAY);
+
+	/* configure the serial port : speed, flow control ... */
+
+	/* send the AT commands to switch the modem to CMUX mode
+	   and check that it's successful (should return OK) */
+	write(fd, "AT+CMUX=0\r", 10);
+
+	/* experience showed that some modems need some time before
+	   being able to answer to the first MUX packet so a delay
+	   may be needed here in some case */
+	sleep(3);
+
+	/* use n_gsm line discipline */
+	ioctl(fd, TIOCSETD, &ldisc);
+
+	/* get n_gsm configuration */
+	ioctl(fd, GSMIOC_GETCONF, &c);
+	/* we are initiator and need encoding 0 (basic) */
+	c.initiator = 1;
+	c.encapsulation = 0;
+	/* our modem defaults to a maximum size of 127 bytes */
+	c.mru = 127;
+	c.mtu = 127;
+	/* set the new configuration */
+	ioctl(fd, GSMIOC_SETCONF, &c);
+
+	/* and wait for ever to keep the line discipline enabled */
+	daemon(0,0);
+	pause();
+
+4. create the devices corresponding to the "virtual" serial ports (take care,
+   each modem has its configuration and some DLC have dedicated functions,
+   for example GPS), starting with minor 1 (DLC0 is reserved for the management
+   of the mux)::
+
+     MAJOR=`cat /proc/devices |grep gsmtty | awk '{print $1}`
+     for i in `seq 1 4`; do
+	mknod /dev/ttygsm$i c $MAJOR $i
+     done
+
+5. use these devices as plain serial ports.
+
+   for example, it's possible:
+
+   - and to use gnokii to send / receive SMS on ttygsm1
+   - to use ppp to establish a datalink on ttygsm2
+
+6. first close all virtual ports before closing the physical port.
+
+   Note that after closing the physical port the modem is still in multiplexing
+   mode. This may prevent a successful re-opening of the port later. To avoid
+   this situation either reset the modem if your hardware allows that or send
+   a disconnect command frame manually before initializing the multiplexing mode
+   for the second time. The byte sequence for the disconnect command frame is::
+
+      0xf9, 0x03, 0xef, 0x03, 0xc3, 0x16, 0xf9.
+
+Additional Documentation
+------------------------
+More practical details on the protocol and how it's supported by industrial
+modems can be found in the following documents :
+
+- http://www.telit.com/module/infopool/download.php?id=616
+- http://www.u-blox.com/images/downloads/Product_Docs/LEON-G100-G200-MuxImplementation_ApplicationNote_%28GSM%20G1-CS-10002%29.pdf
+- http://www.sierrawireless.com/Support/Downloads/AirPrime/WMP_Series/~/media/Support_Downloads/AirPrime/Application_notes/CMUX_Feature_Application_Note-Rev004.ashx
+- http://wm.sim.com/sim/News/photo/2010721161442.pdf
+
+11-03-08 - Eric Bénard - <eric@eukrea.com>
diff --git a/Documentation/serial/n_gsm.txt b/Documentation/serial/n_gsm.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 875361bb7cb4..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/serial/n_gsm.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,96 +0,0 @@
-n_gsm.c GSM 0710 tty multiplexor HOWTO
-===================================================
-
-This line discipline implements the GSM 07.10 multiplexing protocol
-detailed in the following 3GPP document :
-http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/07_series/07.10/0710-720.zip
-
-This document give some hints on how to use this driver with GPRS and 3G
-modems connected to a physical serial port.
-
-How to use it
--------------
-1- initialize the modem in 0710 mux mode (usually AT+CMUX= command) through
-its serial port. Depending on the modem used, you can pass more or less
-parameters to this command,
-2- switch the serial line to using the n_gsm line discipline by using
-TIOCSETD ioctl,
-3- configure the mux using GSMIOC_GETCONF / GSMIOC_SETCONF ioctl,
-
-Major parts of the initialization program :
-(a good starting point is util-linux-ng/sys-utils/ldattach.c)
-#include <linux/gsmmux.h>
-#define N_GSM0710	21	/* GSM 0710 Mux */
-#define DEFAULT_SPEED	B115200
-#define SERIAL_PORT	/dev/ttyS0
-
-	int ldisc = N_GSM0710;
-	struct gsm_config c;
-	struct termios configuration;
-
-	/* open the serial port connected to the modem */
-	fd = open(SERIAL_PORT, O_RDWR | O_NOCTTY | O_NDELAY);
-
-	/* configure the serial port : speed, flow control ... */
-
-	/* send the AT commands to switch the modem to CMUX mode
-	   and check that it's successful (should return OK) */
-	write(fd, "AT+CMUX=0\r", 10);
-
-	/* experience showed that some modems need some time before
-	   being able to answer to the first MUX packet so a delay
-	   may be needed here in some case */
-	sleep(3);
-
-	/* use n_gsm line discipline */
-	ioctl(fd, TIOCSETD, &ldisc);
-
-	/* get n_gsm configuration */
-	ioctl(fd, GSMIOC_GETCONF, &c);
-	/* we are initiator and need encoding 0 (basic) */
-	c.initiator = 1;
-	c.encapsulation = 0;
-	/* our modem defaults to a maximum size of 127 bytes */
-	c.mru = 127;
-	c.mtu = 127;
-	/* set the new configuration */
-	ioctl(fd, GSMIOC_SETCONF, &c);
-
-	/* and wait for ever to keep the line discipline enabled */
-	daemon(0,0);
-	pause();
-
-4- create the devices corresponding to the "virtual" serial ports (take care,
-each modem has its configuration and some DLC have dedicated functions,
-for example GPS), starting with minor 1 (DLC0 is reserved for the management
-of the mux)
-
-MAJOR=`cat /proc/devices |grep gsmtty | awk '{print $1}`
-for i in `seq 1 4`; do
-	mknod /dev/ttygsm$i c $MAJOR $i
-done
-
-5- use these devices as plain serial ports.
-for example, it's possible :
-- and to use gnokii to send / receive SMS on ttygsm1
-- to use ppp to establish a datalink on ttygsm2
-
-6- first close all virtual ports before closing the physical port.
-
-Note that after closing the physical port the modem is still in multiplexing
-mode. This may prevent a successful re-opening of the port later. To avoid
-this situation either reset the modem if your hardware allows that or send
-a disconnect command frame manually before initializing the multiplexing mode
-for the second time. The byte sequence for the disconnect command frame is:
-0xf9, 0x03, 0xef, 0x03, 0xc3, 0x16, 0xf9.
-
-Additional Documentation
-------------------------
-More practical details on the protocol and how it's supported by industrial
-modems can be found in the following documents :
-http://www.telit.com/module/infopool/download.php?id=616
-http://www.u-blox.com/images/downloads/Product_Docs/LEON-G100-G200-MuxImplementation_ApplicationNote_%28GSM%20G1-CS-10002%29.pdf
-http://www.sierrawireless.com/Support/Downloads/AirPrime/WMP_Series/~/media/Support_Downloads/AirPrime/Application_notes/CMUX_Feature_Application_Note-Rev004.ashx
-http://wm.sim.com/sim/News/photo/2010721161442.pdf
-
-11-03-08 - Eric Bénard - <eric@eukrea.com>
diff --git a/Documentation/serial/rocket.txt b/Documentation/serial/rocket.rst
index 60b039891057..23761eae4282 100644
--- a/Documentation/serial/rocket.txt
+++ b/Documentation/serial/rocket.rst
@@ -1,20 +1,22 @@
-Comtrol(tm) RocketPort(R)/RocketModem(TM) Series 
-Device Driver for the Linux Operating System
+================================================
+Comtrol(tm) RocketPort(R)/RocketModem(TM) Series
+================================================
 
-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-
+Device Driver for the Linux Operating System
+============================================
 
-PRODUCT OVERVIEW
+Product overview
 ----------------
 
 This driver provides a loadable kernel driver for the Comtrol RocketPort
-and RocketModem PCI boards. These boards provide, 2, 4, 8, 16, or 32 
+and RocketModem PCI boards. These boards provide, 2, 4, 8, 16, or 32
 high-speed serial ports or modems.  This driver supports up to a combination
 of four RocketPort or RocketModems boards in one machine simultaneously.
 This file assumes that you are using the RocketPort driver which is
-integrated into the kernel sources.  
+integrated into the kernel sources.
 
-The driver can also be installed as an external module using the usual 
-"make;make install" routine.  This external module driver, obtainable 
+The driver can also be installed as an external module using the usual
+"make;make install" routine.  This external module driver, obtainable
 from the Comtrol website listed below, is useful for updating the driver
 or installing it into kernels which do not have the driver configured
 into them.  Installations instructions for the external module
@@ -29,57 +31,59 @@ information on how to set the DIP switches.
 
 You pass the I/O port to the driver using the following module parameters:
 
-board1 :	I/O port for the first ISA board
-board2 :	I/O port for the second ISA board
-board3 :	I/O port for the third ISA board
-board4 :	I/O port for the fourth ISA board
+board1:
+	I/O port for the first ISA board
+board2:
+	I/O port for the second ISA board
+board3:
+	I/O port for the third ISA board
+board4:
+	I/O port for the fourth ISA board
 
 There is a set of utilities and scripts provided with the external driver
-( downloadable from http://www.comtrol.com ) that ease the configuration and
+(downloadable from http://www.comtrol.com) that ease the configuration and
 setup of the ISA cards.
 
 The RocketModem II PCI boards require firmware to be loaded into the card
 before it will function.  The driver has only been tested as a module for this
 board.
 
-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-
-
-INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
+Installation Procedures
 -----------------------
 
-RocketPort/RocketModem PCI cards require no driver configuration, they are 
+RocketPort/RocketModem PCI cards require no driver configuration, they are
 automatically detected and configured.
 
-The RocketPort driver can be installed as a module (recommended) or built 
+The RocketPort driver can be installed as a module (recommended) or built
 into the kernel. This is selected, as for other drivers, through the `make config`
-command from the root of the Linux source tree during the kernel build process. 
+command from the root of the Linux source tree during the kernel build process.
 
 The RocketPort/RocketModem serial ports installed by this driver are assigned
-device major number 46, and will be named /dev/ttyRx, where x is the port number 
+device major number 46, and will be named /dev/ttyRx, where x is the port number
 starting at zero (ex. /dev/ttyR0, /devttyR1, ...).  If you have multiple cards
 installed in the system, the mapping of port names to serial ports is displayed
 in the system log at /var/log/messages.
 
 If installed as a module, the module must be loaded.  This can be done
 manually by entering "modprobe rocket".  To have the module loaded automatically
-upon system boot, edit a /etc/modprobe.d/*.conf file and add the line
+upon system boot, edit a `/etc/modprobe.d/*.conf` file and add the line
 "alias char-major-46 rocket".
 
 In order to use the ports, their device names (nodes) must be created with mknod.
-This is only required once, the system will retain the names once created.  To 
-create the RocketPort/RocketModem device names, use the command 
-"mknod /dev/ttyRx c 46 x" where x is the port number starting at zero.  For example:
+This is only required once, the system will retain the names once created.  To
+create the RocketPort/RocketModem device names, use the command
+"mknod /dev/ttyRx c 46 x" where x is the port number starting at zero.
 
->mknod /dev/ttyR0 c 46 0
->mknod /dev/ttyR1 c 46 1
->mknod /dev/ttyR2 c 46 2  
+For example::
 
-The Linux script MAKEDEV will create the first 16 ttyRx device names (nodes)
-for you:
+	> mknod /dev/ttyR0 c 46 0
+	> mknod /dev/ttyR1 c 46 1
+	> mknod /dev/ttyR2 c 46 2
 
->/dev/MAKEDEV ttyR
+The Linux script MAKEDEV will create the first 16 ttyRx device names (nodes)
+for you::
 
-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-
+	>/dev/MAKEDEV ttyR
 
 ISA Rocketport Boards
 ---------------------
@@ -89,7 +93,7 @@ card before installing and using it.  This is done by setting a set of DIP
 switches on the Rocketport board.
 
 
-SETTING THE I/O ADDRESS
+Setting the I/O address
 -----------------------
 
 Before installing RocketPort(R) or RocketPort RA boards, you must find
@@ -130,40 +134,36 @@ the first 4 bytes of that range are used by the first board.  You would
 need to set the second, third, or fourth board to one of the next available
 blocks such as 0x180.
 
-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-
-
-RocketPort and RocketPort RA SW1 Settings:
-
-          +-------------------------------+
-          | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 |
-          +-------+-------+---------------+
-          | Unused| Card  | I/O Port Block|
-          +-------------------------------+
-
-DIP Switches                             DIP Switches
-7    8                                   6    5
-===================                      ===================
-On   On   UNUSED, MUST BE ON.            On   On   First Card    <==== Default
-                                         On   Off  Second Card
-                                         Off  On   Third Card
-                                         Off  Off  Fourth Card
-
-DIP Switches         I/O Address Range
-4    3    2    1     Used by the First Card
-=====================================
-On   Off  On   Off   100-143
-On   Off  Off  On    140-183
-On   Off  Off  Off   180-1C3       <==== Default
-Off  On   On   Off   200-243
-Off  On   Off  On    240-283
-Off  On   Off  Off   280-2C3
-Off  Off  On   Off   300-343
-Off  Off  Off  On    340-383
-Off  Off  Off  Off   380-3C3
-
-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-
-
-REPORTING BUGS
+RocketPort and RocketPort RA SW1 Settings::
+
+            +-------------------------------+
+            | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 |
+            +-------+-------+---------------+
+            | Unused| Card  | I/O Port Block|
+            +-------------------------------+
+
+  DIP Switches                             DIP Switches
+  7    8                                   6    5
+  ===================                      ===================
+  On   On   UNUSED, MUST BE ON.            On   On   First Card    <==== Default
+                                           On   Off  Second Card
+                                           Off  On   Third Card
+                                           Off  Off  Fourth Card
+
+  DIP Switches         I/O Address Range
+  4    3    2    1     Used by the First Card
+  =====================================
+  On   Off  On   Off   100-143
+  On   Off  Off  On    140-183
+  On   Off  Off  Off   180-1C3       <==== Default
+  Off  On   On   Off   200-243
+  Off  On   Off  On    240-283
+  Off  On   Off  Off   280-2C3
+  Off  Off  On   Off   300-343
+  Off  Off  Off  On    340-383
+  Off  Off  Off  Off   380-3C3
+
+Reporting Bugs
 --------------
 
 For technical support, please provide the following
@@ -171,19 +171,15 @@ information: Driver version, kernel release, distribution of
 kernel, and type of board you are using. Error messages and log
 printouts port configuration details are especially helpful.
 
-USA
-    Phone: (612) 494-4100
-      FAX: (612) 494-4199
-    email: support@comtrol.com
+USA:
+    :Phone: (612) 494-4100
+    :FAX: (612) 494-4199
+    :email: support@comtrol.com
 
-Comtrol Europe
-    Phone: +44 (0) 1 869 323-220
-      FAX: +44 (0) 1 869 323-211
-    email: support@comtrol.co.uk
+Comtrol Europe:
+    :Phone: +44 (0) 1 869 323-220
+    :FAX: +44 (0) 1 869 323-211
+    :email: support@comtrol.co.uk
 
 Web:	http://www.comtrol.com
 FTP:	ftp.comtrol.com
-
-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-
-
-
diff --git a/Documentation/serial/serial-iso7816.txt b/Documentation/serial/serial-iso7816.rst
index 3193d24a2b0f..d990143de0c6 100644
--- a/Documentation/serial/serial-iso7816.txt
+++ b/Documentation/serial/serial-iso7816.rst
@@ -1,11 +1,15 @@
-                        ISO7816 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
+=============================
+ISO7816 Serial Communications
+=============================
 
-1. INTRODUCTION
+1. Introduction
+===============
 
   ISO/IEC7816 is a series of standards specifying integrated circuit cards (ICC)
   also known as smart cards.
 
-2. HARDWARE-RELATED CONSIDERATIONS
+2. Hardware-related considerations
+==================================
 
   Some CPUs/UARTs (e.g., Microchip AT91) contain a built-in mode capable of
   handling communication with a smart card.
@@ -15,7 +19,8 @@
   available at user-level to allow switching from one mode to the other, and
   vice versa.
 
-3. DATA STRUCTURES ALREADY AVAILABLE IN THE KERNEL
+3. Data Structures Already Available in the Kernel
+==================================================
 
   The Linux kernel provides the serial_iso7816 structure (see [1]) to handle
   ISO7816 communications. This data structure is used to set and configure
@@ -27,10 +32,11 @@
   to TIOCGISO7816 and TIOCSISO7816 ioctls (see below). The iso7816_config
   callback receives a pointer to struct serial_iso7816.
 
-4. USAGE FROM USER-LEVEL
+4. Usage from user-level
+========================
 
   From user-level, ISO7816 configuration can be get/set using the previous
-  ioctls. For instance, to set ISO7816 you can use the following code:
+  ioctls. For instance, to set ISO7816 you can use the following code::
 
 	#include <linux/serial.h>
 
@@ -78,6 +84,7 @@
 		/* Error handling. See errno. */
 	}
 
-5. REFERENCES
+5. References
+=============
 
  [1]    include/uapi/linux/serial.h
diff --git a/Documentation/serial/serial-rs485.txt b/Documentation/serial/serial-rs485.rst
index ce0c1a9b8aab..6bc824f948f9 100644
--- a/Documentation/serial/serial-rs485.txt
+++ b/Documentation/serial/serial-rs485.rst
@@ -1,6 +1,9 @@
-                        RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
+===========================
+RS485 Serial Communications
+===========================
 
-1. INTRODUCTION
+1. Introduction
+===============
 
    EIA-485, also known as TIA/EIA-485 or RS-485, is a standard defining the
    electrical characteristics of drivers and receivers for use in balanced
@@ -9,7 +12,8 @@
    because it can be used effectively over long distances and in electrically
    noisy environments.
 
-2. HARDWARE-RELATED CONSIDERATIONS
+2. Hardware-related Considerations
+==================================
 
    Some CPUs/UARTs (e.g., Atmel AT91 or 16C950 UART) contain a built-in
    half-duplex mode capable of automatically controlling line direction by
@@ -22,7 +26,8 @@
    available at user-level to allow switching from one mode to the other, and
    vice versa.
 
-3. DATA STRUCTURES ALREADY AVAILABLE IN THE KERNEL
+3. Data Structures Already Available in the Kernel
+==================================================
 
    The Linux kernel provides the serial_rs485 structure (see [1]) to handle
    RS485 communications. This data structure is used to set and configure RS485
@@ -38,10 +43,11 @@
    to TIOCSRS485 and TIOCGRS485 ioctls (see below). The rs485_config callback
    receives a pointer to struct serial_rs485.
 
-4. USAGE FROM USER-LEVEL
+4. Usage from user-level
+========================
 
    From user-level, RS485 configuration can be get/set using the previous
-   ioctls. For instance, to set RS485 you can use the following code:
+   ioctls. For instance, to set RS485 you can use the following code::
 
 	#include <linux/serial.h>
 
@@ -89,7 +95,9 @@
 		/* Error handling. See errno. */
 	}
 
-5. REFERENCES
+5. References
+=============
 
  [1]	include/uapi/linux/serial.h
+
  [2]	Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/rs485.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/serial/tty.txt b/Documentation/serial/tty.rst
index b48780977a68..dd972caacf3e 100644
--- a/Documentation/serial/tty.txt
+++ b/Documentation/serial/tty.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
-
-			The Lockronomicon
+=================
+The Lockronomicon
+=================
 
 Your guide to the ancient and twisted locking policies of the tty layer and
 the warped logic behind them. Beware all ye who read on.
@@ -9,12 +10,12 @@ Line Discipline
 ---------------
 
 Line disciplines are registered with tty_register_ldisc() passing the
-discipline number and the ldisc structure. At the point of registration the 
+discipline number and the ldisc structure. At the point of registration the
 discipline must be ready to use and it is possible it will get used before
 the call returns success. If the call returns an error then it won't get
 called. Do not re-use ldisc numbers as they are part of the userspace ABI
 and writing over an existing ldisc will cause demons to eat your computer.
-After the return the ldisc data has been copied so you may free your own 
+After the return the ldisc data has been copied so you may free your own
 copy of the structure. You must not re-register over the top of the line
 discipline even with the same data or your computer again will be eaten by
 demons.
@@ -26,7 +27,7 @@ code manages the module counts this should not usually be a concern.
 
 Heed this warning: the reference count field of the registered copies of the
 tty_ldisc structure in the ldisc table counts the number of lines using this
-discipline. The reference count of the tty_ldisc structure within a tty 
+discipline. The reference count of the tty_ldisc structure within a tty
 counts the number of active users of the ldisc at this instant. In effect it
 counts the number of threads of execution within an ldisc method (plus those
 about to enter and exit although this detail matters not).
@@ -34,9 +35,11 @@ about to enter and exit although this detail matters not).
 Line Discipline Methods
 -----------------------
 
-TTY side interfaces:
+TTY side interfaces
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
 
-open()		-	Called when the line discipline is attached to
+======================= =======================================================
+open()			Called when the line discipline is attached to
 			the terminal. No other call into the line
 			discipline for this tty will occur until it
 			completes successfully. Should initialize any
@@ -47,66 +50,69 @@ open()		-	Called when the line discipline is attached to
 			Returning an error will prevent the ldisc from
 			being attached. Can sleep.
 
-close()		-	This is called on a terminal when the line
+close()			This is called on a terminal when the line
 			discipline is being unplugged. At the point of
 			execution no further users will enter the
 			ldisc code for this tty. Can sleep.
 
-hangup()	-	Called when the tty line is hung up.
+hangup()		Called when the tty line is hung up.
 			The line discipline should cease I/O to the tty.
 			No further calls into the ldisc code will occur.
 			The return value is ignored. Can sleep.
 
-read()		-	(optional) A process requests reading data from
+read()			(optional) A process requests reading data from
 			the line. Multiple read calls may occur in parallel
 			and the ldisc must deal with serialization issues.
 			If not defined, the process will receive an EIO
 			error. May sleep.
 
-write()		-	(optional) A process requests writing data to the
+write()			(optional) A process requests writing data to the
 			line. Multiple write calls are serialized by the
 			tty layer for the ldisc. If not defined, the
 			process will receive an EIO error. May sleep.
 
-flush_buffer()	-	(optional) May be called at any point between
+flush_buffer()		(optional) May be called at any point between
 			open and close, and instructs the line discipline
 			to empty its input buffer.
 
-set_termios()	-	(optional) Called on termios structure changes.
+set_termios()		(optional) Called on termios structure changes.
 			The caller passes the old termios data and the
 			current data is in the tty. Called under the
 			termios semaphore so allowed to sleep. Serialized
 			against itself only.
 
-poll()		-	(optional) Check the status for the poll/select
+poll()			(optional) Check the status for the poll/select
 			calls. Multiple poll calls may occur in parallel.
 			May sleep.
 
-ioctl()		-	(optional) Called when an ioctl is handed to the
+ioctl()			(optional) Called when an ioctl is handed to the
 			tty layer that might be for the ldisc. Multiple
 			ioctl calls may occur in parallel. May sleep.
 
-compat_ioctl()	-	(optional) Called when a 32 bit ioctl is handed
+compat_ioctl()		(optional) Called when a 32 bit ioctl is handed
 			to the tty layer that might be for the ldisc.
 			Multiple ioctl calls may occur in parallel.
 			May sleep.
+======================= =======================================================
 
-Driver Side Interfaces:
+Driver Side Interfaces
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
 
-receive_buf()	-	(optional) Called by the low-level driver to hand
+======================= =======================================================
+receive_buf()		(optional) Called by the low-level driver to hand
 			a buffer of received bytes to the ldisc for
 			processing. The number of bytes is guaranteed not
 			to exceed the current value of tty->receive_room.
 			All bytes must be processed.
 
-receive_buf2()	-	(optional) Called by the low-level driver to hand
+receive_buf2()		(optional) Called by the low-level driver to hand
 			a buffer of received bytes to the ldisc for
 			processing. Returns the number of bytes processed.
 
 			If both receive_buf() and receive_buf2() are
 			defined, receive_buf2() should be preferred.
 
-write_wakeup()	-	May be called at any point between open and close.
+write_wakeup()		May be called at any point between open and close.
 			The TTY_DO_WRITE_WAKEUP flag indicates if a call
 			is needed but always races versus calls. Thus the
 			ldisc must be careful about setting order and to
@@ -117,17 +123,20 @@ write_wakeup()	-	May be called at any point between open and close.
 			is permitted to call the driver write method from
 			this function. In such a situation defer it.
 
-dcd_change()	-	Report to the tty line the current DCD pin status
+dcd_change()		Report to the tty line the current DCD pin status
 			changes and the relative timestamp. The timestamp
 			cannot be NULL.
+======================= =======================================================
 
 
 Driver Access
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^
 
 Line discipline methods can call the following methods of the underlying
 hardware driver through the function pointers within the tty->driver
 structure:
 
+======================= =======================================================
 write()			Write a block of characters to the tty device.
 			Returns the number of characters accepted. The
 			character buffer passed to this method is already
@@ -189,13 +198,16 @@ wait_until_sent()	Waits until the device has written out all of the
 			characters in its transmitter FIFO.
 
 send_xchar()		Send a high-priority XON/XOFF character to the device.
+======================= =======================================================
 
 
 Flags
+^^^^^
 
 Line discipline methods have access to tty->flags field containing the
 following interesting flags:
 
+======================= =======================================================
 TTY_THROTTLED		Driver input is throttled. The ldisc should call
 			tty->driver->unthrottle() in order to resume
 			reception when it is ready to process more data.
@@ -212,102 +224,105 @@ TTY_OTHER_CLOSED	Device is a pty and the other side has closed.
 
 TTY_NO_WRITE_SPLIT	Prevent driver from splitting up writes into
 			smaller chunks.
+======================= =======================================================
 
 
 Locking
+^^^^^^^
 
 Callers to the line discipline functions from the tty layer are required to
 take line discipline locks. The same is true of calls from the driver side
 but not yet enforced.
 
-Three calls are now provided
+Three calls are now provided::
 
 	ldisc = tty_ldisc_ref(tty);
 
 takes a handle to the line discipline in the tty and returns it. If no ldisc
 is currently attached or the ldisc is being closed and re-opened at this
 point then NULL is returned. While this handle is held the ldisc will not
-change or go away.
+change or go away::
 
 	tty_ldisc_deref(ldisc)
 
 Returns the ldisc reference and allows the ldisc to be closed. Returning the
 reference takes away your right to call the ldisc functions until you take
-a new reference.
+a new reference::
 
 	ldisc = tty_ldisc_ref_wait(tty);
 
 Performs the same function as tty_ldisc_ref except that it will wait for an
-ldisc change to complete and then return a reference to the new ldisc. 
+ldisc change to complete and then return a reference to the new ldisc.
 
 While these functions are slightly slower than the old code they should have
 minimal impact as most receive logic uses the flip buffers and they only
 need to take a reference when they push bits up through the driver.
 
-A caution: The ldisc->open(), ldisc->close() and driver->set_ldisc 
+A caution: The ldisc->open(), ldisc->close() and driver->set_ldisc
 functions are called with the ldisc unavailable. Thus tty_ldisc_ref will
 fail in this situation if used within these functions. Ldisc and driver
-code calling its own functions must be careful in this case. 
+code calling its own functions must be careful in this case.
 
 
 Driver Interface
 ----------------
 
-open()		-	Called when a device is opened. May sleep
+======================= =======================================================
+open()			Called when a device is opened. May sleep
 
-close()		-	Called when a device is closed. At the point of
-			return from this call the driver must make no 
+close()			Called when a device is closed. At the point of
+			return from this call the driver must make no
 			further ldisc calls of any kind. May sleep
 
-write()		-	Called to write bytes to the device. May not
-			sleep. May occur in parallel in special cases. 
+write()			Called to write bytes to the device. May not
+			sleep. May occur in parallel in special cases.
 			Because this includes panic paths drivers generally
 			shouldn't try and do clever locking here.
 
-put_char()	-	Stuff a single character onto the queue. The
+put_char()		Stuff a single character onto the queue. The
 			driver is guaranteed following up calls to
 			flush_chars.
 
-flush_chars()	-	Ask the kernel to write put_char queue
+flush_chars()		Ask the kernel to write put_char queue
 
-write_room()	-	Return the number of characters that can be stuffed
+write_room()		Return the number of characters that can be stuffed
 			into the port buffers without overflow (or less).
 			The ldisc is responsible for being intelligent
- 			about multi-threading of write_room/write calls
+			about multi-threading of write_room/write calls
 
-ioctl()		-	Called when an ioctl may be for the driver
+ioctl()			Called when an ioctl may be for the driver
 
-set_termios()	-	Called on termios change, serialized against
+set_termios()		Called on termios change, serialized against
 			itself by a semaphore. May sleep.
 
-set_ldisc()	-	Notifier for discipline change. At the point this 
+set_ldisc()		Notifier for discipline change. At the point this
 			is done the discipline is not yet usable. Can now
 			sleep (I think)
 
-throttle()	-	Called by the ldisc to ask the driver to do flow
+throttle()		Called by the ldisc to ask the driver to do flow
 			control.  Serialization including with unthrottle
 			is the job of the ldisc layer.
 
-unthrottle()	-	Called by the ldisc to ask the driver to stop flow
+unthrottle()		Called by the ldisc to ask the driver to stop flow
 			control.
 
-stop()		-	Ldisc notifier to the driver to stop output. As with
+stop()			Ldisc notifier to the driver to stop output. As with
 			throttle the serializations with start() are down
 			to the ldisc layer.
 
-start()		-	Ldisc notifier to the driver to start output.
+start()			Ldisc notifier to the driver to start output.
 
-hangup()	-	Ask the tty driver to cause a hangup initiated
+hangup()		Ask the tty driver to cause a hangup initiated
 			from the host side. [Can sleep ??]
 
-break_ctl()	-	Send RS232 break. Can sleep. Can get called in
+break_ctl()		Send RS232 break. Can sleep. Can get called in
 			parallel, driver must serialize (for now), and
 			with write calls.
 
-wait_until_sent() -	Wait for characters to exit the hardware queue
+wait_until_sent()	Wait for characters to exit the hardware queue
 			of the driver. Can sleep
 
-send_xchar()	  -	Send XON/XOFF and if possible jump the queue with
+send_xchar()	  	Send XON/XOFF and if possible jump the queue with
 			it in order to get fast flow control responses.
 			Cannot sleep ??
-
+======================= =======================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/sound/hd-audio/models.rst b/Documentation/sound/hd-audio/models.rst
index 368a07a165f5..7d7c191102a7 100644
--- a/Documentation/sound/hd-audio/models.rst
+++ b/Documentation/sound/hd-audio/models.rst
@@ -254,10 +254,12 @@ alc274-dell-aio
     ALC274 fixups on Dell AIO machines
 alc255-dummy-lineout
     Dell Precision 3930 fixups
-alc255-dell-headset"},
+alc255-dell-headset
     Dell Precision 3630 fixups
 alc295-hp-x360
     HP Spectre X360 fixups
+alc-sense-combo
+    Headset button support for Chrome platform
 
 ALC66x/67x/892
 ==============
diff --git a/Documentation/sound/kernel-api/writing-an-alsa-driver.rst b/Documentation/sound/kernel-api/writing-an-alsa-driver.rst
index b37234afdfa1..132f5eb9b530 100644
--- a/Documentation/sound/kernel-api/writing-an-alsa-driver.rst
+++ b/Documentation/sound/kernel-api/writing-an-alsa-driver.rst
@@ -324,7 +324,7 @@ to details explained in the following section.
               strcpy(card->driver, "My Chip");
               strcpy(card->shortname, "My Own Chip 123");
               sprintf(card->longname, "%s at 0x%lx irq %i",
-                      card->shortname, chip->ioport, chip->irq);
+                      card->shortname, chip->port, chip->irq);
 
               /* (5) */
               .... /* implemented later */
@@ -437,7 +437,7 @@ Since each component can be properly freed, the single
   strcpy(card->driver, "My Chip");
   strcpy(card->shortname, "My Own Chip 123");
   sprintf(card->longname, "%s at 0x%lx irq %i",
-          card->shortname, chip->ioport, chip->irq);
+          card->shortname, chip->port, chip->irq);
 
 The driver field holds the minimal ID string of the chip. This is used
 by alsa-lib's configurator, so keep it simple but unique. Even the
@@ -3520,14 +3520,14 @@ allocator will try to get an area as large as possible within the
 given size.
 
 The second argument (type) and the third argument (device pointer) are
-dependent on the bus. In the case of the ISA bus, pass
-:c:func:`snd_dma_isa_data()` as the third argument with
+dependent on the bus. For normal devices, pass the device pointer
+(typically identical as ``card->dev``) to the third argument with
 ``SNDRV_DMA_TYPE_DEV`` type. For the continuous buffer unrelated to the
 bus can be pre-allocated with ``SNDRV_DMA_TYPE_CONTINUOUS`` type and the
 ``snd_dma_continuous_data(GFP_KERNEL)`` device pointer, where
-``GFP_KERNEL`` is the kernel allocation flag to use. For the PCI
-scatter-gather buffers, use ``SNDRV_DMA_TYPE_DEV_SG`` with
-``snd_dma_pci_data(pci)`` (see the `Non-Contiguous Buffers`_
+``GFP_KERNEL`` is the kernel allocation flag to use. For the
+scatter-gather buffers, use ``SNDRV_DMA_TYPE_DEV_SG`` with the device
+pointer (see the `Non-Contiguous Buffers`_
 section).
 
 Once the buffer is pre-allocated, you can use the allocator in the
@@ -3924,15 +3924,12 @@ The scheme of the real suspend job is as follows.
 2. Call :c:func:`snd_power_change_state()` with
    ``SNDRV_CTL_POWER_D3hot`` to change the power status.
 
-3. Call :c:func:`snd_pcm_suspend_all()` to suspend the running
-   PCM streams.
-
-4. If AC97 codecs are used, call :c:func:`snd_ac97_suspend()` for
+3. If AC97 codecs are used, call :c:func:`snd_ac97_suspend()` for
    each codec.
 
-5. Save the register values if necessary.
+4. Save the register values if necessary.
 
-6. Stop the hardware if necessary.
+5. Stop the hardware if necessary.
 
 A typical code would be like:
 
@@ -3946,12 +3943,10 @@ A typical code would be like:
           /* (2) */
           snd_power_change_state(card, SNDRV_CTL_POWER_D3hot);
           /* (3) */
-          snd_pcm_suspend_all(chip->pcm);
-          /* (4) */
           snd_ac97_suspend(chip->ac97);
-          /* (5) */
+          /* (4) */
           snd_mychip_save_registers(chip);
-          /* (6) */
+          /* (5) */
           snd_mychip_stop_hardware(chip);
           return 0;
   }
@@ -3994,13 +3989,9 @@ A typical code would be like:
           return 0;
   }
 
-As shown in the above, it's better to save registers after suspending
-the PCM operations via :c:func:`snd_pcm_suspend_all()` or
-:c:func:`snd_pcm_suspend()`. It means that the PCM streams are
-already stopped when the register snapshot is taken. But, remember that
-you don't have to restart the PCM stream in the resume callback. It'll
-be restarted via trigger call with ``SNDRV_PCM_TRIGGER_RESUME`` when
-necessary.
+Note that, at the time this callback gets called, the PCM stream has
+been already suspended via its own PM ops calling
+:c:func:`snd_pcm_suspend_all()` internally.
 
 OK, we have all callbacks now. Let's set them up. In the initialization
 of the card, make sure that you can get the chip data from the card
diff --git a/Documentation/sound/soc/dpcm.rst b/Documentation/sound/soc/dpcm.rst
index f6845b2278ea..77f67ded53de 100644
--- a/Documentation/sound/soc/dpcm.rst
+++ b/Documentation/sound/soc/dpcm.rst
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ drivers that expose several ALSA PCMs and can route to multiple DAIs.
 The DPCM runtime routing is determined by the ALSA mixer settings in the same
 way as the analog signal is routed in an ASoC codec driver. DPCM uses a DAPM
 graph representing the DSP internal audio paths and uses the mixer settings to
-determine the patch used by each ALSA PCM.
+determine the path used by each ALSA PCM.
 
 DPCM re-uses all the existing component codec, platform and DAI drivers without
 any modifications.
@@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ The audio driver processes this as follows :-
 
 4. Machine driver or audio HAL enables the speaker path.
 
-5. DPCM runs the PCM ops for startup(), hw_params(), prepapre() and
+5. DPCM runs the PCM ops for startup(), hw_params(), prepare() and
    trigger(start) for DAI1 Speakers since the path is enabled.
 
 In this example, the machine driver or userspace audio HAL can alter the routing
@@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ like a BT phone call :-
 This allows the host CPU to sleep while the DSP, MODEM DAI and the BT DAI are
 still in operation.
 
-A BE DAI link can also set the codec to a dummy device if the code is a device
+A BE DAI link can also set the codec to a dummy device if the codec is a device
 that is managed externally.
 
 Likewise a BE DAI can also set a dummy cpu DAI if the CPU DAI is managed by the
@@ -249,7 +249,7 @@ configuration.
 	struct snd_interval *channels = hw_param_interval(params,
 						SNDRV_PCM_HW_PARAM_CHANNELS);
 
-	/* The DSP will covert the FE rate to 48k, stereo */
+	/* The DSP will convert the FE rate to 48k, stereo */
 	rate->min = rate->max = 48000;
 	channels->min = channels->max = 2;
 
@@ -386,5 +386,3 @@ This means creating a new FE that is connected with a virtual path to both
 DAI links. The DAI links will be started when the FE PCM is started and stopped
 when the FE PCM is stopped. Note that the FE PCM cannot read or write data in
 this configuration.
-
-
diff --git a/Documentation/sparc/adi.txt b/Documentation/sparc/adi.rst
index e1aed155fb89..857ad30f9569 100644
--- a/Documentation/sparc/adi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sparc/adi.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+================================
 Application Data Integrity (ADI)
 ================================
 
@@ -44,12 +45,15 @@ provided by the hypervisor to the kernel.  Kernel returns the value of
 ADI block size to userspace using auxiliary vector along with other ADI
 info. Following auxiliary vectors are provided by the kernel:
 
+	============	===========================================
 	AT_ADI_BLKSZ	ADI block size. This is the granularity and
 			alignment, in bytes, of ADI versioning.
 	AT_ADI_NBITS	Number of ADI version bits in the VA
+	============	===========================================
 
 
-IMPORTANT NOTES:
+IMPORTANT NOTES
+===============
 
 - Version tag values of 0x0 and 0xf are reserved. These values match any
   tag in virtual address and never generate a mismatch exception.
@@ -86,11 +90,12 @@ IMPORTANT NOTES:
 
 
 ADI related traps
------------------
+=================
 
 With ADI enabled, following new traps may occur:
 
 Disrupting memory corruption
+----------------------------
 
 	When a store accesses a memory localtion that has TTE.mcd=1,
 	the task is running with ADI enabled (PSTATE.mcde=1), and the ADI
@@ -100,7 +105,7 @@ Disrupting memory corruption
 	first. Hypervisor creates a sun4v error report and sends a
 	resumable error (TT=0x7e) trap to the kernel. The kernel sends
 	a SIGSEGV to the task that resulted in this trap with the following
-	info:
+	info::
 
 		siginfo.si_signo = SIGSEGV;
 		siginfo.errno = 0;
@@ -110,6 +115,7 @@ Disrupting memory corruption
 
 
 Precise memory corruption
+-------------------------
 
 	When a store accesses a memory location that has TTE.mcd=1,
 	the task is running with ADI enabled (PSTATE.mcde=1), and the ADI
@@ -118,7 +124,7 @@ Precise memory corruption
 	MCD precise exception is enabled (MCDPERR=1), a precise
 	exception is sent to the kernel with TT=0x1a. The kernel sends
 	a SIGSEGV to the task that resulted in this trap with the following
-	info:
+	info::
 
 		siginfo.si_signo = SIGSEGV;
 		siginfo.errno = 0;
@@ -126,17 +132,19 @@ Precise memory corruption
 		siginfo.si_addr = addr;	/* address that caused trap */
 		siginfo.si_trapno = 0;
 
-	NOTE: ADI tag mismatch on a load always results in precise trap.
+	NOTE:
+		ADI tag mismatch on a load always results in precise trap.
 
 
 MCD disabled
+------------
 
 	When a task has not enabled ADI and attempts to set ADI version
 	on a memory address, processor sends an MCD disabled trap. This
 	trap is handled by hypervisor first and the hypervisor vectors this
 	trap through to the kernel as Data Access Exception trap with
 	fault type set to 0xa (invalid ASI). When this occurs, the kernel
-	sends the task SIGSEGV signal with following info:
+	sends the task SIGSEGV signal with following info::
 
 		siginfo.si_signo = SIGSEGV;
 		siginfo.errno = 0;
@@ -149,35 +157,35 @@ Sample program to use ADI
 -------------------------
 
 Following sample program is meant to illustrate how to use the ADI
-functionality.
-
-#include <unistd.h>
-#include <stdio.h>
-#include <stdlib.h>
-#include <elf.h>
-#include <sys/ipc.h>
-#include <sys/shm.h>
-#include <sys/mman.h>
-#include <asm/asi.h>
-
-#ifndef AT_ADI_BLKSZ
-#define AT_ADI_BLKSZ	48
-#endif
-#ifndef AT_ADI_NBITS
-#define AT_ADI_NBITS	49
-#endif
-
-#ifndef PROT_ADI
-#define PROT_ADI	0x10
-#endif
-
-#define BUFFER_SIZE     32*1024*1024UL
-
-main(int argc, char* argv[], char* envp[])
-{
-        unsigned long i, mcde, adi_blksz, adi_nbits;
-        char *shmaddr, *tmp_addr, *end, *veraddr, *clraddr;
-        int shmid, version;
+functionality::
+
+  #include <unistd.h>
+  #include <stdio.h>
+  #include <stdlib.h>
+  #include <elf.h>
+  #include <sys/ipc.h>
+  #include <sys/shm.h>
+  #include <sys/mman.h>
+  #include <asm/asi.h>
+
+  #ifndef AT_ADI_BLKSZ
+  #define AT_ADI_BLKSZ	48
+  #endif
+  #ifndef AT_ADI_NBITS
+  #define AT_ADI_NBITS	49
+  #endif
+
+  #ifndef PROT_ADI
+  #define PROT_ADI	0x10
+  #endif
+
+  #define BUFFER_SIZE     32*1024*1024UL
+
+  main(int argc, char* argv[], char* envp[])
+  {
+          unsigned long i, mcde, adi_blksz, adi_nbits;
+          char *shmaddr, *tmp_addr, *end, *veraddr, *clraddr;
+          int shmid, version;
 	Elf64_auxv_t *auxv;
 
 	adi_blksz = 0;
@@ -202,77 +210,77 @@ main(int argc, char* argv[], char* envp[])
 	printf("\tBlock size = %ld\n", adi_blksz);
 	printf("\tNumber of bits = %ld\n", adi_nbits);
 
-        if ((shmid = shmget(2, BUFFER_SIZE,
-                                IPC_CREAT | SHM_R | SHM_W)) < 0) {
-                perror("shmget failed");
-                exit(1);
-        }
+          if ((shmid = shmget(2, BUFFER_SIZE,
+                                  IPC_CREAT | SHM_R | SHM_W)) < 0) {
+                  perror("shmget failed");
+                  exit(1);
+          }
 
-        shmaddr = shmat(shmid, NULL, 0);
-        if (shmaddr == (char *)-1) {
-                perror("shm attach failed");
-                shmctl(shmid, IPC_RMID, NULL);
-                exit(1);
-        }
+          shmaddr = shmat(shmid, NULL, 0);
+          if (shmaddr == (char *)-1) {
+                  perror("shm attach failed");
+                  shmctl(shmid, IPC_RMID, NULL);
+                  exit(1);
+          }
 
 	if (mprotect(shmaddr, BUFFER_SIZE, PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE|PROT_ADI)) {
 		perror("mprotect failed");
 		goto err_out;
 	}
 
-        /* Set the ADI version tag on the shm segment
-         */
-        version = 10;
-        tmp_addr = shmaddr;
-        end = shmaddr + BUFFER_SIZE;
-        while (tmp_addr < end) {
-                asm volatile(
-                        "stxa %1, [%0]0x90\n\t"
-                        :
-                        : "r" (tmp_addr), "r" (version));
-                tmp_addr += adi_blksz;
-        }
+          /* Set the ADI version tag on the shm segment
+           */
+          version = 10;
+          tmp_addr = shmaddr;
+          end = shmaddr + BUFFER_SIZE;
+          while (tmp_addr < end) {
+                  asm volatile(
+                          "stxa %1, [%0]0x90\n\t"
+                          :
+                          : "r" (tmp_addr), "r" (version));
+                  tmp_addr += adi_blksz;
+          }
 	asm volatile("membar #Sync\n\t");
 
-        /* Create a versioned address from the normal address by placing
+          /* Create a versioned address from the normal address by placing
 	 * version tag in the upper adi_nbits bits
-         */
-        tmp_addr = (void *) ((unsigned long)shmaddr << adi_nbits);
-        tmp_addr = (void *) ((unsigned long)tmp_addr >> adi_nbits);
-        veraddr = (void *) (((unsigned long)version << (64-adi_nbits))
-                        | (unsigned long)tmp_addr);
-
-        printf("Starting the writes:\n");
-        for (i = 0; i < BUFFER_SIZE; i++) {
-                veraddr[i] = (char)(i);
-                if (!(i % (1024 * 1024)))
-                        printf(".");
-        }
-        printf("\n");
-
-        printf("Verifying data...");
+           */
+          tmp_addr = (void *) ((unsigned long)shmaddr << adi_nbits);
+          tmp_addr = (void *) ((unsigned long)tmp_addr >> adi_nbits);
+          veraddr = (void *) (((unsigned long)version << (64-adi_nbits))
+                          | (unsigned long)tmp_addr);
+
+          printf("Starting the writes:\n");
+          for (i = 0; i < BUFFER_SIZE; i++) {
+                  veraddr[i] = (char)(i);
+                  if (!(i % (1024 * 1024)))
+                          printf(".");
+          }
+          printf("\n");
+
+          printf("Verifying data...");
 	fflush(stdout);
-        for (i = 0; i < BUFFER_SIZE; i++)
-                if (veraddr[i] != (char)i)
-                        printf("\nIndex %lu mismatched\n", i);
-        printf("Done.\n");
+          for (i = 0; i < BUFFER_SIZE; i++)
+                  if (veraddr[i] != (char)i)
+                          printf("\nIndex %lu mismatched\n", i);
+          printf("Done.\n");
 
-        /* Disable ADI and clean up
-         */
+          /* Disable ADI and clean up
+           */
 	if (mprotect(shmaddr, BUFFER_SIZE, PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE)) {
 		perror("mprotect failed");
 		goto err_out;
 	}
 
-        if (shmdt((const void *)shmaddr) != 0)
-                perror("Detach failure");
-        shmctl(shmid, IPC_RMID, NULL);
+          if (shmdt((const void *)shmaddr) != 0)
+                  perror("Detach failure");
+          shmctl(shmid, IPC_RMID, NULL);
 
-        exit(0);
+          exit(0);
 
-err_out:
-        if (shmdt((const void *)shmaddr) != 0)
-                perror("Detach failure");
-        shmctl(shmid, IPC_RMID, NULL);
-        exit(1);
-}
+  err_out:
+          if (shmdt((const void *)shmaddr) != 0)
+                  perror("Detach failure");
+          shmctl(shmid, IPC_RMID, NULL);
+          exit(1);
+  }
diff --git a/Documentation/sparc/console.txt b/Documentation/sparc/console.rst
index 5aa735a44e02..73132db83ece 100644
--- a/Documentation/sparc/console.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sparc/console.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-Steps for sending 'break' on sunhv console:
-===========================================
+Steps for sending 'break' on sunhv console
+==========================================
 
 On Baremetal:
    1. press   Esc + 'B'
diff --git a/Documentation/sparc/index.rst b/Documentation/sparc/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..91f7d6643dd5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/sparc/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+:orphan:
+
+==================
+Sparc Architecture
+==================
+
+.. toctree::
+   :maxdepth: 1
+
+   console
+   adi
+
+   oradax/oracle-dax
diff --git a/Documentation/sparc/oradax/oracle-dax.txt b/Documentation/sparc/oradax/oracle-dax.rst
index 9d53ac93286f..d1e14d572918 100644
--- a/Documentation/sparc/oradax/oracle-dax.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sparc/oradax/oracle-dax.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
+=======================================
 Oracle Data Analytics Accelerator (DAX)
----------------------------------------
+=======================================
 
 DAX is a coprocessor which resides on the SPARC M7 (DAX1) and M8
 (DAX2) processor chips, and has direct access to the CPU's L3 caches
@@ -17,6 +18,7 @@ code sufficient to write user or kernel applications that use DAX
 functionality.
 
 The user library is open source and available at:
+
     https://oss.oracle.com/git/gitweb.cgi?p=libdax.git
 
 The Hypervisor interface to the coprocessor is described in detail in
@@ -26,7 +28,7 @@ Specification" version 3.0.20+15, dated 2017-09-25.
 
 
 High Level Overview
--------------------
+===================
 
 A coprocessor request is described by a Command Control Block
 (CCB). The CCB contains an opcode and various parameters. The opcode
@@ -52,7 +54,7 @@ thread.
 
 
 Addressing Memory
------------------
+=================
 
 The kernel does not have access to physical memory in the Sun4v
 architecture, as there is an additional level of memory virtualization
@@ -77,7 +79,7 @@ the request.
 
 
 The Driver API
---------------
+==============
 
 An application makes requests to the driver via the write() system
 call, and gets results (if any) via read(). The completion areas are
@@ -108,6 +110,7 @@ equal to the number of bytes given in the call. Otherwise -1 is
 returned and errno is set.
 
 CCB_DEQUEUE
+-----------
 
 Tells the driver to clean up resources associated with past
 requests. Since no interrupt is generated upon the completion of a
@@ -116,12 +119,14 @@ further status information is returned, so the user should not
 subsequently call read().
 
 CCB_KILL
+--------
 
 Kills a CCB during execution. The CCB is guaranteed to not continue
 executing once this call returns successfully. On success, read() must
 be called to retrieve the result of the action.
 
 CCB_INFO
+--------
 
 Retrieves information about a currently executing CCB. Note that some
 Hypervisors might return 'notfound' when the CCB is in 'inprogress'
@@ -130,6 +135,7 @@ CCB_KILL must be invoked on that CCB. Upon success, read() must be
 called to retrieve the details of the action.
 
 Submission of an array of CCBs for execution
+---------------------------------------------
 
 A write() whose length is a multiple of the CCB size is treated as a
 submit operation. The file offset is treated as the index of the
@@ -146,6 +152,7 @@ status will reflect the error caused by the first CCB that was not
 accepted, and status_data will provide additional data in some cases.
 
 MMAP
+----
 
 The mmap() function provides access to the completion area allocated
 in the driver.  Note that the completion area is not writeable by the
@@ -153,7 +160,7 @@ user process, and the mmap call must not specify PROT_WRITE.
 
 
 Completion of a Request
------------------------
+=======================
 
 The first byte in each completion area is the command status which is
 updated by the coprocessor hardware. Software may take advantage of
@@ -172,7 +179,7 @@ and resumption of execution may be just a few nanoseconds.
 
 
 Application Life Cycle of a DAX Submission
-------------------------------------------
+==========================================
 
  - open dax device
  - call mmap() to get the completion area address
@@ -187,7 +194,7 @@ Application Life Cycle of a DAX Submission
 
 
 Memory Constraints
-------------------
+==================
 
 The DAX hardware operates only on physical addresses. Therefore, it is
 not aware of virtual memory mappings and the discontiguities that may
@@ -226,7 +233,7 @@ CCB Structure
 -------------
 A CCB is an array of 8 64-bit words. Several of these words provide
 command opcodes, parameters, flags, etc., and the rest are addresses
-for the completion area, output buffer, and various inputs:
+for the completion area, output buffer, and various inputs::
 
    struct ccb {
        u64   control;
@@ -252,7 +259,7 @@ The first word (control) is examined by the driver for the following:
 
 
 Example Code
-------------
+============
 
 The DAX is accessible to both user and kernel code.  The kernel code
 can make hypercalls directly while the user code must use wrappers
@@ -265,7 +272,7 @@ arch/sparc/include/uapi/asm/oradax.h must be included.
 
 First, the proper device must be opened. For M7 it will be
 /dev/oradax1 and for M8 it will be /dev/oradax2. The simplest
-procedure is to attempt to open both, as only one will succeed:
+procedure is to attempt to open both, as only one will succeed::
 
 	fd = open("/dev/oradax1", O_RDWR);
 	if (fd < 0)
@@ -273,7 +280,7 @@ procedure is to attempt to open both, as only one will succeed:
 	if (fd < 0)
 	       /* No DAX found */
 
-Next, the completion area must be mapped:
+Next, the completion area must be mapped::
 
       completion_area = mmap(NULL, DAX_MMAP_LEN, PROT_READ, MAP_SHARED, fd, 0);
 
@@ -295,7 +302,7 @@ is the input bitmap inverted.
 
 For details of all the parameters and bits used in this CCB, please
 refer to section 36.2.1.3 of the DAX Hypervisor API document, which
-describes the Scan command in detail.
+describes the Scan command in detail::
 
 	ccb->control =       /* Table 36.1, CCB Header Format */
 		  (2L << 48)     /* command = Scan Value */
@@ -326,7 +333,7 @@ describes the Scan command in detail.
 
 The CCB submission is a write() or pwrite() system call to the
 driver. If the call fails, then a read() must be used to retrieve the
-status:
+status::
 
 	if (pwrite(fd, ccb, 64, 0) != 64) {
 		struct ccb_exec_result status;
@@ -337,7 +344,7 @@ status:
 After a successful submission of the CCB, the completion area may be
 polled to determine when the DAX is finished. Detailed information on
 the contents of the completion area can be found in section 36.2.2 of
-the DAX HV API document.
+the DAX HV API document::
 
 	while (1) {
 		/* Monitored Load */
@@ -355,7 +362,7 @@ the DAX HV API document.
 A completion area status of 1 indicates successful completion of the
 CCB and validity of the output bitmap, which may be used immediately.
 All other non-zero values indicate error conditions which are
-described in section 36.2.2.
+described in section 36.2.2::
 
 	if (completion_area[0] != 1) {	/* section 36.2.2, 1 = command ran and succeeded */
 		/* completion_area[0] contains the completion status */
@@ -364,7 +371,7 @@ described in section 36.2.2.
 
 After the completion area has been processed, the driver must be
 notified that it can release any resources associated with the
-request. This is done via the dequeue operation:
+request. This is done via the dequeue operation::
 
 	struct dax_command cmd;
 	cmd.command = CCB_DEQUEUE;
@@ -375,13 +382,14 @@ request. This is done via the dequeue operation:
 Finally, normal program cleanup should be done, i.e., unmapping
 completion area, closing the dax device, freeing memory etc.
 
-[Kernel example]
+Kernel example
+--------------
 
 The only difference in using the DAX in kernel code is the treatment
 of the completion area. Unlike user applications which mmap the
 completion area allocated by the driver, kernel code must allocate its
 own memory to use for the completion area, and this address and its
-type must be given in the CCB:
+type must be given in the CCB::
 
 	ccb->control |=      /* Table 36.1, CCB Header Format */
 	        (3L << 32);     /* completion area address type = primary virtual */
@@ -389,9 +397,11 @@ type must be given in the CCB:
 	ccb->completion = (unsigned long) completion_area;   /* Completion area address */
 
 The dax submit hypercall is made directly. The flags used in the
-ccb_submit call are documented in the DAX HV API in section 36.3.1.
+ccb_submit call are documented in the DAX HV API in section 36.3.1/
 
-#include <asm/hypervisor.h>
+::
+
+  #include <asm/hypervisor.h>
 
 	hv_rv = sun4v_ccb_submit((unsigned long)ccb, 64,
 				 HV_CCB_QUERY_CMD |
@@ -405,7 +415,7 @@ ccb_submit call are documented in the DAX HV API in section 36.3.1.
 	}
 
 After the submission, the completion area polling code is identical to
-that in user land:
+that in user land::
 
 	while (1) {
 		/* Monitored Load */
@@ -427,3 +437,9 @@ that in user land:
 
 The output bitmap is ready for consumption immediately after the
 completion status indicates success.
+
+Excer[t from UltraSPARC Virtual Machine Specification
+=====================================================
+
+ .. include:: dax-hv-api.txt
+    :literal:
diff --git a/Documentation/speculation.txt b/Documentation/speculation.txt
index e9e6cbae2841..50d7ea857cff 100644
--- a/Documentation/speculation.txt
+++ b/Documentation/speculation.txt
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ observed to extract secret information.
 
 For example, in the presence of branch prediction, it is possible for bounds
 checks to be ignored by code which is speculatively executed. Consider the
-following code:
+following code::
 
 	int load_array(int *array, unsigned int index)
 	{
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ following code:
 			return array[index];
 	}
 
-Which, on arm64, may be compiled to an assembly sequence such as:
+Which, on arm64, may be compiled to an assembly sequence such as::
 
 	CMP	<index>, #MAX_ARRAY_ELEMS
 	B.LT	less
@@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ microarchitectural state which can be subsequently measured.
 
 More complex sequences involving multiple dependent memory accesses may
 result in sensitive information being leaked. Consider the following
-code, building on the prior example:
+code, building on the prior example::
 
 	int load_dependent_arrays(int *arr1, int *arr2, int index)
 	{
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ A call to array_index_nospec(index, size) returns a sanitized index
 value that is bounded to [0, size) even under cpu speculation
 conditions.
 
-This can be used to protect the earlier load_array() example:
+This can be used to protect the earlier load_array() example::
 
 	int load_array(int *array, unsigned int index)
 	{
diff --git a/Documentation/sphinx/kerneldoc.py b/Documentation/sphinx/kerneldoc.py
index 9d0a7f08f93b..1159405cb920 100644
--- a/Documentation/sphinx/kerneldoc.py
+++ b/Documentation/sphinx/kerneldoc.py
@@ -37,7 +37,19 @@ import glob
 from docutils import nodes, statemachine
 from docutils.statemachine import ViewList
 from docutils.parsers.rst import directives, Directive
-from sphinx.ext.autodoc import AutodocReporter
+
+#
+# AutodocReporter is only good up to Sphinx 1.7
+#
+import sphinx
+
+Use_SSI = sphinx.__version__[:3] >= '1.7'
+if Use_SSI:
+    from sphinx.util.docutils import switch_source_input
+else:
+    from sphinx.ext.autodoc import AutodocReporter
+
+import kernellog
 
 __version__  = '1.0'
 
@@ -90,7 +102,8 @@ class KernelDocDirective(Directive):
         cmd += [filename]
 
         try:
-            env.app.verbose('calling kernel-doc \'%s\'' % (" ".join(cmd)))
+            kernellog.verbose(env.app,
+                              'calling kernel-doc \'%s\'' % (" ".join(cmd)))
 
             p = subprocess.Popen(cmd, stdout=subprocess.PIPE, stderr=subprocess.PIPE)
             out, err = p.communicate()
@@ -100,7 +113,8 @@ class KernelDocDirective(Directive):
             if p.returncode != 0:
                 sys.stderr.write(err)
 
-                env.app.warn('kernel-doc \'%s\' failed with return code %d' % (" ".join(cmd), p.returncode))
+                kernellog.warn(env.app,
+                               'kernel-doc \'%s\' failed with return code %d' % (" ".join(cmd), p.returncode))
                 return [nodes.error(None, nodes.paragraph(text = "kernel-doc missing"))]
             elif env.config.kerneldoc_verbosity > 0:
                 sys.stderr.write(err)
@@ -121,20 +135,28 @@ class KernelDocDirective(Directive):
                     lineoffset += 1
 
             node = nodes.section()
-            buf = self.state.memo.title_styles, self.state.memo.section_level, self.state.memo.reporter
+            self.do_parse(result, node)
+
+            return node.children
+
+        except Exception as e:  # pylint: disable=W0703
+            kernellog.warn(env.app, 'kernel-doc \'%s\' processing failed with: %s' %
+                           (" ".join(cmd), str(e)))
+            return [nodes.error(None, nodes.paragraph(text = "kernel-doc missing"))]
+
+    def do_parse(self, result, node):
+        if Use_SSI:
+            with switch_source_input(self.state, result):
+                self.state.nested_parse(result, 0, node, match_titles=1)
+        else:
+            save = self.state.memo.title_styles, self.state.memo.section_level, self.state.memo.reporter
             self.state.memo.reporter = AutodocReporter(result, self.state.memo.reporter)
             self.state.memo.title_styles, self.state.memo.section_level = [], 0
             try:
                 self.state.nested_parse(result, 0, node, match_titles=1)
             finally:
-                self.state.memo.title_styles, self.state.memo.section_level, self.state.memo.reporter = buf
+                self.state.memo.title_styles, self.state.memo.section_level, self.state.memo.reporter = save
 
-            return node.children
-
-        except Exception as e:  # pylint: disable=W0703
-            env.app.warn('kernel-doc \'%s\' processing failed with: %s' %
-                         (" ".join(cmd), str(e)))
-            return [nodes.error(None, nodes.paragraph(text = "kernel-doc missing"))]
 
 def setup(app):
     app.add_config_value('kerneldoc_bin', None, 'env')
diff --git a/Documentation/sphinx/kernellog.py b/Documentation/sphinx/kernellog.py
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..af924f51a7dc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/sphinx/kernellog.py
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+#
+# Sphinx has deprecated its older logging interface, but the replacement
+# only goes back to 1.6.  So here's a wrapper layer to keep around for
+# as long as we support 1.4.
+#
+import sphinx
+
+if sphinx.__version__[:3] >= '1.6':
+    UseLogging = True
+    from sphinx.util import logging
+    logger = logging.getLogger('kerneldoc')
+else:
+    UseLogging = False
+
+def warn(app, message):
+    if UseLogging:
+        logger.warning(message)
+    else:
+        app.warn(message)
+
+def verbose(app, message):
+    if UseLogging:
+        logger.verbose(message)
+    else:
+        app.verbose(message)
+
+
diff --git a/Documentation/sphinx/kfigure.py b/Documentation/sphinx/kfigure.py
index b97228d2cc0e..fbfe6693bb60 100644
--- a/Documentation/sphinx/kfigure.py
+++ b/Documentation/sphinx/kfigure.py
@@ -60,6 +60,8 @@ import sphinx
 from sphinx.util.nodes import clean_astext
 from six import iteritems
 
+import kernellog
+
 PY3 = sys.version_info[0] == 3
 
 if PY3:
@@ -171,20 +173,20 @@ def setupTools(app):
     This function is called once, when the builder is initiated.
     """
     global dot_cmd, convert_cmd   # pylint: disable=W0603
-    app.verbose("kfigure: check installed tools ...")
+    kernellog.verbose(app, "kfigure: check installed tools ...")
 
     dot_cmd = which('dot')
     convert_cmd = which('convert')
 
     if dot_cmd:
-        app.verbose("use dot(1) from: " + dot_cmd)
+        kernellog.verbose(app, "use dot(1) from: " + dot_cmd)
     else:
-        app.warn("dot(1) not found, for better output quality install "
-                 "graphviz from http://www.graphviz.org")
+        kernellog.warn(app, "dot(1) not found, for better output quality install "
+                       "graphviz from http://www.graphviz.org")
     if convert_cmd:
-        app.verbose("use convert(1) from: " + convert_cmd)
+        kernellog.verbose(app, "use convert(1) from: " + convert_cmd)
     else:
-        app.warn(
+        kernellog.warn(app,
             "convert(1) not found, for SVG to PDF conversion install "
             "ImageMagick (https://www.imagemagick.org)")
 
@@ -220,12 +222,13 @@ def convert_image(img_node, translator, src_fname=None):
 
     # in kernel builds, use 'make SPHINXOPTS=-v' to see verbose messages
 
-    app.verbose('assert best format for: ' + img_node['uri'])
+    kernellog.verbose(app, 'assert best format for: ' + img_node['uri'])
 
     if in_ext == '.dot':
 
         if not dot_cmd:
-            app.verbose("dot from graphviz not available / include DOT raw.")
+            kernellog.verbose(app,
+                              "dot from graphviz not available / include DOT raw.")
             img_node.replace_self(file2literal(src_fname))
 
         elif translator.builder.format == 'latex':
@@ -252,7 +255,8 @@ def convert_image(img_node, translator, src_fname=None):
 
         if translator.builder.format == 'latex':
             if convert_cmd is None:
-                app.verbose("no SVG to PDF conversion available / include SVG raw.")
+                kernellog.verbose(app,
+                                  "no SVG to PDF conversion available / include SVG raw.")
                 img_node.replace_self(file2literal(src_fname))
             else:
                 dst_fname = path.join(translator.builder.outdir, fname + '.pdf')
@@ -265,18 +269,19 @@ def convert_image(img_node, translator, src_fname=None):
         _name = dst_fname[len(translator.builder.outdir) + 1:]
 
         if isNewer(dst_fname, src_fname):
-            app.verbose("convert: {out}/%s already exists and is newer" % _name)
+            kernellog.verbose(app,
+                              "convert: {out}/%s already exists and is newer" % _name)
 
         else:
             ok = False
             mkdir(path.dirname(dst_fname))
 
             if in_ext == '.dot':
-                app.verbose('convert DOT to: {out}/' + _name)
+                kernellog.verbose(app, 'convert DOT to: {out}/' + _name)
                 ok = dot2format(app, src_fname, dst_fname)
 
             elif in_ext == '.svg':
-                app.verbose('convert SVG to: {out}/' + _name)
+                kernellog.verbose(app, 'convert SVG to: {out}/' + _name)
                 ok = svg2pdf(app, src_fname, dst_fname)
 
             if not ok:
@@ -305,7 +310,8 @@ def dot2format(app, dot_fname, out_fname):
     with open(out_fname, "w") as out:
         exit_code = subprocess.call(cmd, stdout = out)
         if exit_code != 0:
-            app.warn("Error #%d when calling: %s" % (exit_code, " ".join(cmd)))
+            kernellog.warn(app,
+                          "Error #%d when calling: %s" % (exit_code, " ".join(cmd)))
     return bool(exit_code == 0)
 
 def svg2pdf(app, svg_fname, pdf_fname):
@@ -322,7 +328,7 @@ def svg2pdf(app, svg_fname, pdf_fname):
     # use stdout and stderr from parent
     exit_code = subprocess.call(cmd)
     if exit_code != 0:
-        app.warn("Error #%d when calling: %s" % (exit_code, " ".join(cmd)))
+        kernellog.warn(app, "Error #%d when calling: %s" % (exit_code, " ".join(cmd)))
     return bool(exit_code == 0)
 
 
@@ -415,15 +421,15 @@ def visit_kernel_render(self, node):
     app = self.builder.app
     srclang = node.get('srclang')
 
-    app.verbose('visit kernel-render node lang: "%s"' % (srclang))
+    kernellog.verbose(app, 'visit kernel-render node lang: "%s"' % (srclang))
 
     tmp_ext = RENDER_MARKUP_EXT.get(srclang, None)
     if tmp_ext is None:
-        app.warn('kernel-render: "%s" unknown / include raw.' % (srclang))
+        kernellog.warn(app, 'kernel-render: "%s" unknown / include raw.' % (srclang))
         return
 
     if not dot_cmd and tmp_ext == '.dot':
-        app.verbose("dot from graphviz not available / include raw.")
+        kernellog.verbose(app, "dot from graphviz not available / include raw.")
         return
 
     literal_block = node[0]
diff --git a/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx b/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx
index 13a0b7fb192f..551325b66b23 100644
--- a/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx
+++ b/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx
@@ -21,15 +21,15 @@ Typically a SPI master is defined in the arch/.../mach-*/board-*.c as a
 "platform device".  The master configuration is passed to the driver via a table
 found in include/linux/spi/pxa2xx_spi.h:
 
-struct pxa2xx_spi_master {
+struct pxa2xx_spi_controller {
 	u16 num_chipselect;
 	u8 enable_dma;
 };
 
-The "pxa2xx_spi_master.num_chipselect" field is used to determine the number of
+The "pxa2xx_spi_controller.num_chipselect" field is used to determine the number of
 slave device (chips) attached to this SPI master.
 
-The "pxa2xx_spi_master.enable_dma" field informs the driver that SSP DMA should
+The "pxa2xx_spi_controller.enable_dma" field informs the driver that SSP DMA should
 be used.  This caused the driver to acquire two DMA channels: rx_channel and
 tx_channel.  The rx_channel has a higher DMA service priority the tx_channel.
 See the "PXA2xx Developer Manual" section "DMA Controller".
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ static struct resource pxa_spi_nssp_resources[] = {
 	},
 };
 
-static struct pxa2xx_spi_master pxa_nssp_master_info = {
+static struct pxa2xx_spi_controller pxa_nssp_master_info = {
 	.num_chipselect = 1, /* Matches the number of chips attached to NSSP */
 	.enable_dma = 1, /* Enables NSSP DMA */
 };
@@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ DMA and PIO I/O Support
 -----------------------
 The pxa2xx_spi driver supports both DMA and interrupt driven PIO message
 transfers.  The driver defaults to PIO mode and DMA transfers must be enabled
-by setting the "enable_dma" flag in the "pxa2xx_spi_master" structure.  The DMA
+by setting the "enable_dma" flag in the "pxa2xx_spi_controller" structure.  The DMA
 mode supports both coherent and stream based DMA mappings.
 
 The following logic is used to determine the type of I/O to be used on
diff --git a/Documentation/spi/spi-summary b/Documentation/spi/spi-summary
index 1721c1b570c3..1a63194b74d7 100644
--- a/Documentation/spi/spi-summary
+++ b/Documentation/spi/spi-summary
@@ -572,6 +572,12 @@ SPI MASTER METHODS
 	0: transfer is finished
 	1: transfer is still in progress
 
+    master->set_cs_timing(struct spi_device *spi, u8 setup_clk_cycles,
+			      u8 hold_clk_cycles, u8 inactive_clk_cycles)
+	This method allows SPI client drivers to request SPI master controller
+	for configuring device specific CS setup, hold and inactive timing
+	requirements.
+
     DEPRECATED METHODS
 
     master->transfer(struct spi_device *spi, struct spi_message *message)
diff --git a/Documentation/static-keys.txt b/Documentation/static-keys.txt
index d68135560895..9803e14639bf 100644
--- a/Documentation/static-keys.txt
+++ b/Documentation/static-keys.txt
@@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ particularly the CPU hotplug lock (in order to avoid races against
 CPUs being brought in the kernel while the kernel is getting
 patched). Calling the static key API from within a hotplug notifier is
 thus a sure deadlock recipe. In order to still allow use of the
-functionnality, the following functions are provided:
+functionality, the following functions are provided:
 
 	static_key_enable_cpuslocked()
 	static_key_disable_cpuslocked()
diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt
index c0527d8a468a..f0c86fbb3b48 100644
--- a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt
@@ -79,6 +79,7 @@ show up in /proc/sys/kernel:
 - reboot-cmd                  [ SPARC only ]
 - rtsig-max
 - rtsig-nr
+- sched_energy_aware
 - seccomp/                    ==> Documentation/userspace-api/seccomp_filter.rst
 - sem
 - sem_next_id		      [ sysv ipc ]
@@ -94,7 +95,7 @@ show up in /proc/sys/kernel:
 - stop-a                      [ SPARC only ]
 - sysrq                       ==> Documentation/admin-guide/sysrq.rst
 - sysctl_writes_strict
-- tainted
+- tainted                     ==> Documentation/admin-guide/tainted-kernels.rst
 - threads-max
 - unknown_nmi_panic
 - watchdog
@@ -195,7 +196,7 @@ CAP_LAST_CAP from the kernel.
 core_pattern:
 
 core_pattern is used to specify a core dumpfile pattern name.
-. max length 128 characters; default value is "core"
+. max length 127 characters; default value is "core"
 . core_pattern is used as a pattern template for the output filename;
   certain string patterns (beginning with '%') are substituted with
   their actual values.
@@ -890,6 +891,17 @@ rtsig-nr shows the number of RT signals currently queued.
 
 ==============================================================
 
+sched_energy_aware:
+
+Enables/disables Energy Aware Scheduling (EAS). EAS starts
+automatically on platforms where it can run (that is,
+platforms with asymmetric CPU topologies and having an Energy
+Model available). If your platform happens to meet the
+requirements for EAS but you do not want to use it, change
+this value to 0.
+
+==============================================================
+
 sched_schedstats:
 
 Enables/disables scheduler statistics. Enabling this feature
@@ -1019,39 +1031,33 @@ compilation sees a 1% slowdown, other systems and workloads may vary.
 
   1: kernel stack erasing is enabled (default), it is performed before
      returning to the userspace at the end of syscalls.
-
 ==============================================================
 
-tainted:
+tainted
 
 Non-zero if the kernel has been tainted. Numeric values, which can be
 ORed together. The letters are seen in "Tainted" line of Oops reports.
 
-     1 (P):  A module with a non-GPL license has been loaded, this
-             includes modules with no license.
-             Set by modutils >= 2.4.9 and module-init-tools.
-     2 (F): A module was force loaded by insmod -f.
-            Set by modutils >= 2.4.9 and module-init-tools.
-     4 (S): Unsafe SMP processors: SMP with CPUs not designed for SMP.
-     8 (R): A module was forcibly unloaded from the system by rmmod -f.
-    16 (M): A hardware machine check error occurred on the system.
-    32 (B): A bad page was discovered on the system.
-    64 (U): The user has asked that the system be marked "tainted". This
-            could be because they are running software that directly modifies
-            the hardware, or for other reasons.
-   128 (D): The system has died.
-   256 (A): The ACPI DSDT has been overridden with one supplied by the user
-            instead of using the one provided by the hardware.
-   512 (W): A kernel warning has occurred.
-  1024 (C): A module from drivers/staging was loaded.
-  2048 (I): The system is working around a severe firmware bug.
-  4096 (O): An out-of-tree module has been loaded.
-  8192 (E): An unsigned module has been loaded in a kernel supporting module
-            signature.
- 16384 (L): A soft lockup has previously occurred on the system.
- 32768 (K): The kernel has been live patched.
- 65536 (X): Auxiliary taint, defined and used by for distros.
-131072 (T): The kernel was built with the struct randomization plugin.
+     1 (P): proprietary module was loaded
+     2 (F): module was force loaded
+     4 (S): SMP kernel oops on an officially SMP incapable processor
+     8 (R): module was force unloaded
+    16 (M): processor reported a Machine Check Exception (MCE)
+    32 (B): bad page referenced or some unexpected page flags
+    64 (U): taint requested by userspace application
+   128 (D): kernel died recently, i.e. there was an OOPS or BUG
+   256 (A): an ACPI table was overridden by user
+   512 (W): kernel issued warning
+  1024 (C): staging driver was loaded
+  2048 (I): workaround for bug in platform firmware applied
+  4096 (O): externally-built ("out-of-tree") module was loaded
+  8192 (E): unsigned module was loaded
+ 16384 (L): soft lockup occurred
+ 32768 (K): kernel has been live patched
+ 65536 (X): Auxiliary taint, defined and used by for distros
+131072 (T): The kernel was built with the struct randomization plugin
+
+See Documentation/admin-guide/tainted-kernels.rst for more information.
 
 ==============================================================
 
diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/net.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/net.txt
index 2793d4eac55f..2ae91d3873bb 100644
--- a/Documentation/sysctl/net.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sysctl/net.txt
@@ -52,6 +52,7 @@ two flavors of JITs, the newer eBPF JIT currently supported on:
   - sparc64
   - mips64
   - s390x
+  - riscv
 
 And the older cBPF JIT supported on the following archs:
   - mips
@@ -291,6 +292,20 @@ user space is responsible for creating them if needed.
 
 Default : 0  (for compatibility reasons)
 
+devconf_inherit_init_net
+----------------------------
+
+Controls if a new network namespace should inherit all current
+settings under /proc/sys/net/{ipv4,ipv6}/conf/{all,default}/. By
+default, we keep the current behavior: for IPv4 we inherit all current
+settings from init_net and for IPv6 we reset all settings to default.
+
+If set to 1, both IPv4 and IPv6 settings are forced to inherit from
+current ones in init_net. If set to 2, both IPv4 and IPv6 settings are
+forced to reset to their default values.
+
+Default : 0  (for compatibility reasons)
+
 2. /proc/sys/net/unix - Parameters for Unix domain sockets
 -------------------------------------------------------
 
diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt
index 187ce4f599a2..749322060f10 100644
--- a/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt
@@ -61,6 +61,7 @@ Currently, these files are in /proc/sys/vm:
 - stat_refresh
 - numa_stat
 - swappiness
+- unprivileged_userfaultfd
 - user_reserve_kbytes
 - vfs_cache_pressure
 - watermark_boost_factor
@@ -237,7 +238,7 @@ used:
 	cat (1234): drop_caches: 3
 
 These are informational only.  They do not mean that anything is wrong
-with your system.  To disable them, echo 4 (bit 3) into drop_caches.
+with your system.  To disable them, echo 4 (bit 2) into drop_caches.
 
 ==============================================================
 
@@ -818,6 +819,17 @@ The default value is 60.
 
 ==============================================================
 
+unprivileged_userfaultfd
+
+This flag controls whether unprivileged users can use the userfaultfd
+system calls.  Set this to 1 to allow unprivileged users to use the
+userfaultfd system calls, or set this to 0 to restrict userfaultfd to only
+privileged users (with SYS_CAP_PTRACE capability).
+
+The default value is 1.
+
+==============================================================
+
 - user_reserve_kbytes
 
 When overcommit_memory is set to 2, "never overcommit" mode, reserve
@@ -866,14 +878,14 @@ The intent is that compaction has less work to do in the future and to
 increase the success rate of future high-order allocations such as SLUB
 allocations, THP and hugetlbfs pages.
 
-To make it sensible with respect to the watermark_scale_factor parameter,
-the unit is in fractions of 10,000. The default value of 15,000 means
-that up to 150% of the high watermark will be reclaimed in the event of
-a pageblock being mixed due to fragmentation. The level of reclaim is
-determined by the number of fragmentation events that occurred in the
-recent past. If this value is smaller than a pageblock then a pageblocks
-worth of pages will be reclaimed (e.g.  2MB on 64-bit x86). A boost factor
-of 0 will disable the feature.
+To make it sensible with respect to the watermark_scale_factor
+parameter, the unit is in fractions of 10,000. The default value of
+15,000 on !DISCONTIGMEM configurations means that up to 150% of the high
+watermark will be reclaimed in the event of a pageblock being mixed due
+to fragmentation. The level of reclaim is determined by the number of
+fragmentation events that occurred in the recent past. If this value is
+smaller than a pageblock then a pageblocks worth of pages will be reclaimed
+(e.g.  2MB on 64-bit x86). A boost factor of 0 will disable the feature.
 
 =============================================================
 
diff --git a/Documentation/target/tcm_mod_builder.py b/Documentation/target/tcm_mod_builder.py
index 94bf6944bb1e..95d6e31f1e3a 100755
--- a/Documentation/target/tcm_mod_builder.py
+++ b/Documentation/target/tcm_mod_builder.py
@@ -297,7 +297,6 @@ def tcm_mod_build_configfs(proto_ident, fabric_mod_dir_var, fabric_mod_name):
 	buf += "	.sess_get_index			= " + fabric_mod_name + "_sess_get_index,\n"
 	buf += "	.sess_get_initiator_sid		= NULL,\n"
 	buf += "	.write_pending			= " + fabric_mod_name + "_write_pending,\n"
-	buf += "	.write_pending_status		= " + fabric_mod_name + "_write_pending_status,\n"
 	buf += "	.set_default_node_attributes	= " + fabric_mod_name + "_set_default_node_attrs,\n"
 	buf += "	.get_cmd_state			= " + fabric_mod_name + "_get_cmd_state,\n"
 	buf += "	.queue_data_in			= " + fabric_mod_name + "_queue_data_in,\n"
@@ -479,13 +478,6 @@ def tcm_mod_dump_fabric_ops(proto_ident, fabric_mod_dir_var, fabric_mod_name):
 			buf += "}\n\n"
 			bufi += "int " + fabric_mod_name + "_write_pending(struct se_cmd *);\n"
 
-		if re.search('write_pending_status\)\(', fo):
-			buf += "int " + fabric_mod_name + "_write_pending_status(struct se_cmd *se_cmd)\n"
-			buf += "{\n"
-			buf += "	return 0;\n"
-			buf += "}\n\n"
-			bufi += "int " + fabric_mod_name + "_write_pending_status(struct se_cmd *);\n"
-
 		if re.search('set_default_node_attributes\)\(', fo):
 			buf += "void " + fabric_mod_name + "_set_default_node_attrs(struct se_node_acl *nacl)\n"
 			buf += "{\n"
diff --git a/Documentation/thermal/sysfs-api.txt b/Documentation/thermal/sysfs-api.txt
index 911399730c1c..c3fa500df92c 100644
--- a/Documentation/thermal/sysfs-api.txt
+++ b/Documentation/thermal/sysfs-api.txt
@@ -316,7 +316,7 @@ ACPI thermal zones.
     |---temp[1-*]_input:	The current temperature of thermal zone [1-*]
     |---temp[1-*]_critical:	The critical trip point of thermal zone [1-*]
 
-Please read Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface for additional information.
+Please read Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface.rst for additional information.
 
 ***************************
 * Thermal zone attributes *
diff --git a/Documentation/timers/highres.txt b/Documentation/timers/highres.txt
index 9d88f67781c2..8f9741592123 100644
--- a/Documentation/timers/highres.txt
+++ b/Documentation/timers/highres.txt
@@ -231,7 +231,7 @@ in the idle period to make sure that jiffies are up to date and the interrupt
 handler has not to deal with an eventually stale jiffy value.
 
 The dynamic tick feature provides statistical values which are exported to
-userspace via /proc/stats and can be made available for enhanced power
+userspace via /proc/stat and can be made available for enhanced power
 management control.
 
 The implementation leaves room for further development like full tickless
diff --git a/Documentation/trace/ftrace.rst b/Documentation/trace/ftrace.rst
index 0131df7f5968..f60079259669 100644
--- a/Documentation/trace/ftrace.rst
+++ b/Documentation/trace/ftrace.rst
@@ -233,6 +233,12 @@ of ftrace. Here is a list of some of the key files:
 	This interface also allows for commands to be used. See the
 	"Filter commands" section for more details.
 
+	As a speed up, since processing strings can't be quite expensive
+	and requires a check of all functions registered to tracing, instead
+	an index can be written into this file. A number (starting with "1")
+	written will instead select the same corresponding at the line position
+	of the "available_filter_functions" file.
+
   set_ftrace_notrace:
 
 	This has an effect opposite to that of
@@ -759,6 +765,37 @@ Here is the list of current tracers that may be configured.
 	tracers from tracing simply echo "nop" into
 	current_tracer.
 
+Error conditions
+----------------
+
+  For most ftrace commands, failure modes are obvious and communicated
+  using standard return codes.
+
+  For other more involved commands, extended error information may be
+  available via the tracing/error_log file.  For the commands that
+  support it, reading the tracing/error_log file after an error will
+  display more detailed information about what went wrong, if
+  information is available.  The tracing/error_log file is a circular
+  error log displaying a small number (currently, 8) of ftrace errors
+  for the last (8) failed commands.
+
+  The extended error information and usage takes the form shown in
+  this example::
+
+    # echo xxx > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_wakeup/trigger
+    echo: write error: Invalid argument
+
+    # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/error_log
+    [ 5348.887237] location: error: Couldn't yyy: zzz
+      Command: xxx
+               ^
+    [ 7517.023364] location: error: Bad rrr: sss
+      Command: ppp qqq
+                   ^
+
+  To clear the error log, echo the empty string into it::
+
+    # echo > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/error_log
 
 Examples of using the tracer
 ----------------------------
@@ -1396,6 +1433,58 @@ enabling function tracing, we incur an added overhead. This
 overhead may extend the latency times. But nevertheless, this
 trace has provided some very helpful debugging information.
 
+If we prefer function graph output instead of function, we can set
+display-graph option::
+
+ with echo 1 > options/display-graph
+
+  # tracer: irqsoff
+  #
+  # irqsoff latency trace v1.1.5 on 4.20.0-rc6+
+  # --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  # latency: 3751 us, #274/274, CPU#0 | (M:desktop VP:0, KP:0, SP:0 HP:0 #P:4)
+  #    -----------------
+  #    | task: bash-1507 (uid:0 nice:0 policy:0 rt_prio:0)
+  #    -----------------
+  #  => started at: free_debug_processing
+  #  => ended at:   return_to_handler
+  #
+  #
+  #                                       _-----=> irqs-off
+  #                                      / _----=> need-resched
+  #                                     | / _---=> hardirq/softirq
+  #                                     || / _--=> preempt-depth
+  #                                     ||| /
+  #   REL TIME      CPU  TASK/PID       ||||     DURATION                  FUNCTION CALLS
+  #      |          |     |    |        ||||      |   |                     |   |   |   |
+          0 us |   0)   bash-1507    |  d... |   0.000 us    |  _raw_spin_lock_irqsave();
+          0 us |   0)   bash-1507    |  d..1 |   0.378 us    |    do_raw_spin_trylock();
+          1 us |   0)   bash-1507    |  d..2 |               |    set_track() {
+          2 us |   0)   bash-1507    |  d..2 |               |      save_stack_trace() {
+          2 us |   0)   bash-1507    |  d..2 |               |        __save_stack_trace() {
+          3 us |   0)   bash-1507    |  d..2 |               |          __unwind_start() {
+          3 us |   0)   bash-1507    |  d..2 |               |            get_stack_info() {
+          3 us |   0)   bash-1507    |  d..2 |   0.351 us    |              in_task_stack();
+          4 us |   0)   bash-1507    |  d..2 |   1.107 us    |            }
+  [...]
+       3750 us |   0)   bash-1507    |  d..1 |   0.516 us    |      do_raw_spin_unlock();
+       3750 us |   0)   bash-1507    |  d..1 |   0.000 us    |  _raw_spin_unlock_irqrestore();
+       3764 us |   0)   bash-1507    |  d..1 |   0.000 us    |  tracer_hardirqs_on();
+      bash-1507    0d..1 3792us : <stack trace>
+   => free_debug_processing
+   => __slab_free
+   => kmem_cache_free
+   => vm_area_free
+   => remove_vma
+   => exit_mmap
+   => mmput
+   => flush_old_exec
+   => load_elf_binary
+   => search_binary_handler
+   => __do_execve_file.isra.32
+   => __x64_sys_execve
+   => do_syscall_64
+   => entry_SYSCALL_64_after_hwframe
 
 preemptoff
 ----------
@@ -2784,6 +2873,38 @@ Produces::
 
 We can see that there's no more lock or preempt tracing.
 
+Selecting function filters via index
+------------------------------------
+
+Because processing of strings is expensive (the address of the function
+needs to be looked up before comparing to the string being passed in),
+an index can be used as well to enable functions. This is useful in the
+case of setting thousands of specific functions at a time. By passing
+in a list of numbers, no string processing will occur. Instead, the function
+at the specific location in the internal array (which corresponds to the
+functions in the "available_filter_functions" file), is selected.
+
+::
+
+  # echo 1 > set_ftrace_filter
+
+Will select the first function listed in "available_filter_functions"
+
+::
+
+  # head -1 available_filter_functions
+  trace_initcall_finish_cb
+
+  # cat set_ftrace_filter
+  trace_initcall_finish_cb
+
+  # head -50 available_filter_functions | tail -1
+  x86_pmu_commit_txn
+
+  # echo 1 50 > set_ftrace_filter
+  # cat set_ftrace_filter
+  trace_initcall_finish_cb
+  x86_pmu_commit_txn
 
 Dynamic ftrace with the function graph tracer
 ---------------------------------------------
diff --git a/Documentation/trace/histogram.rst b/Documentation/trace/histogram.rst
index 7dda76503127..fb621a1c2638 100644
--- a/Documentation/trace/histogram.rst
+++ b/Documentation/trace/histogram.rst
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ Documentation written by Tom Zanussi
 
         hist:keys=<field1[,field2,...]>[:values=<field1[,field2,...]>]
           [:sort=<field1[,field2,...]>][:size=#entries][:pause][:continue]
-          [:clear][:name=histname1] [if <filter>]
+          [:clear][:name=histname1][:<handler>.<action>] [if <filter>]
 
   When a matching event is hit, an entry is added to a hash table
   using the key(s) and value(s) named.  Keys and values correspond to
@@ -199,20 +199,8 @@ Extended error information
 
   For some error conditions encountered when invoking a hist trigger
   command, extended error information is available via the
-  corresponding event's 'hist' file.  Reading the hist file after an
-  error will display more detailed information about what went wrong,
-  if information is available.  This extended error information will
-  be available until the next hist trigger command for that event.
-
-  If available for a given error condition, the extended error
-  information and usage takes the following form::
-
-    # echo xxx > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_wakeup/trigger
-    echo: write error: Invalid argument
-
-    # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_wakeup/hist
-    ERROR: Couldn't yyy: zzz
-      Last command: xxx
+  tracing/error_log file.  See Error Conditions in
+  :file:`Documentation/trace/ftrace.rst` for details.
 
 6.2 'hist' trigger examples
 ---------------------------
@@ -1831,45 +1819,94 @@ and looks and behaves just like any other event::
 Like any other event, once a histogram is enabled for the event, the
 output can be displayed by reading the event's 'hist' file.
 
-2.2.3 Hist trigger 'actions'
-----------------------------
+2.2.3 Hist trigger 'handlers' and 'actions'
+-------------------------------------------
+
+A hist trigger 'action' is a function that's executed (in most cases
+conditionally) whenever a histogram entry is added or updated.
+
+When a histogram entry is added or updated, a hist trigger 'handler'
+is what decides whether the corresponding action is actually invoked
+or not.
+
+Hist trigger handlers and actions are paired together in the general
+form:
+
+  <handler>.<action>
+
+To specify a handler.action pair for a given event, simply specify
+that handler.action pair between colons in the hist trigger
+specification.
+
+In theory, any handler can be combined with any action, but in
+practice, not every handler.action combination is currently supported;
+if a given handler.action combination isn't supported, the hist
+trigger will fail with -EINVAL;
+
+The default 'handler.action' if none is explicity specified is as it
+always has been, to simply update the set of values associated with an
+entry.  Some applications, however, may want to perform additional
+actions at that point, such as generate another event, or compare and
+save a maximum.
+
+The supported handlers and actions are listed below, and each is
+described in more detail in the following paragraphs, in the context
+of descriptions of some common and useful handler.action combinations.
+
+The available handlers are:
 
-A hist trigger 'action' is a function that's executed whenever a
-histogram entry is added or updated.
+  - onmatch(matching.event)    - invoke action on any addition or update
+  - onmax(var)                 - invoke action if var exceeds current max
+  - onchange(var)              - invoke action if var changes
 
-The default 'action' if no special function is explicitly specified is
-as it always has been, to simply update the set of values associated
-with an entry.  Some applications, however, may want to perform
-additional actions at that point, such as generate another event, or
-compare and save a maximum.
+The available actions are:
 
-The following additional actions are available.  To specify an action
-for a given event, simply specify the action between colons in the
-hist trigger specification.
+  - trace(<synthetic_event_name>,param list)   - generate synthetic event
+  - save(field,...)                            - save current event fields
+  - snapshot()                                 - snapshot the trace buffer
 
-  - onmatch(matching.event).<synthetic_event_name>(param list)
+The following commonly-used handler.action pairs are available:
 
-    The 'onmatch(matching.event).<synthetic_event_name>(params)' hist
-    trigger action is invoked whenever an event matches and the
-    histogram entry would be added or updated.  It causes the named
-    synthetic event to be generated with the values given in the
+  - onmatch(matching.event).trace(<synthetic_event_name>,param list)
+
+    The 'onmatch(matching.event).trace(<synthetic_event_name>,param
+    list)' hist trigger action is invoked whenever an event matches
+    and the histogram entry would be added or updated.  It causes the
+    named synthetic event to be generated with the values given in the
     'param list'.  The result is the generation of a synthetic event
     that consists of the values contained in those variables at the
-    time the invoking event was hit.
-
-    The 'param list' consists of one or more parameters which may be
-    either variables or fields defined on either the 'matching.event'
-    or the target event.  The variables or fields specified in the
-    param list may be either fully-qualified or unqualified.  If a
-    variable is specified as unqualified, it must be unique between
-    the two events.  A field name used as a param can be unqualified
-    if it refers to the target event, but must be fully qualified if
-    it refers to the matching event.  A fully-qualified name is of the
-    form 'system.event_name.$var_name' or 'system.event_name.field'.
+    time the invoking event was hit.  For example, if the synthetic
+    event name is 'wakeup_latency', a wakeup_latency event is
+    generated using onmatch(event).trace(wakeup_latency,arg1,arg2).
+
+    There is also an equivalent alternative form available for
+    generating synthetic events.  In this form, the synthetic event
+    name is used as if it were a function name.  For example, using
+    the 'wakeup_latency' synthetic event name again, the
+    wakeup_latency event would be generated by invoking it as if it
+    were a function call, with the event field values passed in as
+    arguments: onmatch(event).wakeup_latency(arg1,arg2).  The syntax
+    for this form is:
+
+      onmatch(matching.event).<synthetic_event_name>(param list)
+
+    In either case, the 'param list' consists of one or more
+    parameters which may be either variables or fields defined on
+    either the 'matching.event' or the target event.  The variables or
+    fields specified in the param list may be either fully-qualified
+    or unqualified.  If a variable is specified as unqualified, it
+    must be unique between the two events.  A field name used as a
+    param can be unqualified if it refers to the target event, but
+    must be fully qualified if it refers to the matching event.  A
+    fully-qualified name is of the form 'system.event_name.$var_name'
+    or 'system.event_name.field'.
 
     The 'matching.event' specification is simply the fully qualified
     event name of the event that matches the target event for the
-    onmatch() functionality, in the form 'system.event_name'.
+    onmatch() functionality, in the form 'system.event_name'. Histogram
+    keys of both events are compared to find if events match. In case
+    multiple histogram keys are used, they all must match in the specified
+    order.
 
     Finally, the number and type of variables/fields in the 'param
     list' must match the number and types of the fields in the
@@ -1896,6 +1933,12 @@ hist trigger specification.
               wakeup_new_test($testpid) if comm=="cyclictest"' >> \
               /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_wakeup_new/trigger
 
+    Or, equivalently, using the 'trace' keyword syntax:
+
+    # echo 'hist:keys=$testpid:testpid=pid:onmatch(sched.sched_wakeup_new).\
+            trace(wakeup_new_test,$testpid) if comm=="cyclictest"' >> \
+            /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_wakeup_new/trigger
+
     Creating and displaying a histogram based on those events is now
     just a matter of using the fields and new synthetic event in the
     tracing/events/synthetic directory, as usual::
@@ -1926,9 +1969,9 @@ hist trigger specification.
 	      /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_waking/trigger
 
     Then, when the corresponding thread is actually scheduled onto the
-    CPU by a sched_switch event, calculate the latency and use that
-    along with another variable and an event field to generate a
-    wakeup_latency synthetic event::
+    CPU by a sched_switch event (saved_pid matches next_pid), calculate
+    the latency and use that along with another variable and an event field
+    to generate a wakeup_latency synthetic event::
 
       # echo 'hist:keys=next_pid:wakeup_lat=common_timestamp.usecs-$ts0:\
               onmatch(sched.sched_waking).wakeup_latency($wakeup_lat,\
@@ -2000,6 +2043,214 @@ hist trigger specification.
             Entries: 2
             Dropped: 0
 
+  - onmax(var).snapshot()
+
+    The 'onmax(var).snapshot()' hist trigger action is invoked
+    whenever the value of 'var' associated with a histogram entry
+    exceeds the current maximum contained in that variable.
+
+    The end result is that a global snapshot of the trace buffer will
+    be saved in the tracing/snapshot file if 'var' exceeds the current
+    maximum for any hist trigger entry.
+
+    Note that in this case the maximum is a global maximum for the
+    current trace instance, which is the maximum across all buckets of
+    the histogram.  The key of the specific trace event that caused
+    the global maximum and the global maximum itself are displayed,
+    along with a message stating that a snapshot has been taken and
+    where to find it.  The user can use the key information displayed
+    to locate the corresponding bucket in the histogram for even more
+    detail.
+
+    As an example the below defines a couple of hist triggers, one for
+    sched_waking and another for sched_switch, keyed on pid.  Whenever
+    a sched_waking event occurs, the timestamp is saved in the entry
+    corresponding to the current pid, and when the scheduler switches
+    back to that pid, the timestamp difference is calculated.  If the
+    resulting latency, stored in wakeup_lat, exceeds the current
+    maximum latency, a snapshot is taken.  As part of the setup, all
+    the scheduler events are also enabled, which are the events that
+    will show up in the snapshot when it is taken at some point:
+
+    # echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/enable
+
+    # echo 'hist:keys=pid:ts0=common_timestamp.usecs \
+            if comm=="cyclictest"' >> \
+            /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_waking/trigger
+
+    # echo 'hist:keys=next_pid:wakeup_lat=common_timestamp.usecs-$ts0: \
+            onmax($wakeup_lat).save(next_prio,next_comm,prev_pid,prev_prio, \
+	    prev_comm):onmax($wakeup_lat).snapshot() \
+	    if next_comm=="cyclictest"' >> \
+	    /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_switch/trigger
+
+    When the histogram is displayed, for each bucket the max value
+    and the saved values corresponding to the max are displayed
+    following the rest of the fields.
+
+    If a snaphot was taken, there is also a message indicating that,
+    along with the value and event that triggered the global maximum:
+
+    # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_switch/hist
+      { next_pid:       2101 } hitcount:        200
+	max:         52  next_prio:        120  next_comm: cyclictest \
+        prev_pid:          0  prev_prio:        120  prev_comm: swapper/6
+
+      { next_pid:       2103 } hitcount:       1326
+	max:        572  next_prio:         19  next_comm: cyclictest \
+        prev_pid:          0  prev_prio:        120  prev_comm: swapper/1
+
+      { next_pid:       2102 } hitcount:       1982 \
+	max:         74  next_prio:         19  next_comm: cyclictest \
+        prev_pid:          0  prev_prio:        120  prev_comm: swapper/5
+
+    Snapshot taken (see tracing/snapshot).  Details:
+	triggering value { onmax($wakeup_lat) }:        572	\
+	triggered by event with key: { next_pid:       2103 }
+
+    Totals:
+        Hits: 3508
+        Entries: 3
+        Dropped: 0
+
+    In the above case, the event that triggered the global maximum has
+    the key with next_pid == 2103.  If you look at the bucket that has
+    2103 as the key, you'll find the additional values save()'d along
+    with the local maximum for that bucket, which should be the same
+    as the global maximum (since that was the same value that
+    triggered the global snapshot).
+
+    And finally, looking at the snapshot data should show at or near
+    the end the event that triggered the snapshot (in this case you
+    can verify the timestamps between the sched_waking and
+    sched_switch events, which should match the time displayed in the
+    global maximum)::
+
+     # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/snapshot
+
+         <...>-2103  [005] d..3   309.873125: sched_switch: prev_comm=cyclictest prev_pid=2103 prev_prio=19 prev_state=D ==> next_comm=swapper/5 next_pid=0 next_prio=120
+         <idle>-0     [005] d.h3   309.873611: sched_waking: comm=cyclictest pid=2102 prio=19 target_cpu=005
+         <idle>-0     [005] dNh4   309.873613: sched_wakeup: comm=cyclictest pid=2102 prio=19 target_cpu=005
+         <idle>-0     [005] d..3   309.873616: sched_switch: prev_comm=swapper/5 prev_pid=0 prev_prio=120 prev_state=S ==> next_comm=cyclictest next_pid=2102 next_prio=19
+         <...>-2102  [005] d..3   309.873625: sched_switch: prev_comm=cyclictest prev_pid=2102 prev_prio=19 prev_state=D ==> next_comm=swapper/5 next_pid=0 next_prio=120
+         <idle>-0     [005] d.h3   309.874624: sched_waking: comm=cyclictest pid=2102 prio=19 target_cpu=005
+         <idle>-0     [005] dNh4   309.874626: sched_wakeup: comm=cyclictest pid=2102 prio=19 target_cpu=005
+         <idle>-0     [005] dNh3   309.874628: sched_waking: comm=cyclictest pid=2103 prio=19 target_cpu=005
+         <idle>-0     [005] dNh4   309.874630: sched_wakeup: comm=cyclictest pid=2103 prio=19 target_cpu=005
+         <idle>-0     [005] d..3   309.874633: sched_switch: prev_comm=swapper/5 prev_pid=0 prev_prio=120 prev_state=S ==> next_comm=cyclictest next_pid=2102 next_prio=19
+         <idle>-0     [004] d.h3   309.874757: sched_waking: comm=gnome-terminal- pid=1699 prio=120 target_cpu=004
+         <idle>-0     [004] dNh4   309.874762: sched_wakeup: comm=gnome-terminal- pid=1699 prio=120 target_cpu=004
+         <idle>-0     [004] d..3   309.874766: sched_switch: prev_comm=swapper/4 prev_pid=0 prev_prio=120 prev_state=S ==> next_comm=gnome-terminal- next_pid=1699 next_prio=120
+     gnome-terminal--1699  [004] d.h2   309.874941: sched_stat_runtime: comm=gnome-terminal- pid=1699 runtime=180706 [ns] vruntime=1126870572 [ns]
+         <idle>-0     [003] d.s4   309.874956: sched_waking: comm=rcu_sched pid=9 prio=120 target_cpu=007
+         <idle>-0     [003] d.s5   309.874960: sched_wake_idle_without_ipi: cpu=7
+         <idle>-0     [003] d.s5   309.874961: sched_wakeup: comm=rcu_sched pid=9 prio=120 target_cpu=007
+         <idle>-0     [007] d..3   309.874963: sched_switch: prev_comm=swapper/7 prev_pid=0 prev_prio=120 prev_state=S ==> next_comm=rcu_sched next_pid=9 next_prio=120
+      rcu_sched-9     [007] d..3   309.874973: sched_stat_runtime: comm=rcu_sched pid=9 runtime=13646 [ns] vruntime=22531430286 [ns]
+      rcu_sched-9     [007] d..3   309.874978: sched_switch: prev_comm=rcu_sched prev_pid=9 prev_prio=120 prev_state=R+ ==> next_comm=swapper/7 next_pid=0 next_prio=120
+          <...>-2102  [005] d..4   309.874994: sched_migrate_task: comm=cyclictest pid=2103 prio=19 orig_cpu=5 dest_cpu=1
+          <...>-2102  [005] d..4   309.875185: sched_wake_idle_without_ipi: cpu=1
+         <idle>-0     [001] d..3   309.875200: sched_switch: prev_comm=swapper/1 prev_pid=0 prev_prio=120 prev_state=S ==> next_comm=cyclictest next_pid=2103 next_prio=19
+
+  - onchange(var).save(field,..	.)
+
+    The 'onchange(var).save(field,...)' hist trigger action is invoked
+    whenever the value of 'var' associated with a histogram entry
+    changes.
+
+    The end result is that the trace event fields specified as the
+    onchange.save() params will be saved if 'var' changes for that
+    hist trigger entry.  This allows context from the event that
+    changed the value to be saved for later reference.  When the
+    histogram is displayed, additional fields displaying the saved
+    values will be printed.
+
+  - onchange(var).snapshot()
+
+    The 'onchange(var).snapshot()' hist trigger action is invoked
+    whenever the value of 'var' associated with a histogram entry
+    changes.
+
+    The end result is that a global snapshot of the trace buffer will
+    be saved in the tracing/snapshot file if 'var' changes for any
+    hist trigger entry.
+
+    Note that in this case the changed value is a global variable
+    associated withe current trace instance.  The key of the specific
+    trace event that caused the value to change and the global value
+    itself are displayed, along with a message stating that a snapshot
+    has been taken and where to find it.  The user can use the key
+    information displayed to locate the corresponding bucket in the
+    histogram for even more detail.
+
+    As an example the below defines a hist trigger on the tcp_probe
+    event, keyed on dport.  Whenever a tcp_probe event occurs, the
+    cwnd field is checked against the current value stored in the
+    $cwnd variable.  If the value has changed, a snapshot is taken.
+    As part of the setup, all the scheduler and tcp events are also
+    enabled, which are the events that will show up in the snapshot
+    when it is taken at some point:
+
+    # echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/enable
+    # echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/tcp/enable
+
+    # echo 'hist:keys=dport:cwnd=snd_cwnd: \
+            onchange($cwnd).save(snd_wnd,srtt,rcv_wnd): \
+	    onchange($cwnd).snapshot()' >> \
+	    /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/tcp/tcp_probe/trigger
+
+    When the histogram is displayed, for each bucket the tracked value
+    and the saved values corresponding to that value are displayed
+    following the rest of the fields.
+
+    If a snaphot was taken, there is also a message indicating that,
+    along with the value and event that triggered the snapshot::
+
+      # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/tcp/tcp_probe/hist
+
+      { dport:       1521 } hitcount:          8
+	changed:         10  snd_wnd:      35456  srtt:     154262  rcv_wnd:      42112
+
+      { dport:         80 } hitcount:         23
+	changed:         10  snd_wnd:      28960  srtt:      19604  rcv_wnd:      29312
+
+      { dport:       9001 } hitcount:        172
+	changed:         10  snd_wnd:      48384  srtt:     260444  rcv_wnd:      55168
+
+      { dport:        443 } hitcount:        211
+	changed:         10  snd_wnd:      26960  srtt:      17379  rcv_wnd:      28800
+
+    Snapshot taken (see tracing/snapshot).  Details::
+
+        triggering value { onchange($cwnd) }:         10
+        triggered by event with key: { dport:         80 }
+
+      Totals:
+          Hits: 414
+          Entries: 4
+          Dropped: 0
+
+    In the above case, the event that triggered the snapshot has the
+    key with dport == 80.  If you look at the bucket that has 80 as
+    the key, you'll find the additional values save()'d along with the
+    changed value for that bucket, which should be the same as the
+    global changed value (since that was the same value that triggered
+    the global snapshot).
+
+    And finally, looking at the snapshot data should show at or near
+    the end the event that triggered the snapshot::
+
+      # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/snapshot
+
+         gnome-shell-1261  [006] dN.3    49.823113: sched_stat_runtime: comm=gnome-shell pid=1261 runtime=49347 [ns] vruntime=1835730389 [ns]
+       kworker/u16:4-773   [003] d..3    49.823114: sched_switch: prev_comm=kworker/u16:4 prev_pid=773 prev_prio=120 prev_state=R+ ==> next_comm=kworker/3:2 next_pid=135 next_prio=120
+         gnome-shell-1261  [006] d..3    49.823114: sched_switch: prev_comm=gnome-shell prev_pid=1261 prev_prio=120 prev_state=R+ ==> next_comm=kworker/6:2 next_pid=387 next_prio=120
+         kworker/3:2-135   [003] d..3    49.823118: sched_stat_runtime: comm=kworker/3:2 pid=135 runtime=5339 [ns] vruntime=17815800388 [ns]
+         kworker/6:2-387   [006] d..3    49.823120: sched_stat_runtime: comm=kworker/6:2 pid=387 runtime=9594 [ns] vruntime=14589605367 [ns]
+         kworker/6:2-387   [006] d..3    49.823122: sched_switch: prev_comm=kworker/6:2 prev_pid=387 prev_prio=120 prev_state=R+ ==> next_comm=gnome-shell next_pid=1261 next_prio=120
+         kworker/3:2-135   [003] d..3    49.823123: sched_switch: prev_comm=kworker/3:2 prev_pid=135 prev_prio=120 prev_state=T ==> next_comm=swapper/3 next_pid=0 next_prio=120
+              <idle>-0     [004] ..s7    49.823798: tcp_probe: src=10.0.0.10:54326 dest=23.215.104.193:80 mark=0x0 length=32 snd_nxt=0xe3ae2ff5 snd_una=0xe3ae2ecd snd_cwnd=10 ssthresh=2147483647 snd_wnd=28960 srtt=19604 rcv_wnd=29312
+
 3. User space creating a trigger
 --------------------------------
 
diff --git a/Documentation/trace/intel_th.rst b/Documentation/trace/intel_th.rst
index 19e2d633f3c7..baa12eb09ef4 100644
--- a/Documentation/trace/intel_th.rst
+++ b/Documentation/trace/intel_th.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,5 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
 =======================
 Intel(R) Trace Hub (TH)
 =======================
diff --git a/Documentation/trace/postprocess/trace-vmscan-postprocess.pl b/Documentation/trace/postprocess/trace-vmscan-postprocess.pl
index 66bfd8396877..995da15b16ca 100644
--- a/Documentation/trace/postprocess/trace-vmscan-postprocess.pl
+++ b/Documentation/trace/postprocess/trace-vmscan-postprocess.pl
@@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ my $regex_kswapd_wake_default = 'nid=([0-9]*) order=([0-9]*)';
 my $regex_kswapd_sleep_default = 'nid=([0-9]*)';
 my $regex_wakeup_kswapd_default = 'nid=([0-9]*) zid=([0-9]*) order=([0-9]*) gfp_flags=([A-Z_|]*)';
 my $regex_lru_isolate_default = 'isolate_mode=([0-9]*) classzone_idx=([0-9]*) order=([0-9]*) nr_requested=([0-9]*) nr_scanned=([0-9]*) nr_skipped=([0-9]*) nr_taken=([0-9]*) lru=([a-z_]*)';
-my $regex_lru_shrink_inactive_default = 'nid=([0-9]*) nr_scanned=([0-9]*) nr_reclaimed=([0-9]*) nr_dirty=([0-9]*) nr_writeback=([0-9]*) nr_congested=([0-9]*) nr_immediate=([0-9]*) nr_activate=([0-9]*) nr_ref_keep=([0-9]*) nr_unmap_fail=([0-9]*) priority=([0-9]*) flags=([A-Z_|]*)';
+my $regex_lru_shrink_inactive_default = 'nid=([0-9]*) nr_scanned=([0-9]*) nr_reclaimed=([0-9]*) nr_dirty=([0-9]*) nr_writeback=([0-9]*) nr_congested=([0-9]*) nr_immediate=([0-9]*) nr_activate_anon=([0-9]*) nr_activate_file=([0-9]*) nr_ref_keep=([0-9]*) nr_unmap_fail=([0-9]*) priority=([0-9]*) flags=([A-Z_|]*)';
 my $regex_lru_shrink_active_default = 'lru=([A-Z_]*) nr_scanned=([0-9]*) nr_rotated=([0-9]*) priority=([0-9]*)';
 my $regex_writepage_default = 'page=([0-9a-f]*) pfn=([0-9]*) flags=([A-Z_|]*)';
 
@@ -212,7 +212,8 @@ $regex_lru_shrink_inactive = generate_traceevent_regex(
 			"vmscan/mm_vmscan_lru_shrink_inactive",
 			$regex_lru_shrink_inactive_default,
 			"nid", "nr_scanned", "nr_reclaimed", "nr_dirty", "nr_writeback",
-			"nr_congested", "nr_immediate", "nr_activate", "nr_ref_keep",
+			"nr_congested", "nr_immediate", "nr_activate_anon",
+			"nr_activate_file", "nr_ref_keep",
 			"nr_unmap_fail", "priority", "flags");
 $regex_lru_shrink_active = generate_traceevent_regex(
 			"vmscan/mm_vmscan_lru_shrink_active",
@@ -407,7 +408,7 @@ EVENT_PROCESS:
 			}
 
 			my $nr_reclaimed = $3;
-			my $flags = $12;
+			my $flags = $13;
 			my $file = 0;
 			if ($flags =~ /RECLAIM_WB_FILE/) {
 				$file = 1;
diff --git a/Documentation/trace/uprobetracer.rst b/Documentation/trace/uprobetracer.rst
index 4c3bfde2ba47..4346e23e3ae7 100644
--- a/Documentation/trace/uprobetracer.rst
+++ b/Documentation/trace/uprobetracer.rst
@@ -73,10 +73,9 @@ For $comm, the default type is "string"; any other type is invalid.
 
 Event Profiling
 ---------------
-You can check the total number of probe hits and probe miss-hits via
-/sys/kernel/debug/tracing/uprobe_profile.
-The first column is event name, the second is the number of probe hits,
-the third is the number of probe miss-hits.
+You can check the total number of probe hits per event via
+/sys/kernel/debug/tracing/uprobe_profile. The first column is the filename,
+the second is the event name, the third is the number of probe hits.
 
 Usage examples
 --------------
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/index.rst b/Documentation/translations/index.rst
index 7f77c52d33aa..e446e5ed00a6 100644
--- a/Documentation/translations/index.rst
+++ b/Documentation/translations/index.rst
@@ -11,3 +11,43 @@ Translations
    it_IT/index
    ko_KR/index
    ja_JP/index
+
+
+.. _translations_disclaimer:
+
+Disclaimer
+----------
+
+Translation's purpose is to ease reading and understanding in languages other
+than English. Its aim is to help people who do not understand English or have
+doubts about its interpretation. Additionally, some people prefer to read
+documentation in their native language, but please bear in mind that the
+*only* official documentation is the English one: :ref:`linux_doc`.
+
+It is very unlikely that an update to :ref:`linux_doc` will be propagated
+immediately to all translations.  Translations' maintainers - and
+contributors - follow the evolution of the official documentation and they
+maintain translations aligned as much as they can.  For this reason there is
+no guarantee that a translation is up to date.  If what you read in a
+translation does not sound right compared to what you read in the code, please
+inform the translation maintainer and - if you can - check also the English
+documentation.
+
+A translation is not a fork of the official documentation, therefore
+translations' users should not find information that differs from the official
+English documentation.  Any content addition, removal or update, must be
+applied to the English documents first.  Afterwards and when possible, the
+same change should be applied to translations.  Translations' maintainers
+accept only contributions that are merely translation related (e.g. new
+translations, updates, fixes).
+
+Translations try to be as accurate as possible but it is not possible to map
+one language directly to all other languages. Each language has its own
+grammar and culture, so the translation of an English statement may need to be
+adapted to fit a different language.  For this reason, when viewing
+translations, you may find slight differences that carry the same message but
+in a different form.
+
+If you need to communicate with the Linux community but you do not feel
+comfortable writing in English, you can ask the translation's maintainers
+for help.
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/core-api/memory-allocation.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/core-api/memory-allocation.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..11d5148f8d6b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/core-api/memory-allocation.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+.. include:: ../disclaimer-ita.rst
+
+:Original: :ref:`Documentation/core-api/memory-allocation.rst <memory_allocation>`
+
+.. _it_memory_allocation:
+
+================================
+Guida all'allocazione di memoria
+================================
+
+.. warning::
+
+    TODO ancora da tradurre
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/disclaimer-ita.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/disclaimer-ita.rst
index d68e52de6a5d..bfe8a384baed 100644
--- a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/disclaimer-ita.rst
+++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/disclaimer-ita.rst
@@ -1,13 +1,6 @@
 :orphan:
 
-.. note::
-   This document is maintained by Federico Vaga <federico.vaga@vaga.pv.it>.
-   If you find any difference between this document and the original file or a
-   problem with the translation, please contact the maintainer of this file.
-   Following people helped to translate or review:
-   Alessia Mantegazza <amantegazza@vaga.pv.it>
-
 .. warning::
-   The purpose of this file is to be easier to read and understand for Italian
-   speakers and is not intended as a fork. So, if you have any comments or
-   updates for this file please try to update the original English file first.
+   In caso di dubbi sulla correttezza del contenuto di questa traduzione,
+   l'unico riferimento valido è la documentazione ufficiale in inglese.
+   Per maggiori informazioni consultate le :ref:`avvertenze <it_disclaimer>`.
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/doc-guide/index.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/doc-guide/index.rst
index 7a6562b547ee..9fffff626711 100644
--- a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/doc-guide/index.rst
+++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/doc-guide/index.rst
@@ -12,9 +12,9 @@ Come scrivere la documentazione del kernel
 .. toctree::
    :maxdepth: 1
 
-   sphinx.rst
-   kernel-doc.rst
-   parse-headers.rst
+   sphinx
+   kernel-doc
+   parse-headers
 
 .. only::  subproject and html
 
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/doc-guide/sphinx.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/doc-guide/sphinx.rst
index 474b7e127893..793b5cc33403 100644
--- a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/doc-guide/sphinx.rst
+++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/doc-guide/sphinx.rst
@@ -3,6 +3,8 @@
 .. note:: Per leggere la documentazione originale in inglese:
 	  :ref:`Documentation/doc-guide/index.rst <doc_guide>`
 
+.. _it_sphinxdoc:
+
 Introduzione
 ============
 
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/index.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/index.rst
index ea9b2916b3e4..409eaac03e9f 100644
--- a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/index.rst
+++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/index.rst
@@ -4,26 +4,49 @@
 Traduzione italiana
 ===================
 
-L'obiettivo di questa traduzione è di rendere più facile la lettura e
-la comprensione per chi preferisce leggere in lingua italiana.
-Tenete presente che la documentazione di riferimento rimane comunque
-quella in lingua inglese: :ref:`linux_doc`
-
-Questa traduzione cerca di essere il più fedele possibile all'originale ma
-è ovvio che alcune frasi vadano trasformate: non aspettatevi una traduzione
-letterale. Quando possibile, si eviteranno gli inglesismi ed al loro posto
-verranno utilizzate le corrispettive parole italiane.
+:manutentore: Federico Vaga <federico.vaga@vaga.pv.it>
 
-Se notate che la traduzione non è più aggiornata potete contattare
-direttamente il manutentore della traduzione italiana.
+.. _it_disclaimer:
 
-Se notate che la documentazione contiene errori o dimenticanze, allora
-verificate la documentazione di riferimento in lingua inglese. Se il problema
-è presente anche nella documentazione di riferimento, contattate il suo
-manutentore. Se avete problemi a scrivere in inglese, potete comunque
-riportare il problema al manutentore della traduzione italiana.
+Avvertenze
+==========
 
-Manutentore della traduzione italiana: Federico Vaga <federico.vaga@vaga.pv.it>
+L'obiettivo di questa traduzione è di rendere più facile la lettura e
+la comprensione per chi non capisce l'inglese o ha dubbi sulla sua
+interpretazione, oppure semplicemente per chi preferisce leggere in lingua
+italiana. Tuttavia, tenete ben presente che l'*unica* documentazione
+ufficiale è quella in lingua inglese: :ref:`linux_doc`
+
+La propagazione simultanea a tutte le traduzioni di una modifica in
+:ref:`linux_doc` è altamente improbabile. I manutentori delle traduzioni -
+e i contributori - seguono l'evolversi della documentazione ufficiale e
+cercano di mantenere le rispettive traduzioni allineate nel limite del
+possibile.  Per questo motivo non c'è garanzia che una traduzione sia
+aggiornata all'ultima modifica.  Se quello che leggete in una traduzione
+non corrisponde a quello che leggete nel codice, informate il manutentore
+della traduzione e - se potete - verificate anche la documentazione in
+inglese.
+
+Una traduzione non è un *fork* della documentazione ufficiale, perciò gli
+utenti non vi troveranno alcuna informazione diversa rispetto alla versione
+ufficiale.  Ogni aggiunta, rimozione o modifica dei contenuti deve essere
+fatta prima nei documenti in inglese. In seguito, e quando è possibile, la
+stessa modifica dovrebbe essere applicata anche alle traduzioni.  I manutentori
+delle traduzioni accettano contributi che interessano prettamente l'attività
+di traduzione (per esempio, nuove traduzioni, aggiornamenti, correzioni).
+
+Le traduzioni cercano di essere il più possibile accurate ma non è possibile
+mappare direttamente una lingua in un'altra. Ogni lingua ha la sua grammatica
+e una sua cultura alle spalle, quindi la traduzione di una frase in inglese
+potrebbe essere modificata per adattarla all'italiano. Per questo motivo,
+quando leggete questa traduzione, potreste trovare alcune differenze di forma
+ma che trasmettono comunque il messaggio originale.  Nonostante la grande
+diffusione di inglesismi nella lingua parlata, quando possibile, questi
+verranno sostituiti dalle corrispettive parole italiane
+
+Se avete bisogno d'aiuto per comunicare con la comunità Linux ma non vi sentite
+a vostro agio nello scrivere in inglese, potete chiedere aiuto al manutentore
+della traduzione.
 
 La documentazione del kernel Linux
 ==================================
@@ -47,9 +70,7 @@ I seguenti documenti descrivono la licenza usata nei sorgenti del kernel Linux
 (GPLv2), come licenziare i singoli file; inoltre troverete i riferimenti al
 testo integrale della licenza.
 
-.. warning::
-
-    TODO ancora da tradurre
+* :ref:`it_kernel_licensing`
 
 Documentazione per gli utenti
 -----------------------------
@@ -90,10 +111,6 @@ vostre modifiche molto più semplice
    doc-guide/index
    kernel-hacking/index
 
-.. warning::
-
-    TODO ancora da tradurre
-
 Documentazione della API del kernel
 -----------------------------------
 
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/networking/netdev-FAQ.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/networking/netdev-FAQ.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8489ead7cff1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/networking/netdev-FAQ.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+.. include:: ../disclaimer-ita.rst
+
+:Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst <stable_kernel_rules>`
+
+.. _it_netdev-FAQ:
+
+==========
+netdev FAQ
+==========
+
+.. warning::
+
+    TODO ancora da tradurre
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/4.Coding.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/4.Coding.rst
index c61059015e52..c05b89e616dd 100644
--- a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/4.Coding.rst
+++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/4.Coding.rst
@@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ La maggior parte di queste opzioni possono essere attivate per qualsiasi
 kernel utilizzato per lo sviluppo o a scopo di test.  In particolare dovreste
 attivare:
 
- - ENABLE_WARN_DEPRECATED, ENABLE_MUST_CHECK, e FRAME_WARN per ottenere degli
+ - ENABLE_MUST_CHECK e FRAME_WARN per ottenere degli
    avvertimenti dedicati a problemi come l'uso di interfacce deprecate o
    l'ignorare un importante valore di ritorno di una funzione.  Il risultato
    generato da questi avvertimenti può risultare verboso, ma non bisogna
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/5.Posting.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/5.Posting.rst
index b979266aa884..1476d51eb5e5 100644
--- a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/5.Posting.rst
+++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/5.Posting.rst
@@ -233,10 +233,12 @@ Le etichette in uso più comuni sono:
    :ref:`Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/submitting-patches.rst <it_submittingpatches>`.
    Codice che non presenta una firma appropriata non potrà essere integrato.
 
- - Co-developed-by: indica che la patch è stata sviluppata anche da un altro
-   sviluppatore assieme all'autore originale.  Questo è utile quando più
-   persone lavorano sulla stessa patch.  Da notare che questa persona deve
-   avere anche una riga "Signed-off-by:" nella patch.
+ - Co-developed-by: indica che la patch è stata cosviluppata da diversi
+   sviluppatori; viene usato per assegnare più autori (in aggiunta a quello
+   associato all'etichetta From:) quando più persone lavorano ad una patch.
+   Ogni Co-developed-by: dev'essere seguito immediatamente da un Signed-off-by:
+   del corrispondente coautore.  Maggiori dettagli ed esempi sono disponibili
+   in :ref:`Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/submitting-patches.rst <it_submittingpatches>`.
 
  - Acked-by: indica il consenso di un altro sviluppatore (spesso il manutentore
    del codice in oggetto) all'integrazione della patch nel kernel.
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/applying-patches.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/applying-patches.rst
index f5e9c7d0b16d..1d30e5cd2a3d 100644
--- a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/applying-patches.rst
+++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/applying-patches.rst
@@ -1,13 +1,15 @@
 .. include:: ../disclaimer-ita.rst
 
 :Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/applying-patches.rst <applying_patches>`
-
+:Translator: Federico Vaga <federico.vaga@vaga.pv.it>
 
 .. _it_applying_patches:
 
-Applicare modifiche al kernel Linux
-===================================
+Applicare patch al kernel Linux
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
 
-.. warning::
+.. note::
 
-    TODO ancora da tradurre
+   Questo documento è obsoleto.  Nella maggior parte dei casi, piuttosto
+   che usare ``patch`` manualmente, vorrete usare Git.  Per questo motivo
+   il documento non verrà tradotto.
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/changes.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/changes.rst
index 956cf95a1214..d0874327f301 100644
--- a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/changes.rst
+++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/changes.rst
@@ -1,12 +1,495 @@
 .. include:: ../disclaimer-ita.rst
 
 :Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/changes.rst <changes>`
+:Translator: Federico Vaga <federico.vaga@vaga.pv.it>
 
 .. _it_changes:
 
 Requisiti minimi per compilare il kernel
 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
 
-.. warning::
+Introduzione
+============
 
-    TODO ancora da tradurre
+Questo documento fornisce una lista dei software necessari per eseguire i
+kernel 4.x.
+
+Questo documento è basato sul file "Changes" del kernel 2.0.x e quindi le
+persone che lo scrissero meritano credito (Jared Mauch, Axel Boldt,
+Alessandro Sigala, e tanti altri nella rete).
+
+Requisiti minimi correnti
+*************************
+
+Prima di pensare d'avere trovato un baco, aggiornate i seguenti programmi
+**almeno** alla versione indicata!  Se non siete certi della versione che state
+usando, il comando indicato dovrebbe dirvelo.
+
+Questa lista presume che abbiate già un kernel Linux funzionante.  In aggiunta,
+non tutti gli strumenti sono necessari ovunque; ovviamente, se non avete un
+modem ISDN, per esempio, probabilmente non dovreste preoccuparvi di
+isdn4k-utils.
+
+====================== =================  ========================================
+        Programma       Versione minima       Comando per verificare la versione
+====================== =================  ========================================
+GNU C                  4.6                gcc --version
+GNU make               3.81               make --version
+binutils               2.20               ld -v
+flex                   2.5.35             flex --version
+bison                  2.0                bison --version
+util-linux             2.10o              fdformat --version
+kmod                   13                 depmod -V
+e2fsprogs              1.41.4             e2fsck -V
+jfsutils               1.1.3              fsck.jfs -V
+reiserfsprogs          3.6.3              reiserfsck -V
+xfsprogs               2.6.0              xfs_db -V
+squashfs-tools         4.0                mksquashfs -version
+btrfs-progs            0.18               btrfsck
+pcmciautils            004                pccardctl -V
+quota-tools            3.09               quota -V
+PPP                    2.4.0              pppd --version
+isdn4k-utils           3.1pre1            isdnctrl 2>&1|grep version
+nfs-utils              1.0.5              showmount --version
+procps                 3.2.0              ps --version
+oprofile               0.9                oprofiled --version
+udev                   081                udevd --version
+grub                   0.93               grub --version || grub-install --version
+mcelog                 0.6                mcelog --version
+iptables               1.4.2              iptables -V
+openssl & libcrypto    1.0.0              openssl version
+bc                     1.06.95            bc --version
+Sphinx\ [#f1]_         1.3                sphinx-build --version
+====================== =================  ========================================
+
+.. [#f1] Sphinx è necessario solo per produrre la documentazione del Kernel
+
+Compilazione del kernel
+***********************
+
+GCC
+---
+
+La versione necessaria di gcc potrebbe variare a seconda del tipo di CPU nel
+vostro calcolatore.
+
+Make
+----
+
+Per compilare il kernel vi servirà GNU make 3.81 o successivo.
+
+Binutils
+--------
+
+Il sistema di compilazione, dalla versione 4.13,  per la produzione dei passi
+intermedi, si è convertito all'uso di *thin archive* (`ar T`) piuttosto che
+all'uso del *linking* incrementale (`ld -r`). Questo richiede binutils 2.20 o
+successivo.
+
+pkg-config
+----------
+
+Il sistema di compilazione, dalla versione 4.18, richiede pkg-config per
+verificare l'esistenza degli strumenti kconfig e per determinare le
+impostazioni da usare in 'make {g,x}config'.  Precedentemente pkg-config
+veniva usato ma non verificato o documentato.
+
+Flex
+----
+
+Dalla versione 4.16, il sistema di compilazione, durante l'esecuzione, genera
+un analizzatore lessicale.  Questo richiede flex 2.5.35 o successivo.
+
+Bison
+-----
+
+Dalla versione 4.16, il sistema di compilazione, durante l'esecuzione, genera
+un parsificatore.  Questo richiede bison 2.0 o successivo.
+
+Perl
+----
+
+Per compilare il kernel vi servirà perl 5 e i seguenti moduli ``Getopt::Long``,
+``Getopt::Std``, ``File::Basename``, e ``File::Find``.
+
+BC
+--
+
+Vi servirà bc per compilare i kernel dal 3.10 in poi.
+
+OpenSSL
+-------
+
+Il programma OpenSSL e la libreria crypto vengono usati per la firma dei moduli
+e la gestione dei certificati; sono usati per la creazione della chiave e
+la generazione della firma.
+
+Se la firma dei moduli è abilitata, allora vi servirà openssl per compilare il
+kernel 3.7 e successivi.  Vi serviranno anche i pacchetti di sviluppo di
+openssl per compilare il kernel 4.3 o successivi.
+
+
+Strumenti di sistema
+********************
+
+Modifiche architetturali
+------------------------
+
+DevFS è stato reso obsoleto da udev
+(http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/kernel/hotplug/)
+
+Il supporto per UID a 32-bit è ora disponibile.  Divertitevi!
+
+La documentazione delle funzioni in Linux è una fase di transizione
+verso una documentazione integrata nei sorgenti stessi usando dei commenti
+formattati in modo speciale e posizionati vicino alle funzioni che descrivono.
+Al fine di arricchire la documentazione, questi commenti possono essere
+combinati con i file ReST presenti in Documentation/; questi potranno
+poi essere convertiti in formato PostScript, HTML, LaTex, ePUB o PDF.
+Per convertire i documenti da ReST al formato che volete, avete bisogno di
+Sphinx.
+
+Util-linux
+----------
+
+Le versioni più recenti di util-linux: forniscono il supporto a ``fdisk`` per
+dischi di grandi dimensioni; supportano le nuove opzioni di mount; riconoscono
+più tipi di partizioni; hanno un fdformat che funziona con i kernel 2.4;
+e altre chicche.  Probabilmente vorrete aggiornarlo.
+
+Ksymoops
+--------
+
+Se l'impensabile succede e il kernel va in oops, potrebbe servirvi lo strumento
+ksymoops per decodificarlo, ma nella maggior parte dei casi non vi servirà.
+Generalmente è preferibile compilare il kernel con l'opzione ``CONFIG_KALLSYMS``
+cosicché venga prodotto un output più leggibile che può essere usato così com'è
+(produce anche un output migliore di ksymoops).  Se per qualche motivo il
+vostro kernel non è stato compilato con ``CONFIG_KALLSYMS`` e non avete modo di
+ricompilarlo e riprodurre l'oops con quell'opzione abilitata, allora potete
+usare ksymoops per decodificare l'oops.
+
+Mkinitrd
+--------
+
+I cambiamenti della struttura in ``/lib/modules`` necessita l'aggiornamento di
+mkinitrd.
+
+E2fsprogs
+---------
+
+L'ultima versione di ``e2fsprogs`` corregge diversi bachi in fsck e debugfs.
+Ovviamente, aggiornarlo è una buona idea.
+
+JFSutils
+--------
+
+Il pacchetto ``jfsutils`` contiene programmi per il file-system JFS.
+Sono disponibili i seguenti strumenti:
+
+- ``fsck.jfs`` - avvia la ripetizione del log delle transizioni, e verifica e
+  ripara una partizione formattata secondo JFS
+
+- ``mkfs.jfs`` - crea una partizione formattata secondo JFS
+
+- sono disponibili altri strumenti per il file-system.
+
+Reiserfsprogs
+-------------
+
+Il pacchetto reiserfsprogs dovrebbe essere usato con reiserfs-3.6.x (Linux
+kernel 2.4.x).  Questo è un pacchetto combinato che contiene versioni
+funzionanti di ``mkreiserfs``, ``resize_reiserfs``, ``debugreiserfs`` e
+``reiserfsck``.  Questi programmi funzionano sulle piattaforme i386 e alpha.
+
+Xfsprogs
+--------
+
+L'ultima versione di ``xfsprogs`` contiene, fra i tanti, i programmi
+``mkfs.xfs``, ``xfs_db`` e ``xfs_repair`` per il file-system XFS.
+Dipendono dell'architettura e qualsiasi versione dalla 2.0.0 in poi
+dovrebbe funzionare correttamente con la versione corrente del codice
+XFS nel kernel (sono raccomandate le versioni 2.6.0 o successive per via
+di importanti miglioramenti).
+
+PCMCIAutils
+-----------
+
+PCMCIAutils sostituisce ``pcmica-cs``.  Serve ad impostare correttamente i
+connettori PCMCIA all'avvio del sistema e a caricare i moduli necessari per
+i dispositivi a 16-bit se il kernel è stato modularizzato e il sottosistema
+hotplug è in uso.
+
+Quota-tools
+-----------
+
+Il supporto per uid e gid a 32 bit richiedono l'uso della versione 2 del
+formato quota.  La versione 3.07 e successive di quota-tools supportano
+questo formato.  Usate la versione raccomandata nella lista qui sopra o una
+successiva.
+
+Micro codice per Intel IA32
+---------------------------
+
+Per poter aggiornare il micro codice per Intel IA32, è stato aggiunto un
+apposito driver; il driver è accessibile come un normale dispositivo a
+caratteri (misc).  Se non state usando udev probabilmente sarà necessario
+eseguire i seguenti comandi come root prima di poterlo aggiornare::
+
+  mkdir /dev/cpu
+  mknod /dev/cpu/microcode c 10 184
+  chmod 0644 /dev/cpu/microcode
+
+Probabilmente, vorrete anche il programma microcode_ctl da usare con questo
+dispositivo.
+
+udev
+----
+
+``udev`` è un programma in spazio utente il cui scopo è quello di popolare
+dinamicamente la cartella ``/dev`` coi dispositivi effettivamente presenti.
+``udev`` sostituisce le funzionalità base di devfs, consentendo comunque
+nomi persistenti per i dispositivi.
+
+FUSE
+----
+
+Serve libfuse 2.4.0 o successiva.  Il requisito minimo assoluto è 2.3.0 ma
+le opzioni di mount ``direct_io`` e ``kernel_cache`` non funzioneranno.
+
+
+Rete
+****
+
+Cambiamenti generali
+--------------------
+
+Se per quanto riguarda la configurazione di rete avete esigenze di un certo
+livello dovreste prendere in considerazione l'uso degli strumenti in ip-route2.
+
+Filtro dei pacchetti / NAT
+--------------------------
+
+Il codice per filtraggio dei pacchetti e il NAT fanno uso degli stessi
+strumenti come nelle versioni del kernel antecedenti la 2.4.x (iptables).
+Include ancora moduli di compatibilità per 2.2.x ipchains e 2.0.x ipdwadm.
+
+PPP
+---
+
+Il driver per PPP è stato ristrutturato per supportare collegamenti multipli e
+per funzionare su diversi livelli.  Se usate PPP, aggiornate pppd almeno alla
+versione 2.4.0.
+
+Se non usate udev, dovete avere un file /dev/ppp che può essere creato da root
+col seguente comando::
+
+  mknod /dev/ppp c 108 0
+
+Isdn4k-utils
+------------
+
+Per via della modifica del campo per il numero di telefono, il pacchetto
+isdn4k-utils dev'essere ricompilato o (preferibilmente) aggiornato.
+
+NFS-utils
+---------
+
+Nei kernel più antichi (2.4 e precedenti), il server NFS doveva essere
+informato sui clienti ai quali si voleva fornire accesso via NFS.  Questa
+informazione veniva passata al kernel quando un cliente montava un file-system
+mediante ``mountd``, oppure usando ``exportfs`` all'avvio del sistema.
+exportfs prende le informazioni circa i clienti attivi da ``/var/lib/nfs/rmtab``.
+
+Questo approccio è piuttosto delicato perché dipende dalla correttezza di
+rmtab, che non è facile da garantire, in particolare quando si cerca di
+implementare un *failover*.  Anche quando il sistema funziona bene, ``rmtab``
+ha il problema di accumulare vecchie voci inutilizzate.
+
+Sui kernel più recenti il kernel ha la possibilità di informare mountd quando
+arriva una richiesta da una macchina sconosciuta, e mountd può dare al kernel
+le informazioni corrette per l'esportazione.  Questo rimuove la dipendenza con
+``rmtab`` e significa che il kernel deve essere al corrente solo dei clienti
+attivi.
+
+Per attivare questa funzionalità, dovete eseguire il seguente comando prima di
+usare exportfs o mountd::
+
+  mount -t nfsd nfsd /proc/fs/nfsd
+
+Dove possibile, raccomandiamo di proteggere tutti i servizi NFS dall'accesso
+via internet mediante un firewall.
+
+mcelog
+------
+
+Quando ``CONFIG_x86_MCE`` è attivo, il programma mcelog processa e registra
+gli eventi *machine check*.  Gli eventi *machine check* sono errori riportati
+dalla CPU.  Incoraggiamo l'analisi di questi errori.
+
+
+Documentazione del kernel
+*************************
+
+Sphinx
+------
+
+Per i dettaglio sui requisiti di Sphinx, fate riferimento a :ref:`it_sphinx_install`
+in :ref:`Documentation/translations/it_IT/doc-guide/sphinx.rst <it_sphinxdoc>`
+
+Ottenere software aggiornato
+============================
+
+Compilazione del kernel
+***********************
+
+gcc
+---
+
+- <ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/gcc/>
+
+Make
+----
+
+- <ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/make/>
+
+Binutils
+--------
+
+- <https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/devel/binutils/>
+
+Flex
+----
+
+- <https://github.com/westes/flex/releases>
+
+Bison
+-----
+
+- <ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/bison/>
+
+OpenSSL
+-------
+
+- <https://www.openssl.org/>
+
+Strumenti di sistema
+********************
+
+Util-linux
+----------
+
+- <https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util-linux/>
+
+Kmod
+----
+
+- <https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/kernel/kmod/>
+- <https://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/utils/kernel/kmod/kmod.git>
+
+Ksymoops
+--------
+
+- <https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/kernel/ksymoops/v2.4/>
+
+Mkinitrd
+--------
+
+- <https://code.launchpad.net/initrd-tools/main>
+
+E2fsprogs
+---------
+
+- <http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/e2fsprogs/e2fsprogs-1.29.tar.gz>
+
+JFSutils
+--------
+
+- <http://jfs.sourceforge.net/>
+
+Reiserfsprogs
+-------------
+
+- <http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/fs/reiserfs/>
+
+Xfsprogs
+--------
+
+- <ftp://oss.sgi.com/projects/xfs/>
+
+Pcmciautils
+-----------
+
+- <https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/kernel/pcmcia/>
+
+Quota-tools
+-----------
+
+- <http://sourceforge.net/projects/linuxquota/>
+
+
+Microcodice Intel P6
+--------------------
+
+- <https://downloadcenter.intel.com/>
+
+udev
+----
+
+- <http://www.freedesktop.org/software/systemd/man/udev.html>
+
+FUSE
+----
+
+- <https://github.com/libfuse/libfuse/releases>
+
+mcelog
+------
+
+- <http://www.mcelog.org/>
+
+Rete
+****
+
+PPP
+---
+
+- <ftp://ftp.samba.org/pub/ppp/>
+
+Isdn4k-utils
+------------
+
+- <ftp://ftp.isdn4linux.de/pub/isdn4linux/utils/>
+
+NFS-utils
+---------
+
+- <http://sourceforge.net/project/showfiles.php?group_id=14>
+
+Iptables
+--------
+
+- <http://www.iptables.org/downloads.html>
+
+Ip-route2
+---------
+
+- <https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/net/iproute2/>
+
+OProfile
+--------
+
+- <http://oprofile.sf.net/download/>
+
+NFS-Utils
+---------
+
+- <http://nfs.sourceforge.net/>
+
+Documentazione del kernel
+*************************
+
+Sphinx
+------
+
+- <http://www.sphinx-doc.org/>
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/coding-style.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/coding-style.rst
index b707bdbe178c..5ef534c95e69 100644
--- a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/coding-style.rst
+++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/coding-style.rst
@@ -449,6 +449,9 @@ Nonostante questo non sia richiesto dal linguaggio C, in Linux viene preferito
 perché è un modo semplice per aggiungere informazioni importanti per il
 lettore.
 
+Non usate la parola chiave ``extern`` coi prototipi di funzione perché
+rende le righe più lunghe e non è strettamente necessario.
+
 7) Centralizzare il ritorno delle funzioni
 ------------------------------------------
 
@@ -600,26 +603,43 @@ segue nel vostro file .emacs:
       (* (max steps 1)
          c-basic-offset)))
 
-  (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook
-            (lambda ()
-              ;; Add kernel style
-              (c-add-style
-               "linux-tabs-only"
-               '("linux" (c-offsets-alist
-                          (arglist-cont-nonempty
-                           c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg
-                           c-lineup-arglist-tabs-only))))))
-
-  (add-hook 'c-mode-hook
-            (lambda ()
-              (let ((filename (buffer-file-name)))
-                ;; Enable kernel mode for the appropriate files
-                (when (and filename
-                           (string-match (expand-file-name "~/src/linux-trees")
-                                         filename))
-                  (setq indent-tabs-mode t)
-                  (setq show-trailing-whitespace t)
-                  (c-set-style "linux-tabs-only")))))
+  (dir-locals-set-class-variables
+   'linux-kernel
+   '((c-mode . (
+          (c-basic-offset . 8)
+          (c-label-minimum-indentation . 0)
+          (c-offsets-alist . (
+                  (arglist-close         . c-lineup-arglist-tabs-only)
+                  (arglist-cont-nonempty .
+		      (c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg c-lineup-arglist-tabs-only))
+                  (arglist-intro         . +)
+                  (brace-list-intro      . +)
+                  (c                     . c-lineup-C-comments)
+                  (case-label            . 0)
+                  (comment-intro         . c-lineup-comment)
+                  (cpp-define-intro      . +)
+                  (cpp-macro             . -1000)
+                  (cpp-macro-cont        . +)
+                  (defun-block-intro     . +)
+                  (else-clause           . 0)
+                  (func-decl-cont        . +)
+                  (inclass               . +)
+                  (inher-cont            . c-lineup-multi-inher)
+                  (knr-argdecl-intro     . 0)
+                  (label                 . -1000)
+                  (statement             . 0)
+                  (statement-block-intro . +)
+                  (statement-case-intro  . +)
+                  (statement-cont        . +)
+                  (substatement          . +)
+                  ))
+          (indent-tabs-mode . t)
+          (show-trailing-whitespace . t)
+          ))))
+
+  (dir-locals-set-directory-class
+   (expand-file-name "~/src/linux-trees")
+   'linux-kernel)
 
 Questo farà funzionare meglio emacs con lo stile del kernel per i file che
 si trovano nella cartella ``~/src/linux-trees``.
@@ -839,7 +859,8 @@ racchiusa in #ifdef, potete usare printk(KERN_DEBUG ...).
 
 Il kernel fornisce i seguenti assegnatori ad uso generico:
 kmalloc(), kzalloc(), kmalloc_array(), kcalloc(), vmalloc(), e vzalloc().
-Per maggiori informazioni, consultate la documentazione dell'API.
+Per maggiori informazioni, consultate la documentazione dell'API:
+:ref:`Documentation/translations/it_IT/core-api/memory-allocation.rst <it_memory_allocation>`
 
 Il modo preferito per passare la dimensione di una struttura è il seguente:
 
@@ -870,6 +891,11 @@ Il modo preferito per assegnare un vettore a zero è il seguente:
 Entrambe verificano la condizione di overflow per la dimensione
 d'assegnamento n * sizeof(...), se accade ritorneranno NULL.
 
+Questi allocatori generici producono uno *stack dump* in caso di fallimento
+a meno che non venga esplicitamente specificato __GFP_NOWARN. Quindi, nella
+maggior parte dei casi, è inutile stampare messaggi aggiuntivi quando uno di
+questi allocatori ritornano un puntatore NULL.
+
 15) Il morbo inline
 -------------------
 
@@ -929,7 +955,40 @@ qualche valore fuori dai limiti.  Un tipico esempio è quello delle funzioni
 che ritornano un puntatore; queste utilizzano NULL o ERR_PTR come meccanismo
 di notifica degli errori.
 
-17) Non reinventate le macro del kernel
+17) L'uso di bool
+-----------------
+
+Nel kernel Linux il tipo bool deriva dal tipo _Bool dello standard C99.
+Un valore bool può assumere solo i valori 0 o 1, e implicitamente o
+esplicitamente la conversione a bool converte i valori in vero (*true*) o
+falso (*false*).  Quando si usa un tipo bool il costrutto !! non sarà più
+necessario, e questo va ad eliminare una certa serie di bachi.
+
+Quando si usano i valori booleani, dovreste utilizzare le definizioni di true
+e false al posto dei valori 1 e 0.
+
+Per il valore di ritorno delle funzioni e per le variabili sullo stack, l'uso
+del tipo bool è sempre appropriato.  L'uso di bool viene incoraggiato per
+migliorare la leggibilità e spesso è molto meglio di 'int' nella gestione di
+valori booleani.
+
+Non usate bool se per voi sono importanti l'ordine delle righe di cache o
+la loro dimensione; la dimensione e l'allineamento cambia a seconda
+dell'architettura per la quale è stato compilato.  Le strutture che sono state
+ottimizzate per l'allineamento o la dimensione non dovrebbero usare bool.
+
+Se una struttura ha molti valori true/false, considerate l'idea di raggrupparli
+in un intero usando campi da 1 bit, oppure usate un tipo dalla larghezza fissa,
+come u8.
+
+Come per gli argomenti delle funzioni, molti valori true/false possono essere
+raggruppati in un singolo argomento a bit denominato 'flags'; spesso 'flags' è
+un'alternativa molto più leggibile se si hanno valori costanti per true/false.
+
+Detto ciò, un uso parsimonioso di bool nelle strutture dati e negli argomenti
+può migliorare la leggibilità.
+
+18) Non reinventate le macro del kernel
 ---------------------------------------
 
 Il file di intestazione include/linux/kernel.h contiene un certo numero
@@ -953,7 +1012,7 @@ rigido sui tipi.  Sentitevi liberi di leggere attentamente questo file
 d'intestazione per scoprire cos'altro è stato definito che non dovreste
 reinventare nel vostro codice.
 
-18) Linee di configurazione degli editor e altre schifezze
+19) Linee di configurazione degli editor e altre schifezze
 -----------------------------------------------------------
 
 Alcuni editor possono interpretare dei parametri di configurazione integrati
@@ -987,8 +1046,8 @@ d'indentazione e di modalità d'uso.  Le persone potrebbero aver configurato una
 modalità su misura, oppure potrebbero avere qualche altra magia per far
 funzionare bene l'indentazione.
 
-19) Inline assembly
----------------------
+20) Inline assembly
+-------------------
 
 Nel codice specifico per un'architettura, potreste aver bisogno di codice
 *inline assembly* per interfacciarvi col processore o con una funzionalità
@@ -1020,7 +1079,7 @@ al fine di allineare correttamente l'assembler che verrà generato:
 	     "more_magic %reg2, %reg3"
 	     : /* outputs */ : /* inputs */ : /* clobbers */);
 
-20) Compilazione sotto condizione
+21) Compilazione sotto condizione
 ---------------------------------
 
 Ovunque sia possibile, non usate le direttive condizionali del preprocessore
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/deprecated.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/deprecated.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..776f26732a94
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/deprecated.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,129 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+.. include:: ../disclaimer-ita.rst
+
+:Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/deprecated.rst <deprecated>`
+:Translator: Federico Vaga <federico.vaga@vaga.pv.it>
+
+.. _it_deprecated:
+
+==============================================================================
+Interfacce deprecate, caratteristiche del linguaggio, attributi, e convenzioni
+==============================================================================
+
+In un mondo perfetto, sarebbe possibile prendere tutti gli usi di
+un'interfaccia deprecata e convertirli in quella nuova, e così sarebbe
+possibile rimuovere la vecchia interfaccia in un singolo ciclo di sviluppo.
+Tuttavia, per via delle dimensioni del kernel, la gerarchia dei manutentori e
+le tempistiche, non è sempre possibile fare questo tipo di conversione tutta
+in una volta. Questo significa che nuove istanze di una vecchia interfaccia
+potrebbero aggiungersi al kernel proprio quando si sta cercando di rimuoverle,
+aumentando così il carico di lavoro. Al fine di istruire gli sviluppatori su
+cosa è considerato deprecato (e perché), è stata create la seguente lista a cui
+fare riferimento quando qualcuno propone modifiche che usano cose deprecate.
+
+__deprecated
+------------
+Nonostante questo attributo marchi visibilmente un interfaccia come deprecata,
+`non produce più alcun avviso durante la compilazione
+<https://git.kernel.org/linus/771c035372a036f83353eef46dbb829780330234>`_
+perché uno degli obiettivi del kernel è quello di compilare senza avvisi;
+inoltre, nessuno stava agendo per rimuovere queste interfacce. Nonostante l'uso
+di `__deprecated` in un file d'intestazione sia opportuno per segnare una
+interfaccia come 'vecchia', questa non è una soluzione completa. L'interfaccia
+deve essere rimossa dal kernel, o aggiunta a questo documento per scoraggiarne
+l'uso.
+
+Calcoli codificati negli argomenti di un allocatore
+----------------------------------------------------
+Il calcolo dinamico delle dimensioni (specialmente le moltiplicazioni) non
+dovrebbero essere fatto negli argomenti di funzioni di allocazione di memoria
+(o simili) per via del rischio di overflow. Questo può portare a valori più
+piccoli di quelli che il chiamante si aspettava. L'uso di questo modo di
+allocare può portare ad un overflow della memoria di heap e altri
+malfunzionamenti. (Si fa eccezione per valori numerici per i quali il
+compilatore può generare avvisi circa un potenziale overflow. Tuttavia usare
+i valori numerici come suggerito di seguito è innocuo).
+
+Per esempio, non usate ``count * size`` come argomento::
+
+	foo = kmalloc(count * size, GFP_KERNEL);
+
+Al suo posto, si dovrebbe usare l'allocatore a due argomenti::
+
+	foo = kmalloc_array(count, size, GFP_KERNEL);
+
+Se questo tipo di allocatore non è disponibile, allora dovrebbero essere usate
+le funzioni del tipo *saturate-on-overflow*::
+
+	bar = vmalloc(array_size(count, size));
+
+Un altro tipico caso da evitare è quello di calcolare la dimensione di una
+struttura seguita da un vettore di altre strutture, come nel seguente caso::
+
+	header = kzalloc(sizeof(*header) + count * sizeof(*header->item),
+			 GFP_KERNEL);
+
+Invece, usate la seguente funzione::
+
+	header = kzalloc(struct_size(header, item, count), GFP_KERNEL);
+
+Per maggiori dettagli fate riferimento a :c:func:`array_size`,
+:c:func:`array3_size`, e :c:func:`struct_size`, così come la famiglia di
+funzioni :c:func:`check_add_overflow` e :c:func:`check_mul_overflow`.
+
+simple_strtol(), simple_strtoll(), simple_strtoul(), simple_strtoull()
+----------------------------------------------------------------------
+Le funzioni :c:func:`simple_strtol`, :c:func:`simple_strtoll`,
+:c:func:`simple_strtoul`, e :c:func:`simple_strtoull` ignorano volutamente
+i possibili overflow, e questo può portare il chiamante a generare risultati
+inaspettati. Le rispettive funzioni :c:func:`kstrtol`, :c:func:`kstrtoll`,
+:c:func:`kstrtoul`, e :c:func:`kstrtoull` sono da considerarsi le corrette
+sostitute; tuttavia va notato che queste richiedono che la stringa sia
+terminata con il carattere NUL o quello di nuova riga.
+
+strcpy()
+--------
+La funzione :c:func:`strcpy` non fa controlli agli estremi del buffer
+di destinazione. Questo può portare ad un overflow oltre i limiti del
+buffer e generare svariati tipi di malfunzionamenti. Nonostante l'opzione
+`CONFIG_FORTIFY_SOURCE=y` e svariate opzioni del compilatore aiutano
+a ridurne il rischio, non c'è alcuna buona ragione per continuare ad usare
+questa funzione. La versione sicura da usare è :c:func:`strscpy`.
+
+strncpy() su stringe terminate con NUL
+--------------------------------------
+L'utilizzo di :c:func:`strncpy` non fornisce alcuna garanzia sul fatto che
+il buffer di destinazione verrà terminato con il carattere NUL. Questo
+potrebbe portare a diversi overflow di lettura o altri malfunzionamenti
+causati, appunto, dalla mancanza del terminatore. Questa estende la
+terminazione nel buffer di destinazione quando la stringa d'origine è più
+corta; questo potrebbe portare ad una penalizzazione delle prestazioni per
+chi usa solo stringe terminate. La versione sicura da usare è
+:c:func:`strscpy`. (chi usa :c:func:`strscpy` e necessita di estendere la
+terminazione con NUL deve aggiungere una chiamata a :c:func:`memset`)
+
+Se il chiamate no usa stringhe terminate con NUL, allore :c:func:`strncpy()`
+può continuare ad essere usata, ma i buffer di destinazione devono essere
+marchiati con l'attributo `__nonstring <https://gcc.gnu.org/onlinedocs/gcc/Common-Variable-Attributes.html>`_
+per evitare avvisi durante la compilazione.
+
+strlcpy()
+---------
+La funzione :c:func:`strlcpy`, per prima cosa, legge interamente il buffer di
+origine, magari leggendo più di quanto verrà effettivamente copiato. Questo
+è inefficiente e può portare a overflow di lettura quando la stringa non è
+terminata con NUL. La versione sicura da usare è :c:func:`strscpy`.
+
+Vettori a dimensione variabile (VLA)
+------------------------------------
+
+Usare VLA sullo stack produce codice molto peggiore rispetto a quando si usano
+vettori a dimensione fissa. Questi `problemi di prestazioni <https://git.kernel.org/linus/02361bc77888>`_,
+tutt'altro che banali, sono già un motivo valido per eliminare i VLA; in
+aggiunta sono anche un problema per la sicurezza. La crescita dinamica di un
+vettore nello stack potrebbe eccedere la memoria rimanente in tale segmento.
+Questo può portare a dei malfunzionamenti, potrebbe sovrascrivere
+dati importanti alla fine dello stack (quando il kernel è compilato senza
+`CONFIG_THREAD_INFO_IN_TASK=y`), o sovrascrivere un pezzo di memoria adiacente
+allo stack (quando il kernel è compilato senza `CONFIG_VMAP_STACK=y`).
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/howto.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/howto.rst
index 909e6a55bc43..9903ac7c566b 100644
--- a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/howto.rst
+++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/howto.rst
@@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ il progetto Linux Cross-Reference, che è in grado di presentare codice
 sorgente in un formato autoreferenziale ed indicizzato. Un eccellente ed
 aggiornata fonte di consultazione del codice del kernel la potete trovare qui:
 
-	http://lxr.free-electrons.com/
+	https://elixir.bootlin.com/
 
 
 Il processo di sviluppo
@@ -244,7 +244,6 @@ e di molti altri rami per specifici sottosistemi. Questi rami sono:
 
   - I sorgenti kernel 4.x
   - I sorgenti stabili del kernel 4.x.y -stable
-  - Le modifiche in 4.x -git
   - Sorgenti dei sottosistemi del kernel e le loro modifiche
   - Il kernel 4.x -next per test d'integrazione
 
@@ -313,16 +312,6 @@ Il file Documentation/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst (nei sorgenti) documenta
 quali tipologie di modifiche sono accettate per i sorgenti -stable, e come
 avviene il processo di rilascio.
 
-Le modifiche in 4.x -git
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Queste sono istantanee quotidiane del kernel di Linus e sono gestite in
-una repositorio git (da qui il nome). Queste modifiche sono solitamente
-rilasciate giornalmente e rappresentano l'attuale stato dei sorgenti di
-Linus. Queste sono da considerarsi più sperimentali di un -rc in quanto
-generate automaticamente senza nemmeno aver dato una rapida occhiata
-per verificarne lo stato.
-
 
 Sorgenti dei sottosistemi del kernel e le loro patch
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/kernel-enforcement-statement.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/kernel-enforcement-statement.rst
index 4ddf5a35b270..1f62da622e26 100644
--- a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/kernel-enforcement-statement.rst
+++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/kernel-enforcement-statement.rst
@@ -1,13 +1,175 @@
 .. include:: ../disclaimer-ita.rst
 
 :Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/kernel-enforcement-statement.rst <process_statement_kernel>`
-
+:Translator: Federico Vaga <federico.vaga@vaga.pv.it>
 
 .. _it_process_statement_kernel:
 
 Applicazione della licenza sul kernel Linux
 ===========================================
 
-.. warning::
+Come sviluppatori del kernel Linux, abbiamo un certo interessa su come il
+nostro software viene usato e su come la sua licenza viene fatta rispettare.
+Il rispetto reciproco degli obblighi di condivisione della GPL-2.0 è
+fondamentale per la sostenibilità di lungo periodo del nostro software e
+della nostra comunità.
+
+Benché ognuno abbia il diritto a far rispettare il diritto d'autore per i
+propri contributi alla nostra comunità, condividiamo l'interesse a far si che
+ogni azione individuale nel far rispettare i propri diritti sia condotta in
+modo da portare beneficio alla comunità e che non abbia, involontariamente,
+impatti negativi sulla salute e la crescita del nostro ecosistema software.
+Al fine di scoraggiare l'esecuzione di azioni inutili, concordiamo che è nel
+migliore interesse della nostra comunità di sviluppo di impegnarci nel
+rispettare i seguenti obblighi nei confronti degli utenti del kernel Linux
+per conto nostro e di qualsiasi successore ai nostri interessi sul diritto
+d'autore:
+
+    Malgrado le clausole di risoluzione della licenza GPL-2.0, abbiamo
+    concordato che è nel migliore interesse della nostra comunità di sviluppo
+    adottare le seguenti disposizioni della GPL-3.0 come permessi aggiuntivi
+    alla nostra licenza nei confronti di qualsiasi affermazione non difensiva
+    di diritti sulla licenza.
+
+	In ogni caso, se cessano tutte le violazioni di questa Licenza, allora
+	la tua licenza da parte di un dato detentore del copyright viene
+	ripristinata (a) in via cautelativa, a meno che e fino a quando il
+	detentore del copyright non cessa esplicitamente e definitivamente
+	la tua licenza, e (b) in via permanente se il detentore del copyright
+	non ti notifica in alcun modo la violazione entro 60 giorni dalla
+	cessazione della licenza.
+
+	Inoltre, la tua licenza da parte di un dato detentore del copyright
+	viene ripristinata in maniera permanente se il detentore del copyright
+	ti notifica la violazione in maniera adeguata, se questa è la prima
+	volta che ricevi una notifica di violazione di questa Licenza (per
+	qualunque Programma) dallo stesso detentore di copyright, e se rimedi
+	alla violazione entro 30 giorni dalla data di ricezione della notifica
+	di violazione.
+
+Fornendo queste garanzie, abbiamo l'intenzione di incoraggiare l'uso del
+software.  Vogliamo che le aziende e le persone usino, modifichino e
+distribuiscano a questo software.  Vogliamo lavorare con gli utenti in modo
+aperto e trasparente per eliminare ogni incertezza circa le nostre aspettative
+sul rispetto o l'ottemperanza alla licenza che possa limitare l'uso del nostro
+software.  Vediamo l'azione legale come ultima spiaggia, da avviare solo quando
+gli altri sforzi della comunità hanno fallito nel risolvere il problema.
+
+Per finire, una volta che un problema di non rispetto della licenza viene
+risolto, speriamo che gli utenti si sentano i benvenuti ad aggregarsi a noi
+nello sviluppo di questo progetto.  Lavorando assieme, saremo più forti.
+
+Ad eccezione deve specificato, parliamo per noi stessi, e non per una qualsiasi
+azienda per la quale lavoriamo oggi, o per cui abbiamo lavorato in passato, o
+lavoreremo in futuro.
+
 
-    TODO ancora da tradurre
+  - Laura Abbott
+  - Bjorn Andersson (Linaro)
+  - Andrea Arcangeli
+  - Neil Armstrong
+  - Jens Axboe
+  - Pablo Neira Ayuso
+  - Khalid Aziz
+  - Ralf Baechle
+  - Felipe Balbi
+  - Arnd Bergmann
+  - Ard Biesheuvel
+  - Tim Bird
+  - Paolo Bonzini
+  - Christian Borntraeger
+  - Mark Brown (Linaro)
+  - Paul Burton
+  - Javier Martinez Canillas
+  - Rob Clark
+  - Kees Cook (Google)
+  - Jonathan Corbet
+  - Dennis Dalessandro
+  - Vivien Didelot (Savoir-faire Linux)
+  - Hans de Goede
+  - Mel Gorman (SUSE)
+  - Sven Eckelmann
+  - Alex Elder (Linaro)
+  - Fabio Estevam
+  - Larry Finger
+  - Bhumika Goyal
+  - Andy Gross
+  - Juergen Gross
+  - Shawn Guo
+  - Ulf Hansson
+  - Stephen Hemminger (Microsoft)
+  - Tejun Heo
+  - Rob Herring
+  - Masami Hiramatsu
+  - Michal Hocko
+  - Simon Horman
+  - Johan Hovold (Hovold Consulting AB)
+  - Christophe JAILLET
+  - Olof Johansson
+  - Lee Jones (Linaro)
+  - Heiner Kallweit
+  - Srinivas Kandagatla
+  - Jan Kara
+  - Shuah Khan (Samsung)
+  - David Kershner
+  - Jaegeuk Kim
+  - Namhyung Kim
+  - Colin Ian King
+  - Jeff Kirsher
+  - Greg Kroah-Hartman (Linux Foundation)
+  - Christian König
+  - Vinod Koul
+  - Krzysztof Kozlowski
+  - Viresh Kumar
+  - Aneesh Kumar K.V
+  - Julia Lawall
+  - Doug Ledford
+  - Chuck Lever (Oracle)
+  - Daniel Lezcano
+  - Shaohua Li
+  - Xin Long
+  - Tony Luck
+  - Catalin Marinas (Arm Ltd)
+  - Mike Marshall
+  - Chris Mason
+  - Paul E. McKenney
+  - Arnaldo Carvalho de Melo
+  - David S. Miller
+  - Ingo Molnar
+  - Kuninori Morimoto
+  - Trond Myklebust
+  - Martin K. Petersen (Oracle)
+  - Borislav Petkov
+  - Jiri Pirko
+  - Josh Poimboeuf
+  - Sebastian Reichel (Collabora)
+  - Guenter Roeck
+  - Joerg Roedel
+  - Leon Romanovsky
+  - Steven Rostedt (VMware)
+  - Frank Rowand
+  - Ivan Safonov
+  - Anna Schumaker
+  - Jes Sorensen
+  - K.Y. Srinivasan
+  - David Sterba (SUSE)
+  - Heiko Stuebner
+  - Jiri Kosina (SUSE)
+  - Willy Tarreau
+  - Dmitry Torokhov
+  - Linus Torvalds
+  - Thierry Reding
+  - Rik van Riel
+  - Luis R. Rodriguez
+  - Geert Uytterhoeven (Glider bvba)
+  - Eduardo Valentin (Amazon.com)
+  - Daniel Vetter
+  - Linus Walleij
+  - Richard Weinberger
+  - Dan Williams
+  - Rafael J. Wysocki
+  - Arvind Yadav
+  - Masahiro Yamada
+  - Wei Yongjun
+  - Lv Zheng
+  - Marc Zyngier (Arm Ltd)
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/license-rules.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/license-rules.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f058e06996dc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/license-rules.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,500 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+.. include:: ../disclaimer-ita.rst
+
+:Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/license-rules.rst <kernel_licensing>`
+:Translator: Federico Vaga <federico.vaga@vaga.pv.it>
+
+.. _it_kernel_licensing:
+
+Regole per licenziare il kernel Linux
+=====================================
+
+Il kernel Linux viene rilasciato sotto i termini definiti dalla seconda
+versione della licenza *GNU General Public License* (GPL-2.0), di cui una
+copia è disponibile nel file LICENSES/preferred/GPL-2.0; a questo si
+aggiunge eccezione per le chiamate di sistema come descritto in
+LICENSES/exceptions/Linux-syscall-note; tutto ciò è descritto nel file COPYING.
+
+Questo documento fornisce una descrizione su come ogni singolo file sorgente
+debba essere licenziato per far si che sia chiaro e non ambiguo. Questo non
+sostituisce la licenza del kernel.
+
+La licenza descritta nel file COPYING si applica ai sorgenti del kernel nella
+loro interezza, quindi i singoli file sorgenti possono avere diverse licenze ma
+devono essere compatibili con la GPL-2.0::
+
+    GPL-1.0+  :  GNU General Public License v1.0 o successiva
+    GPL-2.0+  :  GNU General Public License v2.0 o successiva
+    LGPL-2.0  :  GNU Library General Public License v2
+    LGPL-2.0+ :  GNU Library General Public License v2 o successiva
+    LGPL-2.1  :  GNU Lesser General Public License v2.1
+    LGPL-2.1+ :  GNU Lesser General Public License v2.1 o successiva
+
+A parte questo, i singolo file possono essere forniti con una doppia licenza,
+per esempio con una delle varianti compatibili della GPL e alternativamente con
+una licenza permissiva come BSD, MIT eccetera.
+
+I file d'intestazione per l'API verso lo spazio utente (UAPI) descrivono
+le interfacce usate dai programmi, e per questo sono un caso speciale.
+Secondo le note nel file COPYING, le chiamate di sistema sono un chiaro
+confine oltre il quale non si estendono i requisiti della GPL per quei
+programmi che le usano per comunicare con il kernel.  Dato che i file
+d'intestazione UAPI devono poter essere inclusi nei sorgenti di un
+qualsiasi programma eseguibile sul kernel Linux, questi meritano
+un'eccezione documentata da una clausola speciale.
+
+Il modo più comune per indicare la licenza dei file sorgenti è quello di
+aggiungere il corrispondente blocco di testo come commento in testa a detto
+file.  Per via della formattazione, dei refusi, eccetera, questi blocchi di
+testo sono difficili da identificare dagli strumenti usati per verificare il
+rispetto delle licenze.
+
+Un'alternativa ai blocchi di testo è data dall'uso degli identificatori
+*Software Package Data Exchange* (SPDX) in ogni file sorgente.  Gli
+identificatori di licenza SPDX sono analizzabili dalle macchine e sono precisi
+simboli stenografici che identificano la licenza sotto la quale viene
+licenziato il file che lo include.  Gli identificatori di licenza SPDX sono
+gestiti del gruppo di lavoro SPDX presso la Linux Foundation e sono stati
+concordati fra i soci nell'industria, gli sviluppatori di strumenti, e i
+rispettivi gruppi legali. Per maggiori informazioni, consultate
+https://spdx.org/
+
+Il kernel Linux richiede un preciso identificatore SPDX in tutti i file
+sorgenti.  Gli identificatori validi verranno spiegati nella sezione
+`Identificatori di licenza`_ e sono stati copiati dalla lista ufficiale di
+licenze SPDX assieme al rispettivo testo come mostrato in
+https://spdx.org/licenses/.
+
+Sintassi degli identificatori di licenza
+----------------------------------------
+
+1. Posizionamento:
+
+   L'identificativo di licenza SPDX dev'essere posizionato come prima riga
+   possibile di un file che possa contenere commenti.  Per la maggior parte
+   dei file questa è la prima riga, fanno eccezione gli script che richiedono
+   come prima riga '#!PATH_TO_INTERPRETER'.  Per questi script l'identificativo
+   SPDX finisce nella seconda riga.
+
+|
+
+2. Stile:
+
+   L'identificativo di licenza SPDX viene aggiunto sotto forma di commento.
+   Lo stile del commento dipende dal tipo di file::
+
+      sorgenti C:	// SPDX-License-Identifier: <SPDX License Expression>
+      intestazioni C:	/* SPDX-License-Identifier: <SPDX License Expression> */
+      ASM:	/* SPDX-License-Identifier: <SPDX License Expression> */
+      scripts:	# SPDX-License-Identifier: <SPDX License Expression>
+      .rst:	.. SPDX-License-Identifier: <SPDX License Expression>
+      .dts{i}:	// SPDX-License-Identifier: <SPDX License Expression>
+
+   Se un particolare programma non dovesse riuscire a gestire lo stile
+   principale per i commenti, allora dev'essere usato il meccanismo accettato
+   dal programma.  Questo è il motivo per cui si ha "/\* \*/" nei file
+   d'intestazione C.  Notammo che 'ld' falliva nell'analizzare i commenti del
+   C++ nei file .lds che venivano prodotti.  Oggi questo è stato corretto,
+   ma ci sono in giro ancora vecchi programmi che non sono in grado di
+   gestire lo stile dei commenti del C++.
+
+|
+
+3. Sintassi:
+
+   Una <espressione di licenza SPDX> può essere scritta usando l'identificatore
+   SPDX della licenza come indicato nella lista di licenze SPDX, oppure la
+   combinazione di due identificatori SPDX separati da "WITH" per i casi
+   eccezionali. Quando si usano più licenze l'espressione viene formata da
+   sottoespressioni separate dalle parole chiave "AND", "OR" e racchiuse fra
+   parentesi tonde "(", ")".
+
+   Gli identificativi di licenza per licenze come la [L]GPL che si avvalgono
+   dell'opzione 'o successive' si formano aggiungendo alla fine il simbolo "+"
+   per indicare l'opzione 'o successive'.::
+
+      // SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+      // SPDX-License-Identifier: LGPL-2.1+
+
+   WITH dovrebbe essere usato quando sono necessarie delle modifiche alla
+   licenza.  Per esempio, la UAPI del kernel linux usa l'espressione::
+
+      // SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 WITH Linux-syscall-note
+      // SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ WITH Linux-syscall-note
+
+   Altri esempi di usi di WITH all'interno del kernel sono::
+
+      // SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 WITH mif-exception
+      // SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ WITH GCC-exception-2.0
+
+   Le eccezioni si possono usare solo in combinazione con identificatori di
+   licenza. Gli identificatori di licenza riconosciuti sono elencati nei
+   corrispondenti file d'eccezione. Per maggiori dettagli consultate
+   `Eccezioni`_ nel capitolo `Identificatori di licenza`_
+
+   La parola chiave OR dovrebbe essere usata solo quando si usa una doppia
+   licenza e solo una dev'essere scelta.  Per esempio, alcuni file dtsi sono
+   disponibili con doppia licenza::
+
+      // SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 OR BSD-3-Clause
+
+   Esempi dal kernel di espressioni per file licenziati con doppia licenza
+   sono::
+
+      // SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 OR MIT
+      // SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 OR BSD-2-Clause
+      // SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 OR Apache-2.0
+      // SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 OR MPL-1.1
+      // SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0 WITH Linux-syscall-note) OR MIT
+      // SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-1.0+ OR BSD-3-Clause OR OpenSSL
+
+   La parola chiave AND dovrebbe essere usata quando i termini di più licenze
+   si applicano ad un file. Per esempio, quando il codice viene preso da
+   un altro progetto il quale da i permessi per aggiungerlo nel kernel ma
+   richiede che i termini originali della licenza rimangano intatti::
+
+      // SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0 WITH Linux-syscall-note) AND MIT
+
+   Di seguito, un altro esempio dove entrambe i termini di licenza devono
+   essere rispettati::
+
+      // SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-1.0+ AND LGPL-2.1+
+
+Identificatori di licenza
+-------------------------
+
+Le licenze attualmente in uso, così come le licenze aggiunte al kernel, possono
+essere categorizzate in:
+
+1. _`Licenze raccomandate`:
+
+   Ovunque possibile le licenze qui indicate dovrebbero essere usate perché
+   pienamente compatibili e molto usate.  Queste licenze sono disponibile nei
+   sorgenti del kernel, nella cartella::
+
+     LICENSES/preferred/
+
+   I file in questa cartella contengono il testo completo della licenza e i
+   `Metatag`_.  Il nome di questi file è lo stesso usato come identificatore
+   di licenza SPDX e che deve essere usato nei file sorgenti.
+
+   Esempi::
+
+     LICENSES/preferred/GPL-2.0
+
+   Contiene il testo della seconda versione della licenza GPL e i metatag
+   necessari::
+
+     LICENSES/preferred/MIT
+
+   Contiene il testo della licenza MIT e i metatag necessari.
+
+   _`Metatag`:
+
+   I seguenti metatag devono essere presenti in un file di licenza:
+
+   - Valid-License-Identifier:
+
+     Una o più righe che dichiarano quali identificatori di licenza sono validi
+     all'interno del progetto per far riferimento alla licenza in questione.
+     Solitamente, questo è un unico identificatore valido, ma per esempio le
+     licenze che permettono l'opzione 'o successive' hanno due identificatori
+     validi.
+
+   - SPDX-URL:
+
+     L'URL della pagina SPDX che contiene informazioni aggiuntive riguardanti
+     la licenza.
+
+   - Usage-Guidance:
+
+     Testo in formato libero per dare suggerimenti agli utenti. Il testo deve
+     includere degli esempi su come usare gli identificatori di licenza SPDX
+     in un file sorgente in conformità con le linea guida in
+     `Sintassi degli identificatori di licenza`_.
+
+   - License-Text:
+
+     Tutto il testo che compare dopo questa etichetta viene trattato
+     come se fosse parte del testo originale della licenza.
+
+   Esempi::
+
+      Valid-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+      Valid-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+      SPDX-URL: https://spdx.org/licenses/GPL-2.0.html
+      Usage-Guide:
+        To use this license in source code, put one of the following SPDX
+	tag/value pairs into a comment according to the placement
+	guidelines in the licensing rules documentation.
+	For 'GNU General Public License (GPL) version 2 only' use:
+	  SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+	For 'GNU General Public License (GPL) version 2 or any later version' use:
+	  SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+      License-Text:
+        Full license text
+
+   ::
+
+      SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
+      SPDX-URL: https://spdx.org/licenses/MIT.html
+      Usage-Guide:
+	To use this license in source code, put the following SPDX
+	tag/value pair into a comment according to the placement
+	guidelines in the licensing rules documentation.
+	  SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
+      License-Text:
+        Full license text
+
+|
+
+2. Licenze deprecate:
+
+   Questo tipo di licenze dovrebbero essere usate solo per codice già esistente
+   o quando si prende codice da altri progetti.  Le licenze sono disponibili
+   nei sorgenti del kernel nella cartella::
+
+     LICENSES/deprecated/
+
+   I file in questa cartella contengono il testo completo della licenza e i
+   `Metatag`_.  Il nome di questi file è lo stesso usato come identificatore
+   di licenza SPDX e che deve essere usato nei file sorgenti.
+
+   Esempi::
+
+     LICENSES/deprecated/ISC
+
+   Contiene il testo della licenza Internet System Consortium e i suoi
+   metatag::
+
+     LICENSES/deprecated/GPL-1.0
+
+   Contiene il testo della versione 1 della licenza GPL e i suoi metatag.
+
+   Metatag:
+
+   I metatag necessari per le 'altre' ('other') licenze sono gli stessi
+   di usati per le `Licenze raccomandate`_.
+
+   Esempio del formato del file::
+
+      Valid-License-Identifier: ISC
+      SPDX-URL: https://spdx.org/licenses/ISC.html
+      Usage-Guide:
+        Usage of this license in the kernel for new code is discouraged
+        and it should solely be used for importing code from an already
+        existing project.
+        To use this license in source code, put the following SPDX
+        tag/value pair into a comment according to the placement
+        guidelines in the licensing rules documentation.
+          SPDX-License-Identifier: ISC
+      License-Text:
+        Full license text
+
+|
+
+3. Solo per doppie licenze
+
+   Queste licenze dovrebbero essere usate solamente per codice licenziato in
+   combinazione con un'altra licenza che solitamente è quella preferita.
+   Queste licenze sono disponibili nei sorgenti del kernel nella cartella::
+
+     LICENSES/dual
+
+   I file in questa cartella contengono il testo completo della rispettiva
+   licenza e i suoi `Metatags`_.  I nomi dei file sono identici agli
+   identificatori di licenza SPDX che dovrebbero essere usati nei file
+   sorgenti.
+
+   Esempi::
+
+     LICENSES/dual/MPL-1.1
+
+   Questo file contiene il testo della versione 1.1 della licenza *Mozilla
+   Pulic License* e i metatag necessari::
+
+     LICENSES/dual/Apache-2.0
+
+   Questo file contiene il testo della versione 2.0 della licenza Apache e i
+   metatag necessari.
+
+   Metatag:
+
+   I requisiti per le 'altre' ('*other*') licenze sono identici a quelli per le
+   `Licenze raccomandate`_.
+
+   Esempio del formato del file::
+
+   Valid-License-Identifier: MPL-1.1
+   SPDX-URL: https://spdx.org/licenses/MPL-1.1.html
+   Usage-Guide:
+     Do NOT use. The MPL-1.1 is not GPL2 compatible. It may only be used for
+     dual-licensed files where the other license is GPL2 compatible.
+     If you end up using this it MUST be used together with a GPL2 compatible
+     license using "OR".
+     To use the Mozilla Public License version 1.1 put the following SPDX
+     tag/value pair into a comment according to the placement guidelines in
+     the licensing rules documentation:
+   SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-1.1
+   License-Text:
+     Full license text
+
+|
+
+4. _`Eccezioni`:
+
+   Alcune licenze possono essere corrette con delle eccezioni che forniscono
+   diritti aggiuntivi.  Queste eccezioni sono disponibili nei sorgenti del
+   kernel nella cartella::
+
+     LICENSES/exceptions/
+
+   I file in questa cartella contengono il testo completo dell'eccezione e i
+   `Metatag per le eccezioni`_.
+
+   Esempi::
+
+      LICENSES/exceptions/Linux-syscall-note
+
+   Contiene la descrizione dell'eccezione per le chiamate di sistema Linux
+   così come documentato nel file COPYING del kernel Linux; questo viene usato
+   per i file d'intestazione per la UAPI.  Per esempio
+   /\* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 WITH Linux-syscall-note \*/::
+
+      LICENSES/exceptions/GCC-exception-2.0
+
+   Contiene la 'eccezione di linking' che permette di collegare qualsiasi
+   binario, indipendentemente dalla sua licenza, con un compilato il cui file
+   sorgente è marchiato con questa eccezione. Questo è necessario per creare
+   eseguibili dai sorgenti che non sono compatibili con la GPL.
+
+   _`Metatag per le eccezioni`:
+
+   Un file contenente un'eccezione deve avere i seguenti metatag:
+
+   - SPDX-Exception-Identifier:
+
+     Un identificatore d'eccezione che possa essere usato in combinazione con
+     un identificatore di licenza SPDX.
+
+   - SPDX-URL:
+
+     L'URL della pagina SPDX che contiene informazioni aggiuntive riguardanti
+     l'eccezione.
+
+   - SPDX-Licenses:
+
+     Una lista di licenze SPDX separate da virgola, che possono essere usate
+     con l'eccezione.
+
+   - Usage-Guidance:
+
+     Testo in formato libero per dare suggerimenti agli utenti. Il testo deve
+     includere degli esempi su come usare gli identificatori di licenza SPDX
+     in un file sorgente in conformità con le linea guida in
+     `Sintassi degli identificatori di licenza`_.
+
+   - Exception-Text:
+
+     Tutto il testo che compare dopo questa etichetta viene trattato
+     come se fosse parte del testo originale della licenza.
+
+   Esempi::
+
+      SPDX-Exception-Identifier: Linux-syscall-note
+      SPDX-URL: https://spdx.org/licenses/Linux-syscall-note.html
+      SPDX-Licenses: GPL-2.0, GPL-2.0+, GPL-1.0+, LGPL-2.0, LGPL-2.0+, LGPL-2.1, LGPL-2.1+
+      Usage-Guidance:
+        This exception is used together with one of the above SPDX-Licenses
+	to mark user-space API (uapi) header files so they can be included
+	into non GPL compliant user-space application code.
+        To use this exception add it with the keyword WITH to one of the
+	identifiers in the SPDX-Licenses tag:
+	  SPDX-License-Identifier: <SPDX-License> WITH Linux-syscall-note
+      Exception-Text:
+        Full exception text
+
+   ::
+
+      SPDX-Exception-Identifier: GCC-exception-2.0
+      SPDX-URL: https://spdx.org/licenses/GCC-exception-2.0.html
+      SPDX-Licenses: GPL-2.0, GPL-2.0+
+      Usage-Guidance:
+        The "GCC Runtime Library exception 2.0" is used together with one
+	of the above SPDX-Licenses for code imported from the GCC runtime
+	library.
+        To use this exception add it with the keyword WITH to one of the
+	identifiers in the SPDX-Licenses tag:
+	  SPDX-License-Identifier: <SPDX-License> WITH GCC-exception-2.0
+      Exception-Text:
+        Full exception text
+
+Per ogni identificatore di licenza SPDX e per le eccezioni dev'esserci un file
+nella sotto-cartella LICENSES.  Questo è necessario per permettere agli
+strumenti di effettuare verifiche (come checkpatch.pl), per avere le licenze
+disponibili per la lettura e per estrarre i diritti dai sorgenti, così come
+raccomandato da diverse organizzazioni FOSS, per esempio l'`iniziativa FSFE
+REUSE <https://reuse.software/>`_.
+
+_`MODULE_LICENSE`
+-----------------
+
+   I moduli del kernel necessitano di un'etichetta MODULE_LICENSE(). Questa
+   etichetta non sostituisce le informazioni sulla licenza del codice sorgente
+   (SPDX-License-Identifier) né fornisce informazioni che esprimono o
+   determinano l'esatta licenza sotto la quale viene rilasciato.
+
+   Il solo scopo di questa etichetta è quello di fornire sufficienti
+   informazioni al caricatore di moduli del kernel, o agli strumenti in spazio
+   utente, per capire se il modulo è libero o proprietario.
+
+   Le stringe di licenza valide per MODULE_LICENSE() sono:
+
+    ============================= =============================================
+    "GPL"			  Il modulo è licenziato con la GPL versione 2.
+				  Questo non fa distinzione fra GPL'2.0-only o
+				  GPL-2.0-or-later. L'esatta licenza può essere
+				  determinata solo leggendo i corrispondenti
+				  file sorgenti.
+
+    "GPL v2"			  Stesso significato di "GPL". Esiste per
+				  motivi storici.
+
+    "GPL and additional rights"   Questa è una variante che esiste per motivi
+				  storici che indica che i sorgenti di un
+				  modulo sono rilasciati sotto una variante
+				  della licenza GPL v2 e quella MIT. Per favore
+				  non utilizzatela per codice nuovo.
+
+    "Dual MIT/GPL"		  Questo è il modo corretto per esprimere il
+				  il fatto che il modulo è rilasciato con
+				  doppia licenza a scelta fra: una variante
+				  della GPL v2 o la licenza MIT.
+
+    "Dual BSD/GPL"		  Questo modulo è rilasciato con doppia licenza
+				  a scelta fra: una variante della GPL v2 o la
+				  licenza BSD. La variante esatta della licenza
+				  BSD può essere determinata solo attraverso i
+				  corrispondenti file sorgenti.
+
+    "Dual MPL/GPL"		  Questo modulo è rilasciato con doppia licenza
+				  a scelta fra: una variante della GPL v2 o la
+				  Mozilla Public License (MPL). La variante
+				  esatta della licenza MPL può essere
+				  determinata solo attraverso i corrispondenti
+				  file sorgenti.
+
+    "Proprietary"		  Questo modulo è rilasciato con licenza
+				  proprietaria. Questa stringa è solo per i
+				  moduli proprietari di terze parti e non può
+				  essere usata per quelli che risiedono nei
+				  sorgenti del kernel. I moduli etichettati in
+				  questo modo stanno contaminando il kernel e
+				  gli viene assegnato un flag 'P'; quando
+				  vengono caricati, il caricatore di moduli del
+				  kernel si rifiuterà di collegare questi
+				  moduli ai simboli che sono stati esportati
+				  con EXPORT_SYMBOL_GPL().
+
+    ============================= =============================================
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/maintainer-pgp-guide.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/maintainer-pgp-guide.rst
index 24a133f0a51d..276db0e37f43 100644
--- a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/maintainer-pgp-guide.rst
+++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/maintainer-pgp-guide.rst
@@ -1,13 +1,946 @@
 .. include:: ../disclaimer-ita.rst
 
 :Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/maintainer-pgp-guide.rst <pgpguide>`
+:Translator: Alessia Mantegazza <amantegazza@vaga.pv.it>
 
 .. _it_pgpguide:
 
+=========================================
+La guida a PGP per manutentori del kernel
+=========================================
+
+:Author: Konstantin Ryabitsev <konstantin@linuxfoundation.org>
+
+Questo documento è destinato agli sviluppatori del kernel Linux, in particolar
+modo ai manutentori. Contiene degli approfondimenti riguardo informazioni che
+sono state affrontate in maniera più generale nella sezione
+"`Protecting Code Integrity`_" pubblicata dalla Linux Foundation.
+Per approfondire alcuni argomenti trattati in questo documento è consigliato
+leggere il documento sopraindicato
+
+.. _`Protecting Code Integrity`: https://github.com/lfit/itpol/blob/master/protecting-code-integrity.md
+
+Il ruolo di PGP nello sviluppo del kernel Linux
+===============================================
+
+PGP aiuta ad assicurare l'integrità del codice prodotto dalla comunità
+di sviluppo del kernel e, in secondo luogo, stabilisce canali di comunicazione
+affidabili tra sviluppatori attraverso lo scambio di email firmate con PGP.
+
+Il codice sorgente del kernel Linux è disponibile principalmente in due
+formati:
+
+- repositori distribuiti di sorgenti (git)
+- rilasci periodici di istantanee (archivi tar)
+
+Sia i repositori git che gli archivi tar portano le firme PGP degli
+sviluppatori che hanno creato i rilasci ufficiali del kernel. Queste firme
+offrono una garanzia crittografica che le versioni scaricabili rese disponibili
+via kernel.org, o altri portali, siano identiche a quelle che gli sviluppatori
+hanno sul loro posto di lavoro. A tal scopo:
+
+- i repositori git forniscono firme PGP per ogni tag
+- gli archivi tar hanno firme separate per ogni archivio
+
+.. _it_devs_not_infra:
+
+Fidatevi degli sviluppatori e non dell'infrastruttura
+-----------------------------------------------------
+
+Fin dal 2011, quando i sistemi di kernel.org furono compromessi, il principio
+generale del progetto Kernel Archives è stato quello di assumere che qualsiasi
+parte dell'infrastruttura possa essere compromessa in ogni momento. Per questa
+ragione, gli amministratori hanno intrapreso deliberatemene dei passi per
+enfatizzare che la fiducia debba risiedere sempre negli sviluppatori e mai nel
+codice che gestisce l'infrastruttura, indipendentemente da quali che siano le
+pratiche di sicurezza messe in atto.
+
+Il principio sopra indicato è la ragione per la quale è necessaria questa
+guida. Vogliamo essere sicuri che il riporre la fiducia negli sviluppatori
+non sia fatto semplicemente per incolpare qualcun'altro per future falle di
+sicurezza. L'obiettivo è quello di fornire una serie di linee guida che gli
+sviluppatori possano seguire per creare un ambiente di lavoro sicuro e
+salvaguardare le chiavi PGP usate nello stabilire l'integrità del kernel Linux
+stesso.
+
+.. _it_pgp_tools:
+
+Strumenti PGP
+=============
+
+Usare GnuPG v2
+--------------
+
+La vostra distribuzione potrebbe avere già installato GnuPG, dovete solo
+verificare che stia utilizzando la versione 2.x e non la serie 1.4 --
+molte distribuzioni forniscono entrambe, di base il comando ''gpg''
+invoca GnuPG v.1. Per controllate usate::
+
+    $ gpg --version | head -n1
+
+Se visualizzate ``gpg (GnuPG) 1.4.x``, allora state usando GnuPG v.1.
+Provate il comando ``gpg2`` (se non lo avete, potreste aver bisogno
+di installare il pacchetto gnupg2)::
+
+    $ gpg2 --version | head -n1
+
+Se visualizzate  ``gpg (GnuPG) 2.x.x``, allora siete pronti a partire.
+Questa guida assume che abbiate la versione 2.2.(o successiva) di GnuPG.
+Se state usando la versione 2.0, alcuni dei comandi indicati qui non
+funzioneranno, in questo caso considerate un aggiornamento all'ultima versione,
+la 2.2. Versioni di gnupg-2.1.11 e successive dovrebbero essere compatibili
+per gli obiettivi di questa guida.
+
+Se avete entrambi i comandi: ``gpg`` e ``gpg2``, assicuratevi di utilizzare
+sempre la versione V2, e non quella vecchia. Per evitare errori potreste creare
+un alias::
+
+    $ alias gpg=gpg2
+
+Potete mettere questa opzione nel vostro  ``.bashrc`` in modo da essere sicuri.
+
+Configurare le opzioni di gpg-agent
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+L'agente GnuPG è uno strumento di aiuto che partirà automaticamente ogni volta
+che userete il comando ``gpg`` e funzionerà in background con l'obiettivo di
+individuare la passphrase. Ci sono due opzioni che dovreste conoscere
+per personalizzare la scadenza della passphrase nella cache:
+
+- ``default-cache-ttl`` (secondi): Se usate ancora la stessa chiave prima
+  che il time-to-live termini, il conto alla rovescia si resetterà per un
+  altro periodo. Di base è di 600 (10 minuti).
+
+- ``max-cache-ttl`` (secondi): indipendentemente da quanto sia recente l'ultimo
+  uso della chiave da quando avete inserito la passphrase, se il massimo
+  time-to-live è scaduto, dovrete reinserire nuovamente la passphrase.
+  Di base è di 30 minuti.
+
+Se ritenete entrambe questi valori di base troppo corti (o troppo lunghi),
+potete creare il vostro file ``~/.gnupg/gpg-agent.conf`` ed impostare i vostri
+valori::
+
+    # set to 30 minutes for regular ttl, and 2 hours for max ttl
+    default-cache-ttl 1800
+    max-cache-ttl 7200
+
+.. note::
+
+    Non è più necessario far partire l'agente gpg manualmente all'inizio della
+    vostra sessione. Dovreste controllare i file rc per rimuovere tutto ciò che
+    riguarda vecchie le versioni di GnuPG, poiché potrebbero non svolgere più
+    bene il loro compito.
+
+Impostare un *refresh* con cronjob
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Potreste aver bisogno di rinfrescare regolarmente il vostro portachiavi in
+modo aggiornare le chiavi pubbliche di altre persone, lavoro che è svolto
+al meglio con un cronjob giornaliero::
+
+    @daily /usr/bin/gpg2 --refresh >/dev/null 2>&1
+
+Controllate il percorso assoluto del vostro comando ``gpg`` o ``gpg2`` e usate
+il comando ``gpg2`` se per voi ``gpg`` corrisponde alla versione GnuPG v.1.
+
+.. _it_master_key:
+
+Proteggere la vostra chiave PGP primaria
 ========================================
-Guida a PGP per i manutentori del kernel
-========================================
+
+Questa guida parte dal presupposto che abbiate già una chiave PGP che usate
+per lo sviluppo del kernel Linux. Se non ne avete ancora una, date uno sguardo
+al documento "`Protecting Code Integrity`_" che abbiamo menzionato prima.
+
+Dovreste inoltre creare una nuova chiave se quella attuale è inferiore a 2048
+bit (RSA).
+
+Chiave principale o sottochiavi
+-------------------------------
+
+Le sottochiavi sono chiavi PGP totalmente indipendenti, e sono collegate alla
+chiave principale attraverso firme certificate. È quindi importante
+comprendere i seguenti punti:
+
+1. Non ci sono differenze tecniche tra la chiave principale e la sottochiave.
+2. In fesa di creazione, assegniamo limitazioni funzionali ad ogni chiave
+   assegnando capacità specifiche.
+3. Una chiave PGP può avere 4 capacità:
+
+   - **[S]** può essere usata per firmare
+   - **[E]** può essere usata per criptare
+   - **[A]** può essere usata per autenticare
+   - **[C]** può essere usata per certificare altre chiavi
+
+4. Una singola chiave può avere più capacità
+5. Una sottochiave è completamente indipendente dalla chiave principale.
+   Un messaggio criptato con la sottochiave non può essere decrittato con
+   quella principale. Se perdete la vostra sottochiave privata, non può
+   essere rigenerata in nessun modo da quella principale.
+
+La chiave con capacità **[C]** (certify) è identificata come la chiave
+principale perché è l'unica che può essere usata per indicare la relazione
+con altre chiavi. Solo la chiave **[C]** può essere usata per:
+
+- Aggiungere o revocare altre chiavi (sottochiavi) che hanno capacità S/E/A
+- Aggiungere, modificare o eliminare le identità (unids) associate alla chiave
+- Aggiungere o modificare la data di termine di sé stessa o di ogni sottochiave
+- Firmare le chiavi di altre persone a scopo di creare una rete di fiducia
+
+Di base, alla creazione di nuove chiavi, GnuPG genera quanto segue:
+
+- Una chiave madre che porta sia la capacità di certificazione che quella
+  di firma (**[SC]**)
+- Una sottochiave separata con capacità di criptaggio (**[E]**)
+
+Se avete usato i parametri di base per generare la vostra chiave, quello
+sarà il risultato. Potete verificarlo utilizzando ``gpg --list-secret-keys``,
+per esempio::
+
+    sec   rsa2048 2018-01-23 [SC] [expires: 2020-01-23]
+          000000000000000000000000AAAABBBBCCCCDDDD
+    uid           [ultimate] Alice Dev <adev@kernel.org>
+    ssb   rsa2048 2018-01-23 [E] [expires: 2020-01-23]
+
+Qualsiasi chiave che abbia la capacità **[C]** è la vostra chiave madre,
+indipendentemente da quali altre capacità potreste averle assegnato.
+
+La lunga riga sotto la voce ``sec`` è la vostra impronta digitale --
+negli esempi che seguono, quando vedere ``[fpr]`` ci si riferisce a questa
+stringa di 40 caratteri.
+
+Assicuratevi che la vostra passphrase sia forte
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+GnuPG utilizza le passphrases per criptare la vostra chiave privata prima
+di salvarla sul disco. In questo modo, anche se il contenuto della vostra
+cartella ``.gnupg`` venisse letto o trafugato nella sia interezza, gli
+attaccanti non potrebbero comunque utilizzare le vostre chiavi private senza
+aver prima ottenuto la passphrase per decriptarle.
+
+È assolutamente essenziale che le vostre chiavi private siano protette da
+una passphrase forte. Per impostarla o cambiarla, usate::
+
+    $ gpg --change-passphrase [fpr]
+
+Create una sottochiave di firma separata
+----------------------------------------
+
+Il nostro obiettivo è di proteggere la chiave primaria spostandola su un
+dispositivo sconnesso dalla rete, dunque se avete solo una chiave combinata
+**[SC]** allora dovreste creare una sottochiave di firma separata::
+
+    $ gpg --quick-add-key [fpr] ed25519 sign
+
+Ricordate di informare il keyserver del vostro cambiamento, cosicché altri
+possano ricevere la vostra nuova sottochiave::
+
+    $ gpg --send-key [fpr]
+
+.. note:: Supporto ECC in GnuPG
+    GnuPG 2.1 e successivi supportano pienamente *Elliptic Curve Cryptography*,
+    con la possibilità di combinare sottochiavi ECC con le tradizionali chiavi
+    primarie RSA. Il principale vantaggio della crittografia ECC è che è molto
+    più veloce da calcolare e crea firme più piccole se confrontate byte per
+    byte con le chiavi RSA a più di 2048 bit. A meno che non pensiate di
+    utilizzare un dispositivo smartcard che non supporta le operazioni ECC, vi
+    raccomandiamo ti creare sottochiavi di firma ECC per il vostro lavoro col
+    kernel.
+
+    Se per qualche ragione preferite rimanere con sottochiavi RSA, nel comando
+    precedente, sostituite "ed25519" con "rsa2048".
+
+Copia di riserva della chiave primaria per gestire il recupero da disastro
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+Maggiori sono le firme di altri sviluppatori che vengono applicate alla vostra,
+maggiori saranno i motivi per avere una copia di riserva che non sia digitale,
+al fine di effettuare un recupero da disastro.
+
+Il modo migliore per creare una copia fisica della vostra chiave privata è
+l'uso del programma ``paperkey``. Consultate ``man paperkey`` per maggiori
+dettagli sul formato dell'output ed i suoi punti di forza rispetto ad altre
+soluzioni. Paperkey dovrebbe essere già pacchettizzato per la maggior parte
+delle distribuzioni.
+
+Eseguite il seguente comando per creare una copia fisica di riserva della
+vostra chiave privata::
+
+    $ gpg --export-secret-key [fpr] | paperkey -o /tmp/key-backup.txt
+
+Stampate il file (o fate un pipe direttamente verso lpr), poi prendete
+una penna e scrivete la passphare sul margine del foglio.  **Questo è
+caldamente consigliato** perché la copia cartacea è comunque criptata con
+la passphrase, e se mai doveste cambiarla non vi ricorderete qual'era al
+momento della creazione di quella copia -- *garantito*.
+
+Mettete la copia cartacea e la passphrase scritta a mano in una busta e
+mettetela in un posto sicuro e ben protetto, preferibilmente fuori casa,
+magari in una cassetta di sicurezza in banca.
+
+.. note::
+
+    Probabilmente la vostra stampante non è più quello stupido dispositivo
+    connesso alla porta parallela, ma dato che il suo output è comunque
+    criptato con la passphrase, eseguire la stampa in un sistema "cloud"
+    moderno dovrebbe essere comunque relativamente sicuro. Un'opzione potrebbe
+    essere quella di cambiare la passphrase della vostra chiave primaria
+    subito dopo aver finito con paperkey.
+
+Copia di riserva di tutta la cartella GnuPG
+-------------------------------------------
 
 .. warning::
 
-    TODO ancora da tradurre
+    **!!!Non saltate questo passo!!!**
+
+Quando avete bisogno di recuperare le vostre chiavi PGP è importante avere
+una copia di riserva pronta all'uso. Questo sta su un diverso piano di
+prontezza rispetto al recupero da disastro che abbiamo risolto con
+``paperkey``. Vi affiderete a queste copie esterne quando dovreste usare la
+vostra chiave Certify -- ovvero quando fate modifiche alle vostre chiavi o
+firmate le chiavi di altre persone ad una conferenza o ad un gruppo d'incontro.
+
+Incominciate con una piccola chiavetta di memoria USB (preferibilmente due)
+che userete per le copie di riserva. Dovrete criptarle usando LUKS -- fate
+riferimento alla documentazione della vostra distribuzione per capire come
+fare.
+
+Per la passphrase di criptazione, potete usare la stessa della vostra chiave
+primaria.
+
+Una volta che il processo di criptazione è finito, reinserite il disco USB ed
+assicurativi che venga montato correttamente. Copiate interamente la cartella
+``.gnugp`` nel disco criptato::
+
+    $ cp -a ~/.gnupg /media/disk/foo/gnupg-backup
+
+Ora dovreste verificare che tutto continui a funzionare::
+
+    $ gpg --homedir=/media/disk/foo/gnupg-backup --list-key [fpr]
+
+Se non vedete errori, allora dovreste avere fatto tutto con successo.
+Smontate il disco USB, etichettatelo per bene di modo da evitare di
+distruggerne il contenuto non appena vi serve una chiavetta USB a caso, ed
+infine mettetelo in un posto sicuro -- ma non troppo lontano, perché vi servirà
+di tanto in tanto per modificare le identità, aggiungere o revocare
+sottochiavi, o firmare le chiavi di altre persone.
+
+Togliete la chiave primaria dalla vostra home
+---------------------------------------------
+
+I file che si trovano nella vostra cartella home non sono poi così ben protetti
+come potreste pensare. Potrebbero essere letti o trafugati in diversi modi:
+
+- accidentalmente quando fate una rapida copia della cartella home per
+  configurare una nuova postazione
+- da un amministratore di sistema negligente o malintenzionato
+- attraverso copie di riserva insicure
+- attraverso malware installato in alcune applicazioni (browser, lettori PDF,
+  eccetera)
+- attraverso coercizione quando attraversate confini internazionali
+
+Proteggere la vostra chiave con una buona passphare aiuta notevolmente a
+ridurre i rischi elencati qui sopra, ma le passphrase possono essere scoperte
+attraverso i keylogger, il shoulder-surfing, o altri modi. Per questi motivi,
+nella configurazione si raccomanda di rimuove la chiave primaria dalla vostra
+cartella home e la si archivia su un dispositivo disconnesso.
+
+.. warning::
+
+    Per favore, fate riferimento alla sezione precedente e assicuratevi
+    di aver fatto una copia di riserva totale della cartella GnuPG. Quello
+    che stiamo per fare renderà la vostra chiave inutile se non avete delle
+    copie di riserva utilizzabili!
+
+Per prima cosa, identificate il keygrip della vostra chiave primaria::
+
+    $ gpg --with-keygrip --list-key [fpr]
+
+L'output assomiglierà a questo::
+
+    pub   rsa2048 2018-01-24 [SC] [expires: 2020-01-24]
+          000000000000000000000000AAAABBBBCCCCDDDD
+          Keygrip = 1111000000000000000000000000000000000000
+    uid           [ultimate] Alice Dev <adev@kernel.org>
+    sub   rsa2048 2018-01-24 [E] [expires: 2020-01-24]
+          Keygrip = 2222000000000000000000000000000000000000
+    sub   ed25519 2018-01-24 [S]
+          Keygrip = 3333000000000000000000000000000000000000
+
+Trovate la voce keygrid che si trova sotto alla riga ``pub`` (appena sotto
+all'impronta digitale della chiave primaria). Questo corrisponderà direttamente
+ad un file nella cartella ``~/.gnupg``::
+
+    $ cd ~/.gnupg/private-keys-v1.d
+    $ ls
+    1111000000000000000000000000000000000000.key
+    2222000000000000000000000000000000000000.key
+    3333000000000000000000000000000000000000.key
+
+Quello che dovrete fare è rimuovere il file .key che corrisponde al keygrip
+della chiave primaria::
+
+    $ cd ~/.gnupg/private-keys-v1.d
+    $ rm 1111000000000000000000000000000000000000.key
+
+Ora, se eseguite il comando ``--list-secret-keys``, vedrete che la chiave
+primaria non compare più (il simbolo ``#`` indica che non è disponibile)::
+
+    $ gpg --list-secret-keys
+    sec#  rsa2048 2018-01-24 [SC] [expires: 2020-01-24]
+          000000000000000000000000AAAABBBBCCCCDDDD
+    uid           [ultimate] Alice Dev <adev@kernel.org>
+    ssb   rsa2048 2018-01-24 [E] [expires: 2020-01-24]
+    ssb   ed25519 2018-01-24 [S]
+
+Dovreste rimuovere anche i file ``secring.gpg`` che si trovano nella cartella
+``~/.gnupg``, in quanto rimasugli delle versioni precedenti di GnuPG.
+
+Se non avete la cartella "private-keys-v1.d"
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Se non avete la cartella ``~/.gnupg/private-keys-v1.d``, allora le vostre
+chiavi segrete sono ancora salvate nel vecchio file ``secring.gpg`` usato
+da GnuPG v1. Effettuare una qualsiasi modifica alla vostra chiave, come
+cambiare la passphare o aggiungere una sottochiave, dovrebbe convertire
+automaticamente il vecchio formato ``secring.gpg``nel nuovo
+``private-keys-v1.d``.
+
+Una volta che l'avete fatto, assicuratevi di rimuovere il file ``secring.gpg``,
+che continua a contenere la vostra chiave privata.
+
+.. _it_smartcards:
+
+Spostare le sottochiavi in un apposito dispositivo criptato
+===========================================================
+
+Nonostante la chiave primaria sia ora al riparo da occhi e mani indiscrete,
+le sottochiavi si trovano ancora nella vostra cartella home. Chiunque riesca
+a mettere le sue mani su quelle chiavi riuscirà a decriptare le vostre
+comunicazioni o a falsificare le vostre firme (se conoscono la passphrase).
+Inoltre, ogni volta che viene fatta un'operazione con GnuPG, le chiavi vengono
+caricate nella memoria di sistema e potrebbero essere rubate con l'uso di
+malware sofisticati (pensate a Meltdown e a Spectre).
+
+Il miglior modo per proteggere le proprie chiave è di spostarle su un
+dispositivo specializzato in grado di effettuare operazioni smartcard.
+
+I benefici di una smartcard
+---------------------------
+
+Una smartcard contiene un chip crittografico che è capace di immagazzinare
+le chiavi private ed effettuare operazioni crittografiche direttamente sulla
+carta stessa. Dato che la chiave non lascia mai la smartcard, il sistema
+operativo usato sul computer non sarà in grado di accedere alle chiavi.
+Questo è molto diverso dai dischi USB criptati che abbiamo usato allo scopo di
+avere una copia di riserva sicura -- quando il dispositivo USB è connesso e
+montato, il sistema operativo potrà accedere al contenuto delle chiavi private.
+
+L'uso di un disco USB criptato non può sostituire le funzioni di un dispositivo
+capace di operazioni di tipo smartcard.
+
+Dispositivi smartcard disponibili
+---------------------------------
+
+A meno che tutti i vostri computer dispongano di lettori smartcard, il modo
+più semplice è equipaggiarsi di un dispositivo USB specializzato che
+implementi le funzionalità delle smartcard.  Sul mercato ci sono diverse
+soluzioni disponibili:
+
+- `Nitrokey Start`_: è Open hardware e Free Software, è basata sul progetto
+  `GnuK`_ della FSIJ. Ha il supporto per chiavi ECC, ma meno funzionalità di
+  sicurezza (come la resistenza alla manomissione o alcuni attacchi ad un
+  canale laterale).
+- `Nitrokey Pro`_: è simile alla Nitrokey Start, ma è più resistente alla
+  manomissione e offre più funzionalità di sicurezza, ma l'ECC.
+- `Yubikey 4`_: l'hardware e il software sono proprietari, ma è più economica
+  della  Nitrokey Pro ed è venduta anche con porta USB-C il che è utile con i
+  computer portatili più recenti. In aggiunta, offre altre funzionalità di
+  sicurezza come FIDO, U2F, ma non l'ECC
+
+`Su LWN c'è una buona recensione`_ dei modelli elencati qui sopra e altri.
+Se volete usare chiavi ECC, la vostra migliore scelta sul mercato è la
+Nitrokey Start.
+
+.. _`Nitrokey Start`: https://shop.nitrokey.com/shop/product/nitrokey-start-6
+.. _`Nitrokey Pro`: https://shop.nitrokey.com/shop/product/nitrokey-pro-3
+.. _`Yubikey 4`: https://www.yubico.com/product/yubikey-4-series/
+.. _Gnuk: http://www.fsij.org/doc-gnuk/
+.. _`Su LWN c'è una buona recensione`: https://lwn.net/Articles/736231/
+
+Configurare il vostro dispositivo smartcard
+-------------------------------------------
+
+Il vostro dispositivo smartcard dovrebbe iniziare a funzionare non appena
+lo collegate ad un qualsiasi computer Linux moderno. Potete verificarlo
+eseguendo::
+
+    $ gpg --card-status
+
+Se vedete tutti i dettagli della smartcard, allora ci siamo. Sfortunatamente,
+affrontare tutti i possibili motivi per cui le cose potrebbero non funzionare
+non è lo scopo di questa guida. Se avete problemi nel far funzionare la carta
+con GnuPG, cercate aiuto attraverso i soliti canali di supporto.
+
+Per configurare la vostra smartcard, dato che non c'è una via facile dalla
+riga di comando, dovrete usate il menu di GnuPG::
+
+    $ gpg --card-edit
+    [...omitted...]
+    gpg/card> admin
+    Admin commands are allowed
+    gpg/card> passwd
+
+Dovreste impostare il PIN dell'utente (1), quello dell'amministratore (3) e il
+codice di reset (4). Assicuratevi di annotare e salvare questi codici in un
+posto sicuro -- specialmente il PIN dell'amministratore e il codice di reset
+(che vi permetterà di azzerare completamente la smartcard).  Il PIN
+dell'amministratore viene usato così raramente che è inevitabile dimenticarselo
+se non lo si annota.
+
+Tornando al nostro menu, potete impostare anche altri valori (come il nome,
+il sesso, informazioni d'accesso, eccetera), ma non sono necessari e aggiunge
+altre informazioni sulla carta che potrebbero trapelare in caso di smarrimento.
+
+.. note::
+
+    A dispetto del nome "PIN", né il PIN utente né quello dell'amministratore
+    devono essere esclusivamente numerici.
+
+Spostare le sottochiavi sulla smartcard
+---------------------------------------
+
+Uscite dal menu (usando "q") e salverete tutte le modifiche. Poi, spostiamo
+tutte le sottochiavi sulla smartcard. Per la maggior parte delle operazioni
+vi serviranno sia la passphrase della chiave PGP che il PIN
+dell'amministratore::
+
+    $ gpg --edit-key [fpr]
+
+    Secret subkeys are available.
+
+    pub  rsa2048/AAAABBBBCCCCDDDD
+         created: 2018-01-23  expires: 2020-01-23  usage: SC
+         trust: ultimate      validity: ultimate
+    ssb  rsa2048/1111222233334444
+         created: 2018-01-23  expires: never       usage: E
+    ssb  ed25519/5555666677778888
+         created: 2017-12-07  expires: never       usage: S
+    [ultimate] (1). Alice Dev <adev@kernel.org>
+
+    gpg>
+
+Usando ``--edit-key`` si tornerà alla modalità menu e noterete che
+la lista delle chiavi è leggermente diversa. Da questo momento in poi,
+tutti i comandi saranno eseguiti nella modalità menu, come indicato
+da ``gpg>``.
+
+Per prima cosa, selezioniamo la chiave che verrà messa sulla carta --
+potete farlo digitando ``key 1`` (è la prima della lista, la sottochiave
+**[E]**)::
+
+    gpg> key 1
+
+Nel'output dovreste vedere ``ssb*`` associato alla chiave **[E]**. Il simbolo
+``*`` indica che la chiave è stata "selezionata". Funziona come un
+interruttore, ovvero se scrivete nuovamente ``key 1``, il simbolo ``*`` sparirà
+e la chiave non sarà più selezionata.
+
+Ora, spostiamo la chiave sulla smartcard::
+
+    gpg> keytocard
+    Please select where to store the key:
+       (2) Encryption key
+    Your selection? 2
+
+Dato che è la nostra chiave  **[E]**, ha senso metterla nella sezione criptata.
+Quando confermerete la selezione, vi verrà chiesta la passphrase della vostra
+chiave PGP, e poi il PIN dell'amministratore. Se il comando ritorna senza
+errori, allora la vostra chiave è stata spostata con successo.
+
+**Importante**: digitate nuovamente ``key 1`` per deselezionare la prima chiave
+e selezionate la seconda chiave **[S]** con ``key 2``::
+
+    gpg> key 1
+    gpg> key 2
+    gpg> keytocard
+    Please select where to store the key:
+       (1) Signature key
+       (3) Authentication key
+    Your selection? 1
+
+Potete usare la chiave **[S]** sia per firmare che per autenticare, ma vogliamo
+che sia nella sezione di firma, quindi scegliete (1). Ancora una volta, se il
+comando ritorna senza errori, allora l'operazione è avvenuta con successo::
+
+    gpg> q
+    Save changes? (y/N) y
+
+Salvando le modifiche cancellerete dalla vostra cartella home tutte le chiavi
+che avete spostato sulla carta (ma questo non è un problema, perché abbiamo
+fatto delle copie di sicurezza nel caso in cui dovessimo configurare una
+nuova smartcard).
+
+Verificare che le chiavi siano state spostate
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Ora, se doveste usare l'opzione ``--list-secret-keys``, vedrete una
+sottile differenza nell'output::
+
+    $ gpg --list-secret-keys
+    sec#  rsa2048 2018-01-24 [SC] [expires: 2020-01-24]
+          000000000000000000000000AAAABBBBCCCCDDDD
+    uid           [ultimate] Alice Dev <adev@kernel.org>
+    ssb>  rsa2048 2018-01-24 [E] [expires: 2020-01-24]
+    ssb>  ed25519 2018-01-24 [S]
+
+Il simbolo ``>`` in ``ssb>`` indica che la sottochiave è disponibile solo
+nella smartcard. Se tornate nella vostra cartella delle chiavi segrete e
+guardate al suo contenuto, noterete che i file ``.key`` sono stati sostituiti
+con degli stub::
+
+    $ cd ~/.gnupg/private-keys-v1.d
+    $ strings *.key | grep 'private-key'
+
+Per indicare che i file sono solo degli stub e che in realtà il contenuto è
+sulla smartcard, l'output dovrebbe mostrarvi ``shadowed-private-key``.
+
+Verificare che la smartcard funzioni
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Per verificare che la smartcard funzioni come dovuto, potete creare
+una firma::
+
+    $ echo "Hello world" | gpg --clearsign > /tmp/test.asc
+    $ gpg --verify /tmp/test.asc
+
+Col primo comando dovrebbe chiedervi il PIN della smartcard, e poi dovrebbe
+mostrare "Good signature" dopo l'esecuzione di ``gpg --verify``.
+
+Complimenti, siete riusciti a rendere estremamente difficile il furto della
+vostra identità digitale di sviluppatore.
+
+Altre operazioni possibili con GnuPG
+------------------------------------
+
+Segue un breve accenno ad alcune delle operazioni più comuni che dovrete
+fare con le vostre chiavi PGP.
+
+Montare il disco con la chiave primaria
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Vi servirà la vostra chiave principale per tutte le operazioni che seguiranno,
+per cui per prima cosa dovrete accedere ai vostri backup e dire a GnuPG di
+usarli::
+
+    $ export GNUPGHOME=/media/disk/foo/gnupg-backup
+    $ gpg --list-secret-keys
+
+Dovete assicurarvi di vedere ``sec`` e non ``sec#`` nell'output del programma
+(il simbolo ``#`` significa che la chiave non è disponibile e che state ancora
+utilizzando la vostra solita cartella di lavoro).
+
+Estendere la data di scadenza di una chiave
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+La chiave principale ha una data di scadenza di 2 anni dal momento della sua
+creazione. Questo per motivi di sicurezza e per rendere obsolete le chiavi
+che, eventualmente, dovessero sparire dai keyserver.
+
+Per estendere di un anno, dalla data odierna, la scadenza di una vostra chiave,
+eseguite::
+
+    $ gpg --quick-set-expire [fpr] 1y
+
+Se per voi è più facile da memorizzare, potete anche utilizzare una data
+specifica (per esempio, il vostro compleanno o capodanno)::
+
+    $ gpg --quick-set-expire [fpr] 2020-07-01
+
+Ricordatevi di inviare l'aggiornamento ai keyserver::
+
+    $ gpg --send-key [fpr]
+
+Aggiornare la vostra cartella di lavoro dopo ogni modifica
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Dopo aver fatto delle modifiche alle vostre chiavi usando uno spazio a parte,
+dovreste importarle nella vostra cartella di lavoro abituale::
+
+    $ gpg --export | gpg --homedir ~/.gnupg --import
+    $ unset GNUPGHOME
+
+
+Usare PGP con Git
+=================
+
+Una delle caratteristiche fondanti di Git è la sua natura decentralizzata --
+una volta che il repositorio è stato clonato sul vostro sistema, avete la
+storia completa del progetto, inclusi i suoi tag, i commit ed i rami. Tuttavia,
+con i centinaia di repositori clonati che ci sono in giro, come si fa a
+verificare che la loro copia di linux.git non è stata manomessa da qualcuno?
+
+Oppure, cosa succede se viene scoperta una backdoor nel codice e la riga
+"Autore" dice che sei stato tu, mentre tu sei abbastanza sicuro di
+`non averci niente a che fare`_?
+
+Per risolvere entrambi i problemi, Git ha introdotto l'integrazione con PGP.
+I tag firmati dimostrano che il repositorio è integro assicurando che il suo
+contenuto è lo stesso che si trova sulle macchine degli sviluppatori che hanno
+creato il tag; mentre i commit firmati rendono praticamente impossibile
+ad un malintenzionato di impersonarvi senza avere accesso alle vostre chiavi
+PGP.
+
+.. _`non averci niente a che fare`: https://github.com/jayphelps/git-blame-someone-else
+
+Configurare git per usare la vostra chiave PGP
+----------------------------------------------
+
+Se avete solo una chiave segreta nel vostro portachiavi, allora non avete nulla
+da fare in più dato che sarà la vostra chiave di base. Tuttavia, se doveste
+avere più chiavi segrete, potete dire a git quale dovrebbe usare (``[fpg]``
+è la vostra impronta digitale)::
+
+    $ git config --global user.signingKey [fpr]
+
+**IMPORTANTE**: se avete una comando dedicato per ``gpg2``, allora dovreste
+dire a git di usare sempre quello piuttosto che il vecchio comando ``gpg``::
+
+    $ git config --global gpg.program gpg2
+
+Come firmare i tag
+------------------
+
+Per creare un tag firmato, passate l'opzione ``-s`` al comando tag::
+
+    $ git tag -s [tagname]
+
+La nostra raccomandazione è quella di firmare sempre i tag git, perché
+questo permette agli altri sviluppatori di verificare che il repositorio
+git dal quale stanno prendendo il codice non è stato alterato intenzionalmente.
+
+Come verificare i tag firmati
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Per verificare un tag firmato, potete usare il comando ``verify-tag``::
+
+    $ git verify-tag [tagname]
+
+Se state prendendo un tag da un fork del repositorio del progetto, git
+dovrebbe verificare automaticamente la firma di quello che state prendendo
+e vi mostrerà il risultato durante l'operazione di merge::
+
+    $ git pull [url] tags/sometag
+
+Il merge conterrà qualcosa di simile::
+
+    Merge tag 'sometag' of [url]
+
+    [Tag message]
+
+    # gpg: Signature made [...]
+    # gpg: Good signature from [...]
+
+Se state verificando il tag di qualcun altro, allora dovrete importare
+la loro chiave PGP. Fate riferimento alla sezione ":ref:`it_verify_identities`"
+che troverete più avanti.
+
+Configurare git per firmare sempre i tag con annotazione
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Se state creando un tag con annotazione è molto probabile che vogliate
+firmarlo. Per imporre a git di firmare sempre un tag con annotazione,
+dovete impostare la seguente opzione globale::
+
+    $ git config --global tag.forceSignAnnotated true
+
+Come usare commit firmati
+-------------------------
+
+Creare dei commit firmati è facile, ma è molto più difficile utilizzarli
+nello sviluppo del kernel linux per via del fatto che ci si affida alle
+liste di discussione e questo modo di procedere non mantiene le firme PGP
+nei commit. In aggiunta, quando si usa *rebase* nel proprio repositorio
+locale per allinearsi al kernel anche le proprie firme PGP verranno scartate.
+Per questo motivo, la maggior parte degli sviluppatori del kernel non si
+preoccupano troppo di firmare i propri commit ed ignoreranno quelli firmati
+che si trovano in altri repositori usati per il proprio lavoro.
+
+Tuttavia, se avete il vostro repositorio di lavoro disponibile al pubblico
+su un qualche servizio di hosting git (kernel.org, infradead.org, ozlabs.org,
+o altri), allora la raccomandazione è di firmare tutti i vostri commit
+anche se gli sviluppatori non ne beneficeranno direttamente.
+
+Vi raccomandiamo di farlo per i seguenti motivi:
+
+1. Se dovesse mai esserci la necessità di fare delle analisi forensi o
+   tracciare la provenienza di un codice, anche sorgenti mantenuti
+   esternamente che hanno firme PGP sui commit avranno un certo valore a
+   questo scopo.
+2. Se dovesse mai capitarvi di clonare il vostro repositorio locale (per
+   esempio dopo un danneggiamento del disco), la firma vi permetterà di
+   verificare l'integrità del repositorio prima di riprendere il lavoro.
+3. Se qualcuno volesse usare *cherry-pick* sui vostri commit, allora la firma
+   permetterà di verificare l'integrità dei commit prima di applicarli.
+
+Creare commit firmati
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Per creare un commit firmato, dovete solamente aggiungere l'opzione ``-S``
+al comando ``git commit`` (si usa la lettera maiuscola per evitare
+conflitti con un'altra opzione)::
+
+    $ git commit -S
+
+Configurare git per firmare sempre i commit
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Potete dire a git di firmare sempre i commit::
+
+    git config --global commit.gpgSign true
+
+.. note::
+
+    Assicuratevi di aver configurato ``gpg-agent`` prima di abilitare
+    questa opzione.
+
+.. _it_verify_identities:
+
+Come verificare l'identità degli sviluppatori del kernel
+========================================================
+
+Firmare i tag e i commit è facile, ma come si fa a verificare che la chiave
+usata per firmare qualcosa appartenga davvero allo sviluppatore e non ad un
+impostore?
+
+Configurare l'auto-key-retrieval usando WKD e DANE
+--------------------------------------------------
+
+Se non siete ancora in possesso di una vasta collezione di chiavi pubbliche
+di altri sviluppatori, allora potreste iniziare il vostro portachiavi
+affidandovi ai servizi di auto-scoperta e auto-recupero. GnuPG può affidarsi
+ad altre tecnologie di delega della fiducia, come DNSSEC e TLS, per sostenervi
+nel caso in cui iniziare una propria rete di fiducia da zero sia troppo
+scoraggiante.
+
+Aggiungete il seguente testo al vostro file ``~/.gnupg/gpg.conf``::
+
+    auto-key-locate wkd,dane,local
+    auto-key-retrieve
+
+La *DNS-Based Authentication of Named Entities* ("DANE") è un metodo
+per la pubblicazione di chiavi pubbliche su DNS e per renderle sicure usando
+zone firmate con DNSSEC. Il *Web Key Directory* ("WKD") è un metodo
+alternativo che usa https a scopo di ricerca. Quando si usano DANE o WKD
+per la ricerca di chiavi pubbliche, GnuPG validerà i certificati DNSSEC o TLS
+prima di aggiungere al vostro portachiavi locale le eventuali chiavi trovate.
+
+Kernel.org pubblica la WKD per tutti gli sviluppatori che hanno un account
+kernel.org. Una volta che avete applicato le modifiche al file ``gpg.conf``,
+potrete auto-recuperare le chiavi di Linus Torvalds e Greg Kroah-Hartman
+(se non le avete già)::
+
+    $ gpg --locate-keys torvalds@kernel.org gregkh@kernel.org
+
+Se avete un account kernel.org, al fine di rendere più utile l'uso di WKD
+da parte di altri sviluppatori del kernel, dovreste `aggiungere alla vostra
+chiave lo UID di kernel.org`_.
+
+.. _`aggiungere alla vostra chiave lo UID di kernel.org`: https://korg.wiki.kernel.org/userdoc/mail#adding_a_kernelorg_uid_to_your_pgp_key
+
+Web of Trust (WOT) o Trust on First Use (TOFU)
+----------------------------------------------
+
+PGP incorpora un meccanismo di delega della fiducia conosciuto come
+"Web of Trust". Di base, questo è un tentativo di sostituire la necessità
+di un'autorità certificativa centralizzata tipica del mondo HTTPS/TLS.
+Invece di avere svariati produttori software che decidono chi dovrebbero
+essere le entità di certificazione di cui dovreste fidarvi, PGP lascia
+la responsabilità ad ogni singolo utente.
+
+Sfortunatamente, solo poche persone capiscono come funziona la rete di fiducia.
+Nonostante sia un importante aspetto della specifica OpenPGP, recentemente
+le versioni di GnuPG (2.2 e successive) hanno implementato un meccanisco
+alternativo chiamato "Trust on First Use" (TOFU). Potete pensare a TOFU come
+"ad un approccio all fidicia simile ad SSH". In SSH, la prima volta che vi
+connettete ad un sistema remoto, l'impronta digitale della chiave viene
+registrata e ricordata. Se la chiave dovesse cambiare in futuro, il programma
+SSH vi avviserà e si rifiuterà di connettersi, obbligandovi a prendere una
+decisione circa la fiducia che riponete nella nuova chiave. In modo simile,
+la prima volta che importate la chiave PGP di qualcuno, si assume sia valida.
+Se ad un certo punto GnuPG trova un'altra chiave con la stessa identità,
+entrambe, la vecchia e la nuova, verranno segnate come invalide e dovrete
+verificare manualmente quale tenere.
+
+Vi raccomandiamo di usare il meccanisco TOFU+PGP (che è la nuova configurazione
+di base di GnuPG v2). Per farlo, aggiungete (o modificate) l'impostazione
+``trust-model`` in ``~/.gnupg/gpg.conf``::
+
+    trust-model tofu+pgp
+
+Come usare i keyserver in sicurezza
+-----------------------------------
+Se ottenete l'errore "No public key" quando cercate di validate il tag di
+qualcuno, allora dovreste cercare quella chiave usando un keyserver. È
+importante tenere bene a mente che non c'è alcuna garanzia che la chiave
+che avete recuperato da un keyserver PGP appartenga davvero alla persona
+reale -- è progettato così. Dovreste usare il Web of Trust per assicurarvi
+che la chiave sia valida.
+
+Come mantenere il Web of Trust va oltre gli scopi di questo documento,
+semplicemente perché farlo come si deve richiede sia sforzi che perseveranza
+che tendono ad andare oltre al livello di interesse della maggior parte degli
+esseri umani. Qui di seguito alcuni rapidi suggerimenti per aiutarvi a ridurre
+il rischio di importare chiavi maligne.
+
+Primo, diciamo che avete provato ad eseguire ``git verify-tag`` ma restituisce
+un errore dicendo che la chiave non è stata trovata::
+
+    $ git verify-tag sunxi-fixes-for-4.15-2
+    gpg: Signature made Sun 07 Jan 2018 10:51:55 PM EST
+    gpg:                using RSA key DA73759BF8619E484E5A3B47389A54219C0F2430
+    gpg:                issuer "wens@...org"
+    gpg: Can't check signature: No public key
+
+Cerchiamo nel keyserver per maggiori informazioni sull'impronta digitale
+della chiave (l'impronta digitale, probabilmente, appartiene ad una
+sottochiave, dunque non possiamo usarla direttamente senza trovare prima
+l'ID della chiave primaria associata ad essa)::
+
+    $ gpg --search DA73759BF8619E484E5A3B47389A54219C0F2430
+    gpg: data source: hkp://keys.gnupg.net
+    (1) Chen-Yu Tsai <wens@...org>
+          4096 bit RSA key C94035C21B4F2AEB, created: 2017-03-14, expires: 2019-03-15
+    Keys 1-1 of 1 for "DA73759BF8619E484E5A3B47389A54219C0F2430".  Enter number(s), N)ext, or Q)uit > q
+
+Localizzate l'ID della chiave primaria, nel nostro esempio
+``C94035C21B4F2AEB``. Ora visualizzate le chiavi di Linus Torvalds
+che avete nel vostro portachiavi::
+
+    $ gpg --list-key torvalds@kernel.org
+    pub   rsa2048 2011-09-20 [SC]
+          ABAF11C65A2970B130ABE3C479BE3E4300411886
+    uid           [ unknown] Linus Torvalds <torvalds@kernel.org>
+    sub   rsa2048 2011-09-20 [E]
+
+Poi, aprite il `PGP pathfinder`_. Nel campo "From", incollate l'impronta
+digitale della chiave di Linus Torvalds che si vede nell'output qui sopra.
+Nel campo "to", incollate il key-id della chiave sconosciuta che avete
+trovato con ``gpg --search``, e poi verificare il risultato:
+
+- `Finding paths to Linus`_
+
+Se trovate un paio di percorsi affidabili è un buon segno circa la validità
+della chiave. Ora, potete aggiungerla al vostro portachiavi dal keyserver::
+
+    $ gpg --recv-key C94035C21B4F2AEB
+
+Questa procedura non è perfetta, e ovviamente state riponendo la vostra
+fiducia nell'amministratore del servizio *PGP Pathfinder* sperando che non
+sia malintenzionato (infatti, questo va contro :ref:`it_devs_not_infra`).
+Tuttavia, se mantenete con cura la vostra rete di fiducia sarà un deciso
+miglioramento rispetto alla cieca fiducia nei keyserver.
+
+.. _`PGP pathfinder`: https://pgp.cs.uu.nl/
+.. _`Finding paths to Linus`: https://pgp.cs.uu.nl/paths/79BE3E4300411886/to/C94035C21B4F2AEB.html
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/stable-api-nonsense.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/stable-api-nonsense.rst
index d4fa4abf8dd3..cdfc509b8566 100644
--- a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/stable-api-nonsense.rst
+++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/stable-api-nonsense.rst
@@ -1,13 +1,209 @@
 .. include:: ../disclaimer-ita.rst
 
 :Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/stable-api-nonsense.rst <stable_api_nonsense>`
-
+:Translator: Federico Vaga <federico.vaga@vaga.pv.it>
 
 .. _it_stable_api_nonsense:
 
 L'interfaccia dei driver per il kernel Linux
 ============================================
 
-.. warning::
+(tutte le risposte alle vostre domande e altro)
+
+Greg Kroah-Hartman <greg@kroah.com>
+
+Questo è stato scritto per cercare di spiegare perché Linux **non ha
+un'interfaccia binaria, e non ha nemmeno un'interfaccia stabile**.
+
+.. note::
+
+   Questo articolo parla di interfacce **interne al kernel**, non delle
+   interfacce verso lo spazio utente.
+
+   L'interfaccia del kernel verso lo spazio utente è quella usata dai
+   programmi, ovvero le chiamate di sistema.  Queste interfacce sono **molto**
+   stabili nel tempo e non verranno modificate.  Ho vecchi programmi che sono
+   stati compilati su un kernel 0.9 (circa) e tuttora funzionano sulle versioni
+   2.6 del kernel.  Queste interfacce sono quelle che gli utenti e i
+   programmatori possono considerare stabili.
+
+Riepilogo generale
+------------------
+
+Pensate di volere un'interfaccia del kernel stabile, ma in realtà non la
+volete, e nemmeno sapete di non volerla.  Quello che volete è un driver
+stabile che funzioni, e questo può essere ottenuto solo se il driver si trova
+nei sorgenti del kernel.  Ci sono altri vantaggi nell'avere il proprio driver
+nei sorgenti del kernel, ognuno dei quali hanno reso Linux un sistema operativo
+robusto, stabile e maturo; questi sono anche i motivi per cui avete scelto
+Linux.
+
+Introduzione
+------------
+
+Solo le persone un po' strambe vorrebbero scrivere driver per il kernel con
+la costante preoccupazione per i cambiamenti alle interfacce interne.  Per il
+resto del mondo, queste interfacce sono invisibili o non di particolare
+interesse.
+
+Innanzitutto, non tratterò **alcun** problema legale riguardante codice
+chiuso, nascosto, avvolto, blocchi binari, o qualsia altra cosa che descrive
+driver che non hanno i propri sorgenti rilasciati con licenza GPL.  Per favore
+fate riferimento ad un avvocato per qualsiasi questione legale, io sono un
+programmatore e perciò qui vi parlerò soltanto delle questioni tecniche (non
+per essere superficiali sui problemi legali, sono veri e dovete esserne a
+conoscenza in ogni circostanza).
+
+Dunque, ci sono due tematiche principali: interfacce binarie del kernel e
+interfacce stabili nei sorgenti.  Ognuna dipende dall'altra, ma discuteremo
+prima delle cose binarie per toglierle di mezzo.
+
+Interfaccia binaria del kernel
+------------------------------
+
+Supponiamo d'avere un'interfaccia stabile nei sorgenti del kernel, di
+conseguenza un'interfaccia binaria dovrebbe essere anche'essa stabile, giusto?
+Sbagliato.  Prendete in considerazione i seguenti fatti che riguardano il
+kernel Linux:
+
+  - A seconda della versione del compilatore C che state utilizzando, diverse
+    strutture dati del kernel avranno un allineamento diverso, e possibilmente
+    un modo diverso di includere le funzioni (renderle inline oppure no).
+    L'organizzazione delle singole funzioni non è poi così importante, ma la
+    spaziatura (*padding*) nelle strutture dati, invece, lo è.
+
+  - In base alle opzioni che sono state selezionate per generare il kernel,
+    un certo numero di cose potrebbero succedere:
+
+      - strutture dati differenti potrebbero contenere campi differenti
+      - alcune funzioni potrebbero non essere implementate (per esempio,
+        alcuni *lock* spariscono se compilati su sistemi mono-processore)
+      - la memoria interna del kernel può essere allineata in differenti modi
+        a seconda delle opzioni di compilazione.
+
+  - Linux funziona su una vasta gamma di architetture di processore. Non esiste
+    alcuna possibilità che il binario di un driver per un'architettura funzioni
+    correttamente su un'altra.
+
+Alcuni di questi problemi possono essere risolti compilando il proprio modulo
+con la stessa identica configurazione del kernel, ed usando la stessa versione
+del compilatore usato per compilare il kernel.  Questo è sufficiente se volete
+fornire un modulo per uno specifico rilascio su una specifica distribuzione
+Linux.  Ma moltiplicate questa singola compilazione per il numero di
+distribuzioni Linux e il numero dei rilasci supportati da quest'ultime e vi
+troverete rapidamente in un incubo fatto di configurazioni e piattaforme
+hardware (differenti processori con differenti opzioni); dunque, anche per il
+singolo rilascio di un modulo, dovreste creare differenti versioni dello
+stesso.
+
+Fidatevi, se tenterete questa via, col tempo, diventerete pazzi; l'ho imparato
+a mie spese molto tempo fa...
+
+
+Interfaccia stabile nei sorgenti del kernel
+-------------------------------------------
+
+Se parlate con le persone che cercano di mantenere aggiornato un driver per
+Linux ma che non si trova nei sorgenti, allora per queste persone l'argomento
+sarà "ostico".
+
+Lo sviluppo del kernel Linux è continuo e viaggia ad un ritmo sostenuto, e non
+rallenta mai.  Perciò, gli sviluppatori del kernel trovano bachi nelle
+interfacce attuali, o trovano modi migliori per fare le cose.  Se le trovano,
+allora le correggeranno per migliorarle.  In questo frangente, i nomi delle
+funzioni potrebbero cambiare, le strutture dati potrebbero diventare più grandi
+o più piccole, e gli argomenti delle funzioni potrebbero essere ripensati.
+Se questo dovesse succedere, nello stesso momento, tutte le istanze dove questa
+interfaccia viene utilizzata verranno corrette, garantendo che tutto continui
+a funzionare senza problemi.
+
+Portiamo ad esempio l'interfaccia interna per il sottosistema USB che ha subito
+tre ristrutturazioni nel corso della sua vita.  Queste ristrutturazioni furono
+fatte per risolvere diversi problemi:
+
+  - È stato fatto un cambiamento da un flusso di dati sincrono ad uno
+    asincrono.  Questo ha ridotto la complessità di molti driver e ha
+    aumentato la capacità di trasmissione di tutti i driver fino a raggiungere
+    quasi la velocità massima possibile.
+  - È stato fatto un cambiamento nell'allocazione dei pacchetti da parte del
+    sottosistema USB per conto dei driver, cosicché ora i driver devono fornire
+    più informazioni al sottosistema USB al fine di correggere un certo numero
+    di stalli.
+
+Questo è completamente l'opposto di quello che succede in alcuni sistemi
+operativi proprietari che hanno dovuto mantenere, nel tempo, il supporto alle
+vecchie interfacce USB.  I nuovi sviluppatori potrebbero usare accidentalmente
+le vecchie interfacce e sviluppare codice nel modo sbagliato, portando, di
+conseguenza, all'instabilità del sistema.
+
+In entrambe gli scenari, gli sviluppatori hanno ritenuto che queste importanti
+modifiche erano necessarie, e quindi le hanno fatte con qualche sofferenza.
+Se Linux avesse assicurato di mantenere stabile l'interfaccia interna, si
+sarebbe dovuto procedere alla creazione di una nuova, e quelle vecchie, e
+mal funzionanti, avrebbero dovuto ricevere manutenzione, creando lavoro
+aggiuntivo per gli sviluppatori del sottosistema USB.  Dato che gli
+sviluppatori devono dedicare il proprio tempo a questo genere di lavoro,
+chiedergli di dedicarne dell'altro, senza benefici, magari gratuitamente, non
+è contemplabile.
+
+Le problematiche relative alla sicurezza sono molto importanti per Linux.
+Quando viene trovato un problema di sicurezza viene corretto in breve tempo.
+A volte, per prevenire il problema di sicurezza, si sono dovute cambiare
+delle interfacce interne al kernel.  Quando è successo, allo stesso tempo,
+tutti i driver che usavano quelle interfacce sono stati aggiornati, garantendo
+la correzione definitiva del problema senza doversi preoccupare di rivederlo
+per sbaglio in futuro.  Se non si fossero cambiate le interfacce interne,
+sarebbe stato impossibile correggere il problema e garantire che non si sarebbe
+più ripetuto.
+
+Nel tempo le interfacce del kernel subiscono qualche ripulita.  Se nessuno
+sta più usando un'interfaccia, allora questa verrà rimossa.  Questo permette
+al kernel di rimanere il più piccolo possibile, e garantisce che tutte le
+potenziali interfacce sono state verificate nel limite del possibile (le
+interfacce inutilizzate sono impossibili da verificare).
+
+
+Cosa fare
+---------
+
+Dunque, se avete un driver per il kernel Linux che non si trova nei sorgenti
+principali del kernel, come sviluppatori, cosa dovreste fare?  Rilasciare un
+file binario del driver per ogni versione del kernel e per ogni distribuzione,
+è un incubo; inoltre, tenere il passo con tutti i cambiamenti del kernel è un
+brutto lavoro.
+
+Semplicemente, fate sì che il vostro driver per il kernel venga incluso nei
+sorgenti principali (ricordatevi, stiamo parlando di driver rilasciati secondo
+una licenza compatibile con la GPL; se il vostro codice non ricade in questa
+categoria: buona fortuna, arrangiatevi, siete delle sanguisughe)
+
+Se il vostro driver è nei sorgenti del kernel e un'interfaccia cambia, il
+driver verrà corretto immediatamente dalla persona che l'ha modificata.  Questo
+garantisce che sia sempre possibile compilare il driver, che funzioni, e tutto
+con un minimo sforzo da parte vostra.
+
+Avere il proprio driver nei sorgenti principali del kernel ha i seguenti
+vantaggi:
+
+  - La qualità del driver aumenterà e i costi di manutenzione (per lo
+    sviluppatore originale) diminuiranno.
+  - Altri sviluppatori aggiungeranno nuove funzionalità al vostro driver.
+  - Altri persone troveranno e correggeranno bachi nel vostro driver.
+  - Altri persone troveranno degli aggiustamenti da fare al vostro driver.
+  - Altri persone aggiorneranno il driver quando è richiesto da un cambiamento
+    di un'interfaccia.
+  - Il driver sarà automaticamente reso disponibile in tutte le distribuzioni
+    Linux senza dover chiedere a nessuna di queste di aggiungerlo.
+
+Dato che Linux supporta più dispositivi di qualsiasi altro sistema operativo,
+e che girano su molti più tipi di processori di qualsiasi altro sistema
+operativo; ciò dimostra che questo modello di sviluppo qualcosa di giusto,
+dopo tutto, lo fa :)
+
+
+
+------
 
-    TODO ancora da tradurre
+Dei ringraziamenti vanno a Randy Dunlap, Andrew Morton, David Brownell,
+Hanna Linder, Robert Love, e Nishanth Aravamudan per la loro revisione
+e per i loro commenti sulle prime bozze di questo articolo.
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst
index 6fa5ce9c3572..48e88e5ad2c5 100644
--- a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst
+++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst
@@ -1,12 +1,202 @@
 .. include:: ../disclaimer-ita.rst
 
 :Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst <stable_kernel_rules>`
+:Translator: Federico Vaga <federico.vaga@vaga.pv.it>
 
 .. _it_stable_kernel_rules:
 
 Tutto quello che volevate sapere sui rilasci -stable di Linux
 ==============================================================
 
-.. warning::
+Regole sul tipo di patch che vengono o non vengono accettate nei sorgenti
+"-stable":
 
-    TODO ancora da tradurre
+ - Ovviamente dev'essere corretta e verificata.
+ - Non dev'essere più grande di 100 righe, incluso il contesto.
+ - Deve correggere una cosa sola.
+ - Deve correggere un baco vero che sta disturbando gli utenti (non cose del
+   tipo "Questo potrebbe essere un problema ...").
+ - Deve correggere un problema di compilazione (ma non per cose già segnate
+   con CONFIG_BROKEN), un kernel oops, un blocco, una corruzione di dati,
+   un vero problema di sicurezza, o problemi del tipo "oh, questo non va bene".
+   In pratica, qualcosa di critico.
+ - Problemi importanti riportati dagli utenti di una distribuzione potrebbero
+   essere considerati se correggono importanti problemi di prestazioni o di
+   interattività.  Dato che questi problemi non sono così ovvi e la loro
+   correzione ha un'alta probabilità d'introdurre una regressione, dovrebbero
+   essere sottomessi solo dal manutentore della distribuzione includendo un
+   link, se esiste, ad un rapporto su bugzilla, e informazioni aggiuntive
+   sull'impatto che ha sugli utenti.
+ - Non deve correggere problemi relativi a una "teorica sezione critica",
+   a meno che non venga fornita anche una spiegazione su come questa si
+   possa verificare.
+ - Non deve includere alcuna correzione "banale" (correzioni grammaticali,
+   pulizia dagli spazi bianchi, eccetera).
+ - Deve rispettare le regole scritte in
+   :ref:`Documentation/translation/it_IT/process/submitting-patches.rst <it_submittingpatches>`
+ - Questa patch o una equivalente deve esistere già nei sorgenti principali di
+   Linux
+
+
+Procedura per sottomettere patch per i sorgenti -stable
+-------------------------------------------------------
+
+ - Se la patch contiene modifiche a dei file nelle cartelle net/ o drivers/net,
+   allora seguite le linee guida descritte in
+   :ref:`Documentation/translation/it_IT/networking/netdev-FAQ.rst <it_netdev-FAQ>`;
+   ma solo dopo aver verificato al seguente indirizzo che la patch non sia
+   già in coda:
+   https://patchwork.ozlabs.org/bundle/davem/stable/?series=&submitter=&state=*&q=&archive=
+ - Una patch di sicurezza non dovrebbero essere gestite (solamente) dal processo
+   di revisione -stable, ma dovrebbe seguire le procedure descritte in
+   :ref:`Documentation/translations/it_IT/admin-guide/security-bugs.rst <it_securitybugs>`.
+
+
+Per tutte le altre sottomissioni, scegliere una delle seguenti procedure
+------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+.. _it_option_1:
+
+Opzione 1
+*********
+
+Per far sì che una patch venga automaticamente inclusa nei sorgenti stabili,
+aggiungete l'etichetta
+
+.. code-block:: none
+
+     Cc: stable@vger.kernel.org
+
+nell'area dedicata alla firme. Una volta che la patch è stata inclusa, verrà
+applicata anche sui sorgenti stabili senza che l'autore o il manutentore
+del sottosistema debba fare qualcosa.
+
+.. _it_option_2:
+
+Opzione 2
+*********
+
+Dopo che la patch è stata inclusa nei sorgenti Linux, inviate una mail a
+stable@vger.kernel.org includendo: il titolo della patch, l'identificativo
+del commit, il perché pensate che debba essere applicata, e in quale versione
+del kernel la vorreste vedere.
+
+.. _it_option_3:
+
+Opzione 3
+*********
+
+Inviata la patch, dopo aver verificato che rispetta le regole descritte in
+precedenza, a stable@vger.kernel.org.  Dovete annotare nel changelog
+l'identificativo del commit nei sorgenti principali, così come la versione
+del kernel nel quale vorreste vedere la patch.
+
+L':ref:`it_option_1` è fortemente raccomandata; è il modo più facile e usato.
+L':ref:`it_option_2` e l':ref:`it_option_3` sono più utili quando, al momento
+dell'inclusione dei sorgenti principali, si ritiene che non debbano essere
+incluse anche in quelli stabili (per esempio, perché si crede che si dovrebbero
+fare più verifiche per eventuali regressioni). L':ref:`it_option_3` è
+particolarmente utile se la patch ha bisogno di qualche modifica per essere
+applicata ad un kernel più vecchio (per esempio, perché nel frattempo l'API è
+cambiata).
+
+Notate che per l':ref:`it_option_3`, se la patch è diversa da quella nei
+sorgenti principali (per esempio perché è stato necessario un lavoro di
+adattamento) allora dev'essere ben documentata e giustificata nella descrizione
+della patch.
+
+L'identificativo del commit nei sorgenti principali dev'essere indicato sopra
+al messaggio della patch, così:
+
+.. code-block:: none
+
+    commit <sha1> upstream.
+
+In aggiunta, alcune patch inviate attraverso l':ref:`it_option_1` potrebbero
+dipendere da altre che devo essere incluse. Questa situazione può essere
+indicata nel seguente modo nell'area dedicata alle firme:
+
+.. code-block:: none
+
+     Cc: <stable@vger.kernel.org> # 3.3.x: a1f84a3: sched: Check for idle
+     Cc: <stable@vger.kernel.org> # 3.3.x: 1b9508f: sched: Rate-limit newidle
+     Cc: <stable@vger.kernel.org> # 3.3.x: fd21073: sched: Fix affinity logic
+     Cc: <stable@vger.kernel.org> # 3.3.x
+     Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@elte.hu>
+
+La sequenza di etichette ha il seguente significato:
+
+.. code-block:: none
+
+     git cherry-pick a1f84a3
+     git cherry-pick 1b9508f
+     git cherry-pick fd21073
+     git cherry-pick <this commit>
+
+Inoltre, alcune patch potrebbero avere dei requisiti circa la versione del
+kernel. Questo può essere indicato usando il seguente formato nell'area
+dedicata alle firme:
+
+.. code-block:: none
+
+     Cc: <stable@vger.kernel.org> # 3.3.x
+
+L'etichetta ha il seguente significato:
+
+.. code-block:: none
+
+     git cherry-pick <this commit>
+
+per ogni sorgente "-stable" che inizia con la versione indicata.
+
+Dopo la sottomissione:
+
+ - Il mittente riceverà un ACK quando la patch è stata accettata e messa in
+   coda, oppure un NAK se la patch è stata rigettata.  A seconda degli impegni
+   degli sviluppatori, questa risposta potrebbe richiedere alcuni giorni.
+ - Se accettata, la patch verrà aggiunta alla coda -stable per essere
+   revisionata dal altri sviluppatori e dal principale manutentore del
+   sottosistema.
+
+
+Ciclo di una revisione
+----------------------
+
+ - Quando i manutentori -stable decidono di fare un ciclo di revisione, le
+   patch vengono mandate al comitato per la revisione, ai manutentori soggetti
+   alle modifiche delle patch (a meno che il mittente non sia anche il
+   manutentore di quell'area del kernel) e in CC: alla lista di discussione
+   linux-kernel.
+ - La commissione per la revisione ha 48 ore per dare il proprio ACK o NACK
+   alle patch.
+ - Se una patch viene rigettata da un membro della commissione, o un membro
+   della lista linux-kernel obietta la bontà della patch, sollevando problemi
+   che i manutentori ed i membri non avevano compreso, allora la patch verrà
+   rimossa dalla coda.
+ - Alla fine del ciclo di revisione tutte le patch che hanno ricevuto l'ACK
+   verranno aggiunte per il prossimo rilascio -stable, e successivamente
+   questo nuovo rilascio verrà fatto.
+ - Le patch di sicurezza verranno accettate nei sorgenti -stable direttamente
+   dalla squadra per la sicurezza del kernel, e non passerà per il normale
+   ciclo di revisione. Contattate la suddetta squadra per maggiori dettagli
+   su questa procedura.
+
+Sorgenti
+--------
+
+ - La coda delle patch, sia quelle già applicate che in fase di revisione,
+   possono essere trovate al seguente indirizzo:
+
+	https://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/stable/stable-queue.git
+
+ - Il rilascio definitivo, e marchiato, di tutti i kernel stabili può essere
+   trovato in rami distinti per versione al seguente indirizzo:
+
+	https://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/stable/linux-stable.git
+
+
+Comitato per la revisione
+-------------------------
+
+ - Questo comitato è fatto di sviluppatori del kernel che si sono offerti
+   volontari per questo lavoro, e pochi altri che non sono proprio volontari.
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/submit-checklist.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/submit-checklist.rst
index b6b4dd94a660..70e65a7b3620 100644
--- a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/submit-checklist.rst
+++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/submit-checklist.rst
@@ -1,12 +1,131 @@
 .. include:: ../disclaimer-ita.rst
 
 :Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/submit-checklist.rst <submitchecklist>`
+:Translator: Federico Vaga <federico.vaga@vaga.pv.it>
 
 .. _it_submitchecklist:
 
-Lista delle cose da fare per inviare una modifica al kernel Linux
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Lista delle verifiche da fare prima di inviare una patch per il kernel Linux
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 
-.. warning::
+Qui troverete una lista di cose che uno sviluppatore dovrebbe fare per
+vedere le proprie patch accettate più rapidamente.
 
-    TODO ancora da tradurre
+Tutti questi punti integrano la documentazione fornita riguardo alla
+sottomissione delle patch, in particolare
+:ref:`Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/submitting-patches.rst <it_submittingpatches>`.
+
+1) Se state usando delle funzionalità del kernel allora includete (#include)
+   i file che le dichiarano/definiscono.  Non dipendente dal fatto che un file
+   d'intestazione include anche quelli usati da voi.
+
+2) Compilazione pulita:
+
+  a) con le opzioni ``CONFIG`` negli stati ``=y``, ``=m`` e ``=n``. Nessun
+     avviso/errore di ``gcc`` e nessun avviso/errore dal linker.
+
+  b) con ``allnoconfig``, ``allmodconfig``
+
+  c) quando si usa ``O=builddir``
+
+3) Compilare per diverse architetture di processore usando strumenti per
+   la cross-compilazione o altri.
+
+4) Una buona architettura per la verifica della cross-compilazione è la ppc64
+   perché tende ad usare ``unsigned long`` per le quantità a 64-bit.
+
+5) Controllate lo stile del codice della vostra patch secondo le direttive
+   scritte in :ref:`Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/coding-style.rst <it_codingstyle>`.
+   Prima dell'invio della patch, usate il verificatore di stile
+   (``script/checkpatch.pl``) per scovare le violazioni più semplici.
+   Dovreste essere in grado di giustificare tutte le violazioni rimanenti nella
+   vostra patch.
+
+6) Le opzioni ``CONFIG``, nuove o modificate, non scombussolano il menu
+   di configurazione e sono preimpostate come disabilitate a meno che non
+   soddisfino i criteri descritti in ``Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt``
+   alla punto "Voci di menu: valori predefiniti".
+
+7) Tutte le nuove opzioni ``Kconfig`` hanno un messaggio di aiuto.
+
+8) La patch è stata accuratamente revisionata rispetto alle più importanti
+   configurazioni ``Kconfig``.  Questo è molto difficile da fare
+   correttamente - un buono lavoro di testa sarà utile.
+
+9) Verificare con sparse.
+
+10) Usare ``make checkstack`` e ``make namespacecheck`` e correggere tutti i
+    problemi rilevati.
+
+    .. note::
+
+       ``checkstack`` non evidenzia esplicitamente i problemi, ma una funzione
+       che usa più di 512 byte sullo stack è una buona candidata per una
+       correzione.
+
+11) Includete commenti :ref:`kernel-doc <kernel_doc>` per documentare API
+    globali del kernel.  Usate ``make htmldocs`` o ``make pdfdocs`` per
+    verificare i commenti :ref:`kernel-doc <kernel_doc>` ed eventualmente
+    correggerli.
+
+12) La patch è stata verificata con le seguenti opzioni abilitate
+    contemporaneamente: ``CONFIG_PREEMPT``, ``CONFIG_DEBUG_PREEMPT``,
+    ``CONFIG_DEBUG_SLAB``, ``CONFIG_DEBUG_PAGEALLOC``, ``CONFIG_DEBUG_MUTEXES``,
+    ``CONFIG_DEBUG_SPINLOCK``, ``CONFIG_DEBUG_ATOMIC_SLEEP``,
+    ``CONFIG_PROVE_RCU`` e ``CONFIG_DEBUG_OBJECTS_RCU_HEAD``.
+
+13) La patch è stata compilata e verificata in esecuzione con, e senza,
+    le opzioni ``CONFIG_SMP`` e ``CONFIG_PREEMPT``.
+
+14) Se la patch ha effetti sull'IO dei dischi, eccetera: allora dev'essere
+    verificata con, e senza, l'opzione ``CONFIG_LBDAF``.
+
+15) Tutti i percorsi del codice sono stati verificati con tutte le funzionalità
+    di lockdep abilitate.
+
+16) Tutti i nuovi elementi in ``/proc`` sono documentati in ``Documentation/``.
+
+17) Tutti i nuovi parametri d'avvio del kernel sono documentati in
+    ``Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.rst``.
+
+18) Tutti i nuovi parametri dei moduli sono documentati con ``MODULE_PARM_DESC()``.
+
+19) Tutte le nuove interfacce verso lo spazio utente sono documentate in
+    ``Documentation/ABI/``.  Leggete ``Documentation/ABI/README`` per maggiori
+    informazioni.  Le patch che modificano le interfacce utente dovrebbero
+    essere inviate in copia anche a linux-api@vger.kernel.org.
+
+20) Verifica che il kernel passi con successo ``make headers_check``
+
+21) La patch è stata verificata con l'iniezione di fallimenti in slab e
+    nell'allocazione di pagine.  Vedere ``Documentation/fault-injection/``.
+
+    Se il nuovo codice è corposo, potrebbe essere opportuno aggiungere
+    l'iniezione di fallimenti specifici per il sottosistema.
+
+22) Il nuovo codice è stato compilato con ``gcc -W`` (usate
+    ``make EXTRA_CFLAGS=-W``).  Questo genererà molti avvisi, ma è ottimo
+    per scovare bachi come  "warning: comparison between signed and unsigned".
+
+23) La patch è stata verificata dopo essere stata inclusa nella serie di patch
+    -mm; questo al fine di assicurarsi che continui a funzionare assieme a
+    tutte le altre patch in coda e i vari cambiamenti nei sottosistemi VM, VFS
+    e altri.
+
+24) Tutte le barriere di sincronizzazione {per esempio, ``barrier()``,
+    ``rmb()``, ``wmb()``} devono essere accompagnate da un commento nei
+    sorgenti che ne spieghi la logica: cosa fanno e perché.
+
+25) Se la patch aggiunge nuove chiamate ioctl, allora aggiornate
+    ``Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt``.
+
+26) Se il codice che avete modificato dipende o usa una qualsiasi interfaccia o
+    funzionalità del kernel che è associata a uno dei seguenti simboli
+    ``Kconfig``, allora verificate che il kernel compili con diverse
+    configurazioni dove i simboli sono disabilitati e/o ``=m`` (se c'è la
+    possibilità) [non tutti contemporaneamente, solo diverse combinazioni
+    casuali]:
+
+    ``CONFIG_SMP``, ``CONFIG_SYSFS``, ``CONFIG_PROC_FS``, ``CONFIG_INPUT``,
+    ``CONFIG_PCI``, ``CONFIG_BLOCK``, ``CONFIG_PM``, ``CONFIG_MAGIC_SYSRQ``,
+    ``CONFIG_NET``, ``CONFIG_INET=n`` (ma l'ultimo con ``CONFIG_NET=y``).
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/submitting-drivers.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/submitting-drivers.rst
index 16df950ef808..dadd77e47613 100644
--- a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/submitting-drivers.rst
+++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/submitting-drivers.rst
@@ -1,12 +1,16 @@
 .. include:: ../disclaimer-ita.rst
 
 :Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/submitting-drivers.rst <submittingdrivers>`
+:Translator: Federico Vaga <federico.vaga@vaga.pv.it>
 
 .. _it_submittingdrivers:
 
 Sottomettere driver per il kernel Linux
 =======================================
 
-.. warning::
+.. note::
 
-    TODO ancora da tradurre
+   Questo documento è vecchio e negli ultimi anni non è stato più aggiornato;
+   dovrebbe essere aggiornato, o forse meglio, rimosso.  La maggior parte di
+   quello che viene detto qui può essere trovato anche negli altri documenti
+   dedicati allo sviluppo.  Per questo motivo il documento non verrà tradotto.
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/submitting-patches.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/submitting-patches.rst
index d633775ed556..7d7ea92c5c5a 100644
--- a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/submitting-patches.rst
+++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/submitting-patches.rst
@@ -1,13 +1,898 @@
 .. include:: ../disclaimer-ita.rst
 
 :Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst <submittingpatches>`
-
+:Translator: Federico Vaga <federico.vaga@vaga.pv.it>
 
 .. _it_submittingpatches:
 
-Sottomettere modifiche: la guida essenziale per vedere il vostro codice nel kernel
-==================================================================================
+Inviare patch: la guida essenziale per vedere il vostro codice nel kernel
+=========================================================================
+
+Una persona o un'azienda che volesse inviare una patch al kernel potrebbe
+sentirsi scoraggiata dal processo di sottomissione, specialmente quando manca
+una certa familiarità col "sistema".  Questo testo è una raccolta di
+suggerimenti che aumenteranno significativamente le probabilità di vedere le
+vostre patch accettate.
+
+Questo documento contiene un vasto numero di suggerimenti concisi.  Per
+maggiori dettagli su come funziona il processo di sviluppo del kernel leggete
+:ref:`Documentation/translations/it_IT/process <it_development_process_main>`.
+Leggete anche :ref:`Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/submit-checklist.rst <it_submitchecklist>`
+per una lista di punti da verificare prima di inviare del codice.  Se state
+inviando un driver, allora leggete anche :ref:`Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/submitting-drivers.rst <it_submittingdrivers>`;
+per delle patch relative alle associazioni per Device Tree leggete
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/submitting-patches.txt.
+
+Molti di questi passi descrivono il comportamento di base del sistema di
+controllo di versione ``git``; se utilizzate ``git`` per preparare le vostre
+patch molto del lavoro più ripetitivo lo troverete già fatto per voi, tuttavia
+dovete preparare e documentare un certo numero di patch.  Generalmente, l'uso
+di ``git`` renderà la vostra vita di sviluppatore del kernel più facile.
+
+0) Ottenere i sorgenti attuali
+------------------------------
+
+Se non avete un repositorio coi sorgenti del kernel più recenti, allora usate
+``git`` per ottenerli.  Vorrete iniziare col repositorio principale che può
+essere recuperato col comando::
+
+  git clone git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/torvalds/linux.git
+
+Notate, comunque, che potreste non voler sviluppare direttamente coi sorgenti
+principali del kernel.  La maggior parte dei manutentori hanno i propri
+sorgenti e desiderano che le patch siano preparate basandosi su di essi.
+Guardate l'elemento **T:** per un determinato sottosistema nel file MAINTANERS
+che troverete nei sorgenti, o semplicemente chiedete al manutentore nel caso
+in cui i sorgenti da usare non siano elencati il quel file.
+
+Esiste ancora la possibilità di scaricare un rilascio del kernel come archivio
+tar (come descritto in una delle prossime sezioni), ma questa è la via più
+complicata per sviluppare per il kernel.
+
+1) ``diff -up``
+---------------
+
+Se dovete produrre le vostre patch a mano, usate ``diff -up`` o ``diff -uprN``
+per crearle.  Git produce di base le patch in questo formato; se state
+usando ``git``, potete saltare interamente questa sezione.
+
+Tutte le modifiche al kernel Linux avvengono mediate patch, come descritte
+in :manpage:`diff(1)`.  Quando create la vostra patch, assicuratevi di
+crearla nel formato "unified diff", come l'argomento ``-u`` di
+:manpage:`diff(1)`.
+Inoltre, per favore usate l'argomento ``-p`` per mostrare la funzione C
+alla quale si riferiscono le diverse modifiche - questo rende il risultato
+di ``diff`` molto più facile da leggere.  Le patch dovrebbero essere basate
+sulla radice dei sorgenti del kernel, e non sulle sue sottocartelle.
+
+Per creare una patch per un singolo file, spesso è sufficiente fare::
+
+	SRCTREE=linux
+	MYFILE=drivers/net/mydriver.c
+
+	cd $SRCTREE
+	cp $MYFILE $MYFILE.orig
+	vi $MYFILE	# make your change
+	cd ..
+	diff -up $SRCTREE/$MYFILE{.orig,} > /tmp/patch
+
+Per creare una patch per molteplici file, dovreste spacchettare i sorgenti
+"vergini", o comunque non modificati, e fare un ``diff`` coi vostri.
+Per esempio::
+
+	MYSRC=/devel/linux
+
+	tar xvfz linux-3.19.tar.gz
+	mv linux-3.19 linux-3.19-vanilla
+	diff -uprN -X linux-3.19-vanilla/Documentation/dontdiff \
+		linux-3.19-vanilla $MYSRC > /tmp/patch
+
+``dontdiff`` è una lista di file che sono generati durante il processo di
+compilazione del kernel; questi dovrebbero essere ignorati in qualsiasi
+patch generata con :manpage:`diff(1)`.
+
+Assicuratevi che la vostra patch non includa file che non ne fanno veramente
+parte.  Al fine di verificarne la correttezza, assicuratevi anche di
+revisionare la vostra patch -dopo- averla generata con :manpage:`diff(1)`.
+
+Se le vostre modifiche producono molte differenze, allora dovrete dividerle
+in patch indipendenti che modificano le cose in passi logici;  leggete
+:ref:`split_changes`.  Questo faciliterà la revisione da parte degli altri
+sviluppatori, il che è molto importante se volete che la patch venga accettata.
+
+Se state utilizzando ``git``, ``git rebase -i`` può aiutarvi nel procedimento.
+Se non usate ``git``, un'alternativa popolare è ``quilt``
+<http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/quilt>.
+
+.. _it_describe_changes:
+
+2) Descrivete le vostre modifiche
+---------------------------------
+
+Descrivete il vostro problema. Esiste sempre un problema che via ha spinto
+ha fare il vostro lavoro, che sia la correzione di un baco da una riga o una
+nuova funzionalità da 5000 righe di codice.  Convincete i revisori che vale
+la pena risolvere il vostro problema e che ha senso continuare a leggere oltre
+al primo paragrafo.
+
+Descrivete ciò che sarà visibile agli utenti.  Chiari incidenti nel sistema
+e blocchi sono abbastanza convincenti, ma non tutti i bachi sono così evidenti.
+Anche se il problema è stato scoperto durante la revisione del codice,
+descrivete l'impatto che questo avrà sugli utenti.  Tenete presente che
+la maggior parte delle installazioni Linux usa un kernel che arriva dai
+sorgenti stabili o dai sorgenti di una distribuzione particolare che prende
+singolarmente le patch dai sorgenti principali; quindi, includete tutte
+le informazioni che possono essere utili a capire le vostre modifiche:
+le circostanze che causano il problema, estratti da dmesg, descrizioni di
+un incidente di sistema, prestazioni di una regressione, picchi di latenza,
+blocchi, eccetera.
+
+Quantificare le ottimizzazioni e i compromessi.  Se affermate di aver
+migliorato le prestazioni, il consumo di memoria, l'impatto sollo stack,
+o la dimensione del file binario, includete dei numeri a supporto della
+vostra dichiarazione.  Ma ricordatevi di descrivere anche eventuali costi
+che non sono ovvi.  Solitamente le ottimizzazioni non sono gratuite, ma sono
+un compromesso fra l'uso di CPU, la memoria e la leggibilità; o, quando si
+parla di ipotesi euristiche, fra differenti carichi.  Descrivete i lati
+negativi che vi aspettate dall'ottimizzazione cosicché i revisori possano
+valutare i costi e i benefici.
+
+Una volta che il problema è chiaro, descrivete come lo risolvete andando
+nel dettaglio tecnico.  È molto importante che descriviate la modifica
+in un inglese semplice cosicché i revisori possano verificare che il codice si
+comporti come descritto.
+
+I manutentori vi saranno grati se scrivete la descrizione della patch in un
+formato che sia compatibile con il gestore dei sorgenti usato dal kernel,
+``git``, come un "commit log".  Leggete :ref:`it_explicit_in_reply_to`.
+
+Risolvete solo un problema per patch.  Se la vostra descrizione inizia ad
+essere lunga, potrebbe essere un segno che la vostra patch necessita d'essere
+divisa. Leggete :ref:`split_changes`.
+
+Quando inviate o rinviate una patch o una serie, includete la descrizione
+completa delle modifiche e la loro giustificazione.  Non limitatevi a dire che
+questa è la versione N della patch (o serie).  Non aspettatevi che i
+manutentori di un sottosistema vadano a cercare le versioni precedenti per
+cercare la descrizione da aggiungere.  In pratica, la patch (o serie) e la sua
+descrizione devono essere un'unica cosa.  Questo aiuta i manutentori e i
+revisori.  Probabilmente, alcuni revisori non hanno nemmeno ricevuto o visto
+le versioni precedenti della patch.
+
+Descrivete le vostro modifiche usando l'imperativo, per esempio "make xyzzy
+do frotz" piuttosto che "[This patch] makes xyzzy do frotz" or "[I] changed
+xyzzy to do frotz", come se steste dando ordini al codice di cambiare il suo
+comportamento.
+
+Se la patch corregge un baco conosciuto, fare riferimento a quel baco inserendo
+il suo numero o il suo URL.  Se la patch è la conseguenza di una discussione
+su una lista di discussione, allora fornite l'URL all'archivio di quella
+discussione;  usate i collegamenti a https://lkml.kernel.org/ con il
+``Message-Id``, in questo modo vi assicurerete che il collegamento non diventi
+invalido nel tempo.
+
+Tuttavia, cercate di rendere la vostra spiegazione comprensibile anche senza
+far riferimento a fonti esterne.  In aggiunta ai collegamenti a bachi e liste
+di discussione, riassumente i punti più importanti della discussione che hanno
+portato alla creazione della patch.
+
+Se volete far riferimento a uno specifico commit, non usate solo
+l'identificativo SHA-1.  Per cortesia, aggiungete anche la breve riga
+riassuntiva del commit per rendere la chiaro ai revisori l'oggetto.
+Per esempio::
+
+	Commit e21d2170f36602ae2708 ("video: remove unnecessary
+	platform_set_drvdata()") removed the unnecessary
+	platform_set_drvdata(), but left the variable "dev" unused,
+	delete it.
+
+Dovreste anche assicurarvi di usare almeno i primi 12 caratteri
+dell'identificativo SHA-1.  Il repositorio del kernel ha *molti* oggetti e
+questo rende possibile la collisione fra due identificativi con pochi
+caratteri.  Tenete ben presente che anche se oggi non ci sono collisioni con il
+vostro identificativo a 6 caratteri, potrebbero essercene fra 5 anni da oggi.
+
+Se la vostra patch corregge un baco in un commit specifico, per esempio avete
+trovato un problema usando ``git bisect``, per favore usate l'etichetta
+'Fixes:' indicando i primi 12 caratteri dell'identificativo SHA-1 seguiti
+dalla riga riassuntiva.  Per esempio::
+
+	Fixes: e21d2170f366 ("video: remove unnecessary platform_set_drvdata()")
+
+La seguente configurazione di ``git config`` può essere usata per formattare
+i risultati dei comandi ``git log`` o ``git show`` come nell'esempio
+precedente::
+
+	[core]
+		abbrev = 12
+	[pretty]
+		fixes = Fixes: %h (\"%s\")
+
+.. _it_split_changes:
+
+3) Separate le vostre modifiche
+-------------------------------
+
+Separate ogni **cambiamento logico** in patch distinte.
+
+Per esempio, se i vostri cambiamenti per un singolo driver includono
+sia delle correzioni di bachi che miglioramenti alle prestazioni,
+allora separateli in due o più patch.  Se i vostri cambiamenti includono
+un aggiornamento dell'API e un nuovo driver che lo sfrutta, allora separateli
+in due patch.
+
+D'altro canto, se fate una singola modifica su più file, raggruppate tutte
+queste modifiche in una singola patch.  Dunque, un singolo cambiamento logico
+è contenuto in una sola patch.
+
+Il punto da ricordare è che ogni modifica dovrebbe fare delle modifiche
+che siano facilmente comprensibili e che possano essere verificate dai revisori.
+Ogni patch dovrebbe essere giustificabile di per sé.
+
+Se al fine di ottenere un cambiamento completo una patch dipende da un'altra,
+va bene.  Semplicemente scrivete una nota nella descrizione della patch per
+farlo presente: **"this patch depends on patch X"**.
+
+Quando dividete i vostri cambiamenti in una serie di patch, prestate
+particolare attenzione alla verifica di ogni patch della serie; per ognuna
+il kernel deve compilare ed essere eseguito correttamente.  Gli sviluppatori
+che usano ``git bisect`` per scovare i problemi potrebbero finire nel mezzo
+della vostra serie in un punto qualsiasi; non vi saranno grati se nel mezzo
+avete introdotto dei bachi.
+
+Se non potete condensare la vostra serie di patch in una più piccola, allora
+pubblicatene una quindicina alla volta e aspettate che vengano revisionate
+ed integrate.
+
+
+4) Verificate lo stile delle vostre modifiche
+---------------------------------------------
+
+Controllate che la vostra patch non violi lo stile del codice, maggiori
+dettagli sono disponibili in :ref:`Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/coding-style.rst <it_codingstyle>`.
+Non farlo porta semplicemente a una perdita di tempo da parte dei revisori e
+voi vedrete la vostra patch rifiutata, probabilmente senza nemmeno essere stata
+letta.
+
+Un'eccezione importante si ha quando del codice viene spostato da un file
+ad un altro -- in questo caso non dovreste modificare il codice spostato
+per nessun motivo, almeno non nella patch che lo sposta.  Questo separa
+chiaramente l'azione di spostare il codice e il vostro cambiamento.
+Questo aiuta enormemente la revisione delle vere differenze e permette agli
+strumenti di tenere meglio la traccia della storia del codice.
+
+Prima di inviare una patch, verificatene lo stile usando l'apposito
+verificatore (scripts/checkpatch.pl).  Da notare, comunque, che il verificator
+di stile dovrebbe essere visto come una guida, non come un sostituto al
+giudizio umano.  Se il vostro codice è migliore nonostante una violazione
+dello stile, probabilmente è meglio lasciarlo com'è.
+
+Il verificatore ha tre diversi livelli di severità:
+ - ERROR: le cose sono molto probabilmente sbagliate
+ - WARNING: le cose necessitano d'essere revisionate con attenzione
+ - CHECK: le cose necessitano di un pensierino
+
+Dovreste essere in grado di giustificare tutte le eventuali violazioni rimaste
+nella vostra patch.
+
+
+5) Selezionate i destinatari della vostra patch
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+Dovreste sempre inviare una copia della patch ai manutentori dei sottosistemi
+interessati dalle modifiche; date un'occhiata al file MAINTAINERS e alla storia
+delle revisioni per scoprire chi si occupa del codice.  Lo script
+scripts/get_maintainer.pl può esservi d'aiuto.  Se non riuscite a trovare un
+manutentore per il sottosistema su cui state lavorando, allora Andrew Morton
+(akpm@linux-foundation.org) sarà la vostra ultima possibilità.
+
+Normalmente, dovreste anche scegliere una lista di discussione a cui inviare
+la vostra serie di patch.  La lista di discussione linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org
+è proprio l'ultima spiaggia, il volume di email su questa lista fa si che
+diversi sviluppatori non la seguano.  Guardate nel file MAINTAINERS per trovare
+la lista di discussione dedicata ad un sottosistema; probabilmente lì la vostra
+patch riceverà molta più attenzione.  Tuttavia, per favore, non spammate le
+liste di discussione che non sono interessate al vostro lavoro.
+
+Molte delle liste di discussione relative al kernel vengono ospitate su
+vger.kernel.org; potete trovare un loro elenco alla pagina
+http://vger.kernel.org/vger-lists.html.  Tuttavia, ci sono altre liste di
+discussione ospitate altrove.
+
+Non inviate più di 15 patch alla volta sulle liste di discussione vger!!!
+
+L'ultimo giudizio sull'integrazione delle modifiche accettate spetta a
+Linux Torvalds.  Il suo indirizzo e-mail è <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>.
+Riceve moltissime e-mail, e, a questo punto, solo poche patch passano
+direttamente attraverso il suo giudizio; quindi, dovreste fare del vostro
+meglio per -evitare di- inviargli e-mail.
+
+Se avete una patch che corregge un baco di sicurezza che potrebbe essere
+sfruttato, inviatela a security@kernel.org.  Per bachi importanti, un breve
+embargo potrebbe essere preso in considerazione per dare il tempo alle
+distribuzioni di prendere la patch e renderla disponibile ai loro utenti;
+in questo caso, ovviamente, la patch non dovrebbe essere inviata su alcuna
+lista di discussione pubblica.
+
+Patch che correggono bachi importanti su un kernel già rilasciato, dovrebbero
+essere inviate ai manutentori dei kernel stabili aggiungendo la seguente riga::
+
+  Cc: stable@vger.kernel.org
+
+nella vostra patch, nell'area dedicata alle firme (notate, NON come destinatario
+delle e-mail).  In aggiunta a questo file, dovreste leggere anche
+:ref:`Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst <it_stable_kernel_rules>`
+
+Tuttavia, notate, che alcuni manutentori di sottosistema preferiscono avere
+l'ultima parola su quali patch dovrebbero essere aggiunte ai kernel stabili.
+La rete di manutentori, in particolare, non vorrebbe vedere i singoli
+sviluppatori aggiungere alle loro patch delle righe come quella sopracitata.
+
+Se le modifiche hanno effetti sull'interfaccia con lo spazio utente, per favore
+inviate una patch per le pagine man ai manutentori di suddette pagine (elencati
+nel file MAINTAINERS), o almeno una notifica circa la vostra modifica,
+cosicché l'informazione possa trovare la sua strada nel manuale.  Le modifiche
+all'API dello spazio utente dovrebbero essere inviate in copia anche a
+linux-api@vger.kernel.org.
+
+Per le piccole patch potreste aggiungere in CC l'indirizzo
+*Trivial Patch Monkey trivial@kernel.org* che ha lo scopo di raccogliere
+le patch "banali".  Date uno sguardo al file MAINTAINERS per vedere chi
+è l'attuale amministratore.
+
+Le patch banali devono rientrare in una delle seguenti categorie:
+
+- errori grammaticali nella documentazione
+- errori grammaticali negli errori che potrebbero rompere :manpage:`grep(1)`
+- correzione di avvisi di compilazione (riempirsi di avvisi inutili è negativo)
+- correzione di errori di compilazione (solo se correggono qualcosa sul serio)
+- rimozione di funzioni/macro deprecate
+- sostituzione di codice non potabile con uno portabile (anche in codice
+  specifico per un'architettura, dato che le persone copiano, fintanto che
+  la modifica sia banale)
+- qualsiasi modifica dell'autore/manutentore di un file (in pratica
+  "patch monkey" in modalità ritrasmissione)
+
+
+6) Niente: MIME, links, compressione, allegati.  Solo puro testo
+----------------------------------------------------------------
+
+Linus e gli altri sviluppatori del kernel devono poter commentare
+le modifiche che sottomettete.  Per uno sviluppatore è importante
+essere in grado di "citare" le vostre modifiche, usando normali
+programmi di posta elettronica, cosicché sia possibile commentare
+una porzione specifica del vostro codice.
+
+Per questa ragione tutte le patch devono essere inviate via e-mail
+come testo.
 
 .. warning::
 
-    TODO ancora da tradurre
+  Se decidete di copiare ed incollare la patch nel corpo dell'e-mail, state
+  attenti che il vostro programma non corrompa il contenuto con andate
+  a capo automatiche.
+
+La patch non deve essere un allegato MIME, compresso o meno.  Molti
+dei più popolari programmi di posta elettronica non trasmettono un allegato
+MIME come puro testo, e questo rende impossibile commentare il vostro codice.
+Inoltre, un allegato MIME rende l'attività di Linus più laboriosa, diminuendo
+così la possibilità che il vostro allegato-MIME venga accettato.
+
+Eccezione: se il vostro servizio di posta storpia le patch, allora qualcuno
+potrebbe chiedervi di rinviarle come allegato MIME.
+
+Leggete :ref:`Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/email-clients.rst <it_email_clients>`
+per dei suggerimenti sulla configurazione del programmi di posta elettronica
+per l'invio di patch intatte.
+
+7) Dimensione delle e-mail
+--------------------------
+
+Le grosse modifiche non sono adatte ad una lista di discussione, e nemmeno
+per alcuni manutentori.  Se la vostra patch, non compressa, eccede i 300 kB
+di spazio, allora caricatela in una spazio accessibile su internet fornendo
+l'URL (collegamento) ad essa.  Ma notate che se la vostra patch eccede i 300 kB
+è quasi certo che necessiti comunque di essere spezzettata.
+
+8) Rispondere ai commenti di revisione
+--------------------------------------
+
+Quasi certamente i revisori vi invieranno dei commenti su come migliorare
+la vostra patch.  Dovete rispondere a questi commenti; ignorare i revisori
+è un ottimo modo per essere ignorati.  Riscontri o domande che non conducono
+ad una modifica del codice quasi certamente dovrebbero portare ad un commento
+nel changelog cosicché il prossimo revisore potrà meglio comprendere cosa stia
+accadendo.
+
+Assicuratevi di dire ai revisori quali cambiamenti state facendo e di
+ringraziarli per il loro tempo.  Revisionare codice è un lavoro faticoso e che
+richiede molto tempo, e a volte i revisori diventano burberi.  Tuttavia, anche
+in questo caso, rispondete con educazione e concentratevi sul problema che
+hanno evidenziato.
+
+9) Non scoraggiatevi - o impazientitevi
+---------------------------------------
+
+Dopo che avete inviato le vostre modifiche, siate pazienti e aspettate.
+I revisori sono persone occupate e potrebbero non ricevere la vostra patch
+immediatamente.
+
+Un tempo, le patch erano solite scomparire nel vuoto senza alcun commento,
+ma ora il processo di sviluppo funziona meglio.  Dovreste ricevere commenti
+in una settimana o poco più; se questo non dovesse accadere, assicuratevi di
+aver inviato le patch correttamente.  Aspettate almeno una settimana prima di
+rinviare le modifiche o sollecitare i revisori - probabilmente anche di più
+durante la finestra d'integrazione.
+
+10) Aggiungete PATCH nell'oggetto
+---------------------------------
+
+Dato l'alto volume di e-mail per Linus, e la lista linux-kernel, è prassi
+prefiggere il vostro oggetto con [PATCH].  Questo permette a Linus e agli
+altri sviluppatori del kernel di distinguere facilmente le patch dalle altre
+discussioni.
+
+
+11) Firmate il vostro lavoro - Il certificato d'origine dello sviluppatore
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+Per migliorare la tracciabilità su "chi ha fatto cosa", specialmente per
+quelle patch che per raggiungere lo stadio finale passano attraverso
+diversi livelli di manutentori, abbiamo introdotto la procedura di "firma"
+delle patch che vengono inviate per e-mail.
+
+La firma è una semplice riga alla fine della descrizione della patch che
+certifica che l'avete scritta voi o che avete il diritto di pubblicarla
+come patch open-source.  Le regole sono abbastanza semplici: se potete
+certificare quanto segue:
+
+Il certificato d'origine dello sviluppatore 1.1
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+Contribuendo a questo progetto, io certifico che:
+
+        (a) Il contributo è stato creato interamente, o in parte, da me e che
+            ho il diritto di inviarlo in accordo con la licenza open-source
+            indicata nel file; oppure
+
+        (b) Il contributo è basato su un lavoro precedente che, nei limiti
+            della mia conoscenza, è coperto da un'appropriata licenza
+            open-source che mi da il diritto di modificarlo e inviarlo,
+            le cui modifiche sono interamente o in parte mie, in accordo con
+            la licenza open-source (a meno che non abbia il permesso di usare
+            un'altra licenza) indicata nel file; oppure
+
+        (c) Il contributo mi è stato fornito direttamente da qualcuno che
+            ha certificato (a), (b) o (c) e non l'ho modificata.
+
+        (d) Capisco e concordo col fatto che questo progetto e i suoi
+            contributi sono pubblici e che un registro dei contributi (incluse
+            tutte le informazioni personali che invio con essi, inclusa la mia
+            firma) verrà mantenuto indefinitamente e che possa essere
+            ridistribuito in accordo con questo progetto o le licenze
+            open-source coinvolte.
+
+poi dovete solo aggiungere una riga che dice::
+
+	Signed-off-by: Random J Developer <random@developer.example.org>
+
+usando il vostro vero nome (spiacenti, non si accettano pseudonimi o
+contributi anonimi).
+
+Alcune persone aggiungono delle etichette alla fine.  Per ora queste verranno
+ignorate, ma potete farlo per meglio identificare procedure aziendali interne o
+per aggiungere dettagli circa la firma.
+
+Se siete un manutentore di un sottosistema o di un ramo, qualche volta dovrete
+modificare leggermente le patch che avete ricevuto al fine di poterle
+integrare; questo perché il codice non è esattamente lo stesso nei vostri
+sorgenti e in quelli dei vostri contributori.  Se rispettate rigidamente la
+regola (c), dovreste chiedere al mittente di rifare la patch, ma questo è
+controproducente e una totale perdita di tempo ed energia.  La regola (b)
+vi permette di correggere il codice, ma poi diventa davvero maleducato cambiare
+la patch di qualcuno e addossargli la responsabilità per i vostri bachi.
+Per risolvere questo problema dovreste aggiungere una riga, fra l'ultimo
+Signed-off-by e il vostro, che spiega la vostra modifica.  Nonostante non ci
+sia nulla di obbligatorio, un modo efficace è quello di indicare il vostro
+nome o indirizzo email fra parentesi quadre, seguito da una breve descrizione;
+questo renderà abbastanza visibile chi è responsabile per le modifiche
+dell'ultimo minuto.  Per esempio::
+
+	Signed-off-by: Random J Developer <random@developer.example.org>
+	[lucky@maintainer.example.org: struct foo moved from foo.c to foo.h]
+	Signed-off-by: Lucky K Maintainer <lucky@maintainer.example.org>
+
+Questa pratica è particolarmente utile se siete i manutentori di un ramo
+stabile ma al contempo volete dare credito agli autori, tracciare e integrare
+le modifiche, e proteggere i mittenti dalle lamentele.  Notate che in nessuna
+circostanza è permessa la modifica dell'identità dell'autore (l'intestazione
+From), dato che è quella che appare nei changelog.
+
+Un appunto speciale per chi porta il codice su vecchie versioni.  Sembra che
+sia comune l'utile pratica di inserire un'indicazione circa l'origine della
+patch all'inizio del messaggio di commit (appena dopo la riga dell'oggetto)
+al fine di migliorare la tracciabilità.  Per esempio, questo è quello che si
+vede nel rilascio stabile 3.x-stable::
+
+  Date:   Tue Oct 7 07:26:38 2014 -0400
+
+    libata: Un-break ATA blacklist
+
+    commit 1c40279960bcd7d52dbdf1d466b20d24b99176c8 upstream.
+
+E qui quello che potrebbe vedersi su un kernel più vecchio dove la patch è
+stata applicata::
+
+    Date:   Tue May 13 22:12:27 2008 +0200
+
+        wireless, airo: waitbusy() won't delay
+
+        [backport of 2.6 commit b7acbdfbd1f277c1eb23f344f899cfa4cd0bf36a]
+
+Qualunque sia il formato, questa informazione fornisce un importante aiuto
+alle persone che vogliono seguire i vostri sorgenti, e quelle che cercano
+dei bachi.
+
+
+12) Quando utilizzare Acked-by:, Cc:, e Co-developed-by:
+--------------------------------------------------------
+
+L'etichetta Signed-off-by: indica che il firmatario è stato coinvolto nello
+sviluppo della patch, o che era nel suo percorso di consegna.
+
+Se una persona non è direttamente coinvolta con la preparazione o gestione
+della patch ma desidera firmare e mettere agli atti la loro approvazione,
+allora queste persone possono chiedere di aggiungere al changelog della patch
+una riga Acked-by:.
+
+Acked-by: viene spesso utilizzato dai manutentori del sottosistema in oggetto
+quando quello stesso manutentore non ha contribuito né trasmesso la patch.
+
+Acked-by: non è formale come Signed-off-by:.  Questo indica che la persona ha
+revisionato la patch e l'ha trovata accettabile.  Per cui, a volte, chi
+integra le patch convertirà un "sì, mi sembra che vada bene" in un Acked-by:
+(ma tenete presente che solitamente è meglio chiedere esplicitamente).
+
+Acked-by: non indica l'accettazione di un'intera patch.  Per esempio, quando
+una patch ha effetti su diversi sottosistemi e ha un Acked-by: da un
+manutentore di uno di questi, significa che il manutentore accetta quella
+parte di codice relativa al sottosistema che mantiene.  Qui dovremmo essere
+giudiziosi.  Quando si hanno dei dubbi si dovrebbe far riferimento alla
+discussione originale negli archivi della lista di discussione.
+
+Se una persona ha avuto l'opportunità di commentare la patch, ma non lo ha
+fatto, potete aggiungere l'etichetta ``Cc:`` alla patch.  Questa è l'unica
+etichetta che può essere aggiunta senza che la persona in questione faccia
+alcunché - ma dovrebbe indicare che la persona ha ricevuto una copia della
+patch.  Questa etichetta documenta che terzi potenzialmente interessati sono
+stati inclusi nella discussione.
+
+Co-developed-by: indica che la patch è stata cosviluppata da diversi
+sviluppatori; viene usato per assegnare più autori (in aggiunta a quello
+associato all'etichetta From:) quando più persone lavorano ad una patch.  Dato
+che Co-developed-by: implica la paternità della patch, ogni Co-developed-by:
+dev'essere seguito immediatamente dal Signed-off-by: del corrispondente
+coautore. Qui si applica la procedura di base per sign-off, in pratica
+l'ordine delle etichette Signed-off-by: dovrebbe riflettere il più possibile
+l'ordine cronologico della storia della patch, indipendentemente dal fatto che
+la paternità venga assegnata via From: o Co-developed-by:. Da notare che
+l'ultimo Signed-off-by: dev'essere quello di colui che ha sottomesso la patch.
+
+Notate anche che l'etichetta From: è opzionale quando l'autore in From: è
+anche la persona (e indirizzo email) indicato nel From: dell'intestazione
+dell'email.
+
+Esempio di una patch sottomessa dall'autore in From:::
+
+	<changelog>
+
+	Co-developed-by: First Co-Author <first@coauthor.example.org>
+	Signed-off-by: First Co-Author <first@coauthor.example.org>
+	Co-developed-by: Second Co-Author <second@coauthor.example.org>
+	Signed-off-by: Second Co-Author <second@coauthor.example.org>
+	Signed-off-by: From Author <from@author.example.org>
+
+Esempio di una patch sottomessa dall'autore Co-developed-by:::
+
+	From: From Author <from@author.example.org>
+
+	<changelog>
+
+	Co-developed-by: Random Co-Author <random@coauthor.example.org>
+	Signed-off-by: Random Co-Author <random@coauthor.example.org>
+	Signed-off-by: From Author <from@author.example.org>
+	Co-developed-by: Submitting Co-Author <sub@coauthor.example.org>
+	Signed-off-by: Submitting Co-Author <sub@coauthor.example.org>
+
+13) Utilizzare Reported-by:, Tested-by:, Reviewed-by:, Suggested-by: e Fixes:
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+L'etichetta Reported-by da credito alle persone che trovano e riportano i bachi
+e si spera che questo possa ispirarli ad aiutarci nuovamente in futuro.
+Rammentate che se il baco è stato riportato in privato, dovrete chiedere il
+permesso prima di poter utilizzare l'etichetta Reported-by.
+
+L'etichetta Tested-by: indica che la patch è stata verificata con successo
+(su un qualche sistema) dalla persona citata.  Questa etichetta informa i
+manutentori che qualche verifica è stata fatta, fornisce un mezzo per trovare
+persone che possano verificare il codice in futuro, e garantisce che queste
+stesse persone ricevano credito per il loro lavoro.
+
+Reviewd-by:, invece, indica che la patch è stata revisionata ed è stata
+considerata accettabile in accordo con la dichiarazione dei revisori:
+
+Dichiarazione di svista dei revisori
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+Offrendo la mia etichetta Reviewed-by, dichiaro quanto segue:
+
+	 (a) Ho effettuato una revisione tecnica di questa patch per valutarne
+	     l'adeguatezza ai fini dell'inclusione nel ramo principale del
+	     kernel.
+
+	 (b) Tutti i problemi e le domande riguardanti la patch sono stati
+	     comunicati al mittente.  Sono soddisfatto dalle risposte
+	     del mittente.
+
+	 (c) Nonostante ci potrebbero essere cose migliorabili in queste
+	     sottomissione, credo che sia, in questo momento, (1) una modifica
+	     di interesse per il kernel, e (2) libera da problemi che
+	     potrebbero metterne in discussione l'integrazione.
+
+	 (d) Nonostante abbia revisionato la patch e creda che vada bene,
+	     non garantisco (se non specificato altrimenti) che questa
+	     otterrà quello che promette o funzionerà correttamente in tutte
+	     le possibili situazioni.
+
+L'etichetta Reviewed-by è la dichiarazione di un parere sulla bontà di
+una modifica che si ritiene appropriata e senza alcun problema tecnico
+importante.  Qualsiasi revisore interessato (quelli che lo hanno fatto)
+possono offrire il proprio Reviewed-by per la patch.  Questa etichetta serve
+a dare credito ai revisori e a informare i manutentori sul livello di revisione
+che è stato fatto sulla patch.  L'etichetta Reviewd-by, quando fornita da
+revisori conosciuti per la loro conoscenza sulla materia in oggetto e per la
+loro serietà nella revisione, accrescerà le probabilità che la vostra patch
+venga integrate nel kernel.
+
+L'etichetta Suggested-by: indica che l'idea della patch è stata suggerita
+dalla persona nominata e le da credito. Tenete a mente che questa etichetta
+non dovrebbe essere aggiunta senza un permesso esplicito, specialmente se
+l'idea non è stata pubblicata in un forum pubblico.  Detto ciò, dando credito
+a chi ci fornisce delle idee, si spera di poterli ispirare ad aiutarci
+nuovamente in futuro.
+
+L'etichetta Fixes: indica che la patch corregge un problema in un commit
+precedente.  Serve a chiarire l'origine di un baco, il che aiuta la revisione
+del baco stesso.  Questa etichetta è di aiuto anche per i manutentori dei
+kernel stabili al fine di capire quale kernel deve ricevere la correzione.
+Questo è il modo suggerito per indicare che un baco è stato corretto nella
+patch. Per maggiori dettagli leggete :ref:`it_describe_changes`
+
+
+14) Il formato canonico delle patch
+-----------------------------------
+
+Questa sezione descrive il formato che dovrebbe essere usato per le patch.
+Notate che se state usando un repositorio ``git`` per salvare le vostre patch
+potere usare il comando ``git format-patch`` per ottenere patch nel formato
+appropriato.  Lo strumento non crea il testo necessario, per cui, leggete
+le seguenti istruzioni.
+
+L'oggetto di una patch canonica è la riga::
+
+    Subject: [PATCH 001/123] subsystem: summary phrase
+
+Il corpo di una patch canonica contiene i seguenti elementi:
+
+  - Una riga ``from`` che specifica l'autore della patch, seguita
+    da una riga vuota (necessaria soltanto se la persona che invia la
+    patch non ne è l'autore).
+
+  - Il corpo della spiegazione, con linee non più lunghe di 75 caratteri,
+    che verrà copiato permanentemente nel changelog per descrivere la patch.
+
+  - Una riga vuota
+
+  - Le righe ``Signed-off-by:``, descritte in precedenza, che finiranno
+    anch'esse nel changelog.
+
+  - Una linea di demarcazione contenente semplicemente ``---``.
+
+  - Qualsiasi altro commento che non deve finire nel changelog.
+
+  - Le effettive modifiche al codice (il prodotto di ``diff``).
+
+Il formato usato per l'oggetto permette ai programmi di posta di usarlo
+per ordinare le patch alfabeticamente - tutti i programmi di posta hanno
+questa funzionalità - dato che al numero sequenziale si antepongono degli zeri;
+in questo modo l'ordine numerico ed alfabetico coincidono.
+
+Il ``subsystem`` nell'oggetto dell'email dovrebbe identificare l'area
+o il sottosistema modificato dalla patch.
+
+La ``summary phrase`` nell'oggetto dell'email dovrebbe descrivere brevemente
+il contenuto della patch.  La ``summary phrase`` non dovrebbe essere un nome
+di file. Non utilizzate la stessa ``summary phrase`` per tutte le patch in
+una serie (dove una ``serie di patch`` è una sequenza ordinata di diverse
+patch correlate).
+
+Ricordatevi che la ``summary phrase`` della vostra email diventerà un
+identificatore globale ed unico per quella patch.  Si propaga fino al
+changelog ``git``.  La ``summary phrase`` potrà essere usata in futuro
+dagli sviluppatori per riferirsi a quella patch.  Le persone vorranno
+cercare la ``summary phrase`` su internet per leggere le discussioni che la
+riguardano.  Potrebbe anche essere l'unica cosa che le persone vedranno
+quando, in due o tre mesi, riguarderanno centinaia di patch usando strumenti
+come ``gitk`` o ``git log --oneline``.
+
+Per queste ragioni, dovrebbe essere lunga fra i 70 e i 75 caratteri, e deve
+descrivere sia cosa viene modificato, sia il perché sia necessario. Essere
+brevi e descrittivi è una bella sfida, ma questo è quello che fa un riassunto
+ben scritto.
+
+La ``summary phrase`` può avere un'etichetta (*tag*) di prefisso racchiusa fra
+le parentesi quadre "Subject: [PATCH <tag>...] <summary phrase>".
+Le etichette non verranno considerate come parte della frase riassuntiva, ma
+indicano come la patch dovrebbe essere trattata.  Fra le etichette più comuni
+ci sono quelle di versione che vengono usate quando una patch è stata inviata
+più volte (per esempio, "v1, v2, v3"); oppure "RFC" per indicare che si
+attendono dei commenti (*Request For Comments*).  Se ci sono quattro patch
+nella serie, queste dovrebbero essere enumerate così: 1/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4.
+Questo assicura che gli sviluppatori capiranno l'ordine in cui le patch
+dovrebbero essere applicate, e per tracciare quelle che hanno revisionate o
+che hanno applicato.
+
+Un paio di esempi di oggetti::
+
+    Subject: [PATCH 2/5] ext2: improve scalability of bitmap searching
+    Subject: [PATCH v2 01/27] x86: fix eflags tracking
+
+La riga ``from`` dev'essere la prima nel corpo del messaggio ed è nel
+formato:
+
+        From: Patch Author <author@example.com>
+
+La riga ``from`` indica chi verrà accreditato nel changelog permanente come
+l'autore della patch.  Se la riga ``from`` è mancante, allora per determinare
+l'autore da inserire nel changelog verrà usata la riga ``From``
+nell'intestazione dell'email.
+
+Il corpo della spiegazione verrà incluso nel changelog permanente, per cui
+deve aver senso per un lettore esperto che è ha dimenticato i dettagli della
+discussione che hanno portato alla patch.  L'inclusione di informazioni
+sui problemi oggetto dalla patch (messaggi del kernel, messaggi di oops,
+eccetera) è particolarmente utile per le persone che potrebbero cercare fra
+i messaggi di log per la patch che li tratta.  Se la patch corregge un errore
+di compilazione, non sarà necessario includere proprio _tutto_ quello che
+è uscito dal compilatore; aggiungete solo quello che è necessario per far si
+che la vostra patch venga trovata.  Come nella ``summary phrase``, è importante
+essere sia brevi che descrittivi.
+
+La linea di demarcazione ``---`` serve essenzialmente a segnare dove finisce
+il messaggio di changelog.
+
+Aggiungere il ``diffstat`` dopo ``---`` è un buon uso di questo spazio, per
+mostrare i file che sono cambiati, e il numero di file aggiunto o rimossi.
+Un ``diffstat`` è particolarmente utile per le patch grandi.  Altri commenti
+che sono importanti solo per i manutentori, quindi inadatti al changelog
+permanente, dovrebbero essere messi qui.  Un buon esempio per questo tipo
+di commenti potrebbe essere quello di descrivere le differenze fra le versioni
+della patch.
+
+Se includete un ``diffstat`` dopo ``---``, usate le opzioni ``-p 1 -w70``
+cosicché i nomi dei file elencati non occupino troppo spazio (facilmente
+rientreranno negli 80 caratteri, magari con qualche indentazione).
+(``git`` genera di base dei diffstat adatti).
+
+Maggiori dettagli sul formato delle patch nei riferimenti qui di seguito.
+
+.. _it_explicit_in_reply_to:
+
+15) Usare esplicitamente In-Reply-To nell'intestazione
+------------------------------------------------------
+
+Aggiungere manualmente In-Reply-To: nell'intestazione dell'e-mail
+potrebbe essere d'aiuto per associare una patch ad una discussione
+precedente, per esempio per collegare la correzione di un baco con l'e-mail
+che lo riportava.  Tuttavia, per serie di patch multiple è generalmente
+sconsigliato l'uso di In-Reply-To: per collegare precedenti versioni.
+In questo modo versioni multiple di una patch non diventeranno un'ingestibile
+giungla di riferimenti all'interno dei programmi di posta.  Se un collegamento
+è utile, potete usare https://lkml.kernel.org/ per ottenere i collegamenti
+ad una versione precedente di una serie di patch (per esempio, potete usarlo
+per l'email introduttiva alla serie).
+
+16) Inviare richieste ``git pull``
+----------------------------------
+
+Se avete una serie di patch, potrebbe essere più conveniente per un manutentore
+tirarle dentro al repositorio del sottosistema attraverso l'operazione
+``git pull``.  Comunque, tenete presente che prendere patch da uno sviluppatore
+in questo modo richiede un livello di fiducia più alto rispetto a prenderle da
+una lista di discussione.  Di conseguenza, molti manutentori sono riluttanti
+ad accettare richieste di *pull*, specialmente dagli sviluppatori nuovi e
+quindi sconosciuti.  Se siete in dubbio, potete fare una richiesta di *pull*
+come messaggio introduttivo ad una normale pubblicazione di patch, così
+il manutentore avrà la possibilità di scegliere come integrarle.
+
+Una richiesta di *pull* dovrebbe avere nell'oggetto [GIT] o [PULL].
+La richiesta stessa dovrebbe includere il nome del repositorio e quello del
+ramo su una singola riga; dovrebbe essere più o meno così::
+
+  Please pull from
+
+      git://jdelvare.pck.nerim.net/jdelvare-2.6 i2c-for-linus
+
+  to get these changes:
+
+Una richiesta di *pull* dovrebbe includere anche un messaggio generico
+che dica cos'è incluso, una lista delle patch usando ``git shortlog``, e una
+panoramica sugli effetti della serie di patch con ``diffstat``.  Il modo più
+semplice per ottenere tutte queste informazioni è, ovviamente, quello di
+lasciar fare tutto a ``git`` con il comando ``git request-pull``.
+
+Alcuni manutentori (incluso Linus) vogliono vedere le richieste di *pull*
+da commit firmati con GPG; questo fornisce una maggiore garanzia sul fatto
+che siate stati proprio voi a fare la richiesta.  In assenza di tale etichetta
+firmata Linus, in particolare, non prenderà alcuna patch da siti pubblici come
+GitHub.
+
+Il primo passo verso la creazione di questa etichetta firmata è quello di
+creare una chiave GNUPG ed averla fatta firmare da uno o più sviluppatori
+principali del kernel.  Questo potrebbe essere difficile per i nuovi
+sviluppatori, ma non ci sono altre vie.  Andare alle conferenze potrebbe
+essere un buon modo per trovare sviluppatori che possano firmare la vostra
+chiave.
+
+Una volta che avete preparato la vostra serie di patch in ``git``, e volete che
+qualcuno le prenda, create una etichetta firmata col comando ``git tag -s``.
+Questo creerà una nuova etichetta che identifica l'ultimo commit della serie
+contenente una firma creata con la vostra chiave privata.  Avrete anche
+l'opportunità di aggiungere un messaggio di changelog all'etichetta; questo è
+il posto ideale per descrivere gli effetti della richiesta di *pull*.
+
+Se i sorgenti da cui il manutentore prenderà le patch non sono gli stessi del
+repositorio su cui state lavorando, allora non dimenticatevi di caricare
+l'etichetta firmata anche sui sorgenti pubblici.
+
+Quando generate una richiesta di *pull*, usate l'etichetta firmata come
+obiettivo.  Un comando come il seguente farà il suo dovere::
+
+  git request-pull master git://my.public.tree/linux.git my-signed-tag
+
+
+Riferimenti
+-----------
+
+Andrew Morton, "La patch perfetta" (tpp).
+  <http://www.ozlabs.org/~akpm/stuff/tpp.txt>
+
+Jeff Garzik, "Formato per la sottomissione di patch per il kernel Linux"
+  <http://linux.yyz.us/patch-format.html>
+
+Greg Kroah-Hartman, "Come scocciare un manutentore di un sottosistema"
+  <http://www.kroah.com/log/linux/maintainer.html>
+
+  <http://www.kroah.com/log/linux/maintainer-02.html>
+
+  <http://www.kroah.com/log/linux/maintainer-03.html>
+
+  <http://www.kroah.com/log/linux/maintainer-04.html>
+
+  <http://www.kroah.com/log/linux/maintainer-05.html>
+
+  <http://www.kroah.com/log/linux/maintainer-06.html>
+
+No!!!! Basta gigantesche bombe patch alle persone sulla lista linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org!
+  <https://lkml.org/lkml/2005/7/11/336>
+
+Kernel Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/coding-style.rst:
+  :ref:`Documentation/translations/it_IT/process/coding-style.rst <it_codingstyle>`
+
+E-mail di Linus Torvalds sul formato canonico di una patch:
+  <http://lkml.org/lkml/2005/4/7/183>
+
+Andi Kleen, "Su come sottomettere patch del kernel"
+  Alcune strategie su come sottomettere modifiche toste o controverse.
+
+  http://halobates.de/on-submitting-patches.pdf
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/ja_JP/SubmitChecklist b/Documentation/translations/ja_JP/SubmitChecklist
index 60c7c35ac517..b42220d3d46c 100644
--- a/Documentation/translations/ja_JP/SubmitChecklist
+++ b/Documentation/translations/ja_JP/SubmitChecklist
@@ -74,38 +74,34 @@ Linux カー�ルパッ�投稿者���ェックリスト
 13: CONFIG_SMP, CONFIG_PREEMPT を有効���場��無効���場��両方�
     ビルド��上�動作確�を行������。
 
-14: も�パッ��ディスク�I/O性能���影響を与�るよ���れ��
-    'CONFIG_LBDAF'オプションを有効���場��無効���場��両方�
-    テストを実施��������。
+14: lockdep�機能を全�有効���上��全��コードパスを評価������。
 
-15: lockdep�機能を全�有効���上��全��コードパスを評価������。
-
-16: /proc �新��エントリを追加��場����Documentation/ �下�
+15: /proc �新��エントリを追加��場����Documentation/ �下�
     必�ドキュメントを追加������。
 
-17: 新��ブートパラメータを追加��場����
+16: 新��ブートパラメータを追加��場����
     必�Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.rst �説明を追加������。
 
-18: 新��module�パラメータを追加��場����MODULE_PARM_DESC()を
+17: 新��module�パラメータを追加��場����MODULE_PARM_DESC()を
     利用��必���説明を記述������。
 
-19: 新��userspaceインタフェースを作���場����Documentation/ABI/ �
+18: 新��userspaceインタフェースを作���場����Documentation/ABI/ �
     Documentation/ABI/README を�考���必�ドキュメントを追加������。
 
-20: 'make headers_check'を実行��全��題�����を確�������。
+19: 'make headers_check'を実行��全��題�����を確�������。
 
-21: 少���もslabアロケーション�pageアロケーション�失敗��場��
+20: 少���もslabアロケーション�pageアロケーション�失敗��場��
     挙動�����fault-injectionを利用��確�������。
     Documentation/fault-injection/ を�照������。
 
     追加��コード���り�������ら��サブシステム特有�
     fault-injectionを追加�����良��も�れ��ん。
 
-22: 新��追加��コード��`gcc -W'�コンパイル������。
+21: 新��追加��コード��`gcc -W'�コンパイル������。
     ��オプション�大�����メッセージを出力�����
     "warning: comparison between signed and unsigned" �よ��メッセージ��
     �グを見��る��役�立���。
 
-23: 投稿��パッ�� -mm パッ�セット�マージ�れ�後�全��既存�パッ�や
+22: 投稿��パッ�� -mm パッ�セット�マージ�れ�後�全��既存�パッ�や
     VM, VFS �よ���他�サブシステム�関�る様々�変更���時点�も共存
     ��る��を確��るテストを行������。
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/ja_JP/SubmittingPatches b/Documentation/translations/ja_JP/SubmittingPatches
index 02139656463e..ad979c3c06a6 100644
--- a/Documentation/translations/ja_JP/SubmittingPatches
+++ b/Documentation/translations/ja_JP/SubmittingPatches
@@ -58,8 +58,8 @@ Linux カーãƒ�ルã�«å¯¾ã�™ã‚‹å…¨ã�¦ã�®å¤‰æ›´ã�¯ diff(1) コマンドã�«ã‚ˆã‚‹ãƒ
 1個�ファイル�����パッ�を作��る�������ん��場��
 以下�作業を行���分��。
 
-	SRCTREE= linux-2.6
-	MYFILE=  drivers/net/mydriver.c
+	SRCTREE=linux-2.6
+	MYFILE=drivers/net/mydriver.c
 
 	cd $SRCTREE
 	cp $MYFILE $MYFILE.orig
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Linux カーãƒ�ルã�«å¯¾ã�™ã‚‹å…¨ã�¦ã�®å¤‰æ›´ã�¯ diff(1) コマンドã�«ã‚ˆã‚‹ãƒ
 ���変更を加���� Linux カー�ルを展開��自分� Linux カー�ル
 ソース��差分を生���������ん。例���
 
-	MYSRC= /devel/linux-2.6
+	MYSRC=/devel/linux-2.6
 
 	tar xvfz linux-2.6.12.tar.gz
 	mv linux-2.6.12 linux-2.6.12-vanilla
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/ja_JP/howto.rst b/Documentation/translations/ja_JP/howto.rst
index f3116381c26b..2621b770a745 100644
--- a/Documentation/translations/ja_JP/howto.rst
+++ b/Documentation/translations/ja_JP/howto.rst
@@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ Linux カーãƒ�ルソースツリーã�®ä¸­ã�«å�«ã�¾ã‚Œã‚‹ã€�ã��ã‚Œã�„ã�«ã�—ã€�ä¿
 ����。��最新�素晴��カー�ルコード�リ�ジトリ�以下�見��り
 �� -
 
-	http://lxr.free-electrons.com/
+	https://elixir.bootlin.com/
 
 開発プロセス
 ------------
@@ -256,7 +256,6 @@ Linux カーãƒ�ルã�®é–‹ç™ºãƒ—ロセスã�¯ç�¾åœ¨å¹¾ã�¤ã�‹ã�®ç•°ã�ªã‚‹ãƒ¡ã‚¤ãƒ³ã‚
 
   - メイン� 4.x カー�ルツリー
   - 4.x.y -stable カー�ルツリー
-  - 4.x -git カー�ルパッ�
   - サブシステム毎�カー�ルツリー�パッ�
   - 統�テスト���� 4.x -next カー�ルツリー
 
@@ -319,15 +318,6 @@ Documentation/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst ファイルã�«ã�¯ã�©ã�®ã‚ˆã�†ã�ªç
 類�変更� -stable ツリー���入れ�能����リリースプロセス���
 動���記述�れ����。
 
-4.x -git パッ�
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-git リ�ジトリ�管��れ��るLinus �カー�ルツリー�毎日�スナップ
-ショット��り��。(��ら -git ������������)。�れら�パッ
-����む�毎日リリース�れ��り�Linus �ツリー��状を表���。�
-れ� -rc カー�ル�比���パッ��大丈夫����も確�����自動的
-�生��れる���より実験的��。
-
 サブシステム毎�カー�ルツリー�パッ�
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/ko_KR/howto.rst b/Documentation/translations/ko_KR/howto.rst
index a8197e072599..bcd63731b80a 100644
--- a/Documentation/translations/ko_KR/howto.rst
+++ b/Documentation/translations/ko_KR/howto.rst
@@ -77,10 +77,12 @@ Documentation/process/howto.rst
 
 리눅스 커� 소스 코드는 GPL로 배�(release)�었다. 소스트리� 메�
 디렉토리� 있는 ��센스� 관하여 �세하게 쓰여 있는 COPYING��는
-파�� ��. 여러분� ��센스� 관한 � 깊� 문제를 가지고 있다면
-리눅스 커� 메�� 리스트� 묻지�고 변호사와 연�하�. 메��
-리스트들� 있는 사람들� 변호사가 아니기 때문� 법� 문제� 관하여
-그들� �� �지해서는 안�다.
+파�� ��. 리눅스 커� ��센싱 규칙과 소스 코드 안� `SPDX
+<https://spdx.org/>`_ �별� 사용법�
+:ref:`Documentation/process/license-rules.rst <kernel_licensing>` � 설명�어
+있다. 여러분� ��센스� 관한 � 깊� 문제를 가지고 있다면 리눅스 커� 메��
+리스트� 묻지�고 변호사와 연�하�. 메�� 리스트들� 있는 사람들� 변호사가
+아니기 때문� 법� 문제� 관하여 그들� �� �지해서는 안�다.
 
 GPL� 관한 잦� 질문들과 답변들� 다�� 참조하�.
 
@@ -99,7 +101,7 @@ mtk.manpages@gmail.com� 메�테�너�게 보낼 것� 권장한다.
 
 다�� 커� 소스 트리� 있는 �어야 할 파�들� 리스트�다.
 
-  README
+  :ref:`Documentation/admin-guide/README.rst <readme>`
     � 파�� 리눅스 커�� 관하여 간단한 배경 설명과 커�� 설정하고
     빌드하기 위해 필요한 것� 설명한다. 커�� 입문하는 사람들� 여기서
     시작해야 한다.
@@ -220,13 +222,6 @@ ReST 마í�¬ì—…ì�„ 사용하는 문서들ì�€ Documentation/output ì—� ìƒ�성ë�œë‹
 가지고 있지 않다면 다�� 무엇� 해야할지� 관한 방향� 배울 수 있�
 것�다.
 
-여러분들� �미 커� 트리� 반�하길 �하는 코드 묶�� 가지고 있지만
-올바른 �맷으로 �장하는� �움� 필요하다면 그러한 문제를 �기 위해
-만들어진 kernel-mentors 프로�트가 있다. 그곳� 메�� 리스트�며
-다��서 참조할 수 있다.
-
-         https://selenic.com/mailman/listinfo/kernel-mentors
-
 리눅스 커� 코드� 실제 변경� 하기 전� 반드시 그 코드가 어떻게
 �작하는지 �해하고 있어야 한다. 코드를 분�하기 위하여 특정한 툴�
 �움� 빌려서�� 코드를 �접 �는 것보다 좋� 것� 없다(대부분�
@@ -235,7 +230,7 @@ ReST 마í�¬ì—…ì�„ 사용하는 문서들ì�€ Documentation/output ì—� ìƒ�성ë�œë‹
 소스코드를 ��스� 웹 페�지들� 형태로 보여준다. 최신� 멋진 커�
 코드 저장소는 다�� 통하여 참조할 수 있다.
 
-      http://lxr.free-electrons.com/
+      https://elixir.bootlin.com/
 
 
 개발 프로세스
@@ -247,7 +242,6 @@ ReST 마í�¬ì—…ì�„ 사용하는 문서들ì�€ Documentation/output ì—� ìƒ�성ë�œë‹
 
   - main 4.x 커� 트리
   - 4.x.y - 안정� 커� 트리
-  - 4.x -git 커� 패치들
   - 서브시스템� 위한 커� 트리들과 패치들
   - 4.x - 통합 테스트를 위한 next 커� 트리
 
@@ -303,17 +297,9 @@ Andrew Morton� 글� 있다.
 4.x.y는 "stable" 팀<stable@vger.kernel.org>� �해 관리�며 거� 매번 격주로
 배��다.
 
-커� 트리 문서들 내� Documentation/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst 파�� 어떤
-종류� 변경들� -stable 트리로 들어왔는지와 배� 프로세스가 어떻게
-진행�는지를 설명한다.
-
-4.x -git 패치들
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-git 저장소(그러므로 -git��는 �름� 붙�)�는 날마다 관리�는 Linus�
-커� 트리� snapshot 들� 있다. � 패치들� �반�으로 날마다 배��며
-Linus� 트리� 현재 �태를 나타낸다. � 패치들� 정���지 조금�
-살펴보지 않고 ���으로 �성� 것�므로 -rc 커�들 보다� � 실험��다.
+커� 트리 문서들 내� :ref:`Documentation/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst <stable_kernel_rules>`
+파�� 어떤 종류� 변경들� -stable 트리로 들어왔는지와
+배� 프로세스가 어떻게 진행�는지를 설명한다.
 
 서브시스템 커� 트리들과 패치들
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
@@ -360,9 +346,10 @@ https://bugzilla.kernel.org 는 리눅스 커ë„� 개발ìž�들ì�´ 커ë„�ì�˜ 버ê·
 
     https://bugzilla.kernel.org/page.cgi?id=faq.html
 
-메� 커� 소스 디렉토리� 있는 admin-guide/reporting-bugs.rst 파�� 커� 버그�고 ���는
-것� 보고하는 방법� 관한 좋� 템플릿�며 문제를 추�하기 위해서 커�
-개발�들� 필요로 하는 정보가 무엇들�지를 �세히 설명하고 있다.
+메� 커� 소스 디렉토리� 있는 :ref:`admin-guide/reporting-bugs.rst <reportingbugs>`
+파�� 커� 버그�고 ���는 것� 보고하는 방법� 관한 좋� 템플릿�며 문제를
+추�하기 위해서 커� 개발�들� 필요로 하는 정보가 무엇들�지를 �세히 설명하고
+있다.
 
 
 버그 리�트들� 관리
@@ -377,15 +364,7 @@ https://bugzilla.kernel.org 는 리눅스 커ë„� 개발ìž�들ì�´ 커ë„�ì�˜ 버ê·
 다른 사람들� 버그들� 수정하기 위하여 시간� 낭비하지 않기 때문�다.
 
 �미 보고� 버그 리�트들� 가지고 작업하기 위해서 https://bugzilla.kernel.org
-를 참조하�. 여러분� 앞으로 �겨날 버그 리�트들� 조언�가 �길 �한다면
-bugme-new 메�� 리스트나(새로운 버그 리�트들만� �곳�서 메�로 전해진다)
-bugme-janitor 메�� 리스트(bugzilla� 모든 변화들� 여기서 메�로 전해진다)
-� 등�하면 �다.
-
-      https://lists.linux-foundation.org/mailman/listinfo/bugme-new
-
-      https://lists.linux-foundation.org/mailman/listinfo/bugme-janitors
-
+를 참조하�.
 
 
 메�� 리스트들
@@ -430,7 +409,8 @@ bugme-janitor ë©”ì�¼ë§� 리스트(bugzillaì—� 모든 변화들ì�´ 여기서 ë©”ì
 "John 커�해커는 작성했다...."를 유지하며 여러분들� �견� 그 메�� 윗부분�
 작성하지 �고 � �용한 단�들 사�� 넣어�.
 
-여러분들� 패치들� 메�� 넣는다면 그것들� Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst�
+여러분들� 패치들� 메�� 넣는다면 그것들�
+:ref:`Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst <submittingpatches>` ì—�
 나와있는�로 명백히(plain) �� 수 있는 �스트여야 한다. 커� 개발�들�
 첨부파��나 압축� 패치들� �하지 않는다. 그들� 여러분들� 패치�
 � �� 단위로 코멘트를 하길 �하며 압축하거나 첨부하지 않고 보내는 것�
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/ko_KR/memory-barriers.txt b/Documentation/translations/ko_KR/memory-barriers.txt
index 7f01fb1c1084..db0b9d8619f1 100644
--- a/Documentation/translations/ko_KR/memory-barriers.txt
+++ b/Documentation/translations/ko_KR/memory-barriers.txt
@@ -493,10 +493,8 @@ CPU �게 기대할 수 있는 최소한� 보장사항 몇가지가 있습니
      � 타입� 오�레�션� 단방향� 투과성 배리어처럼 �작합니다.  ACQUIRE
      오�레�션 뒤� 모든 메모리 오�레�션들� ACQUIRE 오�레�션 후�
      �어난 것으로 시스템� 나머지 컴�넌트들� 보�게 � 것� 보장�니다.
-     LOCK 오�레�션과 smp_load_acquire(), smp_cond_acquire() 오�레�션�
-     ACQUIRE 오�레�션� �함�니다.  smp_cond_acquire() 오�레�션� 컨트롤
-     �존성과 smp_rmb() 를 사용해서 ACQUIRE � �미� 요구사항(semantic)�
-     충족시킵니다.
+     LOCK 오�레�션과 smp_load_acquire(), smp_cond_load_acquire() 오�레�션�
+     ACQUIRE 오�레�션� �함�니다.
 
      ACQUIRE 오�레�션 앞� 메모리 오�레�션들� ACQUIRE 오�레�션 완료 후�
      수행� 것처럼 보� 수 있습니다.
@@ -2146,33 +2144,40 @@ set_current_state() 는 다�� 것들로 �싸질 수� 있습니다:
 	event_indicated = 1;
 	wake_up_process(event_daemon);
 
-wake_up() 류� �해 쓰기 메모리 배리어가 내��니다.  만약 그것들� 뭔가를
-깨운다면요.  � 배리어는 태스� �태가 지워지기 전� 수행�므로, �벤트를
-알리기 위한 STORE 와 태스� �태를 TASK_RUNNING 으로 설정하는 STORE 사��
-위치하게 �니다.
+wake_up() � 무언가를 깨우게 �면, � 함수는 범용 메모리 배리어를 수행합니다.
+� 함수가 아무것� 깨우지 않는다면 메모리 배리어는 수행� 수�, 수행�지 않�
+수� 있습니다; � 경우� 메모리 배리어를 수행할 거� 오해해선 안�니다.  �
+배리어는 태스� �태가 접근�기 전� 수행�는�, �세히 �하면 � �벤트를
+알리기 위한 STORE 와 TASK_RUNNING 으로 �태를 쓰는 STORE 사�� 수행�니다:
 
-	CPU 1				CPU 2
+	CPU 1 (Sleeper)			CPU 2 (Waker)
 	===============================	===============================
 	set_current_state();		STORE event_indicated
 	  smp_store_mb();		wake_up();
-	    STORE current->state	  <쓰기 배리어>
-	    <범용 배리어>		  STORE current->state
-	LOAD event_indicated
+	    STORE current->state	  ...
+	    <범용 배리어>		  <범용 배리어>
+	LOAD event_indicated		  if ((LOAD task->state) & TASK_NORMAL)
+					    STORE task->state
 
-한번� �합니다만, � 쓰기 메모리 배리어는 � 코드가 정�로 뭔가를 깨울 때�만
-실행�니다.  �걸 설명하기 위해, X 와 Y 는 모� 0 으로 초기화 �어 있다는 가정
-하� 아래� �벤트 시퀀스를 ��해 봅시다:
+여기서 "task" 는 깨어나지는 쓰레드�고 CPU 1 � "current" 와 같습니다.
+
+반복하지만, wake_up() � 무언가를 정� 깨운다면 범용 메모리 배리어가 수행�
+것� 보장�지만, 그렇지 않다면 그런 보장� 없습니다.  �걸 �해하기 위해, X 와
+Y 는 모� 0 으로 초기화 �어 있다는 가정 하� 아래� �벤트 시퀀스를 ��해
+봅시다:
 
 	CPU 1				CPU 2
 	===============================	===============================
-	X = 1;				STORE event_indicated
+	X = 1;				Y = 1;
 	smp_mb();			wake_up();
-	Y = 1;				wait_event(wq, Y == 1);
-	wake_up();			  load from Y sees 1, no memory barrier
-					load from X might see 0
+	LOAD Y				LOAD X
+
+정�로 깨우기가 행해졌다면, � 로드 중 (최소한) 하나는 1 � 보게 �니다.
+반면�, 실제 깨우기가 행해지지 않았다면, � 로드 모� 0� 볼 수� 있습니다.
 
-위 예제�서� 경우와 달리 깨우기가 정�로 행해졌다면, CPU 2 � X 로드는 1 �
-본다고 보장� 수 있� �니다.
+wake_up_process() 는 항� 범용 메모리 배리어를 수행합니다.  � 배리어 역시
+태스� �태가 접근�기 전� 수행�니다.  특히, 앞� 예제 코드�서 wake_up() �
+wake_up_process() 로 대체�다면 � 로드 중 하나는 1� 볼 것� 보장�니다.
 
 사용 가능한 깨우기류 함수들로 다�과 같� 것들� 있습니다:
 
@@ -2192,6 +2197,8 @@ wake_up() 류ì—� ì�˜í•´ 쓰기 메모리 배리어가 ë‚´í�¬ë�©ë‹ˆë‹¤.  만약 ê
 	wake_up_poll();
 	wake_up_process();
 
+메모리 순서규칙 관��서, � 함수들� 모� wake_up() 과 같거나 보다 강한 순서
+보장� 제공합니다.
 
 [!] 잠재우는 코드와 깨우는 코드� 내��는 메모리 배리어들� 깨우기 전�
 �루어진 스토어를 잠재우는 코드가 set_current_state() 를 호출한 후� 행하는
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/SubmittingPatches b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/SubmittingPatches
deleted file mode 100644
index e9098da8f1a4..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/SubmittingPatches
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,412 +0,0 @@
-Chinese translated version of Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst
-
-If you have any comment or update to the content, please contact the
-original document maintainer directly.  However, if you have a problem
-communicating in English you can also ask the Chinese maintainer for
-help.  Contact the Chinese maintainer if this translation is outdated
-or if there is a problem with the translation.
-
-Chinese maintainer: TripleX Chung <triplex@zh-kernel.org>
----------------------------------------------------------------------
-Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst 的中文翻译
-
-如果想评论或更新本文的内容，请直接�系原文档的维护者。如果你使用英文
-交�有困难的�，也�以�中文版维护者求助。如果本翻译更新��时或者翻
-译存在问题，请�系中文版维护者。
-
-中文版维护者： 钟宇 TripleX Chung <triplex@zh-kernel.org>
-中文版翻译者： 钟宇 TripleX Chung <triplex@zh-kernel.org>
-中文版校译者： �阳 Li Yang <leo@zh-kernel.org>
-               王� Wang Cong <xiyou.wangcong@gmail.com>
-
-以下为正文
----------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-   如何让你的改动进入内核
-     或者
-  获得亲爱的 Linus Torvalds 的关注和处�
-----------------------------------
-
-对于想�将改动�交到 Linux 内核的个人或者公��说，如果�熟悉“规矩�，
-�交的�程会让人�惧。本文档收集了一系列建议，这些建议�以大大的�高你
-的改动被接�的机会。
-阅读 Documentation/process/submit-checklist.rst �获得在�交代��需�检查的项目的列
-表。如果你在�交一个驱动程�，那么�时阅读一下
-Documentation/process/submitting-drivers.rst 。
-
-
---------------------------
-第一节 - 创建并��你的改动
---------------------------
-
-1) "diff -up"
------------
-
-使用 "diff -up" 或者 "diff -uprN" �创建补�。
-
-所有内核的改动，都是以补�的形�呈现的，补�由 diff(1) 生�。创建补�的
-时候，�确认它是以 "unified diff" 格�创建的，这�格�由 diff(1) 的 '-u'
-�数生�。而且，请使用 '-p' �数，那样会显示�个改动所在的C函数，使得
-产生的补�容易读得多。补�应该基于内核�代�树的根目录，而�是里边的任
-何�目录。
-为一个�独的文件创建补�，一般�说这样�就够了：
-
-        SRCTREE= linux-2.6
-        MYFILE=  drivers/net/mydriver.c
-
-        cd $SRCTREE
-        cp $MYFILE $MYFILE.orig
-        vi $MYFILE      # make your change
-        cd ..
-        diff -up $SRCTREE/$MYFILE{.orig,} > /tmp/patch
-
-为多个文件创建补�，你�以解开一个没有修改过的内核�代�树，然�和你自
-己的代�树之间� diff 。例如：
-
-        MYSRC= /devel/linux-2.6
-
-        tar xvfz linux-2.6.12.tar.gz
-        mv linux-2.6.12 linux-2.6.12-vanilla
-        diff -uprN -X linux-2.6.12-vanilla/Documentation/dontdiff \
-                linux-2.6.12-vanilla $MYSRC > /tmp/patch
-
-"dontdiff" 是内核在编译的时候产生的文件的列表，列表中的文件在 diff(1)
-产生的补�里会被跳过。"dontdiff" 文件被包�在2.6.12和之�版本的内核�代
-�树中。对于更早的内核版本，你�以从
-<http://www.xenotime.net/linux/doc/dontdiff> 获�它。
-确定你的补�里没有包�任何�属于这次补��交的�外文件。记得在用diff(1)
-生�补�之�，审阅一次补�，以确�准确。
-如果你的改动很散乱，你应该研究一下如何将补�分割�独立的部分，将改动分
-割�一系列�乎逻辑的步骤。这样更容易让其他内核开�者审核，如果你想你的
-补�被接�，这是很��的。下�这些脚本能够帮助你�这件事情：
-Quilt:
-http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/quilt
-
-2)�述你的改动。
-�述你的改动包�的技术细节。
-
-�多具体就写多具体。最糟糕的�述�能是�下�这些语�：“更新了�驱动程
-��，“修正了�驱动程�的bug�，或者“这个补�包�了��系统的修改，请
-使用。�
-
-如果你的�述开始�长，这表示你也许需�拆分你的补�了，请看第3�节，
-继续。
-
-3)拆分你的改动
-
-将改动拆分，逻辑类似的放到�一个补�文件里。
-
-例如，如果你的改动里�时有bug修正和性能优化，那么把这些改动拆分到两个或
-者更多的补�文件中。如果你的改动包�对API的修改，并且修改了驱动程��适
-应这些新的API，那么把这些修改分�两个补�。
-
-�一方�，如果你将一个�独的改动��多个补�文件，那么将它们�并�一个
-�独的补�文件。这样一个逻辑上�独的改动�被包�在一个补�文件里。
-
-如果有一个补��赖�外一个补��完�它的改动，那没问题。简�的在你的补
-��述里指出“这个补��赖�补��就好了。
-
-如果你�能将补�浓缩�更少的文件，那么�次大约��出15个，然�等待审查
-和整�。
-
-4)选择 e-mail 的收件人
-
-看一� MAINTAINERS 文件和�代�，看看你所的改动所在的内核�系统有没有指
-定的维护者。如果有，给他们�e-mail。
-
-如果没有找到维护者，或者维护者没有�馈，将你的补���到内核开�者主邮
-件列表 linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org。大部分的内核开�者都跟踪这个邮件列
-表，�以评价你的改动。
-
-�次����超过15个补�到 vger 邮件列表���
-
-Linus Torvalds 是决定改动能�进入 Linux 内核的最终�决者。他的 e-mail
-地�是 <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> 。他收到的 e-mail 很多，所以一般
-的说，最好别给他� e-mail。
-
-那些修正bug，“显而易��的修改或者是类似的�需�很少讨论的补��以直接
-��或者CC给Linus。那些需�讨论或者没有很清楚的好处的补�，一般先��到
-linux-kernel邮件列表。�有当补�被讨论得差�多了，��交给Linus。
-
-5)选择CC( e-mail 抄�)列表
-
-除�你有�由�这样�，�则CC linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org。
-
-除了 Linus 之外，其他内核开�者也需�注�到你的改动，这样他们�能评论你
-的改动并�供代�审查和建议。linux-kernel 是 Linux 内核开�者主邮件列表
-。其它的邮件列表为特定的�系统�供�务，比如 USB，framebuffer 设备，虚
-拟文件系统，SCSI �系统，等等。查看 MAINTAINERS 文件�获得和你的改动有
-关的邮件列表。
-
-Majordomo lists of VGER.KERNEL.ORG at:
-        <http://vger.kernel.org/vger-lists.html>
-
-如果改动影�了用户空间和内核之间的接�，请给 MAN-PAGES 的维护者（列在
-MAINTAINERS 文件里的）��一个手册页（man-pages）补�，或者至少通知一下改
-�，让一些信�有途径进入手册页。
-
-�使在第四步的时候，维护者没有作出回应，也�确认在修改他们的代�的时候
-，一直将维护者拷�到CC列表中。
-
-对于�的补�，你也许会CC到 Adrian Bunk 管�的�集�碎补�的邮件列表
-(Trivial Patch Monkey)trivial@kernel.org，那里专门收集�碎的补�。下�这样
-的补�会被看作“�碎的�补�：
-  文档的拼写修正。
-  修正会影�到 grep(1) 的拼写。
-  警告信�修正(频�的打�无用的警告是�好的。)
-  编译错误修正（代�逻辑的确是对的，�是编译有问题。）
-  �行时修正（��真的修正了错误。）
-  移除使用了被废弃的函数/�的代�(例如 check_region。)
-  �系方�和文档修正。
-  用�移�的代�替���移�的代�（�使在体系结构相关的代�中，既然有
-  人拷�，��它是�碎的）
-  任何文件的作者/维护者对该文件的改动（例如 patch monkey 在�传模�下）
-
-EMAIL: trivial@kernel.org
-
-(译注，关于“�碎补��的一些说明：因为原文的这一部分写得比较简�，所以�得�
-�例写一下译注。"trivial"这个英文��的本�是“�碎的，���的。�但是在这里
-有�微有一些�化，例如对一些明显的NULL指针的修正，属于�行时修正，会被归类
-到�碎补�里。虽然NULL指针的修正很��，但是这样的修正往往很�而且很容易得到
-检验，所以也被归入�碎补�。�碎补�更精确的归类应该是
-“simple, localized & easy to verify�，也就是说简�的，局部的和易于检验的。
-trivial@kernel.org邮件列表的目的是针对这样的补�，为�交者�供一个中心，�
-�低�交的门槛。)
-
-6)没有 MIME 编�，没有链接，没有压缩，没有附件，�有纯文本。
-
-Linus 和其他的内核开�者需�阅读和评论你�交的改动。对于内核开�者�说
-，�以“引用�你的改动很��，使用一般的 e-mail 工具，他们就�以在你的
-代�的任何�置添加评论。
-
-因为这个原因，所有的�交的补�都是 e-mail 中“内嵌�的。
-警告：如果你使用剪切-粘贴你的补�，�心你的编辑器的自动�行功能破�你的
-补�。
-
-��将补�作为 MIME 编�的附件，�管是�压缩。很多�行的 e-mail 软件�
-是任何时候都将 MIME 编�的附件当作纯文本��的，这会使得别人无法在你的
-代�中加评论。�外，MIME 编�的附件会让 Linus 多花一点时间�处�，这就
-�低了你的改动被接�的�能性。
-
-警告：一些邮件软件，比如 Mozilla 会将你的信�以如下格���：
----- 邮件头 ----
-Content-Type: text/plain; charset=us-ascii; format=flowed
----- 邮件头 ----
-问题在于 “format=flowed� 会让接收端的�些邮件软件将邮件中的制表符替�
-�空格以��一些类似的替�。这样，你��的时候看起�没问题的补�就被破
-�了。
-
-�修正这个问题，�需�将你的 mozilla 的 defaults/pref/mailnews.js 文件
-里的
-pref("mailnews.send_plaintext_flowed", false); // RFC 2646=======
-修改�
-pref("mailnews.display.disable_format_flowed_support", true);
-就�以了。
-
-7) e-mail 的大�
-
-给 Linus ��补�的时候，永远按照第6�节说的�。
-
-大的改动对邮件列表��适，对�些维护者也��适。如果你的补�，在�压缩
-的情况下，超过了40kB，那么你最好将补�放在一个能通过 internet 访问的�
-务器上，然�用指�你的补�的 URL 替代。
-
-8) 指出你的内核版本
-
-在标题和在补�的�述中，指出补�对应的内核的版本，是很��的。
-
-如果补��能干净的在最新版本的内核上打上，Linus 是�会接�它的。
-
-9) ��气�，继续�交。
-
-当你�交了改动以�，�心地等待。如果 Linus 喜欢你的改动并且��它，那么
-它将在下一个内核�布版本中出现。
-
-然而，如果你的改动没有出现在下一个版本的内核中，�能有若干原因。�少那
-些原因，修正错误，�新�交更新�的改动，是你自己的工作。
-
-Linus�给出任何评论就“丢弃�你的补�是常�的事情。在系统中这样的事情很
-平常。如果他没有接�你的补�，也许是由于以下原因：
-* 你的补��能在最新版本的内核上干净的打上。
-* 你的补�在 linux-kernel 邮件列表中没有得到充分的讨论。
-* 风格问题（�照第2�节）
-* 邮件格�问题（�读本节）
-* 你的改动有技术问题。
-* 他收到了��的 e-mail，而你的在混乱中丢失了。
-* 你让人为难。
-
-有疑问的时候，在 linux-kernel 邮件列表上请求评论。
-
-10) 在标题上加上 PATCH 的字样
-
-Linus 和 linux-kernel 邮件列表的 e-mail ��都很高，一个通常的约定是标
-题行以 [PATCH] 开头。这样�以让 Linus 和其他内核开�人员�以从 e-mail
-的讨论中很轻易的将补�分辨出�。
-
-11）为你的工作签�
-
-为了加强对��了何事的追踪，尤其是对那些�过好几层的维护者的补�，我们
-建议在��出去的补�上加一个 “sign-off� 的过程。
-
-"sign-off" 是在补�的注释的最�的简�的一行文字，认�你编写了它或者其他
-人有�力将它作为开放�代�的补�传递。规则很简�：如果你能认�如下信�
-：
-      开�者���书 1.1
-      对于本项目的贡献，我认�如下信�：
-      （a）这些贡献是完全或者部分的由我创建，我有�利以文件中指出
-       的开放�代�许���交它；或者
-      （b）这些贡献基于以�的工作，�我所知，这些以�的工作��当的开放
-       �代�许���护，而且，根�许��，我有��交修改�的贡献，
-       无论是完全还是部分由我创造，这些贡献都使用�一个开放�代�许��
-       （除�我被�许用其它的许��），正如文件中指出的；或者
-      （c）这些贡献由认�（a），（b）或者（c）的人直接�供给我，而
-       且我没有修改它。
-      （d）我�解并��这个项目和贡献是公开的，贡献的记录（包括我
-       一起�交的个人记录，包括 sign-off ）被永久维护并且�以和这个项目
-       或者开放�代�的许���步地��行。
-       那么加入这样一行：
-       Signed-off-by: Random J Developer <random@developer.example.org>
-
-使用你的真�（抱歉，�能使用��或者匿�。）
-
-有人在最�加上标签。现在这些东西会被忽略，但是你�以这样�，�标记公�
-内部的过程，或者�是指出关于 sign-off 的一些特殊细节。
-
-12）标准补�格�
-
-标准的补�，标题行是：
-    Subject: [PATCH 001/123] �系统:一��概述
-
-标准补�的信体存在如下部分：
-
-  - 一个 "from" 行指出补�作者。
-
-  - 一个空行
-
-  - 说明的主体，这些说明文字会被拷�到�述该补�的永久改动记录里。
-
-  - 一个由"---"构�的标记行
-
-  - ��适放到改动记录里的�外的注解。
-
-  - 补�本身（diff 输出）
-
-标题行的格�，使得对标题行按字��排��常的容易 - 很多 e-mail 客户端都
-�以支� - 因为�列�是用零填充的，所以按数字排�和按字�排�是一样的。
-
-e-mail 标题中的“�系统�标识哪个内核�系统将被打补�。
-
-e-mail 标题中的“一��概述�扼�的�述 e-mail 中的补�。“一��概述�
-�应该是一个文件�。对于一个补�系列（“补�系列�指一系列的多个相关补
-�），��对�个补�都使用�样的“一��概述�。
-
-记� e-mail 的“一��概述�会�为该补�的全局唯一标识。它会蔓延到 git
-的改动记录里。然�“一��概述�会被用在开�者的讨论里，用�指代这个补
-�。用户将希望通过 google ��索"一��概述"�找到那些讨论这个补�的文
-章。
-
-一些标题的例�：
-
-    Subject: [patch 2/5] ext2: improve scalability of bitmap searching
-    Subject: [PATCHv2 001/207] x86: fix eflags tracking
-
-"from" 行是信体里的最上�一行，具有如下格�：
-        From: Original Author <author@example.com>
-
-"from" 行指明在永久改动日志里，�会被确认为作者。如果没有 "from" 行，那
-么邮件头里的 "From: " 行会被用�决定改动日志中的作者。
-
-说明的主题将会被�交到永久的�代�改动日志里，因此对那些早已��记得和
-这个补�相关的讨论细节的有能力的读者�说，是有�义的。
-
-"---" 标记行对于补�处�工具�找到哪里是改动日志信�的结�，是��缺少
-的。
-
-对于 "---" 标记之�的�外注解，一个好的用途就是用�写 diffstat，用�显
-示修改了什么文件和�个文件都增加和删除了多少行。diffstat 对于比较大的补
-�特别有用。其余那些�是和时刻或者开�者相关的注解，��适放到永久的改
-动日志里的，也应该放这里。
-使用 diffstat的选项 "-p 1 -w 70" 这样文件�就会从内核�代�树的目录开始
-，�会�用太宽的空间（很容易适�80列的宽度，也许会有一些缩进。）
-
-在��的�考资料中能看到适当的补�格�的更多细节。
-
--------------------------------
-第二节 �示，建议和诀�
--------------------------------
-
-本节包�很多和�交到内核的代�有关的通常的"规则"。事情永远有例外...但是
-你必须真的有好的�由这样�。你�以把本节��Linus的计算机科学入门课。
-
-1) 读 Document/process/coding-style.rst
-
-Nuff 说过，如果你的代�和这个�离太多，那么它有�能会被拒�，没有更多的
-审查，没有更多的评价。
-
-2) #ifdef 是丑陋的
-混�了 ifdef 的代�难以阅读和维护。别这样�。作为替代，将你的 ifdef 放
-在头文件里，有�件地定义 "static inline" 函数，或者�，在代�里用这些东
-西。让编译器把那些"空�作"优化掉。
-
-一个简�的例�，�好的代�：
-
-    dev = alloc_etherdev (sizeof(struct funky_private));
-    if (!dev)
-        return -ENODEV;
-    #ifdef CONFIG_NET_FUNKINESS
-    init_funky_net(dev);
-    #endif
-
-清��的例�:
-
-(头文件里)
-    #ifndef CONFIG_NET_FUNKINESS
-    static inline void init_funky_net (struct net_device *d) {}
-    #endif
-
-(代�文件里)
-    dev = alloc_etherdev (sizeof(struct funky_private));
-    if (!dev)
-        return -ENODEV;
-    init_funky_net(dev);
-
-3) 'static inline' 比�好
-
-Static inline 函数相比��说，是好得多的选择。Static inline 函数�供了
-类型安全，没有长度�制，没有格��制，在 gcc 下开销和�一样�。
-
-��在 static inline 函数�是最优的时候[在 fast paths 里有很少的独立的
-案例]，或者��能用 static inline 函数的时候[例如字符串分�]。
-应该用 'static inline' 而�是 'static __inline__', 'extern inline' 和
-'extern __inline__' 。
-
-4) ��过度设计
-
-��试图预计模糊的未�事情，这些事情也许有用也许没有用："让事情尽�能的
-简�，而�是更简�"。
-
-----------------
-第三节 �考文献
-----------------
-
-Andrew Morton, "The perfect patch" (tpp).
-  <http://www.ozlabs.org/~akpm/stuff/tpp.txt>
-
-Jeff Garzik, "Linux kernel patch submission format".
-  <http://linux.yyz.us/patch-format.html>
-
-Greg Kroah-Hartman, "How to piss off a kernel subsystem maintainer".
-  <http://www.kroah.com/log/2005/03/31/>
-  <http://www.kroah.com/log/2005/07/08/>
-  <http://www.kroah.com/log/2005/10/19/>
-  <http://www.kroah.com/log/2006/01/11/>
-
-NO!!!! No more huge patch bombs to linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org people!
-  <https://lkml.org/lkml/2005/7/11/336>
-
-Kernel Documentation/process/coding-style.rst:
-  <http://sosdg.org/~coywolf/lxr/source/Documentation/process/coding-style.rst>
-
-Linus Torvalds's mail on the canonical patch format:
-  <http://lkml.org/lkml/2005/4/7/183>
---
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/disclaimer-zh_CN.rst b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/disclaimer-zh_CN.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..dcf803ede85a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/disclaimer-zh_CN.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+:orphan:
+
+.. warning::
+     此文件的目的是为让中文读者更容易阅读和�解，而�是作为一个分支。 因此，
+     如果您对此文件有任何��或更新，请先�试更新原始英文文件。
+
+.. note::
+     如果您�现本文档与原始文件有任何��或者有翻译问题，请�系该文件的译者，
+     或者请求时奎亮的帮助：<alex.shi@linux.alibaba.com>。
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/index.rst b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/index.rst
index 75956d669962..d3165535ec9e 100644
--- a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/index.rst
+++ b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/index.rst
@@ -3,10 +3,19 @@
 	\renewcommand\thesection*
 	\renewcommand\thesubsection*
 
-Chinese translations
-====================
+中文翻译
+========
+
+这些手册包�有关如何开�内核的整体信�。内核社区�常庞大，一年下�有数��开�
+人员�出贡献。 与任何大型社区一样，知�如何完�任务将使得更改�并的过程�得更
+加容易。
 
 .. toctree::
-   :maxdepth: 1
+   :maxdepth: 2
+
+   process/index
+
+目录和表格
+----------
 
-   coding-style
+* :ref:`genindex`
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/magic-number.txt b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/magic-number.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 7159cec04090..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/magic-number.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,153 +0,0 @@
-Chinese translated version of Documentation/process/magic-number.rst
-
-If you have any comment or update to the content, please post to LKML directly.
-However, if you have problem communicating in English you can also ask the
-Chinese maintainer for help.  Contact the Chinese maintainer, if this
-translation is outdated or there is problem with translation.
-
-Chinese maintainer: Jia Wei Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com>
----------------------------------------------------------------------
-Documentation/process/magic-number.rst的中文翻译
-
-如果想评论或更新本文的内容，请直接�信到LKML。如果你使用英文交�有困难的�，也�
-以�中文版维护者求助。如果本翻译更新��时或者翻译存在问题，请�系中文版维护者。
-
-中文版维护者： 贾�� Jia Wei Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com>
-中文版翻译者： 贾�� Jia Wei Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com>
-中文版校译者： 贾�� Jia Wei Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com>
-
-以下为正文
----------------------------------------------------------------------
-这个文件是有关当�使用的魔术值注册表。当你给一个结构添加了一个魔术值，你也应该把这个魔术值添加到这个文件，因为我们最好把用于��结构的魔术值统一起�。
-
-使用魔术值��护内核数�结构是一个�常好的主�。这就�许你在�行期检查(a)一个结构是�已�被攻击，或者(b)你已�给一个例行程�通过了一个错误的结构。�一�情况特别地有用---特别是当你通过一个空指针指�结构体的时候。tty��，例如，�常通过特定驱动使用这�方法并且��地排列特定方�的结构。
-
-使用魔术值的方法是在结构的开始处声明的，如下：
-
-struct tty_ldisc {
-	int	magic;
-	...
-};
-
-当你以�给内核添加增强功能的时候，请�守这�规则�这样就会节�数�清的调试时间，特别是一些�怪的情况，例如，数组超出范围并且�新写了超出部分。�守这个规则，‪这些情况�以被快速地，安全地��。
-
-		Theodore Ts'o
-		  31 Mar 94
-
-给当�的Linux 2.1.55添加魔术表。
-
-		Michael Chastain
-		<mailto:mec@shout.net>
-		22 Sep 1997
-
-现在应该最新的Linux 2.1.112.因为在特性冻结期间，�能在2.2.x�改�任何东西。这些�目被数域所排�。
-
-		Krzysztof G.Baranowski
-	        <mailto: kgb@knm.org.pl>
-		29 Jul 1998
-
-更新魔术表到Linux 2.5.45。刚好越过特性冻结，但是有�能还会有一些新的魔术值在2.6.x之��入到内核中。
-
-		Petr Baudis
-		<pasky@ucw.cz>
-		03 Nov 2002
-
-更新魔术表到Linux 2.5.74。
-
-		Fabian Frederick
-                <ffrederick@users.sourceforge.net>
-		09 Jul 2003
-
-魔术�                 地�         结构               所在文件
-===========================================================================
-PG_MAGIC              'P'         pg_{read,write}_hdr include/linux/pg.h
-CMAGIC                0x0111      user              include/linux/a.out.h
-MKISS_DRIVER_MAGIC    0x04bf      mkiss_channel     drivers/net/mkiss.h
-HDLC_MAGIC            0x239e      n_hdlc            drivers/char/n_hdlc.c
-APM_BIOS_MAGIC        0x4101      apm_user          arch/x86/kernel/apm_32.c
-CYCLADES_MAGIC        0x4359      cyclades_port     include/linux/cyclades.h
-DB_MAGIC              0x4442      fc_info           drivers/net/iph5526_novram.c
-DL_MAGIC              0x444d      fc_info           drivers/net/iph5526_novram.c
-FASYNC_MAGIC          0x4601      fasync_struct     include/linux/fs.h
-FF_MAGIC              0x4646      fc_info           drivers/net/iph5526_novram.c
-ISICOM_MAGIC          0x4d54      isi_port          include/linux/isicom.h
-PTY_MAGIC             0x5001                        drivers/char/pty.c
-PPP_MAGIC             0x5002      ppp               include/linux/if_pppvar.h
-SERIAL_MAGIC          0x5301      async_struct      include/linux/serial.h
-SSTATE_MAGIC          0x5302      serial_state      include/linux/serial.h
-SLIP_MAGIC            0x5302      slip              drivers/net/slip.h
-STRIP_MAGIC           0x5303      strip             drivers/net/strip.c
-X25_ASY_MAGIC         0x5303      x25_asy           drivers/net/x25_asy.h
-SIXPACK_MAGIC         0x5304      sixpack           drivers/net/hamradio/6pack.h
-AX25_MAGIC            0x5316      ax_disp           drivers/net/mkiss.h
-TTY_MAGIC             0x5401      tty_struct        include/linux/tty.h
-MGSL_MAGIC            0x5401      mgsl_info         drivers/char/synclink.c
-TTY_DRIVER_MAGIC      0x5402      tty_driver        include/linux/tty_driver.h
-MGSLPC_MAGIC          0x5402      mgslpc_info       drivers/char/pcmcia/synclink_cs.c
-TTY_LDISC_MAGIC       0x5403      tty_ldisc         include/linux/tty_ldisc.h
-USB_SERIAL_MAGIC      0x6702      usb_serial        drivers/usb/serial/usb-serial.h
-FULL_DUPLEX_MAGIC     0x6969                        drivers/net/ethernet/dec/tulip/de2104x.c
-USB_BLUETOOTH_MAGIC   0x6d02      usb_bluetooth     drivers/usb/class/bluetty.c
-RFCOMM_TTY_MAGIC      0x6d02                        net/bluetooth/rfcomm/tty.c
-USB_SERIAL_PORT_MAGIC 0x7301      usb_serial_port   drivers/usb/serial/usb-serial.h
-CG_MAGIC              0x00090255  ufs_cylinder_group include/linux/ufs_fs.h
-RPORT_MAGIC           0x00525001  r_port            drivers/char/rocket_int.h
-LSEMAGIC              0x05091998  lse               drivers/fc4/fc.c
-GDTIOCTL_MAGIC        0x06030f07  gdth_iowr_str     drivers/scsi/gdth_ioctl.h
-RIEBL_MAGIC           0x09051990                    drivers/net/atarilance.c
-NBD_REQUEST_MAGIC     0x12560953  nbd_request       include/linux/nbd.h
-RED_MAGIC2            0x170fc2a5  (any)             mm/slab.c
-BAYCOM_MAGIC          0x19730510  baycom_state      drivers/net/baycom_epp.c
-ISDN_X25IFACE_MAGIC   0x1e75a2b9  isdn_x25iface_proto_data
-                                                    drivers/isdn/isdn_x25iface.h
-ECP_MAGIC             0x21504345  cdkecpsig         include/linux/cdk.h
-LSOMAGIC              0x27091997  lso               drivers/fc4/fc.c
-LSMAGIC               0x2a3b4d2a  ls                drivers/fc4/fc.c
-WANPIPE_MAGIC         0x414C4453  sdla_{dump,exec}  include/linux/wanpipe.h
-CS_CARD_MAGIC         0x43525553  cs_card           sound/oss/cs46xx.c
-LABELCL_MAGIC         0x4857434c  labelcl_info_s    include/asm/ia64/sn/labelcl.h
-ISDN_ASYNC_MAGIC      0x49344C01  modem_info        include/linux/isdn.h
-CTC_ASYNC_MAGIC       0x49344C01  ctc_tty_info      drivers/s390/net/ctctty.c
-ISDN_NET_MAGIC        0x49344C02  isdn_net_local_s  drivers/isdn/i4l/isdn_net_lib.h
-SAVEKMSG_MAGIC2       0x4B4D5347  savekmsg          arch/*/amiga/config.c
-CS_STATE_MAGIC        0x4c4f4749  cs_state          sound/oss/cs46xx.c
-SLAB_C_MAGIC          0x4f17a36d  kmem_cache        mm/slab.c
-COW_MAGIC             0x4f4f4f4d  cow_header_v1     arch/um/drivers/ubd_user.c
-I810_CARD_MAGIC       0x5072696E  i810_card         sound/oss/i810_audio.c
-TRIDENT_CARD_MAGIC    0x5072696E  trident_card      sound/oss/trident.c
-ROUTER_MAGIC          0x524d4157  wan_device        [in wanrouter.h pre 3.9]
-SAVEKMSG_MAGIC1       0x53415645  savekmsg          arch/*/amiga/config.c
-GDA_MAGIC             0x58464552  gda               arch/mips/include/asm/sn/gda.h
-RED_MAGIC1            0x5a2cf071  (any)             mm/slab.c
-EEPROM_MAGIC_VALUE    0x5ab478d2  lanai_dev         drivers/atm/lanai.c
-HDLCDRV_MAGIC         0x5ac6e778  hdlcdrv_state     include/linux/hdlcdrv.h
-PCXX_MAGIC            0x5c6df104  channel           drivers/char/pcxx.h
-KV_MAGIC              0x5f4b565f  kernel_vars_s     arch/mips/include/asm/sn/klkernvars.h
-I810_STATE_MAGIC      0x63657373  i810_state        sound/oss/i810_audio.c
-TRIDENT_STATE_MAGIC   0x63657373  trient_state      sound/oss/trident.c
-M3_CARD_MAGIC         0x646e6f50  m3_card           sound/oss/maestro3.c
-FW_HEADER_MAGIC       0x65726F66  fw_header         drivers/atm/fore200e.h
-SLOT_MAGIC            0x67267321  slot              drivers/hotplug/cpqphp.h
-SLOT_MAGIC            0x67267322  slot              drivers/hotplug/acpiphp.h
-LO_MAGIC              0x68797548  nbd_device        include/linux/nbd.h
-OPROFILE_MAGIC        0x6f70726f  super_block       drivers/oprofile/oprofilefs.h
-M3_STATE_MAGIC        0x734d724d  m3_state          sound/oss/maestro3.c
-VMALLOC_MAGIC         0x87654320  snd_alloc_track   sound/core/memory.c
-KMALLOC_MAGIC         0x87654321  snd_alloc_track   sound/core/memory.c
-PWC_MAGIC             0x89DC10AB  pwc_device        drivers/usb/media/pwc.h
-NBD_REPLY_MAGIC       0x96744668  nbd_reply         include/linux/nbd.h
-ENI155_MAGIC          0xa54b872d  midway_eprom	    drivers/atm/eni.h
-CODA_MAGIC            0xC0DAC0DA  coda_file_info    include/linux/coda_fs_i.h
-DPMEM_MAGIC           0xc0ffee11  gdt_pci_sram      drivers/scsi/gdth.h
-YAM_MAGIC             0xF10A7654  yam_port          drivers/net/hamradio/yam.c
-CCB_MAGIC             0xf2691ad2  ccb               drivers/scsi/ncr53c8xx.c
-QUEUE_MAGIC_FREE      0xf7e1c9a3  queue_entry       drivers/scsi/arm/queue.c
-QUEUE_MAGIC_USED      0xf7e1cc33  queue_entry       drivers/scsi/arm/queue.c
-HTB_CMAGIC            0xFEFAFEF1  htb_class         net/sched/sch_htb.c
-NMI_MAGIC             0x48414d4d455201 nmi_s        arch/mips/include/asm/sn/nmi.h
-
-请注�，在声音记忆管�中�然有一些特殊的为�个驱动定义的魔术值。查看include/sound/sndmagic.h�获�他们完整的列表信�。很多OSS声音驱动拥有自己从声�PCI ID构建的魔术值-他们也没有被列在这里。
-
-IrDA�系统也使用了大�的自己的魔术值，查看include/net/irda/irda.h�获�他们完整的信�。
-
-HFS是�外一个比较大的使用魔术值的文件系统-你�以在fs/hfs/hfs.h中找到他们。
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/oops-tracing.txt b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/oops-tracing.txt
index a893f04dfd5d..93fa061cf9e4 100644
--- a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/oops-tracing.txt
+++ b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/oops-tracing.txt
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ Documentation/admin-guide/bug-hunting.rst 的中文翻译
 
 中文版维护者： �瑞 Dave Young <hidave.darkstar@gmail.com>
 中文版翻译者： �瑞 Dave Young <hidave.darkstar@gmail.com>
-中文版校译者： �阳 Li Yang <leo@zh-kernel.org>
+中文版校译者： �阳 Li Yang <leoyang.li@nxp.com>
                王� Wang Cong <xiyou.wangcong@gmail.com>
 
 以下为正文
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/1.Intro.rst b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/1.Intro.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..10a15f3dc282
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/1.Intro.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,186 @@
+.. include:: ../disclaimer-zh_CN.rst
+
+:Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/1.Intro.rst <development_process_intro>`
+:Translator: Alex Shi <alex.shi@linux.alibaba.com>
+
+.. _cn_development_process_intro:
+
+介�
+====
+
+执行摘�
+--------
+
+本节的其余部分涵盖了内核开�过程的范围，以�开�人员�其雇主在这方��能�
+到的��挫折。内核代�应该�并到正�的（“主线�）内核中有很多原因，包括对用
+户的自动�用性�多�形�的社区支�以�影�内核开�方�的能力。�供给Linux
+内核的代�必须在与GPL兼容的许��下�用。
+
+:ref:`cn_development_process` 介�了开�过程�内核�布周期和�并窗�的机制。
+涵盖了补�开��审查和�并周期中的�个阶段。有一些关于工具和邮件列表的讨论。
+鼓励希望开始内核开�的开�人员作为�始练习跟踪并修�bug。
+
+
+:ref:`cn_development_early_stage` 包括早期项目规划，�点是尽快让开�社区�与
+
+:ref:`cn_development_coding` 是关于编�过程的；讨论了其他开�人员�到的几个
+陷阱。对补�的一些�求已�涵盖，并且介�了一些工具，这些工具有助于确�内核
+补�是正确的。
+
+:ref:`cn_development_posting` 讨论�布补�以供评审的过程。为了让开�社区
+认真对待，补�必须正确格�化和�述，并且必须��到正确的地方。�循本节中的
+建议有助于确�为您的工作�供最好的接纳。
+
+:ref:`cn_development_followthrough` 介�了�布补�之��生的事情；该工作
+在这一点上还远远没有完�。与审阅者一起工作是开�过程中的一个��部分；本节
+�供了一些关于如何在这个��阶段��问题的�示。当补�被�并到主线中时，
+开�人员�注����定任务已�完�。
+
+:ref:`cn_development_advancedtopics` 介�了两个“高级�主题：
+使用Git管�补�和查看其他人�布的补�。
+
+:ref:`cn_development_conclusion` 总结了有关内核开�的更多信�，附带有带有
+指�资�的链接.
+
+这个文件是关于什么的
+--------------------
+
+Linux内核有超过800万行代�，�个版本的贡献者超过1000人，是现存最大�最活跃
+的�费软件项目之一。从1991年开始，这个内核已��展�为一个最好的�作系统
+组件，�行在袖�数字音�播放器���PC�现存最大的超级计算机以�所有类型的
+系统上。它是一�适用于几乎任何情况的�壮�高效和�扩展的解决方案。
+
+��Linux的�展，希望�与其开�的开�人员（和公�）的数�也在增加。硬件供应商
+希望确�Linux能够很好地支�他们的产�，使这些产�对Linux用户具有�引力。嵌入
+�系统供应商使用Linux作为集�产�的组件，希望Linux能够尽�能地胜任手头的任务。
+分销商和其他基于Linux的软件供应商对Linux内核的功能�性能和��性有�明确的
+兴趣。最终用户也常常希望修改Linux，使之更好地满足他们的需求。
+
+Linux最引人注目的特性之一是这些开�人员�以访问它；任何具备必�技能的人都�以
+改进Linux并影�其开�方�。专有产��能�供这�开放性，这是自由软件的一个特点。
+但是，如果有什么��的�，内核比大多数其他自由软件项目更开放。一个典型的三个月
+内核开�周期�以涉�1000多个开�人员，他们为100多个��的公�
+（或者根本没有公�）工作。
+
+与内核开�社区�作并�是特别困难。但是，尽管如此，许多潜在的贡献者在�试�
+内核工作时�到了困难。内核社区已��展了自己独特的�作方�，使其能够在�天
+都�更改数�行代�的环境中顺利�行（并生�高质�的产�）。因此，Linux内核开�
+过程与专有的开�方法有很大的��也就�足为奇了。
+
+对于新开�人员�说，内核的开�过程�能会让人感到奇怪和�惧，但这个背�有充分的
+�由和�实的�验。一个�了解内核社区的方�的开�人员（或者更糟的是，他们试图
+抛弃或规�内核社区的方�）会有一个令人沮丧的体验。开�社区, 在帮助那些试图学习
+的人的�时，没有时间帮助那些�愿�倾�或�关心开�过程的人。
+
+希望阅读本文的人能够��这�令人沮丧的�历。这里有很多�料，但阅读时所�的
+努力会在短时间内得到回报。开�社区总是需�能让内核�更好的开�人员；下�的
+文本应该帮助您或为您工作的人员加入我们的社区。
+
+致谢
+----
+
+本文件由Jonathan Corbet撰写，corbet@lwn.net。以下人员的建议使之更为完善：
+Johannes Berg, James Berry, Alex Chiang, Roland Dreier, Randy Dunlap,
+Jake Edge, Jiri Kosina, Matt Mackall, Arthur Marsh, Amanda McPherson,
+Andrew Morton, Andrew Price, Tsugikazu Shibata, 和 Jochen Voß.
+
+这项工作得到了Linux基金会的支�，特别感谢Amanda McPherson，他看到了这项工作
+的价值并把它��现实。
+
+代�进入主线的��性
+--------------------
+
+有些公�和开�人员�尔会想，为什么他们�费心学习如何与内核社区�作，并将代�
+放入主线内核（“主线�是由Linus Torvalds维护的内核，Linux�行商将其用作基础）。
+在短期内，贡献代�看起��是一��以��的开销；仅仅将代�分开并直接支�用户
+似乎更容易。事实上，��代�独立（“树外�）是在�济上是错误的。
+
+作为说明树外代��本的一�方法，下�是内核开�过程的一些相关方�；本文��将
+更详细地讨论其中的大部分内容。考虑：
+
+- 所有Linux用户都�以使用�并到主线内核中的代�。它将自动出现在所有�用它的
+  �行版上。�需�驱动程��盘�下载，也�需�为多个�行版的多个版本�供支�；
+  对于开�人员和用户�说，这一切都是�行的。并入主线解决了大�的分布和支�问题
+
+- 当内核开�人员努力维护一个稳定的用户空间接�时，内部内核API处于�断�化之中.
+  缺�一个稳定的内部接�是一个深�熟虑的设计决策；它�许在任何时候进行基本的改
+  进，并产生更高质�的代�。但该策略的一个结果是，如果�使用新的内核，任何树外
+  代�都需��续的维护。维护树外代�需�大�的工作�能使代���工作状�。
+
+  相�，�于主线中的代��需�这样�，因为一个简�的规则�求进行API更改的任何
+  开�人员也必须修�由于该更改而破�的任何代�。因此，�并到主线中的代�大大
+  �低了维护�本。
+
+- 除此之外，内核中的代�通常会被其他开�人员改进。令人惊讶的结果�能�自授�
+  您的用户社区和客户改进您的产�。
+
+- 内核代�在�并到主线之�和之�都��过审查。�管原始开�人员的技能有多强，
+  这个审查过程总是能找到改进代�的方法。审查�常�现严�的错误和安全问题。
+  这对于在�闭环境中开�的代�尤其如此；这�代�从外部开�人员的审查中获益
+  匪浅。树外代�是低质�代�。
+
+- �与开�过程是您影�内核开�方�的方�。�观者的抱怨会被�到，但是活跃的
+  开�人员有更强的声音——并且能够实现使内核更好地满足其需求的更改。
+
+- 当�独维护代�时，总是存在第三方为类似功能�供��实现的�能性。如果�生
+  这�情况，�并代�将�得更加困难——甚至到了��能的地步。然�，您将�临以下
+  令人�快的选择：（1）无�期地维护树外的�标准特性，或（2）放弃代�并将用户
+  �移到树内版本。
+
+- 代�的贡献是使整个过程工作的根本。通过贡献代�，您�以�内核添加新功能，并
+  �供其他内核开�人员使用的功能和示例。如果您已�为Linux开�了代�（或者
+  正在考虑这样�），那么您显然对这个平�的�续�功感兴趣；贡献代�是确��功
+  的最好方法之一。
+
+上述所有�由都适用于任何树外内核代�，包括以专有的�仅二进制形�分�的代�。
+然而，在考虑任何类型的纯二进制内核代�分布之�，还需�考虑其他因素。这些包括：
+
+- 围绕专有内核模�分�的法律问题充其�是模糊的；相当多的内核版�所有者认为，
+  大多数仅�二进制的模�是内核的派生产�，因此，它们的分���了GNU通用公共
+  许��（下�将详细介�）。您的作者�是律师，本文档中的任何内容都��能被
+  视为法律建议。�闭�代�模�的真实法律地��能由法院决定。但�管怎样，困扰
+  这些模�的�确定性�然存在。
+
+- 二进制模�大大增加了调试内核问题的难度，以至于大多数内核开�人员甚至都�会
+  �试。因此，�分�二进制模�将使您的用户更难从社区获得支�。
+
+- 对于�支�二进制的模�的�行者�说，支�也更加困难，他们必须为他们希望支�
+  的�个�行版和�个内核版本�供一个版本的模�。为了�供相当全�的覆盖范围，
+  �能需�一个模�的几�个构建，并且�次�级内核时，您的用户都必须�独�级
+  您的模�。
+
+- 上��到的关于代�评审的所有问题都更加存在于�闭�代�。由于该代�根本��
+  用，因此社区无法对其进行审查，毫无疑问，它将存在严�问题。
+
+尤其是嵌入�系统的制造商，�能会倾�于忽视本节中所说的大部分内容，因为他们
+相信自己正在商用一�使用冻结内核版本的独立产�，在�布��需��进行开�。
+这个论点忽略了广泛的代�审查的价值以��许用户�产�添加功能的价值。但这些
+产�也有有�的商业寿命，之�必须�布新版本的产�。在这一点上，代�在主线上
+并得到良好维护的供应商将能够更好地��，以使新产�快速上市。
+
+许�
+----
+
+代�是根�一些许���供给Linux内核的，但是所有代�都必须与GNU通用公共许�
+�（GPLV2）的版本2兼容，该版本是覆盖整个内核分�的许��。在实践中，这�味
+�所有代�贡献都由GPLv2（�选地，语言�许在更高版本的GPL下分�）或3��BSD
+许�（New BSD License, 译者注）覆盖。任何�包�在兼容许��中的贡献都�会
+被接�到内核中。
+
+贡献给内核的代��需�（或请求）版�分�。�并到主线内核中的所有代�都�留
+其原始所有�；因此，内核现在拥有数�个所有者。
+
+这�所有�结构的一个暗示是，任何改�内核许�的�试都注定会失败。很少有实际
+的场景�以获得所有版�所有者的��（或者从内核中删除他们的代�）。因此，特
+别是，在�预�的将�，��能�移到GPL的版本3。
+
+所有贡献给内核的代�都必须是�法的�费软件。因此，�接�匿�（或匿�）贡献
+者的代�。所有贡献者都需�在他们的代�上“sign off�，声明代��以在GPL下与内
+核一起分�。无法�供未被其所有者许�为�费软件的代�，或�能为内核造�版�
+相关问题的代�（例如，由缺�适当�护的��工程工作派生的代�）�能被接�。
+
+有关版�相关问题的问题在Linux开�邮件列表中很常�。这样的问题通常会得到�少
+答案，但�记�，回答这些问题的人�是律师，�能�供法律咨询。如果您有关于
+Linux�代�的法律问题，那么与了解该领域的律师交�是无法替代的。��从技术
+邮件列表中获得的答案是一件冒险的事情。
+
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/2.Process.rst b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/2.Process.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ceb733bb0294
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/2.Process.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,360 @@
+.. include:: ../disclaimer-zh_CN.rst
+
+:Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/2.Process.rst <development_process>`
+:Translator: Alex Shi <alex.shi@linux.alibaba.com>
+
+.. _cn_development_process:
+
+开��程如何工作
+================
+
+90年代早期的Linux内核开�是一件相当�散的事情，涉�的用户和开�人员相对较
+少。由于拥有数以百万计的用户群，并且在一年的时间里有大约2000�开�人员�与
+进�，内核因此必须�展许多�程���开�的顺利进行。��为�程的有效组�
+部分，需�对�程的工作方�有一个扎实的�解。
+
+总览
+----
+
+内核开�人员使用一个�散的基于时间的�布过程，�两到三个月�布一次新的主�
+内核版本。最近的�布历�记录如下：
+
+	======  =================
+	4.11	四月 30, 2017
+	4.12	七月 2, 2017
+	4.13	�月 3, 2017
+	4.14	�一月 12, 2017
+	4.15	一月 28, 2018
+	4.16	四月 1, 2018
+	======  =================
+
+�4.x版本都是一个主�的内核版本，具有新特性�内部API更改等等。一个典型的4.x
+版本包�大约13000个�更集，�更了几�万行代�。因此，4.x是Linux内核开�的�
+沿；内核使用滚动开�模型，�断集��大�化。
+
+对于�个版本的补��并，�循一个相对简�的规则。在�个开�周期的开始，“�并
+窗��被打开。当时，被认为足够稳定（并且被开�社区接�）的代�被�并到主线内
+核中。在这段时间内，新开�周期的大部分�更（以�所有主��更）将以接近�天
+1000次�更（“补��或“�更集�）的速度�并。
+
+（顺便说一�，值得注�的是，�并窗�期间集�的更改并�是凭空产生的；它们是
+��收集�测试和分级的。��将详细�述该过程的工作方�）。
+
+�并窗��续大约两周。在这段时间结�时，LinusTorvalds将声明窗�已关闭，并
+释放第一个“rc�内核。例如，对于目标为4.14的内核，在�并窗�结�时�生的释放
+将被称为4.14-rc1。RC1版本是一个信�，表示�并新特性的时间已�过去，稳定下一
+个内核的时间已�开始。
+
+在接下�的6到10周内，�有修�问题的补��应该�交给主线。有时会�许更大的
+更改，但这�情况很少�生；试图在�并窗�外�并新功能的开�人员往往会�到�
+�好的接待。一般�说，如果您错过了给定特性的�并窗�，最好的�法是等待下一
+个开�周期。（对于以��支�的硬件，�尔会对驱动程�进行例外；如果它们�
+改�已有代�，则�会导致回归，并且应该�以�时安全地添加）。
+
+��修�程�进入主线，补�速度将��时间的推移而�慢。Linus大约�周�布一次
+新的-rc内核；一个正常的系列将在-rc6和-rc9之间，内核被认为足够稳定并最终�布。
+然�，整个过程��新开始了。
+
+例如，这里是4.16的开�周期进行情况（2018年的所有日期）:
+
+	==============  ==============================
+	一月 28	        4.15 稳定版�布
+	二月 11	        4.16-rc1, �并窗�关闭
+	二月 18	        4.16-rc2
+	二月 25	        4.16-rc3
+	三月 4		4.16-rc4
+	三月 11	        4.16-rc5
+	三月 18	        4.16-rc6
+	三月 25	        4.16-rc7
+	四月 1		4.16 稳定版�布
+	==============  ==============================
+
+开�人员如何决定何时结�开�周期并创建稳定的版本？使用的最��的指标是以�
+版本的回归列表。�欢迎出现任何错误，但是那些破�了以�能工作的系统的错误被
+认为是特别严�的。因此，导致回归的补�是��欢迎的，很�能在稳定期内删除。
+
+开�人员的目标是在稳定�布之�修�所有已知的回归。在现实世界中，这�完美是
+很难实现的；在这�规模的项目中，��太多了。有一点，延迟最终版本�会使问题
+�得更糟；等待下一个�并窗�的一堆更改将�大，从而在下次创建更多的回归错误。
+因此，大多数4.x内核都有一些已知的回归错误，�过，希望没有一个是严�的。
+
+一旦一个稳定的版本�布，它正在进行的维护工作就被移交给“稳定团队�，目�由
+Greg Kroah-Hartman组�。稳定团队将使用4.x.y编�方案�定期的�布稳定版本的更
+新。�加入更新版本，补�程�必须（1）修�一个��的bug，（2）已��并到
+下一个开�主线中。内核通常会在超过其�始版本的一个以上的开�周期内接收稳定
+的更新。例如，4.13内核的历�如下
+
+	==============  ===============================
+        �月 3 	        4.13 稳定版�布
+	�月 13	        4.13.1
+	�月 20	        4.13.2
+	�月 27	        4.13.3
+	�月 5	        4.13.4
+	�月 12         4.13.5
+	...	        ...
+	�一月 24       4.13.16
+	==============  ===============================
+
+4.13.16是4.13版本的最终稳定更新。
+
+有些内核被指定为“长期�内核；它们将得到更长时间的支�。在本文中，当�的长期
+内核�其维护者是：
+
+	======  ======================  ==============================
+	3.16	Ben Hutchings		(长期稳定内核)
+	4.1	Sasha Levin
+	4.4	Greg Kroah-Hartman	(长期稳定内核)
+	4.9	Greg Kroah-Hartman
+	4.14	Greg Kroah-Hartman
+	======  ======================  ==============================
+
+为长期支�选择内核纯粹是维护人员有必�和时间�维护该版本的问题。目�还没有
+为�将�布的任何特定版本�供长期支�的已知计划。
+
+补�的生命周期
+--------------
+
+补��会直接从开�人员的键盘进入主线内核。相�，有一个�微��（如果有些�
+正�）的过程，旨在确�对�个补�进行质�审查，并确��个补�实现了一个在主线
+中需�的更改。对于�的修�，这个过程�能会很快�生，或者，在大的和有争议的
+�更的情况下，会�续数年。许多开�人员的挫折�自于对这个过程缺��解或者
+试图绕过它。
+
+为了�少这�挫折感，本文将�述补�如何进入内核。下�是一个介�，它以��
+�想化的方��述了这个过程。更详细的过程将在��的章节中介�。
+
+补�程��历的阶段通常是：
+
+- 设计。这就是补�的真正需求——以�满足这些需求的方�——的所在。设计工作通常
+  是在�涉�社区的情况下完�的，但是如果�能的�，最好是在公开的情况下完�
+  这项工作；这样�以节�很多����新设计的时间。
+
+- 早期评审。补�被�布到相关的邮件列表中，列表中的开�人员会回�他们�能有
+  的任何评论。如果一切顺利的�，这个过程应该会�现补�的任何主�问题。
+
+- 更广泛的评审。当补�接近准备好纳入主线时，它应该被相关的�系统维护人员
+  接�——尽管这�接�并�能��补�会一直延伸到主线。补�将出现在维护人员的
+  �系统树中，并进入 -next 树（如下所述）。当�程工作时，此步骤将导致对补�
+  进行更广泛的审查，并�现由于将此补�与其他人所�的工作集�而导致的任何
+  问题。
+
+- 请注�，大多数维护人员也有日常工作，因此�并补��能�是他们的最高优先级。
+  如果您的补�程�得到了关于所需更改的�馈，那么您应该进行这些更改，或者为
+  �应该进行这些更改的原因辩护。如果您的补�没有评审��，但没有被其相应的
+  �系统或驱动程�维护者接�，那么您应该���懈地将补�更新到当�内核，使
+  其干净地应用，并�断地将其��以供审查和�并。
+
+- �并到主线。最终，一个�功的补�将被�并到由LinusTorvalds管�的主线存储库
+  中。此时�能会出现更多的评论和/或问题；开�人员应对这些问题并解决出现的
+  任何问题很��。
+
+- 稳定版�布。�能�补�影�的用户数�现在很大，因此�能�次出现新的问题。
+
+- 长期维护。虽然开�人员在�并代���能会忘记代�，但这�行为往往会给开�
+  社区留下�良�象。�并代�消除了一些维护负担，因为其他代�将修�由API
+  更改引起的问题。但是，如果代��长期��有用，原始开�人员应该继续为
+  代�负责。
+
+内核开�人员（或他们的雇主）犯的最大错误之一是试图将�程简化为一个
+“�并到主线�步骤。这�方法总是会让所有相关人员感到沮丧。
+
+补�如何进入内核
+----------------
+
+�有一个人�以将补��并到主线内核存储库中：LinusTorvalds。但是，在进入
+2.6.38内核的9500多个补�中，�有112个（大约1.3%）是由Linus自己直接选择的。
+内核项目已��展到一个规模，没有一个开�人员�以在没有支�的情况下检查和
+选择�个补�。内核开�人员处�这�增长的方�是通过使用围绕信任链构建的
+助�系统。
+
+内核代�库在逻辑上被分解为一组�系统：网络�特定的体系结构支��内存管��
+视频设备等。大多数�系统都有一个指定的维护人员，开�人员对该�系统中的代�
+负有全部责任。这些�系统维护者（�散地）是他们所管�的内核部分的守护者；
+他们（通常）会接�一个补�以包�到主线内核中。
+
+�系统维护人员�个人都使用git�代�管�工具管�自己版本的内核�代�树。Git
+等工具（以�Quilt或Mercurial等相关工具）�许维护人员跟踪补�列表，包括作者
+信�和其他元数�。在任何给定的时间，维护人员都�以确定他或她的存储库中的哪
+些补�在主线中找�到。
+
+当�并窗�打开时，顶级维护人员将�求Linus从其存储库中“拉出�他们为�并选择
+的补�。如果Linus��，补��将��他的存储库，�为主线内核的一部分。
+Linus对拉�作中接收到的特定补�的关注程度��相�。很明显，有时他看起�很
+关注。但是，作为一般规则，Linus相信�系统维护人员�会�上游���补�。
+
+�系统维护人员�过�也�以从其他维护人员那里获�补�。例如，网络树是由首先
+在专用于网络设备驱动程��无线网络等的树中积累的补�构建的。此存储链�以
+任�长，但很少超过两个或三个链接。由于链中的�个维护者都信任那些管�较低
+级别树的维护者，所以这个过程称为“信任链�。
+
+显然，在这样的系统中，获�内核补��决于找到正确的维护者。直接�Linus��
+补�通常�是正确的方法。
+
+Next æ ‘
+-------
+
+�系统树链引导补��到内核，但它也�出了一个有趣的问题：如果有人想查看为
+下一个�并窗�准备的所有补�怎么办？开�人员将感兴趣的是，还有什么其他的
+更改有待解决，以查看是�存在需�担心的冲�；例如，更改核心内核函数原型的
+修补程�将与使用该函数旧形�的任何其他修补程�冲�。审查人员和测试人员希望
+在所有这些�更到达主线内核之�，能够访问它们的集�形�中的�更。您�以从所有
+有趣的�系统树中��更改，但这将是一项大型且容易出错的工作。
+
+答案以-next树的形�出现，在这里�系统树被收集以供测试和审查。Andrew Morton
+维护的这些旧树被称为“-mm�（用于内存管�，这就是它的�动�字）。-mm 树集�了
+一长串�系统树中的补�；它还包�一些旨在帮助调试的补�。
+
+除此之外，-mm 还包�大�由Andrew直接选择的补�。这些补��能已��布在邮件
+列表上，或者它们�能应用于内核中没有指定�系统树的部分。结果，-mm 作为一�
+最�手段的�系统树�行；如果没有其他明显的路径�以让补�进入主线，那么它很
+�能以-mm 结�。累积在-mm 中的��补�最终将被转�到适当的�系统树，或者直接
+��到Linus。在典型的开�周期中，大约5-10%的补�通过-mm 进入主线。
+
+当�-mm 补��在“mmotm�（-mm of the moment）目录中找到，地�：
+
+        http://www.ozlabs.org/~akpm/mmotm/
+
+然而，使用mmotm树�能是一�令人沮丧的体验；它甚至�能无法编译。
+
+下一个周期补��并的主�树是linux-next，由Stephen Rothwell 维护。根�设计
+linux-next 是下一个�并窗�关闭�主线的快照。linux-next树在Linux-kernel 和
+Linux-next 邮件列表中�布，�从以下�置下载：
+
+        http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/next/
+
+Linux-next 已��为内核开�过程中��或缺的一部分；在一个给定的�并窗�中�并
+的所有补�都应该在�并窗�打开之�的一段时间内找到进入Linux-next 的方法。
+
+Staging æ ‘
+----------
+
+内核�代�树包�drivers/staging/directory，其中有许多驱动程�或文件系统的
+�目录正在被添加到内核树中。它们然需�更多的工作的时候�以�留在
+driver/staging目录中；一旦完�，就�以将它们移到内核中。这是一�跟踪�符�
+Linux内核编�或质�标准的驱动程�的方法，但人们�能希望使用它们并跟踪开�。
+
+Greg Kroah Hartman 目�负责维护staging 树。�需�工作的驱动程�将��给他，
+�个驱动程�在drivers/staging/中都有自己的�目录。除了驱动程��文件之外，
+目录中还应该有一个TODO文件。todo文件列出了驱动程�需�接�的挂起的工作，
+以�驱动程�的任何补�都应该抄�的人员列表。当�的规则�求，staging的驱动
+程�必须至少正确编译。
+
+Staging 是一�相对容易的方法，�以让新的驱动程�进入主线，幸�的是，他们会
+引起其他开�人员的注�，并迅速改进。然而，进入staging并�是故事的结尾；
+staging中没有看到常规进展的代�最终将被删除。�销商也倾�于相对�愿�使用
+staging驱动程�。因此，在�为一��适的主线驱动的路上，staging 充其��是
+一个�留。
+
+工具
+----
+
+从上�的文本�以看出，内核开�过程在很大程度上�赖于在��方�上�集补�的
+能力。如果没有适当强大的工具，整个系统将无法在任何地方正常工作。关于如何使用
+这些工具的教程远远超出了本文档的范围，但是还是有一些指�的空间。
+
+到目�为止，内核社区使用的主��代�管�系统是git。Git是在自由软件社区中开�
+的许多分布�版本控制系统之一。它�常适�内核开�，因为它在处�大型存储库和
+大�补�时性能�常好。它还有一个难以学习和使用的�声，尽管��时间的推移它
+�得更好了。对于内核开�人员�说，对Git的��熟悉几乎是一��求；�使他们�
+将它用于自己的工作，他们也需�Git�跟上其他开�人员（以�主线）正在�的事情。
+
+现在几乎所有的Linux�行版都打包了Git。主页�于：
+
+        http://git-scm.com/
+
+那个页�有指�文档和教程的指针。
+
+在�使用git的内核开�人员中，最�行的选择几乎肯定是mercurial：
+
+        http://www.seleric.com/mercurial/
+
+Mercurial与Git共享许多特性，但它�供了一个界�，许多人觉得它更易于使用。
+
+�一个值得了解的工具是quilt:
+
+        http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/quilt
+
+Quilt 是一个补�管�系统，而�是�代�管�系统。它�会��时间的推移跟踪历�；
+相�，它��根��断�展的代�库跟踪一组特定的更改。一些主�的�系统维护人员
+使用Quilt�管�打算�上游移动的补�。对于�些树的管�（例如-mm），quilt 是
+最好的工具。
+
+邮件列表
+--------
+
+大�的Linux内核开�工作是通过邮件列表完�的。如果�在�个地方加入至少一个列表，
+就很难�为社区中一个功能完备的�员。但是，Linux邮件列表对开�人员�说也是一个
+潜在的�险，他们�能会被一堆电�邮件淹没，��Linux列表上使用的约定，或者
+两者兼而有之。
+
+大多数内核邮件列表都在vger.kernel.org上�行；主列表�于：
+
+        http://vger.kernel.org/vger-lists.html
+
+�过，也有一些列表托管在别处；其中一些列表�于lists.redhat.com。
+
+当然，内核开�的核心邮件列表是linux-kernel。这个��是一个令人生�的地方；
+�天的信���以达到500�，噪音很高，谈�技术性很强，�与者并�总是表现出
+高度的礼貌。但是，没有其他地方�以让内核开�社区作为一个整体�集在一起；
+��使用此列表的开�人员将错过��信�。
+
+有一些�示�以帮助在linux-kernel生存：
+
+- 将邮件转移到�独的文件夹，而�是主邮箱。我们必须能够�续地忽略洪�。
+
+- ��试图跟踪�一次谈�-其他人都�会。��的是�对感兴趣的主题（尽管请
+  注�，长时间的对��以在�更改电�邮件主题行的情况下�离原始主题）和�与
+  的人进行筛选。
+
+- ��挑事。如果有人试图激起愤怒的�应，忽略他们。
+
+- 当�应Linux内核电�邮件（或其他列表上的电�邮件）时，请为所有相关人员�留
+  cc:header。如果没有强有力的�由（如明确的请求），则�应删除收件人。一定�
+  确�你�回�的人在cc:list中。这个惯例也使你�必在回�邮件时明确�求被抄�。
+
+- 在�出问题之�，�索列表档案（和整个网络）。有些开�人员�能会对那些显然
+  没有完�家庭作业的人感到��烦。
+
+- ��贴顶帖（把你的答案放在你�回�的引文上�的�法）。这会让你的回答更难
+  �解，�象也很差。
+
+- 询问正确的邮件列表。linux-kernel �能是通用的讨论点，但它�是从所有�系统
+  中寻找开�人员的最佳场所。
+
+最�一点——找到正确的邮件列表——是开�人员出错的常�地方。在Linux内核上�出与
+网络相关的问题的人几乎肯定会收到一个礼貌的建议，转而在netdev列表上�出，
+因为这是大多数网络开�人员�常出现的列表。还有其他列表�用于scsi�
+video4linux�ide�filesystem等�系统。查找邮件列表的最佳�置是与内核�代�
+一起打包的MAINTAINERS文件。
+
+开始内核开�
+------------
+
+关于如何开始内核开�过程的问题很常�——�自个人和公�。�样常�的是错误，这
+使得关系的开始比必须的更困难。
+
+公�通常希望�请知�的开�人员��动开�团队。实际上，这是一�有效的技术。
+但它也往往是昂贵的，而且没有增长�验丰富的内核开�人员储备。考虑到时间的
+投入，�以让内部开�人员加快Linux内核的开�速度。花这个时间�以让雇主拥有
+一批了解内核和公�的开�人员，他们也�以帮助培训其他人。从中期�看，这往往
+是更有利�图的方法。
+
+�以�解的是，�个开�人员往往对起步感到茫然。从一个大型项目开始�能会很
+�人；人们往往想先用一些较�的东西�测试水域。这是一些开�人员开始创建修补
+拼写错误或轻微编�风格问题的补�的地方。�幸的是，这样的补�会产生一定程度
+的噪音，这会分散整个开�社区的注�力，因此，越�越多的人看�起它们。希望�
+社区介�自己的新开�人员将无法通过这些方�获得他们想�的那�接待。
+
+Andrew Morton 为有抱负的内核开�人员�供了这个建议
+
+::
+
+        所有内核�学者的No.1项目肯定是“确�内核在所有的机器上，你�以触摸
+        到的，始终�行良好" 通常这样�的方法是与其他人一起解决问题（这
+        �能需����）但这很好——这是内核开�的一部分
+
+(http://lwn.net/articles/283982/)
+
+在没有明显问题需�解决的情况下，建议开�人员查看当�的回归和开放�错误列表.
+解决需�修�的问题没有任何缺点；通过解决这些问题，开�人员将获得处�过程的
+�验，�时与开�社区的其他人建立尊�。
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/3.Early-stage.rst b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/3.Early-stage.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b8676aec6005
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/3.Early-stage.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,161 @@
+.. include:: ../disclaimer-zh_CN.rst
+
+:Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/3.Early-stage.rst <development_early_stage>`
+:Translator: Alex Shi <alex.shi@linux.alibaba.com>
+
+.. _cn_development_early_stage:
+
+早期规划
+========
+
+当考虑一个Linux内核开�项目时，很�能会直接跳进去开始编�。然而，与任何��
+的项目一样，�功的许多基础最好是在第一行代�编写之�就�好了。在早期计划和
+沟通中花费一些时间�以节�更多的时间。
+
+详述问题
+--------
+
+与任何工程项目一样，�功的内核增强从�解决的问题的清晰�述开始。在�些情况
+下，这个步骤很容易：例如，当�个特定硬件需�驱动程�时。�过，在其他方�，
+将实际问题与建议的解决方案混淆是很有诱惑力的，这�能会导致困难。
+
+举个例�：几年�，使用Linux音频的开�人员寻求一�方法��行应用程�，而�因
+系统延迟过大而导致退出或其他工件。他们得到的解决方案是一个内核模�，旨在连
+接到Linux安全模�（LSM）框架中；这个模��以�置为�许特定的应用程�访问
+实时调度程�。这个模�被实现并��到Linux内核邮件列表，在那里它立��到问题。
+
+对于音频开�人员�说，这个安全模�足以解决他们当�的问题。但是，对于更广泛的
+内核社区�说，这被视为对LSM框架的滥用（LSM框架并�打算授予他们原本�具备的
+进程特�），并对系统稳定性造�风险。他们首选的解决方案包括短期的通过rlimit
+机制进行实时调度访问，以�长期的�少延迟的工作。
+
+然而，音频社区看�到他们实施的特定解决方案的过去；他们�愿�接�替代方案。
+由此产生的分歧使这些开�人员对整个内核开�过程感到失望；其中一个开�人员返回
+到音频列表并�布了以下内容：
+
+        有很多�常好的Linux内核开�人员，但他们往往会被一群傲慢的傻瓜所压倒。
+        试图�这些人传达用户需求是浪费时间。他们太“�明�了，根本��到少数人
+        的�。
+
+（http://lwn.net/articles/131776/）
+
+实际情况��；与特定模�相比，内核开�人员更关心系统稳定性�长期维护以�找到
+正确的问题解决方案。这个故事的寓�是把�点放在问题上——而�是具体的解决方案
+上——并在投入创建代�之�与开�社区讨论这个问题。
+
+因此，在考虑一个内核开�项目时，我们应该得到一组简短问题的答案：
+
+ - 究竟需�解决的问题是什么？
+
+ - �此问题影�的用户是�？解决方案应该解决哪些用例？
+
+ - 内核现在为何没能解决这个问题？
+
+�有这样，�能开始考虑�能的解决方案。
+
+
+早期讨论
+--------
+
+在计划内核开�项目时，在开始实施之�与社区进行讨论是很有�义的。早期沟通�以
+通过多�方�节�时间和麻烦：
+
+ - 很�能问题是由内核以您��解的方�解决的。Linux内核很大，具有许多�明显
+   的特性和功能。并�是所有的内核功能都�人们所希望的那样有文档记录，而且很
+   容易��一些东西。你的作者�出了一个完整的驱动程�，�制了一个新作者�
+   知�的现有驱动程�。�新设计现有轮�的代��仅浪费，而且�会被接�到主线
+   内核中。
+
+ - 建议的解决方案中�能有一些元素�适用于主线�并。在编写代�之�，最好先
+   了解这样的问题。
+
+ - 其他开�人员完全有�能考虑过这个问题；他们�能有更好的解决方案的想法，并且
+   �能愿�帮助创建这个解决方案。
+
+在内核开�社区的多年�验给了我们一个明确的教训：闭门设计和开�的内核代�总是
+有一些问题，这些问题�有在代��布到社区中时�会被�现。有时这些问题很严�，
+需�数月或数年的努力�能使代�达到内核社区的标准。一些例�包括：
+
+ - 设计并实现了�处�器系统的DeviceScape网络栈。�有使其适�于多处�器系统，
+   �能将其�并到主线中。在代�中改装�等等是一项困难的任务；因此，这段代�
+   （现在称为mac80211）的�并被推迟了一年多。
+
+ - Reiser4文件系统包�许多功能，核心内核开�人员认为这些功能应该在虚拟文件
+   系统层中实现。它还包括一些特性，这些特性在�将系统暴露于用户引起的死�的
+   情况下是�容易实现的。这些问题的最新�现——以�对其中一些问题的拒�——已�
+   导致Reiser4远离了主线内核。
+
+ - Apparmor安全模�以被认为�安全和���的方�使用内部虚拟文件系统数�结构。
+   这�担心（包括其他）使Apparmor多年�在主线上。
+
+在�一�情况下，通过与内核开�人员的早期讨论，�以��大�的痛苦和�外的工作。
+
+找�交�
+--------
+
+当开�人员决定公开他们的计划时，下一个问题是：我们从哪里开始？答案是找到正确
+的邮件列表和正确的维护者。对于邮件列表，最好的方法是在维护者(MAINTAINERS)文件
+中查找��布的相关�置。如果有一个�适的�系统列表，那么�布它通常比在Linux
+内核上�布更��；您更有�能接触到在相关�系统中具有专业知识的开�人员，并且
+环境�能具支�性。
+
+找到维护人员�能会有点困难。�样，维护者文件是开始的地方。但是，该文件往往�总
+是最新的，并且并�所有�系统都在那里表示。实际上，维护者文件中列出的人员�能
+�是当�实际担任该角色的人员。因此，当对�系�有疑问时，一个有用的技巧是使用
+git（尤其是“git-log�）查看感兴趣的�系统中当�活动的用户。看看�在写补�，
+如果有人的�，�会在这些补�上加上用线签�的。这些人将是帮助新开�项目的最佳
+人选。
+
+找到�适的维护者的任务有时是�常具有挑战性的，以至于内核开�人员添加了一个
+脚本�简化过程：
+
+::
+
+	.../scripts/get_maintainer.pl
+
+当给定“-f�选项时，此脚本将返回给定文件或目录的当�维护者。如果在命令行上传递
+了一个补�，它将列出�能接收补�副本的维护人员。有许多选项�以调节
+get_maintainer.pl�索维护者的难易程度；请�心使用更具攻击性的选项，因为最终
+�能会包括对您正在修改的代�没有真正兴趣的开�人员。
+
+如果所有其他方法都失败了，那么与Andrew Morton交谈�以�为一�有效的方法�跟踪
+特定代�段的维护人员。
+
+何时邮寄？
+----------
+
+如果�能的�，在早期阶段�布你的计划�会有帮助。�述正在解决的问题以�已�
+制定的关于如何实施的任何计划。您�以�供的任何信�都�以帮助开�社区为项目
+�供有用的输入。
+
+在这个阶段�能�生的一件令人沮丧的事情�是敌对的�应，而是很少或根本没有
+�应。�悲的事实是：（1）内核开�人员往往很忙；（2）�缺少有�伟计划和很少
+代�（甚至代��景）支�他们的人；（3）没有人有义务审查或评论别人�表的
+想法。除此之外，高级设计常常��一些问题，这些问题�有在有人真正�试实现
+这些设计时�会被�现；因此，内核开�人员�愿看到代�。
+
+如果�表评论的请求在评论的方�上没有什么效果，���设这�味�对项目没有
+兴趣。�幸的是，你也�能�设你的想法没有问题。在这�情况下，最好的�法是
+继续进行，把你的进展�时通知社区。
+
+获得官方认�
+-----------------------
+
+如果您的工作是在公�环境中完�的，就�大多数Linux内核工作一样，显然，在您将
+公�的计划或代��布到公共邮件列表之�，必须获得适当授�的��的许�。�布
+�确定是�兼容GPL的代��能是有特别问题的；公�的管�层和法律人员越早能够就
+�布内核开�项目达�一致，对�与的�个人都越好。
+
+一些读者�能会认为他们的核心工作是为了支�还没有正�承认存在的产�。将雇主
+的计划公布在公共邮件列表上�能�是一个�行的选择。在这�情况下，有必�考虑
+�密是�真的是必�的；通常�需�把开�计划关在门内。
+
+也就是说，有些情况下，一家公�在开�过程的早期就�能�法地披露其计划。拥有
+�验丰富的内核开�人员的公��以选择以开环的方�进行，��是他们以�能够��
+严�的集�问题。对于没有这�内部专业知识的公�，最好的选择往往是�请外部
+开�商根��密�议审查计划。Linux基金会�行了一个NDA程�，旨在帮助解决这�
+情况；
+
+    http://www.linuxfoundation.org/en/NDA_program
+
+这�审查通常足以��以�出现严�问题，而无需公开披露项目。
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/4.Coding.rst b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/4.Coding.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5301e9d55255
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/4.Coding.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,290 @@
+.. include:: ../disclaimer-zh_CN.rst
+
+:Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/4.Coding.rst <development_coding>`
+:Translator: Alex Shi <alex.shi@linux.alibaba.com>
+
+.. _cn_development_coding:
+
+使代�正确
+======================
+
+虽然对于一个�实的���社区的设计过程有很多��说，但是任何内核开�项目的
+�明都在生�的代�中。它是将由其他开�人员检查并�并（或��并）到主线树中
+的代�。所以这段代�的质�决定了项目的最终�功。
+
+本节将检查编�过程。我们将从内核开�人员出错的几�方�开始。然��点将转移
+到正确的事情和�以帮助这个任务的工具上。
+
+陷阱
+----
+
+编�风格
+********
+
+内核长期以�都有一�标准的编�风格，如
+:ref:`Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/coding-style.rst <cn_codingstyle>`
+中所述。在大部分时间里，该文件中�述的政策被认为至多是建议性的。因此，内核
+中存在大��符�编�风格准则的代�。代�的存在会给内核开�人员带�两个独立
+的�害。
+
+首先，�相信内核编�标准并���，也�强制执行。事实上，如果没有按照标准对代
+�进行编�，那么�内核添加新代�是�常困难的；许多开�人员甚至会在审查代�之
+��求对代�进行�新格�化。一个与内核一样大的代�库需�一些统一的代�，以使
+开�人员能够快速�解其中的任何部分。所以已�没有空间�存放奇怪的格�化代�了。
+
+�尔，内核的编�风格会与雇主的强制风格�生冲�。在这�情况下，内核的风格必须
+在代��并之�获胜。将代�放入内核�味�以多�方�放弃一定程度的控制�——包括
+控制代�的格�化方�。
+
+�一个陷阱是�定已�在内核中的代�迫切需�编�样�的修�。开�人员�能会开始
+生��新格�化补�，作为熟悉过程的一�方�，或者作为将其�称写入内核�更日志
+的一�方�，或者两者兼而有之。但是纯编�风格的修�被开�社区视为噪音；它们往
+往�到冷�。因此，最好��使用这�类型的补�。由于其他原因，在处�一段代�的
+�时修�它的样�是很自然的，但是编�样�的更改�应该仅为了更改而进行。
+
+编�风格的文档也�应该被视为�对的法律，这是永远�会被��的。如果有一个很好
+的�由�对这�样�（例如，如果拆分为适�80列�制的行，那么它的�读性就会大大
+�低），那么就这样�。
+
+请注�，您还�以使用 ``clang-format`` 工具�帮助您处�这些规则，自动�新格�
+化部分代�，并查看完整的文件，以�现编�样�错误�拼写错误和�能的改进。它还
+�以方便地进行排�，包括对���/��回�文本和其他类似任务。有关详细信�，请
+�阅文件 :ref:`Documentation/process/clang-format.rst <clangformat>`
+
+抽象层
+******
+
+计算机科学教授教学生以�活性和信���的�义广泛使用抽象层。当然，内核广泛
+地使用了抽象；任何涉�数百万行代�的项目都�能�到这一点并存活下�。但�验
+表明，过度或过早的抽象�能和过早的优化一样有害。抽象应用于所需的级别，
+��过度。
+
+在一个简�的级别上，考虑一个函数的�数，该�数总是由所有调用方作为零传递。
+我们�以�留这个论点: 以防有人最终需�使用它�供的�外�活性。�过，到那时，
+实现这个�外�数的代�很有�能以��从未被注�到的微妙方�被破�——因为它从
+未被使用过。或者，当需��外的�活性时，它�会以符�程�员早期期望的方��
+这样�。内核开�人员通常会�交补��删除未使用的�数；一般�说，首先�应该
+添加这些�数。
+
+��硬件访问的抽象层——通常�许大�的驱动程�在多个�作系统中使用——尤其��
+欢迎。这样的层使代��得模糊，�能会造�性能�失；它们�属于Linux内核。
+
+�一方�，如果您�现自己从�一个内核�系统�制了大�的代�，那么现在是时候
+问一下，事实上，将这些代�中的一些��到�独的库中，或者在更高的层次上实现
+这些功能是�有�义。在整个内核中�制相�的代�没有价值。
+
+#ifdef 和预处�
+***************
+
+C预处�器似乎给一些C程�员带�了强大的诱惑，他们认为它是一�有效地将大��
+活性编�到�文件中的方法。但是预处�器�是C，大�使用它会导致代�对其他人�
+说更难读�，对编译器�说更难检查正确性。大�的预处�器几乎总是代�需�一些
+清�工作的标志。
+
+使用ifdef的�件编译实际上是一个强大的功能，它在内核中使用。但是很少有人希望
+看到代�被大�地撒上ifdef�。作为一般规则，ifdef的使用应尽�能�制在头文件
+中。有�件编译的代��以�制函数，如果代��存在，这些函数就会��空的。然�
+编译器将悄悄地优化对空函数的调用。结果是代�更加清晰，更容易�解。
+
+C预处�器�存在许多�险，包括�能对具有副作用且没有类型安全性的表达�进行多
+�评估。如果您试图定义�，请考虑创建一个内�函数。结果相�的代�，但是内�
+函数更容易读�，�会多次计算其�数，并且�许编译器对�数和返回值执行类型检查。
+
+内�函数
+********
+
+�过，内�函数本身也存在风险。程�员�以倾心于��函数调用和用内�函数填充�
+文件所固有的效率。然而，这些功能实际上会�低性能。因为它们的代�在�个调用站
+点都被�制，所以它们最终会增加编译内核的大�。�过�，这会对处�器的内存缓存
+造�压力，从而大大�低执行速度。通常，内�函数应该�常�，而且相对较少。毕竟，
+函数调用的�本并�高；大�内�函数的创建是过早优化的典型例�。
+
+一般�说，内核程�员会忽略缓存效果，这会带��险。在开始的数�结构课程中，�
+典的时间/空间�衡通常�适用于当代硬件。空间就是时间，因为一个大的程�比一个
+更紧凑的程��行得慢。
+
+最近的编译器在决定一个给定函数是�应该被内�方�扮演�越�越积�的角色。
+因此，“inline�关键字的自由放置�能�仅仅是过度的，它也�能是无关的。
+
+�
+**
+
+2006年5月，“deviceescape�网络堆栈在GPL下�布，并被纳入主线内核。这是一个�
+欢迎的消�；对Linux中无线网络的支�充其�被认为是��格的，而deviceescape
+堆栈�供了修�这�情况的承诺。然而，直到2007年6月（2.6.22），这段代��真
+正进入主线。�生了什么？
+
+这段代�显示了许多闭门造车的迹象。但一个特别大的问题是，它并�是设计用于多
+处�器系统。在�并这个网络堆栈（现在称为mac80211）之�，需�对其进行一个�
+方案的改造。
+
+曾�，Linux内核代��以在�考虑多处�器系统所带�的并�性问题的情况下进行
+开�。然而，现在，这个文件是写在�核笔记本电脑上的。�使在�处�器系统上，
+为�高�应能力所�的工作也会�高内核内的并�性水平。编写内核代�而�考虑�
+的日�已�过去很长了。
+
+�以由多个线程并�访问的任何资�（数�结构�硬件寄存器等）必须由��护。新
+的代�应该记�这一�求；事�改装�是一项相当困难的任务。内核开�人员应该花
+时间充分了解�用的�原语，以便为作业选择正确的工具。显示对并�性缺�关注的
+代�进入主线将很困难。
+
+回归
+****
+
+最�一个值得一�的�险是：它�能会引起改�（这�能会带�很大的改进），从而
+导致现有用户的�些东西中断。这��化被称为“回归�，回归已��为主线内核最�
+�欢迎的。除少数例外情况外，如果回归�能�时修正，会导致回归的�化将被�消。
+最好首先��回归。
+
+人们常常争论，如果回归让更多人�以工作，远超过产生问题，那么回归是��的。
+如果它破�的一个系统�为�个系统带�新的功能，为什么�进行更改呢？2007年7月，
+Linus对这个问题给出了最佳答案:
+
+::
+        所以我们�会通过引入新问题�修�错误。那样的谎言很疯狂，没有人知�
+        你是�真的有进展。是�进两步，�退一步，还是��一步，��两步？
+
+（http://lwn.net/articles/243460/）
+
+一�特别��欢迎的回归类型是用户空间ABI的任何�化。一旦接�被导出到用户空间，
+就必须无�期地支�它。这一事实使得用户空间接�的创建特别具有挑战性：因为它们
+�能以�兼容的方�进行更改，所以必须第一次正确地进行更改。因此，用户空间界�
+总是需�大�的�考�清晰的文档和广泛的审查。
+
+
+代�检查工具
+------------
+
+至少目�，编写无错误代��然是我们中很少人能达到的�想状�。�过，我们希望�
+的是，在代�进入主线内核之�，尽�能多地�获并修�这些错误。为此，内核开�人
+员已�组装了一系列令人�象深刻的工具，�以自动�获���样的模糊问题。计算机
+�现的任何问题都是一个以��会困扰用户的问题，因此，��有�能，就应该使用
+自动化工具。
+
+第一步�是注�编译器产生的警告。当代版本的GCC�以检测（并警告）大�潜在错误。
+通常，这些警告都指�真正的问题。�交以供审阅的代�通常�会产生任何编译器警告。
+在消除警告时，注�了解真正的原因，并尽���“修��，使警告消失而�解决其原因。
+
+请注�，并�所有编译器警告都默认�用。使用“make EXTRA_CFLAGS=-W�构建内核以
+获得完整集�。
+
+内核�供了几个�置选项，�以打开调试功能；大多数�置选项�于“kernel hacking�
+���中。对于任何用于开�或测试目的的内核，都应该�用其中几个选项。特别是，
+您应该打开：
+
+ - �用 ENABLE_MUST_CHECK and FRAME_WARN 以获得一组�外的警告，以解决使用�
+   推�使用的接�或忽略函数的��返回值等问题。这些警告生�的输出�能是冗长
+   的，但您�必担心�自内核其他部分的警告。
+
+ - DEBUG_OBJECTS 将添加代�，以跟踪内核创建的��对象的生存期，并在出现问题时
+   �出警告。如果�添加创建（和导出）自己的��对象的�系统，请考虑添加对对象
+   调试基础结构的支�。
+
+ - DEBUG_SLAB �以�现��内存分�和使用错误；它应该用于大多数开�内核。
+
+ - DEBUG_SPINLOCK, DEBUG_ATOMIC_SLEEP and DEBUG_MUTEXES 会�现许多常�的
+   �定错误.
+
+还有很多其他调试选项，其中一些将在下�讨论。其中一些具有显著的性能影�，�应
+一直使用。但是，在学习�用选项上花费的一些时间�能会在短期内得到多次回报。
+
+其中一个较�的调试工具是�定检查器或“lockdep�。该工具将跟踪系统中�个�
+（spinlock或mutex）的获�和释放�获��的相对顺��当�中断环境等等。然�，
+它�以确�总是以相�的顺�获��，相�的中断�设适用于所有情况，等等。���
+说，lockdep�以找到许多场景，在这些场景中，系统很少会死�。在部署的系统中，
+这�问题�能会很痛苦（对于开�人员和用户而言）；LockDep�许��以自动方�
+�现问题。具有任何类型的�普通�定的代�在�交包��应在�用lockdep的情况
+下�行。
+
+作为一个勤奋的内核程�员，毫无疑问，您将检查任何�能失败的�作（如内存分�）
+的返回状�。然而，事实上，最终的故障��路径�能完全没有�过测试。未测试的
+代�往往会被破�；如果所有这些错误处�路径都被执行了几次，那么您�能对代�
+更有信心。
+
+内核�供了一个�以�到这一点的错误注入框架，特别是在涉�内存分�的情况下。
+�用故障注入�，内存分�的��置百分比将失败；这些失败�以�制在特定的代�
+范围内。在�用了故障注入的情况下�行，程�员�以看到当情况�化时代�如何�
+应。有关如何使用此工具的详细信�，请�阅
+Documentation/fault-injection/fault-injection.txt。
+
+使用“sparse���分�工具�以�现其他类型的错误。对于sparse，�以警告程�员
+用户空间和内核空间地�之间的混淆�big endian和small endian数�的混��在需
+�一组�标志的地方传递整数值等等。sparse必须�独安装(如果您的分��务器没
+有将其打包，�以在 https://sparse.wiki.kernel.org/index.php/Main_page)找到,
+然��以通过在make命令中添加“C=1�在代�上�行它。
+
+“Coccinelle�工具 :ref:`http://coccinelle.lip6.fr/ <devtools_coccinelle>`
+能够�现��潜在的编�问题；它还�以为这些问题�出修�方案。在
+scripts/coccinelle目录下已�打包了相当多的内核“语义补��；�行
+“make coccicheck�将�行这些语义补�并报告�现的任何问题。有关详细信�，请�阅
+:ref:`Documentation/dev-tools/coccinelle.rst <devtools_coccinelle>`
+
+
+其他类型的�移�性错误最好通过为其他体系结构编译代���现。如果没有S/390系统
+或Blackfin开��，您�然�以执行编译步骤。�以在以下�置找到一组用于x86系统的
+大型交�编译器：
+
+        http://www.kernel.org/pub/tools/crosstool/
+
+花一些时间安装和使用这些编译器将有助于��以�的尴尬。
+
+文档
+----
+
+文档通常比内核开�规则更为例外。�便如此，足够的文档将有助于简化将新代��并
+到内核中的过程，使其他开�人员的生活更轻�，并对您的用户有所帮助。在许多情况
+下，文件的添加已基本上�为强制性的。
+
+任何补�的第一个文档是其关�的�更日志。日志�目应该�述正在解决的问题�解决
+方案的形��处�补�的人员�对性能的任何相关影�，以��解补��能需�的任何
+其他内容。确�changelog说明了为什么补�值得应用；大�开�人员未能�供这些信�。
+
+任何添加新用户空间界�的代�（包括新的sysfs或/proc文件）都应该包�该界�的
+文档，该文档使用户空间开�人员能够知�他们在使用什么。请�阅
+Documentation/abi/readme，了解如何格�化此文档以�需��供哪些信�。
+
+文件 :ref:`Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.rst <kernelparameters>`
+�述了内核的所有引导时间�数。任何添加新�数的补�都应该�该文件添加适当的
+�目。
+
+任何新的�置选项都必须附有帮助文本，帮助文本清楚地解释了这些选项以�用户�能
+希望何时选择它们。
+
+许多�系统的内部API信�通过专门格�化的注释进行记录；这些注释�以通过
+“kernel-doc�脚本以多�方���和格�化。如果您在具有kerneldoc注释的�系统中
+工作，则应该维护它们，并根�需�为外部�用的功能添加它们。�使在没有如此记录
+的领域中，为将�添加kerneldoc注释也没有�处；实际上，这对于刚开始开�内核的人
+�说是一个有用的活动。这些注释的格�以�如何创建kerneldoc模�的一些信��以在
+:ref:`Documentation/doc-guide/ <doc_guide>` 上找到。
+
+任何阅读大�现有内核代�的人都会注�到，注释的缺失往往是最值得注�的。�一次，
+对新代�的期望比过去更高；�并未注释的代�将更加困难。这就是说，人们几乎�希望
+用语言注释代�。代�本身应该是�读的，注释解释了更微妙的方�。
+
+�些事情应该总是被注释。使用内存�障时，应附上一行文字，解释为什么需�设置内存
+�障。数�结构的�定规则通常需�在�个地方解释。一般�说，主�数�结构需�全�
+的文档。应该指出�独代��之间�明显的�赖性。任何�能诱使代�看门人进行错误的
+“清��的事情都需�一个注释�说明为什么�这样�。等等。
+
+
+内部API更改
+-----------
+
+内核�供给用户空间的二进制接��能被破�，除�在最严�的情况下。相�，内核的
+内部编程接�是高度�动的，当需�时�以更改。如果你�现自己�得�处�一个内核
+API，或者仅仅因为它�满足你的需求而�使用特定的功能，这�能是API需�改�的一
+个标志。作为内核开�人员，您有�进行此类更改。
+
+当然, �以进行API更改，但它们必须是��的。因此，任何进行内部API更改的补�都
+应该附带一个关于更改内容和必�原因的�述。这��化也应该分解�一个�独的补�，
+而�是埋在一个更大的补�中。
+
+�一个�点是，更改内部API的开�人员通常�负责修�内核树中被更改破�的任何代�。
+对于一个广泛使用的函数，这个�责�以导致�百上�的�化，其中许多�化�能与其他
+开�人员正在�的工作相冲�。�用说，这�能是一项大工作，所以最好确��由是
+��的。请注�，coccinelle工具�以帮助进行广泛的API更改。
+
+在进行�兼容的API更改时，应尽�能确�编译器�获未更新的代�。这将帮助您确�找
+到该接�的树内用处。它还将警告开�人员树外代�存在他们需��应的更改。支�树外
+代��是内核开�人员需�担心的事情，但是我们也�必使树外开�人员的生活有�必�
+的困难。
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/5.Posting.rst b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/5.Posting.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..41aba21ff050
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/5.Posting.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,240 @@
+.. include:: ../disclaimer-zh_CN.rst
+
+:Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/5.Posting.rst <development_posting>`
+:Translator: Alex Shi <alex.shi@linux.alibaba.com>
+
+.. _cn_development_posting:
+
+��补�
+========
+
+迟早，当您的工作准备好�交给社区进行审查，并最终包�到主线内核中时。�出所料，
+内核开�社区已��展出一套用于�布补�的约定和过程；�循这些约定和过程将使
+�与其中的�个人的生活更加轻�。本文件将试图��详细地涵盖这些期望；更多信�
+也�在以下文件中找到
+:ref:`Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/submitting-patches.rst <cn_submittingpatches>`,
+:ref:`Documentation/process/submitting-drivers.rst  <submittingdrivers>`
+和 :ref:`Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/submit-checklist.rst <cn_submitchecklist>`.
+
+何时邮寄
+--------
+
+在补�完全“准备好�之�，有一个�断的诱惑����布补�。对于简�的补�，
+这�是问题。但是，如果正在完�的工作很��，那么在工作完�之�从社区获得
+�馈就�以获得很多好处。因此，您应该考虑�布正在进行的工作，甚至使Git树
+�用，以便感兴趣的开�人员�以�时赶上您的工作。
+
+当�布还没有准备好包�的代�时，最好在�布本身中这样说。还应��任何有待完�
+的主�工作和任何已知问题。很少有人会看到那些被认为是�生�熟的补�，但是那些
+人会想到他们�以帮助你把工作推�正确的方�。
+
+创建补�之�
+------------
+
+在考虑将补���到开�社区之�，有许多事情应该�。这些包括：
+
+ - 尽�能地测试代�。利用内核的调试工具，确�内核使用所有��的�置选项组�
+   进行构建，使用跨编译器为��的体系结构进行构建等。
+
+ - 确�您的代�符�内核编�风格指�。
+
+ - 您的更改是�具有性能影�？如果是这样，您应该�行基准测试�显示您的�更的
+   影�（或好处）；结果的摘�应该包�在补�中。
+
+ - 确�您有��布代�。如果这项工作是为雇主完�的，雇主对这项工作具有所有�，
+   并且必须��根�GPL对其进行放行。
+
+一般�说，在�布代�之�进行一些�外的�考，几乎总是能在短时间内得到回报。
+
+补�准备
+--------
+
+准备�布补��能是一个惊人的工作�，但�次�试节�时间在这里通常是�明智的，
+�使在短期内。
+
+必须针对内核的特定版本准备补�。作为一般规则，补�程�应该基于Linus的Git树中
+的当�主线。当以主线为基础时，从一个众所周知的�布点开始——一个稳定的或RC的
+�布——而�是在一个主线分支任�点。
+
+但是，�能需�针对-mm�linux-next或�系统树生�版本，以便于更广泛的测试和审查。
+根�补�的区域以�其他地方的情况，针对这些其他树建立补��能需�大�的工作�
+解决冲�和处�API更改。
+
+�有最简�的更改�应格�化为�个补�；其他所有更改都应作为一系列逻辑更改进行。
+分割补�是一门艺术；一些开�人员花了很长时间�弄清楚如何按照社区期望的方��
+�。然而，有一些�验法则�以大大帮助：
+
+ - 您�布的补�程�系列几乎肯定�会是工作系统中的一系列更改。相�，您所�的
+   更改需�在最终形�中加以考虑，然�以有�义的方�进行拆分。开�人员对离散的�
+   自包�的更改感兴趣，而�是您获�这些更改的路径。
+
+ - �个逻辑上独立的�更都应该格�化为�独的补�。这些更改�以是�的（“�此
+   结构添加字段�）或大的（例如，添加一个��的新驱动程�），但它们在概念上
+   应该是�的，并且�以接�一行�述。�个补�都应该�一个特定的更改，�以�独
+   检查并验�它所�的事情。
+
+ - 作为�申上述准则的一�方法：��在�一补�中混���类型的更改。如果一个
+   补�修�了一个关键的安全�洞，�新排列了一些结构，并�新格�化了代�，那么
+   很有�能它会被忽略，而��的修�将丢失。
+
+ - �个补�都应该产生一个内核，它�以正确地构建和�行；如果补�系列在中间被
+   中断，那么结果应该�然是一个工作的内核。补�系列的部分应用是使用
+   “git bisct�工具查找回归的一个常�场景；如果结果是一个��的内核，那么对于
+   那些从事追踪问题的高尚工作的开�人员和用户�说，将使他们的生活更加艰难。
+
+ - �过，��过分。一�开�人员曾�将一组编辑内容作为500个�独的补��布到一个
+   文件中，这并没有使他�为内核邮件列表中最�欢迎的人。一个补��以相当大，
+   ��它�然包�一个�一的逻辑�更。
+
+ - 用一系列补�添加一个全新的基础设施是很有诱惑力的，但是在系列中的最�一个
+   补��用整个补�之�，该基础设施是�使用的。如果�能的�，应该��这�
+   诱惑；如果这个系列增加了回归，那么二分法将指出最�一个补�是导致问题的
+   补�，�使真正的bug在其他地方。��有�能，添加新代�的补�程�应该立�
+   激活该代�。
+
+创建完美补�系列的工作�能是一个令人沮丧的过程，在完�“真正的工作�之�需�花费
+大�的时间和�考。但是，如果�得好，这是一段很好的时间。
+
+补�格�和更改日志
+------------------
+
+所以现在你有了一系列完美的补��以�布，但是这项工作还没有完�。�个补�都
+需�被格�化�一�消�，它�以快速而清晰地将其目的传达给世界其他地方。为此，
+�个补�将由以下部分组�：
+
+ - 命�补�作者的�选“from�行。�有当你通过电�邮件传递别人的补�时，这一行
+   �是必�的，但是如果有疑问，添加它�会有任何伤害。
+
+ - 一行�述补�的作用。对于没有其他上下文的读者�说，此消�应该足够了解补�
+   的范围；这是将在“短格���更日志中显示的行。此消�通常首先用相关的�系统
+   �称格�化，然�是补�的目的。例如：
+
+    ::
+
+	gpio: fix build on CONFIG_GPIO_SYSFS=n
+
+ - 一个空白行，��是补�内容的详细�述。这个�述�以是必需的；它应该说明补�
+   的作用以�为什么它应该应用于内核。
+
+ - 一个或多个标记行，至少有一个由补�作者的：signed-off-by 签�。签�将在下�
+   更详细地�述。
+
+上�的项目一起构�补�的�更日志。写一篇好的�更日志是一门至关��但常常被
+忽视的艺术；值得花一点时间�讨论这个问题。当你写一个�更日志时，你应该记�
+有很多��的人会读你的�。其中包括�系统维护人员和审查人员，他们需�决定是�
+应该包括补�，分销商和其他维护人员试图决定是�应该将补���移�到其他内核，
+bug�寻人员想知�补�是�负责他们正在追查的问题，想知�内核如何�化的用户。
+等等。一个好的�更日志以最直接和最简�的方��所有这些人传达所需的信�。
+
+为此，总结行应该�述�更的影�和动机，以�在一行约��件下�能�生的�化。
+然�，详细的�述�以详述这些主题，并�供任何需�的附加信�。如果补�修�了
+一个bug，请引用引入该bug的commit（如果�能，请在引用commits时�时�供commit id
+和标题）。如果�个问题与特定的日志或编译器输出相关�，请包�该输出以帮助其他
+人�索�一问题的解决方案。如果更改是为了支�以�补�中的其他更改，那么就这么
+说。如果更改了内部API，请详细说明这些更改以�其他开�人员应该如何�应。一般
+�说，你越能把自己放在�个阅读你的changelog的人的�置上，changelog（和内核
+作为一个整体）就越好。
+
+�用说，�更日志应该是将�更�交到修订控制系统时使用的文本。接下�是：
+
+ - 补�本身，采用统一的（“-u�）补�格�。将“-p�选项用于diff将使函数�与更改
+   相关�，从而使结果补�更容易被其他人读�。
+
+您应该��在补�中包括对�相关文件（例如，由构建过程生�的文件或编辑器
+备份文件）的更改。文档目录中的文件“dontdiff�在这方�有帮助；使用“-X�选项将
+其传递给diff。
+
+上��到的标签用于�述��开�人员如何与这个补�的开�相关�。
+:ref:`Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/submitting-patches.rst <cn_submittingpatches>`
+文档中对它们进行了详细�述；下�是一个简短的总结。�一行的格�如下：
+
+::
+
+	tag: Full Name <email address>  optional-other-stuff
+
+常用的标签有：
+
+ - Signed-off-by: 这是一个开�人员的�明，他或她有��交补�以包�到内核中。
+   这是开���认��议，其全文�在
+   :ref:`Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/submitting-patches.rst <cn_submittingpatches>`
+   中找到，如果没有适当的签字，则�能�并到主线中。
+
+ - Co-developed-by: 声明补�是由多个开�人员共�创建的；当几个人在一个补�上
+   工作时，它用于将属性赋予共�作者（除了 From: 所赋予的作者之外）。因为
+   Co-developed-by: 表示作者身份，所以�个共�开�人, 必须紧跟在相关�作作者
+   的签�之�。具体内容和示例�以在以下文件中找到
+   :ref:`Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/submitting-patches.rst <cn_submittingpatches>`
+
+ - Acked-by: 表示�一个开�人员（通常是相关代�的维护人员）��补�适�包�
+   在内核中。
+
+ - Tested-by: 声明指定的人已�测试了补�并�现它�以工作。
+
+ - Reviewed-by: 指定的开�人员已�审查了补�的正确性；有关详细信�，请�阅
+   :ref:`Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/submitting-patches.rst <cn_submittingpatches>`
+
+ - Reported-by: 指定报告此补�修�的问题的用户；此标记用于�供感谢。
+
+ - Cc：指定的人收到了补�的副本，并有机会对此�表评论。
+
+在补�中添加标签时��心：�有cc:�适�在没有指定人员明确许�的情况下添加。
+
+��补�
+--------
+
+在邮寄补�之�，您还需�注�以下几点：
+
+ - 您确定您的邮件��程��会��补��？有�费的空白更改或由邮件客户端
+   执行的行包装的补��会在�一端�原，并且通常�会进行任何详细检查。如果有
+   任何疑问，把补�寄给你自己，让你自己相信它是完好无�的。
+
+   :ref:`Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/email-clients.rst <cn_email_clients>`
+   �供了一些有用的�示，�以让特定的邮件客户机工作以��补�。
+
+ - 你确定你的补�没有愚蠢的错误�？您应该始终通过scripts/checkpatch.pl�行
+   补�程�，并解决它�出的投诉。请记�，checkpatch.pl虽然是大��考内核
+   补�应该是什么样�的体现，但它并�比您�明。如果修�checkpatch.pl投诉会
+   使代��得更糟，请��这样�。
+
+补�应始终以纯文本形���。请��将它们作为附件��；这使得审阅者在答�中更难
+引用补�的部分。相�，�需将补�直接放到您的消�中。
+
+邮寄补�时，��的是将副本��给任何�能感兴趣的人。与其他一些项目��，内核
+鼓励人们错误地��过多的副本；���定相关人员会看到您在邮件列表中的�布。
+尤其是，副本应��至：
+
+ - �影��系统的维护人员。如�所述，维护人员文件是查找这些人员的第一个地方。
+
+ - 其他在�一领域工作的开�人员，尤其是那些现在�能在那里工作的开�人员。使用
+   git查看还有�修改了您正在处�的文件，这很有帮助。
+
+ - 如果您对错误报告或功能请求�出�应，也�以抄�原始��人。
+
+ - 将副本��到相关邮件列表，或者，如果没有其他应用，则��到Linux内核列表。
+
+ - 如果您正在修�一个bug，请考虑该修�是�应进入下一个稳定更新。如果是这样，
+   stable@vger.kernel.org 应该得到补�的副本。�外，在补�本身的标签中添加
+   一个“cc:stable@vger.kernel.org�；这将使稳定团队在修�进入主线时收到通知。
+
+当为一个补�选择接收者时，最好知�你认为�最终会接�这个补�并将其�并。虽然
+�以将补�直接��给LinusTorvalds并让他�并，但通常情况下�会这样�。Linus
+很忙，并且有�系统维护人员负责监视内核的特定部分。通常您会希望维护人员�并您
+的补�。如果没有明显的维护人员，Andrew Morton通常是最�的补�目标。
+
+补�需�好的主题行。补�程�行的规范格�如下：
+
+::
+
+	[PATCH nn/mm] subsys: one-line description of the patch
+
+其中“nn�是补�的��，“mm�是系列中补�的总数，“subsys�是�影��系统的�称。
+显然，一个�独的补��以�略nn/mm。
+
+如果您有一系列��的补�，那么通常将介�性�述作为零部分��。�过，这�约定
+并没有得到普��循；如果您使用它，请记�简介中的信��会使它进入内核�更日志。
+因此，请确�补�本身具有完整的�更日志信�。
+
+一般�说，多部分补�的第二部分和�续部分应作为对第一部分的回���，以便它们
+在接收端都连接在一起。�git和coilt这样的工具有命令，�以通过适当的线程��
+一组补�。但是，如果您有一个长系列，并且正在使用git，请远离–chain reply-to
+选项，以��创建异常深的嵌套。
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/6.Followthrough.rst b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/6.Followthrough.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f509e077e1cb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/6.Followthrough.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,145 @@
+.. include:: ../disclaimer-zh_CN.rst
+
+:Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/6.Followthrough.rst <development_followthrough>`
+:Translator: Alex Shi <alex.shi@linux.alibaba.com>
+
+.. _cn_development_followthrough:
+
+è·Ÿè¿›
+====
+
+在这一点上，您已��循了到目�为止给出的指导方针，并且，��您自己的工程技能
+的增加，已��布了一系列完美的补�。�使是�验丰富的内核开�人员也能犯的最大
+错误之一是，认为他们的工作现在已�完�了。事实上，�布补��味�进入�程的下
+一个阶段，�能还需��很多工作。
+
+一个补�在第一次�布时就�常出色，没有改进的余地,这是很罕�的。内核开��程
+认识到这一事实，因此，它�常注�对已�布代�的改进。作为代�的作者，您应该与
+内核社区�作，以确�您的代�符�内核的质�标准。如果��与这个过程，很�能会
+阻止将补�包�到主线中。
+
+与审阅者�作
+------------
+
+任何�义上的补�都会导致其他开�人员在审查代�时�表大�评论。对于许多开�
+人员�说，与审查人员�作�能是内核开�过程中最令人生�的部分。但是，如果你
+记�一些事情，生活会�得容易得多：
+
+ - 如果你已�很好地解释了你的补�，评论人员会�解它的价值，以�为什么你会
+   费尽心�去写它。但是这个并�能阻止他们�出一个基本的问题：五年或�年�
+   用这个代�维护一个内核会是什么感觉？你�能被�求�出的许多改�——从编�风格
+   的调整到大�的�写——都�自于对Linux的�解，�从现在起�年�，Linux�将在
+   开�中。
+
+ - 代�审查是一项艰苦的工作，这是一项相对�力�讨好的工作；人们记得�编写了
+   内核代�，但对于那些审查它的人�说，几乎没有什么�久的�声。因此，评论
+   人员�能会�得暴�，尤其是当他们看到�样的错误被一��一�地犯下时。如果
+   你得到了一个看起�愤怒�侮辱或完全冒犯你的评论，抵制以�样方�回应的冲动。
+   代�审查是关于代�的，而�是关于人的，代�审查人员�会亲自攻击您。
+
+ - �样，代�审查人员也�想以牺牲你雇主的利益为代价�宣传他们雇主的议程。
+   内核开�人员通常希望今�几年能在内核上工作，但他们明白他们的雇主�能会改
+   �。他们真的，几乎毫无例外地，致力于创造他们所能�到的最好的内核；他们并
+   没有试图给雇主的竞争对手造��适。
+
+所有这些归根结底都是，当审阅者�您��评论时，您需�注�他们正在进行的技术
+观察。��让他们的表达方�或你自己的骄傲阻止这�事情的�生。当你在一个补�
+上得到评论时，花点时间去�解评论人想说什么。如果�能的�，请修�审阅者�求
+您修�的内容。然�回�审稿人：谢谢他们，并�述你将如何回答他们的问题。
+
+请注�，您�必��审阅者建议的�个更改。如果您认为审阅者误解了您的代�，请
+解释到底�生了什么。如果您对建议的更改有技术上的异议，请�述它并�明您对该
+问题的解决方案是正确的。如果你的解释有��，审稿人会接�的。�过，如果你的
+解释�能�明是有说�力的，尤其是当其他人开始��审稿人的观点时，请花些时间
+�新考虑一下。你很容易对自己解决问题的方法视而��，以至于你没有�识到�个
+问题根本是错误的，或者你甚至没有解决正确的问题。
+
+Andrew Morton建议，�一��会导致代�更改的评论都应该导致�外的代�注释；
+这�以帮助未�的评论人员��出现第一次出现的问题。
+
+一个致命的错误是忽视评论，希望它们会消失。他们�会走的。如果您在没有对之�
+收到的注释�出�应的情况下�新�布代�，那么很�能会�现补�毫无用处。
+
+说到�新�布代�：请记�，审阅者�会记�您上次�布的代�的所有细节。因此，
+�醒审查人员以��出的问题以�您如何处�这些问题总是一个好主�；补��更
+日志是�供此类信�的好地方。审阅者�必�索列表档案�熟悉上次所说的内容；
+如果您帮助他们开始�行，当他们�新访问您的代�时，他们的心情会更好。
+
+如果你已�试��正确的事情，但事情�然没有进展呢？大多数技术上的分歧都�以
+通过讨论�解决，但有时人们�需��出决定。如果你真的认为这个决定对你�利，
+你�以试��更高的�力上诉。在这篇文章中，更高的�力倾�于Andrew Morton。
+Andrew在内核开�社区中�i很大的尊�；他�常为似乎被�望地阻塞事情清障。
+尽管如此，对Andrew的呼��应轻而易举，也�应在所有其他替代方案都被探索之�
+使用。当然，记�，他也�能���你的��。
+
+接下�会�生什么
+----------------
+
+如果一个补�被认为是添加到内核中的一件好事，并且一旦大多数审查问题得到解决，
+下一步通常是进入�系统维护人员的树中。工作方�因�系统而异；�个维护人员都
+有自己的工作方�。特别是，�能有�止一棵树——一棵树，也许，专门用于计划下一
+个�并窗�的补�，�一棵树用于长期工作。
+
+对于应用于没有明显�系统树（例如内存管�修补程�）的区域的修补程�，默认树
+通常以-mm结尾。影�多个�系统的补�也�以最终通过-mm树。
+
+包�在�系统树中�以�高补�的��性。现在，使用该树的其他开�人员将默认获
+得补�。�系统树通常也为Linux�供支�，使其内容对整个开�社区��。在这一点
+上，您很�能会从一组新的审阅者那里得到更多的评论；这些评论需��上一轮那样
+得到回答。
+
+在这一点上也会�生什么，这�决于你的补�的性质，是与其他人正在�的工作�生
+冲�。在最�的情况下，严�的补�冲��能会导致一些工作被�置，以便剩余的补�
+�以�形并�并。�一些时候，冲�解决将涉�到与其他开�人员�作，�能还会
+在树之间移动一些补�，以确�所有的应用都是干净的。这项工作�能是一件痛苦的
+事情，但�计算您的�祉：在Linux下一棵树出现之�，这些冲�通常�在�并窗�
+中出现，必须迅速解决。现在�以在�并窗�打开之�，在空闲时解决这些问题。
+
+有�一日，如果一切顺利，您将登录并看到您的补�已��并到主线内核中。�贺你�
+然而，一旦庆�活动完�（并且您已�将自己添加到维护人员文件中），就值得记�
+一个��的�事实：工作�然没有完�。并入主线带�了自身的挑战。
+
+首先，补�的��性�次�高。�能会有新一轮的开�者评论，他们以��知�这
+个补�。忽略它们�能很有诱惑力，因为您的代���存在任何被�并的问题。但是，
+�抵制这�诱惑，您�然需�对有问题或建议的开�人员作出�应。
+
+�过，更��的是：将代�包�在主线中会将代�交给更大的一组测试人员。�使您
+为尚未�供的硬件�供了驱动程�，您也会惊讶于有多少人会将您的代�构建到内核
+中。当然，如果有测试人员，也会有错误报告。
+
+最糟糕的错误报告是回归。如果你的补�导致回归，你会�现很多�舒�的眼�盯�
+你；回归需�尽快修�。如果您�愿�或无法修�回归（其他人都�会为您修�），
+那么在稳定期内，您的补�几乎肯定会被移除。除了�定您为使补�进入主线所�的
+所有工作之外，如果由于未能修�回归而�消补�，很�能会使将�的工作更难�并。
+
+在处�完任何回归之�，�能还有其他普通的bug需�处�。稳定期是修�这些错误并
+确�代�在主线内核版本中的首次�布尽�能��的最好机会。所以，请回答错误
+报告，并尽�能解决问题。这就是稳定期的目的；一旦解决了旧补�的任何问题，就
+�以开始创建酷的新补�。
+
+别忘了，还有其他里程碑也�能会创建bug报告：下一个主线稳定版本，当著�的�行
+商选择包�补�的内核版本时，等等。继续�应这些报告是您工作的基本骄傲。但是，
+如果这�是足够的动机，那么也值得考虑的是，开�社区会记�那些在�并�对代�
+失去兴趣的开�人员。下一次你�布补�时，他们会以你以��会在身边维护它为�
+设�评估它。
+
+其他�能�生的事情
+------------------
+
+有一天，你�以打开你的邮件客户端，看到有人给你寄了一个代�补�。毕竟，这是
+让您的代�公开存在的好处之一。如果您��这个补�，您�以将它转�给�系统
+维护人员（确�包�一个正确的From:行，这样属性是正确的，并添加一个您自己
+的签准），或者回�一个Acked-by，让原始��者�上��它。
+
+如果您���补�，请��一个礼貌的回�，解释原因。如果�能的�，告诉作者需�
+�哪些更改�能让您接�补�。对于代�的编写者和维护者所�对的�并补�，存在�
+一定的阻力，但仅此而已。如果你被认为�必�的阻�了好的工作，那么这些补�最
+终会�过你身边并进入主线。在Linux内核中，没有人对任何代�拥有�对的�决�。
+除了Linus。
+
+在�常罕�的情况下，您�能会看到完全��的东西：�一个开�人员�布了针对您
+的问题的��解决方案。在这一点上，两个补�中的一个�能�会�并，“我的在这里
+是第一个��被认为是一个令人信�的技术论�。如果有人的补��代了你的补�而进
+入了主线，那么�有一�方法�以回应你：高兴你的问题得到解决，继续你的工作。
+以这�方�把一个人的工作推到一边�能会伤害和气�，但是在他们忘记了�的补�
+真正被�并很久之�，社区会记�你的�应。
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/7.AdvancedTopics.rst b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/7.AdvancedTopics.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..956815edbd18
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/7.AdvancedTopics.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,124 @@
+.. include:: ../disclaimer-zh_CN.rst
+
+:Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/7.AdvancedTopics.rst <development_advancedtopics>`
+:Translator: Alex Shi <alex.shi@linux.alibaba.com>
+
+.. _cn_development_advancedtopics:
+
+高级主题
+========
+
+现在，希望您能够掌�开��程的工作方�。然而，还有更多的东西�学�本节将介�
+一些主题，这些主题对希望�为Linux内核开�过程常规部分的开�人员有帮助。
+
+使用Git管�补�
+---------------
+
+内核使用分布�版本控制始于2002年�，当时Linus首次开始使用专有的Bitkeeper应用
+程�。虽然bitkeeper存在争议，但它所体现的软件版本管�方法�肯定�是。分布�
+版本控制�以立�加速内核开�项目。在当�的时代，有几��费的比特��器替代�。
+无论好�，内核项目都将Git作为其选择的工具。
+
+使用Git管�补��以使开�人员的生活更加轻�，尤其是��补�数�的增加。Git
+也有其粗糙的边缘和一定的�险，它是一个年轻和强大的工具，�然在其开�人员完善
+中。本文档�会试图教会读者如何使用git；这会是个巨长的文档。相�，这里的�点
+将是Git如何特别适�内核开�过程。想�加快Git的开�人员�以在以下网站上找到
+更多信�：
+
+	http://git-scm.com/
+
+	http://www.kernel.org/pub/software/scm/git/docs/user-manual.html
+
+在�试使用它使补��供其他人使用之�，第一�务是阅读上述站点，对Git的工作
+方�有一个扎实的了解。使用Git的开�人员应该能够获得主线存储库的副本，探索
+修订历�，�交对树的更改，使用分支等。了解Git用于�写历�的工具（如Rebase）
+也很有用。Git有自己的术语和概念；Git的新用户应该了解refs�远程分支�索引�
+快进�并�推拉�分离头等。一开始�能有点�人，但这些概念�难通过一点学习�
+�解。
+
+使用git生�通过电�邮件�交的补�是�高速度的一个很好的练习。
+
+当您准备好开始安装Git树供其他人查看时，您当然需�一个�以从中��的�务器。
+如果您有一个�以访问Internet的系统，那么使用git守护进程设置这样的�务器相
+对简�。�则，�费的公共托管网站（例如github）开始出现在网络上。�熟的开�
+人员�以在kernel.org上获得一个�户，但这些�户并�容易找到；有关更多信�，
+请�阅 http://kernel.org/faq/
+
+正常的Git工作�程涉�到许多分支的使用。�一�开�线都�以分为�独的“主题
+分支�，并独立维护。Git的分支机构很便宜，没有�由��费使用它们。而且，在
+任何情况下，您都�应该在任何您打算让其他人从中�益的分支中进行开�。应该
+�心地创建公开�用的分支；当它们处于完整的形�并准备好�行时(而�是之�），
+�并开�分支的补�。
+
+Git�供了一些强大的工具，�以让您�写开�历�。一个�方便的补�（比如说，
+一个打破二分法的补�，或者有其他一些明显的缺陷）�以在适当的�置修�，或者
+完全从历�中消失。一个补�系列�以被�写，就好�它是在今天的主线之上写的
+一样，�使你已�花了几个月的时间在写它。�以�明地将更改从一个分支转移到�
+一个分支。等等。明智地使用git修改历�的能力�以帮助创建问题更少的干净补�集。
+
+然而，过度使用这�能力�能会导致其他问题，而�仅仅是对创建完美项目历�的
+简�痴迷。�写历�将�写该历�中包�的更改，将�过测试（希望）的内核树�
+为未�测试的内核树。但是，除此之外，如果开�人员没有对项目历�的共享视图，
+他们就无法轻�地�作；如果您�写了其他开�人员拉入他们存储库的历�，您将
+使这些开�人员的生活更加困难。因此，这里有一个简�的�验法则：被导出到其他
+人的历�在此�通常被认为是���的。
+
+因此，一旦将一组更改推�到公开�用的�务器上，就�应该�写这些更改。如果您
+�试强制进行�会导致快进�并（��共享�一历�记录的更改）的更改，Git将�
+试强制执行此规则。�以�写此检查，有时�能需��写导出的树。在树之间移动�
+更集以��Linux-next中的冲�就是一个例�。但这�行为应该是罕�的。这就是为
+什么开�应该在�有分支中进行（必�时�以�写）并且�有在公共分支处于��的
+高级状�时�转移到公共分支中的原因之一。
+
+当主线（或其他一组�更所基于的树）�进时，很容易与该树�并以��领先地�。
+对于一个�有的分支，rebasing �能是一个很容易跟上�一棵树的方法，但是一旦
+一棵树被导出到全世界，rebasing就�是一个选项。一旦�生这�情况，就必须进行
+完全�并（merge）。�并有时是很有�义的，但是过于频�的�并会�必�地扰乱
+历�。在这�情况下，建议的技术是��常�并，通常�在特定的�布点（如主线-rc
+�布）�并。如果您对特定的更改感到紧张，则�以始终在�有分支中执行测试�并。
+在这�情况下，git rerere 工具很有用；它记��并冲�是如何解决的，这样您就
+�必��相�的工作。
+
+关于Git这样的工具的一个最大的��抱怨是：补�从一个存储库到�一个存储库的
+大�移动使得很容易陷入错误建议的�更中，这些�更�开审查雷达进入主线。当内
+核开�人员看到这�情况�生时，他们往往会感到�高兴；在Git树上放置未查看或
+主题外的补��能会影�您将�获�树的能力。引用Linus:
+
+::
+
+        你�以给我�补�，但�我从你哪里�一个Git补�，我需�知�你知�
+        你在�什么，我需�能够相信事情而�去检查�个个人改�。
+
+（http://lwn.net/articles/224135/）。
+
+为了��这�情况，请确�给定分支中的所有补�都与相关主题紧密相关；“驱动程�
+修��分支�应更改核心内存管�代�。而且，最��的是，��使用Git树�绕过
+审查过程。�时的将树的摘��布到相关的列表中，当时间�适时，请求
+Linux-next 中包�该树。
+
+如果其他人开始��补�以包�到您的树中，��忘记查看它们。还�确�您维护正确
+的作者信�； ``git am`` 工具在这方��得最好，但是如果它通过第三方转�给您，
+您�能需�在补�中添加“From：�行。
+
+请求pull�作时，请务必�供所有相关信�：树的�置��拉的分支以�拉�作将导致
+的更改。在这方�，git request pull 命令�常有用；它将按照其他开�人员的预期
+格�化请求，并检查以确�您记�了将这些更改推�到公共�务器。
+
+审查补�
+--------
+
+一些读者当然会�对将本节与“高级主题�放在一起，因为�使是刚开始的内核开�人员
+也应该检查补�。当然，学习如何在内核环境中编程没有比查看其他人�布的代�更好
+的方法了。此外，审阅者永远供�应求；通过查看代�，您�以对整个�程�出�大贡献。
+
+审查代��能是一个令人生�的�景，特别是对于一个新的内核开�人员�说，他们
+�能会对公开询问代�感到紧张，而这些代�是由那些有更多�验的人�布的。�过，
+�使是最有�验的开�人员编写的代�也�以得到改进。也许对评审员（所有评审员）
+最好的建议是：把评审评论当�问题而�是批评。询问“在这�路径中如何释放�？�
+总是比说“这里的�是错误的�更好。
+
+��的开�人员将从��的角度审查代�。一些主�关注的是编�样�以�代�行是
+�有尾�空格。其他人将主�关注补�作为一个整体实现的�更是�对内核有好处。
+然而，其他人会检查是�存在�定问题�堆栈使用过度��能的安全问题�在其他
+地方�现的代����足够的文档�对性能的�利影��用户空间ABI更改等。所有
+类型的检查，如果它们导致更好的代�进入内核，都是�欢迎和值得的。
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/8.Conclusion.rst b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/8.Conclusion.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2bbd76161e10
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/8.Conclusion.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+.. include:: ../disclaimer-zh_CN.rst
+
+:Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/8.Conclusion.rst <development_conclusion>`
+:Translator: Alex Shi <alex.shi@linux.alibaba.com>
+
+.. _cn_development_conclusion:
+
+更多信�
+========
+
+关于Linux内核开�和相关主题的信���很多。首先是在内核�代�分�中找到的
+文档目录。顶级 :ref:`Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/howto.rst <cn_process_howto>`
+文件是一个��的起点
+:ref:`Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/submitting-patches.rst <cn_submittingpatches>`
+和 :ref:`process/submitting-drivers.rst <submittingdrivers>`
+也是所有内核开�人员都应该阅读的内容。许多内部内核API都是使用kerneldoc机制
+记录的；“make htmldocs�或“make pdfdocs��用于以HTML或PDF格�生�这些文档（
+尽管�些�行版�供的tex版本会�到内部�制，无法正确处�文档）。
+
+��的网站在�个细节层次上讨论内核开�。您的作者想谦虚地建议用 http://lwn.net/
+作为��；有关许多特定内核主题的信��以通过以下网�的lwn内核索引找到：
+
+        http://lwn.net/kernel/index/
+
+除此之外，内核开�人员的一个�贵资�是：
+
+        http://kernelnewbies.org/
+
+当然，我们�应该忘记 http://kernel.org/ 这是内核�布信�的最终�置。
+
+关于内核开�有很多书：
+
+        Linux设备驱动程�，第三版（Jonathan Corbet�Alessandro Rubini和Greg Kroah Hartman）。
+        在线：http://lwn.net/kernel/ldd3/
+
+        Linux内核开�（Robert Love）。
+
+        了解Linux内核（Daniel Bovet和Marco Cesati）。
+
+然而，所有这些书都有一个共�的缺点：当它们上架时，它们往往有些过时，而且它们
+已�上架一段时间了。�过，在那里还�以找到相当多的好信�。
+
+有关git的文档，请访问：
+
+        http://www.kernel.org/pub/software/scm/git/docs/
+
+        http://www.kernel.org/pub/software/scm/git/docs/user-manual.html
+
+结论
+====
+
+�贺所有通过这篇冗长的文件的人。希望它能够帮助您�解Linux内核是如何开�的，
+以�您如何�与这个过程。
+
+最�，��的是�与。任何开�软件项目都�超过其贡献者投入其中的总和。Linux内核
+的�展速度和以�一样快，因为它得到了大�开�人员的帮助，他们都在努力使它�得
+更好。内核是一个主�的例�，说明当��上万的人为了一个共�的目标一起工作时，
+�以�些什么。
+
+�过，内核总是�以从更大的开�人员基础中获益。总有更多的工作��。但是，�样
+��的是，Linux生�系统中的大多数其他�与者�以通过为内核�出贡献而�益。使
+代�进入主线是�高代�质���低维护和分��本��高对内核开�方�的影�程度
+等的关键。这是一�人人都赢的局�。踢开你的编辑，�加入我们�，你会�常�
+欢迎的。
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/code-of-conduct-interpretation.rst b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/code-of-conduct-interpretation.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c323ce76e0cb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/code-of-conduct-interpretation.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,108 @@
+.. include:: ../disclaimer-zh_CN.rst
+
+:Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/code-of-conduct-interpretation.rst <code_of_conduct_interpretation>`
+:Translator: Alex Shi <alex.shi@linux.alibaba.com>
+
+.. _cn_code_of_conduct_interpretation:
+
+Linux内核贡献者契约行为准则解释
+===============================
+
+:ref:`cn_code_of_conduct` 准则是一个通用文档，旨在为几乎所有开�社区�供一套规则。
+�个开�社区都是独一无二的，Linux内核也�例外。因此，本文�述了Linux内核社区中
+如何解释它。我们也�希望这�解释��时间的推移是��的，并将根�需�进行调整。
+
+与开�软件的“传统�方法相比，Linux内核开�工作是一个�常个人化的过程。你的贡献
+和背�的想法将被仔细审查，往往导致批判和批评。审查将几乎总是需�改进，�料�
+能包括在内核中。�知�这是因为所有相关人员都希望看到Linux整体�功的最佳解决方
+案。这个开�过程已�被�明�以创建有�以�最�壮的�作系统内核，我们�想�任何
+事情�导致�交质�和最终结果的下�。
+
+维护者
+------
+
+行为准则多次使用“维护者�一�。在内核社区中，“维护者�是负责�系统�驱动程�或
+文件的任何人，并在内核�代�树的维护者文件中列出。
+
+责任
+----
+
+《行为准则》�到了维护人员的�利和责任，这需�进一步澄清。
+
+首先，最��的是，有一个��的期望是由维护人员通过实例�领导。
+
+也就是说，我们的社区是广阔的，对维护者没有新的�求，他们�方�处�其他人在
+他们活跃的社区的行为。这一责任由我们所有人承担，最终《行为准则》记录了最终的
+上诉路径，以防有关行为问题的问题悬而未决。
+
+维护人员应该愿�在出现问题时�供帮助，并在需�时与社区中的其他人�作。如果您
+�确定如何处�出现的情况，请��害怕�系技术咨询委员会（TAB）或其他维护人员。
+除�您愿�，�则�会将其视为�规报告。如果您�确定是�该�系TAB 或任何其他维
+护人员，请�系我们的冲�调解人 Mishi Choudhary <mishi@linux.com>。
+
+最�，“善待对方��是�个人的最终目标。我们知��个人都是人，有时我们都会失败，
+但我们所有人的首�目标应该是努力�好地解决问题。执行行为准则将是最�的选择。
+
+我们的目标是创建一个强大的�技术先进的�作系统，以�所涉�的技术��性，这自
+然需�专业知识和决策。
+
+所需的专业知识因贡献领域而异。它主�由上下文和技术��性决定，其次由贡献者和
+维护者的期望决定。
+
+专家的期望和决策都��过讨论，但在最�，为了�得进展，必须能够�出决策。这一
+特�掌�在维护人员和项目领导的手中，预计将善�使用。
+
+因此，设定专业知识期望�作出决定和拒��适当的贡献�被视为��行为准则。
+
+虽然维护人员一般都欢迎新�者，但他们帮助（新）贡献者克�障�的能力有�，因此
+他们必须确定优先事项。这也�应被视为��了行为准则。内核社区�识到这一点，并
+以��形��供入门级节目，如 kernelnewbies.org 。
+
+范围
+----
+
+Linux内核社区主�在一组公共电�邮件列表上进行交互，这些列表分布在由多个��
+公�或个人控制的多个���务器上。所有这些列表都在内核�代�树中的
+MAINTAINERS 文件中定义。��到这些邮件列表的任何电�邮件都被视为包�在行为
+准则中。
+
+使用 kernel.org bugzilla和其他�系统bugzilla 或bug跟踪工具的开�人员应该�循
+行为准则的指导原则。Linux内核社区没有“官方�项目电�邮件地�或“官方�社交媒体
+地�。使用kernel.org电�邮件�户执行的任何活动必须�循为kernel.org�布的行为
+准则，就�任何使用公�电�邮件�户的个人必须�循该公�的特定规则一样。
+
+行为准则并��止在邮件列表消��内核更改日志消�或代�注释中继续包��称�
+电�邮件地�和相关注释。
+
+其他论�中的互动包括在适用于上述论�的任何规则中，通常�包括在行为准则中。
+除了在�端情况下�考虑的例外情况。
+
+�交给内核的贡献应该使用适当的语言。在行为准则之�已�存在的内容现在�会被
+视为��。然而，�适当的语言�以被视为一个bug；如果任何相关方�交补�，
+这样的bug将被更快地修�。当�属于用户/内核API的一部分的表达�，或者�映已
+�布标准或规范中使用的术语的表达�，�被视为bug。
+
+执行
+----
+
+行为准则中列出的地�属于行为准则委员会。https://kernel.org/code-of-conduct.html
+列出了在任何给定时间接收这些电�邮件的确切�员。�员�能访问在加入委员会之�
+或离开委员会之�所�的报告。
+
+最�的行为准则委员会由TAB的志愿者以�作为中立第三方的专业调解人组�。委员会
+的首�任务是建立文件化的�程，并将其公开。
+
+如果报告人�希望将整个委员会纳入投诉或关切，�直接�系委员会的任何�员，包括
+调解人。
+
+行为准则委员会根��程审查案例（�上文），并根�需�和适当与TAB�商，例如请求
+和接收有关内核社区的信�。
+
+委员会�出的任何决定都将�交到表中，以便在必�时与相关维护人员一起执行。行为
+准则委员会的决定�以通过三分之二的投票推翻。
+
+�季度，行为准则委员会和标签将�供一份报告，概述行为准则委员会收到的匿�报告
+�其状�，以�任何�决决定的细节，包括完整和�识别的投票细节。
+
+我们希望在�动期之�为行为准则委员会人员�备建立一个��的�程。�生此情况时，
+将使用该信�更新此文档。
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/code-of-conduct.rst b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/code-of-conduct.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..99024df058e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/code-of-conduct.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+.. include:: ../disclaimer-zh_CN.rst
+
+:Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/code-of-conduct.rst <code_of_conduct>`
+:Translator: Alex Shi <alex.shi@linux.alibaba.com>
+
+.. _cn_code_of_conduct:
+
+贡献者契约行为准则
+++++++++++++++++++
+
+我们的誓言
+==========
+
+为了�造一个开放��好的环境，我们作为贡献者和维护人承诺，让我们的社区和�
+与者，拥有一个无骚扰的体验，无论年龄�体型�残疾����性别特��性别认�
+和表达��验水平�教育程度�社会状况，�济地��国��个人外貌����宗教
+或性身份和��。
+
+我们的标准
+==========
+
+有助于创造积�环境的行为包括：
+
+* 使用欢迎和包容的语言
+* 尊���的观点和�验
+* 优雅地接�建设性的批评
+* 关注什么对社区最有利
+* 对其他社区�员表示�情
+
+�与者的��接�行为包括：
+
+* 使用性�味的语言或�象以���欢迎的性注�或者更过分的行为
+* 煽动�侮辱/贬�评论以�个人或政治攻击
+* 公开或�下骚扰
+* 未�明确许�，�布他人的�人信�，如物�或电�地�。
+* 在专业场�被��认为�适当的其他行为
+
+我们的责任
+==========
+
+维护人员负责澄清�接�行为的标准，并应针对任何��接�行为采�适当和公平的
+纠正措施。
+
+维护人员有�和责任删除�编辑或拒�与本行为准则�一致的评论�承诺�代��
+wiki编辑�问题和其他贡献，或暂时或永久�止任何贡献者从事他们认为�适当�
+���冒犯或有害的其他行为。
+
+范围
+====
+
+当个人代表项目或其社区时，本行为准则既适用于项目空间，也适用于公共空间。
+代表一个项目或社区的例�包括使用一个正�的项目电�邮件地�，通过一个正�
+的社交媒体�户�布，或者在在线或离线事件中担任指定的代表。项目维护人员�以
+进一步定义和澄清项目的表示。
+
+执行
+====
+
+如有滥用�骚扰或其他��接�的行为，��系行为准则委员会<conduct@kernel.org>。
+所有投诉都将接�审查和调查，并将得到必�和适当的答�。行为准则委员会有义务
+对事件报告人�密。具体执行政策的进一步细节��独公布。
+
+归属
+====
+
+本行为准则改编自《贡献者契约》，版本1.4，�从
+https://www.contributor-covenant.org/version/1/4/code-of-conduct.html 获�。
+
+解释
+====
+
+有关Linux内核社区如何解释此文档，请�阅 :ref:`cn_code_of_conduct_interpretation`
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/coding-style.rst b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/coding-style.rst
index 1466aa64b8b4..5479c591c2f7 100644
--- a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/coding-style.rst
+++ b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/coding-style.rst
@@ -1,19 +1,10 @@
-Chinese translated version of Documentation/process/coding-style.rst
+.. include:: ../disclaimer-zh_CN.rst
 
-If you have any comment or update to the content, please post to LKML directly.
-However, if you have problem communicating in English you can also ask the
-Chinese maintainer for help.  Contact the Chinese maintainer, if this
-translation is outdated or there is problem with translation.
+:Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/coding-style.rst <codingstyle>`
 
-Chinese maintainer: Zhang Le <r0bertz@gentoo.org>
+.. _cn_codingstyle:
 
----------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-Documentation/process/coding-style.rst 的中文翻译
-
-如果想评论或更新本文的内容，请直接�信到LKML。如果你使用英文交�有困难的�，
-也�以�中文版维护者求助。如果本翻译更新��时或者翻译存在问题，请�系中文版
-维护者::
+译者::
 
   中文版维护者： 张� Zhang Le <r0bertz@gentoo.org>
   中文版翻译者： 张� Zhang Le <r0bertz@gentoo.org>
@@ -23,10 +14,6 @@ Documentation/process/coding-style.rst 的中文翻译
                  Li Zefan <lizf@cn.fujitsu.com>
                  Wang Chen <wangchen@cn.fujitsu.com>
 
-以下为正文
-
----------------------------------------------------------------------
-
 Linux 内核代�风格
 =========================
 
@@ -535,26 +522,43 @@ Documentation/doc-guide/ 和 scripts/kernel-doc 以获得详细信�。
       (* (max steps 1)
          c-basic-offset)))
 
-  (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook
-            (lambda ()
-              ;; Add kernel style
-              (c-add-style
-               "linux-tabs-only"
-               '("linux" (c-offsets-alist
-                          (arglist-cont-nonempty
-                           c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg
-                           c-lineup-arglist-tabs-only))))))
-
-  (add-hook 'c-mode-hook
-            (lambda ()
-              (let ((filename (buffer-file-name)))
-                ;; Enable kernel mode for the appropriate files
-                (when (and filename
-                           (string-match (expand-file-name "~/src/linux-trees")
-                                         filename))
-                  (setq indent-tabs-mode t)
-                  (setq show-trailing-whitespace t)
-                  (c-set-style "linux-tabs-only")))))
+  (dir-locals-set-class-variables
+   'linux-kernel
+   '((c-mode . (
+          (c-basic-offset . 8)
+          (c-label-minimum-indentation . 0)
+          (c-offsets-alist . (
+                  (arglist-close         . c-lineup-arglist-tabs-only)
+                  (arglist-cont-nonempty .
+		      (c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg c-lineup-arglist-tabs-only))
+                  (arglist-intro         . +)
+                  (brace-list-intro      . +)
+                  (c                     . c-lineup-C-comments)
+                  (case-label            . 0)
+                  (comment-intro         . c-lineup-comment)
+                  (cpp-define-intro      . +)
+                  (cpp-macro             . -1000)
+                  (cpp-macro-cont        . +)
+                  (defun-block-intro     . +)
+                  (else-clause           . 0)
+                  (func-decl-cont        . +)
+                  (inclass               . +)
+                  (inher-cont            . c-lineup-multi-inher)
+                  (knr-argdecl-intro     . 0)
+                  (label                 . -1000)
+                  (statement             . 0)
+                  (statement-block-intro . +)
+                  (statement-case-intro  . +)
+                  (statement-cont        . +)
+                  (substatement          . +)
+                  ))
+          (indent-tabs-mode . t)
+          (show-trailing-whitespace . t)
+          ))))
+
+  (dir-locals-set-directory-class
+   (expand-file-name "~/src/linux-trees")
+   'linux-kernel)
 
 这会让 emacs 在 ``~/src/linux-trees`` 下的 C �文件获得更好的内核代�风格。
 
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/development-process.rst b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/development-process.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..30cffe66c075
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/development-process.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+.. include:: ../disclaimer-zh_CN.rst
+
+:Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/development-process.rst <development_process_main>`
+:Translator: Alex Shi <alex.shi@linux.alibaba.com>
+
+.. _cn_development_process_main:
+
+内核开�过程指�
+================
+
+内容:
+
+.. toctree::
+   :numbered:
+   :maxdepth: 2
+
+   1.Intro
+   2.Process
+   3.Early-stage
+   4.Coding
+   5.Posting
+   6.Followthrough
+   7.AdvancedTopics
+   8.Conclusion
+
+本文档的目的是帮助开�人员（�其��）以最�的挫折感与开�社区�作。它试图记录这个社区如何以一��熟悉Linux内核开�（或者实际上是自由软件开�）的人�以访问的方�工作。虽然这里有一些技术资料，但这是一个��过程的讨论，�需�深入了解内核编程就�以�解。
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/email-clients.txt b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/email-clients.rst
index ec31d97e8d0e..102023651118 100644
--- a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/email-clients.txt
+++ b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/email-clients.rst
@@ -1,33 +1,34 @@
-Chinese translated version of Documentation/process/email-clients.rst
+.. _cn_email_clients:
 
-If you have any comment or update to the content, please contact the
-original document maintainer directly.  However, if you have a problem
-communicating in English you can also ask the Chinese maintainer for
-help.  Contact the Chinese maintainer if this translation is outdated
-or if there is a problem with the translation.
+.. include:: ../disclaimer-zh_CN.rst
 
-Chinese maintainer: Harry Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com>
----------------------------------------------------------------------
-Documentation/process/email-clients.rst 的中文翻译
+:Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/email-clients.rst <email_clients>`
 
-如果想评论或更新本文的内容，请直接�系原文档的维护者。如果你使用英文
-交�有困难的�，也�以�中文版维护者求助。如果本翻译更新��时或者翻
-译存在问题，请�系中文版维护者。
+译者::
 
-中文版维护者： 贾��  Harry Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com>
-中文版翻译者： 贾��  Harry Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com>
-中文版校译者： Yinglin Luan <synmyth@gmail.com>
-		Xiaochen Wang <wangxiaochen0@gmail.com>
-		yaxinsn <yaxinsn@163.com>
-
-以下为正文
----------------------------------------------------------------------
+        中文版维护者： 贾��  Harry Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com>
+        中文版翻译者： 贾��  Harry Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com>
+                       时奎亮  Alex Shi <alex.shi@linux.alibaba.com>
+        中文版校译者： Yinglin Luan <synmyth@gmail.com>
+        	       Xiaochen Wang <wangxiaochen0@gmail.com>
+                       yaxinsn <yaxinsn@163.com>
 
 Linux邮件客户端�置信�
-======================================================================
+=======================
+
+Git
+---
+
+现在大多数开�人员使用 ``git send-email`` 而�是常规的电�邮件客户端。这方�
+的手册�常好。在接收端，维护人员使用 ``git am`` 加载补�。
+
+如果你是 ``git`` 新手，那么把你的第一个补���给你自己。将其�存为包�所有
+标题的原始文本。�行 ``git am raw_email.txt`` ，然�使用 ``git log`` 查看更
+改日志。如果工作正常，�将补���到相应的邮件列表。
+
 
 普通�置
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+--------
 Linux内核补�是通过邮件被�交的，最好把补�作为邮件体的内嵌文本。有些维护者
 接收附件，但是附件的内容格�应该是"text/plain"。然而，附件一般是�赞�的，
 因为这会使补�的引用部分在评论过程中�的很困难。
@@ -56,7 +57,7 @@ Linux内核补�是通过邮件被�交的，最好把补�作为邮件体的
 
 
 一些邮件客户端�示
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+------------------
 这里给出一些详细的MUA�置�示，�以用于给Linux内核��补�。这些并��味是
 所有的软件包�置总结。
 
@@ -64,8 +65,8 @@ Linux内核补�是通过邮件被�交的，最好把补�作为邮件体的
 TUI = 以文本为基础的用户接�
 GUI = 图形界�用户接�
 
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 Alpine (TUI)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~
 
 �置选项：
 在"Sending Preferences"部分：
@@ -76,8 +77,8 @@ Alpine (TUI)
 当写邮件时，光标应该放在补�会出现的地方，然�按下CTRL-R组�键，使指定的
 补�文件嵌入到邮件中。
 
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 Evolution (GUI)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 
 一些开�者�功的使用它��补�
 
@@ -89,8 +90,8 @@ Evolution (GUI)
 
 你还�以"diff -Nru old.c new.c | xclip"，选择Preformat，然�使用中间键进行粘帖。
 
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 Kmail (GUI)
+~~~~~~~~~~~
 
 一些开�者�功的使用它��补�。
 
@@ -118,13 +119,13 @@ display"，这样内嵌附件更容易让读者看到。
 并且希望这将会被处�。邮件是以�针对�个用户�读写的��被�存的，所以如果你想把邮件�制到其他地方，
 你�得�把他们的��改为组或者整体�读。
 
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 Lotus Notes (GUI)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 
 ��使用它。
 
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 Mutt (TUI)
+~~~~~~~~~~
 
 很多Linux开�人员使用mutt客户端，所以�明它肯定工作的�常漂亮。
 
@@ -142,12 +143,49 @@ Muttä¸�自带编辑器，所以ä¸�管你使用什么编辑器都ä¸�应该带有è
 如果想�把补�作为内嵌文本。
 (a)ttach工作的很好，�带有"set paste"。
 
+你�以通过 ``git format-patch`` 生�补�，然�用 Mutt��它们::
+
+        $ mutt -H 0001-some-bug-fix.patch
+
 �置选项：
 它应该以默认设置的形�工作。
 然而，把"send_charset"设置为"us-ascii::utf-8"也是一个�错的主�。
 
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Mutt 是高度��置的。 这里是个使用mutt通过 Gmail ��的补�的最��置::
+
+  # .muttrc
+  # ================  IMAP ====================
+  set imap_user = 'yourusername@gmail.com'
+  set imap_pass = 'yourpassword'
+  set spoolfile = imaps://imap.gmail.com/INBOX
+  set folder = imaps://imap.gmail.com/
+  set record="imaps://imap.gmail.com/[Gmail]/Sent Mail"
+  set postponed="imaps://imap.gmail.com/[Gmail]/Drafts"
+  set mbox="imaps://imap.gmail.com/[Gmail]/All Mail"
+
+  # ================  SMTP  ====================
+  set smtp_url = "smtp://username@smtp.gmail.com:587/"
+  set smtp_pass = $imap_pass
+  set ssl_force_tls = yes # Require encrypted connection
+
+  # ================  Composition  ====================
+  set editor = `echo \$EDITOR`
+  set edit_headers = yes  # See the headers when editing
+  set charset = UTF-8     # value of $LANG; also fallback for send_charset
+  # Sender, email address, and sign-off line must match
+  unset use_domain        # because joe@localhost is just embarrassing
+  set realname = "YOUR NAME"
+  set from = "username@gmail.com"
+  set use_from = yes
+
+Mutt文档�有更多信�:
+
+    http://dev.mutt.org/trac/wiki/UseCases/Gmail
+
+    http://dev.mutt.org/doc/manual.html
+
 Pine (TUI)
+~~~~~~~~~~
 
 Pine过去有一些空格删�问题，但是这些现在应该都被修�了。
 
@@ -158,8 +196,8 @@ Pine过去有一些空格删å‡�问题，但是这些现在应该都被修å¤�了ã
 - "no-strip-whitespace-before-send"选项也是需�的。
 
 
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 Sylpheed (GUI)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 
 - 内嵌文本�以很好的工作（或者使用附件）。
 - �许使用外部的编辑器。
@@ -168,8 +206,8 @@ Sylpheed (GUI)
 - 在组�窗�中有一个很有用的ruler bar。
 - 给地�本中添加地�就�会正确的了解显示�。
 
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 Thunderbird (GUI)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 
 默认情况下，thunderbird很容易��文本，但是还有一些方法�以强制它�得更好。
 
@@ -191,13 +229,13 @@ Thunderbird (GUI)
   $EDITOR�读�或者�并补�到文本中。�实现它，�以下载并且安装这个扩展，然�添加一个使用它的
   按键View->Toolbars->Customize...最�当你书写信�的时候仅仅点击它就�以了。
 
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 TkRat (GUI)
+~~~~~~~~~~~
 
 �以使用它。使用"Insert file..."或者外部的编辑器。
 
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 Gmail (Web GUI)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 
 ��使用它��补�。
 
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/HOWTO b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/howto.rst
index 5f6d09edc9ac..5b671178b17b 100644
--- a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/HOWTO
+++ b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/howto.rst
@@ -1,32 +1,22 @@
-Chinese translated version of Documentation/process/howto.rst
+.. _cn_process_howto:
 
-If you have any comment or update to the content, please contact the
-original document maintainer directly.  However, if you have a problem
-communicating in English you can also ask the Chinese maintainer for
-help.  Contact the Chinese maintainer if this translation is outdated
-or if there is a problem with the translation.
+.. include:: ../disclaimer-zh_CN.rst
 
-Maintainer: Greg Kroah-Hartman <greg@kroah.com>
-Chinese maintainer: Li Yang <leoli@freescale.com>
----------------------------------------------------------------------
-Documentation/process/howto.rst 的中文翻译
+:Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/howto.rst <process_howto>`
 
-如果想评论或更新本文的内容，请直接�系原文档的维护者。如果你使用英文
-交�有困难的�，也�以�中文版维护者求助。如果本翻译更新��时或者翻
-译存在问题，请�系中文版维护者。
+译者::
 
-英文版维护者： Greg Kroah-Hartman <greg@kroah.com>
-中文版维护者： �阳  Li Yang <leoli@freescale.com>
-中文版翻译者： �阳  Li Yang <leoli@freescale.com>
-中文版校译者： 钟宇  TripleX Chung <xxx.phy@gmail.com>
-               陈�  Maggie Chen <chenqi@beyondsoft.com>
-               王�  Wang Cong <xiyou.wangcong@gmail.com>
-
-以下为正文
----------------------------------------------------------------------
+    英文版维护者： Greg Kroah-Hartman <greg@kroah.com>
+    中文版维护者： �阳  Li Yang <leoyang.li@nxp.com>
+    中文版翻译者： �阳  Li Yang <leoyang.li@nxp.com>
+                   时奎亮 Alex Shi <alex.shi@linux.alibaba.com>
+    中文版校译者:
+                   钟宇  TripleX Chung <xxx.phy@gmail.com>
+                   陈�  Maggie Chen <chenqi@beyondsoft.com>
+                   王�  Wang Cong <xiyou.wangcong@gmail.com>
 
 如何�与Linux内核开�
----------------------
+=====================
 
 这是一篇将如何�与Linux内核开�的相关问题一网打尽的终�秘笈。它将指导你
 �为一�Linux内核开�者，并且学会如何�Linux内核开�社区�作。它尽�能�
@@ -47,6 +37,7 @@ Linux内核大部分是由C语言写æˆ�的，一些体系结构相关的代ç �ç”
 �与内核开�，你必须精通C语言。除�你想为�个架构开�底层代�，�则你并
 �需�了解（任何体系结构的）汇编语言。下�列举的书�虽然�能替代扎实的C
 语言教育和多年的开��验，但如果需�的�，�为�考还是�错的：
+
  - "The C Programming Language" by Kernighan and Ritchie [Prentice Hall]
    《C程�设计语言（第2版·新版）》（��文 �志 译）[机械工业出版社]
  - "Practical C Programming" by Steve Oualline [O'Reilly]
@@ -71,9 +62,11 @@ Linux内核使用GNU C和GNU工具链开�。虽然它�循ISO C89标准，但
 --------
 
 Linux内核�代�都是在GPL（通用公共许��）的�护下�布的。�了解这�许�
-的细节请查看�代�主目录下的COPYING文件。如果你对它还有更深入问题请�系
-律师，而��在Linux内核邮件组上�问。因为邮件组里的人并�是律师，��期
-望他们的�有法律效力。
+的细节请查看�代�主目录下的COPYING文件。Linux内核许�准则和如何使用
+`SPDX <https://spdx.org/>` 标志符说明在这个文件中
+:ref:`Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/license-rules.rst <cn_kernel_licensing>`
+如果你对它还有更深入问题请�系律师，而��在Linux内核邮件组上�问。因为
+邮件组里的人并�是律师，��期望他们的�有法律效力。
 
 对于GPL的常�问题和解答，请访问以下链接：
 	http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl-faq.html
@@ -89,65 +82,75 @@ Linux内核代�中包�有大�的文档。这些文档对于学习如何与
 的维护者解释这些�化。
 
 以下是内核代�中需�阅读的文档：
-  README
+  :ref:`Documentation/admin-guide/README.rst <readme>`
     文件简�介�了Linux内核的背景，并且�述了如何�置和编译内核。内核的
     新用户应该从这里开始。
 
-  Documentation/process/changes.rst
+
+  :ref:`Documentation/process/changes.rst <changes>`
     文件给出了用�编译和使用内核所需�的最�软件包列表。
 
-  Documentation/process/coding-style.rst
+  :ref:`Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/coding-style.rst <cn_codingstyle>`
     �述Linux内核的代�风格和�由。所有新代�需��守这篇文档中定义的规
     范。大多数维护者�会接收符�规定的补�，很多人也�会帮忙检查符�风格
     的代�。
 
-  Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst
-  Documentation/process/submitting-drivers.rst
+  :ref:`Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/submitting-patches.rst <cn_submittingpatches>`
+  :ref:`Documentation/process/submitting-drivers.rst <submittingdrivers>`
+
     这两份文档明确�述如何创建和��补�，其中包括（但�仅�于)：
        - 邮件内容
        - 邮件格�
        - 选择收件人
+
     �守这些规定并�能���交�功（因为所有补�需�通过严格的内容和风格
     审查），但是忽视他们几乎就�味�失败。
 
     其他关于如何正确地生�补�的优秀文档包括：
     "The Perfect Patch"
+
         http://www.ozlabs.org/~akpm/stuff/tpp.txt
+
     "Linux kernel patch submission format"
+
         http://linux.yyz.us/patch-format.html
 
-  Documentation/process/stable-api-nonsense.rst
+  :ref:`Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/stable-api-nonsense.rst <cn_stable_api_nonsense>`
     论�内核为什么特��包括稳定的内核内部API，也就是说�包括�这样的特
     性：
+
        - �系统中间层（为了兼容性？）
        - 在���作系统间易于移�的驱动程�
        - �缓（甚至阻止）内核代�的快速�化
+
     这篇文档对于�解Linux的开�哲学至关��。对于将开�平�从其他�作系
     统转移到Linux的人�说也很��。
 
-  Documentation/admin-guide/security-bugs.rst
+  :ref:`Documentation/admin-guide/security-bugs.rst <securitybugs>`
     如果你认为自己�现了Linux内核的安全性问题，请根�这篇文档中的步骤�
     �醒其他内核开�者并帮助解决这个问题。
 
-  Documentation/process/management-style.rst
+  :ref:`Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/management-style.rst <cn_managementstyle>`
+
     �述内核维护者的工作方法�其共有特点。这对于刚刚接触内核开�（或者对
     它感到好奇）的人�说很��，因为它解释了很多对于内核维护者独特行为的
     普�误解与迷惑。
 
-  Documentation/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst
+  :ref:`Documentation/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst <stable_kernel_rules>`
     解释了稳定版内核�布的规则，以�如何将改动放入这些版本的步骤。
 
-  Documentation/process/kernel-docs.rst
+  :ref:`Documentation/process/kernel-docs.rst <kernel_docs>`
     有助于内核开�的外部文档列表。如果你在内核自带的文档中没有找到你想找
     的内容，�以查看这些文档。
 
-  Documentation/process/applying-patches.rst
+  :ref:`Documentation/process/applying-patches.rst <applying_patches>`
     关于补�是什么以�如何将它打在��内核开�分支上的好介�
 
 内核还拥有大�从代�自动生�的文档。它包�内核内部API的全�介�以�如何
 妥善处�加�的规则。生�的文档会放在 Documentation/DocBook/目录下。在内
 核��的主目录中使用以下��命令将会分别生�PDF�Postscript�HTML和手册
-页等��格�的文档：
+页等��格�的文档::
+
     make pdfdocs
     make htmldocs
 
@@ -155,7 +158,9 @@ Linux内核代�中包�有大�的文档。这些文档对于学习如何与
 如何�为内核开�者
 ------------------
 如果你对Linux内核开�一无所知，你应该访问“Linux内核新手�计划：
+
 	http://kernelnewbies.org
+
 它拥有一个�以问��最基本的内核开�问题的邮件列表（在�问之�一定�记得
 查找已往的邮件，确认是�有人已�回答过相�的问题）。它还拥有一个�以获得
 实时�馈的IRC�天频�，以�大�对于学习Linux内核开�相当有帮助的文档。
@@ -166,23 +171,21 @@ Linux内核代�中包�有大�的文档。这些文档对于学习如何与
 
 如果你想加入内核开�社区并�助完�一些任务，�找�到从哪里开始，�以访问
 “Linux内核房管员�计划：
+
 	http://kernelnewbies.org/KernelJanitors
+
 这是�佳的起点。它�供一个相对简�的任务列表，列出内核代�中需�被�新
 整�或者改正的地方。通过和负责这个计划的开�者们一�工作，你会学到将补�
 集�进内核的基本原�。如果还没有决定下一步��什么的�，你还�能会得到方
 �性的指点。
 
-如果你已�有一些现�的代�想�放到内核中，但是需�一些帮助�使它们拥有正
-确的格�。请访问“内核导师�计划。这个计划就是用�帮助你完�这个目标的。它
-是一个邮件列表，地�如下：
-	http://selenic.com/mailman/listinfo/kernel-mentors
-
 在真正动手修改内核代�之�，�解�修改的代�如何�作是必需的。�达到这个
 目的，没什么办法比直接读代�更有效了（大多数花招都会有相应的注释），而且
 一些特制的工具还�以�供帮助。例如，“Linux代�交�引用�项目就是一个值得
 特别推�的帮助工具，它将�代�显示在有编目和索引的网页上。其中一个更新�
 时的内核��库，�以通过以下地�访问：
-	http://sosdg.org/~coywolf/lxr/
+
+        https://elixir.bootlin.com/
 
 
 开��程
@@ -190,23 +193,23 @@ Linux内核代�中包�有大�的文档。这些文档对于学习如何与
 
 目�Linux内核开��程包括几个“主内核分支�和很多�系统相关的内核分支。这
 些分支包括：
-  - 2.6.x主内核��树
-  - 2.6.x.y -stable内核��树
-  - 2.6.x -git内核补�集
-  - 2.6.x -mm内核补�集
-  - �系统相关的内核��树和补�集
-
-
-2.6.x内核主��树
------------------
-2.6.x内核是由Linus Torvalds（Linux的创造者）亲自维护的。你�以在
-kernel.org网站的pub/linux/kernel/v2.6/目录下找到它。它的开��循以下步
-骤：
+
+  - Linus 的内核��树
+  - 多个主�版本的稳定版内核树
+  - �系统相关的内核树
+  - linux-next 集�测试树
+
+
+主线树
+------
+主线树是由Linus Torvalds 维护的。你�以在https://kernel.org 网站或者代�
+库中下找到它。它的开��循以下步骤：
+
   - �当一个新版本的内核被�布，为期两周的集�窗�将被打开。在这段时间里
     维护者�以�Linus�交大段的修改，通常这些修改已�被放到-mm内核中几个
     星期了。�交大�修改的首选方�是使用git工具（内核的代�版本管�工具
-    ，更多的信��以在http://git-scm.com/获�），�过使用普通补�也是�以
-    的。
+    ，更多的信��以在 http://git-scm.com/ 获�），�过使用普通补�也是
+    �以的。
   - 两个星期以�-rc1版本内核�布。之��有�包��能影�整个内核稳定性的
     新功能的补���能被接�。请注�一个全新的驱动程�（或者文件系统）有
     �能在-rc1�被接�是因为这样的修改完全独立，�会影�其他的代�，所以
@@ -221,114 +224,61 @@ kernel.org网站的pub/linux/kernel/v2.6/目录下找到它。它的开��循
 	“没有人知�新内核何时会被�布，因为�布是根�已知bug的情况�决定
 	的，而�是根�一个事先制定好的时间表。�
 
+�系统特定树
+------------
 
-2.6.x.y -stable（稳定版）内核��树
------------------------------------
-由4个数字组�的内核版本�说明此内核是-stable版本。它们包�基于2.6.x版本
-内核的相对较�且至关��的修补，这些修补针对安全性问题或者严�的内核退步。
-
-这�版本的内核适用于那些期望获得最新的稳定版内核并且�想�与测试开�版或
-者实验版的用户。
+��内核�系统的维护者——以�许多内核�系统开�人员——在�代�库中公开了他们
+当�的开�状�。这样，其他人就�以看到内核的��区域�生了什么。在开�速度
+很快的领域，�能会�求开�人员将�交的内容建立在这样的�系统内核树上，这样
+就��了�交与其他已�进行的工作之间的冲�。
 
-如果没有2.6.x.y版本内核存在，那么最新的2.6.x版本内核就相当于是当�的稳定
-版内核。
+这些存储库中的大多数都是Git树，但是也有其他的scm在使用，或者补�队列被�布
+为Quilt系列。这些�系统存储库的地�列在MAINTAINERS文件中。其中许多�以在
+https://git.kernel.org/上�览。
 
-2.6.x.y版本由“稳定版��组（邮件地�<stable@vger.kernel.org>）维护，一般隔周�
-布新版本。
-
-内核��中的Documentation/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst文件具体�述了�被稳定
-版内核接�的修改类型以��布的�程。
-
-
-2.6.x -git补�集
-----------------
-Linus的内核��树的�日快照，这个��树是由git工具管�的（由此得�）。这
-些补�通常�天更新以�映Linus的��树的最新状�。它们比-rc版本的内核��
-树更具试验性质，因为这个补�集是全自动生�的，没有任何人�确认其是�真正
-�全。
+在将一个建议的补��交到这样的�系统树之�，需�对它进行审查，审查主��生
+在邮件列表上（请��下�相应的部分）。对于几个内核�系统，这个审查过程是通
+过工具补�跟踪的。Patchwork�供了一个Web界�，显示补��布�对补�的任何评
+论或修订，维护人员�以将补�标记为正在审查�接�或拒�。大多数补�网站都列
+在 https://patchwork.kernel.org/
 
+Linux-next 集�测试树
+---------------------
 
-2.6.x -mm补�集
----------------
-这是由Andrew Morton维护的试验性内核补�集。Andrew将所有�系统的内核��
-和补�拼凑到一起，并且加入了大�从linux-kernel邮件列表中采集的补�。这个
-��树是新功能和补�的试炼场。当补�在-mm补�集里�明了其价值以�Andrew
-或者相应�系统的维护者会将补��给Linus以便集�进主内核��树。
-
-在将所有新补��给Linus以集�到主内核��树之�，我们�常鼓励先把这些补
-�放在-mm版内核��树中进行测试。
-
-这些内核版本�适�在需�稳定�行的系统上�行，因为�行它们比�行任何其他
-内核分支都更具有风险。
-
-如果你想为内核开�进程�供帮助，请�试并使用这些内核版本，并在
-linux-kernel邮件列表中�供�馈，告诉大家你�到了问题还是一切正常。
-
-通常-mm版补�集�光包括这些�外的试验性补�，还包括�布时-git版主��树
-中的改动。
-
--mm版内核没有固定的�布周期，但是通常在�两个-rc版内核�布之间都会有若干
-个-mm版内核�布（一般是1至3个）。
-
-
-�系统相关内核��树和补�集
-----------------------------
-相当一部分内核�系统开�者会公开他们自己的开���树，以便其他人能了解内
-核的��领域正在�生的事情。如上所述，这些��树会被集�到-mm版本内核中。
-
-下�是目��用的一些内核��树的列表：
-  通过git管�的��树：
-    - Kbuild开���树， Sam Ravnborg <sam@ravnborg.org>
-	git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/sam/kbuild.git
-
-    - ACPI开���树, Len Brown <len.brown@intel.com>
-	git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/lenb/linux-acpi-2.6.git
-
-    - �设备开���树, Jens Axboe <axboe@suse.de>
-	git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/axboe/linux-2.6-block.git
-
-    - DRM开���树, Dave Airlie <airlied@linux.ie>
-	git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/airlied/drm-2.6.git
-
-    - ia64开���树, Tony Luck <tony.luck@intel.com>
-	git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/aegl/linux-2.6.git
-
-    - ieee1394开���树, Jody McIntyre <scjody@modernduck.com>
-	git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/scjody/ieee1394.git
+在将�系统树的更新�并到主线树之�，需�对它们进行集�测试。为此，存在一个
+特殊的测试存储库，其中几乎�天都会��所有�系统树：
 
-    - infiniband开���树, Roland Dreier <rolandd@cisco.com>
-	git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/roland/infiniband.git
+        https://git.kernel.org/？p=linux/kernel/git/next/linux-next.git
 
-    - libata开���树, Jeff Garzik <jgarzik@pobox.com>
-	git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/jgarzik/libata-dev.git
+通过这�方�，Linux-next 对下一个�并阶段将进入主线内核的内容给出了一个概�
+展望。�常欢冒险的测试者�行测试Linux-next。
 
-    - 网络驱动程�开���树, Jeff Garzik <jgarzik@pobox.com>
-	git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/jgarzik/netdev-2.6.git
+多个主�版本的稳定版内核树
+-----------------------------------
+由3个数字组�的内核版本�说明此内核是-stable版本。它们包�内核的相对较�且
+至关��的修补，这些修补针对安全性问题或者严�的内核退步。
 
-    - pcmcia开���树, Dominik Brodowski <linux@dominikbrodowski.net>
-	git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/brodo/pcmcia-2.6.git
+这�版本的内核适用于那些期望获得最新的稳定版内核并且�想�与测试开�版或
+者实验版的用户。
 
-    - SCSI开���树, James Bottomley <James.Bottomley@SteelEye.com>
-	git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/jejb/scsi-misc-2.6.git
+稳定版内核树版本由“稳定版��组（邮件地�<stable@vger.kernel.org>）维护，一般
+隔周�布新版本。
 
-  使用quilt管�的补�集：
-    - USB, PCI, 驱动程�核心和I2C, Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org>
-	kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/gregkh/gregkh-2.6/
-    - x86-64, 部分i386, Andi Kleen <ak@suse.de>
-	ftp.firstfloor.org:/pub/ak/x86_64/quilt/
+内核��中的 :ref:`Documentation/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst <stable_kernel_rules>`
+文件具体�述了�被稳定版内核接�的修改类型以��布的�程。
 
-  其他内核��树�以在http://git.kernel.org的列表中和MAINTAINERS文件里
-  找到。
 
 报告bug
 -------
 
 bugzilla.kernel.org是Linux内核开�者们用�跟踪内核Bug的网站。我们鼓励用
 户在这个工具中报告找到的所有bug。如何使用内核bugzilla的细节请访问：
+
 	http://test.kernel.org/bugzilla/faq.html
 
-内核��主目录中的admin-guide/reporting-bugs.rst文件里有一个很好的模�。它指导用户如何报
-告�能的内核bug以�需��供哪些信��帮助内核开�者们找到问题的根�。
+内核��主目录中的:ref:`admin-guide/reporting-bugs.rst <reportingbugs>`
+文件里有一个很好的模�。它指导用户如何报告�能的内核bug以�需��供哪些信�
+�帮助内核开�者们找到问题的根�。
 
 
 利用bug报告
@@ -339,12 +289,7 @@ bugzilla.kernel.org是Linux内核开å�‘者们用æ�¥è·Ÿè¸ªå†…æ ¸Bug的网站。æˆ
 者感�到你的存在。修改bug是赢得其他开�者赞誉的最好办法，因为并�是很多
 人都喜欢浪费时间去修改别人报告的bug。
 
-��试修改已知的bug，请访问http://bugzilla.kernel.org网�。如果你想获得
-最新bug的通知，�以订阅bugme-new邮件列表（�有新的bug报告会被寄到这里）
-或者订阅bugme-janitor邮件列表（所有bugzilla的�动都会被寄到这里）。
-
-	https://lists.linux-foundation.org/mailman/listinfo/bugme-new
-	https://lists.linux-foundation.org/mailman/listinfo/bugme-janitors
+��试修改已知的bug，请访问 http://bugzilla.kernel.org 网�。
 
 
 邮件列表
@@ -352,10 +297,14 @@ bugzilla.kernel.org是Linux内核开å�‘者们用æ�¥è·Ÿè¸ªå†…æ ¸Bug的网站。æˆ
 
 正如上�的文档所�述，大多数的骨干内核开�者都加入了Linux Kernel邮件列
 表。如何订阅和退订列表的细节�以在这里找到：
+
 	http://vger.kernel.org/vger-lists.html#linux-kernel
+
 网上很多地方都有这个邮件列表的存档(archive)。�以使用�索引擎�找到这些
 存档。比如：
+
 	http://dir.gmane.org/gmane.linux.kernel
+
 在�信之�，我们强烈建议你先在存档中�索你想�讨论的问题。很多已�被详细
 讨论过的问题�在邮件列表的存档中�以找到。
 
@@ -363,10 +312,12 @@ bugzilla.kernel.org是Linux内核开å�‘者们用æ�¥è·Ÿè¸ªå†…æ ¸Bug的网站。æˆ
 MAINTAINERS文件中�以找到���题对应的邮件列表。
 
 很多邮件列表架设在kernel.org�务器上。这些列表的信��以在这里找到：
+
 	http://vger.kernel.org/vger-lists.html
 
 在使用这些邮件列表时，请记���良好的行为习惯。下�的链接�供了与这些列
 表（或任何其它邮件列表）交�的一些简�规则，虽然内容有点滥竽充数。
+
 	http://www.albion.com/netiquette/
 
 当有很多人回�你的邮件时，邮件的抄�列表会�得很长。请��将任何人从抄�
@@ -378,11 +329,12 @@ MAINTAINERS文件中�以找到���题对应的邮件列表。
 这几行。将你的评论加在被引用的段�之间而��放在邮件的顶部。
 
 如果你在邮件中附带补�，请确认它们是�以直接阅读的纯文本（如
-Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst文档中所述）。内核开�者们�希望�到附件
-或者被压缩了的补�。�有这样�能��他们�以直接评论你的�行代�。请确�
-你使用的邮件��程��会修改空格和制表符。一个防范性的测试方法是先将邮件
-��给自己，然�自己�试是��以顺利地打上收到的补�。如果测试��功，请
-调整或者更�你的邮件��程�直到它正确工作为止。
+:ref:`Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/submitting-patches.rst <cn_submittingpatches>`
+文档中所述）。内核开�者们�希望�到附件或者被压缩了的补�。�有这样�能
+��他们�以直接评论你的�行代�。请确�你使用的邮件��程��会修改空格
+和制表符。一个防范性的测试方法是先将邮件��给自己，然�自己�试是��以
+顺利地打上收到的补�。如果测试��功，请调整或者更�你的邮件��程�直到
+它正确工作为止。
 
 总而言之，请尊�其他的邮件列表订阅者。
 
@@ -392,6 +344,7 @@ Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst文档中所述）。内核开�者
 
 内核社区的目标就是�供尽善尽美的内核。所以当你�交补�期望被接�进内核的
 时候，它的技术价值以�其他方�都将被评审。那么你�能会得到什么呢？
+
   - 批评
   - 评论
   - �求修改
@@ -404,6 +357,7 @@ Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst文档中所述）。内核开�者
 没在茫茫信海中。
 
 你�应该�的事情：
+
   - 期望自己的补���任何质疑就直接被接�
   - 翻脸
   - 忽略别人的评论
@@ -423,7 +377,8 @@ Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst文档中所述）。内核开�者
 
 内核社区的工作模��大多数传统公�开�队�的工作模�并�相�。下�这些例
 �，�以帮助你���些�能�生问题：
-  用这些�介�你的修改�案会有好处：
+用这些�介�你的修改�案会有好处：
+
     - 它�时解决了多个问题
     - 它删除了2000行代�
     - 这是补�，它已�解释了我想�说明的
@@ -431,7 +386,8 @@ Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst文档中所述）。内核开�者
     - 这是一系列�补�用�……
     - 这个修改�高了普通机器的性能……
 
-  应该��如下的说法：
+应该��如下的说法：
+
     - 我们在AIX/ptx/Solaris就是这么�的，所以这么�肯定是好的……
     - 我�这行已�20年了，所以……
     - 为了我们公�赚钱考虑必须这么�
@@ -504,6 +460,7 @@ Linux内核社区并�喜欢一下接收大段的代�。修改需�被�当
 当你��补�的时候，需�特别留�邮件正文的内容。因为这里的信�将会�为补
 �的修改记录(ChangeLog)，会被一直�留以备大家查阅。它需�完全地�述补�，
 包括：
+
   - 为什么需�这个修改
   - 补�的总体设计
   - 实现细节
@@ -519,7 +476,8 @@ Linux内核社区并�喜欢一下接收大段的代�。修改需�被�当
 很多人已��到了，而他们都曾�和现在的你站在�样的起点上。
 
 
----------------
+æ„Ÿè°¢
+----
 感谢Paolo Ciarrocchi�许“开��程�部分基于他所写的文章
 (http://www.kerneltravel.net/newbie/2.6-development_process)，感谢Randy
 Dunlap和Gerrit Huizenga完善了应该说和�该说的列表。感谢Pat Mochel, Hanna
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/index.rst b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..be1e764a80d2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+.. raw:: latex
+
+	\renewcommand\thesection*
+	\renewcommand\thesubsection*
+
+.. include:: ../disclaimer-zh_CN.rst
+
+:Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/index.rst <process_index>`
+:Translator: Alex Shi <alex.shi@linux.alibaba.com>
+
+.. _cn_process_index:
+
+与Linux 内核社区一起工作
+========================
+
+那么你想�为Linux内核开�人员？ 欢迎� �但从技术�义上讲有很多关于内核的知识
+需�学，而且了解我们社区的工作方�也很��。 阅读这些文章�以让您以更轻�地,
+麻烦最少的方�将更改�并到内核。
+
+以下是��开�人员应阅读的基本指�。
+
+.. toctree::
+   :maxdepth: 1
+
+   howto
+   code-of-conduct
+   code-of-conduct-interpretation
+   submitting-patches
+   programming-language
+   coding-style
+   development-process
+   email-clients
+   license-rules
+
+其它大多数开�人员感兴趣的社区指�：
+
+
+.. toctree::
+   :maxdepth: 1
+
+   submitting-drivers
+   submit-checklist
+   stable-api-nonsense
+   stable-kernel-rules
+   management-style
+
+这些是一些总体技术指�，由于缺�更好的地方，现在已�放在这里
+
+.. toctree::
+   :maxdepth: 1
+
+   magic-number
+   volatile-considered-harmful
+
+.. only::  subproject and html
+
+   目录
+   ====
+
+   * :ref:`genindex`
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/license-rules.rst b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/license-rules.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..30c272b2a292
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/license-rules.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,370 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+.. include:: ../disclaimer-zh_CN.rst
+
+:Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/license-rules.rst <kernel_licensing>`
+:Translator: Alex Shi <alex.shi@linux.alibaba.com>
+
+.. _cn_kernel_licensing:
+
+Linux内核许�规则
+=================
+
+Linux内核根�LICENSES/preferred/GPL-2.0中�供的GNU通用公共许��版本2
+（GPL-2.0）的�款�供，并在LICENSES/exceptions/Linux-syscall-note中显�
+�述了例外的系统调用，如COPYING文件中所述。
+
+此文档文件�供了如何对�个�文件进行注释以使其许��清晰明确的说明。
+它�会�代内核的许��。
+
+内核�代�作为一个整体适用于COPYING文件中�述的许��，但是�个�文件�以
+具有��的与GPL-20兼容的许��::
+
+    GPL-1.0+ : GNU通用公共许��v1.0或更高版本
+    GPL-2.0+ : GNU通用公共许��v2.0或更高版本
+    LGPL-2.0 : 仅�GNU库通用公共许��v2
+    LGPL-2.0+: GNU 库通用公共许��v2或更高版本
+    LGPL-2.1 : 仅�GNU宽通用公共许��v2.1
+    LGPL-2.1+: GNU宽通用公共许��v2.1或更高版本
+
+除此之外，个人文件�以在��许�下�供，例如一个兼容的GPL�体，或者BSD，
+MIT等许�。
+
+用户空间API（UAPI）头文件�述了用户空间程�与内核的接�，这是一�特殊情况。
+根�内核COPYING文件中的注释，syscall接�是一个明确的边界，它�会将GPL�求
+扩展到任何使用它与内核通信的软件。由于UAPI头文件必须包�在创建在Linux内核
+上�行的�执行文件的任何�文件中，因此此例外必须记录在特别的许��表述中。
+
+表达�文件许��的常用方法是将匹�的样�文本添加到文件的顶部注释中。由于
+格�，拼写错误等，这些“样��很难通过那些在上下文中使用的验�许���规性
+的工具。
+
+样�文本的替代方法是在�个�文件中使用软件包数�交�（SPDX）许��标识符。
+SPDX许��标识符是机器�解�的，并且是用于�供文件内容的许��的精确缩写。
+SPDX许��标识符由Linux 基金会的SPDX 工作组管�，并得到了整个行业，工具
+供应商和法律团队的�作伙伴的一致��。有关详细信�，请�阅
+https://spdx.org/
+
+Linux内核需�所有�文件中的精确SPDX标识符。内核中使用的有效标识符在
+`许�标识符`_ 一节中进行了解释，并且已�以在
+https://spdx.org/licenses/ 上的官方SPDX许��列表中检索，并附带许��
+文本。
+
+许�标识符语法
+--------------
+
+1.安置:
+
+   内核文件中的SPDX许��标识符应添加到�包�注释的文件中的第一行。对于大多
+   数文件，这是第一行，除了那些在第一行中需�'#!PATH_TO_INTERPRETER'的脚本。
+   对于这些脚本，SPDX标识符进入第二行。
+
+|
+
+2. 风格:
+
+   SPDX许��标识符以注释的形�添加。注释样��决于文件类型::
+
+      C source:	// SPDX-License-Identifier: <SPDX License Expression>
+      C header:	/* SPDX-License-Identifier: <SPDX License Expression> */
+      ASM:	/* SPDX-License-Identifier: <SPDX License Expression> */
+      scripts:	# SPDX-License-Identifier: <SPDX License Expression>
+      .rst:	.. SPDX-License-Identifier: <SPDX License Expression>
+      .dts{i}:	// SPDX-License-Identifier: <SPDX License Expression>
+
+   如果特定工具无法处�标准注释样�，则应使用工具接�的相应注释机制。这是在
+   C 头文件中使用“/\*\*/�样�注释的原因。过去在使用生�的.lds文件中观察到
+   构建被破�，其中'ld'无法解�C++注释。现在已�解决了这个问题，但�然有较
+   旧的汇编程�工具无法处�C++样�的注释。
+
+|
+
+3. �法:
+
+   <SPDX许��表达�>是SPDX许��列表中的SPDX短格�许��标识符，或者在许�
+   �例外适用时由“WITH�分隔的两个SPDX短格�许��标识符的组�。当应用多个许
+   ��时，表达�由分隔�表达�的关键字“AND�，“OR�组�，并由“（�，“）�包围。
+
+   带有“或更高�选项的[L]GPL等许��的许��标识符通过使用“+��表示“或更高�
+   选项�构建。::
+
+      // SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+      // SPDX-License-Identifier: LGPL-2.1+
+
+   当需�修正的许��时，应使用WITH。 例如，linux内核UAPI文件使用表达�::
+
+      // SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 WITH Linux-syscall-note
+      // SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ WITH Linux-syscall-note
+
+   其它在内核中使用WITH例外的事例如下::
+
+      // SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 WITH mif-exception
+      // SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ WITH GCC-exception-2.0
+
+   例外�能与特定的许��标识符一起使用。有效的许��标识符列在异常文本文件
+   的标记中。有关详细信�，请�阅 `许�标识符`_ 一章中的 `例外`_ 。
+
+   如果文件是��许�且�选择一个许��，则应使用OR。例如，一些dtsi文件在�
+   许�下�用::
+
+      // SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 OR BSD-3-Clause
+
+   内核中�许�文件中许�表达�的示例::
+
+      // SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 OR MIT
+      // SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 OR BSD-2-Clause
+      // SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 OR Apache-2.0
+      // SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 OR MPL-1.1
+      // SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0 WITH Linux-syscall-note) OR MIT
+      // SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-1.0+ OR BSD-3-Clause OR OpenSSL
+
+   如果文件具有多个许��，其�款全部适用于使用该文件，则应使用AND。例如，
+   如果代�是从�一个项目继承的，并且已�授予了将其放入内核的��，但原始
+   许��款需���有效::
+
+      // SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0 WITH Linux-syscall-note) AND MIT
+
+   �一个需��守两套许��款的例�是::
+
+      // SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-1.0+ AND LGPL-2.1+
+
+许�标识符
+----------
+
+当�使用的许��以�添加到内核的代�许���以分解为：
+
+1. _`优先许�`:
+
+   应尽�能使用这些许��，因为它们已知完全兼容并广泛使用。这些许��在内核
+   目录::
+
+      LICENSES/preferred/
+
+   此目录中的文件包�完整的许��文本和 `元标记`_ 。文件�与SPDX许��标识
+   符相�，�者应用于�文件中的许��。
+
+   例如::
+
+      LICENSES/preferred/GPL-2.0
+
+   包�GPLv2许��文本和所需的元标签::
+
+      LICENSES/preferred/MIT
+
+   包�MIT许��文本和所需的元标记
+
+   _`元标记`:
+
+   许��文件中必须包�以下元标记：
+
+   - Valid-License-Identifier:
+
+     一行或多行, 声明那些许�标识符在项目内有效, 以引用此特定许�的文本。通
+     常这是一个有效的标识符，但是例如对于带有'或更高'选项的许��，两个标识
+     符都有效。
+
+   - SPDX-URL:
+
+     SPDX页�的URL，其中包�与许��相关的其他信�.
+
+   - Usage-Guidance:
+
+     使用建议的自由格�文本。该文本必须包�SPDX许��标识符的正确示例，因为
+     它们应根� `许�标识符语法`_ 指�放入�文件中。
+
+   - License-Text:
+
+     此标记之�的所有文本都被视为原始许�文本
+
+   文件格�示例::
+
+      Valid-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+      Valid-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+      SPDX-URL: https://spdx.org/licenses/GPL-2.0.html
+      Usage-Guide:
+        To use this license in source code, put one of the following SPDX
+	tag/value pairs into a comment according to the placement
+	guidelines in the licensing rules documentation.
+	For 'GNU General Public License (GPL) version 2 only' use:
+	  SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+	For 'GNU General Public License (GPL) version 2 or any later version' use:
+	  SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+      License-Text:
+        Full license text
+
+   ::
+
+      SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
+      SPDX-URL: https://spdx.org/licenses/MIT.html
+      Usage-Guide:
+	To use this license in source code, put the following SPDX
+	tag/value pair into a comment according to the placement
+	guidelines in the licensing rules documentation.
+	  SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
+      License-Text:
+        Full license text
+
+|
+
+2. �推�的许��:
+
+   这些许���应用于现有代�或从其他项目导入代�。这些许��在内核目录::
+
+      LICENSES/other/
+
+   此目录中的文件包�完整的许��文本和 `元标记`_ 。文件�与SPDX许��标识
+   符相�，�者应用于�文件中的许��。
+
+   例如::
+
+      LICENSES/other/ISC
+
+   包�国际系统��许�文本和所需的元标签::
+
+      LICENSES/other/ZLib
+
+   包�ZLIB许�文本和所需的元标签.
+
+   元标签:
+
+   “其他�许��的元标签�求与 `优先许�`_ 的�求相�。
+
+   文件格�示例::
+
+      Valid-License-Identifier: ISC
+      SPDX-URL: https://spdx.org/licenses/ISC.html
+      Usage-Guide:
+        Usage of this license in the kernel for new code is discouraged
+	and it should solely be used for importing code from an already
+	existing project.
+        To use this license in source code, put the following SPDX
+	tag/value pair into a comment according to the placement
+	guidelines in the licensing rules documentation.
+	  SPDX-License-Identifier: ISC
+      License-Text:
+        Full license text
+
+|
+
+3. _`例外`:
+
+   �些许���以修改，并�许原始许���具有的�些例外�利。这些例外在
+   内核目录::
+
+      LICENSES/exceptions/
+
+   此目录中的文件包�完整的例外文本和所需的 `例外元标记`_ 。
+
+   例如::
+
+      LICENSES/exceptions/Linux-syscall-note
+
+   包�Linux内核的COPYING文件中记录的Linux系统调用例外，该文件用于UAPI
+   头文件。例如::
+
+      LICENSES/exceptions/GCC-exception-2.0
+
+   包�GCC'链接例外'，它�许独立于其许��的任何二进制文件与标记有此例外的
+   文件的编译版本链接。这是从GPL�兼容�代�创建��行的�执行文件所必需的。
+
+   _`例外元标记`:
+
+   以下元标记必须在例外文件中�用：
+
+   - SPDX-Exception-Identifier:
+
+     一个�与SPDX许��标识符一起使用的例外标识符。
+
+   - SPDX-URL:
+
+     SPDX页�的URL，其中包�与例外相关的其他信�。
+
+   - SPDX-Licenses:
+
+     以逗�分隔的例外�用的SPDX许��标识符列表。
+
+   - Usage-Guidance:
+
+     使用建议的自由格�文本。必须在文本��加上SPDX许��标识符的正确示例，
+     因为它们应根� `许�标识符语法`_ 指�放入�文件中。
+
+   - Exception-Text:
+
+     此标记之�的所有文本都被视为原始异常文本
+
+   文件格�示例::
+
+      SPDX-Exception-Identifier: Linux-syscall-note
+      SPDX-URL: https://spdx.org/licenses/Linux-syscall-note.html
+      SPDX-Licenses: GPL-2.0, GPL-2.0+, GPL-1.0+, LGPL-2.0, LGPL-2.0+, LGPL-2.1, LGPL-2.1+
+      Usage-Guidance:
+        This exception is used together with one of the above SPDX-Licenses
+	to mark user-space API (uapi) header files so they can be included
+	into non GPL compliant user-space application code.
+        To use this exception add it with the keyword WITH to one of the
+	identifiers in the SPDX-Licenses tag:
+	  SPDX-License-Identifier: <SPDX-License> WITH Linux-syscall-note
+      Exception-Text:
+        Full exception text
+
+   ::
+
+      SPDX-Exception-Identifier: GCC-exception-2.0
+      SPDX-URL: https://spdx.org/licenses/GCC-exception-2.0.html
+      SPDX-Licenses: GPL-2.0, GPL-2.0+
+      Usage-Guidance:
+        The "GCC Runtime Library exception 2.0" is used together with one
+	of the above SPDX-Licenses for code imported from the GCC runtime
+	library.
+        To use this exception add it with the keyword WITH to one of the
+	identifiers in the SPDX-Licenses tag:
+	  SPDX-License-Identifier: <SPDX-License> WITH GCC-exception-2.0
+      Exception-Text:
+        Full exception text
+
+
+所有SPDX许��标识符和例外都必须在LICENSES�目录中具有相应的文件。这是�许
+工具验�（例如checkpatch.pl）以�准备好从�读�和��许��所必需的, 这是
+��FOSS组织推�的，例如 `FSFE REUSE initiative <https://reuse.software/>`_.
+
+_`模�许�`
+-----------------
+
+   �加载内核模�还需�MODULE_LICENSE（）标记。此标记既�替代正确的�代�
+   许��信�（SPDX-License-Identifier），也�以任何方�表示或确定�供模�
+   �代�的确切许��。
+
+   此标记的唯一目的是�供足够的信�，该模�是�是自由软件或者是内核模�加
+   载器和用户空间工具的专有模�。
+
+   MODULE_LICENSE（）的有效许��字符串是:
+
+    ============================= =============================================
+    "GPL"			  模�是根�GPL版本2许�的。这并�表示仅�于
+                                  GPL-2.0或GPL-2.0或更高版本之间的任何区别。
+                                  最正确许��信��能通过相应�文件中的许��
+                                  信��确定
+
+    "GPL v2"			  和"GPL"相�，它的存在是因为历�原因。
+
+    "GPL and additional rights"   表示模��在GPL v2�体和MIT许�下��许�的
+                                  历��体。请��在新代�中使用。
+
+    "Dual MIT/GPL"		  表达该模�在GPL v2�体或MIT许��选择下��
+                                  许�的正确方�。
+
+    "Dual BSD/GPL"		  该模�根�GPL v2�体或BSD许��选择进行��
+                                  许�。 BSD许��的确切�体�能通过相应�文件
+                                  中的许��信��确定。
+
+    "Dual MPL/GPL"		  该模�根�GPL v2�体或Mozilla Public License
+                                  （MPL）选项进行��许�。 MPL许��的确切�体
+                                  �能通过相应的�文件中的许��信��确定。
+
+    "Proprietary"		  该模�属于专有许�。此字符串仅用于专有的第三
+                                  方模�，�能用于在内核树中具有�代�的模�。
+                                  以这�方�标记的模�在加载时会使用'P'标记污
+                                  染内核，并且内核模�加载器拒�将这些模�链接
+                                  到使用EXPORT_SYMBOL_GPL（）导出的符�。
+    ============================= =============================================
+
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/magic-number.rst b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/magic-number.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..15c592518194
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/magic-number.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,151 @@
+.. _cn_magicnumbers:
+
+.. include:: ../disclaimer-zh_CN.rst
+
+:Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/magic-number.rst <magicnumbers>`
+
+如果想评论或更新本文的内容，请直接�信到LKML。如果你使用英文交�有困难的�，也�
+以�中文版维护者求助。如果本翻译更新��时或者翻译存在问题，请�系中文版维护者::
+
+        中文版维护者： 贾�� Jia Wei Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com>
+        中文版翻译者： 贾�� Jia Wei Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com>
+        中文版校译者： 贾�� Jia Wei Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com>
+
+Linux 魔术数
+============
+
+这个文件是有关当�使用的魔术值注册表。当你给一个结构添加了一个魔术值，你也应该把这个魔术值添加到这个文件，因为我们最好把用于��结构的魔术值统一起�。
+
+使用魔术值��护内核数�结构是一个�常好的主�。这就�许你在�行期检查(a)一个结构是�已�被攻击，或者(b)你已�给一个例行程�通过了一个错误的结构。�一�情况特别地有用---特别是当你通过一个空指针指�结构体的时候。tty��，例如，�常通过特定驱动使用这�方法并且��地排列特定方�的结构。
+
+使用魔术值的方法是在结构的开始处声明的，如下::
+
+        struct tty_ldisc {
+	        int	magic;
+        	...
+        };
+
+当你以�给内核添加增强功能的时候，请�守这�规则�这样就会节�数�清的调试时间，特别是一些�怪的情况，例如，数组超出范围并且�新写了超出部分。�守这个规则，‪这些情况�以被快速地，安全地��。
+
+		Theodore Ts'o
+		  31 Mar 94
+
+给当�的Linux 2.1.55添加魔术表。
+
+		Michael Chastain
+		<mailto:mec@shout.net>
+		22 Sep 1997
+
+现在应该最新的Linux 2.1.112.因为在特性冻结期间，�能在2.2.x�改�任何东西。这些�目被数域所排�。
+
+		Krzysztof G.Baranowski
+	        <mailto: kgb@knm.org.pl>
+		29 Jul 1998
+
+更新魔术表到Linux 2.5.45。刚好越过特性冻结，但是有�能还会有一些新的魔术值在2.6.x之��入到内核中。
+
+		Petr Baudis
+		<pasky@ucw.cz>
+		03 Nov 2002
+
+更新魔术表到Linux 2.5.74。
+
+		Fabian Frederick
+                <ffrederick@users.sourceforge.net>
+		09 Jul 2003
+
+===================== ================ ======================== ==========================================
+魔术数�              数字             结构                     文件
+===================== ================ ======================== ==========================================
+PG_MAGIC              'P'              pg_{read,write}_hdr      ``include/linux/pg.h``
+CMAGIC                0x0111           user                     ``include/linux/a.out.h``
+MKISS_DRIVER_MAGIC    0x04bf           mkiss_channel            ``drivers/net/mkiss.h``
+HDLC_MAGIC            0x239e           n_hdlc                   ``drivers/char/n_hdlc.c``
+APM_BIOS_MAGIC        0x4101           apm_user                 ``arch/x86/kernel/apm_32.c``
+CYCLADES_MAGIC        0x4359           cyclades_port            ``include/linux/cyclades.h``
+DB_MAGIC              0x4442           fc_info                  ``drivers/net/iph5526_novram.c``
+DL_MAGIC              0x444d           fc_info                  ``drivers/net/iph5526_novram.c``
+FASYNC_MAGIC          0x4601           fasync_struct            ``include/linux/fs.h``
+FF_MAGIC              0x4646           fc_info                  ``drivers/net/iph5526_novram.c``
+ISICOM_MAGIC          0x4d54           isi_port                 ``include/linux/isicom.h``
+PTY_MAGIC             0x5001                                    ``drivers/char/pty.c``
+PPP_MAGIC             0x5002           ppp                      ``include/linux/if_pppvar.h``
+SERIAL_MAGIC          0x5301           async_struct             ``include/linux/serial.h``
+SSTATE_MAGIC          0x5302           serial_state             ``include/linux/serial.h``
+SLIP_MAGIC            0x5302           slip                     ``drivers/net/slip.h``
+STRIP_MAGIC           0x5303           strip                    ``drivers/net/strip.c``
+X25_ASY_MAGIC         0x5303           x25_asy                  ``drivers/net/x25_asy.h``
+SIXPACK_MAGIC         0x5304           sixpack                  ``drivers/net/hamradio/6pack.h``
+AX25_MAGIC            0x5316           ax_disp                  ``drivers/net/mkiss.h``
+TTY_MAGIC             0x5401           tty_struct               ``include/linux/tty.h``
+MGSL_MAGIC            0x5401           mgsl_info                ``drivers/char/synclink.c``
+TTY_DRIVER_MAGIC      0x5402           tty_driver               ``include/linux/tty_driver.h``
+MGSLPC_MAGIC          0x5402           mgslpc_info              ``drivers/char/pcmcia/synclink_cs.c``
+TTY_LDISC_MAGIC       0x5403           tty_ldisc                ``include/linux/tty_ldisc.h``
+USB_SERIAL_MAGIC      0x6702           usb_serial               ``drivers/usb/serial/usb-serial.h``
+FULL_DUPLEX_MAGIC     0x6969                                    ``drivers/net/ethernet/dec/tulip/de2104x.c``
+USB_BLUETOOTH_MAGIC   0x6d02           usb_bluetooth            ``drivers/usb/class/bluetty.c``
+RFCOMM_TTY_MAGIC      0x6d02                                    ``net/bluetooth/rfcomm/tty.c``
+USB_SERIAL_PORT_MAGIC 0x7301           usb_serial_port          ``drivers/usb/serial/usb-serial.h``
+CG_MAGIC              0x00090255       ufs_cylinder_group       ``include/linux/ufs_fs.h``
+RPORT_MAGIC           0x00525001       r_port                   ``drivers/char/rocket_int.h``
+LSEMAGIC              0x05091998       lse                      ``drivers/fc4/fc.c``
+GDTIOCTL_MAGIC        0x06030f07       gdth_iowr_str            ``drivers/scsi/gdth_ioctl.h``
+RIEBL_MAGIC           0x09051990                                ``drivers/net/atarilance.c``
+NBD_REQUEST_MAGIC     0x12560953       nbd_request              ``include/linux/nbd.h``
+RED_MAGIC2            0x170fc2a5       (any)                    ``mm/slab.c``
+BAYCOM_MAGIC          0x19730510       baycom_state             ``drivers/net/baycom_epp.c``
+ISDN_X25IFACE_MAGIC   0x1e75a2b9       isdn_x25iface_proto_data ``drivers/isdn/isdn_x25iface.h``
+ECP_MAGIC             0x21504345       cdkecpsig                ``include/linux/cdk.h``
+LSOMAGIC              0x27091997       lso                      ``drivers/fc4/fc.c``
+LSMAGIC               0x2a3b4d2a       ls                       ``drivers/fc4/fc.c``
+WANPIPE_MAGIC         0x414C4453       sdla_{dump,exec}         ``include/linux/wanpipe.h``
+CS_CARD_MAGIC         0x43525553       cs_card                  ``sound/oss/cs46xx.c``
+LABELCL_MAGIC         0x4857434c       labelcl_info_s           ``include/asm/ia64/sn/labelcl.h``
+ISDN_ASYNC_MAGIC      0x49344C01       modem_info               ``include/linux/isdn.h``
+CTC_ASYNC_MAGIC       0x49344C01       ctc_tty_info             ``drivers/s390/net/ctctty.c``
+ISDN_NET_MAGIC        0x49344C02       isdn_net_local_s         ``drivers/isdn/i4l/isdn_net_lib.h``
+SAVEKMSG_MAGIC2       0x4B4D5347       savekmsg                 ``arch/*/amiga/config.c``
+CS_STATE_MAGIC        0x4c4f4749       cs_state                 ``sound/oss/cs46xx.c``
+SLAB_C_MAGIC          0x4f17a36d       kmem_cache               ``mm/slab.c``
+COW_MAGIC             0x4f4f4f4d       cow_header_v1            ``arch/um/drivers/ubd_user.c``
+I810_CARD_MAGIC       0x5072696E       i810_card                ``sound/oss/i810_audio.c``
+TRIDENT_CARD_MAGIC    0x5072696E       trident_card             ``sound/oss/trident.c``
+ROUTER_MAGIC          0x524d4157       wan_device               [in ``wanrouter.h`` pre 3.9]
+SAVEKMSG_MAGIC1       0x53415645       savekmsg                 ``arch/*/amiga/config.c``
+GDA_MAGIC             0x58464552       gda                      ``arch/mips/include/asm/sn/gda.h``
+RED_MAGIC1            0x5a2cf071       (any)                    ``mm/slab.c``
+EEPROM_MAGIC_VALUE    0x5ab478d2       lanai_dev                ``drivers/atm/lanai.c``
+HDLCDRV_MAGIC         0x5ac6e778       hdlcdrv_state            ``include/linux/hdlcdrv.h``
+PCXX_MAGIC            0x5c6df104       channel                  ``drivers/char/pcxx.h``
+KV_MAGIC              0x5f4b565f       kernel_vars_s            ``arch/mips/include/asm/sn/klkernvars.h``
+I810_STATE_MAGIC      0x63657373       i810_state               ``sound/oss/i810_audio.c``
+TRIDENT_STATE_MAGIC   0x63657373       trient_state             ``sound/oss/trident.c``
+M3_CARD_MAGIC         0x646e6f50       m3_card                  ``sound/oss/maestro3.c``
+FW_HEADER_MAGIC       0x65726F66       fw_header                ``drivers/atm/fore200e.h``
+SLOT_MAGIC            0x67267321       slot                     ``drivers/hotplug/cpqphp.h``
+SLOT_MAGIC            0x67267322       slot                     ``drivers/hotplug/acpiphp.h``
+LO_MAGIC              0x68797548       nbd_device               ``include/linux/nbd.h``
+OPROFILE_MAGIC        0x6f70726f       super_block              ``drivers/oprofile/oprofilefs.h``
+M3_STATE_MAGIC        0x734d724d       m3_state                 ``sound/oss/maestro3.c``
+VMALLOC_MAGIC         0x87654320       snd_alloc_track          ``sound/core/memory.c``
+KMALLOC_MAGIC         0x87654321       snd_alloc_track          ``sound/core/memory.c``
+PWC_MAGIC             0x89DC10AB       pwc_device               ``drivers/usb/media/pwc.h``
+NBD_REPLY_MAGIC       0x96744668       nbd_reply                ``include/linux/nbd.h``
+ENI155_MAGIC          0xa54b872d       midway_eprom	        ``drivers/atm/eni.h``
+CODA_MAGIC            0xC0DAC0DA       coda_file_info           ``fs/coda/coda_fs_i.h``
+DPMEM_MAGIC           0xc0ffee11       gdt_pci_sram             ``drivers/scsi/gdth.h``
+YAM_MAGIC             0xF10A7654       yam_port                 ``drivers/net/hamradio/yam.c``
+CCB_MAGIC             0xf2691ad2       ccb                      ``drivers/scsi/ncr53c8xx.c``
+QUEUE_MAGIC_FREE      0xf7e1c9a3       queue_entry              ``drivers/scsi/arm/queue.c``
+QUEUE_MAGIC_USED      0xf7e1cc33       queue_entry              ``drivers/scsi/arm/queue.c``
+HTB_CMAGIC            0xFEFAFEF1       htb_class                ``net/sched/sch_htb.c``
+NMI_MAGIC             0x48414d4d455201 nmi_s                    ``arch/mips/include/asm/sn/nmi.h``
+===================== ================ ======================== ==========================================
+
+
+请注�，在声音记忆管�中�然有一些特殊的为�个驱动定义的魔术值。查看include/sound/sndmagic.h�获�他们完整的列表信�。很多OSS声音驱动拥有自己从声�PCI ID构建的魔术值-他们也没有被列在这里。
+
+IrDA�系统也使用了大�的自己的魔术值，查看include/net/irda/irda.h�获�他们完整的信�。
+
+HFS是�外一个比较大的使用魔术值的文件系统-你�以在fs/hfs/hfs.h中找到他们。
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/management-style.rst b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/management-style.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a181fa56d19e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/management-style.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,207 @@
+.. include:: ../disclaimer-zh_CN.rst
+
+:Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/management-style.rst <managementstyle>`
+:Translator: Alex Shi <alex.shi@linux.alibaba.com>
+
+.. _cn_managementstyle:
+
+Linux内核管�风格
+=================
+
+这是一个简短的文档，�述了Linux内核首选的（或胡编的，�决于您问�）管�风格。
+它的目的是在��程度上�照 :ref:`process/coding-style.rst <codingstyle>`
+主�是为了����回答 [#cnf1]_ 相�（或类似）的问题。
+
+管�风格是�常个人化的，比简�的编�风格规则更难以�化，因此本文档�能与实
+际情况有关，也�能与实际情况无关。起�它是一个玩笑，但这并��味�它�能�
+是真的。你得自己决定。
+
+顺便说一�，在谈到“核心管�者�时，主�是技术负责人，而�是在公�内部进行传
+统管�的人。如果你签署了采购订�或者对你的团队的预算有任何了解，你几乎肯定
+�是一个核心管�者。这些建议�能适用于您，也�能�适用于您。
+
+首先，我建议你购买“高效人的七个习惯�，而�是阅读它。烧了它，这是一个伟大的
+象�性姿�。
+
+.. [#cnf1] 本文件并�是通过回答问题，而是通过让�问者痛苦地明白，我们�知�
+   答案是什么。
+
+�管怎样，这里是：
+
+.. _decisions:
+
+1）决策
+-------
+
+�个人都认为管�者�决定，而且决策很��。决定越大越痛苦，管�者就必须越高级。
+这很明显，但事实并�如此。
+
+游�的�字是 **��** �出决定。尤其是，如果有人告诉你“选择（a）或（b），
+我们真的需�你��决定�，你就是陷入麻烦的管�者。你管�的人比你更了解细节，
+所以如果他们�找你�技术决策，你完蛋了。你显然没有能力为他们�这个决定。
+
+（推论：如果你管�的人�比你更了解细节，你也会被�砸，尽管原因完全��。
+也就是说，你的工作是错的，他们应该管�你的�智）
+
+所以游�的�字是 **��** �出决定，至少是那些大而痛苦的决定。�一些�的
+和�结果性的决定是很好的，并且使您看起�好�知�自己在�什么，所以内核管�者
+需��的是将那些大的和痛苦的决定��那些没有人真正关心的�事情。
+
+这有助于认识到一个大的决定和一个�的决定之间的关键区别是你是��以在事�修正
+你的决定。任何决定都�以通过始终确�如果你错了（而且你一定会错），你以�总是
+�以通过回溯�弥补�失。�然间，你就��两个无关紧�的决定，一个是错误的，�
+一个是正确的。
+
+人们甚至会认为这是真正的领导能力（咳，胡说，咳）。
+
+因此，���大决策的关键在于���那些无法挽回的事情。��被引导到一个你无法
+逃离的角�。走投无路的�鼠�能很�险——走投无路的管�者真�怜。
+
+事实�明，由于没有人会愚蠢到让内核管�者承担巨大的财政责任，所以通常很容易
+回溯。既然你��能浪费掉你无法�还的巨�资金，你唯一�以回溯的就是技术决策，
+而回溯很容易：��告诉大家你是个�称�的傻瓜，说对�起，然�撤销你去年让别
+人所�的毫无价值的工作。�然间，你一年��的决定�在是一个�大的决定，因为
+它很容易被推翻。
+
+事实�明，有些人对接�这�方法有困难，原因有两个：
+
+ - 承认你是个白痴比看起�更难。我们都喜欢��形象，在公共场�说你错了有时
+   确实很难。
+ - 如果有人告诉你，你去年所�的工作终究是�值得的，那么对那些�怜的低级工
+   程师�说也是很困难的，虽然实际的 **工作** 很容易删除，但你�能已���
+   挽回地失去了工程师的信任。记�：“��撤销�是我们一开始就试图��的，
+   而你的决定终究是一个�大的决定。
+
+令人欣慰的是，这两个原因都�以通过预先承认你没有任何线索，��告诉人们你的
+决定完全是�步的，而且�能是错误的事情�有效地缓解。你应该始终�留改�主�
+的�利，并让人们 **�识** 到这一点。当你 **还没有** �过真正愚蠢的事情的时
+候，承认自己是愚蠢的�容易得多。
+
+然�，当它真的被�明是愚蠢的时候，人们就转动他们的眼�说“哎呀，下次��了�。
+
+这�对�称�的先�制人的承认，也�能使真正�这项工作的人也会三�是�值得�。
+毕竟，如果他们�确定这是�是一个好主�，你肯定�应该通过�他们��他们所�
+的工作将会进入（内核）鼓励他们。在他们开始一项巨大的努力之�，至少让他们三
+�而�行。
+
+记�：他们最好比你更了解细节，而且他们通常认为他们对�件事都有答案。作为一
+个管�者，你能�的最好的事情�是�输自信，而是对他们所�的事情进行�康的批
+判性�考。
+
+顺便说一�，�一����出决定的方法是看起�很�怜的抱怨 “我们�能两者兼
+得�？� 相信我，它是有效的。如果�清楚哪�方法更好，他们最终会弄清楚的。
+最终的答案�能是两个团队都会因为这�情况而感到沮丧，以至于他们放弃了。
+
+这�起��是一个失败，但这通常是一个迹象，表明两个项目都有问题，而�与其中
+的人�能�决定的原因是他们都是错误的。你最终会闻到玫瑰的味�，你��了�一
+个你本�以�砸的决定。
+
+2）人
+-----
+
+大多数人都是白痴，�一�管�者�味�你必须处�好这件事，也许更��的是,
+**他们** 必须处�好你。
+
+事实�明，虽然很容易纠正技术错误，但�容易纠正人格障�。你�能和他们的和
+你的（人格障�）共处。
+
+但是，为了�好作为内核管�者的准备，最好记���烧掉任何桥�，��轰炸任何
+无辜的�民，也���远太多的内核开�人员。事实�明，�远人是相当容易的，而
+亲近一个�远的人是很难的。因此，“�远�立�属于“��逆�的范畴，并根�
+:ref:`decisions` �为���以�的事情。
+
+这里�有几个简�的规则：
+
+ (1) ���人笨蛋（至少��在公共场�）
+ (2) 学习如何在忘记规则(1)时�歉
+
+问题在于 #1 很容易去�，因为你�以用数百万���的方�说“你是一个笨蛋� [#cnf2]_
+有时甚至没有�识到，而且几乎总是带�一�白热化的信念，认为你是对的。
+
+你越确信自己是对的（让我们�对现实�，你�以把几乎所有人都称为�人，而且你
+�常是对的），事��歉就越难。
+
+�解决此问题，您实际上�有两个选项：
+
+ - �常擅长�歉
+ - 把“爱��匀地散开，没有人会真正感觉到自己被�公平地瞄准了。让它有足够的
+   创造性，他们甚至�能会觉得好笑。
+
+选择永远��礼貌是�存在的。没有人会相信一个如此明显地��了他们真实性格的人。
+
+.. [#cnf2] �罗·西蒙演唱了“离开爱人的50�方法�，因为�率地说，“告诉开�者
+   他们是D*CKHEAD" 的100万�方法都无法确认。但我确信他已�这么想了。
+
+3）人2 - 好人
+-------------
+
+虽然大多数人都是白痴，但�幸的是，�此推论你也是白痴，尽管我们都自我感觉良
+好，我们比普通人更好（让我们�对现实�，没有人相信他们是普通人或低于普通人），
+我们也应该承认我们�是最锋利的刀，而且会有其他人比你更��白痴。
+
+有些人对�明人�应�好。其他人利用它们。
+
+作为内核维护人员，确�您在第二组中。接�他们，因为他们会让你的工作更容易。
+特别是，他们能够为你�决定，这就是游�的全部内容。
+
+所以当你�现一个比你�明的人时，就顺其自然�。你的管��责在很大程度上��
+了“�起��是个好主�——去�试��，或者“�起��错，但是XXX呢？�“。第二个版
+本尤其是一个很好的方法，�么学习一些关于“XXX�的新东西，�么通过指出一些�明
+人没有想到的东西�显得更具管�性。无论哪�情况，你都会赢。
+
+�注�的一件事是认识到一个领域的伟大�一定会转化为其他领域。所以你�能会�
+特定的方�刺激人们，但让我们�对现实�，他们�能擅长他们所�的事情，而且对
+其他事情都很差劲。好消�是，人们往往会自然而然地�拾他们擅长的东西，所以当
+你��个方�刺激他们时，你并�是在���逆转的事情，�是��用力推。
+
+4）责备
+-------
+
+事情会出问题的，人们希望去责备人。贴标签，你就是�责备的人。
+
+事实上，接�责备并�难，尤其是当人们�识到这� **全是** 你的过错时。这让我
+们找到了承担责任的最佳方�：为别人承担这件事。你会感觉很好，他们会感觉很好，
+没有�到指责. 那�，失去了他们的全部36GB色情收�的人，因为你的无能将勉强承
+认，你至少没有试图逃�责任。
+
+然�让真正�砸了的开�人员（如果你能找到他们）�下知�他们�砸了。�仅是为
+了将��以��，而且为了让他们知�他们欠你一个人情。而且，也许更��的是，
+他们也�能是能够解决问题的人。因为，让我们�对现实�，肯定�是你。
+
+承担责任也是你首先�为管�者的原因。这是让人们信任你，让你获得潜在的�耀的
+一部分，因为你就是那个会说“我�砸了�的人。如果你已��循了以�的规则，你现
+在已�很擅长说了。
+
+5）应��的事情
+---------------
+
+有一件事人们甚至比被称为“笨蛋�更讨厌，那就是在一个神圣的声音中被称为“笨蛋�。
+第一个你�以�歉，第二个你�会真正得到机会。�使你�得很好，他们也�能��
+倾�。
+
+我们都认为自己比别人强，这�味�当别人装腔作势时，这会让我们很��。你也许
+在�德和智力上比你周围的�个人都优越，但��试图太明显，除�你真的打算激怒
+�人 [#cnf3]_
+
+�样，��对事情太客气或太微妙。礼貌很容易�得�花�水，把问题��起�，
+正如他们所说，“在互�网上，没人能�到你的�蓄。�用一个�器把这一点锤进去，
+因为你�能真的��别人�获得你的观点。
+
+一些幽默�以帮助缓和直率和�德化。过度到�谬的地步，�以�输一个观点，而�
+会让接�者感到痛苦，他们�是认为你是愚蠢的。因此，它�以帮助我们摆脱对批评
+的个人心�障�。
+
+.. [#cnf3] �示：与你的工作没有直接关系的网络新闻组是消除你对他人�满的好
+   方法。�尔写些侮辱性的帖�，打个喷�，让你的情绪得到净化。别把牢骚带回家
+
+6）为什么是我？
+---------------
+
+既然你的主�责任似乎是为别人的错误承担责任，并且让别人痛苦地明白你是�称�
+的，那么显而易�的问题之一就��了为什么首先�这样�。
+
+首先，虽然你�能会或�能�会�到�几�女孩（或男孩，让我们��在这里评判或
+性别歧视）敲你的更衣室门，你会得到一个巨大的个人�就感为“负责�。别介�你真
+的在领导别人，你�跟上别人，尽�能快地追赶他们。�个人都会认为你是负责人。
+
+如果你�以�到这个， 这是个伟大的工作�
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/programming-language.rst b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/programming-language.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..51fd4ef48ea1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/programming-language.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+.. include:: ../disclaimer-zh_CN.rst
+
+:Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/programming-language.rst <programming_language>`
+:Translator: Alex Shi <alex.shi@linux.alibaba.com>
+
+.. _cn_programming_language:
+
+程�设计语言
+============
+
+内核是用C语言 [c-language]_ 编写的。更准确地说，内核通常是用 ``gcc`` [gcc]_
+在 ``-std=gnu89`` [gcc-c-dialect-options]_ 下编译的：ISO C90的 GNU 方言（
+包括一些C99特性）
+
+这�方言包�对语言 [gnu-extensions]_ 的许多扩展，当然，它们许多都在内核中使用。
+
+对于一些体系结构，有一些使用 ``clang`` [clang]_ 和 ``icc`` [icc]_ 编译内核
+的支�，尽管在编写此文档时还没有完�，�需�第三方补�。
+
+属性
+----
+
+在整个内核中使用的一个常�扩展是属性（attributes） [gcc-attribute-syntax]_
+属性�许将实现定义的语义引入语言实体（如���函数或类型），而无需对语言进行
+�大的语法更改（例如添加新关键字） [n2049]_
+
+在�些情况下，属性是�选的（��支�这些属性的编译器�然应该生�正确的代�，
+�使其速度较慢或执行的编译时检查/诊断次数�够）
+
+内核定义了伪关键字（例如， ``pure`` ），而�是直接使用GNU属性语法（例如,
+``__attribute__((__pure__))`` ），以检测�以使用哪些关键字和/或缩短代�, 具体
+请�阅 ``include/linux/compiler_attributes.h``
+
+.. [c-language] http://www.open-std.org/jtc1/sc22/wg14/www/standards
+.. [gcc] https://gcc.gnu.org
+.. [clang] https://clang.llvm.org
+.. [icc] https://software.intel.com/en-us/c-compilers
+.. [gcc-c-dialect-options] https://gcc.gnu.org/onlinedocs/gcc/C-Dialect-Options.html
+.. [gnu-extensions] https://gcc.gnu.org/onlinedocs/gcc/C-Extensions.html
+.. [gcc-attribute-syntax] https://gcc.gnu.org/onlinedocs/gcc/Attribute-Syntax.html
+.. [n2049] http://www.open-std.org/jtc1/sc22/wg14/www/docs/n2049.pdf
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/stable_api_nonsense.txt b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/stable-api-nonsense.rst
index a2b27fab382c..b4ddb6e88d9d 100644
--- a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/stable_api_nonsense.txt
+++ b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/stable-api-nonsense.rst
@@ -1,26 +1,18 @@
-Chinese translated version of Documentation/process/stable-api-nonsense.rst
+.. _cn_stable_api_nonsense:
 
-If you have any comment or update to the content, please contact the
-original document maintainer directly.  However, if you have problem
-communicating in English you can also ask the Chinese maintainer for help.
-Contact the Chinese maintainer, if this translation is outdated or there
-is problem with translation.
+.. include:: ../disclaimer-zh_CN.rst
 
-Maintainer: Greg Kroah-Hartman <greg@kroah.com>
-Chinese maintainer: TripleX Chung <zhongyu@18mail.cn>
----------------------------------------------------------------------
-Documentation/process/stable-api-nonsense.rst 的中文翻译
+:Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/stable-api-nonsense.rst
+           <stable_api_nonsense>`
 
-如果想评论或更新本文的内容，请直接�系原文档的维护者。如果你使用英文
-交�有困难的�，也�以�中文版维护者求助。如果本翻译更新��时或者翻
-译存在问题，请�系中文版维护者。
+译者::
 
-英文版维护者： Greg Kroah-Hartman <greg@kroah.com>
-中文版维护者： 钟宇  TripleX Chung <zhongyu@18mail.cn>
-中文版翻译者： 钟宇  TripleX Chung <zhongyu@18mail.cn>
-中文版校译者： �阳  Li Yang <leoli@freescale.com>
-以下为正文
----------------------------------------------------------------------
+        中文版维护者： 钟宇  TripleX Chung <xxx.phy@gmail.com>
+        中文版翻译者： 钟宇  TripleX Chung <xxx.phy@gmail.com>
+        中文版校译者： �阳  Li Yang <leoyang.li@nxp.com>
+
+Linux 内核驱动接�
+==================
 
 写作本文档的目的，是为了解释为什么Linux既没有二进制内核接�，也没有稳定
 的内核接�。这里所说的内核接�，是指内核里的接�，而�是内核和用户空间
@@ -59,18 +51,22 @@ Linux能�为强壮，稳定，�熟的�作系统，这也是你最开始选
 --------------
 �如我们有一个稳定的内核�代�接�，那么自然而然的，我们就拥有了稳定的
 二进制接�，是这样的�？错。让我们看看关于Linux内核的几点事实：
+
     - �决于所用的C编译器的版本，��的内核数�结构里的结构体的对�方
-�会有差别，代�中��函数的表现形�也�一样（函数是�是被inline编译�
-决于编译器行为）。��的函数的表现形�并���，但是数�结构内部的对�
-方�很关键。
+      �会有差别，代�中��函数的表现形�也�一样（函数是�是被inline
+      编译�决于编译器行为）。��的函数的表现形�并���，但是数�
+      结构内部的对�方�很关键。
+
     - �决于内核的�置选项，��的选项会让内核的很多东西�生改�：
+
       - �一个结构体�能包���的�员��
       - 有的函数�能根本�会被实现（比如编译的时候没有选择SMP支�
-，一些�函数就会被定义�空函数）。
+        一些�函数就会被定义�空函数）。
       - 内核使用的内存会以��的方�对�，这�决于��的内核�置选
-项。
+        项。
+
     - Linux�以在很多的��体系结构的处�器上�行。在�个体系结构上编
-译好的二进制驱动程�，��能在�外一个体系结构上正确的�行。
+      译好的二进制驱动程�，��能在�外一个体系结构上正确的�行。
 
 对于一个特定的内核，满足这些�件并�难，使用�一个C编译器和�样的内核�
 置选项�编译驱动程�模�就�以了。这对于给一个特定Linux�布的特定版本�
@@ -90,7 +86,7 @@ Linux能�为强壮，稳定，�熟的�作系统，这也是你最开始选
 
 如果有人�将他的内核驱动程�，放入公版内核的�代�树，而�想让驱动程�
 一直��在最新的内核中�用，那么这个�题将会�得没完没了。
- 内核开�是�续而且快节�的，从�都�会慢下�。内核开�人员在当�接�中
+内核开�是�续而且快节�的，从�都�会慢下�。内核开�人员在当�接�中
 找到bug，或者找到更好的实现方�。一旦�现这些，他们就很快会去修改当�的
 接�。修改接��味�，函数��能会改�，结构体�能被扩充或者删�，函数
 的�数也�能�生改�。一旦接�被修改，内核中使用这些接�的地方需��时
@@ -98,21 +94,22 @@ Linux能�为强壮，稳定，�熟的�作系统，这也是你最开始选
 
 举一个例�，内核的USB驱动程�接�在USB�系统的整个生命周期中，至少�历
 了三次�写。这些�写解决以下问题：
+
     - 把数��从�步模�改���步模�，这个改动�少了一些驱动程�的
-��度，�高了所有USB驱动程�的��率，这样几乎所有的USB设备都能以最大
-速率工作了。
+      ��度，�高了所有USB驱动程�的��率，这样几乎所有的USB设备都
+      能以最大速率工作了。
     - 修改了USB核心代�中为USB驱动分�数�包内存的方�，所有的驱动都
-需��供更多的�数给USB核心，以修正了很多已�被记录在案的死�。
+      需��供更多的�数给USB核心，以修正了很多已�被记录在案的死�。
 
 这和一些�闭�代�的�作系统形�鲜明的对比，在那些�作系统上，�得��
 外的维护旧的USB接�。这导致了一个�能性，新的开�者�然会��心使用旧的
 接�，以��当的方�编写代�，进而影�到�作系统的稳定性。
- 在上�的例�中，所有的开�者都��这些��的改动，在这样的情况下修改代
+在上�的例�中，所有的开�者都��这些��的改动，在这样的情况下修改代
 价很低。如果Linux��一个稳定的内核�代�接�，那么就得创建一个新的接�
 ；旧的，有问题的接�必须一直维护，给Linux USB开�者带��外的工作。既然
 所有的Linux USB驱动的作者都是利用自己的时间工作，那么�求他们去�毫无�
 义的�费�外工作，是��能的。
- 安全问题对Linux�说�分��。一个安全问题被�现，就会在短时间内得到修
+安全问题对Linux�说�分��。一个安全问题被�现，就会在短时间内得到修
 正。在很多情况下，这将导致Linux内核中的一些接�被�写，以从根本上��安
 全问题。一旦接�被�写，所有使用这些接�的驱动程�，必须�时得到修正，
 以确定安全问题已�得到修�并且��能在未�还有�样的安全问题。如果内核
@@ -124,7 +121,7 @@ Linux能�为强壮，稳定，�熟的�作系统，这也是你最开始选
 
 
 ��什么
--------
+--------
 
 如果你写了一个Linux内核驱动，但是它还�在Linux�代�树里，作为一个开�
 者，你应该怎么�？为�个�布的�个版本�供一个二进制驱动，那简直是一个
@@ -137,20 +134,21 @@ Linux能�为强壮，稳定，�熟的�作系统，这也是你最开始选
 �什么事情。
 
 把驱动放到内核�代�树里会有很多的好处：
+
     - 驱动的质�会��，而维护�本（对原始作者�说）会下�。
     - 其他人会给驱动添加新特性。
     - 其他人会找到驱动中的bug并修�。
     - 其他人会在驱动中找到性能优化的机会。
     - 当外部的接�的改�需�修改驱动程�的时候，其他人会修改驱动程�
-。
     - �需��系任何�行商，这个驱动会自动的��所有的Linux�布一起�
-布。
+      布。
 
 和别的�作系统相比，Linux为更多��的设备�供现�的驱动，而且能在更多�
 �体系结构的处�器上支�这些设备。这个�过考验的开�模�，必然是错�了
 çš„ :)
 
--------------
+æ„Ÿè°¢
+----
 æ„Ÿè°¢ Randy Dunlap, Andrew Morton, David Brownell, Hanna Linder,
 Robert Love, and Nishanth Aravamudan 对于本文档早期版本的评审和建议。
 
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/stable_kernel_rules.txt b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst
index db4ba5a0c39a..fba361f2ddfd 100644
--- a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/stable_kernel_rules.txt
+++ b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst
@@ -1,31 +1,26 @@
-Chinese translated version of Documentation/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst
+.. _cn_stable_kernel_rules:
 
-If you have any comment or update to the content, please contact the
-original document maintainer directly.  However, if you have a problem
-communicating in English you can also ask the Chinese maintainer for
-help.  Contact the Chinese maintainer if this translation is outdated
-or if there is a problem with the translation.
+.. include:: ../disclaimer-zh_CN.rst
 
-Chinese maintainer: TripleX Chung <triplex@zh-kernel.org>
----------------------------------------------------------------------
-Documentation/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst 的中文翻译
+:Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst <stable_kernel_rules>`
 
 如果想评论或更新本文的内容，请直接�系原文档的维护者。如果你使用英文
 交�有困难的�，也�以�中文版维护者求助。如果本翻译更新��时或者翻
-译存在问题，请�系中文版维护者。
+译存在问题，请�系中文版维护者::
 
+        中文版维护者： 钟宇  TripleX Chung <xxx.phy@gmail.com>
+        中文版翻译者： 钟宇  TripleX Chung <xxx.phy@gmail.com>
+        中文版校译者：
+            - �阳  Li Yang <leoyang.li@nxp.com>
+            - Kangkai Yin <e12051@motorola.com>
 
-中文版维护者： 钟宇  TripleX Chung <triplex@zh-kernel.org>
-中文版翻译者： 钟宇  TripleX Chung <triplex@zh-kernel.org>
-中文版校译者： �阳  Li Yang <leo@zh-kernel.org>
-               Kangkai Yin <e12051@motorola.com>
-
-以下为正文
----------------------------------------------------------------------
+所有你想知�的事情 - 关于linux稳定版�布
+========================================
 
 关于Linux 2.6稳定版�布，所有你想知�的事情。
 
 关于哪些类型的补��以被接收进入稳定版代�树，哪些��以的规则：
+----------------------------------------------------------------
 
   - 必须是显而易�的正确，并且�过测试的。
   - 连�上下文，�能大于100行。
@@ -38,9 +33,10 @@ Documentation/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst 的中文翻译
   - 没有“�论上的竞争�件�，除�能给出竞争�件如何被利用的解释。
   - �能存在任何的“�碎的�修正（拼写修正，去掉多余空格之类的）。
   - 必须被相关�系统的维护者接�。
-  - 必须�循Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst里的规则。
+  - 必须�循Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/submitting-patches.rst里的规则。
 
 �稳定版代�树�交补�的过程：
+------------------------------
 
   - 在确认了补�符�以上的规则�，将补���到stable@vger.kernel.org。
   - 如果补�被接�到队列里，��者会收到一个ACK回�，如果没有被接�，收
@@ -49,6 +45,7 @@ Documentation/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst 的中文翻译
   - 安全方�的补����到这个列表，应该��到security@kernel.org。
 
 审查周期：
+----------
 
   - 当稳定版的维护者决定开始一个审查周期，补�将被��到审查委员会，以
     �被补�影�的领域的维护者（除��交者就是该领域的维护者）并且抄�
@@ -63,4 +60,5 @@ Documentation/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst 的中文翻译
     通常的审查周期。请�系内核安全�组以获得关于这个过程的更多细节。
 
 审查委员会：
+------------
   - 由一些自愿承担这项任务的内核开�者，和几个�志愿的组�。
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/submit-checklist.rst b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/submit-checklist.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..89061aa8fdbe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/submit-checklist.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,107 @@
+.. include:: ../disclaimer-zh_CN.rst
+
+:Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/submit-checklist.rst <submitchecklist>`
+:Translator: Alex Shi <alex.shi@linux.alibaba.com>
+
+.. _cn_submitchecklist:
+
+Linux内核补��交清�
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+如果开�人员希望看到他们的内核补��交更快地被接�，那么他们应该�一些基本
+的事情。
+
+这些都是在
+:ref:`Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/submitting-patches.rst <cn_submittingpatches>`
+和其他有关�交Linux内核补�的文档中�供的。
+
+1) 如果使用工具，则包括定义/声明该工具的文件。���赖于其他头文件拉入您使用
+   的头文件。
+
+2) 干净的编译：
+
+   a) 使用适用或修改的 ``CONFIG`` 选项 ``=y``�``=m`` 和 ``=n`` 。没有GCC
+      警告/错误，没有链接器警告/错误。
+
+   b) 通过allnoconfig�allmodconfig
+
+   c) 使用 ``O=builddir`` 时�以�功编译
+
+3) 通过使用本地交�编译工具或其他一些构建场在多个CPU体系结构上构建。
+
+4) PPC64是一�很好的交�编译检查体系结构，因为它倾�于对64�的数使用无符�
+   长整型。
+
+5) 如下所述 :ref:`Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/coding-style.rst <cn_codingstyle>`.
+   检查您的补�是�为常规样�。在�交（ ``scripts/check patch.pl`` ）之�，
+   使用补�样�检查器检查是�有轻微的冲�。您应该能够处�您的补�中存在的所有
+   �规行为。
+
+6) 任何新的或修改过的 ``CONFIG`` 选项都�会弄��置��，并默认为关闭，除�
+   它们符� ``Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt`` 中记录的异常�件,
+   ��属性：默认值.
+
+7) 所有新的 ``kconfig`` 选项都有帮助文本。
+
+8) 已仔细审查了相关的 ``Kconfig`` 组�。这很难用测试�纠正——脑力在这里是有
+   回报的。
+
+9) 用 sparse 检查干净。
+
+10) 使用 ``make checkstack`` 和 ``make namespacecheck`` 并修�他们�现的任何
+    问题。
+
+    .. note::
+
+        ``checkstack`` 并没有明确指出问题，但是任何一个在堆栈上使用超过512
+        字节的函数都�以进行更改。
+
+11) 包括 :ref:`kernel-doc <kernel_doc>` 内核文档以记录全局内核API。（��函数
+    �需�，但也�以。）使用 ``make htmldocs`` 或 ``make pdfdocs`` 检查
+    :ref:`kernel-doc <kernel_doc>` 并修�任何问题。
+
+12) 通过以下选项�时�用的测试 ``CONFIG_PREEMPT``, ``CONFIG_DEBUG_PREEMPT``,
+    ``CONFIG_DEBUG_SLAB``, ``CONFIG_DEBUG_PAGEALLOC``, ``CONFIG_DEBUG_MUTEXES``,
+    ``CONFIG_DEBUG_SPINLOCK``, ``CONFIG_DEBUG_ATOMIC_SLEEP``,
+    ``CONFIG_PROVE_RCU`` and ``CONFIG_DEBUG_OBJECTS_RCU_HEAD``
+
+13) 已�过构建和�行时测试，包括有或没有 ``CONFIG_SMP``, ``CONFIG_PREEMPT``.
+
+14) 如果补�程�影�IO/�盘等：使用或�使用 ``CONFIG_LBDAF`` 进行测试。
+
+15) 所有代�路径都已在�用所有lockdep功能的情况下�行。
+
+16) 所有新的/proc�目都记录在 ``Documentation/``
+
+17) 所有新的内核引导�数都记录在
+    Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.rst 中。
+
+18) 所有新的模��数都记录在 ``MODULE_PARM_DESC()``
+
+19) 所有新的用户空间接�都记录在 ``Documentation/ABI/`` 中。有关详细信�，
+    请�阅 ``Documentation/ABI/README`` 。更改用户空间接�的补�应该抄�
+    linux-api@vger.kernel.org。
+
+20) 检查是�全部通过 ``make headers_check`` 。
+
+21) 已通过至少注入slab和page分�失败进行检查。请�阅 ``Documentation/fault-injection/``
+    如果新代�是实质性的，那么添加�系统特定的故障注入�能是�适的。
+
+22) 新添加的代�已�用 ``gcc -W`` 编译（使用 ``make EXTRA-CFLAGS=-W`` ）。这
+    将产生大�噪声，但对于查找诸如“警告：有符�和无符�之间的比较�之类的错误
+    很有用。
+
+23) 在它被�并到-mm补�集中之�进行测试，以确�它�然与所有其他排队的补�以
+    �VM�VFS和其他�系统中的��更改一起工作。
+
+24) 所有内存�障例如 ``barrier()``, ``rmb()``, ``wmb()`` 都需��代�中的注
+    释�解释它们正在执行的�作�其原因的逻辑。
+
+25) 如果补�添加了任何ioctl，那么也�更新 ``Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt``
+
+26) 如果修改�的�代��赖或使用与以下 ``Kconfig`` 符�相关的任何内核API或
+    功能，则在�用相关 ``Kconfig`` 符�和/或 ``=m`` （如果该选项�用）的情况
+    下测试以下多个构建[并�所有这些都�时存在，�是它们的��/�机组�]：
+
+    ``CONFIG_SMP``, ``CONFIG_SYSFS``, ``CONFIG_PROC_FS``, ``CONFIG_INPUT``, ``CONFIG_PCI``, ``CONFIG_BLOCK``, ``CONFIG_PM``, ``CONFIG_MAGIC_SYSRQ``,
+    ``CONFIG_NET``, ``CONFIG_INET=n`` (但是�者伴� ``CONFIG_NET=y``).
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/SubmittingDrivers b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/submitting-drivers.rst
index 15e73562f710..72c6cd935821 100644
--- a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/SubmittingDrivers
+++ b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/submitting-drivers.rst
@@ -1,36 +1,28 @@
-Chinese translated version of Documentation/process/submitting-drivers.rst
+.. _cn_submittingdrivers:
 
-If you have any comment or update to the content, please contact the
-original document maintainer directly.  However, if you have a problem
-communicating in English you can also ask the Chinese maintainer for
-help.  Contact the Chinese maintainer if this translation is outdated
-or if there is a problem with the translation.
+.. include:: ../disclaimer-zh_CN.rst
 
-Chinese maintainer: Li Yang <leo@zh-kernel.org>
----------------------------------------------------------------------
-Documentation/process/submitting-drivers.rst 的中文翻译
+:Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/submitting-drivers.rst
+           <submittingdrivers>`
 
 如果想评论或更新本文的内容，请直接�系原文档的维护者。如果你使用英文
 交�有困难的�，也�以�中文版维护者求助。如果本翻译更新��时或者翻
-译存在问题，请�系中文版维护者。
+译存在问题，请�系中文版维护者::
 
-中文版维护者： �阳  Li Yang <leo@zh-kernel.org>
-中文版翻译者： �阳  Li Yang <leo@zh-kernel.org>
-中文版校译者： 陈� Maggie Chen <chenqi@beyondsoft.com>
-               王� Wang Cong <xiyou.wangcong@gmail.com>
-               å¼ å·� Zhang Wei <Wei.Zhang@freescale.com>
-
-以下为正文
----------------------------------------------------------------------
+        中文版维护者： �阳  Li Yang <leoyang.li@nxp.com>
+        中文版翻译者： �阳  Li Yang <leoyang.li@nxp.com>
+        中文版校译者： 陈� Maggie Chen <chenqi@beyondsoft.com>
+                       王� Wang Cong <xiyou.wangcong@gmail.com>
+                       å¼ å·� Zhang Wei <wezhang@outlook.com>
 
 如何� Linux 内核�交驱动程�
------------------------------
+=============================
 
 这篇文档将会解释如何���的内核��树�交设备驱动程�。请注�，如果你感
 兴趣的是显�驱动程�，你也许应该访问 XFree86 项目(http://www.xfree86.org/)
 和�或 X.org 项目 (http://x.org)。
 
-�请�阅 Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst 文档。
+�请�阅 Documentation/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/submitting-patches.rst 文档。
 
 
 分�设备�
@@ -145,9 +137,13 @@ Linux 设备驱动程�，第三版（探讨 2.6.10 版内核）：
 
 LWN.net:
 	�周内核开�活动摘� - http://lwn.net/
+
 	2.6 版中 API 的�更：
+
 		http://lwn.net/Articles/2.6-kernel-api/
+
 	将旧版内核的驱动程�移�到 2.6 版：
+
 		http://lwn.net/Articles/driver-porting/
 
 内核新手(KernelNewbies):
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/submitting-patches.rst b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/submitting-patches.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..437c23b367bb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/submitting-patches.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,682 @@
+.. _cn_submittingpatches:
+
+.. include:: ../disclaimer-zh_CN.rst
+
+:Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst <submittingpatches>`
+
+译者::
+
+        中文版维护者： 钟宇 TripleX Chung <xxx.phy@gmail.com>
+        中文版翻译者： 钟宇 TripleX Chung <xxx.phy@gmail.com>
+                       时奎亮 Alex Shi <alex.shi@linux.alibaba.com>
+        中文版校译者： �阳 Li Yang <leoyang.li@nxp.com>
+                       王� Wang Cong <xiyou.wangcong@gmail.com>
+
+
+如何让你的改动进入内核
+======================
+
+对于想�将改动�交到 Linux 内核的个人或者公��说，如果�熟悉“规矩�，
+�交的�程会让人�惧。本文档收集了一系列建议，这些建议�以大大的�高你
+的改动被接�的机会.
+
+以下文档�有大�简�的建议， 具体请�：
+:ref:`Documentation/process <development_process_main>`
+�样，:ref:`Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/submit-checklist.rst <cn_submitchecklist>`
+给出在�交代��需�检查的项目的列表。如果你在�交一个驱动程�，那么
+�时阅读一下:
+:ref:`Documentation/process/submitting-drivers.rst <submittingdrivers>`
+
+其中许多步骤�述了Git版本控制系统的默认行为；如果您使用Git�准备补�，
+您将�现它为您完�的大部分机械工作，尽管您�然需�准备和记录一组��的
+补�。一般�说，使用git将使您作为内核开�人员的生活更轻�。
+
+
+0) 获�当���树
+-----------------
+
+如果您没有一个�以使用当�内核�代�的存储库，请使用git获�一个。您将�
+从主线存储库开始，它�以通过以下方�获�::
+
+        git clone git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/torvalds/linux.git
+
+但是，请注�，您�能�希望直接针对主线树进行开�。大多数�系统维护人员�
+行自己的树，并希望看到针对这些树准备的补�。请��MAINTAINERS文件中�系
+统的 **T:** 项以查找该树，或者简�地询问维护者该树是�未在其中列出。
+
+�然�以通过tarballs下载内核版本（如下一节所述），但这是进行内核开�的
+一�困难的方�。
+
+1) "diff -up"
+-------------
+
+使用 "diff -up" 或者 "diff -uprN" �创建补�。
+
+所有内核的改动，都是以补�的形�呈现的，补�由 diff(1) 生�。创建补�的
+时候，�确认它是以 "unified diff" 格�创建的，这�格�由 diff(1) 的 '-u'
+�数生�。而且，请使用 '-p' �数，那样会显示�个改动所在的C函数，使得
+产生的补�容易读得多。补�应该基于内核�代�树的根目录，而�是里边的任
+何�目录。
+
+为一个�独的文件创建补�，一般�说这样�就够了::
+
+        SRCTREE=linux
+        MYFILE=drivers/net/mydriver.c
+
+        cd $SRCTREE
+        cp $MYFILE $MYFILE.orig
+        vi $MYFILE      # make your change
+        cd ..
+        diff -up $SRCTREE/$MYFILE{.orig,} > /tmp/patch
+
+为多个文件创建补�，你�以解开一个没有修改过的内核�代�树，然�和你自
+己的代�树之间� diff 。例如::
+
+        MYSRC=/devel/linux
+
+        tar xvfz linux-3.19.tar.gz
+        mv linux-3.19 linux-3.19-vanilla
+        diff -uprN -X linux-3.19-vanilla/Documentation/dontdiff \
+                linux-3.19-vanilla $MYSRC > /tmp/patch
+
+"dontdiff" 是内核在编译的时候产生的文件的列表，列表中的文件在 diff(1)
+产生的补�里会被跳过。
+
+确定你的补�里没有包�任何�属于这次补��交的�外文件。记得在用diff(1)
+生�补�之�，审阅一次补�，以确�准确。
+
+如果你的改动很散乱，你应该研究一下如何将补�分割�独立的部分，将改动分
+割�一系列�乎逻辑的步骤。这样更容易让其他内核开�者审核，如果你想你的
+补�被接�，这是很��的。请�阅：
+:ref:`cn_split_changes`
+
+如果你用 ``git`` , ``git rebase -i`` �以帮助你这一点。如果你�用 ``git``,
+``quilt`` <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/quilt> �外一个�行的选择。
+
+.. _cn_describe_changes:
+
+2) �述你的改动
+---------------
+
+�述你的问题。无论您的补�是一行错误修�还是5000行新功能，都必须有一个潜在
+的问题激励您完�这项工作。让审稿人相信有一个问题值得解决，让他们读完第一段
+是有�义的。
+
+�述用户��的影�。直接崩溃和�定是相当有说�力的，但并�是所有的错误都那么
+明目张胆。�使在代�审查期间�现了这个问题，也��述一下您认为它�能对用户产
+生的影�。请记�，大多数Linux安装�行的内核�自二级稳定树或特定于供应商/产�
+的树，�从上游精选特定的补�，因此请包�任何�以帮助您将更改定�到下游的内容：
+触�的场景�DMESG的摘录�崩溃�述�性能回归�延迟尖峰��定等。
+
+�化优化和�衡。如果您声称在性能�内存消耗�堆栈�用空间或二进制大�方�有所
+改进，请包括支�它们的数字。但也��述�明显的�本。优化通常�是�费的，而是
+在CPU�内存和�读性之间进行�衡；或者，探索性的工作，在��的工作负载之间进
+行�衡。请�述优化的预期缺点，以便审阅者�以�衡�本和收益。
+
+一旦问题建立起�，就�详细地�述一下您实际在�什么。对于审阅者�说，用简�的
+英语�述代�的�化是很��的，以验�代�的行为是�符�您的�愿。
+
+如果您将补��述写在一个表�中，这个表��以很容易地作为“�交日志�放入Linux
+的�代�管�系统git中，那么维护人员将�常感谢您。� :ref:`cn_explicit_in_reply_to`.
+
+�个补��解决一个问题。如果你的�述开始�长，这就表明你�能需�拆分你的补�。
+请� :ref:`cn_split_changes`
+
+�交或�新�交修补程�或修补程�系列时，请包括完整的修补程�说明和�由。��
+�说这是补�（系列）的第几版。��期望�系统维护人员引用更早的补�版本或引用
+URL�查找补��述并将其放入补�中。也就是说，补�（系列）�其�述应该是独立的。
+这对维护人员和审查人员都有好处。一些评审者�能甚至没有收到补�的早期版本。
+
+�述你在命令语气中的�化，例如“make xyzzy do frotz�而�是“[这个补�]make
+xyzzy do frotz�或“[我]changed xyzzy to do frotz�，就好�你在命令代�库改�
+它的行为一样。
+
+如果修补程�修�了一个记录的bug�目，请按编�和URL引用该bug�目。如果补��
+自邮件列表讨论，请给出邮件列表存档的URL；使用带有 ``Message-ID`` 的
+https://lkml.kernel.org/ �定�，以确�链接�会过时。
+
+但是，在没有外部资�的情况下，尽�让你的解释��解。除了�供邮件列表存档或
+bug的URL之外，还�总结需��交补�的相关讨论�点。
+
+如果您想�引用一个特定的�交，���引用�交的 SHA-1 ID。还请包括�交的一行
+摘�，以便于审阅者了解它是关于什么的。例如::
+
+        Commit e21d2170f36602ae2708 ("video: remove unnecessary
+        platform_set_drvdata()") removed the unnecessary
+        platform_set_drvdata(), but left the variable "dev" unused,
+        delete it.
+
+您还应该确�至少使用�12� SHA-1 ID. 内核存储库包�*许多*对象，使与较短的ID
+�生冲�的�能性很大。记�，�使现在�会与您的六个字符ID�生冲�，这�情况
+�能五年�改�。
+
+如果修补程�修�了特定�交中的错误，例如，使用 ``git bisct`` ，请使用带有�
+12个字符SHA-1 ID 的"Fixes:"标记和�行摘�。为了简化��将标记拆分为多个，
+行�标记��分�脚本“75列�行�规则的�制。例如::
+
+        Fixes: 54a4f0239f2e ("KVM: MMU: make kvm_mmu_zap_page() return the number of pages it actually freed")
+
+下列 ``git config`` 设置�以添加让 ``git log``, ``git show`` 漂亮的显示格�::
+
+	[core]
+		abbrev = 12
+	[pretty]
+		fixes = Fixes: %h (\"%s\")
+
+.. _cn_split_changes:
+
+3) 拆分你的改动
+---------------
+
+将�个逻辑更改分隔�一个�独的补�。
+
+例如，如果你的改动里�时有bug修正和性能优化，那么把这些改动拆分到两个或
+者更多的补�文件中。如果你的改动包�对API的修改，并且修改了驱动程��适
+应这些新的API，那么把这些修改分�两个补�。
+
+�一方�，如果你将一个�独的改动��多个补�文件，那么将它们�并�一个
+�独的补�文件。这样一个逻辑上�独的改动�被包�在一个补�文件里。
+
+如果有一个补��赖�外一个补��完�它的改动，那没问题。简�的在你的补
+��述里指出“这个补��赖�补��就好了。
+
+在将您的更改划分为一系列补�时，�特别注�确�内核在系列中的�个补�之�
+都能正常构建和�行。使用 ``git bisect`` �追踪问题的开�者�能会在任何时
+候分割你的补�系列；如果你在中间引入错误，他们�会感谢你。
+
+如果你�能将补�浓缩�更少的文件，那么�次大约��出15个，然�等待审查
+和集�。
+
+4) 检查你的更改风格
+-------------------
+
+检查您的补�是�存在基本样�冲�，详细信��在
+:ref:`Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/coding-style.rst <cn_codingstyle>`
+中找到。如果�这样�，�会浪费审稿人的时间，并且会导致你的补�被拒�，甚至
+�能没有被阅读。
+
+一个��的例外是在将代�从一个文件移动到�一个文件时——在这�情况下，您�应
+该在移动代�的�一个补�中修改移动的代�。这清楚地�述了移动代�和您的更改
+的行为。这大大有助于审查实际差异，并�许工具更好地跟踪代�本身的历�。
+
+在�交之�，使用补�样�检查程�检查补�（scripts/check patch.pl）。�过，
+请注�，样�检查程�应该被视为一个指�，而�是作为人类判断的替代�。如果您
+的代�看起�更好，但有�规行为，那么最好��使用它。
+
+检查者报告三个级别：
+
+ - ERROR：很�能出错的事情
+ - WARNING：需�仔细审查的事项
+ - CHECK：需��考的事情
+
+您应该能够判断您的补�中存在的所有�规行为。
+
+5) 选择补�收件人
+-----------------
+
+您应该总是在任何补�上�制相应的�系统维护人员，以获得他们维护的代�；查看
+维护人员文件和�代�修订历�记录，以了解这些维护人员是�。脚本
+scripts/get_Maintainer.pl在这个步骤中�常有用。如果您找�到正在工作的�系统
+的维护人员，那么Andrew Morton（akpm@linux-foundation.org）将充当最�的维护
+人员。
+
+您通常还应该选择至少一个邮件列表�接收补�集的。linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org
+作为最�一个解决办法的列表，但是这个列表上的体积已�引起了许多开�人员的拒�。
+在MAINTAINERS文件中查找�系统特定的列表；您的补��能会在那里得到更多的关注。
+�过，请����垃圾邮件到无关的列表。
+
+许多与内核相关的列表托管在vger.kernel.org上；您�以在
+http://vger.kernel.org/vger-lists.html 上找到它们的列表。�过，也有与内核相关
+的列表托管在其他地方。
+
+��一次��超过15个补�到vger邮件列表����
+
+Linus Torvalds 是决定改动能�进入 Linux 内核的最终�决者。他的 e-mail
+地�是 <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> 。他收到的 e-mail 很多，所以一般
+的说，最好别给他� e-mail。
+
+如果您有修��利用安全�洞的补�，请将该补���到 security@kernel.org。对于
+严�的bug，�以考虑短期暂�以�许分销商�用户�布补�；在这�情况下，显然�应
+将补���到任何公共列表。
+
+修�已�布内核中严�错误的补�程�应该指�稳定版维护人员，方法是放这样的一行::
+
+        Cc: stable@vger.kernel.org
+
+进入补�的签准区（注�，�是电�邮件收件人）。除了这个文件之外，您还应该阅读
+:ref:`Documentation/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst <stable_kernel_rules>`
+
+但是，请注�，一些�系统维护人员希望得出他们自己的结论，�哪些补�应该被放到
+稳定的树上。尤其是网络维护人员，�希望看到�个开�人员在补�中添加�上�这样
+的行。
+
+如果更改影�到用户和内核接�，请�手册页维护人员（如维护人员文件中所列）��
+手册页补�，或至少��更改通知，以便一些信�进入手册页。还应将用户空间API
+更改�制到 linux-api@vger.kernel.org。
+
+对于�的补�，你也许会CC到�集�碎补�的邮件列表(Trivial Patch Monkey)
+trivial@kernel.org，那里专门收集�碎的补�。下�这样的补�会被看作“�碎的�
+补�：
+
+ - 文档的拼写修正。
+ - 修正会影�到 grep(1) 的拼写。
+ - 警告信�修正(频�的打�无用的警告是�好的。)
+ - 编译错误修正（代�逻辑的确是对的，�是编译有问题。）
+ - �行时修正（��真的修正了错误。）
+ - 移除使用了被废弃的函数/�的代�(例如 check_region。)
+ - �系方�和文档修正。
+ - 用�移�的代�替���移�的代�（�使在体系结构相关的代�中，既然有
+ - 人拷�，��它是�碎的）
+ - 任何文件的作者/维护者对该文件的改动（例如 patch monkey 在�传模�下）
+
+(译注，关于“�碎补��的一些说明：因为原文的这一部分写得比较简�，所以�得�
+�例写一下译注。"trivial"这个英文��的本�是“�碎的，���的。�但是在这里
+有�微有一些�化，例如对一些明显的NULL指针的修正，属于�行时修正，会被归类
+到�碎补�里。虽然NULL指针的修正很��，但是这样的修正往往很�而且很容易得到
+检验，所以也被归入�碎补�。�碎补�更精确的归类应该是
+“simple, localized & easy to verify�，也就是说简�的，局部的和易于检验的。
+trivial@kernel.org邮件列表的目的是针对这样的补�，为�交者�供一个中心，�
+�低�交的门槛。)
+
+6) 没有 MIME 编�，没有链接，没有压缩，没有附件，�有纯文本
+-----------------------------------------------------------
+
+Linus 和其他的内核开�者需�阅读和评论你�交的改动。对于内核开�者�说
+，�以“引用�你的改动很��，使用一般的 e-mail 工具，他们就�以在你的
+代�的任何�置添加评论。
+
+因为这个原因，所有的�交的补�都是 e-mail 中“内嵌�的。
+
+.. warning::
+   如果你使用剪切-粘贴你的补�，�心你的编辑器的自动�行功能破�你的补�
+
+��将补�作为 MIME 编�的附件，�管是�压缩。很多�行的 e-mail 软件�
+是任何时候都将 MIME 编�的附件当作纯文本��的，这会使得别人无法在你的
+代�中加评论。�外，MIME 编�的附件会让 Linus 多花一点时间�处�，这就
+�低了你的改动被接�的�能性。
+
+例外：如果你的邮递员弄�了补�，那么有人�能会�求你使用mime�新��补�
+
+请�阅 :ref:`Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/email-clients.rst <cn_email_clients>`
+以获�有关�置电�邮件客户端以使其��影�地��修补程�的�示。
+
+7) e-mail 的大�
+----------------
+
+大的改动对邮件列表��适，对�些维护者也��适。如果你的补�，在�压缩
+的情况下，超过了300kB，那么你最好将补�放在一个能通过 internet 访问的�
+务器上，然�用指�你的补�的 URL 替代。但是请注�，如果您的补�超过了
+300kb，那么它几乎肯定需�被破�。
+
+8）回�评审��
+---------------
+
+你的补�几乎肯定会得到评审者对补�改进方法的评论。您必须对这些评论作出
+回应；让补�被忽略的一个好办法就是忽略审阅者的��。�会导致代�更改的
+��或问题几乎肯定会带�注释或�更日志的改�，以便下一个评审者更好地了解
+正在�生的事情。
+
+一定�告诉审稿人你在�什么改�，并感谢他们的时间。代�审查是一个累人且
+耗时的过程，审查人员有时会�得暴�。�使在这�情况下，也�礼貌地回应并
+解决他们指出的问题。
+
+9）��泄气或��烦
+-------------------
+
+�交更改�，请�心等待。审阅者是忙碌的人，�能无法立�访问您的修补程�。
+
+曾几何时，补�曾在没有评论的情况下消失在空白中，但开�过程比现在更加顺利。
+您应该在一周左�的时间内收到评论；如果没有收到评论，请确�您已将补���
+到正确的�置。在�新�交或�系审阅者之�至少等待一周-在诸如�并窗�之类的
+�忙时间�能更长。
+
+10）主题中包� PATCH
+--------------------
+
+由于到linus和linux内核的电�邮件��很高，通常会在主题行��加上[PATCH]
+�缀. 这使Linus和其他内核开�人员更容易将补�与其他电�邮件讨论区分开。
+
+11）签署你的作�-开�者原始认�
+-------------------------------
+
+为了加强对��了何事的追踪，尤其是对那些�过好几层的维护者的补�，我们
+建议在��出去的补�上加一个 “sign-off� 的过程。
+
+"sign-off" 是在补�的注释的最�的简�的一行文字，认�你编写了它或者其他
+人有�力将它作为开放�代�的补�传递。规则很简�：如果你能认�如下信�:
+
+开�者���书 1.1
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+对于本项目的贡献，我认�如下信�：
+
+      （a）这些贡献是完全或者部分的由我创建，我有�利以文件中指出
+           的开放�代�许���交它；或者
+      （b）这些贡献基于以�的工作，�我所知，这些以�的工作��当的开放
+           �代�许���护，而且，根�许��，我有��交修改�的贡献，
+           无论是完全还是部分由我创造，这些贡献都使用�一个开放�代�许��
+           （除�我被�许用其它的许��），正如文件中指出的；或者
+      （c）这些贡献由认�（a），（b）或者（c）的人直接�供给我，而
+           且我没有修改它。
+      （d）我�解并��这个项目和贡献是公开的，贡献的记录（包括我
+           一起�交的个人记录，包括 sign-off ）被永久维护并且�以和这个项目
+           或者开放�代�的许���步地��行。
+
+那么加入这样一行::
+
+       Signed-off-by: Random J Developer <random@developer.example.org>
+
+使用你的真�（抱歉，�能使用��或者匿�。）
+
+有人在最�加上标签。现在这些东西会被忽略，但是你�以这样�，�标记公�
+内部的过程，或者�是指出关于 sign-off 的一些特殊细节。
+
+如果您是�系统或分支维护人员，有时需��微修改收到的补�，以便�并它们，
+因为树和�交者中的代��完全相�。如果你严格�守规则（c），你应该�求�交者
+�新�布，但这完全是在浪费时间和精力。规则（b）�许您调整代�，但是更改一个
+�交者的代�并让他认�您的错误是�常�礼貌的。�解决此问题，建议在最�一个
+由签�行和您的行之间添加一行，指示更改的性质。虽然这并�是强制性的，但似乎
+在�述�加上您的邮件和/或姓�（全部用方括�括起�），这足以让人注�到您对最
+�一分钟的更改负有责任。例如::
+
+	Signed-off-by: Random J Developer <random@developer.example.org>
+	[lucky@maintainer.example.org: struct foo moved from foo.c to foo.h]
+	Signed-off-by: Lucky K Maintainer <lucky@maintainer.example.org>
+
+如果您维护一个稳定的分支机构，�时希望对作者进行致谢�跟踪更改��并修�并
+�护�交者��投诉，那么这��法尤其有用。请注�，在任何情况下都�能更改作者
+的ID（From 头），因为它是出现在更改日志中的标识。
+
+对回�（back-porters）的特别说明：在�交消�的顶部（主题行之�）�入一个补�
+的起�指示似乎是一�常�且有用的实践，以便于跟踪。例如，下�是我们在3.x稳定
+版本中看到的内容::
+
+  Date:   Tue Oct 7 07:26:38 2014 -0400
+
+    libata: Un-break ATA blacklist
+
+    commit 1c40279960bcd7d52dbdf1d466b20d24b99176c8 upstream.
+
+还有， 这里是一个旧版内核中的一个回�补�::
+
+    Date:   Tue May 13 22:12:27 2008 +0200
+
+        wireless, airo: waitbusy() won't delay
+
+        [backport of 2.6 commit b7acbdfbd1f277c1eb23f344f899cfa4cd0bf36a]
+
+12）何时使用Acked-by:，CC:，和Co-Developed by:
+----------------------------------------------
+
+Singed-off-by: 标记表示签�者�与了补�的开�，或者他/她在补�的传递路径中。
+
+如果一个人没有直接�与补�的准备或处�，但希望表示并记录他们对补�的批准，
+那么他们�以�求在补�的�更日志中添加一个 Acked-by:
+
+Acked-by：通常由�影�代�的维护者使用，当该维护者既没有贡献也没有转�补�时。
+
+Acked-by: ��签字人那样正�。这是一个记录，确认人至少审查了补�，并表示接�。
+因此，补��并有时会手动将Acker的“Yep，looks good to me�转�为 Acked-By：（但
+请注�，通常最好�求一个明确的Ack）。
+
+Acked-by：�一定表示对整个补�的确认。例如，如果一个补�影�多个�系统，并且
+有一个：�自一个�系统维护者，那么这通常表示�确认影�维护者代�的部分。这里
+应该仔细判断。如有疑问，应�考邮件列表档案中的原始讨论。
+
+如果�人有机会对补�进行评论，但没有�供此类评论，您�以选择在补�中添加 ``Cc:``
+这是唯一一个标签，它�以在没有被它命�的人显��作的情况下添加，但它应该表明
+这个人是在补�上抄�的。讨论中包�了潜在利益相关方。
+
+Co-developed-by: 声明补�是由多个开�人员共�创建的；当几个人在一个补�上工
+作时，它用于将属性赋予共�作者（除了 From: 所赋予的作者之外）。因为
+Co-developed-by: 表示作者身份，所以�个共�开�人：必须紧跟在相关�作作者的
+签�之�。标准的签核程��求：标记的签核顺�应尽�能�映补�的时间历�，而�
+管作者是通过 From ：还是由 Co-developed-by: 共�开�的。值得注�的是，最�一
+个签字人：必须始终是�交补�的开�人员。
+
+注�，当作者也是电�邮件标题“�件人：�行中列出的人时，“From: � 标记是�选的。
+
+作者�交的补�程�示例::
+
+	<changelog>
+
+	Co-developed-by: First Co-Author <first@coauthor.example.org>
+	Signed-off-by: First Co-Author <first@coauthor.example.org>
+	Co-developed-by: Second Co-Author <second@coauthor.example.org>
+	Signed-off-by: Second Co-Author <second@coauthor.example.org>
+	Signed-off-by: From Author <from@author.example.org>
+
+�作开�者�交的补�示例::
+
+	From: From Author <from@author.example.org>
+
+	<changelog>
+
+	Co-developed-by: Random Co-Author <random@coauthor.example.org>
+	Signed-off-by: Random Co-Author <random@coauthor.example.org>
+	Signed-off-by: From Author <from@author.example.org>
+	Co-developed-by: Submitting Co-Author <sub@coauthor.example.org>
+	Signed-off-by: Submitting Co-Author <sub@coauthor.example.org>
+
+
+13）使用报告人：�测试人：�审核人：�建议人：�修�人：
+--------------------------------------------------------
+
+Reported-by: 给那些�现错误并报告错误的人致谢，它希望激励他们在将��次帮助
+我们。请注�，如果bug是以�有方�报告的，那么在使用Reported-by标记之�，请
+先请求��。
+
+Tested-by: 标记表示补�已由指定的人（在�些环境中）�功测试。这个标签通知
+维护人员已�执行了一些测试，为将�的补��供了一�定�测试人员的方法，并确
+�测试人员的信誉。
+
+Reviewed-by：相�，根�审查人的声明，表明该补�已被审查并被认为是�接�的：
+
+
+审查人的监�声明
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+通过�供我的 Reviewed-by，我声明：
+
+        (a) 我已�对这个补�进行了一次技术审查，以评估它是�适�被包�到
+            主线内核中。
+
+        (b) 与补�相关的任何问题�顾虑或问题都已�馈给�交者。我对�交者对
+            我的评论的回应感到满�。
+
+        (c) 虽然这一�交�能会改进一些东西，但我相信，此时，（1）对内核
+            进行了有价值的修改，（2）没有包�争论中涉�的已知问题。
+
+        (d) 虽然我已�审查了补�并认为它是�全的，但我�会（除��有明确
+            说明）作出任何��或��它将在任何给定情况下实现其规定的目的
+            或正常�行。
+
+Reviewed-by 是一�观点声明，�补�是对内核的适当修改，没有任何�留的严�技术
+问题。任何感兴趣的审阅者（完�工作的人）都�以为一个补��供一个 Review-by
+标签。此标签用于�审阅者�供致谢，并通知维护者已在修补程�上完�的审阅程度。
+Reviewed-by: 当由已知了解主题区域并执行彻底检查的审阅者�供时，通常会增加
+补�进入内核的�能性。
+
+Suggested-by: 表示补�的想法是由指定的人�出的，并确�将此想法归功于指定的
+人。请注�，未�许�，�得添加此标签，特别是如果该想法未在公共论�上�布。
+这就是说，如果我们勤快地致谢我们的创�者，他们很有希望在未�得到鼓舞，�次
+帮助我们。
+
+Fixes: 指示补�在以�的�交中修�了一个问题。它�以很容易地确定错误的��，
+这有助于检查错误修�。这个标记还帮助稳定内核团队确定应该接收修�的稳定内核
+版本。这是指示补�修�的错误的首选方法。请�阅 :ref:`cn_describe_changes`
+�述您的更改以了解更多详细信�。
+
+.. _cn_the_canonical_patch_format:
+
+12）标准补�格�
+----------------
+
+本节�述如何格�化补�本身。请注�，如果您的补�存储在 ``Git`` 存储库中，则
+�以使用 ``git format-patch`` 进行正确的补�格�设置。但是，这些工具无法创建
+必�的文本，因此请务必阅读下�的说明。
+
+标准的补�，标题行是::
+
+    Subject: [PATCH 001/123] �系统:一��概述
+
+标准补�的信体存在如下部分：
+
+  - 一个 "from" 行指出补�作者。�跟空行（仅当��修补程�的人�是作者时�需�）。
+
+  - 解释的正文，行以75列包装，这将被�制到永久�更日志��述这个补�。
+
+  - 一个空行
+
+  - 上��述的“Signed-off-by� 行，也将出现在更改日志中。
+
+  - �包� ``---`` 的标记线。
+
+  - 任何其他�适�放在�更日志的注释。
+
+  - 实际补�（ ``diff`` 输出）。
+
+标题行的格�，使得对标题行按字��排��常的容易 - 很多 e-mail 客户端都
+�以支� - 因为�列�是用零填充的，所以按数字排�和按字�排�是一样的。
+
+e-mail 标题中的“�系统�标识哪个内核�系统将被打补�。
+
+e-mail 标题中的“一��概述�扼�的�述 e-mail 中的补�。“一��概述�
+�应该是一个文件�。对于一个补�系列（“补�系列�指一系列的多个相关补
+�），��对�个补�都使用�样的“一��概述�。
+
+记� e-mail 的“一��概述�会�为该补�的全局唯一标识。它会蔓延到 git
+的改动记录里。然�“一��概述�会被用在开�者的讨论里，用�指代这个补
+�。用户将希望通过 google ��索"一��概述"�找到那些讨论这个补�的文
+章。当人们在两三个月�使用诸如 ``gitk`` 或 ``git log --oneline`` 之类
+的工具查看数�个补�时，也会很快看到它。
+
+出于这些原因，概述必须�超过70-75个字符，并且必须�述补�的更改以�为
+什么需�补�。既�简����述性很有挑战性，但写得好的概述应该这样�。
+
+概述的�缀�以用方括�括起�：“Subject: [PATCH <tag>...] <概述>�。标记
+�被视为概述的一部分，而是�述应该如何处�补�。如果补�的多个版本已�
+�出�以�应评审（�“v1，v2，v3�）或“rfc�，以指示评审请求，那么通用标记
+�能包括版本�述符。如果一个补�系列中有四个补�，那么�个补��以这样
+编�：1/4�2/4�3/4�4/4。这�以确�开�人员了解补�应用的顺�，并且他们
+已�查看或应用了补�系列中的所有补�。
+
+一些标题的例�::
+
+    Subject: [patch 2/5] ext2: improve scalability of bitmap searching
+    Subject: [PATCHv2 001/207] x86: fix eflags tracking
+
+"From" 行是信体里的最上�一行，具有如下格�：
+        From: Patch Author <author@example.com>
+
+"From" 行指明在永久改动日志里，�会被确认为作者。如果没有 "From" 行，那
+么邮件头里的 "From: " 行会被用�决定改动日志中的作者。
+
+说明的主题将会被�交到永久的�代�改动日志里，因此对那些早已��记得和
+这个补�相关的讨论细节的有能力的读者�说，是有�义的。包括补�程�定�
+错误的（内核日志消��OOPS消�等）症状，对于�索�交日志以寻找适用补�的人
+尤其有用。如果一个补�修�了一个编译失败，那么�能�需�包�所有编译失败；
+��足够让�索补�的人能够找到它就行了。与概述一样，既�简����述性。
+
+"---" 标记行对于补�处�工具�找到哪里是改动日志信�的结�，是��缺少
+的。
+
+对于 "---" 标记之�的�外注解，一个好的用途就是用�写 diffstat，用�显
+示修改了什么文件和�个文件都增加和删除了多少行。diffstat 对于比较大的补
+�特别有用。其余那些�是和时刻或者开�者相关的注解，��适放到永久的改
+动日志里的，也应该放这里。
+使用 diffstat的选项 "-p 1 -w 70" 这样文件�就会从内核�代�树的目录开始
+，�会�用太宽的空间（很容易适�80列的宽度，也许会有一些缩进。）
+
+在��的�考资料中能看到适当的补�格�的更多细节。
+
+.. _cn_explicit_in_reply_to:
+
+15) 明确回�邮件头(In-Reply-To)
+-------------------------------
+
+手动添加回�补�的的标题头(In-Reply_To:) 是有帮助的（例如，使用 ``git send-email`` ）
+将补�与以�的相关讨论关�起�，例如，将bug修�程�链接到电�邮件和bug报告。
+但是，对于多补�系列，最好��在回�时使用链接到该系列的旧版本。这样，
+补�的多个版本就�会�为电�邮件客户端中无法管�的引用�列。如果链接有用，
+�以使用 https://lkml.kernel.org/ �定�器（例如，在��电�邮件文本中）
+链接到补�系列的早期版本。
+
+16) ��git pull请求
+--------------------
+
+如果您有一系列补�，那么让维护人员通过git pull�作将它们直接拉入�系统存储
+库�能是最方便的。但是，请注�，从开�人员那里获�补�比从邮件列表中获�补
+�需�更高的信任度。因此，许多�系统维护人员�愿�接�请求，特别是�自新的
+未知开�人员的请求。如果有疑问，您�以在��邮件中使用pull 请求作为补�系列
+正常�布的一个选项，让维护人员�以选择使用其中之一。
+
+pull 请求的主题行中应该有[Git Pull]。请求本身应该在一行中包�存储库�称和
+感兴趣的分支；它应该看起��::
+
+  Please pull from
+
+      git://jdelvare.pck.nerim.net/jdelvare-2.6 i2c-for-linus
+
+  to get these changes:
+
+
+pull 请求还应该包�一�整体消�，说明请求中将包�什么，一个补�本身的 ``Git shortlog``
+以�一个显示补�系列整体效果的 ``diffstat`` 。当然，将所有这些信�收集在一起
+的最简�方法是让 ``git`` 使用 ``git request-pull`` 命令为您完�这些工作。
+
+一些维护人员（包括Linus）希望看到�自已签��交的请求；这增加了他们对你的
+请求信心。特别是，在没有签�标签的情况下，Linus �会从� Github 这样的公共
+托管站点拉请求。
+
+创建此类签�的第一步是生�一个 GNRPG 密钥，并由一个或多个核心内核开�人员对
+其进行签�。这一步对新开�人员�说�能很困难，但没有办法绕过它。�加会议是
+找到�以签署您的密钥的开�人员的好方法。
+
+一旦您在Git 中准备了一个您希望有人拉的补�系列，就用 ``git tag -s`` 创建一
+个签�标记。这将创建一个新标记，标识该系列中的最�一次�交，并包�用您的�
+钥创建的签�。您还�以将changelog样�的消�添加到标记中；这是一个�述拉请求
+整体效果的�想�置。
+
+如果维护人员将�从中��的树�是您正在使用的存储库，请��忘记将已签�的标记
+显�推�到公共树。
+
+生�拉请求时，请使用已签�的标记作为目标。这样的命令�以实现::
+
+  git request-pull master git://my.public.tree/linux.git my-signed-tag
+
+�考文献
+--------
+
+Andrew Morton, "The perfect patch" (tpp).
+  <http://www.ozlabs.org/~akpm/stuff/tpp.txt>
+
+Jeff Garzik, "Linux kernel patch submission format".
+  <http://linux.yyz.us/patch-format.html>
+
+Greg Kroah-Hartman, "How to piss off a kernel subsystem maintainer".
+  <http://www.kroah.com/log/linux/maintainer.html>
+
+  <http://www.kroah.com/log/linux/maintainer-02.html>
+
+  <http://www.kroah.com/log/linux/maintainer-03.html>
+
+  <http://www.kroah.com/log/linux/maintainer-04.html>
+
+  <http://www.kroah.com/log/linux/maintainer-05.html>
+
+  <http://www.kroah.com/log/linux/maintainer-06.html>
+
+NO!!!! No more huge patch bombs to linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org people!
+  <https://lkml.org/lkml/2005/7/11/336>
+
+Kernel Documentation/process/coding-style.rst:
+  :ref:`Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/coding-style.rst <cn_codingstyle>`
+
+Linus Torvalds's mail on the canonical patch format:
+  <http://lkml.org/lkml/2005/4/7/183>
+
+Andi Kleen, "On submitting kernel patches"
+  Some strategies to get difficult or controversial changes in.
+
+  http://halobates.de/on-submitting-patches.pdf
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/volatile-considered-harmful.txt b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/volatile-considered-harmful.rst
index 475125967197..48b32ce58ef1 100644
--- a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/volatile-considered-harmful.txt
+++ b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/volatile-considered-harmful.rst
@@ -1,30 +1,23 @@
-Chinese translated version of Documentation/process/volatile-considered-harmful.rst
+.. _cn_volatile_considered_harmful:
 
-If you have any comment or update to the content, please contact the
-original document maintainer directly.  However, if you have a problem
-communicating in English you can also ask the Chinese maintainer for
-help.  Contact the Chinese maintainer if this translation is outdated
-or if there is a problem with the translation.
+.. include:: ../disclaimer-zh_CN.rst
 
-Maintainer: Jonathan Corbet <corbet@lwn.net>
-Chinese maintainer: Bryan Wu <bryan.wu@analog.com>
----------------------------------------------------------------------
-Documentation/process/volatile-considered-harmful.rst 的中文翻译
+:Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/volatile-considered-harmful.rst
+           <volatile_considered_harmful>`
 
 如果想评论或更新本文的内容，请直接�系原文档的维护者。如果你使用英文
 交�有困难的�，也�以�中文版维护者求助。如果本翻译更新��时或者翻
-译存在问题，请�系中文版维护者。
+译存在问题，请�系中文版维护者::
 
-英文版维护者： Jonathan Corbet <corbet@lwn.net>
-中文版维护者： ��  Bryan Wu <bryan.wu@analog.com>
-中文版翻译者： ��  Bryan Wu <bryan.wu@analog.com>
-中文版校译者： 张汉辉  Eugene Teo <eugeneteo@kernel.sg>
-               �瑞  Dave Young <hidave.darkstar@gmail.com>
-以下为正文
----------------------------------------------------------------------
+        英文版维护者： Jonathan Corbet <corbet@lwn.net>
+        中文版维护者： ��  Bryan Wu <bryan.wu@analog.com>
+        中文版翻译者： ��  Bryan Wu <bryan.wu@analog.com>
+        中文版校译者： 张汉辉  Eugene Teo <eugeneteo@kernel.sg>
+                       �瑞  Dave Young <hidave.darkstar@gmail.com>
+                       时奎亮 Alex Shi <alex.shi@linux.alibaba.com>
 
 为什么�应该使用“volatile�类型
-------------------------------
+==============================
 
 C程�员通常认为volatile表示�个���以在当�执行的线程之外被改�；因此，在内核
 中用到共享数�结构时，常常会有C程�员喜欢使用volatile这类��。���说，他们�
@@ -41,7 +34,7 @@ C程åº�员通常认为volatile表示æŸ�个å�˜é‡�å�¯ä»¥åœ¨å½“å‰�执行的线程ä¹
 必��使用volatile。如果�然必须使用volatile，那么几乎�以肯定在代�的�处有一
 个bug。在正确设计的内核代�中，volatile能带�的仅仅是使事情�慢。
 
-�考一下这段典型的内核代�：
+�考一下这段典型的内核代�::
 
     spin_lock(&the_lock);
     do_something_on(&shared_data);
@@ -66,7 +59,7 @@ volatile的存储类型最�是为那些内存映射的I/O寄存器而定义。
 是必需的。
 
 �一�引起用户�能使用volatile的情况是当处�器正忙�等待一个��的值。正确执行一
-个忙等待的方法是：
+个忙等待的方法是::
 
     while (my_variable != what_i_want)
         cpu_relax();
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/sparse.txt b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/sparse.txt
index 2f728962a8e2..47fc4a06ebe8 100644
--- a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/sparse.txt
+++ b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/sparse.txt
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ communicating in English you can also ask the Chinese maintainer for
 help.  Contact the Chinese maintainer if this translation is outdated
 or if there is a problem with the translation.
 
-Chinese maintainer: Li Yang <leo@zh-kernel.org>
+Chinese maintainer: Li Yang <leoyang.li@nxp.com>
 ---------------------------------------------------------------------
 Documentation/dev-tools/sparse.rst 的中文翻译
 
@@ -14,8 +14,8 @@ Documentation/dev-tools/sparse.rst 的中文翻译
 交�有困难的�，也�以�中文版维护者求助。如果本翻译更新��时或者翻
 译存在问题，请�系中文版维护者。
 
-中文版维护者： �阳  Li Yang <leo@zh-kernel.org>
-中文版翻译者： �阳  Li Yang <leo@zh-kernel.org>
+中文版维护者： �阳  Li Yang <leoyang.li@nxp.com>
+中文版翻译者： �阳  Li Yang <leoyang.li@nxp.com>
 
 
 以下为正文
diff --git a/Documentation/unaligned-memory-access.txt b/Documentation/unaligned-memory-access.txt
index 51b4ff031586..1ee82419d8aa 100644
--- a/Documentation/unaligned-memory-access.txt
+++ b/Documentation/unaligned-memory-access.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 =========================
-UNALIGNED MEMORY ACCESSES
+Unaligned Memory Accesses
 =========================
 
 :Author: Daniel Drake <dsd@gentoo.org>,
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/WUSB-Design-overview.txt b/Documentation/usb/WUSB-Design-overview.txt
index fdb47637720e..dc5e21609bb5 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/WUSB-Design-overview.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/WUSB-Design-overview.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,9 @@
-
+================================
 Linux UWB + Wireless USB + WiNET
+================================
+
+   Copyright (C) 2005-2006 Intel Corporation
 
-   (C) 2005-2006 Intel Corporation
    Inaky Perez-Gonzalez <inaky.perez-gonzalez@intel.com>
 
    This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
@@ -29,6 +31,7 @@ drivers for the USB based UWB radio controllers defined in the
 Wireless USB 1.0 specification (including Wireless USB host controller
 and an Intel WiNET controller).
 
+.. Contents
    1. Introduction
          1. HWA: Host Wire adapters, your Wireless USB dongle
 
@@ -51,7 +54,8 @@ and an Intel WiNET controller).
    4. Glossary
 
 
-    Introduction
+Introduction
+============
 
 UWB is a wide-band communication protocol that is to serve also as the
 low-level protocol for others (much like TCP sits on IP). Currently
@@ -93,7 +97,8 @@ The different logical parts of this driver are:
       do the actual WUSB.
 
 
-      HWA: Host Wire adapters, your Wireless USB dongle
+HWA: Host Wire adapters, your Wireless USB dongle
+-------------------------------------------------
 
 WUSB also defines a device called a Host Wire Adaptor (HWA), which in
 mere terms is a USB dongle that enables your PC to have UWB and Wireless
@@ -125,7 +130,8 @@ The HWA itself is broken in two or three main interfaces:
       their type and kick into gear.
 
 
-      DWA: Device Wired Adaptor, a Wireless USB hub for wired devices
+DWA: Device Wired Adaptor, a Wireless USB hub for wired devices
+---------------------------------------------------------------
 
 These are the complement to HWAs. They are a USB host for connecting
 wired devices, but it is connected to your PC connected via Wireless
@@ -137,7 +143,8 @@ code with the HWA-RC driver; there is a bunch of factorization work that
 has been done to support that in upcoming releases.
 
 
-      WHCI: Wireless Host Controller Interface, the PCI WUSB host adapter
+WHCI: Wireless Host Controller Interface, the PCI WUSB host adapter
+-------------------------------------------------------------------
 
 This is your usual PCI device that implements WHCI. Similar in concept
 to EHCI, it allows your wireless USB devices (including DWAs) to connect
@@ -148,7 +155,8 @@ There is still no driver support for this, but will be in upcoming
 releases.
 
 
-    The UWB stack
+The UWB stack
+=============
 
 The main mission of the UWB stack is to keep a tally of which devices
 are in radio proximity to allow drivers to connect to them. As well, it
@@ -156,7 +164,8 @@ provides an API for controlling the local radio controllers (RCs from
 now on), such as to start/stop beaconing, scan, allocate bandwidth, etc.
 
 
-      Devices and hosts: the basic structure
+Devices and hosts: the basic structure
+--------------------------------------
 
 The main building block here is the UWB device (struct uwb_dev). For
 each device that pops up in radio presence (ie: the UWB host receives a
@@ -187,7 +196,8 @@ the USB connected HWA. Eventually, drivers/whci-rc.c will do the same
 for the PCI connected WHCI controller.
 
 
-      Host Controller life cycle
+Host Controller life cycle
+--------------------------
 
 So let's say we connect a dongle to the system: it is detected and
 firmware uploaded if needed [for Intel's i1480
@@ -209,7 +219,8 @@ When a dongle is disconnected, /drivers/uwb/hwa-rc.c:hwarc_disconnect()/
 takes time of tearing everything down safely (or not...).
 
 
-      On the air: beacons and enumerating the radio neighborhood
+On the air: beacons and enumerating the radio neighborhood
+----------------------------------------------------------
 
 So assuming we have devices and we have agreed for a channel to connect
 on (let's say 9), we put the new RC to beacon:
@@ -235,12 +246,14 @@ are received in some time, the device is considered gone and wiped out
 the beacon cache of dead devices].
 
 
-      Device lists
+Device lists
+------------
 
 All UWB devices are kept in the list of the struct bus_type uwb_bus_type.
 
 
-      Bandwidth allocation
+Bandwidth allocation
+--------------------
 
 The UWB stack maintains a local copy of DRP availability through
 processing of incoming *DRP Availability Change* notifications. This
@@ -260,7 +273,8 @@ completion. [Note: The bandwidth reservation work is in progress and
 subject to change.]
 
 
-    Wireless USB Host Controller drivers
+Wireless USB Host Controller drivers
+====================================
 
 *WARNING* This section needs a lot of work!
 
@@ -296,7 +310,8 @@ starts sending MMCs.
 
 Now it all depends on external stimuli.
 
-*New device connection*
+New device connection
+---------------------
 
 A new device pops up, it scans the radio looking for MMCs that give out
 the existence of Wireless USB channels. Once one (or more) are found,
@@ -322,7 +337,8 @@ has seen the port status changes, as we have been toggling them. It will
 start enumerating and doing transfers through usb_hcd->urb_enqueue() to
 read descriptors and move our data.
 
-*Device life cycle and keep alives*
+Device life cycle and keep alives
+---------------------------------
 
 Every time there is a successful transfer to/from a device, we update a
 per-device activity timestamp. If not, every now and then we check and
@@ -340,7 +356,8 @@ device list looking for whom needs refreshing.
 If the device wants to disconnect, it will either die (ugly) or send a
 /DN_Disconnect/ that will prompt a disconnection from the system.
 
-*Sending and receiving data*
+Sending and receiving data
+--------------------------
 
 Data is sent and received through /Remote Pipes/ (rpipes). An rpipe is
 /aimed/ at an endpoint in a WUSB device. This is the same for HWAs and
@@ -394,7 +411,8 @@ finalize the transfer.
 For IN xfers, we only issue URBs for the segments we want to read and
 then wait for the xfer result data.
 
-*URB mapping into xfers*
+URB mapping into xfers
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
 
 This is done by hwahc_op_urb_[en|de]queue(). In enqueue() we aim an
 rpipe to the endpoint where we have to transmit, create a transfer
@@ -407,7 +425,8 @@ and not yet done and when all that is done, the xfer callback will be
 called--this will call the URB callback.
 
 
-    Glossary
+Glossary
+========
 
 *DWA* -- Device Wire Adapter
 
@@ -436,4 +455,3 @@ the host.
 
 Design-overview.txt-1.8 (last edited 2006-11-04 12:22:24 by
 InakyPerezGonzalez)
-
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/acm.txt b/Documentation/usb/acm.txt
index 903abca10517..e8bda98e9b51 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/acm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/acm.txt
@@ -1,127 +1,131 @@
-			  Linux ACM driver v0.16
-		 (c) 1999 Vojtech Pavlik <vojtech@suse.cz>
-			     Sponsored by SuSE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+======================
+Linux ACM driver v0.16
+======================
+
+Copyright (c) 1999 Vojtech Pavlik <vojtech@suse.cz>
+
+Sponsored by SuSE
 
 0. Disclaimer
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-  This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
+This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
 under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
 Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option)
 any later version.
 
-  This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
+This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
 WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY
 or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU General Public License for
 more details.
 
-  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along
+You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along
 with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59
 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
 
-  Should you need to contact me, the author, you can do so either by e-mail
-- mail your message to <vojtech@suse.cz>, or by paper mail: Vojtech Pavlik,
+Should you need to contact me, the author, you can do so either by e-mail -
+mail your message to <vojtech@suse.cz>, or by paper mail: Vojtech Pavlik,
 Ucitelska 1576, Prague 8, 182 00 Czech Republic
 
-  For your convenience, the GNU General Public License version 2 is included
+For your convenience, the GNU General Public License version 2 is included
 in the package: See the file COPYING.
 
 1. Usage
 ~~~~~~~~
-  The drivers/usb/class/cdc-acm.c drivers works with USB modems and USB ISDN terminal
+The drivers/usb/class/cdc-acm.c drivers works with USB modems and USB ISDN terminal
 adapters that conform to the Universal Serial Bus Communication Device Class
 Abstract Control Model (USB CDC ACM) specification.
 
-  Many modems do, here is a list of those I know of:
+Many modems do, here is a list of those I know of:
 
-	3Com OfficeConnect 56k
-	3Com Voice FaxModem Pro
-	3Com Sportster
-	MultiTech MultiModem 56k
-	Zoom 2986L FaxModem
-	Compaq 56k FaxModem
-	ELSA Microlink 56k
+	- 3Com OfficeConnect 56k
+	- 3Com Voice FaxModem Pro
+	- 3Com Sportster
+	- MultiTech MultiModem 56k
+	- Zoom 2986L FaxModem
+	- Compaq 56k FaxModem
+	- ELSA Microlink 56k
 
-  I know of one ISDN TA that does work with the acm driver:
+I know of one ISDN TA that does work with the acm driver:
 
-	3Com USR ISDN Pro TA
+	- 3Com USR ISDN Pro TA
 
-  Some cell phones also connect via USB. I know the following phones work:
+Some cell phones also connect via USB. I know the following phones work:
 
-	SonyEricsson K800i
+	- SonyEricsson K800i
 
-  Unfortunately many modems and most ISDN TAs use proprietary interfaces and
+Unfortunately many modems and most ISDN TAs use proprietary interfaces and
 thus won't work with this drivers. Check for ACM compliance before buying.
 
-  To use the modems you need these modules loaded:
+To use the modems you need these modules loaded::
 
 	usbcore.ko
 	uhci-hcd.ko ohci-hcd.ko or ehci-hcd.ko
 	cdc-acm.ko
 
-  After that, the modem[s] should be accessible. You should be able to use
+After that, the modem[s] should be accessible. You should be able to use
 minicom, ppp and mgetty with them.
 
 2. Verifying that it works
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-  The first step would be to check /sys/kernel/debug/usb/devices, it should look
-like this:
-
-T:  Bus=01 Lev=00 Prnt=00 Port=00 Cnt=00 Dev#=  1 Spd=12  MxCh= 2
-B:  Alloc=  0/900 us ( 0%), #Int=  0, #Iso=  0
-D:  Ver= 1.00 Cls=09(hub  ) Sub=00 Prot=00 MxPS= 8 #Cfgs=  1
-P:  Vendor=0000 ProdID=0000 Rev= 0.00
-S:  Product=USB UHCI Root Hub
-S:  SerialNumber=6800
-C:* #Ifs= 1 Cfg#= 1 Atr=40 MxPwr=  0mA
-I:  If#= 0 Alt= 0 #EPs= 1 Cls=09(hub  ) Sub=00 Prot=00 Driver=hub
-E:  Ad=81(I) Atr=03(Int.) MxPS=   8 Ivl=255ms
-T:  Bus=01 Lev=01 Prnt=01 Port=01 Cnt=01 Dev#=  2 Spd=12  MxCh= 0
-D:  Ver= 1.00 Cls=02(comm.) Sub=00 Prot=00 MxPS= 8 #Cfgs=  2
-P:  Vendor=04c1 ProdID=008f Rev= 2.07
-S:  Manufacturer=3Com Inc.
-S:  Product=3Com U.S. Robotics Pro ISDN TA
-S:  SerialNumber=UFT53A49BVT7
-C:  #Ifs= 1 Cfg#= 1 Atr=60 MxPwr=  0mA
-I:  If#= 0 Alt= 0 #EPs= 3 Cls=ff(vend.) Sub=ff Prot=ff Driver=acm
-E:  Ad=85(I) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS=  64 Ivl=  0ms
-E:  Ad=04(O) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS=  64 Ivl=  0ms
-E:  Ad=81(I) Atr=03(Int.) MxPS=  16 Ivl=128ms
-C:* #Ifs= 2 Cfg#= 2 Atr=60 MxPwr=  0mA
-I:  If#= 0 Alt= 0 #EPs= 1 Cls=02(comm.) Sub=02 Prot=01 Driver=acm
-E:  Ad=81(I) Atr=03(Int.) MxPS=  16 Ivl=128ms
-I:  If#= 1 Alt= 0 #EPs= 2 Cls=0a(data ) Sub=00 Prot=00 Driver=acm
-E:  Ad=85(I) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS=  64 Ivl=  0ms
-E:  Ad=04(O) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS=  64 Ivl=  0ms
+
+The first step would be to check /sys/kernel/debug/usb/devices, it should look
+like this::
+
+  T:  Bus=01 Lev=00 Prnt=00 Port=00 Cnt=00 Dev#=  1 Spd=12  MxCh= 2
+  B:  Alloc=  0/900 us ( 0%), #Int=  0, #Iso=  0
+  D:  Ver= 1.00 Cls=09(hub  ) Sub=00 Prot=00 MxPS= 8 #Cfgs=  1
+  P:  Vendor=0000 ProdID=0000 Rev= 0.00
+  S:  Product=USB UHCI Root Hub
+  S:  SerialNumber=6800
+  C:* #Ifs= 1 Cfg#= 1 Atr=40 MxPwr=  0mA
+  I:  If#= 0 Alt= 0 #EPs= 1 Cls=09(hub  ) Sub=00 Prot=00 Driver=hub
+  E:  Ad=81(I) Atr=03(Int.) MxPS=   8 Ivl=255ms
+  T:  Bus=01 Lev=01 Prnt=01 Port=01 Cnt=01 Dev#=  2 Spd=12  MxCh= 0
+  D:  Ver= 1.00 Cls=02(comm.) Sub=00 Prot=00 MxPS= 8 #Cfgs=  2
+  P:  Vendor=04c1 ProdID=008f Rev= 2.07
+  S:  Manufacturer=3Com Inc.
+  S:  Product=3Com U.S. Robotics Pro ISDN TA
+  S:  SerialNumber=UFT53A49BVT7
+  C:  #Ifs= 1 Cfg#= 1 Atr=60 MxPwr=  0mA
+  I:  If#= 0 Alt= 0 #EPs= 3 Cls=ff(vend.) Sub=ff Prot=ff Driver=acm
+  E:  Ad=85(I) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS=  64 Ivl=  0ms
+  E:  Ad=04(O) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS=  64 Ivl=  0ms
+  E:  Ad=81(I) Atr=03(Int.) MxPS=  16 Ivl=128ms
+  C:* #Ifs= 2 Cfg#= 2 Atr=60 MxPwr=  0mA
+  I:  If#= 0 Alt= 0 #EPs= 1 Cls=02(comm.) Sub=02 Prot=01 Driver=acm
+  E:  Ad=81(I) Atr=03(Int.) MxPS=  16 Ivl=128ms
+  I:  If#= 1 Alt= 0 #EPs= 2 Cls=0a(data ) Sub=00 Prot=00 Driver=acm
+  E:  Ad=85(I) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS=  64 Ivl=  0ms
+  E:  Ad=04(O) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS=  64 Ivl=  0ms
 
 The presence of these three lines (and the Cls= 'comm' and 'data' classes)
 is important, it means it's an ACM device. The Driver=acm means the acm
 driver is used for the device. If you see only Cls=ff(vend.) then you're out
-of luck, you have a device with vendor specific-interface.
-
-D:  Ver= 1.00 Cls=02(comm.) Sub=00 Prot=00 MxPS= 8 #Cfgs=  2
-I:  If#= 0 Alt= 0 #EPs= 1 Cls=02(comm.) Sub=02 Prot=01 Driver=acm
-I:  If#= 1 Alt= 0 #EPs= 2 Cls=0a(data ) Sub=00 Prot=00 Driver=acm
-
-In the system log you should see:
-
-usb.c: USB new device connect, assigned device number 2
-usb.c: kmalloc IF c7691fa0, numif 1
-usb.c: kmalloc IF c7b5f3e0, numif 2
-usb.c: skipped 4 class/vendor specific interface descriptors
-usb.c: new device strings: Mfr=1, Product=2, SerialNumber=3
-usb.c: USB device number 2 default language ID 0x409
-Manufacturer: 3Com Inc.
-Product: 3Com U.S. Robotics Pro ISDN TA
-SerialNumber: UFT53A49BVT7
-acm.c: probing config 1
-acm.c: probing config 2
-ttyACM0: USB ACM device
-acm.c: acm_control_msg: rq: 0x22 val: 0x0 len: 0x0 result: 0
-acm.c: acm_control_msg: rq: 0x20 val: 0x0 len: 0x7 result: 7
-usb.c: acm driver claimed interface c7b5f3e0
-usb.c: acm driver claimed interface c7b5f3f8
-usb.c: acm driver claimed interface c7691fa0
+of luck, you have a device with vendor specific-interface::
+
+  D:  Ver= 1.00 Cls=02(comm.) Sub=00 Prot=00 MxPS= 8 #Cfgs=  2
+  I:  If#= 0 Alt= 0 #EPs= 1 Cls=02(comm.) Sub=02 Prot=01 Driver=acm
+  I:  If#= 1 Alt= 0 #EPs= 2 Cls=0a(data ) Sub=00 Prot=00 Driver=acm
+
+In the system log you should see::
+
+  usb.c: USB new device connect, assigned device number 2
+  usb.c: kmalloc IF c7691fa0, numif 1
+  usb.c: kmalloc IF c7b5f3e0, numif 2
+  usb.c: skipped 4 class/vendor specific interface descriptors
+  usb.c: new device strings: Mfr=1, Product=2, SerialNumber=3
+  usb.c: USB device number 2 default language ID 0x409
+  Manufacturer: 3Com Inc.
+  Product: 3Com U.S. Robotics Pro ISDN TA
+  SerialNumber: UFT53A49BVT7
+  acm.c: probing config 1
+  acm.c: probing config 2
+  ttyACM0: USB ACM device
+  acm.c: acm_control_msg: rq: 0x22 val: 0x0 len: 0x0 result: 0
+  acm.c: acm_control_msg: rq: 0x20 val: 0x0 len: 0x7 result: 7
+  usb.c: acm driver claimed interface c7b5f3e0
+  usb.c: acm driver claimed interface c7b5f3f8
+  usb.c: acm driver claimed interface c7691fa0
 
 If all this seems to be OK, fire up minicom and set it to talk to the ttyACM
 device and try typing 'at'. If it responds with 'OK', then everything is
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/authorization.txt b/Documentation/usb/authorization.txt
index f901ec77439c..9e53909d04c2 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/authorization.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/authorization.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
-
+==============================================================
 Authorizing (or not) your USB devices to connect to the system
+==============================================================
 
-(C) 2007 Inaky Perez-Gonzalez <inaky@linux.intel.com> Intel Corporation
+Copyright (C) 2007 Inaky Perez-Gonzalez <inaky@linux.intel.com> Intel Corporation
 
 This feature allows you to control if a USB device can be used (or
 not) in a system. This feature will allow you to implement a lock-down
@@ -12,47 +13,50 @@ its interfaces are immediately made available to the users.  With this
 modification, only if root authorizes the device to be configured will
 then it be possible to use it.
 
-Usage:
+Usage
+=====
 
-Authorize a device to connect:
+Authorize a device to connect::
 
-$ echo 1 > /sys/bus/usb/devices/DEVICE/authorized
+	$ echo 1 > /sys/bus/usb/devices/DEVICE/authorized
 
-Deauthorize a device:
+De-authorize a device::
 
-$ echo 0 > /sys/bus/usb/devices/DEVICE/authorized
+	$ echo 0 > /sys/bus/usb/devices/DEVICE/authorized
 
 Set new devices connected to hostX to be deauthorized by default (ie:
-lock down):
+lock down)::
 
-$ echo 0 > /sys/bus/usb/devices/usbX/authorized_default
+	$ echo 0 > /sys/bus/usb/devices/usbX/authorized_default
 
-Remove the lock down:
+Remove the lock down::
 
-$ echo 1 > /sys/bus/usb/devices/usbX/authorized_default
+	$ echo 1 > /sys/bus/usb/devices/usbX/authorized_default
 
 By default, Wired USB devices are authorized by default to
 connect. Wireless USB hosts deauthorize by default all new connected
 devices (this is so because we need to do an authentication phase
-before authorizing).
+before authorizing). Writing "2" to the authorized_default attribute
+causes kernel to only authorize by default devices connected to internal
+USB ports.
 
 
 Example system lockdown (lame)
------------------------
+------------------------------
 
 Imagine you want to implement a lockdown so only devices of type XYZ
 can be connected (for example, it is a kiosk machine with a visible
-USB port):
+USB port)::
 
-boot up
-rc.local ->
+  boot up
+  rc.local ->
 
- for host in /sys/bus/usb/devices/usb*
- do
-    echo 0 > $host/authorized_default
- done
+   for host in /sys/bus/usb/devices/usb*
+   do
+      echo 0 > $host/authorized_default
+   done
 
-Hookup an script to udev, for new USB devices
+Hookup an script to udev, for new USB devices::
 
  if device_is_my_type $DEV
  then
@@ -65,10 +69,10 @@ checking if the class, type and protocol match something is the worse
 security verification you can make (or the best, for someone willing
 to break it). If you need something secure, use crypto and Certificate
 Authentication or stuff like that. Something simple for an storage key
-could be:
+could be::
 
-function device_is_my_type()
-{
+ function device_is_my_type()
+ {
    echo 1 > authorized		# temporarily authorize it
                                 # FIXME: make sure none can mount it
    mount DEVICENODE /mntpoint
@@ -81,7 +85,7 @@ function device_is_my_type()
    else
         echo 0 > authorized
    fi
-}
+ }
 
 
 Of course, this is lame, you'd want to do a real certificate
@@ -93,30 +97,35 @@ welcome.
 
 Interface authorization
 -----------------------
+
 There is a similar approach to allow or deny specific USB interfaces.
 That allows to block only a subset of an USB device.
 
-Authorize an interface:
-$ echo 1 > /sys/bus/usb/devices/INTERFACE/authorized
+Authorize an interface::
 
-Deauthorize an interface:
-$ echo 0 > /sys/bus/usb/devices/INTERFACE/authorized
+	$ echo 1 > /sys/bus/usb/devices/INTERFACE/authorized
+
+Deauthorize an interface::
+
+	$ echo 0 > /sys/bus/usb/devices/INTERFACE/authorized
 
 The default value for new interfaces
 on a particular USB bus can be changed, too.
 
-Allow interfaces per default:
-$ echo 1 > /sys/bus/usb/devices/usbX/interface_authorized_default
+Allow interfaces per default::
+
+	$ echo 1 > /sys/bus/usb/devices/usbX/interface_authorized_default
+
+Deny interfaces per default::
 
-Deny interfaces per default:
-$ echo 0 > /sys/bus/usb/devices/usbX/interface_authorized_default
+	$ echo 0 > /sys/bus/usb/devices/usbX/interface_authorized_default
 
 Per default the interface_authorized_default bit is 1.
 So all interfaces would authorized per default.
 
 Note:
-If a deauthorized interface will be authorized so the driver probing must
-be triggered manually by writing INTERFACE to /sys/bus/usb/drivers_probe
+  If a deauthorized interface will be authorized so the driver probing must
+  be triggered manually by writing INTERFACE to /sys/bus/usb/drivers_probe
 
 For drivers that need multiple interfaces all needed interfaces should be
 authorized first. After that the drivers should be probed.
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/chipidea.txt b/Documentation/usb/chipidea.txt
index d1eedc01b00a..68473abe2823 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/chipidea.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/chipidea.txt
@@ -1,22 +1,37 @@
+==============================================
+ChipIdea Highspeed Dual Role Controller Driver
+==============================================
+
 1. How to test OTG FSM(HNP and SRP)
 -----------------------------------
+
 To show how to demo OTG HNP and SRP functions via sys input files
 with 2 Freescale i.MX6Q sabre SD boards.
 
 1.1 How to enable OTG FSM
----------------------------------------
+-------------------------
+
 1.1.1 Select CONFIG_USB_OTG_FSM in menuconfig, rebuild kernel
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
 Image and modules. If you want to check some internal
 variables for otg fsm, mount debugfs, there are 2 files
-which can show otg fsm variables and some controller registers value:
-cat /sys/kernel/debug/ci_hdrc.0/otg
-cat /sys/kernel/debug/ci_hdrc.0/registers
+which can show otg fsm variables and some controller registers value::
+
+	cat /sys/kernel/debug/ci_hdrc.0/otg
+	cat /sys/kernel/debug/ci_hdrc.0/registers
+
 1.1.2 Add below entries in your dts file for your controller node
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+::
+
 	otg-rev = <0x0200>;
 	adp-disable;
 
 1.2 Test operations
 -------------------
+
 1) Power up 2 Freescale i.MX6Q sabre SD boards with gadget class driver loaded
    (e.g. g_mass_storage).
 
@@ -26,19 +41,24 @@ cat /sys/kernel/debug/ci_hdrc.0/registers
    The A-device(with micro A plug inserted) should enumerate B-device.
 
 3) Role switch
-   On B-device:
-   echo 1 > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/b_bus_req
+
+   On B-device::
+
+	echo 1 > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/b_bus_req
 
    B-device should take host role and enumerate A-device.
 
 4) A-device switch back to host.
-   On B-device:
-   echo 0 > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/b_bus_req
+
+   On B-device::
+
+	echo 0 > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/b_bus_req
 
    or, by introducing HNP polling, B-Host can know when A-peripheral wish
    to be host role, so this role switch also can be trigged in A-peripheral
-   side by answering the polling from B-Host, this can be done on A-device:
-   echo 1 > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/a_bus_req
+   side by answering the polling from B-Host, this can be done on A-device::
+
+	echo 1 > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/a_bus_req
 
    A-device should switch back to host and enumerate B-device.
 
@@ -49,23 +69,31 @@ cat /sys/kernel/debug/ci_hdrc.0/registers
    A-device should NOT enumerate B-device.
 
    if A-device wants to use bus:
-   On A-device:
-   echo 0 > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/a_bus_drop
-   echo 1 > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/a_bus_req
+
+   On A-device::
+
+	echo 0 > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/a_bus_drop
+	echo 1 > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/a_bus_req
 
    if B-device wants to use bus:
-   On B-device:
-   echo 1 > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/b_bus_req
+
+   On B-device::
+
+	echo 1 > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/b_bus_req
 
 7) A-device power down the bus.
-   On A-device:
-   echo 1 > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/a_bus_drop
+
+   On A-device::
+
+	echo 1 > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/a_bus_drop
 
    A-device should disconnect with B-device and power down the bus.
 
 8) B-device does data pulse for SRP.
-   On B-device:
-   echo 1 > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/b_bus_req
+
+   On B-device::
+
+	echo 1 > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/b_bus_req
 
    A-device should resume usb bus and enumerate B-device.
 
@@ -75,22 +103,31 @@ cat /sys/kernel/debug/ci_hdrc.0/registers
 July 27, 2012 Revision 2.0 version 1.1a"
 
 2. How to enable USB as system wakeup source
------------------------------------
+--------------------------------------------
 Below is the example for how to enable USB as system wakeup source
 at imx6 platform.
 
-2.1 Enable core's wakeup
-echo enabled > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/power/wakeup
-2.2 Enable glue layer's wakeup
-echo enabled > /sys/bus/platform/devices/2184000.usb/power/wakeup
-2.3 Enable PHY's wakeup (optional)
-echo enabled > /sys/bus/platform/devices/20c9000.usbphy/power/wakeup
-2.4 Enable roothub's wakeup
-echo enabled > /sys/bus/usb/devices/usb1/power/wakeup
-2.5 Enable related device's wakeup
-echo enabled > /sys/bus/usb/devices/1-1/power/wakeup
+2.1 Enable core's wakeup::
+
+	echo enabled > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/power/wakeup
+
+2.2 Enable glue layer's wakeup::
+
+	echo enabled > /sys/bus/platform/devices/2184000.usb/power/wakeup
+
+2.3 Enable PHY's wakeup (optional)::
+
+	echo enabled > /sys/bus/platform/devices/20c9000.usbphy/power/wakeup
+
+2.4 Enable roothub's wakeup::
+
+	echo enabled > /sys/bus/usb/devices/usb1/power/wakeup
+
+2.5 Enable related device's wakeup::
+
+	echo enabled > /sys/bus/usb/devices/1-1/power/wakeup
 
 If the system has only one usb port, and you want usb wakeup at this port, you
-can use below script to enable usb wakeup.
-for i in $(find /sys -name wakeup | grep usb);do echo enabled > $i;done;
+can use below script to enable usb wakeup::
 
+	for i in $(find /sys -name wakeup | grep usb);do echo enabled > $i;done;
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/dwc3.txt b/Documentation/usb/dwc3.txt
index 1d02c01d1c7c..f94a7ba16573 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/dwc3.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/dwc3.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,11 @@
+===========
+DWC3 driver
+===========
+
+
+TODO
+~~~~
 
- TODO
-~~~~~~
 Please pick something while reading :)
 
 - Convert interrupt handler to per-ep-thread-irq
@@ -9,6 +14,7 @@ Please pick something while reading :)
   until the command completes which is bad.
 
   Implementation idea:
+
   - dwc core implements a demultiplexing irq chip for interrupts per
     endpoint. The interrupt numbers are allocated during probe and belong
     to the device. If MSI provides per-endpoint interrupt this dummy
@@ -19,6 +25,7 @@ Please pick something while reading :)
   - dwc3_send_gadget_ep_cmd() will sleep in wait_for_completion_timeout()
     until the command completes.
   - the interrupt handler is split into the following pieces:
+
     - primary handler of the device
       goes through every event and calls generic_handle_irq() for event
       it. On return from generic_handle_irq() in acknowledges the event
@@ -40,6 +47,7 @@ Please pick something while reading :)
       for command completion.
 
   Latency:
+
    There should be no increase in latency since the interrupt-thread has a
    high priority and will be run before an average task in user land
    (except the user changed priorities).
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/ehci.txt b/Documentation/usb/ehci.txt
index 160bd6c3ab7b..31f650e7c1b4 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/ehci.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/ehci.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+===========
+EHCI driver
+===========
+
 27-Dec-2002
 
 The EHCI driver is used to talk to high speed USB 2.0 devices using
@@ -40,7 +44,8 @@ APIs exposed to USB device drivers.
   <dbrownell@users.sourceforge.net>
 
 
-FUNCTIONALITY
+Functionality
+=============
 
 This driver is regularly tested on x86 hardware, and has also been
 used on PPC hardware so big/little endianness issues should be gone.
@@ -48,6 +53,7 @@ It's believed to do all the right PCI magic so that I/O works even on
 systems with interesting DMA mapping issues.
 
 Transfer Types
+--------------
 
 At this writing the driver should comfortably handle all control, bulk,
 and interrupt transfers, including requests to USB 1.1 devices through
@@ -63,6 +69,7 @@ since EHCI represents these with a different data structure.  So for now,
 most USB audio and video devices can't be connected to high speed buses.
 
 Driver Behavior
+---------------
 
 Transfers of all types can be queued.  This means that control transfers
 from a driver on one interface (or through usbfs) won't interfere with
@@ -83,14 +90,15 @@ limits on the number of periodic transactions that can be scheduled,
 and prevent use of polling intervals of less than one frame.
 
 
-USE BY
+Use by
+======
 
 Assuming you have an EHCI controller (on a PCI card or motherboard)
-and have compiled this driver as a module, load this like:
+and have compiled this driver as a module, load this like::
 
     # modprobe ehci-hcd
 
-and remove it by:
+and remove it by::
 
     # rmmod ehci-hcd
 
@@ -112,13 +120,16 @@ If you're using this driver on a 2.5 kernel, and you've enabled USB
 debugging support, you'll see three files in the "sysfs" directory for
 any EHCI controller:
 
-	"async" dumps the asynchronous schedule, used for control
+	"async"
+		dumps the asynchronous schedule, used for control
 		and bulk transfers.  Shows each active qh and the qtds
 		pending, usually one qtd per urb.  (Look at it with
 		usb-storage doing disk I/O; watch the request queues!)
-	"periodic" dumps the periodic schedule, used for interrupt
+	"periodic"
+		dumps the periodic schedule, used for interrupt
 		and isochronous transfers.  Doesn't show qtds.
-	"registers" show controller register state, and
+	"registers"
+		show controller register state, and
 
 The contents of those files can help identify driver problems.
 
@@ -136,7 +147,8 @@ transaction translators are in use; some drivers have been seen to behave
 badly when they see different faults than OHCI or UHCI report.
 
 
-PERFORMANCE
+Performance
+===========
 
 USB 2.0 throughput is gated by two main factors:  how fast the host
 controller can process requests, and how fast devices can respond to
@@ -156,6 +168,7 @@ hardware and device driver software allow it.  Periodic transfer modes
 approach the quoted 480 MBit/sec transfer rate.
 
 Hardware Performance
+--------------------
 
 At this writing, individual USB 2.0 devices tend to max out at around
 20 MByte/sec transfer rates.  This is of course subject to change;
@@ -183,6 +196,7 @@ you issue a control or bulk request you can often expect to learn that
 it completed in less than 250 usec (depending on transfer size).
 
 Software Performance
+--------------------
 
 To get even 20 MByte/sec transfer rates, Linux-USB device drivers will
 need to keep the EHCI queue full.  That means issuing large requests,
@@ -206,9 +220,11 @@ mapping (which might apply an IOMMU) and IRQ reduction, all of which will
 help make high speed transfers run as fast as they can.
 
 
-TBD:  Interrupt and ISO transfer performance issues.  Those periodic
-transfers are fully scheduled, so the main issue is likely to be how
-to trigger "high bandwidth" modes.
+TBD:
+   Interrupt and ISO transfer performance issues.  Those periodic
+   transfers are fully scheduled, so the main issue is likely to be how
+   to trigger "high bandwidth" modes.
 
-TBD:  More than standard 80% periodic bandwidth allocation is possible
-through sysfs uframe_periodic_max parameter. Describe that.
+TBD:
+   More than standard 80% periodic bandwidth allocation is possible
+   through sysfs uframe_periodic_max parameter. Describe that.
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/functionfs.txt b/Documentation/usb/functionfs.txt
index eaaaea019fc7..7fdc6d840ac5 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/functionfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/functionfs.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,6 @@
-*How FunctionFS works*
+====================
+How FunctionFS works
+====================
 
 From kernel point of view it is just a composite function with some
 unique behaviour.  It may be added to an USB configuration only after
@@ -38,13 +40,13 @@ when mounting.
 
 One can imagine a gadget that has an Ethernet, MTP and HID interfaces
 where the last two are implemented via FunctionFS.  On user space
-level it would look like this:
+level it would look like this::
 
-$ insmod g_ffs.ko idVendor=<ID> iSerialNumber=<string> functions=mtp,hid
-$ mkdir /dev/ffs-mtp && mount -t functionfs mtp /dev/ffs-mtp
-$ ( cd /dev/ffs-mtp && mtp-daemon ) &
-$ mkdir /dev/ffs-hid && mount -t functionfs hid /dev/ffs-hid
-$ ( cd /dev/ffs-hid && hid-daemon ) &
+  $ insmod g_ffs.ko idVendor=<ID> iSerialNumber=<string> functions=mtp,hid
+  $ mkdir /dev/ffs-mtp && mount -t functionfs mtp /dev/ffs-mtp
+  $ ( cd /dev/ffs-mtp && mtp-daemon ) &
+  $ mkdir /dev/ffs-hid && mount -t functionfs hid /dev/ffs-hid
+  $ ( cd /dev/ffs-hid && hid-daemon ) &
 
 On kernel level the gadget checks ffs_data->dev_name to identify
 whether it's FunctionFS designed for MTP ("mtp") or HID ("hid").
@@ -64,4 +66,3 @@ have been written to their ep0's.
 
 Conversely, the gadget is unregistered after the first USB function
 closes its endpoints.
-
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/gadget-testing.txt b/Documentation/usb/gadget-testing.txt
index 5908a21fddb6..7d7f2340af42 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/gadget-testing.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/gadget-testing.txt
@@ -1,26 +1,32 @@
+==============
+Gadget Testing
+==============
+
 This file summarizes information on basic testing of USB functions
 provided by gadgets.
 
-1. ACM function
-2. ECM function
-3. ECM subset function
-4. EEM function
-5. FFS function
-6. HID function
-7. LOOPBACK function
-8. MASS STORAGE function
-9. MIDI function
-10. NCM function
-11. OBEX function
-12. PHONET function
-13. RNDIS function
-14. SERIAL function
-15. SOURCESINK function
-16. UAC1 function (legacy implementation)
-17. UAC2 function
-18. UVC function
-19. PRINTER function
-20. UAC1 function (new API)
+.. contents
+
+   1. ACM function
+   2. ECM function
+   3. ECM subset function
+   4. EEM function
+   5. FFS function
+   6. HID function
+   7. LOOPBACK function
+   8. MASS STORAGE function
+   9. MIDI function
+   10. NCM function
+   11. OBEX function
+   12. PHONET function
+   13. RNDIS function
+   14. SERIAL function
+   15. SOURCESINK function
+   16. UAC1 function (legacy implementation)
+   17. UAC2 function
+   18. UVC function
+   19. PRINTER function
+   20. UAC1 function (new API)
 
 
 1. ACM function
@@ -44,13 +50,23 @@ There can be at most 4 ACM/generic serial/OBEX ports in the system.
 Testing the ACM function
 ------------------------
 
-On the host: cat > /dev/ttyACM<X>
-On the device : cat /dev/ttyGS<Y>
+On the host::
+
+	cat > /dev/ttyACM<X>
+
+On the device::
+
+	cat /dev/ttyGS<Y>
 
 then the other way round
 
-On the device: cat > /dev/ttyGS<Y>
-On the host: cat /dev/ttyACM<X>
+On the device::
+
+	cat > /dev/ttyGS<Y>
+
+On the host::
+
+	cat /dev/ttyACM<X>
 
 2. ECM function
 ===============
@@ -63,13 +79,15 @@ Function-specific configfs interface
 The function name to use when creating the function directory is "ecm".
 The ECM function provides these attributes in its function directory:
 
-	ifname		- network device interface name associated with this
+	=============== ==================================================
+	ifname		network device interface name associated with this
 			function instance
-	qmult		- queue length multiplier for high and super speed
-	host_addr	- MAC address of host's end of this
+	qmult		queue length multiplier for high and super speed
+	host_addr	MAC address of host's end of this
 			Ethernet over USB link
-	dev_addr	- MAC address of device's end of this
+	dev_addr	MAC address of device's end of this
 			Ethernet over USB link
+	=============== ==================================================
 
 and after creating the functions/ecm.<instance name> they contain default
 values: qmult is 5, dev_addr and host_addr are randomly selected.
@@ -82,8 +100,13 @@ Testing the ECM function
 
 Configure IP addresses of the device and the host. Then:
 
-On the device: ping <host's IP>
-On the host: ping <device's IP>
+On the device::
+
+	ping <host's IP>
+
+On the host::
+
+	ping <device's IP>
 
 3. ECM subset function
 ======================
@@ -96,13 +119,15 @@ Function-specific configfs interface
 The function name to use when creating the function directory is "geth".
 The ECM subset function provides these attributes in its function directory:
 
-	ifname		- network device interface name associated with this
+	=============== ==================================================
+	ifname		network device interface name associated with this
 			function instance
-	qmult		- queue length multiplier for high and super speed
-	host_addr	- MAC address of host's end of this
+	qmult		queue length multiplier for high and super speed
+	host_addr	MAC address of host's end of this
 			Ethernet over USB link
-	dev_addr	- MAC address of device's end of this
+	dev_addr	MAC address of device's end of this
 			Ethernet over USB link
+	=============== ==================================================
 
 and after creating the functions/ecm.<instance name> they contain default
 values: qmult is 5, dev_addr and host_addr are randomly selected.
@@ -115,8 +140,13 @@ Testing the ECM subset function
 
 Configure IP addresses of the device and the host. Then:
 
-On the device: ping <host's IP>
-On the host: ping <device's IP>
+On the device::
+
+	ping <host's IP>
+
+On the host::
+
+	ping <device's IP>
 
 4. EEM function
 ===============
@@ -129,13 +159,15 @@ Function-specific configfs interface
 The function name to use when creating the function directory is "eem".
 The EEM function provides these attributes in its function directory:
 
-	ifname		- network device interface name associated with this
+	=============== ==================================================
+	ifname		network device interface name associated with this
 			function instance
-	qmult		- queue length multiplier for high and super speed
-	host_addr	- MAC address of host's end of this
+	qmult		queue length multiplier for high and super speed
+	host_addr	MAC address of host's end of this
 			Ethernet over USB link
-	dev_addr	- MAC address of device's end of this
+	dev_addr	MAC address of device's end of this
 			Ethernet over USB link
+	=============== ==================================================
 
 and after creating the functions/eem.<instance name> they contain default
 values: qmult is 5, dev_addr and host_addr are randomly selected.
@@ -148,8 +180,13 @@ Testing the EEM function
 
 Configure IP addresses of the device and the host. Then:
 
-On the device: ping <host's IP>
-On the host: ping <device's IP>
+On the device::
+
+	ping <host's IP>
+
+On the host::
+
+	ping <device's IP>
 
 5. FFS function
 ===============
@@ -172,6 +209,7 @@ Testing the FFS function
 ------------------------
 
 On the device: start the function's userspace daemon, enable the gadget
+
 On the host: use the USB function provided by the device
 
 6. HID function
@@ -185,39 +223,43 @@ Function-specific configfs interface
 The function name to use when creating the function directory is "hid".
 The HID function provides these attributes in its function directory:
 
-	protocol	- HID protocol to use
-	report_desc	- data to be used in HID reports, except data
+	=============== ===========================================
+	protocol	HID protocol to use
+	report_desc	data to be used in HID reports, except data
 			passed with /dev/hidg<X>
-	report_length	- HID report length
-	subclass	- HID subclass to use
+	report_length	HID report length
+	subclass	HID subclass to use
+	=============== ===========================================
 
 For a keyboard the protocol and the subclass are 1, the report_length is 8,
-while the report_desc is:
+while the report_desc is::
 
-$ hd my_report_desc
-00000000  05 01 09 06 a1 01 05 07  19 e0 29 e7 15 00 25 01  |..........)...%.|
-00000010  75 01 95 08 81 02 95 01  75 08 81 03 95 05 75 01  |u.......u.....u.|
-00000020  05 08 19 01 29 05 91 02  95 01 75 03 91 03 95 06  |....).....u.....|
-00000030  75 08 15 00 25 65 05 07  19 00 29 65 81 00 c0     |u...%e....)e...|
-0000003f
+  $ hd my_report_desc
+  00000000  05 01 09 06 a1 01 05 07  19 e0 29 e7 15 00 25 01  |..........)...%.|
+  00000010  75 01 95 08 81 02 95 01  75 08 81 03 95 05 75 01  |u.......u.....u.|
+  00000020  05 08 19 01 29 05 91 02  95 01 75 03 91 03 95 06  |....).....u.....|
+  00000030  75 08 15 00 25 65 05 07  19 00 29 65 81 00 c0     |u...%e....)e...|
+  0000003f
 
-Such a sequence of bytes can be stored to the attribute with echo:
+Such a sequence of bytes can be stored to the attribute with echo::
 
-$ echo -ne \\x05\\x01\\x09\\x06\\xa1.....
+  $ echo -ne \\x05\\x01\\x09\\x06\\xa1.....
 
 Testing the HID function
 ------------------------
 
 Device:
+
 - create the gadget
 - connect the gadget to a host, preferably not the one used
-to control the gadget
+  to control the gadget
 - run a program which writes to /dev/hidg<N>, e.g.
-a userspace program found in Documentation/usb/gadget_hid.txt:
+  a userspace program found in Documentation/usb/gadget_hid.txt::
 
-$ ./hid_gadget_test /dev/hidg0 keyboard
+	$ ./hid_gadget_test /dev/hidg0 keyboard
 
 Host:
+
 - observe the keystrokes from the gadget
 
 7. LOOPBACK function
@@ -231,13 +273,16 @@ Function-specific configfs interface
 The function name to use when creating the function directory is "Loopback".
 The LOOPBACK function provides these attributes in its function directory:
 
-	qlen		- depth of loopback queue
-	bulk_buflen	- buffer length
+	=============== =======================
+	qlen		depth of loopback queue
+	bulk_buflen	buffer length
+	=============== =======================
 
 Testing the LOOPBACK function
 -----------------------------
 
 device: run the gadget
+
 host: test-usb (tools/usb/testusb.c)
 
 8. MASS STORAGE function
@@ -252,18 +297,20 @@ The function name to use when creating the function directory is "mass_storage".
 The MASS STORAGE function provides these attributes in its directory:
 files:
 
-	stall		- Set to permit function to halt bulk endpoints.
+	=============== ==============================================
+	stall		Set to permit function to halt bulk endpoints.
 			Disabled on some USB devices known not to work
 			correctly. You should set it to true.
-	num_buffers	- Number of pipeline buffers. Valid numbers
+	num_buffers	Number of pipeline buffers. Valid numbers
 			are 2..4. Available only if
 			CONFIG_USB_GADGET_DEBUG_FILES is set.
+	=============== ==============================================
 
 and a default lun.0 directory corresponding to SCSI LUN #0.
 
-A new lun can be added with mkdir:
+A new lun can be added with mkdir::
 
-$ mkdir functions/mass_storage.0/partition.5
+	$ mkdir functions/mass_storage.0/partition.5
 
 Lun numbering does not have to be continuous, except for lun #0 which is
 created by default. A maximum of 8 luns can be specified and they all must be
@@ -273,18 +320,20 @@ although it is not mandatory.
 
 In each lun directory there are the following attribute files:
 
-	file		- The path to the backing file for the LUN.
+	=============== ==============================================
+	file		The path to the backing file for the LUN.
 			Required if LUN is not marked as removable.
-	ro		- Flag specifying access to the LUN shall be
+	ro		Flag specifying access to the LUN shall be
 			read-only. This is implied if CD-ROM emulation
 			is enabled as well as when it was impossible
 			to open "filename" in R/W mode.
-	removable	- Flag specifying that LUN shall be indicated as
+	removable	Flag specifying that LUN shall be indicated as
 			being removable.
-	cdrom		- Flag specifying that LUN shall be reported as
+	cdrom		Flag specifying that LUN shall be reported as
 			being a CD-ROM.
-	nofua		- Flag specifying that FUA flag
+	nofua		Flag specifying that FUA flag
 			in SCSI WRITE(10,12)
+	=============== ==============================================
 
 Testing the MASS STORAGE function
 ---------------------------------
@@ -304,12 +353,14 @@ Function-specific configfs interface
 The function name to use when creating the function directory is "midi".
 The MIDI function provides these attributes in its function directory:
 
-	buflen		- MIDI buffer length
-	id		- ID string for the USB MIDI adapter
-	in_ports	- number of MIDI input ports
-	index		- index value for the USB MIDI adapter
-	out_ports	- number of MIDI output ports
-	qlen		- USB read request queue length
+	=============== ====================================
+	buflen		MIDI buffer length
+	id		ID string for the USB MIDI adapter
+	in_ports	number of MIDI input ports
+	index		index value for the USB MIDI adapter
+	out_ports	number of MIDI output ports
+	qlen		USB read request queue length
+	=============== ====================================
 
 Testing the MIDI function
 -------------------------
@@ -317,60 +368,63 @@ Testing the MIDI function
 There are two cases: playing a mid from the gadget to
 the host and playing a mid from the host to the gadget.
 
-1) Playing a mid from the gadget to the host
-host)
+1) Playing a mid from the gadget to the host:
+
+host::
 
-$ arecordmidi -l
- Port    Client name                      Port name
- 14:0    Midi Through                     Midi Through Port-0
- 24:0    MIDI Gadget                      MIDI Gadget MIDI 1
-$ arecordmidi -p 24:0 from_gadget.mid
+  $ arecordmidi -l
+   Port    Client name                      Port name
+   14:0    Midi Through                     Midi Through Port-0
+   24:0    MIDI Gadget                      MIDI Gadget MIDI 1
+  $ arecordmidi -p 24:0 from_gadget.mid
 
-gadget)
+gadget::
 
-$ aplaymidi -l
- Port    Client name                      Port name
- 20:0    f_midi                           f_midi
+  $ aplaymidi -l
+   Port    Client name                      Port name
+   20:0    f_midi                           f_midi
 
-$ aplaymidi -p 20:0 to_host.mid
+  $ aplaymidi -p 20:0 to_host.mid
 
 2) Playing a mid from the host to the gadget
-gadget)
 
-$ arecordmidi -l
- Port    Client name                      Port name
- 20:0    f_midi                           f_midi
+gadget::
+
+  $ arecordmidi -l
+   Port    Client name                      Port name
+   20:0    f_midi                           f_midi
 
-$ arecordmidi -p 20:0 from_host.mid
+  $ arecordmidi -p 20:0 from_host.mid
 
-host)
+host::
 
-$ aplaymidi -l
- Port    Client name                      Port name
- 14:0    Midi Through                     Midi Through Port-0
- 24:0    MIDI Gadget                      MIDI Gadget MIDI 1
+  $ aplaymidi -l
+   Port    Client name                      Port name
+   14:0    Midi Through                     Midi Through Port-0
+   24:0    MIDI Gadget                      MIDI Gadget MIDI 1
 
-$ aplaymidi -p24:0 to_gadget.mid
+  $ aplaymidi -p24:0 to_gadget.mid
 
 The from_gadget.mid should sound identical to the to_host.mid.
+
 The from_host.id should sound identical to the to_gadget.mid.
 
-MIDI files can be played to speakers/headphones with e.g. timidity installed
+MIDI files can be played to speakers/headphones with e.g. timidity installed::
 
-$ aplaymidi -l
- Port    Client name                      Port name
- 14:0    Midi Through                     Midi Through Port-0
- 24:0    MIDI Gadget                      MIDI Gadget MIDI 1
-128:0    TiMidity                         TiMidity port 0
-128:1    TiMidity                         TiMidity port 1
-128:2    TiMidity                         TiMidity port 2
-128:3    TiMidity                         TiMidity port 3
+  $ aplaymidi -l
+   Port    Client name                      Port name
+   14:0    Midi Through                     Midi Through Port-0
+   24:0    MIDI Gadget                      MIDI Gadget MIDI 1
+  128:0    TiMidity                         TiMidity port 0
+  128:1    TiMidity                         TiMidity port 1
+  128:2    TiMidity                         TiMidity port 2
+  128:3    TiMidity                         TiMidity port 3
 
-$ aplaymidi -p 128:0 file.mid
+  $ aplaymidi -p 128:0 file.mid
 
-MIDI ports can be logically connected using the aconnect utility, e.g.:
+MIDI ports can be logically connected using the aconnect utility, e.g.::
 
-$ aconnect 24:0 128:0 # try it on the host
+  $ aconnect 24:0 128:0 # try it on the host
 
 After the gadget's MIDI port is connected to timidity's MIDI port,
 whatever is played at the gadget side with aplaymidi -l is audible
@@ -387,13 +441,15 @@ Function-specific configfs interface
 The function name to use when creating the function directory is "ncm".
 The NCM function provides these attributes in its function directory:
 
-	ifname		- network device interface name associated with this
+	=============== ==================================================
+	ifname		network device interface name associated with this
 			function instance
-	qmult		- queue length multiplier for high and super speed
-	host_addr	- MAC address of host's end of this
+	qmult		queue length multiplier for high and super speed
+	host_addr	MAC address of host's end of this
 			Ethernet over USB link
-	dev_addr	- MAC address of device's end of this
+	dev_addr	MAC address of device's end of this
 			Ethernet over USB link
+	=============== ==================================================
 
 and after creating the functions/ncm.<instance name> they contain default
 values: qmult is 5, dev_addr and host_addr are randomly selected.
@@ -406,8 +462,13 @@ Testing the NCM function
 
 Configure IP addresses of the device and the host. Then:
 
-On the device: ping <host's IP>
-On the host: ping <device's IP>
+On the device::
+
+	ping <host's IP>
+
+On the host::
+
+	ping <device's IP>
 
 11. OBEX function
 =================
@@ -429,13 +490,18 @@ There can be at most 4 ACM/generic serial/OBEX ports in the system.
 Testing the OBEX function
 -------------------------
 
-On device: seriald -f /dev/ttyGS<Y> -s 1024
-On host: serialc -v <vendorID> -p <productID> -i<interface#> -a1 -s1024 \
-             -t<out endpoint addr> -r<in endpoint addr>
+On device::
+
+	seriald -f /dev/ttyGS<Y> -s 1024
+
+On host::
+
+	serialc -v <vendorID> -p <productID> -i<interface#> -a1 -s1024 \
+                -t<out endpoint addr> -r<in endpoint addr>
 
 where seriald and serialc are Felipe's utilities found here:
 
-https://github.com/felipebalbi/usb-tools.git master
+	https://github.com/felipebalbi/usb-tools.git master
 
 12. PHONET function
 ===================
@@ -448,8 +514,10 @@ Function-specific configfs interface
 The function name to use when creating the function directory is "phonet".
 The PHONET function provides just one attribute in its function directory:
 
-	ifname		- network device interface name associated with this
+	=============== ==================================================
+	ifname		network device interface name associated with this
 			function instance
+	=============== ==================================================
 
 Testing the PHONET function
 ---------------------------
@@ -464,41 +532,41 @@ These tools are required:
 
 git://git.gitorious.org/meego-cellular/phonet-utils.git
 
-On the host:
+On the host::
 
-$ ./phonet -a 0x10 -i usbpn0
-$ ./pnroute add 0x6c usbpn0
-$./pnroute add 0x10 usbpn0
-$ ifconfig usbpn0 up
+	$ ./phonet -a 0x10 -i usbpn0
+	$ ./pnroute add 0x6c usbpn0
+	$./pnroute add 0x10 usbpn0
+	$ ifconfig usbpn0 up
 
-On the device:
+On the device::
 
-$ ./phonet -a 0x6c -i upnlink0
-$ ./pnroute add 0x10 upnlink0
-$ ifconfig upnlink0 up
+	$ ./phonet -a 0x6c -i upnlink0
+	$ ./pnroute add 0x10 upnlink0
+	$ ifconfig upnlink0 up
 
-Then a test program can be used:
+Then a test program can be used::
 
-http://www.spinics.net/lists/linux-usb/msg85690.html
+	http://www.spinics.net/lists/linux-usb/msg85690.html
 
-On the device:
+On the device::
 
-$ ./pnxmit -a 0x6c -r
+	$ ./pnxmit -a 0x6c -r
 
-On the host:
+On the host::
 
-$ ./pnxmit -a 0x10 -s 0x6c
+	$ ./pnxmit -a 0x10 -s 0x6c
 
 As a result some data should be sent from host to device.
 Then the other way round:
 
-On the host:
+On the host::
 
-$ ./pnxmit -a 0x10 -r
+	$ ./pnxmit -a 0x10 -r
 
-On the device:
+On the device::
 
-$ ./pnxmit -a 0x6c -s 0x10
+	$ ./pnxmit -a 0x6c -s 0x10
 
 13. RNDIS function
 ==================
@@ -511,13 +579,15 @@ Function-specific configfs interface
 The function name to use when creating the function directory is "rndis".
 The RNDIS function provides these attributes in its function directory:
 
-	ifname		- network device interface name associated with this
+	=============== ==================================================
+	ifname		network device interface name associated with this
 			function instance
-	qmult		- queue length multiplier for high and super speed
-	host_addr	- MAC address of host's end of this
+	qmult		queue length multiplier for high and super speed
+	host_addr	MAC address of host's end of this
 			Ethernet over USB link
-	dev_addr	- MAC address of device's end of this
+	dev_addr	MAC address of device's end of this
 			Ethernet over USB link
+	=============== ==================================================
 
 and after creating the functions/rndis.<instance name> they contain default
 values: qmult is 5, dev_addr and host_addr are randomly selected.
@@ -530,8 +600,13 @@ Testing the RNDIS function
 
 Configure IP addresses of the device and the host. Then:
 
-On the device: ping <host's IP>
-On the host: ping <device's IP>
+On the device::
+
+	ping <host's IP>
+
+On the host::
+
+	ping <device's IP>
 
 14. SERIAL function
 ===================
@@ -553,15 +628,28 @@ There can be at most 4 ACM/generic serial/OBEX ports in the system.
 Testing the SERIAL function
 ---------------------------
 
-On host: insmod usbserial
-	 echo VID PID >/sys/bus/usb-serial/drivers/generic/new_id
-On host: cat > /dev/ttyUSB<X>
-On target: cat /dev/ttyGS<Y>
+On host::
+
+	insmod usbserial
+	echo VID PID >/sys/bus/usb-serial/drivers/generic/new_id
+
+On host::
+
+	cat > /dev/ttyUSB<X>
+
+On target::
+
+	cat /dev/ttyGS<Y>
 
 then the other way round
 
-On target: cat > /dev/ttyGS<Y>
-On host: cat /dev/ttyUSB<X>
+On target::
+
+	cat > /dev/ttyGS<Y>
+
+On host::
+
+	cat /dev/ttyUSB<X>
 
 15. SOURCESINK function
 =======================
@@ -574,24 +662,27 @@ Function-specific configfs interface
 The function name to use when creating the function directory is "SourceSink".
 The SOURCESINK function provides these attributes in its function directory:
 
-	pattern		- 0 (all zeros), 1 (mod63), 2 (none)
-	isoc_interval	- 1..16
-	isoc_maxpacket	- 0 - 1023 (fs), 0 - 1024 (hs/ss)
-	isoc_mult	- 0..2 (hs/ss only)
-	isoc_maxburst	- 0..15 (ss only)
-	bulk_buflen	- buffer length
-	bulk_qlen	- depth of queue for bulk
-	iso_qlen	- depth of queue for iso
+	=============== ==================================
+	pattern		0 (all zeros), 1 (mod63), 2 (none)
+	isoc_interval	1..16
+	isoc_maxpacket	0 - 1023 (fs), 0 - 1024 (hs/ss)
+	isoc_mult	0..2 (hs/ss only)
+	isoc_maxburst	0..15 (ss only)
+	bulk_buflen	buffer length
+	bulk_qlen	depth of queue for bulk
+	iso_qlen	depth of queue for iso
+	=============== ==================================
 
 Testing the SOURCESINK function
 -------------------------------
 
 device: run the gadget
+
 host: test-usb (tools/usb/testusb.c)
 
 
 16. UAC1 function (legacy implementation)
-=================
+=========================================
 
 The function is provided by usb_f_uac1_legacy.ko module.
 
@@ -602,12 +693,14 @@ The function name to use when creating the function directory
 is "uac1_legacy".
 The uac1 function provides these attributes in its function directory:
 
-	audio_buf_size - audio buffer size
-	fn_cap - capture pcm device file name
-	fn_cntl - control device file name
-	fn_play - playback pcm device file name
-	req_buf_size - ISO OUT endpoint request buffer size
-	req_count - ISO OUT endpoint request count
+	=============== ====================================
+	audio_buf_size	audio buffer size
+	fn_cap		capture pcm device file name
+	fn_cntl		control device file name
+	fn_play		playback pcm device file name
+	req_buf_size	ISO OUT endpoint request buffer size
+	req_count	ISO OUT endpoint request count
+	=============== ====================================
 
 The attributes have sane default values.
 
@@ -615,7 +708,10 @@ Testing the UAC1 function
 -------------------------
 
 device: run the gadget
-host: aplay -l # should list our USB Audio Gadget
+
+host::
+
+	aplay -l # should list our USB Audio Gadget
 
 17. UAC2 function
 =================
@@ -628,14 +724,16 @@ Function-specific configfs interface
 The function name to use when creating the function directory is "uac2".
 The uac2 function provides these attributes in its function directory:
 
-	c_chmask - capture channel mask
-	c_srate - capture sampling rate
-	c_ssize - capture sample size (bytes)
-	p_chmask - playback channel mask
-	p_srate - playback sampling rate
-	p_ssize - playback sample size (bytes)
-	req_number - the number of pre-allocated request for both capture
-		     and playback
+	=============== ====================================================
+	c_chmask	capture channel mask
+	c_srate		capture sampling rate
+	c_ssize		capture sample size (bytes)
+	p_chmask	playback channel mask
+	p_srate		playback sampling rate
+	p_ssize		playback sample size (bytes)
+	req_number	the number of pre-allocated request for both capture
+			and playback
+	=============== ====================================================
 
 The attributes have sane default values.
 
@@ -648,14 +746,14 @@ host: aplay -l # should list our USB Audio Gadget
 This function does not require real hardware support, it just
 sends a stream of audio data to/from the host. In order to
 actually hear something at the device side, a command similar
-to this must be used at the device side:
+to this must be used at the device side::
 
-$ arecord -f dat -t wav -D hw:2,0 | aplay -D hw:0,0 &
+	$ arecord -f dat -t wav -D hw:2,0 | aplay -D hw:0,0 &
 
-e.g.:
+e.g.::
 
-$ arecord -f dat -t wav -D hw:CARD=UAC2Gadget,DEV=0 | \
-aplay -D default:CARD=OdroidU3
+	$ arecord -f dat -t wav -D hw:CARD=UAC2Gadget,DEV=0 | \
+	  aplay -D default:CARD=OdroidU3
 
 18. UVC function
 ================
@@ -668,66 +766,73 @@ Function-specific configfs interface
 The function name to use when creating the function directory is "uvc".
 The uvc function provides these attributes in its function directory:
 
-	streaming_interval - interval for polling endpoint for data transfers
-	streaming_maxburst - bMaxBurst for super speed companion descriptor
-	streaming_maxpacket - maximum packet size this endpoint is capable of
-			      sending or receiving when this configuration is
-			      selected
+	=================== ================================================
+	streaming_interval  interval for polling endpoint for data transfers
+	streaming_maxburst  bMaxBurst for super speed companion descriptor
+	streaming_maxpacket maximum packet size this endpoint is capable of
+			    sending or receiving when this configuration is
+			    selected
+	=================== ================================================
 
 There are also "control" and "streaming" subdirectories, each of which contain
 a number of their subdirectories. There are some sane defaults provided, but
 the user must provide the following:
 
-	control header - create in control/header, link from control/class/fs
-			and/or control/class/ss
-	streaming header - create in streaming/header, link from
-			streaming/class/fs and/or streaming/class/hs and/or
-			streaming/class/ss
-	format description - create in streaming/mjpeg and/or
-			streaming/uncompressed
-	frame description - create in streaming/mjpeg/<format> and/or in
-			streaming/uncompressed/<format>
+	================== ====================================================
+	control header     create in control/header, link from control/class/fs
+			   and/or control/class/ss
+	streaming header   create in streaming/header, link from
+			   streaming/class/fs and/or streaming/class/hs and/or
+			   streaming/class/ss
+	format description create in streaming/mjpeg and/or
+			   streaming/uncompressed
+	frame description  create in streaming/mjpeg/<format> and/or in
+			   streaming/uncompressed/<format>
+	================== ====================================================
 
 Each frame description contains frame interval specification, and each
 such specification consists of a number of lines with an inverval value
-in each line. The rules stated above are best illustrated with an example:
-
-# mkdir functions/uvc.usb0/control/header/h
-# cd functions/uvc.usb0/control/
-# ln -s header/h class/fs
-# ln -s header/h class/ss
-# mkdir -p functions/uvc.usb0/streaming/uncompressed/u/360p
-# cat <<EOF > functions/uvc.usb0/streaming/uncompressed/u/360p/dwFrameInterval
-666666
-1000000
-5000000
-EOF
-# cd $GADGET_CONFIGFS_ROOT
-# mkdir functions/uvc.usb0/streaming/header/h
-# cd functions/uvc.usb0/streaming/header/h
-# ln -s ../../uncompressed/u
-# cd ../../class/fs
-# ln -s ../../header/h
-# cd ../../class/hs
-# ln -s ../../header/h
-# cd ../../class/ss
-# ln -s ../../header/h
+in each line. The rules stated above are best illustrated with an example::
+
+  # mkdir functions/uvc.usb0/control/header/h
+  # cd functions/uvc.usb0/control/
+  # ln -s header/h class/fs
+  # ln -s header/h class/ss
+  # mkdir -p functions/uvc.usb0/streaming/uncompressed/u/360p
+  # cat <<EOF > functions/uvc.usb0/streaming/uncompressed/u/360p/dwFrameInterval
+  666666
+  1000000
+  5000000
+  EOF
+  # cd $GADGET_CONFIGFS_ROOT
+  # mkdir functions/uvc.usb0/streaming/header/h
+  # cd functions/uvc.usb0/streaming/header/h
+  # ln -s ../../uncompressed/u
+  # cd ../../class/fs
+  # ln -s ../../header/h
+  # cd ../../class/hs
+  # ln -s ../../header/h
+  # cd ../../class/ss
+  # ln -s ../../header/h
 
 
 Testing the UVC function
 ------------------------
 
-device: run the gadget, modprobe vivid
+device: run the gadget, modprobe vivid::
 
-# uvc-gadget -u /dev/video<uvc video node #> -v /dev/video<vivid video node #>
+  # uvc-gadget -u /dev/video<uvc video node #> -v /dev/video<vivid video node #>
 
 where uvc-gadget is this program:
-http://git.ideasonboard.org/uvc-gadget.git
+	http://git.ideasonboard.org/uvc-gadget.git
 
 with these patches:
-http://www.spinics.net/lists/linux-usb/msg99220.html
 
-host: luvcview -f yuv
+	http://www.spinics.net/lists/linux-usb/msg99220.html
+
+host::
+
+	luvcview -f yuv
 
 19. PRINTER function
 ====================
@@ -740,16 +845,19 @@ Function-specific configfs interface
 The function name to use when creating the function directory is "printer".
 The printer function provides these attributes in its function directory:
 
-	pnp_string	- Data to be passed to the host in pnp string
-	q_len		- Number of requests per endpoint
+	==========	===========================================
+	pnp_string	Data to be passed to the host in pnp string
+	q_len		Number of requests per endpoint
+	==========	===========================================
 
 Testing the PRINTER function
 ----------------------------
 
 The most basic testing:
 
-device: run the gadget
-# ls -l /devices/virtual/usb_printer_gadget/
+device: run the gadget::
+
+	# ls -l /devices/virtual/usb_printer_gadget/
 
 should show g_printer<number>.
 
@@ -761,23 +869,28 @@ If udev is active, then e.g. /dev/usb/lp0 should appear.
 
 host->device transmission:
 
-device:
-# cat /dev/g_printer<number>
-host:
-# cat > /dev/usb/lp0
+device::
 
-device->host transmission:
+	# cat /dev/g_printer<number>
 
-# cat > /dev/g_printer<number>
-host:
-# cat /dev/usb/lp0
+host::
+
+	# cat > /dev/usb/lp0
+
+device->host transmission::
+
+	# cat > /dev/g_printer<number>
+
+host::
+
+	# cat /dev/usb/lp0
 
 More advanced testing can be done with the prn_example
 described in Documentation/usb/gadget_printer.txt.
 
 
 20. UAC1 function (virtual ALSA card, using u_audio API)
-=================
+========================================================
 
 The function is provided by usb_f_uac1.ko module.
 It will create a virtual ALSA card and the audio streams are simply
@@ -789,14 +902,16 @@ Function-specific configfs interface
 The function name to use when creating the function directory is "uac1".
 The uac1 function provides these attributes in its function directory:
 
-	c_chmask - capture channel mask
-	c_srate - capture sampling rate
-	c_ssize - capture sample size (bytes)
-	p_chmask - playback channel mask
-	p_srate - playback sampling rate
-	p_ssize - playback sample size (bytes)
-	req_number - the number of pre-allocated request for both capture
-		     and playback
+	========== ====================================================
+	c_chmask   capture channel mask
+	c_srate    capture sampling rate
+	c_ssize    capture sample size (bytes)
+	p_chmask   playback channel mask
+	p_srate    playback sampling rate
+	p_ssize    playback sample size (bytes)
+	req_number the number of pre-allocated request for both capture
+		   and playback
+	========== ====================================================
 
 The attributes have sane default values.
 
@@ -809,11 +924,11 @@ host: aplay -l # should list our USB Audio Gadget
 This function does not require real hardware support, it just
 sends a stream of audio data to/from the host. In order to
 actually hear something at the device side, a command similar
-to this must be used at the device side:
+to this must be used at the device side::
 
-$ arecord -f dat -t wav -D hw:2,0 | aplay -D hw:0,0 &
+	$ arecord -f dat -t wav -D hw:2,0 | aplay -D hw:0,0 &
 
-e.g.:
+e.g.::
 
-$ arecord -f dat -t wav -D hw:CARD=UAC1Gadget,DEV=0 | \
-aplay -D default:CARD=OdroidU3
+	$ arecord -f dat -t wav -D hw:CARD=UAC1Gadget,DEV=0 | \
+	  aplay -D default:CARD=OdroidU3
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/gadget_configfs.txt b/Documentation/usb/gadget_configfs.txt
index b8cb38a98c19..54fb08baae22 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/gadget_configfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/gadget_configfs.txt
@@ -1,11 +1,9 @@
+============================================
+Linux USB gadget configured through configfs
+============================================
 
 
-
-
-		Linux USB gadget configured through configfs
-
-
-			     25th April 2013
+25th April 2013
 
 
 
@@ -26,7 +24,7 @@ Linux provides a number of functions for gadgets to use.
 Creating a gadget means deciding what configurations there will be
 and which functions each configuration will provide.
 
-Configfs (please see Documentation/filesystems/configfs/*) lends itself nicely
+Configfs (please see `Documentation/filesystems/configfs/*`) lends itself nicely
 for the purpose of telling the kernel about the above mentioned decision.
 This document is about how to do it.
 
@@ -51,44 +49,46 @@ Usage
 made available through configfs can be seen here:
 http://www.spinics.net/lists/linux-usb/msg76388.html)
 
-$ modprobe libcomposite
-$ mount none $CONFIGFS_HOME -t configfs
+::
+
+	$ modprobe libcomposite
+	$ mount none $CONFIGFS_HOME -t configfs
 
 where CONFIGFS_HOME is the mount point for configfs
 
 1. Creating the gadgets
 -----------------------
 
-For each gadget to be created its corresponding directory must be created:
+For each gadget to be created its corresponding directory must be created::
 
-$ mkdir $CONFIGFS_HOME/usb_gadget/<gadget name>
+	$ mkdir $CONFIGFS_HOME/usb_gadget/<gadget name>
 
-e.g.:
+e.g.::
 
-$ mkdir $CONFIGFS_HOME/usb_gadget/g1
+	$ mkdir $CONFIGFS_HOME/usb_gadget/g1
 
-...
-...
-...
+	...
+	...
+	...
 
-$ cd $CONFIGFS_HOME/usb_gadget/g1
+	$ cd $CONFIGFS_HOME/usb_gadget/g1
 
-Each gadget needs to have its vendor id <VID> and product id <PID> specified:
+Each gadget needs to have its vendor id <VID> and product id <PID> specified::
 
-$ echo <VID> > idVendor
-$ echo <PID> > idProduct
+	$ echo <VID> > idVendor
+	$ echo <PID> > idProduct
 
 A gadget also needs its serial number, manufacturer and product strings.
 In order to have a place to store them, a strings subdirectory must be created
-for each language, e.g.:
+for each language, e.g.::
 
-$ mkdir strings/0x409
+	$ mkdir strings/0x409
 
-Then the strings can be specified:
+Then the strings can be specified::
 
-$ echo <serial number> > strings/0x409/serialnumber
-$ echo <manufacturer> > strings/0x409/manufacturer
-$ echo <product> > strings/0x409/product
+	$ echo <serial number> > strings/0x409/serialnumber
+	$ echo <manufacturer> > strings/0x409/manufacturer
+	$ echo <product> > strings/0x409/product
 
 2. Creating the configurations
 ------------------------------
@@ -99,43 +99,43 @@ directories must be created:
 $ mkdir configs/<name>.<number>
 
 where <name> can be any string which is legal in a filesystem and the
-<number> is the configuration's number, e.g.:
+<number> is the configuration's number, e.g.::
 
-$ mkdir configs/c.1
+	$ mkdir configs/c.1
 
-...
-...
-...
+	...
+	...
+	...
 
 Each configuration also needs its strings, so a subdirectory must be created
-for each language, e.g.:
+for each language, e.g.::
 
-$ mkdir configs/c.1/strings/0x409
+	$ mkdir configs/c.1/strings/0x409
 
-Then the configuration string can be specified:
+Then the configuration string can be specified::
 
-$ echo <configuration> > configs/c.1/strings/0x409/configuration
+	$ echo <configuration> > configs/c.1/strings/0x409/configuration
 
-Some attributes can also be set for a configuration, e.g.:
+Some attributes can also be set for a configuration, e.g.::
 
-$ echo 120 > configs/c.1/MaxPower
+	$ echo 120 > configs/c.1/MaxPower
 
 3. Creating the functions
 -------------------------
 
 The gadget will provide some functions, for each function its corresponding
-directory must be created:
+directory must be created::
 
-$ mkdir functions/<name>.<instance name>
+	$ mkdir functions/<name>.<instance name>
 
 where <name> corresponds to one of allowed function names and instance name
-is an arbitrary string allowed in a filesystem, e.g.:
+is an arbitrary string allowed in a filesystem, e.g.::
 
-$ mkdir functions/ncm.usb0 # usb_f_ncm.ko gets loaded with request_module()
+  $ mkdir functions/ncm.usb0 # usb_f_ncm.ko gets loaded with request_module()
 
-...
-...
-...
+  ...
+  ...
+  ...
 
 Each function provides its specific set of attributes, with either read-only
 or read-write access. Where applicable they need to be written to as
@@ -149,17 +149,17 @@ At this moment a number of gadgets is created, each of which has a number of
 configurations specified and a number of functions available. What remains
 is specifying which function is available in which configuration (the same
 function can be used in multiple configurations). This is achieved with
-creating symbolic links:
+creating symbolic links::
 
-$ ln -s functions/<name>.<instance name> configs/<name>.<number>
+	$ ln -s functions/<name>.<instance name> configs/<name>.<number>
 
-e.g.:
+e.g.::
 
-$ ln -s functions/ncm.usb0 configs/c.1
+	$ ln -s functions/ncm.usb0 configs/c.1
 
-...
-...
-...
+	...
+	...
+	...
 
 5. Enabling the gadget
 ----------------------
@@ -167,123 +167,127 @@ $ ln -s functions/ncm.usb0 configs/c.1
 All the above steps serve the purpose of composing the gadget of
 configurations and functions.
 
-An example directory structure might look like this:
-
-.
-./strings
-./strings/0x409
-./strings/0x409/serialnumber
-./strings/0x409/product
-./strings/0x409/manufacturer
-./configs
-./configs/c.1
-./configs/c.1/ncm.usb0 -> ../../../../usb_gadget/g1/functions/ncm.usb0
-./configs/c.1/strings
-./configs/c.1/strings/0x409
-./configs/c.1/strings/0x409/configuration
-./configs/c.1/bmAttributes
-./configs/c.1/MaxPower
-./functions
-./functions/ncm.usb0
-./functions/ncm.usb0/ifname
-./functions/ncm.usb0/qmult
-./functions/ncm.usb0/host_addr
-./functions/ncm.usb0/dev_addr
-./UDC
-./bcdUSB
-./bcdDevice
-./idProduct
-./idVendor
-./bMaxPacketSize0
-./bDeviceProtocol
-./bDeviceSubClass
-./bDeviceClass
+An example directory structure might look like this::
+
+  .
+  ./strings
+  ./strings/0x409
+  ./strings/0x409/serialnumber
+  ./strings/0x409/product
+  ./strings/0x409/manufacturer
+  ./configs
+  ./configs/c.1
+  ./configs/c.1/ncm.usb0 -> ../../../../usb_gadget/g1/functions/ncm.usb0
+  ./configs/c.1/strings
+  ./configs/c.1/strings/0x409
+  ./configs/c.1/strings/0x409/configuration
+  ./configs/c.1/bmAttributes
+  ./configs/c.1/MaxPower
+  ./functions
+  ./functions/ncm.usb0
+  ./functions/ncm.usb0/ifname
+  ./functions/ncm.usb0/qmult
+  ./functions/ncm.usb0/host_addr
+  ./functions/ncm.usb0/dev_addr
+  ./UDC
+  ./bcdUSB
+  ./bcdDevice
+  ./idProduct
+  ./idVendor
+  ./bMaxPacketSize0
+  ./bDeviceProtocol
+  ./bDeviceSubClass
+  ./bDeviceClass
 
 
 Such a gadget must be finally enabled so that the USB host can enumerate it.
-In order to enable the gadget it must be bound to a UDC (USB Device Controller).
 
-$ echo <udc name> > UDC
+In order to enable the gadget it must be bound to a UDC (USB Device
+Controller)::
+
+	$ echo <udc name> > UDC
 
 where <udc name> is one of those found in /sys/class/udc/*
-e.g.:
+e.g.::
 
-$ echo s3c-hsotg > UDC
+	$ echo s3c-hsotg > UDC
 
 
 6. Disabling the gadget
 -----------------------
 
-$ echo "" > UDC
+::
+
+	$ echo "" > UDC
 
 7. Cleaning up
 --------------
 
-Remove functions from configurations:
+Remove functions from configurations::
 
-$ rm configs/<config name>.<number>/<function>
+	$ rm configs/<config name>.<number>/<function>
 
 where <config name>.<number> specify the configuration and <function> is
-a symlink to a function being removed from the configuration, e.g.:
+a symlink to a function being removed from the configuration, e.g.::
 
-$ rm configs/c.1/ncm.usb0
+	$ rm configs/c.1/ncm.usb0
 
-...
-...
-...
+	...
+	...
+	...
 
-Remove strings directories in configurations
+Remove strings directories in configurations:
 
-$ rmdir configs/<config name>.<number>/strings/<lang>
+	$ rmdir configs/<config name>.<number>/strings/<lang>
 
-e.g.:
+e.g.::
 
-$ rmdir configs/c.1/strings/0x409
+	$ rmdir configs/c.1/strings/0x409
 
-...
-...
-...
+	...
+	...
+	...
 
-and remove the configurations
+and remove the configurations::
 
-$ rmdir configs/<config name>.<number>
+	$ rmdir configs/<config name>.<number>
 
-e.g.:
+e.g.::
 
-rmdir configs/c.1
+	rmdir configs/c.1
 
-...
-...
-...
+	...
+	...
+	...
 
-Remove functions (function modules are not unloaded, though)
+Remove functions (function modules are not unloaded, though):
 
-$ rmdir functions/<name>.<instance name>
+	$ rmdir functions/<name>.<instance name>
 
-e.g.:
+e.g.::
 
-$ rmdir functions/ncm.usb0
+	$ rmdir functions/ncm.usb0
 
-...
-...
-...
+	...
+	...
+	...
 
-Remove strings directories in the gadget
+Remove strings directories in the gadget::
 
-$ rmdir strings/<lang>
+	$ rmdir strings/<lang>
 
-e.g.:
+e.g.::
 
-$ rmdir strings/0x409
+	$ rmdir strings/0x409
 
-and finally remove the gadget:
+and finally remove the gadget::
 
-$ cd ..
-$ rmdir <gadget name>
+	$ cd ..
+	$ rmdir <gadget name>
 
-e.g.:
+e.g.::
 
-$ rmdir g1
+	$ rmdir g1
 
 
 
@@ -305,16 +309,16 @@ configured elements. However, they are embedded in usage-specific
 larger structures. In the picture below there is a "cs" which contains
 a config_item and an "sa" which contains a configfs_attribute.
 
-The filesystem view would be like this:
+The filesystem view would be like this::
 
-./
-./cs        (directory)
-   |
-   +--sa    (file)
-   |
-   .
-   .
-   .
+  ./
+  ./cs        (directory)
+     |
+     +--sa    (file)
+     |
+     .
+     .
+     .
 
 Whenever a user reads/writes the "sa" file, a function is called
 which accepts a struct config_item and a struct configfs_attribute.
@@ -326,29 +330,31 @@ buffer), while the "store" is for modifying the file's contents (copy data
 from the buffer to the cs), but it is up to the implementer of the
 two functions to decide what they actually do.
 
-typedef struct configured_structure cs;
-typedef struct specific_attribute sa;
-
-                                       sa
-                       +----------------------------------+
-        cs             |  (*show)(cs *, buffer);          |
-+-----------------+    |  (*store)(cs *, buffer, length); |
-|                 |    |                                  |
-| +-------------+ |    |       +------------------+       |
-| | struct      |-|----|------>|struct            |       |
-| | config_item | |    |       |configfs_attribute|       |
-| +-------------+ |    |       +------------------+       |
-|                 |    +----------------------------------+
-| data to be set  |                .
-|                 |                .
-+-----------------+                .
+::
+
+  typedef struct configured_structure cs;
+  typedef struct specific_attribute sa;
+
+                                         sa
+                         +----------------------------------+
+          cs             |  (*show)(cs *, buffer);          |
+  +-----------------+    |  (*store)(cs *, buffer, length); |
+  |                 |    |                                  |
+  | +-------------+ |    |       +------------------+       |
+  | | struct      |-|----|------>|struct            |       |
+  | | config_item | |    |       |configfs_attribute|       |
+  | +-------------+ |    |       +------------------+       |
+  |                 |    +----------------------------------+
+  | data to be set  |                .
+  |                 |                .
+  +-----------------+                .
 
 The file names are decided by the config item/group designer, while
 the directories in general can be named at will. A group can have
 a number of its default sub-groups created automatically.
 
 For more information on configfs please see
-Documentation/filesystems/configfs/*.
+`Documentation/filesystems/configfs/*`.
 
 The concepts described above translate to USB gadgets like this:
 
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/gadget_hid.txt b/Documentation/usb/gadget_hid.txt
index 7a0fb8e16e27..098d563040cc 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/gadget_hid.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/gadget_hid.txt
@@ -1,28 +1,31 @@
-
-		     Linux USB HID gadget driver
+===========================
+Linux USB HID gadget driver
+===========================
 
 Introduction
+============
 
-	The HID Gadget driver provides emulation of USB Human Interface
-	Devices (HID). The basic HID handling is done in the kernel,
-	and HID reports can be sent/received through I/O on the
-	/dev/hidgX character devices.
+The HID Gadget driver provides emulation of USB Human Interface
+Devices (HID). The basic HID handling is done in the kernel,
+and HID reports can be sent/received through I/O on the
+/dev/hidgX character devices.
 
-	For more details about HID, see the developer page on
-	http://www.usb.org/developers/hidpage/
+For more details about HID, see the developer page on
+http://www.usb.org/developers/hidpage/
 
 Configuration
+=============
 
-	g_hid is a platform driver, so to use it you need to add
-	struct platform_device(s) to your platform code defining the
-	HID function descriptors you want to use - E.G. something
-	like:
+g_hid is a platform driver, so to use it you need to add
+struct platform_device(s) to your platform code defining the
+HID function descriptors you want to use - E.G. something
+like::
 
-#include <linux/platform_device.h>
-#include <linux/usb/g_hid.h>
+  #include <linux/platform_device.h>
+  #include <linux/usb/g_hid.h>
 
-/* hid descriptor for a keyboard */
-static struct hidg_func_descriptor my_hid_data = {
+  /* hid descriptor for a keyboard */
+  static struct hidg_func_descriptor my_hid_data = {
 	.subclass		= 0, /* No subclass */
 	.protocol		= 1, /* Keyboard */
 	.report_length		= 8,
@@ -61,85 +64,87 @@ static struct hidg_func_descriptor my_hid_data = {
 		0x81, 0x00,	/*   INPUT (Data,Ary,Abs)                 */
 		0xc0		/* END_COLLECTION                         */
 	}
-};
+  };
 
-static struct platform_device my_hid = {
+  static struct platform_device my_hid = {
 	.name			= "hidg",
 	.id			= 0,
 	.num_resources		= 0,
 	.resource		= 0,
 	.dev.platform_data	= &my_hid_data,
-};
+  };
 
-	You can add as many HID functions as you want, only limited by
-	the amount of interrupt endpoints your gadget driver supports.
+You can add as many HID functions as you want, only limited by
+the amount of interrupt endpoints your gadget driver supports.
 
 Configuration with configfs
+===========================
 
-	Instead of adding fake platform devices and drivers in order to pass
-	some data to the kernel, if HID is a part of a gadget composed with
-	configfs the hidg_func_descriptor.report_desc is passed to the kernel
-	by writing the appropriate stream of bytes to a configfs attribute.
+Instead of adding fake platform devices and drivers in order to pass
+some data to the kernel, if HID is a part of a gadget composed with
+configfs the hidg_func_descriptor.report_desc is passed to the kernel
+by writing the appropriate stream of bytes to a configfs attribute.
 
 Send and receive HID reports
+============================
 
-	HID reports can be sent/received using read/write on the
-	/dev/hidgX character devices. See below for an example program
-	to do this.
+HID reports can be sent/received using read/write on the
+/dev/hidgX character devices. See below for an example program
+to do this.
 
-	hid_gadget_test is a small interactive program to test the HID
-	gadget driver. To use, point it at a hidg device and set the
-	device type (keyboard / mouse / joystick) - E.G.:
+hid_gadget_test is a small interactive program to test the HID
+gadget driver. To use, point it at a hidg device and set the
+device type (keyboard / mouse / joystick) - E.G.::
 
-		# hid_gadget_test /dev/hidg0 keyboard
+	# hid_gadget_test /dev/hidg0 keyboard
 
-	You are now in the prompt of hid_gadget_test. You can type any
-	combination of options and values. Available options and
-	values are listed at program start. In keyboard mode you can
-	send up to six values.
+You are now in the prompt of hid_gadget_test. You can type any
+combination of options and values. Available options and
+values are listed at program start. In keyboard mode you can
+send up to six values.
 
-	For example type: g i s t r --left-shift
+For example type: g i s t r --left-shift
 
-	Hit return and the corresponding report will be sent by the
-	HID gadget.
+Hit return and the corresponding report will be sent by the
+HID gadget.
 
-	Another interesting example is the caps lock test. Type
-	--caps-lock and hit return. A report is then sent by the
-	gadget and you should receive the host answer, corresponding
-	to the caps lock LED status.
+Another interesting example is the caps lock test. Type
+--caps-lock and hit return. A report is then sent by the
+gadget and you should receive the host answer, corresponding
+to the caps lock LED status::
 
-		--caps-lock
-		recv report:2
+	--caps-lock
+	recv report:2
 
-	With this command:
+With this command::
 
-		# hid_gadget_test /dev/hidg1 mouse
+	# hid_gadget_test /dev/hidg1 mouse
 
-	You can test the mouse emulation. Values are two signed numbers.
+You can test the mouse emulation. Values are two signed numbers.
 
 
-Sample code
+Sample code::
 
-/* hid_gadget_test */
+    /* hid_gadget_test */
 
-#include <pthread.h>
-#include <string.h>
-#include <stdio.h>
-#include <ctype.h>
-#include <fcntl.h>
-#include <errno.h>
-#include <stdio.h>
-#include <stdlib.h>
-#include <unistd.h>
+    #include <pthread.h>
+    #include <string.h>
+    #include <stdio.h>
+    #include <ctype.h>
+    #include <fcntl.h>
+    #include <errno.h>
+    #include <stdio.h>
+    #include <stdlib.h>
+    #include <unistd.h>
 
-#define BUF_LEN 512
+    #define BUF_LEN 512
 
-struct options {
+    struct options {
 	const char    *opt;
 	unsigned char val;
-};
+  };
 
-static struct options kmod[] = {
+  static struct options kmod[] = {
 	{.opt = "--left-ctrl",		.val = 0x01},
 	{.opt = "--right-ctrl",		.val = 0x10},
 	{.opt = "--left-shift",		.val = 0x02},
@@ -149,9 +154,9 @@ static struct options kmod[] = {
 	{.opt = "--left-meta",		.val = 0x08},
 	{.opt = "--right-meta",		.val = 0x80},
 	{.opt = NULL}
-};
+  };
 
-static struct options kval[] = {
+  static struct options kval[] = {
 	{.opt = "--return",	.val = 0x28},
 	{.opt = "--esc",	.val = 0x29},
 	{.opt = "--bckspc",	.val = 0x2a},
@@ -183,10 +188,10 @@ static struct options kval[] = {
 	{.opt = "--up",		.val = 0x52},
 	{.opt = "--num-lock",	.val = 0x53},
 	{.opt = NULL}
-};
+  };
 
-int keyboard_fill_report(char report[8], char buf[BUF_LEN], int *hold)
-{
+  int keyboard_fill_report(char report[8], char buf[BUF_LEN], int *hold)
+  {
 	char *tok = strtok(buf, " ");
 	int key = 0;
 	int i = 0;
@@ -229,17 +234,17 @@ int keyboard_fill_report(char report[8], char buf[BUF_LEN], int *hold)
 			fprintf(stderr, "unknown option: %s\n", tok);
 	}
 	return 8;
-}
+  }
 
-static struct options mmod[] = {
+  static struct options mmod[] = {
 	{.opt = "--b1", .val = 0x01},
 	{.opt = "--b2", .val = 0x02},
 	{.opt = "--b3", .val = 0x04},
 	{.opt = NULL}
-};
+  };
 
-int mouse_fill_report(char report[8], char buf[BUF_LEN], int *hold)
-{
+  int mouse_fill_report(char report[8], char buf[BUF_LEN], int *hold)
+  {
 	char *tok = strtok(buf, " ");
 	int mvt = 0;
 	int i = 0;
@@ -274,9 +279,9 @@ int mouse_fill_report(char report[8], char buf[BUF_LEN], int *hold)
 		fprintf(stderr, "unknown option: %s\n", tok);
 	}
 	return 3;
-}
+  }
 
-static struct options jmod[] = {
+  static struct options jmod[] = {
 	{.opt = "--b1",		.val = 0x10},
 	{.opt = "--b2",		.val = 0x20},
 	{.opt = "--b3",		.val = 0x40},
@@ -287,10 +292,10 @@ static struct options jmod[] = {
 	{.opt = "--hat4",	.val = 0x03},
 	{.opt = "--hatneutral",	.val = 0x04},
 	{.opt = NULL}
-};
+  };
 
-int joystick_fill_report(char report[8], char buf[BUF_LEN], int *hold)
-{
+  int joystick_fill_report(char report[8], char buf[BUF_LEN], int *hold)
+  {
 	char *tok = strtok(buf, " ");
 	int mvt = 0;
 	int i = 0;
@@ -326,10 +331,10 @@ int joystick_fill_report(char report[8], char buf[BUF_LEN], int *hold)
 		fprintf(stderr, "unknown option: %s\n", tok);
 	}
 	return 4;
-}
+  }
 
-void print_options(char c)
-{
+  void print_options(char c)
+  {
 	int i = 0;
 
 	if (c == 'k') {
@@ -358,10 +363,10 @@ void print_options(char c)
 		       "		three signed numbers\n"
 		       "--quit to close\n");
 	}
-}
+  }
 
-int main(int argc, const char *argv[])
-{
+  int main(int argc, const char *argv[])
+  {
 	const char *filename = NULL;
 	int fd = 0;
 	char buf[BUF_LEN];
@@ -449,4 +454,4 @@ int main(int argc, const char *argv[])
 
 	close(fd);
 	return 0;
-}
+  }
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/gadget_multi.txt b/Documentation/usb/gadget_multi.txt
index b3146dd7aa43..9806b55af301 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/gadget_multi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/gadget_multi.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,9 @@
-                                                             -*- org -*-
+==============================
+Multifunction Composite Gadget
+==============================
 
-* Overview
+Overview
+========
 
 The Multifunction Composite Gadget (or g_multi) is a composite gadget
 that makes extensive use of the composite framework to provide
@@ -17,13 +20,15 @@ have two configurations -- one with RNDIS and another with CDC ECM[3].
 Please note that if you use non-standard configuration (that is enable
 CDC ECM) you may need to change vendor and/or product ID.
 
-* Host drivers
+Host drivers
+============
 
 To make use of the gadget one needs to make it work on host side --
 without that there's no hope of achieving anything with the gadget.
 As one might expect, things one need to do very from system to system.
 
-** Linux host drivers
+Linux host drivers
+------------------
 
 Since the gadget uses standard composite framework and appears as such
 to Linux host it does not need any additional drivers on Linux host
@@ -34,11 +39,13 @@ This is also true for two configuration set-up with RNDIS
 configuration being the first one.  Linux host will use the second
 configuration with CDC ECM which should work better under Linux.
 
-** Windows host drivers
+Windows host drivers
+--------------------
 
 For the gadget to work under Windows two conditions have to be met:
 
-*** Detecting as composite gadget
+Detecting as composite gadget
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
 
 First of all, Windows need to detect the gadget as an USB composite
 gadget which on its own have some conditions[4].  If they are met,
@@ -53,7 +60,8 @@ The only thing to worry is that the gadget has to have a single
 configuration so a dual RNDIS and CDC ECM gadget won't work unless you
 create a proper INF -- and of course, if you do submit it!
 
-*** Installing drivers for each function
+Installing drivers for each function
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
 
 The other, trickier thing is making Windows install drivers for each
 individual function.
@@ -63,7 +71,8 @@ implementing USB Mass Storage class and selects appropriate driver.
 
 Things are harder with RDNIS and CDC ACM.
 
-**** RNDIS
+RNDIS
+.....
 
 To make Windows select RNDIS drivers for the first function in the
 gadget, one needs to use the [[file:linux.inf]] file provided with this
@@ -75,11 +84,13 @@ RNDIS was not the first interface.  You do not need to worry abut it
 unless you are trying to develop your own gadget in which case watch
 out for this bug.
 
-**** CDC ACM
+CDC ACM
+.......
 
 Similarly, [[file:linux-cdc-acm.inf]] is provided for CDC ACM.
 
-**** Customising the gadget
+Customising the gadget
+......................
 
 If you intend to hack the g_multi gadget be advised that rearranging
 functions will obviously change interface numbers for each of the
@@ -97,14 +108,16 @@ things don't work as intended before realising Windows have cached
 some drivers information (changing USB port may sometimes help plus
 you might try using USBDeview[8] to remove the phantom device).
 
-**** INF testing
+INF testing
+...........
 
 Provided INF files have been tested on Windows XP SP3, Windows Vista
 and Windows 7, all 32-bit versions.  It should work on 64-bit versions
 as well.  It most likely won't work on Windows prior to Windows XP
 SP2.
 
-** Other systems
+Other systems
+-------------
 
 At this moment, drivers for any other systems have not been tested.
 Knowing how MacOS is based on BSD and BSD is an Open Source it is
@@ -115,7 +128,8 @@ For more exotic systems I have even less to say...
 
 Any testing and drivers *are* *welcome*!
 
-* Authors
+Authors
+=======
 
 This document has been written by Michal Nazarewicz
 ([[mailto:mina86@mina86.com]]).  INF files have been hacked with
@@ -124,7 +138,8 @@ Xiaofan Chen ([[mailto:xiaofanc@gmail.com]]) basing on the MS RNDIS
 template[9], Microchip's CDC ACM INF file and David Brownell's
 ([[mailto:dbrownell@users.sourceforge.net]]) original INF files.
 
-* Footnotes
+Footnotes
+=========
 
 [1] Remote Network Driver Interface Specification,
 [[http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ee484414.aspx]].
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/gadget_printer.txt b/Documentation/usb/gadget_printer.txt
index ad995bf0db41..5e5516c69075 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/gadget_printer.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/gadget_printer.txt
@@ -1,12 +1,14 @@
+===============================
+Linux USB Printer Gadget Driver
+===============================
 
-                       Linux USB Printer Gadget Driver
-                                 06/04/2007
+06/04/2007
 
-              Copyright (C) 2007 Craig W. Nadler <craig@nadler.us>
+Copyright (C) 2007 Craig W. Nadler <craig@nadler.us>
 
 
 
-GENERAL
+General
 =======
 
 This driver may be used if you are writing printer firmware using Linux as
@@ -29,52 +31,60 @@ user space firmware can read or write this status byte using a device file
 
 
 
-HOWTO USE THIS DRIVER
+Howto Use This Driver
 =====================
 
 To load the USB device controller driver and the printer gadget driver. The
-following example uses the Netchip 2280 USB device controller driver:
+following example uses the Netchip 2280 USB device controller driver::
 
-modprobe net2280
-modprobe g_printer
+	modprobe net2280
+	modprobe g_printer
 
 
 The follow command line parameter can be used when loading the printer gadget
 (ex: modprobe g_printer idVendor=0x0525 idProduct=0xa4a8 ):
 
-idVendor - This is the Vendor ID used in the device descriptor. The default is
+idVendor
+	This is the Vendor ID used in the device descriptor. The default is
 	the Netchip vendor id 0x0525. YOU MUST CHANGE TO YOUR OWN VENDOR ID
 	BEFORE RELEASING A PRODUCT. If you plan to release a product and don't
 	already have a Vendor ID please see www.usb.org for details on how to
 	get one.
 
-idProduct - This is the Product ID used in the device descriptor. The default
+idProduct
+	This is the Product ID used in the device descriptor. The default
 	is 0xa4a8, you should change this to an ID that's not used by any of
 	your other USB products if you have any. It would be a good idea to
 	start numbering your products starting with say 0x0001.
 
-bcdDevice - This is the version number of your product. It would be a good idea
+bcdDevice
+	This is the version number of your product. It would be a good idea
 	to put your firmware version here.
 
-iManufacturer - A string containing the name of the Vendor.
+iManufacturer
+	A string containing the name of the Vendor.
 
-iProduct - A string containing the Product Name.
+iProduct
+	A string containing the Product Name.
 
-iSerialNum - A string containing the Serial Number. This should be changed for
+iSerialNum
+	A string containing the Serial Number. This should be changed for
 	each unit of your product.
 
-iPNPstring -  The PNP ID string used for this printer. You will want to set
+iPNPstring
+	The PNP ID string used for this printer. You will want to set
 	either on the command line or hard code the PNP ID string used for
 	your printer product.
 
-qlen - The number of 8k buffers to use per endpoint. The default is 10, you
+qlen
+	The number of 8k buffers to use per endpoint. The default is 10, you
 	should tune this for your product. You may also want to tune the
 	size of each buffer for your product.
 
 
 
 
-USING THE EXAMPLE CODE
+Using The Example Code
 ======================
 
 This example code talks to stdout, instead of a print engine.
@@ -82,22 +92,23 @@ This example code talks to stdout, instead of a print engine.
 To compile the test code below:
 
 1) save it to a file called prn_example.c
-2) compile the code with the follow command:
+2) compile the code with the follow command::
+
 	 gcc prn_example.c -o prn_example
 
 
 
-To read printer data from the host to stdout:
+To read printer data from the host to stdout::
 
 	# prn_example -read_data
 
 
-To write printer data from a file (data_file) to the host:
+To write printer data from a file (data_file) to the host::
 
 	# cat data_file | prn_example -write_data
 
 
-To get the current printer status for the gadget driver:
+To get the current printer status for the gadget driver:::
 
 	# prn_example -get_status
 
@@ -107,60 +118,62 @@ To get the current printer status for the gadget driver:
 	     Printer OK
 
 
-To set printer to Selected/On-line:
+To set printer to Selected/On-line::
 
 	# prn_example -selected
 
 
-To set printer to Not Selected/Off-line:
+To set printer to Not Selected/Off-line::
 
 	# prn_example -not_selected
 
 
-To set paper status to paper out:
+To set paper status to paper out::
 
 	# prn_example -paper_out
 
 
-To set paper status to paper loaded:
+To set paper status to paper loaded::
 
 	# prn_example -paper_loaded
 
 
-To set error status to printer OK:
+To set error status to printer OK::
 
 	# prn_example -no_error
 
 
-To set error status to ERROR:
+To set error status to ERROR::
 
 	# prn_example -error
 
 
 
 
-EXAMPLE CODE
+Example Code
 ============
 
+::
+
 
-#include <stdio.h>
-#include <stdlib.h>
-#include <fcntl.h>
-#include <linux/poll.h>
-#include <sys/ioctl.h>
-#include <linux/usb/g_printer.h>
+  #include <stdio.h>
+  #include <stdlib.h>
+  #include <fcntl.h>
+  #include <linux/poll.h>
+  #include <sys/ioctl.h>
+  #include <linux/usb/g_printer.h>
 
-#define PRINTER_FILE			"/dev/g_printer"
-#define BUF_SIZE			512
+  #define PRINTER_FILE			"/dev/g_printer"
+  #define BUF_SIZE			512
 
 
-/*
- * 'usage()' - Show program usage.
- */
+  /*
+   * 'usage()' - Show program usage.
+   */
 
-static void
-usage(const char *option)		/* I - Option string or NULL */
-{
+  static void
+  usage(const char *option)		/* I - Option string or NULL */
+  {
 	if (option) {
 		fprintf(stderr,"prn_example: Unknown option \"%s\"!\n",
 				option);
@@ -186,12 +199,12 @@ usage(const char *option)		/* I - Option string or NULL */
 	fputs("\n\n", stderr);
 
 	exit(1);
-}
+  }
 
 
-static int
-read_printer_data()
-{
+  static int
+  read_printer_data()
+  {
 	struct pollfd	fd[1];
 
 	/* Open device file for printer gadget. */
@@ -236,12 +249,12 @@ read_printer_data()
 	close(fd[0].fd);
 
 	return 0;
-}
+  }
 
 
-static int
-write_printer_data()
-{
+  static int
+  write_printer_data()
+  {
 	struct pollfd	fd[1];
 
 	/* Open device file for printer gadget. */
@@ -295,12 +308,12 @@ write_printer_data()
 	close(fd[0].fd);
 
 	return 0;
-}
+  }
 
 
-static int
-read_NB_printer_data()
-{
+  static int
+  read_NB_printer_data()
+  {
 	int		fd;
 	static char	buf[BUF_SIZE];
 	int		bytes_read;
@@ -329,12 +342,12 @@ read_NB_printer_data()
 	close(fd);
 
 	return 0;
-}
+  }
 
 
-static int
-get_printer_status()
-{
+  static int
+  get_printer_status()
+  {
 	int	retval;
 	int	fd;
 
@@ -357,12 +370,12 @@ get_printer_status()
 	close(fd);
 
 	return(retval);
-}
+  }
 
 
-static int
-set_printer_status(unsigned char buf, int clear_printer_status_bit)
-{
+  static int
+  set_printer_status(unsigned char buf, int clear_printer_status_bit)
+  {
 	int	retval;
 	int	fd;
 
@@ -397,12 +410,12 @@ set_printer_status(unsigned char buf, int clear_printer_status_bit)
 	close(fd);
 
 	return 0;
-}
+  }
 
 
-static int
-display_printer_status()
-{
+  static int
+  display_printer_status()
+  {
 	char	printer_status;
 
 	printer_status = get_printer_status();
@@ -429,12 +442,12 @@ display_printer_status()
 	}
 
 	return(0);
-}
+  }
 
 
-int
-main(int  argc, char *argv[])
-{
+  int
+  main(int  argc, char *argv[])
+  {
 	int	i;		/* Looping var */
 	int	retval = 0;
 
@@ -507,4 +520,4 @@ main(int  argc, char *argv[])
 	}
 
 	exit(retval);
-}
+  }
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/gadget_serial.txt b/Documentation/usb/gadget_serial.txt
index d1def3186782..dce8bc1fb1f2 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/gadget_serial.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/gadget_serial.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,10 @@
+===============================
+Linux Gadget Serial Driver v2.0
+===============================
 
-                 Linux Gadget Serial Driver v2.0
-                           11/20/2004
-                  (updated 8-May-2008 for v2.3)
+11/20/2004
+
+(updated 8-May-2008 for v2.3)
 
 
 License and Disclaimer
@@ -56,7 +59,7 @@ hardware; for example, a PDA, an embedded Linux system, or a PC
 with a USB development card.
 
 The gadget serial driver talks over USB to either a CDC ACM driver
-or a generic USB serial driver running on a host PC.
+or a generic USB serial driver running on a host PC::
 
    Host
    --------------------------------------
@@ -112,11 +115,11 @@ configuring the kernel.  Then rebuild and install the kernel or
 modules.
 
 Then you must load the gadget serial driver.  To load it as an
-ACM device (recommended for interoperability), do this:
+ACM device (recommended for interoperability), do this::
 
   modprobe g_serial
 
-To load it as a vendor specific bulk in/out device, do this:
+To load it as a vendor specific bulk in/out device, do this::
 
   modprobe g_serial use_acm=0
 
@@ -127,7 +130,7 @@ desired.
 
 Your system should use mdev (from busybox) or udev to make the
 device nodes.  After this gadget driver has been set up you should
-then see a /dev/ttyGS0 node:
+then see a /dev/ttyGS0 node::
 
   # ls -l /dev/ttyGS0 | cat
   crw-rw----    1 root     root     253,   0 May  8 14:10 /dev/ttyGS0
@@ -187,24 +190,24 @@ support".
 
 Once the gadget serial driver is loaded and the USB device connected
 to the Linux host with a USB cable, the host system should recognize
-the gadget serial device.  For example, the command
+the gadget serial device.  For example, the command::
 
   cat /sys/kernel/debug/usb/devices
 
-should show something like this:
-
-T:  Bus=01 Lev=01 Prnt=01 Port=01 Cnt=02 Dev#=  5 Spd=480 MxCh= 0
-D:  Ver= 2.00 Cls=02(comm.) Sub=00 Prot=00 MxPS=64 #Cfgs=  1
-P:  Vendor=0525 ProdID=a4a7 Rev= 2.01
-S:  Manufacturer=Linux 2.6.8.1 with net2280
-S:  Product=Gadget Serial
-S:  SerialNumber=0
-C:* #Ifs= 2 Cfg#= 2 Atr=c0 MxPwr=  2mA
-I:  If#= 0 Alt= 0 #EPs= 1 Cls=02(comm.) Sub=02 Prot=01 Driver=acm
-E:  Ad=83(I) Atr=03(Int.) MxPS=   8 Ivl=32ms
-I:  If#= 1 Alt= 0 #EPs= 2 Cls=0a(data ) Sub=00 Prot=00 Driver=acm
-E:  Ad=81(I) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS= 512 Ivl=0ms
-E:  Ad=02(O) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS= 512 Ivl=0ms
+should show something like this:::
+
+  T:  Bus=01 Lev=01 Prnt=01 Port=01 Cnt=02 Dev#=  5 Spd=480 MxCh= 0
+  D:  Ver= 2.00 Cls=02(comm.) Sub=00 Prot=00 MxPS=64 #Cfgs=  1
+  P:  Vendor=0525 ProdID=a4a7 Rev= 2.01
+  S:  Manufacturer=Linux 2.6.8.1 with net2280
+  S:  Product=Gadget Serial
+  S:  SerialNumber=0
+  C:* #Ifs= 2 Cfg#= 2 Atr=c0 MxPwr=  2mA
+  I:  If#= 0 Alt= 0 #EPs= 1 Cls=02(comm.) Sub=02 Prot=01 Driver=acm
+  E:  Ad=83(I) Atr=03(Int.) MxPS=   8 Ivl=32ms
+  I:  If#= 1 Alt= 0 #EPs= 2 Cls=0a(data ) Sub=00 Prot=00 Driver=acm
+  E:  Ad=81(I) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS= 512 Ivl=0ms
+  E:  Ad=02(O) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS= 512 Ivl=0ms
 
 If the host side Linux system is configured properly, the ACM driver
 should be loaded automatically.  The command "lsmod" should show the
@@ -219,29 +222,29 @@ Serial Converter support", and for the "USB Generic Serial Driver".
 
 Once the gadget serial driver is loaded and the USB device connected
 to the Linux host with a USB cable, the host system should recognize
-the gadget serial device.  For example, the command
+the gadget serial device.  For example, the command::
 
   cat /sys/kernel/debug/usb/devices
 
-should show something like this:
+should show something like this:::
 
-T:  Bus=01 Lev=01 Prnt=01 Port=01 Cnt=02 Dev#=  6 Spd=480 MxCh= 0
-D:  Ver= 2.00 Cls=ff(vend.) Sub=00 Prot=00 MxPS=64 #Cfgs=  1
-P:  Vendor=0525 ProdID=a4a6 Rev= 2.01
-S:  Manufacturer=Linux 2.6.8.1 with net2280
-S:  Product=Gadget Serial
-S:  SerialNumber=0
-C:* #Ifs= 1 Cfg#= 1 Atr=c0 MxPwr=  2mA
-I:  If#= 0 Alt= 0 #EPs= 2 Cls=0a(data ) Sub=00 Prot=00 Driver=serial
-E:  Ad=81(I) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS= 512 Ivl=0ms
-E:  Ad=02(O) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS= 512 Ivl=0ms
+  T:  Bus=01 Lev=01 Prnt=01 Port=01 Cnt=02 Dev#=  6 Spd=480 MxCh= 0
+  D:  Ver= 2.00 Cls=ff(vend.) Sub=00 Prot=00 MxPS=64 #Cfgs=  1
+  P:  Vendor=0525 ProdID=a4a6 Rev= 2.01
+  S:  Manufacturer=Linux 2.6.8.1 with net2280
+  S:  Product=Gadget Serial
+  S:  SerialNumber=0
+  C:* #Ifs= 1 Cfg#= 1 Atr=c0 MxPwr=  2mA
+  I:  If#= 0 Alt= 0 #EPs= 2 Cls=0a(data ) Sub=00 Prot=00 Driver=serial
+  E:  Ad=81(I) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS= 512 Ivl=0ms
+  E:  Ad=02(O) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS= 512 Ivl=0ms
 
 You must load the usbserial driver and explicitly set its parameters
-to configure it to recognize the gadget serial device, like this:
+to configure it to recognize the gadget serial device, like this::
 
   echo 0x0525 0xA4A6 >/sys/bus/usb-serial/drivers/generic/new_id
 
-The legacy way is to use module parameters:
+The legacy way is to use module parameters::
 
   modprobe usbserial vendor=0x0525 product=0xA4A6
 
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/iuu_phoenix.txt b/Documentation/usb/iuu_phoenix.txt
index e5f048067da4..b76268728450 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/iuu_phoenix.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/iuu_phoenix.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
+=============================
 Infinity Usb Unlimited Readme
------------------------------
+=============================
 
 Hi all,
 
@@ -19,7 +20,8 @@ have his own device file(/dev/ttyUSB0,/dev/ttyUSB1,...)
 
 
 
-How to tune the reader speed ?
+How to tune the reader speed?
+=============================
 
  A few parameters can be used at load time
  To use parameters, just unload the module if it is
@@ -27,26 +29,33 @@ How to tune the reader speed ?
  In case of prebuilt module, use the command
  insmod iuu_phoenix param=value.
 
- Example:
+ Example::
 
- modprobe iuu_phoenix clockmode=3
+	modprobe iuu_phoenix clockmode=3
 
  The parameters are:
 
- parm:           clockmode:1=3Mhz579,2=3Mhz680,3=6Mhz (int)
- parm:           boost:overclock boost percent 100 to 500 (int)
- parm:           cdmode:Card detect mode 0=none, 1=CD, 2=!CD, 3=DSR, 4=!DSR, 5=CTS, 6=!CTS, 7=RING, 8=!RING (int)
- parm:           xmas:xmas color enabled or not (bool)
- parm:           debug:Debug enabled or not (bool)
+clockmode:
+	1=3Mhz579,2=3Mhz680,3=6Mhz (int)
+boost:
+	overclock boost percent 100 to 500 (int)
+cdmode:
+	Card detect mode
+	0=none, 1=CD, 2=!CD, 3=DSR, 4=!DSR, 5=CTS, 6=!CTS, 7=RING, 8=!RING (int)
+xmas:
+	xmas color enabled or not (bool)
+debug:
+	Debug enabled or not (bool)
 
 -  clockmode will provide 3 different base settings commonly adopted by
    different software:
- 	1. 3Mhz579
+
+	1. 3Mhz579
 	2. 3Mhz680
 	3. 6Mhz
 
 -  boost provide a way to overclock the reader ( my favorite :-)  )
-   For example to have best performance than a simple clockmode=3, try this:
+   For example to have best performance than a simple clockmode=3, try this::
 
       modprobe boost=195
 
@@ -66,7 +75,8 @@ How to tune the reader speed ?
 -  debug will produce a lot of debugging messages...
 
 
- Last notes:
+Last notes
+==========
 
  Don't worry about the serial settings, the serial emulation
  is an abstraction, so use any speed or parity setting will
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/mass-storage.txt b/Documentation/usb/mass-storage.txt
index e89803a5a960..d181b47c3cb6 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/mass-storage.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/mass-storage.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,9 @@
-* Overview
+=========================
+Mass Storage Gadget (MSG)
+=========================
+
+Overview
+========
 
   Mass Storage Gadget (or MSG) acts as a USB Mass Storage device,
   appearing to the host as a disk or a CD-ROM drive.  It supports
@@ -24,7 +29,8 @@
   (which is no longer included in Linux).  It will talk only briefly
   about how to use MSF within composite gadgets.
 
-* Module parameters
+Module parameters
+=================
 
   The mass storage gadget accepts the following mass storage specific
   module parameters:
@@ -146,7 +152,8 @@
   - iProduct      -- USB Product string (string)
   - iSerialNumber -- SerialNumber string (sting)
 
-* sysfs entries
+sysfs entries
+=============
 
   For each logical unit, the gadget creates a directory in the sysfs
   hierarchy.  Inside of it the following three files are created:
@@ -177,7 +184,8 @@
   Other then those, as usual, the values of module parameters can be
   read from /sys/module/g_mass_storage/parameters/* files.
 
-* Other gadgets using mass storage function
+Other gadgets using mass storage function
+=========================================
 
   The Mass Storage Gadget uses the Mass Storage Function to handle
   mass storage protocol.  As a composite function, MSF may be used by
@@ -193,7 +201,8 @@
   may take a look at mass_storage.c, acm_ms.c and multi.c (sorted by
   complexity).
 
-* Relation to file storage gadget
+Relation to file storage gadget
+===============================
 
   The Mass Storage Function and thus the Mass Storage Gadget has been
   based on the File Storage Gadget.  The difference between the two is
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/misc_usbsevseg.txt b/Documentation/usb/misc_usbsevseg.txt
index 0f6be4f9930b..6274aee083ed 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/misc_usbsevseg.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/misc_usbsevseg.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,7 @@
+=============================
 USB 7-Segment Numeric Display
+=============================
+
 Manufactured by Delcom Engineering
 
 Device Information
@@ -13,9 +16,13 @@ Device Modes
 ------------
 By default, the driver assumes the display is only 6 characters
 The mode for 6 characters is:
+
 	MSB 0x06; LSB 0x3f
+
 For the 8 character display:
+
 	MSB 0x08; LSB 0xff
+
 The device can accept "text" either in raw, hex, or ascii textmode.
 raw controls each segment manually,
 hex expects a value between 0-15 per character,
@@ -42,5 +49,3 @@ Device Operation
 	To set multiple decimals points sum up each power.
 	For example, to set the 0th and 3rd decimal place
 	echo 1001 > /sys/bus/usb/.../decimals
-
-
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/mtouchusb.txt b/Documentation/usb/mtouchusb.txt
index a91adb26ea7b..d1111b74bf75 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/mtouchusb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/mtouchusb.txt
@@ -1,19 +1,27 @@
-CHANGES
+================
+mtouchusb driver
+================
+
+Changes
+=======
 
 - 0.3 - Created based off of scanner & INSTALL from the original touchscreen
   driver on freecode (http://freecode.com/projects/3mtouchscreendriver)
 - Amended for linux-2.4.18, then 2.4.19
 
 - 0.5 - Complete rewrite using Linux Input in 2.6.3
-   Unfortunately no calibration support at this time
+  Unfortunately no calibration support at this time
 
 - 1.4 - Multiple changes to support the EXII 5000UC and house cleaning
-   Changed reset from standard USB dev reset to vendor reset
-   Changed data sent to host from compensated to raw coordinates
-   Eliminated vendor/product module params
-   Performed multiple successful tests with an EXII-5010UC
+  Changed reset from standard USB dev reset to vendor reset
+  Changed data sent to host from compensated to raw coordinates
+  Eliminated vendor/product module params
+  Performed multiple successful tests with an EXII-5010UC
+
+Supported Hardware
+==================
 
-SUPPORTED HARDWARE:
+::
 
         All controllers have the Vendor: 0x0596 & Product: 0x0001
 
@@ -29,9 +37,10 @@ SUPPORTED HARDWARE:
         USB Capacitive - Black Case     EXII-5030UC
         USB Capacitive - No Case        EXII-5050UC
 
-DRIVER NOTES:
+Driver Notes
+============
 
-Installation is simple, you only need to add Linux Input, Linux USB, and the 
+Installation is simple, you only need to add Linux Input, Linux USB, and the
 driver to the kernel.  The driver can also be optionally built as a module.
 
 This driver appears to be one of possible 2 Linux USB Input Touchscreen
@@ -49,24 +58,27 @@ The controller screen resolution is now 0 to 16384 for both X and Y reporting
 the raw touch data.  This is the same for the old and new capacitive USB
 controllers.
 
-Perhaps at some point an abstract function will be placed into evdev so 
-generic functions like calibrations, resets, and vendor information can be 
+Perhaps at some point an abstract function will be placed into evdev so
+generic functions like calibrations, resets, and vendor information can be
 requested from the userspace (And the drivers would handle the vendor specific
 tasks).
 
-TODO:
+TODO
+====
 
 Implement a control urb again to handle requests to and from the device
 such as calibration, etc once/if it becomes available.
 
-DISCLAIMER:
+Disclaimer
+==========
 
-I am not a MicroTouch/3M employee, nor have I ever been.  3M does not support 
+I am not a MicroTouch/3M employee, nor have I ever been.  3M does not support
 this driver!  If you want touch drivers only supported within X, please go to:
 
 http://www.3m.com/3MTouchSystems/
 
-THANKS:
+Thanks
+======
 
 A huge thank you to 3M Touch Systems for the EXII-5010UC controllers for
 testing!
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/ohci.txt b/Documentation/usb/ohci.txt
index 99320d9fa523..bb3c49719e6b 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/ohci.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/ohci.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+====
+OHCI
+====
+
 23-Aug-2002
 
 The "ohci-hcd" driver is a USB Host Controller Driver (HCD) that is derived
@@ -29,4 +33,3 @@ work on while the OS is getting around to the relevant IRQ processing.
 
 - David Brownell
   <dbrownell@users.sourceforge.net>
-
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/rio.txt b/Documentation/usb/rio.txt
index aee715af7db7..ea73475471db 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/rio.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/rio.txt
@@ -1,138 +1,109 @@
+============
+Diamonds Rio
+============
+
 Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Bruce Tenison
+
 Portions Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 David Nelson
+
 Thanks to David Nelson for guidance and the usage of the scanner.txt
 and scanner.c files to model our driver and this informative file.
 
 Mar. 2, 2000
 
-CHANGES
+Changes
+=======
 
 - Initial Revision
 
 
-OVERVIEW
+Overview
+========
 
 This README will address issues regarding how to configure the kernel
-to access a RIO 500 mp3 player.  
+to access a RIO 500 mp3 player.
 Before I explain how to use this to access the Rio500 please be warned:
 
-W A R N I N G:
---------------
+.. warning::
 
-Please note that this software is still under development.  The authors
-are in no way responsible for any damage that may occur, no matter how
-inconsequential.
+   Please note that this software is still under development.  The authors
+   are in no way responsible for any damage that may occur, no matter how
+   inconsequential.
 
 It seems that the Rio has a problem when sending .mp3 with low batteries.
 I suggest when the batteries are low and you want to transfer stuff that you
 replace it with a fresh one. In my case, what happened is I lost two 16kb
 blocks (they are no longer usable to store information to it). But I don't
-know if that's normal or not; it could simply be a problem with the flash 
+know if that's normal or not; it could simply be a problem with the flash
 memory.
 
-In an extreme case, I left my Rio playing overnight and the batteries wore 
-down to nothing and appear to have corrupted the flash memory. My RIO 
-needed to be replaced as a result.  Diamond tech support is aware of the 
-problem.  Do NOT allow your batteries to wear down to nothing before 
-changing them.  It appears RIO 500 firmware does not handle low battery 
-power well at all. 
+In an extreme case, I left my Rio playing overnight and the batteries wore
+down to nothing and appear to have corrupted the flash memory. My RIO
+needed to be replaced as a result.  Diamond tech support is aware of the
+problem.  Do NOT allow your batteries to wear down to nothing before
+changing them.  It appears RIO 500 firmware does not handle low battery
+power well at all.
 
-On systems with OHCI controllers, the kernel OHCI code appears to have 
-power on problems with some chipsets.  If you are having problems 
-connecting to your RIO 500, try turning it on first and then plugging it 
-into the USB cable.  
+On systems with OHCI controllers, the kernel OHCI code appears to have
+power on problems with some chipsets.  If you are having problems
+connecting to your RIO 500, try turning it on first and then plugging it
+into the USB cable.
 
-Contact information:
---------------------
+Contact Information
+-------------------
 
    The main page for the project is hosted at sourceforge.net in the following
    URL: <http://rio500.sourceforge.net>. You can also go to the project's
    sourceforge home page at: <http://sourceforge.net/projects/rio500/>.
    There is also a mailing list: rio500-users@lists.sourceforge.net
 
-Authors:
+Authors
 -------
 
-Most of the code was written by Cesar Miquel <miquel@df.uba.ar>. Keith 
+Most of the code was written by Cesar Miquel <miquel@df.uba.ar>. Keith
 Clayton <kclayton@jps.net> is incharge of the PPC port and making sure
 things work there. Bruce Tenison <btenison@dibbs.net> is adding support
 for .fon files and also does testing. The program will mostly sure be
 re-written and Pete Ikusz along with the rest will re-design it. I would
-also like to thank Tri Nguyen <tmn_3022000@hotmail.com> who provided use 
+also like to thank Tri Nguyen <tmn_3022000@hotmail.com> who provided use
 with some important information regarding the communication with the Rio.
 
-ADDITIONAL INFORMATION and Userspace tools
-
-http://rio500.sourceforge.net/
-
-
-REQUIREMENTS
-
-A host with a USB port.  Ideally, either a UHCI (Intel) or OHCI
-(Compaq and others) hardware port should work.
-
-A Linux development kernel (2.3.x) with USB support enabled or a
-backported version to linux-2.2.x.  See http://www.linux-usb.org for
-more information on accomplishing this.
-
-A Linux kernel with RIO 500 support enabled.
+Additional Information and userspace tools
 
-'lspci' which is only needed to determine the type of USB hardware
-available in your machine.
+	http://rio500.sourceforge.net/
 
-CONFIGURATION
 
-Using `lspci -v`, determine the type of USB hardware available.
+Requirements
+============
 
-  If you see something like:
+A host with a USB port running a Linux kernel with RIO 500 support enabled.
 
-    USB Controller: ......
-    Flags: .....
-    I/O ports at ....
+The driver is a module called rio500, which should be automatically loaded
+as you plug in your device. If that fails you can manually load it with
 
-  Then you have a UHCI based controller.
+  modprobe rio500
 
-  If you see something like:
+Udev should automatically create a device node as soon as plug in your device.
+If that fails, you can manually add a device for the USB rio500::
 
-     USB Controller: .....
-     Flags: ....
-     Memory at .....
+  mknod /dev/usb/rio500 c 180 64
 
-  Then you have a OHCI based controller.
-
-Using `make menuconfig` or your preferred method for configuring the
-kernel, select 'Support for USB', 'OHCI/UHCI' depending on your
-hardware (determined from the steps above), 'USB Diamond Rio500 support', and
-'Preliminary USB device filesystem'.  Compile and install the modules
-(you may need to execute `depmod -a` to update the module
-dependencies).
-
-Add a device for the USB rio500:
-  `mknod /dev/usb/rio500 c 180 64`
-
-Set appropriate permissions for /dev/usb/rio500 (don't forget about
-group and world permissions).  Both read and write permissions are
+In that case, set appropriate permissions for /dev/usb/rio500 (don't forget
+about group and world permissions).  Both read and write permissions are
 required for proper operation.
 
-Load the appropriate modules (if compiled as modules):
-
-  OHCI:
-    modprobe usbcore
-    modprobe usb-ohci
-    modprobe rio500
-
-  UHCI:
-    modprobe usbcore
-    modprobe usb-uhci  (or uhci)
-    modprobe rio500
-
 That's it.  The Rio500 Utils at: http://rio500.sourceforge.net should
 be able to access the rio500.
 
-BUGS
+Limits
+======
+
+You can use only a single rio500 device at a time with your computer.
+
+Bugs
+====
 
 If you encounter any problems feel free to drop me an email.
 
 Bruce Tenison
 btenison@dibbs.net
-
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/usb-help.txt b/Documentation/usb/usb-help.txt
index 4273ca2b86ba..dc23ecd4d802 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/usb-help.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/usb-help.txt
@@ -1,16 +1,17 @@
-usb-help.txt
+==============
+USB references
+==============
+
 2008-Mar-7
 
 For USB help other than the readme files that are located in
-Documentation/usb/*, see the following:
+`Documentation/usb/*`, see the following:
 
-Linux-USB project:  http://www.linux-usb.org
-  mirrors at        http://usb.in.tum.de/linux-usb/
-         and        http://it.linux-usb.org
-Linux USB Guide:    http://linux-usb.sourceforge.net
-Linux-USB device overview (working devices and drivers):
-                    http://www.qbik.ch/usb/devices/
+- Linux-USB project:  http://www.linux-usb.org
+  mirrors at          http://usb.in.tum.de/linux-usb/
+  and                 http://it.linux-usb.org
+- Linux USB Guide:    http://linux-usb.sourceforge.net
+- Linux-USB device overview (working devices and drivers):
+  http://www.qbik.ch/usb/devices/
 
 The Linux-USB mailing list is at linux-usb@vger.kernel.org
-
-###
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/usb-serial.txt b/Documentation/usb/usb-serial.txt
index ab100d6ee436..8fa7dbd3da9a 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/usb-serial.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/usb-serial.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,9 @@
-INTRODUCTION
+==========
+USB serial
+==========
+
+Introduction
+============
 
   The USB serial driver currently supports a number of different USB to
   serial converter products, as well as some devices that use a serial
@@ -8,13 +13,15 @@ INTRODUCTION
   the different devices.
 
 
-CONFIGURATION
+Configuration
+=============
 
   Currently the driver can handle up to 256 different serial interfaces at
-  one time. 
+  one time.
 
     The major number that the driver uses is 188 so to use the driver,
-    create the following nodes:
+    create the following nodes::
+
 	mknod /dev/ttyUSB0 c 188 0
 	mknod /dev/ttyUSB1 c 188 1
 	mknod /dev/ttyUSB2 c 188 2
@@ -28,12 +35,14 @@ CONFIGURATION
   When the device is connected and recognized by the driver, the driver
   will print to the system log, which node(s) the device has been bound
   to.
-  
 
-SPECIFIC DEVICES SUPPORTED
+
+Specific Devices Supported
+==========================
 
 
 ConnectTech WhiteHEAT 4 port converter
+--------------------------------------
 
   ConnectTech has been very forthcoming with information about their
   device, including providing a unit to test with.
@@ -46,6 +55,7 @@ ConnectTech WhiteHEAT 4 port converter
 
 
 HandSpring Visor, Palm USB, and Clié USB driver
+-----------------------------------------------
 
   This driver works with all HandSpring USB, Palm USB, and Sony Clié USB
   devices.
@@ -62,7 +72,7 @@ HandSpring Visor, Palm USB, and Clié USB driver
     This goes against the current documentation for pilot-xfer and other
     packages, but is the only way that it will work due to the hardware
     in the device.
-  
+
   When the device is connected, try talking to it on the second port
   (this is usually /dev/ttyUSB1 if you do not have any other usb-serial
   devices in the system.) The system log should tell you which port is
@@ -78,10 +88,10 @@ HandSpring Visor, Palm USB, and Clié USB driver
   try resetting the device, first a hot reset, and then a cold reset if
   necessary.  Some devices need this before they can talk to the USB port
   properly.
-  
+
   Devices that are not compiled into the kernel can be specified with module
   parameters.  e.g. modprobe visor vendor=0x54c product=0x66
-  
+
   There is a webpage and mailing lists for this portion of the driver at:
   http://sourceforge.net/projects/usbvisor/
 
@@ -90,6 +100,7 @@ HandSpring Visor, Palm USB, and Clié USB driver
 
 
 PocketPC PDA Driver
+-------------------
 
   This driver can be used to connect to Compaq iPAQ, HP Jornada, Casio EM500
   and other PDAs running Windows CE 3.0 or PocketPC 2002 using a USB
@@ -135,12 +146,13 @@ PocketPC PDA Driver
   be used to flash the ROM, as well as the microP code..  so much for needing
   Toshiba's $350 serial cable for flashing!! :D
   NOTE: This has NOT been tested. Use at your own risk.
- 
+
   For any questions or problems with the driver, please contact Ganesh
   Varadarajan <ganesh@veritas.com>
 
 
 Keyspan PDA Serial Adapter
+--------------------------
 
   Single port DB-9 serial adapter, pushed as a PDA adapter for iMacs (mostly
   sold in Macintosh catalogs, comes in a translucent white/green dongle).
@@ -148,32 +160,37 @@ Keyspan PDA Serial Adapter
   This driver also works for the Xircom/Entrega single port serial adapter.
 
   Current status:
+
    Things that work:
-     basic input/output (tested with 'cu')
-     blocking write when serial line can't keep up
-     changing baud rates (up to 115200)
-     getting/setting modem control pins (TIOCM{GET,SET,BIS,BIC})
-     sending break (although duration looks suspect)
+     - basic input/output (tested with 'cu')
+     - blocking write when serial line can't keep up
+     - changing baud rates (up to 115200)
+     - getting/setting modem control pins (TIOCM{GET,SET,BIS,BIC})
+     - sending break (although duration looks suspect)
+
    Things that don't:
-     device strings (as logged by kernel) have trailing binary garbage
-     device ID isn't right, might collide with other Keyspan products
-     changing baud rates ought to flush tx/rx to avoid mangled half characters
+     - device strings (as logged by kernel) have trailing binary garbage
+     - device ID isn't right, might collide with other Keyspan products
+     - changing baud rates ought to flush tx/rx to avoid mangled half characters
+
    Big Things on the todo list:
-     parity, 7 vs 8 bits per char, 1 or 2 stop bits
-     HW flow control
-     not all of the standard USB descriptors are handled: Get_Status, Set_Feature
-     O_NONBLOCK, select()
+     - parity, 7 vs 8 bits per char, 1 or 2 stop bits
+     - HW flow control
+     - not all of the standard USB descriptors are handled:
+       Get_Status, Set_Feature, O_NONBLOCK, select()
 
   For any questions or problems with this driver, please contact Brian
-  Warner at warner@lothar.com 
+  Warner at warner@lothar.com
 
 
 Keyspan USA-series Serial Adapters
+----------------------------------
 
-  Single, Dual and Quad port adapters - driver uses Keyspan supplied 
+  Single, Dual and Quad port adapters - driver uses Keyspan supplied
   firmware and is being developed with their support.
-  
+
   Current status:
+
     The USA-18X, USA-28X, USA-19, USA-19W and USA-49W are supported and
     have been pretty thoroughly tested at various baud rates with 8-N-1
     character settings.  Other character lengths and parity setups are
@@ -182,32 +199,37 @@ Keyspan USA-series Serial Adapters
     The USA-28 isn't yet supported though doing so should be pretty
     straightforward.  Contact the maintainer if you require this
     functionality.
-  
+
   More information is available at:
+
         http://www.carnationsoftware.com/carnation/Keyspan.html
-   
+
   For any questions or problems with this driver, please contact Hugh
   Blemings at hugh@misc.nu
 
 
 FTDI Single Port Serial Driver
+------------------------------
 
   This is a single port DB-25 serial adapter.
 
   Devices supported include:
-                -TripNav TN-200 USB GPS
-                -Navis Engineering Bureau CH-4711 USB GPS
+
+                - TripNav TN-200 USB GPS
+                - Navis Engineering Bureau CH-4711 USB GPS
 
   For any questions or problems with this driver, please contact Bill Ryder.
 
 
 ZyXEL omni.net lcd plus ISDN TA
+-------------------------------
 
   This is an ISDN TA. Please report both successes and troubles to
   azummo@towertech.it
 
 
 Cypress M8 CY4601 Family Serial Driver
+--------------------------------------
 
   This driver was in most part developed by Neil "koyama" Whelchel.  It
   has been improved since that previous form to support dynamic serial
@@ -215,18 +237,19 @@ Cypress M8 CY4601 Family Serial Driver
   part stable and has been tested on an smp machine. (dual p2)
 
     Chipsets supported under CY4601 family:
-	
+
 		CY7C63723, CY7C63742, CY7C63743, CY7C64013
 
     Devices supported:
 
-		-DeLorme's USB Earthmate GPS (SiRF Star II lp arch)
-		-Cypress HID->COM RS232 adapter
-	
-		Note: Cypress Semiconductor claims no affiliation with the
+		- DeLorme's USB Earthmate GPS (SiRF Star II lp arch)
+		- Cypress HID->COM RS232 adapter
+
+		Note:
+			Cypress Semiconductor claims no affiliation with the
 			hid->com device.
 
-	Most devices using chipsets under the CY4601 family should
+     Most devices using chipsets under the CY4601 family should
      work with the driver.  As long as they stay true to the CY4601
      usbserial specification.
 
@@ -236,8 +259,9 @@ Cypress M8 CY4601 Family Serial Driver
 	upon start init to this setting.  usbserial core provides the rest
 	of the termios settings, along with some custom termios so that the
 	output is in proper format and parsable.
-	
-	The device can be put into sirf mode by issuing NMEA command:
+
+	The device can be put into sirf mode by issuing NMEA command::
+
 		$PSRF100,<protocol>,<baud>,<databits>,<stopbits>,<parity>*CHECKSUM
 		$PSRF100,0,9600,8,1,0*0C
 
@@ -259,11 +283,14 @@ Cypress M8 CY4601 Family Serial Driver
 
 	If you have any questions, problems, patches, feature requests, etc. you can
 	contact me here via email:
+
 					dignome@gmail.com
+
 		(your problems/patches can alternately be submitted to usb-devel)
 
 
 Digi AccelePort Driver
+----------------------
 
   This driver supports the Digi AccelePort USB 2 and 4 devices, 2 port
   (plus a parallel port) and 4 port USB serial converters.  The driver
@@ -285,42 +312,49 @@ Digi AccelePort Driver
 
 
 Belkin USB Serial Adapter F5U103
+--------------------------------
 
   Single port DB-9/PS-2 serial adapter from Belkin with firmware by eTEK Labs.
   The Peracom single port serial adapter also works with this driver, as
   well as the GoHubs adapter.
 
   Current status:
+
     The following have been tested and work:
-      Baud rate    300-230400               
-      Data bits    5-8
-      Stop bits    1-2
-      Parity       N,E,O,M,S
-      Handshake    None, Software (XON/XOFF), Hardware (CTSRTS,CTSDTR)*
-      Break        Set and clear
-      Line control Input/Output query and control **
-
-      *  Hardware input flow control is only enabled for firmware
+
+      - Baud rate    300-230400
+      - Data bits    5-8
+      - Stop bits    1-2
+      - Parity       N,E,O,M,S
+      - Handshake    None, Software (XON/XOFF), Hardware (CTSRTS,CTSDTR) [1]_
+      - Break        Set and clear
+      - Line control Input/Output query and control [2]_
+
+  .. [1]
+         Hardware input flow control is only enabled for firmware
          levels above 2.06.  Read source code comments describing Belkin
          firmware errata.  Hardware output flow control is working for all
          firmware versions.
-      ** Queries of inputs (CTS,DSR,CD,RI) show the last
+
+  .. [2]
+         Queries of inputs (CTS,DSR,CD,RI) show the last
          reported state.  Queries of outputs (DTR,RTS) show the last
          requested state and may not reflect current state as set by
          automatic hardware flow control.
 
   TO DO List:
-    -- Add true modem control line query capability.  Currently tracks the
-       states reported by the interrupt and the states requested.
-    -- Add error reporting back to application for UART error conditions.
-    -- Add support for flush ioctls.
-    -- Add everything else that is missing :)
+    - Add true modem control line query capability.  Currently tracks the
+      states reported by the interrupt and the states requested.
+    - Add error reporting back to application for UART error conditions.
+    - Add support for flush ioctls.
+    - Add everything else that is missing :)
 
   For any questions or problems with this driver, please contact William
   Greathouse at wgreathouse@smva.com
 
 
 Empeg empeg-car Mark I/II Driver
+--------------------------------
 
   This is an experimental driver to provide connectivity support for the
   client synchronization tools for an Empeg empeg-car mp3 player.
@@ -335,6 +369,7 @@ Empeg empeg-car Mark I/II Driver
 
 
 MCT USB Single Port Serial Adapter U232
+---------------------------------------
 
   This driver is for the MCT USB-RS232 Converter (25 pin, Model No.
   U232-P25) from Magic Control Technology Corp. (there is also a 9 pin
@@ -355,35 +390,39 @@ MCT USB Single Port Serial Adapter U232
 
 
 Inside Out Networks Edgeport Driver
+-----------------------------------
 
   This driver supports all devices made by Inside Out Networks, specifically
   the following models:
-       Edgeport/4
-       Rapidport/4
-       Edgeport/4t
-       Edgeport/2
-       Edgeport/4i
-       Edgeport/2i
-       Edgeport/421
-       Edgeport/21
-       Edgeport/8
-       Edgeport/8 Dual
-       Edgeport/2D8
-       Edgeport/4D8
-       Edgeport/8i
-       Edgeport/2 DIN
-       Edgeport/4 DIN
-       Edgeport/16 Dual
+
+       - Edgeport/4
+       - Rapidport/4
+       - Edgeport/4t
+       - Edgeport/2
+       - Edgeport/4i
+       - Edgeport/2i
+       - Edgeport/421
+       - Edgeport/21
+       - Edgeport/8
+       - Edgeport/8 Dual
+       - Edgeport/2D8
+       - Edgeport/4D8
+       - Edgeport/8i
+       - Edgeport/2 DIN
+       - Edgeport/4 DIN
+       - Edgeport/16 Dual
 
   For any questions or problems with this driver, please contact Greg
   Kroah-Hartman at greg@kroah.com
 
 
 REINER SCT cyberJack pinpad/e-com USB chipcard reader
-   
+-----------------------------------------------------
+
   Interface to ISO 7816 compatible contactbased chipcards, e.g. GSM SIMs.
-  
+
   Current status:
+
     This is the kernel part of the driver for this USB card reader.
     There is also a user part for a CT-API driver available. A site
     for downloading is TBA. For now, you can request it from the
@@ -394,6 +433,7 @@ REINER SCT cyberJack pinpad/e-com USB chipcard reader
 
 
 Prolific PL2303 Driver
+----------------------
 
   This driver supports any device that has the PL2303 chip from Prolific
   in it.  This includes a number of single port USB to serial converters,
@@ -403,11 +443,13 @@ Prolific PL2303 Driver
 
   For any questions or problems with this driver, please contact Greg
   Kroah-Hartman at greg@kroah.com
-  
+
 
 KL5KUSB105 chipset / PalmConnect USB single-port adapter
-  
+--------------------------------------------------------
+
 Current status:
+
   The driver was put together by looking at the usb bus transactions
   done by Palm's driver under Windows, so a lot of functionality is
   still missing.  Notably, serial ioctls are sometimes faked or not yet
@@ -417,21 +459,25 @@ Current status:
   are supported, but handshaking (software or hardware) is not, which is
   why it is wise to cut down on the rate used is wise for large
   transfers until this is settled.
-  
+
   See http://www.uuhaus.de/linux/palmconnect.html for up-to-date
   information on this driver.
 
 Winchiphead CH341 Driver
+------------------------
 
   This driver is for the Winchiphead CH341 USB-RS232 Converter. This chip
   also implements an IEEE 1284 parallel port, I2C and SPI, but that is not
   supported by the driver. The protocol was analyzed from the behaviour
   of the Windows driver, no datasheet is available at present.
+
   The manufacturer's website: http://www.winchiphead.com/.
+
   For any questions or problems with this driver, please contact
   frank@kingswood-consulting.co.uk.
 
 Moschip MCS7720, MCS7715 driver
+-------------------------------
 
   These chips are present in devices sold by various manufacturers, such as Syba
   and Cables Unlimited.  There may be others.  The 7720 provides two serial
@@ -449,20 +495,24 @@ Moschip MCS7720, MCS7715 driver
       don't have one of these devices, so I can't say for sure.
 
 Generic Serial driver
+---------------------
 
   If your device is not one of the above listed devices, compatible with
   the above models, you can try out the "generic" interface. This
   interface does not provide any type of control messages sent to the
   device, and does not support any kind of device flow control. All that
   is required of your device is that it has at least one bulk in endpoint,
-  or one bulk out endpoint. 
+  or one bulk out endpoint.
+
+  To enable the generic driver to recognize your device, provide::
 
-  To enable the generic driver to recognize your device, provide
 	echo <vid> <pid> >/sys/bus/usb-serial/drivers/generic/new_id
+
   where the <vid> and <pid> is replaced with the hex representation of your
   device's vendor id and product id.
   If the driver is compiled as a module you can also provide one id when
-  loading the module
+  loading the module::
+
 	insmod usbserial vendor=0x#### product=0x####
 
   This driver has been successfully used to connect to the NetChip USB
@@ -473,7 +523,8 @@ Generic Serial driver
   Kroah-Hartman at greg@kroah.com
 
 
-CONTACT:
+Contact
+=======
 
   If anyone has any problems using these drivers, with any of the above
   specified products, please contact the specific driver's author listed
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/usbip_protocol.txt b/Documentation/usb/usbip_protocol.txt
index c7a0f4c7e7f1..988c832166cd 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/usbip_protocol.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/usbip_protocol.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+===============
+USB/IP protocol
+===============
+
 PRELIMINARY DRAFT, MAY CONTAIN MISTAKES!
 28 Jun 2011
 
@@ -12,6 +16,8 @@ in one or more pieces at the low level transport layer). The server sends back
 the OP_REP_DEVLIST packet which lists the exported USB devices. Finally the
 TCP/IP connection is closed.
 
+::
+
  virtual host controller                                 usb host
       "client"                                           "server"
   (imports USB devices)                             (exports USB devices)
@@ -32,6 +38,8 @@ send two types of packets: the USBIP_CMD_SUBMIT to submit an URB, and
 USBIP_CMD_UNLINK to unlink a previously submitted URB. The answers of the
 server may be USBIP_RET_SUBMIT and USBIP_RET_UNLINK respectively.
 
+::
+
  virtual host controller                                 usb host
       "client"                                           "server"
   (imports USB devices)                             (exports USB devices)
@@ -88,270 +96,316 @@ The fields are in network (big endian) byte order meaning that the most signific
 byte (MSB) is stored at the lowest address.
 
 
-OP_REQ_DEVLIST: Retrieve the list of exported USB devices.
+OP_REQ_DEVLIST:
+	Retrieve the list of exported USB devices.
 
- Offset    | Length | Value      | Description
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0         | 2      | 0x0100     | Binary-coded decimal USBIP version number: v1.0.0
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 2         | 2      | 0x8005     | Command code: Retrieve the list of exported USB
-           |        |            |   devices.
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 4         | 4      | 0x00000000 | Status: unused, shall be set to 0
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| Offset    | Length | Value      | Description                                       |
++===========+========+============+===================================================+
+| 0         | 2      | 0x0100     | Binary-coded decimal USBIP version number: v1.0.0 |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 2         | 2      | 0x8005     | Command code: Retrieve the list of exported USB   |
+|           |        |            | devices.                                          |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 4         | 4      | 0x00000000 | Status: unused, shall be set to 0                 |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
 
-OP_REP_DEVLIST: Reply with the list of exported USB devices.
+OP_REP_DEVLIST:
+	Reply with the list of exported USB devices.
 
- Offset    | Length | Value      | Description
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0         | 2      | 0x0100     | Binary-coded decimal USBIP version number: v1.0.0.
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 2         | 2      | 0x0005     | Reply code: The list of exported USB devices.
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 4         | 4      | 0x00000000 | Status: 0 for OK
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 8         | 4      | n          | Number of exported devices: 0 means no exported
-           |        |            |   devices.
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x0C      |        |            | From now on the exported n devices are described,
-           |        |            |   if any. If no devices are exported the message
-           |        |            |   ends with the previous "number of exported
-           |        |            |   devices" field.
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
-           | 256    |            | path: Path of the device on the host exporting the
-           |        |            |   USB device, string closed with zero byte, e.g.
-           |        |            |   "/sys/devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1d.1/usb3/3-2"
-           |        |            |   The unused bytes shall be filled with zero
-           |        |            |   bytes.
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x10C     | 32     |            | busid: Bus ID of the exported device, string
-           |        |            |   closed with zero byte, e.g. "3-2". The unused
-           |        |            |   bytes shall be filled with zero bytes.
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x12C     | 4      |            | busnum
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x130     | 4      |            | devnum
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x134     | 4      |            | speed
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x138     | 2      |            | idVendor
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x13A     | 2      |            | idProduct
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x13C     | 2      |            | bcdDevice
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x13E     | 1      |            | bDeviceClass
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x13F     | 1      |            | bDeviceSubClass
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x140     | 1      |            | bDeviceProtocol
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x141     | 1      |            | bConfigurationValue
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x142     | 1      |            | bNumConfigurations
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x143     | 1      |            | bNumInterfaces
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x144     |        | m_0        | From now on each interface is described, all
-           |        |            |   together bNumInterfaces times, with the
-           |        |            |   the following 4 fields:
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
-           | 1      |            | bInterfaceClass
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x145     | 1      |            | bInterfaceSubClass
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x146     | 1      |            | bInterfaceProtocol
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x147     | 1      |            | padding byte for alignment, shall be set to zero
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0xC +     |        |            | The second exported USB device starts at i=1
- i*0x138 + |        |            | with the busid field.
- m_(i-1)*4 |        |            |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| Offset    | Length | Value      | Description                                       |
++===========+========+============+===================================================+
+| 0         | 2      | 0x0100     | Binary-coded decimal USBIP version number: v1.0.0.|
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 2         | 2      | 0x0005     | Reply code: The list of exported USB devices.     |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 4         | 4      | 0x00000000 | Status: 0 for OK                                  |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 8         | 4      | n          | Number of exported devices: 0 means no exported   |
+|           |        |            | devices.                                          |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x0C      |        |            | From now on the exported n devices are described, |
+|           |        |            | if any. If no devices are exported the message    |
+|           |        |            | ends with the previous "number of exported        |
+|           |        |            | devices" field.                                   |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+|           | 256    |            | path: Path of the device on the host exporting the|
+|           |        |            | USB device, string closed with zero byte, e.g.    |
+|           |        |            | "/sys/devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1d.1/usb3/3-2"   |
+|           |        |            | The unused bytes shall be filled with zero        |
+|           |        |            | bytes.                                            |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x10C     | 32     |            | busid: Bus ID of the exported device, string      |
+|           |        |            | closed with zero byte, e.g. "3-2". The unused     |
+|           |        |            | bytes shall be filled with zero bytes.            |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x12C     | 4      |            | busnum                                            |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x130     | 4      |            | devnum                                            |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x134     | 4      |            | speed                                             |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x138     | 2      |            | idVendor                                          |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x13A     | 2      |            | idProduct                                         |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x13C     | 2      |            | bcdDevice                                         |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x13E     | 1      |            | bDeviceClass                                      |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x13F     | 1      |            | bDeviceSubClass                                   |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x140     | 1      |            | bDeviceProtocol                                   |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x141     | 1      |            | bConfigurationValue                               |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x142     | 1      |            | bNumConfigurations                                |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x143     | 1      |            | bNumInterfaces                                    |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x144     |        | m_0        | From now on each interface is described, all      |
+|           |        |            | together bNumInterfaces times, with the           |
+|           |        |            | the following 4 fields:                           |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+|           | 1      |            | bInterfaceClass                                   |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x145     | 1      |            | bInterfaceSubClass                                |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x146     | 1      |            | bInterfaceProtocol                                |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x147     | 1      |            | padding byte for alignment, shall be set to zero  |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0xC +     |        |            | The second exported USB device starts at i=1      |
+| i*0x138 + |        |            | with the busid field.                             |
+| m_(i-1)*4 |        |            |                                                   |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
 
-OP_REQ_IMPORT: Request to import (attach) a remote USB device.
+OP_REQ_IMPORT:
+	Request to import (attach) a remote USB device.
 
- Offset    | Length | Value      | Description
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0         | 2      | 0x0100     | Binary-coded decimal USBIP version number: v1.0.0
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 2         | 2      | 0x8003     | Command code: import a remote USB device.
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 4         | 4      | 0x00000000 | Status: unused, shall be set to 0
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 8         | 32     |            | busid: the busid of the exported device on the
-           |        |            |   remote host. The possible values are taken
-           |        |            |   from the message field OP_REP_DEVLIST.busid.
-           |        |            |   A string closed with zero, the unused bytes
-           |        |            |   shall be filled with zeros.
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| Offset    | Length | Value      | Description                                       |
++===========+========+============+===================================================+
+| 0         | 2      | 0x0100     | Binary-coded decimal USBIP version number: v1.0.0 |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 2         | 2      | 0x8003     | Command code: import a remote USB device.         |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 4         | 4      | 0x00000000 | Status: unused, shall be set to 0                 |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 8         | 32     |            | busid: the busid of the exported device on the    |
+|           |        |            | remote host. The possible values are taken        |
+|           |        |            | from the message field OP_REP_DEVLIST.busid.      |
+|           |        |            | A string closed with zero, the unused bytes       |
+|           |        |            | shall be filled with zeros.                       |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
 
-OP_REP_IMPORT: Reply to import (attach) a remote USB device.
+OP_REP_IMPORT:
+	Reply to import (attach) a remote USB device.
 
- Offset    | Length | Value      | Description
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0         | 2      | 0x0100     | Binary-coded decimal USBIP version number: v1.0.0
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 2         | 2      | 0x0003     | Reply code: Reply to import.
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 4         | 4      | 0x00000000 | Status: 0 for OK
-           |        |            |         1 for error
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 8         |        |            | From now on comes the details of the imported
-           |        |            |   device, if the previous status field was OK (0),
-           |        |            |   otherwise the reply ends with the status field.
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
-           | 256    |            | path: Path of the device on the host exporting the
-           |        |            |   USB device, string closed with zero byte, e.g.
-           |        |            |   "/sys/devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1d.1/usb3/3-2"
-           |        |            |   The unused bytes shall be filled with zero
-           |        |            |   bytes.
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x108     | 32     |            | busid: Bus ID of the exported device, string
-           |        |            |   closed with zero byte, e.g. "3-2". The unused
-           |        |            |   bytes shall be filled with zero bytes.
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x128     | 4      |            | busnum
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x12C     | 4      |            | devnum
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x130     | 4      |            | speed
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x134     | 2      |            | idVendor
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x136     | 2      |            | idProduct
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x138     | 2      |            | bcdDevice
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x139     | 1      |            | bDeviceClass
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x13A     | 1      |            | bDeviceSubClass
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x13B     | 1      |            | bDeviceProtocol
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x13C     | 1      |            | bConfigurationValue
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x13D     | 1      |            | bNumConfigurations
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x13E     | 1      |            | bNumInterfaces
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| Offset    | Length | Value      | Description                                       |
++===========+========+============+===================================================+
+| 0         | 2      | 0x0100     | Binary-coded decimal USBIP version number: v1.0.0 |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 2         | 2      | 0x0003     | Reply code: Reply to import.                      |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 4         | 4      | 0x00000000 | Status:                                           |
+|           |        |            |                                                   |
+|           |        |            |   - 0 for OK                                      |
+|           |        |            |   - 1 for error                                   |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 8         |        |            | From now on comes the details of the imported     |
+|           |        |            | device, if the previous status field was OK (0),  |
+|           |        |            | otherwise the reply ends with the status field.   |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+|           | 256    |            | path: Path of the device on the host exporting the|
+|           |        |            | USB device, string closed with zero byte, e.g.    |
+|           |        |            | "/sys/devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1d.1/usb3/3-2"   |
+|           |        |            | The unused bytes shall be filled with zero        |
+|           |        |            | bytes.                                            |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x108     | 32     |            | busid: Bus ID of the exported device, string      |
+|           |        |            | closed with zero byte, e.g. "3-2". The unused     |
+|           |        |            | bytes shall be filled with zero bytes.            |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x128     | 4      |            | busnum                                            |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x12C     | 4      |            | devnum                                            |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x130     | 4      |            | speed                                             |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x134     | 2      |            | idVendor                                          |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x136     | 2      |            | idProduct                                         |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x138     | 2      |            | bcdDevice                                         |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x139     | 1      |            | bDeviceClass                                      |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x13A     | 1      |            | bDeviceSubClass                                   |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x13B     | 1      |            | bDeviceProtocol                                   |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x13C     | 1      |            | bConfigurationValue                               |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x13D     | 1      |            | bNumConfigurations                                |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x13E     | 1      |            | bNumInterfaces                                    |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
 
-USBIP_CMD_SUBMIT: Submit an URB
+USBIP_CMD_SUBMIT:
+	Submit an URB
 
- Offset    | Length | Value      | Description
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0         | 4      | 0x00000001 | command: Submit an URB
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 4         | 4      |            | seqnum: the sequence number of the URB to submit
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 8         | 4      |            | devid
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0xC       | 4      |            | direction: 0: USBIP_DIR_OUT
-           |        |            |            1: USBIP_DIR_IN
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x10      | 4      |            | ep: endpoint number, possible values are: 0...15
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x14      | 4      |            | transfer_flags: possible values depend on the
-           |        |            |   URB transfer type, see below
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x18      | 4      |            | transfer_buffer_length
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x1C      | 4      |            | start_frame: specify the selected frame to
-           |        |            |   transmit an ISO frame, ignored if URB_ISO_ASAP
-           |        |            |   is specified at transfer_flags
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x20      | 4      |            | number_of_packets: number of ISO packets
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x24      | 4      |            | interval: maximum time for the request on the
-           |        |            |   server-side host controller
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x28      | 8      |            | setup: data bytes for USB setup, filled with
-           |        |            |   zeros if not used
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x30      |        |            | URB data. For ISO transfers the padding between
-           |        |            |   each ISO packets is not transmitted.
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| Offset    | Length | Value      | Description                                       |
++===========+========+============+===================================================+
+| 0         | 4      | 0x00000001 | command: Submit an URB                            |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 4         | 4      |            | seqnum: the sequence number of the URB to submit  |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 8         | 4      |            | devid                                             |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0xC       | 4      |            | direction:                                        |
+|           |        |            |                                                   |
+|           |        |            |    - 0: USBIP_DIR_OUT                             |
+|           |        |            |    - 1: USBIP_DIR_IN                              |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x10      | 4      |            | ep: endpoint number, possible values are: 0...15  |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x14      | 4      |            | transfer_flags: possible values depend on the     |
+|           |        |            | URB transfer type, see below                      |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x18      | 4      |            | transfer_buffer_length                            |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x1C      | 4      |            | start_frame: specify the selected frame to        |
+|           |        |            | transmit an ISO frame, ignored if URB_ISO_ASAP    |
+|           |        |            | is specified at transfer_flags                    |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x20      | 4      |            | number_of_packets: number of ISO packets          |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x24      | 4      |            | interval: maximum time for the request on the     |
+|           |        |            | server-side host controller                       |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x28      | 8      |            | setup: data bytes for USB setup, filled with      |
+|           |        |            | zeros if not used                                 |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x30      |        |            | URB data. For ISO transfers the padding between   |
+|           |        |            | each ISO packets is not transmitted.              |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
 
 
-  Allowed transfer_flags  | value      | control | interrupt | bulk     | isochronous
- -------------------------+------------+---------+-----------+----------+-------------
-  URB_SHORT_NOT_OK        | 0x00000001 | only in | only in   | only in  | no
-  URB_ISO_ASAP            | 0x00000002 | no      | no        | no       | yes
-  URB_NO_TRANSFER_DMA_MAP | 0x00000004 | yes     | yes       | yes      | yes
-  URB_ZERO_PACKET         | 0x00000040 | no      | no        | only out | no
-  URB_NO_INTERRUPT        | 0x00000080 | yes     | yes       | yes      | yes
-  URB_FREE_BUFFER         | 0x00000100 | yes     | yes       | yes      | yes
-  URB_DIR_MASK            | 0x00000200 | yes     | yes       | yes      | yes
+ +-------------------------+------------+---------+-----------+----------+-------------+
+ | Allowed transfer_flags  | value      | control | interrupt | bulk     | isochronous |
+ +=========================+============+=========+===========+==========+=============+
+ | URB_SHORT_NOT_OK        | 0x00000001 | only in | only in   | only in  | no          |
+ +-------------------------+------------+---------+-----------+----------+-------------+
+ | URB_ISO_ASAP            | 0x00000002 | no      | no        | no       | yes         |
+ +-------------------------+------------+---------+-----------+----------+-------------+
+ | URB_NO_TRANSFER_DMA_MAP | 0x00000004 | yes     | yes       | yes      | yes         |
+ +-------------------------+------------+---------+-----------+----------+-------------+
+ | URB_ZERO_PACKET         | 0x00000040 | no      | no        | only out | no          |
+ +-------------------------+------------+---------+-----------+----------+-------------+
+ | URB_NO_INTERRUPT        | 0x00000080 | yes     | yes       | yes      | yes         |
+ +-------------------------+------------+---------+-----------+----------+-------------+
+ | URB_FREE_BUFFER         | 0x00000100 | yes     | yes       | yes      | yes         |
+ +-------------------------+------------+---------+-----------+----------+-------------+
+ | URB_DIR_MASK            | 0x00000200 | yes     | yes       | yes      | yes         |
+ +-------------------------+------------+---------+-----------+----------+-------------+
 
 
-USBIP_RET_SUBMIT: Reply for submitting an URB
+USBIP_RET_SUBMIT:
+	Reply for submitting an URB
 
- Offset    | Length | Value      | Description
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0         | 4      | 0x00000003 | command
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 4         | 4      |            | seqnum: URB sequence number
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 8         | 4      |            | devid
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0xC       | 4      |            | direction: 0: USBIP_DIR_OUT
-           |        |            |            1: USBIP_DIR_IN
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x10      | 4      |            | ep: endpoint number
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x14      | 4      |            | status: zero for successful URB transaction,
-           |        |            |   otherwise some kind of error happened.
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x18      | 4      | n          | actual_length: number of URB data bytes
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x1C      | 4      |            | start_frame: for an ISO frame the actually
-           |        |            |   selected frame for transmit.
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x20      | 4      |            | number_of_packets
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x24      | 4      |            | error_count
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x28      | 8      |            | setup: data bytes for USB setup, filled with
-           |        |            |   zeros if not used
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x30      | n      |            | URB data bytes. For ISO transfers the padding
-           |        |            |   between each ISO packets is not transmitted.
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| Offset    | Length | Value      | Description                                       |
++===========+========+============+===================================================+
+| 0         | 4      | 0x00000003 | command                                           |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 4         | 4      |            | seqnum: URB sequence number                       |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 8         | 4      |            | devid                                             |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0xC       | 4      |            | direction:                                        |
+|           |        |            |                                                   |
+|           |        |            |    - 0: USBIP_DIR_OUT                             |
+|           |        |            |    - 1: USBIP_DIR_IN                              |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x10      | 4      |            | ep: endpoint number                               |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x14      | 4      |            | status: zero for successful URB transaction,      |
+|           |        |            | otherwise some kind of error happened.            |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x18      | 4      | n          | actual_length: number of URB data bytes           |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x1C      | 4      |            | start_frame: for an ISO frame the actually        |
+|           |        |            | selected frame for transmit.                      |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x20      | 4      |            | number_of_packets                                 |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x24      | 4      |            | error_count                                       |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x28      | 8      |            | setup: data bytes for USB setup, filled with      |
+|           |        |            | zeros if not used                                 |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x30      | n      |            | URB data bytes. For ISO transfers the padding     |
+|           |        |            | between each ISO packets is not transmitted.      |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
 
-USBIP_CMD_UNLINK: Unlink an URB
+USBIP_CMD_UNLINK:
+	Unlink an URB
 
- Offset    | Length | Value      | Description
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0         | 4      | 0x00000002 | command: URB unlink command
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 4         | 4      |            | seqnum: URB sequence number to unlink: FIXME: is this so?
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 8         | 4      |            | devid
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0xC       | 4      |            | direction: 0: USBIP_DIR_OUT
-           |        |            |            1: USBIP_DIR_IN
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x10      | 4      |            | ep: endpoint number: zero
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x14      | 4      |            | seqnum: the URB sequence number given previously
-           |        |            |   at USBIP_CMD_SUBMIT.seqnum field
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x30      | n      |            | URB data bytes. For ISO transfers the padding
-           |        |            |   between each ISO packets is not transmitted.
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| Offset    | Length | Value      | Description                                       |
++===========+========+============+===================================================+
+| 0         | 4      | 0x00000002 | command: URB unlink command                       |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 4         | 4      |            | seqnum: URB sequence number to unlink:            |
+|           |        |            |                                                   |
+|           |        |            | FIXME:                                            |
+|           |        |            |    is this so?                                    |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 8         | 4      |            | devid                                             |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0xC       | 4      |            | direction:                                        |
+|           |        |            |                                                   |
+|           |        |            |    - 0: USBIP_DIR_OUT                             |
+|           |        |            |    - 1: USBIP_DIR_IN                              |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x10      | 4      |            | ep: endpoint number: zero                         |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x14      | 4      |            | seqnum: the URB sequence number given previously  |
+|           |        |            | at USBIP_CMD_SUBMIT.seqnum field                  |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x30      | n      |            | URB data bytes. For ISO transfers the padding     |
+|           |        |            | between each ISO packets is not transmitted.      |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
 
-USBIP_RET_UNLINK: Reply for URB unlink
+USBIP_RET_UNLINK:
+	Reply for URB unlink
 
- Offset    | Length | Value      | Description
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0         | 4      | 0x00000004 | command: reply for the URB unlink command
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 4         | 4      |            | seqnum: the unlinked URB sequence number
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 8         | 4      |            | devid
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0xC       | 4      |            | direction: 0: USBIP_DIR_OUT
-           |        |            |            1: USBIP_DIR_IN
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x10      | 4      |            | ep: endpoint number
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x14      | 4      |            | status: This is the value contained in the
-           |        |            |   urb->status in the URB completition handler.
-           |        |            |   FIXME: a better explanation needed.
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x30      | n      |            | URB data bytes. For ISO transfers the padding
-           |        |            |   between each ISO packets is not transmitted.
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| Offset    | Length | Value      | Description                                       |
++===========+========+============+===================================================+
+| 0         | 4      | 0x00000004 | command: reply for the URB unlink command         |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 4         | 4      |            | seqnum: the unlinked URB sequence number          |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 8         | 4      |            | devid                                             |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0xC       | 4      |            | direction:                                        |
+|           |        |            |                                                   |
+|           |        |            |    - 0: USBIP_DIR_OUT                             |
+|           |        |            |    - 1: USBIP_DIR_IN                              |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x10      | 4      |            | ep: endpoint number                               |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x14      | 4      |            | status: This is the value contained in the        |
+|           |        |            | urb->status in the URB completition handler.      |
+|           |        |            |                                                   |
+|           |        |            | FIXME:                                            |
+|           |        |            |      a better explanation needed.                 |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x30      | n      |            | URB data bytes. For ISO transfers the padding     |
+|           |        |            | between each ISO packets is not transmitted.      |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/usbmon.txt b/Documentation/usb/usbmon.txt
index 28425f736756..b0bd51080799 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/usbmon.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/usbmon.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,9 @@
-* Introduction
+======
+usbmon
+======
+
+Introduction
+============
 
 The name "usbmon" in lowercase refers to a facility in kernel which is
 used to collect traces of I/O on the USB bus. This function is analogous
@@ -16,7 +21,8 @@ Two APIs are currently implemented: "text" and "binary". The binary API
 is available through a character device in /dev namespace and is an ABI.
 The text API is deprecated since 2.6.35, but available for convenience.
 
-* How to use usbmon to collect raw text traces
+How to use usbmon to collect raw text traces
+============================================
 
 Unlike the packet socket, usbmon has an interface which provides traces
 in a text format. This is used for two purposes. First, it serves as a
@@ -26,38 +32,41 @@ are finalized. Second, humans can read it in case tools are not available.
 To collect a raw text trace, execute following steps.
 
 1. Prepare
+----------
 
 Mount debugfs (it has to be enabled in your kernel configuration), and
 load the usbmon module (if built as module). The second step is skipped
-if usbmon is built into the kernel.
+if usbmon is built into the kernel::
 
-# mount -t debugfs none_debugs /sys/kernel/debug
-# modprobe usbmon
-#
+	# mount -t debugfs none_debugs /sys/kernel/debug
+	# modprobe usbmon
+	#
 
-Verify that bus sockets are present.
+Verify that bus sockets are present:
 
-# ls /sys/kernel/debug/usb/usbmon
-0s  0u  1s  1t  1u  2s  2t  2u  3s  3t  3u  4s  4t  4u
-#
+	# ls /sys/kernel/debug/usb/usbmon
+	0s  0u  1s  1t  1u  2s  2t  2u  3s  3t  3u  4s  4t  4u
+	#
 
 Now you can choose to either use the socket '0u' (to capture packets on all
 buses), and skip to step #3, or find the bus used by your device with step #2.
 This allows to filter away annoying devices that talk continuously.
 
 2. Find which bus connects to the desired device
+------------------------------------------------
 
 Run "cat /sys/kernel/debug/usb/devices", and find the T-line which corresponds
 to the device. Usually you do it by looking for the vendor string. If you have
 many similar devices, unplug one and compare the two
 /sys/kernel/debug/usb/devices outputs. The T-line will have a bus number.
-Example:
 
-T:  Bus=03 Lev=01 Prnt=01 Port=00 Cnt=01 Dev#=  2 Spd=12  MxCh= 0
-D:  Ver= 1.10 Cls=00(>ifc ) Sub=00 Prot=00 MxPS= 8 #Cfgs=  1
-P:  Vendor=0557 ProdID=2004 Rev= 1.00
-S:  Manufacturer=ATEN
-S:  Product=UC100KM V2.00
+Example::
+
+  T:  Bus=03 Lev=01 Prnt=01 Port=00 Cnt=01 Dev#=  2 Spd=12  MxCh= 0
+  D:  Ver= 1.10 Cls=00(>ifc ) Sub=00 Prot=00 MxPS= 8 #Cfgs=  1
+  P:  Vendor=0557 ProdID=2004 Rev= 1.00
+  S:  Manufacturer=ATEN
+  S:  Product=UC100KM V2.00
 
 "Bus=03" means it's bus 3. Alternatively, you can look at the output from
 "lsusb" and get the bus number from the appropriate line. Example:
@@ -65,23 +74,28 @@ S:  Product=UC100KM V2.00
 Bus 003 Device 002: ID 0557:2004 ATEN UC100KM V2.00
 
 3. Start 'cat'
+--------------
+
+::
 
-# cat /sys/kernel/debug/usb/usbmon/3u > /tmp/1.mon.out
+	# cat /sys/kernel/debug/usb/usbmon/3u > /tmp/1.mon.out
 
-to listen on a single bus, otherwise, to listen on all buses, type:
+to listen on a single bus, otherwise, to listen on all buses, type::
 
-# cat /sys/kernel/debug/usb/usbmon/0u > /tmp/1.mon.out
+	# cat /sys/kernel/debug/usb/usbmon/0u > /tmp/1.mon.out
 
 This process will read until it is killed. Naturally, the output can be
 redirected to a desirable location. This is preferred, because it is going
 to be quite long.
 
 4. Perform the desired operation on the USB bus
+-----------------------------------------------
 
 This is where you do something that creates the traffic: plug in a flash key,
 copy files, control a webcam, etc.
 
 5. Kill cat
+-----------
 
 Usually it's done with a keyboard interrupt (Control-C).
 
@@ -89,7 +103,8 @@ At this point the output file (/tmp/1.mon.out in this example) can be saved,
 sent by e-mail, or inspected with a text editor. In the last case make sure
 that the file size is not excessive for your favourite editor.
 
-* Raw text data format
+Raw text data format
+====================
 
 Two formats are supported currently: the original, or '1t' format, and
 the '1u' format. The '1t' format is deprecated in kernel 2.6.21. The '1u'
@@ -122,10 +137,14 @@ Here is the list of words, from left to right:
 - "Address" word (formerly a "pipe"). It consists of four fields, separated by
   colons: URB type and direction, Bus number, Device address, Endpoint number.
   Type and direction are encoded with two bytes in the following manner:
+
+    == ==   =============================
     Ci Co   Control input and output
     Zi Zo   Isochronous input and output
     Ii Io   Interrupt input and output
     Bi Bo   Bulk input and output
+    == ==   =============================
+
   Bus number, Device address, and Endpoint are decimal numbers, but they may
   have leading zeros, for the sake of human readers.
 
@@ -178,24 +197,25 @@ Here is the list of words, from left to right:
 
 Examples:
 
-An input control transfer to get a port status.
+An input control transfer to get a port status::
 
-d5ea89a0 3575914555 S Ci:1:001:0 s a3 00 0000 0003 0004 4 <
-d5ea89a0 3575914560 C Ci:1:001:0 0 4 = 01050000
+  d5ea89a0 3575914555 S Ci:1:001:0 s a3 00 0000 0003 0004 4 <
+  d5ea89a0 3575914560 C Ci:1:001:0 0 4 = 01050000
 
 An output bulk transfer to send a SCSI command 0x28 (READ_10) in a 31-byte
-Bulk wrapper to a storage device at address 5:
+Bulk wrapper to a storage device at address 5::
 
-dd65f0e8 4128379752 S Bo:1:005:2 -115 31 = 55534243 ad000000 00800000 80010a28 20000000 20000040 00000000 000000
-dd65f0e8 4128379808 C Bo:1:005:2 0 31 >
+  dd65f0e8 4128379752 S Bo:1:005:2 -115 31 = 55534243 ad000000 00800000 80010a28 20000000 20000040 00000000 000000
+  dd65f0e8 4128379808 C Bo:1:005:2 0 31 >
 
-* Raw binary format and API
+Raw binary format and API
+=========================
 
 The overall architecture of the API is about the same as the one above,
 only the events are delivered in binary format. Each event is sent in
-the following structure (its name is made up, so that we can refer to it):
+the following structure (its name is made up, so that we can refer to it)::
 
-struct usbmon_packet {
+  struct usbmon_packet {
 	u64 id;			/*  0: URB ID - from submission to callback */
 	unsigned char type;	/*  8: Same as text; extensible. */
 	unsigned char xfer_type; /*    ISO (0), Intr, Control, Bulk (3) */
@@ -220,7 +240,7 @@ struct usbmon_packet {
 	int start_frame;	/* 52: For ISO */
 	unsigned int xfer_flags; /* 56: copy of URB's transfer_flags */
 	unsigned int ndesc;	/* 60: Actual number of ISO descriptors */
-};				/* 64 total length */
+  };				/* 64 total length */
 
 These events can be received from a character device by reading with read(2),
 with an ioctl(2), or by accessing the buffer with mmap. However, read(2)
@@ -244,12 +264,12 @@ no events are available.
 
  MON_IOCG_STATS, defined as _IOR(MON_IOC_MAGIC, 3, struct mon_bin_stats)
 
-The argument is a pointer to the following structure:
+The argument is a pointer to the following structure::
 
-struct mon_bin_stats {
+  struct mon_bin_stats {
 	u32 queued;
 	u32 dropped;
-};
+  };
 
 The member "queued" refers to the number of events currently queued in the
 buffer (and not to the number of events processed since the last reset).
@@ -273,13 +293,13 @@ This call returns the current size of the buffer in bytes.
 
 These calls wait for events to arrive if none were in the kernel buffer,
 then return the first event. The argument is a pointer to the following
-structure:
+structure::
 
-struct mon_get_arg {
+  struct mon_get_arg {
 	struct usbmon_packet *hdr;
 	void *data;
 	size_t alloc;		/* Length of data (can be zero) */
-};
+  };
 
 Before the call, hdr, data, and alloc should be filled. Upon return, the area
 pointed by hdr contains the next event structure, and the data buffer contains
@@ -290,13 +310,13 @@ The MON_IOCX_GET copies 48 bytes to hdr area, MON_IOCX_GETX copies 64 bytes.
  MON_IOCX_MFETCH, defined as _IOWR(MON_IOC_MAGIC, 7, struct mon_mfetch_arg)
 
 This ioctl is primarily used when the application accesses the buffer
-with mmap(2). Its argument is a pointer to the following structure:
+with mmap(2). Its argument is a pointer to the following structure::
 
-struct mon_mfetch_arg {
+  struct mon_mfetch_arg {
 	uint32_t *offvec;	/* Vector of events fetched */
 	uint32_t nfetch;	/* Number of events to fetch (out: fetched) */
 	uint32_t nflush;	/* Number of events to flush */
-};
+  };
 
 The ioctl operates in 3 stages.
 
@@ -329,7 +349,7 @@ be polled with select(2) and poll(2). But lseek(2) does not work.
 The basic idea is simple:
 
 To prepare, map the buffer by getting the current size, then using mmap(2).
-Then, execute a loop similar to the one written in pseudo-code below:
+Then, execute a loop similar to the one written in pseudo-code below::
 
    struct mon_mfetch_arg fetch;
    struct usbmon_packet *hdr;
diff --git a/Documentation/userspace-api/seccomp_filter.rst b/Documentation/userspace-api/seccomp_filter.rst
index b1b846d8a094..bd9165241b6c 100644
--- a/Documentation/userspace-api/seccomp_filter.rst
+++ b/Documentation/userspace-api/seccomp_filter.rst
@@ -123,9 +123,9 @@ In precedence order, they are:
 	to userland as the errno without executing the system call.
 
 ``SECCOMP_RET_USER_NOTIF``:
-    Results in a ``struct seccomp_notif`` message sent on the userspace
-    notification fd, if it is attached, or ``-ENOSYS`` if it is not. See below
-    on discussion of how to handle user notifications.
+	Results in a ``struct seccomp_notif`` message sent on the userspace
+	notification fd, if it is attached, or ``-ENOSYS`` if it is not. See
+	below on discussion of how to handle user notifications.
 
 ``SECCOMP_RET_TRACE``:
 	When returned, this value will cause the kernel to attempt to
@@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ In precedence order, they are:
 	call.  If there is no tracer present, ``-ENOSYS`` is returned to
 	userland and the system call is not executed.
 
-	A tracer will be notified if it requests ``PTRACE_O_TRACESECCOM``P
+	A tracer will be notified if it requests ``PTRACE_O_TRACESECCOMP``
 	using ``ptrace(PTRACE_SETOPTIONS)``.  The tracer will be notified
 	of a ``PTRACE_EVENT_SECCOMP`` and the ``SECCOMP_RET_DATA`` portion of
 	the BPF program return value will be available to the tracer
diff --git a/Documentation/userspace-api/spec_ctrl.rst b/Documentation/userspace-api/spec_ctrl.rst
index c4dbe6f7cdae..7ddd8f667459 100644
--- a/Documentation/userspace-api/spec_ctrl.rst
+++ b/Documentation/userspace-api/spec_ctrl.rst
@@ -28,18 +28,20 @@ PR_GET_SPECULATION_CTRL returns the state of the speculation misfeature
 which is selected with arg2 of prctl(2). The return value uses bits 0-3 with
 the following meaning:
 
-==== ===================== ===================================================
-Bit  Define                Description
-==== ===================== ===================================================
-0    PR_SPEC_PRCTL         Mitigation can be controlled per task by
-                           PR_SET_SPECULATION_CTRL.
-1    PR_SPEC_ENABLE        The speculation feature is enabled, mitigation is
-                           disabled.
-2    PR_SPEC_DISABLE       The speculation feature is disabled, mitigation is
-                           enabled.
-3    PR_SPEC_FORCE_DISABLE Same as PR_SPEC_DISABLE, but cannot be undone. A
-                           subsequent prctl(..., PR_SPEC_ENABLE) will fail.
-==== ===================== ===================================================
+==== ====================== ==================================================
+Bit  Define                 Description
+==== ====================== ==================================================
+0    PR_SPEC_PRCTL          Mitigation can be controlled per task by
+                            PR_SET_SPECULATION_CTRL.
+1    PR_SPEC_ENABLE         The speculation feature is enabled, mitigation is
+                            disabled.
+2    PR_SPEC_DISABLE        The speculation feature is disabled, mitigation is
+                            enabled.
+3    PR_SPEC_FORCE_DISABLE  Same as PR_SPEC_DISABLE, but cannot be undone. A
+                            subsequent prctl(..., PR_SPEC_ENABLE) will fail.
+4    PR_SPEC_DISABLE_NOEXEC Same as PR_SPEC_DISABLE, but the state will be
+                            cleared on :manpage:`execve(2)`.
+==== ====================== ==================================================
 
 If all bits are 0 the CPU is not affected by the speculation misfeature.
 
@@ -47,6 +49,8 @@ If PR_SPEC_PRCTL is set, then the per-task control of the mitigation is
 available. If not set, prctl(PR_SET_SPECULATION_CTRL) for the speculation
 misfeature will fail.
 
+.. _set_spec_ctrl:
+
 PR_SET_SPECULATION_CTRL
 -----------------------
 
@@ -92,6 +96,7 @@ Speculation misfeature controls
    * prctl(PR_SET_SPECULATION_CTRL, PR_SPEC_STORE_BYPASS, PR_SPEC_ENABLE, 0, 0);
    * prctl(PR_SET_SPECULATION_CTRL, PR_SPEC_STORE_BYPASS, PR_SPEC_DISABLE, 0, 0);
    * prctl(PR_SET_SPECULATION_CTRL, PR_SPEC_STORE_BYPASS, PR_SPEC_FORCE_DISABLE, 0, 0);
+   * prctl(PR_SET_SPECULATION_CTRL, PR_SPEC_STORE_BYPASS, PR_SPEC_DISABLE_NOEXEC, 0, 0);
 
 - PR_SPEC_INDIR_BRANCH: Indirect Branch Speculation in User Processes
                         (Mitigate Spectre V2 style attacks against user processes)
diff --git a/Documentation/video-output.txt b/Documentation/video-output.txt
index e517011be4f9..56d6fa2e2368 100644
--- a/Documentation/video-output.txt
+++ b/Documentation/video-output.txt
@@ -1,34 +1,34 @@
+Video Output Switcher Control
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 
-		Video Output Switcher Control
-		~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-		2006 luming.yu@intel.com
+2006 luming.yu@intel.com
 
 The output sysfs class driver provides an abstract video output layer that
 can be used to hook platform specific methods to enable/disable video output
 device through common sysfs interface. For example, on my IBM ThinkPad T42
 laptop, The ACPI video driver registered its output devices and read/write
-method for 'state' with output sysfs class. The user interface under sysfs is:
+method for 'state' with output sysfs class. The user interface under sysfs is::
 
-linux:/sys/class/video_output # tree .
-.
-|-- CRT0
-|   |-- device -> ../../../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:01.0
-|   |-- state
-|   |-- subsystem -> ../../../class/video_output
-|   `-- uevent
-|-- DVI0
-|   |-- device -> ../../../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:01.0
-|   |-- state
-|   |-- subsystem -> ../../../class/video_output
-|   `-- uevent
-|-- LCD0
-|   |-- device -> ../../../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:01.0
-|   |-- state
-|   |-- subsystem -> ../../../class/video_output
-|   `-- uevent
-`-- TV0
-   |-- device -> ../../../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:01.0
-   |-- state
-   |-- subsystem -> ../../../class/video_output
-   `-- uevent
+  linux:/sys/class/video_output # tree .
+  .
+  |-- CRT0
+  |   |-- device -> ../../../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:01.0
+  |   |-- state
+  |   |-- subsystem -> ../../../class/video_output
+  |   `-- uevent
+  |-- DVI0
+  |   |-- device -> ../../../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:01.0
+  |   |-- state
+  |   |-- subsystem -> ../../../class/video_output
+  |   `-- uevent
+  |-- LCD0
+  |   |-- device -> ../../../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:01.0
+  |   |-- state
+  |   |-- subsystem -> ../../../class/video_output
+  |   `-- uevent
+  `-- TV0
+     |-- device -> ../../../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:01.0
+     |-- state
+     |-- subsystem -> ../../../class/video_output
+     `-- uevent
 
diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt
index 356156f5c52d..2a4531bb06bd 100644
--- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt
+++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt
@@ -5,25 +5,32 @@ The Definitive KVM (Kernel-based Virtual Machine) API Documentation
 ----------------------
 
 The kvm API is a set of ioctls that are issued to control various aspects
-of a virtual machine.  The ioctls belong to three classes
+of a virtual machine.  The ioctls belong to three classes:
 
  - System ioctls: These query and set global attributes which affect the
    whole kvm subsystem.  In addition a system ioctl is used to create
-   virtual machines
+   virtual machines.
 
  - VM ioctls: These query and set attributes that affect an entire virtual
    machine, for example memory layout.  In addition a VM ioctl is used to
-   create virtual cpus (vcpus).
+   create virtual cpus (vcpus) and devices.
 
-   Only run VM ioctls from the same process (address space) that was used
-   to create the VM.
+   VM ioctls must be issued from the same process (address space) that was
+   used to create the VM.
 
  - vcpu ioctls: These query and set attributes that control the operation
    of a single virtual cpu.
 
-   Only run vcpu ioctls from the same thread that was used to create the
-   vcpu.
+   vcpu ioctls should be issued from the same thread that was used to create
+   the vcpu, except for asynchronous vcpu ioctl that are marked as such in
+   the documentation.  Otherwise, the first ioctl after switching threads
+   could see a performance impact.
 
+ - device ioctls: These query and set attributes that control the operation
+   of a single device.
+
+   device ioctls must be issued from the same process (address space) that
+   was used to create the VM.
 
 2. File descriptors
 -------------------
@@ -32,17 +39,34 @@ The kvm API is centered around file descriptors.  An initial
 open("/dev/kvm") obtains a handle to the kvm subsystem; this handle
 can be used to issue system ioctls.  A KVM_CREATE_VM ioctl on this
 handle will create a VM file descriptor which can be used to issue VM
-ioctls.  A KVM_CREATE_VCPU ioctl on a VM fd will create a virtual cpu
-and return a file descriptor pointing to it.  Finally, ioctls on a vcpu
-fd can be used to control the vcpu, including the important task of
-actually running guest code.
+ioctls.  A KVM_CREATE_VCPU or KVM_CREATE_DEVICE ioctl on a VM fd will
+create a virtual cpu or device and return a file descriptor pointing to
+the new resource.  Finally, ioctls on a vcpu or device fd can be used
+to control the vcpu or device.  For vcpus, this includes the important
+task of actually running guest code.
 
 In general file descriptors can be migrated among processes by means
 of fork() and the SCM_RIGHTS facility of unix domain socket.  These
 kinds of tricks are explicitly not supported by kvm.  While they will
 not cause harm to the host, their actual behavior is not guaranteed by
-the API.  The only supported use is one virtual machine per process,
-and one vcpu per thread.
+the API.  See "General description" for details on the ioctl usage
+model that is supported by KVM.
+
+It is important to note that althought VM ioctls may only be issued from
+the process that created the VM, a VM's lifecycle is associated with its
+file descriptor, not its creator (process).  In other words, the VM and
+its resources, *including the associated address space*, are not freed
+until the last reference to the VM's file descriptor has been released.
+For example, if fork() is issued after ioctl(KVM_CREATE_VM), the VM will
+not be freed until both the parent (original) process and its child have
+put their references to the VM's file descriptor.
+
+Because a VM's resources are not freed until the last reference to its
+file descriptor is released, creating additional references to a VM via
+via fork(), dup(), etc... without careful consideration is strongly
+discouraged and may have unwanted side effects, e.g. memory allocated
+by and on behalf of the VM's process may not be freed/unaccounted when
+the VM is shut down.
 
 
 3. Extensions
@@ -280,7 +304,7 @@ cpu's hardware control block.
 4.8 KVM_GET_DIRTY_LOG (vm ioctl)
 
 Capability: basic
-Architectures: x86
+Architectures: all
 Type: vm ioctl
 Parameters: struct kvm_dirty_log (in/out)
 Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error
@@ -306,7 +330,7 @@ They must be less than the value that KVM_CHECK_EXTENSION returns for
 the KVM_CAP_MULTI_ADDRESS_SPACE capability.
 
 The bits in the dirty bitmap are cleared before the ioctl returns, unless
-KVM_CAP_MANUAL_DIRTY_LOG_PROTECT is enabled.  For more information,
+KVM_CAP_MANUAL_DIRTY_LOG_PROTECT2 is enabled.  For more information,
 see the description of the capability.
 
 4.9 KVM_SET_MEMORY_ALIAS
@@ -498,11 +522,15 @@ c) KVM_INTERRUPT_SET_LEVEL
 Note that any value for 'irq' other than the ones stated above is invalid
 and incurs unexpected behavior.
 
+This is an asynchronous vcpu ioctl and can be invoked from any thread.
+
 MIPS:
 
 Queues an external interrupt to be injected into the virtual CPU. A negative
 interrupt number dequeues the interrupt.
 
+This is an asynchronous vcpu ioctl and can be invoked from any thread.
+
 
 4.17 KVM_DEBUG_GUEST
 
@@ -1051,7 +1079,7 @@ yet and must be cleared on entry.
 
 4.35 KVM_SET_USER_MEMORY_REGION
 
-Capability: KVM_CAP_USER_MEM
+Capability: KVM_CAP_USER_MEMORY
 Architectures: all
 Type: vm ioctl
 Parameters: struct kvm_userspace_memory_region (in)
@@ -1069,14 +1097,11 @@ struct kvm_userspace_memory_region {
 #define KVM_MEM_LOG_DIRTY_PAGES	(1UL << 0)
 #define KVM_MEM_READONLY	(1UL << 1)
 
-This ioctl allows the user to create or modify a guest physical memory
-slot.  When changing an existing slot, it may be moved in the guest
-physical memory space, or its flags may be modified.  It may not be
-resized.  Slots may not overlap in guest physical address space.
-Bits 0-15 of "slot" specifies the slot id and this value should be
-less than the maximum number of user memory slots supported per VM.
-The maximum allowed slots can be queried using KVM_CAP_NR_MEMSLOTS,
-if this capability is supported by the architecture.
+This ioctl allows the user to create, modify or delete a guest physical
+memory slot.  Bits 0-15 of "slot" specify the slot id and this value
+should be less than the maximum number of user memory slots supported per
+VM.  The maximum allowed slots can be queried using KVM_CAP_NR_MEMSLOTS.
+Slots may not overlap in guest physical address space.
 
 If KVM_CAP_MULTI_ADDRESS_SPACE is available, bits 16-31 of "slot"
 specifies the address space which is being modified.  They must be
@@ -1085,6 +1110,10 @@ KVM_CAP_MULTI_ADDRESS_SPACE capability.  Slots in separate address spaces
 are unrelated; the restriction on overlapping slots only applies within
 each address space.
 
+Deleting a slot is done by passing zero for memory_size.  When changing
+an existing slot, it may be moved in the guest physical memory space,
+or its flags may be modified, but it may not be resized.
+
 Memory for the region is taken starting at the address denoted by the
 field userspace_addr, which must point at user addressable memory for
 the entire memory slot size.  Any object may back this memory, including
@@ -1854,6 +1883,12 @@ Architectures: all
 Type: vcpu ioctl
 Parameters: struct kvm_one_reg (in)
 Returns: 0 on success, negative value on failure
+Errors:
+  ENOENT:   no such register
+  EINVAL:   invalid register ID, or no such register
+  EPERM:    (arm64) register access not allowed before vcpu finalization
+(These error codes are indicative only: do not rely on a specific error
+code being returned in a specific situation.)
 
 struct kvm_one_reg {
        __u64 id;
@@ -1938,6 +1973,7 @@ registers, find a list below:
   PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_TLB3PS            | 32
   PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_EPTCFG            | 32
   PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_ICP_STATE         | 64
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_VP_STATE          | 128
   PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_TB_OFFSET         | 64
   PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_SPMC1             | 32
   PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_SPMC2             | 32
@@ -2090,6 +2126,37 @@ contains elements ranging from 32 to 128 bits. The index is a 32bit
 value in the kvm_regs structure seen as a 32bit array.
   0x60x0 0000 0010 <index into the kvm_regs struct:16>
 
+Specifically:
+    Encoding            Register  Bits  kvm_regs member
+----------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x6030 0000 0010 0000 X0          64  regs.regs[0]
+  0x6030 0000 0010 0002 X1          64  regs.regs[1]
+    ...
+  0x6030 0000 0010 003c X30         64  regs.regs[30]
+  0x6030 0000 0010 003e SP          64  regs.sp
+  0x6030 0000 0010 0040 PC          64  regs.pc
+  0x6030 0000 0010 0042 PSTATE      64  regs.pstate
+  0x6030 0000 0010 0044 SP_EL1      64  sp_el1
+  0x6030 0000 0010 0046 ELR_EL1     64  elr_el1
+  0x6030 0000 0010 0048 SPSR_EL1    64  spsr[KVM_SPSR_EL1] (alias SPSR_SVC)
+  0x6030 0000 0010 004a SPSR_ABT    64  spsr[KVM_SPSR_ABT]
+  0x6030 0000 0010 004c SPSR_UND    64  spsr[KVM_SPSR_UND]
+  0x6030 0000 0010 004e SPSR_IRQ    64  spsr[KVM_SPSR_IRQ]
+  0x6060 0000 0010 0050 SPSR_FIQ    64  spsr[KVM_SPSR_FIQ]
+  0x6040 0000 0010 0054 V0         128  fp_regs.vregs[0]    (*)
+  0x6040 0000 0010 0058 V1         128  fp_regs.vregs[1]    (*)
+    ...
+  0x6040 0000 0010 00d0 V31        128  fp_regs.vregs[31]   (*)
+  0x6020 0000 0010 00d4 FPSR        32  fp_regs.fpsr
+  0x6020 0000 0010 00d5 FPCR        32  fp_regs.fpcr
+
+(*) These encodings are not accepted for SVE-enabled vcpus.  See
+    KVM_ARM_VCPU_INIT.
+
+    The equivalent register content can be accessed via bits [127:0] of
+    the corresponding SVE Zn registers instead for vcpus that have SVE
+    enabled (see below).
+
 arm64 CCSIDR registers are demultiplexed by CSSELR value:
   0x6020 0000 0011 00 <csselr:8>
 
@@ -2099,6 +2166,64 @@ arm64 system registers have the following id bit patterns:
 arm64 firmware pseudo-registers have the following bit pattern:
   0x6030 0000 0014 <regno:16>
 
+arm64 SVE registers have the following bit patterns:
+  0x6080 0000 0015 00 <n:5> <slice:5>   Zn bits[2048*slice + 2047 : 2048*slice]
+  0x6050 0000 0015 04 <n:4> <slice:5>   Pn bits[256*slice + 255 : 256*slice]
+  0x6050 0000 0015 060 <slice:5>        FFR bits[256*slice + 255 : 256*slice]
+  0x6060 0000 0015 ffff                 KVM_REG_ARM64_SVE_VLS pseudo-register
+
+Access to register IDs where 2048 * slice >= 128 * max_vq will fail with
+ENOENT.  max_vq is the vcpu's maximum supported vector length in 128-bit
+quadwords: see (**) below.
+
+These registers are only accessible on vcpus for which SVE is enabled.
+See KVM_ARM_VCPU_INIT for details.
+
+In addition, except for KVM_REG_ARM64_SVE_VLS, these registers are not
+accessible until the vcpu's SVE configuration has been finalized
+using KVM_ARM_VCPU_FINALIZE(KVM_ARM_VCPU_SVE).  See KVM_ARM_VCPU_INIT
+and KVM_ARM_VCPU_FINALIZE for more information about this procedure.
+
+KVM_REG_ARM64_SVE_VLS is a pseudo-register that allows the set of vector
+lengths supported by the vcpu to be discovered and configured by
+userspace.  When transferred to or from user memory via KVM_GET_ONE_REG
+or KVM_SET_ONE_REG, the value of this register is of type
+__u64[KVM_ARM64_SVE_VLS_WORDS], and encodes the set of vector lengths as
+follows:
+
+__u64 vector_lengths[KVM_ARM64_SVE_VLS_WORDS];
+
+if (vq >= SVE_VQ_MIN && vq <= SVE_VQ_MAX &&
+    ((vector_lengths[(vq - KVM_ARM64_SVE_VQ_MIN) / 64] >>
+		((vq - KVM_ARM64_SVE_VQ_MIN) % 64)) & 1))
+	/* Vector length vq * 16 bytes supported */
+else
+	/* Vector length vq * 16 bytes not supported */
+
+(**) The maximum value vq for which the above condition is true is
+max_vq.  This is the maximum vector length available to the guest on
+this vcpu, and determines which register slices are visible through
+this ioctl interface.
+
+(See Documentation/arm64/sve.txt for an explanation of the "vq"
+nomenclature.)
+
+KVM_REG_ARM64_SVE_VLS is only accessible after KVM_ARM_VCPU_INIT.
+KVM_ARM_VCPU_INIT initialises it to the best set of vector lengths that
+the host supports.
+
+Userspace may subsequently modify it if desired until the vcpu's SVE
+configuration is finalized using KVM_ARM_VCPU_FINALIZE(KVM_ARM_VCPU_SVE).
+
+Apart from simply removing all vector lengths from the host set that
+exceed some value, support for arbitrarily chosen sets of vector lengths
+is hardware-dependent and may not be available.  Attempting to configure
+an invalid set of vector lengths via KVM_SET_ONE_REG will fail with
+EINVAL.
+
+After the vcpu's SVE configuration is finalized, further attempts to
+write this register will fail with EPERM.
+
 
 MIPS registers are mapped using the lower 32 bits.  The upper 16 of that is
 the register group type:
@@ -2151,6 +2276,12 @@ Architectures: all
 Type: vcpu ioctl
 Parameters: struct kvm_one_reg (in and out)
 Returns: 0 on success, negative value on failure
+Errors include:
+  ENOENT:   no such register
+  EINVAL:   invalid register ID, or no such register
+  EPERM:    (arm64) register access not allowed before vcpu finalization
+(These error codes are indicative only: do not rely on a specific error
+code being returned in a specific situation.)
 
 This ioctl allows to receive the value of a single register implemented
 in a vcpu. The register to read is indicated by the "id" field of the
@@ -2476,7 +2607,7 @@ KVM_S390_MCHK (vm, vcpu) - machine check interrupt; cr 14 bits in parm,
                            machine checks needing further payload are not
                            supported by this ioctl)
 
-Note that the vcpu ioctl is asynchronous to vcpu execution.
+This is an asynchronous vcpu ioctl and can be invoked from any thread.
 
 4.78 KVM_PPC_GET_HTAB_FD
 
@@ -2643,6 +2774,49 @@ Possible features:
 	- KVM_ARM_VCPU_PMU_V3: Emulate PMUv3 for the CPU.
 	  Depends on KVM_CAP_ARM_PMU_V3.
 
+	- KVM_ARM_VCPU_PTRAUTH_ADDRESS: Enables Address Pointer authentication
+	  for arm64 only.
+	  Depends on KVM_CAP_ARM_PTRAUTH_ADDRESS.
+	  If KVM_CAP_ARM_PTRAUTH_ADDRESS and KVM_CAP_ARM_PTRAUTH_GENERIC are
+	  both present, then both KVM_ARM_VCPU_PTRAUTH_ADDRESS and
+	  KVM_ARM_VCPU_PTRAUTH_GENERIC must be requested or neither must be
+	  requested.
+
+	- KVM_ARM_VCPU_PTRAUTH_GENERIC: Enables Generic Pointer authentication
+	  for arm64 only.
+	  Depends on KVM_CAP_ARM_PTRAUTH_GENERIC.
+	  If KVM_CAP_ARM_PTRAUTH_ADDRESS and KVM_CAP_ARM_PTRAUTH_GENERIC are
+	  both present, then both KVM_ARM_VCPU_PTRAUTH_ADDRESS and
+	  KVM_ARM_VCPU_PTRAUTH_GENERIC must be requested or neither must be
+	  requested.
+
+	- KVM_ARM_VCPU_SVE: Enables SVE for the CPU (arm64 only).
+	  Depends on KVM_CAP_ARM_SVE.
+	  Requires KVM_ARM_VCPU_FINALIZE(KVM_ARM_VCPU_SVE):
+
+	   * After KVM_ARM_VCPU_INIT:
+
+	      - KVM_REG_ARM64_SVE_VLS may be read using KVM_GET_ONE_REG: the
+	        initial value of this pseudo-register indicates the best set of
+	        vector lengths possible for a vcpu on this host.
+
+	   * Before KVM_ARM_VCPU_FINALIZE(KVM_ARM_VCPU_SVE):
+
+	      - KVM_RUN and KVM_GET_REG_LIST are not available;
+
+	      - KVM_GET_ONE_REG and KVM_SET_ONE_REG cannot be used to access
+	        the scalable archietctural SVE registers
+	        KVM_REG_ARM64_SVE_ZREG(), KVM_REG_ARM64_SVE_PREG() or
+	        KVM_REG_ARM64_SVE_FFR;
+
+	      - KVM_REG_ARM64_SVE_VLS may optionally be written using
+	        KVM_SET_ONE_REG, to modify the set of vector lengths available
+	        for the vcpu.
+
+	   * After KVM_ARM_VCPU_FINALIZE(KVM_ARM_VCPU_SVE):
+
+	      - the KVM_REG_ARM64_SVE_VLS pseudo-register is immutable, and can
+	        no longer be written using KVM_SET_ONE_REG.
 
 4.83 KVM_ARM_PREFERRED_TARGET
 
@@ -3025,8 +3199,7 @@ KVM_S390_INT_EMERGENCY - sigp emergency; parameters in .emerg
 KVM_S390_INT_EXTERNAL_CALL - sigp external call; parameters in .extcall
 KVM_S390_MCHK - machine check interrupt; parameters in .mchk
 
-
-Note that the vcpu ioctl is asynchronous to vcpu execution.
+This is an asynchronous vcpu ioctl and can be invoked from any thread.
 
 4.94 KVM_S390_GET_IRQ_STATE
 
@@ -3684,43 +3857,59 @@ Type: vcpu ioctl
 Parameters: struct kvm_nested_state (in/out)
 Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error
 Errors:
-  E2BIG:     the total state size (including the fixed-size part of struct
-             kvm_nested_state) exceeds the value of 'size' specified by
+  E2BIG:     the total state size exceeds the value of 'size' specified by
              the user; the size required will be written into size.
 
 struct kvm_nested_state {
 	__u16 flags;
 	__u16 format;
 	__u32 size;
+
 	union {
-		struct kvm_vmx_nested_state vmx;
-		struct kvm_svm_nested_state svm;
+		struct kvm_vmx_nested_state_hdr vmx;
+		struct kvm_svm_nested_state_hdr svm;
+
+		/* Pad the header to 128 bytes.  */
 		__u8 pad[120];
-	};
-	__u8 data[0];
+	} hdr;
+
+	union {
+		struct kvm_vmx_nested_state_data vmx[0];
+		struct kvm_svm_nested_state_data svm[0];
+	} data;
 };
 
 #define KVM_STATE_NESTED_GUEST_MODE	0x00000001
 #define KVM_STATE_NESTED_RUN_PENDING	0x00000002
+#define KVM_STATE_NESTED_EVMCS		0x00000004
+
+#define KVM_STATE_NESTED_FORMAT_VMX		0
+#define KVM_STATE_NESTED_FORMAT_SVM		1
+
+#define KVM_STATE_NESTED_VMX_VMCS_SIZE		0x1000
 
-#define KVM_STATE_NESTED_SMM_GUEST_MODE	0x00000001
-#define KVM_STATE_NESTED_SMM_VMXON	0x00000002
+#define KVM_STATE_NESTED_VMX_SMM_GUEST_MODE	0x00000001
+#define KVM_STATE_NESTED_VMX_SMM_VMXON		0x00000002
 
-struct kvm_vmx_nested_state {
+struct kvm_vmx_nested_state_hdr {
 	__u64 vmxon_pa;
-	__u64 vmcs_pa;
+	__u64 vmcs12_pa;
 
 	struct {
 		__u16 flags;
 	} smm;
 };
 
+struct kvm_vmx_nested_state_data {
+	__u8 vmcs12[KVM_STATE_NESTED_VMX_VMCS_SIZE];
+	__u8 shadow_vmcs12[KVM_STATE_NESTED_VMX_VMCS_SIZE];
+};
+
 This ioctl copies the vcpu's nested virtualization state from the kernel to
 userspace.
 
-The maximum size of the state, including the fixed-size part of struct
-kvm_nested_state, can be retrieved by passing KVM_CAP_NESTED_STATE to
-the KVM_CHECK_EXTENSION ioctl().
+The maximum size of the state can be retrieved by passing KVM_CAP_NESTED_STATE
+to the KVM_CHECK_EXTENSION ioctl().
 
 4.115 KVM_SET_NESTED_STATE
 
@@ -3730,8 +3919,8 @@ Type: vcpu ioctl
 Parameters: struct kvm_nested_state (in)
 Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error
 
-This copies the vcpu's kvm_nested_state struct from userspace to the kernel.  For
-the definition of struct kvm_nested_state, see KVM_GET_NESTED_STATE.
+This copies the vcpu's kvm_nested_state struct from userspace to the kernel.
+For the definition of struct kvm_nested_state, see KVM_GET_NESTED_STATE.
 
 4.116 KVM_(UN)REGISTER_COALESCED_MMIO
 
@@ -3763,8 +3952,8 @@ to I/O ports.
 
 4.117 KVM_CLEAR_DIRTY_LOG (vm ioctl)
 
-Capability: KVM_CAP_MANUAL_DIRTY_LOG_PROTECT
-Architectures: x86
+Capability: KVM_CAP_MANUAL_DIRTY_LOG_PROTECT2
+Architectures: x86, arm, arm64, mips
 Type: vm ioctl
 Parameters: struct kvm_dirty_log (in)
 Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error
@@ -3784,8 +3973,9 @@ The ioctl clears the dirty status of pages in a memory slot, according to
 the bitmap that is passed in struct kvm_clear_dirty_log's dirty_bitmap
 field.  Bit 0 of the bitmap corresponds to page "first_page" in the
 memory slot, and num_pages is the size in bits of the input bitmap.
-Both first_page and num_pages must be a multiple of 64.  For each bit
-that is set in the input bitmap, the corresponding page is marked "clean"
+first_page must be a multiple of 64; num_pages must also be a multiple of
+64 unless first_page + num_pages is the size of the memory slot.  For each
+bit that is set in the input bitmap, the corresponding page is marked "clean"
 in KVM's dirty bitmap, and dirty tracking is re-enabled for that page
 (for example via write-protection, or by clearing the dirty bit in
 a page table entry).
@@ -3795,10 +3985,10 @@ the address space for which you want to return the dirty bitmap.
 They must be less than the value that KVM_CHECK_EXTENSION returns for
 the KVM_CAP_MULTI_ADDRESS_SPACE capability.
 
-This ioctl is mostly useful when KVM_CAP_MANUAL_DIRTY_LOG_PROTECT
+This ioctl is mostly useful when KVM_CAP_MANUAL_DIRTY_LOG_PROTECT2
 is enabled; for more information, see the description of the capability.
 However, it can always be used as long as KVM_CHECK_EXTENSION confirms
-that KVM_CAP_MANUAL_DIRTY_LOG_PROTECT is present.
+that KVM_CAP_MANUAL_DIRTY_LOG_PROTECT2 is present.
 
 4.118 KVM_GET_SUPPORTED_HV_CPUID
 
@@ -3857,6 +4047,40 @@ number of valid entries in the 'entries' array, which is then filled.
 'index' and 'flags' fields in 'struct kvm_cpuid_entry2' are currently reserved,
 userspace should not expect to get any particular value there.
 
+4.119 KVM_ARM_VCPU_FINALIZE
+
+Architectures: arm, arm64
+Type: vcpu ioctl
+Parameters: int feature (in)
+Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error
+Errors:
+  EPERM:     feature not enabled, needs configuration, or already finalized
+  EINVAL:    feature unknown or not present
+
+Recognised values for feature:
+  arm64      KVM_ARM_VCPU_SVE (requires KVM_CAP_ARM_SVE)
+
+Finalizes the configuration of the specified vcpu feature.
+
+The vcpu must already have been initialised, enabling the affected feature, by
+means of a successful KVM_ARM_VCPU_INIT call with the appropriate flag set in
+features[].
+
+For affected vcpu features, this is a mandatory step that must be performed
+before the vcpu is fully usable.
+
+Between KVM_ARM_VCPU_INIT and KVM_ARM_VCPU_FINALIZE, the feature may be
+configured by use of ioctls such as KVM_SET_ONE_REG.  The exact configuration
+that should be performaned and how to do it are feature-dependent.
+
+Other calls that depend on a particular feature being finalized, such as
+KVM_RUN, KVM_GET_REG_LIST, KVM_GET_ONE_REG and KVM_SET_ONE_REG, will fail with
+-EPERM unless the feature has already been finalized by means of a
+KVM_ARM_VCPU_FINALIZE call.
+
+See KVM_ARM_VCPU_INIT for details of vcpu features that require finalization
+using this ioctl.
+
 5. The kvm_run structure
 ------------------------
 
@@ -4458,6 +4682,15 @@ struct kvm_sync_regs {
         struct kvm_vcpu_events events;
 };
 
+6.75 KVM_CAP_PPC_IRQ_XIVE
+
+Architectures: ppc
+Target: vcpu
+Parameters: args[0] is the XIVE device fd
+            args[1] is the XIVE CPU number (server ID) for this vcpu
+
+This capability connects the vcpu to an in-kernel XIVE device.
+
 7. Capabilities that can be enabled on VMs
 ------------------------------------------
 
@@ -4751,9 +4984,9 @@ and injected exceptions.
 * For the new DR6 bits, note that bit 16 is set iff the #DB exception
   will clear DR6.RTM.
 
-7.18 KVM_CAP_MANUAL_DIRTY_LOG_PROTECT
+7.18 KVM_CAP_MANUAL_DIRTY_LOG_PROTECT2
 
-Architectures: all
+Architectures: x86, arm, arm64, mips
 Parameters: args[0] whether feature should be enabled or not
 
 With this capability enabled, KVM_GET_DIRTY_LOG will not automatically
@@ -4774,6 +5007,11 @@ while userspace can see false reports of dirty pages.  Manual reprotection
 helps reducing this time, improving guest performance and reducing the
 number of dirty log false positives.
 
+KVM_CAP_MANUAL_DIRTY_LOG_PROTECT2 was previously available under the name
+KVM_CAP_MANUAL_DIRTY_LOG_PROTECT, but the implementation had bugs that make
+it hard or impossible to use it correctly.  The availability of
+KVM_CAP_MANUAL_DIRTY_LOG_PROTECT2 signals that those bugs are fixed.
+Userspace should not try to use KVM_CAP_MANUAL_DIRTY_LOG_PROTECT.
 
 8. Other capabilities.
 ----------------------
diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/vm.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/vm.txt
index 95ca68d663a4..4ffb82b02468 100644
--- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/vm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/vm.txt
@@ -141,7 +141,8 @@ struct kvm_s390_vm_cpu_subfunc {
        u8 pcc[16];           # valid with Message-Security-Assist-Extension 4
        u8 ppno[16];          # valid with Message-Security-Assist-Extension 5
        u8 kma[16];           # valid with Message-Security-Assist-Extension 8
-       u8 reserved[1808];    # reserved for future instructions
+       u8 kdsa[16];          # valid with Message-Security-Assist-Extension 9
+       u8 reserved[1792];    # reserved for future instructions
 };
 
 Parameters: address of a buffer to load the subfunction blocks from.
diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/xive.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/xive.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9a24a4525253
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/xive.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,197 @@
+POWER9 eXternal Interrupt Virtualization Engine (XIVE Gen1)
+==========================================================
+
+Device types supported:
+  KVM_DEV_TYPE_XIVE     POWER9 XIVE Interrupt Controller generation 1
+
+This device acts as a VM interrupt controller. It provides the KVM
+interface to configure the interrupt sources of a VM in the underlying
+POWER9 XIVE interrupt controller.
+
+Only one XIVE instance may be instantiated. A guest XIVE device
+requires a POWER9 host and the guest OS should have support for the
+XIVE native exploitation interrupt mode. If not, it should run using
+the legacy interrupt mode, referred as XICS (POWER7/8).
+
+* Device Mappings
+
+  The KVM device exposes different MMIO ranges of the XIVE HW which
+  are required for interrupt management. These are exposed to the
+  guest in VMAs populated with a custom VM fault handler.
+
+  1. Thread Interrupt Management Area (TIMA)
+
+  Each thread has an associated Thread Interrupt Management context
+  composed of a set of registers. These registers let the thread
+  handle priority management and interrupt acknowledgment. The most
+  important are :
+
+      - Interrupt Pending Buffer     (IPB)
+      - Current Processor Priority   (CPPR)
+      - Notification Source Register (NSR)
+
+  They are exposed to software in four different pages each proposing
+  a view with a different privilege. The first page is for the
+  physical thread context and the second for the hypervisor. Only the
+  third (operating system) and the fourth (user level) are exposed the
+  guest.
+
+  2. Event State Buffer (ESB)
+
+  Each source is associated with an Event State Buffer (ESB) with
+  either a pair of even/odd pair of pages which provides commands to
+  manage the source: to trigger, to EOI, to turn off the source for
+  instance.
+
+  3. Device pass-through
+
+  When a device is passed-through into the guest, the source
+  interrupts are from a different HW controller (PHB4) and the ESB
+  pages exposed to the guest should accommadate this change.
+
+  The passthru_irq helpers, kvmppc_xive_set_mapped() and
+  kvmppc_xive_clr_mapped() are called when the device HW irqs are
+  mapped into or unmapped from the guest IRQ number space. The KVM
+  device extends these helpers to clear the ESB pages of the guest IRQ
+  number being mapped and then lets the VM fault handler repopulate.
+  The handler will insert the ESB page corresponding to the HW
+  interrupt of the device being passed-through or the initial IPI ESB
+  page if the device has being removed.
+
+  The ESB remapping is fully transparent to the guest and the OS
+  device driver. All handling is done within VFIO and the above
+  helpers in KVM-PPC.
+
+* Groups:
+
+  1. KVM_DEV_XIVE_GRP_CTRL
+  Provides global controls on the device
+  Attributes:
+    1.1 KVM_DEV_XIVE_RESET (write only)
+    Resets the interrupt controller configuration for sources and event
+    queues. To be used by kexec and kdump.
+    Errors: none
+
+    1.2 KVM_DEV_XIVE_EQ_SYNC (write only)
+    Sync all the sources and queues and mark the EQ pages dirty. This
+    to make sure that a consistent memory state is captured when
+    migrating the VM.
+    Errors: none
+
+  2. KVM_DEV_XIVE_GRP_SOURCE (write only)
+  Initializes a new source in the XIVE device and mask it.
+  Attributes:
+    Interrupt source number  (64-bit)
+  The kvm_device_attr.addr points to a __u64 value:
+  bits:     | 63   ....  2 |   1   |   0
+  values:   |    unused    | level | type
+  - type:  0:MSI 1:LSI
+  - level: assertion level in case of an LSI.
+  Errors:
+    -E2BIG:  Interrupt source number is out of range
+    -ENOMEM: Could not create a new source block
+    -EFAULT: Invalid user pointer for attr->addr.
+    -ENXIO:  Could not allocate underlying HW interrupt
+
+  3. KVM_DEV_XIVE_GRP_SOURCE_CONFIG (write only)
+  Configures source targeting
+  Attributes:
+    Interrupt source number  (64-bit)
+  The kvm_device_attr.addr points to a __u64 value:
+  bits:     | 63   ....  33 |  32  | 31 .. 3 |  2 .. 0
+  values:   |    eisn       | mask |  server | priority
+  - priority: 0-7 interrupt priority level
+  - server: CPU number chosen to handle the interrupt
+  - mask: mask flag (unused)
+  - eisn: Effective Interrupt Source Number
+  Errors:
+    -ENOENT: Unknown source number
+    -EINVAL: Not initialized source number
+    -EINVAL: Invalid priority
+    -EINVAL: Invalid CPU number.
+    -EFAULT: Invalid user pointer for attr->addr.
+    -ENXIO:  CPU event queues not configured or configuration of the
+             underlying HW interrupt failed
+    -EBUSY:  No CPU available to serve interrupt
+
+  4. KVM_DEV_XIVE_GRP_EQ_CONFIG (read-write)
+  Configures an event queue of a CPU
+  Attributes:
+    EQ descriptor identifier (64-bit)
+  The EQ descriptor identifier is a tuple (server, priority) :
+  bits:     | 63   ....  32 | 31 .. 3 |  2 .. 0
+  values:   |    unused     |  server | priority
+  The kvm_device_attr.addr points to :
+    struct kvm_ppc_xive_eq {
+	__u32 flags;
+	__u32 qshift;
+	__u64 qaddr;
+	__u32 qtoggle;
+	__u32 qindex;
+	__u8  pad[40];
+    };
+  - flags: queue flags
+    KVM_XIVE_EQ_ALWAYS_NOTIFY (required)
+	forces notification without using the coalescing mechanism
+	provided by the XIVE END ESBs.
+  - qshift: queue size (power of 2)
+  - qaddr: real address of queue
+  - qtoggle: current queue toggle bit
+  - qindex: current queue index
+  - pad: reserved for future use
+  Errors:
+    -ENOENT: Invalid CPU number
+    -EINVAL: Invalid priority
+    -EINVAL: Invalid flags
+    -EINVAL: Invalid queue size
+    -EINVAL: Invalid queue address
+    -EFAULT: Invalid user pointer for attr->addr.
+    -EIO:    Configuration of the underlying HW failed
+
+  5. KVM_DEV_XIVE_GRP_SOURCE_SYNC (write only)
+  Synchronize the source to flush event notifications
+  Attributes:
+    Interrupt source number  (64-bit)
+  Errors:
+    -ENOENT: Unknown source number
+    -EINVAL: Not initialized source number
+
+* VCPU state
+
+  The XIVE IC maintains VP interrupt state in an internal structure
+  called the NVT. When a VP is not dispatched on a HW processor
+  thread, this structure can be updated by HW if the VP is the target
+  of an event notification.
+
+  It is important for migration to capture the cached IPB from the NVT
+  as it synthesizes the priorities of the pending interrupts. We
+  capture a bit more to report debug information.
+
+  KVM_REG_PPC_VP_STATE (2 * 64bits)
+  bits:     |  63  ....  32  |  31  ....  0  |
+  values:   |   TIMA word0   |   TIMA word1  |
+  bits:     | 127       ..........       64  |
+  values:   |            unused              |
+
+* Migration:
+
+  Saving the state of a VM using the XIVE native exploitation mode
+  should follow a specific sequence. When the VM is stopped :
+
+  1. Mask all sources (PQ=01) to stop the flow of events.
+
+  2. Sync the XIVE device with the KVM control KVM_DEV_XIVE_EQ_SYNC to
+  flush any in-flight event notification and to stabilize the EQs. At
+  this stage, the EQ pages are marked dirty to make sure they are
+  transferred in the migration sequence.
+
+  3. Capture the state of the source targeting, the EQs configuration
+  and the state of thread interrupt context registers.
+
+  Restore is similar :
+
+  1. Restore the EQ configuration. As targeting depends on it.
+  2. Restore targeting
+  3. Restore the thread interrupt contexts
+  4. Restore the source states
+  5. Let the vCPU run
diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/halt-polling.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/halt-polling.txt
index 4a8418318769..4f791b128dd2 100644
--- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/halt-polling.txt
+++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/halt-polling.txt
@@ -53,7 +53,8 @@ the global max polling interval then the polling interval can be increased in
 the hope that next time during the longer polling interval the wake up source
 will be received while the host is polling and the latency benefits will be
 received. The polling interval is grown in the function grow_halt_poll_ns() and
-is multiplied by the module parameter halt_poll_ns_grow.
+is multiplied by the module parameters halt_poll_ns_grow and
+halt_poll_ns_grow_start.
 
 In the event that the total block time was greater than the global max polling
 interval then the host will never poll for long enough (limited by the global
@@ -80,22 +81,30 @@ shrunk. These variables are defined in include/linux/kvm_host.h and as module
 parameters in virt/kvm/kvm_main.c, or arch/powerpc/kvm/book3s_hv.c in the
 powerpc kvm-hv case.
 
-Module Parameter    |	     Description	      |	     Default Value
+Module Parameter	|   Description		    |	     Default Value
 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-halt_poll_ns	    | The global max polling interval | KVM_HALT_POLL_NS_DEFAULT
-		    | which defines the ceiling value |
-		    | of the polling interval for     | (per arch value)
-		    | each vcpu. 		      |
+halt_poll_ns		| The global max polling    | KVM_HALT_POLL_NS_DEFAULT
+			| interval which defines    |
+			| the ceiling value of the  |
+			| polling interval for      | (per arch value)
+			| each vcpu.		    |
 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-halt_poll_ns_grow   | The value by which the halt     |	2
-		    | polling interval is multiplied  |
-		    | in the grow_halt_poll_ns()      |
-		    | function.			      |
+halt_poll_ns_grow	| The value by which the    | 2
+			| halt polling interval is  |
+			| multiplied in the	    |
+			| grow_halt_poll_ns()	    |
+			| function.		    |
 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-halt_poll_ns_shrink | The value by which the halt     |	0
-		    | polling interval is divided in  |
-		    | the shrink_halt_poll_ns()	      |
-		    | function.			      |
+halt_poll_ns_grow_start | The initial value to grow | 10000
+			| to from zero in the	    |
+			| grow_halt_poll_ns()	    |
+			| function.		    |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+halt_poll_ns_shrink	| The value by which the    | 0
+			| halt polling interval is  |
+			| divided in the	    |
+			| shrink_halt_poll_ns()	    |
+			| function.		    |
 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
 These module parameters can be set from the debugfs files in:
diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/mmu.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/mmu.txt
index e507a9e0421e..2efe0efc516e 100644
--- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/mmu.txt
+++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/mmu.txt
@@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Shadow pages contain the following information:
     If clear, this page corresponds to a guest page table denoted by the gfn
     field.
   role.quadrant:
-    When role.cr4_pae=0, the guest uses 32-bit gptes while the host uses 64-bit
+    When role.gpte_is_8_bytes=0, the guest uses 32-bit gptes while the host uses 64-bit
     sptes.  That means a guest page table contains more ptes than the host,
     so multiple shadow pages are needed to shadow one guest page.
     For first-level shadow pages, role.quadrant can be 0 or 1 and denotes the
@@ -158,9 +158,9 @@ Shadow pages contain the following information:
     The page is invalid and should not be used.  It is a root page that is
     currently pinned (by a cpu hardware register pointing to it); once it is
     unpinned it will be destroyed.
-  role.cr4_pae:
-    Contains the value of cr4.pae for which the page is valid (e.g. whether
-    32-bit or 64-bit gptes are in use).
+  role.gpte_is_8_bytes:
+    Reflects the size of the guest PTE for which the page is valid, i.e. '1'
+    if 64-bit gptes are in use, '0' if 32-bit gptes are in use.
   role.nxe:
     Contains the value of efer.nxe for which the page is valid.
   role.cr0_wp:
@@ -173,6 +173,9 @@ Shadow pages contain the following information:
     Contains the value of cr4.smap && !cr0.wp for which the page is valid
     (pages for which this is true are different from other pages; see the
     treatment of cr0.wp=0 below).
+  role.ept_sp:
+    This is a virtual flag to denote a shadowed nested EPT page.  ept_sp
+    is true if "cr0_wp && smap_andnot_wp", an otherwise invalid combination.
   role.smm:
     Is 1 if the page is valid in system management mode.  This field
     determines which of the kvm_memslots array was used to build this
@@ -224,10 +227,6 @@ Shadow pages contain the following information:
     A bitmap indicating which sptes in spt point (directly or indirectly) at
     pages that may be unsynchronized.  Used to quickly locate all unsychronized
     pages reachable from a given page.
-  mmu_valid_gen:
-    Generation number of the page.  It is compared with kvm->arch.mmu_valid_gen
-    during hash table lookup, and used to skip invalidated shadow pages (see
-    "Zapping all pages" below.)
   clear_spte_count:
     Only present on 32-bit hosts, where a 64-bit spte cannot be written
     atomically.  The reader uses this while running out of the MMU lock
@@ -402,27 +401,6 @@ causes its disallow_lpage to be incremented, thus preventing instantiation of
 a large spte.  The frames at the end of an unaligned memory slot have
 artificially inflated ->disallow_lpages so they can never be instantiated.
 
-Zapping all pages (page generation count)
-=========================================
-
-For the large memory guests, walking and zapping all pages is really slow
-(because there are a lot of pages), and also blocks memory accesses of
-all VCPUs because it needs to hold the MMU lock.
-
-To make it be more scalable, kvm maintains a global generation number
-which is stored in kvm->arch.mmu_valid_gen.  Every shadow page stores
-the current global generation-number into sp->mmu_valid_gen when it
-is created.  Pages with a mismatching generation number are "obsolete".
-
-When KVM need zap all shadow pages sptes, it just simply increases the global
-generation-number then reload root shadow pages on all vcpus.  As the VCPUs
-create new shadow page tables, the old pages are not used because of the
-mismatching generation number.
-
-KVM then walks through all pages and zaps obsolete pages.  While the zap
-operation needs to take the MMU lock, the lock can be released periodically
-so that the VCPUs can make progress.
-
 Fast invalidation of MMIO sptes
 ===============================
 
@@ -435,8 +413,7 @@ shadow pages, and is made more scalable with a similar technique.
 MMIO sptes have a few spare bits, which are used to store a
 generation number.  The global generation number is stored in
 kvm_memslots(kvm)->generation, and increased whenever guest memory info
-changes.  This generation number is distinct from the one described in
-the previous section.
+changes.
 
 When KVM finds an MMIO spte, it checks the generation number of the spte.
 If the generation number of the spte does not equal the global generation
@@ -452,13 +429,16 @@ stored into the MMIO spte.  Thus, the MMIO spte might be created based on
 out-of-date information, but with an up-to-date generation number.
 
 To avoid this, the generation number is incremented again after synchronize_srcu
-returns; thus, the low bit of kvm_memslots(kvm)->generation is only 1 during a
+returns; thus, bit 63 of kvm_memslots(kvm)->generation set to 1 only during a
 memslot update, while some SRCU readers might be using the old copy.  We do not
 want to use an MMIO sptes created with an odd generation number, and we can do
-this without losing a bit in the MMIO spte.  The low bit of the generation
-is not stored in MMIO spte, and presumed zero when it is extracted out of the
-spte.  If KVM is unlucky and creates an MMIO spte while the low bit is 1,
-the next access to the spte will always be a cache miss.
+this without losing a bit in the MMIO spte.  The "update in-progress" bit of the
+generation is not stored in MMIO spte, and is so is implicitly zero when the
+generation is extracted out of the spte.  If KVM is unlucky and creates an MMIO
+spte while an update is in-progress, the next access to the spte will always be
+a cache miss.  For example, a subsequent access during the update window will
+miss due to the in-progress flag diverging, while an access after the update
+window closes will have a higher generation number (as compared to the spte).
 
 
 Further reading
diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/s390-diag.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/s390-diag.txt
index 48c4921794ed..7c52e5f8b210 100644
--- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/s390-diag.txt
+++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/s390-diag.txt
@@ -68,7 +68,8 @@ Subcode 3 - virtio-ccw notification
     identifier, it is ignored.
 
     After completion of the DIAGNOSE call, general register 2 may contain
-    a 64bit identifier (in the kvm_io_bus cookie case).
+    a 64bit identifier (in the kvm_io_bus cookie case), or a negative
+    error value, if an internal error occurred.
 
     See also the virtio standard for a discussion of this hypercall.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/vm/hmm.rst b/Documentation/vm/hmm.rst
index 44205f0b671f..7cdf7282e022 100644
--- a/Documentation/vm/hmm.rst
+++ b/Documentation/vm/hmm.rst
@@ -189,20 +189,10 @@ the driver callback returns.
 When the device driver wants to populate a range of virtual addresses, it can
 use either::
 
-  int hmm_vma_get_pfns(struct vm_area_struct *vma,
-                      struct hmm_range *range,
-                      unsigned long start,
-                      unsigned long end,
-                      hmm_pfn_t *pfns);
-  int hmm_vma_fault(struct vm_area_struct *vma,
-                    struct hmm_range *range,
-                    unsigned long start,
-                    unsigned long end,
-                    hmm_pfn_t *pfns,
-                    bool write,
-                    bool block);
-
-The first one (hmm_vma_get_pfns()) will only fetch present CPU page table
+  long hmm_range_snapshot(struct hmm_range *range);
+  long hmm_range_fault(struct hmm_range *range, bool block);
+
+The first one (hmm_range_snapshot()) will only fetch present CPU page table
 entries and will not trigger a page fault on missing or non-present entries.
 The second one does trigger a page fault on missing or read-only entry if the
 write parameter is true. Page faults use the generic mm page fault code path
@@ -220,25 +210,56 @@ respect in order to keep things properly synchronized. The usage pattern is::
  {
       struct hmm_range range;
       ...
+
+      range.start = ...;
+      range.end = ...;
+      range.pfns = ...;
+      range.flags = ...;
+      range.values = ...;
+      range.pfn_shift = ...;
+      hmm_range_register(&range);
+
+      /*
+       * Just wait for range to be valid, safe to ignore return value as we
+       * will use the return value of hmm_range_snapshot() below under the
+       * mmap_sem to ascertain the validity of the range.
+       */
+      hmm_range_wait_until_valid(&range, TIMEOUT_IN_MSEC);
+
  again:
-      ret = hmm_vma_get_pfns(vma, &range, start, end, pfns);
-      if (ret)
+      down_read(&mm->mmap_sem);
+      ret = hmm_range_snapshot(&range);
+      if (ret) {
+          up_read(&mm->mmap_sem);
+          if (ret == -EAGAIN) {
+            /*
+             * No need to check hmm_range_wait_until_valid() return value
+             * on retry we will get proper error with hmm_range_snapshot()
+             */
+            hmm_range_wait_until_valid(&range, TIMEOUT_IN_MSEC);
+            goto again;
+          }
+          hmm_mirror_unregister(&range);
           return ret;
+      }
       take_lock(driver->update);
-      if (!hmm_vma_range_done(vma, &range)) {
+      if (!range.valid) {
           release_lock(driver->update);
+          up_read(&mm->mmap_sem);
           goto again;
       }
 
       // Use pfns array content to update device page table
 
+      hmm_mirror_unregister(&range);
       release_lock(driver->update);
+      up_read(&mm->mmap_sem);
       return 0;
  }
 
 The driver->update lock is the same lock that the driver takes inside its
-update() callback. That lock must be held before hmm_vma_range_done() to avoid
-any race with a concurrent CPU page table update.
+update() callback. That lock must be held before checking the range.valid
+field to avoid any race with a concurrent CPU page table update.
 
 HMM implements all this on top of the mmu_notifier API because we wanted a
 simpler API and also to be able to perform optimizations latter on like doing
@@ -255,6 +276,43 @@ report commands as executed is serialized (there is no point in doing this
 concurrently).
 
 
+Leverage default_flags and pfn_flags_mask
+=========================================
+
+The hmm_range struct has 2 fields default_flags and pfn_flags_mask that allows
+to set fault or snapshot policy for a whole range instead of having to set them
+for each entries in the range.
+
+For instance if the device flags for device entries are:
+    VALID (1 << 63)
+    WRITE (1 << 62)
+
+Now let say that device driver wants to fault with at least read a range then
+it does set::
+
+    range->default_flags = (1 << 63);
+    range->pfn_flags_mask = 0;
+
+and calls hmm_range_fault() as described above. This will fill fault all page
+in the range with at least read permission.
+
+Now let say driver wants to do the same except for one page in the range for
+which its want to have write. Now driver set::
+
+    range->default_flags = (1 << 63);
+    range->pfn_flags_mask = (1 << 62);
+    range->pfns[index_of_write] = (1 << 62);
+
+With this HMM will fault in all page with at least read (ie valid) and for the
+address == range->start + (index_of_write << PAGE_SHIFT) it will fault with
+write permission ie if the CPU pte does not have write permission set then HMM
+will call handle_mm_fault().
+
+Note that HMM will populate the pfns array with write permission for any entry
+that have write permission within the CPU pte no matter what are the values set
+in default_flags or pfn_flags_mask.
+
+
 Represent and manage device memory from core kernel point of view
 =================================================================
 
diff --git a/Documentation/vm/hugetlbfs_reserv.rst b/Documentation/vm/hugetlbfs_reserv.rst
index 9d200762114f..f143954e0d05 100644
--- a/Documentation/vm/hugetlbfs_reserv.rst
+++ b/Documentation/vm/hugetlbfs_reserv.rst
@@ -85,10 +85,10 @@ Reservation Map Location (Private or Shared)
 A huge page mapping or segment is either private or shared.  If private,
 it is typically only available to a single address space (task).  If shared,
 it can be mapped into multiple address spaces (tasks).  The location and
-semantics of the reservation map is significantly different for two types
+semantics of the reservation map is significantly different for the two types
 of mappings.  Location differences are:
 
-- For private mappings, the reservation map hangs off the the VMA structure.
+- For private mappings, the reservation map hangs off the VMA structure.
   Specifically, vma->vm_private_data.  This reserve map is created at the
   time the mapping (mmap(MAP_PRIVATE)) is created.
 - For shared mappings, the reservation map hangs off the inode.  Specifically,
@@ -109,15 +109,15 @@ These operations result in a call to the routine hugetlb_reserve_pages()::
 				  struct vm_area_struct *vma,
 				  vm_flags_t vm_flags)
 
-The first thing hugetlb_reserve_pages() does is check for the NORESERVE
+The first thing hugetlb_reserve_pages() does is check if the NORESERVE
 flag was specified in either the shmget() or mmap() call.  If NORESERVE
-was specified, then this routine returns immediately as no reservation
+was specified, then this routine returns immediately as no reservations
 are desired.
 
 The arguments 'from' and 'to' are huge page indices into the mapping or
 underlying file.  For shmget(), 'from' is always 0 and 'to' corresponds to
 the length of the segment/mapping.  For mmap(), the offset argument could
-be used to specify the offset into the underlying file.  In such a case
+be used to specify the offset into the underlying file.  In such a case,
 the 'from' and 'to' arguments have been adjusted by this offset.
 
 One of the big differences between PRIVATE and SHARED mappings is the way
@@ -138,7 +138,8 @@ to indicate this VMA owns the reservations.
 
 The reservation map is consulted to determine how many huge page reservations
 are needed for the current mapping/segment.  For private mappings, this is
-always the value (to - from).  However, for shared mappings it is possible that some reservations may already exist within the range (to - from).  See the
+always the value (to - from).  However, for shared mappings it is possible that
+some reservations may already exist within the range (to - from).  See the
 section :ref:`Reservation Map Modifications <resv_map_modifications>`
 for details on how this is accomplished.
 
@@ -165,7 +166,7 @@ these counters.
 If there were enough free huge pages and the global count resv_huge_pages
 was adjusted, then the reservation map associated with the mapping is
 modified to reflect the reservations.  In the case of a shared mapping, a
-file_region will exist that includes the range 'from' 'to'.  For private
+file_region will exist that includes the range 'from' - 'to'.  For private
 mappings, no modifications are made to the reservation map as lack of an
 entry indicates a reservation exists.
 
@@ -239,7 +240,7 @@ subpool accounting when the page is freed.
 The routine vma_commit_reservation() is then called to adjust the reserve
 map based on the consumption of the reservation.  In general, this involves
 ensuring the page is represented within a file_region structure of the region
-map.  For shared mappings where the the reservation was present, an entry
+map.  For shared mappings where the reservation was present, an entry
 in the reserve map already existed so no change is made.  However, if there
 was no reservation in a shared mapping or this was a private mapping a new
 entry must be created.
diff --git a/Documentation/vm/index.rst b/Documentation/vm/index.rst
index 2b3ab3a1ccf3..e8d943b21cf9 100644
--- a/Documentation/vm/index.rst
+++ b/Documentation/vm/index.rst
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ Linux Memory Management Documentation
 
 This is a collection of documents about the Linux memory management (mm)
 subsystem.  If you are looking for advice on simply allocating memory,
-see the :ref:`memory-allocation`.
+see the :ref:`memory_allocation`.
 
 User guides for MM features
 ===========================
@@ -37,6 +37,7 @@ descriptions of data structures and algorithms.
    hwpoison
    hugetlbfs_reserv
    ksm
+   memory-model
    mmu_notifier
    numa
    overcommit-accounting
diff --git a/Documentation/vm/memory-model.rst b/Documentation/vm/memory-model.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..382f72ace1fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/vm/memory-model.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,183 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+.. _physical_memory_model:
+
+=====================
+Physical Memory Model
+=====================
+
+Physical memory in a system may be addressed in different ways. The
+simplest case is when the physical memory starts at address 0 and
+spans a contiguous range up to the maximal address. It could be,
+however, that this range contains small holes that are not accessible
+for the CPU. Then there could be several contiguous ranges at
+completely distinct addresses. And, don't forget about NUMA, where
+different memory banks are attached to different CPUs.
+
+Linux abstracts this diversity using one of the three memory models:
+FLATMEM, DISCONTIGMEM and SPARSEMEM. Each architecture defines what
+memory models it supports, what the default memory model is and
+whether it is possible to manually override that default.
+
+.. note::
+   At time of this writing, DISCONTIGMEM is considered deprecated,
+   although it is still in use by several architectures.
+
+All the memory models track the status of physical page frames using
+:c:type:`struct page` arranged in one or more arrays.
+
+Regardless of the selected memory model, there exists one-to-one
+mapping between the physical page frame number (PFN) and the
+corresponding `struct page`.
+
+Each memory model defines :c:func:`pfn_to_page` and :c:func:`page_to_pfn`
+helpers that allow the conversion from PFN to `struct page` and vice
+versa.
+
+FLATMEM
+=======
+
+The simplest memory model is FLATMEM. This model is suitable for
+non-NUMA systems with contiguous, or mostly contiguous, physical
+memory.
+
+In the FLATMEM memory model, there is a global `mem_map` array that
+maps the entire physical memory. For most architectures, the holes
+have entries in the `mem_map` array. The `struct page` objects
+corresponding to the holes are never fully initialized.
+
+To allocate the `mem_map` array, architecture specific setup code
+should call :c:func:`free_area_init_node` function or its convenience
+wrapper :c:func:`free_area_init`. Yet, the mappings array is not
+usable until the call to :c:func:`memblock_free_all` that hands all
+the memory to the page allocator.
+
+If an architecture enables `CONFIG_ARCH_HAS_HOLES_MEMORYMODEL` option,
+it may free parts of the `mem_map` array that do not cover the
+actual physical pages. In such case, the architecture specific
+:c:func:`pfn_valid` implementation should take the holes in the
+`mem_map` into account.
+
+With FLATMEM, the conversion between a PFN and the `struct page` is
+straightforward: `PFN - ARCH_PFN_OFFSET` is an index to the
+`mem_map` array.
+
+The `ARCH_PFN_OFFSET` defines the first page frame number for
+systems with physical memory starting at address different from 0.
+
+DISCONTIGMEM
+============
+
+The DISCONTIGMEM model treats the physical memory as a collection of
+`nodes` similarly to how Linux NUMA support does. For each node Linux
+constructs an independent memory management subsystem represented by
+`struct pglist_data` (or `pg_data_t` for short). Among other
+things, `pg_data_t` holds the `node_mem_map` array that maps
+physical pages belonging to that node. The `node_start_pfn` field of
+`pg_data_t` is the number of the first page frame belonging to that
+node.
+
+The architecture setup code should call :c:func:`free_area_init_node` for
+each node in the system to initialize the `pg_data_t` object and its
+`node_mem_map`.
+
+Every `node_mem_map` behaves exactly as FLATMEM's `mem_map` -
+every physical page frame in a node has a `struct page` entry in the
+`node_mem_map` array. When DISCONTIGMEM is enabled, a portion of the
+`flags` field of the `struct page` encodes the node number of the
+node hosting that page.
+
+The conversion between a PFN and the `struct page` in the
+DISCONTIGMEM model became slightly more complex as it has to determine
+which node hosts the physical page and which `pg_data_t` object
+holds the `struct page`.
+
+Architectures that support DISCONTIGMEM provide :c:func:`pfn_to_nid`
+to convert PFN to the node number. The opposite conversion helper
+:c:func:`page_to_nid` is generic as it uses the node number encoded in
+page->flags.
+
+Once the node number is known, the PFN can be used to index
+appropriate `node_mem_map` array to access the `struct page` and
+the offset of the `struct page` from the `node_mem_map` plus
+`node_start_pfn` is the PFN of that page.
+
+SPARSEMEM
+=========
+
+SPARSEMEM is the most versatile memory model available in Linux and it
+is the only memory model that supports several advanced features such
+as hot-plug and hot-remove of the physical memory, alternative memory
+maps for non-volatile memory devices and deferred initialization of
+the memory map for larger systems.
+
+The SPARSEMEM model presents the physical memory as a collection of
+sections. A section is represented with :c:type:`struct mem_section`
+that contains `section_mem_map` that is, logically, a pointer to an
+array of struct pages. However, it is stored with some other magic
+that aids the sections management. The section size and maximal number
+of section is specified using `SECTION_SIZE_BITS` and
+`MAX_PHYSMEM_BITS` constants defined by each architecture that
+supports SPARSEMEM. While `MAX_PHYSMEM_BITS` is an actual width of a
+physical address that an architecture supports, the
+`SECTION_SIZE_BITS` is an arbitrary value.
+
+The maximal number of sections is denoted `NR_MEM_SECTIONS` and
+defined as
+
+.. math::
+
+   NR\_MEM\_SECTIONS = 2 ^ {(MAX\_PHYSMEM\_BITS - SECTION\_SIZE\_BITS)}
+
+The `mem_section` objects are arranged in a two-dimensional array
+called `mem_sections`. The size and placement of this array depend
+on `CONFIG_SPARSEMEM_EXTREME` and the maximal possible number of
+sections:
+
+* When `CONFIG_SPARSEMEM_EXTREME` is disabled, the `mem_sections`
+  array is static and has `NR_MEM_SECTIONS` rows. Each row holds a
+  single `mem_section` object.
+* When `CONFIG_SPARSEMEM_EXTREME` is enabled, the `mem_sections`
+  array is dynamically allocated. Each row contains PAGE_SIZE worth of
+  `mem_section` objects and the number of rows is calculated to fit
+  all the memory sections.
+
+The architecture setup code should call :c:func:`memory_present` for
+each active memory range or use :c:func:`memblocks_present` or
+:c:func:`sparse_memory_present_with_active_regions` wrappers to
+initialize the memory sections. Next, the actual memory maps should be
+set up using :c:func:`sparse_init`.
+
+With SPARSEMEM there are two possible ways to convert a PFN to the
+corresponding `struct page` - a "classic sparse" and "sparse
+vmemmap". The selection is made at build time and it is determined by
+the value of `CONFIG_SPARSEMEM_VMEMMAP`.
+
+The classic sparse encodes the section number of a page in page->flags
+and uses high bits of a PFN to access the section that maps that page
+frame. Inside a section, the PFN is the index to the array of pages.
+
+The sparse vmemmap uses a virtually mapped memory map to optimize
+pfn_to_page and page_to_pfn operations. There is a global `struct
+page *vmemmap` pointer that points to a virtually contiguous array of
+`struct page` objects. A PFN is an index to that array and the the
+offset of the `struct page` from `vmemmap` is the PFN of that
+page.
+
+To use vmemmap, an architecture has to reserve a range of virtual
+addresses that will map the physical pages containing the memory
+map and make sure that `vmemmap` points to that range. In addition,
+the architecture should implement :c:func:`vmemmap_populate` method
+that will allocate the physical memory and create page tables for the
+virtual memory map. If an architecture does not have any special
+requirements for the vmemmap mappings, it can use default
+:c:func:`vmemmap_populate_basepages` provided by the generic memory
+management.
+
+The virtually mapped memory map allows storing `struct page` objects
+for persistent memory devices in pre-allocated storage on those
+devices. This storage is represented with :c:type:`struct vmem_altmap`
+that is eventually passed to vmemmap_populate() through a long chain
+of function calls. The vmemmap_populate() implementation may use the
+`vmem_altmap` along with :c:func:`altmap_alloc_block_buf` helper to
+allocate memory map on the persistent memory device.
diff --git a/Documentation/vm/numa.rst b/Documentation/vm/numa.rst
index 185d8a568168..5cae13e9a08b 100644
--- a/Documentation/vm/numa.rst
+++ b/Documentation/vm/numa.rst
@@ -109,8 +109,8 @@ System administrators and application designers can restrict a task's migration
 to improve NUMA locality using various CPU affinity command line interfaces,
 such as taskset(1) and numactl(1), and program interfaces such as
 sched_setaffinity(2).  Further, one can modify the kernel's default local
-allocation behavior using Linux NUMA memory policy.
-[see Documentation/admin-guide/mm/numa_memory_policy.rst.]
+allocation behavior using Linux NUMA memory policy. [see
+:ref:`Documentation/admin-guide/mm/numa_memory_policy.rst <numa_memory_policy>`].
 
 System administrators can restrict the CPUs and nodes' memories that a non-
 privileged user can specify in the scheduling or NUMA commands and functions
diff --git a/Documentation/vm/slub.rst b/Documentation/vm/slub.rst
index 195928808bac..933ada4368ff 100644
--- a/Documentation/vm/slub.rst
+++ b/Documentation/vm/slub.rst
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Trying to find an issue in the dentry cache? Try::
 to only enable debugging on the dentry cache.  You may use an asterisk at the
 end of the slab name, in order to cover all slabs with the same prefix.  For
 example, here's how you can poison the dentry cache as well as all kmalloc
-slabs:
+slabs::
 
 	slub_debug=P,kmalloc-*,dentry
 
@@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ can be influenced by kernel parameters:
 	(list_lock) where contention may occur.
 
 ``slub_min_order``
-	specifies a minim order of slabs. A similar effect like
+	specifies a minimum order of slabs. A similar effect like
 	``slub_min_objects``.
 
 ``slub_max_order``
diff --git a/Documentation/vm/transhuge.rst b/Documentation/vm/transhuge.rst
index a8cf6809e36e..37c57ca32629 100644
--- a/Documentation/vm/transhuge.rst
+++ b/Documentation/vm/transhuge.rst
@@ -4,8 +4,9 @@
 Transparent Hugepage Support
 ============================
 
-This document describes design principles Transparent Hugepage (THP)
-Support and its interaction with other parts of the memory management.
+This document describes design principles for Transparent Hugepage (THP)
+support and its interaction with other parts of the memory management
+system.
 
 Design principles
 =================
@@ -37,31 +38,25 @@ get_user_pages and follow_page
 
 get_user_pages and follow_page if run on a hugepage, will return the
 head or tail pages as usual (exactly as they would do on
-hugetlbfs). Most gup users will only care about the actual physical
+hugetlbfs). Most GUP users will only care about the actual physical
 address of the page and its temporary pinning to release after the I/O
 is complete, so they won't ever notice the fact the page is huge. But
 if any driver is going to mangle over the page structure of the tail
 page (like for checking page->mapping or other bits that are relevant
 for the head page and not the tail page), it should be updated to jump
-to check head page instead. Taking reference on any head/tail page would
-prevent page from being split by anyone.
+to check head page instead. Taking a reference on any head/tail page would
+prevent the page from being split by anyone.
 
 .. note::
    these aren't new constraints to the GUP API, and they match the
-   same constrains that applies to hugetlbfs too, so any driver capable
+   same constraints that apply to hugetlbfs too, so any driver capable
    of handling GUP on hugetlbfs will also work fine on transparent
    hugepage backed mappings.
 
 In case you can't handle compound pages if they're returned by
-follow_page, the FOLL_SPLIT bit can be specified as parameter to
+follow_page, the FOLL_SPLIT bit can be specified as a parameter to
 follow_page, so that it will split the hugepages before returning
-them. Migration for example passes FOLL_SPLIT as parameter to
-follow_page because it's not hugepage aware and in fact it can't work
-at all on hugetlbfs (but it instead works fine on transparent
-hugepages thanks to FOLL_SPLIT). migration simply can't deal with
-hugepages being returned (as it's not only checking the pfn of the
-page and pinning it during the copy but it pretends to migrate the
-memory in regular page sizes and with regular pte/pmd mappings).
+them.
 
 Graceful fallback
 =================
@@ -72,11 +67,11 @@ pmd_offset. It's trivial to make the code transparent hugepage aware
 by just grepping for "pmd_offset" and adding split_huge_pmd where
 missing after pmd_offset returns the pmd. Thanks to the graceful
 fallback design, with a one liner change, you can avoid to write
-hundred if not thousand of lines of complex code to make your code
+hundreds if not thousands of lines of complex code to make your code
 hugepage aware.
 
 If you're not walking pagetables but you run into a physical hugepage
-but you can't handle it natively in your code, you can split it by
+that you can't handle natively in your code, you can split it by
 calling split_huge_page(page). This is what the Linux VM does before
 it tries to swapout the hugepage for example. split_huge_page() can fail
 if the page is pinned and you must handle this correctly.
@@ -103,18 +98,18 @@ split_huge_page() or split_huge_pmd() has a cost.
 
 To make pagetable walks huge pmd aware, all you need to do is to call
 pmd_trans_huge() on the pmd returned by pmd_offset. You must hold the
-mmap_sem in read (or write) mode to be sure an huge pmd cannot be
+mmap_sem in read (or write) mode to be sure a huge pmd cannot be
 created from under you by khugepaged (khugepaged collapse_huge_page
 takes the mmap_sem in write mode in addition to the anon_vma lock). If
 pmd_trans_huge returns false, you just fallback in the old code
 paths. If instead pmd_trans_huge returns true, you have to take the
 page table lock (pmd_lock()) and re-run pmd_trans_huge. Taking the
-page table lock will prevent the huge pmd to be converted into a
+page table lock will prevent the huge pmd being converted into a
 regular pmd from under you (split_huge_pmd can run in parallel to the
 pagetable walk). If the second pmd_trans_huge returns false, you
 should just drop the page table lock and fallback to the old code as
-before. Otherwise you can proceed to process the huge pmd and the
-hugepage natively. Once finished you can drop the page table lock.
+before. Otherwise, you can proceed to process the huge pmd and the
+hugepage natively. Once finished, you can drop the page table lock.
 
 Refcounts and transparent huge pages
 ====================================
@@ -122,61 +117,61 @@ Refcounts and transparent huge pages
 Refcounting on THP is mostly consistent with refcounting on other compound
 pages:
 
-  - get_page()/put_page() and GUP operate in head page's ->_refcount.
+  - get_page()/put_page() and GUP operate on head page's ->_refcount.
 
   - ->_refcount in tail pages is always zero: get_page_unless_zero() never
-    succeed on tail pages.
+    succeeds on tail pages.
 
   - map/unmap of the pages with PTE entry increment/decrement ->_mapcount
     on relevant sub-page of the compound page.
 
-  - map/unmap of the whole compound page accounted in compound_mapcount
+  - map/unmap of the whole compound page is accounted for in compound_mapcount
     (stored in first tail page). For file huge pages, we also increment
     ->_mapcount of all sub-pages in order to have race-free detection of
     last unmap of subpages.
 
 PageDoubleMap() indicates that the page is *possibly* mapped with PTEs.
 
-For anonymous pages PageDoubleMap() also indicates ->_mapcount in all
+For anonymous pages, PageDoubleMap() also indicates ->_mapcount in all
 subpages is offset up by one. This additional reference is required to
 get race-free detection of unmap of subpages when we have them mapped with
 both PMDs and PTEs.
 
-This is optimization required to lower overhead of per-subpage mapcount
-tracking. The alternative is alter ->_mapcount in all subpages on each
+This optimization is required to lower the overhead of per-subpage mapcount
+tracking. The alternative is to alter ->_mapcount in all subpages on each
 map/unmap of the whole compound page.
 
-For anonymous pages, we set PG_double_map when a PMD of the page got split
-for the first time, but still have PMD mapping. The additional references
-go away with last compound_mapcount.
+For anonymous pages, we set PG_double_map when a PMD of the page is split
+for the first time, but still have a PMD mapping. The additional references
+go away with the last compound_mapcount.
 
-File pages get PG_double_map set on first map of the page with PTE and
-goes away when the page gets evicted from page cache.
+File pages get PG_double_map set on the first map of the page with PTE and
+goes away when the page gets evicted from the page cache.
 
 split_huge_page internally has to distribute the refcounts in the head
 page to the tail pages before clearing all PG_head/tail bits from the page
 structures. It can be done easily for refcounts taken by page table
-entries. But we don't have enough information on how to distribute any
+entries, but we don't have enough information on how to distribute any
 additional pins (i.e. from get_user_pages). split_huge_page() fails any
-requests to split pinned huge page: it expects page count to be equal to
-sum of mapcount of all sub-pages plus one (split_huge_page caller must
-have reference for head page).
+requests to split pinned huge pages: it expects page count to be equal to
+the sum of mapcount of all sub-pages plus one (split_huge_page caller must
+have a reference to the head page).
 
 split_huge_page uses migration entries to stabilize page->_refcount and
-page->_mapcount of anonymous pages. File pages just got unmapped.
+page->_mapcount of anonymous pages. File pages just get unmapped.
 
-We safe against physical memory scanners too: the only legitimate way
-scanner can get reference to a page is get_page_unless_zero().
+We are safe against physical memory scanners too: the only legitimate way
+a scanner can get a reference to a page is get_page_unless_zero().
 
 All tail pages have zero ->_refcount until atomic_add(). This prevents the
 scanner from getting a reference to the tail page up to that point. After the
-atomic_add() we don't care about the ->_refcount value. We already known how
+atomic_add() we don't care about the ->_refcount value. We already know how
 many references should be uncharged from the head page.
 
 For head page get_page_unless_zero() will succeed and we don't mind. It's
-clear where reference should go after split: it will stay on head page.
+clear where references should go after split: it will stay on the head page.
 
-Note that split_huge_pmd() doesn't have any limitation on refcounting:
+Note that split_huge_pmd() doesn't have any limitations on refcounting:
 pmd can be split at any point and never fails.
 
 Partial unmap and deferred_split_huge_page()
@@ -188,10 +183,10 @@ in page_remove_rmap() and queue the THP for splitting if memory pressure
 comes. Splitting will free up unused subpages.
 
 Splitting the page right away is not an option due to locking context in
-the place where we can detect partial unmap. It's also might be
+the place where we can detect partial unmap. It also might be
 counterproductive since in many cases partial unmap happens during exit(2) if
 a THP crosses a VMA boundary.
 
-Function deferred_split_huge_page() is used to queue page for splitting.
+The function deferred_split_huge_page() is used to queue a page for splitting.
 The splitting itself will happen when we get memory pressure via shrinker
 interface.
diff --git a/Documentation/watchdog/mlx-wdt.txt b/Documentation/watchdog/mlx-wdt.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..66eeb78505c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/watchdog/mlx-wdt.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+		Mellanox watchdog drivers
+		for x86 based system switches
+
+This driver provides watchdog functionality for various Mellanox
+Ethernet and Infiniband switch systems.
+
+Mellanox watchdog device is implemented in a programmable logic device.
+
+There are 2 types of HW watchdog implementations.
+
+Type 1:
+Actual HW timeout can be defined as a power of 2 msec.
+e.g. timeout 20 sec will be rounded up to 32768 msec.
+The maximum timeout period is 32 sec (32768 msec.),
+Get time-left isn't supported
+
+Type 2:
+Actual HW timeout is defined in sec. and it's the same as
+a user-defined timeout.
+Maximum timeout is 255 sec.
+Get time-left is supported.
+
+Type 1 HW watchdog implementation exist in old systems and
+all new systems have type 2 HW watchdog.
+Two types of HW implementation have also different register map.
+
+Mellanox system can have 2 watchdogs: main and auxiliary.
+Main and auxiliary watchdog devices can be enabled together
+on the same system.
+There are several actions that can be defined in the watchdog:
+system reset, start fans on full speed and increase register counter.
+The last 2 actions are performed without a system reset.
+Actions without reset are provided for auxiliary watchdog device,
+which is optional.
+Watchdog can be started during a probe, in this case it will be
+pinged by watchdog core before watchdog device will be opened by
+user space application.
+Watchdog can be initialised in nowayout way, i.e. oncse started
+it can't be stopped.
+
+This mlx-wdt driver supports both HW watchdog implementations.
+
+Watchdog driver is probed from the common mlx_platform driver.
+Mlx_platform driver provides an appropriate set of registers for
+Mellanox watchdog device, identity name (mlx-wdt-main or mlx-wdt-aux),
+initial timeout, performed action in expiration and configuration flags.
+watchdog configuration flags: nowayout and start_at_boot, hw watchdog
+version - type1 or type2.
+The driver checks during initialization if the previous system reset
+was done by the watchdog. If yes, it makes a notification about this event.
+
+Access to HW registers is performed through a generic regmap interface.
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/amd-memory-encryption.txt b/Documentation/x86/amd-memory-encryption.rst
index afc41f544dab..c48d452d0718 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/amd-memory-encryption.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/amd-memory-encryption.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,9 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=====================
+AMD Memory Encryption
+=====================
+
 Secure Memory Encryption (SME) and Secure Encrypted Virtualization (SEV) are
 features found on AMD processors.
 
@@ -34,7 +40,7 @@ is operating in 64-bit or 32-bit PAE mode, in all other modes the SEV hardware
 forces the memory encryption bit to 1.
 
 Support for SME and SEV can be determined through the CPUID instruction. The
-CPUID function 0x8000001f reports information related to SME:
+CPUID function 0x8000001f reports information related to SME::
 
 	0x8000001f[eax]:
 		Bit[0] indicates support for SME
@@ -48,14 +54,14 @@ CPUID function 0x8000001f reports information related to SME:
 			   addresses)
 
 If support for SME is present, MSR 0xc00100010 (MSR_K8_SYSCFG) can be used to
-determine if SME is enabled and/or to enable memory encryption:
+determine if SME is enabled and/or to enable memory encryption::
 
 	0xc0010010:
 		Bit[23]   0 = memory encryption features are disabled
 			  1 = memory encryption features are enabled
 
 If SEV is supported, MSR 0xc0010131 (MSR_AMD64_SEV) can be used to determine if
-SEV is active:
+SEV is active::
 
 	0xc0010131:
 		Bit[0]	  0 = memory encryption is not active
@@ -68,6 +74,7 @@ requirements for the system.  If this bit is not set upon Linux startup then
 Linux itself will not set it and memory encryption will not be possible.
 
 The state of SME in the Linux kernel can be documented as follows:
+
 	- Supported:
 	  The CPU supports SME (determined through CPUID instruction).
 
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/boot.txt b/Documentation/x86/boot.rst
index f4c2a97bfdbd..08a2f100c0e6 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/boot.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/boot.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,8 @@
-		     THE LINUX/x86 BOOT PROTOCOL
-		     ---------------------------
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+===========================
+The Linux/x86 Boot Protocol
+===========================
 
 On the x86 platform, the Linux kernel uses a rather complicated boot
 convention.  This has evolved partially due to historical aspects, as
@@ -10,84 +13,91 @@ real-mode DOS as a mainstream operating system.
 
 Currently, the following versions of the Linux/x86 boot protocol exist.
 
-Old kernels:	zImage/Image support only.  Some very early kernels
+=============	============================================================
+Old kernels	zImage/Image support only.  Some very early kernels
 		may not even support a command line.
 
-Protocol 2.00:	(Kernel 1.3.73) Added bzImage and initrd support, as
+Protocol 2.00	(Kernel 1.3.73) Added bzImage and initrd support, as
 		well as a formalized way to communicate between the
 		boot loader and the kernel.  setup.S made relocatable,
 		although the traditional setup area still assumed
 		writable.
 
-Protocol 2.01:	(Kernel 1.3.76) Added a heap overrun warning.
+Protocol 2.01	(Kernel 1.3.76) Added a heap overrun warning.
 
-Protocol 2.02:	(Kernel 2.4.0-test3-pre3) New command line protocol.
+Protocol 2.02	(Kernel 2.4.0-test3-pre3) New command line protocol.
 		Lower the conventional memory ceiling.	No overwrite
 		of the traditional setup area, thus making booting
 		safe for systems which use the EBDA from SMM or 32-bit
 		BIOS entry points.  zImage deprecated but still
 		supported.
 
-Protocol 2.03:	(Kernel 2.4.18-pre1) Explicitly makes the highest possible
+Protocol 2.03	(Kernel 2.4.18-pre1) Explicitly makes the highest possible
 		initrd address available to the bootloader.
 
-Protocol 2.04:	(Kernel 2.6.14) Extend the syssize field to four bytes.
+Protocol 2.04	(Kernel 2.6.14) Extend the syssize field to four bytes.
 
-Protocol 2.05:	(Kernel 2.6.20) Make protected mode kernel relocatable.
+Protocol 2.05	(Kernel 2.6.20) Make protected mode kernel relocatable.
 		Introduce relocatable_kernel and kernel_alignment fields.
 
-Protocol 2.06:	(Kernel 2.6.22) Added a field that contains the size of
+Protocol 2.06	(Kernel 2.6.22) Added a field that contains the size of
 		the boot command line.
 
-Protocol 2.07:	(Kernel 2.6.24) Added paravirtualised boot protocol.
+Protocol 2.07	(Kernel 2.6.24) Added paravirtualised boot protocol.
 		Introduced hardware_subarch and hardware_subarch_data
 		and KEEP_SEGMENTS flag in load_flags.
 
-Protocol 2.08:	(Kernel 2.6.26) Added crc32 checksum and ELF format
+Protocol 2.08	(Kernel 2.6.26) Added crc32 checksum and ELF format
 		payload. Introduced payload_offset and payload_length
 		fields to aid in locating the payload.
 
-Protocol 2.09:	(Kernel 2.6.26) Added a field of 64-bit physical
+Protocol 2.09	(Kernel 2.6.26) Added a field of 64-bit physical
 		pointer to single linked list of struct	setup_data.
 
-Protocol 2.10:	(Kernel 2.6.31) Added a protocol for relaxed alignment
+Protocol 2.10	(Kernel 2.6.31) Added a protocol for relaxed alignment
 		beyond the kernel_alignment added, new init_size and
 		pref_address fields.  Added extended boot loader IDs.
 
-Protocol 2.11:	(Kernel 3.6) Added a field for offset of EFI handover
+Protocol 2.11	(Kernel 3.6) Added a field for offset of EFI handover
 		protocol entry point.
 
-Protocol 2.12:	(Kernel 3.8) Added the xloadflags field and extension fields
+Protocol 2.12	(Kernel 3.8) Added the xloadflags field and extension fields
 		to struct boot_params for loading bzImage and ramdisk
 		above 4G in 64bit.
 
-**** MEMORY LAYOUT
+Protocol 2.13	(Kernel 3.14) Support 32- and 64-bit flags being set in
+		xloadflags to support booting a 64-bit kernel from 32-bit
+		EFI
+=============	============================================================
 
-The traditional memory map for the kernel loader, used for Image or
-zImage kernels, typically looks like:
-
-	|			 |
-0A0000	+------------------------+
-	|  Reserved for BIOS	 |	Do not use.  Reserved for BIOS EBDA.
-09A000	+------------------------+
-	|  Command line		 |
-	|  Stack/heap		 |	For use by the kernel real-mode code.
-098000	+------------------------+	
-	|  Kernel setup		 |	The kernel real-mode code.
-090200	+------------------------+
-	|  Kernel boot sector	 |	The kernel legacy boot sector.
-090000	+------------------------+
-	|  Protected-mode kernel |	The bulk of the kernel image.
-010000	+------------------------+
-	|  Boot loader		 |	<- Boot sector entry point 0000:7C00
-001000	+------------------------+
-	|  Reserved for MBR/BIOS |
-000800	+------------------------+
-	|  Typically used by MBR |
-000600	+------------------------+ 
-	|  BIOS use only	 |
-000000	+------------------------+
 
+Memory Layout
+=============
+
+The traditional memory map for the kernel loader, used for Image or
+zImage kernels, typically looks like::
+
+		|			 |
+	0A0000	+------------------------+
+		|  Reserved for BIOS	 |	Do not use.  Reserved for BIOS EBDA.
+	09A000	+------------------------+
+		|  Command line		 |
+		|  Stack/heap		 |	For use by the kernel real-mode code.
+	098000	+------------------------+
+		|  Kernel setup		 |	The kernel real-mode code.
+	090200	+------------------------+
+		|  Kernel boot sector	 |	The kernel legacy boot sector.
+	090000	+------------------------+
+		|  Protected-mode kernel |	The bulk of the kernel image.
+	010000	+------------------------+
+		|  Boot loader		 |	<- Boot sector entry point 0000:7C00
+	001000	+------------------------+
+		|  Reserved for MBR/BIOS |
+	000800	+------------------------+
+		|  Typically used by MBR |
+	000600	+------------------------+
+		|  BIOS use only	 |
+	000000	+------------------------+
 
 When using bzImage, the protected-mode kernel was relocated to
 0x100000 ("high memory"), and the kernel real-mode block (boot sector,
@@ -112,36 +122,36 @@ zImage or old bzImage kernels, which need data written into the
 above the 0x9A000 point; too many BIOSes will break above that point.
 
 For a modern bzImage kernel with boot protocol version >= 2.02, a
-memory layout like the following is suggested:
-
-	~                        ~
-        |  Protected-mode kernel |
-100000  +------------------------+
-	|  I/O memory hole	 |
-0A0000	+------------------------+
-	|  Reserved for BIOS	 |	Leave as much as possible unused
-	~                        ~
-	|  Command line		 |	(Can also be below the X+10000 mark)
-X+10000	+------------------------+
-	|  Stack/heap		 |	For use by the kernel real-mode code.
-X+08000	+------------------------+	
-	|  Kernel setup		 |	The kernel real-mode code.
-	|  Kernel boot sector	 |	The kernel legacy boot sector.
-X       +------------------------+
-	|  Boot loader		 |	<- Boot sector entry point 0000:7C00
-001000	+------------------------+
-	|  Reserved for MBR/BIOS |
-000800	+------------------------+
-	|  Typically used by MBR |
-000600	+------------------------+ 
-	|  BIOS use only	 |
-000000	+------------------------+
-
-... where the address X is as low as the design of the boot loader
-permits.
-
-
-**** THE REAL-MODE KERNEL HEADER
+memory layout like the following is suggested::
+
+		~                        ~
+		|  Protected-mode kernel |
+	100000  +------------------------+
+		|  I/O memory hole	 |
+	0A0000	+------------------------+
+		|  Reserved for BIOS	 |	Leave as much as possible unused
+		~                        ~
+		|  Command line		 |	(Can also be below the X+10000 mark)
+	X+10000	+------------------------+
+		|  Stack/heap		 |	For use by the kernel real-mode code.
+	X+08000	+------------------------+
+		|  Kernel setup		 |	The kernel real-mode code.
+		|  Kernel boot sector	 |	The kernel legacy boot sector.
+	X       +------------------------+
+		|  Boot loader		 |	<- Boot sector entry point 0000:7C00
+	001000	+------------------------+
+		|  Reserved for MBR/BIOS |
+	000800	+------------------------+
+		|  Typically used by MBR |
+	000600	+------------------------+
+		|  BIOS use only	 |
+	000000	+------------------------+
+
+  ... where the address X is as low as the design of the boot loader permits.
+
+
+The Real-Mode Kernel Header
+===========================
 
 In the following text, and anywhere in the kernel boot sequence, "a
 sector" refers to 512 bytes.  It is independent of the actual sector
@@ -155,61 +165,63 @@ sectors (1K) and then examine the bootup sector size.
 
 The header looks like:
 
-Offset	Proto	Name		Meaning
-/Size
-
-01F1/1	ALL(1	setup_sects	The size of the setup in sectors
-01F2/2	ALL	root_flags	If set, the root is mounted readonly
-01F4/4	2.04+(2	syssize		The size of the 32-bit code in 16-byte paras
-01F8/2	ALL	ram_size	DO NOT USE - for bootsect.S use only
-01FA/2	ALL	vid_mode	Video mode control
-01FC/2	ALL	root_dev	Default root device number
-01FE/2	ALL	boot_flag	0xAA55 magic number
-0200/2	2.00+	jump		Jump instruction
-0202/4	2.00+	header		Magic signature "HdrS"
-0206/2	2.00+	version		Boot protocol version supported
-0208/4	2.00+	realmode_swtch	Boot loader hook (see below)
-020C/2	2.00+	start_sys_seg	The load-low segment (0x1000) (obsolete)
-020E/2	2.00+	kernel_version	Pointer to kernel version string
-0210/1	2.00+	type_of_loader	Boot loader identifier
-0211/1	2.00+	loadflags	Boot protocol option flags
-0212/2	2.00+	setup_move_size	Move to high memory size (used with hooks)
-0214/4	2.00+	code32_start	Boot loader hook (see below)
-0218/4	2.00+	ramdisk_image	initrd load address (set by boot loader)
-021C/4	2.00+	ramdisk_size	initrd size (set by boot loader)
-0220/4	2.00+	bootsect_kludge	DO NOT USE - for bootsect.S use only
-0224/2	2.01+	heap_end_ptr	Free memory after setup end
-0226/1	2.02+(3 ext_loader_ver	Extended boot loader version
-0227/1	2.02+(3	ext_loader_type	Extended boot loader ID
-0228/4	2.02+	cmd_line_ptr	32-bit pointer to the kernel command line
-022C/4	2.03+	initrd_addr_max	Highest legal initrd address
-0230/4	2.05+	kernel_alignment Physical addr alignment required for kernel
-0234/1	2.05+	relocatable_kernel Whether kernel is relocatable or not
-0235/1	2.10+	min_alignment	Minimum alignment, as a power of two
-0236/2	2.12+	xloadflags	Boot protocol option flags
-0238/4	2.06+	cmdline_size	Maximum size of the kernel command line
-023C/4	2.07+	hardware_subarch Hardware subarchitecture
-0240/8	2.07+	hardware_subarch_data Subarchitecture-specific data
-0248/4	2.08+	payload_offset	Offset of kernel payload
-024C/4	2.08+	payload_length	Length of kernel payload
-0250/8	2.09+	setup_data	64-bit physical pointer to linked list
-				of struct setup_data
-0258/8	2.10+	pref_address	Preferred loading address
-0260/4	2.10+	init_size	Linear memory required during initialization
-0264/4	2.11+	handover_offset	Offset of handover entry point
-
-(1) For backwards compatibility, if the setup_sects field contains 0, the
-    real value is 4.
-
-(2) For boot protocol prior to 2.04, the upper two bytes of the syssize
-    field are unusable, which means the size of a bzImage kernel
-    cannot be determined.
-
-(3) Ignored, but safe to set, for boot protocols 2.02-2.09.
+===========	========	=====================	============================================
+Offset/Size	Proto		Name			Meaning
+===========	========	=====================	============================================
+01F1/1		ALL(1)		setup_sects		The size of the setup in sectors
+01F2/2		ALL		root_flags		If set, the root is mounted readonly
+01F4/4		2.04+(2)	syssize			The size of the 32-bit code in 16-byte paras
+01F8/2		ALL		ram_size		DO NOT USE - for bootsect.S use only
+01FA/2		ALL		vid_mode		Video mode control
+01FC/2		ALL		root_dev		Default root device number
+01FE/2		ALL		boot_flag		0xAA55 magic number
+0200/2		2.00+		jump			Jump instruction
+0202/4		2.00+		header			Magic signature "HdrS"
+0206/2		2.00+		version			Boot protocol version supported
+0208/4		2.00+		realmode_swtch		Boot loader hook (see below)
+020C/2		2.00+		start_sys_seg		The load-low segment (0x1000) (obsolete)
+020E/2		2.00+		kernel_version		Pointer to kernel version string
+0210/1		2.00+		type_of_loader		Boot loader identifier
+0211/1		2.00+		loadflags		Boot protocol option flags
+0212/2		2.00+		setup_move_size		Move to high memory size (used with hooks)
+0214/4		2.00+		code32_start		Boot loader hook (see below)
+0218/4		2.00+		ramdisk_image		initrd load address (set by boot loader)
+021C/4		2.00+		ramdisk_size		initrd size (set by boot loader)
+0220/4		2.00+		bootsect_kludge		DO NOT USE - for bootsect.S use only
+0224/2		2.01+		heap_end_ptr		Free memory after setup end
+0226/1		2.02+(3)	ext_loader_ver		Extended boot loader version
+0227/1		2.02+(3)	ext_loader_type		Extended boot loader ID
+0228/4		2.02+		cmd_line_ptr		32-bit pointer to the kernel command line
+022C/4		2.03+		initrd_addr_max		Highest legal initrd address
+0230/4		2.05+		kernel_alignment	Physical addr alignment required for kernel
+0234/1		2.05+		relocatable_kernel	Whether kernel is relocatable or not
+0235/1		2.10+		min_alignment		Minimum alignment, as a power of two
+0236/2		2.12+		xloadflags		Boot protocol option flags
+0238/4		2.06+		cmdline_size		Maximum size of the kernel command line
+023C/4		2.07+		hardware_subarch	Hardware subarchitecture
+0240/8		2.07+		hardware_subarch_data	Subarchitecture-specific data
+0248/4		2.08+		payload_offset		Offset of kernel payload
+024C/4		2.08+		payload_length		Length of kernel payload
+0250/8		2.09+		setup_data		64-bit physical pointer to linked list
+							of struct setup_data
+0258/8		2.10+		pref_address		Preferred loading address
+0260/4		2.10+		init_size		Linear memory required during initialization
+0264/4		2.11+		handover_offset		Offset of handover entry point
+===========	========	=====================	============================================
+
+.. note::
+  (1) For backwards compatibility, if the setup_sects field contains 0, the
+      real value is 4.
+
+  (2) For boot protocol prior to 2.04, the upper two bytes of the syssize
+      field are unusable, which means the size of a bzImage kernel
+      cannot be determined.
+
+  (3) Ignored, but safe to set, for boot protocols 2.02-2.09.
 
 If the "HdrS" (0x53726448) magic number is not found at offset 0x202,
 the boot protocol version is "old".  Loading an old kernel, the
-following parameters should be assumed:
+following parameters should be assumed::
 
 	Image type = zImage
 	initrd not supported
@@ -221,7 +233,8 @@ setting fields in the header, you must make sure only to set fields
 supported by the protocol version in use.
 
 
-**** DETAILS OF HEADER FIELDS
+Details of Harder Fileds
+========================
 
 For each field, some are information from the kernel to the bootloader
 ("read"), some are expected to be filled out by the bootloader
@@ -235,106 +248,132 @@ boot loaders can ignore those fields.
 
 The byte order of all fields is littleendian (this is x86, after all.)
 
+============	===========
 Field name:	setup_sects
 Type:		read
 Offset/size:	0x1f1/1
 Protocol:	ALL
+============	===========
 
   The size of the setup code in 512-byte sectors.  If this field is
   0, the real value is 4.  The real-mode code consists of the boot
   sector (always one 512-byte sector) plus the setup code.
 
-Field name:	 root_flags
-Type:		 modify (optional)
-Offset/size:	 0x1f2/2
-Protocol:	 ALL
+============	=================
+Field name:	root_flags
+Type:		modify (optional)
+Offset/size:	0x1f2/2
+Protocol:	ALL
+============	=================
 
   If this field is nonzero, the root defaults to readonly.  The use of
   this field is deprecated; use the "ro" or "rw" options on the
   command line instead.
 
+============	===============================================
 Field name:	syssize
 Type:		read
 Offset/size:	0x1f4/4 (protocol 2.04+) 0x1f4/2 (protocol ALL)
 Protocol:	2.04+
+============	===============================================
 
   The size of the protected-mode code in units of 16-byte paragraphs.
   For protocol versions older than 2.04 this field is only two bytes
   wide, and therefore cannot be trusted for the size of a kernel if
   the LOAD_HIGH flag is set.
 
+============	===============
 Field name:	ram_size
 Type:		kernel internal
 Offset/size:	0x1f8/2
 Protocol:	ALL
+============	===============
 
   This field is obsolete.
 
+============	===================
 Field name:	vid_mode
 Type:		modify (obligatory)
 Offset/size:	0x1fa/2
+============	===================
 
   Please see the section on SPECIAL COMMAND LINE OPTIONS.
 
+============	=================
 Field name:	root_dev
 Type:		modify (optional)
 Offset/size:	0x1fc/2
 Protocol:	ALL
+============	=================
 
   The default root device device number.  The use of this field is
   deprecated, use the "root=" option on the command line instead.
 
+============	=========
 Field name:	boot_flag
 Type:		read
 Offset/size:	0x1fe/2
 Protocol:	ALL
+============	=========
 
   Contains 0xAA55.  This is the closest thing old Linux kernels have
   to a magic number.
 
+============	=======
 Field name:	jump
 Type:		read
 Offset/size:	0x200/2
 Protocol:	2.00+
+============	=======
 
   Contains an x86 jump instruction, 0xEB followed by a signed offset
   relative to byte 0x202.  This can be used to determine the size of
   the header.
 
+============	=======
 Field name:	header
 Type:		read
 Offset/size:	0x202/4
 Protocol:	2.00+
+============	=======
 
   Contains the magic number "HdrS" (0x53726448).
 
+============	=======
 Field name:	version
 Type:		read
 Offset/size:	0x206/2
 Protocol:	2.00+
+============	=======
 
   Contains the boot protocol version, in (major << 8)+minor format,
   e.g. 0x0204 for version 2.04, and 0x0a11 for a hypothetical version
   10.17.
 
+============	=================
 Field name:	realmode_swtch
 Type:		modify (optional)
 Offset/size:	0x208/4
 Protocol:	2.00+
+============	=================
 
   Boot loader hook (see ADVANCED BOOT LOADER HOOKS below.)
 
+============	=============
 Field name:	start_sys_seg
 Type:		read
 Offset/size:	0x20c/2
 Protocol:	2.00+
+============	=============
 
   The load low segment (0x1000).  Obsolete.
 
+============	==============
 Field name:	kernel_version
 Type:		read
 Offset/size:	0x20e/2
 Protocol:	2.00+
+============	==============
 
   If set to a nonzero value, contains a pointer to a NUL-terminated
   human-readable kernel version number string, less 0x200.  This can
@@ -344,17 +383,19 @@ Protocol:	2.00+
   For example, if this value is set to 0x1c00, the kernel version
   number string can be found at offset 0x1e00 in the kernel file.
   This is a valid value if and only if the "setup_sects" field
-  contains the value 15 or higher, as:
+  contains the value 15 or higher, as::
 
 	0x1c00  < 15*0x200 (= 0x1e00) but
 	0x1c00 >= 14*0x200 (= 0x1c00)
 
-	0x1c00 >> 9 = 14, so the minimum value for setup_secs is 15.
+	0x1c00 >> 9 = 14, So the minimum value for setup_secs is 15.
 
+============	==================
 Field name:	type_of_loader
 Type:		write (obligatory)
 Offset/size:	0x210/1
 Protocol:	2.00+
+============	==================
 
   If your boot loader has an assigned id (see table below), enter
   0xTV here, where T is an identifier for the boot loader and V is
@@ -365,17 +406,20 @@ Protocol:	2.00+
   Similarly, the ext_loader_ver field can be used to provide more than
   four bits for the bootloader version.
 
-  For example, for T = 0x15, V = 0x234, write:
+  For example, for T = 0x15, V = 0x234, write::
 
-  type_of_loader  <- 0xE4
-  ext_loader_type <- 0x05
-  ext_loader_ver  <- 0x23
+	type_of_loader  <- 0xE4
+	ext_loader_type <- 0x05
+	ext_loader_ver  <- 0x23
 
   Assigned boot loader ids (hexadecimal):
 
-	0  LILO			(0x00 reserved for pre-2.00 bootloader)
+	== =======================================
+	0  LILO
+	   (0x00 reserved for pre-2.00 bootloader)
 	1  Loadlin
-	2  bootsect-loader	(0x20, all other values reserved)
+	2  bootsect-loader
+	   (0x20, all other values reserved)
 	3  Syslinux
 	4  Etherboot/gPXE/iPXE
 	5  ELILO
@@ -386,55 +430,70 @@ Protocol:	2.00+
 	B  Qemu
 	C  Arcturus Networks uCbootloader
 	D  kexec-tools
-	E  Extended		(see ext_loader_type)
-	F  Special		(0xFF = undefined)
-       10  Reserved
-       11  Minimal Linux Bootloader <http://sebastian-plotz.blogspot.de>
-       12  OVMF UEFI virtualization stack
+	E  Extended (see ext_loader_type)
+	F  Special (0xFF = undefined)
+	10 Reserved
+	11 Minimal Linux Bootloader
+	   <http://sebastian-plotz.blogspot.de>
+	12 OVMF UEFI virtualization stack
+	== =======================================
 
-  Please contact <hpa@zytor.com> if you need a bootloader ID
-  value assigned.
+  Please contact <hpa@zytor.com> if you need a bootloader ID value assigned.
 
+============	===================
 Field name:	loadflags
 Type:		modify (obligatory)
 Offset/size:	0x211/1
 Protocol:	2.00+
+============	===================
 
   This field is a bitmask.
 
   Bit 0 (read):	LOADED_HIGH
+
 	- If 0, the protected-mode code is loaded at 0x10000.
 	- If 1, the protected-mode code is loaded at 0x100000.
 
   Bit 1 (kernel internal): KASLR_FLAG
+
 	- Used internally by the compressed kernel to communicate
 	  KASLR status to kernel proper.
-	  If 1, KASLR enabled.
-	  If 0, KASLR disabled.
+
+	    - If 1, KASLR enabled.
+	    - If 0, KASLR disabled.
 
   Bit 5 (write): QUIET_FLAG
+
 	- If 0, print early messages.
 	- If 1, suppress early messages.
+
 		This requests to the kernel (decompressor and early
 		kernel) to not write early messages that require
 		accessing the display hardware directly.
 
   Bit 6 (write): KEEP_SEGMENTS
+
 	Protocol: 2.07+
+
 	- If 0, reload the segment registers in the 32bit entry point.
 	- If 1, do not reload the segment registers in the 32bit entry point.
+
 		Assume that %cs %ds %ss %es are all set to flat segments with
 		a base of 0 (or the equivalent for their environment).
 
   Bit 7 (write): CAN_USE_HEAP
+
 	Set this bit to 1 to indicate that the value entered in the
 	heap_end_ptr is valid.  If this field is clear, some setup code
 	functionality will be disabled.
 
+
+============	===================
 Field name:	setup_move_size
 Type:		modify (obligatory)
 Offset/size:	0x212/2
 Protocol:	2.00-2.01
+============	===================
 
   When using protocol 2.00 or 2.01, if the real mode kernel is not
   loaded at 0x90000, it gets moved there later in the loading
@@ -443,14 +502,16 @@ Protocol:	2.00-2.01
   itself.
 
   The unit is bytes starting with the beginning of the boot sector.
-  
+
   This field is can be ignored when the protocol is 2.02 or higher, or
   if the real-mode code is loaded at 0x90000.
 
+============	========================
 Field name:	code32_start
 Type:		modify (optional, reloc)
 Offset/size:	0x214/4
 Protocol:	2.00+
+============	========================
 
   The address to jump to in protected mode.  This defaults to the load
   address of the kernel, and can be used by the boot loader to
@@ -458,47 +519,57 @@ Protocol:	2.00+
 
   This field can be modified for two purposes:
 
-  1. as a boot loader hook (see ADVANCED BOOT LOADER HOOKS below.)
+    1. as a boot loader hook (see Advanced Boot Loader Hooks below.)
 
-  2. if a bootloader which does not install a hook loads a
-     relocatable kernel at a nonstandard address it will have to modify
-     this field to point to the load address.
+    2. if a bootloader which does not install a hook loads a
+       relocatable kernel at a nonstandard address it will have to modify
+       this field to point to the load address.
 
+============	==================
 Field name:	ramdisk_image
 Type:		write (obligatory)
 Offset/size:	0x218/4
 Protocol:	2.00+
+============	==================
 
   The 32-bit linear address of the initial ramdisk or ramfs.  Leave at
   zero if there is no initial ramdisk/ramfs.
 
+============	==================
 Field name:	ramdisk_size
 Type:		write (obligatory)
 Offset/size:	0x21c/4
 Protocol:	2.00+
+============	==================
 
   Size of the initial ramdisk or ramfs.  Leave at zero if there is no
   initial ramdisk/ramfs.
 
+============	===============
 Field name:	bootsect_kludge
 Type:		kernel internal
 Offset/size:	0x220/4
 Protocol:	2.00+
+============	===============
 
   This field is obsolete.
 
+============	==================
 Field name:	heap_end_ptr
 Type:		write (obligatory)
 Offset/size:	0x224/2
 Protocol:	2.01+
+============	==================
 
   Set this field to the offset (from the beginning of the real-mode
   code) of the end of the setup stack/heap, minus 0x0200.
 
+============	================
 Field name:	ext_loader_ver
 Type:		write (optional)
 Offset/size:	0x226/1
 Protocol:	2.02+
+============	================
 
   This field is used as an extension of the version number in the
   type_of_loader field.  The total version number is considered to be
@@ -510,10 +581,12 @@ Protocol:	2.02+
   Kernels prior to 2.6.31 did not recognize this field, but it is safe
   to write for protocol version 2.02 or higher.
 
+============	=====================================================
 Field name:	ext_loader_type
 Type:		write (obligatory if (type_of_loader & 0xf0) == 0xe0)
 Offset/size:	0x227/1
 Protocol:	2.02+
+============	=====================================================
 
   This field is used as an extension of the type number in
   type_of_loader field.  If the type in type_of_loader is 0xE, then
@@ -524,10 +597,12 @@ Protocol:	2.02+
   Kernels prior to 2.6.31 did not recognize this field, but it is safe
   to write for protocol version 2.02 or higher.
 
+============	==================
 Field name:	cmd_line_ptr
 Type:		write (obligatory)
 Offset/size:	0x228/4
 Protocol:	2.02+
+============	==================
 
   Set this field to the linear address of the kernel command line.
   The kernel command line can be located anywhere between the end of
@@ -540,10 +615,12 @@ Protocol:	2.02+
   zero, the kernel will assume that your boot loader does not support
   the 2.02+ protocol.
 
+============	===============
 Field name:	initrd_addr_max
 Type:		read
 Offset/size:	0x22c/4
 Protocol:	2.03+
+============	===============
 
   The maximum address that may be occupied by the initial
   ramdisk/ramfs contents.  For boot protocols 2.02 or earlier, this
@@ -552,10 +629,12 @@ Protocol:	2.03+
   your ramdisk is exactly 131072 bytes long and this field is
   0x37FFFFFF, you can start your ramdisk at 0x37FE0000.)
 
+============	============================
 Field name:	kernel_alignment
 Type:		read/modify (reloc)
 Offset/size:	0x230/4
 Protocol:	2.05+ (read), 2.10+ (modify)
+============	============================
 
   Alignment unit required by the kernel (if relocatable_kernel is
   true.)  A relocatable kernel that is loaded at an alignment
@@ -567,25 +646,29 @@ Protocol:	2.05+ (read), 2.10+ (modify)
   loader to modify this field to permit a lesser alignment.  See the
   min_alignment and pref_address field below.
 
+============	==================
 Field name:	relocatable_kernel
 Type:		read (reloc)
 Offset/size:	0x234/1
 Protocol:	2.05+
+============	==================
 
   If this field is nonzero, the protected-mode part of the kernel can
   be loaded at any address that satisfies the kernel_alignment field.
   After loading, the boot loader must set the code32_start field to
   point to the loaded code, or to a boot loader hook.
 
+============	=============
 Field name:	min_alignment
 Type:		read (reloc)
 Offset/size:	0x235/1
 Protocol:	2.10+
+============	=============
 
   This field, if nonzero, indicates as a power of two the minimum
   alignment required, as opposed to preferred, by the kernel to boot.
   If a boot loader makes use of this field, it should update the
-  kernel_alignment field with the alignment unit desired; typically:
+  kernel_alignment field with the alignment unit desired; typically::
 
 	kernel_alignment = 1 << min_alignment
 
@@ -593,44 +676,56 @@ Protocol:	2.10+
   misaligned kernel.  Therefore, a loader should typically try each
   power-of-two alignment from kernel_alignment down to this alignment.
 
-Field name:     xloadflags
-Type:           read
-Offset/size:    0x236/2
-Protocol:       2.12+
+============	==========
+Field name:	xloadflags
+Type:		read
+Offset/size:	0x236/2
+Protocol:	2.12+
+============	==========
 
   This field is a bitmask.
 
   Bit 0 (read):	XLF_KERNEL_64
+
 	- If 1, this kernel has the legacy 64-bit entry point at 0x200.
 
   Bit 1 (read): XLF_CAN_BE_LOADED_ABOVE_4G
+
         - If 1, kernel/boot_params/cmdline/ramdisk can be above 4G.
 
   Bit 2 (read):	XLF_EFI_HANDOVER_32
+
 	- If 1, the kernel supports the 32-bit EFI handoff entry point
           given at handover_offset.
 
   Bit 3 (read): XLF_EFI_HANDOVER_64
+
 	- If 1, the kernel supports the 64-bit EFI handoff entry point
           given at handover_offset + 0x200.
 
   Bit 4 (read): XLF_EFI_KEXEC
+
 	- If 1, the kernel supports kexec EFI boot with EFI runtime support.
 
+
+============	============
 Field name:	cmdline_size
 Type:		read
 Offset/size:	0x238/4
 Protocol:	2.06+
+============	============
 
   The maximum size of the command line without the terminating
   zero. This means that the command line can contain at most
   cmdline_size characters. With protocol version 2.05 and earlier, the
   maximum size was 255.
 
+============	====================================
 Field name:	hardware_subarch
 Type:		write (optional, defaults to x86/PC)
 Offset/size:	0x23c/4
 Protocol:	2.07+
+============	====================================
 
   In a paravirtualized environment the hardware low level architectural
   pieces such as interrupt handling, page table handling, and
@@ -639,25 +734,31 @@ Protocol:	2.07+
   This field allows the bootloader to inform the kernel we are in one
   one of those environments.
 
+  ==========	==============================
   0x00000000	The default x86/PC environment
   0x00000001	lguest
   0x00000002	Xen
   0x00000003	Moorestown MID
   0x00000004	CE4100 TV Platform
+  ==========	==============================
 
+============	=========================
 Field name:	hardware_subarch_data
 Type:		write (subarch-dependent)
 Offset/size:	0x240/8
 Protocol:	2.07+
+============	=========================
 
   A pointer to data that is specific to hardware subarch
   This field is currently unused for the default x86/PC environment,
   do not modify.
 
+============	==============
 Field name:	payload_offset
 Type:		read
 Offset/size:	0x248/4
 Protocol:	2.08+
+============	==============
 
   If non-zero then this field contains the offset from the beginning
   of the protected-mode code to the payload.
@@ -670,29 +771,33 @@ Protocol:	2.08+
   02 21).  The uncompressed payload is currently always ELF (magic
   number 7F 45 4C 46).
 
+============	==============
 Field name:	payload_length
 Type:		read
 Offset/size:	0x24c/4
 Protocol:	2.08+
+============	==============
 
   The length of the payload.
 
+============	===============
 Field name:	setup_data
 Type:		write (special)
 Offset/size:	0x250/8
 Protocol:	2.09+
+============	===============
 
   The 64-bit physical pointer to NULL terminated single linked list of
   struct setup_data. This is used to define a more extensible boot
   parameters passing mechanism. The definition of struct setup_data is
-  as follow:
+  as follow::
 
-  struct setup_data {
-	  u64 next;
-	  u32 type;
-	  u32 len;
-	  u8  data[0];
-  };
+	struct setup_data {
+		u64 next;
+		u32 type;
+		u32 len;
+		u8  data[0];
+	};
 
   Where, the next is a 64-bit physical pointer to the next node of
   linked list, the next field of the last node is 0; the type is used
@@ -704,10 +809,12 @@ Protocol:	2.09+
   sure to consider the case where the linked list already contains
   entries.
 
+============	============
 Field name:	pref_address
 Type:		read (reloc)
 Offset/size:	0x258/8
 Protocol:	2.10+
+============	============
 
   This field, if nonzero, represents a preferred load address for the
   kernel.  A relocating bootloader should attempt to load at this
@@ -716,9 +823,11 @@ Protocol:	2.10+
   A non-relocatable kernel will unconditionally move itself and to run
   at this address.
 
+============	=======
 Field name:	init_size
 Type:		read
 Offset/size:	0x260/4
+============	=======
 
   This field indicates the amount of linear contiguous memory starting
   at the kernel runtime start address that the kernel needs before it
@@ -727,16 +836,18 @@ Offset/size:	0x260/4
   be used by a relocating boot loader to help select a safe load
   address for the kernel.
 
-  The kernel runtime start address is determined by the following algorithm:
+  The kernel runtime start address is determined by the following algorithm::
 
-  if (relocatable_kernel)
+	if (relocatable_kernel)
 	runtime_start = align_up(load_address, kernel_alignment)
-  else
+	else
 	runtime_start = pref_address
 
+============	===============
 Field name:	handover_offset
 Type:		read
 Offset/size:	0x264/4
+============	===============
 
   This field is the offset from the beginning of the kernel image to
   the EFI handover protocol entry point. Boot loaders using the EFI
@@ -745,7 +856,8 @@ Offset/size:	0x264/4
   See EFI HANDOVER PROTOCOL below for more details.
 
 
-**** THE IMAGE CHECKSUM
+The Image Checksum
+==================
 
 From boot protocol version 2.08 onwards the CRC-32 is calculated over
 the entire file using the characteristic polynomial 0x04C11DB7 and an
@@ -754,7 +866,8 @@ file; therefore the CRC of the file up to the limit specified in the
 syssize field of the header is always 0.
 
 
-**** THE KERNEL COMMAND LINE
+The Kernel Command Line
+=======================
 
 The kernel command line has become an important way for the boot
 loader to communicate with the kernel.  Some of its options are also
@@ -774,19 +887,20 @@ heap and 0xA0000.
 If the protocol version is *not* 2.02 or higher, the kernel
 command line is entered using the following protocol:
 
-	At offset 0x0020 (word), "cmd_line_magic", enter the magic
-	number 0xA33F.
+  - At offset 0x0020 (word), "cmd_line_magic", enter the magic
+    number 0xA33F.
+
+  - At offset 0x0022 (word), "cmd_line_offset", enter the offset
+    of the kernel command line (relative to the start of the
+    real-mode kernel).
 
-	At offset 0x0022 (word), "cmd_line_offset", enter the offset
-	of the kernel command line (relative to the start of the
-	real-mode kernel).
-	
-	The kernel command line *must* be within the memory region
-	covered by setup_move_size, so you may need to adjust this
-	field.
+  - The kernel command line *must* be within the memory region
+    covered by setup_move_size, so you may need to adjust this
+    field.
 
 
-**** MEMORY LAYOUT OF THE REAL-MODE CODE
+Memory Layout of The Real-Mode Code
+===================================
 
 The real-mode code requires a stack/heap to be set up, as well as
 memory allocated for the kernel command line.  This needs to be done
@@ -802,10 +916,11 @@ segment has to be used:
 	- When loading a zImage kernel ((loadflags & 0x01) == 0).
 	- When loading a 2.01 or earlier boot protocol kernel.
 
-	  -> For the 2.00 and 2.01 boot protocols, the real-mode code
-	     can be loaded at another address, but it is internally
-	     relocated to 0x90000.  For the "old" protocol, the
-	     real-mode code must be loaded at 0x90000.
+.. note::
+     For the 2.00 and 2.01 boot protocols, the real-mode code
+     can be loaded at another address, but it is internally
+     relocated to 0x90000.  For the "old" protocol, the
+     real-mode code must be loaded at 0x90000.
 
 When loading at 0x90000, avoid using memory above 0x9a000.
 
@@ -818,24 +933,29 @@ The kernel command line should not be located below the real-mode
 code, nor should it be located in high memory.
 
 
-**** SAMPLE BOOT CONFIGURATION
+Sample Boot Configuartion
+=========================
 
 As a sample configuration, assume the following layout of the real
-mode segment:
+mode segment.
 
     When loading below 0x90000, use the entire segment:
 
+        =============	===================
 	0x0000-0x7fff	Real mode kernel
 	0x8000-0xdfff	Stack and heap
 	0xe000-0xffff	Kernel command line
+	=============	===================
 
     When loading at 0x90000 OR the protocol version is 2.01 or earlier:
 
+	=============	===================
 	0x0000-0x7fff	Real mode kernel
 	0x8000-0x97ff	Stack and heap
 	0x9800-0x9fff	Kernel command line
+	=============	===================
 
-Such a boot loader should enter the following fields in the header:
+Such a boot loader should enter the following fields in the header::
 
 	unsigned long base_ptr;	/* base address for real-mode segment */
 
@@ -894,7 +1014,8 @@ Such a boot loader should enter the following fields in the header:
 	}
 
 
-**** LOADING THE REST OF THE KERNEL
+Loading The Rest of The Kernel
+==============================
 
 The 32-bit (non-real-mode) kernel starts at offset (setup_sects+1)*512
 in the kernel file (again, if setup_sects == 0 the real value is 4.)
@@ -902,7 +1023,7 @@ It should be loaded at address 0x10000 for Image/zImage kernels and
 0x100000 for bzImage kernels.
 
 The kernel is a bzImage kernel if the protocol >= 2.00 and the 0x01
-bit (LOAD_HIGH) in the loadflags field is set:
+bit (LOAD_HIGH) in the loadflags field is set::
 
 	is_bzImage = (protocol >= 0x0200) && (loadflags & 0x01);
 	load_address = is_bzImage ? 0x100000 : 0x10000;
@@ -912,8 +1033,8 @@ the entire 0x10000-0x90000 range of memory.  This means it is pretty
 much a requirement for these kernels to load the real-mode part at
 0x90000.  bzImage kernels allow much more flexibility.
 
-
-**** SPECIAL COMMAND LINE OPTIONS
+Special Command Line Options
+============================
 
 If the command line provided by the boot loader is entered by the
 user, the user may expect the following command line options to work.
@@ -962,7 +1083,8 @@ or configuration-specified command line.  Otherwise, "init=/bin/sh"
 gets confused by the "auto" option.
 
 
-**** RUNNING THE KERNEL
+Running the Kernel
+==================
 
 The kernel is started by jumping to the kernel entry point, which is
 located at *segment* offset 0x20 from the start of the real mode
@@ -976,7 +1098,7 @@ interrupts should be disabled.  Furthermore, to guard against bugs in
 the kernel, it is recommended that the boot loader sets fs = gs = ds =
 es = ss.
 
-In our example from above, we would do:
+In our example from above, we would do::
 
 	/* Note: in the case of the "old" kernel protocol, base_ptr must
 	   be == 0x90000 at this point; see the previous sample code */
@@ -999,7 +1121,8 @@ switched off, especially if the loaded kernel has the floppy driver as
 a demand-loaded module!
 
 
-**** ADVANCED BOOT LOADER HOOKS
+Advanced Boot Loader Hooks
+==========================
 
 If the boot loader runs in a particularly hostile environment (such as
 LOADLIN, which runs under DOS) it may be impossible to follow the
@@ -1028,7 +1151,8 @@ IMPORTANT: All the hooks are required to preserve %esp, %ebp, %esi and
 	(relocated, if appropriate.)
 
 
-**** 32-bit BOOT PROTOCOL
+32-bit Boot Protocol
+====================
 
 For machine with some new BIOS other than legacy BIOS, such as EFI,
 LinuxBIOS, etc, and kexec, the 16-bit real mode setup code in kernel
@@ -1041,7 +1165,7 @@ traditionally known as "zero page"). The memory for struct boot_params
 should be allocated and initialized to all zero. Then the setup header
 from offset 0x01f1 of kernel image on should be loaded into struct
 boot_params and examined. The end of setup header can be calculated as
-follow:
+follow::
 
 	0x0202 + byte value at offset 0x0201
 
@@ -1065,7 +1189,8 @@ must have read/write permission; CS must be __BOOT_CS and DS, ES, SS
 must be __BOOT_DS; interrupt must be disabled; %esi must hold the base
 address of the struct boot_params; %ebp, %edi and %ebx must be zero.
 
-**** 64-bit BOOT PROTOCOL
+64-bit Boot Protocol
+====================
 
 For machine with 64bit cpus and 64bit kernel, we could use 64bit bootloader
 and we need a 64-bit boot protocol.
@@ -1076,7 +1201,7 @@ traditionally known as "zero page"). The memory for struct boot_params
 could be allocated anywhere (even above 4G) and initialized to all zero.
 Then, the setup header at offset 0x01f1 of kernel image on should be
 loaded into struct boot_params and examined. The end of setup header
-can be calculated as follows:
+can be calculated as follows::
 
 	0x0202 + byte value at offset 0x0201
 
@@ -1103,7 +1228,8 @@ must have read/write permission; CS must be __BOOT_CS and DS, ES, SS
 must be __BOOT_DS; interrupt must be disabled; %rsi must hold the base
 address of the struct boot_params.
 
-**** EFI HANDOVER PROTOCOL
+EFI Handover Protocol
+=====================
 
 This protocol allows boot loaders to defer initialisation to the EFI
 boot stub. The boot loader is required to load the kernel/initrd(s)
@@ -1111,7 +1237,7 @@ from the boot media and jump to the EFI handover protocol entry point
 which is hdr->handover_offset bytes from the beginning of
 startup_{32,64}.
 
-The function prototype for the handover entry point looks like this,
+The function prototype for the handover entry point looks like this::
 
     efi_main(void *handle, efi_system_table_t *table, struct boot_params *bp)
 
@@ -1120,11 +1246,11 @@ firmware, 'table' is the EFI system table - these are the first two
 arguments of the "handoff state" as described in section 2.3 of the
 UEFI specification. 'bp' is the boot loader-allocated boot params.
 
-The boot loader *must* fill out the following fields in bp,
+The boot loader *must* fill out the following fields in bp::
 
-    o hdr.code32_start
-    o hdr.cmd_line_ptr
-    o hdr.ramdisk_image (if applicable)
-    o hdr.ramdisk_size  (if applicable)
+  - hdr.code32_start
+  - hdr.cmd_line_ptr
+  - hdr.ramdisk_image (if applicable)
+  - hdr.ramdisk_size  (if applicable)
 
 All other fields should be zero.
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/conf.py b/Documentation/x86/conf.py
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..33c5c3142e20
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/x86/conf.py
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+# -*- coding: utf-8; mode: python -*-
+
+project = "X86 architecture specific documentation"
+
+tags.add("subproject")
+
+latex_documents = [
+    ('index', 'x86.tex', project,
+     'The kernel development community', 'manual'),
+]
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/earlyprintk.txt b/Documentation/x86/earlyprintk.rst
index 46933e06c972..11307378acf0 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/earlyprintk.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/earlyprintk.rst
@@ -1,52 +1,58 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+============
+Early Printk
+============
 
 Mini-HOWTO for using the earlyprintk=dbgp boot option with a
 USB2 Debug port key and a debug cable, on x86 systems.
 
 You need two computers, the 'USB debug key' special gadget and
-and two USB cables, connected like this:
+and two USB cables, connected like this::
 
   [host/target] <-------> [USB debug key] <-------> [client/console]
 
-1. There are a number of specific hardware requirements:
-
- a.) Host/target system needs to have USB debug port capability.
-
- You can check this capability by looking at a 'Debug port' bit in
- the lspci -vvv output:
-
- # lspci -vvv
- ...
- 00:1d.7 USB Controller: Intel Corporation 82801H (ICH8 Family) USB2 EHCI Controller #1 (rev 03) (prog-if 20 [EHCI])
-         Subsystem: Lenovo ThinkPad T61
-         Control: I/O- Mem+ BusMaster+ SpecCycle- MemWINV- VGASnoop- ParErr- Stepping- SERR+ FastB2B- DisINTx-
-         Status: Cap+ 66MHz- UDF- FastB2B+ ParErr- DEVSEL=medium >TAbort- <TAbort- <MAbort- >SERR- <PERR- INTx-
-         Latency: 0
-         Interrupt: pin D routed to IRQ 19
-         Region 0: Memory at fe227000 (32-bit, non-prefetchable) [size=1K]
-         Capabilities: [50] Power Management version 2
-                 Flags: PMEClk- DSI- D1- D2- AuxCurrent=375mA PME(D0+,D1-,D2-,D3hot+,D3cold+)
-                 Status: D0 PME-Enable- DSel=0 DScale=0 PME+
-         Capabilities: [58] Debug port: BAR=1 offset=00a0
+Hardware requirements
+=====================
+
+  a) Host/target system needs to have USB debug port capability.
+
+     You can check this capability by looking at a 'Debug port' bit in
+     the lspci -vvv output::
+
+       # lspci -vvv
+       ...
+       00:1d.7 USB Controller: Intel Corporation 82801H (ICH8 Family) USB2 EHCI Controller #1 (rev 03) (prog-if 20 [EHCI])
+               Subsystem: Lenovo ThinkPad T61
+               Control: I/O- Mem+ BusMaster+ SpecCycle- MemWINV- VGASnoop- ParErr- Stepping- SERR+ FastB2B- DisINTx-
+               Status: Cap+ 66MHz- UDF- FastB2B+ ParErr- DEVSEL=medium >TAbort- <TAbort- <MAbort- >SERR- <PERR- INTx-
+               Latency: 0
+               Interrupt: pin D routed to IRQ 19
+               Region 0: Memory at fe227000 (32-bit, non-prefetchable) [size=1K]
+               Capabilities: [50] Power Management version 2
+                       Flags: PMEClk- DSI- D1- D2- AuxCurrent=375mA PME(D0+,D1-,D2-,D3hot+,D3cold+)
+                       Status: D0 PME-Enable- DSel=0 DScale=0 PME+
+               Capabilities: [58] Debug port: BAR=1 offset=00a0
                             ^^^^^^^^^^^ <==================== [ HERE ]
-	 Kernel driver in use: ehci_hcd
-         Kernel modules: ehci-hcd
- ...
+               Kernel driver in use: ehci_hcd
+               Kernel modules: ehci-hcd
+       ...
 
-( If your system does not list a debug port capability then you probably
-  won't be able to use the USB debug key. )
+     .. note::
+       If your system does not list a debug port capability then you probably
+       won't be able to use the USB debug key.
 
- b.) You also need a NetChip USB debug cable/key:
+  b) You also need a NetChip USB debug cable/key:
 
         http://www.plxtech.com/products/NET2000/NET20DC/default.asp
 
      This is a small blue plastic connector with two USB connections;
      it draws power from its USB connections.
 
- c.) You need a second client/console system with a high speed USB 2.0
-     port.
+  c) You need a second client/console system with a high speed USB 2.0 port.
 
- d.) The NetChip device must be plugged directly into the physical
-     debug port on the "host/target" system.  You cannot use a USB hub in
+  d) The NetChip device must be plugged directly into the physical
+     debug port on the "host/target" system. You cannot use a USB hub in
      between the physical debug port and the "host/target" system.
 
      The EHCI debug controller is bound to a specific physical USB
@@ -65,29 +71,31 @@ and two USB cables, connected like this:
      to the hardware vendor, because there is no reason not to wire
      this port into one of the physically accessible ports.
 
- e.) It is also important to note, that many versions of the NetChip
+  e) It is also important to note, that many versions of the NetChip
      device require the "client/console" system to be plugged into the
      right hand side of the device (with the product logo facing up and
      readable left to right).  The reason being is that the 5 volt
      power supply is taken from only one side of the device and it
      must be the side that does not get rebooted.
 
-2. Software requirements:
+Software requirements
+=====================
 
- a.) On the host/target system:
+  a) On the host/target system:
 
-    You need to enable the following kernel config option:
+    You need to enable the following kernel config option::
 
       CONFIG_EARLY_PRINTK_DBGP=y
 
     And you need to add the boot command line: "earlyprintk=dbgp".
 
-    (If you are using Grub, append it to the 'kernel' line in
-     /etc/grub.conf.  If you are using Grub2 on a BIOS firmware system,
-     append it to the 'linux' line in /boot/grub2/grub.cfg. If you are
-     using Grub2 on an EFI firmware system, append it to the 'linux'
-     or 'linuxefi' line in /boot/grub2/grub.cfg or
-     /boot/efi/EFI/<distro>/grub.cfg.)
+    .. note::
+      If you are using Grub, append it to the 'kernel' line in
+      /etc/grub.conf.  If you are using Grub2 on a BIOS firmware system,
+      append it to the 'linux' line in /boot/grub2/grub.cfg. If you are
+      using Grub2 on an EFI firmware system, append it to the 'linux'
+      or 'linuxefi' line in /boot/grub2/grub.cfg or
+      /boot/efi/EFI/<distro>/grub.cfg.
 
     On systems with more than one EHCI debug controller you must
     specify the correct EHCI debug controller number.  The ordering
@@ -96,14 +104,15 @@ and two USB cables, connected like this:
     controller.  To use the second EHCI debug controller, you would
     use the command line: "earlyprintk=dbgp1"
 
-    NOTE: normally earlyprintk console gets turned off once the
-    regular console is alive - use "earlyprintk=dbgp,keep" to keep
-    this channel open beyond early bootup. This can be useful for
-    debugging crashes under Xorg, etc.
+    .. note::
+      normally earlyprintk console gets turned off once the
+      regular console is alive - use "earlyprintk=dbgp,keep" to keep
+      this channel open beyond early bootup. This can be useful for
+      debugging crashes under Xorg, etc.
 
- b.) On the client/console system:
+  b) On the client/console system:
 
-    You should enable the following kernel config option:
+    You should enable the following kernel config option::
 
       CONFIG_USB_SERIAL_DEBUG=y
 
@@ -115,27 +124,28 @@ and two USB cables, connected like this:
     it up to use /dev/ttyUSB0 - or use a raw 'cat /dev/ttyUSBx' to
     see the raw output.
 
- c.) On Nvidia Southbridge based systems: the kernel will try to probe
+  c) On Nvidia Southbridge based systems: the kernel will try to probe
      and find out which port has a debug device connected.
 
-3. Testing that it works fine:
+Testing
+=======
 
-   You can test the output by using earlyprintk=dbgp,keep and provoking
-   kernel messages on the host/target system. You can provoke a harmless
-   kernel message by for example doing:
+You can test the output by using earlyprintk=dbgp,keep and provoking
+kernel messages on the host/target system. You can provoke a harmless
+kernel message by for example doing::
 
      echo h > /proc/sysrq-trigger
 
-   On the host/target system you should see this help line in "dmesg" output:
+On the host/target system you should see this help line in "dmesg" output::
 
      SysRq : HELP : loglevel(0-9) reBoot Crashdump terminate-all-tasks(E) memory-full-oom-kill(F) kill-all-tasks(I) saK show-backtrace-all-active-cpus(L) show-memory-usage(M) nice-all-RT-tasks(N) powerOff show-registers(P) show-all-timers(Q) unRaw Sync show-task-states(T) Unmount show-blocked-tasks(W) dump-ftrace-buffer(Z)
 
-   On the client/console system do:
+On the client/console system do::
 
        cat /dev/ttyUSB0
 
-   And you should see the help line above displayed shortly after you've
-   provoked it on the host system.
+And you should see the help line above displayed shortly after you've
+provoked it on the host system.
 
 If it does not work then please ask about it on the linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org
 mailing list or contact the x86 maintainers.
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/entry_64.txt b/Documentation/x86/entry_64.rst
index c1df8eba9dfd..a48b3f6ebbe8 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/entry_64.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/entry_64.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,9 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+==============
+Kernel Entries
+==============
+
 This file documents some of the kernel entries in
 arch/x86/entry/entry_64.S.  A lot of this explanation is adapted from
 an email from Ingo Molnar:
@@ -59,7 +65,7 @@ Now, there's a secondary complication: there's a cheap way to test
 which mode the CPU is in and an expensive way.
 
 The cheap way is to pick this info off the entry frame on the kernel
-stack, from the CS of the ptregs area of the kernel stack:
+stack, from the CS of the ptregs area of the kernel stack::
 
 	xorl %ebx,%ebx
 	testl $3,CS+8(%rsp)
@@ -67,7 +73,7 @@ stack, from the CS of the ptregs area of the kernel stack:
 	SWAPGS
 
 The expensive (paranoid) way is to read back the MSR_GS_BASE value
-(which is what SWAPGS modifies):
+(which is what SWAPGS modifies)::
 
 	movl $1,%ebx
 	movl $MSR_GS_BASE,%ecx
@@ -76,7 +82,7 @@ The expensive (paranoid) way is to read back the MSR_GS_BASE value
 	js 1f   /* negative -> in kernel */
 	SWAPGS
 	xorl %ebx,%ebx
-1:	ret
+  1:	ret
 
 If we are at an interrupt or user-trap/gate-alike boundary then we can
 use the faster check: the stack will be a reliable indicator of
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/exception-tables.txt b/Documentation/x86/exception-tables.rst
index e396bcd8d830..24596c8210b5 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/exception-tables.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/exception-tables.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,10 @@
-     Kernel level exception handling in Linux
-  Commentary by Joerg Pommnitz <joerg@raleigh.ibm.com>
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+===============================
+Kernel level exception handling
+===============================
+
+Commentary by Joerg Pommnitz <joerg@raleigh.ibm.com>
 
 When a process runs in kernel mode, it often has to access user
 mode memory whose address has been passed by an untrusted program.
@@ -25,9 +30,9 @@ How does this work?
 
 Whenever the kernel tries to access an address that is currently not
 accessible, the CPU generates a page fault exception and calls the
-page fault handler
+page fault handler::
 
-void do_page_fault(struct pt_regs *regs, unsigned long error_code)
+  void do_page_fault(struct pt_regs *regs, unsigned long error_code)
 
 in arch/x86/mm/fault.c. The parameters on the stack are set up by
 the low level assembly glue in arch/x86/kernel/entry_32.S. The parameter
@@ -57,73 +62,74 @@ as an example. The definition is somewhat hard to follow, so let's peek at
 the code generated by the preprocessor and the compiler. I selected
 the get_user call in drivers/char/sysrq.c for a detailed examination.
 
-The original code in sysrq.c line 587:
+The original code in sysrq.c line 587::
+
         get_user(c, buf);
 
-The preprocessor output (edited to become somewhat readable):
-
-(
-  {
-    long __gu_err = - 14 , __gu_val = 0;
-    const __typeof__(*( (  buf ) )) *__gu_addr = ((buf));
-    if (((((0 + current_set[0])->tss.segment) == 0x18 )  ||
-       (((sizeof(*(buf))) <= 0xC0000000UL) &&
-       ((unsigned long)(__gu_addr ) <= 0xC0000000UL - (sizeof(*(buf)))))))
-      do {
-        __gu_err  = 0;
-        switch ((sizeof(*(buf)))) {
-          case 1:
-            __asm__ __volatile__(
-              "1:      mov" "b" " %2,%" "b" "1\n"
-              "2:\n"
-              ".section .fixup,\"ax\"\n"
-              "3:      movl %3,%0\n"
-              "        xor" "b" " %" "b" "1,%" "b" "1\n"
-              "        jmp 2b\n"
-              ".section __ex_table,\"a\"\n"
-              "        .align 4\n"
-              "        .long 1b,3b\n"
-              ".text"        : "=r"(__gu_err), "=q" (__gu_val): "m"((*(struct __large_struct *)
-                            (   __gu_addr   )) ), "i"(- 14 ), "0"(  __gu_err  )) ;
-              break;
-          case 2:
-            __asm__ __volatile__(
-              "1:      mov" "w" " %2,%" "w" "1\n"
-              "2:\n"
-              ".section .fixup,\"ax\"\n"
-              "3:      movl %3,%0\n"
-              "        xor" "w" " %" "w" "1,%" "w" "1\n"
-              "        jmp 2b\n"
-              ".section __ex_table,\"a\"\n"
-              "        .align 4\n"
-              "        .long 1b,3b\n"
-              ".text"        : "=r"(__gu_err), "=r" (__gu_val) : "m"((*(struct __large_struct *)
-                            (   __gu_addr   )) ), "i"(- 14 ), "0"(  __gu_err  ));
-              break;
-          case 4:
-            __asm__ __volatile__(
-              "1:      mov" "l" " %2,%" "" "1\n"
-              "2:\n"
-              ".section .fixup,\"ax\"\n"
-              "3:      movl %3,%0\n"
-              "        xor" "l" " %" "" "1,%" "" "1\n"
-              "        jmp 2b\n"
-              ".section __ex_table,\"a\"\n"
-              "        .align 4\n"        "        .long 1b,3b\n"
-              ".text"        : "=r"(__gu_err), "=r" (__gu_val) : "m"((*(struct __large_struct *)
-                            (   __gu_addr   )) ), "i"(- 14 ), "0"(__gu_err));
-              break;
-          default:
-            (__gu_val) = __get_user_bad();
-        }
-      } while (0) ;
-    ((c)) = (__typeof__(*((buf))))__gu_val;
-    __gu_err;
-  }
-);
+The preprocessor output (edited to become somewhat readable)::
+
+  (
+    {
+      long __gu_err = - 14 , __gu_val = 0;
+      const __typeof__(*( (  buf ) )) *__gu_addr = ((buf));
+      if (((((0 + current_set[0])->tss.segment) == 0x18 )  ||
+        (((sizeof(*(buf))) <= 0xC0000000UL) &&
+        ((unsigned long)(__gu_addr ) <= 0xC0000000UL - (sizeof(*(buf)))))))
+        do {
+          __gu_err  = 0;
+          switch ((sizeof(*(buf)))) {
+            case 1:
+              __asm__ __volatile__(
+                "1:      mov" "b" " %2,%" "b" "1\n"
+                "2:\n"
+                ".section .fixup,\"ax\"\n"
+                "3:      movl %3,%0\n"
+                "        xor" "b" " %" "b" "1,%" "b" "1\n"
+                "        jmp 2b\n"
+                ".section __ex_table,\"a\"\n"
+                "        .align 4\n"
+                "        .long 1b,3b\n"
+                ".text"        : "=r"(__gu_err), "=q" (__gu_val): "m"((*(struct __large_struct *)
+                              (   __gu_addr   )) ), "i"(- 14 ), "0"(  __gu_err  )) ;
+                break;
+            case 2:
+              __asm__ __volatile__(
+                "1:      mov" "w" " %2,%" "w" "1\n"
+                "2:\n"
+                ".section .fixup,\"ax\"\n"
+                "3:      movl %3,%0\n"
+                "        xor" "w" " %" "w" "1,%" "w" "1\n"
+                "        jmp 2b\n"
+                ".section __ex_table,\"a\"\n"
+                "        .align 4\n"
+                "        .long 1b,3b\n"
+                ".text"        : "=r"(__gu_err), "=r" (__gu_val) : "m"((*(struct __large_struct *)
+                              (   __gu_addr   )) ), "i"(- 14 ), "0"(  __gu_err  ));
+                break;
+            case 4:
+              __asm__ __volatile__(
+                "1:      mov" "l" " %2,%" "" "1\n"
+                "2:\n"
+                ".section .fixup,\"ax\"\n"
+                "3:      movl %3,%0\n"
+                "        xor" "l" " %" "" "1,%" "" "1\n"
+                "        jmp 2b\n"
+                ".section __ex_table,\"a\"\n"
+                "        .align 4\n"        "        .long 1b,3b\n"
+                ".text"        : "=r"(__gu_err), "=r" (__gu_val) : "m"((*(struct __large_struct *)
+                              (   __gu_addr   )) ), "i"(- 14 ), "0"(__gu_err));
+                break;
+            default:
+              (__gu_val) = __get_user_bad();
+          }
+        } while (0) ;
+      ((c)) = (__typeof__(*((buf))))__gu_val;
+      __gu_err;
+    }
+  );
 
 WOW! Black GCC/assembly magic. This is impossible to follow, so let's
-see what code gcc generates:
+see what code gcc generates::
 
  >         xorl %edx,%edx
  >         movl current_set,%eax
@@ -154,7 +160,7 @@ understand. Can we? The actual user access is quite obvious. Thanks
 to the unified address space we can just access the address in user
 memory. But what does the .section stuff do?????
 
-To understand this we have to look at the final kernel:
+To understand this we have to look at the final kernel::
 
  > objdump --section-headers vmlinux
  >
@@ -181,7 +187,7 @@ To understand this we have to look at the final kernel:
 
 There are obviously 2 non standard ELF sections in the generated object
 file. But first we want to find out what happened to our code in the
-final kernel executable:
+final kernel executable::
 
  > objdump --disassemble --section=.text vmlinux
  >
@@ -199,7 +205,7 @@ final kernel executable:
 The whole user memory access is reduced to 10 x86 machine instructions.
 The instructions bracketed in the .section directives are no longer
 in the normal execution path. They are located in a different section
-of the executable file:
+of the executable file::
 
  > objdump --disassemble --section=.fixup vmlinux
  >
@@ -207,14 +213,15 @@ of the executable file:
  > c0199ffa <.fixup+10ba> xorb   %dl,%dl
  > c0199ffc <.fixup+10bc> jmp    c017e7a7 <do_con_write+e3>
 
-And finally:
+And finally::
+
  > objdump --full-contents --section=__ex_table vmlinux
  >
  >  c01aa7c4 93c017c0 e09f19c0 97c017c0 99c017c0  ................
  >  c01aa7d4 f6c217c0 e99f19c0 a5e717c0 f59f19c0  ................
  >  c01aa7e4 080a18c0 01a019c0 0a0a18c0 04a019c0  ................
 
-or in human readable byte order:
+or in human readable byte order::
 
  >  c01aa7c4 c017c093 c0199fe0 c017c097 c017c099  ................
  >  c01aa7d4 c017c2f6 c0199fe9 c017e7a5 c0199ff5  ................
@@ -222,18 +229,22 @@ or in human readable byte order:
                                this is the interesting part!
  >  c01aa7e4 c0180a08 c019a001 c0180a0a c019a004  ................
 
-What happened? The assembly directives
+What happened? The assembly directives::
 
-.section .fixup,"ax"
-.section __ex_table,"a"
+  .section .fixup,"ax"
+  .section __ex_table,"a"
 
 told the assembler to move the following code to the specified
-sections in the ELF object file. So the instructions
-3:      movl $-14,%eax
-        xorb %dl,%dl
-        jmp 2b
-ended up in the .fixup section of the object file and the addresses
+sections in the ELF object file. So the instructions::
+
+  3:      movl $-14,%eax
+          xorb %dl,%dl
+          jmp 2b
+
+ended up in the .fixup section of the object file and the addresses::
+
         .long 1b,3b
+
 ended up in the __ex_table section of the object file. 1b and 3b
 are local labels. The local label 1b (1b stands for next label 1
 backward) is the address of the instruction that might fault, i.e.
@@ -246,35 +257,39 @@ the fault, in our case the actual value is c0199ff5:
 the original assembly code: > 3:      movl $-14,%eax
 and linked in vmlinux     : > c0199ff5 <.fixup+10b5> movl   $0xfffffff2,%eax
 
-The assembly code
+The assembly code::
+
  > .section __ex_table,"a"
  >         .align 4
  >         .long 1b,3b
 
-becomes the value pair
+becomes the value pair::
+
  >  c01aa7d4 c017c2f6 c0199fe9 c017e7a5 c0199ff5  ................
                                ^this is ^this is
                                1b       3b
+
 c017e7a5,c0199ff5 in the exception table of the kernel.
 
 So, what actually happens if a fault from kernel mode with no suitable
 vma occurs?
 
-1.) access to invalid address:
- > c017e7a5 <do_con_write+e1> movb   (%ebx),%dl
-2.) MMU generates exception
-3.) CPU calls do_page_fault
-4.) do page fault calls search_exception_table (regs->eip == c017e7a5);
-5.) search_exception_table looks up the address c017e7a5 in the
-    exception table (i.e. the contents of the ELF section __ex_table)
-    and returns the address of the associated fault handle code c0199ff5.
-6.) do_page_fault modifies its own return address to point to the fault
-    handle code and returns.
-7.) execution continues in the fault handling code.
-8.) 8a) EAX becomes -EFAULT (== -14)
-    8b) DL  becomes zero (the value we "read" from user space)
-    8c) execution continues at local label 2 (address of the
-        instruction immediately after the faulting user access).
+#. access to invalid address::
+
+    > c017e7a5 <do_con_write+e1> movb   (%ebx),%dl
+#. MMU generates exception
+#. CPU calls do_page_fault
+#. do page fault calls search_exception_table (regs->eip == c017e7a5);
+#. search_exception_table looks up the address c017e7a5 in the
+   exception table (i.e. the contents of the ELF section __ex_table)
+   and returns the address of the associated fault handle code c0199ff5.
+#. do_page_fault modifies its own return address to point to the fault
+   handle code and returns.
+#. execution continues in the fault handling code.
+#. a) EAX becomes -EFAULT (== -14)
+   b) DL  becomes zero (the value we "read" from user space)
+   c) execution continues at local label 2 (address of the
+      instruction immediately after the faulting user access).
 
 The steps 8a to 8c in a certain way emulate the faulting instruction.
 
@@ -295,14 +310,15 @@ Things changed when 64-bit support was added to x86 Linux. Rather than
 double the size of the exception table by expanding the two entries
 from 32-bits to 64 bits, a clever trick was used to store addresses
 as relative offsets from the table itself. The assembly code changed
-from:
-	.long 1b,3b
-to:
-        .long (from) - .
-        .long (to) - .
+from::
+
+    .long 1b,3b
+  to:
+          .long (from) - .
+          .long (to) - .
 
 and the C-code that uses these values converts back to absolute addresses
-like this:
+like this::
 
 	ex_insn_addr(const struct exception_table_entry *x)
 	{
@@ -313,15 +329,18 @@ In v4.6 the exception table entry was expanded with a new field "handler".
 This is also 32-bits wide and contains a third relative function
 pointer which points to one of:
 
-1) int ex_handler_default(const struct exception_table_entry *fixup)
-   This is legacy case that just jumps to the fixup code
-2) int ex_handler_fault(const struct exception_table_entry *fixup)
-   This case provides the fault number of the trap that occurred at
-   entry->insn. It is used to distinguish page faults from machine
-   check.
-3) int ex_handler_ext(const struct exception_table_entry *fixup)
-   This case is used for uaccess_err ... we need to set a flag
-   in the task structure. Before the handler functions existed this
-   case was handled by adding a large offset to the fixup to tag
-   it as special.
+1) ``int ex_handler_default(const struct exception_table_entry *fixup)``
+     This is legacy case that just jumps to the fixup code
+
+2) ``int ex_handler_fault(const struct exception_table_entry *fixup)``
+     This case provides the fault number of the trap that occurred at
+     entry->insn. It is used to distinguish page faults from machine
+     check.
+
+3) ``int ex_handler_ext(const struct exception_table_entry *fixup)``
+     This case is used for uaccess_err ... we need to set a flag
+     in the task structure. Before the handler functions existed this
+     case was handled by adding a large offset to the fixup to tag
+     it as special.
+
 More functions can easily be added.
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/i386/IO-APIC.txt b/Documentation/x86/i386/IO-APIC.rst
index 15f5baf7e1b6..ce4d8df15e7c 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/i386/IO-APIC.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/i386/IO-APIC.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,11 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=======
+IO-APIC
+=======
+
+:Author: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org>
+
 Most (all) Intel-MP compliant SMP boards have the so-called 'IO-APIC',
 which is an enhanced interrupt controller. It enables us to route
 hardware interrupts to multiple CPUs, or to CPU groups. Without an
@@ -13,9 +21,8 @@ usually worked around by the kernel. If your MP-compliant SMP board does
 not boot Linux, then consult the linux-smp mailing list archives first.
 
 If your box boots fine with enabled IO-APIC IRQs, then your
-/proc/interrupts will look like this one:
+/proc/interrupts will look like this one::
 
-   ---------------------------->
   hell:~> cat /proc/interrupts
              CPU0
     0:    1360293    IO-APIC-edge  timer
@@ -28,7 +35,6 @@ If your box boots fine with enabled IO-APIC IRQs, then your
   NMI:          0
   ERR:          0
   hell:~>
-  <----------------------------
 
 Some interrupts are still listed as 'XT PIC', but this is not a problem;
 none of those IRQ sources is performance-critical.
@@ -37,14 +43,14 @@ none of those IRQ sources is performance-critical.
 In the unlikely case that your board does not create a working mp-table,
 you can use the pirq= boot parameter to 'hand-construct' IRQ entries. This
 is non-trivial though and cannot be automated. One sample /etc/lilo.conf
-entry:
+entry::
 
 	append="pirq=15,11,10"
 
 The actual numbers depend on your system, on your PCI cards and on their
 PCI slot position. Usually PCI slots are 'daisy chained' before they are
 connected to the PCI chipset IRQ routing facility (the incoming PIRQ1-4
-lines):
+lines)::
 
                ,-.        ,-.        ,-.        ,-.        ,-.
      PIRQ4 ----| |-.    ,-| |-.    ,-| |-.    ,-| |--------| |
@@ -56,7 +62,7 @@ lines):
      PIRQ1 ----| |-  `----| |-  `----| |-  `----| |--------| |
                `-'        `-'        `-'        `-'        `-'
 
-Every PCI card emits a PCI IRQ, which can be INTA, INTB, INTC or INTD:
+Every PCI card emits a PCI IRQ, which can be INTA, INTB, INTC or INTD::
 
                                ,-.
                          INTD--| |
@@ -78,19 +84,19 @@ to have non shared interrupts). Slot5 should be used for videocards, they
 do not use interrupts normally, thus they are not daisy chained either.
 
 so if you have your SCSI card (IRQ11) in Slot1, Tulip card (IRQ9) in
-Slot2, then you'll have to specify this pirq= line:
+Slot2, then you'll have to specify this pirq= line::
 
 	append="pirq=11,9"
 
 the following script tries to figure out such a default pirq= line from
-your PCI configuration:
+your PCI configuration::
 
 	echo -n pirq=; echo `scanpci | grep T_L | cut -c56-` | sed 's/ /,/g'
 
 note that this script won't work if you have skipped a few slots or if your
 board does not do default daisy-chaining. (or the IO-APIC has the PIRQ pins
 connected in some strange way). E.g. if in the above case you have your SCSI
-card (IRQ11) in Slot3, and have Slot1 empty:
+card (IRQ11) in Slot3, and have Slot1 empty::
 
 	append="pirq=0,9,11"
 
@@ -105,7 +111,7 @@ won't function properly (e.g. if it's inserted as a module).
 If you have 2 PCI buses, then you can use up to 8 pirq values, although such
 boards tend to have a good configuration.
 
-Be prepared that it might happen that you need some strange pirq line:
+Be prepared that it might happen that you need some strange pirq line::
 
 	append="pirq=0,0,0,0,0,0,9,11"
 
@@ -115,5 +121,3 @@ Good luck and mail to linux-smp@vger.kernel.org or
 linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org if you have any problems that are not covered
 by this document.
 
--- mingo
-
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/i386/index.rst b/Documentation/x86/i386/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8747cf5bbd49
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/x86/i386/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+============
+i386 Support
+============
+
+.. toctree::
+   :maxdepth: 2
+
+   IO-APIC
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/index.rst b/Documentation/x86/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ae36fc5fc649
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/x86/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+==========================
+x86-specific Documentation
+==========================
+
+.. toctree::
+   :maxdepth: 2
+   :numbered:
+
+   boot
+   topology
+   exception-tables
+   kernel-stacks
+   entry_64
+   earlyprintk
+   orc-unwinder
+   zero-page
+   tlb
+   mtrr
+   pat
+   protection-keys
+   intel_mpx
+   amd-memory-encryption
+   pti
+   mds
+   microcode
+   resctrl_ui
+   usb-legacy-support
+   i386/index
+   x86_64/index
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/intel_mpx.txt b/Documentation/x86/intel_mpx.rst
index 85d0549ad846..387a640941a6 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/intel_mpx.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/intel_mpx.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,11 @@
-1. Intel(R) MPX Overview
-========================
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+===========================================
+Intel(R) Memory Protection Extensions (MPX)
+===========================================
+
+Intel(R) MPX Overview
+=====================
 
 Intel(R) Memory Protection Extensions (Intel(R) MPX) is a new capability
 introduced into Intel Architecture. Intel MPX provides hardware features
@@ -7,7 +13,7 @@ that can be used in conjunction with compiler changes to check memory
 references, for those references whose compile-time normal intentions are
 usurped at runtime due to buffer overflow or underflow.
 
-You can tell if your CPU supports MPX by looking in /proc/cpuinfo:
+You can tell if your CPU supports MPX by looking in /proc/cpuinfo::
 
 	cat /proc/cpuinfo  | grep ' mpx '
 
@@ -21,8 +27,8 @@ can be downloaded from
 http://software.intel.com/en-us/articles/intel-software-development-emulator
 
 
-2. How to get the advantage of MPX
-==================================
+How to get the advantage of MPX
+===============================
 
 For MPX to work, changes are required in the kernel, binutils and compiler.
 No source changes are required for applications, just a recompile.
@@ -84,14 +90,15 @@ Kernel MPX Code:
    is unmapped.
 
 
-3. How does MPX kernel code work
-================================
+How does MPX kernel code work
+=============================
 
 Handling #BR faults caused by MPX
 ---------------------------------
 
 When MPX is enabled, there are 2 new situations that can generate
 #BR faults.
+
   * new bounds tables (BT) need to be allocated to save bounds.
   * bounds violation caused by MPX instructions.
 
@@ -124,37 +131,37 @@ the kernel. It can theoretically be done completely from userspace. Here
 are a few ways this could be done. We don't think any of them are practical
 in the real-world, but here they are.
 
-Q: Can virtual space simply be reserved for the bounds tables so that we
-   never have to allocate them?
-A: MPX-enabled application will possibly create a lot of bounds tables in
-   process address space to save bounds information. These tables can take
-   up huge swaths of memory (as much as 80% of the memory on the system)
-   even if we clean them up aggressively. In the worst-case scenario, the
-   tables can be 4x the size of the data structure being tracked. IOW, a
-   1-page structure can require 4 bounds-table pages. An X-GB virtual
-   area needs 4*X GB of virtual space, plus 2GB for the bounds directory.
-   If we were to preallocate them for the 128TB of user virtual address
-   space, we would need to reserve 512TB+2GB, which is larger than the
-   entire virtual address space today. This means they can not be reserved
-   ahead of time. Also, a single process's pre-populated bounds directory
-   consumes 2GB of virtual *AND* physical memory. IOW, it's completely
-   infeasible to prepopulate bounds directories.
-
-Q: Can we preallocate bounds table space at the same time memory is
-   allocated which might contain pointers that might eventually need
-   bounds tables?
-A: This would work if we could hook the site of each and every memory
-   allocation syscall. This can be done for small, constrained applications.
-   But, it isn't practical at a larger scale since a given app has no
-   way of controlling how all the parts of the app might allocate memory
-   (think libraries). The kernel is really the only place to intercept
-   these calls.
-
-Q: Could a bounds fault be handed to userspace and the tables allocated
-   there in a signal handler instead of in the kernel?
-A: mmap() is not on the list of safe async handler functions and even
-   if mmap() would work it still requires locking or nasty tricks to
-   keep track of the allocation state there.
+:Q: Can virtual space simply be reserved for the bounds tables so that we
+    never have to allocate them?
+:A: MPX-enabled application will possibly create a lot of bounds tables in
+    process address space to save bounds information. These tables can take
+    up huge swaths of memory (as much as 80% of the memory on the system)
+    even if we clean them up aggressively. In the worst-case scenario, the
+    tables can be 4x the size of the data structure being tracked. IOW, a
+    1-page structure can require 4 bounds-table pages. An X-GB virtual
+    area needs 4*X GB of virtual space, plus 2GB for the bounds directory.
+    If we were to preallocate them for the 128TB of user virtual address
+    space, we would need to reserve 512TB+2GB, which is larger than the
+    entire virtual address space today. This means they can not be reserved
+    ahead of time. Also, a single process's pre-populated bounds directory
+    consumes 2GB of virtual *AND* physical memory. IOW, it's completely
+    infeasible to prepopulate bounds directories.
+
+:Q: Can we preallocate bounds table space at the same time memory is
+    allocated which might contain pointers that might eventually need
+    bounds tables?
+:A: This would work if we could hook the site of each and every memory
+    allocation syscall. This can be done for small, constrained applications.
+    But, it isn't practical at a larger scale since a given app has no
+    way of controlling how all the parts of the app might allocate memory
+    (think libraries). The kernel is really the only place to intercept
+    these calls.
+
+:Q: Could a bounds fault be handed to userspace and the tables allocated
+    there in a signal handler instead of in the kernel?
+:A: mmap() is not on the list of safe async handler functions and even
+    if mmap() would work it still requires locking or nasty tricks to
+    keep track of the allocation state there.
 
 Having ruled out all of the userspace-only approaches for managing
 bounds tables that we could think of, we create them on demand in
@@ -167,20 +174,20 @@ If a #BR is generated due to a bounds violation caused by MPX.
 We need to decode MPX instructions to get violation address and
 set this address into extended struct siginfo.
 
-The _sigfault field of struct siginfo is extended as follow:
-
-87		/* SIGILL, SIGFPE, SIGSEGV, SIGBUS */
-88		struct {
-89			void __user *_addr; /* faulting insn/memory ref. */
-90 #ifdef __ARCH_SI_TRAPNO
-91			int _trapno;	/* TRAP # which caused the signal */
-92 #endif
-93			short _addr_lsb; /* LSB of the reported address */
-94			struct {
-95				void __user *_lower;
-96				void __user *_upper;
-97			} _addr_bnd;
-98		} _sigfault;
+The _sigfault field of struct siginfo is extended as follow::
+
+  87		/* SIGILL, SIGFPE, SIGSEGV, SIGBUS */
+  88		struct {
+  89			void __user *_addr; /* faulting insn/memory ref. */
+  90 #ifdef __ARCH_SI_TRAPNO
+  91			int _trapno;	/* TRAP # which caused the signal */
+  92 #endif
+  93			short _addr_lsb; /* LSB of the reported address */
+  94			struct {
+  95				void __user *_lower;
+  96				void __user *_upper;
+  97			} _addr_bnd;
+  98		} _sigfault;
 
 The '_addr' field refers to violation address, and new '_addr_and'
 field refers to the upper/lower bounds when a #BR is caused.
@@ -209,9 +216,10 @@ Adding new prctl commands
 
 Two new prctl commands are added to enable and disable MPX bounds tables
 management in kernel.
+::
 
-155	#define PR_MPX_ENABLE_MANAGEMENT	43
-156	#define PR_MPX_DISABLE_MANAGEMENT	44
+  155	#define PR_MPX_ENABLE_MANAGEMENT	43
+  156	#define PR_MPX_DISABLE_MANAGEMENT	44
 
 Runtime library in userspace is responsible for allocation of bounds
 directory. So kernel have to use XSAVE instruction to get the base
@@ -223,8 +231,8 @@ into struct mm_struct to be used in future during PR_MPX_ENABLE_MANAGEMENT
 command execution.
 
 
-4. Special rules
-================
+Special rules
+=============
 
 1) If userspace is requesting help from the kernel to do the management
 of bounds tables, it may not create or modify entries in the bounds directory.
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/kernel-stacks b/Documentation/x86/kernel-stacks.rst
index 9a0aa4d3a866..6b0bcf027ff1 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/kernel-stacks
+++ b/Documentation/x86/kernel-stacks.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,11 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=============
+Kernel Stacks
+=============
+
 Kernel stacks on x86-64 bit
----------------------------
+===========================
 
 Most of the text from Keith Owens, hacked by AK
 
@@ -57,9 +63,9 @@ IST events with the same code to be nested.  However in most cases, the
 stack size allocated to an IST assumes no nesting for the same code.
 If that assumption is ever broken then the stacks will become corrupt.
 
-The currently assigned IST stacks are :-
+The currently assigned IST stacks are:
 
-* DOUBLEFAULT_STACK.  EXCEPTION_STKSZ (PAGE_SIZE).
+* ESTACK_DF.  EXCEPTION_STKSZ (PAGE_SIZE).
 
   Used for interrupt 8 - Double Fault Exception (#DF).
 
@@ -68,7 +74,7 @@ The currently assigned IST stacks are :-
   Using a separate stack allows the kernel to recover from it well enough
   in many cases to still output an oops.
 
-* NMI_STACK.  EXCEPTION_STKSZ (PAGE_SIZE).
+* ESTACK_NMI.  EXCEPTION_STKSZ (PAGE_SIZE).
 
   Used for non-maskable interrupts (NMI).
 
@@ -76,7 +82,7 @@ The currently assigned IST stacks are :-
   middle of switching stacks.  Using IST for NMI events avoids making
   assumptions about the previous state of the kernel stack.
 
-* DEBUG_STACK.  DEBUG_STKSZ
+* ESTACK_DB.  EXCEPTION_STKSZ (PAGE_SIZE).
 
   Used for hardware debug interrupts (interrupt 1) and for software
   debug interrupts (INT3).
@@ -86,7 +92,12 @@ The currently assigned IST stacks are :-
   avoids making assumptions about the previous state of the kernel
   stack.
 
-* MCE_STACK.  EXCEPTION_STKSZ (PAGE_SIZE).
+  To handle nested #DB correctly there exist two instances of DB stacks. On
+  #DB entry the IST stackpointer for #DB is switched to the second instance
+  so a nested #DB starts from a clean stack. The nested #DB switches
+  the IST stackpointer to a guard hole to catch triple nesting.
+
+* ESTACK_MCE.  EXCEPTION_STKSZ (PAGE_SIZE).
 
   Used for interrupt 18 - Machine Check Exception (#MC).
 
@@ -98,7 +109,7 @@ For more details see the Intel IA32 or AMD AMD64 architecture manuals.
 
 
 Printing backtraces on x86
---------------------------
+==========================
 
 The question about the '?' preceding function names in an x86 stacktrace
 keeps popping up, here's an indepth explanation. It helps if the reader
@@ -108,7 +119,7 @@ arch/x86/kernel/dumpstack.c.
 Adapted from Ingo's mail, Message-ID: <20150521101614.GA10889@gmail.com>:
 
 We always scan the full kernel stack for return addresses stored on
-the kernel stack(s) [*], from stack top to stack bottom, and print out
+the kernel stack(s) [1]_, from stack top to stack bottom, and print out
 anything that 'looks like' a kernel text address.
 
 If it fits into the frame pointer chain, we print it without a question
@@ -136,6 +147,6 @@ that look like kernel text addresses, so if debug information is wrong,
 we still print out the real call chain as well - just with more question
 marks than ideal.
 
-[*] For things like IRQ and IST stacks, we also scan those stacks, in
-    the right order, and try to cross from one stack into another
-    reconstructing the call chain. This works most of the time.
+.. [1] For things like IRQ and IST stacks, we also scan those stacks, in
+       the right order, and try to cross from one stack into another
+       reconstructing the call chain. This works most of the time.
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/mds.rst b/Documentation/x86/mds.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5d4330be200f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/x86/mds.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,193 @@
+Microarchitectural Data Sampling (MDS) mitigation
+=================================================
+
+.. _mds:
+
+Overview
+--------
+
+Microarchitectural Data Sampling (MDS) is a family of side channel attacks
+on internal buffers in Intel CPUs. The variants are:
+
+ - Microarchitectural Store Buffer Data Sampling (MSBDS) (CVE-2018-12126)
+ - Microarchitectural Fill Buffer Data Sampling (MFBDS) (CVE-2018-12130)
+ - Microarchitectural Load Port Data Sampling (MLPDS) (CVE-2018-12127)
+ - Microarchitectural Data Sampling Uncacheable Memory (MDSUM) (CVE-2019-11091)
+
+MSBDS leaks Store Buffer Entries which can be speculatively forwarded to a
+dependent load (store-to-load forwarding) as an optimization. The forward
+can also happen to a faulting or assisting load operation for a different
+memory address, which can be exploited under certain conditions. Store
+buffers are partitioned between Hyper-Threads so cross thread forwarding is
+not possible. But if a thread enters or exits a sleep state the store
+buffer is repartitioned which can expose data from one thread to the other.
+
+MFBDS leaks Fill Buffer Entries. Fill buffers are used internally to manage
+L1 miss situations and to hold data which is returned or sent in response
+to a memory or I/O operation. Fill buffers can forward data to a load
+operation and also write data to the cache. When the fill buffer is
+deallocated it can retain the stale data of the preceding operations which
+can then be forwarded to a faulting or assisting load operation, which can
+be exploited under certain conditions. Fill buffers are shared between
+Hyper-Threads so cross thread leakage is possible.
+
+MLPDS leaks Load Port Data. Load ports are used to perform load operations
+from memory or I/O. The received data is then forwarded to the register
+file or a subsequent operation. In some implementations the Load Port can
+contain stale data from a previous operation which can be forwarded to
+faulting or assisting loads under certain conditions, which again can be
+exploited eventually. Load ports are shared between Hyper-Threads so cross
+thread leakage is possible.
+
+MDSUM is a special case of MSBDS, MFBDS and MLPDS. An uncacheable load from
+memory that takes a fault or assist can leave data in a microarchitectural
+structure that may later be observed using one of the same methods used by
+MSBDS, MFBDS or MLPDS.
+
+Exposure assumptions
+--------------------
+
+It is assumed that attack code resides in user space or in a guest with one
+exception. The rationale behind this assumption is that the code construct
+needed for exploiting MDS requires:
+
+ - to control the load to trigger a fault or assist
+
+ - to have a disclosure gadget which exposes the speculatively accessed
+   data for consumption through a side channel.
+
+ - to control the pointer through which the disclosure gadget exposes the
+   data
+
+The existence of such a construct in the kernel cannot be excluded with
+100% certainty, but the complexity involved makes it extremly unlikely.
+
+There is one exception, which is untrusted BPF. The functionality of
+untrusted BPF is limited, but it needs to be thoroughly investigated
+whether it can be used to create such a construct.
+
+
+Mitigation strategy
+-------------------
+
+All variants have the same mitigation strategy at least for the single CPU
+thread case (SMT off): Force the CPU to clear the affected buffers.
+
+This is achieved by using the otherwise unused and obsolete VERW
+instruction in combination with a microcode update. The microcode clears
+the affected CPU buffers when the VERW instruction is executed.
+
+For virtualization there are two ways to achieve CPU buffer
+clearing. Either the modified VERW instruction or via the L1D Flush
+command. The latter is issued when L1TF mitigation is enabled so the extra
+VERW can be avoided. If the CPU is not affected by L1TF then VERW needs to
+be issued.
+
+If the VERW instruction with the supplied segment selector argument is
+executed on a CPU without the microcode update there is no side effect
+other than a small number of pointlessly wasted CPU cycles.
+
+This does not protect against cross Hyper-Thread attacks except for MSBDS
+which is only exploitable cross Hyper-thread when one of the Hyper-Threads
+enters a C-state.
+
+The kernel provides a function to invoke the buffer clearing:
+
+    mds_clear_cpu_buffers()
+
+The mitigation is invoked on kernel/userspace, hypervisor/guest and C-state
+(idle) transitions.
+
+As a special quirk to address virtualization scenarios where the host has
+the microcode updated, but the hypervisor does not (yet) expose the
+MD_CLEAR CPUID bit to guests, the kernel issues the VERW instruction in the
+hope that it might actually clear the buffers. The state is reflected
+accordingly.
+
+According to current knowledge additional mitigations inside the kernel
+itself are not required because the necessary gadgets to expose the leaked
+data cannot be controlled in a way which allows exploitation from malicious
+user space or VM guests.
+
+Kernel internal mitigation modes
+--------------------------------
+
+ ======= ============================================================
+ off      Mitigation is disabled. Either the CPU is not affected or
+          mds=off is supplied on the kernel command line
+
+ full     Mitigation is enabled. CPU is affected and MD_CLEAR is
+          advertised in CPUID.
+
+ vmwerv	  Mitigation is enabled. CPU is affected and MD_CLEAR is not
+	  advertised in CPUID. That is mainly for virtualization
+	  scenarios where the host has the updated microcode but the
+	  hypervisor does not expose MD_CLEAR in CPUID. It's a best
+	  effort approach without guarantee.
+ ======= ============================================================
+
+If the CPU is affected and mds=off is not supplied on the kernel command
+line then the kernel selects the appropriate mitigation mode depending on
+the availability of the MD_CLEAR CPUID bit.
+
+Mitigation points
+-----------------
+
+1. Return to user space
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+   When transitioning from kernel to user space the CPU buffers are flushed
+   on affected CPUs when the mitigation is not disabled on the kernel
+   command line. The migitation is enabled through the static key
+   mds_user_clear.
+
+   The mitigation is invoked in prepare_exit_to_usermode() which covers
+   all but one of the kernel to user space transitions.  The exception
+   is when we return from a Non Maskable Interrupt (NMI), which is
+   handled directly in do_nmi().
+
+   (The reason that NMI is special is that prepare_exit_to_usermode() can
+    enable IRQs.  In NMI context, NMIs are blocked, and we don't want to
+    enable IRQs with NMIs blocked.)
+
+
+2. C-State transition
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+   When a CPU goes idle and enters a C-State the CPU buffers need to be
+   cleared on affected CPUs when SMT is active. This addresses the
+   repartitioning of the store buffer when one of the Hyper-Threads enters
+   a C-State.
+
+   When SMT is inactive, i.e. either the CPU does not support it or all
+   sibling threads are offline CPU buffer clearing is not required.
+
+   The idle clearing is enabled on CPUs which are only affected by MSBDS
+   and not by any other MDS variant. The other MDS variants cannot be
+   protected against cross Hyper-Thread attacks because the Fill Buffer and
+   the Load Ports are shared. So on CPUs affected by other variants, the
+   idle clearing would be a window dressing exercise and is therefore not
+   activated.
+
+   The invocation is controlled by the static key mds_idle_clear which is
+   switched depending on the chosen mitigation mode and the SMT state of
+   the system.
+
+   The buffer clear is only invoked before entering the C-State to prevent
+   that stale data from the idling CPU from spilling to the Hyper-Thread
+   sibling after the store buffer got repartitioned and all entries are
+   available to the non idle sibling.
+
+   When coming out of idle the store buffer is partitioned again so each
+   sibling has half of it available. The back from idle CPU could be then
+   speculatively exposed to contents of the sibling. The buffers are
+   flushed either on exit to user space or on VMENTER so malicious code
+   in user space or the guest cannot speculatively access them.
+
+   The mitigation is hooked into all variants of halt()/mwait(), but does
+   not cover the legacy ACPI IO-Port mechanism because the ACPI idle driver
+   has been superseded by the intel_idle driver around 2010 and is
+   preferred on all affected CPUs which are expected to gain the MD_CLEAR
+   functionality in microcode. Aside of that the IO-Port mechanism is a
+   legacy interface which is only used on older systems which are either
+   not affected or do not receive microcode updates anymore.
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/microcode.txt b/Documentation/x86/microcode.rst
index 79fdb4a8148a..a320d37982ed 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/microcode.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/microcode.rst
@@ -1,7 +1,11 @@
-	The Linux Microcode Loader
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
 
-Authors: Fenghua Yu <fenghua.yu@intel.com>
-	 Borislav Petkov <bp@suse.de>
+==========================
+The Linux Microcode Loader
+==========================
+
+:Authors: - Fenghua Yu <fenghua.yu@intel.com>
+          - Borislav Petkov <bp@suse.de>
 
 The kernel has a x86 microcode loading facility which is supposed to
 provide microcode loading methods in the OS. Potential use cases are
@@ -10,8 +14,8 @@ and updating the microcode on long-running systems without rebooting.
 
 The loader supports three loading methods:
 
-1. Early load microcode
-=======================
+Early load microcode
+====================
 
 The kernel can update microcode very early during boot. Loading
 microcode early can fix CPU issues before they are observed during
@@ -26,8 +30,10 @@ loader parses the combined initrd image during boot.
 
 The microcode files in cpio name space are:
 
-on Intel: kernel/x86/microcode/GenuineIntel.bin
-on AMD  : kernel/x86/microcode/AuthenticAMD.bin
+on Intel:
+  kernel/x86/microcode/GenuineIntel.bin
+on AMD  :
+  kernel/x86/microcode/AuthenticAMD.bin
 
 During BSP (BootStrapping Processor) boot (pre-SMP), the kernel
 scans the microcode file in the initrd. If microcode matching the
@@ -42,8 +48,8 @@ Here's a crude example how to prepare an initrd with microcode (this is
 normally done automatically by the distribution, when recreating the
 initrd, so you don't really have to do it yourself. It is documented
 here for future reference only).
+::
 
----
   #!/bin/bash
 
   if [ -z "$1" ]; then
@@ -76,15 +82,15 @@ here for future reference only).
   cat ucode.cpio $INITRD.orig > $INITRD
 
   rm -rf $TMPDIR
----
+
 
 The system needs to have the microcode packages installed into
 /lib/firmware or you need to fixup the paths above if yours are
 somewhere else and/or you've downloaded them directly from the processor
 vendor's site.
 
-2. Late loading
-===============
+Late loading
+============
 
 There are two legacy user space interfaces to load microcode, either through
 /dev/cpu/microcode or through /sys/devices/system/cpu/microcode/reload file
@@ -94,9 +100,9 @@ The /dev/cpu/microcode method is deprecated because it needs a special
 userspace tool for that.
 
 The easier method is simply installing the microcode packages your distro
-supplies and running:
+supplies and running::
 
-# echo 1 > /sys/devices/system/cpu/microcode/reload
+  # echo 1 > /sys/devices/system/cpu/microcode/reload
 
 as root.
 
@@ -104,29 +110,29 @@ The loading mechanism looks for microcode blobs in
 /lib/firmware/{intel-ucode,amd-ucode}. The default distro installation
 packages already put them there.
 
-3. Builtin microcode
-====================
+Builtin microcode
+=================
 
 The loader supports also loading of a builtin microcode supplied through
 the regular builtin firmware method CONFIG_EXTRA_FIRMWARE. Only 64-bit is
 currently supported.
 
-Here's an example:
+Here's an example::
 
-CONFIG_EXTRA_FIRMWARE="intel-ucode/06-3a-09 amd-ucode/microcode_amd_fam15h.bin"
-CONFIG_EXTRA_FIRMWARE_DIR="/lib/firmware"
+  CONFIG_EXTRA_FIRMWARE="intel-ucode/06-3a-09 amd-ucode/microcode_amd_fam15h.bin"
+  CONFIG_EXTRA_FIRMWARE_DIR="/lib/firmware"
 
-This basically means, you have the following tree structure locally:
+This basically means, you have the following tree structure locally::
 
-/lib/firmware/
-|-- amd-ucode
-...
-|   |-- microcode_amd_fam15h.bin
-...
-|-- intel-ucode
-...
-|   |-- 06-3a-09
-...
+  /lib/firmware/
+  |-- amd-ucode
+  ...
+  |   |-- microcode_amd_fam15h.bin
+  ...
+  |-- intel-ucode
+  ...
+  |   |-- 06-3a-09
+  ...
 
 so that the build system can find those files and integrate them into
 the final kernel image. The early loader finds them and applies them.
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/mtrr.rst b/Documentation/x86/mtrr.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c5b695d75349
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/x86/mtrr.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,354 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=========================================
+MTRR (Memory Type Range Register) control
+=========================================
+
+:Authors: - Richard Gooch <rgooch@atnf.csiro.au> - 3 Jun 1999
+          - Luis R. Rodriguez <mcgrof@do-not-panic.com> - April 9, 2015
+
+
+Phasing out MTRR use
+====================
+
+MTRR use is replaced on modern x86 hardware with PAT. Direct MTRR use by
+drivers on Linux is now completely phased out, device drivers should use
+arch_phys_wc_add() in combination with ioremap_wc() to make MTRR effective on
+non-PAT systems while a no-op but equally effective on PAT enabled systems.
+
+Even if Linux does not use MTRRs directly, some x86 platform firmware may still
+set up MTRRs early before booting the OS. They do this as some platform
+firmware may still have implemented access to MTRRs which would be controlled
+and handled by the platform firmware directly. An example of platform use of
+MTRRs is through the use of SMI handlers, one case could be for fan control,
+the platform code would need uncachable access to some of its fan control
+registers. Such platform access does not need any Operating System MTRR code in
+place other than mtrr_type_lookup() to ensure any OS specific mapping requests
+are aligned with platform MTRR setup. If MTRRs are only set up by the platform
+firmware code though and the OS does not make any specific MTRR mapping
+requests mtrr_type_lookup() should always return MTRR_TYPE_INVALID.
+
+For details refer to :doc:`pat`.
+
+.. tip::
+  On Intel P6 family processors (Pentium Pro, Pentium II and later)
+  the Memory Type Range Registers (MTRRs) may be used to control
+  processor access to memory ranges. This is most useful when you have
+  a video (VGA) card on a PCI or AGP bus. Enabling write-combining
+  allows bus write transfers to be combined into a larger transfer
+  before bursting over the PCI/AGP bus. This can increase performance
+  of image write operations 2.5 times or more.
+
+  The Cyrix 6x86, 6x86MX and M II processors have Address Range
+  Registers (ARRs) which provide a similar functionality to MTRRs. For
+  these, the ARRs are used to emulate the MTRRs.
+
+  The AMD K6-2 (stepping 8 and above) and K6-3 processors have two
+  MTRRs. These are supported.  The AMD Athlon family provide 8 Intel
+  style MTRRs.
+
+  The Centaur C6 (WinChip) has 8 MCRs, allowing write-combining. These
+  are supported.
+
+  The VIA Cyrix III and VIA C3 CPUs offer 8 Intel style MTRRs.
+
+  The CONFIG_MTRR option creates a /proc/mtrr file which may be used
+  to manipulate your MTRRs. Typically the X server should use
+  this. This should have a reasonably generic interface so that
+  similar control registers on other processors can be easily
+  supported.
+
+There are two interfaces to /proc/mtrr: one is an ASCII interface
+which allows you to read and write. The other is an ioctl()
+interface. The ASCII interface is meant for administration. The
+ioctl() interface is meant for C programs (i.e. the X server). The
+interfaces are described below, with sample commands and C code.
+
+
+Reading MTRRs from the shell
+============================
+::
+
+  % cat /proc/mtrr
+  reg00: base=0x00000000 (   0MB), size= 128MB: write-back, count=1
+  reg01: base=0x08000000 ( 128MB), size=  64MB: write-back, count=1
+
+Creating MTRRs from the C-shell::
+
+  # echo "base=0xf8000000 size=0x400000 type=write-combining" >! /proc/mtrr
+
+or if you use bash::
+
+  # echo "base=0xf8000000 size=0x400000 type=write-combining" >| /proc/mtrr
+
+And the result thereof::
+
+  % cat /proc/mtrr
+  reg00: base=0x00000000 (   0MB), size= 128MB: write-back, count=1
+  reg01: base=0x08000000 ( 128MB), size=  64MB: write-back, count=1
+  reg02: base=0xf8000000 (3968MB), size=   4MB: write-combining, count=1
+
+This is for video RAM at base address 0xf8000000 and size 4 megabytes. To
+find out your base address, you need to look at the output of your X
+server, which tells you where the linear framebuffer address is. A
+typical line that you may get is::
+
+  (--) S3: PCI: 968 rev 0, Linear FB @ 0xf8000000
+
+Note that you should only use the value from the X server, as it may
+move the framebuffer base address, so the only value you can trust is
+that reported by the X server.
+
+To find out the size of your framebuffer (what, you don't actually
+know?), the following line will tell you::
+
+  (--) S3: videoram:  4096k
+
+That's 4 megabytes, which is 0x400000 bytes (in hexadecimal).
+A patch is being written for XFree86 which will make this automatic:
+in other words the X server will manipulate /proc/mtrr using the
+ioctl() interface, so users won't have to do anything. If you use a
+commercial X server, lobby your vendor to add support for MTRRs.
+
+
+Creating overlapping MTRRs
+==========================
+::
+
+  %echo "base=0xfb000000 size=0x1000000 type=write-combining" >/proc/mtrr
+  %echo "base=0xfb000000 size=0x1000 type=uncachable" >/proc/mtrr
+
+And the results::
+
+  % cat /proc/mtrr
+  reg00: base=0x00000000 (   0MB), size=  64MB: write-back, count=1
+  reg01: base=0xfb000000 (4016MB), size=  16MB: write-combining, count=1
+  reg02: base=0xfb000000 (4016MB), size=   4kB: uncachable, count=1
+
+Some cards (especially Voodoo Graphics boards) need this 4 kB area
+excluded from the beginning of the region because it is used for
+registers.
+
+NOTE: You can only create type=uncachable region, if the first
+region that you created is type=write-combining.
+
+
+Removing MTRRs from the C-shel
+==============================
+::
+
+  % echo "disable=2" >! /proc/mtrr
+
+or using bash::
+
+  % echo "disable=2" >| /proc/mtrr
+
+
+Reading MTRRs from a C program using ioctl()'s
+==============================================
+::
+
+  /*  mtrr-show.c
+
+      Source file for mtrr-show (example program to show MTRRs using ioctl()'s)
+
+      Copyright (C) 1997-1998  Richard Gooch
+
+      This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+      it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+      the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+      (at your option) any later version.
+
+      This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+      but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+      MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+      GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+      You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+      along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+      Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
+
+      Richard Gooch may be reached by email at  rgooch@atnf.csiro.au
+      The postal address is:
+        Richard Gooch, c/o ATNF, P. O. Box 76, Epping, N.S.W., 2121, Australia.
+  */
+
+  /*
+      This program will use an ioctl() on /proc/mtrr to show the current MTRR
+      settings. This is an alternative to reading /proc/mtrr.
+
+
+      Written by      Richard Gooch   17-DEC-1997
+
+      Last updated by Richard Gooch   2-MAY-1998
+
+
+  */
+  #include <stdio.h>
+  #include <stdlib.h>
+  #include <string.h>
+  #include <sys/types.h>
+  #include <sys/stat.h>
+  #include <fcntl.h>
+  #include <sys/ioctl.h>
+  #include <errno.h>
+  #include <asm/mtrr.h>
+
+  #define TRUE 1
+  #define FALSE 0
+  #define ERRSTRING strerror (errno)
+
+  static char *mtrr_strings[MTRR_NUM_TYPES] =
+  {
+      "uncachable",               /* 0 */
+      "write-combining",          /* 1 */
+      "?",                        /* 2 */
+      "?",                        /* 3 */
+      "write-through",            /* 4 */
+      "write-protect",            /* 5 */
+      "write-back",               /* 6 */
+  };
+
+  int main ()
+  {
+      int fd;
+      struct mtrr_gentry gentry;
+
+      if ( ( fd = open ("/proc/mtrr", O_RDONLY, 0) ) == -1 )
+      {
+    if (errno == ENOENT)
+    {
+        fputs ("/proc/mtrr not found: not supported or you don't have a PPro?\n",
+        stderr);
+        exit (1);
+    }
+    fprintf (stderr, "Error opening /proc/mtrr\t%s\n", ERRSTRING);
+    exit (2);
+      }
+      for (gentry.regnum = 0; ioctl (fd, MTRRIOC_GET_ENTRY, &gentry) == 0;
+    ++gentry.regnum)
+      {
+    if (gentry.size < 1)
+    {
+        fprintf (stderr, "Register: %u disabled\n", gentry.regnum);
+        continue;
+    }
+    fprintf (stderr, "Register: %u base: 0x%lx size: 0x%lx type: %s\n",
+      gentry.regnum, gentry.base, gentry.size,
+      mtrr_strings[gentry.type]);
+      }
+      if (errno == EINVAL) exit (0);
+      fprintf (stderr, "Error doing ioctl(2) on /dev/mtrr\t%s\n", ERRSTRING);
+      exit (3);
+  }   /*  End Function main  */
+
+
+Creating MTRRs from a C programme using ioctl()'s
+=================================================
+::
+
+  /*  mtrr-add.c
+
+      Source file for mtrr-add (example programme to add an MTRRs using ioctl())
+
+      Copyright (C) 1997-1998  Richard Gooch
+
+      This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+      it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+      the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+      (at your option) any later version.
+
+      This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+      but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+      MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+      GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+      You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+      along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+      Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
+
+      Richard Gooch may be reached by email at  rgooch@atnf.csiro.au
+      The postal address is:
+        Richard Gooch, c/o ATNF, P. O. Box 76, Epping, N.S.W., 2121, Australia.
+  */
+
+  /*
+      This programme will use an ioctl() on /proc/mtrr to add an entry. The first
+      available mtrr is used. This is an alternative to writing /proc/mtrr.
+
+
+      Written by      Richard Gooch   17-DEC-1997
+
+      Last updated by Richard Gooch   2-MAY-1998
+
+
+  */
+  #include <stdio.h>
+  #include <string.h>
+  #include <stdlib.h>
+  #include <unistd.h>
+  #include <sys/types.h>
+  #include <sys/stat.h>
+  #include <fcntl.h>
+  #include <sys/ioctl.h>
+  #include <errno.h>
+  #include <asm/mtrr.h>
+
+  #define TRUE 1
+  #define FALSE 0
+  #define ERRSTRING strerror (errno)
+
+  static char *mtrr_strings[MTRR_NUM_TYPES] =
+  {
+      "uncachable",               /* 0 */
+      "write-combining",          /* 1 */
+      "?",                        /* 2 */
+      "?",                        /* 3 */
+      "write-through",            /* 4 */
+      "write-protect",            /* 5 */
+      "write-back",               /* 6 */
+  };
+
+  int main (int argc, char **argv)
+  {
+      int fd;
+      struct mtrr_sentry sentry;
+
+      if (argc != 4)
+      {
+    fprintf (stderr, "Usage:\tmtrr-add base size type\n");
+    exit (1);
+      }
+      sentry.base = strtoul (argv[1], NULL, 0);
+      sentry.size = strtoul (argv[2], NULL, 0);
+      for (sentry.type = 0; sentry.type < MTRR_NUM_TYPES; ++sentry.type)
+      {
+    if (strcmp (argv[3], mtrr_strings[sentry.type]) == 0) break;
+      }
+      if (sentry.type >= MTRR_NUM_TYPES)
+      {
+    fprintf (stderr, "Illegal type: \"%s\"\n", argv[3]);
+    exit (2);
+      }
+      if ( ( fd = open ("/proc/mtrr", O_WRONLY, 0) ) == -1 )
+      {
+    if (errno == ENOENT)
+    {
+        fputs ("/proc/mtrr not found: not supported or you don't have a PPro?\n",
+        stderr);
+        exit (3);
+    }
+    fprintf (stderr, "Error opening /proc/mtrr\t%s\n", ERRSTRING);
+    exit (4);
+      }
+      if (ioctl (fd, MTRRIOC_ADD_ENTRY, &sentry) == -1)
+      {
+    fprintf (stderr, "Error doing ioctl(2) on /dev/mtrr\t%s\n", ERRSTRING);
+    exit (5);
+      }
+      fprintf (stderr, "Sleeping for 5 seconds so you can see the new entry\n");
+      sleep (5);
+      close (fd);
+      fputs ("I've just closed /proc/mtrr so now the new entry should be gone\n",
+      stderr);
+  }   /*  End Function main  */
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/mtrr.txt b/Documentation/x86/mtrr.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index dc3e703913ac..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/x86/mtrr.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,329 +0,0 @@
-MTRR (Memory Type Range Register) control
-
-Richard Gooch <rgooch@atnf.csiro.au> - 3 Jun 1999
-Luis R. Rodriguez <mcgrof@do-not-panic.com> - April 9, 2015
-
-===============================================================================
-Phasing out MTRR use
-
-MTRR use is replaced on modern x86 hardware with PAT. Direct MTRR use by
-drivers on Linux is now completely phased out, device drivers should use
-arch_phys_wc_add() in combination with ioremap_wc() to make MTRR effective on
-non-PAT systems while a no-op but equally effective on PAT enabled systems.
-
-Even if Linux does not use MTRRs directly, some x86 platform firmware may still
-set up MTRRs early before booting the OS. They do this as some platform
-firmware may still have implemented access to MTRRs which would be controlled
-and handled by the platform firmware directly. An example of platform use of
-MTRRs is through the use of SMI handlers, one case could be for fan control,
-the platform code would need uncachable access to some of its fan control
-registers. Such platform access does not need any Operating System MTRR code in
-place other than mtrr_type_lookup() to ensure any OS specific mapping requests
-are aligned with platform MTRR setup. If MTRRs are only set up by the platform
-firmware code though and the OS does not make any specific MTRR mapping
-requests mtrr_type_lookup() should always return MTRR_TYPE_INVALID.
-
-For details refer to Documentation/x86/pat.txt.
-
-===============================================================================
-
-  On Intel P6 family processors (Pentium Pro, Pentium II and later)
-  the Memory Type Range Registers (MTRRs) may be used to control
-  processor access to memory ranges. This is most useful when you have
-  a video (VGA) card on a PCI or AGP bus. Enabling write-combining
-  allows bus write transfers to be combined into a larger transfer
-  before bursting over the PCI/AGP bus. This can increase performance
-  of image write operations 2.5 times or more.
-
-  The Cyrix 6x86, 6x86MX and M II processors have Address Range
-  Registers (ARRs) which provide a similar functionality to MTRRs. For
-  these, the ARRs are used to emulate the MTRRs.
-
-  The AMD K6-2 (stepping 8 and above) and K6-3 processors have two
-  MTRRs. These are supported.  The AMD Athlon family provide 8 Intel
-  style MTRRs.
-
-  The Centaur C6 (WinChip) has 8 MCRs, allowing write-combining. These
-  are supported.
-
-  The VIA Cyrix III and VIA C3 CPUs offer 8 Intel style MTRRs.
-
-  The CONFIG_MTRR option creates a /proc/mtrr file which may be used
-  to manipulate your MTRRs. Typically the X server should use
-  this. This should have a reasonably generic interface so that
-  similar control registers on other processors can be easily
-  supported.
-
-
-There are two interfaces to /proc/mtrr: one is an ASCII interface
-which allows you to read and write. The other is an ioctl()
-interface. The ASCII interface is meant for administration. The
-ioctl() interface is meant for C programs (i.e. the X server). The
-interfaces are described below, with sample commands and C code.
-
-===============================================================================
-Reading MTRRs from the shell:
-
-% cat /proc/mtrr
-reg00: base=0x00000000 (   0MB), size= 128MB: write-back, count=1
-reg01: base=0x08000000 ( 128MB), size=  64MB: write-back, count=1
-===============================================================================
-Creating MTRRs from the C-shell:
-# echo "base=0xf8000000 size=0x400000 type=write-combining" >! /proc/mtrr
-or if you use bash:
-# echo "base=0xf8000000 size=0x400000 type=write-combining" >| /proc/mtrr
-
-And the result thereof:
-% cat /proc/mtrr
-reg00: base=0x00000000 (   0MB), size= 128MB: write-back, count=1
-reg01: base=0x08000000 ( 128MB), size=  64MB: write-back, count=1
-reg02: base=0xf8000000 (3968MB), size=   4MB: write-combining, count=1
-
-This is for video RAM at base address 0xf8000000 and size 4 megabytes. To
-find out your base address, you need to look at the output of your X
-server, which tells you where the linear framebuffer address is. A
-typical line that you may get is:
-
-(--) S3: PCI: 968 rev 0, Linear FB @ 0xf8000000
-
-Note that you should only use the value from the X server, as it may
-move the framebuffer base address, so the only value you can trust is
-that reported by the X server.
-
-To find out the size of your framebuffer (what, you don't actually
-know?), the following line will tell you:
-
-(--) S3: videoram:  4096k
-
-That's 4 megabytes, which is 0x400000 bytes (in hexadecimal).
-A patch is being written for XFree86 which will make this automatic:
-in other words the X server will manipulate /proc/mtrr using the
-ioctl() interface, so users won't have to do anything. If you use a
-commercial X server, lobby your vendor to add support for MTRRs.
-===============================================================================
-Creating overlapping MTRRs:
-
-%echo "base=0xfb000000 size=0x1000000 type=write-combining" >/proc/mtrr
-%echo "base=0xfb000000 size=0x1000 type=uncachable" >/proc/mtrr
-
-And the results: cat /proc/mtrr
-reg00: base=0x00000000 (   0MB), size=  64MB: write-back, count=1
-reg01: base=0xfb000000 (4016MB), size=  16MB: write-combining, count=1
-reg02: base=0xfb000000 (4016MB), size=   4kB: uncachable, count=1
-
-Some cards (especially Voodoo Graphics boards) need this 4 kB area
-excluded from the beginning of the region because it is used for
-registers.
-
-NOTE: You can only create type=uncachable region, if the first
-region that you created is type=write-combining.
-===============================================================================
-Removing MTRRs from the C-shell:
-% echo "disable=2" >! /proc/mtrr
-or using bash:
-% echo "disable=2" >| /proc/mtrr
-===============================================================================
-Reading MTRRs from a C program using ioctl()'s:
-
-/*  mtrr-show.c
-
-    Source file for mtrr-show (example program to show MTRRs using ioctl()'s)
-
-    Copyright (C) 1997-1998  Richard Gooch
-
-    This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
-    it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
-    the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
-    (at your option) any later version.
-
-    This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-    but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-    MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
-    GNU General Public License for more details.
-
-    You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
-    along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
-    Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
-
-    Richard Gooch may be reached by email at  rgooch@atnf.csiro.au
-    The postal address is:
-      Richard Gooch, c/o ATNF, P. O. Box 76, Epping, N.S.W., 2121, Australia.
-*/
-
-/*
-    This program will use an ioctl() on /proc/mtrr to show the current MTRR
-    settings. This is an alternative to reading /proc/mtrr.
-
-
-    Written by      Richard Gooch   17-DEC-1997
-
-    Last updated by Richard Gooch   2-MAY-1998
-
-
-*/
-#include <stdio.h>
-#include <stdlib.h>
-#include <string.h>
-#include <sys/types.h>
-#include <sys/stat.h>
-#include <fcntl.h>
-#include <sys/ioctl.h>
-#include <errno.h>
-#include <asm/mtrr.h>
-
-#define TRUE 1
-#define FALSE 0
-#define ERRSTRING strerror (errno)
-
-static char *mtrr_strings[MTRR_NUM_TYPES] =
-{
-    "uncachable",               /* 0 */
-    "write-combining",          /* 1 */
-    "?",                        /* 2 */
-    "?",                        /* 3 */
-    "write-through",            /* 4 */
-    "write-protect",            /* 5 */
-    "write-back",               /* 6 */
-};
-
-int main ()
-{
-    int fd;
-    struct mtrr_gentry gentry;
-
-    if ( ( fd = open ("/proc/mtrr", O_RDONLY, 0) ) == -1 )
-    {
-	if (errno == ENOENT)
-	{
-	    fputs ("/proc/mtrr not found: not supported or you don't have a PPro?\n",
-		   stderr);
-	    exit (1);
-	}
-	fprintf (stderr, "Error opening /proc/mtrr\t%s\n", ERRSTRING);
-	exit (2);
-    }
-    for (gentry.regnum = 0; ioctl (fd, MTRRIOC_GET_ENTRY, &gentry) == 0;
-	 ++gentry.regnum)
-    {
-	if (gentry.size < 1)
-	{
-	    fprintf (stderr, "Register: %u disabled\n", gentry.regnum);
-	    continue;
-	}
-	fprintf (stderr, "Register: %u base: 0x%lx size: 0x%lx type: %s\n",
-		 gentry.regnum, gentry.base, gentry.size,
-		 mtrr_strings[gentry.type]);
-    }
-    if (errno == EINVAL) exit (0);
-    fprintf (stderr, "Error doing ioctl(2) on /dev/mtrr\t%s\n", ERRSTRING);
-    exit (3);
-}   /*  End Function main  */
-===============================================================================
-Creating MTRRs from a C programme using ioctl()'s:
-
-/*  mtrr-add.c
-
-    Source file for mtrr-add (example programme to add an MTRRs using ioctl())
-
-    Copyright (C) 1997-1998  Richard Gooch
-
-    This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
-    it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
-    the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
-    (at your option) any later version.
-
-    This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-    but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-    MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
-    GNU General Public License for more details.
-
-    You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
-    along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
-    Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
-
-    Richard Gooch may be reached by email at  rgooch@atnf.csiro.au
-    The postal address is:
-      Richard Gooch, c/o ATNF, P. O. Box 76, Epping, N.S.W., 2121, Australia.
-*/
-
-/*
-    This programme will use an ioctl() on /proc/mtrr to add an entry. The first
-    available mtrr is used. This is an alternative to writing /proc/mtrr.
-
-
-    Written by      Richard Gooch   17-DEC-1997
-
-    Last updated by Richard Gooch   2-MAY-1998
-
-
-*/
-#include <stdio.h>
-#include <string.h>
-#include <stdlib.h>
-#include <unistd.h>
-#include <sys/types.h>
-#include <sys/stat.h>
-#include <fcntl.h>
-#include <sys/ioctl.h>
-#include <errno.h>
-#include <asm/mtrr.h>
-
-#define TRUE 1
-#define FALSE 0
-#define ERRSTRING strerror (errno)
-
-static char *mtrr_strings[MTRR_NUM_TYPES] =
-{
-    "uncachable",               /* 0 */
-    "write-combining",          /* 1 */
-    "?",                        /* 2 */
-    "?",                        /* 3 */
-    "write-through",            /* 4 */
-    "write-protect",            /* 5 */
-    "write-back",               /* 6 */
-};
-
-int main (int argc, char **argv)
-{
-    int fd;
-    struct mtrr_sentry sentry;
-
-    if (argc != 4)
-    {
-	fprintf (stderr, "Usage:\tmtrr-add base size type\n");
-	exit (1);
-    }
-    sentry.base = strtoul (argv[1], NULL, 0);
-    sentry.size = strtoul (argv[2], NULL, 0);
-    for (sentry.type = 0; sentry.type < MTRR_NUM_TYPES; ++sentry.type)
-    {
-	if (strcmp (argv[3], mtrr_strings[sentry.type]) == 0) break;
-    }
-    if (sentry.type >= MTRR_NUM_TYPES)
-    {
-	fprintf (stderr, "Illegal type: \"%s\"\n", argv[3]);
-	exit (2);
-    }
-    if ( ( fd = open ("/proc/mtrr", O_WRONLY, 0) ) == -1 )
-    {
-	if (errno == ENOENT)
-	{
-	    fputs ("/proc/mtrr not found: not supported or you don't have a PPro?\n",
-		   stderr);
-	    exit (3);
-	}
-	fprintf (stderr, "Error opening /proc/mtrr\t%s\n", ERRSTRING);
-	exit (4);
-    }
-    if (ioctl (fd, MTRRIOC_ADD_ENTRY, &sentry) == -1)
-    {
-	fprintf (stderr, "Error doing ioctl(2) on /dev/mtrr\t%s\n", ERRSTRING);
-	exit (5);
-    }
-    fprintf (stderr, "Sleeping for 5 seconds so you can see the new entry\n");
-    sleep (5);
-    close (fd);
-    fputs ("I've just closed /proc/mtrr so now the new entry should be gone\n",
-	   stderr);
-}   /*  End Function main  */
-===============================================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/orc-unwinder.txt b/Documentation/x86/orc-unwinder.rst
index cd4b29be29af..d811576c1f3e 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/orc-unwinder.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/orc-unwinder.rst
@@ -1,8 +1,11 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+============
 ORC unwinder
 ============
 
 Overview
---------
+========
 
 The kernel CONFIG_UNWINDER_ORC option enables the ORC unwinder, which is
 similar in concept to a DWARF unwinder.  The difference is that the
@@ -23,12 +26,12 @@ correlate instruction addresses with their stack states at run time.
 
 
 ORC vs frame pointers
----------------------
+=====================
 
 With frame pointers enabled, GCC adds instrumentation code to every
 function in the kernel.  The kernel's .text size increases by about
 3.2%, resulting in a broad kernel-wide slowdown.  Measurements by Mel
-Gorman [1] have shown a slowdown of 5-10% for some workloads.
+Gorman [1]_ have shown a slowdown of 5-10% for some workloads.
 
 In contrast, the ORC unwinder has no effect on text size or runtime
 performance, because the debuginfo is out of band.  So if you disable
@@ -55,7 +58,7 @@ depending on the kernel config.
 
 
 ORC vs DWARF
-------------
+============
 
 ORC debuginfo's advantage over DWARF itself is that it's much simpler.
 It gets rid of the complex DWARF CFI state machine and also gets rid of
@@ -65,7 +68,7 @@ mission critical oops code.
 
 The simpler debuginfo format also enables the unwinder to be much faster
 than DWARF, which is important for perf and lockdep.  In a basic
-performance test by Jiri Slaby [2], the ORC unwinder was about 20x
+performance test by Jiri Slaby [2]_, the ORC unwinder was about 20x
 faster than an out-of-tree DWARF unwinder.  (Note: That measurement was
 taken before some performance tweaks were added, which doubled
 performance, so the speedup over DWARF may be closer to 40x.)
@@ -85,7 +88,7 @@ still be able to control the format, e.g. no complex state machines.
 
 
 ORC unwind table generation
----------------------------
+===========================
 
 The ORC data is generated by objtool.  With the existing compile-time
 stack metadata validation feature, objtool already follows all code
@@ -133,7 +136,7 @@ objtool follows GCC code quite well.
 
 
 Unwinder implementation details
--------------------------------
+===============================
 
 Objtool generates the ORC data by integrating with the compile-time
 stack metadata validation feature, which is described in detail in
@@ -154,7 +157,7 @@ subset of the table needs to be searched.
 
 
 Etymology
----------
+=========
 
 Orcs, fearsome creatures of medieval folklore, are the Dwarves' natural
 enemies.  Similarly, the ORC unwinder was created in opposition to the
@@ -162,7 +165,7 @@ complexity and slowness of DWARF.
 
 "Although Orcs rarely consider multiple solutions to a problem, they do
 excel at getting things done because they are creatures of action, not
-thought." [3]  Similarly, unlike the esoteric DWARF unwinder, the
+thought." [3]_  Similarly, unlike the esoteric DWARF unwinder, the
 veracious ORC unwinder wastes no time or siloconic effort decoding
 variable-length zero-extended unsigned-integer byte-coded
 state-machine-based debug information entries.
@@ -174,6 +177,6 @@ brutal, unyielding efficiency.
 ORC stands for Oops Rewind Capability.
 
 
-[1] https://lkml.kernel.org/r/20170602104048.jkkzssljsompjdwy@suse.de
-[2] https://lkml.kernel.org/r/d2ca5435-6386-29b8-db87-7f227c2b713a@suse.cz
-[3] http://dustin.wikidot.com/half-orcs-and-orcs
+.. [1] https://lkml.kernel.org/r/20170602104048.jkkzssljsompjdwy@suse.de
+.. [2] https://lkml.kernel.org/r/d2ca5435-6386-29b8-db87-7f227c2b713a@suse.cz
+.. [3] http://dustin.wikidot.com/half-orcs-and-orcs
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/pat.rst b/Documentation/x86/pat.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9a298fd97d74
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/x86/pat.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,242 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+==========================
+PAT (Page Attribute Table)
+==========================
+
+x86 Page Attribute Table (PAT) allows for setting the memory attribute at the
+page level granularity. PAT is complementary to the MTRR settings which allows
+for setting of memory types over physical address ranges. However, PAT is
+more flexible than MTRR due to its capability to set attributes at page level
+and also due to the fact that there are no hardware limitations on number of
+such attribute settings allowed. Added flexibility comes with guidelines for
+not having memory type aliasing for the same physical memory with multiple
+virtual addresses.
+
+PAT allows for different types of memory attributes. The most commonly used
+ones that will be supported at this time are:
+
+===  ==============
+WB   Write-back
+UC   Uncached
+WC   Write-combined
+WT   Write-through
+UC-  Uncached Minus
+===  ==============
+
+
+PAT APIs
+========
+
+There are many different APIs in the kernel that allows setting of memory
+attributes at the page level. In order to avoid aliasing, these interfaces
+should be used thoughtfully. Below is a table of interfaces available,
+their intended usage and their memory attribute relationships. Internally,
+these APIs use a reserve_memtype()/free_memtype() interface on the physical
+address range to avoid any aliasing.
+
++------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+
+| API                    |    RAM   |  ACPI,...    |  Reserved/Holes  |
++------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+
+| ioremap                |    --    |    UC-       |       UC-        |
++------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+
+| ioremap_cache          |    --    |    WB        |       WB         |
++------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+
+| ioremap_uc             |    --    |    UC        |       UC         |
++------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+
+| ioremap_nocache        |    --    |    UC-       |       UC-        |
++------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+
+| ioremap_wc             |    --    |    --        |       WC         |
++------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+
+| ioremap_wt             |    --    |    --        |       WT         |
++------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+
+| set_memory_uc,         |    UC-   |    --        |       --         |
+| set_memory_wb          |          |              |                  |
++------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+
+| set_memory_wc,         |    WC    |    --        |       --         |
+| set_memory_wb          |          |              |                  |
++------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+
+| set_memory_wt,         |    WT    |    --        |       --         |
+| set_memory_wb          |          |              |                  |
++------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+
+| pci sysfs resource     |    --    |    --        |       UC-        |
++------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+
+| pci sysfs resource_wc  |    --    |    --        |       WC         |
+| is IORESOURCE_PREFETCH |          |              |                  |
++------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+
+| pci proc               |    --    |    --        |       UC-        |
+| !PCIIOC_WRITE_COMBINE  |          |              |                  |
++------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+
+| pci proc               |    --    |    --        |       WC         |
+| PCIIOC_WRITE_COMBINE   |          |              |                  |
++------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+
+| /dev/mem               |    --    |   WB/WC/UC-  |    WB/WC/UC-     |
+| read-write             |          |              |                  |
++------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+
+| /dev/mem               |    --    |    UC-       |       UC-        |
+| mmap SYNC flag         |          |              |                  |
++------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+
+| /dev/mem               |    --    |   WB/WC/UC-  |  WB/WC/UC-       |
+| mmap !SYNC flag        |          |              |                  |
+| and                    |          |(from existing|  (from existing  |
+| any alias to this area |          |alias)        |  alias)          |
++------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+
+| /dev/mem               |    --    |    WB        |       WB         |
+| mmap !SYNC flag        |          |              |                  |
+| no alias to this area  |          |              |                  |
+| and                    |          |              |                  |
+| MTRR says WB           |          |              |                  |
++------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+
+| /dev/mem               |    --    |    --        |       UC-        |
+| mmap !SYNC flag        |          |              |                  |
+| no alias to this area  |          |              |                  |
+| and                    |          |              |                  |
+| MTRR says !WB          |          |              |                  |
++------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+
+
+
+Advanced APIs for drivers
+=========================
+
+A. Exporting pages to users with remap_pfn_range, io_remap_pfn_range,
+vmf_insert_pfn.
+
+Drivers wanting to export some pages to userspace do it by using mmap
+interface and a combination of:
+
+  1) pgprot_noncached()
+  2) io_remap_pfn_range() or remap_pfn_range() or vmf_insert_pfn()
+
+With PAT support, a new API pgprot_writecombine is being added. So, drivers can
+continue to use the above sequence, with either pgprot_noncached() or
+pgprot_writecombine() in step 1, followed by step 2.
+
+In addition, step 2 internally tracks the region as UC or WC in memtype
+list in order to ensure no conflicting mapping.
+
+Note that this set of APIs only works with IO (non RAM) regions. If driver
+wants to export a RAM region, it has to do set_memory_uc() or set_memory_wc()
+as step 0 above and also track the usage of those pages and use set_memory_wb()
+before the page is freed to free pool.
+
+MTRR effects on PAT / non-PAT systems
+=====================================
+
+The following table provides the effects of using write-combining MTRRs when
+using ioremap*() calls on x86 for both non-PAT and PAT systems. Ideally
+mtrr_add() usage will be phased out in favor of arch_phys_wc_add() which will
+be a no-op on PAT enabled systems. The region over which a arch_phys_wc_add()
+is made, should already have been ioremapped with WC attributes or PAT entries,
+this can be done by using ioremap_wc() / set_memory_wc().  Devices which
+combine areas of IO memory desired to remain uncacheable with areas where
+write-combining is desirable should consider use of ioremap_uc() followed by
+set_memory_wc() to white-list effective write-combined areas.  Such use is
+nevertheless discouraged as the effective memory type is considered
+implementation defined, yet this strategy can be used as last resort on devices
+with size-constrained regions where otherwise MTRR write-combining would
+otherwise not be effective.
+::
+
+  ====  =======  ===  =========================  =====================
+  MTRR  Non-PAT  PAT  Linux ioremap value        Effective memory type
+  ====  =======  ===  =========================  =====================
+        PAT                                        Non-PAT |  PAT
+        |PCD                                               |
+        ||PWT                                              |
+        |||                                                |
+  WC    000      WB   _PAGE_CACHE_MODE_WB             WC   |   WC
+  WC    001      WC   _PAGE_CACHE_MODE_WC             WC*  |   WC
+  WC    010      UC-  _PAGE_CACHE_MODE_UC_MINUS       WC*  |   UC
+  WC    011      UC   _PAGE_CACHE_MODE_UC             UC   |   UC
+  ====  =======  ===  =========================  =====================
+
+  (*) denotes implementation defined and is discouraged
+
+.. note:: -- in the above table mean "Not suggested usage for the API". Some
+  of the --'s are strictly enforced by the kernel. Some others are not really
+  enforced today, but may be enforced in future.
+
+For ioremap and pci access through /sys or /proc - The actual type returned
+can be more restrictive, in case of any existing aliasing for that address.
+For example: If there is an existing uncached mapping, a new ioremap_wc can
+return uncached mapping in place of write-combine requested.
+
+set_memory_[uc|wc|wt] and set_memory_wb should be used in pairs, where driver
+will first make a region uc, wc or wt and switch it back to wb after use.
+
+Over time writes to /proc/mtrr will be deprecated in favor of using PAT based
+interfaces. Users writing to /proc/mtrr are suggested to use above interfaces.
+
+Drivers should use ioremap_[uc|wc] to access PCI BARs with [uc|wc] access
+types.
+
+Drivers should use set_memory_[uc|wc|wt] to set access type for RAM ranges.
+
+
+PAT debugging
+=============
+
+With CONFIG_DEBUG_FS enabled, PAT memtype list can be examined by::
+
+  # mount -t debugfs debugfs /sys/kernel/debug
+  # cat /sys/kernel/debug/x86/pat_memtype_list
+  PAT memtype list:
+  uncached-minus @ 0x7fadf000-0x7fae0000
+  uncached-minus @ 0x7fb19000-0x7fb1a000
+  uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1a000-0x7fb1b000
+  uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1b000-0x7fb1c000
+  uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1c000-0x7fb1d000
+  uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1d000-0x7fb1e000
+  uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1e000-0x7fb25000
+  uncached-minus @ 0x7fb25000-0x7fb26000
+  uncached-minus @ 0x7fb26000-0x7fb27000
+  uncached-minus @ 0x7fb27000-0x7fb28000
+  uncached-minus @ 0x7fb28000-0x7fb2e000
+  uncached-minus @ 0x7fb2e000-0x7fb2f000
+  uncached-minus @ 0x7fb2f000-0x7fb30000
+  uncached-minus @ 0x7fb31000-0x7fb32000
+  uncached-minus @ 0x80000000-0x90000000
+
+This list shows physical address ranges and various PAT settings used to
+access those physical address ranges.
+
+Another, more verbose way of getting PAT related debug messages is with
+"debugpat" boot parameter. With this parameter, various debug messages are
+printed to dmesg log.
+
+PAT Initialization
+==================
+
+The following table describes how PAT is initialized under various
+configurations. The PAT MSR must be updated by Linux in order to support WC
+and WT attributes. Otherwise, the PAT MSR has the value programmed in it
+by the firmware. Note, Xen enables WC attribute in the PAT MSR for guests.
+
+ ==== ===== ==========================  =========  =======
+ MTRR PAT   Call Sequence               PAT State  PAT MSR
+ ==== ===== ==========================  =========  =======
+ E    E     MTRR -> PAT init            Enabled    OS
+ E    D     MTRR -> PAT init            Disabled    -
+ D    E     MTRR -> PAT disable         Disabled   BIOS
+ D    D     MTRR -> PAT disable         Disabled    -
+ -    np/E  PAT  -> PAT disable         Disabled   BIOS
+ -    np/D  PAT  -> PAT disable         Disabled    -
+ E    !P/E  MTRR -> PAT init            Disabled   BIOS
+ D    !P/E  MTRR -> PAT disable         Disabled   BIOS
+ !M   !P/E  MTRR stub -> PAT disable    Disabled   BIOS
+ ==== ===== ==========================  =========  =======
+
+  Legend
+
+ ========= =======================================
+ E         Feature enabled in CPU
+ D	   Feature disabled/unsupported in CPU
+ np	   "nopat" boot option specified
+ !P	   CONFIG_X86_PAT option unset
+ !M	   CONFIG_MTRR option unset
+ Enabled   PAT state set to enabled
+ Disabled  PAT state set to disabled
+ OS        PAT initializes PAT MSR with OS setting
+ BIOS      PAT keeps PAT MSR with BIOS setting
+ ========= =======================================
+
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/pat.txt b/Documentation/x86/pat.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 481d8d8536ac..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/x86/pat.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,230 +0,0 @@
-
-PAT (Page Attribute Table)
-
-x86 Page Attribute Table (PAT) allows for setting the memory attribute at the
-page level granularity. PAT is complementary to the MTRR settings which allows
-for setting of memory types over physical address ranges. However, PAT is
-more flexible than MTRR due to its capability to set attributes at page level
-and also due to the fact that there are no hardware limitations on number of
-such attribute settings allowed. Added flexibility comes with guidelines for
-not having memory type aliasing for the same physical memory with multiple
-virtual addresses.
-
-PAT allows for different types of memory attributes. The most commonly used
-ones that will be supported at this time are Write-back, Uncached,
-Write-combined, Write-through and Uncached Minus.
-
-
-PAT APIs
---------
-
-There are many different APIs in the kernel that allows setting of memory
-attributes at the page level. In order to avoid aliasing, these interfaces
-should be used thoughtfully. Below is a table of interfaces available,
-their intended usage and their memory attribute relationships. Internally,
-these APIs use a reserve_memtype()/free_memtype() interface on the physical
-address range to avoid any aliasing.
-
-
--------------------------------------------------------------------
-API                    |    RAM   |  ACPI,...  |  Reserved/Holes  |
------------------------|----------|------------|------------------|
-                       |          |            |                  |
-ioremap                |    --    |    UC-     |       UC-        |
-                       |          |            |                  |
-ioremap_cache          |    --    |    WB      |       WB         |
-                       |          |            |                  |
-ioremap_uc             |    --    |    UC      |       UC         |
-                       |          |            |                  |
-ioremap_nocache        |    --    |    UC-     |       UC-        |
-                       |          |            |                  |
-ioremap_wc             |    --    |    --      |       WC         |
-                       |          |            |                  |
-ioremap_wt             |    --    |    --      |       WT         |
-                       |          |            |                  |
-set_memory_uc          |    UC-   |    --      |       --         |
- set_memory_wb         |          |            |                  |
-                       |          |            |                  |
-set_memory_wc          |    WC    |    --      |       --         |
- set_memory_wb         |          |            |                  |
-                       |          |            |                  |
-set_memory_wt          |    WT    |    --      |       --         |
- set_memory_wb         |          |            |                  |
-                       |          |            |                  |
-pci sysfs resource     |    --    |    --      |       UC-        |
-                       |          |            |                  |
-pci sysfs resource_wc  |    --    |    --      |       WC         |
- is IORESOURCE_PREFETCH|          |            |                  |
-                       |          |            |                  |
-pci proc               |    --    |    --      |       UC-        |
- !PCIIOC_WRITE_COMBINE |          |            |                  |
-                       |          |            |                  |
-pci proc               |    --    |    --      |       WC         |
- PCIIOC_WRITE_COMBINE  |          |            |                  |
-                       |          |            |                  |
-/dev/mem               |    --    |  WB/WC/UC- |    WB/WC/UC-     |
- read-write            |          |            |                  |
-                       |          |            |                  |
-/dev/mem               |    --    |    UC-     |       UC-        |
- mmap SYNC flag        |          |            |                  |
-                       |          |            |                  |
-/dev/mem               |    --    |  WB/WC/UC- |    WB/WC/UC-     |
- mmap !SYNC flag       |          |(from exist-|  (from exist-    |
- and                   |          |  ing alias)|    ing alias)    |
- any alias to this area|          |            |                  |
-                       |          |            |                  |
-/dev/mem               |    --    |    WB      |       WB         |
- mmap !SYNC flag       |          |            |                  |
- no alias to this area |          |            |                  |
- and                   |          |            |                  |
- MTRR says WB          |          |            |                  |
-                       |          |            |                  |
-/dev/mem               |    --    |    --      |       UC-        |
- mmap !SYNC flag       |          |            |                  |
- no alias to this area |          |            |                  |
- and                   |          |            |                  |
- MTRR says !WB         |          |            |                  |
-                       |          |            |                  |
--------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-Advanced APIs for drivers
--------------------------
-A. Exporting pages to users with remap_pfn_range, io_remap_pfn_range,
-vmf_insert_pfn
-
-Drivers wanting to export some pages to userspace do it by using mmap
-interface and a combination of
-1) pgprot_noncached()
-2) io_remap_pfn_range() or remap_pfn_range() or vmf_insert_pfn()
-
-With PAT support, a new API pgprot_writecombine is being added. So, drivers can
-continue to use the above sequence, with either pgprot_noncached() or
-pgprot_writecombine() in step 1, followed by step 2.
-
-In addition, step 2 internally tracks the region as UC or WC in memtype
-list in order to ensure no conflicting mapping.
-
-Note that this set of APIs only works with IO (non RAM) regions. If driver
-wants to export a RAM region, it has to do set_memory_uc() or set_memory_wc()
-as step 0 above and also track the usage of those pages and use set_memory_wb()
-before the page is freed to free pool.
-
-MTRR effects on PAT / non-PAT systems
--------------------------------------
-
-The following table provides the effects of using write-combining MTRRs when
-using ioremap*() calls on x86 for both non-PAT and PAT systems. Ideally
-mtrr_add() usage will be phased out in favor of arch_phys_wc_add() which will
-be a no-op on PAT enabled systems. The region over which a arch_phys_wc_add()
-is made, should already have been ioremapped with WC attributes or PAT entries,
-this can be done by using ioremap_wc() / set_memory_wc().  Devices which
-combine areas of IO memory desired to remain uncacheable with areas where
-write-combining is desirable should consider use of ioremap_uc() followed by
-set_memory_wc() to white-list effective write-combined areas.  Such use is
-nevertheless discouraged as the effective memory type is considered
-implementation defined, yet this strategy can be used as last resort on devices
-with size-constrained regions where otherwise MTRR write-combining would
-otherwise not be effective.
-
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
-MTRR Non-PAT   PAT    Linux ioremap value        Effective memory type
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
-                                                  Non-PAT |  PAT
-     PAT
-     |PCD
-     ||PWT
-     |||
-WC   000      WB      _PAGE_CACHE_MODE_WB            WC   |   WC
-WC   001      WC      _PAGE_CACHE_MODE_WC            WC*  |   WC
-WC   010      UC-     _PAGE_CACHE_MODE_UC_MINUS      WC*  |   UC
-WC   011      UC      _PAGE_CACHE_MODE_UC            UC   |   UC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-(*) denotes implementation defined and is discouraged
-
-Notes:
-
--- in the above table mean "Not suggested usage for the API". Some of the --'s
-are strictly enforced by the kernel. Some others are not really enforced
-today, but may be enforced in future.
-
-For ioremap and pci access through /sys or /proc - The actual type returned
-can be more restrictive, in case of any existing aliasing for that address.
-For example: If there is an existing uncached mapping, a new ioremap_wc can
-return uncached mapping in place of write-combine requested.
-
-set_memory_[uc|wc|wt] and set_memory_wb should be used in pairs, where driver
-will first make a region uc, wc or wt and switch it back to wb after use.
-
-Over time writes to /proc/mtrr will be deprecated in favor of using PAT based
-interfaces. Users writing to /proc/mtrr are suggested to use above interfaces.
-
-Drivers should use ioremap_[uc|wc] to access PCI BARs with [uc|wc] access
-types.
-
-Drivers should use set_memory_[uc|wc|wt] to set access type for RAM ranges.
-
-
-PAT debugging
--------------
-
-With CONFIG_DEBUG_FS enabled, PAT memtype list can be examined by
-
-# mount -t debugfs debugfs /sys/kernel/debug
-# cat /sys/kernel/debug/x86/pat_memtype_list
-PAT memtype list:
-uncached-minus @ 0x7fadf000-0x7fae0000
-uncached-minus @ 0x7fb19000-0x7fb1a000
-uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1a000-0x7fb1b000
-uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1b000-0x7fb1c000
-uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1c000-0x7fb1d000
-uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1d000-0x7fb1e000
-uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1e000-0x7fb25000
-uncached-minus @ 0x7fb25000-0x7fb26000
-uncached-minus @ 0x7fb26000-0x7fb27000
-uncached-minus @ 0x7fb27000-0x7fb28000
-uncached-minus @ 0x7fb28000-0x7fb2e000
-uncached-minus @ 0x7fb2e000-0x7fb2f000
-uncached-minus @ 0x7fb2f000-0x7fb30000
-uncached-minus @ 0x7fb31000-0x7fb32000
-uncached-minus @ 0x80000000-0x90000000
-
-This list shows physical address ranges and various PAT settings used to
-access those physical address ranges.
-
-Another, more verbose way of getting PAT related debug messages is with
-"debugpat" boot parameter. With this parameter, various debug messages are
-printed to dmesg log.
-
-PAT Initialization
-------------------
-
-The following table describes how PAT is initialized under various
-configurations. The PAT MSR must be updated by Linux in order to support WC
-and WT attributes. Otherwise, the PAT MSR has the value programmed in it
-by the firmware. Note, Xen enables WC attribute in the PAT MSR for guests.
-
- MTRR PAT   Call Sequence               PAT State  PAT MSR
- =========================================================
- E    E     MTRR -> PAT init            Enabled    OS
- E    D     MTRR -> PAT init            Disabled    -
- D    E     MTRR -> PAT disable         Disabled   BIOS
- D    D     MTRR -> PAT disable         Disabled    -
- -    np/E  PAT  -> PAT disable         Disabled   BIOS
- -    np/D  PAT  -> PAT disable         Disabled    -
- E    !P/E  MTRR -> PAT init            Disabled   BIOS
- D    !P/E  MTRR -> PAT disable         Disabled   BIOS
- !M   !P/E  MTRR stub -> PAT disable    Disabled   BIOS
-
- Legend
- ------------------------------------------------
- E         Feature enabled in CPU
- D	   Feature disabled/unsupported in CPU
- np	   "nopat" boot option specified
- !P	   CONFIG_X86_PAT option unset
- !M	   CONFIG_MTRR option unset
- Enabled   PAT state set to enabled
- Disabled  PAT state set to disabled
- OS        PAT initializes PAT MSR with OS setting
- BIOS      PAT keeps PAT MSR with BIOS setting
-
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/protection-keys.txt b/Documentation/x86/protection-keys.rst
index ecb0d2dadfb7..49d9833af871 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/protection-keys.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/protection-keys.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,9 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+======================
+Memory Protection Keys
+======================
+
 Memory Protection Keys for Userspace (PKU aka PKEYs) is a feature
 which is found on Intel's Skylake "Scalable Processor" Server CPUs.
 It will be avalable in future non-server parts.
@@ -23,9 +29,10 @@ even though there is theoretically space in the PAE PTEs.  These
 permissions are enforced on data access only and have no effect on
 instruction fetches.
 
-=========================== Syscalls ===========================
+Syscalls
+========
 
-There are 3 system calls which directly interact with pkeys:
+There are 3 system calls which directly interact with pkeys::
 
 	int pkey_alloc(unsigned long flags, unsigned long init_access_rights)
 	int pkey_free(int pkey);
@@ -37,6 +44,7 @@ pkey_alloc().  An application calls the WRPKRU instruction
 directly in order to change access permissions to memory covered
 with a key.  In this example WRPKRU is wrapped by a C function
 called pkey_set().
+::
 
 	int real_prot = PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE;
 	pkey = pkey_alloc(0, PKEY_DISABLE_WRITE);
@@ -45,43 +53,44 @@ called pkey_set().
 	... application runs here
 
 Now, if the application needs to update the data at 'ptr', it can
-gain access, do the update, then remove its write access:
+gain access, do the update, then remove its write access::
 
 	pkey_set(pkey, 0); // clear PKEY_DISABLE_WRITE
 	*ptr = foo; // assign something
 	pkey_set(pkey, PKEY_DISABLE_WRITE); // set PKEY_DISABLE_WRITE again
 
 Now when it frees the memory, it will also free the pkey since it
-is no longer in use:
+is no longer in use::
 
 	munmap(ptr, PAGE_SIZE);
 	pkey_free(pkey);
 
-(Note: pkey_set() is a wrapper for the RDPKRU and WRPKRU instructions.
- An example implementation can be found in
- tools/testing/selftests/x86/protection_keys.c)
+.. note:: pkey_set() is a wrapper for the RDPKRU and WRPKRU instructions.
+          An example implementation can be found in
+          tools/testing/selftests/x86/protection_keys.c.
 
-=========================== Behavior ===========================
+Behavior
+========
 
 The kernel attempts to make protection keys consistent with the
-behavior of a plain mprotect().  For instance if you do this:
+behavior of a plain mprotect().  For instance if you do this::
 
 	mprotect(ptr, size, PROT_NONE);
 	something(ptr);
 
-you can expect the same effects with protection keys when doing this:
+you can expect the same effects with protection keys when doing this::
 
 	pkey = pkey_alloc(0, PKEY_DISABLE_WRITE | PKEY_DISABLE_READ);
 	pkey_mprotect(ptr, size, PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE, pkey);
 	something(ptr);
 
 That should be true whether something() is a direct access to 'ptr'
-like:
+like::
 
 	*ptr = foo;
 
 or when the kernel does the access on the application's behalf like
-with a read():
+with a read()::
 
 	read(fd, ptr, 1);
 
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/pti.txt b/Documentation/x86/pti.rst
index 5cd58439ad2d..4b858a9bad8d 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/pti.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/pti.rst
@@ -1,9 +1,15 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+==========================
+Page Table Isolation (PTI)
+==========================
+
 Overview
 ========
 
-Page Table Isolation (pti, previously known as KAISER[1]) is a
+Page Table Isolation (pti, previously known as KAISER [1]_) is a
 countermeasure against attacks on the shared user/kernel address
-space such as the "Meltdown" approach[2].
+space such as the "Meltdown" approach [2]_.
 
 To mitigate this class of attacks, we create an independent set of
 page tables for use only when running userspace applications.  When
@@ -60,6 +66,7 @@ Protection against side-channel attacks is important.  But,
 this protection comes at a cost:
 
 1. Increased Memory Use
+
   a. Each process now needs an order-1 PGD instead of order-0.
      (Consumes an additional 4k per process).
   b. The 'cpu_entry_area' structure must be 2MB in size and 2MB
@@ -68,6 +75,7 @@ this protection comes at a cost:
      is decompressed, but no space in the kernel image itself.
 
 2. Runtime Cost
+
   a. CR3 manipulation to switch between the page table copies
      must be done at interrupt, syscall, and exception entry
      and exit (it can be skipped when the kernel is interrupted,
@@ -142,6 +150,7 @@ ideally doing all of these in parallel:
    interrupted, including nested NMIs.  Using "-c" boosts the rate of
    NMIs, and using two -c with separate counters encourages nested NMIs
    and less deterministic behavior.
+   ::
 
 	while true; do perf record -c 10000 -e instructions,cycles -a sleep 10; done
 
@@ -182,5 +191,5 @@ that are worth noting here.
    tended to be TLB invalidation issues.  Usually invalidating
    the wrong PCID, or otherwise missing an invalidation.
 
-1. https://gruss.cc/files/kaiser.pdf
-2. https://meltdownattack.com/meltdown.pdf
+.. [1] https://gruss.cc/files/kaiser.pdf
+.. [2] https://meltdownattack.com/meltdown.pdf
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/resctrl_ui.txt b/Documentation/x86/resctrl_ui.rst
index c1f95b59e14d..225cfd4daaee 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/resctrl_ui.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/resctrl_ui.rst
@@ -1,33 +1,44 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+.. include:: <isonum.txt>
+
+===========================================
 User Interface for Resource Control feature
+===========================================
 
-Intel refers to this feature as Intel Resource Director Technology(Intel(R) RDT).
-AMD refers to this feature as AMD Platform Quality of Service(AMD QoS).
+:Copyright: |copy| 2016 Intel Corporation
+:Authors: - Fenghua Yu <fenghua.yu@intel.com>
+          - Tony Luck <tony.luck@intel.com>
+          - Vikas Shivappa <vikas.shivappa@intel.com>
 
-Copyright (C) 2016 Intel Corporation
 
-Fenghua Yu <fenghua.yu@intel.com>
-Tony Luck <tony.luck@intel.com>
-Vikas Shivappa <vikas.shivappa@intel.com>
+Intel refers to this feature as Intel Resource Director Technology(Intel(R) RDT).
+AMD refers to this feature as AMD Platform Quality of Service(AMD QoS).
 
 This feature is enabled by the CONFIG_X86_CPU_RESCTRL and the x86 /proc/cpuinfo
 flag bits:
-RDT (Resource Director Technology) Allocation - "rdt_a"
-CAT (Cache Allocation Technology) - "cat_l3", "cat_l2"
-CDP (Code and Data Prioritization ) - "cdp_l3", "cdp_l2"
-CQM (Cache QoS Monitoring) - "cqm_llc", "cqm_occup_llc"
-MBM (Memory Bandwidth Monitoring) - "cqm_mbm_total", "cqm_mbm_local"
-MBA (Memory Bandwidth Allocation) - "mba"
 
-To use the feature mount the file system:
+=============================================	================================
+RDT (Resource Director Technology) Allocation	"rdt_a"
+CAT (Cache Allocation Technology)		"cat_l3", "cat_l2"
+CDP (Code and Data Prioritization)		"cdp_l3", "cdp_l2"
+CQM (Cache QoS Monitoring)			"cqm_llc", "cqm_occup_llc"
+MBM (Memory Bandwidth Monitoring)		"cqm_mbm_total", "cqm_mbm_local"
+MBA (Memory Bandwidth Allocation)		"mba"
+=============================================	================================
+
+To use the feature mount the file system::
 
  # mount -t resctrl resctrl [-o cdp[,cdpl2][,mba_MBps]] /sys/fs/resctrl
 
 mount options are:
 
-"cdp": Enable code/data prioritization in L3 cache allocations.
-"cdpl2": Enable code/data prioritization in L2 cache allocations.
-"mba_MBps": Enable the MBA Software Controller(mba_sc) to specify MBA
- bandwidth in MBps
+"cdp":
+	Enable code/data prioritization in L3 cache allocations.
+"cdpl2":
+	Enable code/data prioritization in L2 cache allocations.
+"mba_MBps":
+	Enable the MBA Software Controller(mba_sc) to specify MBA
+	bandwidth in MBps
 
 L2 and L3 CDP are controlled seperately.
 
@@ -44,7 +55,7 @@ For more details on the behavior of the interface during monitoring
 and allocation, see the "Resource alloc and monitor groups" section.
 
 Info directory
---------------
+==============
 
 The 'info' directory contains information about the enabled
 resources. Each resource has its own subdirectory. The subdirectory
@@ -56,77 +67,93 @@ allocation:
 Cache resource(L3/L2)  subdirectory contains the following files
 related to allocation:
 
-"num_closids":  	The number of CLOSIDs which are valid for this
-			resource. The kernel uses the smallest number of
-			CLOSIDs of all enabled resources as limit.
-
-"cbm_mask":     	The bitmask which is valid for this resource.
-			This mask is equivalent to 100%.
-
-"min_cbm_bits": 	The minimum number of consecutive bits which
-			must be set when writing a mask.
-
-"shareable_bits":	Bitmask of shareable resource with other executing
-			entities (e.g. I/O). User can use this when
-			setting up exclusive cache partitions. Note that
-			some platforms support devices that have their
-			own settings for cache use which can over-ride
-			these bits.
-"bit_usage":		Annotated capacity bitmasks showing how all
-			instances of the resource are used. The legend is:
-			"0" - Corresponding region is unused. When the system's
+"num_closids":
+		The number of CLOSIDs which are valid for this
+		resource. The kernel uses the smallest number of
+		CLOSIDs of all enabled resources as limit.
+"cbm_mask":
+		The bitmask which is valid for this resource.
+		This mask is equivalent to 100%.
+"min_cbm_bits":
+		The minimum number of consecutive bits which
+		must be set when writing a mask.
+
+"shareable_bits":
+		Bitmask of shareable resource with other executing
+		entities (e.g. I/O). User can use this when
+		setting up exclusive cache partitions. Note that
+		some platforms support devices that have their
+		own settings for cache use which can over-ride
+		these bits.
+"bit_usage":
+		Annotated capacity bitmasks showing how all
+		instances of the resource are used. The legend is:
+
+			"0":
+			      Corresponding region is unused. When the system's
 			      resources have been allocated and a "0" is found
 			      in "bit_usage" it is a sign that resources are
 			      wasted.
-			"H" - Corresponding region is used by hardware only
+
+			"H":
+			      Corresponding region is used by hardware only
 			      but available for software use. If a resource
 			      has bits set in "shareable_bits" but not all
 			      of these bits appear in the resource groups'
 			      schematas then the bits appearing in
 			      "shareable_bits" but no resource group will
 			      be marked as "H".
-			"X" - Corresponding region is available for sharing and
+			"X":
+			      Corresponding region is available for sharing and
 			      used by hardware and software. These are the
 			      bits that appear in "shareable_bits" as
 			      well as a resource group's allocation.
-			"S" - Corresponding region is used by software
+			"S":
+			      Corresponding region is used by software
 			      and available for sharing.
-			"E" - Corresponding region is used exclusively by
+			"E":
+			      Corresponding region is used exclusively by
 			      one resource group. No sharing allowed.
-			"P" - Corresponding region is pseudo-locked. No
+			"P":
+			      Corresponding region is pseudo-locked. No
 			      sharing allowed.
 
 Memory bandwitdh(MB) subdirectory contains the following files
 with respect to allocation:
 
-"min_bandwidth":	The minimum memory bandwidth percentage which
-			user can request.
+"min_bandwidth":
+		The minimum memory bandwidth percentage which
+		user can request.
 
-"bandwidth_gran":	The granularity in which the memory bandwidth
-			percentage is allocated. The allocated
-			b/w percentage is rounded off to the next
-			control step available on the hardware. The
-			available bandwidth control steps are:
-			min_bandwidth + N * bandwidth_gran.
+"bandwidth_gran":
+		The granularity in which the memory bandwidth
+		percentage is allocated. The allocated
+		b/w percentage is rounded off to the next
+		control step available on the hardware. The
+		available bandwidth control steps are:
+		min_bandwidth + N * bandwidth_gran.
 
-"delay_linear": 	Indicates if the delay scale is linear or
-			non-linear. This field is purely informational
-			only.
+"delay_linear":
+		Indicates if the delay scale is linear or
+		non-linear. This field is purely informational
+		only.
 
 If RDT monitoring is available there will be an "L3_MON" directory
 with the following files:
 
-"num_rmids":		The number of RMIDs available. This is the
-			upper bound for how many "CTRL_MON" + "MON"
-			groups can be created.
+"num_rmids":
+		The number of RMIDs available. This is the
+		upper bound for how many "CTRL_MON" + "MON"
+		groups can be created.
 
-"mon_features":	Lists the monitoring events if
-			monitoring is enabled for the resource.
+"mon_features":
+		Lists the monitoring events if
+		monitoring is enabled for the resource.
 
 "max_threshold_occupancy":
-			Read/write file provides the largest value (in
-			bytes) at which a previously used LLC_occupancy
-			counter can be considered for re-use.
+		Read/write file provides the largest value (in
+		bytes) at which a previously used LLC_occupancy
+		counter can be considered for re-use.
 
 Finally, in the top level of the "info" directory there is a file
 named "last_cmd_status". This is reset with every "command" issued
@@ -134,6 +161,7 @@ via the file system (making new directories or writing to any of the
 control files). If the command was successful, it will read as "ok".
 If the command failed, it will provide more information that can be
 conveyed in the error returns from file operations. E.g.
+::
 
 	# echo L3:0=f7 > schemata
 	bash: echo: write error: Invalid argument
@@ -141,7 +169,7 @@ conveyed in the error returns from file operations. E.g.
 	mask f7 has non-consecutive 1-bits
 
 Resource alloc and monitor groups
----------------------------------
+=================================
 
 Resource groups are represented as directories in the resctrl file
 system.  The default group is the root directory which, immediately
@@ -226,6 +254,7 @@ When monitoring is enabled all MON groups will also contain:
 
 Resource allocation rules
 -------------------------
+
 When a task is running the following rules define which resources are
 available to it:
 
@@ -252,7 +281,7 @@ Resource monitoring rules
 
 
 Notes on cache occupancy monitoring and control
------------------------------------------------
+===============================================
 When moving a task from one group to another you should remember that
 this only affects *new* cache allocations by the task. E.g. you may have
 a task in a monitor group showing 3 MB of cache occupancy. If you move
@@ -321,7 +350,7 @@ of the capacity of the cache. You could partition the cache into four
 equal parts with masks: 0x1f, 0x3e0, 0x7c00, 0xf8000.
 
 Memory bandwidth Allocation and monitoring
-------------------------------------------
+==========================================
 
 For Memory bandwidth resource, by default the user controls the resource
 by indicating the percentage of total memory bandwidth.
@@ -369,7 +398,7 @@ In order to mitigate this and make the interface more user friendly,
 resctrl added support for specifying the bandwidth in MBps as well.  The
 kernel underneath would use a software feedback mechanism or a "Software
 Controller(mba_sc)" which reads the actual bandwidth using MBM counters
-and adjust the memowy bandwidth percentages to ensure
+and adjust the memowy bandwidth percentages to ensure::
 
 	"actual bandwidth < user specified bandwidth".
 
@@ -380,14 +409,14 @@ sections.
 
 L3 schemata file details (code and data prioritization disabled)
 ----------------------------------------------------------------
-With CDP disabled the L3 schemata format is:
+With CDP disabled the L3 schemata format is::
 
 	L3:<cache_id0>=<cbm>;<cache_id1>=<cbm>;...
 
 L3 schemata file details (CDP enabled via mount option to resctrl)
 ------------------------------------------------------------------
 When CDP is enabled L3 control is split into two separate resources
-so you can specify independent masks for code and data like this:
+so you can specify independent masks for code and data like this::
 
 	L3data:<cache_id0>=<cbm>;<cache_id1>=<cbm>;...
 	L3code:<cache_id0>=<cbm>;<cache_id1>=<cbm>;...
@@ -395,7 +424,7 @@ so you can specify independent masks for code and data like this:
 L2 schemata file details
 ------------------------
 L2 cache does not support code and data prioritization, so the
-schemata format is always:
+schemata format is always::
 
 	L2:<cache_id0>=<cbm>;<cache_id1>=<cbm>;...
 
@@ -403,6 +432,7 @@ Memory bandwidth Allocation (default mode)
 ------------------------------------------
 
 Memory b/w domain is L3 cache.
+::
 
 	MB:<cache_id0>=bandwidth0;<cache_id1>=bandwidth1;...
 
@@ -410,6 +440,7 @@ Memory bandwidth Allocation specified in MBps
 ---------------------------------------------
 
 Memory bandwidth domain is L3 cache.
+::
 
 	MB:<cache_id0>=bw_MBps0;<cache_id1>=bw_MBps1;...
 
@@ -418,17 +449,18 @@ Reading/writing the schemata file
 Reading the schemata file will show the state of all resources
 on all domains. When writing you only need to specify those values
 which you wish to change.  E.g.
+::
 
-# cat schemata
-L3DATA:0=fffff;1=fffff;2=fffff;3=fffff
-L3CODE:0=fffff;1=fffff;2=fffff;3=fffff
-# echo "L3DATA:2=3c0;" > schemata
-# cat schemata
-L3DATA:0=fffff;1=fffff;2=3c0;3=fffff
-L3CODE:0=fffff;1=fffff;2=fffff;3=fffff
+  # cat schemata
+  L3DATA:0=fffff;1=fffff;2=fffff;3=fffff
+  L3CODE:0=fffff;1=fffff;2=fffff;3=fffff
+  # echo "L3DATA:2=3c0;" > schemata
+  # cat schemata
+  L3DATA:0=fffff;1=fffff;2=3c0;3=fffff
+  L3CODE:0=fffff;1=fffff;2=fffff;3=fffff
 
 Cache Pseudo-Locking
---------------------
+====================
 CAT enables a user to specify the amount of cache space that an
 application can fill. Cache pseudo-locking builds on the fact that a
 CPU can still read and write data pre-allocated outside its current
@@ -442,6 +474,7 @@ a region of memory with reduced average read latency.
 The creation of a cache pseudo-locked region is triggered by a request
 from the user to do so that is accompanied by a schemata of the region
 to be pseudo-locked. The cache pseudo-locked region is created as follows:
+
 - Create a CAT allocation CLOSNEW with a CBM matching the schemata
   from the user of the cache region that will contain the pseudo-locked
   memory. This region must not overlap with any current CAT allocation/CLOS
@@ -480,6 +513,7 @@ initial mmap() handling, there is no enforcement afterwards and the
 application self needs to ensure it remains affine to the correct cores.
 
 Pseudo-locking is accomplished in two stages:
+
 1) During the first stage the system administrator allocates a portion
    of cache that should be dedicated to pseudo-locking. At this time an
    equivalent portion of memory is allocated, loaded into allocated
@@ -506,7 +540,7 @@ by user space in order to obtain access to the pseudo-locked memory region.
 An example of cache pseudo-locked region creation and usage can be found below.
 
 Cache Pseudo-Locking Debugging Interface
----------------------------------------
+----------------------------------------
 The pseudo-locking debugging interface is enabled by default (if
 CONFIG_DEBUG_FS is enabled) and can be found in /sys/kernel/debug/resctrl.
 
@@ -514,6 +548,7 @@ There is no explicit way for the kernel to test if a provided memory
 location is present in the cache. The pseudo-locking debugging interface uses
 the tracing infrastructure to provide two ways to measure cache residency of
 the pseudo-locked region:
+
 1) Memory access latency using the pseudo_lock_mem_latency tracepoint. Data
    from these measurements are best visualized using a hist trigger (see
    example below). In this test the pseudo-locked region is traversed at
@@ -529,87 +564,97 @@ it in debugfs as /sys/kernel/debug/resctrl/<newdir>. A single
 write-only file, pseudo_lock_measure, is present in this directory. The
 measurement of the pseudo-locked region depends on the number written to this
 debugfs file:
-1 -  writing "1" to the pseudo_lock_measure file will trigger the latency
+
+1:
+     writing "1" to the pseudo_lock_measure file will trigger the latency
      measurement captured in the pseudo_lock_mem_latency tracepoint. See
      example below.
-2 -  writing "2" to the pseudo_lock_measure file will trigger the L2 cache
+2:
+     writing "2" to the pseudo_lock_measure file will trigger the L2 cache
      residency (cache hits and misses) measurement captured in the
      pseudo_lock_l2 tracepoint. See example below.
-3 -  writing "3" to the pseudo_lock_measure file will trigger the L3 cache
+3:
+     writing "3" to the pseudo_lock_measure file will trigger the L3 cache
      residency (cache hits and misses) measurement captured in the
      pseudo_lock_l3 tracepoint.
 
 All measurements are recorded with the tracing infrastructure. This requires
 the relevant tracepoints to be enabled before the measurement is triggered.
 
-Example of latency debugging interface:
+Example of latency debugging interface
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 In this example a pseudo-locked region named "newlock" was created. Here is
 how we can measure the latency in cycles of reading from this region and
 visualize this data with a histogram that is available if CONFIG_HIST_TRIGGERS
-is set:
-# :> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
-# echo 'hist:keys=latency' > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/resctrl/pseudo_lock_mem_latency/trigger
-# echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/resctrl/pseudo_lock_mem_latency/enable
-# echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/resctrl/newlock/pseudo_lock_measure
-# echo 0 > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/resctrl/pseudo_lock_mem_latency/enable
-# cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/resctrl/pseudo_lock_mem_latency/hist
-
-# event histogram
-#
-# trigger info: hist:keys=latency:vals=hitcount:sort=hitcount:size=2048 [active]
-#
-
-{ latency:        456 } hitcount:          1
-{ latency:         50 } hitcount:         83
-{ latency:         36 } hitcount:         96
-{ latency:         44 } hitcount:        174
-{ latency:         48 } hitcount:        195
-{ latency:         46 } hitcount:        262
-{ latency:         42 } hitcount:        693
-{ latency:         40 } hitcount:       3204
-{ latency:         38 } hitcount:       3484
-
-Totals:
-    Hits: 8192
-    Entries: 9
-   Dropped: 0
-
-Example of cache hits/misses debugging:
+is set::
+
+  # :> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
+  # echo 'hist:keys=latency' > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/resctrl/pseudo_lock_mem_latency/trigger
+  # echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/resctrl/pseudo_lock_mem_latency/enable
+  # echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/resctrl/newlock/pseudo_lock_measure
+  # echo 0 > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/resctrl/pseudo_lock_mem_latency/enable
+  # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/resctrl/pseudo_lock_mem_latency/hist
+
+  # event histogram
+  #
+  # trigger info: hist:keys=latency:vals=hitcount:sort=hitcount:size=2048 [active]
+  #
+
+  { latency:        456 } hitcount:          1
+  { latency:         50 } hitcount:         83
+  { latency:         36 } hitcount:         96
+  { latency:         44 } hitcount:        174
+  { latency:         48 } hitcount:        195
+  { latency:         46 } hitcount:        262
+  { latency:         42 } hitcount:        693
+  { latency:         40 } hitcount:       3204
+  { latency:         38 } hitcount:       3484
+
+  Totals:
+      Hits: 8192
+      Entries: 9
+    Dropped: 0
+
+Example of cache hits/misses debugging
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 In this example a pseudo-locked region named "newlock" was created on the L2
 cache of a platform. Here is how we can obtain details of the cache hits
 and misses using the platform's precision counters.
+::
 
-# :> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
-# echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/resctrl/pseudo_lock_l2/enable
-# echo 2 > /sys/kernel/debug/resctrl/newlock/pseudo_lock_measure
-# echo 0 > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/resctrl/pseudo_lock_l2/enable
-# cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
+  # :> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
+  # echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/resctrl/pseudo_lock_l2/enable
+  # echo 2 > /sys/kernel/debug/resctrl/newlock/pseudo_lock_measure
+  # echo 0 > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/resctrl/pseudo_lock_l2/enable
+  # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
 
-# tracer: nop
-#
-#                              _-----=> irqs-off
-#                             / _----=> need-resched
-#                            | / _---=> hardirq/softirq
-#                            || / _--=> preempt-depth
-#                            ||| /     delay
-#           TASK-PID   CPU#  ||||    TIMESTAMP  FUNCTION
-#              | |       |   ||||       |         |
- pseudo_lock_mea-1672  [002] ....  3132.860500: pseudo_lock_l2: hits=4097 miss=0
+  # tracer: nop
+  #
+  #                              _-----=> irqs-off
+  #                             / _----=> need-resched
+  #                            | / _---=> hardirq/softirq
+  #                            || / _--=> preempt-depth
+  #                            ||| /     delay
+  #           TASK-PID   CPU#  ||||    TIMESTAMP  FUNCTION
+  #              | |       |   ||||       |         |
+  pseudo_lock_mea-1672  [002] ....  3132.860500: pseudo_lock_l2: hits=4097 miss=0
 
 
-Examples for RDT allocation usage:
+Examples for RDT allocation usage
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+1) Example 1
 
-Example 1
----------
 On a two socket machine (one L3 cache per socket) with just four bits
 for cache bit masks, minimum b/w of 10% with a memory bandwidth
-granularity of 10%
+granularity of 10%.
+::
 
-# mount -t resctrl resctrl /sys/fs/resctrl
-# cd /sys/fs/resctrl
-# mkdir p0 p1
-# echo "L3:0=3;1=c\nMB:0=50;1=50" > /sys/fs/resctrl/p0/schemata
-# echo "L3:0=3;1=3\nMB:0=50;1=50" > /sys/fs/resctrl/p1/schemata
+  # mount -t resctrl resctrl /sys/fs/resctrl
+  # cd /sys/fs/resctrl
+  # mkdir p0 p1
+  # echo "L3:0=3;1=c\nMB:0=50;1=50" > /sys/fs/resctrl/p0/schemata
+  # echo "L3:0=3;1=3\nMB:0=50;1=50" > /sys/fs/resctrl/p1/schemata
 
 The default resource group is unmodified, so we have access to all parts
 of all caches (its schemata file reads "L3:0=f;1=f").
@@ -628,100 +673,106 @@ the b/w accordingly.
 
 If the MBA is specified in MB(megabytes) then user can enter the max b/w in MB
 rather than the percentage values.
+::
 
-# echo "L3:0=3;1=c\nMB:0=1024;1=500" > /sys/fs/resctrl/p0/schemata
-# echo "L3:0=3;1=3\nMB:0=1024;1=500" > /sys/fs/resctrl/p1/schemata
+  # echo "L3:0=3;1=c\nMB:0=1024;1=500" > /sys/fs/resctrl/p0/schemata
+  # echo "L3:0=3;1=3\nMB:0=1024;1=500" > /sys/fs/resctrl/p1/schemata
 
 In the above example the tasks in "p1" and "p0" on socket 0 would use a max b/w
 of 1024MB where as on socket 1 they would use 500MB.
 
-Example 2
----------
+2) Example 2
+
 Again two sockets, but this time with a more realistic 20-bit mask.
 
 Two real time tasks pid=1234 running on processor 0 and pid=5678 running on
 processor 1 on socket 0 on a 2-socket and dual core machine. To avoid noisy
 neighbors, each of the two real-time tasks exclusively occupies one quarter
 of L3 cache on socket 0.
+::
 
-# mount -t resctrl resctrl /sys/fs/resctrl
-# cd /sys/fs/resctrl
+  # mount -t resctrl resctrl /sys/fs/resctrl
+  # cd /sys/fs/resctrl
 
 First we reset the schemata for the default group so that the "upper"
 50% of the L3 cache on socket 0 and 50% of memory b/w cannot be used by
-ordinary tasks:
+ordinary tasks::
 
-# echo "L3:0=3ff;1=fffff\nMB:0=50;1=100" > schemata
+  # echo "L3:0=3ff;1=fffff\nMB:0=50;1=100" > schemata
 
 Next we make a resource group for our first real time task and give
 it access to the "top" 25% of the cache on socket 0.
+::
 
-# mkdir p0
-# echo "L3:0=f8000;1=fffff" > p0/schemata
+  # mkdir p0
+  # echo "L3:0=f8000;1=fffff" > p0/schemata
 
 Finally we move our first real time task into this resource group. We
 also use taskset(1) to ensure the task always runs on a dedicated CPU
 on socket 0. Most uses of resource groups will also constrain which
 processors tasks run on.
+::
 
-# echo 1234 > p0/tasks
-# taskset -cp 1 1234
+  # echo 1234 > p0/tasks
+  # taskset -cp 1 1234
 
-Ditto for the second real time task (with the remaining 25% of cache):
+Ditto for the second real time task (with the remaining 25% of cache)::
 
-# mkdir p1
-# echo "L3:0=7c00;1=fffff" > p1/schemata
-# echo 5678 > p1/tasks
-# taskset -cp 2 5678
+  # mkdir p1
+  # echo "L3:0=7c00;1=fffff" > p1/schemata
+  # echo 5678 > p1/tasks
+  # taskset -cp 2 5678
 
 For the same 2 socket system with memory b/w resource and CAT L3 the
 schemata would look like(Assume min_bandwidth 10 and bandwidth_gran is
 10):
 
-For our first real time task this would request 20% memory b/w on socket
-0.
+For our first real time task this would request 20% memory b/w on socket 0.
+::
 
-# echo -e "L3:0=f8000;1=fffff\nMB:0=20;1=100" > p0/schemata
+  # echo -e "L3:0=f8000;1=fffff\nMB:0=20;1=100" > p0/schemata
 
 For our second real time task this would request an other 20% memory b/w
 on socket 0.
+::
 
-# echo -e "L3:0=f8000;1=fffff\nMB:0=20;1=100" > p0/schemata
+  # echo -e "L3:0=f8000;1=fffff\nMB:0=20;1=100" > p0/schemata
 
-Example 3
----------
+3) Example 3
 
 A single socket system which has real-time tasks running on core 4-7 and
 non real-time workload assigned to core 0-3. The real-time tasks share text
 and data, so a per task association is not required and due to interaction
 with the kernel it's desired that the kernel on these cores shares L3 with
 the tasks.
+::
 
-# mount -t resctrl resctrl /sys/fs/resctrl
-# cd /sys/fs/resctrl
+  # mount -t resctrl resctrl /sys/fs/resctrl
+  # cd /sys/fs/resctrl
 
 First we reset the schemata for the default group so that the "upper"
 50% of the L3 cache on socket 0, and 50% of memory bandwidth on socket 0
-cannot be used by ordinary tasks:
+cannot be used by ordinary tasks::
 
-# echo "L3:0=3ff\nMB:0=50" > schemata
+  # echo "L3:0=3ff\nMB:0=50" > schemata
 
 Next we make a resource group for our real time cores and give it access
 to the "top" 50% of the cache on socket 0 and 50% of memory bandwidth on
 socket 0.
+::
 
-# mkdir p0
-# echo "L3:0=ffc00\nMB:0=50" > p0/schemata
+  # mkdir p0
+  # echo "L3:0=ffc00\nMB:0=50" > p0/schemata
 
 Finally we move core 4-7 over to the new group and make sure that the
 kernel and the tasks running there get 50% of the cache. They should
 also get 50% of memory bandwidth assuming that the cores 4-7 are SMT
 siblings and only the real time threads are scheduled on the cores 4-7.
+::
 
-# echo F0 > p0/cpus
+  # echo F0 > p0/cpus
 
-Example 4
----------
+4) Example 4
 
 The resource groups in previous examples were all in the default "shareable"
 mode allowing sharing of their cache allocations. If one resource group
@@ -732,157 +783,168 @@ In this example a new exclusive resource group will be created on a L2 CAT
 system with two L2 cache instances that can be configured with an 8-bit
 capacity bitmask. The new exclusive resource group will be configured to use
 25% of each cache instance.
+::
 
-# mount -t resctrl resctrl /sys/fs/resctrl/
-# cd /sys/fs/resctrl
+  # mount -t resctrl resctrl /sys/fs/resctrl/
+  # cd /sys/fs/resctrl
 
 First, we observe that the default group is configured to allocate to all L2
-cache:
+cache::
 
-# cat schemata
-L2:0=ff;1=ff
+  # cat schemata
+  L2:0=ff;1=ff
 
 We could attempt to create the new resource group at this point, but it will
-fail because of the overlap with the schemata of the default group:
-# mkdir p0
-# echo 'L2:0=0x3;1=0x3' > p0/schemata
-# cat p0/mode
-shareable
-# echo exclusive > p0/mode
--sh: echo: write error: Invalid argument
-# cat info/last_cmd_status
-schemata overlaps
+fail because of the overlap with the schemata of the default group::
+
+  # mkdir p0
+  # echo 'L2:0=0x3;1=0x3' > p0/schemata
+  # cat p0/mode
+  shareable
+  # echo exclusive > p0/mode
+  -sh: echo: write error: Invalid argument
+  # cat info/last_cmd_status
+  schemata overlaps
 
 To ensure that there is no overlap with another resource group the default
 resource group's schemata has to change, making it possible for the new
 resource group to become exclusive.
-# echo 'L2:0=0xfc;1=0xfc' > schemata
-# echo exclusive > p0/mode
-# grep . p0/*
-p0/cpus:0
-p0/mode:exclusive
-p0/schemata:L2:0=03;1=03
-p0/size:L2:0=262144;1=262144
+::
+
+  # echo 'L2:0=0xfc;1=0xfc' > schemata
+  # echo exclusive > p0/mode
+  # grep . p0/*
+  p0/cpus:0
+  p0/mode:exclusive
+  p0/schemata:L2:0=03;1=03
+  p0/size:L2:0=262144;1=262144
 
 A new resource group will on creation not overlap with an exclusive resource
-group:
-# mkdir p1
-# grep . p1/*
-p1/cpus:0
-p1/mode:shareable
-p1/schemata:L2:0=fc;1=fc
-p1/size:L2:0=786432;1=786432
-
-The bit_usage will reflect how the cache is used:
-# cat info/L2/bit_usage
-0=SSSSSSEE;1=SSSSSSEE
-
-A resource group cannot be forced to overlap with an exclusive resource group:
-# echo 'L2:0=0x1;1=0x1' > p1/schemata
--sh: echo: write error: Invalid argument
-# cat info/last_cmd_status
-overlaps with exclusive group
+group::
+
+  # mkdir p1
+  # grep . p1/*
+  p1/cpus:0
+  p1/mode:shareable
+  p1/schemata:L2:0=fc;1=fc
+  p1/size:L2:0=786432;1=786432
+
+The bit_usage will reflect how the cache is used::
+
+  # cat info/L2/bit_usage
+  0=SSSSSSEE;1=SSSSSSEE
+
+A resource group cannot be forced to overlap with an exclusive resource group::
+
+  # echo 'L2:0=0x1;1=0x1' > p1/schemata
+  -sh: echo: write error: Invalid argument
+  # cat info/last_cmd_status
+  overlaps with exclusive group
 
 Example of Cache Pseudo-Locking
--------------------------------
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 Lock portion of L2 cache from cache id 1 using CBM 0x3. Pseudo-locked
 region is exposed at /dev/pseudo_lock/newlock that can be provided to
 application for argument to mmap().
+::
 
-# mount -t resctrl resctrl /sys/fs/resctrl/
-# cd /sys/fs/resctrl
+  # mount -t resctrl resctrl /sys/fs/resctrl/
+  # cd /sys/fs/resctrl
 
 Ensure that there are bits available that can be pseudo-locked, since only
 unused bits can be pseudo-locked the bits to be pseudo-locked needs to be
-removed from the default resource group's schemata:
-# cat info/L2/bit_usage
-0=SSSSSSSS;1=SSSSSSSS
-# echo 'L2:1=0xfc' > schemata
-# cat info/L2/bit_usage
-0=SSSSSSSS;1=SSSSSS00
+removed from the default resource group's schemata::
+
+  # cat info/L2/bit_usage
+  0=SSSSSSSS;1=SSSSSSSS
+  # echo 'L2:1=0xfc' > schemata
+  # cat info/L2/bit_usage
+  0=SSSSSSSS;1=SSSSSS00
 
 Create a new resource group that will be associated with the pseudo-locked
 region, indicate that it will be used for a pseudo-locked region, and
-configure the requested pseudo-locked region capacity bitmask:
+configure the requested pseudo-locked region capacity bitmask::
 
-# mkdir newlock
-# echo pseudo-locksetup > newlock/mode
-# echo 'L2:1=0x3' > newlock/schemata
+  # mkdir newlock
+  # echo pseudo-locksetup > newlock/mode
+  # echo 'L2:1=0x3' > newlock/schemata
 
 On success the resource group's mode will change to pseudo-locked, the
 bit_usage will reflect the pseudo-locked region, and the character device
-exposing the pseudo-locked region will exist:
-
-# cat newlock/mode
-pseudo-locked
-# cat info/L2/bit_usage
-0=SSSSSSSS;1=SSSSSSPP
-# ls -l /dev/pseudo_lock/newlock
-crw------- 1 root root 243, 0 Apr  3 05:01 /dev/pseudo_lock/newlock
-
-/*
- * Example code to access one page of pseudo-locked cache region
- * from user space.
- */
-#define _GNU_SOURCE
-#include <fcntl.h>
-#include <sched.h>
-#include <stdio.h>
-#include <stdlib.h>
-#include <unistd.h>
-#include <sys/mman.h>
-
-/*
- * It is required that the application runs with affinity to only
- * cores associated with the pseudo-locked region. Here the cpu
- * is hardcoded for convenience of example.
- */
-static int cpuid = 2;
-
-int main(int argc, char *argv[])
-{
-	cpu_set_t cpuset;
-	long page_size;
-	void *mapping;
-	int dev_fd;
-	int ret;
-
-	page_size = sysconf(_SC_PAGESIZE);
-
-	CPU_ZERO(&cpuset);
-	CPU_SET(cpuid, &cpuset);
-	ret = sched_setaffinity(0, sizeof(cpuset), &cpuset);
-	if (ret < 0) {
-		perror("sched_setaffinity");
-		exit(EXIT_FAILURE);
-	}
-
-	dev_fd = open("/dev/pseudo_lock/newlock", O_RDWR);
-	if (dev_fd < 0) {
-		perror("open");
-		exit(EXIT_FAILURE);
-	}
-
-	mapping = mmap(0, page_size, PROT_READ | PROT_WRITE, MAP_SHARED,
-		       dev_fd, 0);
-	if (mapping == MAP_FAILED) {
-		perror("mmap");
-		close(dev_fd);
-		exit(EXIT_FAILURE);
-	}
-
-	/* Application interacts with pseudo-locked memory @mapping */
-
-	ret = munmap(mapping, page_size);
-	if (ret < 0) {
-		perror("munmap");
-		close(dev_fd);
-		exit(EXIT_FAILURE);
-	}
-
-	close(dev_fd);
-	exit(EXIT_SUCCESS);
-}
+exposing the pseudo-locked region will exist::
+
+  # cat newlock/mode
+  pseudo-locked
+  # cat info/L2/bit_usage
+  0=SSSSSSSS;1=SSSSSSPP
+  # ls -l /dev/pseudo_lock/newlock
+  crw------- 1 root root 243, 0 Apr  3 05:01 /dev/pseudo_lock/newlock
+
+::
+
+  /*
+  * Example code to access one page of pseudo-locked cache region
+  * from user space.
+  */
+  #define _GNU_SOURCE
+  #include <fcntl.h>
+  #include <sched.h>
+  #include <stdio.h>
+  #include <stdlib.h>
+  #include <unistd.h>
+  #include <sys/mman.h>
+
+  /*
+  * It is required that the application runs with affinity to only
+  * cores associated with the pseudo-locked region. Here the cpu
+  * is hardcoded for convenience of example.
+  */
+  static int cpuid = 2;
+
+  int main(int argc, char *argv[])
+  {
+    cpu_set_t cpuset;
+    long page_size;
+    void *mapping;
+    int dev_fd;
+    int ret;
+
+    page_size = sysconf(_SC_PAGESIZE);
+
+    CPU_ZERO(&cpuset);
+    CPU_SET(cpuid, &cpuset);
+    ret = sched_setaffinity(0, sizeof(cpuset), &cpuset);
+    if (ret < 0) {
+      perror("sched_setaffinity");
+      exit(EXIT_FAILURE);
+    }
+
+    dev_fd = open("/dev/pseudo_lock/newlock", O_RDWR);
+    if (dev_fd < 0) {
+      perror("open");
+      exit(EXIT_FAILURE);
+    }
+
+    mapping = mmap(0, page_size, PROT_READ | PROT_WRITE, MAP_SHARED,
+            dev_fd, 0);
+    if (mapping == MAP_FAILED) {
+      perror("mmap");
+      close(dev_fd);
+      exit(EXIT_FAILURE);
+    }
+
+    /* Application interacts with pseudo-locked memory @mapping */
+
+    ret = munmap(mapping, page_size);
+    if (ret < 0) {
+      perror("munmap");
+      close(dev_fd);
+      exit(EXIT_FAILURE);
+    }
+
+    close(dev_fd);
+    exit(EXIT_SUCCESS);
+  }
 
 Locking between applications
 ----------------------------
@@ -921,86 +983,86 @@ Read lock:
  B) If success read the directory structure.
  C) funlock
 
-Example with bash:
-
-# Atomically read directory structure
-$ flock -s /sys/fs/resctrl/ find /sys/fs/resctrl
-
-# Read directory contents and create new subdirectory
-
-$ cat create-dir.sh
-find /sys/fs/resctrl/ > output.txt
-mask = function-of(output.txt)
-mkdir /sys/fs/resctrl/newres/
-echo mask > /sys/fs/resctrl/newres/schemata
-
-$ flock /sys/fs/resctrl/ ./create-dir.sh
-
-Example with C:
-
-/*
- * Example code do take advisory locks
- * before accessing resctrl filesystem
- */
-#include <sys/file.h>
-#include <stdlib.h>
-
-void resctrl_take_shared_lock(int fd)
-{
-	int ret;
-
-	/* take shared lock on resctrl filesystem */
-	ret = flock(fd, LOCK_SH);
-	if (ret) {
-		perror("flock");
-		exit(-1);
-	}
-}
-
-void resctrl_take_exclusive_lock(int fd)
-{
-	int ret;
-
-	/* release lock on resctrl filesystem */
-	ret = flock(fd, LOCK_EX);
-	if (ret) {
-		perror("flock");
-		exit(-1);
-	}
-}
-
-void resctrl_release_lock(int fd)
-{
-	int ret;
-
-	/* take shared lock on resctrl filesystem */
-	ret = flock(fd, LOCK_UN);
-	if (ret) {
-		perror("flock");
-		exit(-1);
-	}
-}
-
-void main(void)
-{
-	int fd, ret;
-
-	fd = open("/sys/fs/resctrl", O_DIRECTORY);
-	if (fd == -1) {
-		perror("open");
-		exit(-1);
-	}
-	resctrl_take_shared_lock(fd);
-	/* code to read directory contents */
-	resctrl_release_lock(fd);
-
-	resctrl_take_exclusive_lock(fd);
-	/* code to read and write directory contents */
-	resctrl_release_lock(fd);
-}
-
-Examples for RDT Monitoring along with allocation usage:
-
+Example with bash::
+
+  # Atomically read directory structure
+  $ flock -s /sys/fs/resctrl/ find /sys/fs/resctrl
+
+  # Read directory contents and create new subdirectory
+
+  $ cat create-dir.sh
+  find /sys/fs/resctrl/ > output.txt
+  mask = function-of(output.txt)
+  mkdir /sys/fs/resctrl/newres/
+  echo mask > /sys/fs/resctrl/newres/schemata
+
+  $ flock /sys/fs/resctrl/ ./create-dir.sh
+
+Example with C::
+
+  /*
+  * Example code do take advisory locks
+  * before accessing resctrl filesystem
+  */
+  #include <sys/file.h>
+  #include <stdlib.h>
+
+  void resctrl_take_shared_lock(int fd)
+  {
+    int ret;
+
+    /* take shared lock on resctrl filesystem */
+    ret = flock(fd, LOCK_SH);
+    if (ret) {
+      perror("flock");
+      exit(-1);
+    }
+  }
+
+  void resctrl_take_exclusive_lock(int fd)
+  {
+    int ret;
+
+    /* release lock on resctrl filesystem */
+    ret = flock(fd, LOCK_EX);
+    if (ret) {
+      perror("flock");
+      exit(-1);
+    }
+  }
+
+  void resctrl_release_lock(int fd)
+  {
+    int ret;
+
+    /* take shared lock on resctrl filesystem */
+    ret = flock(fd, LOCK_UN);
+    if (ret) {
+      perror("flock");
+      exit(-1);
+    }
+  }
+
+  void main(void)
+  {
+    int fd, ret;
+
+    fd = open("/sys/fs/resctrl", O_DIRECTORY);
+    if (fd == -1) {
+      perror("open");
+      exit(-1);
+    }
+    resctrl_take_shared_lock(fd);
+    /* code to read directory contents */
+    resctrl_release_lock(fd);
+
+    resctrl_take_exclusive_lock(fd);
+    /* code to read and write directory contents */
+    resctrl_release_lock(fd);
+  }
+
+Examples for RDT Monitoring along with allocation usage
+=======================================================
 Reading monitored data
 ----------------------
 Reading an event file (for ex: mon_data/mon_L3_00/llc_occupancy) would
@@ -1009,17 +1071,17 @@ group or CTRL_MON group.
 
 
 Example 1 (Monitor CTRL_MON group and subset of tasks in CTRL_MON group)
----------
+------------------------------------------------------------------------
 On a two socket machine (one L3 cache per socket) with just four bits
-for cache bit masks
+for cache bit masks::
 
-# mount -t resctrl resctrl /sys/fs/resctrl
-# cd /sys/fs/resctrl
-# mkdir p0 p1
-# echo "L3:0=3;1=c" > /sys/fs/resctrl/p0/schemata
-# echo "L3:0=3;1=3" > /sys/fs/resctrl/p1/schemata
-# echo 5678 > p1/tasks
-# echo 5679 > p1/tasks
+  # mount -t resctrl resctrl /sys/fs/resctrl
+  # cd /sys/fs/resctrl
+  # mkdir p0 p1
+  # echo "L3:0=3;1=c" > /sys/fs/resctrl/p0/schemata
+  # echo "L3:0=3;1=3" > /sys/fs/resctrl/p1/schemata
+  # echo 5678 > p1/tasks
+  # echo 5679 > p1/tasks
 
 The default resource group is unmodified, so we have access to all parts
 of all caches (its schemata file reads "L3:0=f;1=f").
@@ -1029,47 +1091,51 @@ Tasks that are under the control of group "p0" may only allocate from the
 Tasks in group "p1" use the "lower" 50% of cache on both sockets.
 
 Create monitor groups and assign a subset of tasks to each monitor group.
+::
 
-# cd /sys/fs/resctrl/p1/mon_groups
-# mkdir m11 m12
-# echo 5678 > m11/tasks
-# echo 5679 > m12/tasks
+  # cd /sys/fs/resctrl/p1/mon_groups
+  # mkdir m11 m12
+  # echo 5678 > m11/tasks
+  # echo 5679 > m12/tasks
 
 fetch data (data shown in bytes)
+::
 
-# cat m11/mon_data/mon_L3_00/llc_occupancy
-16234000
-# cat m11/mon_data/mon_L3_01/llc_occupancy
-14789000
-# cat m12/mon_data/mon_L3_00/llc_occupancy
-16789000
+  # cat m11/mon_data/mon_L3_00/llc_occupancy
+  16234000
+  # cat m11/mon_data/mon_L3_01/llc_occupancy
+  14789000
+  # cat m12/mon_data/mon_L3_00/llc_occupancy
+  16789000
 
 The parent ctrl_mon group shows the aggregated data.
+::
 
-# cat /sys/fs/resctrl/p1/mon_data/mon_l3_00/llc_occupancy
-31234000
+  # cat /sys/fs/resctrl/p1/mon_data/mon_l3_00/llc_occupancy
+  31234000
 
 Example 2 (Monitor a task from its creation)
----------
-On a two socket machine (one L3 cache per socket)
+--------------------------------------------
+On a two socket machine (one L3 cache per socket)::
 
-# mount -t resctrl resctrl /sys/fs/resctrl
-# cd /sys/fs/resctrl
-# mkdir p0 p1
+  # mount -t resctrl resctrl /sys/fs/resctrl
+  # cd /sys/fs/resctrl
+  # mkdir p0 p1
 
 An RMID is allocated to the group once its created and hence the <cmd>
 below is monitored from its creation.
+::
 
-# echo $$ > /sys/fs/resctrl/p1/tasks
-# <cmd>
+  # echo $$ > /sys/fs/resctrl/p1/tasks
+  # <cmd>
 
-Fetch the data
+Fetch the data::
 
-# cat /sys/fs/resctrl/p1/mon_data/mon_l3_00/llc_occupancy
-31789000
+  # cat /sys/fs/resctrl/p1/mon_data/mon_l3_00/llc_occupancy
+  31789000
 
 Example 3 (Monitor without CAT support or before creating CAT groups)
----------
+---------------------------------------------------------------------
 
 Assume a system like HSW has only CQM and no CAT support. In this case
 the resctrl will still mount but cannot create CTRL_MON directories.
@@ -1078,27 +1144,29 @@ able to monitor all tasks including kernel threads.
 
 This can also be used to profile jobs cache size footprint before being
 able to allocate them to different allocation groups.
+::
 
-# mount -t resctrl resctrl /sys/fs/resctrl
-# cd /sys/fs/resctrl
-# mkdir mon_groups/m01
-# mkdir mon_groups/m02
+  # mount -t resctrl resctrl /sys/fs/resctrl
+  # cd /sys/fs/resctrl
+  # mkdir mon_groups/m01
+  # mkdir mon_groups/m02
 
-# echo 3478 > /sys/fs/resctrl/mon_groups/m01/tasks
-# echo 2467 > /sys/fs/resctrl/mon_groups/m02/tasks
+  # echo 3478 > /sys/fs/resctrl/mon_groups/m01/tasks
+  # echo 2467 > /sys/fs/resctrl/mon_groups/m02/tasks
 
 Monitor the groups separately and also get per domain data. From the
 below its apparent that the tasks are mostly doing work on
 domain(socket) 0.
+::
 
-# cat /sys/fs/resctrl/mon_groups/m01/mon_L3_00/llc_occupancy
-31234000
-# cat /sys/fs/resctrl/mon_groups/m01/mon_L3_01/llc_occupancy
-34555
-# cat /sys/fs/resctrl/mon_groups/m02/mon_L3_00/llc_occupancy
-31234000
-# cat /sys/fs/resctrl/mon_groups/m02/mon_L3_01/llc_occupancy
-32789
+  # cat /sys/fs/resctrl/mon_groups/m01/mon_L3_00/llc_occupancy
+  31234000
+  # cat /sys/fs/resctrl/mon_groups/m01/mon_L3_01/llc_occupancy
+  34555
+  # cat /sys/fs/resctrl/mon_groups/m02/mon_L3_00/llc_occupancy
+  31234000
+  # cat /sys/fs/resctrl/mon_groups/m02/mon_L3_01/llc_occupancy
+  32789
 
 
 Example 4 (Monitor real time tasks)
@@ -1107,15 +1175,17 @@ Example 4 (Monitor real time tasks)
 A single socket system which has real time tasks running on cores 4-7
 and non real time tasks on other cpus. We want to monitor the cache
 occupancy of the real time threads on these cores.
+::
+
+  # mount -t resctrl resctrl /sys/fs/resctrl
+  # cd /sys/fs/resctrl
+  # mkdir p1
 
-# mount -t resctrl resctrl /sys/fs/resctrl
-# cd /sys/fs/resctrl
-# mkdir p1
+Move the cpus 4-7 over to p1::
 
-Move the cpus 4-7 over to p1
-# echo f0 > p1/cpus
+  # echo f0 > p1/cpus
 
-View the llc occupancy snapshot
+View the llc occupancy snapshot::
 
-# cat /sys/fs/resctrl/p1/mon_data/mon_L3_00/llc_occupancy
-11234000
+  # cat /sys/fs/resctrl/p1/mon_data/mon_L3_00/llc_occupancy
+  11234000
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/tlb.txt b/Documentation/x86/tlb.rst
index 6a0607b99ed8..82ec58ae63a8 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/tlb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/tlb.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,12 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=======
+The TLB
+=======
+
 When the kernel unmaps or modified the attributes of a range of
 memory, it has two choices:
+
  1. Flush the entire TLB with a two-instruction sequence.  This is
     a quick operation, but it causes collateral damage: TLB entries
     from areas other than the one we are trying to flush will be
@@ -10,6 +17,7 @@ memory, it has two choices:
     damage to other TLB entries.
 
 Which method to do depends on a few things:
+
  1. The size of the flush being performed.  A flush of the entire
     address space is obviously better performed by flushing the
     entire TLB than doing 2^48/PAGE_SIZE individual flushes.
@@ -33,7 +41,7 @@ well.  There is essentially no "right" point to choose.
 You may be doing too many individual invalidations if you see the
 invlpg instruction (or instructions _near_ it) show up high in
 profiles.  If you believe that individual invalidations being
-called too often, you can lower the tunable:
+called too often, you can lower the tunable::
 
 	/sys/kernel/debug/x86/tlb_single_page_flush_ceiling
 
@@ -43,7 +51,7 @@ Setting it to 1 is a very conservative setting and it should
 never need to be 0 under normal circumstances.
 
 Despite the fact that a single individual flush on x86 is
-guaranteed to flush a full 2MB [1], hugetlbfs always uses the full
+guaranteed to flush a full 2MB [1]_, hugetlbfs always uses the full
 flushes.  THP is treated exactly the same as normal memory.
 
 You might see invlpg inside of flush_tlb_mm_range() show up in
@@ -54,15 +62,15 @@ Essentially, you are balancing the cycles you spend doing invlpg
 with the cycles that you spend refilling the TLB later.
 
 You can measure how expensive TLB refills are by using
-performance counters and 'perf stat', like this:
+performance counters and 'perf stat', like this::
 
-perf stat -e
-	cpu/event=0x8,umask=0x84,name=dtlb_load_misses_walk_duration/,
-	cpu/event=0x8,umask=0x82,name=dtlb_load_misses_walk_completed/,
-	cpu/event=0x49,umask=0x4,name=dtlb_store_misses_walk_duration/,
-	cpu/event=0x49,umask=0x2,name=dtlb_store_misses_walk_completed/,
-	cpu/event=0x85,umask=0x4,name=itlb_misses_walk_duration/,
-	cpu/event=0x85,umask=0x2,name=itlb_misses_walk_completed/
+  perf stat -e
+    cpu/event=0x8,umask=0x84,name=dtlb_load_misses_walk_duration/,
+    cpu/event=0x8,umask=0x82,name=dtlb_load_misses_walk_completed/,
+    cpu/event=0x49,umask=0x4,name=dtlb_store_misses_walk_duration/,
+    cpu/event=0x49,umask=0x2,name=dtlb_store_misses_walk_completed/,
+    cpu/event=0x85,umask=0x4,name=itlb_misses_walk_duration/,
+    cpu/event=0x85,umask=0x2,name=itlb_misses_walk_completed/
 
 That works on an IvyBridge-era CPU (i5-3320M).  Different CPUs
 may have differently-named counters, but they should at least
@@ -70,6 +78,6 @@ be there in some form.  You can use pmu-tools 'ocperf list'
 (https://github.com/andikleen/pmu-tools) to find the right
 counters for a given CPU.
 
-1. A footnote in Intel's SDM "4.10.4.2 Recommended Invalidation"
+.. [1] A footnote in Intel's SDM "4.10.4.2 Recommended Invalidation"
    says: "One execution of INVLPG is sufficient even for a page
    with size greater than 4 KBytes."
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/topology.txt b/Documentation/x86/topology.rst
index 2953e3ec9a02..6e28dbe818ab 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/topology.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/topology.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,6 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+============
 x86 Topology
 ============
 
@@ -33,14 +36,14 @@ The topology of a system is described in the units of:
     - cores
     - threads
 
-* Package:
-
-  Packages contain a number of cores plus shared resources, e.g. DRAM
-  controller, shared caches etc.
+Package
+=======
+Packages contain a number of cores plus shared resources, e.g. DRAM
+controller, shared caches etc.
 
-  AMD nomenclature for package is 'Node'.
+AMD nomenclature for package is 'Node'.
 
-  Package-related topology information in the kernel:
+Package-related topology information in the kernel:
 
   - cpuinfo_x86.x86_max_cores:
 
@@ -51,7 +54,7 @@ The topology of a system is described in the units of:
     The physical ID of the package. This information is retrieved via CPUID
     and deduced from the APIC IDs of the cores in the package.
 
-  - cpuinfo_x86.logical_id:
+  - cpuinfo_x86.logical_proc_id:
 
     The logical ID of the package. As we do not trust BIOSes to enumerate the
     packages in a consistent way, we introduced the concept of logical package
@@ -66,40 +69,41 @@ The topology of a system is described in the units of:
   - cpu_llc_id:
 
     A per-CPU variable containing:
-    - On Intel, the first APIC ID of the list of CPUs sharing the Last Level
-    Cache
 
-    - On AMD, the Node ID or Core Complex ID containing the Last Level
-    Cache. In general, it is a number identifying an LLC uniquely on the
-    system.
+      - On Intel, the first APIC ID of the list of CPUs sharing the Last Level
+        Cache
 
-* Cores:
+      - On AMD, the Node ID or Core Complex ID containing the Last Level
+        Cache. In general, it is a number identifying an LLC uniquely on the
+        system.
 
-  A core consists of 1 or more threads. It does not matter whether the threads
-  are SMT- or CMT-type threads.
+Cores
+=====
+A core consists of 1 or more threads. It does not matter whether the threads
+are SMT- or CMT-type threads.
 
-  AMDs nomenclature for a CMT core is "Compute Unit". The kernel always uses
-  "core".
+AMDs nomenclature for a CMT core is "Compute Unit". The kernel always uses
+"core".
 
-  Core-related topology information in the kernel:
+Core-related topology information in the kernel:
 
   - smp_num_siblings:
 
     The number of threads in a core. The number of threads in a package can be
-    calculated by:
+    calculated by::
 
 	threads_per_package = cpuinfo_x86.x86_max_cores * smp_num_siblings
 
 
-* Threads:
+Threads
+=======
+A thread is a single scheduling unit. It's the equivalent to a logical Linux
+CPU.
 
-  A thread is a single scheduling unit. It's the equivalent to a logical Linux
-  CPU.
+AMDs nomenclature for CMT threads is "Compute Unit Core". The kernel always
+uses "thread".
 
-  AMDs nomenclature for CMT threads is "Compute Unit Core". The kernel always
-  uses "thread".
-
-  Thread-related topology information in the kernel:
+Thread-related topology information in the kernel:
 
   - topology_core_cpumask():
 
@@ -113,15 +117,15 @@ The topology of a system is described in the units of:
     The cpumask contains all online threads in the core to which a thread
     belongs.
 
-   - topology_logical_package_id():
+  - topology_logical_package_id():
 
     The logical package ID to which a thread belongs.
 
-   - topology_physical_package_id():
+  - topology_physical_package_id():
 
     The physical package ID to which a thread belongs.
 
-   - topology_core_id();
+  - topology_core_id();
 
     The ID of the core to which a thread belongs. It is also printed in /proc/cpuinfo
     "core_id."
@@ -129,41 +133,41 @@ The topology of a system is described in the units of:
 
 
 System topology examples
+========================
 
-Note:
-
-The alternative Linux CPU enumeration depends on how the BIOS enumerates the
-threads. Many BIOSes enumerate all threads 0 first and then all threads 1.
-That has the "advantage" that the logical Linux CPU numbers of threads 0 stay
-the same whether threads are enabled or not. That's merely an implementation
-detail and has no practical impact.
+.. note::
+  The alternative Linux CPU enumeration depends on how the BIOS enumerates the
+  threads. Many BIOSes enumerate all threads 0 first and then all threads 1.
+  That has the "advantage" that the logical Linux CPU numbers of threads 0 stay
+  the same whether threads are enabled or not. That's merely an implementation
+  detail and has no practical impact.
 
-1) Single Package, Single Core
+1) Single Package, Single Core::
 
    [package 0] -> [core 0] -> [thread 0] -> Linux CPU 0
 
 2) Single Package, Dual Core
 
-   a) One thread per core
+   a) One thread per core::
 
 	[package 0] -> [core 0] -> [thread 0] -> Linux CPU 0
 		    -> [core 1] -> [thread 0] -> Linux CPU 1
 
-   b) Two threads per core
+   b) Two threads per core::
 
 	[package 0] -> [core 0] -> [thread 0] -> Linux CPU 0
 				-> [thread 1] -> Linux CPU 1
 		    -> [core 1] -> [thread 0] -> Linux CPU 2
 				-> [thread 1] -> Linux CPU 3
 
-      Alternative enumeration:
+      Alternative enumeration::
 
 	[package 0] -> [core 0] -> [thread 0] -> Linux CPU 0
 				-> [thread 1] -> Linux CPU 2
 		    -> [core 1] -> [thread 0] -> Linux CPU 1
 				-> [thread 1] -> Linux CPU 3
 
-      AMD nomenclature for CMT systems:
+      AMD nomenclature for CMT systems::
 
 	[node 0] -> [Compute Unit 0] -> [Compute Unit Core 0] -> Linux CPU 0
 				     -> [Compute Unit Core 1] -> Linux CPU 1
@@ -172,7 +176,7 @@ detail and has no practical impact.
 
 4) Dual Package, Dual Core
 
-   a) One thread per core
+   a) One thread per core::
 
 	[package 0] -> [core 0] -> [thread 0] -> Linux CPU 0
 		    -> [core 1] -> [thread 0] -> Linux CPU 1
@@ -180,7 +184,7 @@ detail and has no practical impact.
 	[package 1] -> [core 0] -> [thread 0] -> Linux CPU 2
 		    -> [core 1] -> [thread 0] -> Linux CPU 3
 
-   b) Two threads per core
+   b) Two threads per core::
 
 	[package 0] -> [core 0] -> [thread 0] -> Linux CPU 0
 				-> [thread 1] -> Linux CPU 1
@@ -192,7 +196,7 @@ detail and has no practical impact.
 		    -> [core 1] -> [thread 0] -> Linux CPU 6
 				-> [thread 1] -> Linux CPU 7
 
-      Alternative enumeration:
+      Alternative enumeration::
 
 	[package 0] -> [core 0] -> [thread 0] -> Linux CPU 0
 				-> [thread 1] -> Linux CPU 4
@@ -204,7 +208,7 @@ detail and has no practical impact.
 		    -> [core 1] -> [thread 0] -> Linux CPU 3
 				-> [thread 1] -> Linux CPU 7
 
-      AMD nomenclature for CMT systems:
+      AMD nomenclature for CMT systems::
 
 	[node 0] -> [Compute Unit 0] -> [Compute Unit Core 0] -> Linux CPU 0
 				     -> [Compute Unit Core 1] -> Linux CPU 1
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/usb-legacy-support.txt b/Documentation/x86/usb-legacy-support.rst
index 1894cdfc69d9..e01c08b7c981 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/usb-legacy-support.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/usb-legacy-support.rst
@@ -1,7 +1,11 @@
+
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+==================
 USB Legacy support
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+==================
 
-Vojtech Pavlik <vojtech@suse.cz>, January 2004
+:Author: Vojtech Pavlik <vojtech@suse.cz>, January 2004
 
 
 Also known as "USB Keyboard" or "USB Mouse support" in the BIOS Setup is a
@@ -27,18 +31,20 @@ It has several drawbacks, though:
 
 Solutions:
 
-Problem 1) can be solved by loading the USB drivers prior to loading the
-PS/2 mouse driver. Since the PS/2 mouse driver is in 2.6 compiled into
-the kernel unconditionally, this means the USB drivers need to be
-compiled-in, too.
-
-Problem 2) can currently only be solved by either disabling HIGHMEM64G
-in the kernel config or USB Legacy support in the BIOS. A BIOS update
-could help, but so far no such update exists.
-
-Problem 3) is usually fixed by a BIOS update. Check the board
-manufacturers web site. If an update is not available, disable USB
-Legacy support in the BIOS. If this alone doesn't help, try also adding
-idle=poll on the kernel command line. The BIOS may be entering the SMM
-on the HLT instruction as well.
-
+Problem 1)
+  can be solved by loading the USB drivers prior to loading the
+  PS/2 mouse driver. Since the PS/2 mouse driver is in 2.6 compiled into
+  the kernel unconditionally, this means the USB drivers need to be
+  compiled-in, too.
+
+Problem 2)
+  can currently only be solved by either disabling HIGHMEM64G
+  in the kernel config or USB Legacy support in the BIOS. A BIOS update
+  could help, but so far no such update exists.
+
+Problem 3)
+  is usually fixed by a BIOS update. Check the board
+  manufacturers web site. If an update is not available, disable USB
+  Legacy support in the BIOS. If this alone doesn't help, try also adding
+  idle=poll on the kernel command line. The BIOS may be entering the SMM
+  on the HLT instruction as well.
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/5level-paging.txt b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/5level-paging.rst
index 2432a5ef86d9..ab88a4514163 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/5level-paging.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/5level-paging.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,11 @@
-== Overview ==
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
 
+==============
+5-level paging
+==============
+
+Overview
+========
 Original x86-64 was limited by 4-level paing to 256 TiB of virtual address
 space and 64 TiB of physical address space. We are already bumping into
 this limit: some vendors offers servers with 64 TiB of memory today.
@@ -16,16 +22,17 @@ QEMU 2.9 and later support 5-level paging.
 Virtual memory layout for 5-level paging is described in
 Documentation/x86/x86_64/mm.txt
 
-== Enabling 5-level paging ==
 
+Enabling 5-level paging
+=======================
 CONFIG_X86_5LEVEL=y enables the feature.
 
 Kernel with CONFIG_X86_5LEVEL=y still able to boot on 4-level hardware.
 In this case additional page table level -- p4d -- will be folded at
 runtime.
 
-== User-space and large virtual address space ==
-
+User-space and large virtual address space
+==========================================
 On x86, 5-level paging enables 56-bit userspace virtual address space.
 Not all user space is ready to handle wide addresses. It's known that
 at least some JIT compilers use higher bits in pointers to encode their
@@ -58,4 +65,3 @@ One important case we need to handle here is interaction with MPX.
 MPX (without MAWA extension) cannot handle addresses above 47-bit, so we
 need to make sure that MPX cannot be enabled we already have VMA above
 the boundary and forbid creating such VMAs once MPX is enabled.
-
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.rst b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2f69836b8445
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,335 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+===========================
+AMD64 Specific Boot Options
+===========================
+
+There are many others (usually documented in driver documentation), but
+only the AMD64 specific ones are listed here.
+
+Machine check
+=============
+Please see Documentation/x86/x86_64/machinecheck for sysfs runtime tunables.
+
+   mce=off
+		Disable machine check
+   mce=no_cmci
+		Disable CMCI(Corrected Machine Check Interrupt) that
+		Intel processor supports.  Usually this disablement is
+		not recommended, but it might be handy if your hardware
+		is misbehaving.
+		Note that you'll get more problems without CMCI than with
+		due to the shared banks, i.e. you might get duplicated
+		error logs.
+   mce=dont_log_ce
+		Don't make logs for corrected errors.  All events reported
+		as corrected are silently cleared by OS.
+		This option will be useful if you have no interest in any
+		of corrected errors.
+   mce=ignore_ce
+		Disable features for corrected errors, e.g. polling timer
+		and CMCI.  All events reported as corrected are not cleared
+		by OS and remained in its error banks.
+		Usually this disablement is not recommended, however if
+		there is an agent checking/clearing corrected errors
+		(e.g. BIOS or hardware monitoring applications), conflicting
+		with OS's error handling, and you cannot deactivate the agent,
+		then this option will be a help.
+   mce=no_lmce
+		Do not opt-in to Local MCE delivery. Use legacy method
+		to broadcast MCEs.
+   mce=bootlog
+		Enable logging of machine checks left over from booting.
+		Disabled by default on AMD Fam10h and older because some BIOS
+		leave bogus ones.
+		If your BIOS doesn't do that it's a good idea to enable though
+		to make sure you log even machine check events that result
+		in a reboot. On Intel systems it is enabled by default.
+   mce=nobootlog
+		Disable boot machine check logging.
+   mce=tolerancelevel[,monarchtimeout] (number,number)
+		tolerance levels:
+		0: always panic on uncorrected errors, log corrected errors
+		1: panic or SIGBUS on uncorrected errors, log corrected errors
+		2: SIGBUS or log uncorrected errors, log corrected errors
+		3: never panic or SIGBUS, log all errors (for testing only)
+		Default is 1
+		Can be also set using sysfs which is preferable.
+		monarchtimeout:
+		Sets the time in us to wait for other CPUs on machine checks. 0
+		to disable.
+   mce=bios_cmci_threshold
+		Don't overwrite the bios-set CMCI threshold. This boot option
+		prevents Linux from overwriting the CMCI threshold set by the
+		bios. Without this option, Linux always sets the CMCI
+		threshold to 1. Enabling this may make memory predictive failure
+		analysis less effective if the bios sets thresholds for memory
+		errors since we will not see details for all errors.
+   mce=recovery
+		Force-enable recoverable machine check code paths
+
+   nomce (for compatibility with i386)
+		same as mce=off
+
+   Everything else is in sysfs now.
+
+APICs
+=====
+
+   apic
+	Use IO-APIC. Default
+
+   noapic
+	Don't use the IO-APIC.
+
+   disableapic
+	Don't use the local APIC
+
+   nolapic
+     Don't use the local APIC (alias for i386 compatibility)
+
+   pirq=...
+	See Documentation/x86/i386/IO-APIC.txt
+
+   noapictimer
+	Don't set up the APIC timer
+
+   no_timer_check
+	Don't check the IO-APIC timer. This can work around
+	problems with incorrect timer initialization on some boards.
+
+   apicpmtimer
+	Do APIC timer calibration using the pmtimer. Implies
+	apicmaintimer. Useful when your PIT timer is totally broken.
+
+Timing
+======
+
+  notsc
+    Deprecated, use tsc=unstable instead.
+
+  nohpet
+    Don't use the HPET timer.
+
+Idle loop
+=========
+
+  idle=poll
+    Don't do power saving in the idle loop using HLT, but poll for rescheduling
+    event. This will make the CPUs eat a lot more power, but may be useful
+    to get slightly better performance in multiprocessor benchmarks. It also
+    makes some profiling using performance counters more accurate.
+    Please note that on systems with MONITOR/MWAIT support (like Intel EM64T
+    CPUs) this option has no performance advantage over the normal idle loop.
+    It may also interact badly with hyperthreading.
+
+Rebooting
+=========
+
+   reboot=b[ios] | t[riple] | k[bd] | a[cpi] | e[fi] [, [w]arm | [c]old]
+      bios
+        Use the CPU reboot vector for warm reset
+      warm
+        Don't set the cold reboot flag
+      cold
+        Set the cold reboot flag
+      triple
+        Force a triple fault (init)
+      kbd
+        Use the keyboard controller. cold reset (default)
+      acpi
+        Use the ACPI RESET_REG in the FADT. If ACPI is not configured or
+        the ACPI reset does not work, the reboot path attempts the reset
+        using the keyboard controller.
+      efi
+        Use efi reset_system runtime service. If EFI is not configured or
+        the EFI reset does not work, the reboot path attempts the reset using
+        the keyboard controller.
+
+   Using warm reset will be much faster especially on big memory
+   systems because the BIOS will not go through the memory check.
+   Disadvantage is that not all hardware will be completely reinitialized
+   on reboot so there may be boot problems on some systems.
+
+   reboot=force
+     Don't stop other CPUs on reboot. This can make reboot more reliable
+     in some cases.
+
+Non Executable Mappings
+=======================
+
+  noexec=on|off
+    on
+      Enable(default)
+    off
+      Disable
+
+NUMA
+====
+
+  numa=off
+    Only set up a single NUMA node spanning all memory.
+
+  numa=noacpi
+    Don't parse the SRAT table for NUMA setup
+
+  numa=fake=<size>[MG]
+    If given as a memory unit, fills all system RAM with nodes of
+    size interleaved over physical nodes.
+
+  numa=fake=<N>
+    If given as an integer, fills all system RAM with N fake nodes
+    interleaved over physical nodes.
+
+  numa=fake=<N>U
+    If given as an integer followed by 'U', it will divide each
+    physical node into N emulated nodes.
+
+ACPI
+====
+
+  acpi=off
+    Don't enable ACPI
+  acpi=ht
+    Use ACPI boot table parsing, but don't enable ACPI interpreter
+  acpi=force
+    Force ACPI on (currently not needed)
+  acpi=strict
+    Disable out of spec ACPI workarounds.
+  acpi_sci={edge,level,high,low}
+    Set up ACPI SCI interrupt.
+  acpi=noirq
+    Don't route interrupts
+  acpi=nocmcff
+    Disable firmware first mode for corrected errors. This
+    disables parsing the HEST CMC error source to check if
+    firmware has set the FF flag. This may result in
+    duplicate corrected error reports.
+
+PCI
+===
+
+  pci=off
+    Don't use PCI
+  pci=conf1
+    Use conf1 access.
+  pci=conf2
+    Use conf2 access.
+  pci=rom
+    Assign ROMs.
+  pci=assign-busses
+    Assign busses
+  pci=irqmask=MASK
+    Set PCI interrupt mask to MASK
+  pci=lastbus=NUMBER
+    Scan up to NUMBER busses, no matter what the mptable says.
+  pci=noacpi
+    Don't use ACPI to set up PCI interrupt routing.
+
+IOMMU (input/output memory management unit)
+===========================================
+Multiple x86-64 PCI-DMA mapping implementations exist, for example:
+
+   1. <lib/dma-direct.c>: use no hardware/software IOMMU at all
+      (e.g. because you have < 3 GB memory).
+      Kernel boot message: "PCI-DMA: Disabling IOMMU"
+
+   2. <arch/x86/kernel/amd_gart_64.c>: AMD GART based hardware IOMMU.
+      Kernel boot message: "PCI-DMA: using GART IOMMU"
+
+   3. <arch/x86_64/kernel/pci-swiotlb.c> : Software IOMMU implementation. Used
+      e.g. if there is no hardware IOMMU in the system and it is need because
+      you have >3GB memory or told the kernel to us it (iommu=soft))
+      Kernel boot message: "PCI-DMA: Using software bounce buffering
+      for IO (SWIOTLB)"
+
+   4. <arch/x86_64/pci-calgary.c> : IBM Calgary hardware IOMMU. Used in IBM
+      pSeries and xSeries servers. This hardware IOMMU supports DMA address
+      mapping with memory protection, etc.
+      Kernel boot message: "PCI-DMA: Using Calgary IOMMU"
+
+::
+
+  iommu=[<size>][,noagp][,off][,force][,noforce]
+  [,memaper[=<order>]][,merge][,fullflush][,nomerge]
+  [,noaperture][,calgary]
+
+General iommu options:
+
+    off
+      Don't initialize and use any kind of IOMMU.
+    noforce
+      Don't force hardware IOMMU usage when it is not needed. (default).
+    force
+      Force the use of the hardware IOMMU even when it is
+      not actually needed (e.g. because < 3 GB memory).
+    soft
+      Use software bounce buffering (SWIOTLB) (default for
+      Intel machines). This can be used to prevent the usage
+      of an available hardware IOMMU.
+
+iommu options only relevant to the AMD GART hardware IOMMU:
+
+    <size>
+      Set the size of the remapping area in bytes.
+    allowed
+      Overwrite iommu off workarounds for specific chipsets.
+    fullflush
+      Flush IOMMU on each allocation (default).
+    nofullflush
+      Don't use IOMMU fullflush.
+    memaper[=<order>]
+      Allocate an own aperture over RAM with size 32MB<<order.
+      (default: order=1, i.e. 64MB)
+    merge
+      Do scatter-gather (SG) merging. Implies "force" (experimental).
+    nomerge
+      Don't do scatter-gather (SG) merging.
+    noaperture
+      Ask the IOMMU not to touch the aperture for AGP.
+    noagp
+      Don't initialize the AGP driver and use full aperture.
+    panic
+      Always panic when IOMMU overflows.
+    calgary
+      Use the Calgary IOMMU if it is available
+
+iommu options only relevant to the software bounce buffering (SWIOTLB) IOMMU
+implementation:
+
+    swiotlb=<pages>[,force]
+      <pages>
+        Prereserve that many 128K pages for the software IO bounce buffering.
+      force
+        Force all IO through the software TLB.
+
+Settings for the IBM Calgary hardware IOMMU currently found in IBM
+pSeries and xSeries machines
+
+    calgary=[64k,128k,256k,512k,1M,2M,4M,8M]
+      Set the size of each PCI slot's translation table when using the
+      Calgary IOMMU. This is the size of the translation table itself
+      in main memory. The smallest table, 64k, covers an IO space of
+      32MB; the largest, 8MB table, can cover an IO space of 4GB.
+      Normally the kernel will make the right choice by itself.
+    calgary=[translate_empty_slots]
+      Enable translation even on slots that have no devices attached to
+      them, in case a device will be hotplugged in the future.
+    calgary=[disable=<PCI bus number>]
+      Disable translation on a given PHB. For
+      example, the built-in graphics adapter resides on the first bridge
+      (PCI bus number 0); if translation (isolation) is enabled on this
+      bridge, X servers that access the hardware directly from user
+      space might stop working. Use this option if you have devices that
+      are accessed from userspace directly on some PCI host bridge.
+    panic
+      Always panic when IOMMU overflows
+
+
+Miscellaneous
+=============
+
+  nogbpages
+    Do not use GB pages for kernel direct mappings.
+  gbpages
+    Use GB pages for kernel direct mappings.
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index abc53886655e..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,278 +0,0 @@
-AMD64 specific boot options
-
-There are many others (usually documented in driver documentation), but
-only the AMD64 specific ones are listed here.
-
-Machine check
-
-   Please see Documentation/x86/x86_64/machinecheck for sysfs runtime tunables.
-
-   mce=off
-		Disable machine check
-   mce=no_cmci
-		Disable CMCI(Corrected Machine Check Interrupt) that
-		Intel processor supports.  Usually this disablement is
-		not recommended, but it might be handy if your hardware
-		is misbehaving.
-		Note that you'll get more problems without CMCI than with
-		due to the shared banks, i.e. you might get duplicated
-		error logs.
-   mce=dont_log_ce
-		Don't make logs for corrected errors.  All events reported
-		as corrected are silently cleared by OS.
-		This option will be useful if you have no interest in any
-		of corrected errors.
-   mce=ignore_ce
-		Disable features for corrected errors, e.g. polling timer
-		and CMCI.  All events reported as corrected are not cleared
-		by OS and remained in its error banks.
-		Usually this disablement is not recommended, however if
-		there is an agent checking/clearing corrected errors
-		(e.g. BIOS or hardware monitoring applications), conflicting
-		with OS's error handling, and you cannot deactivate the agent,
-		then this option will be a help.
-   mce=no_lmce
-		Do not opt-in to Local MCE delivery. Use legacy method
-		to broadcast MCEs.
-   mce=bootlog
-		Enable logging of machine checks left over from booting.
-		Disabled by default on AMD Fam10h and older because some BIOS
-		leave bogus ones.
-		If your BIOS doesn't do that it's a good idea to enable though
-		to make sure you log even machine check events that result
-		in a reboot. On Intel systems it is enabled by default.
-   mce=nobootlog
-		Disable boot machine check logging.
-   mce=tolerancelevel[,monarchtimeout] (number,number)
-		tolerance levels:
-		0: always panic on uncorrected errors, log corrected errors
-		1: panic or SIGBUS on uncorrected errors, log corrected errors
-		2: SIGBUS or log uncorrected errors, log corrected errors
-		3: never panic or SIGBUS, log all errors (for testing only)
-		Default is 1
-		Can be also set using sysfs which is preferable.
-		monarchtimeout:
-		Sets the time in us to wait for other CPUs on machine checks. 0
-		to disable.
-   mce=bios_cmci_threshold
-		Don't overwrite the bios-set CMCI threshold. This boot option
-		prevents Linux from overwriting the CMCI threshold set by the
-		bios. Without this option, Linux always sets the CMCI
-		threshold to 1. Enabling this may make memory predictive failure
-		analysis less effective if the bios sets thresholds for memory
-		errors since we will not see details for all errors.
-   mce=recovery
-		Force-enable recoverable machine check code paths
-
-   nomce (for compatibility with i386): same as mce=off
-
-   Everything else is in sysfs now.
-
-APICs
-
-   apic		 Use IO-APIC. Default
-
-   noapic	 Don't use the IO-APIC.
-
-   disableapic	 Don't use the local APIC
-
-   nolapic	 Don't use the local APIC (alias for i386 compatibility)
-
-   pirq=...	 See Documentation/x86/i386/IO-APIC.txt
-
-   noapictimer	 Don't set up the APIC timer
-
-   no_timer_check Don't check the IO-APIC timer. This can work around
-		 problems with incorrect timer initialization on some boards.
-   apicpmtimer
-		 Do APIC timer calibration using the pmtimer. Implies
-		 apicmaintimer. Useful when your PIT timer is totally
-		 broken.
-
-Timing
-
-  notsc
-  Deprecated, use tsc=unstable instead.
-
-  nohpet
-  Don't use the HPET timer.
-
-Idle loop
-
-  idle=poll
-  Don't do power saving in the idle loop using HLT, but poll for rescheduling
-  event. This will make the CPUs eat a lot more power, but may be useful
-  to get slightly better performance in multiprocessor benchmarks. It also
-  makes some profiling using performance counters more accurate.
-  Please note that on systems with MONITOR/MWAIT support (like Intel EM64T
-  CPUs) this option has no performance advantage over the normal idle loop.
-  It may also interact badly with hyperthreading.
-
-Rebooting
-
-   reboot=b[ios] | t[riple] | k[bd] | a[cpi] | e[fi] [, [w]arm | [c]old]
-   bios	  Use the CPU reboot vector for warm reset
-   warm   Don't set the cold reboot flag
-   cold   Set the cold reboot flag
-   triple Force a triple fault (init)
-   kbd    Use the keyboard controller. cold reset (default)
-   acpi   Use the ACPI RESET_REG in the FADT. If ACPI is not configured or the
-          ACPI reset does not work, the reboot path attempts the reset using
-          the keyboard controller.
-   efi    Use efi reset_system runtime service. If EFI is not configured or the
-          EFI reset does not work, the reboot path attempts the reset using
-          the keyboard controller.
-
-   Using warm reset will be much faster especially on big memory
-   systems because the BIOS will not go through the memory check.
-   Disadvantage is that not all hardware will be completely reinitialized
-   on reboot so there may be boot problems on some systems.
-
-   reboot=force
-
-   Don't stop other CPUs on reboot. This can make reboot more reliable
-   in some cases.
-
-Non Executable Mappings
-
-  noexec=on|off
-
-  on      Enable(default)
-  off     Disable
-
-NUMA
-
-  numa=off	Only set up a single NUMA node spanning all memory.
-
-  numa=noacpi   Don't parse the SRAT table for NUMA setup
-
-  numa=fake=<size>[MG]
-		If given as a memory unit, fills all system RAM with nodes of
-		size interleaved over physical nodes.
-
-  numa=fake=<N>
-		If given as an integer, fills all system RAM with N fake nodes
-		interleaved over physical nodes.
-
-  numa=fake=<N>U
-		If given as an integer followed by 'U', it will divide each
-		physical node into N emulated nodes.
-
-ACPI
-
-  acpi=off	Don't enable ACPI
-  acpi=ht	Use ACPI boot table parsing, but don't enable ACPI
-		interpreter
-  acpi=force	Force ACPI on (currently not needed)
-
-  acpi=strict   Disable out of spec ACPI workarounds.
-
-  acpi_sci={edge,level,high,low}  Set up ACPI SCI interrupt.
-
-  acpi=noirq	Don't route interrupts
-
-  acpi=nocmcff	Disable firmware first mode for corrected errors. This
-		disables parsing the HEST CMC error source to check if
-		firmware has set the FF flag. This may result in
-		duplicate corrected error reports.
-
-PCI
-
-  pci=off		Don't use PCI
-  pci=conf1		Use conf1 access.
-  pci=conf2		Use conf2 access.
-  pci=rom		Assign ROMs.
-  pci=assign-busses	Assign busses
-  pci=irqmask=MASK	Set PCI interrupt mask to MASK
-  pci=lastbus=NUMBER	Scan up to NUMBER busses, no matter what the mptable says.
-  pci=noacpi		Don't use ACPI to set up PCI interrupt routing.
-
-IOMMU (input/output memory management unit)
-
- Multiple x86-64 PCI-DMA mapping implementations exist, for example:
-
-   1. <lib/dma-direct.c>: use no hardware/software IOMMU at all
-      (e.g. because you have < 3 GB memory).
-      Kernel boot message: "PCI-DMA: Disabling IOMMU"
-
-   2. <arch/x86/kernel/amd_gart_64.c>: AMD GART based hardware IOMMU.
-      Kernel boot message: "PCI-DMA: using GART IOMMU"
-
-   3. <arch/x86_64/kernel/pci-swiotlb.c> : Software IOMMU implementation. Used
-      e.g. if there is no hardware IOMMU in the system and it is need because
-      you have >3GB memory or told the kernel to us it (iommu=soft))
-      Kernel boot message: "PCI-DMA: Using software bounce buffering
-      for IO (SWIOTLB)"
-
-   4. <arch/x86_64/pci-calgary.c> : IBM Calgary hardware IOMMU. Used in IBM
-      pSeries and xSeries servers. This hardware IOMMU supports DMA address
-      mapping with memory protection, etc.
-      Kernel boot message: "PCI-DMA: Using Calgary IOMMU"
-
- iommu=[<size>][,noagp][,off][,force][,noforce]
-	[,memaper[=<order>]][,merge][,fullflush][,nomerge]
-	[,noaperture][,calgary]
-
-  General iommu options:
-    off                Don't initialize and use any kind of IOMMU.
-    noforce            Don't force hardware IOMMU usage when it is not needed.
-                       (default).
-    force              Force the use of the hardware IOMMU even when it is
-                       not actually needed (e.g. because < 3 GB memory).
-    soft               Use software bounce buffering (SWIOTLB) (default for
-                       Intel machines). This can be used to prevent the usage
-                       of an available hardware IOMMU.
-
-  iommu options only relevant to the AMD GART hardware IOMMU:
-    <size>             Set the size of the remapping area in bytes.
-    allowed            Overwrite iommu off workarounds for specific chipsets.
-    fullflush          Flush IOMMU on each allocation (default).
-    nofullflush        Don't use IOMMU fullflush.
-    memaper[=<order>]  Allocate an own aperture over RAM with size 32MB<<order.
-                       (default: order=1, i.e. 64MB)
-    merge              Do scatter-gather (SG) merging. Implies "force"
-                       (experimental).
-    nomerge            Don't do scatter-gather (SG) merging.
-    noaperture         Ask the IOMMU not to touch the aperture for AGP.
-    noagp              Don't initialize the AGP driver and use full aperture.
-    panic              Always panic when IOMMU overflows.
-    calgary            Use the Calgary IOMMU if it is available
-
-  iommu options only relevant to the software bounce buffering (SWIOTLB) IOMMU
-  implementation:
-    swiotlb=<pages>[,force]
-    <pages>            Prereserve that many 128K pages for the software IO
-                       bounce buffering.
-    force              Force all IO through the software TLB.
-
-  Settings for the IBM Calgary hardware IOMMU currently found in IBM
-  pSeries and xSeries machines:
-
-    calgary=[64k,128k,256k,512k,1M,2M,4M,8M]
-    calgary=[translate_empty_slots]
-    calgary=[disable=<PCI bus number>]
-    panic              Always panic when IOMMU overflows
-
-    64k,...,8M - Set the size of each PCI slot's translation table
-    when using the Calgary IOMMU. This is the size of the translation
-    table itself in main memory. The smallest table, 64k, covers an IO
-    space of 32MB; the largest, 8MB table, can cover an IO space of
-    4GB. Normally the kernel will make the right choice by itself.
-
-    translate_empty_slots - Enable translation even on slots that have
-    no devices attached to them, in case a device will be hotplugged
-    in the future.
-
-    disable=<PCI bus number> - Disable translation on a given PHB. For
-    example, the built-in graphics adapter resides on the first bridge
-    (PCI bus number 0); if translation (isolation) is enabled on this
-    bridge, X servers that access the hardware directly from user
-    space might stop working. Use this option if you have devices that
-    are accessed from userspace directly on some PCI host bridge.
-
-Miscellaneous
-
-	nogbpages
-		Do not use GB pages for kernel direct mappings.
-	gbpages
-		Use GB pages for kernel direct mappings.
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/cpu-hotplug-spec b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/cpu-hotplug-spec.rst
index 3c23e0587db3..8d1c91f0c880 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/cpu-hotplug-spec
+++ b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/cpu-hotplug-spec.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,8 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+===================================================
 Firmware support for CPU hotplug under Linux/x86-64
----------------------------------------------------
+===================================================
 
 Linux/x86-64 supports CPU hotplug now. For various reasons Linux wants to
 know in advance of boot time the maximum number of CPUs that could be plugged
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/fake-numa-for-cpusets b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/fake-numa-for-cpusets.rst
index 4b09f18831f8..74fbb78b3c67 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/fake-numa-for-cpusets
+++ b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/fake-numa-for-cpusets.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,12 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=====================
+Fake NUMA For CPUSets
+=====================
+
+:Author: David Rientjes <rientjes@cs.washington.edu>
+
 Using numa=fake and CPUSets for Resource Management
-Written by David Rientjes <rientjes@cs.washington.edu>
 
 This document describes how the numa=fake x86_64 command-line option can be used
 in conjunction with cpusets for coarse memory management.  Using this feature,
@@ -20,7 +27,7 @@ you become more familiar with using this combination for resource control,
 you'll determine a better setup to minimize the number of nodes you have to deal
 with.
 
-A machine may be split as follows with "numa=fake=4*512," as reported by dmesg:
+A machine may be split as follows with "numa=fake=4*512," as reported by dmesg::
 
 	Faking node 0 at 0000000000000000-0000000020000000 (512MB)
 	Faking node 1 at 0000000020000000-0000000040000000 (512MB)
@@ -34,7 +41,7 @@ A machine may be split as follows with "numa=fake=4*512," as reported by dmesg:
 
 Now following the instructions for mounting the cpusets filesystem from
 Documentation/cgroup-v1/cpusets.txt, you can assign fake nodes (i.e. contiguous memory
-address spaces) to individual cpusets:
+address spaces) to individual cpusets::
 
 	[root@xroads /]# mkdir exampleset
 	[root@xroads /]# mount -t cpuset none exampleset
@@ -47,7 +54,7 @@ Now this cpuset, 'ddset', will only allowed access to fake nodes 0 and 1 for
 memory allocations (1G).
 
 You can now assign tasks to these cpusets to limit the memory resources
-available to them according to the fake nodes assigned as mems:
+available to them according to the fake nodes assigned as mems::
 
 	[root@xroads /exampleset/ddset]# echo $$ > tasks
 	[root@xroads /exampleset/ddset]# dd if=/dev/zero of=tmp bs=1024 count=1G
@@ -57,9 +64,13 @@ Notice the difference between the system memory usage as reported by
 /proc/meminfo between the restricted cpuset case above and the unrestricted
 case (i.e. running the same 'dd' command without assigning it to a fake NUMA
 cpuset):
-				Unrestricted	Restricted
-	MemTotal:		3091900 kB	3091900 kB
-	MemFree:		  42113 kB	1513236 kB
+
+	========	============	==========
+	Name		Unrestricted	Restricted
+	========	============	==========
+	MemTotal	3091900 kB	3091900 kB
+	MemFree		42113 kB	1513236 kB
+	========	============	==========
 
 This allows for coarse memory management for the tasks you assign to particular
 cpusets.  Since cpusets can form a hierarchy, you can create some pretty
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/index.rst b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d6eaaa5a35fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+==============
+x86_64 Support
+==============
+
+.. toctree::
+   :maxdepth: 2
+
+   boot-options
+   uefi
+   mm
+   5level-paging
+   fake-numa-for-cpusets
+   cpu-hotplug-spec
+   machinecheck
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/machinecheck b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/machinecheck.rst
index d0648a74fceb..e189168406fa 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/machinecheck
+++ b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/machinecheck.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,8 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
 
-Configurable sysfs parameters for the x86-64 machine check code.
+===============================================================
+Configurable sysfs parameters for the x86-64 machine check code
+===============================================================
 
 Machine checks report internal hardware error conditions detected
 by the CPU. Uncorrected errors typically cause a machine check
@@ -16,14 +19,13 @@ log then mcelog should run to collect and decode machine check entries
 from /dev/mcelog. Normally mcelog should be run regularly from a cronjob.
 
 Each CPU has a directory in /sys/devices/system/machinecheck/machinecheckN
-(N = CPU number)
+(N = CPU number).
 
 The directory contains some configurable entries:
 
-Entries:
-
 bankNctl
-(N bank number)
+	(N bank number)
+
 	64bit Hex bitmask enabling/disabling specific subevents for bank N
 	When a bit in the bitmask is zero then the respective
 	subevent will not be reported.
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/mm.rst b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/mm.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..267fc4808945
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/mm.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,161 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+================
+Memory Managment
+================
+
+Complete virtual memory map with 4-level page tables
+====================================================
+
+.. note::
+
+ - Negative addresses such as "-23 TB" are absolute addresses in bytes, counted down
+   from the top of the 64-bit address space. It's easier to understand the layout
+   when seen both in absolute addresses and in distance-from-top notation.
+
+   For example 0xffffe90000000000 == -23 TB, it's 23 TB lower than the top of the
+   64-bit address space (ffffffffffffffff).
+
+   Note that as we get closer to the top of the address space, the notation changes
+   from TB to GB and then MB/KB.
+
+ - "16M TB" might look weird at first sight, but it's an easier to visualize size
+   notation than "16 EB", which few will recognize at first sight as 16 exabytes.
+   It also shows it nicely how incredibly large 64-bit address space is.
+
+::
+
+  ========================================================================================================================
+      Start addr    |   Offset   |     End addr     |  Size   | VM area description
+  ========================================================================================================================
+                    |            |                  |         |
+   0000000000000000 |    0       | 00007fffffffffff |  128 TB | user-space virtual memory, different per mm
+  __________________|____________|__________________|_________|___________________________________________________________
+                    |            |                  |         |
+   0000800000000000 | +128    TB | ffff7fffffffffff | ~16M TB | ... huge, almost 64 bits wide hole of non-canonical
+                    |            |                  |         |     virtual memory addresses up to the -128 TB
+                    |            |                  |         |     starting offset of kernel mappings.
+  __________________|____________|__________________|_________|___________________________________________________________
+                                                              |
+                                                              | Kernel-space virtual memory, shared between all processes:
+  ____________________________________________________________|___________________________________________________________
+                    |            |                  |         |
+   ffff800000000000 | -128    TB | ffff87ffffffffff |    8 TB | ... guard hole, also reserved for hypervisor
+   ffff880000000000 | -120    TB | ffff887fffffffff |  0.5 TB | LDT remap for PTI
+   ffff888000000000 | -119.5  TB | ffffc87fffffffff |   64 TB | direct mapping of all physical memory (page_offset_base)
+   ffffc88000000000 |  -55.5  TB | ffffc8ffffffffff |  0.5 TB | ... unused hole
+   ffffc90000000000 |  -55    TB | ffffe8ffffffffff |   32 TB | vmalloc/ioremap space (vmalloc_base)
+   ffffe90000000000 |  -23    TB | ffffe9ffffffffff |    1 TB | ... unused hole
+   ffffea0000000000 |  -22    TB | ffffeaffffffffff |    1 TB | virtual memory map (vmemmap_base)
+   ffffeb0000000000 |  -21    TB | ffffebffffffffff |    1 TB | ... unused hole
+   ffffec0000000000 |  -20    TB | fffffbffffffffff |   16 TB | KASAN shadow memory
+  __________________|____________|__________________|_________|____________________________________________________________
+                                                              |
+                                                              | Identical layout to the 56-bit one from here on:
+  ____________________________________________________________|____________________________________________________________
+                    |            |                  |         |
+   fffffc0000000000 |   -4    TB | fffffdffffffffff |    2 TB | ... unused hole
+                    |            |                  |         | vaddr_end for KASLR
+   fffffe0000000000 |   -2    TB | fffffe7fffffffff |  0.5 TB | cpu_entry_area mapping
+   fffffe8000000000 |   -1.5  TB | fffffeffffffffff |  0.5 TB | ... unused hole
+   ffffff0000000000 |   -1    TB | ffffff7fffffffff |  0.5 TB | %esp fixup stacks
+   ffffff8000000000 | -512    GB | ffffffeeffffffff |  444 GB | ... unused hole
+   ffffffef00000000 |  -68    GB | fffffffeffffffff |   64 GB | EFI region mapping space
+   ffffffff00000000 |   -4    GB | ffffffff7fffffff |    2 GB | ... unused hole
+   ffffffff80000000 |   -2    GB | ffffffff9fffffff |  512 MB | kernel text mapping, mapped to physical address 0
+   ffffffff80000000 |-2048    MB |                  |         |
+   ffffffffa0000000 |-1536    MB | fffffffffeffffff | 1520 MB | module mapping space
+   ffffffffff000000 |  -16    MB |                  |         |
+      FIXADDR_START | ~-11    MB | ffffffffff5fffff | ~0.5 MB | kernel-internal fixmap range, variable size and offset
+   ffffffffff600000 |  -10    MB | ffffffffff600fff |    4 kB | legacy vsyscall ABI
+   ffffffffffe00000 |   -2    MB | ffffffffffffffff |    2 MB | ... unused hole
+  __________________|____________|__________________|_________|___________________________________________________________
+
+
+Complete virtual memory map with 5-level page tables
+====================================================
+
+.. note::
+
+ - With 56-bit addresses, user-space memory gets expanded by a factor of 512x,
+   from 0.125 PB to 64 PB. All kernel mappings shift down to the -64 PB starting
+   offset and many of the regions expand to support the much larger physical
+   memory supported.
+
+::
+
+  ========================================================================================================================
+      Start addr    |   Offset   |     End addr     |  Size   | VM area description
+  ========================================================================================================================
+                    |            |                  |         |
+   0000000000000000 |    0       | 00ffffffffffffff |   64 PB | user-space virtual memory, different per mm
+  __________________|____________|__________________|_________|___________________________________________________________
+                    |            |                  |         |
+   0100000000000000 |  +64    PB | feffffffffffffff | ~16K PB | ... huge, still almost 64 bits wide hole of non-canonical
+                    |            |                  |         |     virtual memory addresses up to the -64 PB
+                    |            |                  |         |     starting offset of kernel mappings.
+  __________________|____________|__________________|_________|___________________________________________________________
+                                                              |
+                                                              | Kernel-space virtual memory, shared between all processes:
+  ____________________________________________________________|___________________________________________________________
+                    |            |                  |         |
+   ff00000000000000 |  -64    PB | ff0fffffffffffff |    4 PB | ... guard hole, also reserved for hypervisor
+   ff10000000000000 |  -60    PB | ff10ffffffffffff | 0.25 PB | LDT remap for PTI
+   ff11000000000000 |  -59.75 PB | ff90ffffffffffff |   32 PB | direct mapping of all physical memory (page_offset_base)
+   ff91000000000000 |  -27.75 PB | ff9fffffffffffff | 3.75 PB | ... unused hole
+   ffa0000000000000 |  -24    PB | ffd1ffffffffffff | 12.5 PB | vmalloc/ioremap space (vmalloc_base)
+   ffd2000000000000 |  -11.5  PB | ffd3ffffffffffff |  0.5 PB | ... unused hole
+   ffd4000000000000 |  -11    PB | ffd5ffffffffffff |  0.5 PB | virtual memory map (vmemmap_base)
+   ffd6000000000000 |  -10.5  PB | ffdeffffffffffff | 2.25 PB | ... unused hole
+   ffdf000000000000 |   -8.25 PB | fffffbffffffffff |   ~8 PB | KASAN shadow memory
+  __________________|____________|__________________|_________|____________________________________________________________
+                                                              |
+                                                              | Identical layout to the 47-bit one from here on:
+  ____________________________________________________________|____________________________________________________________
+                    |            |                  |         |
+   fffffc0000000000 |   -4    TB | fffffdffffffffff |    2 TB | ... unused hole
+                    |            |                  |         | vaddr_end for KASLR
+   fffffe0000000000 |   -2    TB | fffffe7fffffffff |  0.5 TB | cpu_entry_area mapping
+   fffffe8000000000 |   -1.5  TB | fffffeffffffffff |  0.5 TB | ... unused hole
+   ffffff0000000000 |   -1    TB | ffffff7fffffffff |  0.5 TB | %esp fixup stacks
+   ffffff8000000000 | -512    GB | ffffffeeffffffff |  444 GB | ... unused hole
+   ffffffef00000000 |  -68    GB | fffffffeffffffff |   64 GB | EFI region mapping space
+   ffffffff00000000 |   -4    GB | ffffffff7fffffff |    2 GB | ... unused hole
+   ffffffff80000000 |   -2    GB | ffffffff9fffffff |  512 MB | kernel text mapping, mapped to physical address 0
+   ffffffff80000000 |-2048    MB |                  |         |
+   ffffffffa0000000 |-1536    MB | fffffffffeffffff | 1520 MB | module mapping space
+   ffffffffff000000 |  -16    MB |                  |         |
+      FIXADDR_START | ~-11    MB | ffffffffff5fffff | ~0.5 MB | kernel-internal fixmap range, variable size and offset
+   ffffffffff600000 |  -10    MB | ffffffffff600fff |    4 kB | legacy vsyscall ABI
+   ffffffffffe00000 |   -2    MB | ffffffffffffffff |    2 MB | ... unused hole
+  __________________|____________|__________________|_________|___________________________________________________________
+
+Architecture defines a 64-bit virtual address. Implementations can support
+less. Currently supported are 48- and 57-bit virtual addresses. Bits 63
+through to the most-significant implemented bit are sign extended.
+This causes hole between user space and kernel addresses if you interpret them
+as unsigned.
+
+The direct mapping covers all memory in the system up to the highest
+memory address (this means in some cases it can also include PCI memory
+holes).
+
+vmalloc space is lazily synchronized into the different PML4/PML5 pages of
+the processes using the page fault handler, with init_top_pgt as
+reference.
+
+We map EFI runtime services in the 'efi_pgd' PGD in a 64Gb large virtual
+memory window (this size is arbitrary, it can be raised later if needed).
+The mappings are not part of any other kernel PGD and are only available
+during EFI runtime calls.
+
+Note that if CONFIG_RANDOMIZE_MEMORY is enabled, the direct mapping of all
+physical memory, vmalloc/ioremap space and virtual memory map are randomized.
+Their order is preserved but their base will be offset early at boot time.
+
+Be very careful vs. KASLR when changing anything here. The KASLR address
+range must not overlap with anything except the KASAN shadow area, which is
+correct as KASAN disables KASLR.
+
+For both 4- and 5-level layouts, the STACKLEAK_POISON value in the last 2MB
+hole: ffffffffffff4111
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/mm.txt b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/mm.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 804f9426ed17..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/mm.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,153 +0,0 @@
-====================================================
-Complete virtual memory map with 4-level page tables
-====================================================
-
-Notes:
-
- - Negative addresses such as "-23 TB" are absolute addresses in bytes, counted down
-   from the top of the 64-bit address space. It's easier to understand the layout
-   when seen both in absolute addresses and in distance-from-top notation.
-
-   For example 0xffffe90000000000 == -23 TB, it's 23 TB lower than the top of the
-   64-bit address space (ffffffffffffffff).
-
-   Note that as we get closer to the top of the address space, the notation changes
-   from TB to GB and then MB/KB.
-
- - "16M TB" might look weird at first sight, but it's an easier to visualize size
-   notation than "16 EB", which few will recognize at first sight as 16 exabytes.
-   It also shows it nicely how incredibly large 64-bit address space is.
-
-========================================================================================================================
-    Start addr    |   Offset   |     End addr     |  Size   | VM area description
-========================================================================================================================
-                  |            |                  |         |
- 0000000000000000 |    0       | 00007fffffffffff |  128 TB | user-space virtual memory, different per mm
-__________________|____________|__________________|_________|___________________________________________________________
-                  |            |                  |         |
- 0000800000000000 | +128    TB | ffff7fffffffffff | ~16M TB | ... huge, almost 64 bits wide hole of non-canonical
-                  |            |                  |         |     virtual memory addresses up to the -128 TB
-                  |            |                  |         |     starting offset of kernel mappings.
-__________________|____________|__________________|_________|___________________________________________________________
-                                                            |
-                                                            | Kernel-space virtual memory, shared between all processes:
-____________________________________________________________|___________________________________________________________
-                  |            |                  |         |
- ffff800000000000 | -128    TB | ffff87ffffffffff |    8 TB | ... guard hole, also reserved for hypervisor
- ffff880000000000 | -120    TB | ffff887fffffffff |  0.5 TB | LDT remap for PTI
- ffff888000000000 | -119.5  TB | ffffc87fffffffff |   64 TB | direct mapping of all physical memory (page_offset_base)
- ffffc88000000000 |  -55.5  TB | ffffc8ffffffffff |  0.5 TB | ... unused hole
- ffffc90000000000 |  -55    TB | ffffe8ffffffffff |   32 TB | vmalloc/ioremap space (vmalloc_base)
- ffffe90000000000 |  -23    TB | ffffe9ffffffffff |    1 TB | ... unused hole
- ffffea0000000000 |  -22    TB | ffffeaffffffffff |    1 TB | virtual memory map (vmemmap_base)
- ffffeb0000000000 |  -21    TB | ffffebffffffffff |    1 TB | ... unused hole
- ffffec0000000000 |  -20    TB | fffffbffffffffff |   16 TB | KASAN shadow memory
-__________________|____________|__________________|_________|____________________________________________________________
-                                                            |
-                                                            | Identical layout to the 56-bit one from here on:
-____________________________________________________________|____________________________________________________________
-                  |            |                  |         |
- fffffc0000000000 |   -4    TB | fffffdffffffffff |    2 TB | ... unused hole
-                  |            |                  |         | vaddr_end for KASLR
- fffffe0000000000 |   -2    TB | fffffe7fffffffff |  0.5 TB | cpu_entry_area mapping
- fffffe8000000000 |   -1.5  TB | fffffeffffffffff |  0.5 TB | ... unused hole
- ffffff0000000000 |   -1    TB | ffffff7fffffffff |  0.5 TB | %esp fixup stacks
- ffffff8000000000 | -512    GB | ffffffeeffffffff |  444 GB | ... unused hole
- ffffffef00000000 |  -68    GB | fffffffeffffffff |   64 GB | EFI region mapping space
- ffffffff00000000 |   -4    GB | ffffffff7fffffff |    2 GB | ... unused hole
- ffffffff80000000 |   -2    GB | ffffffff9fffffff |  512 MB | kernel text mapping, mapped to physical address 0
- ffffffff80000000 |-2048    MB |                  |         |
- ffffffffa0000000 |-1536    MB | fffffffffeffffff | 1520 MB | module mapping space
- ffffffffff000000 |  -16    MB |                  |         |
-    FIXADDR_START | ~-11    MB | ffffffffff5fffff | ~0.5 MB | kernel-internal fixmap range, variable size and offset
- ffffffffff600000 |  -10    MB | ffffffffff600fff |    4 kB | legacy vsyscall ABI
- ffffffffffe00000 |   -2    MB | ffffffffffffffff |    2 MB | ... unused hole
-__________________|____________|__________________|_________|___________________________________________________________
-
-
-====================================================
-Complete virtual memory map with 5-level page tables
-====================================================
-
-Notes:
-
- - With 56-bit addresses, user-space memory gets expanded by a factor of 512x,
-   from 0.125 PB to 64 PB. All kernel mappings shift down to the -64 PT starting
-   offset and many of the regions expand to support the much larger physical
-   memory supported.
-
-========================================================================================================================
-    Start addr    |   Offset   |     End addr     |  Size   | VM area description
-========================================================================================================================
-                  |            |                  |         |
- 0000000000000000 |    0       | 00ffffffffffffff |   64 PB | user-space virtual memory, different per mm
-__________________|____________|__________________|_________|___________________________________________________________
-                  |            |                  |         |
- 0000800000000000 |  +64    PB | ffff7fffffffffff | ~16K PB | ... huge, still almost 64 bits wide hole of non-canonical
-                  |            |                  |         |     virtual memory addresses up to the -64 PB
-                  |            |                  |         |     starting offset of kernel mappings.
-__________________|____________|__________________|_________|___________________________________________________________
-                                                            |
-                                                            | Kernel-space virtual memory, shared between all processes:
-____________________________________________________________|___________________________________________________________
-                  |            |                  |         |
- ff00000000000000 |  -64    PB | ff0fffffffffffff |    4 PB | ... guard hole, also reserved for hypervisor
- ff10000000000000 |  -60    PB | ff10ffffffffffff | 0.25 PB | LDT remap for PTI
- ff11000000000000 |  -59.75 PB | ff90ffffffffffff |   32 PB | direct mapping of all physical memory (page_offset_base)
- ff91000000000000 |  -27.75 PB | ff9fffffffffffff | 3.75 PB | ... unused hole
- ffa0000000000000 |  -24    PB | ffd1ffffffffffff | 12.5 PB | vmalloc/ioremap space (vmalloc_base)
- ffd2000000000000 |  -11.5  PB | ffd3ffffffffffff |  0.5 PB | ... unused hole
- ffd4000000000000 |  -11    PB | ffd5ffffffffffff |  0.5 PB | virtual memory map (vmemmap_base)
- ffd6000000000000 |  -10.5  PB | ffdeffffffffffff | 2.25 PB | ... unused hole
- ffdf000000000000 |   -8.25 PB | fffffdffffffffff |   ~8 PB | KASAN shadow memory
-__________________|____________|__________________|_________|____________________________________________________________
-                                                            |
-                                                            | Identical layout to the 47-bit one from here on:
-____________________________________________________________|____________________________________________________________
-                  |            |                  |         |
- fffffc0000000000 |   -4    TB | fffffdffffffffff |    2 TB | ... unused hole
-                  |            |                  |         | vaddr_end for KASLR
- fffffe0000000000 |   -2    TB | fffffe7fffffffff |  0.5 TB | cpu_entry_area mapping
- fffffe8000000000 |   -1.5  TB | fffffeffffffffff |  0.5 TB | ... unused hole
- ffffff0000000000 |   -1    TB | ffffff7fffffffff |  0.5 TB | %esp fixup stacks
- ffffff8000000000 | -512    GB | ffffffeeffffffff |  444 GB | ... unused hole
- ffffffef00000000 |  -68    GB | fffffffeffffffff |   64 GB | EFI region mapping space
- ffffffff00000000 |   -4    GB | ffffffff7fffffff |    2 GB | ... unused hole
- ffffffff80000000 |   -2    GB | ffffffff9fffffff |  512 MB | kernel text mapping, mapped to physical address 0
- ffffffff80000000 |-2048    MB |                  |         |
- ffffffffa0000000 |-1536    MB | fffffffffeffffff | 1520 MB | module mapping space
- ffffffffff000000 |  -16    MB |                  |         |
-    FIXADDR_START | ~-11    MB | ffffffffff5fffff | ~0.5 MB | kernel-internal fixmap range, variable size and offset
- ffffffffff600000 |  -10    MB | ffffffffff600fff |    4 kB | legacy vsyscall ABI
- ffffffffffe00000 |   -2    MB | ffffffffffffffff |    2 MB | ... unused hole
-__________________|____________|__________________|_________|___________________________________________________________
-
-Architecture defines a 64-bit virtual address. Implementations can support
-less. Currently supported are 48- and 57-bit virtual addresses. Bits 63
-through to the most-significant implemented bit are sign extended.
-This causes hole between user space and kernel addresses if you interpret them
-as unsigned.
-
-The direct mapping covers all memory in the system up to the highest
-memory address (this means in some cases it can also include PCI memory
-holes).
-
-vmalloc space is lazily synchronized into the different PML4/PML5 pages of
-the processes using the page fault handler, with init_top_pgt as
-reference.
-
-We map EFI runtime services in the 'efi_pgd' PGD in a 64Gb large virtual
-memory window (this size is arbitrary, it can be raised later if needed).
-The mappings are not part of any other kernel PGD and are only available
-during EFI runtime calls.
-
-Note that if CONFIG_RANDOMIZE_MEMORY is enabled, the direct mapping of all
-physical memory, vmalloc/ioremap space and virtual memory map are randomized.
-Their order is preserved but their base will be offset early at boot time.
-
-Be very careful vs. KASLR when changing anything here. The KASLR address
-range must not overlap with anything except the KASAN shadow area, which is
-correct as KASAN disables KASLR.
-
-For both 4- and 5-level layouts, the STACKLEAK_POISON value in the last 2MB
-hole: ffffffffffff4111
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/uefi.txt b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/uefi.rst
index a5e2b4fdb170..88c3ba32546f 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/uefi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/uefi.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,8 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=====================================
 General note on [U]EFI x86_64 support
--------------------------------------
+=====================================
 
 The nomenclature EFI and UEFI are used interchangeably in this document.
 
@@ -14,29 +17,42 @@ with EFI firmware and specifications are listed below.
 
 3. x86_64 platform with EFI/UEFI firmware.
 
-Mechanics:
+Mechanics
 ---------
-- Build the kernel with the following configuration.
+
+- Build the kernel with the following configuration::
+
 	CONFIG_FB_EFI=y
 	CONFIG_FRAMEBUFFER_CONSOLE=y
+
   If EFI runtime services are expected, the following configuration should
-  be selected.
+  be selected::
+
 	CONFIG_EFI=y
 	CONFIG_EFI_VARS=y or m		# optional
+
 - Create a VFAT partition on the disk
 - Copy the following to the VFAT partition:
+
 	elilo bootloader with x86_64 support, elilo configuration file,
 	kernel image built in first step and corresponding
 	initrd. Instructions on building elilo	and its dependencies
 	can be found in the elilo sourceforge project.
+
 - Boot to EFI shell and invoke elilo choosing the kernel image built
   in first step.
 - If some or all EFI runtime services don't work, you can try following
   kernel command line parameters to turn off some or all EFI runtime
   services.
-	noefi		turn off all EFI runtime services
-	reboot_type=k	turn off EFI reboot runtime service
+
+	noefi
+		turn off all EFI runtime services
+	reboot_type=k
+		turn off EFI reboot runtime service
+
 - If the EFI memory map has additional entries not in the E820 map,
   you can include those entries in the kernels memory map of available
   physical RAM by using the following kernel command line parameter.
-	add_efi_memmap	include EFI memory map of available physical RAM
+
+	add_efi_memmap
+		include EFI memory map of available physical RAM
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/zero-page.rst b/Documentation/x86/zero-page.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f088f5881666
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/x86/zero-page.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=========
+Zero Page
+=========
+The additional fields in struct boot_params as a part of 32-bit boot
+protocol of kernel. These should be filled by bootloader or 16-bit
+real-mode setup code of the kernel. References/settings to it mainly
+are in::
+
+  arch/x86/include/uapi/asm/bootparam.h
+
+===========	=====	=======================	=================================================
+Offset/Size	Proto	Name			Meaning
+
+000/040		ALL	screen_info		Text mode or frame buffer information
+						(struct screen_info)
+040/014		ALL	apm_bios_info		APM BIOS information (struct apm_bios_info)
+058/008		ALL	tboot_addr      	Physical address of tboot shared page
+060/010		ALL	ist_info		Intel SpeedStep (IST) BIOS support information
+						(struct ist_info)
+080/010		ALL	hd0_info		hd0 disk parameter, OBSOLETE!!
+090/010		ALL	hd1_info		hd1 disk parameter, OBSOLETE!!
+0A0/010		ALL	sys_desc_table		System description table (struct sys_desc_table),
+						OBSOLETE!!
+0B0/010		ALL	olpc_ofw_header		OLPC's OpenFirmware CIF and friends
+0C0/004		ALL	ext_ramdisk_image	ramdisk_image high 32bits
+0C4/004		ALL	ext_ramdisk_size	ramdisk_size high 32bits
+0C8/004		ALL	ext_cmd_line_ptr	cmd_line_ptr high 32bits
+140/080		ALL	edid_info		Video mode setup (struct edid_info)
+1C0/020		ALL	efi_info		EFI 32 information (struct efi_info)
+1E0/004		ALL	alt_mem_k		Alternative mem check, in KB
+1E4/004		ALL	scratch			Scratch field for the kernel setup code
+1E8/001		ALL	e820_entries		Number of entries in e820_table (below)
+1E9/001		ALL	eddbuf_entries		Number of entries in eddbuf (below)
+1EA/001		ALL	edd_mbr_sig_buf_entries	Number of entries in edd_mbr_sig_buffer
+						(below)
+1EB/001		ALL     kbd_status      	Numlock is enabled
+1EC/001		ALL     secure_boot		Secure boot is enabled in the firmware
+1EF/001		ALL	sentinel		Used to detect broken bootloaders
+290/040		ALL	edd_mbr_sig_buffer	EDD MBR signatures
+2D0/A00		ALL	e820_table		E820 memory map table
+						(array of struct e820_entry)
+D00/1EC		ALL	eddbuf			EDD data (array of struct edd_info)
+===========	=====	=======================	=================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt b/Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 68aed077f7b6..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,40 +0,0 @@
-The additional fields in struct boot_params as a part of 32-bit boot
-protocol of kernel. These should be filled by bootloader or 16-bit
-real-mode setup code of the kernel. References/settings to it mainly
-are in:
-
-  arch/x86/include/uapi/asm/bootparam.h
-
-
-Offset	Proto	Name		Meaning
-/Size
-
-000/040	ALL	screen_info	Text mode or frame buffer information
-				(struct screen_info)
-040/014	ALL	apm_bios_info	APM BIOS information (struct apm_bios_info)
-058/008	ALL	tboot_addr      Physical address of tboot shared page
-060/010	ALL	ist_info	Intel SpeedStep (IST) BIOS support information
-				(struct ist_info)
-080/010	ALL	hd0_info	hd0 disk parameter, OBSOLETE!!
-090/010	ALL	hd1_info	hd1 disk parameter, OBSOLETE!!
-0A0/010	ALL	sys_desc_table	System description table (struct sys_desc_table),
-				OBSOLETE!!
-0B0/010	ALL	olpc_ofw_header	OLPC's OpenFirmware CIF and friends
-0C0/004	ALL	ext_ramdisk_image ramdisk_image high 32bits
-0C4/004	ALL	ext_ramdisk_size  ramdisk_size high 32bits
-0C8/004	ALL	ext_cmd_line_ptr  cmd_line_ptr high 32bits
-140/080	ALL	edid_info	Video mode setup (struct edid_info)
-1C0/020	ALL	efi_info	EFI 32 information (struct efi_info)
-1E0/004	ALL	alt_mem_k	Alternative mem check, in KB
-1E4/004	ALL	scratch		Scratch field for the kernel setup code
-1E8/001	ALL	e820_entries	Number of entries in e820_table (below)
-1E9/001	ALL	eddbuf_entries	Number of entries in eddbuf (below)
-1EA/001	ALL	edd_mbr_sig_buf_entries	Number of entries in edd_mbr_sig_buffer
-				(below)
-1EB/001	ALL     kbd_status      Numlock is enabled
-1EC/001	ALL     secure_boot	Secure boot is enabled in the firmware
-1EF/001	ALL	sentinel	Used to detect broken bootloaders
-290/040	ALL	edd_mbr_sig_buffer EDD MBR signatures
-2D0/A00	ALL	e820_table	E820 memory map table
-				(array of struct e820_entry)
-D00/1EC	ALL	eddbuf		EDD data (array of struct edd_info)
diff --git a/Documentation/xilinx/eemi.txt b/Documentation/xilinx/eemi.txt
index 0ab686c173be..5f39b4ffdcd4 100644
--- a/Documentation/xilinx/eemi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/xilinx/eemi.txt
@@ -41,8 +41,8 @@ Example of EEMI ops usage:
 	int ret;
 
 	eemi_ops = zynqmp_pm_get_eemi_ops();
-	if (!eemi_ops)
-		return -ENXIO;
+	if (IS_ERR(eemi_ops))
+		return PTR_ERR(eemi_ops);
 
 	ret = eemi_ops->query_data(qdata, ret_payload);
 
diff --git a/Documentation/xtensa/booting.txt b/Documentation/xtensa/booting.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..402b33a2619f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/xtensa/booting.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+Passing boot parameters to the kernel.
+
+Boot parameters are represented as a TLV list in the memory. Please see
+arch/xtensa/include/asm/bootparam.h for definition of the bp_tag structure and
+tag value constants. First entry in the list must have type BP_TAG_FIRST, last
+entry must have type BP_TAG_LAST. The address of the first list entry is
+passed to the kernel in the register a2. The address type depends on MMU type:
+- For configurations without MMU, with region protection or with MPU the
+  address must be the physical address.
+- For configurations with region translarion MMU or with MMUv3 and CONFIG_MMU=n
+  the address must be a valid address in the current mapping. The kernel will
+  not change the mapping on its own.
+- For configurations with MMUv2 the address must be a virtual address in the
+  default virtual mapping (0xd0000000..0xffffffff).
+- For configurations with MMUv3 and CONFIG_MMU=y the address may be either a
+  virtual or physical address. In either case it must be within the default
+  virtual mapping. It is considered physical if it is within the range of
+  physical addresses covered by the default KSEG mapping (XCHAL_KSEG_PADDR..
+  XCHAL_KSEG_PADDR + XCHAL_KSEG_SIZE), otherwise it is considered virtual.